From 27bf51e44158bced2d9d88ae6f211cc9d0d08359 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Mon, 22 Aug 2022 12:08:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 001/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 42 +++++++++++++++++------------------------- 1 file changed, 17 insertions(+), 25 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index a97d91869e..cb5f6092f8 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -734,31 +734,23 @@ MAT 11 29 i3ls figs-synecdoche εὑρήσετε ἀνάπαυσιν ταῖς MAT 11 30 hlv3 figs-exmetaphor ὁ γὰρ ζυγός μου χρηστὸς καὶ τὸ φορτίον μου ἐλαφρόν ἐστιν 1 You could express this metaphor as a simile if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the demon finds that the person it left is like a house that someone has swept clean and organized by putting everything where it belongs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) Here, Jesus continues the burden metaphor from the previous verses. You could express this metaphor as a simile if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “When I help you, it will be like I am carrying most of the weight of the yoke. I will also be like I am only making you carry a little bit of the burden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) MAT 11 30 ynf1 figs-parallelism ὁ γὰρ ζυγός μου χρηστὸς καὶ τὸ φορτίον μου ἐλαφρόν ἐστιν 1 For my yoke is easy and my burden is light Both of these phrases mean the same thing. Jesus is emphasizing that it is easier to obey him than it is the Jewish law. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “For what I place on you, you will be able to carry because it is light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 12 intro y7z6 0 # Matthew 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:18-21, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Sabbath

This chapter has much to say about how God’s people are to obey the Sabbath. Jesus said that the rules that the Pharisees made up did not help people obey the Sabbath the way God wanted them to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

### “Blasphemy against the Spirit”

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Brothers and sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]]) -MAT 12 1 m2n1 ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 1 At that time This phrase marks a new part of the story where Matthew tells of growing opposition to Jesus’ ministry. Here, the Pharisees criticize his disciples for picking grain on the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “A little later” -MAT 12 1 tvt9 translate-unknown τῶν σπορίμων 1 the grainfields A grainfield is a place to plant grain. If wheat is unknown and “grain” is too general, then you can use “fields of the plant they made bread from.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 12 1 yrf8 τίλλειν στάχυας καὶ ἐσθίειν 1 to pluck heads of grain and to eat them Picking **grain** in others’ fields and eating it was not considered stealing. The question was whether one could do this otherwise lawful activity on the Sabbath. -MAT 12 1 zz4r τίλλειν στάχυας καὶ ἐσθίειν 1 to pluck heads of grain and to eat them Alternate translation: “to pick some of the wheat and to eat it” or “to pick some of the grain and to eat it” -MAT 12 1 y5vr στάχυας 1 heads of grain The **heads** are the topmost part of the wheat plant. They holds the mature grain or seeds of the plant. -MAT 12 2 swl7 ποιοῦσιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν ποιεῖν ἐν Σαββάτῳ 1 do what is not lawful to do on the Sabbath Picking grain in others’ fields and eating it was not considered stealing. The question was whether one could do this otherwise lawful activity **on the Sabbath**. -MAT 12 2 mch7 οἱ…Φαρισαῖοι 1 the Pharisees This does not mean all of **the Pharisees**. Alternate translation: “some Pharisees” -MAT 12 2 nh12 ἰδοὺ, οἱ μαθηταί σου 1 Behold, your disciples The Pharisees use the word **Behold** to draw attention to what the disciples are doing. Alternate translation: “Look, your disciples” -MAT 12 3 et11 αὐτοῖς 1 to them Alternate translation: “to the Pharisees” -MAT 12 3 d712 figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ, ὅτε ἐπείνασεν καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Have you never read what David did, when he was hungry, and those who were with him— This begins a question that continues into the next verse. Jesus uses the question to respond to the criticism of the Pharisees. Jesus is challenging them to think about the meaning of the scriptures they have read. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I know you have read what David did, when he was hungry, and those who were with him—” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 12 4 blm5 τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the house of God During the time of David there was no temple yet. Alternate translation: “the tabernacle” or “the place for worshiping God” -MAT 12 4 ue7l figs-explicit τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως 1 the loaves of the presence This refers to the sacred bread that priests placed before God in the tabernacle. Alternate translation: “the bread that the priest placed before God” or “the sacred bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 12 4 c6a8 τοῖς μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 for those with him Alternate translation: “for the men who were with David” -MAT 12 4 lkx9 εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν μόνοις 1 except only for the priests Alternate translation: “but, according to the law, only the priests could eat it” -MAT 12 5 f79q figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι τοῖς Σάββασιν οἱ ἱερεῖς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ τὸ Σάββατον βεβηλοῦσιν, καὶ ἀναίτιοί εἰσιν? 1 have you not read in the law that on the Sabbaths the priests in the temple profane the Sabbath, but are innocent? Jesus uses a question to respond to the criticism of the Pharisees. Jesus is challenging them to think about the meaning of what they have read in the scriptures. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you have read in the law of Moses that on the Sabbaths the priests in the temple profane the Sabbath, but are innocent.” or “You should know that the law teaches that on the Sabbaths the priests in the temple profane the Sabbath, but are innocent.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 12 5 dqe9 τὸ Σάββατον βεβηλοῦσιν 1 profane the Sabbath Alternate translation: “do on the Sabbath what they would do on any other day” -MAT 12 5 i6y9 ἀναίτιοί εἰσιν 1 are innocent Alternate translation: “God will not punish them” or “God does not consider them guilty” -MAT 12 6 ji7a λέγω…ὑμῖν 1 I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. -MAT 12 6 k4mn figs-123person τοῦ ἱεροῦ μεῖζόν 1 greater than the temple Jesus was referring to himself as the one who is **greater**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) Alternate translation: “I am someone who is more important than the temple” -MAT 12 7 ypj7 figs-explicit εἰ δὲ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν, ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 But if you had known what this is, ‘I desire mercy and not sacrifice,’ you would not have condemned the innocent In this verse, Jesus quotes the prophet Hosea to rebuke the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “The prophet Hosea wrote this long ago: ‘I desire mercy and not sacrifice.’ If you had understood what this meant, you would not have condemned the innocent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 12 7 e1ju ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν 1 I desire mercy and not sacrifice In the law of Moses, God did command the Israelites to offer sacrifices. This means God considers **mercy** more important than the **sacrifice**. -MAT 12 7 jw57 θέλω 1 I desire The pronoun **I** refers to God. -MAT 12 7 s23l figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 the innocent If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **innocent**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “those who are not guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 12 8 l7g3 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 12 8 jx98 Κύριος…ἐστιν τοῦ Σαββάτου 1 is Lord of the Sabbath Alternate translation: “rules over the Sabbath” or “makes the laws about what people can do on the Sabbath” +MAT 12 1 m2n1 writing-newevent ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 1 At that time This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MAT 12 1 tvt9 translate-unknown τῶν σπορίμων 1 the grainfields A grainfield is a place where grain is grown and harvested. This grain is usually turned into bread. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a field where grain is grown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 12 1 y5vr figs-explicit στάχυας 1 heads of grain The heads are the topmost part of the wheat plant, which is a kind of tall grass. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant. The disciples were picking the heads of grain to eat the kernels, or seeds, in them. This can be worded to show the full meaning. If this would be misunderstood in your language, think of a type of food that you have to remove from a shell or casing. Alternate translation: “picking the tops of grain and eating the seeds”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n +MAT 12 2 swl7 figs-explicit ποιοῦσιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν ποιεῖν ἐν Σαββάτῳ 1 do what is not lawful to do on the Sabbath According to the Law of Moses, people are not allowed to work on the Sabbath in order to focus on worshipping God. The Pharisees considered even the small action of plucking and rubbing heads of grain to be harvesting, and therefore work. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are harvesting grain, and that is work that the law does not permit you to do on the Sabbath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 12 3 d712 figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ, ὅτε ἐπείνασεν καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Have you never read what David did, when he was hungry, and those who were with him— This begins a question that continues into the next verse. See the note in the next verse for how to address this rhetorical question. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 12 4 u3ye figs-rquestion πῶς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως ἔφαγεν, ὃ οὐκ ἐξὸν ἦν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν, οὐδὲ τοῖς μετ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν μόνοις 1 Jesus asks this question to respond to the criticism of the Pharisees. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly you have read what David did when he and those with him were hungry, how he went into the God's house and ate the bread of the presence, which they was not allowed to do. Only the priests were allowed to do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 12 4 blm5 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the house of God Jesus is figuratively describing the tabernacle as the house of God. He is speaking as if it were the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “David went into the tabernacle” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +MAT 12 4 ue7l figs-explicit τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως 1 the loaves of the presence This refers to the 12 loaves of bread that were placed on a golden table in the tabernacle or temple building as a sacrifice to God during Old Testament times. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 12 4 lkx9 figs-ellipsis εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν μόνοις 1 except only for the priests Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but it was only lawful for the priests to eat it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 12 5 f79q figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι τοῖς Σάββασιν οἱ ἱερεῖς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ τὸ Σάββατον βεβηλοῦσιν, καὶ ἀναίτιοί εἰσιν? 1 have you not read in the law that on the Sabbaths the priests in the temple profane the Sabbath, but are innocent? Jesus uses a question to respond to the criticism of the Pharisees. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely you have read in the law of Moses that on the Sabbaths the priests in the temple profane the Sabbath, but are innocent.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 12 5 dqe9 figs-explicit τὸ Σάββατον βεβηλοῦσιν 1 profane the Sabbath The priests are said to **profane the Sabbath** because they had to fulfill their priestly duties on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “defile the Sabbath by working their priestly duties” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 12 6 k4mn figs-123person τοῦ ἱεροῦ μεῖζόν 1 greater than the temple Jesus was referring to himself as the one who is **greater than the temple**. Alternate translation: “I am someone who is more important than the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 12 7 ypj7 figs-explicit εἰ δὲ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν, ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 But if you had known what this is, ‘I desire mercy and not sacrifice,’ you would not have condemned the innocent Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Pharisees about why they were wrong for accusing Jesus' disciples of working on the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “Suppose you had understood what the phrase ‘I desire you to have mercy and not to sacrifice’ meant, then you certainly would not have condemned my innocent disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +MAT 12 7 e1ju ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν 1 I desire mercy and not sacrifice In the law of Moses, God did command the Israelites to offer sacrifices. This means that God considers **mercy** more important than the **sacrifice**. This is because, many times, the reason why sacrifice had to happen was because people were disobeying God and not being merciful. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “I would rather you be merciful to others than for you to continually offer sacrifices for your wrongful deeds. +MAT 12 7 s23l figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 the innocent Jesus is using the adjective **innocent** as a noun in order to describe his disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are innocent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 12 8 l7g3 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself as the **Son of Man**. If your readers would not understand this, you can use the first person here to clarify, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 12 8 nca0 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 **Son of Man** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 12 9 i489 0 General Information: Here the scene shifts to a later time when the Pharisees criticize Jesus for healing a man on the Sabbath. MAT 12 9 hns8 καὶ μεταβὰς ἐκεῖθεν 1 And having departed from there Alternate translation: “After Jesus left the grain fields” or “When Jesus left from there” MAT 12 9 y4me τὴν συναγωγὴν αὐτῶν 1 their synagogue The word **their** could refer to: (1) the Jews of that town. Alternate translation: “the synogogue” (2) the Pharisees that Jesus had just spoken to, and this was the synagogue that they and other Jews in that town attended. The word **their** does not mean that the Pharisees owned the synagogue. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that they attended” From c85c2de38503cf51598c642ba38bf3be84630990 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Mon, 22 Aug 2022 17:33:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 002/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 27 ++++++++------------------- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 19 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index cb5f6092f8..b5433db33b 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -751,26 +751,15 @@ MAT 12 7 e1ju ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν 1 I desire mercy MAT 12 7 s23l figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 the innocent Jesus is using the adjective **innocent** as a noun in order to describe his disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are innocent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 12 8 l7g3 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself as the **Son of Man**. If your readers would not understand this, you can use the first person here to clarify, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 12 8 nca0 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 **Son of Man** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 12 9 i489 0 General Information: Here the scene shifts to a later time when the Pharisees criticize Jesus for healing a man on the Sabbath. -MAT 12 9 hns8 καὶ μεταβὰς ἐκεῖθεν 1 And having departed from there Alternate translation: “After Jesus left the grain fields” or “When Jesus left from there” -MAT 12 9 y4me τὴν συναγωγὴν αὐτῶν 1 their synagogue The word **their** could refer to: (1) the Jews of that town. Alternate translation: “the synogogue” (2) the Pharisees that Jesus had just spoken to, and this was the synagogue that they and other Jews in that town attended. The word **their** does not mean that the Pharisees owned the synagogue. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that they attended” -MAT 12 10 kjf6 ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** alerts us to a new person in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this. -MAT 12 10 xb13 ἄνθρωπος χεῖρα ἔχων ξηράν 1 there was a man having a withered hand Alternate translation: “there was a man who had a paralyzed hand” or “there was a man with a crippled hand” -MAT 12 10 t948 ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν λέγοντες, εἰ ἔξεστι τοῖς Σάββασιν θεραπεύειν? ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ 1 they questioned him, saying, “Is it lawful to heal on the Sabbaths?” so that they might accuse him Alternate translation: “the Pharisees wanted to accuse Jesus of sinning, so they asked him, ‘Is it lawful to heal on the Sabbath?’” -MAT 12 10 gdj6 εἰ ἔξεστι τοῖς Σάββασιν θεραπεύειν? 1 Is it lawful to heal on the Sabbaths? Alternate translation: “According to the law of Moses, may a person heal another person on the Sabbaths?” -MAT 12 10 c1cc figs-explicit ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ 1 so that they might accuse him They did not just want to **accuse** Jesus in front of the people. The Pharisees wanted Jesus to give an answer that contradicted the law of Moses so they could take him before a judge and legally charge him with breaking the law. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 12 11 ng4j figs-rquestion τίς ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν ἄνθρωπος, ὃς ἕξει πρόβατον ἕν, καὶ ἐὰν ἐμπέσῃ τοῦτο τοῖς Σάββασιν εἰς βόθυνον, οὐχὶ κρατήσει αὐτὸ καὶ ἐγερεῖ? 1 What man will there be among you, who, will have one sheep, and if it might fall into a pit on the Sabbaths, would not grasp hold of it and lift it out? Jesus uses a question to respond to the Pharisees. He is challenging them to think about what kind of work they do on the Sabbath. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Every one of you, if you only had one sheep, and if it might fall into a pit on the Sabbaths, would grab the sheep and lift it out.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 12 12 s2tu πόσῳ οὖν διαφέρει ἄνθρωπος προβάτου? 1 How much more valuable, then, is a man than a sheep? The phrase **How much more** adds emphasis to the statement. The implied answer is “very much more!” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Obviously, a man is much more valuable than a sheep!” or “Just think about how much more important a man is than a sheep.” -MAT 12 12 a9ld ἔξεστιν τοῖς Σάββασιν καλῶς ποιεῖν 1 it is lawful to do good on the Sabbaths Alternate translation: “those who do good on the Sabbaths are obeying the law” -MAT 12 13 be8u figs-quotations τότε λέγει τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ, ἔκτεινόν σου τὴν χεῖρα. 1 Then he says to the man, “Stretch out your hand.” You can translate this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus commanded the man to stretch out his hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MAT 12 13 ljl6 τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ 1 to the man Alternate translation: “to the man with the paralyzed hand” or “to the man with the crippled hand” -MAT 12 13 s5ep ἐξέτεινεν 1 he stretched it out Alternate translation: “the man stretched it out” -MAT 12 13 jry3 figs-activepassive ἀπεκατεστάθη, ὑγιὴς 1 it was restored to health If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “it was healthy again” or “it became well again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 14 w4zl συμβούλιον ἔλαβον κατ’ αὐτοῦ 1 took counsel against him Alternate translation: “planned to harm Jesus” -MAT 12 14 jdn2 ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀπολέσωσιν 1 so that they might put him to death Alternate translation: “in order to find a way to kill Jesus” -MAT 12 15 d5l9 ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς γνοὺς, ἀνεχώρησεν 1 But Jesus, having perceived this, withdrew Alternate translation: “But Jesus was aware of what the Pharisees were planning, so he withdrew” -MAT 12 15 hw22 ἀνεχώρησεν ἐκεῖθεν 1 withdrew from there Alternate translation: “departed from there” or “left that place” +MAT 12 9 y4me writing-pronouns εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν αὐτῶν 1 their synagogue The word **their** likely refers to the Pharisees who Jesus was just speaking to. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “into those Pharisees synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MAT 12 10 xb13 translate-unknown ἄνθρωπος χεῖρα ἔχων ξηράν 1 there was a man having a withered hand This means that the man’s hand was damaged in such a way that he could not stretch it out. It was probably bent almost into a fist, making it look smaller. Alternate translation: “his hand was shriveled” or “his hand was atrophied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 12 10 c1cc writing-background καὶ ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν …ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ 1 so that they might accuse him Here, Matthew is giving background information to help to reader understand why they **questioned** Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “and they were questioning him … to try to find fault in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])\n +MAT 12 11 ng4j figs-rquestion τίς ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν ἄνθρωπος, ὃς ἕξει πρόβατον ἕν, καὶ ἐὰν ἐμπέσῃ τοῦτο τοῖς Σάββασιν εἰς βόθυνον, οὐχὶ κρατήσει αὐτὸ καὶ ἐγερεῖ? 1 What man will there be among you, who, will have one sheep, and if it might fall into a pit on the Sabbaths, would not grasp hold of it and lift it out? Jesus uses a question to respond to the Pharisees. He is challenging them to think about what kind of work they do on the Sabbath. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Every one of you, if you only had one sheep, and it fell into a pit on the Sabbath, would certainly grab the sheep and lift it out.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 12 12 s2tu figs-rquestion πόσῳ οὖν διαφέρει ἄνθρωπος προβάτου? 1 How much more valuable, then, is a man than a sheep? Jesus asks this question to prove the point that the Pharisees would be willing to help a sheep, but not a person, on the Sabbath. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “A person is certainly more valuable than a sheep!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 12 13 be8u figs-imperative τότε λέγει τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ, ἔκτεινόν σου τὴν χεῖρα. 1 Then he says to the man, “Stretch out your hand.” This is an imperative, but this was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “Stretch out your hand! Be healed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +MAT 12 13 jry3 figs-activepassive ἀπεκατεστάθη, ὑγιὴς 1 it was restored to health If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed his hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 12 16 bk1n μὴ φανερὸν αὐτὸν ποιήσωσιν 1 they might not make him known Alternate translation: “they would not to tell anyone else about him” +MAT 12 15 lbo1 figs-hyperbole ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτοὺς πάντας 1 Here the word **all** is figurative, meaning that Jesus healed many people. Jesus likely did not heal everyone. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) Here, the word **all** is figurative meaning many. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows honor. Alternate translation: “he healed many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 12 17 dc7z ἵνα…τὸ ῥηθὲν 1 so that what had been said You could start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “This was so that what had been said” MAT 12 17 mcd7 τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου 1 what had been said through Isaiah the prophet If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what God had said long ago through the prophet Isaiah” MAT 12 18 zkt7 0 Connecting Statement: In verses 18-21, Matthew quotes the prophet Isaiah to show that Jesus’ ministry fulfilled scripture. From f9472ac6e41e2978bb4f1c01b0105995224c7e2e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Tue, 23 Aug 2022 16:31:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 003/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 43 ++++++++++++++++--------------------------- 1 file changed, 16 insertions(+), 27 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index b5433db33b..d20f57c6f4 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -758,34 +758,23 @@ MAT 12 11 ng4j figs-rquestion τίς ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν ἄνθρωπ MAT 12 12 s2tu figs-rquestion πόσῳ οὖν διαφέρει ἄνθρωπος προβάτου? 1 How much more valuable, then, is a man than a sheep? Jesus asks this question to prove the point that the Pharisees would be willing to help a sheep, but not a person, on the Sabbath. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “A person is certainly more valuable than a sheep!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 13 be8u figs-imperative τότε λέγει τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ, ἔκτεινόν σου τὴν χεῖρα. 1 Then he says to the man, “Stretch out your hand.” This is an imperative, but this was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “Stretch out your hand! Be healed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) MAT 12 13 jry3 figs-activepassive ἀπεκατεστάθη, ὑγιὴς 1 it was restored to health If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed his hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 16 bk1n μὴ φανερὸν αὐτὸν ποιήσωσιν 1 they might not make him known Alternate translation: “they would not to tell anyone else about him” MAT 12 15 lbo1 figs-hyperbole ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτοὺς πάντας 1 Here the word **all** is figurative, meaning that Jesus healed many people. Jesus likely did not heal everyone. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) Here, the word **all** is figurative meaning many. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows honor. Alternate translation: “he healed many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MAT 12 17 dc7z ἵνα…τὸ ῥηθὲν 1 so that what had been said You could start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “This was so that what had been said” -MAT 12 17 mcd7 τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου 1 what had been said through Isaiah the prophet If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what God had said long ago through the prophet Isaiah” -MAT 12 18 zkt7 0 Connecting Statement: In verses 18-21, Matthew quotes the prophet Isaiah to show that Jesus’ ministry fulfilled scripture. -MAT 12 18 f5kz ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Alternate translation: “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” -MAT 12 18 fjw6 μου…ᾑρέτισα…μου…μου…θήσω…μου 1 my … I have chosen … my … my … I will put … my All occurrences of **I** and **my** refer to God. Isaiah is quoting what God said to him. -MAT 12 18 yv4f ὁ ἀγαπητός μου εἰς ὃν εὐδόκησεν ἡ ψυχή μου 1 my beloved, in whom my soul is well pleased Alternate translation: “he is my beloved one, and I am very pleased with him” -MAT 12 18 s6a4 figs-synecdoche εἰς ὃν εὐδόκησεν ἡ ψυχή μου 1 in whom my soul is well pleased Here, **soul** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “with whom I am very pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MAT 12 18 jh8p figs-explicit κρίσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπαγγελεῖ 1 he will announce justice to the Gentiles The means that God’s servant will tell the **Gentiles** that there will be **justice**. You can state clearly that God is the one who will bring about justice. Alternate translation: “he will announce to the nations that God give them justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 12 18 tum1 figs-abstractnouns κρίσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπαγγελεῖ 1 he will announce justice to the Gentiles If your readers would misunderstand the abstract noun **justice**, you can express it as “what is right.” Alternate translation: “he will announce to the nations that God will do for them what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MAT 12 19 hb2m figs-metonymy οὐδὲ ἀκούσει τις…τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ 1 neither will anyone hear his voice Here people not hearing **his voice** represents him not speaking loudly. Alternate translation: “he will not speak loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 12 19 gj1p οὐκ ἐρίσει…αὐτοῦ 1 He will not strive … his Both **He** and **his** refer to God’s chosen servant. -MAT 12 19 jr87 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς πλατείαις 1 in the streets This is an idiom that means “publicly.” Alternate translation: “in the cities and towns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 12 20 ii4c οὐ κατεάξει…οὐ σβέσει…ἂν ἐκβάλῃ 1 He will not break … and he will not quench a smoking flax, until he may lead justice to victory All occurrences of **He** and **he** refer to God’s chosen servant. -MAT 12 20 kbu9 figs-parallelism κάλαμον συντετριμμένον οὐ κατεάξει, καὶ λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει 1 He will not break a bruised reed; and he will not quench a smoking flax Both of these statements mean the same thing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MAT 12 20 cdk2 figs-metaphor κάλαμον συντετριμμένον οὐ κατεάξει, καὶ λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει 1 He will not break a bruised reed; and he will not quench a smoking flax Both of these statements are metaphors emphasizing that God’s servant will be gentle and kind. Both **bruised reed** and **smoking flax** represent weak and hurting people. If the metaphor is confusing, you could translate the literal meaning. Alternate translation: “He will be kind to weak people, and he will be gentle to those who are hurting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 20 m4uz κάλαμον συντετριμμένον 1 a bruised reed Alternate translation: “a damaged plant” -MAT 12 20 y8mn λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει 1 he will not quench a smoking flax Alternate translation: “he will not put out any smoking flax” or “he will not stop any smoking flax from burning” -MAT 12 20 bjg2 λίνον τυφόμενον 1 a smoking flax This refers to a lamp wick after the flame has gone out and when it is only smoking. -MAT 12 20 b6tw figs-abstractnouns ἂν ἐκβάλῃ εἰς νῖκος τὴν κρίσιν 1 he may lead justice to victory Leading someone to **victory** represents causing him to be victorious. Causing **justice** to be victorious represents making things right that had been wrong. Alternate translation: “he makes everything right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MAT 12 21 w3rq figs-synecdoche τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 in his name Here, **name** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MAT 12 22 nba2 0 General Information: Here the scene shifts to a later time when the Pharisees accuse Jesus of healing a man by the power of Satan. -MAT 12 22 e1g4 figs-activepassive τότε προσηνέχθη αὐτῷ δαιμονιζόμενος, τυφλὸς καὶ κωφός 1 Then someone was brought to him, blind and mute, demon-possessed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Then someone brought to Jesus a man who was blind and mute because a demon was controlling him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 22 k2vt προσηνέχθη αὐτῷ…τυφλὸς καὶ κωφός 1 someone was brought to him, blind and mute Alternate translation: “a person was brought to him who could not see and could not talk” -MAT 12 23 gy5z ἐξίσταντο πάντες οἱ ὄχλοι 1 all the crowds were amazed Alternate translation: “all the people who had seen Jesus heal the man were greatly surprised” -MAT 12 23 ink7 ὁ υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 the Son of David **Son of David** is a title for the Christ or Messiah. -MAT 12 23 h8kf υἱὸς 1 Son Here, **Son** means “descendant.” +MAT 12 17 mcd7 figs-activepassive τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου 1 what had been said through Isaiah the prophet If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what God spoke through the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 12 18 zkt7 figs-abstractnouns ὁ ἀγαπητός μου 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **beloved**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “one who I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MAT 12 18 s6a4 figs-synecdoche εἰς ὃν εὐδόκησεν ἡ ψυχή μου 1 in whom my soul is well pleased Here, **soul** refers to the person as a whole. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “with whom I am very pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 12 18 jh8p figs-abstractnouns κρίσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπαγγελεῖ 1 he will announce justice to the Gentiles If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **justice**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he will proclaim that God will act justly towards the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MAT 12 19 gj1p figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἐρίσει, οὐδὲ κραυγάσει 1 He will not strive … his Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “He will not strive with people, nor will he cry around to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 12 19 jr87 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς πλατείαις 1 in the streets Here, the phrase **in the streets** is an idiom that means no one heard his voice in public. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the cities and towns where people are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 12 20 cdk2 figs-metaphor κάλαμον συντετριμμένον οὐ κατεάξει, καὶ λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει 1 He will not break a bruised reed; and he will not quench a smoking flax Both of the phrases **He will not break a bruised reed** and **and he will not quench a smoking flax** are metaphors emphasizing that God’s servant will be gentle and kind. Both **bruised reed** and **smoking flax** represent weak and hurting people. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “He will be kind to weak people, and he will be gentle to those who are hurting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 12 20 kbu9 figs-parallelism κάλαμον συντετριμμένον οὐ κατεάξει, καὶ λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει 1 He will not break a bruised reed; and he will not quench a smoking flax Both of the phrases **He will not break a bruised reed** and **and he will not quench a smoking flax** mean the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “He will not destroy something already very weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +MAT 12 20 y8mn translate-unknown λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει 1 he will not quench a smoking flax Here, **flax** refers to a burning wick, or a small flame. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a small flame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 12 20 b6tw figs-abstractnouns ἂν ἐκβάλῃ εἰς νῖκος τὴν κρίσιν 1 he may lead justice to victory If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **victory** or **boldness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he might cause people to be justified before God, and cause them to be victorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MAT 12 21 w3rq figs-synecdoche τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 in his name Here, **name** refers to the whole person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 12 22 nba2 writing-newevent τότε 1 General Information: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MAT 12 22 e1g4 figs-activepassive προσηνέχθη αὐτῷ δαιμονιζόμενος, τυφλὸς καὶ κωφός 1 Then someone was brought to him, blind and mute, demon-possessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some people brought one who a demon possessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 12 22 k2vt figs-nominaladj τυφλὸς καὶ κωφός 1 someone was brought to him, blind and mute Jesus is using the adjectives **blind** and **mute** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “a person who was blind and mute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 12 23 ink7 translate-unknown ὁ υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 the Son of David **Son of David** is a an important title for the Messiah, who was supposed to come and sit on David's throne. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Messiah, the Son of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 12 23 h8kf figs-metonymy υἱὸς 1 Son Here, the word **Son** is figurative for descendant. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 12 24 wmi1 ἀκούσαντες 1 having heard this The word **this** refers to the miracle of the healing of a blind, deaf, and demon-possessed man. MAT 12 24 p1mi figs-doublenegatives οὗτος οὐκ ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια, εἰ μὴ ἐν τῷ Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 He does not cast out demons except by Beelzebul If your readers would misunderstand double negative **not … except**, you could express it in a positive form. “He is only able to cast out the demon because he is a servant of Beelzebul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) MAT 12 24 wj1y οὗτος 1 He The Pharisees avoid calling Jesus by name to show they reject him. From c2bde1957071450b038e0d80c41dedca0ac4e107 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 24 Aug 2022 18:55:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 004/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 45 ++++++++++++++++++++------------------------- 1 file changed, 20 insertions(+), 25 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index d20f57c6f4..8c0725220b 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -771,33 +771,28 @@ MAT 12 20 y8mn translate-unknown λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσε MAT 12 20 b6tw figs-abstractnouns ἂν ἐκβάλῃ εἰς νῖκος τὴν κρίσιν 1 he may lead justice to victory If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **victory** or **boldness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he might cause people to be justified before God, and cause them to be victorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 12 21 w3rq figs-synecdoche τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 in his name Here, **name** refers to the whole person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 12 22 nba2 writing-newevent τότε 1 General Information: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -MAT 12 22 e1g4 figs-activepassive προσηνέχθη αὐτῷ δαιμονιζόμενος, τυφλὸς καὶ κωφός 1 Then someone was brought to him, blind and mute, demon-possessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some people brought one who a demon possessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 12 22 e1g4 figs-activepassive προσηνέχθη αὐτῷ δαιμονιζόμενος 1 Then someone was brought to him, blind and mute, demon-possessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some people brought one who a demon possessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 12 22 k2vt figs-nominaladj τυφλὸς καὶ κωφός 1 someone was brought to him, blind and mute Jesus is using the adjectives **blind** and **mute** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “a person who was blind and mute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 12 23 ink7 translate-unknown ὁ υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 the Son of David **Son of David** is a an important title for the Messiah, who was supposed to come and sit on David's throne. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Messiah, the Son of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 12 23 h8kf figs-metonymy υἱὸς 1 Son Here, the word **Son** is figurative for descendant. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 12 24 wmi1 ἀκούσαντες 1 having heard this The word **this** refers to the miracle of the healing of a blind, deaf, and demon-possessed man. -MAT 12 24 p1mi figs-doublenegatives οὗτος οὐκ ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια, εἰ μὴ ἐν τῷ Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 He does not cast out demons except by Beelzebul If your readers would misunderstand double negative **not … except**, you could express it in a positive form. “He is only able to cast out the demon because he is a servant of Beelzebul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -MAT 12 24 wj1y οὗτος 1 He The Pharisees avoid calling Jesus by name to show they reject him. -MAT 12 24 cii4 ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων 1 the prince of the demons Alternate translation: “the chief of the demons” -MAT 12 25 i1sd writing-proverbs πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται, καὶ πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate, and every city or house divided against itself will not stand Jesus uses a proverb to respond to the Pharisees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) -MAT 12 25 ll42 figs-parallelism πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται, καὶ πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate, and every city or house divided against itself will not stand Both of these statements mean the same thing. They emphasize that it would not make sense for Beelzebul to use his power to fight other demons. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MAT 12 25 g9ec figs-metonymy πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate Here, **kingdom** refers to those who live in the kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 12 25 rvzh figs-activepassive πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “A kingdom will not last when its people fight among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 25 kn8c figs-metonymy πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται 1 every city or house divided against itself will not stand Here, **city** refers to the people who live there, and **house** refers to a family. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 12 25 xwob figs-metaphor πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται 1 every city or house divided against itself will not stand Being **divided against itself** represents its people fighting each other. Alternate translation: “it ruins a city or a family when the people fight each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 26 i42r figs-metonymy εἰ ὁ Σατανᾶς τὸν Σατανᾶν ἐκβάλλει 1 if Satan casts out Satan The second use of **Satan** refers to the demons that serve Satan. Alternate translation: “If Satan works against his own demons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 12 26 ah7t figs-rquestion πῶς οὖν σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ? 1 How then will his kingdom stand? Jesus uses this question to show the Pharisees that what they were saying was illogical. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “If Satan were divided against himself, his kingdom would not be able to stand!” or “If Satan were to fight against his own demons, his kingdom would not last!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 12 27 nvv9 Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 Beelzebul **Beelzebul** refers to the same person as “Satan” (verse 26). -MAT 12 27 gee9 figs-rquestion οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλλουσιν? 1 by whom do your sons cast them out? Jesus uses another question to challenge the Pharisees. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “then you must say your followers also cast out demons by the power of Beelzebul. But, you know this is not true.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 12 27 x9je figs-metaphor οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν 1 your sons Jesus was speaking to the Pharisees. The phrase **your sons** refers to their followers. This was a common way of referring to those who follow teachers or leaders. Alternate translation: “your followers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 27 jja2 διὰ τοῦτο, αὐτοὶ κριταὶ ἔσονται ὑμῶν 1 For this reason they will be your judges Alternate translation: “Because your followers cast out demons by the power of God, they prove that you are wrong about me.” -MAT 12 28 zb4d εἰ δὲ…ἐγὼ 1 But if I Here, **if** does not mean Jesus is questioning how he casts out demons. Here Jesus uses the word to introduce a true statement. Alternate translation: “But because I” -MAT 12 28 r5dg figs-metonymy ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 then the kingdom of God has come upon you Here, **kingdom** refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “this means God is establishing his rule among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 12 28 f1wj figs-you ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 has come upon you Here, **you** is plural and refers to the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 12 29 t4vu figs-parables πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν? καὶ τότε τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ διαρπάσει 1 how is anyone able to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings unless first he might have tied up the strong man? And then he will plunder his house Jesus uses a parable to continue his response to the Pharisees. Jesus means he can drive out demons because he is more powerful than Satan. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 12 29 w54c figs-rquestion πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν? 1 how is anyone able to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings unless first he might have tied up the strong man? Jesus uses a question to teach the Pharisees and the crowd. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one can enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings without tying up the strong man first.” or “If a person wants to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings, he must first tie up the strong man.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 12 29 jb6x ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν? 1 unless first he might have tied up the strong man Alternate translation: “without taking control of the strong man first” -MAT 12 29 u6vu τότε τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ διαρπάσει 1 then he will plunder his house Alternate translation: “then he can steal his possessions” +MAT 12 23 h8kf figs-metonymy υἱὸς 1 Son Here, the word **Son** is figurative for a descendant of someone. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 12 24 p1mi figs-doublenegatives οὗτος οὐκ ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια, εἰ μὴ ἐν τῷ Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 He does not cast out demons except by Beelzebul If the double negative **He does not cast out demons except by Beelzebul** would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “He throws out demons by the Beelzebul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +MAT 12 25 ckth figs-explicit εἰδὼς δὲ τὰς ἐνθυμήσεις αὐτῶν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 1 This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what the scribes were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful to your readers, your could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Even though no one told Jesus, he know their thoughts. So he said to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 12 25 i1sd writing-proverbs πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται, καὶ πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται  1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate, and every city or house divided against itself will not stand Jesus uses a proverb to respond to the Pharisees saying that he casts out demons by Beelzebul. Translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “If the people of a nation are fighting against each other, they will certainly cause its destruction. Similarly, if people of a city or even a house are fighting against each other, they will will not be united together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 12 25 ll42 figs-parallelism πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται…πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate, and every city or house divided against itself will not stand The phrases **Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate** and **every city or house divided against itself will not stand** mean the same thing. Jesus says the same thing to show that if any group of people fights against each other, it will eventually fall apart. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Any group of people fighting against each other will eventually fall apart and no longer be united” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +MAT 12 25 g9ec figs-metonymy βασιλεία…πόλις ἢ οἰκία\n 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate Here, the words **kingdom**, **city**, refer to the people who live in them. The word **house** refers to a family, who would all live in the same house. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: "people who live in a nation … people who live in a city or house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 12 25 rvzh figs-activepassive πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People living in a country who flight against each other destroy their own country” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 12 26 i42r figs-metonymy Σατανᾶν 1 if Satan casts out Satan The second word **Satan** is figurative, referring to the demons that serve Satan. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the demons who serve Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 12 26 ah7t figs-rquestion πῶς οὖν σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ 1 How then will his kingdom stand? Jesus uses this question to show the Pharisees that accusing Jesus of casting out demons by Satan is foolish. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “His kingdom will surely not stand!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 12 27 gee9 figs-rquestion οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλλουσιν? 1 by whom do your sons cast them out? Jesus uses another question to challenge the Pharisees. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “certainly your sons also cast out demons by the same person as me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 12 27 x9je figs-metaphor οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν 1 your sons The phrase **your sons** refers to their the disciples of the Pharisees. If your readers would not understand what **sons** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “your disciples” or “your followers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 12 27 jja2 διὰ τοῦτο, αὐτοὶ κριταὶ ἔσονται ὑμῶν 1 For this reason they will be your judges The phrase **For this reason they will be your judges** could mean (1) that they will judge the Pharisees's accusations against Jesus to be wrong. Alternate translation: “Because of this your disciples will see that you are wrong". Or (2) they will stand with God at the end of time to judge the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “Because of this yours sons will be your judges” +MAT 12 28 zb4d grammar-connect-condition-fact But if I cast out demons by the Spirit of God, then the kingdom of God has come upon you 1 But if I Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But since I throw out demons by the Spirit of God, the kingdom of God has come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +MAT 12 28 r5dg figs-metonymy ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 then the kingdom of God has come upon you See how you translated **kingdom** in [3:2](../03/02.md).\nAlternate translation: “then God is make people a part of his people over whom he will rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n +MAT 12 29 t4vu figs-parables πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν? καὶ τότε τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ διαρπάσει 1 how is anyone able to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings unless first he might have tied up the strong man? And then he will plunder his house This parable tells about how Jesus is binding Satan and his evil spirits, and saving the people whom he had controlled previously. Make sure it is clear to your readers that this is a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 12 29 w54c figs-rquestion πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν? 1 how is anyone able to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings unless first he might have tied up the strong man? Jesus uses a question to teach the Pharisees and the crowd that he is more powerful than Satan. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly, no one can enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings without tying up the strong man first.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 12 29 b2et figs-genericnoun τις 1 The word **anyone** is a generic noun, and is not referring to any specific person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MAT 12 29 tsrk figs-metaphor πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι 1 To **enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings** is figurative. The **strong man** is referring to Satan. So to enter into his house and steal his belongings means to throw out demons from people who they controlled. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Someone cannot take from Satan the demons the belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 12 29 zluo figs-metaphor ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν 1 When someone **ties up** the strong man, who is Satan, it means either to defeat him or restrain him. This means that he is no longer able to send his demons out to harm people. If your readers would not understand what it means to **bind** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “no longer belong to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 30 ivp9 ὁ μὴ ὢν μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 The one not being with me Alternate translation: “The one who does not support me” or “The one who does not work with me” MAT 12 30 gyk8 κατ’ ἐμοῦ ἐστιν 1 is against me Alternate translation: “opposes me” or “works against me” MAT 12 30 ek1h figs-metaphor ὁ μὴ συνάγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ σκορπίζει 1 the one not gathering with me scatters Jesus is using a metaphor that refers to a person either **gathering** the flock of sheep to a shepherd or making them scatter away from the shepherd. Jesus means that a person is either helping to make people become disciples of Jesus or he is making people reject Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 3cb8c62f874cf7afe0d9e5f8aca7cb740ed95bc6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Thu, 25 Aug 2022 18:35:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 005/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 5 ++--- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 8c0725220b..838e549ace 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -793,9 +793,8 @@ MAT 12 29 w54c figs-rquestion πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν MAT 12 29 b2et figs-genericnoun τις 1 The word **anyone** is a generic noun, and is not referring to any specific person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 12 29 tsrk figs-metaphor πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι 1 To **enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings** is figurative. The **strong man** is referring to Satan. So to enter into his house and steal his belongings means to throw out demons from people who they controlled. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Someone cannot take from Satan the demons the belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 29 zluo figs-metaphor ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν 1 When someone **ties up** the strong man, who is Satan, it means either to defeat him or restrain him. This means that he is no longer able to send his demons out to harm people. If your readers would not understand what it means to **bind** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “no longer belong to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 30 ivp9 ὁ μὴ ὢν μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 The one not being with me Alternate translation: “The one who does not support me” or “The one who does not work with me” -MAT 12 30 gyk8 κατ’ ἐμοῦ ἐστιν 1 is against me Alternate translation: “opposes me” or “works against me” -MAT 12 30 ek1h figs-metaphor ὁ μὴ συνάγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ σκορπίζει 1 the one not gathering with me scatters Jesus is using a metaphor that refers to a person either **gathering** the flock of sheep to a shepherd or making them scatter away from the shepherd. Jesus means that a person is either helping to make people become disciples of Jesus or he is making people reject Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 12 30 ivp9 figs-idiom ὁ μὴ ὢν μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 The one not being with me The phrase **with me** is an idiom which means to support someone or be on their side. In this instance, the religious leaders were not supporting Jesus' ministry because they thought we was controlled by Satan. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The one not supporting my work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 12 30 ek1h figs-metaphor1 ὁ μὴ συνάγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ σκορπίζει 1 the one not gathering with me scatters Jesus is using a metaphor that refers to a person either **gathering** the flock of sheep to a shepherd or making them scatter away from the shepherd. Jesus means that a person is either helping to make people become disciples of Jesus or he is making people reject Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 31 iy8l λέγω ὑμῖν 1 I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. MAT 12 31 q5hk figs-you λέγω ὑμῖν 1 I say to you Here, **you** is plural. Jesus is speaking directly to the Pharisees, but he is also teaching the crowd. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 12 31 hy38 figs-activepassive πᾶσα ἁμαρτία καὶ βλασφημία ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 every sin and blasphemy will be forgiven men If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will forgive every sin that people commit and every evil thing they say” or “God will forgive every person who sins or says evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From dcdb3770d3c86fbde3f4b0eb725d569c410d885e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Fri, 26 Aug 2022 14:53:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 006/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 43 ++++++++++++++++++++----------------------- 1 file changed, 20 insertions(+), 23 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 838e549ace..02d5dbd2df 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -788,36 +788,33 @@ MAT 12 27 x9je figs-metaphor οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν 1 your sons The phrase MAT 12 27 jja2 διὰ τοῦτο, αὐτοὶ κριταὶ ἔσονται ὑμῶν 1 For this reason they will be your judges The phrase **For this reason they will be your judges** could mean (1) that they will judge the Pharisees's accusations against Jesus to be wrong. Alternate translation: “Because of this your disciples will see that you are wrong". Or (2) they will stand with God at the end of time to judge the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “Because of this yours sons will be your judges” MAT 12 28 zb4d grammar-connect-condition-fact But if I cast out demons by the Spirit of God, then the kingdom of God has come upon you 1 But if I Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But since I throw out demons by the Spirit of God, the kingdom of God has come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) MAT 12 28 r5dg figs-metonymy ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 then the kingdom of God has come upon you See how you translated **kingdom** in [3:2](../03/02.md).\nAlternate translation: “then God is make people a part of his people over whom he will rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n -MAT 12 29 t4vu figs-parables πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν? καὶ τότε τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ διαρπάσει 1 how is anyone able to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings unless first he might have tied up the strong man? And then he will plunder his house This parable tells about how Jesus is binding Satan and his evil spirits, and saving the people whom he had controlled previously. Make sure it is clear to your readers that this is a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 12 29 t4vu figs-parables ἢ\n 1 how is anyone able to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings unless first he might have tied up the strong man? And then he will plunder his house This parable tells about how Jesus is binding Satan and his evil spirits, and saving the people whom he had controlled previously. Make sure it is clear to your readers that this is a story. Alternate translate: “Then Jesus told them a story, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 12 29 w54c figs-rquestion πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν? 1 how is anyone able to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings unless first he might have tied up the strong man? Jesus uses a question to teach the Pharisees and the crowd that he is more powerful than Satan. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly, no one can enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings without tying up the strong man first.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 29 b2et figs-genericnoun τις 1 The word **anyone** is a generic noun, and is not referring to any specific person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 12 29 tsrk figs-metaphor πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι 1 To **enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings** is figurative. The **strong man** is referring to Satan. So to enter into his house and steal his belongings means to throw out demons from people who they controlled. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Someone cannot take from Satan the demons the belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 29 zluo figs-metaphor ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν 1 When someone **ties up** the strong man, who is Satan, it means either to defeat him or restrain him. This means that he is no longer able to send his demons out to harm people. If your readers would not understand what it means to **bind** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “no longer belong to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 30 ivp9 figs-idiom ὁ μὴ ὢν μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 The one not being with me The phrase **with me** is an idiom which means to support someone or be on their side. In this instance, the religious leaders were not supporting Jesus' ministry because they thought we was controlled by Satan. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The one not supporting my work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 12 30 ek1h figs-metaphor1 ὁ μὴ συνάγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ σκορπίζει 1 the one not gathering with me scatters Jesus is using a metaphor that refers to a person either **gathering** the flock of sheep to a shepherd or making them scatter away from the shepherd. Jesus means that a person is either helping to make people become disciples of Jesus or he is making people reject Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 31 iy8l λέγω ὑμῖν 1 I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. -MAT 12 31 q5hk figs-you λέγω ὑμῖν 1 I say to you Here, **you** is plural. Jesus is speaking directly to the Pharisees, but he is also teaching the crowd. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 12 31 hy38 figs-activepassive πᾶσα ἁμαρτία καὶ βλασφημία ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 every sin and blasphemy will be forgiven men If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will forgive every sin that people commit and every evil thing they say” or “God will forgive every person who sins or says evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 31 ezx8 figs-activepassive ἡ…τοῦ Πνεύματος, βλασφημία οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται 1 the blasphemy against the Spirit will not be forgiven If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will not forgive the person who speaks evil things about the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 32 gwx2 figs-metonymy ὃς ἐὰν εἴπῃ λόγον κατὰ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 whoever might speak a word against the Son of Man Here, **word** refers to what someone says. Alternate translation: “If a person says anything bad about the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 12 32 h79z figs-123person τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 12 32 z3ma figs-activepassive ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ 1 it will be forgiven him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will forgive a person for that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 32 hfs4 οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ 1 it will not be forgiven him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will not forgive that person” -MAT 12 32 lw5j figs-metonymy οὔτε ἐν τούτῳ τῷ αἰῶνι οὔτε ἐν τῷ μέλλοντι 1 neither in this age, nor in the one coming Here, **this age** and **the one coming** refer to the present life and the next life. Alternate translation: “in this life or in the next life” or “now or ever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 12 33 bi8z writing-proverbs ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον καλὸν καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ καλόν, ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον σαπρὸν καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ σαπρόν 1 Either make a tree good and its fruit good, or make the tree bad and its fruit bad This could mean: (1) if you make a **tree good**, its **fruit** will be **good**, and if you **make the tree bad**, **its fruit** will be **bad**. (2) this is a proverb that means if you consider a tree to be good, it will be because its fruit is good, and if you consider it tree to be bad, it will be because its fruit is bad. People were to apply its truth to how they can know whether a person is good or bad. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) -MAT 12 33 kl16 καλὸν…σαπρὸν 1 good … bad Alternate translation: “healthy … diseased” +MAT 12 31 hy38 figs-activepassive πᾶσα ἁμαρτία καὶ βλασφημία ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 every sin and blasphemy will be forgiven men If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will commit every sin that a person commits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 12 31 t280 grammar-connect-exceptions πᾶσα ἁμαρτία καὶ βλασφημία ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς ἀνθρώποις; ἡ δὲ τοῦ Πνεύματος, βλασφημία οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται 1 If it would appear in your language that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid confusing your reader. Alternate translation: “God will forgive many sins and blasphemies, but he will not forgive the blasphemy of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) +MAT 12 31 ezx8 figs-activepassive ἡ…τοῦ Πνεύματος, βλασφημία οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται 1 the blasphemy against the Spirit will not be forgiven If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But God will not forgive blasphemy of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 12 31 kqx0 figs-abstractnouns βλασφημία…ἡ δὲ…βλασφημία 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blasphemy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “blasphemous word one speaks…but when one blasphemes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] +MAT 12 32 gwx2 figs-metonymy ὃς ἐὰν εἴπῃ λόγον κατὰ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 whoever might speak a word against the Son of Man Here, the word **word** is figurative, referring to what someone says. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “If a person says anything bad about the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 12 32 h79z figs-123person τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Here, Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 12 32 z3ma figs-activepassive ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ…οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ 1 it will be forgiven him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will forgive that person…God will not forgive that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 12 32 lw5j figs-metonymy ἐν τούτῳ τῷ αἰῶνι οὔτε ἐν τῷ μέλλοντι 1 neither in this age, nor in the one coming Here, the phrases **this age** and **the one coming** are idioms referring to the present life and the next life. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the time we now live…in eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 12 33 bi8z writing-proverbs ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον καλὸν καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ καλόν, ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον σαπρὸν καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ σαπρόν; ἐκ γὰρ τοῦ καρποῦ, τὸ δένδρον γινώσκεται 1 Either make a tree good and its fruit good, or make the tree bad and its fruit bad The proverb **Either make the tree good and its fruit good, or make the tree bad and its fruit bad** is making a figurative comparison. It is comparing the actions of a good person to the good fruit of a healthy tree. It is also comparing the bad works of an evil person to the bad fruit of an unhealthy tree. Translate this proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “People who are well do not need to see a doctor; people who are sick do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 12 33 kl16 figs-idiom καλὸν…σαπρὸν 1 good … bad The words **good** and **bad** are figurative for healthy and unhealthy. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 12 33 kz12 figs-metaphor ἐκ γὰρ τοῦ καρποῦ, τὸ δένδρον γινώσκεται 1 for the tree is recognized by its fruit Here, **fruit** is a metaphor for what a person does. Alternate translation: “people know whether a person is good or bad by looking at the results of that person’s activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 33 nx9n figs-activepassive ἐκ γὰρ τοῦ καρποῦ, τὸ δένδρον γινώσκεται 1 for the tree is recognized by its fruit If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people know whether a tree is good or bad by looking at its fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 34 r1uv figs-metaphor γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν 1 You offspring of vipers Here, **offspring** means “having the characteristic of.” The **vipers** are poisonous snakes that are dangerous and represent evil. See how you translated a similar phrase in [3:7](../03/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 34 pl4g figs-you γεννήματα…δύνασθε 1 You offspring … are you able Both **You** and **you** are plural and refer to the Pharisees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 12 34 e7x3 figs-rquestion πῶς δύνασθε ἀγαθὰ λαλεῖν, πονηροὶ ὄντες? 1 being evil, how are you able to say good things? Jesus uses a question to rebuke the Pharisees. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “you cannot say good things because you are evil” or “you can only say evil things because you are evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 12 34 i7c6 figs-synecdoche ἐκ…τοῦ περισσεύματος τῆς καρδίας, τὸ στόμα λαλεῖ 1 out of the abundance of the heart the mouth speaks Here, **mouth** is a synecdoche that represents a person as a whole. Alternate translation: “what a person says comes from his heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MAT 12 34 e9bg figs-metonymy ἐκ…τοῦ περισσεύματος τῆς καρδίας, τὸ στόμα λαλεῖ 1 out of the abundance of the heart the mouth speaks Here, **heart** is a metonym for the thoughts in a person’s mind. Alternate translation: “what a person says with his mouth reveals what is in his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 12 35 r3uw figs-metaphor ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ θησαυροῦ ἐκβάλλει ἀγαθά; καὶ ὁ πονηρὸς ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ θησαυροῦ ἐκβάλλει πονηρά 1 The good man from his good treasure brings forth good things, and the evil man from his evil treasure brings forth evil things Jesus speaks about the **heart** as if it were a container that a person fills with good or evil things. This is a metaphor that means what a person says reveals what the person is truly like. If you want to keep this imagery, see the UST. You can also translate the literal meaning. Alternate translation: “A man who is truly good will speak good things, and the man who is truly evil will speak evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 36 era6 λέγω…ὑμῖν 1 I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. -MAT 12 36 f1wh figs-metonymy πᾶν ῥῆμα ἀργὸν ὃ λαλήσουσιν 1 every idle word that they will speak Here, **word** refers to something that someone says. Alternate translation: “every harmful thing they will have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 12 36 t2pj οἱ ἄνθρωποι, ἀποδώσουσιν περὶ αὐτοῦ λόγον 1 men will give an account concerning it Alternate translation: “God will ask those people about it” or “those people will have to explain it to God” -MAT 12 37 qw5e figs-activepassive δικαιωθήσῃ…καταδικασθήσῃ 1 you will be justified … you will be condemned If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will justify you … God will condemn you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 12 33 nx9n figs-activepassive ἐκ γὰρ τοῦ καρποῦ, τὸ δένδρον γινώσκεται 1 for the tree is recognized by its fruit If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people know whether a tree is good or bad by looking at its fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 12 34 r1uv figs-metaphor γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν 1 You offspring of vipers Here, **You offspring of vipers** is a metaphor which is describing the behavior of the Pharisees. Vipers are poisonous snakes who can harm and kill people. The Pharisees are compared to vipers because their teaching was harming people spiritually. If your readers would not understand what this means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “You are behaving like dangerous snakes!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 12 34 e7x3 figs-rquestion πῶς δύνασθε ἀγαθὰ λαλεῖν, πονηροὶ ὄντες? 1 being evil, how are you able to say good things? Jesus uses a question to rebuke how evil the Pharisees behave. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you are certainly not able to say good things to people because you are so evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 12 34 i7c6 figs-synecdoche ἐκ…τοῦ περισσεύματος τῆς καρδίας, τὸ στόμα λαλεῖ 1 out of the abundance of the heart the mouth speaks Here, **mouth** is a synecdoche that represents a person as a whole. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “A person speaks from all that is in their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 12 34 e9bg figs-metonymy ἐκ…τοῦ περισσεύματος τῆς καρδίας, τὸ στόμα λαλεῖ 1 out of the abundance of the heart the mouth speaks Here, **heart** is a metonym for the thoughts or intentions a person has. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what a person says with his mouth reveals what he desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 12 35 r3uw writing-proverbs ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ θησαυροῦ ἐκβάλλει ἀγαθά; καὶ ὁ πονηρὸς ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ θησαυροῦ ἐκβάλλει πονηρά 1 The good man from his good treasure brings forth good things, and the evil man from his evil treasure brings forth evil things Jesus uses this proverb to speak about where people's behavior comes from. Jesus speaks of the heart as **treasure**. He is saying that good people say good things out of their good desires. Similarly, evil people do evil things out of their evil desires. Translate this proverb in a way that would be meaningful in your language, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “People who have good desires do things, but people who have evil desires do bad things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 12 36 t2pj figs-genericnoun οἱ ἄνθρωποι 1 men will give an account concerning it Jesus is speaking about **men** in general, and not about any specific men. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MAT 12 36 ay18 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of boldness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we may be bold” or “we may act boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the day when God will judge the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MAT 12 37 qw5e figs-activepassive δικαιωθήσῃ…καταδικασθήσῃ 1 you will be justified … you will be condemned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will justify you … God will condemn you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 12 38 mec3 0 Connecting Statement: The dialogue in verses 38-45 happens immediately after Jesus responded to the Pharisees’ accusation that he healed a man by the power of Satan. MAT 12 38 aiu6 θέλομεν 1 we wish Alternate translation: “we want” MAT 12 38 ikg2 figs-explicit ἀπὸ σοῦ σημεῖον ἰδεῖν 1 to see a sign from you You can make explicit why they want **to see a sign**. Alternate translation: “to see a sign from you that proves what you say is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From d279df560d072279178a125b43fdeb00d3fcafce Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2022 13:35:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 007/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 12 +++++------- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 02d5dbd2df..5ffe2fd4a3 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -815,13 +815,11 @@ MAT 12 35 r3uw writing-proverbs ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος ἐκ το MAT 12 36 t2pj figs-genericnoun οἱ ἄνθρωποι 1 men will give an account concerning it Jesus is speaking about **men** in general, and not about any specific men. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 12 36 ay18 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of boldness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we may be bold” or “we may act boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the day when God will judge the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 12 37 qw5e figs-activepassive δικαιωθήσῃ…καταδικασθήσῃ 1 you will be justified … you will be condemned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will justify you … God will condemn you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 38 mec3 0 Connecting Statement: The dialogue in verses 38-45 happens immediately after Jesus responded to the Pharisees’ accusation that he healed a man by the power of Satan. -MAT 12 38 aiu6 θέλομεν 1 we wish Alternate translation: “we want” -MAT 12 38 ikg2 figs-explicit ἀπὸ σοῦ σημεῖον ἰδεῖν 1 to see a sign from you You can make explicit why they want **to see a sign**. Alternate translation: “to see a sign from you that proves what you say is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 12 39 d8b9 figs-123person γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς σημεῖον ἐπιζητεῖ, καὶ σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ 1 An evil and adulterous generation seeks a sign, but no sign will be given to it Jesus is speaking to his present **generation**. Alternate translation: “You are an evil and adulterous generation who demands signs from me, but no sign will be given to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 12 39 a5di figs-metaphor γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς 1 An … adulterous generation Here, **adulterous** is a metaphor for people who are not faithful to God. Alternate translation: “An evil and unfaithful generation” or “An evil and godless generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 39 c6hy figs-activepassive σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ 1 no sign will be given to it Jesus would not give them a **sign** because, though he had already performed many miracles, they refused to believe him. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I will not give it a sign” or “God will not give you a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 39 j21p εἰ μὴ τὸ σημεῖον Ἰωνᾶ τοῦ προφήτου 1 except the sign of Jonah the prophet Alternate translation: “except the same sign God gave to Jonah the prophet” +MAT 12 38 ikg2 figs-explicit ἀπὸ σοῦ σημεῖον ἰδεῖν 1 to see a sign from you The religious leaders wanted to see a sign in order to prove that God sent Jesus as his messenger. If it would be helpful to your readers, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to see a sign from you that shows us that you are from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 12 39 d8b9 figs-123person γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς σημεῖον ἐπιζητεῖ, καὶ σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ 1 An evil and adulterous generation seeks a sign, but no sign will be given to it Jesus is speaking to the people who are right in front of him in the third person. If your readers would find it helpful, you could make this second person. Alternate translation: “You wicked and unfaithful generation seek a sign, but one will not be given to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 12 39 a5di figs-metaphor γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς 1 An … adulterous generation Here, **adulterous** is a metaphor for people who are not faithful to God in their relationship with him like a person who is not faithful in their relationship with a spouse. If your readers would not understand what **adulterous** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “An evil and unfaithful generation” or “an evil and unloving generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 12 39 j21p grammar-connect-exceptions καὶ σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ, εἰ μὴ τὸ σημεῖον Ἰωνᾶ τοῦ προφήτου 1 except the sign of Jonah the prophet If it would appear in your language that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “but the only sign that I will give will be the sign of the prophet Jonah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) +MAT 12 39 c6hy figs-activepassive σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ 1 no sign will be given to it If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will not give them a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 12 40 vh9i figs-merism τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας 1 three days and three nights Here, **days** and **nights** mean complete 24-hour periods. Alternate translation: “three complete days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) MAT 12 40 iuv8 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 12 40 gg65 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ τῆς γῆς 1 in the heart of the earth This phrase refers to the inside a physical grave. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From 5aa16b9ff232596468bfb30afc7ea3c07da5919e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2022 14:12:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 008/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 5ffe2fd4a3..196d6ab4cc 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -820,7 +820,8 @@ MAT 12 39 d8b9 figs-123person γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶ MAT 12 39 a5di figs-metaphor γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς 1 An … adulterous generation Here, **adulterous** is a metaphor for people who are not faithful to God in their relationship with him like a person who is not faithful in their relationship with a spouse. If your readers would not understand what **adulterous** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “An evil and unfaithful generation” or “an evil and unloving generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 39 j21p grammar-connect-exceptions καὶ σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ, εἰ μὴ τὸ σημεῖον Ἰωνᾶ τοῦ προφήτου 1 except the sign of Jonah the prophet If it would appear in your language that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “but the only sign that I will give will be the sign of the prophet Jonah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) MAT 12 39 c6hy figs-activepassive σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ 1 no sign will be given to it If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will not give them a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 40 vh9i figs-merism τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας 1 three days and three nights Here, **days** and **nights** mean complete 24-hour periods. Alternate translation: “three complete days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +MAT 12 40 vh9i figs-merism τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας 1 three days and three nights The phrase **three days and three nights** is referring to three entire days If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “three complete days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +MAT 12 40 hzem figs-explicit ὥσπερ γὰρ ἦν Ἰωνᾶς ἐν τῇ κοιλίᾳ τοῦ κήτους τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας, οὕτως 1 The phrase **three days and three nights** refers to three entire day. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “three full days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) Jesus is assuming that his audience is familiar with the story of Jonah, which tells about how the prophet Jonah was swallowed by a fish because he disobeyed God. But once he repented, after three days, the fish spit him out. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could reference this story explicitly. Alternate translation: “Think about the story of Jonah the prophet in the Scriptures. He was swallowed by a large fish for three days because he disobeyed God. After he repented, three days later, the fish spit him out. Similarly,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 40 iuv8 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 12 40 gg65 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ τῆς γῆς 1 in the heart of the earth This phrase refers to the inside a physical grave. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 12 41 gnh1 ἄνδρες Νινευεῖται 1 The men of Nineveh Alternate translation: “The citizens of Nineveh” From 9bcedac3d9ced980aa37650af77c8afa3ea1d99d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2022 14:52:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 009/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 14 +++++++------- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 196d6ab4cc..710402ca9a 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -816,17 +816,17 @@ MAT 12 36 t2pj figs-genericnoun οἱ ἄνθρωποι 1 men will give an accou MAT 12 36 ay18 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of boldness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we may be bold” or “we may act boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the day when God will judge the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 12 37 qw5e figs-activepassive δικαιωθήσῃ…καταδικασθήσῃ 1 you will be justified … you will be condemned If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will justify you … God will condemn you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 12 38 ikg2 figs-explicit ἀπὸ σοῦ σημεῖον ἰδεῖν 1 to see a sign from you The religious leaders wanted to see a sign in order to prove that God sent Jesus as his messenger. If it would be helpful to your readers, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to see a sign from you that shows us that you are from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 12 39 d8b9 figs-123person γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς σημεῖον ἐπιζητεῖ, καὶ σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ 1 An evil and adulterous generation seeks a sign, but no sign will be given to it Jesus is speaking to the people who are right in front of him in the third person. If your readers would find it helpful, you could make this second person. Alternate translation: “You wicked and unfaithful generation seek a sign, but one will not be given to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 12 39 d8b9 figs-123person γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς σημεῖον ἐπιζητεῖ, καὶ σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ 1 An evil and adulterous generation seeks a sign, but no sign will be given to it Jesus is speaking to the people who are right in front of him in the third person. If your readers would find it helpful, you could make this second person. Alternate translation: “A wicked and unfaithful generation like you seeks a sign, but a sign will not be given to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 12 39 a5di figs-metaphor γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς 1 An … adulterous generation Here, **adulterous** is a metaphor for people who are not faithful to God in their relationship with him like a person who is not faithful in their relationship with a spouse. If your readers would not understand what **adulterous** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “An evil and unfaithful generation” or “an evil and unloving generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 39 j21p grammar-connect-exceptions καὶ σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ, εἰ μὴ τὸ σημεῖον Ἰωνᾶ τοῦ προφήτου 1 except the sign of Jonah the prophet If it would appear in your language that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “but the only sign that I will give will be the sign of the prophet Jonah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) MAT 12 39 c6hy figs-activepassive σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ 1 no sign will be given to it If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will not give them a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 40 vh9i figs-merism τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας 1 three days and three nights The phrase **three days and three nights** is referring to three entire days If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “three complete days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +MAT 12 40 vh9i figs-merism τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας…τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας 2 three days and three nights The phrase **three days and three nights** is referring to three entire days If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “three complete days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) MAT 12 40 hzem figs-explicit ὥσπερ γὰρ ἦν Ἰωνᾶς ἐν τῇ κοιλίᾳ τοῦ κήτους τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας, οὕτως 1 The phrase **three days and three nights** refers to three entire day. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “three full days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) Jesus is assuming that his audience is familiar with the story of Jonah, which tells about how the prophet Jonah was swallowed by a fish because he disobeyed God. But once he repented, after three days, the fish spit him out. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could reference this story explicitly. Alternate translation: “Think about the story of Jonah the prophet in the Scriptures. He was swallowed by a large fish for three days because he disobeyed God. After he repented, three days later, the fish spit him out. Similarly,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 12 40 iuv8 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 12 40 gg65 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ τῆς γῆς 1 in the heart of the earth This phrase refers to the inside a physical grave. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 12 41 gnh1 ἄνδρες Νινευεῖται 1 The men of Nineveh Alternate translation: “The citizens of Nineveh” -MAT 12 41 b94i ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 at the judgment Alternate translation: “on the judgment day” or “when God judges people” -MAT 12 41 x8gm τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 this generation Here, **this generation** refers to the people living during the time Jesus was preaching. +MAT 12 40 iuv8 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself here in the third person. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 12 40 gg65 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ τῆς γῆς 1 in the heart of the earth The phrase **the heart of the earth** is figuratively referring to being deep in the ground. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 12 41 gnh1 figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες Νινευεῖται 1 The men of Nineveh The phrase **men of Nineveh** is referring to both men and women. Alternate translation: “Citizens of Ninevah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MAT 12 41 b94i ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 at the judgment The phrase **will stand up at the judgement** could either mean (1) that God will resurrect them, as in the UST. Or it could mean (2) that they will stand up with God as fellow judges over Israel. Alternate translation: “they will stand with God at the judgement” +MAT 12 41 x8gm τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 this generation See how you translated the word **generation** in [12:39](../12/39.md) MAT 12 41 duz2 figs-metonymy κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτήν 1 will condemn it The word **condemn** could: (1) here represent accusing. Alternate translation: “will accuse this generation of people” (2) mean God **will condemn** this generation of people because they did not repent as the people of Nineveh had. Alternate translation: “God will condemn this generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 12 41 qg29 καὶ ἰδοὺ 1 and behold The word **behold** emphasizes what Jesus says next. MAT 12 41 dbs3 πλεῖον 1 something greater Alternate translation: “someone more important” From f3781663c8b63e0f5227a98d33d615918b2bac66 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Mon, 29 Aug 2022 18:00:41 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 010/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 53 ++++++++++++++++++------------------------------ 1 file changed, 20 insertions(+), 33 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 710402ca9a..8825c5abe2 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -824,45 +824,32 @@ MAT 12 40 vh9i figs-merism τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκ MAT 12 40 hzem figs-explicit ὥσπερ γὰρ ἦν Ἰωνᾶς ἐν τῇ κοιλίᾳ τοῦ κήτους τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας, οὕτως 1 The phrase **three days and three nights** refers to three entire day. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “three full days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) Jesus is assuming that his audience is familiar with the story of Jonah, which tells about how the prophet Jonah was swallowed by a fish because he disobeyed God. But once he repented, after three days, the fish spit him out. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could reference this story explicitly. Alternate translation: “Think about the story of Jonah the prophet in the Scriptures. He was swallowed by a large fish for three days because he disobeyed God. After he repented, three days later, the fish spit him out. Similarly,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 40 iuv8 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself here in the third person. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 12 40 gg65 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ τῆς γῆς 1 in the heart of the earth The phrase **the heart of the earth** is figuratively referring to being deep in the ground. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 12 41 sn8j grammar-connect-logic-result ἄνδρες Νινευεῖται ἀναστήσονται ἐν τῇ κρίσει μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτήν; ὅτι μετενόησαν εἰς τὸ κήρυγμα Ἰωνᾶ; καὶ ἰδοὺ, πλεῖον Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “The men of Ninevah repented when Jonah came to them, and behold, something greater than Jonah is here before you. Therefore, the men of Ninevah will stand up at the time of judgment with this generation and condemn it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) MAT 12 41 gnh1 figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες Νινευεῖται 1 The men of Nineveh The phrase **men of Nineveh** is referring to both men and women. Alternate translation: “Citizens of Ninevah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MAT 12 41 b94i ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 at the judgment The phrase **will stand up at the judgement** could either mean (1) that God will resurrect them, as in the UST. Or it could mean (2) that they will stand up with God as fellow judges over Israel. Alternate translation: “they will stand with God at the judgement” MAT 12 41 x8gm τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 this generation See how you translated the word **generation** in [12:39](../12/39.md) -MAT 12 41 duz2 figs-metonymy κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτήν 1 will condemn it The word **condemn** could: (1) here represent accusing. Alternate translation: “will accuse this generation of people” (2) mean God **will condemn** this generation of people because they did not repent as the people of Nineveh had. Alternate translation: “God will condemn this generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 12 41 qg29 καὶ ἰδοὺ 1 and behold The word **behold** emphasizes what Jesus says next. -MAT 12 41 dbs3 πλεῖον 1 something greater Alternate translation: “someone more important” -MAT 12 41 zb6a figs-123person πλεῖον 1 something greater Jesus is speaking about himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 12 41 a5p8 figs-explicit Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε 1 than Jonah is here You can make explicit the implicit meaning of Jesus’ statement. Alternate translation: “than Jonah is here, yet you still have not repented, which is why God will condemn you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 12 42 zwv7 translate-names βασίλισσα νότου 1 The Queen of the South This refers to the **Queen** of Sheba. Sheba is a land south of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 12 42 kku7 ἐγερθήσεται ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 will rise up at the judgment Alternate translation: “will stand up at the judgment” +MAT 12 41 dbs3 figs-ellipsis πλεῖον Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε 1 something greater Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “something greater than Jonah is here and you have not repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 12 41 zb6a figs-123person πλεῖον 1 something greater Jesus is speaking about himself here in the third person. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 12 42 zwv7 translate-names βασίλισσα νότου 1 The Queen of the South This refers to the **Queen** of the country called Sheba. Sheba was a land south of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MAT 12 42 kku7 ἐγερθήσεται ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 will rise up at the judgment See the note on this phrase in the previous verse. MAT 12 42 z46e ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 at the judgment See how you translated this phrase in [12:41](../12/41.md). -MAT 12 42 zc72 τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 this generation Here, **this generation** refers to the people living during the time Jesus was preaching. -MAT 12 42 k4ls figs-metonymy κατακρινεῖ αὐτήν 1 condemn them See how you translated a similar statement in [12:41](../12/41.md). The word **condemn** could: (1) here represent accusing. Alternate translation: “will accuse this generation of people” (2) mean God will **condemn** this generation of people because they did not listen to wisdom as the Queen of the South had. Alternate translation: “God will condemn this generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 12 42 q8q8 figs-idiom ἦλθεν ἐκ τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς 1 she came from the ends of the earth Here, **the ends of the earth** is an idiom that means “very far away.” Alternate translation: “she came from very far away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 12 42 t521 grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι ἦλθεν ἐκ τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς ἀκοῦσαι τὴν σοφίαν Σολομῶνος 1 for she came from the ends of the earth to hear the wisdom of Solomon This statement explains why the Queen of the South will condemn the people of Jesus’ generation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -MAT 12 42 n99z καὶ ἰδοὺ 1 and behold The word **behold** adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. -MAT 12 42 aj1x πλεῖον 1 something greater Alternate translation: “someone more important” -MAT 12 42 uf5k figs-123person πλεῖον 1 something greater Jesus is speaking about himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 12 42 yra5 figs-explicit Σολομῶνος ὧδε 1 than Solomon is here You can make explicit the implicit meaning of Jesus’ statement. Alternate translation: “than Solomon is here, yet you do not listen. That is why God will condemn you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 12 43 f5jr ἀνύδρων τόπων 1 waterless places Alternate translation: “dry places” or “places where no people live” -MAT 12 43 x2ur οὐχ εὑρίσκει 1 not finding it Here, **it** refers to rest. -MAT 12 44 gey7 τότε λέγει, εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου ἐπιστρέψω ὅθεν ἐξῆλθον. 1 Then it says, ‘I will return to my house from which I departed.’ You can translate this as a statement rather than a quotation. Alternate translation: “So, the unclean spirit decides to return to the house from which it departed” -MAT 12 44 ty9b figs-metaphor εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου…ὅθεν ἐξῆλθον 1 to my house from which I departed Here, **my house** is a metaphor for the person in whom the unclean spirit was living. Alternate translation: “to the person I left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 44 cd4f figs-activepassive εὑρίσκει σχολάζοντα σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον 1 it finds it empty, having been swept out and put in order If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the unclean spirit finds that someone has swept the house clean and has put everything in the house where it belongs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 44 s6jf figs-metaphor σχολάζοντα σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον 1 empty and swept out and put in order Here, **swept out and put in order** suggests that no one is living in the house. Jesus means when an unclean spirit leaves a person, the person must invite the Holy Spirit to live in him or else the demon will come back. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 45 bhb4 figs-parables τότε πορεύεται καὶ παραλαμβάνει μεθ’ ἑαυτοῦ ἑπτὰ ἕτερα πνεύματα πονηρότερα ἑαυτοῦ, καὶ εἰσελθόντα κατοικεῖ ἐκεῖ; καὶ γίνεται τὰ ἔσχατα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκείνου χείρονα τῶν πρώτων. οὕτως ἔσται καὶ τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ τῇ πονηρᾷ 1 Then it goes and takes along with itself seven other spirits more evil than itself, and having entered, they live there. And the end of that man becomes worse than the first. It will be the same way also with this evil generation Jesus tells a parable to warn the people of the danger of not believing him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 12 45 jw1h οὕτως ἔσται καὶ τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ τῇ πονηρᾷ 1 It will be the same way also with this evil generation This means that if the people of Jesus’ generation do not believe him and become his disciples, they will be in a worse situation than they were before he came. -MAT 12 46 qj8w 0 General Information: The arrival of Jesus’ mother and brothers becomes an opportunity for him to describe his spiritual family. -MAT 12 46 ahx7 ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** alerts us to a new people in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this. -MAT 12 46 mh5f ἡ μήτηρ 1 his mother This is Mary, Jesus’ human mother. -MAT 12 46 dq8m οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his brothers Most people understand **his brothers** to refer to other sons born to Mary after Jesus—his younger brothers. Some people believe the word **brothers** here refers to Jesus’ cousins. -MAT 12 46 z97j ζητοῦντες…λαλῆσαι 1 seeking to speak Alternate translation: “wanting to speak” -MAT 12 47 qd32 figs-quotations εἶπεν δέ τις αὐτῷ, ἰδοὺ, ἡ μήτηρ σου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου ἔξω ἑστήκασιν ζητοῦντές σοι λαλῆσαι. 1 Someone said to him, “Behold, your mother and your brothers stand outside, seeking to speak to you.” You can translate this direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Someone told Jesus that his mother and brothers were outside and wanted to speak to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MAT 12 48 jm1y figs-ellipsis τῷ λέγοντι αὐτῷ 1 to the one speaking to him The details of the message the person told Jesus are understood and not repeated here. Alternate translation: “to the one who told Jesus that his mother and brothers wanted to speak to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 12 48 e535 figs-rquestion τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου καὶ τίνες εἰσὶν οἱ ἀδελφοί μου? 1 Who is my mother and who are my brothers? Jesus uses this question to teach the people. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you who are really my mother and brothers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 12 49 gk62 ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Alternate translation: “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” -MAT 12 49 rxe8 figs-metaphor ἡ μήτηρ μου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου 1 my mother and my brothers This is a metaphor that means Jesus’ disciples belong to Jesus’ spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 50 e25c ὅστις…ἂν ποιήσῃ 1 whoever may do Alternate translation: “anyone who does” +MAT 12 42 zc72 τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 this generation See how you translated **generation** in the previous verse. +MAT 12 42 q8q8 figs-idiom ἦλθεν ἐκ τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς 1 she came from the ends of the earth Here, the phrase **the ends of the earth** is an idiom that means “very far away.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “she came from very far away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 12 42 t521 grammar-connect-logic-result βασίλισσα νότου ἐγερθήσεται ἐν τῇ κρίσει μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης, καὶ κατακρινεῖ αὐτήν; ὅτι ἦλθεν ἐκ τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς ἀκοῦσαι τὴν σοφίαν Σολομῶνος; καὶ ἰδοὺ, πλεῖον Σολομῶνος ὧδε 1 for she came from the ends of the earth to hear the wisdom of Solomon If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “The Queen of Sheba came from the ends of the earth to hear the wisdom of Solomon, and behold, I am much greater than her. Therefore, she will be raised in the judgement with this generation and will judge it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +MAT 12 42 aj1x πλεῖον Σολομῶνος ὧδε 1 something greater Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “something greater than Solomon is here, and you will not come and listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 12 42 uf5k figs-123person πλεῖον 1 something greater Jesus is speaking about himself here in the third person. If it would be helpful to your readers, you can state this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 12 43 tnea figs-parables δὲ 1 Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Alternate translation: “Suppose a demon goes out of a person. And suppose it then wanders through the desert looking for another place to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) In this verse Jesus begins telling a parable that go through [12:45](../12/45.md). Jesus is teaching the people the dangers of not allowing the Holy Spirit to live in them, and how this allows demons to control them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “No I am going to teach you through telling you a story” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 12 43 f5jr figs-metonymy ἀνύδρων τόπων 1 waterless places Jesus is describing the desert figuratively by reference to the lack of water there. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the desert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] +MAT 12 44 ty9b figs-metaphor εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου…ὅθεν ἐξῆλθον 1 to my house from which I departed Here, **my house** is a metaphor for the person in whom the unclean spirit was living and controlling. If your readers would not understand what house means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to the person I left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 12 44 cd4f figs-activepassive εὑρίσκει σχολάζοντα σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον 1 it finds it empty, having been swept out and put in order If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the spirit finds that it was empty, and someone swept it and left it organized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 12 44 s6jf figs-metaphor σχολάζοντα σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον 1 empty and swept out and put in order Here, the phrase **empty, having been swept out and put in order** is figurative language referring to a house that has been cleaned and moved out of so no one lives there. Similar to this, the spirit found this person to not have any spirit living in it. Jesus is saying that the person did not have the Holy Spirit living within them so the demon came back. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “the spirit finds that the person did not have the Holy Spirit living in them, but that there was no spirit living in them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 12 47 qd32 figs-quotations εἶπεν δέ τις αὐτῷ, ἰδοὺ, ἡ μήτηρ σου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου ἔξω ἑστήκασιν ζητοῦντές σοι λαλῆσαι. 1 Someone said to him, “Behold, your mother and your brothers stand outside, seeking to speak to you.” If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “now someone said to him that his mother and brothers were standing outside seeking to speak to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +MAT 12 48 e535 figs-rquestion τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου καὶ τίνες εἰσὶν οἱ ἀδελφοί μου? 1 Who is my mother and who are my brothers? Jesus asks this question to teach the crowd about which people are a part of his spiritual family. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I will tell you who the people are that are my mother and brothers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 12 49 rxe8 translate-kinship ἡ μήτηρ μου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου 1 my mother and my brothers The phrase **my mother and my brothers** is not here referring to Jesus' actual brothers and mother, but he is referring to his disciples as his brothers and mother. Jesus says this because he considers them a part of his spiritual family. If it would be helpful to your readers, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these are like like a mother and brothers to me” or “these are like family to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) +MAT 12 50 e25c ὅστις…ἂν ποιήσῃ 1 whoever may do The word **For** here tells the reader that Jesus is explaining the previous thing he said. He is explaining that he considers as family those who obey God. Alternate translation: “For I consider the one that obeys my Father in the heavens to be my mother or my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) MAT 12 50 mq9r guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 of my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 12 50 s0yb figs-metonymy ἐν οὐρανοῖς 1 See how you translated the phrase **in the heavens** in [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) See how you translated the phrase **in the heavens** in [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 12 50 gn31 figs-metaphor αὐτός μου ἀδελφὸς, καὶ ἀδελφὴ, καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν 1 he is my brother, and sister, and mother This is a metaphor meaning that those who obey God belong to Jesus’ spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 intro s3lu 0 # Matthew 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:14-15, which are words from the Old Testament.

This chapter begins a new section. It contains some of Jesus’ parables about the kingdom of heaven.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metonymy

Jesus often says The word **heaven** when he wants his hearers to think of God, who lives in heaven ([13:11](../mat/13/11.md)).

### Implicit information

Speakers usually do not say things that they think their hearers already understand. When Matthew wrote that Jesus “sat beside the sea” ([Matthew 13:1](../mat/13/01.md)), he probably expected his hearers to know that Jesus was about to teach the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Metaphor

Speakers often use words for things that can be touched to speak of things that cannot be touched. Jesus spoke of a bird eating a seed to describe how Satan kept people from understanding Jesus’ message ([13:19](../mat/13/19.md)).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. For example, “they were scorched” ([13:6](../mat/13/06.md)). You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Parables

The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth ([13:11-13](./11.md)). MAT 13 1 r4xv 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story where Jesus begins to teach the crowds, using parables, about the kingdom of heaven. From 4ec771a143dedeab2fc9b5876a4a1c836a9b4580 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Tue, 30 Aug 2022 11:28:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 011/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 8825c5abe2..549208e0ba 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote MAT front intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Matthew

1. The birth of Jesus Christ and the beginning of his ministry (1:1-4:25)
1. Jesus’ Sermon on the Mount (5:1-7:28)
1. Jesus illustrates the kingdom of God through acts of healing (8:1-9:34)
1. Jesus’ teaching about mission and the kingdom (9:35-10:42)
1. Jesus’ teaching about the gospel of the kingdom of God. The beginning of opposition to Jesus. (11:1-12:50)
1. Jesus’ parables about the kingdom of God (13:1-52)
1. Further opposition to Jesus and misunderstanding of the kingdom of God (13:53-17:57)
1. Jesus’ teaching about life in the kingdom of God (18:1-35)
1. Jesus ministers in Judea (19:1-22:46)
1. Jesus’ teaching about the final judgment and salvation (23:1-25:46)
1. The crucifixion of Jesus, his death and resurrection (26:1-28:19)

### What is the book of Matthew about?

The Gospel of Matthew is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Matthew showed that Jesus was the Messiah, and God would save Israel through him. Matthew often explained that Jesus fulfilled the Old Testament prophecies about the Messiah. This may indicate that he expected most of his first readers to be Jewish. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Matthew,” or “The Gospel according to Matthew.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Matthew wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Matthew?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was the Apostle Matthew.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “kingdom of heaven?”

Matthew spoke of the kingdom of heaven in the same way that other gospel writers spoke of the kingdom of God. The kingdom of heaven represents God ruling over all people and all creation everywhere. Those whom God accepts into his kingdom will be blessed. They will live with God forever.

### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Matthew?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions:
* “Bless those who curse you, do good to those who hate you” (5:44)
* “For yours is the kingdom and the power and the glory forever. Amen” (6:13)
* “But this kind of demon does not go out except with prayer and fasting” (17:21)
* “For the Son of Man came to save that which was lost” (18:11)
* “Many are called, but few are chosen” (20:16)
* “Woe to you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for you devour widows’ houses, while you make a show of long prayers. You will therefore receive greater condemnation.” (23:14)

Translators are advised not to include these passages. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these passages, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Matthew’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) MAT 1 intro y7kk 0 # Matthew 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### Indentation

Some translations set a quotation from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this for the quoted material in 1:23.

### Genealogy

A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Genealogies were important to the Jewish people because family lineage is how they decided how someone functioned in society. For instance, if someone was a descendant of Aaron, they were able to become priests. Similarly, if someone was a descendant of King David, they were able to become a king. This genealogy shows that Jesus was clearly a descendant of King David, and therefore, was able to become king.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Use of the passive voice

Matthew uses the passive voice very purposefully in this chapter to indicate that Mary did not have a sexual relationship with anyone. She became pregnant with Jesus because the Holy Spirit performed a miracle. Many languages do not have a passive voice, so translators in those languages must find other ways to present the same truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-MAT 1 1 vpg1 figs-metaphor Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, υἱοῦ Δαυεὶδ, υἱοῦ Ἀβραάμ 1 of Jesus Christ, son of David, son of Abraham Here, **son** means “descendant.” If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Descendant of King David, who was a descendent of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 1 1 vpg1 figs-metaphor Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, υἱοῦ Δαυεὶδ, υἱοῦ Ἀβραάμ 1 of Jesus Christ, son of David, son of Abraham Here, the word **son** means “descendant.” If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Descendant of King David, who was a descendent of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 1 3 g8y6 translate-names 0 of Perez … Zerah … of Hezron … of Ram Unless stated otherwise, all of the names in this genealogy are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 1 5 q5bd translate-names Ῥαχάβ…Ῥούθ 1 Boaz became the father of Obed by Ruth **Rahab** and **Ruth** were the names of women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 1 11 v2im Βαβυλῶνος 1 to Babylon Here, **Babylonian** refers to the country of Babylonia, not just the city of Babylon. @@ -736,12 +736,12 @@ MAT 11 30 ynf1 figs-parallelism ὁ γὰρ ζυγός μου χρηστὸς κ MAT 12 intro y7z6 0 # Matthew 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:18-21, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Sabbath

This chapter has much to say about how God’s people are to obey the Sabbath. Jesus said that the rules that the Pharisees made up did not help people obey the Sabbath the way God wanted them to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

### “Blasphemy against the Spirit”

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Brothers and sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]]) MAT 12 1 m2n1 writing-newevent ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 1 At that time This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 12 1 tvt9 translate-unknown τῶν σπορίμων 1 the grainfields A grainfield is a place where grain is grown and harvested. This grain is usually turned into bread. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a field where grain is grown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 12 1 y5vr figs-explicit στάχυας 1 heads of grain The heads are the topmost part of the wheat plant, which is a kind of tall grass. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant. The disciples were picking the heads of grain to eat the kernels, or seeds, in them. This can be worded to show the full meaning. If this would be misunderstood in your language, think of a type of food that you have to remove from a shell or casing. Alternate translation: “picking the tops of grain and eating the seeds”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n -MAT 12 2 swl7 figs-explicit ποιοῦσιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν ποιεῖν ἐν Σαββάτῳ 1 do what is not lawful to do on the Sabbath According to the Law of Moses, people are not allowed to work on the Sabbath in order to focus on worshipping God. The Pharisees considered even the small action of plucking and rubbing heads of grain to be harvesting, and therefore work. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are harvesting grain, and that is work that the law does not permit you to do on the Sabbath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 12 1 y5vr figs-explicit στάχυας 1 heads of grain The **heads** are the topmost part of the wheat plant, which is a kind of tall grass. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant. The disciples were picking the heads of grain to eat the kernels, or seeds, in them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, think of a type of food that you have to remove from a shell or casing. Alternate translation: “picking the tops of grain and eating the seeds”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n +MAT 12 2 swl7 figs-explicit ποιοῦσιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν ποιεῖν ἐν Σαββάτῳ 1 do what is not lawful to do on the Sabbath According to the law of Moses, people are not allowed to work on the Sabbath in order to focus on worshipping God. The Pharisees considered even the small action of plucking and rubbing heads of grain to be work. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are harvesting grain, and that is work that the law does not permit you to do on the Sabbath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 3 d712 figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ, ὅτε ἐπείνασεν καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Have you never read what David did, when he was hungry, and those who were with him— This begins a question that continues into the next verse. See the note in the next verse for how to address this rhetorical question. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 4 u3ye figs-rquestion πῶς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως ἔφαγεν, ὃ οὐκ ἐξὸν ἦν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν, οὐδὲ τοῖς μετ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν μόνοις 1 Jesus asks this question to respond to the criticism of the Pharisees. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly you have read what David did when he and those with him were hungry, how he went into the God's house and ate the bread of the presence, which they was not allowed to do. Only the priests were allowed to do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 12 4 blm5 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the house of God Jesus is figuratively describing the tabernacle as the house of God. He is speaking as if it were the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “David went into the tabernacle” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) -MAT 12 4 ue7l figs-explicit τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως 1 the loaves of the presence This refers to the 12 loaves of bread that were placed on a golden table in the tabernacle or temple building as a sacrifice to God during Old Testament times. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 12 4 blm5 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the house of God Jesus is figuratively describing the tabernacle as the house of God. He is speaking as if it were the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “David went into the tabernacle” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +MAT 12 4 ue7l figs-explicit τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως 1 the loaves of the presence This refers to the 12 loaves of bread that were placed on a golden table in the tabernacle or temple building as a sacrifice to God during Old Testament times. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the 12 loaves of the bread of the presence which were in the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 4 lkx9 figs-ellipsis εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν μόνοις 1 except only for the priests Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but it was only lawful for the priests to eat it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 12 5 f79q figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι τοῖς Σάββασιν οἱ ἱερεῖς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ τὸ Σάββατον βεβηλοῦσιν, καὶ ἀναίτιοί εἰσιν? 1 have you not read in the law that on the Sabbaths the priests in the temple profane the Sabbath, but are innocent? Jesus uses a question to respond to the criticism of the Pharisees. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely you have read in the law of Moses that on the Sabbaths the priests in the temple profane the Sabbath, but are innocent.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 5 dqe9 figs-explicit τὸ Σάββατον βεβηλοῦσιν 1 profane the Sabbath The priests are said to **profane the Sabbath** because they had to fulfill their priestly duties on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “defile the Sabbath by working their priestly duties” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 41457d3f02b99e3a252054a969b33fb8be9400bc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Tue, 30 Aug 2022 14:50:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 012/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 57 ++++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ 1 file changed, 28 insertions(+), 29 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 549208e0ba..9b480d6390 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -745,67 +745,66 @@ MAT 12 4 ue7l figs-explicit τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως 1 MAT 12 4 lkx9 figs-ellipsis εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν μόνοις 1 except only for the priests Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but it was only lawful for the priests to eat it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 12 5 f79q figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι τοῖς Σάββασιν οἱ ἱερεῖς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ τὸ Σάββατον βεβηλοῦσιν, καὶ ἀναίτιοί εἰσιν? 1 have you not read in the law that on the Sabbaths the priests in the temple profane the Sabbath, but are innocent? Jesus uses a question to respond to the criticism of the Pharisees. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely you have read in the law of Moses that on the Sabbaths the priests in the temple profane the Sabbath, but are innocent.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 5 dqe9 figs-explicit τὸ Σάββατον βεβηλοῦσιν 1 profane the Sabbath The priests are said to **profane the Sabbath** because they had to fulfill their priestly duties on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “defile the Sabbath by working their priestly duties” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 12 6 k4mn figs-123person τοῦ ἱεροῦ μεῖζόν 1 greater than the temple Jesus was referring to himself as the one who is **greater than the temple**. Alternate translation: “I am someone who is more important than the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 12 7 ypj7 figs-explicit εἰ δὲ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν, ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 But if you had known what this is, ‘I desire mercy and not sacrifice,’ you would not have condemned the innocent Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Pharisees about why they were wrong for accusing Jesus' disciples of working on the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “Suppose you had understood what the phrase ‘I desire you to have mercy and not to sacrifice’ meant, then you certainly would not have condemned my innocent disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -MAT 12 7 e1ju ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν 1 I desire mercy and not sacrifice In the law of Moses, God did command the Israelites to offer sacrifices. This means that God considers **mercy** more important than the **sacrifice**. This is because, many times, the reason why sacrifice had to happen was because people were disobeying God and not being merciful. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “I would rather you be merciful to others than for you to continually offer sacrifices for your wrongful deeds. +MAT 12 6 k4mn figs-123person τοῦ ἱεροῦ μεῖζόν 1 greater than the temple Jesus was referring to himself as the one who is **greater than the temple** If it would be helpful to your readers, you can state this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I am someone who is more important than the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 12 7 ypj7 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ δὲ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν, ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 But if you had known what this is, ‘I desire mercy and not sacrifice,’ you would not have condemned the innocent Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Pharisees about why they were wrong for accusing Jesus' disciples of working on the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “Suppose you had understood what the phrase ‘I desire you to have mercy and not to sacrifice’ meant, then you certainly would not have condemned my innocent disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +MAT 12 7 e1ju ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν 1 I desire mercy and not sacrifice In the law of Moses, God did command the Israelites to offer sacrifices. This verse is saying that God would prefer the Israelites to have **mercy** than for them to have to offer a **sacrifice** for their sins. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “I would rather you be merciful to others than for you to continually offer sacrifices for your wrongful deeds. MAT 12 7 s23l figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 the innocent Jesus is using the adjective **innocent** as a noun in order to describe his disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are innocent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 12 8 l7g3 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself as the **Son of Man**. If your readers would not understand this, you can use the first person here to clarify, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 12 8 nca0 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 **Son of Man** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 12 9 y4me writing-pronouns εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν αὐτῶν 1 their synagogue The word **their** likely refers to the Pharisees who Jesus was just speaking to. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “into those Pharisees synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -MAT 12 10 xb13 translate-unknown ἄνθρωπος χεῖρα ἔχων ξηράν 1 there was a man having a withered hand This means that the man’s hand was damaged in such a way that he could not stretch it out. It was probably bent almost into a fist, making it look smaller. Alternate translation: “his hand was shriveled” or “his hand was atrophied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 12 10 c1cc writing-background καὶ ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν …ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ 1 so that they might accuse him Here, Matthew is giving background information to help to reader understand why they **questioned** Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “and they were questioning him … to try to find fault in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])\n +MAT 12 10 xb13 translate-unknown ἄνθρωπος χεῖρα ἔχων ξηράν 1 there was a man having a withered hand This means that the man’s hand was damaged in such a way that he could not stretch it out. It was probably bent almost into a fist, making it look smaller. State this in a way that would be understandable to your readers. Alternate translation: “his hand was shriveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 12 10 c1cc writing-background καὶ ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν …ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ 1 so that they might accuse him Here, Matthew is giving background information to help to reader understand why the Pharisees **questioned** Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “and they were questioning him … to try to find fault in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])\n MAT 12 11 ng4j figs-rquestion τίς ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν ἄνθρωπος, ὃς ἕξει πρόβατον ἕν, καὶ ἐὰν ἐμπέσῃ τοῦτο τοῖς Σάββασιν εἰς βόθυνον, οὐχὶ κρατήσει αὐτὸ καὶ ἐγερεῖ? 1 What man will there be among you, who, will have one sheep, and if it might fall into a pit on the Sabbaths, would not grasp hold of it and lift it out? Jesus uses a question to respond to the Pharisees. He is challenging them to think about what kind of work they do on the Sabbath. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Every one of you, if you only had one sheep, and it fell into a pit on the Sabbath, would certainly grab the sheep and lift it out.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 12 s2tu figs-rquestion πόσῳ οὖν διαφέρει ἄνθρωπος προβάτου? 1 How much more valuable, then, is a man than a sheep? Jesus asks this question to prove the point that the Pharisees would be willing to help a sheep, but not a person, on the Sabbath. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “A person is certainly more valuable than a sheep!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 13 be8u figs-imperative τότε λέγει τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ, ἔκτεινόν σου τὴν χεῖρα. 1 Then he says to the man, “Stretch out your hand.” This is an imperative, but this was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “Stretch out your hand! Be healed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) MAT 12 13 jry3 figs-activepassive ἀπεκατεστάθη, ὑγιὴς 1 it was restored to health If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed his hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 15 lbo1 figs-hyperbole ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτοὺς πάντας 1 Here the word **all** is figurative, meaning that Jesus healed many people. Jesus likely did not heal everyone. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) Here, the word **all** is figurative meaning many. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows honor. Alternate translation: “he healed many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MAT 12 15 lbo1 figs-hyperbole ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτοὺς πάντας 1 Here the word **all** is figurative, meaning that Jesus healed many people. Jesus likely did not heal everyone. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) Here, the word **all** is figurative meaning “many”. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows honor. Alternate translation: “he healed many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 12 17 mcd7 figs-activepassive τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου 1 what had been said through Isaiah the prophet If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what God spoke through the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 12 18 zkt7 figs-abstractnouns ὁ ἀγαπητός μου 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **beloved**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “one who I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 12 18 s6a4 figs-synecdoche εἰς ὃν εὐδόκησεν ἡ ψυχή μου 1 in whom my soul is well pleased Here, **soul** refers to the person as a whole. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “with whom I am very pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 12 18 jh8p figs-abstractnouns κρίσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπαγγελεῖ 1 he will announce justice to the Gentiles If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **justice**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he will proclaim that God will act justly towards the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MAT 12 19 gj1p figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἐρίσει, οὐδὲ κραυγάσει 1 He will not strive … his Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “He will not strive with people, nor will he cry around to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 12 19 jr87 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς πλατείαις 1 in the streets Here, the phrase **in the streets** is an idiom that means no one heard his voice in public. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the cities and towns where people are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 12 20 cdk2 figs-metaphor κάλαμον συντετριμμένον οὐ κατεάξει, καὶ λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει 1 He will not break a bruised reed; and he will not quench a smoking flax Both of the phrases **He will not break a bruised reed** and **and he will not quench a smoking flax** are metaphors emphasizing that God’s servant will be gentle and kind. Both **bruised reed** and **smoking flax** represent weak and hurting people. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “He will be kind to weak people, and he will be gentle to those who are hurting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 12 19 gj1p figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἐρίσει, οὐδὲ κραυγάσει 1 He will not strive … his Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “He will not strive with people, nor will he cry out loud to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 12 19 jr87 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς πλατείαις 1 in the streets Here, the phrase **in the streets** is an idiom that means in public. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the cities and towns where people are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 12 20 cdk2 figs-metaphor κάλαμον συντετριμμένον οὐ κατεάξει, καὶ λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει 1 He will not break a bruised reed; and he will not quench a smoking flax Both of the phrases **He will not break a bruised reed** and **and he will not quench a smoking flax** are metaphors emphasizing that God’s servant will be gentle and kind. Both **bruised reed** and **smoking flax** represent weak and hurting people. If your readers would not understand what these mean, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “He will be kind to weak people, and he will be gentle to those who are hurting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 20 kbu9 figs-parallelism κάλαμον συντετριμμένον οὐ κατεάξει, καὶ λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει 1 He will not break a bruised reed; and he will not quench a smoking flax Both of the phrases **He will not break a bruised reed** and **and he will not quench a smoking flax** mean the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “He will not destroy something already very weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 12 20 y8mn translate-unknown λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει 1 he will not quench a smoking flax Here, **flax** refers to a burning wick, or a small flame. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a small flame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 12 20 b6tw figs-abstractnouns ἂν ἐκβάλῃ εἰς νῖκος τὴν κρίσιν 1 he may lead justice to victory If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **victory** or **boldness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he might cause people to be justified before God, and cause them to be victorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MAT 12 21 w3rq figs-synecdoche τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 in his name Here, **name** refers to the whole person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 12 20 b6tw figs-abstractnouns ἕως ἂν ἐκβάλῃ εἰς νῖκος τὴν κρίσιν 1 he may lead justice to victory If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **justice** or **victory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “until he would cause people to be justified before God, and cause them to be victorious over death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MAT 12 21 w3rq figs-synecdoche τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 in his name Here, the word **name** refers to God himself. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 12 22 nba2 writing-newevent τότε 1 General Information: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -MAT 12 22 e1g4 figs-activepassive προσηνέχθη αὐτῷ δαιμονιζόμενος 1 Then someone was brought to him, blind and mute, demon-possessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some people brought one who a demon possessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 22 k2vt figs-nominaladj τυφλὸς καὶ κωφός 1 someone was brought to him, blind and mute Jesus is using the adjectives **blind** and **mute** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “a person who was blind and mute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 12 23 ink7 translate-unknown ὁ υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 the Son of David **Son of David** is a an important title for the Messiah, who was supposed to come and sit on David's throne. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Messiah, the Son of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 12 23 h8kf figs-metonymy υἱὸς 1 Son Here, the word **Son** is figurative for a descendant of someone. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 12 24 p1mi figs-doublenegatives οὗτος οὐκ ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια, εἰ μὴ ἐν τῷ Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 He does not cast out demons except by Beelzebul If the double negative **He does not cast out demons except by Beelzebul** would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “He throws out demons by the Beelzebul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +MAT 12 22 e1g4 figs-activepassive προσηνέχθη αὐτῷ δαιμονιζόμενος 1 Then someone was brought to him, blind and mute, demon-possessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some people brought one who was demon possessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 12 22 k2vt figs-nominaladj τυφλὸς καὶ κωφός 1 someone was brought to him, blind and mute Jesus is using the adjectives **blind** and **mute** as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “a person who was blind and mute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 12 23 ink7 translate-unknown ὁ υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 the Son of David **Son of David** is a an important title for the Messiah, who was supposed to come and rule on David's throne. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Messiah, the Son of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 12 23 h8kf figs-metonymy υἱὸς 1 Son Here, the word **Son** is figurative for a descendant of someone. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “offspring (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 12 24 p1mi figs-doublenegatives οὗτος οὐκ ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια, εἰ μὴ ἐν τῷ Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 He does not cast out demons except by Beelzebul If it would appear in your language that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “He throws out demons only by the Beelzebul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) MAT 12 25 ckth figs-explicit εἰδὼς δὲ τὰς ἐνθυμήσεις αὐτῶν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 1 This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what the scribes were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful to your readers, your could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Even though no one told Jesus, he know their thoughts. So he said to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 25 i1sd writing-proverbs πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται, καὶ πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται  1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate, and every city or house divided against itself will not stand Jesus uses a proverb to respond to the Pharisees saying that he casts out demons by Beelzebul. Translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “If the people of a nation are fighting against each other, they will certainly cause its destruction. Similarly, if people of a city or even a house are fighting against each other, they will will not be united together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) -MAT 12 25 ll42 figs-parallelism πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται…πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate, and every city or house divided against itself will not stand The phrases **Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate** and **every city or house divided against itself will not stand** mean the same thing. Jesus says the same thing to show that if any group of people fights against each other, it will eventually fall apart. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Any group of people fighting against each other will eventually fall apart and no longer be united” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MAT 12 25 g9ec figs-metonymy βασιλεία…πόλις ἢ οἰκία\n 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate Here, the words **kingdom**, **city**, refer to the people who live in them. The word **house** refers to a family, who would all live in the same house. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: "people who live in a nation … people who live in a city or house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 12 25 rvzh figs-activepassive πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People living in a country who flight against each other destroy their own country” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 12 25 ll42 figs-parallelism πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται…πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate, and every city or house divided against itself will not stand The phrases **Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate** and **every city or house divided against itself will not stand** mean the same thing. Jesus says the same thing to show that if any group of people fights against each other, it will eventually loose its unity. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Any group of people fighting against each other will eventually fall apart and no longer be united” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +MAT 12 25 g9ec figs-metonymy βασιλεία…πόλις ἢ οἰκία\n 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate Here, the words **kingdom**, **city**, refer figuratively to the people who live in them. The word **house** refers figuratively to a family, who would all live in the same house. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: "people who live in a nation … people who live in a city or house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 12 25 rvzh figs-activepassive πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People living in a country who fight against each other destroy their own country” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 12 26 i42r figs-metonymy Σατανᾶν 1 if Satan casts out Satan The second word **Satan** is figurative, referring to the demons that serve Satan. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the demons who serve Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 12 26 ah7t figs-rquestion πῶς οὖν σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ 1 How then will his kingdom stand? Jesus uses this question to show the Pharisees that accusing Jesus of casting out demons by Satan is foolish. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “His kingdom will surely not stand!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 27 gee9 figs-rquestion οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλλουσιν? 1 by whom do your sons cast them out? Jesus uses another question to challenge the Pharisees. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “certainly your sons also cast out demons by the same person as me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 27 x9je figs-metaphor οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν 1 your sons The phrase **your sons** refers to their the disciples of the Pharisees. If your readers would not understand what **sons** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “your disciples” or “your followers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 27 jja2 διὰ τοῦτο, αὐτοὶ κριταὶ ἔσονται ὑμῶν 1 For this reason they will be your judges The phrase **For this reason they will be your judges** could mean (1) that they will judge the Pharisees's accusations against Jesus to be wrong. Alternate translation: “Because of this your disciples will see that you are wrong". Or (2) they will stand with God at the end of time to judge the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “Because of this yours sons will be your judges” -MAT 12 28 zb4d grammar-connect-condition-fact But if I cast out demons by the Spirit of God, then the kingdom of God has come upon you 1 But if I Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But since I throw out demons by the Spirit of God, the kingdom of God has come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +MAT 12 27 jja2 διὰ τοῦτο, αὐτοὶ κριταὶ ἔσονται ὑμῶν 1 For this reason they will be your judges The phrase **For this reason they will be your judges** could mean (1) that they will judge the Pharisees's accusations against Jesus to be wrong. Alternate translation: “Because of this your disciples will show that you are wrong". Or (2) they will stand with God at the end of time to judge the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “Because of this yours sons will be your judges” +MAT 12 28 zb4d grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ ἐν Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ἐγὼ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 But if I Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But since I throw out demons by the Spirit of God, the kingdom of God has come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) MAT 12 28 r5dg figs-metonymy ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 then the kingdom of God has come upon you See how you translated **kingdom** in [3:2](../03/02.md).\nAlternate translation: “then God is make people a part of his people over whom he will rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n MAT 12 29 t4vu figs-parables ἢ\n 1 how is anyone able to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings unless first he might have tied up the strong man? And then he will plunder his house This parable tells about how Jesus is binding Satan and his evil spirits, and saving the people whom he had controlled previously. Make sure it is clear to your readers that this is a story. Alternate translate: “Then Jesus told them a story, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 12 29 w54c figs-rquestion πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν? 1 how is anyone able to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings unless first he might have tied up the strong man? Jesus uses a question to teach the Pharisees and the crowd that he is more powerful than Satan. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly, no one can enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings without tying up the strong man first.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 12 29 w54c figs-rquestion πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν? 1 how is anyone able to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings unless first he might have tied up the strong man? Jesus uses a question to teach the Pharisees and the crowd that he is more powerful than Satan. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly, no one can enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings without tying up the strong man first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 29 b2et figs-genericnoun τις 1 The word **anyone** is a generic noun, and is not referring to any specific person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -MAT 12 29 tsrk figs-metaphor πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι 1 To **enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings** is figurative. The **strong man** is referring to Satan. So to enter into his house and steal his belongings means to throw out demons from people who they controlled. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Someone cannot take from Satan the demons the belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 29 zluo figs-metaphor ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν 1 When someone **ties up** the strong man, who is Satan, it means either to defeat him or restrain him. This means that he is no longer able to send his demons out to harm people. If your readers would not understand what it means to **bind** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “no longer belong to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 12 29 tsrk figs-metaphor πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι 1 To **enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings** is figurative. The **strong man** is referring to Satan. So to enter into his house and steal his belongings means to throw out his demons from people who they controlled. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Someone cannot take from Satan the demons the belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 12 29 zluo figs-metaphor ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν 1 When someone **ties up** the strong man, who is Satan, it means either to defeat him or restrain him. This means that he is no longer able to rule over his demons. If your readers would not understand what it means to **bind** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “unless he first restrains him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 30 ivp9 figs-idiom ὁ μὴ ὢν μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 The one not being with me The phrase **with me** is an idiom which means to support someone or be on their side. In this instance, the religious leaders were not supporting Jesus' ministry because they thought we was controlled by Satan. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The one not supporting my work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 12 30 ek1h figs-metaphor1 ὁ μὴ συνάγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ σκορπίζει 1 the one not gathering with me scatters Jesus is using a metaphor that refers to a person either **gathering** the flock of sheep to a shepherd or making them scatter away from the shepherd. Jesus means that a person is either helping to make people become disciples of Jesus or he is making people reject Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 12 30 ek1h figs-metaphor ὁ μὴ συνάγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ σκορπίζει 1 the one not gathering with me scatters Jesus is using a metaphor that refers to a person either **gathering** the flock of sheep to a shepherd or making them scatter away from the shepherd. Jesus means that a person is either helping to make people become disciples of Jesus or he is making people reject Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 31 hy38 figs-activepassive πᾶσα ἁμαρτία καὶ βλασφημία ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 every sin and blasphemy will be forgiven men If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will commit every sin that a person commits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 12 31 t280 grammar-connect-exceptions πᾶσα ἁμαρτία καὶ βλασφημία ἀφεθήσεται τοῖς ἀνθρώποις; ἡ δὲ τοῦ Πνεύματος, βλασφημία οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται 1 If it would appear in your language that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid confusing your reader. Alternate translation: “God will forgive many sins and blasphemies, but he will not forgive the blasphemy of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) MAT 12 31 ezx8 figs-activepassive ἡ…τοῦ Πνεύματος, βλασφημία οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται 1 the blasphemy against the Spirit will not be forgiven If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But God will not forgive blasphemy of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 31 kqx0 figs-abstractnouns βλασφημία…ἡ δὲ…βλασφημία 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blasphemy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “blasphemous word one speaks…but when one blasphemes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] +MAT 12 31 kqx0 figs-abstractnouns βλασφημία…ἡ δὲ…βλασφημία 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **blasphemy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “but the blasphemous word one speaks…but when one blasphemes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] MAT 12 32 gwx2 figs-metonymy ὃς ἐὰν εἴπῃ λόγον κατὰ τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 whoever might speak a word against the Son of Man Here, the word **word** is figurative, referring to what someone says. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “If a person says anything bad about the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 12 32 h79z figs-123person τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Here, Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 12 32 z3ma figs-activepassive ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ…οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ 1 it will be forgiven him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will forgive that person…God will not forgive that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 32 lw5j figs-metonymy ἐν τούτῳ τῷ αἰῶνι οὔτε ἐν τῷ μέλλοντι 1 neither in this age, nor in the one coming Here, the phrases **this age** and **the one coming** are idioms referring to the present life and the next life. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the time we now live…in eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 12 33 bi8z writing-proverbs ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον καλὸν καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ καλόν, ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον σαπρὸν καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ σαπρόν; ἐκ γὰρ τοῦ καρποῦ, τὸ δένδρον γινώσκεται 1 Either make a tree good and its fruit good, or make the tree bad and its fruit bad The proverb **Either make the tree good and its fruit good, or make the tree bad and its fruit bad** is making a figurative comparison. It is comparing the actions of a good person to the good fruit of a healthy tree. It is also comparing the bad works of an evil person to the bad fruit of an unhealthy tree. Translate this proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “People who are well do not need to see a doctor; people who are sick do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 12 32 lw5j figs-idiom ἐν τούτῳ τῷ αἰῶνι οὔτε ἐν τῷ μέλλοντι 1 neither in this age, nor in the one coming Here, the phrases **this age** and **the one coming** are idioms referring to the present life and the next life. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the time we now live…in eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 12 33 bi8z writing-proverbs ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον καλὸν καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ καλόν, ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον σαπρὸν καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ σαπρόν; ἐκ γὰρ τοῦ καρποῦ, τὸ δένδρον γινώσκεται 1 Either make a tree good and its fruit good, or make the tree bad and its fruit bad The proverb **Either make the tree good and its fruit good, or make the tree bad and its fruit bad** is making a figurative comparison. It is comparing the actions of a good person to the good fruit of a healthy tree. It is also comparing the bad works of an evil person to the bad fruit of an unhealthy tree. Translate this proverb in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “A person is considered to be a good person if they act in a good way. But a person is considered to be a bad person if they act in an evil way. Nevertheless, you can judge whether a person is good or bad by how they act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 12 33 kl16 figs-idiom καλὸν…σαπρὸν 1 good … bad The words **good** and **bad** are figurative for healthy and unhealthy. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 12 33 kz12 figs-metaphor ἐκ γὰρ τοῦ καρποῦ, τὸ δένδρον γινώσκεται 1 for the tree is recognized by its fruit Here, **fruit** is a metaphor for what a person does. Alternate translation: “people know whether a person is good or bad by looking at the results of that person’s activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 33 nx9n figs-activepassive ἐκ γὰρ τοῦ καρποῦ, τὸ δένδρον γινώσκεται 1 for the tree is recognized by its fruit If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people know whether a tree is good or bad by looking at its fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 12 34 r1uv figs-metaphor γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν 1 You offspring of vipers Here, **You offspring of vipers** is a metaphor which is describing the behavior of the Pharisees. Vipers are poisonous snakes who can harm and kill people. The Pharisees are compared to vipers because their teaching was harming people spiritually. If your readers would not understand what this means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “You are behaving like dangerous snakes!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 34 e7x3 figs-rquestion πῶς δύνασθε ἀγαθὰ λαλεῖν, πονηροὶ ὄντες? 1 being evil, how are you able to say good things? Jesus uses a question to rebuke how evil the Pharisees behave. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you are certainly not able to say good things to people because you are so evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 9b6d8b4f2039b61f29d2bd2d42f23670bc899d5b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 31 Aug 2022 16:43:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 013/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 9b480d6390..bde348fdca 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ MAT 3 16 jh1v figs-activepassive ἀνεῴχθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ οὐρ MAT 3 16 e3na figs-simile τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ καταβαῖνον ὡσεὶ περιστερὰν ἐρχόμενον ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 coming down like a dove The phrase like a dove could mean: (1) the Spirit looked like a dove as he descended upon Jesus. Alternate translation: “he Spirit come down from heaven, looking like a dove” (2) the Spirit descend upon Jesus as a dove descends from the sky toward the ground. Alternate translation: “The Spirit of God came down from heaven as a dove comes down” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile) MAT 3 17 m2wk figs-personification φωνὴ ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν λέγουσα 1 a voice from the heavens saying Mark speaks figuratively of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. The voice is God’s voice. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven and said” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification) MAT 3 17 myz8 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου 1 my Son This is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 4 intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 5 and 16, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Devil

The devil, or Satan, is a fallen angel who attacks God's people and tries to get them to turn against God. The devil hates God and all that God created because he wants to take the place of God and be worshiped as God. rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

+MAT 4 intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure \n\nThis chapter comes immediately after the initiation of Jesus into his earthly ministry by being baptized by John the Baptist. The first thing that happens to Jesus during his earthly ministry is that he is tempted by Satan. This proves that Jesus can withstand any of the tests which Satan might test him with. \n\n## Formatting\n\nSome translators set each line of poetry to the right to show that it is poetry. In this chapter, there is poetry in [4:5](../04/05.md) and in [4:16](../04/16.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you can format these verses in this way. \n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Devil\n\nThe devil, or Satan, is a fallen angel who attacks God's people and tries to get them to turn against God. The devil hates God and all that God created because he wants to take the place of God and be worshiped as God. rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan\n \n## Important Figures of Speech\n\n### Satan and Jesus quote six different passages from the Old Testament. Make sure that you introduce these quotations in the same way throughout the chapter, in a way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])\n\n### Generic nouns are issue multiple times when Jesus quotes from the Old Testament. Make sure that your audience understands that these are referring to people in general, and not to any specific person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])\n MAT 4 1 k51m writing-newevent τότε 1 General Information: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “After this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 4 1 aq3s figs-activepassive ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνήχθη…ὑπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Jesus was led up by the Spirit If your language does not use the passive form, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Spirit led Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 4 1 wy4b figs-activepassive πειρασθῆναι ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου 1 to be tempted by the devil If your language does not use the passive form, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so the devil could tempt Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 818c78081882593502bd09291b0f4533bbf3301a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 31 Aug 2022 16:49:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 014/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index bde348fdca..6ecf0b11c5 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ MAT 3 16 jh1v figs-activepassive ἀνεῴχθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ οὐρ MAT 3 16 e3na figs-simile τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ καταβαῖνον ὡσεὶ περιστερὰν ἐρχόμενον ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 coming down like a dove The phrase like a dove could mean: (1) the Spirit looked like a dove as he descended upon Jesus. Alternate translation: “he Spirit come down from heaven, looking like a dove” (2) the Spirit descend upon Jesus as a dove descends from the sky toward the ground. Alternate translation: “The Spirit of God came down from heaven as a dove comes down” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile) MAT 3 17 m2wk figs-personification φωνὴ ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν λέγουσα 1 a voice from the heavens saying Mark speaks figuratively of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. The voice is God’s voice. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven and said” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification) MAT 3 17 myz8 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου 1 my Son This is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 4 intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure \n\nThis chapter comes immediately after the initiation of Jesus into his earthly ministry by being baptized by John the Baptist. The first thing that happens to Jesus during his earthly ministry is that he is tempted by Satan. This proves that Jesus can withstand any of the tests which Satan might test him with. \n\n## Formatting\n\nSome translators set each line of poetry to the right to show that it is poetry. In this chapter, there is poetry in [4:5](../04/05.md) and in [4:16](../04/16.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you can format these verses in this way. \n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Devil\n\nThe devil, or Satan, is a fallen angel who attacks God's people and tries to get them to turn against God. The devil hates God and all that God created because he wants to take the place of God and be worshiped as God. rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan\n \n## Important Figures of Speech\n\n### Satan and Jesus quote six different passages from the Old Testament. Make sure that you introduce these quotations in the same way throughout the chapter, in a way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])\n\n### Generic nouns are issue multiple times when Jesus quotes from the Old Testament. Make sure that your audience understands that these are referring to people in general, and not to any specific person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])\n +MAT 4 intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure \n\nThis chapter comes immediately after the initiation of Jesus into his earthly ministry by being baptized by John the Baptist. The first thing that happens to Jesus during his earthly ministry is that he is tempted by Satan. This proves that Jesus can withstand any of the tests which Satan might test him with. \n\n## Formatting\n\nSome translators set each line of poetry to the right to show that it is poetry. In this chapter, there is poetry in [4:5](../04/05.md) and in [4:16](../04/16.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you can format these verses in this way. \n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### The Devil\n\nThe Devil, or Satan, is a fallen angel who attacks God's people and tries to get them to turn against God. The devil hates God and all that God created because he wants to take the place of God and be worshiped as God. rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan\n \n## Important Figures of Speech\n\n### Satan and Jesus quote six different passages from the Old Testament. Make sure that you introduce these quotations in the same way throughout the chapter, in a way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])\n\n### Generic nouns are issue multiple times when Jesus quotes from the Old Testament. Make sure that your audience understands that these are referring to people in general, and not to any specific person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])\n MAT 4 1 k51m writing-newevent τότε 1 General Information: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “After this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 4 1 aq3s figs-activepassive ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνήχθη…ὑπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Jesus was led up by the Spirit If your language does not use the passive form, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Spirit led Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 4 1 wy4b figs-activepassive πειρασθῆναι ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου 1 to be tempted by the devil If your language does not use the passive form, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so the devil could tempt Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 04f6c7a3c7c916704c869cf92eba340b1b05d1d2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 31 Aug 2022 17:59:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 015/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 6ecf0b11c5..83089ee1d1 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ MAT 4 24 unqn figs-hyperbole προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας το MAT 4 24 p3nf translate-unknown σεληνιαζομένους 1 the epileptic This refers to someone who goes unconscious and their body moves uncontrollably. If your readers would not be familiar with this disease, you could use the name of something like this from your language, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “those who sometimes become unconscious and move uncontrollably” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 4 24 qk4c translate-unknown καὶ παραλυτικούς 1 and the paralytic A person who is a **paralytic** is someone who is not able to use a large portion of their body due to injury or sickness. If your readers would not be familiar with this sickness, you could use the name of something like this in your language, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “someone who is paralyzed” or “someone who is not able to use a large portion of their body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 4 25 i9m7 translate-names Δεκαπόλεως 1 the Decapolis This name means “the Ten Towns.” This is the name of a region to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 5 intro awz8 0 # Matthew 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.

Matthew 5:3-10, known as the Beatitudes or Blessings, has been set apart by being set farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text, with each line beginning with the word “blessed.” This way of placing the words on the page highlights the poetic form of this teaching.

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “His disciples”

It is possible to refer to anyone who followed Jesus as a follower or disciple. Jesus selected twelve of his followers to become his closest disciples, “the twelve disciples.” They would later become known as the apostles.

### Generic Noun Phrases

In this chapter, because Jesus is talking to a very large crowd, he often uses words such as “you”, “those”, “a person”, “someone” or other ways of speaking about people in general. He is not speaking about any particular person. This is a common practice when giving important universal teachers as Jesus is doing here. Express these phrases in a way that is natural in your language for speaking about people in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])

### The Law

Many times in this chapter, it sounds like Jesus contrasts what the law says with “but I say”. Jesus is not actually contrasting what he says with the law, but is just expanding on the meaning of the law for his listeners, to apply it to their lives. Make sure this is clear to your readers.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### You singular and you plural

In this chapter, Jesus is talking to a large crowd of his followers. Throughout the chapter, Jesus switches between using you in the singular and you in the plural. In both instances he is talking to the same people. When he is using the singular, he is referring to all of the individuals in the crowd, but is still referring to the crowd as a whole. Your language may require you to use a plural here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MAT 5 intro awz8 0 # Matthew 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n### Many people call the words from [5:2](../05/02.md) to [7:28](../07/28.md) the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught to a crowd of his disciples. Be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.\n\n## Formatting\n\n### Verses [5:3-11](../05/03-11.md) is known as the Beatitudes, or Blessings. Many translators set it farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text, with each line beginning with the word “blessed.” This helps the reader to see that the section is poetic.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\n## Important Figures of Speech\n\n### Metaphor\n\n### Metaphors are used often in this chapter to describe groups of people or give instructions on how to live. If your readers would not understand metaphors, make sure to translate them in a way that would be understandable to them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Generic Noun Phrases\n\nIn this chapter, because Jesus is talking to a very large crowd, he often uses words such as “you”, “those”, “a person”, “someone” or other ways of speaking about people in general. He is not speaking about any particular person about a particular person in the crowd, but is talking about people in general. This is a common practice when giving important universal teachers as Jesus is doing here. Express these phrases in a way that is natural in your language for speaking about people in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])\n\n### Nominal Adjectives\n\nIn this chapter, Jesus often uses adjectives to talk about specific groups of people. People in the crowd were likely parts of these groups. Some examples are "poor", "pure" and "merciful". Make sure that your readers know how Jesus is using these adjectives. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### You singular and you plural\n\nIn this chapter, Jesus is talking to a large crowd of his followers. Throughout the chapter, Jesus switches between using you in the singular and you in the plural. In both instances he is talking to the same people. When he is using the singular, he is referring to all of the individuals in the crowd, but is still referring to the crowd as a whole. Your language may require you to use a plural here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The Law\n\nMany times in this chapter, it sounds like Jesus contrasts what the law says with the phrase “but I say”. Jesus is not actually contrasting what he says with the law, but is just expanding on the meaning of the law for his listeners, to apply it to their lives. Make sure this is clear to your readers.\n\n MAT 5 1 c5rq writing-newevent δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 5 2 q9mm figs-idiom ἀνοίξας τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 having opened his mouth Here, **having opened his mouth** is an idiom meaning to speak. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when Jesus began to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 5 3 jhdg figs-idiom μακάριοι 1 The phrase **Blessed {are}** indicates that God is giving favor to people and that their situation is positive or good. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “How good it is for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From 3a31db8c354d543480417c21dfe32ddf08eb5720 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 31 Aug 2022 18:01:03 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 016/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 83089ee1d1..349a3eab77 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ MAT 4 24 unqn figs-hyperbole προσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας το MAT 4 24 p3nf translate-unknown σεληνιαζομένους 1 the epileptic This refers to someone who goes unconscious and their body moves uncontrollably. If your readers would not be familiar with this disease, you could use the name of something like this from your language, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “those who sometimes become unconscious and move uncontrollably” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 4 24 qk4c translate-unknown καὶ παραλυτικούς 1 and the paralytic A person who is a **paralytic** is someone who is not able to use a large portion of their body due to injury or sickness. If your readers would not be familiar with this sickness, you could use the name of something like this in your language, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “someone who is paralyzed” or “someone who is not able to use a large portion of their body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 4 25 i9m7 translate-names Δεκαπόλεως 1 the Decapolis This name means “the Ten Towns.” This is the name of a region to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 5 intro awz8 0 # Matthew 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n### Many people call the words from [5:2](../05/02.md) to [7:28](../07/28.md) the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught to a crowd of his disciples. Be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.\n\n## Formatting\n\n### Verses [5:3-11](../05/03-11.md) is known as the Beatitudes, or Blessings. Many translators set it farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text, with each line beginning with the word “blessed.” This helps the reader to see that the section is poetic.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\n## Important Figures of Speech\n\n### Metaphor\n\n### Metaphors are used often in this chapter to describe groups of people or give instructions on how to live. If your readers would not understand metaphors, make sure to translate them in a way that would be understandable to them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Generic Noun Phrases\n\nIn this chapter, because Jesus is talking to a very large crowd, he often uses words such as “you”, “those”, “a person”, “someone” or other ways of speaking about people in general. He is not speaking about any particular person about a particular person in the crowd, but is talking about people in general. This is a common practice when giving important universal teachers as Jesus is doing here. Express these phrases in a way that is natural in your language for speaking about people in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])\n\n### Nominal Adjectives\n\nIn this chapter, Jesus often uses adjectives to talk about specific groups of people. People in the crowd were likely parts of these groups. Some examples are "poor", "pure" and "merciful". Make sure that your readers know how Jesus is using these adjectives. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### You singular and you plural\n\nIn this chapter, Jesus is talking to a large crowd of his followers. Throughout the chapter, Jesus switches between using you in the singular and you in the plural. In both instances he is talking to the same people. When he is using the singular, he is referring to all of the individuals in the crowd, but is still referring to the crowd as a whole. Your language may require you to use a plural here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The Law\n\nMany times in this chapter, it sounds like Jesus contrasts what the law says with the phrase “but I say”. Jesus is not actually contrasting what he says with the law, but is just expanding on the meaning of the law for his listeners, to apply it to their lives. Make sure this is clear to your readers.\n\n +MAT 5 intro awz8 0 # Matthew 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n### Many people call the words from [5:2](../05/02.md) to [7:28](../07/28.md) the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught to a crowd of his disciples. Be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.\n\n## Formatting\n\n### Verses [5:3-11](../05/03-11.md) is known as the Beatitudes, or Blessings. Many translators set it farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text, with each line beginning with the word “blessed.” This helps the reader to see that the section is poetic.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\n## Important Figures of Speech\n\n### Metaphor\n\n### Metaphors are used often in this chapter to describe groups of people or give instructions on how to live. If your readers would not understand metaphors, make sure to translate them in a way that would be understandable to them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Generic Noun Phrases\n\nIn this chapter, because Jesus is talking to a very large crowd, he often uses words such as “you”, “those”, “a person”, “someone” or other ways of speaking about people in general. He is not speaking about any particular person about a particular person in the crowd, but is talking about people in general. This is a common practice when giving important universal teachers as Jesus is doing here. Express these phrases in a way that is natural in your language for speaking about people in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])\n\n### Nominal Adjectives\n\nIn this chapter, Jesus often uses adjectives to talk about specific groups of people. People in the crowd were likely parts of these groups. Some examples are "poor", "pure" and "merciful". Make sure that your readers know how Jesus is using these adjectives. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### You singular and you plural\n\nIn this chapter, Jesus is talking to a large crowd of his followers. Throughout the chapter, Jesus switches between using you in the singular and you in the plural. In both instances he is talking to the same people. When he is using the singular, he is referring to all of the individuals in the crowd, but is still referring to the crowd as a whole. Your language may require you to use a plural here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### The Law\n\nMany times in this chapter, it sounds like Jesus contrasts what the law says with the phrase “but I say”. Jesus is not actually contrasting what he says with the law, but is just expanding on the meaning of the law for his listeners, to apply it to their lives. Make sure it is clear to your readers that Jesus is not contradicting the law. \n\n MAT 5 1 c5rq writing-newevent δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 5 2 q9mm figs-idiom ἀνοίξας τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 having opened his mouth Here, **having opened his mouth** is an idiom meaning to speak. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when Jesus began to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 5 3 jhdg figs-idiom μακάριοι 1 The phrase **Blessed {are}** indicates that God is giving favor to people and that their situation is positive or good. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “How good it is for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From 1000229992ebf70eb703dfcbf7dd1c48f76058a9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Thu, 1 Sep 2022 12:58:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 017/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 349a3eab77..8b9ef8cd6b 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ MAT 5 46 se4k figs-rquestion τίνα μισθὸν ἔχετε? 1 what reward d MAT 5 46 cb77 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ καὶ οἱ τελῶναι τὸ αὐτὸ ποιοῦσιν? 1 Do not even the tax collectors do the same thing? Jesus asks this question to show that even people who are considered to be the most evil do this. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Even the tax collectors do the same thing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 5 47 ba6e figs-rquestion τί περισσὸν ποιεῖτε? οὐχὶ καὶ οἱ ἐθνικοὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ποιοῦσιν 1 what do you do more? Jesus asks these questions to teach his followers that they are no better than the Gentiles if they do not welcome people who are not like them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you do not do anything better than those who do not know God. For the Gentiles do this very thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 5 48 l6pa guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 6 intro jrj2 0 # Matthew 6 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Matthew 6 continues Jesus’ extended teaching known as “The Sermon on the Mount.”

You may wish to set apart the prayer in 6:9-11 by placing it farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text.

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### You singular and you plural

In this chapter, as in the last chapter, Jesus is talking to a large crowd of his followers. Throughout the chapter, Jesus switches between using you in the singular and you in the plural. In both instances he is talking to the same people. When he is using the singular, he is referring to all of the individuals in the crowd, but is still referring to the crowd as a whole. Your language may require you to use a plural here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MAT 6 intro jrj2 0 # Matthew 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n### This chapter continues the section called the Sermon on the Mount. See the previous chapter's introduction for more information about it. \n\n##Formatting\n\n### Many translators set verses [6:9-13](../06/13.md) to the right to show that they are a prayer. Jesus is teaching his disciples how to pray to the Father. If this would be helpful to your readers, you can set these verses to the right. \n\n## Special Concepts\n\n### Fasting\n\nIn this chapter, Jesus talks about fast. Fasting is not eating for an extended period of time. People often do this when they want to focus on praying to God for something that they need. rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/fast\n\n## Important Figures of Speech\n\n### Metaphor\n\nJesus uses metaphors often in this chapter to teach the crowd lessons about how to they should live. Translate these metaphors in a meaningful way in your language, or use plain language to explain what Jesus was teaching. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Metonymy\n\nJesus uses metonymy in this chapter to refer to his Father. He refers to him in this way out of honor. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nJesus uses rhetorical questions in this chapter to ask his listeners questions that will make think deeply about what he is saying. Often when rhetorical questions are used, Jesus is being emphatic. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n## Gender Notations\n\nIn Jesus' teachings, he often uses the word "men" when referring to people in general. This term can be used to refer to both men and women. Make sure this is clear to your audience. \n\n### Generic Noun Phrases\n\nIn this chapter, because Jesus is talking to a very large crowd, he often uses words such as “you”, “those”, “a person”, “someone” or other ways of speaking about people in general. He is not speaking about any particular person about a particular person in the crowd, but is talking about people in general. This is a common practice when giving important universal teachers as Jesus is doing here. Express these phrases in a way that is natural in your language for speaking about people in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])\n\n### You singular and you plural\n\nIn this chapter, as in the last chapter, Jesus is talking to a large crowd of his followers. Throughout the chapter, Jesus switches between using you in the singular and you in the plural. In both instances he is talking to the same people. When he is using the singular, he is referring to all of the individuals in the crowd, but is still referring to the crowd as a whole. Your language may require you to use a plural here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n MAT 6 1 zvn1 figs-you ὑμῶν…μὴ ποιεῖν…οὐκ ἔχετε…ὑμῶν 1 Jesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should and should not do. All occurrences of **you** and **your** are plural in this chapter unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 6 1 bgc7 figs-explicit ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι αὐτοῖς 1 before men to be seen by them It is implied that those who see this person will honor him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in front of people to be seen by them so they will give you honor for what you have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 6 1 vvm4 figs-activepassive ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι αὐτοῖς 1 before men to be seen by them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in front of people just so that they can see you and honor you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From f5ab5b0bf685a8828e735296181cda447a6eec0c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Thu, 1 Sep 2022 13:44:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 018/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 8b9ef8cd6b..813b803b25 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ MAT 6 32 unz1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** MAT 6 33 ep2c figs-metonymy ζητεῖτε…πρῶτον τὴν βασιλείαν καὶ τὴν δικαιοσύνην αὐτοῦ 1 seek first his kingdom and his righteousness Here, **kingdom** refers to God’s rule as king. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Most importantly, be one of God's people, and do what he desires of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 6 33 ak39 figs-activepassive ταῦτα πάντα προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 all these things will be added to you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will provide all these things for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 6 34 xdg7 figs-personification ἡ…αὔριον μεριμνήσει ἑαυτῆς 1 tomorrow will be anxious for itself Jesus speaks of **tomorrow** as if it were a person who could worry. Jesus means that a person will have enough to worry about when the next day comes. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -MAT 7 intro bz7e 0 # Matthew 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Matthew 5-7

Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.

### “By their fruits you will know them”

Fruit is a common image in the scriptures. It is used to describe the results of either good or bad actions. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### You singular and you plural

In this chapter, as in the past two chapters, Jesus is talking to a large crowd of his followers. Throughout the chapter, Jesus switches between using you in the singular and you in the plural. In both instances he is talking to the same people. When he is using the singular, he is referring to all of the individuals in the crowd, but is still referring to the crowd as a whole. Your language may require you to use a plural here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+MAT 7 intro bz7e 0 # Matthew 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure \n\nThis is the final chapter in the section called the Sermon on the Mount. See chapter five introduction for more information about the Sermon on the Mount. \n\n## Formatting\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “By their fruits you will know them”\n\nFruit is a common image in the scriptures. It is used to describe the results of either good or bad actions. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])\n\n## Figures of Speech\n\n### Metaphor\n\nJesus uses metaphors often in this chapter to teach the crowd lessons about how to they should live. Translate these metaphors in a meaningful way in your language, or use plain language to explain what Jesus was teaching. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nJesus uses rhetorical questions in this chapter to ask his listeners questions that will make think deeply about what he is saying. Often when rhetorical questions are used, Jesus is being emphatic. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### You singular and you plural\n\nIn this chapter, as in the past two chapters, Jesus is talking to a large crowd of his followers. Throughout the chapter, Jesus switches between using you in the singular and you in the plural. In both instances he is talking to the same people. When he is using the singular, he is referring to all of the individuals in the crowd, but is still referring to the crowd as a whole. Your language may require you to use a plural here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n MAT 7 1 xk6w figs-explicit μὴ κρίνετε 1 Do not judge It is implied here that **judge** has a strong negative meaning. Jesus is not saying that judgment is always bad, but that in this case it is negative. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not condemn people harshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 7 1 bk8y figs-activepassive μὴ κριθῆτε 1 you may not be judged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will not condemn you harshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 7 2 kj24 figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ…κρίματι κρίνετε, κριθήσεσθε 1 with the judgment you judge, you will be judged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will condemn you in the same way you condemn others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 89e7e4f32e5da6c260aa9427cbb6bc1417c7caf1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Thu, 1 Sep 2022 13:59:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 019/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 813b803b25..77bb69d1ca 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -271,11 +271,11 @@ MAT 6 intro jrj2 0 # Matthew 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n### This chap MAT 6 1 zvn1 figs-you ὑμῶν…μὴ ποιεῖν…οὐκ ἔχετε…ὑμῶν 1 Jesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should and should not do. All occurrences of **you** and **your** are plural in this chapter unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 6 1 bgc7 figs-explicit ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι αὐτοῖς 1 before men to be seen by them It is implied that those who see this person will honor him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in front of people to be seen by them so they will give you honor for what you have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 6 1 vvm4 figs-activepassive ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι αὐτοῖς 1 before men to be seen by them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in front of people just so that they can see you and honor you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 6 1 p335 figs-gendernotations ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MAT 6 1 p335 figs-gendernotations ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. See the note in the introduction. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MAT 6 1 juj5 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τῷ Πατρὶ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 6 1 x9wq figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 See how you translated this in [5:16](../05/16.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 6 2 d8kw figs-metaphor μὴ σαλπίσῃς ἔμπροσθέν σου 1 do not sound a trumpet before yourself Here, **do not sound a trumpet** could mean (1) that they should not blow an actual trumpet when they go to give, or (2) **do not blow your trumpet** is figurative for bringing attention to yourself. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “do not bring much attention to yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 6 2 bc9b figs-genericnoun οἱ ὑποκριταὶ 1 **hypocrites** is a generic noun phrase. This is not referring to a specific person, but to people who behave this way in general. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “people who act in a hypocritical way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MAT 6 2 bc9b figs-genericnoun οἱ ὑποκριταὶ 1 **hypocrites** is not referring to a specific person, but to people who behave this way in general. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “people who act in a hypocritical way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 6 2 dk6u figs-activepassive ὅπως δοξασθῶσιν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Truly I say to you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order that people might honor them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 6 2 q6dq figs-irony ἀπέχουσιν τὸν μισθὸν αὐτῶν 1 Often times, to **have** a **reward** is a positive thing. Here, Jesus means it in a negative way that their reward is not with God. If this would be misunderstood in your language, consider expressing the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their reward is not with God in the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) MAT 6 3 z4c1 figs-yousingular σοῦ…σου…σου 1 All occurrences of **you** and **your** are singular in this verse. You might need to translate these as plural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ MAT 6 3 vca2 figs-metaphor μὴ γνώτω ἡ ἀριστερά σου τί π MAT 6 5 m54u figs-you προσεύχῃ…ὑμῖν 1 Jesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should and should not do. The first occurrence of **you** is singular and second is plural. In some languages they both may need to be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 6 5 d6t7 figs-genericnoun οἱ ὑποκριταί 1 See the note in [5:2](../05/02.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 6 5 rzpj figs-activepassive ὅπως φανῶσιν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 so that they may be seen by men If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that people will see them and give them honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 6 5 ub7u figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MAT 6 5 ub7u figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 See the note in the introduction. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MAT 6 6 dqv4 translate-unknown εἴσελθε εἰς τὸ ταμεῖόν σου 1 enter into your inner chamber, and having shut your door The **inner chamber** was a small, private room where people stored belongings, as well as food for their animals. If your readers would not understand this, you can state it plainly. Alternate translation: “go into your private storage room” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 6 6 kkn7 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τῷ Πατρί σου 1 to your Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 6 7 z0v4 figs-genericnoun οἱ ἐθνικοί 1 If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “Consider fig trees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) Jesus is speaking of **Gentiles** in general, and not to any specific gentiles. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “Gentile people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) @@ -302,11 +302,11 @@ MAT 6 12 yi9s figs-metaphor τὰ ὀφειλήματα…τοῖς ὀφειλ MAT 6 13 l8u6 figs-abstractnouns μὴ εἰσενέγκῃς ἡμᾶς εἰς πειρασμόν 1 do not bring us into temptation If your readers would misunderstand the abstract noun **temptation**, you can express it as a verb. Alternate translation: “do not let anything tempt us” or “do not let anything cause us to desire to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 6 13 r6v6 figs-abstractnouns ἀλλὰ ῥῦσαι ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 Here, **evil one** could also mean evil. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of evil, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “protect us from doing evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 6 13 zfsy translate-textvariants 1 Most important manuscripts do not include "For yours is the kingdom and the power and the glory forever. Amen." See the discussion of textual issues in the chapter introduction to decide whether to include this sentence in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -MAT 6 14 xvfv figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MAT 6 14 xvfv figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) See the note in the introduction. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MAT 6 14 z79a figs-abstractnouns τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν 1 their trespasses If your readers would misunderstand the abstract noun **trespasses**, you can express it as a verb. Alternate translation: “when they trespass against you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 6 14 v7ne guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 6 15 pi3z figs-abstractnouns τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν 1 those of men … your trespasses See how you translated trespasses in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MAT 6 15 lk8a figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “those people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MAT 6 15 lk8a figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 See the note in the introduction Alternate translation: “those people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MAT 6 16 xv6b figs-explicit ἀφανίζουσιν…τὰ πρόσωπα αὐτῶν 1 they disfigure their faces The hypocrites would not wash **their faces**. They did this purposely to draw attention to themselves so that people would see them and give them honor for fasting. If someone was fasting, it would be obvious from their appearance. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they…make it obvious to others that they are fasting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 6 16 ix6h figs-irony ἀπέχουσιν τὸν μισθὸν αὐτῶν 1 Truly I say to you See how you translated **they have their reward in full** in [6:2](../06/02.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) MAT 6 17 c20j figs-yousingular σὺ…σου…σου 1 Jesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should or should not do. All occurrences of **you** and **your** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) From c3ba3b9f9bc540ef732dad75498ca4ee1123ef28 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Thu, 1 Sep 2022 14:37:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 020/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 77bb69d1ca..33ccb389d0 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ MAT 6 32 unz1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** MAT 6 33 ep2c figs-metonymy ζητεῖτε…πρῶτον τὴν βασιλείαν καὶ τὴν δικαιοσύνην αὐτοῦ 1 seek first his kingdom and his righteousness Here, **kingdom** refers to God’s rule as king. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Most importantly, be one of God's people, and do what he desires of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 6 33 ak39 figs-activepassive ταῦτα πάντα προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 all these things will be added to you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will provide all these things for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 6 34 xdg7 figs-personification ἡ…αὔριον μεριμνήσει ἑαυτῆς 1 tomorrow will be anxious for itself Jesus speaks of **tomorrow** as if it were a person who could worry. Jesus means that a person will have enough to worry about when the next day comes. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -MAT 7 intro bz7e 0 # Matthew 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure \n\nThis is the final chapter in the section called the Sermon on the Mount. See chapter five introduction for more information about the Sermon on the Mount. \n\n## Formatting\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “By their fruits you will know them”\n\nFruit is a common image in the scriptures. It is used to describe the results of either good or bad actions. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])\n\n## Figures of Speech\n\n### Metaphor\n\nJesus uses metaphors often in this chapter to teach the crowd lessons about how to they should live. Translate these metaphors in a meaningful way in your language, or use plain language to explain what Jesus was teaching. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nJesus uses rhetorical questions in this chapter to ask his listeners questions that will make think deeply about what he is saying. Often when rhetorical questions are used, Jesus is being emphatic. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### You singular and you plural\n\nIn this chapter, as in the past two chapters, Jesus is talking to a large crowd of his followers. Throughout the chapter, Jesus switches between using you in the singular and you in the plural. In both instances he is talking to the same people. When he is using the singular, he is referring to all of the individuals in the crowd, but is still referring to the crowd as a whole. Your language may require you to use a plural here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n +MAT 7 intro bz7e 0 # Matthew 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure \n\nThis is the final chapter in the section called the Sermon on the Mount. See chapter five introduction for more information about the Sermon on the Mount. \n\n### “By their fruits you will know them”\n\nFruit is a common image in the scriptures used to describe the results of either good or bad actions. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])\n\n## Figures of Speech\n\n### Metaphor\n\nJesus uses metaphors often in this chapter to teach the crowd lessons about how to they should live. Translate these metaphors in a meaningful way in your language, or use plain language to explain what Jesus was teaching. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nJesus uses rhetorical questions in this chapter to ask his listeners questions that will make think deeply about what he is saying. Often when rhetorical questions are used, Jesus is being emphatic. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### You singular and you plural\n\nIn this chapter, as in the past two chapters, Jesus is talking to a large crowd of his followers. Throughout the chapter, Jesus switches between using you in the singular and you in the plural. In both instances he is talking to the same people. When he is using the singular, he is referring to all of the individuals in the crowd, but is still referring to the crowd as a whole. Your language may require you to use a plural here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n MAT 7 1 xk6w figs-explicit μὴ κρίνετε 1 Do not judge It is implied here that **judge** has a strong negative meaning. Jesus is not saying that judgment is always bad, but that in this case it is negative. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not condemn people harshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 7 1 bk8y figs-activepassive μὴ κριθῆτε 1 you may not be judged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will not condemn you harshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 7 2 kj24 figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ…κρίματι κρίνετε, κριθήσεσθε 1 with the judgment you judge, you will be judged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will condemn you in the same way you condemn others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 26de5dc01e875ebac8db65b64f3520e7bc1c84fd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Fri, 2 Sep 2022 14:05:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 021/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 33ccb389d0..fb2ba7f64f 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ MAT 7 26 o85y figs-activepassive ὁμοιωθήσεται ἀνδρὶ μωρ MAT 7 27 k4hi figs-abstractnouns ἦν ἡ πτῶσις αὐτῆς μεγάλη 1 its destruction was great If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **destruction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the waters and the wind greatly destroyed it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 7 28 jrh7 writing-endofstory 0 General Information: This verse describe how the people in the crowds reacted to Jesus’ teaching. This marks the end of the Sermon on the Mount. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) MAT 7 28 fo8g figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of boldness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we may be bold” or “we may act boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **teaching**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by the way that he taught them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MAT 8 intro f33a 0 # Matthew 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter begins a new section.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Miracles

Jesus performed miracles to show that he could control things that no other people could control. He also showed that it is proper to worship him because he performed miracles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]]) +MAT 8 intro f33a 0 # Matthew 8 General Notes\n\n## Figures of Speech\n\n### Metonymy\n\nMetonymy is used often in this chapter to refer to people. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nJesus uses rhetorical questions in this chapter to ask his listeners questions that will make think deeply about what he is saying. Often when rhetorical questions are used, Jesus is being emphatic. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### Idiom\n\nIdioms are often used in this chapter. These may not be understood by your audience, as they were sayings that only people in that culture would have understood. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])\n MAT 8 1 qb1d writing-newevent δὲ 1 General Information: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 8 2 vas8 writing-participants ἰδοὺ, λεπρὸς προσελθὼν 1 behold This introduces the **leper** as a new character in the story. A leper is a person with a skin disease. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a common way in your language for introducing a new person to a story. Alternate translation: “There was a man who was a leper approaching him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) MAT 8 2 yc3f grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν θέλῃς δύνασαί με καθαρίσαι 1 if you would be willing The leper is using a hypothetical situation to show that he believes Jesus will heal him. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “If you would desire to heal me, you are able to do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ MAT 8 31 cgf7 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us Here, **us** is exclusive, referrin MAT 8 33 ev2w figs-activepassive τὰ τῶν δαιμονιζομένων 1 the things concerning the men who were possessed by demons If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what Jesus did to help the men whom demons were controlling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 8 34 j6sp figs-metonymy πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 the whole city The word **city** is a metonym for the people of the city. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the people who lived in the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 8 34 xb5x figs-hyperbole πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 the whole city The word **whole** is an exaggeration to emphasize how very many people came out to see Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows this. Alternate translation: “many of the people in the city (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MAT 9 intro tg41 0 # Matthew 9 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Sinners”

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Rhetorical questions

Speakers in this chapter asked questions to which they already knew the answer. They asked the questions to show that they were not happy with the hearers or to teach them or to get them to think. Your language may have another way of doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Proverbs

Proverbs are very short sentences that use words that are easy to remember to tell about something that is generally true. People who understand proverbs usually have to know much about the language and culture of the speaker. When you translate the proverbs in this chapter, you may have to use many more words than the speakers used so that you can add information that the hearers knew but your reader do not know. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 9 intro tg41 0 # Matthew 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n## Formatting\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n## Figures of Speech\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n MAT 9 1 lje9 figs-explicit διεπέρασεν 1 into his own city Here, Matthew does not specify that Jesus **crossed over** the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he crossed over the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 9 2 i6xp writing-newevent ἰδοὺ 1 behold Here, **behold** introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “When they arrived in Jesus' town” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 9 2 szd4 translate-unknown παραλυτικὸν 1 they were bringing See how you translated **paralytic** in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) From 89efa20cdeefb14b568ae7c17f0e7a4b8906c7f5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Fri, 2 Sep 2022 20:26:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 022/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 22 +++++++--------------- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 15 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index fb2ba7f64f..74b342867c 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -851,21 +851,13 @@ MAT 12 50 mq9r guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 of my MAT 12 50 s0yb figs-metonymy ἐν οὐρανοῖς 1 See how you translated the phrase **in the heavens** in [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) See how you translated the phrase **in the heavens** in [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 12 50 gn31 figs-metaphor αὐτός μου ἀδελφὸς, καὶ ἀδελφὴ, καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν 1 he is my brother, and sister, and mother This is a metaphor meaning that those who obey God belong to Jesus’ spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 intro s3lu 0 # Matthew 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:14-15, which are words from the Old Testament.

This chapter begins a new section. It contains some of Jesus’ parables about the kingdom of heaven.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metonymy

Jesus often says The word **heaven** when he wants his hearers to think of God, who lives in heaven ([13:11](../mat/13/11.md)).

### Implicit information

Speakers usually do not say things that they think their hearers already understand. When Matthew wrote that Jesus “sat beside the sea” ([Matthew 13:1](../mat/13/01.md)), he probably expected his hearers to know that Jesus was about to teach the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Metaphor

Speakers often use words for things that can be touched to speak of things that cannot be touched. Jesus spoke of a bird eating a seed to describe how Satan kept people from understanding Jesus’ message ([13:19](../mat/13/19.md)).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. For example, “they were scorched” ([13:6](../mat/13/06.md)). You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Parables

The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth ([13:11-13](./11.md)). -MAT 13 1 r4xv 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story where Jesus begins to teach the crowds, using parables, about the kingdom of heaven. -MAT 13 1 vx5y ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 On that day These events happened on the same **day** as those in the previous chapter. -MAT 13 1 cy1t ἐξελθὼν…τῆς οἰκίας 1 having gone out of the house It is not mentioned at whose **house** Jesus was staying. -MAT 13 1 zjb3 figs-explicit ἐκάθητο παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 was sitting beside the sea It is implied that the reason he sat down was to teach the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 2 d16z figs-explicit ὥστε αὐτὸν εἰς πλοῖον ἐμβάντα καθῆσθαι 1 so that, having stepped into a boat, he sat down It is implied that Jesus got into a boat because it would make it easier to teach the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 2 jge7 translate-unknown πλοῖον 1 a boat This **boat** was probably an open, wooden fishing boat with a sail. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 13 3 e99p 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus describes the kingdom of heaven by telling a parable about a person who sows seeds. -MAT 13 3 f5mv καὶ ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἐν παραβολαῖς 1 And he spoke many things to them in parables Alternate translation: “And Jesus told them many things in parables” -MAT 13 3 w5p3 αὐτοῖς 1 to them Alternate translation: “to the people in the crowd” -MAT 13 3 m97r ἰδοὺ 1 Behold The word **Behold** calls attention to what is to be said next. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” or “Look” or “Listen” -MAT 13 3 ur64 ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων τοῦ σπείρειν 1 a sower went out to sow Alternate translation: “a farmer went out to scatter seeds in a field” -MAT 13 4 c6g6 καὶ ἐν τῷ σπείρειν αὐτὸν 1 And as he sowed Alternate translation: “And as the farmer scattered the seed” -MAT 13 4 v7r8 παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 beside the road Here, **road** may refer to a path next to the field. The ground there would have been hard from people walking on it. -MAT 13 4 qr2d κατέφαγεν αὐτά 1 devoured them Alternate translation: “ate all the seeds” -MAT 13 5 l2g6 τὰ πετρώδη 1 the rocky ground This is ground full of rocks with just a thin layer of soil on top of the rocks. +MAT 13 1 vx5y writing-newevent ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 On that day This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later that same day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]] +MAT 13 1 cy1t writing-background ἐξελθὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῆς οἰκίας, ἐκάθητο παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 having gone out of the house Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus went out of the house and was sitting by the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MAT 13 2 d16z figs-activepassive συνήχθησαν πρὸς αὐτὸν ὄχλοι πολλοί 1 so that, having stepped into a boat, he sat down If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Many crowds gathered around him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 13 2 d0v5 grammar-collectivenouns ὁ ὄχλος 1 The word crowd is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people” or “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +MAT 13 3 f5mv writing-quotations ἐν παραβολαῖς λέγων 1 And he spoke many things to them in parables Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “he said many things to them in parables, and this is what he said:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +MAT 13 4 v7r8 figs-ellipsis ἃ μὲν ἔπεσεν 1 beside the road Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “some seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 13 4 qr2d writing-pronouns αὐτά 1 devoured them The pronoun **them** refers to the seeds. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MAT 13 5 ql87 καὶ εὐθέως ἐξανέτειλεν 1 And immediately they sprang up Alternate translation: “And the seeds quickly sprouted and grew” MAT 13 6 qq5x figs-activepassive ἐκαυματίσθη 1 they were scorched If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the sun scorched the plants, and they became too hot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 6 az8l ἐξηράνθη 1 they were dried up Alternate translation: “the plants became dry and died” From 5618107c64a66b701d96d3c06a6bf9230a888037 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Mon, 5 Sep 2022 20:41:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 023/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 23 ++++++++++++----------- 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 74b342867c..b034e17cf7 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -855,19 +855,20 @@ MAT 13 1 vx5y writing-newevent ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 On that MAT 13 1 cy1t writing-background ἐξελθὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῆς οἰκίας, ἐκάθητο παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 having gone out of the house Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus went out of the house and was sitting by the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 13 2 d16z figs-activepassive συνήχθησαν πρὸς αὐτὸν ὄχλοι πολλοί 1 so that, having stepped into a boat, he sat down If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Many crowds gathered around him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 2 d0v5 grammar-collectivenouns ὁ ὄχλος 1 The word crowd is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people” or “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -MAT 13 3 f5mv writing-quotations ἐν παραβολαῖς λέγων 1 And he spoke many things to them in parables Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “he said many things to them in parables, and this is what he said:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +MAT 13 3 o5f9 figs-parables ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἐν παραβολαῖς 1 Jesus teaches the crowd about what happens when different people hear his teaching. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 13 3 f5mv writing-quotations ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἐν παραβολαῖς λέγων 1 And he spoke many things to them in parables Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “he said many things to them in parables, and this is what he said:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +MAT 13 4 qr2d figs-explicit καὶ ἐν τῷ σπείρειν αὐτὸν, ἃ μὲν ἔπεσεν παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 devoured them Many cultures, when they plant seeds, bury them after planting them to protect them from animals that eat seeds. The seeds on path did not have a chance to be hidden from the birds, so they ate them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As he was scattering the seeds, some of them fell unprotected from animals onto the path. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 4 v7r8 figs-ellipsis ἃ μὲν ἔπεσεν 1 beside the road Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “some seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 13 4 qr2d writing-pronouns αὐτά 1 devoured them The pronoun **them** refers to the seeds. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -MAT 13 5 ql87 καὶ εὐθέως ἐξανέτειλεν 1 And immediately they sprang up Alternate translation: “And the seeds quickly sprouted and grew” -MAT 13 6 qq5x figs-activepassive ἐκαυματίσθη 1 they were scorched If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the sun scorched the plants, and they became too hot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 6 az8l ἐξηράνθη 1 they were dried up Alternate translation: “the plants became dry and died” +MAT 13 5 ql87 figs-ellipsis καὶ εὐθέως ἐξανέτειλεν 1 And immediately they sprang up In this verse and in the verses following, the word **others** is referring to seeds that fell in different areas as the sower was planting. If this would be misunderstood, see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 13 6 qq5x figs-activepassive ἐκαυματίσθη 1 they were scorched If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “it scorched the plants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 13 6 pz44 figs-idiom ἡλίου δὲ ἀνατείλαντος 1 the sun rose is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) The phrase **the sun had risen** is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 13 7 ugc9 ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ τὰς ἀκάνθας 1 fell among the thorn plants Alternate translation: “fell where plants with thorns grew” -MAT 13 7 vt8z ἀπέπνιξαν αὐτά 1 choked them Translate **choked** with a word your language uses for the way weeds prevent other plants from growing well. Alternate translation: “choked the new sprouts” or “crowded around the new plants and prevented them from growing” -MAT 13 8 iwv2 ἐδίδου καρπόν 1 produced fruit Alternate translation: “grew more seeds” or “gave more grain” -MAT 13 8 e91e figs-ellipsis ὃ μὲν ἑκατὸν, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ δὲ τριάκοντα 1 some one 100 times as much, and some 60, and some 30 The words “seeds,” “produced,” and “crop” are understood from the previous phrase. These can be expressed clearly. Alternate translation: “some seeds produced 100 times as much crop, some seeds produced 60 times as much crop, and some seeds produced 30 times as much crop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 13 9 q2e2 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **having ears** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated a similar phrase in [11:15](../11/15.md). Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 9 gkv1 figs-123person ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated a similar phrase in [11:15](../11/15.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 13 10 p8yc 0 General Information: Jesus explains to his disciples why he teaches with parables. +MAT 13 7 k69q figs-ellipsis ἄλλα 1 See the note on [13:5](../13/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 13 7 vt8z figs-explicit ἀνέβησαν αἱ ἄκανθαι καὶ ἀπέπνιξαν αὐτά 1 choked them The phrase **the thorns grew up and choked them** might be confusing to come readers. What this means is that the weeds grew much faster than the crops which the sower planted, and so they did not allow the crops to grow. If this would be confusing to your readers, you can state this explicitly with an example from your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 8 iwv2 figs-ellipsis ἄλλα 1 produced fruit See the note in [13:5](../13/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 13 8 e91e figs-ellipsis ὃ μὲν ἑκατὸν, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ δὲ τριάκοντα 1 some one 100 times as much, and some 60, and some 30 The amount of grain produced by each plant is being compared to the single seed from which it grew. Ellipsis is used here to shorten the phrases but they can be written out. Alternate translation: “Some plants bore 100 times as much grain, some produced 60 times as much grain, and some produced 30 times as much grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 13 9 q2e2 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear See the note in [4:2](../04/02.md)\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n +MAT 13 9 gkv1 figs-123person ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n MAT 13 11 fc5n figs-activepassive ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has given to you to understand mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but God has not given it to these people” or “God has made you able to understand mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but he has not enabled these people to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 11 xq2v figs-explicit ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given You can state the implied information clearly. Alternate translation: “God has given you the privilege of understanding mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but God has not given it to these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 11 rcd3 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 To you has been given to understand The word **you** is plural here and refers to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) From a17313d24d6017dc99ce402b4aa6e9041bcb7d38 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Tue, 6 Sep 2022 14:59:09 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 024/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 29 +++++++++++------------------ 1 file changed, 11 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index b034e17cf7..5b9b705237 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -869,27 +869,20 @@ MAT 13 8 iwv2 figs-ellipsis ἄλλα 1 produced fruit See the note in [13:5](. MAT 13 8 e91e figs-ellipsis ὃ μὲν ἑκατὸν, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ δὲ τριάκοντα 1 some one 100 times as much, and some 60, and some 30 The amount of grain produced by each plant is being compared to the single seed from which it grew. Ellipsis is used here to shorten the phrases but they can be written out. Alternate translation: “Some plants bore 100 times as much grain, some produced 60 times as much grain, and some produced 30 times as much grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 9 q2e2 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear See the note in [4:2](../04/02.md)\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n MAT 13 9 gkv1 figs-123person ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n -MAT 13 11 fc5n figs-activepassive ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has given to you to understand mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but God has not given it to these people” or “God has made you able to understand mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but he has not enabled these people to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 11 xq2v figs-explicit ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given You can state the implied information clearly. Alternate translation: “God has given you the privilege of understanding mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but God has not given it to these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 11 fc5n figs-activepassive ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has given to you to understand mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but God has not given it to these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 13 11 xq2v figs-explicit ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but to those it has not been given to know the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 11 rcd3 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 To you has been given to understand The word **you** is plural here and refers to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 13 11 ah6u figs-metonymy τὰ μυστήρια τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** occurs only in the book of Matthew. If possible, try to keep it in your translation. Alternate translation: “the secrets about our God in heaven and his rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 12 j3rl ὅστις…ἔχει 1 whoever has Alternate translation: “whoever has understanding” or “whoever receives what I teach” -MAT 13 12 v61y figs-activepassive δοθήσεται 1 it will be given If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will give him more understanding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 13 11 ah6u figs-metonymy τὰ μυστήρια τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated this in [4:2](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n +MAT 13 12 x34s writing-proverbs ὅστις γὰρ ἔχει, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ καὶ περισσευθήσεται; ὅστις δὲ οὐκ ἔχει, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 This proverb draws a figurative comparison: Jesus talks about understanding as if it were a physical item which could either be given or taken away. He is saying that whoever is able to understand, God will allow them to understand even more. But whoever does not understand, he will take away even whatever little understanding they have. Alternate translation: “For whoever has understanding, God will give to that person even more understanding, and it will be plenty. But whoever does not have understanding, God will take away what understanding they do have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]] +MAT 13 12 j3rl ὅστις…ὅστις 1 whoever has The word **whoever** is referring to people in general, and not to any specific person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “if a person … if a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MAT 13 12 v61y figs-activepassive δοθήσεται…ἀρθήσεται 1 it will be given If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will give … God will take it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 12 xsr5 ὅστις…οὐκ ἔχει 2 whoever does not have Alternate translation: “whoever does not have understanding” or “whoever does not receive what I teach” MAT 13 12 bl5s figs-activepassive καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 even what he has will be taken away from him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will take away even what he has” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 13 v6pb αὐτοῖς…οὐ βλέπουσιν…οὐκ ἀκούουσιν 1 to them … they do not see … they do not hear All occurrences of **them** and **they** refer to the people in the crowd. -MAT 13 13 uk7j figs-parallelism ὅτι βλέποντες οὐ βλέπουσιν, καὶ ἀκούοντες οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδὲ συνίουσιν 1 because seeing, they do not see; and hearing, they do not hear nor understand Jesus uses this parallelism to tell and emphasize to the disciples that the crowd refuses to understand God’s truth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MAT 13 13 ae8k βλέποντες 1 seeing This could refer to: (1) them **seeing** what Jesus does. Alternate translation: “though they see what I do” (2) their ability to see. Alternate translation: “though they are able to see” -MAT 13 13 nbi3 figs-metaphor οὐ βλέπουσιν 1 they do not see Here, **see** represents understanding. Alternate translation: “they do not understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 13 j4bg ἀκούοντες 1 hearing This could refer to: (1) them **hearing** what Jesus teaches. Alternate translation: “though they hear what I say” (2) their ability to hear. Alternate translation: “though they are able to hear” -MAT 13 13 gq65 figs-metaphor οὐκ ἀκούουσιν 1 they do not hear Here, **hear** represents listening well. Alternate translation: “they do not listen well” or “they do not pay attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 14 jz9n καὶ ἀναπληροῦται αὐτοῖς ἡ προφητεία Ἠσαΐου ἡ λέγουσα 1 And to them the prophecy of Isaiah is being fulfilled, which says If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And they are fulfilling what God said long ago through the prophet Isaiah” -MAT 13 14 z2es figs-parallelism ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 In hearing you will hear, but you may certainly not understand; and seeing, you will see, but you may certainly not perceive This begins a quote from the prophet Isaiah about the unbelieving people of Isaiah’s day. Jesus uses this quote to describe the very crowd that was listening to him. These statements are again parallel and emphasize that the people refused to understand God’s truth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MAT 13 14 a1im figs-explicit ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε 1 In hearing you will hear, but you may certainly not understand You can make explicit what the people **will hear**. Alternate translation: “You will hear what God says through the prophets, but you will not understand its true meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 14 emu1 figs-explicit βλέποντες βλέψετε καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 seeing, you will see, but you may certainly not perceive You can make explicit what the people **will see**. Alternate translation: “you will see what God does through the prophets, but you will not understand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 15 lu8u figs-metaphor ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν; μήποτε ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν, καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν, καὶ ἐπιστρέψωσιν καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 For the heart of this people has become dull, and their ears heard with difficulty, and they closed their eyes, lest they might see with their eyes, and might hear with their ears, and might understand with their hearts, and they might turn back, and I will heal them In 13:15 God describes the people of Israel as if they have physical diseases that cause them to be unable to learn, to **see**, and to **hear**. God wants them to come to him so he will **heal** them. This is all a metaphor describing the people’s spiritual condition. It means the people are stubborn and refuse to receive and understand God’s truth. If they would, then they would repent and God would forgive them and welcome them back as his people. If the meaning is clear, keep the metaphor in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 15 fy7m figs-metonymy ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου 1 For the heart of this people has become dull Here, **heart** refers to the mind. Alternate translation: “For these people’s minds are slow to learn” or “For these people can no longer learn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 15 q87m figs-metonymy τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν 1 their ears heard with difficulty They are not physically deaf. Here, **heard with difficulty** means they refuse to listen and learn God’s truth. Alternate translation: “they refuse to use their ears to listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 13 v6pb figs-metaphor αὐτοῖς…οὐ βλέπουσιν…οὐκ ἀκούουσιν 1 to them … they do not see … they do not hear The words **see** and **hear** are metaphors for being spiritually blind and deaf. This means that these people did not understand. If your readers would not understand what they mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “When they see my works, they will not know why I am doing them, and when they hear my message, they will not know what it means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n +MAT 13 14 jz9n figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἀναπληροῦται αὐτοῖς ἡ προφητεία Ἠσαΐου ἡ λέγουσα ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 And to them the prophecy of Isaiah is being fulfilled, which says Matthew is quoting Jesus, and Jesus is quoting the prophet Isaiah. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to them the prophecy of Isaiah is being fulfilled which says that though they hear, they will not understand, and though they see, they will not perceive” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes) +MAT 13 14 a1im figs-metaphor ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 In hearing you will hear, but you may certainly not understand See how you translated the words **see** and **hear** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 15 tfl1 figs-metonymy ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου…καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν 1 Here, the word **heart** is used figuratively to refer to a persons mind or inner intentions. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “something he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 15 lu8u figs-metaphor καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν; μήποτε ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν 1 For the heart of this people has become dull, and their ears heard with difficulty, and they closed their eyes, lest they might see with their eyes, and might hear with their ears, and might understand with their hearts, and they might turn back, and I will heal them See how you translated the words **see** and **hear** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and they were like those who have difficulty hearing because they did not understand what was said, and it was as if they closed their eyes because they did not understand what they saw. Lest they might understand what they see with their eyes or what they hear with their ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 15 y7t7 figs-metonymy τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν 1 they closed their eyes They have not literally **closed their eyes**. This means they refuse to understand. Alternate translation: “they refuse to use their eyes to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 15 fl93 μήποτε ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν, καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν, καὶ ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 lest they might see with their eyes, and might hear with their ears, and might understand with their hearts, and they might turn back Alternate translation: “so that they are not able to see with their eyes, hear with their ears, or understand with their heart, and as a result turn again” MAT 13 15 sr25 figs-metonymy τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν 1 might understand with their hearts The word **hearts** here is a metonym for people’s innermost being. You may need to use the word in your language for the source of people’s thinking and feelings. Alternate translation: “understand with their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From e9b111d35d2a84d7a1db8498b30edf6ebc80cb46 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Tue, 6 Sep 2022 17:57:06 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 025/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 20 ++++++++------------ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 12 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 5b9b705237..483f981c00 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -883,20 +883,16 @@ MAT 13 14 jz9n figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἀναπληροῦται αὐτο MAT 13 14 a1im figs-metaphor ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 In hearing you will hear, but you may certainly not understand See how you translated the words **see** and **hear** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 15 tfl1 figs-metonymy ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου…καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν 1 Here, the word **heart** is used figuratively to refer to a persons mind or inner intentions. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “something he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 15 lu8u figs-metaphor καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν; μήποτε ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν 1 For the heart of this people has become dull, and their ears heard with difficulty, and they closed their eyes, lest they might see with their eyes, and might hear with their ears, and might understand with their hearts, and they might turn back, and I will heal them See how you translated the words **see** and **hear** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and they were like those who have difficulty hearing because they did not understand what was said, and it was as if they closed their eyes because they did not understand what they saw. Lest they might understand what they see with their eyes or what they hear with their ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 15 y7t7 figs-metonymy τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν 1 they closed their eyes They have not literally **closed their eyes**. This means they refuse to understand. Alternate translation: “they refuse to use their eyes to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 15 fl93 μήποτε ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν, καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν, καὶ ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 lest they might see with their eyes, and might hear with their ears, and might understand with their hearts, and they might turn back Alternate translation: “so that they are not able to see with their eyes, hear with their ears, or understand with their heart, and as a result turn again” -MAT 13 15 sr25 figs-metonymy τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν 1 might understand with their hearts The word **hearts** here is a metonym for people’s innermost being. You may need to use the word in your language for the source of people’s thinking and feelings. Alternate translation: “understand with their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 15 ps56 ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 they might turn back Alternate translation: “they might turn back to me” or “they might repent” -MAT 13 15 q1h9 figs-metaphor ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 I will heal them Here, to **heal them** means God would restore them spiritually by forgiving their sins and receiving them again as his people. Alternate translation: “have me receive them again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 16 yhe4 figs-parallelism ὑμῶν δὲ μακάριοι οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ ὅτι βλέπουσιν, καὶ τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶν ὅτι ἀκούουσιν 1 But blessed are your eyes, for they see; and your ears, for they hear Both of these statements mean the same thing. Jesus is emphasizing that they have pleased God because they have believed what Jesus has said and done. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MAT 13 16 glp8 figs-synecdoche ὑμῶν δὲ μακάριοι οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ ὅτι βλέπουσιν 1 But blessed are your eyes, for they see Here, **eyes** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “You are blessed because your eyes are able to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 13 15 ps56 ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 they might turn back The phrase **they might turn back** is figurative, referring to someone who repents of their sins and asks God for forgiveness. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they might repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 13 15 q1h9 figs-metaphor ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 I will heal them The phrase **I will heal them** is figurative, meaning that he will forgive them for the sins that they have confessed. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “I will forgive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 16 glp8 figs-synecdoche ὑμῶν δὲ μακάριοι οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ ὅτι βλέπουσιν 1 But blessed are your eyes, for they see Here, **eyes** and **ears** are referring to the disciples ability to understand what Jesus is saying and doing. These words refer to the ability to understand what a person sees and hears. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “You are blessed because you understand what you see with your eyes and what you hear with your ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 13 16 rlt3 figs-you ὑμῶν…ὑμῶν 1 your … your Both occurrences of **your** are plural and refer to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 13 16 jp32 figs-synecdoche τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶν ὅτι ἀκούουσιν 1 your ears, for they hear Here, **ears** refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “you, for you hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MAT 13 16 xczh figs-ellipsis τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶν ὅτι ἀκούουσιν 1 your ears, for they hear You can clearly explicitly the implied information. Alternate translation: “you are blessed because your ears are able to hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 13 17 mg58 ἀμὴν, γὰρ λέγω ὑμῖν 1 For truly I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. Alternate translation: “For I tell you the truth” +MAT 13 16 xczh figs-ellipsis καὶ τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶν ὅτι ἀκούουσιν 1 your ears, for they hear Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and blessed are your ears, for they hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 17 bsj7 figs-you ὑμῖν…βλέπετε…ἀκούετε 1 to you … you see … you hear All occurrences of **you** are plural and refer to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 13 17 e6ci figs-explicit ἃ βλέπετε 1 the things you see You can state explicitly what they have seen. Alternate translation: “the things you have seen me do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 17 q14w figs-explicit ἃ ἀκούετε 1 the things you hear You can state explicitly what they have heard. Alternate translation: “the things you have heard me say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 17 e6ci figs-explicit ἃ βλέπετε 1 the things you see The phrase **the things you see** is referring to the healings and miracles which Jesus did. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the miracles you have seen me do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 17 lslf figs-explicit καὶ οὐκ εἶδαν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give the reason why the prophets and kings **did not see** these things. Alternate translation: “but could not see them because they lived before this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 17 q14w figs-explicit ἃ ἀκούετε 1 the things you hear The phrase what you hear probably refers to the teachings of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the things that you have heard me teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 17 alkk figs-explicit καὶ οὐκ ἤκουσαν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give the reason why the prophets and kings did not hear these things. Alternate translation: “but could not hear them because they lived before this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 18 w35t 0 Connecting Statement: Here Jesus begins to explain to his disciples the parable about a person who sows seeds, which he began in [13:3](../13/03.md). MAT 13 19 v2d7 τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας 1 the word of the kingdom Alternate translation: “the message about God’s rule as king” MAT 13 19 a8nu figs-metaphor ἔρχεται ὁ πονηρὸς καὶ ἁρπάζει τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 the evil one comes and snatches away what has been sown in his heart Jesus speaks of Satan causing the person to forget what he has heard as if Satan were a bird snatching the seed from the ground. Alternate translation: “The evil one causes him to forget the message that he has heard just as a bird snatches away seed from the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 022c0a28e694a98604215bab2fd5b92b4b59998b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 7 Sep 2022 01:01:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 026/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 483f981c00..37c552da63 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -893,7 +893,7 @@ MAT 13 17 e6ci figs-explicit ἃ βλέπετε 1 the things you see The phrase MAT 13 17 lslf figs-explicit καὶ οὐκ εἶδαν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give the reason why the prophets and kings **did not see** these things. Alternate translation: “but could not see them because they lived before this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 17 q14w figs-explicit ἃ ἀκούετε 1 the things you hear The phrase what you hear probably refers to the teachings of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the things that you have heard me teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 17 alkk figs-explicit καὶ οὐκ ἤκουσαν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give the reason why the prophets and kings did not hear these things. Alternate translation: “but could not hear them because they lived before this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 18 w35t 0 Connecting Statement: Here Jesus begins to explain to his disciples the parable about a person who sows seeds, which he began in [13:3](../13/03.md). +MAT 13 18 w35t 0 Connecting Statement: MAT 13 19 v2d7 τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας 1 the word of the kingdom Alternate translation: “the message about God’s rule as king” MAT 13 19 a8nu figs-metaphor ἔρχεται ὁ πονηρὸς καὶ ἁρπάζει τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 the evil one comes and snatches away what has been sown in his heart Jesus speaks of Satan causing the person to forget what he has heard as if Satan were a bird snatching the seed from the ground. Alternate translation: “The evil one causes him to forget the message that he has heard just as a bird snatches away seed from the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 19 sb7u figs-explicit ὁ πονηρὸς 1 the evil one Here, **the evil one** refers to Satan. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 6aacd59ec1bbb45b230656b949347802678fcdb6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 7 Sep 2022 18:09:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 027/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 35 ++++++++++++++++++++--------------- 1 file changed, 20 insertions(+), 15 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 37c552da63..9b4ea8265f 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -893,23 +893,28 @@ MAT 13 17 e6ci figs-explicit ἃ βλέπετε 1 the things you see The phrase MAT 13 17 lslf figs-explicit καὶ οὐκ εἶδαν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give the reason why the prophets and kings **did not see** these things. Alternate translation: “but could not see them because they lived before this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 17 q14w figs-explicit ἃ ἀκούετε 1 the things you hear The phrase what you hear probably refers to the teachings of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the things that you have heard me teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 17 alkk figs-explicit καὶ οὐκ ἤκουσαν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give the reason why the prophets and kings did not hear these things. Alternate translation: “but could not hear them because they lived before this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 18 w35t 0 Connecting Statement: -MAT 13 19 v2d7 τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας 1 the word of the kingdom Alternate translation: “the message about God’s rule as king” -MAT 13 19 a8nu figs-metaphor ἔρχεται ὁ πονηρὸς καὶ ἁρπάζει τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 the evil one comes and snatches away what has been sown in his heart Jesus speaks of Satan causing the person to forget what he has heard as if Satan were a bird snatching the seed from the ground. Alternate translation: “The evil one causes him to forget the message that he has heard just as a bird snatches away seed from the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 19 sb7u figs-explicit ὁ πονηρὸς 1 the evil one Here, **the evil one** refers to Satan. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 19 pt4d ἁρπάζει 1 snatches away Translate **snatches** with a word in your language that means to grab something away from someone who is the rightful owner. -MAT 13 19 r9u6 figs-activepassive τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 what has been sown in his heart If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the message that God sowed in his heart” or “the message that he heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 19 xi8f figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 in his heart Here, **heart** refers to the mind of the hearer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 19 wfd3 οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν σπαρείς 1 This is what was sown beside the road Alternate translation: “This is the meaning of the seed that was sown beside the road” or “The road where seed was sown represents this person” +MAT 13 18 w35t figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus is not retelling the parable again, but is now explaining it to the disciples. Make sure this is clear to your audience. See the note in the chapter introduction for more information about this parable. Alternate translation: “Therefore, hear me explain the parable of the one who sowed the seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 13 19 v2d7 figs-genericnoun παντὸς ἀκούοντος 1 the word of the kingdom Jesus is speaking of people in general, and not about any specific person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “people who hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) \n +MAT 13 19 suhi figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας 1 Jesus refers figuratively to bread, one common food, to mean food in general. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “the food we need that day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) The phrase **the word** is referring to the entire message about the **kingdom**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of the kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 13 19 het1 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας 1 Here the word **kingdom** is figuratively referring to how God is making people his people to rule over them. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message about how God is making people his people to rule over them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 19 uo3l figs-ellipsis τῆς βασιλείας 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 13 19 a8nu figs-metaphor ἔρχεται ὁ πονηρὸς καὶ ἁρπάζει τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 the evil one comes and snatches away what has been sown in his heart Jesus is speaking figuratively about Satan as if he were a bird who **snatches away** seeds. God's message is spoken of as if it **has been sown** in a person's heart. If your readers would not understand what it means to be shipwrecked in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “the evil one comes and takes away their understanding of God's message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 19 sb7u figs-explicit ὁ πονηρὸς 1 the evil one Here, **the evil one** refers to Satan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Satan, who is the evil one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 19 r9u6 figs-activepassive τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 what has been sown in his heart If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the seed which God sowed in his heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 13 19 xi8f figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 in his heart Here, the word **heart** is referring to the mind of the person. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 19 wfd3 figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν σπαρείς 1 This is what was sown beside the road Jesus speaks about what happens to these people figuratively as if it were what happens when seed is thrown alongside the road. The seed is referring to God's message. The road is referring to the persons **heart**. If your readers would not understand what this means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “when this happens, it is like what happened to seed being sown along the path” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 19 xgz5 παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν 1 beside the road See how you translated this in [13:4](../13/04.md). -MAT 13 20 l5iv figs-explicit ὁ δὲ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπαρείς 1 Now that sown on the rocky ground The phrase **that sown** refers to seed that fell. Alternate translation: “Now the seed that fell on rocky ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 20 w4f9 ὁ δὲ ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη σπαρείς, οὗτός ἐστιν 1 Now that sown on rocky ground, this is Alternate translation: “Now the rocky ground where seed was sown represents” or “Now the rocky ground where seed fell represents” -MAT 13 20 e3hm ὁ τὸν λόγον ἀκούων 1 the one hearing the word In the parable, the seed represents **the word**. +MAT 13 20 l5iv figs-explicit ὁ…σπαρείς 1 Now that sown on the rocky ground The phrase **the one having been sown** is talking about the the seed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the seed which was sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 20 rnct figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τὸν λόγον ἀκούων καὶ εὐθὺς μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμβάνων αὐτόν 1 Jesus is comparing **the one hearing the word and immediately receiving it with joy** with the seed which is sown on rocky ground. In the same way that the seed sown on rocky soil does not have deep roots, so the person who immediately receives it has not fully believed in God's message. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “this is like the person who hears the word and quickly receives it with joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 20 w4f9 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον 1 Now that sown on rocky ground, this is See how you translated **word** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 13 20 cl6g figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Here, **the word** represents God’s message. Alternate translation: “the message” or “God’s teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 20 z76f figs-metaphor μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμβάνων αὐτόν 1 receiving it with joy Believing the word is spoken of as **receiving it**. Alternate translation: “joyfully believing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 21 zg9q figs-metaphor οὐκ ἔχει δὲ ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, ἀλλὰ πρόσκαιρός ἐστιν 1 But he has no root in himself, but is temporary The **root** represents what makes a person continue to believe God’s message. Alternate translation: “But like a plant that does not grow deep roots, he only endures for a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 21 lim9 figs-metaphor εὐθὺς σκανδαλίζεται 1 immediately he is caused to stumble Here, **is caused to stumble** means stops believing. Alternate translation: “he quickly stops believing the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 22 d4h5 figs-explicit ὁ…σπαρείς 1 that which has been sown This refers to seed that was **sown** or that fell. Alternate translation: “the seed that was sown” or “the seed that fell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 20 z76f figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τὸν λόγον ἀκούων καὶ εὐθὺς μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμβάνων αὐτόν 1 receiving it with joy Jesus is speaking figuratively, speaking about believing as if they were **recieving** God's message. If your readers would not understand what **receiving** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “this seed is like the person who quickly receives God's message with joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 21 zg9q figs-idiom οὐκ ἔχει δὲ ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, ἀλλὰ πρόσκαιρός ἐστιν 1 But he has no root in himself, but is temporary The expression **but he has no root in himself, but is temporary** figuratively means that the plant does not have deep enough roots to stay alive. Alternate translation: “but he does not have deep roots to stay alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 13 21 ixil grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 What follows the word **but** is in contrast to what precedes it. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +MAT 13 21 lxuy figs-abstractnouns γενομένης δὲ θλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ διὰ τὸν λόγον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **tribulation** and **persecution**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “people afflicted and persecuted them because of the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MAT 13 21 xv50 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον 1 See how you translated the word **word** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 13 21 lim9 figs-metaphor εὐθὺς σκανδαλίζεται 1 immediately he is caused to stumble The expression **to stumble** figuratively means that he no longer believes God's message. Alternate translation: “immediately he stops believing God's message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])   +MAT 13 22 d4h5 figs-explicit ὁ…σπαρείς 1 that which has been sown If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 22 rcj8 ὁ δὲ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπαρείς 1 Now that which has been sown among the thorn plants Alternate translation: “Now the ground with the thorn plants where seed was sown” MAT 13 22 anm5 οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ 1 this is the one Alternate translation: “this represents the person” MAT 13 22 a3u1 τὸν λόγον 1 the word Alternate translation: “the message” or “God’s teaching” From 6425a816ae3873198bcc8311a14fac4b17fce63c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Thu, 8 Sep 2022 11:55:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 028/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 19 +++++++++---------- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 9b4ea8265f..1be7a9d340 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -914,17 +914,16 @@ MAT 13 21 ixil grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 What follows the wor MAT 13 21 lxuy figs-abstractnouns γενομένης δὲ θλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ διὰ τὸν λόγον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **tribulation** and **persecution**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “people afflicted and persecuted them because of the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 13 21 xv50 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον 1 See how you translated the word **word** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 13 21 lim9 figs-metaphor εὐθὺς σκανδαλίζεται 1 immediately he is caused to stumble The expression **to stumble** figuratively means that he no longer believes God's message. Alternate translation: “immediately he stops believing God's message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])   -MAT 13 22 d4h5 figs-explicit ὁ…σπαρείς 1 that which has been sown If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 22 rcj8 ὁ δὲ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπαρείς 1 Now that which has been sown among the thorn plants Alternate translation: “Now the ground with the thorn plants where seed was sown” -MAT 13 22 anm5 οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ 1 this is the one Alternate translation: “this represents the person” -MAT 13 22 a3u1 τὸν λόγον 1 the word Alternate translation: “the message” or “God’s teaching” -MAT 13 22 q2nh figs-metaphor ἡ μέριμνα τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου καὶ ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου συνπνίγει τὸν λόγον 1 the cares of this age and the deceitfulness of riches choke the word Jesus speaks about the **cares** of the world and the **deceitfulness of riches** distracting a person from obeying God’s word as if they were weeds that could wind around a plant and keep it from growing. Alternate translation: “as weeds prevent good plants from growing, the cares of the world and the deceitfulness of riches keep this person from listening to God’s word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 22 xa8r ἡ μέριμνα τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 the cares of this age Alternate translation: “the things in this world that people worry about” -MAT 13 22 wwf5 figs-personification ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου 1 the deceitfulness of riches Jesus describes **riches** as if it were a person who could deceive someone. This means people think having more money will make them happy, but it will not. Alternate translation: “the love of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +MAT 13 22 d4h5 figs-explicit ὁ…σπαρείς 1 that which has been sown Here, Jesus is talking about the story of seed which was **sown** among the thorns, If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the seed having been sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 22 rcj8 ὁ δὲ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπαρείς 1 Now that which has been sown among the thorn plants See how you translated **thorns** in [13:7](../13/07.md) +MAT 13 22 a3u1 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον…τὸν λόγον 2 the word See how you translated **the word** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 13 22 q2nh figs-explicit ἡ μέριμνα τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου καὶ ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου συνπνίγει τὸν λόγον 1 the cares of this age and the deceitfulness of riches choke the word The phrase **the cares of this age** is likely referring to caring about what a person will eat or drink. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “worrying about what you need to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 22 wwf5 figs-personification ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου 1 the deceitfulness of riches Jesus speaks of **riches** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could deceive. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “finding all of their pleasure in riches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) MAT 13 22 gn6z figs-metaphor ἄκαρπος γίνεται 1 it becomes unfruitful The person is spoken of as if he were a plant. Being **unfruitful** represents being unproductive. Alternate translation: “he becomes unproductive” or “he does not do what God wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 23 xw4b ὁ…ἐπὶ τὴν καλὴν γῆν σπαρείς 1 that which has been sown on the good soil Alternate translation: “the good soil where seeds were sown” -MAT 13 23 ptb8 figs-metaphor ὃς δὴ καρποφορεῖ καὶ ποιεῖ, ὃ 1 who indeed bears fruit, and some yield The person is spoken of as if he were a plant. Alternate translation: “like a healthy plant that is productive, some bear a crop that yields” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 23 wm3p figs-ellipsis ποιεῖ, ὃ μὲν ἑκατὸν, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ δὲ τριάκοντα 1 some yield 100 times, and some 60, and some 30 The phrase “as much as was planted” is understood following each of these numbers. See how you translated this in [13:8](../13/08.md). Alternate translation: “some people produce 100 times as much as was planted, some produce 60 times as much, and some produce 30 times as much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 13 23 xw4b figs-explicit ὁ…ἐπὶ τὴν καλὴν γῆν σπαρείς 1 that which has been sown on the good soil Here Jesus is referring to the story of the seed which fell on the **good soil**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the seed having been sown on the good soil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 23 ptb8 figs-metaphor ὃς δὴ καρποφορεῖ καὶ ποιεῖ 1 who indeed bears fruit, and some yield Here the phrase **who indeed produces a crop and yields** figuratively means “a person who does many good things that please God”. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who does many good things that please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n +MAT 13 23 wm3p figs-ellipsis ποιεῖ, ὃ μὲν ἑκατὸν, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ δὲ τριάκοντα 1 some yield 100 times, and some 60, and some 30 This refers to the grain that the plants produce. Alternate translation: “some produce 100 times the grain that was sown, some produce 60 times the grain that was sown, and some produce 30 times the grain that was sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 13 23 i4t0 translate-numbers ἑκατὸν…ἑξήκοντα…τριάκοντα 1 You can state the numbers as text. Alternate translation: “a hundred … sixty … thirty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 13 24 l5yx figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Here Jesus describes the kingdom of heaven by telling a parable about a field with both wheat and weeds growing in it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 13 24 k8pu figs-simile ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἀνθρώπῳ 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like a man The translation should not equate the **kingdom of the heavens** to a man, but rather the **kingdom of the heavens** is like the situation described in the parable. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 13 24 f8j5 figs-metonymy ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. Alternate translation: “When our God in heaven shows himself to be king, it will be like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 866501cca28971639f140d556a22ab346b8c6062 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Fri, 9 Sep 2022 17:07:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 029/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 1be7a9d340..080eeae6e7 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -924,8 +924,8 @@ MAT 13 23 xw4b figs-explicit ὁ…ἐπὶ τὴν καλὴν γῆν σπαρ MAT 13 23 ptb8 figs-metaphor ὃς δὴ καρποφορεῖ καὶ ποιεῖ 1 who indeed bears fruit, and some yield Here the phrase **who indeed produces a crop and yields** figuratively means “a person who does many good things that please God”. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who does many good things that please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n MAT 13 23 wm3p figs-ellipsis ποιεῖ, ὃ μὲν ἑκατὸν, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ δὲ τριάκοντα 1 some yield 100 times, and some 60, and some 30 This refers to the grain that the plants produce. Alternate translation: “some produce 100 times the grain that was sown, some produce 60 times the grain that was sown, and some produce 30 times the grain that was sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 23 i4t0 translate-numbers ἑκατὸν…ἑξήκοντα…τριάκοντα 1 You can state the numbers as text. Alternate translation: “a hundred … sixty … thirty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -MAT 13 24 l5yx figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Here Jesus describes the kingdom of heaven by telling a parable about a field with both wheat and weeds growing in it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 13 24 k8pu figs-simile ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἀνθρώπῳ 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like a man The translation should not equate the **kingdom of the heavens** to a man, but rather the **kingdom of the heavens** is like the situation described in the parable. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MAT 13 24 l5yx figs-parables ἄλλην παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὐτοῖς λέγων, 1 Connecting Statement: To help the people understand his message, Jesus tells a story. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told a story to help them understand:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 13 24 k8pu figs-simile ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἀνθρώπῳ σπείραντι καλὸν σπέρμα ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ αὐτοῦ 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like a man Jesus is comparing **the kingdom of the heavens** with the entire story. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 13 24 f8j5 figs-metonymy ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. Alternate translation: “When our God in heaven shows himself to be king, it will be like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 24 u21k figs-explicit καλὸν σπέρμα 1 good seed The audience probably thought that Jesus was talking about wheat. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Alternate translation: “good food seeds” or “good grain seeds” MAT 13 25 zn8v ἦλθεν αὐτοῦ ὁ ἐχθρὸς 1 his enemy came Alternate translation: “his enemy came to the field” From eaca050b42aa2e5ea8702f3dc5cb86967fba9337 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Fri, 9 Sep 2022 18:24:09 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 030/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 8 +++++--- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 080eeae6e7..c2a1aa2e6a 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -925,9 +925,11 @@ MAT 13 23 ptb8 figs-metaphor ὃς δὴ καρποφορεῖ καὶ ποιε MAT 13 23 wm3p figs-ellipsis ποιεῖ, ὃ μὲν ἑκατὸν, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ δὲ τριάκοντα 1 some yield 100 times, and some 60, and some 30 This refers to the grain that the plants produce. Alternate translation: “some produce 100 times the grain that was sown, some produce 60 times the grain that was sown, and some produce 30 times the grain that was sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 23 i4t0 translate-numbers ἑκατὸν…ἑξήκοντα…τριάκοντα 1 You can state the numbers as text. Alternate translation: “a hundred … sixty … thirty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 13 24 l5yx figs-parables ἄλλην παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὐτοῖς λέγων, 1 Connecting Statement: To help the people understand his message, Jesus tells a story. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told a story to help them understand:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 13 24 k8pu figs-simile ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἀνθρώπῳ σπείραντι καλὸν σπέρμα ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ αὐτοῦ 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like a man Jesus is comparing **the kingdom of the heavens** with the entire story. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MAT 13 24 f8j5 figs-metonymy ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. Alternate translation: “When our God in heaven shows himself to be king, it will be like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 24 u21k figs-explicit καλὸν σπέρμα 1 good seed The audience probably thought that Jesus was talking about wheat. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Alternate translation: “good food seeds” or “good grain seeds” +MAT 13 24 xkov figs-metaphor ἄλλην παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὐτοῖς 1 Here the phrase **set before** figuratively means that Jesus told the people another story. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told them another parable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Here the term **set before them** figuratively means that Jesus told the disciples another parable. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told them another parable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])  +MAT 13 24 iiv7 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MAT 13 24 k8pu figs-simile ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἀνθρώπῳ σπείραντι καλὸν σπέρμα ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ αὐτοῦ 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like a man Jesus is comparing **the kingdom of the heavens** with the entire story through [13:30](../13/30.md). See the note in the chapter introduction for more information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MAT 13 24 f8j5 figs-metonymy ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like See how you translated **The kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 24 u21k figs-explicit καλὸν σπέρμα 1 good seed Here **good seed** is referring to seed that produces edible crops. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “seed for food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 25 zn8v ἦλθεν αὐτοῦ ὁ ἐχθρὸς 1 his enemy came Alternate translation: “his enemy came to the field” MAT 13 25 q4tv ζιζάνια 1 darnel The **darnel** that was sown looks like food plants when it is young, but its grain is poison. Alternate translation: “bad seed” or “weed seeds” MAT 13 26 lea1 ὅτε δὲ ἐβλάστησεν ὁ χόρτος 1 But when the blades sprouted Alternate translation: “But when the wheat seeds sprouted” or “But after the plants came up” From a72eb3c9cf60f23add0d0bcbced6ec43ebd3f715 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Tue, 13 Sep 2022 12:00:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 031/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 35 +++++++++++++++-------------------- 1 file changed, 15 insertions(+), 20 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index c2a1aa2e6a..b8d8bdc1b0 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -944,27 +944,22 @@ MAT 13 29 c9jc ὁ δέ φησιν 1 But he says Alternate translation: “But MAT 13 30 z36a figs-quotations ἐρῶ τοῖς θερισταῖς, συλλέξατε πρῶτον τὰ ζιζάνια καὶ δήσατε αὐτὰ εἰς δέσμας πρὸς τὸ κατακαῦσαι αὐτά; τὸν δὲ σῖτον συναγάγετε εἰς τὴν ἀποθήκην μου. 1 I will say to the reapers, “First gather up the darnel and tie them in bundles to burn them up, but gather the wheat into my barn.” You can translate this direct quotation as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “I will tell the reapers to first gather up the darnel and tie them in bundles to burn them, and then gather the wheat into my barn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MAT 13 30 ll14 τὴν ἀποθήκην 1 barn A **barn** is a farm building that can be used for storing grain, animals, and other farm items. MAT 13 31 tdf4 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus describes the kingdom of heaven by telling a parable about a very small seed that grows into a very big plant. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 13 31 jw7u figs-metonymy ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. See how you translated this in [13:24](../13/24.md). Alternate translation: “When our God in heaven shows himself to be king, it will be like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 31 qby8 translate-unknown κόκκῳ σινάπεως 1 a mustard seed A **mustard seed** is a very small seed that grows into a large plant. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 13 32 gyi1 figs-explicit ὃ μικρότερον μέν ἐστιν πάντων τῶν σπερμάτων 1 which is indeed the smallest of all the seeds Mustard seeds were the **smallest** **seeds** known to the original hearers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 32 x65d ὅταν δὲ αὐξηθῇ 1 But when it may grow Alternate translation: “But when the plant has grown” -MAT 13 32 um9k μεῖζον…ἐστὶν 1 it is greater than Alternate translation: “it is larger than” -MAT 13 32 g6v8 γίνεται δένδρον 1 becomes a tree A mustard plant can grow about 2 to 4 meters tall—the height of a small **tree**. -MAT 13 32 c9te τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 the birds of the sky Alternate translation: “the birds” -MAT 13 33 a1th figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus describes the kingdom of heaven by telling a parable about the effect that yeast has on flour. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 13 33 z94k figs-simile ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν ζύμῃ 1 The kingdom of heaven is like yeast The **kingdom** is not like the **yeast**, but the spread of the **kingdom** is like the spreading of the **yeast**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MAT 13 33 w8sb figs-metonymy ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. See how you translated this in [13:24](../13/24.md). Alternate translation: “When our God in heaven shows himself to be king, it will be like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 31 jw7u figs-metonymy ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like See how you translated **kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 31 qby8 translate-unknown κόκκῳ σινάπεως 1 a mustard seed A **mustard seed** is a very small seed that grows into a large plant. If this is unknown in your culture, use a similar type of seed in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 13 32 gyi1 figs-explicit ὃ μικρότερον μέν ἐστιν πάντων τῶν σπερμάτων 1 which is indeed the smallest of all the seeds The phrase **which is indeed the smallest of all the seeds** shows how small the seed it compared with how big it grows. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “This seed was the smallest of any seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MAT 13 32 g6v8 figs-idiom γίνεται δένδρον 1 becomes a tree Here, the phrase **becomes a tree** is an idiom meaning it grows until it becomes the size of a tree. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “grows to be a tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 13 33 z94k figs-simile ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν ζύμῃ 1 The kingdom of heaven is like yeast In this passage, Jesus is comparing **the kingdom of the heavens** with **yeast**. Jesus is saying that, Just as yeast is mixed into flour and causes it to grow, so the kingdom of the heavens will grow. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MAT 13 33 w8sb figs-metonymy ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like See how you translated **The kingdom of the heavens** in [4:2](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 33 xc9t translate-unknown ζύμῃ, ἣν λαβοῦσα, γυνὴ ἐνέκρυψεν εἰς ἀλεύρου σάτα τρία, ἕως οὗ ἐζυμώθη ὅλον 1 The word **yeast** is something used in making bread that causes it to grow. If this would not be understood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “yeast, which is used to make bread grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 13 33 r88g translate-bvolume ἀλεύρου σάτα τρία 1 three measures of flour You can translate this phrase as “a large amount of flour” or use a term that your culture uses for measuring large amounts of flour. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) -MAT 13 33 c35r figs-explicit γυνὴ ἐνέκρυψεν εἰς ἀλεύρου σάτα τρία, ἕως οὗ ἐζυμώθη ὅλον 1 a woman mixed with three measures of flour until it all was leavened The implied information is that the yeast and the three measures of flour were made into dough for baking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 34 nt7u figs-parallelism ταῦτα πάντα ἐλάλησεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἐν παραβολαῖς τοῖς ὄχλοις, καὶ χωρὶς παραβολῆς οὐδὲν ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς 1 All these things Jesus spoke to the crowds in parables; and he was speaking nothing to them without a parable Both sentences mean the same thing. They are combined to emphasize that Jesus taught **the crowds** only with **parables**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MAT 13 34 n54e ταῦτα πάντα 1 All these things Here, **All these things** refers to what Jesus taught beginning at [13:1](../13/01.md). -MAT 13 34 a5c7 figs-doublenegatives χωρὶς παραβολῆς οὐδὲν ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς 1 he was speaking nothing to them without a parable If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **nothing … without**, you can express it in a positive way. Alternate translation: “everything he taught them he said in parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -MAT 13 35 ybq5 figs-activepassive πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος 1 what had been said through the prophet might be fulfilled, saying If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what God told one of the prophets to write long ago might come true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 35 p3tb λέγοντος 1 saying Alternate translation: “when the prophet said” -MAT 13 35 f9gl ἀνοίξω ἐν παραβολαῖς τὸ στόμα μου; ἐρεύξομαι κεκρυμμένα ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 Here the author quotes from the Psalms to show that Jesus’ teaching in parables fulfilled prophecy. -MAT 13 35 n1pa figs-idiom ἀνοίξω…τὸ στόμα μου 1 I will open my mouth This is an idiom that means “to speak.” Alternate translation: “I will speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 13 35 yx6y figs-activepassive κεκρυμμένα 1 what has been hidden If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “things that God has kept hidden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 35 th8t ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 from the foundation of the world Alternate translation: “since the beginning of the world” or “since God created the world” +MAT 13 34 nt7u figs-parallelism ταῦτα πάντα ἐλάλησεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἐν παραβολαῖς τοῖς ὄχλοις, καὶ χωρὶς παραβολῆς οὐδὲν ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς 1 All these things Jesus spoke to the crowds in parables; and he was speaking nothing to them without a parable The phrases **All these things Jesus spoke in parables to the crowds** and **he was speaking nothing to them without a parable** mean the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Jesus spoke all of these things in parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +MAT 13 34 n54e figs-explicit ταῦτα πάντα 1 All these things The phrase **all these things** is referring to the parables which Jesus just taught. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “All of the things Jesus taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 34 a5c7 figs-doublenegatives χωρὶς παραβολῆς οὐδὲν ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς 1 he was speaking nothing to them without a parable If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “he spoke only with parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +MAT 13 35 ybq5 figs-activepassive πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ τοῦ προφήτου 1 what had been said through the prophet might be fulfilled, saying If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what God said through the prophet might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 13 35 p3tb writing-quotations διὰ τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος, 1 saying Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “through the prophet … and this is what he said:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +MAT 13 35 f9gl figs-metonymy ἀνοίξω ἐν παραβολαῖς τὸ στόμα μου 1 Jesus is using the phrase **I will open my mouth in parables** figuratively to mean speaking. Alternate translation: “I will speak in parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 35 yx6y figs-activepassive κεκρυμμένα 1 what has been hidden If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what I have hidden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 13 35 th8t figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 from the foundation of the world If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **foundation**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “since God founded the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 13 36 pq2h 0 Connecting Statement: Here the scene shifts to the house where Jesus and his disciples were staying. Jesus begins to explain to them the parable of the field that had both wheat and weeds, which he told beginning in [13:24](../13/24.md). MAT 13 36 x5w7 ἦλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν 1 he went into the house Alternate translation: “he went indoors” or “he went into the house where he was staying” MAT 13 37 aj8f ὁ σπείρων τὸ καλὸν σπέρμα 1 The one sowing the good seed Alternate translation: “The one who sows the good seed” or “The sower of the good seed” From 394e3035be659427148bf281bc128c8837ddc875 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Thu, 15 Sep 2022 11:02:28 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 032/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 34 ++++++++++++++++++---------------- 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+), 16 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index b8d8bdc1b0..f476562c13 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -960,23 +960,25 @@ MAT 13 35 p3tb writing-quotations διὰ τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντ MAT 13 35 f9gl figs-metonymy ἀνοίξω ἐν παραβολαῖς τὸ στόμα μου 1 Jesus is using the phrase **I will open my mouth in parables** figuratively to mean speaking. Alternate translation: “I will speak in parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 35 yx6y figs-activepassive κεκρυμμένα 1 what has been hidden If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what I have hidden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 35 th8t figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 from the foundation of the world If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **foundation**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “since God founded the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MAT 13 36 pq2h 0 Connecting Statement: Here the scene shifts to the house where Jesus and his disciples were staying. Jesus begins to explain to them the parable of the field that had both wheat and weeds, which he told beginning in [13:24](../13/24.md). -MAT 13 36 x5w7 ἦλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν 1 he went into the house Alternate translation: “he went indoors” or “he went into the house where he was staying” -MAT 13 37 aj8f ὁ σπείρων τὸ καλὸν σπέρμα 1 The one sowing the good seed Alternate translation: “The one who sows the good seed” or “The sower of the good seed” -MAT 13 37 xj4s figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself as the **Son of Man**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 13 38 h9iz figs-idiom οἱ υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας 1 the sons of the kingdom The idiom **sons of** refers to those who belong to or to have the same character as someone or something. Alternate translation: “the people who belong to the kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 13 38 eni3 figs-metonymy τῆς βασιλείας 1 of the kingdom Here, **kingdom** refers to God the king. Alternate translation: “of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 38 edu7 figs-idiom οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 the sons of the evil one The idiom **sons of** refers those who belong to or to have the same character as someone or something. Alternate translation: “the people who belong to the evil one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 13 39 sgx2 ὁ…ἐχθρὸς, ὁ σπείρας αὐτά 1 the enemy who sowed them Alternate translation: “the enemy who sowed the weeds” -MAT 13 40 rn64 figs-activepassive ὥσπερ οὖν συλλέγεται τὰ ζιζάνια καὶ πυρὶ κατακαίεται 1 Therefore, just as the darnel are gathered up and burned with fire You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “Therefore, as people gather up weeds and burn them in the fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 41 fiy4 figs-123person ἀποστελεῖ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ 1 The Son of Man will send out his angels Here Jesus is speaking of himself as the **Son of Man**. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will send out my angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 13 41 ptw9 τοὺς ποιοῦντας τὴν ἀνομίαν 1 those doing lawlessness Alternate translation: “those who are lawless” or “evil people” -MAT 13 42 d9md figs-metaphor τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρός 1 the furnace of fire This is a metaphor for the fires of hell. If the term **furnace** is not known, “oven” can be used. Alternate translation: “fiery furnace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 42 zu3j translate-symaction ὁ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων 1 weeping and grinding of teeth Here, **grinding of teeth** is a symbolic act, representing extreme sadness and suffering. See how you translated this in [8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “weeping and showing that they are suffering very much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -MAT 13 43 u6sm figs-simile ἐκλάμψουσιν ὡς ὁ ἥλιος 1 will shine as the sun If this simile is not understandable in your language, you can use: “will be as easy to see as the sun.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MAT 13 36 pq2h writing-newevent τότε 1 Connecting Statement: Jesus is using the word translated **Then** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MAT 13 37 r9wr ὁ σπείρων τὸ καλὸν σπέρμα ἐστὶν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 The phrase **the Son of Man** is explaining what the phrase **The one sowing the good seed** means which Jesus used in [13:24](../13/24.md). +MAT 13 37 xj4s figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself as the **Son of Man**. If this would be confusing to your readers, you can express this in the first person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 13 38 eea8 ὁ δὲ ἀγρός ἐστιν ὁ κόσμος; τὸ δὲ καλὸν σπέρμα, οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας; τὰ δὲ ζιζάνιά εἰσιν οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 The phrase **the world** is explaining what the phrase **the field** means which Jesus used in [13:24](../13/24.md). The phrase **the sons of the kingdom** is explaining what the phrase **the good seed** means which Jesus used in [13:24](../13/24.md). The phrase **the sons of the evil one** is explaining what the phrase **the darnel** means which Jesus used in [13:25](../13/25.md). +MAT 13 38 h9iz figs-idiom οἱ υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας…οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 the sons of the kingdom Here, the phrase **sons of the kingdom** is an idiom meaning “people over whom God rules.” The phrase **sons of the evil one** is an idiom meaning “people over whom Satan rules.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the people over whom God rules … the people over whom Satan rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 13 38 eni3 figs-metonymy τῆς βασιλείας 1 of the kingdom See how you translated **the kingdom** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 39 sgx2 ὁ…ἐχθρὸς, ὁ σπείρας αὐτά ἐστιν ὁ διάβολος; ὁ δὲ θερισμὸς συντέλεια αἰῶνός ἐστιν; οἱ δὲ θερισταὶ ἄγγελοί εἰσιν. 1 the enemy who sowed them The phrase **the devil** is explaining what the phrase **the enemy** means which Jesus used in [13:25](../13/25.md). The phrase **the end of the age** is explaining what the phrase **the harvest** means which Jesus used in [13:30](../13/30.md). The word **angels** is explaining what the phrase **the reapers** means which Jesus used in [13:30](../13/30.md) +MAT 13 40 rn64 figs-simile ὥσπερ οὖν συλλέγεται τὰ ζιζάνια καὶ πυρὶ κατακαίεται, οὕτως ἔσται ἐν τῇ συντελείᾳ τοῦ αἰῶνος 1 Therefore, just as the darnel are gathered up and burned with fire Jesus is comparing the parable to what is actually going to happen in the end times. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Therefore, similar to how the weeds were gathered up, this is what God is going to do with evil doers in the final days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MAT 13 40 hzih grammar-connect-words-phrases οὕτως ἔσται ἐν τῇ συντελείᾳ τοῦ αἰῶνος 1 The word **thus** tells the reader that Jesus is going to explain what the parable is similar to in the following passage. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “here is a description of what it will be like in the end days for evil people:” +MAT 13 41 fiy4 figs-123person ἀποστελεῖ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ 1 The Son of Man will send out his angels See how you translated **Son of Man** in [13:37](../13/37.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 13 41 p5p9 figs-metonymy ἐκ τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus is using the term **kingdom** figuratively here to refer to the whole world. If it would be helpful to your readers, make sure they understand this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the world which he rules over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 41 ptw9 figs-metaphor πάντα τὰ σκάνδαλα 1 those doing lawlessness Here, the phrase **stumbling blocks** is speaking figuratively about people who cause other people to sin. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all of the people who cause others to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 42 d9md figs-metaphor τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρός 1 the furnace of fire Here, Jesus is referring to hell figuratively as a **furnace of fire**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “hell, which is hot like a fiery furnace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 42 zu3j translate-symaction ὁ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων 1 weeping and grinding of teeth Here, **grinding of the teeth** is a symbolic act, representing extreme pain and suffering. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “weeping and extreme suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])\n\n +MAT 13 43 azqy figs-nominaladj οἱ δίκαιοι 1 Jesus is using the adjective righteous as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 13 43 u6sm figs-simile ἐκλάμψουσιν ὡς ὁ ἥλιος 1 will shine as the sun Here, Jesus is comparing **the righteous** as if they were shining like **the sun**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MAT 13 43 j487 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ 1 Jesus is using the term **kingdom** figuratively to mean where God dwells and where the righteous will dwell with him. Alternate translation: “in heaven where God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 43 sea2 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτῶν 1 of their Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 13 43 zxh2 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **having ears** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated a similar phrase in [11:15](../11/15.md). Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 43 sak5 figs-123person ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this in [11:15](../11/15.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 13 43 zxh2 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear See how you translated a similar phrase in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 44 fjm1 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: In verses 44-46, Jesus describes the kingdom of heaven by telling two parables about people who sold their possessions to purchase something of great value. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 13 44 e9cv figs-metonymy ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. See how you translated this in [13:24](../13/24.md). Alternate translation: “When our God in heaven shows himself to be king, it will be like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 44 u9jq figs-activepassive ὁμοία ἐστὶν…θησαυρῷ κεκρυμμένῳ ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ 1 is like a treasure hidden in a field If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “is like a treasure that someone had hidden in a field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From ccf4725973a201711fb740b4c28eebccf03f4aa2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 20 Sep 2022 16:27:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 033/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 14 +++++++++----- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index ccefb2c9de..994dc44fff 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2305,11 +2305,15 @@ ACT 15 41 e3ym figs-synecdoche διήρχετο 1 he went through Luke says **he ACT 15 41 s7yf figs-metonymy ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 Luke is using the term **churches** to refer figuratively to the people associated with the churches.If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 41 tbv3 figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 strengthening the churches Luke does not mean that Paul and Silas strengthened the people of the churches physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Timothy’s circumcision

Paul circumcised Timothy because they were telling the message of Jesus to Jews and Gentiles. Paul wanted the Jews to know that he respected the law of Moses even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Christians did not need to be circumcised.

### The woman who had a spirit of divination

Most people want very much to know the future, but the law of Moses said that speaking with the spirits of dead people to learn about the future is a sin. This woman seems to have been able to tell the future very well. She was a slave, and her masters made much money from her work. Paul wanted her to stop sinning, so he told the spirit to leave her. Luke does not say that she began to follow Jesus or tell us anything more about her. -ACT 16 1 km5q figs-go κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Paul also came down This continues the missionary journeys of Paul with Silas. Here, **came** can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -ACT 16 1 f49m writing-background μαθητής τις ἦν ἐκεῖ ὀνόματι Τιμόθεος, υἱὸς γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς, πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 **Timothy** is introduced into the story and joins Paul and Silas. Verses 1 and 2 give background information about Timothy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 16 1 d4ka Δέρβην 1 Derbe **Derbe** is the name of a city in Asia Minor. See how you translated it in [Acts 14:6](../14/06.md). -ACT 16 1 u3vr ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** alerts us to a new person in the narrative. Your language may have a way of doing this. -ACT 16 1 wxl8 figs-ellipsis γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς 1 a believing Jewish woman The words “in Christ” are understood. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 16 1 m5tb figs-synecdoche κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas also came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 16 1 rhut figs-idiom κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Derbe and Lystra because that was the customary way in this culture describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Paul likely travel by sea from Syria to Cilicia, and Luke is saying that he then also went to Derbe and to Lystra. Alternate translation: “he also traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 16 1 km5q figs-go κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Paul also came down If you retain the idiom, it may be more natural in your language to say “went” rather than **came**. Alternate translation: “he also went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +ACT 16 1 u3vr figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on the new character he is about to introduce. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 1 f49m writing-participants μαθητής τις ἦν ἐκεῖ ὀνόματι Τιμόθεος, υἱὸς γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς, πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain disciple** to introduce **Timothy** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a disciple there named Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 16 1 mc9i figs-explicit ἐκεῖ 1 By **there**, Luke implicitly means the city of Lystra. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in Lystra” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 1 l0w5 translate-names Τιμόθεος 1 The word **Timothy** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 16 1 wxl8 figs-ellipsis γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς 1 a believing Jewish woman By **believing**, Luke implicitly means believing in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 1 vh73 figs-idiom πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 Luke is describing Timothy’s father in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “but whose father was Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 2 t1lu figs-activepassive ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 He was well spoken of by the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The brothers spoke well of him” or “Timothy had a good reputation among the brothers” or “The brothers said good things about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 2 rez2 ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 by the brothers Here, **brothers** refers to believers. Alternate translation: “by the believers” ACT 16 3 p6z8 περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν 1 he circumcised him It is possible that Paul himself **circumcised** Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise Timothy. From 0f157256514126fd48b6ae844d321efa6ccd694a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 20 Sep 2022 16:28:45 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 034/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 994dc44fff..b8ddcaf6e3 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2314,8 +2314,8 @@ ACT 16 1 mc9i figs-explicit ἐκεῖ 1 By **there**, Luke implicitly means th ACT 16 1 l0w5 translate-names Τιμόθεος 1 The word **Timothy** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 1 wxl8 figs-ellipsis γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς 1 a believing Jewish woman By **believing**, Luke implicitly means believing in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 1 vh73 figs-idiom πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 Luke is describing Timothy’s father in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “but whose father was Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 16 2 t1lu figs-activepassive ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 He was well spoken of by the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The brothers spoke well of him” or “Timothy had a good reputation among the brothers” or “The brothers said good things about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 2 rez2 ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 by the brothers Here, **brothers** refers to believers. Alternate translation: “by the believers” +ACT 16 2 t1lu figs-activepassive ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν Λύστροις καὶ Ἰκονίῳ ἀδελφῶν. 1 He was well spoken of by the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Alternate translation: “The brothers in Lystra and Iconium spoke well of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 2 rez2 figs-metaphor ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 by the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 3 p6z8 περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν 1 he circumcised him It is possible that Paul himself **circumcised** Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise Timothy. ACT 16 3 za93 διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις 1 because of the Jews who were in those places Alternate translation: “because of the Jews living in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling” ACT 16 3 hk2l figs-explicit ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν 1 for they all knew that his father was a Greek Since **Greek** men did not have their sons circumcised, the Jews would have known Timothy was not circumcised, and they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From a855e326fa1e403f9cef9807b47a54510daa3ad7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 20 Sep 2022 16:31:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 035/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 +++++--- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index b8ddcaf6e3..752bd7f9dc 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2316,9 +2316,11 @@ ACT 16 1 wxl8 figs-ellipsis γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς 1 ACT 16 1 vh73 figs-idiom πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 Luke is describing Timothy’s father in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “but whose father was Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 2 t1lu figs-activepassive ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν Λύστροις καὶ Ἰκονίῳ ἀδελφῶν. 1 He was well spoken of by the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Alternate translation: “The brothers in Lystra and Iconium spoke well of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 2 rez2 figs-metaphor ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 by the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 16 3 p6z8 περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν 1 he circumcised him It is possible that Paul himself **circumcised** Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise Timothy. -ACT 16 3 za93 διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις 1 because of the Jews who were in those places Alternate translation: “because of the Jews living in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling” -ACT 16 3 hk2l figs-explicit ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν 1 for they all knew that his father was a Greek Since **Greek** men did not have their sons circumcised, the Jews would have known Timothy was not circumcised, and they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 3 p6z8 figs-explicit περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν 1 he circumcised him It is possible that Paul himself **circumcised** Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise him.You can include that information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “he had him circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 3 bdd6 writing-pronouns τοῦτον 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 16 3 za93 figs-explicit διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις 1 because of the Jews who were in those places By **those places**, Luke implicitly means the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 3 hk2l figs-explicit ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν 1 for they all knew that his father was a Greek Luke assumes that his readers will know that **Greek** men did not have their sons circumcised, and so the Jews would have known that Timothy had not been circumcised. As a result, they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “for they all knew that his father was a Greek and that he therefore had not been circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 3 pybf figs-hyperbole ᾔδεισαν…ἅπαντες 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they knew very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 16 4 n46i διεπορεύοντο…παρεδίδοσαν 1 The word **they** here refers to Paul, Silas ([Acts 15:40](../15/40.md)), and Timothy ([Acts 16:3](../16/03.md)). ACT 16 4 bu6r αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν 1 for them to keep Alternate translation: “for the church members to obey” or “for the believers to obey” ACT 16 4 gpi3 figs-activepassive τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 that had been decided by the apostles and elders who were in Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From a4b570badf0d51d69b1b1108a9928152f14febd0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 20 Sep 2022 16:33:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 036/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 752bd7f9dc..a9e8c137b6 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2321,9 +2321,9 @@ ACT 16 3 bdd6 writing-pronouns τοῦτον 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this ACT 16 3 za93 figs-explicit διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις 1 because of the Jews who were in those places By **those places**, Luke implicitly means the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 3 hk2l figs-explicit ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν 1 for they all knew that his father was a Greek Luke assumes that his readers will know that **Greek** men did not have their sons circumcised, and so the Jews would have known that Timothy had not been circumcised. As a result, they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “for they all knew that his father was a Greek and that he therefore had not been circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 3 pybf figs-hyperbole ᾔδεισαν…ἅπαντες 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they knew very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 16 4 n46i διεπορεύοντο…παρεδίδοσαν 1 The word **they** here refers to Paul, Silas ([Acts 15:40](../15/40.md)), and Timothy ([Acts 16:3](../16/03.md)). -ACT 16 4 bu6r αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν 1 for them to keep Alternate translation: “for the church members to obey” or “for the believers to obey” -ACT 16 4 gpi3 figs-activepassive τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 that had been decided by the apostles and elders who were in Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 4 n46i writing-pronouns διεπορεύοντο…παρεδίδοσαν αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Silas, and Timothy, and the pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the cities they were visiting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were going… they were delivering to the believers in those cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 16 4 bu6r figs-ellipsis αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν 1 for them to keep Luke is writing in a compact way. You can explain his meaning more fully if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were delivering to the believers the decrees that had been decided by the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, and they were instructing the believers to keep those decrees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 16 4 gpi3 figs-activepassive τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 that had been decided by the apostles and elders who were in Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 5 q8v9 figs-activepassive αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει, καὶ ἐπερίσσευον τῷ ἀριθμῷ καθ’ ἡμέραν 1 the churches were being strengthened in the faith and were increasing in number each day If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers became stronger in their faith, and there were more and more people becoming believers every day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 5 lv4f figs-metaphor αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει 1 the churches were being strengthened in the faith This speaks of helping someone to believe more confidently as if it were making them physically stronger. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 6 g97e τὴν Φρυγίαν 1 Phrygia **Phrygia** is a region in Asia. See how you translated this name in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). From 3a78b9ac30cdc594d96da33e71ed04dc4a74fb51 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 20 Sep 2022 16:34:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 037/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index a9e8c137b6..02f0fa8215 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2324,8 +2324,7 @@ ACT 16 3 pybf figs-hyperbole ᾔδεισαν…ἅπαντες 1 Luke says **al ACT 16 4 n46i writing-pronouns διεπορεύοντο…παρεδίδοσαν αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Silas, and Timothy, and the pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the cities they were visiting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were going… they were delivering to the believers in those cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 16 4 bu6r figs-ellipsis αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν 1 for them to keep Luke is writing in a compact way. You can explain his meaning more fully if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were delivering to the believers the decrees that had been decided by the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, and they were instructing the believers to keep those decrees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 16 4 gpi3 figs-activepassive τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 that had been decided by the apostles and elders who were in Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 5 q8v9 figs-activepassive αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει, καὶ ἐπερίσσευον τῷ ἀριθμῷ καθ’ ἡμέραν 1 the churches were being strengthened in the faith and were increasing in number each day If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers became stronger in their faith, and there were more and more people becoming believers every day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 5 lv4f figs-metaphor αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει 1 the churches were being strengthened in the faith This speaks of helping someone to believe more confidently as if it were making them physically stronger. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 5 q8v9 figs-activepassive αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει 1 the churches were being strengthened in the faith and were increasing in number each day If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Paul, Silas, and Timothy. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were strengthening the churches in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 6 g97e τὴν Φρυγίαν 1 Phrygia **Phrygia** is a region in Asia. See how you translated this name in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). ACT 16 6 ue3k figs-activepassive κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 6 h4u4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Here, **word** stands for “message.” Alternate translation: “the message about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 52240969af9636faeab5e81b05838c5d086b0eb0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 20 Sep 2022 16:38:55 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 038/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 ++++++--- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 02f0fa8215..13971377fa 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2325,9 +2325,12 @@ ACT 16 4 n46i writing-pronouns διεπορεύοντο…παρεδίδοσαν ACT 16 4 bu6r figs-ellipsis αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν 1 for them to keep Luke is writing in a compact way. You can explain his meaning more fully if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were delivering to the believers the decrees that had been decided by the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, and they were instructing the believers to keep those decrees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 16 4 gpi3 figs-activepassive τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 that had been decided by the apostles and elders who were in Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 5 q8v9 figs-activepassive αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει 1 the churches were being strengthened in the faith and were increasing in number each day If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Paul, Silas, and Timothy. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were strengthening the churches in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 6 g97e τὴν Φρυγίαν 1 Phrygia **Phrygia** is a region in Asia. See how you translated this name in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). -ACT 16 6 ue3k figs-activepassive κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 6 h4u4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Here, **word** stands for “message.” Alternate translation: “the message about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 6 dhmn grammar-connect-logic-result διῆλθον…τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν, κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος λαλῆσαι τὸν λόγον ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit to speak the word in Asia, they went through Phrygia and the Galatian region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +ACT 16 6 g97e translate-names τὴν Φρυγίαν…Γαλατικὴν χώραν…τῇ Ἀσίᾳ 1 Phrygia The word **Phrygia** is the name of a region in northwestern Asia Minor. See how you translated this name in [2:10](../02/10.md). The word **Galatian** describes the region of Galatia in central Asia Minor. The word **Asia** is the name of a Roman province in western Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 16 6 qk0k figs-infostructure τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν 1 Paul, Silas, and Timothy actually had to go through Galatia in order to reach Phrygia, so it might be more natural to put the information about Galatia first. Alternate translation: “the Galatian region and Phrygia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +ACT 16 6 ue3k figs-activepassive κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 6 d56g figs-extrainfo κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 Since Luke explains shortly after this that the Holy Spirit actually wanted Paul, Silas, and Timothy to share the good news about Jesus in two other regions, you do not need to explain here why the Holy Spirit forbade them to share the good news at this time in the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +ACT 16 6 h4u4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 7 x1b1 figs-go ἐλθόντες 1 when they had come Here, **had come** can be translated as “had gone” or “had arrived.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 16 7 b1xq translate-names Μυσίαν…Βιθυνίαν 1 Mysia … Bithynia **Mysia** and **Bithynia** are two more regions in Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 7 b539 τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ 1 the Spirit of Jesus Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” From c25990793a982eb772fe2194857e6719fed5d906 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 20 Sep 2022 16:39:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 039/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++--- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 13971377fa..121e852722 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2331,9 +2331,8 @@ ACT 16 6 qk0k figs-infostructure τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικ ACT 16 6 ue3k figs-activepassive κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 6 d56g figs-extrainfo κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 Since Luke explains shortly after this that the Holy Spirit actually wanted Paul, Silas, and Timothy to share the good news about Jesus in two other regions, you do not need to explain here why the Holy Spirit forbade them to share the good news at this time in the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) ACT 16 6 h4u4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 7 x1b1 figs-go ἐλθόντες 1 when they had come Here, **had come** can be translated as “had gone” or “had arrived.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -ACT 16 7 b1xq translate-names Μυσίαν…Βιθυνίαν 1 Mysia … Bithynia **Mysia** and **Bithynia** are two more regions in Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 16 7 b539 τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ 1 the Spirit of Jesus Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” +ACT 16 7 b1xq translate-names Μυσίαν…Βιθυνίαν 1 Mysia … Bithynia The words **Mysia** and **Bithynia** are the names of two more regions in Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 16 7 b539 figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ 1 the Spirit of Jesus Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **the Spirit of Jesus**, he means the Holy Spirit. You can use that name instead if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 8 s6l1 κατέβησαν εἰς Τρῳάδα 1 they came down to the city of Troas The phrase **came down** is used here because Troas is lower in elevation than Mysia. ACT 16 8 xq6n figs-go κατέβησαν 1 they came down Here, **came** can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 16 9 t6v2 ὅραμα…τῷ Παύλῳ ὤφθη 1 a vision appeared to Paul Alternate translation: “Paul saw a vision from God” or “Paul had a vision from God” From 5d54c81cdc9935d26d5e7693c4b0a1cb2924ee09 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 20 Sep 2022 16:41:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 040/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 121e852722..c356d6bd19 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2333,8 +2333,9 @@ ACT 16 6 d56g figs-extrainfo κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου ACT 16 6 h4u4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 7 b1xq translate-names Μυσίαν…Βιθυνίαν 1 Mysia … Bithynia The words **Mysia** and **Bithynia** are the names of two more regions in Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 7 b539 figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ 1 the Spirit of Jesus Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **the Spirit of Jesus**, he means the Holy Spirit. You can use that name instead if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 8 s6l1 κατέβησαν εἰς Τρῳάδα 1 they came down to the city of Troas The phrase **came down** is used here because Troas is lower in elevation than Mysia. -ACT 16 8 xq6n figs-go κατέβησαν 1 they came down Here, **came** can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +ACT 16 8 s6l1 figs-idiom κατέβησαν 1 they came down to the city of Troas Luke says that Paul, Silas, and Timothy **came down** to Troas because that city is lower in elevation than Mysia. Alternate translation: “they traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 16 8 xq6n figs-go κατέβησαν 1 they came down In a context such as this, if you retain the idiom, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +ACT 16 8 h9d3 translate-names Τρῳάδα 1 The word **Troas** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 9 t6v2 ὅραμα…τῷ Παύλῳ ὤφθη 1 a vision appeared to Paul Alternate translation: “Paul saw a vision from God” or “Paul had a vision from God” ACT 16 9 hq8e παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν 1 calling him Alternate translation: “begging him” or “inviting him” ACT 16 9 cm2u διαβὰς εἰς Μακεδονίαν 1 Coming over into Macedonia The phrase **coming over** is used because **Macedonia** is across the sea from Troas. From 733c28f6763a26410352ec882ba329034ee0ac25 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 20 Sep 2022 16:43:27 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 041/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++--- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index c356d6bd19..fb27fce372 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2336,9 +2336,8 @@ ACT 16 7 b539 figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ 1 the Spirit of Jes ACT 16 8 s6l1 figs-idiom κατέβησαν 1 they came down to the city of Troas Luke says that Paul, Silas, and Timothy **came down** to Troas because that city is lower in elevation than Mysia. Alternate translation: “they traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 8 xq6n figs-go κατέβησαν 1 they came down In a context such as this, if you retain the idiom, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 16 8 h9d3 translate-names Τρῳάδα 1 The word **Troas** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 16 9 t6v2 ὅραμα…τῷ Παύλῳ ὤφθη 1 a vision appeared to Paul Alternate translation: “Paul saw a vision from God” or “Paul had a vision from God” -ACT 16 9 hq8e παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν 1 calling him Alternate translation: “begging him” or “inviting him” -ACT 16 9 cm2u διαβὰς εἰς Μακεδονίαν 1 Coming over into Macedonia The phrase **coming over** is used because **Macedonia** is across the sea from Troas. +ACT 16 9 cm2u διαβὰς 1 Coming over into Macedonia The man in the vision uses the phrase **coming over** because **Macedonia** is across the sea from Troas. Alternate translation: “Coming across the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 16 9 tzxh figs-idiom ἀνὴρ Μακεδών τις 1 Luke is describing this man in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “A certain man of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 10 fg5h ἐζητήσαμεν ἐξελθεῖν εἰς Μακεδονίαν, συμβιβάζοντες ὅτι προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εὐαγγελίσασθαι αὐτούς 1 we sought to go out to Macedonia, reasoning together that God had called us to proclaim the gospel to them Here the words **we** and **us** refer to Paul and his companions including Luke, the author of Acts. ACT 16 11 m2p5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and his companions are now in Philippi on their missionary trip. ACT 16 11 q2pr translate-names Σαμοθρᾴκην…Νέαν Πόλιν 1 Samothrace … Neapolis **Samothrace** and **Neapolis** are coastal cities near Phillipi in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 283ea0418a07f05f81239a795b6bb6f951e9e9e4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 20 Sep 2022 16:46:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 042/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++++- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index fb27fce372..823e4b82ae 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2338,7 +2338,10 @@ ACT 16 8 xq6n figs-go κατέβησαν 1 they came down In a context such as t ACT 16 8 h9d3 translate-names Τρῳάδα 1 The word **Troas** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 9 cm2u διαβὰς 1 Coming over into Macedonia The man in the vision uses the phrase **coming over** because **Macedonia** is across the sea from Troas. Alternate translation: “Coming across the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 9 tzxh figs-idiom ἀνὴρ Μακεδών τις 1 Luke is describing this man in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “A certain man of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 16 10 fg5h ἐζητήσαμεν ἐξελθεῖν εἰς Μακεδονίαν, συμβιβάζοντες ὅτι προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εὐαγγελίσασθαι αὐτούς 1 we sought to go out to Macedonia, reasoning together that God had called us to proclaim the gospel to them Here the words **we** and **us** refer to Paul and his companions including Luke, the author of Acts. +ACT 16 10 q0c7 writing-pronouns εἶδεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul had seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 16 10 fg5h figs-explicit ἐζητήσαμεν…προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς 1 we sought to go out to Macedonia, reasoning together that God had called us to proclaim the gospel to them Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **we** and **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 10 e884 figs-exclusive ἐζητήσαμεν…προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς 1 Luke is using the pronouns **we** and **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 16 10 iu0e writing-pronouns αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the people of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to the people of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 16 11 m2p5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and his companions are now in Philippi on their missionary trip. ACT 16 11 q2pr translate-names Σαμοθρᾴκην…Νέαν Πόλιν 1 Samothrace … Neapolis **Samothrace** and **Neapolis** are coastal cities near Phillipi in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 12 tl9f figs-explicit κολωνία 1 a colony This **colony** was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 0e03bceb20204dad1391a7567b82ce18a4dfc96a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2022 10:46:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 043/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 17 +++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index f476562c13..f597319a76 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -979,15 +979,16 @@ MAT 13 43 u6sm figs-simile ἐκλάμψουσιν ὡς ὁ ἥλιος 1 will MAT 13 43 j487 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ 1 Jesus is using the term **kingdom** figuratively to mean where God dwells and where the righteous will dwell with him. Alternate translation: “in heaven where God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 43 sea2 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτῶν 1 of their Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 13 43 zxh2 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear See how you translated a similar phrase in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 44 fjm1 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: In verses 44-46, Jesus describes the kingdom of heaven by telling two parables about people who sold their possessions to purchase something of great value. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 13 44 e9cv figs-metonymy ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. See how you translated this in [13:24](../13/24.md). Alternate translation: “When our God in heaven shows himself to be king, it will be like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 44 u9jq figs-activepassive ὁμοία ἐστὶν…θησαυρῷ κεκρυμμένῳ ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ 1 is like a treasure hidden in a field If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “is like a treasure that someone had hidden in a field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 44 k9rh θησαυρῷ 1 a treasure A **treasure** is a very valuable and precious thing or collection of things. -MAT 13 44 hu7f ἔκρυψεν 1 hid Alternate translation: “covered it up” -MAT 13 44 jtv2 figs-explicit πωλεῖ πάντα ὅσα ἔχει, καὶ ἀγοράζει τὸν ἀγρὸν ἐκεῖνον 1 sells everything, as much as he has, and buys that field The implied information is that the person **buys** the **field** to take possession of the hidden treasure. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 44 fjm1 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: In [13:44-46](../13/44-46.md), Jesus describes **the kingdom of heaven** by telling two parables about people who sold their possessions to purchase something of great value. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 13 44 tac2 figs-simile ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν θησαυρῷ κεκρυμμένῳ ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ 1 Here, Jesus is comparing **the kingdom of the heavens** with a **treasure**. He is saying that it is as valuable to a person as a very expensive treasure which someone might find. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of the heavens is similar to a very valuable item which is found in a field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MAT 13 44 e9cv figs-metonymy ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like See how you translated **kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 44 wg6a figs-activepassive κεκρυμμένῳ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which someone hid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 13 44 k9rh translate-unknown θησαυρῷ 1 a treasure A **treasure** is a very valuable and precious thing or collection of things. If your readers would not know this, you can state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “a very valuable item” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 13 44 hu7f κεκρυμμένῳ…ἔκρυψεν 1 hid Alternate translation: “buried … buried” MAT 13 45 c633 figs-explicit ὁμοία…ἀνθρώπῳ ἐμπόρῳ ζητοῦντι καλοὺς μαργαρίτας 1 like a man, a merchant, seeking fine pearls The implied information is that the man was looking for valuable **pearls** that he could buy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 45 khy6 ἀνθρώπῳ ἐμπόρῳ 1 a man, a merchant A **merchant** is a trader or wholesale dealer who often obtains merchandise from distant places. -MAT 13 45 b88q translate-unknown καλοὺς μαργαρίτας 1 fine pearls A pearl is a smooth, hard, shiny, white or light-colored bead formed inside mollusks in the sea and highly prized as a gem or to make into valuable jewelry. Alternate translation: “fine valuable” or “beautiful pearls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 13 45 auj6 figs-metonymy ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 See how you translated **the kingdom of the heavens** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) See how you translated **the kingdom of the heavens** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 45 khy6 translate-unknown ἀνθρώπῳ ἐμπόρῳ 1 a man, a merchant A **merchant** is a trader who often obtains merchandise from distant places and sells them to other people. If your readers would not understand the word **merchant**, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person who sells items” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 13 45 b88q translate-unknown καλοὺς μαργαρίτας 1 fine pearls These pearls are beautiful and valuable mineral balls that people use as jewelry. They are formed inside the shell of a small animal that lives in the ocean. If your readers would not be familiar with pearls, you could express this idea in a more general way. Alternate translation: “decorations made from valuable materials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 13 47 vw24 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus describes the kingdom of heaven by telling a parable about fishermen who use a large net to catch fish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 13 47 g79n figs-simile ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν σαγήνῃ 1 the kingdom of the heavens is like a net The **kingdom** is not like the **net**, but the **kingdom** draws all kinds of people like a **net** catches all kinds of fish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 13 47 rjm4 figs-metonymy ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the kingdom of the heavens is like Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. See how you translated this in [13:24](../13/24.md). Alternate translation: “When our God in heaven shows himself to be king, it will be like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From ac640f0137c3546ae78ad8191e6c6efb2d3b9754 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2022 14:43:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 044/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 53 ++++++++++++++++++++++-------------------------- 1 file changed, 24 insertions(+), 29 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index f597319a76..cfa74e09b7 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ MAT 7 3 q1z4 figs-metaphor τὴν…ἐν τῷ σῷ ὀφθαλμῷ δοκ MAT 7 3 xdcg figs-hyperbole τὴν…ἐν τῷ σῷ ὀφθαλμῷ δοκὸν οὐ κατανοεῖς 1 the log that is in your own eye A **log** cannot fit into a person's eye. Jesus is exaggerating to emphasize that a person should pay attention to their own more offensive sins before he deals with another person’s less offensive sins. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows this exaggeration. Alternate translation: “you do not see your own very offensive sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 7 4 k58h figs-rquestion ἢ πῶς ἐρεῖς τῷ ἀδελφῷ σου, ἄφες ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ σου, καὶ ἰδοὺ, ἡ δοκὸς ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ σοῦ? 1 Or how will you say to your brother, ‘Let me take out the speck from your eye,’ while behold, the log is in your own eye? Jesus asks this question to challenge the people to pay attention to their own sins before they pay attention to another person’s sins. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not say to your brother, ‘Let me take out the speck from your eye,’ while there is log in your own eye.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 7 6 wohg figs-metaphor μὴ δῶτε τὸ ἅγιον τοῖς κυσίν, μηδὲ βάλητε τοὺς μαργαρίτας ὑμῶν ἔμπροσθεν τῶν χοίρων 1 Here, to **give what is holy** and to **throw your pearls** means to share about God with people. The message about God is seen as very valuable and holy. Also, **dogs** and **pigs** are figurative for people who would reject this message. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Do not share the holy message about God with people who would hurt you, nor should you try to share the valuable message about God with people who do not care to listen to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 7 6 xy2e translate-unknown τοὺς μαργαρίτας 1 pearls A pearl is a valuable white stone produced by a creature that lives in the ocean. It is similar to a small, round stone or bead. They are also very easy to break or damage. If this would not be understood in your language, you can use plain language. Alternate translation: “small valuable stones" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 7 6 xy2e translate-unknown τοὺς μαργαρίτας 1 pearls These pearls are beautiful and valuable mineral balls that people use as jewelry. They are formed inside the shell of a small animal that lives in the ocean. If your readers would not be familiar with pearls, you could express this idea in a more general way. Alternate translation: “decorations made from valuable materials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])\n\n MAT 7 7 ut6i figs-parallelism αἰτεῖτε καὶ δοθήσεται ὑμῖν; ζητεῖτε καὶ εὑρήσετε; κρούετε καὶ ἀνοιγήσεται ὑμῖν 1 Ask … Seek … Knock Here, **Ask**, **seek**, and **knock** have a similar meaning of praying to God. If saying the same thing three times might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Pray to God for what you need, and he will give it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 7 7 tv49 figs-activepassive δοθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 it will be given to you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will give it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 7 7 rt8g figs-explicit κρούετε 1 Knock To **knock** on a door is a polite way to request that the person inside the house or room open the door. If knocking on a door is impolite or not done in your culture, use the word that describes how people politely ask for people to let you into their house. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “knock on the door” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -985,39 +985,34 @@ MAT 13 44 e9cv figs-metonymy ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The MAT 13 44 wg6a figs-activepassive κεκρυμμένῳ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which someone hid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 44 k9rh translate-unknown θησαυρῷ 1 a treasure A **treasure** is a very valuable and precious thing or collection of things. If your readers would not know this, you can state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “a very valuable item” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 13 44 hu7f κεκρυμμένῳ…ἔκρυψεν 1 hid Alternate translation: “buried … buried” -MAT 13 45 c633 figs-explicit ὁμοία…ἀνθρώπῳ ἐμπόρῳ ζητοῦντι καλοὺς μαργαρίτας 1 like a man, a merchant, seeking fine pearls The implied information is that the man was looking for valuable **pearls** that he could buy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 45 c633 figs-explicit ζητοῦντι καλοὺς μαργαρίτας 1 like a man, a merchant, seeking fine pearls The author is implying here that the man is **seeking fine pearls** because he wants to buy them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “seeking to buy fine pearls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 45 znbs figs-simile πάλιν ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν ἀνθρώπῳ ἐμπόρῳ ζητοῦντι καλοὺς μαργαρίτας 1 Here, Jesus is comparing **the kingdom of God** with **fine pearls**. He is saying that it is very valuable to a person just like pearls are to a person who buys them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way, as expressed in the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 13 45 auj6 figs-metonymy ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 See how you translated **the kingdom of the heavens** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) See how you translated **the kingdom of the heavens** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 45 khy6 translate-unknown ἀνθρώπῳ ἐμπόρῳ 1 a man, a merchant A **merchant** is a trader who often obtains merchandise from distant places and sells them to other people. If your readers would not understand the word **merchant**, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person who sells items” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 13 45 b88q translate-unknown καλοὺς μαργαρίτας 1 fine pearls These pearls are beautiful and valuable mineral balls that people use as jewelry. They are formed inside the shell of a small animal that lives in the ocean. If your readers would not be familiar with pearls, you could express this idea in a more general way. Alternate translation: “decorations made from valuable materials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 13 47 vw24 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus describes the kingdom of heaven by telling a parable about fishermen who use a large net to catch fish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 13 47 g79n figs-simile ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν σαγήνῃ 1 the kingdom of the heavens is like a net The **kingdom** is not like the **net**, but the **kingdom** draws all kinds of people like a **net** catches all kinds of fish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MAT 13 47 vw24 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus describes **the kingdom of heaven** by telling a parable about fishermen who use a large net to catch fish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 13 47 s2dd figs-extrainfo 0 Jesus explains the meaning of this parable in [13:49](../13/49.md) so you do not need to explain the meaning here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) Jesus explains the meaning of the parable in [13:49](../13/49.md), so you do not need to explain the meaning here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +MAT 13 47 g79n figs-simile ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν σαγήνῃ βληθείσῃ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν καὶ ἐκ παντὸς γένους συναγαγούσῃ 1 the kingdom of the heavens is like a net Here, Jesus compares **the kingdom of the heavens** with how a **net** catches many different kinds of fish. In this sentence, Jesus is not comparing the kingdom of the heavens with the net itself. He is rather comparing the kingdom of the heavens with what the net is doing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of the heavens is comparable to how a net is cast into the see, and gathers every kind of fish in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 13 47 rjm4 figs-metonymy ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the kingdom of the heavens is like Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. See how you translated this in [13:24](../13/24.md). Alternate translation: “When our God in heaven shows himself to be king, it will be like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 47 vrp4 figs-activepassive ὁμοία…σαγήνῃ βληθείσῃ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν 1 like a net having been cast into the sea If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “like a net that some fishermen cast into the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 47 kbz2 βληθείσῃ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν 1 having been cast into the sea Alternate translation: “that was thrown into the sea” -MAT 13 47 t9v6 ἐκ παντὸς γένους συναγαγούσῃ 1 having gathered from every kind Alternate translation: “having caught all kinds of fish” -MAT 13 48 kf47 ἀναβιβάσαντες ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν 1 they drew up on the beach Alternate translation: “they pulled the net up onto the beach” or “they pulled the net ashore” -MAT 13 48 cnp7 τὰ καλὰ 1 the good things Alternate translation: “the good fish” -MAT 13 48 qi2z τὰ…σαπρὰ 2 the worthless things Alternate translation: “the bad fish” or “the inedible fish” -MAT 13 48 aqu2 ἔξω ἔβαλον 1 they threw away Alternate translation: “they did not keep” -MAT 13 49 q1ms ἐξελεύσονται 1 will come Alternate translation: “will come out” or “will go out” or “will come from heaven” -MAT 13 49 ah2k figs-nominaladj τοὺς πονηροὺς ἐκ μέσου τῶν δικαίων 1 the wicked from among the righteous If your language does not use the nominal adjectives **wicked** and **righteous**, you can express them as adjectives. Alternate translation: “the wicked people from the righteous people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 13 50 hwv1 βαλοῦσιν αὐτοὺς 1 they will throw them Alternate translation: “the angels will throw the wicked people” -MAT 13 50 j8nf figs-metaphor τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρός 1 the furnace of fire This is a metaphor for the fires of hell. If the term **furnace** is not known, you can translate it as “oven.” See how you translated this in [13:42](../13/42.md). Alternate translation: “the fiery furnace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 50 mc8t translate-symaction ὁ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων 1 weeping and grinding of teeth Here, **grinding of teeth** is a symbolic act, representing extreme sadness and suffering. See how you translated this in [8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “weeping and expressing their extreme suffering.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -MAT 13 51 d3wg 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus describes the kingdom of heaven by telling a parable about a person who manages a household. This is the end of the part of the story about Jesus teaching the crowds about the kingdom of heaven through using parables. -MAT 13 51 p5ej figs-quotations συνήκατε ταῦτα πάντα? λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, ναί. 1 Have you understood all these things?” They say to him, “Yes.” If necessary, both direct quotations can be translated as indirect quotations. Alternate translation: “Jesus asked them if they had understood all this, and they said that they did understand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MAT 13 52 g4dd figs-metonymy μαθητευθεὶς τῇ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 who has been discipled for the kingdom of the heavens Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in the book of Matthew. If possible, keep “heaven” in your translation. Alternate translation: “has learned the truth about our God in heaven, who is king” or “has submitted himself to God’s rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 52 gr36 figs-parables ὅμοιός ἐστιν ἀνθρώπῳ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅστις ἐκβάλλει ἐκ τοῦ θησαυροῦ αὐτοῦ καινὰ καὶ παλαιά 1 is like a man, an owner of a house, who draws out new things and old things from his treasure Jesus speaks another parable. He compares scribes, who know very well the scriptures that Moses and the prophets wrote, and who also now accept Jesus’ teachings, to a **house** **owner** who uses both **old** and **new** treasures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 13 52 g59c τοῦ θησαυροῦ αὐτοῦ 1 his treasure A **treasure** is a very valuable and precious thing or a collection of things. Here it may refer to the place where these things are stored, the “treasury” or “storeroom.” -MAT 13 53 jwv2 καὶ ἐγένετο ὅτε 1 And it happened that when This phrase shifts the story from Jesus’ teachings to what happened next. Alternate translation: “And then” or “And after” -MAT 13 54 qnh9 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that runs through [17:27](../17/27.md), where Matthew tells of continued opposition to Jesus’ ministry and teaching about the kingdom of heaven. Here, the people of Jesus’ home town reject him. -MAT 13 54 q3ml figs-explicit τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ 1 his hometown Here, **his hometown** refers to the town of Nazareth, where Jesus grew up. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 54 j6vb ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ αὐτῶν 1 in their synagogue The pronoun **their** is referring to the people of the region. +MAT 13 47 vrp4 figs-activepassive ὁμοία…σαγήνῃ βληθείσῃ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν 1 like a net having been cast into the sea If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is like a net which fisherman threw into the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 13 48 aqhl figs-activepassive ἐπληρώθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fish filled the net” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 13 48 cnp7 figs-nominaladj τὰ καλὰ…τὰ…σαπρὰ 1 the good things Jesus is using the adjectives **good** and **worthless** as a noun here in order to describe a group of as either good for eating or not good for eating. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “good fish … worthless fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 13 49 zawv figs-explicit ἐξελεύσονται οἱ ἄγγελοι 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Jesus does not say where the angels **go out** from. Jesus and his audience would have known that the angels went out from God's presence. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The angels will go out from God's presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 49 ah2k figs-nominaladj τοὺς πονηροὺς ἐκ μέσου τῶν δικαίων 1 the wicked from among the righteous Jesus is using the adjectives **wicked** and **righteous** as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are wicked … people who are righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 13 50 j8nf καὶ βαλοῦσιν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρός. ἐκεῖ ἔσται ὁ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων 1 the furnace of fire See how you translated this verse in [13:42](../13/42.md). +MAT 13 51 p5ej figs-quotations συνήκατε ταῦτα πάντα? λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, ναί. 1 Have you understood all these things?” They say to him, “Yes.” If it would be more natural in your language, you could express these as indirect quotations. Alternate translation: “Jesus asked them if they had understood all this, and they said that they did understand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +MAT 13 52 g4dd figs-metonymy μαθητευθεὶς τῇ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 who has been discipled for the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated **the kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 52 gr36 figs-parables \n is like a man, an owner of a house, who draws out new things and old things from his treasure Jesus speaks another parable. In this parable, he talks about a man who gives people treasures out of his old and new belongings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 13 52 ip6e figs-simile πᾶς γραμματεὺς…ὅμοιός ἐστιν ἀνθρώπῳ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅστις ἐκβάλλει ἐκ τοῦ θησαυροῦ αὐτοῦ καινὰ καὶ παλαιά 1\n Here, Jesus is comparing a **scribe** who obeys Jesus with **a man** who gives people new and old things from his treasure. Here, the treasure is referring to both old teachings of the law as well as new teachings which Jesus is brought. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “every scribe … is comparable to a person who gives old and new things from their valuable items” or ”every scribe … teaches both new and old teachings, which are like treasures to the people to whom they teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MAT 13 52 g59c translate-unknown τοῦ θησαυροῦ αὐτοῦ 1 his treasure See how you translated **** in [13:44](../13/44.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 13 53 jwv2 writing-endofstory καὶ ἐγένετο ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὰς παραβολὰς ταύτας, μετῆρεν ἐκεῖθεν 1 And it happened that when This verse tells the reader that the story about Jesus telling many parable to his disciples is ending. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) +MAT 13 54 qnh9 writing-newevent 0 General Information: Jesus is using the phrase **And having entered into his hometown** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a way in your language that people use to introduce a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MAT 13 54 q3ml figs-explicit τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ 1 his hometown Here, **his hometown** refers to the town of Nazareth, where Jesus grew up. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his hometown, Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 54 it1f ἐκπλήσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς 1 they were astonished Alternate translation: “they were amazed” -MAT 13 54 b3d2 figs-explicit πόθεν τούτῳ ἡ σοφία αὕτη καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις? 1 From where to this one is this wisdom and these miracles? The people believed that Jesus was just an ordinary man. Alternate translation: “How can an ordinary man like this be so wise and do such great miracles?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 54 etwp figs-rquestion πόθεν τούτῳ ἡ σοφία αὕτη καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις? 1 From where to this one is this wisdom and these miracles? The people use this question to express their amazement that he was so wise and was able to do miracles. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is strange that he is able to speak with such wisdom and do these miracles!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 13 55 rk5e figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός? οὐχ ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ λέγεται Μαριὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ, Ἰάκωβος, καὶ Ἰωσὴφ, καὶ Σίμων, καὶ Ἰούδας? 1 Is not this the son of the carpenter? Is not his mother called Mary, and his brothers, James, and Joseph, and Simon, and Judas? The crowd uses these questions to express their belief that they know who Jesus is and that he is just an ordinary man. If your readers would misunderstand these questions, you can express them as statements. Alternate translation: “He is just the son of a carpenter. We know his mother Mary, and his brothers James, Joseph, Simon, and Judas.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 13 55 rpj9 ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός 1 the son of the carpenter A **carpenter** is someone who makes things with wood or stone. If **carpenter** is not known, “builder” can be used. +MAT 13 54 b3d2 figs-explicit πόθεν τούτῳ ἡ σοφία αὕτη καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις? 1 From where to this one is this wisdom and these miracles? The people asked this question because they did not believe that Jesus had the power to do miracles and heal people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “How can it be that this man has such great wisdom and does these miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 55 rk5e figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός? οὐχ ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ λέγεται Μαριὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ, Ἰάκωβος, καὶ Ἰωσὴφ, καὶ Σίμων, καὶ Ἰούδας? 1 Is not this the son of the carpenter? Is not his mother called Mary, and his brothers, James, and Joseph, and Simon, and Judas? The crowd uses these questions to express their belief that they know who Jesus is and that he is just an ordinary man. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He is just the son of a carpenter. We know his mother Mary, and his brothers James, Joseph, Simon, and Judas.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 13 55 rpj9 translate-unknown ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός 1 the son of the carpenter The word **carpenter** here is referring to someone who works with wood. If your readers would not understand the word **carpenter**, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the son of the man who builds with wood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 13 55 qspg figs-metonymy ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός 1 Jesus is using the phrase **the carpenter** figuratively to mean Jospeh, Jesus' father. Alternate translation: “the son of Joseph, the carpenter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 56 m9pn figs-rquestion αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ οὐχὶ πᾶσαι πρὸς ἡμᾶς εἰσιν? 1 are not all his sisters with us? The crowd uses this question to express their belief that they know who Jesus is and that he is just an ordinary man. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “all his sisters are with us, too.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 13 56 bnv1 figs-rquestion πόθεν οὖν τούτῳ ταῦτα πάντα? 1 From where therefore to this one are all these things? The crowd uses this question to show their understanding that Jesus must have gotten his abilities from somewhere. They were probably expressing their doubt that he got his abilities from God. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “He must have gotten his ability to do these things from somewhere!” or “We do not know where he got these abilities!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 13 56 pqf1 ταῦτα πάντα 1 all these things Here, **all these things** refers to Jesus’ wisdom and ability to do miracles. From 531663dabb9125483282464bea8a0621bbb62ead Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2022 15:08:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 045/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 16 ++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index cfa74e09b7..6bfd374bb4 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1013,14 +1013,14 @@ MAT 13 54 b3d2 figs-explicit πόθεν τούτῳ ἡ σοφία αὕτη κ MAT 13 55 rk5e figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός? οὐχ ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ λέγεται Μαριὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ, Ἰάκωβος, καὶ Ἰωσὴφ, καὶ Σίμων, καὶ Ἰούδας? 1 Is not this the son of the carpenter? Is not his mother called Mary, and his brothers, James, and Joseph, and Simon, and Judas? The crowd uses these questions to express their belief that they know who Jesus is and that he is just an ordinary man. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He is just the son of a carpenter. We know his mother Mary, and his brothers James, Joseph, Simon, and Judas.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 13 55 rpj9 translate-unknown ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός 1 the son of the carpenter The word **carpenter** here is referring to someone who works with wood. If your readers would not understand the word **carpenter**, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the son of the man who builds with wood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 13 55 qspg figs-metonymy ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός 1 Jesus is using the phrase **the carpenter** figuratively to mean Jospeh, Jesus' father. Alternate translation: “the son of Joseph, the carpenter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 56 m9pn figs-rquestion αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ οὐχὶ πᾶσαι πρὸς ἡμᾶς εἰσιν? 1 are not all his sisters with us? The crowd uses this question to express their belief that they know who Jesus is and that he is just an ordinary man. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “all his sisters are with us, too.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 13 56 bnv1 figs-rquestion πόθεν οὖν τούτῳ ταῦτα πάντα? 1 From where therefore to this one are all these things? The crowd uses this question to show their understanding that Jesus must have gotten his abilities from somewhere. They were probably expressing their doubt that he got his abilities from God. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “He must have gotten his ability to do these things from somewhere!” or “We do not know where he got these abilities!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 13 56 pqf1 ταῦτα πάντα 1 all these things Here, **all these things** refers to Jesus’ wisdom and ability to do miracles. -MAT 13 57 f5md figs-activepassive ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ 1 they were offended by him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the people of Jesus’ hometown took offense at him” or “the people rejected Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 57 azn4 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος 1 A prophet is not without honor You can state this double-negative **not … without** in positive form. Alternate translation: “A prophet receives honor everywhere” or “People everywhere honor a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -MAT 13 57 sq8j τῇ πατρίδι 1 his hometown Alternate translation: “his own region” -MAT 13 57 w4x8 ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 in his own family Alternate translation: “in his own home” -MAT 13 58 e2cp οὐκ ἐποίησεν ἐκεῖ δυνάμεις πολλὰς 1 he did not do many miracles there Alternate translation: “Jesus did not do many miracles in his own hometown” +MAT 13 56 m9pn figs-rquestion αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ οὐχὶ πᾶσαι πρὸς ἡμᾶς εἰσιν? 1 are not all his sisters with us? The crowd uses this question to express their belief that they know who Jesus is and that he is just an ordinary man. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “all his sisters are with us, too.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 13 56 bnv1 figs-rquestion πόθεν οὖν τούτῳ ταῦτα πάντα? 1 From where therefore to this one are all these things? The crowd uses this question to show their doubt concerning where Jesus got his abilities from. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “We do not know where he got these abilities!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 13 56 pqf1 ταῦτα πάντα 1 all these things Here, **all these things** refers to Jesus’ wisdom and ability to do miracles mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “are his wisdom and ability to do miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 57 f5md figs-activepassive ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ 1 they were offended by him If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus offended them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 13 57 azn4 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος 1 A prophet is not without honor Jesus uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “A prophet is always honored, except” or “The only place a prophet is not honored is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +MAT 13 57 sq8j τῇ πατρίδι 1 his hometown See how you translated **hometown** in [4:2](../04/02.md). +MAT 13 57 w4x8 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 in his own family Jesus uses the phrase **in his house** to refer to his closest relatives, like his father, mother, or siblings. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “among his closest family members” or “by his father, mother, and siblings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 58 e2cp grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ οὐκ ἐποίησεν ἐκεῖ δυνάμεις πολλὰς, διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν 1 he did not do many miracles there If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since they did not believe, Jesus did not do many miracles in that place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])\n MAT 14 intro g5mc 0 # Matthew 14 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verses 1 and 2 continue the account from chapter 13. Verses 3-12 stop the account and speak of things that happened earlier, possibly soon after Satan tempted Jesus (see [4:12](../mat/04/12.md)). Verse 13 continues the account from verse 2. Be sure to have words in verses 3-12 that tell the reader that Matthew has stopped his account to give new information before he continues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. For example, the writer does not tell who brought John’s head to Herodias’s daughter ([14:11](../mat/14/11.md)). You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 14 1 zl7x figs-events 0 General Information: These verses explain Herod’s reaction when he heard about Jesus. This event happens some time after the events that follow in the narrative. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) MAT 14 1 q8h5 ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 1 At that time Alternate translation: “In those days” or “While Jesus was ministering in Galilee” From 63e402fb6d809325a7de71d51c794edf23972e80 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2022 17:49:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 046/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 823e4b82ae..736bce993d 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2210,7 +2210,7 @@ ACT 15 11 ln38 figs-explicit διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου ACT 15 11 e96c figs-ellipsis καθ’ ὃν τρόπον κἀκεῖνοι 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the way they also will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 15 11 c8mw figs-explicit κἀκεῖνοι 1 Peter assumes that his listeners will know that he is using the pronoun **they** to refer to the Gentiles. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 12 kxjq figs-doublet σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα 1 The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:43](../02/43.md). Alternate translation, as in UST: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ACT 15 13 odjm figs-hendiadys ἀπεκρίθη Ἰάκωβος λέγων 1 Together the words **answered** and **saying** mean that James responded to what everyone in the meeting headset to that point. Alternate translation: “James responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +ACT 15 13 odjm figs-hendiadys ἀπεκρίθη Ἰάκωβος λέγων 1 Together the words **answered** and **saying** mean that James responded to what everyone in the meeting had said to that point. Alternate translation: “James responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 15 13 yqcm translate-names Ἰάκωβος 1 The word **James** is the name of a man, the brother of Jesus who was the leader of the church in Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [12:17](../12/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 15 13 pl6m figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 brothers, listen This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 15 14 jjyc translate-names Συμεὼν 1 The word **Simeon** is the name of a man. It is the Hebrew form of the name whose Greek form is Simon. James is referring to Peter by his Hebrew name. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use either the name Simon or the name Peter here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From c2ff4a2f04b7f697fe8b041ef9233b3a344fcf78 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2022 17:51:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 047/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 736bce993d..82fa2cccd4 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2342,8 +2342,8 @@ ACT 16 10 q0c7 writing-pronouns εἶδεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul ACT 16 10 fg5h figs-explicit ἐζητήσαμεν…προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς 1 we sought to go out to Macedonia, reasoning together that God had called us to proclaim the gospel to them Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **we** and **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 10 e884 figs-exclusive ἐζητήσαμεν…προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς 1 Luke is using the pronouns **we** and **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 10 iu0e writing-pronouns αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the people of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to the people of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 16 11 m2p5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and his companions are now in Philippi on their missionary trip. -ACT 16 11 q2pr translate-names Σαμοθρᾴκην…Νέαν Πόλιν 1 Samothrace … Neapolis **Samothrace** and **Neapolis** are coastal cities near Phillipi in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 16 11 q2pr translate-names Σαμοθρᾴκην…Νέαν Πόλιν 1 Samothrace … Neapolis The word **Samothrace** is the name of an island, and the word **Neapolis** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 16 11 ojte figs-ellipsis τῇ δὲ ἐπιούσῃ εἰς Νέαν Πόλιν 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the next day we sailed to Neapolis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 16 12 tl9f figs-explicit κολωνία 1 a colony This **colony** was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 14 n952 writing-participants τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία 1 a certain woman named Lydia Here, **a certain woman** introduces **Lydia** as a new person in the story. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 16 14 qj86 figs-ellipsis πορφυρόπωλις 1 a seller of purple Here “cloth” is understood. Alternate translation: “a merchant who sold purple cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) From 35d38cdd00d4cebaaf521a8e4eb319b834a44950 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2022 17:54:50 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 048/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++++- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 82fa2cccd4..2f1c18b248 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2344,7 +2344,10 @@ ACT 16 10 e884 figs-exclusive ἐζητήσαμεν…προσκέκληται ACT 16 10 iu0e writing-pronouns αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the people of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “to the people of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 16 11 q2pr translate-names Σαμοθρᾴκην…Νέαν Πόλιν 1 Samothrace … Neapolis The word **Samothrace** is the name of an island, and the word **Neapolis** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 11 ojte figs-ellipsis τῇ δὲ ἐπιούσῃ εἰς Νέαν Πόλιν 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the next day we sailed to Neapolis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 16 12 tl9f figs-explicit κολωνία 1 a colony This **colony** was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 12 c8ox figs-ellipsis κἀκεῖθεν εἰς Φιλίππους 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and from there we traveled overland to Philippi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 16 12 y0z5 translate-names Φιλίππους…Μακεδονίας 1 The word **Philippi** is the name of a city, and the word **Macedonia** is the name of a district. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 16 12 thk7 figs-explicit κολωνία 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **colony**, he means a Roman colony. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Philippi is a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 12 tl9f figs-explicit κολωνία 1 a colony In the Roman empire, a **colony** was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. This information will become important later in the story. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony, where Roman citizens had special rights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 14 n952 writing-participants τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία 1 a certain woman named Lydia Here, **a certain woman** introduces **Lydia** as a new person in the story. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 16 14 qj86 figs-ellipsis πορφυρόπωλις 1 a seller of purple Here “cloth” is understood. Alternate translation: “a merchant who sold purple cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 16 14 c6n8 translate-names Θυατείρων 1 of Thyatira **Thyatira** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From f4827e1c5b80cd00e106f2229c0d6c4c2d667928 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2022 17:58:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 049/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 16 ++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 2f1c18b248..da186718e3 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2348,14 +2348,14 @@ ACT 16 12 c8ox figs-ellipsis κἀκεῖθεν εἰς Φιλίππους 1 Lu ACT 16 12 y0z5 translate-names Φιλίππους…Μακεδονίας 1 The word **Philippi** is the name of a city, and the word **Macedonia** is the name of a district. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 12 thk7 figs-explicit κολωνία 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **colony**, he means a Roman colony. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Philippi is a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 12 tl9f figs-explicit κολωνία 1 a colony In the Roman empire, a **colony** was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. This information will become important later in the story. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony, where Roman citizens had special rights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 14 n952 writing-participants τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία 1 a certain woman named Lydia Here, **a certain woman** introduces **Lydia** as a new person in the story. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 16 14 qj86 figs-ellipsis πορφυρόπωλις 1 a seller of purple Here “cloth” is understood. Alternate translation: “a merchant who sold purple cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 16 14 c6n8 translate-names Θυατείρων 1 of Thyatira **Thyatira** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 16 14 cyk3 σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν 1 worshiping God When Luke says Lydia was **worshiping God**, he is saying that she was a Gentile who gave praise to God and followed him, but did not obey all of the Jewish laws. -ACT 16 14 rd4r figs-metaphor ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν, προσέχειν 1 of whom the Lord opened the heart to pay attention to For the Lord to cause someone to **pay attention** and believe a message is spoken of as if he were opening a person’s **heart**. Alternate translation: “and the Lord caused her to listen well and to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 16 14 s9ju figs-metonymy διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 opened the heart Here, **heart** stands for a person’s mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 14 ddx8 figs-metaphor διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 The author speaks about the **heart** or “mind” as if it were a box that a person could open so it is ready for someone to fill it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 16 14 a74y figs-activepassive τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου 1 what was being said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 14 n952 writing-participants τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία…ἤκουεν 1 a certain woman named Lydia Luke is using the phrase **a certain woman** to introduce **Lydia** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia … who was listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 16 14 se6e translate-names Λυδία 1 The word **Lydia** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 16 14 qj86 figs-metonymy πορφυρόπωλις 1 a seller of purple Luke is figuratively using the color of **purple** cloth to mean the cloth itself by association. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a seller of purple cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 14 c6n8 translate-names Θυατείρων 1 of Thyatira The word **Thyatira** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 16 14 cyk3 figs-idiom σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν 1 worshiping God Here the expression **worshiping God** means the same thing as the expression “fearing God,” which Jews in the time of the New Testament used to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated “fearing God” in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 16 14 rd4r figs-metaphor ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 of whom the Lord opened the heart to pay attention to Luke is speaking figuratively as if the Lord physically **opened** Lydia’s heart to receive the message that Paul was sharing. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 14 s9ju figs-metonymy whose heart the Lord opened 1 opened the heart Here, the **heart** figuratively represents a person’s will and disposition. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 14 a74y figs-activepassive τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου 1 what was being said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 15 g7e9 figs-activepassive ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 And when she was baptized, and her household If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when they baptized Lydia and members of her household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 15 s799 figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 her household Here, **her household** refers to all the people who live in her house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 16 ufy4 ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that This phrase marks the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. From 1a4b71e7325eed70f1096807fdee58b7366c124c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2022 18:03:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 050/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 10 ++++++++-- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index da186718e3..dd1f1274d3 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2355,9 +2355,15 @@ ACT 16 14 c6n8 translate-names Θυατείρων 1 of Thyatira The word **Thyat ACT 16 14 cyk3 figs-idiom σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν 1 worshiping God Here the expression **worshiping God** means the same thing as the expression “fearing God,” which Jews in the time of the New Testament used to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated “fearing God” in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 14 rd4r figs-metaphor ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 of whom the Lord opened the heart to pay attention to Luke is speaking figuratively as if the Lord physically **opened** Lydia’s heart to receive the message that Paul was sharing. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 14 s9ju figs-metonymy whose heart the Lord opened 1 opened the heart Here, the **heart** figuratively represents a person’s will and disposition. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 15 f38e figs-explicit ὡς…ἐβαπτίσθη 1 The implication is that Lydia believed in Jesus and then was baptized. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when she believed in Jesus and was baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 14 a74y figs-activepassive τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου 1 what was being said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 15 g7e9 figs-activepassive ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 And when she was baptized, and her household If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when they baptized Lydia and members of her household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 15 s799 figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 her household Here, **her household** refers to all the people who live in her house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 15 g7e9 figs-activepassive ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη 1 And when she was baptized, and her household If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is likely from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “when Paul baptized her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 15 lv50 figs-ellipsis καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and her household was also baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 16 15 s799 figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 her household Here, **her household** refers to all the people who lived in Lydia’s house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 15 igcw figs-youplural κεκρίκατέ 1 The word **you** is plural. Lydia is addressing Paul and his companions. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural]]) +ACT 16 15 g8ul writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Lydia is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) +ACT 16 15 xnkk figs-imperative εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου, μένετε 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please come to my house and stay with me as my guests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +ACT 16 15 hkh3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Luke is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 16 ufy4 ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that This phrase marks the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. ACT 16 16 vyn4 writing-background παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν, ἥτις ἐργασίαν πολλὴν παρεῖχεν τοῖς κυρίοις αὐτῆς μαντευομένη 1 This verse give background information to explain that this young fortune teller brought much financial gain to her masters by guessing people’s futures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 16 16 y1gc writing-participants παιδίσκην τινὰ 1 a certain young female slave The phrase **a certain** introduces a new person to the story. Alternate translation: “there was a young female slave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) From 24b0053d3b7af8fff95e33a536f8b6cab44073c9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2022 18:06:22 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 051/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index dd1f1274d3..dc9d95e63a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2364,10 +2364,10 @@ ACT 16 15 igcw figs-youplural κεκρίκατέ 1 The word **you** is plural. ACT 16 15 g8ul writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Lydia is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 16 15 xnkk figs-imperative εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου, μένετε 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please come to my house and stay with me as my guests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 16 15 hkh3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Luke is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 16 16 ufy4 ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that This phrase marks the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. -ACT 16 16 vyn4 writing-background παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν, ἥτις ἐργασίαν πολλὴν παρεῖχεν τοῖς κυρίοις αὐτῆς μαντευομένη 1 This verse give background information to explain that this young fortune teller brought much financial gain to her masters by guessing people’s futures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 16 16 y1gc writing-participants παιδίσκην τινὰ 1 a certain young female slave The phrase **a certain** introduces a new person to the story. Alternate translation: “there was a young female slave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 16 16 ymt9 πνεῦμα Πύθωνα 1 a spirit of divination An evil **spirit** spoke to her often about the immediate future of people. +ACT 16 16 ufy4 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +ACT 16 16 y1gc writing-participants παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν 1 a certain young female slave Luke is using the phrase **a certain young female slave** to introduce this woman as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a certain young female slave who had a Python spirit and who met us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 16 16 ymt9 figs-metonymy πνεῦμα Πύθωνα 1 a spirit of divination Luke is figuratively describing the **spirit** that enabled this woman to tell fortunes by association with the Pythian serpent that the ancient Greeks believed to have guarded the oracle at Delphi. This was not an actual god named Python, it was a demonic spirit. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spirit of divination” or “a demonic spirit that enabled her to tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 16 h2c5 translate-names Πύθωνα 1 The word **Python** is the name of a pagan god. However, Luke is using the name figuratively here by association to mean a demonic spirit of divination. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 17 tni9 figs-metaphor ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 the way of salvation How a person can be saved is spoken of here as if it were a way or path that a person walks on. Alternate translation: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 18 lj79 figs-activepassive διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας 1 But Paul, being greatly annoyed and turning If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But she greatly annoyed Paul so he turned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 18 qi1k figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Here, **name** stands for speaking with the authority or as the representative of Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 4f12e1a9e55b798dfa22fb9147268d8b98a0188a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2022 18:07:27 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 052/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index dc9d95e63a..b84ddaf9a1 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2368,7 +2368,8 @@ ACT 16 16 ufy4 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luk ACT 16 16 y1gc writing-participants παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν 1 a certain young female slave Luke is using the phrase **a certain young female slave** to introduce this woman as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a certain young female slave who had a Python spirit and who met us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 16 16 ymt9 figs-metonymy πνεῦμα Πύθωνα 1 a spirit of divination Luke is figuratively describing the **spirit** that enabled this woman to tell fortunes by association with the Pythian serpent that the ancient Greeks believed to have guarded the oracle at Delphi. This was not an actual god named Python, it was a demonic spirit. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spirit of divination” or “a demonic spirit that enabled her to tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 16 h2c5 translate-names Πύθωνα 1 The word **Python** is the name of a pagan god. However, Luke is using the name figuratively here by association to mean a demonic spirit of divination. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 16 17 tni9 figs-metaphor ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 the way of salvation How a person can be saved is spoken of here as if it were a way or path that a person walks on. Alternate translation: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 17 tni9 figs-metaphor ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 the way of salvation This woman is speaking figuratively as if **salvation** were a **way** or path that people walked on. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how you can receive salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 17 gsbj figs-abstractnouns ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation, as in UST: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 16 18 lj79 figs-activepassive διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας 1 But Paul, being greatly annoyed and turning If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But she greatly annoyed Paul so he turned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 18 qi1k figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Here, **name** stands for speaking with the authority or as the representative of Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 18 u4z8 ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 it came out that same hour Alternate translation: “the spirit came out immediately” From 0f865af5c365a70bcb7b058101de272c24aa7353 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2022 18:08:37 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 053/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index b84ddaf9a1..ab545e726c 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2370,9 +2370,9 @@ ACT 16 16 ymt9 figs-metonymy πνεῦμα Πύθωνα 1 a spirit of divination ACT 16 16 h2c5 translate-names Πύθωνα 1 The word **Python** is the name of a pagan god. However, Luke is using the name figuratively here by association to mean a demonic spirit of divination. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 17 tni9 figs-metaphor ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 the way of salvation This woman is speaking figuratively as if **salvation** were a **way** or path that people walked on. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how you can receive salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 17 gsbj figs-abstractnouns ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation, as in UST: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 16 18 lj79 figs-activepassive διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας 1 But Paul, being greatly annoyed and turning If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But she greatly annoyed Paul so he turned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 18 qi1k figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Here, **name** stands for speaking with the authority or as the representative of Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 18 u4z8 ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 it came out that same hour Alternate translation: “the spirit came out immediately” +ACT 16 18 lj79 figs-activepassive διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας 1 But Paul, being greatly annoyed and turning If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “she greatly annoyed Paul, so he turned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 18 qi1k figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Here the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 18 u4z8 figs-idiom ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 it came out that same hour In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, term does not mean a literal hour of sixty minutes, it means the shortest time imaginable. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it came out that instant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 19 m1y7 οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς 1 her masters Alternate translation: “the owners of the slave girl” ACT 16 19 r1a1 figs-explicit ἰδόντες…οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς, ὅτι ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν 1 when her masters saw that their hope of profit was gone It can be stated clearly why they no longer hoped to make money. Alternate translation: “when her masters saw that she could no longer earn money for them by telling fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 19 bws7 εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 1 into the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services took place. Alternate translation: “into the public square” From e2f5968b3c65c7400ce6ec3d238cc71b93e61d4d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2022 18:10:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 054/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 +++---- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index ab545e726c..66f612593a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2373,10 +2373,9 @@ ACT 16 17 gsbj figs-abstractnouns ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 If your languag ACT 16 18 lj79 figs-activepassive διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας 1 But Paul, being greatly annoyed and turning If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “she greatly annoyed Paul, so he turned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 18 qi1k figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Here the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 18 u4z8 figs-idiom ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 it came out that same hour In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, term does not mean a literal hour of sixty minutes, it means the shortest time imaginable. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it came out that instant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 16 19 m1y7 οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς 1 her masters Alternate translation: “the owners of the slave girl” -ACT 16 19 r1a1 figs-explicit ἰδόντες…οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς, ὅτι ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν 1 when her masters saw that their hope of profit was gone It can be stated clearly why they no longer hoped to make money. Alternate translation: “when her masters saw that she could no longer earn money for them by telling fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 19 bws7 εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 1 into the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services took place. Alternate translation: “into the public square” -ACT 16 19 hf82 ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας 1 before the authorities Alternate translation: “into the presence of the authorities” or “so that the authorities could judge them” +ACT 16 19 r1a1 figs-explicit ἰδόντες…οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς, ὅτι ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν 1 when her masters saw that their hope of profit was gone The implication is that the **masters** could no longer **profit** from the woman because she could no longer tell fortunes. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when her masters saw that their hope of profit had gone because their young female slave could no longer tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 19 bws7 translate-unknown εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 1 into the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. If you have a term in your language for such an area, you can use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “into the public square” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 16 19 hf82 figs-explicit ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας 1 before the authorities The implication is that the masters of the young female slave brought Paul and Silas **to the rulers** in order to charge them with a crime and have them punished. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the rulers so that they would judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 20 d2rg προσαγαγόντες αὐτοὺς τοῖς στρατηγοῖς 1 when they had brought them to the magistrates Alternate translation: “when they had brought them to the judges” ACT 16 20 wa94 τοῖς στρατηγοῖς 1 to the magistrates These **magistrates** were rulers or judges. ACT 16 20 dkz2 figs-exclusive οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 These men are stirring up our city Here the word **our** refers to the people of the city and includes the magistrates who ruled it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From fabb821fdf601b0da7b795476a5c8b78d2361151 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 21 Sep 2022 18:13:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 055/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++--- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 66f612593a..0cf9c80904 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2376,9 +2376,8 @@ ACT 16 18 u4z8 figs-idiom ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 it came o ACT 16 19 r1a1 figs-explicit ἰδόντες…οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς, ὅτι ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν 1 when her masters saw that their hope of profit was gone The implication is that the **masters** could no longer **profit** from the woman because she could no longer tell fortunes. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when her masters saw that their hope of profit had gone because their young female slave could no longer tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 19 bws7 translate-unknown εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 1 into the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. If you have a term in your language for such an area, you can use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “into the public square” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 16 19 hf82 figs-explicit ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας 1 before the authorities The implication is that the masters of the young female slave brought Paul and Silas **to the rulers** in order to charge them with a crime and have them punished. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the rulers so that they would judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 20 d2rg προσαγαγόντες αὐτοὺς τοῖς στρατηγοῖς 1 when they had brought them to the magistrates Alternate translation: “when they had brought them to the judges” -ACT 16 20 wa94 τοῖς στρατηγοῖς 1 to the magistrates These **magistrates** were rulers or judges. -ACT 16 20 dkz2 figs-exclusive οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 These men are stirring up our city Here the word **our** refers to the people of the city and includes the magistrates who ruled it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 16 20 wn77 figs-metonymy ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 The masters of the slave girl are referring figuratively to the people of the city by association with the city itself. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of our city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 20 dkz2 figs-exclusive οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 These men are stirring up our city The masters of the slave girl are using the pronoun **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 21 gna6 παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν 1 to accept nor to practice Alternate translation: “to believe nor to obey” or “to accept nor to do” ACT 16 22 r1gr αὐτῶν…περιρήξαντες αὐτῶν τὰ ἱμάτια, ἐκέλευον 1 Here the words **their** and **them** refer to Paul and Silas. ACT 16 22 at6i figs-activepassive ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν 1 commanding them to be beaten with rods If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “commanding the soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 6de16db688e3bd5f7be2f28eccad034bb5352354 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Thu, 22 Sep 2022 12:11:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 056/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 17 ++++++++--------- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 6bfd374bb4..7259363efb 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -855,24 +855,23 @@ MAT 13 1 vx5y writing-newevent ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 On that MAT 13 1 cy1t writing-background ἐξελθὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῆς οἰκίας, ἐκάθητο παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 having gone out of the house Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus went out of the house and was sitting by the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 13 2 d16z figs-activepassive συνήχθησαν πρὸς αὐτὸν ὄχλοι πολλοί 1 so that, having stepped into a boat, he sat down If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Many crowds gathered around him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 2 d0v5 grammar-collectivenouns ὁ ὄχλος 1 The word crowd is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people” or “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -MAT 13 3 o5f9 figs-parables ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἐν παραβολαῖς 1 Jesus teaches the crowd about what happens when different people hear his teaching. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 13 3 o5f9 figs-parables ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἐν παραβολαῖς 1 Jesus teaches the crowd a parable about what happens when different people hear his teaching. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 13 3 f5mv writing-quotations ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἐν παραβολαῖς λέγων 1 And he spoke many things to them in parables Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “he said many things to them in parables, and this is what he said:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -MAT 13 4 qr2d figs-explicit καὶ ἐν τῷ σπείρειν αὐτὸν, ἃ μὲν ἔπεσεν παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 devoured them Many cultures, when they plant seeds, bury them after planting them to protect them from animals that eat seeds. The seeds on path did not have a chance to be hidden from the birds, so they ate them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As he was scattering the seeds, some of them fell unprotected from animals onto the path. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 4 qr2d figs-explicit καὶ ἐν τῷ σπείρειν αὐτὸν, ἃ μὲν ἔπεσεν παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 devoured them Many cultures, when they plant seeds, bury them after planting them to protect them from animals that eat seeds. The seeds on path did not have a chance to be hidden from the birds, so they ate them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As he was scattering the seeds, some of them fell onto the path where they were unprotected from animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 4 v7r8 figs-ellipsis ἃ μὲν ἔπεσεν 1 beside the road Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “some seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 5 ql87 figs-ellipsis καὶ εὐθέως ἐξανέτειλεν 1 And immediately they sprang up In this verse and in the verses following, the word **others** is referring to seeds that fell in different areas as the sower was planting. If this would be misunderstood, see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 6 qq5x figs-activepassive ἐκαυματίσθη 1 they were scorched If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “it scorched the plants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 6 pz44 figs-idiom ἡλίου δὲ ἀνατείλαντος 1 the sun rose is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) The phrase **the sun had risen** is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 13 7 ugc9 ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ τὰς ἀκάνθας 1 fell among the thorn plants Alternate translation: “fell where plants with thorns grew” -MAT 13 7 k69q figs-ellipsis ἄλλα 1 See the note on [13:5](../13/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 13 7 vt8z figs-explicit ἀνέβησαν αἱ ἄκανθαι καὶ ἀπέπνιξαν αὐτά 1 choked them The phrase **the thorns grew up and choked them** might be confusing to come readers. What this means is that the weeds grew much faster than the crops which the sower planted, and so they did not allow the crops to grow. If this would be confusing to your readers, you can state this explicitly with an example from your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 7 k69q figs-ellipsis ἄλλα 1 See the note on **others** in [13:5](../13/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 13 7 vt8z figs-explicit ἀνέβησαν αἱ ἄκανθαι καὶ ἀπέπνιξαν αὐτά 1 choked them The phrase **the thorns grew up and choked them** might be confusing to come readers. What this means is that the weeds grew much faster than the crops which the sower planted did, and so they did not allow the crops to grow. If this would be confusing to your readers, you can state this explicitly with an example from your culture. Alternate translation: “the thorns grew much faster and overwhelmed the plants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 8 iwv2 figs-ellipsis ἄλλα 1 produced fruit See the note in [13:5](../13/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 13 8 e91e figs-ellipsis ὃ μὲν ἑκατὸν, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ δὲ τριάκοντα 1 some one 100 times as much, and some 60, and some 30 The amount of grain produced by each plant is being compared to the single seed from which it grew. Ellipsis is used here to shorten the phrases but they can be written out. Alternate translation: “Some plants bore 100 times as much grain, some produced 60 times as much grain, and some produced 30 times as much grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 13 9 q2e2 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear See the note in [4:2](../04/02.md)\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n +MAT 13 8 e91e figs-ellipsis ὃ μὲν ἑκατὸν, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ δὲ τριάκοντα 1 some one 100 times as much, and some 60, and some 30 The amount of grain each plant produced is being compared to the single seed from which it grew. Ellipsis is used here to shorten the phrases but they can be written out. Alternate translation: “Some plants bore 100 times as much grain, some produced 60 times as much grain, and some produced 30 times as much grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 13 9 q2e2 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear See the note in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n MAT 13 9 gkv1 figs-123person ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n MAT 13 11 fc5n figs-activepassive ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has given to you to understand mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but God has not given it to these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 11 xq2v figs-explicit ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but to those it has not been given to know the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 13 11 xq2v figs-ellipsis ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but to those it has not been given to know the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 11 rcd3 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 To you has been given to understand The word **you** is plural here and refers to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 13 11 ah6u figs-metonymy τὰ μυστήρια τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated this in [4:2](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n +MAT 13 11 ah6u figs-metonymy τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated this in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n MAT 13 12 x34s writing-proverbs ὅστις γὰρ ἔχει, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ καὶ περισσευθήσεται; ὅστις δὲ οὐκ ἔχει, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 This proverb draws a figurative comparison: Jesus talks about understanding as if it were a physical item which could either be given or taken away. He is saying that whoever is able to understand, God will allow them to understand even more. But whoever does not understand, he will take away even whatever little understanding they have. Alternate translation: “For whoever has understanding, God will give to that person even more understanding, and it will be plenty. But whoever does not have understanding, God will take away what understanding they do have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]] MAT 13 12 j3rl ὅστις…ὅστις 1 whoever has The word **whoever** is referring to people in general, and not to any specific person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “if a person … if a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 13 12 v61y figs-activepassive δοθήσεται…ἀρθήσεται 1 it will be given If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will give … God will take it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 3e2d4024f6fe16aaa8f8deea41db53f70660893b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 22 Sep 2022 12:43:22 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 057/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 0cf9c80904..ceb0bca936 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2378,7 +2378,8 @@ ACT 16 19 bws7 translate-unknown εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 1 into the marke ACT 16 19 hf82 figs-explicit ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας 1 before the authorities The implication is that the masters of the young female slave brought Paul and Silas **to the rulers** in order to charge them with a crime and have them punished. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the rulers so that they would judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 20 wn77 figs-metonymy ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 The masters of the slave girl are referring figuratively to the people of the city by association with the city itself. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of our city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 20 dkz2 figs-exclusive οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 These men are stirring up our city The masters of the slave girl are using the pronoun **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 16 21 gna6 παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν 1 to accept nor to practice Alternate translation: “to believe nor to obey” or “to accept nor to do” +ACT 16 21 gna6 figs-doublet παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν 1 to accept nor to practice The terms **accept** and **practice** mean similar things. The crowd in Philippi is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “practice at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +ACT 16 21 vmp0 translate-names Ῥωμαίοις 1 Here the word **Romans** is a name for people who are citizens of the Roman Empire. Alternate translation: “Roman citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 22 r1gr αὐτῶν…περιρήξαντες αὐτῶν τὰ ἱμάτια, ἐκέλευον 1 Here the words **their** and **them** refer to Paul and Silas. ACT 16 22 at6i figs-activepassive ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν 1 commanding them to be beaten with rods If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “commanding the soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 23 dsr3 πολλάς…ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς 1 when they had laid many blows upon them Alternate translation: “when they had hit them many times with rods” From fe9dcc72e47e40563b7799fa4d184ddb654d3542 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 22 Sep 2022 12:49:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 058/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index ceb0bca936..f4fb044efb 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2380,11 +2380,11 @@ ACT 16 20 wn77 figs-metonymy ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 The masters of the ACT 16 20 dkz2 figs-exclusive οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 These men are stirring up our city The masters of the slave girl are using the pronoun **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 21 gna6 figs-doublet παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν 1 to accept nor to practice The terms **accept** and **practice** mean similar things. The crowd in Philippi is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “practice at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 16 21 vmp0 translate-names Ῥωμαίοις 1 Here the word **Romans** is a name for people who are citizens of the Roman Empire. Alternate translation: “Roman citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 16 22 r1gr αὐτῶν…περιρήξαντες αὐτῶν τὰ ἱμάτια, ἐκέλευον 1 Here the words **their** and **them** refer to Paul and Silas. -ACT 16 22 at6i figs-activepassive ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν 1 commanding them to be beaten with rods If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “commanding the soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 23 dsr3 πολλάς…ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς 1 when they had laid many blows upon them Alternate translation: “when they had hit them many times with rods” -ACT 16 23 y4mc παραγγείλαντες τῷ δεσμοφύλακι ἀσφαλῶς τηρεῖν αὐτούς 1 having commanded the jailer to guard them securely Alternate translation: “having told the jailer to make sure they did not escape” -ACT 16 23 zkp7 δεσμοφύλακι 1 jailer A **jailer** was a person responsible for all the people held in the jail or prison. +ACT 16 22 f03y figs-metaphor συνεπέστη ὁ ὄχλος 1 Luke is speaking figuratively as if the crowd in Philippi literally **rose up** against Paul and Silas. He means that the people in the crowd became hostile to them and began shouting their own accusations against them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the crowd became hostile and shouted further accusations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 22 r1gr writing-pronouns αὐτῶν…αὐτῶν…ἐκέλευον 1 The pronouns **them** and **their** refer to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas … their … commanded Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 16 22 at6i figs-activepassive ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν 1 commanding them to be beaten with rods If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanded soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 23 dsr3 figs-idiom πολλάς…ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς 1 when they had laid many blows upon them This is an idiomatic expression. If your readers would misunderstand it, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having hit them many times with the rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 16 23 la4h figs-metaphor ἔβαλον εἰς φυλακήν 1 Luke is speaking figuratively when he says that the rulers **threw them into prison**. They did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “they confined Paul and Silas in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 24 a79x ὃς παραγγελίαν τοιαύτην λαβὼν 1 who, having received such a command Alternate translation: “who, when he heard this command” ACT 16 24 rl8c τοὺς πόδας ἠσφαλίσατο αὐτῶν εἰς τὸ ξύλον 1 fastened their feet in the stocks Alternate translation: “securely locked their feet in the stocks” ACT 16 24 jug6 ξύλον 1 stocks The **stocks** was a wooden frame with holes for a person’s feet that prevented them from moving. From 0da0af8fb3623fc3654f947e32072c11263e7c47 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 22 Sep 2022 12:50:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 059/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 +--- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index f4fb044efb..489b42c234 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2385,9 +2385,7 @@ ACT 16 22 r1gr writing-pronouns αὐτῶν…αὐτῶν…ἐκέλευον ACT 16 22 at6i figs-activepassive ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν 1 commanding them to be beaten with rods If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanded soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 23 dsr3 figs-idiom πολλάς…ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς 1 when they had laid many blows upon them This is an idiomatic expression. If your readers would misunderstand it, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having hit them many times with the rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 23 la4h figs-metaphor ἔβαλον εἰς φυλακήν 1 Luke is speaking figuratively when he says that the rulers **threw them into prison**. They did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “they confined Paul and Silas in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 16 24 a79x ὃς παραγγελίαν τοιαύτην λαβὼν 1 who, having received such a command Alternate translation: “who, when he heard this command” -ACT 16 24 rl8c τοὺς πόδας ἠσφαλίσατο αὐτῶν εἰς τὸ ξύλον 1 fastened their feet in the stocks Alternate translation: “securely locked their feet in the stocks” -ACT 16 24 jug6 ξύλον 1 stocks The **stocks** was a wooden frame with holes for a person’s feet that prevented them from moving. +ACT 16 24 jug6 translate-unknown ξύλον 1 stocks The word **stocks** describes a wooden frame with holes to hold a person’s feet and prevent them from moving. UST models a good way of describing **stocks** for readers who are not familiar with them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 16 26 q7z1 figs-activepassive σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 a great earthquake happened, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 26 m4ye figs-synecdoche σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 the foundations of the prison When the **foundations** shook, this caused the entire prison to shake. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 26 s6mu figs-activepassive ἠνεῴχθησαν…αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι 1 all the doors were opened If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From b70d7e61c5db847dd9a56f1b6168e89c2c16dbaa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 22 Sep 2022 12:51:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 060/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 489b42c234..44133ae482 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2386,6 +2386,7 @@ ACT 16 22 at6i figs-activepassive ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν 1 comman ACT 16 23 dsr3 figs-idiom πολλάς…ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς 1 when they had laid many blows upon them This is an idiomatic expression. If your readers would misunderstand it, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having hit them many times with the rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 23 la4h figs-metaphor ἔβαλον εἰς φυλακήν 1 Luke is speaking figuratively when he says that the rulers **threw them into prison**. They did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “they confined Paul and Silas in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 24 jug6 translate-unknown ξύλον 1 stocks The word **stocks** describes a wooden frame with holes to hold a person’s feet and prevent them from moving. UST models a good way of describing **stocks** for readers who are not familiar with them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 16 24 z12w figs-metaphor ἔβαλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν ἐσωτέραν φυλακὴν 1 Luke is speaking figuratively when he says that the jailer **threw them into the inner prison**. He did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “confined Paul and Silas to the inner prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 26 q7z1 figs-activepassive σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 a great earthquake happened, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 26 m4ye figs-synecdoche σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 the foundations of the prison When the **foundations** shook, this caused the entire prison to shake. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 26 s6mu figs-activepassive ἠνεῴχθησαν…αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι 1 all the doors were opened If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 97c9d67fd94e32b9023b6a30f8e27fb01cd8fc3d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 22 Sep 2022 12:54:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 061/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 +++++---- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 44133ae482..021043a3da 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2387,10 +2387,11 @@ ACT 16 23 dsr3 figs-idiom πολλάς…ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πλ ACT 16 23 la4h figs-metaphor ἔβαλον εἰς φυλακήν 1 Luke is speaking figuratively when he says that the rulers **threw them into prison**. They did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “they confined Paul and Silas in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 24 jug6 translate-unknown ξύλον 1 stocks The word **stocks** describes a wooden frame with holes to hold a person’s feet and prevent them from moving. UST models a good way of describing **stocks** for readers who are not familiar with them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 16 24 z12w figs-metaphor ἔβαλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν ἐσωτέραν φυλακὴν 1 Luke is speaking figuratively when he says that the jailer **threw them into the inner prison**. He did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “confined Paul and Silas to the inner prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 16 26 q7z1 figs-activepassive σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 a great earthquake happened, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 26 m4ye figs-synecdoche σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 the foundations of the prison When the **foundations** shook, this caused the entire prison to shake. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 16 26 s6mu figs-activepassive ἠνεῴχθησαν…αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι 1 all the doors were opened If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 26 p393 figs-activepassive πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη 1 the chains of everyone were unfastened If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone’s chains came loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 26 q7z1 figs-activepassive σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 a great earthquake happened, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 26 m4ye figs-synecdoche σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 the foundations of the prison Luke is using one part of the prison, its **foundations**, to refer to the entire prison in the state of being **shaken**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a shaking that began in the prison’s foundations shook the entire prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 16 26 s6mu figs-activepassive ἠνεῴχθησαν…αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι 1 all the doors were opened If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 26 p393 figs-activepassive πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη 1 the chains of everyone were unfastened If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the chains of all came loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 26 b540 figs-explicit πάντων 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **all**, he means all the prisoners. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “all the prisoners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 27 hr9q figs-activepassive ἔξυπνος…γενόμενος ὁ δεσμοφύλαξ 1 the jailer became awake If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the jailer woke up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 27 cwt5 ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν 1 he was about to kill himself The jailer preferred to commit suicide rather than suffer the consequences of letting the prisoners escape. Alternate translation: “he was ready to kill himself” ACT 16 28 ljy6 figs-exclusive ἐσμεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul, Silas, and all of the other prisoners but excludes the jailer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From c8a5d6c48eb4b66201726313d8a4a029d61f8547 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 22 Sep 2022 12:55:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 062/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 021043a3da..97cd312272 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2392,8 +2392,8 @@ ACT 16 26 m4ye figs-synecdoche σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια το ACT 16 26 s6mu figs-activepassive ἠνεῴχθησαν…αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι 1 all the doors were opened If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 26 p393 figs-activepassive πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη 1 the chains of everyone were unfastened If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the chains of all came loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 26 b540 figs-explicit πάντων 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **all**, he means all the prisoners. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “all the prisoners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 27 hr9q figs-activepassive ἔξυπνος…γενόμενος ὁ δεσμοφύλαξ 1 the jailer became awake If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the jailer woke up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 27 cwt5 ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν 1 he was about to kill himself The jailer preferred to commit suicide rather than suffer the consequences of letting the prisoners escape. Alternate translation: “he was ready to kill himself” +ACT 16 27 cwt5 figs-explicit ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν 1 he was about to kill himself Luke assumes that his readers will know that the punishment in the Roman Empire for allowing prisoners to escape was death. The jailer thought his prisoners had escaped, and he preferred to commit suicide rather than face trial and execution. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “he was about to kill himself, because he thought that his prisoners had escaped and he knew that he would be tried and executed for allowing them to escape, and he did not want to go through that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 27 viov figs-activepassive ἀνεῳγμένας τὰς θύρας τῆς φυλακῆς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the prison doors were open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 28 ljy6 figs-exclusive ἐσμεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul, Silas, and all of the other prisoners but excludes the jailer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 29 pe66 figs-explicit αἰτήσας…φῶτα 1 having called for lights The reason why the jailer needed **light** can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after he called for someone to bring light so he could see who was still in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 29 h5ai figs-metonymy φῶτα 1 lights The word **lights** stands for something that makes light. Alternate translation: “torches” or “lamps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 1df543d81fe9e3967249cb5efa2ae6927eb104af Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 22 Sep 2022 12:56:45 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 063/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 97cd312272..d72b88d705 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2394,7 +2394,8 @@ ACT 16 26 p393 figs-activepassive πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη 1 t ACT 16 26 b540 figs-explicit πάντων 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **all**, he means all the prisoners. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “all the prisoners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 27 cwt5 figs-explicit ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν 1 he was about to kill himself Luke assumes that his readers will know that the punishment in the Roman Empire for allowing prisoners to escape was death. The jailer thought his prisoners had escaped, and he preferred to commit suicide rather than face trial and execution. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “he was about to kill himself, because he thought that his prisoners had escaped and he knew that he would be tried and executed for allowing them to escape, and he did not want to go through that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 27 viov figs-activepassive ἀνεῳγμένας τὰς θύρας τῆς φυλακῆς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the prison doors were open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 28 ljy6 figs-exclusive ἐσμεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul, Silas, and all of the other prisoners but excludes the jailer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 16 28 ljy6 figs-exclusive ἐσμεν 1 By **we**, Paul means himself and the other prisoners but not the jailer, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 16 28 s2s2 figs-imperative μηδὲν πράξῃς σεαυτῷ κακόν 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates an urgent request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do not hurt yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 16 29 pe66 figs-explicit αἰτήσας…φῶτα 1 having called for lights The reason why the jailer needed **light** can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after he called for someone to bring light so he could see who was still in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 29 h5ai figs-metonymy φῶτα 1 lights The word **lights** stands for something that makes light. Alternate translation: “torches” or “lamps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 29 r6is εἰσεπήδησεν 1 he rushed in Alternate translation: “he quickly entered the jail” From d7c14799e8557ee622d0f5cd6b856db327e09033 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 22 Sep 2022 12:58:26 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 064/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 ++---- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d72b88d705..343576d07b 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2396,10 +2396,8 @@ ACT 16 27 cwt5 figs-explicit ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν 1 ACT 16 27 viov figs-activepassive ἀνεῳγμένας τὰς θύρας τῆς φυλακῆς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the prison doors were open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 28 ljy6 figs-exclusive ἐσμεν 1 By **we**, Paul means himself and the other prisoners but not the jailer, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 28 s2s2 figs-imperative μηδὲν πράξῃς σεαυτῷ κακόν 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates an urgent request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do not hurt yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -ACT 16 29 pe66 figs-explicit αἰτήσας…φῶτα 1 having called for lights The reason why the jailer needed **light** can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after he called for someone to bring light so he could see who was still in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 29 h5ai figs-metonymy φῶτα 1 lights The word **lights** stands for something that makes light. Alternate translation: “torches” or “lamps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 29 r6is εἰσεπήδησεν 1 he rushed in Alternate translation: “he quickly entered the jail” -ACT 16 29 bb6t translate-symaction προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ 1 fell down before Paul and Silas The jailer humbled himself by bowing down at the feet of **Paul and Silas**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 16 29 pe66 figs-explicit αἰτήσας…φῶτα 1 having called for lights Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the jailer **called for lights** because it was midnight and dark, and he wanted to be sure that his prisoners were still in the prison. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 29 bb6t translate-symaction προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ 1 fell down before Paul and Silas Be sure that it is clear in your translation that the jailer did not fall down accidentally. He knelt down at the feet of Paul and Silas as a gesture to honor them. Alternate translation: “knelt down respectfully in front of Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 16 30 a3h6 προαγαγὼν αὐτοὺς ἔξω 1 having brought them out Alternate translation: “after he had led them outside the jail” ACT 16 30 u132 figs-activepassive τί με δεῖ ποιεῖν, ἵνα σωθῶ 1 what must I do in order to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what must I do in order for God to save me from my sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 31 br4k figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 you will be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” or “God will save you from your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From e8b71823430547f425b5bdab0d7d3558566aa607 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 22 Sep 2022 12:59:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 065/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 343576d07b..6a4930141d 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2398,8 +2398,7 @@ ACT 16 28 ljy6 figs-exclusive ἐσμεν 1 By **we**, Paul means himself and t ACT 16 28 s2s2 figs-imperative μηδὲν πράξῃς σεαυτῷ κακόν 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates an urgent request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do not hurt yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 16 29 pe66 figs-explicit αἰτήσας…φῶτα 1 having called for lights Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the jailer **called for lights** because it was midnight and dark, and he wanted to be sure that his prisoners were still in the prison. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 29 bb6t translate-symaction προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ 1 fell down before Paul and Silas Be sure that it is clear in your translation that the jailer did not fall down accidentally. He knelt down at the feet of Paul and Silas as a gesture to honor them. Alternate translation: “knelt down respectfully in front of Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 16 30 a3h6 προαγαγὼν αὐτοὺς ἔξω 1 having brought them out Alternate translation: “after he had led them outside the jail” -ACT 16 30 u132 figs-activepassive τί με δεῖ ποιεῖν, ἵνα σωθῶ 1 what must I do in order to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what must I do in order for God to save me from my sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 30 u132 figs-activepassive ἵνα σωθῶ 1 what must I do in order to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order for God to save me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 31 br4k figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 you will be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” or “God will save you from your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 31 w8ed figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκός σου 1 your household Here, **your household** refers to all the people who lived in the house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy ἐλάλησαν αὐτῷ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 they spoke the word of the Lord to him Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “they told him the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From ddee2cf540b6ecf2413d651845fe3745fc953f2e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2022 11:06:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 066/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 29 ++++++++++++----------------- 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 17 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 7259363efb..69dba24dd9 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -859,8 +859,8 @@ MAT 13 3 o5f9 figs-parables ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἐν MAT 13 3 f5mv writing-quotations ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἐν παραβολαῖς λέγων 1 And he spoke many things to them in parables Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “he said many things to them in parables, and this is what he said:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) MAT 13 4 qr2d figs-explicit καὶ ἐν τῷ σπείρειν αὐτὸν, ἃ μὲν ἔπεσεν παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 devoured them Many cultures, when they plant seeds, bury them after planting them to protect them from animals that eat seeds. The seeds on path did not have a chance to be hidden from the birds, so they ate them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As he was scattering the seeds, some of them fell onto the path where they were unprotected from animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 4 v7r8 figs-ellipsis ἃ μὲν ἔπεσεν 1 beside the road Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “some seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 13 5 ql87 figs-ellipsis καὶ εὐθέως ἐξανέτειλεν 1 And immediately they sprang up In this verse and in the verses following, the word **others** is referring to seeds that fell in different areas as the sower was planting. If this would be misunderstood, see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 13 6 qq5x figs-activepassive ἐκαυματίσθη 1 they were scorched If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “it scorched the plants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 13 5 ql87 figs-ellipsis καὶ εὐθέως ἐξανέτειλεν 1 And immediately they sprang up In this verse and in the following verses, the word **others** is referring to seeds that fell in different areas as the sower was planting. If this would be misunderstood, see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 13 6 qq5x figs-activepassive ἐκαυματίσθη 1 they were scorched If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it scorched the plants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 6 pz44 figs-idiom ἡλίου δὲ ἀνατείλαντος 1 the sun rose is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) The phrase **the sun had risen** is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 13 7 k69q figs-ellipsis ἄλλα 1 See the note on **others** in [13:5](../13/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 7 vt8z figs-explicit ἀνέβησαν αἱ ἄκανθαι καὶ ἀπέπνιξαν αὐτά 1 choked them The phrase **the thorns grew up and choked them** might be confusing to come readers. What this means is that the weeds grew much faster than the crops which the sower planted did, and so they did not allow the crops to grow. If this would be confusing to your readers, you can state this explicitly with an example from your culture. Alternate translation: “the thorns grew much faster and overwhelmed the plants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -871,30 +871,25 @@ MAT 13 9 gkv1 figs-123person ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one ha MAT 13 11 fc5n figs-activepassive ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has given to you to understand mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but God has not given it to these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 11 xq2v figs-ellipsis ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but to those it has not been given to know the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 11 rcd3 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 To you has been given to understand The word **you** is plural here and refers to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 13 11 ah6u figs-metonymy τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated this in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n -MAT 13 12 x34s writing-proverbs ὅστις γὰρ ἔχει, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ καὶ περισσευθήσεται; ὅστις δὲ οὐκ ἔχει, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 This proverb draws a figurative comparison: Jesus talks about understanding as if it were a physical item which could either be given or taken away. He is saying that whoever is able to understand, God will allow them to understand even more. But whoever does not understand, he will take away even whatever little understanding they have. Alternate translation: “For whoever has understanding, God will give to that person even more understanding, and it will be plenty. But whoever does not have understanding, God will take away what understanding they do have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]] +MAT 13 11 ah6u figs-metonymy Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated this in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n +MAT 13 12 x34s writing-proverbs ὅστις γὰρ ἔχει, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ καὶ περισσευθήσεται; ὅστις δὲ οὐκ ἔχει, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 This proverb draws a figurative comparison: Jesus talks about understanding as if it were a physical item which could either be given or taken away. He is saying that whoever is able to understand, God will allow them to understand even more. But whoever does not understand, he will take away even whatever little understanding they have. Alternate translation: “For whoever understands, God will allow that person to understand even more, and it will be plenty. But whoever does not have understanding, God will take away what understanding they do have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]] MAT 13 12 j3rl ὅστις…ὅστις 1 whoever has The word **whoever** is referring to people in general, and not to any specific person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “if a person … if a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 13 12 v61y figs-activepassive δοθήσεται…ἀρθήσεται 1 it will be given If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will give … God will take it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 12 xsr5 ὅστις…οὐκ ἔχει 2 whoever does not have Alternate translation: “whoever does not have understanding” or “whoever does not receive what I teach” -MAT 13 12 bl5s figs-activepassive καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 even what he has will be taken away from him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will take away even what he has” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 13 v6pb figs-metaphor αὐτοῖς…οὐ βλέπουσιν…οὐκ ἀκούουσιν 1 to them … they do not see … they do not hear The words **see** and **hear** are metaphors for being spiritually blind and deaf. This means that these people did not understand. If your readers would not understand what they mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “When they see my works, they will not know why I am doing them, and when they hear my message, they will not know what it means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n MAT 13 14 jz9n figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἀναπληροῦται αὐτοῖς ἡ προφητεία Ἠσαΐου ἡ λέγουσα ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 And to them the prophecy of Isaiah is being fulfilled, which says Matthew is quoting Jesus, and Jesus is quoting the prophet Isaiah. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to them the prophecy of Isaiah is being fulfilled which says that though they hear, they will not understand, and though they see, they will not perceive” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes) MAT 13 14 a1im figs-metaphor ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 In hearing you will hear, but you may certainly not understand See how you translated the words **see** and **hear** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 15 tfl1 figs-metonymy ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου…καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν 1 Here, the word **heart** is used figuratively to refer to a persons mind or inner intentions. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “something he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 15 lu8u figs-metaphor καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν; μήποτε ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν 1 For the heart of this people has become dull, and their ears heard with difficulty, and they closed their eyes, lest they might see with their eyes, and might hear with their ears, and might understand with their hearts, and they might turn back, and I will heal them See how you translated the words **see** and **hear** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and they were like those who have difficulty hearing because they did not understand what was said, and it was as if they closed their eyes because they did not understand what they saw. Lest they might understand what they see with their eyes or what they hear with their ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 15 ps56 ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 they might turn back The phrase **they might turn back** is figurative, referring to someone who repents of their sins and asks God for forgiveness. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they might repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 13 15 q1h9 figs-metaphor ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 I will heal them The phrase **I will heal them** is figurative, meaning that he will forgive them for the sins that they have confessed. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “I will forgive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 16 glp8 figs-synecdoche ὑμῶν δὲ μακάριοι οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ ὅτι βλέπουσιν 1 But blessed are your eyes, for they see Here, **eyes** and **ears** are referring to the disciples ability to understand what Jesus is saying and doing. These words refer to the ability to understand what a person sees and hears. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “You are blessed because you understand what you see with your eyes and what you hear with your ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 13 15 q1h9 figs-metaphor ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 I will heal them The phrase **I will heal them** is figurative, meaning that he will forgive them for the sins that they have confessed. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “I will forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 16 glp8 figs-synecdoche ὑμῶν δὲ μακάριοι οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ ὅτι βλέπουσιν καὶ τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶν ὅτι ἀκούουσιν 1 But blessed are your eyes, for they see Here, **see** and **hear** are referring to the disciples ability to understand what Jesus is saying and doing. These words refer to the ability to understand what a person sees and hears. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “You are blessed because you understand what you see with your eyes and what you hear with your ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 13 16 rlt3 figs-you ὑμῶν…ὑμῶν 1 your … your Both occurrences of **your** are plural and refer to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 13 16 xczh figs-ellipsis καὶ τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶν ὅτι ἀκούουσιν 1 your ears, for they hear Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and blessed are your ears, for they hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 17 bsj7 figs-you ὑμῖν…βλέπετε…ἀκούετε 1 to you … you see … you hear All occurrences of **you** are plural and refer to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 13 17 e6ci figs-explicit ἃ βλέπετε 1 the things you see The phrase **the things you see** is referring to the healings and miracles which Jesus did. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the miracles you have seen me do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 17 lslf figs-explicit καὶ οὐκ εἶδαν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give the reason why the prophets and kings **did not see** these things. Alternate translation: “but could not see them because they lived before this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 17 q14w figs-explicit ἃ ἀκούετε 1 the things you hear The phrase what you hear probably refers to the teachings of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the things that you have heard me teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 17 alkk figs-explicit καὶ οὐκ ἤκουσαν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give the reason why the prophets and kings did not hear these things. Alternate translation: “but could not hear them because they lived before this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 18 w35t figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus is not retelling the parable again, but is now explaining it to the disciples. Make sure this is clear to your audience. See the note in the chapter introduction for more information about this parable. Alternate translation: “Therefore, hear me explain the parable of the one who sowed the seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 13 17 lslf figs-explicit καὶ οὐκ εἶδαν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give the reason why the prophets and kings **did not see** these things. Alternate translation: “but could not see them because they lived before my time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 17 q14w figs-explicit ἃ ἀκούετε 1 the things you hear The phrase what you hear probably refers to the teachings of Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things that you have heard me teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 18 w35t figs-parables ὑμεῖς οὖν ἀκούσατε τὴν παραβολὴν τοῦ σπείραντος 1 Connecting Statement: Jesus is not retelling the parable again, but is now explaining it to the disciples. Make sure this is clear to your audience. See the note in the chapter introduction for more information about this parable. Alternate translation: “Therefore, hear me explain the parable of the one who sowed the seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 13 19 v2d7 figs-genericnoun παντὸς ἀκούοντος 1 the word of the kingdom Jesus is speaking of people in general, and not about any specific person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “people who hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) \n -MAT 13 19 suhi figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας 1 Jesus refers figuratively to bread, one common food, to mean food in general. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “the food we need that day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) The phrase **the word** is referring to the entire message about the **kingdom**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of the kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 13 19 suhi figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας 1 Jesus refers figuratively to bread, one common food, to mean food in general. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “the food we need that day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) The phrase **the word** is referring to the entire message about **the kingdom**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of the kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 13 19 het1 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας 1 Here the word **kingdom** is figuratively referring to how God is making people his people to rule over them. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message about how God is making people his people to rule over them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 19 uo3l figs-ellipsis τῆς βασιλείας 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 19 a8nu figs-metaphor ἔρχεται ὁ πονηρὸς καὶ ἁρπάζει τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 the evil one comes and snatches away what has been sown in his heart Jesus is speaking figuratively about Satan as if he were a bird who **snatches away** seeds. God's message is spoken of as if it **has been sown** in a person's heart. If your readers would not understand what it means to be shipwrecked in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “the evil one comes and takes away their understanding of God's message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -909,9 +904,9 @@ MAT 13 20 w4f9 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον 1 Now that sown on rocky groun MAT 13 20 cl6g figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Here, **the word** represents God’s message. Alternate translation: “the message” or “God’s teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 20 z76f figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τὸν λόγον ἀκούων καὶ εὐθὺς μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμβάνων αὐτόν 1 receiving it with joy Jesus is speaking figuratively, speaking about believing as if they were **recieving** God's message. If your readers would not understand what **receiving** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “this seed is like the person who quickly receives God's message with joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 21 zg9q figs-idiom οὐκ ἔχει δὲ ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, ἀλλὰ πρόσκαιρός ἐστιν 1 But he has no root in himself, but is temporary The expression **but he has no root in himself, but is temporary** figuratively means that the plant does not have deep enough roots to stay alive. Alternate translation: “but he does not have deep roots to stay alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 13 21 ixil grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 What follows the word **but** is in contrast to what precedes it. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +MAT 13 21 ixil grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 What follows the word **but** is in contrast to what precedes it. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) MAT 13 21 lxuy figs-abstractnouns γενομένης δὲ θλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ διὰ τὸν λόγον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **tribulation** and **persecution**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “people afflicted and persecuted them because of the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MAT 13 21 xv50 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον 1 See how you translated the word **word** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 13 21 xv50 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον 1 See how you translated **word** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 13 21 lim9 figs-metaphor εὐθὺς σκανδαλίζεται 1 immediately he is caused to stumble The expression **to stumble** figuratively means that he no longer believes God's message. Alternate translation: “immediately he stops believing God's message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])   MAT 13 22 d4h5 figs-explicit ὁ…σπαρείς 1 that which has been sown Here, Jesus is talking about the story of seed which was **sown** among the thorns, If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the seed having been sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 22 rcj8 ὁ δὲ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπαρείς 1 Now that which has been sown among the thorn plants See how you translated **thorns** in [13:7](../13/07.md) From 0442b077348bd7885fd6839d738273fde7221256 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2022 13:18:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 067/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 +++++--- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 6a4930141d..9f4771dfbf 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2304,7 +2304,7 @@ ACT 15 41 cbat writing-pronouns διήρχετο 1 The pronoun **he** refers to ACT 15 41 e3ym figs-synecdoche διήρχετο 1 he went through Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 15 41 s7yf figs-metonymy ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 Luke is using the term **churches** to refer figuratively to the people associated with the churches.If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 41 tbv3 figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 strengthening the churches Luke does not mean that Paul and Silas strengthened the people of the churches physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Timothy’s circumcision

Paul circumcised Timothy because they were telling the message of Jesus to Jews and Gentiles. Paul wanted the Jews to know that he respected the law of Moses even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Christians did not need to be circumcised.

### The woman who had a spirit of divination

Most people want very much to know the future, but the law of Moses said that speaking with the spirits of dead people to learn about the future is a sin. This woman seems to have been able to tell the future very well. She was a slave, and her masters made much money from her work. Paul wanted her to stop sinning, so he told the spirit to leave her. Luke does not say that she began to follow Jesus or tell us anything more about her. +ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes\n\n\r\r## Structure and formatting\r\r- Verses 1–5 describe how Paul began his second missionary journey and met Timothy and brought him along with him.\r- Verses 6–12 describe how the Holy Spirit led Paul and his companions to share the gospel in the city of Philippi\r- Verses 13–40 describe how Paul and Silas made disciples in Philippi, delivered a young woman from an evil spirit, and were imprisoned but miraculously released. \r\rActs [16:5](../16/05.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the fourth major part of the book.\r\r## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\r\r### Timothy’s circumcision\n\n\r\rPaul circumcised Timothy because he and Silas were telling the message of Jesus to Jews as well as to Gentiles. Many Jews would have been so offended that Timothy was not circumcised, even though his mother was Jewish, that they would not have listened to the message. Paul felt that he could have Timothy circumcised as a discretionary matter to remove an offense to hearing the gospel, even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Gentile believers did not have to be circumcised.\n\n\r ACT 16 1 m5tb figs-synecdoche κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas also came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 1 rhut figs-idiom κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Derbe and Lystra because that was the customary way in this culture describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Paul likely travel by sea from Syria to Cilicia, and Luke is saying that he then also went to Derbe and to Lystra. Alternate translation: “he also traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 1 km5q figs-go κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Paul also came down If you retain the idiom, it may be more natural in your language to say “went” rather than **came**. Alternate translation: “he also went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -2399,8 +2399,10 @@ ACT 16 28 s2s2 figs-imperative μηδὲν πράξῃς σεαυτῷ κακό ACT 16 29 pe66 figs-explicit αἰτήσας…φῶτα 1 having called for lights Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the jailer **called for lights** because it was midnight and dark, and he wanted to be sure that his prisoners were still in the prison. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 29 bb6t translate-symaction προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ 1 fell down before Paul and Silas Be sure that it is clear in your translation that the jailer did not fall down accidentally. He knelt down at the feet of Paul and Silas as a gesture to honor them. Alternate translation: “knelt down respectfully in front of Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 16 30 u132 figs-activepassive ἵνα σωθῶ 1 what must I do in order to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order for God to save me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 31 br4k figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 you will be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” or “God will save you from your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 31 w8ed figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκός σου 1 your household Here, **your household** refers to all the people who lived in the house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 31 m801 writing-pronouns οἱ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 16 31 f104 figs-imperative πίστευσον 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates an encouraging invitation rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such an invitation. Alternate translation: “If you believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +ACT 16 31 br4k figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 you will be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 31 w8ed figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκός σου 1 your household Here, **your household** refers to all the people who lived in the jailer’s house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy ἐλάλησαν αὐτῷ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 they spoke the word of the Lord to him Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “they told him the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 33 r3la figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ αὐτοῦ πάντες παραχρῆμα 1 he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas immediately baptized the jailer and all the members of his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 35 lb4z δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells the last event in the story that started in [Acts 16:16](../16/16.md). From 46968e54afb212fbc0d05d0dee20b3bf17a4cbfe Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2022 15:29:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 068/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 9f4771dfbf..5249e390ae 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2403,7 +2403,7 @@ ACT 16 31 m801 writing-pronouns οἱ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul and ACT 16 31 f104 figs-imperative πίστευσον 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates an encouraging invitation rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such an invitation. Alternate translation: “If you believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 16 31 br4k figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 you will be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 31 w8ed figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκός σου 1 your household Here, **your household** refers to all the people who lived in the jailer’s house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy ἐλάλησαν αὐτῷ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 they spoke the word of the Lord to him Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “they told him the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 they spoke the word of the Lord to him Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul and Silas had come to Philippi to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 33 r3la figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ αὐτοῦ πάντες παραχρῆμα 1 he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas immediately baptized the jailer and all the members of his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 35 lb4z δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells the last event in the story that started in [Acts 16:16](../16/16.md). ACT 16 35 vev9 ἀπόλυσον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐκείνους 1 Release those men Alternate translation: “Allow those men to leave” From 887592471c7f9ec4b4c5dd1c4a0d2cfef18557e8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2022 15:29:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 069/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 5249e390ae..7ca59fbe52 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2404,6 +2404,7 @@ ACT 16 31 f104 figs-imperative πίστευσον 1 This is an imperative, but ACT 16 31 br4k figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 you will be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 31 w8ed figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκός σου 1 your household Here, **your household** refers to all the people who lived in the jailer’s house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 they spoke the word of the Lord to him Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul and Silas had come to Philippi to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 32 ftg1 writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 16 33 r3la figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ αὐτοῦ πάντες παραχρῆμα 1 he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas immediately baptized the jailer and all the members of his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 35 lb4z δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells the last event in the story that started in [Acts 16:16](../16/16.md). ACT 16 35 vev9 ἀπόλυσον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐκείνους 1 Release those men Alternate translation: “Allow those men to leave” From fc1d44420b24c03cd0d7fe061bf3c7fe1391da64 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2022 15:31:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 070/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 7ca59fbe52..b7f8e1d20a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2405,7 +2405,8 @@ ACT 16 31 br4k figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 you will be saved If your lang ACT 16 31 w8ed figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκός σου 1 your household Here, **your household** refers to all the people who lived in the jailer’s house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 they spoke the word of the Lord to him Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul and Silas had come to Philippi to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 32 ftg1 writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) -ACT 16 33 r3la figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ αὐτοῦ πάντες παραχρῆμα 1 he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas immediately baptized the jailer and all the members of his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 33 gied figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Luke is using the term **hour** figuratively to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time in the night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 16 33 r3la figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη 1 he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was Paul and Silas who baptized the jailer and his family. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 35 lb4z δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells the last event in the story that started in [Acts 16:16](../16/16.md). ACT 16 35 vev9 ἀπόλυσον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐκείνους 1 Release those men Alternate translation: “Allow those men to leave” ACT 16 36 k3i6 ἐξελθόντες 1 having come out Alternate translation: “having come out of the jail” From 28868bfe0036786f87215392d684847c800b812a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2022 15:33:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 071/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index b7f8e1d20a..609a0337a4 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2407,8 +2407,8 @@ ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 they spoke the word of the Lor ACT 16 32 ftg1 writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 16 33 gied figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Luke is using the term **hour** figuratively to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time in the night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 33 r3la figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη 1 he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was Paul and Silas who baptized the jailer and his family. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 35 lb4z δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells the last event in the story that started in [Acts 16:16](../16/16.md). -ACT 16 35 vev9 ἀπόλυσον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐκείνους 1 Release those men Alternate translation: “Allow those men to leave” +ACT 16 35 lb4z writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a significant development in this story. Here Luke tells the last part of the story that started in [16:16](../16/16.md). Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development in a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +ACT 16 34 v5fy figs-metonymy παρέθηκεν τράπεζαν 1 Luke is referring figuratively to a meal by association with the way, in this culture, a meal was served at a **table**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he set a meal before them” or “he served them a meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 36 k3i6 ἐξελθόντες 1 having come out Alternate translation: “having come out of the jail” ACT 16 37 v4yk figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἔβαλαν…ἡμᾶς…ἡμᾶς 1 The word **us** refers only to Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 37 b4jm figs-explicit ἔφη πρὸς αὐτούς 1 said to them Probably Paul is speaking to the jailer, but he intends for the jailer to tell the magistrates what he says. Alternate translation: “said to the jailer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 166f022d040ab6b02966a695b62ae345fcf95e61 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2022 15:35:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 072/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 609a0337a4..fa91e81cc4 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2409,7 +2409,9 @@ ACT 16 33 gied figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ τῆς νυκτ ACT 16 33 r3la figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη 1 he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was Paul and Silas who baptized the jailer and his family. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 35 lb4z writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a significant development in this story. Here Luke tells the last part of the story that started in [16:16](../16/16.md). Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development in a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 16 34 v5fy figs-metonymy παρέθηκεν τράπεζαν 1 Luke is referring figuratively to a meal by association with the way, in this culture, a meal was served at a **table**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he set a meal before them” or “he served them a meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 36 k3i6 ἐξελθόντες 1 having come out Alternate translation: “having come out of the jail” +ACT 16 36 qrw0 figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους 1 Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to mean the message that the officers whom the magistrates sent communicated by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 36 f76u figs-imperative ἐξελθόντες, πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 The word **go** is an imperative, but it communicates permission rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates permission. Alternate translation: “you may come out of the jail and go in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +ACT 16 36 noc2 figs-abstractnouns πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “go peacefully” or “go without being concerned that the authorities will trouble you any further” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 16 37 v4yk figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἔβαλαν…ἡμᾶς…ἡμᾶς 1 The word **us** refers only to Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 37 b4jm figs-explicit ἔφη πρὸς αὐτούς 1 said to them Probably Paul is speaking to the jailer, but he intends for the jailer to tell the magistrates what he says. Alternate translation: “said to the jailer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 37 b7cc figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 They have beaten us in public Here **They** refers to the magistrates who commanded their soldiers to beat them. Alternate translation: “The magistrates ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From e7966810b29e53e3c777aaf2f5e29bbb4c641ad7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2022 15:38:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 073/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index fa91e81cc4..5b9b386dd5 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2412,11 +2412,12 @@ ACT 16 34 v5fy figs-metonymy παρέθηκεν τράπεζαν 1 Luke is refe ACT 16 36 qrw0 figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους 1 Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to mean the message that the officers whom the magistrates sent communicated by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 36 f76u figs-imperative ἐξελθόντες, πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 The word **go** is an imperative, but it communicates permission rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates permission. Alternate translation: “you may come out of the jail and go in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 16 36 noc2 figs-abstractnouns πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “go peacefully” or “go without being concerned that the authorities will trouble you any further” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 16 37 v4yk figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἔβαλαν…ἡμᾶς…ἡμᾶς 1 The word **us** refers only to Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 16 37 b4jm figs-explicit ἔφη πρὸς αὐτούς 1 said to them Probably Paul is speaking to the jailer, but he intends for the jailer to tell the magistrates what he says. Alternate translation: “said to the jailer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 37 b4jm figs-explicit πρὸς αὐτούς 1 said to them The implication is that the officers whom the magistrates sent had come into the prison with the jailer. That is why Luke says **them** and not just **him**, meaning the jailer. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the officers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 37 xmqz writing-pronouns αὐτούς…ἔβαλαν… ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν…ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the officers whom the magistrates sent to the prison, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refer to the magistrates. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the officers … the magistrates threw us … they cast us out … let the magistrates lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 16 37 v4yk figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἔβαλαν…ἡμᾶς…ἡμᾶς 1 By **us**, Paul means himself and Silas but not the officers to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 37 b7cc figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 They have beaten us in public Here **They** refers to the magistrates who commanded their soldiers to beat them. Alternate translation: “The magistrates ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 37 wc37 ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν 1 without trial—men being Romans—they threw us into prison Alternate translation: “without a trial to prove us guilty, even though we are Roman citizens, and they had their soldiers put us in jail” -ACT 16 37 qq1u figs-rquestion λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? οὔ γάρ 1 they cast us out secretly? No indeed! Paul uses a question to emphasize that he will not allow the magistrates to send them out the city in secret after they had mistreated Paul and Silas. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not let them send us out of the city in secret!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 16 37 qq1u figs-rquestion δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ, ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν καὶ νῦν λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? 1 they cast us out secretly? No indeed! Paul is using the question form to protest that what the magistrates want to do is not just or fair. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The magistrates beat us in public without trial, men being Romans, and then they threw us into prison; I will not allow them, after doing that, to cast us out secretly!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 16 37 jr2j figs-rpronouns ἀλλὰ ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ 1 Instead, coming themselves Here, **themselves** is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 16 38 ym2u figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans To be a Roman meant to be a legal citizens of the Roman Empire. Citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. The city leaders were afraid that more important Roman authorities might learn how the city leaders had mistreated Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 40 q59h εἰσῆλθον…ἰδόντες, παρεκάλεσαν 1 Here the word **they** refers to Paul and Silas. The word **them** refers to the believers in Philippi. From 75925181c5d501492285a261cce50fe673823248 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2022 15:41:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 074/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 5b9b386dd5..371be89eba 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2415,10 +2415,11 @@ ACT 16 36 noc2 figs-abstractnouns πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 If ACT 16 37 b4jm figs-explicit πρὸς αὐτούς 1 said to them The implication is that the officers whom the magistrates sent had come into the prison with the jailer. That is why Luke says **them** and not just **him**, meaning the jailer. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the officers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 37 xmqz writing-pronouns αὐτούς…ἔβαλαν… ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν…ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the officers whom the magistrates sent to the prison, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refer to the magistrates. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the officers … the magistrates threw us … they cast us out … let the magistrates lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 16 37 v4yk figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἔβαλαν…ἡμᾶς…ἡμᾶς 1 By **us**, Paul means himself and Silas but not the officers to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 16 37 b7cc figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 They have beaten us in public Here **They** refers to the magistrates who commanded their soldiers to beat them. Alternate translation: “The magistrates ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 37 wc37 ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν 1 without trial—men being Romans—they threw us into prison Alternate translation: “without a trial to prove us guilty, even though we are Roman citizens, and they had their soldiers put us in jail” ACT 16 37 qq1u figs-rquestion δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ, ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν καὶ νῦν λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? 1 they cast us out secretly? No indeed! Paul is using the question form to protest that what the magistrates want to do is not just or fair. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The magistrates beat us in public without trial, men being Romans, and then they threw us into prison; I will not allow them, after doing that, to cast us out secretly!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 16 37 jr2j figs-rpronouns ἀλλὰ ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ 1 Instead, coming themselves Here, **themselves** is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +ACT 16 37 b7cc figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 They have beaten us in public The magistrates did not do this themselves. They ordered soldiers to do it. Paul is speaking figuratively of the magistrates, some of the people who were involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “having ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 16 37 v1fd translate-names ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας 1 Here the word **Romans** is a name for people who are citizens of the Roman Empire. Alternate translation: “even though we are Roman citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 16 37 b5a3 figs-ellipsis οὔ γάρ 1 Paul is using an expression that leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “No, for they will not do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 16 37 jr2j figs-rpronouns ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ 1 Instead, coming themselves Paul is using the reflexive pronoun **themselves** for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “let them come in person and lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 16 38 ym2u figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans To be a Roman meant to be a legal citizens of the Roman Empire. Citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. The city leaders were afraid that more important Roman authorities might learn how the city leaders had mistreated Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 40 q59h εἰσῆλθον…ἰδόντες, παρεκάλεσαν 1 Here the word **they** refers to Paul and Silas. The word **them** refers to the believers in Philippi. ACT 16 40 y14i writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) From e6a52cf66c793a09fedd8333d57164cd71afab3c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2022 15:43:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 075/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 371be89eba..dc3d4235bf 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2420,6 +2420,8 @@ ACT 16 37 b7cc figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 The ACT 16 37 v1fd translate-names ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας 1 Here the word **Romans** is a name for people who are citizens of the Roman Empire. Alternate translation: “even though we are Roman citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 37 b5a3 figs-ellipsis οὔ γάρ 1 Paul is using an expression that leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “No, for they will not do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 16 37 jr2j figs-rpronouns ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ 1 Instead, coming themselves Paul is using the reflexive pronoun **themselves** for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “let them come in person and lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +ACT 16 37 sw3a figs-imperative3p ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they come themselves and lead us out” or “they should come themselves and lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) +ACT 16 37 x82d figs-extrainfo ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 It is likely that Paul wanted the magistrates to bring him and Silas out of prison, which would effectively be an apology for mistreatment, so that the believers in Philippi would have the protection of the law even after Paul and his companions left the city. However, this is more a matter of interpretation than of implied information, so it would probably be best not to put an explanation of it in your translation. You can leave it to teachers and preachers of the Bible to explain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) ACT 16 38 ym2u figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans To be a Roman meant to be a legal citizens of the Roman Empire. Citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. The city leaders were afraid that more important Roman authorities might learn how the city leaders had mistreated Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 40 q59h εἰσῆλθον…ἰδόντες, παρεκάλεσαν 1 Here the word **they** refers to Paul and Silas. The word **them** refers to the believers in Philippi. ACT 16 40 y14i writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) From 40bd42edf89ef57edf6a6801f3cc81a573394360 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2022 15:46:48 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 076/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++++- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index dc3d4235bf..b8550c5d4f 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2422,7 +2422,10 @@ ACT 16 37 b5a3 figs-ellipsis οὔ γάρ 1 Paul is using an expression that le ACT 16 37 jr2j figs-rpronouns ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ 1 Instead, coming themselves Paul is using the reflexive pronoun **themselves** for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “let them come in person and lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 16 37 sw3a figs-imperative3p ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they come themselves and lead us out” or “they should come themselves and lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 16 37 x82d figs-extrainfo ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 It is likely that Paul wanted the magistrates to bring him and Silas out of prison, which would effectively be an apology for mistreatment, so that the believers in Philippi would have the protection of the law even after Paul and his companions left the city. However, this is more a matter of interpretation than of implied information, so it would probably be best not to put an explanation of it in your translation. You can leave it to teachers and preachers of the Bible to explain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -ACT 16 38 ym2u figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans To be a Roman meant to be a legal citizens of the Roman Empire. Citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. The city leaders were afraid that more important Roman authorities might learn how the city leaders had mistreated Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 38 ldfi figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what Paul said to the officers by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Paul had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 38 ym2u figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans Roman citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. So the implication is that the magistrates were **terrified** that more important Roman authorities might learn how they had mistreated Paul and Silas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard that they were Roman citizens, because as magistrates they were supposed to make sure that citizens were not tortured and received fair trials, and they were concerned that more important authorities would punish them for the way they had treated Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 38 lqs5 figs-quotations ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard, ‘They are Romans!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +ACT 16 38 vle2 translate-names Ῥωμαῖοί 1 Here the word **Romans** is a name for people who are citizens of the Roman Empire. Alternate translation: “Roman citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 40 q59h εἰσῆλθον…ἰδόντες, παρεκάλεσαν 1 Here the word **they** refers to Paul and Silas. The word **them** refers to the believers in Philippi. ACT 16 40 y14i writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 16 40 t1pf figs-go εἰσῆλθον πρὸς τὴν Λυδίαν 1 they came to the house of Lydia Here, **came** can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) From c553d986015f949c90ac915bd54be03f7aef3010 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2022 15:49:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 077/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index b8550c5d4f..6ff1f53f80 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2426,7 +2426,8 @@ ACT 16 38 ldfi figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 Luke is using th ACT 16 38 ym2u figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans Roman citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. So the implication is that the magistrates were **terrified** that more important Roman authorities might learn how they had mistreated Paul and Silas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard that they were Roman citizens, because as magistrates they were supposed to make sure that citizens were not tortured and received fair trials, and they were concerned that more important authorities would punish them for the way they had treated Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 38 lqs5 figs-quotations ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard, ‘They are Romans!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 16 38 vle2 translate-names Ῥωμαῖοί 1 Here the word **Romans** is a name for people who are citizens of the Roman Empire. Alternate translation: “Roman citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 16 40 q59h εἰσῆλθον…ἰδόντες, παρεκάλεσαν 1 Here the word **they** refers to Paul and Silas. The word **them** refers to the believers in Philippi. +ACT 16 39 q59h writing-pronouns παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς…ἐξαγαγόντες, ἠρώτων 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the magistrates, and the pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the magistrates entreated Paul and Silas … bringing them out, the magistrates were asking Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 16 39 a7yq figs-explicit παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς 1 Luke means implicitly that the magistrates **entreated** or begged Paul and Silas not to make any protest about how they had been treated. In effect, they apologized to them and asked them to overlook the offense. Alternate translation: “they apologized to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 40 y14i writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 16 40 t1pf figs-go εἰσῆλθον πρὸς τὴν Λυδίαν 1 they came to the house of Lydia Here, **came** can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 16 40 ylk9 τὴν Λυδίαν 1 the house of Lydia Alternate translation: “the home of Lydia” From 526dfc81457b4773524866a366cd205fbf71302e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2022 15:50:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 078/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 6ff1f53f80..e1672bb342 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2428,7 +2428,7 @@ ACT 16 38 lqs5 figs-quotations ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅ ACT 16 38 vle2 translate-names Ῥωμαῖοί 1 Here the word **Romans** is a name for people who are citizens of the Roman Empire. Alternate translation: “Roman citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 39 q59h writing-pronouns παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς…ἐξαγαγόντες, ἠρώτων 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the magistrates, and the pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the magistrates entreated Paul and Silas … bringing them out, the magistrates were asking Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 16 39 a7yq figs-explicit παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς 1 Luke means implicitly that the magistrates **entreated** or begged Paul and Silas not to make any protest about how they had been treated. In effect, they apologized to them and asked them to overlook the offense. Alternate translation: “they apologized to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 40 y14i writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) +ACT 16 40 y14i writing-endofstory δὲ  1 Luke uses the word **So** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the imprisonment of Paul and Silas. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 16 40 t1pf figs-go εἰσῆλθον πρὸς τὴν Λυδίαν 1 they came to the house of Lydia Here, **came** can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 16 40 ylk9 τὴν Λυδίαν 1 the house of Lydia Alternate translation: “the home of Lydia” ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-gendernotations ἰδόντες…τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had seen the brothers Here, **the brothers** refers to believers whether male or female. Alternate translation: “when they had visited with the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From fafe2fd77df4faf734d7124a95ef6eb9c4898814 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 23 Sep 2022 15:53:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 079/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 +++++--- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index e1672bb342..d895f25d28 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2429,9 +2429,11 @@ ACT 16 38 vle2 translate-names Ῥωμαῖοί 1 Here the word **Romans** is a ACT 16 39 q59h writing-pronouns παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς…ἐξαγαγόντες, ἠρώτων 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the magistrates, and the pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the magistrates entreated Paul and Silas … bringing them out, the magistrates were asking Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 16 39 a7yq figs-explicit παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς 1 Luke means implicitly that the magistrates **entreated** or begged Paul and Silas not to make any protest about how they had been treated. In effect, they apologized to them and asked them to overlook the offense. Alternate translation: “they apologized to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 40 y14i writing-endofstory δὲ  1 Luke uses the word **So** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the imprisonment of Paul and Silas. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 16 40 t1pf figs-go εἰσῆλθον πρὸς τὴν Λυδίαν 1 they came to the house of Lydia Here, **came** can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -ACT 16 40 ylk9 τὴν Λυδίαν 1 the house of Lydia Alternate translation: “the home of Lydia” -ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-gendernotations ἰδόντες…τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had seen the brothers Here, **the brothers** refers to believers whether male or female. Alternate translation: “when they had visited with the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +ACT 16 40 ylk9 figs-metonymy τὴν Λυδίαν 1 the house of Lydia Luke is referring figuratively to the house of **Lydia** by association with the name of the woman who lived there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they came to the house of Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 40 t1pf figs-go εἰσῆλθον 1 they came to the house of Lydia In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had seen the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 40 qs0x figs-synecdoche καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Luke says that **they … went out**, meaning Paul and Silas, to refer to those two men and to Timothy, who was still traveling with them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and then Paul and Silas and Timothy left Philippi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 16 40 gld6 figs-explicit καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Since Luke says **they … went out**, not “we went out,” the implication is that Luke remained in Philippi for a time, likely to strengthen and encourage the new believers there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Misunderstandings about the Messiah

The Jews expected the Christ or Messiah to be a powerful king because the Old Testament says so many times. But it also says many times that the Messiah would suffer, and that was what Paul was telling the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### The religion of Athens

Paul said that the Athenians were “religious,” but they did not worship the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples and begun to worship the gods of the people they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

In this chapter Luke describes for the first time how Paul told the message of Christ to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament. ACT 17 1 e4w5 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke, the author, starts to tell a new part of the story. ACT 17 1 b7np διοδεύσαντες 1 having passed through Alternate translation: “when they had traveled through” From f1d39b95159e1ebfac17f16787180e841bc0e3b0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 26 Sep 2022 12:56:59 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 080/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 ++++----- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d895f25d28..872677ca5e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2435,11 +2435,10 @@ ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had ACT 16 40 qs0x figs-synecdoche καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Luke says that **they … went out**, meaning Paul and Silas, to refer to those two men and to Timothy, who was still traveling with them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and then Paul and Silas and Timothy left Philippi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 40 gld6 figs-explicit καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Since Luke says **they … went out**, not “we went out,” the implication is that Luke remained in Philippi for a time, likely to strengthen and encourage the new believers there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Misunderstandings about the Messiah

The Jews expected the Christ or Messiah to be a powerful king because the Old Testament says so many times. But it also says many times that the Messiah would suffer, and that was what Paul was telling the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### The religion of Athens

Paul said that the Athenians were “religious,” but they did not worship the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples and begun to worship the gods of the people they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

In this chapter Luke describes for the first time how Paul told the message of Christ to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament. -ACT 17 1 e4w5 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke, the author, starts to tell a new part of the story. -ACT 17 1 b7np διοδεύσαντες 1 having passed through Alternate translation: “when they had traveled through” -ACT 17 1 q9x4 ἦλθον 1 Here the word **they** refers to Paul and Silas. They arrive in Thessalonica, apparently without Luke, since he says “they” and not “we.” Compare [Acts 16:40](../16/40.md). -ACT 17 1 kll1 translate-names τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν 1 Amphipolis and Apollonia **Amphipolis** and **Apollonia** are coastal cities in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 17 1 yj66 figs-go ἦλθον εἰς Θεσσαλονίκην 1 they came to Thessalonica Here, **came** can be translated as “went” or “arrived.” Alternate translation: “they went to Thessalonica” or “they arrived at Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +ACT 17 1 e4w5 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +ACT 17 1 kll1 translate-names τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν 1 Amphipolis and Apollonia The words **Amphipolis** and **Apollonia** are the names of coastal cities in the Roman province of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 1 yj66 translate-names Θεσσαλονίκην 1 they came to Thessalonica The word **Thessalonica** is the name of another city on the coast of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 1 o19x figs-explicitinfo συναγωγὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 It might seem that the expression **a synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “a synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 17 2 vbf2 κατὰ…τὸ εἰωθὸς 1 according to his custom Paul usually went to the synagogue on the Sabbath when Jews would be present. Alternate translation: “as his habit was” or “as his common practice was” ACT 17 2 bt5e ἐπὶ Σάββατα τρία 1 for three Sabbaths Alternate translation: “on each Sabbath day for three weeks” ACT 17 2 wp3k figs-explicit διελέξατο αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν Γραφῶν 1 reasoned with them from the scriptures Paul explained what the **Scriptures** means in order to prove to the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From e8695b0bf9ab1c4f16edbfcd2f0789cbe95e0993 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 26 Sep 2022 12:58:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 081/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 +---- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 872677ca5e..1c3f349dea 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2439,10 +2439,7 @@ ACT 17 1 e4w5 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **N ACT 17 1 kll1 translate-names τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν 1 Amphipolis and Apollonia The words **Amphipolis** and **Apollonia** are the names of coastal cities in the Roman province of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 1 yj66 translate-names Θεσσαλονίκην 1 they came to Thessalonica The word **Thessalonica** is the name of another city on the coast of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 1 o19x figs-explicitinfo συναγωγὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 It might seem that the expression **a synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “a synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) -ACT 17 2 vbf2 κατὰ…τὸ εἰωθὸς 1 according to his custom Paul usually went to the synagogue on the Sabbath when Jews would be present. Alternate translation: “as his habit was” or “as his common practice was” -ACT 17 2 bt5e ἐπὶ Σάββατα τρία 1 for three Sabbaths Alternate translation: “on each Sabbath day for three weeks” -ACT 17 2 wp3k figs-explicit διελέξατο αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν Γραφῶν 1 reasoned with them from the scriptures Paul explained what the **Scriptures** means in order to prove to the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 17 2 qf4t διελέξατο αὐτοῖς 1 reasoned with them Alternate translation: “debated with them” or “discussed with them” +ACT 17 2 mkn6 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς…αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers the Jews who attended the synagogue in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 17 3 ir9q figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 He is fully opening This could mean: (1) to explain the scriptures in a way that people can understand is spoken of as if Paul were opening something so people can see what is inside of it, or (2) Paul was literally opening a book or scroll and reading from it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 3 he78 ἔδει 1 it was necessary for Alternate translation: “it was part of God’s plan for” ACT 17 3 ipb2 ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise Alternate translation: “to come back to life” From 783b4a0a82493f227221b6815343d2fe0cc3245e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 26 Sep 2022 13:03:28 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 082/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 1c3f349dea..de439028a4 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2440,10 +2440,10 @@ ACT 17 1 kll1 translate-names τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπ ACT 17 1 yj66 translate-names Θεσσαλονίκην 1 they came to Thessalonica The word **Thessalonica** is the name of another city on the coast of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 1 o19x figs-explicitinfo συναγωγὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 It might seem that the expression **a synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “a synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 17 2 mkn6 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς…αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers the Jews who attended the synagogue in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 17 3 ir9q figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 He is fully opening This could mean: (1) to explain the scriptures in a way that people can understand is spoken of as if Paul were opening something so people can see what is inside of it, or (2) Paul was literally opening a book or scroll and reading from it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 3 he78 ἔδει 1 it was necessary for Alternate translation: “it was part of God’s plan for” -ACT 17 3 ipb2 ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise Alternate translation: “to come back to life” -ACT 17 3 b9qi ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again. +ACT 17 3 lt8q figs-hendiadys διανοίγων καὶ παρατιθέμενος 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two expressions connected with **and**. The phrase **fully opening them** tells how Paul was **demonstrating** from the Scriptures that Jesus is the Messiah. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “demonstrating by opening the Scriptures fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +ACT 17 3 ir9q figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 He is fully opening Luke is speaking figuratively as if Paul had been literally **opening** the Scriptures **fully**, as by unrolling a scroll, so that the Jews in the synagogue could understand them. Luke means that Paul was explaining the Scriptures thoroughly. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “explaining them thoroughly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 3 ipb2 figs-idiom ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise Luke is using the word **rise** idiomatically to mean that Jesus came back to life again after he died. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 17 3 b9qi figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Luke is using the adjective **dead** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 17 4 es2u figs-activepassive τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν 1 some from them were persuaded If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 4 nyp2 προσεκληρώθησαν τῷ Παύλῳ 1 joined Paul Alternate translation: “became associated with Paul” ACT 17 4 t21z σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων 1 of worshiping Greeks This refers to **Greeks** who worship God but have not converted to Judaism through circumcision. From 75592ffa1ddbb8030598cff0b6bbd196c9d56d14 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 26 Sep 2022 13:11:59 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 083/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 +++---- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index de439028a4..9243f9e930 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2444,10 +2444,9 @@ ACT 17 3 lt8q figs-hendiadys διανοίγων καὶ παρατιθέμενο ACT 17 3 ir9q figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 He is fully opening Luke is speaking figuratively as if Paul had been literally **opening** the Scriptures **fully**, as by unrolling a scroll, so that the Jews in the synagogue could understand them. Luke means that Paul was explaining the Scriptures thoroughly. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “explaining them thoroughly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 3 ipb2 figs-idiom ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise Luke is using the word **rise** idiomatically to mean that Jesus came back to life again after he died. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 17 3 b9qi figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Luke is using the adjective **dead** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 17 4 es2u figs-activepassive τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν 1 some from them were persuaded If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 17 4 nyp2 προσεκληρώθησαν τῷ Παύλῳ 1 joined Paul Alternate translation: “became associated with Paul” -ACT 17 4 t21z σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων 1 of worshiping Greeks This refers to **Greeks** who worship God but have not converted to Judaism through circumcision. -ACT 17 4 ye8v figs-litotes γυναικῶν…τῶν πρώτων οὐκ ὀλίγαι 1 not a few of the leading women Here, **not a few** is an understatement to emphasize that many **leading women** joined them. Alternate translation: “many leading women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 17 4 es2u figs-activepassive τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν 1 some from them were persuaded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 17 4 t21z figs-idiom τῶν…σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων 1 of worshiping Greeks Here the expression **worshiping God** describes Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated the expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 17 4 ye8v figs-litotes οὐκ ὀλίγαι 1 not a few of the leading women Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 17 5 nuh6 ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν…ἐζήτουν 1 Here the word **they** refers to the unbelieving Jews and wicked men from the marketplace. ACT 17 5 uj43 figs-metaphor ζηλώσαντες 1 having become jealous The feeling of jealousy is spoken of as if jealousy were actually moving the person. Alternate translation: “feeling very jealous” or “feeling very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 5 vev6 figs-explicit ζηλώσαντες 1 having become jealous It can be stated explicitly that these Jews were **jealous** because some of the Jews and Greeks believed Paul’s message. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 0cd96741065ef08ef165454f66b59cb53221b6a5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 26 Sep 2022 13:16:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 084/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 17 ++++++----------- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 9243f9e930..ec1d026955 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2447,17 +2447,12 @@ ACT 17 3 b9qi figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Luke is using ACT 17 4 es2u figs-activepassive τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν 1 some from them were persuaded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 4 t21z figs-idiom τῶν…σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων 1 of worshiping Greeks Here the expression **worshiping God** describes Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated the expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 17 4 ye8v figs-litotes οὐκ ὀλίγαι 1 not a few of the leading women Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 17 5 nuh6 ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν…ἐζήτουν 1 Here the word **they** refers to the unbelieving Jews and wicked men from the marketplace. -ACT 17 5 uj43 figs-metaphor ζηλώσαντες 1 having become jealous The feeling of jealousy is spoken of as if jealousy were actually moving the person. Alternate translation: “feeling very jealous” or “feeling very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 5 vev6 figs-explicit ζηλώσαντες 1 having become jealous It can be stated explicitly that these Jews were **jealous** because some of the Jews and Greeks believed Paul’s message. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 17 5 btw6 προσλαβόμενοι τῶν ἀγοραίων ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς 1 having taken certain wicked men of the marketplace Here, **having taken** does not mean the Jews took these people by force. It means the Jews persuaded these wicked men to help them. -ACT 17 5 lc6g ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς 1 certain wicked men The word **men** here refers specifically to males. Alternate translation: “some evil men” -ACT 17 5 ie1f τῶν ἀγοραίων 1 of the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “from the public square” -ACT 17 5 t3bc figs-metonymy ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν 1 they set the city in an uproar Here, **the city** stands for the people in the city. Alternate translation: “they caused the people of the city to be in an uproar” or “they caused the people of the city to riot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 17 5 s3uv ἐπιστάντες τῇ οἰκίᾳ 1 having assaulted the house This phrase probably means the people were throwing rocks at the **house** and trying to break down the door of the house. Alternate translation: “having violently attacking the house” -ACT 17 5 ks2l translate-names Ἰάσονος 1 of Jason **Jason** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 17 5 abcu αὐτοὺς προαγαγεῖν 1 to lead them Alternate translation: “to bring Paul and Silas” -ACT 17 5 pp7k εἰς τὸν δῆμον 1 to the people This could mean: (1) a governmental or legal group of citizens gathered to make a decision or (2) an unruly mob. +ACT 17 5 clcz figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 17 5 ie1f translate-unknown τῶν ἀγοραίων 1 of the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. See how you translated this term in [16:20](../16/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 17 5 t3bc figs-metonymy τὴν πόλιν 1 they set the city in an uproar The word **city** figuratively represents the people of the city. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 5 w94p figs-explicit Ἰάσονος 1 Luke does not tell us anything further about this **Jason**, but the implication is that the Jewish leaders believed that Paul and Silas were staying in his home. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jason, where they believed Paul and Silas were staying,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 17 5 ks2l translate-names Ἰάσονος 1 of Jason The word **Jason** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 5 abcu writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 to lead them The pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 17 6 i79p τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Here, **brothers** refers to believers. Alternate translation: “some other believers” ACT 17 6 e44z ἐπὶ τοὺς πολιτάρχας 1 before the city officials Alternate translation: “in the presence of the city officials” ACT 17 6 g7xj οἱ…οὗτοι 1 Those who … they The Jewish leaders were using the pronouns **Those** and **they** to refer to Paul and Silas. From 8e4e3f5e400322fb504bbedd640c305e626e44be Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 26 Sep 2022 13:18:43 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 085/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 ++----- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index ec1d026955..be069978bf 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2453,11 +2453,8 @@ ACT 17 5 t3bc figs-metonymy τὴν πόλιν 1 they set the city in an uproar ACT 17 5 w94p figs-explicit Ἰάσονος 1 Luke does not tell us anything further about this **Jason**, but the implication is that the Jewish leaders believed that Paul and Silas were staying in his home. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jason, where they believed Paul and Silas were staying,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 5 ks2l translate-names Ἰάσονος 1 of Jason The word **Jason** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 5 abcu writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 to lead them The pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 17 6 i79p τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Here, **brothers** refers to believers. Alternate translation: “some other believers” -ACT 17 6 e44z ἐπὶ τοὺς πολιτάρχας 1 before the city officials Alternate translation: “in the presence of the city officials” -ACT 17 6 g7xj οἱ…οὗτοι 1 Those who … they The Jewish leaders were using the pronouns **Those** and **they** to refer to Paul and Silas. -ACT 17 6 c2av figs-idiom τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 have turned the inhabited world upside down This phrase is another way of saying Paul and Silas where causing trouble everywhere they went. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 17 6 x90b figs-hyperbole τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 The Jewish leaders were exaggerating the influence Paul and Silas were having with their teaching. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 17 6 i79p figs-metaphor τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 6 x90b figs-hyperbole οἱ τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 The Jewish leaders are figuratively exaggerating the influence of Paul and Silas and their teaching. Alternate translation: “These men who have caused trouble wherever they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 7 hlc9 ὑποδέδεκται Ἰάσων; καὶ οὗτοι πάντες 1 Jason and all these men have welcomed This phrase signals that Jason and his companions were in agreement with the apostles’ troubling message. ACT 17 8 th2f ἐτάραξαν 1 were disturbed Alternate translation: “were worried” ACT 17 9 ya44 λαβόντες τὸ ἱκανὸν παρὰ τοῦ Ἰάσονος καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν 1 after they had received a bond from Jason and the rest of them Jason and the others had to pay the money to the city officials as a promise of good behavior; that money might be returned if all went well or it might be used to repair the damages brought on by bad behavior. From a1021cd9e1c54d610dd30808eee692dba0412bbf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 26 Sep 2022 13:20:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 086/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index be069978bf..4847d1dd94 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2455,8 +2455,7 @@ ACT 17 5 ks2l translate-names Ἰάσονος 1 of Jason The word **Jason** is t ACT 17 5 abcu writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 to lead them The pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 17 6 i79p figs-metaphor τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 6 x90b figs-hyperbole οἱ τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 The Jewish leaders are figuratively exaggerating the influence of Paul and Silas and their teaching. Alternate translation: “These men who have caused trouble wherever they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 17 7 hlc9 ὑποδέδεκται Ἰάσων; καὶ οὗτοι πάντες 1 Jason and all these men have welcomed This phrase signals that Jason and his companions were in agreement with the apostles’ troubling message. -ACT 17 8 th2f ἐτάραξαν 1 were disturbed Alternate translation: “were worried” +ACT 17 8 ixmb writing-pronouns ἐτάραξαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish leaders in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 17 9 ya44 λαβόντες τὸ ἱκανὸν παρὰ τοῦ Ἰάσονος καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν 1 after they had received a bond from Jason and the rest of them Jason and the others had to pay the money to the city officials as a promise of good behavior; that money might be returned if all went well or it might be used to repair the damages brought on by bad behavior. ACT 17 9 bj48 τῶν λοιπῶν 1 the rest of them The words **the rest of them** refers to other believers that the Jews brought before the officials. ACT 17 9 aru6 ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς 1 they released them Alternate translation: “the officials let Jason and the other believers go” From 522c2069782cb6c8bf591a9074625aa7d8c0c352 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 26 Sep 2022 13:22:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 087/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++--- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 4847d1dd94..e636647cfe 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2456,9 +2456,8 @@ ACT 17 5 abcu writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 to lead them The pronoun **them* ACT 17 6 i79p figs-metaphor τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 6 x90b figs-hyperbole οἱ τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 The Jewish leaders are figuratively exaggerating the influence of Paul and Silas and their teaching. Alternate translation: “These men who have caused trouble wherever they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 8 ixmb writing-pronouns ἐτάραξαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish leaders in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 17 9 ya44 λαβόντες τὸ ἱκανὸν παρὰ τοῦ Ἰάσονος καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν 1 after they had received a bond from Jason and the rest of them Jason and the others had to pay the money to the city officials as a promise of good behavior; that money might be returned if all went well or it might be used to repair the damages brought on by bad behavior. -ACT 17 9 bj48 τῶν λοιπῶν 1 the rest of them The words **the rest of them** refers to other believers that the Jews brought before the officials. -ACT 17 9 aru6 ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς 1 they released them Alternate translation: “the officials let Jason and the other believers go” +ACT 17 9 ya44 translate-unknown τὸ ἱκανὸν 1 after they had received a bond from Jason and the rest of them A **bond** was an amount of money that the city officials required Jason and the rest of the believers to pay as a guarantee of good behavior. The city officials would return the money if those men did not cause any further trouble. Your language and culture may have a term that you can use in your translation for this kind of monetary guarantee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 17 9 eq4y writing-pronouns ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the city officials, and the pronoun **them** refers to Jason and the other believers. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the city officials released them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 17 10 na8h 0 General Information: Paul and Silas travel on to the town of Berea. ACT 17 10 qy5c figs-gendernotations οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers The word **brothers** here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 17 11 k2st writing-background δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about the people in Berea and how they were willing to listen to Paul and examine what he said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) From ea2a64680de586b7259030e047801ebb2e9ad74d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 26 Sep 2022 13:24:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 088/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index e636647cfe..22c1a1cc61 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2458,8 +2458,9 @@ ACT 17 6 x90b figs-hyperbole οἱ τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατ ACT 17 8 ixmb writing-pronouns ἐτάραξαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish leaders in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 17 9 ya44 translate-unknown τὸ ἱκανὸν 1 after they had received a bond from Jason and the rest of them A **bond** was an amount of money that the city officials required Jason and the rest of the believers to pay as a guarantee of good behavior. The city officials would return the money if those men did not cause any further trouble. Your language and culture may have a term that you can use in your translation for this kind of monetary guarantee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 17 9 eq4y writing-pronouns ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the city officials, and the pronoun **them** refers to Jason and the other believers. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the city officials released them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 17 10 na8h 0 General Information: Paul and Silas travel on to the town of Berea. -ACT 17 10 qy5c figs-gendernotations οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers The word **brothers** here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +ACT 17 10 qy5c figs-metaphor οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 10 z39h translate-names Βέροιαν 1 The word **Berea** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 10 m75m figs-explicitinfo τὴν συναγωγὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 It might seem that the expression **the synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 17 11 k2st writing-background δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about the people in Berea and how they were willing to listen to Paul and examine what he said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 17 11 gu6s οὗτοι…ἦσαν εὐγενέστεροι 1 these were more open-minded than These **open-minded** people were willing to think more objectively about new ideas than other people. Alternate translation: “the Bereans were more willing to listen” ACT 17 11 hle3 figs-metonymy ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον 1 received the word Here, **word** refers to a teaching. Alternate translation: “listened to the teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 80f400ee678e58678b33fbccfd161cb42f5d32ad Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Tue, 27 Sep 2022 11:04:08 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 089/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 26 +++++++++++--------------- 1 file changed, 11 insertions(+), 15 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 69dba24dd9..48d8cc860d 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1016,21 +1016,17 @@ MAT 13 57 sq8j τῇ πατρίδι 1 his hometown See how you translated **ho MAT 13 57 w4x8 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 in his own family Jesus uses the phrase **in his house** to refer to his closest relatives, like his father, mother, or siblings. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “among his closest family members” or “by his father, mother, and siblings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 58 e2cp grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ οὐκ ἐποίησεν ἐκεῖ δυνάμεις πολλὰς, διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν 1 he did not do many miracles there If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since they did not believe, Jesus did not do many miracles in that place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])\n MAT 14 intro g5mc 0 # Matthew 14 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verses 1 and 2 continue the account from chapter 13. Verses 3-12 stop the account and speak of things that happened earlier, possibly soon after Satan tempted Jesus (see [4:12](../mat/04/12.md)). Verse 13 continues the account from verse 2. Be sure to have words in verses 3-12 that tell the reader that Matthew has stopped his account to give new information before he continues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. For example, the writer does not tell who brought John’s head to Herodias’s daughter ([14:11](../mat/14/11.md)). You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 14 1 zl7x figs-events 0 General Information: These verses explain Herod’s reaction when he heard about Jesus. This event happens some time after the events that follow in the narrative. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) -MAT 14 1 q8h5 ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 1 At that time Alternate translation: “In those days” or “While Jesus was ministering in Galilee” -MAT 14 2 pd1b εἶπεν 1 he said Alternate translation: “Herod said” -MAT 14 2 nx7x ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 has been raised from the dead The words **from the dead** speak of all dead people together in the underworld. To rise from the dead speaks of coming alive again. -MAT 14 2 vve7 διὰ τοῦτο αἱ δυνάμεις ἐνεργοῦσιν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 because of this, miraculous powers are at work in him Some Jews at that time believed if a person came back from the dead he would have **powers** to do mighty things. -MAT 14 3 zgp9 figs-events 0 Connecting Statement: Here the author begins to tell about how Herod had executed John the Baptist. These events occur some time before the event in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) -MAT 14 3 d3gp figs-events 0 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” If needed, you can present the events of 14:3-4 in the order that they happened, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) -MAT 14 3 h466 figs-metonymy ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For Herod, having arrested John, bound him, and put him in prison It says that **Herod** did these things because he ordered others to do them for him. Alternate translation: “Herod ordered his soldiers to arrest and bind John the Baptist and put him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 14 3 lr92 translate-names τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου 1 the wife of Philip **Philip** was Herod’s brother. Herod had taken Philip’s wife to be his own **wife**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 14 4 n1t6 figs-quotations ἔλεγεν γὰρ αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰωάννης, οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν αὐτήν. 1 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” This direct quotation can be expressed as an indirect quote, if needed. Alternate translation: “For John had said to Herod that it was not lawful for Herod to have Herodias as his wife.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MAT 14 4 r8lh ἔλεγεν γὰρ αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰωάννης 1 For John was saying to him Alternate translation: “For John had kept saying to Herod” -MAT 14 4 nb2j figs-explicit οὐκ ἔξεστίν 1 It is not lawful Philip was still alive when Herod married Herodias. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 14 5 hg9f ἐφοβήθη 1 he feared Alternate translation: “Herod feared” -MAT 14 5 w7uv αὐτὸν εἶχον 1 they regarded him Alternate translation: “they regarded John” -MAT 14 6 fvs5 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ μέσῳ 1 in the midst You can make explicit the implicit information. Alternate translation: “in the midst of the guests attending the birthday celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 14 2 pd1b figs-quotesinquotes καὶ εἶπεν τοῖς παισὶν αὐτοῦ, οὗτός ἐστιν Ἰωάννης ὁ Βαπτιστής; αὐτὸς ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο αἱ δυνάμεις ἐνεργοῦσιν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 he said If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And he said to his servants that this is John the Baptist, and that he has been raised from the dead. Because of this, great powers are working in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])\n +MAT 14 2 nx7x figs-activepassive ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 has been raised from the dead If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 14 2 vve7 figs-personification διὰ τοῦτο αἱ δυνάμεις ἐνεργοῦσιν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 because of this, miraculous powers are at work in him Jesus speaks of **the miraculous powers** figuratively as if it were a living thing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This is why God has given him great power to do miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +MAT 14 3 zgp9 writing-background γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: From here until [14:12](../14/12.md), Jesus gives the reader background information explaining why Herod said that John was raised from the dead. He is explaining how John died. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “For John died in this way:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MAT 14 3 zsvz grammar-connect-logic-result For Herod, having arrested John, bound him, and put him in prison because of Herodias, the wife of Philip, his brother 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of Herodias, Herod's brother's wife, John was arrested, bound, and thrown into prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +MAT 14 3 d3gp grammar-connect-time-sequential ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” The events described by **arrested**, **bound** and **put in prison** happened in that order. Make sure this is understandable to your audience. Alternate translation: “For Herod first arrested him. Then he bound him and then threw him and prison” +MAT 14 3 h466 figs-metonymy ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For Herod, having arrested John, bound him, and put him in prison Jesus is using the term **Herod** figuratively to mean the soldiers who work for him. Alternate translation: “Herod sent his soldiers to arrest John, bind him, and throw him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 14 3 lr92 translate-names τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου 1 the wife of Philip **Philip** was Herod’s brother, and the name of a man. Herod had taken Philip’s wife to be his own **wife**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MAT 14 4 n1t6 figs-quotations ἔλεγεν γὰρ αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰωάννης, οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν αὐτήν. 1 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “For John was saying that it was not lawful for him to have her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MAT 14 6 fvs5 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ μέσῳ 1 in the midst If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express who she was dancing **in the midst** of explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the midst of the guests attending the birthday celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 14 6 vdik translate-unknown 1 MAT 14 8 rhk5 figs-activepassive ἡ δὲ προβιβασθεῖσα ὑπὸ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτῆς 1 But having being urged beforehand by her mother If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But after her mother instructed her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 14 8 wi8s ἡ δὲ προβιβασθεῖσα 1 But having being urged beforehand Alternate translation: “But having been coached beforehand” MAT 14 8 ya5z φησίν 1 she said Alternate translation: “the daughter of Herodias said to Herod” From ef380eb8b5a80915cb8fe0f83fb3491dcb95db9c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 27 Sep 2022 11:50:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 090/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 13 +++++++------ 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 22c1a1cc61..c23ac34184 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2461,12 +2461,13 @@ ACT 17 9 eq4y writing-pronouns ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς 1 The pronoun ** ACT 17 10 qy5c figs-metaphor οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 10 z39h translate-names Βέροιαν 1 The word **Berea** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 10 m75m figs-explicitinfo τὴν συναγωγὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 It might seem that the expression **the synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) -ACT 17 11 k2st writing-background δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about the people in Berea and how they were willing to listen to Paul and examine what he said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 17 11 gu6s οὗτοι…ἦσαν εὐγενέστεροι 1 these were more open-minded than These **open-minded** people were willing to think more objectively about new ideas than other people. Alternate translation: “the Bereans were more willing to listen” -ACT 17 11 hle3 figs-metonymy ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον 1 received the word Here, **word** refers to a teaching. Alternate translation: “listened to the teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 17 11 uh8a μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας 1 with all readiness These Bereans were prepared to examine earnestly Paul’s teachings about the scripture. -ACT 17 11 lzm3 καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀνακρίνοντες τὰς Γραφὰς 1 examining the scriptures each day Alternate translation: “carefully reading and evaluating the scriptures every day” -ACT 17 11 g8an ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως 1 these things were so Alternate translation: “the things Paul said were true” +ACT 17 11 k2st writing-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about the Jews in Berea to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 17 11 alq1 writing-pronouns οὗτοι…τῶν ἐν Θεσσαλονίκῃ 1 Luke is using the demonstrative pronoun **these** to refer to the Jews in Berea and the demonstrative pronoun **those** to refer to the Jews in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in Berea … the Jews in Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 17 11 gu6s figs-metonymy εὐγενέστεροι 1 these were more open-minded than Luke is using the word **noble**, which literally describes a person of a certain lineage, figuratively to mean the gracious behavior that should characterize people of that lineage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more gracious” or “more considerate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 11 hle3 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 received the word Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Paul was sharing by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 11 uh8a figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας 1 with all readiness Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great readiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 17 11 qrnm figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was showing the Bereans from the Scriptures that Jesus was the Messiah, just as Paul did for the Thessalonians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 17 11 g8an εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως 1 these things were so Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to find out whether these things might be so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 17 12 abcv figs-litotes ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι 1 not a few men Here, **not a few** is an understatement to emphasize that many men believed the message. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 17 13 asb4 figs-metaphor ἦλθον κἀκεῖ, σαλεύοντες 1 they came and there stirred up This speaks about their agitating people as though it were a person stirring a liquid and causing the things at the bottom of the liquid to rise to the surface. Alternate translation: “they came there and agitated” or “they went there and disturbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 13 wjq3 ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 troubled the crowds Alternate translation: “worried the crowds” or “caused the people to become upset” From 31052865ffc2e85bb757f7165dbd41b1af1c0f5d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 27 Sep 2022 11:51:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 091/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index c23ac34184..4b41c0c0e4 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2468,7 +2468,7 @@ ACT 17 11 hle3 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 received the word Luke is usin ACT 17 11 uh8a figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας 1 with all readiness Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great readiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 11 qrnm figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was showing the Bereans from the Scriptures that Jesus was the Messiah, just as Paul did for the Thessalonians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 11 g8an εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως 1 these things were so Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to find out whether these things might be so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 17 12 abcv figs-litotes ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι 1 not a few men Here, **not a few** is an understatement to emphasize that many men believed the message. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 17 12 abcv figs-litotes ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι 1 not a few men Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 17 13 asb4 figs-metaphor ἦλθον κἀκεῖ, σαλεύοντες 1 they came and there stirred up This speaks about their agitating people as though it were a person stirring a liquid and causing the things at the bottom of the liquid to rise to the surface. Alternate translation: “they came there and agitated” or “they went there and disturbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 13 wjq3 ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 troubled the crowds Alternate translation: “worried the crowds” or “caused the people to become upset” ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers The word **brothers** here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From 631d4bf5bf6acf21a6dcd0b9c4a9a90860a36936 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 27 Sep 2022 11:53:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 092/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 4b41c0c0e4..d4dafbf5b7 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2469,8 +2469,9 @@ ACT 17 11 uh8a figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας 1 with all ACT 17 11 qrnm figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was showing the Bereans from the Scriptures that Jesus was the Messiah, just as Paul did for the Thessalonians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 11 g8an εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως 1 these things were so Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to find out whether these things might be so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 17 12 abcv figs-litotes ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι 1 not a few men Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 17 13 asb4 figs-metaphor ἦλθον κἀκεῖ, σαλεύοντες 1 they came and there stirred up This speaks about their agitating people as though it were a person stirring a liquid and causing the things at the bottom of the liquid to rise to the surface. Alternate translation: “they came there and agitated” or “they went there and disturbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 13 wjq3 ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 troubled the crowds Alternate translation: “worried the crowds” or “caused the people to become upset” +ACT 17 13 ybos figs-activepassive καὶ…κατηγγέλη ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was also proclaiming the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 17 13 dijk figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 13 wjq3 figs-doublet σαλεύοντες καὶ ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 troubled the crowds The terms **exciting** and **troubling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “greatly upsetting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers The word **brothers** here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 17 14 zw1c πορεύεσθαι ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 to go as far as to the sea From here Paul would probably sail to another city. Alternate translation: “to go all the way to the coast” ACT 17 15 tjh5 καθιστάνοντες τὸν Παῦλον 1 were leading Paul down Alternate translation: “who were accompanying Paul” or “who were going down with Paul” From 5c6cd5886f519db794f409ee420b344da38d72bc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 27 Sep 2022 12:30:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 093/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d4dafbf5b7..86ebb7d5a9 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2472,8 +2472,8 @@ ACT 17 12 abcv figs-litotes ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι 1 not a few men ACT 17 13 ybos figs-activepassive καὶ…κατηγγέλη ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was also proclaiming the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 13 dijk figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 13 wjq3 figs-doublet σαλεύοντες καὶ ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 troubled the crowds The terms **exciting** and **troubling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “greatly upsetting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers The word **brothers** here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 17 14 zw1c πορεύεσθαι ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 to go as far as to the sea From here Paul would probably sail to another city. Alternate translation: “to go all the way to the coast” +ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 14 zw1c figs-explicitinfo ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 to go as far as to the sea It might seem that the expression **as far as to the sea** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “to the seacoast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 17 15 tjh5 καθιστάνοντες τὸν Παῦλον 1 were leading Paul down Alternate translation: “who were accompanying Paul” or “who were going down with Paul” ACT 17 15 vn8h translate-names Ἀθηνῶν 1 **Athens** is down the coast from Barea which is in Macedonia. Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 15 gs1p figs-quotations λαβόντες ἐντολὴν πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον 1 after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy This can also be stated as a direct quotation as in the UST. Alternate translation: “after telling them to command Silas and Timothy so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) From c9d0c5b2ba50756f53f490487971495ace9e419f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 27 Sep 2022 12:31:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 094/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++--- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 86ebb7d5a9..0511b368be 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2474,9 +2474,8 @@ ACT 17 13 dijk figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using t ACT 17 13 wjq3 figs-doublet σαλεύοντες καὶ ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 troubled the crowds The terms **exciting** and **troubling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “greatly upsetting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 14 zw1c figs-explicitinfo ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 to go as far as to the sea It might seem that the expression **as far as to the sea** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “to the seacoast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) -ACT 17 15 tjh5 καθιστάνοντες τὸν Παῦλον 1 were leading Paul down Alternate translation: “who were accompanying Paul” or “who were going down with Paul” -ACT 17 15 vn8h translate-names Ἀθηνῶν 1 **Athens** is down the coast from Barea which is in Macedonia. Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 17 15 gs1p figs-quotations λαβόντες ἐντολὴν πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον 1 after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy This can also be stated as a direct quotation as in the UST. Alternate translation: “after telling them to command Silas and Timothy so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +ACT 17 15 vn8h translate-names Ἀθηνῶν 1 The word **Athens** is the name of one of the most important cities in ancient Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 15 gs1p figs-quotations πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον, ἵνα ὡς τάχιστα ἔλθωσιν πρὸς αὐτὸν, ἐξῄεσαν 1 after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “to Silas and Timothy, ‘Come to me as quickly as possible!’ they departed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 17 16 y9cr δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story. ACT 17 16 wk63 ἐν…ταῖς Ἀθήναις, ἐκδεχομένου αὐτοὺς τοῦ Παύλου 1 This is another part of the story of **Paul** and Silas’ travels. Paul is now in **Athens** where he is waiting for Silas and Timothy to join him. ACT 17 16 we78 figs-synecdoche παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν 1 his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols Here, **his spirit** stands for Paul himself. Alternate translation: “he was provoked because he saw that there were idols everywhere in the city” or “seeing the idols everywhere in the city, he was provoked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From 0ff8359e3eba781c6f09b960b2fa29a0ccddc9a0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 27 Sep 2022 12:34:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 095/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 +++++---- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 0511b368be..0fa785ddca 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2476,10 +2476,11 @@ ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the ACT 17 14 zw1c figs-explicitinfo ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 to go as far as to the sea It might seem that the expression **as far as to the sea** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “to the seacoast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 17 15 vn8h translate-names Ἀθηνῶν 1 The word **Athens** is the name of one of the most important cities in ancient Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 15 gs1p figs-quotations πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον, ἵνα ὡς τάχιστα ἔλθωσιν πρὸς αὐτὸν, ἐξῄεσαν 1 after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “to Silas and Timothy, ‘Come to me as quickly as possible!’ they departed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -ACT 17 16 y9cr δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story. -ACT 17 16 wk63 ἐν…ταῖς Ἀθήναις, ἐκδεχομένου αὐτοὺς τοῦ Παύλου 1 This is another part of the story of **Paul** and Silas’ travels. Paul is now in **Athens** where he is waiting for Silas and Timothy to join him. -ACT 17 16 we78 figs-synecdoche παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν 1 his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols Here, **his spirit** stands for Paul himself. Alternate translation: “he was provoked because he saw that there were idols everywhere in the city” or “seeing the idols everywhere in the city, he was provoked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 17 16 s011 figs-activepassive παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he became upset” or “the city upset him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 17 16 y9cr writing-background δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +ACT 17 16 wk63 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Silas and Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Silas and Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 17 16 u2th grammar-connect-logic-result παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “when he saw that the city was full of idols, his spirit was provoked within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +ACT 17 16 s011 figs-activepassive παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this provoked his spirit within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 17 16 we78 figs-metonymy παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols Here the **spirit** figuratively represents a person’s feelings and sensitivities, particularly of a spiritual nature. Alternate translation: “this offended his spiritual sensitivities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 17 q8px διελέγετο 1 he reasoned This phrase means that there is interaction from the listeners rather than only his preaching. They are talking with him as well. Alternate translation: “he debated” or “he discussed” ACT 17 17 jkj8 τοῖς σεβομένοις 1 those who were worshiping This refers to Gentiles (non-Jews) who give praise to God and follow him but do not obey all of the Jewish laws. ACT 17 17 ec14 ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 in the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “in the public square” From 959aeafb147fac5ad92ff22b64159e672082ab57 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 27 Sep 2022 12:36:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 096/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++--- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 0fa785ddca..b8128a3e02 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2481,9 +2481,8 @@ ACT 17 16 wk63 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to ACT 17 16 u2th grammar-connect-logic-result παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “when he saw that the city was full of idols, his spirit was provoked within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 17 16 s011 figs-activepassive παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this provoked his spirit within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 16 we78 figs-metonymy παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols Here the **spirit** figuratively represents a person’s feelings and sensitivities, particularly of a spiritual nature. Alternate translation: “this offended his spiritual sensitivities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 17 17 q8px διελέγετο 1 he reasoned This phrase means that there is interaction from the listeners rather than only his preaching. They are talking with him as well. Alternate translation: “he debated” or “he discussed” -ACT 17 17 jkj8 τοῖς σεβομένοις 1 those who were worshiping This refers to Gentiles (non-Jews) who give praise to God and follow him but do not obey all of the Jewish laws. -ACT 17 17 ec14 ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 in the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “in the public square” +ACT 17 17 jkj8 figs-idiom τοῖς σεβομένοις 1 those who were worshiping See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “the Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 17 17 ec14 translate-unknown ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 in the marketplace See how you translated the similar expression in [16:19](../16/19.md). Alternate translation: “in the public square” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 17 18 ru6a αὐτῷ…δοκεῖ…εὐηγγελίζετο 1 Here the words **him**, **He**, and **he** refer to Paul. ACT 17 18 l7le translate-names τῶν Ἐπικουρίων καὶ Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων 1 of the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers These people believed all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 18 f976 translate-names Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων 1 Stoic philosophers These **Stoic philosophers** believed freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From f1153af7515b63687253f279bb811c82b048754d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 27 Sep 2022 12:39:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 097/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 13 +++++-------- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index b8128a3e02..994edbb9bc 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2483,14 +2483,11 @@ ACT 17 16 s011 figs-activepassive παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐ ACT 17 16 we78 figs-metonymy παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols Here the **spirit** figuratively represents a person’s feelings and sensitivities, particularly of a spiritual nature. Alternate translation: “this offended his spiritual sensitivities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 17 jkj8 figs-idiom τοῖς σεβομένοις 1 those who were worshiping See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “the Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 17 17 ec14 translate-unknown ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 in the marketplace See how you translated the similar expression in [16:19](../16/19.md). Alternate translation: “in the public square” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 17 18 ru6a αὐτῷ…δοκεῖ…εὐηγγελίζετο 1 Here the words **him**, **He**, and **he** refer to Paul. -ACT 17 18 l7le translate-names τῶν Ἐπικουρίων καὶ Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων 1 of the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers These people believed all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 17 18 f976 translate-names Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων 1 Stoic philosophers These **Stoic philosophers** believed freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 17 18 dnj8 τινες ἔλεγον 1 some said Alternate translation: “some of the Stoic philosophers said” -ACT 17 18 g4bv figs-metaphor τί ἂν θέλοι ὁ σπερμολόγος οὗτος λέγειν? 1 What is this babbler wanting to say? The word **babbler** was used to refer to birds picking up seeds as food. It refers negatively to a person who only knows a little bit of information. The philosophers said Paul had bits of information which were not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “What is this uneducated person trying to say?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 18 k2ps οἱ δέ 1 But others said Alternate translation: “But other philosophers said” -ACT 17 18 l41t δοκεῖ καταγγελεὺς εἶναι 1 He seems to be a proclaimer Alternate translation: “He seems to be teaching a philosophy” -ACT 17 18 sx9t ξένων δαιμονίων 1 of foreign gods That is, **gods** that Greeks and Romans do not worship or know about. +ACT 17 18 ru6a writing-pronouns αὐτῷ…δοκεῖ…εὐηγγελίζετο 1 The pronouns **him**, **He**, and **he** all refer to Paul.It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with Paul…He seems…Paul was proclaiming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 17 18 l7le translate-names τῶν Ἐπικουρίων 1 of the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers The word **Epicurean** is the name of a certain kind of philosopher. Epicureans believed that all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 18 f976 translate-names Στοϊκῶν 1 Stoic philosophers The word **Stoic** is the name of another kind of philosopher. Stoics believed that freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 18 g4bv figs-idiom ὁ σπερμολόγος 1 What is this babbler wanting to say? These Athenian philosophers are using a common expression in their culture that refers negatively to a person who only knows little bits of information. The expression depicts a person picking up words or ideas the way a bird picks up seeds. The philosophers are saying that Paul has only a few bits of information that are not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “uneducated person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 18 sx9t figs-explicit ξένων δαιμονίων 1 of foreign gods Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the Athenian philosphers misunderstood Paul and thought that he was introducing two new **gods** that the Greeks and Romans had not known about before, Jesus and Anastasis (the Greek word for resurrection). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of two new gods, Jesus and Anastasis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 19 mv8c ἐπιλαβόμενοί τε αὐτοῦ, ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον ἤγαγον 1 And taking hold of him, they brought him to the Areopagus This does not mean they arrested Paul. The philosophers invited Paul to speak formally to their leaders. ACT 17 19 b56g figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 to the Areopagus The **Areopagus** was the place where the leaders met. Alternate translation: “to the leaders that met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 19 ze7e τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον…λέγοντες 1 the Areopagus, saying Here the leaders on the **Areopagus** are speaking. This can stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the Areopagus. The leaders said to Paul” From 9933a166d6b746d36ad55361f3810805efbd7a32 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 27 Sep 2022 12:41:55 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 098/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 +++---- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 994edbb9bc..d4b14f0315 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2488,10 +2488,9 @@ ACT 17 18 l7le translate-names τῶν Ἐπικουρίων 1 of the Epicurean ACT 17 18 f976 translate-names Στοϊκῶν 1 Stoic philosophers The word **Stoic** is the name of another kind of philosopher. Stoics believed that freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 18 g4bv figs-idiom ὁ σπερμολόγος 1 What is this babbler wanting to say? These Athenian philosophers are using a common expression in their culture that refers negatively to a person who only knows little bits of information. The expression depicts a person picking up words or ideas the way a bird picks up seeds. The philosophers are saying that Paul has only a few bits of information that are not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “uneducated person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 18 sx9t figs-explicit ξένων δαιμονίων 1 of foreign gods Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the Athenian philosphers misunderstood Paul and thought that he was introducing two new **gods** that the Greeks and Romans had not known about before, Jesus and Anastasis (the Greek word for resurrection). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of two new gods, Jesus and Anastasis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 17 19 mv8c ἐπιλαβόμενοί τε αὐτοῦ, ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον ἤγαγον 1 And taking hold of him, they brought him to the Areopagus This does not mean they arrested Paul. The philosophers invited Paul to speak formally to their leaders. -ACT 17 19 b56g figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 to the Areopagus The **Areopagus** was the place where the leaders met. Alternate translation: “to the leaders that met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 17 19 ze7e τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον…λέγοντες 1 the Areopagus, saying Here the leaders on the **Areopagus** are speaking. This can stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the Areopagus. The leaders said to Paul” -ACT 17 19 unc8 translate-names Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 Areopagus The **Areopagus** is a prominent rock outcropping or hill in Athens upon which the supreme court of Athens may have met. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 19 unc8 translate-names Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 Areopagus The word **Areopagus** is the name of a prominent rock outcropping or hill in Athens. It was a place where philosophers gathered in ancient Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 19 b56g figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 to the Areopagus Luke most likely means that the philosophers from the marketplace brought Paul to meet the main group of philosophers on the Areopagus, not that they just brought Paul to the hill itself. Luke would be using the word **Areopagus** figuratively by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. Alternate translation: “to the philosophers who met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 19 aciu figs-rquestion δυνάμεθα γνῶναι τίς ἡ καινὴ αὕτη, ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη, διδαχή? 1 This is not actually a rhetorical question, since the philosophers really do want to know whether Paul is willing to explain himself more fully to the group at the Areopagus. However, if in your language it might seem to be a rhetorical question, you could translate it as a statement instead. Alternate translation: “We would like to know what this new teaching is that is being spoken by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 17 20 lay8 figs-metaphor ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 For you are bringing some strange things to our ears Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection are spoken of as an object that a person can bring to another person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 20 fs5g figs-exclusive βουλόμεθα 1 Here the word **we** refers to the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 20 us7g figs-metonymy ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 Here, **ears** refers to what they hear. Alternate translation: “For you are teaching some things that we have never heard before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 93e4ef676510e2fdfc94f0b82599912f6806f1fd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 27 Sep 2022 12:43:43 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 099/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d4b14f0315..16df860f6a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2491,6 +2491,8 @@ ACT 17 18 sx9t figs-explicit ξένων δαιμονίων 1 of foreign gods Luk ACT 17 19 unc8 translate-names Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 Areopagus The word **Areopagus** is the name of a prominent rock outcropping or hill in Athens. It was a place where philosophers gathered in ancient Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 19 b56g figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 to the Areopagus Luke most likely means that the philosophers from the marketplace brought Paul to meet the main group of philosophers on the Areopagus, not that they just brought Paul to the hill itself. Luke would be using the word **Areopagus** figuratively by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. Alternate translation: “to the philosophers who met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 19 aciu figs-rquestion δυνάμεθα γνῶναι τίς ἡ καινὴ αὕτη, ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη, διδαχή? 1 This is not actually a rhetorical question, since the philosophers really do want to know whether Paul is willing to explain himself more fully to the group at the Areopagus. However, if in your language it might seem to be a rhetorical question, you could translate it as a statement instead. Alternate translation: “We would like to know what this new teaching is that is being spoken by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 17 19 g9gb figs-exclusive δυνάμεθα 1 By **we**, the philosophers mean themselves, but Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 17 19 n250 figs-activepassive ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you are speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 20 lay8 figs-metaphor ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 For you are bringing some strange things to our ears Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection are spoken of as an object that a person can bring to another person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 20 fs5g figs-exclusive βουλόμεθα 1 Here the word **we** refers to the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 20 us7g figs-metonymy ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 Here, **ears** refers to what they hear. Alternate translation: “For you are teaching some things that we have never heard before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 1f4336f14b289e03028256e62549a2a95de400aa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 27 Sep 2022 12:45:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 100/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 16df860f6a..698dd3dfa0 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2493,9 +2493,10 @@ ACT 17 19 b56g figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 to the ACT 17 19 aciu figs-rquestion δυνάμεθα γνῶναι τίς ἡ καινὴ αὕτη, ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη, διδαχή? 1 This is not actually a rhetorical question, since the philosophers really do want to know whether Paul is willing to explain himself more fully to the group at the Areopagus. However, if in your language it might seem to be a rhetorical question, you could translate it as a statement instead. Alternate translation: “We would like to know what this new teaching is that is being spoken by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 17 19 g9gb figs-exclusive δυνάμεθα 1 By **we**, the philosophers mean themselves, but Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 19 n250 figs-activepassive ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you are speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 17 20 lay8 figs-metaphor ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 For you are bringing some strange things to our ears Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection are spoken of as an object that a person can bring to another person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 20 fs5g figs-exclusive βουλόμεθα 1 Here the word **we** refers to the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 17 20 us7g figs-metonymy ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 Here, **ears** refers to what they hear. Alternate translation: “For you are teaching some things that we have never heard before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 20 lay8 figs-metaphor ξενίζοντα…τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 For you are bringing some strange things to our ears The philosophers are speaking figuratively of Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection as if they were objets that one person could bring to another person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are saying some startling things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 20 us7g figs-metonymy ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 The philosophers are referring figuratively to hearing by association with the **ears** that people use to hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are hearing you say some startling things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 20 fs5g figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…βουλόμεθα 1 By **our** and **we**, the philosophers mean themselves, but Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 17 20 fe4p figs-idiom τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι 1 The philosophers are using an idiom. Your language may have a similar idiom that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what these things mean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 17 21 dn1t figs-hyperbole Ἀθηναῖοι δὲ πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι 1 And all the Athenians and the foreigners living there The word **all** is a generalization referring to many. Alternate translation: “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” or “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 21 d8yb translate-names Ἀθηναῖοι 1 the Athenians Here, **the Athenians** are people from Athens, a city near the coast below Macedonia (present day Greece). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 21 sk5b figs-metaphor εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν, ἢ λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν 1 spent their time in nothing other than either to tell something or to listen to Here, **time** is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “used their time doing nothing but either telling or listening to” or “were always doing nothing but telling or listening to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 64f487d1845f655d2e9b01aced54960100172f66 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Tue, 27 Sep 2022 12:48:59 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 101/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 698dd3dfa0..8d9bbe1fb7 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2497,11 +2497,11 @@ ACT 17 20 lay8 figs-metaphor ξενίζοντα…τινα εἰσφέρεις ACT 17 20 us7g figs-metonymy ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 The philosophers are referring figuratively to hearing by association with the **ears** that people use to hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are hearing you say some startling things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 20 fs5g figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…βουλόμεθα 1 By **our** and **we**, the philosophers mean themselves, but Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 20 fe4p figs-idiom τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι 1 The philosophers are using an idiom. Your language may have a similar idiom that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what these things mean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 17 21 dn1t figs-hyperbole Ἀθηναῖοι δὲ πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι 1 And all the Athenians and the foreigners living there The word **all** is a generalization referring to many. Alternate translation: “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” or “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 17 21 d8yb translate-names Ἀθηναῖοι 1 the Athenians Here, **the Athenians** are people from Athens, a city near the coast below Macedonia (present day Greece). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 17 21 sk5b figs-metaphor εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν, ἢ λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν 1 spent their time in nothing other than either to tell something or to listen to Here, **time** is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “used their time doing nothing but either telling or listening to” or “were always doing nothing but telling or listening to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 21 ij4e figs-hyperbole εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν 1 spent their time in nothing other than The phrase **spent their time in nothing** is an exaggeration. Alternate translation: “did not do much but” or “spent much of their time only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 17 21 wr1r λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν τι καινότερον 1 to tell something or to listen to something new Alternate translation: “discussing new philosophical ideas” or “talking about what was new to them” +ACT 17 21 ujgi writing-background δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce background information about the people of Athens that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 17 21 dn1t figs-hyperbole Ἀθηναῖοι…πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι…ηὐκαίρουν 1 And all the Athenians and the foreigners living there Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Athenians and the sojourning foreigners loved to devote their leisure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 17 21 d8yb translate-names Ἀθηναῖοι 1 the Athenians The word ** Athenians** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 21 ij4e figs-hyperbole εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν 1 spent their time in nothing other than Here, Luke says **nothing other** as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were devoting great amounts of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 17 21 wr1r figs-explicit τι καινότερον 1 to tell something or to listen to something new This could mean: (1) that the implication is that the Athenians were looking for something **newer** than the last new thing they had said or heard. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “something newer than the last new thing they had said or heard” (2) that Luke may be using the comparative form **newer** with simple positive meaning. Alternate translation: “something new” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 22 zq3y ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι, κατὰ πάντα ὡς δεισιδαιμονεστέρους ὑμᾶς θεωρῶ 1 Paul begins his speech to the philosophers on the Areopagus. ACT 17 22 ja1k κατὰ πάντα…δεισιδαιμονεστέρους 1 very religious in every way Paul is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices. ACT 17 23 gn1j διερχόμενος γὰρ 1 For passing through Alternate translation: “Because as I was walked through” or “As I was walking along” From 80edd62b58c88381cfa86077964f571d3693cf73 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 13:28:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 102/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 38 +++++++++++++------------------------- 1 file changed, 13 insertions(+), 25 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 48d8cc860d..55d89d810a 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1023,34 +1023,22 @@ MAT 14 3 zgp9 writing-background γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: From here until MAT 14 3 zsvz grammar-connect-logic-result For Herod, having arrested John, bound him, and put him in prison because of Herodias, the wife of Philip, his brother 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of Herodias, Herod's brother's wife, John was arrested, bound, and thrown into prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) MAT 14 3 d3gp grammar-connect-time-sequential ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” The events described by **arrested**, **bound** and **put in prison** happened in that order. Make sure this is understandable to your audience. Alternate translation: “For Herod first arrested him. Then he bound him and then threw him and prison” MAT 14 3 h466 figs-metonymy ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For Herod, having arrested John, bound him, and put him in prison Jesus is using the term **Herod** figuratively to mean the soldiers who work for him. Alternate translation: “Herod sent his soldiers to arrest John, bind him, and throw him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 14 3 lr92 translate-names τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου 1 the wife of Philip **Philip** was Herod’s brother, and the name of a man. Herod had taken Philip’s wife to be his own **wife**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MAT 14 3 lr92 translate-names τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου 1 the wife of Philip **Philip** was Herod’s brother, and the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 14 4 n1t6 figs-quotations ἔλεγεν γὰρ αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰωάννης, οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν αὐτήν. 1 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “For John was saying that it was not lawful for him to have her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MAT 14 6 fvs5 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ μέσῳ 1 in the midst If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express who she was dancing **in the midst** of explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the midst of the guests attending the birthday celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 14 6 vdik translate-unknown 1 -MAT 14 8 rhk5 figs-activepassive ἡ δὲ προβιβασθεῖσα ὑπὸ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτῆς 1 But having being urged beforehand by her mother If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But after her mother instructed her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 14 8 wi8s ἡ δὲ προβιβασθεῖσα 1 But having being urged beforehand Alternate translation: “But having been coached beforehand” -MAT 14 8 ya5z φησίν 1 she said Alternate translation: “the daughter of Herodias said to Herod” -MAT 14 8 ruy4 πίνακι 1 a platter A **platter** is a very large plate used for serving food. -MAT 14 9 s8zp figs-activepassive καὶ ἐλυπήθη ὁ βασιλεὺς 1 And the king, having been grieved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And although her request made the king very upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 14 9 a1er ὁ βασιλεὺς 1 The king Alternate translation: “King Herod” -MAT 14 9 j6nu figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν δοθῆναι 1 commanded it to be granted to her If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “ordered his men to do what she said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 14 6 vdik translate-unknown γενεσίοις δὲ γενομένοις τοῦ Ἡρῴδου 1 In some cultures, people celebrate the day that someone was born. If your readers would not understand the word **birthday**, you can state what it means explicitly. Alternate translation: “And they were celebrating Herod's birthday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 14 8 rhk5 figs-activepassive ἡ δὲ προβιβασθεῖσα ὑπὸ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτῆς 1 But having being urged beforehand by her mother If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Now her mother urged her beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 14 8 ruy4 translate-unknown πίνακι 1 a platter If your readers would not understand the word **platter**, you can state what it means explicitly. Alternate translation: “a large plate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 14 9 s8zp figs-activepassive καὶ ἐλυπήθη ὁ βασιλεὺς 1 And the king, having been grieved If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The king grieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 14 9 j6nu figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν δοθῆναι 1 commanded it to be granted to her If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “Herod” did it. Alternate translation: “Herod commanded that it be given too her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 14 11 nd5r figs-activepassive ἠνέχθη ἡ κεφαλὴ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ πίνακι, καὶ ἐδόθη τῷ κορασίῳ 1 his head was brought on a platter and given to the girl If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone brought his head on a platter and gave it to the girl” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 14 11 pba6 πίνακι 1 a platter A **platter** is a very large plate used for serving food. See how you translated this in verse [8](../14/08.md). -MAT 14 11 lqb6 τῷ κορασίῳ 1 to the girl Translate **girl** with the word for a young, unmarried girl. -MAT 14 12 fl47 οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his disciples Alternate translation: “the disciples of John” -MAT 14 12 ni1q τὸ πτῶμα 1 the corpse Alternate translation: “the dead body” -MAT 14 12 mq89 figs-explicit ἐλθόντες, ἀπήγγειλαν τῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 having come, they reported it to Jesus The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the disciples of John went and told Jesus what had happened to John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 14 13 id97 writing-background 0 General Information: Verses 13-14 give background information about the miracle that Jesus is about to perform by feeding five thousand people in verses [15-21](..\\14\\15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MAT 14 13 ds5w δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. -MAT 14 13 dvq4 ἀκούσας 1 having heard this Alternate translation: “having heard what happened to John” or “having heard the news about John” -MAT 14 13 ia39 figs-explicit ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν 1 Jesus withdrew It is implied that Jesus’ disciples went with him. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 14 13 zlh8 ἐκεῖθεν 1 from there Alternate translation: “from that place” -MAT 14 13 i7uu καὶ ἀκούσαντες, οἱ ὄχλοι 1 And having heard of it, the crowds Alternate translation: “And when the crowds heard where Jesus had gone, they” or “And when the crowds heard that he had left, they” -MAT 14 13 u6nr οἱ ὄχλοι 1 the crowds Alternate translation: “the crowds of people” or “the huge group of people” or “the people” -MAT 14 13 ipm9 figs-idiom πεζῇ 1 on foot Here, **on foot** means that the people in the crowd were walking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 14 14 d8n3 καὶ ἐξελθὼν 1 And having come out Alternate translation: “And when Jesus came ashore” -MAT 14 15 gcu9 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus feeding five thousand people with only five small loaves of bread and two small fish. -MAT 14 15 xa7n προσῆλθον αὐτῷ οἱ μαθηταὶ 1 the disciples came to him Alternate translation: “Jesus’ disciples came to him” +MAT 14 11 pba6 πίνακι 1 a platter See how you translated **platter** in verse [14:8](../14/08.md). +MAT 14 12 mq89 figs-explicit ἐλθόντες, ἀπήγγειλαν τῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 having come, they reported it to Jesus If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the disciples of John went and told Jesus what had happened to John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 14 13 id97 writing-background ἀκούσας δὲ, ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν ἐκεῖθεν ἐν πλοίῳ εἰς ἔρημον τόπον κατ’ ἰδίαν 1 General Information: Here, Matthew is providing the reader with background information for what Jesus is about to do. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “After hearing about this, Jesus was going away from there in a boat to a desert place by himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MAT 14 13 ia39 figs-explicit ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν 1 Jesus withdrew Matthew implies here that the disciples were traveling with Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 14 13 ipm9 figs-idiom πεζῇ 1 on foot Here, **on foot** is an idiom meaning “walked.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “walking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 14 14 d8n3 καὶ ἐξελθὼν 1 And having come out Alternate translation: “And when Jesus got off the boat” +MAT 14 15 otp3 figs-idiom ἡ ὥρα ἤδη παρῆλθεν 1 This phrase means it was late in the day. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “it is already late in the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 14 16 qwk1 οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν 1 They have no need Alternate translation: “It is not necessary for the people in the crowd” MAT 14 16 r5gd figs-you δότε αὐτοῖς ὑμεῖς 1 You give them The word **You** is plural, referring to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 14 17 tm5t οἱ δὲ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ 1 But they say to him Alternate translation: “But the disciples said to Jesus” From 51f0ce6e3dea744f72a7c7489ca36e93ce24f30e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 13:51:43 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 103/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 5 +---- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 55d89d810a..b8284b5383 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1039,11 +1039,8 @@ MAT 14 13 ia39 figs-explicit ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν 1 Jesus wi MAT 14 13 ipm9 figs-idiom πεζῇ 1 on foot Here, **on foot** is an idiom meaning “walked.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “walking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 14 14 d8n3 καὶ ἐξελθὼν 1 And having come out Alternate translation: “And when Jesus got off the boat” MAT 14 15 otp3 figs-idiom ἡ ὥρα ἤδη παρῆλθεν 1 This phrase means it was late in the day. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “it is already late in the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 14 16 qwk1 οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν 1 They have no need Alternate translation: “It is not necessary for the people in the crowd” MAT 14 16 r5gd figs-you δότε αὐτοῖς ὑμεῖς 1 You give them The word **You** is plural, referring to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 14 17 tm5t οἱ δὲ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ 1 But they say to him Alternate translation: “But the disciples said to Jesus” -MAT 14 17 ih48 πέντε ἄρτους 1 five loaves A loaf of bread is a lump of dough that is shaped and baked. -MAT 14 18 szx6 φέρετέ μοι ὧδε αὐτούς 1 Bring them here to me Alternate translation: “Bring the loaves and fish to me” +MAT 14 17 ih48 grammar-connect-exceptions πέντε ἄρτους 1 five loaves If it would appear in your language that the disciples are making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “we only have five loaves and two fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])\n MAT 14 19 vp7r ἀνακλιθῆναι 1 to recline Use the verb for the position people in your culture usually are in when they eat. Alternate translation: “lie down” or “sit down” MAT 14 19 u613 figs-idiom λαβὼν 1 he took This does not mean that he stole them. Alternate translation: “he held in his hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 14 19 i34u κλάσας, ἔδωκεν…τοὺς ἄρτους 1 having broken it, he gave the loaves Alternate translation: “after tearing the loaves into pieces, he gave them” From 858d21ca0d3c337c5e4dbd173230e78a8ddfc3aa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 14:19:41 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 104/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 8d9bbe1fb7..1f0e96b85a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2434,7 +2434,7 @@ ACT 16 40 t1pf figs-go εἰσῆλθον 1 they came to the house of Lydia In a ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had seen the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 40 qs0x figs-synecdoche καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Luke says that **they … went out**, meaning Paul and Silas, to refer to those two men and to Timothy, who was still traveling with them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and then Paul and Silas and Timothy left Philippi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 40 gld6 figs-explicit καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Since Luke says **they … went out**, not “we went out,” the implication is that Luke remained in Philippi for a time, likely to strengthen and encourage the new believers there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 17 intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Misunderstandings about the Messiah

The Jews expected the Christ or Messiah to be a powerful king because the Old Testament says so many times. But it also says many times that the Messiah would suffer, and that was what Paul was telling the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### The religion of Athens

Paul said that the Athenians were “religious,” but they did not worship the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples and begun to worship the gods of the people they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

In this chapter Luke describes for the first time how Paul told the message of Christ to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament. +ACT 17 intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes\n\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n\n- Verses 1–9 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Thessalonica.\n- Verses 10–14 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Berea.\nVerses 15–34 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Athens.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\n### The religion of Athens\n\n\n\nPaul said that the people in the city of Athens were “religious,” but this did not mean that they worshiped the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples, and they had begun to worship the gods of the peoples they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])\n\n\n\nAs Paul spoke to the philosophers in Athens, he told the message of Christ for the first time to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.\n ACT 17 1 e4w5 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 17 1 kll1 translate-names τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν 1 Amphipolis and Apollonia The words **Amphipolis** and **Apollonia** are the names of coastal cities in the Roman province of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 1 yj66 translate-names Θεσσαλονίκην 1 they came to Thessalonica The word **Thessalonica** is the name of another city on the coast of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2488,7 +2488,7 @@ ACT 17 18 l7le translate-names τῶν Ἐπικουρίων 1 of the Epicurean ACT 17 18 f976 translate-names Στοϊκῶν 1 Stoic philosophers The word **Stoic** is the name of another kind of philosopher. Stoics believed that freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 18 g4bv figs-idiom ὁ σπερμολόγος 1 What is this babbler wanting to say? These Athenian philosophers are using a common expression in their culture that refers negatively to a person who only knows little bits of information. The expression depicts a person picking up words or ideas the way a bird picks up seeds. The philosophers are saying that Paul has only a few bits of information that are not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “uneducated person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 18 sx9t figs-explicit ξένων δαιμονίων 1 of foreign gods Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the Athenian philosphers misunderstood Paul and thought that he was introducing two new **gods** that the Greeks and Romans had not known about before, Jesus and Anastasis (the Greek word for resurrection). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of two new gods, Jesus and Anastasis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 17 19 unc8 translate-names Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 Areopagus The word **Areopagus** is the name of a prominent rock outcropping or hill in Athens. It was a place where philosophers gathered in ancient Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 19 unc8 translate-transliterate Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 Areopagus The word **Areopagus** means “Hill of Ares” in Greek. It was named after the pagan god whose name was Ares in Greek and Mars in Latin. Luke does not explain the meaning of this word, since his readers already understand Greek. ULT spells this name the way it sounds in English. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. You could also translate the meaning of the word and use the name “Mars Hill,” as UST does. Or you could spell the word the way it sounds and then explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Mars Hill” or “the Areopagus, that is, Mars Hill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) ACT 17 19 b56g figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 to the Areopagus Luke most likely means that the philosophers from the marketplace brought Paul to meet the main group of philosophers on the Areopagus, not that they just brought Paul to the hill itself. Luke would be using the word **Areopagus** figuratively by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. Alternate translation: “to the philosophers who met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 19 aciu figs-rquestion δυνάμεθα γνῶναι τίς ἡ καινὴ αὕτη, ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη, διδαχή? 1 This is not actually a rhetorical question, since the philosophers really do want to know whether Paul is willing to explain himself more fully to the group at the Areopagus. However, if in your language it might seem to be a rhetorical question, you could translate it as a statement instead. Alternate translation: “We would like to know what this new teaching is that is being spoken by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 17 19 g9gb figs-exclusive δυνάμεθα 1 By **we**, the philosophers mean themselves, but Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 47385e820610abae92377dfe247f17827d917cdf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 14:24:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 105/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 1f0e96b85a..8f76d8e97c 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2502,8 +2502,8 @@ ACT 17 21 dn1t figs-hyperbole Ἀθηναῖοι…πάντες καὶ οἱ ACT 17 21 d8yb translate-names Ἀθηναῖοι 1 the Athenians The word ** Athenians** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 21 ij4e figs-hyperbole εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν 1 spent their time in nothing other than Here, Luke says **nothing other** as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were devoting great amounts of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 21 wr1r figs-explicit τι καινότερον 1 to tell something or to listen to something new This could mean: (1) that the implication is that the Athenians were looking for something **newer** than the last new thing they had said or heard. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “something newer than the last new thing they had said or heard” (2) that Luke may be using the comparative form **newer** with simple positive meaning. Alternate translation: “something new” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 17 22 zq3y ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι, κατὰ πάντα ὡς δεισιδαιμονεστέρους ὑμᾶς θεωρῶ 1 Paul begins his speech to the philosophers on the Areopagus. -ACT 17 22 ja1k κατὰ πάντα…δεισιδαιμονεστέρους 1 very religious in every way Paul is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices. +ACT 17 22 zq3y figs-metonymy ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου 1 As in [17:19](../17/19.md), Luke is the word **Areopagus** figuratively by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. He does not mean that the philosophers placed Paul in the middle of the hill known as the Areopagus. Alternate translation: “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on the Areopagus” or “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on Mars Hill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 22 ja1k figs-hyperbole κατὰ πάντα 1 very religious in every way Paul says **everything** here as a generalization for emphasis. He is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many different ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 23 gn1j διερχόμενος γὰρ 1 For passing through Alternate translation: “Because as I was walked through” or “As I was walking along” ACT 17 23 cem7 ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 To an Unknown God This could mean: (1) “to a certain unknown god” or (2) “to a god not known.” This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar. ACT 17 24 m1jm τὸν κόσμον 1 the world In the most general sense, the **world** refers to the heavens and the earth and everything in them. From a2cec02dd4781b6c20f5685eba586d5866cbee5c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 14:25:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 106/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 8f76d8e97c..98205a63fe 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2502,7 +2502,9 @@ ACT 17 21 dn1t figs-hyperbole Ἀθηναῖοι…πάντες καὶ οἱ ACT 17 21 d8yb translate-names Ἀθηναῖοι 1 the Athenians The word ** Athenians** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 21 ij4e figs-hyperbole εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν 1 spent their time in nothing other than Here, Luke says **nothing other** as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were devoting great amounts of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 21 wr1r figs-explicit τι καινότερον 1 to tell something or to listen to something new This could mean: (1) that the implication is that the Athenians were looking for something **newer** than the last new thing they had said or heard. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “something newer than the last new thing they had said or heard” (2) that Luke may be using the comparative form **newer** with simple positive meaning. Alternate translation: “something new” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 17 22 k5dy figs-activepassive σταθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου ἔφη 1 If your language does not use the passive form **having been stood**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once the philosophers had stood Paul in the middle of the Areopagus, he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 22 zq3y figs-metonymy ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου 1 As in [17:19](../17/19.md), Luke is the word **Areopagus** figuratively by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. He does not mean that the philosophers placed Paul in the middle of the hill known as the Areopagus. Alternate translation: “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on the Areopagus” or “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on Mars Hill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 22 h5et figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You Athenians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 17 22 ja1k figs-hyperbole κατὰ πάντα 1 very religious in every way Paul says **everything** here as a generalization for emphasis. He is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many different ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 23 gn1j διερχόμενος γὰρ 1 For passing through Alternate translation: “Because as I was walked through” or “As I was walking along” ACT 17 23 cem7 ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 To an Unknown God This could mean: (1) “to a certain unknown god” or (2) “to a god not known.” This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar. From 425da89eac1f71573560472399d8398dc101c5e1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 14:26:48 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 107/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 98205a63fe..72baa28c35 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2505,6 +2505,7 @@ ACT 17 21 wr1r figs-explicit τι καινότερον 1 to tell something or to ACT 17 22 k5dy figs-activepassive σταθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου ἔφη 1 If your language does not use the passive form **having been stood**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once the philosophers had stood Paul in the middle of the Areopagus, he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 22 zq3y figs-metonymy ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου 1 As in [17:19](../17/19.md), Luke is the word **Areopagus** figuratively by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. He does not mean that the philosophers placed Paul in the middle of the hill known as the Areopagus. Alternate translation: “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on the Areopagus” or “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on Mars Hill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 22 h5et figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You Athenians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 17 22 kcag δεισιδαιμονεστέρους 1 Paul is using the comparative form **more religious** for emphasis. Your language may use comparative forms in the same way. If not, you could convey the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “very religious” ACT 17 22 ja1k figs-hyperbole κατὰ πάντα 1 very religious in every way Paul says **everything** here as a generalization for emphasis. He is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many different ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 23 gn1j διερχόμενος γὰρ 1 For passing through Alternate translation: “Because as I was walked through” or “As I was walking along” ACT 17 23 cem7 ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 To an Unknown God This could mean: (1) “to a certain unknown god” or (2) “to a god not known.” This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar. From c03efbb95df2b583c44e2fa8bd6eab74c321d9fa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 14:29:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 108/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 12 ++++-------- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index b8284b5383..1989d27120 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1041,14 +1041,10 @@ MAT 14 14 d8n3 καὶ ἐξελθὼν 1 And having come out Alternate transla MAT 14 15 otp3 figs-idiom ἡ ὥρα ἤδη παρῆλθεν 1 This phrase means it was late in the day. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “it is already late in the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 14 16 r5gd figs-you δότε αὐτοῖς ὑμεῖς 1 You give them The word **You** is plural, referring to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 14 17 ih48 grammar-connect-exceptions πέντε ἄρτους 1 five loaves If it would appear in your language that the disciples are making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “we only have five loaves and two fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])\n -MAT 14 19 vp7r ἀνακλιθῆναι 1 to recline Use the verb for the position people in your culture usually are in when they eat. Alternate translation: “lie down” or “sit down” -MAT 14 19 u613 figs-idiom λαβὼν 1 he took This does not mean that he stole them. Alternate translation: “he held in his hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 14 19 i34u κλάσας, ἔδωκεν…τοὺς ἄρτους 1 having broken it, he gave the loaves Alternate translation: “after tearing the loaves into pieces, he gave them” -MAT 14 19 bf1a τοὺς ἄρτους 1 the loaves Alternate translation: “the pieces of the loaves of bread” -MAT 14 19 t7ei ἀναβλέψας 1 Having looked up This could refer to: (1) while they were looking up. (2) after they looked up. -MAT 14 20 l2h8 figs-activepassive καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν 1 and were filled If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until they were full” or “until they were no longer hungry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 14 20 p73g ἦραν 1 they took up Alternate translation: “the disciples gathered up” or “some people gathered up” -MAT 14 21 wv59 οἱ δὲ ἐσθίοντες 1 Now those eating Alternate translation: “Now those who ate the bread and the fish” +MAT 14 19 i34u translate-symaction ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 having broken it, he gave the loaves Here, **looked up to heaven** is symbolic for praying that God would provide enough food for the crowd. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +MAT 14 19 bf1a figs-ellipsis εὐλόγησεν καὶ κλάσας 1 the loaves Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he blessed them, and having broken the food into pieces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 14 19 t7ei figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις 1 Having looked up Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the disciples gave the loaves to the crowds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 14 20 l2h8 figs-activepassive καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν 1 and were filled If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “until they were full” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 14 21 als7 translate-numbers ἄνδρες…πεντακισχίλιοι 1 5,000 men Alternate translation: “five thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 14 22 yp8l 0 General Information: Verses 22-24 give background information about the miracle that Jesus is about to perform of walking on water. MAT 14 22 wt1t καὶ εὐθέως ἠνάγκασεν 1 And immediately he made Alternate translation: “And as soon as Jesus had finished feeding all the people, he made” From 3698e3209c180f3c7503ff3e1a721dde125b252a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 15:48:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 109/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 72baa28c35..4d72f06985 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2507,8 +2507,9 @@ ACT 17 22 zq3y figs-metonymy ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου 1 ACT 17 22 h5et figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You Athenians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 17 22 kcag δεισιδαιμονεστέρους 1 Paul is using the comparative form **more religious** for emphasis. Your language may use comparative forms in the same way. If not, you could convey the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “very religious” ACT 17 22 ja1k figs-hyperbole κατὰ πάντα 1 very religious in every way Paul says **everything** here as a generalization for emphasis. He is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many different ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 17 23 gn1j διερχόμενος γὰρ 1 For passing through Alternate translation: “Because as I was walked through” or “As I was walking along” -ACT 17 23 cem7 ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 To an Unknown God This could mean: (1) “to a certain unknown god” or (2) “to a god not known.” This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar. +ACT 17 23 cem7 figs-quotesinquotes βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 To an Unknown God While it would be preferable to present this as a direct quotation (see next note), you could translate this as an indirect quotation so that there is not one direct quotation within another. Alternate translation: “an altar whose inscription dedicated it to an unknown god” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +ACT 17 23 nmwv figs-quotemarks βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this as a direct quotation if possible, since it is the inscription on the altar that Paul is describing. You may be able to enclose this quotation in second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate a second-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +ACT 17 23 t3mu figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “on which someone had inscribed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 24 m1jm τὸν κόσμον 1 the world In the most general sense, the **world** refers to the heavens and the earth and everything in them. ACT 17 24 rqk9 οὗτος…ὑπάρχων Κύριος 1 he who is Lord Here, **he** is referring to the unknown god mentioned in [Acts 17:23](../17/23.md) that Paul is explaining is the Lord God. Alternate translation: “because the one who is Lord” ACT 17 24 f2mz figs-merism οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς 1 of heaven and earth The words **heaven** and **earth** are used together to mean all beings and things in heaven and earth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) From fde1da984b2d60ac778a4fbfbe2018403be79b64 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 15:48:48 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 110/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 1989d27120..1d99a1cac9 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1017,12 +1017,12 @@ MAT 13 57 w4x8 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 in his own MAT 13 58 e2cp grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ οὐκ ἐποίησεν ἐκεῖ δυνάμεις πολλὰς, διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν 1 he did not do many miracles there If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since they did not believe, Jesus did not do many miracles in that place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])\n MAT 14 intro g5mc 0 # Matthew 14 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verses 1 and 2 continue the account from chapter 13. Verses 3-12 stop the account and speak of things that happened earlier, possibly soon after Satan tempted Jesus (see [4:12](../mat/04/12.md)). Verse 13 continues the account from verse 2. Be sure to have words in verses 3-12 that tell the reader that Matthew has stopped his account to give new information before he continues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. For example, the writer does not tell who brought John’s head to Herodias’s daughter ([14:11](../mat/14/11.md)). You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 14 2 pd1b figs-quotesinquotes καὶ εἶπεν τοῖς παισὶν αὐτοῦ, οὗτός ἐστιν Ἰωάννης ὁ Βαπτιστής; αὐτὸς ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο αἱ δυνάμεις ἐνεργοῦσιν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 he said If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And he said to his servants that this is John the Baptist, and that he has been raised from the dead. Because of this, great powers are working in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])\n -MAT 14 2 nx7x figs-activepassive ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 has been raised from the dead If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 14 2 nx7x figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 has been raised from the dead If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 14 2 vve7 figs-personification διὰ τοῦτο αἱ δυνάμεις ἐνεργοῦσιν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 because of this, miraculous powers are at work in him Jesus speaks of **the miraculous powers** figuratively as if it were a living thing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This is why God has given him great power to do miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) MAT 14 3 zgp9 writing-background γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: From here until [14:12](../14/12.md), Jesus gives the reader background information explaining why Herod said that John was raised from the dead. He is explaining how John died. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “For John died in this way:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MAT 14 3 zsvz grammar-connect-logic-result For Herod, having arrested John, bound him, and put him in prison because of Herodias, the wife of Philip, his brother 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of Herodias, Herod's brother's wife, John was arrested, bound, and thrown into prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +MAT 14 3 zsvz grammar-connect-logic-result ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of Herodias, Herod's brother's wife, John was arrested, bound, and thrown into prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) MAT 14 3 d3gp grammar-connect-time-sequential ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” The events described by **arrested**, **bound** and **put in prison** happened in that order. Make sure this is understandable to your audience. Alternate translation: “For Herod first arrested him. Then he bound him and then threw him and prison” -MAT 14 3 h466 figs-metonymy ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For Herod, having arrested John, bound him, and put him in prison Jesus is using the term **Herod** figuratively to mean the soldiers who work for him. Alternate translation: “Herod sent his soldiers to arrest John, bind him, and throw him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 14 3 h466 figs-metonymy ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For Herod, having arrested John, bound him, and put him in prison Jesus is using the term **Herod** figuratively to mean the soldiers who work for him. If it would be helpful to your reader, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Herod sent his soldiers to arrest John, bind him, and throw him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 14 3 lr92 translate-names τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου 1 the wife of Philip **Philip** was Herod’s brother, and the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 14 4 n1t6 figs-quotations ἔλεγεν γὰρ αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰωάννης, οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν αὐτήν. 1 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “For John was saying that it was not lawful for him to have her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MAT 14 6 fvs5 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ μέσῳ 1 in the midst If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express who she was dancing **in the midst** of explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the midst of the guests attending the birthday celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1030,12 +1030,12 @@ MAT 14 6 vdik translate-unknown γενεσίοις δὲ γενομένοις τ MAT 14 8 rhk5 figs-activepassive ἡ δὲ προβιβασθεῖσα ὑπὸ τῆς μητρὸς αὐτῆς 1 But having being urged beforehand by her mother If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Now her mother urged her beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 14 8 ruy4 translate-unknown πίνακι 1 a platter If your readers would not understand the word **platter**, you can state what it means explicitly. Alternate translation: “a large plate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 14 9 s8zp figs-activepassive καὶ ἐλυπήθη ὁ βασιλεὺς 1 And the king, having been grieved If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The king grieved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 14 9 j6nu figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν δοθῆναι 1 commanded it to be granted to her If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “Herod” did it. Alternate translation: “Herod commanded that it be given too her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 14 9 j6nu figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν δοθῆναι 1 commanded it to be granted to her If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “Herod” did it. Alternate translation: “Herod commanded that it be given to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 14 11 nd5r figs-activepassive ἠνέχθη ἡ κεφαλὴ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ πίνακι, καὶ ἐδόθη τῷ κορασίῳ 1 his head was brought on a platter and given to the girl If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone brought his head on a platter and gave it to the girl” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 14 11 pba6 πίνακι 1 a platter See how you translated **platter** in verse [14:8](../14/08.md). MAT 14 12 mq89 figs-explicit ἐλθόντες, ἀπήγγειλαν τῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 having come, they reported it to Jesus If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the disciples of John went and told Jesus what had happened to John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 14 13 id97 writing-background ἀκούσας δὲ, ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν ἐκεῖθεν ἐν πλοίῳ εἰς ἔρημον τόπον κατ’ ἰδίαν 1 General Information: Here, Matthew is providing the reader with background information for what Jesus is about to do. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “After hearing about this, Jesus was going away from there in a boat to a desert place by himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MAT 14 13 ia39 figs-explicit ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν 1 Jesus withdrew Matthew implies here that the disciples were traveling with Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 14 13 ia39 figs-explicit ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 Jesus withdrew Matthew implies here that the disciples were traveling with Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 14 13 ipm9 figs-idiom πεζῇ 1 on foot Here, **on foot** is an idiom meaning “walked.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “walking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 14 14 d8n3 καὶ ἐξελθὼν 1 And having come out Alternate translation: “And when Jesus got off the boat” MAT 14 15 otp3 figs-idiom ἡ ὥρα ἤδη παρῆλθεν 1 This phrase means it was late in the day. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “it is already late in the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1044,7 +1044,7 @@ MAT 14 17 ih48 grammar-connect-exceptions πέντε ἄρτους 1 five loaves MAT 14 19 i34u translate-symaction ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 having broken it, he gave the loaves Here, **looked up to heaven** is symbolic for praying that God would provide enough food for the crowd. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) MAT 14 19 bf1a figs-ellipsis εὐλόγησεν καὶ κλάσας 1 the loaves Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he blessed them, and having broken the food into pieces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 14 19 t7ei figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις 1 Having looked up Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the disciples gave the loaves to the crowds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 14 20 l2h8 figs-activepassive καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν 1 and were filled If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “until they were full” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 14 20 l2h8 figs-activepassive καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν 1 and were filled If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your languages in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 14 21 als7 translate-numbers ἄνδρες…πεντακισχίλιοι 1 5,000 men Alternate translation: “five thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 14 22 yp8l 0 General Information: Verses 22-24 give background information about the miracle that Jesus is about to perform of walking on water. MAT 14 22 wt1t καὶ εὐθέως ἠνάγκασεν 1 And immediately he made Alternate translation: “And as soon as Jesus had finished feeding all the people, he made” From 2450ea626781586e2160ffe2903f52770cada98c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 15:50:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 111/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 ++---- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 4d72f06985..59a2ad686a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2510,10 +2510,8 @@ ACT 17 22 ja1k figs-hyperbole κατὰ πάντα 1 very religious in every way ACT 17 23 cem7 figs-quotesinquotes βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 To an Unknown God While it would be preferable to present this as a direct quotation (see next note), you could translate this as an indirect quotation so that there is not one direct quotation within another. Alternate translation: “an altar whose inscription dedicated it to an unknown god” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 17 23 nmwv figs-quotemarks βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this as a direct quotation if possible, since it is the inscription on the altar that Paul is describing. You may be able to enclose this quotation in second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate a second-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 17 23 t3mu figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “on which someone had inscribed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 17 24 m1jm τὸν κόσμον 1 the world In the most general sense, the **world** refers to the heavens and the earth and everything in them. -ACT 17 24 rqk9 οὗτος…ὑπάρχων Κύριος 1 he who is Lord Here, **he** is referring to the unknown god mentioned in [Acts 17:23](../17/23.md) that Paul is explaining is the Lord God. Alternate translation: “because the one who is Lord” -ACT 17 24 f2mz figs-merism οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς 1 of heaven and earth The words **heaven** and **earth** are used together to mean all beings and things in heaven and earth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -ACT 17 24 ju4h figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις 1 built with hands Here, **hands** stands for people. Alternate translation: “built by the hands of people” or “that people built” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 17 24 f2mz figs-merism οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς 1 of heaven and earth Paul is referring to all of creation by naming its two major components. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of everything that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +ACT 17 24 ju4h figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις ναοῖς 1 built with hands Paul is figuratively using one part of a person, the **hand**, to represent all of a person in the act of building. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “temples that humans have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 25 e3dg figs-activepassive οὐδὲ ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται 1 Neither is he served by hands of men Here, **served** has the sense of a doctor treating a patient to make the patient well again. Alternate translation: “Neither do men take care of him with their hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 25 yq68 figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 1 by hands of men Here, **hands** stands for the whole person. Alternate translation: “by humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 25 sj89 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς διδοὺς 1 himself giving The word **himself** is added for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) From dccbe05f5c1b1248b2d95688b744ecd4bb8e88e7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 15:53:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 112/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 ++++++--- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 59a2ad686a..27778fe28e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2512,9 +2512,12 @@ ACT 17 23 nmwv figs-quotemarks βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ACT 17 23 t3mu figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “on which someone had inscribed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 24 f2mz figs-merism οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς 1 of heaven and earth Paul is referring to all of creation by naming its two major components. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of everything that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 17 24 ju4h figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις ναοῖς 1 built with hands Paul is figuratively using one part of a person, the **hand**, to represent all of a person in the act of building. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “temples that humans have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 17 25 e3dg figs-activepassive οὐδὲ ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται 1 Neither is he served by hands of men Here, **served** has the sense of a doctor treating a patient to make the patient well again. Alternate translation: “Neither do men take care of him with their hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 17 25 yq68 figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 1 by hands of men Here, **hands** stands for the whole person. Alternate translation: “by humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 17 25 sj89 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς διδοὺς 1 himself giving The word **himself** is added for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +ACT 17 25 e3dg figs-activepassive ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται 1 Neither is he served by hands of men If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do hands of men care for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 17 25 cqri προσδεόμενός τινος 1 Alternate translation: “as if he needed anything” +ACT 17 25 yq68 figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 1 by hands of men Paul is figuratively using one part of a person, the **hands**, to represent all of a person in the act of supposedly caring for God. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 17 25 sj89 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς διδοὺς 1 himself giving Paul is using the word **himself** for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +ACT 17 25 zv8x figs-doublet ζωὴν, καὶ πνοὴν 1 The terms **life** and **breath** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “existence itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +ACT 17 25 sw8d figs-explicit πᾶσι 1 By **all**, Paul implicitly means “all people.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 26 r3lt ἐποίησέν…προστεταγμένους…αὐτῶν 1 Here the word **he** refers to the one true God, the creator. Both occurrences of the word **their** refer to every nation of people living on the surface of the earth. ACT 17 26 p1e4 ἑνὸς 1 one man This refers to Adam, the first person God created. ACT 17 26 js4p ὁρίσας προστεταγμένους καιροὺς καὶ τὰς ὁροθεσίας τῆς κατοικίας αὐτῶν 1 having determined their appointed seasons and the boundaries of their habitation You can state this as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “And he determined when and where they would live” From 9a7282e94720cb4a01d89eed79828f8b99e11274 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 15:55:43 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 113/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++--- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 27778fe28e..d97632d9a4 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2518,9 +2518,8 @@ ACT 17 25 yq68 figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 1 by ACT 17 25 sj89 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς διδοὺς 1 himself giving Paul is using the word **himself** for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 17 25 zv8x figs-doublet ζωὴν, καὶ πνοὴν 1 The terms **life** and **breath** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “existence itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 17 25 sw8d figs-explicit πᾶσι 1 By **all**, Paul implicitly means “all people.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 17 26 r3lt ἐποίησέν…προστεταγμένους…αὐτῶν 1 Here the word **he** refers to the one true God, the creator. Both occurrences of the word **their** refer to every nation of people living on the surface of the earth. -ACT 17 26 p1e4 ἑνὸς 1 one man This refers to Adam, the first person God created. -ACT 17 26 js4p ὁρίσας προστεταγμένους καιροὺς καὶ τὰς ὁροθεσίας τῆς κατοικίας αὐτῶν 1 having determined their appointed seasons and the boundaries of their habitation You can state this as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “And he determined when and where they would live” +ACT 17 26 p1e4 figs-explicit ἑνὸς 1 one man By **one**, Paul implicitly means “one man.” He means Adam, the first person God created. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one man” or “Adam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 17 26 cnbu figs-gendernotations πᾶν ἔθνος ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “every nation of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 17 27 jae5 figs-metaphor ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν, εἰ ἄρα γε ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν 1 to seek God and perhaps they might feel around for him and find him Here, **to seek God** represents desiring to know him, and **feel around for him and find him** represents praying and having a relationship with him. Alternate translation: “so that they should want to know God and perhaps pray to him and become one of his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 27 p8hk figs-litotes καί γε οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἡμῶν ὑπάρχοντα 1 Yet he is not far from each one of us Paul uses the negative **not far** to emphasize that God is close to man. Alternate translation: “Yet he is very near to everyone of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 17 27 onm4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 In using the word **us**, Paul includes himself, his audience, and every nation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From f314ff92fa25e0a66b25e859ba23da6e0cd3324f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 15:58:06 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 114/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d97632d9a4..c5f940e836 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2520,9 +2520,10 @@ ACT 17 25 zv8x figs-doublet ζωὴν, καὶ πνοὴν 1 The terms **life** ACT 17 25 sw8d figs-explicit πᾶσι 1 By **all**, Paul implicitly means “all people.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 26 p1e4 figs-explicit ἑνὸς 1 one man By **one**, Paul implicitly means “one man.” He means Adam, the first person God created. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one man” or “Adam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 26 cnbu figs-gendernotations πᾶν ἔθνος ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “every nation of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 17 27 jae5 figs-metaphor ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν, εἰ ἄρα γε ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν 1 to seek God and perhaps they might feel around for him and find him Here, **to seek God** represents desiring to know him, and **feel around for him and find him** represents praying and having a relationship with him. Alternate translation: “so that they should want to know God and perhaps pray to him and become one of his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 27 p8hk figs-litotes καί γε οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἡμῶν ὑπάρχοντα 1 Yet he is not far from each one of us Paul uses the negative **not far** to emphasize that God is close to man. Alternate translation: “Yet he is very near to everyone of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 17 27 onm4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 In using the word **us**, Paul includes himself, his audience, and every nation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 17 27 s2xs figs-explicit ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν 1 Paul means implicitly that God did the things he described in the previous verse, giving the nations of humanity particular times to live in particular places, so that they would **seek** him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “God did this so that people would seek him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 17 27 jae5 figs-metaphor ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν 1 to seek God and perhaps they might feel around for him and find him Paul is speaking figuratively as if people could **feel around for** God and **find him** that way. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might sincerely try to know God and come to know him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 27 p8hk figs-litotes οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ 1 Yet he is not far from each one of us Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “close to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 17 27 onm4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 28 tkd3 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the words **him** and **his** refer to God ([Acts 17:24](../17/24.md)). When Paul says **we** here, he includes himself as well as his hearers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 28 cbd9 ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ 1 For in him Alternate translation: “Because of him” ACT 17 29 k9ws figs-metaphor γένος…ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 are God’s offspring Because God created everyone, all people are spoken of as if they were God’s literal children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 5c44e7a686028679c7904eec83130fc8727eb78f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 16:04:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 115/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 +++++++-- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index c5f940e836..3502762f00 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2524,8 +2524,13 @@ ACT 17 27 s2xs figs-explicit ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν 1 Paul means impli ACT 17 27 jae5 figs-metaphor ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν 1 to seek God and perhaps they might feel around for him and find him Paul is speaking figuratively as if people could **feel around for** God and **find him** that way. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might sincerely try to know God and come to know him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 27 p8hk figs-litotes οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ 1 Yet he is not far from each one of us Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “close to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 17 27 onm4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 17 28 tkd3 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the words **him** and **his** refer to God ([Acts 17:24](../17/24.md)). When Paul says **we** here, he includes himself as well as his hearers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 17 28 cbd9 ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ 1 For in him Alternate translation: “Because of him” +ACT 17 28 tkd3 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ… γένος 1 General Information: The pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “in God…{God’s} offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 17 28 o4vy figs-exclusive ζῶμεν… ἐσμέν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 17 28 jxph figs-quotesinquotes ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν. 1 Here Paul is quoting from the Greek philosopher-poet Epimenides and from the Greek poets Aratus and Cleanthes. While it would be preferable to present these two quotations as direct quotations (see next note), you could translate them as indirect quotations so that there are not direct quotations within a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “For some of your own poets have said that in him we live and are moved and are and that we too are his offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +ACT 17 28 rpaz figs-quotemarks ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present these two quotations as direct quotations if possible, since that would show that Paul is quoting Greek poets as he speaks to the philosophers in Athens. You may be able to enclose these quotations within second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate second-level quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +ACT 17 28 ii2n figs-doublet ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν 1 The expressions **live** and **are moved** and **are** mean similar things. Epimenides is using the three terms together for poetic effect. It would be good to preserve that effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the same idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “he is the source of our entire existence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +ACT 17 28 cbd9 figs-activepassive ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν 1 For in him If your language does not use the passive form **are moved**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he is the one in whom we live and who moves us and in whom we exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 17 28 lil5 figs-metaphor τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν. 1 Aratus and Cleanthes do not mean that people are literally God’s **offspring** or children. They are speaking figuratively and poetically. It would be good to preserve the poetic effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “For it is as if we too are his offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 29 k9ws figs-metaphor γένος…ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 are God’s offspring Because God created everyone, all people are spoken of as if they were God’s literal children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 29 czi9 figs-metonymy τὸ θεῖον 1 the divine being Here, **divine being** refers to God’s nature or attributes. Alternate translation: “the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 29 q4q2 figs-activepassive χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου 1 images of the skill and imagination of man If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which a man then uses his skill to make it into something that he has designed” or “images that people make by using their art and imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 3e085058f5b0350b62cee643be0f2426246b60fc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 16:06:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 116/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 +++++--- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 3502762f00..e7befdaa03 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2531,9 +2531,11 @@ ACT 17 28 rpaz figs-quotemarks ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κι ACT 17 28 ii2n figs-doublet ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν 1 The expressions **live** and **are moved** and **are** mean similar things. Epimenides is using the three terms together for poetic effect. It would be good to preserve that effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the same idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “he is the source of our entire existence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 17 28 cbd9 figs-activepassive ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν 1 For in him If your language does not use the passive form **are moved**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he is the one in whom we live and who moves us and in whom we exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 28 lil5 figs-metaphor τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν. 1 Aratus and Cleanthes do not mean that people are literally God’s **offspring** or children. They are speaking figuratively and poetically. It would be good to preserve the poetic effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “For it is as if we too are his offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 29 k9ws figs-metaphor γένος…ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 are God’s offspring Because God created everyone, all people are spoken of as if they were God’s literal children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 29 czi9 figs-metonymy τὸ θεῖον 1 the divine being Here, **divine being** refers to God’s nature or attributes. Alternate translation: “the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 17 29 q4q2 figs-activepassive χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου 1 images of the skill and imagination of man If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which a man then uses his skill to make it into something that he has designed” or “images that people make by using their art and imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 17 29 k9ws figs-metaphor γένος…ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 are God’s offspring Paul is speaking figuratively as if people were literally God’s **offspring** or children. He means that God created people and they are his creatures. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “being like God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 29 czi9 figs-nominaladj τὸ θεῖον 1 the divine being Paul is using the adjective **Divine** as a noun to mean God, who is divine. ULT capitalizes the word to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 17 29 xfp9 figs-metonymy χρυσῷ, ἢ ἀργύρῳ, ἢ λίθῳ 1 Paul is referring figuratively to idols by association with the materials out of which people made idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to idols made of gold or silver or stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 29 q4q2 figs-possession χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου 1 images of the skill and imagination of man Paul is using the possessive form to describe the qualities that people use to create **images** or idols. Alternate translation: “images that people create by using their skill and imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +ACT 17 29 gnk6 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπου 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 17 30 suh6 οὖν 1 Therefore Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” ACT 17 30 iva4 τοὺς…χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας ὑπεριδὼν ὁ Θεὸς 1 God, having overlooked the times of ignorance Alternate translation: “God, having decided not to punish people during the times of ignorance” ACT 17 30 h8uy χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας 1 times of ignorance This refers to the time before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God. From 61aa51bab7e2709838916193f1d6b1db7e6c4f00 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 16:07:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 117/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 ++---- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index e7befdaa03..6887af8c69 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2536,10 +2536,8 @@ ACT 17 29 czi9 figs-nominaladj τὸ θεῖον 1 the divine being Paul is usin ACT 17 29 xfp9 figs-metonymy χρυσῷ, ἢ ἀργύρῳ, ἢ λίθῳ 1 Paul is referring figuratively to idols by association with the materials out of which people made idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to idols made of gold or silver or stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 29 q4q2 figs-possession χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου 1 images of the skill and imagination of man Paul is using the possessive form to describe the qualities that people use to create **images** or idols. Alternate translation: “images that people create by using their skill and imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 17 29 gnk6 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπου 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 17 30 suh6 οὖν 1 Therefore Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” -ACT 17 30 iva4 τοὺς…χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας ὑπεριδὼν ὁ Θεὸς 1 God, having overlooked the times of ignorance Alternate translation: “God, having decided not to punish people during the times of ignorance” -ACT 17 30 h8uy χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας 1 times of ignorance This refers to the time before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God. -ACT 17 30 qim5 figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις πάντας 1 all men Here, **all men** refers to all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +ACT 17 30 h8uy figs-possession χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας 1 times of ignorance Paul is using the possessive form here not to describe **times** that were themselves ignorant but **times** when people were characterized by spiritual **ignorance**. Paul is referring to the times before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God. Alternate translation: “the times when people were ignorant of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +ACT 17 30 qim5 figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις πάντας 1 all men Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 17 31 htp7 ἐν ᾗ μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ, ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν 1 in which he is about to judge the world in righteousness by the man whom he has appointed Alternate translation: “when the man he has chosen will judge the world in righteousness” ACT 17 31 jt3a figs-metonymy μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 he is about to judge the world Here, **world** refers to the people. Alternate translation: “he will judge all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 31 l61p πίστιν παρασχὼν 1 He has provided signs Alternate translation: “God has demonstrated his choice of this man” From 9ffeb01d7e25e10b44ffbd103d9d03689b15c453 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 16:10:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 118/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 +++++---- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 6887af8c69..aa50e53b46 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2538,10 +2538,11 @@ ACT 17 29 q4q2 figs-possession χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυ ACT 17 29 gnk6 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπου 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 17 30 h8uy figs-possession χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας 1 times of ignorance Paul is using the possessive form here not to describe **times** that were themselves ignorant but **times** when people were characterized by spiritual **ignorance**. Paul is referring to the times before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God. Alternate translation: “the times when people were ignorant of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 17 30 qim5 figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις πάντας 1 all men Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 17 31 htp7 ἐν ᾗ μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ, ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν 1 in which he is about to judge the world in righteousness by the man whom he has appointed Alternate translation: “when the man he has chosen will judge the world in righteousness” -ACT 17 31 jt3a figs-metonymy μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 he is about to judge the world Here, **world** refers to the people. Alternate translation: “he will judge all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 17 31 l61p πίστιν παρασχὼν 1 He has provided signs Alternate translation: “God has demonstrated his choice of this man” -ACT 17 31 ulr4 ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again. +ACT 17 31 jt3a figs-metonymy τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 he is about to judge the world Here the term **world** refers to the people who live in the world. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 31 htp7 figs-abstractnouns ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ 1 in which he is about to judge the world in righteousness by the man whom he has appointed If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by his own righteous standards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 17 31 ebve figs-explicit ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν 1 By **the man**, Paul implicitly means Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “by Jesus, the man whom he has appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 17 31 l61p figs-abstractnouns πίστιν παρασχὼν πᾶσιν 1 He has provided signs If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **assurance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having given everyone reason to believe surely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 17 31 ulr4 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 17 32 tc8t figs-exclusive ἀκουσόμεθά 1 Here the word **We** refers to the men of Athens but not to Paul, so this is exclusive. Though some of them probably did want to hear Paul again, they may only have been being polite. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 32 c4sm writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 17 32 nb26 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke shifts from Paul’s teachings to the reaction of the people of Athens. From 9e42acfb9f3c19f4ca2673c49bb5675ab17de886 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 16:13:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 119/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index aa50e53b46..c2f0e4b934 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2543,7 +2543,9 @@ ACT 17 31 htp7 figs-abstractnouns ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ 1 in which he is a ACT 17 31 ebve figs-explicit ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν 1 By **the man**, Paul implicitly means Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “by Jesus, the man whom he has appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 31 l61p figs-abstractnouns πίστιν παρασχὼν πᾶσιν 1 He has provided signs If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **assurance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having given everyone reason to believe surely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 17 31 ulr4 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 17 32 tc8t figs-exclusive ἀκουσόμεθά 1 Here the word **We** refers to the men of Athens but not to Paul, so this is exclusive. Though some of them probably did want to hear Paul again, they may only have been being polite. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 17 32 j44o figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 Luke is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 17 32 tc8t figs-exclusive ἀκουσόμεθά 1 By **we**, these philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 17 32 txre figs-explicitinfo καὶ πάλιν 1 It might seem that the expression **also again** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “again” or “another time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 17 32 c4sm writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 17 32 nb26 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke shifts from Paul’s teachings to the reaction of the people of Athens. ACT 17 32 jlm5 ἀκούσαντες 1 when they heard of These are the people who were present at the Areopagus listening to Paul. From 3ffef6e0606a57d65a29a243ea1ccb5bb2cd57fb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 28 Sep 2022 16:20:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 120/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 ++++++--- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index c2f0e4b934..84438f8d6b 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2547,11 +2547,14 @@ ACT 17 32 j44o figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 Luke is using the adjective **de ACT 17 32 tc8t figs-exclusive ἀκουσόμεθά 1 By **we**, these philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 32 txre figs-explicitinfo καὶ πάλιν 1 It might seem that the expression **also again** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “again” or “another time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 17 32 c4sm writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 17 32 nb26 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke shifts from Paul’s teachings to the reaction of the people of Athens. +ACT 17 34 nb26 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of what Paul did in Athens. You language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) +ACT 17 34 nysg figs-gendernotations τινὲς…ἄνδρες 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women, as the mention of **Damaris** shows. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “certain people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +ACT 17 34 hlgu figs-infostructure κολληθέντες αὐτῷ, ἐπίστευσαν 1 The people Luke describes here **believed** before they were **joined** to Paul, so it might be more natural to put the information about them believing first. Alternate translation: “believed and were joined to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +ACT 17 34 vcx3 figs-activepassive κολληθέντες αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “joining him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 32 jlm5 ἀκούσαντες 1 when they heard of These are the people who were present at the Areopagus listening to Paul. ACT 17 32 sn6j οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον 1 some mocked him These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul” -ACT 17 34 psh8 translate-names Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης 1 Dionysius the Areopagite **Dionysius** is a man’s name. **Areopagite** implies that Dionysius was one of the judges at the council of Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 17 34 hsz3 translate-names Δάμαρις 1 Damaris **Damaris** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 34 psh8 translate-names Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης 1 Dionysius the Areopagite The word **Dionysius** is the name of a man. The word **Areopagite** is the name for someone who was a member of a council of rulers and judges that met on the Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 34 hsz3 translate-names Δάμαρις 1 Damaris The word **Damaris** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The baptism of John

Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but this baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]]) ACT 18 1 qa9b 0 Connecting Statement: This is another part of the story of Paul’s travels as he goes to Corinth. ACT 18 1 fky7 μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things Alternate translation: “After these events took place in Athens” From b620a9de89dc4f796c69cd9428ece9c3fd7dfa3a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 16:31:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 121/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 84438f8d6b..d10ed01e0a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -ACT front intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Acts

1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)
2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)
3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)
4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)
5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)
6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)

Luke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part.

### What is the book of Acts about?

The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”

### Who wrote the book of Acts?

The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the church?

The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.

### The kingdom of God

The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts

### “to the same”

The phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.

### “in/to/into the temple”

Luke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?

The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.

First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets [ ]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are:
- Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’”
- Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.”
- Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.”
- Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”

Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are:
- Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.”
- Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.”
- Acts 10:19, “three men. Some versions read “two men” or “some men.”
- Acts 10:30, ““Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.”
- Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”).
- Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.”
- Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +ACT front intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of Acts\n\n1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)\n2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)\n3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)\n4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)\n5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)\n6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)\n\nLuke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part.\n\n### What is the book of Acts about?\n\nThe book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”\n\n### Who wrote the book of Acts?\n\nThe author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.\n\nLuke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the church?\n\nThe church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.\n\n### The kingdom of God\n\nThe “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Figurative usages in the book of Acts\n\n\r\r“arise/arising”\n\n\r\rLuke often says “arise” or “arising” figuratively to mean taking action to get an enterprise under way, rather than to mean getting up from a sitting or lying position. Notes will indicate where this figurative usage occurs.\r\r“brothers”\n\n\r\rLuke often uses the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Although this term is masculine, Luke uses the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate that the word has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])\r\r### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts\n\n\r\r“to the same” \n\n\r\rThe phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.\n\n\r\r“in/to/into the temple”\n\n\r\rLuke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.\n\n\r\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?\n\nThe following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.\n\nFirst, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets [ ]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are:\n- Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’”\n- Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.”\n- Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.”\n- Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”\n\nSecond, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are:\n- Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.”\n- Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.”\n- Acts 10:19, “three men. Some versions read “two men” or “some men.”\n- Acts 10:30, ““Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.”\n- Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”).\n- Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.”\n- Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”\n\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 1 intro vyg9 0 # Acts 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Ascension

This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]])

### Baptism

Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in [1:5](../01/05.md). In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers figuratively to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in [2:4](../02/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])

### “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God”

Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in [1:3](../01/03.md), he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse.

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Long sentence

As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the end of [1:3](../01/03.md). ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

### The details of the death of Judas

There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death.

It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it.

But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in [1:18](../01/18.md) that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you can let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.

### The 12 disciples

There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts.

All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known.

Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in [1:13](../01/13.md) instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible. ACT 1 1 q9ep figs-explicit τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην 1 I made the first account Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by **the first account** he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 1 a000 ὦ Θεόφιλε 1 O Theophilus Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence. @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ ACT 1 15 il8w writing-newevent καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύτ ACT 1 15 cup2 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Luke is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “during that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 15 a038 translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 having stood up Peter **stood up** to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 1 15 liz1 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 1 15 a039 figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +ACT 1 15 a039 figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. As the General Introduction to Acts suggests, here and throughout the book, if you retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate that it has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 1 15 tl5m writing-background ἦν τε ὄχλος ὀνομάτων ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ὡς ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι 1 and the multitude of names to the same was about 120 Luke provides this background information to help readers appreciate what happens shortly afterwards in the story, when the church grows in one day to many times this size. It may be helpful to put this background information first in the verse as a separate sentence, in which case it would not have to be in parentheses. Alternate translation: “Now the number of people in that one place was about 120.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 1 15 a040 figs-metonymy ὄχλος ὀνομάτων 1 the multitude of names Luke is using the term **names** figuratively to mean “people,” by association with the way that people have names. Alternate translation: “the number of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 1 15 a041 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in that one place” or “in their Christian fellowship” From 283951ae5ebb270ab7196feb1b888093bff5db59 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 16:35:37 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 122/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 +------- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 7 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d10ed01e0a..fc9699f522 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -80,7 +80,6 @@ ACT 1 15 a040 figs-metonymy ὄχλος ὀνομάτων 1 the multitude of nam ACT 1 15 a041 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in that one place” or “in their Christian fellowship” ACT 1 16 a042 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 16 a043 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 1 16 a044 figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers If you decide to retain the metaphor of **brothers**, you could show that Peter is using the term in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 1 16 a045 figs-infostructure ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν, ἣν προεῖπε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ περὶ Ἰούδα, τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν 1 it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled that the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus If your readers would misunderstand this, you could put the information that Peter provides to identify this **scripture** before his statement that it had to be **fulfilled**. It may be helpful to make that statement a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus. It was necessary for that scripture to be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 1 16 i8tl figs-activepassive ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν 1 it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the things needed to take place that the scripture described” or, if you put the background information first as a separate sentence, “What that scripture described needed to take place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 16 a046 προεῖπε 1 spoke before Alternate translation: “spoke beforehand” or “spoke in advance” @@ -461,7 +460,6 @@ ACT 3 16 abc3 writing-pronouns ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδ ACT 3 16 a225 figs-personification ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ τὴν ὁλοκληρίαν ταύτην 1 the faith that is through him has given to him this complete health Peter is speaking of **faith** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could have given **complete health** to the man. Alternate translation: “because this man had faith in Jesus, Jesus has given him this complete health” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 3 17 v45t καὶ νῦν 1 And now Peter uses the expression **And now** to shift the people’s attention away from the lame man so that he can speak to them directly. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose. ACT 3 17 a226 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Peter addresses the people figuratively as his **brothers** because they are related to him as fellow descendants of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 3 17 a227 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 3 17 x62k figs-explicit κατὰ ἄγνοιαν ἐπράξατε 1 you acted in ignorance Peter likely means that the people **acted in ignorance** of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 3 17 a228 figs-ellipsis ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ὑμῶν 1 as also your rulers Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and that your rulers also acted in ignorance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 3 18 gcc1 figs-infostructure ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἃ προκατήγγειλεν διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐπλήρωσεν οὕτως 1 But what God foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer, he has fulfilled thus Your language might naturally put first in this sentence the information that God **fulfilled** prophecies when Christ suffered. Alternate translation: “But in this way God has fulfilled what he foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) @@ -1024,7 +1022,6 @@ ACT 7 24 l4zv figs-activepassive ἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον 1 An ACT 7 24 y3yh figs-activepassive ἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “avenged him by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 24 r2e8 figs-explicit πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 by striking the Egyptian Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses hit **the Egyptian** so hard that he died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “striking and killing the Egyptian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 25 hrsh figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Stephen is using the word **brothers** figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 7 25 mug9 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Stephen is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 7 25 f6sn figs-abstractnouns δίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. In context, the word refers to God using Moses to deliver the Israelites from slavery. Alternate translation: “was delivering them from slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 7 25 nhb9 figs-metonymy διὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 by his hand was giving salvation to them Here, **hand** refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “through his actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 26 t2vc figs-explicit αὐτοῖς 1 to them as they were quarreling It is clear from the context that these were two Israelite men, though Stephen does not say that specifically. Alternate translation: “to two Israelite men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1673,7 +1670,6 @@ ACT 10 48 ax6x figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστο ACT 11 intro hva5 0 # Acts 11 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The Gentiles also had received the word of God”

Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to “receive the word of God.” Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### "the Lord"

In verse 16, Peter refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord.” Luke refers to Jesus the same way in the second instance of the phrase in verse 21 and in verses 23 and 24. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could say “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Peter’s summary of his visit to Cornelius

In Acts 11:5–17, Peter summarizes the events that are described in greater detail in 10:9–47. Very similar language is used throughout both passages. As you translate 11:5–17, in order to ensure that your translation is consistent, compare how you translated specific terms and phrases in 10:9–47. ACT 11 1 ab75 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 11 1 f1md figs-metaphor οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 2 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 11 1 bisb figs-gendernotations οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 2 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 11 1 w3rx figs-metonymy ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 had received the word of God Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter shared with Cornelius and his guests by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 2 kb4m ἀνέβη…εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 came up to Jerusalem Luke says that Peter **came up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “returned to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 11 2 yar6 figs-metonymy οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those from the circumcision As in [10:45](../10/45.md), Luke is using the term **circumcision** figuratively by association to identify as Jewish these believers who disputed with Peter. They were likely strictly observant Jews who followed the teaching of the Pharisees about Jews visiting with Gentiles. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to chapter 10. Alternate translation: “some believers who were strictly observant Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1706,7 +1702,7 @@ ACT 11 13 few6 figs-activepassive Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμεν ACT 11 14 rwpw figs-metonymy ῥήματα 1 The angel is using the term **words** figuratively to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 14 fnjz figs-yousingular σὲ…σωθήσῃ σὺ…σου 1 All the instances of the words **you** and **your** in this verse are singular, since they refer to Cornelius. So use the singular forms of those word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 11 14 p3gk figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 11 14 hpr2 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου 1 all your household Here, **house** refers figuratively to an entire household living together. Alternate translation: “all the people living in your house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 11 14 hpr2 figs-metonymy πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου 1 all your household Here, **house** refers figuratively to an entire household living together. Alternate translation: “all the people living in your house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 15 a8jw figs-explicitinfo ἐν…τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν 1 as I began to speak, the Holy Spirit came on them Peter is using the word **began** to indicate that he had been doing something else (listening to Cornelius tell why he had summoned him) but then began to do something new when Cornelius finished speaking. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “as I was speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 11 15 ak2p figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς 1 the Holy Spirit came on them, just as also on us in the beginning Peter is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if it **fell** on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expressions in [8:16](../08/12.md) and [10:44](../10/44.md). Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 11 15 qdon writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the man who had sent for me and the others in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1766,7 +1762,6 @@ ACT 11 28 jmc5 figs-idiom ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου 1 in the days of Claudius Th ACT 11 28 fjyk translate-names Κλαυδίου 1 The word **Claudius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 11 29 rk9z figs-explicit τῶν…μαθητῶν καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις, ὥρισαν ἕκαστος αὐτῶν…πέμψαι 1 just as anyone prospered The implication is that while some of the disciples were **prospering** greatly but others were struggling financially, every one of them resolved to send something according to his own means. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while some of the believers in Antioch were rich and others were poor, every one of them resolved to send what they could afford” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 11 29 up7a figs-metaphor τοῖς…ἀδελφοῖς 1 to the brothers living in Judea Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “to their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 11 29 qlsi figs-gendernotations τοῖς…ἀδελφοῖς 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “to the brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 11 30 taw4 figs-explicit πρὸς τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the **elders** who were the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to the elders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 11 30 l8i8 figs-synecdoche διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου 1 by the hand of Barnabas and Saul Here, the **hand**, one part of a person, figuratively represents the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 11 30 rq2w διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου 1 If you retain the figurative word **hand** in your translation, it may be more natural in your language to use the plural form of that word, if you would not ordinarily speak of two people having one hand. Alternate translation: “by the hands of Barnabas and Saul” @@ -1811,7 +1806,6 @@ ACT 12 16 wwg1 figs-synecdoche ἀνοίξαντες δὲ εἶδαν αὐτ ACT 12 17 fr3y figs-explicit Ἰακώβῳ 1 Peter assumes that his listeners will know that by **James**, he means the brother of Jesus who was the leader of the church in Jerusalem. UST models one way to express this implicit information. However, since this is something that Peter assumes his listeners will know, you may find it preferable to explain this in a footnote rather than add information to the text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 17 k3lg translate-names Ἰακώβῳ 1 The word **James** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name for different men in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 12 17 jf16 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 12 17 wdj5 figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “the brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 12 18 ail9 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 12 18 zl7i figs-litotes τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what therefore had happened to Peter Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 12 18 bt2b figs-quotations ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “among the soldiers: ‘What then had Peter become?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) From e70dba41af353d1b756cac14c00a27912866690a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 16:38:37 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 123/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index fc9699f522..8c3621f9b8 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1709,6 +1709,7 @@ ACT 11 15 qdon writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to ACT 11 15 qy12 figs-exclusive ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς 1 General Information: Here the word **us** refers to Peter himself and to the believers he is speaking to in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 11 15 th4m figs-explicit ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 in the beginning By **in the beginning**, Peter means the day of Pentecost. Alternate translation: “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 11 16 xd9t figs-metonymy τοῦ ῥήματος 1 Peter is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “the statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 11 16 ett3 writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Peter is referring to Jesus here by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 11 16 wwnl figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς…ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ 1 After first describing how John baptized people literally, Jesus uses baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to chapter 1, and see how you translated this in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 11 16 v116 figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, if it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will baptize you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 11 17 pe42 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here the word **us** refers to Peter himself and to the believers he is speaking to in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -1849,6 +1850,7 @@ ACT 13 1 o8jb translate-names Λούκιος ὁ Κυρηναῖος 1 The word ACT 13 1 u48c translate-unknown σύντροφος 1 one brought up with Herod the tetrarch In this culture, rulers would sometimes bring the children of other parents into their homes to be raised and educated with their own children. This gave their children playmates and friends, and it was also a way of honoring or thanking the parents of the other children. A boy who was raised with the son of a ruler would be considered the **foster brother** of that son. There may be a similar role in your culture, and your language may have a term for it that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “foster brother,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “the childhood playmate” or “the boyhood friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 13 1 hxh6 translate-unknown Ἡρῴδου τοῦ τετράρχου 1 In the Roman Empire, a **tetrarch** was the governor of one of four divisions of a country or province. **Herod the tetrarch** ruled over Galilee, one of four areas that the kingdom of his father, Herod the Great, was divided into after his death. (The Herod described in chapter 12 was a different man, the grandson of Herod the Great and the nephew of Herod the tetrarch.) If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a general term instead of “tetrarch.” Alternate translation: “the ruler Herod” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 13 2 m70r figs-idiom λειτουργούντων…αὐτῶν τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 The expression **ministering to** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “while they were worshiping the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 13 2 kox1 writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Peter is referring to Jesus here by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 13 2 ifb9 ἀφορίσατε 1 Set apart Alternate translation: “Set apart” ACT 13 2 j6ym figs-extrainfo εἰς τὸ ἔργον ὃ προσκέκλημαι αὐτούς. 1 The Holy Spirit is referring implicitly to the **work** of proclaiming the gospel of Jesus in new areas, Cyprus and Asia Minor. Since Luke describes Barnabas and Paul doing this work in the rest of this chapter and in chapter 14, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) ACT 13 3 l0cj writing-pronouns νηστεύσαντες, καὶ προσευξάμενοι, καὶ ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς, ἀπέλυσαν 1 The pronouns **their** and **they** refer to the believers in Antioch, and the pronoun **them** refers to Barnabas and Saul. The phrase **having fasted and prayed** refers to all of them. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “after they had all fasted and prayed together, the believers in Antioch laid their hands on Barnabas and Saul, and then the believers released them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From c354a33e1e8fe26f88b331b027a47032c3ec427a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 16:41:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 124/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 8c3621f9b8..4dc3eda955 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1841,7 +1841,7 @@ ACT 12 25 rt9o figs-explicit Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπ ACT 12 25 t7d8 translate-textvariants Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 And Barnabas and Saul returned to Jerusalem Some ancient copies say that Barnabas and Saul returned “from” Jerusalem, which makes sense, since in the next verse, Barnabas and Saul are back in Antioch. If the reading **to** is correct, this verse may be indicating that they went somewhere else in Judea and then returned to Jerusalem before going back to Antioch. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 12 25 pv6a figs-explicit πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν 1 having completed their service This refers implicitly to the trip that Barnabas and Saul made to Jerusalem to deliver money from the believers in Antioch, which Luke describes in [11:29-30](../11/29.md). Alternate translation: “having delivered to the church leaders in Jerusalem the money that the believers in Antioch had collected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 25 zhsc figs-activepassive Ἰωάννην, τὸν ἐπικληθέντα Μᾶρκον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated it in [12:12](../12/12.md). Alternate translation: “John, whom people called Mark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 intro rlh6 0 # Acts 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verses 1–4 describe how the Holy Spirit called Barnabas and Paul to go on a special mission to share the gospel of Jesus.
Verses 5–12 describe how they shared the gospel on the island of Cyprus.
Verses 13–52 describe how they shared the gospel in the city of Antioch in the province of Pamphylia.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotations from Psalms in 13:33–35.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41.

The chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and he describes how the believers told the message about Jesus to Gentiles. Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### A light for the Gentiles

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if light were what enables sinful people to understand that what they are doing is wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles to be walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “our” in Paul’s sermon in Antioch of Pisidia

In verses 17, 32, and 33, Paul uses the term **our** to refer to himself and the other Jews who are present in the synagogue; the term does not include the Gentiles who are also present. If your language marks the distinction between inclusive and exclusive “our,” use the form that would be natural in such a situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 13 intro rlh6 0 # Acts 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nVerses 1–4 describe how the Holy Spirit called Barnabas and Paul to go on a special mission to share the gospel of Jesus.\nVerses 5–12 describe how they shared the gospel on the island of Cyprus.\nVerses 13–52 describe how they shared the gospel in the city of Antioch in the province of Pamphylia.\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotations from Psalms in 13:33–35.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41.\n\nThe chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and he describes how the believers told the message about Jesus to Gentiles. Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### A light for the Gentiles\n\nThe Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if light were what enables sinful people to understand that what they are doing is wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles to be walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n\n### “the Lord”\n\nIn verses 2, 12, 48, and 49, Luke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord.” Paul refers to Jesus the same way in verses 10 and 11. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could say “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “our” in Paul’s sermon in Antioch of Pisidia\n\nIn verses 17, 32, and 33, Paul uses the term **our** to refer to himself and the other Jews who are present in the synagogue; the term does not include the Gentiles who are also present. If your language marks the distinction between inclusive and exclusive “our,” use the form that would be natural in such a situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 13 1 fij7 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 13 1 srw6 translate-names Συμεὼν ὁ καλούμενος Νίγερ 1 Simeon … Niger … Lucius … Manaen The word **Simeon** is the name of a man. The word **Niger** is another name by which he was known. This is not a racial epithet; it is the Latin word for “black,” and it probably indicates that he was African. Alternate translation: “Simeon the African” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 13 1 nqp1 figs-activepassive Συμεὼν ὁ καλούμενος Νίγερ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Simeon, whom people called Niger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2530,7 +2530,7 @@ ACT 17 28 lil5 figs-metaphor τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν. 1 ACT 17 29 k9ws figs-metaphor γένος…ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 are God’s offspring Paul is speaking figuratively as if people were literally God’s **offspring** or children. He means that God created people and they are his creatures. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “being like God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 29 czi9 figs-nominaladj τὸ θεῖον 1 the divine being Paul is using the adjective **Divine** as a noun to mean God, who is divine. ULT capitalizes the word to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 17 29 xfp9 figs-metonymy χρυσῷ, ἢ ἀργύρῳ, ἢ λίθῳ 1 Paul is referring figuratively to idols by association with the materials out of which people made idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to idols made of gold or silver or stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 17 29 q4q2 figs-possession χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου 1 images of the skill and imagination of man Paul is using the possessive form to describe the qualities that people use to create **images** or idols. Alternate translation: “images that people create by using their skill and imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +ACT 17 29 q4q2 figs-possession χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου 1 images of the skill and imagination of man Paul is using the possessive form not to mean images that resemble human **skill** and **imagination** but to describe the qualities that people use to create **images** or idols. Alternate translation: “images that people create by using their skill and imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 17 29 gnk6 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπου 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 17 30 h8uy figs-possession χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας 1 times of ignorance Paul is using the possessive form here not to describe **times** that were themselves ignorant but **times** when people were characterized by spiritual **ignorance**. Paul is referring to the times before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God. Alternate translation: “the times when people were ignorant of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 17 30 qim5 figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις πάντας 1 all men Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From f15131bb86de7abc89303f2e32e8d0c47dd49d24 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 16:45:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 125/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 +------ 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 4dc3eda955..73450ffd8c 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -746,7 +746,7 @@ ACT 5 13 a360 figs-explicit τῶν…λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς 1 none of th ACT 5 13 a361 figs-explicit ἐτόλμα κολλᾶσθαι αὐτοῖς 1 dared to join them If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why no unbelievers **dared to join them**. The reason seems to be that the Jewish leaders had commanded the apostles not to speak or teach about Jesus ([4:18](../04/18.md)), but they were still doing that. Later in this chapter, in [5:28](../05/28.md), the Sanhedrin indicates that it has arrested the apostles for violating that command. Alternate translation: “would meet with them, because the apostles were still preaching about Jesus even though the Jewish leaders had commanded them not to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 14 a362 figs-metonymy προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 were being added to the Lord Luke says **the Lord** figuratively to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 14 m9wx figs-activepassive προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 were being added to the Lord If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:41](../02/41.md). Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 5 14 oxni writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) +ACT 5 14 oxni writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 5 15 a364 grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 so that Luke says **so that** to introduce a result, but it is not the direct result of what he said just before, that many men and women became part of the church. It is the result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md), that the apostles were doing “many signs and wonders.” All of [5:12–15](../05/12.md) could be understood as a single sentence, and in that case what Luke says here would more clearly follow logically and grammatically from what he says in [5:12](../05/12.md). However, ULT divides the material into several sentences, which is another way in which it can be understood. UST models a way to show how what Luke says here introduces a result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md) about the “signs and wonders” that the apostles were doing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 5 15 l9bs writing-pronouns ἐκφέρειν 1 they … carried The pronoun **they** refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people who lived in Jerusalem … carried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 5 15 a365 figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς 1 the sick Luke is using the adjective **sick** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -1896,7 +1896,6 @@ ACT 13 12 x9fl ὁ ἀνθύπατος 1 proconsul A **proconsul** was a govern ACT 13 12 twa8 figs-activepassive ἐκπλησσόμενος ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 being astonished at the teaching of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The teaching of the Lord astonished him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 12 ob5x figs-metonymy τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the word **teaching** figuratively to mean the truth and power associated with the teaching about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the truth and power that accompanied the teaching of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 12 efle figs-possession τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 In this possessive form, **the Lord** is the object rather than the subject of **teaching**. That is, this does not mean “what the Lord taught,” it means “what Barnabas and Paul taught about the Lord.” You could say that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ACT 13 12 glyq writing-politeness τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “the teaching about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 13 13 r9hi writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 13 13 i65t writing-background οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον 1 The phrase **those around Paul** refers to Barnabas and John (who is also called John Mark). This phrase provides some background to rest of the story by indicating that Paul had become the leader of the group. It is important to communicate this by keeping Paul’s name first when he is mentioned with others, for example, in [13:46](../13/46.md), [13:50](../13/50.md), etc. The order of names is important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 13 13 abcl οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον 1 those around Paul Alternate translation: “Paul and his traveling companions” @@ -2033,7 +2032,6 @@ ACT 13 44 vq3y figs-metonymy σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 almost the ACT 13 44 h40t figs-activepassive συνήχθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 44 yga7 figs-explicit ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 to hear the word of the Lord The implication is that Paul and Barnabas were going to speak **the word of the Lord**. Alternate translation: “to hear Paul and Barnabas speak the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 44 evox figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas were going to share by using words. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 13 44 ax95 writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 13 45 j4zq figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 13 45 qrh2 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 they were filled with jealousy For emphasis, Luke is speaking figuratively of the Jewish leaders as if they were a container that jealousy **filled**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “they became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 45 m1an figs-activepassive τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις 1 the things that were said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2046,17 +2044,14 @@ ACT 13 46 kzm1 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Paul and Barnabas are using the term ACT 13 46 rf9k figs-explicit στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη 1 we will turn to the Gentiles Paul and Barnabas are speaking figuratively as if they are going to be physically **turning** toward **the Gentiles**. They mean that they are going to stop preaching in the Jewish synagogue and begin preaching to gatherings of Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 46 zvt5 figs-exclusive στρεφόμεθα 1 By **we**, Paul and Barnabas mean themselves, but not the Jewish leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 13 47 tx94 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 By **us**, Paul and Barnabas mean themselves, but not the Jewish leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 13 47 so6b writing-politeness ὁ Κύριος 1 Paul and Barnabas are referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 13 47 xbiw figs-quotemarks τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν, τοῦ εἶναί σε εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 This quotation is from the prophet Isaiah. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Messiah directly in it. (Paul and Barnabas are saying that since they are disciples of the Messiah, the quotation also refers to their ministry.) You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 13 47 v8au figs-simile τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς 1 as a light Through this quotation from Isaiah, Paul and Barnabas are saying that the truth they are preaching about Jesus is like a **light** that allows people to see. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to something else your readers would recognize that helps people to understand. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) ACT 13 47 za1q figs-yousingular σε 1 The word **you** is singular here because it refers to the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 13 47 t5sp figs-abstractnouns εἶναί…εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 should be for salvation as far as the end of the earth If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “should go and help people to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 13 47 ismw figs-idiom ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 This phrase is an idiom. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everywhere on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 48 e9ag figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 glorified the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 13 48 yr6f writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 13 48 jct2 figs-activepassive τεταγμένοι 1 as many as were appointed to eternal life If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God had appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 49 qh9z figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord was being spread throughout the whole region Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 13 49 h5pa writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 13 49 fpkr figs-activepassive διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was those who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “those who believed in Jesus spread the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 50 u8rm figs-synecdoche οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 13 50 ef21 figs-metaphor παρώτρυναν 1 Luke says figuratively that the Jewish leaders **stirred up** these women and men, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This figurative expression means that the leaders said things to make them very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 070b9ed41646dcd584976d9ebca22f4ec3bbc62f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 16:46:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 126/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 73450ffd8c..3b78eefe4e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1734,7 +1734,7 @@ ACT 11 21 ebxq writing-politeness χεὶρ Κυρίου 1 In this instance, Lu ACT 11 21 aj5g figs-metonymy χεὶρ 1 The hand of the Lord was with them Here, the **hand** figuratively represents power, since hands give people the capability to do things. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 21 bfm5 figs-idiom ἦν…μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 When Luke says that God *with** the men from Cyprus and Cyrene who were proclaiming the gospel, this is an idiom that means God was working through them. Alternate translation: “was working through them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 11 21 n9pq figs-metaphor ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 turned to the Lord Luke speaks figuratively of these Gentiles in Antioch as if they physically **turned to the Lord**. He means that they stopped living in one way and began to live in another way. They believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “became disciples of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 11 21 qcn3 writing-politeness ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 In this instance, Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title, as the General Notes to this chapter discuss. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) +ACT 11 21 qcn3 writing-politeness ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 In this instance, Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title, as the General Notes to this chapter discuss. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 11 22 i7vs figs-explicitinfo ἠκούσθη…ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν 1 the ears of the church In your language, the expression **was heard in the ears** might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you can abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “the word about them was heard by the church being in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 11 22 kcb8 figs-activepassive ἠκούσθη δὲ ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation: “the church being in Jerusalem heard the word about them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 11 22 rdhr figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean a report about the Gentile believers in Antioch. Alternate translation: “a report” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 3980ffd836180961ee5cf33ed721688af7621a6a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 18:01:55 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 127/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 +++---- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 3b78eefe4e..d1c59a81c3 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2547,10 +2547,9 @@ ACT 17 32 sn6j οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον 1 some mocked him These did no ACT 17 34 psh8 translate-names Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης 1 Dionysius the Areopagite The word **Dionysius** is the name of a man. The word **Areopagite** is the name for someone who was a member of a council of rulers and judges that met on the Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 34 hsz3 translate-names Δάμαρις 1 Damaris The word **Damaris** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The baptism of John

Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but this baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]]) -ACT 18 1 qa9b 0 Connecting Statement: This is another part of the story of Paul’s travels as he goes to Corinth. -ACT 18 1 fky7 μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things Alternate translation: “After these events took place in Athens” -ACT 18 1 abcw χωρισθεὶς 1 having departed Alternate translation: “when Paul had departed” -ACT 18 1 h2si τῶν Ἀθηνῶν 1 Athens **Athens** was one of the most important cities in Greece. See how you translated this in [Acts 17:15](../17/15.md). +ACT 18 1 fky7 writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things Luke is using the phrase **After these things** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +ACT 18 1 abcw writing-pronouns ἦλθεν 1 having departed The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 18 1 h2si translate-names Κόρινθον 1 Athens The word **Corinth** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 2 d9zx καὶ εὑρών 1 And when he found This could mean: (1) Paul happened to find by chance or (2) Paul intentionally found. ACT 18 2 hm16 writing-participants τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν 1 a certain Jew named Aquila Here the phrase **a certain** indicates Luke is introducing **Aquilla** as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 18 2 jat1 writing-background τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν, Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει, προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης 1 Verses 2 and 3 give background information about **Aquila** and **Priscilla**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) From 3e8a16678c67027b3f9d62fde53608c6309fce44 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 18:03:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 128/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d1c59a81c3..8b959cc82a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2550,8 +2550,8 @@ ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes

## Special concepts in thi ACT 18 1 fky7 writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things Luke is using the phrase **After these things** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 18 1 abcw writing-pronouns ἦλθεν 1 having departed The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 18 1 h2si translate-names Κόρινθον 1 Athens The word **Corinth** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 2 d9zx καὶ εὑρών 1 And when he found This could mean: (1) Paul happened to find by chance or (2) Paul intentionally found. -ACT 18 2 hm16 writing-participants τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν 1 a certain Jew named Aquila Here the phrase **a certain** indicates Luke is introducing **Aquilla** as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 18 2 d9zx figs-idiom καὶ εὑρών 1 And when he found The word **found** does not mean that Paul was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “And when Paul happened to meet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 18 2 hm16 writing-participants τινα Ἰουδαῖον 1 a certain Jew named Aquila Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jew** to introduce **Aquila** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a disciple there named Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 18 2 jat1 writing-background τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν, Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει, προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης 1 Verses 2 and 3 give background information about **Aquila** and **Priscilla**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 18 2 y97p translate-names Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει 1 a native of Pontus **Pontus** was a province on the southern coast of the Black Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 2 q4va προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα 1 who had recently come This probably happened sometime in the past year. From 5547f757db71a9639a894b35ba0c0146d7e1be12 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 18:09:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 129/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 14 ++++++++------ 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 8b959cc82a..a89648bfbc 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2551,12 +2551,14 @@ ACT 18 1 fky7 writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things Luke i ACT 18 1 abcw writing-pronouns ἦλθεν 1 having departed The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 18 1 h2si translate-names Κόρινθον 1 Athens The word **Corinth** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 2 d9zx figs-idiom καὶ εὑρών 1 And when he found The word **found** does not mean that Paul was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “And when Paul happened to meet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 18 2 hm16 writing-participants τινα Ἰουδαῖον 1 a certain Jew named Aquila Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jew** to introduce **Aquila** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a disciple there named Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 18 2 jat1 writing-background τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν, Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει, προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης 1 Verses 2 and 3 give background information about **Aquila** and **Priscilla**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 18 2 y97p translate-names Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει 1 a native of Pontus **Pontus** was a province on the southern coast of the Black Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 2 q4va προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα 1 who had recently come This probably happened sometime in the past year. -ACT 18 2 n631 translate-names τῆς Ἰταλίας…τῆς Ῥώμης 1 Italy **Italy** is the name of land. **Rome** is the capital city of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 2 n95f τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον 1 Claudius had ordered **Claudius** was the current Roman emperor. See how you translated this in [Acts 11:28](../11/28.md). +ACT 18 2 hm16 writing-participants τινα Ἰουδαῖον 1 a certain Jew named Aquila Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jew** to introduce **Aquila** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “that there was a certain Jew there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 18 2 n7uf translate-names Ἀκύλαν 1 The word **Aquila** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 2 y97p translate-names Ποντικὸν 1 a native of Pontus The word **Pontian** was the name for someone who came from the province of Pontus on the southern coast of the Black Sea. See how you translated the name “Pontus” in [2:9](../02/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 2 q11b figs-infostructure προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης 1 It might be more natural to keep all of the information about Aquila leaving Italy together and mention afterwards that Paul also met his wife Priscilla. Alternate translation: “having recently come from Italy because Claudius had ordered all the Jews to depart from Rome, and Priscilla, his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +ACT 18 2 n631 translate-names τῆς Ἰταλίας 1 Italy The word **Italy** is the name of a country. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 2 b06i translate-names Πρίσκιλλαν 1 The word **Priscilla** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 2 n95f translate-names Κλαύδιον 1 Claudius had ordered **Claudius** is the name of the man who was the Roman emperor at this time. See how you translated his name in [11:28](../11/28.md). +ACT 18 2 db3t translate-names τῆς Ῥώμης 1 The word **Rome** is the name of a city. See how you translated the similar word “Romans” in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 3 q259 τὸ ὁμότεχνον εἶναι 1 he was of the same trade Alternate translation: “he did the same kind of work that they did” ACT 18 4 h3az διελέγετο δὲ 1 And he reasoned This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people. Alternate translation: “And Paul debated” or “And Paul discussed” ACT 18 4 r2gp ἔπειθέν τε Ἰουδαίους καὶ Ἕλληνας 1 persuading both Jews and Greeks This could mean: (1) “he caused both Jews and Greeks to believe” or (2) “he kept trying to persuade the Jews and the Greeks.” From 4674f6ad85360beeef5842607a2939f7230198c9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 18:13:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 130/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index a89648bfbc..9ee8e55ecc 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2559,10 +2559,11 @@ ACT 18 2 n631 translate-names τῆς Ἰταλίας 1 Italy The word **Italy** ACT 18 2 b06i translate-names Πρίσκιλλαν 1 The word **Priscilla** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 2 n95f translate-names Κλαύδιον 1 Claudius had ordered **Claudius** is the name of the man who was the Roman emperor at this time. See how you translated his name in [11:28](../11/28.md). ACT 18 2 db3t translate-names τῆς Ῥώμης 1 The word **Rome** is the name of a city. See how you translated the similar word “Romans” in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 3 q259 τὸ ὁμότεχνον εἶναι 1 he was of the same trade Alternate translation: “he did the same kind of work that they did” -ACT 18 4 h3az διελέγετο δὲ 1 And he reasoned This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people. Alternate translation: “And Paul debated” or “And Paul discussed” -ACT 18 4 r2gp ἔπειθέν τε Ἰουδαίους καὶ Ἕλληνας 1 persuading both Jews and Greeks This could mean: (1) “he caused both Jews and Greeks to believe” or (2) “he kept trying to persuade the Jews and the Greeks.” ACT 18 5 r56h 0 General Information: Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul. +ACT 18 5 btkg figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 Luke says that Silas and Timothy **came down** to Corinth because that city is lower in elevation than Macedonia. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 18 5 rjl6 figs-activepassive συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 18 5 vwj1 figs-personification συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 Luke speaks of **the word** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could constrain Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 18 5 bsgm figs-metonymy συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean preaching the message about Jesus by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 6 ncx8 translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια 1 shaking out his garment This is a symbolic action to indicate that Paul will no longer try to teach the Jews there about Jesus. He is leaving them to God’s judgment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 18 6 z12a figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Your blood be upon your head Here, **blood** stands for the guilt of their actions. Paul tells the Jews they are solely responsible for the judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone bear the responsibility for your punishment for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 6 pacx figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Here, **head** refers to the whole person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From db5cd3880bd7248bd9acbd89a2f27ed8176fd55c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 18:16:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 131/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 ++++++--- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 9ee8e55ecc..1a63798ca2 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2564,9 +2564,12 @@ ACT 18 5 btkg figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 Luke says that Silas and Timothy * ACT 18 5 rjl6 figs-activepassive συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 18 5 vwj1 figs-personification συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 Luke speaks of **the word** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could constrain Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 18 5 bsgm figs-metonymy συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean preaching the message about Jesus by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 18 6 ncx8 translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια 1 shaking out his garment This is a symbolic action to indicate that Paul will no longer try to teach the Jews there about Jesus. He is leaving them to God’s judgment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 18 6 z12a figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Your blood be upon your head Here, **blood** stands for the guilt of their actions. Paul tells the Jews they are solely responsible for the judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone bear the responsibility for your punishment for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 18 6 pacx figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Here, **head** refers to the whole person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 18 6 ncx8 translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια 1 shaking out his garment This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a place, in this case the synagogue, to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See what you did with the similar gesture in [13:51](../13/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 18 6 z12a figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Your blood be upon your head Here, **blood** represents punishment, specifically for rejecting Jesus. Paul is telling the Jews that they are solely responsible for the divine judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone must bear the responsibility when God punishes you for rejecting Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 6 pacx figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Paul is figuratively using one part of a person, the **head**, to represent all of a person in the act of deciding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your punishment is your responsibility” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 18 6 ezpo figs-youplural τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 The word **your** is plural. Paul is speaking to all the Jews in the synagogue, so use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural]]) +ACT 18 6 vwpg τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Since Paul is speaking to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **head**. Alternate translation: “your heads” +ACT 18 6 aq99 figs-metaphor καθαρὸς ἐγώ 1 Paul is speaking figuratively as if he were physically **clean**. He means that he is satisfied in his conscience that he has fulfilled his duty to proclaim the gospel to these Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have fulfilled my duty in proclaiming the gospel to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 7 cd3u εἰσῆλθεν 1 Here the word **he** refers to Paul. ACT 18 7 vs6y translate-names Τιτίου Ἰούστου 1 Titius Justus **Titius Justus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 7 v8xg σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν 1 who worships God A worshiper of God is a Gentile who gives praise to God and follows him but does not necessarily obey all of the Jewish laws. From b8a3762847792230f4426aeea1d1a0ddb625092f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 18:17:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 132/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++--- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 1a63798ca2..ef895dca6d 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2570,9 +2570,8 @@ ACT 18 6 pacx figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφ ACT 18 6 ezpo figs-youplural τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 The word **your** is plural. Paul is speaking to all the Jews in the synagogue, so use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural]]) ACT 18 6 vwpg τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Since Paul is speaking to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **head**. Alternate translation: “your heads” ACT 18 6 aq99 figs-metaphor καθαρὸς ἐγώ 1 Paul is speaking figuratively as if he were physically **clean**. He means that he is satisfied in his conscience that he has fulfilled his duty to proclaim the gospel to these Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have fulfilled my duty in proclaiming the gospel to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 18 7 cd3u εἰσῆλθεν 1 Here the word **he** refers to Paul. -ACT 18 7 vs6y translate-names Τιτίου Ἰούστου 1 Titius Justus **Titius Justus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 7 v8xg σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν 1 who worships God A worshiper of God is a Gentile who gives praise to God and follows him but does not necessarily obey all of the Jewish laws. +ACT 18 7 v8xg figs-idiom τινὸς…σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν 1 who worships God See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile man who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 18 7 vs6y translate-names Τιτίου Ἰούστου 1 Titius Justus The words **Titius Justus** are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 8 lj2t translate-names Κρίσπος 1 Crispus **Crispus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 8 kkk9 ἀρχισυνάγωγος 1 leader of the synagogue The **leader of the synagogue** was a layperson who sponsored and administered the synagogue, but not necessarily the teacher. ACT 18 8 uaq5 figs-metonymy ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 all those in his house Here, **house** refers to the people who lived together. Alternate translation: “the people who lived with him in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 9bf8d05047cd9a98d12723481bfaf28119b3f04e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 18:20:09 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 133/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 +++++---- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index ef895dca6d..1906b4826a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2572,10 +2572,11 @@ ACT 18 6 vwpg τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Since Paul is speaking to a ACT 18 6 aq99 figs-metaphor καθαρὸς ἐγώ 1 Paul is speaking figuratively as if he were physically **clean**. He means that he is satisfied in his conscience that he has fulfilled his duty to proclaim the gospel to these Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have fulfilled my duty in proclaiming the gospel to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 7 v8xg figs-idiom τινὸς…σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν 1 who worships God See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile man who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 7 vs6y translate-names Τιτίου Ἰούστου 1 Titius Justus The words **Titius Justus** are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 8 lj2t translate-names Κρίσπος 1 Crispus **Crispus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 8 kkk9 ἀρχισυνάγωγος 1 leader of the synagogue The **leader of the synagogue** was a layperson who sponsored and administered the synagogue, but not necessarily the teacher. -ACT 18 8 uaq5 figs-metonymy ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 all those in his house Here, **house** refers to the people who lived together. Alternate translation: “the people who lived with him in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 18 8 t3np figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 were being baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 18 8 lj2t translate-names Κρίσπος 1 Crispus The word **Crispus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 8 zc89 writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) +ACT 18 8 uaq5 figs-metonymy ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 all those in his house Here, **house** refers figuratively to an entire household living together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his entire household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 8 ykso translate-names Κορινθίων 1 The word **Corinthians** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Corinth. See how you translated that name in [18:1](../18/01.md). . (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 8 t3np figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 were being baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 18 9 ws7p figs-parallelism μὴ φοβοῦ, ἀλλὰ λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 Do not be afraid, but continue speaking and do not be silent The Lord is giving one command in two different ways to emphasize that Paul should certainly continue preaching. Alternate translation: “You must not be afraid and, instead, continue to speak and not become silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) ACT 18 9 zg8a figs-doublet λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 continue speaking and do not be silent The Lord gives the same command in two different ways to strongly command Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 18 9 a529 figs-explicit μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 do not be silent It can be stated explicitly what the Lord wants Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “do not stop speaking about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 22cc64505dbd7aeabf020594e25b2b2931bb4b92 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 18:23:45 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 134/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 1906b4826a..9bf303fe06 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2577,9 +2577,10 @@ ACT 18 8 zc89 writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus ACT 18 8 uaq5 figs-metonymy ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 all those in his house Here, **house** refers figuratively to an entire household living together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his entire household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 8 ykso translate-names Κορινθίων 1 The word **Corinthians** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Corinth. See how you translated that name in [18:1](../18/01.md). . (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 8 t3np figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 were being baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 18 9 ws7p figs-parallelism μὴ φοβοῦ, ἀλλὰ λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 Do not be afraid, but continue speaking and do not be silent The Lord is giving one command in two different ways to emphasize that Paul should certainly continue preaching. Alternate translation: “You must not be afraid and, instead, continue to speak and not become silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -ACT 18 9 zg8a figs-doublet λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 continue speaking and do not be silent The Lord gives the same command in two different ways to strongly command Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ACT 18 9 a529 figs-explicit μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 do not be silent It can be stated explicitly what the Lord wants Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “do not stop speaking about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 18 9 ws7p figs-explicit μὴ φοβοῦ 1 Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not **fear** what people might do to him if he continued proclaiming the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Do not fear what people might do to you if you continue proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 18 9 l4yy writing-politeness ὁ Κύριος 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) +ACT 18 9 zg8a figs-doublet λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 continue speaking and do not be silent The expressions **speak** and **do not be silent** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +ACT 18 9 a529 figs-explicit μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 do not be silent Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not **be silent** about the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “do not be silent about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 18 10 a8lq λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 I have many people in this city Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who have put their faith in me” or “many people in this city will put their faith in me” ACT 18 11 mqx2 writing-endofstory ἐκάθισεν δὲ ἐνιαυτὸν καὶ μῆνας ἓξ, διδάσκων ἐν αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 And so he stayed there for a year and six months, teaching the word of God among them This is a concluding statement for this part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 18 11 a18w figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **word of God** is a synecdoche for the entire Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From b214c3af85885deb66c2ad6203774f4f44546946 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 18:24:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 135/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 9bf303fe06..e86fd86377 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2581,7 +2581,8 @@ ACT 18 9 ws7p figs-explicit μὴ φοβοῦ 1 Jesus means implicitly that Pau ACT 18 9 l4yy writing-politeness ὁ Κύριος 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 18 9 zg8a figs-doublet λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 continue speaking and do not be silent The expressions **speak** and **do not be silent** mean similar things. Jesus is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 18 9 a529 figs-explicit μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 do not be silent Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not **be silent** about the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “do not be silent about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 18 10 a8lq λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 I have many people in this city Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who have put their faith in me” or “many people in this city will put their faith in me” +ACT 18 10 isn8 writing-pronouns ἐγώ εἰμι μετὰ σοῦ 1 Jesus is stating the pronoun **I**, which is already implied in the verb **am**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I am certainly with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 18 10 a8lq figs-possession λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 I have many people in this city This means “many people in this city are mine.” Jesus is using the possessive form to indicate that these people are loyal to him. Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who are loyal to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 18 11 mqx2 writing-endofstory ἐκάθισεν δὲ ἐνιαυτὸν καὶ μῆνας ἓξ, διδάσκων ἐν αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 And so he stayed there for a year and six months, teaching the word of God among them This is a concluding statement for this part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 18 11 a18w figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **word of God** is a synecdoche for the entire Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 18 12 f41k translate-names τῆς Ἀχαΐας 1 **Achaia** was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From b7330073684e430fe8fe64c4426c05030fff40d6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 18:27:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 136/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index e86fd86377..4c029ac60b 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1918,7 +1918,7 @@ ACT 13 17 tbc4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 See the discussion in the General No ACT 13 17 l9cn figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 our fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 17 aaj5 figs-metonymy τὸν λαὸν ὕψωσεν 1 exalted the people When Paul says that God **exalted the people** of Israel when they were in Egypt, he is referring figuratively to the way God made them great in number and strength even while they were still slaves. Alternate translation: “greatly enlarged their population” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 17 vw4z figs-metonymy μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ 1 with an uplifted arm Here, **an uplifted arm** figuratively describes God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 13 18 zv9e translate-textvariants ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς 1 he put up with them This means “he put up with their disobedience.” Some ancient copies have a different word that means “he took care of them,” which makes sense, since in this part of his speech, Paul is listing all of the good things that God did for the Israelites. If the reading **put up with them** is correct, Paul may be foreshadowing the warning he gives at the end of his speech in [13:40–41](../13/40.md). If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. Alternate translation: “he took care of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +ACT 13 18 zv9e translate-textvariants ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς 1 he put up with them This means “he put up with their disobedience.” Some ancient copies have a different word that means “he took care of them,” which makes sense, since in this part of his speech, Paul is listing all of the good things that God did for the Israelites. Paul would be quoting Deuteronomy 1:13 from a well-known Greek translation. If the reading **put up with them** is correct, Paul may be foreshadowing the warning he gives at the end of his speech in [13:40–41](../13/40.md). If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. Alternate translation: “he took care of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 13 19 nvp7 writing-pronouns κατεκληρονόμησεν τὴν γῆν αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to God, the pronoun **them** refers to the Israelites, and the pronoun **their** refers to the seven nations that God destroyed. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God gave the Israelites for an inheritance the land that these seven nations had previously occupied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 13 20 xyg6 figs-ellipsis ὡς ἔτεσι τετρακοσίοις καὶ πεντήκοντα 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “All these events took place over a period of about 450 years.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 13 20 qmc8 figs-metonymy ἔδωκεν κριτὰς ἕως Σαμουὴλ προφήτου 1 until Samuel the prophet This could mean: (1) that God gave the Israelites a series of judges and Samuel was the last of them. Alternate translation: “he gave them a series of judges ending with Samuel, who was also a prophet” (2) that the phrase ** Samuel the prophet** figuratively represents the time period associated with Samuel. Alternate translation: “until the time of Samuel the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 161cae28a9d3a1b895009af655fd6c032c59605c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 18:29:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 137/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 4c029ac60b..2740c1000b 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1975,7 +1975,7 @@ ACT 13 32 h6ch figs-explicit τὴν πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ἐπα ACT 13 32 hr2g figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 our fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 33 b1uh translate-versebridge 1 God has fulfilled this for our children It may be helpful to create a verse bridge that combines verse 32 with the first part of verse 33. You could say something like this: “And we are proclaiming to you that by raising Jesus, God has completely fulfilled for our children the promise he made to our fathers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 13 33 t0wt figs-explicit ταύτην 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will know that by **this**, he means the promise he described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 33 dy6w translate-textvariants τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 for our children Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” which makes sense, since Paul is saying that this promise was fulfilled in his own generation, not in the next generation. Paul would also speak of God fulfilling a promise he made for the children of the people to whom he made the promise, not for the children of others. If the reading **for our children** is correct, Paul may mean “for the children of us Israelites.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +ACT 13 33 dy6w translate-textvariants τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 for our children Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” which makes sense, since Paul is saying that this promise was fulfilled in his own generation, not in the next generation. If the reading **for our children** is correct, Paul may mean “for the children of us Israelites.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 13 33 t176 figs-metaphor τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 If this is the correct reading, then Paul may be using the term **children** figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “for our descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 33 d95n figs-idiom ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν 1 by raising up Jesus Here, **raising up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “by causing Jesus to live again after he had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 33 y3tz figs-activepassive ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 As it is also written in the second Psalm If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “As we can also read in the second Psalm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 6400c32d92fe621863209ff4540f7d8513fcbdb0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 29 Sep 2022 18:33:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 138/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 2740c1000b..6dbdd1b903 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ ACT 3 21 a2m8 figs-idiom ἀπ’ αἰῶνος 1 from the age This is an idiom ACT 3 21 a12i figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων…αὐτοῦ προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of his holy prophets Peter is figuratively using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 22 a232 figs-quotesinquotes Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Moses indeed said, ‘The Lord our God will raise up for you a prophet like me from your brothers. You will listen to him according to everything—whatever he may speak to you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 3 22 a233 translate-names Μωϋσῆς 1 Moses **Moses** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 3 22 a249 translate-textvariants Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 The Lord our God Some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God,” and still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +ACT 3 22 a249 translate-textvariants Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 The Lord our God Some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 somewhat loosely but with the same basic meaning. ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 exactly. Still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 3 22 a250 figs-exclusive Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 The Lord our God Moses is speaking of himself and his fellow Israelites, whom he is addressing, so use the inclusive form of the word **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 3 22 v5nf figs-idiom ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει 1 will raise up for you Here the expression **raise up** does not mean “bring back to life,” as it did in [2:24](../02/24.md) and [2:32](../02/32.md). In this context, it refers instead to God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people with a message for them. Alternate translation: “will send to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 3 22 t8di figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν 1 your brothers Moses is using the term **brothers** to mean people who are fellow descendants with his listeners of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 8125804a6b43bfc5a5e522b7ad58abbb811d27d8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 12:04:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 139/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 13 ++++--------- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 1d99a1cac9..53bddb3b98 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1046,15 +1046,10 @@ MAT 14 19 bf1a figs-ellipsis εὐλόγησεν καὶ κλάσας 1 the loav MAT 14 19 t7ei figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις 1 Having looked up Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the disciples gave the loaves to the crowds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 14 20 l2h8 figs-activepassive καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν 1 and were filled If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your languages in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 14 21 als7 translate-numbers ἄνδρες…πεντακισχίλιοι 1 5,000 men Alternate translation: “five thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -MAT 14 22 yp8l 0 General Information: Verses 22-24 give background information about the miracle that Jesus is about to perform of walking on water. -MAT 14 22 wt1t καὶ εὐθέως ἠνάγκασεν 1 And immediately he made Alternate translation: “And as soon as Jesus had finished feeding all the people, he made” -MAT 14 23 d27u ὀψίας δὲ γενομένης 1 Now evening having come about Alternate translation: “Now late in the evening” or “Now when it became dark” -MAT 14 24 vzd1 ἦν βασανιζόμενον ὑπὸ τῶν κυμάτων 1 was being tossed about by the waves Alternate translation: “and the disciples could not control the boat because of the large waves” -MAT 14 25 pmw8 τετάρτῃ δὲ φυλακῇ τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Now in the fourth watch of the night The fourth watch is between 3 AM and sunrise. Alternate translation: “Now just before dawn” -MAT 14 25 t1vp περιπατῶν ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 walking on the sea Alternate translation: “walking on top of the water” -MAT 14 26 q9qs ἐταράχθησαν 1 were greatly troubled Alternate translation: “were very afraid” -MAT 14 26 h7df φάντασμά 1 a ghost The people of that time believes that a **ghost** was a spirit that has left the body of a person who had died. -MAT 14 28 w2pl ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ αὐτῷ, ὁ Πέτρος εἶπεν 1 but answering him, Peter said Alternate translation: “but Peter answered Jesus and said” +MAT 14 22 yp8l writing-background ἠνάγκασεν τοὺς μαθητὰς ἐμβῆναι εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, καὶ προάγειν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ πέραν, ἕως οὗ ἀπολύσῃ τοὺς ὄχλους 1 General Information: Matthew is providing background for the next story about Jesus walking on the water. information Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus was making the disciples to get into the boat to the other side before him while he was sending away the crowds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MAT 14 24 vzd1 writing-background τὸ δὲ πλοῖον ἤδη μέσον τῆς θαλάσσης ἦν βασανιζόμενον ὑπὸ τῶν κυμάτων, ἦν γὰρ ἐναντίος ὁ ἄνεμος 1 was being tossed about by the waves Matthew provides more information to help the reader understand the follow verses. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “The boat was already in the middle of the sea, and was being tossed around by waves because of a strong opposing wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MAT 14 25 pmw8 translate-unknown τετάρτῃ δὲ φυλακῇ τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Now in the fourth watch of the night If your readers would not understand the phrase **fourth watch**, you can state what it means explicitly. Alternate translation: “some time just before the sun rose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 14 26 h7df figs-quotations λέγοντες, ὅτι φάντασμά 1 a ghost If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that he is a ghost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MAT 14 30 sk3j figs-idiom βλέπων…τὸν ἄνεμον ἰσχυρὸν 1 seeing the strong wind Here, **seeing** the **wind** means he became aware of the wind. Alternate translation: “when Peter saw that the wind was tossing the waves back and forth” or “when he realized how strong the wind was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 14 31 bd2v ὀλιγόπιστε, εἰς τί 1 You of little faith, why Jesus addressed Peter this way because Peter became afraid. It can also be translated as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You have so little faith! Why” MAT 14 31 ia1d figs-explicit εἰς τί ἐδίστασας? 1 why did you doubt? You can make explicit what Peter doubted. Alternate translation: “why did you doubt that I could keep you from sinking?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From e15153ccc5f0d22b7d6d49a54d29c41f3cc09844 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 14:28:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 140/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 6dbdd1b903..83e96cab39 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1819,7 +1819,7 @@ ACT 12 20 l5gl writing-pronouns ἦν…θυμομαχῶν 1 The pronoun **he* ACT 12 20 osyv translate-names Τυρίοις…Σιδωνίοις 1 **Tyrians** is the name for people from the city of Tyre, and **Sidonians** is the name for people from the city of Sidon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 12 20 mpgk figs-go ὁμοθυμαδὸν…παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went to him unanimously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 12 20 gxs4 figs-synecdoche ὁμοθυμαδὸν…παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 they went to him together It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon came to Herod. Instead, they sent representatives. Luke is using the names of their groups to refer to one part of those groups, these representatives. Alternate translation: “they sent representatives to him unanimously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 12 20 oln5 ὁμοθυμαδὸν…παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 The word **unanimously** indicates that the Tyrians and Sidonians recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. Alternate translation: “they agreed together to send representatives to him” +ACT 12 20 oln5 ὁμοθυμαδὸν…παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 The word **unanimously** indicates that the Tyrians and Sidonians recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. See how you translated the same word in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “they agreed together to send representatives to him” ACT 12 20 qsg4 translate-names Βλάστον 1 Blastus The word **Blastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 12 20 qqj9 translate-unknown τὸν ἐπὶ τοῦ κοιτῶνος τοῦ βασιλέως 1 This phrase indicates that Blastus was an official whom the king trusted with important responsibilities for his personal affairs. In your translation, use the word or phrase for the most comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “the king’s chamberlain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 12 20 l5r1 figs-abstractnouns ᾐτοῦντο εἰρήνην 1 they asked for peace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they were asking the king to restore peaceful relations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 1b579479193efdad2ecfa4a6ef278875ed74307a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 14:28:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 141/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 83e96cab39..824e9c76dd 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2297,7 +2297,7 @@ ACT 15 41 s7yf figs-metonymy ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας ACT 15 41 tbv3 figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 strengthening the churches Luke does not mean that Paul and Silas strengthened the people of the churches physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes\n\n\r\r## Structure and formatting\r\r- Verses 1–5 describe how Paul began his second missionary journey and met Timothy and brought him along with him.\r- Verses 6–12 describe how the Holy Spirit led Paul and his companions to share the gospel in the city of Philippi\r- Verses 13–40 describe how Paul and Silas made disciples in Philippi, delivered a young woman from an evil spirit, and were imprisoned but miraculously released. \r\rActs [16:5](../16/05.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the fourth major part of the book.\r\r## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\r\r### Timothy’s circumcision\n\n\r\rPaul circumcised Timothy because he and Silas were telling the message of Jesus to Jews as well as to Gentiles. Many Jews would have been so offended that Timothy was not circumcised, even though his mother was Jewish, that they would not have listened to the message. Paul felt that he could have Timothy circumcised as a discretionary matter to remove an offense to hearing the gospel, even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Gentile believers did not have to be circumcised.\n\n\r ACT 16 1 m5tb figs-synecdoche κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas also came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 16 1 rhut figs-idiom κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Derbe and Lystra because that was the customary way in this culture describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Paul likely travel by sea from Syria to Cilicia, and Luke is saying that he then also went to Derbe and to Lystra. Alternate translation: “he also traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 16 1 rhut figs-idiom κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Derbe and Lystra because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Paul likely travel by sea from Syria to Cilicia, and Luke is saying that he then also went to Derbe and to Lystra. Alternate translation: “he also traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 1 km5q figs-go κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Paul also came down If you retain the idiom, it may be more natural in your language to say “went” rather than **came**. Alternate translation: “he also went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 16 1 u3vr figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on the new character he is about to introduce. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 1 f49m writing-participants μαθητής τις ἦν ἐκεῖ ὀνόματι Τιμόθεος, υἱὸς γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς, πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain disciple** to introduce **Timothy** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a disciple there named Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) From 0579284c8d912cbe4f7c13f152c7b0afd5179705 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 14:30:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 142/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 824e9c76dd..cd47577000 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2583,8 +2583,7 @@ ACT 18 9 zg8a figs-doublet λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 continue ACT 18 9 a529 figs-explicit μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 do not be silent Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not **be silent** about the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “do not be silent about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 18 10 isn8 writing-pronouns ἐγώ εἰμι μετὰ σοῦ 1 Jesus is stating the pronoun **I**, which is already implied in the verb **am**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I am certainly with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 18 10 a8lq figs-possession λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 I have many people in this city This means “many people in this city are mine.” Jesus is using the possessive form to indicate that these people are loyal to him. Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who are loyal to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ACT 18 11 mqx2 writing-endofstory ἐκάθισεν δὲ ἐνιαυτὸν καὶ μῆνας ἓξ, διδάσκων ἐν αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 And so he stayed there for a year and six months, teaching the word of God among them This is a concluding statement for this part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 18 11 a18w figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **word of God** is a synecdoche for the entire Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 18 11 a18w figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God wanted Paul to teach by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 12 f41k translate-names τῆς Ἀχαΐας 1 **Achaia** was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 12 b5bf 0 Connecting Statement: The unbelieving Jews bring Paul to the judgment seat before Gallio. ACT 18 12 se8m translate-names Γαλλίωνος 1 Gallio **Gallio** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From fd9c2c2ef5987b9520b51bb4c3a3f57bb4d8e219 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 14:33:28 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 143/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index cd47577000..59f815a175 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2584,12 +2584,12 @@ ACT 18 9 a529 figs-explicit μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 do not be silent Jesus mea ACT 18 10 isn8 writing-pronouns ἐγώ εἰμι μετὰ σοῦ 1 Jesus is stating the pronoun **I**, which is already implied in the verb **am**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I am certainly with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 18 10 a8lq figs-possession λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 I have many people in this city This means “many people in this city are mine.” Jesus is using the possessive form to indicate that these people are loyal to him. Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who are loyal to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 18 11 a18w figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God wanted Paul to teach by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 18 12 f41k translate-names τῆς Ἀχαΐας 1 **Achaia** was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 12 b5bf 0 Connecting Statement: The unbelieving Jews bring Paul to the judgment seat before Gallio. -ACT 18 12 se8m translate-names Γαλλίωνος 1 Gallio **Gallio** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 12 j762 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** stands for the Jewish leaders that did not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 18 12 lp79 κατεπέστησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 rose up together against Alternate translation: “came together against” or “joined together to attack” -ACT 18 12 u36c figs-metonymy ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα 1 brought him before the judgment seat The Jews took Paul by force to bring Paul before the court. Here, **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio sat when he made legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “took him so that the governor could judge him at the judgment seat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 12 se8m translate-names Γαλλίωνος 1 Gallio The word **Gallio** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 12 f41k translate-names τῆς Ἀχαΐας 1 The word **Achaia** was the name of the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 12 j762 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 18 12 lp79 figs-idiom κατεπέστησαν 1 rose up together against Here the expression **rose up** means that the Jewish leaders took action, specifically to oppose Paul, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 18 12 rc85 ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 The word **unanimously** indicates that the Jews in Corinth recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. See how you translated the same word in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “all together” +ACT 18 12 u36c figs-explicit ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα 1 brought him before the judgment seat The term **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio the governor sat when he made legal decisions in court. The implication is that the Jewish leaders wanted Gallio to judge and punish Paul. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “brought him before the judgment seat so that the governor would judge and punish him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 18 14 d13b ὁ Γαλλίων 1 Gallio **Gallio** was the Roman governor of the Province. ACT 18 15 y6mt νόμου τοῦ καθ’ ὑμᾶς 1 your law Here, **law** refers to the law of Moses and as well as the Jewish customs of Paul’s time. ACT 18 15 khr5 κριτὴς ἐγὼ τούτων οὐ βούλομαι εἶναι 1 I do not want to be a judge of these matters Alternate translation: “I refuse to make a judgment about these matters” From b3c418958ab3e21714a44455a551e160567038fa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 14:36:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 144/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 +++ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 59f815a175..b2824f388f 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2590,6 +2590,9 @@ ACT 18 12 j762 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using ACT 18 12 lp79 figs-idiom κατεπέστησαν 1 rose up together against Here the expression **rose up** means that the Jewish leaders took action, specifically to oppose Paul, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 12 rc85 ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 The word **unanimously** indicates that the Jews in Corinth recognized that they had a common interest and that they agreed to act together to pursue that interest. See how you translated the same word in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “all together” ACT 18 12 u36c figs-explicit ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα 1 brought him before the judgment seat The term **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio the governor sat when he made legal decisions in court. The implication is that the Jewish leaders wanted Gallio to judge and punish Paul. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “brought him before the judgment seat so that the governor would judge and punish him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 18 13 xpnq writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “This man Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 18 13 x23b figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀνθρώπους 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, the Jewish leaders is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +ACT 18 13 il8i figs-explicit παρὰ τὸν νόμον 1 By **the law**, the Jewish leaders implicitly mean “Roman law.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “contrary to Roman law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 18 14 d13b ὁ Γαλλίων 1 Gallio **Gallio** was the Roman governor of the Province. ACT 18 15 y6mt νόμου τοῦ καθ’ ὑμᾶς 1 your law Here, **law** refers to the law of Moses and as well as the Jewish customs of Paul’s time. ACT 18 15 khr5 κριτὴς ἐγὼ τούτων οὐ βούλομαι εἶναι 1 I do not want to be a judge of these matters Alternate translation: “I refuse to make a judgment about these matters” From 3543dcf7c07241f0debbdc146b0c4f37d4e5e769 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 14:39:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 145/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++++- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index b2824f388f..3d13fa6f33 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2593,7 +2593,10 @@ ACT 18 12 u36c figs-explicit ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα ACT 18 13 xpnq writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “This man Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 18 13 x23b figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀνθρώπους 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, the Jewish leaders is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 18 13 il8i figs-explicit παρὰ τὸν νόμον 1 By **the law**, the Jewish leaders implicitly mean “Roman law.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “contrary to Roman law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 18 14 d13b ὁ Γαλλίων 1 Gallio **Gallio** was the Roman governor of the Province. +ACT 18 14 uhyp figs-metonymy ἀνοίγειν τὸ στόμα 1 Luke is referring figuratively to speaking by association with a person would **open his mouth** in order to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 14 cesw figs-synecdoche τοὺς Ἰουδαίους 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 18 14 argm figs-ellipsis εἰ μὲν ἦν ἀδίκημά τι ἢ ῥᾳδιούργημα πονηρόν 1 Gallio is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “if indeed it was some crime or evil wrongdoing on Paul’s part that brought you here today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 18 14 psxf figs-doublet ἀδίκημά τι ἢ ῥᾳδιούργημα πονηρόν 1 The terms **crime** and **wrongdoing** mean similar things. Gallio using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “some serious crime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 18 15 y6mt νόμου τοῦ καθ’ ὑμᾶς 1 your law Here, **law** refers to the law of Moses and as well as the Jewish customs of Paul’s time. ACT 18 15 khr5 κριτὴς ἐγὼ τούτων οὐ βούλομαι εἶναι 1 I do not want to be a judge of these matters Alternate translation: “I refuse to make a judgment about these matters” ACT 18 16 d6nh figs-metonymy ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος 1 he sent them away from the judgment seat Here, **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From dfc6f27829b3e061d7b704a98284cfba398b86ba Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 16:11:55 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 146/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 +++++-- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 3d13fa6f33..1f38094673 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2597,8 +2597,11 @@ ACT 18 14 uhyp figs-metonymy ἀνοίγειν τὸ στόμα 1 Luke is refer ACT 18 14 cesw figs-synecdoche τοὺς Ἰουδαίους 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 18 14 argm figs-ellipsis εἰ μὲν ἦν ἀδίκημά τι ἢ ῥᾳδιούργημα πονηρόν 1 Gallio is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “if indeed it was some crime or evil wrongdoing on Paul’s part that brought you here today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 18 14 psxf figs-doublet ἀδίκημά τι ἢ ῥᾳδιούργημα πονηρόν 1 The terms **crime** and **wrongdoing** mean similar things. Gallio using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “some serious crime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ACT 18 15 y6mt νόμου τοῦ καθ’ ὑμᾶς 1 your law Here, **law** refers to the law of Moses and as well as the Jewish customs of Paul’s time. -ACT 18 15 khr5 κριτὴς ἐγὼ τούτων οὐ βούλομαι εἶναι 1 I do not want to be a judge of these matters Alternate translation: “I refuse to make a judgment about these matters” +ACT 18 15 reg7 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Gallio is speaking as if what follows was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker knows that it is certain or true, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +ACT 18 15 aaql figs-metonymy λόγου 1 By **word**, Gallio likely means speech, expressed in words, as opposed to action. He is saying that what Paul has been saying is not a matter of great importance if he has not actually committed any crime. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 15 p0kk figs-explicit ὀνομάτων 1 By **names**, Gallio likely means the question of whether Jesus can be called the Messiah. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. UST models one way to do that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 18 15 ywpd figs-declarative ὄψεσθε αὐτοί 1 Gallio is using a future statement to give an command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a command. Alternate translation: “you must see yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) +ACT 18 15 royp figs-idiom ὄψεσθε αὐτοί 1 By **see**, Gallio means investigate the matter and resolve it. Your language may have a similar idiom that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “you must see to it yourselves” or “you must look into it yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 16 d6nh figs-metonymy ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος 1 he sent them away from the judgment seat Here, **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 17 yf81 ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες 1 Here the word **they** probably refers to the Gentiles at the court. They reacted against the Jews who had brought Paul before the judgment seat ([Acts 18:12](../18/12.md)). ACT 18 17 cyk6 figs-hyperbole ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες 1 they all, having seized This may be an exaggeration to emphasize the strong feelings the people had. Alternate translation: “many people seized” or “many of them grabbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) From 76bbe4c620cf243282263516015955b35c2703af Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 16:15:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 147/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 ++++----- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 1f38094673..5f1e2798a7 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2603,11 +2603,10 @@ ACT 18 15 p0kk figs-explicit ὀνομάτων 1 By **names**, Gallio likely me ACT 18 15 ywpd figs-declarative ὄψεσθε αὐτοί 1 Gallio is using a future statement to give an command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a command. Alternate translation: “you must see yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) ACT 18 15 royp figs-idiom ὄψεσθε αὐτοί 1 By **see**, Gallio means investigate the matter and resolve it. Your language may have a similar idiom that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “you must see to it yourselves” or “you must look into it yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 16 d6nh figs-metonymy ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος 1 he sent them away from the judgment seat Here, **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 18 17 yf81 ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες 1 Here the word **they** probably refers to the Gentiles at the court. They reacted against the Jews who had brought Paul before the judgment seat ([Acts 18:12](../18/12.md)). -ACT 18 17 cyk6 figs-hyperbole ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες 1 they all, having seized This may be an exaggeration to emphasize the strong feelings the people had. Alternate translation: “many people seized” or “many of them grabbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 18 17 mj77 ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος 1 But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat This could mean: (1) the Gentiles beat Sosthenes in the court in front of the judgment seat because he was the Jewish leader or (2) it is possible that Sosthenes was a believer in Christ, so the Jews beat him in front of the court. -ACT 18 17 x9w5 translate-names Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον 1 Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue **Sosthenes** was the Jewish ruler of the synagogue at Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 17 z9fv ἔτυπτον 1 were beating him Alternate translation: “repeatedly hit him” or “repeatedly punched him” +ACT 18 17 x9w5 translate-names Σωσθένην 1 Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue The word **Sosthenes** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 17 ju3w figs-explicit τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον 1 Since Luke says in [18:8](../01/01.md) that Crispus was the synagogue leader in Corinth, the implication is that during the year and a half that had passed since then, another man, Sosthenes, had become the leader. Since the Jewish leaders who were hostile to Paul were also hostile to him, a further implication is that, like Crispus, Sosthenes had become a believer in Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. (However, see next note for another possibility that some interpreters favor.) Alternate translation: “the new synagogue leader, who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 18 17 mj77 figs-explicit ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος 1 But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat This could mean: (1) that the Jewish leaders were beating Sosthenes because he was a believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders were all beating him” (2) that the Gentiles who were present in the court beat Sosthenes because the Jews had caused trouble by bothering Gallio with an insignificant matter and Sosthenes was the synagogue leader. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles who were in the court were all beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 18 17 cyk6 figs-hyperbole πάντες…ἔτυπτον 1 they all, having seized Luke likely says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were angrily beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς…εἶχεν 1 Here the words **He** and **he** refer to Paul. **Cenchreae** was a seaport that was part of the greater Corinth city area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 18 ura9 0 Connecting Statement: This continues Paul’s missionary journey as Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila leave Corinth. This seems to indicate that Silas and Timothy remain since it says “he” here and not “we.” ACT 18 18 et8c figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἀποταξάμενος 1 left the brothers The word **brothers** refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “left the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) From 467efff3bb1f54e47aec2dc5a0f19e30f08b0e49 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 16:19:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 148/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 11 ++++++----- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 5f1e2798a7..aa38e1029b 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2607,11 +2607,12 @@ ACT 18 17 x9w5 translate-names Σωσθένην 1 Sosthenes, the ruler of the sy ACT 18 17 ju3w figs-explicit τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον 1 Since Luke says in [18:8](../01/01.md) that Crispus was the synagogue leader in Corinth, the implication is that during the year and a half that had passed since then, another man, Sosthenes, had become the leader. Since the Jewish leaders who were hostile to Paul were also hostile to him, a further implication is that, like Crispus, Sosthenes had become a believer in Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. (However, see next note for another possibility that some interpreters favor.) Alternate translation: “the new synagogue leader, who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 18 17 mj77 figs-explicit ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος 1 But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat This could mean: (1) that the Jewish leaders were beating Sosthenes because he was a believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders were all beating him” (2) that the Gentiles who were present in the court beat Sosthenes because the Jews had caused trouble by bothering Gallio with an insignificant matter and Sosthenes was the synagogue leader. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles who were in the court were all beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 18 17 cyk6 figs-hyperbole πάντες…ἔτυπτον 1 they all, having seized Luke likely says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were angrily beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς…εἶχεν 1 Here the words **He** and **he** refer to Paul. **Cenchreae** was a seaport that was part of the greater Corinth city area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 18 ura9 0 Connecting Statement: This continues Paul’s missionary journey as Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila leave Corinth. This seems to indicate that Silas and Timothy remain since it says “he” here and not “we.” -ACT 18 18 et8c figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἀποταξάμενος 1 left the brothers The word **brothers** refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “left the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 18 18 v5kl ἐξέπλει εἰς τὴν Συρίαν, καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας 1 and sailed to Syria, and Priscilla and Aquila were with him Paul got on a ship that sailed for **Syria**. **Priscilla and Aquila** went with him. -ACT 18 18 kq6f translate-symaction κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow This is a symbolic action that indicates the completion of a **vow**. Alternate translation: “he had someone cut off the hair on his head in Cenchrea because he had completed a vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 18 18 j0we grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὁ δὲ Παῦλος ἔτι προσμείνας ἡμέρας ἱκανὰς 1 Luke is using the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between what Paul might have been expected to do—leave the city because he was in danger and to protect the believers from danger themselves, as he did in Thessalonica and Berea—and what Paul actually did—remain in the city. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless, Paul stayed yet many days, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +ACT 18 18 et8c figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 left the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names Κενχρεαῖς 1 The word **Cenchreae** is the name of a city. This city was the seaport for the larger inland city of Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 18 kq6f translate-symaction κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow Paul **shaved his head** to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Paul shaved his head in Cenchrea to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 18 18 ceor figs-infostructure εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Luke seems to offer the information that Paul had made a **vow** as the explanation for why he **stayed yet many days** in Corinth despite the danger he was in. It may be more natural in your translation to put this information right after the phrase it seems to explain, **having stayed many days**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +ACT 18 18 cf3c figs-extrainfo εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Luke tells us nothing further about why Paul made this vow or what he did to carry it out, so it would not be appropriate to add anything speculative about it in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) ACT 18 19 abcx κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν 1 he left them Alternate translation: “Paul left Priscilla and Aquilla” ACT 18 19 st93 διελέξατο 1 reasoned with Alternate translation: “discussed with” or “debated with” ACT 18 20 u44s ἐρωτώντων 1 Here the word “they” refers to the Jews in Ephesus. From 87cf9297c2b6071afff8b45749fadad16d405791 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 16:21:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 149/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index aa38e1029b..18c283016b 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2613,8 +2613,9 @@ ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names Κενχρεαῖς 1 The word **Cenchreae** is ACT 18 18 kq6f translate-symaction κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow Paul **shaved his head** to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Paul shaved his head in Cenchrea to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 18 18 ceor figs-infostructure εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Luke seems to offer the information that Paul had made a **vow** as the explanation for why he **stayed yet many days** in Corinth despite the danger he was in. It may be more natural in your translation to put this information right after the phrase it seems to explain, **having stayed many days**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 18 18 cf3c figs-extrainfo εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Luke tells us nothing further about why Paul made this vow or what he did to carry it out, so it would not be appropriate to add anything speculative about it in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -ACT 18 19 abcx κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν 1 he left them Alternate translation: “Paul left Priscilla and Aquilla” -ACT 18 19 st93 διελέξατο 1 reasoned with Alternate translation: “discussed with” or “debated with” +ACT 18 19 abcx writing-pronouns κατήντησαν δὲ εἰς Ἔφεσον, κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν αὐτοῦ 1 he left them The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila, the pronoun **them** refers to Priscilla and Aquila, and the pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the three of them came down to Ephesus and Paul left Priscilla and Aquila there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 18 19 eqi4 figs-idiom κατήντησαν…εἰς Ἔφεσον 1 Luke says that Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila **came down** to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Alternate translation: “they sailed to Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 18 19 yrhy translate-names Ἔφεσον 1 The word **Ephesus** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 20 u44s ἐρωτώντων 1 Here the word “they” refers to the Jews in Ephesus. ACT 18 21 iz1u ἀποταξάμενος 1 having left them Alternate translation: “when he had departed from them” ACT 18 22 p364 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues his missionary journey. From 2cd2ac3d417eaeaad2b138d1a3c402732f8d347e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 16:22:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 150/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 18c283016b..349bf48260 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2616,7 +2616,7 @@ ACT 18 18 cf3c figs-extrainfo εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Luke tells us n ACT 18 19 abcx writing-pronouns κατήντησαν δὲ εἰς Ἔφεσον, κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν αὐτοῦ 1 he left them The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila, the pronoun **them** refers to Priscilla and Aquila, and the pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the three of them came down to Ephesus and Paul left Priscilla and Aquila there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 18 19 eqi4 figs-idiom κατήντησαν…εἰς Ἔφεσον 1 Luke says that Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila **came down** to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Alternate translation: “they sailed to Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 19 yrhy translate-names Ἔφεσον 1 The word **Ephesus** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 20 u44s ἐρωτώντων 1 Here the word “they” refers to the Jews in Ephesus. +ACT 18 20 u44s writing-pronouns ἐρωτώντων…αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jews in the synagogue in Ephesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the Jews in the synagogue asked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 18 21 iz1u ἀποταξάμενος 1 having left them Alternate translation: “when he had departed from them” ACT 18 22 p364 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues his missionary journey. ACT 18 22 gyy4 κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 having landed at Caesarea The word **landed** is used to show that he arrived by ship. Alternate translation: “when he had arrived at Caesarea” From 6ce5c19359284d8b422c5edc1c700c6ac184ac83 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 19:49:06 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 151/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 349bf48260..f934cac921 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2528,7 +2528,7 @@ ACT 17 29 xfp9 figs-metonymy χρυσῷ, ἢ ἀργύρῳ, ἢ λίθῳ 1 P ACT 17 29 q4q2 figs-possession χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου 1 images of the skill and imagination of man Paul is using the possessive form not to mean images that resemble human **skill** and **imagination** but to describe the qualities that people use to create **images** or idols. Alternate translation: “images that people create by using their skill and imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 17 29 gnk6 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπου 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 17 30 h8uy figs-possession χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας 1 times of ignorance Paul is using the possessive form here not to describe **times** that were themselves ignorant but **times** when people were characterized by spiritual **ignorance**. Paul is referring to the times before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God. Alternate translation: “the times when people were ignorant of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ACT 17 30 qim5 figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις πάντας 1 all men Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +ACT 17 30 qim5 figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 all men Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 17 31 jt3a figs-metonymy τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 he is about to judge the world Here the term **world** refers to the people who live in the world. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 31 htp7 figs-abstractnouns ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ 1 in which he is about to judge the world in righteousness by the man whom he has appointed If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by his own righteous standards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 17 31 ebve figs-explicit ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν 1 By **the man**, Paul implicitly means Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “by Jesus, the man whom he has appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 264ea2660c64984b6ba865e00d6817445fc04e7e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 19:52:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 152/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 11 +++++------ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index f934cac921..f0150c18b9 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2617,12 +2617,11 @@ ACT 18 19 abcx writing-pronouns κατήντησαν δὲ εἰς Ἔφεσον ACT 18 19 eqi4 figs-idiom κατήντησαν…εἰς Ἔφεσον 1 Luke says that Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila **came down** to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Alternate translation: “they sailed to Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 19 yrhy translate-names Ἔφεσον 1 The word **Ephesus** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 20 u44s writing-pronouns ἐρωτώντων…αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jews in the synagogue in Ephesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the Jews in the synagogue asked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 18 21 iz1u ἀποταξάμενος 1 having left them Alternate translation: “when he had departed from them” -ACT 18 22 p364 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues his missionary journey. -ACT 18 22 gyy4 κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 having landed at Caesarea The word **landed** is used to show that he arrived by ship. Alternate translation: “when he had arrived at Caesarea” -ACT 18 22 r26z ἀναβὰς 1 having gone up He traveled to the city of Jerusalem. The phrase **gone up** is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea. -ACT 18 22 q9j6 figs-metonymy ἀσπασάμενος τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 greeted the church Here, **church** refers to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “greeted the members of the church of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 18 22 n3rh κατέβη 1 he went down The phrase **went down** is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. +ACT 18 22 gyy4 figs-idiom κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 having landed at Caesarea Luke says that Paul had **come down** to Caesarea because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “having landed in Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 18 22 bvw4 figs-explicit ἀναβὰς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **having gone up**, he means that Paul traveled to Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having gone up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 18 22 r26z figs-idiom ἀναβὰς 1 having gone up Luke says that Paul had **gone up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. Alternate translation: “having traveled to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 18 22 q9j6 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 greeted the church Luke is figuratively saying **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 22 n3rh figs-idiom κατέβη 1 he went down Luke says that Paul **went down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. Alternate translation: “he traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 23 h65j figs-metaphor καὶ ποιήσας χρόνον τινὰ 1 And having spent some time there This speaks about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after staying there for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 23 pww5 ἐξῆλθεν 1 he departed Alternate translation: “Paul went away” or “Paul left” ACT 18 23 pr6u Φρυγίαν 1 **Phrygia** is a province in Asia which is now modern day Turkey. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). From 8fc5388508f78bb7a5ac01557d6060a2cb942710 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 19:54:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 153/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++--- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index f0150c18b9..4e8d04cb03 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2622,9 +2622,8 @@ ACT 18 22 bvw4 figs-explicit ἀναβὰς 1 Luke assumes that his readers wil ACT 18 22 r26z figs-idiom ἀναβὰς 1 having gone up Luke says that Paul had **gone up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. Alternate translation: “having traveled to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 22 q9j6 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 greeted the church Luke is figuratively saying **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 22 n3rh figs-idiom κατέβη 1 he went down Luke says that Paul **went down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. Alternate translation: “he traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 18 23 h65j figs-metaphor καὶ ποιήσας χρόνον τινὰ 1 And having spent some time there This speaks about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after staying there for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 18 23 pww5 ἐξῆλθεν 1 he departed Alternate translation: “Paul went away” or “Paul left” -ACT 18 23 pr6u Φρυγίαν 1 **Phrygia** is a province in Asia which is now modern day Turkey. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). +ACT 18 23 plys figs-metonymy διερχόμενος καθεξῆς τὴν Γαλατικὴν χώραν καὶ Φρυγίαν 1 Luke means that Paul visited **in succession** the churches in **the region of Galatia and Phrygia**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could expeess the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “going through the region of Galatia and Phrygia and visiting the churches there in succession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 23 s2hd figs-hyperbole στηρίζων πάντας τοὺς μαθητάς 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “greatly strengthening the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 18 24 a7p9 writing-background Ἀπολλῶς 1 **Apollos** is introduced to the story. Verses 24 and 25 give background information about him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 18 24 xqy7 δέ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. ACT 18 24 n2b4 writing-participants Ἰουδαῖος…τις Ἀπολλῶς ὀνόματι 1 a certain Jew named Apollos The phrase **a certain** indicates that Luke is introducing **Apollos** as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) From 8b2eb2bab7cbd661922f1c43ca342079f8b4bb6e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 20:34:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 154/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 4e8d04cb03..4a3f583652 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2624,12 +2624,12 @@ ACT 18 22 q9j6 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 greeted the church Lu ACT 18 22 n3rh figs-idiom κατέβη 1 he went down Luke says that Paul **went down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. Alternate translation: “he traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 23 plys figs-metonymy διερχόμενος καθεξῆς τὴν Γαλατικὴν χώραν καὶ Φρυγίαν 1 Luke means that Paul visited **in succession** the churches in **the region of Galatia and Phrygia**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could expeess the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “going through the region of Galatia and Phrygia and visiting the churches there in succession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 23 s2hd figs-hyperbole στηρίζων πάντας τοὺς μαθητάς 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “greatly strengthening the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 18 24 a7p9 writing-background Ἀπολλῶς 1 **Apollos** is introduced to the story. Verses 24 and 25 give background information about him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 18 24 xqy7 δέ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. -ACT 18 24 n2b4 writing-participants Ἰουδαῖος…τις Ἀπολλῶς ὀνόματι 1 a certain Jew named Apollos The phrase **a certain** indicates that Luke is introducing **Apollos** as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 18 24 di14 translate-names Ἀλεξανδρεὺς τῷ γένει 1 an Alexandrian by birth Alexandria was a city in Egypt on the north coast of Africa. Alternate translation: “a man who was born in the city of Alexandria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 24 t4zi ἀνὴρ λόγιος 1 an eloquent man Alternate translation: “a good speaker” -ACT 18 24 bh25 δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς 1 He was mighty in the scriptures He understood the Old Testament writings well. Alternate translation: “he knew the scriptures thoroughly” +ACT 18 24 xqy7 writing-background δέ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about **Apollos** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 18 24 n2b4 writing-participants Ἰουδαῖος…τις Ἀπολλῶς ὀνόματι 1 a certain Jew named Apollos Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jewish man** to introduce **Apollos** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “that there was a certain Jew there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 18 24 gsal figs-nominaladj Ἰουδαῖος 1 Luke is using the adjective **Jewish** as a noun to mean a person who is a Jew. ULT adds **man** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this expression with an equivalent word or phrase. Alternate translation: “Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 18 24 di14 translate-names Ἀλεξανδρεὺς 1 an Alexandrian by birth The word **Alexandrian** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Alexandria in Egypt. See how you translated this name in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 24 qn7z figs-idiom κατήντησεν εἰς Ἔφεσον 1 Luke does not say where Apollos traveled from when he came to Ephesus. However, he probably says that Apollos **came down** to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “arrived in the port of Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 18 24 bh25 figs-metaphor δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς 1 He was mighty in the scriptures Luke is speaking of **Apollos** figuratively as if he had physical strength with regard to the Scriptures. Luke means that he knew the Scriptures very well. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having great knowledge about the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 25 z7a8 figs-activepassive οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 He had been instructed in the way of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught Apollos how the Lord Jesus wanted people to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 18 25 ift8 figs-synecdoche καὶ ζέων τῷ πνεύματι 1 and being fervent in spirit Here, **spirit** refers to the entire person of Apollos. Alternate translation: “and being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 18 25 lr1h τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου 1 the baptism of John This is comparing John’s **baptism** which was with water to Jesus’ baptism which is with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed” From 37ce8ef41f1a51d79a22ddda7b8be585b64a7d49 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 20:39:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 155/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 ++++++--- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 4a3f583652..dcf99670d8 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2630,9 +2630,12 @@ ACT 18 24 gsal figs-nominaladj Ἰουδαῖος 1 Luke is using the adjective ACT 18 24 di14 translate-names Ἀλεξανδρεὺς 1 an Alexandrian by birth The word **Alexandrian** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Alexandria in Egypt. See how you translated this name in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 24 qn7z figs-idiom κατήντησεν εἰς Ἔφεσον 1 Luke does not say where Apollos traveled from when he came to Ephesus. However, he probably says that Apollos **came down** to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “arrived in the port of Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 24 bh25 figs-metaphor δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς 1 He was mighty in the scriptures Luke is speaking of **Apollos** figuratively as if he had physical strength with regard to the Scriptures. Luke means that he knew the Scriptures very well. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having great knowledge about the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 18 25 z7a8 figs-activepassive οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 He had been instructed in the way of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught Apollos how the Lord Jesus wanted people to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 18 25 ift8 figs-synecdoche καὶ ζέων τῷ πνεύματι 1 and being fervent in spirit Here, **spirit** refers to the entire person of Apollos. Alternate translation: “and being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 18 25 lr1h τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου 1 the baptism of John This is comparing John’s **baptism** which was with water to Jesus’ baptism which is with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed” +ACT 18 25 ym5i figs-hendiadys ἐλάλει καὶ ἐδίδασκεν 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **speaking** tells how Apollos was **teaching** about Jesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he spoke, he taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +ACT 18 25 z7a8 figs-activepassive οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος 1 He had been instructed in the way of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 18 25 jj3b figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is speaking figuratively as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus were a **way** or path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 18 25 jwol writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) +ACT 18 25 ift8 figs-synecdoche ζέων τῷ πνεύματι 1 and being fervent in spirit Here the **spirit** figuratively represents a person’s feelings and motivation. Alternate translation: “being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 25 lr1h figs-possession τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου 1 the baptism of John Luke is using the possessive form here not to describe a **baptism** that **John** received but the baptism that John performed. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 18 26 muc2 Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας προσελάβοντο αὐτὸν, καὶ ἀκριβέστερον αὐτῷ ἐξέθεντο τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: Luke tells what happens in Ephesus with **Priscilla and Aquila**. ACT 18 26 ga6v figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the way of God How God wants people to live is spoken of as if it were a road that a person travels. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 26 k1lb ἀκριβέστερον 1 more accurately Alternate translation: “more correctly” or “more fully” From 0dd1365738eadefcc7c2fe96109b617ab20ae1d3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 20:40:08 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 156/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 +--- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index dcf99670d8..c6a0301ce1 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2636,9 +2636,7 @@ ACT 18 25 jj3b figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is ACT 18 25 jwol writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 18 25 ift8 figs-synecdoche ζέων τῷ πνεύματι 1 and being fervent in spirit Here the **spirit** figuratively represents a person’s feelings and motivation. Alternate translation: “being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 25 lr1h figs-possession τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου 1 the baptism of John Luke is using the possessive form here not to describe a **baptism** that **John** received but the baptism that John performed. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ACT 18 26 muc2 Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας προσελάβοντο αὐτὸν, καὶ ἀκριβέστερον αὐτῷ ἐξέθεντο τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: Luke tells what happens in Ephesus with **Priscilla and Aquila**. -ACT 18 26 ga6v figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the way of God How God wants people to live is spoken of as if it were a road that a person travels. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 18 26 k1lb ἀκριβέστερον 1 more accurately Alternate translation: “more correctly” or “more fully” +ACT 18 26 ga6v figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the way of God Luke is speaking figuratively as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus were a **way** or path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 27 c2sq αὐτοῦ…προτρεψάμενοι…αὐτόν…ὃς…συνεβάλετο πολὺ 1 Here the he words **he** and **him** refer to Apollos ([Acts 18:24](../18/24.md)). ACT 18 27 ll36 διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 to pass over into Achaia The phrase **pass over** is used here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Alternate translation: “to go to the region of Achaia” ACT 18 27 pql7 τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 Achaia **Achaia** was a Roman Province in the southern section of Greece. See how you translated this in [Acts 18:12](../18/12.md). From 58da0024402a6be9e4a4d3b3eb59285f76cba267 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 20:42:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 157/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 11 ++++------- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index c6a0301ce1..a598a60800 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2637,13 +2637,10 @@ ACT 18 25 jwol writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to J ACT 18 25 ift8 figs-synecdoche ζέων τῷ πνεύματι 1 and being fervent in spirit Here the **spirit** figuratively represents a person’s feelings and motivation. Alternate translation: “being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 25 lr1h figs-possession τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου 1 the baptism of John Luke is using the possessive form here not to describe a **baptism** that **John** received but the baptism that John performed. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 18 26 ga6v figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the way of God Luke is speaking figuratively as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus were a **way** or path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 18 27 c2sq αὐτοῦ…προτρεψάμενοι…αὐτόν…ὃς…συνεβάλετο πολὺ 1 Here the he words **he** and **him** refer to Apollos ([Acts 18:24](../18/24.md)). -ACT 18 27 ll36 διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 to pass over into Achaia The phrase **pass over** is used here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Alternate translation: “to go to the region of Achaia” -ACT 18 27 pql7 τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 Achaia **Achaia** was a Roman Province in the southern section of Greece. See how you translated this in [Acts 18:12](../18/12.md). -ACT 18 27 v2i6 figs-gendernotations οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers The word **brothers** here refers to both men and women believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 18 27 i5ij figs-explicit οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 You can make explicit that **the brothers** are believers in Ephesus. Alternate translation: “fellow believers in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 18 27 q5f2 ἔγραψαν τοῖς μαθηταῖς 1 and wrote to the disciples Alternate translation: “and wrote a letter to the Christians in Achaia” -ACT 18 27 f99p τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος 1 those who had believed by grace Alternate translation: “those who had believed in salvation by grace” or “those who by God’s grace believed in Jesus” +ACT 18 27 c2sq writing-pronouns βουλομένου…αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Apollos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when Apollos desired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 18 27 ll36 figs-idiom διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 to pass over into Achaia Luke uses the expression **pass over** here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Your language may have its own way of describing travel across a body of water. Alternate translation: “to go across the sea to Achaia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 18 27 v2i6 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 18 27 f99p figs-abstractnouns τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος 1 those who had believed by grace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those whom God had graciously led to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 18 28 l2zt εὐτόνως…τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις διακατηλέγχετο δημοσίᾳ 1 he was powerfully refuting the Jews publicly Alternate translation: “in public debate Apollos powerfully proved that the Jews were wrong” ACT 19 intro g38y 0 # Acts 19 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Baptism

John baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins. Jesus’ followers baptized people who wanted to follow Jesus.

### Temple of Diana

The temple of Diana was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Diana while they were there. The people who sold statues of Diana were afraid that if people did not believe Diana was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues. ACT 19 1 lp23 ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. From 5d215426062f9df32c39b76879391a445a2a6437 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 30 Sep 2022 20:43:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 158/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index a598a60800..376bd33b87 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2641,7 +2641,7 @@ ACT 18 27 c2sq writing-pronouns βουλομένου…αὐτοῦ 1 The prono ACT 18 27 ll36 figs-idiom διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 to pass over into Achaia Luke uses the expression **pass over** here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Your language may have its own way of describing travel across a body of water. Alternate translation: “to go across the sea to Achaia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 27 v2i6 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 27 f99p figs-abstractnouns τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος 1 those who had believed by grace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those whom God had graciously led to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 18 28 l2zt εὐτόνως…τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις διακατηλέγχετο δημοσίᾳ 1 he was powerfully refuting the Jews publicly Alternate translation: “in public debate Apollos powerfully proved that the Jews were wrong” +ACT 18 28 mw2n figs-abstractnouns δημοσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **public**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “publicly” or “where anyone could listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 19 intro g38y 0 # Acts 19 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Baptism

John baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins. Jesus’ followers baptized people who wanted to follow Jesus.

### Temple of Diana

The temple of Diana was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Diana while they were there. The people who sold statues of Diana were afraid that if people did not believe Diana was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues. ACT 19 1 lp23 ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. ACT 19 1 wu6p 0 Connecting Statement: Paul travels to Ephesus. From a6d6dce1c73d53f33a38f744e6cbf686dc54d2a4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Sat, 1 Oct 2022 11:27:26 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 159/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 376bd33b87..73f8ed6409 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2546,7 +2546,7 @@ ACT 17 32 jlm5 ἀκούσαντες 1 when they heard of These are the people ACT 17 32 sn6j οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον 1 some mocked him These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul” ACT 17 34 psh8 translate-names Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης 1 Dionysius the Areopagite The word **Dionysius** is the name of a man. The word **Areopagite** is the name for someone who was a member of a council of rulers and judges that met on the Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 34 hsz3 translate-names Δάμαρις 1 Damaris The word **Damaris** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The baptism of John

Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but this baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]]) +ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes\n\n\r\r## Structure and formatting\n\n\r\r- Verses 1–17 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Corinth.\r- Verses 18–23 describe how Paul returned to Antioch and then started out on another missionary journey.\r- Verses 24–28 describe how a man named Apollos became an effective preacher of the gospel.\r\r## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\r\r### The baptism of John\n\nSome Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but that kind of baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])\r ACT 18 1 fky7 writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things Luke is using the phrase **After these things** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 18 1 abcw writing-pronouns ἦλθεν 1 having departed The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 18 1 h2si translate-names Κόρινθον 1 Athens The word **Corinth** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From c55e063adabcadfdd3825ad28fd5bc0b2895f223 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Sat, 1 Oct 2022 11:38:55 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 160/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 73f8ed6409..afe19a9458 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -51,14 +51,14 @@ ACT 1 11 a022 figs-verbs οἳ…εἶπαν 1 they said If you retain the word ACT 1 11 gpg3 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι 1 Men, Galileans This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Galileans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 11 a023 translate-names ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι 1 Men, Galileans **Galileans** are people who are from the region of Galilee. Alternate translation: “You men from Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 1 11 a024 figs-rquestion τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν? 1 why do you stand looking into heaven? The angels are not looking for information. They are using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no reason for you to stand looking into heaven!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 1 11 a025 figs-idiom τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες 1 why do you stand looking This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “why do you keep looking” or “there is no reason for you to keep looking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 1 11 a025 figs-idiom τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες 1 why do you stand looking The expression **stand** means to continue doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “why do you keep looking” or “there is no reason for you to keep looking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 11 a026 figs-explicit ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν…ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν 1 who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into heaven In its second occurrence in this sentence, the term translated **heaven** likely means “the sky,” as in the previous sentence and in the previous verse. However, in its first occurrence in this sentence, the term likely means “heaven” itself. It would not be accurate to say that Jesus was just “taken up from you into the sky.” Alternate translation: “who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 11 a027 figs-activepassive ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς 1 who has been taken up If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has taken up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 11 cue7 ὃν τρόπον 1 in which manner Alternate translation: “in the same way in which” ACT 1 12 x2nk writing-pronouns ὑπέστρεψαν 1 they returned The word **they** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the apostles returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 1 12 a028 figs-activepassive ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος 1 the hill that is called Olivet If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” or “the hill whose name is Olivet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 12 a029 translate-names ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος 1 the hill that is called Olivet **Olivet** is the name of a hill. If your readers might recognize it better if you called it the Mount of Olives, you could use that name in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 1 12 a030 figs-idiom Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν 1 having a journey of a Sabbath This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath-day’s journey away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 1 12 a030 figs-idiom Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν 1 having a journey of a Sabbath The expression **having a journey** refers to a distance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath-day’s journey away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 12 p19g translate-unknown Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν 1 having a journey of a Sabbath The **journey of a Sabbath** was the distance that interpreters of the law of Moses had determined people could walk on the Sabbath without that being “work.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the distance in the measurement that your culture uses. Alternate translation: “about a kilometer away” or “about half a mile away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 1 13 vis2 figs-explicit ὅτε εἰσῆλθον 1 when they arrived The previous verse explains that the apostles returned to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that again explicitly here. Alternate translation: “when they arrived back in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 13 zt12 translate-unknown εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον, ἀνέβησαν οὗ ἦσαν καταμένοντες 1 they went up into the upper chamber where they were staying In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built on top of other rooms. The expression **upper chamber** describes such a room, which was reached by stairs. If your culture does not have houses like that, it may be helpful to explain the meaning of the expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “they climbed the stairs to the room where they were staying, which had been built on top of other rooms in the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ ACT 1 25 tx6n figs-euphemism πορευθῆναι εἰς τὸν τόπον τ ACT 1 26 a073 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the believers did as a result of Peter’s speech. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 1 26 r84c writing-pronouns ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς 1 they cast lots for them The pronoun **they** refers to the believers and the pronoun **them** refers to Joseph and Matthias. You may want to specify that for clarity. (But if you decide to retain the pronoun **them** and if your language marks the dual form, **them** would be dual because it refers to those two men.) Alternate translation: “the believers cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 1 26 a074 translate-unknown ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς 1 they cast lots for them The term **lots** describes objects with various markings on different sides that were used, most likely by dropping them on the ground, to select between possibilities. The belief was that God would control which way these objects fell and so guide the selection process. Alternate translation: “they threw marked objects on the ground, trusting that God would use these to guide them whether to choose Joseph or Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 1 26 w4ph figs-idiom ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν 1 the lot fell to Matthias This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the lot selected Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 1 26 w4ph figs-idiom ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν 1 the lot fell to Matthias The word **fell** means "selected." If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the lot selected Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 26 fk4x figs-activepassive συνκατεψηφίσθη 1 he was chosen If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers chose him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 intro x8fr 0 # Acts 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pentecost

The events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years.

### Tongues

Luke uses the Greek word “tongues” to mean two different things in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them. For clarity, ULT translates the use in 2:3 as “tongues” and the use in 2:4 as “languages.”

### Last days

In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])

### The prophecy of Joel

In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:17–18). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peter’s statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

### Baptize

In this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1-11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])

### Wonders and signs

These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43.

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You killed” (2:23)

The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this.

### Long sentences

There is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

### Poetry

The quotations from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]]. ACT 2 1 i4sa writing-newevent καὶ ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 And when the day of Pentecost was completely filled Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ ACT 2 4 a085 καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγε ACT 2 5 dz1l grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) ACT 2 5 yft2 figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς 1 godly men Luke is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “godly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 2 5 stq9 figs-hyperbole παντὸς ἔθνους 1 every nation The word **every** is a generalization that emphasizes that the people came from many different nations. Alternate translation: “many different nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 2 5 a086 figs-idiom ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν 1 under heaven This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 2 5 a086 figs-idiom ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν 1 under heaven The expression **under heaven** is a way of referring to being on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 6 bpj7 figs-activepassive συνεχύθη 1 was confused If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say what did the action. Alternate translation: “what they heard confused them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 6 u9hc writing-pronouns ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ λαλούντων αὐτῶν 1 each one was hearing them speaking in his own language The pronoun **them** refers to the believers and the pronoun **his** refers to each person in the multitude. Alternate translation: “each person in the multitude could hear one of the disciples speaking in that person’s own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 2 7 m8kd figs-doublet ἐξίσταντο…καὶ ἐθαύμαζον 1 they were … amazed and were marveling The terms **amazed** and **marveling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ ACT 2 11 a096 γλώσσαις 1 tongues As in [2:4](../02/04.md), here the wor ACT 2 11 a097 figs-nominaladj τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the great things of God The speakers are using the adjective **great** as a noun. (The term is plural; ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the great things that God has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 2 12 el2f figs-doublet ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο 1 they were all amazed and were perplexed The words **amazed** and **perplexed** mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 2 12 a098 figs-activepassive ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο…λέγοντες 1 they were all amazed and were perplexed, saying These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 2 12 a099 figs-idiom τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι 1 What does this want to be This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “What is the explanation for this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 2 12 a099 figs-idiom τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι 1 What does this want to be The expression **want to be** is a way of referring to what something means. Your language may have a similar expression that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: "What does this mean?" or “What is the explanation for this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 13 a100 figs-activepassive γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν 1 They are filled with sweet wine If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 13 fg59 figs-explicit γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν 1 They are filled with sweet wine The implications of this statement are that the disciples have gotten drunk and are babbling and that this is the explanation for the languages the people think they are hearing. Alternate translation: “They have gotten drunk on sweet wine, and so what we are hearing is just drunken babbling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 13 jj1n translate-unknown γλεύκους 1 with sweet wine This refers to wine that is thicker and more intoxicating than ordinary wine. If your readers would not be familiar with this drink, you could use the name of another strong drink that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “with strong liquor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ ACT 3 20 h3nk figs-explicit ἀποστείλῃ 1 he may send Peter is referrin ACT 3 20 yzr6 figs-activepassive τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν 1 the one appointed for you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 21 vgn8 figs-personification ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι 1 whom it is necessary for heaven to receive Peter is speaking figuratively of **heaven** as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 3 21 x2f3 figs-abstractnouns ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων 1 the times of the restoration of all things If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **restoration**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 3 21 a2m8 figs-idiom ἀπ’ αἰῶνος 1 from the age This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 3 21 a2m8 figs-idiom ἀπ’ αἰῶνος 1 from the age The expression **from the age** means that something happened a long time ago. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 3 21 a12i figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων…αὐτοῦ προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of his holy prophets Peter is figuratively using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 22 a232 figs-quotesinquotes Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Moses indeed said, ‘The Lord our God will raise up for you a prophet like me from your brothers. You will listen to him according to everything—whatever he may speak to you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 3 22 a233 translate-names Μωϋσῆς 1 Moses **Moses** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ ACT 4 25 h6rc translate-names ἔθνη 1 the Gentiles The term **nations** refe ACT 4 25 w622 figs-explicit κενά 1 useless things The phrase **useless things** implicitly describes plans to oppose God, which can never succeed. Alternate translation: “ways to oppose God, which always prove useless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 26 fb5a figs-quotesinquotes παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ κατὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ This is the rest of the quotation from Psalm 2 that the believers started in [4:25](../04/25.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David said that the kings of the earth had taken their stand and the rulers had gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 4 26 w2by figs-parallelism παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same In keeping with the conventions of Hebrew poetry, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. If the repetition might be confusing for your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth took their stand, yes, the rulers were gathered to the same” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -ACT 4 26 w64b figs-idiom παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς 1 The kings of the earth took their stand This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth lined up their troops for battle” or “The kings of the earth formed their battle lines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 4 26 w64b figs-idiom παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς 1 The kings of the earth took their stand The expression **took their stand** describes an army lining up for battle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth lined up their troops for battle” or “The kings of the earth formed their battle lines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 4 26 a299 figs-activepassive οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν 1 the rulers were gathered If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the rulers gathered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 26 a300 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Here it could mean “by agreement” or “in the same place.” You could use either phrase as an alternate translation. ACT 4 26 yv19 figs-explicit τοῦ Κυρίου…τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 the Lord … his Christ Here the word **Lord** refers to God and the word **Christ** refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … his Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -784,7 +784,7 @@ ACT 5 23 a383 figs-explicit ἀνοίξαντες 1 having opened Your language ACT 5 23 ld7d figs-hyperbole ἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν 1 we found no one inside By **no one**, the officers mean that they found none of the men they had been sent to bring, that is, none of the apostles. It is possible that other people were also being held in the prison, but the angel would not have released them, and they would still have been inside. Alternate translation: “we did not find any of the apostles inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 5 24 k5g6 figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 these words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to mean the report that the officers gave. Alternate translation: “this report” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 24 baw2 writing-pronouns περὶ αὐτῶν 1 concerning them The pronoun **them** does not refer to the apostles but to the **words** that the officers spoke in giving their report. Alternate translation: “about the things the officers had told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 5 24 p78m figs-idiom τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο 1 as to what this might become This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “wondering what would happen as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 5 24 p78m figs-idiom τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο 1 as to what this might become The expression **what this might become** refers to a possible result. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wondering what would happen as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 25 a384 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες 1 Behold, the men This person says **Behold** to get the council members to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Right now the men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 5 25 a8dz figs-you ἔθεσθε 1 you put Here the word **you** refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests and so it is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 5 25 c1am figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες 1 standing in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ ACT 5 35 ae1u figs-explicit προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἐπὶ τοῖ ACT 5 36 a408 figs-idiom πρὸ…τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν 1 before these days Gamaliel is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 36 a409 translate-names Θευδᾶς 1 Theudas **Theudas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 5 36 uaj6 figs-metaphor ἀνέστη 1 rose up In this context, **rose up** figuratively means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 5 36 b3nl figs-idiom λέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν 1 saying himself to be somebody This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “saying that he was somebody important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 5 36 b3nl figs-idiom λέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν 1 saying himself to be somebody In this context, the expression **somebody** means a person of importance. Your language may use this expression in the same way. Or, if it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “saying that he was an important person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 36 a410 figs-activepassive ᾧ προσεκλίθη ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμὸς 1 to whom was joined a number of men If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom a number of men joined” or, as a new sentence, “A number of men joined him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 36 ie3x figs-activepassive ὃς ἀνῃρέθη 1 who was killed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. It may be helpful to begin another new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans killed” or, as a new sentence, “But the Romans killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 36 juz1 figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ 1 as many as were persuaded by him If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From b395bf05b1b324746f169993eadb4a554e3f9299 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Sun, 2 Oct 2022 11:49:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 161/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index afe19a9458..bfa41c01fe 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ ACT 2 20 a126 figs-123person ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου 1 the day ACT 2 21 a127 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται 1 And it will be, everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “And God said it would happen that everyone who called on the name of the Lord would be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 2 21 a128 καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς 1 And it will be, everyone Alternate translation: “And this is what will happen: Everyone” ACT 2 21 vql5 figs-activepassive πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται 1 everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 2 21 a129 figs-idiom πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται 1 everyone who may call on Here, **call on** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “everyone who may appeal to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 2 21 a129 figs-idiom πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται 1 everyone who may call on The expression **call on** means to make an appeal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone who may appeal to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 21 a130 figs-123person τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “my name” or “me by name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) ACT 2 21 a131 figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord Here, **name** figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 21 a132 figs-explicit τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord The implication is that people would appeal to God to show them mercy and save them. Alternate translation: “the Lord for mercy and salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -857,7 +857,7 @@ ACT 5 39 a419 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 but Gamaliel uses this word ACT 5 39 j819 writing-pronouns εἰ…ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 if it is from God Here the pronoun **it** refers back to the phrase “this counsel or this work” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 5 39 a420 figs-explicit μήποτε 1 lest It may be helpful to state the implications of the word **lest** explicitly. Alternate translation: “and if you do try to destroy them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 39 a421 figs-activepassive καὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε 1 you may even be found If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is also an idiom (see next note), it would only be meaningful to do that in your translation if your language uses the verb “find” in the same idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “people may even find you to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 5 39 a422 figs-activepassive εὑρεθῆτε 1 be found The expression **be found** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “turn out to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 39 a422 figs-activepassive εὑρεθῆτε 1 be found The expression **be found** means to turn out to be something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “turn out to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 39 cyp1 figs-activepassive ἐπείσθησαν…αὐτῷ 1 they were persuaded by him If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 40 z31c grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the Sanhedrin did as a result of Gamaliel’s advice. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 5 40 p6lz figs-synecdoche προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν 1 summoning the apostles, having beaten them, they commanded them The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks figuratively as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ ACT 6 9 d74m figs-idiom ἀνέστησαν 1 rose up Here the expression **rose ACT 6 9 nei0 figs-activepassive τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 the synagogue called Freedmen If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 6 9 k88n figs-explicit τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 the synagogue called Freedmen The word **Freedmen** probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 6 9 e7b0 translate-names Κυρηναίων…Ἀλεξανδρέων…Κιλικίας…Ἀσίας 1 of the Cyrenians…of the Alexandrians…Cilicia…Asia The word **Cyrenians** is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and the word **Alexandrians** is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. The words **Cilicia** and **Asia** are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 6 10 v5ia figs-idiom οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι 1 they were not able to stand against The expression **stand against** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 6 10 v5ia figs-idiom οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι 1 they were not able to stand against The expression **stand against** means to try to defeat by argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 6 10 fnb2 figs-hendiadys τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke Luke may be using the two words **wisdom** and **Spirit** together to express a single idea. The word **Spirit** would describe the source and character of the **wisdom** that Stephen was displaying. The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 6 10 psha figs-abstractnouns τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 11 ren5 figs-explicit ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας 1 they instigated men to say The word **instigated** means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From d62642e4b78eb1e01dd5fb54ca2a58dbc1f1466a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Sun, 2 Oct 2022 11:51:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 162/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index bfa41c01fe..0ed3a92ec1 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ ACT 6 9 d74m figs-idiom ἀνέστησαν 1 rose up Here the expression **rose ACT 6 9 nei0 figs-activepassive τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 the synagogue called Freedmen If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 6 9 k88n figs-explicit τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 the synagogue called Freedmen The word **Freedmen** probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 6 9 e7b0 translate-names Κυρηναίων…Ἀλεξανδρέων…Κιλικίας…Ἀσίας 1 of the Cyrenians…of the Alexandrians…Cilicia…Asia The word **Cyrenians** is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and the word **Alexandrians** is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. The words **Cilicia** and **Asia** are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 6 10 v5ia figs-idiom οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι 1 they were not able to stand against The expression **stand against** means to try to defeat by argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 6 10 v5ia figs-idiom οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι 1 they were not able to stand against In this context, the expression **stand against** means to try to defeat by argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 6 10 fnb2 figs-hendiadys τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke Luke may be using the two words **wisdom** and **Spirit** together to express a single idea. The word **Spirit** would describe the source and character of the **wisdom** that Stephen was displaying. The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 6 10 psha figs-abstractnouns τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 11 ren5 figs-explicit ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας 1 they instigated men to say The word **instigated** means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1014,7 +1014,7 @@ ACT 7 22 att9 figs-hyperbole πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων 1 in all ACT 7 22 m3dm δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ 1 mighty in his words and works Alternate translation: “effective in his speech and actions” or “influential in what he said and did” ACT 7 23 o4cg figs-idiom ὡς…ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος 1 This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after Moses had turned forty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 23 b9gd figs-activepassive ὡς…ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 7 23 ckxj figs-idiom ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 The phrase **it came up on his heart** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 7 23 ckxj figs-idiom ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 The expression **it came up on his heart** means that Moses felt a desire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 23 fj9s figs-metonymy ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 it came into his heart Here, **heart** is a metonym for the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 23 x493 figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 1 to visit his brothers, the sons of Israel Stephen is using the word **brothers** figuratively to mean “kinsmen,” and he is using the word **sons** figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen, the descendants of Israel” or, if the word “Israel” might make your readers think of the nation rather than the person, “his kinsmen, the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 23 i4ko figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 1 Although the terms **brothers** and **sons** are masculine, Stephen is using these words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” and “sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -1193,7 +1193,7 @@ ACT 7 58 ks1u figs-metaphor ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως 1 ACT 7 58 teas figs-explicit οἱ μάρτυρες 1 These were the “false witnesses” whom the Sanhedrin brought in to accuse Stephen, as described in [6:13](../06/13.md). According to the Law of Moses, it was their responsibility to carry out the execution of the man they had accused. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the false witnesses, who were responsible to carry out the execution,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 58 ryrh figs-explicit ἀπέθεντο τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας νεανίου καλουμένου Σαύλου 1 The implications are that the witnesses took off their long robes so that they could throw stones at Stephen more easily and that they left them with Saul for safekeeping. UST models one way to make these implications explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 58 wy7n translate-unknown τὰ ἱμάτια 1 outer garments These **outer garments** were long cloaks or robes that people wore outside to stay warm. They were also a sign of wealth and status. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of garment, you could use the name of another garment that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “robes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 7 58 sx2p figs-idiom παρὰ τοὺς πόδας 1 at the feet The expression **at the feet** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “on the ground in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 7 58 sx2p figs-idiom παρὰ τοὺς πόδας 1 at the feet The expression **at the feet** means on the ground in front of someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the ground in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 58 e2vl translate-names Σαύλου 1 of a young man **Saul** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 7 59 fxhz figs-hendiadys ἐπικαλούμενον καὶ λέγοντα 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **calling out** tells how Stephen was **saying** what he said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he was saying loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 7 59 k2el figs-imperative δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου 1 receive my spirit This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) @@ -1401,7 +1401,7 @@ ACT 9 14 ptd6 figs-abstractnouns ἔχει ἐξουσίαν παρὰ τῶν ACT 9 14 gk5o figs-synecdoche δῆσαι 1 Ananias is figuratively using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to arrest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 9 14 hi6x figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Ananias is using the participle **calling**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who call on your name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 9 14 t3fl figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 who call upon your name Here, **name** figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the ones calling upon you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 9 14 ampz figs-idiom τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Here, **calling on** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 9 14 ampz figs-idiom τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Here, the expression **calling on** means to worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 9 15 jmt7 figs-possession σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς…μοι 1 this one is a chosen instrument of mine The Lord is using the possessive form to describe Saul as an **instrument** who is characterized by his **choosing**. Alternate translation: “an instrument I have chosen” or “someone I have chosen as an instrument” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 9 15 gk29 writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “this man” or “this man Saul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 9 15 ndxu figs-metaphor σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς…μοι 1 The Lord describes Saul figuratively as an **instrument** or tool to indicate that he intends to use Saul to advance his purposes. Alternate translation: “someone I have chosen to use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 855d94391be4144b41012838e76ba3982759c01d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Sun, 2 Oct 2022 11:57:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 163/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 0ed3a92ec1..813ad3d5a5 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1759,7 +1759,7 @@ ACT 11 27 d8bb figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 came down from Jerusalem to Antioc ACT 11 28 q3tl translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 and indicated by the Spirit that Alternate Here, **having arisen** means that Agabus stood up as a symbolic action to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])translation: “and the Holy Spirit enabled him to prophesy that” ACT 11 28 w18f figs-hyperbole ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 The term **whole** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 11 28 pd2t figs-explicit τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 over the whole world Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **world**, he means the part of the world that they were familiar with. Alternate translation: “the … Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 11 28 jmc5 figs-idiom ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου 1 in the days of Claudius The expression **upon Claudius** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “during the reign of Claudius” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 11 28 jmc5 figs-idiom ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου 1 in the days of Claudius The expression **upon Claudius** refers to the time during the reign of Claudius. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during the reign of Claudius” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 11 28 fjyk translate-names Κλαυδίου 1 The word **Claudius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 11 29 rk9z figs-explicit τῶν…μαθητῶν καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις, ὥρισαν ἕκαστος αὐτῶν…πέμψαι 1 just as anyone prospered The implication is that while some of the disciples were **prospering** greatly but others were struggling financially, every one of them resolved to send something according to his own means. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while some of the believers in Antioch were rich and others were poor, every one of them resolved to send what they could afford” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 11 29 up7a figs-metaphor τοῖς…ἀδελφοῖς 1 to the brothers living in Judea Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “to their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1778,7 +1778,7 @@ ACT 12 3 v4ag figs-synecdoche τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 And when he saw th ACT 12 3 ly66 figs-idiom ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread This phrase refers to the time of a Jewish religious observance that led up to the celebration of Passover. While it was observed on specific **days**, Luke is likely using the word “days” idiomatically to describe a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the Passover season” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 12 4 tza2 writing-pronouns ὃν καὶ πιάσας, ἔθετο εἰς φυλακήν 1 The pronouns **whom** refers to Peter, and the pronoun **he** refers to Herod. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “After Herod had arrested Peter, he put him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 12 4 pps1 translate-unknown τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν 1 to four squads of soldiers These **quaternions** were groups of four **soldiers** each. They would have taken turns guarding Peter in six-hour shifts throughout the day and night. Two soldiers would have been at Peter’s side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. Your language and culture may have a term for a group of four soldiers that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “quaternion,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “to four teams of soldiers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 12 4 i23a figs-idiom βουλόμενος…ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ 1 he was intending to bring him out to the people The phrase **to bring him out** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in a public trial in the presence of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 12 4 i23a figs-idiom βουλόμενος…ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ 1 he was intending to bring him out to the people The phrase **to bring him out** means to put Peter on trial publicly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in a public trial in the presence of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 12 5 xpcx figs-activepassive ὁ…Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to specify who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers were guarding Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 12 5 f8qc figs-activepassive προσευχὴ…ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 prayer was being made earnestly to God for him by the church If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church was earnestly praying to God for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 12 6 km83 figs-explicit προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν 1 Herod was going to bring him out for trial, that night Here, the word translated **to bring … out** is slightly different from the word translated that same way in [12:4](../01/01.md). It means to put someone on trial, and the implications, based on the fact that Herod saw that it pleased the Jewish leaders when he executed James, are that Herod planned to execute Peter after this trial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to put Peter on trial and then execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1789,7 +1789,7 @@ ACT 12 9 p9ty figs-activepassive τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγ ACT 12 9 s9j0 figs-quotations ἐδόκει…ὅραμα βλέπειν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was thinking, ‘I am seeing a vision’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 12 10 r7gy figs-explicit διελθόντες…πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν 1 But when they had passed by the first guard and the second The implication is that the guards were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having passed by the first guard and the second without being noticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 10 e36s figs-ellipsis καὶ δευτέραν 1 and the second The word **guard** can be supplied from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 12 11 wlb6 figs-idiom ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος εἶπεν 1 And when Peter had come to himself The phrase **having come to himself** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “when Peter became fully awake and alert, he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 12 11 wlb6 figs-idiom ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος εἶπεν 1 And when Peter had come to himself The phrase **having come to himself** means that Peter became fully awake and realized he was not just seeing a vision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when Peter became fully awake and alert, he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 12 11 ue4k figs-metonymy χειρὸς 1 delivered me from the hand of Herod Here, **hand** figuratively represents the capability of a person. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 12 11 p739 figs-abstractnouns πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 from all the expectations of the Jewish people If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **expectation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “all that the Jewish people expected that Herod would do to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 12 11 sl07 figs-synecdoche τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Luke is likely using the phrase **the Jewish people** to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “of the leaders of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -1849,7 +1849,7 @@ ACT 13 1 ccel translate-names Μαναήν 1 The word **Manaen** is the name of ACT 13 1 o8jb translate-names Λούκιος ὁ Κυρηναῖος 1 The word **Lucius** is the name of a man. The word **Cyrenian** is the name for someone who comes from the city of Cyrene. See how you translated it in [11:20](../11/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 13 1 u48c translate-unknown σύντροφος 1 one brought up with Herod the tetrarch In this culture, rulers would sometimes bring the children of other parents into their homes to be raised and educated with their own children. This gave their children playmates and friends, and it was also a way of honoring or thanking the parents of the other children. A boy who was raised with the son of a ruler would be considered the **foster brother** of that son. There may be a similar role in your culture, and your language may have a term for it that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “foster brother,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “the childhood playmate” or “the boyhood friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 13 1 hxh6 translate-unknown Ἡρῴδου τοῦ τετράρχου 1 In the Roman Empire, a **tetrarch** was the governor of one of four divisions of a country or province. **Herod the tetrarch** ruled over Galilee, one of four areas that the kingdom of his father, Herod the Great, was divided into after his death. (The Herod described in chapter 12 was a different man, the grandson of Herod the Great and the nephew of Herod the tetrarch.) If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a general term instead of “tetrarch.” Alternate translation: “the ruler Herod” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 13 2 m70r figs-idiom λειτουργούντων…αὐτῶν τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 The expression **ministering to** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “while they were worshiping the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 13 2 m70r figs-idiom λειτουργούντων…αὐτῶν τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 The expression **ministering to** means that the believers in Antioch were worshiping God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while they were worshiping the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 2 kox1 writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Peter is referring to Jesus here by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 13 2 ifb9 ἀφορίσατε 1 Set apart Alternate translation: “Set apart” ACT 13 2 j6ym figs-extrainfo εἰς τὸ ἔργον ὃ προσκέκλημαι αὐτούς. 1 The Holy Spirit is referring implicitly to the **work** of proclaiming the gospel of Jesus in new areas, Cyprus and Asia Minor. Since Luke describes Barnabas and Paul doing this work in the rest of this chapter and in chapter 14, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) From 2c3664041e959e034f6ae30ea16067b10ff72c0a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 10:30:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 164/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 15 ++++++--------- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 53bddb3b98..40e8b2e82e 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1050,17 +1050,14 @@ MAT 14 22 yp8l writing-background ἠνάγκασεν τοὺς μαθητὰς MAT 14 24 vzd1 writing-background τὸ δὲ πλοῖον ἤδη μέσον τῆς θαλάσσης ἦν βασανιζόμενον ὑπὸ τῶν κυμάτων, ἦν γὰρ ἐναντίος ὁ ἄνεμος 1 was being tossed about by the waves Matthew provides more information to help the reader understand the follow verses. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “The boat was already in the middle of the sea, and was being tossed around by waves because of a strong opposing wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 14 25 pmw8 translate-unknown τετάρτῃ δὲ φυλακῇ τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Now in the fourth watch of the night If your readers would not understand the phrase **fourth watch**, you can state what it means explicitly. Alternate translation: “some time just before the sun rose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 14 26 h7df figs-quotations λέγοντες, ὅτι φάντασμά 1 a ghost If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that he is a ghost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MAT 14 30 sk3j figs-idiom βλέπων…τὸν ἄνεμον ἰσχυρὸν 1 seeing the strong wind Here, **seeing** the **wind** means he became aware of the wind. Alternate translation: “when Peter saw that the wind was tossing the waves back and forth” or “when he realized how strong the wind was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 14 31 bd2v ὀλιγόπιστε, εἰς τί 1 You of little faith, why Jesus addressed Peter this way because Peter became afraid. It can also be translated as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You have so little faith! Why” -MAT 14 31 ia1d figs-explicit εἰς τί ἐδίστασας? 1 why did you doubt? You can make explicit what Peter doubted. Alternate translation: “why did you doubt that I could keep you from sinking?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 14 31 cr9i figs-rquestion εἰς τί ἐδίστασας 1 why did you doubt? Jesus uses a question to tell Peter that he should not have doubted. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “you should not have doubted!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 14 30 sk3j figs-idiom βλέπων…τὸν ἄνεμον ἰσχυρὸν 1 seeing the strong wind Here, **seeing** the **wind** means he became aware of the wind. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when Peter saw that the wind was tossing the waves back and forth” or “when he realized how strong the wind was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 14 31 ia1d figs-explicit εἰς τί ἐδίστασας? 1 why did you doubt? Here, **doubt** is referring to Peter doubting that Jesus could help him from sinking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “why did you doubt that I could keep you from sinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 14 31 cr9i figs-rquestion εἰς τί ἐδίστασας? 1 why did you doubt? Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you certainly should not have doubted!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 14 33 u8pu guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Υἱὸς 1 the Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 14 34 cv3f καὶ διαπεράσαντες 1 And having crossed over Alternate translation: “And when Jesus and his disciples had crossed over the lake” +MAT 14 34 cv3f figs-explicit καὶ διαπεράσαντες 1 And having crossed over Matthew implies that they **crossed over** the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after crossing over the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 14 34 x9nu translate-names Γεννησαρέτ 1 Gennesaret **Gennesaret** is a small town on the northwest shore of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 14 35 xd7c ἀπέστειλαν 1 sent Alternate translation: “sent messages” -MAT 14 36 ql3y καὶ παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν 1 And they were begging him Alternate translation: “And the sick people were begging him” -MAT 14 36 x8jv τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ 1 of his garment Alternate translation: “of his robe” or “of what he was wearing” -MAT 14 36 mw8n figs-activepassive διεσώθησαν 1 were healed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “became well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 14 35 xd7c πάντας 1 sent Here, **all** does not mean every single person, but it means many people who were sick. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language to express this. Alternate translation: “many of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MAT 14 36 mw8n figs-activepassive διεσώθησαν 1 were healed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “Jesus” did it. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 intro i9a5 0 # Matthew 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 15:8-9, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The “traditions of the elders”

The “traditions of the elders” were oral laws that the Jewish religious leaders developed because they wanted to make sure that everyone obeyed the law of Moses. However, they often worked harder to obey these rules than to obey the law of Moses itself. Jesus rebuked the religious leaders for this, and they became angry as a result. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Jews and Gentiles

The Jews of Jesus’ time thought that only Jews could please God by the way they lived. Jesus healed a Canaanite Gentile woman’s daughter to show his followers that he would accept both Jews and Gentiles as his people.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Sheep

The Bible often speaks of people as if they were sheep because sheep need someone to take care of them. This is because they do not see well and they often go to where other animals can kill them easily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 15 1 q6af writing-newevent 0 General Information: The scene shifts to events that occurred some time after events of the previous chapter. Here Jesus responds to the criticisms of the Pharisees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 15 2 j1b8 figs-rquestion διὰ τί οἱ μαθηταί σου παραβαίνουσιν τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων? 1 Why do your disciples violate the traditions of the elders? The Pharisees and scribes use this question to criticize Jesus and his disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Your disciples do not respect the rules that our ancestors have given us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 769fe2d30064600061a79716f82d87bb600ce6ef Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 10:47:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 165/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 40e8b2e82e..a0e95faae4 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1046,17 +1046,17 @@ MAT 14 19 bf1a figs-ellipsis εὐλόγησεν καὶ κλάσας 1 the loav MAT 14 19 t7ei figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις 1 Having looked up Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the disciples gave the loaves to the crowds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 14 20 l2h8 figs-activepassive καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν 1 and were filled If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your languages in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 14 21 als7 translate-numbers ἄνδρες…πεντακισχίλιοι 1 5,000 men Alternate translation: “five thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -MAT 14 22 yp8l writing-background ἠνάγκασεν τοὺς μαθητὰς ἐμβῆναι εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, καὶ προάγειν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ πέραν, ἕως οὗ ἀπολύσῃ τοὺς ὄχλους 1 General Information: Matthew is providing background for the next story about Jesus walking on the water. information Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus was making the disciples to get into the boat to the other side before him while he was sending away the crowds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MAT 14 22 yp8l writing-background ἠνάγκασεν τοὺς μαθητὰς ἐμβῆναι εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, καὶ προάγειν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ πέραν, ἕως οὗ ἀπολύσῃ τοὺς ὄχλους 1 General Information: Matthew is providing background information for the next story about Jesus walking on the water. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus was making the disciples to get into the boat to the other side before him while he was sending away the crowds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 14 24 vzd1 writing-background τὸ δὲ πλοῖον ἤδη μέσον τῆς θαλάσσης ἦν βασανιζόμενον ὑπὸ τῶν κυμάτων, ἦν γὰρ ἐναντίος ὁ ἄνεμος 1 was being tossed about by the waves Matthew provides more information to help the reader understand the follow verses. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “The boat was already in the middle of the sea, and was being tossed around by waves because of a strong opposing wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 14 25 pmw8 translate-unknown τετάρτῃ δὲ φυλακῇ τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Now in the fourth watch of the night If your readers would not understand the phrase **fourth watch**, you can state what it means explicitly. Alternate translation: “some time just before the sun rose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 14 26 h7df figs-quotations λέγοντες, ὅτι φάντασμά 1 a ghost If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that he is a ghost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MAT 14 30 sk3j figs-idiom βλέπων…τὸν ἄνεμον ἰσχυρὸν 1 seeing the strong wind Here, **seeing** the **wind** means he became aware of the wind. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when Peter saw that the wind was tossing the waves back and forth” or “when he realized how strong the wind was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 14 30 sk3j βλέπων…τὸν ἄνεμον ἰσχυρὸν 1 seeing the strong wind Here, **seeing** the **wind** means he "he became afraid" because he became aware of the wind and the large waves that it caused. Alternate translation: “when Peter saw that the wind was tossing the waves back and forth” or “when he realized how strong the wind was” MAT 14 31 ia1d figs-explicit εἰς τί ἐδίστασας? 1 why did you doubt? Here, **doubt** is referring to Peter doubting that Jesus could help him from sinking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “why did you doubt that I could keep you from sinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 14 31 cr9i figs-rquestion εἰς τί ἐδίστασας? 1 why did you doubt? Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you certainly should not have doubted!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 14 33 u8pu guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Υἱὸς 1 the Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 14 34 cv3f figs-explicit καὶ διαπεράσαντες 1 And having crossed over Matthew implies that they **crossed over** the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after crossing over the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 14 34 x9nu translate-names Γεννησαρέτ 1 Gennesaret **Gennesaret** is a small town on the northwest shore of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 14 35 xd7c πάντας 1 sent Here, **all** does not mean every single person, but it means many people who were sick. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language to express this. Alternate translation: “many of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MAT 14 35 xd7c figs-hyperbole πάντας 1 sent Here, **all** does not mean every single person, but it means many people who were sick. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language to express this. Alternate translation: “many of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 14 36 mw8n figs-activepassive διεσώθησαν 1 were healed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “Jesus” did it. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 intro i9a5 0 # Matthew 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 15:8-9, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The “traditions of the elders”

The “traditions of the elders” were oral laws that the Jewish religious leaders developed because they wanted to make sure that everyone obeyed the law of Moses. However, they often worked harder to obey these rules than to obey the law of Moses itself. Jesus rebuked the religious leaders for this, and they became angry as a result. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Jews and Gentiles

The Jews of Jesus’ time thought that only Jews could please God by the way they lived. Jesus healed a Canaanite Gentile woman’s daughter to show his followers that he would accept both Jews and Gentiles as his people.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Sheep

The Bible often speaks of people as if they were sheep because sheep need someone to take care of them. This is because they do not see well and they often go to where other animals can kill them easily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 15 1 q6af writing-newevent 0 General Information: The scene shifts to events that occurred some time after events of the previous chapter. Here Jesus responds to the criticisms of the Pharisees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) From 6fc905765790099abb000bd96bfdfff7f56c9744 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 17:09:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 166/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 813ad3d5a5..d19f88a590 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -194,7 +194,6 @@ ACT 2 10 a094 translate-names Κυρήνην 1 Cyrene **Cyrene** is the name of ACT 2 10 a095 translate-names οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες Ῥωμαῖοι 1 Romans visiting Here, **Romans** is a name for people who are from the city of Rome. Alternate translation: “visitors from Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 2 11 w8jy Ἰουδαῖοί τε καὶ προσήλυτοι 1 both Jews and proselytes The term **proselytes** describes converts to the Jewish religion. The phrase **both Jews and proselytes** could apply specifically to the visitors from Rome mentioned at the end of the previous verse, or it could apply to the whole list of people in [2:9–11](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “both Jews and converts to the Jewish religion” ACT 2 11 jnp7 translate-names Κρῆτες…Ἄραβες 1 Cretans and Arabians These are names of two people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 2 11 a096 γλώσσαις 1 tongues As in [2:4](../02/04.md), here the word **tongues** has the specific sense of “languages.” Alternate translation: “languages” ACT 2 11 a097 figs-nominaladj τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the great things of God The speakers are using the adjective **great** as a noun. (The term is plural; ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the great things that God has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 2 12 el2f figs-doublet ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο 1 they were all amazed and were perplexed The words **amazed** and **perplexed** mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 2 12 a098 figs-activepassive ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο…λέγοντες 1 they were all amazed and were perplexed, saying These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2610,7 +2609,7 @@ ACT 18 17 cyk6 figs-hyperbole πάντες…ἔτυπτον 1 they all, having ACT 18 18 j0we grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὁ δὲ Παῦλος ἔτι προσμείνας ἡμέρας ἱκανὰς 1 Luke is using the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between what Paul might have been expected to do—leave the city because he was in danger and to protect the believers from danger themselves, as he did in Thessalonica and Berea—and what Paul actually did—remain in the city. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless, Paul stayed yet many days, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ACT 18 18 et8c figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 left the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names Κενχρεαῖς 1 The word **Cenchreae** is the name of a city. This city was the seaport for the larger inland city of Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 18 kq6f translate-symaction κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow Paul **shaved his head** to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Paul shaved his head in Cenchrea to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 18 18 kq6f translate-symaction κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow Paul cut the hair off **his head** to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Paul cut his hair in Cenchrea to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 18 18 ceor figs-infostructure εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Luke seems to offer the information that Paul had made a **vow** as the explanation for why he **stayed yet many days** in Corinth despite the danger he was in. It may be more natural in your translation to put this information right after the phrase it seems to explain, **having stayed many days**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 18 18 cf3c figs-extrainfo εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Luke tells us nothing further about why Paul made this vow or what he did to carry it out, so it would not be appropriate to add anything speculative about it in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) ACT 18 19 abcx writing-pronouns κατήντησαν δὲ εἰς Ἔφεσον, κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν αὐτοῦ 1 he left them The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila, the pronoun **them** refers to Priscilla and Aquila, and the pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the three of them came down to Ephesus and Paul left Priscilla and Aquila there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From 335d446bcf94e6dd6b7c1e6f9b9d1c9e41d5a39f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 17:12:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 167/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d19f88a590..6b1d18e728 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2642,10 +2642,10 @@ ACT 18 27 v2i6 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the ACT 18 27 f99p figs-abstractnouns τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος 1 those who had believed by grace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those whom God had graciously led to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 18 28 mw2n figs-abstractnouns δημοσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **public**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “publicly” or “where anyone could listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 19 intro g38y 0 # Acts 19 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Baptism

John baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins. Jesus’ followers baptized people who wanted to follow Jesus.

### Temple of Diana

The temple of Diana was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Diana while they were there. The people who sold statues of Diana were afraid that if people did not believe Diana was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues. -ACT 19 1 lp23 ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. -ACT 19 1 wu6p 0 Connecting Statement: Paul travels to Ephesus. -ACT 19 1 rhv1 Παῦλον διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη, κατελθεῖν εἰς Ἔφεσον 1 The **upper parts** was an area of Asia which today is part of modern-day Turkey to the north of **Ephesus**. Paul must have traveled by land around the top of the Aegean sea in order to come to Ephesus (also in Turkey today) which is directly east of Corinth by sea. -ACT 19 1 ati9 διελθόντα 1 passed through Alternate translation: “traveled through” +ACT 19 1 lp23 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke is using the phrase **And it happened that** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +ACT 19 1 rhv1 figs-explicit διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη 1 Luke says that Paul traveled through **the upper parts** of the province of Asia to indicate that he followed a more direct route to Ephesus that went over higher ground than the main route. The implication is that Paul wanted to go directly to Ephesus after visiting the churches in Galatia and Phrygia ([18:23](../18/23.md)), as he had promised he would do if that was God’s will ([18:21](../18/21.md)). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “taking the most direct route” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 19 1 munb figs-idiom κατελθεῖν εἰς 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Ephesus because he was coming down to the coast from a route that traveled over high ground. Alternate translation: “arrived in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 19 1 iosy writing-participants τινας μαθητάς 1 Luke is using the phrase **certain disciples** to introduce these believers as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “that there were already some believers in the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 19 2 wqi4 εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε 1 Did you receive the Holy Spirit This means to have the Holy Spirit come upon them. ACT 19 2 nvn4 οὐδ’ εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἔστιν ἠκούσαμεν 1 we did not even heard if there is a Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “we have never heard about the Holy Spirit” ACT 19 3 mrm6 figs-activepassive εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε 1 Into what then were you baptized? If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “What kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From cc4ed2bb40a73b6c97a81ed947e60fe47fbd9beb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 17:13:28 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 168/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 6b1d18e728..d6a57100de 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2646,8 +2646,7 @@ ACT 19 1 lp23 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke ACT 19 1 rhv1 figs-explicit διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη 1 Luke says that Paul traveled through **the upper parts** of the province of Asia to indicate that he followed a more direct route to Ephesus that went over higher ground than the main route. The implication is that Paul wanted to go directly to Ephesus after visiting the churches in Galatia and Phrygia ([18:23](../18/23.md)), as he had promised he would do if that was God’s will ([18:21](../18/21.md)). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “taking the most direct route” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 1 munb figs-idiom κατελθεῖν εἰς 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Ephesus because he was coming down to the coast from a route that traveled over high ground. Alternate translation: “arrived in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 19 1 iosy writing-participants τινας μαθητάς 1 Luke is using the phrase **certain disciples** to introduce these believers as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “that there were already some believers in the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 19 2 wqi4 εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε 1 Did you receive the Holy Spirit This means to have the Holy Spirit come upon them. -ACT 19 2 nvn4 οὐδ’ εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἔστιν ἠκούσαμεν 1 we did not even heard if there is a Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “we have never heard about the Holy Spirit” +ACT 19 2 wqi4 figs-quotations εἶπέν τε πρὸς αὐτούς, εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε, πιστεύσαντες? 1 Did you receive the Holy Spirit Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “And he asked them if they had received the Holy Spirit when they believed.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 19 3 mrm6 figs-activepassive εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε 1 Into what then were you baptized? If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “What kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 3 jzp7 figs-ellipsis εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα 1 Into the baptism of John You can translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism about which John taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 19 4 r46y figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “the baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From f4e5795df1b67c9252685ad1e9e337f88974e7a1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 17:14:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 169/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d6a57100de..9982824fa1 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2647,8 +2647,9 @@ ACT 19 1 rhv1 figs-explicit διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρ ACT 19 1 munb figs-idiom κατελθεῖν εἰς 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Ephesus because he was coming down to the coast from a route that traveled over high ground. Alternate translation: “arrived in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 19 1 iosy writing-participants τινας μαθητάς 1 Luke is using the phrase **certain disciples** to introduce these believers as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “that there were already some believers in the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 19 2 wqi4 figs-quotations εἶπέν τε πρὸς αὐτούς, εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε, πιστεύσαντες? 1 Did you receive the Holy Spirit Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “And he asked them if they had received the Holy Spirit when they believed.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -ACT 19 3 mrm6 figs-activepassive εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε 1 Into what then were you baptized? If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “What kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 19 3 jzp7 figs-ellipsis εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα 1 Into the baptism of John You can translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism about which John taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 19 3 mrm6 figs-activepassive εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε 1 Into what then were you baptized? If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then what kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 19 3 jzp7 figs-ellipsis εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα 1 Into the baptism of John The believers in Ephesus are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 19 3 w76v figs-explicit Ἰωάννου 1 By **John**, the believers implicitly mean John the Baptist. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 4 r46y figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “the baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 19 4 pv7t τὸν ἐρχόμενον 1 the one who is coming Here, **the one** refers to Jesus. ACT 19 4 q5fh τὸν ἐρχόμενον μετ’ αὐτὸν 1 the one who is coming after him This means to come after John the Baptist in time and not following after him physically. From 77a350418a951aa934b60596a6218fac78283d93 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 17:16:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 170/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++--- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 9982824fa1..45741c2e7b 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2650,9 +2650,8 @@ ACT 19 2 wqi4 figs-quotations εἶπέν τε πρὸς αὐτούς, εἰ Π ACT 19 3 mrm6 figs-activepassive εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε 1 Into what then were you baptized? If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then what kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 3 jzp7 figs-ellipsis εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα 1 Into the baptism of John The believers in Ephesus are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 19 3 w76v figs-explicit Ἰωάννου 1 By **John**, the believers implicitly mean John the Baptist. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 19 4 r46y figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “the baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 19 4 pv7t τὸν ἐρχόμενον 1 the one who is coming Here, **the one** refers to Jesus. -ACT 19 4 q5fh τὸν ἐρχόμενον μετ’ αὐτὸν 1 the one who is coming after him This means to come after John the Baptist in time and not following after him physically. +ACT 19 4 g8iw Ἰωάννης ἐβάπτισεν βάπτισμα 1 Paul is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. Your language may be able to do the same. But if that would sound unnatural in your language, you could express the meaning another way. Alternate translation: “John performed a baptism” +ACT 19 4 r46y figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 19 5 k9st ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized Here, **they** refers to the disciples in Ephesus who were talking with Paul ([Acts 19:1](../19/01.md)), ACT 19 5 ueh1 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 5 g2dm figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. Alternate translation: “as believers in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 6c915efbe562e273014945cc7b012827fdc38ebc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 17:20:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 171/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 45741c2e7b..bafd435c4e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2652,9 +2652,9 @@ ACT 19 3 jzp7 figs-ellipsis εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα 1 Int ACT 19 3 w76v figs-explicit Ἰωάννου 1 By **John**, the believers implicitly mean John the Baptist. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 4 g8iw Ἰωάννης ἐβάπτισεν βάπτισμα 1 Paul is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. Your language may be able to do the same. But if that would sound unnatural in your language, you could express the meaning another way. Alternate translation: “John performed a baptism” ACT 19 4 r46y figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 19 5 k9st ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized Here, **they** refers to the disciples in Ephesus who were talking with Paul ([Acts 19:1](../19/01.md)), -ACT 19 5 ueh1 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 19 5 g2dm figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. Alternate translation: “as believers in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 5 k9st writing-pronouns ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized The pronoun **they** refers to the believers in Ephesus who were speaking with Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those believers were baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 19 5 ueh1 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 19 5 g2dm figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of the Lord Jesus Here the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express their allegiance to Jesus as their Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 6 gk8l ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας 1 when Paul had laid his hands on them He probably placed **his hands** on their shoulders or heads. Alternate translation: “when Paul had placed his hands on their heads as he prayed” ACT 19 6 j4n8 ἐλάλουν τε γλώσσαις καὶ ἐπροφήτευον 1 and they began to speak in tongues and prophesy Unlike in [Acts 2:3-4](../02/03.md), there are no details of who understood their messages. ACT 19 7 e7kj writing-background ἦσαν δὲ οἱ πάντες ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ δώδεκα 1 And they were about 12 men in all This tells how many **men** were baptized. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) From 5f4eb678b7beb665307f3f1cf5bb4b20e5687fc9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 17:21:50 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 172/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index bafd435c4e..7573c2bef7 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2655,8 +2655,9 @@ ACT 19 4 r46y figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism ACT 19 5 k9st writing-pronouns ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized The pronoun **they** refers to the believers in Ephesus who were speaking with Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those believers were baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 19 5 ueh1 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 5 g2dm figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of the Lord Jesus Here the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express their allegiance to Jesus as their Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 19 6 gk8l ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας 1 when Paul had laid his hands on them He probably placed **his hands** on their shoulders or heads. Alternate translation: “when Paul had placed his hands on their heads as he prayed” -ACT 19 6 j4n8 ἐλάλουν τε γλώσσαις καὶ ἐπροφήτευον 1 and they began to speak in tongues and prophesy Unlike in [Acts 2:3-4](../02/03.md), there are no details of who understood their messages. +ACT 19 6 gk8l translate-symaction ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας 1 when Paul had laid his hands on them Paul **laid** his **hands** on these believers as a symbolic action to show that he wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to them. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:17](../08/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 19 6 udyf figs-metaphor ἦλθε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking figuratively as if the Holy Spirit physically **came upon** these believers. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 19 6 j4n8 figs-explicit ἐλάλουν…γλώσσαις 1 and they began to speak in tongues and prophesy The implication is that these believers were speaking languages that they did not know. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were speaking in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 7 e7kj writing-background ἦσαν δὲ οἱ πάντες ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ δώδεκα 1 And they were about 12 men in all This tells how many **men** were baptized. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 19 8 qv8z εἰσελθὼν…εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν, ἐπαρρησιάζετο ἐπὶ μῆνας τρεῖς 1 having gone into the synagogue, he was speaking boldly for three months Alternate translation: “Paul regularly attended the synagogue meetings for three months and spoke there boldly” ACT 19 8 yky2 διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων 1 reasoning and persuading them Alternate translation: “convincing people with convincing arguments and with clear teaching” From 4b16b804ca77257ea7771c5b4b0f9634d3046f3d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 18:14:22 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 173/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 7573c2bef7..7245df3f0a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2658,7 +2658,7 @@ ACT 19 5 g2dm figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰη ACT 19 6 gk8l translate-symaction ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας 1 when Paul had laid his hands on them Paul **laid** his **hands** on these believers as a symbolic action to show that he wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to them. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:17](../08/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 19 6 udyf figs-metaphor ἦλθε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking figuratively as if the Holy Spirit physically **came upon** these believers. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 6 j4n8 figs-explicit ἐλάλουν…γλώσσαις 1 and they began to speak in tongues and prophesy The implication is that these believers were speaking languages that they did not know. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were speaking in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 19 7 e7kj writing-background ἦσαν δὲ οἱ πάντες ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ δώδεκα 1 And they were about 12 men in all This tells how many **men** were baptized. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 19 7 e7kj writing-endofstory δὲ 1 And they were about 12 men in all Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information to conclude this part of the story of what Paul did in Ephesus. You language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 19 8 qv8z εἰσελθὼν…εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν, ἐπαρρησιάζετο ἐπὶ μῆνας τρεῖς 1 having gone into the synagogue, he was speaking boldly for three months Alternate translation: “Paul regularly attended the synagogue meetings for three months and spoke there boldly” ACT 19 8 yky2 διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων 1 reasoning and persuading them Alternate translation: “convincing people with convincing arguments and with clear teaching” ACT 19 8 v8et figs-metonymy περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 about the kingdom of God Here, **kingdom** stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “about God’s rule as king” or “about how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From eb09d2113b7108cb82af0856d9b6e7e0347bf73a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 18:17:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 174/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 7245df3f0a..a2f515f4ca 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2659,9 +2659,10 @@ ACT 19 6 gk8l translate-symaction ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Π ACT 19 6 udyf figs-metaphor ἦλθε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking figuratively as if the Holy Spirit physically **came upon** these believers. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 6 j4n8 figs-explicit ἐλάλουν…γλώσσαις 1 and they began to speak in tongues and prophesy The implication is that these believers were speaking languages that they did not know. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were speaking in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 7 e7kj writing-endofstory δὲ 1 And they were about 12 men in all Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information to conclude this part of the story of what Paul did in Ephesus. You language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 19 8 qv8z εἰσελθὼν…εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν, ἐπαρρησιάζετο ἐπὶ μῆνας τρεῖς 1 having gone into the synagogue, he was speaking boldly for three months Alternate translation: “Paul regularly attended the synagogue meetings for three months and spoke there boldly” -ACT 19 8 yky2 διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων 1 reasoning and persuading them Alternate translation: “convincing people with convincing arguments and with clear teaching” -ACT 19 8 v8et figs-metonymy περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 about the kingdom of God Here, **kingdom** stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “about God’s rule as king” or “about how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 8 qv8z writing-pronouns ἐπαρρησιάζετο 1 having gone into the synagogue, he was speaking boldly for three months The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was speaking boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 19 8 yky2 figs-hendiadys διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων 1 reasoning and persuading them This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **reasoning** tells how Paul was **persuading** people in the synagogue in Ephesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “reasonably persuading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +ACT 19 8 v8et figs-abstractnouns περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 about the kingdom of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 19 8 v5d5 figs-explicit περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was teaching that the **kingdom of God** had begun on earth when Jesus came as the Messiah. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “about how, when Jesus came as the Messiah, God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 9 mq1g figs-metaphor τινες ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπείθουν 1 some were hardened and being disobedient To stubbornly refuse to believe is spoken of as though the people were becoming **hardened** and unable to move. Alternate translation: “some Jews were stubborn and did not believe” or “some Jews stubbornly refused to accept and obey the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 9 n6ir figs-metaphor κακολογοῦντες τὴν ὁδὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ πλήθους 1 speaking evil of the Way before the crowd What Christ wants people to believe is spoken of as though it were a road that a person travels. The phrase **the Way** seems to have been a title for Christianity at the time. Alternate translation: “speaking evil about Christianity to the crowd” or “speaking to the crowd evil things about those who follow Christ and who obey his teaching about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [Acts 9:2](../09/02.md)) ACT 19 9 ts8d κακολογοῦντες 1 speaking evil Alternate translation: “speaking bad things about” From 28df5f70d549dad3bb666ba9fbde7f26771b602e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 18:19:47 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 175/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 ++++----- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index a2f515f4ca..387b6e214d 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2663,11 +2663,10 @@ ACT 19 8 qv8z writing-pronouns ἐπαρρησιάζετο 1 having gone into th ACT 19 8 yky2 figs-hendiadys διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων 1 reasoning and persuading them This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **reasoning** tells how Paul was **persuading** people in the synagogue in Ephesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “reasonably persuading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 19 8 v8et figs-abstractnouns περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 about the kingdom of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 19 8 v5d5 figs-explicit περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was teaching that the **kingdom of God** had begun on earth when Jesus came as the Messiah. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “about how, when Jesus came as the Messiah, God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 19 9 mq1g figs-metaphor τινες ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπείθουν 1 some were hardened and being disobedient To stubbornly refuse to believe is spoken of as though the people were becoming **hardened** and unable to move. Alternate translation: “some Jews were stubborn and did not believe” or “some Jews stubbornly refused to accept and obey the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 19 9 n6ir figs-metaphor κακολογοῦντες τὴν ὁδὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ πλήθους 1 speaking evil of the Way before the crowd What Christ wants people to believe is spoken of as though it were a road that a person travels. The phrase **the Way** seems to have been a title for Christianity at the time. Alternate translation: “speaking evil about Christianity to the crowd” or “speaking to the crowd evil things about those who follow Christ and who obey his teaching about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [Acts 9:2](../09/02.md)) -ACT 19 9 ts8d κακολογοῦντες 1 speaking evil Alternate translation: “speaking bad things about” -ACT 19 9 xsm6 ἐν τῇ σχολῇ Τυράννου 1 in the lecture hall of Tyrannus Alternate translation: “in the large room where Tyrannus had taught people” -ACT 19 9 den4 translate-names Τυράννου 1 of Tyrannus **Tyrannus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 19 9 mq1g figs-hendiadys ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπείθουν 1 some were hardened and being disobedient This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **being hardened** tells how **some** in the Ephesus synagogue were **disobeying** what God wanted them to do, according to Paul’s teaching. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “stubbornly disobeying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +ACT 19 9 yss2 figs-activepassive ἐσκληρύνοντο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were hardening themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 19 9 n6ir translate-names τὴν ὁδὸν 1 speaking evil of the Way before the crowd As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in [9:2](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 19 9 den4 translate-names Τυράννου 1 of Tyrannus The word **Tyrannus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 10 cw5g figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 all those who lived in Asia heard the word of the Lord Here, **all** is a generalization that means very many people throughout Asia heard the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 19 10 kj12 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 11 fa6h figs-synecdoche δυνάμεις τε οὐ τὰς τυχούσας, ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίει διὰ τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου 1 And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul Here, **hands** stands for Paul’s whole person. Alternate translation: “And God was causing Paul to do unusual miracles” or “And God was doing amazing miracles through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From 740c1a634fd4870cbdf45d59c109c3c7ec5aaa3c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 18:21:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 176/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 387b6e214d..f5901f7d62 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2667,7 +2667,9 @@ ACT 19 9 mq1g figs-hendiadys ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπείθουν ACT 19 9 yss2 figs-activepassive ἐσκληρύνοντο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were hardening themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 9 n6ir translate-names τὴν ὁδὸν 1 speaking evil of the Way before the crowd As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in [9:2](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 9 den4 translate-names Τυράννου 1 of Tyrannus The word **Tyrannus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 10 cw5g figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 all those who lived in Asia heard the word of the Lord Here, **all** is a generalization that means very many people throughout Asia heard the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 19 10 cw5g figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι 1 all those who lived in Asia heard the word of the Lord Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “people living throughout the province of Asia heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 19 10 t0ak figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 10 n45g writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 19 10 kj12 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 11 fa6h figs-synecdoche δυνάμεις τε οὐ τὰς τυχούσας, ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίει διὰ τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου 1 And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul Here, **hands** stands for Paul’s whole person. Alternate translation: “And God was causing Paul to do unusual miracles” or “And God was doing amazing miracles through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 19 11 abcy οὐ τὰς τυχούσας 1 not ordinary Alternate translation: “unusual” From 7c64c875af3c1922c635fd6d234a39e502537a76 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 18:22:47 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 177/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index f5901f7d62..1bb77ae88a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2671,8 +2671,8 @@ ACT 19 10 cw5g figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας ACT 19 10 t0ak figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 10 n45g writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 19 10 kj12 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 19 11 fa6h figs-synecdoche δυνάμεις τε οὐ τὰς τυχούσας, ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίει διὰ τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου 1 And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul Here, **hands** stands for Paul’s whole person. Alternate translation: “And God was causing Paul to do unusual miracles” or “And God was doing amazing miracles through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 19 11 abcy οὐ τὰς τυχούσας 1 not ordinary Alternate translation: “unusual” +ACT 19 11 abcy figs-litotes οὐ τὰς τυχούσας 1 not ordinary Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “extraordinary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 19 11 fa6h figs-synecdoche τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου 1 And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul Luke is figuratively using one part of Paul, his **hands**, to represent all of Paul in the act of doing miracles. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 19 12 cb6w αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους…ἐκπορεύεσθαι 1 Here the words **their** and **them** refer to those who were sick. ACT 19 12 m3kl καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια, καὶ 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body were taken to the sick and If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when they took to sick people even handkerchiefs and aprons that had touched Paul” ACT 19 12 vc1v καὶ…ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body This could mean: (1) these were cloth items that Paul had touched or (2) these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used. From 6368f159f4cca46ca7ff7b2ee0b5b84811fd7058 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Mon, 3 Oct 2022 18:26:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 178/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 13 ++++++------- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 1bb77ae88a..7c195fd6d2 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2673,13 +2673,12 @@ ACT 19 10 n45g writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to J ACT 19 10 kj12 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 11 abcy figs-litotes οὐ τὰς τυχούσας 1 not ordinary Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “extraordinary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 19 11 fa6h figs-synecdoche τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου 1 And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul Luke is figuratively using one part of Paul, his **hands**, to represent all of Paul in the act of doing miracles. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 19 12 cb6w αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους…ἐκπορεύεσθαι 1 Here the words **their** and **them** refer to those who were sick. -ACT 19 12 m3kl καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια, καὶ 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body were taken to the sick and If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when they took to sick people even handkerchiefs and aprons that had touched Paul” -ACT 19 12 vc1v καὶ…ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body This could mean: (1) these were cloth items that Paul had touched or (2) these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used. -ACT 19 12 aks4 σουδάρια 1 handkerchiefs The **handkerchiefs** were small pieces of cloth used to wipe one’s face. -ACT 19 12 xs31 σιμικίνθια 1 aprons The **aprons** were clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of the wearers. -ACT 19 12 kw9z figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 the sick This refers to **sick** people. Alternate translation: “sick people” or “those who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 19 12 nl3a ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους 1 their illnesses departed from them Alternate translation: “those who were sick became healthy” +ACT 19 12 m3kl figs-activepassive καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body were taken to the sick and If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people even took handkerchiefs or aprons from Paul’s skin to the sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 19 12 vc1v figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body This could mean implicitly: (1) that these were cloth items that others had placed on Paul’s **skin**. Alternate translation: “handkerchiefs or aprons that had touched Paul’s skin” (2) that these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used. Alternate translation: “handkerchiefs or aprons that Paul had worn or used” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 19 12 aks4 translate-unknown σουδάρια 1 handkerchiefs These **handkerchiefs** were small pieces of cloth used to wipe one’s face. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 19 12 xs31 translate-unknown σιμικίνθια 1 aprons These **aprons** were clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of those who wore the aprons. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 19 12 kw9z figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 the sick Luke is using the adjective **sick** as a noun to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 19 12 nl3a figs-personification ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους 1 their illnesses departed from them Luke is speaking of these **illnesses** figuratively as if it were living thing that could depart from a person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God cured them of their illnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 19 13 he2x 0 General Information: This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. It is about Jewish exorcists. ACT 19 13 fgq4 ἐξορκιστῶν 1 exorcists These **exorcists** were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places. ACT 19 13 s12u figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 0b8a7a7949a8d1d5f750697e0464cb2f19cc82a5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 5 Oct 2022 15:46:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 179/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 36 +++++++++++++++++------------------- 1 file changed, 17 insertions(+), 19 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index a0e95faae4..f83edc9dee 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1059,25 +1059,23 @@ MAT 14 34 x9nu translate-names Γεννησαρέτ 1 Gennesaret **Gennesaret** MAT 14 35 xd7c figs-hyperbole πάντας 1 sent Here, **all** does not mean every single person, but it means many people who were sick. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language to express this. Alternate translation: “many of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 14 36 mw8n figs-activepassive διεσώθησαν 1 were healed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “Jesus” did it. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 intro i9a5 0 # Matthew 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 15:8-9, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The “traditions of the elders”

The “traditions of the elders” were oral laws that the Jewish religious leaders developed because they wanted to make sure that everyone obeyed the law of Moses. However, they often worked harder to obey these rules than to obey the law of Moses itself. Jesus rebuked the religious leaders for this, and they became angry as a result. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Jews and Gentiles

The Jews of Jesus’ time thought that only Jews could please God by the way they lived. Jesus healed a Canaanite Gentile woman’s daughter to show his followers that he would accept both Jews and Gentiles as his people.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Sheep

The Bible often speaks of people as if they were sheep because sheep need someone to take care of them. This is because they do not see well and they often go to where other animals can kill them easily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 15 1 q6af writing-newevent 0 General Information: The scene shifts to events that occurred some time after events of the previous chapter. Here Jesus responds to the criticisms of the Pharisees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -MAT 15 2 j1b8 figs-rquestion διὰ τί οἱ μαθηταί σου παραβαίνουσιν τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων? 1 Why do your disciples violate the traditions of the elders? The Pharisees and scribes use this question to criticize Jesus and his disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Your disciples do not respect the rules that our ancestors have given us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 15 2 yn6l τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 the traditions of the elders These **traditions of the elders** are not the same as the law of Moses. This refers to later teachings and interpretations of the law given by religious leaders after Moses. -MAT 15 2 gfn6 figs-explicit οὐ…νίπτονται τὰς χεῖρας 1 they do not wash their hands This washing is not only to clean hands. This refers to a ceremonial washing according to the tradition of the elders. Alternate translation: “they do not wash their hands properly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 15 3 ia1e figs-rquestion διὰ τί καὶ ὑμεῖς παραβαίνετε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν? 1 Why do you also violate the commandment of God because of your traditions? Jesus answers with a question to criticize what the religious leaders do. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “And I see that you refuse to obey God’s commands just so that you can follow what your ancestors taught you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 15 4 srz6 0 General Information: In verse 4, Jesus quotes twice from Exodus to show how God expects people to treat their parents. -MAT 15 4 qmm7 θανάτῳ τελευτάτω 1 let him die the death Alternate translation: “the people must surely execute him” -MAT 15 5 ql75 figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 But you say Here, **you** is plural and refers to the Pharisees and scribes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 15 6 vr6y figs-quotesinquotes οὐ μὴ τιμήσει τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ 1 he will certainly not honor his father The words beginning with “But you say” (verse 5) have a quotation within a quotation. If necessary you can translate them as indirect quotations. “But you teach that a person does not need to honor his parents by giving them something that may help them if the person tells his parents that he has already given it as a gift to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -MAT 15 6 q3kt figs-explicit οὐ μὴ τιμήσει τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ 1 he will certainly not honor his father It is implied that **his father** means “his parents.” This means the religious leaders taught that a person does not need to show respect to his parents by taking care of them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 15 6 znt9 ἠκυρώσατε τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 you have made void the word of God Here, **word of God** refers specifically to his commands. Alternate translation: “you have treated the word of God as if it were invalid” or “you have ignored God’s commands” -MAT 15 6 yq5a διὰ τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν 1 because of your traditions Alternate translation: “because you want to follow your traditions” -MAT 15 7 t4fq 0 General Information: In verses 8 and 9, Jesus quotes the prophet Isaiah to rebuke the Pharisees and scribes. -MAT 15 7 wv77 καλῶς ἐπροφήτευσεν περὶ ὑμῶν Ἠσαΐας 1 Well did Isaiah prophesy about you Alternate translation: “Isaiah told the truth in this prophecy about you” -MAT 15 7 n4ti figs-explicit λέγων 1 saying It is implied that Isaiah is speaking what God told him. Alternate translation: “when he told what God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 15 8 qw69 figs-metonymy ὁ λαὸς οὗτος τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ 1 This people honors me with their lips Here, **lips** refers to speaking. Alternate translation: “These people say all the right things to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 15 8 bz91 με…ἐμοῦ 1 me … me Both occurrences of **me** refer to God. -MAT 15 8 wuw3 figs-metonymy ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far from me Here, **heart** refers to a person’s thoughts or emotions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 15 8 q7vm figs-idiom ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far away from me This phrase is a way of saying the people are not truly devoted to God. Alternate translation: “but they do not really love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 15 1 q6af writing-newevent τότε 1 General Information: Jesus is using the word translated **Then** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MAT 15 2 j1b8 figs-rquestion διὰ τί οἱ μαθηταί σου παραβαίνουσιν τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων? 1 Why do your disciples violate the traditions of the elders? The Pharisees are not asking for information, but are using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what they are saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your disciples certainly violate the traditions of the elder!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 15 2 yn6l translate-unknown τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 the traditions of the elders Here, ***traditions of the elders** is not talking about the law of Moses, but other rules that previous people had created. If your readers would not understand this, you can state what it means explicitly. Alternate translation: “traditional teachings which previous people created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 15 2 gfn6 figs-explicit οὐ…νίπτονται τὰς χεῖρας 1 they do not wash their hands This washing is not only to clean the hands of filth, but also to rid the body of impurities. This washing is one which the Pharisees participated in, and often they compelled others to do the same. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they do not wash their hands of their impurities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 15 3 ia1e figs-rquestion διὰ τί καὶ ὑμεῖς παραβαίνετε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν? 1 Why do you also violate the commandment of God because of your traditions? Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are violating the commandment of God because of your traditions!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 15 4 srz6 figs-quotesinquotes τίμα τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν μητέρα…ὁ κακολογῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα, θανάτῳ τελευτάτω 1 General Information: If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “For Moses said to honor your father and mother. He also said that the person who speaks evil against his father or mother deserves to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MAT 15 5 ql75 figs-explicit δῶρον 1 But you say It might be necessary in your language to say who the gift is for. This gift is given to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “is a gift for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 15 5 l8t0 figs-quotesinquotes ὑμεῖς δὲ λέγετε, ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί, δῶρον ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφεληθῇς 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “But you say that whoever says to his father or mother 'Whatever from might have been helpful is a gift'” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MAT 15 6 q3kt figs-explicit πατέρα 1 he will certainly not honor his father Here, the word **father** implies the idea of both the father and the mother. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “father and mother” or “parents” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 15 6 znt9 figs-explicit ἠκυρώσατε τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 you have made void the word of God Here, the phrase **the word of God** is referring to God's commandments in the Old Testament. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you have made void the God's commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 15 7 t4fq figs-exclamations ὑποκριταί 1 General Information: Jesus calls them **hypocrites** in an exclamatory way to emphasize his anger with them. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “You are hypocrites!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +MAT 15 7 n4ti writing-quotations λέγων 1 saying Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “when he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +MAT 15 8 qw69 figs-metonymy ὁ λαὸς οὗτος τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ 1 This people honors me with their lips Isaiah, who Jesus is quoting, is using the term **lips** figuratively to mean when someone is speaking. Alternate translation: “This people honors me when they speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 15 8 bz91 writing-pronouns με…ἐμοῦ 1 me … me Here, the words **me** are referring to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “me, God … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MAT 15 8 wuw3 figs-metonymy ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far from me Jesus is using the term **heart** figuratively to mean a person's inner thoughts or emotions. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 15 8 q7vm figs-idiom ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far away from me Here, the phrase **far from me** is an idiom meaning that they do not love him. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “but they are not love me in their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 15 8 hr29 figs-idiom δὲ 1 Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) MAT 15 9 jf93 μάτην δὲ σέβονταί με 1 But they worship me in vain Alternate translation: “But their worship means nothing to me” or “But they only pretend to worship me” MAT 15 9 vvb9 ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων 1 the commandments of men Alternate translation: “the rules that people make up” MAT 15 11 s28y figs-metonymy εἰσερχόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα…ἐκπορευόμενον ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 1 enters into the mouth … what comes out of the mouth Jesus is contrasting what a person eats to what a person says. Jesus means that God is concerned with what a person says rather than what a person eats. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 95af65e5e0126cedbae12720990cf71266ccdf77 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 10:58:22 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 180/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 5 ++--- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index f83edc9dee..c7b5bc1b75 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1075,9 +1075,8 @@ MAT 15 8 qw69 figs-metonymy ὁ λαὸς οὗτος τοῖς χείλεσίν MAT 15 8 bz91 writing-pronouns με…ἐμοῦ 1 me … me Here, the words **me** are referring to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “me, God … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MAT 15 8 wuw3 figs-metonymy ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far from me Jesus is using the term **heart** figuratively to mean a person's inner thoughts or emotions. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 8 q7vm figs-idiom ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far away from me Here, the phrase **far from me** is an idiom meaning that they do not love him. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “but they are not love me in their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 15 8 hr29 figs-idiom δὲ 1 Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -MAT 15 9 jf93 μάτην δὲ σέβονταί με 1 But they worship me in vain Alternate translation: “But their worship means nothing to me” or “But they only pretend to worship me” -MAT 15 9 vvb9 ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων 1 the commandments of men Alternate translation: “the rules that people make up” +MAT 15 8 hr29 figs-idiom δὲ 1 Here, **but** contrasts what is before it to what comes after it. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +MAT 15 9 vvb9 ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων 1 the commandments of men James is using the possessive form to describe these **commandments** as something which are created by people. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “man-made” instead of the noun “men.” Alternate translation: “man-made commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) MAT 15 11 s28y figs-metonymy εἰσερχόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα…ἐκπορευόμενον ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 1 enters into the mouth … what comes out of the mouth Jesus is contrasting what a person eats to what a person says. Jesus means that God is concerned with what a person says rather than what a person eats. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 12 l2uj figs-activepassive οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἀκούσαντες τὸν λόγον ἐσκανδαλίσθησαν 1 the Pharisees, having heard this word, were offended If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “this statement made the Pharisees angry” or “this statement offended the Pharisees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 13 n5ij figs-metaphor πᾶσα φυτεία ἣν οὐκ ἐφύτευσεν ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος ἐκριζωθήσεται 1 Every plant that my heavenly Father has not planted will be uprooted Jesus speaks of the Pharisees as if they were worthless plants that his **Father** would uproot. This means the Pharisees do not actually belong to God, so God will remove them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 71adcb716f8be848cf9b087bf8217fe7fc53bd77 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 15:51:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 181/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 11 +++++------ 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 7c195fd6d2..ee3ab1f13e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2641,7 +2641,7 @@ ACT 18 27 ll36 figs-idiom διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 to p ACT 18 27 v2i6 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 27 f99p figs-abstractnouns τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος 1 those who had believed by grace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those whom God had graciously led to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 18 28 mw2n figs-abstractnouns δημοσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **public**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “publicly” or “where anyone could listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 19 intro g38y 0 # Acts 19 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Baptism

John baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins. Jesus’ followers baptized people who wanted to follow Jesus.

### Temple of Diana

The temple of Diana was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Diana while they were there. The people who sold statues of Diana were afraid that if people did not believe Diana was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues. +ACT 19 intro g38y 0 # Acts 19 General Notes\n\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n\n- Verses 1–10 tell how Paul came to the city of Ephesus and proclaimed the gospel there.\n- Verses 11–20 describe remarkable things that God did in Ephesus as a result of the gospel proclamation there.\n- Verses 21–41 describe how the artisans in Ephesus created an uproar because people were no longer buying the idols they made.\n\nActs [19:20](../19/20.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the sixth major part of the book.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\n\n\n### Temple of Artemis\n\n\n\nThe temple of Artemis was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Artemis while they were there. The people who sold statues of Artemis were afraid that if people did not believe Artemis was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.\n ACT 19 1 lp23 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke is using the phrase **And it happened that** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 19 1 rhv1 figs-explicit διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη 1 Luke says that Paul traveled through **the upper parts** of the province of Asia to indicate that he followed a more direct route to Ephesus that went over higher ground than the main route. The implication is that Paul wanted to go directly to Ephesus after visiting the churches in Galatia and Phrygia ([18:23](../18/23.md)), as he had promised he would do if that was God’s will ([18:21](../18/21.md)). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “taking the most direct route” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 1 munb figs-idiom κατελθεῖν εἰς 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Ephesus because he was coming down to the coast from a route that traveled over high ground. Alternate translation: “arrived in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2679,11 +2679,10 @@ ACT 19 12 aks4 translate-unknown σουδάρια 1 handkerchiefs These **handke ACT 19 12 xs31 translate-unknown σιμικίνθια 1 aprons These **aprons** were clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of those who wore the aprons. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 12 kw9z figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 the sick Luke is using the adjective **sick** as a noun to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 19 12 nl3a figs-personification ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους 1 their illnesses departed from them Luke is speaking of these **illnesses** figuratively as if it were living thing that could depart from a person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God cured them of their illnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ACT 19 13 he2x 0 General Information: This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. It is about Jewish exorcists. -ACT 19 13 fgq4 ἐξορκιστῶν 1 exorcists These **exorcists** were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places. -ACT 19 13 s12u figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 19 13 d59p τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὃν Παῦλος κηρύσσει 1 by the Jesus whom Paul proclaims **Jesus** was a common name at the time, so these exorcists wanted people to know of whom they spoke. -ACT 19 13 vqt1 figs-metonymy τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 by the Jesus This phrase stands for the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus” or “by the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 13 he2x writing-newevent δέ 1 General Information: Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +ACT 19 13 fgq4 translate-unknown ἐξορκιστῶν 1 exorcists These **exorcists** were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places.Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of person that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “exorcists,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 19 13 s12u figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα 1 the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 13 vqt1 figs-metonymy τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 by the Jesus The exorcists are using Jesus himself to mean his authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the authority of the Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 14 cb8p translate-names Σκευᾶ 1 of Sceva **Sceva** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 15 i4a2 τὸν Ἰησοῦν γινώσκω, καὶ τὸν Παῦλον ἐπίσταμαι 1 Jesus I know, and Paul I know Alternate translation: “I know Jesus and Paul” or “I know Jesus, and I know Paul” ACT 19 15 nsl1 figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 but who are you? The spirit asked this question to emphasize that the exorcists had no authority over evil spirits. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “but I do not know you!” or “but you have no authority over me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 25778900863e3f301f38a0f8004c4e84cd216d77 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 15:53:41 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 182/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index ee3ab1f13e..0fc7365260 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2683,7 +2683,9 @@ ACT 19 13 he2x writing-newevent δέ 1 General Information: Luke is using the wo ACT 19 13 fgq4 translate-unknown ἐξορκιστῶν 1 exorcists These **exorcists** were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places.Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of person that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “exorcists,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 13 s12u figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα 1 the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 13 vqt1 figs-metonymy τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 by the Jesus The exorcists are using Jesus himself to mean his authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the authority of the Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 19 14 cb8p translate-names Σκευᾶ 1 of Sceva **Sceva** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 19 14 cwzb writing-background δέ 1 Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about these **seven sons of Sceva** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 19 14 emgz writing-participants ἦσαν…τινος Σκευᾶ Ἰουδαίου ἀρχιερέως, ἑπτὰ υἱοὶ τοῦτο ποιοῦντες 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jewish high priest** to introduce his **seven sons** as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish chief priest whose seven sons were doing this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 19 14 cb8p translate-names Σκευᾶ 1 of Sceva The word **Sceva** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 15 i4a2 τὸν Ἰησοῦν γινώσκω, καὶ τὸν Παῦλον ἐπίσταμαι 1 Jesus I know, and Paul I know Alternate translation: “I know Jesus and Paul” or “I know Jesus, and I know Paul” ACT 19 15 nsl1 figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 but who are you? The spirit asked this question to emphasize that the exorcists had no authority over evil spirits. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “but I do not know you!” or “but you have no authority over me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 19 16 ty4x ἐφαλόμενος ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ἐν ᾧ ἦν τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν 1 the man in whom was the evil spirit, after leaping on them This means that the **evil spirit** caused the **man** whom it was controlling to leap on the exorcists. From 3b9a94512e2056b64abe059b5c287a11aac8f847 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 15:56:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 183/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 ++++-- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 0fc7365260..d9463b57a9 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2686,8 +2686,10 @@ ACT 19 13 vqt1 figs-metonymy τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 by the Jesus The exorcists ACT 19 14 cwzb writing-background δέ 1 Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about these **seven sons of Sceva** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 19 14 emgz writing-participants ἦσαν…τινος Σκευᾶ Ἰουδαίου ἀρχιερέως, ἑπτὰ υἱοὶ τοῦτο ποιοῦντες 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jewish high priest** to introduce his **seven sons** as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish chief priest whose seven sons were doing this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 19 14 cb8p translate-names Σκευᾶ 1 of Sceva The word **Sceva** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 15 i4a2 τὸν Ἰησοῦν γινώσκω, καὶ τὸν Παῦλον ἐπίσταμαι 1 Jesus I know, and Paul I know Alternate translation: “I know Jesus and Paul” or “I know Jesus, and I know Paul” -ACT 19 15 nsl1 figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 but who are you? The spirit asked this question to emphasize that the exorcists had no authority over evil spirits. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “but I do not know you!” or “but you have no authority over me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 19 15 fhzn figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθὲντὸ…πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν εἶπεν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the evil spirit responded to the sons of Sceva. Alternate translation: “the evil spirit responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +ACT 19 15 lrky figs-explicit τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he is continuing the story he began in verse 13 after providing background material in verse 14. By **the evil spirit**, he means one to which some of the sons of Sceva were saying on a specific occasion, “I adjure you by the Jesus whom Paul proclaims.” Luke indicates in verse 16 that two of the sons were involved on this occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. UST models one way to do that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 19 15 nsl1 figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 but who are you? The evil spirit is using the question form to emphasize that it does not know or respect these sons of Sceva the way he knows and respects Jesus and Paul, the representative of Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “but I do not know or respect you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 19 15 vqwh writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς…τίνες ἐστέ? 1 The evil spirit is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **are**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I certainly do not know you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 19 16 ty4x ἐφαλόμενος ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ἐν ᾧ ἦν τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν 1 the man in whom was the evil spirit, after leaping on them This means that the **evil spirit** caused the **man** whom it was controlling to leap on the exorcists. ACT 19 16 lu7u αὐτοὺς 1 them Here, **them** refers to the exorcists who send evil spirits from people or places. See how you translated this in [Acts 19:13](../19/13.md). ACT 19 16 b8cb γυμνοὺς…ἐκφυγεῖν 1 they fled … naked The exorcists fled with their clothes ripped off them. From 79c1df92f1c8488a86f593c57c81f99f485e8b74 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 15:57:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 184/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 +--- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d9463b57a9..8ad6be38e0 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2690,9 +2690,7 @@ ACT 19 15 fhzn figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθὲντὸ…πνεῦμα τὸ π ACT 19 15 lrky figs-explicit τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he is continuing the story he began in verse 13 after providing background material in verse 14. By **the evil spirit**, he means one to which some of the sons of Sceva were saying on a specific occasion, “I adjure you by the Jesus whom Paul proclaims.” Luke indicates in verse 16 that two of the sons were involved on this occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. UST models one way to do that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 15 nsl1 figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 but who are you? The evil spirit is using the question form to emphasize that it does not know or respect these sons of Sceva the way he knows and respects Jesus and Paul, the representative of Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “but I do not know or respect you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 19 15 vqwh writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς…τίνες ἐστέ? 1 The evil spirit is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **are**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I certainly do not know you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 19 16 ty4x ἐφαλόμενος ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ἐν ᾧ ἦν τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν 1 the man in whom was the evil spirit, after leaping on them This means that the **evil spirit** caused the **man** whom it was controlling to leap on the exorcists. -ACT 19 16 lu7u αὐτοὺς 1 them Here, **them** refers to the exorcists who send evil spirits from people or places. See how you translated this in [Acts 19:13](../19/13.md). -ACT 19 16 b8cb γυμνοὺς…ἐκφυγεῖν 1 they fled … naked The exorcists fled with their clothes ripped off them. +ACT 19 16 lu7u figs-explicit ἀμφοτέρων 1 them Luke assumes that his readers will understand that only two of the seven sons of Sceva were involved on this particular occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the two sons of Sceva who were trying to cast out the evil spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 17 j85h figs-activepassive ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” or “they considered the name of the Lord Jesus to be great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 17 j2hh figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα 1 the name Here, **the name** stands for the power and authority of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 19 z9rj συνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους 1 having brought their books together The word **books** refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were written. Alternate translation: “having collected their books” From 9d9cd494a2770e9099d16feea586c5a757ce3426 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 16:08:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 185/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 10 +++++++--- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 8ad6be38e0..b35f629fea 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2691,14 +2691,18 @@ ACT 19 15 lrky figs-explicit τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν 1 Luke a ACT 19 15 nsl1 figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 but who are you? The evil spirit is using the question form to emphasize that it does not know or respect these sons of Sceva the way he knows and respects Jesus and Paul, the representative of Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “but I do not know or respect you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 19 15 vqwh writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς…τίνες ἐστέ? 1 The evil spirit is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **are**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I certainly do not know you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 19 16 lu7u figs-explicit ἀμφοτέρων 1 them Luke assumes that his readers will understand that only two of the seven sons of Sceva were involved on this particular occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the two sons of Sceva who were trying to cast out the evil spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 19 17 j85h figs-activepassive ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” or “they considered the name of the Lord Jesus to be great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 19 17 j2hh figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα 1 the name Here, **the name** stands for the power and authority of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 17 tj8t writing-endofstory δὲ 0 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the seven sons of Sceva. You language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 19 19 z9rj συνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους 1 having brought their books together The word **books** refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were written. Alternate translation: “having collected their books” ACT 19 19 m6nf ἐνώπιον πάντων 1 before everyone Alternate translation: “in front of everyone” +ACT 19 17 jodu figs-activepassive τοῦτο…ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν…τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all living in Ephesus came to know about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 19 17 fd5m figs-hyperbole τοῦτο…ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν…τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “this became widely known among those who lived in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 19 17 h0lq figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of **fear** as if it could physically fall on the people of Ephesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 19 17 w1su figs-hyperbole ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “all who heard about it became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 19 17 j85h figs-activepassive ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 19 17 j2hh figs-metonymy ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name Here the word **name** stands for the reputation of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus received a great reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 19 upz3 τὰς τιμὰς αὐτῶν 1 the value of them Alternate translation: “the value of the books” or “the value of the scrolls” ACT 19 19 u9pi translate-numbers μυριάδας πέντε 1 50000 Alternate translation: “fifty thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 19 19 bcv2 translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου 1 pieces of silver Each of the **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) -ACT 19 20 tj8t writing-endofstory 0 This ends the story about the Jewish exorcists. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 19 20 es71 figs-synecdoche οὕτως κατὰ κράτος τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power Alternate translation: “So because of these powerful deeds, more and more people heard the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 19 21 k1j1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet. ACT 19 21 de4f δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story. From 7d868b42fc001681e528c571dff81a80044c9cc5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 16:12:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 186/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index b35f629fea..5d592c19c2 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2692,16 +2692,16 @@ ACT 19 15 nsl1 figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 but who ACT 19 15 vqwh writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς…τίνες ἐστέ? 1 The evil spirit is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **are**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I certainly do not know you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 19 16 lu7u figs-explicit ἀμφοτέρων 1 them Luke assumes that his readers will understand that only two of the seven sons of Sceva were involved on this particular occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the two sons of Sceva who were trying to cast out the evil spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 17 tj8t writing-endofstory δὲ 0 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the seven sons of Sceva. You language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 19 19 z9rj συνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους 1 having brought their books together The word **books** refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were written. Alternate translation: “having collected their books” -ACT 19 19 m6nf ἐνώπιον πάντων 1 before everyone Alternate translation: “in front of everyone” +ACT 19 19 i31a figs-nominaladj τὰ περίεργα 1 Luke is using the adjective **magical** as a noun to describe certain practices. ULT adds the word **arts** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “practices that involved magic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 19 19 z9rj figs-explicit τὰς βίβλουςσυνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους 1 having brought their books together Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the word **books** refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were recorded. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “their scrolls of magical incantations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 19 18 v9ib figs-hendiadys ἐξομολογούμενοι καὶ ἀναγγέλλοντες 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **declaring** tells how these believers were **confessing** the wrong things that they had done. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “publicly confessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 19 17 jodu figs-activepassive τοῦτο…ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν…τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all living in Ephesus came to know about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 17 fd5m figs-hyperbole τοῦτο…ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν…τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “this became widely known among those who lived in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 19 17 h0lq figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of **fear** as if it could physically fall on the people of Ephesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 17 w1su figs-hyperbole ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “all who heard about it became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 19 17 j85h figs-activepassive ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 17 j2hh figs-metonymy ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name Here the word **name** stands for the reputation of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus received a great reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 19 19 upz3 τὰς τιμὰς αὐτῶν 1 the value of them Alternate translation: “the value of the books” or “the value of the scrolls” -ACT 19 19 u9pi translate-numbers μυριάδας πέντε 1 50000 Alternate translation: “fifty thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +ACT 19 19 u9pi translate-numbers ἀργυρίου μυριάδας πέντε 1 50000 Each of these **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might say something more general, or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “an amount equivalent to well over a hundred years’ wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) ACT 19 19 bcv2 translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου 1 pieces of silver Each of the **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) ACT 19 20 es71 figs-synecdoche οὕτως κατὰ κράτος τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power Alternate translation: “So because of these powerful deeds, more and more people heard the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 19 21 k1j1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet. From b9a85f0d19a3e5a9536a012701431a290e8bf6b1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 16:13:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 187/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 5d592c19c2..430fd0ab0e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2691,10 +2691,10 @@ ACT 19 15 lrky figs-explicit τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν 1 Luke a ACT 19 15 nsl1 figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 but who are you? The evil spirit is using the question form to emphasize that it does not know or respect these sons of Sceva the way he knows and respects Jesus and Paul, the representative of Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “but I do not know or respect you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 19 15 vqwh writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς…τίνες ἐστέ? 1 The evil spirit is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **are**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I certainly do not know you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 19 16 lu7u figs-explicit ἀμφοτέρων 1 them Luke assumes that his readers will understand that only two of the seven sons of Sceva were involved on this particular occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the two sons of Sceva who were trying to cast out the evil spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 19 17 tj8t writing-endofstory δὲ 0 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the seven sons of Sceva. You language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 19 19 i31a figs-nominaladj τὰ περίεργα 1 Luke is using the adjective **magical** as a noun to describe certain practices. ULT adds the word **arts** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “practices that involved magic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 19 19 z9rj figs-explicit τὰς βίβλουςσυνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους 1 having brought their books together Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the word **books** refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were recorded. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “their scrolls of magical incantations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 18 v9ib figs-hendiadys ἐξομολογούμενοι καὶ ἀναγγέλλοντες 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **declaring** tells how these believers were **confessing** the wrong things that they had done. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “publicly confessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +ACT 19 17 mx62 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the seven sons of Sceva. You language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 19 17 jodu figs-activepassive τοῦτο…ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν…τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all living in Ephesus came to know about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 17 fd5m figs-hyperbole τοῦτο…ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν…τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “this became widely known among those who lived in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 19 17 h0lq figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of **fear** as if it could physically fall on the people of Ephesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From d1f06fdb36595bddc21349a5319f1279f96386fb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 16:15:45 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 188/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 430fd0ab0e..f582b11430 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2703,7 +2703,9 @@ ACT 19 17 j85h figs-activepassive ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα το ACT 19 17 j2hh figs-metonymy ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name Here the word **name** stands for the reputation of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus received a great reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 19 u9pi translate-numbers ἀργυρίου μυριάδας πέντε 1 50000 Each of these **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might say something more general, or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “an amount equivalent to well over a hundred years’ wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) ACT 19 19 bcv2 translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου 1 pieces of silver Each of the **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) -ACT 19 20 es71 figs-synecdoche οὕτως κατὰ κράτος τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power Alternate translation: “So because of these powerful deeds, more and more people heard the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 19 20 es71 figs-personification τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power Luke is speaking figuratively of the way that the **word of the Lord** was becoming more widely known and accepted as if it were a living thing that was **increasing** and **prevailing**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 19 20 lbg9 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 20 t49m writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 19 21 k1j1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet. ACT 19 21 de4f δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story. ACT 19 21 q18b ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα…ὁ Παῦλος 1 this was completed, Paul Alternate translation: “Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus, he” From 40ee0957df90d6e64b718ff4b425e197a1bb7251 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 16:18:27 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 189/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 +++------ 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index f582b11430..d6ed6722e2 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2706,12 +2706,9 @@ ACT 19 19 bcv2 translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου 1 pieces of silver Each of the ACT 19 20 es71 figs-personification τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power Luke is speaking figuratively of the way that the **word of the Lord** was becoming more widely known and accepted as if it were a living thing that was **increasing** and **prevailing**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 19 20 lbg9 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 20 t49m writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) -ACT 19 21 k1j1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet. -ACT 19 21 de4f δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story. -ACT 19 21 q18b ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα…ὁ Παῦλος 1 this was completed, Paul Alternate translation: “Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus, he” -ACT 19 21 fgq5 ἔθετο…ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι 1 he determined in the Spirit This could mean: (1) Paul decided with the help of the Holy Spirit or (2) Paul decided within his own spirit, which means he made up his mind. -ACT 19 21 brb7 Ἀχαΐαν 1 Achaia **Achaia** was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. It was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. See how you translated this in [Acts 18:12](../18/12.md). -ACT 19 21 rdz4 δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν 1 it is necessary for me also to see Rome Alternate translation: “I must also travel to Rome” +ACT 19 21 de4f writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +ACT 19 21 q18b figs-idiom ὡς…ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι…πορεύεσθαι 1 this was completed, Paul The word **fulfilled** conveys the sense that Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “once all these things had happened, the Spirit showed Paul that he had completed his work in Ephesus and that he should travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 19 21 rdz4 figs-idiom δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν 1 it is necessary for me also to see Rome In this context, the word **see** means to visit a place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I must also visit Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 19 22 cy6f translate-names Ἔραστον 1 Erastus **Erastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 22 k35j figs-explicit αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν χρόνον εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 he himself stayed in Asia for a time It is made explicit in the next few verses that Paul remains in Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 22 uy9x figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν 1 he himself stayed Here, **himself** is added for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) From f2f7505d5e20671b6be7b46c25282f57be5628a2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 16:19:37 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 190/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 +--- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d6ed6722e2..cdd993ac3c 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2709,9 +2709,7 @@ ACT 19 20 t49m writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to J ACT 19 21 de4f writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 19 21 q18b figs-idiom ὡς…ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι…πορεύεσθαι 1 this was completed, Paul The word **fulfilled** conveys the sense that Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “once all these things had happened, the Spirit showed Paul that he had completed his work in Ephesus and that he should travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 19 21 rdz4 figs-idiom δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν 1 it is necessary for me also to see Rome In this context, the word **see** means to visit a place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I must also visit Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 19 22 cy6f translate-names Ἔραστον 1 Erastus **Erastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 22 k35j figs-explicit αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν χρόνον εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 he himself stayed in Asia for a time It is made explicit in the next few verses that Paul remains in Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 19 22 uy9x figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν 1 he himself stayed Here, **himself** is added for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +ACT 19 22 cy6f translate-names Ἔραστον 1 Erastus The word **Erastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 23 l7gz 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells about a riot that broke out while Paul was in Ephesus. ACT 19 23 nb3p figs-litotes ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance Luke uses the negative **no small** to indicate that the riot was very large. See how you translated this in [Acts 12:18](../12/18.md) Alternate translation: “the people became very upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 19 23 rwf2 τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 the Way This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated this title in [Acts 9:1](../09/01.md). From 893c0bd340dea40fdcddda0d53fe0b05406ce2bb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 16:20:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 191/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++--- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index cdd993ac3c..4cf281d345 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2710,9 +2710,8 @@ ACT 19 21 de4f writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated ** ACT 19 21 q18b figs-idiom ὡς…ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι…πορεύεσθαι 1 this was completed, Paul The word **fulfilled** conveys the sense that Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “once all these things had happened, the Spirit showed Paul that he had completed his work in Ephesus and that he should travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 19 21 rdz4 figs-idiom δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν 1 it is necessary for me also to see Rome In this context, the word **see** means to visit a place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I must also visit Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 19 22 cy6f translate-names Ἔραστον 1 Erastus The word **Erastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 23 l7gz 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells about a riot that broke out while Paul was in Ephesus. -ACT 19 23 nb3p figs-litotes ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance Luke uses the negative **no small** to indicate that the riot was very large. See how you translated this in [Acts 12:18](../12/18.md) Alternate translation: “the people became very upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 19 23 rwf2 τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 the Way This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated this title in [Acts 9:1](../09/01.md). +ACT 19 23 nb3p figs-litotes τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 19 23 rwf2 translate-names τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 the Way As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in [19:9](../19/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 This verse introduces background information about **Demetrius**. Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess **Artemis**, sometimes translated as “Diana.” She was a false goddess of fertility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 19 24 opb9 translate-names Δημήτριος 1 **Demetrius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 24 cg16 writing-participants Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος 1 a certain silversmith named Demetrius The use of the words **a certain** introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) From 0c09f59236da6315e17f32fdd6c358f758986ceb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 16:24:28 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 192/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 11 ++++++----- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 4cf281d345..e3b5ae9d05 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2712,11 +2712,12 @@ ACT 19 21 rdz4 figs-idiom δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν 1 it is ACT 19 22 cy6f translate-names Ἔραστον 1 Erastus The word **Erastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 23 nb3p figs-litotes τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 19 23 rwf2 translate-names τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 the Way As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in [19:9](../19/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 This verse introduces background information about **Demetrius**. Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess **Artemis**, sometimes translated as “Diana.” She was a false goddess of fertility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 19 24 opb9 translate-names Δημήτριος 1 **Demetrius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 24 cg16 writing-participants Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος 1 a certain silversmith named Demetrius The use of the words **a certain** introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 19 24 nwt7 ἀργυροκόπος 1 a silversmith A **silversmith** is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry. -ACT 19 24 p58m figs-litotes παρείχετο…οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν 1 brought in not a little business Luke uses the negative **not a little** to say that he brought in much business. Alternate translation: “made a lot of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 19 24 cg16 writing-participants Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι…παρείχετο 1 a certain silversmith named Demetrius Luke is using the phrase **a certain** to introduce **Demetrius** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a man named Demetrius … who was bringing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 19 24 opb9 translate-names Δημήτριος 1 The word **Demetrius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος, παρείχετο 1 Luke provides this background information about **Demetrius** to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He was a silversmith who made silver shrines of Artemis, and he was bringing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 19 24 wg95 figs-extrainfo ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess **Artemis**. (She was known as Diana in Latin; she was a false goddess of fertility.) Since Demetrius describes this temple in verse 27, you do not need to provide information about it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +ACT 19 24 nwt7 translate-unknown ἀργυροκόπος 1 a silversmith A **silversmith** is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry.Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of worker that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 19 24 p58m figs-litotes οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν 1 brought in not a little business Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great deal of business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 19 25 kuz6 τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας 1 the workmen of that occupation An **occupation** is a profession or job. Alternate translation: “others who did that kind of work” ACT 19 26 rm6w θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε ὅτι 1 you see and hear that Alternate translation: “you have come to know and understand that” ACT 19 26 rx32 figs-metaphor μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον 1 and turned away a considerable crowd Paul’s stopping people from worshiping idols is spoken of as though Paul were literally turning the people in a different direction. Alternate translation: “and caused many people to stop worshiping the local gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 5a1193df8d4b4c037e0dd5ffe3d05fe1dfb9975e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 17:40:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 193/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index e3b5ae9d05..0e97de1dbf 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2718,7 +2718,8 @@ ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺ ACT 19 24 wg95 figs-extrainfo ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess **Artemis**. (She was known as Diana in Latin; she was a false goddess of fertility.) Since Demetrius describes this temple in verse 27, you do not need to provide information about it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) ACT 19 24 nwt7 translate-unknown ἀργυροκόπος 1 a silversmith A **silversmith** is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry.Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of worker that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 24 p58m figs-litotes οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν 1 brought in not a little business Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great deal of business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 19 25 kuz6 τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας 1 the workmen of that occupation An **occupation** is a profession or job. Alternate translation: “others who did that kind of work” +ACT 19 25 f8rm οὓς συναθροίσας καὶ τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας, εἶπεν 1 It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He gathered together the craftsmen, along with workers in similar occupations, and said” +ACT 19 25 w1xd figs-nominaladj περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα 1 Luke is using the adjective **such** as a noun to mean a certain kind of work. ULT adds the word **things** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “in similar occupations” or “who did similar crafts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 19 26 rm6w θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε ὅτι 1 you see and hear that Alternate translation: “you have come to know and understand that” ACT 19 26 rx32 figs-metaphor μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον 1 and turned away a considerable crowd Paul’s stopping people from worshiping idols is spoken of as though Paul were literally turning the people in a different direction. Alternate translation: “and caused many people to stop worshiping the local gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 26 z7e7 figs-synecdoche λέγων ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοὶ, οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι 1 He is saying that the things that are being made with hands are not gods Here the word **hands** can refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “He is saying that the idols that people make are not real gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From 90f795e9035efeeb1b25424964d9b907a2ea9ba1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 17:42:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 194/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 0e97de1dbf..0af37873fe 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2720,9 +2720,9 @@ ACT 19 24 nwt7 translate-unknown ἀργυροκόπος 1 a silversmith A **sil ACT 19 24 p58m figs-litotes οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν 1 brought in not a little business Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great deal of business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 19 25 f8rm οὓς συναθροίσας καὶ τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας, εἶπεν 1 It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He gathered together the craftsmen, along with workers in similar occupations, and said” ACT 19 25 w1xd figs-nominaladj περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα 1 Luke is using the adjective **such** as a noun to mean a certain kind of work. ULT adds the word **things** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “in similar occupations” or “who did similar crafts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 19 26 rm6w θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε ὅτι 1 you see and hear that Alternate translation: “you have come to know and understand that” -ACT 19 26 rx32 figs-metaphor μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον 1 and turned away a considerable crowd Paul’s stopping people from worshiping idols is spoken of as though Paul were literally turning the people in a different direction. Alternate translation: “and caused many people to stop worshiping the local gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 19 26 z7e7 figs-synecdoche λέγων ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοὶ, οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι 1 He is saying that the things that are being made with hands are not gods Here the word **hands** can refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “He is saying that the idols that people make are not real gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 19 26 rm6w figs-merism θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε 1 you see and hear that Demetrius is referring to perception by naming the two major means of perception. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you perceive clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +ACT 19 26 rx32 figs-metaphor μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον 1 and turned away a considerable crowd Demetrius is speaking figuratively as if Paul had physically **removed** a crowd that had been patronizing the artisans in Ephesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has caused a considerable crowd to stop buying our shrines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 19 26 z7e7 figs-synecdoche οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι 1 He is saying that the things that are being made with hands are not gods Demetrius is figuratively using one part of the artisans, their **hands**, to represent all of them in the act of making idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “things that people make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 19 27 r1w2 figs-activepassive τοῦτο κινδυνεύει ἡμῖν, τὸ μέρος εἰς ἀπελεγμὸν ἐλθεῖν 1 is this trade in peril for us to come to disrepute If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “might the people no longer want to buy idols that we make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 27 j3bb figs-activepassive τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι 1 the temple of the great goddess Artemis may be considered as nothing If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the people may think there is no benefit in going to the temple to worship the great goddess Artemis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 27 bqt4 μέλλειν τε καὶ καθαιρεῖσθαι τῆς μεγαλειότητος αὐτῆς 1 And indeed, her majesty is about to be destroyed Artemis’s greatness only comes from what people think of her. From 8a4d286790b1da5a33de7aeba8a1f2494e57ba74 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 17:44:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 195/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 +++----- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 0af37873fe..ea98aace4b 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2723,11 +2723,9 @@ ACT 19 25 w1xd figs-nominaladj περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα 1 Luke is using ACT 19 26 rm6w figs-merism θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε 1 you see and hear that Demetrius is referring to perception by naming the two major means of perception. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you perceive clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 19 26 rx32 figs-metaphor μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον 1 and turned away a considerable crowd Demetrius is speaking figuratively as if Paul had physically **removed** a crowd that had been patronizing the artisans in Ephesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has caused a considerable crowd to stop buying our shrines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 26 z7e7 figs-synecdoche οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι 1 He is saying that the things that are being made with hands are not gods Demetrius is figuratively using one part of the artisans, their **hands**, to represent all of them in the act of making idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “things that people make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 19 27 r1w2 figs-activepassive τοῦτο κινδυνεύει ἡμῖν, τὸ μέρος εἰς ἀπελεγμὸν ἐλθεῖν 1 is this trade in peril for us to come to disrepute If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “might the people no longer want to buy idols that we make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 19 27 j3bb figs-activepassive τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι 1 the temple of the great goddess Artemis may be considered as nothing If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the people may think there is no benefit in going to the temple to worship the great goddess Artemis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 19 27 bqt4 μέλλειν τε καὶ καθαιρεῖσθαι τῆς μεγαλειότητος αὐτῆς 1 And indeed, her majesty is about to be destroyed Artemis’s greatness only comes from what people think of her. -ACT 19 27 hz7l figs-hyperbole ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 whom all Asia and the world worships This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Alternate translation: “whom many parts Asia and other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 19 27 aq5c figs-metonymy ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 Here the words **Asia** and **the world** refer to the people in Asia and the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 27 j3bb figs-activepassive τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι 1 the temple of the great goddess Artemis may be considered as nothing If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people will consider the temple of the great goddess Artemis to be nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 19 27 hz7l figs-hyperbole ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 whom all Asia and the world worships This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Alternate translation: “whom people from all over the province of Asia and the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 19 27 aq5c figs-metonymy ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 Here the words **Asia** and **the world** refer to the people in Asia and in the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 28 t4lm ἔκραζον 1 Here **they** refers to the craftsmen who made the idols ([Acts 19:24-25](./24.md)). ACT 19 28 uc5c figs-metaphor γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ 1 having become filled with anger This speaks of the craftsmen as though they were containers. Here, **anger** is spoken of as if it were the contents that fill a container. Alternate translation: “they became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 28 lcx8 ἔκραζον 1 they cried out Alternate translation: “they shouted aloud” or “they shouted loudly” From 5680db0370f92d18f47c476cd50f29ceb091f822 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 17:46:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 196/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 +++---- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index ea98aace4b..6569b37b9e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2726,10 +2726,9 @@ ACT 19 26 z7e7 figs-synecdoche οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι 1 ACT 19 27 j3bb figs-activepassive τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι 1 the temple of the great goddess Artemis may be considered as nothing If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people will consider the temple of the great goddess Artemis to be nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 27 hz7l figs-hyperbole ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 whom all Asia and the world worships This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Alternate translation: “whom people from all over the province of Asia and the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 19 27 aq5c figs-metonymy ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 Here the words **Asia** and **the world** refer to the people in Asia and in the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 19 28 t4lm ἔκραζον 1 Here **they** refers to the craftsmen who made the idols ([Acts 19:24-25](./24.md)). -ACT 19 28 uc5c figs-metaphor γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ 1 having become filled with anger This speaks of the craftsmen as though they were containers. Here, **anger** is spoken of as if it were the contents that fill a container. Alternate translation: “they became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 19 28 lcx8 ἔκραζον 1 they cried out Alternate translation: “they shouted aloud” or “they shouted loudly” -ACT 19 28 ii1u 0 General Information: Ephesus was part of the Roman empire and in the province of Asia. +ACT 19 28 t4lm writing-pronouns ἔκραζον 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the craftsmen who were making the idols. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the craftsmen were shouting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 19 28 uc5c figs-metaphor γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ 1 having become filled with anger Luke is speaking figuratively of the craftsmen as if they were containers that **anger** filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “becoming very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 19 28 ii1u translate-names Ἐφεσίων 0 General Information: The word **Ephesians** describes people who live in or come from the city of Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 29 t7xs figs-metonymy ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 the whole city was filled with confusion Here, **city** refers to the people of the city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 29 u42d figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 The city is spoken of as if it were a container. And, **confusion** is spoken of as if it were the contents that filled the container. Alternate translation: “people all over the city became upset and started shouting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 29 nt7y ὥρμησάν τε ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 and they rushed together This was a mob or near riot situation. From ac5ca088e428098bc871449111e5e9ee2c48a065 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 17:49:46 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 197/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 6569b37b9e..2c716d9e18 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2729,12 +2729,12 @@ ACT 19 27 aq5c figs-metonymy ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκου ACT 19 28 t4lm writing-pronouns ἔκραζον 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the craftsmen who were making the idols. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the craftsmen were shouting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 19 28 uc5c figs-metaphor γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ 1 having become filled with anger Luke is speaking figuratively of the craftsmen as if they were containers that **anger** filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “becoming very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 28 ii1u translate-names Ἐφεσίων 0 General Information: The word **Ephesians** describes people who live in or come from the city of Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 29 t7xs figs-metonymy ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 the whole city was filled with confusion Here, **city** refers to the people of the city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 19 29 u42d figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 The city is spoken of as if it were a container. And, **confusion** is spoken of as if it were the contents that filled the container. Alternate translation: “people all over the city became upset and started shouting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 19 29 nt7y ὥρμησάν τε ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 and they rushed together This was a mob or near riot situation. -ACT 19 29 ej3q εἰς τὸ θέατρον 1 into the theater The Ephesus **theater** was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. -ACT 19 29 hjc8 Γάϊον καὶ Ἀρίσταρχον Μακεδόνας, συνεκδήμους Παύλου 1 Paul’s … travel companions These were men who had been with Paul. -ACT 19 29 d6r9 translate-names Γάϊον…Ἀρίσταρχον 1 Gaius … Aristarchus **Gaius** and **Aristarchus** are names of men. Gaius and Aristarchus came from Macedonia but were working with Paul in Ephesus at this time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 19 29 t7xs figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 the whole city was filled with confusion If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “confusion filled the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]); +ACT 19 29 u42d figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of **the city** as if they was a container that **confusion** filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there was confusion throughout the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 19 29 u51d figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confusion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “people throughout the city were confused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 19 29 ej3q translate-unknown τὸ θέατρον 1 into the theater The **theater** in Ephesus was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. It was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. If the word “theater” would communicate the wrong idea in your language, you could use a term that would be clearer for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stadium” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 19 29 d6r9 translate-names Γάϊον…Ἀρίσταρχον 1 Gaius … Aristarchus The words **Gaius** and **Aristarchus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 19 29 zm0j translate-names Μακεδόνας 1 The word **Macedonians** described people who lived in or came from the province of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 31 z7ww τὸ θέατρον 1 the theater The Ephesus **theater** was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. See how you translated **theater** in [Acts 19:29](../19/29.md). ACT 19 33 jr85 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρον 1 Alexander **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 33 j1mi figs-explicit κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα 1 motioned with his hand You can make explicit that Alexander was showing the crowd that he wanted them to be quiet. Alternate translation: “gestured to the crowd to be quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 0dc3f20dc7e221e58364dae64992b6de5f26def8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 17:51:56 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 198/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 2c716d9e18..293093cc64 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2735,7 +2735,9 @@ ACT 19 29 u51d figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγ ACT 19 29 ej3q translate-unknown τὸ θέατρον 1 into the theater The **theater** in Ephesus was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. It was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. If the word “theater” would communicate the wrong idea in your language, you could use a term that would be clearer for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stadium” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 29 d6r9 translate-names Γάϊον…Ἀρίσταρχον 1 Gaius … Aristarchus The words **Gaius** and **Aristarchus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 29 zm0j translate-names Μακεδόνας 1 The word **Macedonians** described people who lived in or came from the province of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 31 z7ww τὸ θέατρον 1 the theater The Ephesus **theater** was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. See how you translated **theater** in [Acts 19:29](../19/29.md). +ACT 19 31 r183 figs-idiom δοῦναι ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὸ θέατρον 1 The expression **to give himself** means “to go,” but it suggests risk and danger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to risk going into the theater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 19 31 we87 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ… αὐτὸν…παρεκάλουν…ἑαυτὸν 1 The pronouns **him** and **himself** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Paul’s … him … were urging Paul … himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 19 31 o6qt translate-names τῶν Ἀσιαρχῶν 1 The word **Asiarchs** is the name for the provincial officers who governed the Roman province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 33 jr85 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρον 1 Alexander **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 33 j1mi figs-explicit κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα 1 motioned with his hand You can make explicit that Alexander was showing the crowd that he wanted them to be quiet. Alternate translation: “gestured to the crowd to be quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 33 tlq7 ἀπολογεῖσθαι 1 to give a defense It is not clear whom or what Alexander wanted to defend. If your language requires this information, it might be best to use a general phrase like “to explain what was going on.” From 9abe192457a6f4eebd157fae0e0c34c8be10a3b4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 17:55:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 199/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 11 ++++++----- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 293093cc64..0ba8c6f779 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2735,12 +2735,13 @@ ACT 19 29 u51d figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγ ACT 19 29 ej3q translate-unknown τὸ θέατρον 1 into the theater The **theater** in Ephesus was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. It was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. If the word “theater” would communicate the wrong idea in your language, you could use a term that would be clearer for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stadium” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 29 d6r9 translate-names Γάϊον…Ἀρίσταρχον 1 Gaius … Aristarchus The words **Gaius** and **Aristarchus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 29 zm0j translate-names Μακεδόνας 1 The word **Macedonians** described people who lived in or came from the province of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 31 r183 figs-idiom δοῦναι ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὸ θέατρον 1 The expression **to give himself** means “to go,” but it suggests risk and danger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to risk going into the theater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 19 31 we87 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ… αὐτὸν…παρεκάλουν…ἑαυτὸν 1 The pronouns **him** and **himself** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Paul’s … him … were urging Paul … himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 19 31 o6qt translate-names τῶν Ἀσιαρχῶν 1 The word **Asiarchs** is the name for the provincial officers who governed the Roman province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 33 jr85 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρον 1 Alexander **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 33 j1mi figs-explicit κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα 1 motioned with his hand You can make explicit that Alexander was showing the crowd that he wanted them to be quiet. Alternate translation: “gestured to the crowd to be quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 19 33 tlq7 ἀπολογεῖσθαι 1 to give a defense It is not clear whom or what Alexander wanted to defend. If your language requires this information, it might be best to use a general phrase like “to explain what was going on.” +ACT 19 31 we87 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ… αὐτὸν…παρεκάλουν…ἑαυτὸν 1 The pronouns **him** and **himself** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Paul’s … him … were urging Paul … himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 19 31 r183 figs-idiom δοῦναι ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὸ θέατρον 1 The expression **to give himself** means “to go,” but it suggests risk and danger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to risk going into the theater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 19 33 ukaw figs-explicit συνεβίβασαν Ἀλέξανδρον 1 The implication is that some people **instructed Alexander** about how he could speak to everyone in the theater. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “instructed Alexander about how he could speak to everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 19 33 jr85 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρον 1 Alexander The word **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 19 33 j1mi translate-symaction κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα 1 motioned with his hand This likely means that Alexander was **waving his hand** to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this specifically in your translation. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 19 33 tlq7 figs-explicit ἀπολογεῖσθαι τῷ δήμῳ 1 to give a defense The implication is that Alexander wanted to explain that although he and his fellow Jews did not worship idols themselves, they were not opposing the business of making silver shrines of Artemis. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to explain to the people that he and his fellow Jews were not responsible for the artisans losing business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 34 u1hp figs-metaphor φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων 1 there was one voice from all of them The shouting together of the people at the same time is spoken of as though they were speaking with **one voice**. Alternate translation: “they were shouting in unison” or “they were shouting together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 35 pu96 0 Connecting Statement: The clerk of Ephesus speaks to quiet the crowd. ACT 19 35 sy9m ὁ γραμματεὺς 1 the town clerk This **town clerk** was like a “writer” or “secretary” for the town. From 502b5210f9c341a13a4fccfae3f1d7e46c7b33c2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 17:56:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 200/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 0ba8c6f779..46819b4765 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2742,7 +2742,8 @@ ACT 19 33 ukaw figs-explicit συνεβίβασαν Ἀλέξανδρον 1 The ACT 19 33 jr85 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρον 1 Alexander The word **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 33 j1mi translate-symaction κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα 1 motioned with his hand This likely means that Alexander was **waving his hand** to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this specifically in your translation. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 19 33 tlq7 figs-explicit ἀπολογεῖσθαι τῷ δήμῳ 1 to give a defense The implication is that Alexander wanted to explain that although he and his fellow Jews did not worship idols themselves, they were not opposing the business of making silver shrines of Artemis. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to explain to the people that he and his fellow Jews were not responsible for the artisans losing business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 19 34 u1hp figs-metaphor φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων 1 there was one voice from all of them The shouting together of the people at the same time is spoken of as though they were speaking with **one voice**. Alternate translation: “they were shouting in unison” or “they were shouting together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 19 34 tyx6 figs-quotations ἐπιγνόντες…ὅτι Ἰουδαῖός ἐστιν, 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “recognizing, ‘He is a Jew!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +ACT 19 34 u1hp figs-metaphor φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων, ὡς…κραζόντων 1 there was one voice from all of them Luke is speaking figuratively as if the people in the theater collectively had only **one voice**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all shouted together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 35 pu96 0 Connecting Statement: The clerk of Ephesus speaks to quiet the crowd. ACT 19 35 sy9m ὁ γραμματεὺς 1 the town clerk This **town clerk** was like a “writer” or “secretary” for the town. ACT 19 35 sd3s figs-rquestion τίς γάρ ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς? 1 what man indeed is there who does not know that the city of Ephesus is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of that which is fallen down from heaven? The clerk asked this question to assure the crowd they were right and to comfort them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “for every man knows that the Ephesians guard the temple of the great Artemis and of her image that fell down from heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From 0264d2e3bad04b6e0e92251e4102a335f0ff6cca Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 18:03:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 201/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 10 ++++++---- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 46819b4765..d6e41d0ee8 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2744,10 +2744,12 @@ ACT 19 33 j1mi translate-symaction κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα 1 mo ACT 19 33 tlq7 figs-explicit ἀπολογεῖσθαι τῷ δήμῳ 1 to give a defense The implication is that Alexander wanted to explain that although he and his fellow Jews did not worship idols themselves, they were not opposing the business of making silver shrines of Artemis. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to explain to the people that he and his fellow Jews were not responsible for the artisans losing business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 34 tyx6 figs-quotations ἐπιγνόντες…ὅτι Ἰουδαῖός ἐστιν, 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “recognizing, ‘He is a Jew!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 19 34 u1hp figs-metaphor φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων, ὡς…κραζόντων 1 there was one voice from all of them Luke is speaking figuratively as if the people in the theater collectively had only **one voice**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all shouted together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 19 35 pu96 0 Connecting Statement: The clerk of Ephesus speaks to quiet the crowd. -ACT 19 35 sy9m ὁ γραμματεὺς 1 the town clerk This **town clerk** was like a “writer” or “secretary” for the town. -ACT 19 35 sd3s figs-rquestion τίς γάρ ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς? 1 what man indeed is there who does not know that the city of Ephesus is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of that which is fallen down from heaven? The clerk asked this question to assure the crowd they were right and to comfort them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “for every man knows that the Ephesians guard the temple of the great Artemis and of her image that fell down from heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 19 35 k8dy figs-litotes ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 who does not know The town clerk uses **not** to emphasize that all of the people knew this. Alternate translation: “everyone knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 19 35 sy9m translate-unknown ὁ γραμματεὺς 1 the town clerk This **city clerk** was a high official in the government of Ephesus. He was not merely someone who kept records. In your translation, you can use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “an alderman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 19 35 n4qz φησίν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +ACT 19 35 gox9 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἐφέσιοι 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “Citizens of Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 19 35 mtsc figs-ellipsis τίς γάρ ἐστιν 1 The city clerk is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “you should stop this uproar because, after all, who is there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 19 35 sd3s figs-rquestion τίς…ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς? 1 what man indeed is there who does not know that the city of Ephesus is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of that which is fallen down from heaven? The city clerk is using the question form to emphasize that the people of Ephesus do not need to be concerned that the worship of Artemis is in peril. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no one of men who does not know that the city of Ephesus is the temple warden of the great Artemis and of the Zeus-fallen image!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 19 35 k8dy figs-doublenegatives τίς…ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 who does not know The city clerk’s question becomes a double negative when it takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression instead. Alternate translation: “all men know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 19 35 hiw3 νεωκόρον…τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος 1 temple keeper The Ephesian people maintained and guarded the **temple** of **Artemis**. ACT 19 35 afd1 τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 of that which is fallen down from heaven Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite which fell from the sky. People thought that his rock had come directly from Zeus, the ruler of the Greek gods (idols). ACT 19 36 r8cf ἀναντιρρήτων οὖν ὄντων τούτων 1 So these things are undeniable Alternate translation: “So since you know these things are true” From 526fc44768db5df89de522a24a4a24dd820469d5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 18:07:45 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 202/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 +++++-- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d6e41d0ee8..9a143c3ffa 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2750,8 +2750,11 @@ ACT 19 35 gox9 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἐφέσιοι 1 This is an idiomatic ACT 19 35 mtsc figs-ellipsis τίς γάρ ἐστιν 1 The city clerk is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “you should stop this uproar because, after all, who is there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 19 35 sd3s figs-rquestion τίς…ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς? 1 what man indeed is there who does not know that the city of Ephesus is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of that which is fallen down from heaven? The city clerk is using the question form to emphasize that the people of Ephesus do not need to be concerned that the worship of Artemis is in peril. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no one of men who does not know that the city of Ephesus is the temple warden of the great Artemis and of the Zeus-fallen image!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 19 35 k8dy figs-doublenegatives τίς…ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 who does not know The city clerk’s question becomes a double negative when it takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression instead. Alternate translation: “all men know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -ACT 19 35 hiw3 νεωκόρον…τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος 1 temple keeper The Ephesian people maintained and guarded the **temple** of **Artemis**. -ACT 19 35 afd1 τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 of that which is fallen down from heaven Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite which fell from the sky. People thought that his rock had come directly from Zeus, the ruler of the Greek gods (idols). +ACT 19 35 gqr7 figs-hyperbole τίς…ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 A generalization for emphasis is implicit in the city clerk’s question, and this generalization becomes explicit when the question takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “men know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 19 35 zzmv figs-gendernotations τίς…ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, the city clerk is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “what person is there” or, as a statement or exclamation, “all people know” or “people know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +ACT 19 35 hiw3 writing-politeness τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος 1 temple keeper The term **temple keeper** was an honorary title that cities assumed when they built and maintained temples to the gods that the Greeks and Romans worshiped or to the emperor. In your translation, use an expression that shows that the city clerk is using honorific language. Alternate translation: “the city of Ephesus has the honor of hosting the temple of the great Artemis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) +ACT 19 35 afd1 figs-nominaladj τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 of that which is fallen down from heaven The city clerk is using the adjective **Zeus-fallen** as a noun to mean a specific kind of object. ULT adds the word **image** to show that. (Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite that had fallen from the sky. The people of Ephesus thought that his rock had come directly from Zeus, whom they considered the ruler of their pagan gods.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the image that fell from the sky from Zeus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 19 35 fdfk translate-names τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 The word **Zeus** is the name of a pagan god. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 36 r8cf ἀναντιρρήτων οὖν ὄντων τούτων 1 So these things are undeniable Alternate translation: “So since you know these things are true” ACT 19 36 xj2n μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 to do nothing rash Alternate translation: “do not do anything before you have had time to think about it” ACT 19 36 s67q προπετὲς 1 rash To be **rash** is to act without careful thought. From 2f74fbe34014675cd19f0c41cdd1a7192989e358 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 19:05:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 203/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 9a143c3ffa..19dd66839c 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2755,9 +2755,9 @@ ACT 19 35 zzmv figs-gendernotations τίς…ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων 1 Al ACT 19 35 hiw3 writing-politeness τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος 1 temple keeper The term **temple keeper** was an honorary title that cities assumed when they built and maintained temples to the gods that the Greeks and Romans worshiped or to the emperor. In your translation, use an expression that shows that the city clerk is using honorific language. Alternate translation: “the city of Ephesus has the honor of hosting the temple of the great Artemis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 19 35 afd1 figs-nominaladj τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 of that which is fallen down from heaven The city clerk is using the adjective **Zeus-fallen** as a noun to mean a specific kind of object. ULT adds the word **image** to show that. (Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite that had fallen from the sky. The people of Ephesus thought that his rock had come directly from Zeus, whom they considered the ruler of their pagan gods.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the image that fell from the sky from Zeus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 19 35 fdfk translate-names τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 The word **Zeus** is the name of a pagan god. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 36 r8cf ἀναντιρρήτων οὖν ὄντων τούτων 1 So these things are undeniable Alternate translation: “So since you know these things are true” -ACT 19 36 xj2n μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 to do nothing rash Alternate translation: “do not do anything before you have had time to think about it” -ACT 19 36 s67q προπετὲς 1 rash To be **rash** is to act without careful thought. +ACT 19 36 o0ul figs-activepassive κατεσταλμένους ὑπάρχειν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to calm down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 19 36 xj2n figs-explicit μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 to do nothing rash The city clerk means implicitly that it would be **rash** for the people to do anything to harm Gaius and Aristarchus, as he says in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “not to act impulsively and hurt the two men you have brought here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 19 36 s67q figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 rash If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **nothing** and the negative adjective **rash**. Alternate translation: “to be careful about what you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 19 37 s8a9 τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους 1 these men The words **these men** refer to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions ([Acts 19:29](../19/29.md)). ACT 19 38 qd4s οὖν 1 Therefore The town clerk had said in [Acts 19:37](../19/37.md) that Gaius and Aristarchus were not robbers or blasphemers. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” ACT 19 38 zkx5 figs-abstractnouns ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον 1 have a word against anyone Here having **a word against** someone means they want to accuse them of something. Alternate translation: “want to accuse someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From eb61b3012d3b3b810a8d28c2297c94e7186c798b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 19:07:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 204/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 19dd66839c..c2aef8766b 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2758,7 +2758,8 @@ ACT 19 35 fdfk translate-names τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 The word **Zeus** ACT 19 36 o0ul figs-activepassive κατεσταλμένους ὑπάρχειν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to calm down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 36 xj2n figs-explicit μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 to do nothing rash The city clerk means implicitly that it would be **rash** for the people to do anything to harm Gaius and Aristarchus, as he says in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “not to act impulsively and hurt the two men you have brought here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 36 s67q figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 rash If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **nothing** and the negative adjective **rash**. Alternate translation: “to be careful about what you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -ACT 19 37 s8a9 τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους 1 these men The words **these men** refer to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions ([Acts 19:29](../19/29.md)). +ACT 19 37 cuhh translate-versebridge 0 In this verse, the city clerk is giving the reason why the people of Ephesus should not harm Gaius and Aristarchus impulsively. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 36–37. It might say something like this: “You brought these two men here even though they are neither temple-robbers nor blasphemers of our goddess. Therefore it is necessary for you to be calmed and to do nothing rash, since it is undeniable that people from throughout the world come to Ephesus to worship Artemis.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) +ACT 19 37 s8a9 writing-pronouns τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους 1 these men The pronoun **these** refers to refers to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions ([Acts 19:29](../19/29.md)). While the city clerk does not refer to them by name, you could find a way to identify them for your readers. UST models one way to do this. Alternate translation: “text” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 19 38 qd4s οὖν 1 Therefore The town clerk had said in [Acts 19:37](../19/37.md) that Gaius and Aristarchus were not robbers or blasphemers. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” ACT 19 38 zkx5 figs-abstractnouns ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον 1 have a word against anyone Here having **a word against** someone means they want to accuse them of something. Alternate translation: “want to accuse someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 19 38 szf7 translate-unknown ἀνθύπατοί 1 proconsuls The **proconsuls** were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) From e0a142fbd3f20e87c592e857e6982cc59fd5dcff Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 19:09:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 205/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 +++++---- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index c2aef8766b..95cf52e40b 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2760,10 +2760,11 @@ ACT 19 36 xj2n figs-explicit μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 to ACT 19 36 s67q figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 rash If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **nothing** and the negative adjective **rash**. Alternate translation: “to be careful about what you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 19 37 cuhh translate-versebridge 0 In this verse, the city clerk is giving the reason why the people of Ephesus should not harm Gaius and Aristarchus impulsively. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 36–37. It might say something like this: “You brought these two men here even though they are neither temple-robbers nor blasphemers of our goddess. Therefore it is necessary for you to be calmed and to do nothing rash, since it is undeniable that people from throughout the world come to Ephesus to worship Artemis.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 19 37 s8a9 writing-pronouns τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους 1 these men The pronoun **these** refers to refers to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions ([Acts 19:29](../19/29.md)). While the city clerk does not refer to them by name, you could find a way to identify them for your readers. UST models one way to do this. Alternate translation: “text” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 19 38 qd4s οὖν 1 Therefore The town clerk had said in [Acts 19:37](../19/37.md) that Gaius and Aristarchus were not robbers or blasphemers. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” -ACT 19 38 zkx5 figs-abstractnouns ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον 1 have a word against anyone Here having **a word against** someone means they want to accuse them of something. Alternate translation: “want to accuse someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 19 38 szf7 translate-unknown ἀνθύπατοί 1 proconsuls The **proconsuls** were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 19 38 g8tp ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 Let them accuse one another This does not mean Demetrius and those with him will accuse each other. It means this is a place where people in general can speak their accusation. Alternate translation: “There people can accuse one another” +ACT 19 38 zkx5 figs-metonymy ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον 1 have a word against anyone The city clerk is using the term **word** figuratively to mean an accusation that Demetrius might make against Gaius and Aristarchus by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wish to make an accusation against anyone” or “wish to bring a charge against anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 38 i14r figs-activepassive ἀγοραῖοι ἄγονται καὶ ἀνθύπατοί εἰσιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proconsuls are holding court sessions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 19 38 szf7 translate-unknown ἀνθύπατοί 1 proconsuls The **proconsuls** were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. In your translation, you can use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 19 38 o1vf figs-imperative3p ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they may accuse one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) +ACT 19 38 g8tp writing-pronouns ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 Let them accuse one another The pronoun **them** refers both to Demetrius and his colleagues and to Gaius and Aristarchus. The city clerk does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues will accuse each other. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “let Demetrius and the craftsmen bring a charge against these men, and let these men respond” or “Demetrius and the craftsmen may bring a charge against these men, and these men may respond” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 19 39 hxh3 εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε 1 But if you seek anything about other matters Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss” ACT 19 39 wga5 figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 it will be settled in the regular assembly If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “let us settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 39 et5j τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the regular assembly This **regular assembly** refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided. From cac2f38ffe67f2d382390677fab1275215f14210 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 19:11:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 206/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 95cf52e40b..dbc36805df 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2765,9 +2765,10 @@ ACT 19 38 i14r figs-activepassive ἀγοραῖοι ἄγονται καὶ ἀ ACT 19 38 szf7 translate-unknown ἀνθύπατοί 1 proconsuls The **proconsuls** were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. In your translation, you can use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 38 o1vf figs-imperative3p ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they may accuse one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 19 38 g8tp writing-pronouns ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 Let them accuse one another The pronoun **them** refers both to Demetrius and his colleagues and to Gaius and Aristarchus. The city clerk does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues will accuse each other. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “let Demetrius and the craftsmen bring a charge against these men, and let these men respond” or “Demetrius and the craftsmen may bring a charge against these men, and these men may respond” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 19 39 hxh3 εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε 1 But if you seek anything about other matters Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss” -ACT 19 39 wga5 figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 it will be settled in the regular assembly If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “let us settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 19 39 et5j τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the regular assembly This **regular assembly** refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided. +ACT 19 39 hxh3 figs-idiom εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε 1 But if you seek anything about other matters The word **seek** does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues would be searching for something. The city clerk is speaking idiomatically. Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 19 39 wga5 figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 it will be settled in the regular assembly If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regular assembly will settle it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 19 39 dsmg figs-declarative ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 The city clerk may be using a future statement to give an command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a command. Alternate translation: “you must settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) +ACT 19 39 et5j translate-unknown τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the regular assembly This **regular assembly** refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided. In your translation, you can use a term for a comparable deliberative body in your culture. Alternate translation: “the town meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 40 sds7 figs-activepassive κινδυνεύομεν ἐνκαλεῖσθαι στάσεως περὶ τῆς σήμερον 1 we are in danger of being accused of rioting concerning this day If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we are in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us of starting this riot today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 intro u91c 0 # Acts 20 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Race

Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])

### “Compelled by the Spirit”

Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him. ACT 20 1 cwq7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul leaves Ephesus and continues his travels. From 2647acfdd68096e48ba4ceb60f059ec3e1ae3cd0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 19:14:09 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 207/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++++- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index dbc36805df..728f9138ad 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2769,7 +2769,10 @@ ACT 19 39 hxh3 figs-idiom εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητ ACT 19 39 wga5 figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 it will be settled in the regular assembly If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regular assembly will settle it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 39 dsmg figs-declarative ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 The city clerk may be using a future statement to give an command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a command. Alternate translation: “you must settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) ACT 19 39 et5j translate-unknown τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the regular assembly This **regular assembly** refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided. In your translation, you can use a term for a comparable deliberative body in your culture. Alternate translation: “the town meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 19 40 sds7 figs-activepassive κινδυνεύομεν ἐνκαλεῖσθαι στάσεως περὶ τῆς σήμερον 1 we are in danger of being accused of rioting concerning this day If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we are in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us of starting this riot today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 19 40 sds7 figs-activepassive κινδυνεύομεν ἐνκαλεῖσθαι 1 we are in danger of being accused of rioting concerning this day If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, the context suggests that it would be the Roman authorities. Alternate translation: “we are in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 19 40 efat figs-ellipsis τῆς σήμερον 1 The city clerk is leaving out a word that a sentence would ordinarily need in Greek in order to be complete. The clerk is abbreviating the expression “the today day,” which means “this day.” You can say that in your translation if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “this day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 19 40 up3g figs-metonymy τῆς σήμερον 1 The city clerk is referring to the events that were nearly a riot, by association with the day on which they took place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the events of this day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 40 jtdu figs-doublenegatives μηδενὸς αἰτίου ὑπάρχοντος, περὶ οὗ οὐ δυνησόμεθα ἀποδοῦναι λόγον 1 In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there being no cause about which we will not be able to give an account.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “because we would have to have a reason in order to give an account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 20 intro u91c 0 # Acts 20 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Race

Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])

### “Compelled by the Spirit”

Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him. ACT 20 1 cwq7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul leaves Ephesus and continues his travels. ACT 20 1 y5cq μετὰ δὲ τὸ παύσασθαι τὸν θόρυβον 1 After the uproar had ended Alternate translation: “After the riot” or “Following the riot” From 40852d61c1f528fce5fe79fcd07d7df9a7595262 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 21:15:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 208/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 ++---- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 728f9138ad..72d28c1191 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2774,10 +2774,8 @@ ACT 19 40 efat figs-ellipsis τῆς σήμερον 1 The city clerk is leaving ACT 19 40 up3g figs-metonymy τῆς σήμερον 1 The city clerk is referring to the events that were nearly a riot, by association with the day on which they took place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the events of this day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 40 jtdu figs-doublenegatives μηδενὸς αἰτίου ὑπάρχοντος, περὶ οὗ οὐ δυνησόμεθα ἀποδοῦναι λόγον 1 In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there being no cause about which we will not be able to give an account.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “because we would have to have a reason in order to give an account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 20 intro u91c 0 # Acts 20 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Race

Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])

### “Compelled by the Spirit”

Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him. -ACT 20 1 cwq7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul leaves Ephesus and continues his travels. -ACT 20 1 y5cq μετὰ δὲ τὸ παύσασθαι τὸν θόρυβον 1 After the uproar had ended Alternate translation: “After the riot” or “Following the riot” -ACT 20 1 hr32 ἀσπασάμενος 1 and said farewell Alternate translation: “and he said goodbye” -ACT 20 2 edb8 παρακαλέσας αὐτοὺς λόγῳ πολλῷ 1 had exhorted them with many words Alternate translation: “had greatly encouraged the believers by saying many things” or “had said many things to challenge the believers” +ACT 20 2 edb8 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 had exhorted them with many words The pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the **regions** of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 20 2 rvp8 translate-names τὴν Ἑλλάδα 1 The word **Greece** is the name of a country. At this time, the word meant about the same thing as “Achaia,” the name of the Roman province that consisted essentially of that country. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 3 yxj3 figs-metaphor ποιήσας τε μῆνας τρεῖς 1 And after he had spent three months there This speaks about time as if it were something a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after he had stayed there three months” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 3 cit9 figs-activepassive γενομένης ἐπιβουλῆς αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 a plot was formed against him by the Jews If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Jews formed a plot against him” or “the Jews formed a secret plan to harm him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 3 ah5w figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to only some of the Jews. Alternate translation: “by some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From dbe1b302457d58942ba3e084b788a4ab931e6a1a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 21:18:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 209/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 ++---- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 72d28c1191..a7038e3c0a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2776,10 +2776,8 @@ ACT 19 40 jtdu figs-doublenegatives μηδενὸς αἰτίου ὑπάρχο ACT 20 intro u91c 0 # Acts 20 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Race

Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])

### “Compelled by the Spirit”

Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him. ACT 20 2 edb8 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 had exhorted them with many words The pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the **regions** of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 2 rvp8 translate-names τὴν Ἑλλάδα 1 The word **Greece** is the name of a country. At this time, the word meant about the same thing as “Achaia,” the name of the Roman province that consisted essentially of that country. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 3 yxj3 figs-metaphor ποιήσας τε μῆνας τρεῖς 1 And after he had spent three months there This speaks about time as if it were something a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after he had stayed there three months” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 3 cit9 figs-activepassive γενομένης ἐπιβουλῆς αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 a plot was formed against him by the Jews If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Jews formed a plot against him” or “the Jews formed a secret plan to harm him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 20 3 ah5w figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to only some of the Jews. Alternate translation: “by some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 20 3 m7na μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν 1 as he was about to sail for Syria Alternate translation: “as he was ready to sail to Syria” +ACT 20 3 ah5w figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 3 b8pt figs-idiom ἐγένετο γνώμης 1 This expression means Paul resolved to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he resolved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 20 4 c9et συνείπετο δὲ αὐτῷ 1 And accompanying him Alternate translation: “And traveling with him” ACT 20 4 dw6j translate-names Σώπατρος…Πύρρου…Σεκοῦνδος,…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος 1 were Sopater of Pyrrhus … Secundus … Tychicus … Trophimus These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 4 w4n1 translate-names Βεροιαῖος…Θεσσαλονικέων…Δερβαῖος…Ἀσιανοὶ 1 from Berea … from Derbe These are names of places. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 81d4d15386e8c73970ee0a72d5dbdd7b775d3df0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Thu, 6 Oct 2022 21:20:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 210/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index a7038e3c0a..ec796ccd8f 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2778,10 +2778,10 @@ ACT 20 2 edb8 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 had exhorted them with many word ACT 20 2 rvp8 translate-names τὴν Ἑλλάδα 1 The word **Greece** is the name of a country. At this time, the word meant about the same thing as “Achaia,” the name of the Roman province that consisted essentially of that country. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 3 ah5w figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 3 b8pt figs-idiom ἐγένετο γνώμης 1 This expression means Paul resolved to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he resolved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 20 4 c9et συνείπετο δὲ αὐτῷ 1 And accompanying him Alternate translation: “And traveling with him” -ACT 20 4 dw6j translate-names Σώπατρος…Πύρρου…Σεκοῦνδος,…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος 1 were Sopater of Pyrrhus … Secundus … Tychicus … Trophimus These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 4 w4n1 translate-names Βεροιαῖος…Θεσσαλονικέων…Δερβαῖος…Ἀσιανοὶ 1 from Berea … from Derbe These are names of places. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 4 w8j6 Σώπατρος Πύρρου…Ἀρίσταρχος…Σεκοῦνδος…Γάϊος…Τιμόθεος…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος 1 Aristarchus … Gaius These are names of men. See how you translated these names in [Acts 19:29](../19/29.md). +ACT 20 4 dw6j translate-names Σώπατρος Πύρρου…Σεκοῦνδος,…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος 1 were Sopater of Pyrrhus … Secundus … Tychicus … Trophimus These words are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 4 dpyn figs-possession Σώπατρος Πύρρου 1 Here, the possessive form indicates that **Sopater** is the son of **Pyrrhus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sopater, whose father was named Pyrrhus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +ACT 20 4 w4n1 translate-names Βεροιαῖος…Θεσσαλονικέων…Δερβαῖος…Ἀσιανοὶ 1 from Berea … from Derbe The word **Berean** is the name for someone from the city of Berea. The word **Thessalonians** describes people from the city of Thessalonica. The word **Derbean** is the name for someone from the city of Derbe. The word **Asians** describes people from the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 4 w8j6 translate-names Ἀρίσταρχος…Γάϊος 1 Aristarchus … Gaius The words **Aristarchus** and **Gaius** are the names of men. See how you translated these names in [19:29](../19/29.md). ACT 20 5 y35x figs-exclusive προσελθόντες…ἡμᾶς 1 All instances of **us** in this verse refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 20 5 kv8t οὗτοι…προσελθόντες 1 they had gone before us Alternate translation: “these men had traveled ahead of us” ACT 20 5 itz1 translate-names Τρῳάδι 1 Troas **Troas** is the name of a place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 2c69f6eb77884bdcdbca7c3bb6669dcea93dd87a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 14:20:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 211/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index ec796ccd8f..fadfe7e6ca 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1774,7 +1774,7 @@ ACT 12 1 og4q figs-synecdoche ἐπέβαλεν…τὰς χεῖρας κακ ACT 12 2 i7zy translate-names Ἰάκωβον…Ἰωάννου 1 The words **James** and **John** are the names of men. See how you translated them in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 12 2 r1zv figs-synecdoche ἀνεῖλεν…Ἰάκωβον 1 he killed James It was probably not Herod himself who **killed James**. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “he had his soldiers execute James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 12 3 v4ag figs-synecdoche τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 And when he saw that this is pleasing to the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “to the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 12 3 ly66 figs-idiom ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread This phrase refers to the time of a Jewish religious observance that led up to the celebration of Passover. While it was observed on specific **days**, Luke is likely using the word “days” idiomatically to describe a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the Passover season” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 12 3 ly66 translate-names ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread The phrase **Unleavened Bread** is the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several **days**. If your readers would not be familiar with the food known as “bread” or the substance known as “leaven,” you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “the days of Special Food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 12 4 tza2 writing-pronouns ὃν καὶ πιάσας, ἔθετο εἰς φυλακήν 1 The pronouns **whom** refers to Peter, and the pronoun **he** refers to Herod. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “After Herod had arrested Peter, he put him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 12 4 pps1 translate-unknown τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν 1 to four squads of soldiers These **quaternions** were groups of four **soldiers** each. They would have taken turns guarding Peter in six-hour shifts throughout the day and night. Two soldiers would have been at Peter’s side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. Your language and culture may have a term for a group of four soldiers that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “quaternion,” as UST does. Alternate translation: “to four teams of soldiers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 12 4 i23a figs-idiom βουλόμενος…ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ 1 he was intending to bring him out to the people The phrase **to bring him out** means to put Peter on trial publicly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in a public trial in the presence of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From 42d74a20563f618d8d97104a026f94d5d206e4ec Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 14:23:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 212/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 ++++--- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index fadfe7e6ca..a40017ddfa 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2782,9 +2782,10 @@ ACT 20 4 dw6j translate-names Σώπατρος Πύρρου…Σεκοῦνδο ACT 20 4 dpyn figs-possession Σώπατρος Πύρρου 1 Here, the possessive form indicates that **Sopater** is the son of **Pyrrhus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sopater, whose father was named Pyrrhus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 20 4 w4n1 translate-names Βεροιαῖος…Θεσσαλονικέων…Δερβαῖος…Ἀσιανοὶ 1 from Berea … from Derbe The word **Berean** is the name for someone from the city of Berea. The word **Thessalonians** describes people from the city of Thessalonica. The word **Derbean** is the name for someone from the city of Derbe. The word **Asians** describes people from the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 4 w8j6 translate-names Ἀρίσταρχος…Γάϊος 1 Aristarchus … Gaius The words **Aristarchus** and **Gaius** are the names of men. See how you translated these names in [19:29](../19/29.md). -ACT 20 5 y35x figs-exclusive προσελθόντες…ἡμᾶς 1 All instances of **us** in this verse refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 20 5 kv8t οὗτοι…προσελθόντες 1 they had gone before us Alternate translation: “these men had traveled ahead of us” -ACT 20 5 itz1 translate-names Τρῳάδι 1 Troas **Troas** is the name of a place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 5 y35x figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here Luke begins to use the pronouns **us** and **we** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words throughout this chapter if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 20 5 gb5f writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the seven men who were traveling with Paul, whom Luke lists in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those seven men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 20 5 o1bl figs-explicit ἡμᾶς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if it will help your readers understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 20 5 itz1 translate-names Τρῳάδι 1 Troas The word **Troas** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 6 vmj6 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἤλθομεν…διετρίψαμεν 1 All instances of **we** in this verse refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 20 6 l5dr τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. See how you translated this in [Acts 12:3](../12/03.md). ACT 20 7 dnt4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here the word **we** refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [Acts 20:4-6](./04.md)) From 04bd6ffd46301731babf078bf0e005ccda88379b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 14:24:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 213/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index a40017ddfa..df11c70394 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2786,8 +2786,7 @@ ACT 20 5 y35x figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 As the General Notes to this chapter ACT 20 5 gb5f writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the seven men who were traveling with Paul, whom Luke lists in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those seven men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 5 o1bl figs-explicit ἡμᾶς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if it will help your readers understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 5 itz1 translate-names Τρῳάδι 1 Troas The word **Troas** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 6 vmj6 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἤλθομεν…διετρίψαμεν 1 All instances of **we** in this verse refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 20 6 l5dr τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. See how you translated this in [Acts 12:3](../12/03.md). +ACT 20 6 l5dr translate-names τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread The words **Unleavened Bread** are the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several **days**. See how you translated this in [12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 7 dnt4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here the word **we** refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [Acts 20:4-6](./04.md)) ACT 20 7 mbr8 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells about Paul’s preaching in Troas and about what happened to Eutychus. ACT 20 7 zff8 figs-synecdoche κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 to break bread Bread was part of their meals. This could mean: (1) this refers simply to eating a meal together. Alternate translation: “eat a meal” or (2) this refers to the meal they would eat together in order to remember Christ’s death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “to eat the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From 75247a6a5adaa8df7ef229e95e8143d87246507e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 14:29:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 214/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 10 ++++++---- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index df11c70394..278f90aa48 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2786,11 +2786,13 @@ ACT 20 5 y35x figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 As the General Notes to this chapter ACT 20 5 gb5f writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the seven men who were traveling with Paul, whom Luke lists in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those seven men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 5 o1bl figs-explicit ἡμᾶς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if it will help your readers understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 5 itz1 translate-names Τρῳάδι 1 Troas The word **Troas** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 7 xsyv figs-nominaladj τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular day of the **week**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the first day of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 20 7 tgsb figs-activepassive συνηγμένων ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we having gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 20 7 ls6u writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the believers in Troas with whom Paul and his traveling companions were meeting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Troas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 6 l5dr translate-names τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread The words **Unleavened Bread** are the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several **days**. See how you translated this in [12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 7 dnt4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here the word **we** refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [Acts 20:4-6](./04.md)) -ACT 20 7 mbr8 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells about Paul’s preaching in Troas and about what happened to Eutychus. -ACT 20 7 zff8 figs-synecdoche κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 to break bread Bread was part of their meals. This could mean: (1) this refers simply to eating a meal together. Alternate translation: “eat a meal” or (2) this refers to the meal they would eat together in order to remember Christ’s death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “to eat the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 20 7 j888 παρέτεινέν τε τὸν λόγον 1 and so he continued his message Alternate translation: “and so he continued to speak” +ACT 20 7 zff8 figs-synecdoche κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 to break bread Luke could be using the word **break** to mean “eat,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be figuratively using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “to share a meal” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 7 ckiy figs-explicit κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 By **to break bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to observe the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 20 7 j888 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 and so he continued his message Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 8 ak8z ὑπερῴῳ 1 upper room This **upper room** may have been the third floor of the house. ACT 20 9 v5q7 ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος 1 on the window This **window** was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on it. ACT 20 9 ju64 translate-names Εὔτυχος 1 Eutychus **Eutychus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 4422903bf47ba9f36d8c21f317e99d9251dad8a7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 14:31:28 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 215/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 278f90aa48..09a319d65b 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2792,8 +2792,10 @@ ACT 20 7 ls6u writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to ACT 20 6 l5dr translate-names τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread The words **Unleavened Bread** are the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several **days**. See how you translated this in [12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 7 zff8 figs-synecdoche κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 to break bread Luke could be using the word **break** to mean “eat,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be figuratively using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “to share a meal” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 7 ckiy figs-explicit κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 By **to break bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to observe the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 20 8 t6on figs-explicit ἦσαν… λαμπάδες ἱκαναὶ ἐν τῷ ὑπερῴῳ, οὗ ἦμεν συνηγμένοι 1 The implication seems to be that it became warm in this **upper room** because there were **many lamps** lit in it, and this helps account for why Eutychus fell asleep, as Luke describes in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “it was warm in the upper room where we were gathered together because many lamps were in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 20 8 ak8z translate-unknown ὑπερῴῳ 1 upper room In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. According to the next verse, this room was actually built above a room that was built above another room. If your community does not have houses like that, you can use another expression to describe a large indoor space where people could meet. See how you translated this in [9:37](../09/37.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 20 8 cshh figs-activepassive ἦμεν συνηγμένοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 7 j888 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 and so he continued his message Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 20 8 ak8z ὑπερῴῳ 1 upper room This **upper room** may have been the third floor of the house. ACT 20 9 v5q7 ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος 1 on the window This **window** was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on it. ACT 20 9 ju64 translate-names Εὔτυχος 1 Eutychus **Eutychus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 9 tsp4 figs-metaphor καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ 1 was falling into a deep sleep This speaks about **sleep** as if it were a deep hole into which a person could fall. Alternate translation: “was sleeping soundly” or “was becoming more and more tired until finally he was sleeping soundly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 207c05b0d2a475376cad5da9c35543e8bb054d93 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 14:48:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 216/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 13 +++++++------ 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 09a319d65b..d614cd7564 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2796,12 +2796,13 @@ ACT 20 8 t6on figs-explicit ἦσαν… λαμπάδες ἱκαναὶ ἐν ACT 20 8 ak8z translate-unknown ὑπερῴῳ 1 upper room In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. According to the next verse, this room was actually built above a room that was built above another room. If your community does not have houses like that, you can use another expression to describe a large indoor space where people could meet. See how you translated this in [9:37](../09/37.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 20 8 cshh figs-activepassive ἦμεν συνηγμένοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 7 j888 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 and so he continued his message Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 20 9 v5q7 ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος 1 on the window This **window** was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on it. -ACT 20 9 ju64 translate-names Εὔτυχος 1 Eutychus **Eutychus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 9 tsp4 figs-metaphor καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ 1 was falling into a deep sleep This speaks about **sleep** as if it were a deep hole into which a person could fall. Alternate translation: “was sleeping soundly” or “was becoming more and more tired until finally he was sleeping soundly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 9 abcz κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 having been overcome by sleep The young man fell asleep, not Paul. -ACT 20 9 jp89 figs-activepassive καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός 1 and was picked up dead When they went down to check his condition, they saw he was **dead**. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and when they went to pick him up, they found that he was dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 20 9 kh3h τριστέγου 1 third story The **third story** refers to a level two floors above the ground floor. If your culture does not count the ground floor, you may state this as the “second story.” +ACT 20 9 ju64 translate-names Εὔτυχος 1 Eutychus The word **Eutychus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 9 v5q7 translate-unknown ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος 1 on the window This **window** was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could describe this more fully. Alternate translation: “on the ledge of a window opening in the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 20 9 tsp4 figs-activepassive καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ…κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 was falling into a deep sleep If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a deep sleep overcoming him … sleep having overcome him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 20 9 abcz figs-personification καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ…κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 having been overcome by sleep Luke is speaking of **sleep** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could **overcome** Eutychus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “starting to sleep deeply … becoming completely asleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 20 9 kh3h τριστέγου 1 third story In this culture, the **third story** meant a level two floors above the ground floor. Some languages and cultures consider the “first story” to be one level above the ground floor, and so they would consider this level, two above the ground floor, to be the “second story.” You can say that in your translation if it would be helpful to your readers. +ACT 20 9 jp89 figs-activepassive ἤρθη νεκρός 1 and was picked up dead If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was the believers who were meeting with Paul. Alternate translation: “the believers picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 20 9 z1wf figs-explicit ἤρθη νεκρός 1 The implication is that some of the believers rushed down to help Eutychus but discovered that he had died from the fall. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when the believers went down to help him, they picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 11 av7m ἀναβὰς…τε ὁμιλήσας…ἐξῆλθεν 1 Here all occurrences of the word **he** refer to Paul. ACT 20 11 lih8 0 Connecting Statement: This is the end of the part of the story about Paul’s preaching at Troas and about Eutychus. ACT 20 11 w5w8 figs-synecdoche κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον 1 had broken bread Bread was a common food during meals. Here, **broken bread** probably means they shared a meal with more kinds of food than just bread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From 39910836ead19c63a2d54eae8db1de946259d6de Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 14:50:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 217/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d614cd7564..6a100b655f 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2803,6 +2803,7 @@ ACT 20 9 abcz figs-personification καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθ ACT 20 9 kh3h τριστέγου 1 third story In this culture, the **third story** meant a level two floors above the ground floor. Some languages and cultures consider the “first story” to be one level above the ground floor, and so they would consider this level, two above the ground floor, to be the “second story.” You can say that in your translation if it would be helpful to your readers. ACT 20 9 jp89 figs-activepassive ἤρθη νεκρός 1 and was picked up dead If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was the believers who were meeting with Paul. Alternate translation: “the believers picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 9 z1wf figs-explicit ἤρθη νεκρός 1 The implication is that some of the believers rushed down to help Eutychus but discovered that he had died from the fall. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when the believers went down to help him, they picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 20 10 uban figs-activepassive μὴ θορυβεῖσθε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not let this trouble you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 11 av7m ἀναβὰς…τε ὁμιλήσας…ἐξῆλθεν 1 Here all occurrences of the word **he** refer to Paul. ACT 20 11 lih8 0 Connecting Statement: This is the end of the part of the story about Paul’s preaching at Troas and about Eutychus. ACT 20 11 w5w8 figs-synecdoche κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον 1 had broken bread Bread was a common food during meals. Here, **broken bread** probably means they shared a meal with more kinds of food than just bread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From 3c02762b6a995ef4f54bc902ca7d046321133d3d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 14:50:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 218/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 6a100b655f..aa0b421a55 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2804,6 +2804,7 @@ ACT 20 9 kh3h τριστέγου 1 third story In this culture, the **third sto ACT 20 9 jp89 figs-activepassive ἤρθη νεκρός 1 and was picked up dead If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was the believers who were meeting with Paul. Alternate translation: “the believers picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 9 z1wf figs-explicit ἤρθη νεκρός 1 The implication is that some of the believers rushed down to help Eutychus but discovered that he had died from the fall. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when the believers went down to help him, they picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 10 uban figs-activepassive μὴ θορυβεῖσθε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not let this trouble you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 20 10 gfol figs-metaphor ἡ…ψυχὴ αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐστιν 1 Paul is speaking figuratively as if the life of Eutychus were contained within him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 11 av7m ἀναβὰς…τε ὁμιλήσας…ἐξῆλθεν 1 Here all occurrences of the word **he** refer to Paul. ACT 20 11 lih8 0 Connecting Statement: This is the end of the part of the story about Paul’s preaching at Troas and about Eutychus. ACT 20 11 w5w8 figs-synecdoche κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον 1 had broken bread Bread was a common food during meals. Here, **broken bread** probably means they shared a meal with more kinds of food than just bread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From 4585d4d00257838a5734e948de9336d37ebbc906 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 16:52:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 219/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index aa0b421a55..0f0e5d6717 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1160,7 +1160,7 @@ ACT 7 51 zp55 figs-metonymy ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τ ACT 7 51 esfc figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is using one part of a person, the **heart**, figuratively meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 7 51 jslb figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is figuratively using one part of a person, the **ears**, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 7 51 zgon figs-hyperbole ὑμεῖς ἀεὶ τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ Ἁγίῳ ἀντιπίπτετε 1 The word **always** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You keep resisting the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 7 51 w164 figs-you ὑμεῖς…ὑμῶν…ὑμεῖς 1 The words **you** and **your** are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +ACT 7 51 w164 figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς…ὑμῶν…ὑμεῖς 1 The words **you** and **your** are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 7 51 d2v8 figs-ellipsis ὡς οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Stephen is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “As your ancestors disobeyed God and did not listen to him, so you disobey God and do not listen to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 7 52 x7kf figs-rquestion τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? 1 Which of the prophets did your fathers not persecute? Stephen is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors persecuted each of the prophets!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 7 52 eiw2 figs-hyperbole τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? 1 Stephen’s rhetorical question has an implicit generalization for emphasis. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys emphasis. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors kept persecuting the prophets!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -1585,7 +1585,7 @@ ACT 10 28 k3we figs-explicit ἀλλοφύλῳ 1 a foreigner Here, the term **f ACT 10 28 ztt0 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 10 28 tl2h figs-doublet κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον 1 The words **common** and **unclean** mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “unacceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 10 29 x0p4 figs-activepassive μεταπεμφθείς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when you summoned me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 10 29 x0v3 figs-youplural μετεπέμψασθέ 1 The word **you** is plural. Peter is speaking to everyone who has gathered in the home of Cornelius. Use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural]]) +ACT 10 29 x0v3 figs-yousingular μετεπέμψασθέ 1 The word **you** is plural. Peter is speaking to everyone who has gathered in the home of Cornelius. Use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 10 30 mqv8 translate-textvariants ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας μέχρι ταύτης τῆς ὥρας, ἤμην τὴν ἐνάτην προσευχόμενος ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ μου 1 praying Some ancient texts say, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 10 30 na4u figs-idiom ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας 1 Four days ago In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” yesterday was the “second day,” the day before yesterday was the “third day,” and the day before that was the “fourth day” or **Four days ago**. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Three days ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 10 30 pkhh figs-idiom ταύτης τῆς ὥρας 1 Cornelius is using the term **hour** figuratively to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2172,7 +2172,7 @@ ACT 15 7 zhco translate-symaction ἀναστὰς Πέτρος 1 Peter stood u ACT 15 7 c2q7 writing-pronouns αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles and elders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the apostles and elders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 15 7 s6ap figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 15 7 a6q9 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Peter is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 15 7 wct8 figs-youplural ὑμεῖς…ὑμῖν 1 Both occurrences of **you** are plural, since they refer to the apostles and elders. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural]]) +ACT 15 7 wct8 figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς…ὑμῖν 1 Both occurrences of **you** are plural, since they refer to the apostles and elders. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 15 7 hk4g writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 Peter is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 15 7 ftl9 figs-idiom ἀφ’ ἡμερῶν ἀρχαίων 1 Peter is using an idiom that refers to the time when something began or had its origin. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Gentiles would first begin to believe in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 15 7 s3wb figs-synecdoche διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου 1 by my mouth Peter is figuratively using one part of himself, his **mouth**, to represent all of himself in the act of speaking. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “From me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -2350,7 +2350,7 @@ ACT 16 14 a74y figs-activepassive τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ το ACT 16 15 g7e9 figs-activepassive ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη 1 And when she was baptized, and her household If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is likely from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “when Paul baptized her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 15 lv50 figs-ellipsis καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and her household was also baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 16 15 s799 figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 her household Here, **her household** refers to all the people who lived in Lydia’s house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 15 igcw figs-youplural κεκρίκατέ 1 The word **you** is plural. Lydia is addressing Paul and his companions. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural]]) +ACT 16 15 igcw figs-yousingular κεκρίκατέ 1 The word **you** is plural. Lydia is addressing Paul and his companions. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural]]) ACT 16 15 g8ul writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Lydia is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 16 15 xnkk figs-imperative εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου, μένετε 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please come to my house and stay with me as my guests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 16 15 hkh3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Luke is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -2566,7 +2566,7 @@ ACT 18 5 bsgm figs-metonymy συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος ACT 18 6 ncx8 translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια 1 shaking out his garment This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a place, in this case the synagogue, to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See what you did with the similar gesture in [13:51](../13/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 18 6 z12a figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Your blood be upon your head Here, **blood** represents punishment, specifically for rejecting Jesus. Paul is telling the Jews that they are solely responsible for the divine judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone must bear the responsibility when God punishes you for rejecting Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 6 pacx figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Paul is figuratively using one part of a person, the **head**, to represent all of a person in the act of deciding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your punishment is your responsibility” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 18 6 ezpo figs-youplural τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 The word **your** is plural. Paul is speaking to all the Jews in the synagogue, so use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural]]) +ACT 18 6 ezpo figs-yousingular τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 The word **your** is plural. Paul is speaking to all the Jews in the synagogue, so use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural]]) ACT 18 6 vwpg τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Since Paul is speaking to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **head**. Alternate translation: “your heads” ACT 18 6 aq99 figs-metaphor καθαρὸς ἐγώ 1 Paul is speaking figuratively as if he were physically **clean**. He means that he is satisfied in his conscience that he has fulfilled his duty to proclaim the gospel to these Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have fulfilled my duty in proclaiming the gospel to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 7 v8xg figs-idiom τινὸς…σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν 1 who worships God See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile man who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From 084fa3fd72b9e7f5c35e57c876b6a42ab3de84bd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 16:53:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 220/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 0f0e5d6717..110b0cd5dd 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2350,7 +2350,7 @@ ACT 16 14 a74y figs-activepassive τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ το ACT 16 15 g7e9 figs-activepassive ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη 1 And when she was baptized, and her household If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is likely from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “when Paul baptized her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 15 lv50 figs-ellipsis καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and her household was also baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 16 15 s799 figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 her household Here, **her household** refers to all the people who lived in Lydia’s house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 15 igcw figs-yousingular κεκρίκατέ 1 The word **you** is plural. Lydia is addressing Paul and his companions. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural]]) +ACT 16 15 igcw figs-yousingular κεκρίκατέ 1 The word **you** is plural. Lydia is addressing Paul and his companions. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 16 15 g8ul writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Lydia is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 16 15 xnkk figs-imperative εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου, μένετε 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please come to my house and stay with me as my guests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 16 15 hkh3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Luke is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 4e9af0711b1c1ddf1bb54016784d8d233a734b9c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 16:54:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 221/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 110b0cd5dd..bfa63c440d 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2566,7 +2566,7 @@ ACT 18 5 bsgm figs-metonymy συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος ACT 18 6 ncx8 translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια 1 shaking out his garment This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a place, in this case the synagogue, to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See what you did with the similar gesture in [13:51](../13/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 18 6 z12a figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Your blood be upon your head Here, **blood** represents punishment, specifically for rejecting Jesus. Paul is telling the Jews that they are solely responsible for the divine judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone must bear the responsibility when God punishes you for rejecting Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 6 pacx figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Paul is figuratively using one part of a person, the **head**, to represent all of a person in the act of deciding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your punishment is your responsibility” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 18 6 ezpo figs-yousingular τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 The word **your** is plural. Paul is speaking to all the Jews in the synagogue, so use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youplural]]) +ACT 18 6 ezpo figs-yousingular τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 The word **your** is plural. Paul is speaking to all the Jews in the synagogue, so use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 18 6 vwpg τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Since Paul is speaking to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **head**. Alternate translation: “your heads” ACT 18 6 aq99 figs-metaphor καθαρὸς ἐγώ 1 Paul is speaking figuratively as if he were physically **clean**. He means that he is satisfied in his conscience that he has fulfilled his duty to proclaim the gospel to these Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have fulfilled my duty in proclaiming the gospel to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 7 v8xg figs-idiom τινὸς…σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν 1 who worships God See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile man who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From a01a1b9c7787d8bd35cda27296d6ca8ff586765c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 18:40:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 222/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index bfa63c440d..9cd1c0772c 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2787,6 +2787,7 @@ ACT 20 5 gb5f writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the ACT 20 5 o1bl figs-explicit ἡμᾶς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if it will help your readers understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 5 itz1 translate-names Τρῳάδι 1 Troas The word **Troas** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 7 xsyv figs-nominaladj τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular day of the **week**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the first day of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 20 7 wpfh figs-explicit τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the believers met on **the first of the week** because that was the day Jesus rose from the dead. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the first day of the week, when Jesus rose from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 7 tgsb figs-activepassive συνηγμένων ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we having gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 7 ls6u writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the believers in Troas with whom Paul and his traveling companions were meeting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Troas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 6 l5dr translate-names τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread The words **Unleavened Bread** are the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several **days**. See how you translated this in [12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 7b051a838971a51ecee7f65051b942924f9f72d2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 19:28:05 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 223/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 7 +++---- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 9cd1c0772c..72e458eccd 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2806,10 +2806,9 @@ ACT 20 9 jp89 figs-activepassive ἤρθη νεκρός 1 and was picked up dead ACT 20 9 z1wf figs-explicit ἤρθη νεκρός 1 The implication is that some of the believers rushed down to help Eutychus but discovered that he had died from the fall. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when the believers went down to help him, they picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 10 uban figs-activepassive μὴ θορυβεῖσθε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not let this trouble you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 10 gfol figs-metaphor ἡ…ψυχὴ αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐστιν 1 Paul is speaking figuratively as if the life of Eutychus were contained within him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 11 av7m ἀναβὰς…τε ὁμιλήσας…ἐξῆλθεν 1 Here all occurrences of the word **he** refer to Paul. -ACT 20 11 lih8 0 Connecting Statement: This is the end of the part of the story about Paul’s preaching at Troas and about Eutychus. -ACT 20 11 w5w8 figs-synecdoche κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον 1 had broken bread Bread was a common food during meals. Here, **broken bread** probably means they shared a meal with more kinds of food than just bread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 20 11 t88c οὕτως ἐξῆλθεν 1 In this way, he left Alternate translation: “This is what happened as he was going away” +ACT 20 11 w5w8 figs-synecdoche κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος 1 had broken bread Luke could be using the words **broken** and **tasted** to mean “eaten,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be figuratively using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking and tasting bread are things people do when they eat bread, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “having shared a meal with the believers” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 11 upkb figs-explicit κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος 1 By ** having broken bread and having tasted **, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having observe the Lord’s Supper with the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 20 11 av7m writing-pronouns ἐξῆλθεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 12 jkj5 τὸν παῖδα 1 the boy Here, **the boy** refers to Eutychus ([Acts 20:9](../20/09.md)). This could mean: (1) he was a young man over 14 years old. (2) he was a boy between 9 and 14 years old. (3) he was a servant or a slave. ACT 20 12 abx0 figs-litotes οὐ μετρίως 1 not moderately Luke uses the negative **not moderately** to say that they were greatly comforted. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 20 13 dja7 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…μέλλοντες 1 Here the word **we** refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 8978048d3275c57d0a5d362515899935046c7d88 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 19:30:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 224/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 ++++-- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 72e458eccd..2b15c04807 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2809,8 +2809,10 @@ ACT 20 10 gfol figs-metaphor ἡ…ψυχὴ αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐσ ACT 20 11 w5w8 figs-synecdoche κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος 1 had broken bread Luke could be using the words **broken** and **tasted** to mean “eaten,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be figuratively using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking and tasting bread are things people do when they eat bread, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “having shared a meal with the believers” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 11 upkb figs-explicit κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος 1 By ** having broken bread and having tasted **, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having observe the Lord’s Supper with the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 11 av7m writing-pronouns ἐξῆλθεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 20 12 jkj5 τὸν παῖδα 1 the boy Here, **the boy** refers to Eutychus ([Acts 20:9](../20/09.md)). This could mean: (1) he was a young man over 14 years old. (2) he was a boy between 9 and 14 years old. (3) he was a servant or a slave. -ACT 20 12 abx0 figs-litotes οὐ μετρίως 1 not moderately Luke uses the negative **not moderately** to say that they were greatly comforted. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 20 12 lih8 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of Eutychus. You language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) +ACT 20 12 jkj5 figs-explicit τὸν παῖδα 1 the boy Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **the boy**, he means Eutychus. You can use his name if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Eutychus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 20 12 pk6c figs-activepassive παρεκλήθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this comforted them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 20 12 abx0 figs-litotes οὐ μετρίως 1 not moderately Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 20 13 dja7 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…μέλλοντες 1 Here the word **we** refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 20 13 w4ew figs-rpronouns ἡμεῖς…προελθόντες 1 we, having gone ahead The word **we** here refers to Luke and his traveling companions, and not to Paul. Paul did travel on the ship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 20 13 q4yz translate-names τὴν Ἆσσον 1 Assos **Assos** is a town located directly below present-day Behram in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 09b31a5021d83215172d4c3d80e46dbabcf272e1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 19:33:22 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 225/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 +++----- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 2b15c04807..af8556a6a2 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2813,11 +2813,9 @@ ACT 20 12 lih8 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **But** to introdu ACT 20 12 jkj5 figs-explicit τὸν παῖδα 1 the boy Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **the boy**, he means Eutychus. You can use his name if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Eutychus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 12 pk6c figs-activepassive παρεκλήθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this comforted them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 12 abx0 figs-litotes οὐ μετρίως 1 not moderately Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 20 13 dja7 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…μέλλοντες 1 Here the word **we** refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 20 13 w4ew figs-rpronouns ἡμεῖς…προελθόντες 1 we, having gone ahead The word **we** here refers to Luke and his traveling companions, and not to Paul. Paul did travel on the ship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -ACT 20 13 q4yz translate-names τὴν Ἆσσον 1 Assos **Assos** is a town located directly below present-day Behram in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 13 nq2q figs-rpronouns ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν 1 ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν Here, **himself** is used to emphasize that this is what Paul wanted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -ACT 20 13 p8y7 πεζεύειν 1 to go on foot Alternate translation: “to walk” +ACT 20 13 w4ew grammar-connect-logic-result ἡμεῖς δὲ, προελθόντες ἐπὶ τὸ πλοῖον, ἀνήχθημεν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἆσσον, ἐκεῖθεν μέλλοντες ἀναλαμβάνειν τὸν Παῦλον; οὕτως γὰρ διατεταγμένος, ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν 1 we, having gone ahead If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Paul intended to go on foot to Assos and he arranged for us to take him on board there, so we went ahead to the ship and sailed away to Assos” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +ACT 20 13 q4yz translate-names τὴν Ἆσσον 1 Assos The word **Assos** is the name of a town on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 13 nq2q figs-explicit μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν 1 ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν In light of what Paul says in [20:23](../20/23.md), that the Holy Spirit was showing him that he would soon suffer and be imprisoned, the implication seems to be that Paul wanted to **go on foot himself** so that he could be alone for a while and reflect and pray. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “intending to go on foot himself because he wanted to have some time alone to reflect and pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 14 ju8f translate-names Μιτυλήνην 1 Mitylene **Mitylene** is a town located in present-day Mitilini in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 15 ll2h figs-exclusive κατηντήσαμεν…παρεβάλομεν…ἤλθομεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul, the writer, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 20 15 ulk6 translate-names Χίου 1 Chios **Chios** is an island off the coast of modern-day Turkey in the Aegean Sea. Alternate translation: “the island of Chios” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 39dafcf99bd47d371fc3b4daca9637da76ff57ea Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 19:33:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 226/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index af8556a6a2..4c98094064 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2816,7 +2816,7 @@ ACT 20 12 abx0 figs-litotes οὐ μετρίως 1 not moderately Luke is using ACT 20 13 w4ew grammar-connect-logic-result ἡμεῖς δὲ, προελθόντες ἐπὶ τὸ πλοῖον, ἀνήχθημεν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἆσσον, ἐκεῖθεν μέλλοντες ἀναλαμβάνειν τὸν Παῦλον; οὕτως γὰρ διατεταγμένος, ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν 1 we, having gone ahead If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Paul intended to go on foot to Assos and he arranged for us to take him on board there, so we went ahead to the ship and sailed away to Assos” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 20 13 q4yz translate-names τὴν Ἆσσον 1 Assos The word **Assos** is the name of a town on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 13 nq2q figs-explicit μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν 1 ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν In light of what Paul says in [20:23](../20/23.md), that the Holy Spirit was showing him that he would soon suffer and be imprisoned, the implication seems to be that Paul wanted to **go on foot himself** so that he could be alone for a while and reflect and pray. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “intending to go on foot himself because he wanted to have some time alone to reflect and pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 20 14 ju8f translate-names Μιτυλήνην 1 Mitylene **Mitylene** is a town located in present-day Mitilini in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 14 ju8f translate-names Μιτυλήνην 1 Mitylene The word **Mitylene** is the name of a town on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 15 ll2h figs-exclusive κατηντήσαμεν…παρεβάλομεν…ἤλθομεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul, the writer, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 20 15 ulk6 translate-names Χίου 1 Chios **Chios** is an island off the coast of modern-day Turkey in the Aegean Sea. Alternate translation: “the island of Chios” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 15 jyr7 παρεβάλομεν εἰς Σάμον 1 we landed at Samos Alternate translation: “we arrived at the island of Samos” From 88c1ab5a5e2878af2412dd80953d1356a1218699 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 19:35:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 227/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 ++++----- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 4c98094064..8aa554e3e8 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2817,11 +2817,10 @@ ACT 20 13 w4ew grammar-connect-logic-result ἡμεῖς δὲ, προελθόν ACT 20 13 q4yz translate-names τὴν Ἆσσον 1 Assos The word **Assos** is the name of a town on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 13 nq2q figs-explicit μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν 1 ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν In light of what Paul says in [20:23](../20/23.md), that the Holy Spirit was showing him that he would soon suffer and be imprisoned, the implication seems to be that Paul wanted to **go on foot himself** so that he could be alone for a while and reflect and pray. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “intending to go on foot himself because he wanted to have some time alone to reflect and pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 14 ju8f translate-names Μιτυλήνην 1 Mitylene The word **Mitylene** is the name of a town on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 15 ll2h figs-exclusive κατηντήσαμεν…παρεβάλομεν…ἤλθομεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul, the writer, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 20 15 ulk6 translate-names Χίου 1 Chios **Chios** is an island off the coast of modern-day Turkey in the Aegean Sea. Alternate translation: “the island of Chios” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 15 jyr7 παρεβάλομεν εἰς Σάμον 1 we landed at Samos Alternate translation: “we arrived at the island of Samos” -ACT 20 15 b6c6 translate-names Σάμον 1 Samos **Samos** is an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea off the coast of modern day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 15 s7g2 translate-names Μίλητον 1 Miletus **Miletus** was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 15 bbeq figs-idiom κατηντήσαμεν 1 Luke says that he and his traveling companions **came down** to a point on the mainland **opposite Chios** because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 20 15 ulk6 translate-names Χίου 1 Chios The word **Chios** is the name of an island in the Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 15 b6c6 translate-names Σάμον 1 Samos The word **Samos** is the name of an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 15 s7g2 translate-names Μίλητον 1 Miletus The word **Miletus** is the name of a port city that was located in western Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 16 p272 translate-names κεκρίκει γὰρ ὁ Παῦλος παραπλεῦσαι τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 For Paul had decided to sail past Ephesus Paul sailed south past the port city of **Ephesus**, further south in order to land at Miletus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 16 p61e figs-metaphor ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι 1 so that he would not spend time This speaks about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could spend or use up. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” or “so that he would not have a delay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 17 nw52 μετεκαλέσατο 1 Here the word **he** refers to Paul. From 87af5542d12afff2327c758bbf9210149aa4d07a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 19:36:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 228/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 8aa554e3e8..3c5ab50f4c 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2821,8 +2821,7 @@ ACT 20 15 bbeq figs-idiom κατηντήσαμεν 1 Luke says that he and his ACT 20 15 ulk6 translate-names Χίου 1 Chios The word **Chios** is the name of an island in the Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 15 b6c6 translate-names Σάμον 1 Samos The word **Samos** is the name of an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 15 s7g2 translate-names Μίλητον 1 Miletus The word **Miletus** is the name of a port city that was located in western Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 16 p272 translate-names κεκρίκει γὰρ ὁ Παῦλος παραπλεῦσαι τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 For Paul had decided to sail past Ephesus Paul sailed south past the port city of **Ephesus**, further south in order to land at Miletus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 16 p61e figs-metaphor ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι 1 so that he would not spend time This speaks about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could spend or use up. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” or “so that he would not have a delay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 16 p61e figs-metaphor ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι 1 so that he would not spend time Luke is speaking figuratively about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could **lose**. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 17 nw52 μετεκαλέσατο 1 Here the word **he** refers to Paul. ACT 20 17 v9al 0 Connecting Statement: Paul calls the elders of the church of Ephesus and begins to speak to them. ACT 20 17 l9aj translate-names τῆς Μιλήτου 1 Miletus **Miletus** was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. See how you translated this in [Acts 20:15](../20/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 2b740128bed750917f6158c180cf2271fd6d52e2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Fri, 7 Oct 2022 20:39:58 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 229/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index c7b5bc1b75..7132426ed5 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1076,10 +1076,10 @@ MAT 15 8 bz91 writing-pronouns με…ἐμοῦ 1 me … me Here, the words **m MAT 15 8 wuw3 figs-metonymy ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far from me Jesus is using the term **heart** figuratively to mean a person's inner thoughts or emotions. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 8 q7vm figs-idiom ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far away from me Here, the phrase **far from me** is an idiom meaning that they do not love him. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “but they are not love me in their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 15 8 hr29 figs-idiom δὲ 1 Here, **but** contrasts what is before it to what comes after it. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -MAT 15 9 vvb9 ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων 1 the commandments of men James is using the possessive form to describe these **commandments** as something which are created by people. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “man-made” instead of the noun “men.” Alternate translation: “man-made commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +MAT 15 9 vvb9 ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων 1 the commandments of men James is using the possessive form to describe these **commandments** as something which are created by people instead of God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “man-made” instead of the noun “men.” Alternate translation: “man-made commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) MAT 15 11 s28y figs-metonymy εἰσερχόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα…ἐκπορευόμενον ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 1 enters into the mouth … what comes out of the mouth Jesus is contrasting what a person eats to what a person says. Jesus means that God is concerned with what a person says rather than what a person eats. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 15 12 l2uj figs-activepassive οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἀκούσαντες τὸν λόγον ἐσκανδαλίσθησαν 1 the Pharisees, having heard this word, were offended If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “this statement made the Pharisees angry” or “this statement offended the Pharisees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 15 13 n5ij figs-metaphor πᾶσα φυτεία ἣν οὐκ ἐφύτευσεν ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος ἐκριζωθήσεται 1 Every plant that my heavenly Father has not planted will be uprooted Jesus speaks of the Pharisees as if they were worthless plants that his **Father** would uproot. This means the Pharisees do not actually belong to God, so God will remove them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 15 12 l2uj figs-activepassive οἱ Φαρισαῖοι…ἐσκανδαλίσθησαν 1 the Pharisees, having heard this word, were offended If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The Pharisees … were upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 15 13 n5ij figs-metaphor πᾶσα φυτεία ἣν οὐκ ἐφύτευσεν ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος ἐκριζωθήσεται 1 Every plant that my heavenly Father has not planted will be uprooted ;met MAT 15 13 j49e guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος 1 my heavenly Father **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 15 13 hs4t figs-activepassive ἐκριζωθήσεται 1 will be uprooted If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “my Father will uproot” or “he will take out of the ground” or “he will remove” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 14 r167 ἄφετε αὐτούς 1 Let them go! The word **them** refers to the Pharisees. From b30c678a8d0dff4f5485b125ee3c73b74d5d7114 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Mon, 10 Oct 2022 13:01:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 230/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 39 +++++++++++++++++---------------------- 1 file changed, 17 insertions(+), 22 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 7132426ed5..138255f65c 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1079,29 +1079,24 @@ MAT 15 8 hr29 figs-idiom δὲ 1 Here, **but** contrasts what is before it to w MAT 15 9 vvb9 ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων 1 the commandments of men James is using the possessive form to describe these **commandments** as something which are created by people instead of God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “man-made” instead of the noun “men.” Alternate translation: “man-made commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) MAT 15 11 s28y figs-metonymy εἰσερχόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα…ἐκπορευόμενον ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 1 enters into the mouth … what comes out of the mouth Jesus is contrasting what a person eats to what a person says. Jesus means that God is concerned with what a person says rather than what a person eats. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 12 l2uj figs-activepassive οἱ Φαρισαῖοι…ἐσκανδαλίσθησαν 1 the Pharisees, having heard this word, were offended If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The Pharisees … were upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 15 13 n5ij figs-metaphor πᾶσα φυτεία ἣν οὐκ ἐφύτευσεν ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος ἐκριζωθήσεται 1 Every plant that my heavenly Father has not planted will be uprooted ;met +MAT 15 13 n5ij figs-metaphor πᾶσα φυτεία ἣν οὐκ ἐφύτευσεν ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος ἐκριζωθήσεται 1 Every plant that my heavenly Father has not planted will be uprooted Here, Jesus refers to the Pharisees as if they were plants. He also speaks of God as if he is a farmer who **uproots** the plants, or judges them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The Pharisees are like plants that my Heavenly Father will pull up because he did not plant them” or “The Pharisees will be judged severely by my Heavenly Father because they do not obey him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 15 13 j49e guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος 1 my heavenly Father **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 15 13 hs4t figs-activepassive ἐκριζωθήσεται 1 will be uprooted If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “my Father will uproot” or “he will take out of the ground” or “he will remove” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 15 14 r167 ἄφετε αὐτούς 1 Let them go! The word **them** refers to the Pharisees. -MAT 15 14 ai9x figs-metaphor ὁδηγοί εἰσιν τυφλοί τυφλὸς, δὲ τυφλὸν ἐὰν ὁδηγῇ, ἀμφότεροι εἰς βόθυνον πεσοῦνται 1 They are blind guides. But if the blind might guide the blind, both will fall into a pit Jesus speaks of the Pharisees as if they were blind people trying to **guide** other **blind** people. Jesus means that the Pharisees do not understand God’s commands or how to please him. Therefore, they cannot teach others how to please God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 15 15 cje4 0 Connecting Statement: Peter asks Jesus to explain the parable that Jesus told in verses[13-14](../15/13.md). -MAT 15 15 shg6 ἡμῖν 1 to us Alternate translation: “to us disciples” -MAT 15 16 al9z figs-rquestion ἀκμὴν καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε? 1 Are you also still without understanding? Jesus uses a question to rebuke the disciples for not understanding the parable. Also, the word **you** is emphasized. Jesus cannot believe his own disciples do not understand. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am disappointed that you, my disciples, still do not understand what I teach!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 15 17 l5nt figs-rquestion οὔπω νοεῖτε ὅτι πᾶν τὸ εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα, εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν χωρεῖ, καὶ εἰς ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκβάλλεται? 1 Do you not yet understand that everything that enters into the mouth passes into the stomach and is passed out into the latrine? Jesus uses a question to rebuke the disciples for not understanding the parable. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you that everything that enters into the mouth passes into the stomach and is passed out into the latrine.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 15 17 s833 εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν χωρεῖ 1 passes into the stomach Alternate translation: “goes into the stomach” -MAT 15 17 s9z6 ἀφεδρῶνα 1 the latrine A **latrine** a polite term for the place where people bury body waste. -MAT 15 18 ca1w figs-metonymy τὰ…ἐκπορευόμενα ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 1 the things that proceed out from the mouth This phrase refers to what a person says. Alternate translation: “the words that a person says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 15 18 x14k figs-metonymy ἐκ τῆς καρδίας 1 from the heart Here, **heart** refers to a person’s mind or innermost being. Alternate translation: “from inside the person” or “from a person’s mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 15 19 rg59 φόνοι 1 murder Murder is the act of killing innocent people. -MAT 15 20 bme7 ἀνίπτοις χερσὶν φαγεῖν 1 to eat with unwashed hands This refers to eating without first ceremonially washing one’s **hands** according to the traditions of the elders. Alternate translation: “eating without first washing one’s hands” -MAT 15 21 e5gv 0 General Information: This begins an account of Jesus healing the daughter of a Canaanite woman. -MAT 15 21 t81u figs-explicit ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν 1 Jesus withdrew It is implied that the disciples went with Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples went away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 15 22 x1wm ἰδοὺ, γυνὴ Χαναναία…ἐξελθοῦσα 1 behold, a Canaanite woman having come out The word **behold** alerts us to a new person in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this. Alternate translation: “Now there was a Canaanite woman who came” -MAT 15 22 jt94 γυνὴ Χαναναία ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων ἐκείνων ἐξελθοῦσα, ἔκραζεν 1 a Canaanite woman having come out from that region, was crying out The country of Canaan no longer existed by this time. This woman was a part of a people group that lived near the cities of Tyre and Sidon. Alternate translation: “a woman who was from that region and who belonged to the group of people called Canaanites came and cried out” -MAT 15 22 f4k2 figs-explicit ἐλέησόν με 1 Have mercy on me This phrase implies that the woman is asking Jesus to heal her daughter. Alternate translation: “Have mercy and heal my daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 15 22 xs64 Υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 Son of David Jesus was not David’s literal son, so this may be translated as “Descendant of David.” However, **Son of David** is also a title for the Messiah, and the woman may have been calling Jesus by this title. -MAT 15 22 j6rt figs-activepassive ἡ θυγάτηρ μου κακῶς δαιμονίζεται 1 My daughter is severely demon-possessed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “A demon is controlling my daughter terribly” or “A demon is tormenting my daughter severely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 15 23 hd2i figs-metonymy οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῇ λόγον 1 did not answer her a word Here, **word** refers to what a person says. Alternate translation: “said nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 15 13 hs4t figs-activepassive ἐκριζωθήσεται 1 will be uprooted If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will uproot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 15 14 r167 writing-pronouns ἄφετε αὐτούς 1 Let them go! The word **them** refers to the Pharisees. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MAT 15 14 ai9x figs-metaphor ὁδηγοί εἰσιν τυφλοί τυφλὸς, δὲ τυφλὸν ἐὰν ὁδηγῇ, ἀμφότεροι εἰς βόθυνον πεσοῦνται 1 They are blind guides. But if the blind might guide the blind, both will fall into a pit Jesus speaks of the Pharisees as if they were blind people trying to **guide** other **blind** people. Jesus means that the Pharisees do not understand God’s commands or how to please him. Therefore, they cannot teach others how to please God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “They are like blind guides. But if the blind lead the blind along, both will fall into a hole” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 15 15 shg6 writing-pronouns ἡμῖν 1 to us Here, **us** refers to the disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to us disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MAT 15 16 al9z figs-rquestion ἀκμὴν καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε? 1 Are you also still without understanding? Jesus uses this question to express his disappointment that they do not understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “After all I have said and done, I am amazed that you still do not understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 15 17 l5nt figs-rquestion οὔπω νοεῖτε ὅτι πᾶν τὸ εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα, εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν χωρεῖ, καὶ εἰς ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκβάλλεται? 1 Do you not yet understand that everything that enters into the mouth passes into the stomach and is passed out into the latrine? Jesus is continuing to express his disappointment. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You ought to understand that everything that go into a persons mouth passes into the stomach and is passed out into the toilet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 15 17 s9z6 translate-unknown ἀφεδρῶνα 1 the latrine A **latrine** is a term which signifies the place where people bury their bodily waste. Use a word in your language for this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 15 18 ca1w figs-metonymy τὰ…ἐκπορευόμενα ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 1 the things that proceed out from the mouth Jesus is using the phrase **proceeding out of the mouth** figuratively to mean speaking. Alternate translation: “the things which a person speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 15 18 jt6o figs-metonymy τῆς καρδίας 1 Jesus is using the term **heart** figuratively to mean a persons inner desires or thoughts. Alternate translation: “a persons inner thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 15 20 bme7 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον…ἄνθρωπον 1 to eat with unwashed hands Here, **man** can refer to both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MAT 15 21 e5gv writing-newevent 0 General Information: Here, Matthew is introducing a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MAT 15 21 t81u figs-explicit ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν 1 Jesus withdrew It is implied that the disciples went with Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples withdrew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 15 22 x1wm writing-participants ἰδοὺ, γυνὴ Χαναναία ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων ἐκείνων ἐξελθοῦσα 1 behold, a Canaanite woman having come out Matthew is using the phrase **behold, a Canaanite woman having come out** to introduce the **Canaanite woman** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Behold, there was a woman from the people called the Canaanites who was coming from the region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +MAT 15 22 xs64 Υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 Son of David Jesus was not David's literal **Son**, but his descendant. The title **Son of David** is also an important messianic title. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “Descendant of King David, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) +MAT 15 22 j6rt figs-activepassive ἡ θυγάτηρ μου κακῶς δαιμονίζεται 1 My daughter is severely demon-possessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “a demon” did it. Alternate translation: “A demon is controlling my daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 15 23 hd2i figs-metonymy οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῇ λόγον 1 did not answer her a word Matthew is using the term **word** figuratively to mean something spoken. Alternate translation: “Jesus did not say anything in response to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 24 t9ga figs-activepassive οὐκ ἀπεστάλην 1 I was not sent If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God did not send me to anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 24 u9t4 figs-metaphor εἰς τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα οἴκου Ἰσραήλ 1 to the lost sheep of the house of Israel This is a metaphor comparing the entire nation of **Israel** to **sheep** who have gone away from their shepherd. See how you translated this in [10:6](../10/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 15 25 ch7c ἡ 1 she Alternate translation: “the Canaanite woman” From 3e48a43dc9cadcab540d60d3a1cbfa0f7bf7e15e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Tue, 11 Oct 2022 11:04:37 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 231/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 21 ++++++++++----------- 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 138255f65c..1acfe5470e 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1097,18 +1097,17 @@ MAT 15 22 x1wm writing-participants ἰδοὺ, γυνὴ Χαναναία ἀπ MAT 15 22 xs64 Υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 Son of David Jesus was not David's literal **Son**, but his descendant. The title **Son of David** is also an important messianic title. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “Descendant of King David, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) MAT 15 22 j6rt figs-activepassive ἡ θυγάτηρ μου κακῶς δαιμονίζεται 1 My daughter is severely demon-possessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “a demon” did it. Alternate translation: “A demon is controlling my daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 23 hd2i figs-metonymy οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῇ λόγον 1 did not answer her a word Matthew is using the term **word** figuratively to mean something spoken. Alternate translation: “Jesus did not say anything in response to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 15 24 t9ga figs-activepassive οὐκ ἀπεστάλην 1 I was not sent If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God did not send me to anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 15 24 u9t4 figs-metaphor εἰς τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα οἴκου Ἰσραήλ 1 to the lost sheep of the house of Israel This is a metaphor comparing the entire nation of **Israel** to **sheep** who have gone away from their shepherd. See how you translated this in [10:6](../10/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 15 25 ch7c ἡ 1 she Alternate translation: “the Canaanite woman” -MAT 15 25 u3jj translate-symaction προσεκύνει αὐτῷ 1 bowed down to him This action shows that the woman humbled herself before Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -MAT 15 26 ihz4 writing-proverbs οὐκ ἔστιν καλὸν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων καὶ βαλεῖν τοῖς κυναρίοις 1 It is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw it to the little dogs Jesus responds to the woman with a proverb. The basic meaning is that it is not right to take what is supposed to belong to Jews and give it to non-Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) -MAT 15 26 a5bc figs-synecdoche τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων 1 the bread of the children Here, **bread** refers to food in general. Alternate translation: “the children’s food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MAT 15 26 fe7n τοῖς κυναρίοις 1 to the little dogs The Jews considered **dogs** to be unclean animals. Here they are used as an image for non-Jews. +MAT 15 24 t9ga figs-activepassive οὐκ ἀπεστάλην 1 I was not sent If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God did not send me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 15 24 wfnx grammar-connect-exceptions οὐκ ἀπεστάλην εἰ μὴ εἰς τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα οἴκου Ἰσραήλ 1 If it would in appear your language that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “I was sent only for the lost sheep of the house of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) +MAT 15 24 u9t4 figs-metaphor εἰς τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα οἴκου Ἰσραήλ 1 to the lost sheep of the house of Israel Here, Jesus is referring to the people of **Israel** who have gone astray as **lost sheep**. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel who have wondered like lost sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 15 25 u3jj translate-symaction προσεκύνει αὐτῷ 1 bowed down to him Here, **bowing down to him** was a sign of honor which was often shown in their culture. If it would be helpful to your readers, use a similar action from your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +MAT 15 26 ihz4 writing-proverbs οὐκ ἔστιν καλὸν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων καὶ βαλεῖν τοῖς κυναρίοις 1 It is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw it to the little dogs This proverb draws a figurative comparison: The people of Israel are like the children of a house because they are the offspring of the parents. But non-Israelite people are like dogs because they are not the offspring. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “It is not good to share the message intended for the people of Israel with those from other places” or “It is not good to give something to a person for whom it was not intended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 15 26 a5bc figs-synecdoche τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων 1 the bread of the children Here, the word **bread** is referring to food in general. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 15 27 yvw1 figs-metaphor καὶ…τὰ κυνάρια ἐσθίει ἀπὸ τῶν ψιχίων τῶν πιπτόντων ἀπὸ τῆς τραπέζης τῶν κυρίων αὐτῶν 1 even the little dogs eat from the crumbs that fall from the tables of their masters The woman responds by using the same imagery as Jesus used in the proverb he just spoke. She means non-Jews should be able to have a small amount of the good things Jews are throwing away. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 15 27 i5tt τὰ κυνάρια 1 the little dogs Use words here for **dogs** of any size that people keep as pets. See how you translated this in [15:26](../15/26.md). -MAT 15 28 tea2 figs-activepassive γενηθήτω 1 let it be done If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 15 28 n229 figs-activepassive ἰάθη ἡ θυγάτηρ αὐτῆς 1 her daughter was healed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed her daughter” or “her daughter became well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 15 28 wwq3 figs-idiom ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 1 from that hour This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “at exactly the same time” or “immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 15 27 i5tt τὰ κυνάρια 1 the little dogs See how you translated **little dogs** in the previous verse. +MAT 15 28 tea2 figs-activepassive γενηθήτω 1 let it be done If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “I” did it. Alternate translation: “I will do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 15 28 n229 figs-activepassive ἰάθη ἡ θυγάτηρ αὐτῆς 1 her daughter was healed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed her daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 15 28 wwq3 figs-idiom ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 1 from that hour Here, the phrase **from that hour** is an idiom meaning “at that moment”. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “at that moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 15 29 np6e writing-background 0 General Information: Verses 29-31 give background information about the miracle that Jesus is about to perform by feeding four thousand people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 15 30 c8td χωλούς, τυφλούς, κυλλούς, κωφούς 1 the lame, the blind, the crippled, the mute Alternate translation: “those who could not walk, those who could not see, those whose arms or legs did not function, those who could not talk” MAT 15 30 yf7i ἔρριψαν αὐτοὺς παρὰ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 they laid them at his feet Apparently some of these sick or crippled people were unable to stand up, so when their friends brought them to Jesus, they placed them on the ground in front of him. Alternate translation: “the crowds placed the sick people on the ground in front of Jesus” From 41676d92ad5b34333e949ea90a7a8f5f9da48069 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 11 Oct 2022 16:57:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 232/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 0a43dc1383..a3c87fd090 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ GAL 1 23 lo0r figs-metonymy τὴν πίστιν 1 Paul is figuratively describ GAL 1 23 y5ud figs-explicit ἐπόρθει 1 Here, the word **destroying** refers to trying to stop the spread of the Christian message. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 1 24 qp4t grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in me** means “because of me” and is giving the reason why the Judean believers were praising God, namely because of Paul. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 1 24 cpni ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 The phrase **in me** means “because of me” and the phrase “because of me” could mean: (1) both option 2 and 3 at the same time, in which case “because of me” would mean both that the Judean believers were praising God because God had caused Paul to believe in Jesus and because Paul was now proclaiming the good news about Jesus. If you decide to use this meaning you could use a general phrase that allows for both meanings at the same time such as “because of me.” Alternatively you could clarify in your translation that “because of me” refers to both meanings simultaneously. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because of what God has done in me and is doing through me” or “because God caused me to believe in Jesus and is now using me to proclaim the good news about Jesus” or “because God caused me to believe in Jesus and is now using me to proclaim the good news about him” (2) because of what God was doing through Paul, that he was proclaiming the gospel. Alternate translation: “because of what God is doing through me” or “because I am now proclaiming the good news about Jesus” or “because I am now proclaiming the faith which I formerly tried to destroy” (3) because of what happened to Paul, that God caused him to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of what God has done in me” or “because God caused me to believe in his son” -GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Freedom and slavery

Throughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “I do not negate the grace of God”

Paul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Freedom and slavery\n\nThroughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “I do not negate the grace of God”\n\nPaul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them through the work of Christ. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 1 zt61 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to give the history of how he learned the gospel from God, not the apostles. GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Here, **went up** is used because Jerusalem is located in hilly country. The Jews also viewed Jerusalem as the place on earth that is closest to heaven, so Paul may have been speaking figuratively, or it may be that it was reflecting the difficult, uphill, journey to get to Jerusalem. GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” From 6e49794f3d4f5bd67c95e4ef1c9bf7990587fd48 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 11 Oct 2022 17:15:55 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 233/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index a3c87fd090..6ad4d07297 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ GAL 1 23 bh1m figs-abstractnouns τὴν πίστιν 1 If your language does n GAL 1 23 lo0r figs-metonymy τὴν πίστιν 1 Paul is figuratively describing the message about Jesus (the gospel) by association with **faith**, which is the response that the message about Jesus requires or solicits. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” or “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 1 23 y5ud figs-explicit ἐπόρθει 1 Here, the word **destroying** refers to trying to stop the spread of the Christian message. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 1 24 qp4t grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in me** means “because of me” and is giving the reason why the Judean believers were praising God, namely because of Paul. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -GAL 1 24 cpni ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 The phrase **in me** means “because of me” and the phrase “because of me” could mean: (1) both option 2 and 3 at the same time, in which case “because of me” would mean both that the Judean believers were praising God because God had caused Paul to believe in Jesus and because Paul was now proclaiming the good news about Jesus. If you decide to use this meaning you could use a general phrase that allows for both meanings at the same time such as “because of me.” Alternatively you could clarify in your translation that “because of me” refers to both meanings simultaneously. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because of what God has done in me and is doing through me” or “because God caused me to believe in Jesus and is now using me to proclaim the good news about Jesus” or “because God caused me to believe in Jesus and is now using me to proclaim the good news about him” (2) because of what God was doing through Paul, that he was proclaiming the gospel. Alternate translation: “because of what God is doing through me” or “because I am now proclaiming the good news about Jesus” or “because I am now proclaiming the faith which I formerly tried to destroy” (3) because of what happened to Paul, that God caused him to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of what God has done in me” or “because God caused me to believe in his son” +GAL 1 24 cpni ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 The phrase **in me** means “because of me” and the phrase “because of me” could mean: (1) both option 2 and 3 at the same time, in which case “because of me” would mean both that the Judean believers were praising God because God had caused Paul to believe in Jesus and because Paul was now proclaiming the good news about Jesus. If you decide to use this meaning you could use a general phrase that allows for both meanings at the same time such as “because of me.” Alternatively you could clarify in your translation that “because of me” refers to both meanings simultaneously. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because of what God had done in me and was doing through me” or “because God had caused me to believe in Jesus and was now using me to proclaim the good news about Jesus” (2) because of what God was doing through Paul, that he was proclaiming the gospel. Alternate translation: “because of what God is doing through me” or “because I am now proclaiming the good news about Jesus” or “because I am now proclaiming the faith which I formerly tried to destroy” (3) because of what happened to Paul, that God caused him to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of what God has done in me” or “because God caused me to believe in his son” or “because of what had happened to me” GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Freedom and slavery\n\nThroughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “I do not negate the grace of God”\n\nPaul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them through the work of Christ. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 1 zt61 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to give the history of how he learned the gospel from God, not the apostles. GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Here, **went up** is used because Jerusalem is located in hilly country. The Jews also viewed Jerusalem as the place on earth that is closest to heaven, so Paul may have been speaking figuratively, or it may be that it was reflecting the difficult, uphill, journey to get to Jerusalem. From ca85b8e01d644a2599174a207ec5127955054fa2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 11 Oct 2022 17:32:24 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 234/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 6ad4d07297..fdb72a2e73 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ GAL 1 23 bh1m figs-abstractnouns τὴν πίστιν 1 If your language does n GAL 1 23 lo0r figs-metonymy τὴν πίστιν 1 Paul is figuratively describing the message about Jesus (the gospel) by association with **faith**, which is the response that the message about Jesus requires or solicits. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” or “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 1 23 y5ud figs-explicit ἐπόρθει 1 Here, the word **destroying** refers to trying to stop the spread of the Christian message. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 1 24 qp4t grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in me** means “because of me” and is giving the reason why the Judean believers were praising God, namely because of Paul. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -GAL 1 24 cpni ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 The phrase **in me** means “because of me” and the phrase “because of me” could mean: (1) both option 2 and 3 at the same time, in which case “because of me” would mean both that the Judean believers were praising God because God had caused Paul to believe in Jesus and because Paul was now proclaiming the good news about Jesus. If you decide to use this meaning you could use a general phrase that allows for both meanings at the same time such as “because of me.” Alternatively you could clarify in your translation that “because of me” refers to both meanings simultaneously. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because of what God had done in me and was doing through me” or “because God had caused me to believe in Jesus and was now using me to proclaim the good news about Jesus” (2) because of what God was doing through Paul, that he was proclaiming the gospel. Alternate translation: “because of what God is doing through me” or “because I am now proclaiming the good news about Jesus” or “because I am now proclaiming the faith which I formerly tried to destroy” (3) because of what happened to Paul, that God caused him to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of what God has done in me” or “because God caused me to believe in his son” or “because of what had happened to me” +GAL 1 24 cpni ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 The phrase **in me** means “because of me” and the phrase “because of me” could mean: (1) both option 2 and 3 at the same time, in which case “because of me” would mean both that the Judean believers were praising God because God had caused Paul to believe in Jesus and because Paul was now proclaiming the good news about Jesus. If you decide to use this meaning you could use a general phrase that allows for both meanings at the same time such as “because of me.” Alternatively you could clarify in your translation that “because of me” refers to both meanings simultaneously as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because of what God had done in me and was doing through me” or “because God had caused me to believe in Jesus and was now using me to proclaim the good news about Jesus” (2) because of what God was doing through Paul, that he was proclaiming the gospel. Alternate translation: “because of what God is doing through me” or “because I am now proclaiming the good news about Jesus” or “because I am now proclaiming the faith which I formerly tried to destroy” (3) because of what happened to Paul, that God caused him to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of what God has done in me” or “because God caused me to believe in his son” or “because of what had happened to me” GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Freedom and slavery\n\nThroughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “I do not negate the grace of God”\n\nPaul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them through the work of Christ. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 1 zt61 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to give the history of how he learned the gospel from God, not the apostles. GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Here, **went up** is used because Jerusalem is located in hilly country. The Jews also viewed Jerusalem as the place on earth that is closest to heaven, so Paul may have been speaking figuratively, or it may be that it was reflecting the difficult, uphill, journey to get to Jerusalem. From 454006c817c94266a7cfcc1c3a8a4c93e2e5ebda Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 11 Oct 2022 17:41:50 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 235/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index fdb72a2e73..3fb9fcb589 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -114,8 +114,8 @@ GAL 1 23 y5ud figs-explicit ἐπόρθει 1 Here, the word **destroying** ref GAL 1 24 qp4t grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in me** means “because of me” and is giving the reason why the Judean believers were praising God, namely because of Paul. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 1 24 cpni ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 The phrase **in me** means “because of me” and the phrase “because of me” could mean: (1) both option 2 and 3 at the same time, in which case “because of me” would mean both that the Judean believers were praising God because God had caused Paul to believe in Jesus and because Paul was now proclaiming the good news about Jesus. If you decide to use this meaning you could use a general phrase that allows for both meanings at the same time such as “because of me.” Alternatively you could clarify in your translation that “because of me” refers to both meanings simultaneously as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because of what God had done in me and was doing through me” or “because God had caused me to believe in Jesus and was now using me to proclaim the good news about Jesus” (2) because of what God was doing through Paul, that he was proclaiming the gospel. Alternate translation: “because of what God is doing through me” or “because I am now proclaiming the good news about Jesus” or “because I am now proclaiming the faith which I formerly tried to destroy” (3) because of what happened to Paul, that God caused him to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of what God has done in me” or “because God caused me to believe in his son” or “because of what had happened to me” GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Freedom and slavery\n\nThroughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “I do not negate the grace of God”\n\nPaul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them through the work of Christ. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -GAL 2 1 zt61 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to give the history of how he learned the gospel from God, not the apostles. -GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Here, **went up** is used because Jerusalem is located in hilly country. The Jews also viewed Jerusalem as the place on earth that is closest to heaven, so Paul may have been speaking figuratively, or it may be that it was reflecting the difficult, uphill, journey to get to Jerusalem. +GAL 2 1 zt61 0 Connecting Statement: See how you translated the similar phrase “I went up to Jerusalem” in [1:18](../01/18.md). +GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-doublenegatives τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” GAL 2 2 t6we μή πως εἰς κενὸν 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Alternate translation: “for no benefit” or “for nothing” From 5775b7148aa87b04634bba2f31d479226dc830d8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 11 Oct 2022 17:42:56 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 236/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 3fb9fcb589..ff2dacec42 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ GAL 1 23 y5ud figs-explicit ἐπόρθει 1 Here, the word **destroying** ref GAL 1 24 qp4t grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in me** means “because of me” and is giving the reason why the Judean believers were praising God, namely because of Paul. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 1 24 cpni ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 The phrase **in me** means “because of me” and the phrase “because of me” could mean: (1) both option 2 and 3 at the same time, in which case “because of me” would mean both that the Judean believers were praising God because God had caused Paul to believe in Jesus and because Paul was now proclaiming the good news about Jesus. If you decide to use this meaning you could use a general phrase that allows for both meanings at the same time such as “because of me.” Alternatively you could clarify in your translation that “because of me” refers to both meanings simultaneously as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because of what God had done in me and was doing through me” or “because God had caused me to believe in Jesus and was now using me to proclaim the good news about Jesus” (2) because of what God was doing through Paul, that he was proclaiming the gospel. Alternate translation: “because of what God is doing through me” or “because I am now proclaiming the good news about Jesus” or “because I am now proclaiming the faith which I formerly tried to destroy” (3) because of what happened to Paul, that God caused him to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of what God has done in me” or “because God caused me to believe in his son” or “because of what had happened to me” GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Freedom and slavery\n\nThroughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “I do not negate the grace of God”\n\nPaul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them through the work of Christ. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -GAL 2 1 zt61 0 Connecting Statement: See how you translated the similar phrase “I went up to Jerusalem” in [1:18](../01/18.md). +GAL 2 1 zt61 ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 0 Connecting Statement: See how you translated the similar phrase “I went up to Jerusalem” in [1:18](../01/18.md). GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-doublenegatives τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” From 2f38eff8faa8b0c50eb813c6a2458599c75b235c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 11 Oct 2022 17:48:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 237/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index ff2dacec42..635bce7396 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ GAL 1 23 y5ud figs-explicit ἐπόρθει 1 Here, the word **destroying** ref GAL 1 24 qp4t grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in me** means “because of me” and is giving the reason why the Judean believers were praising God, namely because of Paul. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 1 24 cpni ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 The phrase **in me** means “because of me” and the phrase “because of me” could mean: (1) both option 2 and 3 at the same time, in which case “because of me” would mean both that the Judean believers were praising God because God had caused Paul to believe in Jesus and because Paul was now proclaiming the good news about Jesus. If you decide to use this meaning you could use a general phrase that allows for both meanings at the same time such as “because of me.” Alternatively you could clarify in your translation that “because of me” refers to both meanings simultaneously as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because of what God had done in me and was doing through me” or “because God had caused me to believe in Jesus and was now using me to proclaim the good news about Jesus” (2) because of what God was doing through Paul, that he was proclaiming the gospel. Alternate translation: “because of what God is doing through me” or “because I am now proclaiming the good news about Jesus” or “because I am now proclaiming the faith which I formerly tried to destroy” (3) because of what happened to Paul, that God caused him to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of what God has done in me” or “because God caused me to believe in his son” or “because of what had happened to me” GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Freedom and slavery\n\nThroughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “I do not negate the grace of God”\n\nPaul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them through the work of Christ. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -GAL 2 1 zt61 ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 0 Connecting Statement: See how you translated the similar phrase “I went up to Jerusalem” in [1:18](../01/18.md). +GAL 2 1 zt61 ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Connecting Statement: See how you translated the similar phrase “I went up to Jerusalem” in [1:18](../01/18.md). GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-doublenegatives τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” From e98030a603f1209c3ac2f6245da03ac7dc40f85e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 11 Oct 2022 17:51:47 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 238/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 635bce7396..d8fa00122d 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -115,6 +115,7 @@ GAL 1 24 qp4t grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 Here, the phrase GAL 1 24 cpni ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 The phrase **in me** means “because of me” and the phrase “because of me” could mean: (1) both option 2 and 3 at the same time, in which case “because of me” would mean both that the Judean believers were praising God because God had caused Paul to believe in Jesus and because Paul was now proclaiming the good news about Jesus. If you decide to use this meaning you could use a general phrase that allows for both meanings at the same time such as “because of me.” Alternatively you could clarify in your translation that “because of me” refers to both meanings simultaneously as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because of what God had done in me and was doing through me” or “because God had caused me to believe in Jesus and was now using me to proclaim the good news about Jesus” (2) because of what God was doing through Paul, that he was proclaiming the gospel. Alternate translation: “because of what God is doing through me” or “because I am now proclaiming the good news about Jesus” or “because I am now proclaiming the faith which I formerly tried to destroy” (3) because of what happened to Paul, that God caused him to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of what God has done in me” or “because God caused me to believe in his son” or “because of what had happened to me” GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Freedom and slavery\n\nThroughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “I do not negate the grace of God”\n\nPaul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them through the work of Christ. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 1 zt61 ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Connecting Statement: See how you translated the similar phrase “I went up to Jerusalem” in [1:18](../01/18.md). +GAL 2 1 mtgj grammar-connect-time-sequential ἔπειτα 1 The word **Then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events just described. See how you translated the word **Then** in [1:18](../01/18.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-doublenegatives τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” From 36e9b7916d90add48f78e5520afb270a9fb3e85a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Tue, 11 Oct 2022 17:52:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 239/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index d8fa00122d..21ab85dfd9 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ GAL 1 16 qme5 figs-synecdoche σαρκὶ καὶ αἵματι 1 consult with f GAL 1 17 qh88 figs-go ἀνῆλθον εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 go up to Jerusalem **Jerusalem** was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for people to speak of going **up** to Jerusalem and going down from it. Your language may say “come” rather than **go** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “did I come up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 1 17 w82a grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 What follows the word **Instead** is in contrast to what was expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 1 17 zqih figs-go ἀπῆλθον εἰς 1 Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -GAL 1 18 c7gb grammar-connect-time-sequential ἔπειτα 1 The word **Then*** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events just described. Use a natural form in your language for indicating this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +GAL 1 18 c7gb grammar-connect-time-sequential ἔπειτα 1 The word **Then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events just described. Use a natural form in your language for indicating this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) GAL 1 18 rej5 figs-go ἀνῆλθον εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 **Jerusalem** was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for people to speak of going **up** to Jerusalem and going down from it. Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 1 19 av43 grammar-connect-exceptions ἕτερον…τῶν ἀποστόλων οὐκ εἶδον, εἰ μὴ Ἰάκωβον 1 I saw none of the other apostles except James If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the only other apostles I saw were James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) GAL 1 20 d9yv figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 **behold** is an exclamation word which is used to draw attention to the words that come next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “pay attention to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) @@ -114,8 +114,8 @@ GAL 1 23 y5ud figs-explicit ἐπόρθει 1 Here, the word **destroying** ref GAL 1 24 qp4t grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in me** means “because of me” and is giving the reason why the Judean believers were praising God, namely because of Paul. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) GAL 1 24 cpni ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 The phrase **in me** means “because of me” and the phrase “because of me” could mean: (1) both option 2 and 3 at the same time, in which case “because of me” would mean both that the Judean believers were praising God because God had caused Paul to believe in Jesus and because Paul was now proclaiming the good news about Jesus. If you decide to use this meaning you could use a general phrase that allows for both meanings at the same time such as “because of me.” Alternatively you could clarify in your translation that “because of me” refers to both meanings simultaneously as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because of what God had done in me and was doing through me” or “because God had caused me to believe in Jesus and was now using me to proclaim the good news about Jesus” (2) because of what God was doing through Paul, that he was proclaiming the gospel. Alternate translation: “because of what God is doing through me” or “because I am now proclaiming the good news about Jesus” or “because I am now proclaiming the faith which I formerly tried to destroy” (3) because of what happened to Paul, that God caused him to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of what God has done in me” or “because God caused me to believe in his son” or “because of what had happened to me” GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Freedom and slavery\n\nThroughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “I do not negate the grace of God”\n\nPaul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them through the work of Christ. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -GAL 2 1 zt61 ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Connecting Statement: See how you translated the similar phrase “I went up to Jerusalem” in [1:18](../01/18.md). GAL 2 1 mtgj grammar-connect-time-sequential ἔπειτα 1 The word **Then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events just described. See how you translated the word **Then** in [1:18](../01/18.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +GAL 2 1 zt61 ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Connecting Statement: See how you translated the similar phrase “I went up to Jerusalem” in [1:18](../01/18.md). GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-doublenegatives τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” From b8deaae4c2878f824bbf075d3436bda8fd28d0f6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Richard Mahn Date: Tue, 11 Oct 2022 23:01:45 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 240/446] Version 66 --- manifest.yaml | 20 ++++++++++---------- 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-) diff --git a/manifest.yaml b/manifest.yaml index c8b6394853..e7599e8a91 100644 --- a/manifest.yaml +++ b/manifest.yaml @@ -369,21 +369,21 @@ dublin_core: description: "Open-licensed exegetical notes that provide historical, cultural, and linguistic information for translators. It provides translators and checkers with pertinent, just-in-time information to help them make the best possible translation decisions." format: 'text/tsv' identifier: 'tn' - issued: '2022-08-18' + issued: '2022-10-11' language: direction: 'ltr' identifier: 'en' title: 'English' - modified: '2022-08-18' + modified: '2022-10-11' publisher: 'unfoldingWord' relation: - - 'en/ult?v=40' - - 'en/ust?v=39' - - 'hbo/uhb?v=2.1.29' - - 'el-x-koine/ugnt?v=0.29' - - 'en/ta?v=32' - - 'en/tq?v=37' - - 'en/tw?v=35' + - 'en/ult?v=41' + - 'en/ust?v=40' + - 'hbo/uhb?v=2.1.30' + - 'el-x-koine/ugnt?v=0.30' + - 'en/ta?v=33' + - 'en/tq?v=38' + - 'en/tw?v=36' rights: 'CC BY-SA 4.0' source: - identifier: 'tn' @@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ dublin_core: subject: 'TSV Translation Notes' title: 'unfoldingWord® Translation Notes' type: 'help' - version: '65' + version: '66' checking: checking_entity: - 'unfoldingWord' From 432322928fcc04476ee59c009f7f5c676894d5ab Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 11:25:56 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 241/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 3c5ab50f4c..092f717b4e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ ACT 7 55 bl2j figs-explicit δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 he saw the glory of God The i ACT 7 55 zpry figs-nominaladj Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 7 55 vamz figs-explicit Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 55 vyz3 translate-symaction Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 and Jesus standing at the right hand of God Elsewhere in the New Testament, Jesus is described as “sitting” **at the right of God**. Many interpreters believe that Jesus stood on this occasion to honor Stephen for his courage and faithful testimony. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 7 56 gzvv figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Stephen is using the term **behold** to focus his listener’ attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 56 gzvv figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Stephen is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 56 p0jg figs-metaphor θεωρῶ τοὺς οὐρανοὺς διηνοιγμένους, καὶ 1 Stephen is speaking figuratively of **the heavens** being **opened** to mean that they are open to his view. Alternate translation: “the heavens are open to my view, and I see” or “I can see into heaven, and I see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 56 aqp8 figs-explicit τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Son of Man The title **Son of Man** is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus himself used that title to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate the title directly into your language. Alternatively, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what it means. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 56 imoa figs-nominaladj ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated the nominal adjective **right** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -2777,7 +2777,7 @@ ACT 20 intro u91c 0 # Acts 20 General Notes

## Structure and formattin ACT 20 2 edb8 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 had exhorted them with many words The pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the **regions** of Macedonia. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 2 rvp8 translate-names τὴν Ἑλλάδα 1 The word **Greece** is the name of a country. At this time, the word meant about the same thing as “Achaia,” the name of the Roman province that consisted essentially of that country. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 3 ah5w figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 20 3 b8pt figs-idiom ἐγένετο γνώμης 1 This expression means Paul resolved to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he resolved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 20 3 jypq αὐτῷ…μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν 1 Alternate translation: “as he was ready to sail to Syria” ACT 20 4 dw6j translate-names Σώπατρος Πύρρου…Σεκοῦνδος,…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος 1 were Sopater of Pyrrhus … Secundus … Tychicus … Trophimus These words are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 4 dpyn figs-possession Σώπατρος Πύρρου 1 Here, the possessive form indicates that **Sopater** is the son of **Pyrrhus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sopater, whose father was named Pyrrhus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 20 4 w4n1 translate-names Βεροιαῖος…Θεσσαλονικέων…Δερβαῖος…Ἀσιανοὶ 1 from Berea … from Derbe The word **Berean** is the name for someone from the city of Berea. The word **Thessalonians** describes people from the city of Thessalonica. The word **Derbean** is the name for someone from the city of Derbe. The word **Asians** describes people from the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 237cc6ce36f57f9fcedcc3ac97cd7af6b7a4f074 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 11:28:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 242/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 +--- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 092f717b4e..dc4f24cfd8 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2822,9 +2822,7 @@ ACT 20 15 ulk6 translate-names Χίου 1 Chios The word **Chios** is the name o ACT 20 15 b6c6 translate-names Σάμον 1 Samos The word **Samos** is the name of an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 15 s7g2 translate-names Μίλητον 1 Miletus The word **Miletus** is the name of a port city that was located in western Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 16 p61e figs-metaphor ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι 1 so that he would not spend time Luke is speaking figuratively about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could **lose**. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 17 nw52 μετεκαλέσατο 1 Here the word **he** refers to Paul. -ACT 20 17 v9al 0 Connecting Statement: Paul calls the elders of the church of Ephesus and begins to speak to them. -ACT 20 17 l9aj translate-names τῆς Μιλήτου 1 Miletus **Miletus** was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. See how you translated this in [Acts 20:15](../20/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 17 nw52 writing-pronouns μετεκαλέσατο 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 18 b6li figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 You yourselves know Here, **yourselves** is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 20 18 vw6n figs-synecdoche ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 I set foot in Asia Here, **foot** stands for the entire person. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 19 wh5m figs-metonymy δακρύων 1 tears Here **tears** stands for feeling sad and crying. Alternate translation: “sadness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 11a6f5a61c8092bf25ebf86817fde8b95f6e05c4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 11:29:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 243/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 24 ++++++++---------------- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 16 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 1acfe5470e..be31a8f54d 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1108,23 +1108,15 @@ MAT 15 27 i5tt τὰ κυνάρια 1 the little dogs See how you translated ** MAT 15 28 tea2 figs-activepassive γενηθήτω 1 let it be done If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “I” did it. Alternate translation: “I will do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 28 n229 figs-activepassive ἰάθη ἡ θυγάτηρ αὐτῆς 1 her daughter was healed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed her daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 28 wwq3 figs-idiom ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 1 from that hour Here, the phrase **from that hour** is an idiom meaning “at that moment”. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “at that moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 15 29 np6e writing-background 0 General Information: Verses 29-31 give background information about the miracle that Jesus is about to perform by feeding four thousand people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MAT 15 30 c8td χωλούς, τυφλούς, κυλλούς, κωφούς 1 the lame, the blind, the crippled, the mute Alternate translation: “those who could not walk, those who could not see, those whose arms or legs did not function, those who could not talk” -MAT 15 30 yf7i ἔρριψαν αὐτοὺς παρὰ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 they laid them at his feet Apparently some of these sick or crippled people were unable to stand up, so when their friends brought them to Jesus, they placed them on the ground in front of him. Alternate translation: “the crowds placed the sick people on the ground in front of Jesus” -MAT 15 31 pi52 figs-activepassive κυλλοὺς ὑγιεῖς 1 the crippled made well If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the crippled become well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 15 31 be52 figs-nominaladj κυλλοὺς…χωλοὺς…τυφλοὺς 1 the crippled … the lame … the blind If your readers would misunderstand these nominal adjectives, you could express them as adjectives. Alternate translation: “people who were crippled … people who were lame … people who were blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 15 32 z28i 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus feeding 4,000 people with seven loaves of bread and a few small fish. -MAT 15 32 efc2 νήστεις…μήποτε ἐκλυθῶσιν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ 1 hungry, lest they may faint on the way Alternate translation: “without eating because they might faint on the way” -MAT 15 33 uhi3 figs-rquestion πόθεν ἡμῖν ἐν ἐρημίᾳ, ἄρτοι τοσοῦτοι ὥστε χορτάσαι ὄχλον τοσοῦτον? 1 From where would be to us in a wilderness enough bread to satisfy so large a crowd? The disciples use a question to state that there is nowhere to get food for the **crowd**. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “There is nowhere in this wilderness where we can get enough bread for such a large crowd.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 15 34 k86l figs-ellipsis ἑπτά, καὶ ὀλίγα ἰχθύδια 1 Seven, and a few small fish The understood information can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “Seven loaves of bread, and a few small fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 15 35 x13q ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν 1 to recline on the ground Use your language’s word for how people customarily eat when there is no table, whether sitting or lying down. -MAT 15 36 x7kc ἔλαβεν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους καὶ τοὺς ἰχθύας 1 he took the seven loaves and the fish Alternate translation: “Jesus held the seven loaves and the fish in his hands” -MAT 15 36 dcr4 ἔκλασεν 1 he broke them Alternate translation: “he broke the loaves” -MAT 15 36 a9s4 ἐδίδου 1 was giving them Alternate translation: “continued giving the bread and the fish” -MAT 15 37 fc8g ἦραν 1 they took away Alternate translation: “the disciples gathered up” or “some people gathered up” -MAT 15 38 udk7 οἱ…ἐσθίοντες 1 those eating Alternate translation: “the people who ate” +MAT 15 29 np6e writing-newevent 0 General Information: Jesus is using this verse to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MAT 15 30 c8td figs-nominaladj χωλούς, τυφλούς, κυλλούς, κωφούς 1 the lame, the blind, the crippled, the mute Jesus is using the adjectives **the lame, the blind, the crippled, the mute** as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 15 30 yf7i figs-idiom ἔρριψαν αὐτοὺς παρὰ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 they laid them at his feet Here, the phrase **they laid them at his feet** is an idiom meaning “they laid them in front of him”. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they laid them in front of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 15 30 gy3h writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 Here, the word **them** is referring to the many sick people. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sick people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MAT 15 31 be52 figs-nominaladj κωφοὺς…κυλλοὺς…χωλοὺς…τυφλοὺς 1 the crippled … the lame … the blind See the note in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 15 33 uhi3 figs-rquestion πόθεν ἡμῖν ἐν ἐρημίᾳ, ἄρτοι τοσοῦτοι ὥστε χορτάσαι ὄχλον τοσοῦτον? 1 From where would be to us in a wilderness enough bread to satisfy so large a crowd? The disciples are using the question form to emphasize that there is nowhere to get food for that many people. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is certainly no place in the wilderness where we can get enough food to feed this large crowd!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]). +MAT 15 34 k86l figs-ellipsis ἑπτά, καὶ ὀλίγα ἰχθύδια 1 Seven, and a few small fish The disciples are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “seven loaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 15 36 a9s4 figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις 1 was giving them Matthew is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the disciples were giving {them} to the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 15 38 z66m translate-numbers τετρακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 4,000 men Alternate translation: “four thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -MAT 15 39 be43 τὰ ὅρια 1 the region Alternate translation: “the area” MAT 15 39 m8dp translate-names Μαγαδάν 1 of Magadan This region is sometimes called “Magdala.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 16 intro za2k 0 # Matthew 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Yeast

Jesus spoke of the way people thought about God as if it were bread, and he spoke of what people taught about God as if it were the yeast that makes bread dough become larger and the baked bread taste good. He did not want his followers to listen to what the Pharisees and Sadducees taught. This was because if they did listen, they would not understand who God is and how he wants his people to live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Jesus told his people to obey his commands. He did this by telling them to “follow” him. It is as if he were walking on a path and they were walking after him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Background information

Matthew continues his account from chapter 15 in verses 1-20. The account stops in verse 21 so Matthew can tell the reader that Jesus told his disciples again and again that people would kill him after he arrived in Jerusalem. Then the account continues in verses 22-27 with what happened the first time Jesus told the disciples that he would die.

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Matthew 16:25](../mat/16/25.md)). MAT 16 1 t7p5 πειράζοντες 1 testing him Here, **testing** is used in a negative sense. Alternate translation: “challenging him” or “wanting to trap him” From f3a0ad9d46ee640a0180d45b34b3d0563a42b573 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 11:30:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 244/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index dc4f24cfd8..1d206623f6 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2823,8 +2823,9 @@ ACT 20 15 b6c6 translate-names Σάμον 1 Samos The word **Samos** is the name ACT 20 15 s7g2 translate-names Μίλητον 1 Miletus The word **Miletus** is the name of a port city that was located in western Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 16 p61e figs-metaphor ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι 1 so that he would not spend time Luke is speaking figuratively about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could **lose**. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 17 nw52 writing-pronouns μετεκαλέσατο 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 20 18 b6li figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 You yourselves know Here, **yourselves** is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -ACT 20 18 vw6n figs-synecdoche ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 I set foot in Asia Here, **foot** stands for the entire person. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 18 xsa6 figs-infostructure ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε ἀπὸ πρώτης ἡμέρας ἀφ’ ἧς ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν, πῶς μεθ’ ὑμῶν τὸν πάντα χρόνον ἐγενόμην 1 It may be more natural in your language to reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “You yourselves know how I was with you the whole time from the first day from which I set foot in Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +ACT 20 18 b6li writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 You yourselves know Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You certainly know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 20 18 vw6n figs-synecdoche ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 I set foot in Asia Paul is figuratively using one part of himself, his **foot**, to represent all of himself in the act of arriving in Asia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 19 wh5m figs-metonymy δακρύων 1 tears Here **tears** stands for feeling sad and crying. Alternate translation: “sadness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 19 e6k7 πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι 1 trials that happened to me If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **trials**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “while I was tested” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) ACT 20 19 y5iw figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 of the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not mean every Jew. This lets us know who plotted. Alternate translation: “of some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From b96c1a6ab74c50029622e45b078b1da488ae6e94 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 11:34:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 245/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 9 ++++++--- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 1d206623f6..fe0cfa3a9f 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2826,9 +2826,12 @@ ACT 20 17 nw52 writing-pronouns μετεκαλέσατο 1 The pronoun **he** r ACT 20 18 xsa6 figs-infostructure ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε ἀπὸ πρώτης ἡμέρας ἀφ’ ἧς ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν, πῶς μεθ’ ὑμῶν τὸν πάντα χρόνον ἐγενόμην 1 It may be more natural in your language to reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “You yourselves know how I was with you the whole time from the first day from which I set foot in Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 20 18 b6li writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 You yourselves know Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You certainly know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 18 vw6n figs-synecdoche ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 I set foot in Asia Paul is figuratively using one part of himself, his **foot**, to represent all of himself in the act of arriving in Asia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 20 19 wh5m figs-metonymy δακρύων 1 tears Here **tears** stands for feeling sad and crying. Alternate translation: “sadness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 20 19 e6k7 πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι 1 trials that happened to me If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **trials**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “while I was tested” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) -ACT 20 19 y5iw figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 of the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not mean every Jew. This lets us know who plotted. Alternate translation: “of some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 19 uidc writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Paul is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) +ACT 20 19 llqj figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης ταπεινοφροσύνης 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great humility” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 20 19 pg86 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης ταπεινοφροσύνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **humility**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “very humbly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 20 19 wh5m figs-metonymy δακρύων 1 tears Paul is referring figuratively to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds **tears** of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “deep emotion” or “genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 19 e6k7 figs-ellipsis καὶ πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι 1 trials that happened to me Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and how I endured the trials that happened to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 20 19 y5iw figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 of the Jews Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 20 nu7h ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν 1 how I kept back nothing that was useful which I did not declare to you Alternate translation: “how I declared to you everything that was beneficial to you” ACT 20 20 kut9 κατ’ οἴκους 1 according to houses Paul taught people in various private homes. Alternate translation: “in each house” or “in everyone’s home” ACT 20 21 w7mv figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 about repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “that they need to repent before God and believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 9e89edc8f4c0da29f19c26963153be7d9e23df7a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 11:36:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 246/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index fe0cfa3a9f..6c3c00b3b0 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2832,8 +2832,8 @@ ACT 20 19 pg86 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης ταπεινοφροσύ ACT 20 19 wh5m figs-metonymy δακρύων 1 tears Paul is referring figuratively to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds **tears** of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “deep emotion” or “genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 19 e6k7 figs-ellipsis καὶ πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι 1 trials that happened to me Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and how I endured the trials that happened to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 20 19 y5iw figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 of the Jews Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 20 20 nu7h ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν 1 how I kept back nothing that was useful which I did not declare to you Alternate translation: “how I declared to you everything that was beneficial to you” -ACT 20 20 kut9 κατ’ οἴκους 1 according to houses Paul taught people in various private homes. Alternate translation: “in each house” or “in everyone’s home” +ACT 20 20 sscz figs-hyperbole ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν 1 Paul says **nothing** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “how I did not withhold things that would be useful and not declare them to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 20 20 nu7h figs-doublenegatives ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν 1 how I kept back nothing that was useful which I did not declare to you If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **nothing** and the negative particle **now**. Alternate translation: “how I eagerly brought forth everything that would be useful so that I could declare it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 20 21 w7mv figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 about repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “that they need to repent before God and believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 20 21 x552 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The word **our** refers to Paul and the elders to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 20 22 ty3b ἐγὼ 1 Here the word **I** refers to Paul. From 9273a98c9c9a09b100dcd525e182fe126bda54be Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 11:37:58 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 247/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 6c3c00b3b0..eecfc43751 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2834,8 +2834,9 @@ ACT 20 19 e6k7 figs-ellipsis καὶ πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντ ACT 20 19 y5iw figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 of the Jews Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 20 sscz figs-hyperbole ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν 1 Paul says **nothing** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “how I did not withhold things that would be useful and not declare them to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 20 20 nu7h figs-doublenegatives ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν 1 how I kept back nothing that was useful which I did not declare to you If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **nothing** and the negative particle **now**. Alternate translation: “how I eagerly brought forth everything that would be useful so that I could declare it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -ACT 20 21 w7mv figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 about repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “that they need to repent before God and believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 20 21 x552 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The word **our** refers to Paul and the elders to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 20 21 sqf9 figs-ellipsis διαμαρτυρόμενος…τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “testifying about the need for … repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 20 21 w7mv figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 about repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **repentance** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “about the need to repent towards God and believe in our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 20 21 x552 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **our** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 20 22 ty3b ἐγὼ 1 Here the word **I** refers to Paul. ACT 20 22 vam4 figs-activepassive δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form.They can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the Spirit compels me to go there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 22 a9j1 τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς 1 not knowing what will happen to me in it Alternate translation: “and I do not know what will happen to me there” or “not knowing what will happen to me in Jerusalem” From e222c8592886ca0010a548d66f427f7141d9ac72 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 11:44:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 248/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 +++++--- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index eecfc43751..a1bca346b2 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2837,9 +2837,11 @@ ACT 20 20 nu7h figs-doublenegatives ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην ACT 20 21 sqf9 figs-ellipsis διαμαρτυρόμενος…τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “testifying about the need for … repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 20 21 w7mv figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 about repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **repentance** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “about the need to repent towards God and believe in our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 20 21 x552 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **our** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 20 22 ty3b ἐγὼ 1 Here the word **I** refers to Paul. -ACT 20 22 vam4 figs-activepassive δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form.They can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the Spirit compels me to go there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 20 22 a9j1 τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς 1 not knowing what will happen to me in it Alternate translation: “and I do not know what will happen to me there” or “not knowing what will happen to me in Jerusalem” +ACT 20 22 hcs0 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Paul is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 22 vam4 figs-activepassive δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit binding me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 20 22 n99n figs-metaphor δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι 1 Paul is speaking as if **the Spirit** had **bound** him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit constraining me” or “with the Spirit leading me in a way that I cannot refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 20 22 um41 grammar-connect-exceptions τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς 1 Since Paul says in the next verse that he does know one thing that will happen to him in Jerusalem, it might appear in your language he is contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. You could begin a new sentence here that continues into the next verse, leaving out the word “except” at the start of the next verse. Alternate translation: “The one thing I do know that will happen to me in her is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) +ACT 20 22 a9j1 writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτῇ 1 not knowing what will happen to me in it The pronoun **her** refers to the city of Jerusalem. Conventionally, Greek referred to cities with feminine pronouns. Your language may use a different gender. You could also use a noun. Alternate translation: “in it” or “in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 23 q3ie figs-metonymy δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν 1 chains and sufferings await me Here, **chains** refers to Paul’s being arrested and put in prison. Alternate translation: “people will put me in prison and cause me to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 24 w8d2 figs-metaphor ὡς τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 so as to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus This speaks about Paul’s **race** and **ministry** as if they are objects that Jesus gives and Paul receives. Alternate translation: “so that I may complete the work that the Lord Jesus has commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 24 ga6d figs-doublet τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν 1 Here, **race** and **ministry** mean basically the same thing. Paul repeats this for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) From 4d1e615b05c32a3f6f772661c4490342fda728e6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 11:45:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 249/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index a1bca346b2..c4ccbc1703 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2842,7 +2842,8 @@ ACT 20 22 vam4 figs-activepassive δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι 1 ACT 20 22 n99n figs-metaphor δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι 1 Paul is speaking as if **the Spirit** had **bound** him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit constraining me” or “with the Spirit leading me in a way that I cannot refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 22 um41 grammar-connect-exceptions τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς 1 Since Paul says in the next verse that he does know one thing that will happen to him in Jerusalem, it might appear in your language he is contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. You could begin a new sentence here that continues into the next verse, leaving out the word “except” at the start of the next verse. Alternate translation: “The one thing I do know that will happen to me in her is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) ACT 20 22 a9j1 writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτῇ 1 not knowing what will happen to me in it The pronoun **her** refers to the city of Jerusalem. Conventionally, Greek referred to cities with feminine pronouns. Your language may use a different gender. You could also use a noun. Alternate translation: “in it” or “in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 20 23 q3ie figs-metonymy δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν 1 chains and sufferings await me Here, **chains** refers to Paul’s being arrested and put in prison. Alternate translation: “people will put me in prison and cause me to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 23 u26j figs-personification δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν 1 Luke is speaking as if these **chains** and **sufferings** were living things that were waiting for Paul in Jerusalem. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will experience chains and afflictions when I get there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 20 23 q3ie figs-synecdoche δεσμὰ 1 chains and sufferings await me Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chains** that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire experience of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “imprisonment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 24 w8d2 figs-metaphor ὡς τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 so as to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus This speaks about Paul’s **race** and **ministry** as if they are objects that Jesus gives and Paul receives. Alternate translation: “so that I may complete the work that the Lord Jesus has commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 24 ga6d figs-doublet τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν 1 Here, **race** and **ministry** mean basically the same thing. Paul repeats this for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 20 24 m5gc figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου 1 to finish my race Paul speaks about completing the work that Jesus has commanded him to do as if he were running a **race**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 514e997d5fb0a87c88cc9f49c95ddc2d2fa03540 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 11:49:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 250/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 10 ++++++---- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index c4ccbc1703..c6a2299d82 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2844,10 +2844,12 @@ ACT 20 22 um41 grammar-connect-exceptions τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντή ACT 20 22 a9j1 writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτῇ 1 not knowing what will happen to me in it The pronoun **her** refers to the city of Jerusalem. Conventionally, Greek referred to cities with feminine pronouns. Your language may use a different gender. You could also use a noun. Alternate translation: “in it” or “in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 23 u26j figs-personification δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν 1 Luke is speaking as if these **chains** and **sufferings** were living things that were waiting for Paul in Jerusalem. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will experience chains and afflictions when I get there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 20 23 q3ie figs-synecdoche δεσμὰ 1 chains and sufferings await me Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chains** that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire experience of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “imprisonment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 20 24 w8d2 figs-metaphor ὡς τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 so as to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus This speaks about Paul’s **race** and **ministry** as if they are objects that Jesus gives and Paul receives. Alternate translation: “so that I may complete the work that the Lord Jesus has commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 24 ga6d figs-doublet τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν 1 Here, **race** and **ministry** mean basically the same thing. Paul repeats this for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ACT 20 24 m5gc figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου 1 to finish my race Paul speaks about completing the work that Jesus has commanded him to do as if he were running a **race**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 24 hg3l διαμαρτύρασθαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to solemnly testify to the gospel of the grace of God This is the ministry that Paul received from Jesus. Alternate translation: “to tell people what I have personally learned about the good news of God’s grace” +ACT 20 24 cvw3 figs-metonymy of no word do I consider my life valuable to myself 1 Paul is using the term **word** to mean what he might say by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I do not consider my life to have any value for myself worth speaking of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 24 ga6d figs-doublet τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 The terms **race** and **ministry** mean the same thing; **race** is figurative and **ministry** is literal. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could show how the second term is the literal equivalent of the first. Alternate translation: “to finish my race, that is, the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +ACT 20 24 m5gc figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 to finish my race Paul is speaking as if the **ministry** that Jesus gave him was a **race** he was running. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to complete my assignment, that is, the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 24 ljgc figs-doublet τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 If you decide to use a plain expression rather than the figurative expression **race**, you could also use another way to express the emphasis that Paul is conveying by using two similar terms together. Alternate translation: “to complete the entire ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +ACT 20 24 w8d2 figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 so as to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus Paul is speaking about this **race** and **ministry** as if they were objects that Jesus gave him and he **received**. He means that Jesus commanded him to do this ministry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that plainly. Alternate translation: “to complete the entire ministry that the Lord Jesus commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 24 hg3l figs-abstractnouns τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to solemnly testify to the gospel of the grace of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the good news that God graciously saves those who believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 20 25 kj9c καὶ νῦν ἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ οἶδα 1 And now, behold, I know Alternate translation: “And now, pay careful attention, because I know” ACT 20 25 z4ng ἐγὼ οἶδα ὅτι…ὑμεῖς πάντες 1 I know that you all Alternate translation: “I know that all of you” ACT 20 25 aur9 figs-metonymy ἐν οἷς διῆλθον κηρύσσων τὴν βασιλείαν 1 among whom I went about proclaiming the kingdom Here, **kingdom** stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “to whom I preached the message about God’s reign as king” or “to whom I preached about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 2346b950ab8a68ebd1d537d0e37168dc53f44a81 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 11:52:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 251/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index c6a2299d82..db94f27b82 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2850,10 +2850,10 @@ ACT 20 24 m5gc figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, κ ACT 20 24 ljgc figs-doublet τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 If you decide to use a plain expression rather than the figurative expression **race**, you could also use another way to express the emphasis that Paul is conveying by using two similar terms together. Alternate translation: “to complete the entire ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 20 24 w8d2 figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 so as to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus Paul is speaking about this **race** and **ministry** as if they were objects that Jesus gave him and he **received**. He means that Jesus commanded him to do this ministry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that plainly. Alternate translation: “to complete the entire ministry that the Lord Jesus commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 24 hg3l figs-abstractnouns τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to solemnly testify to the gospel of the grace of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the good news that God graciously saves those who believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 20 25 kj9c καὶ νῦν ἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ οἶδα 1 And now, behold, I know Alternate translation: “And now, pay careful attention, because I know” -ACT 20 25 z4ng ἐγὼ οἶδα ὅτι…ὑμεῖς πάντες 1 I know that you all Alternate translation: “I know that all of you” -ACT 20 25 aur9 figs-metonymy ἐν οἷς διῆλθον κηρύσσων τὴν βασιλείαν 1 among whom I went about proclaiming the kingdom Here, **kingdom** stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “to whom I preached the message about God’s reign as king” or “to whom I preached about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 20 25 cq45 figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου 1 will see my face no more The word **face** here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “will not see me anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 25 kj9c figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 And now, behold, I know Paul is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 25 l59w figs-explicit τὴν βασιλείαν 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will understand that by **kingdom**, he means the kingdom of God. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 20 25 aur9 figs-abstractnouns τὴν βασιλείαν 1 among whom I went about proclaiming the kingdom If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God has begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 20 25 cq45 figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου 1 will see my face no more Paul is using one part of himself, his **face**, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will see me no more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 26 e546 figs-metonymy καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 I am innocent from the blood of all Here, **blood** stands for a person’s death, which, in this case, is not physical death but spiritual death when God declares a person guilty of sin. Paul had told them God’s truth. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for anyone whom God judges guilty of sin because they did not trust in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 26 v5el figs-gendernotations πάντων 1 of all Here **all** refers to any person, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “of any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 20 27 qa9y figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι…ὑμῖν 1 For I did not hold back from declaring to you Paul uses the negative **not hold back** to emphasize that he told them everything. Alternate translation: “For I certainly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From cfa45f9fa4318010e99a23b968fe46c277b0645f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 11:54:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 252/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index db94f27b82..c8312d9587 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2853,9 +2853,10 @@ ACT 20 24 hg3l figs-abstractnouns τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτ ACT 20 25 kj9c figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 And now, behold, I know Paul is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 25 l59w figs-explicit τὴν βασιλείαν 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will understand that by **kingdom**, he means the kingdom of God. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 25 aur9 figs-abstractnouns τὴν βασιλείαν 1 among whom I went about proclaiming the kingdom If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God has begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 20 26 rab4 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ σήμερον ἡμέρᾳ 1 This is an idiomatic expression. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “this very day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 20 25 cq45 figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου 1 will see my face no more Paul is using one part of himself, his **face**, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will see me no more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 20 26 e546 figs-metonymy καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 I am innocent from the blood of all Here, **blood** stands for a person’s death, which, in this case, is not physical death but spiritual death when God declares a person guilty of sin. Paul had told them God’s truth. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for anyone whom God judges guilty of sin because they did not trust in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 20 26 v5el figs-gendernotations πάντων 1 of all Here **all** refers to any person, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “of any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +ACT 20 26 e546 figs-metonymy καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 I am innocent from the blood of all Paul is referring to death as a punishment by association with the way a person’s blood is often shed when they are executed. In this case the death is not physical but spiritual. It is the punishment of spiritual death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 26 rs87 figs-explicit καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 Paul assumes that his readers will understand that they wold receive a punishment of spiritual death for rejecting Jesus as their Savior from the guilt of sin. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive for rejecting Jesus as your Savior from the guilt of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 27 qa9y figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι…ὑμῖν 1 For I did not hold back from declaring to you Paul uses the negative **not hold back** to emphasize that he told them everything. Alternate translation: “For I certainly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 20 28 u52d figs-metaphor τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the flock among which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers to shepherd the church of God Believers are likened to a **flock** of sheep here. Church leaders are entrusted by God with the care of the community of believers just as a **shepherd** would care for his flock of sheep and protect them from wolves. Alternate translation: “the group of believers the Holy spirit has entrusted to you. Be sure to take care of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 28 cx69 figs-metaphor τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood The shedding of the **blood** of Christ here is likened to a payment to God for our sins. Alternate translation: “the people Christ saved from their sins by shedding his blood on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 1b47be89355f06ba081453a55956a6fe77c3383f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 11:56:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 253/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index c8312d9587..761baa1a4f 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2856,8 +2856,10 @@ ACT 20 25 aur9 figs-abstractnouns τὴν βασιλείαν 1 among whom I went ACT 20 26 rab4 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ σήμερον ἡμέρᾳ 1 This is an idiomatic expression. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “this very day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 20 25 cq45 figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου 1 will see my face no more Paul is using one part of himself, his **face**, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will see me no more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 26 e546 figs-metonymy καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 I am innocent from the blood of all Paul is referring to death as a punishment by association with the way a person’s blood is often shed when they are executed. In this case the death is not physical but spiritual. It is the punishment of spiritual death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 27 g1vx translate-versebridge 0 In this verse, Paul is giving the reason why he is not responsible for any spiritual punishment the people in Ephesus might receive. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 26–27. It might say something like this: “I did not hold back from declaring all the counsel of God to you. Therefore I testify to you this very day that I am innocent of the blood of all of you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 20 26 rs87 figs-explicit καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 Paul assumes that his readers will understand that they wold receive a punishment of spiritual death for rejecting Jesus as their Savior from the guilt of sin. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive for rejecting Jesus as your Savior from the guilt of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 20 27 qa9y figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι…ὑμῖν 1 For I did not hold back from declaring to you Paul uses the negative **not hold back** to emphasize that he told them everything. Alternate translation: “For I certainly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 20 27 qa9y figs-doublenegatives οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι…ὑμῖν 1 For I did not hold back from declaring to you If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **hold back**. Alternate translation: “For I forthrightly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +ACT 20 27 jl2w figs-hyperbole πᾶσαν τὴν βουλὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑμῖν 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that you needed to know in order to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 20 28 u52d figs-metaphor τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the flock among which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers to shepherd the church of God Believers are likened to a **flock** of sheep here. Church leaders are entrusted by God with the care of the community of believers just as a **shepherd** would care for his flock of sheep and protect them from wolves. Alternate translation: “the group of believers the Holy spirit has entrusted to you. Be sure to take care of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 28 cx69 figs-metaphor τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood The shedding of the **blood** of Christ here is likened to a payment to God for our sins. Alternate translation: “the people Christ saved from their sins by shedding his blood on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 28 hjh6 figs-metonymy τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 his own blood Here, **blood** stands for Christ’s death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 3945fc1874cbec4264f234f686068b241b653585 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 12:00:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 254/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 8 +++++--- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 761baa1a4f..9fdba704cb 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2860,9 +2860,11 @@ ACT 20 27 g1vx translate-versebridge 0 In this verse, Paul is giving the reaso ACT 20 26 rs87 figs-explicit καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 Paul assumes that his readers will understand that they wold receive a punishment of spiritual death for rejecting Jesus as their Savior from the guilt of sin. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive for rejecting Jesus as your Savior from the guilt of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 27 qa9y figs-doublenegatives οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι…ὑμῖν 1 For I did not hold back from declaring to you If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **hold back**. Alternate translation: “For I forthrightly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 20 27 jl2w figs-hyperbole πᾶσαν τὴν βουλὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑμῖν 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that you needed to know in order to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 20 28 u52d figs-metaphor τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the flock among which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers to shepherd the church of God Believers are likened to a **flock** of sheep here. Church leaders are entrusted by God with the care of the community of believers just as a **shepherd** would care for his flock of sheep and protect them from wolves. Alternate translation: “the group of believers the Holy spirit has entrusted to you. Be sure to take care of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 28 cx69 figs-metaphor τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood The shedding of the **blood** of Christ here is likened to a payment to God for our sins. Alternate translation: “the people Christ saved from their sins by shedding his blood on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 28 hjh6 figs-metonymy τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 his own blood Here, **blood** stands for Christ’s death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 28 u52d figs-metaphor τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the flock among which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers to shepherd the church of God Paul is speaking as if the believers were a **flock** of sheep and the elders to whom he is speaking were their shepherds. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers whose leaders the Holy Spirit has made you, to care for the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 28 hjh6 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 his own blood Paul is referring to death by association with the way people may shed their **blood** when they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the church of God, which he obtained through his own death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 28 cx69 figs-rpronouns τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood The word translated **obtained** means to make something one’s own. The pronoun **he** may refer to Jesus, and this would mean that Jesus made the people of the church his own by dying for them. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God, whom Jesus made his own by dying for them” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 20 28 r66x figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 This could also mean that God made the people of the church his own by sending his Son to die for them. In that case the translation would be “through the blood of his Own” and Paul would be using the adjective **own** as a noun to mean God’s own Son. Alternate translation: “the people of the church, whom God made his own through the death of his own Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 20 28 ybzd figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the term **church** refers to the people who belong to the church. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 29 ka6u figs-metaphor εἰσελεύσονται…λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου 1 vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the flock This is a picture of people who teach false doctrine and who harm the community of believers as though they were **wolves** that eat the sheep of the **flock**. Alternate translation: “many enemies will come among you and try to harm the community of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 30 ftf4 figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν 1 to draw away the disciples after them A false teacher convincing believers to start believing his false teaching is spoken of as if he were leading sheep away from the flock to follow him. Alternate translation: “in order to convince people who are disciples of Christ to become his disciples instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 31 q2nl γρηγορεῖτε, μνημονεύοντες 1 be alert, remembering Alternate translation: “be on guard and remember” or “be on guard as you remember” From e453297190eabacceb7274497f1ffb7be923ce47 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 13:13:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 255/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 21ab85dfd9..980727c6f6 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -116,7 +116,9 @@ GAL 1 24 cpni ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 The phrase **in me** means “because of me GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Freedom and slavery\n\nThroughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “I do not negate the grace of God”\n\nPaul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them through the work of Christ. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 1 mtgj grammar-connect-time-sequential ἔπειτα 1 The word **Then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events just described. See how you translated the word **Then** in [1:18](../01/18.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) GAL 2 1 zt61 ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Connecting Statement: See how you translated the similar phrase “I went up to Jerusalem” in [1:18](../01/18.md). +GAL 2 2 ll4j figs-go ἀνέβην 1 Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I cam up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +GAL 2 2 e8xu grammar-connect-time-background]]) δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-doublenegatives τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” GAL 2 2 t6we μή πως εἰς κενὸν 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Alternate translation: “for no benefit” or “for nothing” From c81b6be34db9aa665d89737671d5f0dd7b7a01d4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 13:27:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 261/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 980727c6f6..1730988722 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -116,9 +116,9 @@ GAL 1 24 cpni ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 The phrase **in me** means “because of me GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Freedom and slavery\n\nThroughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “I do not negate the grace of God”\n\nPaul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them through the work of Christ. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 1 mtgj grammar-connect-time-sequential ἔπειτα 1 The word **Then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events just described. See how you translated the word **Then** in [1:18](../01/18.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) GAL 2 1 zt61 ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Connecting Statement: See how you translated the similar phrase “I went up to Jerusalem” in [1:18](../01/18.md). -GAL 2 2 ll4j figs-go ἀνέβην 1 Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I cam up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 2 e8xu grammar-connect-time-background]]) δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) +GAL 2 2 ll4j figs-go ἀνέβην 1 See how you translated the **I went up** in [2:1](../02/01.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-doublenegatives τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” GAL 2 2 t6we μή πως εἰς κενὸν 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Alternate translation: “for no benefit” or “for nothing” From 5d4085126c4a76a921235c0b85f1e2fb5af866ba Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 13:33:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 262/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 1730988722..51d661998e 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -73,6 +73,7 @@ GAL 1 12 hlg6 figs-explicit αὐτό…ἐδιδάχθην 1 Here, both occurr GAL 1 12 qohz figs-ellipsis ἐδιδάχθην 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “was I taught it by any person” or “was I taught it by man” or “was I taught it by a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) GAL 1 12 g1o6 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 What follows the word **but** is in contrast to the phrases **receive it from man** and **taught it**. In contrast to Paul receiving the message he proclaimed from a human source or being **taught it** Paul received it from a divine source. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “rather” or “instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 1 12 leqs δι’ 1 Alternate translation: “through a” +GAL 1 12 uybt figs-abstractnouns ἀποκαλύψεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 1 12 wed1 figs-possession δι’ ἀποκαλύψεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 it was by revelation of Jesus Christ to me Paul could be using the possessive form here to mean: (1) that God revealed Jesus Christ to Paul. This would mean that God is the one who did the revealing and Jesus Christ is the one who God revealed. See the phrase “to reveal his Son in me” in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “God revealed Jesus Christ to me” or “God made me know the gospel when he showed Jesus Christ to me” (2) that it was Jesus Christ who made the revelation to Paul. Alternate translation: “by what Jesus Christ revealed to me” (3) both option 1 and 2 together. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ revealed himself to me and taught me the gospel about himself” or “Jesus Christ revealed himself to me and taught me the gospel concerning himself”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) GAL 1 12 nee4 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ δι’ ἀποκαλύψεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but I received it by a revelation of Jesus Christ” or “but I was taught it by a revelation of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) GAL 1 13 f3gl figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐμὴν ἀναστροφήν ποτε 1 former life If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **manner** and **life**, you could express the same idea with a verbal phrase such as “how I formerly lived”, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “how I formerly lived” or “how I formerly conducted myself” or “how I formerly behaved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From c2c51ae1d2144f43dcde0441ad3c600852d33878 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 13:35:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 263/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 ++ 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 51d661998e..376f198a28 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -120,6 +120,8 @@ GAL 2 1 zt61 ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Connecting Statement GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 2 e8xu grammar-connect-time-background]]) δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) GAL 2 2 ll4j figs-go ἀνέβην 1 See how you translated the **I went up** in [2:1](../02/01.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 +GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-doublenegatives τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” GAL 2 2 t6we μή πως εἰς κενὸν 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Alternate translation: “for no benefit” or “for nothing” From a3dd6950f32da5be4bdf2fde4e62789390b0e451 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 14:04:08 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 264/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 4e4ebcc6f2..86e50045fc 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 2 vq19 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 in the knowledge of God and of Jesus our Lord If you would not use an abstract noun here, you could translate **knowledge** using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because you know God and Jesus our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 1 2 xgax ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 This could mean: (1) “because of knowing God and Jesus our Lord” or (2) “through knowing God and Jesus our Lord.” 2PE 1 2 pmb9 figs-possession τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our Lord** means “the person who is lord over us” or “the person who rules over us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -2PE 1 3 ywj9 grammar-connect-logic-result ὡς…ἡμῖν τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ…δεδωρημένης 1 Here, **as** indicates that this verse provides the reason for the expected result, which is Peter’s command in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “Since his divine power has given to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +2PE 1 3 ywj9 grammar-connect-logic-result ὡς…ἡμῖν τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ…δεδωρημένης 1 Here, **As** indicates that this verse provides the reason for the expected result, which is Peter’s command in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “Since his divine power has given to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 1 3 zwdo figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, **us** refers to Peter and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 2PE 1 3 rtxn writing-pronouns τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **his** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “God’s divine power” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus, by his power as God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 1 3 xdrw figs-abstractnouns τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **power** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “God, because he can do anything,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 7e57138adf7a1bc70df790970f393180552fc539 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 14:09:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 265/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 86e50045fc..56f8e744e0 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 4 xxuj figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 Here, **the world** could mean: (1) the place where we all live, where we are surrounded by sinful people and temptations to sin. Alternate translation: “that is all around us” (2) the system of values that people share who do not honor God. Alternate translation: “of the world’s ungodly value system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2PE 1 4 wnec ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ 1 Here, **by** indicates the means by which the world became corrupt. It does not indicate the means by which Peter’s addressees escaped corruption. Alternate translation: “by means of lust” 2PE 1 4 kjnh figs-abstractnouns φθορᾶς 1 corruption If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **corruption** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “things that corrupt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 1 5 exd9 figs-explicit καὶ αὐτὸ τοῦτο δὲ 1 The phrase **with respect to this very thing** refers to what Peter has just said in the previous verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “and now because of these things that God has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2PE 1 5 exd9 figs-explicit καὶ αὐτὸ τοῦτο δὲ 1 The phrase **{for} this same {reason}** refers to what Peter has just said in the previous verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “and now because of these things that God has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 1 5 ceir σπουδὴν πᾶσαν παρεισενέγκαντες 1 The phrase **applying all diligence** indicates the means by which one is to do the action of supplying that follows. Alternate translation: “by means of applying all diligence” 2PE 1 5 xp0n figs-idiom σπουδὴν πᾶσαν παρεισενέγκαντες 1 Here, **applying all diligence** is an idiom that means doing one’s best or making the best effort. Alternate translation: “making every effort” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2PE 1 5 j0tr figs-abstractnouns ἐπιχορηγήσατε ἐν τῇ πίστει ὑμῶν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “as you trust in Jesus, add” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From b725cc34ed488175f29c641bfd2ae6ae1c4c885d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 14:50:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 266/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 376f198a28..fd3a05d34e 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ GAL 2 1 zt61 ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Connecting Statement GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 2 e8xu grammar-connect-time-background]]) δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) GAL 2 2 ll4j figs-go ἀνέβην 1 See how you translated the **I went up** in [2:1](../02/01.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 +GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ 1 The phrase **according to** could: (1) indicate Paul’s response to the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to” GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-doublenegatives τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” From 05f374eb5aa98940dbcc37da93b1b418ee88de17 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 14:53:59 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 267/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index fd3a05d34e..63ffb791bf 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ GAL 2 1 zt61 ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Connecting Statement GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 2 e8xu grammar-connect-time-background]]) δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) GAL 2 2 ll4j figs-go ἀνέβην 1 See how you translated the **I went up** in [2:1](../02/01.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ 1 The phrase **according to** could: (1) indicate Paul’s response to the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to” +GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 The phrase **according to** could: (1) indicate Paul’s response to the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to” or (2) indicate Paul’s reason for going to Jerusalem was the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to” GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-doublenegatives τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” From 0e87dcc108d4955e42fb95db3e190f8f4b053de0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 15:01:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 268/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 63ffb791bf..b40fb5fd48 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ GAL 2 1 zt61 ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Connecting Statement GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 2 e8xu grammar-connect-time-background]]) δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) GAL 2 2 ll4j figs-go ἀνέβην 1 See how you translated the **I went up** in [2:1](../02/01.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 The phrase **according to** could: (1) indicate Paul’s response to the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to” or (2) indicate Paul’s reason for going to Jerusalem was the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to” +GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 The phrase **according to** could: (1) indicate Paul’s reason for going to Jerusalem was the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “because God told me to” or “because God revealed to me that I should” or “because God showed me that I should” (2) indicate Paul’s response to the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to a revelation” or “in accord with what God had revealed to me” GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-doublenegatives τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” From e062770ffb733c8fb07f8c33b0332f42a08e12bb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 15:02:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 269/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index b40fb5fd48..eb305b1fbe 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ GAL 2 1 zt61 ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Connecting Statement GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 2 e8xu grammar-connect-time-background]]) δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) GAL 2 2 ll4j figs-go ἀνέβην 1 See how you translated the **I went up** in [2:1](../02/01.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 The phrase **according to** could: (1) indicate Paul’s reason for going to Jerusalem was the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “because God told me to” or “because God revealed to me that I should” or “because God showed me that I should” (2) indicate Paul’s response to the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to a revelation” or “in accord with what God had revealed to me” +GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 The phrase **according to** could: (1) indicate that Paul’s reason for going to Jerusalem was the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “because God told me to” or “because God revealed to me that I should” or “because God showed me that I should” (2) indicate Paul’s response to the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to a revelation” or “in accord with what God had revealed to me” GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-doublenegatives τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” From 6833e7fd80c7628a378914c44f8da9b9cfd5079a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 15:06:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 270/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index eb305b1fbe..f0aaa210d1 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -118,8 +118,8 @@ GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting GAL 2 1 mtgj grammar-connect-time-sequential ἔπειτα 1 The word **Then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events just described. See how you translated the word **Then** in [1:18](../01/18.md) where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) GAL 2 1 zt61 ἀνέβην εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 Connecting Statement: See how you translated the similar phrase “I went up to Jerusalem” in [1:18](../01/18.md). GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 went up Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “I came up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -GAL 2 2 e8xu grammar-connect-time-background]]) δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) -GAL 2 2 ll4j figs-go ἀνέβην 1 See how you translated the **I went up** in [2:1](../02/01.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +GAL 2 2 e8xu grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces background information. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) +GAL 2 2 ll4j figs-go ἀνέβην 1 See how you translated the **I went up** in [2:1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 The phrase **according to** could: (1) indicate that Paul’s reason for going to Jerusalem was the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “because God told me to” or “because God revealed to me that I should” or “because God showed me that I should” (2) indicate Paul’s response to the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to a revelation” or “in accord with what God had revealed to me” GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” From 5756be0d49e26848cf38f684b2741119bf9e792d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 15:29:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 271/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index f0aaa210d1..d86c0db63f 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -122,9 +122,10 @@ GAL 2 2 e8xu grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** int GAL 2 2 ll4j figs-go ἀνέβην 1 See how you translated the **I went up** in [2:1](../02/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 The phrase **according to** could: (1) indicate that Paul’s reason for going to Jerusalem was the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “because God told me to” or “because God revealed to me that I should” or “because God showed me that I should” (2) indicate Paul’s response to the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to a revelation” or “in accord with what God had revealed to me” GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 2 g384 figs-explicit ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the phrase **set before** means to communicate something to someone for the purpose of receiving their opinion regarding it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “communicated to them” or “related to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” -GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-doublenegatives τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” -GAL 2 2 t6we μή πως εἰς κενὸν 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Alternate translation: “for no benefit” or “for nothing” +GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]] Alternate translation: “for no benefit” or “for nothing” GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. From 266b1045cb19e36c1a7cfb6ee09ee67a155db608 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 15:35:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 272/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index d86c0db63f..1f15351c87 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -124,8 +124,9 @@ GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 The phrase **according to** cou GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 2 g384 figs-explicit ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the phrase **set before** means to communicate something to someone for the purpose of receiving their opinion regarding it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “communicated to them” or “related to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” -GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]] Alternate translation: “for no benefit” or “for nothing” +GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “without positive results” or “for no purpose” GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. From ad8d8b0a586cff16b55f356a77271993ce10b191 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 15:37:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 273/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 1f15351c87..a4065fc70e 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -124,9 +124,9 @@ GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 The phrase **according to** cou GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 2 g384 figs-explicit ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the phrase **set before** means to communicate something to someone for the purpose of receiving their opinion regarding it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “communicated to them” or “related to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” -GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]] Alternate translation: “for no benefit” or “for nothing” +GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “without positive results” or “for no purpose” +GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “without positive results” or “for no purpose” or “for nothing” GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. From e7ae38168959a867d672a647014b5e4a12cfd5a5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 16:05:28 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 274/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index a4065fc70e..27072b8d1b 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -125,8 +125,8 @@ GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your langu GAL 2 2 g384 figs-explicit ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the phrase **set before** means to communicate something to someone for the purpose of receiving their opinion regarding it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “communicated to them” or “related to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Paul uses running as a metaphor to compare his work of preaching the gospel to a person running a race. Paul worked hard to preach the gospel. He wanted the gospel that he preached to have lasting effects. Alternate translation: “I did not want to work hard for God uselessly” or “I did not want my hard work to be wasted” [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “without positive results” or “for no purpose” or “for nothing” +GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** metaphorically to mean “work.” Here Paul specifically means that he worked for the advancement of the gospel among the Philippians. Paul uses the word run to bring to the Philippians’ minds the image of a runner who is racing toward a finish line in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. But if this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I did not work for the advancement of the gospel uselessly” or “I did not work for the spread of the good news for nothing” or “I did not run the race uselessly”( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. From 6027c625e801ac7a7860942acb9b531e4a07c9cc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 16:08:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 276/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 56f8e744e0..0a9b2869da 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -66,15 +66,15 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 7 h713 figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀγάπην 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **love** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “loving others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 1 8 tlhv grammar-connect-logic-result ταῦτα γὰρ ὑμῖν ὑπάρχοντα καὶ πλεονάζοντα 1 The word **For** here indicates that Peter is giving a reason why his audience should obey the command given in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “Because these things existing and increasing in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 1 8 ecc5 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ταῦτα γὰρ ὑμῖν ὑπάρχοντα καὶ πλεονάζοντα, οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους καθίστησιν 1 Peter is describing a conditional situation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “For if these things are existing and increasing in you, then they will cause you to be neither barren nor unfruitful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -2PE 1 8 jz77 figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2PE 1 8 jz77 figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these {things}** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 1 8 l7yj figs-metaphor οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους καθίστησιν 1 Peter speaks of a person who does not possess these qualities as if he were a field that will not produce a crop. If that is confusing in your language, you could use a different metaphor with that meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “cause you to be neither unproductive nor useless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 8 qcav figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους καθίστησιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in positive terms. Alternate translation: “cause you to produce and bear fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 2PE 1 8 f9qm figs-doublet οὐκ ἀργοὺς οὐδὲ ἀκάρπους 1 The words **barren** and **unfruitful** mean basically the same thing. In combination with the negatives **neither** and **nor**, they are used together to emphasize that this person will not be unproductive but will experience great benefits from knowing Jesus. If it is confusing in your language to use two words together that mean the same thing, you could just use one word with that meaning. Alternate translation: “not unproductive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2PE 1 8 ppd8 figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἐπίγνωσιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “in your knowing our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 1 9 k6lv grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** indicates that Peter is giving another reason why his audience should obey the command given in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Peter gave a positive reason in [1:8](../01/08.md) and gives a negative reason here. Alternate translation: “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 1 9 gg2c figs-genericnoun ᾧ…μὴ πάρεστιν ταῦτα, τυφλός ἐστιν 1 he in whom these things are not present Here, **he** does not refer to a specific person, but to any person who does not have these things. Alternate translation: “anyone who does not have these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -2PE 1 9 vycf figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 The phrase **these things** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2PE 1 9 h6fn figs-metaphor τυφλός ἐστιν μυωπάζων 1 is blind, nearsighted In this metaphor, Peter speaks of a person who does not possess these qualities as if the person were **blind** or **nearsighted**. He means this in a spiritual sense, that this person cannot see what is spiritually important. If that is confusing in your language, you could use a different metaphor with that meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is like a blind or shortsighted person who cannot see their importance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 1 9 vycf figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 The phrase **these {things}** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2PE 1 9 h6fn figs-metaphor τυφλός ἐστιν μυωπάζων 1 is blind, nearsighted In this metaphor, Peter speaks of a person who does not possess these qualities as if the person were **blind** or **nearsighted**. He means this in a spiritual sense, that this person cannot see what is spiritually important. If that is confusing in your language, you could use a different metaphor with that meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he … is like a blind or shortsighted person who cannot see their importance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 9 xenf figs-hendiadys τυφλός ἐστιν μυωπάζων 1 Although the words **blind** and **nearsighted** have similar meanings, **blind** is more extreme than **nearsighted,** and a person cannot be both at the same time. If it is confusing in your language to describe someone using both of these words in this way, you could use a word like “or” between them or show how they might work together. Alternate translation: “he … is blind or nearsighted” or “he … is blindly nearsighted” or “he … is so nearsighted that he is blind to what is spiritually important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 2PE 1 9 i0hq figs-abstractnouns λήθην λαβὼν τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **forgetfulness** in this phrase with a verb. Alternate translation: “having forgotten the cleansing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 1 9 gq4d figs-abstractnouns τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ τῶν πάλαι αὐτοῦ ἁμαρτιῶν 1 of the cleansing from his past sins If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **cleansing** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “that God has cleansed him from his old sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From c2540d9b70bb88f08ef3d5ed0a2d5959400a196d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 16:21:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 277/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 27072b8d1b..4190ff478d 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your langu GAL 2 2 g384 figs-explicit ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the phrase **set before** means to communicate something to someone for the purpose of receiving their opinion regarding it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “communicated to them” or “related to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** metaphorically to mean “work.” Here Paul specifically means that he worked for the advancement of the gospel among the Philippians. Paul uses the word run to bring to the Philippians’ minds the image of a runner who is racing toward a finish line in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. But if this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I did not work for the advancement of the gospel uselessly” or “I did not work for the spread of the good news for nothing” or “I did not run the race uselessly”( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** metaphorically to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” From eb1d4b911bec0776a803ad94b9c03ba310ae73ac Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 16:30:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 278/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 4190ff478d..211fd48433 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -123,6 +123,7 @@ GAL 2 2 ll4j figs-go ἀνέβην 1 See how you translated the **I went up** GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 The phrase **according to** could: (1) indicate that Paul’s reason for going to Jerusalem was the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “because God told me to” or “because God revealed to me that I should” or “because God showed me that I should” (2) indicate Paul’s response to the **revelation**. Alternate translation: “in response to a revelation” or “in accord with what God had revealed to me” GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 2 g384 figs-explicit ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the phrase **set before** means to communicate something to someone for the purpose of receiving their opinion regarding it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “communicated to them” or “related to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 2 ypg1 figs-ellipsis κατ’ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but privately I set it before the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** metaphorically to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 6ce3526a74b589f06f22681a515fb491d7690043 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 16:39:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 279/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 211fd48433..05f0711418 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 The phrase **according to** cou GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 2 g384 figs-explicit ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the phrase **set before** means to communicate something to someone for the purpose of receiving their opinion regarding it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “communicated to them” or “related to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 2 ypg1 figs-ellipsis κατ’ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but privately I set it before the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as the important overseers of the believers” or “with those who were considered leaders of the church” +GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as leaders of the believers in Jerusalem” or “to those who were leaders of the church in Jerusalem” or “to the men who seemed to be influential” GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** metaphorically to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” From 761f70801502e911732c36f259d735f864832b08 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 16:40:26 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 280/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 05f0711418..19be1e3446 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ GAL 2 2 szwl κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 The phrase **according to** cou GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “revealed”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 2 g384 figs-explicit ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the phrase **set before** means to communicate something to someone for the purpose of receiving their opinion regarding it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “communicated to them” or “related to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 2 ypg1 figs-ellipsis κατ’ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but privately I set it before the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to those who were recognized as leaders of the believers in Jerusalem” or “to those who were leaders of the church in Jerusalem” or “to the men who seemed to be influential” +GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to the men who seemed to be influential” or “to those who were recognized as leaders of the believers in Jerusalem” or “to those who were leaders of the church in Jerusalem” GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** metaphorically to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” From 19867f10607d8d4913ee5df40216c6c92050a3f7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 16:44:22 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 281/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 19be1e3446..cf1e5f14b5 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -125,8 +125,8 @@ GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your langu GAL 2 2 g384 figs-explicit ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the phrase **set before** means to communicate something to someone for the purpose of receiving their opinion regarding it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “communicated to them” or “related to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 2 ypg1 figs-ellipsis κατ’ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but privately I set it before the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to the men who seemed to be influential” or “to those who were recognized as leaders of the believers in Jerusalem” or “to those who were leaders of the church in Jerusalem” -GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain Paul feared that if he did not explain the gospel privately to the leaders, they could misunderstand the gospel, or others would misrepresent him. The double negative can be represented positively: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** metaphorically to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” From 8d364ee1259000df193825dd05ebf4c005289074 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 18:01:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 282/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 0a9b2869da..9d78bc9194 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -78,21 +78,21 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 9 xenf figs-hendiadys τυφλός ἐστιν μυωπάζων 1 Although the words **blind** and **nearsighted** have similar meanings, **blind** is more extreme than **nearsighted,** and a person cannot be both at the same time. If it is confusing in your language to describe someone using both of these words in this way, you could use a word like “or” between them or show how they might work together. Alternate translation: “he … is blind or nearsighted” or “he … is blindly nearsighted” or “he … is so nearsighted that he is blind to what is spiritually important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 2PE 1 9 i0hq figs-abstractnouns λήθην λαβὼν τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **forgetfulness** in this phrase with a verb. Alternate translation: “having forgotten the cleansing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 1 9 gq4d figs-abstractnouns τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ τῶν πάλαι αὐτοῦ ἁμαρτιῶν 1 of the cleansing from his past sins If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **cleansing** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “that God has cleansed him from his old sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 1 9 gopx figs-metaphor τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ τῶν πάλαι αὐτοῦ ἁμαρτιῶν. 1 Peter is speaking figuratively of forgiving sin as if sin were something that made people dirty and thus required **cleansing** from God. Alternate translation: “the forgiving of his past sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 1 9 gopx figs-metaphor τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ τῶν πάλαι αὐτοῦ ἁμαρτιῶν. 1 Peter is speaking figuratively of forgiving sin as if sin were something that made people dirty and thus required **cleansing** from God. Alternate translation: “of the forgiving of his past sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 10 ob38 grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Peter uses **Therefore** to introduce a description of what his readers should do as a result of what he has just said. He is referring specifically to the two reasons for obedience given in [1:8–9](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “Because of these reasons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -2PE 1 10 xfdb figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Peter is using the term **brothers** figuratively as a way to directly address his fellow believers in Jesus. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 1 10 xfdb figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Peter is using the term **brothers** as a way to directly address his fellow believers in Jesus. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 10 ot7y figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Peter is using the term **brothers** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Be sure that this is clear in your translation so that your readers do not get the impression that Peter is addressing only men. If you use a non-figurative word such as “believers” to translate the metaphor **brothers**, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you retain the metaphor, you could state “my brothers and sisters.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2PE 1 10 raa1 figs-doublet βεβαίαν ὑμῶν τὴν κλῆσιν καὶ ἐκλογὴν ποιεῖσθαι 1 to make your calling and election sure The words **calling** and **election** share similar meanings and both refer to God choosing believers to belong to him. Peter uses them together to emphasize this idea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use just one word and provide the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “make sure that God has really chosen you to belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -2PE 1 10 pm78 writing-pronouns ταῦτα γὰρ ποιοῦντες 1 Here, **these things** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2PE 1 10 pm78 writing-pronouns ταῦτα γὰρ ποιοῦντες 1 Here, **these {things}** refers back to the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 1 10 xx39 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ταῦτα γὰρ ποιοῦντες οὐ μὴ πταίσητέ ποτε 1 Peter is describing a conditional situation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “For if you do these things, then you will certainly not ever stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -2PE 1 10 kd2t οὐ μὴ πταίσητέ ποτε 1 The combination of words here expresses strong emphatic negation. Alternate translation: “you will most certainly never stumble” +2PE 1 10 kd2t οὐ μὴ πταίσητέ ποτε 1 The combination of the words **certainly not ever** here expresses strong emphatic negation. Alternate translation: “you will most certainly never stumble” 2PE 1 10 jcv9 figs-metaphor οὐ μὴ πταίσητέ ποτε 1 you will not ever stumble Here, **stumble** could mean: (1) abandoning faith in Christ. Alternate translation: “you will certainly not abandon faith in Christ” (2) committing sin. Alternate translation: “you will certainly not practice sinful behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 11 xvh1 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** indicates that Peter is giving a reason why his readers should want to obey the commands given in [1:5–7](../01/05.md) and [1:10](../01/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 1 11 sl6c figs-explicit οὕτως 1 Here, **in this way** refers back to the way of living that includes the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 1 11 f45v figs-activepassive πλουσίως ἐπιχορηγηθήσεται ὑμῖν ἡ εἴσοδος εἰς τὴν αἰώνιον βασιλείαν 1 will be richly provided to you the entry into the eternal kingdom If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God will richly provide to you the entrance into the eternal kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 1 11 k1e4 figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν αἰώνιον βασιλείαν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verbal phrase, such as “where our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ rules.” Alternate translation: “into the eternal place where our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 1 12 du69 grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Connecting Statement: Peter uses **Therefore** to introduce the purpose of his letter. In order to encourage his readers to do everything he has said in [1:5–10](../01/05.md), and especially because of the promise in [1:11](../01/11.md), he wants to keep reminding them about these things. Use a natural form in your language to show that this introduces a result or purpose for saying what came before. Alternate translation: “Because these things are very important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -2PE 1 12 xxjq writing-pronouns τούτων 1 Here, **these things** refers back to what Peter has stated in the previous verses, specifically to faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2PE 1 12 xxjq writing-pronouns τούτων 1 Here, **these {things}** refers back to what Peter has stated in the previous verses, specifically to faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 1 12 onqh figs-activepassive ἐστηριγμένους ἐν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you learned well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 1 12 l2kh figs-metaphor ἐστηριγμένους ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ 1 you are strong in the present truth Here, **established** is used figuratively to refer to one being firmly committed to something. Alternate translation: “you strongly believe the truth that you now have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 12 jys8 ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ 1 Here, **in** has the meaning of “in reference to” or “with regard to.” Alternate translation: “in reference to the present truth” From d2f082259f23f66bc6101ad393be8bc116d4091d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 18:04:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 283/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 9d78bc9194..c711a6b632 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -108,10 +108,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 14 yzag καθὼς καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς, ἐδήλωσέν μοι 1 Suggested footnote: “Peter may be referring here to what Jesus told him, as recorded in John 21:18–19.” 2PE 1 15 aau5 grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ καὶ 1 **Likewise** here could mean that: (1) this statement is in addition to what Peter just said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Moreover” (2) this statement is contrasting what he just said in the previous verse with what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2PE 1 15 xz8d figs-abstractnouns ἑκάστοτε, ἔχειν ὑμᾶς…τὴν τούτων μνήμην ποιεῖσθαι 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **remembrance** in this phrase with the verb “remind.” Alternate translation: “to remind you of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 1 15 c2iw writing-pronouns τούτων 1 of these things Here, **these things** refers to what Peter has said in the previous verses, specifically the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2PE 1 15 c2iw writing-pronouns τούτων 1 of these things Here, **these {things}** refers to what Peter has said in the previous verses, specifically the faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 1 15 ivw6 figs-euphemism μετὰ τὴν ἐμὴν ἔξοδον 1 after my departure Peter uses the word **departure** as a nice way to speak of his death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more common euphemism in your language, or state it directly. Alternate translation: “after my passing” or “after I die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 2PE 1 16 k3rm grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: **For** indicates that in [1:16–21](../01/16.md) Peter explains to the believers why they should remember “these things,” which were mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -2PE 1 16 vc99 figs-exclusive ἐγνωρίσαμεν 1 we have not followed Here, **we** refers to Peter and the other apostles. It does not refer to his readers. Alternate translation: “we apostles did not follow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +2PE 1 16 vc99 figs-exclusive οὐ…ἐγνωρίσαμεν 1 we have not followed Here, **we** refers to Peter and the other apostles. It does not refer to his readers. Alternate translation: “we apostles did not follow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 2PE 1 16 jwy8 figs-hendiadys τὴν…δύναμιν καὶ παρουσίαν 1 the power and coming The words **power** and **coming** work together to refer to the same thing; they may be translated as a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the powerful coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 2PE 1 16 zs6v τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ δύναμιν καὶ παρουσίαν 1 coming of our Lord Jesus Christ In this clause Peter refers to the second coming of the Lord Jesus to earth. This future event was foreshadowed by the powerful appearance of Jesus known as the “transfiguration,” which is described in Matthew 17:1–8, Mark 9:1–8, and Luke 9:28–36. Peter was an eyewitness of that event. 2PE 1 16 v4kd figs-exclusive τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 of our Lord Jesus Christ Here, **our** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 27ca6050d4e1c7d35660024cb4890a61b8d29eb2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 18:08:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 284/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index c711a6b632..be1e1bde65 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 21 yxdx figs-abstractnouns οὐ…θελήματι ἀνθρώπου ἠνέχθη προφητεία ποτέ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **will** with a verbal phrase, such as “what a man desires.” Alternate translation: “no prophecy was ever made according to what a man desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 1 21 x2hv figs-gendernotations θελήματι ἀνθρώπου 1 Peter is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “by human desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2PE 1 21 mh2s figs-metaphor ὑπὸ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου φερόμενοι, ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 1 men spoke from God being carried along by the Holy Spirit Peter speaks figuratively of the **Holy Spirit** helping the prophets to write what God wanted them to write as if the Holy Spirit **carried** them from one place to another. Alternate translation: “men spoke from God by the Holy Spirit directing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2PE 1 21 x1xw figs-ellipsis ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 1 In this phrase, Peter is leaving out a word that it would need in many languages in order to be complete. If this word is required in your language, it can be supplied from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “men spoke prophecy from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +2PE 1 21 x1xw figs-ellipsis ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 In this phrase, Peter is leaving out a word that it would need in many languages in order to be complete. If this word is required in your language, it can be supplied from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “spoke prophecy from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2PE 2 intro mv79 0 # 2 Peter 2 General Notes


## Structure and formatting


1. Prediction of false teachers (2:1–3)
1. Examples of divine judgment (2:4–10a)
1. Description and denunciation of false teachers (2:10b–22)

Peter continues this letter in [2:1–3](../02/01.md) by predicting that false teachers will try to deceive the believers, just as false prophets did during the time true prophets were writing the Old Testament. Then in [2:4–10a](../02/04.md) Peter describes examples of God punishing those who acted similarly to the coming false teachers. Peter then closes this section in [2:10b–22](../02/10.md) by describing the wicked character and deeds of these false teachers.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh

“Flesh” is a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. It is not the physical part of man that is sinful. “Flesh” represents the human nature that rejects all things godly and desires what is sinful. This is the condition of all humans before they receive the Holy Spirit by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### Implicit information

There are several analogies in [2:4–8](../02/04.md) that are difficult to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. Further explanation may be necessary. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 1 us8u grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 The term translated **Now** could refer to: (1) a new topic expressed by **Now** in the ULT. (2) a contrast between the false prophets in this clause and the true Old Testament prophets mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 2PE 2 1 l2cg figs-explicit ἐν τῷ λαῷ 1 false prophets also came to the people, as false teachers will also come to you Here, **the people** refers specifically to the Israelites. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From e5a61a2cc83af6a3497f863820744e63e2adecb1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 18:40:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 285/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 9fdba704cb..18f3b5ecd1 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -987,7 +987,7 @@ ACT 7 15 w2sm figs-explicit ἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ ACT 7 15 fe56 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 he and our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Jacob’s sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 16 slg3 figs-activepassive μετετέθησαν εἰς Συχὲμ, καὶ ἐτέθησαν 1 they were carried over … and laid If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants brought his body and his son’s bodies to Shechem and buried them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 16 pnur translate-names Συχὲμ 1 **Shechem** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 7 16 la8a translate-bmoney τιμῆς ἀργυρίου 1 for a price in silver In biblical times, people used **silver** as money. Alternate translation: “for a sum of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) +ACT 7 16 la8a figs-metonymy τιμῆς ἀργυρίου 1 for a price in silver Stephen is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used **silver** as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for a sum of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 16 pk1p translate-names τῶν υἱῶν Ἑμμὼρ 1 **Hamor** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 7 17 tuq2 figs-events καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας…ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη 1 And as the time of the promise … approached, the people increased and multiplied In your language it may be helpful to say that the people **increased and multiplied** before saying that **the time of the promise** approached. Alternate translation: “the people increased and multiplied in Egypt as the time of the promise … approached” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) ACT 7 17 kh8g figs-personification καθὼς…ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 Stephen is speaking figuratively of this **time** as if it were a person and could have **approached** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to fulfill the promise he had sworn to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -2712,7 +2712,7 @@ ACT 19 21 rdz4 figs-idiom δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν 1 it is ACT 19 22 cy6f translate-names Ἔραστον 1 Erastus The word **Erastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 23 nb3p figs-litotes τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 19 23 rwf2 translate-names τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 the Way As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in [19:9](../19/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 24 cg16 writing-participants Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι…παρείχετο 1 a certain silversmith named Demetrius Luke is using the phrase **a certain** to introduce **Demetrius** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a man named Demetrius … who was bringing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 19 24 cg16 writing-participants τις…ἀργυροκόπος…παρείχετο 1 a certain silversmith named Demetrius Luke is using the phrase **a certain silversmith** to introduce **Demetrius** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a silversmith … who was bringing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 19 24 opb9 translate-names Δημήτριος 1 The word **Demetrius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος, παρείχετο 1 Luke provides this background information about **Demetrius** to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He was a silversmith who made silver shrines of Artemis, and he was bringing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 19 24 wg95 figs-extrainfo ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess **Artemis**. (She was known as Diana in Latin; she was a false goddess of fertility.) Since Demetrius describes this temple in verse 27, you do not need to provide information about it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) From bf4c5084cd945ad7c32d4ce89fff55654bea8168 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 18:43:03 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 286/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 18f3b5ecd1..8b23a24cb5 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1440,7 +1440,7 @@ ACT 9 24 gnm1 figs-infostructure ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐ ACT 9 24 lv62 figs-activepassive ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν 1 But their plan became known to Saul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Saul learned about their plot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 9 24 cy9n figs-explicit παρετηροῦντο…τὰς πύλας…ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀνέλωσιν 1 indeed they were watching the gates The city of Damascus had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through **the gates** in this wall. Saul’s enemies expected that he would try to leave the city eventually and they hoped to catch him and kill him when he did. Alternate translation: “they were … watching the gates in the city wall … in order to kill him when he tried to leave the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 24 b0gv figs-metonymy τὰς πύλας 1 Luke is using **the gates** figuratively to mean the people going through the gates. Alternate translation: “to see who was going through the gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 9 24 aezc figs-merism ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς 1 Luke is figuratively using the two parts of a full day, **day** and **night**, to mean all the time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (1) Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +ACT 9 24 aezc figs-merism ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς 1 Luke is figuratively using the two parts of a full day, **day** and **night**, to mean all the time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 9 25 lc8m figs-explicit οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his disciples These **disciples** were people who had believed Saul’s message and become committed followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the people who had believed Saul’s message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 26 e38m figs-hyperbole πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν 1 but they were all afraid of him Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 9 27 abca writing-pronouns Βαρναβᾶς…ἐπιλαβόμενος αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστόλους; καὶ διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς πῶς ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ εἶδεν τὸν Κύριον, καὶ ὅτι ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ…ἐπαρρησιάσατο 1 told them The pronoun **him** refers to Saul in every instance. The pronoun **he** refers to Saul in the first and third instances and to **the Lord** in the second instance. The pronoun **them** refers to **the apostles**. Alternate translation: “taking hold of Saul, Barnabas brought him to the apostles and told the apostles how Saul had seen the Lord on the road and that the Lord had spoken to Saul … Saul had spoken boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -2714,7 +2714,7 @@ ACT 19 23 nb3p figs-litotes τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no ACT 19 23 rwf2 translate-names τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 the Way As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in [19:9](../19/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 24 cg16 writing-participants τις…ἀργυροκόπος…παρείχετο 1 a certain silversmith named Demetrius Luke is using the phrase **a certain silversmith** to introduce **Demetrius** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a silversmith … who was bringing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 19 24 opb9 translate-names Δημήτριος 1 The word **Demetrius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος, παρείχετο 1 Luke provides this background information about **Demetrius** to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He was a silversmith who made silver shrines of Artemis, and he was bringing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background τις…ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 Luke provides this background information about **Demetrius** to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 19 24 wg95 figs-extrainfo ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess **Artemis**. (She was known as Diana in Latin; she was a false goddess of fertility.) Since Demetrius describes this temple in verse 27, you do not need to provide information about it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) ACT 19 24 nwt7 translate-unknown ἀργυροκόπος 1 a silversmith A **silversmith** is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry.Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of worker that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 24 p58m figs-litotes οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν 1 brought in not a little business Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great deal of business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) From aba6d2796d6d7441f27263b5a5139a8da0faeb00 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 18:43:56 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 287/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 8b23a24cb5..d54869d6a5 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2865,7 +2865,7 @@ ACT 20 28 hjh6 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣ ACT 20 28 cx69 figs-rpronouns τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood The word translated **obtained** means to make something one’s own. The pronoun **he** may refer to Jesus, and this would mean that Jesus made the people of the church his own by dying for them. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God, whom Jesus made his own by dying for them” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 28 r66x figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 This could also mean that God made the people of the church his own by sending his Son to die for them. In that case the translation would be “through the blood of his Own” and Paul would be using the adjective **own** as a noun to mean God’s own Son. Alternate translation: “the people of the church, whom God made his own through the death of his own Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 20 28 ybzd figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the term **church** refers to the people who belong to the church. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 20 29 ka6u figs-metaphor εἰσελεύσονται…λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου 1 vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the flock This is a picture of people who teach false doctrine and who harm the community of believers as though they were **wolves** that eat the sheep of the **flock**. Alternate translation: “many enemies will come among you and try to harm the community of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 29 ka6u figs-metaphor εἰσελεύσονται…λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου 1 vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the flock Paul is continuing to speak as if the believers were a **flock** of sheep and as if the false teachers he describes in the next verse are **vicious wolves**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “false teachers will come to your group of believers and they will harm many of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 30 ftf4 figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν 1 to draw away the disciples after them A false teacher convincing believers to start believing his false teaching is spoken of as if he were leading sheep away from the flock to follow him. Alternate translation: “in order to convince people who are disciples of Christ to become his disciples instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 31 q2nl γρηγορεῖτε, μνημονεύοντες 1 be alert, remembering Alternate translation: “be on guard and remember” or “be on guard as you remember” ACT 20 31 ll64 figs-metaphor γρηγορεῖτε 1 be alert Christian leaders being **alert** about anyone that may harm the community of believers is spoken of as if they were guards in an army watching out for the enemy army. Alternate translation: “be awake” or “watch out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 1725c47b346dab8fc16adeaadce3c6f3f64d5901 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 18:46:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 288/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 ++++- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d54869d6a5..f191812b5a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2866,7 +2866,10 @@ ACT 20 28 cx69 figs-rpronouns τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣ ACT 20 28 r66x figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 This could also mean that God made the people of the church his own by sending his Son to die for them. In that case the translation would be “through the blood of his Own” and Paul would be using the adjective **own** as a noun to mean God’s own Son. Alternate translation: “the people of the church, whom God made his own through the death of his own Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 20 28 ybzd figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the term **church** refers to the people who belong to the church. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 29 ka6u figs-metaphor εἰσελεύσονται…λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου 1 vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the flock Paul is continuing to speak as if the believers were a **flock** of sheep and as if the false teachers he describes in the next verse are **vicious wolves**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “false teachers will come to your group of believers and they will harm many of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 30 ftf4 figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν 1 to draw away the disciples after them A false teacher convincing believers to start believing his false teaching is spoken of as if he were leading sheep away from the flock to follow him. Alternate translation: “in order to convince people who are disciples of Christ to become his disciples instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 30 cbq1 figs-rpronouns καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν 1 Paul is adding the word **yourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “From within your very own group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +ACT 20 30 esme figs-metaphor ἀναστήσονται ἄνδρες λαλοῦντες διεστραμμένα 1 In this context, **arise** means to take action to get an enterprise under way, not to get up from a sitting or lying position. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “men will begin to speak perverted things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 30 yn8u figs-activepassive διεστραμμένα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “distortions of the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 20 30 ftf4 figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν 1 to draw away the disciples after them Paul is speaking as if these false teachers would physically **draw away** people **after them** as they left the fellowship of true believers in Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to influence disciples to follower their teaching instead of Jesus’ teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 31 q2nl γρηγορεῖτε, μνημονεύοντες 1 be alert, remembering Alternate translation: “be on guard and remember” or “be on guard as you remember” ACT 20 31 ll64 figs-metaphor γρηγορεῖτε 1 be alert Christian leaders being **alert** about anyone that may harm the community of believers is spoken of as if they were guards in an army watching out for the enemy army. Alternate translation: “be awake” or “watch out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 31 pvt6 μνημονεύοντες ὅτι 1 Remembering that Alternate translation: “continuing to remember that” or “not forgetting that” From 78062686e5e84d2ab6f18fca5decf0c343725051 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 18:49:37 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 289/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 10 ++++------ 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index f191812b5a..f1b893b08d 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2870,12 +2870,10 @@ ACT 20 30 cbq1 figs-rpronouns καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν 1 Paul is a ACT 20 30 esme figs-metaphor ἀναστήσονται ἄνδρες λαλοῦντες διεστραμμένα 1 In this context, **arise** means to take action to get an enterprise under way, not to get up from a sitting or lying position. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “men will begin to speak perverted things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 30 yn8u figs-activepassive διεστραμμένα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “distortions of the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 30 ftf4 figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν 1 to draw away the disciples after them Paul is speaking as if these false teachers would physically **draw away** people **after them** as they left the fellowship of true believers in Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to influence disciples to follower their teaching instead of Jesus’ teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 31 q2nl γρηγορεῖτε, μνημονεύοντες 1 be alert, remembering Alternate translation: “be on guard and remember” or “be on guard as you remember” -ACT 20 31 ll64 figs-metaphor γρηγορεῖτε 1 be alert Christian leaders being **alert** about anyone that may harm the community of believers is spoken of as if they were guards in an army watching out for the enemy army. Alternate translation: “be awake” or “watch out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 31 pvt6 μνημονεύοντες ὅτι 1 Remembering that Alternate translation: “continuing to remember that” or “not forgetting that” -ACT 20 31 rt1h figs-hyperbole τριετίαν νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν, οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν 1 for three years I did not stop admonishing … night and day Paul did not teach them continuously **for three years**, but over the space of three years. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 20 31 hs1m οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν 1 I did not stop admonishing If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not stop**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I continued to warn” -ACT 20 31 rvh6 figs-metonymy μετὰ δακρύων 1 with tears Here, **tears** refers to Paul’s crying because of the strong emotion of concern he felt while he was warning the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 31 hs1m figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν 1 I did not stop admonishing If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative word **stop**. Alternate translation: “I continued to warn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +ACT 20 31 rvh6 figs-metonymy μετὰ δακρύων 1 with tears Paul is referring figuratively to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds **tears** of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with deep emotion” or “with genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 31 rt1h figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 for three years I did not stop admonishing … night and day Paul is figuratively using the two parts of a full day, **night** and **day**, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +ACT 20 31 fc3b figs-hyperbole νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 Paul says **night and day** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “without ever giving up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 20 32 ylm3 figs-metonymy παρατίθεμαι ὑμᾶς τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 I am entrusting you to God and to the word of his grace Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “I ask God to take care of you and that he will help you to keep believing the message I spoke to you about his grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 32 vnb2 παρατίθεμαι 1 I am entrusting To “entrust” something to someone is to give them the responsibility of taking care of someone or something. ACT 20 32 s7rf figs-metaphor τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι 1 which is able to build you up A person’s faith becoming stronger is spoken of as if the person were a wall and someone were building him higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you become stronger and stronger in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 140653ca3a97be2684394f9d2566cf6387737690 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 18:52:58 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 290/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 11 ++++++----- 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index f1b893b08d..17e745d99a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2874,11 +2874,12 @@ ACT 20 31 hs1m figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετ ACT 20 31 rvh6 figs-metonymy μετὰ δακρύων 1 with tears Paul is referring figuratively to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds **tears** of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with deep emotion” or “with genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 31 rt1h figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 for three years I did not stop admonishing … night and day Paul is figuratively using the two parts of a full day, **night** and **day**, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 20 31 fc3b figs-hyperbole νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 Paul says **night and day** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “without ever giving up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 20 32 ylm3 figs-metonymy παρατίθεμαι ὑμᾶς τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 I am entrusting you to God and to the word of his grace Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “I ask God to take care of you and that he will help you to keep believing the message I spoke to you about his grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 20 32 vnb2 παρατίθεμαι 1 I am entrusting To “entrust” something to someone is to give them the responsibility of taking care of someone or something. -ACT 20 32 s7rf figs-metaphor τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι 1 which is able to build you up A person’s faith becoming stronger is spoken of as if the person were a wall and someone were building him higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you become stronger and stronger in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 32 zvz8 figs-personification δοῦναι τὴν κληρονομίαν 1 to give you the inheritance This speaks about the **word of his grace** as if it were God himself that would give the inheritance to believers. Alternate translation: “God will give you the inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ACT 20 32 x5jy figs-metaphor τὴν κληρονομίαν 1 the inheritance The blessings that God gives believers is spoken of as if they were money or property that a child inherits from his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 32 zvz8 figs-personification τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ, τῷ δυναμένῳ 1 to give you the inheritance Paul is speaking of the **word** of God’s **grace** as if it were a living thing that was **able** to do the things he describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to God who, through the word of his grace, is able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 20 32 ylm3 figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 I am entrusting you to God and to the word of his grace Paul is using the term **word** to mean the message about God’s **grace** that Jesus and his apostles shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the message about his grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 32 tbeo figs-abstractnouns τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the message about how God has graciously saved us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 20 32 s7rf figs-metaphor τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι 1 which is able to build you up Paul is speaking as if these believers were a wall or building or other structure and the **word** of God’s **grace** was making them higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you more confident and mature in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 32 x5jy figs-metaphor τὴν κληρονομίαν 1 the inheritance Paul is speaking as if the blessings that God gives believers were money or property that a child inherits from a father. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s blessings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 32 sdlc figs-activepassive τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God has sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 33 yw8a ἀργυρίου…οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα 1 I coveted no one’s silver Alternate translation: “I did not desire anyone’s silver” or “I did not want for myself anyone’s silver” ACT 20 33 ipq5 ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς 1 no one’s silver, gold, or clothing Here, **clothing** is considered a treasure; the more you had, the richer you were. ACT 20 34 f5a3 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε 1 You yourselves know The word **yourselves** is used here to add emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) From c469e37b5625acb1d6c940755f52e8bfa4f3e8b8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 18:55:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 291/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 6 ++++-- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 17e745d99a..a42b4b51eb 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2880,8 +2880,10 @@ ACT 20 32 tbeo figs-abstractnouns τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτ ACT 20 32 s7rf figs-metaphor τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι 1 which is able to build you up Paul is speaking as if these believers were a wall or building or other structure and the **word** of God’s **grace** was making them higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you more confident and mature in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 32 x5jy figs-metaphor τὴν κληρονομίαν 1 the inheritance Paul is speaking as if the blessings that God gives believers were money or property that a child inherits from a father. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s blessings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 32 sdlc figs-activepassive τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God has sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 20 33 yw8a ἀργυρίου…οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα 1 I coveted no one’s silver Alternate translation: “I did not desire anyone’s silver” or “I did not want for myself anyone’s silver” -ACT 20 33 ipq5 ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς 1 no one’s silver, gold, or clothing Here, **clothing** is considered a treasure; the more you had, the richer you were. +ACT 20 33 yw8a ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα 1 I coveted no one’s silver The implication is that Paul did not desire any of these things and try to get them by charging for his ministry to the Ephesians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I did not insist on being paid for my work” or “I did not try to become wealthy by teaching you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 20 33 o5jp figs-doublenegatives ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative phrase **no one** and the negative word **coveted**. Alternate translation: “I served you freely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +ACT 20 33 yl6k figs-metonymy ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου 1 Paul is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used **silver** and **gold** as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 33 ipq5 figs-merism ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς 1 no one’s silver, gold, or clothing In this culture, owning expensive **clothing** was a way of storing and displaying wealth. Paul is referring to wealth by naming two of its major components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the wealth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 20 34 f5a3 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε 1 You yourselves know The word **yourselves** is used here to add emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 20 34 ja5v figs-synecdoche ταῖς χρείαις μου, καὶ τοῖς…ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται 1 these hands ministered to my needs and to those who The word **hands** here represents the entire person. Alternate translation: “I worked to earn money and pay for my own expenses and for those who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 35 wn8j κοπιῶντας δεῖ ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 it is necessary to work hard to help those who are weak Alternate translation: “you should work so as to have money to help people who are in need” From 9ac092e2334e419132c5256e8cd1c2e0f8bf1915 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 19:21:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 292/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index cf1e5f14b5..da3282c1b4 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ GAL 2 2 zvkg figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀποκάλυψιν 1 If your langu GAL 2 2 g384 figs-explicit ἀνεθέμην αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the phrase **set before** means to communicate something to someone for the purpose of receiving their opinion regarding it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “communicated to them” or “related to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 2 ypg1 figs-ellipsis κατ’ ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but privately I set it before the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alternate translation: “to the men who seemed to be influential” or “to those who were recognized as leaders of the believers in Jerusalem” or “to those who were leaders of the church in Jerusalem” -GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “to ensure I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 6033d9e05628205a14340da60b69cd95fd6ca3c3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 19:30:09 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 293/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 5 +++-- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index a42b4b51eb..f1a58bb53e 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2884,8 +2884,9 @@ ACT 20 33 yw8a ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, ACT 20 33 o5jp figs-doublenegatives ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative phrase **no one** and the negative word **coveted**. Alternate translation: “I served you freely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 20 33 yl6k figs-metonymy ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου 1 Paul is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used **silver** and **gold** as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 33 ipq5 figs-merism ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς 1 no one’s silver, gold, or clothing In this culture, owning expensive **clothing** was a way of storing and displaying wealth. Paul is referring to wealth by naming two of its major components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the wealth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -ACT 20 34 f5a3 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε 1 You yourselves know The word **yourselves** is used here to add emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -ACT 20 34 ja5v figs-synecdoche ταῖς χρείαις μου, καὶ τοῖς…ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται 1 these hands ministered to my needs and to those who The word **hands** here represents the entire person. Alternate translation: “I worked to earn money and pay for my own expenses and for those who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 34 f5a3 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε 1 You yourselves know Paul is adding the word **yourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +ACT 20 34 ja5v figs-personification ταῖς χρείαις μου…ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται 1 these hands ministered to my needs and to those who Paul is speaking of his **hands** as if they were a living thing that **ministered** to his **needs**, that is, worked to pay his expenses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I worked with my hands to pay my own expenses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 20 34 izuu figs-ellipsis καὶ τοῖς οὖσι μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and to the needs of those who were with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 20 35 wn8j κοπιῶντας δεῖ ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 it is necessary to work hard to help those who are weak Alternate translation: “you should work so as to have money to help people who are in need” ACT 20 35 p3n8 figs-nominaladj τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 those who are weak You can state the nominal adjective **weak** as an adjective. Alternate translation: “weak people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 20 35 dpu1 ἀσθενούντων 1 weak Alternate translation: “sick” From 18dab01826b9e68e8eb56cd96e5914d9fd0dc364 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 19:36:46 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 294/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 12 +++++++----- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index f1a58bb53e..eeb35159b4 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2887,11 +2887,13 @@ ACT 20 33 ipq5 figs-merism ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματ ACT 20 34 f5a3 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε 1 You yourselves know Paul is adding the word **yourselves** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 20 34 ja5v figs-personification ταῖς χρείαις μου…ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται 1 these hands ministered to my needs and to those who Paul is speaking of his **hands** as if they were a living thing that **ministered** to his **needs**, that is, worked to pay his expenses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I worked with my hands to pay my own expenses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 20 34 izuu figs-ellipsis καὶ τοῖς οὖσι μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and to the needs of those who were with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 20 35 wn8j κοπιῶντας δεῖ ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 it is necessary to work hard to help those who are weak Alternate translation: “you should work so as to have money to help people who are in need” -ACT 20 35 p3n8 figs-nominaladj τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 those who are weak You can state the nominal adjective **weak** as an adjective. Alternate translation: “weak people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 20 35 dpu1 ἀσθενούντων 1 weak Alternate translation: “sick” -ACT 20 35 ps2i figs-metonymy τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the words of the Lord Jesus Here, **words** refers to what Jesus has said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 20 35 e396 μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν 1 It is more blessed to give than to receive This means a person receives the favor of God and experiences more joy when he gives to other people rather than always receiving from other people. +ACT 20 35 zibu figs-ellipsis πάντα ὑπέδειξα ὑμῖν, ὅτι…δεῖ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I showed you all things in order to demonstrate that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 20 35 pvrm figs-hyperbole πάντα…ὅτι…δεῖ 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “consistently that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 20 35 b6o1 figs-nominaladj πάντα 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun. ULT adds the word **things** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “, in everything that I did,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 20 35 d1bh figs-metonymy ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 Paul is referring to helping people by association with the way that someone might **take hold** of a person who was **weak** to keep him from falling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to help those who are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 35 tr1d figs-rpronouns τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ , ὅτι αὐτὸς εἶπεν 1 Paul is adding the word **himself** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the words that none other than our Lord Jesus spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +ACT 20 35 ps2i figs-metonymy τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the words of the Lord Jesus Paul is using the term **words** to mean a statement that Jesus made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 35 mj5s figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν, μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “said that it is more blessed to give than to receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 20 36 q6bs 0 Connecting Statement: Paul ends his time with the elders of the church of Ephesus by praying with them. ACT 20 36 u3uc translate-symaction θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ…προσηύξατο 1 having bowed his knees, he prayed It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. It was a sign of humility before God. Alternate translation: “he knelt down and prayed to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 20 37 pb4r ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου 1 having fallen upon Paul’s neck Alternate translation: “having embraced Paul” or “putting their arms around him” From 4591b6f4deca0cc775ea5a551fe093e73fd08f0c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 19:37:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 295/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index eeb35159b4..11c4c58724 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2894,8 +2894,7 @@ ACT 20 35 d1bh figs-metonymy ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθεν ACT 20 35 tr1d figs-rpronouns τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ , ὅτι αὐτὸς εἶπεν 1 Paul is adding the word **himself** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the words that none other than our Lord Jesus spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 20 35 ps2i figs-metonymy τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the words of the Lord Jesus Paul is using the term **words** to mean a statement that Jesus made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 35 mj5s figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν, μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “said that it is more blessed to give than to receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -ACT 20 36 q6bs 0 Connecting Statement: Paul ends his time with the elders of the church of Ephesus by praying with them. -ACT 20 36 u3uc translate-symaction θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ…προσηύξατο 1 having bowed his knees, he prayed It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. It was a sign of humility before God. Alternate translation: “he knelt down and prayed to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 20 36 u3uc translate-symaction θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ 1 having bowed his knees, he prayed Paul bowed his knees as a symbolic action to show that he was approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “humbly kneeling down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 20 37 pb4r ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου 1 having fallen upon Paul’s neck Alternate translation: “having embraced Paul” or “putting their arms around him” ACT 20 37 sze4 κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 they were kissing him To kiss someone on the cheek was an expression of brotherly or friendly love in the Middle East. ACT 20 38 bs3s figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 they were never going to see his face again The word **face** here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “they would not see him anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From e38f96788a1d6ba90f67f4eeabb1c2582d88c389 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 19:38:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 296/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 11c4c58724..384b2b022c 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2895,8 +2895,8 @@ ACT 20 35 tr1d figs-rpronouns τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησο ACT 20 35 ps2i figs-metonymy τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the words of the Lord Jesus Paul is using the term **words** to mean a statement that Jesus made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 35 mj5s figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν, μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “said that it is more blessed to give than to receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 20 36 u3uc translate-symaction θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ 1 having bowed his knees, he prayed Paul bowed his knees as a symbolic action to show that he was approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “humbly kneeling down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 20 37 pb4r ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου 1 having fallen upon Paul’s neck Alternate translation: “having embraced Paul” or “putting their arms around him” -ACT 20 37 sze4 κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 they were kissing him To kiss someone on the cheek was an expression of brotherly or friendly love in the Middle East. +ACT 20 37 pb4r figs-idiom ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου 1 having fallen upon Paul’s neck The expression **falling upon** means that the Ephesian elders put their arms around Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “embracing Paul” or “putting their arms around Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 20 37 sze4 translate-symaction κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 they were kissing him To kiss someone on the cheek was an expression of brotherly or friendly love in this culture. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “they were kissing him on the cheek to express their brotherly love for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 20 38 bs3s figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 they were never going to see his face again The word **face** here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “they would not see him anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.

The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “They are all determined to keep the law”

The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.

### Nazarite vow

The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../21/23.md)).

### Gentiles in the temple

The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. ACT 21 1 i6f8 0 Connecting Statement: The writer Luke, Paul, and his companions continue their travels. From 9630e7014027fbd3e9ca9f4fe97ba3deb0ee2b8e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: christopherrsmith Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 19:40:13 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 297/446] Edit 'en_tn_45-ACT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 4 +++- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 384b2b022c..8392eae79a 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2897,7 +2897,9 @@ ACT 20 35 mj5s figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν, μακάριόν ἐστιν μ ACT 20 36 u3uc translate-symaction θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ 1 having bowed his knees, he prayed Paul bowed his knees as a symbolic action to show that he was approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “humbly kneeling down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 20 37 pb4r figs-idiom ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου 1 having fallen upon Paul’s neck The expression **falling upon** means that the Ephesian elders put their arms around Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “embracing Paul” or “putting their arms around Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 20 37 sze4 translate-symaction κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 they were kissing him To kiss someone on the cheek was an expression of brotherly or friendly love in this culture. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “they were kissing him on the cheek to express their brotherly love for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 20 38 bs3s figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 they were never going to see his face again The word **face** here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “they would not see him anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 38 npay figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ᾧ εἰρήκει 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement that he had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 38 bs3s figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 they were never going to see his face again In his statement, Paul was using one part of himself, his **face**, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were never going to see him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 38 m0wr figs-quotations εἰρήκει, ὅτι οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “spoken, ‘You are going to see my face no more’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.

The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “They are all determined to keep the law”

The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.

### Nazarite vow

The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../21/23.md)).

### Gentiles in the temple

The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. ACT 21 1 i6f8 0 Connecting Statement: The writer Luke, Paul, and his companions continue their travels. ACT 21 1 s3h3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἤλθομεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 81a1ec7d23da80d83716eb5e1e9f82bb2b917e08 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 15:47:12 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 298/446] Corrected note for Philippians 2:16 --- en_tn_51-PHP.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv index ef00b9e0ff..fb8f9c651c 100644 --- a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv +++ b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ PHP 2 16 heo4 εἰς καύχημα ἐμοὶ 1 Alternate translation: “so PHP 2 16 q7y8 figs-explicit εἰς ἡμέραν Χριστοῦ, 1 on the day of Christ The phrase **the day of Christ** refers to the time in the future when Christ will return. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when Christ returns” or “at the time Christ returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHP 2 16 m5aq figs-parallelism οὐκ εἰς κενὸν ἔδραμον, οὐδὲ εἰς κενὸν ἐκοπίασα 1 I did not run in vain nor labor in vain The phrases **run in vain** and **labor in vain** have very similar meanings here. Paul uses these two phrases together to emphasize how hard he has worked to help people believe in Christ and mature in their obedience and love for him. You may translate these two phrases separately, as the ULT does, or if it would be clearer in your language, you may translate them together as a single phrase. Alternate translation: “I did not work so hard for nothing” or “I did not work hard with no lasting results” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) PHP 2 16 m1z7 figs-metaphor οὐκ εἰς κενὸν ἔδραμον 1 I did … run Here Paul uses the word **run** metaphorically to mean “work.” Here Paul specifically means that he worked for the advancement of the gospel among the Philippians. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Philippians’ minds the image of a runner who is racing toward a finish line in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. But if this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I did not work for the advancement of the gospel uselessly” or “I did not work for the spread of the good news for nothing” or “I did not run the race uselessly”( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -PHP 2 16 wyyg figs-abstractnouns εἰς κενὸν…εἰς κενὸν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the abstract noun **vain** using an adjectival phrase. Alternate translation: “with no results” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +PHP 2 16 wyyg εἰς κενὸν…εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose … for no purpose” or “without positive results … without positive results” or “for nothing … for nothing” PHP 2 16 btgu figs-explicit οὐδὲ εἰς κενὸν ἐκοπίασα 1 Here Paul uses the word **labor** to refer to his spiritual work of sharing the gospel with the Philippian believers and working to help them grow in spiritual maturity. Paul assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to his spiritual work among them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “or work hard for nothing, trying to help you believe in Christ and obey him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHP 2 17 p9km grammar-connect-words-phrases ἀλλ’ εἰ καὶ 1 **But even if** connects the idea of running and laboring for the advance of the gospel, which Paul discussed in [2:16](../02/16.md), with what he says in the rest of this verse. Consider how to translate this phrase in your language in a way that shows this connection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) PHP 2 17 j2ov translate-symaction σπένδομαι ἐπὶ τῇ θυσίᾳ καὶ λειτουργίᾳ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 The phrase **I am being poured out as an offering on the sacrifice** uses imagery from the Old Testament Jewish sacrificial system. A priest would sacrifice an animal on the altar as a burnt offering to God and then pour out wine as a drink offering to God, in order to make the sacrifice complete. See [Num 28:7](../num/28/07.md). If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, consider using it here, but if this imagery would be confusing in your culture, consider translating this imagery using plain language. Alternate translation: “I work and give my life for your sake in order to complete the sacrificial service of your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) From c39bd3e4fa50c620d4d2bfcbeb9e28f39986c48b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 16:03:44 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 299/446] fix format of Acts --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 48 ++++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ 1 file changed, 24 insertions(+), 24 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 8392eae79a..123316e8af 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -ACT front intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of Acts\n\n1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)\n2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)\n3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)\n4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)\n5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)\n6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)\n\nLuke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part.\n\n### What is the book of Acts about?\n\nThe book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”\n\n### Who wrote the book of Acts?\n\nThe author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.\n\nLuke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the church?\n\nThe church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.\n\n### The kingdom of God\n\nThe “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Figurative usages in the book of Acts\n\n\r\r“arise/arising”\n\n\r\rLuke often says “arise” or “arising” figuratively to mean taking action to get an enterprise under way, rather than to mean getting up from a sitting or lying position. Notes will indicate where this figurative usage occurs.\r\r“brothers”\n\n\r\rLuke often uses the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Although this term is masculine, Luke uses the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate that the word has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])\r\r### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts\n\n\r\r“to the same” \n\n\r\rThe phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.\n\n\r\r“in/to/into the temple”\n\n\r\rLuke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.\n\n\r\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?\n\nThe following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.\n\nFirst, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets [ ]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are:\n- Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’”\n- Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.”\n- Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.”\n- Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”\n\nSecond, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are:\n- Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.”\n- Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.”\n- Acts 10:19, “three men. Some versions read “two men” or “some men.”\n- Acts 10:30, ““Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.”\n- Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”).\n- Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.”\n- Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”\n\n(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +ACT front intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Acts

1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)
2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)
3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)
4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)
5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)
6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)

Luke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part.

### What is the book of Acts about?

The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”

### Who wrote the book of Acts?

The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the church?

The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.

### The kingdom of God

The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Figurative usages in the book of Acts

\r\r“arise/arising”

\r\rLuke often says “arise” or “arising” figuratively to mean taking action to get an enterprise under way, rather than to mean getting up from a sitting or lying position. Notes will indicate where this figurative usage occurs.\r\r“brothers”

\r\rLuke often uses the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Although this term is masculine, Luke uses the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate that the word has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])\r\r### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts

\r\r“to the same”

\r\rThe phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.

\r\r“in/to/into the temple”

\r\rLuke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.

\r

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?

The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.

First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets [ ]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are:
- Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’”
- Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.”
- Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.”
- Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”

Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are:
- Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.”
- Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.”
- Acts 10:19, “three men. Some versions read “two men” or “some men.”
- Acts 10:30, ““Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.”
- Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”).
- Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.”
- Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 1 intro vyg9 0 # Acts 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Ascension

This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]])

### Baptism

Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in [1:5](../01/05.md). In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers figuratively to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in [2:4](../02/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])

### “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God”

Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in [1:3](../01/03.md), he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse.

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Long sentence

As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the end of [1:3](../01/03.md). ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

### The details of the death of Judas

There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death.

It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it.

But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in [1:18](../01/18.md) that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you can let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.

### The 12 disciples

There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts.

All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known.

Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in [1:13](../01/13.md) instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible. ACT 1 1 q9ep figs-explicit τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην 1 I made the first account Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by **the first account** he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 1 a000 ὦ Θεόφιλε 1 O Theophilus Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence. @@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ ACT 2 11 jnp7 translate-names Κρῆτες…Ἄραβες 1 Cretans and Arabia ACT 2 11 a097 figs-nominaladj τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the great things of God The speakers are using the adjective **great** as a noun. (The term is plural; ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the great things that God has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 2 12 el2f figs-doublet ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο 1 they were all amazed and were perplexed The words **amazed** and **perplexed** mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 2 12 a098 figs-activepassive ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο…λέγοντες 1 they were all amazed and were perplexed, saying These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 2 12 a099 figs-idiom τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι 1 What does this want to be The expression **want to be** is a way of referring to what something means. Your language may have a similar expression that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: "What does this mean?" or “What is the explanation for this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 2 12 a099 figs-idiom τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι 1 What does this want to be The expression **want to be** is a way of referring to what something means. Your language may have a similar expression that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: "What does this mean?" or “What is the explanation for this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 13 a100 figs-activepassive γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν 1 They are filled with sweet wine If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 13 fg59 figs-explicit γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν 1 They are filled with sweet wine The implications of this statement are that the disciples have gotten drunk and are babbling and that this is the explanation for the languages the people think they are hearing. Alternate translation: “They have gotten drunk on sweet wine, and so what we are hearing is just drunken babbling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 13 jj1n translate-unknown γλεύκους 1 with sweet wine This refers to wine that is thicker and more intoxicating than ordinary wine. If your readers would not be familiar with this drink, you could use the name of another strong drink that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “with strong liquor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1201,7 +1201,7 @@ ACT 7 60 hi24 figs-idiom ἔκραξεν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 This is an i ACT 7 60 dfjs figs-imperative μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do not hold this sin against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 7 60 tvf8 figs-doublenegatives μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 do not hold this sin against them If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **hold … against**. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 7 60 r9vi figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 he fell asleep Luke is describing the death of Stephen when he says **he fell asleep**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he passed away” or, as in UST, “he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -ACT 8 intro q9d9 0 # Acts 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The story here shifts from Stephen to Saul.


Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33.

The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “And on that day.”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Receiving the Holy Spirit

In this chapter Luke speaks for the first time of people receiving the Holy Spirit ([Acts 8:15-19](../08/15.md)). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.

### Proclaimed

This chapter, more than any other in the book of Acts, speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something. +ACT 8 intro q9d9 0 # Acts 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The story here shifts from Stephen to Saul.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33.

The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “And on that day.”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Receiving the Holy Spirit

In this chapter Luke speaks for the first time of people receiving the Holy Spirit ([Acts 8:15-19](../08/15.md)). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.

### Proclaimed

This chapter, more than any other in the book of Acts, speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something. ACT 8 1 ez88 writing-background Σαῦλος δὲ ἦν συνευδοκῶν τῇ ἀναιρέσει αὐτοῦ 1 there began on that day a great persecution against the church that was in Jerusalem, and they all were scattered throughout the regions of Judea and Samaria, except the apostles Luke is providing this background information to help readers understand why Saul was persecuting the church, as he relates in [8:3](../08/03.md) and in chapter 9. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Saul approved of the Sanhedrin executing Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) ACT 8 1 i1tc writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story, the scattering of the church and its witness beyond Jerusalem. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And so began that day a great persecution against the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 8 1 vc8x figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 that day Here, **day** is not a figurative word for “time.” Luke is referring to a specific day, the day on which Stephen was killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day Stephen was killed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1704,7 +1704,7 @@ ACT 11 14 p3gk figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 If your language does not use ACT 11 14 hpr2 figs-metonymy πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου 1 all your household Here, **house** refers figuratively to an entire household living together. Alternate translation: “all the people living in your house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 15 a8jw figs-explicitinfo ἐν…τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν 1 as I began to speak, the Holy Spirit came on them Peter is using the word **began** to indicate that he had been doing something else (listening to Cornelius tell why he had summoned him) but then began to do something new when Cornelius finished speaking. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “as I was speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 11 15 ak2p figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς 1 the Holy Spirit came on them, just as also on us in the beginning Peter is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if it **fell** on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expressions in [8:16](../08/12.md) and [10:44](../10/44.md). Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 11 15 qdon writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the man who had sent for me and the others in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 11 15 qdon writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the man who had sent for me and the others in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 11 15 qy12 figs-exclusive ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς 1 General Information: Here the word **us** refers to Peter himself and to the believers he is speaking to in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 11 15 th4m figs-explicit ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 in the beginning By **in the beginning**, Peter means the day of Pentecost. Alternate translation: “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 11 16 xd9t figs-metonymy τοῦ ῥήματος 1 Peter is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “the statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1746,7 +1746,7 @@ ACT 11 24 m7yy figs-abstractnouns καὶ πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγ ACT 11 24 e35e figs-activepassive προσετέθη ὄχλος ἱκανὸς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God did the action. Alternate translation: “God added a considerable crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 11 24 e57t figs-metonymy τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 a considerable crowd was added to the Lord Luke figuratively says **the Lord** (a title for Jesus) to mean the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “to the community of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 25 yhl6 writing-pronouns ἐξῆλθεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Barnabas went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 11 26 qzml writing-pronouns εὑρὼν ἤγαγεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Barnabas, and the pronoun **him** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “and having found Saul, Barnabas brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 11 26 qzml writing-pronouns εὑρὼν ἤγαγεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Barnabas, and the pronoun **him** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “and having found Saul, Barnabas brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 11 26 z36c ἐγένετο δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ ἐνιαυτὸν ὅλον συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 This wording suggests that Barnabas and Saul did not know initially how long they would be meeting with the church in Antioch, but in the end it amounted to a whole year. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “in the end they were gathered together with the church for an entire year” ACT 11 26 w4dz figs-activepassive αὐτοῖς…συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 they were gathered together with the church If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they gathered together with the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 11 26 x8gx figs-activepassive χρηματίσαι…τοὺς μαθητὰς 1 And the disciples were called Christians first in Antioch If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people called the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1788,7 +1788,7 @@ ACT 12 9 p9ty figs-activepassive τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγ ACT 12 9 s9j0 figs-quotations ἐδόκει…ὅραμα βλέπειν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “he was thinking, ‘I am seeing a vision’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 12 10 r7gy figs-explicit διελθόντες…πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν 1 But when they had passed by the first guard and the second The implication is that the guards were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having passed by the first guard and the second without being noticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 10 e36s figs-ellipsis καὶ δευτέραν 1 and the second The word **guard** can be supplied from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 12 11 wlb6 figs-idiom ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος εἶπεν 1 And when Peter had come to himself The phrase **having come to himself** means that Peter became fully awake and realized he was not just seeing a vision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when Peter became fully awake and alert, he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 12 11 wlb6 figs-idiom ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος εἶπεν 1 And when Peter had come to himself The phrase **having come to himself** means that Peter became fully awake and realized he was not just seeing a vision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when Peter became fully awake and alert, he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 12 11 ue4k figs-metonymy χειρὸς 1 delivered me from the hand of Herod Here, **hand** figuratively represents the capability of a person. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 12 11 p739 figs-abstractnouns πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 from all the expectations of the Jewish people If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **expectation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “all that the Jewish people expected that Herod would do to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 12 11 sl07 figs-synecdoche τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Luke is likely using the phrase **the Jewish people** to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “of the leaders of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -1840,7 +1840,7 @@ ACT 12 25 rt9o figs-explicit Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπ ACT 12 25 t7d8 translate-textvariants Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 And Barnabas and Saul returned to Jerusalem Some ancient copies say that Barnabas and Saul returned “from” Jerusalem, which makes sense, since in the next verse, Barnabas and Saul are back in Antioch. If the reading **to** is correct, this verse may be indicating that they went somewhere else in Judea and then returned to Jerusalem before going back to Antioch. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 12 25 pv6a figs-explicit πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν 1 having completed their service This refers implicitly to the trip that Barnabas and Saul made to Jerusalem to deliver money from the believers in Antioch, which Luke describes in [11:29-30](../11/29.md). Alternate translation: “having delivered to the church leaders in Jerusalem the money that the believers in Antioch had collected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 25 zhsc figs-activepassive Ἰωάννην, τὸν ἐπικληθέντα Μᾶρκον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated it in [12:12](../12/12.md). Alternate translation: “John, whom people called Mark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 intro rlh6 0 # Acts 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nVerses 1–4 describe how the Holy Spirit called Barnabas and Paul to go on a special mission to share the gospel of Jesus.\nVerses 5–12 describe how they shared the gospel on the island of Cyprus.\nVerses 13–52 describe how they shared the gospel in the city of Antioch in the province of Pamphylia.\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotations from Psalms in 13:33–35.\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41.\n\nThe chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and he describes how the believers told the message about Jesus to Gentiles. Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### A light for the Gentiles\n\nThe Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if light were what enables sinful people to understand that what they are doing is wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles to be walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n\n\n### “the Lord”\n\nIn verses 2, 12, 48, and 49, Luke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord.” Paul refers to Jesus the same way in verses 10 and 11. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could say “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “our” in Paul’s sermon in Antioch of Pisidia\n\nIn verses 17, 32, and 33, Paul uses the term **our** to refer to himself and the other Jews who are present in the synagogue; the term does not include the Gentiles who are also present. If your language marks the distinction between inclusive and exclusive “our,” use the form that would be natural in such a situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 13 intro rlh6 0 # Acts 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verses 1–4 describe how the Holy Spirit called Barnabas and Paul to go on a special mission to share the gospel of Jesus.
Verses 5–12 describe how they shared the gospel on the island of Cyprus.
Verses 13–52 describe how they shared the gospel in the city of Antioch in the province of Pamphylia.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotations from Psalms in 13:33–35.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41.

The chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and he describes how the believers told the message about Jesus to Gentiles. Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### A light for the Gentiles

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if light were what enables sinful people to understand that what they are doing is wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles to be walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### “the Lord”

In verses 2, 12, 48, and 49, Luke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord.” Paul refers to Jesus the same way in verses 10 and 11. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could say “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “our” in Paul’s sermon in Antioch of Pisidia

In verses 17, 32, and 33, Paul uses the term **our** to refer to himself and the other Jews who are present in the synagogue; the term does not include the Gentiles who are also present. If your language marks the distinction between inclusive and exclusive “our,” use the form that would be natural in such a situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 13 1 fij7 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 13 1 srw6 translate-names Συμεὼν ὁ καλούμενος Νίγερ 1 Simeon … Niger … Lucius … Manaen The word **Simeon** is the name of a man. The word **Niger** is another name by which he was known. This is not a racial epithet; it is the Latin word for “black,” and it probably indicates that he was African. Alternate translation: “Simeon the African” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 13 1 nqp1 figs-activepassive Συμεὼν ὁ καλούμενος Νίγερ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Simeon, whom people called Niger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2142,7 +2142,7 @@ ACT 14 27 vymy figs-possession ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύρ ACT 14 27 b4id figs-metaphor ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles Here the expression **opened a door** figuratively means that God created an opportunity, as if a door that gave access to this opportunity had previously been closed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles an opportunity for faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 14 27 xgvb figs-abstractnouns ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles the opportunity to believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 14 28 abcq figs-litotes χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον 1 for not a little time Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could take the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 15 intro h917 0 # Acts 15 General Notes



## Structure and formatting



- Verses 1–35 tell how the church resolved the question of whether Gentiles who believed in Jesus needed to keep the whole law of Moses.
- Verses 36–41 tell how Paul began a new journey to proclaim the gospel, bringing Silas with him.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16–18.



Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present the quotation from the prophet Amos in verses 16–18 as a direct quotation if possible, since in it God is speaking directly the people of Israel. Since Amos acknowledges in verse 17 that God is speaking by saying “says the Lord,” a third-level quotation actually starts in verse 16. ULT uses second-level and third-level quotation marks within the first-level quotation from James to identify the various speakers. But it may not be necessary to do this in your translation. You could just use second-level quotation marks or some other punctuation or convention available in your language to indicate the beginning and ending of the second-level quotation from Amos. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])



## Special concepts in this chapter



### Did Gentiles have to obey the law of Moses?



Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised, so this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not believe that the Gentiles needed to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do. The meeting that the apostles and elders held to decide about this issue is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.”

+ACT 15 intro h917 0 # Acts 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

- Verses 1–35 tell how the church resolved the question of whether Gentiles who believed in Jesus needed to keep the whole law of Moses.
- Verses 36–41 tell how Paul began a new journey to proclaim the gospel, bringing Silas with him.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16–18.

Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present the quotation from the prophet Amos in verses 16–18 as a direct quotation if possible, since in it God is speaking directly the people of Israel. Since Amos acknowledges in verse 17 that God is speaking by saying “says the Lord,” a third-level quotation actually starts in verse 16. ULT uses second-level and third-level quotation marks within the first-level quotation from James to identify the various speakers. But it may not be necessary to do this in your translation. You could just use second-level quotation marks or some other punctuation or convention available in your language to indicate the beginning and ending of the second-level quotation from Amos. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Did Gentiles have to obey the law of Moses?

Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised, so this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not believe that the Gentiles needed to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do. The meeting that the apostles and elders held to decide about this issue is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.”
ACT 15 1 su66 figs-explicit τινες 1 certain ones Luke assumes that his readers will recognize that these were Jews who believed in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers will need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “text” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 1 p3k9 figs-idiom κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 coming down from Judea Luke speaks of these Jews ** coming down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “who had traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 15 1 zi1n figs-metaphor ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 taught the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2294,7 +2294,7 @@ ACT 15 41 cbat writing-pronouns διήρχετο 1 The pronoun **he** refers to ACT 15 41 e3ym figs-synecdoche διήρχετο 1 he went through Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 15 41 s7yf figs-metonymy ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 Luke is using the term **churches** to refer figuratively to the people associated with the churches.If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 41 tbv3 figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 strengthening the churches Luke does not mean that Paul and Silas strengthened the people of the churches physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes\n\n\r\r## Structure and formatting\r\r- Verses 1–5 describe how Paul began his second missionary journey and met Timothy and brought him along with him.\r- Verses 6–12 describe how the Holy Spirit led Paul and his companions to share the gospel in the city of Philippi\r- Verses 13–40 describe how Paul and Silas made disciples in Philippi, delivered a young woman from an evil spirit, and were imprisoned but miraculously released. \r\rActs [16:5](../16/05.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the fourth major part of the book.\r\r## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\r\r### Timothy’s circumcision\n\n\r\rPaul circumcised Timothy because he and Silas were telling the message of Jesus to Jews as well as to Gentiles. Many Jews would have been so offended that Timothy was not circumcised, even though his mother was Jewish, that they would not have listened to the message. Paul felt that he could have Timothy circumcised as a discretionary matter to remove an offense to hearing the gospel, even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Gentile believers did not have to be circumcised.\n\n\r +ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes

\r\r## Structure and formatting\r\r- Verses 1–5 describe how Paul began his second missionary journey and met Timothy and brought him along with him.\r- Verses 6–12 describe how the Holy Spirit led Paul and his companions to share the gospel in the city of Philippi\r- Verses 13–40 describe how Paul and Silas made disciples in Philippi, delivered a young woman from an evil spirit, and were imprisoned but miraculously released. \r\rActs [16:5](../16/05.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the fourth major part of the book.\r\r## Special concepts in this chapter

\r\r### Timothy’s circumcision

\r\rPaul circumcised Timothy because he and Silas were telling the message of Jesus to Jews as well as to Gentiles. Many Jews would have been so offended that Timothy was not circumcised, even though his mother was Jewish, that they would not have listened to the message. Paul felt that he could have Timothy circumcised as a discretionary matter to remove an offense to hearing the gospel, even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Gentile believers did not have to be circumcised.

\r ACT 16 1 m5tb figs-synecdoche κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas also came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 1 rhut figs-idiom κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Derbe and Lystra because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Paul likely travel by sea from Syria to Cilicia, and Luke is saying that he then also went to Derbe and to Lystra. Alternate translation: “he also traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 1 km5q figs-go κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Paul also came down If you retain the idiom, it may be more natural in your language to say “went” rather than **came**. Alternate translation: “he also went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -2350,7 +2350,7 @@ ACT 16 14 a74y figs-activepassive τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ το ACT 16 15 g7e9 figs-activepassive ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη 1 And when she was baptized, and her household If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is likely from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “when Paul baptized her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 15 lv50 figs-ellipsis καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and her household was also baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 16 15 s799 figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 her household Here, **her household** refers to all the people who lived in Lydia’s house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 15 igcw figs-yousingular κεκρίκατέ 1 The word **you** is plural. Lydia is addressing Paul and his companions. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +ACT 16 15 igcw figs-yousingular κεκρίκατέ 1 The word **you** is plural. Lydia is addressing Paul and his companions. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 16 15 g8ul writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Lydia is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 16 15 xnkk figs-imperative εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου, μένετε 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please come to my house and stay with me as my guests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 16 15 hkh3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Luke is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -2380,7 +2380,7 @@ ACT 16 24 z12w figs-metaphor ἔβαλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν ἐσ ACT 16 26 q7z1 figs-activepassive σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 a great earthquake happened, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 26 m4ye figs-synecdoche σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 the foundations of the prison Luke is using one part of the prison, its **foundations**, to refer to the entire prison in the state of being **shaken**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a shaking that began in the prison’s foundations shook the entire prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 26 s6mu figs-activepassive ἠνεῴχθησαν…αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι 1 all the doors were opened If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 26 p393 figs-activepassive πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη 1 the chains of everyone were unfastened If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the chains of all came loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 16 26 p393 figs-activepassive πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη 1 the chains of everyone were unfastened If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the chains of all came loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 26 b540 figs-explicit πάντων 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **all**, he means all the prisoners. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “all the prisoners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 27 cwt5 figs-explicit ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν 1 he was about to kill himself Luke assumes that his readers will know that the punishment in the Roman Empire for allowing prisoners to escape was death. The jailer thought his prisoners had escaped, and he preferred to commit suicide rather than face trial and execution. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “he was about to kill himself, because he thought that his prisoners had escaped and he knew that he would be tried and executed for allowing them to escape, and he did not want to go through that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 27 viov figs-activepassive ἀνεῳγμένας τὰς θύρας τῆς φυλακῆς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the prison doors were open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2424,7 +2424,7 @@ ACT 16 40 t1pf figs-go εἰσῆλθον 1 they came to the house of Lydia In a ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had seen the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 40 qs0x figs-synecdoche καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Luke says that **they … went out**, meaning Paul and Silas, to refer to those two men and to Timothy, who was still traveling with them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and then Paul and Silas and Timothy left Philippi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 40 gld6 figs-explicit καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Since Luke says **they … went out**, not “we went out,” the implication is that Luke remained in Philippi for a time, likely to strengthen and encourage the new believers there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 17 intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes\n\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n\n- Verses 1–9 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Thessalonica.\n- Verses 10–14 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Berea.\nVerses 15–34 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Athens.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\n### The religion of Athens\n\n\n\nPaul said that the people in the city of Athens were “religious,” but this did not mean that they worshiped the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples, and they had begun to worship the gods of the peoples they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])\n\n\n\nAs Paul spoke to the philosophers in Athens, he told the message of Christ for the first time to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.\n +ACT 17 intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

- Verses 1–9 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Thessalonica.
- Verses 10–14 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Berea.
Verses 15–34 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Athens.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The religion of Athens

Paul said that the people in the city of Athens were “religious,” but this did not mean that they worshiped the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples, and they had begun to worship the gods of the peoples they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

As Paul spoke to the philosophers in Athens, he told the message of Christ for the first time to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament. ACT 17 1 e4w5 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 17 1 kll1 translate-names τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν 1 Amphipolis and Apollonia The words **Amphipolis** and **Apollonia** are the names of coastal cities in the Roman province of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 1 yj66 translate-names Θεσσαλονίκην 1 they came to Thessalonica The word **Thessalonica** is the name of another city on the coast of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2443,7 +2443,7 @@ ACT 17 5 t3bc figs-metonymy τὴν πόλιν 1 they set the city in an uproar ACT 17 5 w94p figs-explicit Ἰάσονος 1 Luke does not tell us anything further about this **Jason**, but the implication is that the Jewish leaders believed that Paul and Silas were staying in his home. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jason, where they believed Paul and Silas were staying,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 5 ks2l translate-names Ἰάσονος 1 of Jason The word **Jason** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 5 abcu writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 to lead them The pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 17 6 i79p figs-metaphor τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 6 i79p figs-metaphor τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 6 x90b figs-hyperbole οἱ τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 The Jewish leaders are figuratively exaggerating the influence of Paul and Silas and their teaching. Alternate translation: “These men who have caused trouble wherever they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 8 ixmb writing-pronouns ἐτάραξαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish leaders in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 17 9 ya44 translate-unknown τὸ ἱκανὸν 1 after they had received a bond from Jason and the rest of them A **bond** was an amount of money that the city officials required Jason and the rest of the believers to pay as a guarantee of good behavior. The city officials would return the money if those men did not cause any further trouble. Your language and culture may have a term that you can use in your translation for this kind of monetary guarantee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -2545,19 +2545,19 @@ ACT 17 32 jlm5 ἀκούσαντες 1 when they heard of These are the people ACT 17 32 sn6j οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον 1 some mocked him These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul” ACT 17 34 psh8 translate-names Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης 1 Dionysius the Areopagite The word **Dionysius** is the name of a man. The word **Areopagite** is the name for someone who was a member of a council of rulers and judges that met on the Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 34 hsz3 translate-names Δάμαρις 1 Damaris The word **Damaris** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes\n\n\r\r## Structure and formatting\n\n\r\r- Verses 1–17 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Corinth.\r- Verses 18–23 describe how Paul returned to Antioch and then started out on another missionary journey.\r- Verses 24–28 describe how a man named Apollos became an effective preacher of the gospel.\r\r## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\r\r### The baptism of John\n\nSome Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but that kind of baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])\r +ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes

\r\r## Structure and formatting

\r\r- Verses 1–17 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Corinth.\r- Verses 18–23 describe how Paul returned to Antioch and then started out on another missionary journey.\r- Verses 24–28 describe how a man named Apollos became an effective preacher of the gospel.\r\r## Special concepts in this chapter

\r\r### The baptism of John

Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but that kind of baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])\r ACT 18 1 fky7 writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things Luke is using the phrase **After these things** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 18 1 abcw writing-pronouns ἦλθεν 1 having departed The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 18 1 h2si translate-names Κόρινθον 1 Athens The word **Corinth** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 2 d9zx figs-idiom καὶ εὑρών 1 And when he found The word **found** does not mean that Paul was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “And when Paul happened to meet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 2 hm16 writing-participants τινα Ἰουδαῖον 1 a certain Jew named Aquila Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jew** to introduce **Aquila** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “that there was a certain Jew there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 18 2 n7uf translate-names Ἀκύλαν 1 The word **Aquila** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 2 y97p translate-names Ποντικὸν 1 a native of Pontus The word **Pontian** was the name for someone who came from the province of Pontus on the southern coast of the Black Sea. See how you translated the name “Pontus” in [2:9](../02/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 2 y97p translate-names Ποντικὸν 1 a native of Pontus The word **Pontian** was the name for someone who came from the province of Pontus on the southern coast of the Black Sea. See how you translated the name “Pontus” in [2:9](../02/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 2 q11b figs-infostructure προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης 1 It might be more natural to keep all of the information about Aquila leaving Italy together and mention afterwards that Paul also met his wife Priscilla. Alternate translation: “having recently come from Italy because Claudius had ordered all the Jews to depart from Rome, and Priscilla, his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 18 2 n631 translate-names τῆς Ἰταλίας 1 Italy The word **Italy** is the name of a country. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 2 b06i translate-names Πρίσκιλλαν 1 The word **Priscilla** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 2 n95f translate-names Κλαύδιον 1 Claudius had ordered **Claudius** is the name of the man who was the Roman emperor at this time. See how you translated his name in [11:28](../11/28.md). -ACT 18 2 db3t translate-names τῆς Ῥώμης 1 The word **Rome** is the name of a city. See how you translated the similar word “Romans” in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 2 db3t translate-names τῆς Ῥώμης 1 The word **Rome** is the name of a city. See how you translated the similar word “Romans” in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 5 r56h 0 General Information: Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul. ACT 18 5 btkg figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 Luke says that Silas and Timothy **came down** to Corinth because that city is lower in elevation than Macedonia. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 5 rjl6 figs-activepassive συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2566,7 +2566,7 @@ ACT 18 5 bsgm figs-metonymy συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος ACT 18 6 ncx8 translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια 1 shaking out his garment This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a place, in this case the synagogue, to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See what you did with the similar gesture in [13:51](../13/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 18 6 z12a figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Your blood be upon your head Here, **blood** represents punishment, specifically for rejecting Jesus. Paul is telling the Jews that they are solely responsible for the divine judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone must bear the responsibility when God punishes you for rejecting Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 6 pacx figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Paul is figuratively using one part of a person, the **head**, to represent all of a person in the act of deciding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your punishment is your responsibility” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 18 6 ezpo figs-yousingular τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 The word **your** is plural. Paul is speaking to all the Jews in the synagogue, so use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +ACT 18 6 ezpo figs-yousingular τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 The word **your** is plural. Paul is speaking to all the Jews in the synagogue, so use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 18 6 vwpg τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Since Paul is speaking to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **head**. Alternate translation: “your heads” ACT 18 6 aq99 figs-metaphor καθαρὸς ἐγώ 1 Paul is speaking figuratively as if he were physically **clean**. He means that he is satisfied in his conscience that he has fulfilled his duty to proclaim the gospel to these Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have fulfilled my duty in proclaiming the gospel to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 7 v8xg figs-idiom τινὸς…σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν 1 who worships God See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile man who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2641,7 +2641,7 @@ ACT 18 27 ll36 figs-idiom διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 to p ACT 18 27 v2i6 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 27 f99p figs-abstractnouns τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος 1 those who had believed by grace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those whom God had graciously led to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 18 28 mw2n figs-abstractnouns δημοσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **public**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “publicly” or “where anyone could listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 19 intro g38y 0 # Acts 19 General Notes\n\n\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n\n\n- Verses 1–10 tell how Paul came to the city of Ephesus and proclaimed the gospel there.\n- Verses 11–20 describe remarkable things that God did in Ephesus as a result of the gospel proclamation there.\n- Verses 21–41 describe how the artisans in Ephesus created an uproar because people were no longer buying the idols they made.\n\nActs [19:20](../19/20.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the sixth major part of the book.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n\n\n\n### Temple of Artemis\n\n\n\nThe temple of Artemis was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Artemis while they were there. The people who sold statues of Artemis were afraid that if people did not believe Artemis was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.\n +ACT 19 intro g38y 0 # Acts 19 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

- Verses 1–10 tell how Paul came to the city of Ephesus and proclaimed the gospel there.
- Verses 11–20 describe remarkable things that God did in Ephesus as a result of the gospel proclamation there.
- Verses 21–41 describe how the artisans in Ephesus created an uproar because people were no longer buying the idols they made.

Acts [19:20](../19/20.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the sixth major part of the book.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Temple of Artemis

The temple of Artemis was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Artemis while they were there. The people who sold statues of Artemis were afraid that if people did not believe Artemis was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues. ACT 19 1 lp23 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke is using the phrase **And it happened that** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 19 1 rhv1 figs-explicit διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη 1 Luke says that Paul traveled through **the upper parts** of the province of Asia to indicate that he followed a more direct route to Ephesus that went over higher ground than the main route. The implication is that Paul wanted to go directly to Ephesus after visiting the churches in Galatia and Phrygia ([18:23](../18/23.md)), as he had promised he would do if that was God’s will ([18:21](../18/21.md)). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “taking the most direct route” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 1 munb figs-idiom κατελθεῖν εἰς 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Ephesus because he was coming down to the coast from a route that traveled over high ground. Alternate translation: “arrived in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2650,7 +2650,7 @@ ACT 19 2 wqi4 figs-quotations εἶπέν τε πρὸς αὐτούς, εἰ Π ACT 19 3 mrm6 figs-activepassive εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε 1 Into what then were you baptized? If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Then what kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 3 jzp7 figs-ellipsis εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα 1 Into the baptism of John The believers in Ephesus are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 19 3 w76v figs-explicit Ἰωάννου 1 By **John**, the believers implicitly mean John the Baptist. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 19 4 g8iw Ἰωάννης ἐβάπτισεν βάπτισμα 1 Paul is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. Your language may be able to do the same. But if that would sound unnatural in your language, you could express the meaning another way. Alternate translation: “John performed a baptism” +ACT 19 4 g8iw Ἰωάννης ἐβάπτισεν βάπτισμα 1 Paul is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. Your language may be able to do the same. But if that would sound unnatural in your language, you could express the meaning another way. Alternate translation: “John performed a baptism” ACT 19 4 r46y figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 19 5 k9st writing-pronouns ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized The pronoun **they** refers to the believers in Ephesus who were speaking with Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those believers were baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 19 5 ueh1 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2683,7 +2683,7 @@ ACT 19 13 he2x writing-newevent δέ 1 General Information: Luke is using the wo ACT 19 13 fgq4 translate-unknown ἐξορκιστῶν 1 exorcists These **exorcists** were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places.Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of person that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “exorcists,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 13 s12u figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα 1 the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 13 vqt1 figs-metonymy τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 by the Jesus The exorcists are using Jesus himself to mean his authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the authority of the Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 19 14 cwzb writing-background δέ 1 Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about these **seven sons of Sceva** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 19 14 cwzb writing-background δέ 1 Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about these **seven sons of Sceva** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 19 14 emgz writing-participants ἦσαν…τινος Σκευᾶ Ἰουδαίου ἀρχιερέως, ἑπτὰ υἱοὶ τοῦτο ποιοῦντες 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jewish high priest** to introduce his **seven sons** as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish chief priest whose seven sons were doing this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 19 14 cb8p translate-names Σκευᾶ 1 of Sceva The word **Sceva** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 15 fhzn figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθὲντὸ…πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν εἶπεν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the evil spirit responded to the sons of Sceva. Alternate translation: “the evil spirit responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -2714,7 +2714,7 @@ ACT 19 23 nb3p figs-litotes τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no ACT 19 23 rwf2 translate-names τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 the Way As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in [19:9](../19/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 24 cg16 writing-participants τις…ἀργυροκόπος…παρείχετο 1 a certain silversmith named Demetrius Luke is using the phrase **a certain silversmith** to introduce **Demetrius** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a silversmith … who was bringing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 19 24 opb9 translate-names Δημήτριος 1 The word **Demetrius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background τις…ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 Luke provides this background information about **Demetrius** to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background τις…ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 Luke provides this background information about **Demetrius** to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 19 24 wg95 figs-extrainfo ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess **Artemis**. (She was known as Diana in Latin; she was a false goddess of fertility.) Since Demetrius describes this temple in verse 27, you do not need to provide information about it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) ACT 19 24 nwt7 translate-unknown ἀργυροκόπος 1 a silversmith A **silversmith** is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry.Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of worker that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 24 p58m figs-litotes οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν 1 brought in not a little business Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great deal of business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) @@ -2764,7 +2764,7 @@ ACT 19 38 zkx5 figs-metonymy ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον 1 have ACT 19 38 i14r figs-activepassive ἀγοραῖοι ἄγονται καὶ ἀνθύπατοί εἰσιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proconsuls are holding court sessions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 38 szf7 translate-unknown ἀνθύπατοί 1 proconsuls The **proconsuls** were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. In your translation, you can use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 38 o1vf figs-imperative3p ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they may accuse one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) -ACT 19 38 g8tp writing-pronouns ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 Let them accuse one another The pronoun **them** refers both to Demetrius and his colleagues and to Gaius and Aristarchus. The city clerk does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues will accuse each other. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “let Demetrius and the craftsmen bring a charge against these men, and let these men respond” or “Demetrius and the craftsmen may bring a charge against these men, and these men may respond” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 19 38 g8tp writing-pronouns ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 Let them accuse one another The pronoun **them** refers both to Demetrius and his colleagues and to Gaius and Aristarchus. The city clerk does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues will accuse each other. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “let Demetrius and the craftsmen bring a charge against these men, and let these men respond” or “Demetrius and the craftsmen may bring a charge against these men, and these men may respond” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 19 39 hxh3 figs-idiom εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε 1 But if you seek anything about other matters The word **seek** does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues would be searching for something. The city clerk is speaking idiomatically. Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 19 39 wga5 figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 it will be settled in the regular assembly If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regular assembly will settle it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 39 dsmg figs-declarative ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 The city clerk may be using a future statement to give an command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a command. Alternate translation: “you must settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) @@ -2794,7 +2794,7 @@ ACT 20 6 l5dr translate-names τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the ACT 20 7 zff8 figs-synecdoche κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 to break bread Luke could be using the word **break** to mean “eat,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be figuratively using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “to share a meal” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 7 ckiy figs-explicit κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 By **to break bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to observe the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 8 t6on figs-explicit ἦσαν… λαμπάδες ἱκαναὶ ἐν τῷ ὑπερῴῳ, οὗ ἦμεν συνηγμένοι 1 The implication seems to be that it became warm in this **upper room** because there were **many lamps** lit in it, and this helps account for why Eutychus fell asleep, as Luke describes in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “it was warm in the upper room where we were gathered together because many lamps were in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 20 8 ak8z translate-unknown ὑπερῴῳ 1 upper room In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. According to the next verse, this room was actually built above a room that was built above another room. If your community does not have houses like that, you can use another expression to describe a large indoor space where people could meet. See how you translated this in [9:37](../09/37.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 20 8 ak8z translate-unknown ὑπερῴῳ 1 upper room In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. According to the next verse, this room was actually built above a room that was built above another room. If your community does not have houses like that, you can use another expression to describe a large indoor space where people could meet. See how you translated this in [9:37](../09/37.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 20 8 cshh figs-activepassive ἦμεν συνηγμένοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 7 j888 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 and so he continued his message Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 9 ju64 translate-names Εὔτυχος 1 Eutychus The word **Eutychus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2889,7 +2889,7 @@ ACT 20 34 ja5v figs-personification ταῖς χρείαις μου…ὑπηρ ACT 20 34 izuu figs-ellipsis καὶ τοῖς οὖσι μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and to the needs of those who were with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 20 35 zibu figs-ellipsis πάντα ὑπέδειξα ὑμῖν, ὅτι…δεῖ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I showed you all things in order to demonstrate that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 20 35 pvrm figs-hyperbole πάντα…ὅτι…δεῖ 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “consistently that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 20 35 b6o1 figs-nominaladj πάντα 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun. ULT adds the word **things** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “, in everything that I did,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 20 35 b6o1 figs-nominaladj πάντα 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun. ULT adds the word **things** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “, in everything that I did,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 20 35 d1bh figs-metonymy ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 Paul is referring to helping people by association with the way that someone might **take hold** of a person who was **weak** to keep him from falling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to help those who are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 35 tr1d figs-rpronouns τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ , ὅτι αὐτὸς εἶπεν 1 Paul is adding the word **himself** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the words that none other than our Lord Jesus spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 20 35 ps2i figs-metonymy τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the words of the Lord Jesus Paul is using the term **words** to mean a statement that Jesus made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 71537d1e6fec1412bd5f59893cef9e63d07ed2b9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 16:10:56 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 300/446] Removed "idiomatically" and "figuratively" from Acts notes --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 946 +++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ 1 file changed, 473 insertions(+), 473 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 123316e8af..109637ffcf 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1,12 +1,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -ACT front intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Acts

1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)
2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)
3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)
4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)
5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)
6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)

Luke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part.

### What is the book of Acts about?

The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”

### Who wrote the book of Acts?

The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the church?

The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.

### The kingdom of God

The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Figurative usages in the book of Acts

\r\r“arise/arising”

\r\rLuke often says “arise” or “arising” figuratively to mean taking action to get an enterprise under way, rather than to mean getting up from a sitting or lying position. Notes will indicate where this figurative usage occurs.\r\r“brothers”

\r\rLuke often uses the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Although this term is masculine, Luke uses the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate that the word has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])\r\r### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts

\r\r“to the same”

\r\rThe phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.

\r\r“in/to/into the temple”

\r\rLuke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.

\r

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?

The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.

First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets [ ]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are:
- Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’”
- Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.”
- Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.”
- Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”

Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are:
- Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.”
- Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.”
- Acts 10:19, “three men. Some versions read “two men” or “some men.”
- Acts 10:30, ““Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.”
- Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”).
- Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.”
- Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -ACT 1 intro vyg9 0 # Acts 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Ascension

This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]])

### Baptism

Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in [1:5](../01/05.md). In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers figuratively to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in [2:4](../02/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])

### “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God”

Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in [1:3](../01/03.md), he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse.

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Long sentence

As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the end of [1:3](../01/03.md). ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

### The details of the death of Judas

There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death.

It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it.

But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in [1:18](../01/18.md) that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you can let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.

### The 12 disciples

There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts.

All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known.

Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in [1:13](../01/13.md) instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible. +ACT front intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Acts

1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)
2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)
3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)
4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)
5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)
6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)

Luke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part.

### What is the book of Acts about?

The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”

### Who wrote the book of Acts?

The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the church?

The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.

### The kingdom of God

The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Figurative usages in the book of Acts

“arise/arising”

Luke often says “arise” or “arising” to mean taking action to get an enterprise under way, rather than to mean getting up from a sitting or lying position. Notes will indicate where this figurative usage occurs.“brothers”

Luke often uses the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Although this term is masculine, Luke uses the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate that the word has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts

“to the same”

The phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.

“in/to/into the temple”

Luke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.



### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?

The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.

First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets [ ]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are:
- Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’”
- Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.”
- Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.”
- Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”

Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are:
- Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.”
- Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.”
- Acts 10:19, “three men. Some versions read “two men” or “some men.”
- Acts 10:30, ““Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.”
- Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”).
- Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.”
- Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +ACT 1 intro vyg9 0 # Acts 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Ascension

This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]])

### Baptism

Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in [1:5](../01/05.md). In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in [2:4](../02/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])

### “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God”

Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in [1:3](../01/03.md), he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse.

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Long sentence

As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the end of [1:3](../01/03.md). ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

### The details of the death of Judas

There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death.

It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it.

But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in [1:18](../01/18.md) that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you can let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.

### The 12 disciples

There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts.

All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known.

Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in [1:13](../01/13.md) instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible. ACT 1 1 q9ep figs-explicit τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην 1 I made the first account Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by **the first account** he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 1 a000 ὦ Θεόφιλε 1 O Theophilus Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence. ACT 1 1 ryj5 translate-names Θεόφιλε 1 Theophilus **Theophilus** is the name of a man. It means “friend of God.” It may be his actual name, or it may describe what this man was like. Most translations treat it as his name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 1 1 a001 figs-explicitinfo περὶ πάντων…ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν 1 all that Jesus began both to do and to teach Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that Jesus had been doing something else (working as a carpenter) but then began to do something new when he started his ministry. In your language, it might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. Alternate translation: “all that Jesus both did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 1 1 a002 figs-hyperbole περὶ πάντων…ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν 1 all that Jesus began both to do and to teach This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “about some of the most important things that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 1 2 a003 figs-idiom ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας 1 until that day when While this did happen on a specific day, Luke is likely using the word **day** idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “up to the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 1 2 a003 figs-idiom ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας 1 until that day when While this did happen on a specific day, Luke is likely using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “up to the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 2 n435 figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη 1 he was taken up If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 2 a424 figs-explicit ἀνελήμφθη 1 he was taken up Luke is referring to Jesus being **taken up** into heaven. See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “he was taken up into heaven” or “God took him up into heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 3 a004 οἷς καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν, ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις 1 to whom also, after he had suffered, he presented himself living with many proofs As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus also presented himself alive with many proofs to his apostles after he had suffered” @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ ACT 1 3 a006 figs-abstractnouns τὰ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας το ACT 1 4 a007 figs-doublenegatives ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ 1 not to depart from Jerusalem, but If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **depart**. Alternate translation: “to remain in Jerusalem and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 1 4 vb7g figs-quotemarks ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι 1 not to depart from Jerusalem The content of Jesus’ instructions to the apostles on this occasion begins here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate and punctuate the material from here to the end of the verse as a direct quotation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 1 4 a008 translate-names Ἱεροσολύμων 1 Jerusalem **Jerusalem** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 1 4 sg4h figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 the promise of the Father Jesus is referring figuratively to the Holy Spirit by association with the way God made a **promise** to send the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 1 4 sg4h figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 the promise of the Father Jesus is referring to the Holy Spirit by association with the way God made a **promise** to send the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 1 4 a009 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 of the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “of God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) ACT 1 4 tj6r figs-quotations ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου 1 which you heard from me In keeping with his engaging storytelling style, Luke begins a quotation from Jesus here without introducing it with a formula such as “he said.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include an introductory formula in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He said, ‘You heard about this from me’” or “He said, ‘I told you about this’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 1 4 d3kr figs-you ἠκούσατέ 1 you heard Here, **you** is plural because Jesus is speaking to the apostles, so use the plural form of “you” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. In [1:6](../01/06.md), “you” is singular because Jesus alone is being addressed, so the singular form would be accurate there. In general these notes will not discuss whether **you** is singular or plural when this should be clear from the context, but they will address ambiguous cases where this may not be clear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ ACT 1 8 a016 translate-names Ἰερουσαλὴμ…Ἰουδαίᾳ…Σαμ ACT 1 8 vb4m figs-idiom ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 to the end of the earth This is a reference to place, not to time. Jesus does not mean “until the world ends.” Alternate translation: “all over the world” or “to the places on the earth that are farthest away from here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 9 e1q1 figs-explicit βλεπόντων αὐτῶν 1 as they were looking Your language may require you to specify the object of **looking**. Alternate translation: “as they were looking at him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 9 l1cq figs-activepassive ἐπήρθη 1 he was raised up If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. (See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “he rose up” or “God raised him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 1 9 ug58 figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν 1 from their eyes Luke is using the **eyes** of the apostles figuratively to mean their capacity to see. Alternate translation: “from their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 1 9 ug58 figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν 1 from their eyes Luke is using the **eyes** of the apostles to mean their capacity to see. Alternate translation: “from their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 1 10 enu1 figs-explicit ἀτενίζοντες ἦσαν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 they were looking intently into heaven Since a cloud was able to block the apostles’ view, it is clear that Luke is using the word translated **heaven** here in one of its specific senses to mean “sky.” It would be good to make clear that the apostles were not seeing into heaven itself. Alternate translation: “gazing at the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 10 a017 figs-metaphor καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο 1 and behold, two men Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these **two men** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then two men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 1 10 a018 grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 and Luke uses the word translated **And** to indicate that the event of the men appearing happened after the event of Jesus going up. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) @@ -71,19 +71,19 @@ ACT 1 14 a035 figs-explicit γυναιξὶν 1 the women Luke assumes that his ACT 1 14 a036 translate-names Μαρία 1 Mary **Mary** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 1 14 a037 translate-kinship τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 his brothers These were Jesus’ younger brothers. They were the sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you may wish to use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) ACT 1 15 il8w writing-newevent καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 And in those days Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. The phrase refers to the period of time after Jesus ascended, when the disciples were meeting in the upper chamber. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -ACT 1 15 cup2 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Luke is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “during that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 1 15 cup2 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “during that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 15 a038 translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 having stood up Peter **stood up** to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 1 15 liz1 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 1 15 liz1 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 1 15 a039 figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. As the General Introduction to Acts suggests, here and throughout the book, if you retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate that it has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 1 15 tl5m writing-background ἦν τε ὄχλος ὀνομάτων ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ὡς ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι 1 and the multitude of names to the same was about 120 Luke provides this background information to help readers appreciate what happens shortly afterwards in the story, when the church grows in one day to many times this size. It may be helpful to put this background information first in the verse as a separate sentence, in which case it would not have to be in parentheses. Alternate translation: “Now the number of people in that one place was about 120.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 1 15 a040 figs-metonymy ὄχλος ὀνομάτων 1 the multitude of names Luke is using the term **names** figuratively to mean “people,” by association with the way that people have names. Alternate translation: “the number of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 1 15 a040 figs-metonymy ὄχλος ὀνομάτων 1 the multitude of names Luke is using the term **names** to mean “people,” by association with the way that people have names. Alternate translation: “the number of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 1 15 a041 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in that one place” or “in their Christian fellowship” ACT 1 16 a042 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 16 a043 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 1 16 a045 figs-infostructure ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν, ἣν προεῖπε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ περὶ Ἰούδα, τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν 1 it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled that the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus If your readers would misunderstand this, you could put the information that Peter provides to identify this **scripture** before his statement that it had to be **fulfilled**. It may be helpful to make that statement a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus. It was necessary for that scripture to be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 1 16 i8tl figs-activepassive ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν 1 it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the things needed to take place that the scripture described” or, if you put the background information first as a separate sentence, “What that scripture described needed to take place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 16 a046 προεῖπε 1 spoke before Alternate translation: “spoke beforehand” or “spoke in advance” -ACT 1 16 f3um figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ 1 by the mouth of David Peter is using the word **mouth** figuratively to refer to words that David spoke or sang using his mouth and that he recorded in the book of Psalms, as Peter indicates in [1:20](../01/20.md). Alternate translation: “through the words of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 1 16 f3um figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ 1 by the mouth of David Peter is using the word **mouth** to refer to words that David spoke or sang using his mouth and that he recorded in the book of Psalms, as Peter indicates in [1:20](../01/20.md). Alternate translation: “through the words of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 1 16 a047 translate-names Δαυεὶδ…Ἰούδα 1 David … Judas **David** and **Judas** are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 1 16 a048 figs-synecdoche τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν 1 who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus Peter is using the act of guiding **the ones arresting Jesus** to represent all of the things that Judas did to betray Jesus. This also included meeting beforehand with his enemies, receiving payment for the betrayal, and looking for the best opportunity to catch Jesus away from the crowds. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in more general terms. Alternate translation: “who betrayed Jesus to his enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 1 17 q73y grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 For Peter uses the word **For** to introduce the reason for a result that is described in [1:21–22](../01/21.md), after Luke provides further background information and Peter quotes the scripture he referred to in [1:16](../01/16.md). The overall meaning is, “Since Judas was one of us apostles, we need to replace him with another witness of the ministry of Jesus.” But since so much material comes between the reason and the result, it may be helpful to give an indication here that Peter has a response in mind. Alternate translation: “There is something important we need to do in response to this scripture being fulfilled, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ ACT 1 17 a052 figs-quotemarks τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ACT 1 18 tmv1 writing-background μὲν οὖν 1 Now indeed Luke is using this expression to introduce further background information that he provides in this verse and the next one about how Judas died and about what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter’s speech. You may want to indicate that by putting these verses in parentheses or by using the equivalent convention in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 1 18 dd58 figs-nominaladj οὗτος 1 this one Luke is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could say “he” or use the name “Judas.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 1 18 a053 figs-abstractnouns ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 from the wage of unrighteousness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **unrighteousness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for doing an unrighteous deed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 1 18 w83j figs-metonymy ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 from the wage of unrighteousness Luke is using the term **unrighteousness** figuratively to describe Judas betraying Jesus, by association with the way that was an unrighteous thing to do. Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for betraying Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 1 18 w83j figs-metonymy ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 from the wage of unrighteousness Luke is using the term **unrighteousness** to describe Judas betraying Jesus, by association with the way that was an unrighteous thing to do. Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for betraying Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 1 18 kg3q figs-explicit πρηνὴς γενόμενος 1 having fallen headfirst Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Judas did not fall down accidentally. Rather, he threw himself onto the field intentionally in order to kill himself. The implications are that he must have done this from a height. Alternate translation: “because he then threw himself down from a height onto that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 18 a054 πρηνὴς γενόμενος 1 having fallen headfirst The word **headfirst** describes someone falling forward, as opposed to falling backwards. Alternate translation: “having fallen forward” ACT 1 18 a055 figs-activepassive ἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ 1 all his entrails were poured out If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all his inward parts poured out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ ACT 1 21 xz69 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν…ἡμᾶς 1 us … us In the first in ACT 1 21 zuf7 figs-idiom εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς 1 the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us Peter is speaking in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 22 qb8j figs-abstractnouns ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου 1 beginning from the baptism of John If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **baptism**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “beginning from when John started baptizing people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 1 22 a060 translate-names Ἰωάννου 1 John **John** is the name of a man. Peter means the man who was known as John the Baptist. See how you translated his name in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 1 22 a061 figs-idiom τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς 1 the day on which While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific **day**, Peter may be using the word **day** idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 1 22 a061 figs-idiom τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς 1 the day on which While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific **day**, Peter may be using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 22 a062 writing-pronouns ἀνελήμφθη…τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ 1 he was taken up … his resurrection The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun **his** also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 1 22 yi3a figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν 1 he was taken up from us If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 22 a063 figs-exclusive ἀφ’ ἡμῶν…σὺν ἡμῖν 1 from us … with us When Peter says **from us**, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says **with us**, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -136,11 +136,11 @@ ACT 1 24 a068 translate-versebridge 0 Judas betrayed Jesus and abandoned his p ACT 1 24 a069 figs-hendiadys προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν 1 praying they said Together the words **praying** and **said** indicate that the believers said what they did while praying. Alternate translation: “they said in prayer” or “they prayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 1 24 zd1f figs-synecdoche προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν 1 praying they said The pronoun **they** refers to all of the believers, but one of the apostles alone probably spoke these words on behalf of everyone. Alternate translation: “as the believers were all praying together, one of the apostles said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 1 24 a070 σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων 1 You, Lord, heart-knower of all Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the hearts of all people” -ACT 1 24 se6m figs-metaphor σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων 1 You, Lord, heart-knower of all Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the thoughts and motives of all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 1 24 se6m figs-metaphor σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων 1 You, Lord, heart-knower of all Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the thoughts and motives of all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 1 24 a071 figs-youformal σὺ Κύριε 1 you, Lord The word **you** is singular because the person who is praying is addressing God. If your language has a formal form of “you” that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form in your translation. However, it might be more natural in your language for someone who has a good, close relationship with God to address God using the informal form of “you.” Use your best judgment about what form to use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]]) ACT 1 24 a072 figs-nominaladj ὃν ἐξελέξω ἐκ τούτων τῶν δύο ἕνα 1 which one from these two The person who is praying is using the adjective **two** as a noun to refer to specific people, the two men whom the believers have proposed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “which one of these two men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 1 25 mg47 figs-hendiadys λαβεῖν τὸν τόπον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης καὶ ἀποστολῆς 1 to take this place of ministry and apostleship The person who is praying is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **apostleship** identifies what kind of **ministry** this is. Alternate translation: “to take this place of apostolic ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -ACT 1 25 ryv6 figs-metaphor ἀφ’ ἧς παρέβη Ἰούδας 1 from which Judas turned aside The expression **turned aside** figuratively means that Judas stopped performing this ministry. Alternate translation: “which Judas stopped fulfilling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 1 25 ryv6 figs-metaphor ἀφ’ ἧς παρέβη Ἰούδας 1 from which Judas turned aside The expression **turned aside** means that Judas stopped performing this ministry. Alternate translation: “which Judas stopped fulfilling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 1 25 tx6n figs-euphemism πορευθῆναι εἰς τὸν τόπον τὸν ἴδιον 1 to go to his own place This phrase uses a mild expression to describe Judas’ death and likely also his judgment after death. Alternate translation: “and died under God’s judgment as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) ACT 1 26 a073 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the believers did as a result of Peter’s speech. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 1 26 r84c writing-pronouns ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς 1 they cast lots for them The pronoun **they** refers to the believers and the pronoun **them** refers to Joseph and Matthias. You may want to specify that for clarity. (But if you decide to retain the pronoun **them** and if your language marks the dual form, **them** would be dual because it refers to those two men.) Alternate translation: “the believers cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -156,16 +156,16 @@ ACT 2 1 i4sb writing-pronouns ἦσαν πάντες ὁμοῦ 1 they were all ACT 2 1 a077 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “in united Christian fellowship” ACT 2 2 qjc3 ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 from heaven The word translated **heaven** could mean: (1) “the sky.” Alternate translation: “from the sky” (2) the sound came from **heaven** itself. ACT 2 2 a078 figs-simile ὥσπερ φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας 1 as of a strong wind being borne along Luke is using a simile to describe what this wind was like. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to a similar loud sound that your readers would recognize. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It sounded like a strong wind being borne along” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -ACT 2 2 jec5 figs-metaphor φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας 1 a strong wind being borne along Luke speaks figuratively of the wind as if it were being carried through the air. Alternate translation: “a mighty, rushing wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 2 2 a079 figs-metaphor ἐπλήρωσεν ὅλον τὸν οἶκον 1 it filled the whole house Luke speaks figuratively of this sound as if it **filled** the **house**. Alternate translation: “it could be heard throughout the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 2 jec5 figs-metaphor φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας 1 a strong wind being borne along Luke speaks of the wind as if it were being carried through the air. Alternate translation: “a mighty, rushing wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 2 a079 figs-metaphor ἐπλήρωσεν ὅλον τὸν οἶκον 1 it filled the whole house Luke speaks of this sound as if it **filled** the **house**. Alternate translation: “it could be heard throughout the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 2 t4y4 ὅλον τὸν οἶκον 1 the whole house Luke may be using the word translated **house** in one of its specific senses to mean a building. So this could have been either a private home or a larger building. Alternate translation: “the entire building” -ACT 2 2 a080 figs-idiom οὗ ἦσαν καθήμενοι 1 where they were sitting Luke may be using the term **sitting** idiomatically to mean “meeting.” Alternate translation: “in which they were meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 2 2 a080 figs-idiom οὗ ἦσαν καθήμενοι 1 where they were sitting Luke may be using the term **sitting** to mean “meeting.” Alternate translation: “in which they were meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 3 re3t γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός 1 tongues as if of fire This phrase means “something like tongues of fire,” and a “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire.” (The expression is used with that meaning in [Isaiah 5:24](../isa/05/24.md), for example.) This is not a simile. Luke is describing what these objects looked like. Alternate translation: “objects that looked like flames of fire” ACT 2 3 xtk4 διαμεριζόμεναι 1 distributing themselves This means that the objects that looked like flames of fire spread out so that there was one on each person. Alternate translation: “spreading around” ACT 2 3 a081 writing-pronouns ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν 1 they sat upon each one of them The pronoun **they** refers to the objects, and the pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “one of the objects sat upon each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 2 3 a082 figs-metaphor ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν 1 they sat upon each one of them Luke is using the word **sat** figuratively to indicate that the objects remained in one place once they had spread around. Alternate translation: “one of the objects remained on each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 3 a082 figs-metaphor ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν 1 they sat upon each one of them Luke is using the word **sat** to indicate that the objects remained in one place once they had spread around. Alternate translation: “one of the objects remained on each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 4 v7hi figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 2 4 a251 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking figuratively as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “they were all inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 4 a251 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “they were all inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 4 a083 figs-explicitinfo ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις 1 they began to speak in other tongues Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that the disciples had been doing something else (speaking in their own languages) but then began to do something new when the Holy Spirit filled them. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “they spoke in other languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 2 4 nr9f figs-explicit ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις 1 they began to speak in other tongues The implication, as [2:6–11](../02/06.md) makes clear, is that the disciples were speaking languages that they did not know. Alternate translation: “they began to speak in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 4 a084 καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς 1 as the Spirit was giving them to speak out Here, **giving** has the sense of enabling. Alternate translation: “as the Spirit was enabling them to speak out” @@ -178,14 +178,14 @@ ACT 2 6 bpj7 figs-activepassive συνεχύθη 1 was confused If your readers ACT 2 6 u9hc writing-pronouns ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ λαλούντων αὐτῶν 1 each one was hearing them speaking in his own language The pronoun **them** refers to the believers and the pronoun **his** refers to each person in the multitude. Alternate translation: “each person in the multitude could hear one of the disciples speaking in that person’s own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 2 7 m8kd figs-doublet ἐξίσταντο…καὶ ἐθαύμαζον 1 they were … amazed and were marveling The terms **amazed** and **marveling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 2 7 a087 figs-activepassive ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον 1 they were all amazed and were marveling The expression **were … amazed** is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed all of them and they were marveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 2 7 a088 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold **Behold** is an expression that speakers use to focus the attention of their listeners on what they are about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used figuratively to get people to pay attention. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 7 a088 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold **Behold** is an expression that speakers use to focus the attention of their listeners on what they are about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used to get people to pay attention. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 7 wnk2 figs-rquestion οὐχ…ἅπαντες οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ λαλοῦντες Γαλιλαῖοι 1 are not all these who are speaking Galileans? The speakers are not looking for information. They are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “all of these people who are speaking are Galileans!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 2 7 a089 translate-names Γαλιλαῖοι 1 Galileans See how you translated the name **Galileans** in [1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 2 8 hzm8 figs-rquestion καὶ πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν, ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν? 1 And how are we hearing, each in our own language in which we were born? The speakers do not expect someone to be able to answer this question for them. Rather, they are using the question form to express their amazement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you can translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So we should not each be hearing them speak in our own languages in which we were born!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 2 8 a090 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And The speakers are using the word translated **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 2 8 a091 figs-explicit πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος 1 how are we hearing, each Your language may require you to specify the object of **hearing**. Alternate translation: “how are we each hearing them speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 8 a092 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἡμῶν 1 we … our The speakers are using the words **we** and **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive forms of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 2 8 wb5t figs-metaphor ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν 1 in which we were born The speakers say figuratively that they **were born** in these languages to mean that they learned them from birth. Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 8 wb5t figs-metaphor ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν 1 in which we were born The speakers say that they **were born** in these languages to mean that they learned them from birth. Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 8 a093 figs-activepassive ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν 1 in which we were born If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is a metaphor, it would be preferable to use another expression to explain its meaning, rather than to say something like “in which our mothers gave birth to us.” Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 9 f1ve translate-names Πάρθοι…Μῆδοι…Ἐλαμεῖται 1 Parthians … Medes … Elamites These are names of three people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 2 9 dm23 translate-names τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν;…Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον…Ἀσίαν 1 Mesopotamia, Judea … Cappadocia, Pontus … Asia These are names of five areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ ACT 2 14 ei5j τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω 1 let this be kn ACT 2 14 hal2 figs-imperative3p τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you” or “this should be known to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 2 14 brjc figs-activepassive τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω 1 The word translated **known** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective **known** expresses the result of action by a different agent (**you**), so you can use an active form with that agent as the implied subject. Alternate translation: “know this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 14 a105 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 and Peter uses the word translated **and** to indicate what his listeners should do as a result of what he has just told them. Alternate translation: “so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ACT 2 14 qp16 figs-metonymy ἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου 1 take my words into your ears Peter is using the term **words** figuratively to mean what he is about to say by using words, and he is using the term **ears** figuratively to mean the capacity for listening. Alternate translation: “listen carefully to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 2 14 qp16 figs-metonymy ἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου 1 take my words into your ears Peter is using the term **words** to mean what he is about to say by using words, and he is using the term **ears** to mean the capacity for listening. Alternate translation: “listen carefully to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 15 a106 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Peter says **for** in this first instance to introduce the reason why the crowd should listen to him. Alternate translation: “You should listen to me because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 2 15 a107 writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 these The demonstrative pronoun **these** refers to the disciples who are speaking different languages. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could add more information to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “these people who are speaking different languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 2 15 a108 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 For Peter says **for** in this second instance to introduce the reason why the people speaking different languages are not drunk. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They are not drunk, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -224,14 +224,14 @@ ACT 2 17 a111 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχά ACT 2 17 a112 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα 1 ‘“And it will be in the last days,” God says, “I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh” You could also avoid having a second-level quotation by turning the direct quotation into an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that in the last days he would pour out his Spirit on all flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 2 17 ijl8 καὶ ἔσται 1 And it will be Alternate translation: “This is what will happen” or “This is what I will do” ACT 2 17 a113 ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 the last days See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter, which recommend not interpreting or explaining it, but representing it simply as ULT does. -ACT 2 17 u2d1 figs-metaphor ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου 1 I will pour out from my Spirit God says figuratively that he will **pour out** his Spirit, as if the Spirit were a liquid, to mean that he will give the Spirit generously and abundantly. Alternate translation: “I will lavish my Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 2 17 a114 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα 1 on all flesh God refers figuratively to **flesh** to mean people by association with the way that people are made of flesh. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 2 17 u2d1 figs-metaphor ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου 1 I will pour out from my Spirit God says that he will **pour out** his Spirit, as if the Spirit were a liquid, to mean that he will give the Spirit generously and abundantly. Alternate translation: “I will lavish my Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 17 a114 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα 1 on all flesh God refers to **flesh** to mean people by association with the way that people are made of flesh. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 17 a115 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ προφητεύσουσιν οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν, καὶ αἱ θυγατέρες ὑμῶν; καὶ οἱ νεανίσκοι ὑμῶν ὁράσεις ὄψονται, καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι ὑμῶν ἐνυπνίοις ἐνυπνιασθήσονται 1 and your sons and your daughters will prophesy, and your young men will see visions, and your old men will dream dreams If you have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation, also do that here in the rest of the verse. It may be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “God said that our sons and our daughters would prophesy and our young men would see visions and our old men would dream dreams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 2 17 a116 figs-exclusive ὑμῶν -1 your If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and translate these instances of **your** as “our,” use the inclusive form of the word “our” in each instance if your language marks that distinction, since Joel would be referring to himself and his listeners. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 2 17 a117 figs-gendernotations οἱ νεανίσκοι…οἱ πρεσβύτεροι 1 young men … old men God speaks separately of **sons** and **daughters** in this verse and of “male servants” and “female servants” in the next verse. But here the contrast is between **young** and **old**. So the word **men** could have a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “young people … old people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 2 18 uwd7 figs-quotations καί γε ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου, ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου, καὶ προφητεύσουσιν 1 And even on my male servants and on my female servants in those days I will pour out from my Spirit, and they will prophesy You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that even on his male servants and on his female servants in those days he would pour out from his Spirit, and they would prophesy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 2 18 nd34 ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου 1 on my male servants and on my female servants If your language has masculine and feminine forms of the word “servant,” it would be accurate to use those forms here. Other languages can indicate this distinction in other ways, as ULT does with the adjectives “male” and “female.” -ACT 2 18 a118 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days Here, **days** idiomatically means a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 2 18 a118 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days Here, **days** means a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 18 wz2i figs-metaphor ἐπὶ…ἐπὶ…ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου 1 on … on … I will pour out from my Spirit See how you translated this in [2:17](../02/17.md). Alternate translation: “to … to … I will give my Spirit abundantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 19 a119 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ δώσω 1 And I will give You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that he would give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 2 19 a120 δώσω τέρατα…καὶ σημεῖα 1 I will give wonders … and signs Alternate translation: “I will show wonders … and signs” @@ -239,11 +239,11 @@ ACT 2 19 a121 ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἄνω 1 in the heaven above Since Go ACT 2 19 p5zi figs-possession ἀτμίδα καπνοῦ 1 vapor of smoke Here the possessive form describes **vapor** that looks smoky or that has **smoke** in it. Alternate translation: “smoky vapor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 2 20 ylv7 figs-quotesinquotes ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα, πρὶν ἢ ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ 1 The sun will be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord comes You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that sun would be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 2 20 a6yh figs-activepassive ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will turn the sun to darkness” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “God said that he would turn the sun to darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 2 20 a122 figs-metaphor ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness God is speaking figuratively as if he would change the **sun** into something else. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” or “The sun will no longer shine brightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 20 a122 figs-metaphor ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness God is speaking as if he would change the **sun** into something else. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” or “The sun will no longer shine brightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 20 a123 figs-abstractnouns ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **darkness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 20 a124 figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 and the moon to blood Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the moon will be turned to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 2 20 a125 figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 and the moon to blood If you decide to supply words as the previous note suggests, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form. Alternate translation: “and I will turn the moon to blood” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “and that he would turn the moon to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 2 20 f34k figs-metaphor καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 and the moon to blood God is speaking figuratively as if he would change the **moon** into something else. Alternate translation: “and the moon will look like blood” or “and the moon will appear to be red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 20 f34k figs-metaphor καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 and the moon to blood God is speaking as if he would change the **moon** into something else. Alternate translation: “and the moon will look like blood” or “and the moon will appear to be red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 20 swb2 figs-doublet ἡμέραν…τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ 1 the great and remarkable day The words **great** and **remarkable** mean similar things. They are being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very great day” or “the truly remarkable day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 2 20 lc4g figs-idiom ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου 1 the day of the Lord comes This is an expression that many of the prophets use. It refers to the time when God will judge and punish people for their sins. Alternate translation: “the time when the Lord judges and punishes people for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 20 a126 figs-123person ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου 1 the day of the Lord comes In this expression, God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “time arrives when I judge and punish people for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) @@ -252,11 +252,11 @@ ACT 2 21 a128 καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς 1 And it will be, everyone Alternate ACT 2 21 vql5 figs-activepassive πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται 1 everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 21 a129 figs-idiom πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται 1 everyone who may call on The expression **call on** means to make an appeal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone who may appeal to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 21 a130 figs-123person τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “my name” or “me by name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -ACT 2 21 a131 figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord Here, **name** figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 2 21 a131 figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 21 a132 figs-explicit τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord The implication is that people would appeal to God to show them mercy and save them. Alternate translation: “the Lord for mercy and salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 21 a133 figs-quotemarks σωθήσεται 1 will be saved This is the end of Joel’s quotation of the Lord. If you chose to mark the Lord’s words as a third-level quotation, indicate that ending here with a closing third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. It is also the end of Peter’s quotation of Joel. If you chose to mark Joel’s words as a second-level quotation, similarly indicate the ending of that quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 2 22 sa78 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Men, Israelites This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 2 22 g6vj figs-metonymy ἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 hear these words Peter is using the term **words** figuratively to mean what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 2 22 g6vj figs-metonymy ἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 hear these words Peter is using the term **words** to mean what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 22 a134 translate-names Ἰησοῦν τὸν Ναζωραῖον 1 Jesus the Nazarene The word **Nazarene** describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 2 22 f2t1 figs-activepassive ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 attested to you by God If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God proved he had sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 22 a135 figs-doublet δυνάμεσι, καὶ τέρασι, καὶ σημείοις 1 with mighty deeds and wonders and signs The terms **mighty works**, **wonders**, and **signs** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “by means of many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -264,18 +264,18 @@ ACT 2 23 a136 figs-nominaladj τοῦτον 1 This one Peter is using the demons ACT 2 23 i6un figs-activepassive τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἔκδοτον 1 given up by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God The term translated **given up** is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, but even so you may wish to translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up by his determined counsel and foreknowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 23 s38b figs-abstractnouns τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **counsel** and **foreknowledge**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “as God had planned in a determined way for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 23 a137 figs-activepassive τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God The word **determined** is a passive verbal form that you could express with an active form. Alternate translation: “in a way that God had determined as he planned for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 2 23 f5kn figs-synecdoche ἀνείλατε 1 you killed It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 2 23 e38a figs-metonymy διὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων 1 of the lawless Here, **hand** refers figuratively to actions. Alternate translation: “through the actions of the lawless” or “by what the lawless did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 2 23 f5kn figs-synecdoche ἀνείλατε 1 you killed It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 2 23 e38a figs-metonymy διὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων 1 of the lawless Here, **hand** refers to actions. Alternate translation: “through the actions of the lawless” or “by what the lawless did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 23 a138 figs-nominaladj ἀνόμων 1 the lawless Peter is using the adjective **lawless** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can supply the word “people” to show this. Alternate translation: “lawless people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 2 23 f6kd figs-metonymy ἀνόμων 1 of the lawless By **lawless**, Peter does not mean people who disregard the law and break the law. He is figuratively describing Gentiles (that is, people who are not Jews) by association with the fact that they do not have the Jewish law. Alternate translation: “of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 2 23 f6kd figs-metonymy ἀνόμων 1 of the lawless By **lawless**, Peter does not mean people who disregard the law and break the law. He is describing Gentiles (that is, people who are not Jews) by association with the fact that they do not have the Jewish law. Alternate translation: “of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 23 a197 προσπήξαντες 1 having fastened This is a reference to the crucifixion of Jesus. Alternate translation: “having nailed him to a cross” or “by crucifying him” ACT 2 24 a140 ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν 1 whom God raised up It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But God raised him up” ACT 2 24 ei37 figs-idiom ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν 1 whom God raised up The idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God brought back to life” or, as a new sentence, “But God brought him back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 2 24 s8j3 figs-metaphor λύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου 1 having loosed the agonies of death Peter speaks figuratively of the **agonies of death** as if they were ropes with which Jesus had been tied, and of God bringing Jesus back to life as if God had untied those ropes and set him free. Alternate translation: “delivering him from the agonies of death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 24 s8j3 figs-metaphor λύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου 1 having loosed the agonies of death Peter speaks of the **agonies of death** as if they were ropes with which Jesus had been tied, and of God bringing Jesus back to life as if God had untied those ropes and set him free. Alternate translation: “delivering him from the agonies of death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 24 a141 figs-possession τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου 1 the agonies of death Peter uses the possessive form to describe **death** as something that is characterized by **agonies.** Alternate translation: “agonizing death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 2 24 a142 figs-explicit καθότι οὐκ ἦν δυνατὸν κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 because it was not possible for him to be held by it If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why this was **not possible**. Alternate translation: “because God is so much stronger than death that it was not possible for him to be held by it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 24 ykq4 figs-activepassive κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 for him to be held by it If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for death to hold him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 2 24 vuf4 figs-personification κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 for him to be held by it Peter speaks of death figuratively as if it were a living thing that held Jesus captive. Alternate translation: “for him to remain dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 2 24 vuf4 figs-personification κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 for him to be held by it Peter speaks of death as if it were a living thing that held Jesus captive. Alternate translation: “for him to remain dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 2 25 dd5a figs-quotesinquotes Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 For David says about him, ‘I saw the Lord always before me, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation. (Peter is quoting from [Psalm 16:8–11](../psa/16/08.md).) Alternate translation: “For David said about him that he saw the Lord before him through all, for he was at his right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 2 25 a143 writing-pronouns Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 For David says about him, ‘I saw the Lord always before me, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved The pronoun **him** refers to the Messiah, about whom David is prophesying. This means that within the quotation, the pronouns **I** and **my** are spoken by the Messiah. If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and change these pronouns to “he,” “him,” and “his,” it may be helpful to indicate the references in some cases so that your readers will recognize this. Alternate translation: “For David said about the Messiah that he saw the Lord before him through all, for the Lord was at the Messiah’s right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 2 25 a144 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Peter uses the word **For** to introduce a reason why the crowd should believe him when he says that God brought Jesus back to life. The reason is that the Scriptures predicted this. As a result, the crowd should be confident that it did happen. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You can be confident that God did bring Jesus back to life, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -283,47 +283,47 @@ ACT 2 25 a145 figs-explicit Δαυεὶδ…λέγει εἰς αὐτόν 1 Dav ACT 2 25 n2ls figs-metaphor ἐνώπιόν μου 1 before me The phrase **before me**, which means “in front of me,” is a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “present with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 25 tqak figs-ellipsis διὰ παντός 1 The phrase **through all** is an ellipsis for “through all times.” It means “always.” Alternate translation: “at all times” or “always” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 2 25 a146 figs-nominaladj ἐκ δεξιῶν μού 1 at my right Here the adjective **right** is being used as a noun to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could say that specifically. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 2 25 l6xp figs-metaphor ἐκ δεξιῶν μού 1 at my right In this context, to be at someone’s right side figuratively means to be in a position to help and sustain that person. Alternate translation: “there to help me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 2 25 a147 figs-metaphor μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 I should not be moved Here, **moved** means to be taken out of a safe and secure position, and so figuratively it means to be harmed. Alternate translation: “I will not be harmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 25 l6xp figs-metaphor ἐκ δεξιῶν μού 1 at my right In this context, to be at someone’s right side means to be in a position to help and sustain that person. Alternate translation: “there to help me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 25 a147 figs-metaphor μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 I should not be moved Here, **moved** means to be taken out of a safe and secure position, and so it means to be harmed. Alternate translation: “I will not be harmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 25 s4yp figs-activepassive μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 I should not be moved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one will harm me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 26 a148 figs-quotesinquotes διὰ τοῦτο ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου, καὶ ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου; ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 Because of this, my heart was glad and my tongue exulted. And indeed, my flesh will also dwell in hope You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “Because of this, his heart was glad and his tongue exulted, and indeed his flesh would also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -ACT 2 26 z8vw figs-metaphor ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου 1 my heart was glad Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “I felt glad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 2 26 a149 figs-metonymy ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου 1 my tongue exulted Here, the **tongue** figuratively represents the capacity for speech. Alternate translation: “I said joyful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 2 26 zz6k figs-metonymy καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope Here, **flesh** figuratively means the human body by association with the way that is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “my body will also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 2 26 z8vw figs-metaphor ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου 1 my heart was glad Here, the **heart** represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “I felt glad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 26 a149 figs-metonymy ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου 1 my tongue exulted Here, the **tongue** represents the capacity for speech. Alternate translation: “I said joyful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 2 26 zz6k figs-metonymy καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope Here, **flesh** means the human body by association with the way that is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “my body will also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 26 a150 figs-abstractnouns καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **hope**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “hopefully.” Alternate translation: “my body will also live hopefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 2 26 a151 figs-personification καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope The Messiah is speaking figuratively as if his body itself would live hopefully. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope for my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 2 26 a151 figs-personification καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope The Messiah is speaking as if his body itself would live hopefully. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope for my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 2 26 a152 figs-explicit καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what **hope** the Messiah had for his body. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope that God will bring my body back to life after I die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 27 m3ij figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 For you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 2 27 a153 figs-parallelism οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay These two statements mean similar things. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it may be helpful to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **nor** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon my soul to Hades, no, you will not allow your Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) ACT 2 27 whi3 figs-youformal οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις…οὐδὲ δώσεις…σου 1 you will not abandon … nor will you allow your The words **you** and **your** are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in [1:24](../01/24.md) in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]]) -ACT 2 27 a154 figs-synecdoche οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην 1 you will not abandon my soul to Hades The Messiah says **my soul** figuratively to mean himself, using one part of his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 2 27 a154 figs-synecdoche οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην 1 you will not abandon my soul to Hades The Messiah says **my soul** to mean himself, using one part of his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 2 27 a155 translate-names οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην 1 you will not abandon my soul to Hades **Hades** is the name for the realm of the dead. If your readers would not be familiar with that name, you could express its meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 2 27 a156 figs-explicit τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 your Holy One The expression **Holy One** is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 27 rld3 figs-123person τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 your Holy One The Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -ACT 2 27 a157 figs-idiom ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 to see decay Here the word **see** is being used idiomatically to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 2 27 a157 figs-idiom ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 to see decay Here the word **see** is being used to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 27 l5cd figs-explicit ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 to see decay The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 28 a158 figs-quotesinquotes ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς; πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου 1 You made known to me the paths of life; you will fill me with gladness with your face You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be helpful to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah said that God had made known to him the paths of life and that God would fill him with gladness with his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 2 28 a159 figs-youformal ἐγνώρισάς…πληρώσεις…σου 1 You made known … you will fill … your The words **you** and **your** are singular and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in the similar case in [1:24](../01/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]]) -ACT 2 28 xhi3 figs-metaphor ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς 1 You made known to me the paths of life The Messiah speaks figuratively of **life** as if it consisted of **paths** that a person walked along. Those represent the various pursuits and adventures that people have in life. The word **known** refers to experiential knowledge. Alternate translation: “You enabled me to experience the adventures of life once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 2 28 ej5m figs-metaphor πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης 1 you will fill me with gladness The Messiah speaks figuratively as if he were a container that God could **fill** with **gladness**. Alternate translation: “you will give me great gladness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 2 28 y7gf figs-metaphor μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου 1 with your face Here, the word **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “by your presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 28 xhi3 figs-metaphor ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς 1 You made known to me the paths of life The Messiah speaks of **life** as if it consisted of **paths** that a person walked along. Those represent the various pursuits and adventures that people have in life. The word **known** refers to experiential knowledge. Alternate translation: “You enabled me to experience the adventures of life once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 28 ej5m figs-metaphor πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης 1 you will fill me with gladness The Messiah speaks as if he were a container that God could **fill** with **gladness**. Alternate translation: “you will give me great gladness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 28 y7gf figs-metaphor μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου 1 with your face Here, the word **face** represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “by your presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 28 a161 figs-quotemarks μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου 1 with your face This is the end of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark David’s words as a second-level quotation, in your translation you can indicate this ending with a closing second-level quotation mark or whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 2 29 pv1x figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 29 ps7c figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” or “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 2 29 wh97 figs-metaphor τοῦ πατριάρχου Δαυεὶδ 1 the patriarch David A **patriarch** is literally the ancestor of a group of people. David was not the ancestor of all the Jews to whom Peter is speaking. So he is likely using the term figuratively to identify David as the king who established the Israelite kingdom as a lasting dynasty. Alternate translation: “David, the founder of our kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 29 wh97 figs-metaphor τοῦ πατριάρχου Δαυεὶδ 1 the patriarch David A **patriarch** is literally the ancestor of a group of people. David was not the ancestor of all the Jews to whom Peter is speaking. So he is likely using the term to identify David as the king who established the Israelite kingdom as a lasting dynasty. Alternate translation: “David, the founder of our kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 29 vtc6 figs-activepassive ἐτάφη 1 he was buried If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people buried him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 2 29 a162 figs-idiom ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης 1 to this day Peter is using the word **day** idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 2 29 a162 figs-idiom ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης 1 to this day Peter is using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 30 a163 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore Peter uses the word **Therefore** to introduce the logical result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “We can therefore conclude that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 2 30 a164 figs-explicit προφήτης…ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδὼς 1 being a prophet and having known Peter is still speaking about David. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because David was a prophet and he knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 2 30 x11q figs-metonymy ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ 1 to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne Peter is using the word **loins** figuratively to represent David himself by association with the way the reproductive organs are in the loins. He is using the word **fruit** in a broad sense to mean what someone or something produces, in this case a descendant. Alternate translation: “to set one of his descendants upon his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 2 30 hq71 figs-synecdoche ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ 1 to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne When Peter says that God promised to **set** one of David’s descendants **upon his throne**, he is using that one action figuratively to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 2 30 x11q figs-metonymy ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ 1 to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne Peter is using the word **loins** to represent David himself by association with the way the reproductive organs are in the loins. He is using the word **fruit** in a broad sense to mean what someone or something produces, in this case a descendant. Alternate translation: “to set one of his descendants upon his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 2 30 hq71 figs-synecdoche ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ 1 to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne When Peter says that God promised to **set** one of David’s descendants **upon his throne**, he is using that one action to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 2 31 a165 writing-pronouns ἐλάλησεν…ἐνκατελείφθη…αὐτοῦ 1 he spoke … was he abandoned … his The first instance of **he** refers to David, and the second instance of **he** and the pronoun **his** refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 2 31 a166 figs-abstractnouns ἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 he spoke about the resurrection of the Christ If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 31 tn4b figs-activepassive οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην 1 neither was he abandoned to Hades If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 31 a167 figs-explicit τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the Christ **Christ** is the Greek word for “Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use the term “Messiah” in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 31 a168 translate-names ᾍδην 1 Hades See how you translated the term **Hades** in [2:27](../02/27.md). Alternate translation: “the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 2 31 a169 figs-idiom οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 nor did his flesh see decay Here the word **see** is being used idiomatically to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “nor did his flesh experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 2 31 a170 figs-metonymy οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 nor did his flesh see decay Peter is using the word **flesh** figuratively to mean the body of Jesus by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 2 31 a169 figs-idiom οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 nor did his flesh see decay Here the word **see** is being used to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “nor did his flesh experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 2 31 a170 figs-metonymy οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 nor did his flesh see decay Peter is using the word **flesh** to mean the body of Jesus by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 31 up5x figs-explicit οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 nor did his flesh see decay The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decomposition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 32 udn1 figs-idiom ἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός 1 God has raised up As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “God has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 32 kw6a figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we By **we**, Peter means himself and the other apostles, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -334,21 +334,21 @@ ACT 2 33 a172 figs-explicit τῇ δεξιᾷ…τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to the right ACT 2 33 a173 figs-possession τήν τε ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος τοῦ Ἁγίου 1 the promise of the Holy Spirit from the Father Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as someone whom God the Father promised to send. Alternate translation: “the promised Holy Spirit from the Father” or “the Holy Spirit whom the Father promised to send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 2 33 a174 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) ACT 2 33 c1dr writing-pronouns ἐξέχεεν 1 he has poured out The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has poured out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 2 33 wsg9 figs-metaphor ἐξέχεεν 1 he has poured out Peter says figuratively that Jesus has **poured out** the things that the people are seeing and hearing as if those things were a liquid. Peter means that Jesus has given these things generously and abundantly. See how you translated the similar statement in [2:17](../02/17.md), to which Peter is likely alluding here. Alternate translation: “he has generously given” or “he has abundantly given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 33 wsg9 figs-metaphor ἐξέχεεν 1 he has poured out Peter says that Jesus has **poured out** the things that the people are seeing and hearing as if those things were a liquid. Peter means that Jesus has given these things generously and abundantly. See how you translated the similar statement in [2:17](../02/17.md), to which Peter is likely alluding here. Alternate translation: “he has generously given” or “he has abundantly given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 34 m7fy figs-quotesinquotes λέγει…αὐτός, εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 he himself says, ‘The Lord said to my Lord, “Sit at my right The material in [2:34–35](../02/34.md) contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting another psalm by David ([Psalm 110:1](../psa/110/01.md)), and David is quoting God. You could avoid having second-level and third-level quotations by translating this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he himself says that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 2 34 i8wu figs-explicit εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου 1 The Lord said to my Lord **The Lord** means God here, and **my Lord** means the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God said to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 34 a175 figs-nominaladj ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 at my right Here the adjective **right** is used as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 2 34 kvn8 figs-explicit ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 at my right In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a place of honor next to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 2 35 nf1x figs-metaphor ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 until I make your enemies a stool for your feet The psalm says figuratively that God would make the Messiah’s **enemies** a **stool** for his **feet** to mean that God would conquer those enemies and make them submit to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 35 nf1x figs-metaphor ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 until I make your enemies a stool for your feet The psalm says that God would make the Messiah’s **enemies** a **stool** for his **feet** to mean that God would conquer those enemies and make them submit to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 35 a176 figs-quotemarks τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 for your feet This is the end of David’s quotation of the Lord and of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark these in your translation as a third-level and a second-level quotation, indicate that ending here with the appropriate closing quotation marks or the comparable punctuation or convention in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 2 36 a177 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore Peter is using the word **Therefore** to introduce the result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “Since David was not talking about himself, but about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 2 36 msqt figs-imperative γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may all the house of Israel know” or “all the house of Israel should know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 2 36 tgbf figs-123person γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative, since to this point in his speech Peter has been addressing his audience in the second person. Alternate translation: “all you in the house of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -ACT 2 36 pnp5 figs-metaphor πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 all the house of Israel Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Israel** figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 36 pnp5 figs-metaphor πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 all the house of Israel Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Israel** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 37 s85q figs-activepassive ἀκούσαντες…κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 hearing this, they were pierced in the heart If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 37 xan1 writing-pronouns κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 they were pierced in the heart Here the word **they** refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 2 37 w1ma κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 they were pierced in the heart Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **heart**. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in their hearts” -ACT 2 37 l15x figs-metaphor κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 they were pierced in the heart Luke is speaking figuratively. The people were not literally **pierced in the heart** by anything. He means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “they felt guilty and became very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 37 l15x figs-metaphor κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 they were pierced in the heart Luke is speaking. The people were not literally **pierced in the heart** by anything. He means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “they felt guilty and became very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 37 zls6 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 37 a178 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 37 a179 figs-exclusive τί ποιήσωμεν 1 what should we do The people in the crowd are asking about themselves but not the apostles, so use the exclusive form of **we** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -356,27 +356,27 @@ ACT 2 38 a180 figs-you μετανοήσατε…βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστ ACT 2 38 cmb7 figs-activepassive βαπτισθήτω 1 be baptized If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 38 geb2 figs-idiom ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Peter has just finished demonstrating that God sent Jesus as the Christ or Messiah [2:36](../02/36.md). He is saying here that people should acknowledge that as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins. So **in the name** here is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 38 a181 figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν 1 for the forgiveness of your sins If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 2 39 a182 figs-metonymy ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία 1 the promise is Peter is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in [2:33](../02/33.md). Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 2 39 a182 figs-metonymy ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία 1 the promise is Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in [2:33](../02/33.md). Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 39 a183 figs-explicit ὑμῖν…καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν 1 to you and to your children Peter showed the people in [2:17](../02/17.md) that God’s promise through Joel to pour out his Spirit included their “sons” and “daughters.” So the implication could be that the people in the crowd should not think that any of them have to reach a certain age before professing faith in Jesus and being baptized. Alternate translation: “to all of you, no matter what your age,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 39 a184 figs-metaphor ὑμῖν…καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν 1 to you and to your children Peter could also be using the word **children** in a figurative sense to mean “descendants.” In that case, he would be saying that faith in Jesus as the Messiah was not something just for the people living at this time, but also for people living at all times in the future. That would parallel what he says next about faith in Jesus not being just for those who are present in this place, but for people living in all places. Alternate translation: “to you and your descendants” or “to you and everyone who will live after you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 39 v8vi figs-explicit πᾶσι τοῖς εἰς μακρὰν 1 to all who are at a distance Since Peter is speaking to Jews as a fellow Jew, this is likely an implicit reference to the Jews who were living in other parts of the Roman Empire. However, this statement took on greater meaning when the church realized that “God has also given repentance unto life to the Gentiles,” as its leaders say in [11:18](../11/18.md). So you could either express the likely initial meaning here in your translation, or you could leave the statement more general. Alternate translation: “to the Jews living in faraway parts of the empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 39 a185 figs-exclusive Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 the Lord our God By **the Lord our God**, Peter means the God of the Jews. He is speaking of himself and his fellow apostles and of the people in the crowd, so use the inclusive form of the word **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 2 39 a186 figs-idiom ἂν προσκαλέσηται 1 may call Peter is using the word **call** in an idiomatic sense here. Alternate translation: “may bring to salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 2 40 a187 figs-metonymy ἑτέροις…λόγοις πλείοσιν 1 with many other words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 2 40 a187 figs-metonymy ἑτέροις…λόγοις πλείοσιν 1 with many other words Luke is using the term **words** to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 40 v6ip figs-hendiadys διεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς 1 he testified and urged them Here Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **urged** tells in what way Peter **testified** further about faith in Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “he testified urgently to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 2 40 a188 figs-activepassive σώθητε 1 Be saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “Let God save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 40 wtd5 figs-explicit ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης 1 from this perverse generation The implication is that God is going to punish **this perverse generation**. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that this perverse generation will suffer if it does not repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 40 a189 figs-explicit τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης 1 this perverse generation The word **perverse** describes things or actions that do not conform to what is right and expected. Peter may be referring implicitly to how the people of this **generation** rejected and killed Jesus. Alternate translation: “this wicked generation that rejected and killed Jesus” or “the wicked people of this time who rejected and killed Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 41 k1kj writing-endofstory οὖν 1 Therefore Luke uses the word **Therefore** to introduce information about what happened after the story of Pentecost as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 2 41 r9qz figs-idiom ἀποδεξάμενοι τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 having received his word Here, **received** means that the people in the crowd accepted that what Peter said was true. Alternate translation: “because they believed his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 2 41 a190 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 his word Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 2 41 a190 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 his word Luke is using the term **word** to mean what Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 41 kz64 figs-activepassive οἱ…ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 41 sv5j figs-synecdoche ψυχαὶ 1 souls Luke is using one part of these people, their **souls**, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 2 41 a47f figs-activepassive προσετέθησαν 1 were added If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 42 a191 figs-abstractnouns ἦσαν…προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς 1 they were continuing in the teaching of the apostles and in fellowship, in the breaking of bread and in prayers If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **teaching** and **fellowship**, you could express the same ideas with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 2 42 gc59 figs-synecdoche τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 in the breaking of bread Luke could be using the word **breaking** to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be figuratively using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 2 42 gc59 figs-synecdoche τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 in the breaking of bread Luke could be using the word **breaking** to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 2 42 a192 figs-explicit τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 in the breaking of bread By **the breaking of bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it and also sharing a cup of wine. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in observing the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 2 43 a193 figs-personification ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 fear was coming on every soul Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this **fear** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 2 43 a193 figs-personification ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 fear was coming on every soul Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 2 43 gi9v figs-synecdoche ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 fear was coming on every soul Luke is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 2 43 a194 figs-hyperbole ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 fear was coming on every soul Luke says **every** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “very many people began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 2 43 ys3y figs-explicit πολλά…τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο 1 many wonders and signs were happening through the apostles Since Luke says that these things happened **through the apostles**, the implication is that God was doing them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could make God the subject of this sentence and **wonders and signs** the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ ACT 2 45 n9hi πᾶσιν, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν 1 ACT 2 46 in43 καθ’ ἡμέραν τε προσκαρτεροῦντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 and, continuing unanimously The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Continuing to meet with one accord” or “Continuing to meet harmoniously” ACT 2 46 a427 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so here **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 46 q1ge figs-synecdoche κλῶντές…κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον 1 breaking bread in each house See how you translated the similar expression in [2:42](../02/42.md). There were two possible meanings there, but here **breaking bread** seems to mean specifically sharing meals. Alternate translation: “having meals together in their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 2 46 i2yk figs-metaphor ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας 1 with exultation and sincerity of heart Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 2 46 i2yk figs-metaphor ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας 1 with exultation and sincerity of heart Here, the **heart** represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 46 a195 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας 1 with exultation and sincerity of heart If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **exultation** and **sincerity**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 47 z6ig figs-hyperbole αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν 1 praising God and having favor with the whole people Luke says **the whole people** as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 2 47 kc42 figs-activepassive τοὺς σῳζομένους 1 those who were being saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -401,16 +401,16 @@ ACT 3 1 a198 τὴν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour In this culture, people beg ACT 3 1 a199 translate-ordinal τὴν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) ACT 3 2 f227 figs-activepassive καί τις ἀνὴρ, χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχων, ἐβαστάζετο, ὃν ἐτίθουν καθ’ ἡμέραν πρὸς τὴν θύραν τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 And a certain man, being lame from the womb of his mother, was being carried, whom each day they placed at the gate of the temple If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **was being carried**. Alternate translation: “And there was a certain man who had been lame since birth whom people would carry to the temple every day and place at the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 2 u6nu writing-background καί τις ἀνὴρ 1 And a certain man In this verse, Luke provides background information about this man to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 3 2 j68t figs-metonymy ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 from the womb of his mother Luke is figuratively describing the time of the lame man’s birth by association with the way he came from the **womb** of his **mother** when he was born. Alternate translation: “since birth” or “since he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 3 2 j68t figs-metonymy ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 from the womb of his mother Luke is describing the time of the lame man’s birth by association with the way he came from the **womb** of his **mother** when he was born. Alternate translation: “since birth” or “since he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 2 a200 figs-activepassive τὴν λεγομένην 1 that is called If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 2 a201 translate-names Ὡραίαν 1 Beautiful **Beautiful** is the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 3 2 a202 figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερόν 1 into the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 3 3 a203 figs-explicit ἠρώτα ἐλεημοσύνην λαβεῖν 1 asked to receive alms The man specifically asked Peter and John to give him **alms** (that is, a charitable gift). Alternate translation: “asked to receive alms from them” or “asked them to give him alms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 3 4 xq4u ἀτενίσας…Πέτρος εἰς αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ Ἰωάννῃ εἶπεν 1 Peter, looking intently at him with John, said This means that both Peter and John looked at the man. It does not mean that Peter looked at the man and at John, and it does not mean that both Peter and John spoke to the man. Alternate translation: “Peter and John looked intently at him, and Peter said” ACT 3 4 e3c6 figs-exclusive βλέψον εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 Look at us Peter is asking the man to look at him and John, not to look at himself as well, so use the exclusive form of **us** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 3 6 x6bm figs-metonymy ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον 1 silver and gold Peter is referring figuratively to money by association with the way that **silver** and **gold** were used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 3 6 x6bm figs-metonymy ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον 1 silver and gold Peter is referring to money by association with the way that **silver** and **gold** were used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 6 zi9t figs-explicit ὃ δὲ ἔχω, τοῦτό σοι δίδωμι 1 but what I have, this I give to you What happens next in the story shows that by **what I have**, Peter implicitly means the authority that Jesus has given him to heal. Alternate translation: “but Jesus has given me the authority to heal, and I will use it on your behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 3 6 t2vf figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου 1 In the name of Jesus Christ the Nazarene Here the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. Alternate translation: “By the authority of Jesus Christ the Nazarene, I command you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 3 6 t2vf figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου 1 In the name of Jesus Christ the Nazarene Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. Alternate translation: “By the authority of Jesus Christ the Nazarene, I command you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 6 a204 translate-names Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου 1 of Jesus Christ the Nazarene The word **Nazarene** describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 3 6 a205 figs-imperative περιπάτει 1 walk This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I give you the ability to walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 3 7 ec6j writing-pronouns πιάσας αὐτὸν τῆς δεξιᾶς χειρὸς, ἤγειρεν αὐτόν; παραχρῆμα δὲ ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά 1 seizing him by the right hand, he raised him up, and immediately his feet and ankles were made strong In this verse, the pronoun **he** refers to Peter, while the pronouns **him** and **his** refer to the lame man. You could indicate that specifically in at least some of the cases if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “seizing the man by the right hand, Peter raised him up, and immediately the man’s feet and ankles were made strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ ACT 3 10 zy7h ἐπεγίνωσκον…αὐτὸν, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦ ACT 3 10 p2zh translate-names τῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ 1 the Beautiful Gate This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 3 10 a209 figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 10 j6zf figs-doublet ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him The words **wonder** and **amazement** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. You can combine the words in your translation if that might be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with complete amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ACT 3 10 a210 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him Luke is speaking figuratively as if the people were containers that these responses could fill. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him made them completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 3 10 a210 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him Luke is speaking as if the people were containers that these responses could fill. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him made them completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 10 a211 figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wonder** and **amazement**, you could express the same idea with verbs. Alternate translation: “they wondered and marveled greatly at what had happened to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 3 11 a212 figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ λαὸς 1 all the people The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 3 11 rk1m translate-names τῇ στοᾷ τῇ καλουμένῃ Σολομῶντος 1 the porch that is called Solomon’s This is the name of a covered walkway in the Jerusalem temple courtyard. It consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. People had named this porch after King Solomon. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -435,7 +435,7 @@ ACT 3 12 j6ld figs-rquestion ἢ ἡμῖν τί ἀτενίζετε, ὡς ἰ ACT 3 12 g4y1 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν…ἰδίᾳ 1 at us … our own By **us** and **our own**, Peter means himself and John but not also the people in the crowd. So use the exclusive forms of **us** and **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 3 12 mwd9 figs-hendiadys ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ 1 by our own power or godliness Peter may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **or.** The term **godliness** describes what the crowd may consider the source or nature of the **power** that he and John have. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “by our own godly power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 3 13 q8q2 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ…Ἰσαὰκ…Ἰακώβ 1 Abraham … Isaac … Jacob These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 3 13 a213 figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 3 13 a213 figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 13 kmqw figs-gendernotations τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 The term **fathers** could mean: (1) in a generic sense that includes both men and women, the ancestors of the Israelites. If you decide to retain this metaphor in your translation, you could say “fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (2) Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In that case, Peter would be repeating the meaning of the previous phrase, and the term would have a masculine meaning. Alternate translation: “of the patriarchs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 3 13 a214 τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν 1 his Servant Jesus See the discussion of the term **Servant** in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “Jesus his Messiah” ACT 3 13 a215 παρεδώκατε 1 delivered up Alternate translation: “handed over for trial” @@ -447,36 +447,36 @@ ACT 3 14 a218 figs-nominaladj τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 the H ACT 3 14 a219 figs-doublet τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 the Holy and Righteous One The terms **Holy** and **Righteous** mean similar things. Peter is using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Supremely Holy One” or “Jesus, who was supremely holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 3 14 a220 figs-explicit τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 the Holy and Righteous One This description of Jesus is an implicit assertion that he is the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 3 14 s6qj figs-activepassive ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν 1 for a man, a murderer, to be granted to you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “asked Pilate to release to you a man who was a murderer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 3 15 a221 figs-synecdoche ἀπεκτείνατε 1 you killed It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “you demanded the death of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 3 15 a221 figs-synecdoche ἀπεκτείνατε 1 you killed It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “you demanded the death of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 3 15 ljn8 figs-explicit τὸν…Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς 1 the Originator of Life Peter is using the expression **the Originator of Life** as another title for Jesus. This expression could be a reference to the way Jesus, as the Son of God, took part in the original creation of all life. It could also be a reference to the way Jesus gives spiritual life to all who believe in him. Or it could mean both things. In any event, Peter is drawing a contrast between the life-giving Jesus whom the people rejected and the life-taking murderer whom they asked Pilate to release. It may be best in your translation to bring out this contrast while leaving the specific meaning open. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who gives life rather than taking it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 3 15 a222 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 3 15 jwb1 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we Peter is speaking at least of himself and John, and perhaps also of the other apostles, but not of the people he is addressing. So use the exclusive form of **we** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **we** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we and the other apostles whom Jesus chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 3 15 a223 writing-pronouns ἡμεῖς 1 we If you conclude that Peter is referring only to himself and John, and if your language uses dual forms, use the dual form of the pronoun **we** here, since it would apply to two people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 3 16 abc2 figs-infostructure ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, τοῦτον ὃν θεωρεῖτε καὶ οἴδατε, ἐστερέωσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 by faith in his name, this one whom you see and know, his name has made strong Your language might naturally present the phrases in this sentence in a different order. Alternate translation: “this man whom you see and know had faith in his name, and his name has made him strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 3 16 qt8w writing-pronouns τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ…τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 in his name … his name The pronoun **his** refers to Jesus in both of these instances. Alternate translation: “in the name of Jesus … that name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 3 16 a224 figs-metonymy τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ…τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 in his name … his name Peter is using the **name** of Jesus figuratively to mean his authority or power. Alternate translation: “in the authority of Jesus … the authority of Jesus” or “in the power of Jesus … the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 3 16 a224 figs-metonymy τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ…τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 in his name … his name Peter is using the **name** of Jesus to mean his authority or power. Alternate translation: “in the authority of Jesus … the authority of Jesus” or “in the power of Jesus … the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 16 abc3 writing-pronouns ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ 1 the faith that is through him has given to him The first instance of the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus, and the second instance refers to the man who had been lame. Alternate translation: “the faith that is through Jesus has given to this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 3 16 a225 figs-personification ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ τὴν ὁλοκληρίαν ταύτην 1 the faith that is through him has given to him this complete health Peter is speaking of **faith** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could have given **complete health** to the man. Alternate translation: “because this man had faith in Jesus, Jesus has given him this complete health” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 3 16 a225 figs-personification ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ τὴν ὁλοκληρίαν ταύτην 1 the faith that is through him has given to him this complete health Peter is speaking of **faith** as if it were a living thing that could have given **complete health** to the man. Alternate translation: “because this man had faith in Jesus, Jesus has given him this complete health” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 3 17 v45t καὶ νῦν 1 And now Peter uses the expression **And now** to shift the people’s attention away from the lame man so that he can speak to them directly. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose. -ACT 3 17 a226 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Peter addresses the people figuratively as his **brothers** because they are related to him as fellow descendants of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 3 17 a226 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Peter addresses the people as his **brothers** because they are related to him as fellow descendants of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 17 x62k figs-explicit κατὰ ἄγνοιαν ἐπράξατε 1 you acted in ignorance Peter likely means that the people **acted in ignorance** of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 3 17 a228 figs-ellipsis ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ὑμῶν 1 as also your rulers Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and that your rulers also acted in ignorance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 3 18 gcc1 figs-infostructure ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἃ προκατήγγειλεν διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐπλήρωσεν οὕτως 1 But what God foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer, he has fulfilled thus Your language might naturally put first in this sentence the information that God **fulfilled** prophecies when Christ suffered. Alternate translation: “But in this way God has fulfilled what he foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 3 18 ms6d διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of all the prophets Since Peter is speaking of a group of people, **the prophets**, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **mouth**. Alternate translation: “through the mouths of all the prophets” -ACT 3 18 z3l7 figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of all the prophets Peter is figuratively using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what all the prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 3 18 z3l7 figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of all the prophets Peter is using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what all the prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 18 a229 figs-hyperbole πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 of all the prophets Peter is using the word **all** as a generalization. It is true that the overall witness of Old Testament prophecy is that the Messiah would come first in humility and suffering, but not every prophet spoke specifically of the sufferings of Christ. Alternate translation: “of many prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 3 19 cw18 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψατε 1 turn back Peter is speaking of his listeners figuratively as if they were traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to **turn back** onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 3 19 cw18 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψατε 1 turn back Peter is speaking of his listeners as if they were traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to **turn back** onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 19 zm6y figs-activepassive πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας 1 for your sins to be wiped away If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God will wipe away your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 19 a230 figs-metaphor πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας 1 for your sins to be wiped away Peter is speaking of sins as if they would be physically **wiped away** when God forgave them. Alternate translation: “so that God will forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 3 20 a231 figs-personification ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 so that times of refreshment may come from the face of the Lord Peter is speaking of these **times** figuratively as if they could actively **come** to his listeners on their own. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord may send you times of refreshing from his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 3 20 a231 figs-personification ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 so that times of refreshment may come from the face of the Lord Peter is speaking of these **times** as if they could actively **come** to his listeners on their own. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord may send you times of refreshing from his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 3 20 x3ca figs-abstractnouns καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως 1 times of refreshment If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **refreshment**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “refreshing” or “restful.” Alternate translation: “refreshing times” or “restful times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 3 20 f2wm figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 from the face of the Lord Peter is using the term **face** figuratively to represent the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 3 20 f2wm figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 from the face of the Lord Peter is using the term **face** to represent the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 20 h3nk figs-explicit ἀποστείλῃ 1 he may send Peter is referring implicitly to Christ’s coming again. Alternate translation: “he may again send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 3 20 yzr6 figs-activepassive τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν 1 the one appointed for you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 3 21 vgn8 figs-personification ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι 1 whom it is necessary for heaven to receive Peter is speaking figuratively of **heaven** as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 3 21 vgn8 figs-personification ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι 1 whom it is necessary for heaven to receive Peter is speaking of **heaven** as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 3 21 x2f3 figs-abstractnouns ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων 1 the times of the restoration of all things If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **restoration**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 3 21 a2m8 figs-idiom ἀπ’ αἰῶνος 1 from the age The expression **from the age** means that something happened a long time ago. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 3 21 a12i figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων…αὐτοῦ προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of his holy prophets Peter is figuratively using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 3 21 a12i figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων…αὐτοῦ προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of his holy prophets Peter is using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 22 a232 figs-quotesinquotes Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Moses indeed said, ‘The Lord our God will raise up for you a prophet like me from your brothers. You will listen to him according to everything—whatever he may speak to you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 3 22 a233 translate-names Μωϋσῆς 1 Moses **Moses** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 3 22 a249 translate-textvariants Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 The Lord our God Some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 somewhat loosely but with the same basic meaning. ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 exactly. Still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) @@ -493,23 +493,23 @@ ACT 3 23 a239 figs-idiom ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προ ACT 3 24 u6x3 figs-hyperbole πάντες…οἱ προφῆται 1 all the prophets Here the phrase **all the prophets** is probably not the same kind of generalization that it seems to be in [3:18](../03/18.md). It is true in a more literal sense that all the prophets **announced these days**. There was something in the messages of each one of them that pointed to the culmination of God’s work in the coming of Jesus. So even if your language does not use generalizations for emphasis, you can translate these words just as Peter says them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 3 24 xp9h ἀπὸ Σαμουὴλ καὶ τῶν καθεξῆς 1 from Samuel and those after him Alternate translation: “beginning with Samuel and continuing with those who lived after he did” ACT 3 24 a240 translate-names Σαμουὴλ 1 Samuel **Samuel** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 3 24 m9pr figs-idiom τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας 1 these days Peter is using the word **days** idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “this time” or “these times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 3 24 m9pr figs-idiom τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας 1 these days Peter is using the word **days** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “this time” or “these times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 3 24 a241 figs-explicit τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας 1 these days Peter is referring to a specific time to mean implicitly what is happening at that time. Alternate translation: “the things that are happening now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 3 25 rh2n figs-metonymy ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 You are the sons of the prophets Peter is using the word **sons** figuratively in the sense of “heirs,” by association with the way that children inherit from their parents. He means that the Israelites living at this time are going to receive something as a legacy from those who lived before them. Alternate translation: “You are the ones who are going to receive what the prophets promised” or “You are the ones who are going to experience what the prophets foretold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 3 25 rh2n figs-metonymy ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 You are the sons of the prophets Peter is using the word **sons** in the sense of “heirs,” by association with the way that children inherit from their parents. He means that the Israelites living at this time are going to receive something as a legacy from those who lived before them. Alternate translation: “You are the ones who are going to receive what the prophets promised” or “You are the ones who are going to experience what the prophets foretold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 25 a242 figs-gendernotations οἱ υἱοὶ 1 the sons Although the term **sons** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “the sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 3 25 a243 figs-metonymy καὶ τῆς διαθήκης ἧς διέθετο ὁ Θεὸς πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 and of the covenant that God made with your fathers The figurative sense of **sons** as “heirs” continues in this phrase. Alternate translation: “and who are going to receive what God promised to your fathers when he made a covenant with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 25 a244 figs-quotesinquotes πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ, καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 with your fathers, saying to Abraham, ‘And in your seed will all the families of the earth be blessed’ If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “with your fathers when he said to Abraham that in his seed all the families of the earth would be blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -ACT 3 25 a245 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 your fathers Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 3 25 a245 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 your fathers Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 25 wid4 figs-gendernotations τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 Although the term **fathers** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “your fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 3 25 mad5 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου 1 in your seed The term **seed** figuratively means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “through your descendants” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 3 25 mad5 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου 1 in your seed The term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “through your descendants” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 25 a246 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου 1 in your seed As the apostle Paul notes in [Galatians 3:16](../gal/03/16.md), God used the singular form of the word **seed** when he said this to Abraham, and so the ultimate fulfillment of this promise came when God sent Jesus as the Savior for everyone in the world who would believe in him. That may also be what Peter has in view here, since he refers in the next verse to God’s “Servant,” meaning the Messiah. Alternate translation: “through the Messiah, who will be your descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 3 25 a247 figs-activepassive ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 will all the families of the earth be blessed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will bless all the families of the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 3 25 g31m figs-metonymy πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 all the families of the earth Here, **families** refers figuratively to people groups or nations by association with the way that many of them consist of people who have a common ancestry. Alternate translation: “all the nations of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 3 25 g31m figs-metonymy πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 all the families of the earth Here, **families** refers to people groups or nations by association with the way that many of them consist of people who have a common ancestry. Alternate translation: “all the nations of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 26 b7tz figs-idiom ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν 1 God, having raised up his Servant, sent him The expression **raised up** has the same meaning here as in [3:22](../03/22.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “When God appointed Jesus as the Messiah, he sent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 3 26 z5q6 τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ 1 his Servant See the discussion of the term **Servant** in the General Notes to this chapter, and see how you translated that term in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “his Messiah” -ACT 3 26 x8ss figs-metaphor τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 by turning each of you from your wickedness Here, **turning** someone **from** something figuratively means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:19](../03/19.md). Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 3 26 x8ss figs-metaphor τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 by turning each of you from your wickedness Here, **turning** someone **from** something means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:19](../03/19.md). Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 26 a248 figs-abstractnouns τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 by turning each of you from your wickedness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wickedness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 4 intro pv3a 0 # Acts 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Unity

The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.

### “Signs and wonders”

This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11)

The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “no other name” (4:12)

“There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” figuratively represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear. +ACT 4 intro pv3a 0 # Acts 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Unity

The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.

### “Signs and wonders”

This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11)

The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “no other name” (4:12)

“There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear. ACT 4 1 abc4 writing-pronouns λαλούντων…αὐτῶν 1 as they were speaking The pronoun **they** refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 4 1 ew3l figs-explicit ὁ στρατηγὸς τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 the captain of the temple The temple had its own guards, and this man was their commanding officer. Alternate translation: “the commander of the temple guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 1 a253 translate-names οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι 1 the Sadducees **Sadducees** is the name of a group of Jewish priests. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -520,11 +520,11 @@ ACT 4 2 mg5l figs-abstractnouns καταγγέλλειν ἐν τῷ Ἰησο ACT 4 2 np5g figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 4 3 a254 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the men who came up to Peter and John did because they were so troubled by their teaching. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 4 3 a255 writing-pronouns ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 they laid hands on them The pronoun **they** refers to the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees. The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees laid hands on Peter and John” or “the men who had come up to Peter and John laid hands on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 4 3 zla7 figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 they laid hands on them The expression **laid hands on** figuratively means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 4 3 zla7 figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 they laid hands on them The expression **laid hands on** means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 3 a256 figs-abstractnouns ἔθεντο εἰς τήρησιν 1 put them in custody If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **custody**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “imprison.” Alternate translation: “they imprisoned them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 3 h5f9 figs-explicit ἦν γὰρ ἑσπέρα ἤδη 1 since it was already evening The implication is that the ruling council, which Luke describes in [4:5–6](../04/05.md), would not meet to question anyone at night. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it was already evening and the council would not meet to question them at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 4 a257 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 But Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened after this much of the story as a result of the events within the story itself. This is not the end of the whole story, but it is the end of a significant part of it. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 4 4 a258 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 4 4 a258 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 4 bm1f figs-gendernotations ἀριθμὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν 1 the number of the men Luke is not using the word **men** in a generic sense here. The figure of 5,000 is the number of the men alone. It does not include women and children. So it would not be accurate to translate **men** as “people.” Instead, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this distinction explicitly. Alternate translation: “the number of the men alone, not counting the women and children,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 4 4 qd8g figs-explicit ἐγενήθη…ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε 1 became about 5,000 The word translated **became** could mean: (1) the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 5 lw2d writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -536,10 +536,10 @@ ACT 4 6 l44n translate-names Ἅννας…Καϊάφας…Ἰωάννης… ACT 4 6 a260 ὅσοι ἦσαν ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ 1 as many as were from the high priestly family Alternate translation: “all the other members of the high priestly family who were members of the council” ACT 4 7 abc6 writing-pronouns στήσαντες αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, ἐπυνθάνοντο 1 having set them in their midst, they asked them The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John, and the pronouns **their** and **they** refer to the council members. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the council members had set Peter and John in their midst, the members asked them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 4 7 t1eq figs-doublet ἐν ποίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο ὑμεῖς? 1 By what power or in what name have you done this? The words **power** and **name** (meaning authority; see next note) mean similar things. The council members may be using them together to ask a comprehensive or emphatic question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “By whatever means were you able to do this?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ACT 4 7 jc21 figs-metonymy ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι 1 in what name Here, **name** refers figuratively to authority. Alternate translation: “by what authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 4 7 jc21 figs-metonymy ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι 1 in what name Here, **name** refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by what authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 7 a261 figs-youdual ὑμεῖς 1 you Since the council members are speaking to two men, **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. (All other pronouns in this account that refer to Peter and John would also be dual, such as **them** in its two instances in this verse.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) ACT 4 8 su5x figs-activepassive Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν 1 Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the comparable expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 4 8 a262 figs-metaphor Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν 1 Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said Luke is speaking figuratively of Peter as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 4 8 a262 figs-metaphor Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν 1 Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said Luke is speaking of Peter as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 4 8 a263 figs-merism ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ πρεσβύτεροι 1 Rulers of the people and elders Peter is addressing the entire council by referring to its two components. Some of the members had ruling responsibilities. Others, the **elders**, were added to the council to bring its total membership up to 70, since according to [Exodus 24:1](../exo/24/01.md), that was the number of elders who accompanied Moses when God confirmed the covenant with Israel at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “You members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 4 8 a264 figs-explicit τοῦ λαοῦ 1 of the people Here, **the people** means specifically the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 9 pq85 figs-irony εἰ ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα ἐπὶ εὐεργεσίᾳ ἀνθρώπου ἀσθενοῦς, ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται 1 if we are being questioned today concerning a good deed to a sick man, by what means he was made well Peter is not suggesting seriously that the subject of the questioning is uncertain. He knows the subject, but he is suggesting ironically that it is uncertain so that he can describe it from his own perspective. The council asked by what power or authority he and John did “this,” implying that “this” was something bad, a public disturbance that troubled the authorities. In response, Peter asserts that “this” was instead something good, **a good deed to a sick man**. If it would be helpful to your readers, in your translation you could indicate the meaning that Peter is communicating through this irony. Alternate translation: “what we actually did was a good deed for a sick man, and if you want to know by what means he was made well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) @@ -548,24 +548,24 @@ ACT 4 9 b92n figs-activepassive οὗτος σέσωσται 1 he was made well ACT 4 10 q9ss figs-imperative3p γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you and to all the people of Israel” or “this should be known to you and to all the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 4 10 snd5 figs-activepassive γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 let it be known to you all and to all the people of Israel The word translated **known** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective **known** expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. Alternate translation: “you and all the people of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 10 j3px writing-pronouns πᾶσιν ὑμῖν 1 to you all The pronoun **you** refers to the council members. Alternate translation: “to all of you council members” or “to all of you who are questioning us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 4 10 khn7 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι 1 in the name Here, **name** refers figuratively to power and authority. Alternate translation: “through the power” or “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 4 10 khn7 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι 1 in the name Here, **name** refers to power and authority. Alternate translation: “through the power” or “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 10 a265 translate-names Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου 1 of Jesus Christ the Nazarene See how you translated this in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 4 10 a266 figs-synecdoche ὃν ὑμεῖς ἐσταυρώσατε 1 whom you crucified It was the Romans who literally crucified Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that these Jewish leaders crucified him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 4 10 a266 figs-synecdoche ὃν ὑμεῖς ἐσταυρώσατε 1 whom you crucified It was the Romans who literally crucified Jesus, but Peter says that these Jewish leaders crucified him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 4 10 jyj6 figs-idiom ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 whom God raised from the dead As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God made alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 4 10 a267 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 4 11 nwg6 writing-pronouns οὗτός 1 He The pronoun **He** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 4 11 w195 figs-metaphor ὁ λίθος ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων, ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the stone that was rejected by you, the builders, which has been made into the head of the corner Peter is quoting from [Psalm 118:22](../psa/118/22.md), and the quotation contains a metaphor. This psalm is figuratively describing the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means figuratively that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, we recommend that you translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 4 11 w195 figs-metaphor ὁ λίθος ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων, ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the stone that was rejected by you, the builders, which has been made into the head of the corner Peter is quoting from [Psalm 118:22](../psa/118/22.md), and the quotation contains a metaphor. This psalm is describing the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, we recommend that you translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 4 11 c1bh figs-activepassive ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων 1 that was rejected by you, the builders If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that you, the builders, rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 11 f1nx figs-idiom κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the head of the corner The phrase **the head of the corner** is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 4 12 a268 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία 1 there is no salvation in anyone else In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there is no salvation in no one else.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is the only one in whom there is salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 4 12 tq3z figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία 1 there is no salvation in anyone else If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **salvation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 12 l66w figs-activepassive οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον 1 there is no other name under heaven given If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 4 12 iz7k figs-metonymy οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον…ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς 1 there is no other name … by which we must be saved Here, **name** figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 4 12 iz7k figs-metonymy οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον…ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς 1 there is no other name … by which we must be saved Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 12 jm25 figs-idiom ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 under heaven This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [2:5](../02/05.md). Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 4 12 a269 figs-gendernotations ἐν ἀνθρώποις 1 among men Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “among people” or “to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 4 12 gg8h figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς 1 by which we must be saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 12 tdw8 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 we Peter is using the word **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 4 13 r6d6 figs-idiom θεωροῦντες 1 seeing Luke is using the word **seeing** idiomatically to mean that the council members noticed this and found it significant. Alternate translation: “taking note of” or “impressed with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 4 13 r6d6 figs-idiom θεωροῦντες 1 seeing Luke is using the word **seeing** to mean that the council members noticed this and found it significant. Alternate translation: “taking note of” or “impressed with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 4 13 t6kc figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου 1 the boldness of Peter and John Here the abstract noun **boldness** refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the same idea with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 13 qaa5 figs-explicit καταλαβόμενοι 1 realizing The implication is that the Jewish leaders realized this because of the way Peter and John spoke. Alternate translation: “realizing from the way they spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 13 xn39 writing-pronouns ἐθαύμαζον; ἐπεγίνωσκόν τε αὐτοὺς, ὅτι σὺν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἦσαν 1 they marveled, and they recognized them, that they had been with Jesus Here the pronoun **they** refers in its first two instances to the council members, and in its third instance it refers to Peter and John, as does the pronoun **them**. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this and to state the meaning here more concisely. Alternate translation: “the council members marveled, and they recognized that Peter and John had been with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -575,20 +575,20 @@ ACT 4 14 a270 writing-pronouns σὺν αὐτοῖς ἑστῶτα, τὸν τ ACT 4 14 fq4w figs-explicit οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν 1 they had nothing to say in opposition The implication is that anything the council members said **in opposition** would have been in an attempt to discredit the claim that the man had been healed in the name of Jesus. But there was nothing they could say, since the evidence that the claim was true was right in front of them in the person of the formerly lame man standing on his own. Alternate translation: “they had nothing to say to discredit the account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 15 ql31 writing-pronouns κελεύσαντες…αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους 1 having commanded them to go outside the Sanhedrin, they conferred among themselves The pronoun **them** refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 4 15 a271 translate-names τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 the Sanhedrin **Sanhedrin** is the name of the Jewish ruling council. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 4 15 a272 figs-metonymy τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 the Sanhedrin Luke is figuratively using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin met” or “the council chamber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 4 15 a272 figs-metonymy τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 the Sanhedrin Luke is using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin met” or “the council chamber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 16 p4g6 figs-rquestion τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις? 1 What should we do to these men? This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders were using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As [4:21](../04/21.md) indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) the leaders were asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 4 16 jn12 figs-hyperbole πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 everyone who lives in Jerusalem This is a generalization that the leaders are making to emphasize how widely the news of the healing has spread. Alternate translation: “people who live throughout Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 4 16 nh5s γνωστὸν σημεῖον 1 a notable sign Here the word **sign** has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [2:43](../02/43.md). It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “a remarkable miracle” ACT 4 17 a273 figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ 1 so that it may not be spread If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that it does not spread” or “so that they will not spread it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 17 f71l figs-explicit ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ 1 so that it may not be spread By **it**, the council members do not mean the news of the man’s healing, since they have already said that everyone in Jerusalem knows about it. They mean the teaching that Jesus is Messiah, since they then try to prevent this from spreading by not allowing the apostles to speak to anyone about Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that this teaching about Jesus does not spread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 17 a274 ἐπὶ πλεῖον 1 unto more Alternate translation: “any further” -ACT 4 17 w52j figs-metonymy λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 to speak in this name Here, **name** figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 4 17 w52j figs-metonymy λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 to speak in this name Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 17 a275 figs-doublenegatives μηκέτι λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων 1 no longer to speak in this name to any of men In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “no longer to speak in this name to none of men.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “to stop speaking in this name to any of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 4 17 a276 figs-gendernotations μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων 1 to any of men Here, **men** has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to any person” or “to anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 4 18 a277 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 So Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the council members did as a result of their discussion. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 4 18 a278 writing-pronouns καλέσαντες αὐτοὺς, παρήγγειλαν 1 summoning them, they commanded them The pronoun **them** refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “summoning Peter and John, the council members commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 4 18 a279 figs-doublet μὴ φθέγγεσθαι μηδὲ διδάσκειν 1 neither to speak nor to teach The words **speak** and **teach** mean similar things. The council members may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “not to say anything publicly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ACT 4 18 a280 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Here, **name** figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 4 18 a280 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 19 a281 figs-hendiadys ὁ…Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον 1 answering, Peter and John said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and John responded to the council. Alternate translation: “Peter and John responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 4 19 a282 figs-explicit ὁ…Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον 1 answering, Peter and John said This could mean: (1) Peter and John each said different parts of the quotation in [4:19–20](../04/19.md). (2) Peter spoke these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in [4:8–12](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 19 jf1d figs-metonymy εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Whether it is right before God Here the phrase **before God** refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “Whether God thinks it is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ ACT 4 21 z2bx figs-explicit διὰ τὸν λαόν 1 on account of the people ACT 4 21 jbl6 figs-hyperbole πάντες ἐδόξαζον τὸν Θεὸν 1 they were all glorifying God Here, **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “large numbers of them were glorifying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 4 22 gy8d writing-background ἐτῶν γὰρ ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 For the man to whom this sign of healing had happened was more than 40 years old In this verse, Luke provides background information about the age of the man who was healed to help readers understand why the people considered his healing such a remarkable miracle. In your translation, present this background information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 4 22 a286 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why the people were glorifying God. Alternate translation: “The people were glorifying God because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ACT 4 22 ju4w figs-personification ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 the man to whom this sign of healing had happened Luke is speaking figuratively as if the **healing** had **happened** on its own. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 4 22 ju4w figs-personification ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 the man to whom this sign of healing had happened Luke is speaking as if the **healing** had **happened** on its own. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 4 22 a287 figs-possession τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 this sign of healing Luke is using the possessive form to describe a **sign** that consisted of a **healing**. The word **sign** has the same sense here that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [2:43](../02/43.md). It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “this miraculous healing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 4 23 a288 figs-activepassive ἀπολυθέντες 1 having been released If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “after the council members had released Peter and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 23 a289 figs-go ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἰδίους 1 they came to their own people In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went to their own people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -614,10 +614,10 @@ ACT 4 24 a292 ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 unanimously The word **unanimously** ind ACT 4 24 a293 figs-youformal σὺ 1 you The word **you** is singular, and it refers to God. The same is true of the words “you” and “your” in [4:25–30](../04/25.md). You may have decided to use a formal form of “you” in your translation in such cases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]]) ACT 4 24 a160 figs-merism ποιήσας τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 who made the heaven and the earth and the sea and all that is in them The believers are referring to all of creation by naming its components. Alternate translation: “who created everything that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 4 24 a294 τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 the heaven The believers are using the word translated **heaven** in one of its specific senses to mean the sky. Alternate translation: “the sky” -ACT 4 25 ka83 figs-metonymy ὁ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών 1 the one who said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant The word **mouth** refers figuratively to what David said by using his mouth. Alternate translation: “the one whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 4 25 ka83 figs-metonymy ὁ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών 1 the one who said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant The word **mouth** refers to what David said by using his mouth. Alternate translation: “the one whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 25 vc5z figs-quotesinquotes τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών, ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά? 1 who said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant, ‘Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things?’ As the believers pray together, they quote from one of the psalms that David composed, [Psalm 2:1–2](../psa/02/01.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to ask why the nations raged and why the peoples imagined useless things.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 4 25 a295 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our The believers are using the word **our** to refer to themselves but not to God, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 4 25 kat6 figs-metaphor τοῦ πατρὸς 1 father Here, **father** figuratively means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 4 25 kat6 figs-metaphor τοῦ πατρὸς 1 father Here, **father** means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 4 25 a296 παιδός 1 servant The believers are using the word **servant** here in its ordinary sense, not as a title for the Messiah, so it would not be appropriate to translate it as “Messiah,” as you may have done when it was a title in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [3:26](../03/26.md). ACT 4 25 a297 figs-ellipsis ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά 1 Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, and why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 4 25 a298 figs-parallelism ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά 1 Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Why did the nations rage, indeed, why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -635,25 +635,25 @@ ACT 4 27 a302 translate-names Πόντιος Πειλᾶτος 1 Pontius Pilate ACT 4 27 b1g9 figs-activepassive συνήχθησαν 1 were gathered together If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 27 nuc1 figs-explicit ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 in this city The phrase **this city** refers to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 27 ca33 παῖδά 1 Servant Here the word **Servant** is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to chapter 3, and see how you translated it in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [3:26](../03/26.md). Alternate translation: “Messiah” -ACT 4 27 a303 figs-metaphor ὃν ἔχρισας 1 whom you anointed In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person who was being given the authority to assume an office or to do a special task. The believers are speaking figuratively of anointing to indicate that God appointed Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “whom you appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 4 28 yz7m figs-metonymy ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι 1 all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen Here, **hand** figuratively means God’s power and **counsel** figuratively means God’s plan. Alternate translation: “all that your power and your plan had predetermined to happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 4 27 a303 figs-metaphor ὃν ἔχρισας 1 whom you anointed In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person who was being given the authority to assume an office or to do a special task. The believers are speaking of anointing to indicate that God appointed Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “whom you appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 4 28 yz7m figs-metonymy ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι 1 all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen Here, **hand** means God’s power and **counsel** means God’s plan. Alternate translation: “all that your power and your plan had predetermined to happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 28 a304 figs-hendiadys ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι 1 all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen The words **hand** and **counsel**, joined by **and**, are expressing a single idea. The word **hand**, meaning “power,” tells by what means God intended to carry out his **counsel**, that is, his plan. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -ACT 4 28 a305 figs-personification ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι 1 all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen The believers are speaking figuratively of God’s **hand** and his **counsel** (that is, his power and his plan) as if they had **predetermined** what would happen to Jesus. They mean that God himself had done this. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 4 28 a305 figs-personification ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι 1 all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen The believers are speaking of God’s **hand** and his **counsel** (that is, his power and his plan) as if they had **predetermined** what would happen to Jesus. They mean that God himself had done this. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 4 29 b38z καὶ τὰ νῦν 1 And now The believers use the expression **And now** to direct God’s attention to the request they are making in light of what they have said to this point in their prayer. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose. ACT 4 29 t5qm figs-idiom ἔπιδε ἐπὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς αὐτῶν 1 look upon their threats The phrase **look upon** is an idiomatic way of asking God to pay attention to the threats that the Jewish leaders have made against the believers. Alternate translation: “pay attention to the threats they have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 4 29 a306 figs-123person τοῖς δούλοις σου 1 to your servants The believers are speaking of themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “to us, your servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -ACT 4 29 zh7j figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον σου 1 your word The believers are using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 4 29 zh7j figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον σου 1 your word The believers are using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 29 a307 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης 1 with all boldness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **boldness**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 4 30 x9r1 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρά σου, ἐκτείνειν σε εἰς ἴασιν, καὶ σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα, γίνεσθαι 1 as you stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen Here the **hand** figuratively represents God’s power. To **stretch out** the hand means to use it. So this is a prayer for God to do powerful things. Alternate translation: “as you do powerful things to heal people and to make signs and wonders happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 4 30 x9r1 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρά σου, ἐκτείνειν σε εἰς ἴασιν, καὶ σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα, γίνεσθαι 1 as you stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen Here the **hand** represents God’s power. To **stretch out** the hand means to use it. So this is a prayer for God to do powerful things. Alternate translation: “as you do powerful things to heal people and to make signs and wonders happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 30 a308 figs-doublet σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα 1 signs and wonders The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:43](../02/43.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ACT 4 30 t5uw figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος 1 through the name Here, **name** refers figuratively to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 4 30 t5uw figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος 1 through the name Here, **name** refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 30 txb5 τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ ἁγίου παιδός σου, Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of your holy Servant Jesus Here the word **Servant** is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to chapter 3, and see how you translated it in [3:13](../03/13.md), [3:26](../03/26.md), and [4:27](../04/27.md). Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus, your holy Messiah” ACT 4 31 a309 writing-endofstory καὶ 1 And This verse is the end of the whole story of how the lame man was healed and how Peter and John were arrested as a result. Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 4 31 a310 figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ ἦσαν συνηγμένοι 1 in which they were gathered together If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “where they had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 31 x9b3 figs-activepassive ἐσαλεύθη 1 was shaken If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “shook” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 31 ps3m figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the same expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 4 31 a311 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking figuratively as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 4 31 a312 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 4 31 a311 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 4 31 a312 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 31 a313 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας 1 with boldness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **boldness**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 32 a314 grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information in [4:32–37](../04/32.md) that will help readers understand further episodes in the story. These verses introduce Barnabas, who will be an important character in the book, and they also help account for what happens to Ananias and Sapphira in the next chapter. You can translate the word **Now** with a term or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) ACT 4 32 xu3j figs-metonymy ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία 1 was one in heart and soul Here the word **heart** seems to represent the emotions and the word **soul** seems to represent the desires. Alternate translation: “thought the same way and desired the same things” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -677,7 +677,7 @@ ACT 4 36 a323 translate-names Ἰωσὴφ…Βαρναβᾶς 1 Joseph … Barn ACT 4 36 a324 figs-activepassive ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 who was called Barnabas by the apostles If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 36 a325 figs-activepassive ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form **being translated** with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 36 a326 figs-explicit ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Barnabas means when **translated** from the Aramaic language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement in Aramaic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 4 36 nr4v figs-idiom υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 Son of Encouragement The expression **Son of** figuratively describes a person who shares the qualities of something. The apostles used this name to describe Joseph’s behavior and character, since he was a person who encouraged others. Alternate translation: “the Encourager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 4 36 nr4v figs-idiom υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 Son of Encouragement The expression **Son of** describes a person who shares the qualities of something. The apostles used this name to describe Joseph’s behavior and character, since he was a person who encouraged others. Alternate translation: “the Encourager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 4 36 a327 figs-abstractnouns υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 Son of Encouragement If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **Encouragement**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “the One who Encourages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 36 a328 translate-names Λευείτης 1 a Levite The name **Levite** describes a person from the tribe of Levi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 4 36 a329 translate-names Κύπριος 1 Cyprus **Cyprus** is the name of an island. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -692,8 +692,8 @@ ACT 5 2 a334 figs-explicit ἐνοσφίσατο ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς 1 ACT 5 2 xm1t συνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ἐνέγκας μέρος τι…ἔθηκεν 1 his wife also knowing, and bringing a certain portion, he laid It may be helpful to make two new sentences here, particularly if you add information to the previous phrase as suggested in the preceding note. Alternate translation: “His wife also knew that he was keeping back part of the sale money. He brought a certain portion of the money and laid it” ACT 5 2 dy8b figs-idiom παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων ἔθηκεν 1 he laid it at the feet of the apostles This means that he presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated the same expression in [4:37](../04/37.md). Alternate translation: “he presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 3 grr9 figs-rquestion διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου, ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου? 1 why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back from the price of the land? Peter is using the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not have let Satan fill your heart so that you lied to the Holy Spirit and kept back from the price of the land!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 5 3 pqd4 figs-metaphor διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου 1 why has Satan filled your heart Peter is speaking figuratively of the **heart** of Ananias as if it were a container that Satan had **filled**. Alternate translation: “why have you allowed Satan to influence your heart so strongly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 5 3 a335 figs-metaphor τὴν καρδίαν σου 1 your heart Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 5 3 pqd4 figs-metaphor διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου 1 why has Satan filled your heart Peter is speaking of the **heart** of Ananias as if it were a container that Satan had **filled**. Alternate translation: “why have you allowed Satan to influence your heart so strongly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 5 3 a335 figs-metaphor τὴν καρδίαν σου 1 your heart Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 5 3 a426 figs-events ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου 1 for you to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back from the price of the land Ananais first withheld some of the money, then he lied to the Holy Spirit about this by pretending he was giving all of the money. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “for you to keep back from the price of the land and lie to the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) ACT 5 3 zz5u figs-metonymy ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 for you to lie to the Holy Spirit Ananias did not lie literally to the Holy Spirit, but he did lie to the apostles and to all of the believers who would have learned about his gift, and the Holy Spirit was present in them. So by lying to them, he was effectively also lying to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “for you to lie to the Holy Spirit, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 3 a336 figs-explicit καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς 1 and to keep back from the price of the land The implication of what Peter says here is that Ananias claimed or pretended that he was giving the entire amount that he had received from selling his land. Alternate translation: “by pretending that you were giving us the entire amount when you had kept back some for yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -703,14 +703,14 @@ ACT 5 4 k7nc figs-activepassive πραθὲν 1 being sold If your readers would ACT 5 4 a337 writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν 1 was it not in your authority The pronoun **it** refers to the money that Ananias received from the sale of the land. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could still do whatever you wanted with the money you received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 5 4 a338 writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν 1 was it not in your authority The implications are that Ananias was not obligated to give all of the money to the apostles. He was free to keep some if he wished or if he needed it. He could simply have acknowledged that he was doing that, and giving the rest of the money would still have been a generous act because there was no compulsion. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could have kept some and acknowledged that and you would have still been making a generous gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 5 4 i5dw figs-rquestion τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 How is it that you placed this thing in your heart? Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have placed this thing in your heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 5 4 a339 figs-metaphor τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 How is it that you placed this thing in your heart? Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not have placed this thing in your thoughts!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 5 4 a340 figs-metaphor τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 How is it that you placed this thing in your heart? Peter speaks figuratively of **this thing**, that is, the plan to keep back some of the money, as if Ananias had **placed** it in his **heart**, meaning his thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not even have thought of doing such a thing!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 5 4 a339 figs-metaphor τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 How is it that you placed this thing in your heart? Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not have placed this thing in your thoughts!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 5 4 a340 figs-metaphor τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 How is it that you placed this thing in your heart? Peter speaks of **this thing**, that is, the plan to keep back some of the money, as if Ananias had **placed** it in his **heart**, meaning his thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not even have thought of doing such a thing!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 5 4 a341 figs-metonymy οὐκ ἐψεύσω ἀνθρώποις, ἀλλὰ τῷ Θεῷ 1 You have not lied to men, but to God Ananaias actually has **lied to men**, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of his act. As in the previous verse, where Peter says that Ananias has lied to the Holy Spirit, here he means that Ananias has lied to the apostles and other believers, and God is present in them. So by lying to them, he has effectively also lied to God. Alternate translation: “You have not lied merely to men, but also to God, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 4 a342 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 to men Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “to human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 5 5 a343 figs-metonymy ἀκούων δὲ…τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 And hearing these words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to mean what Peter used words to say. Alternate translation: “When he heard what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 5 5 a343 figs-metonymy ἀκούων δὲ…τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 And hearing these words Luke is using the term **words** to mean what Peter used words to say. Alternate translation: “When he heard what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 5 cc5y figs-euphemism πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν 1 falling down, expired The word translated **expired** means that Ananias “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that he died. Alternate translation: “fell down and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) ACT 5 5 a344 figs-events πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν 1 falling down, expired Ananias fell down because he died. He did not die because he fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that he died and then that he fell. Alternate translation: “died and fell to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) -ACT 5 5 a345 figs-personification ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας 1 great fear came upon all who heard Luke describes this **fear** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “everyone who heard about it came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 5 5 a345 figs-personification ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας 1 great fear came upon all who heard Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “everyone who heard about it came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 5 6 a346 figs-idiom ἀναστάντες δὲ, οἱ νεώτεροι συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν 1 rising up, the young men wrapped him up Here the expression **rising up** means that the young men took an action that they recognized they needed to take. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “the young men took action and wrapped him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 6 a347 figs-explicit οἱ νεώτεροι 1 the young men This could refer to: (1) some strong young men who were present who realized that burying Ananias was a task they could help with. Alternate translation: “some strong young men who were present” (2) a group of young men among the believers who regularly helped the apostles with tasks that required physical strength. Alternate translation: “the young men who regularly helped the apostles with physical tasks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 6 a348 translate-unknown συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν 1 wrapped him up It was the custom in this culture to wrap linen cloths around the bodies of people who had died, in order to prepare the bodies for burial. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “wrapped a linen burial cloth around his body” or “prepared his body for burial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -726,7 +726,7 @@ ACT 5 9 w1lb figs-you ὑμῖν…σου…σε 1 by you … your … you The w ACT 5 9 pg1e πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 to test the Spirit of the Lord Here the word **test** means to challenge. Ananias and Sapphira were trying to see if they could get away with lying about how much they received for the land they sold. Alternate translation: “to challenge the Spirit of the Lord” ACT 5 9 a352 figs-metonymy πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 to test the Spirit of the Lord Ananias and Sapphira actually tested or challenged the apostles, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of their act, as he does similarly in [5:3](../05/03.md) and [5:4](../05/04.md). Since the Spirit of the Lord was present in the apostles, by challenging them, Ananias and Sapphira effectively lied to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “to test the Spirit of the Lord, who is present in us apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 9 a353 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, οἱ πόδες 1 Behold, the feet Peter says **Behold** to get Sapphira to focus her attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And now the feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 5 9 xj1l figs-metonymy οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ 1 the feet of those who buried your husband are at the door Peter is referring figuratively to the return of the young men who buried Ananaias. Their **feet** represent them by association with the way they are using their feet to walk back. The **door** represents their return by association with the way they will come through the door when they return. Alternate translation: “the young men who buried your husband are just now returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 5 9 xj1l figs-metonymy οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ 1 the feet of those who buried your husband are at the door Peter is referring to the return of the young men who buried Ananaias. Their **feet** represent them by association with the way they are using their feet to walk back. The **door** represents their return by association with the way they will come through the door when they return. Alternate translation: “the young men who buried your husband are just now returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 9 a354 figs-explicit οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ 1 the feet of those who buried your husband are at the door Peter is telling Sapphira implicitly that her husband died as a judgment from God when Peter confronted him with the lie about the price of the land. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your husband died as a judgment from God when I confronted him with the lie you both told about the price of the land, and the young men who buried him are just now returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 9 a355 figs-explicit καὶ ἐξοίσουσίν σε 1 and they will carry you out The implications are that Sapphira is also going to die and that the same young men will **carry** her **out** to bury her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are also going to die as a judgment from God, and those same young men are going to carry you out and bury you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 10 s7en figs-euphemism ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν 1 she fell down at his feet and expired The word translated **expired** means that Sapphira “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that she died. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) @@ -734,16 +734,16 @@ ACT 5 10 a356 figs-events ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτ ACT 5 10 nwb9 figs-metonymy ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 she fell down at his feet This means that she fell to the ground in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with the idea of “falling down at a person’s feet,” that is, bowing down to the ground in front of someone as a sign of humility. Alternate translation: “she collapsed onto the ground in front of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 10 a357 figs-explicit οἱ νεανίσκοι 1 the young men See how you translated this expression in [5:6](../05/06.md). However, it may not be necessary to explain again here who these **young men** were in terms of their role in the community. Instead, you could identify them by their role in the story. Alternate translation: “the same young men who had buried Ananias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 11 vym8 writing-endofstory καὶ 1 And This verse is the end of the story about Ananias and Sapphira. Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 5 11 a358 figs-personification ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας ταῦτα 1 great fear came upon the whole church and upon all those hearing these things Luke describes this **fear** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. See how you translated the similar expression in [5:5](../05/05.md). Alternate translation: “the whole church and everyone who heard about these things came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 5 11 a358 figs-personification ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας ταῦτα 1 great fear came upon the whole church and upon all those hearing these things Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. See how you translated the similar expression in [5:5](../05/05.md). Alternate translation: “the whole church and everyone who heard about these things came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 5 12 c2e7 grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce background information in [5:12–16](../05/12.md) that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. You can translate this word with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) -ACT 5 12 sri8 figs-metonymy διὰ…τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ 1 many signs and wonders were happening through the hands of the apostles Luke is using the **hands** of the apostles figuratively to represent their actions. Alternate translation: “the apostles were doing many signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 5 12 sri8 figs-metonymy διὰ…τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ 1 many signs and wonders were happening through the hands of the apostles Luke is using the **hands** of the apostles to represent their actions. Alternate translation: “the apostles were doing many signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 12 ux3n figs-doublet σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα 1 signs and wonders The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in [4:30](../04/30.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 5 12 aud2 writing-pronouns ἦσαν…πάντες 1 they were all The pronoun **they** refers to the whole community of believers. Alternate translation: “the whole community of believers was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 5 12 a359 ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 unanimously The word **unanimously** indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in [1:14](../01/14.md). Alternate translation: “meeting together with one accord” or “meeting together harmoniously” ACT 5 12 k99k translate-names τῇ Στοᾷ Σολομῶντος 1 the Porch of Solomon This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. It was named after King Solomon. See how you translated the phrase “the porch that is called Solomon’s” in [3:11](../03/11.md), which is a description of this same walkway. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 5 13 a360 figs-explicit τῶν…λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς 1 none of the others The expression **the others** refers to people who were not believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “none of the people who were not believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 13 a361 figs-explicit ἐτόλμα κολλᾶσθαι αὐτοῖς 1 dared to join them If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why no unbelievers **dared to join them**. The reason seems to be that the Jewish leaders had commanded the apostles not to speak or teach about Jesus ([4:18](../04/18.md)), but they were still doing that. Later in this chapter, in [5:28](../05/28.md), the Sanhedrin indicates that it has arrested the apostles for violating that command. Alternate translation: “would meet with them, because the apostles were still preaching about Jesus even though the Jewish leaders had commanded them not to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 5 14 a362 figs-metonymy προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 were being added to the Lord Luke says **the Lord** figuratively to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 5 14 a362 figs-metonymy προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 were being added to the Lord Luke says **the Lord** to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 14 m9wx figs-activepassive προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 were being added to the Lord If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:41](../02/41.md). Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 14 oxni writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 5 15 a364 grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 so that Luke says **so that** to introduce a result, but it is not the direct result of what he said just before, that many men and women became part of the church. It is the result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md), that the apostles were doing “many signs and wonders.” All of [5:12–15](../05/12.md) could be understood as a single sentence, and in that case what Luke says here would more clearly follow logically and grammatically from what he says in [5:12](../05/12.md). However, ULT divides the material into several sentences, which is another way in which it can be understood. UST models a way to show how what Luke says here introduces a result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md) about the “signs and wonders” that the apostles were doing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -762,12 +762,12 @@ ACT 5 17 pc45 figs-activepassive ἀναστὰς…ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς κ ACT 5 17 a370 figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 rising up Here the expression **rising up** means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “taking action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 17 a371 figs-explicit πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων 1 all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) The phrase **all those with him** means specifically all the other priests who joined the high priest in taking action against the apostles. Luke observes here that those other priests were from the group known as the **Sadducees**. As a note to [4:1](../04/01.md) explains, they opposed the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of the priests from the group known as the Sadducees who wanted to oppose the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 17 a372 figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 were filled with jealousy If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **jealousy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 5 17 a373 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 were filled with jealousy Luke is speaking figuratively as if the high priest and his allies were containers that jealousy **filled**. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 5 18 j58p figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους 1 they laid hands on the apostles The expression **laid hands on** figuratively means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 5 18 a374 figs-synecdoche ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους 1 they laid hands on the apostles The high priest and his allies did not arrest the apostles personally. They would have ordered the temple guards to arrest them. But Luke speaks figuratively as if the high priest and his allies did this action because they had a significant part in it by ordering it. Alternate translation: “they had the temple guards arrest the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 5 17 a373 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 were filled with jealousy Luke is speaking as if the high priest and his allies were containers that jealousy **filled**. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 5 18 j58p figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους 1 they laid hands on the apostles The expression **laid hands on** means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 5 18 a374 figs-synecdoche ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους 1 they laid hands on the apostles The high priest and his allies did not arrest the apostles personally. They would have ordered the temple guards to arrest them. But Luke speaks as if the high priest and his allies did this action because they had a significant part in it by ordering it. Alternate translation: “they had the temple guards arrest the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 5 19 wd37 writing-pronouns ἐξαγαγών…αὐτοὺς 1 bringing them out The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “bringing the apostles out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 5 20 qm16 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 5 20 z1x3 figs-metonymy πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης 1 all the words of this life The angel is using the term **words** figuratively to mean the message that the apostles were to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the entire message about this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 5 20 z1x3 figs-metonymy πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης 1 all the words of this life The angel is using the term **words** to mean the message that the apostles were to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the entire message about this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 20 a375 τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης 1 of this life Alternate translation: “about the everlasting life that God gives through Jesus” or “about the new way of living that people can have as followers of Jesus” ACT 5 21 a376 figs-idiom ἀκούσαντες 1 having heard this Luke may be using the word “hear” in an idiomatic sense to mean “obey.” Alternate translation: “in obedience to this command from the angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 21 df1u figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 into the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -775,13 +775,13 @@ ACT 5 21 l7uf figs-explicit ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον 1 about daybreak The ACT 5 21 a377 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous δὲ 1 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce other events that took place around the same time as the events he has just described. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) ACT 5 21 a378 figs-explicit παραγενόμενος 1 having arrived This does not mean that the high priest and his allies **arrived** in the temple courtyard where the apostles were. Rather, it means that they went into the chamber where the Sanhedrin met so that they could summon the rest of its members to join them there. Alternate translation: “having arrived in the council chamber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 21 a379 figs-explicit τὸ Συνέδριον καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Γερουσίαν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 the Sanhedrin, even all the elders of the sons of Israel The phrase **even all the elders of the sons of Israel** clarifies the name **Sanhedrin** by describing it membership. Luke is using the word **elders** here in a general sense to mean “leaders.” He is not making a distinction between “elders” and “rulers” as he does in [4:5](../04/05.md). Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, which was composed of the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 5 21 a380 figs-metaphor τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 the sons of Israel Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants.” Luke is identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 5 21 a380 figs-metaphor τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 the sons of Israel Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Luke is identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 5 21 li6a figs-ellipsis ἀπέστειλαν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον 1 sent to the prison Luke is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He means that the high priest and his allies sent someone to the prison to get the apostles. Alternate translation: “sent someone to the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 5 23 a381 figs-activepassive τὸ δεσμωτήριον εὕρομεν κεκλεισμένον ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, καὶ τοὺς φύλακας 1 We found the prison shut in all security and the guards If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form in place of the passive form **shut**, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We found that the guards had shut the prison in all security and we found the guards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 23 a382 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ 1 in all security If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **security**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “securely.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very securely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 5 23 a383 figs-explicit ἀνοίξαντες 1 having opened Your language may require you to specify the object of **opened**. Alternate translation: “once we opened the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 23 ld7d figs-hyperbole ἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν 1 we found no one inside By **no one**, the officers mean that they found none of the men they had been sent to bring, that is, none of the apostles. It is possible that other people were also being held in the prison, but the angel would not have released them, and they would still have been inside. Alternate translation: “we did not find any of the apostles inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 5 24 k5g6 figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 these words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to mean the report that the officers gave. Alternate translation: “this report” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 5 24 k5g6 figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 these words Luke is using the term **words** to mean the report that the officers gave. Alternate translation: “this report” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 24 baw2 writing-pronouns περὶ αὐτῶν 1 concerning them The pronoun **them** does not refer to the apostles but to the **words** that the officers spoke in giving their report. Alternate translation: “about the things the officers had told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 5 24 p78m figs-idiom τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο 1 as to what this might become The expression **what this might become** refers to a possible result. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wondering what would happen as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 25 a384 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες 1 Behold, the men This person says **Behold** to get the council members to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Right now the men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -791,28 +791,28 @@ ACT 5 26 e24h writing-pronouns τότε ἀπελθὼν, ὁ στρατηγὸ ACT 5 27 iq7w writing-pronouns ἀγαγόντες δὲ αὐτοὺς 1 And having brought them The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles in all three instances in this verse. It may be helpful to specify this here in the first instance. Alternate translation: “Once they had brought the apostles back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 5 28 a385 παραγγελίᾳ παρηγγείλαμεν ὑμῖν 1 We commanded you with a command For emphasis, the high priest is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. If your language uses the same construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use it here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of conveying this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we commanded you very strictly” ACT 5 28 f7pz figs-you ὑμῖν…πεπληρώκατε…ὑμῶν…βούλεσθε 1 you … you have filled … your … you desire In this verse the words **you** and **your** refer to the apostles, and so those words are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -ACT 5 28 g2hi figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 in this name The high priest is using the term **name** figuratively to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 5 28 g2hi figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 in this name The high priest is using the term **name** to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 28 a386 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, πεπληρώκατε 1 behold, you have filled The high priest says **behold** to get the apostles to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “nevertheless you have filled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 5 28 j4kr figs-metaphor πεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν 1 you have filled Jerusalem with your teaching The high priest is speaking figuratively of the city of **Jerusalem** as if it were a container that the apostles had **filled** with their teaching. Alternate translation: “you have taught people who live in every part of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 5 28 a387 figs-metaphor βούλεσθε ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς 1 you desire to bring upon us The high priest is speaking figuratively as if the apostles wanted to put the blood of Jesus on him and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you want to make us responsible for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 5 28 j4kr figs-metaphor πεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν 1 you have filled Jerusalem with your teaching The high priest is speaking of the city of **Jerusalem** as if it were a container that the apostles had **filled** with their teaching. Alternate translation: “you have taught people who live in every part of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 5 28 a387 figs-metaphor βούλεσθε ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς 1 you desire to bring upon us The high priest is speaking as if the apostles wanted to put the blood of Jesus on him and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you want to make us responsible for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 5 28 a388 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us By **us**, the high priest means himself and his fellow Jewish leaders, but not the apostles to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 5 28 ym1k figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα 1 the blood The high priest is using the term **blood** figuratively to mean death by association with the way Jesus’ blood was shed when he died. Alternate translation: “the death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 5 28 ym1k figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα 1 the blood The high priest is using the term **blood** to mean death by association with the way Jesus’ blood was shed when he died. Alternate translation: “the death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 28 a389 figs-explicit τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου 1 this man The phrase **this man** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “this man Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 29 a390 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς…Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν 1 answering, Peter and the apostles said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Peter and the other apostles responded to the high priest. Alternate translation: “Peter and the apostles responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 5 29 di9u figs-explicit Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν 1 Peter and the apostles said Luke seems to mean implicitly that Peter said what follows on behalf of all of the apostles. Alternate translation: “Peter said on behalf of all of the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 29 a391 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 men Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 5 30 a392 figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 of our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 5 30 a392 figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 of our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 5 30 kwsc figs-gendernotations τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 Although the term **fathers** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “of our fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 5 30 r7av figs-idiom ἤγειρεν Ἰησοῦν 1 raised up Jesus As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “brought Jesus back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 30 a393 figs-you ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε 1 whom you killed The word **you** is plural. Even though Peter is responding to the high priest, who has been interrogating the apostles, Peter is referring here to the entire council. If your language does not use separate forms for singular and plural “you,” you could indicate that in some other way. Alternate translation: “whom you Sanhedrin members killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -ACT 5 30 a394 figs-synecdoche ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε 1 whom you killed It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Sanhedrin members killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 5 30 a394 figs-synecdoche ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε 1 whom you killed It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Sanhedrin members killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 5 30 pu5j figs-metonymy κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 having hung him on a tree The word translated as **tree** can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Peter is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “having hung him on a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 30 a395 figs-explicit κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 having hung him on a tree In some languages the word **hung** would suggest a different method of execution. For clarity, you could use a different word that might indicate the actual meaning better. Alternate translation: “having suspended him from a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 31 a396 figs-nominaladj τοῦτον 1 this one Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 5 31 a397 figs-nominaladj τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 1 to his right Peter is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “to his right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 5 31 uh2d translate-symaction τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 1 to his right God placing Jesus at his **right** side was a symbolic way of giving him great honor. Alternate translation: “to a place of great honor next to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 5 31 mr1d figs-abstractnouns τοῦ δοῦναι μετάνοιαν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 to give repentance and forgiveness of sins to Israel If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **forgiveness**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “to give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 5 31 q1il figs-personification Ἰσραὴλ 1 Israel Peter is referring figuratively to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 5 31 q1il figs-personification Ἰσραὴλ 1 Israel Peter is referring to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 5 32 a398 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we Peter is addressing the Sanhedrin, but he is using the word **we** to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **we** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 5 32 a399 figs-ellipsis καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ 1 and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him, is also a witness of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 5 32 yml6 figs-explicit ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ 1 whom God has given to those obeying him Here at the end of his response to the high priest, Peter is echoing what he said at the beginning: “It is necessary to obey God rather than men.” He is defining himself and his fellow apostles as people who are committed to obeying God and to testifying about Jesus even if the authorities forbid them to do that. Peter is saying that God has given the apostles the Holy Spirit to empower them to give that testimony in obedience to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God has given us to empower us to obey him by testifying about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -829,9 +829,9 @@ ACT 5 34 a405 figs-nominaladj βραχὺ 1 for a little Luke is using the adjec ACT 5 35 a406 grammar-connect-time-sequential τε 1 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to indicate that Gamaliel spoke after the officers had taken the apostles out of the council chamber. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) ACT 5 35 a407 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Men, Israelites This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 35 ae1u figs-explicit προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις τί μέλλετε πράσσειν 1 pay attention to yourselves, what you are about to do to these men Gamaliel is warning the council members not to do something that they will later regret. He means “be very careful about what you do to these men,” and you could say that as an alternate translation. However, the implication is that the council should not kill the apostles, as [5:33](../05/33.md) says they want to do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you need to be very cautious and not kill these men, because you might deeply regret that later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 5 36 a408 figs-idiom πρὸ…τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν 1 before these days Gamaliel is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 5 36 a408 figs-idiom πρὸ…τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν 1 before these days Gamaliel is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 36 a409 translate-names Θευδᾶς 1 Theudas **Theudas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 5 36 uaj6 figs-metaphor ἀνέστη 1 rose up In this context, **rose up** figuratively means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 5 36 uaj6 figs-metaphor ἀνέστη 1 rose up In this context, **rose up** means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 5 36 b3nl figs-idiom λέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν 1 saying himself to be somebody In this context, the expression **somebody** means a person of importance. Your language may use this expression in the same way. Or, if it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “saying that he was an important person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 36 a410 figs-activepassive ᾧ προσεκλίθη ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμὸς 1 to whom was joined a number of men If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom a number of men joined” or, as a new sentence, “A number of men joined him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 36 ie3x figs-activepassive ὃς ἀνῃρέθη 1 who was killed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. It may be helpful to begin another new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans killed” or, as a new sentence, “But the Romans killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -840,8 +840,8 @@ ACT 5 36 a411 figs-activepassive διελύθησαν 1 were dispersed If your r ACT 5 36 rzg5 καὶ ἐγένοντο εἰς οὐδέν 1 and they came to nothing Alternate translation: “and their plans did not succeed” ACT 5 37 f33y figs-nominaladj μετὰ τοῦτον 1 After this one Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Theudas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “After him” or “After Theudas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 5 37 a412 translate-names Ἰούδας ὁ Γαλιλαῖος 1 Judas the Galilean The word **Judas** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name in [1:13](../01/13.md) and [1:16](../01/16.md). (Those verses describe two other men with this name, not the same Judas as here.) **Galilean** is the name for someone who is from the region of Galilee. See how you translated that name in [1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 5 37 a413 figs-metaphor ἀνέστη 1 rose up As in [5:36](../05/36.md), **rose up** here figuratively means that Judas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 5 37 p56f figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφῆς 1 in the days of the census Gamaliel is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time of the census” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 5 37 a413 figs-metaphor ἀνέστη 1 rose up As in [5:36](../05/36.md), **rose up** here means that Judas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 5 37 p56f figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφῆς 1 in the days of the census Gamaliel is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time of the census” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 37 kz4s figs-idiom ἀπέστησε λαὸν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ 1 drew away people after him Here, **drew away** is an idiom that means Judas persuaded people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “persuaded people to join him in rebellion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 37 a414 figs-nominaladj κἀκεῖνος 1 That one also Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective **that** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “He also” or “Judas also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 5 37 a415 figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ 1 as many as were persuaded by him If your language would not use the passive form **were persuaded**, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -859,17 +859,17 @@ ACT 5 39 a421 figs-activepassive καὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε 1 y ACT 5 39 a422 figs-activepassive εὑρεθῆτε 1 be found The expression **be found** means to turn out to be something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “turn out to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 39 cyp1 figs-activepassive ἐπείσθησαν…αὐτῷ 1 they were persuaded by him If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 40 z31c grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the Sanhedrin did as a result of Gamaliel’s advice. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ACT 5 40 p6lz figs-synecdoche προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν 1 summoning the apostles, having beaten them, they commanded them The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks figuratively as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 5 40 fca9 figs-metonymy λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 to speak in the name of Jesus The Sanhedrin members are using the term **name** figuratively to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “to speak about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 5 41 a423 figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 from the face of the Sanhedrin Luke is using the word **face** figuratively to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 5 40 p6lz figs-synecdoche προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν 1 summoning the apostles, having beaten them, they commanded them The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 5 40 fca9 figs-metonymy λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 to speak in the name of Jesus The Sanhedrin members are using the term **name** to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “to speak about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 5 41 a423 figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 from the face of the Sanhedrin Luke is using the word **face** to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 5 41 cv8y figs-activepassive κατηξιώθησαν 1 they had been considered worthy If your language would not use the passive form **had been considered**, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God had considered them worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 5 41 lk82 figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος 1 for the Name Here, **the Name** figuratively means Jesus. Alternate translation: “for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 5 41 lk82 figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος 1 for the Name Here, **the Name** means Jesus. Alternate translation: “for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 42 jj94 writing-endofstory τε 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after this story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 5 42 kyp6 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 42 x424 figs-litotes οὐκ ἐπαύοντο, διδάσκοντες καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι 1 they did not cease teaching and proclaiming the gospel Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “they continued to teach and to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 6 intro z5r5 0 # Acts 6 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Acts [6:7](../06/07.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the end of the first major part of the book.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The distribution to the widows

The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “His face was like the face of an angel”

No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this. ACT 6 1 f8br writing-newevent ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 Now in those days Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -ACT 6 1 cg5t figs-idiom ἐν…ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Luke is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 6 1 cg5t figs-idiom ἐν…ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 6 1 e7vb translate-names τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν 1 of the Hellenists **Hellenists** was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 1 ftz8 translate-names τοὺς Ἑβραίους 1 the Hebrews In this context, Luke is using the name **Hebrews** to mean Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke Aramaic, a language closely related to Hebrew, and who did not follow Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 1 s4qy figs-activepassive παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν 1 their widows were being overlooked in the daily service If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -877,30 +877,30 @@ ACT 6 1 rde8 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημε ACT 6 2 kwvo grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 So Luke is using the word **So** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 6 2 n5r4 figs-nominaladj οἱ δώδεκα 1 the Twelve Luke is using the adjective **Twelve** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people, the apostles who led the church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 6 2 is74 translate-names οἱ δώδεκα 1 the Twelve Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 6 2 jm17 figs-metaphor καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to leave behind the word of God The apostles are speaking figuratively as if they would walk away from the **word of God** and **leave** it **behind** them. Alternate translation: “to stop preaching and teaching the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 6 2 w9re figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 6 2 fwk6 figs-metaphor διακονεῖν τραπέζαις 1 to serve tables To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak figuratively as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 6 2 jm17 figs-metaphor καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to leave behind the word of God The apostles are speaking as if they would walk away from the **word of God** and **leave** it **behind** them. Alternate translation: “to stop preaching and teaching the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 6 2 w9re figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 6 2 fwk6 figs-metaphor διακονεῖν τραπέζαις 1 to serve tables To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 6 3 lcyx figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 6 3 p1yz figs-activepassive ἄνδρας…μαρτυρουμένους 1 men being attested The expression **being attested** is a passive verbal form. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 6 3 mgid figs-metaphor πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 full of the Spirit and of wisdom The apostles are speaking figuratively of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 6 3 mgid figs-metaphor πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 full of the Spirit and of wisdom The apostles are speaking of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 6 3 pxe5 figs-abstractnouns πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 full of the Spirit and of wisdom If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 3 i27a figs-metaphor ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης 1 over this task When the apostles say that they will appoint these men **over** the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 6 4 b3bj figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου 1 of the word The apostles are using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 6 4 b3bj figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου 1 of the word The apostles are using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 5 wh9t figs-metonymy ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους 1 the statement was pleasing before the whole multitude Luke is using the word **before** to refer to the opinion of the believers, since people assess things that come to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “what the apostles recommended pleased all of the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 5 jayc grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 2 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the believers did as a result of the apostles’ request. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 6 5 ajq1 translate-names Στέφανον…Φίλιππον…Πρόχορον…Νικάνορα…Τίμωνα…Παρμενᾶν…Νικόλαον 1 Stephen…Philip…Prochorus…Nicanor…Timon…Parmenas…Nicolaus These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 6 5 vsyk figs-metaphor ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking figuratively of Stephen as if he was a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 6 5 vsyk figs-metaphor ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he was a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 6 5 yqsj figs-abstractnouns ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 5 cg5s translate-names Ἀντιοχέα 1 an Antiochian The name **Antiochian** describes a person who comes from the city of Antioch. Alternate translation: “who came from Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 6 lvaj figs-events προσευξάμενοι, ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 This could mean: (1) that the apostles first prayed and then placed their hands on these men. Alternate translation: “after they had prayed, they placed their hands upon them” (2) that the apostles placed their hands on the men while they were praying for them. Alternate translation: “they prayed for them with their hands placed upon them” or “they placed their hands upon them and prayed for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) ACT 6 6 wu1y translate-symaction ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 and placed their hands upon them The apostles **placed their hands** on the seven men to show publicly that they were giving them the responsibility and authority to oversee the food distribution. Alternate translation: “and placed their hands on them to show that they were giving them responsibility and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 6 7 x48w writing-endofstory 0 As the outline in the General Introduction indicates, this verse is the end of the first major section of the book of Acts. That section describes how the apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem. Luke uses this verse to summarize what happened as a result of the events within this whole section of the book. You language may have its own way of indicating how such a summary relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 6 7 wu4l figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 the word of God was growing Luke is speaking figuratively of the way the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **growing**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 6 7 ueie figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 the word of God was growing Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 6 7 wu4l figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 the word of God was growing Luke is speaking of the way the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **growing**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 6 7 ueie figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 the word of God was growing Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 7 jg8y figs-synecdoche ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει 1 became obedient to the faith Luke speaks generally of **the faith** (that is, belief in Jesus) to indicate that these priests **became obedient** to one part of it, Jesus’ teachings about how to live. But that obedience showed that the priests genuinely embraced faith in Jesus as Messiah in its entirety. Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 6 7 qq3l figs-abstractnouns ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει 1 became obedient to the faith If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 8 et2j writing-participants Στέφανος δὲ 1 Now Stephen Luke uses this phrase to introduce Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. Your language may have its own way of doing that. If so, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 6 8 pzr0 figs-metaphor Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing Luke is speaking figuratively as if Stephen were a container that **grace and power** were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 6 8 pzr0 figs-metaphor Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing Luke is speaking as if Stephen were a container that **grace and power** were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 6 8 h8sg figs-hendiadys Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing Luke may be using the two words **grace** and **power** together to express a single idea. The word **grace** would describe the character of the **power** that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 6 8 xscq figs-abstractnouns Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **grace** and **power**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 8 m0zh figs-doublet τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα 1 great wonders and signs The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -913,14 +913,14 @@ ACT 6 10 fnb2 figs-hendiadys τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ACT 6 10 psha figs-abstractnouns τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 11 ren5 figs-explicit ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας 1 they instigated men to say The word **instigated** means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 6 11 s2cl figs-exclusive ἀκηκόαμεν 1 We have heard The men are using the word **We** to refer only to themselves, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 6 11 x747 figs-metonymy λαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα 1 speaking blasphemous words The men are using the term **words** figuratively to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 6 11 x747 figs-metonymy λαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα 1 speaking blasphemous words The men are using the term **words** to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 11 dgxi translate-names Μωϋσῆν 1 Moses **Moses** is the name of a man. God gave him the law to give to Israel. See how you translated his name in [3:22](../03/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 12 tqk9 writing-pronouns συνεκίνησάν 1 They…stirred up In this verse and the next one, the word “they” continues to refer back to the opponents of Stephen who are named in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 6 12 l251 figs-metaphor συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 They also stirred up the people, the elders, and the scribes Luke says figuratively that Stephen’s opponents **stirred up** these other groups, as if calm waters were being disturbed. He means that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 6 12 l251 figs-metaphor συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 They also stirred up the people, the elders, and the scribes Luke says that Stephen’s opponents **stirred up** these other groups, as if calm waters were being disturbed. He means that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 6 12 dkbj translate-names Συνέδριον 1 Sanhedrin **Sanhedrin** is the name of the Jewish ruling council. See how you translated it in [4:14](../04/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 13 zv6s figs-doublenegatives οὐ παύεται λαλῶν 1 does not stop speaking If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **stop**. Alternate translation: “continually speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -ACT 6 13 ju6w figs-metonymy λαλῶν ῥήματα 1 speaking words The men are using the term **words** figuratively to mean things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 6 13 o3j2 figs-metonymy τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου 1 the holy place The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem figuratively by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a **holy place**. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 6 13 ju6w figs-metonymy λαλῶν ῥήματα 1 speaking words The men are using the term **words** to mean things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 6 13 o3j2 figs-metonymy τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου 1 the holy place The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a **holy place**. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 14 c5l9 translate-names ὁ Ναζωραῖος 1 the Nazarene The word **Nazarene** describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in [2:23](../02/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 14 uok4 figs-explicit τὸν τόπον τοῦτον 1 this place By **this place**, the false witnesses mean the temple, which they described as “the holy place” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 6 14 vak4 figs-metonymy τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς 1 the customs that Moses handed down to us The phrase **handed down** is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -929,11 +929,11 @@ ACT 7 intro p9h4 0 # Acts 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting< ACT 7 1 hy9r figs-explicit ὁ ἀρχιερεύς 1 Connecting Statement: Luke assumes that his readers will know that **the high priest** was there and that he asked Stephen to testify because he was a member of the Sanhedrin and its leader. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the high priest, who was the leader of the Sanhedrin,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 2 abc7 writing-pronouns ὁ δὲ ἔφη 1 Then he said The pronoun **he** refers to Stephen, not the high priest. Alternate translation: “Then Stephen said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 7 2 zbq0 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 The phrase **Men, brothers and fathers** is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You brothers and fathers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 7 2 v5si figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 brothers, and fathers, listen to me Stephen is using the word **brothers** figuratively to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is likely using the word **fathers** figuratively to refer to the leaders of Israel, the members of the Sanhedrin. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 2 v5si figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 brothers, and fathers, listen to me Stephen is using the word **brothers** to refer to his fellow Israelites. He is likely using the word **fathers** to refer to the leaders of Israel, the members of the Sanhedrin. In both cases he is speaking respectfully. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites and you leaders of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 2 kfep figs-abstractnouns ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** with an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “The glorious God” or “God, who is glorious,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 7 2 n09p figs-explicit ὁ Θεὸς τῆς δόξης 1 Stephen apparently chooses to describe God in this way at the beginning of his speech in order to refute the charge made in [6:11](../06/11.md) that he says blasphemous things about God. Calling him the **God of glory** acknowledges that people should rightfully give glory to God. You might choose to bring out this implication in your translation. Alternate translation: “God, to whom we should rightfully give glory,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 2 pt4h figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, Stephen is using the word **our** to refer to himself and to his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 7 2 w1ya figs-metaphor τῷ πατρὶ ἡμῶν Ἀβραὰμ 1 Stephen is using the term **father** figuratively to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “to Abraham our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 2 w1ya figs-metaphor τῷ πατρὶ ἡμῶν Ἀβραὰμ 1 Stephen is using the term **father** to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “to Abraham our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 2 ust7 translate-names Μεσοποταμίᾳ…Χαρράν 1 The word **Mesopotamia** is the name of a region, and the word **Harran** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 7 3 uksj figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν, ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου, καὶ δεῦρο εἰς τὴν γῆν ἣν ἄν σοι δείξω 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this verse so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God told Abraham to go out from his land and from his relatives and come into the land that he would show him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 7 3 kgef writing-pronouns εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to God, while the pronoun **him** refers to Abraham. Alternate translation: “God said to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -943,14 +943,14 @@ ACT 7 4 pfg4 figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 you The word **you** is plural. Stephen is ACT 7 5 tnsm writing-pronouns οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ…ἐπηγγείλατο…αὐτῷ…αὐτοῦ…αὐτόν…οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ 1 The pronouns **him** and **his** and the third instance of **he** refer to Abraham, while the first two instances of **he** refer to God. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God did not give Abraham,” “God promised,” and “although Abraham did not have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 7 5 ax1j οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κληρονομίαν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 he did not give him an inheritance in it Alternate translation: “he did not give any of it to him as an inheritance” ACT 7 5 qff6 figs-explicit οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός 1 not even a stride of a foot This could mean: (1) not enough ground to stand on or (2) not enough ground on which to take a step. Either way, the expression is implicitly describing a very small area. Alternate translation: “not even a tiny piece of ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 5 u6iw figs-metaphor αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν…καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν 1 to him for a possession, and to his seed after him The term **seed** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to him for a possession, and to his descendants after him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 5 u6iw figs-metaphor αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν…καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν 1 to him for a possession, and to his seed after him The term **seed** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to him for a possession, and to his descendants after him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 5 j09v figs-abstractnouns αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν…καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **possession** with a verb such as “possess.” Stephen is saying that Abraham possessed the land in the sense that it was something that God had promised to him but that it was his descendants who came into actual possession of it. Alternate translation: “as something that his descendants would one day possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 7 6 orw2 figs-quotations ἐλάλησεν δὲ οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς ὅτι ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν ἔτη τετρακόσια 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “But God spoke to him like this, ‘Your seed would be a stranger in a foreign land, and they will enslave him and treat him badly for 400 years’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 7 6 tn6b figs-explicit ἐλάλησεν…οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς 1 God spoke to him like this Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this occurred some time after the statement in the previous verse. It may be helpful to state that in your translation. Alternate translation: “Subsequently God told Abraham that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 6 jymv writing-pronouns ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν 1 Stephen is using the singular word **seed** figuratively to mean “descendants,” and so he uses the singular noun **stranger** and the singular pronoun **him**. For clarity in your translation, to show that he is not referring to a single individual, you could say “descendants” and “strangers” and use the plural pronoun **them**. Alternate translation: “his descendants would be strangers in a foreign land, whose people would enslave them and treat them badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 7 6 jymv writing-pronouns ἔσται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, πάροικον ἐν γῇ ἀλλοτρίᾳ, καὶ δουλώσουσιν αὐτὸ καὶ κακώσουσιν 1 Stephen is using the singular word **seed** to mean “descendants,” and so he uses the singular noun **stranger** and the singular pronoun **him**. For clarity in your translation, to show that he is not referring to a single individual, you could say “descendants” and “strangers” and use the plural pronoun **them**. Alternate translation: “his descendants would be strangers in a foreign land, whose people would enslave them and treat them badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 7 7 k8pz figs-quotesinquotes καὶ τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν κρινῶ ἐγώ, ὁ Θεὸς εἶπεν; καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα, ἐξελεύσονται καὶ λατρεύσουσίν μοι ἐν τῷ τόπῳ τούτῳ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But God said that he would judge the nation that would enslave him and that after that they would come out and serve him in this place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 7 7 f7fw figs-metonymy τὸ ἔθνος 1 I will judge the nation Here, **nation** refers to the people who belong to that nation. Alternate translation: “the people of the nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 7 q7y6 writing-pronouns ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν 1 the nation that will enslave him As in [7:6](../07/06.md), Stephen is using the singular pronoun **him** because he is using the singular word **seed** figuratively to mean “descendants.” For clarity, particularly if you said “descendants” in the previous verse, you could use the plural pronoun “them” instead. That would help readers recognize that Stephen also means Abraham’s descendants when he says “they” later in the verse. Alternate translation: “will enslave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 7 7 q7y6 writing-pronouns ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν 1 the nation that will enslave him As in [7:6](../07/06.md), Stephen is using the singular pronoun **him** because he is using the singular word **seed** to mean “descendants.” For clarity, particularly if you said “descendants” in the previous verse, you could use the plural pronoun “them” instead. That would help readers recognize that Stephen also means Abraham’s descendants when he says “they” later in the verse. Alternate translation: “will enslave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 7 8 iwfx writing-pronouns ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ…ἐγέννησεν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **he** refers to God, while the word **him** and the second instance of the pronoun **he** refer to Abraham. For clarity, in your translation you might say “God gave Abraham … Abraham fathered.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 7 8 mwc9 figs-explicit ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς 1 God gave him the covenant of circumcision Stephen’s listeners would have known that this **covenant** required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “he made a covenant that required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 8 oel3 translate-names τὸν Ἰσαὰκ…τὸν Ἰακώβ 1 **Isaac** and **Jacob** are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -969,13 +969,13 @@ ACT 7 10 s5vk figs-metonymy ἐναντίον Φαραὼ 1 The phrase **before ACT 7 10 nycs writing-pronouns κατέστησεν αὐτὸν ἡγούμενον ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον, καὶ ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 In these phrases the words **he** and **his** refer to Pharaoh and the word **him** refers to Joseph. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh appointed Joseph governor over Egypt and all his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 7 10 yr7m figs-metonymy ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 over Egypt The word **Egypt** refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 10 pb4p figs-metonymy ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 over all his household The word **household** refers to Pharaoh’s own servants and all his possessions. Alternate translation: “over all his servants and everything he owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 11 p42j figs-personification ἦλθεν…λιμὸς ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ Χανάαν, καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη 1 came a famine Here, Stephen speaks figuratively of **famine** and **tribulation** as if they **came** to Egypt and Canaan on their own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there was a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and there was great tribulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 7 11 p42j figs-personification ἦλθεν…λιμὸς ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ Χανάαν, καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη 1 came a famine Here, Stephen speaks of **famine** and **tribulation** as if they **came** to Egypt and Canaan on their own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there was a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and there was great tribulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 7 11 ncnr translate-names Χανάαν 1 **Canaan** is the name of a place, the land where the Israelites eventually settled. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 7 11 frd4 figs-abstractnouns καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tribulation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and people suffered greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 7 11 p37v figs-explicit οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” He means specifically Jacob and his sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 11 p37v figs-explicit οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” He means specifically Jacob and his sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 12 pia8 figs-explicit ὄντα σιτία εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 grain Stephen assumes that his readers will know that with Joseph as his administrator, Pharaoh had stored up grain during prosperous years and was now selling it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that people could buy stored grain from Pharaoh in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 12 cvhm figs-explicit ἐξαπέστειλεν τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν πρῶτον 1 By **first**, Stephen does not mean that Jacob sent Joseph’s older brothers to Egypt before he sent anyone else, or before he did anything else. He means that Jacob sent them for a first time and would later send them for a second time, as Stephen’s listeners would have understood. Alternate translation: “he sent our fathers on a first trip there to buy food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 12 mbg8 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Joseph’s older brothers, as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 12 mbg8 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Joseph’s older brothers, as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 13 a5f3 figs-nominaladj ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 Stephen is using the adjective **second** as a noun, to mean the second time that Joseph’s brothers went to Egypt. ULT adds **time** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “when Jacob sent them to Egypt again to buy more food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 7 13 ce2b translate-ordinal ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 On their second time If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “during trip number two” or “on their next trip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) ACT 7 13 m37e figs-activepassive ἀνεγνωρίσθη Ἰωσὴφ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 was made known If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Joseph made himself known to his brothers” or “Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -984,20 +984,20 @@ ACT 7 14 aam5 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἀποστείλας…Ἰωσὴφ μ ACT 7 14 wl32 figs-idiom ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε 1 Stephen is using a Hebrew idiom here. Alternate translation: “who amounted to 75 people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 15 zasp figs-idiom κατέβη Ἰακὼβ εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 Stephen says that Jacob **went down** because he traveled from the hilly and mountainous terrain of Canaan to the lowlying land of Egypt. Alternate translation: “Jacob traveled to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 15 w2sm figs-explicit ἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 he and our fathers died Stephen’s listeners would have known that Jacob and his sons lived in Egypt for some time. Make sure that your translation does not make it sound as if they **died** as soon as they arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob and our ancestors died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 15 fe56 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 he and our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Jacob’s sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 15 fe56 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 he and our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Jacob’s sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 16 slg3 figs-activepassive μετετέθησαν εἰς Συχὲμ, καὶ ἐτέθησαν 1 they were carried over … and laid If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants brought his body and his son’s bodies to Shechem and buried them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 16 pnur translate-names Συχὲμ 1 **Shechem** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 7 16 la8a figs-metonymy τιμῆς ἀργυρίου 1 for a price in silver Stephen is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used **silver** as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for a sum of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 16 pk1p translate-names τῶν υἱῶν Ἑμμὼρ 1 **Hamor** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 7 17 tuq2 figs-events καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας…ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη 1 And as the time of the promise … approached, the people increased and multiplied In your language it may be helpful to say that the people **increased and multiplied** before saying that **the time of the promise** approached. Alternate translation: “the people increased and multiplied in Egypt as the time of the promise … approached” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) -ACT 7 17 kh8g figs-personification καθὼς…ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 Stephen is speaking figuratively of this **time** as if it were a person and could have **approached** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to fulfill the promise he had sworn to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 7 17 kh8g figs-personification καθὼς…ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 Stephen is speaking of this **time** as if it were a person and could have **approached** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to fulfill the promise he had sworn to Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 7 17 tlh9 figs-explicit καθὼς…ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας, ἧς ὡμολόγησεν ὁ Θεὸς τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 the time of the promise … approached Stephen is referring to **the promise** that he described in [7:7](../07/07.md). God promised Abraham that he would deliver his descendants from a nation that would enslave them and that he would bring them back to the land of Canaan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as the time approached of the promise that God had sworn to Abraham, that he would deliver his descendants from slavery and bring them back to Canaan,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 17 s2oe figs-hendiadys ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη 1 Stephen is using the two words **increased** and **multiplied** together to express a single idea. The word **multiplied** tells in what way the people **increased**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “the people increased greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 7 18 whe7 figs-metaphor ἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 there arose over Egypt another king When Stephen says that this next king **arose**, he is using a spatial metaphor to mean that this king began his reign. Alternate translation: “another king began to rule over Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 18 g2wq figs-metonymy ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 over Egypt The word **Egypt** refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 18 e2y6 figs-metonymy ὃς οὐκ ᾔδει τὸν Ἰωσήφ 1 who did not know Joseph Stephen is not saying that this king **did not know Joseph** personally. Joseph had been dead for centuries by this point. Rather, **Joseph** refers to the reputation of Joseph. Alternate translation: “who did not know that Joseph had helped Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 19 qwbi writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 **He** refers to the new king of Egypt, not to Joseph. Alternate translation: “This king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 7 19 z312 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 Here and frequently throughout the rest of his speech to the Sanhedrin, Stephen is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 19 z312 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 Here and frequently throughout the rest of his speech to the Sanhedrin, Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 19 ug6c figs-gendernotations τοὺς πατέρας 1 Although the term **fathers** is masculine, when Stephen uses it to mean “ancestors,” it has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Here and throughout the speech, if you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “our fathers and mothers” to indicate this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 7 19 rh3k figs-explicit τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα αὐτῶν 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by **exposed** he means “left outside.” This was an unfortunate means of infanticide in the ancient world. Alternate translation: “forcing them to leave their babies outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 19 n2vl figs-doublenegatives εἰς τὸ μὴ ζῳογονεῖσθαι 1 Stephen is using a double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the verb **keep alive**, which was negative from Pharaoh’s perspective, since it was contrary to his intentions. If your readers might misunderstand this double negative, , you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “in order to kill them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) @@ -1015,12 +1015,12 @@ ACT 7 23 o4cg figs-idiom ὡς…ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερα ACT 7 23 b9gd figs-activepassive ὡς…ἐπληροῦτο αὐτῷ τεσσερακονταετὴς χρόνος 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 23 ckxj figs-idiom ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 The expression **it came up on his heart** means that Moses felt a desire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 23 fj9s figs-metonymy ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 it came into his heart Here, **heart** is a metonym for the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “he felt a desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 23 x493 figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 1 to visit his brothers, the sons of Israel Stephen is using the word **brothers** figuratively to mean “kinsmen,” and he is using the word **sons** figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen, the descendants of Israel” or, if the word “Israel” might make your readers think of the nation rather than the person, “his kinsmen, the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 23 x493 figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 1 to visit his brothers, the sons of Israel Stephen is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen,” and he is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen, the descendants of Israel” or, if the word “Israel” might make your readers think of the nation rather than the person, “his kinsmen, the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 23 i4ko figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 1 Although the terms **brothers** and **sons** are masculine, Stephen is using these words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” and “sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 7 24 l4zv figs-activepassive ἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον 1 And seeing a certain one being mistreated, he defended him and made vengeance for the one being oppressed by striking the Egyptian If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was **the Egyptian** who is mentioned later in the verse. Alternate translation: “seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 24 y3yh figs-activepassive ἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “avenged him by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 24 r2e8 figs-explicit πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 by striking the Egyptian Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses hit **the Egyptian** so hard that he died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “striking and killing the Egyptian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 25 hrsh figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Stephen is using the word **brothers** figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 25 hrsh figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Stephen is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “his kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 25 f6sn figs-abstractnouns δίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. In context, the word refers to God using Moses to deliver the Israelites from slavery. Alternate translation: “was delivering them from slavery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 7 25 nhb9 figs-metonymy διὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 by his hand was giving salvation to them Here, **hand** refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “through his actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 26 t2vc figs-explicit αὐτοῖς 1 to them as they were quarreling It is clear from the context that these were two Israelite men, though Stephen does not say that specifically. Alternate translation: “to two Israelite men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1028,7 +1028,7 @@ ACT 7 26 qyc2 figs-youdual αὐτοῖς…αὐτοὺς…ἐστε…ἀδι ACT 7 26 mpc7 figs-abstractnouns συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην 1 he urged them to peace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he urged them to stop fighting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 7 26 kyde figs-quotesinquotes εἰπών, ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί ἐστε. ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them that they were brothers and asking them why they were hurting each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 7 26 zzt4 figs-idiom ἄνδρες 1 Men, you are brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Translate it with an expression that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 7 26 z5g2 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Moses is using the word **brothers** figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 26 z5g2 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Moses is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 26 k1ku figs-rquestion ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους? 1 Why is it that you are hurting each other? Moses is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not be hurting each other!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 7 27 xef7 writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The word **him** refers to Moses, not to the neighbor. Alternate translation: “Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 7 27 iq30 figs-quotesinquotes εἰπών, τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “asking him who appointed him a ruler and a judge over them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -1040,7 +1040,7 @@ ACT 7 28 hk1g figs-rquestion μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃ ACT 7 28 qfxh figs-quotesinquotes μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον? 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The man asked Moses if he wanted to kill him the way he had killed the Egyptian the day before.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 7 28 jxka ὃν τρόπον 1 Alternate translation: “in the same way in which” ACT 7 29 l149 figs-explicit ἔφυγεν…Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 General Information: The implication is that Moses fled because he recognized that these Israelites, and probably others, knew that he had killed an Egyptian. Moses feared that he would be punished or even killed for this crime. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses ran away at this word to try to escape from being punished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 29 rbhm figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 Stephen is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what the man said by using words. Alternate translation: “at this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 7 29 rbhm figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 Stephen is using the term **word** to mean what the man said by using words. Alternate translation: “at this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 29 pit4 translate-names Μαδιάμ 1 **Midian** is the name of a country. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 7 29 q8qv figs-explicit οὗ ἐγέννησεν υἱοὺς δύο 1 at this statement Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses married a Midianite woman when he fled from Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where he married a Midianite woman and fathered two sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 30 zx1c figs-explicit πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα 1 And when 40 years were past This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after 40 years had gone by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1048,7 +1048,7 @@ ACT 7 30 qci0 figs-activepassive πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσερ ACT 7 30 veft figs-idiom ὤφθη αὐτῷ…ἄγγελος 1 The word **appeared** does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Moses. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel was there with Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 30 f7yu figs-explicit ὤφθη αὐτῷ…ἄγγελος 1 an angel appeared Stephen assumes that his listeners know that God came to speak with Moses through the **angel**. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 31 q6w6 figs-explicit ἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα 1 he marveled at the sight Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses **admired the sight** because the bush was not burning up, even though it was on fire. Alternate translation: “marveled at what he saw, because the fire was not consuming the bush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 31 uk7u figs-personification ἐγένετο φωνὴ Κυρίου 1 and as he approached to look at it Stephen is speaking figuratively of **the voice of the Lord** as if it were a person and that it **came** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the Lord spoke to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 7 31 uk7u figs-personification ἐγένετο φωνὴ Κυρίου 1 and as he approached to look at it Stephen is speaking of **the voice of the Lord** as if it were a person and that it **came** on its own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the Lord spoke to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 7 32 b26o figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων σου, ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ Ἰακώβ 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord told Moses that he was the God of his fathers, the God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 7 33 bpml figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν…αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “the Lord told Moses to untie the sandals that were on his feet, because the place on which he was standing was holy ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 7 33 x7cd translate-symaction λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν σου, ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν 1 Untie the sandals In this culture, removing footwear was a symbolic way of acknowledging that a place was sacred. Footwear that had been worn elsewhere should not touch it. Your readers may understand the symbolic meaning of this action. If not, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “Untie your sandals and remove them to acknowledge that the place on which you are standing is holy ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) @@ -1058,7 +1058,7 @@ ACT 7 33 clk4 figs-explicit ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας ACT 7 34 l0au figs-quotesinquotes ἰδὼν, εἶδον τὴν κάκωσιν τοῦ λαοῦ μου τοῦ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ, καὶ τοῦ στεναγμοῦ αὐτῶν ἤκουσα, καὶ κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς; καὶ νῦν δεῦρο, ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον. 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “The Lord said that he had certainly seen the oppression of his people who were in Egypt and that he had heard their groaning and that he had come down to rescue them. He told Moses to get ready because he was sending him to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 7 34 yz7b figs-idiom ἰδὼν, εἶδον 1 I have certainly seen Stephen is reproducing a Hebrew idiom from the biblical account of Moses at the burning bush. The verb **seen** is repeated in Hebrew. This repetition expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s having seen how his people were being oppressed. This Hebrew practice of verb repetition for intensification cannot be directly translated into English. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb from your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 34 x5bg figs-possession τοῦ λαοῦ μου 1 of my people God uses the possessive word **my** to emphasize that these people were in a covenant relationship with him based on his promises to their ancestors. Alternate translation: “of the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ACT 7 34 j32c figs-metaphor κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς 1 I have come down to rescue them God describes himself as having **come down** from heaven to earth to help the Israelites. His presence was in the burning bush, but he also means figuratively that he is taking action to **rescue** them. Alternate translation: “I will personally bring about their release” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 34 j32c figs-metaphor κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς 1 I have come down to rescue them God describes himself as having **come down** from heaven to earth to help the Israelites. His presence was in the burning bush, but he also means that he is taking action to **rescue** them. Alternate translation: “I will personally bring about their release” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 34 atdo grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 3 God is using the word translated **And** to introduce what he wants Moses to do as a result of what he has told him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 7 34 sq8y figs-imperative νῦν δεῦρο 1 now come God is giving an order here. Alternate translation: “get ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 7 34 x34c figs-declarative ἀποστείλω σε εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 God is not asking Moses’ permission when he says **let me send you to Egypt**. This is a way of saying “I will send you to Egypt,” and that statement in turn is functioning as a command. Alternate translation: “you must go to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) @@ -1072,28 +1072,28 @@ ACT 7 35 abc9 figs-idiom ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ βάτῳ 1 ap ACT 7 36 gz9r figs-doublet τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα 1 during 40 years The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Stephen is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 7 36 n75x translate-names Ἐρυθρᾷ Θαλάσσῃ 1 Stephen is using the name that was common in his culture, **the Red Sea**, to refer to the body of water that the Old Testament calls “the Sea of Reeds.” Decide whether you want to use the name that Stephen uses here or the name that you are using in your translation in the Old Testament, if they are different. Alternate translation: “the Sea of Reeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 7 37 k710 figs-quotesinquotes ὁ εἴπας τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ, προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει ὁ Θεὸς, ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “who told the sons of Israel that God would raise up a prophet like him for them from their brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -ACT 7 37 vykp figs-metaphor τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ 1 Stephen is using the word **sons** figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to the descendants of Israel” or “to the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 37 vykp figs-metaphor τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραήλ 1 Stephen is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “to the descendants of Israel” or “to the descendants of Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 37 b4sg figs-idiom προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει…ὡς ἐμέ 1 will raise up a prophet Here, the expression **raise up** describes God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people. See how you translated it in [3:22](../03/22.md). Alternate translation: “will send you a prophet like me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 7 37 j2rx figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν 1 from among your brothers Stephen is using the word **brothers** figuratively to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 37 j2rx figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν 1 from among your brothers Stephen is using the word **brothers** to mean “kinsmen.” Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 38 fd25 writing-pronouns οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος 1 This is the one **This is the one** refers to Moses. You may have decided to use similar language and special formatting in verses 35–38 to highlight the way Stephen is emphasizing Moses. However, if you think the reference would not be clear at this point, you could state his name. Alternate translation: “Moses is the one who was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 7 38 z1z7 figs-infostructure μετὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου τοῦ λαλοῦντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ Ὄρει Σινά, καὶ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα 1 It might be more natural to put the information about **Mount Sinai** next to the information about Moses receiving **living words**. Alternate translation: “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, who received living words” or “with our fathers and with the angel who was speaking to him on Mount Sinai, where he received living words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 7 38 vdnz writing-pronouns τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐδέξατο 1 This second instance of **who** in the verse refers to Moses, not to the **fathers**. For clarity, you could state his name and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “with our fathers. Moses received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 7 38 y2zu figs-explicit ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα 1 who received living words to give to us It may be helpful in your language to specify who gave Moses the **words** that he **received.** Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this was God. Alternate translation: “to whom God gave living words” or “to whom God spoke living words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 38 p3xk figs-metonymy λόγια ζῶντα 1 living words Stephen is using the term **words** to mean the message that God communicated through words. Alternate translation: “a living message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 38 w2gs figs-metaphor λόγια ζῶντα 1 Stephen is using the term **living** figuratively to describe God’s **words** as if they were alive. This could mean: (1) that God’s message is always effective. Alternate translation: “an enduring message” (2) that God’s message shows how to live as God wishes. Alternate translation: “a life-giving message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 38 w2gs figs-metaphor λόγια ζῶντα 1 Stephen is using the term **living** to describe God’s **words** as if they were alive. This could mean: (1) that God’s message is always effective. Alternate translation: “an enduring message” (2) that God’s message shows how to live as God wishes. Alternate translation: “a life-giving message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 39 ab0s writing-pronouns ᾧ οὐκ ἠθέλησαν ὑπήκοοι γενέσθαι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 The word **whom** refers to Moses. It may be helpful to state his name and to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our fathers were not willing to be obedient to Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 7 39 mvz8 figs-metaphor ἀπώσαντο 1 they pushed him away Stephen is speaking figuratively to emphasize the Israelites’ rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: “they rejected him as their leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 39 mvz8 figs-metaphor ἀπώσαντο 1 they pushed him away Stephen is speaking to emphasize the Israelites’ rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: “they rejected him as their leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 39 z3ze figs-metonymy ἐστράφησαν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 turned back in their hearts Here, **hearts** is a metonym for people’s desires. Alternate translation: “made it their desire to return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 40 l8u7 figs-quotesinquotes εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών, ποίησον ἡμῖν θεοὺς οἳ προπορεύσονται ἡμῶν. ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ. 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “They asked Aaron to make gods for them who would go ahead of them, because they did not know what had happened to Moses, who had brought them from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 7 40 kb3o εἰπόντες τῷ Ἀαρών 1 It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They said to Aaron” ACT 7 40 fzsq translate-names τῷ Ἀαρών 1 **Aaron** is the name of a man, the older brother of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 7 40 a68q figs-infostructure ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ 1 It may be more natural to put the information about Moses at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “For we do not know what has happened to this Moses who brought us from the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 7 41 ux1j figs-explicit ἐμοσχοποίησαν 1 they made an image of a calf Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that this **image of a calf** was a statue that the Israelites wanted to worship as an idol. Stephen refers to it as **the idol** later in the sentence. Alternate translation: “they made a statue that looked like a calf to worship as an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 41 v6tx figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 Stephen is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 7 41 v6tx figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 Stephen is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 41 hjp0 writing-pronouns ἐμοσχοποίησαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers back to “our fathers” in verse 39, that is, to the Israelites whom Moses led out of Egypt. Alternate translation: “the Israelites made an image of a calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 7 41 hh77 figs-metonymy τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 they made an image of a calf … to the idol … the work of their hands Stephen describes what he also calls the **calf** and the **idol** as **the works of their hands** by association with the way the Israelites used their hands to make the calf. Alternate translation: “the statue they had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 42 d3dd figs-metaphor ἔστρεψεν…ὁ Θεὸς 1 God turned away Stephen is speaking figuratively as if **God** had physically **turned away**. He speaks this way to emphasize that God was not pleased with the Israelites and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped helping them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 7 42 u7lx figs-metaphor τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 the host of heaven Here, the word **host** means “army,” and the word **heaven** means “sky.” Stephen is speaking figuratively of the stars in the sky as if they were an army. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stars in the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 42 d3dd figs-metaphor ἔστρεψεν…ὁ Θεὸς 1 God turned away Stephen is speaking as if **God** had physically **turned away**. He speaks this way to emphasize that God was not pleased with the Israelites and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped helping them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 42 u7lx figs-metaphor τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 the host of heaven Here, the word **host** means “army,” and the word **heaven** means “sky.” Stephen is speaking of the stars in the sky as if they were an army. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stars in the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 42 ya6v figs-activepassive γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the book of the prophets says” or “the book of the prophets records” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 42 f314 figs-explicit βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν 1 the book of the prophets This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets on one scroll. Alternate translation: “the scroll that records sayings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 42 w38i figs-quotemarks μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Amos, which continues through the end of verse 43. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Amos as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) @@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ ACT 7 42 gd1b figs-rquestion μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προση ACT 7 43 zek5 καὶ ἀνελάβετε τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ, καὶ τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν, τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε προσκυνεῖν αὐτοῖς. καὶ μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος. 1 The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here. ACT 7 42 q9rr figs-yousingular μὴ…προσηνέγκατέ 1 **You** is plural in these instances, even though the addressee (**house**) is singular, because God is actually speaking to all of the Israelites. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in such a case, you can use singular **you** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 7 42 tck0 figs-merism σφάγια καὶ θυσίας 1 In a figure of speech, God is using the two main categories of sacrifices, those that involve shedding blood (**slain beasts**) and those that are bloodless (**offerings**), to mean sacrifices of all kinds. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “all kinds of sacrifices” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -ACT 7 42 j4q8 figs-metaphor οἶκος Ἰσραήλ 1 O house of Israel Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the **house of Israel** figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “nation of Israel” or “people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 42 j4q8 figs-metaphor οἶκος Ἰσραήλ 1 O house of Israel Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the **house of Israel** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “nation of Israel” or “people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 43 h20h grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 **And** at the beginning of this verse introduces God’s own answer to the question he asked in the previous verse, [7:42](../01/32.md): “You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me …, did you?” The answer is in contrast to what the question asks. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a sentence break: “No!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ACT 7 43 q85n figs-irony ἀνελάβετε…μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς 1 The term **took up** indicates that the Israelites carried the idols this verse describes around with them as they traveled in the wilderness. The term **remove** in this context means that God will send them into exile as a punishment, with the sense of carrying them away from their homeland. So the punishment is ironic; if possible, use similar terms in your language that will bring out this irony. Alternate translation: “you carried around … I will carry you away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) ACT 7 43 gxh2 figs-yousingular ἀνελάβετε…ὑμῶν…ἐποιήσατε…ὑμᾶς 1 As in [7:42](../07/42.md), **you** is plural here, even though the addressee (“house”) is singular, since God is speaking to all of the Israelites. In this verse **your** is also plural. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in these cases, you can use the singular in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) @@ -1123,42 +1123,42 @@ ACT 7 45 n2sc εἰσήγαγον…μετὰ Ἰησοῦ 1 Our fathers, under ACT 7 45 e3gu figs-explicit εἰσήγαγον 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the Israelites entering the land of Canaan. Alternate translation: “brought in to the land of Canaan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 45 znov translate-names Ἰησοῦ 1 **Joshua** is the name of a man, the successor of Moses as leader of the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 7 45 eww5 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 Stephen is using the term **nations** to mean the land that these people groups occupied. Alternate translation: “when they took possession of land that had been occupied by the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 45 spm5 figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers Stephen is using the word **face** figuratively to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of our ancestors” or “so that our ancestors alone would live there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 45 spm5 figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers Stephen is using the word **face** to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of our ancestors” or “so that our ancestors alone would live there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 45 zjlj figs-ellipsis ἕως τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ 1 Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle remained there until the days of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 7 45 wot8 figs-idiom τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ 1 Stephen is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 7 46 k9vh figs-idiom εὑρεῖν 1 Stephen is speaking idiomatically. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 7 45 wot8 figs-idiom τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ 1 Stephen is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 7 46 k9vh figs-idiom εὑρεῖν 1 Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 45 bux7 translate-names Δαυείδ 1 **David** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 7 46 x4kl writing-pronouns ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The pronoun **who** refers to David. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “David found favor before God” ACT 7 46 ykio figs-metonymy ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the phrase **before God** refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “God regarded David with favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 46 yl80 figs-idiom εὑρεῖν 1 Stephen is speaking idiomatically. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 7 46 w3cu figs-metaphor σκήνωμα 1 a dwelling place for the house of Jacob The word **dwelling** refers to a permanent habitation, that is, a house. Stephen is using the word figuratively to mean a temple. He is speaking of this temple as if it was a house in which God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “a house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 46 yl80 figs-idiom εὑρεῖν 1 Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 7 46 w3cu figs-metaphor σκήνωμα 1 a dwelling place for the house of Jacob The word **dwelling** refers to a permanent habitation, that is, a house. Stephen is using the word to mean a temple. He is speaking of this temple as if it was a house in which God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “a house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 46 in7m translate-textvariants τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ 1 Some ancient manuscripts read “the house of Jacob.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the God of Jacob.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -ACT 7 46 fsmp figs-metaphor τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ 1 Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Jacob** figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 46 fsmp figs-metaphor τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ 1 Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Jacob** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 47 bo1q translate-names Σολομῶν 1 **Solomon** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [3:11](../03/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 7 47 k54c figs-metaphor αὐτῷ οἶκον 1 Stephen is using the word **house** figuratively to mean a temple. Alternate translation: “a temple for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 47 k54c figs-metaphor αὐτῷ οἶκον 1 Stephen is using the word **house** to mean a temple. Alternate translation: “a temple for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 47 dlk8 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ οἶκον 1 The pronoun **him** refers to God. Alternate translation: “a temple for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 7 48 wuce translate-names ὁ Ὕψιστος 1 This a name for God. UST suggests one way to express its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 7 48 fwvu figs-nominaladj χειροποιήτοις 1 Stephen is using the adjective **made with hands** (or “handmade”) as a noun, to mean structures built by humans. ULT adds **houses** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 7 48 c822 figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις 1 houses made with hands Stephen is using the word **hand**, one part of a person, figuratively to mean the whole person. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “houses that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 7 48 ota0 figs-metaphor χειροποιήτοις 1 The word **houses** figuratively means “temples.” Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 48 c822 figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις 1 houses made with hands Stephen is using the word **hand**, one part of a person, to mean the whole person. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “houses that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 7 48 ota0 figs-metaphor χειροποιήτοις 1 The word **houses** means “temples.” Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 48 d4fh figs-explicit καθὼς ὁ προφήτης λέγει 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by **the prophet**, he means Isaiah. Alternate translation: “as the prophet Isaiah says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 49 oyax figs-quotemarks ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Isaiah, which continues through the end of verse 50. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -ACT 7 49 k2vn figs-metaphor ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 Heaven is my throne, and the earth is the footstool for my feet Speaking through Isaiah, God figuratively describes **Heaven** as his **throne** and **the earth** as his **footstool**. If your readers would not understand what these figures mean, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. This could mean: (1) that God is present both in heaven and on earth. Alternate translation: “I dwell in heaven, and I am also present throughout the earth” (2) that God rules over heaven and earth. Alternative translation: “I rule from heaven, and I have complete authority over the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 49 k2vn figs-metaphor ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 Heaven is my throne, and the earth is the footstool for my feet Speaking through Isaiah, God describes **Heaven** as his **throne** and **the earth** as his **footstool**. If your readers would not understand what these figures mean, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. This could mean: (1) that God is present both in heaven and on earth. Alternate translation: “I dwell in heaven, and I am also present throughout the earth” (2) that God rules over heaven and earth. Alternative translation: “I rule from heaven, and I have complete authority over the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 49 i4u3 figs-merism ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 God is using the two parts of creation, **Heaven** and **earth**, to mean all of creation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “I am present everywhere in creation” (2) Alternate translation: “I rule over all of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 7 49 wc9m figs-rquestion ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου? 1 What kind of house will you build for me? God is using the question form to emphasize that human beings cannot build a temple worthy of him or adequate for him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy of me or a place to live that is adequate for me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 7 49 rqr4 figs-parallelism ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου? 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. God says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy for me to live in!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -ACT 7 49 mshp figs-metaphor ποῖον οἶκον 1 The word **house** figuratively means a “temple.” Alternate translation: “What kind of temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 49 mshp figs-metaphor ποῖον οἶκον 1 The word **house** means a “temple.” Alternate translation: “What kind of temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 49 vjaq figs-abstractnouns τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **rest**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the place where I can live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 7 50 hqjr figs-quotemarks οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Isaiah that began in verse 49. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you can return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 7 50 rfk1 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 Did my hand not make all these things? God is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 7 50 jlg1 figs-synecdoche οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 God is using one part of himself, his **hand**, to represent all of himself figuratively in the act of creating. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Did I not make all these things?” or, if you choose to represent the rhetorical question as an exclamation, “I made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 7 50 jlg1 figs-synecdoche οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 God is using one part of himself, his **hand**, to represent all of himself in the act of creating. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Did I not make all these things?” or, if you choose to represent the rhetorical question as an exclamation, “I made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 7 50 gzw0 figs-explicit ταῦτα πάντα 1 The phrase **all these things** refers back to “Heaven” and “earth” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “everything in creation” ACT 7 51 umq6 figs-exclamations σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 O stiff-necked Stephen is using the exclamatory word **O** to make a transition in his speech. Up to this point, he has been identifying with the Sanhedrin members, saying “our fathers” as he describes what earlier generations of Israelites did. Now, as he shifts to rebuking them, he addresses them with the vocative **O**. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for this same purpose. Alternate translation: “You stiff-necked people who are uncircumcised in your heart and ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) ACT 7 51 yxe3 figs-nominaladj σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ 1 Stephen is using the adjective **stiff-necked** as a noun, to describe a kind of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “O people who are stiff-necked and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 7 51 vn7h figs-metaphor σκληροτράχηλοι 1 O stiff-necked Stephen is speaking figuratively of the Sanhedrin members as if they were horses or mules that stiffened their necks in order not to be turned in one direction or another. He means that they are being stubborn. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “O stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 7 51 zp55 figs-metonymy ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 uncircumcised in heart and ears Stephen speaks figuratively of the Sanhedrin members’ **heart and ears** as **uncircumcised** by association with the way that Gentiles, who are uncircumcised because they are not part of the covenant community, do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 51 esfc figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is using one part of a person, the **heart**, figuratively meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 7 51 jslb figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is figuratively using one part of a person, the **ears**, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 7 51 vn7h figs-metaphor σκληροτράχηλοι 1 O stiff-necked Stephen is speaking of the Sanhedrin members as if they were horses or mules that stiffened their necks in order not to be turned in one direction or another. He means that they are being stubborn. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “O stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 51 zp55 figs-metonymy ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 uncircumcised in heart and ears Stephen speaks of the Sanhedrin members’ **heart and ears** as **uncircumcised** by association with the way that Gentiles, who are uncircumcised because they are not part of the covenant community, do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 7 51 esfc figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is using one part of a person, the **heart**, meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 7 51 jslb figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is using one part of a person, the **ears**, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 7 51 zgon figs-hyperbole ὑμεῖς ἀεὶ τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ Ἁγίῳ ἀντιπίπτετε 1 The word **always** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You keep resisting the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 7 51 w164 figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς…ὑμῶν…ὑμεῖς 1 The words **you** and **your** are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 7 51 d2v8 figs-ellipsis ὡς οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Stephen is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “As your ancestors disobeyed God and did not listen to him, so you disobey God and do not listen to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -1167,28 +1167,28 @@ ACT 7 52 eiw2 figs-hyperbole τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδί ACT 7 52 q8wb figs-nominaladj τοῦ Δικαίου 1 of the Righteous One Stephen is using the adjective **Righteous** as a noun in order to describe a specific person. ULT adds **One** to show this. This is a title that refers to the Christ, the Messiah. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the Messiah, who was righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 7 52 agd9 οὗ νῦν ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς ἐγένεσθε 1 of whom you have now become betrayers and murderers It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You have now betrayed and murdered him” ACT 7 53 axhl writing-pronouns οἵτινες ἐλάβετε 1 The pronoun **who** refers to the Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 7 53 t92q figs-synecdoche οἵτινες ἐλάβετε 1 The Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing did not receive **the law** themselves. Rather, Stephen is using them figuratively to represent the entire Jewish community down through the years. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “whose community received” or, if you choose to start a new sentence, “Your community received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 7 53 t92q figs-synecdoche οἵτινες ἐλάβετε 1 The Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing did not receive **the law** themselves. Rather, Stephen is using them to represent the entire Jewish community down through the years. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “whose community received” or, if you choose to start a new sentence, “Your community received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 7 53 euw5 figs-explicit εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων 1 the law as ordained by angels Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to God giving the law to the Israelites at Mount Sinai. A later Jewish tradition said that angels acted as God’s intermediaries at that time. (Stephen says in [7:38](../07/38.md) that an angel was speaking to Moses on Mount Sinai.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as angels delivered it on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 54 ef2g figs-activepassive ἀκούοντες…ταῦτα διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 Now hearing these things If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these things cut them to their hearts when they heard them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 54 u4l7 figs-idiom διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 they were cut to their hearts Here, the expression **they were cut to their hearts** is an idiom that means the Sanhedrin members became very angry. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they became furious at Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 54 ae9s translate-symaction ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 they ground their teeth at him This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “they became so angry at Stephen that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked angrily at Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 7 55 dlux figs-explicit πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of Stephen as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 55 dlux figs-explicit πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 55 ntp4 figs-explicit ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν, εἶδεν 1 and looking intently into heaven The implication is that only Stephen saw this vision, not anyone else who was present. Alternate translation: “staring up into heaven, he saw in a vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 55 bl2j figs-explicit δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 he saw the glory of God The implication is that Stephen saw a bright light that expressed the magnificent presence of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a bright light that expressed the glorious presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 55 zpry figs-nominaladj Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 7 55 vamz figs-explicit Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 55 vyz3 translate-symaction Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 and Jesus standing at the right hand of God Elsewhere in the New Testament, Jesus is described as “sitting” **at the right of God**. Many interpreters believe that Jesus stood on this occasion to honor Stephen for his courage and faithful testimony. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 7 56 gzvv figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Stephen is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 7 56 p0jg figs-metaphor θεωρῶ τοὺς οὐρανοὺς διηνοιγμένους, καὶ 1 Stephen is speaking figuratively of **the heavens** being **opened** to mean that they are open to his view. Alternate translation: “the heavens are open to my view, and I see” or “I can see into heaven, and I see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 56 p0jg figs-metaphor θεωρῶ τοὺς οὐρανοὺς διηνοιγμένους, καὶ 1 Stephen is speaking of **the heavens** being **opened** to mean that they are open to his view. Alternate translation: “the heavens are open to my view, and I see” or “I can see into heaven, and I see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 56 aqp8 figs-explicit τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Son of Man The title **Son of Man** is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus himself used that title to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate the title directly into your language. Alternatively, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could express what it means. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 56 imoa figs-nominaladj ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you translated the nominal adjective **right** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 7 56 cr19 figs-explicit ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you expressed the implicit significance of the phrase **at the right of God** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “standing in a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 56 rvwp translate-symaction ἐκ δεξιῶν ἑστῶτα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you expressed the significance of the symbolic action of Jesus **standing** in [7:55](../07/55.md). Alternate translation: “, in a place of honor next to God, standing to honor me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 7 57 p4cg translate-symaction κράξαντες…φωνῇ μεγάλῃ, συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν 1 they covered their ears The Sanhedrin members did these things to demonstrate that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly to drown out Stephen, they put their hands over their ears to show that they did not want to hear any more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 7 57 wtwk figs-idiom κράξαντες…φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 This is an idiom that suggests figuratively that the Sanhedrin members had another, louder voice that they could use. It means that they raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 7 57 wtwk figs-idiom κράξαντες…φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 This is an idiom that suggests that the Sanhedrin members had another, louder voice that they could use. It means that they raised the volume of their voices. Alternate translation: “shouting loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 57 hm0q κράξαντες…φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 If you would like to reproduce this idiom but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “with loud voices” or “in loud voices” ACT 7 57 t287 ὥρμησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 This could mean: (1) that the Sanhedrin members all rushed at Stephen at the same time. Alternate translation: “rushed at him all at once” (2) that every one of the Sanhedrin members rushed at Stephen. Alternate translation: “every one of them rushed at him” -ACT 7 58 ks1u figs-metaphor ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως 1 throwing him outside the city Luke is likely speaking figuratively when he speaks of the Sanhedrin members **throwing** Stephen outside the city. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “seizing Stephen and forcefully taking him out of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 7 58 ks1u figs-metaphor ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως 1 throwing him outside the city Luke is likely speaking when he speaks of the Sanhedrin members **throwing** Stephen outside the city. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “seizing Stephen and forcefully taking him out of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 58 teas figs-explicit οἱ μάρτυρες 1 These were the “false witnesses” whom the Sanhedrin brought in to accuse Stephen, as described in [6:13](../06/13.md). According to the Law of Moses, it was their responsibility to carry out the execution of the man they had accused. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the false witnesses, who were responsible to carry out the execution,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 58 ryrh figs-explicit ἀπέθεντο τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτῶν, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας νεανίου καλουμένου Σαύλου 1 The implications are that the witnesses took off their long robes so that they could throw stones at Stephen more easily and that they left them with Saul for safekeeping. UST models one way to make these implications explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 58 wy7n translate-unknown τὰ ἱμάτια 1 outer garments These **outer garments** were long cloaks or robes that people wore outside to stay warm. They were also a sign of wealth and status. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of garment, you could use the name of another garment that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “coats” or “robes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1215,11 +1215,11 @@ ACT 8 3 yd2i κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους 1 according to the houses Altern ACT 8 3 w6vk figs-explicit κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους…τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας 1 men and women Luke may mean **houses** where Christians met, as described in [2:46](../02/46.md), and he means **men and women** who believed in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the houses where Christians met…believers in Jesus, both men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 8 4 n52l figs-nominaladj οἱ…διασπαρέντες 1 Luke is using the participle **having been scattered**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the believers who had been scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 8 4 ymy5 figs-activepassive οἱ…διασπαρέντες 1 had been scattered If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. See how you translated it in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “the believers who had fled from the persecution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 8 4 su6i figs-metonymy εὐαγγελιζόμενοι τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that these believers shared by using words. See how you translated the term in [4:4](../04/04.md). Also see the General Notes to this chapter for the meaning of the word translated **proclaiming** here and many other times in this chapter. Alternate translation: “telling the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 4 su6i figs-metonymy εὐαγγελιζόμενοι τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that these believers shared by using words. See how you translated the term in [4:4](../04/04.md). Also see the General Notes to this chapter for the meaning of the word translated **proclaiming** here and many other times in this chapter. Alternate translation: “telling the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 5 dh3x translate-names Φίλιππος 1 Connecting Statement: **Philip** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [1:13](../01/13.md). Philip was one of the apostles. A man by that same name, possibly the same man, was chosen as one of the deacons in [6:5](../06/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 8 5 gz5m figs-idiom κατελθὼν 1 went down to the city of Samaria Luke speaks of Philip **going down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 8 5 f45b figs-idiom τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας 1 the city of Samaria This is an idiom that means the principal city in the region of Samaria, probably the one known at that time as Sebaste, although some interpreters believe that Luke may have had the city of Sychar in mind instead. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 8 5 pk1l figs-metonymy τὸν Χριστόν 1 proclaimed to them the Christ Luke is using the name **Christ** figuratively by association to mean the message about Christ. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 5 pk1l figs-metonymy τὸν Χριστόν 1 proclaimed to them the Christ Luke is using the name **Christ** by association to mean the message about Christ. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 6 cnt9 figs-explicit οἱ ὄχλοι 1 And the crowds Luke implicitly means **the crowds** in the city that Philip traveled to. Alternate translation: “the people in that city of Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 8 6 jyvw ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 Alternate translation: “all together” ACT 8 6 tt0i figs-nominaladj τοῖς λεγομένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίππου 1 Luke is using the participle **being spoken**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **things** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that Philip was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -1233,7 +1233,7 @@ ACT 8 7 v8uj figs-activepassive πολλοὶ…παραλελυμένοι κα ACT 8 7 imbh figs-nominaladj πολλοὶ…παραλελυμένοι 1 Luke is using the participle **paralyzed** as an adjective. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “many who had been paralyzed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 8 7 anq3 figs-activepassive πολλοὶ…παραλελυμένοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many who had paralysis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 8 8 s8bm grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the people in the city did as a result of the many healings that Philip performed. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ACT 8 8 z5z3 figs-metonymy ἐγένετο…πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 And there was much joy in that city The phrase **that city** refers figuratively by association to the people who lived in that city. Alternate translation: “there was much joy among the people of that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 8 z5z3 figs-metonymy ἐγένετο…πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 And there was much joy in that city The phrase **that city** refers by association to the people who lived in that city. Alternate translation: “there was much joy among the people of that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 8 r0nz figs-abstractnouns ἐγένετο…πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the people of that city rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 8 9 jm7n writing-background ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων, προϋπῆρχεν ἐν τῇ πόλει μαγεύων 1 Luke is providing background information to help readers understand who Simon was and why he said and did the things Luke describes in the rest of this chapter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now there was a man named Simon who had been practicing sorcery in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 8 9 bed1 writing-participants ἀνὴρ…τις ὀνόματι Σίμων 1 But … a certain man named Simon Luke uses this phrase to introduce Simon as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -1241,14 +1241,14 @@ ACT 8 9 cx7a translate-names Σίμων 1 the city **Simon** is the name of a ma ACT 8 10 mvcm writing-pronouns ᾧ προσεῖχον πάντες ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 The phrase **to whom** refers to Simon. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “All of them, from little to great, were paying attention to Simon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 8 10 evt7 figs-hyperbole πάντες 1 they all … were paying attention Luke is using the word **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 8 10 h51l figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 Luke is using the adjectives **little** and **great** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least important people to the most important ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 8 10 ibl1 figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 from least to greatest Luke is speaking figuratively, using these two extremes in order to include all of the people in between. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +ACT 8 10 ibl1 figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 from least to greatest Luke is speaking, using these two extremes in order to include all of the people in between. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 8 10 h5ya writing-pronouns οὗτός 1 The demonstrative pronoun **This** stands for Simon. Alternate translation: “This man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 8 10 j3d8 translate-names ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη 1 This man is the power of God which is called Great The Samaritans believed that Simon must be the embodiment of some great power, and thinking that this power was God, the highest of powers, they called it Great. Alternate translation: “an embodiment of the Great God” or “an embodiment of the supreme God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 8 10 yw5v figs-activepassive ἡ καλουμένη 1 the power of God which is called Great If your language does not use the passive form **called**, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 8 11 pxj8 writing-background προσεῖχον δὲ αὐτῷ 1 General Information: This verse gives additional background information about Simon and what he was doing among the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “Now they were paying attention to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translatewriting-background]]) ACT 8 12 h1hg writing-pronouns ἐπίστευσαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 8 12 zwoj figs-abstractnouns εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 8 12 zjh5 figs-metonymy εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his authority, specifically as the Messiah, as the title **Christ** indicates. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 12 zjh5 figs-metonymy εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority, specifically as the Messiah, as the title **Christ** indicates. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 12 jg1w figs-infostructure εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Since Jesus inaugurated the **kingdom of God** when he came to earth, it may be helpful to put the information about Jesus before the information about the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the gospel about the name of Jesus Christ and the kingdom of God” or “proclaiming the good news that Jesus the Messiah had come and that God had begun to rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 8 12 vsy8 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 they were baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip was baptizing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 8 13 k2th figs-rpronouns ὁ δὲ Σίμων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσεν 1 Simon himself also believed Luke uses the word **himself** to emphasize how significant it was that Simon, who had claimed to be an embodiment of God, had believed in Jesus as the Messiah whom God sent. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “Even Simon believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) @@ -1259,14 +1259,14 @@ ACT 8 13 d4yb figs-doublet τε σημεῖα καὶ δυνάμεις 1 The te ACT 8 14 s7lr writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now when the apostles in Jerusalem heard Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce a new event in the story of the Samaritans becoming believers. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 8 14 lk9b figs-quotations ἀκούσαντες…ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God,’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 8 14 uwxo figs-exclamations ἀκούσαντες…ὅτι δέδεκται ἡ Σαμάρεια τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀπέστειλαν 1 If you decide to have a direct quotation here, you might also decide to make it an exclamation. Alternate translation: “having heard, ‘Samaria has received the word of God!’ sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) -ACT 8 14 ju21 figs-metonymy ἡ Σαμάρεια 1 Samaria Luke is using the word **Samaria** figuratively by association to mean the people of Samaria. Alternate translation: “the people of Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 8 14 e682 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 had received Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Philip shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 14 ju21 figs-metonymy ἡ Σαμάρεια 1 Samaria Luke is using the word **Samaria** by association to mean the people of Samaria. Alternate translation: “the people of Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 14 e682 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 had received Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Philip shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 14 td5t translate-names Πέτρον καὶ Ἰωάννην 1 **Peter** and **John** are the names of two men. See how you translated them in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 8 15 af1n writing-pronouns οἵτινες καταβάντες, προσηύξαντο περὶ αὐτῶν 1 who, having come down The pronoun **who** stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun **them** stands for the Samaritans. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John had come down, they prayed for the Samaritans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 8 15 hd1w figs-youdual οἵτινες 1 Since the pronoun **who** stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) ACT 8 15 hk1m figs-idiom καταβάντες 1 having come down Luke speaks of Philip **having come down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “having traveled from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 8 15 bun9 figs-go καταβάντες 1 prayed for them Your language may say “gone” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “having gone down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -ACT 8 16 d2z9 figs-metaphor οὐδέπω…ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on the Samaritan believers. Alternate translation: “none of them had yet received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 8 16 d2z9 figs-metaphor οὐδέπω…ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός 1 Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on the Samaritan believers. Alternate translation: “none of them had yet received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 8 16 l4ez grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why Peter and John had to pray for the Samaritans to receive the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “They prayed for them because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 8 16 qmjp figs-doublenegatives οὐδέπω…ἦν ἐπ’ οὐδενὶ αὐτῶν ἐπιπεπτωκός 1 In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he had not yet fallen upon none of them.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 8 16 bpzz writing-pronouns οὐδέπω…ἦν…ἐπιπεπτωκός 1 The pronoun **he** stands for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit had not yet fallen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1278,20 +1278,20 @@ ACT 8 17 q7gd translate-symaction ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ACT 8 18 rh79 figs-activepassive δίδοται τὸ Πνεῦμα 1 the Holy Spirit was being given through the laying on of the hands of the apostles If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God was giving the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 8 19 fbw9 δότε κἀμοὶ τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ᾧ ἐὰν ἐπιθῶ τὰς χεῖρας, λαμβάνῃ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον 1 so that whoever I lay my hands on may receive the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “Give me the authority to give the Holy Spirit to anyone I lay my hands on” ACT 8 20 df1j figs-exclamations τὸ ἀργύριόν σου, σὺν σοὶ εἴη εἰς ἀπώλειαν 1 Peter is using the exclamation form to emphasize how forcefully he rejects Simon’s offer. You may want to use an exclamation to convey this same emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “I refuse your offer! I can see that you are going to perdition, and you can take your money with you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) -ACT 8 20 y4ny figs-metonymy τὸ ἀργύριόν 1 Peter is referring figuratively to money by association with the way that **silver** was used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 8 20 gh12 figs-metonymy τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the gift of God Peter is referring figuratively to the ability to confer the Holy Spirit by the laying on of hands. Since this is an ability that only God can give, by association Peter calls it **the gift of God**. Alternate translation: “the power to confer the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 20 y4ny figs-metonymy τὸ ἀργύριόν 1 Peter is referring to money by association with the way that **silver** was used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 20 gh12 figs-metonymy τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the gift of God Peter is referring to the ability to confer the Holy Spirit by the laying on of hands. Since this is an ability that only God can give, by association Peter calls it **the gift of God**. Alternate translation: “the power to confer the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 21 p2ev figs-doublet οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 There is to you no part or share in this matter The terms **part** and **share** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “We will not let you have anything to do with this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 8 21 ufk3 figs-doublet σοι 1 The phrase **to you** represents a possessive form. Alternate translation: “yours” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ACT 8 21 xbh2 figs-metaphor ἡ γὰρ καρδία σου οὐκ ἔστιν εὐθεῖα 1 because your heart is not right Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives are not right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 8 21 xbh2 figs-metaphor ἡ γὰρ καρδία σου οὐκ ἔστιν εὐθεῖα 1 because your heart is not right Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives are not right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 8 21 p9v4 figs-metonymy ἔναντι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) that Simon’s **heart** is not **right** in God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “as far as God is concerned” (2) that Simon does not have the right thoughts about God or intentions towards God. Alternate translation: “in its attitude towards God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 22 sa6s figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας σου ταύτης 1 this wickedness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wickedness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for trying to buy God’s gift with money” or “for trying to bribe God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 8 22 ppk5 figs-metaphor ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου 1 the intention of your heart Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “what you intended to do” or “what you were thinking of doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 8 22 ppk5 figs-metaphor ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου 1 the intention of your heart Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “what you intended to do” or “what you were thinking of doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 8 22 pe2u grammar-connect-condition-fact δεήθητι τοῦ Κυρίου, εἰ ἄρα ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου 1 if therefore the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you Peter is using the conditional word **if** to introduce a desired result. There is actually no doubt about whether God will forgive someone who sincerely repents and prays for forgiveness. Alternate translation: “pray to the Lord so that, as a result, the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you” or “pray to the Lord and ask him to forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) ACT 8 22 lq4i figs-activepassive ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will forgive you for the intention of your heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 8 23 tf3s translate-unknown εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας 1 The **gall** plant has a bitter taste and is poisonous. If your readers would not be familiar with this plant, you could use the name of a similar plant in your area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 8 23 kpu6 figs-metonymy εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας 1 Peter is using the **gall** plant figuratively by association to mean “poison.” Alternate translation: “in the poison of bitterness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 8 23 d3v7 figs-metaphor εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας 1 in the poison of bitterness Peter is describing **bitterness** figuratively as if it were made of **gall** or poison. He means that bitterness, here in the sense of envy, spiritually poisons a person, that is, it leads them towards spiritual death. Alternate translation: “dangerously envious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 8 23 j696 figs-metaphor σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας 1 the bond of unrighteousness Peter speaks figuratively of **the bond of unrighteousness** as if unrighteousness were restraining Simon and keeping him a prisoner. He means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “unable to stop sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 8 23 kpu6 figs-metonymy εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας 1 Peter is using the **gall** plant by association to mean “poison.” Alternate translation: “in the poison of bitterness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 23 d3v7 figs-metaphor εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας 1 in the poison of bitterness Peter is describing **bitterness** as if it were made of **gall** or poison. He means that bitterness, here in the sense of envy, spiritually poisons a person, that is, it leads them towards spiritual death. Alternate translation: “dangerously envious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 8 23 j696 figs-metaphor σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας 1 the bond of unrighteousness Peter speaks of **the bond of unrighteousness** as if unrighteousness were restraining Simon and keeping him a prisoner. He means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “unable to stop sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 8 24 n5cw figs-youdual ὑμεῖς…εἰρήκατε 1 Even though it was only Peter who spoke to Simon, in his response, Simon is addressing both Peter and John, since he offered money to both of them, as [8:18](../08/18.md) describes. Since Simon is speaking to two men, **You** and **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) ACT 8 24 v2wy figs-imperative δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please pray to the Lord for me” or “I ask you to pray to the Lord for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 8 24 hwc6 writing-pronouns δεήθητε ὑμεῖς ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ πρὸς τὸν Κύριον 1 Simon is stating the pronoun **You**, which is already implied in the verb **pray**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Pray to the Lord for me yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1300,8 +1300,8 @@ ACT 8 24 sk5w figs-explicit μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν ACT 8 25 nzvg grammar-connect-time-sequential οὖν 1 Luke is using the word translated **Then** to introduce what Peter and John did after being in the city where Philip had been telling the Samaritans about Jesus. Alternate translation: “After that,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) ACT 8 25 p3rj figs-explicit οἱ…διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 The **ones** Luke is describing are Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter and John, after they had testified and spoken the word of the Lord,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 8 25 uz15 figs-nominaladj οἱ…διαμαρτυράμενοι καὶ λαλήσαντες 1 when they had testified Luke is using the participles **having testified** and **having spoken**, which function as adjectives, as nouns. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the ones who had testified and spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 8 25 ww9k figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 spoken the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 8 25 eu66 figs-metonymy πολλάς…κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν 1 to many villages of the Samaritans The term **villages** refers figuratively by association to the people who lived in these villages. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 25 ww9k figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 spoken the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 25 eu66 figs-metonymy πολλάς…κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν 1 to many villages of the Samaritans The term **villages** refers by association to the people who lived in these villages. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 26 mbj9 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 8 26 w1nk figs-idiom ἀνάστηθι 1 Arise and go Here the word **arise** means that the angel wanted Philip to take action, not that the angel wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Pack for a journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 8 26 le2c figs-idiom τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν 1 that goes down from Jerusalem to Gaza The angel speaks of the road **going down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “the road that leads from Jerusalem to Gaza” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1316,10 +1316,10 @@ ACT 8 27 nm48 figs-metaphor ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης ACT 8 27 v8q7 figs-explicit ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 who had come to Jerusalem to worship The implication is that this man was a Gentile who believed in the true God and had come to worship at the Jewish temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Even though he was a Gentile, he had come to worship the true God at the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 8 27 uk32 figs-go ὃς ἐληλύθει 1 Your language may say “gone” rather than **come** in a context such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “who had gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 8 28 d3kv translate-unknown τοῦ ἅρματος 1 chariot Here and in [8:29](../08/29.md) and [8:38](../08/38.md), the term **chariot** probably means something like “carriage.” Chariots were vehicles for war, not for long-distance travel, and people stood to ride in chariots, while this man was seated. Alternate translation, as in UST: “his carriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 8 28 bx2j figs-metonymy ἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν 1 was reading the prophet Isaiah Luke is using the phrase **the prophet Isaiah** figuratively to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “he was reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 28 bx2j figs-metonymy ἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν 1 was reading the prophet Isaiah Luke is using the phrase **the prophet Isaiah** to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “he was reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 28 n40c figs-explicit ἀνεγίνωσκεν 1 Since Philip was able to hear what the man was reading, as [8:30](../08/30.md) explains, the implication is that the man was reading aloud. Alternate translation: “he was reading aloud from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 8 29 llh1 figs-metonymy πρόσελθε καὶ κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ 1 be joined to this chariot The Spirit means figuratively that Philip is to stay close to the person riding in the **chariot**. Alternate translation: “Go over to that chariot so you can be near the man in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 8 30 ffh7 figs-metonymy ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην 1 reading Isaiah the prophet Luke is using the phrase **Isaiah the prophet** figuratively to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 29 llh1 figs-metonymy πρόσελθε καὶ κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ 1 be joined to this chariot The Spirit means that Philip is to stay close to the person riding in the **chariot**. Alternate translation: “Go over to that chariot so you can be near the man in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 30 ffh7 figs-metonymy ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην 1 reading Isaiah the prophet Luke is using the phrase **Isaiah the prophet** to mean the prophecies that Isaiah spoke and recorded. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 30 x98i figs-explicit ἆρά γε γινώσκεις ἃ ἀναγινώσκεις 1 Do you understand what you are reading? The Ethiopian was a literate, educated man who could read, but he lacked spiritual discernment. Philip is asking implicitly whether he understands the meaning of the passage from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “Do you understand the meaning of what you are reading?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 8 31 r5g2 figs-rquestion πῶς γὰρ ἂν δυναίμην ἐὰν μή τις ὁδηγήσει με? 1 how would I be able, unless someone will guide me? The man is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No, I cannot understand unless someone guides me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 8 31 zx9h figs-explicit παρεκάλεσέν…τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ 1 he summoned Philip, having come up, to sit with him The implication is that when the man invited Philip to come up and sit with him, Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “he invited Philip to come up and sit with him and explain the Scriptures, and Philip accepted the invitation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1339,15 +1339,15 @@ ACT 8 34 htb2 figs-idiom δέομαί σου 1 I am begging you The Ethiopian of ACT 8 34 pa3m writing-pronouns ἑτέρου τινός 1 In this context, the pronoun **other** means “other person.” Alternate translation: “some other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 8 35 j7xw figs-metonymy ἀνοίξας…τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 By association with the way a person would be **opening his mouth** in order to speak, this means that Philip spoke. The image of the open mouth suggests a certain confidence and freedom in speaking. Alternate translation: “speaking confidently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 35 uw21 figs-explicit τῆς Γραφῆς ταύτης 1 this scripture By **this scripture**, Luke implicitly means the passage that the official had been reading. Alternate translation: “the passage from Isaiah that the official had been reading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 8 35 xg4i figs-metonymy εὐηγγελίσατο αὐτῷ τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 Luke is using the name **Jesus** figuratively by association to mean the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 8 36 ip13 figs-metonymy τι ὕδωρ…ὕδωρ 1 they were going along the road Luke and the official are using the word **water** figuratively to mean a body of water, such as a pool at a desert oasis. Alternate translation: “a pool of water … there is a pool of water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 35 xg4i figs-metonymy εὐηγγελίσατο αὐτῷ τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 Luke is using the name **Jesus** by association to mean the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 36 ip13 figs-metonymy τι ὕδωρ…ὕδωρ 1 they were going along the road Luke and the official are using the word **water** to mean a body of water, such as a pool at a desert oasis. Alternate translation: “a pool of water … there is a pool of water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 36 muz2 figs-rquestion τί κωλύει με βαπτισθῆναι? 1 What is preventing me from being baptized? This question could be: (1) a rhetorical question that the eunuch is using as a polite way to ask Philip to baptize him. Alternate translation: “Please allow me to be baptized.” (2) a genuine request for information, since Philip seems to answer this question in [8:37](../08/37.md) by identifying something that could keep the official from being baptized. Alternate translation: “Is there a condition I must meet in order to be baptized?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 8 36 wb9j figs-activepassive με βαπτισθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you from baptizing me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 8 37 ov75 translate-textvariants εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ Φίλιππος ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου σωθήσει; ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἶπεν Πιστεύω εἰς τὸν Χριστὸν τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ 1 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -ACT 8 37 qj5i figs-metaphor ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου 1 Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and intentions. Alternate translation: “If you genuinely believe in Jesus and want to be his disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 8 37 qj5i figs-metaphor ἐὰν πιστεύεις ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου 1 Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and intentions. Alternate translation: “If you genuinely believe in Jesus and want to be his disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 8 37 djq2 figs-activepassive σωθήσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 8 37 e3uu figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς…εἶπεν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the eunuch responded to what Philip told him. Alternate translation: “the eunuch responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -ACT 8 38 l8wl figs-metonymy ἐκέλευσεν στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα 1 he commanded the chariot to stop Luke is using the term **chariot** figuratively by association to mean the driver of the chariot. Alternate translation: “the official told the driver of the chariot to stop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 38 l8wl figs-metonymy ἐκέλευσεν στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα 1 he commanded the chariot to stop Luke is using the term **chariot** by association to mean the driver of the chariot. Alternate translation: “the official told the driver of the chariot to stop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 38 nn00 writing-pronouns ἐβάπτισεν αὐτόν 1 The pronoun **he** stands for Philip, and the pronoun **him** stands for the eunuch. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized the eunuch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 8 39 xp52 grammar-connect-time-sequential γὰρ 1 the eunuch did not see him anymore While the word translated **for** often introduces a reason, that does not seem to be its function here. Luke is not saying that the eunuch did not see Philip anymore because he did not look for him but instead **went on his way**. Rather, the word **for** seems simply to introduce a continuation of the narrative. Alternate translation: “but” or “nevertheless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) ACT 8 40 r1x7 figs-explicit Φίλιππος…εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον 1 Philip was found at Azotus The implication is that there was no indication of Philip traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. Alternate translation: “Philip suddenly reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1358,14 +1358,14 @@ ACT 8 40 yf7i translate-names Ἄζωτον… Καισάρειαν 1 **Azotus* ACT 9 intro jm6x 0 # Acts 9 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In [9:1](../09/01.md), the story shifts back to Saul and tells about his salvation.

In [9:32](../09/32.md), the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter.

Acts [9:31](../09/31.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the third major part of the book.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Letters for the synagogues in Damascus”

The “letters” Paul asked for in 9:2 were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws.

### “The Way”

No one knows for sure who first started calling the community of Jesus’ followers “the Way.” This may be what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. However, in the book of Acts the term is only used by outsiders, as in 9:2, or by believers speaking to outsiders. So it could also be a term by which the community of Jesus’ followers was known outside that community.

### “the church”

Acts 9:31 is the first use of the word **church** in the singular to refer to more than one local congregation. In that verse it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Judea, Galilee, and Samaria. It shows that they recognized that they all had a common identity as followers of Jesus.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### “the Lord”

Luke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord,” in verses 1, 10, 11, 15, 27, 28, 31, 35, and 42, and Ananias refers to Jesus the same way in verse 17. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could say “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### What Saul saw when he met Jesus

It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here. ACT 9 1 r4n5 writing-newevent δὲ 1 General Information: Luke uses the word translated **But** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 9 1 anb6 figs-hendiadys ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς 1 still speaking threats even of murder against the disciples Luke is using the two words **threat** and **murder** together to express a single idea. The word **murder** tells what kind of **threat** Saul was making. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “making murderous threats against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -ACT 9 1 lrre figs-metonymy ἐμπνέων 1 Luke is using the term **breathing** figuratively by association to mean “speaking,” since people breathe out while they speak. Alternate translation: “speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 9 1 lrre figs-metonymy ἐμπνέων 1 Luke is using the term **breathing** by association to mean “speaking,” since people breathe out while they speak. Alternate translation: “speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 2 wyfp writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ…εὕρῃ…ἀγάγῃ 1 The pronoun **him** refers to the high priest and both instances of the pronoun **he** refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 9 2 zu6j translate-unknown ἐπιστολὰς 1 See the General Notes to this chapter for an explanation of what these **letters** were. This may help you decide what word in your language to use for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 9 2 v9lw figs-metonymy εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς 1 to the synagogues Luke is using the terms **Damascus** and **synagogues** figuratively by association to mean the people, probably the leaders, of the synagogues in Damascus. Alternate translation: “to the people in the synagogues of Damascus” or “to the leaders of the synagogues in Damascus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 9 2 v9lw figs-metonymy εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς 1 to the synagogues Luke is using the terms **Damascus** and **synagogues** by association to mean the people, probably the leaders, of the synagogues in Damascus. Alternate translation: “to the people in the synagogues of Damascus” or “to the leaders of the synagogues in Damascus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 2 lvzt translate-names Δαμασκὸν 1 **Damascus** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 9 2 thuy translate-names τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας 1 As the General Notes to this chapter explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 9 2 mma1 figs-activepassive δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 9 2 grch figs-synecdoche δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Luke is figuratively using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 9 2 grch figs-synecdoche δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Luke is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 9 2 a6z4 figs-explicit δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 having bound them, he might bring them to Jerusalem The implication is that Saul wanted to bring believers in Jesus to Jerusalem for trial and punishment by the Jewish leaders. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem so that the Jewish leaders there could judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 3 jf4g figs-explicit ἐν…τῷ πορεύεσθαι 1 as he was traveling Luke means implicitly that the high priest gave Saul the letters he asked for and that Saul then left Jerusalem to go to Damascus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as he was traveling to Damascus with letters that the high priest gave him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 3 by55 writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 it happened that Luke uses the phrase **it happened that** to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -1395,21 +1395,21 @@ ACT 9 11 k3ve figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ γὰρ, προσεύχεται 1 The Lo ACT 9 12 jk46 translate-symaction ἐπιθέντα αὐτῷ χεῖρας 1 laying hands on him In this culture, **laying hands on** people was a symbolic way of conveying a spiritual blessing to them, as the apostles did in [6:6](../06/06.md) for the men chosen to oversee the food distribution. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “giving him a spiritual blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 9 13 quxn figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ πολλῶν 1 Ananias is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 9 13 sh2m figs-abstractnouns ὅσα κακὰ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **evils**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many harmful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 9 13 la9t figs-metonymy τοῖς ἁγίοις σου ἐποίησεν ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 to your saints Ananias is using the term **saints** figuratively by association to mean believers in Jesus, since the term means “holy ones” or “ones who are set apart.” Alternate translation: “to the people in Jerusalem who are dedicated to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 9 13 la9t figs-metonymy τοῖς ἁγίοις σου ἐποίησεν ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 to your saints Ananias is using the term **saints** by association to mean believers in Jesus, since the term means “holy ones” or “ones who are set apart.” Alternate translation: “to the people in Jerusalem who are dedicated to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 14 ptd6 figs-abstractnouns ἔχει ἐξουσίαν παρὰ τῶν ἀρχιερέων 1 he has authority … to bind all If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the chief priests have authorized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 9 14 gk5o figs-synecdoche δῆσαι 1 Ananias is figuratively using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to arrest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 9 14 gk5o figs-synecdoche δῆσαι 1 Ananias is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to arrest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 9 14 hi6x figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Ananias is using the participle **calling**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who call on your name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 9 14 t3fl figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 who call upon your name Here, **name** figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the ones calling upon you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 9 14 t3fl figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 who call upon your name Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the ones calling upon you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 14 ampz figs-idiom τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Here, the expression **calling on** means to worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 9 15 jmt7 figs-possession σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς…μοι 1 this one is a chosen instrument of mine The Lord is using the possessive form to describe Saul as an **instrument** who is characterized by his **choosing**. Alternate translation: “an instrument I have chosen” or “someone I have chosen as an instrument” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 9 15 gk29 writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “this man” or “this man Saul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 9 15 ndxu figs-metaphor σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς…μοι 1 The Lord describes Saul figuratively as an **instrument** or tool to indicate that he intends to use Saul to advance his purposes. Alternate translation: “someone I have chosen to use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 9 15 z5fj figs-metaphor τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 who will carry my name The Lord says figuratively that Saul will **carry** his **name**, meaning that he will go to many places and speak about it. Alternate translation: “to speak about my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 9 15 h8vw figs-metonymy τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 Here, **name** figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about me” or “to tell others about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 9 15 ndxu figs-metaphor σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς…μοι 1 The Lord describes Saul as an **instrument** or tool to indicate that he intends to use Saul to advance his purposes. Alternate translation: “someone I have chosen to use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 9 15 z5fj figs-metaphor τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 who will carry my name The Lord says that Saul will **carry** his **name**, meaning that he will go to many places and speak about it. Alternate translation: “to speak about my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 9 15 h8vw figs-metonymy τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about me” or “to tell others about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 15 wh8c figs-explicit ἐθνῶν 1 The term **nations** refers to people groups that are not Jewish. See how you translated it in [4:25](../04/25.md). Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 15 bbfd figs-synecdoche βασιλέων 1 The Lord is using **kings**, one kind of ruler, to mean all kinds of rulers. Saul, later known as Paul, testified before various rulers and officials. Alternate translation: “rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 9 15 uq9b figs-metaphor υἱῶν…Ἰσραήλ 1 The Lord is using the word **sons** figuratively to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 9 16 kty3 figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου 1 for my name Here, **name** figuratively represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. This could mean: (1) that Saul will suffer for telling people about Jesus. Alternate translation: “to make me known” (2) that Saul will suffer for Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for me” or “for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 9 15 uq9b figs-metaphor υἱῶν…Ἰσραήλ 1 The Lord is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 9 16 kty3 figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου 1 for my name Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. This could mean: (1) that Saul will suffer for telling people about Jesus. Alternate translation: “to make me known” (2) that Saul will suffer for Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for me” or “for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 17 s8ms figs-explicit ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν 1 And Ananias departed, and entered into the house It may be helpful to state that **Ananias** went to **the house** before he **entered into** it. UST models one way to express this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 17 my6m translate-symaction ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 having laid his hands on him When Ananias **laid his hands** on Saul, this was a symbolic way of giving him a blessing. See the explanation at [9:2](../01/32.md) and see how you translated the same expression there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 9 17 q61x figs-you σοι…ἤρχου…ἀναβλέψῃς 1 All of the occurrences of the word **you** in this verse are singular and refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) @@ -1417,7 +1417,7 @@ ACT 9 17 cah9 figs-metaphor Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ 1 **Brother** is a figur ACT 9 17 cxu4 figs-nominaladj ὁ ὀφθείς σοι 1 Ananias is using the participle **having appeared**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to mean a person, Jesus. ULT adds the term **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “who appeared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 9 17 ptg0 figs-go ᾗ ἤρχου 1 Your language may say “coming” rather than **going** in a context such as this. Use whichever word is more natural. Alternate translation: “by which you were coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 9 17 a89q figs-activepassive ὅπως ἀναβλέψῃς καὶ πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 so that you might see again and be filled with the Holy Spirit If your language does not use the passive form **filled**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you might see again and that the Holy Spirit might fill you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 9 17 x4ey figs-metaphor πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Ananias is speaking figuratively as if Saul were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “receive the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 9 17 x4ey figs-metaphor πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Ananias is speaking as if Saul were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “receive the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 9 18 m1hx translate-unknown λεπίδες 1 something like scales fell It may be helpful to your readers if you use something they would recognize that has scales to describe the **scales** that fell from Saul’s eyes. Alternate translation: “fish scales” or “lizard scales” or “snake scales” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 9 18 efs9 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη 1 rising up, he was baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Ananias baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 9 19 rxfi figs-activepassive ἐνισχύθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he felt stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1427,10 +1427,10 @@ ACT 9 21 xid8 figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες 1 all who we ACT 9 21 a8j8 figs-nominaladj οἱ ἀκούοντες…ὁ πορθήσας…τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους 1 Luke is using the participles **hearing**, **having destroyed**, and **calling on**, which function as adjective, as nouns. ULT adds the terms **ones** and **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who heard … the man who destroyed … those who call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 9 21 f4fd figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πορθήσας ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο, καὶ ὧδε εἰς τοῦτο ἐληλύθει, ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς? 1 Is not this the one who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name? The people in Damascus are using the question form to emphasize that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers in Jerusalem and had come to Damascus to arrest the believers there. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name! And he come here for this, that he might bring them bound to the chief priests!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 9 21 ctg3 figs-explicit τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 this name By **this name** the speakers implicitly mean the name of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 9 21 l82i figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 Here, the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his person. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 9 21 l82i figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 Here, the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 21 zuoi figs-idiom τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 Here, **calling on** is an idiom. See how you translated it in [9:14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 9 21 i512 figs-activepassive ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 9 21 pnrp figs-synecdoche ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς 1 Like Ananias in [9:14](../09/14.md), the people here are figuratively using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 9 21 pnrp figs-synecdoche ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς 1 Like Ananias in [9:14](../09/14.md), the people here are using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 9 22 r1np figs-explicit καὶ συνέχυννεν τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας ἐν Δαμασκῷ, συμβιβάζων ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός 1 was stirring up the Jews Saul was not intentionally **stirring up the Jews**. They became agitated because they could not find a way to refute Saul’s arguments that Jesus was the Messiah. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As he proved that Jesus is the Christ, the Jews living in Damascus became agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 23 cg9k figs-idiom ὡς…ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί 1 As in [2:1](../02/01.md) and [7:23](../07/23.md), this is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 9 23 nyh4 figs-activepassive ὡς…ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” but use an active verbal form instead of the passive form here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1439,26 +1439,26 @@ ACT 9 23 g6gw writing-pronouns αὐτόν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Saul ACT 9 24 gnm1 figs-infostructure ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν 1 This could mean: (1) that a person realized there was a plot by recognizing that the Jewish leaders were watching the gates, and that person told Saul. In that case it may be helpful to move this information to the end of the verse, as UST does. (2) that someone told Saul about the plot, but even so, he was not able to flee for his life, because the gates were being watched. In that case you could change the second instance of **But** in the verse to “However.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 9 24 lv62 figs-activepassive ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν 1 But their plan became known to Saul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Saul learned about their plot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 9 24 cy9n figs-explicit παρετηροῦντο…τὰς πύλας…ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀνέλωσιν 1 indeed they were watching the gates The city of Damascus had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through **the gates** in this wall. Saul’s enemies expected that he would try to leave the city eventually and they hoped to catch him and kill him when he did. Alternate translation: “they were … watching the gates in the city wall … in order to kill him when he tried to leave the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 9 24 b0gv figs-metonymy τὰς πύλας 1 Luke is using **the gates** figuratively to mean the people going through the gates. Alternate translation: “to see who was going through the gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 9 24 aezc figs-merism ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς 1 Luke is figuratively using the two parts of a full day, **day** and **night**, to mean all the time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +ACT 9 24 b0gv figs-metonymy τὰς πύλας 1 Luke is using **the gates** to mean the people going through the gates. Alternate translation: “to see who was going through the gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 9 24 aezc figs-merism ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς 1 Luke is using the two parts of a full day, **day** and **night**, to mean all the time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 9 25 lc8m figs-explicit οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his disciples These **disciples** were people who had believed Saul’s message and become committed followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the people who had believed Saul’s message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 26 e38m figs-hyperbole πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν 1 but they were all afraid of him Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 9 27 abca writing-pronouns Βαρναβᾶς…ἐπιλαβόμενος αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστόλους; καὶ διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς πῶς ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ εἶδεν τὸν Κύριον, καὶ ὅτι ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ…ἐπαρρησιάσατο 1 told them The pronoun **him** refers to Saul in every instance. The pronoun **he** refers to Saul in the first and third instances and to **the Lord** in the second instance. The pronoun **them** refers to **the apostles**. Alternate translation: “taking hold of Saul, Barnabas brought him to the apostles and told the apostles how Saul had seen the Lord on the road and that the Lord had spoken to Saul … Saul had spoken boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 9 27 abcb translate-names Βαρναβᾶς 1 he had seen **Barnabas** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [4:36](../04/36.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 9 27 n9f1 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 he had spoken boldly in the name of Jesus Here the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. Saul **had spoken boldly** with delegated authority, representing Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a representative of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 9 27 n9f1 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 he had spoken boldly in the name of Jesus Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. Saul **had spoken boldly** with delegated authority, representing Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a representative of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 28 cgb1 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what Saul was able to do after Barnabas reassured the apostles about him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 9 28 m5rs writing-pronouns ἦν μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 he was with them The pronoun **he** refers to Saul. The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles and probably other disciples in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “Saul was with the apostles and other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 9 28 r6ok figs-idiom εἰσπορευόμενος καὶ ἐκπορευόμενος 1 This is a Hebrew idiom that refers to freedom of movement. Saul was completely accepted by the believers in Jerusalem and could go anywhere among them. Alternate translation: “moving about freely among them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 9 28 fbb7 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord See how you translated the similar expression in [9:27](../09/27.md). Alternate translation: “as a representative of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 29 d7lm translate-names Ἑλληνιστάς 1 debated with the Hellenists **Hellenists** was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. See how you translated this name in [6:1](../06/01.md). (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names) ACT 9 29 lgqe figs-explicit οἱ δὲ ἐπεχείρουν ἀνελεῖν αὐτόν 1 The implication is that the Hellenists were not able to refute what Saul was saying about Jesus, and so they saw him as a threat and wanted to get rid of him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and because they could not refute him, they were attempting to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 9 30 uz9a figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 9 30 uz9a figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 9 30 j4mt figs-idiom κατήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 they brought him down to Caesarea Luke uses the phrase **brought him down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Caesarea is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “made sure he got safely to Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 9 30 aqn6 figs-explicit ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν 1 sent him away to Tarsus Caesarea was a seaport, and the believers probably **sent** Saul **to Tarsus** by ship. Alternate translation: “sent him away by ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 31 fh2g figs-abstractnouns εἶχεν εἰρήνην 1 had peace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enjoyed peaceful conditions once more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 9 31 elq7 figs-activepassive οἰκοδομουμένη καὶ πορευομένη 1 being built up and going on If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could say “God” or “the Holy Spirit.” Alternate translation: “As God built it up and it journeyed” or “As the Holy Spirit built it up and it journeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 9 31 vx51 figs-metaphor οἰκοδομουμένη 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of the church as if it were a building that God was constructing. Alternate translation: “growing stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 9 31 j8c9 figs-metaphor πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 walking in the fear of the Lord Here, **journeying** figuratively means “living.” Alternate translation: “living in the fear of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 9 31 vx51 figs-metaphor οἰκοδομουμένη 1 Luke is speaking of the church as if it were a building that God was constructing. Alternate translation: “growing stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 9 31 j8c9 figs-metaphor πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 walking in the fear of the Lord Here, **journeying** means “living.” Alternate translation: “living in the fear of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 9 31 z59s πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “living with a deep respect for the Lord” ACT 9 31 hl24 figs-possession τῇ παρακλήσει τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 in the comfort of the Holy Spirit Luke is using the possessive form to describe **the Holy Spirit** as the one who was giving the church **encouragement**. Alternate translation: “with the Holy Spirit encouraging them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 9 32 w68g writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Now it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -1478,12 +1478,12 @@ ACT 9 35 wykn writing-pronouns εἶδαν αὐτὸν πάντες οἱ κα ACT 9 35 z3fp figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα 1 all who were living in Lydda and in Sharon Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who lived in Lydda and in Sharon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 9 35 qkv4 translate-names καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα 1 in Lydda and in Sharon **Sharon** is the name of a plain, on which Lydda was located. Alternate translation: “and in the surrounding area of Sharon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 9 35 pf23 figs-explicit εἶδαν αὐτὸν 1 saw him The implication is that the people knew Aeneas was bedridden and now they saw that he was healed. Alternate translation: “saw that Aeneas was healed” or “saw Aeneas up and walking around” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 9 35 x9yw figs-metaphor οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 and they turned to the Lord Here, **turned to the Lord** figuratively means that the people believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and started obeying Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 9 35 x9yw figs-metaphor οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 and they turned to the Lord Here, **turned to the Lord** means that the people believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and started obeying Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 9 36 zgq5 writing-newevent δέ 1 Now there was Luke uses the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 9 36 gy8u translate-names Ἰόππῃ 1 General Information: **Joppa** is the name of a city that was about 15 kilometers or about 10 miles from Lydda. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 9 36 gwr4 translate-names Ταβειθά, ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται, Δορκάς 1 Tabitha, which is translated to say “Dorcas.” **Tabitha** was this woman’s name in Aramaic, and **Dorcas** was her name Greek. (Both names mean “gazelle.” Note how, later in the story, Luke, writing in Greek, calls her Dorcas, while Peter, speaking in Aramaic, calls her Tabitha.) It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Her name in Aramaic was Tabitha, and her name in Greek was Dorcas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 9 36 z8la figs-activepassive λέγεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 9 36 q2rn figs-metaphor πλήρης ἔργων ἀγαθῶν 1 full of good works Luke speaks figuratively of **Dorcas** as if she were a container that was **full** of good works and almsgivings. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “doing many good things and giving to others generously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 9 36 q2rn figs-metaphor πλήρης ἔργων ἀγαθῶν 1 full of good works Luke speaks of **Dorcas** as if she were a container that was **full** of good works and almsgivings. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “doing many good things and giving to others generously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 9 37 mg72 figs-explicit ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 And it happened that in those days The phrase **in those days** refers to the time when Peter was nearby in Lydda. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while Peter was nearby” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 37 y8sx figs-explicit λούσαντες…αὐτὴν ἔθηκαν 1 having washed her This was washing to prepare for Dorcas’s body for burial. Customarily her family and friends would have done it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. “Once her family and friends had washed her body to prepare it for burial, they laid it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 37 znj4 figs-explicit ἔθηκαν ἐν ὑπερῴῳ 1 they laid her in an upper room This was a temporary display of the body during the funeral process. Alternate translation: “they laid her body in an upper room so that people could come there and pay their respects” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1500,7 +1500,7 @@ ACT 9 40 wr7h figs-imperative Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι 1 This was not ACT 9 40 k28m translate-symaction Ταβειθά, ἀνάστηθι 1 Getting up was a symbolic action by which Tabitha could demonstrate that Jesus had restored her to life. Alternate translation: “Get up to show everyone that Jesus has restored you to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 9 41 r7n6 figs-explicit δοὺς…αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν 1 having given his hand to her, he raised her up The implication is that Peter extended his **hand** to Tabitha to help her stand up. Alternate translation: “he let her hold onto his hand for support as he helped her stand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 41 b73s figs-infostructure τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας 1 the saints and the widows These **saints** and **widows** were probably not two different groups. The widows were likely also believers, but Luke mentions them specifically because Tabitha was so important to them. To show this, it may be helpful to put the information about the widows before the information about the believers. Alternate translation: “the widows and the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -ACT 9 41 ex8e figs-metonymy τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Luke is using the term **saints** figuratively by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in [9:33](../09/33.md). Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 9 41 ex8e figs-metonymy τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Luke is using the term **saints** by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in [9:33](../09/33.md). Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 42 nda9 figs-activepassive γνωστὸν δὲ ἐγένετο καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰόππης 1 And this became known throughout all Joppa If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 9 43 k9ik writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Now it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 9 43 qar2 translate-unknown βυρσεῖ 1 Simon, a tanner A **tanner** is someone who makes leather from animal skins. If this is not an occupation that your readers would recognize or understand, you could use the name of a similar occupation in your culture that they would recognize. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1522,7 +1522,7 @@ ACT 10 3 z5ty translate-ordinal ὥραν ἐνάτην 1 If you decide to tran ACT 10 4 abcf writing-pronouns ὁ δὲ, ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ 1 But he stared at him The pronoun **he** stands for Cornelius, and the pronoun **him** stands for the angel. Alternate translation: “But Cornelius, staring at the angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 10 4 bd2h writing-politeness τί ἐστιν, κύριε 1 Cornelius uses the respectful title **lord** because he recognizes that he is speaking to a messenger from God. See how you translated the similar term in [9:5](../09/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 10 4 abcg writing-pronouns εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ 1 And he said to him The pronoun **he** stands for the angel, and the pronoun **him** stands for Cornelius. Alternate translation: “And the angel said to Cornelius” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 10 4 p5ml figs-metaphor αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Your prayers and your alms have gone up for a memorial offering before God A **memorial offering** was the portion of an offering brought to the priests for their support that was burned on the altar as a pleasing aroma for God, to give God an occasion to remember the worshiper. The angel is using this offering figuratively to tell Cornelius that God is aware of his devotion and generosity and that God is pleased with those things. You could translate this metaphor as a simile, or you could explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Your prayers and your alms have gone up like a memorial offering before God” or “God is aware of your prayers and your alms, and he is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 10 4 p5ml figs-metaphor αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Your prayers and your alms have gone up for a memorial offering before God A **memorial offering** was the portion of an offering brought to the priests for their support that was burned on the altar as a pleasing aroma for God, to give God an occasion to remember the worshiper. The angel is using this offering to tell Cornelius that God is aware of his devotion and generosity and that God is pleased with those things. You could translate this metaphor as a simile, or you could explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Your prayers and your alms have gone up like a memorial offering before God” or “God is aware of your prayers and your alms, and he is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 10 4 xpa1 figs-idiom ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **before** means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “into the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 10 5 h33i figs-activepassive ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 6 hou9 figs-activepassive ξενίζεται παρά 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is the guest of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1533,19 +1533,19 @@ ACT 10 8 pcg2 figs-hyperbole ἅπαντα 1 having told them everything By **ev ACT 10 9 ey9n writing-pronouns ὁδοιπορούντων ἐκείνων 1 The demonstrative pronoun **those** refers to Cornelius’ two servants and the soldier under Cornelius’ command. Alternate translation: “as the men whom Cornelius had sent were traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 10 9 tu7n translate-unknown περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην 1 at about the sixth hour In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “at around noon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 10 9 r6l8 translate-ordinal περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην 1 went up to the housetop If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “at around hour six” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -ACT 10 10 im7x figs-personification ἐγένετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις 1 a vision came upon him Luke speaks figuratively of this **vision** as if it were a living thing that could come onto someone. Alternate translation: “he had a vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 10 10 im7x figs-personification ἐγένετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις 1 a vision came upon him Luke speaks of this **vision** as if it were a living thing that could come onto someone. Alternate translation: “he had a vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 10 11 n4hi θεωρεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον 1 he sees the sky having been opened To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “And he saw” or “And Peter saw” ACT 10 11 u9u4 figs-activepassive τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον 1 like a large sheet … by four corners If your language does not use the passive form **opened**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sky break open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 11 jh1m figs-activepassive καθιέμενον 1 being let down by four corners If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 12 fdt3 figs-hyperbole πάντα τὰ 1 The word **all** is likely a generalization for emphasis, although since this was a vision, it is possible that the container Peter saw did contain every kind of these creatures. Alternate translation: “various” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 10 12 ua3j figs-explicit καὶ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 all the four-footed animals and creeping things on the earth, and birds of the sky From Peter’s response in [10:14](../10/14.md), the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. Alternate translation: “and birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 10 13 a2z4 figs-personification ἐγένετο φωνὴ πρὸς αὐτόν 1 a voice came to him Luke speaks figuratively of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard a voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 10 13 a2z4 figs-personification ἐγένετο φωνὴ πρὸς αὐτόν 1 a voice came to him Luke speaks of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard a voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 10 13 zmeg figs-idiom ἀναστάς 1 Here the term **arising** means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 10 14 z7r5 figs-exclamations μηδαμῶς 1 Not at all **Not at all** is an exclamation that communicates a strong refusal to do or even to consider something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “No, never” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) ACT 10 14 ewlu figs-doublenegatives οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of word **never** and the negative terms **common** and **unclean**. Alternate translation: “I have only ever eaten things that are holy and clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 10 14 p0bf figs-doublet κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον 1 The words **common** and **unclean** mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 10 14 a2jj figs-explicit οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον 1 I have never eaten anything defiled and unclean The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “common and unclean, like some of those animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 10 15 as42 figs-personification φωνὴ πάλιν…πρὸς αὐτόν 1 The implied verb here is **came**, and so Luke is speaking once again of this **voice** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard the voice speaking to him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 10 15 as42 figs-personification φωνὴ πάλιν…πρὸς αὐτόν 1 The implied verb here is **came**, and so Luke is speaking once again of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come to someone. Alternate translation: “he heard the voice speaking to him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 10 15 xs5s figs-123person ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν 1 What God has cleansed If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) ACT 10 15 st9c writing-pronouns σὺ μὴ κοίνου 1 The voice is adding the pronoun **you** for emphasis. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with the imperative but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must not make common” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 10 16 rlr9 figs-explicit τοῦτο…ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς 1 this happened three times This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” You may find it simplest to say, “This happened three times,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1569,10 +1569,10 @@ ACT 10 22 wvl1 figs-doublet φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 fearing God ACT 10 22 hrta figs-explicit ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 Jews in the time of the New Testament used the expression **fearing God** to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel. Luke may be using the expression in this way. See how you translated it in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worships the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 10 22 hihl figs-activepassive μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου 1 If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “about whom the whole nation of the Jews testifies, received instructions from a holy angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 22 gv91 figs-hyperbole ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the whole nation of the Jews Luke says **whole** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 10 22 e15o figs-metonymy ῥήματα 1 The messengers are using the term **words** figuratively to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 10 22 e15o figs-metonymy ῥήματα 1 The messengers are using the term **words** to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 10 23 shs5 figs-explicit εἰσκαλεσάμενος οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐξένισεν 1 he hosted them The implication is that the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to begin that afternoon. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But since the journey to Caesarea was too long for them to make that day, Peter invited the men into Simon’s house and hosted them there overnight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 10 23 ycoi figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 Here the word **arising** means that Peter took action to prepare, not that he stood up from a seated or lying position. Alternate translation: “after packing for a journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 10 23 t7cz figs-metaphor τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 some of the brothers who were from Joppa Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “some fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 10 23 t7cz figs-metaphor τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 some of the brothers who were from Joppa Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “some fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 10 24 c3s6 τῇ…ἐπαύριον 1 the following day The **next day** means the day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day. Alternate translation: “on the following day” ACT 10 25 wxt8 ὡς…ἐγένετο τοῦ εἰσελθεῖν τὸν Πέτρον 1 as Peter entered ὡς…ἐγένετο τοῦ εἰσελθεῖν τὸν Πέτρον ACT 10 25 b4pn translate-symaction πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας 1 and falling down at his feet He knelt down at Peter’s feet as a gesture to honor him. Alternate translation: “kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) @@ -1588,7 +1588,7 @@ ACT 10 29 x0p4 figs-activepassive μεταπεμφθείς 1 If your language d ACT 10 29 x0v3 figs-yousingular μετεπέμψασθέ 1 The word **you** is plural. Peter is speaking to everyone who has gathered in the home of Cornelius. Use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 10 30 mqv8 translate-textvariants ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας μέχρι ταύτης τῆς ὥρας, ἤμην τὴν ἐνάτην προσευχόμενος ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ μου 1 praying Some ancient texts say, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 10 30 na4u figs-idiom ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας 1 Four days ago In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” yesterday was the “second day,” the day before yesterday was the “third day,” and the day before that was the “fourth day” or **Four days ago**. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Three days ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 10 30 pkhh figs-idiom ταύτης τῆς ὥρας 1 Cornelius is using the term **hour** figuratively to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 10 30 pkhh figs-idiom ταύτης τῆς ὥρας 1 Cornelius is using the term **hour** to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 10 30 x4m7 figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐνάτην 1 Cornelius is using the adjective **ninth** as a noun. ULT adds **hour** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. See how you translated this expression in [10:3](../10/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 10 30 u1es figs-idiom τὴν ἐνάτην 1 In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. See how you translated this expression in [10:3](../10/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 10 30 p73u translate-ordinal τὴν ἐνάτην 1 If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) @@ -1599,7 +1599,7 @@ ACT 10 31 twnu figs-quotesinquotes φησί, Κορνήλιε, εἰσηκούσ ACT 10 31 uep3 φησί 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Cornelius uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” ACT 10 31 heh3 figs-activepassive εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 your prayer has been heard If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer and has remembered your alms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 31 s6nz figs-idiom ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 have been remembered before God The word **remembered** does not imply that God had forgotten about these **alms**. Rather, it means that God is aware of Cornelius’s devotion and generosity and is pleased with them. See how you translated the similar expression in [10:4](../10/04.md). Alternate translation: “God is aware of your alms and is pleased with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 10 31 xd0x figs-idiom ἐνώπιον 1 Here the word **before** is being used idiomatically. Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 10 31 xd0x figs-idiom ἐνώπιον 1 Here the word **before** is being used. Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 10 32 jjnn figs-quotesinquotes πέμψον οὖν εἰς Ἰόππην καὶ μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος; οὗτος ξενίζεται ἐν οἰκίᾳ Σίμωνος, βυρσέως παρὰ θάλασσαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He said I should therefore send to Joppa and summon Simon who is called Peter, who was being hosted in the house of Simon, a tanner, by the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 10 32 ci31 figs-activepassive ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος 1 summon Simon who is called Peter If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 32 u1t6 figs-activepassive οὗτος ξενίζεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “He is a guest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1607,7 +1607,7 @@ ACT 10 32 jhzt translate-textvariants μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα…πα ACT 10 33 p5ee figs-yousingular σέ…σύ…σοι 1 immediately The word **you** is singular in each of these instances. Even though Peter came with other believers, Cornelius is addressing Peter directly. So use the singular form of “you” in your translation if your language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 10 33 ruf3 writing-politeness σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος 1 and you did well in coming This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: “and we are grateful to you for coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 10 33 lzie figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Cornelius is using the word **we** to refer to himself and to his guests, but not to Peter and the believers who came with him, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 10 33 ry21 figs-idiom ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God Cornelius is using the word **before** idiomatically. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 10 33 ry21 figs-idiom ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God Cornelius is using the word **before**. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 10 33 xt4x figs-activepassive τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 that you have been instructed by the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that the Lord has told you to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 33 jc88 translate-textvariants τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Some ancient manuscripts read “instructed by the Lord.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “instructed by God to say.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 10 34 cyn8 figs-explicitinfo ἀνοίξας…Πέτρος τὸ στόμα εἶπεν 1 And Peter opened his mouth and said It might seem that the expression **opening his mouth … said** contains redundant information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “Peter replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) @@ -1616,22 +1616,22 @@ ACT 10 34 ha31 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολήμπτης ACT 10 35 b5cr ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην 1 fears Here, **fearing** has the sense of deep respect and awe. Alternate translation: “anyone who sincerely worships him and works righteousness” ACT 10 35 j78e figs-abstractnouns ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην 1 the one who fears him and works righteous deeds is acceptable to him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “anyone who worships him and does righteous deeds” or “anyone who worships him and does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 10 36 aac8 figs-explicit τὸν λόγον 1 Here Peter is implicitly saying to Cornelius and his guests that they know about this **word**; he says that explicitly in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say “You know the word” in this verse as well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 10 36 ht1z figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Peter is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what God said to the Israelites by using words. Alternate translation: “The message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 10 36 anlh figs-metaphor τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραὴλ 1 Peter is using the word **sons** figuratively to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 10 36 ht1z figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Peter is using the term **word** to mean what God said to the Israelites by using words. Alternate translation: “The message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 10 36 anlh figs-metaphor τοῖς υἱοῖς Ἰσραὴλ 1 Peter is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 10 36 ok9b figs-abstractnouns εὐαγγελιζόμενος εἰρήνην διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that Jesus Christ reconciles us to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 10 36 md1l πάντων 1 he is Lord of all The word **all** could mean: (1) all people groups, both Jewish and non-Jewish. Alternate translation: “of all people, whether or not they are Jews” (2) all created things. Alternate translation: “of everything in God’s creation” -ACT 10 37 wecw figs-metonymy ὑμεῖς οἴδατε τὸ…ῥῆμα 1 Peter is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the things that happened through the life and ministry of Jesus. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know the things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 10 37 wecw figs-metonymy ὑμεῖς οἴδατε τὸ…ῥῆμα 1 Peter is using the term **word** to mean the things that happened through the life and ministry of Jesus. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know the things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 10 37 ch65 figs-hyperbole καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 throughout all Judea Peter says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many places in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 10 37 sq2i μετὰ τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐκήρυξεν Ἰωάννης 1 after the baptism that John proclaimed Alternate translation: “after John preached to the people that they should repent and then baptized them” ACT 10 38 seli figs-infostructure Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς 1 It may be helpful to put the information about God anointing before the information that it was Jesus whom God anointed. Alternate translation: “how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 10 38 p2qi figs-explicit Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς 1 Peter is once again saying implicitly that Cornelius and his guests know about the things he is describing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You know how God anointed Jesus, the one from Nazareth,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 10 38 ku82 figs-metaphor ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει 1 God anointed him with the Holy Spirit and with power Peter speaks figuratively of the Holy Spirit and of God’s power as if they could be poured over someone like oil. Alternate translation: “God enabled him to do powerful works through the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 10 38 ku82 figs-metaphor ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει 1 God anointed him with the Holy Spirit and with power Peter speaks of the Holy Spirit and of God’s power as if they could be poured over someone like oil. Alternate translation: “God enabled him to do powerful works through the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 10 38 vuwo figs-abstractnouns εὐεργετῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **good**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “doing good things” or “helping people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 10 38 y5ya figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς καταδυναστευομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου 1 all who were oppressed by the devil Peter says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who were oppressed by the devil” or “many people who were oppressed by the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 10 38 tj3u figs-idiom ὁ Θεὸς ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 God was with him The expression **was with him** is an idiom. See how you translated it in [7:9](../07/09.md). Alternate translation: “God was helping him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 10 39 kal7 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς μάρτυρες 1 Here, **we** refers to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 10 39 sx3a writing-pronouns ὃν καὶ ἀνεῖλαν 1 in the country of the Jews The pronoun **whom** refers to Jesus, and the pronoun **they** refers to the enemies of Jesus, the Jewish leaders who conspired against him and the Romans who ordered and carried out his execution. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Also, the enemies of Jesus killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 10 39 z4dt figs-metonymy κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 by hanging him on a tree This expression refers to crucifixion. Peter says **tree** figuratively to mean a wooden cross. Alternate translation: “crucifying him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 10 39 z4dt figs-metonymy κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 by hanging him on a tree This expression refers to crucifixion. Peter says **tree** to mean a wooden cross. Alternate translation: “crucifying him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 10 40 zxuk writing-pronouns τοῦτον 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 10 40 cxj5 figs-idiom τοῦτον ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 but God raised up this one Here, **raised … up** is an idiom that refers to causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused Jesus to become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 10 40 w8kv figs-idiom τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the third day In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “two days after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1639,21 +1639,21 @@ ACT 10 40 iz8l figs-activepassive ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γε ACT 10 41 nm81 figs-activepassive οὐ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, ἀλλὰ μάρτυσι τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡμῖν, οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ μετὰ τὸ ἀναστῆναι αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 If you used an active form instead of “caused him to be seen” in the previous verse, you can adjust the language here to fit. It may be helpful to make this two new sentences. Alternate translation: “All the people did not see him, but witnesses chosen beforehand by God saw him. We who ate and drank with him after he rose from the dead saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 41 jq89 figs-explicit παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 By **the people**, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “by all the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 10 41 zpyj figs-activepassive τοῖς προκεχειροτονημένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom God chose beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 10 41 xlbl figs-synecdoche οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ 1 Peter is figuratively using one activity that he and the other apostles did with Jesus after he rose from the dead, eating and drinking (that is, sharing meals), to mean spending time with him personally. Alternate translation: “who spend time with him personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 10 41 xlbl figs-synecdoche οἵτινες συνεφάγομεν καὶ συνεπίομεν αὐτῷ 1 Peter is using one activity that he and the other apostles did with Jesus after he rose from the dead, eating and drinking (that is, sharing meals), to mean spending time with him personally. Alternate translation: “who spend time with him personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 10 41 q7d1 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 10 42 ik96 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, **us** refers to Peter and the other apostles whom Jesus chose, not to Cornelius and his guests. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 10 42 zne5 figs-explicit τῷ λαῷ 1 Connecting Statement: By **the people**, Peter means the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 10 42 c1ak figs-activepassive ὁ ὡρισμένος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 that he is the one who has been chosen by God If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 42 ws4t figs-nominaladj ζώντων καὶ νεκρῶν 1 of the living and the dead Peter is using the adjectives **living** and **dead** as nouns. (The word **living** is actually a participle, but it functions here as an adjective.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “of those who are alive and of those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 10 43 ub5d writing-pronouns τούτῳ 1 To this one, all the prophets bear witness that The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “To Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 10 43 y6d1 figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ 1 through his name Peter is speaking figuratively of the **name** of Jesus. It could mean: (1) his actions. Alternate translation: “through what Jesus has done for them” (2) his authority. Alternate translation: “by his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 10 44 cz7x figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας τὸν λόγον 1 the Holy Spirit fell Luke is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:16](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “all the ones listening to his word received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])Q +ACT 10 43 y6d1 figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ 1 through his name Peter is speaking of the **name** of Jesus. It could mean: (1) his actions. Alternate translation: “through what Jesus has done for them” (2) his authority. Alternate translation: “by his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 10 44 cz7x figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας τὸν λόγον 1 the Holy Spirit fell Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:16](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “all the ones listening to his word received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])Q ACT 10 44 wf7u figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας 1 all of those who were listening While the believers who came with Peter from Joppa were also **listening** to his message, the word **all** refers to the Gentiles who were present. Alternate translation: “Cornelius and his guests, who were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 10 44 o839 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what Peter was saying by using words. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 10 44 o839 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean what Peter was saying by using words. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 10 45 j6wt figs-nominaladj οἱ…πιστοὶ 1 the gift of the Holy Spirit Luke is using the adjective **faithful** as a noun, to mean people who have faith in Jesus. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the faithful men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 10 45 qlpu figs-metonymy ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 Luke is using the term **circumcision** figuratively by association to identify these **faithful** people as Jewish. Alternate translation: “who were Jewish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 10 45 qlpu figs-metonymy ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 Luke is using the term **circumcision** by association to identify these **faithful** people as Jewish. Alternate translation: “who were Jewish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 10 45 g161 figs-activepassive ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐκκέχυται 1 the gift of the Holy Spirit was poured out If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was pouring out the gift of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 10 45 mqs8 figs-metaphor ἐκκέχυται 1 was poured out Luke is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if he were a liquid that could be poured on people. This image implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: “was generously given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 10 45 mqs8 figs-metaphor ἐκκέχυται 1 was poured out Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if he were a liquid that could be poured on people. This image implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: “was generously given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 10 45 hfs9 figs-possession ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 Luke is using a possessive form to identify **the Holy Spirit** as a **gift** from God. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit as a gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 10 45 f33n figs-explicit καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔθνη 1 also on the Gentiles Here, **also** refers to the fact that the Holy Spirit had already been given to the Jewish believers. Alternate translation: “on the Gentiles, as it had been on Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 10 45 rt18 translate-names τὰ ἔθνη 1 **Gentiles** is a name for people who are not Jewish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1661,30 +1661,30 @@ ACT 10 46 p6pa figs-explicit λαλούντων γλώσσαις 1 speaking with ACT 10 47 zktm figs-doublenegatives μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **is he**. Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Is anyone able to withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 10 47 u5d5 figs-rquestion μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς? 1 No one is able to withhold water, is he, that these are not baptized, who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did? Peter is using the question form to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one should withhold water so that these are not baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 10 47 vuax figs-doublenegatives μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς? 1 Even if the negative question is turned into a positive statement, a double negative still remains, the negative verb **withhold** and the negative particle **not**. This double negative can also be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “We should make water available so that these can be baptized who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -ACT 10 47 df24 figs-synecdoche τὸ ὕδωρ 1 Peter is figuratively using **water**, one thing necessary for baptism, to signify all the means and permission necessary for baptism. Alternate translation: “the means and permission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 10 47 df24 figs-synecdoche τὸ ὕδωρ 1 Peter is using **water**, one thing necessary for baptism, to signify all the means and permission necessary for baptism. Alternate translation: “the means and permission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 10 47 kwv5 figs-activepassive τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that these do not receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 48 l8ci figs-explicit προσέταξεν…αὐτοὺς…βαπτισθῆναι 1 The implication is that Peter and the believers who accompanied him from Joppa would be the ones to baptize the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter told the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 10 48 z4fh figs-activepassive προσέταξεν…αὐτοὺς…βαπτισθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he commanded them to receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 48 ax6x figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι 1 be baptized in the name of Jesus Christ Here, **in the name** is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Peter commanded Cornelius and his guests to acknowledge Jesus as the Messiah as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins, as described in [10:43](../10/43.md). See how you translated the similar expression in [2:48](../02/48.md). Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 11 intro hva5 0 # Acts 11 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The Gentiles also had received the word of God”

Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to “receive the word of God.” Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### "the Lord"

In verse 16, Peter refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord.” Luke refers to Jesus the same way in the second instance of the phrase in verse 21 and in verses 23 and 24. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could say “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Peter’s summary of his visit to Cornelius

In Acts 11:5–17, Peter summarizes the events that are described in greater detail in 10:9–47. Very similar language is used throughout both passages. As you translate 11:5–17, in order to ensure that your translation is consistent, compare how you translated specific terms and phrases in 10:9–47. ACT 11 1 ab75 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -ACT 11 1 f1md figs-metaphor οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 2 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 11 1 w3rx figs-metonymy ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 had received the word of God Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter shared with Cornelius and his guests by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 11 1 f1md figs-metaphor οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 2 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 11 1 w3rx figs-metonymy ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 had received the word of God Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter shared with Cornelius and his guests by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 2 kb4m ἀνέβη…εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 came up to Jerusalem Luke says that Peter **came up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “returned to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 11 2 yar6 figs-metonymy οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those from the circumcision As in [10:45](../10/45.md), Luke is using the term **circumcision** figuratively by association to identify as Jewish these believers who disputed with Peter. They were likely strictly observant Jews who followed the teaching of the Pharisees about Jews visiting with Gentiles. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to chapter 10. Alternate translation: “some believers who were strictly observant Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 11 2 yar6 figs-metonymy οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those from the circumcision As in [10:45](../10/45.md), Luke is using the term **circumcision** by association to identify as Jewish these believers who disputed with Peter. They were likely strictly observant Jews who followed the teaching of the Pharisees about Jews visiting with Gentiles. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to chapter 10. Alternate translation: “some believers who were strictly observant Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 3 pcce figs-quotations λέγοντες, ὅτι εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας, καὶ συνέφαγεν αὐτοῖς. 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘You went in to men having foreskins and ate with them!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 11 3 zmou figs-explicit εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς 1 This expression implicitly means that Peter went in to the home of these **men**. Alternate translation: “he went into the home of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 11 3 ah7v figs-metonymy ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας 1 uncircumcised men The phrase **men having foreskins** refers to men who are not Jewish. It is a crude and dismissive expression, and it shows that these Jewish believers still regarded Gentiles with disdain. Alternate translation: “uncircumcised men” or “Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 4 aakb figs-explicitinfo ἀρξάμενος…Πέτρος ἐξετίθετο αὐτοῖς 1 Luke is using the word **beginning** to indicate that Peter had been doing something else (listening to the complaints against him) but then began to do something new when he had the opportunity to speak. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “Peter explained to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 11 5 dtt5 figs-activepassive καθιεμένην 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It appeared as if someone was letting it down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 11 6 lbh4 figs-explicit καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 the four-legged animals of the earth, and the wild beasts, and the creeping animals, and the birds of the sky From Peter’s response in [11:8](../11/08.md), the implication is that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of the creatures in the container. See how you translated this in [10:12](../10/12.md). Alternate translation: “… and the birds of the sky, including some that the law of Moses commanded Jews not to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 11 7 gm0m figs-personification φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι 1 Luke speaks figuratively of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 11 7 gm0m figs-personification φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι 1 Luke speaks of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 11 7 ag7l figs-idiom ἀναστάς 1 Here the term **arising** means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation, as in UST: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 11 8 m4mu figs-exclamations μηδαμῶς 1 By no means **Not at all** is an exclamation that communicates a strong refusal to do or even to consider something. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. See how you translated this in [10:14](../10/14.md). Alternate translation: “No, never” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) ACT 11 8 nbju figs-doublet κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον 1 The words **common** and **unclean** mean similar things. Peter may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “food that our Jewish laws forbid us to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 11 8 m5p5 figs-explicit κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 the profane or unclean has never entered into my mouth The implication is that some the animals in the container were forbidden for Jews to eat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the common or unclean, like some of those animals,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 11 8 wwbw figs-doublenegatives κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the word **never** and the negative terms **common** and **unclean**. Alternate translation: “only what is holy and clean has ever entered into my mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -ACT 11 8 j0rv figs-synecdoche κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 Peter is figuratively using one part of the eating process to represent the entire process. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “I have never eaten anything that is common or unclean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 11 8 j0rv figs-synecdoche κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 Peter is using one part of the eating process to represent the entire process. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “I have never eaten anything that is common or unclean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 11 9 b24j figs-123person ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν 1 If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) ACT 11 9 txbl writing-pronouns σὺ μὴ κοίνου 1 The voice is adding the pronoun **you** for emphasis. If your language does not ordinarily use a pronoun with the imperative but can do so for emphasis, it would be appropriate to do that here. You could also express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you must not make common” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 11 10 xrq6 τοῦτο…ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς 1 this happened three times This could mean: (1) that the voice told Peter three times to kill and eat, Peter refused three times, and each time the voice told him not to call unclean what God had cleansed. Alternate translation: “Peter had this exchange with the voice three times” (2) that after Peter first refused, the voice said to him three times, “What God has cleansed, you must not make common.” Alternate translation: “the voice said this three times” See how you translated this in [10:16](../10/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1694,20 +1694,20 @@ ACT 11 11 b2qv figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἐξαυτῆς 1 behold Peter is usin ACT 11 11 k44j ἐξαυτῆς 1 right away Alternate translation: “immediately” or “at that exact moment” ACT 11 11 qwn5 figs-activepassive ἀπεσταλμένοι 1 having been sent If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Someone had sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 11 12 lf6m figs-explicit μηδὲν διακρίναντα 1 not making any distinction This could mean: (1) that the Spirit did not want Peter to have any doubts or worries about going with the men, even though they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not worrying about it” (2) that the Spirit did not want Peter to feel that he should not be in the company of these men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not making a distinction between these men and others you would associate with” See how you translated this in [10:20](../10/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 11 12 xrc6 figs-metaphor οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι 1 these six brothers Peter is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “these six fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 11 12 xrc6 figs-metaphor οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι 1 these six brothers Peter is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “these six fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 11 12 w6ia figs-explicit τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός 1 into the house of the man Peter implicitly means the **house** of Cornelius. Alternate translation: “the house of the man who had sent the messengers to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 11 13 mwzd figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 The term **us** refers to Peter and the believers who came with him to Caesarea. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. So use the exclusive form of “us” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 11 13 few6 figs-activepassive Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον 1 Simon, who is called Peter If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated the same phrase in [10:32](../10/32.md). Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 11 14 rwpw figs-metonymy ῥήματα 1 The angel is using the term **words** figuratively to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 11 14 rwpw figs-metonymy ῥήματα 1 The angel is using the term **words** to mean what Peter would say to Cornelius by using words. Alternate translation: “a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 14 fnjz figs-yousingular σὲ…σωθήσῃ σὺ…σου 1 All the instances of the words **you** and **your** in this verse are singular, since they refer to Cornelius. So use the singular forms of those word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 11 14 p3gk figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 11 14 hpr2 figs-metonymy πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου 1 all your household Here, **house** refers figuratively to an entire household living together. Alternate translation: “all the people living in your house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 11 14 hpr2 figs-metonymy πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου 1 all your household Here, **house** refers to an entire household living together. Alternate translation: “all the people living in your house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 15 a8jw figs-explicitinfo ἐν…τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν 1 as I began to speak, the Holy Spirit came on them Peter is using the word **began** to indicate that he had been doing something else (listening to Cornelius tell why he had summoned him) but then began to do something new when Cornelius finished speaking. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “as I was speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) -ACT 11 15 ak2p figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς 1 the Holy Spirit came on them, just as also on us in the beginning Peter is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit as if it **fell** on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expressions in [8:16](../08/12.md) and [10:44](../10/44.md). Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 11 15 ak2p figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς 1 the Holy Spirit came on them, just as also on us in the beginning Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it **fell** on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expressions in [8:16](../08/12.md) and [10:44](../10/44.md). Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 11 15 qdon writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the man who had sent for me and the others in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 11 15 qy12 figs-exclusive ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς 1 General Information: Here the word **us** refers to Peter himself and to the believers he is speaking to in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 11 15 th4m figs-explicit ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 in the beginning By **in the beginning**, Peter means the day of Pentecost. Alternate translation: “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 11 16 xd9t figs-metonymy τοῦ ῥήματος 1 Peter is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “the statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 11 16 xd9t figs-metonymy τοῦ ῥήματος 1 Peter is using the term **word** to mean what Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “the statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 16 ett3 writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, Peter is referring to Jesus here by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 11 16 wwnl figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς…ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ 1 After first describing how John baptized people literally, Jesus uses baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to chapter 1, and see how you translated this in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 11 16 v116 figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, if it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will baptize you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1723,28 +1723,28 @@ ACT 11 19 bwb8 writing-newevent οὖν 1 Then Luke uses the word translated **T ACT 11 19 whm6 figs-activepassive οἱ…διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ 1 those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This is a reference to the **persecution** that Luke describes in [8:1](../08/01.md), which began after the trial and death of Stephen. See how you translated the similar expression in that verse. Alternate translation: “those who had scattered because of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 11 19 w3wq translate-names Φοινίκης 1 The word **Phoenicia** is the name of a region. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 11 19 ig50 translate-names Κύπρου 1 The word ** Cyprus** is the name of an island. See how you translated it in [4:36](../04/36.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 11 19 zbml figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that these scattered believers proclaimed by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 11 19 zbml figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that these scattered believers proclaimed by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 19 c8ha grammar-connect-exceptions μηδενὶ λαλοῦντες τὸν λόγον εἰ μὴ μόνον Ἰουδαίοις 1 only to Jews Since Luke says here that the scattered believers spoke about Jesus **only to Jews**, but he says in the next verse that some of them spoke to “Greeks” (that is, Gentiles), it might appear in your language that Luke was contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Most of them believed they should speak the message about Jesus only to Jews, so that is what they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) ACT 11 20 ogva figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Κύπριοι καὶ Κυρηναῖοι 1 Luke is describing these **men** in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “Cypriot and Cyrenian men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 11 20 k6si translate-names Κύπριοι 1 The word **Cypriots** is the name for people who come from the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 11 20 tz12 translate-names Κυρηναῖοι 1 The word **Cyrenians** is the name for people who come from the city of Cyrene. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 11 20 mww9 figs-explicit τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς 1 and spoke also to Greeks Luke assumes that his readers will know that these people he calls **Greeks** were not necessarily from Greece; rather, they were Greek-speaking people who were also Gentiles, not Jews. Alternate translation: “Gentiles who spoke Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 11 21 ebxq writing-politeness χεὶρ Κυρίου 1 In this instance, Luke seems to mean God the Father when he says **the Lord**. In [4:29–30](../04/29.md), the believers pray, “Lord … stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen through the name of your holy Servant Jesus.” Luke seems to be describing these events as part of the answer to that prayer. Alternate translation: “the hand of God the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) -ACT 11 21 aj5g figs-metonymy χεὶρ 1 The hand of the Lord was with them Here, the **hand** figuratively represents power, since hands give people the capability to do things. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 11 21 aj5g figs-metonymy χεὶρ 1 The hand of the Lord was with them Here, the **hand** represents power, since hands give people the capability to do things. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 21 bfm5 figs-idiom ἦν…μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 When Luke says that God *with** the men from Cyprus and Cyrene who were proclaiming the gospel, this is an idiom that means God was working through them. Alternate translation: “was working through them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 11 21 n9pq figs-metaphor ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 turned to the Lord Luke speaks figuratively of these Gentiles in Antioch as if they physically **turned to the Lord**. He means that they stopped living in one way and began to live in another way. They believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “became disciples of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 11 21 n9pq figs-metaphor ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 turned to the Lord Luke speaks of these Gentiles in Antioch as if they physically **turned to the Lord**. He means that they stopped living in one way and began to live in another way. They believed in Jesus and started to obey him. Alternate translation: “became disciples of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 11 21 qcn3 writing-politeness ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 In this instance, Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title, as the General Notes to this chapter discuss. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 11 22 i7vs figs-explicitinfo ἠκούσθη…ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν 1 the ears of the church In your language, the expression **was heard in the ears** might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you can abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “the word about them was heard by the church being in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 11 22 kcb8 figs-activepassive ἠκούσθη δὲ ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας τῆς οὔσης ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ περὶ αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation: “the church being in Jerusalem heard the word about them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 11 22 rdhr figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean a report about the Gentile believers in Antioch. Alternate translation: “a report” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 11 22 rdhr figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean a report about the Gentile believers in Antioch. Alternate translation: “a report” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 22 oa8h writing-pronouns αὐτῶν…ἐξαπέστειλαν 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the Gentile believers in Antioch, and the pronoun **they** refers to the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “these Gentile believers … its leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 11 23 b7w7 figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 saw the grace that is of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how gracious God had been to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 11 23 bz6w figs-metonymy τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας 1 with purpose of heart Here the **heart** figuratively represents the will and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with firm determination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 11 23 bz6w figs-metonymy τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας 1 with purpose of heart Here the **heart** represents the will and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with firm determination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 24 b9a8 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why Barnabas encouraged the new believers in Antioch so well. Alternate translation: “He was able to do this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ACT 11 24 he5z figs-metaphor πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 full of the Holy Spirit Luke speaks figuratively of Barnabas as if he were a container that was **full** of the **Holy Spirit** and of **faith**. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “who was inspired by the Holy Spirit and who had strong faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 11 24 he5z figs-metaphor πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 full of the Holy Spirit Luke speaks of Barnabas as if he were a container that was **full** of the **Holy Spirit** and of **faith**. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “who was inspired by the Holy Spirit and who had strong faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 11 24 m7yy figs-abstractnouns καὶ πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου καὶ πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who was inspired by the Holy Spirit and who believed firmly in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 11 24 e35e figs-activepassive προσετέθη ὄχλος ἱκανὸς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God did the action. Alternate translation: “God added a considerable crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 11 24 e57t figs-metonymy τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 a considerable crowd was added to the Lord Luke figuratively says **the Lord** (a title for Jesus) to mean the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “to the community of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 11 24 e57t figs-metonymy τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 a considerable crowd was added to the Lord Luke says **the Lord** (a title for Jesus) to mean the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “to the community of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 25 yhl6 writing-pronouns ἐξῆλθεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Barnabas went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 11 26 qzml writing-pronouns εὑρὼν ἤγαγεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Barnabas, and the pronoun **him** refers to Saul. Alternate translation: “and having found Saul, Barnabas brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 11 26 z36c ἐγένετο δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ ἐνιαυτὸν ὅλον συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 This wording suggests that Barnabas and Saul did not know initially how long they would be meeting with the church in Antioch, but in the end it amounted to a whole year. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “in the end they were gathered together with the church for an entire year” @@ -1753,7 +1753,7 @@ ACT 11 26 x8gx figs-activepassive χρηματίσαι…τοὺς μαθητὰ ACT 11 26 w0sz translate-names Χριστιανούς 1 The word **Christians** is a name for people who believe that Jesus is the Christ, that is, the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 11 26 r6sl πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ 1 first in Antioch Alternate translation: “for the first time in Antioch” ACT 11 27 h6zw writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -ACT 11 27 kep8 figs-idiom ἐν ταύταις…ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 Luke is using the word **days** idiomatically to describe a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 11 27 kep8 figs-idiom ἐν ταύταις…ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 Luke is using the word **days** to describe a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 11 27 d8bb figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 came down from Jerusalem to Antioch Luke says that these prophets **came down** from Jerusalem because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 11 28 q3tl translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 and indicated by the Spirit that Alternate Here, **having arisen** means that Agabus stood up as a symbolic action to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])translation: “and the Holy Spirit enabled him to prophesy that” ACT 11 28 w18f figs-hyperbole ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 The term **whole** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -1761,16 +1761,16 @@ ACT 11 28 pd2t figs-explicit τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 over the whole worl ACT 11 28 jmc5 figs-idiom ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου 1 in the days of Claudius The expression **upon Claudius** refers to the time during the reign of Claudius. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during the reign of Claudius” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 11 28 fjyk translate-names Κλαυδίου 1 The word **Claudius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 11 29 rk9z figs-explicit τῶν…μαθητῶν καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις, ὥρισαν ἕκαστος αὐτῶν…πέμψαι 1 just as anyone prospered The implication is that while some of the disciples were **prospering** greatly but others were struggling financially, every one of them resolved to send something according to his own means. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while some of the believers in Antioch were rich and others were poor, every one of them resolved to send what they could afford” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 11 29 up7a figs-metaphor τοῖς…ἀδελφοῖς 1 to the brothers living in Judea Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “to their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 11 29 up7a figs-metaphor τοῖς…ἀδελφοῖς 1 to the brothers living in Judea Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “to their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 11 30 taw4 figs-explicit πρὸς τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the **elders** who were the leaders of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to the elders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 11 30 l8i8 figs-synecdoche διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου 1 by the hand of Barnabas and Saul Here, the **hand**, one part of a person, figuratively represents the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 11 30 l8i8 figs-synecdoche διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου 1 by the hand of Barnabas and Saul Here, the **hand**, one part of a person, represents the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 11 30 rq2w διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου 1 If you retain the figurative word **hand** in your translation, it may be more natural in your language to use the plural form of that word, if you would not ordinarily speak of two people having one hand. Alternate translation: “by the hands of Barnabas and Saul” ACT 12 intro f66j 0 # Acts 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas and Saul back were delivering money from Antioch to Jerusalem, as described in 11:25-30. Herod killed one of the apostles, James, and he put Peter in prison. God helped Peter escape from the prison, so Herod executed the prison guards, but God then killed Herod. ACT 12 1 ti1y writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 12 1 f2gr figs-explicit κατ’ ἐκεῖνον…τὸν καιρὸν 1 about that time The phrase **that time** implicitly refers to the time that Luke has just described, when the church in Antioch sent Barnabas and Saul to Jerusalem with money to help the believers there. Alternate translation: “at the time when the church in Antioch sent assistance to the believers in Jerusalem,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 1 aqd0 translate-names Ἡρῴδης 1 The word **Herod** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [4:27](../04/27.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 12 1 zy6y figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλεν…τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 laid hands on The expression **laid on hands** figuratively means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. See how you translated it in [5:18](../05/18.md). Alternate translation: “arrested some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 12 1 og4q figs-synecdoche ἐπέβαλεν…τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 Herod most likely did not do this himself, Rather, as a ruler, he ordered his soldiers to arrest **some from the church**. Luke is speaking figuratively of Herod, one person who was involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “had his soldiers arrest some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 12 1 zy6y figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλεν…τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 laid hands on The expression **laid on hands** means to arrest someone by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. See how you translated it in [5:18](../05/18.md). Alternate translation: “arrested some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 12 1 og4q figs-synecdoche ἐπέβαλεν…τὰς χεῖρας κακῶσαί τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 Herod most likely did not do this himself, Rather, as a ruler, he ordered his soldiers to arrest **some from the church**. Luke is speaking of Herod, one person who was involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “had his soldiers arrest some from the church, intending to harm them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 12 2 i7zy translate-names Ἰάκωβον…Ἰωάννου 1 The words **James** and **John** are the names of men. See how you translated them in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 12 2 r1zv figs-synecdoche ἀνεῖλεν…Ἰάκωβον 1 he killed James It was probably not Herod himself who **killed James**. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “he had his soldiers execute James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 12 3 v4ag figs-synecdoche τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 And when he saw that this is pleasing to the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “to the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -1789,7 +1789,7 @@ ACT 12 9 s9j0 figs-quotations ἐδόκει…ὅραμα βλέπειν 1 It m ACT 12 10 r7gy figs-explicit διελθόντες…πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν 1 But when they had passed by the first guard and the second The implication is that the guards were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having passed by the first guard and the second without being noticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 10 e36s figs-ellipsis καὶ δευτέραν 1 and the second The word **guard** can be supplied from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 12 11 wlb6 figs-idiom ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος εἶπεν 1 And when Peter had come to himself The phrase **having come to himself** means that Peter became fully awake and realized he was not just seeing a vision. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when Peter became fully awake and alert, he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 12 11 ue4k figs-metonymy χειρὸς 1 delivered me from the hand of Herod Here, **hand** figuratively represents the capability of a person. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 12 11 ue4k figs-metonymy χειρὸς 1 delivered me from the hand of Herod Here, **hand** represents the capability of a person. Alternate translation: “the power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 12 11 p739 figs-abstractnouns πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 from all the expectations of the Jewish people If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **expectation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “all that the Jewish people expected that Herod would do to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 12 11 sl07 figs-synecdoche τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Luke is likely using the phrase **the Jewish people** to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “of the leaders of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 12 12 jds2 translate-names Μαρίας 1 The word **Mary** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1805,7 +1805,7 @@ ACT 12 15 qa8m figs-explicit ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ 1 It i ACT 12 16 wwg1 figs-synecdoche ἀνοίξαντες δὲ εἶδαν αὐτὸν 1 While the word **they** refers to the people in the house as in the previous verse, it is likely that only some of them came to the door. Alternate translation: “so some of the people in the house came and opened the door, and they saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 12 17 fr3y figs-explicit Ἰακώβῳ 1 Peter assumes that his listeners will know that by **James**, he means the brother of Jesus who was the leader of the church in Jerusalem. UST models one way to express this implicit information. However, since this is something that Peter assumes his listeners will know, you may find it preferable to explain this in a footnote rather than add information to the text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 17 k3lg translate-names Ἰακώβῳ 1 The word **James** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name for different men in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 12 17 jf16 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 12 17 jf16 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 12 18 ail9 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 12 18 zl7i figs-litotes τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what therefore had happened to Peter Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 12 18 bt2b figs-quotations ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “among the soldiers: ‘What then had Peter become?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -1828,12 +1828,12 @@ ACT 12 21 e3w9 figs-explicit τακτῇ…ἡμέρᾳ 1 on a set day The impli ACT 12 21 kv7g translate-symaction ἐνδυσάμενος ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν, καὶ καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 in royal clothing Putting on this **royal clothing**, which was visibly expensive, and sitting on the **throne** were symbolic actions by which Herod demonstrated that he was a wealthy and powerful king. He did these things to impress and intimidate the Tyrians and Sidonians as they negotiated. Alternate translation: “having put on royal clothing and having sat on the throne to show what a wealthy and powerful king he was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 12 21 g6ir καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 sitting on the throne The **throne** was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him. ACT 12 23 iw57 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνθ’ ὧν οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 he did not give the glory to God If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this reason before the result it led to (the angel striking Herod), as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ACT 12 22 feyy figs-synecdoche Θεοῦ φωνὴ, καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου 1 The people are figuratively using one part of Herod, his **voice**, to represent all of him in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “This person who is speaking to us is a god, not a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 12 22 feyy figs-synecdoche Θεοῦ φωνὴ, καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου 1 The people are using one part of Herod, his **voice**, to represent all of him in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “This person who is speaking to us is a god, not a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 12 23 d419 figs-activepassive γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν 1 becoming worm-eaten, he died The word translated **worm-eaten** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The word **worm-eaten** expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 12 23 pjbw figs-explicit γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν 1 It is not clear exactly what this means, and you might choose to say nothing further in your translation. However, this could mean: (1) that when the angel **struck** Herod, this caused a deep wound, and by the time Herod died of this wound, it was already infested with maggots. Alternate translation: “he died after his wound became so infected that it was infested with maggots” (2) that the word **struck** is figurative and it refers to an illness, a severe case of intestinal worms. Alternate translation: “he got such a severe case of intestinal worms that he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 24 sv8l figs-hendiadys ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο 1 Luke is expressing a single idea by using two verbs connected with **and.** The verb **being multiplied** tells in what way the word of God was **increasing**, that is, very rapidly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the word of God was increasing very rapidly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -ACT 12 24 m1sw figs-metaphor ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο 1 the word of God increased and was multiplied Luke is speaking figuratively of the way the message about Jesus was becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **increasing** and **being multiplied**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 12 24 wn8m figs-metonymy ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 12 24 m1sw figs-metaphor ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο 1 the word of God increased and was multiplied Luke is speaking of the way the message about Jesus was becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **increasing** and **being multiplied**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 12 24 wn8m figs-metonymy ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 12 24 iwr1 figs-activepassive ἐπληθύνετο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was multiplying it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 12 25 j2un writing-endofstory δὲ 0 Luke uses the word translated **Then** to introduce information about what happened after Herod died. This is the end of the part of the story about him. You language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a larger story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 12 25 rt9o figs-explicit Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ, πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν 0 This can also be translated, “Then Barnabas and Saul returned, having completed their service in Jerusalem.” If that is the correct translation, then Luke is saying implicitly that they **returned** to Antioch. Alternate translation: “Then Barnabas and Saul returned to Antioch, having completed their service in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1860,7 +1860,7 @@ ACT 13 4 pisj figs-activepassive ἐκπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁ ACT 13 4 iyh8 figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 went down Luke says that Barnabas and Saul **went down** to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 4 d1q5 Σελεύκιαν 1 Seleucia The word **Seleucia** is the name of a city that is on the seacoast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 13 5 at85 translate-names Σαλαμῖνι 1 Salamis The word **Salamis** is the name of a city on the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 13 5 ct8b figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 they were proclaiming the word of God Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Barnabas and Saul to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 5 ct8b figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 they were proclaiming the word of God Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Barnabas and Saul to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 6 cl2z translate-names Πάφου 1 Paphos The word **Paphos** is the name of a major city on the island of Cyprus. It was where the Roman proconsul lived. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 13 6 zf3b figs-idiom εὗρον 1 they found The word **found** does not mean that Barnabas, Saul, and Mark were intentionally searching for a certain man. They happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “they happened to meet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 6 xe7h translate-unknown ἄνδρα, τινὰ μάγον 1 a certain man, a magician The word **magician** here does not mean someone who entertains others with tricks based on slight of hand and optical illusions. It means someone who practices witchcraft or supernatural magic arts. Your language and culture may have a term for such a person that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1873,27 +1873,27 @@ ACT 13 8 lp2u translate-transliterate Ἐλύμας ὁ μάγος 1 Elymas “t ACT 13 8 qw4j figs-activepassive οὕτως γὰρ μεθερμηνεύεται τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 for that is how his name is translated If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for that is the meaning of his name in Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 8 w2xt figs-metaphor ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως 1 he sought to turn the proconsul away from the faith Here, **to turn … away from** is a metaphor for convincing someone to not do something. Alternate translation: “he attempted to persuade the governor not to believe the gospel message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 9 ey6d translate-names Σαῦλος…ὁ καὶ Παῦλος 1 Saul, who is also Paul The word **Paul** is the name of a man. It is another name by which Saul called himself. **Saul** was his Jewish name, and **Paul** was his Roman name. Since he was speaking to a Roman official, he used his Roman name. (From this point on, Saul is called Paul in Acts.) Alternate translation: “Saul, who now called himself Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 13 9 fy7t figs-metaphor πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of Paul as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 9 fy7t figs-metaphor πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking of Paul as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 9 w3lh figs-activepassive πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom the Holy Spirit was inspiring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 10 un00 figs-nominaladj ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 Paul is using the adjective **full** as a noun, to identify Elymas as a person who is figuratively full of the negative qualities he describes. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “O you who are full of all deceit and all trickery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 13 10 un00 figs-nominaladj ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 Paul is using the adjective **full** as a noun, to identify Elymas as a person who is full of the negative qualities he describes. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “O you who are full of all deceit and all trickery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 13 10 u8n3 figs-abstractnouns ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **deceit** and **trickery**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “O you who are always deceiving and tricking other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 13 10 r8x2 figs-metaphor ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 O one full of all deceit and all wickedness Paul is speaking figuratively of Elymas as if he were a container that was **full** of negative qualities. Alternate translation: “O you who practice all deceit and all trickery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 10 r8x2 figs-metaphor ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 O one full of all deceit and all wickedness Paul is speaking of Elymas as if he were a container that was **full** of negative qualities. Alternate translation: “O you who practice all deceit and all trickery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 10 wq5i figs-doublet παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 The terms **deceit** and **wickedness** mean similar things. Paul may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “of all evil treachery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 13 10 kdwj figs-hyperbole παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 Paul says **all** in these two instances as a generalization for emphasis. (But when he calls Elymas the **enemy of all righteousness**, that may be understood more literally.) Alternate translation: “of great deceit and great trickery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 13 10 d2pk figs-idiom υἱὲ διαβόλου 1 son of the devil The expression **son of** figuratively describes a person who shares the qualities of something or someone else. Paul is saying that Elymas is acting like the devil in trying to keep Sergius Paulus from believing in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you who are acting like the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 13 10 d2pk figs-idiom υἱὲ διαβόλου 1 son of the devil The expression **son of** describes a person who shares the qualities of something or someone else. Paul is saying that Elymas is acting like the devil in trying to keep Sergius Paulus from believing in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you who are acting like the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 10 jgq8 figs-explicit υἱὲ διαβόλου 1 Paul is drawing an implicit contrast between Elymas’s claim to be the “son of Jesus” (Bar Jesus) and his actual character as a **son of the devil**. If you retain the “son of” idiom in your translation, you could bring out this contrast explicitly. If you do, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are not the son of Jesus, you are the son of the devil!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 10 hlq9 figs-personification ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης 1 Paul is speaking of **righteousness** figuratively as if it were a person who could have an **enemy**. If your language would not use this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “opposed to all righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 13 10 hlq9 figs-personification ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης 1 Paul is speaking of **righteousness** as if it were a person who could have an **enemy**. If your language would not use this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in another way. Alternate translation: “opposed to all righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 13 10 wa8t figs-abstractnouns ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “enemy of everything that is right” or “opposed to everything that is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 13 10 bc9p figs-rquestion οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας? 1 will you not stop perverting the straight paths of the Lord? Paul is using the question form to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you must stop turning aside the straight paths of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 13 10 p8sa figs-metaphor διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας 1 the straight paths of the Lord Paul is speaking figuratively of Elymas as if he were physically redirecting **paths** that God wanted people to follow so that these paths no longer went **straight**. He means that if people believe in God and obey him, they live in the right way, and that Elymas is trying to keep people, especially Sergius Paulus, from doing that. Alternate translation: “preventing people from believing in God, obeying him, and living right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 10 p8sa figs-metaphor διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας 1 the straight paths of the Lord Paul is speaking of Elymas as if he were physically redirecting **paths** that God wanted people to follow so that these paths no longer went **straight**. He means that if people believe in God and obey him, they live in the right way, and that Elymas is trying to keep people, especially Sergius Paulus, from doing that. Alternate translation: “preventing people from believing in God, obeying him, and living right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 11 q0w8 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Paul is using the term **behold** to focus Elymas’s attention on what he is about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 11 xul9 figs-metonymy χεὶρ Κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ 1 the hand of the Lord upon you Here, the word **hand** represents the power of God, and the phrase **upon you** indicates punishment. Alternate translation: “the Lord is going to punish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 11 w3gh figs-hendiadys τυφλὸς, μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον 1 not seeing the sun Paul is using a word and a phrase together to express a single idea. The phrase **not seeing the sun** tells to what degree Elymas will be **blind**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “so blind that you will not be able to tell whether it is day or night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -ACT 13 11 t7j1 figs-metaphor ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος 1 a mist and darkness fell on Elymas Paul is speaking figuratively of this **mist** and **darkness** as if they were going to **fall** on Elymas. Alternate translation: “what Elymas could see became blurry and then dark” or see the next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 11 t7j1 figs-metaphor ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος 1 a mist and darkness fell on Elymas Paul is speaking of this **mist** and **darkness** as if they were going to **fall** on Elymas. Alternate translation: “what Elymas could see became blurry and then dark” or see the next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 11 x7rt figs-hendiadys ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος 1 Luke may be using the two words **mist** and **darkness** together to express a single idea. The word **mist** may tell what kind of **darkness** was all that Elymas could see. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “a misty darkness was all that Elymas could see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 13 12 x9fl ὁ ἀνθύπατος 1 proconsul A **proconsul** was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “the governor” ACT 13 12 twa8 figs-activepassive ἐκπλησσόμενος ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 being astonished at the teaching of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The teaching of the Lord astonished him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 12 ob5x figs-metonymy τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the word **teaching** figuratively to mean the truth and power associated with the teaching about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the truth and power that accompanied the teaching of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 12 ob5x figs-metonymy τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the word **teaching** to mean the truth and power associated with the teaching about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the truth and power that accompanied the teaching of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 12 efle figs-possession τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 In this possessive form, **the Lord** is the object rather than the subject of **teaching**. That is, this does not mean “what the Lord taught,” it means “what Barnabas and Paul taught about the Lord.” You could say that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 13 13 r9hi writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 13 13 i65t writing-background οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον 1 The phrase **those around Paul** refers to Barnabas and John (who is also called John Mark). This phrase provides some background to rest of the story by indicating that Paul had become the leader of the group. It is important to communicate this by keeping Paul’s name first when he is mentioned with others, for example, in [13:46](../13/46.md), [13:50](../13/50.md), etc. The order of names is important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -1904,7 +1904,7 @@ ACT 13 14 vrp1 translate-names Ἀντιόχειαν τὴν Πισιδίαν 1 ACT 13 14 c21u translate-symaction ἐκάθισαν 1 Paul and Barnabas may have **sat down** in the place where rabbis would sit, or in the way that rabbis would sit, as a way of asking permission to speak to the congregation. The fact that they were invited to speak ([13:15](../13/15.md)) suggests that this is the case. Alternate translation: “sat down as rabbis would, to ask permission to speak to the congregation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 13 15 dnb4 translate-names τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 And after the reading of the law and of the prophets The word **Law** is the name for one part of the Hebrew Scriptures, and word **Prophets** is the name for another part of the Hebrew Scriptures. Even though these are common nouns, Luke is using them to mean specific things. Show this in your translation in the way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 13 15 kno1 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” or “You brothers of ours” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 13 15 td4h figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers The synagogue leaders are using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 15 td4h figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers The synagogue leaders are using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 15 jru8 figs-metonymy εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν λόγος παρακλήσεως πρὸς τὸν λαόν 1 if there is among you any word of exhortation for the people The synagogue leaders are using the term **word** to mean what Barnabas or Paul would want to say using words. Alternate translation: “if you want to say anything to encourage our people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 15 kj1h figs-imperative λέγετε 1 speak it This is an imperative, but it communicates an invitation rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an invitation. Alternate translation: “we invite you to speak it now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 13 16 keqb translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 Here the term **arising** means that Paul stood up to show that he indeed wanted to speak, as he had been invited to do. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he wanted to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) @@ -1914,13 +1914,13 @@ ACT 13 16 rh93 figs-idiom οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 ones who ACT 13 16 ah55 figs-imperative ἀκούσατε 1 God, listen This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 13 17 se2b ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου Ἰσραὴλ 1 The God of this people Israel Alternate translation: “The God whom the people of Israel worship” ACT 13 17 tbc4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use an inclusive or exclusive form of the word **our** here and in verses 32 and 33. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 13 17 l9cn figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 our fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 13 17 aaj5 figs-metonymy τὸν λαὸν ὕψωσεν 1 exalted the people When Paul says that God **exalted the people** of Israel when they were in Egypt, he is referring figuratively to the way God made them great in number and strength even while they were still slaves. Alternate translation: “greatly enlarged their population” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 13 17 vw4z figs-metonymy μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ 1 with an uplifted arm Here, **an uplifted arm** figuratively describes God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 17 l9cn figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 our fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 17 aaj5 figs-metonymy τὸν λαὸν ὕψωσεν 1 exalted the people When Paul says that God **exalted the people** of Israel when they were in Egypt, he is referring to the way God made them great in number and strength even while they were still slaves. Alternate translation: “greatly enlarged their population” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 17 vw4z figs-metonymy μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ 1 with an uplifted arm Here, **an uplifted arm** describes God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 18 zv9e translate-textvariants ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς 1 he put up with them This means “he put up with their disobedience.” Some ancient copies have a different word that means “he took care of them,” which makes sense, since in this part of his speech, Paul is listing all of the good things that God did for the Israelites. Paul would be quoting Deuteronomy 1:13 from a well-known Greek translation. If the reading **put up with them** is correct, Paul may be foreshadowing the warning he gives at the end of his speech in [13:40–41](../13/40.md). If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. Alternate translation: “he took care of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 13 19 nvp7 writing-pronouns κατεκληρονόμησεν τὴν γῆν αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to God, the pronoun **them** refers to the Israelites, and the pronoun **their** refers to the seven nations that God destroyed. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God gave the Israelites for an inheritance the land that these seven nations had previously occupied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 13 20 xyg6 figs-ellipsis ὡς ἔτεσι τετρακοσίοις καὶ πεντήκοντα 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “All these events took place over a period of about 450 years.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 13 20 qmc8 figs-metonymy ἔδωκεν κριτὰς ἕως Σαμουὴλ προφήτου 1 until Samuel the prophet This could mean: (1) that God gave the Israelites a series of judges and Samuel was the last of them. Alternate translation: “he gave them a series of judges ending with Samuel, who was also a prophet” (2) that the phrase ** Samuel the prophet** figuratively represents the time period associated with Samuel. Alternate translation: “until the time of Samuel the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 20 qmc8 figs-metonymy ἔδωκεν κριτὰς ἕως Σαμουὴλ προφήτου 1 until Samuel the prophet This could mean: (1) that God gave the Israelites a series of judges and Samuel was the last of them. Alternate translation: “he gave them a series of judges ending with Samuel, who was also a prophet” (2) that the phrase ** Samuel the prophet** represents the time period associated with Samuel. Alternate translation: “until the time of Samuel the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 20 tb5w translate-names Σαμουὴλ 1 The word**Samuel** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [3:24](../03/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 13 21 nrug translate-names τὸν Σαοὺλ…Κείς…Βενιαμείν 1 The word **Saul** is the name of a man. The word **Kish** is the name of another man, the father of Saul. The word **Benjamin** is the name of one of the tribes of Israel, to which Saul belonged. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 13 21 yxi8 figs-ellipsis ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα 1 for 40 years Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “to be their king for 40 years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -1930,16 +1930,16 @@ ACT 13 22 dbu5 figs-idiom εὗρον 1 I have found While God was indeed search ACT 13 22 jf03 translate-names τοῦ Ἰεσσαί 1 The word **Jesse** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 13 22 mp53 figs-idiom ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου 1 a man according to my heart This is an idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “the kind of person who does what pleases me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 23 xj5a figs-infostructure τούτου…ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος 1 From the descendants of this one This information is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the Savior had to be one of David’s descendants. It would be appropriate to retain this order in your translation rather than say, for example, “According to promise, God brought to Israel a Savior, Jesus, from the seed of this one.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -ACT 13 23 vnz7 figs-metaphor τοῦ σπέρματος 1 The term **seed** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 23 vnz7 figs-metaphor τοῦ σπέρματος 1 The term **seed** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “the descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 23 l50d writing-pronouns τούτου 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to David. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 13 23 kc76 figs-metonymy τῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 brought to Israel Here, **Israel** refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 24 wbpf figs-explicit Ἰωάννου 1 By **John**, Paul is referring implicitly to John the Baptist. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 24 xzf2 figs-explicitinfo πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 In your language, the expression **before the face of his entrance**, meaning “before the appearance of his entry into ministry” (see next two notes), might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you can abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “before he appeared” or “before he entered into his ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) -ACT 13 24 abcn figs-metaphor πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 before the face of his coming Here the term **face** figuratively means “appearance.” Alternate translation: “appearance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 13 24 igpi figs-metaphor τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 By **entrance**, Paul is figuratively to Jesus beginning his ministry. Alternate translation: “of the start of his ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 24 abcn figs-metaphor πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 before the face of his coming Here the term **face** means “appearance.” Alternate translation: “appearance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 24 igpi figs-metaphor τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 By **entrance**, Paul is to Jesus beginning his ministry. Alternate translation: “of the start of his ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 24 gqs9 writing-pronouns τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **his** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jesus’ entrance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 13 24 x892 figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **repentance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a baptism that people received to show that they were repenting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 13 25 ntrj figs-metaphor τὸν δρόμον 1 Paul is speaking figuratively of John as if he had been running a race or **course**. Alternate translation: “his work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 25 ntrj figs-metaphor τὸν δρόμον 1 Paul is speaking of John as if he had been running a race or **course**. Alternate translation: “his work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 25 judg figs-quotemarks ἔλεγεν, τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ, ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ, ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it might be good to present this quotation from John the Baptist as a direct quotation if possible, since it uses several figures of speech that might not sound natural in an indirect quotation. (As an indirect quotation, this would read something like this: “he asked the people who they thought he was, and he told them he was not he and that behold, one was coming after him, the sandals of whose feet he was not worthy to untie.”) You may be able to indicate the beginning of Paul’s quotation from John with some punctuation or convention that your language uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 13 25 vww3 figs-rquestion τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? 1 Who do you think I am? John is using the question form to challenge his listeners’ idea of who he is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I am not who you think I am!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 13 25 rp32 writing-pronouns οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ 1 I am not him The pronoun **he** refers to the Messiah. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1947,15 +1947,15 @@ ACT 13 25 nnl5 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 But behold John is using the term **be ACT 13 25 gys2 translate-symaction οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι 1 of whom the sandals of his feet I am not worthy to untie John is using the action of untying sandals symbolically to signify humble service. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “to whom I am not even worthy to offer humble service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 13 25 gj98 figs-explicitinfo τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν 1 In your language, the expression **the sandals of his feet** might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you can abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “his sandals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 13 26 bwet figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 Paul is using an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers—my fellow sons of the family of Abraham—and you others who fear God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 13 26 kci9 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 brothers, sons of the family of Abraham, and those among you who fear God Paul is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 13 26 c9pw figs-metaphor υἱοὶ 1 Paul is using the term **sons** figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 26 kci9 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 brothers, sons of the family of Abraham, and those among you who fear God Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 26 c9pw figs-metaphor υἱοὶ 1 Paul is using the term **sons** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 26 jdp6 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here the word **us** includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks this distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 13 26 u6zn figs-activepassive ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη 1 the word about this salvation has been sent If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God has sent the word about this salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 26 zx08 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Paul is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God sent about Jesus by using words. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 26 zx08 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Paul is using the term **word** to mean the message that God sent about Jesus by using words. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 26 v6r3 figs-abstractnouns τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης 1 about this salvation If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God is saving people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 13 27 s64d writing-pronouns τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “not recognizing Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 13 27 psk5 figs-explicit τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες 1 did not recognize this one Paul means implicitly that the people of Jerusalem and their leaders did not recognize that God had sent Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “not recognizing that God had sent Jesus to be the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 27 ri1f figs-metonymy τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν 1 the voices of the prophets Paul is using the word **voices** figuratively to mean the prophecies that the prophets spoke with their voices. Alternate translation: “the prophecies of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 27 ri1f figs-metonymy τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν 1 the voices of the prophets Paul is using the word **voices** to mean the prophecies that the prophets spoke with their voices. Alternate translation: “the prophecies of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 27 m4tz figs-activepassive τὰς…ἀναγινωσκομένας 2 that are read If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that someone reads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 27 i6jo figs-explicit τὰς…ἀναγινωσκομένας 2 Paul is referring implicitly to the way that someone reads from the writings of **the prophets** on each **Sabbath** in the synagogues. Alternate translation: “that someone reads aloud in each synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 28 v3hw writing-pronouns ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον ἀναιρεθῆναι αὐτόν 1 General Information: Here the word **they** refThe pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem, and the pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders asked Pilate for Jesus to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])ers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem. The word **him** here refers to Jesus. @@ -1971,11 +1971,11 @@ ACT 13 31 ig7w figs-activepassive ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλε ACT 13 31 g4vl figs-explicit ἡμέρας πλείους 1 many days We know from other writings tWe know from the Gospels that this period was 40 days. Translate **many days** with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])hat this period was 40 days. Translate **many days** with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time. ACT 13 31 rw9e figs-idiom τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν 1 Paul says **having come up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “the ones who traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 32 h6ch figs-explicit τὴν πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ἐπαγγελίαν γενομένην 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to a **promise** that God made. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise that God made to our fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 32 hr2g figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 our fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 32 hr2g figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 our fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 33 b1uh translate-versebridge 1 God has fulfilled this for our children It may be helpful to create a verse bridge that combines verse 32 with the first part of verse 33. You could say something like this: “And we are proclaiming to you that by raising Jesus, God has completely fulfilled for our children the promise he made to our fathers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 13 33 t0wt figs-explicit ταύτην 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will know that by **this**, he means the promise he described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 33 dy6w translate-textvariants τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 for our children Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” which makes sense, since Paul is saying that this promise was fulfilled in his own generation, not in the next generation. If the reading **for our children** is correct, Paul may mean “for the children of us Israelites.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -ACT 13 33 t176 figs-metaphor τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 If this is the correct reading, then Paul may be using the term **children** figuratively to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “for our descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 33 t176 figs-metaphor τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 If this is the correct reading, then Paul may be using the term **children** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “for our descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 33 d95n figs-idiom ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν 1 by raising up Jesus Here, **raising up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “by causing Jesus to live again after he had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 33 y3tz figs-activepassive ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 As it is also written in the second Psalm If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “As we can also read in the second Psalm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 33 h9ir translate-ordinal τῷ ψαλμῷ…τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 the second Psalm If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Psalm 2” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) @@ -1991,34 +1991,34 @@ ACT 13 35 r1ev figs-explicit ἐν ἑτέρῳ 1 On account of this he also say ACT 13 35 gl8s writing-pronouns καὶ…λέγει 1 he also says Even though David is the author of Psalm 16, from which this quotation is taken, the pronoun **he** refers to God, as in [13:34](../13/34.md). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “God also says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 13 35 d4px figs-explicit τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 The expression **Holy One** is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 35 jvpy figs-123person τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 This is a Messianic prophecy, and the Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -ACT 13 35 hvt8 figs-idiom ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 You will not allow your Holy One to see decay Paul is using the word **see** idiomatically to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” or “to undergo decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 13 35 hvt8 figs-idiom ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 You will not allow your Holy One to see decay Paul is using the word **see** to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” or “to undergo decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 35 bhos figs-explicit ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 36 rpb4 figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 fell asleep Paul is referring to death in a polite way by using the phrase **fell asleep**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “passed away” or “died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) ACT 13 36 nwy9 figs-activepassive προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ 1 was laid with his fathers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people buried him with his fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 36 f5s2 figs-metaphor πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with his ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 13 36 la5s figs-idiom εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 saw decay Paul is using the word **saw** idiomatically to mean “experienced.” Alternate translation: “experienced decay” or “underwent decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 13 36 f5s2 figs-metaphor πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with his ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 36 la5s figs-idiom εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 saw decay Paul is using the word **saw** to mean “experienced.” Alternate translation: “experienced decay” or “underwent decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 36 okfp figs-explicit διαφθοράν 1 The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 37 bmw3 writing-pronouns ὃν…ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 But he whom The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God raised up,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 13 37 n9pl figs-idiom ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 God raised up The idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 13 37 j52x figs-idiom οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 did not see decay Paul is using the word **see** idiomatically to mean “experience.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience decay” or “undergo decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 13 37 j52x figs-idiom οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 did not see decay Paul is using the word **see** to mean “experience.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience decay” or “undergo decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 37 g3ie figs-explicit διαφθοράν 1 The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 38 yg35 figs-imperative3p γνωστὸν…ἔστω ὑμῖν 1 let it be known to you If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” or “you should know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 13 38 f917 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 13 38 qy18 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. He is addressing the people in the synagogue who are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. He may also be using the word **brothers** as a term of friendship for the Gentiles who are present. Alternate translation, as in UST: “my fellow Israelites and other friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 38 qy18 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. He is addressing the people in the synagogue who are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. He may also be using the word **brothers** as a term of friendship for the Gentiles who are present. Alternate translation, as in UST: “my fellow Israelites and other friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 38 an8q writing-pronouns τούτου 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 13 38 t3i5 figs-activepassive ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ 1 that because of this, forgiveness of sins is being proclaimed to you, and freedom If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we are proclaiming forgiveness of sins to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 38 w7y1 figs-ellipsis ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ ἀπὸ πάντων 1 forgiveness of sins Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “release of sins is proclaimed to you, and release is also proclaimed to you from the guilt of everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 13 38 xjzi figs-activepassive πάντων ὧν οὐκ ἠδυνήθητε ἐν νόμῳ Μωϋσέως δικαιωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “everything that you were not able to do in obedience to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 39 g5h9 figs-activepassive ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων δικαιοῦται 1 In this one every one who believes is justified If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God justifies everyone who believes in this one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 39 ki8q writing-pronouns τούτῳ 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 13 40 y2kg figs-metonymy βλέπετε 1 be careful that Paul is using the term **Look** figuratively to mean “Be careful,” since looking around alertly is associated with being careful. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 40 y2kg figs-metonymy βλέπετε 1 be careful that Paul is using the term **Look** to mean “Be careful,” since looking around alertly is associated with being careful. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 40 tt1x figs-activepassive τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις 1 the thing spoken about in the prophets If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the thing that the prophets spoke about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 40 osou figs-personification μὴ ἐπέλθῃ 1 Paul is speaking figuratively of what the prophets spoke as if it were a living thing that could **come upon** his listeners. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may not happen to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 13 40 osou figs-personification μὴ ἐπέλθῃ 1 Paul is speaking of what the prophets spoke as if it were a living thing that could **come upon** his listeners. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may not happen to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 13 41 kk1j figs-quotemarks ἴδετε, οἱ καταφρονηταί, καὶ θαυμάσατε καὶ ἀφανίσθητε, ὅτι ἔργον ἐργάζομαι ἐγὼ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν, ἔργον ὃ οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε, ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν 1 This quotation is from the prophet Habakkuk. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Habakkuk as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites and directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -ACT 13 41 jveu figs-metonymy ἴδετε 1 Paul is using the term **Look** figuratively to mean “Be careful,” since looking around altertly is associated with being careful. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 41 jveu figs-metonymy ἴδετε 1 Paul is using the term **Look** to mean “Be careful,” since looking around altertly is associated with being careful. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 41 xcdg figs-activepassive ἀφανίσθητε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “perish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 41 dvn1 figs-metonymy ἔργον ἐργάζομαι…ἔργον 1 am doing a work God is using the word **work** figuratively to mean a judgment that he will work to bring about. Alternate translation: “I am carrying out a judgment…a judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 13 41 nm2q ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν 1 in your days God is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during your lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 13 41 dvn1 figs-metonymy ἔργον ἐργάζομαι…ἔργον 1 am doing a work God is using the word **work** to mean a judgment that he will work to bring about. Alternate translation: “I am carrying out a judgment…a judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 41 nm2q ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν 1 in your days God is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during your lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 42 ax8v writing-pronouns ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν 1 And as they were leaving Here the pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “as Paul and Barnabas were leaving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 13 42 f3sw writing-pronouns παρεκάλουν 1 they begged them Here the pronoun **they** refers to the people who were in the synagogue. Alternate translation: “the people in the synagogue begged them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 13 42 w9h6 figs-activepassive λαληθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “them to speak these words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2030,17 +2030,17 @@ ACT 13 43 fv15 figs-abstractnouns προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι το ACT 13 44 vq3y figs-metonymy σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 almost the whole city was gathered together The **city** represents the people in the city. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 44 h40t figs-activepassive συνήχθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 44 yga7 figs-explicit ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 to hear the word of the Lord The implication is that Paul and Barnabas were going to speak **the word of the Lord**. Alternate translation: “to hear Paul and Barnabas speak the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 44 evox figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas were going to share by using words. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 44 evox figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas were going to share by using words. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 45 j4zq figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 13 45 qrh2 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 they were filled with jealousy For emphasis, Luke is speaking figuratively of the Jewish leaders as if they were a container that jealousy **filled**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “they became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 45 qrh2 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 they were filled with jealousy For emphasis, Luke is speaking of the Jewish leaders as if they were a container that jealousy **filled**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “they became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 45 m1an figs-activepassive τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις 1 the things that were said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 46 d08v figs-activepassive λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for us to speak the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 46 jn55 figs-metonymy ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 necessary for the word of God first to be spoken to you Paul and Barnabas are using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God commanded them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 46 jn55 figs-metonymy ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 necessary for the word of God first to be spoken to you Paul and Barnabas are using the term **word** to mean the message that God commanded them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 46 as6q figs-explicit ὑμῖν…πρῶτον 1 It was necessary for Paul means implicitly that it was necessary to speak to the Jews first because they were God’s chosen people and God had sent the Messiah initially to them. Alternate translation: “to you Jews first because you are God’s chosen people and God sent the Messiah initially to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 46 lly5 figs-metaphor ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν 1 Since you reject it Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 46 ms36 figs-irony οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς 1 judge yourselves unworthy of eternal life Paul does not seriously believe that the Jewish leaders do not consider themselves worthy of eternal life. Paul actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of his words. Alternate translation: “are acting as if you are not worthy of eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) ACT 13 46 kzm1 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Paul and Barnabas are using the term **behold** to focus the attention of the Jewish leaders on what they are about to say. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 13 46 rf9k figs-explicit στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη 1 we will turn to the Gentiles Paul and Barnabas are speaking figuratively as if they are going to be physically **turning** toward **the Gentiles**. They mean that they are going to stop preaching in the Jewish synagogue and begin preaching to gatherings of Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 13 46 rf9k figs-explicit στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη 1 we will turn to the Gentiles Paul and Barnabas are speaking as if they are going to be physically **turning** toward **the Gentiles**. They mean that they are going to stop preaching in the Jewish synagogue and begin preaching to gatherings of Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 46 zvt5 figs-exclusive στρεφόμεθα 1 By **we**, Paul and Barnabas mean themselves, but not the Jewish leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 13 47 tx94 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 By **us**, Paul and Barnabas mean themselves, but not the Jewish leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 13 47 xbiw figs-quotemarks τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν, τοῦ εἶναί σε εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 This quotation is from the prophet Isaiah. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Messiah directly in it. (Paul and Barnabas are saying that since they are disciples of the Messiah, the quotation also refers to their ministry.) You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) @@ -2048,35 +2048,35 @@ ACT 13 47 v8au figs-simile τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς 1 as a light Thro ACT 13 47 za1q figs-yousingular σε 1 The word **you** is singular here because it refers to the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 13 47 t5sp figs-abstractnouns εἶναί…εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 should be for salvation as far as the end of the earth If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “should go and help people to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 13 47 ismw figs-idiom ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 This phrase is an idiom. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everywhere on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 13 48 e9ag figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 glorified the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 48 e9ag figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 glorified the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 48 jct2 figs-activepassive τεταγμένοι 1 as many as were appointed to eternal life If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God had appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 49 qh9z figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord was being spread throughout the whole region Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 49 qh9z figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord was being spread throughout the whole region Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 49 fpkr figs-activepassive διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was those who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “those who believed in Jesus spread the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 50 u8rm figs-synecdoche οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 13 50 ef21 figs-metaphor παρώτρυναν 1 Luke says figuratively that the Jewish leaders **stirred up** these women and men, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This figurative expression means that the leaders said things to make them very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 50 ef21 figs-metaphor παρώτρυναν 1 Luke says that the Jewish leaders **stirred up** these women and men, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This figurative expression means that the leaders said things to make them very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 50 f5yd τὰς σεβομένας γυναῖκας τὰς εὐσχήμονας 1 Alternate translation: “the influential women among the Gentile women who worshiped in the synagogue” ACT 13 50 wmm5 figs-nominaladj τοὺς πρώτους 1 the leading men Luke is using the adjective **principal** as a noun, to mean people who are important. (ULT adds the word **ones** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the most important men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 13 50 uc54 writing-pronouns ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the influential women and important men, not to the Jewish leaders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the influential women and important men threw them out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 13 50 cq9h figs-metaphor ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 threw them out from their boundaries Like is likely speaking figuratively when he says that they **threw** them out. It is unlikely that they actually picked up Paul and Barnabas and heaved them through the air. Alternate translation: “they forced Paul and Barnabas to leave their boundaries” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 13 50 kzzk figs-metonymy τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 Luke is describing the city of Antioch in Pisidia figuratively by association with the way that it had **boundaries** and its leading citizens could determine who could be within those boundaries. Alternate translation: “their city” or “the territory they controlled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 50 cq9h figs-metaphor ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 threw them out from their boundaries Like is likely speaking when he says that they **threw** them out. It is unlikely that they actually picked up Paul and Barnabas and heaved them through the air. Alternate translation: “they forced Paul and Barnabas to leave their boundaries” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 50 kzzk figs-metonymy τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 Luke is describing the city of Antioch in Pisidia by association with the way that it had **boundaries** and its leading citizens could determine who could be within those boundaries. Alternate translation: “their city” or “the territory they controlled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 51 abco writing-pronouns οἱ 1 But when they had shaken off The pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 13 51 xi1z translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς 1 when they had shaken off the dust from their feet against them This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a town to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 13 51 fvop translate-names Ἰκόνιον 1 The word **Iconium** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 13 52 dp5k figs-explicit οἵ…μαθηταὶ 1 the disciples Here, **the disciples** implicitly means the new believers that Paul and Barnabas were leaving behind in Antioch of Pisidia. Alternate translation: “the new believers in Antioch of Pisidia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 52 hhgj figs-metaphor ἐπληροῦντο χαρᾶς καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of these disciples as if they were a container that **joy** and **the Holy Spirit** had **filled**. Alternate translation: “experienced great joy and a strong sense of the Holy Spirit’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 14 intro rsg2 0 # Acts 14 General Notes

\r\r## Structure and formatting

\r\r- Verses 1–4 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Iconium.\r- Verses 5–19 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Lystra.\r- Verses 20–28 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel and strengthened the believers in several cities on their way back to Antioch.\r\r## Special concepts in this chapter

\r\r### “the word of his grace”

\r\rThe expression “the word of his grace” refers to the message that God will graciously forgive and accept those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

\r\r### Zeus and Hermes

\r\rIn this chapter, Barnabas and Paul are mistaken for the pagan gods Zeus and Hermes. The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods that did not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God,” that is, the one and only true God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

\r\r## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

\r\r### “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.”

\r\rJesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul and Barnabas were saying the same thing using different words as they encourage the new believers in the cities that they had visited.\r +ACT 13 52 hhgj figs-metaphor ἐπληροῦντο χαρᾶς καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking of these disciples as if they were a container that **joy** and **the Holy Spirit** had **filled**. Alternate translation: “experienced great joy and a strong sense of the Holy Spirit’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 14 intro rsg2 0 # Acts 14 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

- Verses 1–4 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Iconium.- Verses 5–19 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Lystra.- Verses 20–28 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel and strengthened the believers in several cities on their way back to Antioch.## Special concepts in this chapter

### “the word of his grace”

The expression “the word of his grace” refers to the message that God will graciously forgive and accept those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Zeus and Hermes

In this chapter, Barnabas and Paul are mistaken for the pagan gods Zeus and Hermes. The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods that did not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God,” that is, the one and only true God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.”

Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul and Barnabas were saying the same thing using different words as they encourage the new believers in the cities that they had visited. ACT 14 1 hk1z writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Iconium Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 14 1 f4sq figs-explicit λαλῆσαι 1 spoke in such a way It may be helpful to say explicitly that they spoke about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 14 2 wc4x οἱ…ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews who were disobedient Alternate translation: “those Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus” -ACT 14 2 n2pp figs-metaphor ἐπήγειραν 1 stirred up the souls of the Gentiles Luke says figuratively that these Jews**stirred up** the Gentiles, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This figurative expression means that the Jews said things to make the Gentiles very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 14 2 n2pp figs-metaphor ἐπήγειραν 1 stirred up the souls of the Gentiles Luke says that these Jews**stirred up** the Gentiles, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This figurative expression means that the Jews said things to make the Gentiles very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 14 2 k8mv figs-synecdoche τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 the souls Luke is using one part of the Gentiles, their **souls**, to mean all of them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 14 2 fu13 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 14 2 fu13 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 14 3 a3gp grammar-connect-logic-contrast οὖν 1 So they stayed there Luke uses the word **But** here to indicate a contrast between what the unfaithful Jews did and what Paul and Barnabas did in response. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ACT 14 3 fifi writing-politeness ἐπὶ τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) -ACT 14 3 f2xh figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ 1 who is testifying to the word of his grace Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in support of the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 14 3 f2xh figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ 1 who is testifying to the word of his grace Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in support of the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 14 3 wcn5 figs-abstractnouns τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 to the word of his grace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God graciously saves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 14 3 c2cv figs-doublet σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα 1 by granting signs and wonders to be done by their hands The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in [4:30](../04/30.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ACT 14 3 p9iq figs-metonymy διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 by their hands Here, **hands** figuratively represents the capability of a person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly.Alternate translation: “through them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 14 3 p9iq figs-metonymy διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 by their hands Here, **hands** represents the capability of a person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly.Alternate translation: “through them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 14 4 btu3 figs-activepassive ἐσχίσθη…τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως 1 the population of the city was divided If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city disagreed with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 14 4 q1xc figs-ellipsis σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις 1 with the apostles Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “were with the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 14 5 q6g2 figs-hendiadys ὑβρίσαι καὶ λιθοβολῆσαι αὐτούς 1 to mistreat and stone them Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **stone** tells how their opponents in Iconium wanted to **mistreat** Paul and Barnabas. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “hostilely to stone them to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -2084,8 +2084,8 @@ ACT 14 6 tpl1 translate-names τῆς Λυκαονίας 1 of Lycaonia The word ACT 14 6 m5gv translate-names Λύστραν 1 Lystra The word **Lystra** is the name of a city in Asia Minor. It is south of Iconium and north of Derbe. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 14 6 tl4q translate-names Δέρβην 1 Derbe The word**Derbe** is the name of a city in Asia Minor. It is south of Iconium and Lystra. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 14 8 wb5k writing-participants τις ἀνὴρ…ἐκάθητο 1 a certain man sat Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 14 8 kz7d figs-metonymy ἀδύνατος…τοῖς ποσὶν 1 powerless in his feet Luke is referring figuratively to the strength of this man’s legs by association with the way people are able to stand on their **feet** when their legs are strong. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose legs could not support him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 14 8 tca1 figs-metonymy χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 lame from the womb of his mother Luke is referring figuratively to the time of this man’s birth by association with the way he came out of the **womb of his mother** when he was born. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the time he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 14 8 kz7d figs-metonymy ἀδύνατος…τοῖς ποσὶν 1 powerless in his feet Luke is referring to the strength of this man’s legs by association with the way people are able to stand on their **feet** when their legs are strong. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose legs could not support him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 14 8 tca1 figs-metonymy χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 lame from the womb of his mother Luke is referring to the time of this man’s birth by association with the way he came out of the **womb of his mother** when he was born. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the time he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 14 9 di49 figs-rpronouns οὗτος ἤκουσεν τοῦ Παύλου λαλοῦντος, ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ καὶ ἰδὼν ὅτι ἔχει πίστιν 1 He looked intently at him The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to the lame man, and the pronoun **who** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This man heard Paul speaking. Paul looked intently at the man and saw that he had faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 14 9 xak4 figs-abstractnouns ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 he has faith to be saved If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he could trust in Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 14 9 uwov figs-activepassive ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Jesus. (Here Luke is using the word that is often translated “saved” in one of its specific senses to mean **healed**.) Alternate translation: “he could trusting Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2101,9 +2101,9 @@ ACT 14 11 rm85 figs-activepassive ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις 1 ACT 14 12 t7uu translate-names Δία 1 Zeus The word **Zeus** is the name of a pagan god who was considered to be the ruler of all the other pagan gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 14 12 hh25 translate-names Ἑρμῆν 1 Hermes The word **Hermes** is the name of the pagan god who was thought to bring messages to people from Zeus and the other gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 14 12 i1fa figs-ellipsis τὸν δὲ Παῦλον, Ἑρμῆν, 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and they were calling Paul ‘Hermes,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 14 12 d9lu figs-metonymy ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Paul and Barnabas were sharing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leader of the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 14 12 d9lu figs-metonymy ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Paul and Barnabas were sharing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leader of the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 14 12 l63q figs-personification ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου 1 Luke is speaking of the message about Jesus as if it were a living thing that Paul could lead. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the main speaker” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ACT 14 13 iz6r figs-metonymy τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως 1 And the priest of the temple of Zeus, which was in front of the city, brought Luke is using the name **Zeus** figuratively to mean the temple that was associated with the worship of Zeus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the temple of Zeus that was before the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 14 13 iz6r figs-metonymy τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως 1 And the priest of the temple of Zeus, which was in front of the city, brought Luke is using the name **Zeus** to mean the temple that was associated with the worship of Zeus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the temple of Zeus that was before the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 14 13 sh4o figs-explicit τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως 1 Here, **before** means “in front of”. Luke is referring to the temple of Zeus that was located right outside the entrance to the city of Iconium. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the Temple of Zeus that was located right outside the entrance to the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 14 13 v2a9 figs-explicit ταύρους καὶ στέμματα 1 oxen and wreaths The implication is that the priest had put these **wreaths** on the **oxen** because they were going to be offered as a sacrifice. That was the custom in this culture. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “oxen that were wearing wreaths as sacrificial animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 14 13 ud37 figs-explicit ἤθελεν θύειν 1 wanting to sacrifice Luke means implicitly that the priest of Zeus wanted to offer the oxen as sacrifices to Paul and Barnabas, whom the people thought were the gods Zeus and Hermes. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “wanting to offer sacrifice to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2112,14 +2112,14 @@ ACT 14 14 wa4h figs-hendiadys κράζοντες 1 Together with the word “sa ACT 14 15 ee13 figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul and Barnabas are likely using the term in a generic sense that includes both men and women, since both men and women and Lystra were probably in the crowd that wanted to sacrifice to them. To make this clear to your readers, you could use a term in your language that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “you people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 14 15 w4fd figs-rquestion ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε? 1 Men, why are you doing these things? Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you must not do these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 14 15 u9pq figs-explicit καὶ ἡμεῖς ὁμοιοπαθεῖς ἐσμεν ὑμῖν ἄνθρωποι 1 We also are men with the same feelings as you People in this culture believed that the gods did not have passions as humans do. So the implication of this statement is that Paul and Barnabas are human beings, not gods. You can include this information in your translation if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “We are human beings just like you. We are not gods!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 14 15 n98g figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ Θεὸν ζῶντα 1 turn from these useless things to a living God Paul and Barnabas are speaking figuratively as if they want the people in Lystra physically to **turn** from idol worship and believe in the one true God. The metaphor of turning means to stop living in one way and to start living in another way. If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, you could state its meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to get you to stop worshiping these false gods and lead you to worship the living God instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 14 15 n98g figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ Θεὸν ζῶντα 1 turn from these useless things to a living God Paul and Barnabas are speaking as if they want the people in Lystra physically to **turn** from idol worship and believe in the one true God. The metaphor of turning means to stop living in one way and to start living in another way. If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, you could state its meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to get you to stop worshiping these false gods and lead you to worship the living God instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 14 15 blhg figs-nominaladj τούτων τῶν ματαίων 1 Paul and Barnabas are using the adjective **useless** as a noun to mean the false gods that the people of Lystra had been worshiping. ULT adds the word **things** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “these false gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 14 15 qr5b figs-idiom Θεὸν ζῶντα 1 a living God This expression is an idiom. If your readers might misunderstand its meaning, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one God who truly exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 14 15 lw9o figs-merism ὃς ἐποίησεν τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 Paul and Barnabas are referring to all of creation by naming its components. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -ACT 14 16 vpt5 figs-metaphor πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν 1 to go their own ways This is a metaphor that refers figuratively to how people live their lives. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do what they wanted to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 14 16 vpt5 figs-metaphor πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν 1 to go their own ways This is a metaphor that refers to how people live their lives. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do what they wanted to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 14 17 kig8 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν 1 he did not leave himself without witness If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative preposition **without**. Alternate translation: “he left himself a witness” or “he showed you what he was like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 14 17 c1se figs-explicitinfo οὐρανόθεν ὑμῖν ὑετοὺς διδοὺς 1 It might seem that the expression **rains from the sky** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “rain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) -ACT 14 17 ps9z figs-synecdoche filling your hearts 1 filling your hearts with food and gladness Paul and Barnabas are using one part of these people, their **hearts**, figuratively meaning their desi misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “satisfying you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 14 17 ps9z figs-synecdoche filling your hearts 1 filling your hearts with food and gladness Paul and Barnabas are using one part of these people, their **hearts**, meaning their desi misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “satisfying you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 14 17 en5y figs-hendiadys τροφῆς καὶ εὐφροσύνης 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **gladness** tells how the food that God provided made these people feel. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “enjoyable food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 14 19 wmc2 figs-explicit πείσαντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 persuaded the crowds It may be helpful to state explicitly what they **persuaded the crowds** to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded the crowds not to believe Paul and Barnabas and to turn hostilely against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 14 20 aqx3 writing-pronouns αὐτὸν…εἰσῆλθεν…ἐξῆλθεν 1 he entered into the city The pronouns **him** and **he** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … he entered … Paul went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -2132,20 +2132,20 @@ ACT 14 22 wu1c figs-exclusive δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν 1 It is ne ACT 14 23 pk5l writing-pronouns χειροτονήσαντες…παρέθεντο…πεπιστεύκεισαν 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the new believers in the cities of Lystra, Iconium, and Antioch, and the pronoun **they** refer to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “for the new believers in these cities … Paul and Barnabas entrusted these believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 14 23 mqp9 κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν 1 And when they had appointed for them elders in every church Alternate translation: “in each new group of believers” ACT 14 23 n81l writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) -ACT 14 25 t513 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 And when they had spoken the word in Perga Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 14 25 t513 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 And when they had spoken the word in Perga Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 14 25 h8sh figs-idiom κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν 1 they went down to Attalia Luke says that Paul and Barnabas **went down** to Attalia because that city is lower in elevation than Perga. Alternate translation: “traveled to Attalia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 14 26 f2cg figs-activepassive ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 where they had been commended to the grace of God If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where the believers had commended them to the grace of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 14 26 p2gd figs-abstractnouns ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “where the believers had ask God to care for them graciously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 14 27 vcd3 writing-pronouns ἀνήγγελλον…αὐτῶν…ἤνοιξεν 1 The pronouns **they** and **them** refer to Paul and Barnabas, and the pronoun **he** refers to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas were reporting… them… God had opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 14 27 qcl8 figs-idiom ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 In many languages it would be an idiom to say that God **had done** something with Paul and Barnabas. It would mean that they had been the objects of God’s action. But the expression is not an idiom here. It means that Paul and Barnabas had been able to work in partnership **with** God. Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do working together with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 14 27 vymy figs-possession ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 Here, the possessive form describes not a **door** consisting of **faith** but a door that leads to faith. Alternate translation: “a door leading to faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ACT 14 27 b4id figs-metaphor ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles Here the expression **opened a door** figuratively means that God created an opportunity, as if a door that gave access to this opportunity had previously been closed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles an opportunity for faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 14 27 b4id figs-metaphor ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles Here the expression **opened a door** means that God created an opportunity, as if a door that gave access to this opportunity had previously been closed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles an opportunity for faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 14 27 xgvb figs-abstractnouns ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles the opportunity to believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 14 28 abcq figs-litotes χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον 1 for not a little time Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could take the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 15 intro h917 0 # Acts 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

- Verses 1–35 tell how the church resolved the question of whether Gentiles who believed in Jesus needed to keep the whole law of Moses.
- Verses 36–41 tell how Paul began a new journey to proclaim the gospel, bringing Silas with him.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16–18.

Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present the quotation from the prophet Amos in verses 16–18 as a direct quotation if possible, since in it God is speaking directly the people of Israel. Since Amos acknowledges in verse 17 that God is speaking by saying “says the Lord,” a third-level quotation actually starts in verse 16. ULT uses second-level and third-level quotation marks within the first-level quotation from James to identify the various speakers. But it may not be necessary to do this in your translation. You could just use second-level quotation marks or some other punctuation or convention available in your language to indicate the beginning and ending of the second-level quotation from Amos. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Did Gentiles have to obey the law of Moses?

Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised, so this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not believe that the Gentiles needed to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do. The meeting that the apostles and elders held to decide about this issue is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.”
ACT 15 1 su66 figs-explicit τινες 1 certain ones Luke assumes that his readers will recognize that these were Jews who believed in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers will need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “text” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 1 p3k9 figs-idiom κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 coming down from Judea Luke speaks of these Jews ** coming down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “who had traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 15 1 zi1n figs-metaphor ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 taught the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 1 zi1n figs-metaphor ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 taught the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 1 pm8h figs-activepassive ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε 1 Unless you are circumcised in the custom of Moses, you are not able to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 1 lwbi figs-activepassive οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be God. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will not save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 2 abcr figs-litotes στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης 1 not a little dispute and debate Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with a word, **little**, that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could states the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) @@ -2153,13 +2153,13 @@ ACT 15 2 f9nd figs-abstractnouns στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως 1 not a ACT 15 2 w6tc writing-pronouns πρὸς αὐτοὺς…ἔταξαν…ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the Jewish believers from Judea, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refer to the believers in the church in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with the Jewish believers from Judea … the believers in Antioch appointed … from the church there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 15 2 ek6a figs-idiom ἀναβαίνειν…εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 to go up … in Jerusalem Luke says **to go up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain.. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 15 3 av5y figs-activepassive οἱ…προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 Therefore, the ones who had been sent by the church If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones the church had sent out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 15 3 aia5 figs-metonymy τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 who had been sent by the church Luke is figuratively using the phrase **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 3 aia5 figs-metonymy τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 who had been sent by the church Luke is using the phrase **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 3 rk37 figs-abstractnouns ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 announcing the conversion of the Gentiles If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **conversion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “describing how many of the Gentiles had stopped worshiping false gods and were now worshiping the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 15 3 nje7 figs-abstractnouns ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 they brought great joy to all the brothers If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “making all the brothers very happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 15 3 bbd4 figs-metaphor πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 to all the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 3 bbd4 figs-metaphor πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 to all the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 3 c03o figs-hyperbole πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 The word **all** here may be a generalization for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a different way to convey this general statement. Alternate translation: “to the believers in those places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 15 4 ej1r figs-activepassive παρεδέχθησαν ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 they were welcomed by the church, and the apostles, and the elders If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church the apostles and the elders welcome them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 15 4 jblr figs-metonymy τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 Luke is figuratively using the phrase **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. Since he mentions the **apostles** and **elders** separately, here means the ordinary members of the church. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 4 jblr figs-metonymy τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 Luke is using the phrase **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. Since he mentions the **apostles** and **elders** separately, here means the ordinary members of the church. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 4 a2x1 figs-idiom ὅσα ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 with them See how you translated this same expression in [14:27](../14/27.md). Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do working together with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 15 5 kras translate-names τῶν Φαρισαίων 1 The name **Pharisee** describes a member of a group of Jewish priests. See how you translated it in [5:34](../05/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 15 5 zcv0 πεπιστευκότες 1 Alternate translation: “who had believed in Jesus” @@ -2167,31 +2167,31 @@ ACT 15 5 crr7 translate-symaction ἐξανέστησαν 1 These believers **s ACT 15 5 efe5 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς…παραγγέλλειν 1 Both instances of the pronoun **them** refer to the Gentiles who had converted to belief in the true God, as described in [15:3](../15/03.md). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Gentiles who have converted…them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 15 6 gqt1 figs-activepassive συνήχθησάν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 6 ugu6 figs-idiom ἰδεῖν περὶ 1 to see about this matter Here the phrase **to see about** is an idiom that means “to consider.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 15 6 vcsc figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου τούτου 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 6 vcsc figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου τούτου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 7 zhco translate-symaction ἀναστὰς Πέτρος 1 Peter stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. If your readers might not understand the significance of this action, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 15 7 c2q7 writing-pronouns αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles and elders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the apostles and elders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 15 7 s6ap figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 15 7 a6q9 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Peter is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 7 a6q9 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Peter is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 7 wct8 figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς…ὑμῖν 1 Both occurrences of **you** are plural, since they refer to the apostles and elders. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 15 7 hk4g writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 Peter is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 15 7 ftl9 figs-idiom ἀφ’ ἡμερῶν ἀρχαίων 1 Peter is using an idiom that refers to the time when something began or had its origin. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Gentiles would first begin to believe in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 15 7 s3wb figs-synecdoche διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου 1 by my mouth Peter is figuratively using one part of himself, his **mouth**, to represent all of himself in the act of speaking. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “From me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 15 7 b5s8 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word of the gospel Peter is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that he shared by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 8 m1xc figs-metonymy καρδιογνώστης 1 who knows the heart Here, the word **heart** figuratively refers to a person’s character and intentions. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who understands each person’s character and intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 7 s3wb figs-synecdoche διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου 1 by my mouth Peter is using one part of himself, his **mouth**, to represent all of himself in the act of speaking. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “From me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 15 7 b5s8 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word of the gospel Peter is using the term **word** to mean the message that he shared by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 8 m1xc figs-metonymy καρδιογνώστης 1 who knows the heart Here, the word **heart** refers to a person’s character and intentions. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who understands each person’s character and intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 8 p6d2 figs-explicit ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς 1 testified to them The implication is not that God testified to the Gentiles about Jesus, but that by giving the Gentiles the Holy Spirit, God testified to Peter and his companions that they could have genuine faith. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “testified to their genuine faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 8 abcs figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν 1 just as also to us Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave the Holy Spirit to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 15 8 wlzx figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Peter is using the word **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 15 9 zs2g figs-doublenegatives οὐδὲν διέκρινεν μεταξὺ ἡμῶν τε καὶ αὐτῶν 1 he did not distinguish If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **distinguish**, which in this context means “discriminate.” Alternate translation: “he regarded them in the same way he regarded us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 15 9 jr3b figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Peter is using the word **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 15 9 ase1 figs-metaphor τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 having made their hearts clean by faith Peter speaks of God forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins as though God literally **cleansed** their hearts. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made them innocent because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 15 9 yi8r figs-metonymy τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **hearts** figuratively represents the inner beings of the Gentiles. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having forgiven them deeply because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 9 yi8r figs-metonymy τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **hearts** represents the inner beings of the Gentiles. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having forgiven them deeply because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 10 rfr4 νῦν 1 Now **Now** in this context does not mean “at this moment.” Peter is using the word to draw attention to the important point that follows. Alternate translation: “So tell me” ACT 15 10 zaz6 figs-rquestion τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν…? 1 why are you testing God, to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear? Peter is using the question form to challenge the believers who are Pharisees about what they want the Gentiles to do. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you must not test God…!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 15 10 ha45 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμεῖς 1 Peter is using the words **our** and **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 15 10 n2bv τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν…? 1 Here the word **testing** means **challenging**. Peter is saying that God has accepted the Gentiles without requiring them to be circumcised or keep the law, but the believers who are Pharisees are challenging God’s judgment that the Gentiles should be accepted on that basis. See how you translated the similar expression in [5:9](../05/09.md). Alternate translation: “why are you challenging God” -ACT 15 10 qpyd figs-metaphor ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι 1 Peter is speaking figuratively as if the believers who are Pharisees literally want to put a **yoke** on the necks of the Gentile believers. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “requiring the disciples to meet an onerous obligation that neither our fathers nor we have been able to fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 10 qpyd figs-metaphor ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι 1 Peter is speaking as if the believers who are Pharisees literally want to put a **yoke** on the necks of the Gentile believers. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “requiring the disciples to meet an onerous obligation that neither our fathers nor we have been able to fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 10 bdfu bdfu 1 Since Peter is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **neck**. Alternate translation: “the necks” -ACT 15 10 bfd5 figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** figuratively to mean “ancestors.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 10 bfd5 figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 11 e1m4 figs-rpronouns πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι 1 Peter is using a construction in which the object is implied. Since the object is the same as the subject of the verb, the construction calls for the relative pronoun **ourselves**. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “we believe that we will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 15 11 q28c figs-activepassive πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι 1 But we believe to be saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus, and they according to that same manner If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “we believe that God will save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 11 nhq8 figs-exclusive πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι 1 Peter is using the pronoun **we** and the implied pronoun **ourselves** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -2204,59 +2204,59 @@ ACT 15 13 odjm figs-hendiadys ἀπεκρίθη Ἰάκωβος λέγων 1 To ACT 15 13 yqcm translate-names Ἰάκωβος 1 The word **James** is the name of a man, the brother of Jesus who was the leader of the church in Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [12:17](../12/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 15 13 pl6m figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 brothers, listen This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 15 14 jjyc translate-names Συμεὼν 1 The word **Simeon** is the name of a man. It is the Hebrew form of the name whose Greek form is Simon. James is referring to Peter by his Hebrew name. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use either the name Simon or the name Peter here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 15 14 abct figs-metonymy ὁ Θεὸς ἐπεσκέψατο 1 concerned himself to take from the Gentiles James is speaking figuratively of the way God showed concern for the Gentiles by association with the way someone would look carefully at a situation he was concerned about. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God concerned himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 14 pnr9 figs-metonymy λαὸν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 for his name This could mean: (1) that God chose the Gentiles for himself. James would be using the term **name** figuratively to refer to a person, God, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “a people who would belong to him” (2) that God chose the Gentiles to worship him. James would be using the term **name** figuratively to refer to worship by association with the way that worshipers call upon the name of God. Alternate translation: “a people who would worship him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 15 am6y figs-metonymy οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν 1 this agrees with the words of the prophets James is using the term **words** figuratively to mean the message that God spoke through the prophets. (This is a quotation from the prophet Amos.) If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 14 abct figs-metonymy ὁ Θεὸς ἐπεσκέψατο 1 concerned himself to take from the Gentiles James is speaking of the way God showed concern for the Gentiles by association with the way someone would look carefully at a situation he was concerned about. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God concerned himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 14 pnr9 figs-metonymy λαὸν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 for his name This could mean: (1) that God chose the Gentiles for himself. James would be using the term **name** to refer to a person, God, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “a people who would belong to him” (2) that God chose the Gentiles to worship him. James would be using the term **name** to refer to worship by association with the way that worshipers call upon the name of God. Alternate translation: “a people who would worship him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 15 am6y figs-metonymy οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν 1 this agrees with the words of the prophets James is using the term **words** to mean the message that God spoke through the prophets. (This is a quotation from the prophet Amos.) If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 15 j4f5 figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 just as it is written If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as one of the prophets wrote” or “as the prophet Amos wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 16 m3lq figs-quotemarks μετὰ ταῦτα ἀναστρέψω 1 See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about whether to represent this as the beginning of a third-level quotation or a second-level quotation, or whether to use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate who the various speakers are in verses 16–18. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 15 16 h9um writing-pronouns ἀναστρέψω…ἀνοικοδομήσω…ἀνοικοδομήσω 1 The pronoun **I** refers to God, who is speaking through the prophet Amos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I, God, will return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 15 16 wqi6 figs-metaphor ἀναστρέψω 1 God is speaking figuratively of showing favor to the Israelites once again as if he had gone somewhere else but will now **return**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will show favor to the Israelites once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 16 wqi6 figs-metaphor ἀναστρέψω 1 God is speaking of showing favor to the Israelites once again as if he had gone somewhere else but will now **return**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will show favor to the Israelites once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 16 fhdr figs-parallelism ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will rebuild the fallen tent of David, yes, I will rebuild its ruins and restore it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -ACT 15 16 f5wf figs-metaphor ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν 1 I will build again the tent of David, which has fallen down; and I will rebuild its ruins and will restore it God is speaking figuratively of the royal dynasty of David as if it were a **tent** that had **fallen** down. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will restore the dynasty of David, which is no longer ruling over the people of Israel, yes, I will make one of David’s descendants king again and restore his dynasty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 16 f5wf figs-metaphor ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν 1 I will build again the tent of David, which has fallen down; and I will rebuild its ruins and will restore it God is speaking of the royal dynasty of David as if it were a **tent** that had **fallen** down. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will restore the dynasty of David, which is no longer ruling over the people of Israel, yes, I will make one of David’s descendants king again and restore his dynasty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 16 u0r6 figs-activepassive τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the tent of David that has fallen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 17 hkw1 figs-gendernotations κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 remnant of men Although the term **men** is masculine, God is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. You may wish to indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “the remnant of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 15 17 pe4l figs-123person ἐκζητήσωσιν…τὸν Κύριον 1 may seek the Lord God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “may seek me, the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -ACT 15 17 sm79 figs-metaphor ἐκζητήσωσιν…τὸν Κύριον 1 the remnant of men may seek the Lord God is speaking figuratively as if the Gentiles would literally **seek** or look for him. The expression means that the Gentiles will begin to worship God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may begin to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 17 sm79 figs-metaphor ἐκζητήσωσιν…τὸν Κύριον 1 the remnant of men may seek the Lord God is speaking as if the Gentiles would literally **seek** or look for him. The expression means that the Gentiles will begin to worship God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may begin to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 17 s6de figs-explicitinfo ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 It might seem that this phrase contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “upon whom my name has been called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 15 17 tu21 figs-activepassive ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 including all the Gentiles upon whom my name has been called upon them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom I have called by my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 17 c8gm figs-metonymy ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 my name See how you translated the similar expression in [15:14](../15/14.md). (1) Alternate translation: “who will belong to me” (2) Alternate translation: “who will worship me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 18 tr27 figs-activepassive γνωστὰ 1 known If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people have known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 19 pyb9 figs-explicit μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 not to trouble those from the Gentiles who are turning to God In your translation, you can make explicit in what way James does not want to **trouble** these **Gentiles**. Alternate translation: “that we should not require the Gentiles who are believing in God to be circumcised and obey the laws of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 19 vr6u figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 who are turning to God James is speaking figuratively of these Gentiles as if they are physically **turning** to God. He means that they are believing in the true God and starting to live in a way that pleases him. If your readers would misunderstand this expression, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believing in God and obeying him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 19 vr6u figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 who are turning to God James is speaking of these Gentiles as if they are physically **turning** to God. He means that they are believing in the true God and starting to live in a way that pleases him. If your readers would misunderstand this expression, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believing in God and obeying him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 20 vcm4 translate-versebridge 1 James lists four regulations in this verse and he gives the reason for them in the next verse. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 19–21. It might say something like this: “Therefore, I judge that we should not trouble the Gentiles who are turning to God. However, since Moses has had those proclaiming him in every city from ancient generations—he is read in the synagogues on every Sabbath—we should write to the Gentiles to abstain from the pollution of idols and sexual immorality and strangled things and blood.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 15 20 wx8f τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 to keep away from the pollution of idols, and sexual immorality, and things that are strangled, and blood If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **pollution**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 15 20 qun9 figs-possession τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 If your language would not use a possessive form here, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ACT 15 20 n6f2 figs-explicit τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 pollution of idols James is likely talking about food that has been offered to **idols**, and he is speaking figuratively as if being offered to idols has polluted this food. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating food that has been offered to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 15 20 n6f2 figs-explicit τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 pollution of idols James is likely talking about food that has been offered to **idols**, and he is speaking as if being offered to idols has polluted this food. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating food that has been offered to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 20 brc2 figs-nominaladj καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ 1 James is using the adjective **strangled** as a noun to mean animals that have been killed by strangulation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 15 20 h27f figs-metonymy τοῦ πνικτοῦ 1 James is referring figuratively by association to meat from animals that have been killed by strangulation. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 20 h27f figs-metonymy τοῦ πνικτοῦ 1 James is referring by association to meat from animals that have been killed by strangulation. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 20 j2rl figs-explicit τοῦ πνικτοῦ 1 things that are strangled, and blood God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, they tocould not eat the meat from an animal that had been strangled, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “and from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 20 llys figs-explicit καὶ τοῦ αἵματος 1 James is not saying that the Gentiles should have no contact at all with blood. Rather, he implicitly means that the Gentiles should not consume blood. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “and from consuming blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 21 si1h figs-explicit Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 For Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him, being read in the synagogues every Sabbath James is saying implicitly that Gentile believers should observe at least the four regulations he has listed because they embody essential aspects of the law of Moses (not worshipping idols, not practicing sexual immorality, and respecting the blood of sacrifices), and the law of Moses is well known because it is read aloud regularly in the Jewish synagogues. If the Gentiles did not observe even these regulations, that would upset Jewish believers and make Jews who were not yet believers more hostile to Christianity. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what James is saying. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 21 zd7t figs-metonymy Μωϋσῆς…ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει…ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 Moses James is using the name **Moses** figuratively to mean the law associated with Moses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have been proclaiming the law of Moses by city from ancient generations; it is read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 21 zd7t figs-metonymy Μωϋσῆς…ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει…ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 Moses James is using the name **Moses** to mean the law associated with Moses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have been proclaiming the law of Moses by city from ancient generations; it is read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 21 wp1s figs-activepassive ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “People read him” or “People read from the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 21 xg5n figs-explicit κατὰ πόλιν 1 in every city The expression **by city** means “in every city,” and James implicitly means every city in which there are Jews. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in every city in which there are Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 22 hp6j figs-metonymy ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the whole church Here the word **church** figuratively describes the people who were part of the church. Alternate translation: “all the people of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 22 hp6j figs-metonymy ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the whole church Here the word **church** describes the people who were part of the church. Alternate translation: “all the people of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 22 g6e8 figs-explicit ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the **church** in Jerusalem. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the church in Jerusalem” or “all the people of the church in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 22 c711 translate-names Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν 1 Judas called Barsabbas The words **Judas** and **Barsabbas** are the names of men. **Barsabbas** was another name by which **Judas** was known. **Barsabbas** is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. See how you translated this same name for another man in [1:23](../01/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 15 22 s6lv figs-activepassive Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Judas, whom people called Barsabbas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 22 ywen translate-names Σιλᾶν 1 The word **Silas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 15 22 s6d8 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 15 23 k6cq figs-metonymy γράψαντες διὰ χειρὸς αὐτῶν 1 Luke does not mean that the apostles and elders ask Judas and Silas to write out this letter for them. Rather, Luke is using the word **hand** figuratively you mean that Judas and Silas carried the letter and delivered it. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sending the following letter with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 22 s6d8 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 23 k6cq figs-metonymy γράψαντες διὰ χειρὸς αὐτῶν 1 Luke does not mean that the apostles and elders ask Judas and Silas to write out this letter for them. Rather, Luke is using the word **hand** you mean that Judas and Silas carried the letter and delivered it. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sending the following letter with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 23 xz3f figs-youdual χειρὸς αὐτῶν 1 Since Luke is referring to two people, it might be more natural in your language to use the dual or plural form here, as your language may require. Alternate translation: “their hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) ACT 15 23 e4g2 οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν 1 The apostles and the elders, brothers, to those throughout Antioch and Syria and Cilicia, who are brothers from among the Gentiles. Greetings This is the introduction of the letter. In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language and culture may have its own way of introducing the author of a letter and saying to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers” -ACT 15 23 kp51 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ…ἀδελφοῖς 1 brothers … brothers The apostles and elders are using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. By doing this, they are assuring the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 23 kp51 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ…ἀδελφοῖς 1 brothers … brothers The apostles and elders are using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. By doing this, they are assuring the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 23 php8 translate-names Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν 1 Cilicia The words **Syria** and **Cilicia** are the names of Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 15 24 g8m9 figs-exclusive ἠκούσαμεν… ἡμῶν…οὐ διεστειλάμεθα 1 Here and in the rest of the letter, by **we** and **us** (and “our”), the apostles and elders mean themselves and probably the rest of the church in Jerusalem, but not the Gentiles to whom they are writing, so use the exclusive forms of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 15 24 p1tl figs-explicit ἐξ ἡμῶν 1 that certain ones The apostles and elders seem to mean implicitly that these people have gone out from their community, but not from among themselves. That is, the word **some** refers to people who were part of the church in Jerusalem would you dear, but who were not apostles or elders. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from our community” or “from here in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 24 hbw5 figs-metonymy λόγοις 1 The apostles and elders are using the term **words** figuratively to mean what the people who have gone out from them have been teaching by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they have been teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 24 hbw5 figs-metonymy λόγοις 1 The apostles and elders are using the term **words** to mean what the people who have gone out from them have been teaching by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they have been teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 24 bxq8 figs-synecdoche ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν 1 to disturb you with teachings that are upsetting your souls The apostles and elders are using one part of the people to home they are writing, their **souls**, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “upsetting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 15 26 gldi figs-explicit ἀνθρώποις παραδεδωκόσι 1 By **men**, the letter implicitly means Paul and Barnabas. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas have handed over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 26 dhj8 figs-metonymy παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 The letter is using the term **souls** figuratively to mean the lives of Paul and Barnabas, by association with the way a living person has a soul. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having handed over their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 26 dinn figs-metaphor παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 The letter is speaking figuratively as if Paul and Barnabas have literally **handed over** their lives. This means that they have been willing to risk their lives. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having put their lives at risk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 15 26 t7vw figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ This is a figurative expression. If your readers might misunderstand it, you could state the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) that the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) that the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 26 dhj8 figs-metonymy παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 The letter is using the term **souls** to mean the lives of Paul and Barnabas, by association with the way a living person has a soul. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having handed over their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 26 dinn figs-metaphor παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 The letter is speaking as if Paul and Barnabas have literally **handed over** their lives. This means that they have been willing to risk their lives. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having put their lives at risk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 26 t7vw figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ This is a figurative expression. If your readers might misunderstand it, you could state the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) that the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) that the **name** of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 27 y972 figs-nominaladj y972 1 The letter is using the adjective **same** as a noun to mean the details of the decision that the apostles and elders have reached. ULT adds **thing** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “confirming that this is our decision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 15 27 xw8l figs-explicit διὰ λόγου 1 they are reporting to you the same thing in words The letter is using the term **word** figuratively to mean “by word of mouth,” that is, “in person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 28 l9z6 figs-metaphor μηδὲν πλέον…βάρος 1 to be laid upon you no greater burden than these necessary things The letter is speaking figuratively of the restrictions it describes as if they were a physical **burden** that the Gentiles would need to carry. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no greater obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 27 xw8l figs-explicit διὰ λόγου 1 they are reporting to you the same thing in words The letter is using the term **word** to mean “by word of mouth,” that is, “in person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 28 l9z6 figs-metaphor μηδὲν πλέον…βάρος 1 to be laid upon you no greater burden than these necessary things The letter is speaking of the restrictions it describes as if they were a physical **burden** that the Gentiles would need to carry. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no greater obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 28 bx90 figs-activepassive μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to lay no greater burden upon you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 29 nt7s figs-nominaladj εἰδωλοθύτων 1 things sacrificed to idols The letter is using the adjective **sacrificed**, with the qualifier **to idols**, as a noun to mean the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols. (ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 15 29 vcc6 figs-explicit αἵματος 1 blood See how you translated this term in [15:20](../15/20.md). Alternate translation: “consuming blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2270,19 +2270,19 @@ ACT 15 30 yl8v figs-explicit τὸ πλῆθος 1 Luke assumes that his reader ACT 15 31 k1mr writing-pronouns ἐχάρησαν 1 they rejoiced The pronoun **they** refers to the believers in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Antioch rejoiced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 15 31 e4gf figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει 1 because of the encouragement If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **encouragement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because they were so encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 15 32 r65l figs-explicit καὶ αὐτοὶ προφῆται ὄντες 1 also being prophets themselves When Luke says **also**, he means implicitly that Judas and Silas were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were [13:1](../13/01.md). You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “who were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 32 e2en figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 15 32 frea figs-metonymy διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ…καὶ ἐπεστήριξαν 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean a message of encouragement that Judas and Silas spoke to the believers in Antioch by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by speaking to them at length to strengthen them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 32 e2en figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 32 frea figs-metonymy διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ…καὶ ἐπεστήριξαν 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean a message of encouragement that Judas and Silas spoke to the believers in Antioch by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by speaking to them at length to strengthen them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 32 j99g figs-metaphor ἐπεστήριξαν 1 strengthened them Luke does not mean that Judas and Silas strengthened the believers physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthened them in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 33 v6im figs-activepassive ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 they were sent away with peace from the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent them away with peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 15 33 wzw4 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 33 wzw4 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 33 xv3h figs-explicit πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς 1 to those who had sent them Luke is referring implicitly to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, who had sent Judas and Silas to Antioch. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “back to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 35 anfc writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened once the church resolved the question about whether the Gentiles needed to obey all the laws of Moses. You language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 15 35 e7s4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 35 e7s4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 35 hnnb writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 15 34 hkh0 translate-textvariants 1 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -ACT 15 36 jjoa figs-idiom μετὰ…τινας ἡμέρας 1 Luke is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “after some time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 15 36 ib2j figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 let us visit the brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 15 36 ua1f figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Paul is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that he and Barnabas shared by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 36 jjoa figs-idiom μετὰ…τινας ἡμέρας 1 Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “after some time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 15 36 ib2j figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 let us visit the brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 36 ua1f figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Paul is using the term **word** to mean the message that he and Barnabas shared by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 36 k08n writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 15 36 y9i9 figs-ellipsis πῶς ἔχουσιν 1 how they are Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation, with no comma preceding: “to see how they are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 15 38 a5nn figs-litotes Παῦλος…ἠξίου…μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον 1 Paul thought it wise not to take along him Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “Paul was thinking it would be foolish to take him with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) @@ -2292,9 +2292,9 @@ ACT 15 40 tt2w figs-abstractnouns τῇ χάριτι 1 If your language does no ACT 15 40 xkjo writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 15 41 cbat writing-pronouns διήρχετο 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was going through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 15 41 e3ym figs-synecdoche διήρχετο 1 he went through Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 15 41 s7yf figs-metonymy ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 Luke is using the term **churches** to refer figuratively to the people associated with the churches.If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 41 s7yf figs-metonymy ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 Luke is using the term **churches** to refer to the people associated with the churches.If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 41 tbv3 figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 strengthening the churches Luke does not mean that Paul and Silas strengthened the people of the churches physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes

\r\r## Structure and formatting\r\r- Verses 1–5 describe how Paul began his second missionary journey and met Timothy and brought him along with him.\r- Verses 6–12 describe how the Holy Spirit led Paul and his companions to share the gospel in the city of Philippi\r- Verses 13–40 describe how Paul and Silas made disciples in Philippi, delivered a young woman from an evil spirit, and were imprisoned but miraculously released. \r\rActs [16:5](../16/05.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the fourth major part of the book.\r\r## Special concepts in this chapter

\r\r### Timothy’s circumcision

\r\rPaul circumcised Timothy because he and Silas were telling the message of Jesus to Jews as well as to Gentiles. Many Jews would have been so offended that Timothy was not circumcised, even though his mother was Jewish, that they would not have listened to the message. Paul felt that he could have Timothy circumcised as a discretionary matter to remove an offense to hearing the gospel, even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Gentile believers did not have to be circumcised.

\r +ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes

## Structure and formatting- Verses 1–5 describe how Paul began his second missionary journey and met Timothy and brought him along with him.- Verses 6–12 describe how the Holy Spirit led Paul and his companions to share the gospel in the city of Philippi- Verses 13–40 describe how Paul and Silas made disciples in Philippi, delivered a young woman from an evil spirit, and were imprisoned but miraculously released. Acts [16:5](../16/05.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the fourth major part of the book.## Special concepts in this chapter

### Timothy’s circumcision

Paul circumcised Timothy because he and Silas were telling the message of Jesus to Jews as well as to Gentiles. Many Jews would have been so offended that Timothy was not circumcised, even though his mother was Jewish, that they would not have listened to the message. Paul felt that he could have Timothy circumcised as a discretionary matter to remove an offense to hearing the gospel, even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Gentile believers did not have to be circumcised.

ACT 16 1 m5tb figs-synecdoche κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas also came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 1 rhut figs-idiom κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Derbe and Lystra because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Paul likely travel by sea from Syria to Cilicia, and Luke is saying that he then also went to Derbe and to Lystra. Alternate translation: “he also traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 1 km5q figs-go κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Paul also came down If you retain the idiom, it may be more natural in your language to say “went” rather than **came**. Alternate translation: “he also went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -2305,7 +2305,7 @@ ACT 16 1 l0w5 translate-names Τιμόθεος 1 The word **Timothy** is the na ACT 16 1 wxl8 figs-ellipsis γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς 1 a believing Jewish woman By **believing**, Luke implicitly means believing in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 1 vh73 figs-idiom πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 Luke is describing Timothy’s father in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “but whose father was Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 2 t1lu figs-activepassive ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν Λύστροις καὶ Ἰκονίῳ ἀδελφῶν. 1 He was well spoken of by the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Alternate translation: “The brothers in Lystra and Iconium spoke well of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 2 rez2 figs-metaphor ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 by the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 2 rez2 figs-metaphor ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 by the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 3 p6z8 figs-explicit περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν 1 he circumcised him It is possible that Paul himself **circumcised** Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise him.You can include that information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “he had him circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 3 bdd6 writing-pronouns τοῦτον 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 16 3 za93 figs-explicit διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις 1 because of the Jews who were in those places By **those places**, Luke implicitly means the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2320,7 +2320,7 @@ ACT 16 6 g97e translate-names τὴν Φρυγίαν…Γαλατικὴν χώ ACT 16 6 qk0k figs-infostructure τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν 1 Paul, Silas, and Timothy actually had to go through Galatia in order to reach Phrygia, so it might be more natural to put the information about Galatia first. Alternate translation: “the Galatian region and Phrygia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 16 6 ue3k figs-activepassive κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 6 d56g figs-extrainfo κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 Since Luke explains shortly after this that the Holy Spirit actually wanted Paul, Silas, and Timothy to share the good news about Jesus in two other regions, you do not need to explain here why the Holy Spirit forbade them to share the good news at this time in the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -ACT 16 6 h4u4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 6 h4u4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 7 b1xq translate-names Μυσίαν…Βιθυνίαν 1 Mysia … Bithynia The words **Mysia** and **Bithynia** are the names of two more regions in Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 7 b539 figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ 1 the Spirit of Jesus Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **the Spirit of Jesus**, he means the Holy Spirit. You can use that name instead if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 8 s6l1 figs-idiom κατέβησαν 1 they came down to the city of Troas Luke says that Paul, Silas, and Timothy **came down** to Troas because that city is lower in elevation than Mysia. Alternate translation: “they traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2340,11 +2340,11 @@ ACT 16 12 thk7 figs-explicit κολωνία 1 Luke assumes that his readers wil ACT 16 12 tl9f figs-explicit κολωνία 1 a colony In the Roman empire, a **colony** was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. This information will become important later in the story. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony, where Roman citizens had special rights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 14 n952 writing-participants τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία…ἤκουεν 1 a certain woman named Lydia Luke is using the phrase **a certain woman** to introduce **Lydia** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia … who was listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 16 14 se6e translate-names Λυδία 1 The word **Lydia** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 16 14 qj86 figs-metonymy πορφυρόπωλις 1 a seller of purple Luke is figuratively using the color of **purple** cloth to mean the cloth itself by association. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a seller of purple cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 14 qj86 figs-metonymy πορφυρόπωλις 1 a seller of purple Luke is using the color of **purple** cloth to mean the cloth itself by association. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a seller of purple cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 14 c6n8 translate-names Θυατείρων 1 of Thyatira The word **Thyatira** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 14 cyk3 figs-idiom σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν 1 worshiping God Here the expression **worshiping God** means the same thing as the expression “fearing God,” which Jews in the time of the New Testament used to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated “fearing God” in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 16 14 rd4r figs-metaphor ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 of whom the Lord opened the heart to pay attention to Luke is speaking figuratively as if the Lord physically **opened** Lydia’s heart to receive the message that Paul was sharing. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 16 14 s9ju figs-metonymy whose heart the Lord opened 1 opened the heart Here, the **heart** figuratively represents a person’s will and disposition. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 14 rd4r figs-metaphor ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 of whom the Lord opened the heart to pay attention to Luke is speaking as if the Lord physically **opened** Lydia’s heart to receive the message that Paul was sharing. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 14 s9ju figs-metonymy whose heart the Lord opened 1 opened the heart Here, the **heart** represents a person’s will and disposition. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 15 f38e figs-explicit ὡς…ἐβαπτίσθη 1 The implication is that Lydia believed in Jesus and then was baptized. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when she believed in Jesus and was baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 14 a74y figs-activepassive τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου 1 what was being said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 15 g7e9 figs-activepassive ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη 1 And when she was baptized, and her household If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is likely from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “when Paul baptized her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2356,27 +2356,27 @@ ACT 16 15 xnkk figs-imperative εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὸν οἶκό ACT 16 15 hkh3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Luke is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 16 ufy4 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 16 16 y1gc writing-participants παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν 1 a certain young female slave Luke is using the phrase **a certain young female slave** to introduce this woman as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a certain young female slave who had a Python spirit and who met us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 16 16 ymt9 figs-metonymy πνεῦμα Πύθωνα 1 a spirit of divination Luke is figuratively describing the **spirit** that enabled this woman to tell fortunes by association with the Pythian serpent that the ancient Greeks believed to have guarded the oracle at Delphi. This was not an actual god named Python, it was a demonic spirit. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spirit of divination” or “a demonic spirit that enabled her to tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 16 h2c5 translate-names Πύθωνα 1 The word **Python** is the name of a pagan god. However, Luke is using the name figuratively here by association to mean a demonic spirit of divination. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 16 17 tni9 figs-metaphor ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 the way of salvation This woman is speaking figuratively as if **salvation** were a **way** or path that people walked on. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how you can receive salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 16 ymt9 figs-metonymy πνεῦμα Πύθωνα 1 a spirit of divination Luke is describing the **spirit** that enabled this woman to tell fortunes by association with the Pythian serpent that the ancient Greeks believed to have guarded the oracle at Delphi. This was not an actual god named Python, it was a demonic spirit. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spirit of divination” or “a demonic spirit that enabled her to tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 16 h2c5 translate-names Πύθωνα 1 The word **Python** is the name of a pagan god. However, Luke is using the name here by association to mean a demonic spirit of divination. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 16 17 tni9 figs-metaphor ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 the way of salvation This woman is speaking as if **salvation** were a **way** or path that people walked on. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how you can receive salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 17 gsbj figs-abstractnouns ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation, as in UST: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 16 18 lj79 figs-activepassive διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας 1 But Paul, being greatly annoyed and turning If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “she greatly annoyed Paul, so he turned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 18 qi1k figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Here the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 18 qi1k figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 18 u4z8 figs-idiom ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 it came out that same hour In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, term does not mean a literal hour of sixty minutes, it means the shortest time imaginable. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it came out that instant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 19 r1a1 figs-explicit ἰδόντες…οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς, ὅτι ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν 1 when her masters saw that their hope of profit was gone The implication is that the **masters** could no longer **profit** from the woman because she could no longer tell fortunes. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when her masters saw that their hope of profit had gone because their young female slave could no longer tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 19 bws7 translate-unknown εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 1 into the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. If you have a term in your language for such an area, you can use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “into the public square” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 16 19 hf82 figs-explicit ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας 1 before the authorities The implication is that the masters of the young female slave brought Paul and Silas **to the rulers** in order to charge them with a crime and have them punished. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the rulers so that they would judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 20 wn77 figs-metonymy ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 The masters of the slave girl are referring figuratively to the people of the city by association with the city itself. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of our city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 20 wn77 figs-metonymy ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 The masters of the slave girl are referring to the people of the city by association with the city itself. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of our city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 20 dkz2 figs-exclusive οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 These men are stirring up our city The masters of the slave girl are using the pronoun **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 21 gna6 figs-doublet παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν 1 to accept nor to practice The terms **accept** and **practice** mean similar things. The crowd in Philippi is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “practice at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 16 21 vmp0 translate-names Ῥωμαίοις 1 Here the word **Romans** is a name for people who are citizens of the Roman Empire. Alternate translation: “Roman citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 16 22 f03y figs-metaphor συνεπέστη ὁ ὄχλος 1 Luke is speaking figuratively as if the crowd in Philippi literally **rose up** against Paul and Silas. He means that the people in the crowd became hostile to them and began shouting their own accusations against them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the crowd became hostile and shouted further accusations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 22 f03y figs-metaphor συνεπέστη ὁ ὄχλος 1 Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Philippi literally **rose up** against Paul and Silas. He means that the people in the crowd became hostile to them and began shouting their own accusations against them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the crowd became hostile and shouted further accusations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 22 r1gr writing-pronouns αὐτῶν…αὐτῶν…ἐκέλευον 1 The pronouns **them** and **their** refer to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas … their … commanded Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 16 22 at6i figs-activepassive ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν 1 commanding them to be beaten with rods If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanded soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 23 dsr3 figs-idiom πολλάς…ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς 1 when they had laid many blows upon them This is an idiomatic expression. If your readers would misunderstand it, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having hit them many times with the rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 16 23 la4h figs-metaphor ἔβαλον εἰς φυλακήν 1 Luke is speaking figuratively when he says that the rulers **threw them into prison**. They did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “they confined Paul and Silas in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 23 la4h figs-metaphor ἔβαλον εἰς φυλακήν 1 Luke is speaking when he says that the rulers **threw them into prison**. They did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “they confined Paul and Silas in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 24 jug6 translate-unknown ξύλον 1 stocks The word **stocks** describes a wooden frame with holes to hold a person’s feet and prevent them from moving. UST models a good way of describing **stocks** for readers who are not familiar with them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 16 24 z12w figs-metaphor ἔβαλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν ἐσωτέραν φυλακὴν 1 Luke is speaking figuratively when he says that the jailer **threw them into the inner prison**. He did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “confined Paul and Silas to the inner prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 24 z12w figs-metaphor ἔβαλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν ἐσωτέραν φυλακὴν 1 Luke is speaking when he says that the jailer **threw them into the inner prison**. He did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “confined Paul and Silas to the inner prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 26 q7z1 figs-activepassive σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 a great earthquake happened, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 26 m4ye figs-synecdoche σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 the foundations of the prison Luke is using one part of the prison, its **foundations**, to refer to the entire prison in the state of being **shaken**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a shaking that began in the prison’s foundations shook the entire prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 26 s6mu figs-activepassive ἠνεῴχθησαν…αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι 1 all the doors were opened If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2393,35 +2393,35 @@ ACT 16 31 m801 writing-pronouns οἱ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul and ACT 16 31 f104 figs-imperative πίστευσον 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates an encouraging invitation rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such an invitation. Alternate translation: “If you believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 16 31 br4k figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 you will be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 31 w8ed figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκός σου 1 your household Here, **your household** refers to all the people who lived in the jailer’s house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 they spoke the word of the Lord to him Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul and Silas had come to Philippi to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 they spoke the word of the Lord to him Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Silas had come to Philippi to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 32 ftg1 writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) -ACT 16 33 gied figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Luke is using the term **hour** figuratively to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time in the night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 16 33 gied figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Luke is using the term **hour** to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time in the night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 33 r3la figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη 1 he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was Paul and Silas who baptized the jailer and his family. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 35 lb4z writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a significant development in this story. Here Luke tells the last part of the story that started in [16:16](../16/16.md). Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development in a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -ACT 16 34 v5fy figs-metonymy παρέθηκεν τράπεζαν 1 Luke is referring figuratively to a meal by association with the way, in this culture, a meal was served at a **table**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he set a meal before them” or “he served them a meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 36 qrw0 figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους 1 Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to mean the message that the officers whom the magistrates sent communicated by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 34 v5fy figs-metonymy παρέθηκεν τράπεζαν 1 Luke is referring to a meal by association with the way, in this culture, a meal was served at a **table**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he set a meal before them” or “he served them a meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 36 qrw0 figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους 1 Luke is using the term **words** to mean the message that the officers whom the magistrates sent communicated by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 36 f76u figs-imperative ἐξελθόντες, πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 The word **go** is an imperative, but it communicates permission rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates permission. Alternate translation: “you may come out of the jail and go in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 16 36 noc2 figs-abstractnouns πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “go peacefully” or “go without being concerned that the authorities will trouble you any further” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 16 37 b4jm figs-explicit πρὸς αὐτούς 1 said to them The implication is that the officers whom the magistrates sent had come into the prison with the jailer. That is why Luke says **them** and not just **him**, meaning the jailer. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the officers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 37 xmqz writing-pronouns αὐτούς…ἔβαλαν… ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν…ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the officers whom the magistrates sent to the prison, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refer to the magistrates. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the officers … the magistrates threw us … they cast us out … let the magistrates lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 16 37 v4yk figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἔβαλαν…ἡμᾶς…ἡμᾶς 1 By **us**, Paul means himself and Silas but not the officers to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 37 qq1u figs-rquestion δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ, ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν καὶ νῦν λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? 1 they cast us out secretly? No indeed! Paul is using the question form to protest that what the magistrates want to do is not just or fair. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The magistrates beat us in public without trial, men being Romans, and then they threw us into prison; I will not allow them, after doing that, to cast us out secretly!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 16 37 b7cc figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 They have beaten us in public The magistrates did not do this themselves. They ordered soldiers to do it. Paul is speaking figuratively of the magistrates, some of the people who were involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “having ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 16 37 b7cc figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 They have beaten us in public The magistrates did not do this themselves. They ordered soldiers to do it. Paul is speaking of the magistrates, some of the people who were involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “having ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 37 v1fd translate-names ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας 1 Here the word **Romans** is a name for people who are citizens of the Roman Empire. Alternate translation: “even though we are Roman citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 37 b5a3 figs-ellipsis οὔ γάρ 1 Paul is using an expression that leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “No, for they will not do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 16 37 jr2j figs-rpronouns ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ 1 Instead, coming themselves Paul is using the reflexive pronoun **themselves** for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “let them come in person and lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 16 37 sw3a figs-imperative3p ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they come themselves and lead us out” or “they should come themselves and lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 16 37 x82d figs-extrainfo ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 It is likely that Paul wanted the magistrates to bring him and Silas out of prison, which would effectively be an apology for mistreatment, so that the believers in Philippi would have the protection of the law even after Paul and his companions left the city. However, this is more a matter of interpretation than of implied information, so it would probably be best not to put an explanation of it in your translation. You can leave it to teachers and preachers of the Bible to explain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -ACT 16 38 ldfi figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what Paul said to the officers by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Paul had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 38 ldfi figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean what Paul said to the officers by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Paul had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 38 ym2u figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans Roman citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. So the implication is that the magistrates were **terrified** that more important Roman authorities might learn how they had mistreated Paul and Silas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard that they were Roman citizens, because as magistrates they were supposed to make sure that citizens were not tortured and received fair trials, and they were concerned that more important authorities would punish them for the way they had treated Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 38 lqs5 figs-quotations ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard, ‘They are Romans!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 16 38 vle2 translate-names Ῥωμαῖοί 1 Here the word **Romans** is a name for people who are citizens of the Roman Empire. Alternate translation: “Roman citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 39 q59h writing-pronouns παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς…ἐξαγαγόντες, ἠρώτων 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the magistrates, and the pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the magistrates entreated Paul and Silas … bringing them out, the magistrates were asking Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 16 39 a7yq figs-explicit παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς 1 Luke means implicitly that the magistrates **entreated** or begged Paul and Silas not to make any protest about how they had been treated. In effect, they apologized to them and asked them to overlook the offense. Alternate translation: “they apologized to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 40 y14i writing-endofstory δὲ  1 Luke uses the word **So** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the imprisonment of Paul and Silas. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 16 40 ylk9 figs-metonymy τὴν Λυδίαν 1 the house of Lydia Luke is referring figuratively to the house of **Lydia** by association with the name of the woman who lived there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they came to the house of Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 40 ylk9 figs-metonymy τὴν Λυδίαν 1 the house of Lydia Luke is referring to the house of **Lydia** by association with the name of the woman who lived there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they came to the house of Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 40 t1pf figs-go εἰσῆλθον 1 they came to the house of Lydia In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had seen the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had seen the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 40 qs0x figs-synecdoche καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Luke says that **they … went out**, meaning Paul and Silas, to refer to those two men and to Timothy, who was still traveling with them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and then Paul and Silas and Timothy left Philippi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 40 gld6 figs-explicit καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Since Luke says **they … went out**, not “we went out,” the implication is that Luke remained in Philippi for a time, likely to strengthen and encourage the new believers there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

- Verses 1–9 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Thessalonica.
- Verses 10–14 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Berea.
Verses 15–34 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Athens.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The religion of Athens

Paul said that the people in the city of Athens were “religious,” but this did not mean that they worshiped the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples, and they had begun to worship the gods of the peoples they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

As Paul spoke to the philosophers in Athens, he told the message of Christ for the first time to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament. @@ -2431,38 +2431,38 @@ ACT 17 1 yj66 translate-names Θεσσαλονίκην 1 they came to Thessaloni ACT 17 1 o19x figs-explicitinfo συναγωγὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 It might seem that the expression **a synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “a synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 17 2 mkn6 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς…αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers the Jews who attended the synagogue in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 17 3 lt8q figs-hendiadys διανοίγων καὶ παρατιθέμενος 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two expressions connected with **and**. The phrase **fully opening them** tells how Paul was **demonstrating** from the Scriptures that Jesus is the Messiah. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “demonstrating by opening the Scriptures fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -ACT 17 3 ir9q figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 He is fully opening Luke is speaking figuratively as if Paul had been literally **opening** the Scriptures **fully**, as by unrolling a scroll, so that the Jews in the synagogue could understand them. Luke means that Paul was explaining the Scriptures thoroughly. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “explaining them thoroughly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 3 ipb2 figs-idiom ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise Luke is using the word **rise** idiomatically to mean that Jesus came back to life again after he died. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 17 3 ir9q figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 He is fully opening Luke is speaking as if Paul had been literally **opening** the Scriptures **fully**, as by unrolling a scroll, so that the Jews in the synagogue could understand them. Luke means that Paul was explaining the Scriptures thoroughly. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “explaining them thoroughly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 3 ipb2 figs-idiom ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise Luke is using the word **rise** to mean that Jesus came back to life again after he died. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 17 3 b9qi figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Luke is using the adjective **dead** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 17 4 es2u figs-activepassive τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν 1 some from them were persuaded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 4 t21z figs-idiom τῶν…σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων 1 of worshiping Greeks Here the expression **worshiping God** describes Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated the expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 17 4 ye8v figs-litotes οὐκ ὀλίγαι 1 not a few of the leading women Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 17 5 clcz figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 5 ie1f translate-unknown τῶν ἀγοραίων 1 of the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. See how you translated this term in [16:20](../16/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 17 5 t3bc figs-metonymy τὴν πόλιν 1 they set the city in an uproar The word **city** figuratively represents the people of the city. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 5 t3bc figs-metonymy τὴν πόλιν 1 they set the city in an uproar The word **city** represents the people of the city. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 5 w94p figs-explicit Ἰάσονος 1 Luke does not tell us anything further about this **Jason**, but the implication is that the Jewish leaders believed that Paul and Silas were staying in his home. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jason, where they believed Paul and Silas were staying,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 5 ks2l translate-names Ἰάσονος 1 of Jason The word **Jason** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 5 abcu writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 to lead them The pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 17 6 i79p figs-metaphor τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 6 x90b figs-hyperbole οἱ τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 The Jewish leaders are figuratively exaggerating the influence of Paul and Silas and their teaching. Alternate translation: “These men who have caused trouble wherever they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 17 6 i79p figs-metaphor τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 6 x90b figs-hyperbole οἱ τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 The Jewish leaders are exaggerating the influence of Paul and Silas and their teaching. Alternate translation: “These men who have caused trouble wherever they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 8 ixmb writing-pronouns ἐτάραξαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish leaders in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 17 9 ya44 translate-unknown τὸ ἱκανὸν 1 after they had received a bond from Jason and the rest of them A **bond** was an amount of money that the city officials required Jason and the rest of the believers to pay as a guarantee of good behavior. The city officials would return the money if those men did not cause any further trouble. Your language and culture may have a term that you can use in your translation for this kind of monetary guarantee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 17 9 eq4y writing-pronouns ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the city officials, and the pronoun **them** refers to Jason and the other believers. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the city officials released them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 17 10 qy5c figs-metaphor οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 10 qy5c figs-metaphor οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 10 z39h translate-names Βέροιαν 1 The word **Berea** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 10 m75m figs-explicitinfo τὴν συναγωγὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 It might seem that the expression **the synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 17 11 k2st writing-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about the Jews in Berea to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 17 11 alq1 writing-pronouns οὗτοι…τῶν ἐν Θεσσαλονίκῃ 1 Luke is using the demonstrative pronoun **these** to refer to the Jews in Berea and the demonstrative pronoun **those** to refer to the Jews in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in Berea … the Jews in Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 17 11 gu6s figs-metonymy εὐγενέστεροι 1 these were more open-minded than Luke is using the word **noble**, which literally describes a person of a certain lineage, figuratively to mean the gracious behavior that should characterize people of that lineage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more gracious” or “more considerate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 17 11 hle3 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 received the word Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Paul was sharing by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 11 gu6s figs-metonymy εὐγενέστεροι 1 these were more open-minded than Luke is using the word **noble**, which literally describes a person of a certain lineage, to mean the gracious behavior that should characterize people of that lineage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more gracious” or “more considerate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 11 hle3 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 received the word Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Paul was sharing by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 11 uh8a figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας 1 with all readiness Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great readiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 11 qrnm figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was showing the Bereans from the Scriptures that Jesus was the Messiah, just as Paul did for the Thessalonians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 11 g8an εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως 1 these things were so Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to find out whether these things might be so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 17 12 abcv figs-litotes ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι 1 not a few men Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 17 13 ybos figs-activepassive καὶ…κατηγγέλη ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was also proclaiming the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 17 13 dijk figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 13 dijk figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 13 wjq3 figs-doublet σαλεύοντες καὶ ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 troubled the crowds The terms **exciting** and **troubling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “greatly upsetting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 14 zw1c figs-explicitinfo ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 to go as far as to the sea It might seem that the expression **as far as to the sea** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “to the seacoast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 17 15 vn8h translate-names Ἀθηνῶν 1 The word **Athens** is the name of one of the most important cities in ancient Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 15 gs1p figs-quotations πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον, ἵνα ὡς τάχιστα ἔλθωσιν πρὸς αὐτὸν, ἐξῄεσαν 1 after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “to Silas and Timothy, ‘Come to me as quickly as possible!’ they departed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -2470,7 +2470,7 @@ ACT 17 16 y9cr writing-background δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated ACT 17 16 wk63 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Silas and Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Silas and Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 17 16 u2th grammar-connect-logic-result παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “when he saw that the city was full of idols, his spirit was provoked within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 17 16 s011 figs-activepassive παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this provoked his spirit within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 17 16 we78 figs-metonymy παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols Here the **spirit** figuratively represents a person’s feelings and sensitivities, particularly of a spiritual nature. Alternate translation: “this offended his spiritual sensitivities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 16 we78 figs-metonymy παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols Here the **spirit** represents a person’s feelings and sensitivities, particularly of a spiritual nature. Alternate translation: “this offended his spiritual sensitivities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 17 jkj8 figs-idiom τοῖς σεβομένοις 1 those who were worshiping See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “the Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 17 17 ec14 translate-unknown ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 in the marketplace See how you translated the similar expression in [16:19](../16/19.md). Alternate translation: “in the public square” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 17 18 ru6a writing-pronouns αὐτῷ…δοκεῖ…εὐηγγελίζετο 1 The pronouns **him**, **He**, and **he** all refer to Paul.It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with Paul…He seems…Paul was proclaiming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -2479,12 +2479,12 @@ ACT 17 18 f976 translate-names Στοϊκῶν 1 Stoic philosophers The word **S ACT 17 18 g4bv figs-idiom ὁ σπερμολόγος 1 What is this babbler wanting to say? These Athenian philosophers are using a common expression in their culture that refers negatively to a person who only knows little bits of information. The expression depicts a person picking up words or ideas the way a bird picks up seeds. The philosophers are saying that Paul has only a few bits of information that are not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “uneducated person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 18 sx9t figs-explicit ξένων δαιμονίων 1 of foreign gods Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the Athenian philosphers misunderstood Paul and thought that he was introducing two new **gods** that the Greeks and Romans had not known about before, Jesus and Anastasis (the Greek word for resurrection). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of two new gods, Jesus and Anastasis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 19 unc8 translate-transliterate Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 Areopagus The word **Areopagus** means “Hill of Ares” in Greek. It was named after the pagan god whose name was Ares in Greek and Mars in Latin. Luke does not explain the meaning of this word, since his readers already understand Greek. ULT spells this name the way it sounds in English. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. You could also translate the meaning of the word and use the name “Mars Hill,” as UST does. Or you could spell the word the way it sounds and then explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Mars Hill” or “the Areopagus, that is, Mars Hill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) -ACT 17 19 b56g figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 to the Areopagus Luke most likely means that the philosophers from the marketplace brought Paul to meet the main group of philosophers on the Areopagus, not that they just brought Paul to the hill itself. Luke would be using the word **Areopagus** figuratively by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. Alternate translation: “to the philosophers who met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 19 b56g figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 to the Areopagus Luke most likely means that the philosophers from the marketplace brought Paul to meet the main group of philosophers on the Areopagus, not that they just brought Paul to the hill itself. Luke would be using the word **Areopagus** by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. Alternate translation: “to the philosophers who met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 19 aciu figs-rquestion δυνάμεθα γνῶναι τίς ἡ καινὴ αὕτη, ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη, διδαχή? 1 This is not actually a rhetorical question, since the philosophers really do want to know whether Paul is willing to explain himself more fully to the group at the Areopagus. However, if in your language it might seem to be a rhetorical question, you could translate it as a statement instead. Alternate translation: “We would like to know what this new teaching is that is being spoken by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 17 19 g9gb figs-exclusive δυνάμεθα 1 By **we**, the philosophers mean themselves, but Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 19 n250 figs-activepassive ἡ ὑπὸ σοῦ λαλουμένη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you are speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 17 20 lay8 figs-metaphor ξενίζοντα…τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 For you are bringing some strange things to our ears The philosophers are speaking figuratively of Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection as if they were objets that one person could bring to another person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are saying some startling things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 20 us7g figs-metonymy ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 The philosophers are referring figuratively to hearing by association with the **ears** that people use to hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are hearing you say some startling things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 20 lay8 figs-metaphor ξενίζοντα…τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 For you are bringing some strange things to our ears The philosophers are speaking of Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection as if they were objets that one person could bring to another person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are saying some startling things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 20 us7g figs-metonymy ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 The philosophers are referring to hearing by association with the **ears** that people use to hear. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are hearing you say some startling things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 20 fs5g figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…βουλόμεθα 1 By **our** and **we**, the philosophers mean themselves, but Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 20 fe4p figs-idiom τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι 1 The philosophers are using an idiom. Your language may have a similar idiom that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what these things mean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 17 21 ujgi writing-background δὲ 1 Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce background information about the people of Athens that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -2493,7 +2493,7 @@ ACT 17 21 d8yb translate-names Ἀθηναῖοι 1 the Athenians The word ** At ACT 17 21 ij4e figs-hyperbole εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν 1 spent their time in nothing other than Here, Luke says **nothing other** as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “were devoting great amounts of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 21 wr1r figs-explicit τι καινότερον 1 to tell something or to listen to something new This could mean: (1) that the implication is that the Athenians were looking for something **newer** than the last new thing they had said or heard. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “something newer than the last new thing they had said or heard” (2) that Luke may be using the comparative form **newer** with simple positive meaning. Alternate translation: “something new” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 22 k5dy figs-activepassive σταθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου ἔφη 1 If your language does not use the passive form **having been stood**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once the philosophers had stood Paul in the middle of the Areopagus, he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 17 22 zq3y figs-metonymy ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου 1 As in [17:19](../17/19.md), Luke is the word **Areopagus** figuratively by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. He does not mean that the philosophers placed Paul in the middle of the hill known as the Areopagus. Alternate translation: “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on the Areopagus” or “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on Mars Hill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 22 zq3y figs-metonymy ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ Ἀρείου Πάγου 1 As in [17:19](../17/19.md), Luke is the word **Areopagus** by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. He does not mean that the philosophers placed Paul in the middle of the hill known as the Areopagus. Alternate translation: “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on the Areopagus” or “in the middle of the group of philosophers who met on Mars Hill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 22 h5et figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “You Athenians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 17 22 kcag δεισιδαιμονεστέρους 1 Paul is using the comparative form **more religious** for emphasis. Your language may use comparative forms in the same way. If not, you could convey the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “very religious” ACT 17 22 ja1k figs-hyperbole κατὰ πάντα 1 very religious in every way Paul says **everything** here as a generalization for emphasis. He is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in many different ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -2501,17 +2501,17 @@ ACT 17 23 cem7 figs-quotesinquotes βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο ACT 17 23 nmwv figs-quotemarks βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this as a direct quotation if possible, since it is the inscription on the altar that Paul is describing. You may be able to enclose this quotation in second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate a second-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 17 23 t3mu figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “on which someone had inscribed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 24 f2mz figs-merism οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς 1 of heaven and earth Paul is referring to all of creation by naming its two major components. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of everything that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -ACT 17 24 ju4h figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις ναοῖς 1 built with hands Paul is figuratively using one part of a person, the **hand**, to represent all of a person in the act of building. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “temples that humans have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 17 24 ju4h figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις ναοῖς 1 built with hands Paul is using one part of a person, the **hand**, to represent all of a person in the act of building. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “temples that humans have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 25 e3dg figs-activepassive ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται 1 Neither is he served by hands of men If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do hands of men care for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 25 cqri προσδεόμενός τινος 1 Alternate translation: “as if he needed anything” -ACT 17 25 yq68 figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 1 by hands of men Paul is figuratively using one part of a person, the **hands**, to represent all of a person in the act of supposedly caring for God. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 17 25 yq68 figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 1 by hands of men Paul is using one part of a person, the **hands**, to represent all of a person in the act of supposedly caring for God. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 25 sj89 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς διδοὺς 1 himself giving Paul is using the word **himself** for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 17 25 zv8x figs-doublet ζωὴν, καὶ πνοὴν 1 The terms **life** and **breath** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “existence itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 17 25 sw8d figs-explicit πᾶσι 1 By **all**, Paul implicitly means “all people.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 26 p1e4 figs-explicit ἑνὸς 1 one man By **one**, Paul implicitly means “one man.” He means Adam, the first person God created. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “one man” or “Adam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 26 cnbu figs-gendernotations πᾶν ἔθνος ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “every nation of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 17 27 s2xs figs-explicit ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν 1 Paul means implicitly that God did the things he described in the previous verse, giving the nations of humanity particular times to live in particular places, so that they would **seek** him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “God did this so that people would seek him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 17 27 jae5 figs-metaphor ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν 1 to seek God and perhaps they might feel around for him and find him Paul is speaking figuratively as if people could **feel around for** God and **find him** that way. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might sincerely try to know God and come to know him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 27 jae5 figs-metaphor ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν 1 to seek God and perhaps they might feel around for him and find him Paul is speaking as if people could **feel around for** God and **find him** that way. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might sincerely try to know God and come to know him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 27 p8hk figs-litotes οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ 1 Yet he is not far from each one of us Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “close to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 17 27 onm4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 28 tkd3 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ… γένος 1 General Information: The pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “in God…{God’s} offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -2520,10 +2520,10 @@ ACT 17 28 jxph figs-quotesinquotes ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ ACT 17 28 rpaz figs-quotemarks ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present these two quotations as direct quotations if possible, since that would show that Paul is quoting Greek poets as he speaks to the philosophers in Athens. You may be able to enclose these quotations within second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate second-level quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 17 28 ii2n figs-doublet ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν 1 The expressions **live** and **are moved** and **are** mean similar things. Epimenides is using the three terms together for poetic effect. It would be good to preserve that effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the same idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “he is the source of our entire existence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 17 28 cbd9 figs-activepassive ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν 1 For in him If your language does not use the passive form **are moved**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he is the one in whom we live and who moves us and in whom we exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 17 28 lil5 figs-metaphor τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν. 1 Aratus and Cleanthes do not mean that people are literally God’s **offspring** or children. They are speaking figuratively and poetically. It would be good to preserve the poetic effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “For it is as if we too are his offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 29 k9ws figs-metaphor γένος…ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 are God’s offspring Paul is speaking figuratively as if people were literally God’s **offspring** or children. He means that God created people and they are his creatures. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “being like God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 28 lil5 figs-metaphor τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν. 1 Aratus and Cleanthes do not mean that people are literally God’s **offspring** or children. They are speaking and poetically. It would be good to preserve the poetic effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “For it is as if we too are his offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 29 k9ws figs-metaphor γένος…ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 are God’s offspring Paul is speaking as if people were literally God’s **offspring** or children. He means that God created people and they are his creatures. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “being like God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 29 czi9 figs-nominaladj τὸ θεῖον 1 the divine being Paul is using the adjective **Divine** as a noun to mean God, who is divine. ULT capitalizes the word to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 17 29 xfp9 figs-metonymy χρυσῷ, ἢ ἀργύρῳ, ἢ λίθῳ 1 Paul is referring figuratively to idols by association with the materials out of which people made idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to idols made of gold or silver or stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 29 xfp9 figs-metonymy χρυσῷ, ἢ ἀργύρῳ, ἢ λίθῳ 1 Paul is referring to idols by association with the materials out of which people made idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to idols made of gold or silver or stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 29 q4q2 figs-possession χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου 1 images of the skill and imagination of man Paul is using the possessive form not to mean images that resemble human **skill** and **imagination** but to describe the qualities that people use to create **images** or idols. Alternate translation: “images that people create by using their skill and imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 17 29 gnk6 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπου 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 17 30 h8uy figs-possession χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας 1 times of ignorance Paul is using the possessive form here not to describe **times** that were themselves ignorant but **times** when people were characterized by spiritual **ignorance**. Paul is referring to the times before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God. Alternate translation: “the times when people were ignorant of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -2545,7 +2545,7 @@ ACT 17 32 jlm5 ἀκούσαντες 1 when they heard of These are the people ACT 17 32 sn6j οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον 1 some mocked him These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul” ACT 17 34 psh8 translate-names Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης 1 Dionysius the Areopagite The word **Dionysius** is the name of a man. The word **Areopagite** is the name for someone who was a member of a council of rulers and judges that met on the Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 34 hsz3 translate-names Δάμαρις 1 Damaris The word **Damaris** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes

\r\r## Structure and formatting

\r\r- Verses 1–17 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Corinth.\r- Verses 18–23 describe how Paul returned to Antioch and then started out on another missionary journey.\r- Verses 24–28 describe how a man named Apollos became an effective preacher of the gospel.\r\r## Special concepts in this chapter

\r\r### The baptism of John

Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but that kind of baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])\r +ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

- Verses 1–17 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Corinth.- Verses 18–23 describe how Paul returned to Antioch and then started out on another missionary journey.- Verses 24–28 describe how a man named Apollos became an effective preacher of the gospel.## Special concepts in this chapter

### The baptism of John

Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but that kind of baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]]) ACT 18 1 fky7 writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things Luke is using the phrase **After these things** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 18 1 abcw writing-pronouns ἦλθεν 1 having departed The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 18 1 h2si translate-names Κόρινθον 1 Athens The word **Corinth** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2561,19 +2561,19 @@ ACT 18 2 db3t translate-names τῆς Ῥώμης 1 The word **Rome** is the na ACT 18 5 r56h 0 General Information: Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul. ACT 18 5 btkg figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 Luke says that Silas and Timothy **came down** to Corinth because that city is lower in elevation than Macedonia. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 5 rjl6 figs-activepassive συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 18 5 vwj1 figs-personification συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 Luke speaks of **the word** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could constrain Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ACT 18 5 bsgm figs-metonymy συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean preaching the message about Jesus by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 5 vwj1 figs-personification συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 Luke speaks of **the word** as if it were a living thing that could constrain Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 18 5 bsgm figs-metonymy συνείχετο τῷ λόγῳ ὁ Παῦλος 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean preaching the message about Jesus by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul felt urgently that he needed to devote himself to preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 6 ncx8 translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια 1 shaking out his garment This symbolic action was an expression of strong rejection in this culture. It showed that someone did not want even the dust of a place, in this case the synagogue, to remain on them. If there is a similar gesture in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See what you did with the similar gesture in [13:51](../13/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 18 6 z12a figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Your blood be upon your head Here, **blood** represents punishment, specifically for rejecting Jesus. Paul is telling the Jews that they are solely responsible for the divine judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone must bear the responsibility when God punishes you for rejecting Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 18 6 pacx figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Paul is figuratively using one part of a person, the **head**, to represent all of a person in the act of deciding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your punishment is your responsibility” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 18 6 pacx figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Paul is using one part of a person, the **head**, to represent all of a person in the act of deciding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your punishment is your responsibility” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 18 6 ezpo figs-yousingular τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 The word **your** is plural. Paul is speaking to all the Jews in the synagogue, so use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 18 6 vwpg τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Since Paul is speaking to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **head**. Alternate translation: “your heads” -ACT 18 6 aq99 figs-metaphor καθαρὸς ἐγώ 1 Paul is speaking figuratively as if he were physically **clean**. He means that he is satisfied in his conscience that he has fulfilled his duty to proclaim the gospel to these Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have fulfilled my duty in proclaiming the gospel to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 18 6 aq99 figs-metaphor καθαρὸς ἐγώ 1 Paul is speaking as if he were physically **clean**. He means that he is satisfied in his conscience that he has fulfilled his duty to proclaim the gospel to these Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have fulfilled my duty in proclaiming the gospel to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 7 v8xg figs-idiom τινὸς…σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν 1 who worships God See how you translated the similar expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile man who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 7 vs6y translate-names Τιτίου Ἰούστου 1 Titius Justus The words **Titius Justus** are the names of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 8 lj2t translate-names Κρίσπος 1 Crispus The word **Crispus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 8 zc89 writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) -ACT 18 8 uaq5 figs-metonymy ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 all those in his house Here, **house** refers figuratively to an entire household living together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his entire household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 8 uaq5 figs-metonymy ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 all those in his house Here, **house** refers to an entire household living together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his entire household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 8 ykso translate-names Κορινθίων 1 The word **Corinthians** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Corinth. See how you translated that name in [18:1](../18/01.md). . (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 8 t3np figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 were being baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 18 9 ws7p figs-explicit μὴ φοβοῦ 1 Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not **fear** what people might do to him if he continued proclaiming the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Do not fear what people might do to you if you continue proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2582,7 +2582,7 @@ ACT 18 9 zg8a figs-doublet λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 continue ACT 18 9 a529 figs-explicit μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 do not be silent Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not **be silent** about the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “do not be silent about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 18 10 isn8 writing-pronouns ἐγώ εἰμι μετὰ σοῦ 1 Jesus is stating the pronoun **I**, which is already implied in the verb **am**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I am certainly with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 18 10 a8lq figs-possession λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 I have many people in this city This means “many people in this city are mine.” Jesus is using the possessive form to indicate that these people are loyal to him. Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who are loyal to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ACT 18 11 a18w figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God wanted Paul to teach by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 11 a18w figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted Paul to teach by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 12 se8m translate-names Γαλλίωνος 1 Gallio The word **Gallio** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 12 f41k translate-names τῆς Ἀχαΐας 1 The word **Achaia** was the name of the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 12 j762 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -2592,7 +2592,7 @@ ACT 18 12 u36c figs-explicit ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα ACT 18 13 xpnq writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “This man Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 18 13 x23b figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀνθρώπους 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, the Jewish leaders is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 18 13 il8i figs-explicit παρὰ τὸν νόμον 1 By **the law**, the Jewish leaders implicitly mean “Roman law.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “contrary to Roman law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 18 14 uhyp figs-metonymy ἀνοίγειν τὸ στόμα 1 Luke is referring figuratively to speaking by association with a person would **open his mouth** in order to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 14 uhyp figs-metonymy ἀνοίγειν τὸ στόμα 1 Luke is referring to speaking by association with a person would **open his mouth** in order to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 14 cesw figs-synecdoche τοὺς Ἰουδαίους 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 18 14 argm figs-ellipsis εἰ μὲν ἦν ἀδίκημά τι ἢ ῥᾳδιούργημα πονηρόν 1 Gallio is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “if indeed it was some crime or evil wrongdoing on Paul’s part that brought you here today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 18 14 psxf figs-doublet ἀδίκημά τι ἢ ῥᾳδιούργημα πονηρόν 1 The terms **crime** and **wrongdoing** mean similar things. Gallio using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “some serious crime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -2607,7 +2607,7 @@ ACT 18 17 ju3w figs-explicit τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον 1 Since Luke s ACT 18 17 mj77 figs-explicit ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος 1 But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat This could mean: (1) that the Jewish leaders were beating Sosthenes because he was a believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders were all beating him” (2) that the Gentiles who were present in the court beat Sosthenes because the Jews had caused trouble by bothering Gallio with an insignificant matter and Sosthenes was the synagogue leader. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles who were in the court were all beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 18 17 cyk6 figs-hyperbole πάντες…ἔτυπτον 1 they all, having seized Luke likely says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were angrily beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 18 18 j0we grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὁ δὲ Παῦλος ἔτι προσμείνας ἡμέρας ἱκανὰς 1 Luke is using the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between what Paul might have been expected to do—leave the city because he was in danger and to protect the believers from danger themselves, as he did in Thessalonica and Berea—and what Paul actually did—remain in the city. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless, Paul stayed yet many days, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -ACT 18 18 et8c figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 left the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 18 18 et8c figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 left the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names Κενχρεαῖς 1 The word **Cenchreae** is the name of a city. This city was the seaport for the larger inland city of Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 18 kq6f translate-symaction κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow Paul cut the hair off **his head** to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Paul cut his hair in Cenchrea to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 18 18 ceor figs-infostructure εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Luke seems to offer the information that Paul had made a **vow** as the explanation for why he **stayed yet many days** in Corinth despite the danger he was in. It may be more natural in your translation to put this information right after the phrase it seems to explain, **having stayed many days**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) @@ -2619,7 +2619,7 @@ ACT 18 20 u44s writing-pronouns ἐρωτώντων…αὐτῶν 1 The pronou ACT 18 22 gyy4 figs-idiom κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 having landed at Caesarea Luke says that Paul had **come down** to Caesarea because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “having landed in Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 22 bvw4 figs-explicit ἀναβὰς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **having gone up**, he means that Paul traveled to Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having gone up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 18 22 r26z figs-idiom ἀναβὰς 1 having gone up Luke says that Paul had **gone up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. Alternate translation: “having traveled to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 18 22 q9j6 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 greeted the church Luke is figuratively saying **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 22 q9j6 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 greeted the church Luke is saying **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 22 n3rh figs-idiom κατέβη 1 he went down Luke says that Paul **went down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. Alternate translation: “he traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 18 23 plys figs-metonymy διερχόμενος καθεξῆς τὴν Γαλατικὴν χώραν καὶ Φρυγίαν 1 Luke means that Paul visited **in succession** the churches in **the region of Galatia and Phrygia**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could expeess the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “going through the region of Galatia and Phrygia and visiting the churches there in succession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 23 s2hd figs-hyperbole στηρίζων πάντας τοὺς μαθητάς 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “greatly strengthening the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -2628,17 +2628,17 @@ ACT 18 24 n2b4 writing-participants Ἰουδαῖος…τις Ἀπολλῶς ACT 18 24 gsal figs-nominaladj Ἰουδαῖος 1 Luke is using the adjective **Jewish** as a noun to mean a person who is a Jew. ULT adds **man** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this expression with an equivalent word or phrase. Alternate translation: “Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 18 24 di14 translate-names Ἀλεξανδρεὺς 1 an Alexandrian by birth The word **Alexandrian** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Alexandria in Egypt. See how you translated this name in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 24 qn7z figs-idiom κατήντησεν εἰς Ἔφεσον 1 Luke does not say where Apollos traveled from when he came to Ephesus. However, he probably says that Apollos **came down** to Ephesus because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “arrived in the port of Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 18 24 bh25 figs-metaphor δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς 1 He was mighty in the scriptures Luke is speaking of **Apollos** figuratively as if he had physical strength with regard to the Scriptures. Luke means that he knew the Scriptures very well. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having great knowledge about the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 18 24 bh25 figs-metaphor δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς 1 He was mighty in the scriptures Luke is speaking of **Apollos** as if he had physical strength with regard to the Scriptures. Luke means that he knew the Scriptures very well. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having great knowledge about the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 25 ym5i figs-hendiadys ἐλάλει καὶ ἐδίδασκεν 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **speaking** tells how Apollos was **teaching** about Jesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “as he spoke, he taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 18 25 z7a8 figs-activepassive οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος 1 He had been instructed in the way of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 18 25 jj3b figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is speaking figuratively as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus were a **way** or path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 18 25 jj3b figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is speaking as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus were a **way** or path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 25 jwol writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) -ACT 18 25 ift8 figs-synecdoche ζέων τῷ πνεύματι 1 and being fervent in spirit Here the **spirit** figuratively represents a person’s feelings and motivation. Alternate translation: “being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 25 ift8 figs-synecdoche ζέων τῷ πνεύματι 1 and being fervent in spirit Here the **spirit** represents a person’s feelings and motivation. Alternate translation: “being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 25 lr1h figs-possession τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου 1 the baptism of John Luke is using the possessive form here not to describe a **baptism** that **John** received but the baptism that John performed. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ACT 18 26 ga6v figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the way of God Luke is speaking figuratively as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus were a **way** or path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 18 26 ga6v figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the way of God Luke is speaking as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus were a **way** or path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 27 c2sq writing-pronouns βουλομένου…αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Apollos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when Apollos desired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 18 27 ll36 figs-idiom διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 to pass over into Achaia Luke uses the expression **pass over** here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Your language may have its own way of describing travel across a body of water. Alternate translation: “to go across the sea to Achaia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 18 27 v2i6 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 18 27 v2i6 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 27 f99p figs-abstractnouns τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος 1 those who had believed by grace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those whom God had graciously led to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 18 28 mw2n figs-abstractnouns δημοσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **public**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “publicly” or “where anyone could listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 19 intro g38y 0 # Acts 19 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

- Verses 1–10 tell how Paul came to the city of Ephesus and proclaimed the gospel there.
- Verses 11–20 describe remarkable things that God did in Ephesus as a result of the gospel proclamation there.
- Verses 21–41 describe how the artisans in Ephesus created an uproar because people were no longer buying the idols they made.

Acts [19:20](../19/20.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the sixth major part of the book.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Temple of Artemis

The temple of Artemis was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Artemis while they were there. The people who sold statues of Artemis were afraid that if people did not believe Artemis was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues. @@ -2654,9 +2654,9 @@ ACT 19 4 g8iw Ἰωάννης ἐβάπτισεν βάπτισμα 1 Paul is u ACT 19 4 r46y figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 19 5 k9st writing-pronouns ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized The pronoun **they** refers to the believers in Ephesus who were speaking with Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those believers were baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 19 5 ueh1 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 19 5 g2dm figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of the Lord Jesus Here the **name** of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express their allegiance to Jesus as their Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 5 g2dm figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of the Lord Jesus Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. By being baptized, these believers were acknowledging Jesus’ authority over their lives as their Lord and Savior. Alternate translation: “to express their allegiance to Jesus as their Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 6 gk8l translate-symaction ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας 1 when Paul had laid his hands on them Paul **laid** his **hands** on these believers as a symbolic action to show that he wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to them. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:17](../08/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 19 6 udyf figs-metaphor ἦλθε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking figuratively as if the Holy Spirit physically **came upon** these believers. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 19 6 udyf figs-metaphor ἦλθε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking as if the Holy Spirit physically **came upon** these believers. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 6 j4n8 figs-explicit ἐλάλουν…γλώσσαις 1 and they began to speak in tongues and prophesy The implication is that these believers were speaking languages that they did not know. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were speaking in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 7 e7kj writing-endofstory δὲ 1 And they were about 12 men in all Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information to conclude this part of the story of what Paul did in Ephesus. You language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 19 8 qv8z writing-pronouns ἐπαρρησιάζετο 1 having gone into the synagogue, he was speaking boldly for three months The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was speaking boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -2668,17 +2668,17 @@ ACT 19 9 yss2 figs-activepassive ἐσκληρύνοντο 1 If your language d ACT 19 9 n6ir translate-names τὴν ὁδὸν 1 speaking evil of the Way before the crowd As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in [9:2](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 9 den4 translate-names Τυράννου 1 of Tyrannus The word **Tyrannus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 10 cw5g figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι 1 all those who lived in Asia heard the word of the Lord Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “people living throughout the province of Asia heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 19 10 t0ak figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 10 t0ak figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 10 n45g writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 19 10 kj12 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 11 abcy figs-litotes οὐ τὰς τυχούσας 1 not ordinary Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “extraordinary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 19 11 fa6h figs-synecdoche τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου 1 And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul Luke is figuratively using one part of Paul, his **hands**, to represent all of Paul in the act of doing miracles. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 19 11 fa6h figs-synecdoche τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου 1 And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul Luke is using one part of Paul, his **hands**, to represent all of Paul in the act of doing miracles. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 19 12 m3kl figs-activepassive καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body were taken to the sick and If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people even took handkerchiefs or aprons from Paul’s skin to the sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 12 vc1v figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body This could mean implicitly: (1) that these were cloth items that others had placed on Paul’s **skin**. Alternate translation: “handkerchiefs or aprons that had touched Paul’s skin” (2) that these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used. Alternate translation: “handkerchiefs or aprons that Paul had worn or used” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 12 aks4 translate-unknown σουδάρια 1 handkerchiefs These **handkerchiefs** were small pieces of cloth used to wipe one’s face. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 12 xs31 translate-unknown σιμικίνθια 1 aprons These **aprons** were clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of those who wore the aprons. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 12 kw9z figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 the sick Luke is using the adjective **sick** as a noun to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 19 12 nl3a figs-personification ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους 1 their illnesses departed from them Luke is speaking of these **illnesses** figuratively as if it were living thing that could depart from a person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God cured them of their illnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 19 12 nl3a figs-personification ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους 1 their illnesses departed from them Luke is speaking of these **illnesses** as if it were living thing that could depart from a person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God cured them of their illnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 19 13 he2x writing-newevent δέ 1 General Information: Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 19 13 fgq4 translate-unknown ἐξορκιστῶν 1 exorcists These **exorcists** were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places.Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of person that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “exorcists,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 13 s12u figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα 1 the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2697,14 +2697,14 @@ ACT 19 18 v9ib figs-hendiadys ἐξομολογούμενοι καὶ ἀναγ ACT 19 17 mx62 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the seven sons of Sceva. You language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 19 17 jodu figs-activepassive τοῦτο…ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν…τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all living in Ephesus came to know about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 17 fd5m figs-hyperbole τοῦτο…ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν…τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “this became widely known among those who lived in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 19 17 h0lq figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of **fear** as if it could physically fall on the people of Ephesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 19 17 h0lq figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking of **fear** as if it could physically fall on the people of Ephesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 17 w1su figs-hyperbole ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “all who heard about it became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 19 17 j85h figs-activepassive ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 17 j2hh figs-metonymy ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name Here the word **name** stands for the reputation of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus received a great reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 19 u9pi translate-numbers ἀργυρίου μυριάδας πέντε 1 50000 Each of these **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might say something more general, or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “an amount equivalent to well over a hundred years’ wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) ACT 19 19 bcv2 translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου 1 pieces of silver Each of the **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) -ACT 19 20 es71 figs-personification τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power Luke is speaking figuratively of the way that the **word of the Lord** was becoming more widely known and accepted as if it were a living thing that was **increasing** and **prevailing**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ACT 19 20 lbg9 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 20 es71 figs-personification τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power Luke is speaking of the way that the **word of the Lord** was becoming more widely known and accepted as if it were a living thing that was **increasing** and **prevailing**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 19 20 lbg9 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 20 t49m writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 19 21 de4f writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 19 21 q18b figs-idiom ὡς…ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι…πορεύεσθαι 1 this was completed, Paul The word **fulfilled** conveys the sense that Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “once all these things had happened, the Spirit showed Paul that he had completed his work in Ephesus and that he should travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2721,16 +2721,16 @@ ACT 19 24 p58m figs-litotes οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν 1 brought in ACT 19 25 f8rm οὓς συναθροίσας καὶ τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας, εἶπεν 1 It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He gathered together the craftsmen, along with workers in similar occupations, and said” ACT 19 25 w1xd figs-nominaladj περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα 1 Luke is using the adjective **such** as a noun to mean a certain kind of work. ULT adds the word **things** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “in similar occupations” or “who did similar crafts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 19 26 rm6w figs-merism θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε 1 you see and hear that Demetrius is referring to perception by naming the two major means of perception. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you perceive clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -ACT 19 26 rx32 figs-metaphor μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον 1 and turned away a considerable crowd Demetrius is speaking figuratively as if Paul had physically **removed** a crowd that had been patronizing the artisans in Ephesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has caused a considerable crowd to stop buying our shrines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 19 26 z7e7 figs-synecdoche οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι 1 He is saying that the things that are being made with hands are not gods Demetrius is figuratively using one part of the artisans, their **hands**, to represent all of them in the act of making idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “things that people make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 19 26 rx32 figs-metaphor μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον 1 and turned away a considerable crowd Demetrius is speaking as if Paul had physically **removed** a crowd that had been patronizing the artisans in Ephesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “has caused a considerable crowd to stop buying our shrines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 19 26 z7e7 figs-synecdoche οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι 1 He is saying that the things that are being made with hands are not gods Demetrius is using one part of the artisans, their **hands**, to represent all of them in the act of making idols. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “things that people make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 19 27 j3bb figs-activepassive τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι 1 the temple of the great goddess Artemis may be considered as nothing If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people will consider the temple of the great goddess Artemis to be nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 27 hz7l figs-hyperbole ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 whom all Asia and the world worships This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Alternate translation: “whom people from all over the province of Asia and the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 19 27 aq5c figs-metonymy ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 Here the words **Asia** and **the world** refer to the people in Asia and in the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 28 t4lm writing-pronouns ἔκραζον 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the craftsmen who were making the idols. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the craftsmen were shouting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 19 28 uc5c figs-metaphor γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ 1 having become filled with anger Luke is speaking figuratively of the craftsmen as if they were containers that **anger** filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “becoming very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 19 28 uc5c figs-metaphor γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ 1 having become filled with anger Luke is speaking of the craftsmen as if they were containers that **anger** filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “becoming very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 28 ii1u translate-names Ἐφεσίων 0 General Information: The word **Ephesians** describes people who live in or come from the city of Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 29 t7xs figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 the whole city was filled with confusion If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “confusion filled the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]); -ACT 19 29 u42d figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 Luke is speaking figuratively of **the city** as if they was a container that **confusion** filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there was confusion throughout the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 19 29 u42d figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 Luke is speaking of **the city** as if they was a container that **confusion** filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there was confusion throughout the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 29 u51d figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confusion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “people throughout the city were confused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 19 29 ej3q translate-unknown τὸ θέατρον 1 into the theater The **theater** in Ephesus was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. It was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. If the word “theater” would communicate the wrong idea in your language, you could use a term that would be clearer for your readers. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the stadium” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 29 d6r9 translate-names Γάϊον…Ἀρίσταρχον 1 Gaius … Aristarchus The words **Gaius** and **Aristarchus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2743,7 +2743,7 @@ ACT 19 33 jr85 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρον 1 Alexander The word **Alex ACT 19 33 j1mi translate-symaction κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα 1 motioned with his hand This likely means that Alexander was **waving his hand** to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this specifically in your translation. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 19 33 tlq7 figs-explicit ἀπολογεῖσθαι τῷ δήμῳ 1 to give a defense The implication is that Alexander wanted to explain that although he and his fellow Jews did not worship idols themselves, they were not opposing the business of making silver shrines of Artemis. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to explain to the people that he and his fellow Jews were not responsible for the artisans losing business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 34 tyx6 figs-quotations ἐπιγνόντες…ὅτι Ἰουδαῖός ἐστιν, 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “recognizing, ‘He is a Jew!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -ACT 19 34 u1hp figs-metaphor φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων, ὡς…κραζόντων 1 there was one voice from all of them Luke is speaking figuratively as if the people in the theater collectively had only **one voice**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all shouted together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 19 34 u1hp figs-metaphor φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων, ὡς…κραζόντων 1 there was one voice from all of them Luke is speaking as if the people in the theater collectively had only **one voice**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all shouted together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 35 sy9m translate-unknown ὁ γραμματεὺς 1 the town clerk This **city clerk** was a high official in the government of Ephesus. He was not merely someone who kept records. In your translation, you can use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “an alderman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 35 n4qz φησίν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” ACT 19 35 gox9 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἐφέσιοι 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “Citizens of Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2760,12 +2760,12 @@ ACT 19 36 xj2n figs-explicit μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 to ACT 19 36 s67q figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 rash If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **nothing** and the negative adjective **rash**. Alternate translation: “to be careful about what you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 19 37 cuhh translate-versebridge 0 In this verse, the city clerk is giving the reason why the people of Ephesus should not harm Gaius and Aristarchus impulsively. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 36–37. It might say something like this: “You brought these two men here even though they are neither temple-robbers nor blasphemers of our goddess. Therefore it is necessary for you to be calmed and to do nothing rash, since it is undeniable that people from throughout the world come to Ephesus to worship Artemis.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 19 37 s8a9 writing-pronouns τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους 1 these men The pronoun **these** refers to refers to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions ([Acts 19:29](../19/29.md)). While the city clerk does not refer to them by name, you could find a way to identify them for your readers. UST models one way to do this. Alternate translation: “text” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 19 38 zkx5 figs-metonymy ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον 1 have a word against anyone The city clerk is using the term **word** figuratively to mean an accusation that Demetrius might make against Gaius and Aristarchus by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wish to make an accusation against anyone” or “wish to bring a charge against anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 38 zkx5 figs-metonymy ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον 1 have a word against anyone The city clerk is using the term **word** to mean an accusation that Demetrius might make against Gaius and Aristarchus by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wish to make an accusation against anyone” or “wish to bring a charge against anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 38 i14r figs-activepassive ἀγοραῖοι ἄγονται καὶ ἀνθύπατοί εἰσιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proconsuls are holding court sessions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 38 szf7 translate-unknown ἀνθύπατοί 1 proconsuls The **proconsuls** were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. In your translation, you can use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 38 o1vf figs-imperative3p ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they may accuse one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 19 38 g8tp writing-pronouns ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 Let them accuse one another The pronoun **them** refers both to Demetrius and his colleagues and to Gaius and Aristarchus. The city clerk does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues will accuse each other. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “let Demetrius and the craftsmen bring a charge against these men, and let these men respond” or “Demetrius and the craftsmen may bring a charge against these men, and these men may respond” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 19 39 hxh3 figs-idiom εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε 1 But if you seek anything about other matters The word **seek** does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues would be searching for something. The city clerk is speaking idiomatically. Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 19 39 hxh3 figs-idiom εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε 1 But if you seek anything about other matters The word **seek** does not mean that Demetrius and his colleagues would be searching for something. The city clerk is speaking. Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 19 39 wga5 figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 it will be settled in the regular assembly If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regular assembly will settle it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 39 dsmg figs-declarative ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 The city clerk may be using a future statement to give an command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a command. Alternate translation: “you must settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) ACT 19 39 et5j translate-unknown τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the regular assembly This **regular assembly** refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided. In your translation, you can use a term for a comparable deliberative body in your culture. Alternate translation: “the town meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -2791,22 +2791,22 @@ ACT 20 7 wpfh figs-explicit τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 Luke assum ACT 20 7 tgsb figs-activepassive συνηγμένων ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we having gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 7 ls6u writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the believers in Troas with whom Paul and his traveling companions were meeting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Troas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 6 l5dr translate-names τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread The words **Unleavened Bread** are the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several **days**. See how you translated this in [12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 7 zff8 figs-synecdoche κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 to break bread Luke could be using the word **break** to mean “eat,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be figuratively using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “to share a meal” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 7 zff8 figs-synecdoche κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 to break bread Luke could be using the word **break** to mean “eat,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “to share a meal” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 7 ckiy figs-explicit κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 By **to break bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to observe the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 8 t6on figs-explicit ἦσαν… λαμπάδες ἱκαναὶ ἐν τῷ ὑπερῴῳ, οὗ ἦμεν συνηγμένοι 1 The implication seems to be that it became warm in this **upper room** because there were **many lamps** lit in it, and this helps account for why Eutychus fell asleep, as Luke describes in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “it was warm in the upper room where we were gathered together because many lamps were in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 8 ak8z translate-unknown ὑπερῴῳ 1 upper room In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. According to the next verse, this room was actually built above a room that was built above another room. If your community does not have houses like that, you can use another expression to describe a large indoor space where people could meet. See how you translated this in [9:37](../09/37.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 20 8 cshh figs-activepassive ἦμεν συνηγμένοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 20 7 j888 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 and so he continued his message Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 7 j888 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 and so he continued his message Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 9 ju64 translate-names Εὔτυχος 1 Eutychus The word **Eutychus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 9 v5q7 translate-unknown ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος 1 on the window This **window** was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could describe this more fully. Alternate translation: “on the ledge of a window opening in the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 20 9 tsp4 figs-activepassive καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ…κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 was falling into a deep sleep If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a deep sleep overcoming him … sleep having overcome him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 20 9 abcz figs-personification καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ…κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 having been overcome by sleep Luke is speaking of **sleep** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could **overcome** Eutychus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “starting to sleep deeply … becoming completely asleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 20 9 abcz figs-personification καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ…κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 having been overcome by sleep Luke is speaking of **sleep** as if it were a living thing that could **overcome** Eutychus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “starting to sleep deeply … becoming completely asleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 20 9 kh3h τριστέγου 1 third story In this culture, the **third story** meant a level two floors above the ground floor. Some languages and cultures consider the “first story” to be one level above the ground floor, and so they would consider this level, two above the ground floor, to be the “second story.” You can say that in your translation if it would be helpful to your readers. ACT 20 9 jp89 figs-activepassive ἤρθη νεκρός 1 and was picked up dead If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was the believers who were meeting with Paul. Alternate translation: “the believers picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 9 z1wf figs-explicit ἤρθη νεκρός 1 The implication is that some of the believers rushed down to help Eutychus but discovered that he had died from the fall. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when the believers went down to help him, they picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 10 uban figs-activepassive μὴ θορυβεῖσθε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do not let this trouble you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 20 10 gfol figs-metaphor ἡ…ψυχὴ αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐστιν 1 Paul is speaking figuratively as if the life of Eutychus were contained within him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 11 w5w8 figs-synecdoche κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος 1 had broken bread Luke could be using the words **broken** and **tasted** to mean “eaten,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be figuratively using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking and tasting bread are things people do when they eat bread, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “having shared a meal with the believers” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 10 gfol figs-metaphor ἡ…ψυχὴ αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐστιν 1 Paul is speaking as if the life of Eutychus were contained within him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 11 w5w8 figs-synecdoche κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος 1 had broken bread Luke could be using the words **broken** and **tasted** to mean “eaten,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking and tasting bread are things people do when they eat bread, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “having shared a meal with the believers” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 11 upkb figs-explicit κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον καὶ γευσάμενος 1 By ** having broken bread and having tasted **, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having observe the Lord’s Supper with the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 20 11 av7m writing-pronouns ἐξῆλθεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 12 lih8 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of Eutychus. You language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) @@ -2821,15 +2821,15 @@ ACT 20 15 bbeq figs-idiom κατηντήσαμεν 1 Luke says that he and his ACT 20 15 ulk6 translate-names Χίου 1 Chios The word **Chios** is the name of an island in the Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 15 b6c6 translate-names Σάμον 1 Samos The word **Samos** is the name of an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 15 s7g2 translate-names Μίλητον 1 Miletus The word **Miletus** is the name of a port city that was located in western Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 16 p61e figs-metaphor ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι 1 so that he would not spend time Luke is speaking figuratively about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could **lose**. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 16 p61e figs-metaphor ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι 1 so that he would not spend time Luke is speaking about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could **lose**. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 17 nw52 writing-pronouns μετεκαλέσατο 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 20 18 xsa6 figs-infostructure ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε ἀπὸ πρώτης ἡμέρας ἀφ’ ἧς ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν, πῶς μεθ’ ὑμῶν τὸν πάντα χρόνον ἐγενόμην 1 It may be more natural in your language to reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “You yourselves know how I was with you the whole time from the first day from which I set foot in Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 20 18 b6li writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 You yourselves know Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “You certainly know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 20 18 vw6n figs-synecdoche ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 I set foot in Asia Paul is figuratively using one part of himself, his **foot**, to represent all of himself in the act of arriving in Asia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 18 vw6n figs-synecdoche ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 I set foot in Asia Paul is using one part of himself, his **foot**, to represent all of himself in the act of arriving in Asia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 19 uidc writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Paul is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 20 19 llqj figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης ταπεινοφροσύνης 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great humility” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 20 19 pg86 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης ταπεινοφροσύνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **humility**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “very humbly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 20 19 wh5m figs-metonymy δακρύων 1 tears Paul is referring figuratively to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds **tears** of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “deep emotion” or “genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 19 wh5m figs-metonymy δακρύων 1 tears Paul is referring to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds **tears** of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “deep emotion” or “genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 19 e6k7 figs-ellipsis καὶ πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι 1 trials that happened to me Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and how I endured the trials that happened to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 20 19 y5iw figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 of the Jews Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of certain Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 20 sscz figs-hyperbole ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν 1 Paul says **nothing** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “how I did not withhold things that would be useful and not declare them to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -2871,8 +2871,8 @@ ACT 20 30 esme figs-metaphor ἀναστήσονται ἄνδρες λαλοῦ ACT 20 30 yn8u figs-activepassive διεστραμμένα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “distortions of the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 30 ftf4 figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν 1 to draw away the disciples after them Paul is speaking as if these false teachers would physically **draw away** people **after them** as they left the fellowship of true believers in Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order to influence disciples to follower their teaching instead of Jesus’ teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 31 hs1m figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν 1 I did not stop admonishing If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative word **stop**. Alternate translation: “I continued to warn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -ACT 20 31 rvh6 figs-metonymy μετὰ δακρύων 1 with tears Paul is referring figuratively to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds **tears** of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with deep emotion” or “with genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 20 31 rt1h figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 for three years I did not stop admonishing … night and day Paul is figuratively using the two parts of a full day, **night** and **day**, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +ACT 20 31 rvh6 figs-metonymy μετὰ δακρύων 1 with tears Paul is referring to strong emotion by association with the way a person who feels things deeply sheds **tears** of sadness or joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with deep emotion” or “with genuine feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 31 rt1h figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 for three years I did not stop admonishing … night and day Paul is using the two parts of a full day, **night** and **day**, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 20 31 fc3b figs-hyperbole νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 Paul says **night and day** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “without ever giving up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 20 32 zvz8 figs-personification τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ, τῷ δυναμένῳ 1 to give you the inheritance Paul is speaking of the **word** of God’s **grace** as if it were a living thing that was **able** to do the things he describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to God who, through the word of his grace, is able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 20 32 ylm3 figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 I am entrusting you to God and to the word of his grace Paul is using the term **word** to mean the message about God’s **grace** that Jesus and his apostles shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the message about his grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 51afba17f44add2e6b0c5d207a6255a76c73d688 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 16:30:20 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 301/446] Replaced "If your readers would misunderstand" text in Acts. --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 482 +++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ 1 file changed, 241 insertions(+), 241 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 109637ffcf..5afa0d031c 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -7,14 +7,14 @@ ACT 1 1 ryj5 translate-names Θεόφιλε 1 Theophilus **Theophilus** is the n ACT 1 1 a001 figs-explicitinfo περὶ πάντων…ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν 1 all that Jesus began both to do and to teach Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that Jesus had been doing something else (working as a carpenter) but then began to do something new when he started his ministry. In your language, it might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. Alternate translation: “all that Jesus both did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 1 1 a002 figs-hyperbole περὶ πάντων…ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν 1 all that Jesus began both to do and to teach This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “about some of the most important things that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 1 2 a003 figs-idiom ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας 1 until that day when While this did happen on a specific day, Luke is likely using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “up to the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 1 2 n435 figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη 1 he was taken up If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 1 2 n435 figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη 1 he was taken up If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 2 a424 figs-explicit ἀνελήμφθη 1 he was taken up Luke is referring to Jesus being **taken up** into heaven. See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “he was taken up into heaven” or “God took him up into heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 3 a004 οἷς καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν, ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις 1 to whom also, after he had suffered, he presented himself living with many proofs As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus also presented himself alive with many proofs to his apostles after he had suffered” ACT 1 3 dup3 figs-explicit μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν 1 after he had suffered This refers to how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. Alternate translation: “after he had suffered and died on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 3 a005 figs-explicit ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις 1 with many proofs The word translated **proofs** describes items of evidence that are decisive and convincing. Alternate translation: “with many definitive proofs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 3 yc16 figs-explicit δι’ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα, ὀπτανόμενος αὐτοῖς, καὶ λέγων 1 appearing to them for 40 days and speaking While the antecedent of **whom** is “the apostles whom he had chosen” in the previous verse, Jesus actually appeared to many other disciples besides his apostles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “For 40 days he appeared to his apostles and many of his other disciples, and he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 3 a006 figs-abstractnouns τὰ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 things concerning the kingdom of God See the discussion of the concept of the **kingdom of God** in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **kingdom**, you could express this with a verb such as “rule,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 1 4 a007 figs-doublenegatives ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ 1 not to depart from Jerusalem, but If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **depart**. Alternate translation: “to remain in Jerusalem and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +ACT 1 4 a007 figs-doublenegatives ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ 1 not to depart from Jerusalem, but If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **depart**. Alternate translation: “to remain in Jerusalem and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 1 4 vb7g figs-quotemarks ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι 1 not to depart from Jerusalem The content of Jesus’ instructions to the apostles on this occasion begins here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate and punctuate the material from here to the end of the verse as a direct quotation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 1 4 a008 translate-names Ἱεροσολύμων 1 Jerusalem **Jerusalem** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 1 4 sg4h figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 the promise of the Father Jesus is referring to the Holy Spirit by association with the way God made a **promise** to send the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ ACT 1 4 d3kr figs-you ἠκούσατέ 1 you heard Here, **you** is plural beca ACT 1 5 uu4k translate-names Ἰωάννης 1 John **John** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 1 5 fnq5 figs-explicit Ἰωάννης 1 John Jesus is referring to the man who was known as John the Baptist because he baptized people. It may help to identify him if you use that title after his name in your translation. However, because the word “Baptist” is associated with a group of churches in many parts of the world, it may be helpful to your readers to use a different form of the word as a title, as UST does by saying “Baptizer.” Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Baptizer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 5 a075 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς…ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ 1 you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit After describing earlier in the verse how John baptized people literally, Jesus is using baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 1 5 dzj1 figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 you will be baptized You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, and if your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will baptize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 1 5 dzj1 figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 you will be baptized You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, and If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will baptize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 5 a010 figs-litotes οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας 1 after these not many days Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “just a few days from now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 1 6 n9wt writing-pronouns οἱ μὲν οὖν συνελθόντες, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν 1 They therefore having assembled, they were asking him In the first instance, **they** describes Jesus and the apostles, while in the second instance, **they** refers to the apostles. (Other disciples could have been present on this occasion, but the instructions that Jesus gives about being “witnesses” in [1:8](../01/08.md) apply specifically to the apostles, so it would be good to name them directly.) Alternate translation: “When the apostles were together with Jesus, the apostles were asking him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 1 6 a011 figs-idiom εἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ, ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time This is an idiomatic way of asking a question. Alternate translation: “are you restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time” or “will you now restore the kingdom to Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ ACT 1 8 a015 figs-abstractnouns δύναμιν 1 power If your language does not ACT 1 8 a016 translate-names Ἰερουσαλὴμ…Ἰουδαίᾳ…Σαμαρείᾳ 1 Jerusalem … Judea … Samaria **Jerusalem** is the name of a city, and **Judea** and **Samaria** are the names of regions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 1 8 vb4m figs-idiom ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 to the end of the earth This is a reference to place, not to time. Jesus does not mean “until the world ends.” Alternate translation: “all over the world” or “to the places on the earth that are farthest away from here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 9 e1q1 figs-explicit βλεπόντων αὐτῶν 1 as they were looking Your language may require you to specify the object of **looking**. Alternate translation: “as they were looking at him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 1 9 l1cq figs-activepassive ἐπήρθη 1 he was raised up If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. (See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “he rose up” or “God raised him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 1 9 l1cq figs-activepassive ἐπήρθη 1 he was raised up If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. (See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “he rose up” or “God raised him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 9 ug58 figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν 1 from their eyes Luke is using the **eyes** of the apostles to mean their capacity to see. Alternate translation: “from their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 1 10 enu1 figs-explicit ἀτενίζοντες ἦσαν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 they were looking intently into heaven Since a cloud was able to block the apostles’ view, it is clear that Luke is using the word translated **heaven** here in one of its specific senses to mean “sky.” It would be good to make clear that the apostles were not seeing into heaven itself. Alternate translation: “gazing at the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 10 a017 figs-metaphor καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο 1 and behold, two men Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these **two men** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then two men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -53,10 +53,10 @@ ACT 1 11 a023 translate-names ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι 1 Men, Galilean ACT 1 11 a024 figs-rquestion τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν? 1 why do you stand looking into heaven? The angels are not looking for information. They are using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no reason for you to stand looking into heaven!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 1 11 a025 figs-idiom τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες 1 why do you stand looking The expression **stand** means to continue doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “why do you keep looking” or “there is no reason for you to keep looking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 11 a026 figs-explicit ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν…ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν 1 who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into heaven In its second occurrence in this sentence, the term translated **heaven** likely means “the sky,” as in the previous sentence and in the previous verse. However, in its first occurrence in this sentence, the term likely means “heaven” itself. It would not be accurate to say that Jesus was just “taken up from you into the sky.” Alternate translation: “who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 1 11 a027 figs-activepassive ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς 1 who has been taken up If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has taken up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 1 11 a027 figs-activepassive ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς 1 who has been taken up If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has taken up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 11 cue7 ὃν τρόπον 1 in which manner Alternate translation: “in the same way in which” ACT 1 12 x2nk writing-pronouns ὑπέστρεψαν 1 they returned The word **they** refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the apostles returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 1 12 a028 figs-activepassive ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος 1 the hill that is called Olivet If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” or “the hill whose name is Olivet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 1 12 a028 figs-activepassive ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος 1 the hill that is called Olivet If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” or “the hill whose name is Olivet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 12 a029 translate-names ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος 1 the hill that is called Olivet **Olivet** is the name of a hill. If your readers might recognize it better if you called it the Mount of Olives, you could use that name in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 1 12 a030 figs-idiom Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν 1 having a journey of a Sabbath The expression **having a journey** refers to a distance. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath-day’s journey away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 12 p19g translate-unknown Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν 1 having a journey of a Sabbath The **journey of a Sabbath** was the distance that interpreters of the law of Moses had determined people could walk on the Sabbath without that being “work.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the distance in the measurement that your culture uses. Alternate translation: “about a kilometer away” or “about half a mile away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -80,8 +80,8 @@ ACT 1 15 a040 figs-metonymy ὄχλος ὀνομάτων 1 the multitude of nam ACT 1 15 a041 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in that one place” or “in their Christian fellowship” ACT 1 16 a042 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 16 a043 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 1 16 a045 figs-infostructure ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν, ἣν προεῖπε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ περὶ Ἰούδα, τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν 1 it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled that the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus If your readers would misunderstand this, you could put the information that Peter provides to identify this **scripture** before his statement that it had to be **fulfilled**. It may be helpful to make that statement a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus. It was necessary for that scripture to be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -ACT 1 16 i8tl figs-activepassive ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν 1 it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the things needed to take place that the scripture described” or, if you put the background information first as a separate sentence, “What that scripture described needed to take place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 1 16 a045 figs-infostructure ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν, ἣν προεῖπε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ περὶ Ἰούδα, τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν 1 it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled that the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the information that Peter provides to identify this **scripture** before his statement that it had to be **fulfilled**. It may be helpful to make that statement a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus. It was necessary for that scripture to be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +ACT 1 16 i8tl figs-activepassive ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν 1 it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the things needed to take place that the scripture described” or, if you put the background information first as a separate sentence, “What that scripture described needed to take place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 16 a046 προεῖπε 1 spoke before Alternate translation: “spoke beforehand” or “spoke in advance” ACT 1 16 f3um figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ 1 by the mouth of David Peter is using the word **mouth** to refer to words that David spoke or sang using his mouth and that he recorded in the book of Psalms, as Peter indicates in [1:20](../01/20.md). Alternate translation: “through the words of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 1 16 a047 translate-names Δαυεὶδ…Ἰούδα 1 David … Judas **David** and **Judas** are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ ACT 1 16 a048 figs-synecdoche τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖ ACT 1 17 q73y grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 For Peter uses the word **For** to introduce the reason for a result that is described in [1:21–22](../01/21.md), after Luke provides further background information and Peter quotes the scripture he referred to in [1:16](../01/16.md). The overall meaning is, “Since Judas was one of us apostles, we need to replace him with another witness of the ministry of Jesus.” But since so much material comes between the reason and the result, it may be helpful to give an indication here that Peter has a response in mind. Alternate translation: “There is something important we need to do in response to this scripture being fulfilled, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 1 17 a049 figs-parallelism κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ἔλαχεν τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 he was numbered with us and received a share of this ministry These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Jesus chose him to be an apostle along with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) ACT 1 17 a050 κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 he was numbered with us Peter is using the term **numbered** in one of its specific senses. Alternate translation: “he was considered to be one of us apostles” -ACT 1 17 a051 figs-activepassive κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 he was numbered with us If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he belonged to our group of apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 1 17 a051 figs-activepassive κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 he was numbered with us If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he belonged to our group of apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 17 tmv2 figs-exclusive ἐν ἡμῖν 1 with us Although Peter is addressing a larger group of people, he is using the word **us** to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **us** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “with us apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 1 17 a052 figs-quotemarks τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 a share of this ministry Luke temporarily ends his quotation from Peter after this phrase so that he can provide further background information about Judas in [1:18–19](../01/18.md). The quotation resumes in [1:20](../01/20.md). If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an ending quotation mark or the equivalent after this phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 1 18 tmv1 writing-background μὲν οὖν 1 Now indeed Luke is using this expression to introduce further background information that he provides in this verse and the next one about how Judas died and about what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter’s speech. You may want to indicate that by putting these verses in parentheses or by using the equivalent convention in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -98,13 +98,13 @@ ACT 1 18 a053 figs-abstractnouns ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 f ACT 1 18 w83j figs-metonymy ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 from the wage of unrighteousness Luke is using the term **unrighteousness** to describe Judas betraying Jesus, by association with the way that was an unrighteous thing to do. Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for betraying Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 1 18 kg3q figs-explicit πρηνὴς γενόμενος 1 having fallen headfirst Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Judas did not fall down accidentally. Rather, he threw himself onto the field intentionally in order to kill himself. The implications are that he must have done this from a height. Alternate translation: “because he then threw himself down from a height onto that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 18 a054 πρηνὴς γενόμενος 1 having fallen headfirst The word **headfirst** describes someone falling forward, as opposed to falling backwards. Alternate translation: “having fallen forward” -ACT 1 18 a055 figs-activepassive ἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ 1 all his entrails were poured out If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all his inward parts poured out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 1 18 a055 figs-activepassive ἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ 1 all his entrails were poured out If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all his inward parts poured out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 19 a056 γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 it became known to all those living in Jerusalem The verb form is not passive here, since **known** is an adjective rather than a participle. Even so, it may be helpful to your readers to make **it** the object rather than the subject. Alternate translation: “all those living in Jerusalem heard about it” ACT 1 19 a057 figs-hyperbole γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 it became known to all those living in Jerusalem Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “it became well known to those living in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 1 19 a058 figs-activepassive ὥστε κληθῆναι τὸ χωρίον ἐκεῖνο 1 Therefore that field was called If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “So they called that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 1 19 a058 figs-activepassive ὥστε κληθῆναι τὸ χωρίον ἐκεῖνο 1 Therefore that field was called If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “So they called that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 19 mxf3 translate-transliterate Ἁκελδαμάχ 1 Akeldama **Akeldama** is an Aramaic word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, **Field of Blood**. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) ACT 1 20 mz13 figs-quotemarks γέγραπται γὰρ 1 For it is written Luke now resumes his quotation of what Peter said on this occasion. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an opening quotation mark or the equivalent before this phrase. It may also be helpful to indicate explicitly that the quotation resumes here. Alternate translation: “Peter went on to say, ‘For it is written’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -ACT 1 20 d7pk figs-quotesinquotes γέγραπται…ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ; καί, τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 it is written in the book of Psalms, ‘Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it,’ and ‘Let another take his overseership.’ If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written in the book of Psalms that his habitation should be made desolate, with no one dwelling in it, and that another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +ACT 1 20 d7pk figs-quotesinquotes γέγραπται…ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ; καί, τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 it is written in the book of Psalms, ‘Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it,’ and ‘Let another take his overseership.’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written in the book of Psalms that his habitation should be made desolate, with no one dwelling in it, and that another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 1 20 ip5w figs-activepassive γέγραπται…ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν 1 it is written in the book of Psalms If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “David wrote in the book of Psalms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 20 g30d figs-imperative3p γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May his habitation become desolate, and may no one be dwelling in it” or “His habitation should become desolate, and no one should be dwelling be in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 1 20 crk3 figs-imperative γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is asking God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let his habitation become desolate, and please let no one be dwelling in it” or “Please may his habitation become desolate, and please may no one be dwelling in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ ACT 1 22 qb8j figs-abstractnouns ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτί ACT 1 22 a060 translate-names Ἰωάννου 1 John **John** is the name of a man. Peter means the man who was known as John the Baptist. See how you translated his name in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 1 22 a061 figs-idiom τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς 1 the day on which While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific **day**, Peter may be using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 22 a062 writing-pronouns ἀνελήμφθη…τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ 1 he was taken up … his resurrection The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun **his** also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 1 22 yi3a figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν 1 he was taken up from us If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 1 22 yi3a figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν 1 he was taken up from us If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 22 a063 figs-exclusive ἀφ’ ἡμῶν…σὺν ἡμῖν 1 from us … with us When Peter says **from us**, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says **with us**, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 1 22 mrx7 figs-nominaladj ἕνα τούτων 1 one of these is Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **these** as a noun to refer to specific people, the men whose qualifications he has just described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “one of these men is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 1 22 g3n9 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ 1 of his resurrection If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “that God made him alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ ACT 1 23 lz7y writing-pronouns ἔστησαν δύο 1 they stood up two The pr ACT 1 23 a064 figs-nominaladj ἔστησαν δύο 1 they stood up two Luke is using the adjective **two** as a noun to refer to specific people, two men who met the qualifications Peter described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning, and you could also describe these men more specifically. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two men” or “the believers stood up two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 1 23 a065 translate-symaction ἔστησαν δύο 1 they stood up two When the believers **stood up** these two men, that is, when they had them stand up within the group, this was a symbolic way of proposing them as candidates to replace Judas. Alternate translation: “the believers proposed two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 1 23 a066 translate-names Ἰωσὴφ…Βαρσαββᾶν…Ἰοῦστος 1 Joseph … Barsabbas … Justus **Joseph** is the name of a man, and **Barsabbas** and **Justus** are two other names by which he was known. **Barsabbas** is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. **Justus** is a Roman name, and it may be a name that this man used for official purposes and in interactions with people who spoke Latin. (It would be like the name Paul, by which Saul of Tarsus was also known in the Roman Empire.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 1 23 s1ff figs-activepassive τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη Ἰοῦστος 1 the one called Barsabbas, who was named Justus If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say both of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “whom people called Barsabbas and whose other name was Justus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 1 23 s1ff figs-activepassive τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη Ἰοῦστος 1 the one called Barsabbas, who was named Justus If it would be helpful in your language, you could say both of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “whom people called Barsabbas and whose other name was Justus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 23 a067 translate-names Μαθθίαν 1 Matthias **Matthias** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 1 24 a068 translate-versebridge 0 Judas betrayed Jesus and abandoned his position as an apostle. The person who is praying says that in the next verse. As a result, the believers are asking God to show them whom he has chosen to replace Judas, as the person praying says in this verse. You could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. UST provides a model for doing that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 1 24 a069 figs-hendiadys προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν 1 praying they said Together the words **praying** and **said** indicate that the believers said what they did while praying. Alternate translation: “they said in prayer” or “they prayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ ACT 2 3 re3t γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός 1 tongues as if of fire This ACT 2 3 xtk4 διαμεριζόμεναι 1 distributing themselves This means that the objects that looked like flames of fire spread out so that there was one on each person. Alternate translation: “spreading around” ACT 2 3 a081 writing-pronouns ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν 1 they sat upon each one of them The pronoun **they** refers to the objects, and the pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “one of the objects sat upon each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 2 3 a082 figs-metaphor ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν 1 they sat upon each one of them Luke is using the word **sat** to indicate that the objects remained in one place once they had spread around. Alternate translation: “one of the objects remained on each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 2 4 v7hi figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 4 v7hi figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 4 a251 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “they were all inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 4 a083 figs-explicitinfo ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις 1 they began to speak in other tongues Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that the disciples had been doing something else (speaking in their own languages) but then began to do something new when the Holy Spirit filled them. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “they spoke in other languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 2 4 nr9f figs-explicit ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις 1 they began to speak in other tongues The implication, as [2:6–11](../02/06.md) makes clear, is that the disciples were speaking languages that they did not know. Alternate translation: “they began to speak in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ ACT 2 5 dz1l grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **No ACT 2 5 yft2 figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς 1 godly men Luke is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “godly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 2 5 stq9 figs-hyperbole παντὸς ἔθνους 1 every nation The word **every** is a generalization that emphasizes that the people came from many different nations. Alternate translation: “many different nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 2 5 a086 figs-idiom ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν 1 under heaven The expression **under heaven** is a way of referring to being on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 2 6 bpj7 figs-activepassive συνεχύθη 1 was confused If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say what did the action. Alternate translation: “what they heard confused them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 6 bpj7 figs-activepassive συνεχύθη 1 was confused If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say what did the action. Alternate translation: “what they heard confused them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 6 u9hc writing-pronouns ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ λαλούντων αὐτῶν 1 each one was hearing them speaking in his own language The pronoun **them** refers to the believers and the pronoun **his** refers to each person in the multitude. Alternate translation: “each person in the multitude could hear one of the disciples speaking in that person’s own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 2 7 m8kd figs-doublet ἐξίσταντο…καὶ ἐθαύμαζον 1 they were … amazed and were marveling The terms **amazed** and **marveling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 2 7 a087 figs-activepassive ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον 1 they were all amazed and were marveling The expression **were … amazed** is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed all of them and they were marveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ ACT 2 8 a090 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And The speakers are using t ACT 2 8 a091 figs-explicit πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος 1 how are we hearing, each Your language may require you to specify the object of **hearing**. Alternate translation: “how are we each hearing them speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 8 a092 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἡμῶν 1 we … our The speakers are using the words **we** and **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive forms of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 2 8 wb5t figs-metaphor ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν 1 in which we were born The speakers say that they **were born** in these languages to mean that they learned them from birth. Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 2 8 a093 figs-activepassive ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν 1 in which we were born If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is a metaphor, it would be preferable to use another expression to explain its meaning, rather than to say something like “in which our mothers gave birth to us.” Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 8 a093 figs-activepassive ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν 1 in which we were born If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is a metaphor, it would be preferable to use another expression to explain its meaning, rather than to say something like “in which our mothers gave birth to us.” Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 9 f1ve translate-names Πάρθοι…Μῆδοι…Ἐλαμεῖται 1 Parthians … Medes … Elamites These are names of three people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 2 9 dm23 translate-names τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν;…Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον…Ἀσίαν 1 Mesopotamia, Judea … Cappadocia, Pontus … Asia These are names of five areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 2 10 tmb4 translate-names Φρυγίαν…Παμφυλίαν, Αἴγυπτον…Λιβύης 1 Phrygia … Pamphylia, Egypt … Libya These are names of four areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ ACT 2 11 a097 figs-nominaladj τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the gr ACT 2 12 el2f figs-doublet ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο 1 they were all amazed and were perplexed The words **amazed** and **perplexed** mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 2 12 a098 figs-activepassive ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο…λέγοντες 1 they were all amazed and were perplexed, saying These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be helpful to your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 12 a099 figs-idiom τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι 1 What does this want to be The expression **want to be** is a way of referring to what something means. Your language may have a similar expression that you could use in your translation. Or, if it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: "What does this mean?" or “What is the explanation for this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 2 13 a100 figs-activepassive γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν 1 They are filled with sweet wine If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 13 a100 figs-activepassive γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν 1 They are filled with sweet wine If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 13 fg59 figs-explicit γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν 1 They are filled with sweet wine The implications of this statement are that the disciples have gotten drunk and are babbling and that this is the explanation for the languages the people think they are hearing. Alternate translation: “They have gotten drunk on sweet wine, and so what we are hearing is just drunken babbling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 13 jj1n translate-unknown γλεύκους 1 with sweet wine This refers to wine that is thicker and more intoxicating than ordinary wine. If your readers would not be familiar with this drink, you could use the name of another strong drink that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “with strong liquor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 2 14 k5hr translate-symaction σταθεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος σὺν τοῖς ἕνδεκα, ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ 1 But Peter, having stood with the Eleven, raised up his voice Peter **stood** to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles **stood** with him to show their support for him as he spoke. You could indicate that in your translation, perhaps as a separate sentence, if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “But Peter stood up to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. Peter raised up his voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) @@ -215,10 +215,10 @@ ACT 2 14 qp16 figs-metonymy ἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου 1 t ACT 2 15 a106 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Peter says **for** in this first instance to introduce the reason why the crowd should listen to him. Alternate translation: “You should listen to me because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 2 15 a107 writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 these The demonstrative pronoun **these** refers to the disciples who are speaking different languages. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could add more information to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “these people who are speaking different languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 2 15 a108 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 For Peter says **for** in this second instance to introduce the reason why the people speaking different languages are not drunk. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They are not drunk, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ACT 2 15 a109 ἔστιν…ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας 1 it is the third hour of the day In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “it is nine o’clock in the morning” +ACT 2 15 a109 ἔστιν…ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας 1 it is the third hour of the day In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “it is nine o’clock in the morning” ACT 2 15 h28q figs-explicit ἔστιν…ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας 1 it is the third hour of the day Peter assumes that his listeners will know that people do not get drunk that early in the day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is only nine o’clock in the morning, and people do not get drunk that early” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 15 a110 translate-ordinal ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας 1 the third hour of the day If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour three of the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -ACT 2 16 f9hz figs-activepassive τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ 1 this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is what God said through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 16 f9hz figs-activepassive τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ 1 this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is what God said through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 16 ktw9 figs-explicit τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ 1 this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel The implication is that God is now making happen what he said through Joel. Alternate translation: “you are seeing God make happen what he announced earlier through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 17 a111 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα 1 ‘“And it will be in the last days,” God says, “I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh” The material in [2:17–21](../02/17.md) contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting Joel, and Joel is quoting God. You could avoid having a third-level quotation by moving the phrase **God says** to before the quotation from Joel. (The phrase itself does not occur in the passage from Joel that Peter quotes. It appears to be something that Peter supplies within the quotation to show that God is the speaker. Since that is the case, putting it before the quotation would not change the actual biblical text.) Alternate translation: “God said, ‘And it will be in the last days, I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 2 17 a112 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα 1 ‘“And it will be in the last days,” God says, “I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh” You could also avoid having a second-level quotation by turning the direct quotation into an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that in the last days he would pour out his Spirit on all flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ ACT 2 19 a120 δώσω τέρατα…καὶ σημεῖα 1 I will give wonde ACT 2 19 a121 ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἄνω 1 in the heaven above Since God specifies in the next verse that these **wonders** will affect the sun and the moon, the word translated **heaven** likely has the specific sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “in the sky above” ACT 2 19 p5zi figs-possession ἀτμίδα καπνοῦ 1 vapor of smoke Here the possessive form describes **vapor** that looks smoky or that has **smoke** in it. Alternate translation: “smoky vapor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 2 20 ylv7 figs-quotesinquotes ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα, πρὶν ἢ ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ 1 The sun will be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord comes You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that sun would be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -ACT 2 20 a6yh figs-activepassive ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will turn the sun to darkness” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “God said that he would turn the sun to darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 20 a6yh figs-activepassive ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will turn the sun to darkness” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “God said that he would turn the sun to darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 20 a122 figs-metaphor ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness God is speaking as if he would change the **sun** into something else. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” or “The sun will no longer shine brightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 20 a123 figs-abstractnouns ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **darkness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 20 a124 figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 and the moon to blood Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the moon will be turned to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ ACT 2 20 lc4g figs-idiom ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου 1 the day of ACT 2 20 a126 figs-123person ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου 1 the day of the Lord comes In this expression, God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “time arrives when I judge and punish people for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) ACT 2 21 a127 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται 1 And it will be, everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “And God said it would happen that everyone who called on the name of the Lord would be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 2 21 a128 καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς 1 And it will be, everyone Alternate translation: “And this is what will happen: Everyone” -ACT 2 21 vql5 figs-activepassive πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται 1 everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 21 vql5 figs-activepassive πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται 1 everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 21 a129 figs-idiom πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται 1 everyone who may call on The expression **call on** means to make an appeal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone who may appeal to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 21 a130 figs-123person τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “my name” or “me by name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) ACT 2 21 a131 figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 the name of the Lord Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ ACT 2 21 a133 figs-quotemarks σωθήσεται 1 will be saved This is the end ACT 2 22 sa78 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Men, Israelites This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 22 g6vj figs-metonymy ἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 hear these words Peter is using the term **words** to mean what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 22 a134 translate-names Ἰησοῦν τὸν Ναζωραῖον 1 Jesus the Nazarene The word **Nazarene** describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 2 22 f2t1 figs-activepassive ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 attested to you by God If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God proved he had sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 22 f2t1 figs-activepassive ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 attested to you by God If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God proved he had sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 22 a135 figs-doublet δυνάμεσι, καὶ τέρασι, καὶ σημείοις 1 with mighty deeds and wonders and signs The terms **mighty works**, **wonders**, and **signs** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “by means of many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 2 23 a136 figs-nominaladj τοῦτον 1 This one Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “This Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 2 23 i6un figs-activepassive τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἔκδοτον 1 given up by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God The term translated **given up** is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, but even so you may wish to translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up by his determined counsel and foreknowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -274,7 +274,7 @@ ACT 2 24 ei37 figs-idiom ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν 1 whom God rais ACT 2 24 s8j3 figs-metaphor λύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου 1 having loosed the agonies of death Peter speaks of the **agonies of death** as if they were ropes with which Jesus had been tied, and of God bringing Jesus back to life as if God had untied those ropes and set him free. Alternate translation: “delivering him from the agonies of death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 24 a141 figs-possession τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου 1 the agonies of death Peter uses the possessive form to describe **death** as something that is characterized by **agonies.** Alternate translation: “agonizing death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 2 24 a142 figs-explicit καθότι οὐκ ἦν δυνατὸν κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 because it was not possible for him to be held by it If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why this was **not possible**. Alternate translation: “because God is so much stronger than death that it was not possible for him to be held by it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 2 24 ykq4 figs-activepassive κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 for him to be held by it If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for death to hold him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 24 ykq4 figs-activepassive κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 for him to be held by it If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for death to hold him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 24 vuf4 figs-personification κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 for him to be held by it Peter speaks of death as if it were a living thing that held Jesus captive. Alternate translation: “for him to remain dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 2 25 dd5a figs-quotesinquotes Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 For David says about him, ‘I saw the Lord always before me, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation. (Peter is quoting from [Psalm 16:8–11](../psa/16/08.md).) Alternate translation: “For David said about him that he saw the Lord before him through all, for he was at his right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 2 25 a143 writing-pronouns Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 For David says about him, ‘I saw the Lord always before me, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved The pronoun **him** refers to the Messiah, about whom David is prophesying. This means that within the quotation, the pronouns **I** and **my** are spoken by the Messiah. If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and change these pronouns to “he,” “him,” and “his,” it may be helpful to indicate the references in some cases so that your readers will recognize this. Alternate translation: “For David said about the Messiah that he saw the Lord before him through all, for the Lord was at the Messiah’s right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ ACT 2 25 tqak figs-ellipsis διὰ παντός 1 The phrase **through all** i ACT 2 25 a146 figs-nominaladj ἐκ δεξιῶν μού 1 at my right Here the adjective **right** is being used as a noun to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could say that specifically. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 2 25 l6xp figs-metaphor ἐκ δεξιῶν μού 1 at my right In this context, to be at someone’s right side means to be in a position to help and sustain that person. Alternate translation: “there to help me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 25 a147 figs-metaphor μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 I should not be moved Here, **moved** means to be taken out of a safe and secure position, and so it means to be harmed. Alternate translation: “I will not be harmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 2 25 s4yp figs-activepassive μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 I should not be moved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one will harm me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 25 s4yp figs-activepassive μὴ σαλευθῶ 1 I should not be moved If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one will harm me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 26 a148 figs-quotesinquotes διὰ τοῦτο ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου, καὶ ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου; ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 Because of this, my heart was glad and my tongue exulted. And indeed, my flesh will also dwell in hope You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “Because of this, his heart was glad and his tongue exulted, and indeed his flesh would also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 2 26 z8vw figs-metaphor ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου 1 my heart was glad Here, the **heart** represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “I felt glad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 26 a149 figs-metonymy ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου 1 my tongue exulted Here, the **tongue** represents the capacity for speech. Alternate translation: “I said joyful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ ACT 2 28 a161 figs-quotemarks μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου 1 with y ACT 2 29 pv1x figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 29 ps7c figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” or “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 29 wh97 figs-metaphor τοῦ πατριάρχου Δαυεὶδ 1 the patriarch David A **patriarch** is literally the ancestor of a group of people. David was not the ancestor of all the Jews to whom Peter is speaking. So he is likely using the term to identify David as the king who established the Israelite kingdom as a lasting dynasty. Alternate translation: “David, the founder of our kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 2 29 vtc6 figs-activepassive ἐτάφη 1 he was buried If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people buried him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 29 vtc6 figs-activepassive ἐτάφη 1 he was buried If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people buried him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 29 a162 figs-idiom ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης 1 to this day Peter is using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 30 a163 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore Peter uses the word **Therefore** to introduce the logical result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “We can therefore conclude that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 2 30 a164 figs-explicit προφήτης…ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδὼς 1 being a prophet and having known Peter is still speaking about David. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because David was a prophet and he knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ ACT 2 30 x11q figs-metonymy ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτο ACT 2 30 hq71 figs-synecdoche ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ 1 to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne When Peter says that God promised to **set** one of David’s descendants **upon his throne**, he is using that one action to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 2 31 a165 writing-pronouns ἐλάλησεν…ἐνκατελείφθη…αὐτοῦ 1 he spoke … was he abandoned … his The first instance of **he** refers to David, and the second instance of **he** and the pronoun **his** refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 2 31 a166 figs-abstractnouns ἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 he spoke about the resurrection of the Christ If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 2 31 tn4b figs-activepassive οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην 1 neither was he abandoned to Hades If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 31 tn4b figs-activepassive οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην 1 neither was he abandoned to Hades If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 31 a167 figs-explicit τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the Christ **Christ** is the Greek word for “Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use the term “Messiah” in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 31 a168 translate-names ᾍδην 1 Hades See how you translated the term **Hades** in [2:27](../02/27.md). Alternate translation: “the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 2 31 a169 figs-idiom οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 nor did his flesh see decay Here the word **see** is being used to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “nor did his flesh experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ ACT 2 31 up5x figs-explicit οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν δ ACT 2 32 udn1 figs-idiom ἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός 1 God has raised up As in [2:24](../02/24.md), the idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “God has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 32 kw6a figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we By **we**, Peter means himself and the other apostles, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 2 33 a171 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore Peter is using the word **Therefore** to introduce a result. But it is not the immediate result of what he has just said. He is not saying that Jesus has done what the people see and hear because God raised him from the dead. Instead, this is an overall conclusion. Peter is saying that Jesus sending the Holy Spirit is the reason why the disciples are able to speak in other languages. The crowd should not conclude that they are babbling drunkenly, as some of them have suggested. UST models a way of expressing this sense of the word **Therefore**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ACT 2 33 kij2 figs-activepassive τῇ δεξιᾷ οὖν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς 1 having been exalted to the right of God If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “now that God has exalted Jesus to his right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 33 kij2 figs-activepassive τῇ δεξιᾷ οὖν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς 1 having been exalted to the right of God If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “now that God has exalted Jesus to his right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 33 c9mr figs-nominaladj τῇ δεξιᾷ…τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to the right of God Peter is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “to the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 2 33 a172 figs-explicit τῇ δεξιᾷ…τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to the right of God In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 33 a173 figs-possession τήν τε ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος τοῦ Ἁγίου 1 the promise of the Holy Spirit from the Father Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as someone whom God the Father promised to send. Alternate translation: “the promised Holy Spirit from the Father” or “the Holy Spirit whom the Father promised to send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ ACT 2 36 a177 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore Peter is using th ACT 2 36 msqt figs-imperative γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may all the house of Israel know” or “all the house of Israel should know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 2 36 tgbf figs-123person γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative, since to this point in his speech Peter has been addressing his audience in the second person. Alternate translation: “all you in the house of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) ACT 2 36 pnp5 figs-metaphor πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 all the house of Israel Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Israel** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 2 37 s85q figs-activepassive ἀκούσαντες…κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 hearing this, they were pierced in the heart If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 37 s85q figs-activepassive ἀκούσαντες…κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 hearing this, they were pierced in the heart If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 37 xan1 writing-pronouns κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 they were pierced in the heart Here the word **they** refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 2 37 w1ma κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 they were pierced in the heart Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **heart**. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in their hearts” ACT 2 37 l15x figs-metaphor κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 they were pierced in the heart Luke is speaking. The people were not literally **pierced in the heart** by anything. He means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “they felt guilty and became very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ ACT 2 37 zls6 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is ACT 2 37 a178 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 37 a179 figs-exclusive τί ποιήσωμεν 1 what should we do The people in the crowd are asking about themselves but not the apostles, so use the exclusive form of **we** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 2 38 a180 figs-you μετανοήσατε…βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστος ὑμῶν…τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν…λήμψεσθε 1 Repent … each of you be baptized … of your sins … you will receive The words **you** and **your** are plural, **you will receive** is a plural verb form, and the implied “you” in the imperative **Repent** is also plural. But the implied “you” in the imperative **be baptized** is singular, since the subject is **each**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -ACT 2 38 cmb7 figs-activepassive βαπτισθήτω 1 be baptized If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 38 cmb7 figs-activepassive βαπτισθήτω 1 be baptized If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 38 geb2 figs-idiom ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Peter has just finished demonstrating that God sent Jesus as the Christ or Messiah [2:36](../02/36.md). He is saying here that people should acknowledge that as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins. So **in the name** here is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 38 a181 figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν 1 for the forgiveness of your sins If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 39 a182 figs-metonymy ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία 1 the promise is Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in [2:33](../02/33.md). Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -363,23 +363,23 @@ ACT 2 39 v8vi figs-explicit πᾶσι τοῖς εἰς μακρὰν 1 to all w ACT 2 39 a185 figs-exclusive Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 the Lord our God By **the Lord our God**, Peter means the God of the Jews. He is speaking of himself and his fellow apostles and of the people in the crowd, so use the inclusive form of the word **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 2 39 a186 figs-idiom ἂν προσκαλέσηται 1 may call Peter is using the word **call** in an idiomatic sense here. Alternate translation: “may bring to salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 40 a187 figs-metonymy ἑτέροις…λόγοις πλείοσιν 1 with many other words Luke is using the term **words** to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 2 40 v6ip figs-hendiadys διεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς 1 he testified and urged them Here Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **urged** tells in what way Peter **testified** further about faith in Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “he testified urgently to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -ACT 2 40 a188 figs-activepassive σώθητε 1 Be saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “Let God save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 40 v6ip figs-hendiadys διεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς 1 he testified and urged them Here Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **urged** tells in what way Peter **testified** further about faith in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “he testified urgently to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +ACT 2 40 a188 figs-activepassive σώθητε 1 Be saved If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “Let God save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 40 wtd5 figs-explicit ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης 1 from this perverse generation The implication is that God is going to punish **this perverse generation**. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that this perverse generation will suffer if it does not repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 40 a189 figs-explicit τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης 1 this perverse generation The word **perverse** describes things or actions that do not conform to what is right and expected. Peter may be referring implicitly to how the people of this **generation** rejected and killed Jesus. Alternate translation: “this wicked generation that rejected and killed Jesus” or “the wicked people of this time who rejected and killed Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 41 k1kj writing-endofstory οὖν 1 Therefore Luke uses the word **Therefore** to introduce information about what happened after the story of Pentecost as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 2 41 r9qz figs-idiom ἀποδεξάμενοι τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 having received his word Here, **received** means that the people in the crowd accepted that what Peter said was true. Alternate translation: “because they believed his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 41 a190 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 his word Luke is using the term **word** to mean what Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 2 41 kz64 figs-activepassive οἱ…ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 41 kz64 figs-activepassive οἱ…ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 41 sv5j figs-synecdoche ψυχαὶ 1 souls Luke is using one part of these people, their **souls**, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 2 41 a47f figs-activepassive προσετέθησαν 1 were added If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 41 a47f figs-activepassive προσετέθησαν 1 were added If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 42 a191 figs-abstractnouns ἦσαν…προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς 1 they were continuing in the teaching of the apostles and in fellowship, in the breaking of bread and in prayers If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **teaching** and **fellowship**, you could express the same ideas with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 42 gc59 figs-synecdoche τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 in the breaking of bread Luke could be using the word **breaking** to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 2 42 a192 figs-explicit τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 in the breaking of bread By **the breaking of bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it and also sharing a cup of wine. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in observing the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 43 a193 figs-personification ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 fear was coming on every soul Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this **fear** as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 2 43 gi9v figs-synecdoche ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 fear was coming on every soul Luke is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 2 43 a194 figs-hyperbole ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 fear was coming on every soul Luke says **every** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “very many people began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 2 43 ys3y figs-explicit πολλά…τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο 1 many wonders and signs were happening through the apostles Since Luke says that these things happened **through the apostles**, the implication is that God was doing them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could make God the subject of this sentence and **wonders and signs** the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 2 43 ys3y figs-explicit πολλά…τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο 1 many wonders and signs were happening through the apostles Since Luke says that these things happened **through the apostles**, the implication is that God was doing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make God the subject of this sentence and **wonders and signs** the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 43 q6dm figs-doublet πολλά…τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα 1 many wonders and signs The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 2 44 u8qk ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “united in Christian fellowship” ACT 2 44 jy2w figs-hyperbole εἶχον ἅπαντα κοινά 1 had all things in common Luke may be saying **all** as a generalization to emphasize the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. The next verse explains more specifically how the believers showed this generosity, and you could give some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -392,17 +392,17 @@ ACT 2 46 q1ge figs-synecdoche κλῶντές…κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτο ACT 2 46 i2yk figs-metaphor ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας 1 with exultation and sincerity of heart Here, the **heart** represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 46 a195 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας 1 with exultation and sincerity of heart If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **exultation** and **sincerity**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 47 z6ig figs-hyperbole αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν 1 praising God and having favor with the whole people Luke says **the whole people** as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 2 47 kc42 figs-activepassive τοὺς σῳζομένους 1 those who were being saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 2 47 kc42 figs-activepassive τοὺς σῳζομένους 1 those who were being saved If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 47 a196 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “to their Christian fellowship” ACT 3 intro hpd9 0 # Acts 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The covenant God made with Abraham

This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews in fulfillment of the covenant that God made with Abraham.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Servant”

Twice in this chapter Peter uses the word “Servant” as a title to mean “Messiah” (3:13, 3:26). He and other believers use the word in the same sense twice in chapter 4 as well (4:27, 4:30). The word takes on this meaning by allusion to the book of Isaiah, where Isaiah uses it to mean the person whom God has chosen for the special purpose of bringing salvation. In your translation, indicate in some way that “Servant” is a Messianic title. Jesus was not a servant of God in the more ordinary sense, in which the believers apply it to themselves in 4:29, for example. Jesus was fully the Son of God, sent to earth on a special mission. If you would not be able to make this clear by using the word “Servant,” you may wish to use the word “Messiah” instead.

### “You killed” (3:15)

For the same reasons as when he was speaking on the day of Pentecost (2:23), Peter tells people in this chapter that they were guilty of killing Jesus. But he also tells them that they are the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus’ followers to invite them to repent (3:26). For further information and suggestions for how to make clear in your translation what Peter means, see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to chapter 2 and the notes to this phrase in 2:23 and 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]]) ACT 3 1 b5rm grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) ACT 3 1 br7i figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 to the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “to the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 3 1 a198 τὴν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this time in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon” +ACT 3 1 a198 τὴν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this time in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon” ACT 3 1 a199 translate-ordinal τὴν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -ACT 3 2 f227 figs-activepassive καί τις ἀνὴρ, χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχων, ἐβαστάζετο, ὃν ἐτίθουν καθ’ ἡμέραν πρὸς τὴν θύραν τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 And a certain man, being lame from the womb of his mother, was being carried, whom each day they placed at the gate of the temple If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **was being carried**. Alternate translation: “And there was a certain man who had been lame since birth whom people would carry to the temple every day and place at the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 3 2 f227 figs-activepassive καί τις ἀνὴρ, χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχων, ἐβαστάζετο, ὃν ἐτίθουν καθ’ ἡμέραν πρὸς τὴν θύραν τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 And a certain man, being lame from the womb of his mother, was being carried, whom each day they placed at the gate of the temple If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **was being carried**. Alternate translation: “And there was a certain man who had been lame since birth whom people would carry to the temple every day and place at the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 2 u6nu writing-background καί τις ἀνὴρ 1 And a certain man In this verse, Luke provides background information about this man to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 3 2 j68t figs-metonymy ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 from the womb of his mother Luke is describing the time of the lame man’s birth by association with the way he came from the **womb** of his **mother** when he was born. Alternate translation: “since birth” or “since he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 3 2 a200 figs-activepassive τὴν λεγομένην 1 that is called If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 3 2 a200 figs-activepassive τὴν λεγομένην 1 that is called If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 2 a201 translate-names Ὡραίαν 1 Beautiful **Beautiful** is the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 3 2 a202 figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερόν 1 into the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 3 3 a203 figs-explicit ἠρώτα ἐλεημοσύνην λαβεῖν 1 asked to receive alms The man specifically asked Peter and John to give him **alms** (that is, a charitable gift). Alternate translation: “asked to receive alms from them” or “asked them to give him alms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ ACT 3 6 t2vf figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστο ACT 3 6 a204 translate-names Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου 1 of Jesus Christ the Nazarene The word **Nazarene** describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 3 6 a205 figs-imperative περιπάτει 1 walk This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I give you the ability to walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 3 7 ec6j writing-pronouns πιάσας αὐτὸν τῆς δεξιᾶς χειρὸς, ἤγειρεν αὐτόν; παραχρῆμα δὲ ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά 1 seizing him by the right hand, he raised him up, and immediately his feet and ankles were made strong In this verse, the pronoun **he** refers to Peter, while the pronouns **him** and **his** refer to the lame man. You could indicate that specifically in at least some of the cases if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “seizing the man by the right hand, Peter raised him up, and immediately the man’s feet and ankles were made strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 3 7 a206 figs-activepassive ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά 1 his feet and ankles were made strong If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his feet and ankles became strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 3 7 a206 figs-activepassive ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά 1 his feet and ankles were made strong If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his feet and ankles became strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 8 a207 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to indicate that the events in this verse happened as a result of the events in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 3 8 abc1 writing-pronouns ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 he stood and began to walk, and he entered with them The pronoun **he** refers to the man who had been lame, and the pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John. You could indicate that specifically if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the man stood and began to walk, and the man entered with Peter and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 3 8 q13i figs-explicitinfo ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 Luke is using the word **began** to indicate that this man had been doing something else (sitting at the gate begging) but then began to do something new when was healed. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “he stood and walked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) @@ -422,18 +422,18 @@ ACT 3 8 zp7x figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 into the temple Only pri ACT 3 9 a208 figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ λαὸς 1 all the people The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was in the courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 3 10 zy7h ἐπεγίνωσκον…αὐτὸν, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ…καθήμενος 1 they recognized him, that he was the one sitting Alternate translation: “they realized that he was the man who had been sitting” ACT 3 10 p2zh translate-names τῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ 1 the Beautiful Gate This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 3 10 a209 figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 3 10 a209 figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 10 j6zf figs-doublet ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him The words **wonder** and **amazement** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. You can combine the words in your translation if that might be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with complete amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 3 10 a210 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him Luke is speaking as if the people were containers that these responses could fill. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him made them completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 10 a211 figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wonder** and **amazement**, you could express the same idea with verbs. Alternate translation: “they wondered and marveled greatly at what had happened to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 3 11 a212 figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ λαὸς 1 all the people The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 3 11 rk1m translate-names τῇ στοᾷ τῇ καλουμένῃ Σολομῶντος 1 the porch that is called Solomon’s This is the name of a covered walkway in the Jerusalem temple courtyard. It consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. People had named this porch after King Solomon. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 3 11 rj43 figs-activepassive τῇ καλουμένῃ 1 that is called If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 3 11 rj43 figs-activepassive τῇ καλουμένῃ 1 that is called If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 12 ndi3 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται 1 Men, Israelites This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 3 12 uyg1 figs-rquestion τί θαυμάζετε ἐπὶ τούτῳ 1 why do you marvel at this? Peter does not expect the crowd to tell him why they are marveling. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not marvel at this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 3 12 j6ld figs-rquestion ἢ ἡμῖν τί ἀτενίζετε, ὡς ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν? 1 Or why do you look intently at us, as if we have made him to walk by our own power or godliness? Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not stare at us. We did not make him walk by our own power or godliness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 3 12 g4y1 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν…ἰδίᾳ 1 at us … our own By **us** and **our own**, Peter means himself and John but not also the people in the crowd. So use the exclusive forms of **us** and **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 3 12 mwd9 figs-hendiadys ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ 1 by our own power or godliness Peter may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **or.** The term **godliness** describes what the crowd may consider the source or nature of the **power** that he and John have. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “by our own godly power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +ACT 3 12 mwd9 figs-hendiadys ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ 1 by our own power or godliness Peter may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **or.** The term **godliness** describes what the crowd may consider the source or nature of the **power** that he and John have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “by our own godly power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 3 13 q8q2 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ…Ἰσαὰκ…Ἰακώβ 1 Abraham … Isaac … Jacob These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 3 13 a213 figs-metaphor τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 13 kmqw figs-gendernotations τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 The term **fathers** could mean: (1) in a generic sense that includes both men and women, the ancestors of the Israelites. If you decide to retain this metaphor in your translation, you could say “fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (2) Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. In that case, Peter would be repeating the meaning of the previous phrase, and the term would have a masculine meaning. Alternate translation: “of the patriarchs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ ACT 3 14 a217 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But Peter uses this word to ACT 3 14 a218 figs-nominaladj τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 the Holy and Righteous One Peter is using both the adjective **Holy** and the adjective **Righteous** to indicate a certain person, Jesus. (ULT adds **One** to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who was holy and righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 3 14 a219 figs-doublet τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 the Holy and Righteous One The terms **Holy** and **Righteous** mean similar things. Peter is using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Supremely Holy One” or “Jesus, who was supremely holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 3 14 a220 figs-explicit τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον 1 the Holy and Righteous One This description of Jesus is an implicit assertion that he is the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 3 14 s6qj figs-activepassive ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν 1 for a man, a murderer, to be granted to you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “asked Pilate to release to you a man who was a murderer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 3 14 s6qj figs-activepassive ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν 1 for a man, a murderer, to be granted to you If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “asked Pilate to release to you a man who was a murderer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 15 a221 figs-synecdoche ἀπεκτείνατε 1 you killed It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “you demanded the death of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 3 15 ljn8 figs-explicit τὸν…Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς 1 the Originator of Life Peter is using the expression **the Originator of Life** as another title for Jesus. This expression could be a reference to the way Jesus, as the Son of God, took part in the original creation of all life. It could also be a reference to the way Jesus gives spiritual life to all who believe in him. Or it could mean both things. In any event, Peter is drawing a contrast between the life-giving Jesus whom the people rejected and the life-taking murderer whom they asked Pilate to release. It may be best in your translation to bring out this contrast while leaving the specific meaning open. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who gives life rather than taking it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 3 15 a222 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -466,18 +466,18 @@ ACT 3 18 ms6d διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 ACT 3 18 z3l7 figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of all the prophets Peter is using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what all the prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 18 a229 figs-hyperbole πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 of all the prophets Peter is using the word **all** as a generalization. It is true that the overall witness of Old Testament prophecy is that the Messiah would come first in humility and suffering, but not every prophet spoke specifically of the sufferings of Christ. Alternate translation: “of many prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 3 19 cw18 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψατε 1 turn back Peter is speaking of his listeners as if they were traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to **turn back** onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 3 19 zm6y figs-activepassive πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας 1 for your sins to be wiped away If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God will wipe away your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 3 19 zm6y figs-activepassive πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας 1 for your sins to be wiped away If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God will wipe away your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 19 a230 figs-metaphor πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας 1 for your sins to be wiped away Peter is speaking of sins as if they would be physically **wiped away** when God forgave them. Alternate translation: “so that God will forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 20 a231 figs-personification ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 so that times of refreshment may come from the face of the Lord Peter is speaking of these **times** as if they could actively **come** to his listeners on their own. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord may send you times of refreshing from his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 3 20 x3ca figs-abstractnouns καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως 1 times of refreshment If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **refreshment**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “refreshing” or “restful.” Alternate translation: “refreshing times” or “restful times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 3 20 f2wm figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 from the face of the Lord Peter is using the term **face** to represent the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 20 h3nk figs-explicit ἀποστείλῃ 1 he may send Peter is referring implicitly to Christ’s coming again. Alternate translation: “he may again send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 3 20 yzr6 figs-activepassive τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν 1 the one appointed for you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 3 20 yzr6 figs-activepassive τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν 1 the one appointed for you If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 21 vgn8 figs-personification ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι 1 whom it is necessary for heaven to receive Peter is speaking of **heaven** as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 3 21 x2f3 figs-abstractnouns ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων 1 the times of the restoration of all things If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **restoration**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 3 21 a2m8 figs-idiom ἀπ’ αἰῶνος 1 from the age The expression **from the age** means that something happened a long time ago. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 3 21 a12i figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων…αὐτοῦ προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of his holy prophets Peter is using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 3 22 a232 figs-quotesinquotes Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Moses indeed said, ‘The Lord our God will raise up for you a prophet like me from your brothers. You will listen to him according to everything—whatever he may speak to you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +ACT 3 22 a232 figs-quotesinquotes Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Moses indeed said, ‘The Lord our God will raise up for you a prophet like me from your brothers. You will listen to him according to everything—whatever he may speak to you If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 3 22 a233 translate-names Μωϋσῆς 1 Moses **Moses** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 3 22 a249 translate-textvariants Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 The Lord our God Some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 somewhat loosely but with the same basic meaning. ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God.” Peter would be quoting Deuteronomy 18:15 exactly. Still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 3 22 a250 figs-exclusive Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 The Lord our God Moses is speaking of himself and his fellow Israelites, whom he is addressing, so use the inclusive form of the word **our** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -485,8 +485,8 @@ ACT 3 22 v5nf figs-idiom ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει 1 will raise up for you ACT 3 22 t8di figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν 1 your brothers Moses is using the term **brothers** to mean people who are fellow descendants with his listeners of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 22 a234 figs-declarative αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα 1 You will listen to him according to everything Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must listen to everything he tells you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) ACT 3 22 a235 figs-idiom αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα 1 You will listen to him according to everything Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “You must obey every command that he gives you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 3 23 a236 figs-quotesinquotes ἔσται δὲ πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 But it will be that every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses also said that every soul that did not listen to that prophet would be destroyed from the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -ACT 3 23 t8a5 figs-activepassive πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 3 23 a236 figs-quotesinquotes ἔσται δὲ πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 But it will be that every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses also said that every soul that did not listen to that prophet would be destroyed from the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +ACT 3 23 t8a5 figs-activepassive πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 23 a237 figs-declarative πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people Moses could be using a future statement to give a command, in which case he would be telling the people to take this action. Alternate translation: “you must destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) ACT 3 23 a238 figs-synecdoche πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις 1 every soul that Moses is using one part of a person, the **soul**, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 3 23 a239 figs-idiom ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου 1 does not listen to that prophet Here, **listen** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “does not obey that prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -498,12 +498,12 @@ ACT 3 24 a241 figs-explicit τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας 1 these days Pete ACT 3 25 rh2n figs-metonymy ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 You are the sons of the prophets Peter is using the word **sons** in the sense of “heirs,” by association with the way that children inherit from their parents. He means that the Israelites living at this time are going to receive something as a legacy from those who lived before them. Alternate translation: “You are the ones who are going to receive what the prophets promised” or “You are the ones who are going to experience what the prophets foretold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 25 a242 figs-gendernotations οἱ υἱοὶ 1 the sons Although the term **sons** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “the sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 3 25 a243 figs-metonymy καὶ τῆς διαθήκης ἧς διέθετο ὁ Θεὸς πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 and of the covenant that God made with your fathers The figurative sense of **sons** as “heirs” continues in this phrase. Alternate translation: “and who are going to receive what God promised to your fathers when he made a covenant with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 3 25 a244 figs-quotesinquotes πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ, καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 with your fathers, saying to Abraham, ‘And in your seed will all the families of the earth be blessed’ If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “with your fathers when he said to Abraham that in his seed all the families of the earth would be blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +ACT 3 25 a244 figs-quotesinquotes πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ, καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 with your fathers, saying to Abraham, ‘And in your seed will all the families of the earth be blessed’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “with your fathers when he said to Abraham that in his seed all the families of the earth would be blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 3 25 a245 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 your fathers Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 25 wid4 figs-gendernotations τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 Although the term **fathers** is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “your fathers and mothers” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 3 25 mad5 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου 1 in your seed The term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “through your descendants” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 25 a246 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου 1 in your seed As the apostle Paul notes in [Galatians 3:16](../gal/03/16.md), God used the singular form of the word **seed** when he said this to Abraham, and so the ultimate fulfillment of this promise came when God sent Jesus as the Savior for everyone in the world who would believe in him. That may also be what Peter has in view here, since he refers in the next verse to God’s “Servant,” meaning the Messiah. Alternate translation: “through the Messiah, who will be your descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 3 25 a247 figs-activepassive ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 will all the families of the earth be blessed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will bless all the families of the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 3 25 a247 figs-activepassive ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 will all the families of the earth be blessed If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will bless all the families of the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 25 g31m figs-metonymy πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 all the families of the earth Here, **families** refers to people groups or nations by association with the way that many of them consist of people who have a common ancestry. Alternate translation: “all the nations of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 26 b7tz figs-idiom ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν 1 God, having raised up his Servant, sent him The expression **raised up** has the same meaning here as in [3:22](../03/22.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “When God appointed Jesus as the Messiah, he sent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 3 26 z5q6 τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ 1 his Servant See the discussion of the term **Servant** in the General Notes to this chapter, and see how you translated that term in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “his Messiah” @@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ ACT 4 4 qd8g figs-explicit ἐγενήθη…ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε 1 ACT 4 5 lw2d writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 4 5 cdj1 figs-explicit συναχθῆναι αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 their rulers and elders and scribes were gathered together Luke is implicitly describing the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling council, which consisted of these three groups of people. Luke describes this council explicitly as “the Sanhedrin” in [4:15](../04/15.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify it by name here. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, consisting of their rulers and elders and scribes, was gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 5 j6p8 writing-pronouns αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 their rulers and elders and scribes The pronoun **their** refers to the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the rulers and elders and scribes of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 4 5 i9tj figs-activepassive συναχθῆναι 1 were gathered together If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 5 i9tj figs-activepassive συναχθῆναι 1 were gathered together If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 6 a259 figs-explicit Ἅννας ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς, καὶ Καϊάφας 1 Annas the high priest, and Caiaphas Luke describes Annas as **the high priest**, but the actual situation was complicated. At this time the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea. One Roman official had appointed Annas some years earlier, but ten years after that, another official deposed him and named his son-in-law Caiaphas high priest instead. However, the Jews still recognized Annas’ claim to the position. If you decide to clarify this for your readers, it would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible. Alternate translation: “Annas, whom the Jews recognized as the high priest, and Caiaphas, whom a Roman official had appointed as the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 6 l44n translate-names Ἅννας…Καϊάφας…Ἰωάννης…Ἀλέξανδρος 1 Annas … Caiaphas … John … Alexander These are the names of four men. The **John** mentioned here was a member of the high priest’s family. This is not the same John as the apostle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 4 6 a260 ὅσοι ἦσαν ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ 1 as many as were from the high priestly family Alternate translation: “all the other members of the high priestly family who were members of the council” @@ -538,13 +538,13 @@ ACT 4 7 abc6 writing-pronouns στήσαντες αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ μέ ACT 4 7 t1eq figs-doublet ἐν ποίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο ὑμεῖς? 1 By what power or in what name have you done this? The words **power** and **name** (meaning authority; see next note) mean similar things. The council members may be using them together to ask a comprehensive or emphatic question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “By whatever means were you able to do this?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 4 7 jc21 figs-metonymy ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι 1 in what name Here, **name** refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by what authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 7 a261 figs-youdual ὑμεῖς 1 you Since the council members are speaking to two men, **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. (All other pronouns in this account that refer to Peter and John would also be dual, such as **them** in its two instances in this verse.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -ACT 4 8 su5x figs-activepassive Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν 1 Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the comparable expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 8 su5x figs-activepassive Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν 1 Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the comparable expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 8 a262 figs-metaphor Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν 1 Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said Luke is speaking of Peter as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 4 8 a263 figs-merism ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ πρεσβύτεροι 1 Rulers of the people and elders Peter is addressing the entire council by referring to its two components. Some of the members had ruling responsibilities. Others, the **elders**, were added to the council to bring its total membership up to 70, since according to [Exodus 24:1](../exo/24/01.md), that was the number of elders who accompanied Moses when God confirmed the covenant with Israel at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “You members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 4 8 a264 figs-explicit τοῦ λαοῦ 1 of the people Here, **the people** means specifically the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 9 pq85 figs-irony εἰ ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα ἐπὶ εὐεργεσίᾳ ἀνθρώπου ἀσθενοῦς, ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται 1 if we are being questioned today concerning a good deed to a sick man, by what means he was made well Peter is not suggesting seriously that the subject of the questioning is uncertain. He knows the subject, but he is suggesting ironically that it is uncertain so that he can describe it from his own perspective. The council asked by what power or authority he and John did “this,” implying that “this” was something bad, a public disturbance that troubled the authorities. In response, Peter asserts that “this” was instead something good, **a good deed to a sick man**. If it would be helpful to your readers, in your translation you could indicate the meaning that Peter is communicating through this irony. Alternate translation: “what we actually did was a good deed for a sick man, and if you want to know by what means he was made well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) -ACT 4 9 je6d figs-activepassive ἡμεῖς…ἀνακρινόμεθα 1 we are being questioned If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 4 9 b92n figs-activepassive οὗτος σέσωσται 1 he was made well If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he became healthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 9 je6d figs-activepassive ἡμεῖς…ἀνακρινόμεθα 1 we are being questioned If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 9 b92n figs-activepassive οὗτος σέσωσται 1 he was made well If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he became healthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 10 q9ss figs-imperative3p γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may this be known to you and to all the people of Israel” or “this should be known to you and to all the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 4 10 snd5 figs-activepassive γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 let it be known to you all and to all the people of Israel The word translated **known** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The adjective **known** expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. Alternate translation: “you and all the people of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 10 j3px writing-pronouns πᾶσιν ὑμῖν 1 to you all The pronoun **you** refers to the council members. Alternate translation: “to all of you council members” or “to all of you who are questioning us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -555,22 +555,22 @@ ACT 4 10 jyj6 figs-idiom ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν ACT 4 10 a267 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 4 11 nwg6 writing-pronouns οὗτός 1 He The pronoun **He** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 4 11 w195 figs-metaphor ὁ λίθος ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων, ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the stone that was rejected by you, the builders, which has been made into the head of the corner Peter is quoting from [Psalm 118:22](../psa/118/22.md), and the quotation contains a metaphor. This psalm is describing the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, we recommend that you translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 4 11 c1bh figs-activepassive ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων 1 that was rejected by you, the builders If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that you, the builders, rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 11 c1bh figs-activepassive ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων 1 that was rejected by you, the builders If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that you, the builders, rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 11 f1nx figs-idiom κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the head of the corner The phrase **the head of the corner** is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 4 12 a268 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία 1 there is no salvation in anyone else In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there is no salvation in no one else.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is the only one in whom there is salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 4 12 tq3z figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία 1 there is no salvation in anyone else If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **salvation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 4 12 l66w figs-activepassive οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον 1 there is no other name under heaven given If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 12 l66w figs-activepassive οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον 1 there is no other name under heaven given If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 12 iz7k figs-metonymy οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον…ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς 1 there is no other name … by which we must be saved Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 12 jm25 figs-idiom ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 under heaven This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [2:5](../02/05.md). Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 4 12 a269 figs-gendernotations ἐν ἀνθρώποις 1 among men Peter is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “among people” or “to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 4 12 gg8h figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς 1 by which we must be saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 12 gg8h figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς 1 by which we must be saved If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 12 tdw8 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 we Peter is using the word **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 4 13 r6d6 figs-idiom θεωροῦντες 1 seeing Luke is using the word **seeing** to mean that the council members noticed this and found it significant. Alternate translation: “taking note of” or “impressed with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 4 13 t6kc figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου 1 the boldness of Peter and John Here the abstract noun **boldness** refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the same idea with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 13 qaa5 figs-explicit καταλαβόμενοι 1 realizing The implication is that the Jewish leaders realized this because of the way Peter and John spoke. Alternate translation: “realizing from the way they spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 13 xn39 writing-pronouns ἐθαύμαζον; ἐπεγίνωσκόν τε αὐτοὺς, ὅτι σὺν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἦσαν 1 they marveled, and they recognized them, that they had been with Jesus Here the pronoun **they** refers in its first two instances to the council members, and in its third instance it refers to Peter and John, as does the pronoun **them**. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this and to state the meaning here more concisely. Alternate translation: “the council members marveled, and they recognized that Peter and John had been with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 4 13 erv7 figs-doublet ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί εἰσιν καὶ ἰδιῶται 1 they were uneducated and ordinary men The words **uneducated** and **ordinary** mean similar things. Both words indicate that Peter and John had no formal education. Luke uses them together for emphasis, to express from the council members’ perspective how amazed they were. Alternate translation: “they had no formal education at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ACT 4 14 h3cy figs-activepassive τόν…ἄνθρωπον…τὸν τεθεραπευμένον 1 the man who had been healed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 14 h3cy figs-activepassive τόν…ἄνθρωπον…τὸν τεθεραπευμένον 1 the man who had been healed If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 14 a270 writing-pronouns σὺν αὐτοῖς ἑστῶτα, τὸν τεθεραπευμένον, οὐδὲν εἶχον 1 standing with them, they had nothing The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John, and the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “standing with Peter and John, the council members had nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 4 14 fq4w figs-explicit οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν 1 they had nothing to say in opposition The implication is that anything the council members said **in opposition** would have been in an attempt to discredit the claim that the man had been healed in the name of Jesus. But there was nothing they could say, since the evidence that the claim was true was right in front of them in the person of the formerly lame man standing on his own. Alternate translation: “they had nothing to say to discredit the account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 15 ql31 writing-pronouns κελεύσαντες…αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους 1 having commanded them to go outside the Sanhedrin, they conferred among themselves The pronoun **them** refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun **they** refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ ACT 4 15 a272 figs-metonymy τοῦ Συνεδρίου 1 the Sanhedrin Luke is u ACT 4 16 p4g6 figs-rquestion τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις? 1 What should we do to these men? This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders were using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As [4:21](../04/21.md) indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) the leaders were asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 4 16 jn12 figs-hyperbole πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 everyone who lives in Jerusalem This is a generalization that the leaders are making to emphasize how widely the news of the healing has spread. Alternate translation: “people who live throughout Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 4 16 nh5s γνωστὸν σημεῖον 1 a notable sign Here the word **sign** has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [2:43](../02/43.md). It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “a remarkable miracle” -ACT 4 17 a273 figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ 1 so that it may not be spread If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that it does not spread” or “so that they will not spread it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 17 a273 figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ 1 so that it may not be spread If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that it does not spread” or “so that they will not spread it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 17 f71l figs-explicit ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ 1 so that it may not be spread By **it**, the council members do not mean the news of the man’s healing, since they have already said that everyone in Jerusalem knows about it. They mean the teaching that Jesus is Messiah, since they then try to prevent this from spreading by not allowing the apostles to speak to anyone about Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that this teaching about Jesus does not spread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 17 a274 ἐπὶ πλεῖον 1 unto more Alternate translation: “any further” ACT 4 17 w52j figs-metonymy λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 to speak in this name Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -603,7 +603,7 @@ ACT 4 22 gy8d writing-background ἐτῶν γὰρ ἦν πλειόνων τε ACT 4 22 a286 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Luke is using the word **For** to introduce the reason why the people were glorifying God. Alternate translation: “The people were glorifying God because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 4 22 ju4w figs-personification ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 the man to whom this sign of healing had happened Luke is speaking as if the **healing** had **happened** on its own. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 4 22 a287 figs-possession τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως 1 this sign of healing Luke is using the possessive form to describe a **sign** that consisted of a **healing**. The word **sign** has the same sense here that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in [2:22](../02/22.md) and [2:43](../02/43.md). It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “this miraculous healing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ACT 4 23 a288 figs-activepassive ἀπολυθέντες 1 having been released If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “after the council members had released Peter and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 23 a288 figs-activepassive ἀπολυθέντες 1 having been released If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “after the council members had released Peter and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 23 a289 figs-go ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἰδίους 1 they came to their own people In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went to their own people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 4 23 j2cx figs-explicit τοὺς ἰδίους 1 their own people The phrase **their own people** refers to the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 23 a290 figs-merism οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι 1 the chief priests and the elders As Peter does in [4:8](../04/08.md), here Luke is referring to the entire council by naming its two components. Alternate translation: “the members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) @@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ ACT 4 24 a293 figs-youformal σὺ 1 you The word **you** is singular, and it re ACT 4 24 a160 figs-merism ποιήσας τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 who made the heaven and the earth and the sea and all that is in them The believers are referring to all of creation by naming its components. Alternate translation: “who created everything that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 4 24 a294 τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 the heaven The believers are using the word translated **heaven** in one of its specific senses to mean the sky. Alternate translation: “the sky” ACT 4 25 ka83 figs-metonymy ὁ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών 1 the one who said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant The word **mouth** refers to what David said by using his mouth. Alternate translation: “the one whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 4 25 vc5z figs-quotesinquotes τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών, ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά? 1 who said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant, ‘Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things?’ As the believers pray together, they quote from one of the psalms that David composed, [Psalm 2:1–2](../psa/02/01.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to ask why the nations raged and why the peoples imagined useless things.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +ACT 4 25 vc5z figs-quotesinquotes τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών, ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά? 1 who said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant, ‘Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things?’ As the believers pray together, they quote from one of the psalms that David composed, [Psalm 2:1–2](../psa/02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to ask why the nations raged and why the peoples imagined useless things.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 4 25 a295 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our The believers are using the word **our** to refer to themselves but not to God, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 4 25 kat6 figs-metaphor τοῦ πατρὸς 1 father Here, **father** means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 4 25 a296 παιδός 1 servant The believers are using the word **servant** here in its ordinary sense, not as a title for the Messiah, so it would not be appropriate to translate it as “Messiah,” as you may have done when it was a title in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [3:26](../03/26.md). @@ -624,15 +624,15 @@ ACT 4 25 a298 figs-parallelism ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ ACT 4 25 f1x6 figs-rquestion ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά? 1 Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things? In this psalm, David uses the question form to emphasize the futility of opposing God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The nations should not have raged, and the peoples should not have imagined useless things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 4 25 h6rc translate-names ἔθνη 1 the Gentiles The term **nations** refers to people groups that are not Jewish. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 4 25 w622 figs-explicit κενά 1 useless things The phrase **useless things** implicitly describes plans to oppose God, which can never succeed. Alternate translation: “ways to oppose God, which always prove useless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 4 26 fb5a figs-quotesinquotes παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ κατὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ This is the rest of the quotation from Psalm 2 that the believers started in [4:25](../04/25.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David said that the kings of the earth had taken their stand and the rulers had gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +ACT 4 26 fb5a figs-quotesinquotes παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ κατὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ This is the rest of the quotation from Psalm 2 that the believers started in [4:25](../04/25.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David said that the kings of the earth had taken their stand and the rulers had gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 4 26 w2by figs-parallelism παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same In keeping with the conventions of Hebrew poetry, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. If the repetition might be confusing for your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth took their stand, yes, the rulers were gathered to the same” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) ACT 4 26 w64b figs-idiom παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς 1 The kings of the earth took their stand The expression **took their stand** describes an army lining up for battle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth lined up their troops for battle” or “The kings of the earth formed their battle lines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 4 26 a299 figs-activepassive οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν 1 the rulers were gathered If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the rulers gathered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 26 a299 figs-activepassive οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν 1 the rulers were gathered If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the rulers gathered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 26 a300 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Here it could mean “by agreement” or “in the same place.” You could use either phrase as an alternate translation. ACT 4 26 yv19 figs-explicit τοῦ Κυρίου…τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 the Lord … his Christ Here the word **Lord** refers to God and the word **Christ** refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … his Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 27 a301 translate-names Ἡρῴδης 1 Herod **Herod** is the name of a man. He was the official whom the Romans appointed to rule Galilee during the time of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 4 27 a302 translate-names Πόντιος Πειλᾶτος 1 Pontius Pilate This is the full name of the man who was the governor of Judea during the time of Jesus. See how you translated the name **Pilate** in [3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 4 27 b1g9 figs-activepassive συνήχθησαν 1 were gathered together If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 27 b1g9 figs-activepassive συνήχθησαν 1 were gathered together If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 27 nuc1 figs-explicit ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 in this city The phrase **this city** refers to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 27 ca33 παῖδά 1 Servant Here the word **Servant** is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to chapter 3, and see how you translated it in [3:13](../03/13.md) and [3:26](../03/26.md). Alternate translation: “Messiah” ACT 4 27 a303 figs-metaphor ὃν ἔχρισας 1 whom you anointed In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person who was being given the authority to assume an office or to do a special task. The believers are speaking of anointing to indicate that God appointed Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “whom you appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -649,9 +649,9 @@ ACT 4 30 a308 figs-doublet σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα 1 signs and wonde ACT 4 30 t5uw figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος 1 through the name Here, **name** refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 30 txb5 τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ ἁγίου παιδός σου, Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of your holy Servant Jesus Here the word **Servant** is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to chapter 3, and see how you translated it in [3:13](../03/13.md), [3:26](../03/26.md), and [4:27](../04/27.md). Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus, your holy Messiah” ACT 4 31 a309 writing-endofstory καὶ 1 And This verse is the end of the whole story of how the lame man was healed and how Peter and John were arrested as a result. Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 4 31 a310 figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ ἦσαν συνηγμένοι 1 in which they were gathered together If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “where they had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 4 31 x9b3 figs-activepassive ἐσαλεύθη 1 was shaken If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “shook” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 4 31 ps3m figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the same expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 31 a310 figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ ἦσαν συνηγμένοι 1 in which they were gathered together If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “where they had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 31 x9b3 figs-activepassive ἐσαλεύθη 1 was shaken If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “shook” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 31 ps3m figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the same expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 31 a311 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 4 31 a312 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 31 a313 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας 1 with boldness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **boldness**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -663,19 +663,19 @@ ACT 4 32 zyp5 figs-hyperbole ἦν αὐτοῖς πάντα κοινά 1 everyt ACT 4 33 a317 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 of the resurrection of the Lord Jesus If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “of how God made the Lord Jesus alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 33 a318 writing-pronouns χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 great grace was upon them all The pronoun **them** refers back to “the multitude of those who believed” in [4:32](../04/32.md). It does not refer just to the **apostles**, who are mentioned in this verse. Alternate translation: “great grace was upon all of the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 4 33 d8dr figs-abstractnouns χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 great grace was upon them all If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **grace**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. The word could describe: (1) how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 4 34 a331 translate-versebridge οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνδεής τις ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 For there was not anyone needy among them This statement expresses the result of the rest of what Luke says in this verse and what he says in the next verse. If your readers would misunderstand this to put this result after the reasons for it, you could create a verse bridge by moving this statement to the end of the next verse and beginning it with the word “So” instead of **For**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) +ACT 4 34 a331 translate-versebridge οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνδεής τις ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 For there was not anyone needy among them This statement expresses the result of the rest of what Luke says in this verse and what he says in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language to put this result after the reasons for it, you could create a verse bridge by moving this statement to the end of the next verse and beginning it with the word “So” instead of **For**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 4 34 a319 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Luke uses the word **For** in its first instance in this verse to introduce the evidence or reason for his statement at the end of the previous verse that “great grace was upon them all.” The meaning here depends on the meaning there. Alternate translation: (1) “The way God was blessing the believers could be seen in the fact that” or (2) “One thing that made the people think very highly of the believers was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 4 34 a320 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 for Luke uses the word **for** in its second instance in this verse to introduce the reason why no one in the community of believers was needy. Alternate translation: “and the reason for this was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 4 34 gw3v figs-hyperbole ὅσοι γὰρ κτήτορες χωρίων ἢ οἰκιῶν ὑπῆρχον 1 all who were owners of lands or houses The phrase **as many as** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many believers who owned lands or houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 4 34 l938 figs-activepassive τὰς τιμὰς τῶν πιπρασκομένων 1 the price of the things being sold If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the money that they received from the things they sold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 34 l938 figs-activepassive τὰς τιμὰς τῶν πιπρασκομένων 1 the price of the things being sold If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the money that they received from the things they sold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 35 a321 translate-symaction ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 they were laying it at the feet of the apostles The expression **laying it at the feet** indicates that believers who sold possessions were putting the money they received onto the ground in front of the apostles. In this culture, that was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction) ACT 4 35 vv4z translate-symaction ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 they were laying it at the feet of the apostles In this culture, putting the money on the ground in front of the apostles was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 4 35 a322 figs-activepassive διεδίδετο 1 it was being distributed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles were distributing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 35 a322 figs-activepassive διεδίδετο 1 it was being distributed If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles were distributing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 35 ps4s figs-abstractnouns ἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν 1 to each one, according as anyone had need If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **need**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “to every person in the amount that he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 36 uc2a writing-participants Ἰωσὴφ δὲ 1 Then Joseph Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 4 36 a323 translate-names Ἰωσὴφ…Βαρναβᾶς 1 Joseph … Barnabas **Joseph** and **Barnabas** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 4 36 a324 figs-activepassive ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 who was called Barnabas by the apostles If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 4 36 a325 figs-activepassive ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form **being translated** with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 36 a324 figs-activepassive ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 who was called Barnabas by the apostles If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 4 36 a325 figs-activepassive ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form **being translated** with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 36 a326 figs-explicit ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Barnabas means when **translated** from the Aramaic language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement in Aramaic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 36 nr4v figs-idiom υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 Son of Encouragement The expression **Son of** describes a person who shares the qualities of something. The apostles used this name to describe Joseph’s behavior and character, since he was a person who encouraged others. Alternate translation: “the Encourager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 4 36 a327 figs-abstractnouns υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 Son of Encouragement If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **Encouragement**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “the One who Encourages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -699,7 +699,7 @@ ACT 5 3 zz5u figs-metonymy ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅ ACT 5 3 a336 figs-explicit καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς 1 and to keep back from the price of the land The implication of what Peter says here is that Ananias claimed or pretended that he was giving the entire amount that he had received from selling his land. Alternate translation: “by pretending that you were giving us the entire amount when you had kept back some for yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 4 vu7g figs-rquestion οὐχὶ μένον σοὶ ἔμενεν, καὶ πραθὲν ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν? 1 While it remained, did it not remain yours, and being sold, was it not in your authority? Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “While it remained, it remained yours, and after it was sold, it was still in your authority.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 5 4 vi8w ἔμενεν 1 While it remained Alternate translation: “While it remained unsold” or “Before you sold it” -ACT 5 4 k7nc figs-activepassive πραθὲν 1 being sold If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “once you had sold it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 4 k7nc figs-activepassive πραθὲν 1 being sold If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “once you had sold it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 4 a337 writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν 1 was it not in your authority The pronoun **it** refers to the money that Ananias received from the sale of the land. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could still do whatever you wanted with the money you received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 5 4 a338 writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν 1 was it not in your authority The implications are that Ananias was not obligated to give all of the money to the apostles. He was free to keep some if he wished or if he needed it. He could simply have acknowledged that he was doing that, and giving the rest of the money would still have been a generous act because there was no compulsion. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could have kept some and acknowledged that and you would have still been making a generous gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 5 4 i5dw figs-rquestion τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο? 1 How is it that you placed this thing in your heart? Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have placed this thing in your heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -721,7 +721,7 @@ ACT 5 8 a350 ἀπεκρίθη…πρὸς αὐτὴν 1 said to her The word ACT 5 8 a351 figs-youdual ἀπέδοσθε 1 you sold Since Peter is speaking of two people, Ananaias and Sapphira, **you** would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) ACT 5 8 bcf6 figs-explicit τοσούτου…ναί, τοσούτου 1 for so much … yes, for so much This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles. Peter may be naming the amount or, as UST suggests, he may be showing Sapphira the money. Alternate translation: “for this amount of money … yes, for that amount of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 9 v7sw figs-rquestion τί ὅτι συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου? 1 How is it that it was agreed together by you to test the Spirit of the Lord? Peter is using the question form to rebuke Sapphira. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 5 9 hc22 figs-activepassive συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν 1 it was agreed together by you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you agreed together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 9 hc22 figs-activepassive συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν 1 it was agreed together by you If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you agreed together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 9 w1lb figs-you ὑμῖν…σου…σε 1 by you … your … you The word **you** in its first instance refers to two people, Ananias and Sapphira, so it would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. The word **your** and the word **you** in its second instance refer only to Sapphira, so those words are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 5 9 pg1e πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 to test the Spirit of the Lord Here the word **test** means to challenge. Ananias and Sapphira were trying to see if they could get away with lying about how much they received for the land they sold. Alternate translation: “to challenge the Spirit of the Lord” ACT 5 9 a352 figs-metonymy πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 to test the Spirit of the Lord Ananias and Sapphira actually tested or challenged the apostles, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of their act, as he does similarly in [5:3](../05/03.md) and [5:4](../05/04.md). Since the Spirit of the Lord was present in the apostles, by challenging them, Ananias and Sapphira effectively lied to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “to test the Spirit of the Lord, who is present in us apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -744,7 +744,7 @@ ACT 5 12 k99k translate-names τῇ Στοᾷ Σολομῶντος 1 the Porch ACT 5 13 a360 figs-explicit τῶν…λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς 1 none of the others The expression **the others** refers to people who were not believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “none of the people who were not believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 13 a361 figs-explicit ἐτόλμα κολλᾶσθαι αὐτοῖς 1 dared to join them If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why no unbelievers **dared to join them**. The reason seems to be that the Jewish leaders had commanded the apostles not to speak or teach about Jesus ([4:18](../04/18.md)), but they were still doing that. Later in this chapter, in [5:28](../05/28.md), the Sanhedrin indicates that it has arrested the apostles for violating that command. Alternate translation: “would meet with them, because the apostles were still preaching about Jesus even though the Jewish leaders had commanded them not to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 14 a362 figs-metonymy προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 were being added to the Lord Luke says **the Lord** to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 5 14 m9wx figs-activepassive προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 were being added to the Lord If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:41](../02/41.md). Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 14 m9wx figs-activepassive προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 were being added to the Lord If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:41](../02/41.md). Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 14 oxni writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 5 15 a364 grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 so that Luke says **so that** to introduce a result, but it is not the direct result of what he said just before, that many men and women became part of the church. It is the result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md), that the apostles were doing “many signs and wonders.” All of [5:12–15](../05/12.md) could be understood as a single sentence, and in that case what Luke says here would more clearly follow logically and grammatically from what he says in [5:12](../05/12.md). However, ULT divides the material into several sentences, which is another way in which it can be understood. UST models a way to show how what Luke says here introduces a result of what he said in [5:12](../05/12.md) about the “signs and wonders” that the apostles were doing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 5 15 l9bs writing-pronouns ἐκφέρειν 1 they … carried The pronoun **they** refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people who lived in Jerusalem … carried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -753,12 +753,12 @@ ACT 5 15 a366 figs-doublet κλιναρίων καὶ κραβάττων 1 cots ACT 5 15 y2ev figs-explicit ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν 1 his shadow might overshadow any one of them The implication is that God was healing sick people whom Peter’s shadow touched. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his shadow might overshadow any one of them and God would heal that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 15 a367 ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν 1 his shadow might overshadow Luke is using a construction in which the subject and verb come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have its own way of describing this. Alternate translation: “his shadow might fall on” ACT 5 16 a368 figs-nominaladj ἀσθενεῖς 1 the sick See how you translated the expression **the sick** in [5:15](../05/15.md). Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 5 16 fu1a figs-activepassive ὀχλουμένους ὑπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων 1 those afflicted by unclean spirits If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom unclean spirits were afflicting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 5 16 lyc7 figs-activepassive οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες 1 who were all healed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the apostles healed them all” or “and God used the apostles to heal them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 16 fu1a figs-activepassive ὀχλουμένους ὑπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων 1 those afflicted by unclean spirits If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom unclean spirits were afflicting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 16 lyc7 figs-activepassive οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες 1 who were all healed If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the apostles healed them all” or “and God used the apostles to heal them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 16 a369 figs-hyperbole οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες 1 who were all healed It does not appear that **all** is a generalization for emphasis in this case. So it would not be accurate to treat **all** as figurative and say something like “and large numbers of them were healed.” Luke is describing what remarkable things God did through the apostles at this time, and he does seem to mean that every sick person whom the people brought to Jerusalem was healed. So it would be appropriate to say in your translation just what ULT says here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 5 17 x2ed grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But Luke uses the word **But** to introduce a strong contrast into the story. Your language may have its own way of introducing a contrasting narrative. You could also refer back to the previous action in order to highlight the contrast. Alternate translation: “But even though the apostles were doing so much good,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ACT 5 17 f9ye figs-events ἀναστὰς…ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου, 1 rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy The high priest and these Sadducees were first **filled with jealousy** and then they rose up (took action) against the apostles. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) -ACT 5 17 pc45 figs-activepassive ἀναστὰς…ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου, 1 rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **were filled**. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 17 pc45 figs-activepassive ἀναστὰς…ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου, 1 rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **were filled**. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 17 a370 figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 rising up Here the expression **rising up** means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “taking action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 17 a371 figs-explicit πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων 1 all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) The phrase **all those with him** means specifically all the other priests who joined the high priest in taking action against the apostles. Luke observes here that those other priests were from the group known as the **Sadducees**. As a note to [4:1](../04/01.md) explains, they opposed the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of the priests from the group known as the Sadducees who wanted to oppose the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 17 a372 figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 were filled with jealousy If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **jealousy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -777,7 +777,7 @@ ACT 5 21 a378 figs-explicit παραγενόμενος 1 having arrived This doe ACT 5 21 a379 figs-explicit τὸ Συνέδριον καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Γερουσίαν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 the Sanhedrin, even all the elders of the sons of Israel The phrase **even all the elders of the sons of Israel** clarifies the name **Sanhedrin** by describing it membership. Luke is using the word **elders** here in a general sense to mean “leaders.” He is not making a distinction between “elders” and “rulers” as he does in [4:5](../04/05.md). Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, which was composed of the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 21 a380 figs-metaphor τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 the sons of Israel Here, **sons** means “descendants.” Luke is identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 5 21 li6a figs-ellipsis ἀπέστειλαν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον 1 sent to the prison Luke is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He means that the high priest and his allies sent someone to the prison to get the apostles. Alternate translation: “sent someone to the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 5 23 a381 figs-activepassive τὸ δεσμωτήριον εὕρομεν κεκλεισμένον ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, καὶ τοὺς φύλακας 1 We found the prison shut in all security and the guards If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form in place of the passive form **shut**, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We found that the guards had shut the prison in all security and we found the guards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 23 a381 figs-activepassive τὸ δεσμωτήριον εὕρομεν κεκλεισμένον ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, καὶ τοὺς φύλακας 1 We found the prison shut in all security and the guards If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an active verbal form in place of the passive form **shut**, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We found that the guards had shut the prison in all security and we found the guards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 23 a382 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ 1 in all security If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **security**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “securely.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very securely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 5 23 a383 figs-explicit ἀνοίξαντες 1 having opened Your language may require you to specify the object of **opened**. Alternate translation: “once we opened the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 23 ld7d figs-hyperbole ἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν 1 we found no one inside By **no one**, the officers mean that they found none of the men they had been sent to bring, that is, none of the apostles. It is possible that other people were also being held in the prison, but the angel would not have released them, and they would still have been inside. Alternate translation: “we did not find any of the apostles inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -821,7 +821,7 @@ ACT 5 34 i2rr writing-participants τις…Φαρισαῖος ὀνόματι ACT 5 34 a400 translate-names Φαρισαῖος 1 Pharisee The name **Pharisee** describes a member of a group of Jewish priests. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 5 34 a401 translate-names Γαμαλιήλ 1 Gamaliel **Gamaliel** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 5 34 a402 writing-background νομοδιδάσκαλος τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 a law teacher, honored by all the people Luke provides this background information about Gamaliel to help readers understand what happens next in the story, when the council members follow Gamaliel’s advice to be patient rather than acting immediately against the apostles. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to do that in a separate sentence, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 5 34 fpr4 figs-activepassive τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 honored by all the people If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 34 fpr4 figs-activepassive τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 honored by all the people If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 34 a403 figs-hyperbole τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 honored by all the people The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “whom the people greatly honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 5 34 a404 translate-symaction ἀναστὰς 1 rising up Here, **rising up** means that Gamaliel stood up. He did that to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 5 34 xk6g figs-explicit ἐκέλευσεν ἔξω…τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι 1 commanded to put the apostles outside Your language may require you to specify the object of **commanded**. Alternate translation: “commanded the officers to take the apostles outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -833,10 +833,10 @@ ACT 5 36 a408 figs-idiom πρὸ…τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν 1 before ACT 5 36 a409 translate-names Θευδᾶς 1 Theudas **Theudas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 5 36 uaj6 figs-metaphor ἀνέστη 1 rose up In this context, **rose up** means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 5 36 b3nl figs-idiom λέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν 1 saying himself to be somebody In this context, the expression **somebody** means a person of importance. Your language may use this expression in the same way. Or, if it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “saying that he was an important person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 5 36 a410 figs-activepassive ᾧ προσεκλίθη ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμὸς 1 to whom was joined a number of men If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom a number of men joined” or, as a new sentence, “A number of men joined him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 5 36 ie3x figs-activepassive ὃς ἀνῃρέθη 1 who was killed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. It may be helpful to begin another new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans killed” or, as a new sentence, “But the Romans killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 5 36 juz1 figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ 1 as many as were persuaded by him If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 5 36 a411 figs-activepassive διελύθησαν 1 were dispersed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “dispersed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 36 a410 figs-activepassive ᾧ προσεκλίθη ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμὸς 1 to whom was joined a number of men If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom a number of men joined” or, as a new sentence, “A number of men joined him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 36 ie3x figs-activepassive ὃς ἀνῃρέθη 1 who was killed If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. It may be helpful to begin another new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans killed” or, as a new sentence, “But the Romans killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 36 juz1 figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ 1 as many as were persuaded by him If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 36 a411 figs-activepassive διελύθησαν 1 were dispersed If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “dispersed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 36 rzg5 καὶ ἐγένοντο εἰς οὐδέν 1 and they came to nothing Alternate translation: “and their plans did not succeed” ACT 5 37 f33y figs-nominaladj μετὰ τοῦτον 1 After this one Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Theudas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “After him” or “After Theudas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 5 37 a412 translate-names Ἰούδας ὁ Γαλιλαῖος 1 Judas the Galilean The word **Judas** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name in [1:13](../01/13.md) and [1:16](../01/16.md). (Those verses describe two other men with this name, not the same Judas as here.) **Galilean** is the name for someone who is from the region of Galilee. See how you translated that name in [1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -845,19 +845,19 @@ ACT 5 37 p56f figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφ ACT 5 37 kz4s figs-idiom ἀπέστησε λαὸν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ 1 drew away people after him Here, **drew away** is an idiom that means Judas persuaded people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “persuaded people to join him in rebellion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 37 a414 figs-nominaladj κἀκεῖνος 1 That one also Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective **that** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “He also” or “Judas also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 5 37 a415 figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ 1 as many as were persuaded by him If your language would not use the passive form **were persuaded**, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 5 37 a416 figs-activepassive διεσκορπίσθησαν 1 were scattered If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 37 a416 figs-activepassive διεσκορπίσθησαν 1 were scattered If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 38 i4bw καὶ τὰ νῦν λέγω ὑμῖν 1 And now I say these things to you Gamaliel uses this expression to shift the council members’ attention away from the stories of Theudas and Judas so that he could give them some direct advice. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose. ACT 5 38 a417 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Gamaliel is using the word translated **And** to introduce what he wants the council to conclude as a result of the two examples he has given. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 5 38 wz89 ἀπόστητε ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων τούτων καὶ ἄφετε αὐτούς 1 keep away from these men and release them When Gamaliel tells the council to **keep away from these men**, he implicitly means that they should not execute them, as [5:33](../05/33.md) says they wanted to do. Alternate translation: “do not execute these men or put them back in prison” ACT 5 38 zh1d ἐὰν ᾖ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἡ βουλὴ αὕτη ἢ τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο 1 if this counsel or this work is from men Alternate translation: “if men have devised this plan or are doing this work” ACT 5 38 a418 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 men Gamaliel is using the term **men** in a generic sense to mean “humans.” Since he contrasts **from men** here with “from God” in the next verse, it may be appropriate to add the word “mere” to help show that contrast. Alternate translation: “mere humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 5 38 uql8 figs-activepassive καταλυθήσεται 1 it will be destroyed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “someone will destroy it” or “it will not last” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 38 uql8 figs-activepassive καταλυθήσεται 1 it will be destroyed If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “someone will destroy it” or “it will not last” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 39 a419 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 but Gamaliel uses this word to introduce a contrast between what would happen if the work the apostles are doing were “from men” and what would happen if it were **from God**. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ACT 5 39 j819 writing-pronouns εἰ…ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 if it is from God Here the pronoun **it** refers back to the phrase “this counsel or this work” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 5 39 a420 figs-explicit μήποτε 1 lest It may be helpful to state the implications of the word **lest** explicitly. Alternate translation: “and if you do try to destroy them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 5 39 a421 figs-activepassive καὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε 1 you may even be found If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is also an idiom (see next note), it would only be meaningful to do that in your translation if your language uses the verb “find” in the same idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “people may even find you to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 39 a421 figs-activepassive καὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε 1 you may even be found If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is also an idiom (see next note), it would only be meaningful to do that in your translation if your language uses the verb “find” in the same idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “people may even find you to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 39 a422 figs-activepassive εὑρεθῆτε 1 be found The expression **be found** means to turn out to be something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “turn out to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 5 39 cyp1 figs-activepassive ἐπείσθησαν…αὐτῷ 1 they were persuaded by him If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 5 39 cyp1 figs-activepassive ἐπείσθησαν…αὐτῷ 1 they were persuaded by him If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 40 z31c grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce what the Sanhedrin did as a result of Gamaliel’s advice. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 5 40 p6lz figs-synecdoche προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν 1 summoning the apostles, having beaten them, they commanded them The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 5 40 fca9 figs-metonymy λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 to speak in the name of Jesus The Sanhedrin members are using the term **name** to mean the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “to speak about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -872,7 +872,7 @@ ACT 6 1 f8br writing-newevent ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύται ACT 6 1 cg5t figs-idiom ἐν…ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 6 1 e7vb translate-names τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν 1 of the Hellenists **Hellenists** was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 1 ftz8 translate-names τοὺς Ἑβραίους 1 the Hebrews In this context, Luke is using the name **Hebrews** to mean Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke Aramaic, a language closely related to Hebrew, and who did not follow Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 6 1 s4qy figs-activepassive παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν 1 their widows were being overlooked in the daily service If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 6 1 s4qy figs-activepassive παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν 1 their widows were being overlooked in the daily service If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 6 1 rde8 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ 1 in the daily service If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **service**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 2 kwvo grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 So Luke is using the word **So** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 6 2 n5r4 figs-nominaladj οἱ δώδεκα 1 the Twelve Luke is using the adjective **Twelve** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people, the apostles who led the church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -881,7 +881,7 @@ ACT 6 2 jm17 figs-metaphor καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ ACT 6 2 w9re figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 2 fwk6 figs-metaphor διακονεῖν τραπέζαις 1 to serve tables To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 6 3 lcyx figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 6 3 p1yz figs-activepassive ἄνδρας…μαρτυρουμένους 1 men being attested The expression **being attested** is a passive verbal form. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 6 3 p1yz figs-activepassive ἄνδρας…μαρτυρουμένους 1 men being attested The expression **being attested** is a passive verbal form. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 6 3 mgid figs-metaphor πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 full of the Spirit and of wisdom The apostles are speaking of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 6 3 pxe5 figs-abstractnouns πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 full of the Spirit and of wisdom If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 3 i27a figs-metaphor ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης 1 over this task When the apostles say that they will appoint these men **over** the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -905,7 +905,7 @@ ACT 6 8 h8sg figs-hendiadys Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος κα ACT 6 8 xscq figs-abstractnouns Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **grace** and **power**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 8 m0zh figs-doublet τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα 1 great wonders and signs The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 6 9 d74m figs-idiom ἀνέστησαν 1 rose up Here the expression **rose up** means that these people took action, specifically to oppose Stephen, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action to oppose Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 6 9 nei0 figs-activepassive τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 the synagogue called Freedmen If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 6 9 nei0 figs-activepassive τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 the synagogue called Freedmen If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 6 9 k88n figs-explicit τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 the synagogue called Freedmen The word **Freedmen** probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 6 9 e7b0 translate-names Κυρηναίων…Ἀλεξανδρέων…Κιλικίας…Ἀσίας 1 of the Cyrenians…of the Alexandrians…Cilicia…Asia The word **Cyrenians** is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and the word **Alexandrians** is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. The words **Cilicia** and **Asia** are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 10 v5ia figs-idiom οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι 1 they were not able to stand against In this context, the expression **stand against** means to try to defeat by argument. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -918,7 +918,7 @@ ACT 6 11 dgxi translate-names Μωϋσῆν 1 Moses **Moses** is the name of a m ACT 6 12 tqk9 writing-pronouns συνεκίνησάν 1 They…stirred up In this verse and the next one, the word “they” continues to refer back to the opponents of Stephen who are named in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 6 12 l251 figs-metaphor συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 They also stirred up the people, the elders, and the scribes Luke says that Stephen’s opponents **stirred up** these other groups, as if calm waters were being disturbed. He means that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 6 12 dkbj translate-names Συνέδριον 1 Sanhedrin **Sanhedrin** is the name of the Jewish ruling council. See how you translated it in [4:14](../04/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 6 13 zv6s figs-doublenegatives οὐ παύεται λαλῶν 1 does not stop speaking If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **stop**. Alternate translation: “continually speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +ACT 6 13 zv6s figs-doublenegatives οὐ παύεται λαλῶν 1 does not stop speaking If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **stop**. Alternate translation: “continually speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 6 13 ju6w figs-metonymy λαλῶν ῥήματα 1 speaking words The men are using the term **words** to mean things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 13 o3j2 figs-metonymy τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου 1 the holy place The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a **holy place**. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 14 c5l9 translate-names ὁ Ναζωραῖος 1 the Nazarene The word **Nazarene** describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in [2:23](../02/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1000,7 +1000,7 @@ ACT 7 19 qwbi writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 **He** refers to the new king of E ACT 7 19 z312 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 Here and frequently throughout the rest of his speech to the Sanhedrin, Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 19 ug6c figs-gendernotations τοὺς πατέρας 1 Although the term **fathers** is masculine, when Stephen uses it to mean “ancestors,” it has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Here and throughout the speech, if you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “our fathers and mothers” to indicate this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 7 19 rh3k figs-explicit τοῦ ποιεῖν τὰ βρέφη ἔκθετα αὐτῶν 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by **exposed** he means “left outside.” This was an unfortunate means of infanticide in the ancient world. Alternate translation: “forcing them to leave their babies outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 19 n2vl figs-doublenegatives εἰς τὸ μὴ ζῳογονεῖσθαι 1 Stephen is using a double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the verb **keep alive**, which was negative from Pharaoh’s perspective, since it was contrary to his intentions. If your readers might misunderstand this double negative, , you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “in order to kill them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +ACT 7 19 n2vl figs-doublenegatives εἰς τὸ μὴ ζῳογονεῖσθαι 1 Stephen is using a double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the verb **keep alive**, which was negative from Pharaoh’s perspective, since it was contrary to his intentions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “in order to kill them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 7 20 nib6 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἐν ᾧ καιρῷ 1 Stephen uses this phrase to introduce something that happened while Pharaoh was trying to kill the Israelite babies. Alternate translation: “While this was happening,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) ACT 7 20 q66s writing-participants ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς 1 At that time Moses was born Here Stephen introduces **Moses** into his story. See how you translated his name in [3:22](../03/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 7 20 cz9w figs-activepassive ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the birth of Moses took place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1139,35 +1139,35 @@ ACT 7 47 k54c figs-metaphor αὐτῷ οἶκον 1 Stephen is using the word ACT 7 47 dlk8 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ οἶκον 1 The pronoun **him** refers to God. Alternate translation: “a temple for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 7 48 wuce translate-names ὁ Ὕψιστος 1 This a name for God. UST suggests one way to express its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 7 48 fwvu figs-nominaladj χειροποιήτοις 1 Stephen is using the adjective **made with hands** (or “handmade”) as a noun, to mean structures built by humans. ULT adds **houses** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 7 48 c822 figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις 1 houses made with hands Stephen is using the word **hand**, one part of a person, to mean the whole person. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “houses that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 7 48 c822 figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις 1 houses made with hands Stephen is using the word **hand**, one part of a person, to mean the whole person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “houses that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 7 48 ota0 figs-metaphor χειροποιήτοις 1 The word **houses** means “temples.” Alternate translation: “temples that people build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 48 d4fh figs-explicit καθὼς ὁ προφήτης λέγει 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that by **the prophet**, he means Isaiah. Alternate translation: “as the prophet Isaiah says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 49 oyax figs-quotemarks ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Isaiah, which continues through the end of verse 50. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Isaiah as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 7 49 k2vn figs-metaphor ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 Heaven is my throne, and the earth is the footstool for my feet Speaking through Isaiah, God describes **Heaven** as his **throne** and **the earth** as his **footstool**. If your readers would not understand what these figures mean, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. This could mean: (1) that God is present both in heaven and on earth. Alternate translation: “I dwell in heaven, and I am also present throughout the earth” (2) that God rules over heaven and earth. Alternative translation: “I rule from heaven, and I have complete authority over the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 7 49 i4u3 figs-merism ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 God is using the two parts of creation, **Heaven** and **earth**, to mean all of creation. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “I am present everywhere in creation” (2) Alternate translation: “I rule over all of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +ACT 7 49 i4u3 figs-merism ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 God is using the two parts of creation, **Heaven** and **earth**, to mean all of creation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. This could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “I am present everywhere in creation” (2) Alternate translation: “I rule over all of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 7 49 wc9m figs-rquestion ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου? 1 What kind of house will you build for me? God is using the question form to emphasize that human beings cannot build a temple worthy of him or adequate for him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy of me or a place to live that is adequate for me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 7 49 rqr4 figs-parallelism ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? λέγει Κύριος, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου? 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. God says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “You can not build a temple that is worthy for me to live in!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) ACT 7 49 mshp figs-metaphor ποῖον οἶκον 1 The word **house** means a “temple.” Alternate translation: “What kind of temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 49 vjaq figs-abstractnouns τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **rest**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the place where I can live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 7 50 hqjr figs-quotemarks οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Isaiah that began in verse 49. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you can return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 7 50 rfk1 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 Did my hand not make all these things? God is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 7 50 jlg1 figs-synecdoche οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 God is using one part of himself, his **hand**, to represent all of himself in the act of creating. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Did I not make all these things?” or, if you choose to represent the rhetorical question as an exclamation, “I made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 7 50 jlg1 figs-synecdoche οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 God is using one part of himself, his **hand**, to represent all of himself in the act of creating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Did I not make all these things?” or, if you choose to represent the rhetorical question as an exclamation, “I made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 7 50 gzw0 figs-explicit ταῦτα πάντα 1 The phrase **all these things** refers back to “Heaven” and “earth” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “everything in creation” ACT 7 51 umq6 figs-exclamations σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 O stiff-necked Stephen is using the exclamatory word **O** to make a transition in his speech. Up to this point, he has been identifying with the Sanhedrin members, saying “our fathers” as he describes what earlier generations of Israelites did. Now, as he shifts to rebuking them, he addresses them with the vocative **O**. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for this same purpose. Alternate translation: “You stiff-necked people who are uncircumcised in your heart and ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) ACT 7 51 yxe3 figs-nominaladj σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ 1 Stephen is using the adjective **stiff-necked** as a noun, to describe a kind of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “O people who are stiff-necked and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 7 51 vn7h figs-metaphor σκληροτράχηλοι 1 O stiff-necked Stephen is speaking of the Sanhedrin members as if they were horses or mules that stiffened their necks in order not to be turned in one direction or another. He means that they are being stubborn. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “O stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 51 zp55 figs-metonymy ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 uncircumcised in heart and ears Stephen speaks of the Sanhedrin members’ **heart and ears** as **uncircumcised** by association with the way that Gentiles, who are uncircumcised because they are not part of the covenant community, do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 51 esfc figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is using one part of a person, the **heart**, meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 7 51 jslb figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is using one part of a person, the **ears**, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 7 51 esfc figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is using one part of a person, the **heart**, meaning the desires and will, to represent all of a person in the act of obeying or disobeying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 7 51 jslb figs-synecdoche ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 Stephen is using one part of a person, the **ears**, to represent all of a person in the act of listening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “unwilling to obey or listen to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 7 51 zgon figs-hyperbole ὑμεῖς ἀεὶ τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ Ἁγίῳ ἀντιπίπτετε 1 The word **always** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You keep resisting the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 7 51 w164 figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς…ὑμῶν…ὑμεῖς 1 The words **you** and **your** are plural, since Stephen is speaking to all the members of the Sanhedrin. So use plural forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 7 51 d2v8 figs-ellipsis ὡς οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν, καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Stephen is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “As your ancestors disobeyed God and did not listen to him, so you disobey God and do not listen to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 7 52 x7kf figs-rquestion τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? 1 Which of the prophets did your fathers not persecute? Stephen is not asking for information. He is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors persecuted each of the prophets!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 7 52 eiw2 figs-hyperbole τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? 1 Stephen’s rhetorical question has an implicit generalization for emphasis. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys emphasis. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors kept persecuting the prophets!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 7 52 eiw2 figs-hyperbole τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? 1 Stephen’s rhetorical question has an implicit generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that conveys emphasis. Alternate translation: “Your ancestors kept persecuting the prophets!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 7 52 q8wb figs-nominaladj τοῦ Δικαίου 1 of the Righteous One Stephen is using the adjective **Righteous** as a noun in order to describe a specific person. ULT adds **One** to show this. This is a title that refers to the Christ, the Messiah. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the Messiah, who was righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 7 52 agd9 οὗ νῦν ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς ἐγένεσθε 1 of whom you have now become betrayers and murderers It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You have now betrayed and murdered him” ACT 7 53 axhl writing-pronouns οἵτινες ἐλάβετε 1 The pronoun **who** refers to the Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 7 53 t92q figs-synecdoche οἵτινες ἐλάβετε 1 The Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing did not receive **the law** themselves. Rather, Stephen is using them to represent the entire Jewish community down through the years. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “whose community received” or, if you choose to start a new sentence, “Your community received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 7 53 t92q figs-synecdoche οἵτινες ἐλάβετε 1 The Sanhedrin members whom Stephen is addressing did not receive **the law** themselves. Rather, Stephen is using them to represent the entire Jewish community down through the years. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “whose community received” or, if you choose to start a new sentence, “Your community received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 7 53 euw5 figs-explicit εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων 1 the law as ordained by angels Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to God giving the law to the Israelites at Mount Sinai. A later Jewish tradition said that angels acted as God’s intermediaries at that time. (Stephen says in [7:38](../07/38.md) that an angel was speaking to Moses on Mount Sinai.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as angels delivered it on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 54 ef2g figs-activepassive ἀκούοντες…ταῦτα διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 Now hearing these things If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these things cut them to their hearts when they heard them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 54 u4l7 figs-idiom διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 they were cut to their hearts Here, the expression **they were cut to their hearts** is an idiom that means the Sanhedrin members became very angry. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they became furious at Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1241,7 +1241,7 @@ ACT 8 9 cx7a translate-names Σίμων 1 the city **Simon** is the name of a ma ACT 8 10 mvcm writing-pronouns ᾧ προσεῖχον πάντες ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 The phrase **to whom** refers to Simon. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “All of them, from little to great, were paying attention to Simon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 8 10 evt7 figs-hyperbole πάντες 1 they all … were paying attention Luke is using the word **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 8 10 h51l figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 Luke is using the adjectives **little** and **great** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least important people to the most important ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 8 10 ibl1 figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 from least to greatest Luke is speaking, using these two extremes in order to include all of the people in between. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +ACT 8 10 ibl1 figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 from least to greatest Luke is speaking, using these two extremes in order to include all of the people in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 8 10 h5ya writing-pronouns οὗτός 1 The demonstrative pronoun **This** stands for Simon. Alternate translation: “This man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 8 10 j3d8 translate-names ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη 1 This man is the power of God which is called Great The Samaritans believed that Simon must be the embodiment of some great power, and thinking that this power was God, the highest of powers, they called it Great. Alternate translation: “an embodiment of the Great God” or “an embodiment of the supreme God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 8 10 yw5v figs-activepassive ἡ καλουμένη 1 the power of God which is called Great If your language does not use the passive form **called**, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1365,7 +1365,7 @@ ACT 9 2 v9lw figs-metonymy εἰς Δαμασκὸν πρὸς τὰς συνα ACT 9 2 lvzt translate-names Δαμασκὸν 1 **Damascus** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 9 2 thuy translate-names τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας 1 As the General Notes to this chapter explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 9 2 mma1 figs-activepassive δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 9 2 grch figs-synecdoche δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Luke is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 9 2 grch figs-synecdoche δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Luke is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 9 2 a6z4 figs-explicit δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 having bound them, he might bring them to Jerusalem The implication is that Saul wanted to bring believers in Jesus to Jerusalem for trial and punishment by the Jewish leaders. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem so that the Jewish leaders there could judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 3 jf4g figs-explicit ἐν…τῷ πορεύεσθαι 1 as he was traveling Luke means implicitly that the high priest gave Saul the letters he asked for and that Saul then left Jerusalem to go to Damascus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as he was traveling to Damascus with letters that the high priest gave him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 3 by55 writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 it happened that Luke uses the phrase **it happened that** to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -1397,7 +1397,7 @@ ACT 9 13 quxn figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ πολλῶν 1 Ananias is using the adj ACT 9 13 sh2m figs-abstractnouns ὅσα κακὰ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **evils**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how many harmful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 9 13 la9t figs-metonymy τοῖς ἁγίοις σου ἐποίησεν ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 to your saints Ananias is using the term **saints** by association to mean believers in Jesus, since the term means “holy ones” or “ones who are set apart.” Alternate translation: “to the people in Jerusalem who are dedicated to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 14 ptd6 figs-abstractnouns ἔχει ἐξουσίαν παρὰ τῶν ἀρχιερέων 1 he has authority … to bind all If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the chief priests have authorized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 9 14 gk5o figs-synecdoche δῆσαι 1 Ananias is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to arrest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 9 14 gk5o figs-synecdoche δῆσαι 1 Ananias is using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to arrest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 9 14 hi6x figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Ananias is using the participle **calling**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the people who call on your name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 9 14 t3fl figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 who call upon your name Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the ones calling upon you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 14 ampz figs-idiom τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Here, the expression **calling on** means to worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1430,7 +1430,7 @@ ACT 9 21 ctg3 figs-explicit τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄν ACT 9 21 l82i figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 Here, the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “the ones calling on Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 21 zuoi figs-idiom τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 Here, **calling on** is an idiom. See how you translated it in [9:14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “the ones worshiping Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 9 21 i512 figs-activepassive ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that he might bind them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 9 21 pnrp figs-synecdoche ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς 1 Like Ananias in [9:14](../09/14.md), the people here are using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 9 21 pnrp figs-synecdoche ἵνα δεδεμένους, αὐτοὺς ἀγάγῃ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς 1 Like Ananias in [9:14](../09/14.md), the people here are using one part of the arrest process to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “that he might arrest them and bring them to the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 9 22 r1np figs-explicit καὶ συνέχυννεν τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας ἐν Δαμασκῷ, συμβιβάζων ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός 1 was stirring up the Jews Saul was not intentionally **stirring up the Jews**. They became agitated because they could not find a way to refute Saul’s arguments that Jesus was the Messiah. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As he proved that Jesus is the Christ, the Jews living in Damascus became agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 23 cg9k figs-idiom ὡς…ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί 1 As in [2:1](../02/01.md) and [7:23](../07/23.md), this is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 9 23 nyh4 figs-activepassive ὡς…ἐπληροῦντο ἡμέραι ἱκαναί 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” but use an active verbal form instead of the passive form here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1440,7 +1440,7 @@ ACT 9 24 gnm1 figs-infostructure ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐ ACT 9 24 lv62 figs-activepassive ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν 1 But their plan became known to Saul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Saul learned about their plot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 9 24 cy9n figs-explicit παρετηροῦντο…τὰς πύλας…ὅπως αὐτὸν ἀνέλωσιν 1 indeed they were watching the gates The city of Damascus had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through **the gates** in this wall. Saul’s enemies expected that he would try to leave the city eventually and they hoped to catch him and kill him when he did. Alternate translation: “they were … watching the gates in the city wall … in order to kill him when he tried to leave the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 24 b0gv figs-metonymy τὰς πύλας 1 Luke is using **the gates** to mean the people going through the gates. Alternate translation: “to see who was going through the gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 9 24 aezc figs-merism ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς 1 Luke is using the two parts of a full day, **day** and **night**, to mean all the time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +ACT 9 24 aezc figs-merism ἡμέρας τε καὶ νυκτὸς 1 Luke is using the two parts of a full day, **day** and **night**, to mean all the time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 9 25 lc8m figs-explicit οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his disciples These **disciples** were people who had believed Saul’s message and become committed followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the people who had believed Saul’s message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 26 e38m figs-hyperbole πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν 1 but they were all afraid of him Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were afraid of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 9 27 abca writing-pronouns Βαρναβᾶς…ἐπιλαβόμενος αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστόλους; καὶ διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς πῶς ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ εἶδεν τὸν Κύριον, καὶ ὅτι ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ…ἐπαρρησιάσατο 1 told them The pronoun **him** refers to Saul in every instance. The pronoun **he** refers to Saul in the first and third instances and to **the Lord** in the second instance. The pronoun **them** refers to **the apostles**. Alternate translation: “taking hold of Saul, Barnabas brought him to the apostles and told the apostles how Saul had seen the Lord on the road and that the Lord had spoken to Saul … Saul had spoken boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1993,14 +1993,14 @@ ACT 13 35 d4px figs-explicit τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 The expression **Holy ACT 13 35 jvpy figs-123person τὸν Ὅσιόν σου 1 This is a Messianic prophecy, and the Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) ACT 13 35 hvt8 figs-idiom ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 You will not allow your Holy One to see decay Paul is using the word **see** to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” or “to undergo decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 35 bhos figs-explicit ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 36 rpb4 figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 fell asleep Paul is referring to death in a polite way by using the phrase **fell asleep**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “passed away” or “died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +ACT 13 36 rpb4 figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 fell asleep Paul is referring to death in a polite way by using the phrase **fell asleep**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “passed away” or “died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) ACT 13 36 nwy9 figs-activepassive προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ 1 was laid with his fathers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people buried him with his fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 36 f5s2 figs-metaphor πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with his ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 36 f5s2 figs-metaphor πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with his ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 36 la5s figs-idiom εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 saw decay Paul is using the word **saw** to mean “experienced.” Alternate translation: “experienced decay” or “underwent decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 36 okfp figs-explicit διαφθοράν 1 The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 37 bmw3 writing-pronouns ὃν…ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 But he whom The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Jesus, whom God raised up,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 13 37 n9pl figs-idiom ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 God raised up The idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 13 37 j52x figs-idiom οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 did not see decay Paul is using the word **see** to mean “experience.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience decay” or “undergo decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 13 37 n9pl figs-idiom ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 God raised up The idiom **raised up** means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 13 37 j52x figs-idiom οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 did not see decay Paul is using the word **see** to mean “experience.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experience decay” or “undergo decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 37 g3ie figs-explicit διαφθοράν 1 The term **decay** refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. Alternate translation: “the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 38 yg35 figs-imperative3p γνωστὸν…ἔστω ὑμῖν 1 let it be known to you If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” or “you should know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 13 38 f917 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2011,28 +2011,28 @@ ACT 13 38 w7y1 figs-ellipsis ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν κατ ACT 13 38 xjzi figs-activepassive πάντων ὧν οὐκ ἠδυνήθητε ἐν νόμῳ Μωϋσέως δικαιωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “everything that you were not able to do in obedience to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 39 g5h9 figs-activepassive ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων δικαιοῦται 1 In this one every one who believes is justified If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God justifies everyone who believes in this one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 39 ki8q writing-pronouns τούτῳ 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 13 40 y2kg figs-metonymy βλέπετε 1 be careful that Paul is using the term **Look** to mean “Be careful,” since looking around alertly is associated with being careful. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 40 y2kg figs-metonymy βλέπετε 1 be careful that Paul is using the term **Look** to mean “Be careful,” since looking around alertly is associated with being careful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 40 tt1x figs-activepassive τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις 1 the thing spoken about in the prophets If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the thing that the prophets spoke about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 40 osou figs-personification μὴ ἐπέλθῃ 1 Paul is speaking of what the prophets spoke as if it were a living thing that could **come upon** his listeners. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may not happen to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 13 40 osou figs-personification μὴ ἐπέλθῃ 1 Paul is speaking of what the prophets spoke as if it were a living thing that could **come upon** his listeners. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may not happen to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 13 41 kk1j figs-quotemarks ἴδετε, οἱ καταφρονηταί, καὶ θαυμάσατε καὶ ἀφανίσθητε, ὅτι ἔργον ἐργάζομαι ἐγὼ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν, ἔργον ὃ οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε, ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν 1 This quotation is from the prophet Habakkuk. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Habakkuk as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites and directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -ACT 13 41 jveu figs-metonymy ἴδετε 1 Paul is using the term **Look** to mean “Be careful,” since looking around altertly is associated with being careful. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 41 jveu figs-metonymy ἴδετε 1 Paul is using the term **Look** to mean “Be careful,” since looking around altertly is associated with being careful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 41 xcdg figs-activepassive ἀφανίσθητε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “perish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 41 dvn1 figs-metonymy ἔργον ἐργάζομαι…ἔργον 1 am doing a work God is using the word **work** to mean a judgment that he will work to bring about. Alternate translation: “I am carrying out a judgment…a judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 13 41 nm2q ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν 1 in your days God is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during your lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 13 41 nm2q ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν 1 in your days God is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “during your lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 42 ax8v writing-pronouns ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν 1 And as they were leaving Here the pronoun **they** refers to Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “as Paul and Barnabas were leaving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 13 42 f3sw writing-pronouns παρεκάλουν 1 they begged them Here the pronoun **they** refers to the people who were in the synagogue. Alternate translation: “the people in the synagogue begged them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 13 42 w9h6 figs-activepassive λαληθῆναι αὐτοῖς τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “them to speak these words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 42 y4p9 figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 these same words Here, **words** refers to the message that Paul had spoken using words. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 42 y4p9 figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 these same words Here, **words** refers to the message that Paul had spoken using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 43 a58z figs-activepassive λυθείσης δὲ τῆς συναγωγῆς 1 And when the synagogue meeting had ended If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 43 sws7 translate-unknown προσηλύτων 1 proselytes These **proselytes** were non-Jewish people who had converted to Judaism. Alternate translation: “convert to Judaism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 13 43 mygk figs-idiom ἠκολούθησαν…τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ τῷ Βαρναβᾷ 1 In this context, to **follow** someone means to become that person’s disciple or accept that person as a teacher. Alternate translation: “accepted Paul and Barnabas as their teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 43 fv15 figs-abstractnouns προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to continue in the grace of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to remain faithful to God, who had graciously saved them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 13 44 vq3y figs-metonymy σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 almost the whole city was gathered together The **city** represents the people in the city. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 44 vq3y figs-metonymy σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 almost the whole city was gathered together The **city** represents the people in the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 44 h40t figs-activepassive συνήχθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 44 yga7 figs-explicit ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 to hear the word of the Lord The implication is that Paul and Barnabas were going to speak **the word of the Lord**. Alternate translation: “to hear Paul and Barnabas speak the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 44 evox figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas were going to share by using words. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 44 evox figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas were going to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 45 j4zq figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 13 45 qrh2 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 they were filled with jealousy For emphasis, Luke is speaking of the Jewish leaders as if they were a container that jealousy **filled**. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “they became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 13 45 qrh2 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 they were filled with jealousy For emphasis, Luke is speaking of the Jewish leaders as if they were a container that jealousy **filled**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “they became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 45 m1an figs-activepassive τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις 1 the things that were said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 46 d08v figs-activepassive λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for us to speak the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 46 jn55 figs-metonymy ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 necessary for the word of God first to be spoken to you Paul and Barnabas are using the term **word** to mean the message that God commanded them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2047,7 +2047,7 @@ ACT 13 47 xbiw figs-quotemarks τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν, ACT 13 47 v8au figs-simile τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς 1 as a light Through this quotation from Isaiah, Paul and Barnabas are saying that the truth they are preaching about Jesus is like a **light** that allows people to see. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to something else your readers would recognize that helps people to understand. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) ACT 13 47 za1q figs-yousingular σε 1 The word **you** is singular here because it refers to the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 13 47 t5sp figs-abstractnouns εἶναί…εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 should be for salvation as far as the end of the earth If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “should go and help people to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 13 47 ismw figs-idiom ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 This phrase is an idiom. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everywhere on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 13 47 ismw figs-idiom ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 This phrase is an idiom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everywhere on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 48 e9ag figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 glorified the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 48 jct2 figs-activepassive τεταγμένοι 1 as many as were appointed to eternal life If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God had appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 49 qh9z figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord was being spread throughout the whole region Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Barnabas had shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2069,14 +2069,14 @@ ACT 14 1 hk1z writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Icon ACT 14 1 f4sq figs-explicit λαλῆσαι 1 spoke in such a way It may be helpful to say explicitly that they spoke about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 14 2 wc4x οἱ…ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews who were disobedient Alternate translation: “those Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus” ACT 14 2 n2pp figs-metaphor ἐπήγειραν 1 stirred up the souls of the Gentiles Luke says that these Jews**stirred up** the Gentiles, as if calm waters were being disturbed. This figurative expression means that the Jews said things to make the Gentiles very upset with Paul and Barnabas. Alternate translation: “agitated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 14 2 k8mv figs-synecdoche τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 the souls Luke is using one part of the Gentiles, their **souls**, to mean all of them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 14 2 fu13 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 14 2 k8mv figs-synecdoche τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 the souls Luke is using one part of the Gentiles, their **souls**, to mean all of them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 14 2 fu13 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 14 3 a3gp grammar-connect-logic-contrast οὖν 1 So they stayed there Luke uses the word **But** here to indicate a contrast between what the unfaithful Jews did and what Paul and Barnabas did in response. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) ACT 14 3 fifi writing-politeness ἐπὶ τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) -ACT 14 3 f2xh figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ 1 who is testifying to the word of his grace Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in support of the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 14 3 f2xh figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ 1 who is testifying to the word of his grace Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in support of the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 14 3 wcn5 figs-abstractnouns τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 to the word of his grace If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how God graciously saves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 14 3 c2cv figs-doublet σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα 1 by granting signs and wonders to be done by their hands The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in [4:30](../04/30.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ACT 14 3 p9iq figs-metonymy διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 by their hands Here, **hands** represents the capability of a person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly.Alternate translation: “through them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 14 3 p9iq figs-metonymy διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 by their hands Here, **hands** represents the capability of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly.Alternate translation: “through them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 14 4 btu3 figs-activepassive ἐσχίσθη…τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως 1 the population of the city was divided If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the people of the city disagreed with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 14 4 q1xc figs-ellipsis σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις 1 with the apostles Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “were with the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 14 5 q6g2 figs-hendiadys ὑβρίσαι καὶ λιθοβολῆσαι αὐτούς 1 to mistreat and stone them Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **stone** tells how their opponents in Iconium wanted to **mistreat** Paul and Barnabas. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “hostilely to stone them to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -2084,8 +2084,8 @@ ACT 14 6 tpl1 translate-names τῆς Λυκαονίας 1 of Lycaonia The word ACT 14 6 m5gv translate-names Λύστραν 1 Lystra The word **Lystra** is the name of a city in Asia Minor. It is south of Iconium and north of Derbe. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 14 6 tl4q translate-names Δέρβην 1 Derbe The word**Derbe** is the name of a city in Asia Minor. It is south of Iconium and Lystra. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 14 8 wb5k writing-participants τις ἀνὴρ…ἐκάθητο 1 a certain man sat Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 14 8 kz7d figs-metonymy ἀδύνατος…τοῖς ποσὶν 1 powerless in his feet Luke is referring to the strength of this man’s legs by association with the way people are able to stand on their **feet** when their legs are strong. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose legs could not support him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 14 8 tca1 figs-metonymy χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 lame from the womb of his mother Luke is referring to the time of this man’s birth by association with the way he came out of the **womb of his mother** when he was born. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the time he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 14 8 kz7d figs-metonymy ἀδύνατος…τοῖς ποσὶν 1 powerless in his feet Luke is referring to the strength of this man’s legs by association with the way people are able to stand on their **feet** when their legs are strong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose legs could not support him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 14 8 tca1 figs-metonymy χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 lame from the womb of his mother Luke is referring to the time of this man’s birth by association with the way he came out of the **womb of his mother** when he was born. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the time he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 14 9 di49 figs-rpronouns οὗτος ἤκουσεν τοῦ Παύλου λαλοῦντος, ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ καὶ ἰδὼν ὅτι ἔχει πίστιν 1 He looked intently at him The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to the lame man, and the pronoun **who** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This man heard Paul speaking. Paul looked intently at the man and saw that he had faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 14 9 xak4 figs-abstractnouns ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 he has faith to be saved If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he could trust in Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 14 9 uwov figs-activepassive ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Jesus. (Here Luke is using the word that is often translated “saved” in one of its specific senses to mean **healed**.) Alternate translation: “he could trusting Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2101,22 +2101,22 @@ ACT 14 11 rm85 figs-activepassive ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις 1 ACT 14 12 t7uu translate-names Δία 1 Zeus The word **Zeus** is the name of a pagan god who was considered to be the ruler of all the other pagan gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 14 12 hh25 translate-names Ἑρμῆν 1 Hermes The word **Hermes** is the name of the pagan god who was thought to bring messages to people from Zeus and the other gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 14 12 i1fa figs-ellipsis τὸν δὲ Παῦλον, Ἑρμῆν, 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and they were calling Paul ‘Hermes,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 14 12 d9lu figs-metonymy ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Paul and Barnabas were sharing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leader of the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 14 12 l63q figs-personification ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου 1 Luke is speaking of the message about Jesus as if it were a living thing that Paul could lead. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the main speaker” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ACT 14 13 iz6r figs-metonymy τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως 1 And the priest of the temple of Zeus, which was in front of the city, brought Luke is using the name **Zeus** to mean the temple that was associated with the worship of Zeus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the temple of Zeus that was before the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 14 12 d9lu figs-metonymy ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Paul and Barnabas were sharing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leader of the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 14 12 l63q figs-personification ὁ ἡγούμενος τοῦ λόγου 1 Luke is speaking of the message about Jesus as if it were a living thing that Paul could lead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the main speaker” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 14 13 iz6r figs-metonymy τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως 1 And the priest of the temple of Zeus, which was in front of the city, brought Luke is using the name **Zeus** to mean the temple that was associated with the worship of Zeus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the temple of Zeus that was before the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 14 13 sh4o figs-explicit τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως 1 Here, **before** means “in front of”. Luke is referring to the temple of Zeus that was located right outside the entrance to the city of Iconium. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the Temple of Zeus that was located right outside the entrance to the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 14 13 v2a9 figs-explicit ταύρους καὶ στέμματα 1 oxen and wreaths The implication is that the priest had put these **wreaths** on the **oxen** because they were going to be offered as a sacrifice. That was the custom in this culture. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “oxen that were wearing wreaths as sacrificial animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 14 13 ud37 figs-explicit ἤθελεν θύειν 1 wanting to sacrifice Luke means implicitly that the priest of Zeus wanted to offer the oxen as sacrifices to Paul and Barnabas, whom the people thought were the gods Zeus and Hermes. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “wanting to offer sacrifice to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 14 14 kx43 translate-symaction διαρρήξαντες τὰ ἱμάτια ἑαυτῶν 1 they tore their clothing Barnabas and Paul tore their clothes as a symbolic action to show that they were deeply distressed and upset that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “during their clothing to show how distressed they were that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 14 14 wa4h figs-hendiadys κράζοντες 1 Together with the word “saying” in the next verse, the phrase “crying out” expresses a single idea. The phrase **crying out** tells how Barnabas and Paul were **saying** what they said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “saying loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) ACT 14 15 ee13 figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul and Barnabas are likely using the term in a generic sense that includes both men and women, since both men and women and Lystra were probably in the crowd that wanted to sacrifice to them. To make this clear to your readers, you could use a term in your language that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “you people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 14 15 w4fd figs-rquestion ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε? 1 Men, why are you doing these things? Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you must not do these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 14 15 w4fd figs-rquestion ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε? 1 Men, why are you doing these things? Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you would express this question as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you must not do these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 14 15 u9pq figs-explicit καὶ ἡμεῖς ὁμοιοπαθεῖς ἐσμεν ὑμῖν ἄνθρωποι 1 We also are men with the same feelings as you People in this culture believed that the gods did not have passions as humans do. So the implication of this statement is that Paul and Barnabas are human beings, not gods. You can include this information in your translation if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “We are human beings just like you. We are not gods!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 14 15 n98g figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ Θεὸν ζῶντα 1 turn from these useless things to a living God Paul and Barnabas are speaking as if they want the people in Lystra physically to **turn** from idol worship and believe in the one true God. The metaphor of turning means to stop living in one way and to start living in another way. If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, you could state its meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to get you to stop worshiping these false gods and lead you to worship the living God instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 14 15 n98g figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ Θεὸν ζῶντα 1 turn from these useless things to a living God Paul and Barnabas are speaking as if they want the people in Lystra physically to **turn** from idol worship and believe in the one true God. The metaphor of turning means to stop living in one way and to start living in another way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning of this metaphor plainly. Alternate translation: “to get you to stop worshiping these false gods and lead you to worship the living God instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 14 15 blhg figs-nominaladj τούτων τῶν ματαίων 1 Paul and Barnabas are using the adjective **useless** as a noun to mean the false gods that the people of Lystra had been worshiping. ULT adds the word **things** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “these false gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 14 15 qr5b figs-idiom Θεὸν ζῶντα 1 a living God This expression is an idiom. If your readers might misunderstand its meaning, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one God who truly exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 14 15 lw9o figs-merism ὃς ἐποίησεν τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 Paul and Barnabas are referring to all of creation by naming its components. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -ACT 14 16 vpt5 figs-metaphor πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν 1 to go their own ways This is a metaphor that refers to how people live their lives. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do what they wanted to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 14 15 qr5b figs-idiom Θεὸν ζῶντα 1 a living God This expression is an idiom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one God who truly exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 14 15 lw9o figs-merism ὃς ἐποίησεν τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 Paul and Barnabas are referring to all of creation by naming its components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +ACT 14 16 vpt5 figs-metaphor πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν 1 to go their own ways This is a metaphor that refers to how people live their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do what they wanted to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 14 17 kig8 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν 1 he did not leave himself without witness If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative preposition **without**. Alternate translation: “he left himself a witness” or “he showed you what he was like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 14 17 c1se figs-explicitinfo οὐρανόθεν ὑμῖν ὑετοὺς διδοὺς 1 It might seem that the expression **rains from the sky** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “rain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 14 17 ps9z figs-synecdoche filling your hearts 1 filling your hearts with food and gladness Paul and Barnabas are using one part of these people, their **hearts**, meaning their desi misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “satisfying you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -2132,66 +2132,66 @@ ACT 14 22 wu1c figs-exclusive δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν 1 It is ne ACT 14 23 pk5l writing-pronouns χειροτονήσαντες…παρέθεντο…πεπιστεύκεισαν 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the new believers in the cities of Lystra, Iconium, and Antioch, and the pronoun **they** refer to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “for the new believers in these cities … Paul and Barnabas entrusted these believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 14 23 mqp9 κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν 1 And when they had appointed for them elders in every church Alternate translation: “in each new group of believers” ACT 14 23 n81l writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) -ACT 14 25 t513 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 And when they had spoken the word in Perga Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 14 25 t513 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 And when they had spoken the word in Perga Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that the Holy Spirit wanted Paul and Barnabas to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 14 25 h8sh figs-idiom κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν 1 they went down to Attalia Luke says that Paul and Barnabas **went down** to Attalia because that city is lower in elevation than Perga. Alternate translation: “traveled to Attalia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 14 26 f2cg figs-activepassive ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 where they had been commended to the grace of God If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where the believers had commended them to the grace of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 14 26 p2gd figs-abstractnouns ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “where the believers had ask God to care for them graciously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 14 27 vcd3 writing-pronouns ἀνήγγελλον…αὐτῶν…ἤνοιξεν 1 The pronouns **they** and **them** refer to Paul and Barnabas, and the pronoun **he** refers to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas were reporting… them… God had opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 14 27 qcl8 figs-idiom ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 In many languages it would be an idiom to say that God **had done** something with Paul and Barnabas. It would mean that they had been the objects of God’s action. But the expression is not an idiom here. It means that Paul and Barnabas had been able to work in partnership **with** God. Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do working together with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 14 27 vymy figs-possession ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 Here, the possessive form describes not a **door** consisting of **faith** but a door that leads to faith. Alternate translation: “a door leading to faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ACT 14 27 b4id figs-metaphor ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles Here the expression **opened a door** means that God created an opportunity, as if a door that gave access to this opportunity had previously been closed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles an opportunity for faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 14 27 b4id figs-metaphor ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles Here the expression **opened a door** means that God created an opportunity, as if a door that gave access to this opportunity had previously been closed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles an opportunity for faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 14 27 xgvb figs-abstractnouns ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles the opportunity to believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 14 28 abcq figs-litotes χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον 1 for not a little time Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could take the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 14 28 abcq figs-litotes χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον 1 for not a little time Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could take the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 15 intro h917 0 # Acts 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

- Verses 1–35 tell how the church resolved the question of whether Gentiles who believed in Jesus needed to keep the whole law of Moses.
- Verses 36–41 tell how Paul began a new journey to proclaim the gospel, bringing Silas with him.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16–18.

Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present the quotation from the prophet Amos in verses 16–18 as a direct quotation if possible, since in it God is speaking directly the people of Israel. Since Amos acknowledges in verse 17 that God is speaking by saying “says the Lord,” a third-level quotation actually starts in verse 16. ULT uses second-level and third-level quotation marks within the first-level quotation from James to identify the various speakers. But it may not be necessary to do this in your translation. You could just use second-level quotation marks or some other punctuation or convention available in your language to indicate the beginning and ending of the second-level quotation from Amos. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Did Gentiles have to obey the law of Moses?

Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised, so this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not believe that the Gentiles needed to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do. The meeting that the apostles and elders held to decide about this issue is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.”
ACT 15 1 su66 figs-explicit τινες 1 certain ones Luke assumes that his readers will recognize that these were Jews who believed in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers will need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “text” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 1 p3k9 figs-idiom κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 coming down from Judea Luke speaks of these Jews ** coming down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “who had traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 15 1 zi1n figs-metaphor ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 taught the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 1 zi1n figs-metaphor ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 taught the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 1 pm8h figs-activepassive ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε 1 Unless you are circumcised in the custom of Moses, you are not able to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 1 lwbi figs-activepassive οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be God. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will not save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 15 2 abcr figs-litotes στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης 1 not a little dispute and debate Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with a word, **little**, that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could states the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 15 2 abcr figs-litotes στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης 1 not a little dispute and debate Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with a word, **little**, that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could states the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 15 2 f9nd figs-abstractnouns στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως 1 not a little dispute and debate The terms **dispute** and **debate** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation, as in UST: “an argument” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 15 2 w6tc writing-pronouns πρὸς αὐτοὺς…ἔταξαν…ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the Jewish believers from Judea, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refer to the believers in the church in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with the Jewish believers from Judea … the believers in Antioch appointed … from the church there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 15 2 ek6a figs-idiom ἀναβαίνειν…εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 to go up … in Jerusalem Luke says **to go up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain.. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 15 3 av5y figs-activepassive οἱ…προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 Therefore, the ones who had been sent by the church If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones the church had sent out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 15 3 aia5 figs-metonymy τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 who had been sent by the church Luke is using the phrase **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 3 aia5 figs-metonymy τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 who had been sent by the church Luke is using the phrase **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 3 rk37 figs-abstractnouns ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 announcing the conversion of the Gentiles If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **conversion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “describing how many of the Gentiles had stopped worshiping false gods and were now worshiping the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 15 3 nje7 figs-abstractnouns ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 they brought great joy to all the brothers If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “making all the brothers very happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 15 3 bbd4 figs-metaphor πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 to all the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 15 3 c03o figs-hyperbole πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 The word **all** here may be a generalization for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a different way to convey this general statement. Alternate translation: “to the believers in those places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 15 3 bbd4 figs-metaphor πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 to all the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 3 c03o figs-hyperbole πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 The word **all** here may be a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different way to convey this general statement. Alternate translation: “to the believers in those places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 15 4 ej1r figs-activepassive παρεδέχθησαν ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 they were welcomed by the church, and the apostles, and the elders If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church the apostles and the elders welcome them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 15 4 jblr figs-metonymy τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 Luke is using the phrase **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. Since he mentions the **apostles** and **elders** separately, here means the ordinary members of the church. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 4 jblr figs-metonymy τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 Luke is using the phrase **the church** to mean the people who were associated with the church. Since he mentions the **apostles** and **elders** separately, here means the ordinary members of the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 4 a2x1 figs-idiom ὅσα ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίησεν μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 with them See how you translated this same expression in [14:27](../14/27.md). Alternate translation: “how much they had been able to do working together with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 15 5 kras translate-names τῶν Φαρισαίων 1 The name **Pharisee** describes a member of a group of Jewish priests. See how you translated it in [5:34](../05/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 15 5 zcv0 πεπιστευκότες 1 Alternate translation: “who had believed in Jesus” ACT 15 5 crr7 translate-symaction ἐξανέστησαν 1 These believers **stood up** to indicate that they had something important to say. Alternate translation: “stood up to show that they had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 15 5 efe5 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς…παραγγέλλειν 1 Both instances of the pronoun **them** refer to the Gentiles who had converted to belief in the true God, as described in [15:3](../15/03.md). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these Gentiles who have converted…them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 15 6 gqt1 figs-activepassive συνήχθησάν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 15 6 ugu6 figs-idiom ἰδεῖν περὶ 1 to see about this matter Here the phrase **to see about** is an idiom that means “to consider.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 15 6 vcsc figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου τούτου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 6 ugu6 figs-idiom ἰδεῖν περὶ 1 to see about this matter Here the phrase **to see about** is an idiom that means “to consider.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 15 6 vcsc figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου τούτου 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the claim that the Jewish believers who were Pharisees had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 7 zhco translate-symaction ἀναστὰς Πέτρος 1 Peter stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. If your readers might not understand the significance of this action, you could explain it in your translation. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 15 7 c2q7 writing-pronouns αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles and elders. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the apostles and elders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 15 7 s6ap figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 15 7 a6q9 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Peter is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 7 a6q9 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Peter is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 7 wct8 figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς…ὑμῖν 1 Both occurrences of **you** are plural, since they refer to the apostles and elders. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) ACT 15 7 hk4g writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 Peter is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 15 7 ftl9 figs-idiom ἀφ’ ἡμερῶν ἀρχαίων 1 Peter is using an idiom that refers to the time when something began or had its origin. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Gentiles would first begin to believe in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 15 7 s3wb figs-synecdoche διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου 1 by my mouth Peter is using one part of himself, his **mouth**, to represent all of himself in the act of speaking. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “From me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 15 7 b5s8 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word of the gospel Peter is using the term **word** to mean the message that he shared by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 8 m1xc figs-metonymy καρδιογνώστης 1 who knows the heart Here, the word **heart** refers to a person’s character and intentions. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who understands each person’s character and intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 7 ftl9 figs-idiom ἀφ’ ἡμερῶν ἀρχαίων 1 Peter is using an idiom that refers to the time when something began or had its origin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Gentiles would first begin to believe in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 15 7 s3wb figs-synecdoche διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου 1 by my mouth Peter is using one part of himself, his **mouth**, to represent all of himself in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “From me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 15 7 b5s8 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word of the gospel Peter is using the term **word** to mean the message that he shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 8 m1xc figs-metonymy καρδιογνώστης 1 who knows the heart Here, the word **heart** refers to a person’s character and intentions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who understands each person’s character and intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 8 p6d2 figs-explicit ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς 1 testified to them The implication is not that God testified to the Gentiles about Jesus, but that by giving the Gentiles the Holy Spirit, God testified to Peter and his companions that they could have genuine faith. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “testified to their genuine faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 8 abcs figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν 1 just as also to us Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave the Holy Spirit to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 15 8 wlzx figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Peter is using the word **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 15 9 zs2g figs-doublenegatives οὐδὲν διέκρινεν μεταξὺ ἡμῶν τε καὶ αὐτῶν 1 he did not distinguish If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **distinguish**, which in this context means “discriminate.” Alternate translation: “he regarded them in the same way he regarded us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 15 9 jr3b figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Peter is using the word **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 15 9 ase1 figs-metaphor τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 having made their hearts clean by faith Peter speaks of God forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins as though God literally **cleansed** their hearts. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made them innocent because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 15 9 yi8r figs-metonymy τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **hearts** represents the inner beings of the Gentiles. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having forgiven them deeply because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 9 ase1 figs-metaphor τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 having made their hearts clean by faith Peter speaks of God forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins as though God literally **cleansed** their hearts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made them innocent because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 9 yi8r figs-metonymy τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **hearts** represents the inner beings of the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having forgiven them deeply because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 10 rfr4 νῦν 1 Now **Now** in this context does not mean “at this moment.” Peter is using the word to draw attention to the important point that follows. Alternate translation: “So tell me” ACT 15 10 zaz6 figs-rquestion τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν…? 1 why are you testing God, to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear? Peter is using the question form to challenge the believers who are Pharisees about what they want the Gentiles to do. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you must not test God…!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 15 10 ha45 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμεῖς 1 Peter is using the words **our** and **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 15 10 n2bv τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν…? 1 Here the word **testing** means **challenging**. Peter is saying that God has accepted the Gentiles without requiring them to be circumcised or keep the law, but the believers who are Pharisees are challenging God’s judgment that the Gentiles should be accepted on that basis. See how you translated the similar expression in [5:9](../05/09.md). Alternate translation: “why are you challenging God” -ACT 15 10 qpyd figs-metaphor ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι 1 Peter is speaking as if the believers who are Pharisees literally want to put a **yoke** on the necks of the Gentile believers. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “requiring the disciples to meet an onerous obligation that neither our fathers nor we have been able to fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 10 qpyd figs-metaphor ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι 1 Peter is speaking as if the believers who are Pharisees literally want to put a **yoke** on the necks of the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “requiring the disciples to meet an onerous obligation that neither our fathers nor we have been able to fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 10 bdfu bdfu 1 Since Peter is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **neck**. Alternate translation: “the necks” -ACT 15 10 bfd5 figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 10 bfd5 figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 11 e1m4 figs-rpronouns πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι 1 Peter is using a construction in which the object is implied. Since the object is the same as the subject of the verb, the construction calls for the relative pronoun **ourselves**. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “we believe that we will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 15 11 q28c figs-activepassive πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι 1 But we believe to be saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus, and they according to that same manner If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “we believe that God will save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 11 nhq8 figs-exclusive πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι 1 Peter is using the pronoun **we** and the implied pronoun **ourselves** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -2204,35 +2204,35 @@ ACT 15 13 odjm figs-hendiadys ἀπεκρίθη Ἰάκωβος λέγων 1 To ACT 15 13 yqcm translate-names Ἰάκωβος 1 The word **James** is the name of a man, the brother of Jesus who was the leader of the church in Jerusalem. See how you translated it in [12:17](../12/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 15 13 pl6m figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 brothers, listen This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 15 14 jjyc translate-names Συμεὼν 1 The word **Simeon** is the name of a man. It is the Hebrew form of the name whose Greek form is Simon. James is referring to Peter by his Hebrew name. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use either the name Simon or the name Peter here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 15 14 abct figs-metonymy ὁ Θεὸς ἐπεσκέψατο 1 concerned himself to take from the Gentiles James is speaking of the way God showed concern for the Gentiles by association with the way someone would look carefully at a situation he was concerned about. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God concerned himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 14 abct figs-metonymy ὁ Θεὸς ἐπεσκέψατο 1 concerned himself to take from the Gentiles James is speaking of the way God showed concern for the Gentiles by association with the way someone would look carefully at a situation he was concerned about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God concerned himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 14 pnr9 figs-metonymy λαὸν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 for his name This could mean: (1) that God chose the Gentiles for himself. James would be using the term **name** to refer to a person, God, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “a people who would belong to him” (2) that God chose the Gentiles to worship him. James would be using the term **name** to refer to worship by association with the way that worshipers call upon the name of God. Alternate translation: “a people who would worship him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 15 am6y figs-metonymy οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν 1 this agrees with the words of the prophets James is using the term **words** to mean the message that God spoke through the prophets. (This is a quotation from the prophet Amos.) If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 15 am6y figs-metonymy οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν 1 this agrees with the words of the prophets James is using the term **words** to mean the message that God spoke through the prophets. (This is a quotation from the prophet Amos.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 15 j4f5 figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 just as it is written If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as one of the prophets wrote” or “as the prophet Amos wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 16 m3lq figs-quotemarks μετὰ ταῦτα ἀναστρέψω 1 See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter about whether to represent this as the beginning of a third-level quotation or a second-level quotation, or whether to use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate who the various speakers are in verses 16–18. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 15 16 h9um writing-pronouns ἀναστρέψω…ἀνοικοδομήσω…ἀνοικοδομήσω 1 The pronoun **I** refers to God, who is speaking through the prophet Amos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “I, God, will return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 15 16 wqi6 figs-metaphor ἀναστρέψω 1 God is speaking of showing favor to the Israelites once again as if he had gone somewhere else but will now **return**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will show favor to the Israelites once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 16 wqi6 figs-metaphor ἀναστρέψω 1 God is speaking of showing favor to the Israelites once again as if he had gone somewhere else but will now **return**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will show favor to the Israelites once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 16 fhdr figs-parallelism ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will rebuild the fallen tent of David, yes, I will rebuild its ruins and restore it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -ACT 15 16 f5wf figs-metaphor ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν 1 I will build again the tent of David, which has fallen down; and I will rebuild its ruins and will restore it God is speaking of the royal dynasty of David as if it were a **tent** that had **fallen** down. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will restore the dynasty of David, which is no longer ruling over the people of Israel, yes, I will make one of David’s descendants king again and restore his dynasty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 16 f5wf figs-metaphor ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν 1 I will build again the tent of David, which has fallen down; and I will rebuild its ruins and will restore it God is speaking of the royal dynasty of David as if it were a **tent** that had **fallen** down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will restore the dynasty of David, which is no longer ruling over the people of Israel, yes, I will make one of David’s descendants king again and restore his dynasty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 16 u0r6 figs-activepassive τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the tent of David that has fallen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 17 hkw1 figs-gendernotations κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 remnant of men Although the term **men** is masculine, God is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. You may wish to indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “the remnant of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 15 17 pe4l figs-123person ἐκζητήσωσιν…τὸν Κύριον 1 may seek the Lord God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “may seek me, the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -ACT 15 17 sm79 figs-metaphor ἐκζητήσωσιν…τὸν Κύριον 1 the remnant of men may seek the Lord God is speaking as if the Gentiles would literally **seek** or look for him. The expression means that the Gentiles will begin to worship God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may begin to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 17 sm79 figs-metaphor ἐκζητήσωσιν…τὸν Κύριον 1 the remnant of men may seek the Lord God is speaking as if the Gentiles would literally **seek** or look for him. The expression means that the Gentiles will begin to worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may begin to worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 17 s6de figs-explicitinfo ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 It might seem that this phrase contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “upon whom my name has been called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 15 17 tu21 figs-activepassive ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 including all the Gentiles upon whom my name has been called upon them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom I have called by my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 17 c8gm figs-metonymy ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 my name See how you translated the similar expression in [15:14](../15/14.md). (1) Alternate translation: “who will belong to me” (2) Alternate translation: “who will worship me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 18 tr27 figs-activepassive γνωστὰ 1 known If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people have known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 19 pyb9 figs-explicit μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 not to trouble those from the Gentiles who are turning to God In your translation, you can make explicit in what way James does not want to **trouble** these **Gentiles**. Alternate translation: “that we should not require the Gentiles who are believing in God to be circumcised and obey the laws of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 19 vr6u figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 who are turning to God James is speaking of these Gentiles as if they are physically **turning** to God. He means that they are believing in the true God and starting to live in a way that pleases him. If your readers would misunderstand this expression, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believing in God and obeying him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 19 vr6u figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 who are turning to God James is speaking of these Gentiles as if they are physically **turning** to God. He means that they are believing in the true God and starting to live in a way that pleases him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning of this expression plainly. Alternate translation: “believing in God and obeying him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 20 vcm4 translate-versebridge 1 James lists four regulations in this verse and he gives the reason for them in the next verse. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 19–21. It might say something like this: “Therefore, I judge that we should not trouble the Gentiles who are turning to God. However, since Moses has had those proclaiming him in every city from ancient generations—he is read in the synagogues on every Sabbath—we should write to the Gentiles to abstain from the pollution of idols and sexual immorality and strangled things and blood.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 15 20 wx8f τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 to keep away from the pollution of idols, and sexual immorality, and things that are strangled, and blood If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **pollution**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) ACT 15 20 qun9 figs-possession τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 If your language would not use a possessive form here, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ACT 15 20 n6f2 figs-explicit τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 pollution of idols James is likely talking about food that has been offered to **idols**, and he is speaking as if being offered to idols has polluted this food. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating food that has been offered to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 15 20 n6f2 figs-explicit τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 pollution of idols James is likely talking about food that has been offered to **idols**, and he is speaking as if being offered to idols has polluted this food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating food that has been offered to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 20 brc2 figs-nominaladj καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ 1 James is using the adjective **strangled** as a noun to mean animals that have been killed by strangulation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 15 20 h27f figs-metonymy τοῦ πνικτοῦ 1 James is referring by association to meat from animals that have been killed by strangulation. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 20 h27f figs-metonymy τοῦ πνικτοῦ 1 James is referring by association to meat from animals that have been killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 20 j2rl figs-explicit τοῦ πνικτοῦ 1 things that are strangled, and blood God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, they tocould not eat the meat from an animal that had been strangled, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “and from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 20 llys figs-explicit καὶ τοῦ αἵματος 1 James is not saying that the Gentiles should have no contact at all with blood. Rather, he implicitly means that the Gentiles should not consume blood. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “and from consuming blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 21 si1h figs-explicit Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 For Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him, being read in the synagogues every Sabbath James is saying implicitly that Gentile believers should observe at least the four regulations he has listed because they embody essential aspects of the law of Moses (not worshipping idols, not practicing sexual immorality, and respecting the blood of sacrifices), and the law of Moses is well known because it is read aloud regularly in the Jewish synagogues. If the Gentiles did not observe even these regulations, that would upset Jewish believers and make Jews who were not yet believers more hostile to Christianity. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what James is saying. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 21 zd7t figs-metonymy Μωϋσῆς…ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει…ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 Moses James is using the name **Moses** to mean the law associated with Moses. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have been proclaiming the law of Moses by city from ancient generations; it is read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 21 zd7t figs-metonymy Μωϋσῆς…ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει…ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 Moses James is using the name **Moses** to mean the law associated with Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have been proclaiming the law of Moses by city from ancient generations; it is read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 21 wp1s figs-activepassive ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “People read him” or “People read from the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 21 xg5n figs-explicit κατὰ πόλιν 1 in every city The expression **by city** means “in every city,” and James implicitly means every city in which there are Jews. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in every city in which there are Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 22 hp6j figs-metonymy ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the whole church Here the word **church** describes the people who were part of the church. Alternate translation: “all the people of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2240,23 +2240,23 @@ ACT 15 22 g6e8 figs-explicit ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Luke assumes t ACT 15 22 c711 translate-names Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν 1 Judas called Barsabbas The words **Judas** and **Barsabbas** are the names of men. **Barsabbas** was another name by which **Judas** was known. **Barsabbas** is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. See how you translated this same name for another man in [1:23](../01/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 15 22 s6lv figs-activepassive Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Judas, whom people called Barsabbas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 22 ywen translate-names Σιλᾶν 1 The word **Silas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 15 22 s6d8 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 15 23 k6cq figs-metonymy γράψαντες διὰ χειρὸς αὐτῶν 1 Luke does not mean that the apostles and elders ask Judas and Silas to write out this letter for them. Rather, Luke is using the word **hand** you mean that Judas and Silas carried the letter and delivered it. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sending the following letter with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 22 s6d8 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the members of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 23 k6cq figs-metonymy γράψαντες διὰ χειρὸς αὐτῶν 1 Luke does not mean that the apostles and elders ask Judas and Silas to write out this letter for them. Rather, Luke is using the word **hand** you mean that Judas and Silas carried the letter and delivered it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “sending the following letter with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 23 xz3f figs-youdual χειρὸς αὐτῶν 1 Since Luke is referring to two people, it might be more natural in your language to use the dual or plural form here, as your language may require. Alternate translation: “their hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) ACT 15 23 e4g2 οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν 1 The apostles and the elders, brothers, to those throughout Antioch and Syria and Cilicia, who are brothers from among the Gentiles. Greetings This is the introduction of the letter. In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language and culture may have its own way of introducing the author of a letter and saying to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers” -ACT 15 23 kp51 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ…ἀδελφοῖς 1 brothers … brothers The apostles and elders are using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. By doing this, they are assuring the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 23 kp51 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ…ἀδελφοῖς 1 brothers … brothers The apostles and elders are using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. By doing this, they are assuring the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 23 php8 translate-names Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν 1 Cilicia The words **Syria** and **Cilicia** are the names of Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 15 24 g8m9 figs-exclusive ἠκούσαμεν… ἡμῶν…οὐ διεστειλάμεθα 1 Here and in the rest of the letter, by **we** and **us** (and “our”), the apostles and elders mean themselves and probably the rest of the church in Jerusalem, but not the Gentiles to whom they are writing, so use the exclusive forms of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 15 24 p1tl figs-explicit ἐξ ἡμῶν 1 that certain ones The apostles and elders seem to mean implicitly that these people have gone out from their community, but not from among themselves. That is, the word **some** refers to people who were part of the church in Jerusalem would you dear, but who were not apostles or elders. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from our community” or “from here in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 24 hbw5 figs-metonymy λόγοις 1 The apostles and elders are using the term **words** to mean what the people who have gone out from them have been teaching by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they have been teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 24 hbw5 figs-metonymy λόγοις 1 The apostles and elders are using the term **words** to mean what the people who have gone out from them have been teaching by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they have been teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 24 bxq8 figs-synecdoche ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν 1 to disturb you with teachings that are upsetting your souls The apostles and elders are using one part of the people to home they are writing, their **souls**, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “upsetting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 15 26 gldi figs-explicit ἀνθρώποις παραδεδωκόσι 1 By **men**, the letter implicitly means Paul and Barnabas. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas have handed over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 26 dhj8 figs-metonymy παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 The letter is using the term **souls** to mean the lives of Paul and Barnabas, by association with the way a living person has a soul. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having handed over their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 26 dinn figs-metaphor παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 The letter is speaking as if Paul and Barnabas have literally **handed over** their lives. This means that they have been willing to risk their lives. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having put their lives at risk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 15 26 t7vw figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ This is a figurative expression. If your readers might misunderstand it, you could state the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) that the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) that the **name** of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 26 dhj8 figs-metonymy παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 The letter is using the term **souls** to mean the lives of Paul and Barnabas, by association with the way a living person has a soul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having handed over their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 26 dinn figs-metaphor παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 The letter is speaking as if Paul and Barnabas have literally **handed over** their lives. This means that they have been willing to risk their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having put their lives at risk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 26 t7vw figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ This is a figurative expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) that the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) that the **name** of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 27 y972 figs-nominaladj y972 1 The letter is using the adjective **same** as a noun to mean the details of the decision that the apostles and elders have reached. ULT adds **thing** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “confirming that this is our decision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 15 27 xw8l figs-explicit διὰ λόγου 1 they are reporting to you the same thing in words The letter is using the term **word** to mean “by word of mouth,” that is, “in person.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 28 l9z6 figs-metaphor μηδὲν πλέον…βάρος 1 to be laid upon you no greater burden than these necessary things The letter is speaking of the restrictions it describes as if they were a physical **burden** that the Gentiles would need to carry. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no greater obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 27 xw8l figs-explicit διὰ λόγου 1 they are reporting to you the same thing in words The letter is using the term **word** to mean “by word of mouth,” that is, “in person.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 28 l9z6 figs-metaphor μηδὲν πλέον…βάρος 1 to be laid upon you no greater burden than these necessary things The letter is speaking of the restrictions it describes as if they were a physical **burden** that the Gentiles would need to carry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no greater obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 28 bx90 figs-activepassive μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to lay no greater burden upon you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 29 nt7s figs-nominaladj εἰδωλοθύτων 1 things sacrificed to idols The letter is using the adjective **sacrificed**, with the qualifier **to idols**, as a noun to mean the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols. (ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 15 29 vcc6 figs-explicit αἵματος 1 blood See how you translated this term in [15:20](../15/20.md). Alternate translation: “consuming blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2270,19 +2270,19 @@ ACT 15 30 yl8v figs-explicit τὸ πλῆθος 1 Luke assumes that his reader ACT 15 31 k1mr writing-pronouns ἐχάρησαν 1 they rejoiced The pronoun **they** refers to the believers in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Antioch rejoiced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 15 31 e4gf figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει 1 because of the encouragement If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **encouragement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because they were so encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 15 32 r65l figs-explicit καὶ αὐτοὶ προφῆται ὄντες 1 also being prophets themselves When Luke says **also**, he means implicitly that Judas and Silas were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were [13:1](../13/01.md). You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “who were prophets as Paul and Barnabas were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 32 e2en figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 15 32 frea figs-metonymy διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ…καὶ ἐπεστήριξαν 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean a message of encouragement that Judas and Silas spoke to the believers in Antioch by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by speaking to them at length to strengthen them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 32 j99g figs-metaphor ἐπεστήριξαν 1 strengthened them Luke does not mean that Judas and Silas strengthened the believers physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthened them in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 32 e2en figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 32 frea figs-metonymy διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ…καὶ ἐπεστήριξαν 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean a message of encouragement that Judas and Silas spoke to the believers in Antioch by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by speaking to them at length to strengthen them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 32 j99g figs-metaphor ἐπεστήριξαν 1 strengthened them Luke does not mean that Judas and Silas strengthened the believers physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthened them in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 33 v6im figs-activepassive ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 they were sent away with peace from the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent them away with peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 15 33 wzw4 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 33 wzw4 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 33 xv3h figs-explicit πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς 1 to those who had sent them Luke is referring implicitly to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, who had sent Judas and Silas to Antioch. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “back to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 35 anfc writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened once the church resolved the question about whether the Gentiles needed to obey all the laws of Moses. You language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 15 35 e7s4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 35 e7s4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 35 hnnb writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 15 34 hkh0 translate-textvariants 1 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 15 36 jjoa figs-idiom μετὰ…τινας ἡμέρας 1 Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “after some time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 15 36 ib2j figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 let us visit the brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 15 36 ua1f figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Paul is using the term **word** to mean the message that he and Barnabas shared by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 36 ib2j figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 let us visit the brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 36 ua1f figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Paul is using the term **word** to mean the message that he and Barnabas shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 36 k08n writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 15 36 y9i9 figs-ellipsis πῶς ἔχουσιν 1 how they are Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation, with no comma preceding: “to see how they are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 15 38 a5nn figs-litotes Παῦλος…ἠξίου…μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον 1 Paul thought it wise not to take along him Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “Paul was thinking it would be foolish to take him with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) @@ -2291,11 +2291,11 @@ ACT 15 40 l2uq figs-activepassive παραδοθεὶς…ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδ ACT 15 40 tt2w figs-abstractnouns τῇ χάριτι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the gracious care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 15 40 xkjo writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 15 41 cbat writing-pronouns διήρχετο 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was going through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 15 41 e3ym figs-synecdoche διήρχετο 1 he went through Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 15 41 s7yf figs-metonymy ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 Luke is using the term **churches** to refer to the people associated with the churches.If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 41 tbv3 figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 strengthening the churches Luke does not mean that Paul and Silas strengthened the people of the churches physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 41 e3ym figs-synecdoche διήρχετο 1 he went through Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 15 41 s7yf figs-metonymy ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 Luke is using the term **churches** to refer to the people associated with the churches.If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 41 tbv3 figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 strengthening the churches Luke does not mean that Paul and Silas strengthened the people of the churches physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes

## Structure and formatting- Verses 1–5 describe how Paul began his second missionary journey and met Timothy and brought him along with him.- Verses 6–12 describe how the Holy Spirit led Paul and his companions to share the gospel in the city of Philippi- Verses 13–40 describe how Paul and Silas made disciples in Philippi, delivered a young woman from an evil spirit, and were imprisoned but miraculously released. Acts [16:5](../16/05.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the fourth major part of the book.## Special concepts in this chapter

### Timothy’s circumcision

Paul circumcised Timothy because he and Silas were telling the message of Jesus to Jews as well as to Gentiles. Many Jews would have been so offended that Timothy was not circumcised, even though his mother was Jewish, that they would not have listened to the message. Paul felt that he could have Timothy circumcised as a discretionary matter to remove an offense to hearing the gospel, even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Gentile believers did not have to be circumcised.

-ACT 16 1 m5tb figs-synecdoche κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas also came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 16 1 m5tb figs-synecdoche κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas also came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 1 rhut figs-idiom κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Derbe and Lystra because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Paul likely travel by sea from Syria to Cilicia, and Luke is saying that he then also went to Derbe and to Lystra. Alternate translation: “he also traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 1 km5q figs-go κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Paul also came down If you retain the idiom, it may be more natural in your language to say “went” rather than **came**. Alternate translation: “he also went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 16 1 u3vr figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on the new character he is about to introduce. You language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2305,12 +2305,12 @@ ACT 16 1 l0w5 translate-names Τιμόθεος 1 The word **Timothy** is the na ACT 16 1 wxl8 figs-ellipsis γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς 1 a believing Jewish woman By **believing**, Luke implicitly means believing in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 1 vh73 figs-idiom πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 Luke is describing Timothy’s father in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “but whose father was Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 2 t1lu figs-activepassive ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν Λύστροις καὶ Ἰκονίῳ ἀδελφῶν. 1 He was well spoken of by the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Alternate translation: “The brothers in Lystra and Iconium spoke well of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 2 rez2 figs-metaphor ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 by the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 2 rez2 figs-metaphor ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 by the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 3 p6z8 figs-explicit περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν 1 he circumcised him It is possible that Paul himself **circumcised** Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise him.You can include that information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “he had him circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 3 bdd6 writing-pronouns τοῦτον 1 The demonstrative pronoun **this one** refers to Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 16 3 za93 figs-explicit διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις 1 because of the Jews who were in those places By **those places**, Luke implicitly means the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 3 hk2l figs-explicit ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν 1 for they all knew that his father was a Greek Luke assumes that his readers will know that **Greek** men did not have their sons circumcised, and so the Jews would have known that Timothy had not been circumcised. As a result, they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “for they all knew that his father was a Greek and that he therefore had not been circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 3 pybf figs-hyperbole ᾔδεισαν…ἅπαντες 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they knew very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 16 3 pybf figs-hyperbole ᾔδεισαν…ἅπαντες 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they knew very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 16 4 n46i writing-pronouns διεπορεύοντο…παρεδίδοσαν αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Silas, and Timothy, and the pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the cities they were visiting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silas, and Timothy were going… they were delivering to the believers in those cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 16 4 bu6r figs-ellipsis αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν 1 for them to keep Luke is writing in a compact way. You can explain his meaning more fully if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were delivering to the believers the decrees that had been decided by the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, and they were instructing the believers to keep those decrees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 16 4 gpi3 figs-activepassive τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 that had been decided by the apostles and elders who were in Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2320,7 +2320,7 @@ ACT 16 6 g97e translate-names τὴν Φρυγίαν…Γαλατικὴν χώ ACT 16 6 qk0k figs-infostructure τὴν Φρυγίαν καὶ Γαλατικὴν χώραν 1 Paul, Silas, and Timothy actually had to go through Galatia in order to reach Phrygia, so it might be more natural to put the information about Galatia first. Alternate translation: “the Galatian region and Phrygia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) ACT 16 6 ue3k figs-activepassive κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “because the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 6 d56g figs-extrainfo κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 Since Luke explains shortly after this that the Holy Spirit actually wanted Paul, Silas, and Timothy to share the good news about Jesus in two other regions, you do not need to explain here why the Holy Spirit forbade them to share the good news at this time in the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -ACT 16 6 h4u4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 6 h4u4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 7 b1xq translate-names Μυσίαν…Βιθυνίαν 1 Mysia … Bithynia The words **Mysia** and **Bithynia** are the names of two more regions in Asia Minor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 7 b539 figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ 1 the Spirit of Jesus Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **the Spirit of Jesus**, he means the Holy Spirit. You can use that name instead if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 8 s6l1 figs-idiom κατέβησαν 1 they came down to the city of Troas Luke says that Paul, Silas, and Timothy **came down** to Troas because that city is lower in elevation than Mysia. Alternate translation: “they traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2340,7 +2340,7 @@ ACT 16 12 thk7 figs-explicit κολωνία 1 Luke assumes that his readers wil ACT 16 12 tl9f figs-explicit κολωνία 1 a colony In the Roman empire, a **colony** was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. This information will become important later in the story. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony, where Roman citizens had special rights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 14 n952 writing-participants τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία…ἤκουεν 1 a certain woman named Lydia Luke is using the phrase **a certain woman** to introduce **Lydia** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia … who was listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 16 14 se6e translate-names Λυδία 1 The word **Lydia** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 16 14 qj86 figs-metonymy πορφυρόπωλις 1 a seller of purple Luke is using the color of **purple** cloth to mean the cloth itself by association. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a seller of purple cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 14 qj86 figs-metonymy πορφυρόπωλις 1 a seller of purple Luke is using the color of **purple** cloth to mean the cloth itself by association. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a seller of purple cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 14 c6n8 translate-names Θυατείρων 1 of Thyatira The word **Thyatira** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 14 cyk3 figs-idiom σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν 1 worshiping God Here the expression **worshiping God** means the same thing as the expression “fearing God,” which Jews in the time of the New Testament used to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated “fearing God” in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 14 rd4r figs-metaphor ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 of whom the Lord opened the heart to pay attention to Luke is speaking as if the Lord physically **opened** Lydia’s heart to receive the message that Paul was sharing. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2356,29 +2356,29 @@ ACT 16 15 xnkk figs-imperative εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὸν οἶκό ACT 16 15 hkh3 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Luke is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 16 ufy4 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 16 16 y1gc writing-participants παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν 1 a certain young female slave Luke is using the phrase **a certain young female slave** to introduce this woman as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a certain young female slave who had a Python spirit and who met us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 16 16 ymt9 figs-metonymy πνεῦμα Πύθωνα 1 a spirit of divination Luke is describing the **spirit** that enabled this woman to tell fortunes by association with the Pythian serpent that the ancient Greeks believed to have guarded the oracle at Delphi. This was not an actual god named Python, it was a demonic spirit. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spirit of divination” or “a demonic spirit that enabled her to tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 16 ymt9 figs-metonymy πνεῦμα Πύθωνα 1 a spirit of divination Luke is describing the **spirit** that enabled this woman to tell fortunes by association with the Pythian serpent that the ancient Greeks believed to have guarded the oracle at Delphi. This was not an actual god named Python, it was a demonic spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a spirit of divination” or “a demonic spirit that enabled her to tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 16 h2c5 translate-names Πύθωνα 1 The word **Python** is the name of a pagan god. However, Luke is using the name here by association to mean a demonic spirit of divination. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 16 17 tni9 figs-metaphor ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 the way of salvation This woman is speaking as if **salvation** were a **way** or path that people walked on. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how you can receive salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 17 tni9 figs-metaphor ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 the way of salvation This woman is speaking as if **salvation** were a **way** or path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how you can receive salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 17 gsbj figs-abstractnouns ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation, as in UST: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 16 18 lj79 figs-activepassive διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας 1 But Paul, being greatly annoyed and turning If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “she greatly annoyed Paul, so he turned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 18 qi1k figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 18 u4z8 figs-idiom ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 it came out that same hour In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, term does not mean a literal hour of sixty minutes, it means the shortest time imaginable. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it came out that instant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 16 18 u4z8 figs-idiom ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 it came out that same hour In the ancient world, an **hour** was the shortest time span that people envisioned. In this context, term does not mean a literal hour of sixty minutes, it means the shortest time imaginable. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it came out that instant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 19 r1a1 figs-explicit ἰδόντες…οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς, ὅτι ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν 1 when her masters saw that their hope of profit was gone The implication is that the **masters** could no longer **profit** from the woman because she could no longer tell fortunes. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when her masters saw that their hope of profit had gone because their young female slave could no longer tell fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 19 bws7 translate-unknown εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 1 into the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. If you have a term in your language for such an area, you can use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “into the public square” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 16 19 hf82 figs-explicit ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας 1 before the authorities The implication is that the masters of the young female slave brought Paul and Silas **to the rulers** in order to charge them with a crime and have them punished. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the rulers so that they would judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 20 wn77 figs-metonymy ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 The masters of the slave girl are referring to the people of the city by association with the city itself. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of our city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 20 wn77 figs-metonymy ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 The masters of the slave girl are referring to the people of the city by association with the city itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of our city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 20 dkz2 figs-exclusive οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 These men are stirring up our city The masters of the slave girl are using the pronoun **our** to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 21 gna6 figs-doublet παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν 1 to accept nor to practice The terms **accept** and **practice** mean similar things. The crowd in Philippi is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “practice at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 16 21 vmp0 translate-names Ῥωμαίοις 1 Here the word **Romans** is a name for people who are citizens of the Roman Empire. Alternate translation: “Roman citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 16 22 f03y figs-metaphor συνεπέστη ὁ ὄχλος 1 Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Philippi literally **rose up** against Paul and Silas. He means that the people in the crowd became hostile to them and began shouting their own accusations against them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the crowd became hostile and shouted further accusations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 22 f03y figs-metaphor συνεπέστη ὁ ὄχλος 1 Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Philippi literally **rose up** against Paul and Silas. He means that the people in the crowd became hostile to them and began shouting their own accusations against them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the crowd became hostile and shouted further accusations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 22 r1gr writing-pronouns αὐτῶν…αὐτῶν…ἐκέλευον 1 The pronouns **them** and **their** refer to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas … their … commanded Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 16 22 at6i figs-activepassive ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν 1 commanding them to be beaten with rods If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanded soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 23 dsr3 figs-idiom πολλάς…ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς 1 when they had laid many blows upon them This is an idiomatic expression. If your readers would misunderstand it, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having hit them many times with the rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 16 23 dsr3 figs-idiom πολλάς…ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς 1 when they had laid many blows upon them This is an idiomatic expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having hit them many times with the rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 23 la4h figs-metaphor ἔβαλον εἰς φυλακήν 1 Luke is speaking when he says that the rulers **threw them into prison**. They did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “they confined Paul and Silas in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 24 jug6 translate-unknown ξύλον 1 stocks The word **stocks** describes a wooden frame with holes to hold a person’s feet and prevent them from moving. UST models a good way of describing **stocks** for readers who are not familiar with them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 16 24 z12w figs-metaphor ἔβαλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν ἐσωτέραν φυλακὴν 1 Luke is speaking when he says that the jailer **threw them into the inner prison**. He did not pick up Paul and Silas and heave them through the air. Alternate translation: “confined Paul and Silas to the inner prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 26 q7z1 figs-activepassive σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 a great earthquake happened, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 26 m4ye figs-synecdoche σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 the foundations of the prison Luke is using one part of the prison, its **foundations**, to refer to the entire prison in the state of being **shaken**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a shaking that began in the prison’s foundations shook the entire prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 16 26 m4ye figs-synecdoche σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 the foundations of the prison Luke is using one part of the prison, its **foundations**, to refer to the entire prison in the state of being **shaken**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a shaking that began in the prison’s foundations shook the entire prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 26 s6mu figs-activepassive ἠνεῴχθησαν…αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι 1 all the doors were opened If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 26 p393 figs-activepassive πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη 1 the chains of everyone were unfastened If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the chains of all came loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 26 b540 figs-explicit πάντων 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **all**, he means all the prisoners. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “all the prisoners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2393,13 +2393,13 @@ ACT 16 31 m801 writing-pronouns οἱ 1 The pronoun **they** refers to Paul and ACT 16 31 f104 figs-imperative πίστευσον 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates an encouraging invitation rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates such an invitation. Alternate translation: “If you believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 16 31 br4k figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 you will be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 31 w8ed figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκός σου 1 your household Here, **your household** refers to all the people who lived in the jailer’s house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 they spoke the word of the Lord to him Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Silas had come to Philippi to share by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 they spoke the word of the Lord to him Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul and Silas had come to Philippi to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 32 ftg1 writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 16 33 gied figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Luke is using the term **hour** to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time in the night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 16 33 r3la figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη 1 he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was Paul and Silas who baptized the jailer and his family. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 35 lb4z writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a significant development in this story. Here Luke tells the last part of the story that started in [16:16](../16/16.md). Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development in a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -ACT 16 34 v5fy figs-metonymy παρέθηκεν τράπεζαν 1 Luke is referring to a meal by association with the way, in this culture, a meal was served at a **table**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he set a meal before them” or “he served them a meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 36 qrw0 figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους 1 Luke is using the term **words** to mean the message that the officers whom the magistrates sent communicated by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 34 v5fy figs-metonymy παρέθηκεν τράπεζαν 1 Luke is referring to a meal by association with the way, in this culture, a meal was served at a **table**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he set a meal before them” or “he served them a meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 36 qrw0 figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους 1 Luke is using the term **words** to mean the message that the officers whom the magistrates sent communicated by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 36 f76u figs-imperative ἐξελθόντες, πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 The word **go** is an imperative, but it communicates permission rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates permission. Alternate translation: “you may come out of the jail and go in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) ACT 16 36 noc2 figs-abstractnouns πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “go peacefully” or “go without being concerned that the authorities will trouble you any further” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 16 37 b4jm figs-explicit πρὸς αὐτούς 1 said to them The implication is that the officers whom the magistrates sent had come into the prison with the jailer. That is why Luke says **them** and not just **him**, meaning the jailer. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the officers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2412,18 +2412,18 @@ ACT 16 37 b5a3 figs-ellipsis οὔ γάρ 1 Paul is using an expression that le ACT 16 37 jr2j figs-rpronouns ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ 1 Instead, coming themselves Paul is using the reflexive pronoun **themselves** for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “let them come in person and lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 16 37 sw3a figs-imperative3p ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they come themselves and lead us out” or “they should come themselves and lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) ACT 16 37 x82d figs-extrainfo ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 It is likely that Paul wanted the magistrates to bring him and Silas out of prison, which would effectively be an apology for mistreatment, so that the believers in Philippi would have the protection of the law even after Paul and his companions left the city. However, this is more a matter of interpretation than of implied information, so it would probably be best not to put an explanation of it in your translation. You can leave it to teachers and preachers of the Bible to explain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -ACT 16 38 ldfi figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean what Paul said to the officers by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Paul had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 38 ldfi figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean what Paul said to the officers by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what Paul had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 38 ym2u figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans Roman citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. So the implication is that the magistrates were **terrified** that more important Roman authorities might learn how they had mistreated Paul and Silas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard that they were Roman citizens, because as magistrates they were supposed to make sure that citizens were not tortured and received fair trials, and they were concerned that more important authorities would punish them for the way they had treated Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 38 lqs5 figs-quotations ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they were terrified when they heard, ‘They are Romans!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 16 38 vle2 translate-names Ῥωμαῖοί 1 Here the word **Romans** is a name for people who are citizens of the Roman Empire. Alternate translation: “Roman citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 39 q59h writing-pronouns παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς…ἐξαγαγόντες, ἠρώτων 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the magistrates, and the pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the magistrates entreated Paul and Silas … bringing them out, the magistrates were asking Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 16 39 a7yq figs-explicit παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς 1 Luke means implicitly that the magistrates **entreated** or begged Paul and Silas not to make any protest about how they had been treated. In effect, they apologized to them and asked them to overlook the offense. Alternate translation: “they apologized to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 40 y14i writing-endofstory δὲ  1 Luke uses the word **So** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the imprisonment of Paul and Silas. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 16 40 ylk9 figs-metonymy τὴν Λυδίαν 1 the house of Lydia Luke is referring to the house of **Lydia** by association with the name of the woman who lived there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they came to the house of Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 40 ylk9 figs-metonymy τὴν Λυδίαν 1 the house of Lydia Luke is referring to the house of **Lydia** by association with the name of the woman who lived there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they came to the house of Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 40 t1pf figs-go εἰσῆλθον 1 they came to the house of Lydia In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had seen the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 16 40 qs0x figs-synecdoche καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Luke says that **they … went out**, meaning Paul and Silas, to refer to those two men and to Timothy, who was still traveling with them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and then Paul and Silas and Timothy left Philippi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 16 40 gld6 figs-explicit καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Since Luke says **they … went out**, not “we went out,” the implication is that Luke remained in Philippi for a time, likely to strengthen and encourage the new believers there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had seen the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 40 qs0x figs-synecdoche καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Luke says that **they … went out**, meaning Paul and Silas, to refer to those two men and to Timothy, who was still traveling with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and then Paul and Silas and Timothy left Philippi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 16 40 gld6 figs-explicit καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Since Luke says **they … went out**, not “we went out,” the implication is that Luke remained in Philippi for a time, likely to strengthen and encourage the new believers there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

- Verses 1–9 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Thessalonica.
- Verses 10–14 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Berea.
Verses 15–34 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Athens.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The religion of Athens

Paul said that the people in the city of Athens were “religious,” but this did not mean that they worshiped the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples, and they had begun to worship the gods of the peoples they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

As Paul spoke to the philosophers in Athens, he told the message of Christ for the first time to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament. ACT 17 1 e4w5 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 17 1 kll1 translate-names τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν 1 Amphipolis and Apollonia The words **Amphipolis** and **Apollonia** are the names of coastal cities in the Roman province of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2431,38 +2431,38 @@ ACT 17 1 yj66 translate-names Θεσσαλονίκην 1 they came to Thessaloni ACT 17 1 o19x figs-explicitinfo συναγωγὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 It might seem that the expression **a synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “a synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 17 2 mkn6 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς…αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers the Jews who attended the synagogue in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 17 3 lt8q figs-hendiadys διανοίγων καὶ παρατιθέμενος 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two expressions connected with **and**. The phrase **fully opening them** tells how Paul was **demonstrating** from the Scriptures that Jesus is the Messiah. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “demonstrating by opening the Scriptures fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -ACT 17 3 ir9q figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 He is fully opening Luke is speaking as if Paul had been literally **opening** the Scriptures **fully**, as by unrolling a scroll, so that the Jews in the synagogue could understand them. Luke means that Paul was explaining the Scriptures thoroughly. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “explaining them thoroughly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 3 ipb2 figs-idiom ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise Luke is using the word **rise** to mean that Jesus came back to life again after he died. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 17 3 ir9q figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 He is fully opening Luke is speaking as if Paul had been literally **opening** the Scriptures **fully**, as by unrolling a scroll, so that the Jews in the synagogue could understand them. Luke means that Paul was explaining the Scriptures thoroughly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “explaining them thoroughly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 3 ipb2 figs-idiom ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise Luke is using the word **rise** to mean that Jesus came back to life again after he died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 17 3 b9qi figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Luke is using the adjective **dead** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 17 4 es2u figs-activepassive τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν 1 some from them were persuaded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 4 t21z figs-idiom τῶν…σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων 1 of worshiping Greeks Here the expression **worshiping God** describes Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated the expression in [16:14](../16/14.md). Alternate translation: “Greeks who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 17 4 ye8v figs-litotes οὐκ ὀλίγαι 1 not a few of the leading women Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 17 5 clcz figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 5 ie1f translate-unknown τῶν ἀγοραίων 1 of the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public area for business where the buying and selling of goods and services took place. See how you translated this term in [16:20](../16/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 17 5 t3bc figs-metonymy τὴν πόλιν 1 they set the city in an uproar The word **city** represents the people of the city. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 5 t3bc figs-metonymy τὴν πόλιν 1 they set the city in an uproar The word **city** represents the people of the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 5 w94p figs-explicit Ἰάσονος 1 Luke does not tell us anything further about this **Jason**, but the implication is that the Jewish leaders believed that Paul and Silas were staying in his home. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of Jason, where they believed Paul and Silas were staying,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 5 ks2l translate-names Ἰάσονος 1 of Jason The word **Jason** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 5 abcu writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 to lead them The pronoun **them** refers to Paul and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 17 6 i79p figs-metaphor τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 6 i79p figs-metaphor τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 6 x90b figs-hyperbole οἱ τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 The Jewish leaders are exaggerating the influence of Paul and Silas and their teaching. Alternate translation: “These men who have caused trouble wherever they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 8 ixmb writing-pronouns ἐτάραξαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish leaders in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 17 9 ya44 translate-unknown τὸ ἱκανὸν 1 after they had received a bond from Jason and the rest of them A **bond** was an amount of money that the city officials required Jason and the rest of the believers to pay as a guarantee of good behavior. The city officials would return the money if those men did not cause any further trouble. Your language and culture may have a term that you can use in your translation for this kind of monetary guarantee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 17 9 eq4y writing-pronouns ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the city officials, and the pronoun **them** refers to Jason and the other believers. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the city officials released them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 17 10 qy5c figs-metaphor οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 10 qy5c figs-metaphor οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 10 z39h translate-names Βέροιαν 1 The word **Berea** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 10 m75m figs-explicitinfo τὴν συναγωγὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 It might seem that the expression **the synagogue of the Jews** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 17 11 k2st writing-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about the Jews in Berea to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 17 11 alq1 writing-pronouns οὗτοι…τῶν ἐν Θεσσαλονίκῃ 1 Luke is using the demonstrative pronoun **these** to refer to the Jews in Berea and the demonstrative pronoun **those** to refer to the Jews in Thessalonica. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the Jews in Berea … the Jews in Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 17 11 gu6s figs-metonymy εὐγενέστεροι 1 these were more open-minded than Luke is using the word **noble**, which literally describes a person of a certain lineage, to mean the gracious behavior that should characterize people of that lineage. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more gracious” or “more considerate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 17 11 hle3 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 received the word Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Paul was sharing by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 11 hle3 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 received the word Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 11 uh8a figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας 1 with all readiness Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great readiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 11 qrnm figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was showing the Bereans from the Scriptures that Jesus was the Messiah, just as Paul did for the Thessalonians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 11 g8an εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως 1 these things were so Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to find out whether these things might be so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 17 12 abcv figs-litotes ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι 1 not a few men Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 17 13 ybos figs-activepassive καὶ…κατηγγέλη ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was also proclaiming the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 17 13 dijk figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 13 dijk figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 13 wjq3 figs-doublet σαλεύοντες καὶ ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 troubled the crowds The terms **exciting** and **troubling** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “greatly upsetting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 14 zw1c figs-explicitinfo ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 to go as far as to the sea It might seem that the expression **as far as to the sea** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “to the seacoast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) ACT 17 15 vn8h translate-names Ἀθηνῶν 1 The word **Athens** is the name of one of the most important cities in ancient Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 15 gs1p figs-quotations πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον, ἵνα ὡς τάχιστα ἔλθωσιν πρὸς αὐτὸν, ἐξῄεσαν 1 after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “to Silas and Timothy, ‘Come to me as quickly as possible!’ they departed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -2500,11 +2500,11 @@ ACT 17 22 ja1k figs-hyperbole κατὰ πάντα 1 very religious in every way ACT 17 23 cem7 figs-quotesinquotes βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 To an Unknown God While it would be preferable to present this as a direct quotation (see next note), you could translate this as an indirect quotation so that there is not one direct quotation within another. Alternate translation: “an altar whose inscription dedicated it to an unknown god” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 17 23 nmwv figs-quotemarks βωμὸν ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο, ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this as a direct quotation if possible, since it is the inscription on the altar that Paul is describing. You may be able to enclose this quotation in second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate a second-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 17 23 t3mu figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ ἐπεγέγραπτο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “on which someone had inscribed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 17 24 f2mz figs-merism οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς 1 of heaven and earth Paul is referring to all of creation by naming its two major components. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of everything that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -ACT 17 24 ju4h figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις ναοῖς 1 built with hands Paul is using one part of a person, the **hand**, to represent all of a person in the act of building. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “temples that humans have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 17 24 f2mz figs-merism οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς 1 of heaven and earth Paul is referring to all of creation by naming its two major components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of everything that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +ACT 17 24 ju4h figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις ναοῖς 1 built with hands Paul is using one part of a person, the **hand**, to represent all of a person in the act of building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “temples that humans have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 25 e3dg figs-activepassive ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται 1 Neither is he served by hands of men If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “do hands of men care for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 25 cqri προσδεόμενός τινος 1 Alternate translation: “as if he needed anything” -ACT 17 25 yq68 figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 1 by hands of men Paul is using one part of a person, the **hands**, to represent all of a person in the act of supposedly caring for God. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 17 25 yq68 figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 1 by hands of men Paul is using one part of a person, the **hands**, to represent all of a person in the act of supposedly caring for God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 25 sj89 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς διδοὺς 1 himself giving Paul is using the word **himself** for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 17 25 zv8x figs-doublet ζωὴν, καὶ πνοὴν 1 The terms **life** and **breath** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “existence itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 17 25 sw8d figs-explicit πᾶσι 1 By **all**, Paul implicitly means “all people.” You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2582,7 +2582,7 @@ ACT 18 9 zg8a figs-doublet λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 continue ACT 18 9 a529 figs-explicit μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 do not be silent Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not **be silent** about the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “do not be silent about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 18 10 isn8 writing-pronouns ἐγώ εἰμι μετὰ σοῦ 1 Jesus is stating the pronoun **I**, which is already implied in the verb **am**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I am certainly with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 18 10 a8lq figs-possession λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 I have many people in this city This means “many people in this city are mine.” Jesus is using the possessive form to indicate that these people are loyal to him. Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who are loyal to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -ACT 18 11 a18w figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted Paul to teach by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 11 a18w figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted Paul to teach by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 12 se8m translate-names Γαλλίωνος 1 Gallio The word **Gallio** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 12 f41k translate-names τῆς Ἀχαΐας 1 The word **Achaia** was the name of the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 12 j762 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -2607,7 +2607,7 @@ ACT 18 17 ju3w figs-explicit τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον 1 Since Luke s ACT 18 17 mj77 figs-explicit ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος 1 But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat This could mean: (1) that the Jewish leaders were beating Sosthenes because he was a believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders were all beating him” (2) that the Gentiles who were present in the court beat Sosthenes because the Jews had caused trouble by bothering Gallio with an insignificant matter and Sosthenes was the synagogue leader. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles who were in the court were all beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 18 17 cyk6 figs-hyperbole πάντες…ἔτυπτον 1 they all, having seized Luke likely says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were angrily beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 18 18 j0we grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὁ δὲ Παῦλος ἔτι προσμείνας ἡμέρας ἱκανὰς 1 Luke is using the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between what Paul might have been expected to do—leave the city because he was in danger and to protect the believers from danger themselves, as he did in Thessalonica and Berea—and what Paul actually did—remain in the city. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless, Paul stayed yet many days, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -ACT 18 18 et8c figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 left the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 18 18 et8c figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 left the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names Κενχρεαῖς 1 The word **Cenchreae** is the name of a city. This city was the seaport for the larger inland city of Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 18 kq6f translate-symaction κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow Paul cut the hair off **his head** to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Paul cut his hair in Cenchrea to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 18 18 ceor figs-infostructure εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Luke seems to offer the information that Paul had made a **vow** as the explanation for why he **stayed yet many days** in Corinth despite the danger he was in. It may be more natural in your translation to put this information right after the phrase it seems to explain, **having stayed many days**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) @@ -2668,17 +2668,17 @@ ACT 19 9 yss2 figs-activepassive ἐσκληρύνοντο 1 If your language d ACT 19 9 n6ir translate-names τὴν ὁδὸν 1 speaking evil of the Way before the crowd As the General Notes to chapter 9 explain, **the Way** was one of the first names that people used to describe the community of believers in Jesus. If your language has a word for “way” or “path” that you can use as a name, it would be appropriate to use it here. See what you did in [9:2](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 9 den4 translate-names Τυράννου 1 of Tyrannus The word **Tyrannus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 10 cw5g figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι 1 all those who lived in Asia heard the word of the Lord Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “people living throughout the province of Asia heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 19 10 t0ak figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 10 t0ak figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 10 n45g writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 19 10 kj12 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 11 abcy figs-litotes οὐ τὰς τυχούσας 1 not ordinary Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “extraordinary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 19 11 fa6h figs-synecdoche τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου 1 And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul Luke is using one part of Paul, his **hands**, to represent all of Paul in the act of doing miracles. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 19 11 fa6h figs-synecdoche τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου 1 And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul Luke is using one part of Paul, his **hands**, to represent all of Paul in the act of doing miracles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 19 12 m3kl figs-activepassive καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body were taken to the sick and If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people even took handkerchiefs or aprons from Paul’s skin to the sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 12 vc1v figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body This could mean implicitly: (1) that these were cloth items that others had placed on Paul’s **skin**. Alternate translation: “handkerchiefs or aprons that had touched Paul’s skin” (2) that these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used. Alternate translation: “handkerchiefs or aprons that Paul had worn or used” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 12 aks4 translate-unknown σουδάρια 1 handkerchiefs These **handkerchiefs** were small pieces of cloth used to wipe one’s face. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 12 xs31 translate-unknown σιμικίνθια 1 aprons These **aprons** were clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of those who wore the aprons. Your language and culture may have a term for a similar item that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 12 kw9z figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 the sick Luke is using the adjective **sick** as a noun to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 19 12 nl3a figs-personification ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους 1 their illnesses departed from them Luke is speaking of these **illnesses** as if it were living thing that could depart from a person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God cured them of their illnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 19 12 nl3a figs-personification ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους 1 their illnesses departed from them Luke is speaking of these **illnesses** as if it were living thing that could depart from a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God cured them of their illnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 19 13 he2x writing-newevent δέ 1 General Information: Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 19 13 fgq4 translate-unknown ἐξορκιστῶν 1 exorcists These **exorcists** were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places.Your language and culture may have a term for this kind of person that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term “exorcists,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 13 s12u figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα 1 the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2697,14 +2697,14 @@ ACT 19 18 v9ib figs-hendiadys ἐξομολογούμενοι καὶ ἀναγ ACT 19 17 mx62 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the seven sons of Sceva. You language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 19 17 jodu figs-activepassive τοῦτο…ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν…τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all living in Ephesus came to know about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 17 fd5m figs-hyperbole τοῦτο…ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν…τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “this became widely known among those who lived in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 19 17 h0lq figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking of **fear** as if it could physically fall on the people of Ephesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 19 17 h0lq figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke is speaking of **fear** as if it could physically fall on the people of Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 17 w1su figs-hyperbole ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “all who heard about it became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 19 17 j85h figs-activepassive ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 17 j2hh figs-metonymy ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name Here the word **name** stands for the reputation of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus received a great reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 19 u9pi translate-numbers ἀργυρίου μυριάδας πέντε 1 50000 Each of these **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might say something more general, or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “an amount equivalent to well over a hundred years’ wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) ACT 19 19 bcv2 translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου 1 pieces of silver Each of the **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) -ACT 19 20 es71 figs-personification τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power Luke is speaking of the way that the **word of the Lord** was becoming more widely known and accepted as if it were a living thing that was **increasing** and **prevailing**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ACT 19 20 lbg9 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 20 es71 figs-personification τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power Luke is speaking of the way that the **word of the Lord** was becoming more widely known and accepted as if it were a living thing that was **increasing** and **prevailing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 19 20 lbg9 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 20 t49m writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) ACT 19 21 de4f writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 19 21 q18b figs-idiom ὡς…ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι…πορεύεσθαι 1 this was completed, Paul The word **fulfilled** conveys the sense that Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “once all these things had happened, the Spirit showed Paul that he had completed his work in Ephesus and that he should travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2760,7 +2760,7 @@ ACT 19 36 xj2n figs-explicit μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 to ACT 19 36 s67q figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 rash If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative word **nothing** and the negative adjective **rash**. Alternate translation: “to be careful about what you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 19 37 cuhh translate-versebridge 0 In this verse, the city clerk is giving the reason why the people of Ephesus should not harm Gaius and Aristarchus impulsively. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 36–37. It might say something like this: “You brought these two men here even though they are neither temple-robbers nor blasphemers of our goddess. Therefore it is necessary for you to be calmed and to do nothing rash, since it is undeniable that people from throughout the world come to Ephesus to worship Artemis.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 19 37 s8a9 writing-pronouns τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους 1 these men The pronoun **these** refers to refers to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions ([Acts 19:29](../19/29.md)). While the city clerk does not refer to them by name, you could find a way to identify them for your readers. UST models one way to do this. Alternate translation: “text” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 19 38 zkx5 figs-metonymy ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον 1 have a word against anyone The city clerk is using the term **word** to mean an accusation that Demetrius might make against Gaius and Aristarchus by using words. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wish to make an accusation against anyone” or “wish to bring a charge against anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 38 zkx5 figs-metonymy ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον 1 have a word against anyone The city clerk is using the term **word** to mean an accusation that Demetrius might make against Gaius and Aristarchus by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wish to make an accusation against anyone” or “wish to bring a charge against anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 38 i14r figs-activepassive ἀγοραῖοι ἄγονται καὶ ἀνθύπατοί εἰσιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proconsuls are holding court sessions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 38 szf7 translate-unknown ἀνθύπατοί 1 proconsuls The **proconsuls** were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. In your translation, you can use a term for someone in a comparable role in your culture. Alternate translation: “judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 38 o1vf figs-imperative3p ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they may accuse one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) @@ -2800,7 +2800,7 @@ ACT 20 7 j888 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 and so he continued his message ACT 20 9 ju64 translate-names Εὔτυχος 1 Eutychus The word **Eutychus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 9 v5q7 translate-unknown ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος 1 on the window This **window** was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could describe this more fully. Alternate translation: “on the ledge of a window opening in the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 20 9 tsp4 figs-activepassive καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ…κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 was falling into a deep sleep If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a deep sleep overcoming him … sleep having overcome him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 20 9 abcz figs-personification καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ…κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 having been overcome by sleep Luke is speaking of **sleep** as if it were a living thing that could **overcome** Eutychus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “starting to sleep deeply … becoming completely asleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 20 9 abcz figs-personification καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ…κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 having been overcome by sleep Luke is speaking of **sleep** as if it were a living thing that could **overcome** Eutychus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “starting to sleep deeply … becoming completely asleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 20 9 kh3h τριστέγου 1 third story In this culture, the **third story** meant a level two floors above the ground floor. Some languages and cultures consider the “first story” to be one level above the ground floor, and so they would consider this level, two above the ground floor, to be the “second story.” You can say that in your translation if it would be helpful to your readers. ACT 20 9 jp89 figs-activepassive ἤρθη νεκρός 1 and was picked up dead If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was the believers who were meeting with Paul. Alternate translation: “the believers picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 9 z1wf figs-explicit ἤρθη νεκρός 1 The implication is that some of the believers rushed down to help Eutychus but discovered that he had died from the fall. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when the believers went down to help him, they picked him up dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2842,7 +2842,7 @@ ACT 20 22 vam4 figs-activepassive δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι 1 ACT 20 22 n99n figs-metaphor δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι 1 Paul is speaking as if **the Spirit** had **bound** him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit constraining me” or “with the Spirit leading me in a way that I cannot refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 22 um41 grammar-connect-exceptions τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς 1 Since Paul says in the next verse that he does know one thing that will happen to him in Jerusalem, it might appear in your language he is contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. You could begin a new sentence here that continues into the next verse, leaving out the word “except” at the start of the next verse. Alternate translation: “The one thing I do know that will happen to me in her is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) ACT 20 22 a9j1 writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτῇ 1 not knowing what will happen to me in it The pronoun **her** refers to the city of Jerusalem. Conventionally, Greek referred to cities with feminine pronouns. Your language may use a different gender. You could also use a noun. Alternate translation: “in it” or “in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 20 23 u26j figs-personification δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν 1 Luke is speaking as if these **chains** and **sufferings** were living things that were waiting for Paul in Jerusalem. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will experience chains and afflictions when I get there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +ACT 20 23 u26j figs-personification δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν 1 Luke is speaking as if these **chains** and **sufferings** were living things that were waiting for Paul in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will experience chains and afflictions when I get there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 20 23 q3ie figs-synecdoche δεσμὰ 1 chains and sufferings await me Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chains** that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire experience of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “imprisonment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 24 cvw3 figs-metonymy of no word do I consider my life valuable to myself 1 Paul is using the term **word** to mean what he might say by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I do not consider my life to have any value for myself worth speaking of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 24 ga6d figs-doublet τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 The terms **race** and **ministry** mean the same thing; **race** is figurative and **ministry** is literal. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could show how the second term is the literal equivalent of the first. Alternate translation: “to finish my race, that is, the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -2937,7 +2937,7 @@ ACT 21 11 zvw8 παραδώσουσιν 1 they will hand him over Alternate tra ACT 21 11 s92d figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν 1 into the hands of the Gentiles The word **hands** here represents control. Alternate translation: “into the legal custody of the Gentiles” or “to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 11 b59g figs-synecdoche ἐθνῶν 1 of the Gentiles This stands for the authorities among **the Gentiles**. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 12 fvh4 figs-exclusive ἠκούσαμεν…ἡμεῖς 1 Here the word **we** refers to Luke and the other believers but does not include the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 21 13 uwt2 figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? Paul asks this question to show the believers they should stop trying to persuade him. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Stop what you are doing. Your weeping is breaking my heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 21 13 uwt2 figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? Paul asks this question to show the believers they should stop trying to persuade him. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “Stop what you are doing. Your weeping is breaking my heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 13 bj76 figs-metaphor συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 breaking my heart To make someone sad or to discourage someone is spoken of as if it were a **heart** being broken. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 21 13 k34w figs-metonymy συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 Here, **heart** stands for a person’s emotions. Alternate translation: “discouraging me” or “making me very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 13 p5e5 figs-activepassive οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι 1 not only to be bound If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “not only for them to tie me up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2972,7 +2972,7 @@ ACT 21 25 c4kl figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Here the word **we** refers to Jam ACT 21 25 a35u figs-explicit φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον, καὶ αἷμα, καὶ πνικτὸν 1 to keep themselves from things sacrificed to idols, and from blood, and from what is strangled All of these are rules about what they can eat. They are forbidden to eat meat of animals sacrificed to **idols**, meat with **blood** still in it, and meat from a **strangled** animal because it would still have blood in the meat. See how you translated similar phrases in [Acts 15:20](../15/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 25 bpb5 figs-activepassive φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον 1 to keep themselves from things sacrificed to idols If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “to stay away from the meat of an animal that someone sacrificed to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 25 wjd2 figs-activepassive πνικτὸν 1 from what is strangled If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “from animals that a person has strangled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 21 25 nu0i figs-explicit πνικτὸν 1 If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you can state explicitly the assumed information that what was **strangled** were animals, and that the reason this was wrong is that the blood was not drained from them. Alternate translation: “from animals strangled and killed for food with the blood still in them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 21 25 nu0i figs-explicit πνικτὸν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you would state explicitly the assumed information that what was **strangled** were animals, and that the reason this was wrong is that the blood was not drained from them. Alternate translation: “from animals strangled and killed for food with the blood still in them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 26 cr14 παραλαβὼν τοὺς ἄνδρας 1 having taken the men These are the four **men** who had made a vow. ACT 21 26 s8z9 σὺν αὐτοῖς ἁγνισθεὶς 1 having been purified with them Before entering the temple area the Jews were required to be ceremonially or ritually clean. This cleansing had to do with Jews having contact with Gentiles. ACT 21 26 xu9r figs-synecdoche εἰσῄει εἰς τὸ ἱερόν 1 went into the temple They did not go **into the temple** itself where only the high priest was allowed to enter. They entered the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “went into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -3013,7 +3013,7 @@ ACT 21 36 kax6 figs-euphemism αἶρε αὐτόν 1 Away with him The crowd is ACT 21 37 j9xk figs-activepassive μέλλων τε εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος 1 And as Paul was about to be brought into the fortress If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “As the soldiers were ready to bring Paul inside the fortress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 37 qp63 τὴν παρεμβολὴν 1 the fortress This **fortress** was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in [Acts 21:34](../21/34.md). ACT 21 37 inl1 τῷ χιλιάρχῳ 1 to the commander The **commander** was a Roman military officer of about 600 soldiers. -ACT 21 37 p5cd figs-rquestion Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις? 1 Do you know Greek? The commander uses this questions to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So you speak Greek.” or “I didn’t know you spoke Greek.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 21 37 p5cd figs-rquestion Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις? 1 Do you know Greek? The commander uses this questions to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “So you speak Greek.” or “I didn’t know you spoke Greek.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 38 xx2w figs-rquestion οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων? 1 Are you not then the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness? The commander uses this question and the question “Do you speak Greek?” (verse 37) to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. This could mean: (1) as in ULT, the commander believes that even though Paul speaks Greek, Paul is the Egyptian. “Even though you speak Greek, I still think you are the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” (2) Because Paul speaks Greek, the commander thinks that perhaps Paul is not the Egyptian. “So you speak Greek. Perhaps I was wrong to think you were that Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” It is best to retain the questions if the reader can infer one of the two meanings from them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 38 nxs6 figs-explicit οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος 1 Are you not then the Egyptian Shortly before Paul’s visit, an unnamed man from Egypt had launched a revolt against Rome in Jerusalem. Later he escaped into the wilderness and the commander wonders if Paul might be the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 38 tqh6 translate-numbers τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας 1 the 4,000 men Alternate translation: “the four thousand terrorists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) @@ -3068,7 +3068,7 @@ ACT 22 14 k417 τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ 1 his will Alternate translation ACT 22 14 dg8q figs-synecdoche ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 to hear the voice from his own mouth Both **voice** and **mouth** refer to the one speaking. Alternate translation: “to hear him speak directly to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 22 15 i5q8 figs-gendernotations πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους 1 to all men Here, **men** means all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 22 16 bhg9 νῦν 1 Now Here, **now** does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows. -ACT 22 16 mmx9 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις? 1 why are you waiting? This question was asked to exhort Paul to be baptized. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not wait!” or “do not delay!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 22 16 mmx9 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις? 1 why are you waiting? This question was asked to exhort Paul to be baptized. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not wait!” or “do not delay!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 22 16 lt2i figs-activepassive βάπτισαι 1 be baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “let me baptize you” or “receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 16 zr5p figs-metaphor ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου 1 wash away your sins As washing one’s body removes dirt, calling on the name of Jesus for forgiveness cleanses one’s inner being from sin. Alternate translation: “ask forgiveness for your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 22 16 g5dq ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 having called on his name Here, **name** refers to the Lord. Alternate translation: “having called on the Lord” or “trusting in the Lord” @@ -3093,8 +3093,8 @@ ACT 22 24 pz47 figs-explicit εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθα ACT 22 24 og3n figs-activepassive εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordering his soldiers to whip Paul to force him to tell the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 25 ar63 προέτειναν 1 Here the word **they** refers to the soldiers. ACT 22 25 st4k τοῖς ἱμᾶσιν 1 for the whip The **whip** was made from strips of leather or animal hide. -ACT 22 25 yjw3 figs-rquestion εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? 1 Is it lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and uncondemned? Paul uses this question to make the centurion check the validity of having his soldiers whip Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and who was not given his legal right to a trial!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 22 26 pca7 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 What are you about to do? This question is used to urge the commander to reconsider his plan to whip Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not do this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 22 25 yjw3 figs-rquestion εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? 1 Is it lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and uncondemned? Paul uses this question to make the centurion check the validity of having his soldiers whip Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and who was not given his legal right to a trial!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 22 26 pca7 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 What are you about to do? This question is used to urge the commander to reconsider his plan to whip Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not do this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 22 27 pe31 αὐτῷ…ὁ 1 Here the words **him** and **he** refer to Paul. ACT 22 27 e69y figs-go προσελθὼν…ὁ χιλίαρχος 1 having come, the commander Here, **come** can be translated as “gone.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 22 28 dr2w ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship with a large amount of money The captain may be making this statement because he knows how hard it is to become a Roman citizen, and he suspects Paul is not telling truth. Alternate translation: “I paid a lot of money to the Roman authorities to become a citizen of Rome” @@ -3110,9 +3110,9 @@ ACT 23 1 jru4 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means “fellow Jew ACT 23 1 nn2q ἐγὼ πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ πεπολίτευμαι τῷ Θεῷ ἄχρι ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας 1 I have lived as a citizen before God in all good conscience until this day Alternate translation: “I know that even to this day I have done what God has wanted me to do as a Jewish man” ACT 23 2 yz4n translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias **Ananias** is the name of a man. Though this is the same name, this not the same Ananias as in [Acts 5:1](../05/01.md) nor the same Ananias as in [Acts 9:10](../09/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 23 3 igq4 figs-metaphor τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε 1 you whitewashed wall This refers to a **wall** that was painted white to make it look clean. Paul told Ananias that just as a wall can be painted to look clean, so Ananias appeared to look morally clean, but he was really full of evil intent. Alternate translation: “you wall painted white” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 23 3 un7g figs-rquestion σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι? 1 do you sit judging me by the law, yet command me to be struck, against the law? Paul uses a question to point out Ananias’ hypocrisy. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “you sit there to judge me by the law, yet you command me to be struck against the law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 23 3 un7g figs-rquestion σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι? 1 do you sit judging me by the law, yet command me to be struck, against the law? Paul uses a question to point out Ananias’ hypocrisy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “you sit there to judge me by the law, yet you command me to be struck against the law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 23 3 m6nb figs-activepassive κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι 1 command me to be struck If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. You can use the same word for **strike** as you did in the phrase “God will strike you.” Alternate translation: “command people to strike me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 23 4 lkh8 figs-rquestion τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς? 1 Are you insulting the high priest of God? The men use this question to scold Paul for what he has said in [Acts 23:3](../23/03.md). If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not insult God’s high priest!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 23 4 lkh8 figs-rquestion τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς? 1 Are you insulting the high priest of God? The men use this question to scold Paul for what he has said in [Acts 23:3](../23/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not insult God’s high priest!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 23 5 e8lg figs-activepassive γέγραπται γὰρ 1 For it is written If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For Moses wrote in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 5 veqe ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς 1 Paul quotes from the writings of Moses. ACT 23 6 pbe1 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means “fellow Jews.” @@ -3123,7 +3123,7 @@ ACT 23 6 dchr figs-nominaladj περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσ ACT 23 7 abs3 ἐσχίσθη τὸ πλῆθος 1 the crowd was divided Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd strongly disagreed with one another” ACT 23 8 gl1s writing-background Σαδδουκαῖοι μὲν γὰρ λέγουσιν μὴ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, μήτε ἄγγελον, μήτε πνεῦμα; Φαρισαῖοι δὲ ὁμολογοῦσιν τὰ ἀμφότερα 1 For the Sadducees … but the Pharisees This is background information about the **Sadducees** and **Pharisees**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 23 9 eaf1 ἐγένετο δὲ κραυγὴ μεγάλη 1 So a large uproar occurred The word **so** marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is Paul’s stating his belief in the resurrection. Alternate translation: “So they began shouting loudly at one another” -ACT 23 9 ayr8 figs-hypo εἰ…πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος 1 what if a spirit has spoken to him, or an angel? The Pharisees are rebuking the Sadducees by affirming that spirits and angels do exist and can speak to people. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “perhaps a spirit or an angel has spoken to him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +ACT 23 9 ayr8 figs-hypo εἰ…πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος 1 what if a spirit has spoken to him, or an angel? The Pharisees are rebuking the Sadducees by affirming that spirits and angels do exist and can speak to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “perhaps a spirit or an angel has spoken to him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) ACT 23 10 dr1d figs-abstractnouns πολλῆς δὲ γινομένης στάσεως 1 And when a great argument happened The phrase **a great argument** can be re-stated as “to argue violently.” Alternate translation: “And when they began to argue violently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 23 10 s65i χιλίαρχος 1 commander The **commander** was a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers. ACT 23 10 f568 figs-activepassive διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 that Paul would be torn to pieces by them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that they might tear Paul to pieces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -3317,7 +3317,7 @@ ACT 25 25 g856 τὸν Σεβαστὸν 1 to the emperor The **emperor** was t ACT 25 26 fe2n figs-you ὑμῶν…σοῦ 1 Here the first **you** is plural and probably refers to “King Agrippa, and all who are present with us” in [25:24](../25/24.md). The second **you** is singular and is directed only to Agrippa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 25 26 jcq2 προήγαγον αὐτὸν ἐφ’ ὑμῶν, καὶ μάλιστα ἐπὶ σοῦ, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα 1 I have him before you, and especially before you, King Agrippa Alternate translation: “I have brought Paul to all of you, but especially to you, King Agrippa.” ACT 25 26 rhy2 ὅπως…σχῶ τι γράψω 1 so that … I might have something to write Alternate translation: “so that … I will have something else to write” or “so that … I will know what I should write” -ACT 25 27 txs6 figs-doublenegatives ἄλογον…μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ…σημᾶναι 1 it seems unreasonable for me to send a prisoner and to not state If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **unreasonable … not**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me that if I send a prisoner then I should also state” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +ACT 25 27 txs6 figs-doublenegatives ἄλογον…μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ…σημᾶναι 1 it seems unreasonable for me to send a prisoner and to not state If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the double-negative **unreasonable … not** in positive form. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me that if I send a prisoner then I should also state” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 25 27 xm65 τὰς κατ’ αὐτοῦ αἰτίας 1 the charges against him This could mean: (1) the accusations that the Jewish leaders have brought against him or (2) the charges under Roman law that apply to Paul’s case. ACT 26 intro e2q6 0 # Acts 26 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the third account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 22](../22/01.md))

Paul told the King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and that the governor should not punish him for that.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]]) ACT 26 1 b34d 0 Connecting Statement: Festus has brought Paul before King Agrippa. In verse 2, Paul gives his defense to King Agrippa. @@ -3339,7 +3339,7 @@ ACT 26 7 hnf1 figs-metonymy εἰς ἣν τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶ ACT 26 7 apf2 figs-metaphor εἰς ἣν…ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι 1 to which … hope to attain This speaks about a promise as if it were a destination that can be reached. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 26 7 kzg4 figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν λατρεῦον 1 serving night and day The extremes **night** and **day** mean they “worshiped God continually.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 26 7 c4lm figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not mean all **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “by the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 26 8 de83 figs-rquestion τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει? 1 Why is it judged unbelievable among you that God raises the dead? Paul uses a question to challenge the Jews present. They believe God can raise **the dead** but do not think God brought Jesus back to life. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “None of you think it is unbelievable that God raises the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 26 8 de83 figs-rquestion τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει? 1 Why is it judged unbelievable among you that God raises the dead? Paul uses a question to challenge the Jews present. They believe God can raise **the dead** but do not think God brought Jesus back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “None of you think it is unbelievable that God raises the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 26 8 ukk6 νεκροὺς ἐγείρει 1 raises the dead Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “makes dead people come alive again” ACT 26 9 hm33 μὲν οὖν 1 Then Paul uses the word **Then** to mark another shift in his defense. He is now beginning to describe how he formerly persecuted Jesus’ people. ACT 26 9 r4df figs-metonymy πρὸς τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ…ἐναντία 1 opposed to the name of Jesus The word **name** here stands for the teaching about the person. Alternate translation: “to stop people from teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -3349,7 +3349,7 @@ ACT 26 12 us8d ἐν οἷς 1 While doing this Paul uses this phrase to mark a ACT 26 12 h3ic ἐν οἷς 1 While The word **While** is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time. In this case, Paul went to Damascus during the time when he persecuted Christians. ACT 26 12 ajp6 μετ’ ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς 1 with authority and a commission Paul had written letters from the Jewish leaders, granting him authority to persecute the Jewish believers. ACT 26 14 sip5 figs-metonymy ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με 1 I heard a voice speaking to me Here, **voice** stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I heard someone speaking to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 26 14 du3t Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις? 1 Saul, Saul, why do you persecute me? This is a rhetorical question. The speaker is alerting Saul to what Saul is doing to him, and implying that Saul should not do that. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Saul, Saul, you are persecuting me.” or “Saul, Saul, stop persecuting me.” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) +ACT 26 14 du3t Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις? 1 Saul, Saul, why do you persecute me? This is a rhetorical question. The speaker is alerting Saul to what Saul is doing to him, and implying that Saul should not do that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “Saul, Saul, you are persecuting me.” or “Saul, Saul, stop persecuting me.” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) ACT 26 14 zsi2 figs-metaphor σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν 1 It is hard for you to kick against a goad For Paul to resist Jesus and to persecute believers is spoken of as if he were an ox kicking at the sharp stick that a person uses to prod (or **goad**) the animal. It means that Paul is only harming himself. Alternate translation: “You will only harm yourself like an ox kicking a goad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 26 18 fk1k figs-metaphor ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν 1 to open their eyes Helping people to understand the truth is spoken of as if a person were literally helping someone **to open their eyes**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 26 18 gw8f figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς 1 to turn from darkness to light Helping someone to stop doing what is evil and to start trusting and obeying God is spoken of as if the person is literally leading someone out of a dark place into a place of **light**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -3359,7 +3359,7 @@ ACT 26 18 m9ve figs-metaphor κλῆρον 1 an inheritance The blessings that J ACT 26 18 c5ij figs-metaphor τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 those who have been sanctified by faith that is in me Jesus choosing some people to belong to him is spoken of as if he set them apart from other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 26 18 bgc5 πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 by faith that is in me Here Paul finishes quoting the Lord. Alternate translation: “because they believe in me” ACT 26 19 ljx2 ὅθεν 1 Therefore Paul had just explained what the Lord had commanded him in his vision. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” -ACT 26 19 zv2u figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ 1 I did not disobedient to the heavenly vision If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not disobedient**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I obeyed the heavenly vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +ACT 26 19 zv2u figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ 1 I did not disobedient to the heavenly vision If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the double-negative **not disobedient** in positive form. Alternate translation: “I obeyed the heavenly vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 26 19 sn4h figs-metonymy τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ 1 to the heavenly vision This refers to what the person in the **vision** told Paul. Alternate translation: “to what the person from heaven told me in the vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 26 20 fei4 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 to turn to God To start trusting God is spoken of as if a person turns to start walking toward God. Alternate translation: “to trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 26 20 h1v2 figs-abstractnouns ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας 1 doing deeds worthy of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repented.” Alternate translation: “and start doing good deeds to show they truly have repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -3373,7 +3373,7 @@ ACT 26 23 sc5f νεκρῶν 1 of the dead The phrase **the dead** refers to th ACT 26 23 z2ms figs-metaphor φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν 1 is going to proclaim light To tell people about how God saves people is spoken of as if a person were speaking about the **light**. Alternate translation: “he would proclaim the message about how God saves people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 26 24 dvn2 μαίνῃ 1 you are insane Alternate translation: “you are speaking nonsense” or “you are crazy” ACT 26 24 tk27 τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει 1 your great learning is turning you to insanity Alternate translation: “you have learned so much that it is now making you crazy” -ACT 26 25 dur9 figs-doublenegatives οὐ μαίνομαι…ἀλλὰ 1 I am not insane … but If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not insane**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I am sane … and” or “I am able to think well … and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +ACT 26 25 dur9 figs-doublenegatives οὐ μαίνομαι…ἀλλὰ 1 I am not insane … but If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the double-negative **not insane** in positive form. Alternate translation: “I am sane … and” or “I am able to think well … and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 26 25 a6pb κράτιστε Φῆστε 1 most excellent Festus Alternate translation: “Festus, who deserves highest honors” ACT 26 26 ed7y figs-123person ὁ βασιλεύς, πρὸς ὃν…αὐτὸν 1 the king … to him … from him Paul is still speaking to King Agrippa, but he is referring to him in the third person. Alternate translation: “you … to you … from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) ACT 26 26 cs7b παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ 1 I am speaking boldly Paul was not afraid to speak to the king about Christ. Alternate translation: “I speak with confidence” @@ -3382,8 +3382,8 @@ ACT 26 26 xqr1 figs-litotes λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων ACT 26 26 tta8 figs-activepassive λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ 1 that none of this are hidden from him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he is aware of this” or “you are aware of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 26 26 v1uu figs-activepassive οὐ…ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο 2 this was not done in a corner If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “this has not happened in a corner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 26 26 i5wg figs-metaphor ἐν γωνίᾳ 1 in a corner This means doing something in secret as if a person went and did something **in a corner** of a room where no one could see him. Alternate translation: “in a dark place” or “in secret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 26 27 a4a2 figs-rquestion πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις? 1 Do you believe the prophets, King Agrippa? Paul asks this question to remind **Agrippa** that Agrippa already believes what **the prophets** said about Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You already believe what the Jewish prophets said, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 26 28 y8qq figs-rquestion ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι 1 In a short time, are you persuading me to become a Christian? Agrippa asks this question to show Paul that he cannot convince Agrippa so easily without more proof. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you do not think you can convince me so easily to believe in Jesus!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 26 27 a4a2 figs-rquestion πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις? 1 Do you believe the prophets, King Agrippa? Paul asks this question to remind **Agrippa** that Agrippa already believes what **the prophets** said about Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “You already believe what the Jewish prophets said, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 26 28 y8qq figs-rquestion ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι 1 In a short time, are you persuading me to become a Christian? Agrippa asks this question to show Paul that he cannot convince Agrippa so easily without more proof. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you do not think you can convince me so easily to believe in Jesus!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 26 29 k7kq figs-metonymy παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτων 1 but without these chains Here, **these chains** stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “but, of course, I do no want you to be a prisoner like I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 26 30 k7jh ἥ…Βερνίκη 1 **Bernice** was the sister of King Agrippa ([Acts 25:13](../25/13.md)). ACT 26 30 u8vl ἀνέστη τε ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμὼν 1 And then the king got up, and the governor Alternate translation: “And then King Agrippa stood up, and Governor Festus” @@ -3476,7 +3476,7 @@ ACT 27 29 b1qc ἀγκύρας 1 anchors An **anchor** is a heavy object attach ACT 27 29 q4am ἐκ πρύμνης 1 from the stern Alternate translation: “from the back of the ship” ACT 27 30 b4wv τὴν σκάφην 1 the lifeboat A **lifeboat** is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship and sometime it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship. See how you translated this in [Acts 27:16](../27/16.md). ACT 27 30 rr89 ἐκ πρῴρης 1 from the bow Alternate translation: “from the front of the ship” -ACT 27 31 ez5c figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ οὗτοι μείνωσιν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε 1 Unless these men stay in the ship, you are not able to be saved If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **unless … not able**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “These men must stay in the ship in order for you to survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +ACT 27 31 ez5c figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ οὗτοι μείνωσιν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε 1 Unless these men stay in the ship, you are not able to be saved If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the double-negative **unless … not able** in positive form. Alternate translation: “These men must stay in the ship in order for you to survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 27 31 br71 figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 Here the word **you** is plural and refers to the centurion and the Roman soldiers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 27 31 sz8y figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε 1 If your language does not use the passive form **be saved** in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will not survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 27 33 q3y8 ἄχρι δὲ οὗ ἡμέρα ἤμελλεν γίνεσθαι 1 And up until it was about to become daytime Alternate translation: “And until almost sunrise” @@ -3515,7 +3515,7 @@ ACT 28 4 ma1b figs-explicit ἡ δίκη 1 justice The word **justice** refers t ACT 28 5 q5i3 ἀποτινάξας τὸ θηρίον εἰς τὸ πῦρ 1 shaking off the snake into the fire Alternate translation: “after shaking his hand so that the snake fell from his hand into the fire” ACT 28 5 asr8 ἔπαθεν οὐδὲν κακόν 1 suffered no harm Alternate translation: “was not hurt at all” ACT 28 6 m11i πίμπρασθαι 1 to become inflamed This could mean: (1) his body would swell because of the snake venom or (2) he would become very hot with fever. -ACT 28 6 i6i6 figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον 1 nothing unusual happening to him If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **nothing unusual**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “everything about him was as it should be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +ACT 28 6 i6i6 figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον 1 nothing unusual happening to him If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the double-negative **nothing unusual** in positive form. Alternate translation: “everything about him was as it should be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 28 6 u81u figs-metaphor μεταβαλόμενοι 1 having changed their minds To think differently about a situation is spoken of as if a person is changing his mind. Alternate translation: “thinking again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 28 6 cfe9 figs-quotations ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν 1 they said that he was a god You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘This man must be a god.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 28 6 d1rj ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν 1 they said that he was a god Perhaps there was a belief that someone who lived after a poisonous snake bite was divine or a god. From b5ca3959c57cbde9eeae8aa6705f63805e785283 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 16:40:26 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 302/446] Replace stray "can" with "could" in Acts --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 5afa0d031c..4ec6a233b7 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2937,7 +2937,7 @@ ACT 21 11 zvw8 παραδώσουσιν 1 they will hand him over Alternate tra ACT 21 11 s92d figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν 1 into the hands of the Gentiles The word **hands** here represents control. Alternate translation: “into the legal custody of the Gentiles” or “to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 11 b59g figs-synecdoche ἐθνῶν 1 of the Gentiles This stands for the authorities among **the Gentiles**. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 12 fvh4 figs-exclusive ἠκούσαμεν…ἡμεῖς 1 Here the word **we** refers to Luke and the other believers but does not include the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 21 13 uwt2 figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? Paul asks this question to show the believers they should stop trying to persuade him. If it would be helpful in your language, you can express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “Stop what you are doing. Your weeping is breaking my heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 21 13 uwt2 figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? Paul asks this question to show the believers they should stop trying to persuade him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “Stop what you are doing. Your weeping is breaking my heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 13 bj76 figs-metaphor συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 breaking my heart To make someone sad or to discourage someone is spoken of as if it were a **heart** being broken. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 21 13 k34w figs-metonymy συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 Here, **heart** stands for a person’s emotions. Alternate translation: “discouraging me” or “making me very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 13 p5e5 figs-activepassive οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι 1 not only to be bound If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “not only for them to tie me up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 3367ce5354f7f3992fd0626f68d5548a8838e965 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 16:54:01 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 303/446] Removed "figuratively" and "idiomatically" from completed NT notes --- en_tn_42-MRK.tsv | 48 +- en_tn_43-LUK.tsv | 1182 +++++++++++++++++++++++----------------------- en_tn_44-JHN.tsv | 480 +++++++++---------- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 34 +- en_tn_51-PHP.tsv | 44 +- en_tn_52-COL.tsv | 22 +- en_tn_53-1TH.tsv | 126 ++--- en_tn_54-2TH.tsv | 20 +- en_tn_55-1TI.tsv | 92 ++-- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 100 ++-- en_tn_58-PHM.tsv | 8 +- en_tn_59-HEB.tsv | 88 ++-- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 260 +++++----- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 170 +++---- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 88 ++-- en_tn_63-1JN.tsv | 228 ++++----- en_tn_64-2JN.tsv | 14 +- en_tn_66-JUD.tsv | 48 +- 18 files changed, 1526 insertions(+), 1526 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv index 716d06ba9c..f3ff378880 100644 --- a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ MRK 1 9 zv8t figs-go ἦλθεν Ἰησοῦς ἀπὸ Ναζαρὲτ τῆς MRK 1 10 stwh grammar-connect-time-sequential εὐθὺς 1 The word **immediately** occurs often throughout the book of Mark. As used here, it means that the event it introduces occurs directly after the previous event. Use a natural form in your language for communicating this. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential) MRK 1 10 n8sg figs-activepassive εἶδεν σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρανοὺς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he saw the heavens bursting open” or “he saw God tearing the heavens open” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive) MRK 1 10 m5f6 figs-simile τὸ Πνεῦμα ὡς περιστερὰν καταβαῖνον ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 the Spirit coming down on him like a dove The phrase **like a dove** could mean: (1) the Spirit looked like a dove as he descended upon Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Spirit coming down from heaven, looking like a dove” (2) the Spirit descended upon Jesus as a dove descends from the sky toward the ground. Alternate translation: “the Spirit of God coming down from heaven as a dove comes down to earth” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile) -MRK 1 11 jh9m figs-personification καὶ φωνὴ ἐγένετο ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν 1 Mark speaks figuratively of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And God spoke from heaven and said” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification) +MRK 1 11 jh9m figs-personification καὶ φωνὴ ἐγένετο ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν 1 Mark speaks of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And God spoke from heaven and said” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification) MRK 1 11 s6f4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός 1 my beloved Son The term **Son** is an important title for Jesus. The title **Son** describes Jesus’ relationship with God the Father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MRK 1 12 mh8n εὐθὺς 1 See how you translated the word **immediately** in [Mark 1:10](../mrk/01/10.md) MRK 1 12 yv6v τὸ Πνεῦμα αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει εἰς τὴν ἔρημον 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “the Spirit led Jesus into the wilderness” @@ -864,7 +864,7 @@ MRK 11 29 erqp figs-abstractnouns ἐξουσίᾳ 1 If your language does not MRK 11 29 aak2 ἕνα λόγον 1 Here, Jesus is using the term **word** in a specific sense. Alternate translation: “a question” MRK 11 30 vpgv τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 Jesus knows that John’s authority came from God, so he is not asking the Jewish leaders for information. This is an actual question that Jesus wants the Jewish leaders to try to answer because he knows that either way they answer, they will have a problem. So his words should be translated as a question. Alternate translation: “Was it God who told John to baptize people, or did people tell him to do it?” MRK 11 30 jj91 τὸ βάπτισμα τὸ Ἰωάννου 1 The baptism of John Alternate translation: “The baptism that John performed” -MRK 11 30 sh7b figs-metonymy ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 1 from heaven In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying the word “God” and used the word **heaven** to figuratively represent God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 11 30 sh7b figs-metonymy ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 1 from heaven In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying the word “God” and used the word **heaven** to represent God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 11 30 i5is figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 from men Here, Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” or “humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MRK 11 30 fr1b ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 was it from heaven or from men Alternate translation: “was it authorized by God or by men” MRK 11 30 mc8n figs-yousingular ἀποκρίθητέ μοι 1 In the original language in which Mark wrote this book, the word **Answer** is a command written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) @@ -992,7 +992,7 @@ MRK 12 29 mq92 figs-metonymy Ἰσραήλ 1 Hear, O Israel, the Lord our God, t MRK 12 29 mmtb Κύριος εἷς ἐστιν 1 The phrase **the Lord our God, the Lord is one** could be: (1) an affirmation of the exclusiveness of the Lord as Israel’s God for the purpose of reminding Israel that the Lord was to be the only God they should worship. Alternate translation: “the Lord alone is our God” (2) an affirmation of the uniqueness of the Lord. Alternate translation: “the Lord our God, the Lord is special” MRK 12 30 thj7 figs-declarative ἀγαπήσεις 1 Here, Jesus is quoting a scripture in which a future statement is used to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) MRK 12 30 xjng figs-merism ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου, καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου 1 from your whole heart … from your whole soul … from your whole mind … from your whole strength Jesus is citing a scripture from Deuteronomy in which God is referring to the entirety of a person by listing different parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “with the entirety of your being” or “completely, with your entire person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -MRK 12 30 q49v figs-metaphor ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου 1 from your whole heart, and from your whole soul Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the desires and motives. Alternate translation: “with all your desires” or “zealously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 30 q49v figs-metaphor ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου 1 from your whole heart, and from your whole soul Here, the **heart** represents the desires and motives. Alternate translation: “with all your desires” or “zealously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 12 30 m8hi ἐξ…ἐξ…ἐξ…ἐξ 1 Alternate translation: “with” MRK 12 30 x3n5 figs-abstractnouns ψυχῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **soul**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “essence” or “being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 12 30 ln0t figs-abstractnouns διανοίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mind**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1019,7 +1019,7 @@ MRK 12 34 lfti figs-abstractnouns Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If you MRK 12 34 rgh8 figs-doublenegatives οὐδεὶς οὐκέτι ἐτόλμα 1 no one any longer was daring If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everyone was afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) MRK 12 35 ptc8 figs-synecdoche ἱερῷ 1 answering, Jesus, teaching in the temple, said See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md), where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MRK 12 35 q6e4 πῶς λέγουσιν οἱ γραμματεῖς ὅτι ὁ Χριστὸς, υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν? 1 How do the scribes say that the Christ is the son of David? This is not a rhetorical question. Rather, Jesus’ listeners had asked him some difficult questions, and they had admitted that he answered them well. Now, in return, he is asking them a difficult question. None of them will be able to answer it, and this will demonstrate his wisdom even further. His question actually will teach something to those who are able to recognize its implications. But it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. -MRK 12 35 i6a4 figs-metaphor υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 the son of David Here, Jesus is using the term **son** figuratively to mean “descendant.” If your readers would not understand what **son** means in this context, you could express its meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 35 i6a4 figs-metaphor υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 the son of David Here, Jesus is using the term **son** to mean “descendant.” If your readers would not understand what **son** means in this context, you could express its meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 12 36 e1zq figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ 1 David himself Jesus uses the word **himself** here to emphasize that it was David, the very person whom the scribes call the father of the Christ, who spoke the words in the quotation that follows. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person whom you call the father of the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) MRK 12 36 jlbd figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ, εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “said, by inspiration of the Holy Spirit, that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right side until he made his enemies a footstool for his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MRK 12 36 ejy2 ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ 1 in the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “by the inspiration of the Holy Spirit” @@ -1033,14 +1033,14 @@ MRK 12 37 ssq3 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ 1 See how you translat MRK 12 37 qpdy figs-explicit αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν, Κύριον, καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν? 1 In this culture, an ancestor was more respected than a descendant. But to call someone **Lord** was to address that person as the more respected one. As the General Notes to this chapter describe, this is a paradox. That is, it is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time but which actually are both true. Jesus is calling attention to this paradox to get his listeners to think more deeply about who the Messiah is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate explicitly what makes this a paradox. Alternate translation: “David respectfully addresses the Messiah as his Lord, but David should be more respected than his descendant. So why does David address him that way?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 12 37 rh2t καὶ πόθεν υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν 1 and how is he his son? Like the question in [12:35](../12/35.md), this seems to be a question that Jesus wanted his listeners to try to answer, even though he is also using it to teach. It is a difficult question, like the ones they asked him, which he answered well. They will not be able to answer his question, and this should give them a further appreciation for his wisdom, in addition to what they might learn from reflecting on the question later. So it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So why do people say that the Messiah is David’s descendant” MRK 12 37 qucc grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Jesus is using the word **and** to show that a conclusion should be made as a result of what he has just said, and that this conclusion would be different from what his listeners had previously believed. Use a natural form in your language for showing this. Alternate translation: “so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -MRK 12 37 tjp6 figs-metaphor υἱός 1 Jesus is using the term **son** figuratively to mean “descendant,” as he did in [12:35](../12/35.md). See how you translated the term **son** there. Alternate translation: “descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 12 37 tjp6 figs-metaphor υἱός 1 Jesus is using the term **son** to mean “descendant,” as he did in [12:35](../12/35.md). See how you translated the term **son** there. Alternate translation: “descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 12 38 bh8w grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 Mark uses the word **And** to indicate that Jesus is still sitting in the temple area taking to the people, as he was in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) MRK 12 38 rwxq figs-yousingular βλέπετε 1 In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase **Watch out** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “All of you watch out for” or “Every one of you watch out for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) MRK 12 38 yhfv figs-metonymy βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῶν γραμματέων 1 Jesus says **Watch out** to warn about the influence of certain people. He is not saying that the scribes themselves are physically dangerous, but that it would be dangerous spiritually to follow their example. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Be careful not to follow the example of the scribes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 12 38 nxy9 translate-symaction τῶν θελόντων ἐν στολαῖς περιπατεῖν 1 In this culture, **long robes** were a symbol of wealth and status. To walk around in public in **long robes** was to assert one’s right to high status. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who like to walk around looking important in their long robes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) MRK 12 38 mu5a figs-explicit ἀσπασμοὺς 1 The implication is that these would be respectful **greetings** in which the scribes would be addressed by important titles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “respectful greetings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 12 39 mwmf figs-metaphor πρωτοκαθεδρίας…πρωτοκλισίας 1 Both uses of the word **first** here mean “best.” Alternate translation: “the best seats … the best places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 12 40 jtw4 figs-metonymy οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν 1 They devour the houses of the widows Jesus speaks figuratively of the **houses** of widows to mean their wealth and possessions, which they would have in their houses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 40 jtw4 figs-metonymy οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν 1 They devour the houses of the widows Jesus speaks of the **houses** of widows to mean their wealth and possessions, which they would have in their houses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 12 40 j27b figs-metaphor οἱ κατεσθίοντες τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν 1 the houses of the widows Jesus says that the scribes are **devouring** or eating up the possessions of widows. He means that they continually ask the widows for money until the widows have none left. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language to express the meaning. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 12 40 r3ht καὶ προφάσει μακρὰ προσευχόμενοι 1 Here, **pretext** refers to something that someone would do in order to appear a certain way. Alternate translation: “in order to seem godly, they are offering long prayers” MRK 12 40 qm52 figs-metonymy οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 These will receive greater condemnation Jesus is using the word **condemnation** to mean the punishment that a person would receive after being condemned (found guilty) for doing something wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language to express the meaning. Alternate translation: “These scribes will receive greater punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1083,11 +1083,11 @@ MRK 13 7 d1k9 figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος 1 but the end MRK 13 7 mi4d figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 the end Here, **the end** implicitly means “the end of the world.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 13 8 ydrb figs-parallelism ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these two phrases into one phrase. Alternate translation: “Different groups of people will attack each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MRK 13 8 rlxf figs-genericnoun ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος 1 The word **nation** represents nations in general, not one particular nation. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -MRK 13 8 oyrd figs-metonymy ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος 1 The term **nation** refers figuratively to the people of one nationality or ethnic group. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 13 8 oyrd figs-metonymy ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος 1 The term **nation** refers to the people of one nationality or ethnic group. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 13 8 xln4 figs-idiom ἐγερθήσεται…ἐπ’ 1 will rise against The phrase **rise against** is an idiom that means to attack. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 13 8 e2ln figs-ellipsis βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 kingdom against kingdom Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 13 8 hz6g figs-genericnoun βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 The word **kingdom** represents kingdoms in general, not one particular kingdom. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -MRK 13 8 wpd3 figs-metonymy βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 The term **kingdom** figuratively represents the people of a kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 13 8 wpd3 figs-metonymy βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 The term **kingdom** represents the people of a kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 13 8 pcyi figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **These things** refers to the things that Jesus has said will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “These things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 13 8 dz8g figs-metaphor ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων ταῦτα 1 These are the beginnings of birth pains Jesus uses the metaphor of **birth pains** because, in the same way that the pain of childbirth is eventually replaced by joy when the child is born, so the suffering that is experienced by true believers will eventually be replaced by joy when Christ returns. Because childbirth occurs in all cultures, you should retain this metaphor in your translation. Alternate translation: “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to bear a child” or “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to give birth to a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 13 9 nuti figs-metaphor βλέπετε…ἑαυτούς 1 Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate the need for paying attention or being ready. If your readers would not understand what it means to **watch yourselves** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “pay attention to yourselves” or “beware”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1102,10 +1102,10 @@ MRK 13 9 qq6r εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 Alternate translatio MRK 13 9 y6p6 writing-pronouns εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 for a testimony to them The pronoun **them** refers to the **governors** and **kings** mentioned in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 13 10 ruk9 translate-ordinal πρῶτον 1 But first, it is necessary for the gospel to be proclaimed to all the nations Here, Jesus uses the ordinal number **first** in order to indicate position in an order of events. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can express this same idea in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “before the end comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) MRK 13 10 sfjc figs-activepassive κηρυχθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that believers will be the ones who proclaim the gospel. Alternate translation: “believers to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 13 10 e6ad figs-metonymy πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 The term **nations** refers figuratively to the people within each nation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “people from all nations” or “people within each nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 13 10 e6ad figs-metonymy πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 The term **nations** refers to the people within each nation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “people from all nations” or “people within each nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 13 11 uy91 figs-idiom παραδιδόντες 1 handing you over Here, **handing you over** means to deliver you to the control of someone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “giving you over to the authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 13 11 m0xq figs-activepassive δοθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus says later in this verse that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. Alternate translation: “whatever the Holy Spirit gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 13 11 nr2r figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 Jesus is using the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 13 11 nr2r figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 13 11 q2o3 figs-explicit οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 The phrase **for you will not be the ones speaking, but the Holy Spirit** implicitly means that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. This does not mean that the Holy Spirit audibly speaks for the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit will give you the words to say” or “for the Holy Spirit will instruct you what to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 13 11 a9b6 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 but the Holy Spirit Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit will speak through you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 13 12 toqp figs-explicit παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς 1 Here, the implication is that these people will do these bad things to their family members, because these people hate Jesus, but their family members believe in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because people hate me, they will deliver their own family members who believe in me to the authorities in order to have them killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1129,7 +1129,7 @@ MRK 13 15 m1hq figs-explicit ὁ…ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, μὴ κατ MRK 13 16 y1e9 translate-unknown ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν, μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω 1 let the one in the field not turn back to the things behind The word **cloak** refers to an outer garment. You could translate this with the name of an outer garment that your readers would recognize, or with a general expression. Alternate translation: “coat” or “outer garment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 13 17 bi8n figs-idiom ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσαις 1 to those having in the womb The phrase **having in the womb** is an idiom meaning the woman is with child. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to women who are pregnant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 13 17 bv9z figs-explicit ταῖς θηλαζούσαις 1 This does not mean babies who are nursing but rather refers to women who provide their milk for their babies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “mothers who are nursing their babies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 13 17 u8kk figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 Jesus is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 13 17 u8kk figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 13 18 w47v translate-versebridge προσεύχεσθε δὲ ἵνα μὴ γένηται χειμῶνος 1 pray that If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving all of this verse to the end of the next verse, since in the next verse Jesus gives the reason for praying this prayer. You would then present the combined verses as 18–19. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge) MRK 13 18 w91r translate-unknown χειμῶνος 1 in winter In the location to which Jesus is referring, **winter** is the time of year when it is cold, and travel is difficult. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a term for a season in which it would be difficult to travel or you could translate **winter** with a general expression such as “in the cold season.” Alternate translation: “in the cold season” or “in the rainy season” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 13 19 zs4g figs-idiom ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι 1 See how you translated the word **days** in [13:17](../13/17.md), where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1139,7 +1139,7 @@ MRK 13 19 r1ly figs-abstractnouns ἀρχῆς κτίσεως ἣν ἔκτισ MRK 13 19 c5sz figs-ellipsis οὐ μὴ γένηται 1 may certainly not happen Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “there will never be days like these again” or “after this tribulation, there will never again be a tribulation like it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 13 20 y7g6 figs-idiom μὴ ἐκολόβωσεν…ἐκολόβωσεν 1 did not cut short the days The words **cut short** form an idiom which means “to shorten.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “did not shorten … he shortened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 13 20 el7g figs-idiom τὰς ἡμέρας…τὰς ἡμέρας 1 See how you translated the word **days** in [13:17](../13/17.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “that time … that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 13 20 kda6 figs-metonymy οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh would be saved Jesus is describing people figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the **flesh** they are made of. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no one would be saved” or “no people would be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 13 20 kda6 figs-metonymy οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ 1 no flesh would be saved Jesus is describing people by reference to something associated with them, the **flesh** they are made of. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “no one would be saved” or “no people would be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 13 20 dosx figs-activepassive εἰ μὴ ἐκολόβωσεν Κύριος τὰς ἡμέρας, οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Mark makes clear that “the Lord” is the one who will do it. Alternate translation: “because the Lord will shorten the day, not everyone will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 13 20 q8hm figs-explicit οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ 1 for the sake of the elect Here, the phrase **be saved** refers to being saved from physical death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone would die” or “no one would survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 13 20 fz5f figs-doublet τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς, οὓς ἐξελέξατο 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase to express the idea and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “the people whom he chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -1167,7 +1167,7 @@ MRK 13 26 cd1e figs-hendiadys μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ MRK 13 26 h4z1 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης 1 with great power and glory If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **power** or **glory**, you can express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **power** and **glory** with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “to show he is very powerful and everyone should praise him” or, if you decided to use the first person, “to show I am very powerful and everyone should praise me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 13 27 nsyo figs-123person ἀποστελεῖ τοὺς ἀγγέλους καὶ ἐπισυνάξει τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MRK 13 27 a1z2 figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς 1 he will gather together See how you translated the word **elect** in [13:20](../13/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MRK 13 27 vpb6 figs-metaphor τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων 1 the four winds The phrase **the four winds** is a figurative way of referring to the four directions: north, south, east, and west; it means “everywhere.” Jesus speaks figuratively, using these directions in order to include everything in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the north, south, east, and west” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 13 27 vpb6 figs-metaphor τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων 1 the four winds The phrase **the four winds** is a figurative way of referring to the four directions: north, south, east, and west; it means “everywhere.” Jesus speaks, using these directions in order to include everything in between. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the north, south, east, and west” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 13 27 u1vp figs-parallelism ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων, ἀπ’ ἄκρου γῆς ἕως ἄκρου οὐρανοῦ 1 from the end of the earth to the end of the sky The phrase **from the four winds** and the phrase **from the end of the earth to the end of the sky** mean the same thing. Jesus says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, for emphasis. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “from everywhere” or “from wherever they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MRK 13 28 c99s figs-parables ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς συκῆς, μάθετε τὴν παραβολήν 1 Connecting Statement: To teach something that is true in a way that is easy to understand and remember, Jesus now gives a brief illustration. Consider the best way to introduce this parable in your language. Alternate translation: “Now I want you to learn this truth which the fig tree illustrates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MRK 13 28 ti6e τῆς συκῆς 1 See how you translated the phrase **fig tree** in [11:13](../11/13.md). @@ -1184,8 +1184,8 @@ MRK 13 30 m7ux figs-metonymy ἡ γενεὰ 1 Jesus uses the term **generation MRK 13 30 h72r figs-euphemism οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ 1 will certainly not pass away Jesus is referring to death as passing away. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MRK 13 30 h7dm figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη, μέχρις 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “this generation will still be alive when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) MRK 13 30 t66q ταῦτα 1 until all these things Alternate translation: “the signs I have just described” or “the things I have just described” -MRK 13 31 k4zb figs-merism ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ παρελεύσονται 1 Heaven and earth Jesus is using **heaven** and **earth** together figuratively to describe all of creation. Here, the term **heaven** refers to the sky, not to the abode of God, which will not cease to exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “Everything that God originally created will someday cease to exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -MRK 13 31 ah6w figs-metonymy οἱ δὲ λόγοι μου οὐ μὴ παρελεύσονται 1 my words will certainly not pass away Jesus is using the term **words** figuratively to refer to what he has just said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “but everything that I have said will always continue to be true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 13 31 k4zb figs-merism ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ παρελεύσονται 1 Heaven and earth Jesus is using **heaven** and **earth** together to describe all of creation. Here, the term **heaven** refers to the sky, not to the abode of God, which will not cease to exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “Everything that God originally created will someday cease to exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +MRK 13 31 ah6w figs-metonymy οἱ δὲ λόγοι μου οὐ μὴ παρελεύσονται 1 my words will certainly not pass away Jesus is using the term **words** to refer to what he has just said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “but everything that I have said will always continue to be true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 13 31 cq65 figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ παρελεύσονται 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “will remain forever” or “will always be true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) MRK 13 32 km5z figs-explicit τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ἢ τῆς ὥρας 1 that day or that hour The phrase **that day** refers to the time when Jesus will return. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the day or hour when I will return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 13 32 z3q9 figs-extrainfo οἱ ἄγγελοι ἐν οὐρανῷ 1 the angels in heaven Here, **heaven** refers to the place where God lives; it does not refer to the sky. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) @@ -1204,7 +1204,7 @@ MRK 13 35 v6it figs-metonymy ἀλεκτοροφωνίας 1 Speaking of a **ro MRK 13 35 s8j9 translate-unknown ἀλεκτοροφωνίας 1 when the rooster crows A **rooster** is a large bird, a male chicken, which calls out with a loud sound around the time the sun comes up. If your readers would not be familiar with this bird, you could use the name of a bird in your area that calls out or sings just before dawn, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “when the birds begin to sing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 13 36 mh8t figs-metaphor καθεύδοντας 1 he might find you sleeping Jesus is using the expression **sleeping** to mean “not ready.” If your readers would not understand what it means to be **sleeping** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “unprepared for his return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 13 36 wd97 figs-123person εὕρῃ 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MRK 14 intro uk36 0 # Mark 14 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 14:27, 62, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The meaning of the “body” and “blood” of Jesus

[Mark 14:22-25](./22.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. During this meal, Jesus said of the bread, “This is my body,” and of the wine, “This is my blood of the covenant, which is being poured out for many.” As Jesus instructed, Christian churches around the world re-enact this meal regularly, calling it “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion.” But they have different understandings of what Jesus meant by these sayings. Some churches believe that Jesus was speaking figuratively and that he meant that the bread and wine represented his body and blood. Other churches believe that he was speaking literally and that the actual body and blood of Jesus are really present in the bread and wine of this ceremony. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

### The new covenant

Some people think that Jesus established the new covenant during the supper. Others think he established it after he went up to heaven. Others think it will not be established until Jesus comes again. Your translation should say no more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Abba, Father

“Abba” is an Aramaic word that the Jews used to speak to their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds and then translates it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 14:20](../mrk/14/20.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MRK 14 intro uk36 0 # Mark 14 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 14:27, 62, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The meaning of the “body” and “blood” of Jesus

[Mark 14:22-25](./22.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. During this meal, Jesus said of the bread, “This is my body,” and of the wine, “This is my blood of the covenant, which is being poured out for many.” As Jesus instructed, Christian churches around the world re-enact this meal regularly, calling it “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion.” But they have different understandings of what Jesus meant by these sayings. Some churches believe that Jesus was speaking and that he meant that the bread and wine represented his body and blood. Other churches believe that he was speaking literally and that the actual body and blood of Jesus are really present in the bread and wine of this ceremony. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

### The new covenant

Some people think that Jesus established the new covenant during the supper. Others think he established it after he went up to heaven. Others think it will not be established until Jesus comes again. Your translation should say no more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Abba, Father

“Abba” is an Aramaic word that the Jews used to speak to their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds and then translates it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 14:20](../mrk/14/20.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MRK 14 1 hwb4 writing-background δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Mark uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MRK 14 1 xa8f figs-explicit ἦν δὲ τὸ Πάσχα καὶ τὰ Ἄζυμα μετὰ δύο ἡμέρας. καὶ ἐζήτουν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 During **the Festival of Unleavened Bread** the Jews did not eat bread that was made with yeast. You could translate this phrase as either a description or as a name. Alternate translation: “Now it was two days before the beginning of the Passover and the festival during which the Jews did not eat any bread that was made with yeast. The chief priests and the scribes were seeking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 14 1 ve8f writing-pronouns αὐτὸν ἐν δόλῳ κρατήσαντες, ἀποκτείνωσιν 1 Here, both uses of the pronoun **him** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “they could seize Jesus by stealth and kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1243,23 +1243,23 @@ MRK 14 10 hmhr ἵνα αὐτὸν παραδοῖ αὐτοῖς 1 Alternate MRK 14 10 khvb παραδοῖ 1 See how you translated the word “betrayed” in [3:19](../03/19.md). MRK 14 10 u2ec writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 14 11 kzk1 figs-explicit οἱ δὲ ἀκούσαντες 1 But when they heard it It may be helpful to your readers to state explicitly what the chief priests **heard**. Alternate translation: “But the chief priests, when they heard that Judas Iscariot was willing to betray Jesus to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 14 11 m4il figs-metonymy αὐτῷ ἀργύριον δοῦναι 1 Mark is speaking figuratively of money by reference to the precious metal, **silver**, that gives money its value. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to pay money to Judas for doing this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 14 11 m4il figs-metonymy αὐτῷ ἀργύριον δοῦναι 1 Mark is speaking of money by reference to the precious metal, **silver**, that gives money its value. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to pay money to Judas for doing this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 14 11 f7ek writing-pronouns ἐζήτει 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Judas Iscariot. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Judas Iscariot was seeking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 14 11 jrym writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The second occurrence of the pronoun **him** in this verse refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 14 12 vxax figs-explicit τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 This was the first day of the seven-day festival described in [14:1](../14/01.md). You could translate this as either a description or as a name, depending on what you did there. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the Festival of Unleavened Bread” or “on the day when the Jews removed all bread made with yeast from their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 14 12 bel5 figs-metonymy φάγῃς τὸ Πάσχα 1 you may eat the Passover Jesus’ disciples are using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover** to refer figuratively to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 14 12 bel5 figs-metonymy φάγῃς τὸ Πάσχα 1 you may eat the Passover Jesus’ disciples are using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover** to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 14 13 suny figs-youdual αὐτοῖς…ὑμῖν 1 Since Jesus is speaking to two men, the pronouns **them** and **you** would both be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) MRK 14 13 cijy καὶ ἀπαντήσει ὑμῖν ἄνθρωπος κεράμιον ὕδατος βαστάζων 1 Alternate translation: “and you will see a man carrying a jug of water” MRK 14 13 a7xg translate-unknown κεράμιον ὕδατος 1 bearing a pitcher of water Here, **pitcher of water** means not a small serving **pitcher**, but a large earthen jug, which the man would likely be carrying on his shoulder. If your language has its own term for a large container that people use to transport water, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 14 14 i344 figs-quotesinquotes εἴπατε τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅτι ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει, ποῦ ἐστιν τὸ κατάλυμά μου, ὅπου τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω 1 The Teacher says, “Where is my guest room where I may eat the Passover with my disciples?” If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “tell the owner of the house that the Teacher wants to know where the guest room is where he can eat the Passover meal with his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MRK 14 14 yhtm διδάσκαλος 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../04/38.md). MRK 14 14 imqg τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ 1 Alternate translation: “to the owner of that house” -MRK 14 14 q3pn figs-metonymy τὸ Πάσχα 1 guest room Jesus is telling these two disciples to use the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer figuratively to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 14 14 q3pn figs-metonymy τὸ Πάσχα 1 guest room Jesus is telling these two disciples to use the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 14 15 jlci translate-unknown ἀνάγαιον 1 In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large indoor space that people could use for a celebration meal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 14 15 x3zk figs-activepassive ἐστρωμένον ἕτοιμον 1 make the preparations for us there The word **furnished** is a passive verbal form. If your language does not use such forms, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “one he has furnished and made ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 14 15 k4t7 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, when Jesus says **us**, he is referring to himself and his disciples, including the two he is addressing here, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) MRK 14 16 sb35 ἐξῆλθον οἱ μαθηταὶ 1 the disciples left Alternate translation: “the two disciples departed” -MRK 14 16 wkh9 figs-metonymy τὸ Πάσχα 1 Mark is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer figuratively to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 14 16 wkh9 figs-metonymy τὸ Πάσχα 1 Mark is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 14 17 i1q1 figs-explicit ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν δώδεκα 1 he came with the Twelve If it would be helpful in your language, you could express explicitly to where Jesus and his disciples came. Alternate translation: “he came with the Twelve to the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 14 17 t0q5 figs-go ἔρχεται 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) MRK 14 17 bheu figs-nominaladj τῶν δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -1318,7 +1318,7 @@ MRK 14 34 eyw3 figs-synecdoche ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου 1 My soul is By u MRK 14 34 krj1 figs-abstractnouns ψυχή μου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **soul**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 14 34 ic1g figs-hyperbole ἕως θανάτου 1 even to the point of death Jesus is using the phrase **even unto death** to describe the extent of his grief. Jesus is exaggerating in order to show the depth of the distress and sorrow that he feels. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses great sorrow, or you could turn the phrase **even unto death** into a simile, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “and I have so much grief that it makes me feel like I am near death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MRK 14 35 nk8l figs-explicit εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν 1 if it is possible Alternate translation: “if possible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 14 35 wc6d figs-idiom παρέλθῃ…ἡ ὥρα 1 the hour might pass Jesus is using the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a specific time at which an event or events would take place. Here, the phrase **the hour** refers specifically to the time of Jesus’ suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MRK 14 35 wc6d figs-idiom παρέλθῃ…ἡ ὥρα 1 the hour might pass Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time at which an event or events would take place. Here, the phrase **the hour** refers specifically to the time of Jesus’ suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 14 35 gj74 figs-metonymy παρέλθῃ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα 1 Here, Jesus is referring to the events that would take place during the upcoming hours as if they were the **hour** itself. Because Jesus is associating the upcoming events with the time of the events themselves, by asking that **the hour might pass**, Jesus is actually asking that the events themselves would not happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the upcoming events would pass from him” or “he would not have to experience the upcoming things which he knew he was going to have to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 14 36 c11w translate-transliterate Ἀββά 1 Abba The word **Abba** is an Aramaic word meaning **Father** and which the Jews used to address their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds in Aramaic (he transliterates it) and then translates its meaning into Greek for his readers, who did not know Aramaic. Since the Aramaic word **Abba** is followed by the Greek word **Father**, it is best to transliterate **Abba** and then give its meaning in your language as Mark does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) MRK 14 36 t9r2 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ 1 Father The word **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -1394,7 +1394,7 @@ MRK 14 61 o27t figs-explicit ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Εὐλογητοῦ 1 the S MRK 14 62 c212 τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated the title **the Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md). MRK 14 62 yhhk figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 By calling himself **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MRK 14 62 d5qm translate-symaction ἐκ δεξιῶν καθήμενον τῆς δυνάμεως 1 sitting at the right hand of power To sit **at the right hand** of God is a symbolic act of receiving great honor and authority from God. If there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation, or you could use plain language to express what **sitting at the right hand** of someone meant in Jesus’ culture. Alternate translation: “sitting in a place of honor beside the all-powerful God” or “sitting in a place of honor next to the all-powerful God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -MRK 14 62 e1xd figs-metonymy ἐκ δεξιῶν καθήμενον τῆς δυνάμεως 1 sitting at the right hand of power By using the phrase **of power**, Jesus is figuratively referring to God by association with his **power**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture that expresses power, or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “sitting at the right hand of God” or “sitting at the right hand of God who is powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 14 62 e1xd figs-metonymy ἐκ δεξιῶν καθήμενον τῆς δυνάμεως 1 sitting at the right hand of power By using the phrase **of power**, Jesus is referring to God by association with his **power**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture that expresses power, or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “sitting at the right hand of God” or “sitting at the right hand of God who is powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 14 63 jz48 translate-symaction διαρρήξας τοὺς χιτῶνας αὐτοῦ 1 having torn his garments In Jesus’ culture the act of tearing one’s clothes was a symbolic act done to show outrage or grief. If there is a gesture with a similar meaning in your culture, you could use it here in your translation, or you could use plain language to express what tearing one’s clothes meant in Jesus’ culture. Alternate translation: “having torn his garments in outrage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) MRK 14 63 afd3 figs-rquestion τί ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρτύρων 1 What need do we still have of witnesses? By saying **What need do we still have of witnesses**, the high priest is not asking for information but is using the question form here for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We certainly do not need any more people who will testify against this man!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 14 64 zwf9 figs-explicit ἠκούσατε τῆς βλασφημίας 1 You heard the blasphemy This refers to what Jesus had said, which the high priest labelled as blasphemy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You have heard the blasphemy he has spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1410,7 +1410,7 @@ MRK 14 71 ce6r figs-explicit ἀναθεματίζειν 1 to curse Here, the ph MRK 14 71 vihe figs-explicit ὀμνύειν, ὅτι οὐκ οἶδα τὸν ἄνθρωπον τοῦτον, ὃν λέγετε 1 Here, the phrase **to swear** means “to subject oneself to an oath” or “to put oneself under an oath.” Here, Peter is invoking God’s curse upon himself if what he is saying is not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to swear by saying, ‘God is my witness that I do not know the man whom you are talking about’” or “to promise by making an oath and saying, ‘God is my witness that I do not know the man whom you are talking about’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 14 72 i7u2 translate-unknown ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν…ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι 1 immediately a rooster crowed See how you translated the similar phrase in [13:35](../13/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 14 72 ja3e translate-ordinal ἐκ δευτέρου 1 a second time The word **second** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can translate the phrase **a second time** in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -MRK 14 72 cfno figs-metonymy ῥῆμα 1 Mark is using the term **word** figuratively to describe what Jesus had said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 14 72 cfno figs-metonymy ῥῆμα 1 Mark is using the term **word** to describe what Jesus had said using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 14 72 trxc τρίς με ἀπαρνήσῃ 1 Alternate translation: “you will say three times that you do not know me” MRK 14 72 zr4p figs-idiom ἐπιβαλὼν, ἔκλαιεν 1 having broken down The Greek phrase which the ULT translates as **having broken down** could (1) be an idiom which means that Peter became overwhelmed with grief and lost control of his emotions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “having become overwhelmed with grief” or “having lost control of his emotions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) (2) also be translated as “having thought of it” or “having reflected on it.” Alternate translation: “having thought of it, he was weeping” or “having reflected on it, he was weeping” or “having thought about what he had just done, he was weeping” (3) also be translated as “he began.” Alternate translation: “he began weeping” or “he started crying” MRK 15 intro d823 0 # Mark 15 General Notes

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### “The curtain of the temple was split in two”

The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly, because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus’ people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Mark 15:46](../mrk/15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Sarcasm

The soldiers were insulting Jesus when they put a “purple robe” on him and placed a “crown of thorns” on his head (See Mark 15:17) and said, “Hail, King of the Jews” (See Mark 15:18) and bent their knees and bowed down to him (See Mark 15:19). These actions were symbolic of things that people would do to a king, but the soldiers did not really believe that Jesus was a king. By pretending that they thought Jesus was a king, and by putting a “crown of thorns” on Jesus’ head instead of a regular crown, and by “striking his head with a staff and spitting on him” (See Mark 15:19) the soldiers showed that they did not believe that Jesus was the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/mock]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Golgotha

The word “Golgotha” is an Aramaic word. Mark used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic word so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them it meant “Place of a Skull.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

### Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani?

This is an Aramaic phrase. Mark transliterates the sounds of this phrase by writing them with Greek letters. Mark used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic phrase so that his readers would know how it sounded, and then he told them that it meant “My God, my God, why have you forsaken me?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) @@ -1432,7 +1432,7 @@ MRK 15 9 o3j4 figs-hendiadys ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς λέγων 1 When MRK 15 10 i4ib writing-background ἐγίνωσκεν γὰρ ὅτι διὰ φθόνον παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς 1 For he knew that the chief priests had handed him over because of envy Mark provides this background information about why Jesus was **handed over** in order to help readers understand why Pilate asked the question in [15:9](../15/09.md). Mark introduces the background information in this verse with the word **For**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MRK 15 10 u647 figs-explicit διὰ φθόνον παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς 1 the chief priests had handed him over because of envy The **chief priests** envied Jesus because so many people were following him and becoming his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. If you decide to express this information explicitly, consider beginning a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the chief priests were envious of Jesus because so many people were becoming his disciples. Pilate knew that this was why they had handed him over” or “the chief priests were envious of Jesus’ popularity among the people. This is why they had handed him over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 15 10 yjp3 παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν 1 Alternate translation: “had delivered him over” -MRK 15 11 y5w3 figs-metaphor ἀνέσεισαν τὸν ὄχλον 1 stirred up the crowd Mark speaks figuratively of the **chief priests** as if they had **stirred** a pot and put into motion things that had been lying quietly on the bottom. Mark means that the **high priests** encouraged the crowd to ask Pilate to release Barabbas. If your readers would not understand what **stirred up** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “encouraged the crowd” or “incited the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MRK 15 11 y5w3 figs-metaphor ἀνέσεισαν τὸν ὄχλον 1 stirred up the crowd Mark speaks of the **chief priests** as if they had **stirred** a pot and put into motion things that had been lying quietly on the bottom. Mark means that the **high priests** encouraged the crowd to ask Pilate to release Barabbas. If your readers would not understand what **stirred up** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “encouraged the crowd” or “incited the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 15 11 pvu6 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 he would release Barabbas to them instead The phrase **so that** introduces what the **chief priests stirred up the crowd** to request of Pilate. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) MRK 15 12 keq2 figs-hendiadys Πειλᾶτος πάλιν ἀποκριθεὶς ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς 1 Connecting Statement: See how you translated the similar statement in [15:9](../15/09.md). Alternate translation: “Pilate again responded to them, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) MRK 15 12 p94y πάλιν 1 Mark uses the word **again** here because Pilate had already spoken to them regarding this matter in [15:9](../15/09.md). Use a natural form in your language for expressing the meaning of **again** as it is used here. diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv index 5f1cbfa6ba..04a1bfe9a0 100644 --- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv @@ -3,9 +3,9 @@ LUK front intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke

## Part 1: LUK 1 intro f1b5 0 # Luke 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1-4)
2. The angel Gabriel announces to Zechariah that his wife Elizabeth is going to bear a son, John the Baptist (1:5-25)
3. The angel Gabriel announces to Mary that she is going to become the mother of Jesus (1:26-38)
4. Mary goes to visit Elizabeth (1:39-56)
5. John the Baptist is born (1:57-80)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in Mary’s song about becoming the mother of Jesus in 1:46-55 and Zechariah’s song about the birth of his son John the Baptist in 1:68-79.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “He will be called John”

Most people in the ancient Near East would give a child the same name as someone in their families. People were surprised that Elizabeth and Zechariah named their son John because there was no one else in their family with that name. LUK 1 1 qhd9 figs-activepassive περὶ τῶν πεπληροφορημένων ἐν ἡμῖν πραγμάτων 1 concerning the things that have been fulfilled among us If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “about those things that have happened among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 1 1 hyp6 figs-exclusive ἐν ἡμῖν 1 among us Luke dedicates this book to a man named Theophilus. It is no longer known exactly who he was. But since Luke says in [1:4](../01/04.md) that he wants Theophilus to know that the things he has been taught are reliable, it appears that he was a follower of Jesus. So here the word **us** would include him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -LUK 1 2 hud2 figs-metonymy οἱ…αὐτόπται…γενόμενοι 1 who … were eyewitnesses The term **eyewitness** describes someone who saw something happen personally, “with their own eyes.” The term describes such a person figuratively by reference to something associated with sight, the eye. Alternate translation: “who … saw these things personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 1 2 z9dq figs-metonymy ὑπηρέται…τοῦ λόγου 1 servants of the word Here, **word** figuratively describes the things that the people who brought the message conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “servants of the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 1 2 l000 figs-metaphor ὑπηρέται…τοῦ λόγου 1 servants of the word The people who brought this message were actually serving God by doing that. But Luke describes them figuratively as **servants of the word**, as if they were serving the message from God. Alternate translation: “served God by telling people his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 2 hud2 figs-metonymy οἱ…αὐτόπται…γενόμενοι 1 who … were eyewitnesses The term **eyewitness** describes someone who saw something happen personally, “with their own eyes.” The term describes such a person by reference to something associated with sight, the eye. Alternate translation: “who … saw these things personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 2 z9dq figs-metonymy ὑπηρέται…τοῦ λόγου 1 servants of the word Here, **word** describes the things that the people who brought the message conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “servants of the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 2 l000 figs-metaphor ὑπηρέται…τοῦ λόγου 1 servants of the word The people who brought this message were actually serving God by doing that. But Luke describes them as **servants of the word**, as if they were serving the message from God. Alternate translation: “served God by telling people his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 3 fud1 writing-background παρηκολουθηκότι ἄνωθεν πᾶσιν ἀκριβῶς 1 having carefully investigated everything from the beginning Luke provides this background information to explain that he was careful to find out exactly what happened. He probably talked to different people who saw what happened to make sure that what he wrote down about these events was correct. Alternate translation: “because I have conducted careful research and interviews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 1 3 l001 figs-youformal σοι…κράτιστε Θεόφιλε 1 you … most excellent Theophilus If your language has a formal form of **you** that it uses to address a superior respectfully, it would be appropriate to use that form here. There are many other places in the book of Luke where your language might use formal **you**, and these notes will not address all of them. Rather, as you translate, use formal and informal **you** in the way that would be most natural in your language. The notes will address a few cases where a careful decision should be made between the two forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]]) LUK 1 3 nr63 κράτιστε Θεόφιλε 1 most excellent Theophilus Luke is dedicating this work to Theophilus, and within his dedication, this is the conventional personal greeting. If it would be more customary in your language and culture, you could put this greeting in [1:1](../01/01.md) at the start of the dedication, at the very beginning of the book. Alternate translation: “To most excellent Theophilus” @@ -14,22 +14,22 @@ LUK 1 3 h7q1 translate-names Θεόφιλε 1 Theophilus This name means “frie LUK 1 4 l002 figs-activepassive ὧν κατηχήθης λόγων 1 the things that you have been taught If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “what people have taught you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 1 4 l003 figs-explicit ὧν κατηχήθης λόγων 1 the things that you have been taught Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that he means what he has been **taught** about Jesus. Alternate translation: “what people have taught you about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 5 gb16 writing-newevent ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Ἡρῴδου βασιλέως τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 In the days of Herod, king of Judea This time reference introduces a new event. Alternate translation: “During the time when King Herod ruled over Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -LUK 1 5 l004 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 In the days of Here, Luke uses the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “During the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 1 5 l004 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 In the days of Here, Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “During the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 5 l005 translate-names Ἡρῴδου 1 Herod This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 1 5 l006 translate-names Ἰουδαίας 1 Judea **Judea** is the name of a kingdom. (It was not an independent kingdom at this time. Herod ruled it as a vassal of the Roman Empire.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 1 5 a4q9 writing-participants ἐγένετο…ἱερεύς τις 1 there was a certain priest This phrase introduces a new character in a story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 1 5 l007 translate-names Ζαχαρίας 1 Zechariah **Zechariah** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 1 5 l228 figs-explicit ἐξ ἐφημερίας Ἀβιά 1 from the division of Abijah Luke assumes that his readers will know that this expression refers one of the different groups of priests who each served in the temple for a certain number of days at a time, and that the name of the group means that Abijah was the ancestor of these priests. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the group of priests who were descended from Abijah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 5 gzw1 translate-names Ἀβιά 1 Abijah **Abijah** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 1 5 d3ua figs-metaphor γυνὴ αὐτῷ ἐκ τῶν θυγατέρων Ἀαρών 1 his wife was from the daughters of Aaron Here, the word **daughters** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his wife was a descendant of Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 5 d3ua figs-metaphor γυνὴ αὐτῷ ἐκ τῶν θυγατέρων Ἀαρών 1 his wife was from the daughters of Aaron Here, the word **daughters** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “his wife was a descendant of Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 5 nnu9 figs-explicit ἐκ τῶν θυγατέρων Ἀαρών 1 from the daughters of Aaron This means implicitly that she, like Zechariah, was descended from the line of priests going back to Aaron, the first high priest. Alternate translation: “his wife also came from the line of priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 5 l008 translate-names Ἐλεισάβετ 1 Elizabeth **Elizabeth** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 1 6 uu87 figs-metaphor ἐναντίον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 in front of God Luke uses this expression to mean “where God could see them.” Seeing, in turn, figuratively means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “in God’s judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 1 6 l009 figs-metaphor πορευόμενοι ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐντολαῖς καὶ δικαιώμασιν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 walking … in all the commandments and statutes of the Lord The term **walking** figuratively means “obeying.” Alternate translation: “obeying … everything that the Lord had commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 6 uu87 figs-metaphor ἐναντίον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 in front of God Luke uses this expression to mean “where God could see them.” Seeing, in turn, means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “in God’s judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 6 l009 figs-metaphor πορευόμενοι ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐντολαῖς καὶ δικαιώμασιν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 walking … in all the commandments and statutes of the Lord The term **walking** means “obeying.” Alternate translation: “obeying … everything that the Lord had commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 6 csc9 figs-doublet πάσαις ταῖς ἐντολαῖς καὶ δικαιώμασιν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 in all the commandments and statutes of the Lord The words **commandments** and **statutes** mean similar things. Luke uses the two terms together to make a comprehensive statement. You do not need to repeat both words in your translation if that might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “everything that the Lord had commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) LUK 1 7 c7cj grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 But This word indicates a contrast, showing that what follows is the opposite of what would be expected. People expected that if they did what was right, God would allow them to have children. Although this couple did what was right, they did not have any children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -LUK 1 7 l010 figs-idiom ἀμφότεροι προβεβηκότες ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις αὐτῶν 1 they had both advanced in their days To have moved forward or to have **advanced** means figuratively to have aged. Alternate translation: “they had both grown old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 1 7 l011 figs-idiom ἀμφότεροι προβεβηκότες ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις αὐτῶν 1 they had both advanced in their days Here, Luke uses the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular time, the lifetimes of Zechariah and Elizabeth. Alternate translation: “they had both grown old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 1 7 l010 figs-idiom ἀμφότεροι προβεβηκότες ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις αὐτῶν 1 they had both advanced in their days To have moved forward or to have **advanced** means to have aged. Alternate translation: “they had both grown old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 1 7 l011 figs-idiom ἀμφότεροι προβεβηκότες ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις αὐτῶν 1 they had both advanced in their days Here, Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular time, the lifetimes of Zechariah and Elizabeth. Alternate translation: “they had both grown old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 8 jr7f writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that This phrase marks a shift from the background information that Luke has been providing about the participants to the first event in their story. If your language has a similar expression that it uses to introduce an event, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 1 8 l012 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν τῷ ἱερατεύειν αὐτὸν, ἐν τῇ τάξει τῆς ἐφημερίας αὐτοῦ 1 in his performing as priest in the order of his division If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the results that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because it was his group’s turn, Zechariah was serving as a priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 1 8 vyl8 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ ἱερατεύειν αὐτὸν…ἔναντι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 in his performing as priest before God The expression **before God**, that is, “in front of God,” means that Zechariah was offering his service as a priest in the presence of God. Alternate translation: “while Zechariah was serving God as a priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -41,13 +41,13 @@ LUK 1 9 l013 grammar-connect-logic-result τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι, εἰσελ LUK 1 9 ph9z translate-unknown τοῦ θυμιᾶσαι 1 to burn incense The word **incense** describes a substance that gives off a sweet smell when it is burned. The priests were to burn it as an offering to God each morning and evening on a special altar inside the temple. If your language has a word for this substance, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “to burn a substance that would create a sweet smell as an offering to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 1 10 bjl6 figs-hyperbole πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος…τοῦ λαοῦ 1 the whole crowd of the people This expression, if taken literally, could mean every single one of the Jews, but it is actually a generalization that Luke is using to emphasize how big this crowd was. Alternate translation: “A large number of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 1 10 ntl8 figs-explicit ἔξω 1 outside This word refers implicitly to the enclosed area or courtyard that surrounded the temple. Alternate translation: “in the courtyard outside the temple building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 1 10 uwu7 figs-metaphor τῇ ὥρᾳ τοῦ θυμιάματος 1 at the hour of the incense offering The word **hour** figuratively means “time.” This could mean either the morning or evening time for the incense offering. Alternate translation: “when it was time to offer the incense” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 10 uwu7 figs-metaphor τῇ ὥρᾳ τοῦ θυμιάματος 1 at the hour of the incense offering The word **hour** means “time.” This could mean either the morning or evening time for the incense offering. Alternate translation: “when it was time to offer the incense” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 11 b8b7 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous δὲ 1 Then This word indicates that the event it introduces took place at the same time as the event the story has just related. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show this relationship by using a phrase such as “right at that time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) LUK 1 11 c8ss figs-idiom ὤφθη…αὐτῷ 1 appeared to him When Luke says that the angel **appeared**, this does not mean that Zechariah simply saw the angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Zechariah. Alternate translation: “suddenly was there with Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 12 r3aa figs-parallelism ἐταράχθη Ζαχαρίας…φόβος ἐπέπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 Zechariah was troubled … fear fell on him These two phrases mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize how afraid Zechariah was. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Zechariah became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) LUK 1 12 d1zm figs-explicit ἰδών 1 when he saw him The implication is that Zechariah was afraid because the angel appeared glorious and powerful. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. (Luke has just said that Zechariah was righteous and blameless, so it would be good not to leave your readers with the impression that he had done something wrong and was afraid that the angel was going to punish him for it.) Alternate translation: “when he saw how glorious and powerful the angel was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 1 12 l014 figs-metaphor φόβος ἐπέπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 fear fell upon him Luke is using the expression **fell upon** figuratively to speak of fear as if it attacked and overcame Zechariah. Alternate translation: “this made him very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 1 12 sfb1 figs-personification φόβος ἐπέπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 fear fell upon him Luke describes Zechariah’s **fear** figuratively as if it were something that could actively attack and overpower him. Alternate translation: “this made him very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 1 12 l014 figs-metaphor φόβος ἐπέπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 fear fell upon him Luke is using the expression **fell upon** to speak of fear as if it attacked and overcame Zechariah. Alternate translation: “this made him very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 12 sfb1 figs-personification φόβος ἐπέπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 fear fell upon him Luke describes Zechariah’s **fear** as if it were something that could actively attack and overpower him. Alternate translation: “this made him very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 1 13 ki8l figs-imperative μὴ φοβοῦ 1 Do not be afraid While the angel speaks these words in the form of a command, he is actually telling Zechariah something to help and encourage him. Alternate translation: “You do not need to be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 1 13 es4l figs-activepassive εἰσηκούσθη ἡ δέησίς σου 1 your prayer has been heard If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 1 13 l015 figs-idiom εἰσηκούσθη ἡ δέησίς σου 1 your prayer has been heard This is an idiom that means that God is going to give Zechariah what he has been asking for. Alternate translation: “God is going to give you what you have been asking for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -57,36 +57,36 @@ LUK 1 13 l018 translate-names Ἰωάννην 1 John **John** is the name of a m LUK 1 14 n654 figs-doublet ἔσται χαρά σοι καὶ ἀγαλλίασις 1 there will be joy and gladness to you The words **joy** and **gladness** mean the same thing. The angel uses them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “you will be very happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) LUK 1 14 q1p8 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐπὶ τῇ γενέσει αὐτοῦ 1 at his birth The word **at** introduces the reason why many people will rejoice. Alternate translation: “because he has been born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 1 15 td57 grammar-connect-logic-result ἔσται γὰρ μέγας 1 For he will be great The word **for** introduces the reason why people will rejoice at John's birth. Alternate translation: “This will be because they will be able to tell that he is going to be a great man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -LUK 1 15 sz79 figs-metaphor ἔσται γὰρ μέγας ἐνώπιον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 For he will be great before the Lord This expression means “in front of the Lord,” that is, “where the Lord can see him.” Sight, in turn, figuratively represents attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “God will consider him to be very important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 15 sz79 figs-metaphor ἔσται γὰρ μέγας ἐνώπιον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 For he will be great before the Lord This expression means “in front of the Lord,” that is, “where the Lord can see him.” Sight, in turn, represents attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “God will consider him to be very important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 15 abc2 figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ πίῃ 1 he must never drink The phrase **must never** translates two negative words in Greek. The angel uses them together to emphasize how important it is that the child not drink wine or strong drink. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 1 15 hgb9 figs-activepassive Πνεύματος Ἁγίου πλησθήσεται 1 he will be filled with the Holy Spirit If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will fill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 1 15 l019 figs-metaphor Πνεύματος Ἁγίου πλησθήσεται 1 he will be filled with the Holy Spirit The angel speaks figuratively as if John would be a container that the Holy Spirit would fill. He means that the Holy Spirit will empower and influence John. Be sure that in your translation, this does not sound similar to what an evil spirit might do to in taking control of a person. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will empower him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 15 l019 figs-metaphor Πνεύματος Ἁγίου πλησθήσεται 1 he will be filled with the Holy Spirit The angel speaks as if John would be a container that the Holy Spirit would fill. He means that the Holy Spirit will empower and influence John. Be sure that in your translation, this does not sound similar to what an evil spirit might do to in taking control of a person. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will empower him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 15 ie95 ἔτι ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 even from his mother’s womb Alternate translation: “while he is still in his mother’s womb” -LUK 1 16 x36x figs-metaphor πολλοὺς τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ ἐπιστρέψει ἐπὶ Κύριον 1 he will turn many of the sons of Israel back to the Lord To **turn** a person **back** figuratively means to lead them to repent and obey the Lord once again. Alternate translation: “he will cause many of the people of Israel to repent and obey the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 1 16 l020 figs-metaphor πολλοὺς τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ 1 many of the sons of Israel Here, the word **sons** figuratively means “descendants.” This expression envisions all of the Israelites as if they were their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “many of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 16 x36x figs-metaphor πολλοὺς τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ ἐπιστρέψει ἐπὶ Κύριον 1 he will turn many of the sons of Israel back to the Lord To **turn** a person **back** means to lead them to repent and obey the Lord once again. Alternate translation: “he will cause many of the people of Israel to repent and obey the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 16 l020 figs-metaphor πολλοὺς τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ 1 many of the sons of Israel Here, the word **sons** means “descendants.” This expression envisions all of the Israelites as if they were their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “many of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 16 l021 translate-names Ἰσραὴλ 1 Israel **Israel** is the name of a man. Luke uses it many times in this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 1 17 c52s figs-idiom αὐτὸς προελεύσεται ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ 1 he will go before him To **go before** is an idiom that indicates that before the Lord comes, John will announce to the people that the Lord is going to come to them. Alternate translation: “John will announce that the Lord is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 17 p472 figs-doublet ἐν πνεύματι καὶ δυνάμει Ἠλεία 1 in the spirit and power of Elijah In this context, the words **spirit** and **power** mean similar things. The angel may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “with the same great power that Elijah had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) LUK 1 17 l022 figs-hendiadys ἐν πνεύματι καὶ δυνάμει Ἠλεία 1 in the spirit and power of Elijah Alternatively, the angel may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The term **power** may tell what kind of **spirit** Elijah had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “in the powerful spirit of Elijah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 1 17 l023 translate-names Ἠλεία 1 Elijah **Elijah** is the name of a man, a great prophet of Israel. It occurs several times in this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 1 17 w32h figs-personification ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα 1 to turn the hearts of fathers back to their children The angel speaks of **hearts** as if they were living things that could be turned to go in a different direction. This expression figuratively means to change someone’s attitude toward something. Alternate translation: “to make fathers care about their children once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LUK 1 17 qe48 figs-synecdoche ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα 1 to turn the hearts of fathers back to their children The angel uses the relationship between **fathers** and **children** figuratively to represent all relationships. Luke relates in [3:10-14](../03/10.md) how John encouraged reconciliation in a variety of different relationships. Alternate translation: “to restore broken relationships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 1 17 w32h figs-personification ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα 1 to turn the hearts of fathers back to their children The angel speaks of **hearts** as if they were living things that could be turned to go in a different direction. This expression means to change someone’s attitude toward something. Alternate translation: “to make fathers care about their children once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 1 17 qe48 figs-synecdoche ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα 1 to turn the hearts of fathers back to their children The angel uses the relationship between **fathers** and **children** to represent all relationships. Luke relates in [3:10-14](../03/10.md) how John encouraged reconciliation in a variety of different relationships. Alternate translation: “to restore broken relationships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 1 17 l024 figs-explicit ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα 1 to turn the hearts of fathers back to their children It is assumed that readers will know that this is what the prophet Malachi had said Elijah would do before the Lord came. The implication in context is that John will fulfill this prophecy by using the same empowerment that Elijah had. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to restore broken relationships, just as the prophet Malachi said Elijah would do before the Lord came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 17 l025 figs-explicit ἀπειθεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων 1 to turn … the disobedient to the wisdom of the righteous Gabriel is using the term **wisdom** in the Old Testament sense as a moral term that refers to choosing the way in life that God has shown to be best. The people who make this choice are **righteous**, meaning that God considers them to be living in the right way. Alternate translation: “to lead people who are disobeying God to choose his ways and become people who live right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 17 j49j figs-nominaladj ἀπειθεῖς…δικαίων 1 the disobedient … of the righteous Gabriel is using the adjectives **disobedient** and **righteous** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are disobeying God … people who live right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 1 17 ujs1 figs-explicit λαὸν κατεσκευασμένον 1 a people prepared You could state explicitly in your translation what the people will be prepared to do. Alternate translation: “a people who will be prepared to believe his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 18 asn2 figs-explicit κατὰ τί γνώσομαι τοῦτο 1 How will I know this Zechariah is implicitly asking for a sign as proof. Alternate translation: “What sign can you show me to prove that this will happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 18 l026 grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 For This word introduces the reason why Zechariah wants a sign. He and his wife are both too old to have children, so he is finding it hard to believe what the angel has told him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -LUK 1 18 l027 figs-idiom προβεβηκυῖα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις αὐτῆς 1 my wife is advanced in her days Zechariah is using two idioms. As in [1:7](../01/07.md), to be **advanced** means figuratively to have aged, and **days** figuratively refers a particular period of time, in this case the lifetime of Elizabeth. Alternate translation: “my wife has also grown old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 1 18 l027 figs-idiom προβεβηκυῖα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις αὐτῆς 1 my wife is advanced in her days Zechariah is using two idioms. As in [1:7](../01/07.md), to be **advanced** means to have aged, and **days** refers a particular period of time, in this case the lifetime of Elizabeth. Alternate translation: “my wife has also grown old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 19 l028 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ἄγγελος εἶπεν 1 answering the angel said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the angel responded to the question that Zechariah asked. Alternate translation: “the angel responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 1 19 p3jn figs-declarative ἐγώ εἰμι Γαβριὴλ, ὁ παρεστηκὼς ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 I am Gabriel, the one standing before God Gabriel says this in the form of a statement, but he means it as a rebuke to Zechariah. The presence of an angel coming directly from God should be enough proof for him. Alternate translation: “You should have believed me, Gabriel, coming to you straight from God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) LUK 1 19 l029 translate-names Γαβριὴλ 1 Gabriel **Gabriel** is the name of an angel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 1 19 yp6z figs-metaphor ὁ παρεστηκὼς ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the one standing before God To stand **before** or “in front of” a master, that is, in the presence of that master, figuratively means to be available to serve them at all times in any capacity. Alternate translation: “I serve God personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 19 yp6z figs-metaphor ὁ παρεστηκὼς ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the one standing before God To stand **before** or “in front of” a master, that is, in the presence of that master, means to be available to serve them at all times in any capacity. Alternate translation: “I serve God personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 19 pd7h figs-activepassive ἀπεστάλην λαλῆσαι πρὸς σὲ 1 I was sent to speak to you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God sent me to speak to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 1 20 x9qk figs-metaphor καὶ ἰδοὺ 1 and behold The term **behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” in this case seeing figuratively means giving notice and attention. Alternate translation: “Pay attention!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 20 x9qk figs-metaphor καὶ ἰδοὺ 1 and behold The term **behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” in this case seeing means giving notice and attention. Alternate translation: “Pay attention!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 20 l030 figs-explicit ἔσῃ σιωπῶν καὶ μὴ δυνάμενος λαλῆσαι 1 you will be silent, and not able to speak The implication is that God will make this happen, to show that Zechariah should have believed what Gabriel told him. Alternate translation: “God will make you completely unable to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 20 g5t1 figs-doublet σιωπῶν καὶ μὴ δυνάμενος λαλῆσαι 1 silent, and not able to speak These two phrases mean the same thing. Gabriel uses the repetition to emphasize how complete the silence of Zechariah will be. Alternate translation: “completely unable to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -LUK 1 20 q6y3 figs-metonymy οὐκ ἐπίστευσας τοῖς λόγοις μου 1 you did not believe my words Gabriel uses the term **words** figuratively to describe the content of his message by reference to something associated with it, the words he used to communicate it. Alternate translation: “you did not believe what I told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 20 q6y3 figs-metonymy οὐκ ἐπίστευσας τοῖς λόγοις μου 1 you did not believe my words Gabriel uses the term **words** to describe the content of his message by reference to something associated with it, the words he used to communicate it. Alternate translation: “you did not believe what I told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 1 20 l031 figs-activepassive οἵτινες πληρωθήσονται 1 which will be fulfilled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “which will happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 1 20 hgu3 figs-idiom εἰς τὸν καιρὸν αὐτῶν 1 in their time This is an idiom that means “the time that pertains to them.” Alternate translation: “at the appointed time” or “at the time that God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 21 e14e grammar-connect-time-simultaneous καὶ 1 And This word marks a shift in the story from what happened inside the temple to what happened outside. Alternate translation: “While that was happening” or “While the angel and Zechariah were talking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) @@ -94,10 +94,10 @@ LUK 1 22 h6vt grammar-connect-logic-result ἐπέγνωσαν ὅτι ὀπτα LUK 1 22 r2ak figs-explicit ἐπέγνωσαν ὅτι ὀπτασίαν ἑώρακεν ἐν τῷ ναῷ 1 they perceived that he had seen a vision Gabriel was actually present with Zechariah in the temple. He explains in [1:19](../01/19.md) that God sent him there. The people, not knowing this, assumed that Zechariah had seen a vision. While the Greek says that they “perceived” this, it means that they thought they recognized what had happened. Alternate translation: “they thought that he had seen a vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 23 duy9 writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 1 23 l032 figs-activepassive ὡς ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι τῆς λειτουργίας αὐτοῦ 1 when the days of his priestly service were fulfilled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “when Zechariah had finished his time of service at the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 1 23 l033 figs-idiom αἱ ἡμέραι τῆς λειτουργίας αὐτοῦ 1 the days of his priestly service Here, Luke uses the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “his time of service at the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 1 23 l033 figs-idiom αἱ ἡμέραι τῆς λειτουργίας αὐτοῦ 1 the days of his priestly service Here, Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “his time of service at the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 23 sa5y figs-explicit ἀπῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 he went away to his home This expression indicates implicitly that Zechariah did not live in Jerusalem, where the temple was located. Luke indicates in [1:39](../01/39.md) that Zechariah and Elizabeth lived instead in a city in the hill country of Judah, the area to the south of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “he traveled back to his hometown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 24 l034 grammar-connect-time-sequential δὲ 1 And This word indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the events it has just described. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -LUK 1 24 cda2 figs-idiom μετὰ δὲ ταύτας τὰς ἡμέρας 1 after these days Here, Luke uses the term **days** to refer figuratively to a particular period of time, specifically, the time when Zechariah was serving in the temple. Alternate translation: “after Zechariah had finished serving at the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 1 24 cda2 figs-idiom μετὰ δὲ ταύτας τὰς ἡμέρας 1 after these days Here, Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular period of time, specifically, the time when Zechariah was serving in the temple. Alternate translation: “after Zechariah had finished serving at the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 24 kpw1 figs-explicit περιέκρυβεν ἑαυτὴν μῆνας πέντε 1 she hid herself for five months This expression means that Elizabeth did not leave her house during that time. She seems to state the reason for this in the next verse. She had felt disgraced because she was not able to have children. But if she stayed in her house for **five months**, the next time people saw her, her pregnancy would show, and it would be clear that she was able to have children. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “She did not leave her house for five months so that by the next time people saw her, it would be clear that she was going to have a baby” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 25 w8yq figs-exclamations οὕτως μοι πεποίηκεν Κύριος 1 Thus the Lord has done for me This is a positive exclamation. Elizabeth is very happy with what the Lord has done for her. If it would be helpful in your language, you could show this by making it a separate sentence and indicating with the conventions of your language that it is an exclamation. Alternate translation: “What a marvelous thing the Lord has done for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) LUK 1 25 z1xr figs-explicit οὕτως μοι πεποίηκεν Κύριος 1 Thus the Lord has done for me It is implicit that Elizabeth is referring to the fact that the Lord has allowed her to become pregnant. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “What a marvelous thing the Lord has done for me by allowing me to become pregnant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -110,14 +110,14 @@ LUK 1 26 l036 translate-names Γαλιλαίας 1 Galilee **Galilee** is the na LUK 1 26 l037 translate-names Ναζαρὲτ 1 Nazareth **Nazareth** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 1 27 l038 writing-participants ἀνδρὶ, ᾧ ὄνομα Ἰωσὴφ 1 a man whose name was Joseph This introduces Joseph as a new character in the story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 1 27 l039 translate-names Ἰωσὴφ 1 Joseph **Joseph** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 1 27 tzh2 figs-metaphor ἐξ οἴκου Δαυεὶδ 1 of the house of David In this expression, the word **house** describes all the people descended from a particular person. The term views all of those descendants figuratively as if they were one household living together. Alternate translation: “who was a descendant of King David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 27 tzh2 figs-metaphor ἐξ οἴκου Δαυεὶδ 1 of the house of David In this expression, the word **house** describes all the people descended from a particular person. The term views all of those descendants as if they were one household living together. Alternate translation: “who was a descendant of King David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 27 l040 writing-background ἐξ οἴκου Δαυεὶδ 1 of the house of David This is background information that helps identify Joseph further. It is important for readers to know because it means that as [1:32](../01/32.md) indicates, Jesus, as the adoptive son of Joseph, will be an eligible successor to King David as the Messiah. Alternate translation: “who came from the royal line of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 1 27 w9tm writing-participants τὸ ὄνομα τῆς παρθένου Μαριάμ 1 the name of the virgin was Mary This introduces Mary as a new character in the story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 1 27 l041 translate-names Μαριάμ 1 Mary **Mary** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 1 28 i7h4 figs-idiom χαῖρε 1 Rejoice This word was used as a greeting. Alternate translation: “Greetings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 28 bp2n κεχαριτωμένη 1 favored one Alternate translation: “you who have received great grace” or “you who have received special kindness” LUK 1 28 jmq9 figs-idiom ὁ Κύριος μετὰ σοῦ 1 The Lord is with you The expression **with you** is an idiom that indicates favor and acceptance. Alternate translation: “The Lord is pleased with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 1 29 l042 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ λόγῳ 1 by his words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to mean what Gabriel said by using words. Alternate translation: “by what he said” or “when he said this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 29 l042 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ λόγῳ 1 by his words Luke is using the term **words** to mean what Gabriel said by using words. Alternate translation: “by what he said” or “when he said this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 1 29 ytx7 διελογίζετο ποταπὸς εἴη ὁ ἀσπασμὸς οὗτος 1 she was considering what kind of greeting this might be Alternate translation: “she wondered why an angel would greet her in this way” LUK 1 30 l043 grammar-connect-logic-result μὴ φοβοῦ, Μαριάμ; εὗρες γὰρ χάριν παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ 1 Do not be afraid, Mary, for you have found favor with God If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the action that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “God is showing you his kindness, Mary, so you do not need to be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 1 30 d3rx figs-imperative μὴ φοβοῦ 1 Do not be afraid While the angel speaks these words in the form of a command, he is actually telling Mary something that he thinks will help and encourage her. Alternate translation: “You do not need to be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) @@ -131,10 +131,10 @@ LUK 1 32 l048 figs-idiom Υἱὸς Ὑψίστου κληθήσεται 1 He LUK 1 32 hl55 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς Ὑψίστου κληθήσεται 1 He … will be called the Son of the Most High Gabriel is not saying only that **Son of the Most High** is a title by which Jesus will be known. Instead, just as the previous verse described how Jesus was a human son born of a human mother, his statement here indicates that Jesus was also the divine Son of a divine Father. You may want to show this by employing capitalization or whatever other convention your language uses to indicate divinity. Alternate translation: “He will be the Son of the Most High” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) LUK 1 32 ip26 figs-activepassive Υἱὸς Ὑψίστου κληθήσεται 1 He … will be called the Son of the Most High If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “He will be the Son of the Most High” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 1 32 z74z figs-idiom Ὑψίστου 1 the Most High This is an idiomatic way of referring to God, as the fuller expression “the Most High God” in [8:38](../08/38.md) shows. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the phrase that way in order to explain its meaning. Or, you could simply reproduce the phrase in the simpler form in which it occurs here in order to show your readers one of the ways in which the people of this time referred to God. Alternate translation: “the Most High God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 1 32 lwd9 figs-metonymy δώσει αὐτῷ…τὸν θρόνον Δαυεὶδ, τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 will give to him the throne of his father David The **throne** figuratively represents a king’s authority to rule. Alternate translation: “will give him authority to rule as king as his ancestor David did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 1 32 l049 figs-metaphor δώσει αὐτῷ…τὸν θρόνον Δαυεὶδ, τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 will give to him the throne of his father David Here, the term **father** figuratively means “ancestor,” but since a line of kings is in view, it also indicates that Jesus will be a successor to David. Alternate translation: “will give him authority to rule as a successor to his ancestor David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 32 lwd9 figs-metonymy δώσει αὐτῷ…τὸν θρόνον Δαυεὶδ, τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 will give to him the throne of his father David The **throne** represents a king’s authority to rule. Alternate translation: “will give him authority to rule as king as his ancestor David did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 32 l049 figs-metaphor δώσει αὐτῷ…τὸν θρόνον Δαυεὶδ, τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 will give to him the throne of his father David Here, the term **father** means “ancestor,” but since a line of kings is in view, it also indicates that Jesus will be a successor to David. Alternate translation: “will give him authority to rule as a successor to his ancestor David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 33 l050 figs-parallelism βασιλεύσει…εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας; καὶ τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ, οὐκ ἔσται τέλος 1 he will reign … to the ages, and there will be no end of his kingdom These two phrases mean similar things. Gabriel uses them together to emphasize how certain it is that Jesus will always rule. Because Gabriel is making a proclamation, he is speaking in a form much like poetry. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and**, in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “he will rule … forever, yes, his kingship will always continue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -LUK 1 33 l051 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον Ἰακὼβ 1 the house of Jacob In this expression, the word **house** figuratively describes all the people descended from a particular person, in this case Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people descended from Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 33 l051 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον Ἰακὼβ 1 the house of Jacob In this expression, the word **house** describes all the people descended from a particular person, in this case Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people descended from Jacob” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 33 l052 translate-names Ἰακὼβ 1 Jacob **Jacob** is the name of a man. Luke uses it a few more times in this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 1 33 l053 figs-idiom εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας 1 to the ages This is an idiom. The term **ages** means long periods of time. Alternate translation: “forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 33 q516 figs-litotes τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ, οὐκ ἔσται τέλος 1 there will be no end of his kingship This is a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “his kingship will always continue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ LUK 1 34 cf3b figs-explicit πῶς ἔσται τοῦτο 1 How will this be T LUK 1 34 fqt7 figs-euphemism ἄνδρα οὐ γινώσκω 1 I have not known a man Mary uses a polite expression to say that she had not engaged in sexual activity. Alternate translation: “I have never had sexual relations with a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) LUK 1 35 l055 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ ἄγγελος εἶπεν 1 answering the angel said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the angel responded to the question that Mary asked. Alternate translation: “the angel responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 1 35 l056 figs-parallelism Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐπελεύσεται ἐπὶ σέ, καὶ δύναμις Ὑψίστου ἐπισκιάσει σοι 1 The Holy Spirit will come upon you, and the power of the Most High will overshadow you These two phrases mean similar things. Once again Gabriel is speaking in a form much like Hebrew poetry. It would be good here as well to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a term other than **and**, in order to show that the second phrase is repeating and clarifying the meaning of the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit will come to you, yes, the power of God will cover you like a shadow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -LUK 1 35 x53s figs-metaphor δύναμις Ὑψίστου ἐπισκιάσει σοι 1 the power of the Most High will overshadow you It was the **power** of God that would supernaturally cause Mary to become pregnant even while she still remained a virgin. It is not clear exactly how this happened, since Gabriel speaks figuratively as if God’s power had a shadow in order to describe it. But make sure that your translation does not imply that there was any physical or sexual union involved. This was a miracle. It might work well to retain Gabriel’s language and change the metaphor to a simile. Alternate translation: “the power of the Most High will cover you like a shadow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 35 x53s figs-metaphor δύναμις Ὑψίστου ἐπισκιάσει σοι 1 the power of the Most High will overshadow you It was the **power** of God that would supernaturally cause Mary to become pregnant even while she still remained a virgin. It is not clear exactly how this happened, since Gabriel speaks as if God’s power had a shadow in order to describe it. But make sure that your translation does not imply that there was any physical or sexual union involved. This was a miracle. It might work well to retain Gabriel’s language and change the metaphor to a simile. Alternate translation: “the power of the Most High will cover you like a shadow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 35 l057 figs-idiom Ὑψίστου 1 the Most High See how you translated the expression **the Most High** in [1:32](../01/32.md). Alternate translation: “the Most High God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 35 l058 figs-idiom διὸ καὶ τὸ γεννώμενον Ἅγιον κληθήσεται, Υἱὸς Θεοῦ 1 Therefore, the holy one who will be born will be called the Son of God As in [1:32](../01/32.md), to **be called** is an idiom that means “to be.” Alternate translation: “Therefore, this holy baby will be the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 35 k866 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples διὸ καὶ τὸ γεννώμενον Ἅγιον κληθήσεται, Υἱὸς Θεοῦ 1 Therefore, the holy one who will be born will be called the Son of God Gabriel is not saying only that **Son of God** is a title by which Jesus will be known. Instead, this is a further statement that Jesus would be the divine Son of a divine Father. (Gabriel says **therefore**, indicating that this will be the result of the process he has just described.) You may want to show this by employing capitalization or whatever other convention your language uses to indicate divinity. Alternate translation: “Therefore, this holy baby will be the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -155,30 +155,30 @@ LUK 1 36 hck2 figs-idiom οὗτος μὴν ἕκτος ἐστὶν αὐτῇ LUK 1 36 l060 figs-idiom τῇ καλουμένῃ στείρᾳ 1 who was called barren This is a further use of the idiom also found in [1:32](../01/32.md) and [1:35](../01/35.md) in which “to be called” means “to be.” Alternate translation: “who was not able to have children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 37 v42f grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 For This word indicates that the sentence it introduces explains the reason for what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “This shows that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 1 37 g7yt figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἀδυνατήσει παρὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ πᾶν ῥῆμα 1 every word will not be impossible for God If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “God is able to do anything he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -LUK 1 37 l061 figs-metonymy οὐκ ἀδυνατήσει παρὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ πᾶν ῥῆμα 1 every word will not be impossible for God Here, the term **word** could mean: (1) since Mary uses the same term figuratively in the next verse to describe the message that Gabriel has brought from God, Gabriel may be using it to mean that message as well. Alternate translation: “God is able to do anything he says” (2) Gabriel may be using the term in a general sense to mean “thing.” Alternate translation: “everything is possible with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 37 l061 figs-metonymy οὐκ ἀδυνατήσει παρὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ πᾶν ῥῆμα 1 every word will not be impossible for God Here, the term **word** could mean: (1) since Mary uses the same term in the next verse to describe the message that Gabriel has brought from God, Gabriel may be using it to mean that message as well. Alternate translation: “God is able to do anything he says” (2) Gabriel may be using the term in a general sense to mean “thing.” Alternate translation: “everything is possible with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 1 38 tef1 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Here, **behold** means more literally “look,” that is, “Look at me,” by which Mary means, “This is who I am.” Alternate translation (not followed by a comma): “I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 38 kw3g figs-metaphor ἡ δούλη Κυρίου 1 the female servant of the Lord By describing herself as a **servant**, Mary is responding humbly and willingly. She is not boasting about being in the Lord’s service. Choose an expression in your language that will show her humility and obedience to the Lord. Alternate translation: “someone who will gladly serve the Lord in any way he wishes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 38 b9ax γένοιτό μοι 1 May it happen to me Once again Mary is expressing her willingness for the things to happen that the angel has told her about. Alternate translation: “I am willing for these things to happen to me” -LUK 1 38 l062 figs-metonymy κατὰ τὸ ῥῆμά σου 1 according to your word Here, the term **word** figuratively describes the message that Gabriel has brought. Alternate translation: “just as you have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 38 l062 figs-metonymy κατὰ τὸ ῥῆμά σου 1 according to your word Here, the term **word** describes the message that Gabriel has brought. Alternate translation: “just as you have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 1 39 ka5b writing-newevent δὲ…ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 Then … in those days This time reference sets the stage for a new episode in the story. Alternate translation: “Around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -LUK 1 39 l063 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Here, Luke uses the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “Around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 1 39 l063 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Here, Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “Around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 39 wj5i figs-idiom ἀναστᾶσα 1 arose This is an idiom that means not just that Mary stood up, but that she took action to get an enterprise under way. Alternate translation: “started out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 39 sii5 figs-explicit τὴν ὀρινὴν 1 the hill country This was an area of high hills extending south from the Jerusalem area to the Negev desert. Alternate translation: “the hilly area south of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 40 ee51 figs-explicit εἰσῆλθεν εἰς 1 entered into The implication is that Mary finished her journey before she went into Zechariah’s house. You can state this clearly. Alternate translation: “Once she arrived, she went inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 41 bx82 writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. One method that is natural in some languages is to introduce this event without such a phrase. UST often models this approach. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 1 41 v99g writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ κοιλίᾳ αὐτῆς 1 in her womb The pronoun **her** refers to Elizabeth. Alternate translation: “in Elizabeth’s womb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 1 41 ya5v figs-metaphor ἐσκίρτησεν 1 leaped Luke says that Elizabeth’s baby **leaped**, but this was not literally possible. The expression refers figuratively to the baby making a sudden movement in response to the sound of Mary’s voice. Alternate translation: “moved suddenly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 41 ya5v figs-metaphor ἐσκίρτησεν 1 leaped Luke says that Elizabeth’s baby **leaped**, but this was not literally possible. The expression refers to the baby making a sudden movement in response to the sound of Mary’s voice. Alternate translation: “moved suddenly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 41 l064 figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθη Πνεύματος Ἁγίου ἡ Ἐλεισάβετ 1 Elizabeth was filled with the Holy Spirit If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled Elizabeth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 1 41 l065 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθη Πνεύματος Ἁγίου ἡ Ἐλεισάβετ 1 Elizabeth was filled with the Holy Spirit Luke speaks figuratively as if Elizabeth was a container that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit empowered Elizabeth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 41 l065 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθη Πνεύματος Ἁγίου ἡ Ἐλεισάβετ 1 Elizabeth was filled with the Holy Spirit Luke speaks as if Elizabeth was a container that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit empowered Elizabeth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 42 r4ka figs-hendiadys ἀνεφώνησεν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ καὶ εἶπεν 1 she exclaimed in a loud voice and said The expression **exclaimed … and said** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **exclaimed** indicates that what was **said** was an exclamation. Alternate translation: “she said loudly and excitedly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 1 42 f69c figs-idiom φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 in a loud voice This is an idiom that means Elizabeth raised the volume of her voice. Alternate translation: “loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 42 t5e8 figs-idiom ἐν γυναιξίν 1 among women The expression **among women** is an idiom that means “more than any other woman.” You could express that as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 1 42 bnl2 figs-metaphor ὁ καρπὸς τῆς κοιλίας σου 1 the fruit of your womb Elizabeth speaks figuratively of Mary’s baby as if he were the fruit that a plant or tree produces. Alternate translation: “the baby you are carrying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 42 bnl2 figs-metaphor ὁ καρπὸς τῆς κοιλίας σου 1 the fruit of your womb Elizabeth speaks of Mary’s baby as if he were the fruit that a plant or tree produces. Alternate translation: “the baby you are carrying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 43 k63f figs-rquestion καὶ πόθεν μοι τοῦτο, ἵνα ἔλθῃ ἡ μήτηρ τοῦ Κυρίου μου πρὸς ἐμέ? 1 And whence is this to me, that the mother of my Lord should come to me? Elizabeth is not asking for information. She is using a question form to show how surprised and happy she is that Mary has come to visit her. Alternate translation: “How wonderful it is that the mother of my Lord has come to visit me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 1 43 l066 figs-idiom πόθεν μοι τοῦτο 1 whence is this to me The expression **whence is this to me** means “where did this come from to me.” It is an idiom for describing something as wonderful and unexpected. Alternate translation (not followed by a comma): “how wonderful it is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 43 tiu4 figs-123person ἡ μήτηρ τοῦ Κυρίου μου 1 the mother of my Lord Elizabeth is referring to Mary in the third person. You could make this clear by adding the word “you” in your translation, as UST does. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person) LUK 1 44 uq3j figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ γὰρ 1 For behold The term **behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. This phrase alerts Mary to pay attention to Elizabeth’s surprising statement that follows. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 1 44 h54t figs-metaphor ὡς ἐγένετο ἡ φωνὴ τοῦ ἀσπασμοῦ σου εἰς τὰ ὦτά μου 1 as soon as the sound of your greeting was in my ears Elizabeth is using the term **ears** to mean hearing, and hearing figuratively means recognition. Alternate translation: “as soon as I heard your voice and realized that it was you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 44 h54t figs-metaphor ὡς ἐγένετο ἡ φωνὴ τοῦ ἀσπασμοῦ σου εἰς τὰ ὦτά μου 1 as soon as the sound of your greeting was in my ears Elizabeth is using the term **ears** to mean hearing, and hearing means recognition. Alternate translation: “as soon as I heard your voice and realized that it was you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 44 u9db figs-metaphor ἐσκίρτησεν ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει 1 leaped for joy As in [1:41](../01/41.md), **leaped** is a figurative way of referring to sudden movement. Alternate translation: “moved suddenly because he was so happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 45 kf73 figs-123person ἡ πιστεύσασα…τοῖς λελαλημένοις αὐτῇ παρὰ Κυρίου 1 she who believed … the things that were spoken to her from the Lord Elizabeth is speaking to Mary, and these phrases describe Mary, but Elizabeth nevertheless speaks of her in the third person. She does this perhaps as a sign of respect, since she has just identified Mary as “the mother of my Lord.” Alternate translation: “you who believed … the message that the Lord sent you”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 1 45 gc1e figs-activepassive ἔσται τελείωσις τοῖς λελαλημένοις αὐτῇ παρὰ Κυρίου 1 that there would be a fulfillment of the things that were spoken to her from the Lord If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “that the Lord would do everything he sent the angel to tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -186,38 +186,38 @@ LUK 1 45 g8rc figs-explicit ἔσται τελείωσις τοῖς λελαλ LUK 1 46 vxj4 figs-synecdoche μεγαλύνει ἡ ψυχή μου 1 My soul magnifies The word **soul** refers to the inmost part of a person. Here, Mary uses it to refer to all of herself. Mary is saying that her worship comes from deep inside her. Alternate translation: “From the depths of my being, I praise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 1 47 jp51 figs-synecdoche ἠγαλλίασεν τὸ πνεῦμά μου 1 and my spirit has rejoiced The word **spirit** also refers to the inner part of a person. Alternate translation: “yes, with everything inside of me, I rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 1 47 l067 figs-parallelism ἠγαλλίασεν τὸ πνεῦμά μου 1 and my spirit has rejoiced This statement is parallel to the one in the previous verse. Mary is speaking in poetry. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it might be good to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. Alternate translation: “yes, with everything inside of me, I rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -LUK 1 47 hgz7 figs-idiom ἠγαλλίασεν 1 has rejoiced Mary is speaking idiomatically as if something she is presently doing happened in the past. Alternate translation: “is celebrating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 1 47 hgz7 figs-idiom ἠγαλλίασεν 1 has rejoiced Mary is speaking as if something she is presently doing happened in the past. Alternate translation: “is celebrating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 48 zhr5 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 For This word introduces the reason for what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “And this is why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 1 48 k3fv figs-idiom ἐπέβλεψεν ἐπὶ 1 looked upon As in [1:25](../01/25.md), **looked upon** is an idiom that means “shown regard for.” Alternate translation: “he has kindly chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 1 48 tg6y figs-metonymy τὴν ταπείνωσιν τῆς δούλης αὐτοῦ 1 the low condition of his female servant Mary is speaking of her **low condition** figuratively to mean herself. Alternate translation: “me to serve him, even though I am not very important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 48 tg6y figs-metonymy τὴν ταπείνωσιν τῆς δούλης αὐτοῦ 1 the low condition of his female servant Mary is speaking of her **low condition** to mean herself. Alternate translation: “me to serve him, even though I am not very important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 1 48 gsy2 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ γὰρ 1 For behold The term **behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Alternate translation: “Just think!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 1 48 l37l figs-metonymy πᾶσαι αἱ γενεαί 1 all generations Mary uses the term **generations** figuratively to mean the people who will be born in all future generations. Alternate translation: “the people of all future generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 1 49 xng2 figs-metonymy ὁ δυνατός 1 the Mighty One Here, Mary is describing God figuratively by one of his attributes. She means that “God, who is powerful,” has done great things for her. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy) -LUK 1 49 ze9y figs-metonymy ἅγιον τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 his name is holy Mary is using the term **name** figuratively to mean God’s reputation, and the reputation figuratively represents God himself. Alternate translation: “he deserves to be treated with complete respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 48 l37l figs-metonymy πᾶσαι αἱ γενεαί 1 all generations Mary uses the term **generations** to mean the people who will be born in all future generations. Alternate translation: “the people of all future generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 49 xng2 figs-metonymy ὁ δυνατός 1 the Mighty One Here, Mary is describing God by one of his attributes. She means that “God, who is powerful,” has done great things for her. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy) +LUK 1 49 ze9y figs-metonymy ἅγιον τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 his name is holy Mary is using the term **name** to mean God’s reputation, and the reputation represents God himself. Alternate translation: “he deserves to be treated with complete respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 1 50 ijs2 figs-idiom εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γενεὰς 1 is unto generation and generation This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “extends to every generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 50 l068 figs-idiom τοῖς φοβουμένοις αὐτόν 1 those who fear him In this context, to **fear** does not mean to be afraid, but to show respect and reverence. Alternate translation: “those who honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 1 51 pb8u figs-metonymy ἐποίησεν κράτος ἐν βραχίονι αὐτοῦ 1 He has done mighty deeds with his arm Mary is using the term **arm** figuratively to represent God’s power. Alternate translation: “He has demonstrated that he is very powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 1 51 s51c figs-metaphor διεσκόρπισεν 1 he has scattered The word **scattered** figuratively describes how thoroughly God has defeated all who opposed him. The word creates a picture of God’s enemies fleeing in every direction, unable to arrange an organized retreat. Alternate translation: “he has completely defeated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 1 51 nt8x figs-metaphor ὑπερηφάνους διανοίᾳ καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 those who are proud in the thoughts of their hearts The term **hearts** figuratively represents the will and affections of these people. Alternate translation: “who cherish proud thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 51 pb8u figs-metonymy ἐποίησεν κράτος ἐν βραχίονι αὐτοῦ 1 He has done mighty deeds with his arm Mary is using the term **arm** to represent God’s power. Alternate translation: “He has demonstrated that he is very powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 51 s51c figs-metaphor διεσκόρπισεν 1 he has scattered The word **scattered** describes how thoroughly God has defeated all who opposed him. The word creates a picture of God’s enemies fleeing in every direction, unable to arrange an organized retreat. Alternate translation: “he has completely defeated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 51 nt8x figs-metaphor ὑπερηφάνους διανοίᾳ καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 those who are proud in the thoughts of their hearts The term **hearts** represents the will and affections of these people. Alternate translation: “who cherish proud thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 52 ty2j figs-metonymy καθεῖλεν δυνάστας ἀπὸ θρόνων 1 He has thrown down rulers from their thrones A **throne** is a chair that a ruler sits on, and it is a symbol associated with authority. If a ruler is brought down from his throne, that means he no longer has the authority to reign. Alternate translation: “He has deposed rulers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 1 52 l069 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 and This word indicates a contrast between what this phrase describes and what the previous phrase described. Try to make the contrast between these opposite actions clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “but”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) LUK 1 52 ee3q figs-metaphor ὕψωσεν ταπεινούς 1 he has raised up the lowly In this word picture, people who are more important are depicted as higher up than people who are less important. Alternate translation: “he has given important roles to humble people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 52 yuu2 figs-nominaladj ταπεινούς 1 the lowly Mary is using this adjective as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “humble people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 1 53 z2he grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 but This word once again indicates a contrast between what this phrase describes and what the previous phrase described. Try to make the contrast between these opposite actions as clear as possible in your translation here as well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) LUK 1 54 d8g6 translate-versebridge 0 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [1:54](../01/54.md) and [1:55](../01/55.md) into a verse bridge, as UST does, in order to keep the information about Israel together. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) -LUK 1 54 l070 figs-personification Ἰσραὴλ 1 Israel Mary is referring figuratively to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LUK 1 54 g5u1 figs-metaphor παιδὸς αὐτοῦ 1 his servant The term **servant** refers figuratively to the special role that God gave to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “his chosen people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 1 54 hyt3 figs-idiom μνησθῆναι ἐλέους 1 to remember his mercy In this context, the phrase **to remember his mercy** figuratively refers to God thinking about a person or group and considering what action he can take on their behalf. It does not suggest that God had ever forgotten to be merciful. Alternate translation: “in order to be merciful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 1 55 qc9k figs-metaphor καθὼς ἐλάλησεν πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 as he spoke to our fathers Here, the word **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “just as he promised to our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 54 l070 figs-personification Ἰσραὴλ 1 Israel Mary is referring to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 1 54 g5u1 figs-metaphor παιδὸς αὐτοῦ 1 his servant The term **servant** refers to the special role that God gave to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “his chosen people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 54 hyt3 figs-idiom μνησθῆναι ἐλέους 1 to remember his mercy In this context, the phrase **to remember his mercy** refers to God thinking about a person or group and considering what action he can take on their behalf. It does not suggest that God had ever forgotten to be merciful. Alternate translation: “in order to be merciful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 1 55 qc9k figs-metaphor καθὼς ἐλάλησεν πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 as he spoke to our fathers Here, the word **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “just as he promised to our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 55 l071 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ 1 Abraham **Abraham** is the name of a man. It occurs several times in this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 1 55 by4a figs-metaphor τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ 1 to his seed The term **seed** figuratively means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “to his descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 55 by4a figs-metaphor τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ 1 to his seed The term **seed** means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “to his descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 55 l072 figs-idiom εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 to the age This is an idiom. See how you translated the similar expression in [1:33](../01/33.md). Alternate translation: “forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 56 l073 grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to indicate that the event of Mary returning home happened after the event of Mary staying with Elizabeth for three months. Alternate translation: “then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) LUK 1 56 nt87 writing-pronouns ἔμεινεν…Μαριὰμ σὺν αὐτῇ ὡς μῆνας τρεῖς, καὶ ὑπέστρεψεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτῆς 1 Mary stayed with her about three months, and returned to her house The first instance of the word **her** in this verse refers to Elizabeth, and the second instance refers to Mary. Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Mary returned to her own home. She did not stay for three months, leave for a time, and then return to Elizabeth’s home. Alternate translation: “Mary stayed with Elizabeth for about three months, and then Mary went back to her own house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 1 57 hfk3 grammar-connect-time-sequential δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to indicate that this event took place after the events he has just described. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) LUK 1 57 l074 figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθη ὁ χρόνος 1 the time was fulfilled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the time came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 1 57 dd2i τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν 1 for her to deliver Your language may require you to state the object of **deliver**. Alternate translation: “for her to deliver her baby” or “for her to have her baby” -LUK 1 58 j2xc figs-metaphor ἐμεγάλυνεν…τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτῆς 1 had magnified his mercy to her Luke speaks figuratively as if God had made his mercy bigger towards Elizabeth. Alternate translation: “had shown great kindness to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 58 j2xc figs-metaphor ἐμεγάλυνεν…τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτῆς 1 had magnified his mercy to her Luke speaks as if God had made his mercy bigger towards Elizabeth. Alternate translation: “had shown great kindness to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 58 l075 figs-explicit ἐμεγάλυνεν…τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτῆς 1 had magnified his mercy to her The implication is that God’s great kindness to Elizabeth was to enable her to have a baby. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “had shown great kindness to her by enabling her to have a baby” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 59 f4ul writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 1 59 l076 translate-unknown ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ὀγδόῃ 1 on the eighth day This expression refers to **the eighth day** of the baby’s life, reckoning the day he was born as the first day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate this expression according to the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “when the baby was one week old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -233,79 +233,79 @@ LUK 1 62 w3kq figs-activepassive τὸ τί ἂν θέλοι καλεῖσθαι LUK 1 63 gn28 figs-explicit αἰτήσας 1 asking for It may be helpful to suggest how Zechariah was **asking**, since he could not speak. Alternate translation: “making signs with his hands to show that he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 63 qu93 translate-unknown πινακίδιον 1 a writing tablet This was a wooden **tablet** covered with wax. A person would use a stylus (that is, something with a sharp point) to write in the wax. The wax could later be smoothed out and the tablet could be used again. If your readers might not recognize this object, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “something to write on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 1 64 sdg1 figs-parallelism ἀνεῴχθη…τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ…καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα αὐτοῦ 1 his mouth was opened and his tongue was freed These two phrases mean the same thing. Luke uses them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “he became able to speak once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -LUK 1 64 l080 figs-metonymy ἀνεῴχθη…τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ…καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα αὐτοῦ 1 his mouth was opened and his tongue was freed Each of these phrases figuratively describes the act of speaking by referring to something associated with speech coming into action, specifically, the mouth opening and the tongue moving about freely. Alternate translation: “he became able to talk once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 64 l080 figs-metonymy ἀνεῴχθη…τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ…καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα αὐτοῦ 1 his mouth was opened and his tongue was freed Each of these phrases describes the act of speaking by referring to something associated with speech coming into action, specifically, the mouth opening and the tongue moving about freely. Alternate translation: “he became able to talk once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 1 64 mi2u figs-activepassive ἀνεῴχθη…τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ…καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα αὐτοῦ 1 his mouth was opened and his tongue was freed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. You could also say who did the action. Alternate translation: “he became able to talk once again” or “God enabled him to speak once again” or, if you want to use the figurative language, “God opened his mouth and freed his tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 1 65 l081 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And This word introduces the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -LUK 1 65 qw1j figs-personification ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πάντας φόβος 1 fear came on all those who lived around them As in [1:12](../01/12.md), Luke here describes fear figuratively as if it were something that could actively come upon people. Alternate translation: “all those who lived around them were in awe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 1 65 qw1j figs-personification ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πάντας φόβος 1 fear came on all those who lived around them As in [1:12](../01/12.md), Luke here describes fear as if it were something that could actively come upon people. Alternate translation: “all those who lived around them were in awe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 1 65 l082 figs-idiom ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πάντας φόβος, τοὺς περιοικοῦντας αὐτούς 1 fear came on all those who lived around them In this context, **fear** does not mean to be afraid, but to have respect and reverence. Alternate translation: “all those who lived around them were in awe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 65 l083 figs-explicit ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πάντας φόβος 1 fear came on all those who lived around them It may be helpful to state clearly why the people responded in this way. Alternate translation: “all those who lived around them were in awe of God because of what he had done in the lives of Zechariah and Elizabeth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 65 g7uh figs-hyperbole πάντας…τοὺς περιοικοῦντας αὐτούς…ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ὀρεινῇ 1 all those who lived around them … throughout all the hill country Here Luke uses the word **all** twice as an generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people who lived around them … widely throughout that area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 1 65 pz97 figs-activepassive διελαλεῖτο πάντα τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 all these matters were being talked about If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people talked about all these matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 1 66 c7xf figs-ellipsis ἔθεντο πάντες οἱ ἀκούσαντες, ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῶν 1 all who heard stored in their hearts Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need to be complete. Alternate translation: “all who heard these things stored them in their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -LUK 1 66 l6lt figs-metaphor ἔθεντο…ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῶν 1 stored in their hearts Luke is speaking figuratively of **hearts** as places where thoughts and memories can be stored safely. His expression describes people thinking things over carefully in order to understand them and retain them. Alternate translation: “thought carefully about these matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 66 l6lt figs-metaphor ἔθεντο…ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῶν 1 stored in their hearts Luke is speaking of **hearts** as places where thoughts and memories can be stored safely. His expression describes people thinking things over carefully in order to understand them and retain them. Alternate translation: “thought carefully about these matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 66 dgq4 figs-rquestion τί ἄρα τὸ παιδίον τοῦτο ἔσται? 1 What then will this child become? The people who said this were likely not asking a question, expecting someone to tell them what the child would become. Rather, they were making a statement about what the events of the child’s birth had led them to believe about his destiny. So you could translate this as a statement or as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “What a great man this child will become!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -LUK 1 66 xm9c figs-metaphor χεὶρ Κυρίου ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 the hand of the Lord was with him In this expression, the **hand** figuratively represents strength and power. Alternate translation: “the Lord’s power was helping him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 66 xm9c figs-metaphor χεὶρ Κυρίου ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 the hand of the Lord was with him In this expression, the **hand** represents strength and power. Alternate translation: “the Lord’s power was helping him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 67 lvd6 figs-activepassive Ζαχαρίας…ἐπλήσθη Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Zechariah was filled with the Holy Spirit If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit filled Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 1 67 l084 figs-metaphor Ζαχαρίας…ἐπλήσθη Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Zechariah was filled with the Holy Spirit Luke speaks figuratively as if Zechariah were a container that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 67 l084 figs-metaphor Ζαχαρίας…ἐπλήσθη Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Zechariah was filled with the Holy Spirit Luke speaks as if Zechariah were a container that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 67 fs5y writing-quotations ἐπροφήτευσεν λέγων 1 prophesied, saying Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “prophesied, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -LUK 1 68 l085 figs-personification ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1 the God of Israel Luke is referring figuratively to the Israelites as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 1 68 l085 figs-personification ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1 the God of Israel Luke is referring to the Israelites as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 1 68 jx5n figs-explicit ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1 the God of Israel If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the relationship between God and Israel more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the God whom the people of Israel worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 68 d67v figs-idiom ἐπεσκέψατο…τῷ λαῷ αὐτοῦ 1 he has visited … his people Here, the term **visited** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “he has come to help … his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 69 l086 figs-metaphor ἤγειρεν κέρας σωτηρίας ἡμῖν 1 he has raised up a horn of salvation for us In this context, **raised up** means brought into existence or enabled to act. Alternate translation: “he has brought us a horn of salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 1 69 g11u figs-metonymy ἤγειρεν κέρας σωτηρίας ἡμῖν 1 he has raised up a horn of salvation for us An animal’s **horn** is associated with its strength, and so Zechariah is using the term figuratively as a symbol for a ruler by association with the power and authority a ruler has. Alternate translation: “he has brought us a ruler who will have the power to save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 1 69 fb9f figs-metonymy ἐν οἴκῳ Δαυεὶδ, παιδὸς αὐτοῦ 1 in the house of his servant David David’s **house** figuratively represents his family and all of his descendants. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of his servant David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 69 g11u figs-metonymy ἤγειρεν κέρας σωτηρίας ἡμῖν 1 he has raised up a horn of salvation for us An animal’s **horn** is associated with its strength, and so Zechariah is using the term as a symbol for a ruler by association with the power and authority a ruler has. Alternate translation: “he has brought us a ruler who will have the power to save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 69 fb9f figs-metonymy ἐν οἴκῳ Δαυεὶδ, παιδὸς αὐτοῦ 1 in the house of his servant David David’s **house** represents his family and all of his descendants. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of his servant David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 1 69 l087 figs-explicit ἐν οἴκῳ Δαυεὶδ, παιδὸς αὐτοῦ 1 in the house of his servant David The implication is that as a descendant of David, this ruler will be an eligible successor to him as the Messiah. Alternate translation: “who is from the royal line of his servant David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 69 l088 figs-metaphor Δαυεὶδ, παιδὸς αὐτοῦ 1 in the house of his servant David David was not actually a servant, he was a king. Here the emphasis in the word **servant** is on how David served God faithfully in that capacity. Alternate translation: “who is from the royal line of David, who served him faithfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 70 x1q1 figs-metonymy ἐλάλησεν διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων…προφητῶν αὐτοῦ 1 he spoke by the mouth of his holy prophets God speaking by the **mouth** of the **prophets** represents God inspiring them to say what he wanted them to say. Alternate translation: “he inspired his holy prophets to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 1 70 l089 figs-idiom ἀπ’ αἰῶνος 1 from an age This is an idiom. See how you translated the similar expression in [1:33](../01/33.md). Alternate translation: “a long time ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 71 d13g figs-abstractnouns σωτηρίαν ἐξ ἐχθρῶν ἡμῶν 1 salvation from our enemies If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb such as “save” or “rescue.” It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He will save us from our enemies” or “He will rescue us from our enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 1 71 aye3 figs-doublet ἐξ ἐχθρῶν ἡμῶν, καὶ ἐκ χειρὸς πάντων τῶν μισούντων ἡμᾶς 1 from our enemies and from the hand of all those who hate us These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Zechariah may be using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “from the domination of our enemies who hate us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -LUK 1 71 c6n9 figs-metonymy χειρὸς 1 hand The **hand** figuratively represents the power that a person uses the hand to exercise. Alternate translation: “domination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 71 c6n9 figs-metonymy χειρὸς 1 hand The **hand** represents the power that a person uses the hand to exercise. Alternate translation: “domination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 1 72 w97a figs-parallelism ποιῆσαι ἔλεος μετὰ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, καὶ μνησθῆναι διαθήκης ἁγίας αὐτοῦ 1 to show mercy to our fathers and to remember his holy covenant The two phrases in this verse say basically the same thing. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including the content of both phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “to show kindness to our ancestors by fulfilling the special agreement he made with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) LUK 1 72 l090 figs-explicit ποιῆσαι ἔλεος μετὰ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, καὶ μνησθῆναι διαθήκης ἁγίας αὐτοῦ 1 to show mercy to our fathers and to remember his holy covenant If the connection between these phrases might be confusing, you could state explicitly how God was showing mercy to the ancestors. Alternate translation: “to show kindness to our ancestors by fulfilling for us the special agreement he made with them, because we are their descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 1 72 l091 figs-metaphor ποιῆσαι ἔλεος μετὰ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 to show mercy to our fathers Here, the term **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “to show kindness to our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 1 72 z5wj figs-idiom καὶ μνησθῆναι διαθήκης ἁγίας αὐτοῦ 1 and to remember his holy covenant In this context, the term **remember** figuratively describes God thinking about the Israelites and considering what action he can take on their behalf. It does not suggest that God had forgotten about them. Alternate translation: “by fulfilling the special agreement he made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 1 73 l092 figs-metaphor Ἀβραὰμ, τὸν πατέρα ἡμῶν 1 Abraham, our father Here, the term **father** figuratively means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “our ancestor Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 72 l091 figs-metaphor ποιῆσαι ἔλεος μετὰ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 to show mercy to our fathers Here, the term **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “to show kindness to our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 72 z5wj figs-idiom καὶ μνησθῆναι διαθήκης ἁγίας αὐτοῦ 1 and to remember his holy covenant In this context, the term **remember** describes God thinking about the Israelites and considering what action he can take on their behalf. It does not suggest that God had forgotten about them. Alternate translation: “by fulfilling the special agreement he made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 1 73 l092 figs-metaphor Ἀβραὰμ, τὸν πατέρα ἡμῶν 1 Abraham, our father Here, the term **father** means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “our ancestor Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 73 sk92 figs-metaphor τοῦ δοῦναι ἡμῖν 1 to grant to us Zechariah is using the term **grant**, meaning to “give,” in an idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “to make it possible for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 74 f4e4 figs-activepassive ἐκ χειρὸς ἐχθρῶν ῥυσθέντας 1 having been delivered out of the hand of our enemies If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “after he has rescued us from the power of our enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 1 74 gm55 figs-metonymy ἐκ χειρὸς ἐχθρῶν 1 out of the hand of our enemies The **hand** figuratively represents the power that a person uses the hand to exercise. Alternate translation: “from the domination of our enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 74 gm55 figs-metonymy ἐκ χειρὸς ἐχθρῶν 1 out of the hand of our enemies The **hand** represents the power that a person uses the hand to exercise. Alternate translation: “from the domination of our enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 1 74 v55j figs-explicit ἀφόβως 1 fearlessly The implication is that if the Israelites were still under enemy domination, they would be afraid of what their enemies might do to them if they worshiped and obeyed the Lord. Alternate translation: “without being afraid of what our enemies might do to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 75 l5n2 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ὁσιότητι καὶ δικαιοσύνῃ 1 in holiness and righteousness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **holiness** and **righteousness** with adjectives. Alternate translation: “doing what is holy and righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 1 75 tn5i figs-idiom ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ 1 before him This is an idiom that means “in his presence,” and that suggests being in relationship with God. Alternate translation: “in relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 1 75 l093 figs-idiom πάσαις ταῖς ἡμέραις ἡμῶν 1 all our days Here Zechariah uses the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “for our whole lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 1 75 l093 figs-idiom πάσαις ταῖς ἡμέραις ἡμῶν 1 all our days Here Zechariah uses the term **days** to refer to a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “for our whole lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 76 f6r1 figs-explicit καὶ σὺ δέ, παιδίον 1 And indeed, you, child Zechariah uses this phrase to begin his direct address to his son. In your translation, you could indicate the change from Zechariah talking about God to Zechariah talking to John in the way that is most appropriate and natural in your language. It may be clearest to indicate this change explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Zechariah said to his son John, ‘And as for you, my child’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 76 l094 figs-idiom προφήτης…κληθήσῃ 1 you … will be called a prophet As in [1:32](../01/32.md), to **be called** is an idiom that means “to be.” Review the note there if that would be helpful. Zechariah is not saying that John will simply have the reputation of being a prophet. Alternate translation: “you … will be a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 76 h2vh figs-activepassive προφήτης…κληθήσῃ 1 you … will be called a prophet If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you … will be a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 1 76 bb3g figs-idiom Ὑψίστου 1 of the Most High See how you translated the expression **the Most High** in [1:32](../01/32.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “of the Most High God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 76 de7t figs-idiom προπορεύσῃ…ἐνώπιον Κυρίου 1 you will go before the Lord As in [1:17](../01/17.md), to **go before** is an idiom that indicates that before the Lord comes, John will announce to the people that the Lord is going to come to them. Alternate translation: “you will announce that the Lord is coming,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 1 76 l095 figs-metaphor ἑτοιμάσαι ὁδοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 to prepare his paths Zechariah is using the imagery of **paths** figuratively to indicate that John will prepare the people to listen to the Lord’s message and believe it. Alternate translation: “to get the people ready for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 76 l095 figs-metaphor ἑτοιμάσαι ὁδοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 to prepare his paths Zechariah is using the imagery of **paths** to indicate that John will prepare the people to listen to the Lord’s message and believe it. Alternate translation: “to get the people ready for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 77 l096 figs-abstractnouns τοῦ δοῦναι γνῶσιν σωτηρίας τῷ λαῷ αὐτοῦ, ἐν ἀφέσει ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν 1 to give the knowledge of salvation to his people through the forgiveness of their sins If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **salvation** and **forgiveness** with the verbs “save” and “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to teach God’s people that he wants to save them by forgiving their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 1 77 t6d3 figs-metonymy τοῦ δοῦναι γνῶσιν σωτηρίας τῷ λαῷ αὐτοῦ 1 to give the knowledge of salvation to his people The phrase **to give … knowledge** is a figurative description of teaching. Alternate translation: “to teach God’s people that he wants to save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 1 78 z861 figs-metaphor ἀνατολὴ ἐξ ὕψους 1 the sunrise from heaven Zechariah speaks of the coming of the Savior as if it will be a sunrise that will light up the earth. Alternate translation: “the Savior who comes from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 1 78 l097 figs-metonymy ἐξ ὕψους 1 from heaven Zechariah uses the term **heaven** to refer to God figuratively by association, since heaven is the abode of God. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 1 78 l097 figs-metonymy ἐξ ὕψους 1 from heaven Zechariah uses the term **heaven** to refer to God by association, since heaven is the abode of God. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 1 78 l098 figs-idiom ἐπισκέψεται ἡμᾶς 1 will visit us As in [1:68](../01/68.md), **visit** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “will come to help us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 1 79 sh2q figs-metaphor ἐπιφᾶναι τοῖς…καθημένοις 1 to shine on those who are sitting As in [1:78](../01/78.md), light figuratively represents truth. Just as Zechariah described the Savior as like a sunrise in that verse, here he is describing the spiritual truth that the Savior will bring as if it will light up the earth. Alternate translation: “to show the truth to people who are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 79 sh2q figs-metaphor ἐπιφᾶναι τοῖς…καθημένοις 1 to shine on those who are sitting As in [1:78](../01/78.md), light represents truth. Just as Zechariah described the Savior as like a sunrise in that verse, here he is describing the spiritual truth that the Savior will bring as if it will light up the earth. Alternate translation: “to show the truth to people who are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 79 l099 figs-idiom τοῖς ἐν σκότει καὶ σκιᾷ θανάτου καθημένοις 1 on those who sit in darkness and in the shadow of death To **sit** in a place is an idiom that means to be in that place. Alternate translation: “on people who are in darkness, yes, even in deep darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 79 k46q figs-idiom τοῖς ἐν σκότει καὶ σκιᾷ θανάτου καθημένοις 1 on those who sit in darkness and in the shadow of death The **shadow of death** is an idiom that describes deep darkness. Alternate translation: “on people who are in darkness, yes, even in deep darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 1 79 l100 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἐν σκότει καὶ σκιᾷ θανάτου καθημένοις 1 on those who sit in darkness and in the shadow of death Since light figuratively represents truth, **darkness** represents the absence of spiritual truth. Alternate translation: “on people who do not know the truth, who do not know it at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 79 l100 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἐν σκότει καὶ σκιᾷ θανάτου καθημένοις 1 on those who sit in darkness and in the shadow of death Since light represents truth, **darkness** represents the absence of spiritual truth. Alternate translation: “on people who do not know the truth, who do not know it at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 1 79 cnh7 figs-doublet τοῖς ἐν σκότει καὶ σκιᾷ θανάτου καθημένοις 1 on those who sit in darkness and in the shadow of death These two phrases work together to emphasize the deep spiritual darkness that people are in before God shows them mercy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “on people who do not know the truth at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -LUK 1 79 s3eb figs-metaphor κατευθῦναι τοὺς πόδας ἡμῶν εἰς ὁδὸν εἰρήνης 1 to guide our feet into the path of peace Zechariah is using the word **guide** figuratively to mean “teach,” and the expression **the path of peace** figuratively to represent living at peace with God. Alternate translation: “to teach us how to live at peace with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 1 79 l101 figs-synecdoche κατευθῦναι τοὺς πόδας ἡμῶν εἰς ὁδὸν εἰρήνης 1 to guide our feet into the path of peace Zechariah is using the term **feet** figuratively to represent the whole person. Alternate translation: “to teach us how to live at peace with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 1 79 s3eb figs-metaphor κατευθῦναι τοὺς πόδας ἡμῶν εἰς ὁδὸν εἰρήνης 1 to guide our feet into the path of peace Zechariah is using the word **guide** to mean “teach,” and the expression **the path of peace** to represent living at peace with God. Alternate translation: “to teach us how to live at peace with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 1 79 l101 figs-synecdoche κατευθῦναι τοὺς πόδας ἡμῶν εἰς ὁδὸν εἰρήνης 1 to guide our feet into the path of peace Zechariah is using the term **feet** to represent the whole person. Alternate translation: “to teach us how to live at peace with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 1 80 q2ax writing-newevent δὲ 1 And This word introduces the next part of the story. In this verse, Luke describes a few transitional events in order to move quickly from the birth of John to the beginning of his ministry as an adult. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 1 80 a8bz ἐκραταιοῦτο πνεύματι 1 became strong in spirit This could refer to: (1) the inner part of a person, as in [1:47](../01/47.md). Alternate translation: “he developed a strong character” (2) how God kept the promise that Gabriel made to Zechariah in [1:15](../01/15.md), that the Holy Spirit would empower his son. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit empowered him” LUK 1 80 eh9j figs-explicit ἦν ἐν ταῖς ἐρήμοις 1 he was in the wilderness This expression means implicitly that John went to live there. Luke does not say at what age John did this. Alternate translation: “he went to live in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 80 qu12 ἕως ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ 1 until the day of his public appearance The term **until** does not indicate a stopping point. John continued to live out in the wilderness even after he started preaching publicly. In your translation, be sure that this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “through the time when he began to preach in public” -LUK 1 80 ie4l figs-idiom ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ 1 the day of his public appearance Here, Luke uses the term **day** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “the time when he began to preach in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 1 80 l102 figs-personification πρὸς τὸν Ἰσραήλ 1 to Israel Luke is referring to all of the Israelites figuratively as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 1 80 ie4l figs-idiom ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ 1 the day of his public appearance Here, Luke uses the term **day** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “the time when he began to preach in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 1 80 l102 figs-personification πρὸς τὸν Ἰσραήλ 1 to Israel Luke is referring to all of the Israelites as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 2 intro dw6t 0 # Luke 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus is born in the city of Bethlehem (2:1-20)
2. Joseph and Mary dedicate Jesus, and Simeon and Anna speak about him (2:21-40)
3. Jesus goes to Jerusalem with his parents for Passover (2:41-52)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in the song of the angels about Jesus’ birth in 2:14 and in Simeon’s song about Jesus in 2:29-32.

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “his father and mother”

In [2:33](../02/33.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “his father and mother.” ULT follows that reading. Some other ancient manuscripts read “Joseph and his mother.” That reading indicates that Joseph was not the biological father of Jesus, since Mary conceived him as a virgin. However, Joseph was the adoptive father of Jesus, and so the reading “his father and mother” is not incorrect. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading in ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 2 1 c887 writing-newevent ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days This time reference introduces a new event. Alternate translation: “around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -LUK 2 1 l103 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days Here, Luke uses the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 2 1 l103 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days Here, Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 2 1 e9m5 writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 it happened that Luke uses this phrase to show that this is the beginning of an account. If your language has a way of showing the start of an account, you may use that in your translation. If not, you may choose not to represent this phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -LUK 2 1 gda6 figs-personification ἐξῆλθεν δόγμα παρὰ 1 a decree went out from The **decree** did not go out by itself, even though Luke speaks figuratively as if it did. Messengers likely proclaimed the emperor’s command throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “sent out messengers with a decree ordering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 2 1 gda6 figs-personification ἐξῆλθεν δόγμα παρὰ 1 a decree went out from The **decree** did not go out by itself, even though Luke speaks as if it did. Messengers likely proclaimed the emperor’s command throughout the empire. Alternate translation: “sent out messengers with a decree ordering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 2 1 jtz3 writing-participants Καίσαρος Αὐγούστου 1 Caesar Augustus **Caesar** was the title of the emperor of the Roman Empire. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “King Augustus, who ruled the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 2 1 l104 translate-names Αὐγούστου 1 Augustus **Augustus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 2 1 tk59 figs-explicit ἀπογράφεσθαι πᾶσαν τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 for all the world to register Luke assumes that his readers will know that this was for tax purposes. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “that all the people living in the Roman Empire had to list their names on the tax rolls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 2 1 m39d figs-metonymy τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 the world The term **world** refers specifically to the part of the world that Caesar Augustus ruled. It is actually describing the people living in that part of the world figuratively by association to where they lived. Alternate translation: “the people living in the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 2 1 m39d figs-metonymy τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 the world The term **world** refers specifically to the part of the world that Caesar Augustus ruled. It is actually describing the people living in that part of the world by association to where they lived. Alternate translation: “the people living in the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 2 2 q9zw translate-names Κυρηνίου 1 Quirinius **Quirinius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 2 2 l105 translate-names Συρίας 1 Syria **Syria** is the name of one of the provinces of the Roman Empire. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 2 3 s4im writing-background ἐπορεύοντο πάντες 1 everyone was traveling Luke describes the registration as already in progress in order to account for why Joseph and Mary had to travel at this time, late in her pregnancy. Alternate translation: “everyone was going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -316,14 +316,14 @@ LUK 2 4 l107 figs-idiom ἀνέβη 1 went up Luke says **went up** because Jose LUK 2 4 kz78 figs-explicit εἰς πόλιν Δαυεὶδ, ἥτις καλεῖται Βηθλέεμ 1 to the city of David, which is called Bethlehem Bethlehem was known as **the city of David** because King David had come from there. Luke includes this detail because it indicates why Bethlehem was important, even though it was a small town. Not only had the line of David’s dynasty originated there, the prophet Micah had said that the future Messiah would be born there. Alternate translation: “to the town known as Bethlehem, where King David had come from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 2 4 l108 figs-activepassive ἥτις καλεῖται Βηθλέεμ 1 which is called Bethlehem If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whose name is Bethlehem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 2 4 l109 figs-hendiadys εἶναι αὐτὸν ἐξ οἴκου καὶ πατριᾶς Δαυείδ 1 he was of the house and family line of David Luke is expressing a single idea by using two terms, **house** and **family line**, connected with **and.** The term **family line** indicates the significance of Joseph being a descendant of David. It means that any son of his, natural or adopted, would be an eligible successor to King David as the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these two terms with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “he was descended from the royal line of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -LUK 2 4 s7a7 figs-metaphor εἶναι αὐτὸν ἐξ οἴκου καὶ πατριᾶς Δαυείδ 1 he was of the house and family line of David As in [1:27](../01/27.md), the word **house** figuratively describes all the people descended from a particular person. Alternate translation: “he was descended from the royal line of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 2 4 s7a7 figs-metaphor εἶναι αὐτὸν ἐξ οἴκου καὶ πατριᾶς Δαυείδ 1 he was of the house and family line of David As in [1:27](../01/27.md), the word **house** describes all the people descended from a particular person. Alternate translation: “he was descended from the royal line of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 2 5 ktz2 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀπογράψασθαι σὺν Μαριὰμ, τῇ ἐμνηστευμένῃ αὐτῷ 1 He registered himself with Mary, who was engaged to him If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the action that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because Mary was engaged to Joseph, she had to travel with him so that he could list their names together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 2 5 ne7a figs-explicit Μαριὰμ, τῇ ἐμνηστευμένῃ αὐτῷ 1 Mary, who was engaged to him In this culture, an engaged couple was considered legally married, although there would not have been physical intimacy between them until after the wedding. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that. Alternate translation: “Mary, who was engaged to him and who was therefore considered his legal wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 2 5 l110 figs-activepassive τῇ ἐμνηστευμένῃ αὐτῷ 1 who was engaged to him If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “who had promised to marry him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 2 6 qw6j writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that This phrase marks the beginning of the next event in the story. If your language has a similar expression that it uses to introduce an event, you could use it in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 2 6 w4is figs-explicit ἐν τῷ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἐκεῖ 1 while they were there The word **they** refers to Joseph and Mary being in Bethlehem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while Mary and Joseph were in Bethlehem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 2 6 zr62 figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν 1 the days were fulfilled for her to deliver If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the time came for Mary to give birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 2 6 l111 figs-idiom ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι 1 the days were fulfilled Here Luke uses the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “the time came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 2 6 l111 figs-idiom ἐπλήσθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι 1 the days were fulfilled Here Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “the time came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 2 6 l112 τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν 1 for her to deliver Your language may require you to state the object of **deliver**. Alternate translation: “for her to deliver her baby” or “for her to have her baby” LUK 2 7 l113 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐσπαργάνωσεν αὐτὸν, καὶ ἀνέκλινεν αὐτὸν ἐν φάτνῃ, διότι οὐκ ἦν αὐτοῖς τόπος ἐν τῷ καταλύματι 1 she wrapped him in strips of cloth and laid him in a manger, because there was no room for them in the inn If it would be helpful to your readers, you could put the second phrase before the first one, since it gives the reason for the action that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because there was no guest room available for them, she wrapped cloths tightly around him and put him in a box that held hay for animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 2 7 qq48 figs-explicit ἐσπαργάνωσεν αὐτὸν 1 wrapped him in strips of cloth In some cultures, mothers help their babies feel secure by wrapping them tightly in cloth or in a blanket. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly Alternate translation: “wrapped cloths tightly around him to make him feel secure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ LUK 2 12 yj15 figs-explicit τοῦτο ὑμῖν τὸ σημεῖον 1 this LUK 2 12 snr9 figs-explicit ὑμῖν τὸ σημεῖον 1 the sign to you This could be: (1) a sign that would help the shepherds recognize the baby. Alternate translation: “this sign to help you find the newborn Messiah” (2) a sign to prove that what the angel was saying was true. Alternate translation: “the sign to prove that what I am telling you is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 2 12 xx57 figs-explicit ἐσπαργανωμένον 1 wrapped in strips of cloth See how you translated this expression in [2:7](../02/07.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “with cloths wrapped tightly around him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 2 12 bua3 translate-unknown κείμενον ἐν φάτνῃ 1 lying in a manger See how you translated the term **manger** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Review the note there if that would be helpful. Alternate translation: “lying in a box that holds hay for animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 2 13 b54a figs-metaphor πλῆθος στρατιᾶς οὐρανίου 1 a multitude of the heavenly army This phrase could refer to a literal **army** of angels, or it could be speaking figuratively of a large organized group of angels. Alternate translation: “a large group of angels from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 2 13 b54a figs-metaphor πλῆθος στρατιᾶς οὐρανίου 1 a multitude of the heavenly army This phrase could refer to a literal **army** of angels, or it could be speaking of a large organized group of angels. Alternate translation: “a large group of angels from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 2 13 e2gp figs-hendiadys αἰνούντων τὸν Θεὸν καὶ λεγόντων 1 praising God and saying Luke is expressing a single idea by using two verbs connected with **and.** The angels said these words in order to praise God. Alternate translation: “who praised God by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 2 14 p1fm δόξα ἐν ὑψίστοις Θεῷ 1 Glory in the highest to God This could mean: (1) the angels are describing where God should receive honor. In that case **in the highest** would mean “in the highest place,” that is, “in heaven,” and the phrase would parallel “on earth.” Alternate translation: “Give honor to God in heaven” (2) the angels are describing what kind of honor God should receive. Alternate translation: “Give the highest honor to God” LUK 2 14 y2b3 ἐν ἀνθρώποις εὐδοκίας 1 among men of good pleasure This could refer to: (1) God’s **good pleasure** with people. Alternate translation: “among people with whom God is pleased” (2) people who show **good pleasure** or “good will” to one another. Alternate translation: “among people of good will” @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ LUK 2 16 l122 figs-hendiadys ἦλθον σπεύσαντες 1 they went hasten LUK 2 16 rdi2 translate-unknown κείμενον ἐν τῇ φάτνῃ 1 lying in the manger See how you translated the term **manger** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “lying in a box that holds hay for animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 2 17 n2qz figs-activepassive τοῦ ῥήματος τοῦ λαληθέντος αὐτοῖς 1 the message that had been told to them If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “what the angels had told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 2 18 vh9d figs-activepassive τῶν λαληθέντων ὑπὸ τῶν ποιμένων πρὸς αὐτούς 1 the things that were spoken to them by the shepherds If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “what the shepherds told them” Alternate translation: (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 2 19 reb7 figs-metaphor συμβάλλουσα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῆς 1 pondering them in her heart In this expression, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “reflecting on what they meant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 2 19 reb7 figs-metaphor συμβάλλουσα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῆς 1 pondering them in her heart In this expression, the **heart** represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “reflecting on what they meant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 2 20 nqv7 figs-explicit ὑπέστρεψαν οἱ ποιμένες 1 the shepherds returned This means that they returned to their flock. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the shepherds went back to take care of their sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 2 20 c9x5 figs-doublet δοξάζοντες καὶ αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν 1 glorifying and praising God The terms **glorifying** and **praising** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these terms. Alternate translation: “excitedly praising God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) LUK 2 20 l123 figs-activepassive καθὼς ἐλαλήθη πρὸς αὐτούς 1 just as it had been spoken to them If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “just as the angel had told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ LUK 2 25 n263 figs-doublet ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος δίκαιος κα LUK 2 25 l134 figs-idiom προσδεχόμενος 1 waiting for This is an idiomatic usage of the term **waiting**. It does not mean passively **waiting** for something to happen, but eagerly anticipating something that someone wants to happen. Alternate translation: “eagerly anticipating” or “looking forward to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 2 25 l135 figs-metonymy παράκλησιν τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1 the consolation of Israel This phrase refers by association to the one who would bring **consolation**, meaning “comfort,” to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “the one who would come and comfort the people of Israel” or “the one who would come to help the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 2 25 l136 figs-explicit παράκλησιν τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1 the consolation of Israel Luke assumes that readers will know that this is a reference to the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Messiah, who would come to help the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 2 25 m5au figs-personification τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1 of Israel Luke is referring to all of the Israelites figuratively as if they were a single person, their ancestor, Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 2 25 m5au figs-personification τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1 of Israel Luke is referring to all of the Israelites as if they were a single person, their ancestor, Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 2 25 xxw9 figs-metaphor Πνεῦμα ἦν Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 The Holy Spirit was upon him The word **upon** creates a spatial metaphor that means that the Spirit of God was with Simeon in a special way. The Spirit gave him knowledge and direction for his life, as the next two verses show. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit guided him in special ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 2 26 l137 grammar-connect-time-background καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 2 26 psf8 figs-activepassive ἦν αὐτῷ κεχρηματισμένον ὑπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματος τοῦ Ἁγίου 1 it had been revealed to him by the Holy Spirit If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit had shown him” or “the Holy Spirit had told him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -406,10 +406,10 @@ LUK 2 29 m6eg figs-123person ἀπολύεις τὸν δοῦλόν σου 1 yo LUK 2 29 g3wn figs-euphemism ἀπολύεις τὸν δοῦλόν σου 1 you are … dismissing your servant Simeon uses a mild expression to refer to death. Alternate translation: “please let me die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) LUK 2 29 l141 figs-youformal σου…σου 1 your … your Here, the word **your** is singular because Simeon is addressing God. If your language has a formal form of **your** that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form here and in [2:30](../02/30.md) and [2:32](../02/32.md), and the corresponding formal form for “you” in [2:31](../02/31.md). However, it might be more natural in your language for someone who knows God well, as Simeon did, to address God using the informal form. Use your best judgment about what form to use. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]]) LUK 2 29 e8fk figs-metonymy κατὰ τὸ ῥῆμά σου 1 according to your word Simeon is referring to the promise that God made that he would live to see the Messiah. Simeon describes that promise by association with the **word** or saying by which God made it. Alternate translation: “as you promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 2 30 b7i6 figs-synecdoche εἶδον οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου 1 my eyes have seen Simeon uses one part of himself, his **eyes**, to represent all of himself figuratively in the act of seeing. Alternate translation: “I have personally seen” or “I, myself, have seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 2 30 b7i6 figs-synecdoche εἶδον οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου 1 my eyes have seen Simeon uses one part of himself, his **eyes**, to represent all of himself in the act of seeing. Alternate translation: “I have personally seen” or “I, myself, have seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 2 30 ekw3 figs-metonymy τὸ σωτήριόν σου 1 your salvation This expression refers by association to the person who would bring **salvation**, that is, the infant Jesus, whom Simeon was holding. Alternate translation: “the Savior whom you have sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 2 31 zv1j writing-pronouns ὃ ἡτοίμασας 1 which you have prepared If you said “Savior” in the previous phrase at the end of [2:30](../02/30.md), then here you will want to say something like “whom you have prepared” or “the one you have sent.” If you said **salvation** in the previous phrase, then here you could state something like “which you have brought about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 2 31 l142 figs-metaphor κατὰ πρόσωπον πάντων τῶν λαῶν 1 before the face of all the peoples The term **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. Simeon is saying that God has sent the Savior or brought about salvation right where everyone is present. Alternate translation: “in the presence of all the peoples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 2 31 l142 figs-metaphor κατὰ πρόσωπον πάντων τῶν λαῶν 1 before the face of all the peoples The term **face** represents the presence of a person. Simeon is saying that God has sent the Savior or brought about salvation right where everyone is present. Alternate translation: “in the presence of all the peoples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 2 31 l143 figs-explicit κατὰ πρόσωπον πάντων τῶν λαῶν 1 before the face of all the peoples The implication of God sending the Savior or bringing about salvation into the presence of everyone is that this has been done for their benefit. Alternate translation: “for the benefit of all peoples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 2 32 n4k3 figs-metaphor φῶς εἰς ἀποκάλυψιν ἐθνῶν καὶ δόξαν λαοῦ σου, Ἰσραήλ 1 A light for revelation to the Gentiles and glory to your people Israel This expression means that the child will help the Gentiles to understand. Simeon compares Jesus’ role to that of a physical **light** that enables people to see solid objects. Alternate translation: “This child will enable the Gentiles to understand, just as light allows people to see things clearly and he will bring honor to the people of Israel, who belong to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 2 32 s5lu figs-explicit φῶς εἰς ἀποκάλυψιν ἐθνῶν καὶ δόξαν λαοῦ σου, Ἰσραήλ 1 A light for revelation to the Gentiles and glory to your people Israel It may be helpful to state explicitly what the child will help the Gentiles to understand. Alternate translation: “This child will enable the Gentiles to understand what you expect of them and he will bring honor to the people of Israel, who belong to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -419,30 +419,30 @@ LUK 2 34 xly1 εἶπεν πρὸς Μαριὰμ τὴν μητέρα αὐτ LUK 2 34 p2cy figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Simeon uses this expression to tell Mary that what he is about to say is extremely important to her. Alternate translation: “Now this is important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 2 34 rs67 figs-metonymy οὗτος κεῖται εἰς πτῶσιν καὶ ἀνάστασιν πολλῶν ἐν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 this one is appointed for the downfall and rising up of many in Israel The word **downfall** represents people turning away from God by association with the way they will be ruined as a result. The expression **rising up** represents people drawing closer to God, by association with they way they will prosper as a result. Alternate translation: “God will use this child to challenge many people of the people of Israel to decide definitively for or against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 2 34 l145 figs-activepassive οὗτος κεῖται εἰς 1 this one is appointed for If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God intends to use this child to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 2 34 abc4 figs-personification πολλῶν ἐν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 many in Israel Simeon refers to all of the Israelites figuratively as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “many of the people of Israel” or “many in the nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 2 34 abc4 figs-personification πολλῶν ἐν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 many in Israel Simeon refers to all of the Israelites as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “many of the people of Israel” or “many in the nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 2 34 l146 figs-explicit σημεῖον 1 a sign The implication is that the life and ministry of Jesus will be an indication that God is at work to fulfill his purposes through the people of Israel. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “an indication of God’s activity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 2 34 l147 figs-activepassive ἀντιλεγόμενον 1 that is spoken against If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “that many people will speak against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 2 34 l148 figs-metonymy ἀντιλεγόμενον 1 that is spoken against Simeon figuratively describes the opposition that Jesus will face by association with one expression of it, people speaking against him and his ministry. But this represents a wider range of hostile activities. Alternate translation: “that many people will oppose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 2 35 l149 figs-metaphor καὶ σοῦ δὲ αὐτῆς τὴν ψυχὴν διελεύσεται ῥομφαία 1 and a sword will also pierce your own soul Simeon speaks figuratively of the bitter grief pangs that Mary will experience as if they were a **sword** stabbing all the way into her inner being. Alternate translation: “and you will experience deep pangs of grief yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 2 34 l148 figs-metonymy ἀντιλεγόμενον 1 that is spoken against Simeon describes the opposition that Jesus will face by association with one expression of it, people speaking against him and his ministry. But this represents a wider range of hostile activities. Alternate translation: “that many people will oppose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 2 35 l149 figs-metaphor καὶ σοῦ δὲ αὐτῆς τὴν ψυχὴν διελεύσεται ῥομφαία 1 and a sword will also pierce your own soul Simeon speaks of the bitter grief pangs that Mary will experience as if they were a **sword** stabbing all the way into her inner being. Alternate translation: “and you will experience deep pangs of grief yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 2 35 hak5 figs-activepassive ἂν ἀποκαλυφθῶσιν ἐκ πολλῶν καρδιῶν διαλογισμοί 1 so that the thoughts of many hearts may be revealed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that many people will reveal what they secretly think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 2 35 l150 figs-metaphor ἂν ἀποκαλυφθῶσιν ἐκ πολλῶν καρδιῶν διαλογισμοί 1 so that the thoughts of many hearts may be revealed In this expression, **hearts** figuratively represent people’s inner thoughts and inclinations. Alternate translation: “so that many people will reveal what they secretly think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 2 35 l150 figs-metaphor ἂν ἀποκαλυφθῶσιν ἐκ πολλῶν καρδιῶν διαλογισμοί 1 so that the thoughts of many hearts may be revealed In this expression, **hearts** represent people’s inner thoughts and inclinations. Alternate translation: “so that many people will reveal what they secretly think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 2 36 kd1y writing-participants καὶ ἦν Ἅννα προφῆτις 1 And Anna was there, a prophetess Luke is introducing a new participant into the story. Alternate translation: “There was also a woman named Anna there in the temple. She was a prophetess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 2 36 l151 translate-names Ἅννα 1 Anna **Anna** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 2 36 c7wx translate-names Φανουήλ 1 Phanuel **Phanuel** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 2 36 l152 figs-idiom αὕτη προβεβηκυῖα ἐν ἡμέραις πολλαῖς 1 She had advanced much in days As in [1:7](../01/07.md), to have moved forward or to have **advanced** means figuratively to have aged. Alternate translation: “She was very old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 2 36 l153 figs-idiom αὕτη προβεβηκυῖα ἐν ἡμέραις πολλαῖς 1 She had advanced much in days Luke uses the term **days** figuratively to mean time in general. Alternate translation: “She was very old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 2 36 l152 figs-idiom αὕτη προβεβηκυῖα ἐν ἡμέραις πολλαῖς 1 She had advanced much in days As in [1:7](../01/07.md), to have moved forward or to have **advanced** means to have aged. Alternate translation: “She was very old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 2 36 l153 figs-idiom αὕτη προβεβηκυῖα ἐν ἡμέραις πολλαῖς 1 She had advanced much in days Luke uses the term **days** to mean time in general. Alternate translation: “She was very old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 2 36 b9xe figs-idiom ἀπὸ τῆς παρθενίας αὐτῆς 1 after her virginity This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “after she married him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 2 37 byk6 αὐτὴ χήρα ἕως ἐτῶν ὀγδοήκοντα τεσσάρων 1 she was a widow for 84 years This could mean: (1) Anna had been a widow for 84 years. Alternate translation: “but then her husband had died and she had not remarried, and 84 years had gone by since” (2) Anna was a widow who was now 84 years old. Alternate translation: “but her husband had died and she had not remarried, and now she was 84 years old” LUK 2 37 l154 figs-litotes ἣ οὐκ ἀφίστατο τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 who never left the temple Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “who was always in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) LUK 2 37 f2lt figs-hyperbole ἣ οὐκ ἀφίστατο τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 who never left the temple This is a generalization that means that Anna spent so much time in the temple that it seemed as though she never left it. Alternate translation: “who was always in the temple” or “who was continually in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 2 37 a1cg figs-idiom νηστείαις καὶ δεήσεσιν λατρεύουσα 1 serving with fastings and prayers The term **serving** is an idiom that means “worshiping.” Alternate translation: “worshiping God by going without food and praying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 2 37 l155 figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 night and day Luke is using the two parts of a day figuratively to mean the entire day, that is, all the time. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +LUK 2 37 l155 figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 night and day Luke is using the two parts of a day to mean the entire day, that is, all the time. Alternate translation: “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) LUK 2 38 c9e4 ἐπιστᾶσα 1 coming up The implication is that Anna came up to Mary and Joseph. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “she approached them” or “she went over to Mary and Joseph” -LUK 2 38 l156 figs-idiom αὐτῇ τῇ, ὥρᾳ 1 at that very hour Here, Luke uses the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “right at that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 2 38 l156 figs-idiom αὐτῇ τῇ, ὥρᾳ 1 at that very hour Here, Luke uses the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “right at that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 2 38 l157 figs-hyperbole πᾶσιν τοῖς 1 to all those The term **all** is a generalization that means many. Alternate translation: “to many others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 2 38 l158 figs-idiom τοῖς προσδεχομένοις 1 who were waiting See how you translated this phrase in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “who were eagerly anticipating” or “who were looking forward to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 2 38 q1ak figs-metonymy λύτρωσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 the redemption of Jerusalem Luke is using the word **redemption** figuratively to mean the person who would bring redemption. Alternate translation: “the one who would redeem Jerusalem” or “the person who would bring God’s blessings and favor back to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 2 38 l159 figs-metonymy Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Jerusalem Luke is referring to all of the people of Israel figuratively by the name of their capital city, **Jerusalem.** Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 2 38 q1ak figs-metonymy λύτρωσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 the redemption of Jerusalem Luke is using the word **redemption** to mean the person who would bring redemption. Alternate translation: “the one who would redeem Jerusalem” or “the person who would bring God’s blessings and favor back to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 2 38 l159 figs-metonymy Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Jerusalem Luke is referring to all of the people of Israel by the name of their capital city, **Jerusalem.** Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 2 39 pk9z πάντα τὰ κατὰ τὸν νόμον Κυρίου 1 everything that was according to the law of the Lord Alternate translation: “everything that the law of the Lord required them to do” LUK 2 39 g5vg figs-explicit εἰς πόλιν ἑαυτῶν Ναζαρέτ 1 to their own town of Nazareth This expression means that they lived in Nazareth. Alternate translation: “the town of Nazareth, where they lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 2 40 l160 figs-activepassive ἐκραταιοῦτο 1 was strengthened If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -474,10 +474,10 @@ LUK 2 49 r8eh figs-rquestion τί ὅτι ἐζητεῖτέ με? 1 Why is it t LUK 2 49 va82 figs-rquestion οὐκ ᾔδειτε ὅτι ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου δεῖ εἶναί με? 1 Did you not know that I must be in the things of my Father? Once again Jesus is making a statement rather than actually asking a question. He is using the question form to challenge his parents respectfully. Alternate translation: “You should have known that I would be involved in my Father’s business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 2 49 p6aj ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου 1 in the things of my Father This could mean: (1) Jesus is saying that he needed to be involved in the things that God was concerned about. Alternate translation: “involved in my Father’s business” (2) Jesus is referring to the temple as a place that was dedicated to God. Alternate translation: “in my Father’s temple” or “here in the temple” LUK 2 49 n76z guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ πατρός μου 1 my Father At age 12, Jesus, the Son of God, understood that God was his real Father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -LUK 2 50 l166 figs-metonymy τὸ ῥῆμα ὃ ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς 1 the word that he spoke to them The term **word** refers figuratively to what Jesus told his parents by using words. Alternate translation: “the answer that he gave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 2 50 l166 figs-metonymy τὸ ῥῆμα ὃ ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς 1 the word that he spoke to them The term **word** refers to what Jesus told his parents by using words. Alternate translation: “the answer that he gave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 2 51 h2i9 figs-idiom καὶ κατέβη μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 he went down with them Jerusalem was on top of a mountain, so Israelites customarily spoke of going **down** when they traveled from Jerusalem to some other place. Alternate translation: “Jesus went back home with Mary and Joseph” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 2 51 zl2q figs-activepassive ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος αὐτοῖς 1 he was subjected to them If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he obeyed them” or “he was obedient to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 2 51 ceu3 figs-metaphor διετήρει πάντα τὰ ῥήματα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῆς 1 kept all these things in her heart As in [2:19](../02/19.md), the **heart** here figuratively represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “carefully remembered all these things” or “reflected carefully on what all these things meant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 2 51 ceu3 figs-metaphor διετήρει πάντα τὰ ῥήματα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῆς 1 kept all these things in her heart As in [2:19](../02/19.md), the **heart** here represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “carefully remembered all these things” or “reflected carefully on what all these things meant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 2 52 gb25 figs-abstractnouns Ἰησοῦς προέκοπτεν τῇ σοφίᾳ, καὶ ἡλικίᾳ 1 Jesus was increasing in wisdom and stature If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the ideas behind the abstract nouns **wisdom** and **stature** with adjectives. These two terms refer to mental and physical growth. Alternate translation: “Jesus steadily became wiser and stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 2 52 y5qk figs-abstractnouns χάριτι παρὰ Θεῷ καὶ ἀνθρώποις 1 in favor with God and people If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **favor** with verbs. The phrase **in favor with God and people** refers to spiritual and social growth. Alternate translation: “God blessed him more and more, and people admired him more and more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 3 intro tkg5 0 # Luke 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. John the Baptist begins preaching and baptizing (3:1-22)
2. The list of Jesus’ ancestors (3:23-38)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 3:4-6, which Luke is quoting from the Old Testament about John the Baptist.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Justice

John’s instructions to the soldiers and tax collectors in Luke 3:12-15 are things that a person who wanted to live rightly would find reasonable and willingly do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and Luke [3:12-15](./12.md))

### Genealogy

A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Such lists were very important in determining who had the right be king, because the king’s authority was usually passed down or inherited from his father. It was also common for other important people to have a recorded genealogy.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Prophecy often involves the use of metaphors to express its meaning. Spiritual discernment is needed for proper interpretation of the prophecy. The prophecy that Luke quotes in 3:4-6 from Isaiah 40:3-5 is an extended metaphor that describes the ministry of John the Baptist. See the individual notes to 3:4-6 for recommendations about how to translate this passage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Herod locked up John in prison”

This statement could cause confusion because Luke says that John was imprisoned, and then he implies that John was still able to baptize Jesus. But Luke makes this statement in anticipation of Herod’s imprisonment of John. It describes something that was still in the future at the time of the other events in the narrative. See the first note to 3:19 for a further explanation. @@ -489,15 +489,15 @@ LUK 3 1 v22w translate-names Ποντίου Πειλάτου…Ἡρῴδου… LUK 3 1 uv8h translate-names τῆς Ἰουδαίας…τῆς Γαλιλαίας…τῆς Ἰτουραίας καὶ Τραχωνίτιδος…τῆς Ἀβειληνῆς 1 Judea … Galilee … Ituraea and Trachonitis … Abilene These are names of territories. Like **Galilee**, the name **Judea** occurs many times in this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 3 1 l171 translate-unknown τετραρχοῦντος 1 tetrarch In the Roman Empire, a **tetrarch** was the governor of one of four divisions of a country or province. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a general term. Alternate translation: “ruler” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 3 2 d3m8 figs-explicit ἐπὶ ἀρχιερέως Ἅννα καὶ Καϊάφα 1 during the high priesthood of Annas and Caiaphas Usually there would only have been one high priest, but at this point the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea, and there had been some intrigue surrounding Annas. One Roman official had appointed him some years earlier, but ten years after that, another official deposed him and named his son-in-law Caiaphas high priest instead. However, the Jews still recognized Annas’ claim to the position. It would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible for your readers. Alternate translation: “while Annas and Caiaphas were both serving as the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 3 2 dg8p figs-personification ἐγένετο ῥῆμα Θεοῦ 1 the word of God came Luke speaks of God’s message figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come to a person at God's bidding. Alternate translation: “God gave a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LUK 3 2 l172 figs-metonymy ἐγένετο ῥῆμα Θεοῦ 1 the word of God came The term **word** figuratively describes the message that God gave John to say by using words. Alternate translation: “God gave a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 3 2 dg8p figs-personification ἐγένετο ῥῆμα Θεοῦ 1 the word of God came Luke speaks of God’s message as if it were a living thing that could come to a person at God's bidding. Alternate translation: “God gave a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 3 2 l172 figs-metonymy ἐγένετο ῥῆμα Θεοῦ 1 the word of God came The term **word** describes the message that God gave John to say by using words. Alternate translation: “God gave a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 3 3 l173 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 3 3 l174 translate-names τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 the Jordan **Jordan** is the name of a river. Alternate translation: “the Jordan River” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 3 3 w2pu figs-abstractnouns κηρύσσων βάπτισμα μετανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 preaching a baptism of repentance for the forgiveness of sins If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the ideas behind the abstract nouns **baptism**, **repentance**, and **forgiveness** with other phrases. Alternate translation: “preaching that people should let him immerse them in the river to show that they wanted to live a new life and that they wanted God to forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 3 4 zf6m figs-activepassive ὡς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ λόγων Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου 1 As it is written in the book of the words of Isaiah the prophet If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “As the book says that records the sayings of the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 3 4 l175 figs-metonymy λόγων Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου 1 the words of Isaiah the prophet Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to refer to the sayings that Isaiah used words to articulate. Alternate translation: “the sayings of the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 3 4 l175 figs-metonymy λόγων Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου 1 the words of Isaiah the prophet Luke is using the term **words** to refer to the sayings that Isaiah used words to articulate. Alternate translation: “the sayings of the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 3 4 b86g figs-quotemarks φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 A voice of one calling out in the wilderness From this phrase through to the end of [3:6](../03/06.md), Luke quotes from the book of Isaiah. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -LUK 3 4 l176 figs-metonymy φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 A voice of one calling out in the wilderness The term **voice** refers figuratively to what this person is saying by association with the means they are using to say it. Alternate translation: “Someone is calling out in the wilderness and saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 3 4 l176 figs-metonymy φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 A voice of one calling out in the wilderness The term **voice** refers to what this person is saying by association with the means they are using to say it. Alternate translation: “Someone is calling out in the wilderness and saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 3 4 l177 figs-quotesinquotes ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου; εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ 1 Make ready the way of the Lord, make his paths straight Everything from this phrase through to the end of [3:6](../03/06.md) is a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting from the book of Isaiah, and Isaiah is quoting the words of the person calling out in the wilderness. It would be best to indicate that by punctuating this material as a second-level quotation, since Luke is quoting from Scripture. However, if your language does not put one direct quotation within another, you can translate this material as an indirect quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 3 4 rzv1 figs-parallelism ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου; εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ 1 Make ready the way of the Lord, make his paths straight These two phrases mean similar things. They are both telling people to make a good road for the Lord to travel on. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be helpful to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with another phrase that would show the relationship between them. Alternate translation: “Prepare a good road for the Lord to travel on, and do this by making sure that it follows a straight path” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) LUK 3 4 h9xl figs-metaphor ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου 1 Make ready the way of the Lord This is a figurative way of telling people to get ready to listen to the Lord’s message when it comes. They are to do this by giving up their sins. Alternate translation: “Give up your sins so that you will be ready to listen to the Lord’s message when it comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ LUK 3 5 wk8m figs-metaphor πᾶσα φάραγξ πληρωθήσεται, κα LUK 3 5 e52x figs-activepassive πᾶσα φάραγξ πληρωθήσεται 1 Every valley will be filled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Since people would be doing this action in one sense of the metaphor, but God would be doing the action in another sense of the metaphor, it might be best not to be specific about who will do the action. Alternate translation: “Someone will fill in every valley” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 3 5 s66m figs-activepassive καὶ πᾶν ὄρος καὶ βουνὸς ταπεινωθήσεται 1 and every mountain and hill will be made low If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, following the same principle as for the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and someone will make every mountain and hill low” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 3 5 l178 figs-metaphor ἔσται τὰ σκολιὰ εἰς εὐθείαν, καὶ αἱ τραχεῖαι εἰς ὁδοὺς λείας 1 the crooked roads will become straight, and the rough roads will become smooth This too is both a continuation of the figurative description of making a good road and a description of the effects that the coming of the Lord will have on people. Something that is **crooked** becoming **straight** and something that is **rough** becoming **smooth** can be seen as metaphors for repentance and a change in a person’s way of life. And so we recommend once again that you translate the words directly and not provide a non-figurative explanation in the text of your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 3 6 l179 figs-metonymy πᾶσα σὰρξ 1 all flesh Luke is describing people figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the flesh they are made of. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 3 6 l179 figs-metonymy πᾶσα σὰρξ 1 all flesh Luke is describing people by reference to something associated with them, the flesh they are made of. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 3 6 l180 figs-metaphor ὄψεται 1 will see The term **see** is a figurative way of referring to recognition and understanding. Alternate translation: “will recognize” or “will understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 3 6 du1b figs-abstractnouns ὄψεται…τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 will see the salvation of God If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “will understand how God saves people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 3 6 l181 figs-quotesinquotes τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the salvation of God After this phrase, Isaiah ends his quotation from the person who is calling out in the wilderness. If you decided in [3:4](../03/04.md) to mark these words as a second-level quotation, indicate the end of that quotation here with whatever convention your language uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -514,16 +514,16 @@ LUK 3 7 sxn9 figs-activepassive βαπτισθῆναι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 LUK 3 7 b724 figs-idiom γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν 1 Offspring of vipers The expression **offspring of** is an idiom that means a person shares the qualities of something. John is using dangerous poisonous snakes to represent evil. Alternate translation: “You evil people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 3 7 l183 translate-unknown γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν 1 Offspring of vipers If your readers would not recognize the name **vipers**, which refers to dangerous poisonous snakes, you could state something more general. Alternate translation: “You are evil, like poisonous snakes” or “You are evil, like poisonous animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 3 7 mcq5 figs-rquestion τίς ὑπέδειξεν ὑμῖν φυγεῖν ἀπὸ τῆς μελλούσης ὀργῆς? 1 Who warned you to flee from the coming wrath? John is making a statement, not asking a question. He does not expect the people in the crowds to tell him who warned them. Instead, he is using the question form to challenge the people to think about what they believe baptism will do for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “you could not escape from God’s wrath just by being baptized!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -LUK 3 7 g7tw figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τῆς μελλούσης ὀργῆς 1 from the coming wrath John is using the word **wrath** to refer figuratively to God’s punishment. This is by association with the way that punishment is an expression of God’s **wrath** or displeasure over sin. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that God is sending” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 3 8 pz16 figs-metaphor ποιήσατε…καρποὺς ἀξίους τῆς μετανοίας 1 produce fruits worthy of repentance John is figuratively comparing a person’s behavior to fruit. Just as a plant is expected to produce fruit that is appropriate for that kind of plant, a person who says that he has repented is expected to live righteously. Alternate translation: “do the good things that will show that you have stopped sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 3 7 g7tw figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τῆς μελλούσης ὀργῆς 1 from the coming wrath John is using the word **wrath** to refer to God’s punishment. This is by association with the way that punishment is an expression of God’s **wrath** or displeasure over sin. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that God is sending” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 3 8 pz16 figs-metaphor ποιήσατε…καρποὺς ἀξίους τῆς μετανοίας 1 produce fruits worthy of repentance John is comparing a person’s behavior to fruit. Just as a plant is expected to produce fruit that is appropriate for that kind of plant, a person who says that he has repented is expected to live righteously. Alternate translation: “do the good things that will show that you have stopped sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 3 8 l184 figs-abstractnouns ἀξίους τῆς μετανοίας 1 worthy of repentance If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **repentance** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “that will show that you have stopped sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 3 8 l185 figs-quotesinquotes μὴ ἄρξησθε λέγειν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν Ἀβραάμ 1 do not begin to say within yourselves, ‘We have Abraham as our father’ **We have Abraham as our father** is a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting John’s words to the crowd, and John is quoting something that the crowds might wrongly think. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “do not try to reassure yourselves with the thought that Abraham is your father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 3 8 l186 figs-metaphor πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν Ἀβραάμ 1 We have Abraham as our father Here, **Father** figuratively means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “Abraham is our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 3 8 l186 figs-metaphor πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν Ἀβραάμ 1 We have Abraham as our father Here, **Father** means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “Abraham is our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 3 8 l187 figs-exclusive πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν Ἀβραάμ 1 We have Abraham as our father John is suggesting something the people might say about themselves, as opposed to others, so if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “we” and “us,” use the exclusive form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -LUK 3 8 l188 figs-metaphor πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν Ἀβραάμ 1 We have Abraham as our father Here, the word **father** figuratively means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “Abraham is our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 3 8 l188 figs-metaphor πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν Ἀβραάμ 1 We have Abraham as our father Here, the word **father** means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “Abraham is our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 3 8 pft3 figs-explicit πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν Ἀβραάμ 1 We have Abraham as our father If it would be unclear to your readers why they would say this, you may also add the implied information: Alternate translation: “Abraham is our ancestor, so God would not punish us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 3 8 gbp2 figs-metaphor δύναται ὁ Θεὸς ἐκ τῶν λίθων τούτων ἐγεῖραι τέκνα τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 God is able to raise up children for Abraham from these stones The expression **raise up** is a spatial metaphor. It envisions that if God did turn the stones into people who were descendants of Abraham, then the people would be standing up in front of everyone, no longer lying in the riverbed as the stones were. Alternate translation: “God is able create descendants for Abraham out of these stones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 3 8 l189 figs-metaphor τέκνα τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 children for Abraham Here, the word **children** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “descendants for Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 3 8 l189 figs-metaphor τέκνα τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 children for Abraham Here, the word **children** means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “descendants for Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 3 8 pi82 ἐκ τῶν λίθων τούτων 1 from these stones John was probably referring to actual stones lying along the Jordan River. Alternate translation: “from these stones here” LUK 3 9 r5pa figs-activepassive ἤδη…ἡ ἀξίνη πρὸς τὴν ῥίζαν τῶν δένδρων κεῖται 1 the ax is already set against the root of the trees If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the person who is going to cut down the tree has already placed his ax against the roots” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 3 9 l190 figs-metaphor ἡ ἀξίνη πρὸς τὴν ῥίζαν τῶν δένδρων κεῖται 1 the ax is already set against the root of the trees This is a figurative way of saying that punishment is just about to begin. Alternate translation: “God is even now getting his punishment ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -542,32 +542,32 @@ LUK 3 14 bvy5 figs-activepassive καὶ ἀρκεῖσθε τοῖς ὀψων LUK 3 14 l193 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 4 and This word introduces draws a contrast between what the soldiers had been doing and what they should have been doing. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) LUK 3 15 pgp3 grammar-connect-time-background προσδοκῶντος δὲ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 And the people were expecting Luke is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. You can introduce his statement with a word that will indicate this. Alternate translation: “Now the people were expecting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 3 15 l194 figs-explicit προσδοκῶντος δὲ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 And the people were expecting The implication is that the people were expecting the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now the people were expecting the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 3 15 czb7 figs-metaphor διαλογιζομένων…ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 wondering in their hearts Here, Luke uses the term **hearts** figuratively to represent the people’s minds. Alternate translation: “wondering in their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 3 15 czb7 figs-metaphor διαλογιζομένων…ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 wondering in their hearts Here, Luke uses the term **hearts** to represent the people’s minds. Alternate translation: “wondering in their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 3 16 fn1u figs-explicit ἀπεκρίνατο λέγων πᾶσιν ὁ Ἰωάννης 1 John answered, saying to them all John’s statement clearly implies that John himself is not the Messiah. It may be helpful to state this explicitly for your readers. Alternate translation: “John clarified that he was not the Messiah by saying to them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 3 16 l195 figs-hendiadys ἀπεκρίνατο λέγων…ὁ Ἰωάννης 1 John answered, saying Together the words **answered** and **saying** mean that John responded to what the people were wondering about him. Alternate translation: “John responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 3 16 wj3h ἐγὼ…ὕδατι βαπτίζω ὑμᾶς 1 I … baptize you with water Alternate translation: “I … baptize you using water” or “I … baptize you by means of water” LUK 3 16 k3hg figs-explicit οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ 1 I am not worthy to untie the strap of his sandals Untying the straps of sandals was a duty of a slave. John is saying implicitly that the one who is coming will be so great that he is not even worthy to be his slave. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not even worthy to be his slave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 3 16 jjp1 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ὑμᾶς βαπτίσει ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, καὶ πυρί 1 He will baptize you with the Holy Spirit and with fire John is using literal baptism, which puts a person under water, to speak figuratively of spiritual baptism, which puts people under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who purifies them. Alternate translation: “He will put you under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who will purify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 3 16 c1an figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ὑμᾶς βαπτίσει…πυρί 1 He will baptize you … with fire The word **fire** is intended figuratively, and it suggests a fuller metaphor. Jesus will not immerse people in actual fire. Be sure that this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “He will baptize you … to purify you, as precious metals are purified in fire” or “He will baptize you … to clear away your sins, as fire clears away underbrush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 3 17 jzm4 figs-metaphor οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ 1 whose winnowing fork is in his hand John is saying figuratively that the Messiah will come prepared to judge people right away. You could express this metaphor as a simile in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here in your translation. Alternate translation: “He will already be prepared to judge people, just like a farmer who is ready to thresh grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 3 16 jjp1 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ὑμᾶς βαπτίσει ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, καὶ πυρί 1 He will baptize you with the Holy Spirit and with fire John is using literal baptism, which puts a person under water, to speak of spiritual baptism, which puts people under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who purifies them. Alternate translation: “He will put you under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who will purify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 3 16 c1an figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ὑμᾶς βαπτίσει…πυρί 1 He will baptize you … with fire The word **fire** is intended, and it suggests a fuller metaphor. Jesus will not immerse people in actual fire. Be sure that this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “He will baptize you … to purify you, as precious metals are purified in fire” or “He will baptize you … to clear away your sins, as fire clears away underbrush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 3 17 jzm4 figs-metaphor οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ 1 whose winnowing fork is in his hand John is saying that the Messiah will come prepared to judge people right away. You could express this metaphor as a simile in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here in your translation. Alternate translation: “He will already be prepared to judge people, just like a farmer who is ready to thresh grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 3 17 l196 figs-idiom οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ 1 whose winnowing fork is in his hand The phrase **in his hand** is an idiom that means he has the tool all ready to use. Alternate translation: “He has his winnowing fork ready to use” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 3 17 b1ap translate-unknown πτύον 1 winnowing fork This is a tool for tossing wheat into the air to separate the wheat grain from the chaff. The heavier grain falls back down, and the wind blows away the unwanted chaff. This tool is similar to a pitchfork. If you have a similar tool in your culture, you could use the word for it here. Otherwise, you could use a phrase that would express the meaning. Alternate translation: “tool for threshing grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 3 17 gf8n translate-unknown διακαθᾶραι τὴν ἅλωνα αὐτοῦ 1 to thoroughly clear off his threshing floor The threshing floor was the place where wheat was stacked in preparation for threshing. To **clear off** the floor is to finish threshing all the grain. Alternate translation: “to completely thresh all of his grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 3 17 gt3q figs-exmetaphor καὶ συναγαγεῖν τὸν σῖτον εἰς τὴν ἀποθήκην αὐτοῦ 1 and to gather the wheat into his storehouse John continues to speak figuratively to describe how the coming Messiah will judge people. The wheat is the part of the crop that is useful. It represents people who are obedient to God, who will be welcomed into his presence. You could express this metaphor as a simile in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He will welcome those who are obedient to God, just as a farmer stores good grain in his barn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) -LUK 3 17 ky8j figs-exmetaphor τὸ δὲ ἄχυρον κατακαύσει πυρὶ ἀσβέστῳ 1 but he will burn up the chaff with unquenchable fire John continues to speak figuratively to describe how the coming Messiah will judge people. The chaff is the husk that surrounds the grain. It is not useful for anything, so people burn it up. You could express this metaphor as a simile in your translation. Alternate translation: “but he will punish those who are disobedient to God, just as a farmer burns up the useless chaff” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +LUK 3 17 gt3q figs-exmetaphor καὶ συναγαγεῖν τὸν σῖτον εἰς τὴν ἀποθήκην αὐτοῦ 1 and to gather the wheat into his storehouse John continues to speak to describe how the coming Messiah will judge people. The wheat is the part of the crop that is useful. It represents people who are obedient to God, who will be welcomed into his presence. You could express this metaphor as a simile in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He will welcome those who are obedient to God, just as a farmer stores good grain in his barn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +LUK 3 17 ky8j figs-exmetaphor τὸ δὲ ἄχυρον κατακαύσει πυρὶ ἀσβέστῳ 1 but he will burn up the chaff with unquenchable fire John continues to speak to describe how the coming Messiah will judge people. The chaff is the husk that surrounds the grain. It is not useful for anything, so people burn it up. You could express this metaphor as a simile in your translation. Alternate translation: “but he will punish those who are disobedient to God, just as a farmer burns up the useless chaff” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) LUK 3 18 tyj9 πολλὰ…καὶ ἕτερα παρακαλῶν 1 also exhorting many other things Alternate translation: “saying many other things to warn them” LUK 3 19 l197 writing-background δὲ 1 But Luke uses the term **but** to introduce some background information to the story. In this verse and the next one, he tells what later happened to John. This had not yet happened at this time. When Luke says in [3:21](../03/21.md) that Jesus was baptized, he means that John was still there and that John baptized Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 3 19 jj3q translate-unknown ὁ…Ἡρῴδης ὁ τετράρχης 1 Herod the tetrarch See how you translated the term **tetrarch** in [3:1](../03/01.md) Alternate translation: “Herod, who ruled the region of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 3 19 l198 figs-activepassive ἐλεγχόμενος ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ περὶ Ἡρῳδιάδος, τῆς γυναικὸς τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 having been rebuked by him concerning Herodias, the wife of his brother If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could make clear who did the action. Alternate translation: “because John had rebuked him for marrying Herodias, his brother’s former wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 3 19 cu4v figs-explicit ἐλεγχόμενος ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ περὶ Ἡρῳδιάδος, τῆς γυναικὸς τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 having been rebuked by him concerning Herodias, the wife of his brother The implication is that Herod’s brother was still alive. That made this marriage a violation of the law of Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because John had rebuked him for marrying Herodias, his brother’s former wife, while his brother was still alive. That was something which the law of Moses forbade” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 3 20 p2xw figs-synecdoche κατέκλεισεν τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐν φυλακῇ 1 he locked John up in prison Herod did not do this by himself, Rather, as a ruler, he probably ordered his soldiers to lock John up. Luke is speaking figuratively of Herod, one person who was involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “He had his soldiers lock John up in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 3 20 p2xw figs-synecdoche κατέκλεισεν τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐν φυλακῇ 1 he locked John up in prison Herod did not do this by himself, Rather, as a ruler, he probably ordered his soldiers to lock John up. Luke is speaking of Herod, one person who was involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “He had his soldiers lock John up in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 3 21 l199 figs-events ἐγένετο δὲ 1 and it happened that The previous verse says that Herod put John in prison. It might be helpful to make it clear that the account that starts in this verse happened before John was arrested. UST does that by starting this verse with “but before Herod did that.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) LUK 3 21 phe6 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 and it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 3 21 r2x1 figs-activepassive βαπτισθῆναι ἅπαντα τὸν λαὸν 1 when all the people were being baptized If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “while John was baptizing all the people who came to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 3 21 l200 figs-hyperbole ἅπαντα τὸν λαὸν 1 all the people The phrase **all the people** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “all the people who came to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 3 21 nw1s figs-activepassive καὶ Ἰησοῦ βαπτισθέντος 1 Jesus also was baptized you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “John also baptized Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 3 21 i5zg figs-activepassive ἀνεῳχθῆναι τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 the heavens were opened you could express this with an active form. This was more than a simple clearing of the clouds, but it is not clear exactly what the expression means, so it may be best not to try to specify what happened too exactly. Alternate translation: “the sky opened up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 3 22 q2yh figs-personification φωνὴν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ γενέσθαι 1 a voice came from heaven Luke speaks figuratively of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 3 22 q2yh figs-personification φωνὴν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ γενέσθαι 1 a voice came from heaven Luke speaks of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 3 22 h7tn guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου 1 my … Son This is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) LUK 3 23 uvm3 writing-background καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information about Jesus’ age and ancestors. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 3 23 d3sh figs-idiom αὐτὸς ἦν Ἰησοῦς ἀρχόμενος ὡσεὶ ἐτῶν τριάκοντα 1 Jesus himself was beginning about 30 years old This idiomatic expression could mean: (1) the word **beginning** is a reference to Jesus starting his own ministry. UST follows this interpretation. Alternate translation: “Jesus himself was about 30 years old when he began his ministry” (2) Luke is saying that Jesus had just turned 30 was when he was baptized. Alternate translation: “Jesus himself was just 30 years old at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -626,7 +626,7 @@ LUK 4 10 f5dn figs-explicit γέγραπται γὰρ 1 For it is written The d LUK 4 10 s2g4 figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 it is written If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state what is doing the action. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 4 10 nld8 writing-pronouns τοῖς ἀγγέλοις αὐτοῦ ἐντελεῖται περὶ σοῦ, τοῦ διαφυλάξαι σε 1 He will give orders to his angels regarding you, to protect you **He** refers to God. Alternate translation: “God will order his angels to protect you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 4 11 l210 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ, ὅτι ἐπὶ χειρῶν ἀροῦσίν σε, μήποτε προσκόψῃς πρὸς λίθον τὸν πόδα σου 1 and, ‘They will lift you up in their hands, lest you strike your foot against a stone’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “and that they will lift you up in their hands, so that you will not strike your foot against a stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 4 11 l211 figs-synecdoche μήποτε προσκόψῃς πρὸς λίθον τὸν πόδα σου 1 lest you strike your foot against a stone The Scriptures are figuratively using one way of being hurt to mean all ways of being hurt. Alternate translation: “so that you will not get hurt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 4 11 l211 figs-synecdoche μήποτε προσκόψῃς πρὸς λίθον τὸν πόδα σου 1 lest you strike your foot against a stone The Scriptures are using one way of being hurt to mean all ways of being hurt. Alternate translation: “so that you will not get hurt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 4 12 l212 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 answering, Jesus said to him Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to the challenge that the devil posed. Alternate translation: “Jesus responded to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 4 12 l213 figs-quotesinquotes εἴρηται, οὐκ ἐκπειράσεις Κύριον τὸν Θεόν σου 1 It is said, ‘You will not put the Lord your God to the test.’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “It is said that one must not put the Lord his God to the test” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 4 12 fy8d figs-explicit εἴρηται 1 It is said Jesus clearly implies in his answer that he is rejecting the devil’s challenge. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as UST does. Alternate translation: “Jesus replied, ‘No, I will not do that, because it is said’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -636,7 +636,7 @@ LUK 4 13 nc2c figs-explicit συντελέσας πάντα πειρασμὸν LUK 4 13 qqd7 figs-explicit ἄχρι καιροῦ 1 until an opportune time New Testament Greek had two words for time. The first referred to chronological time, that is, the passage of time. The second word referred to the right time to do something. ULT is using the phrase **an opportune time** to translate that second word. If your language makes this same distinction, use the corresponding word in your own translation. Alternate translation: “until the time was right to try again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 4 14 yfc3 writing-newevent καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 4 14 ht5k figs-explicit ἐν τῇ δυνάμει τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 in the power of the Spirit This phrase means that God, by the Holy Spirit, was empowering Jesus in a special way, enabling him to do things that ordinary humans could not. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the Spirit was giving him the power to do extraordinary things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 4 14 dhj7 figs-personification φήμη ἐξῆλθεν…περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 news about him went out Luke speaks figuratively of this **news** as if it were something that could **go out** actively by itself. This expression means that those who heard about Jesus told other people about him, who then told even more people about him. Alternate translation: “people spread the news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 4 14 dhj7 figs-personification φήμη ἐξῆλθεν…περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 news about him went out Luke speaks of this **news** as if it were something that could **go out** actively by itself. This expression means that those who heard about Jesus told other people about him, who then told even more people about him. Alternate translation: “people spread the news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 4 14 hah9 καθ’ ὅλης τῆς περιχώρου 1 throughout the entire surrounding region Alternate translation: “everywhere around Galilee” LUK 4 15 ik8g figs-activepassive δοξαζόμενος ὑπὸ πάντων 1 being praised by all If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as everyone spoke about him in a good way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 4 16 l214 grammar-connect-time-background καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) @@ -648,20 +648,20 @@ LUK 4 17 l216 figs-explicit ἐπεδόθη αὐτῷ βιβλίον τοῦ π LUK 4 17 x52a translate-unknown βιβλίον τοῦ προφήτου Ἠσαΐου 1 the scroll of the prophet Isaiah A **scroll** was a long, wide roll of special paper. On this scroll someone had written the words that **Isaiah** had spoken many years before. If your readers would not know what a **scroll** is, you could describe it, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the special paper roll that recorded the sayings of the prophet Isaiah” or “the book that recorded the sayings of the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 4 17 w5s9 figs-activepassive τὸν τόπον οὗ ἦν γεγραμμένον 1 the place where it was written If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the place where the scroll recorded the words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 4 18 h1rm figs-metaphor Πνεῦμα Κυρίου ἐπ’ ἐμέ 1 The Spirit of the Lord is upon me As in [2:25](../02/25.md), **upon** is a spatial metaphor that means that the Spirit of God is with someone in a special way. Alternate translation: “The Spirit of the Lord is with me in a special way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 4 18 q96y figs-metaphor ἔχρισέν με 1 he has anointed me In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person when they were given the authority to assume an office or do a special task. Isaiah uses anointing figuratively to indicate that God has appointed him to his work. Jesus applies these words to himself as well. Alternate translation: “he has appointed me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 4 18 q96y figs-metaphor ἔχρισέν με 1 he has anointed me In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person when they were given the authority to assume an office or do a special task. Isaiah uses anointing to indicate that God has appointed him to his work. Jesus applies these words to himself as well. Alternate translation: “he has appointed me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 4 18 l6ac figs-nominaladj πτωχοῖς…τυφλοῖς 1 the poor … the blind Luke is using the adjectives **poor** and **blind** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these expressions with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are poor … people who are blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 4 18 a9wn κηρύξαι αἰχμαλώτοις ἄφεσιν 1 to proclaim freedom to the captives Alternate translation: “to tell people who are being held captive that they can go free” LUK 4 18 mzp4 κηρύξαι…τυφλοῖς ἀνάβλεψιν 1 to proclaim … recovery of sight to the blind Alternate translation: “to tell people who are blind that they will be able to see again” LUK 4 18 utq5 figs-activepassive ἀποστεῖλαι τεθραυσμένους ἐν ἀφέσει 1 to set free those who are oppressed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “to rescue people whom others are treating harshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 4 19 z262 figs-idiom κηρύξαι ἐνιαυτὸν Κυρίου δεκτόν 1 to proclaim the favorable year of the Lord Luke is using the term **year** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “to announce that this is the time when the Lord will show his kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 4 19 z262 figs-idiom κηρύξαι ἐνιαυτὸν Κυρίου δεκτόν 1 to proclaim the favorable year of the Lord Luke is using the term **year** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “to announce that this is the time when the Lord will show his kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 4 20 sm11 figs-explicit πτύξας τὸ βιβλίον 1 rolling up the scroll A scroll was closed by rolling it like a tube to protect the writing inside it. Alternate translation: “closing the scroll by rolling it up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 4 20 ehx3 translate-unknown τῷ ὑπηρέτῃ 1 the attendant The **attendant** refers to a synagogue worker who, with proper care and reverence, would bring out and put away the scrolls that contained the Scriptures. If there is a word in your language for a person who has a similar role in your culture, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “the sexton” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 4 20 l217 figs-explicit ἐκάθισεν 1 he sat down Since a person would stand to read the Scriptures in a synagogue but then sit down to teach, the implication is that Jesus was going to speak to the people about what he had just read. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as UST does. Alternate translation: “he sat down to teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 4 20 pu89 figs-synecdoche πάντων οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ 1 all the eyes in the synagogue Luke is using one part of people, their **eyes**, figuratively to represent people themselves in the act of seeing. Alternate translation: “all the people in the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -LUK 4 21 l218 figs-idiom σήμερον 1 Today **Today** figuratively refers to the present moment. Alternate translation: “Right now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 4 20 pu89 figs-synecdoche πάντων οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ 1 all the eyes in the synagogue Luke is using one part of people, their **eyes**, to represent people themselves in the act of seeing. Alternate translation: “all the people in the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 4 21 l218 figs-idiom σήμερον 1 Today **Today** refers to the present moment. Alternate translation: “Right now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 4 21 b1ix figs-activepassive πεπλήρωται ἡ Γραφὴ αὕτη 1 this scripture has been fulfilled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I am fulfilling what this scripture says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 4 21 iij8 figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς ὠσὶν ὑμῶν 1 in your ears In this expression, the **ears** figuratively represent people in the act of listening. Alternate translation: “even as you are listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 4 22 k2xi figs-metonymy τοῖς λόγοις τῆς χάριτος 1 the gracious words Luke uses the term **words** figuratively to describe what Jesus said by reference to something associated with it, the words he used to communicate it. Alternate translation: “the articulate things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 4 21 iij8 figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς ὠσὶν ὑμῶν 1 in your ears In this expression, the **ears** represent people in the act of listening. Alternate translation: “even as you are listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 4 22 k2xi figs-metonymy τοῖς λόγοις τῆς χάριτος 1 the gracious words Luke uses the term **words** to describe what Jesus said by reference to something associated with it, the words he used to communicate it. Alternate translation: “the articulate things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 4 22 l219 figs-explicitinfo τοῖς λόγοις…τοῖς ἐκπορευομένοις ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 the … words that were coming out of his mouth In your language, this phrase might seem like an unnecessarily elaborate way of speaking. If so, you could express the same idea more compactly. Alternate translation: “the … things he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) LUK 4 22 ty6d figs-rquestion οὐχὶ υἱός ἐστιν Ἰωσὴφ οὗτος? 1 Is this not the son of Joseph? The people were making a statement, not asking a question. They did not expect others to verify for them who Jesus’ father was. Instead, they were using the question form to say how amazed they were. Joseph was not a religious leader, so they were surprised that his son would preach as well as he did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “This is just Joseph’s son!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 4 23 l220 figs-quotesinquotes πάντως ἐρεῖτέ μοι τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην, ἰατρέ, θεράπευσον σεαυτόν; ὅσα ἠκούσαμεν γενόμενα εἰς τὴν Καφαρναοὺμ, ποίησον καὶ ὧδε ἐν τῇ πατρίδι σου 1 Surely you will say this proverb to me, ‘Doctor, heal yourself. Whatever we heard that happened in Capernaum, also do here in your hometown’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Surely you will quote the proverb to me that tells a doctor to heal himself, to ask me to do the same things here in my hometown that you heard happened in Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -670,10 +670,10 @@ LUK 4 23 ww1w figs-explicit ὅσα ἠκούσαμεν γενόμενα εἰς LUK 4 24 q3a9 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “What I am about to tell you is very true” LUK 4 24 n2cp writing-proverbs οὐδεὶς προφήτης δεκτός ἐστιν ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὐτοῦ 1 no prophet is accepted in his hometown Jesus makes a short, general statement in order to rebuke the people. This saying expresses a great deal of meaning in a few words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could expand it to make clear to your readers what it means. Alternate translation: “You think you know all about me because I grew up here, and so you could not accept that I am genuinely a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) LUK 4 25 u896 ἐπ’ ἀληθείας δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν 1 In truth I say to you Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “What I am about to tell you is very true” -LUK 4 25 l221 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Ἠλείου 1 during the days of Elijah Jesus is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the time when Elijah was prophesying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 4 25 l221 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Ἠλείου 1 during the days of Elijah Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the time when Elijah was prophesying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 4 25 g8r3 figs-explicit ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Ἠλείου 1 during the days of Elijah The people to whom Jesus was speaking would have known that Elijah was one of God’s prophets. If your readers would not know that, you could make this implicit information explicit, as UST does. Alternate translation: “during the time when Elijah was prophesying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 4 25 l222 figs-activepassive ὅτε ἐκλείσθη ὁ οὐρανὸς 1 the sky was shut up If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “when God shut up the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 4 25 spq7 figs-metaphor ὅτε ἐκλείσθη ὁ οὐρανὸς 1 the sky was shut up Jesus figuratively describes the sky as if God had closed it so that no rain could fall from it. Alternate translation: “when no rain fell from the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 4 25 spq7 figs-metaphor ὅτε ἐκλείσθη ὁ οὐρανὸς 1 the sky was shut up Jesus describes the sky as if God had closed it so that no rain could fall from it. Alternate translation: “when no rain fell from the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 4 25 ukl6 translate-unknown λιμὸς μέγας 1 a great famine A **famine** is a long period of time when the people in an area cannot produce or acquire enough food to feed themselves. Alternate translation: “a serious lack of food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 4 26 l223 figs-activepassive πρὸς οὐδεμίαν αὐτῶν ἐπέμφθη Ἠλείας 1 Elijah was sent to none of them except If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God did not send Elijah to any of them except” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 4 26 l224 grammar-connect-exceptions πρὸς οὐδεμίαν αὐτῶν ἐπέμφθη Ἠλείας, εἰ μὴ 1 Elijah was sent to none of them except If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “God only sent Elijah to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) @@ -686,7 +686,7 @@ LUK 4 27 mbs2 translate-names Ναιμὰν ὁ Σύρος 1 Naaman the Syrian * LUK 4 28 l230 grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to indicate that the event he will now relate, the people becoming enraged, came after the event he has just described, Jesus citing scriptures in which God helped Gentiles rather than Jews. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) LUK 4 28 ca1k figs-explicit ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες θυμοῦ ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ ἀκούοντες ταῦτα 1 all in the synagogue were filled with rage when they heard these things If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why the people of Nazareth became so angry. Alternate translation: “When the people in the synagogue heard Jesus say these things, they all became furious, because he had cited scriptures in which God helped Gentiles rather than Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 4 28 l231 figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες θυμοῦ 1 all … were filled with rage If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they all became furious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 4 28 l232 figs-personification ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες θυμοῦ 1 all … were filled with rage Luke speaks figuratively of the people’s **rage** as if it were something that could actively fill them. Alternate translation: “they all became furious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 4 28 l232 figs-personification ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες θυμοῦ 1 all … were filled with rage Luke speaks of the people’s **rage** as if it were something that could actively fill them. Alternate translation: “they all became furious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 4 29 l233 figs-activepassive τοῦ ὄρους ἐφ’ οὗ ἡ πόλις ᾠκοδόμητο αὐτῶν 1 the hill on which their town was built If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “the hill on which people had built their town” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 4 29 l234 figs-explicit ὥστε κατακρημνίσαι αὐτόν 1 so as to throw him off The implication is that the people of Nazareth wanted to do this in order to kill Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they wanted to throw him off to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 4 30 k7dg διελθὼν διὰ μέσου αὐτῶν 1 passing through the midst of them Alternate translation: “slipping between the people who were trying to kill him” @@ -695,7 +695,7 @@ LUK 4 31 ynf3 grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word LUK 4 31 ib1l figs-idiom κατῆλθεν εἰς Καφαρναοὺμ 1 he went down to Capernaum Here, Luke uses the phrase **went down** because **Capernaum** is lower in elevation than Nazareth. Alternate translation: “went to Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 4 31 ky4y figs-explicit Καφαρναοὺμ, πόλιν τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 Capernaum, a city in Galilee Since Nazareth was also in Galilee, you might state “Capernaum, another city in Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 4 32 qk28 figs-activepassive ἐξεπλήσσοντο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ 1 they were astonished at his teaching If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his teaching amazed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 4 32 j4ee figs-metonymy ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ ἦν ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ 1 his word was with authority Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. Alternate translation: “he taught as one who had authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 4 32 j4ee figs-metonymy ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ ἦν ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ 1 his word was with authority Luke is using the term **word** to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. Alternate translation: “he taught as one who had authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 4 33 l235 grammar-connect-time-background καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 4 33 fax1 writing-participants ἦν ἄνθρωπος 1 there was a man Luke uses this phrase to mark the introduction of a new character into the story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 4 33 i93n ἔχων πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου 1 who had a spirit of an unclean demon Alternate translation: “who was controlled by an evil spirit” @@ -705,13 +705,13 @@ LUK 4 34 fkp2 figs-idiom τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί 1 What to us and to you LUK 4 35 m8es ἐπετίμησεν αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰησοῦς λέγων 1 Jesus rebuked him, saying Alternate translation: “Jesus said sternly to the demon” LUK 4 35 l236 figs-activepassive φιμώθητι 1 Be silenced If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Keep quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 4 35 me6n ἔξελθε ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 come out of him Jesus is commanding the demon to stop controlling the man. Alternate translation: “leave him alone” or “do not live in this man any longer” -LUK 4 36 l237 figs-personification ἐγένετο θάμβος ἐπὶ πάντας 1 astonishment came upon everyone Luke speaks figuratively of **astonishment** as if it were something that actively **came upon** the people. Alternate translation: “they were all amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LUK 4 36 l238 figs-metonymy τίς ὁ λόγος οὗτος 1 What is this word Luke uses the term **word** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. Alternate translation: “What is this teaching” or “What is this message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 4 36 l237 figs-personification ἐγένετο θάμβος ἐπὶ πάντας 1 astonishment came upon everyone Luke speaks of **astonishment** as if it were something that actively **came upon** the people. Alternate translation: “they were all amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 4 36 l238 figs-metonymy τίς ὁ λόγος οὗτος 1 What is this word Luke uses the term **word** to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. Alternate translation: “What is this teaching” or “What is this message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 4 36 h7wx figs-rquestion τίς ὁ λόγος οὗτος 1 What is this word? The people are making a statement, not asking a question. They do not expect anyone to explain what Jesus’ teaching is. Instead, they are using the question form to express how amazed they are that Jesus has the authority to command demons to leave a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “This is a powerful message!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 4 36 dgz3 figs-doublet ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ καὶ δυνάμει ἐπιτάσσει τοῖς ἀκαθάρτοις πνεύμασιν 1 he commands the unclean spirits with authority and power The words **authority** and **power** mean similar things. The people use the two terms together to emphasize what great control Jesus has over unclean spirits. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these terms in a single phrase that would similarly express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “he has complete authority over the unclean spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) LUK 4 37 q25f writing-endofstory καὶ ἐξεπορεύετο ἦχος περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 And news about him went out This is a comment about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) LUK 4 37 l239 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -LUK 4 37 xca8 figs-personification ἐξεπορεύετο ἦχος περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 news about him went out Luke speaks figuratively of this **news** as if it were something that could spread around actively by itself. As in [4:14](../04/14.md), this expression means that those who heard about Jesus told other people about him, who told even more people about him. Alternate translation: “people began to spread the news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 4 37 xca8 figs-personification ἐξεπορεύετο ἦχος περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 news about him went out Luke speaks of this **news** as if it were something that could spread around actively by itself. As in [4:14](../04/14.md), this expression means that those who heard about Jesus told other people about him, who told even more people about him. Alternate translation: “people began to spread the news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 4 38 jn3a writing-newevent δὲ 1 Then Luke uses this word to introduce a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 4 38 l240 writing-participants Σίμωνος 1 Simon Luke is introducing a new character into the story. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state a little bit more about him here to help them recognize him later. Alternate translation: “a man named Simon, who would become one of his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 4 38 l241 translate-names Σίμωνος 1 Simon **Simon** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -732,12 +732,12 @@ LUK 4 42 rt5n γενομένης…ἡμέρας 1 when it became day Alternate LUK 4 42 d1pr ἔρημον τόπον 1 a solitary place Alternate translation: “a deserted place” or “a place where there were no people” LUK 4 42 l243 κατεῖχον αὐτὸν τοῦ μὴ πορεύεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 they restrained him not to go away from them Alternate translation: “they tried to keep him from leaving them” LUK 4 43 l244 figs-abstractnouns εὐαγγελίσασθαί…τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 proclaim the gospel about the kingdom of God See the discussion of this concept in Part 2 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of Luke. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “announce the good news that God is going to rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LUK 4 43 sjy1 figs-metonymy ταῖς ἑτέραις πόλεσιν 1 to other cities Jesus actually means the people who live in these cities. He is describing them figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the cities where they live. Alternate translation: “to the people in many other cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 4 43 sjy1 figs-metonymy ταῖς ἑτέραις πόλεσιν 1 to other cities Jesus actually means the people who live in these cities. He is describing them by reference to something associated with them, the cities where they live. Alternate translation: “to the people in many other cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 4 43 b45z figs-activepassive ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἀπεστάλην 1 for this I was sent If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is the reason why God sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 4 44 s5mb figs-explicit τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 in Judea Since Jesus is in Galilee in this part of the Gospel of Luke, the term **Judea** here probably refers to the entire region where the Jews lived at that time. Alternate translation: “where the Jews lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 5 intro axr7 0 # Luke 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus calls Peter and his fellow fishermen to be his disciples (5:1-11)
2. Jesus travels to various towns teaching and healing (5:12-26)
3. Jesus calls Levi to be his disciple (5:27-32)
4. Jesus teaches about fasting (5:33-39)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “You will catch men”

Peter, James, and John were fishermen. When Jesus told them that they would catch men, he was using a metaphor to tell them he wanted them to help people believe the good news about him. See the last note to 5:10. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Sinners

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses. But when Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who understand that they are sinners who have disobeyed God can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fasting and feasting

People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or in order to show God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, such as during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Healthy and sick people

To correct the Pharisees, Jesus speaks of healthy people who do not need a doctor. This does not mean that there are people who do not need Jesus. Rather, Jesus was explaining why he spent time with people whom the Pharisees considered to be “sinners.” See the notes to 5:31-32. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Implicit information

In several parts of this chapter, as in other places in the book, Luke does not explain information that his original readers would already have understood. Modern readers might not know some of those things, so they might have trouble understanding all that Luke is communicating. The alternate translations in these notes and the readings in UST often illustrate how that information can be presented so that modern readers will be able to understand these passages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Past events

Parts of this chapter are sequences of events that have already happened. In a given passage, Luke sometimes writes as if the events have already happened while other events are still in progress (even though they are complete at the time he writes). This can cause difficulty in translation by creating an illogical order of events. It may be necessary to make these consistent by writing as if all the events have already happened. LUK 5 1 zc8q writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -LUK 5 1 wsf8 figs-metonymy ἀκούειν τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Here, Luke uses **word** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “listening to the message Jesus was bringing from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 5 1 wsf8 figs-metonymy ἀκούειν τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Here, Luke uses **word** to describe the things that Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “listening to the message Jesus was bringing from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 5 1 p6im translate-names τὴν λίμνην Γεννησαρέτ 1 the lake of Gennesaret **Lake of Gennesaret** is another name for the body of water also known as the Sea of Galilee. Galilee was on the west side of this lake, and the land of Gennesaret was on the east side, so it was called by both names. Some English versions translate this as the proper name of the body of water. Alternate translation: “Lake Gennesaret” or “the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 5 2 t96r figs-explicit ἔπλυνον τὰ δίκτυα 1 were washing their nets The implication is that they were cleaning their fishing nets to maintain them so that they could keep using them to catch fish. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and were washing their nets to keep them clean and in good working order” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 5 3 f7z8 ὃ ἦν Σίμωνος 1 which was Simon’s Alternate translation: “the one that belonged to Simon” @@ -746,16 +746,16 @@ LUK 5 3 rc1z figs-explicit καθίσας 1 he sat down As in [4:20](../04/20.md LUK 5 3 vbx7 ἐδίδασκεν ἐκ τοῦ πλοίου τοὺς ὄχλους 1 was teaching the crowds from the boat Jesus was in the boat a short distance from the shore and he was speaking to the people who were on the shore. Alternate translation: “and was teaching the people while he sat in the boat” LUK 5 4 rk9p figs-explicit ὡς δὲ ἐπαύσατο λαλῶν 1 when he stopped speaking The implication is that Jesus had been **speaking** in order to teach the people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Jesus had finished teaching the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 5 5 l245 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς Σίμων εἶπεν 1 answering Simon said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Simon responded to Jesus’ instructions to take the boat out and let down the nets. Alternate translation: “Simon responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -LUK 5 5 wbb1 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ δὲ τῷ ῥήματί σου 1 at your word Here Peter uses **word** figuratively to refer to what Jesus commanded him by using words. Alternate translation: “but because you have told me to do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 5 5 wbb1 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ δὲ τῷ ῥήματί σου 1 at your word Here Peter uses **word** to refer to what Jesus commanded him by using words. Alternate translation: “but because you have told me to do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 5 7 n2fp κατένευσαν τοῖς μετόχοις 1 they signaled to their partners The Greek text does not specify how they **signaled**, but since they were some distance from the shore, it may have been by waving their arms rather than by calling out. You can use a general expression here. Alternate translation: “they summoned their partners” LUK 5 7 pr7m figs-explicit βυθίζεσθαι αὐτά 1 they began to sink If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the reason for this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they began to sink because the fish were so heavy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 5 8 r8j9 translate-symaction προσέπεσεν τοῖς γόνασιν Ἰησοῦ 1 he fell down at the knees of Jesus Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Peter did not fall down accidentally. Rather, bowing or lying down in front of Jesus was a sign of humility and respect. Alternate translation: “he bowed down in front of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) LUK 5 8 j67m figs-gendernotations ἀνὴρ ἁμαρτωλός 1 a sinful man Here, **man** means “adult male,” not the more general “human being.” So Peter is not saying generally, “I am a sinful person.” He really does mean, “I personally am a sinful man.” Be sure that this is clear in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -LUK 5 9 l246 figs-personification θάμβος…περιέσχεν αὐτὸν καὶ πάντας τοὺς σὺν αὐτῷ 1 amazement had seized him and all those with him Luke describes Peter’s **amazement** figuratively as if it were something that could actively take hold of him. Alternate translation: “he and the other fishermen were completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 5 9 l246 figs-personification θάμβος…περιέσχεν αὐτὸν καὶ πάντας τοὺς σὺν αὐτῷ 1 amazement had seized him and all those with him Luke describes Peter’s **amazement** as if it were something that could actively take hold of him. Alternate translation: “he and the other fishermen were completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 5 9 c2eh figs-explicit τῇ ἄγρᾳ τῶν ἰχθύων 1 the catch of fish The implication is that this was a very large **catch**. Alternate translation: “the great number of fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 5 10 l247 translate-names Ἰάκωβον καὶ Ἰωάννην, υἱοὺς Ζεβεδαίου 1 James and John, sons of Zebedee **James** and **John** are the names of men, and **Zebedee** is the name of their father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 5 10 k4ft writing-participants κοινωνοὶ τῷ Σίμωνι 1 partners with Simon Luke provides this information to introduce these new participants in the story. Alternate translation: “who were Simon’s partners in the fishing business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -LUK 5 10 u6zs figs-metaphor ἀνθρώπους ἔσῃ ζωγρῶν 1 you will be catching men Jesus is using the image of catching fish figuratively to describe gathering people to follow him. Alternate translation: “you will gather people for me” or “you will persuade people to become my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 5 10 u6zs figs-metaphor ἀνθρώπους ἔσῃ ζωγρῶν 1 you will be catching men Jesus is using the image of catching fish to describe gathering people to follow him. Alternate translation: “you will gather people for me” or “you will persuade people to become my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 5 11 abca τὴν γῆν 1 the land Alternate translation: “the shore” LUK 5 12 j1xy writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 and it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 5 12 l248 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke uses **behold** to call the reader’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -765,14 +765,14 @@ LUK 5 12 m4k2 ἐὰν θέλῃς 1 if you are willing Alternate translation: LUK 5 12 x7ss figs-declarative δύνασαί με καθαρίσαι 1 you can make me clean The man is actually using this statement to make a request. Alternate translation: “please make me clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) LUK 5 12 ys5f figs-explicit με καθαρίσαι 1 make me clean The man talks about becoming **clean** ceremonially, but it is implicit that he has become unclean because of his leprosy, so he is really asking Jesus to heal him of this disease. Alternate translation: “heal me from leprosy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 5 13 ziz1 figs-imperative καθαρίσθητι 1 Be clean This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I heal you from your leprosy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -LUK 5 13 l48a figs-personification ἡ λέπρα ἀπῆλθεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 the leprosy went away from him Luke speaks figuratively of the man’s **leprosy** as if it were something that could actively go **away from him**. Alternate translation: “the man no longer had leprosy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 5 13 l48a figs-personification ἡ λέπρα ἀπῆλθεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 the leprosy went away from him Luke speaks of the man’s **leprosy** as if it were something that could actively go **away from him**. Alternate translation: “the man no longer had leprosy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 5 14 q18t figs-quotations αὐτὸς παρήγγειλεν αὐτῷ, μηδενὶ εἰπεῖν, ἀλλὰ ἀπελθὼν 1 he instructed him to tell no one, but, “Go” If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate all of Jesus’ instructions as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “he instructed him, ‘Do not tell anyone, but go’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) LUK 5 14 l249 figs-explicit μηδενὶ εἰπεῖν 1 to tell no one The implication is that the man is not to tell anyone that Jesus healed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation, as a direct quotation: “Do not tell anyone that you have been healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 5 14 v1wn figs-explicit προσένεγκε περὶ τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ σου καθὼς προσέταξεν Μωϋσῆς 1 offer a sacrifice for your cleansing, as Moses commanded Jesus assumes that the man will know that the law required a person who had been healed from a skin disease to make a specific sacrifice. This made the person ceremonially clean and they could participate once again in community religious activities. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “offer the sacrifice that Moses commanded so that you could become ceremonially clean once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 5 14 jk14 figs-explicit εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς 1 for a testimony to them A priest would have to examine the man and certify that he had been healed before he would be allowed to offer this sacrifice. Alternate translation: “to certify for everone that you have been healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 5 14 nz37 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 them **Them** could mean either “the priests,” which is the interpretation that UST follows, or “all the people.” You could express either as an alternate translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 5 15 ng3z figs-personification διήρχετο…μᾶλλον ὁ λόγος περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 the word about him spread even more Luke speaks figuratively of this **word** as if it were something that could spread around actively by itself. This expression means that more and more people told others about what Jesus was doing. Alternate translation: “people spread the news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LUK 5 15 q4t2 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 the word about him Luke uses the term **word** figuratively to describe the news about Jesus that people spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 5 15 ng3z figs-personification διήρχετο…μᾶλλον ὁ λόγος περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 the word about him spread even more Luke speaks of this **word** as if it were something that could spread around actively by itself. This expression means that more and more people told others about what Jesus was doing. Alternate translation: “people spread the news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 5 15 q4t2 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 the word about him Luke uses the term **word** to describe the news about Jesus that people spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the news about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 5 15 l250 figs-activepassive θεραπεύεσθαι 1 to be healed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “for Jesus to heal them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 5 16 l251 αὐτὸς…ἦν ὑποχωρῶν ἐν ταῖς ἐρήμοις καὶ προσευχόμενος 1 he was withdrawing into the deserted places and praying This expression **was withdrawing** indicates habitual action. Alternate translation: “he often withdrew to places where there were no other people so that he could pray” LUK 5 16 sv6f ταῖς ἐρήμοις 1 deserted places Alternate translation: “places where there were no other people” @@ -802,7 +802,7 @@ LUK 5 21 s21n figs-rquestion τίς δύναται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτί LUK 5 22 z4k5 figs-explicit ἐπιγνοὺς…τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς αὐτῶν 1 knowing their thoughts This phrase indicates that they were reasoning silently, so the implication is that Jesus sensed what they were thinking. Alternate translation: “sensing what they were thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 5 22 l259 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς 1 answering said to them Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to what the religious leaders were thinking. Alternate translation: “responded to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 5 22 et8f figs-rquestion τί διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν? 1 Why are you debating in your hearts? Jesus does not expect the religious leaders to explain why they are thinking these things. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize that they should not be thinking them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not be thinking these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -LUK 5 22 p2hj figs-metaphor διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 debating in your hearts The term **hearts** figuratively represents the thoughts of these people. Alternate translation: “are you thinking these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 5 22 p2hj figs-metaphor διαλογίζεσθε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 debating in your hearts The term **hearts** represents the thoughts of these people. Alternate translation: “are you thinking these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 5 23 zid2 figs-rquestion τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν, ἀφέωνταί σοι αἱ ἁμαρτίαι σου, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ περιπάτει? 1 Which is easier, to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven you,’ or to say, ‘Get up and walk?’ Jesus is using the form of a question in order to teach. He wants to make the scribes and Pharisees reflect on the situation and realize something. There are many implications. For example, these religious leaders may take the question in the sense, “Which is easier to get away with saying?” The answer would be, “Your sins are forgiven,” because people don’t expect visual proof of that, whereas if someone says, “Get up and walk,” and nothing happens, that proves the speaker doesn’t have the power to heal. Jesus likely intends the question in a different sense: “Which is the easier way to deal with a situation like this?” It appears that the man’s sickness has something to do with his sins, because Jesus forgives them. In such a situation, it would not be sufficient to say, “Get up and walk,” since that would address the effect but not the cause. To say, “Your sins are forgiven,” would deal with both the cause and the effect, so that would be the easier way to deal with the situation. There are many other implications that could also be drawn out as well—too many to include in the text of a translation. Since the question form is intrinsic to Jesus’ teaching method, you may wish simply to retain it in your translation. However, to show that he is teaching, not asking for information, you could introduce his question with a phrase that indicates its purpose. Alternate translation: “Think about this. Which is easier, to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven you,’ or to say, ‘Get up and walk'?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 5 23 l260 figs-quotesinquotes τί ἐστιν εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν, ἀφέωνταί σοι αἱ ἁμαρτίαι σου, ἢ εἰπεῖν, ἔγειρε καὶ περιπάτει? 1 Which is easier, to say, ‘Your sins are forgiven you,’ or to say, ‘Get up and walk?’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Is it easier to tell someone that his sins are forgiven, or to tell him to get up and walk?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 5 24 f1lu figs-123person ὅτι ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἐξουσίαν ἔχει 1 that the Son of Man has authority Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “that I, the Son of Man, have authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) @@ -810,9 +810,9 @@ LUK 5 24 l261 figs-explicit ὅτι ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 t LUK 5 24 l262 figs-imperative ἔγειρε 1 get up As in [5:13](../05/13.md), this was not a command that the man was able to obey. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I heal you, so you can get up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 5 25 agg3 figs-explicit καὶ παραχρῆμα ἀναστὰς 1 And immediately he got up The implication is that the man was able to get up because Jesus had healed him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “And all at once the man was healed, so he got up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 5 25 l263 ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν 1 before them Here, the term **before** means “in front of.” Alternate translation: “in front of everyone” or “where everyone could see him” -LUK 5 26 l264 figs-personification ἔκστασις ἔλαβεν ἅπαντας 1 amazement seized of them all Luke describes the **amazement** of the crowd figuratively as if it were something that could actively take hold of the people. Alternate translation: “they were all completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 5 26 l264 figs-personification ἔκστασις ἔλαβεν ἅπαντας 1 amazement seized of them all Luke describes the **amazement** of the crowd as if it were something that could actively take hold of the people. Alternate translation: “they were all completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 5 26 f6tp figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν φόβου λέγοντες 1 they were filled with fear, saying If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “fear filled them and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 5 26 l265 figs-personification ἐπλήσθησαν φόβου 1 they were filled with fear Luke describes the **fear** of the crowd figuratively as if it were something that could actively fill the people. Alternate translation: “they became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 5 26 l265 figs-personification ἐπλήσθησαν φόβου 1 they were filled with fear Luke describes the **fear** of the crowd as if it were something that could actively fill the people. Alternate translation: “they became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 5 27 k6r2 writing-newevent καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα 1 And after these things Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event. The expression **these things** refers to what the previous verses describe. Alternate translation: “After that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 5 27 abc8 writing-pronouns ἐξῆλθεν 1 he went out The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus left that house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 5 27 xf15 ἐθεάσατο τελώνην 1 saw a tax collector The Greek word that Luke uses for **saw** indicates that Jesus gave careful attention to this man when he saw him. Alternate translation: “observed a tax collector” or “looked carefully at a tax collector” @@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ LUK 5 29 ip2m translate-unknown κατακείμενοι 1 reclining to eat In t LUK 5 30 n82u writing-pronouns πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ 1 to his disciples In this case, the pronoun **his** refers to Jesus, not to Levi. Alternate translation: “to Jesus’ disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 5 30 tmm5 figs-rquestion διὰ τί μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσθίετε καὶ πίνετε? 1 Why do you eat and drink with tax collectors and sinners? The Pharisees and scribes are using the question form to express their disapproval. They believed that religious people should separate themselves from people whom they considered to be sinners. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not eat and drink with sinful tax collectors!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 5 30 pi2x figs-you ἐσθίετε καὶ πίνετε 1 you eat and drink The word **you** is plural, since the Pharisees are speaking to the disciples as a group, not to one particular disciple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -LUK 5 30 l268 figs-merism ἐσθίετε καὶ πίνετε 1 eat and drink The Pharisees are figuratively using the two components of a meal to mean an entire meal. Alternate translation: “share meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +LUK 5 30 l268 figs-merism ἐσθίετε καὶ πίνετε 1 eat and drink The Pharisees are using the two components of a meal to mean an entire meal. Alternate translation: “share meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) LUK 5 30 ze7y figs-hendiadys μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν 1 with tax collectors and sinners The Pharisees may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The previous verse says that there were many **tax collectors** at this banquet. So the term **sinners** may tell what the Pharisees thought these **tax collectors** were. Alternate translation: “with sinful tax collectors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 5 31 l269 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν 1 answering Jesus said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to what the religious leaders were complaining about. Alternate translation: “Jesus responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 5 31 t6iv writing-proverbs οὐ χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ὑγιαίνοντες ἰατροῦ, ἀλλὰ οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες 1 People who are well do not have need of a physician, but those who have sickness Jesus begins his response by quoting or creating a proverb, a short saying about something that is generally true in life. This proverb draws a figurative comparison. Just as sick people need to see a doctor to be healed, so sinners need to see Jesus in order to be forgiven and restored. But since Jesus explains the comparison in the next verse, you do not need to explain it here. Rather, you could translate the proverb itself in a way that will be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “People who are well do not need to see a doctor; people who are sick do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) @@ -837,14 +837,14 @@ LUK 5 32 l271 figs-abstractnouns εἰς μετάνοιαν 1 to repentance If i LUK 5 33 f6g6 writing-pronouns οἱ δὲ εἶπαν 1 Then they said The pronoun **they** refers to the Pharisees and scribes. Alternate translation: “Then the religious leaders said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 5 33 l272 figs-explicit Ἰωάννου 1 John The Pharisees and scribes assume that Jesus will know that they are referring to **John** the Baptist. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 5 33 l273 figs-explicit οἱ δὲ σοὶ ἐσθίουσιν καὶ πίνουσιν 1 But those of yours eat and drink There is an implied challenge and question in this observation. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “But your disciples do not fast, and we want you to tell us why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 5 33 l274 figs-merism ἐσθίουσιν καὶ πίνουσιν 1 eat and drink The Pharisees are figuratively using the two components of a meal to mean an entire meal. Alternate translation: “continue to have meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +LUK 5 33 l274 figs-merism ἐσθίουσιν καὶ πίνουσιν 1 eat and drink The Pharisees are using the two components of a meal to mean an entire meal. Alternate translation: “continue to have meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) LUK 5 34 l275 figs-doublenegatives μὴ δύνασθε τοὺς υἱοὺς τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν ποιῆσαι νηστεύειν? 1 You cannot make the sons of the bridal chamber fast while the bridegroom is with them, can you The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **are you?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Can you actually make the groom’s party at a wedding fast while the groom is still with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 5 34 hxe1 figs-rquestion μὴ δύνασθε τοὺς υἱοὺς τοῦ νυμφῶνος ἐν ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ’ αὐτῶν ἐστιν ποιῆσαι νηστεύειν? 1 You cannot make the sons of the bridal chamber fast while the bridegroom is with them, can you? Jesus is using the question form to teach. He wants the scribes and Pharisees to reflect on the actions of his disciples in light of a situation they are already familiar with. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “No one tells the groom’s party at a wedding to fast while the groom is still with them!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 5 34 q9k2 figs-idiom τοὺς υἱοὺς τοῦ νυμφῶνος 1 the sons of the bridal chamber The expression **sons of** is a Hebrew idiom that means a person shares the qualities of something. In this case, Jesus is describing people who share the quality of being an integral part of a wedding. These are the male friends who attend the groom during the ceremony and the festivities. Alternate translation: “the groom’s party” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 5 35 z8ex figs-idiom ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι καὶ 1 But the days will indeed come Here Jesus is using **days** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “But there will certainly be a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 5 35 he9p figs-metaphor ἀπαρθῇ ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ὁ νυμφίος 1 the bridegroom will be taken away from them Jesus is speaking of himself figuratively as the **bridegroom**, and of his disciples as the groom’s party. He does not explain the metaphor, so you do not need to explain it in your translation unless you think your readers will not understand it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 5 35 z8ex figs-idiom ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι καὶ 1 But the days will indeed come Here Jesus is using **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “But there will certainly be a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 5 35 he9p figs-metaphor ἀπαρθῇ ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ὁ νυμφίος 1 the bridegroom will be taken away from them Jesus is speaking of himself as the **bridegroom**, and of his disciples as the groom’s party. He does not explain the metaphor, so you do not need to explain it in your translation unless you think your readers will not understand it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 5 35 l276 figs-activepassive ἀπαρθῇ ἀπ’ αὐτῶν ὁ νυμφίος 1 the bridegroom will be taken away from them If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “someone will take the bridegroom away from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 5 35 l277 figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 in those days Jesus is again using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 5 35 l277 figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 in those days Jesus is again using the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 5 36 a4zs figs-parables ἔλεγεν δὲ καὶ παραβολὴν πρὸς αὐτοὺς 1 Then he also spoke a parable to them Jesus gives a brief illustration that teaches something true in a way that is easy to understand and remember. Alternate translation: “Then he gave them this illustration to help them understand better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) LUK 5 36 qz5e ἐπιβάλλει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον παλαιόν 1 sews it onto an old garment Alternate translation: “uses it to patch an old garment” LUK 5 36 xj2y figs-hypo εἰ δὲ μή γε 1 But if not Jesus uses this expression to introduce a hypothetical situation that explains the reason why a person would not actually mend a garment in that way. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone did do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) @@ -855,7 +855,7 @@ LUK 5 37 dw18 figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἐκχυθήσεται 1 it would LUK 5 37 l279 figs-activepassive οἱ ἀσκοὶ ἀπολοῦνται 1 the wineskins would be destroyed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the leather bags would tear and become useless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 5 38 ijm3 ἀσκοὺς καινοὺς 1 new wineskins See how you translated the term **wineskins** in [5:37](../05/37.md). Alternate translation: “fresh leather bags” LUK 5 39 l280 figs-ellipsis οὐδεὶς πιὼν παλαιὸν θέλει νέον 1 No one, after drinking the old, wants the new Jesus is leaving out some of the words. You may want to supply these words in your translation if not having them would be confusing in your language. Alternate translation: “No one who is used to drinking old wine wants to try new wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -LUK 5 39 pvn9 figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς πιὼν παλαιὸν θέλει νέον 1 No one, after drinking the old, wants the new Jesus is figuratively contrasting the old teaching of the religious leaders with his own new teaching. The point is that people who are used to the old teaching are not receptive to the new things that he is bringing. Jesus does not explain the metaphor, so you do not need to explain it in your translation unless you think your readers will not understand it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 5 39 pvn9 figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς πιὼν παλαιὸν θέλει νέον 1 No one, after drinking the old, wants the new Jesus is contrasting the old teaching of the religious leaders with his own new teaching. The point is that people who are used to the old teaching are not receptive to the new things that he is bringing. Jesus does not explain the metaphor, so you do not need to explain it in your translation unless you think your readers will not understand it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 intro vv2y 0 # Luke 6 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about the Sabbath (6:1-11)
2. Jesus chooses twelve apostles (6:12-16)
3. Jesus teaches about being his disciple (6:17-49)

The long teaching in Luke 6:20-49 begins with blessings and woes that are similar to the beginning of the long teaching in Matthew 5-7. That part of Matthew has traditionally been called the “Sermon on the Mount.” The teaching here in Luke has many other similarities with the one in Matthew’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Eating the grain”

When the disciples plucked and ate the grain in a field they were walking through on the Sabbath (Luke 6:1), the Pharisees said that they were breaking the law of Moses. The Pharisees said this because they thought that the disciples were doing work by picking the grain, and so they were disobeying God’s command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees did not think the disciples were stealing. That is because the law of Moses told farmers to allow travelers to pluck and eat small amounts of grain from plants in fields that they traveled through or near. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

The man whom Luke calls Judas the son of James is probably the same man whom Matthew and Mark call Thaddaeus. However, you do not need to explain that in your translation or give both names. You can translate Luke’s list as he wrote it, and allow Bible teachers to explain the reason for the difference. LUK 6 1 c4sa writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 6 1 x5zk translate-unknown σπορίμων 1 the grainfields These were large sections of land where people had scattered wheat seed in order to grow more wheat. Wheat is a kind of **grain** plant, and **grain** is a type of large grass that has edible seeds. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of plant, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “the areas where people were growing plants with edible seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -867,12 +867,12 @@ LUK 6 2 dum1 figs-you τί ποιεῖτε 1 Why are you doing Here, **you** is LUK 6 3 l281 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς πρὸς αὐτοὺς εἶπεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 answering them, Jesus said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to the objection that the Pharisees raised. Alternate translation: “Jesus responded to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 6 3 vih6 figs-rquestion οὐδὲ τοῦτο ἀνέγνωτε, ὃ ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ ὅτε ἐπείνασεν αὐτὸς, καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ ὄντες 1 Have you not read this, what David did when he was hungry, he and those who were with him Jesus does not expect the Pharisees to tell him whether they have read this passage in the Scriptures. Instead, he is using the question form to emphasize that the Pharisees should have learned a principle from that passage that indicates that they are wrong to criticize the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The Scriptures suggest otherwise, in the passage that tells what David did when he and those who were with him were hungry.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 6 4 l282 ὡς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 how he entered into the house of God If you made the first part of the quotation in [6:3](../06/03.md) a separate sentence, begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He entered into the house of God” -LUK 6 4 l283 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the house of God Jesus is figuratively describing the tabernacle as the **house of God**. He is speaking as if it were the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 6 4 l283 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the house of God Jesus is describing the tabernacle as the **house of God**. He is speaking as if it were the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 4 yyh2 translate-unknown τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως 1 the bread of the presence The phrase **the bread of the presence** refers to loaves of bread that were placed on a table in the temple as an offering to God. They represented how the people of Israel lived in the **presence** of God. Alternate translation: “the bread that was offered to God” or “the bread that showed God lived among the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 6 4 l284 οὓς οὐκ ἔξεστιν φαγεῖν, εἰ μὴ μόνους τοὺς ἱερεῖς 1 which is not lawful to eat, except only for the priests It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The law says that only the priests can eat that bread” LUK 6 5 h453 figs-123person ἐστιν…ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man is Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah, am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 6 5 l285 figs-explicit ἐστιν…ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man is See how you translated this title in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah, am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 6 5 xy9h figs-metaphor Κύριός ἐστιν τοῦ Σαββάτου 1 is Lord of the Sabbath The title **Lord** figuratively describes Jesus’ authority over the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “has authority over the Sabbath” or, if you translated in the first person, “have authority over the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 6 5 xy9h figs-metaphor Κύριός ἐστιν τοῦ Σαββάτου 1 is Lord of the Sabbath The title **Lord** describes Jesus’ authority over the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “has authority over the Sabbath” or, if you translated in the first person, “have authority over the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 6 p1ee writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 6 6 d44q writing-participants ἦν ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖ 1 there was a man there This expression introduces a new character into the story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 6 6 t77y translate-unknown ἡ χεὶρ αὐτοῦ ἡ δεξιὰ ἦν ξηρά 1 his right hand was withered This means that the man’s **hand** was damaged in such a way that he could not stretch it out. It was probably bent almost into a fist, making it look smaller. Alternate translation: “his right hand was shriveled” or “his right hand was atrophied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -886,10 +886,10 @@ LUK 6 10 abcb writing-pronouns περιβλεψάμενος πάντας αὐτ LUK 6 10 x77k figs-imperative ἔκτεινον τὴν χεῖρά σου 1 Stretch out your hand This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I heal you, so you can stretch out your hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 6 10 hce1 figs-activepassive ἀποκατεστάθη ἡ χεὶρ αὐτοῦ 1 his hand was restored If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his hand became healthy again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 6 11 l286 figs-activepassive αὐτοὶ…ἐπλήσθησαν ἀνοίας 1 they were filled with rage If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they became furious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 6 11 l287 figs-personification αὐτοὶ…ἐπλήσθησαν ἀνοίας 1 they were filled with rage Luke speaks figuratively of the **rage** of the scribes and Pharisees as if it were something that could actively fill them. Alternate translation: “they became furious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 6 11 l287 figs-personification αὐτοὶ…ἐπλήσθησαν ἀνοίας 1 they were filled with rage Luke speaks of the **rage** of the scribes and Pharisees as if it were something that could actively fill them. Alternate translation: “they became furious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 6 11 l288 figs-explicit τί ἂν ποιήσαιεν τῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 what they might do to Jesus The implication is that these religious leaders perceived Jesus as a threat and they wanted to get rid of him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 6 12 e4s7 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -LUK 6 12 gzn1 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Here Luke uses the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 6 12 gzn1 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Here Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 6 12 l289 ἐξελθεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ ὄρος 1 he went out to the mountain While the term **mountain** is definite here, it does not seem to refer to a specific, identifiable mountain. Rather, as many languages do, here the Greek is using a definite expression in a general sense. Alternate translation: “Jesus went up a mountain” or “Jesus climbed a high hill” LUK 6 12 l7by figs-explicit ἐξελθεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ ὄρος 1 he went out to the mountain The implication is that Jesus did this so that he could be alone and pray about whom to choose as his disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus went up a mountain where he could be alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 6 13 vep8 ὅτε ἐγένετο ἡμέρα 1 when day came Alternate translation: “the next morning” @@ -908,7 +908,7 @@ LUK 6 17 l295 figs-hyperbole ἀπὸ πάσης 1 from all This is a generaliza LUK 6 18 dpj5 figs-activepassive ἰαθῆναι 1 to be healed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “for Jesus to heal them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 6 18 wfm9 figs-activepassive καὶ οἱ ἐνοχλούμενοι ἀπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων ἐθεραπεύοντο 1 And those who were troubled by unclean spirits were being healed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “Jesus also drove evil spirits out of the people they were controlling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 6 19 l296 figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος…πάντας 1 the whole crowd … everyone In this case these terms are not generalizations, and so you can translate them directly, rather than with explanatory words such as “most” or “many.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -LUK 6 19 y2cl figs-personification δύναμις παρ’ αὐτοῦ ἐξήρχετο καὶ ἰᾶτο πάντας 1 power was coming out from him and healing everyone Luke speaks figuratively of this **power** as if it were something that could actively come out of Jesus and heal people. Alternate translation: “Jesus was using the power that God gave him to heal everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 6 19 y2cl figs-personification δύναμις παρ’ αὐτοῦ ἐξήρχετο καὶ ἰᾶτο πάντας 1 power was coming out from him and healing everyone Luke speaks of this **power** as if it were something that could actively come out of Jesus and heal people. Alternate translation: “Jesus was using the power that God gave him to heal everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 6 20 l297 figs-idiom αὐτὸς ἐπάρας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 he lifted up his eyes This is an idiom that means “he looked,” but it means that he looked carefully and considerately. Alternate translation: “he gazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 6 20 ymg7 figs-idiom μακάριοι 1 Blessed are This expression indicates that God is giving favor to people and that their situation is positive or good. Alternate translation: “God will bless” or “How good it is for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 6 20 xj9v figs-nominaladj οἱ πτωχοί 1 the poor Jesus is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” or “you who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -917,29 +917,29 @@ LUK 6 20 k34r ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεο LUK 6 21 l344 figs-idiom μακάριοι οἱ πεινῶντες νῦν 1 Blessed are those who are hungry now As in [6:20](../06/20.md), the expression **blessed** indicates that God is giving favor to people or that their situation is positive or good. Alternate translation: “You who are hungry now receive God’s favor” or “You who are hungry now are in a positive situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 6 21 l298 figs-activepassive χορτασθήσεσθε 1 you will be filled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you will get enough to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 6 21 l299 figs-idiom μακάριοι οἱ κλαίοντες νῦν 1 Blessed are those who are weeping now Alternate translation: “You who are weeping now receive God’s favor” or “You who are weeping now are in a positive situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 6 21 tg8m figs-metonymy γελάσετε 1 you will laugh Jesus is figuratively describing people being happy by association with one thing that people do when they are happy. Alternate translation: “you will laugh with joy” or “you will become joyful again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 6 21 tg8m figs-metonymy γελάσετε 1 you will laugh Jesus is describing people being happy by association with one thing that people do when they are happy. Alternate translation: “you will laugh with joy” or “you will become joyful again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 6 22 h8ii figs-idiom μακάριοί ἐστε 1 Blessed are you As in [6:20](../06/20.md), the expression **blessed** indicates that God is giving favor to people or that their situation is positive or good. Alternate translation: “You receive God’s favor” or “How good it is for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 6 22 r5cg ἀφορίσωσιν ὑμᾶς 1 exclude you Alternate translation: “they reject you” LUK 6 22 l300 figs-metonymy ἐκβάλωσιν τὸ ὄνομα ὑμῶν ὡς πονηρὸν 1 reject your name as evil The term **name** is a figurative way of referring to the reputation of a person. Alternate translation: “consider you to have a bad reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 6 22 jz7x ἕνεκα τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 because of the Son of Man Alternate translation: “because you associate with the Son of Man” or “because they reject the Son of Man” LUK 6 22 l301 figs-123person ἕνεκα τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 because of the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person, using this title to emphasize the special role that God has given him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “because you associate with me, the Son of Man” or “because they reject me, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 6 22 l302 figs-explicit ἕνεκα τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 because of the Son of Man See how you translated this title in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “because you associate with me, the Messiah” or “because they reject me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 6 23 bw14 figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 in that day Here Jesus uses **day** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “when they do those things” or “when that happens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 6 23 bw14 figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 in that day Here Jesus uses **day** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “when they do those things” or “when that happens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 6 23 d97t figs-idiom σκιρτήσατε 1 leap for joy This is an idiom that means to be extremely joyful. Jesus is not telling the disciples literally to jump into the air. Alternate translation: “be very happy” or “celebrate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 6 23 l303 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ γὰρ 1 for behold Jesus uses the term **behold** to get his disciples to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “because, listen carefully now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 23 e3kb ὁ μισθὸς ὑμῶν πολὺς 1 your reward is great Your language may require you to say who will do this action. Alternate translation: “God will reward you greatly” -LUK 6 23 l304 figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες αὐτῶν 1 their fathers Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “their ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 6 23 l304 figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες αὐτῶν 1 their fathers Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “their ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 24 c6lu figs-idiom οὐαὶ ὑμῖν 1 woe to you The phrase **woe to you** is the opposite of “blessed are you.” It indicates that bad things are going to happen to the people being addressed, because they have displeased God. Alternate translation: “how terrible it is for you” or “trouble will come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 6 24 v1bp figs-nominaladj τοῖς πλουσίοις 1 the rich Jesus is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 6 24 cs2e figs-explicit ἀπέχετε τὴν παράκλησιν ὑμῶν 1 you have received your comfort Jesus is drawing a series of contrasts between what the poor and the rich have now and what they will have later. So the implication is that while the rich have enjoyed ease and prosperity in this life, if they become complacent in those things, they will not enjoy it afterwards. Alternate translation: “you have already received in this life anything that will make you comfortable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 6 25 l305 figs-idiom οὐαὶ ὑμῖν 1 woe to you See how you translated this phrase in [6:24](../06/24.md). Alternate translation: “How terrible it is for you” or “Trouble will come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 6 25 de8m figs-activepassive οἱ ἐμπεπλησμένοι 1 who are filled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “who have more than enough to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 6 25 l8nr figs-metonymy οἱ γελῶντες 1 who are laughing **Laughing** refers figuratively to being happy by association with something that people do when they are happy. Alternate translation: “to the ones who are happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 6 25 l8nr figs-metonymy οἱ γελῶντες 1 who are laughing **Laughing** refers to being happy by association with something that people do when they are happy. Alternate translation: “to the ones who are happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 6 25 l306 figs-hendiadys πενθήσετε καὶ κλαύσετε 1 mourn and weep The phrase **mourn and weep** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **mourn** tells why these people are weeping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “you will weep mournfully” or “you will weep because you are so sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 6 26 tn96 figs-idiom οὐαὶ 1 woe to you See how you translated this phrase in [6:24](../06/24.md). Alternate translation: “How terrible it is for you” or “Trouble will come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 6 26 j9yy figs-gendernotations ὅταν ὑμᾶς καλῶς εἴπωσιν πάντες οἱ ἄνθρωποι 1 when all men speak well of you Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “when all people speak well of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 6 26 l307 figs-hyperbole ὅταν ὑμᾶς καλῶς εἴπωσιν πάντες οἱ ἄνθρωποι 1 when all men speak well of you The term **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “when most people speak well of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -LUK 6 26 y29d figs-metaphor κατὰ τὰ αὐτὰ…ἐποίουν τοῖς ψευδοπροφήταις οἱ πατέρες αὐτῶν 1 their fathers did according to the same things to the false prophets Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “their ancestors also spoke well of the false prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 6 26 y29d figs-metaphor κατὰ τὰ αὐτὰ…ἐποίουν τοῖς ψευδοπροφήταις οἱ πατέρες αὐτῶν 1 their fathers did according to the same things to the false prophets Here, **fathers** means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “their ancestors also spoke well of the false prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 27 l5rz writing-participants ἀλλὰ ὑμῖν λέγω τοῖς ἀκούουσιν 1 But I say to you who are listening Jesus uses this phrase to broaden his audience to the entire crowd, beyond his disciples. At the same time, the phrase also calls everyone to focus their attention on what Jesus is about to say. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Now I want all of you to listen carefully to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 6 27 pz5r figs-parallelism ἀγαπᾶτε τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ὑμῶν, καλῶς ποιεῖτε τοῖς μισοῦσιν ὑμᾶς 1 love your enemies and do good to those who hate you These two phrases mean similar things. Jesus is using repetition to emphasize the importance of what he is saying. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The second phrase specifies in what way followers of Jesus are to **love** their enemies. They are to do this in a practical way by helping them. Alternate translation: “do good things for people even if they are hostile to you” or “show love to your enemies who hate you by doing things to help them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) LUK 6 28 c83m figs-parallelism εὐλογεῖτε τοὺς καταρωμένους ὑμᾶς, προσεύχεσθε περὶ τῶν ἐπηρεαζόντων ὑμᾶς 1 Bless those who curse you and pray for those who mistreat you These two phrases mean similar things. Jesus is using repetition to emphasize the importance of what he is saying. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that would be confusing for your readers. Instead, you could combine them into a single phrase. However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The second phrase specifies one way in which followers of Jesus can **bless** people who mistreat them. They can pray for them. Alternate translation: “Ask God to bless people who say and do bad things to you” or “Say good things to people who say bad things to you, and even if someone treats you badly, pray that God will help them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -973,7 +973,7 @@ LUK 6 37 e8fb figs-activepassive οὐ μὴ κριθῆτε 1 you will certainl LUK 6 37 vkl8 καὶ μὴ καταδικάζετε 1 do not condemn Your language may require you to specify the object of **condemn**. Alternate translation: “Do not condemn other people” LUK 6 37 gz37 figs-activepassive οὐ μὴ καταδικασθῆτε 1 you will certainly not be condemned If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Jesus does not say exactly who would not condemn. This could mean: (1) “God will not condemn you.” (2) “other people will not condemn you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 6 37 l319 ἀπολύετε 1 Forgive Your language may require you to specify the object of **release**. Alternate translation: “Forgive other people” -LUK 6 37 ls01 figs-metaphor ἀπολύετε 1 Release Jesus is using the word **release** figuratively to mean “forgive.” Alternate translation: “Forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 6 37 ls01 figs-metaphor ἀπολύετε 1 Release Jesus is using the word **release** to mean “forgive.” Alternate translation: “Forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 37 a22w figs-activepassive ἀπολυθήσεσθε 1 you will be released Jesus does not say exactly who would **release**. This could mean: (1) “God will forgive you.” (2) “other people will forgive you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 6 38 ryf8 figs-activepassive δοθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 it will be given to you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Jesus does not say exactly who will give. This could mean: (1) “God will give to you.” (2) “other people will give to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 6 38 q8sq figs-metaphor μέτρον καλὸν, πεπιεσμένον σεσαλευμένον ὑπερεκχυννόμενον, δώσουσιν εἰς τὸν κόλπον ὑμῶν 1 a good measure—pressed down, shaken together, spilling over—they will pour into your lap Jesus is comparing someone to a grain merchant who measures out very generously. He could mean either God or other people. The word **they** is indefinite, so it does not necessarily refer to people rather than to God. You could represent this metaphor as a simile in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Like a generous grain merchant who presses down the grain and shakes it together and pours in so much that it fills a container and spills over, God will give you a generous amount” or “Like a generous grain merchant who presses down the grain and shakes it together and pours in so much that it fills a container and spills over, people will give you a generous amount” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -984,7 +984,7 @@ LUK 6 39 bw7f figs-parables εἶπεν δὲ καὶ παραβολὴν αὐ LUK 6 39 l322 figs-gendernotations μήτι δύναται τυφλὸς τυφλὸν ὁδηγεῖν? 1 A blind man is not able to guide a blind man, is he? Here the word translated **blind man** is masculine, but Jesus is using it in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “Can one person who is blind guide another person who is blind?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 6 39 l323 figs-doublenegatives μήτι δύναται τυφλὸς τυφλὸν ὁδηγεῖν? 1 A blind man is not able to guide a blind man, is he? The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **is he?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Can one person who is blind really guide another person who is blind?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 6 39 kyt1 figs-rquestion μήτι δύναται τυφλὸς τυφλὸν ὁδηγεῖν? 1 A blind man is not able to guide a blind man, is he? Jesus is not expecting the people in the crowd to tell him whether one **blind** person can guide another. He is using the question form as a teaching tool to make a point and get his listeners to reflect on it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “We all know that one blind person cannot guide another blind person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -LUK 6 39 nm4v figs-metaphor τυφλὸς 1 blind man The **blind** person figuratively represents someone who has not yet been fully trained and taught as a disciple. But since Jesus explains this figure in the next three verses, you do not need to explain it explicitly here in your own translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 6 39 nm4v figs-metaphor τυφλὸς 1 blind man The **blind** person represents someone who has not yet been fully trained and taught as a disciple. But since Jesus explains this figure in the next three verses, you do not need to explain it explicitly here in your own translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 39 f4xj figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἀμφότεροι εἰς βόθυνον ἐμπεσοῦνται? 1 Would not both fall into a pit? Jesus is using this question as well as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “Both of them would certainly fall into a ditch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 6 40 ipr9 figs-metaphor οὐκ ἔστιν μαθητὴς ὑπὲρ τὸν διδάσκαλον 1 A disciple is not above his teacher The word **above** creates a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “A disciple is not better than his teacher” or “A disciple is not greater than his teacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 40 l324 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν μαθητὴς ὑπὲρ τὸν διδάσκαλον 1 A disciple is not above his teacher If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state what this implicitly means. Alternate translation: “A disciple does not know more than his teacher” or “A disciple is not wiser than his teacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -993,14 +993,14 @@ LUK 6 41 l7vj figs-rquestion τί…βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐ LUK 6 41 jpt3 figs-metaphor τί…βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου 1 why do you look at the speck of wood that is in the eye of your brother This is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “you should not criticize the less important faults of a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 41 l325 figs-youcrowd βλέπεις…σου…τῷ ἰδίῳ…οὐ κατανοεῖς 1 you look … your … you do not notice … your own Even though Jesus is still speaking to his disciples and the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation here, so **you** and **your** are singular in this verse. But if the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) LUK 6 41 j1r5 translate-unknown τὸ κάρφος 1 the speck of wood If your readers would not be familiar with **wood**, in your translation you could use a phrase that describes the smallest thing that commonly falls into a person’s eyes in your culture, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the grain of sand” or “the tiny object” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 6 41 ud6q figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου 1 of your brother The term **brother** figuratively refers to a fellow believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “of a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 6 41 ud6q figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου 1 of your brother The term **brother** refers to a fellow believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “of a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 41 l326 figs-gendernotations τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ 1 your brother This fellow believer could be either a man or a woman, so be sure that this is clear in your translation, for example, by using both the masculine and feminine forms of the word for “believer.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 6 41 ssu3 figs-metaphor τὴν δὲ δοκὸν τὴν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ὀφθαλμῷ οὐ κατανοεῖς 1 but you do not notice the log that is in your own eye This phrase is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “while ignoring your own serious faults” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 41 l327 figs-hyperbole τὴν…δοκὸν τὴν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ὀφθαλμῷ 1 the log that is in your own eye A log could not literally go into a person’s eye. Jesus is exaggerating to emphasize his point and make it memorable. Alternate translation: “your own serious faults” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 6 41 h9a4 translate-unknown δοκὸν 1 the log You could translate this with the term for the kind of long, large piece of **wood** that people in your culture would encounter. Or if your readers would not be familiar with **wood**, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “beam” or “plank” or “large object” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 6 42 l345 figs-youcrowd πῶς δύνασαι λέγειν τῷ ἀδελφῷ σου 1 How can you say to your brother Jesus is speaking to his disciples and the crowd, but he is addressing an individual situation, so **you** and **your** are singular here. (The terms **you**, **your**, and **yourself** are also singular throughout the rest of this verse, because either Jesus is addressing an individual situation, or one person is addressing another in fictional dialogue.) If the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) LUK 6 42 rkk6 figs-rquestion πῶς δύνασαι λέγειν 1 How can you say Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool, not to ask for information. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -LUK 6 42 l346 figs-metaphor τῷ ἀδελφῷ σου, ἀδελφέ, ἄφες 1 to your brother, ‘Brother, let me’ The term **brother** figuratively means a fellow believer in Jesus. So in its first instance here, you could translate the term the way you did in [6:41](../06/41.md). But since it is realistic that in dialogue one believer might address another believer as **Brother** or “Sister,” you could retain the figurative term in its second instance. Alternate translation: “to a fellow believer, ‘Brother,’ or ‘Sister, let’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 6 42 l346 figs-metaphor τῷ ἀδελφῷ σου, ἀδελφέ, ἄφες 1 to your brother, ‘Brother, let me’ The term **brother** means a fellow believer in Jesus. So in its first instance here, you could translate the term the way you did in [6:41](../06/41.md). But since it is realistic that in dialogue one believer might address another believer as **Brother** or “Sister,” you could retain the figurative term in its second instance. Alternate translation: “to a fellow believer, ‘Brother,’ or ‘Sister, let’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 42 l328 figs-metaphor ἄφες ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ σου 1 let me take out the speck of wood that is in your eye This is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “let me help you correct some of your faults” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 42 l329 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς τὴν ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ σοῦ δοκὸν οὐ βλέπων 1 you yourself do not see the log that is in your own eye This phrase is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “you yourself are not correcting your own serious faults” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 42 l330 figs-hyperbole τὴν ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ σοῦ δοκὸν 1 the log that is in your own eye A log could not literally go into a person’s eye. Jesus is continuing to exaggerate to emphasize his point and make it memorable. Alternate translation: “your own serious faults” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -1015,16 +1015,16 @@ LUK 6 44 l336 figs-parallelism οὐ γὰρ ἐξ ἀκανθῶν συλλέγ LUK 6 44 ns81 translate-unknown ἀκανθῶν 1 a thornbush The word **thornbush** refers to a kind of plant that has sharp protective spines on its stem. If your readers would not know what a **thornbush** is, in your translation you could use the name of another plant that does not produce edible fruit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 6 44 ux87 translate-unknown βάτου 1 a briar bush The term **briar bush** refers to a kind of plant that has thorny stems growing in dense clusters. If your readers would not know what a **briar bush** is, in your translation you could use the name of another plant that does not produce edible fruit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 6 45 fd19 figs-gendernotations ὁ ἀγαθὸς ἄνθρωπος 1 The good man Here, the word **man** refers to any person, male or female. Alternate translation: “A righteous person” or “A moral person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -LUK 6 45 kz5k figs-metaphor ἐκ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ θησαυροῦ τῆς καρδίας 1 from the good treasure of his heart Jesus is speaking figuratively of the good thoughts of a righteous person as if they were treasures stored deep inside that person. Alternate translation: “from the good things that he keeps deep inside himself” or “from the good things that he values deeply” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 6 45 i93l figs-metaphor τῆς καρδίας 1 of his heart In this expression, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “that he keeps deep inside himself” or “that he values deeply” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 6 45 kz5k figs-metaphor ἐκ τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ θησαυροῦ τῆς καρδίας 1 from the good treasure of his heart Jesus is speaking of the good thoughts of a righteous person as if they were treasures stored deep inside that person. Alternate translation: “from the good things that he keeps deep inside himself” or “from the good things that he values deeply” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 6 45 i93l figs-metaphor τῆς καρδίας 1 of his heart In this expression, the **heart** represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “that he keeps deep inside himself” or “that he values deeply” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 45 gpn9 figs-metaphor προφέρει τὸ ἀγαθόν 1 produces what is good Producing what is good, the way a tree would produce fruit, is a metaphor for doing what is good. Alternate translation: “does what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 45 l337 figs-ellipsis ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 from evil For rhetorical purposes, Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. The meaning can be inferred from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “from the evil treasure of his heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -LUK 6 45 y2cj figs-metaphor ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 from evil Once the meaning is inferred, it is clear that Jesus is speaking figuratively of the evil thoughts of a wicked person as if they were treasures stored deep inside that person, and of the **heart** figuratively to represent the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “from the evil things that he keeps deep inside himself” or “from the evil things that he values deeply” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 6 45 l338 figs-metaphor ἐκ…περισσεύματος καρδίας λαλεῖ τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 3 out of the abundance of the heart his mouth speaks In this expression as well, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “what a person is thinking and feeling is expressed in what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 6 45 y2cj figs-metaphor ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 from evil Once the meaning is inferred, it is clear that Jesus is speaking of the evil thoughts of a wicked person as if they were treasures stored deep inside that person, and of the **heart** to represent the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “from the evil things that he keeps deep inside himself” or “from the evil things that he values deeply” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 6 45 l338 figs-metaphor ἐκ…περισσεύματος καρδίας λαλεῖ τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 3 out of the abundance of the heart his mouth speaks In this expression as well, the **heart** represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “what a person is thinking and feeling is expressed in what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 6 45 jc6z figs-synecdoche ἐκ…περισσεύματος καρδίας λαλεῖ τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 3 out of the abundance of the heart his mouth speaks The phrase **his mouth** represents the person as a whole, in the action of speaking. Alternate translation: “what a person is thinking and feeling comes out in what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 6 46 a4av τί δέ με καλεῖτε Κύριε, Κύριε, καὶ οὐ ποιεῖτε ἃ λέγω? 1 And why do you call me, ‘Lord, Lord,’ but not do what I say? The repetition of these words indicates that these people regularly called Jesus **Lord**. Alternate translation: “And why are you always calling me ‘Lord’ when you do not do what I tell you?’” LUK 6 47 wwu5 πᾶς ὁ ἐρχόμενος πρός με, καὶ ἀκούων μου τῶν λόγων καὶ ποιῶν αὐτούς, ὑποδείξω ὑμῖν τίνι ἐστὶν ὅμοιος 1 Everyone who is coming to me and hearing my words, and doing them, I will show you what he is like If it would be helpful in your language, you could move the last phrase to the beginning of the verse. Alternate translation: “I will tell you what every person is like who comes to me and hears my words and puts them into practice” -LUK 6 47 l339 figs-metonymy μου τῶν λόγων 1 my words Jesus uses the term **words** figuratively to refer to the teachings he is giving by using words. Alternate translation: “my teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 6 47 l339 figs-metonymy μου τῶν λόγων 1 my words Jesus uses the term **words** to refer to the teachings he is giving by using words. Alternate translation: “my teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 6 47 i3tg figs-simile ὑποδείξω ὑμῖν τίνι ἐστὶν ὅμοιος 1 I will show you what he is like Jesus says this to introduce the simile in the next verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) LUK 6 48 l340 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπῳ οἰκοδομοῦντι οἰκίαν 1 a man building a house Here Jesus is using **man** in the generic sense. Alternate translation: “a person building a house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 6 48 cw41 translate-unknown ἔσκαψεν καὶ ἐβάθυνεν καὶ ἔθηκεν θεμέλιον ἐπὶ τὴν πέτραν 1 dug down and dug deep and laid a foundation on the rock The **foundation** is the part of a **house** that connects it to the ground. People in Jesus’ time dug down into the ground until they reached a layer of solid **rock**, and then they began to build **on the rock**. You could describe this more fully in your translation. Alternatively, if the people of your culture would not be familiar with laying the **foundation** of a **house** on bedrock, you could instead describe how they would ensure that a dwelling was safe and stable. Alternate translation: “dug down deep enough to reach a layer of solid rock and set the foundation of the house on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1032,7 +1032,7 @@ LUK 6 48 l341 figs-hendiadys ἔσκαψεν καὶ ἐβάθυνεν 1 dug dow LUK 6 48 dp2a translate-unknown τὴν πέτραν 1 the rock This means the layer of hard **rock** that lies deep under the soil. Alternate translation: “bedrock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 6 48 qc2z ποταμὸς 1 torrent of water Alternate translation: “floodwaters” LUK 6 48 d3gs προσέρηξεν 1 flowed against Alternate translation: “crashed against” -LUK 6 48 h75u figs-metonymy οὐκ ἴσχυσεν σαλεῦσαι αὐτὴν 1 could not shake it Jesus is figuratively describing what the waters would do at first to represent what they would ultimately do if they could. This meaning is clear from what he says in the next verse. Alternate translation: “it could not destroy it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 6 48 h75u figs-metonymy οὐκ ἴσχυσεν σαλεῦσαι αὐτὴν 1 could not shake it Jesus is describing what the waters would do at first to represent what they would ultimately do if they could. This meaning is clear from what he says in the next verse. Alternate translation: “it could not destroy it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 6 48 tu5j figs-activepassive διὰ τὸ καλῶς οἰκοδομῆσθαι αὐτήν 1 because it had been built well If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “because the person had built it well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 6 49 sjf5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But Jesus uses this word to draw a strong contrast to the previous person who built with a foundation. Alternate translation: “However” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) LUK 6 49 l347 figs-ellipsis ὁ…ἀκούσας καὶ μὴ ποιήσας 1 the one who hears and does not do Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from [6:47](../06/47.md). Alternate translation: “anyone who hears my teachings but does not put them into practice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -1043,7 +1043,7 @@ LUK 6 49 bs8c ᾗ προσέρρηξεν ὁ ποταμός 1 against which the LUK 6 49 q98t συνέπεσεν 1 collapsed Alternate translation: “it fell down” or “it came apart” LUK 6 49 jm86 ἐγένετο τὸ ῥῆγμα τῆς οἰκίας ἐκείνης μέγα 1 the ruin of that house was great Your language may require you to say what was responsible for the **ruin** of the **house**. Alternate translation: “the floodwaters completely demolished that house” LUK 7 intro u8gj 0 # Luke 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus does miracles in Capernaum and Nain (7:1-17)
2. Jesus responds to messengers from John the Baptist and then teaches about John (7:18-35)
3. A woman anoints Jesus with perfume (7:36-50)

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. ULT does this with the quoted material in 7:27.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Centurion

A centurion was a Roman military commander. The centurion who asked Jesus to heal his slave (Luke 7:2) was doing some unusual things. A Roman soldier, especially an officer, would almost never go to a Jew for help, and most wealthy people did not love or care for their slaves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/centurion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### John’s Baptism

This chapter refers again to the baptism of John (7:29). John baptized people who wanted to show that they knew they were sinners and that they were sorry for their sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### “Sinners”

In 7:34, Jesus describes how the Pharisees said he was a friend of “sinners.” That was the name that the Pharisees used for people whom they thought were disobeying the law of Moses. In reality, it was the Pharisees who were sinful, since they rejected Jesus, the Savior whom God had sent. This situation can be understood as irony. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Washing feet

The feet of the people in the ancient Near East were very dirty because they wore sandals and the roads and trails were dusty in the dry season and muddy in the wet season. Only slaves washed other people’s feet. The woman who washed Jesus’ feet was showing him great honor. -LUK 7 1 l343 figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα αὐτοῦ 1 his words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. Alternate translation: “his teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 7 1 l343 figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα αὐτοῦ 1 his words Luke is using the term **words** to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. Alternate translation: “his teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 7 1 zi6w figs-idiom εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς τοῦ λαοῦ 1 in the hearing of the people This phrase is an idiom. Alternate translation: “as the people were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 7 1 l2zp writing-newevent εἰσῆλθεν εἰς Καφαρναούμ 1 he entered into Capernaum This reference to a location, **Capernaum**, introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “he went into the city of Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 7 2 l348 grammar-connect-time-background δέ 1 And Luke uses the word **and** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) @@ -1054,7 +1054,7 @@ LUK 7 4 y6vt writing-pronouns ἄξιός ἐστιν 1 He is worthy Here the pr LUK 7 5 cny7 figs-exclusive τὸ ἔθνος ἡμῶν 1 our nation Here, **our nation** refers to the Jewish people. Since the elders are speaking to Jesus as a fellow Jew, the word **our** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. Alternate translation: “our people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) LUK 7 6 l350 grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 And Here, **and** could mean: (1) Jesus went with the elders because they pleaded with him. Alternate translation, as in UST: “So” (2) Jesus went with the elders after they pleaded with him. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 7 6 s5xg ἐπορεύετο 1 went on his way Alternate translation: “went along” -LUK 7 6 el4w figs-litotes αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας 1 when he was … not far away from the house Luke is expressing a positive meaning figuratively by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “when he was … near the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +LUK 7 6 el4w figs-litotes αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας 1 when he was … not far away from the house Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “when he was … near the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) LUK 7 6 i6kv μὴ σκύλλου 1 do not trouble yourself The centurion is speaking politely to Jesus through these friends. Alternate translation: “I do not want to make you go out of your way” LUK 7 6 ez29 figs-idiom ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην μου εἰσέλθῃς 1 that you would come under my roof **Come under my roof** is an idiom that means “come into my house.” If your language has an idiom that means “come into my dwelling,” consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 7 7 m9ue figs-metonymy εἰπὲ λόγῳ 1 speak with a word The centurion recognized that Jesus could heal the servant just by speaking. He understood Jesus did not need to travel all the way to his home. The term **word** expresses the means by which Jesus would speak. Alternate translation: “just give a command” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1069,7 +1069,7 @@ LUK 7 9 l351 figs-metonymy οὐδὲ ἐν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 not even in I LUK 7 9 l352 figs-idiom τοσαύτην πίστιν εὗρον 1 have I found such faith Here, **found** is an idiom. The word does not suggest that Jesus was searching for something he had lost. Alternate translation: “have I encountered such faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 7 10 g4ny figs-activepassive οἱ πεμφθέντες 1 those who had been sent If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “the friends whom the Roman officer had sent to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 7 11 l353 writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -LUK 7 11 l354 figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ἑξῆς 1 on the next day Luke may be using the term **day** figuratively to refer a particular time, as UST suggests by saying “soon after that.” However, this could also mean literally **the next day**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 7 11 l354 figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ἑξῆς 1 on the next day Luke may be using the term **day** to refer a particular time, as UST suggests by saying “soon after that.” However, this could also mean literally **the next day**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 7 11 dmz7 translate-names Ναΐν 1 Nain **Nain** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 7 12 l355 writing-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses **and** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 7 12 l356 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke uses the term **behold** to call the reader’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1084,11 +1084,11 @@ LUK 7 14 quy9 translate-unknown τῆς σοροῦ 1 the bier This was a stretc LUK 7 14 lex4 figs-imperative ἐγέρθητι 1 arise This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be raised from the dead. Alternate translation: “your life is restored, so get up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 7 15 er34 ὁ νεκρὸς 1 the dead man The man was not still dead. He was now alive. It may be helpful to state this clearly. Alternate translation: “he man had come back to life, so he was no longer dead” LUK 7 15 l360 writing-pronouns ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν τῇ μητρὶ αὐτοῦ 1 he gave him to his mother The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, and **him** and **his** refer to the young man. Alternate translation: “Jesus returned the young man to his mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 7 16 rf1k figs-personification ἔλαβεν…φόβος πάντας 1 fear seized all of them Luke speaks of this **fear** figuratively as if it were something that could actively take hold of everyone in the crowd. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 7 16 rf1k figs-personification ἔλαβεν…φόβος πάντας 1 fear seized all of them Luke speaks of this **fear** as if it were something that could actively take hold of everyone in the crowd. Alternate translation: “they all became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 7 16 l361 figs-idiom προφήτης μέγας ἠγέρθη ἐν ἡμῖν 1 A great prophet has been raised among us Here, **raised** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “God has caused one of us to become a great prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 7 16 jf1j figs-activepassive προφήτης μέγας ἠγέρθη ἐν ἡμῖν 1 A great prophet has been raised among us If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “God has caused one of us to become a great prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 7 16 wn5b figs-idiom ἐπεσκέψατο 1 God has visited his people Here, **visited** is an idiom, as in [1:68](../01/68.md) and [1:78](../01/78.md). Alternate translation: “has come to help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 7 17 g4zt figs-personification ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λόγος οὗτος…περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 this word about him went out Luke speaks figuratively of this **word** (that is, those sayings) as if it were something that could spread around actively by itself. His expression means that people said these things about Jesus to other people, and those people then repeated them to still more people. Alternate translation: “people spread these sayings about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 7 17 g4zt figs-personification ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λόγος οὗτος…περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 this word about him went out Luke speaks of this **word** (that is, those sayings) as if it were something that could spread around actively by itself. His expression means that people said these things about Jesus to other people, and those people then repeated them to still more people. Alternate translation: “people spread these sayings about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 7 18 r11g writing-newevent ἀπήγγειλαν Ἰωάννῃ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ περὶ πάντων τούτων 1 his disciples reported to John concerning all these things This sentence introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “the disciples of John told him about all these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 7 18 r11x writing-newevent οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his disciples The term **his** refers to John the Baptist, not to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the disciples of John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 7 18 l362 figs-explicit Ἰωάννῃ 1 John Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to John the Baptist. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ LUK 7 20 l366 translate-names Ἰωάννης ὁ Βαπτιστὴς 1 John the LUK 7 20 l367 λέγων 1 to say Alternate translation: “to ask” LUK 7 20 l368 figs-you σὺ 1 you Since this question is for Jesus alone, **you** is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 7 20 l369 figs-explicit ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 the one who is coming This expression means “the Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 7 21 ys1b figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 In that hour Here Luke uses the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “At that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 7 21 ys1b figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 In that hour Here Luke uses the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “At that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 7 21 a7sm figs-ellipsis ἐθεράπευσεν πολλοὺς ἀπὸ νόσων, καὶ μαστίγων, καὶ πνευμάτων πονηρῶν 1 healed many from sicknesses and afflictions and evil spirits Here Luke is telling the story in a compressed way, and he does not distinguish clearly between healing of sickness and deliverance from evil spirits. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that distinction more explicitly. Alternate translation: “he healed many people of sicknesses that they were suffering from, and he drove evil spirits out of many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 7 21 l370 figs-hendiadys νόσων, καὶ μαστίγων 1 sicknesses and afflictions The phrase **sicknesses and afflictions** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **afflictions** describes the effect of the **sicknesses** on the people who had them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “sicknesses that they were suffering from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 7 21 l371 τυφλοῖς πολλοῖς ἐχαρίσατο βλέπειν 1 to many blind people he granted to see Alternate translation: “he enabled many blind people to see again” @@ -1128,7 +1128,7 @@ LUK 7 26 ix16 ναί, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Yes, I say to you Jesus says this t LUK 7 26 r7ud figs-idiom περισσότερον προφήτου 1 more than a prophet This phrase is an idiom that means that John was indeed a prophet, but that he was even greater than a typical prophet. Alternate translation: “not just an ordinary prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 7 27 cg3r figs-activepassive οὗτός ἐστιν περὶ οὗ γέγραπται 1 This is he concerning whom it is written If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “This is the one about whom one of the prophets wrote” or “John is the one about whom the prophet Malachi wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 7 27 wt2m figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold God, speaking through the prophet Malachi, uses the term **behold** to emphasize the importance of what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Now pay attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 7 27 s8hg figs-metaphor πρὸ προσώπου σου 1 before your face Here, **face** figuratively means the front of a person. Alternate translation, as in UST: “ahead of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 7 27 s8hg figs-metaphor πρὸ προσώπου σου 1 before your face Here, **face** means the front of a person. Alternate translation, as in UST: “ahead of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 7 27 cc5u figs-you σου…σου 1 your … you The words **your** and **you** are singular in both cases because God is speaking to the Messiah individually in the quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 7 27 l378 figs-metaphor ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου ἔμπροσθέν σου 1 who will prepare your way before you As in [3:4](../03/04.md), to make a **way** or a road is a figurative expression that means to help people get ready for the coming of the Messiah. Alternate translation: “who will help people get ready for you to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 7 28 yz6b λέγω ὑμῖν 1 I say to you Jesus uses this phrase to focus the crowd’s attention on what he will say next. Alternate translation: “Now listen carefully” @@ -1152,7 +1152,7 @@ LUK 7 32 f7hg translate-unknown ἀγορᾷ 1 marketplace This means a large, o LUK 7 32 l381 figs-metonymy ηὐλήσαμεν ὑμῖν 1 We played a flute for you The children are referring to the **flute** to indicate that they played a happy, upbeat tune, for which the **flute** was well suited. Alternate translation: “We played a happy tune for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 7 32 xgg9 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 and The children are expressing a contrast between what they expected their playmates to do and what those playmates actually did. Alternate translation: “but” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) LUK 7 32 m2k3 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 and Once again the children are expressing a contrast between what they expected their playmates to do and what those playmates actually did. Alternate translation: “but” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -LUK 7 33 kbc7 figs-synecdoche μὴ ἐσθίων ἄρτον 1 neither eating bread This could mean one of two things. Either way, Jesus is using one kind of food, **bread**, figuratively to represent all kinds of food. (1) It could refer to the way that John lived on whatever he could find to eat in the desert. Alternate translation: “not eating regular food” (2) It could mean that John often went without eating as a devotional practice. Alternate translation: “frequently fasting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 7 33 kbc7 figs-synecdoche μὴ ἐσθίων ἄρτον 1 neither eating bread This could mean one of two things. Either way, Jesus is using one kind of food, **bread**, to represent all kinds of food. (1) It could refer to the way that John lived on whatever he could find to eat in the desert. Alternate translation: “not eating regular food” (2) It could mean that John often went without eating as a devotional practice. Alternate translation: “frequently fasting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 7 33 wka1 figs-quotesinquotes λέγετε, δαιμόνιον ἔχει 1 you say, ‘He has a demon’ Luke is quoting Jesus, and Jesus is quoting what the Pharisees were saying about John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “you say that he has a demon” or “you accuse him of having a demon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 7 34 k33e figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Here Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 7 34 l382 figs-explicit ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man See how you translated this title in [5:24](../05/24.md). In this case the title highlights Jesus’ identification with humanity in the special role that God has given him. Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1215,7 +1215,7 @@ LUK 7 48 lq5v figs-activepassive ἀφέωνταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτία LUK 7 49 enw4 συνανακείμενοι 1 reclining with him to eat Alternate translation: “who were eating together with him” LUK 7 49 ie4z figs-rquestion τίς οὗτός ἐστιν ὃς καὶ ἁμαρτίας ἀφίησιν? 1 Who is this who even forgives sins? The religious leaders knew that only God could forgive sins. They did not believe that Jesus was God. So they are using the question form to make an accusation. Alternate translation: “This man is not God, so he cannot forgive sins!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 7 50 lje8 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “you have trusted in God, and God has saved you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LUK 7 50 l398 figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you Jesus speaks figuratively of the woman’s **faith** as if it had actively **saved** her. He means that it provided the conditions for her to receive salvation from God. Alternate translation: “you have trusted in God, and God has saved you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 7 50 l398 figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you Jesus speaks of the woman’s **faith** as if it had actively **saved** her. He means that it provided the conditions for her to receive salvation from God. Alternate translation: “you have trusted in God, and God has saved you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 7 50 sp2u figs-explicit πορεύου εἰς εἰρήνην 1 Go in peace This was a way of saying goodbye while giving a blessing at the same time. It also reassured the woman, despite the disapproval of the religious leaders. Alternate translation: “May God give you peace as you go” or “You may go now, and do not worry about your sins anymore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 8 intro ba3i 0 # Luke 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches the crowds with parables (8:1-21)
2. Jesus calms a storm on the Sea of Galilee (8:22-25)
3. Jesus drives out many demons from a man (8:26-39)
4. Jesus heals a woman and restores a dead girl to life (8:40-55)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Miracles

In this chapter, Jesus makes a storm stop by speaking to it, he makes a dead girl alive by speaking to her, and he makes evil spirits leave a man by speaking to them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Parables

Parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people who wanted to believe in him could easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. But people who did not want to believe in him would not be able to understand the message (Luke 8:4-15).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Brothers and sisters

Most people use the terms “brother” and “sister” for those who have the same parents as they do. They think of them as some of the most important people in their lives. Some people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter, Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “having spent all her living on doctors”

In [8:43](../08/43.md), some ancient manuscripts of the Bible have the phrase “having spent all her living on doctors,” but other manuscripts do not. ULT includes the phrase in its text, but it mentions in a footnote that scholars are divided as to whether it was an original part of the book of Luke. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to include the phrase if it does, but leave it out if it does not include it. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 8 1 i6mi writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -1243,7 +1243,7 @@ LUK 8 6 k6a4 ἐξηράνθη 1 it withered away Continue to use either the si LUK 8 6 ktz7 διὰ τὸ μὴ ἔχειν ἰκμάδα 1 because it had no moisture Alternate translation: “because there was no water for it in the rock” or “because there was no water for them in the rock” LUK 8 7 xzq2 ἀπέπνιξαν αὐτό 1 choked it The thorn plants took all the nutrients, water, and sunlight, so the farmer’s plants could not grow well. Continue to use either the singular or the plural, whichever would be more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “crowded it out” or “crowded them out” or “kept it from growing well” or “kept them from growing well” LUK 8 8 q12t ἐποίησεν καρπὸν ἑκατονταπλασίονα 1 it produced fruit a hundred times greater Here the word translated **fruit** has the specific sense of “a crop.” Since the farmer is sowing wheat seeds, this crop would be more seeds. Alternate translation: “it produced a hundred times as much seed as had landed in this soil” or “they produced a hundred times as many seeds as had landed in this soil” -LUK 8 8 b92z figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one who has ears to hear, let him hear Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize that what he has just said is important and that it may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **ears to hear** figuratively represents the willingness to understand and obey by association with the part of the body by which his listeners would have been taking in his teaching. Alternate translation: “If anyone is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 8 8 b92z figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one who has ears to hear, let him hear Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize that what he has just said is important and that it may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **ears to hear** represents the willingness to understand and obey by association with the part of the body by which his listeners would have been taking in his teaching. Alternate translation: “If anyone is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 8 8 l408 figs-123person ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one who has ears to hear, let him hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, then listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 8 8 l409 figs-you ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one who has ears to hear, let him hear If you choose to translate this in the second person, **you** would be plural, since Jesus is speaking to the crowd. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 8 9 l410 τίς αὕτη εἴη ἡ παραβολή 1 What is this parable? Alternate translation: “What does this story mean?” @@ -1255,28 +1255,28 @@ LUK 8 10 l412 figs-quotesinquotes ἵνα βλέποντες μὴ βλέπωσ LUK 8 10 xtu6 βλέποντες μὴ βλέπωσιν 1 Seeing, they may not see Some languages may need to state the object of the verb. Alternate translation: “though they see things, they will not understand them” or “though they see things happen, they will not understand what they mean” LUK 8 10 k4es ἀκούοντες μὴ συνιῶσιν 1 hearing, they may not understand Some languages may need to state the object of the verb. Alternate translation: “though they hear instruction, they will not understand the truth” LUK 8 11 vp8a ἔστιν δὲ αὕτη ἡ παραβολή 1 the parable is this Alternate translation: “this is what the story means” -LUK 8 11 hb1t figs-metonymy ὁ σπόρος ἐστὶν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The seed is the word of God Jesus uses the term **word** figuratively to refer to the message from God that people share by using words. Alternate translation: “The seed represents the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 8 11 hb1t figs-metonymy ὁ σπόρος ἐστὶν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The seed is the word of God Jesus uses the term **word** to refer to the message from God that people share by using words. Alternate translation: “The seed represents the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 8 12 xsa7 figs-metaphor οἱ…παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν εἰσιν οἱ ἀκούσαντες 1 the ones along the path are those who have heard Jesus begins to explain the figurative meanings of the seeds that fell in different places. Alternate translation: “The seeds that fell along the path represent people who hear the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 8 12 h969 figs-metaphor εἶτα ἔρχεται ὁ διάβολος καὶ αἴρει τὸν λόγον ἀπὸ τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 but then the devil comes and takes away the word from their hearts The parable represented this figuratively as a bird snatching away seeds. Try to use words in your language that retain that image. Alternate translation: “but then the devil comes and snatches the message away from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 8 12 jb9t figs-metaphor εἶτα ἔρχεται ὁ διάβολος καὶ αἴρει τὸν λόγον ἀπὸ τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 but then the devil comes and takes away the word from their hearts The word **hearts** figuratively represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “the devil comes and keeps them from understanding and appreciating the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 8 12 h969 figs-metaphor εἶτα ἔρχεται ὁ διάβολος καὶ αἴρει τὸν λόγον ἀπὸ τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 but then the devil comes and takes away the word from their hearts The parable represented this as a bird snatching away seeds. Try to use words in your language that retain that image. Alternate translation: “but then the devil comes and snatches the message away from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 8 12 jb9t figs-metaphor εἶτα ἔρχεται ὁ διάβολος καὶ αἴρει τὸν λόγον ἀπὸ τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 but then the devil comes and takes away the word from their hearts The word **hearts** represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “the devil comes and keeps them from understanding and appreciating the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 8 12 l413 figs-explicit εἶτα ἔρχεται ὁ διάβολος καὶ αἴρει τὸν λόγον ἀπὸ τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 but then the devil comes and takes away the word from their hearts Based on the figurative meaning of the parable, the implication is that these people did not appreciate the message deeply, just as seeds could not go down deep into the hard-packed soil of the path. And so the devil would be able to break up their superficial awareness and concentration by distracting them with everyday concerns. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the devil distracts them and they forget about the message they heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 8 12 l414 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Jesus is using the term **word** figuratively to refer to the message that people share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 8 12 l414 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Jesus is using the term **word** to refer to the message that people share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 8 12 g7r7 figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ πιστεύσαντες σωθῶσιν 1 so they may not believe and be saved This phrase explains the devil’s purpose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “because the devil does not want them to trust in God so that God will save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 8 13 juq1 figs-metaphor οἱ δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς πέτρας, οἳ 1 And the ones on the rock are those Jesus continues to explain the figurative meanings of the seeds that fell in different places. Alternate translation: “In the parable, the seeds that fell on the rocky soil represent people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 8 13 ar4x τῆς πέτρας 1 the rock Alternate translation: “the rocky soil” or “the shallow soil above the rocky layer” -LUK 8 13 l415 figs-metonymy μετὰ χαρᾶς δέχονται τὸν λόγον 1 who … receive the word with joy Jesus uses the term **word** figuratively to refer to the message that people share by using words. Alternate translation: “who … gladly believe the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 8 13 l415 figs-metonymy μετὰ χαρᾶς δέχονται τὸν λόγον 1 who … receive the word with joy Jesus uses the term **word** to refer to the message that people share by using words. Alternate translation: “who … gladly believe the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 8 13 bm51 ἐν καιρῷ πειρασμοῦ 1 in a time of testing Alternate translation: “when they experience hardship” -LUK 8 13 e5rw figs-metonymy ἀφίστανται 1 they go away Jesus is using the way such people **go away** from the community of believers to mean figuratively that they stop believing. Alternate translation: “they stop believing” or “they stop being disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 8 13 e5rw figs-metonymy ἀφίστανται 1 they go away Jesus is using the way such people **go away** from the community of believers to mean that they stop believing. Alternate translation: “they stop believing” or “they stop being disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 8 14 k4u4 figs-metaphor τὸ δὲ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας πεσόν, οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ 1 And the ones that fell among the thorns, these are the ones Jesus continues to explain the figurative meanings of the seeds that fell in different places. Alternate translation: “In the parable, the seeds that fell among the thorns represent people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 8 14 y3ue figs-activepassive ὑπὸ μεριμνῶν, καὶ πλούτου, καὶ ἡδονῶν τοῦ βίου…συνπνίγονται 1 they are choked by cares and riches and pleasures of this life If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the cares and riches and pleasures of this life choke them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 8 14 uut6 μεριμνῶν 1 cares Alternate translation: “things that people worry about” LUK 8 14 b384 ἡδονῶν τοῦ βίου 1 pleasures of this life Alternate translation: “the things in this life that people enjoy” -LUK 8 14 xhv7 figs-metaphor οὐ τελεσφοροῦσιν 1 they do not produce mature fruit The phrase **mature fruit** figuratively means spiritual maturity that is evidenced by godly character and loving actions. Alternate translation: “they do not mature into people of godly character who act out of love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 8 14 xhv7 figs-metaphor οὐ τελεσφοροῦσιν 1 they do not produce mature fruit The phrase **mature fruit** means spiritual maturity that is evidenced by godly character and loving actions. Alternate translation: “they do not mature into people of godly character who act out of love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 8 15 m2hb figs-metaphor τὸ δὲ ἐν τῇ καλῇ γῇ, οὗτοί εἰσιν οἵτινες 1 But the ones on the good soil, these are the ones Jesus continues to explain the figurative meanings of the seeds that fell in different places. Alternate translation: “In the parable, the seeds that fell on the good soil represent people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 8 15 l62d figs-metonymy ἀκούσαντες τὸν λόγον 1 having heard the word Jesus uses the term **word** figuratively to refer to the message that people share by using words. Alternate translation: “when they hear the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 8 15 l62d figs-metonymy ἀκούσαντες τὸν λόγον 1 having heard the word Jesus uses the term **word** to refer to the message that people share by using words. Alternate translation: “when they hear the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 8 15 l416 figs-doublet ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ 1 with an honest and good heart The terms **honest** and **good** mean similar things. Jesus uses the two terms together for emphasis and clarity. You do not need to repeat both words in your translation if that might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “with genuine intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -LUK 8 15 pbi7 figs-metaphor ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ 1 with an honest and good heart In this expression, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “with genuine intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 8 15 i51s figs-metaphor καρποφοροῦσιν ἐν ὑπομονῇ 1 bear fruit with endurance Here, **fruit** figuratively means spiritual maturity that is evidenced by godly character and loving actions. Alternate translation: “because they persevere, they mature into people of godly character who act out of love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 8 15 pbi7 figs-metaphor ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ 1 with an honest and good heart In this expression, the **heart** represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “with genuine intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 8 15 i51s figs-metaphor καρποφοροῦσιν ἐν ὑπομονῇ 1 bear fruit with endurance Here, **fruit** means spiritual maturity that is evidenced by godly character and loving actions. Alternate translation: “because they persevere, they mature into people of godly character who act out of love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 8 16 n86n figs-parables οὐδεὶς δὲ λύχνον ἅψας 1 And no one lights a lamp After Jesus finished explaining the story about the seeds, he gave his disciples another example to illustrate that God wants them to understand spiritual truths. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus gave them another example. ‘No one lights a lamp’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) LUK 8 16 l417 figs-ellipsis οἱ εἰσπορευόμενοι 1 those who enter Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “those who enter the room” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 8 17 n5ca figs-doublenegatives οὐ…ἐστιν κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ φανερὸν γενήσεται 1 nothing is hidden that will not become visible If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everything that is hidden will become visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) @@ -1294,17 +1294,17 @@ LUK 8 20 wr4t figs-activepassive ἀπηγγέλη…αὐτῷ 1 it was reporte LUK 8 20 l424 figs-you σου…σου…σε 1 your … your … you Since the person who said this was speaking to Jesus alone, **your** and **you** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 8 20 un5d ἰδεῖν θέλοντές σε 1 wanting to see you Alternate translation: “and they would like to see you” LUK 8 21 l425 figs-hendiadys ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς 1 But answering he said to them Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to the information that people gave him. Alternate translation: “But Jesus responded to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -LUK 8 21 b97u figs-metaphor μήτηρ μου καὶ ἀδελφοί μου, οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ ἀκούοντες καὶ ποιοῦντες 1 My mother and my brothers are those who hear and do the word of God Jesus means figuratively that people who believe and obey the message from God become like a family to one another. Alternate translation: “Those who hear the word of God and obey it are like a mother and brothers to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 8 21 edk3 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Jesus uses the term **word** figuratively to refer to the message from God that people share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 8 21 b97u figs-metaphor μήτηρ μου καὶ ἀδελφοί μου, οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ ἀκούοντες καὶ ποιοῦντες 1 My mother and my brothers are those who hear and do the word of God Jesus means that people who believe and obey the message from God become like a family to one another. Alternate translation: “Those who hear the word of God and obey it are like a mother and brothers to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 8 21 edk3 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Jesus uses the term **word** to refer to the message from God that people share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 8 22 l426 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -LUK 8 22 l427 figs-idiom ἐν μιᾷ τῶν ἡμερῶν 1 on one of those days Luke uses the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “around that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 8 22 l427 figs-idiom ἐν μιᾷ τῶν ἡμερῶν 1 on one of those days Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “around that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 8 22 l428 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ αὐτὸς ἐνέβη εἰς πλοῖον καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς, διέλθωμεν εἰς τὸ πέραν τῆς λίμνης 1 both he and his disciples got into a boat, and he said to them, “Let us go over to the other side of the lake” It seems unlikely that Jesus and his disciples would have gotten into a boat before they were planning to sail somewhere. So here Luke is probably describing the result before the reason. If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the action that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to his disciples, ‘Let us go over to the other side of the lake.’ So they all got into a boat together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 8 22 w1pk translate-names τῆς λίμνης 1 the lake This means the Lake of Genneseret, which is also called the Sea of Galilee. But since Jesus would have referred to it simply as “the lake” while he and his disciples were on it, you do not need to use the proper name in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 8 22 btk8 figs-idiom ἀνήχθησαν 1 they put out This expression means that they began to travel across the lake in their boat. Alternate translation: “they headed out across the lake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 8 23 vh2v πλεόντων…αὐτῶν 1 as they voyaged The term **voyaged** means that Jesus and the disciples traveled by water. Alternate translation: “as they traveled across the lake” LUK 8 23 sf8z writing-pronouns ἀφύπνωσεν 1 he fell asleep The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus began to sleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 8 23 mdb5 figs-idiom κατέβη λαῖλαψ ἀνέμου εἰς τὴν λίμνην 1 a windstorm came down on the lake Luke says **came down** because these winds blew down from the hills surrounding the lake. Alternate translation: “very strong winds suddenly began to blow on the lake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 8 23 l429 figs-metonymy συνεπληροῦντο 1 they were being filled Luke says **they**, meaning the disciples, to refer figuratively by association to the boat they were in. Alternate translation: “the boat was being filled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 8 23 l429 figs-metonymy συνεπληροῦντο 1 they were being filled Luke says **they**, meaning the disciples, to refer by association to the boat they were in. Alternate translation: “the boat was being filled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 8 23 l430 figs-activepassive συνεπληροῦντο 1 they were being filled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state what was doing the action. Alternate translation: “water started to fill up their boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 8 23 uki7 figs-explicit συνεπληροῦντο 1 they were being filled The implication is that the strong winds were causing high waves that pushed water over the sides of the boat, and that this water was filling the boat. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the strong winds were causing high waves that pushed water over the sides of their boat, so that the water began to fill it up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 8 24 l432 Ἐπιστάτα 1 Master **Master** is the title by which disciples addressed their teacher in this culture. If your language and culture have a similar term, you could use it here in your translation. @@ -1316,7 +1316,7 @@ LUK 8 24 v1c3 figs-parallelism ἐπαύσαντο καὶ ἐγένετο γα LUK 8 25 d8c3 figs-rquestion ποῦ ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν? 1 Where is your faith? Jesus does not expect his disciples to tell him where their faith is. Rather, he is using the question form to correct them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should have trusted God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 8 25 wjv3 τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ τοῖς ἀνέμοις ἐπιτάσσει καὶ τῷ ὕδατι, καὶ ὑπακούουσιν αὐτῷ? 1 Who then is this, that he commands even the winds and the water, and they obey him? If it would be helpful in your language, you could turn this into two sentences, one asking the question, and the other giving the reason for the question. Alternate translation: “Who then is this? He commands even the winds and the water, and they obey him!” LUK 8 25 f2wp τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν 1 Who then is this This is a genuine question, not a statement in question form. The disciples are looking for information about what kind of person Jesus could be if he can do this. Alternate translation: “What kind of man is this” -LUK 8 25 l434 figs-metonymy τῷ ὕδατι 1 the water The disciples are figuratively describing the violent waves that had threatened the boat by reference to the water that these waves arose from. Alternate translation: “the waves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 8 25 l434 figs-metonymy τῷ ὕδατι 1 the water The disciples are describing the violent waves that had threatened the boat by reference to the water that these waves arose from. Alternate translation: “the waves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 8 26 f17p translate-names τὴν χώραν τῶν Γερασηνῶν 1 the region of the Gerasenes The name **Gerasenes** refers to people from the city of Gerasa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 8 26 p9zp ἀντιπέρα τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 opposite Galilee Alternate translation: “on the other side of the lake from Galilee” LUK 8 27 l435 figs-ellipsis ἐξελθόντι…αὐτῷ 1 when he came out Here Luke is writing in a compact way. He means that Jesus **came out** of the boat. Alternate translation: “when Jesus got out of the boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -1362,16 +1362,16 @@ LUK 8 37 l448 figs-hyperbole ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῆς περιχώ LUK 8 37 ai7m τῆς περιχώρου τῶν Γερασηνῶν 1 the region of the Gerasenes Alternate translation: “the area where the Gerasene people lived” LUK 8 37 l449 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι φόβῳ μεγάλῳ συνείχοντο 1 for they were seized by great fear If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this phrase first in the sentence, since it gives the reason for the result that the rest of the sentence describes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 8 37 jbh5 figs-activepassive φόβῳ μεγάλῳ συνείχοντο 1 they were seized by great fear If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 8 37 l450 figs-personification φόβῳ μεγάλῳ συνείχοντο 1 they were seized by great fear Luke speaks of this **fear** figuratively as if it were something that could actively take hold of these people. Alternate translation: “they became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LUK 8 37 l451 figs-synecdoche αὐτὸς δὲ ἐμβὰς, εἰς πλοῖον 1 he got into the boat Luke figuratively says **he**, meaning Jesus, to describe the entire group of Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples got into the boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 8 37 l450 figs-personification φόβῳ μεγάλῳ συνείχοντο 1 they were seized by great fear Luke speaks of this **fear** as if it were something that could actively take hold of these people. Alternate translation: “they became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 8 37 l451 figs-synecdoche αὐτὸς δὲ ἐμβὰς, εἰς πλοῖον 1 he got into the boat Luke says **he**, meaning Jesus, to describe the entire group of Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples got into the boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 8 37 ue8c figs-explicit ὑπέστρεψεν 1 to return The implication is that Jesus and his disciples were going to return to Galilee. Alternate translation: “to go back across the lake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 8 38 s25w figs-events δὲ 1 And The events in this verse and the next verse happened before Jesus left in the boat. It may be helpful to state that clearly at the beginning here. Alternate translation (followed by comma): “Before Jesus and his disciples left,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) LUK 8 38 l452 figs-quotations ἐδεῖτο…αὐτοῦ…εἶναι σὺν αὐτῷ 1 begged him to be with him If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as a direct quotation, as UST does, breaking the sentence here. Alternate translation: “pleaded with Jesus, ‘Let me go with you!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) LUK 8 38 abce writing-pronouns ἀπέλυσεν δὲ αὐτὸν 1 he sent him away The pronoun**he** refers to Jesus, and the word **him** refers to the man. Alternate translation: “Jesus sent the man away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 8 39 zl3v figs-metonymy τὸν οἶκόν σου 1 your house Jesus is using the word **house** figuratively to mean the people who live in the man’s **house**. Alternate translation: “your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 8 39 zl3v figs-metonymy τὸν οἶκόν σου 1 your house Jesus is using the word **house** to mean the people who live in the man’s **house**. Alternate translation: “your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 8 39 c9nh διηγοῦ ὅσα σοι ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεός 1 describe all that God has done for you Alternate translation: “tell them everything about what God has done for you” LUK 8 39 l453 figs-explicit καθ’ ὅλην τὴν πόλιν 1 throughout the whole city The implication is that this means the city of Gerasa, since Luke says in [8:29](../08/29.md) that Jesus and his disciples came to the region where this city was located. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “throughout the whole city of Gerasa” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 8 40 l454 figs-synecdoche ἐν δὲ τῷ ὑποστρέφειν τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 Now when Jesus returned Luke figuratively says **he**, meaning Jesus, to describe the entire group of Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “Now when Jesus returned with his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 8 40 l454 figs-synecdoche ἐν δὲ τῷ ὑποστρέφειν τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 Now when Jesus returned Luke says **he**, meaning Jesus, to describe the entire group of Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “Now when Jesus returned with his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 8 40 yd57 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀπεδέξατο αὐτὸν ὁ ὄχλος; ἦσαν γὰρ πάντες προσδοκῶντες αὐτόν 1 the crowd welcomed him, for they were all expecting him If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the results that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “the crowd had been expecting him, and so they greeted him joyfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 8 41 l455 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke uses **behold** to calls the reader’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 8 41 l456 writing-participants ἦλθεν ἀνὴρ ᾧ ὄνομα Ἰάειρος 1 a man came whose name was Jairus Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was man whose name was Jairus, and he came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -1385,7 +1385,7 @@ LUK 8 42 kw2y οἱ ὄχλοι συνέπνιγον αὐτόν 1 the crowds w LUK 8 43 l7pu writing-participants γυνὴ οὖσα 1 there was a woman This introduces a new character into the story. If your language has an expression of its own that serves this purpose, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 8 43 h9uq figs-euphemism ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος 1 with a flow of blood Luke uses the phrase **a flow of blood** refers to her condition discreetly by using a mild expression. She was probably bleeding from her womb even when it was not the normal time for that. If your language has a polite way of referring to this condition, you could use that expression here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) LUK 8 43 l459 translate-textvariants ἰατροῖς προσαναλώσασα ὅλον τὸν βίον 1 having spent all her living on doctors See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to include this phrase in your translation. The note below discusses a translation issue in this phrase for those who decide to include it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -LUK 8 43 l460 figs-metonymy ὅλον τὸν βίον 1 all her living This phrase uses the term **living** figuratively to mean the money that was needed for **living**. Alternate translation: “all of her money” or “all the money she had to live on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 8 43 l460 figs-metonymy ὅλον τὸν βίον 1 all her living This phrase uses the term **living** to mean the money that was needed for **living**. Alternate translation: “all of her money” or “all the money she had to live on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 8 43 zb4a figs-activepassive οὐκ ἴσχυσεν ἀπ’ οὐδενὸς θεραπευθῆναι 1 was not able to be healed by anyone If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom no one had been able to heal” or, if you include the phrase from the textual variant, “who had spent all of her money on doctors, but none of them had been able to heal her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 8 44 vwe6 translate-unknown ἥψατο τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ 1 touched the edge of his cloak Jewish men wore tassels on the edges of their robes, as commanded in God’s Law. The woman likely **touched** one of those tassles. Alternate translation: “touched a tassel on his robe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 8 45 c3wm figs-explicit οἱ ὄχλοι συνέχουσίν σε καὶ ἀποθλίβουσιν 1 the crowds are crowding around and pressing against you By saying this, Peter was implying that anyone could have touched Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “there are many people crowding around you and pressing in against you, so any one of them might have touched you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1398,7 +1398,7 @@ LUK 8 47 vxl7 translate-symaction προσπεσοῦσα αὐτῷ 1 fell down LUK 8 47 l462 figs-activepassive ἰάθη 1 she had been healed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “she had become healthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 8 48 v4m9 figs-idiom θύγατερ 1 Daughter This was a kind way of speaking to a woman. Your language may have another way of expressing the same kindness. Alternate translation: “My dear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 8 48 uja4 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 your faith has saved you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “because you believed, you have become well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LUK 8 48 l463 figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 your faith has saved you Jesus speaks figuratively of the woman’s **faith** as if it had actively healed her. He means that it provided the conditions for the healing that she received from God. Alternate translation: “because you believed, you have become well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 8 48 l463 figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 your faith has saved you Jesus speaks of the woman’s **faith** as if it had actively healed her. He means that it provided the conditions for the healing that she received from God. Alternate translation: “because you believed, you have become well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 8 48 l464 ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 your faith has saved you In this context, the word **saved** has a specific meaning. Alternate translation: “because you believed, you have become well” LUK 8 48 ch7m figs-idiom πορεύου εἰς εἰρήνην 1 Go in peace This is a way of saying goodbye and giving a blessing at the same time. Alternate translation: “May God give you peace as you go” or “As you go, do not worry anymore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 8 49 m58z figs-explicit ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος 1 While he was still speaking This refers implicitly to what Jesus was saying in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “While Jesus was still saying these things to the woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1409,7 +1409,7 @@ LUK 8 49 n6ez τὸν διδάσκαλον 1 the Teacher **Teacher** is a respe LUK 8 50 l466 writing-pronouns ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ 1 he answered him The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, and the pronoun **him** refers to Jairus, not the messenger. Jesus did not respond directly to the messenger. Rather, he reassured Jairus, despite the news. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to Jairus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 8 50 ej1b σωθήσεται 1 she will be saved In this context, the word **saved** has a specific meaning, comparable in this context to the meaning “healed.” Alternate translation: “she will come back to life” LUK 8 50 l467 figs-activepassive σωθήσεται 1 she will be saved If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “she will come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 8 51 gl9g figs-synecdoche ἐλθὼν δὲ εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν 1 when he came to the house Luke figuratively says **he**, meaning Jesus, to describe the entire group that was coming with Jesus, which included his disciples and Jairus and likely others. Alternate translation: “when they arrived at the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 8 51 gl9g figs-synecdoche ἐλθὼν δὲ εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν 1 when he came to the house Luke says **he**, meaning Jesus, to describe the entire group that was coming with Jesus, which included his disciples and Jairus and likely others. Alternate translation: “when they arrived at the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 8 51 qal2 grammar-connect-exceptions οὐκ ἀφῆκεν…τινα…εἰ μὴ 1 he did not allow anyone … except If, in your language, it would appear that Luke was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “Jesus only allowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) LUK 8 51 i4v1 τὸν πατέρα τῆς παιδὸς 1 the father of the child The phrase **the father of the child** refers to Jairus. Alternate translation: “Jairus, the girl’s father” LUK 8 52 tt9v translate-symaction ἔκλαιον…πάντες καὶ ἐκόπτοντο αὐτήν 1 they were all wailing and mourning for her This was the customary way of showing grief in that culture. The term that ULT translates as **mourning** could mean that the people were pounding on their chests as a sign of grief, although Luke uses a much more specific expression to say that directly in [18:13](../18/13.md). If you think your readers might not understand the significance of these actions, you could explain generally what the people were doing. Or you could describe the actions and say why the people were doing them. Alternate translation: “they were all loudly expressing their grief” or “all the people there were wailing and pounding on their chests to show how sad they were that the girl had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) @@ -1429,11 +1429,11 @@ LUK 9 2 j5n3 ἀπέστειλεν αὐτοὺς 1 sent them out Your language LUK 9 2 l472 figs-abstractnouns τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the kingdom of God See how you decided to translate this phrase in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “how God would rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 9 3 m7c5 καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς 1 And he said to them It may be helpful to state that Jesus said these things to the disciples before they went out. Alternate translation: “Before the 12 disciples left, Jesus said to them” LUK 9 3 aui6 μηδὲν αἴρετε 1 Take nothing If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the verb negative and the subject positive. Alternate translation: “Do not bring anything” -LUK 9 3 l473 figs-metonymy εἰς τὴν ὁδόν 1 for the road Jesus uses the term **road** figuratively to refer to the journey that his disciples will make by traveling along roads. Alternate translation: “for your journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 9 3 l473 figs-metonymy εἰς τὴν ὁδόν 1 for the road Jesus uses the term **road** to refer to the journey that his disciples will make by traveling along roads. Alternate translation: “for your journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 9 3 qm2p translate-unknown ῥάβδον 1 staff The term **staff** means a large stick that people used for balance when climbing or when walking on uneven ground, and also for defense against animals and people. Alternate translation: “walking stick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 9 3 pp64 translate-unknown πήραν 1 bag The team **bag** means something a traveler would use to carry things that were needed on a journey. Alternate translation: “knapsack” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 9 3 n237 figs-synecdoche ἄρτον 1 bread Jesus figuratively uses one kind of food, **bread**, to represent food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -LUK 9 3 l474 figs-metonymy ἀργύριον 1 silver Jesus figuratively uses a means by which value is stored and exchanged, **silver**, to represent money by association. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 9 3 n237 figs-synecdoche ἄρτον 1 bread Jesus uses one kind of food, **bread**, to represent food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 9 3 l474 figs-metonymy ἀργύριον 1 silver Jesus uses a means by which value is stored and exchanged, **silver**, to represent money by association. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 9 3 l475 figs-litotes μήτε δύο χιτῶνας ἔχειν 1 nor have two tunics Here Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. When he says that these men should not each have two tunics, he means that they each should only have one tunic. Alternate translation: “and do not bring an extra tunic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) LUK 9 4 kyw3 figs-explicit εἰς ἣν ἂν οἰκίαν εἰσέλθητε 1 whatever house you enter into The implication is that the disciples can **enter** a house because the people living there have welcomed them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “any house where you are welcomed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 9 4 sa5w ἐκεῖ μένετε 1 stay there Alternate translation: “stay in that same house” @@ -1454,7 +1454,7 @@ LUK 9 8 l480 figs-activepassive ἄλλων δὲ, ὅτι προφήτης τι LUK 9 8 ekf7 figs-ellipsis ἄλλων δὲ, ὅτι προφήτης τις τῶν ἀρχαίων ἀνέστη 1 but by others that one of the ancient prophets had risen from the dead The expression **it was said** also applies to this phrase. Alternate translation: “but it was said by others that one of the prophets from long ago had come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 9 8 l481 figs-activepassive ἄλλων δὲ, ὅτι προφήτης τις τῶν ἀρχαίων ἀνέστη 1 but by others that one of the ancient prophets had risen from the dead If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form as well. Alternate translation: “but others were saying that one of the prophets from long ago had come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 9 9 flw3 figs-explicit Ἰωάννην ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα, τίς δέ ἐστιν οὗτος 1 I beheaded John, but who is this Herod is assuming that it is impossible for John to have risen from the dead. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “It cannot be John, because I had his head cut off, so who is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 9 9 r98f figs-synecdoche Ἰωάννην ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα 1 I beheaded John Herod speaks of himself figuratively as the person who did this action, representing the entire group of people who were responsible for it. Herod’s soldiers would actually have carried out the execution, on his orders. Alternate translation: “I commanded my soldiers to cut off John’s head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 9 9 r98f figs-synecdoche Ἰωάννην ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα 1 I beheaded John Herod speaks of himself as the person who did this action, representing the entire group of people who were responsible for it. Herod’s soldiers would actually have carried out the execution, on his orders. Alternate translation: “I commanded my soldiers to cut off John’s head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 9 10 p7gf figs-explicit ὑποστρέψαντες, οἱ ἀπόστολοι 1 when the apostles returned The implication is that the apostles returned to where Jesus was. Alternate translation: “when the apostles came back to where Jesus was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 9 10 aal8 figs-explicit ὅσα ἐποίησαν 1 as much as they had done The phrase **as much as they had done** refers to what they did when they went to the cities where Jesus sent them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “what had happened as they proclaimed the good news and healed the sick in the cities where Jesus had sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 9 10 l482 figs-activepassive πόλιν καλουμένην Βηθσαϊδά 1 a city called Bethsaida If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “a city whose name was Bethsaida” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1463,7 +1463,7 @@ LUK 9 11 l483 figs-abstractnouns τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 LUK 9 12 btc8 writing-background ἡ δὲ ἡμέρα ἤρξατο κλίνειν 1 And the day began to end Luke provides this background information to help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now it was getting towards the end of the day” or “Now the end of the day was approaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 9 12 l484 figs-nominaladj οἱ δώδεκα 1 the Twelve See how you translated this term in [8:1](../08/01.md). You may have decided to translate the nominal adjective **Twelve** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “his 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom he had appointed to be apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 9 12 l485 translate-names οἱ δώδεκα 1 the Twelve You may have decided instead in [8:1](../08/01.md) to translate this as a title, **the Twelve**, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns. If so, you can do the same thing here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 9 13 l486 figs-litotes οὐκ εἰσὶν…πλεῖον ἢ 1 There are not more than The disciples are figuratively expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “There are only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +LUK 9 13 l486 figs-litotes οὐκ εἰσὶν…πλεῖον ἢ 1 There are not more than The disciples are expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “There are only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) LUK 9 13 tay4 translate-unknown ἄρτοι πέντε 1 five loaves This means **loaves** of bread, which are lumps of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. Alternate translation: “five loaves of bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 9 13 vuc1 figs-irony εἰ μήτι πορευθέντες, ἡμεῖς ἀγοράσωμεν εἰς πάντα τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον βρώματα 1 unless we go and buy food for all these people The disciples are not making a serious suggestion here. They actually mean to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of their words. Alternate translation: “and we certainly cannot go and buy food for all these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) LUK 9 14 c9z5 figs-explicit ὡσεὶ ἄνδρες πεντακισχίλιοι 1 about 5,000 men Luke assumes that readers will know that this number does not include the women and children who were likely also present. (This is not a case where a masculine term includes women.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “about 5,000 men, not counting the women and children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ LUK 9 23 h1u1 πρὸς πάντας 1 to them all Alternate translation: “to LUK 9 23 h46s figs-metaphor ὀπίσω μου ἔρχεσθαι 1 come after me To follow or to **come after** Jesus represents being one of his disciples. Alternate translation: “be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 9 23 fnk7 ἀρνησάσθω ἑαυτὸν 1 let him deny himself Alternate translation: “he must forsake his own desires” LUK 9 23 l494 figs-explicit ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ καθ’ ἡμέραν 1 let him … take up his cross daily The image is of a condemned prisoner being forced to carry the cross on which he would be crucified to the place where he would be executed. Luke assumes that his readers will recognize this image from their own culture. But if it would not be familiar to your readers, you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “he must be willing every day to suffer and die for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 9 23 h7j1 figs-metaphor ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ καθ’ ἡμέραν 1 let him … take up his cross daily To **take up** a **cross** figuratively represents being willing to suffer and die. Alternate translation: “he must be willing every day to suffer and die for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 9 23 h7j1 figs-metaphor ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ καθ’ ἡμέραν 1 let him … take up his cross daily To **take up** a **cross** represents being willing to suffer and die. Alternate translation: “he must be willing every day to suffer and die for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 9 23 pk72 figs-metaphor καὶ ἀκολουθείτω μοι 1 and follow me Here, to **follow** Jesus means to obey him. Alternate translation: “and obey me in that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 9 24 l495 figs-idiom ὃς δ’ ἂν ἀπολέσῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ 1 but whoever would lose his life for my sake This phrase is an idiom. Jesus is not encouraging his disciples to do self-destructive things. Alternate translation: “but whoever is willing to give up everything for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 9 25 lx8i figs-rquestion τί γὰρ ὠφελεῖται ἄνθρωπος, κερδήσας τὸν κόσμον ὅλον, ἑαυτὸν δὲ ἀπολέσας ἢ ζημιωθείς? 1 For what is a man profited, having gained the whole world, but losing or destroying himself? Jesus does not expect his disciples to tell him what benefit this would be. Rather, he is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “It would not benefit a person to get everything he wanted in this world and yet be lost eternally.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1505,17 +1505,17 @@ LUK 9 25 l496 figs-activepassive τί γὰρ ὠφελεῖται ἄνθρωπ LUK 9 25 xsk5 figs-doublet τί γὰρ ὠφελεῖται ἄνθρωπος, κερδήσας τὸν κόσμον ὅλον, ἑαυτὸν δὲ ἀπολέσας ἢ ζημιωθείς 1 For what is a man profited, having gained the whole world, but destroying or losing himself The terms **losing** and **destroying** mean the same thing. Jesus uses them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “For what benefit would it be to a person to get everything he wanted in this world but to completely destroy himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) LUK 9 25 l497 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 a man Jesus is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 9 25 hpp5 figs-hyperbole τί γὰρ ὠφελεῖται ἄνθρωπος, κερδήσας τὸν κόσμον ὅλον, ἑαυτὸν δὲ ἀπολέσας ἢ ζημιωθείς 1 For what is a man profited, having gained the whole world, but destroying or losing himself Jesus says **the whole world** as an overstatement for emphasis. Alternate translation: “For what benefit would it be to a person to get everything he wanted in this world but to lose or destroy himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -LUK 9 26 yrr4 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐμοὺς λόγους 1 my words Jesus is using the term **words** figuratively to describe the things he teaches by using words. Alternate translation: “my teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 9 26 yrr4 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐμοὺς λόγους 1 my words Jesus is using the term **words** to describe the things he teaches by using words. Alternate translation: “my teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 9 26 tx1k figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Here Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 9 26 l498 figs-explicit ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 9 26 dl2i guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 the Father **The Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) LUK 9 27 ef6j figs-idiom λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν ἀληθῶς 1 But I say to you truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the importance of what he will say next. Alternate translation: “Now listen very carefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 9 27 m113 figs-123person εἰσίν τινες τῶν αὐτοῦ ἑστηκότων, οἳ οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου, ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 there are some of those who are standing here who will not taste death until they see the kingdom of God Jesus is using the third person to talk about the people he is talking to. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the second person. Alternate translation: “some of you who are standing here will not die before you see the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -LUK 9 27 j7fc figs-litotes οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου, ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 will not taste death until they see the kingdom of God Jesus is figuratively expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “will see the kingdom of God before they die” or (if you are translating in the second person) “will see the kingdom of God before you die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +LUK 9 27 j7fc figs-litotes οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου, ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 will not taste death until they see the kingdom of God Jesus is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “will see the kingdom of God before they die” or (if you are translating in the second person) “will see the kingdom of God before you die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) LUK 9 27 gj8t figs-idiom γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 taste death This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 9 27 l499 figs-abstractnouns τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the kingdom of God See how you decided to translate this phrase in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “God ruling as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 9 28 l500 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -LUK 9 28 si9j figs-metonymy μετὰ τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 after these words The phrase **these words** refers to what Jesus said to his disciples in the preceding verses. Luke uses the term **words** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “after Jesus said these things to his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 9 28 si9j figs-metonymy μετὰ τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 after these words The phrase **these words** refers to what Jesus said to his disciples in the preceding verses. Luke uses the term **words** to describe the things that Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “after Jesus said these things to his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 9 29 l501 writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new development within this episode. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 9 30 p3cd figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Here, Luke uses the word **behold** to alert readers to pay attention to the surprising information that follows. Alternate translation: “suddenly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 9 31 g28p figs-activepassive οἳ ὀφθέντες ἐν δόξῃ 1 who were seen in glory This phrase gives information about how Moses and Elijah looked. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “who appeared in glorious splendor” or “who were shining brightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1523,7 +1523,7 @@ LUK 9 31 cur1 figs-euphemism τὴν ἔξοδον αὐτοῦ 1 his departure LUK 9 31 l502 ἣν ἤμελλεν πληροῦν ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 which he was about to fulfill in Jerusalem Alternate translation: “which was soon going to happen in Jerusalem” LUK 9 32 i29n writing-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information about what Peter, James, and John were doing while Jesus was speaking with Moses and Elijah. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 9 32 f8ip figs-activepassive ὁ…Πέτρος καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ ἦσαν βεβαρημένοι ὕπνῳ 1 Peter and those with him were weighted with sleep If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “sleep was weighing heavily upon Peter and James and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 9 32 l503 figs-personification ὁ…Πέτρος καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ ἦσαν βεβαρημένοι ὕπνῳ 1 Peter and those with him were weighted with sleep Luke speaks of **sleep** figuratively as if it were something that could be like a weight pressing down on a person. Alternate translation: “Peter and James and John all felt very sleepy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 9 32 l503 figs-personification ὁ…Πέτρος καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ ἦσαν βεβαρημένοι ὕπνῳ 1 Peter and those with him were weighted with sleep Luke speaks of **sleep** as if it were something that could be like a weight pressing down on a person. Alternate translation: “Peter and James and John all felt very sleepy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 9 32 tw7e figs-explicit εἶδον τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ 1 they saw his glory As in [2:9](../02/09.md), the implication is that this **glory** manifested visibly as a bright light. Alternate translation: “they saw brilliant light shining around Jesus” or “they saw a very bright light coming from Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 9 32 tsj6 καὶ τοὺς δύο ἄνδρας τοὺς συνεστῶτας αὐτῷ 1 and the two men who were standing with him The phrase **the two men** refers to Moses and Elijah. Alternate translation: “and they also saw Moses and Elijah” LUK 9 33 l504 writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new development within this episode. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -1542,7 +1542,7 @@ LUK 9 36 l508 figs-idiom εὑρέθη Ἰησοῦς μόνος 1 Jesus was fou LUK 9 36 l509 figs-activepassive εὑρέθη Ἰησοῦς μόνος 1 Jesus was found alone If it would be helpful in your language, you could state **Jesus was found alone** with an active form. Alternate translation: “only Jesus was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 9 36 v9uy figs-doublet αὐτοὶ ἐσίγησαν, καὶ οὐδενὶ ἀπήγγειλαν 1 they were silent and told no one These two phrases mean the same thing. (The Greek verb in the first phrase does not always mean to make no sound. It can also mean to keep a secret.) Luke uses the two phrases together for emphasis. In your translation, you could also use repetition for emphasis, or, If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “they kept it a secret and did not tell anyone” or “they said nothing about it to anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) LUK 9 36 l510 figs-doublenegatives οὐδενὶ ἀπήγγειλαν…οὐδὲν 1 told no one … anything Luke uses a double negative in Greek for emphasis here, “told no one … nothing.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning, “told someone … something.” If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -LUK 9 36 l511 figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 in those days Here Luke uses the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 9 36 l511 figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 in those days Here Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 9 37 q5f5 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 9 38 l512 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke uses the term **behold** to calls the reader’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 9 38 k35b writing-participants ἀνὴρ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου 1 a man from the crowd Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a man in the crowd who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -1551,10 +1551,10 @@ LUK 9 38 l514 figs-idiom ἐπιβλέψαι ἐπὶ 1 look upon This is an idi LUK 9 39 l515 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold The man uses the term **behold** to calls Jesus’ attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 9 39 ka7j writing-participants πνεῦμα 1 a spirit The man uses this phrase to introduce the spirit into his story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there is an evil spirit that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 9 39 abm3 translate-unknown μετὰ ἀφροῦ 1 with foam When a person is having convulsions, they can have trouble breathing or swallowing. This causes white foam to form around their mouths. Alternate translation: “and foam comes out of his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 9 39 l516 figs-litotes μόγις ἀποχωρεῖ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 it departs from him with difficulty The man is figuratively expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “it attacks him very often” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -LUK 9 39 l517 figs-metaphor συντρῖβον αὐτόν 1 crushing him The man speaks figuratively of the spirit as if it were a heavy weight whose attacks crush the boy. This is a reference to the injuries that the spirit causes. Alternate translation: “injuring him badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 9 39 l516 figs-litotes μόγις ἀποχωρεῖ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 it departs from him with difficulty The man is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “it attacks him very often” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +LUK 9 39 l517 figs-metaphor συντρῖβον αὐτόν 1 crushing him The man speaks of the spirit as if it were a heavy weight whose attacks crush the boy. This is a reference to the injuries that the spirit causes. Alternate translation: “injuring him badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 9 41 sdu1 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν 1 Then answering Jesus said Together **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to the man’s request. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -LUK 9 41 bi9m figs-apostrophe ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος καὶ διεστραμμένη, ἕως πότε ἔσομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς καὶ ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? 1 O unbelieving and perverted generation, until when will I be with you and bear with you? Jesus is speaking figuratively to something that he knows cannot hear him. He is addressing the entire **generation** of people who were living at that time, and they are not all present to hear him. He is doing this to show in a very strong way how he feels about this generation. He is actually speaking to the people who can hear him, the crowd that has gathered there. If your readers might not understand this kind of figurative speech, you could translate Jesus’ words as if he were speaking directly to the crowd, since they are included in the generation that Jesus is figuratively addressing. Alternate translation: “You have all gone wrong because you do not believe, so I hope I do not have to stay here and put up with you for very long!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) +LUK 9 41 bi9m figs-apostrophe ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος καὶ διεστραμμένη, ἕως πότε ἔσομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς καὶ ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? 1 O unbelieving and perverted generation, until when will I be with you and bear with you? Jesus is speaking to something that he knows cannot hear him. He is addressing the entire **generation** of people who were living at that time, and they are not all present to hear him. He is doing this to show in a very strong way how he feels about this generation. He is actually speaking to the people who can hear him, the crowd that has gathered there. If your readers might not understand this kind of figurative speech, you could translate Jesus’ words as if he were speaking directly to the crowd, since they are included in the generation that Jesus is addressing. Alternate translation: “You have all gone wrong because you do not believe, so I hope I do not have to stay here and put up with you for very long!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) LUK 9 41 l518 figs-rquestion ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος καὶ διεστραμμένη, ἕως πότε ἔσομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς καὶ ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? 1 O unbelieving and perverted generation, until when will I be with you and bear with you? Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “You have all gone wrong because you do not believe, so I hope I do not have to stay here and put up with you for very long!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 9 41 apa3 figs-doublet ἄπιστος καὶ διεστραμμένη 1 O unbelieving and perverted generation The terms **unbelieving** and **perverted** mean similar things. Jesus uses them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “You have all gone wrong because you do not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) LUK 9 41 qk1w figs-you ἕως πότε ἔσομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς καὶ ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν? 1 until when will I be with you and bear with you? In both cases here, **you** is plural in Greek because Jesus is addressing a **generation** that is made up of many people. However, **generation** is a collective noun, and if your language would treat a collective noun as singular in a context like this, you could use the singular form of **you**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -1566,13 +1566,13 @@ LUK 9 44 gah9 figs-idiom θέσθε ὑμεῖς εἰς τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶ LUK 9 44 im3l figs-activepassive ὁ γὰρ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου μέλλει παραδίδοσθαι 1 the Son of Man is going to be handed over If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Someone is going to betray the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 9 44 ygr3 figs-123person ὁ γὰρ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου μέλλει παραδίδοσθαι 1 the Son of Man is going to be handed over Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “Someone is going to betray me, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 9 44 l520 figs-explicit ὁ γὰρ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου μέλλει παραδίδοσθαι 1 the Son of Man is going to be handed over See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “someone is going to betray me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 9 44 l521 figs-metaphor εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων 1 into the hands of men The term **hands** figuratively represent power and control. Alternate translation: “to his enemies, who will have power over him” or (if you translated in the first person) “to my enemies, who will have power over me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 9 44 l521 figs-metaphor εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων 1 into the hands of men The term **hands** represent power and control. Alternate translation: “to his enemies, who will have power over him” or (if you translated in the first person) “to my enemies, who will have power over me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 9 44 l522 figs-explicit εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων 1 into the hands of men It may be helpful to make explicit who these **men** are. Alternate translation: “to his enemies, who will have power over him” or (if you translated in the first person) “to my enemies, who will have power over me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 9 45 l523 figs-metonymy τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο…περὶ τοῦ ῥήματος τούτου 1 this word … about this word Luke uses the term **word** figuratively to describe what Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “this saying … about this saying” or “this statement … about this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 9 45 l523 figs-metonymy τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο…περὶ τοῦ ῥήματος τούτου 1 this word … about this word Luke uses the term **word** to describe what Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “this saying … about this saying” or “this statement … about this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 9 45 ub1r figs-activepassive ἦν παρακεκαλυμμένον ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 it was hidden from them If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God hid its meaning from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 9 46 dh3w writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 among them Be sure that it is clear in your translation that the pronoun **them** does not include Jesus. He was not arguing, along with the disciples, about who was the **greatest**. Alternate translation: “among the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 9 46 l524 τίς ἂν εἴη μείζων αὐτῶν 1 which of them might be the greatest Alternate translation: “which one of them was the greatest” -LUK 9 47 cx62 figs-metaphor εἰδὼς τὸν διαλογισμὸν τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 knowing the reasoning in their hearts Here Luke uses **hearts** figuratively to represent the disciples’ thoughts and evaluations. Alternate translation: “knowing what they were thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 9 47 cx62 figs-metaphor εἰδὼς τὸν διαλογισμὸν τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 knowing the reasoning in their hearts Here Luke uses **hearts** to represent the disciples’ thoughts and evaluations. Alternate translation: “knowing what they were thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 9 48 l525 figs-hyperbole τοῦτο τὸ παιδίον 1 this child Jesus is using the **child** as an extreme example. He is illustrating that since he will be present in even the most humble of his followers, the disciples do not need to argue among themselves about which of them is the greatest. Everyone who is working on behalf of Jesus possesses his full honor and dignity. Alternate translation: “even someone as seemingly insignificant as this child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 9 48 afx5 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 in my name Here, **name** is a figurative way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with him. Alternate translation: “as someone who is working on my behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 9 48 mav1 figs-metaphor ἐμὲ δέχεται 1 welcomes me This is a metaphor, but If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate it as a simile. Alternate translation: “it is as if he is welcoming me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1582,19 +1582,19 @@ LUK 9 49 uwr3 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ Ἰωάννης εἶ LUK 9 49 bj41 figs-exclusive εἴδομέν…μεθ’ ἡμῶν 1 we saw … with us When John says **we**, he is speaking of himself and some other disciples who spoke to this man, so **we** would be exclusive, if your language uses that form. However, when John says **us**, he seems to be referring to the disciples and Jesus traveling together, and since he is speaking to Jesus, **us** would be inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) LUK 9 49 py8i figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου 1 in your name The term **name** is a figurative way of referring to a person by reference to something associated with them. This expression means the person was acting with the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “on your behalf” or “as your representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 9 49 l526 figs-metaphor οὐκ ἀκολουθεῖ μεθ’ ἡμῶν 1 he does not follow with us In this case, to **follow** Jesus does not seem to mean to be one of his disciples, as in [5:27](../05/27.md), since this man was acting in Jesus’ **name**. Rather, in this context it seems to refer to traveling together in this group with Jesus. Alternate translation: “he does not travel with you in our group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 9 50 hw85 figs-litotes μὴ κωλύετε 1 Do not prevent him Jesus is figuratively expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. You can state this positively. Alternate translation: “Allow him to continue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +LUK 9 50 hw85 figs-litotes μὴ κωλύετε 1 Do not prevent him Jesus is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. You can state this positively. Alternate translation: “Allow him to continue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) LUK 9 51 l527 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 9 51 c8gx figs-activepassive ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὰς ἡμέρας τῆς ἀναλήμψεως αὐτοῦ 1 when the days of his being taken up were being fulfilled If it would be helpful in your language, you could use active verbal forms in place of these two passive forms, and in the second case you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time for God to take him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 9 51 l528 figs-idiom ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when the days … were being fulfilled Here Luke uses **days** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 9 51 l528 figs-idiom ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὰς ἡμέρας 1 when the days … were being fulfilled Here Luke uses **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “when it was almost time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 9 51 l529 figs-explicit τῆς ἀναλήμψεως αὐτοῦ 1 of his being taken up The implication is that God would take Jesus back up to heaven, and the further implication is that this would be after Jesus died. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express one or both of those things explicitly. Alternate translation: “for God to take him up to heaven” or “for him to die and for God to take him back up to heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 9 51 mq2d figs-idiom τὸ πρόσωπον ἐστήρισεν 1 he set his face **Set his face** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “he firmly decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 9 52 l530 figs-metaphor πρὸ προσώπου αὐτοῦ 1 before his face The term **face** figuratively means the front of a person. Alternate translation: “ahead of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 9 52 l530 figs-metaphor πρὸ προσώπου αὐτοῦ 1 before his face The term **face** means the front of a person. Alternate translation: “ahead of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 9 52 l531 translate-names κώμην Σαμαρειτῶν 1 a Samaritan village **Samaritan** is a name that refers to a place that is in the region of Samaria or to a person who is from that region. Samaria was between Galilee and Judea, and the people who lived there were not Jewish and they were hostile to the Jews. The terms **Samaritan** and Samaria occur several times in this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 9 52 b6ct figs-idiom ὡς ἑτοιμάσαι αὐτῷ 1 so as to prepare for him This phrase means to make arrangements in anticipation of his arrival there, such as for food to eat, a place to stay, and possibly also a place to speak. Alternate translation: “to arrange his accommodations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 9 53 v61k οὐκ ἐδέξαντο αὐτόν 1 they did not welcome him Alternate translation: “the Samaritans did not want him to stay with them” LUK 9 53 l532 figs-synecdoche τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ἦν πορευόμενον εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 his face was going to Jerusalem Luke is using one part of Jesus to represent all of him. Luke may use the **face** because Jesus was facing in the direction he was traveling. Or this may echo the expression “he set his face” in [9:52](../09/52.md). Alternate translation: “he was traveling toward Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 9 53 n62j figs-explicit ὅτι τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ἦν πορευόμενον εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 because his face was going to Jerusalem The Samaritans and the Jews hated each other. Therefore the Samaritans did not want to help Jesus travel to Jerusalem, which was the Jewish capital and the place where the Jews held their major religious observances. Alternate translation: “because they did not want to help any Jew make a journey to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 9 54 a8sf figs-metaphor ἰδόντες 1 saw The word **saw** figuratively represents notice and attention. Alternate translation: “recognized that the Samaritans were not going to accommodate Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 9 54 a8sf figs-metaphor ἰδόντες 1 saw The word **saw** represents notice and attention. Alternate translation: “recognized that the Samaritans were not going to accommodate Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 9 54 y4rq figs-explicit θέλεις εἴπωμεν πῦρ καταβῆναι ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ ἀναλῶσαι αὐτούς? 1 do you want us to tell fire to come down from heaven and consume them? James and John suggested this method of judgment because they knew that this was how the prophets such as Elijah had called down judgment upon people who rejected God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “do you want us to tell fire to come down from heaven to consume them, as Elijah did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 9 54 l533 figs-exclusive θέλεις εἴπωμεν 1 do you want us to tell By **us**, James and John mean themselves, but not Jesus, so **us** is exclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) LUK 9 55 pj6b writing-pronouns στραφεὶς…ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς 1 he turned and rebuked them The pronoun **them** refers to James and John. Jesus did not condemn the Samaritans, as the disciples expected. Alternate translation: “Jesus turned around and rebuked James and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1606,19 +1606,19 @@ LUK 9 58 ls02 figs-ellipsis τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ κα LUK 9 58 r7vq figs-123person ὁ…Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man **Jesus** is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 9 58 l535 figs-explicit ὁ…Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 9 58 l536 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔχει ποῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν κλίνῃ 1 does not have anywhere to lay his head Jesus implies that if this person were to follow him, he too might not have a home. Alternate translation: “does not have a home anywhere, so if you become his disciple, expect that you will not have a home either” or (if you translated in the first person) “do not have a home anywhere, so if you become my disciple, expect that you will not have a home either” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 9 58 l537 figs-metonymy οὐκ ἔχει ποῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν κλίνῃ 1 does not have anywhere to lay his head This expression figuratively means “does not have anywhere to sleep,” by association with something that a person does in order to sleep, **lay** down his **head**. And a place to sleep, by association, means a home, since that is where people sleep. Alternate translation: “does not have a home anywhere” or (if you translated in the first person) “do not have a home anywhere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 9 58 ff62 figs-hyperbole οὐκ ἔχει ποῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν κλίνῃ 1 does not have anywhere to lay his head Jesus actually did find places to sleep wherever he went to teach and heal, but he says figuratively that he has no such place at all to emphasize that he has no permanent home. Alternate translation: “does not have a permanent home” or (if you translated in the first person) “do not have a permanent home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +LUK 9 58 l537 figs-metonymy οὐκ ἔχει ποῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν κλίνῃ 1 does not have anywhere to lay his head This expression means “does not have anywhere to sleep,” by association with something that a person does in order to sleep, **lay** down his **head**. And a place to sleep, by association, means a home, since that is where people sleep. Alternate translation: “does not have a home anywhere” or (if you translated in the first person) “do not have a home anywhere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 9 58 ff62 figs-hyperbole οὐκ ἔχει ποῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν κλίνῃ 1 does not have anywhere to lay his head Jesus actually did find places to sleep wherever he went to teach and heal, but he says that he has no such place at all to emphasize that he has no permanent home. Alternate translation: “does not have a permanent home” or (if you translated in the first person) “do not have a permanent home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 9 59 l538 figs-metaphor ἀκολούθει μοι 1 Follow me As in [5:27](../05/27.md), to **follow** Jesus means to become one of his disciples. Alternate translation: “I want you to be one of my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 9 59 l539 ἐπίτρεψόν μοι ἀπελθόντι, πρῶτον θάψαι τὸν πατέρα μου 1 permit me to go first to bury my father It is unclear whether the man’s father had died and that he would bury him immediately, or whether the man wanted to wait for a longer amount of time until his father died so that he could bury him then. The main point is that the man wanted to do something else first before going with Jesus. Alternate translation: “before I do that, let me go and bury my father” LUK 9 59 l540 figs-metonymy ἐπίτρεψόν μοι ἀπελθόντι, πρῶτον θάψαι τὸν πατέρα μου 1 permit me to go first to bury my father One possible meaning of this expression is that the man wanted to wait until he had received his inheritance from his father so that he could live on that money while traveling with Jesus. If so, then he would be referring to the inheritance by association with his father’s death, and he would be referring to his father’s death by association with his burial. Alternate translation: “let me wait until I receive my inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 9 60 l541 figs-metaphor ἄφες τοὺς νεκροὺς θάψαι τοὺς ἑαυτῶν νεκρούς 1 Let the dead bury their own dead Jesus does not mean literally that dead people will bury other dead people. Instead, the expression **the dead** likely refers figuratively to those who do not follow Jesus and so are spiritually dead. Alternate translation: “Let people who are not concerned about spiritual things take care of everyday matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 9 60 l541 figs-metaphor ἄφες τοὺς νεκροὺς θάψαι τοὺς ἑαυτῶν νεκρούς 1 Let the dead bury their own dead Jesus does not mean literally that dead people will bury other dead people. Instead, the expression **the dead** likely refers to those who do not follow Jesus and so are spiritually dead. Alternate translation: “Let people who are not concerned about spiritual things take care of everyday matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 9 60 l542 figs-nominaladj τοὺς νεκροὺς 1 the dead Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are dead” or “people who are not concerned about spiritual things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 9 60 l543 figs-abstractnouns τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the kingdom of God See how you decided to translate this phrase in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “how God will rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 9 61 l544 figs-metaphor ἀκολουθήσω σοι 1 I will follow you As in [5:27](../05/27.md), to **follow** Jesus means to become one of his disciples. Alternate translation: “I want to be one of your disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 9 61 l545 πρῶτον δὲ ἐπίτρεψόν μοι 1 but first permit me Alternate translation: “but before I do that, please let me” -LUK 9 61 l546 figs-metonymy τοῖς εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου 1 those in my home This person is referring figuratively to his family by association with where they live. Alternate translation: “to my family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 9 61 l546 figs-metonymy τοῖς εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου 1 those in my home This person is referring to his family by association with where they live. Alternate translation: “to my family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 9 62 l547 figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς ἐπιβαλὼν τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἄροτρον καὶ βλέπων εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω, εὔθετός ἐστιν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 No one, having put his hand on a plow, yet looking to the things behind, is fit for the kingdom of God Jesus responds with an illustration that is designed to teach this person about what is required to be his disciple. He means that a person is not suitable for the kingdom to God if his past loyalties are more important to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain this illustration. Alternate translation, add: “No one can plow straight if he is looking backwards, and in the same way, no one will be useful in the kingdom of God if his past loyalties are more important to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 9 62 l548 figs-synecdoche οὐδεὶς ἐπιβαλὼν τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἄροτρον 1 No one, having put his hand on a plow Jesus refers figuratively to a person using a plow by describing one part of that activity, guiding the plow with the **hand**. Alternate translation: “No one who is using a plow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 9 62 l548 figs-synecdoche οὐδεὶς ἐπιβαλὼν τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἄροτρον 1 No one, having put his hand on a plow Jesus refers to a person using a plow by describing one part of that activity, guiding the plow with the **hand**. Alternate translation: “No one who is using a plow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 9 62 l553 translate-unknown οὐδεὶς ἐπιβαλὼν τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἄροτρον 1 No one, having put his hand on a plow A **plow** is a tool that farmers use to break up soil to prepare a field for planting. Plows have sharp, pointed prongs that dig into the soil. They usually have handles that the farmer uses to guide the plow. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of tool, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “No one who needs to go straight forward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 9 62 l549 figs-explicit βλέπων εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω 1 looking to the things behind The implication is that anyone who is looking backwards while plowing cannot guide the plow where it needs to go. That person must focus on looking forward in order to plow well. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “looking backwards, and so not going in the right direction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 9 62 l550 figs-abstractnouns εὔθετός ἐστιν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 is fit for the kingdom of God See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “can really let God rule his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1627,10 +1627,10 @@ LUK 10 1 u8l6 writing-newevent μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα 1 And after these thi LUK 10 1 l551 ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord Here Luke refers to Jesus by the title **the Lord** to show his authority. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” LUK 10 1 m75c translate-textvariants ἑβδομήκοντα δύο 1 72 See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to say **72** or “70” in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 10 1 g8ka figs-idiom ἀπέστειλεν αὐτοὺς ἀνὰ δύο 1 sent them out by twos This phrase is an idiom. Alternate translation: “sent them out two by two” or “sent them out in groups of two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 10 1 l554 figs-metaphor πρὸ προσώπου αὐτοῦ 1 before his face Here, **face** figuratively means the front of a person. Alternate translation: “ahead of him” or “to prepare the way for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 10 1 l554 figs-metaphor πρὸ προσώπου αὐτοῦ 1 before his face Here, **face** means the front of a person. Alternate translation: “ahead of him” or “to prepare the way for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 10 2 fx9w figs-events ἔλεγεν δὲ πρὸς αὐτούς 1 And he said to them Jesus said these things to the 72 disciples before they actually went out. Alternate translation: “He had said to them” or “Before they went out, he told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) -LUK 10 2 ju6z figs-metaphor ὁ μὲν θερισμὸς πολύς, οἱ δὲ ἐργάται ὀλίγοι 1 The harvest is plentiful, but the laborers are few This statement means, “There is a big crop, but there are not enough workers to bring it in.” Jesus is speaking figuratively. Alternate translation: “There are many people who are ready to enter God’s kingdom, but there are not enough disciples to help them understand how to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 10 2 l555 figs-exmetaphor τοῦ Κυρίου τοῦ θερισμοῦ 1 the Lord of the harvest Jesus continues to speak figuratively and extends his metaphor by describing God as **the Lord of the harvest**. Alternate translation: “God, who leads people to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +LUK 10 2 ju6z figs-metaphor ὁ μὲν θερισμὸς πολύς, οἱ δὲ ἐργάται ὀλίγοι 1 The harvest is plentiful, but the laborers are few This statement means, “There is a big crop, but there are not enough workers to bring it in.” Jesus is speaking. Alternate translation: “There are many people who are ready to enter God’s kingdom, but there are not enough disciples to help them understand how to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 10 2 l555 figs-exmetaphor τοῦ Κυρίου τοῦ θερισμοῦ 1 the Lord of the harvest Jesus continues to speak and extends his metaphor by describing God as **the Lord of the harvest**. Alternate translation: “God, who leads people to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) LUK 10 2 l556 figs-exmetaphor ὅπως ἐργάτας ἐκβάλῃ εἰς τὸν θερισμὸν αὐτοῦ 1 that he would send out laborers into his harvest Jesus extends his metaphor even further by describing disciples who help others to trust in him as **laborers** in the **harvest**. Alternate translation: “to send more disciples to go and help people trust in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) LUK 10 3 x732 figs-explicit ὑπάγετε 1 Go If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly where Jesus wants these disciples to go. Alternate translation: “Go to the cities and places where I am sending you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 10 3 l557 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Jesus uses the term **behold** to get his disciples to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1638,13 +1638,13 @@ LUK 10 3 u8h7 figs-simile ἀποστέλλω ὑμᾶς ὡς ἄρνας ἐν LUK 10 3 l558 translate-unknown ἀποστέλλω ὑμᾶς ὡς ἄρνας ἐν μέσῳ λύκων 1 I send you out as lambs in the midst of wolves Jesus’ disciples would have known that **lambs** are gentle animals that have been domesticated for their wool, milk, meat, and leather, and that **wolves** are predatory land animals, similar to large dogs, that hunt and kill in packs. If you would like to reproduce the simile, but your readers would not be familiar with these animals, you could use general terms. Alternate translation: “I am sending you out like harmless animals that will encounter a group of predators” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 10 3 l559 figs-you ὑμᾶς 1 you Since Jesus is speaking to these 72 disciples as a group, **you** is plural here and through [10:12](../10/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 10 4 l560 figs-idiom μὴ βαστάζετε βαλλάντιον, μὴ πήραν, μὴ ὑποδήματα 1 Do not carry a money bag, nor a sack, nor sandals Here Jesus is using the word **carry** in an idiomatic sense to mean “bring along.” He is not envisioning that these disciples might carry their sandals in their hands. Alternate translation: “Do not bring any money or provisions or extra clothes with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 10 4 fz6p figs-metonymy μὴ βαστάζετε βαλλάντιον, μὴ πήραν, μὴ ὑποδήματα 1 Do not carry a money bag, nor a sack, nor sandals While Jesus probably means what he says literally about not bringing these specific items, he is also using them figuratively with larger meanings. The **money bag** represents the money it would contain. The **sack** represents the provisions someone would carry in it for a journey. The **sandals** represent, in this culture, more clothing and equipment than is strictly needed. Alternate translation: “Do not bring any money or provisions or extra clothes with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 10 4 fz6p figs-metonymy μὴ βαστάζετε βαλλάντιον, μὴ πήραν, μὴ ὑποδήματα 1 Do not carry a money bag, nor a sack, nor sandals While Jesus probably means what he says literally about not bringing these specific items, he is also using them with larger meanings. The **money bag** represents the money it would contain. The **sack** represents the provisions someone would carry in it for a journey. The **sandals** represent, in this culture, more clothing and equipment than is strictly needed. Alternate translation: “Do not bring any money or provisions or extra clothes with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 10 4 l561 figs-explicit μὴ βαστάζετε βαλλάντιον, μὴ πήραν, μὴ ὑποδήματα 1 Do not carry a money bag, nor a sack, nor sandals If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why Jesus does not want his disciples to bring these things with them. As he will explain in [10:7](../10/07.md), he wants the people who receive his message to provide for those who bring the message. Alternate translation: “Do not bring any money or provisions or extra clothes with you, because the people who receive my message will provide for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 10 4 tj52 figs-hyperbole μηδένα κατὰ τὴν ὁδὸν ἀσπάσησθε 1 greet no one on the road Jesus is generalizing to indicate that these disciples should go quickly to the places where he is sending them to prepare the way for him. He is not telling them to be rude. Alternate translation: “make your journey as quickly as possible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 10 5 l562 figs-quotesinquotes λέγετε, εἰρήνη τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ 1 say, ‘Peace be to this house’ Luke is quoting Jesus, and Jesus is quoting what he wants his disciples to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “say that you want there to be peace in that house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 10 5 zk69 figs-metonymy εἰρήνη τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ 1 Peace be to this house The term **house** refers figuratively to the people who live in the house. Alternate translation: “May the people in this household have peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 10 5 zk69 figs-metonymy εἰρήνη τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ 1 Peace be to this house The term **house** refers to the people who live in the house. Alternate translation: “May the people in this household have peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 10 5 l563 figs-idiom εἰρήνη τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ 1 Peace be to this house This was an idiomatic expression, based on the Hebrew concept of “shalom,” that was both a greeting and a blessing. Alternate translation: “I greet all of you in this household and I wish for God to bless you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 10 6 x5e4 figs-idiom υἱὸς εἰρήνης 1 a son of peace The expression **son of** refers figuratively to a person who shares the qualities of something. Alternate translation: “a person who wants peace with God and with people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 10 6 x5e4 figs-idiom υἱὸς εἰρήνης 1 a son of peace The expression **son of** refers to a person who shares the qualities of something. Alternate translation: “a person who wants peace with God and with people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 10 6 pq5j figs-metaphor ἐπαναπαήσεται ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἡ εἰρήνη ὑμῶν 1 your peace will rest upon him Here, **upon** creates a spatial metaphor. It means that this person will experience the peace that God gives in a special and lasting way. Alternate translation: “he will deeply experience the peace that you wish him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 10 6 it4v figs-ellipsis εἰ…μή γε 1 if not It may be helpful to restate the entire phrase. Alternate translation: “if there is no one there who wants peace with God and with people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 10 6 zpx9 figs-personification ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἀνακάμψει 1 it will return to you Jesus describes **peace** as a living thing that could choose to leave one person and go to another person. Alternate translation: “you will experience that peace yourselves instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -1665,36 +1665,36 @@ LUK 10 11 l634 figs-youdual ἀπομασσόμεθα 1 we wipe off Since Jesus LUK 10 11 s7ks figs-idiom πλὴν τοῦτο γινώσκετε 1 But know this The phrase introduces a warning. Alternate translation: “But we must warn you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 10 11 fdk3 figs-abstractnouns ἤγγικεν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the kingdom of God has come near See how you translated the similar sentence in [10:9](../10/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 10 12 hhl1 λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι 1 I say to you that Jesus says this to emphasize that what he is about to tell these disciples is very important. Alternate translation: “Take special note that” -LUK 10 12 l568 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 on that day Jesus is using the term **day** to refer figuratively to a specific time. Alternate translation: “when God judges everyone for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 10 12 l568 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 on that day Jesus is using the term **day** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “when God judges everyone for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 10 12 m7ch figs-explicit ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 on that day Jesus expected his disciples to understand that he was referring to the time when God will bring final judgment. Alternate translation: “when God judges everyone for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 10 12 qg62 figs-metonymy Σοδόμοις…ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται, ἢ τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 it will be more tolerable for Sodom than for that city Jesus uses the name of the city, **Sodom**, to refer figuratively to the people who lived there. Alternate translation: “God will judge the people of that town more severely than he will judge the people of Sodom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 10 12 qg62 figs-metonymy Σοδόμοις…ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται, ἢ τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 it will be more tolerable for Sodom than for that city Jesus uses the name of the city, **Sodom**, to refer to the people who lived there. Alternate translation: “God will judge the people of that town more severely than he will judge the people of Sodom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 10 12 l569 figs-explicit Σοδόμοις…ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται, ἢ τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 it will be more tolerable for Sodom than for that city Jesus assumes that these disciples will know that God destroyed the city of Sodom because the people in it were so wicked. The implication is that it must therefore be an extremely serious offense to reject the messengers of the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “God will judge the people of that town more severely than he will judge the people of Sodom, even though he destroyed their city because they were so wicked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 10 13 sf42 figs-apostrophe οὐαί σοι, Χοραζείν! οὐαί σοι, Βηθσαϊδά! 1 Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! Jesus is speaking figuratively to two cities that he knows cannot hear him. He is doing this to show in a very strong way how he feels about those cities. He is actually speaking to the people who can hear him, the disciples whom he is sending out. If your readers might not understand this kind of figurative speech, you could translate Jesus’ words as if he were speaking directly to his disciples. Alternate translation: “Chorazin and Bethsaida are two of the cities whose people God will judge severely for rejecting my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) +LUK 10 13 sf42 figs-apostrophe οὐαί σοι, Χοραζείν! οὐαί σοι, Βηθσαϊδά! 1 Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! Jesus is speaking to two cities that he knows cannot hear him. He is doing this to show in a very strong way how he feels about those cities. He is actually speaking to the people who can hear him, the disciples whom he is sending out. If your readers might not understand this kind of figurative speech, you could translate Jesus’ words as if he were speaking directly to his disciples. Alternate translation: “Chorazin and Bethsaida are two of the cities whose people God will judge severely for rejecting my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) LUK 10 13 l570 figs-idiom οὐαί σοι, Χοραζείν! οὐαί σοι, Βηθσαϊδά! 1 Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! See how you translated this phrase in [6:24](../06/24.md). Alternate translation: “how terrible it will be for you, Chorazin and Bethsaida!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 10 13 l571 figs-metonymy οὐαί σοι, Χοραζείν! οὐαί σοι, Βηθσαϊδά! 1 Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! Jesus is using the names of these cities to refer figuratively to the people who live there. Alternate translation: “How terrible it will be for you people of Chorazin and Bethsaida!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 10 13 l571 figs-metonymy οὐαί σοι, Χοραζείν! οὐαί σοι, Βηθσαϊδά! 1 Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! Jesus is using the names of these cities to refer to the people who live there. Alternate translation: “How terrible it will be for you people of Chorazin and Bethsaida!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 10 13 l572 figs-you οὐαί σοι, Χοραζείν! οὐαί σοι, Βηθσαϊδά! 1 Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! Jesus is addressing an individual city in each of these phrases, so **you** is singular in both cases. However, if you decide to translate this as “you people of Chorazin and Bethsaida,” then **you** would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 10 13 l573 translate-names Χοραζείν…Βηθσαϊδά! 1 Chorazin … Bethsaida These are the names of two cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 10 13 mvq5 figs-hypo ὅτι εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις, αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν, πάλαι ἂν…μετενόησαν 1 For if the mighty works that happened in you had happened in Tyre and Sidon, they would have repented long ago Jesus is describing a situation that might have happened in the past but actually did not. He is doing this to express disappointment and regret about what is happening in the present. Be sure to translate this in such a way that your readers will know that this event actually did not happen but they will understand why Jesus is imagining it. Alternate translation: “I can well imagine that if the people of Tyre and Sidon had witnessed the miracles that I performed for you, they would have repented a long time ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 10 13 l574 figs-explicit ὅτι εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις, αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν, πάλαι ἂν…μετενόησαν 1 For if the mighty works that happened in you had happened in Tyre and Sidon, they would have repented long ago Jesus assumes that these disciples will know that God destroyed the cities of Tyre and Sidon because the people in them were so wicked. So the implication is similar to the one about the people of Sodom. Alternate translation: “God destroyed the cities of Tyre and Sidon because they were so wicked. But even the people who lived in those cities would have repented if they had seen the miracles I did in Chorazin and Bethsaida. So the people of Chorazin and Bethsaida certainly should have repented as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 10 13 l575 figs-metonymy Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι 1 Tyre and Sidon Jesus uses the names of these cities to refer figuratively to the people who lived there. Alternate translation: “the people of Tyre and Sidon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 10 13 l575 figs-metonymy Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι 1 Tyre and Sidon Jesus uses the names of these cities to refer to the people who lived there. Alternate translation: “the people of Tyre and Sidon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 10 13 l576 translate-names Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι 1 Tyre and Sidon **Tyre** and **Sidon** are the names of two cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 10 13 l577 figs-youdual αἱ δυνάμεις, αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν 1 the mighty works that happened in you Since Jesus is addressing two cities, **you** would be dual here if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) LUK 10 13 it4x translate-symaction ἂν ἐν σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ καθήμενοι μετενόησαν 1 they would have repented … sitting in sackcloth and ashes Jesus is saying that the people of Tyre and Sidon would have performed these actions, which are signs of humility and sorrow, to show that they were very sorry for committing their sins. Alternate translation: “they would have shown how sorry they were for their sins … by sitting on the ground wearing rough clothes and putting ashes on their heads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -LUK 10 14 l578 figs-metonymy Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι, ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται…ἢ ὑμῖν 1 it will be more tolerable for Tyre and for Sidon … than for you Jesus uses the names of these cities, **Tyre** and **Sidon**, to refer figuratively to the people who lived there. Alternate translation: “God will judge you people of Chorazin and Bethsaida more severely than he will judge the people who lived in Tyre and Sidon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 10 14 l578 figs-metonymy Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι, ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται…ἢ ὑμῖν 1 it will be more tolerable for Tyre and for Sidon … than for you Jesus uses the names of these cities, **Tyre** and **Sidon**, to refer to the people who lived there. Alternate translation: “God will judge you people of Chorazin and Bethsaida more severely than he will judge the people who lived in Tyre and Sidon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 10 14 ikt3 figs-explicit Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι, ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται…ἢ ὑμῖν 1 it will be more tolerable for Tyre and for Sidon … than for you Jesus assumes that these disciples will know that God destroyed the cities of Tyre and Sidon because the people in them were so wicked. The implication, as in the case of Sodom, is that it must therefore be an extremely grave offense to reject the messengers of the kingdom of God. Alternate translation: “God will judge you people of Chorazin and Bethsaida more severely than he will judge the people who lived in Tyre and Sidon, even though he destroyed their cities because they were so wicked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 10 14 l579 figs-explicit Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι, ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται…ἢ ὑμῖν 1 it will be more tolerable for Tyre and for Sidon … than for you It may be helpful to state clearly the reason why God will judge Chorazin and Bethsaida. Alternate translation: “because you did not repent and believe in me even though you saw me do miracles, God will judge you people of Chorazin and Bethsaida more severely than he will judge the people who lived in Tyre and Sidon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 10 14 txw5 figs-explicit ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 at the judgment The disciples would have understood that Jesus was referring to the time when God will bring final judgment. Alternate translation: “at the time when God judges everyone for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 10 14 l580 figs-youdual ὑμῖν 1 you Since Jesus is addressing two cities, **you** would be dual here if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. Alternate translation: “you people of Chorazin and Bethsaida” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -LUK 10 15 h28u figs-apostrophe σύ, Καφαρναούμ, μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ? 1 you, Capernaum, you will not be exalted to heaven, will you? Jesus is speaking figuratively to another city that he knows cannot hear him. He is doing this once again to show in a very strong way how he feels about this city. He is actually speaking to the people who can hear him, the disciples whom he is sending out. If your readers might not understand this kind of figurative speech, you could translate Jesus’ words as if he were speaking directly to his disciples. Alternate translation: “The people of Capernaum are wrong to think that God is going to honor them greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) +LUK 10 15 h28u figs-apostrophe σύ, Καφαρναούμ, μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ? 1 you, Capernaum, you will not be exalted to heaven, will you? Jesus is speaking to another city that he knows cannot hear him. He is doing this once again to show in a very strong way how he feels about this city. He is actually speaking to the people who can hear him, the disciples whom he is sending out. If your readers might not understand this kind of figurative speech, you could translate Jesus’ words as if he were speaking directly to his disciples. Alternate translation: “The people of Capernaum are wrong to think that God is going to honor them greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) LUK 10 15 l581 figs-doublenegatives σύ, Καφαρναούμ, μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ? 1 you, Capernaum, you will not be exalted to heaven, will you? In Greek, the first word of the question that Jesus asks Capernaum is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding, **will you?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “you people of Capernaum, do you really think that God is going to honor you greatly?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 10 15 enp6 figs-rquestion σύ, Καφαρναούμ, μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ? 1 you, Capernaum, you will not be exalted to heaven, will you? Jesus is using the question form to teach. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “you people of Capernaum are wrong to think that God is going to honor you greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -LUK 10 15 gk9v figs-metaphor σύ, Καφαρναούμ, μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ? 1 you, Capernaum, you will not be exalted to heaven, will you? To be **exalted** or “lifted up” is a spatial metaphor that figuratively indicates receiving honor. To be lifted all the way up **to heaven** (or “to the sky,” another possible meaning) figuratively means to receive very great honor. Alternate translation: “you people of Capernaum are wrong to think that God is going to honor you greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 10 15 l582 figs-metonymy σύ, Καφαρναούμ 1 you, Capernaum Jesus uses the name of this city to refer figuratively to the people who live there. Alternate translation: “you people of Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 10 15 gk9v figs-metaphor σύ, Καφαρναούμ, μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ? 1 you, Capernaum, you will not be exalted to heaven, will you? To be **exalted** or “lifted up” is a spatial metaphor that indicates receiving honor. To be lifted all the way up **to heaven** (or “to the sky,” another possible meaning) means to receive very great honor. Alternate translation: “you people of Capernaum are wrong to think that God is going to honor you greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 10 15 l582 figs-metonymy σύ, Καφαρναούμ 1 you, Capernaum Jesus uses the name of this city to refer to the people who live there. Alternate translation: “you people of Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 10 15 l583 figs-you σύ, Καφαρναούμ 1 you, Capernaum Jesus is addressing an individual city, so **you** is singular here and in the rest of this verse. However, if you decide to translate this as “you people of Capernaum,” then **you** would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 10 15 l584 translate-names Καφαρναούμ 1 Capernaum **Capernaum** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 10 15 l585 figs-activepassive ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ 1 you will … be exalted to heaven If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “God is going to honor you greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 10 15 l586 figs-explicit ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ 1 you will … be exalted to heaven If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the reason why the people of Capernaum think that God would want to honor them. Alternate translation: “God is going to honor you greatly because you are such good people and your city is so prosperous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 10 15 l587 figs-metaphor τοῦ ᾍδου καταβήσῃ 1 You will be brought down as far as Hades To be **brought down** is another spatial metaphor. It figuratively indicates experiencing punishment and dishonor. To be brought down all the way to Hades, the underworld (that is, the abode of the dead), figuratively means to receive very great punishment or dishonor. Alternate translation: “God is going to punish you severely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 10 15 l587 figs-metaphor τοῦ ᾍδου καταβήσῃ 1 You will be brought down as far as Hades To be **brought down** is another spatial metaphor. It indicates experiencing punishment and dishonor. To be brought down all the way to Hades, the underworld (that is, the abode of the dead), means to receive very great punishment or dishonor. Alternate translation: “God is going to punish you severely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 10 15 bjh5 figs-activepassive τοῦ ᾍδου καταβήσῃ 1 You will be brought down as far as Hades If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “God is going to punish you severely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 10 15 l588 figs-explicit τοῦ ᾍδου καταβήσῃ 1 You will be brought down as far as Hades It may be helpful to state clearly the reason why God will judge Capernaum. Alternate translation: “God is going to punish you severely because you did not repent and believe in me, even though you saw me do miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 10 16 i786 figs-metaphor ὁ ἀκούων ὑμῶν, ἐμοῦ ἀκούει 1 The one who listens to you listens to me You could translate this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “When someone listens to you, it is as if they were listening to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1704,7 +1704,7 @@ LUK 10 16 eus8 figs-explicit τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με 1 the one wh LUK 10 17 m7nh figs-explicit ὑπέστρεψαν δὲ οἱ ἑβδομήκοντα δύο 1 then the 72 returned Some languages will need to say that the 72 actually went out first, as UST does. Alternate translation: “So the 72 disciples went out and did as Jesus had told them to do, and then they returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 10 17 prj8 translate-textvariants ἑβδομήκοντα δύο 1 72 As in [10:1](../10/01.md), see the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to say **72** or “70” in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 10 17 l589 figs-activepassive τὰ δαιμόνια ὑποτάσσεται ἡμῖν 1 the demons are subjected to us If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the demons obey us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 10 17 cx7b figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου 1 in your name The term **name** refers figuratively to Jesus’ power and authority. Alternate translation: “when we command them using the authority that you gave us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 10 17 cx7b figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου 1 in your name The term **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. Alternate translation: “when we command them using the authority that you gave us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 10 18 a37w figs-simile ἐθεώρουν τὸν Σατανᾶν ὡς ἀστραπὴν ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πεσόντα 1 I was watching Satan fall from heaven like lightning Jesus uses a simile to express that while his 72 disciples were out proclaiming the kingdom of God, he discerned that this was a quick and decisive defeat for Satan. If your readers would be familiar with lightning, you could use the same simile in your translation. Otherwise, you could use another comparison to something that happens rapidly and evidently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) LUK 10 18 v8fl figs-metaphor ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πεσόντα 1 fall from heaven While Jesus actually did see this in his vision, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the meaning of this image, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 10 18 l590 translate-names Σατανᾶν 1 Satan **Satan** is the name of the devil. It occurs a few more times in this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1718,7 +1718,7 @@ LUK 10 20 cs52 figs-hyperbole ἐν τούτῳ μὴ χαίρετε, ὅτι τ LUK 10 20 l594 figs-activepassive τὰ πνεύματα ὑμῖν ὑποτάσσεται 1 the spirits are subjected to you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the demons must obey you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 10 20 s4cj figs-activepassive τὰ ὀνόματα ὑμῶν ἐνγέγραπται ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 your names are written in the heavens If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “God has written down your names in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 10 20 l595 figs-explicit τὰ ὀνόματα ὑμῶν ἐνγέγραπται ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 your names are written in the heavens While it may be literally true that there is a written record of names in heaven, you may wish to express the meaning and significance of this in your translation. Alternate translation: “God in heaven knows that you belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 10 21 l596 figs-idiom ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 At that hour Here Luke uses the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “At that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 10 21 l596 figs-idiom ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 At that hour Here Luke uses the term **hour** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “At that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 10 21 l597 figs-youformal ἐξομολογοῦμαί σοι, Πάτερ 1 I thank you, Father Use your best judgment about whether the formal or informal form of **you** would be more natural in your language here. Jesus is speaking as an adult son would to a father with whom he had a close relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]]) LUK 10 21 mf9d guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) LUK 10 21 rs3w figs-merism Κύριε τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῆς γῆς 1 Lord of heaven and earth Jesus is using a figure of speech to describe something by naming its two components. Together **heaven** and **earth** represent everything that exists. Alternate translation: “you who rule over everything that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) @@ -1726,8 +1726,8 @@ LUK 10 21 n6xb figs-extrainfo ταῦτα 1 these things Jesus is likely using t LUK 10 21 l598 figs-nominaladj σοφῶν καὶ συνετῶν 1 the wise and intelligent Jesus is using the adjectives **wise** and **intelligent** as nouns in order to indicate people who have those qualities. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “people who are wise and intelligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 10 21 i2zf figs-irony σοφῶν καὶ συνετῶν 1 the wise and intelligent Because God had concealed the truth from these people, they actually were not wise and intelligent, even though they thought they were. Alternate translation: “people who think they are wise and intelligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) LUK 10 21 l599 figs-doublet σοφῶν καὶ συνετῶν 1 the wise and intelligent The terms **wise** and **intelligent** mean similar things. Jesus uses the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “people who think they understand everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -LUK 10 21 a175 figs-metaphor νηπίοις 1 infants **Infants** refers figuratively to people who may not have much education, but who are willing to accept Jesus’ teachings in the same way that little children willingly listen to those they trust. You could explain the meaning of this metaphor in your translation, or you could translate it as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “people who trust my teachings implicitly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 10 21 nm6t figs-metaphor ἔμπροσθέν σου 1 before you Jesus says **before you** to mean “where you could see” or “in your sight.” Sight, in turn, figuratively means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “in your judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 10 21 a175 figs-metaphor νηπίοις 1 infants **Infants** refers to people who may not have much education, but who are willing to accept Jesus’ teachings in the same way that little children willingly listen to those they trust. You could explain the meaning of this metaphor in your translation, or you could translate it as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “people who trust my teachings implicitly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 10 21 nm6t figs-metaphor ἔμπροσθέν σου 1 before you Jesus says **before you** to mean “where you could see” or “in your sight.” Sight, in turn, means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “in your judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 10 22 e47e figs-activepassive πάντα μοι παρεδόθη ὑπὸ τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 All things have been handed over to me from my Father If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “My Father has handed everything over to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 10 22 l600 grammar-connect-exceptions οὐδεὶς γινώσκει τίς ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς, εἰ μὴ ὁ Πατήρ 1 no one knows who the Son is except the Father If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus is making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “only the Father knows who the Son is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) LUK 10 22 six4 γινώσκει τίς ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς 1 knows who the Son is Here, the Greek word translated **knows** means to know from personal experience. God the Father knows Jesus in this way. Alternate translation: “is acquainted with the Son” or “is acquainted with me” @@ -1759,7 +1759,7 @@ LUK 10 27 l608 figs-hendiadys ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν 1 And LUK 10 27 l609 figs-youcrowd ἀγαπήσεις 1 you will love Here it may not be clear whether to use the singular or plural form of **you** because this is a short quotation from the Scriptures and the context is not given. The word is actually singular because, even though Moses said this to the Israelites as a group, each individual person was supposed to obey this command. So in your translation, use the singular forms of **you** **your**, and **yourself** in this verse, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) LUK 10 27 hxk1 figs-declarative ἀγαπήσεις 1 you will love The Scriptures are using a statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) LUK 10 27 fzb6 figs-merism ἐξ ὅλης καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ψυχῇ σου, καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ἰσχύϊ σου, καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ διανοίᾳ σου 1 with all your heart, and with all your soul, and with all your strength, and with all your mind Moses is using a figure of speech that describes something by listing its parts. Alternate translation: “with your entire being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -LUK 10 27 l610 figs-metaphor ἐξ ὅλης καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ψυχῇ σου 1 with all your heart, and with all your soul The words **heart** and **soul** figuratively represent a person’s inner being. If you do not translate all four of the terms here with a single phrase, you could represent these two together. Alternate translation: “with all of your inner self” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 10 27 l610 figs-metaphor ἐξ ὅλης καρδίας σου, καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ψυχῇ σου 1 with all your heart, and with all your soul The words **heart** and **soul** represent a person’s inner being. If you do not translate all four of the terms here with a single phrase, you could represent these two together. Alternate translation: “with all of your inner self” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 10 27 k1el figs-ellipsis καὶ, τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν 1 and your neighbor as yourself The lawyer is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation (filling in ellipsis): “and you must also love your neighbor as much as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 10 28 l611 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical τοῦτο ποίει, καὶ ζήσῃ 1 Do this, and you will live Jesus is describing a conditional situation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express it that way. Alternate translation: “If you do this, then God will give you eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) LUK 10 28 xd4n ζήσῃ 1 you will live Alternate translation: “God will give you eternal life” @@ -1798,7 +1798,7 @@ LUK 10 36 v31w πλησίον…γεγονέναι 1 became a neighbor Alternat LUK 10 36 kv4z figs-idiom τοῦ ἐμπεσόντος εἰς τοὺς λῃστάς 1 the one who fell among the robbers As in [10:30](../10/30.md), be sure it is clear in your translation that this does not mean that the man fell down accidentally. Rather, this is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the man whom the robbers attacked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 10 37 ig9x figs-explicit πορεύου καὶ σὺ ποίει ὁμοίως 1 You go and do likewise The implication is that the lawyer has given the correct answer. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, and you could also indicate what **do likewise** means. Alternate translation: “You are right. In the same way, you should also be a neighbor to people who need your help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 10 38 kv4q writing-newevent ἐν δὲ τῷ πορεύεσθαι αὐτοὺς 1 And as they were traveling along Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event. Alternate translation: “The next thing that happened on their journey was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -LUK 10 38 l621 figs-synecdoche αὐτὸς εἰσῆλθεν…ὑπεδέξατο αὐτόν 1 he entered … welcomed him Luke figuratively says **he** and **him**, meaning Jesus, to describe the entire group of Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “they entered … welcomed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 10 38 l621 figs-synecdoche αὐτὸς εἰσῆλθεν…ὑπεδέξατο αὐτόν 1 he entered … welcomed him Luke says **he** and **him**, meaning Jesus, to describe the entire group of Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “they entered … welcomed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 10 38 i17j writing-participants γυνὴ δέ τις ὀνόματι Μάρθα 1 and a certain woman named Martha This introduces Martha as a new character. Your language may have its own way of introducing new people. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “There was a woman named Martha who lived there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 10 38 l622 translate-names Μάρθα 1 Martha **Martha** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 10 39 l623 writing-participants καὶ τῇδε ἦν ἀδελφὴ καλουμένη Μαριάμ 1 And she had a sister called Mary This introduces **Mary** as a new character. Alternate translation: “Now Martha had a sister whose name was Mary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -1807,7 +1807,7 @@ LUK 10 39 l625 translate-names Μαριάμ 1 Mary **Mary** is the name of a wom LUK 10 39 fal8 figs-explicit παρακαθεσθεῖσα πρὸς τοὺς πόδας τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 she was sitting at the feet of Jesus This was the customary and respectful position for a learner at this time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “she sat respectfully on the floor near Jesus to learn from him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 10 39 l626 translate-textvariants τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Jesus See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use this reading in your translation, or another reading, “the Lord.” The note below discusses a translation issue in that reading, for those who decide to include it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 10 39 l627 τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Jesus If you use the variant reading “the Lord” at this place in your translation, you may wish to indicate that this is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” -LUK 10 39 i74b figs-metonymy ἤκουεν τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 listening to his word Luke uses the term **word** figuratively to describe what Jesus said while he was at Martha’s house. Alternate translation: “and listened to what he said” or “and listened to him teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 10 39 i74b figs-metonymy ἤκουεν τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 listening to his word Luke uses the term **word** to describe what Jesus said while he was at Martha’s house. Alternate translation: “and listened to what he said” or “and listened to him teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 10 40 adr5 figs-activepassive ἡ δὲ Μάρθα περιεσπᾶτο περὶ πολλὴν διακονίαν 1 But Martha was distracted with much service If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “But all Martha could think about was the big meal she was preparing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 10 40 jd9a figs-rquestion οὐ μέλει σοι, ὅτι ἡ ἀδελφή μου μόνην με κατέλιπεν διακονεῖν? 1 are you not concerned that my sister has left me alone to serve? Martha is complaining that Jesus is allowing Mary to sit listening to him when there is so much work to do. Martha respects the Lord, so she uses a rhetorical question to make her complaint more polite. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate her words as a statement. Alternate translation: “it seems as if you do not care that my sister has left me alone to serve.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 10 41 l628 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῇ ὁ Κύριος 1 But answering the Lord said to her Together **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to Martha’s request. Alternate translation: “But the Lord replied to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -1830,16 +1830,16 @@ LUK 11 2 tm1a figs-abstractnouns ἐλθέτω ἡ βασιλεία σου 1 Let LUK 11 2 l638 figs-youformal σου 1 your Here, **your** is singular because Jesus is teaching his disciples how to pray to God. If your language has a formal form of “you” that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form for **your** in its two instances here and for **you** in [11:4](../11/04.md). Alternatively, it might be more appropriate in your culture to address God using a familiar form, such as friends would use with one another. Use your best judgment about what form to use. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]]) LUK 11 3 q89w figs-imperative δίδου ἡμῖν 1 Give us This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please give us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 11 3 l639 figs-exclusive δίδου ἡμῖν 1 Give us Jesus teaches his disciples to speak to God in the plural because he wants them to pray together in community about the matters he describes. Since the word **us** would refer to the people praying, but not to God, it would be exclusive, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -LUK 11 3 s6qp figs-synecdoche τὸν ἄρτον ἡμῶν τὸν ἐπιούσιον 1 our daily bread Jesus refers figuratively to **bread**, one common food, to mean food in general. Alternate translation: “the food we need that day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 11 3 s6qp figs-synecdoche τὸν ἄρτον ἡμῶν τὸν ἐπιούσιον 1 our daily bread Jesus refers to **bread**, one common food, to mean food in general. Alternate translation: “the food we need that day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 11 4 iid7 figs-imperative ἄφες ἡμῖν…μὴ εἰσενέγκῃς ἡμᾶς 1 forgive us … may you not lead us These are imperatives, but they should be translated as polite requests rather than as commands. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” in each case to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please forgive us … please do not lead us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -LUK 11 4 wi99 figs-metaphor παντὶ ὀφείλοντι ἡμῖν 1 everyone who owes us Jesus uses the image of being in debt figuratively to describe having sinned against a person. Alternate translation: “everyone who has sinned against us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 11 4 wi99 figs-metaphor παντὶ ὀφείλοντι ἡμῖν 1 everyone who owes us Jesus uses the image of being in debt to describe having sinned against a person. Alternate translation: “everyone who has sinned against us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 4 db55 μὴ εἰσενέγκῃς ἡμᾶς εἰς πειρασμόν 1 may you not lead us into temptation You could state this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “please lead us away from temptation” LUK 11 5 l640 figs-hypo τίς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἕξει φίλον, καὶ πορεύσεται πρὸς αὐτὸν μεσονυκτίου 1 Which of you will have a friend, and will go to him at midnight Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach his disciples. Alternate translation: “Suppose one of you went to the house of a friend in the middle of the night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 11 5 l641 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ εἴπῃ αὐτῷ, φίλε, χρῆσόν μοι τρεῖς ἄρτους 1 and say to him, Friend, lend three loaves to me If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “and asked his friend to let him borrow three loaves of bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 11 5 y1s9 χρῆσόν μοι τρεῖς ἄρτους 1 lend three loaves to me Alternate translation: “let me borrow three loaves of bread” or “give me three loaves of bread, and I will pay you back later” LUK 11 6 l642 figs-quotesinquotes ἐπειδὴ φίλος μου παρεγένετο ἐξ ὁδοῦ πρός με, καὶ οὐκ ἔχω ὃ παραθήσω αὐτῷ 1 since my friend has come to me from the road, and I do not have anything to serve to him If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation (continuing the sentence from the previous verse): “explaining that another friend has just arrived on a journey and that he does not have enough food to feed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 11 6 l643 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐπειδὴ 1 since The speaker uses this word to introduce the reason why he is making this request at this time. If you translate this as a direct quotation, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Let me tell you why I am asking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -LUK 11 6 zl5w figs-metonymy παρεγένετο ἐξ ὁδοῦ πρός με 1 my friend has come to me from the road The speaker uses the term **road** figuratively to describe being on a journey. Alternate translation: “another friend of mine is on a journey and has just arrived at my house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 6 zl5w figs-metonymy παρεγένετο ἐξ ὁδοῦ πρός με 1 my friend has come to me from the road The speaker uses the term **road** to describe being on a journey. Alternate translation: “another friend of mine is on a journey and has just arrived at my house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 6 zp7j figs-hyperbole ὃ παραθήσω αὐτῷ 1 anything to serve to him It is unlikely that the speaker has no food at all in his house that he could serve his friend. Rather, this is an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “enough food to feed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 11 6 l731 figs-explicit ὃ παραθήσω αὐτῷ 1 anything to serve to him This could mean: (1) as UST implies, while his family has the ingredients to make a meal, they do not want to make a weary traveler wait the time it would take for them to bake bread and prepare other food. Alternate translation: “any food prepared to feed him” (2) the speaker wants to extend hospitality by sharing a meal with his guest, and so he needs enough food for a family meal. Alternate translation: “enough food to share a meal with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 7 l644 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς εἴπῃ 1 answering … he may say The word **answering** indicates that what this friend **may say** would be a response. Alternate translation: “he may reply” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -1853,7 +1853,7 @@ LUK 11 9 j4ef figs-you ὑμῖν λέγω…ὑμῖν…εὑρήσετε… LUK 11 9 l648 figs-explicit αἰτεῖτε…ζητεῖτε 1 ask … seek It might be customary in your language to say what a person would be asking for and seeking, and from whom. Alternate translation: “keep asking God for what you need … keep seeking what you need from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 9 i7j9 figs-activepassive δοθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 it will be given to you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will give it to you” or “you will receive it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 11 9 l1f6 translate-unknown κρούετε 1 knock To **knock** at a door means to hit it a few times to let a person inside the house know you are standing outside. You could translate this expression with the way people in your culture show that they have arrived at a house, such as “call out” or “cough” or “clap.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 11 9 l649 figs-metaphor κρούετε 1 knock Jesus is using the expression **knock** figuratively to mean getting someone’s attention. Alternate translation: “seek God’s attention in prayer” or “let God know you are depending on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 11 9 l649 figs-metaphor κρούετε 1 knock Jesus is using the expression **knock** to mean getting someone’s attention. Alternate translation: “seek God’s attention in prayer” or “let God know you are depending on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 9 kp3h figs-activepassive ἀνοιγήσεται ὑμῖν 1 it will be opened to you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will open the door for you” or “God will welcome you inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 11 9 l650 figs-metaphor ἀνοιγήσεται ὑμῖν 1 it will be opened to you This phrase continues the metaphor of prayer as knocking on a door. Alternate translation: “God will give you what you need” or “God will enable you to do what you are praying about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 10 l651 translate-unknown τῷ κρούοντι 1 to the one who knocks See how you translated the word “knock” in [11:9](../11/09.md). Alternate translation: “to the one who calls out” or “to the one who coughs” or “to the one who claps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1876,38 +1876,38 @@ LUK 11 14 afa8 figs-explicit ἦν ἐκβάλλων δαιμόνιον κωφό LUK 11 14 l6cg writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to mark where the action begins that this episode centers around. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 11 14 p72b figs-ellipsis τοῦ δαιμονίου ἐξελθόντος 1 when the demon had gone out Luke is relating this episode briefly, and he does not say from whom the demon **had gone out**. Your language may require you to say that. Alternate translation: “when the demon had gone out of the man” or “once the demon had left the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 11 14 tnq3 ἐλάλησεν ὁ κωφός 1 the mute man spoke Alternate translation: “the man who had been unable to speak then spoke” -LUK 11 15 y6zi figs-metonymy ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 By Beelzebul These people are using the name of this chief demon figuratively to refer by association to his power, which they are accusing Jesus of using. Alternate translation: “By the power of Beelzebul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 15 y6zi figs-metonymy ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 By Beelzebul These people are using the name of this chief demon to refer by association to his power, which they are accusing Jesus of using. Alternate translation: “By the power of Beelzebul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 15 l659 translate-names Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 Beelzebul **Beelzebul** is the name of the supposed ruler of the demons. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 11 16 r519 writing-pronouns ἕτεροι δὲ πειράζοντες 1 others tested him The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Other people challenged Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 11 16 l660 figs-metonymy σημεῖον ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἐζήτουν παρ’ αὐτοῦ 1 seeking from him a sign from heaven Luke uses the term **heaven** to refer to God figuratively by association, since heaven is the abode of God. Alternate translation: “demanding that he ask God to do a miracle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 16 l660 figs-metonymy σημεῖον ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἐζήτουν παρ’ αὐτοῦ 1 seeking from him a sign from heaven Luke uses the term **heaven** to refer to God by association, since heaven is the abode of God. Alternate translation: “demanding that he ask God to do a miracle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 16 x9fw figs-explicit σημεῖον ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἐζήτουν παρ’ αὐτοῦ 1 seeking from him a sign from heaven The implication is that the people who were challenging Jesus wanted him to ask God for a miracle to prove that his authority came from God. Alternate translation: “by demanding that he ask God to do a miracle to show that God had given him his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 17 l661 figs-activepassive πᾶσα βασιλεία ἐφ’ ἑαυτὴν διαμερισθεῖσα ἐρημοῦται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate If it would be helpful in your language, you could use active verbs to express the ideas behind the two passive verb forms **divided** and **is made desolate**. Alternate translation: “If the people of a kingdom fight among themselves, they will destroy their own kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 11 17 e36g figs-metonymy βασιλεία 1 kingdom Jesus uses the term **kingdom** to refer figuratively to the people who live in it. Alternate translation: “the people of a kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 17 e36g figs-metonymy βασιλεία 1 kingdom Jesus uses the term **kingdom** to refer to the people who live in it. Alternate translation: “the people of a kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 17 l662 figs-ellipsis οἶκος ἐπὶ οἶκον πίπτει 1 house against house falls Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. The sense of **divided** can be supplied from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “any house that is divided against itself will collapse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -LUK 11 17 rc4h figs-metonymy οἶκος ἐπὶ οἶκον πίπτει 1 house against house falls The term **house** refers figuratively to the people of a family who live in the same **house**. Alternate translation: “if family members fight against each other, they will ruin their family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 11 17 ze6p figs-metaphor πίπτει 1 falls This image of a house collapsing figuratively depicts the destruction of a family when the members fight against each other. Alternate translation: “they will ruin their family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 11 17 rc4h figs-metonymy οἶκος ἐπὶ οἶκον πίπτει 1 house against house falls The term **house** refers to the people of a family who live in the same **house**. Alternate translation: “if family members fight against each other, they will ruin their family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 17 ze6p figs-metaphor πίπτει 1 falls This image of a house collapsing depicts the destruction of a family when the members fight against each other. Alternate translation: “they will ruin their family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 18 jd5t figs-rquestion εἰ δὲ καὶ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν διεμερίσθη, πῶς σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ? 1 But if Satan is also divided against himself, how will his kingdom stand? Jesus is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “But if Satan is divided against himself, then his kingdom cannot last.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 11 18 l663 grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ δὲ καὶ ὁ Σατανᾶς ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν διεμερίσθη, πῶς σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ? 1 But if Satan is also divided against himself, how will his kingdom stand? Jesus is also using a conditional statement to teach. Specifically, he is suggesting a condition that is not true in order to show by the results of the condition that it is certainly not true. Alternate translation: “Suppose Satan and all the other members of his kingdom are fighting among themselves. In that case, his kingdom cannot last.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) -LUK 11 18 i74u figs-synecdoche εἰ…ὁ Σατανᾶς ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν διεμερίσθη 1 if Satan is … divided against himself Here Jesus uses the person of **Satan** to refer figuratively to all of the demons who follow Satan, as well as to Satan himself. Alternate translation: “if Satan and all of his demons are … fighting among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 11 18 i74u figs-synecdoche εἰ…ὁ Σατανᾶς ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν διεμερίσθη 1 if Satan is … divided against himself Here Jesus uses the person of **Satan** to refer to all of the demons who follow Satan, as well as to Satan himself. Alternate translation: “if Satan and all of his demons are … fighting among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 11 18 l664 figs-activepassive εἰ…ὁ Σατανᾶς ἐφ’ ἑαυτὸν διεμερίσθη 1 if Satan is … divided against himself If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “if Satan and all of his demons are … fighting among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 11 18 l665 figs-metaphor πῶς σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ? 1 how will his kingdom stand? Jesus asks figuratively how a **kingdom** could **stand** as if it were a building or a person. Alternate translation: “how can his kingdom last?” or “then his kingdom cannot last.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 11 18 l665 figs-metaphor πῶς σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ? 1 how will his kingdom stand? Jesus asks how a **kingdom** could **stand** as if it were a building or a person. Alternate translation: “how can his kingdom last?” or “then his kingdom cannot last.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 18 vnt9 figs-explicit ὅτι λέγετε, ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκβάλλειν με τὰ δαιμόνια 1 For you say I drive out the demons by Beelzebul The implication is that if Jesus is doing this, then Satan’s kingdom is divided against itself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may also be helpful to say who people considered Beelzebul to be. Alternate translation: “You are saying that I make demons leave people by using the power of Beelzebul, the ruler of the demons. That would mean that Satan is divided against himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 18 l666 translate-names Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 Beelzebul See how you translated the name **Beelzebul** in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 11 19 i48v figs-rquestion εἰ δὲ ἐγὼ ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλλουσιν? 1 But if I drive out the demons by Beelzebul, by whom do your sons drive them out? Jesus is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “If I am making demons leave people by using the power of Beelzebul, then your followers must be using that same power.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 11 19 l667 grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ δὲ ἐγὼ ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλλουσιν? 1 But if I drive out the demons by Beelzebul, by whom do your sons drive them out? Jesus is also using a conditional statement to teach. Specifically, he is suggesting a condition that is not true in order to show by the results of the condition that it is certainly not true. Alternate translation: “Suppose I am making demons leave people by using the power of Beelzebul. In that case, your followers must be using that same power themselves.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) LUK 11 19 l668 figs-explicit εἰ δὲ ἐγὼ ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλλουσιν? 1 But if I drive out the demons by Beelzebul, by whom do your sons drive them out? The implication is that the people challenging Jesus would not say that their own followers were using the power of Beelzebul, and so they should agree that he is not using that power himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “If I am making demons leave people by using the power of Beelzebul, then your followers must be using that same power. But you do not believe that is true about them. So it must not be true about me, either” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 19 l669 translate-names Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 Beelzebul See how you translated the name **Beelzebul** in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 11 19 l670 figs-metaphor οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν 1 your sons Here, Jesus uses the word **sons** figuratively to mean “followers.” Alternate translation: “your followers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 11 19 l670 figs-metaphor οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν 1 your sons Here, Jesus uses the word **sons** to mean “followers.” Alternate translation: “your followers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 19 bs8x figs-explicit αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν κριταὶ ἔσονται 1 they will be your judges If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the implications of this statement more explicitly. Alternate translation: “your own followers will say that you are wrong for claiming that I make demons leave people by using the power of Beelzebul, because they know that they are not using that power themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 20 l671 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ, ἐγὼ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 if I drive out the demons by the finger of God, then the kingdom of God has come to you Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “So I must be making demons leave people by the power of God. This shows that the kingdom of God has come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -LUK 11 20 y643 figs-metonymy ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ 1 the finger of God This phrase refers figuratively to God’s power. Alternate translation: “by the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 20 y643 figs-metonymy ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ 1 the finger of God This phrase refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “by the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 20 ja3u figs-abstractnouns ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the kingdom of God has come to you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” This could mean: (1) the kingdom of God has arrived in this place, that is, its activities are happening here. Alternate translation: “God is ruling in this area” (2) the kingdom of God has arrived in time, that is, it already beginning. Alternate translation: “God is beginning to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 11 21 e4d1 figs-parables ὅταν ὁ ἰσχυρὸς καθωπλισμένος 1 When the strong man who is fully armed To help the people in the crowd understand what he has been teaching, Jesus tells a brief story that provides an illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told the crowd this story to help them understand. ‘When a strong man who has all his weapons’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) LUK 11 21 l672 figs-activepassive ὁ ἰσχυρὸς καθωπλισμένος 1 the strong man who is fully armed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “a strong man who has all his weapons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 11 21 l673 figs-synecdoche φυλάσσῃ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ αὐλήν 1 is guarding his own courtyard Jesus speaks of one part of a house, its **courtyard** or entrance area, to refer figuratively to the entire house. Alternate translation: “is guarding his own house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 11 21 l673 figs-synecdoche φυλάσσῃ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ αὐλήν 1 is guarding his own courtyard Jesus speaks of one part of a house, its **courtyard** or entrance area, to refer to the entire house. Alternate translation: “is guarding his own house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 11 21 pb5v figs-idiom ἐν εἰρήνῃ ἐστὶν τὰ ὑπάρχοντα αὐτοῦ 1 his possessions are at peace This expression means that no one will disturb the man’s **possessions**, that is, they are safe from being stolen. Alternate translation: “no one can steal his possessions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 11 22 g1hx figs-nominaladj ἰσχυρότερος αὐτοῦ 1 a stronger than he Jesus is using the adjective **stronger** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “someone who is stronger than he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -LUK 11 22 zv57 figs-metaphor τὰ σκῦλα αὐτοῦ διαδίδωσιν 1 divide his spoils Jesus speaks figuratively of the first man’s possessions as if they were the **spoils** of war. He also says figuratively that the stronger man will **divide** these possessions, as if he were a soldier who needed to share them with other soldiers. Alternate translation: “take away his possessions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 11 22 zv57 figs-metaphor τὰ σκῦλα αὐτοῦ διαδίδωσιν 1 divide his spoils Jesus speaks of the first man’s possessions as if they were the **spoils** of war. He also says that the stronger man will **divide** these possessions, as if he were a soldier who needed to share them with other soldiers. Alternate translation: “take away his possessions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 22 l674 figs-explicit τὰ σκῦλα αὐτοῦ διαδίδωσιν 1 divide his spoils The implication of this parable is that Jesus must be stronger than Satan, because he has been overpowering him and rescuing the people whom Satan formerly controlled. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “take away his possessions. So I must be stronger than Satan and overpowering Satan, because I am taking away from him the people he formerly controlled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 23 yw6h ὁ μὴ ὢν μετ’ ἐμοῦ, κατ’ ἐμοῦ ἐστιν; καὶ ὁ μὴ συνάγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ, σκορπίζει 1 The one who is not with me is against me, and the one who does not gather with me scatters Jesus is not referring to a specific individual. Rather, he is making a general statement that applies to any person or group of people. Alternate translation: “Anyone who is not with me is against me, and anyone who does not gather with me scatters” or “Those who are not with me are against me, and those who do not gather with me scatter” LUK 11 23 h3kb ὁ μὴ ὢν μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 The one who is not with me Alternate translation: “Anyone who is not working with me” @@ -1916,11 +1916,11 @@ LUK 11 23 wa13 figs-explicit ὁ μὴ συνάγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ, σκ LUK 11 24 l675 figs-hypo ὅταν τὸ ἀκάθαρτον πνεῦμα ἐξέλθῃ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, διέρχεται δι’ ἀνύδρων τόπων ζητοῦν ἀνάπαυσιν 1 When the unclean spirit has gone out from the man, it passes through waterless places seeking rest Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Alternate translation: “Suppose a demon goes out of a person. And suppose it then wanders through the desert looking for another place to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 11 24 l676 figs-idiom τὸ ἀκάθαρτον πνεῦμα 1 the unclean spirit This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “a demon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 11 24 l677 figs-gendernotations τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 1 the man Here Jesus is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -LUK 11 24 fpj5 figs-metonymy ἀνύδρων τόπων 1 waterless places Jesus is describing the desert figuratively by reference to the lack of water there. Alternate translation: “the desert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 24 fpj5 figs-metonymy ἀνύδρων τόπων 1 waterless places Jesus is describing the desert by reference to the lack of water there. Alternate translation: “the desert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 24 l678 figs-idiom ζητοῦν ἀνάπαυσιν 1 seeking rest This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “looking for another place to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 11 24 yvp4 figs-hypo καὶ μὴ εὑρίσκον, λέγει, ὑποστρέψω εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου, ὅθεν ἐξῆλθον 1 and not finding any, it says, ‘I will return to my house from which I came’ Jesus continues to use a hypothetical situation to teach. If you show that directly in your translation, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “And suppose the demon does not find another place to live. Then it would say, ‘I will return to my house from which I came’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 11 24 l679 figs-quotesinquotes λέγει, ὑποστρέψω εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου, ὅθεν ἐξῆλθον 1 it says, ‘I will return to my house from which I came’ Luke is quoting Jesus, and Jesus is quoting the unclean spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it says that it will return to the house from which it came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 11 24 s89t figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκόν μου, ὅθεν ἐξῆλθον 1 my house from which I came The demon is referring figuratively to the person it formerly controlled as its **house**. Alternate translation: “the person I used to control” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 11 24 s89t figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκόν μου, ὅθεν ἐξῆλθον 1 my house from which I came The demon is referring to the person it formerly controlled as its **house**. Alternate translation: “the person I used to control” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 25 b4u3 figs-activepassive εὑρίσκει σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον 1 it finds it swept out and put in order If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “it finds that someone has swept the house and put it in order” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 11 25 l680 figs-exmetaphor εὑρίσκει σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον 1 it finds it swept out and put in order Jesus speaks about the person whom the demon left by continuing the metaphor of a house. You could express this metaphor as a simile if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the demon finds that the person it left is like a house that someone has swept clean and organized by putting everything where it belongs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) LUK 11 25 l681 figs-explicit εὑρίσκει σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον 1 it finds it swept out and put in order The implication is that the house is still empty. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the demon finds that the person it left is like a house that someone has swept clean and organized by putting everything where it belongs, but which is still empty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1933,9 +1933,9 @@ LUK 11 27 vjt7 figs-synecdoche μακαρία ἡ κοιλία ἡ βαστάσ LUK 11 27 l684 μακαρία ἡ κοιλία ἡ βαστάσασά σε, καὶ μαστοὶ οὓς ἐθήλασας 1 Blessed is the womb that bore you and the breasts at which you nursed While this woman is speaking about the mother of Jesus, she is actually pronouncing a blessing on him. Alternate translation: “I bless you, because this world is a better place because your mother brought you into it” LUK 11 28 c7e8 μενοῦν, μακάριοι 1 Rather, blessed are Jesus is not saying that his mother is not blessed. He is saying that the people he is about to describe are even more blessed. Alternate translation: “It is even better for” LUK 11 28 l685 οἱ ἀκούοντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ φυλάσσοντες 1 the ones who hear the word of God and keep it Alternate translation: “those who listen carefully to the message God has spoken and obey it” -LUK 11 28 c3f2 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Jesus uses the term **word** figuratively to describe the message that has come from God in the form of words. Alternate translation: “the message God has spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 28 c3f2 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Jesus uses the term **word** to describe the message that has come from God in the form of words. Alternate translation: “the message God has spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 29 cf2t figs-explicit τῶν δὲ ὄχλων ἐπαθροιζομένων 1 as the crowds were increasing If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state what these **crowds** were. Alternate translation: “as the crowds around Jesus were growing larger” or “as more people kept joining the crowds around Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 11 29 kt6k figs-metonymy ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη γενεὰ πονηρά ἐστιν; σημεῖον ζητεῖ 1 This generation is an evil generation. It seeks Jesus uses the term **generation** figuratively to mean the people who were born in the current generation. Alternate translation: “The people living at this time are evil people. They seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 29 kt6k figs-metonymy ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη γενεὰ πονηρά ἐστιν; σημεῖον ζητεῖ 1 This generation is an evil generation. It seeks Jesus uses the term **generation** to mean the people who were born in the current generation. Alternate translation: “The people living at this time are evil people. They seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 29 q19q figs-explicit σημεῖον ζητεῖ 1 It seeks a sign If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the purpose of the **sign** that the people were seeking. Alternate translation: “They want me to perform a miracle to prove that I have come from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 29 l686 grammar-connect-exceptions σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ, εἰ μὴ τὸ σημεῖον Ἰωνᾶ 1 a sign will not be given to it except the sign of Jonah If, in your language, it would appear that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “God will only give it the sign of Jonah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) LUK 11 29 s29w figs-activepassive σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ 1 a sign will not be given to it If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “God will not give it a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1944,7 +1944,7 @@ LUK 11 30 vj9m figs-explicit καθὼς…ἐγένετο Ἰωνᾶς τοῖ LUK 11 30 l687 translate-names τοῖς Νινευείταις 1 the Ninevites **Ninevites** describes the people who lived in the ancient city of Nineveh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 11 30 il7p figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 11 30 l732 figs-explicit ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man See how you translated this title in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 11 30 ax7q figs-metonymy τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ 1 to this generation Jesus uses the term **generation** figuratively to mean the people who were born in the current generation. Alternate translation: “to the people living at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 30 ax7q figs-metonymy τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ 1 to this generation Jesus uses the term **generation** to mean the people who were born in the current generation. Alternate translation: “to the people living at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 31 t1mw translate-names βασίλισσα νότου 1 The Queen of the South This means the Queen of Sheba. Sheba was a kingdom south of Israel. Alternate translation: “The Queen of Sheba” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 11 31 bx3c translate-symaction ἐγερθήσεται…μετὰ τῶν ἀνδρῶν τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 will stand up … with the men of this generation In this culture, a person would **stand up** to give testimony in a legal proceeding. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that this will be the reason for her action. Alternate translation: “will stand up … to give testimony before God against the people who lived at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) LUK 11 31 l688 ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 in the judgment Alternate translation: “at the time when God judges people” @@ -1981,12 +1981,12 @@ LUK 11 37 l703 writing-participants Φαρισαῖος 1 a Pharisee This introd LUK 11 37 x6nx translate-unknown ἀνέπεσεν 1 reclined to eat It was the custom in this culture at a relaxed meal such as this one for host and guests to eat while lying down comfortably around the table. You could translate this by using the expression in your language for the customary posture at a meal. Alternate translation: “sat down at the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 11 38 bm8j figs-explicit οὐ πρῶτον ἐβαπτίσθη 1 he did not first wash The Pharisees had a rule that people had to **wash** their hands before eating in order to be ceremonially clean before God. Alternate translation: “wash his hands in order to be ceremonially clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 39 l704 ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord Here Luke refers to Jesus by the respectful title **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” -LUK 11 39 xf4e figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς οἱ Φαρισαῖοι τὸ ἔξωθεν τοῦ ποτηρίου καὶ τοῦ πίνακος καθαρίζετε, τὸ δὲ ἔσωθεν ὑμῶν γέμει ἁρπαγῆς καὶ πονηρίας 1 you Pharisees clean the outside of the cup and of the bowl, but the inside of you is full of greed and evil It becomes clear from the second part of this sentence that Jesus is using the cup and the bowl figuratively in the first part to represent the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “You Pharisees are careful to maintain good appearances on the outside, but your true character is that you are greedy and wicked people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 11 39 xf4e figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς οἱ Φαρισαῖοι τὸ ἔξωθεν τοῦ ποτηρίου καὶ τοῦ πίνακος καθαρίζετε, τὸ δὲ ἔσωθεν ὑμῶν γέμει ἁρπαγῆς καὶ πονηρίας 1 you Pharisees clean the outside of the cup and of the bowl, but the inside of you is full of greed and evil It becomes clear from the second part of this sentence that Jesus is using the cup and the bowl in the first part to represent the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “You Pharisees are careful to maintain good appearances on the outside, but your true character is that you are greedy and wicked people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 39 zkq7 figs-explicit ὑμεῖς…τὸ ἔξωθεν τοῦ ποτηρίου καὶ τοῦ πίνακος καθαρίζετε 1 you … clean the outside of the cup and of the bowl Washing of the outside of containers was a part of the ritual practices of the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “as part of your rituals, you … always clean the things that you are going to eat and drink from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 39 b8gj figs-abstractnouns τὸ δὲ ἔσωθεν ὑμῶν γέμει ἁρπαγῆς καὶ πονηρίας 1 but the inside of you is full of greed and evil If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **greed** and **evil** with adjectives, as UST does. Alternate translation: “but your true character is that you are greedy and wicked people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 11 40 zq4l figs-nominaladj ἄφρονες 1 You foolish ones Jesus is using an adjective as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “You foolish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 11 40 g39h figs-rquestion οὐχ ὁ ποιήσας τὸ ἔξωθεν, καὶ τὸ ἔσωθεν ἐποίησεν? 1 Did not the one who made the outside also make the inside? Jesus is using the question form to challenge and correct the Pharisees. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “The one who made the outside also made the inside!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -LUK 11 41 m3ww figs-explicit τὰ ἐνόντα δότε ἐλεημοσύνην 1 give as charity what is inside Jesus assumes that the Pharisees will know that he is now referring literally to the cups and bowls because he wants to speak about what they contain. So in this saying, they no longer represent the Pharisees figuratively. Alternate translation: “give to the poor what is in your cups and bowls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 11 41 m3ww figs-explicit τὰ ἐνόντα δότε ἐλεημοσύνην 1 give as charity what is inside Jesus assumes that the Pharisees will know that he is now referring literally to the cups and bowls because he wants to speak about what they contain. So in this saying, they no longer represent the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “give to the poor what is in your cups and bowls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 41 l705 figs-metonymy τὰ ἐνόντα δότε ἐλεημοσύνην 1 give as charity what is inside Jesus is referring to food by association with the cups and bowls that the food is **inside**. Alternate translation: “share your food with the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 41 l706 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Jesus uses the term **behold** to get the Pharisees to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 41 phz9 figs-explicit πάντα καθαρὰ ὑμῖν ἐστιν 1 all things are clean to you The implication is that if the Pharisees devote themselves to what is most important, helping people in need, then they will recognize that ceremonial cleansing is less important and less worthy of their attention. Alternate translation: “you will not have to be so concerned about ritually washing cups and bowls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2003,7 +2003,7 @@ LUK 11 44 l708 figs-explicit ἐστὲ ὡς τὰ μνημεῖα τὰ ἄδ LUK 11 44 mrw1 translate-unknown μνημεῖα 1 graves The term **graves** refers to holes dug in the ground where dead bodies are buried. If your readers would not be familiar with **graves**, you could use a general term. Alternate translation: “burial places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 11 44 l709 figs-gendernotations καὶ οἱ ἄνθρωποι οἱ περιπατοῦντες ἐπάνω 1 and the men walking over them Here Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “that people walk over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 11 44 h9x7 figs-explicit οὐκ οἴδασιν 1 do not know it The implication is that if the Jews walked over a grave, they would become ceremonially unclean because they had come close to a dead body. Unmarked graves would cause them to do that accidentally. Alternate translation: “do not realize that and so become ceremonially unclean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 11 44 l710 figs-metaphor οὐκ οἴδασιν 1 do not know it Jesus is using the implied ceremonial uncleanness figuratively to represent not doing what pleases God. He has just said in [11:42](../11/42.md) that this is really a matter of showing love and justice to others. Alternate translation: “without realizing it and so, because they follow your teaching, they do not do the things that God wants them to do most” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 11 44 l710 figs-metaphor οὐκ οἴδασιν 1 do not know it Jesus is using the implied ceremonial uncleanness to represent not doing what pleases God. He has just said in [11:42](../11/42.md) that this is really a matter of showing love and justice to others. Alternate translation: “without realizing it and so, because they follow your teaching, they do not do the things that God wants them to do most” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 45 l711 ἀποκριθεὶς δέ τις τῶν νομικῶν λέγει αὐτῷ 1 Then answering one of the lawyers says to him To call attention to a development in the story, Luke uses the present tense in past narration. See how you decided to approach this usage in [7:40](../07/40.md). If it would not be natural to use the present tense in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Then one of the experts in the Jewish law who was there said to him” LUK 11 45 l712 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς…λέγει 1 answering … says Together the two verbs **answering** and **says** mean that this lawyer was responding to what Jesus had said about the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 11 45 u1vv writing-participants τις τῶν νομικῶν 1 one of the lawyers This phrase introduces a new character into the story. Alternate translation: “one of the experts in the Jewish law who was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -2012,7 +2012,7 @@ LUK 11 45 l714 Διδάσκαλε 1 Teacher **Teacher** is a respectful title. LUK 11 45 v1pr ταῦτα λέγων, καὶ ἡμᾶς ὑβρίζεις 1 saying these things, you insult us too Alternate translation: “those are not very nice things to say, and they apply to us too” LUK 11 46 wx9j figs-explicit καὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς νομικοῖς οὐαί 1 Woe also to you lawyers The implication is that Jesus did intend to condemn the actions of the experts in the law along with the actions of the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “God is just as displeased with you experts in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 46 l715 translate-unknown τοῖς νομικοῖς 1 lawyers See how you translated **lawyers** in [11:45](../11/45.md). Alternate translation: “experts in the Jewish law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 11 46 v2vl figs-metaphor φορτίζετε τοὺς ἀνθρώπους φορτία δυσβάστακτα 1 you burden men with burdens difficult to carry Jesus is figuratively describing the many rules that these experts give people as burdens that are too heavy to carry. Alternate translation: “you give people more rules than they can possibly follow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 11 46 v2vl figs-metaphor φορτίζετε τοὺς ἀνθρώπους φορτία δυσβάστακτα 1 you burden men with burdens difficult to carry Jesus is describing the many rules that these experts give people as burdens that are too heavy to carry. Alternate translation: “you give people more rules than they can possibly follow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 46 l716 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀνθρώπους 1 men Here Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 11 46 mws4 figs-hyperbole αὐτοὶ ἑνὶ τῶν δακτύλων ὑμῶν οὐ προσψαύετε τοῖς φορτίοις 1 you yourselves do not touch the burdens with one of your fingers Jesus uses the least possible thing someone could do to help someone else carry a burden, lifting part of it with a single finger, to emphasize how little these experts are actually doing to help people follow the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “you are not doing anything at all to help people truly obey the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 11 47 l717 figs-gendernotations πατέρες 1 fathers Jesus is using the term **fathers** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -2020,28 +2020,28 @@ LUK 11 48 drs1 figs-explicit μαρτυρεῖτε καὶ συνευδοκεῖ LUK 11 48 l718 figs-gendernotations τῶν πατέρων ὑμῶν 1 your fathers Jesus is using the term **fathers** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 11 48 l719 figs-explicit ὑμεῖς…οἰκοδομεῖτε 1 you are building The implication is that the Pharisees and law experts are building tombs for the prophets, as [11:47](../11/47.md) says explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are building tombs for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 49 by5w διὰ τοῦτο 1 For this reason The expression **Because of this** refers to the way that the current generation was effectively continuing the actions of its ancestors, who had killed the prophets. Alternate translation: “Because you are just as hostile to the prophets as your ancestors were” -LUK 11 49 c97g figs-personification ἡ σοφία τοῦ Θεοῦ εἶπεν 1 the wisdom of God said Jesus speaks figuratively of God’s **wisdom** as if it were able to speak by itself. Alternate translation: “God in his wisdom said” or “God wisely said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 11 49 c97g figs-personification ἡ σοφία τοῦ Θεοῦ εἶπεν 1 the wisdom of God said Jesus speaks of God’s **wisdom** as if it were able to speak by itself. Alternate translation: “God in his wisdom said” or “God wisely said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 11 49 lda4 figs-explicit ἀποστελῶ εἰς αὐτοὺς προφήτας καὶ ἀποστόλους, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀποκτενοῦσιν καὶ διώξουσιν 1 I will send to them prophets and apostles, and some of them they will kill and persecute Jesus is saying that God was not so foolish or naïve as to think that the Israelites would welcome the message of the prophets and apostles. God in his wisdom knew that they would oppose his messengers. But he sent them anyway, because their message was necessary and important. Alternate translation: “I am going to send prophets and apostles to them with my message, even though I know they will persecute and kill some of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 49 w1fh figs-hendiadys ἀποκτενοῦσιν καὶ διώξουσιν 1 kill and persecute Here, Jesus may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **persecute** may be telling why and how the people would **kill** the prophets. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “persecute even to the point of killing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 11 50 pi6u figs-explicit ἵνα ἐκζητηθῇ τὸ αἷμα πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 that the blood of all the prophets that has been shed from the foundation of the world may be required from this generation The implication seems to be that God will also send prophets to the people living at this time because the people’s violent persecution of the prophets will constitute a conscious, deliberate rejection of God’s message that will provide grounds for definitive judgment. That is because the people of this time should know better than to persecute the prophets, based on the prominent bad example of their own ancestors. Alternate translation: “so that the people living at this time, who should have known better, can be held accountable for the blood that people have shed of all the prophets since the beginning of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 50 l720 figs-activepassive ἵνα ἐκζητηθῇ…ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 that … may be required from this generation If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God can hold the people living at this time accountable for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 11 50 l721 figs-activepassive τὸ αἷμα…τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον 1 the blood … that has been shed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “the blood … that people have shed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 11 50 d1rf figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα…τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον 1 the blood … that has been shed Jesus uses the term **the blood … that has been shed** to refer to the deaths of **the prophets** figuratively by association with their **blood.** Alternate translation: “the deaths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 50 d1rf figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα…τὸ ἐκχυννόμενον 1 the blood … that has been shed Jesus uses the term **the blood … that has been shed** to refer to the deaths of **the prophets** by association with their **blood.** Alternate translation: “the deaths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 50 l722 ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 from the foundation of the world Alternate translation: “since the beginning of the world” or “since God made the world” -LUK 11 50 l723 figs-metonymy τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 this generation Jesus uses the term **generation** figuratively to mean the people who were born in the current generation. Alternate translation: “the people living at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 11 51 l724 figs-metonymy αἵματος Ἂβελ…αἵματος Ζαχαρίου 1 the blood of Abel … the blood of Zechariah Jesus uses the terms **the blood of Abel … the blood of Zechariah** to refer to the deaths of these men figuratively by association with the shedding of their blood. Alternate translation: “the death of Abel … the death of Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 50 l723 figs-metonymy τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 this generation Jesus uses the term **generation** to mean the people who were born in the current generation. Alternate translation: “the people living at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 51 l724 figs-metonymy αἵματος Ἂβελ…αἵματος Ζαχαρίου 1 the blood of Abel … the blood of Zechariah Jesus uses the terms **the blood of Abel … the blood of Zechariah** to refer to the deaths of these men by association with the shedding of their blood. Alternate translation: “the death of Abel … the death of Zechariah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 51 l725 translate-names Ἂβελ 1 Abel **Abel** is the name of a man. He was the son of Adam, the first man, and God commended him for doing what was right. His brother Cain murdered him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 11 51 jes7 translate-names Ζαχαρίου 1 Zechariah **Zechariah** is the name of a man. It is not the same man as father of John the Baptist, whose story Luke tells at the beginning of this book. Rather, Jesus means the priest whom King Joash ordered the officials of Judah to stone to death in the temple courtyard after he rebuked the people of Judah for worshipping idols. See [2 Chronicles 24:21](../2ch/24/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 11 51 l726 figs-metaphor τοῦ οἴκου 1 the house Jesus figuratively calls the temple the **house**, meaning the “house of God,” since God’s presence was in the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 11 51 l726 figs-metaphor τοῦ οἴκου 1 the house Jesus calls the temple the **house**, meaning the “house of God,” since God’s presence was in the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 51 l727 figs-activepassive ἐκζητηθήσεται ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 it will be required from this generation If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will hold the people living at this time accountable for all these deaths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 11 51 l728 figs-metonymy τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 this generation Jesus uses the term **generation** figuratively to mean the people who were born in the current generation. Alternate translation: “the people living at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 51 l728 figs-metonymy τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 this generation Jesus uses the term **generation** to mean the people who were born in the current generation. Alternate translation: “the people living at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 52 vj5a translate-unknown τοῖς νομικοῖς 1 lawyers See how you translated **lawyers** in [11:45](../11/45.md). Alternate translation: “experts in the Jewish law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 11 52 s4fc figs-metaphor ἤρατε τὴν κλεῖδα τῆς γνώσεως 1 you have taken away the key of knowledge Jesus speaks figuratively about the **knowledge** of God’s truth as if it were in a building whose door was locked, and about proper teaching as if it were a **key** that could unlock that door. Alternate translation: “you prevent people from knowing God’s truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 11 52 s4fc figs-metaphor ἤρατε τὴν κλεῖδα τῆς γνώσεως 1 you have taken away the key of knowledge Jesus speaks about the **knowledge** of God’s truth as if it were in a building whose door was locked, and about proper teaching as if it were a **key** that could unlock that door. Alternate translation: “you prevent people from knowing God’s truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 52 xg48 translate-unknown τὴν κλεῖδα 1 the key A **key** is a small metal device that opens a lock that is used to keep things like a door, a box, or a drawer closed. If your readers would not know what a **key** is, you could use the name of a comparable device in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 11 52 fj7x figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσήλθατε, καὶ τοὺς εἰσερχομένους ἐκωλύσατε 1 you have not entered yourselves, and you have hindered those who are entering Jesus continues the metaphor by saying figuratively that these experts in the law have not gone into the building where they could learn God’s truth, and they have not given others the **key** that would allow them to unlock the door and go inside to learn. Alternate translation: “you do not know God’s truth yourselves, and you are preventing others from knowing it as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 11 52 fj7x figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσήλθατε, καὶ τοὺς εἰσερχομένους ἐκωλύσατε 1 you have not entered yourselves, and you have hindered those who are entering Jesus continues the metaphor by saying that these experts in the law have not gone into the building where they could learn God’s truth, and they have not given others the **key** that would allow them to unlock the door and go inside to learn. Alternate translation: “you do not know God’s truth yourselves, and you are preventing others from knowing it as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 53 mld3 writing-endofstory κἀκεῖθεν ἐξελθόντος αὐτοῦ 1 After he went out from there In this verse and the next verse, Luke comments on what happened as a result of the episode he has just related. Alternate translation: “After Jesus left the Pharisee’s house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -LUK 11 54 mr32 figs-metaphor ἐνεδρεύοντες αὐτὸν θηρεῦσαί τι ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 lying in wait for him to trap something from his mouth Luke speaks figuratively of the scribes and Pharisees trying to find grounds to accuse Jesus as if they were hunters hiding behind cover in order to catch an animal. Luke then speaks figuratively of what Jesus was saying as if it were the animal that these hunters were trying to catch. Alternate translation: “listening carefully to Jesus to see if they could use something he said to accuse him of teaching the wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 11 54 l729 figs-metonymy τι ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 something from his mouth Luke figuratively describes what Jesus was saying by association with his **mouth**, by which he spoke these things. Alternate translation: “something he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 11 54 mr32 figs-metaphor ἐνεδρεύοντες αὐτὸν θηρεῦσαί τι ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 lying in wait for him to trap something from his mouth Luke speaks of the scribes and Pharisees trying to find grounds to accuse Jesus as if they were hunters hiding behind cover in order to catch an animal. Luke then speaks of what Jesus was saying as if it were the animal that these hunters were trying to catch. Alternate translation: “listening carefully to Jesus to see if they could use something he said to accuse him of teaching the wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 11 54 l729 figs-metonymy τι ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 something from his mouth Luke describes what Jesus was saying by association with his **mouth**, by which he spoke these things. Alternate translation: “something he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 12 intro jun3 0 # Luke 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about trusting and honoring God (12:1-12)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who trusted in money (12:13-21)
3. Jesus teaches not to trust in money (12:22-34)
4. Jesus teaches about being ready for his return (12:35-59)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Blasphemy against the Holy Spirit”

Jesus says in 12:10 that anyone who blasphemes against the Holy Spirit will not be forgiven. This is a descriptive statement, not a prescriptive one. Jesus is not saying that if people happen to speak certain words, then God will refuse to forgive them, no matter how sorry they are afterwards. Rather, it is the Holy Spirit who brings conviction of sin and of the need to repent. “Blasphemy against the Holy Spirit” means attributing the influence of the Holy Spirit to evil powers, as the Pharisees did when they said in 11:15 that Jesus drove out demons by the power of Beelzebul, the ruler of demons. By definition, then, if a person thinks that the influence of the Holy Spirit is an evil influence, they will not respond to it, and so they will not experience conviction of sin, repent, and be forgiven. That is why people who “blaspheme against the Holy Spirit” will not be forgiven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

### Servants

God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not. Jesus teaches about this in 12:34-40.

### Division

Jesus knew that those who did not choose to follow him would hate those who did choose to follow him. He also knew that most people love their families more than they love anyone else. So he wanted his followers to understand that following and pleasing him had to be more important to them than having their family love them. Jesus teaches about this in 12:49-53. LUK 12 1 en8g writing-newevent ἐν οἷς 1 In those times Luke uses these words to mark the beginning of a new event. This phrase seems to refer back to [11:54](../11/54.md). Alternate translation: “While the scribes and Pharisees were still looking for a way to trap him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 12 1 c8yk grammar-connect-time-background ἐπισυναχθεισῶν τῶν μυριάδων τοῦ ὄχλου, ὥστε καταπατεῖν ἀλλήλους 1 when myriads of the crowd were gathered together Luke provides this background information to give the setting for the events he is about to describe. Alternate translation: “while tens of thousands of the common people were gathering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) @@ -2050,7 +2050,7 @@ LUK 12 1 l734 τοῦ ὄχλου 1 of the crowd In this context, the word **cr LUK 12 1 l735 figs-activepassive ἐπισυναχθεισῶν 1 were gathered together If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “were coming together” or “were crowding around” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 1 ybz9 figs-hyperbole ὥστε καταπατεῖν ἀλλήλους 1 so that they trampled on each other This could be an exaggeration to emphasize how tightly packed together the crowd as. Alternate translation: “so that they were all tightly packed together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 12 1 x38n ἤρξατο λέγειν πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ πρῶτον 1 he began to say to his disciples first This could mean: (1) Jesus addressed his disciples before speaking to the crowd. Alternate translation: “Jesus first started speaking to his disciples, and said to them” (2) this was the first thing Jesus said to his disciples when he began to speak to them. Alternate translation: “Jesus started speaking to his disciples, and the first thing he said was” -LUK 12 1 f5b9 figs-metaphor προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης, τῶν Φαρισαίων, ἥτις ἐστὶν ὑπόκρισις 1 Guard yourselves from the yeast of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy Jesus is describing the influence of **the Pharisees** figuratively by comparing its spread throughout the community to the way **yeast** spreads through a whole batch of dough or batter. You could represent this metaphor as a simile in your translation. Alternate translation: “Be careful that you do not become hypocrites like the Pharisees, whose behavior is influencing everyone around them, just as yeast spreads through a whole batch of dough” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 1 f5b9 figs-metaphor προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης, τῶν Φαρισαίων, ἥτις ἐστὶν ὑπόκρισις 1 Guard yourselves from the yeast of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy Jesus is describing the influence of **the Pharisees** by comparing its spread throughout the community to the way **yeast** spreads through a whole batch of dough or batter. You could represent this metaphor as a simile in your translation. Alternate translation: “Be careful that you do not become hypocrites like the Pharisees, whose behavior is influencing everyone around them, just as yeast spreads through a whole batch of dough” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 1 l736 translate-unknown ζύμης 1 yeast **Yeast** is a substance that causes fermentation and expansion within a batch of dough or batter. If your readers would not be familiar with yeast, you could use the name of a substance that they would be familiar with, or you could use a general term. Alternate translation: “leaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 12 2 m1ti grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 But **But** connects the statement it introduces to the previous statement about the hypocrisy of the Pharisees. In your translation, you could use the term that would show this connection in the way that is most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) LUK 12 2 e5w4 figs-parallelism οὐδὲν…συνκεκαλυμμένον ἐστὶν, ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται, καὶ κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ γνωσθήσεται 1 nothing is concealed that will not be revealed and hidden that will not be known These two phrases mean similar things. Jesus uses them together to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them, especially if including both phrases might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “people will learn about everything that others try to hide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -2067,21 +2067,21 @@ LUK 12 3 jwe6 figs-metaphor ἐν τοῖς ταμείοις 1 in the inner room LUK 12 3 b93h figs-activepassive κηρυχθήσεται 1 will be proclaimed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “people will proclaim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 3 rmx8 translate-unknown ἐπὶ τῶν δωμάτων 1 upon the housetops Houses in Israel had flat roofs that were reached by stairs or ladders, so people could easily go up and stand on top of them. If houses are different in your culture and you think your readers might wonder how people would get up onto **housetops** and stand there, you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “from a high place from which everyone will be able to hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 12 4 m6t7 λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, τοῖς φίλοις μου 1 But I say to you, my friends Jesus readdresses his disciples to mark a shift in his speech to a new topic, about not being afraid. Alternate translation: “Let me tell you, friends” -LUK 12 4 l743 figs-metonymy τὸ σῶμα 1 the body Jesus speaks figuratively about a person by association with **the body**, which is mortal. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 12 4 l743 figs-metonymy τὸ σῶμα 1 the body Jesus speaks about a person by association with **the body**, which is mortal. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 12 4 vc8j μὴ ἐχόντων περισσότερόν τι ποιῆσαι 1 do not have anything more to do Alternate translation: “cannot cause any more harm” LUK 12 5 fsr4 figs-explicit φοβήθητε τὸν…ἔχοντα ἐξουσίαν 1 Fear the one who … has authority The expression **the one** refers to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Fear God, who … has authority” or “Fear God, because he … has authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 12 5 us3x μετὰ τὸ ἀποκτεῖναι 1 after having killed Jesus is not suggesting that God actively kills each person. Alternate translation: “after a person dies” LUK 12 5 l744 translate-names Γέενναν 1 Gehenna **Gehenna** is the Greek name for a place, the Valley of Hinnom just outside Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 12 5 ric8 figs-metaphor Γέενναν 1 Gehenna Jesus figuratively uses the name of this place, where refuse was thrown and fires burned continually, to mean hell. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 5 ric8 figs-metaphor Γέενναν 1 Gehenna Jesus uses the name of this place, where refuse was thrown and fires burned continually, to mean hell. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 6 l745 figs-activepassive οὐχὶ πέντε στρουθία πωλοῦνται ἀσσαρίων δύο 1 Are not five sparrows sold for two assaria If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who does the action. Alternate translation: “Do people not sell five sparrows for only two small copper coins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 6 czr7 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ πέντε στρουθία πωλοῦνται ἀσσαρίων δύο? 1 Are not five sparrows sold for two assaria? Jesus is using this question to teach the disciples. He is not asking them to verify the market price for sparrows. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “You know that five sparrows are sold for only two small copper coins.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 12 6 u697 translate-unknown στρουθία 1 sparrows **Sparrows** are small, seed-eating birds. If your readers would not know what **sparrows** are, you could use a general expression instead. Alternate translation: “small birds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 12 6 l746 translate-bmoney ἀσσαρίων δύο 1 two assaria The word **assaria** is the plural of “assarion.” An assarion was a small copper coin equivalent to about half an hour’s wage. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might state something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “two small copper coins” or “half an hour’s wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) LUK 12 6 mru1 figs-activepassive ἓν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐκ ἔστιν ἐπιλελησμένον ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 not one of them is forgotten before God If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God never forgets a single one of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 6 l747 figs-doublenegatives ἓν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐκ ἔστιν ἐπιλελησμένον ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 not one of them is forgotten before God If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative, which consists of a negative particle and a negative verb, as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “God is always aware of every one of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -LUK 12 6 l748 figs-metaphor ἓν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐκ ἔστιν ἐπιλελησμένον ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 not one of them is forgotten before God The expression **before God** means “in front of God,” that is, “where God can see.” Sight, in turn, figuratively represents attention. Alternate translation: “God is always aware of every one of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 6 l748 figs-metaphor ἓν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐκ ἔστιν ἐπιλελησμένον ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 not one of them is forgotten before God The expression **before God** means “in front of God,” that is, “where God can see.” Sight, in turn, represents attention. Alternate translation: “God is always aware of every one of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 7 m833 figs-activepassive καὶ αἱ τρίχες τῆς κεφαλῆς ὑμῶν πᾶσαι ἠρίθμηνται 1 even the hairs of your head have all been numbered If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “God has even counted all the hairs on your head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 12 7 l749 figs-synecdoche καὶ αἱ τρίχες τῆς κεφαλῆς ὑμῶν πᾶσαι ἠρίθμηνται 1 even the hairs of your head have all been numbered Jesus is figuratively using one small part of a person, the **hairs** on the **head**, to indicate the entire person. Alternate translation: “God is aware of everything about you, right down to the smallest detail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 12 7 l749 figs-synecdoche καὶ αἱ τρίχες τῆς κεφαλῆς ὑμῶν πᾶσαι ἠρίθμηνται 1 even the hairs of your head have all been numbered Jesus is using one small part of a person, the **hairs** on the **head**, to indicate the entire person. Alternate translation: “God is aware of everything about you, right down to the smallest detail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 12 7 l750 figs-you τῆς κεφαλῆς ὑμῶν 1 your head Although **head** is singular because Jesus is describing an individual situation, **your** is plural because he is speaking to his disciples as a group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 12 7 l751 ἠρίθμηνται 1 numbered This word can also mean “counted.” Jesus is not necessarily saying that God has assigned a number to each individual hair on a person’s head. Alternate translation: “counted” LUK 12 7 shk3 figs-explicit μὴ φοβεῖσθε, πολλῶν στρουθίων διαφέρετε 1 Do not fear, you are more valuable than many sparrows The implication is that if God is aware of and concerned for sparrows, which are of less value, then God is certainly aware of and concerned for people, who are of greater value. And so followers of Jesus do not need to be afraid, since God is watching over them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are more valuable than many sparrows, so God is certainly even more aware of you and concerned for you, and so you do not need to be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2097,16 +2097,16 @@ LUK 12 9 l756 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 before m LUK 12 9 l757 figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 men Here, Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 12 9 x27t figs-activepassive ἀπαρνηθήσεται 1 will be denied If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will would do the action. Alternate translation: “the Son of Man will deny that he belongs to him” or (if you translated with the first person) “I will deny that he belongs to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 9 l758 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀγγέλων 1 before the angels Here, **before** means “in front of” or “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “in the presence of the angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 12 10 rp5y figs-metonymy καὶ πᾶς ὃς ἐρεῖ λόγον εἰς τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 everyone who speaks a word against the Son of Man Jesus uses **word** figuratively to describe something someone might say by using words. Alternate translation: “And everyone who says something bad about the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 12 10 rp5y figs-metonymy καὶ πᾶς ὃς ἐρεῖ λόγον εἰς τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 everyone who speaks a word against the Son of Man Jesus uses **word** to describe something someone might say by using words. Alternate translation: “And everyone who says something bad about the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 12 10 l759 figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Here Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “me, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 12 10 l760 figs-explicit τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man See how you translated this title in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 12 10 px39 figs-activepassive ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ 1 it will be forgiven him If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 10 p9g7 figs-activepassive οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται 1 it will not be forgiven If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will not extend forgiveness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 11 f2j9 figs-explicit ὅταν…εἰσφέρωσιν ὑμᾶς 1 when they bring you The implication is that the opponents of Jesus would do this to his disciples. Alternate translation: “when my opponents bring you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 12 11 c1rk figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὰς συναγωγὰς 1 to the synagogues Jesus is referring figuratively to local Jewish tribunals by reference to the place where they met, in **synagogues**. Alternate translation: “to be tried by local Jewish tribunals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 12 11 c1rk figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὰς συναγωγὰς 1 to the synagogues Jesus is referring to local Jewish tribunals by reference to the place where they met, in **synagogues**. Alternate translation: “to be tried by local Jewish tribunals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 12 11 gm94 figs-doublet τὰς ἀρχὰς, καὶ τὰς ἐξουσίας 1 the rulers, and the authorities These two terms mean similar things. Jesus may be using them together for emphasis. He is referring to officials of the Roman Empire. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the terms into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the officials whom the Romans have appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) LUK 12 12 l761 τὸ…Ἅγιον Πνεῦμα διδάξει ὑμᾶς…ἃ δεῖ εἰπεῖν 1 the Holy Spirit will teach you … what is necessary to say Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will tell you … what to say” or “the Holy Spirit will give you … the words to say” -LUK 12 12 gz6v figs-idiom ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 in that hour Jesus is using the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” or “in that moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 12 12 gz6v figs-idiom ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 in that hour Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” or “in that moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 12 13 i2vi writing-participants εἶπεν δέ τις ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου αὐτῷ 1 Then someone from the crowd said to him Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. Alternate translation: “Then a man who was there in the crowd said to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 12 13 l762 Διδάσκαλε 1 Teacher **Teacher** is a respectful title. You can translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use. LUK 12 13 d1dj figs-explicit μερίσασθαι μετ’ ἐμοῦ τὴν κληρονομίαν 1 to divide the inheritance with me In this culture, inheritances came from the father, usually after the father had died. You may need to make explicit that the speaker’s father had probably died. Alternate translation: “to divide the family property with me now that our father is dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2116,7 +2116,7 @@ LUK 12 14 l763 figs-doublet κριτὴν ἢ μεριστὴν 1 a judge or a m LUK 12 14 l764 figs-hendiadys κριτὴν ἢ μεριστὴν 1 a judge or a mediator Jesus could also be using these two words to express a single idea. The term **mediator** may explain for what purpose a person was appointed as a **judge**, specifically, to settle disputes. Alternate translation: “a judge who settles disputes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 12 14 l765 figs-youdual ὑμᾶς 1 you The term **you** refers to the man and his brother. It would be in the dual form if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) LUK 12 15 me49 figs-explicit εἶπεν…πρὸς αὐτούς 1 he said to them The implication is that Jesus said what follows to the whole crowd, which included the man who asked about the inheritance. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 12 15 l766 figs-metaphor ὁρᾶτε 1 See Jesus figuratively uses a word for seeing to indicate a need for caution. Alternate translation: “Watch out” or “Be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 15 l766 figs-metaphor ὁρᾶτε 1 See Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate a need for caution. Alternate translation: “Watch out” or “Be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 15 ckn2 figs-abstractnouns πάσης πλεονεξίας 1 all covetousness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **covetousness** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the urge to have more things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 12 15 l767 τῷ περισσεύειν τινὶ…ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ 1 the abounding to him of his possessions Alternate translation: “the number of things he has” LUK 12 16 d37q figs-parables εἶπεν δὲ παραβολὴν πρὸς αὐτοὺς 1 Then he spoke to them a parable Jesus now gives a brief illustration to teach something that is true in a way that is easy to understand and remember. Alternate translation: “Then he told them this story to help them understand this teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) @@ -2128,7 +2128,7 @@ LUK 12 18 l769 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν, τοῦτο ποιήσω: καθ LUK 12 18 d82f translate-unknown τὰς ἀποθήκας 1 barns The term **barns** describes buildings in which farmers store crops they have harvested. If your readers would not be familiar with **barns**, you could use a general term. Alternate translation: “storage buildings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 12 18 w6gc τὰ ἀγαθά μου 1 my goods Alternate translation: “my other possessions” LUK 12 19 l770 figs-quotesinquotes ἐρῶ τῇ ψυχῇ μου, ψυχή, ἔχεις πολλὰ ἀγαθὰ κείμενα εἰς ἔτη πολλά; ἀναπαύου, φάγε, πίε, εὐφραίνου 1 I will say to my soul, “Soul, you have many goods lying in store for many years. Relax, eat, drink, be merry”’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation, and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “He told himself that he had many goods stored up for many years, and so he could relax, eat, drink, be merry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 12 19 mqm6 figs-synecdoche τῇ ψυχῇ μου 1 my soul The man figuratively addresses one part of himself, his **soul** or inner being, in order to speak to all of himself. Alternate translation: “to myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 12 19 mqm6 figs-synecdoche τῇ ψυχῇ μου 1 my soul The man addresses one part of himself, his **soul** or inner being, in order to speak to all of himself. Alternate translation: “to myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 12 20 l771 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ Θεός, ἄφρων, ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτὶ, τὴν ψυχήν σου ἀπαιτοῦσιν ἀπὸ σοῦ; ἃ δὲ ἡτοίμασας, τίνι ἔσται? 1 But God said to him, ‘Foolish one, this night they are demanding your soul from you, and what you have prepared, whose will it be?’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation, and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “But God told him that he was very foolish, because he was going to die that night, and the things he had stored up would belong to someone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 12 20 l772 figs-nominaladj ἄφρων 1 Foolish one God is using the adjective **foolish** as a noun in order to indicate what kind of person this man is. ULT adds the term **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “You foolish person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 12 20 l773 ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτὶ, τὴν ψυχήν σου ἀπαιτοῦσιν ἀπὸ σοῦ 1 this night they are demanding your soul from you This is an indefinite construction, such as many languages use, but God is the actual subject. Alternate translation: “I am demanding your soul from you this very night” @@ -2136,7 +2136,7 @@ LUK 12 20 l774 figs-idiom ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτὶ, τὴν ψυχήν σο LUK 12 20 xgr9 figs-euphemism τὴν ψυχήν σου ἀπαιτοῦσιν ἀπὸ σοῦ 1 they are demanding your soul from you This expression speaks about death in a discreet way. Alternate translation: “you are going to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) LUK 12 20 vyn1 figs-rquestion ἃ δὲ ἡτοίμασας, τίνι ἔσται? 1 what you have prepared, whose will it be? God does not expect the man to tell him who will inherit his things. Rather, God is using the question as a teaching tool, to make the man realize that he could not count on possessing those things, and so he was wrong to put his confidence in them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “the things you have stored up will belong to someone else!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 12 21 m47i ὁ θησαυρίζων 1 the one who stores up treasure Alternate translation: “a person who saves up valuable things” -LUK 12 21 fst9 figs-metaphor μὴ εἰς Θεὸν πλουτῶν 1 is not rich toward God Jesus uses the term **rich** figuratively to mean using one’s time and possessions for the things that are important to God. Alternate translation: “has not invested in the things that matter to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 21 fst9 figs-metaphor μὴ εἰς Θεὸν πλουτῶν 1 is not rich toward God Jesus uses the term **rich** to mean using one’s time and possessions for the things that are important to God. Alternate translation: “has not invested in the things that matter to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 22 ihk2 figs-explicit εἶπεν…πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ 1 he said to his disciples Since Peter asks in [12:41](../12/41.md) whether Jesus has been speaking only to the disciples, or also to the crowd as well, the implication is that Jesus did not say these things to his disciples privately, as in [12:1-12](../12/01.md), but rather to them publicly so that the crowd could also hear. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he said to his disciples, as the crowd was listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 12 22 vim6 figs-explicit διὰ τοῦτο 1 For this reason By **this** Jesus means the lesson of the story, that it is foolish to be overly concerned about having a lot of food and possessions. Alternate translation: “In light of what this story teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 12 22 cy4e λέγω ὑμῖν, μὴ μεριμνᾶτε 1 I say to you, do not worry Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “I want you to know that you should not worry” @@ -2148,9 +2148,9 @@ LUK 12 24 l776 figs-doublet οὐκ…ταμεῖον οὐδὲ ἀποθήκη LUK 12 24 y4t1 translate-unknown οὐκ…ταμεῖον οὐδὲ ἀποθήκη 1 neither storeroom nor barn These are places where food is stored. If your readers would not be familiar with either term, you could use a more general one. Alternate translation: “no place to store food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 12 24 i238 figs-exclamations πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὑμεῖς διαφέρετε τῶν πετεινῶν! 1 How much more valuable you are than the birds! This is an exclamation, not a question. Jesus uses the exclamation to emphasize the point he wants his listeners to realize. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “You need to realize how much more valuable people are to God than birds.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) LUK 12 25 lsx8 figs-rquestion τίς…ἐξ ὑμῶν μεριμνῶν, δύναται ἐπὶ τὴν ἡλικίαν αὐτοῦ προσθεῖναι πῆχυν? 1 which of you by being anxious is able to add a cubit to his lifespan? Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “no one can make his life any longer by being anxious!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -LUK 12 25 n286 figs-metaphor ἐπὶ τὴν ἡλικίαν αὐτοῦ προσθεῖναι πῆχυν 1 add a cubit to his lifespan Jesus is speaking figuratively of the **lifespan** as if it were measured in length rather than in time. Alternate translation: “make his life any longer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 25 n286 figs-metaphor ἐπὶ τὴν ἡλικίαν αὐτοῦ προσθεῖναι πῆχυν 1 add a cubit to his lifespan Jesus is speaking of the **lifespan** as if it were measured in length rather than in time. Alternate translation: “make his life any longer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 25 l777 translate-unknown πῆχυν 1 a cubit A **cubit** is a measure of length equal to about half a meter or about a foot and a half. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this length using the measure that is customary your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 12 25 l778 figs-explicit πῆχυν 1 a cubit The implication may be that since a **cubit** is a relatively short distance, it figuratively represents only a short time. Alternate translation: “even a little bit” or “even a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 12 25 l778 figs-explicit πῆχυν 1 a cubit The implication may be that since a **cubit** is a relatively short distance, it represents only a short time. Alternate translation: “even a little bit” or “even a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 12 26 hl4d figs-rquestion εἰ οὖν οὐδὲ ἐλάχιστον δύνασθε, τί περὶ τῶν λοιπῶν μεριμνᾶτε? 1 If then you are not able to do the least, why do you worry about the rest? Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “Since you could not do even this small thing, you should not worry about the other things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 12 26 l779 figs-nominaladj ἐλάχιστον 1 the least Jesus is using the adjective **least** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “such a very little thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 12 26 l780 figs-explicit τῶν λοιπῶν 1 the rest The implication in context is that Jesus is referring to having food to eat and clothes to wear. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “having food and clothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2160,7 +2160,7 @@ LUK 12 27 u3mf translate-unknown οὐδὲ νήθει 1 neither do they spin In LUK 12 27 l781 λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, οὐδὲ Σολομὼν 1 But I say to you, not even Solomon Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “I can assure you that not even Solomon” LUK 12 27 nug5 figs-abstractnouns Σολομὼν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ 1 Solomon in all his glory The abstract noun **glory** could mean: (1) “Solomon, who had great wealth.” (2) “Solomon, who wore beautiful clothes.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 12 27 l782 translate-names Σολομὼν 1 Solomon **Solomon** is the name of a man, a great king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 12 28 rur9 figs-metaphor εἰ…ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει 1 if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven Jesus speaks figuratively of God making the wild plants beautiful as if God were putting beautiful clothing on them. Alternate translation: “if God makes the wild plants beautiful like this, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 28 rur9 figs-metaphor εἰ…ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει 1 if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven Jesus speaks of God making the wild plants beautiful as if God were putting beautiful clothing on them. Alternate translation: “if God makes the wild plants beautiful like this, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 28 l783 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει 1 if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it must be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since God makes the wild plants so beautiful, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) LUK 12 28 l784 figs-explicit ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον 1 the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven While Jesus uses a term that typically means **grass**, in this context he must implicitly mean wild plants in general, since he is referring back to the wild lilies he has just mentioned. So you could express this with a general term in your translation. Alternate translation: “the wild plants, which are alive today and tomorrow are thrown into the oven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 12 28 l785 translate-unknown ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον 1 the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven It would be particularly appropriate to use a general term in your translation if your readers would not know what **grass** is. Alternate translation: “the wild plants, which are alive today and tomorrow are thrown into the oven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -2180,14 +2180,14 @@ LUK 12 33 rlg7 translate-unknown πωλήσατε τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ὑ LUK 12 33 dc7m figs-explicit ποιήσατε ἑαυτοῖς 1 Make for yourselves The implication is that this will be the result of selling one’s possessions and giving the proceeds to the poor. Alternate translation: “In this way you will make for yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 12 33 l789 figs-parallelism βαλλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα, θησαυρὸν ἀνέκλειπτον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 purses that will not wear out—unfailing treasure in the heavens These two phrases mean basically the same thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them, especially if putting both phrases in your translation might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “treasure that will always be safe in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) LUK 12 33 xb63 translate-unknown βαλλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα 1 purses that will not wear out If you would like to reproduce the figure of speech that Jesus uses, but you think your readers might not know what **purses** are, you could explain that term, or you could use the name of a different container that people in your culture use to keep valuable things safe. Alternate translation: “moneybags that will not get holes in them” or “a jar that will never break” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 12 33 am8q figs-metonymy βαλλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα 1 purses that will not wear out Jesus is figuratively describing valuable things that will last by reference to **purses** or moneybags that will keep these things safe because they will never wear out. He makes this clear by speaking literally of **unfailing treasure** right afterwards. Alternate translation: “wealth that will always be safe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 12 33 am8q figs-metonymy βαλλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα 1 purses that will not wear out Jesus is describing valuable things that will last by reference to **purses** or moneybags that will keep these things safe because they will never wear out. He makes this clear by speaking literally of **unfailing treasure** right afterwards. Alternate translation: “wealth that will always be safe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 12 33 h6qw θησαυρὸν ἀνέκλειπτον 1 unfailing treasure You could state this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “treasure that will always last” -LUK 12 33 t1fb figs-metonymy ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει 1 where thief does not come near Jesus speaks figuratively of a thief **coming near** to wealth to mean stealing it. Alternate translation: “where no thief ever steals anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 12 33 t1fb figs-metonymy ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει 1 where thief does not come near Jesus speaks of a thief **coming near** to wealth to mean stealing it. Alternate translation: “where no thief ever steals anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 12 33 e2nj figs-ellipsis οὐδὲ σὴς διαφθείρει 1 nor moth destroy Jesus leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and where no moth ever destroys anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 12 33 u258 translate-unknown σὴς 1 moth A **moth** is a small insect that eats holes in fabric. If your readers would not know what a **moth** is, you could use the name of a different insect they would recognize that destroys materials, such as an ant or termite. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 12 34 ad29 figs-metaphor ὅπου…ἐστιν ὁ θησαυρὸς ὑμῶν, ἐκεῖ καὶ ἡ καρδία ὑμῶν ἔσται 1 where your treasure is, there your heart will be also Jesus speaks figuratively of a person’s **heart** and **treasure** being in the same location. Alternate translation: “the things you value are the things you will think about and try to obtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 12 34 l790 figs-metaphor ὅπου…ἐστιν ὁ θησαυρὸς ὑμῶν 1 where your treasure is Jesus uses the word **treasure** figuratively to mean what a person values. Alternate translation: “the things you value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 12 34 r26g figs-metaphor καὶ ἡ καρδία ὑμῶν ἔσται 1 your heart will be also Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts and desires. Alternate translation: “are the things you will think about and want to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 34 ad29 figs-metaphor ὅπου…ἐστιν ὁ θησαυρὸς ὑμῶν, ἐκεῖ καὶ ἡ καρδία ὑμῶν ἔσται 1 where your treasure is, there your heart will be also Jesus speaks of a person’s **heart** and **treasure** being in the same location. Alternate translation: “the things you value are the things you will think about and try to obtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 34 l790 figs-metaphor ὅπου…ἐστιν ὁ θησαυρὸς ὑμῶν 1 where your treasure is Jesus uses the word **treasure** to mean what a person values. Alternate translation: “the things you value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 34 r26g figs-metaphor καὶ ἡ καρδία ὑμῶν ἔσται 1 your heart will be also Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and desires. Alternate translation: “are the things you will think about and want to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 34 l791 figs-you ὑμῶν…ὑμῶν 1 your … your Jesus is speaking of each individual person’s values and desires, but **your** is plural because he is addressing the disciples as a group. You could use the singular form of **your** in your translation if that is what your language would do in a context like this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 12 35 c4j1 figs-parables ἔστωσαν ὑμῶν αἱ ὀσφύες περιεζωσμέναι 1 Let your loins be girded To help his disciples understand what he has been teaching, Jesus provides an illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus gave his disciples this illustration to help them understand. ‘Wrap the lower part of your robe around your hips’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) LUK 12 35 nk2x translate-unknown ἔστωσαν ὑμῶν αἱ ὀσφύες περιεζωσμέναι 1 let your loins be girded People in this culture wore long flowing robes. They would wrap the lower part of the robe around their hips to keep it out of the way while they engaged in physical activity. Alternate translation: “Wrap the lower part of your robe around your hips” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -2213,10 +2213,10 @@ LUK 12 38 l803 καὶ εὕρῃ οὕτως, μακάριοί εἰσιν ἐ LUK 12 39 l804 τοῦτο δὲ γινώσκετε 1 But understand this Jesus says this to encourage his disciples to think carefully about what he is going to tell them. Alternate translation: “Now I want you to think carefully about this” LUK 12 39 l805 figs-parables εἰ ᾔδει ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης 1 if the owner of the house had known To help his disciples understand what he has been teaching, Jesus provides a further illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus gave his disciples this further illustration to help them understand. ‘If the owner of the house had known’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) LUK 12 39 l806 figs-hypo εἰ ᾔδει ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης ποίᾳ ὥρᾳ ὁ κλέπτης ἔρχεται 1 if the master of the house had known at which hour the thief was coming The illustration that Jesus chooses involves a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose a thief were going to rob a house, and suppose the owner of the house knew when the thief was coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -LUK 12 39 v73u figs-idiom ποίᾳ ὥρᾳ 1 at which hour Jesus uses the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “when” or “at what time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 12 39 v73u figs-idiom ποίᾳ ὥρᾳ 1 at which hour Jesus uses the term **hour** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “when” or “at what time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 12 39 ej9m figs-activepassive οὐκ ἂν ἀφῆκεν διορυχθῆναι τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 he would not have let his house be broken into If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he would not have let the thief break into his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 39 ej9q figs-hypo οὐκ ἂν ἀφῆκεν διορυχθῆναι τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 he would not have let his house be broken into If you translated the earlier part of this verse as a hypothetical condition, you could translate this part as the result. You may want to make this part a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Then he would not let the thief break into his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -LUK 12 40 p1y9 figs-idiom ᾗ ὥρᾳ οὐ δοκεῖτε 1 in that hour you do not expect Jesus is using the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “at a time when you are not expecting him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 12 40 p1y9 figs-idiom ᾗ ὥρᾳ οὐ δοκεῖτε 1 in that hour you do not expect Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “at a time when you are not expecting him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 12 40 dw4h figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἔρχεται 1 the Son of Man is coming Here Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will return” (and for the previous phrase, “at a time when you are not expecting me”) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 12 40 l807 figs-explicit ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἔρχεται 1 the Son of Man is coming See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah, will return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 12 41 i9d2 writing-participants εἶπεν δὲ ὁ Πέτρος 1 Then Peter said Luke says this to reintroduce **Peter** as a participant in the story. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could remind them who Peter was. Alternate translation: “Then Peter, one of his disciples, asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -2225,7 +2225,7 @@ LUK 12 41 l809 figs-hyperbole πάντας 1 everyone Peter is generalizing to m LUK 12 42 l810 ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord Here, Luke refers to Jesus by the respectful title **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” LUK 12 42 g8lu figs-rquestion τίς ἄρα ἐστὶν ὁ πιστὸς οἰκονόμος ὁ φρόνιμος 1 Who then is the faithful, wise manager Jesus uses a question to answer Peter’s question indirectly. He means that he expected that those who recognized that they should be like faithful managers would understand that the parable had been about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I said it for everyone who would recognize that they should be like a faithful, wise manager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 12 42 dxd2 figs-parables τίς ἄρα ἐστὶν ὁ πιστὸς οἰκονόμος ὁ φρόνιμος 1 Who then is the faithful, wise manager In the course of using a question to answer Peter’s question indirectly, Jesus provides a further illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus gave Peter this further illustration to answer his question. ‘I said it for everyone who would recognize that they should be like a faithful, wise manager’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -LUK 12 42 mnn1 figs-metonymy ὃν καταστήσει ὁ Κύριος ἐπὶ τῆς θεραπείας αὐτοῦ 1 will appoint over his care Jesus refers to the other servants figuratively as the master’s **care** by association with the way they care for him. Alternate translation: “will put in charge of his other servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 12 42 mnn1 figs-metonymy ὃν καταστήσει ὁ Κύριος ἐπὶ τῆς θεραπείας αὐτοῦ 1 will appoint over his care Jesus refers to the other servants as the master’s **care** by association with the way they care for him. Alternate translation: “will put in charge of his other servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 12 42 l811 figs-explicit ὃν καταστήσει ὁ Κύριος ἐπὶ τῆς θεραπείας αὐτοῦ 1 will appoint over his care The implication, as the rest of the parable makes clear, is that the master is making this arrangement temporarily and provisionally because he is going to be absent for a time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “will put in charge of his other servants while he goes away for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 12 43 g6xl μακάριος ὁ δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος 1 Blessed is that servant Alternate translation: “How good it will be for that servant” LUK 12 43 h35t ὃν ἐλθὼν, ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ εὑρήσει ποιοῦντα οὕτως 1 whom his master will find doing so when he comes Alternate translation: “if his master finds him doing that work when he comes back” @@ -2233,13 +2233,13 @@ LUK 12 44 i2cq ἀληθῶς λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you Jesus sa LUK 12 44 y47s ἐπὶ πᾶσιν τοῖς ὑπάρχουσιν αὐτοῦ καταστήσει αὐτόν 1 he will appoint him over all his possessions Alternate translation: “he will put him in charge of all of his property” LUK 12 45 cu5k figs-quotesinquotes ἐὰν δὲ εἴπῃ ὁ δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ, χρονίζει ὁ κύριός μου ἔρχεσθαι 1 But if that servant says in his heart, ‘My master delays to return’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But if that servant thinks to himself that his master is going to come back later than he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 12 45 l812 figs-hypo ἐὰν δὲ εἴπῃ ὁ δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ…καὶ ἄρξηται 1 But if that servant says in his heart … and begins The illustration that Jesus is using involves a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “But suppose that servant thinks to himself … and suppose he begins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -LUK 12 45 aku7 figs-metaphor εἴπῃ…ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 says in his heart Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts. Alternate translation: “thinks to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 45 aku7 figs-metaphor εἴπῃ…ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 says in his heart Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts. Alternate translation: “thinks to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 45 l813 χρονίζει ὁ κύριός μου ἔρχεσθαι 1 My master delays to return Alternate translation: “My master is going to come back later than he said” -LUK 12 45 juc5 figs-merism τοὺς παῖδας καὶ τὰς παιδίσκας 1 the male servants and the female servants Jesus is figuratively using the two types of servants to mean all of the master’s servants. Alternate translation: “all the other servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +LUK 12 45 juc5 figs-merism τοὺς παῖδας καὶ τὰς παιδίσκας 1 the male servants and the female servants Jesus is using the two types of servants to mean all of the master’s servants. Alternate translation: “all the other servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) LUK 12 46 l814 figs-hypo ἥξει ὁ κύριος τοῦ δούλου ἐκείνου 1 the master of that servant will arrive If you translated the previous verse as a hypothetical condition, you could translate this verse as the result of that condition. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Then the master of that servant will arrive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 12 46 j1m1 figs-parallelism ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ᾗ οὐ προσδοκᾷ, καὶ ἐν ὥρᾳ ᾗ οὐ γινώσκει 1 in a day that he does not expect, and in an hour that he does not know These two phrases mean the same thing. Jesus is likely using the repetition to emphasize that the return of the master will be completely unexpected by the servant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases, especially if putting both of them in your translation might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “at a time that is a complete surprise to the servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -LUK 12 46 l815 figs-idiom ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ᾗ οὐ προσδοκᾷ 1 in a day that he does not expect Here, Jesus uses the term **day** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at a time when he is not expecting him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 12 46 l816 figs-idiom ἐν ὥρᾳ ᾗ οὐ γινώσκει 1 in an hour that he does not know Here, Jesus uses the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at a time when he does not think he will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 12 46 l815 figs-idiom ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ᾗ οὐ προσδοκᾷ 1 in a day that he does not expect Here, Jesus uses the term **day** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at a time when he is not expecting him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 12 46 l816 figs-idiom ἐν ὥρᾳ ᾗ οὐ γινώσκει 1 in an hour that he does not know Here, Jesus uses the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at a time when he does not think he will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 12 46 vg1d figs-metaphor διχοτομήσει αὐτὸν 1 will cut him in two The expression **cut him in two** could mean one of two things, depending on how the word **unfaithful** is understood (see next note): (1) if **unfaithful** means “untrustworthy,” then the expression is probably figurative, since the master could not reassign this servant to less important responsibilities if he **cut him in two**. Alternate translation: “will punish him severely” (2) if **unfaithful** means “unbelieving,” then the expression is more literal, since it would describe something that will happen when God judges the world. Alternate translation: “destroy his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 46 l817 τὸ μέρος αὐτοῦ μετὰ τῶν ἀπίστων θήσει 1 will … appoint his place with the unfaithful The term that ULT translates as **unfaithful** could mean: (1) “untrustworthy.” The meaning would be that the master will assign this servant to less important responsibilities, along with other servants who have shown that they cannot be trusted with important ones. Alternate translation: “will give him unimportant responsibilities, like other servants who have shown that they cannot be trusted” (2) “unbelieving.” The master in the parable represents God, and Jesus would be speaking of what God will do, when he judges the world, to people who show by their disobedience that they do not have genuine faith. Alternate translation: “will assign him a place with the unbelievers” LUK 12 46 l818 figs-nominaladj τῶν ἀπίστων 1 the unfaithful Jesus is using the adjective **unfaithful** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this expression with an equivalent phrase. The meaning will depend on how you decided to translate **unfaithful** (see previous note). Alternate translation: “servants who have shown that they cannot be trusted” or “people who have shown that they are not genuine believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -2251,26 +2251,26 @@ LUK 12 48 nn9c figs-activepassive δαρήσεται ὀλίγας 1 will be bea LUK 12 48 qg96 figs-parallelism παντὶ…ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρ’ αὐτοῦ; καὶ ᾧ παρέθεντο πολύ, περισσότερον αἰτήσουσιν αὐτόν 1 everyone to whom much has been given, much will be required from him, and to whom much has been provided, even more will be asked of him These two clauses mean the same thing. Jesus is using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them, especially if putting both of them in your translation might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “if someone entrusts many resources to a person, he will expect that person to produce much from those resources” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) LUK 12 48 ehu9 figs-activepassive παντὶ…ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρ’ αὐτοῦ 1 everyone to whom much has been given, much will be required from him If it would be helpful in your language, you could use active verbal forms to express the meaning of the two passive verbal forms here. Alternate translation: “the master will require more of everyone to whom he has given much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 48 ir7m figs-activepassive ᾧ παρέθεντο πολύ, περισσότερον αἰτήσουσιν αὐτόν 1 to whom much has been provided, even more will be asked of him If it would be helpful in your language, you could use active verbal forms to express the meaning of the two passive verbal forms here. Alternate translation: “the master will ask even more of the one to whom he has given much property to care for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 12 49 qy62 figs-metaphor πῦρ ἦλθον βαλεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 1 I came to throw fire upon the earth Jesus is speaking figuratively of the effects of his ministry and teaching. In context, since he says contrastingly in [12:51](../12/51.md) that he did not come to bring peace to the earth, **fire** likely represents the passionate responses to him, both favorable and unfavorable, that would lead to the divisions he describes in [12:52-53](../12/52.md). Alternate translation: “My coming will lead to conflict among people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 12 49 l820 figs-metonymy τὴν γῆν 1 the earth Jesus says **the earth** figuratively to mean the people living on the earth. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 12 49 qy62 figs-metaphor πῦρ ἦλθον βαλεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 1 I came to throw fire upon the earth Jesus is speaking of the effects of his ministry and teaching. In context, since he says contrastingly in [12:51](../12/51.md) that he did not come to bring peace to the earth, **fire** likely represents the passionate responses to him, both favorable and unfavorable, that would lead to the divisions he describes in [12:52-53](../12/52.md). Alternate translation: “My coming will lead to conflict among people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 49 l820 figs-metonymy τὴν γῆν 1 the earth Jesus says **the earth** to mean the people living on the earth. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 12 49 ygv3 figs-exclamations τί θέλω εἰ ἤδη ἀνήφθη 1 how I wish that it were already kindled This exclamation emphasizes how much Jesus wants this to happen. Alternate translation: “I wish very much that this fire were already lit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) LUK 12 49 ygx3 figs-metaphor τί θέλω εἰ ἤδη ἀνήφθη 1 how I wish that it were already kindled This exclamation continues the metaphor of **fire** as conflict. Alternate translation: “how I wish that people were already taking sides” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 49 l821 figs-activepassive ἤδη ἀνήφθη 1 it were already kindled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the fire were already burning” or “people were already taking sides” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 50 k4e8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But Jesus uses this word to indicate that he cannot do what the previous sentence describes until after he does what this sentence describes. Alternate translation: “But first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -LUK 12 50 hn1j figs-metaphor βάπτισμα…ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι 1 I have a baptism to be baptized with Jesus speaks figuratively of **baptism** to describe how he must suffer. Just as water covers a person during baptism, suffering will overwhelm Jesus. Alternate translation: “I must be overwhelmed by suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 50 hn1j figs-metaphor βάπτισμα…ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι 1 I have a baptism to be baptized with Jesus speaks of **baptism** to describe how he must suffer. Just as water covers a person during baptism, suffering will overwhelm Jesus. Alternate translation: “I must be overwhelmed by suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 50 l822 figs-activepassive βάπτισμα…ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι 1 I have a baptism to be baptized with If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “suffering must overwhelm me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 50 r2yj figs-exclamations πῶς συνέχομαι ἕως ὅτου τελεσθῇ 1 how I am distressed until it is completed This exclamation emphasizes how distressed Jesus is. Alternate translation: “I am terribly distressed and will continue to be distressed until my suffering is completed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) LUK 12 50 l823 figs-activepassive πῶς συνέχομαι 1 how I am distressed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state what is doing the action. Alternate translation: “this suffering will continue to distress me terribly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 50 l824 figs-activepassive ἕως ὅτου τελεσθῇ 1 until it is completed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “until I have endured all of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 51 s32r figs-rquestion δοκεῖτε ὅτι εἰρήνην παρεγενόμην δοῦναι ἐν τῇ γῇ? 1 Do you think that I came to give peace on the earth? Jesus is not asking the people in the crowd to tell him what they think. He is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these words as a statement. Alternate translation: “Do not think that I came to bring peace on the earth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -LUK 12 51 l825 figs-metonymy δοκεῖτε ὅτι εἰρήνην παρεγενόμην δοῦναι ἐν τῇ γῇ 1 Do you think that I came to give peace on the earth Jesus says **the earth** figuratively to mean the people living on the earth. Alternate translation: “Do you think that I came to make peace between people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 12 51 l825 figs-metonymy δοκεῖτε ὅτι εἰρήνην παρεγενόμην δοῦναι ἐν τῇ γῇ 1 Do you think that I came to give peace on the earth Jesus says **the earth** to mean the people living on the earth. Alternate translation: “Do you think that I came to make peace between people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 12 51 l826 figs-abstractnouns εἰρήνην…δοῦναι ἐν τῇ γῇ 1 to give peace on the earth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **peace** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to make people get along with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 12 51 l827 figs-ellipsis οὐχί…ἀλλ’ ἢ διαμερισμόν 1 No … but rather division Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “No … I came to bring division instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 12 51 np4v figs-abstractnouns οὐχί…ἀλλ’ ἢ διαμερισμόν 1 No … but rather division If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **division** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “No … my coming will cause people to oppose each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 12 51 l828 λέγω ὑμῖν 1 I say to you Jesus uses this expression to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples and the crowd. Alternate translation: “I want you to understand” -LUK 12 52 vrt5 figs-metonymy πέντε ἐν ἑνὶ οἴκῳ 1 five in one house Jesus uses the term **house** to refer figuratively to people who live together in a house, that is, to a family. Alternate translation: “five members of the same family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 12 52 vrt5 figs-metonymy πέντε ἐν ἑνὶ οἴκῳ 1 five in one house Jesus uses the term **house** to refer to people who live together in a house, that is, to a family. Alternate translation: “five members of the same family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 12 52 l829 figs-activepassive διαμεμερισμένοι 1 divided If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “who will take sides against one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 12 52 fln4 figs-ellipsis τρεῖς ἐπὶ δυσὶν, καὶ δύο ἐπὶ τρισίν 1 three against two, and two against three Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. you could supply these words from what he says figuratively earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “three of the family members will be on one side, and the other two will be on the opposing side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +LUK 12 52 fln4 figs-ellipsis τρεῖς ἐπὶ δυσὶν, καὶ δύο ἐπὶ τρισίν 1 three against two, and two against three Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. you could supply these words from what he says earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “three of the family members will be on one side, and the other two will be on the opposing side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 12 52 l830 figs-parallelism τρεῖς ἐπὶ δυσὶν, καὶ δύο ἐπὶ τρισίν 1 three against two, and two against three These two phrases mean the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “three of the family members will be on one side, and the other two will be on the opposing side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) LUK 12 53 qr7s figs-activepassive διαμερισθήσονται 1 They will be divided If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Family members will oppose one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 53 l831 figs-parallelism πατὴρ ἐπὶ υἱῷ, καὶ υἱὸς ἐπὶ πατρί 1 father against son, and son against father These two phrases mean the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and make them a sentence of their own. Alternate translation: “Fathers and sons will oppose one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -2283,7 +2283,7 @@ LUK 12 55 gq22 figs-explicit νότον πνέοντα 1 a south wind is blowing LUK 12 55 l835 figs-quotesinquotes λέγετε, ὅτι καύσων ἔσται 1 you say, ‘There will be scorching heat’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “you say that it is going to be very hot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 12 55 l836 καὶ γίνεται 1 and it happens Alternate translation: “and it does get hot” LUK 12 56 l837 figs-explicit ὑποκριταί! 1 Hypocrites! The implication, which Jesus draws out in the rest of this verse, is that people who could understand the weather from signs such as wind and clouds also ought to be able to understand what God was doing through Jesus from the signs surrounding his ministry. So if they did not welcome him, it was not because they did not see or understand these signs. Rather, it was because they were pretending not to see or understand them. Alternate translation: “You are pretending not to understand!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 12 56 jdj7 figs-metaphor τὸ πρόσωπον 1 the face Jesus uses the term **face** figuratively to mean “appearance.” Alternate translation: “the appearance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 56 jdj7 figs-metaphor τὸ πρόσωπον 1 the face Jesus uses the term **face** to mean “appearance.” Alternate translation: “the appearance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 56 y3yj figs-rquestion τὸν καιρὸν δὲ τοῦτον, πῶς οὐκ οἴδατε δοκιμάζειν? 1 but how do you not know how to interpret this time? Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “so you ought to be able to understand what is happening right now.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 12 57 w8rz figs-rquestion τί δὲ καὶ ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν, οὐ κρίνετε τὸ δίκαιον? 1 And why do you not even judge for yourselves what is right? Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “You ought to discern on your own what is right.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 12 58 y75j figs-hypo ὡς γὰρ ὑπάγεις μετὰ τοῦ ἀντιδίκου σου ἐπ’ ἄρχοντα 1 For as you are going with your adversary to the magistrate Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach the crowd. Alternate translation: “Suppose you owed someone money, and suppose they were taking you to court to collect it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) @@ -2301,8 +2301,8 @@ LUK 13 intro xaa2 0 # Luke 13 General Notes

## Structure and formattin LUK 13 1 t1fi grammar-connect-time-background δέ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what Jesus teaches next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 13 1 l842 writing-participants παρῆσαν…τινες ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ, ἀπαγγέλλοντες αὐτῷ 1 some were present at that time who were reporting to him Luke uses this phrase to introduce new characters into the story. Alternate translation: “There were some people present at that time who were telling him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 13 1 wg2k figs-explicit ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ 1 at that time This implicitly means while Jesus was still teaching the crowds, as Luke said he was doing in [11:54](../11/54.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while he was still teaching the crowds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 13 1 l843 figs-metaphor ὧν τὸ αἷμα Πειλᾶτος ἔμιξεν μετὰ τῶν θυσιῶν αὐτῶν 1 whose blood Pilate had mixed with their sacrifices Luke is speaking figuratively about this event to indicate that the **blood** of the Galileans was shed at the same time as the blood of their animal **sacrifices**. Alternate translation: “whom Pilate had killed while they were offering sacrifices at the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 13 1 fj2c figs-metonymy ὧν τὸ αἷμα Πειλᾶτος ἔμιξεν μετὰ τῶν θυσιῶν αὐτῶν 1 whose blood Pilate had mixed with their sacrifices Luke uses the term **blood** figuratively to refer to the death of these Galileans. Alternate translation: “whom Pilate had killed while they were offering sacrifices at the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 13 1 l843 figs-metaphor ὧν τὸ αἷμα Πειλᾶτος ἔμιξεν μετὰ τῶν θυσιῶν αὐτῶν 1 whose blood Pilate had mixed with their sacrifices Luke is speaking about this event to indicate that the **blood** of the Galileans was shed at the same time as the blood of their animal **sacrifices**. Alternate translation: “whom Pilate had killed while they were offering sacrifices at the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 13 1 fj2c figs-metonymy ὧν τὸ αἷμα Πειλᾶτος ἔμιξεν μετὰ τῶν θυσιῶν αὐτῶν 1 whose blood Pilate had mixed with their sacrifices Luke uses the term **blood** to refer to the death of these Galileans. Alternate translation: “whom Pilate had killed while they were offering sacrifices at the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 13 1 l844 figs-metonymy ὧν τὸ αἷμα Πειλᾶτος ἔμιξεν μετὰ τῶν θυσιῶν αὐτῶν 1 whose blood Pilate had mixed with their sacrifices Pilate likely did not kill these Galileans personally. Rather, he ordered his soldiers to kill them. Alternate translation: “whom Pilate’s soldiers had killed as they were offering sacrifices at the temple” or “whom Pilate had ordered his soldiers to kill as they were offering sacrifices at the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 13 1 l845 translate-names Πειλᾶτος 1 Pilate **Pilate** is the name of a man; he was the Roman ruler of Judea in this time. See how you translated his name in [3:1](../03/01.md). His name occurs many times later in the book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 13 2 l846 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 1 answering he said to them Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to what the people in the crowd told him. Alternate translation: “Jesus responded to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -2328,7 +2328,7 @@ LUK 13 6 l853 figs-go ἦλθεν ζητῶν καρπὸν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 h LUK 13 7 l854 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν…πρὸς τὸν ἀμπελουργόν, ἰδοὺ, τρία ἔτη ἀφ’ οὗ ἔρχομαι ζητῶν καρπὸν ἐν τῇ συκῇ ταύτῃ, καὶ οὐχ εὑρίσκω. ἔκκοψον αὐτήν, ἵνα τί καὶ τὴν γῆν καταργεῖ? 1 he said to the gardener, ‘Behold, for three years I came seeking fruit on this fig tree and did not find any. Cut it down. Why is it even idling the ground?’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he told the gardener to pay attention, that he had been coming for three years to look for fruit on the fig tree, but he had not found any, and so the gardener should cut the tree down because it was keeping the ground from being productive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 13 7 l855 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold The man uses the term **behold** to get the gardener to pay attention to what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Pay attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 13 7 hg35 figs-rquestion ἵνα τί καὶ τὴν γῆν καταργεῖ? 1 Why is it even idling the ground? The man uses the question form to emphasize that the tree is useless and that the gardener should cut it down. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “Do not let it keep the ground from being productive any longer.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -LUK 13 7 l856 figs-metaphor τὴν γῆν καταργεῖ 1 idling the ground The man speaks figuratively of the tree as if it were keeping the ground from working, since the ground would be productive if a different tree that actually was bearing fruit were in its place. Alternate translation: “is it … keeping the ground from being productive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 13 7 l856 figs-metaphor τὴν γῆν καταργεῖ 1 idling the ground The man speaks of the tree as if it were keeping the ground from working, since the ground would be productive if a different tree that actually was bearing fruit were in its place. Alternate translation: “is it … keeping the ground from being productive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 13 8 pm3j ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει αὐτῷ 1 But answering he says to him To call attention to a development in the story, Jesus uses the present tense in past narration. See how you decided to approach this usage in [7:40](../07/40.md). If it would not be natural to use the present tense in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “But he responded” LUK 13 8 l857 figs-hendiadys ὁ…ἀποκριθεὶς λέγει 1 answering he says Together the terms **answering** and **says** mean that the gardener responded to what his master told him to do. Alternate translation: “he responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 13 8 l2ks ἄφες αὐτὴν καὶ τοῦτο τὸ ἔτος 1 leave it this year also Alternate translation: “wait one more year before cutting down the tree” @@ -2355,12 +2355,12 @@ LUK 13 15 u6zr figs-explicit ὑποκριταί 1 Hypocrites Jesus is speaking LUK 13 15 xt5y figs-rquestion ἕκαστος ὑμῶν τῷ Σαββάτῳ οὐ λύει 1 Does not each of you on the Sabbath untie Jesus is using the question form as a teaching tool. He is not asking his listeners to tell him whether they would do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “On the Sabbath, each one of you unties” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 13 15 ha7b translate-unknown τὸν βοῦν αὐτοῦ, ἢ τὸν ὄνον 1 his ox or donkey These are domesticated animals. If your readers would not be familiar with what an **ox** or a **donkey** is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “his farm animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 13 15 kbj4 τῷ Σαββάτῳ 1 on the Sabbath Here your language might use an indefinite article rather than the definite article, since Jesus is not speaking of a specific Sabbath. Alternate translation: “even on a Sabbath day” -LUK 13 16 br72 figs-metaphor θυγατέρα Ἀβραὰμ 1 a daughter of Abraham Jesus is using the word **daughter** figuratively to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “a descendant of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 13 16 euq2 figs-metaphor ἣν ἔδησεν ὁ Σατανᾶς 1 whom Satan bound Jesus speaks figuratively of the evil spirit causing the crippling disease as if Satan had tied the woman up. Alternate translation: “whom Satan kept crippled by this illness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 13 16 l863 figs-metonymy ὁ Σατανᾶς 1 Satan Jesus figuratively calls the evil spirit **Satan** by association with the leader of the evil spirits. Alternate translation: “this evil spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 13 16 br72 figs-metaphor θυγατέρα Ἀβραὰμ 1 a daughter of Abraham Jesus is using the word **daughter** to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “a descendant of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 13 16 euq2 figs-metaphor ἣν ἔδησεν ὁ Σατανᾶς 1 whom Satan bound Jesus speaks of the evil spirit causing the crippling disease as if Satan had tied the woman up. Alternate translation: “whom Satan kept crippled by this illness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 13 16 l863 figs-metonymy ὁ Σατανᾶς 1 Satan Jesus calls the evil spirit **Satan** by association with the leader of the evil spirits. Alternate translation: “this evil spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 13 16 mh31 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, δέκα καὶ ὀκτὼ ἔτη 1 behold, for 18 years Jesus uses the term **behold** to emphasize the fact that eighteen years was a very long time for the woman to suffer. Your language may have its own way of emphasizing this. Alternate translation: “for eighteen long years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 13 16 g5b7 figs-rquestion οὐκ ἔδει λυθῆναι ἀπὸ τοῦ δεσμοῦ τούτου τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ Σαββάτου? 1 ought she not to have been released Jesus is using the question form to challenge the synagogue ruler’s assertion that people should not come for healing on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “it is right to free her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -LUK 13 16 l864 figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τοῦ δεσμοῦ τούτου 1 from this bond Jesus speaks again about the woman’s disease figuratively as if it had kept her tied up. Alternate translation: “from this crippling illness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 13 16 l864 figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τοῦ δεσμοῦ τούτου 1 from this bond Jesus speaks again about the woman’s disease as if it had kept her tied up. Alternate translation: “from this crippling illness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 13 16 l865 τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ Σαββάτου 1 on the day of the Sabbath Here your language might use an indefinite article rather than the definite article, since Jesus is not speaking of a specific Sabbath. Alternate translation: “on a Sabbath day” LUK 13 17 l866 figs-activepassive κατῃσχύνοντο 1 were put to shame If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “felt ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 13 17 r1jn figs-activepassive τοῖς ἐνδόξοις τοῖς γινομένοις ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 the glorious things that were being done by him If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the glorious things Jesus was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2400,8 +2400,8 @@ LUK 13 25 l882 figs-quotesinquotes ἀποκριθεὶς ἐρεῖ ὑμῖν, LUK 13 25 l883 figs-ellipsis οὐκ οἶδα ὑμᾶς, πόθεν ἐστέ 1 I do not know you, where you are from The owner is speaking in an abbreviated way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could draw on the first phrase to supply the words that are missing from the second phrase, as UST does. Alternate translation: “I do not know you, and I do not know where you are from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 13 25 l884 figs-parallelism οὐκ οἶδα ὑμᾶς, πόθεν ἐστέ 1 I do not know you, where you are from The owner is also using repetition for emphasis. If this would not be clear in your language and your readers might wonder why he was saying the same thing twice, you could translate this with a single phrase that expresses the basic meaning. Alternate translation: “I do not know who you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) LUK 13 26 l885 figs-quotesinquotes ἄρξεσθε λέγειν, ἐφάγομεν ἐνώπιόν σου καὶ ἐπίομεν, καὶ ἐν ταῖς πλατείαις ἡμῶν ἐδίδαξας 1 you will begin to say, ‘We ate and drank in your sight, and you taught in our streets’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “you will begin to tell him that you shared meals with him and he taught in the streets of your town” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 13 26 l886 figs-metaphor ἐφάγομεν ἐνώπιόν σου καὶ ἐπίομεν 1 we ate and drank before you Here, **before** figuratively means “in the presence” of another person. Alternate translation: “you were with us when we ate and drank” or “we ate and drank together with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 13 26 l887 figs-merism ἐφάγομεν…καὶ ἐπίομεν 1 ate and drank The people are figuratively using the two components of a meal to mean an entire meal. Alternate translation: “We shared meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +LUK 13 26 l886 figs-metaphor ἐφάγομεν ἐνώπιόν σου καὶ ἐπίομεν 1 we ate and drank before you Here, **before** means “in the presence” of another person. Alternate translation: “you were with us when we ate and drank” or “we ate and drank together with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 13 26 l887 figs-merism ἐφάγομεν…καὶ ἐπίομεν 1 ate and drank The people are using the two components of a meal to mean an entire meal. Alternate translation: “We shared meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) LUK 13 26 l888 figs-you σου 1 you Since the people are addressing the owner alone, the pronoun **you** would be singular here, and also in any case where it is needed in your language as a pronoun for a verb, for example, **you taught**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 13 26 l889 figs-exclusive ἐν ταῖς πλατείαις ἡμῶν 1 in our streets Within the extended metaphor, the people are addressing Jesus, who was not from their town, but who taught them as he traveled through. So the people would consider the streets to be theirs but not his, and **our** would be exclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) LUK 13 27 l890 figs-quotesinquotes ἐρεῖ λέγων ὑμῖν, οὐκ οἶδα πόθεν ἐστέ; ἀπόστητε ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ, πάντες ἐργάται ἀδικίας 1 he will speak, saying to you, ‘I do not know where you are from. Get away from me, all you workers of unrighteousness’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he will reply that he does not know where you are from, and he will tell you to go away because you are evildoers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -2414,48 +2414,48 @@ LUK 13 28 uhh8 translate-symaction ὁ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμ LUK 13 28 l895 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ Ἰακὼβ 1 Abraham, and Isaac, and Jacob These are the names of three men. See how you translated them in [3:34](../03/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 13 28 crf9 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 in the kingdom of God See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “in the place where God rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 13 28 ep1b figs-activepassive ὑμᾶς δὲ ἐκβαλλομένους ἔξω 1 but you are thrown out If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will have done the action. Alternate translation: “when God will have thrown you outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 13 29 wcg6 figs-merism ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν καὶ δυσμῶν καὶ ἀπὸ βορρᾶ καὶ νότου 1 from east and west, and from north and south Jesus speaks figuratively of all directions in order to include everything in between. Alternate translation: “from all over the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +LUK 13 29 wcg6 figs-merism ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν καὶ δυσμῶν καὶ ἀπὸ βορρᾶ καὶ νότου 1 from east and west, and from north and south Jesus speaks of all directions in order to include everything in between. Alternate translation: “from all over the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) LUK 13 29 sbv1 figs-metaphor ἀνακλιθήσονται ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 will recline to eat in the kingdom of God Jesus speaks of the joy that people will share in God’s kingdom as if they were all having a feast. Alternate translation: “will feast together in the kingdom of God” or “will rejoice together in the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 13 29 l896 translate-unknown ἀνακλιθήσονται 1 will recline to eat If you decide to translate this phrase literally, see how you did that in [5:29](../05/29.md). Alternate translation: “will take their places at the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 13 29 l897 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 in the kingdom of God See how you decided to translate this phrase in [13:28](../13/28.md). Alternate translation: “in the place where God rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 13 30 l898 figs-metaphor καὶ ἰδοὺ 1 And behold Jesus uses this expression to call attention to what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 13 30 lk75 figs-metaphor εἰσὶν ἔσχατοι οἳ ἔσονται πρῶτοι 1 there are last ones who will be first Being **last** figuratively represents having few privileges, being **first** figuratively represents having many privileges. Alternate translation: “people who are not privileged now will come to have great privileges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 13 30 lk75 figs-metaphor εἰσὶν ἔσχατοι οἳ ἔσονται πρῶτοι 1 there are last ones who will be first Being **last** represents having few privileges, being **first** represents having many privileges. Alternate translation: “people who are not privileged now will come to have great privileges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 13 30 l899 figs-nominaladj ἔσχατοι 1 last ones Jesus is using the adjective **last** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. ULT adds the word **ones** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are not privileged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -LUK 13 30 l900 figs-metaphor εἰσὶν πρῶτοι οἳ ἔσονται ἔσχατοι 1 there are first ones who will be last Being **first** figuratively represents having many privileges, and being **last** figuratively represents having few privileges. Alternate translation: “people who are greatly privileged now will lose those privileges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 13 30 l900 figs-metaphor εἰσὶν πρῶτοι οἳ ἔσονται ἔσχατοι 1 there are first ones who will be last Being **first** represents having many privileges, and being **last** represents having few privileges. Alternate translation: “people who are greatly privileged now will lose those privileges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 13 30 l901 figs-nominaladj πρῶτοι 1 first ones Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. ULT adds the word **ones** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this term with an equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are greatly privileged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -LUK 13 31 pe5i figs-idiom ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 At that hour Luke uses the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “At that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 13 31 pe5i figs-idiom ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 At that hour Luke uses the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “At that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 13 31 l902 writing-newevent ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 At that hour Luke also uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate the phrase in a way that shows how this next event follows the previous event. Alternate translation: “Soon after Jesus finished speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 13 31 l903 writing-participants προσῆλθάν τινες Φαρισαῖοι λέγοντες αὐτῷ 1 certain Pharisees approached, saying to him Luke uses this phrase to introduce new characters into the story. Alternate translation: “some Pharisees who were there came and told him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 13 31 r41z figs-doublet ἔξελθε καὶ πορεύου ἐντεῦθεν 1 Leave and go away from here These two expressions mean the same thing. The Pharisees are using repetition to emphasize how urgent they believe it is for Jesus to flee for his life. Alternate translation: “You need to get away from here right now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) LUK 13 31 l7fe figs-metonymy Ἡρῴδης θέλει σε ἀποκτεῖναι 1 Herod wants to kill you Herod would not kill Jesus personally. Rather, he would order people to do it. Alternate translation: “Herod plans to send his soldiers to kill you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 13 32 l904 figs-quotesinquotes πορευθέντες εἴπατε τῇ ἀλώπεκι ταύτῃ, ἰδοὺ, ἐκβάλλω δαιμόνια, καὶ ἰάσεις ἀποτελῶ 1 Go and tell that fox, ‘Behold, I am driving out demons and perform healings’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Go and tell that fox that I will certainly continue to drive out demons and perform healings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 13 32 l905 translate-unknown τῇ ἀλώπεκι ταύτῃ 1 that fox A **fox** is a small wild dog. If your readers would not be familiar with what a **fox** is, you could use the name of a similar animal in your region, or a general expression. Alternate translation: “that little dog” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 13 32 af7k figs-metaphor τῇ ἀλώπεκι ταύτῃ 1 that fox Jesus is referring to Herod figuratively as a **fox**. This could mean: (1) since foxes need to rely on cunning to catch their prey, Jesus may be saying that Herod is devious. Alternate translation: “that devious person” (2) since a fox is a small animal, Jesus may be saying that Herod was not much of a threat. Alternate translation: “that insignificant person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 13 32 af7k figs-metaphor τῇ ἀλώπεκι ταύτῃ 1 that fox Jesus is referring to Herod as a **fox**. This could mean: (1) since foxes need to rely on cunning to catch their prey, Jesus may be saying that Herod is devious. Alternate translation: “that devious person” (2) since a fox is a small animal, Jesus may be saying that Herod was not much of a threat. Alternate translation: “that insignificant person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 13 32 l906 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Jesus uses the term **behold** to call attention to what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 13 32 l907 figs-idiom ἐκβάλλω δαιμόνια, καὶ ἰάσεις ἀποτελῶ σήμερον καὶ αὔριον 1 I am driving out demons and performing healings today and tomorrow The expression **today and tomorrow** is an idiom that means “at the present time” or “for now.” Alternate translation: “for now I will continue to drive out demons and perform healings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 13 32 l908 figs-synecdoche ἐκβάλλω δαιμόνια, καὶ ἰάσεις ἀποτελῶ σήμερον καὶ αὔριον 1 I am driving out demons and performing healings today and tomorrow Jesus speaks of two parts of his ministry, **driving out demons and performing healings**, to mean all of his ministry, which also included teaching and other things. Alternate translation: “for now I will continue to carry on my ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 13 32 l909 figs-explicit ἐκβάλλω δαιμόνια, καὶ ἰάσεις ἀποτελῶ σήμερον καὶ αὔριον 1 I am driving out demons and performing healings today and tomorrow The implication is that Jesus is saying he knows he does not need to be afraid of Herod’s deadly intentions, even though he is in territory that Herod rules, because God will keep him safe while he carries out his ministry. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know that for now, with God’s protection, I can safely carry on my ministry even in Herod’s territory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 13 32 l910 figs-idiom τῇ τρίτῃ 1 on the third day In this culture, **the third day** meant “the day after tomorrow.” Jesus is using the expression as an idiom. Alternate translation: “at a short time in the future” or “soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 13 32 l911 figs-activepassive τελειοῦμαι 1 I will be finished If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. This could mean: (1) Jesus is saying he will soon complete his work of teaching and healing. Alternate translation: “I will complete my ministry” (2) this expression refers to someone reaching a goal or destination. Alternate translation: “I will finish traveling through Herod’s territory and reach Jerusalem” (3) Jesus is referring to a goal or destination figuratively, and mean that he will reach the end of his life. Alternate translation: “I will give my life as a sacrifice” (4) the expression describes someone reaching maturity or perfection of character, and if that is what it means here, it would describe the character that Jesus demonstrated when he gave his life as the Savior. Alternate translation: “I will demonstrate supreme love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LUK 13 32 l911 figs-activepassive τελειοῦμαι 1 I will be finished If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. This could mean: (1) Jesus is saying he will soon complete his work of teaching and healing. Alternate translation: “I will complete my ministry” (2) this expression refers to someone reaching a goal or destination. Alternate translation: “I will finish traveling through Herod’s territory and reach Jerusalem” (3) Jesus is referring to a goal or destination, and mean that he will reach the end of his life. Alternate translation: “I will give my life as a sacrifice” (4) the expression describes someone reaching maturity or perfection of character, and if that is what it means here, it would describe the character that Jesus demonstrated when he gave his life as the Savior. Alternate translation: “I will demonstrate supreme love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 13 33 p9za πλὴν δεῖ με…πορεύεσθαι 1 Nevertheless, it is necessary for me to journey Alternate translation: “But I must keep traveling” LUK 13 33 l912 figs-idiom σήμερον καὶ αὔριον καὶ τῇ ἐχομένῃ 1 today, and tomorrow, and the following day This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “now and in the time just ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 13 33 nbk7 figs-irony οὐκ ἐνδέχεται προφήτην ἀπολέσθαι ἔξω Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 it is not possible for a prophet to perish outside of Jerusalem This could also mean “it is not acceptable.” Either way, Jesus is speaking ironically. The Jewish leaders claimed to serve God, and yet their ancestors killed many of God’s prophets in Jerusalem. Jesus knew that they would kill him there too. Alternate translation: “it is in Jerusalem that the Jewish leaders have killed so many of God’s messengers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) -LUK 13 34 cac7 figs-apostrophe Ἰερουσαλὴμ, Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Jerusalem, Jerusalem Jesus is figuratively addressing something he knows cannot hear him, the city of Jerusalem, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. Alternate translation: “I am very upset with the city of Jerusalem” or, if you decide to use the second person (see later note), “I am very upset with you, Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) +LUK 13 34 cac7 figs-apostrophe Ἰερουσαλὴμ, Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Jerusalem, Jerusalem Jesus is addressing something he knows cannot hear him, the city of Jerusalem, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. Alternate translation: “I am very upset with the city of Jerusalem” or, if you decide to use the second person (see later note), “I am very upset with you, Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) LUK 13 34 l913 figs-parallelism ἡ ἀποκτείνουσα τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ λιθοβολοῦσα τοὺς ἀπεσταλμένους πρὸς αὐτήν 1 who kills the prophets and stones those who are sent to her These two phrases mean the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases. Alternate translation: “who kills the prophets God sends her by stoning them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -LUK 13 34 l914 figs-personification ἡ ἀποκτείνουσα τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ λιθοβολοῦσα τοὺς ἀπεσταλμένους πρὸς αὐτήν 1 who kills the prophets and stones those who are sent to her Jesus speaks figuratively of the city as if it were female. Your language may customarily use neuter pronouns for cities. Alternate translation: “which kills the prophets and stones those who are sent to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 13 34 l914 figs-personification ἡ ἀποκτείνουσα τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ λιθοβολοῦσα τοὺς ἀπεσταλμένους πρὸς αὐτήν 1 who kills the prophets and stones those who are sent to her Jesus speaks of the city as if it were female. Your language may customarily use neuter pronouns for cities. Alternate translation: “which kills the prophets and stones those who are sent to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 13 34 gb6w figs-metonymy ἡ ἀποκτείνουσα τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ λιθοβολοῦσα τοὺς ἀπεσταλμένους πρὸς αὐτήν 1 who kills the prophets and stones those who are sent to her If your readers would find it strange that Jesus is addressing the city, you could make it clear that he is really speaking about the people who live in the city: “whose people kill the prophets and stone those sent to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 13 34 l915 figs-123person ἡ ἀποκτείνουσα τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ λιθοβολοῦσα τοὺς ἀπεσταλμένους πρὸς αὐτήν 1 who kills the prophets and stones those who are sent to her Jesus speaks of the city in the third person, even though he is addressing it directly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the second person. Alternate translation: “you who kill the prophets and stone those who are sent to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 13 34 zhg8 figs-activepassive τοὺς ἀπεσταλμένους πρὸς αὐτήν 1 those who are sent to her If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “those God has sent to her” or “those God has sent to it” or “those God has sent to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 13 34 rj48 figs-exclamations ποσάκις ἠθέλησα 1 How often have I desired This is an exclamation and not a question. Alternate translation: “I have desired so often” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) -LUK 13 34 q1i3 figs-metaphor ἐπισυνάξαι τὰ τέκνα σου 1 to gather your children Jesus is figuratively describing the people who live in Jerusalem as if they were the **children** of the city. Alternate translation: “to gather your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 13 34 q1i3 figs-metaphor ἐπισυνάξαι τὰ τέκνα σου 1 to gather your children Jesus is describing the people who live in Jerusalem as if they were the **children** of the city. Alternate translation: “to gather your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 13 34 q4nf figs-ellipsis ὃν τρόπον ὄρνις τὴν ἑαυτῆς νοσσιὰν ὑπὸ τὰς πτέρυγας 1 the way a hen her own brood under her wings Jesus is leaving out the word **gathers** that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. you could supply this word from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “the way a hen gathers her own brood under her wings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -LUK 13 34 l916 figs-you σου 1 your Even though Jesus is speaking of the people who live in Jerusalem, he is figuratively addressing the city, so **your** would be singular. The pronoun **you** would also be a singular pronoun in any case where it is needed in your language as a pronoun for a verb, for example, “you were not willing,” and in the phrase “sent to you,” if you decide to use the second person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +LUK 13 34 l916 figs-you σου 1 your Even though Jesus is speaking of the people who live in Jerusalem, he is addressing the city, so **your** would be singular. The pronoun **you** would also be a singular pronoun in any case where it is needed in your language as a pronoun for a verb, for example, “you were not willing,” and in the phrase “sent to you,” if you decide to use the second person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 13 34 kb9t figs-simile ὃν τρόπον ὄρνις τὴν ἑαυτῆς νοσσιὰν ὑπὸ τὰς πτέρυγας 1 the way a hen gathers her brood under her wings Jesus uses this comparison to describe how he wishes he could care for the people of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “just as if I were a hen gathering her chicks under her wings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) LUK 13 34 l917 translate-unknown τὴν ἑαυτῆς νοσσιὰν 1 her brood The term **brood** refers collectively to all of the young offspring of a bird. Alternate translation: “her chicks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 13 34 l918 figs-explicit ὑπὸ τὰς πτέρυγας 1 under her wings The implication is that a hen would put her baby chicks there to protect them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “under her wings to protect them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 13 35 l919 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Jesus uses the term **Behold** to call attention to what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 13 35 l920 figs-pastforfuture ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν 1 your house has been left to you Jesus is figuratively using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. Alternate translation: “your house will be left to you alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) -LUK 13 35 w1v2 figs-metaphor ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν 1 your house has been left to you Jesus speaks figuratively of the city of Jerusalem as if it were a **house** in which its people lived. Alternate translation: “your city will be left to you alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 13 35 l920 figs-pastforfuture ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν 1 your house has been left to you Jesus is using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. Alternate translation: “your house will be left to you alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +LUK 13 35 w1v2 figs-metaphor ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν 1 your house has been left to you Jesus speaks of the city of Jerusalem as if it were a **house** in which its people lived. Alternate translation: “your city will be left to you alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 13 35 l921 figs-activepassive ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν 1 your house has been left to you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God is going to leave your city to you alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 13 35 l922 figs-explicit ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν 1 your house has been left to you The implications of this statement are that God will no longer consider that Jerusalem belongs to him, as a holy city where he dwells in his temple, and that God will therefore not protect the people of Jerusalem from their enemies. Alternate translation: “God will not protect you from your enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 13 35 l923 figs-you ὑμῖν…ὑμῶν…ὑμῖν 1 your … you … you Jesus is now speaking directly to the people who live in Jerusalem, so **your** and **you** would be plural. The pronoun **you** would also be a plural pronoun in any case where it is needed in your language as a pronoun for a verb, for example, “you say.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -2463,12 +2463,12 @@ LUK 13 35 l924 λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν 1 I say to you Jesus says this to emph LUK 13 35 x4y6 οὐ μὴ με ἴδητέ ἕως ἥξει ὅτε εἴπητε 1 you will certainly not see me until it comes when you say If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this a positive statement. Alternate translation: “the next time you see me, you will say” LUK 13 35 l925 figs-idiom ἕως ἥξει ὅτε εἴπητε 1 until it comes when you say The expression **it comes** means “the time comes.” You could express that in your translation, or, if your language does not speak of time as “coming,” you can use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “until the time comes when you say” or “until the time when you say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 13 35 l926 figs-quotesinquotes ὅτε εἴπητε, εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 when you say, ‘Blessed is the one who comes in the name of the Lord’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “when you say that the one who comes in the name of the Lord is blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 13 35 v6lj figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord God’s **name** figuratively represents his power and authority. Alternate translation: “as God’s representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 13 35 v6lj figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord God’s **name** represents his power and authority. Alternate translation: “as God’s representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 14 intro xk3w 0 # Luke 14 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus attends a banquet and tells a parable about a banquet (14:1-24)
2. Jesus teaches more about being his disciple (14:25-35)

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Parable

Jesus told the parable in Luke 14:15-24 to teach that the kingdom of God will be something that everyone can enjoy, but many people will refuse to be part of it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “For everyone who exalts himself will be humbled, and he who humbles himself will be exalted” (14:11). LUK 14 1 dj2d writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 14 1 a3ya grammar-connect-time-background καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 14 1 l89x writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 he The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 14 1 lh8g figs-synecdoche φαγεῖν ἄρτον 1 to eat bread Luke refers figuratively to **bread**, one kind of food, to mean food in general. Alternate translation: “to have a meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 14 1 lh8g figs-synecdoche φαγεῖν ἄρτον 1 to eat bread Luke refers to **bread**, one kind of food, to mean food in general. Alternate translation: “to have a meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 14 1 jst8 figs-explicit καὶ αὐτοὶ ἦσαν παρατηρούμενοι αὐτόν 1 and they were watching him closely The implication is that other Pharisees were also present, as [14:3](../14/03.md) indicates explicitly, and that they all wanted to find a way to accuse Jesus of saying or doing something wrong. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It might be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Many other Pharisees were present, and they were all watching Jesus closely to try to catch him saying or doing something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 14 2 l927 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke uses the term **behold** to calls the reader’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 14 2 f5gh writing-participants ἄνθρωπός τις 1 a certain man Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a man there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -2487,7 +2487,7 @@ LUK 14 6 cti5 καὶ οὐκ ἴσχυσαν ἀνταποκριθῆναι π LUK 14 7 l935 grammar-connect-logic-result ἔλεγεν…παραβολήν…ἐπέχων πῶς τὰς πρωτοκλισίας ἐξελέγοντο 1 he was speaking a parable … noticing how they were choosing the first places If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of the phrases in this verse, since the second phrase gives the reason for the action that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Jesus noticed that those whom the leader of the Pharisees had invited to the meal were trying to sit in the seats for honored guests, so he gave them an illustration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 14 7 u86b figs-parables ἔλεγεν…παραβολήν 1 he was speaking a parable In this instance, Luke is not using the term **parable** to mean a brief story that teaches something true in a way that is easy to understand and remember. Jesus used a hypothetical situation as an illustration to get the guests at this meal to consider how they should behave at feasts. Alternate translation: “he gave an illustration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) LUK 14 7 em4u figs-activepassive τοὺς κεκλημένους 1 those who were invited If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who had done the action. Alternate translation: “those whom this Pharisee had invited to the meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 14 7 yd4g figs-metaphor τὰς πρωτοκλισίας 1 the first places The term **first** figuratively represents being important and honored. If your culture has a way of placing people at meals to show honor, you could use that in your translation. Otherwise, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the seats closest to the host” or “the seats for honored guests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 14 7 yd4g figs-metaphor τὰς πρωτοκλισίας 1 the first places The term **first** represents being important and honored. If your culture has a way of placing people at meals to show honor, you could use that in your translation. Otherwise, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the seats closest to the host” or “the seats for honored guests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 14 8 l936 figs-hypo ὅταν κληθῇς ὑπό τινος εἰς γάμους, μὴ κατακλιθῇς 1 When you are invited by someone to a wedding feast, do not recline to eat Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach the guests at this meal. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone invites you to a wedding celebration. Then you should not take your place at the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 14 8 pd7w figs-activepassive ὅταν κληθῇς ὑπό τινος 1 When you are invited by someone If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “When someone invites you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 14 8 l937 translate-unknown μὴ κατακλιθῇς 1 do not recline to eat See how you translated this phrase in [5:29](../05/29.md). Alternate translation: “do not take your place at the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -2496,14 +2496,14 @@ LUK 14 8 t1r5 figs-activepassive ἐντιμότερός σου ᾖ κεκλημ LUK 14 8 l939 figs-nominaladj ἐντιμότερός 1 a more honorable Jesus is using the comparative adjective **more honorable** as a noun. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate it with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “a person who is more important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 14 8 m5b9 figs-youcrowd σου 1 you Even though Jesus is speaking to the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation, so **you** and **your** are singular in [14:8-10](../14/08.md). But if the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) LUK 14 9 l940 translate-unknown ἐλθὼν, ὁ σὲ καὶ αὐτὸν καλέσας 1 when the one who invited you and him arrives In this culture, the host would come into the banquet hall after all the guests were seated. If the practice is different in your culture, you could use a general expression in your translation here. Alternate translation: “when the person who invited both of you sees the seating arrangements” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 14 9 ecp7 figs-idiom ἄρξῃ μετὰ αἰσχύνης τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον κατέχειν 1 you will begin with shame to take the last place Jesus uses the term **begin** idiomatically to suggest slowly unfolding, reluctant action. Alternate translation: “you will be ashamed and reluctantly have to take the last place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 14 9 gqa6 figs-metaphor τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον 1 the last place The term **last** figuratively represents being unimportant and not honored. If your culture has a way of placing people at meals to show honor, you could use that in your translation. Otherwise, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a seat far from the host” or “a seat for the least important person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 14 9 ecp7 figs-idiom ἄρξῃ μετὰ αἰσχύνης τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον κατέχειν 1 you will begin with shame to take the last place Jesus uses the term **begin** to suggest slowly unfolding, reluctant action. Alternate translation: “you will be ashamed and reluctantly have to take the last place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 14 9 gqa6 figs-metaphor τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον 1 the last place The term **last** represents being unimportant and not honored. If your culture has a way of placing people at meals to show honor, you could use that in your translation. Otherwise, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a seat far from the host” or “a seat for the least important person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 14 9 l941 figs-explicit τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον 1 the last place The implication is that this guest must go to the least important section of seats because all the other places have been taken in the meantime. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a seat for the least important person, since all the other seats will be taken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 14 10 x5qh figs-activepassive ὅταν κληθῇς 1 when you are invited If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who does the action. Alternate translation: “when someone invites you to a feast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 14 10 l942 translate-unknown ἀνάπεσε 1 recline to eat See how you translated this phrase in [14:8](../14/08.md). Alternate translation: “take your place at the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 14 10 by81 figs-metaphor εἰς τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον 1 in the last place See how you translated this phrase in [14:9](../14/09.md). Alternate translation: “among the least important people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 14 10 l943 translate-unknown ὅταν ἔλθῃ ὁ κεκληκώς σε 1 when the one who has invited you comes In this culture, the host would come into the banqueting hall after all the guests were seated. If the practice is different in your culture, you could use a general expression in your translation here. Alternate translation: “when the person who invited you sees where you are sitting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 14 10 ck9k figs-metaphor προσανάβηθι ἀνώτερον 1 come up higher The host speaks figuratively of the more important places at the feast being **higher** than the less important ones. Alternate translation: “move to a seat for a more important person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 14 10 ck9k figs-metaphor προσανάβηθι ἀνώτερον 1 come up higher The host speaks of the more important places at the feast being **higher** than the less important ones. Alternate translation: “move to a seat for a more important person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 14 10 h5ee figs-idiom ἔσται σοι δόξα 1 there will be honor to you This is an idiom. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state who would make this happen. Alternate translation: “your host will honor you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 14 10 l944 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον 1 before all those reclining to eat with you Here, the word **before** means “in front of” or “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “in the presence of all the other guests” or “as all the other guests are watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 14 11 i5e7 ὁ ὑψῶν ἑαυτὸν 1 who exalts himself Alternate translation: “who tries to look important” or “who takes an important position” @@ -2513,7 +2513,7 @@ LUK 14 11 eki7 figs-activepassive ὑψωθήσεται 1 will be exalted If it LUK 14 12 p9hc τῷ κεκληκότι αὐτόν 1 the one who had invited him Alternate translation: “the Pharisee who had invited him to his house for a meal” LUK 14 12 v4uk figs-you ὅταν ποιῇς 1 when you make Even though this is general advice for everyone listening, the word **you** is singular here, and **you** and **your** are singular in all of [14:12-14](../14/12.md), because Jesus is speaking directly to the Pharisee who invited him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 14 12 gmh6 figs-hyperbole μὴ φώνει 1 do not invite Jesus is probably not telling his host never to invite such people. Rather, this is likely a generalization that means he should invite others as well. Alternate translation: “do not invite only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -LUK 14 12 l945 figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου…τοὺς συγγενεῖς σου 1 your brothers … your relatives The term **brothers** probably refers figuratively to close family members, while the term **relatives** likely indicates more distant members of an extended family. Alternate translation: “your close family members … other relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 14 12 l945 figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου…τοὺς συγγενεῖς σου 1 your brothers … your relatives The term **brothers** probably refers to close family members, while the term **relatives** likely indicates more distant members of an extended family. Alternate translation: “your close family members … other relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 14 12 l946 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου 1 your brothers If **brothers** is a figurative term, then Jesus is using it in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “your close family members” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 14 12 l947 μήποτε καὶ αὐτοὶ ἀντικαλέσωσίν σε 1 lest they also invite you in return Alternate translation: “because they might feel an obligation to invite you to a banquet of their own” LUK 14 12 l948 γένηται ἀνταπόδομά σοι 1 and repayment happen to you Your language may require you to say who would make this happen. Alternate translation: “and they would repay you” @@ -2532,7 +2532,7 @@ LUK 14 15 l950 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεο LUK 14 16 m4y2 figs-parables ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ, ἄνθρωπός τις ἐποίει δεῖπνον μέγα 1 But he said to him, “A certain man made a large supper” To help this guest understand better what he has been teaching, Jesus tells a brief story that provides an illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “In response, Jesus told this guest a story to help him understand. ‘There was a man who prepared a large banquet’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) LUK 14 16 m7bc writing-participants ἄνθρωπός τις 1 A certain man This introduces a character in the parable. Alternate translation: “There was a man who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 14 16 yrp5 figs-explicit ἐποίει δεῖπνον μέγα, καὶ ἐκάλεσεν πολλούς 1 made a large supper and invited many The implication is that this man had his servants prepare the meal and invite the guests. Alternate translation: “told his servants to prepare a large banquet and to invite many guests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 14 17 us3d figs-idiom τῇ ὥρᾳ τοῦ δείπνου 1 at the hour of the supper Jesus is using the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time for the dinner” or “when the dinner was about to begin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 14 17 us3d figs-idiom τῇ ὥρᾳ τοῦ δείπνου 1 at the hour of the supper Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time for the dinner” or “when the dinner was about to begin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 14 17 xkp8 figs-activepassive τοῖς κεκλημένοις 1 the ones who were invited If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “to those he had invited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 14 17 l951 figs-quotesinquotes ἔρχεσθε, ὅτι ἤδη ἕτοιμά ἐστιν 1 ‘Come, because it is now ready’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “that they should come because everything was now ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 14 18 eh3h grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 And This word introduces a contrast between what was expected, that all the invited guests would come to the dinner, and what happened, that they all declined to do that. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -2559,7 +2559,7 @@ LUK 14 22 y4rb figs-explicit καὶ εἶπεν ὁ δοῦλος 1 And the ser LUK 14 22 l963 figs-quotesinquotes Κύριε, γέγονεν ὃ ἐπέταξας, καὶ ἔτι τόπος ἐστίν 1 ‘Master, what you commanded has happened, and there is still room’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “that he had done what the master had commanded but there was still room” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 14 22 dgt3 γέγονεν ὃ ἐπέταξας 1 what you commanded has happened Alternate translation: “I have done what you commanded” LUK 14 23 l964 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν ὁ κύριος πρὸς τὸν δοῦλον, ἔξελθε εἰς τὰς ὁδοὺς καὶ φραγμοὺς, καὶ ἀνάγκασον εἰσελθεῖν, ἵνα γεμισθῇ μου ὁ οἶκος 1 the master said to the servant, ‘Go out into the roads and hedges and compel them to come in, so that my house may be filled’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the master told the servant to go out into the roads and hedges and compel people to come in so that his house would be filled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 14 23 n9x7 figs-metonymy φραγμοὺς 1 hedges The word **hedges** describes boundary fences that enclose and protect fields and buildings. They may be made of bushes and shrubs growing closely together, or they may be made of wood or stone or similar building materials. This could mean: (1) actual hedges. In that case, you could use the equivalent term in your language or a general expression. Alternate translation: “boundary fences” (2) since the term is paired with **roads**, it may figuratively mean the footpaths that run along hedges at the borders of fields. Alternate translation: “paths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 14 23 n9x7 figs-metonymy φραγμοὺς 1 hedges The word **hedges** describes boundary fences that enclose and protect fields and buildings. They may be made of bushes and shrubs growing closely together, or they may be made of wood or stone or similar building materials. This could mean: (1) actual hedges. In that case, you could use the equivalent term in your language or a general expression. Alternate translation: “boundary fences” (2) since the term is paired with **roads**, it may mean the footpaths that run along hedges at the borders of fields. Alternate translation: “paths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 14 23 w5w6 figs-activepassive ἵνα γεμισθῇ μου ὁ οἶκος 1 so that my house may be filled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that guests may fill my house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 14 24 i5lt figs-declarative λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 For I say to you that none of those men who were invited will taste of my supper The master is using a future statement to express the result he desires from the instructions he has just given his servants. Alternate translation: “For I say to you that I do not want any of those men who were invited to taste of my supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) LUK 14 24 v5m6 figs-you λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 For I say to you that none of those men who were invited will taste of my supper While the word **you** is singular in [14:21-23](../14/21.md) because the master and the servant are addressing one another individually, here the word **you** is plural. It is not clear why. Possibly it may be assumed that other servants have been helping and that the master is now addressing all of the servants at once. In that case, it would make sense to translate **you** using the plural form, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -2567,7 +2567,7 @@ LUK 14 24 ooz4 λέγω…ὑμῖν 1 I say to you The master says this to emp LUK 14 24 l965 figs-quotesinquotes λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 For I say to you that none of those men who were invited will taste of my supper If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “The master told all of his servants that he did not want any of the men he had invited to taste his supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 14 24 liz5 figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων 1 those men Here, the word for **men** means “male adults,” not people in general. So it would be appropriate to use a specifically masculine term in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 14 24 n867 figs-activepassive τῶν κεκλημένων 1 who were invited If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “whom I invited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 14 24 hl7q figs-metonymy γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 will taste of my supper The master may be using the word **taste** figuratively to mean eating the meal. Alternate translation: “will enjoy the dinner that I have prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 14 24 hl7q figs-metonymy γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 will taste of my supper The master may be using the word **taste** to mean eating the meal. Alternate translation: “will enjoy the dinner that I have prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 14 24 l984 figs-hyperbole γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 will taste of my supper Alternatively, the master may be making an extreme statement for emphasis. Alternate translation: “will get even a taste of the dinner that I have prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 14 24 l966 μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 my supper By this expression, the master does not mean his own meal, but the dinner that he has prepared for others. Alternate translation: “the dinner that I have prepared” LUK 14 25 l967 grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) @@ -2575,10 +2575,10 @@ LUK 14 25 gv94 writing-newevent συνεπορεύοντο…αὐτῷ ὄχλ LUK 14 26 l968 figs-idiom εἴ τις ἔρχεται πρός με, 1 If anyone comes to me This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 14 26 l969 figs-doublenegatives εἴ τις…οὐ μισεῖ…οὐ δύναται εἶναί μου μαθητής 1 If anyone … does not hate … he is not able to be my disciple If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Only someone … who loves me more than … is able to be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 14 26 l985 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 and Jesus uses this word to introduce a contrast. Alternate translation: “but” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -LUK 14 26 rmt8 figs-hyperbole οὐ μισεῖ 1 does not hate Jesus is using the word **hate** figuratively as an exaggeration to say that his disciples are not to love other people and themselves more than they love Jesus. Alternate translation: “does not love me more than” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +LUK 14 26 rmt8 figs-hyperbole οὐ μισεῖ 1 does not hate Jesus is using the word **hate** as an exaggeration to say that his disciples are not to love other people and themselves more than they love Jesus. Alternate translation: “does not love me more than” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 14 27 pm44 figs-doublenegatives ὅστις οὐ βαστάζει τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἔρχεται ὀπίσω μου, οὐ δύναται εἶναί μου μαθητής 1 Whoever does not carry his cross and come after me is not able to be my disciple If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Whoever wants to be my disciple must carry his cross and follow me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 14 27 l970 figs-explicit οὐ βαστάζει τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ 1 does not carry his cross Jesus assumes that the crowds will know that the Romans executed some criminals by nailing them to a wooden beam with crossbar that was set upright so that the criminals would slowly suffocate. Jesus assumes that the crowds will also know that the Romans made these criminals carry these wooden crosses through the streets to the place where they were going to be executed. Alternate translation: “does not carry the wooden cross on which he will be executed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 14 27 jn5u figs-metaphor οὐ βαστάζει τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ 1 does not carry his cross Jesus uses the phrase **carry his cross**, referring to this practice of execution figuratively, to say that his disciples must be people who have given up their lives to God and who are willing to suffer. Alternate translation: “does not surrender his life to God and be willing to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 14 27 jn5u figs-metaphor οὐ βαστάζει τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ 1 does not carry his cross Jesus uses the phrase **carry his cross**, referring to this practice of execution, to say that his disciples must be people who have given up their lives to God and who are willing to suffer. Alternate translation: “does not surrender his life to God and be willing to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 14 27 l971 figs-idiom ἔρχεται ὀπίσω μου 1 come after me This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “follow my example” or “obey me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 14 28 q3cx figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ ἐξ ὑμῶν θέλων πύργον οἰκοδομῆσαι, οὐχὶ πρῶτον καθίσας, ψηφίζει τὴν δαπάνην, εἰ ἔχει εἰς ἀπαρτισμόν? 1 For which of you, desiring to build a tower, does not first sit down and calculate the cost—whether he has for completion? Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool. Alternate translation: “If one of you wanted to build a tower, he would certainly sit down first and determine whether he had enough money to complete it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 14 28 l972 figs-hypo τίς γὰρ ἐξ ὑμῶν θέλων πύργον οἰκοδομῆσαι, οὐχὶ πρῶτον καθίσας, ψηφίζει τὴν δαπάνην, εἰ ἔχει εἰς ἀπαρτισμόν? 1 For which of you, desiring to build a tower, does not first sit down and calculate the cost—whether he has for completion? Jesus is offering the crowds an illustration that involves a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose one of you wanted to build a tower. Then you would certainly sit down first and determine whether you had enough money to complete it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) @@ -2604,7 +2604,7 @@ LUK 14 34 l980 figs-activepassive ἐν τίνι ἀρτυθήσεται 1 with LUK 14 34 cz52 figs-rquestion ἐν τίνι ἀρτυθήσεται? 1 with what will it be seasoned? Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool. He does not expect the crowd to tell him how the flavor of salt can be restored. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “nothing can make it salty again.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 14 35 bp1b translate-unknown εἰς κοπρίαν 1 for the manure pile See how you translated this phrase in [13:8](../13/08.md). Alternate translation: “to use as fertilizer” or “to add to the compost heap” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 14 35 n5a9 writing-pronouns ἔξω βάλλουσιν αὐτό 1 They throw it outside **They** does not refer to any individuals in particular. This is an indefinite usage. Alternate translation: “People throw it outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 14 35 u9h3 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one who has ears to hear, let him hear Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize that what he has just said is important and that it may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **ears to hear** figuratively represents the willingness to understand and obey by association with the part of the body by which his listeners have been taking in his teaching. Alternate translation: “If anyone is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 14 35 u9h3 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one who has ears to hear, let him hear Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize that what he has just said is important and that it may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **ears to hear** represents the willingness to understand and obey by association with the part of the body by which his listeners have been taking in his teaching. Alternate translation: “If anyone is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 14 35 c5fb figs-123person ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one who has ears to hear, let him hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, then listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 14 35 l981 figs-you ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one who has ears to hear, let him hear If you choose to translate this in the second person, **you** would be plural, since Jesus is speaking to the crowd. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 15 intro p1ba 0 # Luke 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus tells parables about a lost sheep, a lost coin, and a lost son (15:1-32)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The parable of the prodigal son

The story that Jesus tells in Luke 15:11-32 is known as The Parable of the Prodigal Son, although he does not give the story that title himself. Most interpreters understand the father in the story to represent God (the Father), the sinful younger son to represent those who repent and come to faith in Jesus, and the self-righteous older son to represent the Pharisees. In the story, the older son becomes angry at the father for forgiving the younger son’s sins. He will not even go in to the party that the father is giving to welcome the younger son home. Jesus knew that the Pharisees wanted God to think that only they were good and not forgive other people’s sins. Jesus was teaching them that they would never become part of God’s kingdom if they continued to think that way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])

### Sinners

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins such as stealing or sexual sins. But Jesus told three parables (15:4-7, 15:8-10, and 15:11-32) to teach that the people who acknowledge that they are sinners and who repent are the people who truly please God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) @@ -2627,16 +2627,16 @@ LUK 15 6 g3f3 figs-123person καὶ ἐλθὼν εἰς τὸν οἶκον, LUK 15 6 l993 figs-quotesinquotes λέγων αὐτοῖς, συνχάρητέ μοι, ὅτι εὗρον τὸ πρόβατόν μου τὸ ἀπολωλός 1 saying to them, ‘Rejoice together with me, for I have found my lost sheep’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “and tells them to rejoice with him because he has found his sheep that was lost” or, if you decided to use the second person, “and you would tell them to rejoice with you because you had found your sheep that was lost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 15 7 l994 λέγω ὑμῖν ὅτι 1 I say to you that Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell these Pharisees and scribes. Alternate translation: “I can assure you that” LUK 15 7 k1l2 figs-explicit οὕτως 1 in the same way If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the implicit meaning here. Alternate translation: “just as the shepherd and his friends and neighbors would rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 15 7 k8k6 figs-metonymy χαρὰ ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἔσται 1 there will be joy in heaven Jesus is using the word **heaven** figuratively to mean the inhabitants of heaven. Alternate translation: “everyone in heaven will rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 15 7 k8k6 figs-metonymy χαρὰ ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἔσται 1 there will be joy in heaven Jesus is using the word **heaven** to mean the inhabitants of heaven. Alternate translation: “everyone in heaven will rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 15 7 abcg figs-nominaladj δικαίοις 1 righteous Jesus is using the adjective **righteous** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 15 8 ly5c figs-rquestion τίς γυνὴ δραχμὰς ἔχουσα δέκα, ἐὰν ἀπολέσῃ δραχμὴν μίαν, οὐχὶ ἅπτει λύχνον, καὶ σαροῖ τὴν οἰκίαν, καὶ ζητεῖ ἐπιμελῶς, ἕως οὗ εὕρῃ? 1 what woman, having ten drachmas, if she would lose one drachma, would not light a lamp, and sweep the house, and seek diligently until she has found it? Jesus is using this question as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “if a woman had ten drachma coins and she lost one of them, she would certainly light a lamp, sweep the house, and seek diligently until she found it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 15 8 qr36 figs-hypo τίς γυνὴ δραχμὰς ἔχουσα δέκα, ἐὰν ἀπολέσῃ δραχμὴν μίαν, οὐχὶ ἅπτει λύχνον, καὶ σαροῖ τὴν οἰκίαν, καὶ ζητεῖ ἐπιμελῶς, ἕως οὗ εὕρῃ? 1 what woman, having ten drachmas, if she would lose one drachma, would not light a lamp and sweep the house and seek diligently until she has found it? Jesus is offering an illustration that involves a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose a woman had ten drachma coins and she lost one of them. Then she would certainly light a lamp, sweep the house, and seek diligently until she found it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 15 8 l995 translate-bmoney δραχμὰς 1 drachmas A **drachma** was a silver coin equivalent to a day’s wage. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might state something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “valuable silver coins” or “coins each worth a day’s wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) -LUK 15 8 l996 figs-synecdoche σαροῖ τὴν οἰκίαν 1 sweep the house Jesus speaks of the whole **house** to refer figuratively to one part of it, the floor. Alternate translation: “sweep the floor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 15 8 l996 figs-synecdoche σαροῖ τὴν οἰκίαν 1 sweep the house Jesus speaks of the whole **house** to refer to one part of it, the floor. Alternate translation: “sweep the floor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 15 9 l997 figs-quotesinquotes λέγουσα, συνχάρητέ μοι, ὅτι εὗρον τὴν δραχμὴν ἣν ἀπώλεσα 1 saying, ‘Rejoice together with me, for I have found the drachma that I lost’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “and tells them to rejoice with her because she has found the drachma that she lost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 15 10 wrs9 figs-explicit οὕτως 1 In the same way If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the implicit meaning here. Alternate translation: “Just as the woman and her friends and neighbors would rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 15 10 l998 λέγω ὑμῖν 1 I say to you Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell these Pharisees and scribes. Alternate translation: “indeed” -LUK 15 10 m8zl figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀγγέλων τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before the angels of God The term **before** figuratively means “in the presence” of someone. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God’s angels” or “among the angels of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 15 10 m8zl figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀγγέλων τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before the angels of God The term **before** means “in the presence” of someone. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God’s angels” or “among the angels of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 15 11 ib6s figs-parables εἶπεν δέ 1 Then he said To help the Pharisees and scribes understand what he has been teaching, Jesus tells a brief story that provides a further illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told the Pharisees and scribes this story to help them understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) LUK 15 11 c2t6 writing-participants ἄνθρωπός τις εἶχεν δύο υἱούς 1 A certain man had two sons Jesus uses this phrase to introduce the main characters in the parable. Alternate translation: “There was a man who had two sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 15 12 l999 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν…τῷ πατρί, Πάτερ, δός μοι τὸ ἐπιβάλλον μέρος τῆς οὐσίας 1 said to his father, ‘Father, give me the portion of the wealth that falls to me’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “told his father that he wanted the share of the estate that he would inherit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -2660,12 +2660,12 @@ LUK 15 16 m003 καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐδίδου αὐτῷ 1 and no one gav LUK 15 17 x4jc figs-idiom εἰς ἑαυτὸν…ἐλθὼν 1 coming to himself This idiom means that he became able to understand his situation clearly and realized that he had made a terrible mistake. Alternate translation: “realizing the situation he was in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 15 17 m004 figs-quotesinquotes ἔφη, πόσοι μίσθιοι τοῦ πατρός μου περισσεύονται ἄρτων, ἐγὼ δὲ λιμῷ ὧδε ἀπόλλυμαι 1 he said, ‘How many hired servants of my father have more than enough bread, but I am perishing from hunger here’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he told himself that all of his father’s hired servants had more than enough food to eat, but he was perishing from hunger where he was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 15 17 xw1a figs-exclamations πόσοι μίσθιοι τοῦ πατρός μου περισσεύονται ἄρτων, ἐγὼ δὲ λιμῷ ὧδε ἀπόλλυμαι 1 How many hired servants of my father have more than enough bread, but I am perishing from hunger here This is an exclamation, not a question. Alternate translation: “All of my father’s hired servants have more than enough food to eat, but I am perishing from hunger here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) -LUK 15 17 m005 figs-synecdoche ἄρτων 1 bread The young man is using one kind of food, **bread**, figuratively to mean food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 15 17 m005 figs-synecdoche ἄρτων 1 bread The young man is using one kind of food, **bread**, to mean food in general. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 15 17 tal2 figs-hyperbole λιμῷ…ἀπόλλυμαι 1 I am perishing from hunger This could mean: (1) it is a figurative overstatement for emphasis. Alternate translation: “have so little to eat” (2) the young man has literally been starving. Alternate translation: “am about to die of starvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 15 18 m006 figs-quotesinquotes ἀναστὰς, πορεύσομαι πρὸς τὸν πατέρα μου, καὶ ἐρῶ αὐτῷ, Πάτερ, ἥμαρτον εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ ἐνώπιόν σου 1 I will get up and go to my father, and I will say to him, Father, I have sinned against heaven and before you If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation, and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “He decided that he would leave that place and go to his father and tell him that he had sinned against God and directly against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 15 18 m007 figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 get up This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “I will leave this place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 15 18 m4pj figs-euphemism τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 heaven In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying the word “God” and used the word **heaven** instead. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -LUK 15 18 m008 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιόν 1 before The term **before** figuratively means “in the presence” of another person. In the speech he is planning, the younger son makes a distinction between the way he has sinned **against** heaven, by committing many sins, and **before** his father, by causing him personal shame and loss. Alternate translation: “directly against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 15 18 m008 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιόν 1 before The term **before** means “in the presence” of another person. In the speech he is planning, the younger son makes a distinction between the way he has sinned **against** heaven, by committing many sins, and **before** his father, by causing him personal shame and loss. Alternate translation: “directly against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 15 19 m009 figs-quotesinquotes οὐκέτι εἰμὶ ἄξιος κληθῆναι υἱός σου. ποίησόν με ὡς ἕνα τῶν μισθίων σου 1 I am no longer worthy to be called your son; make me as one of your hired servants If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that it is not a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He decided he would tell his father that he did not deserve to be his son any more, but that he hoped his father would hire him as one of his servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 15 19 aug2 figs-activepassive οὐκέτι εἰμὶ ἄξιος κληθῆναι υἱός σου 1 I am no longer worthy to be called your son If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “I am no longer worthy for you to call me your son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 15 19 m010 figs-idiom κληθῆναι 1 to be called This expression could also be an idiom that means “to be.” See how you translated this phrase in [1:32](../01/32.md), [1:76](../01/76.md), and [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2678,14 +2678,14 @@ LUK 15 20 z7p3 translate-symaction ἐπέπεσεν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχη LUK 15 20 m012 figs-idiom ἐπέπεσεν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ 1 fell upon his neck This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “gave him a hug” or “hugged him tightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 15 21 m013 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν δὲ ὁ υἱὸς αὐτῷ, Πάτερ, ἥμαρτον εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ ἐνώπιόν σου; οὐκέτι εἰμὶ ἄξιος κληθῆναι υἱός σου 1 Then the son said to him, ‘Father, I have sinned against heaven and in your sight. I am no longer worthy to be called your son’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that it is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Then the son told his father that he had sinned against God and directly against him, and that he did not deserve to be called his son anymore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 15 21 xz93 figs-euphemism τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 heaven In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying the word “God” and used the word **heaven** instead. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -LUK 15 21 m014 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιόν 1 before The term **before** figuratively means “in the presence” of another person. The young man is making a distinction between the way he has sinned **against** heaven, by committing many sins, and **before** his father, by causing him personal shame and loss. Alternate translation: “directly against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 15 21 m014 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιόν 1 before The term **before** means “in the presence” of another person. The young man is making a distinction between the way he has sinned **against** heaven, by committing many sins, and **before** his father, by causing him personal shame and loss. Alternate translation: “directly against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 15 21 qxg5 figs-activepassive οὐκέτι εἰμὶ ἄξιος κληθῆναι υἱός σου 1 I am no longer worthy to be called your son If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “I am no longer worthy for you to call me your son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 15 21 m015 figs-idiom κληθῆναι 1 to be called This expression could also be an idiom that means “to be.” See how you translated this phrase in [1:32](../01/32.md), [1:76](../01/76.md), and [2:23](../02/23.md). Alternate translation: “to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 15 22 m016 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν δὲ ὁ πατὴρ πρὸς τοὺς δούλους αὐτοῦ, ταχὺ ἐξενέγκατε στολὴν τὴν πρώτην, καὶ ἐνδύσατε αὐτόν, καὶ δότε δακτύλιον εἰς τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ὑποδήματα εἰς τοὺς πόδας 1 But the father said to his servants, ‘Bring quickly the best robe, and put it on him, and put a ring on his hand, and sandals on his feet’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that it is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But the father told his servants quickly to bring the best robe they had and put it on his son, and to put a ring on his hand and sandals on his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 15 22 m017 figs-you ἐξενέγκατε…ἐνδύσατε…δότε 1 bring … clothe … put Since the father is speaking to a number of servants, the implied **you** in these imperatives would be plural. Your language may need to show that distinction explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 15 22 nlx9 translate-symaction στολὴν τὴν πρώτην…δακτύλιον…ὑποδήματα 1 the first robe … a ring … sandals By having his servants put these things on his son, the father was showing that he was welcoming his son back as a member of the family in good standing. These were all signs of status, authority, and privilege. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that in some way in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -LUK 15 22 b3hv figs-metaphor στολὴν τὴν πρώτην 1 the first robe As in [14:7](../14/07.md), here the word **first** figuratively means “best.” Alternate translation: “the best robe we have” or “the festive garment we save for special occasions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 15 22 m018 figs-synecdoche δότε δακτύλιον εἰς τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ 1 put a ring on his hand The father figuratively says **hand** to mean one part of the hand, a finger. Alternate translation: “put a ring on his finger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 15 22 b3hv figs-metaphor στολὴν τὴν πρώτην 1 the first robe As in [14:7](../14/07.md), here the word **first** means “best.” Alternate translation: “the best robe we have” or “the festive garment we save for special occasions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 15 22 m018 figs-synecdoche δότε δακτύλιον εἰς τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ 1 put a ring on his hand The father says **hand** to mean one part of the hand, a finger. Alternate translation: “put a ring on his finger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 15 22 xat6 translate-unknown ὑποδήματα 1 sandals In this culture, poorer people went barefoot, while more affluent people wore **sandals**. They are a type of open footwear, typically made of leather, consisting of a sole that is held onto the foot with straps. The modern equivalent in many cultures where the poor go barefoot and the more affluent have footwear would be shoes. Alternate translation: “shoes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 15 23 m019 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ φέρετε τὸν μόσχον τὸν σιτευτόν, θύσατε, καὶ φαγόντες εὐφρανθῶμεν 1 And bring the fattened calf, slaughter it, and let us eat and celebrate If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that it is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He also told his servants to bring the calf they had been fattening and butcher it so that they could have a celebration feast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 15 23 m020 figs-you φέρετε…θύσατε 1 bring … slaughter Since the father is speaking to a number of servants, the implied **you** in these imperatives would be plural. Your language may need to show that distinction explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -2694,14 +2694,14 @@ LUK 15 23 t3cu figs-explicit θύσατε 1 kill In this context, the term **kil LUK 15 23 m021 figs-hendiadys φαγόντες εὐφρανθῶμεν 1 let us eat and celebrate The phrase **eat and celebrate** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **eat** indicates how the father wants to **celebrate** his son’s homecoming. Alternate translation: “celebrate by having a feast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 15 23 m022 figs-exclusive φαγόντες εὐφρανθῶμεν 1 let us eat and celebrate The word **us** includes the addressees, since the father means the whole household, including the servants to whom he is speaking. So use the inclusive form of **us** in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Other languages might say “all of us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) LUK 15 24 m023 figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι οὗτος ὁ υἱός μου νεκρὸς ἦν καὶ ἀνέζησεν, ἦν ἀπολωλὼς καὶ εὑρέθη 1 ‘For this son of mine was dead, and has come back to life; he was lost, and has been found’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that it is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “The father said that it was as if his son had died and come back to life, as if he had lost him and found him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 15 24 ubz3 figs-metaphor ὁ υἱός μου νεκρὸς ἦν καὶ ἀνέζησεν 1 this son of mine was dead, and has come back to life The father says figuratively that when his **son** was in the faraway country, it was as if he was **dead**. You could translate this as a simile or comparison if your readers might otherwise take the father’s statement to mean that the son actually had died. Alternate translation: “it was as if my son had died, but now I see he is very much alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 15 24 izx2 figs-metaphor ἦν ἀπολωλὼς καὶ εὑρέθη 1 he was lost, and has been found The father says figuratively that when his **son** was in faraway country, it was as if he was **lost** and no one knew where to find him. You could translate this as a simile or comparison if your readers might otherwise take the father’s statement to mean that the son actually had been missing. Alternate translation: “it was as if my son was missing, but now I have found him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 15 24 ubz3 figs-metaphor ὁ υἱός μου νεκρὸς ἦν καὶ ἀνέζησεν 1 this son of mine was dead, and has come back to life The father says that when his **son** was in the faraway country, it was as if he was **dead**. You could translate this as a simile or comparison if your readers might otherwise take the father’s statement to mean that the son actually had died. Alternate translation: “it was as if my son had died, but now I see he is very much alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 15 24 izx2 figs-metaphor ἦν ἀπολωλὼς καὶ εὑρέθη 1 he was lost, and has been found The father says that when his **son** was in faraway country, it was as if he was **lost** and no one knew where to find him. You could translate this as a simile or comparison if your readers might otherwise take the father’s statement to mean that the son actually had been missing. Alternate translation: “it was as if my son was missing, but now I have found him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 15 24 m024 figs-activepassive εὑρέθη 1 he has been found If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “I have found him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 15 24 m025 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ ἤρξαντο εὐφραίνεσθαι 1 And they began to celebrate **And** introduces the results of what the previous sentence described. The servants carried out the father’s orders and prepared a feast, and the people in the household then began to enjoy it. Alternate translation: “Then they began to celebrate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 15 25 jd7l grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now Jesus uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 15 25 bk6d figs-explicit ἦν…ἐν ἀγρῷ 1 was in the field The implication was that he was out in the field because he was working there. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “was out working in the field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 15 25 m026 figs-explicit ὡς ἐρχόμενος 1 as he came Alternate translation: “as he came back home from the field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 15 25 m027 figs-metonymy ἤκουσεν συμφωνίας καὶ χορῶν 1 he heard music and dancing The older son could not literally hear **dancing**, so Jesus is using the term **heard** figuratively in that case. Alternate translation: “he heard music and the sound of people dancing” or “he heard music and could tell that people were dancing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 15 25 m027 figs-metonymy ἤκουσεν συμφωνίας καὶ χορῶν 1 he heard music and dancing The older son could not literally hear **dancing**, so Jesus is using the term **heard** in that case. Alternate translation: “he heard music and the sound of people dancing” or “he heard music and could tell that people were dancing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 15 26 m028 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Jesus uses this word to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. When the older son heard these sounds, he wondered what was going on, so he called for a servant and asked him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 15 26 m029 figs-explicit ἕνα τῶν παίδων 1 one of the servants Here the word that is translated as **servant** ordinarily means “boy.” So here it may indicate that the servant was young. Alternate translation: “a young servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 15 26 z51r τί ἂν εἴη ταῦτα 1 what these things might be Alternate translation: “what was happening” @@ -2714,14 +2714,14 @@ LUK 15 28 m034 grammar-connect-logic-result ὁ δὲ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ LUK 15 29 m035 figs-quotesinquotes ὁ δὲ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν τῷ πατρὶ αὐτοῦ, ἰδοὺ, τοσαῦτα ἔτη δουλεύω σοι, καὶ οὐδέποτε ἐντολήν σου παρῆλθον, καὶ ἐμοὶ οὐδέποτε ἔδωκας ἔριφον, ἵνα μετὰ τῶν φίλων μου εὐφρανθῶ 1 But answering he said to his father, ‘Behold, for so many years I am slaving for you, and I have never disregarded your command, and you never gave a young goat to me so that I might celebrate with my friends’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But he responded to his father that even though he had been slaving for him for so many years and had never disobeyed one of his commands, his father had never given him a young goat so that he could celebrate with his friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 15 29 m036 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν 1 answering he said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the older son said what follows in response to his father’s pleadings. Alternate translation: “he responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 15 29 m037 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold The older son uses **behold** to get his father to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 15 29 f8w9 figs-metaphor δουλεύω σοι 1 I am slaving for you To emphasize how hard he believes he has worked for his father, the older son figuratively describes himself as a slave. You could translate this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “I have been working like a slave for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 15 29 f8w9 figs-metaphor δουλεύω σοι 1 I am slaving for you To emphasize how hard he believes he has worked for his father, the older son describes himself as a slave. You could translate this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “I have been working like a slave for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 15 29 m038 figs-doublenegatives οὐδέποτε ἐντολήν σου παρῆλθον 1 I have never disregarded your command If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I have always done what you told me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 15 29 d2t6 figs-hyperbole οὐδέποτε ἐντολήν σου παρῆλθον 1 I have never disregarded your command To emphasize how carefully he believes he has obeyed his father, the older son makes a figurative generalization and says **never**. Alternate translation: “I have not disobeyed your commands” or “I have done what you told me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 15 29 ph4q figs-explicit ἔριφον 1 a young goat A young goat was smaller and much less expensive than a fatted calf. The son’s implication is that his father has not done even a small thing to show appreciation for him. You could express that more explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “even a young goat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 15 30 m039 figs-quotesinquotes ὅτε δὲ ὁ υἱός σου οὗτος, ὁ καταφαγών σου τὸν βίον μετὰ πορνῶν ἦλθεν, ἔθυσας αὐτῷ τὸν σιτευτὸν μόσχον 1 but when this son of yours came, who has devoured your property with prostitutes, you killed for him the fattened calf If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation (continuing the sentence from the previous verse, if you translated it as an indirect quotation): “but that when this son of his came home, who had wasted his money on prostitutes, he killed the fattened calf for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 15 30 y27h ὁ υἱός σου οὗτος 1 this son of yours The older son refers to his brother as **this son of yours** because he does not want to be associated with him. He does not want to call him “my brother.” Alternate translation: “that other son of yours” -LUK 15 30 vip3 figs-metaphor ὁ καταφαγών σου τὸν βίον 1 having devoured your livelihood The older son figuratively describes his brother as having eaten up the wealth his father gave him, to the point where there is nothing left. Alternate translation: “who squandered your wealth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 15 30 e6ig figs-synecdoche μετὰ πορνῶν 1 with prostitutes In order to depict how the younger son wasted his father’s money on reckless living, the older son speaks figuratively of one thing he assumes the younger son spent money on. Alternate translation: “living recklessly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 15 30 vip3 figs-metaphor ὁ καταφαγών σου τὸν βίον 1 having devoured your livelihood The older son describes his brother as having eaten up the wealth his father gave him, to the point where there is nothing left. Alternate translation: “who squandered your wealth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 15 30 e6ig figs-synecdoche μετὰ πορνῶν 1 with prostitutes In order to depict how the younger son wasted his father’s money on reckless living, the older son speaks of one thing he assumes the younger son spent money on. Alternate translation: “living recklessly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 15 30 m040 figs-metonymy ἔθυσας αὐτῷ τὸν σιτευτὸν μόσχον 1 you killed for him the fattened calf The father did not do this personally. Alternate translation: “you told the servants to butcher and cook the fattened calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 15 30 m041 figs-explicit ἔθυσας αὐτῷ τὸν σιτευτὸν μόσχον 1 you killed for him the fattened calf If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly the implicit purpose for this action. Alternate translation: “you told the servants to butcher and cook the fattened calf so you could hold a celebration for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 15 30 vf31 translate-unknown τὸν σιτευτὸν μόσχον 1 the fattened calf See how you translated this term in [15:23](../15/23.md). Alternate translation: “the young animal we had been making fat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -2749,11 +2749,11 @@ LUK 16 2 q433 ἀπόδος τὸν λόγον τῆς οἰκονομίας σ LUK 16 2 m051 οὐ γὰρ δύνῃ ἔτι οἰκονομεῖν 1 you are no longer able to manage Alternate translation: “since you cannot be my financial manager any longer” LUK 16 3 m052 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν…ἐν ἑαυτῷ…τί ποιήσω, ὅτι ὁ κύριός μου ἀφαιρεῖται τὴν οἰκονομίαν ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ? σκάπτειν οὐκ ἰσχύω; ἐπαιτεῖν αἰσχύνομαι 1 said to himself, ‘What should I do, since my master is taking away the management from me? I am not strong enough to dig, and I am ashamed to beg’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “asked himself what he should do, since his master was taking the management job away from him. He realized that he was not strong enough to dig ditches, and that he would be ashamed to beg for money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 16 3 kng1 figs-explicit ὁ κύριός μου 1 my master The expression **my master** refers to the rich man. The manager was not a slave, although he was financially dependent on the rich man for his housing, food, etc. Alternate translation: “my employer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 16 3 t3kj figs-synecdoche σκάπτειν οὐκ ἰσχύω 1 I am not strong to dig The manager is saying that he is not strong enough to work all day digging ditches in the ground. He is likely using this one kind of manual work figuratively to represent all work that would require sustained physical exertion. Alternate translation: “I am not strong enough to do manual labor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 16 3 t3kj figs-synecdoche σκάπτειν οὐκ ἰσχύω 1 I am not strong to dig The manager is saying that he is not strong enough to work all day digging ditches in the ground. He is likely using this one kind of manual work to represent all work that would require sustained physical exertion. Alternate translation: “I am not strong enough to do manual labor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 16 4 m053 figs-quotesinquotes ἔγνων τί ποιήσω, ἵνα ὅταν μετασταθῶ ἐκ τῆς οἰκονομίας, δέξωνταί με εἰς τοὺς οἴκους αὐτῶν 1 I know what I will do, so that when I am removed from the management, they will welcome me into their houses If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He realized that there was something he could do so that when his master took away his management job, his master’s debtors would welcome him into their houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 16 4 xxe2 figs-activepassive ὅταν μετασταθῶ ἐκ τῆς οἰκονομίας 1 when I am removed from the management If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “when my master takes away my management job” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 16 4 m054 writing-pronouns δέξωνταί με εἰς τοὺς οἴκους αὐτῶν 1 they will welcome me into their houses By **they**, the manager means his master’s debtors, as the next verse indicates explicitly. Alternate translation: “my master’s debtors will welcome me into their houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 16 4 m4za figs-metonymy δέξωνταί με εἰς τοὺς οἴκους αὐτῶν 1 they will welcome me into their houses The expression **welcome me into their houses** likely refers to providing food and lodging, and perhaps other necessities, for some period of time in acknowledgment of a previous favor. The manager speaks figuratively of this by reference to where it would happen. Alternate translation: “my master’s debtors will provide for my needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 16 4 m4za figs-metonymy δέξωνταί με εἰς τοὺς οἴκους αὐτῶν 1 they will welcome me into their houses The expression **welcome me into their houses** likely refers to providing food and lodging, and perhaps other necessities, for some period of time in acknowledgment of a previous favor. The manager speaks of this by reference to where it would happen. Alternate translation: “my master’s debtors will provide for my needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 16 5 rze8 τῶν χρεοφιλετῶν τοῦ κυρίου ἑαυτοῦ 1 the debtors of his master Alternate translation: “the people who were in debt to his master” or “the people who owed things to his master” LUK 16 5 m055 figs-nominaladj τῷ πρώτῳ 1 the first Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to the first of the debtors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 16 5 m056 figs-quotesinquotes ἔλεγεν τῷ πρώτῳ, πόσον ὀφείλεις τῷ κυρίῳ μου? 1 he said to the first, ‘How much do you owe to my master?’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he asked the first of the debtors how much he owed his master” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -2773,7 +2773,7 @@ LUK 16 8 a1yq figs-idiom οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 LUK 16 8 m063 figs-metonymy τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 this age The term **age** means specifically the long period of time defined by the duration of the created world and, by association, the world itself. Alternate translation: “this present world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 16 8 lvx7 figs-metaphor τοὺς υἱοὺς τοῦ φωτὸς 1 the sons of light The expression **sons of** is once again an idiom that means the people in view share the qualities of something, in this case the influence of God. Alternate translation: “the people of God” or “godly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 16 8 m064 figs-metaphor τοὺς υἱοὺς τοῦ φωτὸς 1 the sons of light The term **light** is a metaphor for the presence and influence of God in the world. Alternate translation: “the people of God” or “godly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 16 8 m065 figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν γενεὰν τὴν ἑαυτῶν 1 in their own generation Jesus speaks figuratively of **the sons of this age** as if they had all been born in the same **generation**. Alternate translation: “in relation to their own kind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 16 8 m065 figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν γενεὰν τὴν ἑαυτῶν 1 in their own generation Jesus speaks of **the sons of this age** as if they had all been born in the same **generation**. Alternate translation: “in relation to their own kind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 16 9 agp3 writing-endofstory καὶ ἐγὼ ὑμῖν λέγω 1 And I say to you Jesus uses the phrase **I say to you** to mark the end of the story and to introduce a teaching about how his disciples can apply the story to their lives. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “And you should do something similar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) LUK 16 9 jkn7 ἑαυτοῖς ποιήσατε φίλους ἐκ τοῦ μαμωνᾶ τῆς ἀδικίας, ἵνα ὅταν ἐκλίπῃ, δέξωνται ὑμᾶς εἰς τὰς αἰωνίους σκηνάς 1 make friends for yourselves by means of unrighteous wealth, so that when it fails, they may welcome you into the eternal dwellings The identity of these **friends** is unclear. Interpreters understand them in a variety of ways. It is also unclear whether it is these **friends** who would **welcome** someone into the **eternal dwellings** or whether the expression is indefinite, equivalent to “you will be welcomed into the eternal dwellings.” Because the meaning is unclear and it is interpreted in such a variety of ways, it might be best if your translation did not say any more about this than ULT does. LUK 16 9 q2jb figs-metonymy τοῦ μαμωνᾶ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 unrighteous wealth Here, the term **unrighteous** is an echo of the previous verse, in which Jesus described the manager by the same term. It likely refers to the various shrewd means by which the people of this world make money. Jesus is applying it by association to money itself. Alternate translation: “the money you have in this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2794,25 +2794,25 @@ LUK 16 14 taq3 grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word t LUK 16 14 m067 writing-participants οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 1 the Pharisees Here Luke reintroduces **the Pharisees** as participants in the story, but they have been present all along. Jesus told them the three parables in [15:3-32](../15/03.md), and they have since been listening to what Jesus has been teaching his disciples. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees who were present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 16 14 lbq9 φιλάργυροι ὑπάρχοντες 1 who were lovers of money Alternate translation: “who loved having money” or “who were very greedy for money” LUK 16 15 zcqs ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ δικαιοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς 1 the ones justifying yourselves Alternate translation: “You are people who try to make yourselves look good” -LUK 16 15 m068 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 before men Jesus is using this expression to mean “where people can see,” and it refers figuratively to perception and judgment. Alternate translation: “from the perspective of others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 16 15 m068 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 before men Jesus is using this expression to mean “where people can see,” and it refers to perception and judgment. Alternate translation: “from the perspective of others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 16 15 m069 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 men Here Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” or “others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -LUK 16 15 lx4f figs-metaphor ὁ δὲ Θεὸς γινώσκει τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν 1 but God knows your hearts Here, **hearts** figuratively represent people’s motivations and desires. Alternate translation: “God understands your true desires” or “God knows your real motives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 16 15 lx4f figs-metaphor ὁ δὲ Θεὸς γινώσκει τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν 1 but God knows your hearts Here, **hearts** represent people’s motivations and desires. Alternate translation: “God understands your true desires” or “God knows your real motives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 16 15 q82t figs-metaphor τὸ ἐν ἀνθρώποις ὑψηλὸν 1 what is exalted among men Jesus is using a spatial metaphor to describe things that are valued or honored as if they were high up. Alternate translation: “what people value” or “what people respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 16 15 m070 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 men Here, Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 16 15 m071 translate-unknown βδέλυγμα 1 is an abomination The term **abomination** comes from the regulations for religious life in the Jewish law. It refers to something that provokes feelings of horror and revulsion and must be avoided. Alternate translation: “is detestable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 16 15 m072 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God Jesus is using this expression to mean “where God can see,” and it refers figuratively to perception and judgment. Alternate translation: “from God’s perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 16 16 m566 figs-merism ὁ νόμος καὶ οἱ προφῆται 1 The Law and the Prophets Jesus is referring figuratively to all of God’s word that had been written up to that time. He is using the names of two of its major components to do so. Alternate translation: “The Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +LUK 16 15 m072 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God Jesus is using this expression to mean “where God can see,” and it refers to perception and judgment. Alternate translation: “from God’s perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 16 16 m566 figs-merism ὁ νόμος καὶ οἱ προφῆται 1 The Law and the Prophets Jesus is referring to all of God’s word that had been written up to that time. He is using the names of two of its major components to do so. Alternate translation: “The Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) LUK 16 16 a2ra μέχρι 1 were until Alternate translation: “led up to the time of” LUK 16 16 b78c figs-explicit Ἰωάννου 1 John Jesus assumes that the Pharisees will know that he is referring to John the Baptist. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 16 16 mrl3 figs-activepassive ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγελίζεται 1 the kingdom of God is proclaimed as good news If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has been doing the action. Alternate translation: “I have been teaching people the good news about the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 16 16 m073 figs-abstractnouns ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the kingdom of God See how you decided to translate this phrase in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “how God will rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LUK 16 16 m074 figs-hyperbole πᾶς εἰς αὐτὴν βιάζεται 1 everyone is forcing their way into it Jesus says figuratively that people have been **forcing their way** into the kingdom to mean that they have been doing everything they can to enter it. Alternate translation: “people have been doing everything they can to enter it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +LUK 16 16 m074 figs-hyperbole πᾶς εἰς αὐτὴν βιάζεται 1 everyone is forcing their way into it Jesus says that people have been **forcing their way** into the kingdom to mean that they have been doing everything they can to enter it. Alternate translation: “people have been doing everything they can to enter it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 16 16 lyw7 figs-hyperbole πᾶς 1 everyone The term **everyone** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 16 17 stl8 εὐκοπώτερον δέ ἐστιν τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν παρελθεῖν, ἢ τοῦ νόμου μίαν κερέαν πεσεῖν 1 But it is easier for heaven and earth to pass away than for one stroke of the law to fall If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this contrast in the reverse order. Alternate translation: “Even the smallest detail of the law will remain valid for longer than the whole creation exists” -LUK 16 17 m075 figs-merism τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν 1 heaven and earth Jesus is figuratively describing all of creation by referring to its two components. Alternate translation: “all of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +LUK 16 17 m075 figs-merism τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν 1 heaven and earth Jesus is describing all of creation by referring to its two components. Alternate translation: “all of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) LUK 16 17 m076 παρελθεῖν 1 to pass away Alternate translation: “to go out of existence” -LUK 16 17 ke7y figs-metonymy ἢ τοῦ νόμου μίαν κερέαν 1 than for one stroke of the law A **stroke** is the smallest part of a letter. Jesus is referring figuratively to the teachings of the law by association with the way they have been recorded in written letters. Alternate translation: “than for any of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 16 17 t33k figs-metaphor πεσεῖν 1 to fall Jesus uses the term **fall** figuratively to mean to be of no further use, such as a building would be if it collapsed. Alternate translation: “to become invalid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 16 17 ke7y figs-metonymy ἢ τοῦ νόμου μίαν κερέαν 1 than for one stroke of the law A **stroke** is the smallest part of a letter. Jesus is referring to the teachings of the law by association with the way they have been recorded in written letters. Alternate translation: “than for any of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 16 17 t33k figs-metaphor πεσεῖν 1 to fall Jesus uses the term **fall** to mean to be of no further use, such as a building would be if it collapsed. Alternate translation: “to become invalid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 16 18 m077 figs-explicit πᾶς ὁ ἀπολύων τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ 1 Everyone who divorces his wife Here Jesus is implicitly giving an example of something in the law that is still valid. Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that the Pharisees allowed divorce, and he is teaching that they should not do that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “For example, you Pharisees allow divorce. But that is not what God wants. Anyone who divorces his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 16 18 j8fn πᾶς ὁ ἀπολύων τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ 1 Everyone who divorces his wife Alternate translation: “Anyone who divorces his wife” or “Any man who divorces his wife” LUK 16 18 i544 μοιχεύει 1 commits adultery Alternate translation: “is guilty of adultery” @@ -2820,8 +2820,8 @@ LUK 16 18 sq24 ὁ…γαμῶν 2 the one who marries Alternate translation: LUK 16 18 m078 figs-activepassive ὁ ἀπολελυμένην ἀπὸ ἀνδρὸς γαμῶν 1 one divorced from her husband If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “a woman whose husband has divorced her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 16 19 kd1x figs-parables δέ 1 Now Jesus uses the term **now** to introduce a story that will help people understand better what he has been teaching. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Here is an illustration to help you understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) LUK 16 19 r67p writing-participants ἄνθρωπος…τις ἦν πλούσιος 1 there was a certain rich man This introduces one of the characters in the parable. It is not clear whether this is a real person, or simply a person in a story that Jesus is telling in order to make a point. You may need to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “There once was a rich man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -LUK 16 19 fu76 figs-synecdoche καὶ ἐνεδιδύσκετο πορφύραν καὶ βύσσον 1 and he was putting on purple and fine linen Jesus is figuratively using two specific types of expensive clothing to mean expensive clothing in general. These were likely not the only types of clothes that the man owned and wore. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He wore very expensive clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -LUK 16 19 m079 figs-metonymy πορφύραν 1 purple Jesus uses the term **purple** figuratively to mean clothing colored with purple dye, which was very expensive. Alternate translation: “clothing colored with purple dye” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 16 19 fu76 figs-synecdoche καὶ ἐνεδιδύσκετο πορφύραν καὶ βύσσον 1 and he was putting on purple and fine linen Jesus is using two specific types of expensive clothing to mean expensive clothing in general. These were likely not the only types of clothes that the man owned and wore. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He wore very expensive clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 16 19 m079 figs-metonymy πορφύραν 1 purple Jesus uses the term **purple** to mean clothing colored with purple dye, which was very expensive. Alternate translation: “clothing colored with purple dye” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 16 19 z8v5 translate-unknown βύσσον 1 The term **fine linen** refers to a high quality clothe made from the fibers of the flax plant. If you do not have **linen** in your region and/or your readers would be unfamiliar with this term, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “garments made of fine cloth” or “garments made of good cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 16 19 sz7t εὐφραινόμενος καθ’ ἡμέραν λαμπρῶς 1 feasting sumptuously every day Alternate translation: “and he enjoyed eating expensive food every day” LUK 16 20 mmw2 writing-participants πτωχὸς δέ τις ὀνόματι Λάζαρος 1 But a certain poor man named Lazarus This introduces another character in the parable. It is not clear whether this is a real person or simply a person in a story that Jesus is telling in order to make a point. Alternate translation: “There was also a poor man named Lazarus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -2843,14 +2843,14 @@ LUK 16 23 m083 ὁρᾷ 1 he sees To call attention to a significant developmen LUK 16 23 qpd2 figs-explicit ἐν τοῖς κόλποις αὐτοῦ 1 in his bosom See how you translated this expression in [16:22](../16/22.md). Alternate translation: “in a place of honor next to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 16 24 m084 figs-quotesinquotes αὐτὸς φωνήσας εἶπεν, Πάτερ Ἀβραάμ, ἐλέησόν με καὶ πέμψον Λάζαρον, ἵνα βάψῃ τὸ ἄκρον τοῦ δακτύλου αὐτοῦ ὕδατος, καὶ καταψύξῃ τὴν γλῶσσάν μου; ὅτι ὀδυνῶμαι ἐν τῇ φλογὶ ταύτῃ 1 crying out he said, ‘Father Abraham, have mercy on me and send Lazarus, that he may dip the tip of his finger in water and cool my tongue, for I am tormented in this flame.’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he shouted over to Abraham, addressing him respectfully as his ancestor, and asked him to have mercy on him and send Lazarus to dip the tip of his finger in water and cool his tongue, because he was in a flame that was making him suffer greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 16 24 dpp9 figs-hendiadys αὐτὸς φωνήσας εἶπεν 1 crying out he said Together the terms **crying out** and **said** mean that the rich man spoke what follows as a loud cry. Alternate translation: “the rich man shouted out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -LUK 16 24 m95a figs-metaphor Πάτερ Ἀβραάμ 1 Father Abraham The rich man is using the term **Father**, which figuratively means “ancestor,” as a respectful title. Abraham was the ancestor of all the Jews. Alternate translation: “Abraham, my father” or “Abraham, my ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 16 24 m95a figs-metaphor Πάτερ Ἀβραάμ 1 Father Abraham The rich man is using the term **Father**, which means “ancestor,” as a respectful title. Abraham was the ancestor of all the Jews. Alternate translation: “Abraham, my father” or “Abraham, my ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 16 24 b2rc figs-imperative ἐλέησόν με 1 have mercy on me This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please have pity on me” or “please help me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 16 24 ly9k καὶ πέμψον Λάζαρον 1 and send Lazarus Alternate translation: “by sending Lazarus” or “and tell Lazarus to come to me” LUK 16 24 rc6p figs-hyperbole βάψῃ τὸ ἄκρον τοῦ δακτύλου αὐτοῦ ὕδατος, καὶ καταψύξῃ τὴν γλῶσσάν μου 1 that he may dip the tip of his finger in water and cool my tongue The rich man is making an exaggeratedly small request in order to emphasize how hot and thirsty he is. In your translation, you could indicate that this is not the most he would want Lazarus to do. Alternate translation: “so that he can at least dip his finger in water and cool my tongue with a drop of it” or “so he can bring me water to drink that will cool my tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -LUK 16 24 rc6x figs-hyperbole καὶ καταψύξῃ τὴν γλῶσσάν μου 1 and cool my tongue The rich man is figuratively describing how thirsty he is by association with the way his **tongue** feels hot. Alternate translation: “so that I will not be so thirsty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +LUK 16 24 rc6x figs-hyperbole καὶ καταψύξῃ τὴν γλῶσσάν μου 1 and cool my tongue The rich man is describing how thirsty he is by association with the way his **tongue** feels hot. Alternate translation: “so that I will not be so thirsty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 16 24 qix8 figs-activepassive ὀδυνῶμαι ἐν τῇ φλογὶ ταύτῃ 1 I am tormented in this flame If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “this flame is making me suffer greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 16 25 m085 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν δὲ Ἀβραάμ, τέκνον, μνήσθητι ὅτι ἀπέλαβες τὰ ἀγαθά σου ἐν τῇ ζωῇ σου, καὶ Λάζαρος ὁμοίως τὰ κακά. νῦν δὲ ὧδε παρακαλεῖται, σὺ δὲ ὀδυνᾶσαι 1 But Abraham said, ‘Child, remember that in your lifetime you received your good things, and Lazarus in like manner bad things. But now he is comforted here, and you are tormented If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But Abraham, addressing the rich man as his descendant, told him to remember that he had received good things in his lifetime, while Lazarus had received bad things in his lifetime, but now Lazarus was receiving comforts with him, while the rich man was suffering greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 16 25 m086 figs-metaphor τέκνον 1 Child Abraham is using the term **child** figuratively to mean “descendant.” As a Jew, the rich man was a descendant of Abraham. Abraham is likely using the term in a compassionate way. Alternate translation: “My dear child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 16 25 m086 figs-metaphor τέκνον 1 Child Abraham is using the term **child** to mean “descendant.” As a Jew, the rich man was a descendant of Abraham. Abraham is likely using the term in a compassionate way. Alternate translation: “My dear child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 16 25 we9w figs-nominaladj τὰ ἀγαθά σου 1 the good of yours Abraham is using the adjective **good** as a noun. It is plural. If your language does not use adjectives as nouns, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “your good things” or “things that you enjoyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 16 25 rv17 ὁμοίως 1 likewise Abraham is referring to the fact that both men received something while they lived on earth. He is not saying that what they received was the same. Alternate translation: “while he was living received” LUK 16 25 hwc8 figs-nominaladj τὰ κακά 1 the bad Abraham is using the adjective **bad** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. It is plural. Alternate translation: “bad things” or “things that caused him to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -2863,15 +2863,15 @@ LUK 16 26 m089 figs-you ὑμῶν…ὑμᾶς 1 you … you Even though Abraha LUK 16 26 tu5w figs-activepassive χάσμα μέγα ἐστήρικται 1 a great chasm has been set in place If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “God has placed a huge pit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 16 26 sg6d figs-ellipsis μηδὲ ἐκεῖθεν πρὸς ἡμᾶς διαπερῶσιν 1 and that they may not go across from there to us Abraham is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and so that those who want to come across from where you are to where we are will not be able to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 16 27 abcj figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν δέ, ἐρωτῶ οὖν σε Πάτερ, ἵνα πέμψῃς αὐτὸν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ πατρός μου 1 Then he said, ‘I beg you then, Father, that you would send him to the house of my father If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “So the rich man then begged Abraham, addressing him respectfully as his ancestor, to send Lazarus to his family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 16 27 m090 figs-metaphor Πάτερ 1 Father The rich man is using the term **Father**, which figuratively means “ancestor,” as a respectful title. Alternate translation: “Abraham, my father” or “Abraham, my ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 16 27 m091 figs-metonymy εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ πατρός μου 1 to the house of my father The rich man is using the word **house** figuratively to mean the people who live together in a household. Alternate translation: “to my family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 16 27 m090 figs-metaphor Πάτερ 1 Father The rich man is using the term **Father**, which means “ancestor,” as a respectful title. Alternate translation: “Abraham, my father” or “Abraham, my ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 16 27 m091 figs-metonymy εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ πατρός μου 1 to the house of my father The rich man is using the word **house** to mean the people who live together in a household. Alternate translation: “to my family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 16 28 y1xn figs-quotesinquotes ἔχω γὰρ πέντε ἀδελφούς, ὅπως διαμαρτύρηται αὐτοῖς, ἵνα μὴ καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔλθωσιν εἰς τὸν τόπον τοῦτον τῆς βασάνου 1 for I have five brothers—in order that he might warn them, so that they would not also come to this place of torment If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The rich man explained that he had five brothers and that he wanted Lazarus to warn them so that they would not also come to where he was, in a place where they would suffer greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 16 28 x8xk figs-explicit ὅπως διαμαρτύρηται αὐτοῖς 1 in order that he might warn them The implication is that the rich man wanted Lazarus to warn his brothers not to act as he had. He had been selfish, self-indulgent, and unconcerned about the needs of people around him who were poor and suffering. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that he can warn them not to be self-indulgent and callous, as I was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 16 29 m092 λέγει δὲ Ἀβραάμ 1 But Abraham says To call attention to a significant development in the story, Jesus uses the present tense in past narration here. See how you decided to approach this usage in [7:40](../07/40.md). If it would not be natural to use the present tense in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “But Abraham said” LUK 16 29 m093 figs-quotesinquotes λέγει δὲ Ἀβραάμ, ἔχουσι Μωϋσέα καὶ τοὺς προφήτας; ἀκουσάτωσαν αὐτῶν 1 But Abraham says, ‘They have Moses and the prophets; let them listen to them’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But Abraham told the rich man that his brothers had what Moses and the prophets had written, and that they should obey their teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 16 29 v8eh figs-explicit ἔχουσι Μωϋσέα καὶ τοὺς προφήτας 1 They have Moses and the prophets The implication is that Abraham is refusing to send Lazarus to the rich man’s brothers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “No, I will not do that, because your brothers have what Moses and the prophets have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 16 29 x8pt figs-metonymy Μωϋσέα καὶ τοὺς προφήτας 1 Moses and the prophets Abraham is using the names of the authors of the biblical books to refer figuratively to their writings. Alternate translation: “what Moses and the prophets have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 16 29 m094 figs-merism Μωϋσέα καὶ τοὺς προφήτας 1 Moses and the prophets Abraham is referring figuratively to all of God’s Word that had been written up to that time. He is using two of its major collections of writings to do so. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +LUK 16 29 x8pt figs-metonymy Μωϋσέα καὶ τοὺς προφήτας 1 Moses and the prophets Abraham is using the names of the authors of the biblical books to refer to their writings. Alternate translation: “what Moses and the prophets have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 16 29 m094 figs-merism Μωϋσέα καὶ τοὺς προφήτας 1 Moses and the prophets Abraham is referring to all of God’s Word that had been written up to that time. He is using two of its major collections of writings to do so. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) LUK 16 29 l3in figs-idiom ἀκουσάτωσαν αὐτῶν 1 let them listen to them Here, **listen to** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “let them obey their teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 16 29 m095 figs-explicit ἀκουσάτωσαν αὐτῶν 1 let them listen to them The implication is that the rich man’s brothers do not need Lazarus to come and warn them, because in the Scriptures they already have all the warning they need. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your brothers should obey their teaching, because it provides all the warning they need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 16 30 m096 figs-quotesinquotes ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, οὐχί, Πάτερ Ἀβραάμ, ἀλλ’ ἐάν τις ἀπὸ νεκρῶν πορευθῇ πρὸς αὐτοὺς, μετανοήσουσιν 1 But he replied, ‘No, Father Abraham, but if someone would go to them from the dead, they will repent.’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But the rich man told Abraham, addressing him respectfully as his ancestor, that his brothers would not repent based on the teaching of the Scriptures, but that if someone came to them from the dead, then they would repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -2881,30 +2881,30 @@ LUK 16 30 m098 figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead The rich m LUK 16 31 abcl figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ, εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται 1 But he said to him, ‘If they do not hear Moses and the prophets, neither will they be persuaded if someone would rise from the dead’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But Abraham told the rich man that if his brothers would not obey the teaching of Moses and the prophets, then they would not change their ways even if someone who had died came back to life and warned them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 16 31 n9s4 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται 1 If they do not listen to Moses and the prophets, neither will they be persuaded if someone should rise from the dead Abraham is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Abraham is saying is not actually the case, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since they will not obey the teaching of Moses and the prophets, a dead person who came back to life would not be able to convince them either” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) LUK 16 31 m099 figs-idiom εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν 1 If they do not listen to Moses and the prophets The term **listen to** is an idiom that means “obey.” See how you translated this idiom in [16:29](../16/29.md). Alternate translation: “If they will not obey what Moses and the prophets have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 16 31 xkr7 figs-metonymy Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 Moses and the prophets Abraham is using the names of the authors of the biblical books to refer figuratively to their writings. Alternate translation: “what Moses and the prophets have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 16 31 m100 figs-merism Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 Moses and the prophets Abraham is referring figuratively to all of God’s Word that had been written up to that time. He is using two of its major collections of writings to do so. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +LUK 16 31 xkr7 figs-metonymy Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 Moses and the prophets Abraham is using the names of the authors of the biblical books to refer to their writings. Alternate translation: “what Moses and the prophets have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 16 31 m100 figs-merism Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 Moses and the prophets Abraham is referring to all of God’s Word that had been written up to that time. He is using two of its major collections of writings to do so. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) LUK 16 31 m101 figs-activepassive οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται 1 neither will they be persuaded if someone should rise from the dead If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “a dead person who came back to life would not be able to convince them either” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 16 31 gf1b figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Abraham is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from among the people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 17 intro c4am 0 # Luke 17 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about forgiveness, faith, and service (17:1-10)
2. Jesus heals ten lepers (17:11-19)
3. Jesus teaches about the kingdom of God coming (17:20-37)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Old Testament Examples

Jesus uses Noah and Lot’s wife as examples to teach his followers. Noah was ready for the flood when it came, and followers of Jesus need to be ready for him to return, because he will not warn them when he is about to come. Lot’s wife loved the evil city she had been living in so much that God also punished her when he destroyed it. Followers of Jesus need to love him more than anything else. You may need to provide some background information that Jesus assumed his listeners would know so that people who read your translation today can understand what Jesus is teaching here.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Jesus asks his disciples three questions in (17:7-9) to teach them that even those who serve him well are righteous only because of his grace. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Whoever seeks to gain his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life will save it” (17:33).

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “In his day”

At the end of 17:24, some ancient manuscripts of the Bible have the phrase “in his day,” but the manuscripts considered to be the most accurate do not. ULT does not have the phrase in its text, but it does have it in a footnote.

### “There will be two in the field”

Some ancient manuscripts of the Bible include the verse 17:36, but the manuscripts considered to be the most accurate do not. ULT does not have this verse in its text, but it does have it in a footnote.

In both of these cases, if a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to include the verse if it does, but leave it out if it does not include it. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 17 1 ej1e figs-doublenegatives ἀνένδεκτόν ἐστιν τοῦ τὰ σκάνδαλα μὴ ἐλθεῖν 1 It is impossible for traps not to come If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Traps will certainly come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 17 1 m102 translate-unknown τὰ σκάνδαλα 1 traps The term **traps** refers to a device that a person or animal would unknowingly activate and that would then confine them in a net, cage, or pit. Your language may have a term for a similar device, and you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 17 1 m103 figs-metaphor τὰ σκάνδαλα 1 traps Jesus is using the word **traps** figuratively. Alternate translation: “temptations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 17 1 m103 figs-metaphor τὰ σκάνδαλα 1 traps Jesus is using the word **traps**. Alternate translation: “temptations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 17 1 zck5 figs-ellipsis οὐαὶ δι’ οὗ ἔρχεται! 1 woe through whom they come! Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “how terrible it will be for anyone who causes these temptations to come” or “how terrible it will be for any person who tempts others to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 17 2 dvz5 figs-explicit λυσιτελεῖ αὐτῷ εἰ 1 It would be better for him if Jesus is drawing a comparison to the punishment for causing people to sin. He means that this person’s punishment for causing people to sin will be worse than if he had drowned in the sea. No one would actually put a stone around his neck and throw him into the sea as an alternative to that punishment, and Jesus is not saying that anyone will do so. Alternate translation: “The punishment he will receive will be worse than if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 17 2 uk6e figs-explicit λίθος μυλικὸς περίκειται περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ 1 a millstone were lying around his neck The implication is that someone would tie the stone around the person’s neck. Alternate translation: “if someone were to attach a millstone around his neck” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 17 2 gr89 translate-unknown λίθος μυλικὸς 1 a millstone A **millstone** is a very large, heavy, circular stone that is used for grinding grain into flour. If your readers would not be familiar with a millstone, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “a heavy stone” or “a heavy wheel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 17 2 k9xl figs-metaphor σκανδαλίσῃ 1 he should trap See how you translated this in [17:1](../17/01.md). Jesus is using the word **trap** figuratively. Alternate translation: “he should tempt to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 17 2 k9xl figs-metaphor σκανδαλίσῃ 1 he should trap See how you translated this in [17:1](../17/01.md). Jesus is using the word **trap**. Alternate translation: “he should tempt to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 17 2 xm7x figs-metaphor τῶν μικρῶν τούτων 1 these little ones This could be: (1) a reference to children who love Jesus and who are physically **little** compared to adults. Alternate translation: “these children who believe in me” (2) a figurative reference to people whose faith is new and has not yet become mature and strong. Alternate translation: “these new believers” or (3) a figurative reference to people who are not important from a human perspective. Alternate translation: “these common people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 17 3 m104 figs-explicit προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς 1 Pay attention to yourselves Since Jesus is teaching about how important it is not to sin and not to encourage others to sin, the implication is that this statement means that he wants his disciples to help one another not to sin. Alternate translation: “Help one another not to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 17 3 m105 figs-you προσέχετε 1 Pay attention The implied “you” in this imperative is plural, since Jesus is speaking to his disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 17 3 m106 figs-youcrowd σου…ἐπιτίμησον…ἄφες 1 your … rebuke … forgive The word **your** and the implied “you” in the imperatives **rebuke** and **forgive** are singular, since Jesus is addressing an individual situation, even though he is speaking to a group. If these singular forms would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) LUK 17 3 hyn8 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν ἁμάρτῃ ὁ ἀδελφός σου, ἐπιτίμησον αὐτῷ 1 If your brother sins, rebuke him Jesus is describing a hypothetical situation in order to tell his disciples what they should do if it takes place. Alternate translation: “Suppose a fellow believer were to sin. Then you should rebuke him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -LUK 17 3 kkp3 figs-metaphor ὁ ἀδελφός σου 1 your brother Jesus is using the term **brother** figuratively to mean someone who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 17 3 kkp3 figs-metaphor ὁ ἀδελφός σου 1 your brother Jesus is using the term **brother** to mean someone who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 17 3 m107 figs-gendernotations ὁ ἀδελφός σου 1 your brother Although the term **brother** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 17 3 p35i ἐπιτίμησον αὐτῷ 1 rebuke him Alternate translation: “correct him” or “tell him strongly that what he did was wrong” LUK 17 3 m108 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical καὶ ἐὰν μετανοήσῃ, ἄφες αὐτῷ 1 and if he repents, forgive him Jesus is describing another hypothetical situation in order to tell his disciples what they should do if it takes place. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “And suppose that believer were to repent. Then you should forgive him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) LUK 17 4 x8a3 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν ἑπτάκις τῆς ἡμέρας ἁμαρτήσῃ εἰς σὲ, καὶ ἑπτάκις ἐπιστρέψῃ πρὸς σὲ, λέγων μετανοῶ, ἀφήσεις αὐτῷ 1 And if he sins against you seven times in the day, and seven times returns to you, saying, ‘I repent,’ you will forgive him Jesus is describing a hypothetical situation in order to tell his disciples what they should do if it takes place. Alternate translation: “Suppose a fellow believer were to sin against you seven times in the same day. And suppose each time he came to you and said, ‘I am sorry.’ Then you would have to forgive him each time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -LUK 17 4 k5va figs-idiom ἑπτάκις τῆς ἡμέρας…καὶ ἑπτάκις 1 seven times in the day, and seven times The number **seven** in the Bible figuratively represents a large or sufficient quantity. Alternate translation: “many times in the same day, and each time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 17 4 k5va figs-idiom ἑπτάκις τῆς ἡμέρας…καὶ ἑπτάκις 1 seven times in the day, and seven times The number **seven** in the Bible represents a large or sufficient quantity. Alternate translation: “many times in the same day, and each time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 17 4 m109 τῆς ἡμέρας 1 in the day Alternate translation: “in the same day” LUK 17 4 m110 figs-youcrowd σὲ…σὲ…ἀφήσεις 1 you … you … you will forgive The word **you** is singular in this verse, since Jesus is addressing an individual situation, even though he is speaking to a group. If these singular forms would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) LUK 17 4 m111 figs-quotesinquotes ἐπιστρέψῃ πρὸς σὲ, λέγων μετανοῶ, ἀφήσεις αὐτῷ 1 returns to you, saying, ‘I repent,’ you will forgive him If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “comes to you and says that he is sorry, you must forgive him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -2915,7 +2915,7 @@ LUK 17 5 pji3 figs-imperative πρόσθες ἡμῖν πίστιν 1 Increase LUK 17 6 m115 ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord Here Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” LUK 17 6 m116 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ ἔχετε πίστιν ὡς κόκκον σινάπεως, ἐλέγετε ἂν τῇ συκαμίνῳ ταύτῃ 1 If you had faith like a mustard seed, you would say to this mulberry tree Jesus is describing a hypothetical situation. He is asserting that if the condition is true, then the result will necessarily follow. Alternate translation: “I can assure you that if you had faith like a mustard seed, you could say to this mulberry tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) LUK 17 6 m117 figs-you ἔχετε…ἐλέγετε…ὑμῖν 1 you had … you would say … you Even though Jesus is describing something that an individual might do, **you** is plural in this verse because he is speaking to his 12 apostles in response to their request. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -LUK 17 6 ep7z figs-simile εἰ ἔχετε πίστιν ὡς κόκκον σινάπεως 1 If you had faith like a mustard seed A **mustard seed** is a very small seed. Jesus is using this seed figuratively in a simile to mean a very small amount. Alternate translation: “If you had even a tiny amount of faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +LUK 17 6 ep7z figs-simile εἰ ἔχετε πίστιν ὡς κόκκον σινάπεως 1 If you had faith like a mustard seed A **mustard seed** is a very small seed. Jesus is using this seed in a simile to mean a very small amount. Alternate translation: “If you had even a tiny amount of faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) LUK 17 6 m118 translate-unknown κόκκον σινάπεως 1 a mustard seed If your readers would not be familiar with a **mustard seed**, you could use the name of another small seed with which they would be familiar, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a very small seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 17 6 i31l translate-unknown συκαμίνῳ 1 mulberry tree Jesus likely uses a **mulberry tree** as an example because it has an extensive root system that makes it very difficult to uproot. If your readers would not be familiar with this tree, you could use the name of another type of tree with extensive roots that they would be familiar with, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “firmly rooted tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 17 6 m119 figs-quotesinquotes ἐλέγετε ἂν τῇ συκαμίνῳ ταύτῃ, ἐκριζώθητι καὶ φυτεύθητι ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ 1 you would say to this mulberry tree, ‘Be uprooted, and be planted in the sea’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “you could tell this mulberry tree to pull its roots out of the ground and put them down in the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -2972,26 +2972,26 @@ LUK 17 18 m145 figs-idiom οὐχ εὑρέθησαν ὑποστρέψαντε LUK 17 18 x64q figs-explicit ὁ ἀλλογενὴς οὗτος 1 this foreigner Samaritans had non-Jewish ancestors, and they did not worship God in the same way that the Jews did. The implication is that some of the lepers in the group were Jews, and Jesus would have expected them to return to give thanks to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this foreigner, when the Jewish men should certainly have returned to thank God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 17 19 n2ce figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “Because you believed, that has saved you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 17 19 m196 figs-explicit ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you While the word **saved** can mean “healed,” as in [7:3](../07/03.md) and [8:48](../08/48.md), that does not seem to be the meaning here. Since all ten of the lepers were healed, but only this man demonstrated that he believed, Jesus seems to be saying that beyond being healed, he received salvation through faith. Alternate translation: “Because you believed, you have received salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 17 19 m146 figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you Jesus speaks figuratively of the leper’s **faith** as if it had actively saved him. Alternate translation: “Because you believed, you have received salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 17 19 m146 figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you Jesus speaks of the leper’s **faith** as if it had actively saved him. Alternate translation: “Because you believed, you have received salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 17 20 lvu1 grammar-connect-time-background ἐπερωτηθεὶς δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν Φαρισαίων πότε ἔρχεται ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 And having been asked by the Pharisees when the kingdom of God was coming Luke uses this phrase to begin relating a new event by introducing background information that will help readers understand what happens next. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Now when some Pharisees asked Jesus when the kingdom of God was coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 17 20 m147 figs-quotations ἐπερωτηθεὶς δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν Φαρισαίων πότε ἔρχεται ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 And having been asked by the Pharisees when the kingdom of God was coming If it would be helpful in your language, you could present this as a direct quotation rather than as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Now some Pharisees asked Jesus, ‘When is the kingdom of God coming?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) LUK 17 20 m148 figs-activepassive ἐπερωτηθεὶς…ὑπὸ τῶν Φαρισαίων 1 having been asked by the Pharisees If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who was the recipient of the action. Alternate translation: “some Pharisees asked Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 17 20 m149 figs-abstractnouns πότε ἔρχεται ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 when the kingdom of God was coming See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “when God would begin to rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 17 20 m150 figs-hendiadys ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς καὶ εἶπεν 1 he answered them and said Together the two words **answered** and **said** mean that Jesus said what follows in response to the question that the Pharisees asked him. Alternate translation: “he responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -LUK 17 20 yc3i figs-metonymy οὐκ ἔρχεται ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ μετὰ παρατηρήσεως 1 The kingdom of God is not coming with observation Jesus uses the word **observation** figuratively to mean things that people can observe. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of God is not coming with signs that people can observe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 17 20 yc3i figs-metonymy οὐκ ἔρχεται ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ μετὰ παρατηρήσεως 1 The kingdom of God is not coming with observation Jesus uses the word **observation** to mean things that people can observe. Alternate translation: “The kingdom of God is not coming with signs that people can observe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 17 20 m151 figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔρχεται ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The kingdom of God is not coming See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “God is not going to begin to rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 17 21 m152 figs-quotesinquotes οὐδὲ ἐροῦσιν, ἰδοὺ, ὧδε, ἤ, ἐκεῖ 1 Neither will they say, ‘Behold, here!’ or ‘There!’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “People will not say that they see it near them in one place or over in another place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 17 21 m153 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ὧδε, ἤ, ἐκεῖ 1 ‘Behold, here!’ or ‘There!’ These people would be using the term **behold** to get others to focus their attention on what they were saying. In this case, it would be appropriate to translate the term with a popular expression in your language that has this meaning. Alternate translation: “‘Hey, here it is!’ or ‘There it is!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 17 21 m154 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ γὰρ 1 For behold Jesus is using the term **behold** to get the Pharisees to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “For indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 17 21 xj7z figs-you ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐντὸς ὑμῶν ἐστιν 1 the kingdom of God is within you This could mean: (1) the kingdom is not coming with observable signs because it is a matter of what people believe and decide within themselves. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God is inside of you” (2) since the word **you** is plural here, Jesus may be saying that the kingdom is not coming with observable signs because it is a matter of something that happens within communities of people. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God is in your midst” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 17 21 xpi7 figs-abstractnouns ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐντὸς ὑμῶν ἐστιν 1 the kingdom of God is within you See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “God is ruling inside of you” or “God is ruling in your midst” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LUK 17 22 x3y2 figs-idiom ἐλεύσονται ἡμέραι ὅτε 1 The days will come when Jesus is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “There will be a time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 17 22 v2i3 figs-idiom ἐπιθυμήσετε…ἰδεῖν 1 you will desire to see Jesus is using the term **see** figuratively to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “you will want very much to experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 17 22 ly8x figs-metonymy μίαν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 one of the days of the Son of Man Jesus is using his title **the Son of Man** figuratively to refer to the time when he will rule as king. Alternate translation: “one of the days when the Son of Man will rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 17 22 m155 figs-synecdoche μίαν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 one of the days of the Son of Man Jesus is using one of these **days** to refer figuratively to the whole time that it belongs to. Alternate translation: “the time when the Son of Man will rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 17 22 x3y2 figs-idiom ἐλεύσονται ἡμέραι ὅτε 1 The days will come when Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “There will be a time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 17 22 v2i3 figs-idiom ἐπιθυμήσετε…ἰδεῖν 1 you will desire to see Jesus is using the term **see** to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “you will want very much to experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 17 22 ly8x figs-metonymy μίαν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 one of the days of the Son of Man Jesus is using his title **the Son of Man** to refer to the time when he will rule as king. Alternate translation: “one of the days when the Son of Man will rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 17 22 m155 figs-synecdoche μίαν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 one of the days of the Son of Man Jesus is using one of these **days** to refer to the whole time that it belongs to. Alternate translation: “the time when the Son of Man will rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 17 22 z11c figs-123person τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 of the days of the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “of my days as the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 17 22 m156 figs-explicit τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 of the days of the Son of Man See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “of my days as the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 17 22 x7sq figs-idiom καὶ οὐκ ὄψεσθε 1 but you will not see it Jesus is using the term **see** figuratively to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “but you will not experience it yet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 17 22 x7sq figs-idiom καὶ οὐκ ὄψεσθε 1 but you will not see it Jesus is using the term **see** to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “but you will not experience it yet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 17 23 dp8g figs-explicit ἐροῦσιν ὑμῖν, ἰδοὺ, ἐκεῖ, ἤ, ἰδοὺ, ὧδε 1 they will say to you, ‘Behold, there!’ or ‘Behold, here!’ The implication in context is that Jesus is speaking of the Son of Man or Messiah. Alternate translation: “People will say to you, ‘Look, the Messiah is over there!’ or, ‘Look, the Messiah is over here!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 17 23 m157 figs-quotesinquotes ἐροῦσιν ὑμῖν, ἰδοὺ, ἐκεῖ, ἤ, ἰδοὺ, ὧδε 1 they will say to you, ‘Behold, there!’ or ‘Behold, here!’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “people will tell you that the Messiah is over in one place or with them in another place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 17 23 m158 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ…ἰδοὺ 1 Behold … Behold These people would be using the term **behold** to get others to focus their attention on what they were saying. Alternate translation: “Hey … Hey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -3005,34 +3005,34 @@ LUK 17 24 m163 figs-123person οὕτως ἔσται ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀ LUK 17 24 m164 figs-explicit οὕτως ἔσται ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 so will the Son of Man be See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “so will I, the Messiah, be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 17 25 csa3 figs-123person δεῖ αὐτὸν…παθεῖν 1 it is necessary for him to suffer Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for me to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 17 25 dp8a figs-activepassive ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 be rejected by this generation If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “the people of this generation must reject him” or, if you translated with the first person, “the people of this generation must reject me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 17 25 m165 figs-metonymy τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 this generation Jesus is using the term **generation** figuratively to mean the people who were born in the current generation. Alternate translation: “the people living at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 17 25 m165 figs-metonymy τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 this generation Jesus is using the term **generation** to mean the people who were born in the current generation. Alternate translation: “the people living at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 17 26 d2ne καθὼς ἐγένετο…οὕτως ἔσται καὶ 1 just as it happened … so it will also be Alternate translation: “just as people were doing certain things … so people will be doing the same things” -LUK 17 26 v1sr figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Νῶε 1 in the days of Noah Jesus is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time when Noah was living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 17 26 v1sr figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Νῶε 1 in the days of Noah Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time when Noah was living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 17 26 m166 translate-names Νῶε 1 Noah **Noah** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 17 26 ktl1 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 in the days of the Son of Man Jesus is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Son of Man is about to return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 17 26 ktl1 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 in the days of the Son of Man Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Son of Man is about to return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 17 26 m167 figs-123person ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 in the days of the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “in my days as the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 17 26 m168 figs-explicit ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 in the days of the Son of Man See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “in my days as the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 17 27 eu24 figs-synecdoche ἤσθιον, ἔπινον, ἐγάμουν, ἐγαμίζοντο 1 They were eating, they were drinking, they were marrying, they were being given in marriage Jesus describes several regular activities to refer figuratively to regular activities in general. Alternate translation: “They were going about their normal lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 17 27 eu24 figs-synecdoche ἤσθιον, ἔπινον, ἐγάμουν, ἐγαμίζοντο 1 They were eating, they were drinking, they were marrying, they were being given in marriage Jesus describes several regular activities to refer to regular activities in general. Alternate translation: “They were going about their normal lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 17 27 uh5k figs-activepassive ἐγαμίζοντο 1 they were being given in marriage If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “parents were giving their daughters in marriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 17 27 m169 figs-idiom ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας 1 until the day While Noah and his family did enter the ark on a specific **day**, Jesus is likely using the word **day** figuratively to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “right up to the moment when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 17 27 m169 figs-idiom ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας 1 until the day While Noah and his family did enter the ark on a specific **day**, Jesus is likely using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “right up to the moment when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 17 27 hb8s translate-unknown τὴν κιβωτόν 1 the ark The term **the ark** refers to the structure that Noah built on God’s instructions to save himself and his family from the flood. If your readers would not recognize this specific term, you could use a more general one. Alternate translation: “the ship he built” or “the barge he built” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 17 27 qt8b figs-hyperbole πάντας 1 them all Here, **them all** does not include Noah and his family, who were in the ark. Alternate translation: “all those who were not in the ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 17 28 m170 figs-ellipsis καθὼς ἐγένετο ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Λώτ 1 just as it happened in the days of Lot Jesus is drawing another analogy like the one in [17:27](../17/27.md), but in this case he does not specify the object of the comparison right away. He does not do so explicitly until [17:30](../17/30.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could supply that information here. Alternate translation: “people were doing certain things at the time when Lot lived, and people will be doing the same things at the time when I am about to return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -LUK 17 28 m171 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Λώτ 1 in the days of Lot Jesus is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time when Lot was living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 17 28 m171 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Λώτ 1 in the days of Lot Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time when Lot was living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 17 28 m172 translate-names Λώτ 1 Lot **Lot** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 17 28 m173 figs-synecdoche ἤσθιον, ἔπινον, ἠγόραζον, ἐπώλουν, ἐφύτευον, ᾠκοδόμουν 1 they were eating, they were drinking, they were buying, they were selling, they were planting, they were building Jesus describes several regular activities to refer figuratively to regular activities in general. Alternate translation: “they were going about their normal lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 17 28 m173 figs-synecdoche ἤσθιον, ἔπινον, ἠγόραζον, ἐπώλουν, ἐφύτευον, ᾠκοδόμουν 1 they were eating, they were drinking, they were buying, they were selling, they were planting, they were building Jesus describes several regular activities to refer to regular activities in general. Alternate translation: “they were going about their normal lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 17 28 u93v writing-pronouns ἤσθιον 1 they were eating The implication from [17:29](../17/29.md) is that the pronoun **they** refers to the people of Sodom. Alternate translation: “the people of Sodom were eating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 17 29 m174 figs-idiom ᾗ δὲ ἡμέρᾳ 1 but in the day While Lot did leave Sodom on a specific **day**, Jesus is likely using the word **day** figuratively to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “But at the moment when” or “But as soon as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 17 29 m174 figs-idiom ᾗ δὲ ἡμέρᾳ 1 but in the day While Lot did leave Sodom on a specific **day**, Jesus is likely using the word **day** to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “But at the moment when” or “But as soon as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 17 29 m175 translate-names Σοδόμων 1 Sodom **Sodom** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 17 29 gp77 figs-simile ἔβρεξεν πῦρ καὶ θεῖον ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ 1 it rained fire and sulfur from heaven In some languages, **rained** can mean “fell in large quantities.” If the verb for water falling from the sky does not have that extended meaning in your language, you could translate this as a simile. Alternate translation: “fire and burning sulfur fell from the sky like rain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) LUK 17 29 skp4 figs-hyperbole πάντας 1 them all Here, **them all** does not include Lot and his family. Alternate translation: “all those who stayed in the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 17 30 m176 κατὰ ταὐτὰ ἔσται 1 It will be according to these things Alternate translation: “It will be just like that” LUK 17 30 w3uh figs-explicit κατὰ ταὐτὰ ἔσται 1 It will be according to these things The implication is that people will be occupied with ordinary activities and not expecting anything out of the ordinary to happen. Alternate translation: “In the same way, people will not be ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 17 30 m177 figs-idiom ᾗ ἡμέρᾳ 1 in the day Jesus is using the term **day** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 17 30 m177 figs-idiom ᾗ ἡμέρᾳ 1 in the day Jesus is using the term **day** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 17 30 v9ki figs-activepassive ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἀποκαλύπτεται 1 the Son of Man is revealed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Son of Man appears” or “the Son of man returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 17 30 pfe1 figs-123person ᾗ ἡμέρᾳ, ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἀποκαλύπτεται 1 in the day the Son of Man is revealed Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “when I, the Son of Man, am revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 17 30 m178 figs-explicit ᾗ ἡμέρᾳ, ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ἀποκαλύπτεται 1 in the day the Son of Man is revealed See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “when I, the Messiah, am revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 17 31 m179 figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 In that day Jesus is using the term **day** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “At that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 17 31 m179 figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 In that day Jesus is using the term **day** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “At that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 17 31 i9eq figs-hypo ὃς ἔσται ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος, καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ, μὴ καταβάτω ἆραι αὐτά 1 whoever is on the housetop and his goods are in the house, let him not go down to take them away Jesus is speaking of a hypothetical situation that might occur at this time. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone is doing something on the roof of his house. Then he should not go inside to get his valuables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 17 31 ep81 translate-unknown ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος 1 on the housetop In this culture, housetops were flat and people could go up onto them without being in danger of sliding off. Housetops were used for a variety of purposes, such as storing and ripening grain and fruit, sleeping in hot weather, and gathering in a large open space. If housetops or roofs are different in your culture and your readers would not understand that Jesus is speaking of someone doing an ordinary activity, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “doing something outside the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 17 31 jj9c τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ 1 his goods Alternate translation: “his possessions” or “his valuables” @@ -3082,14 +3082,14 @@ LUK 18 4 m199 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ τὸν Θεὸν ο LUK 18 4 bh3q figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 men The judge is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 18 5 m200 figs-quotesinquotes διά γε τὸ παρέχειν μοι κόπον τὴν χήραν ταύτην, ἐκδικήσω αὐτήν, ἵνα μὴ εἰς τέλος ἐρχομένη ὑπωπιάζῃ με 1 yet because this widow causes me trouble, I will vindicate her, so that she will not beat me up by coming to the end If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation (continuing the sentence from the previous verse): “because this widow bothered him, he would give a fair ruling in her case, so that she would not wear him out by coming incessantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 18 5 v9uu παρέχειν μοι κόπον 1 causes me trouble Alternate translation: “bothers me” -LUK 18 5 cf4e figs-metaphor μὴ…ὑπωπιάζῃ με 1 she will not beat me up The judge speaks figuratively of the wearying effect of the widow’s constant pleas as if they were physically pummeling him. Alternate translation: “she will not wear me out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 18 5 cf4e figs-metaphor μὴ…ὑπωπιάζῃ με 1 she will not beat me up The judge speaks of the wearying effect of the widow’s constant pleas as if they were physically pummeling him. Alternate translation: “she will not wear me out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 18 5 ub29 figs-idiom εἰς τέλος ἐρχομένη 1 by coming to the end The expression **to the end** is an idiom that means “perpetually” or “forever.” Alternate translation: “by coming to me incessantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 18 6 m201 ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord Here Luke refers to Jesus by the respectful title **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” LUK 18 6 t9mg figs-idiom ἀκούσατε τί ὁ κριτὴς τῆς ἀδικίας λέγει 1 Listen to what the unrighteous judge says **Listen to** is an idiom that means “think about.” Jesus says this to get his disciples to reflect on what the judge said at the end of the parable. He is not introducing a further statement from the judge. Translate this in such a way that your readers will understand that Jesus has already related what the judge said. Alternate translation: “Think about what the unjust judge said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 18 7 t1sk figs-rquestion ὁ δὲ Θεὸς οὐ μὴ ποιήσῃ τὴν ἐκδίκησιν τῶν ἐκλεκτῶν αὐτοῦ 1 And will not God do the vindication of his elect Jesus is using the question form for emphasis as he teaches his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “Now God will certainly answer the prayers of the people he has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 18 7 e2lv figs-explicit ὁ δὲ Θεὸς οὐ μὴ ποιήσῃ τὴν ἐκδίκησιν τῶν ἐκλεκτῶν αὐτοῦ 1 And will not God do the vindication of his elect Jesus is drawing an implicit comparison between the unrighteous human judge and **God**, who is the perfectly righteous divine judge. The implication is that if even the human judge would ensure justice for someone who persevered in pleading for it, God would certainly do so. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “If an unrighteous human judge would ensure justice for someone who persevered in pleading for it, God will certainly answer the prayers of the people he has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 18 7 lrs0 figs-nominaladj τῶν ἐκλεκτῶν αὐτοῦ 1 his elect Jesus is using the adjective **elect** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “for the people whom he chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -LUK 18 7 m202 figs-merism τῶν βοώντων αὐτῷ ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτός 1 the ones crying out to him day and night Jesus is using the phrase **day and night** figuratively to describe all of time, by referring to its two components. Alternate translation: “who pray to him all the time” or “who ask him for help continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +LUK 18 7 m202 figs-merism τῶν βοώντων αὐτῷ ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτός 1 the ones crying out to him day and night Jesus is using the phrase **day and night** to describe all of time, by referring to its two components. Alternate translation: “who pray to him all the time” or “who ask him for help continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) LUK 18 7 ljb4 figs-idiom καὶ μακροθυμεῖ ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς 1 and he delays long over them Here Jesus may be using the word **and** in an idiomatic sense to mean “even if.” (UST offers another possible interpretation of this phrase.) Alternate translation: “even if he takes a long time to answer their prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 18 8 m203 λέγω ὑμῖν 1 I say to you Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “I can assure you” LUK 18 8 m204 figs-explicit ποιήσει τὴν ἐκδίκησιν αὐτῶν ἐν τάχει 1 he will do the vindication of them quickly The point of the parable and of this teaching is that people should continue to pray even if God does not answer right away. So this statement might seem contradictory, since it suggests that God will answer right away. The implication may be that God is concerned for his people and will begin to act immediately to help them, even if his actions do not become apparent for some time. If you think your readers would be puzzled or troubled by the apparent contradiction, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will start to answer their prayers right away” or “he will begin to send them help right away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -3143,7 +3143,7 @@ LUK 18 17 ar8e figs-simile ὡς παιδίον 1 like a child If it would be he LUK 18 17 m225 οὐ μὴ εἰσέλθῃ εἰς αὐτήν 1 will certainly not enter into it Alternate translation: “will not let God rule over him at all” LUK 18 18 a5qz writing-participants καὶ ἐπηρώτησέν τις αὐτὸν ἄρχων 1 And a certain ruler asked him Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. Alternate translation: “Then a Jewish leader came up to Jesus and asked him a question” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 18 18 d6kf τί ποιήσας…κληρονομήσω 1 doing what will I inherit Alternate translation: “what do I need to do to inherit” -LUK 18 18 xrs8 figs-metaphor κληρονομήσω 1 will I inherit The ruler is using the term **inherit** figuratively to mean coming into possession of something. Alternate translation: “will I receive” or “will I obtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 18 18 xrs8 figs-metaphor κληρονομήσω 1 will I inherit The ruler is using the term **inherit** to mean coming into possession of something. Alternate translation: “will I receive” or “will I obtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 18 19 fxi2 figs-rquestion τί με λέγεις ἀγαθόν? οὐδεὶς ἀγαθὸς, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Θεός 1 Why do you call me good? No one is good except God alone Jesus is using the question form as a teaching tool. He is not asking the ruler to explain why he used this term. Jesus is also not denying that he is God. Rather, he is challenging the ruler to reflect on whether, in light of God’s holiness, he should consider any human being to be **good**. The ruler apparently considers Jesus to be a **good** human being, and he wants to know how he can be **good** enough himself to earn God’s approval. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement, and it may be helpful to combine that statement with the next sentence in the verse. Alternate translation: “You should not consider any human being to be good, since no one is good except God alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 18 20 m226 figs-explicit τὰς ἐντολὰς οἶδας 1 You know the commandments The implication is that Jesus is saying this in response to the ruler’s question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “As for what God expects from us, you know what he has commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 18 20 m227 figs-quotesinquotes μὴ μοιχεύσῃς, μὴ φονεύσῃς, μὴ κλέψῃς, μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς, τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα 1 do not commit adultery, do not murder, do not steal, do not testify falsely, honor your father and mother You may wish to represent these commandments as a second-level direct quotation within Jesus’ reply to the ruler, using the capitalization and punctuation conventions of your language. That is what UST does. However, that would be a quotation within a quotation, and you may wish to avoid that by leaving the commandments as an indirect quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -3189,14 +3189,14 @@ LUK 18 31 m242 figs-explicit τῷ Υἱῷ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son LUK 18 31 i5ya figs-activepassive τελεσθήσεται 1 will be accomplished If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “will occur” or “will take place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 18 32 h2a3 figs-activepassive παραδοθήσεται 1 he will be delivered If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders will hand him over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 18 32 es98 figs-123person παραδοθήσεται 1 he will be delivered If you decided in [18:31](../18/31.md) to use the second person for what Jesus is telling his disciples, also use it here. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders will hand me over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -LUK 18 32 m243 figs-metonymy τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 to the Gentiles Jesus is speaking figuratively of the Roman authorities by association with the fact that they are not Jews. Alternate translation: “to the Roman authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 18 32 m243 figs-metonymy τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 to the Gentiles Jesus is speaking of the Roman authorities by association with the fact that they are not Jews. Alternate translation: “to the Roman authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 18 32 hc2k figs-activepassive ἐμπαιχθήσεται, καὶ ὑβρισθήσεται, καὶ ἐμπτυσθήσεται 1 he be mocked, and will be mistreated, and will be spit upon If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they will mock him, mistreat him, and spit on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 18 32 m244 figs-123person ἐμπαιχθήσεται, καὶ ὑβρισθήσεται, καὶ ἐμπτυσθήσεται 1 he be mocked, and will be mistreated, and will be spit upon If you decided in [18:31](../18/31.md) to use the second person for what Jesus is telling his disciples, also use it here. Alternate translation: “they will mock me, mistreat me, and spit on me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 18 33 u86r figs-123person καὶ μαστιγώσαντες, ἀποκτενοῦσιν αὐτόν; καὶ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρίτῃ, ἀναστήσεται 1 And having whipped him, they will kill him. And on the third day he will rise up If you decided in [18:31](../18/31.md) to use the second person for what Jesus is telling his disciples, use it here as well. Alternate translation: “And after they have whipped me, they will kill me. But two days later I will come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 18 33 fie4 figs-explicit καὶ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρίτῃ, ἀναστήσεται 1 And on the third day he will rise up See how you translated this phrase in [9:22](../09/22.md). In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the **third day**. To make sure that this is clear to your readers, you may wish to use a different expression than “the third day,” especially if, in your culture, this would mean one day longer than Jesus intends. Otherwise, your readers may be confused when they read later in the book that Jesus died on a Friday and came back to life on a Sunday, if that would be “the second day” according to the way your culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “and he will spend the next full day in the grave, but on the day after that, he will come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 18 33 m245 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρίτῃ 1 And on the third day Jesus uses the word **and** to introduce a contrast between the belief of the authorities that they could kill him and the fact that he would come back to life. Alternate translation: “but on the third day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) LUK 18 33 m246 translate-ordinal τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρίτῃ 1 on the third day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “on day three” or, depending on how your culture reckons time, “on day two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -LUK 18 33 m247 figs-metonymy ἀναστήσεται 1 he will rise up Jesus speaks figuratively of his coming back to life as if he will **rise up**, since he will come **up** out of the grave. Alternate translation: “he will come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 18 33 m247 figs-metonymy ἀναστήσεται 1 he will rise up Jesus speaks of his coming back to life as if he will **rise up**, since he will come **up** out of the grave. Alternate translation: “he will come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 18 34 bm7h αὐτοὶ οὐδὲν τούτων συνῆκαν 1 they understood none of these things If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the verb negative and the object positive here. Alternate translation: “they did not understand any of these things” LUK 18 34 b29z figs-explicit οὐδὲν τούτων 1 none of these things Implicitly, **these things** refers to Jesus’ description of how he would suffer and die in Jerusalem and then rise from the dead. Alternate translation: “none of what Jesus had told them about what was going to happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 18 34 fn58 figs-activepassive ἦν τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο κεκρυμμένον ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 this word was hidden from them If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God prevented them from understanding the meaning of what Jesus was telling them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -3210,7 +3210,7 @@ LUK 18 37 ckr3 writing-pronouns ἀπήγγειλαν…αὐτῷ 1 they report LUK 18 37 ku9j translate-names Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος 1 Jesus the Nazarene The people call **Jesus** **the Nazarene** because he was from the town of Nazareth in Galilee. Alternate translation: “Jesus from the town of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 18 38 u9ct grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses **and** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. When the blind man learned that Jesus was walking by, he knew that Jesus would hear him if he called out, so as a result, he shouted to him. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 18 38 yaj2 ἐβόησεν 1 cried out Alternate translation: “he called out” or “he shouted” -LUK 18 38 m250 figs-metaphor Υἱὲ Δαυείδ 1 Son of David The blind man is using the word **Son** figuratively to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “Descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 18 38 m250 figs-metaphor Υἱὲ Δαυείδ 1 Son of David The blind man is using the word **Son** to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “Descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 18 38 ehf6 figs-explicit Υἱὲ Δαυείδ 1 Son of David **David** was Israel’s most important king, and God had promised him that one of his descendants would be the Messiah. So the title **Son of David** implicitly meant “Messiah.” Alternate translation: “Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 18 38 m251 translate-names Δαυείδ 1 David **David** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 18 38 u69g figs-imperative ἐλέησόν με 1 have mercy on me This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please be merciful to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) @@ -3223,7 +3223,7 @@ LUK 18 40 m255 figs-activepassive αὐτὸν ἀχθῆναι πρὸς αὐ LUK 18 41 al8g ἵνα ἀναβλέψω 1 that I might see again Alternate translation: “I want to be able to see again” or “I want you to restore my sight” LUK 18 42 n67h figs-imperative ἀνάβλεψον 1 See again This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I have restored your sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 18 42 m256 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “Because you believed, you have been healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LUK 18 42 gcv1 figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you Jesus speaks figuratively of the man’s **faith** as if it had actively healed him. Alternate translation: “Because you believed, you have been healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 18 42 gcv1 figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you Jesus speaks of the man’s **faith** as if it had actively healed him. Alternate translation: “Because you believed, you have been healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 18 42 m257 ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you Here Jesus seems to be using the word **saved** in one of its particular senses, to mean “healed.” Alternate translation: “Because you believed, you have been healed” LUK 18 43 m258 ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ 1 he followed him Here, **followed** does not necessarily have the figurative meaning of “became a disciple.” Alternate translation: “he walked down the road with the rest of the crowd that was around Jesus” LUK 18 43 d1kk δοξάζων τὸν Θεόν 1 glorifying God Alternate translation: “giving glory to God” or “praising God” @@ -3253,16 +3253,16 @@ LUK 19 8 m270 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ τινός τι ἐσυκοφ LUK 19 8 u2bt ἀποδίδωμι τετραπλοῦν 1 I will restore four-fold Alternate translation: “I will return to them four times as much as I took from them” LUK 19 9 m271 figs-explicit εἶπεν δὲ πρὸς αὐτὸν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 Then Jesus said to him Jesus spoke not just to Zacchaeus but also to the people from the crowd who were complaining that he had gone to visit him. In this culture, people were allowed to stand around the walls of the banquet room in a private home and listen to what an invited guest was saying. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus said to Zacchaeus and to the people from the crowd who were standing around the room” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 19 9 m272 figs-123person σωτηρία τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ ἐγένετο, καθότι καὶ αὐτὸς υἱὸς Ἀβραάμ ἐστιν 1 salvation has come to this house, because he too is a son of Abraham Jesus is speaking to Zacchaeus, but he addresses him in the third person because he is also speaking to the people from the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person here. Alternate translation: “salvation has come to your household, because you too are a son of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -LUK 19 9 m273 figs-personification σωτηρία τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ ἐγένετο 1 salvation has come to this house Jesus speaks figuratively of **salvation** as if it were a living thing that could come to the house of Zacchaeus. Alternate translation: “God has brought salvation to this household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 19 9 m273 figs-personification σωτηρία τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ ἐγένετο 1 salvation has come to this house Jesus speaks of **salvation** as if it were a living thing that could come to the house of Zacchaeus. Alternate translation: “God has brought salvation to this household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 19 9 u2bx figs-abstractnouns σωτηρία τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ ἐγένετο 1 salvation has come to this house If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb such as “save,” and show that God has done the action. Alternate translation: “God has saved this household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LUK 19 9 i8yg figs-metonymy τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ 1 this house Jesus is using the word **house** figuratively to refer to the people living in the house. Alternate translation: “to this household” or “to this family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 19 9 i8yg figs-metonymy τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ 1 this house Jesus is using the word **house** to refer to the people living in the house. Alternate translation: “to this household” or “to this family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 19 9 f65b καὶ αὐτὸς 1 he too Alternate translation: “this man too” or “Zacchaeus also” -LUK 19 9 m274 figs-metaphor υἱὸς Ἀβραάμ 1 a son of Abraham Jesus may be using the word **son** figuratively to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “a descendant of Abraham” or “one of our fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 19 9 m274 figs-metaphor υἱὸς Ἀβραάμ 1 a son of Abraham Jesus may be using the word **son** to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “a descendant of Abraham” or “one of our fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 19 9 v3hq figs-idiom υἱὸς Ἀβραάμ 1 a son of Abraham Alternatively, Jesus could be using the expression **son of** as an idiom to mean someone who shares the qualities of someone else. Alternate translation: “a person who has faith as Abraham did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 19 10 myp2 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 19 10 m275 figs-explicit ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 19 10 m276 figs-123person τὸ ἀπολωλός 1 the lost If you decided to use the second person in the previous verse, you could use it here as well. Alternate translation: “lost people like you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -LUK 19 10 m277 figs-metaphor τὸ ἀπολωλός 1 the lost Jesus is using the term **lost** figuratively. Alternate translation: “people who have wandered away from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 19 10 m277 figs-metaphor τὸ ἀπολωλός 1 the lost Jesus is using the term **lost**. Alternate translation: “people who have wandered away from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 19 11 m278 grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to begin relating a new event by introducing background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 19 11 vue7 figs-parables προσθεὶς, εἶπεν παραβολὴν 1 he proceeded to speak a parable To help the people in the crowd have the correct expectations about the kingdom of God, Jesus tells a brief story that provides an illustration. Alternate translation: “Jesus told the crowd this story to help them understand better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) LUK 19 11 m279 grammar-connect-logic-result προσθεὶς, εἶπεν παραβολὴν 1 he proceeded to speak a parable If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this clause last in the verse, since the two statements that follow give the reason for the result that it describes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -3283,12 +3283,12 @@ LUK 19 14 m284 figs-quotesinquotes ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ λέγοντες, ο LUK 19 15 g3jp writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Jesus uses this phrase to mark an important development in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 19 15 s9a7 λαβόντα τὴν βασιλείαν 1 having received the kingdom Alternate translation: “after the emperor had appointed him king” LUK 19 15 s2x2 figs-activepassive εἶπεν φωνηθῆναι αὐτῷ 1 he commanded to be called to him If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he told some of his other servants to bring in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 19 15 m285 figs-metonymy τὸ ἀργύριον 1 the silver Jesus is speaking figuratively of the money by reference to the precious metal, **silver**, that gives it its value. Alternate translation: “the money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 19 15 m285 figs-metonymy τὸ ἀργύριον 1 the silver Jesus is speaking of the money by reference to the precious metal, **silver**, that gives it its value. Alternate translation: “the money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 19 15 xc6s τί διεπραγματεύσαντο 1 what they had gained by doing business Alternate translation: “how much money they had earned with the money he had given them” LUK 19 16 iy7i figs-quotesinquotes παρεγένετο…ὁ πρῶτος λέγων, Κύριε, ἡ μνᾶ σου, δέκα προσηργάσατο μνᾶς 1 the first came and said, ‘Master, your mina has earned ten minas’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the first servant came and told him that he had used his mina to earn ten more minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 19 16 m286 figs-nominaladj ὁ πρῶτος 1 the first Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “the first servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 19 16 mf96 translate-ordinal ὁ πρῶτος 1 the first If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “servant number one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -LUK 19 16 ejx9 figs-personification ἡ μνᾶ σου, δέκα προσηργάσατο μνᾶς 1 your mina has earned ten minas The servant is speaking figuratively of the **mina** as if it had earned the money. Alternate translation: “I used the mina you gave me to earn ten more minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 19 16 ejx9 figs-personification ἡ μνᾶ σου, δέκα προσηργάσατο μνᾶς 1 your mina has earned ten minas The servant is speaking of the **mina** as if it had earned the money. Alternate translation: “I used the mina you gave me to earn ten more minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 19 16 j7ag translate-bweight μνᾶ 1 mina See how you translated **mina** in [19:13](../19/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) LUK 19 17 abcq figs-quotesinquotes καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ, εὖ ἀγαθὲ δοῦλε! ὅτι ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ, πιστὸς ἐγένου, ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων ἐπάνω δέκα πόλεων 1 And he said to him, ‘Well done, good servant. Because you were faithful in very little, be having authority over ten cities’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “So the king told this first servant that he had done a good job, and that because he had shown in a small task that he was faithful, he was making him the ruler of ten cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 19 17 m287 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ 1 And he said to him Jesus uses this phrase to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So the king said to the first servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -3298,7 +3298,7 @@ LUK 19 17 m288 figs-imperative ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων ἐπάνω LUK 19 18 zsr1 figs-quotesinquotes ἦλθεν ὁ δεύτερος λέγων, ἡ μνᾶ σου, Κύριε, ἐποίησεν πέντε μνᾶς 1 the second came and said, ‘Your mina, master, has made five minas’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the second servant came and told him that he had used his mina to make five more minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 19 18 m289 figs-nominaladj ὁ δεύτερος 1 the second Jesus is using the adjective **second** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “the second servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 19 18 ic7p translate-ordinal ὁ δεύτερος 1 the second If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “servant number two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -LUK 19 18 irh6 figs-personification ἡ μνᾶ σου…ἐποίησεν πέντε μνᾶς 1 Your mina … has made five minas The servant is speaking figuratively of the mina as if it had earned the money. Alternate translation: “I used the mina you gave me … to earn five more minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 19 18 irh6 figs-personification ἡ μνᾶ σου…ἐποίησεν πέντε μνᾶς 1 Your mina … has made five minas The servant is speaking of the mina as if it had earned the money. Alternate translation: “I used the mina you gave me … to earn five more minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 19 18 d811 translate-bweight μνᾶ 1 mina See how you translated **mina** in [19:13](../19/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) LUK 19 19 abcr figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν δὲ καὶ τούτῳ, καὶ σὺ ἐπάνω γίνου πέντε πόλεων 1 So he also said to this one, ‘And you will be over five cities’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “So the king similarly told this second servant that he was making him the ruler of five cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 19 19 jxa9 figs-imperative σὺ ἐπάνω γίνου πέντε πόλεων 1 you be over five cities The new king speaks this as a command, but it is not one that the servant is capable of obeying on his own. Rather, the king is using the command form to appoint the servant to a position of authority. Alternate translation: “I am making you the ruler of five cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) @@ -3310,18 +3310,18 @@ LUK 19 20 r25f translate-bweight μνᾶ 1 mina See how you translated **mina** LUK 19 20 l2wr figs-activepassive ἣν εἶχον ἀποκειμένην ἐν σουδαρίῳ 1 which I was keeping put away in a cloth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. It may be helpful to make this a new sentence, as UST does. Alternate translation: “I put it in a cloth to keep it safe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 19 21 m293 figs-quotesinquotes ἐφοβούμην γάρ σε, ὅτι ἄνθρωπος αὐστηρὸς εἶ; αἴρεις ὃ οὐκ ἔθηκας, καὶ θερίζεις ὃ οὐκ ἔσπειρας 1 for I feared you, because you are a harsh man. You take up what you did not put down, and you reap what you did not sow’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that it is not a quotation within a quotation. If you do, it may be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “This servant told the king that he had been afraid of him because he was a demanding man who took other people’s property as his own and benefitted from other people’s hard work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 19 21 w5yw ἄνθρωπος αὐστηρὸς 1 a harsh man Alternate translation: “a man who is very demanding” -LUK 19 21 a6ja figs-metaphor αἴρεις ὃ οὐκ ἔθηκας 1 You take up what you did not put down The servant is speaking figuratively of the king as if he would pick up things that others had set down and take them away as his own property. Alternate translation: “You take other people’s property as your own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 19 21 mi5b figs-metaphor θερίζεις ὃ οὐκ ἔσπειρας 1 you reap what you did not sow The servant is speaking figuratively of the king as if he would harvest a crop that someone else had planted. Alternate translation: “you benefit from other people’s hard work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 19 21 a6ja figs-metaphor αἴρεις ὃ οὐκ ἔθηκας 1 You take up what you did not put down The servant is speaking of the king as if he would pick up things that others had set down and take them away as his own property. Alternate translation: “You take other people’s property as your own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 19 21 mi5b figs-metaphor θερίζεις ὃ οὐκ ἔσπειρας 1 you reap what you did not sow The servant is speaking of the king as if he would harvest a crop that someone else had planted. Alternate translation: “you benefit from other people’s hard work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 19 22 q2k2 figs-quotesinquotes λέγει αὐτῷ, ἐκ τοῦ στόματός σου κρίνω σε, πονηρὲ δοῦλε; ᾔδεις ὅτι ἐγὼ ἄνθρωπος αὐστηρός εἰμι, αἴρων ὃ οὐκ ἔθηκα, καὶ θερίζων ὃ οὐκ ἔσπειρα? 1 He says to him, ‘By your mouth I will judge you, wicked servant! Did you know that I am a harsh man, taking up what I did not put down, and reaping what I did not sow?’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “The king told him that he was a wicked servant and that he would judge him by what he had just said. The king said to suppose that he really was a harsh man who took other people’s property as his own and benefitted from other people’s hard work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 19 22 m294 λέγει αὐτῷ 1 He says to him To call attention to a development in the story, this parable uses the present tense here in past narration. See how you decided to approach this usage in [7:40](../07/40.md). If it would not be natural to use the present tense in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “The king said to this servant” -LUK 19 22 wt8q figs-metonymy ἐκ τοῦ στόματός σου 1 By your mouth The king is using the term **mouth** figuratively to refer to what the servant said using his mouth. Alternate translation: “based on what you have just said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 19 22 wt8q figs-metonymy ἐκ τοῦ στόματός σου 1 By your mouth The king is using the term **mouth** to refer to what the servant said using his mouth. Alternate translation: “based on what you have just said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 19 22 xga8 figs-rquestion ᾔδεις ὅτι ἐγὼ ἄνθρωπος αὐστηρός εἰμι, αἴρων ὃ οὐκ ἔθηκα, καὶ θερίζων ὃ οὐκ ἔσπειρα? 1 Did you know that I am a harsh man, taking up what I did not put down, and reaping what I did not sow? The king is not asking the servant to verify what he has just said. Rather, he is using the question form to challenge the servant. He is repeating what the servant said about him, but not to grant that it is true. Rather, he is about to tell the servant what he should have done if it actually had been true. Alternate translation: “So you thought I was a harsh man who took other people’s property as his own and benefitted from other people’s hard work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 19 22 m295 figs-metaphor αἴρων ὃ οὐκ ἔθηκα, καὶ θερίζων ὃ οὐκ ἔσπειρα 1 taking up what I did not put down, and reaping what I did not sow See how you translated these expressions in [19:21](../19/21.md). Alternate translation: “who took other people’s property as his own and benefitted from other people’s hard work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 19 23 m296 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ διὰ τί οὐκ ἔδωκάς μου τὸ ἀργύριον ἐπὶ τράπεζαν, κἀγὼ ἐλθὼν, σὺν τόκῳ ἂν αὐτὸ ἔπραξα? 1 And for what reason did you not put my silver in a bank, and when I returned, I would have collected it with interest? If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “The king told him that in that case, he should have put his money in the bank so that he could have collected it with interest when he returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 19 23 spx7 figs-rquestion καὶ διὰ τί οὐκ ἔδωκάς μου τὸ ἀργύριον ἐπὶ τράπεζαν, κἀγὼ ἐλθὼν, σὺν τόκῳ ἂν αὐτὸ ἔπραξα? 1 And for what reason did you not put my silver in a bank, and when I returned, I would have collected it with interest? The king is not asking the servant to explain why he did not do this. Rather, he is using the question form to rebuke the servant. Alternate translation: “Even if I were like that, you had no reason not to put my money in the bank so that I could have collected it with interest when I returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 19 23 m297 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And The king uses this word to introduce the results of what he said in the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Then” or “Even if I was like that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 19 23 e1yh translate-unknown ἔδωκάς μου τὸ ἀργύριον ἐπὶ τράπεζαν…σὺν τόκῳ 1 put my silver in a bank … with interest A **bank** is an institution that accepts deposits of money and uses them to make loans. It pays an **interest** premium on the deposits and charges an **interest** premium on the loans. If your culture does not have banks, or if your culture does not allow interest payments, you could translate this in a different way that would be meaningful to your readers. Alternate translation: “let someone borrow my money … with a share of the profits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 19 23 m298 figs-metonymy μου τὸ ἀργύριον 1 my silver The king is speaking figuratively of the money by reference to the precious metal, **silver**, that gives it its value. Alternate translation: “my money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 19 23 m298 figs-metonymy μου τὸ ἀργύριον 1 my silver The king is speaking of the money by reference to the precious metal, **silver**, that gives it its value. Alternate translation: “my money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 19 23 c8ca σὺν τόκῳ ἂν αὐτὸ ἔπραξα 1 I would have collected it with interest Alternate translation: “I could have gotten that amount back plus the interest it would have earned” or “I would have gained a profit from it” LUK 19 24 h1nn figs-quotesinquotes καὶ τοῖς παρεστῶσιν εἶπεν, ἄρατε ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ τὴν μνᾶν, καὶ δότε τῷ, τὰς δέκα μνᾶς ἔχοντι 1 And he said to those standing by, ‘Take the mina away from him and give it to the one who has the ten minas’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And the king told his attendants to take the mina away from this servant and give it to the one who had the ten minas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 19 24 aj1c τοῖς παρεστῶσιν 1 those standing by The phrase **those standing by** refers to the king’s attendants, who would stand nearby him waiting to carry out any instructions that he gave. Alternate translation: “to his attendants” @@ -3377,10 +3377,10 @@ LUK 19 37 m323 figs-idiom φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 with a loud voice This is an LUK 19 37 m324 φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 with a loud voice If you would like to reproduce this idiom, but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole crowd had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “with loud voices” or “in loud voices” LUK 19 37 m8hn figs-explicit ὧν εἶδον δυνάμεων 1 the mighty works that they had seen This means implicitly the mighty works that they had seen Jesus do. Alternate translation: “the miracles that they had seen Jesus do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 19 38 x7wk figs-explicit λέγοντες 1 saying The implication is that the crowd was saying this about Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “saying about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 19 38 nsg4 figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord The term **name** refers figuratively to a person’s power and authority. Alternate translation: “with the Lord’s authority” or “as God’s representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 19 38 nsg4 figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord The term **name** refers to a person’s power and authority. Alternate translation: “with the Lord’s authority” or “as God’s representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 19 38 d7b4 figs-abstractnouns ἐν οὐρανῷ εἰρήνη 1 Peace in heaven If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **peace** with an adjective such as “peaceful.” Alternate translation: “May heaven be peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 19 38 m325 figs-metonymy ἐν οὐρανῷ εἰρήνη 1 Peace in heaven The word **heaven** is a figurative way of referring to the inhabitants of **heaven**, and perhaps specifically to God. Alternate translation: “May everyone in heaven be peaceful towards this king” or “May God be peaceful towards this king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 19 38 vb29 figs-metaphor καὶ δόξα ἐν ὑψίστοις 1 and glory in the highest The term **highest** is a spatial metaphor that figuratively describes heaven. Alternate translation: “and glory in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 19 38 vb29 figs-metaphor καὶ δόξα ἐν ὑψίστοις 1 and glory in the highest The term **highest** is a spatial metaphor that describes heaven. Alternate translation: “and glory in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 19 38 m327 figs-abstractnouns καὶ δόξα ἐν ὑψίστοις 1 and glory in the highest If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** with an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “and may heaven be glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 19 38 m326 figs-explicit καὶ δόξα ἐν ὑψίστοις 1 and glory in the highest The implication is that this **glory** is praise that would be given to God. Alternate translation: “and may God be praised in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 19 38 m328 figs-explicit καὶ δόξα ἐν ὑψίστοις 1 and glory in the highest The implication is that God would be praised for sending this king. Alternate translation: “and may God be praised in heaven for sending this king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -3393,23 +3393,23 @@ LUK 19 40 efm9 λέγω ὑμῖν 1 I say to you Jesus says this to emphasize LUK 19 40 m333 figs-explicit ἐὰν οὗτοι σιωπήσουσιν, οἱ λίθοι κράξουσιν 1 if these were silent, the stones would cry out The implication is that Jesus is refusing to do what the Pharisees are asking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “No, I will not tell them to be silent, because if they were, then the stones would cry out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 19 40 v8tc οἱ λίθοι κράξουσιν 1 the stones would cry out Alternate translation: “the stones would shout out praises” LUK 19 41 v3pq figs-explicit ὡς ἤγγισεν, ἰδὼν τὴν πόλιν 1 as he approached, seeing the city The phrase **the city** refers to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “when he got close enough to Jerusalem to see it well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 19 41 k4l2 figs-metonymy ἔκλαυσεν ἐπ’ αὐτήν 1 he wept over it Luke is using the city of Jerusalem figuratively to mean the people who lived in it. Alternate translation: “he wept over the people who lived there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 19 42 g1ee figs-apostrophe εἰ ἔγνως 1 If you had known Starting here and through [19:44](../19/44.md), Jesus is figuratively addressing something that he knows cannot hear him, the city of Jerusalem. He is doing this to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about the people who live there. Alternate translation: “I wish that you people of Jerusalem knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) -LUK 19 42 m334 figs-idiom εἰ ἔγνως 1 If you had known Jesus is idiomatically using what sounds like a conditional statement to express a wish. Alternate translation: “I wish that you knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 19 41 k4l2 figs-metonymy ἔκλαυσεν ἐπ’ αὐτήν 1 he wept over it Luke is using the city of Jerusalem to mean the people who lived in it. Alternate translation: “he wept over the people who lived there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 19 42 g1ee figs-apostrophe εἰ ἔγνως 1 If you had known Starting here and through [19:44](../19/44.md), Jesus is addressing something that he knows cannot hear him, the city of Jerusalem. He is doing this to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about the people who live there. Alternate translation: “I wish that you people of Jerusalem knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) +LUK 19 42 m334 figs-idiom εἰ ἔγνως 1 If you had known Jesus is using what sounds like a conditional statement to express a wish. Alternate translation: “I wish that you knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 19 42 q8fm figs-you ἔγνως…καὶ σὺ…σου 1 you had known … even you … your The words **you** and **your** are singular because Jesus is speaking to the city. But if you decided to say “you people” in your translation, you could use plural forms of **you** and **your**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -LUK 19 42 m335 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ταύτῃ 1 in this day Jesus is using the term **day** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 19 42 m335 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ταύτῃ 1 in this day Jesus is using the term **day** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 19 42 m336 figs-explicit τὰ πρὸς εἰρήνην 1 the things towards peace The implication is that Jesus is speaking about people being at **peace** with God. Alternate translation: “the things that enable people to be at peace with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 19 42 tgs6 figs-metonymy ἐκρύβη ἀπὸ ὀφθαλμῶν σου 1 they have been hidden from your eyes The term **eyes** figuratively means the ability to see. Alternate translation: “you are not able to see them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 19 42 tgs6 figs-metonymy ἐκρύβη ἀπὸ ὀφθαλμῶν σου 1 they have been hidden from your eyes The term **eyes** means the ability to see. Alternate translation: “you are not able to see them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 19 42 m337 figs-activepassive ἐκρύβη ἀπὸ ὀφθαλμῶν σου 1 they have been hidden from your eyes If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are not able to see them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 19 43 y3g2 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 For Jesus uses this word to introduce the reason why he wishes the people of Jerusalem had known “the things toward peace,” as he said in the previous verse. Because they have not known them, their city will be surrounded by armies and destroyed. Alternate translation: “I wish you had known those things because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 19 43 tib4 figs-idiom ἥξουσιν ἡμέραι ἐπὶ σὲ 1 the days will come upon you This is an idiom that indicates that the people of Jerusalem will experience difficult times. If your language do not say that a particular time will **come**, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “you are going to experience difficult times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 19 43 m338 figs-idiom ἡμέραι 1 days Jesus is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to specific times. Alternate translation: “times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 19 43 m338 figs-idiom ἡμέραι 1 days Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to specific times. Alternate translation: “times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 19 43 n88i figs-you σὲ…σου…σοι…σε…σε 1 you … your … you … you … you The words **you** and **your** are singular because Jesus is speaking to the city. But if you decided to say “you people” in [19:42](../19/42.md), you could use the plural forms of **you** and **your**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 19 43 e7xp translate-unknown χάρακά 1 a barricade The term **barricade** refers to a wooden wall with pointed stakes at the top that the enemies would make to keep people from getting out of the city. Your language may have a term for an enclosure like this. If not, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a palisade” or “a fence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 19 44 m339 figs-metaphor ἐδαφιοῦσίν σε 1 they will dash you to the ground Jesus is speaking figuratively. To **dash** something **to the ground** means to pick it up and throw it forcefully aganist the ground in order to destroy it. But the enemies of Jerusalem are not going to do this literally to the city. So Jesus means that they will destroy it completely. Alternate translation: “they will completely destroy you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 19 44 p7qg figs-apostrophe ἐδαφιοῦσίν σε 1 they will dash you to the ground As the first note to [19:42](../19/42.md) explains, Jesus is figuratively addressing the city of Jerusalem. If it would be unusual in your language for someone to speak to a city that could not hear or understand him, you could explain the meaning of what Jesus is saying. Alternate translation: “the enemies of Jerusalem will completely destroy that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) -LUK 19 44 m340 figs-idiom καὶ τὰ τέκνα σου ἐν σοί 1 and your children within you To **dash** people **to the ground** figuratively means to kill them. Alternate translation: “and they will kill your children within you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom) -LUK 19 44 m341 figs-metaphor τὰ τέκνα σου ἐν σοί 1 your children within you Jesus speaks figuratively of the people who live in Jerusalem as if the city were their mother and they were her **children**. Here as well you could explain the meaning of what Jesus is saying, if someone in your language would not speak directly to a city. Alternate translation: “the people who live there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 19 44 m339 figs-metaphor ἐδαφιοῦσίν σε 1 they will dash you to the ground Jesus is speaking. To **dash** something **to the ground** means to pick it up and throw it forcefully aganist the ground in order to destroy it. But the enemies of Jerusalem are not going to do this literally to the city. So Jesus means that they will destroy it completely. Alternate translation: “they will completely destroy you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 19 44 p7qg figs-apostrophe ἐδαφιοῦσίν σε 1 they will dash you to the ground As the first note to [19:42](../19/42.md) explains, Jesus is addressing the city of Jerusalem. If it would be unusual in your language for someone to speak to a city that could not hear or understand him, you could explain the meaning of what Jesus is saying. Alternate translation: “the enemies of Jerusalem will completely destroy that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) +LUK 19 44 m340 figs-idiom καὶ τὰ τέκνα σου ἐν σοί 1 and your children within you To **dash** people **to the ground** means to kill them. Alternate translation: “and they will kill your children within you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom) +LUK 19 44 m341 figs-metaphor τὰ τέκνα σου ἐν σοί 1 your children within you Jesus speaks of the people who live in Jerusalem as if the city were their mother and they were her **children**. Here as well you could explain the meaning of what Jesus is saying, if someone in your language would not speak directly to a city. Alternate translation: “the people who live there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 19 44 m342 figs-you σε…σου…σοί…σοί…ἔγνως…σου 1 you … your … you … you … you did not know … your The words **you** and **your** are singular because Jesus is speaking to the city. But if you decided to say “you people” in [19:42](../19/42.md), you could use the plural forms of **you** and **your**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 19 44 f51h figs-hyperbole οὐκ ἀφήσουσιν λίθον ἐπὶ λίθον ἐν σοί 1 they will not leave stone upon stone in you This is a figurative overstatement to emphasize how completely the enemies will destroy the city. Alternate translation: “they will destroy the walls and buildings you have built of stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 19 44 xv9n figs-idiom οὐκ ἔγνως τὸν καιρὸν τῆς ἐπισκοπῆς σου 1 you did not know the time of your visitation Here, **visitation** is idiomatic, with the same meaning as the word “visit” in [1:68](../01/68.md), [1:78](../01/78.md), and [7:16](../07/16.md). Alternate translation: “you did not recognize that God had sent me to help you, his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -3419,17 +3419,17 @@ LUK 19 45 j6ce figs-synecdoche τὸ ἱερὸν 1 the temple Only priests were LUK 19 45 py1x ἐκβάλλειν 1 drive out Alternate translation: “throw out” or “force out” LUK 19 46 m343 figs-quotesinquotes γέγραπται, ὁ οἶκός μου οἶκος προσευχῆς; ὑμεῖς δὲ αὐτὸν ἐποιήσατε σπήλαιον λῃστῶν 1 It is written, ‘My house will be a house of prayer,’ but you have made it ‘a den of robbers’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God says in the Scriptures that ‘his temple will be a place of prayer,’ but you have made it ‘a den of robbers’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 19 46 v81e figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 It is written If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 19 46 uvf7 figs-metaphor ὁ οἶκός μου 1 My house God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers figuratively to his temple as his **house**, because his presence is there. Alternate translation: “My temple will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 19 46 wac1 figs-metaphor οἶκος προσευχῆς 1 a house of prayer God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers figuratively to a place where people would pray as a **house**. Alternate translation: “a place where people pray to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 19 46 ba8w figs-metaphor σπήλαιον λῃστῶν 1 a den of robbers God, speaking through the prophet Jeremiah, refers figuratively to a place where thieves would gather to hide and plot their crimes as if it were a wild animal’s **den** or lair. Alternate translation: “a place where thieves gather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 19 46 uvf7 figs-metaphor ὁ οἶκός μου 1 My house God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to his temple as his **house**, because his presence is there. Alternate translation: “My temple will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 19 46 wac1 figs-metaphor οἶκος προσευχῆς 1 a house of prayer God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to a place where people would pray as a **house**. Alternate translation: “a place where people pray to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 19 46 ba8w figs-metaphor σπήλαιον λῃστῶν 1 a den of robbers God, speaking through the prophet Jeremiah, refers to a place where thieves would gather to hide and plot their crimes as if it were a wild animal’s **den** or lair. Alternate translation: “a place where thieves gather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 19 47 m344 figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed to enter the **temple** building, so Luke means that Jesus was teaching in the temple courtyard. Luke is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 19 47 mn6e writing-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 19 47 m345 figs-nominaladj οἱ πρῶτοι τοῦ λαοῦ 1 the first of the people Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. The term is plural. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the people” or “many prominent people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -LUK 19 47 m346 figs-metaphor οἱ πρῶτοι τοῦ λαοῦ 1 the first of the people The term **first** figuratively represents being significant or important. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the people” or “many prominent people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 19 47 m346 figs-metaphor οἱ πρῶτοι τοῦ λαοῦ 1 the first of the people The term **first** represents being significant or important. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the people” or “many prominent people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 19 48 m347 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce a contrast between what the Jewish leaders were trying to do and what they were able to do. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) LUK 19 48 m348 οὐχ εὕρισκον τὸ τί ποιήσωσιν 1 they were not finding that which they might do Alternate translation: “they were not able to find a way to kill Jesus” LUK 19 48 m349 figs-hyperbole ὁ λαὸς…ἅπας 1 all the people Luke is using the term **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “so many of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -LUK 19 48 pnf9 figs-metaphor ἐξεκρέμετο αὐτοῦ ἀκούων 1 were hanging on him listening Luke speaks figuratively of the people **hanging** on Jesus to emphasize how closely they were listening to what he said. Alternate translation: “were paying close attention to him to hear what he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 19 48 pnf9 figs-metaphor ἐξεκρέμετο αὐτοῦ ἀκούων 1 were hanging on him listening Luke speaks of the people **hanging** on Jesus to emphasize how closely they were listening to what he said. Alternate translation: “were paying close attention to him to hear what he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 intro h6in 0 # Luke 20 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus answers a question about his authority (20:1-8)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who rented a vineyard to farmers (20:9-19)
3. Jesus answers a question about paying taxes to Caesar (20:20-26)
4. Jesus answers a question about marriage and the resurrection (20:27-40)
5. Jesus asks a challenging question about the Messiah (20:41-44)
6. Jesus warns about the scribes (20:45-47)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in [20:17](../20/17.md) and [20:42-43](../20/42.md), which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Questions that seem to have no good answer

In [20:4](../20/04.md), Jesus asks the Pharisees a question that seems to have no good answer. His goal is to show them that they should have recognized John the Baptist as someone who came with God’s authority. So he asks them who gave John the authority to baptize. They could not answer, because any answer they gave would show that they should have respected John [20:5-6](../20/05.md).

In [20:22](../20/22.md), the Pharisees ask Jesus a question that seems to have no good answer. They thought that they would get Jesus in trouble either with the Roman government or the Jewish people when they asked him if people should pay taxes to Caesar. If he said “yes,” then the Jewish people would be angry with him for telling them to pay taxes to a foreign government. If he said “no,” then the religious leaders could tell the Romans that Jesus was teaching the people to break the Roman laws. But Jesus gave them an answer they had not anticipated, and instead everyone respected the wisdom of Jesus even more.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. In this chapter, Jesus quotes a psalm that records David calling his son “lord,” that is, “master.” However, to the Jews, ancestors were greater than their descendants, so a father would not call his son “master.” In this passage, [Luke 20:41-44](../20/41.md), Jesus is trying to lead his hearers to the true understanding that the Messiah will be divine, and that he himself is the Messiah. So David is speaking to his son, that is, his descendant, as the Messiah, and it is appropriate for him to address him as his “Lord.” LUK 20 1 h8gv writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 20 1 vtg4 figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed to enter the **temple** building, so Luke means that Jesus was teaching in the temple courtyard. Luke is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -3448,7 +3448,7 @@ LUK 20 5 m4l7 figs-euphemism ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 1 from heaven See how you tr LUK 20 6 m355 figs-hypo ἐὰν δὲ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ὁ λαὸς ἅπας καταλιθάσει ἡμᾶς 1 But if we should say, ‘From men,’ the whole people will stone us The Jewish leaders are describing another hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “But suppose we say, ‘From men.’ Then all the people will stone us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 20 6 e9ps figs-quotesinquotes ἐὰν δὲ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ὁ λαὸς ἅπας καταλιθάσει ἡμᾶς 1 But if we should say, ‘From men,’ the whole people will stone us If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But if we say that John’s authority came from people, then all the people will stone us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 20 6 m356 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 men See how you translated **men** in [20:4](../20/04.md). Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -LUK 20 6 m357 figs-hyperbole ὁ λαὸς ἅπας 1 the whole people For emphasis, the Jewish leaders speak figuratively as if every single person in the Jewish nation believed that John was God’s prophet and would stone them if they said otherwise. Alternate translation: “many of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +LUK 20 6 m357 figs-hyperbole ὁ λαὸς ἅπας 1 the whole people For emphasis, the Jewish leaders speak as if every single person in the Jewish nation believed that John was God’s prophet and would stone them if they said otherwise. Alternate translation: “many of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 20 6 m358 figs-idiom ὁ λαὸς 1 the … people This was a customary way of speaking of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “the … Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 20 6 nns5 figs-explicit καταλιθάσει ἡμᾶς 1 stone us The implication is that the people would do this as a punishment for blasphemy, for saying that one of God’s prophets had only human authority. Alternate translation: “kill us by throwing stones at us, as punishment for blasphemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 20 6 m359 figs-activepassive πεπεισμένος…ἐστιν 1 it is persuaded If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. If you translated **the … people** as “the Jewish people,” this would be plural. Alternate translation: “they firmly believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -3464,13 +3464,13 @@ LUK 20 10 wm51 figs-explicit καιρῷ 1 at the time If it would be helpful to LUK 20 10 m361 γεωργοὺς…γεωργοὶ 1 farmers … farmers See how you translated **farmers** in [20:9](../20/09.md). Alternate translation: “vine growers” or “grape farmers” LUK 20 10 kr7j figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τοῦ καρποῦ τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος 1 of the fruit of the vineyard The word **fruit** could be: (1) intended literally. Alternate translation: “some of the grapes they had grown” (2) figurative. Alternate translation: “some of what they had produced from the grapes they had grown” or “some of the money they had earned by selling their produce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 10 m362 figs-explicit οἱ…γεωργοὶ ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν, δείραντες κενόν 1 the farmers sent him away, having beaten him, empty It may be helpful to state explicitly that the farmers did this after the servant arrived, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 20 10 isk1 figs-metaphor ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν…κενόν 1 sent him away empty Jesus speaks figuratively of this servant as if he were a container with nothing in it. Alternate translation: “sent him away without giving him anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 10 isk1 figs-metaphor ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν…κενόν 1 sent him away empty Jesus speaks of this servant as if he were a container with nothing in it. Alternate translation: “sent him away without giving him anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 11 r72a ἀτιμάσαντες 1 treated him shamefully Alternate translation: “humiliated him” LUK 20 11 vxh2 figs-metaphor ἐξαπέστειλαν κενόν 1 sent him away empty See how you translated this phrase in [20:10](../20/10.md). Alternate translation: “sent him away without giving him anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 12 m363 figs-nominaladj τρίτον 1 a third Jesus is using the adjective **third** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “a third servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 20 12 lr3h translate-ordinal τρίτον 1 a third If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “servant number three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) LUK 20 12 ub4g οἱ…καὶ τοῦτον τραυματίσαντες 1 they also wounded that one Alternate translation: “they injured that servant as well” -LUK 20 12 h32a figs-metaphor ἐξέβαλον 1 threw him out Jesus is likely speaking figuratively when he says that the farmers **threw** this servant out of the vineyard. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “chased him off the property” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 12 h32a figs-metaphor ἐξέβαλον 1 threw him out Jesus is likely speaking when he says that the farmers **threw** this servant out of the vineyard. It is unlikely that they actually picked him up and heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “chased him off the property” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 13 m364 ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος 1 the lord of the vineyard Alternate translation: “the owner of the vineyard” or “the man who had planted the vineyard” LUK 20 13 kt8i figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν…τί ποιήσω? πέμψω τὸν υἱόν μου τὸν ἀγαπητόν; ἴσως τοῦτον ἐντραπήσονται 1 said, ‘What should I do? I will send my beloved son. Perhaps they will respect him.’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “asked himself what he should do. He decided to send his beloved son, hoping that the farmers would respect him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 20 13 m365 ἴσως τοῦτον ἐντραπήσονται 1 Perhaps they will respect him In this context, the term that ULT translates as **perhaps** indicates something that is not certain but should be expected. If your language has a word or phrase that indicates the same thing, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “They ought to respect him” @@ -3479,7 +3479,7 @@ LUK 20 14 m366 οἱ γεωργοὶ 1 the farmers See how you translated **far LUK 20 14 rvi4 figs-quotesinquotes λέγοντες, οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ κληρονόμος; ἀποκτείνωμεν αὐτόν, ἵνα ἡμῶν γένηται ἡ κληρονομία 1 saying, ‘This is the heir. Let us kill him so that the inheritance may become ours’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that the son was the owner’s heir, and that they should kill him in order to get for themselves the vineyard he would have inherited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 20 14 m367 figs-metonymy ἡ κληρονομία 1 the inheritance By **inheritance**, the farmers mean the vineyard, which the son would inherit. Alternate translation: “this vineyard, which he is going to inherit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 20 15 u7us grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Jesus uses this word to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. The farmers carried out the plan they had decided on. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -LUK 20 15 m6en figs-metaphor ἐκβαλόντες αὐτὸν ἔξω τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος 1 they threw him out of the vineyard As in [20:12](../20/12.md), Jesus is likely speaking figuratively when he says that the farmers **threw** the son out of the vineyard, as if they heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “the vine growers forced the son out of the vineyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 15 m6en figs-metaphor ἐκβαλόντες αὐτὸν ἔξω τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος 1 they threw him out of the vineyard As in [20:12](../20/12.md), Jesus is likely speaking when he says that the farmers **threw** the son out of the vineyard, as if they heaved him through the air. Alternate translation: “the vine growers forced the son out of the vineyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 15 dlu4 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ποιήσει αὐτοῖς ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος? 1 What then will the lord of the vineyard do to them? Jesus does not want the people to tell him what the owner of the vineyard will do. Rather, he is using the question form to get his listeners to pay attention to what he says the owner will do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “So now, listen to what the lord of the vineyard will do to them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 20 15 m368 ὁ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος 1 the lord of the vineyard Alternate translation: “the owner of the vineyard” or “the man who had planted the vineyard” LUK 20 16 m369 τοὺς γεωργοὺς τούτους 1 these farmers See how you translated the term **farmers** in [20:9](../20/09.md). Your language might say “those” instead of **these** in a context like this. Alternate translation: “those vine growers” or “those grape farmers” @@ -3489,47 +3489,47 @@ LUK 20 17 qtb7 translate-symaction ὁ δὲ ἐμβλέψας αὐτοῖς ε LUK 20 17 m371 figs-quotesinquotes τί οὖν ἐστιν τὸ γεγραμμένον τοῦτο, λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 What then is this that is written: ‘The stone that the builders rejected, this has become the head of the corner’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “What then does Scripture mean when it says that the stone that the builders rejected became the cornerstone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 20 17 rf5f figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν τὸ γεγραμμένον τοῦτο 1 What then is this that is written Jesus does not expect the people to explain the meaning of the scripture he is quoting. Rather, he is using the question form to get them to consider its implications carefully. Alternate translation: “Think carefully about what this scripture is saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 20 17 l6l3 figs-activepassive τὸ γεγραμμένον τοῦτο 1 this that is written If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this passive verbal form with a noun. Alternate translation: “this scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 20 17 a5kc figs-metaphor λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 The stone that the builders rejected, this has become the head of the corner This is a quotation from Psalm 118, and it is a metaphor. It refers to the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means figuratively that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 17 a5kc figs-metaphor λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 The stone that the builders rejected, this has become the head of the corner This is a quotation from Psalm 118, and it is a metaphor. It refers to the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 17 bd2f figs-explicit λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες 1 The stone that the builders rejected The psalm refers implicitly to the way people in this culture used stones to build the walls of houses and other buildings. Alternate translation: “The stone that the builders thought was not good enough to use for building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 20 17 bh2r figs-idiom κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the head of the corner The phrase **the head of the corner** is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 20 18 d7n2 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ πεσὼν ἐπ’ ἐκεῖνον τὸν λίθον, συνθλασθήσεται 1 Everyone who falls on that stone will be broken to pieces Jesus is applying the metaphor from the psalm to himself. He is speaking figuratively of people who reject him as Messiah as if they would fall over a stone and be injured. Jesus’ words are a direct allusion to the figurative language of Scripture, and he does not explain the metaphor to the people who are listening. So it would not be appropriate to change them into a non-figurative explanation of the metaphor, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 18 d7n2 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ πεσὼν ἐπ’ ἐκεῖνον τὸν λίθον, συνθλασθήσεται 1 Everyone who falls on that stone will be broken to pieces Jesus is applying the metaphor from the psalm to himself. He is speaking of people who reject him as Messiah as if they would fall over a stone and be injured. Jesus’ words are a direct allusion to the figurative language of Scripture, and he does not explain the metaphor to the people who are listening. So it would not be appropriate to change them into a non-figurative explanation of the metaphor, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 18 n3n5 figs-activepassive συνθλασθήσεται 1 will be broken to pieces If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “will break up into pieces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 20 18 fdu6 figs-metaphor ἐφ’ ὃν δ’ ἂν πέσῃ, λικμήσει αὐτόν 1 and on whomever it may fall, it will crush him Jesus is making a further application of the metaphor from the psalm to himself. He is speaking figuratively of the Messiah judging those who reject him as if he were a large stone that would crush them. Once again it would not be appropriate to change Jesus’ words, which allude directly to the figurative language of Scripture, into a non-figurative explanation of the metaphor. However, you could explain the meaning of the metaphor in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 20 19 vbf7 figs-metonymy ἐζήτησαν…ἐπιβαλεῖν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 sought to lay hands on him The expression **to lay hands on** means figuratively to arrest a person by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of the person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “looked for a way to arrest Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 20 19 u4tz figs-idiom ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 in that hour Here Luke uses the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “right at that time” or “immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 20 18 fdu6 figs-metaphor ἐφ’ ὃν δ’ ἂν πέσῃ, λικμήσει αὐτόν 1 and on whomever it may fall, it will crush him Jesus is making a further application of the metaphor from the psalm to himself. He is speaking of the Messiah judging those who reject him as if he were a large stone that would crush them. Once again it would not be appropriate to change Jesus’ words, which allude directly to the figurative language of Scripture, into a non-figurative explanation of the metaphor. However, you could explain the meaning of the metaphor in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 19 vbf7 figs-metonymy ἐζήτησαν…ἐπιβαλεῖν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 sought to lay hands on him The expression **to lay hands on** means to arrest a person by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of the person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “looked for a way to arrest Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 20 19 u4tz figs-idiom ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 in that hour Here Luke uses the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “right at that time” or “immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 20 19 m372 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν λαόν 1 and they feared the people Luke uses the word **and** to introduce a contrast between what the Jewish leaders wanted to do and this reason why they were not able to do. Alternate translation: “but they were afraid of what the people might do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) LUK 20 19 u4ta figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν λαόν 1 they feared the people If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly that the religious leaders did not arrest Jesus, even though they wanted to, and why they did not. Alternate translation: “but they knew that the people respected Jesus and they were afraid of what the people might do if they did arrest him, so they did not arrest him right then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 20 19 m373 grammar-connect-logic-result ἔγνωσαν γὰρ ὅτι πρὸς αὐτοὺς εἶπεν τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην 1 for they knew that he had spoken this parable against them If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this the first clause in the verse, since it gives the reason why the religious leaders wanted to arrest Jesus. That is what UST does, making the clause a separate sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 20 20 m374 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. The religious leaders could not arrest Jesus openly, so this is what they did instead. Alternate translation: “So” or “Instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 20 20 f1en writing-participants ἀπέστειλαν ἐνκαθέτους 1 they sent spies Luke uses this statement to introduce these **spies** as new characters into the story. It may be helpful to say more about where they came from. Alternate translation: “they found some people who agreed to act as spies, and they sent them to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 20 20 m375 ὑποκρινομένους ἑαυτοὺς δικαίους εἶναι 1 who pretended themselves to be righteous Alternate translation: “who pretended that they were sincere” -LUK 20 20 ml5w figs-metaphor ἵνα ἐπιλάβωνται αὐτοῦ λόγου 1 that they might take hold of his word Luke says figuratively that these religious leaders wanted to **take hold** of something Jesus said, as if they could physically grasp his words. Alternate translation: “because they wanted to use something he might say against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 20 20 m376 figs-metonymy αὐτοῦ λόγου 1 his word Luke uses the term **word** figuratively to mean something Jesus might say by using words. Alternate translation: “of something he might say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 20 20 ml5w figs-metaphor ἵνα ἐπιλάβωνται αὐτοῦ λόγου 1 that they might take hold of his word Luke says that these religious leaders wanted to **take hold** of something Jesus said, as if they could physically grasp his words. Alternate translation: “because they wanted to use something he might say against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 20 m376 figs-metonymy αὐτοῦ λόγου 1 his word Luke uses the term **word** to mean something Jesus might say by using words. Alternate translation: “of something he might say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 20 20 r84a figs-doublet ὥστε παραδοῦναι αὐτὸν τῇ ἀρχῇ καὶ τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος 1 in order to deliver him to the rule and to the authority of the governor The terms **rule** and **authority** mean basically the same thing. Luke is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these terms into a single, equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “so that the governor would take Jesus into custody” or “so that the governor would arrest Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) LUK 20 21 xn1w figs-explicit ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν 1 they asked him It may be helpful to state explicitly that this happened after the spies whom the leaders sent arrived where Jesus was. Alternate translation: “the spies came and asked Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 20 21 i3fr figs-synecdoche ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν 1 they asked him Luke could mean that one spy spoke on behalf of the whole group. So instead of **they**, you could state “one of them,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 20 21 m377 Διδάσκαλε 1 Teacher **Teacher** is a respectful title. You could translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use. LUK 20 21 v93z figs-exclusive οἴδαμεν 1 we know The spies are speaking only of themselves, so **we** would be exclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -LUK 20 21 fi1t figs-metonymy οὐ λαμβάνεις πρόσωπον 1 you do not receive a face The spies are using the term **face** figuratively to mean “person.” Alternate translation: “it does not matter to you who a person is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 20 21 ubu9 figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the way of God The spies speak figuratively of how God wants people to live as if it were a **way** or path that people should follow. Alternate translation: “how God wants people to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 21 fi1t figs-metonymy οὐ λαμβάνεις πρόσωπον 1 you do not receive a face The spies are using the term **face** to mean “person.” Alternate translation: “it does not matter to you who a person is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 20 21 ubu9 figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the way of God The spies speak of how God wants people to live as if it were a **way** or path that people should follow. Alternate translation: “how God wants people to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 22 j6wb figs-explicit ἔξεστιν 1 Is it lawful The spies are asking about God’s law, not the law of the Roman government. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Does God’s law permit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 20 22 m378 φόρον δοῦναι 1 to give tribute Alternate translation: “to pay taxes” -LUK 20 22 h4cc figs-metonymy Καίσαρι 1 to Caesar The spies are referring figuratively to the Roman government by Caesar’s name, since he was its ruler. Alternate translation: “to the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 20 22 h4cc figs-metonymy Καίσαρι 1 to Caesar The spies are referring to the Roman government by Caesar’s name, since he was its ruler. Alternate translation: “to the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 20 23 z9dm κατανοήσας δὲ αὐτῶν τὴν πανουργίαν, εἶπεν 1 but perceiving their craftiness, he said Alternate translation: “But Jesus realized that these spies were trying to trick him, and so he said” LUK 20 24 j21y translate-bmoney δηνάριον 1 a denarius See how you translated this term in [7:41](../07/41.md). Alternate translation: “a Roman coin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) LUK 20 24 cvs9 figs-rquestion τίνος ἔχει εἰκόνα καὶ ἐπιγραφήν? 1 Whose image and inscription does it have? This is not a rhetorical question, since Jesus does want the spies to answer, even though he already knows the answer to the question himself and he is using it as a teaching tool. So it would not be appropriate to translate this as if it were a statement or an exclamation, for example, “Surely you could see whose picture and name are on this coin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -LUK 20 24 wt51 figs-metonymy ἐπιγραφήν 1 inscription Jesus is referring figuratively to the name on the coin by association with the fact that it is an **inscription**, that is, something written on the coin. Alternate translation: “name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 20 25 rey9 figs-metonymy ἀπόδοτε τὰ Καίσαρος Καίσαρι, καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ Θεῷ 1 give back the things of Caesar to Caesar, and the things of God to God Jesus is referring figuratively to the Roman government by the name of **Caesar**, its ruler. Alternate translation: “pay the Roman government what it deserves, and pay God what he deserves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 20 24 wt51 figs-metonymy ἐπιγραφήν 1 inscription Jesus is referring to the name on the coin by association with the fact that it is an **inscription**, that is, something written on the coin. Alternate translation: “name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 20 25 rey9 figs-metonymy ἀπόδοτε τὰ Καίσαρος Καίσαρι, καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ Θεῷ 1 give back the things of Caesar to Caesar, and the things of God to God Jesus is referring to the Roman government by the name of **Caesar**, its ruler. Alternate translation: “pay the Roman government what it deserves, and pay God what he deserves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 20 25 gj71 figs-ellipsis καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῷ Θεῷ 1 and the things of God to God Jesus is speaking compactly and he does not repeat the verb **give back**, but it may be supplied from the previous phrase. AT: “and pay God what he deserves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -LUK 20 26 wa3s figs-metaphor οὐκ ἴσχυσαν ἐπιλαβέσθαι τοῦ ῥήματος 1 they were not able to take hold of his word Luke says figuratively that the spies had wanted to **take hold** of something Jesus said, as if they could physically grasp his words. Alternate translation: “the spies were not able to use what he said against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 20 26 m379 figs-metaphor ἐναντίον τοῦ λαοῦ 1 in front of the people Luke speaks of this spatially to refer figuratively to the people’s attention. Alternate translation: “while the people were watching” or “while the people were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 26 wa3s figs-metaphor οὐκ ἴσχυσαν ἐπιλαβέσθαι τοῦ ῥήματος 1 they were not able to take hold of his word Luke says that the spies had wanted to **take hold** of something Jesus said, as if they could physically grasp his words. Alternate translation: “the spies were not able to use what he said against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 26 m379 figs-metaphor ἐναντίον τοῦ λαοῦ 1 in front of the people Luke speaks of this spatially to refer to the people’s attention. Alternate translation: “while the people were watching” or “while the people were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 27 m380 writing-participants προσελθόντες δέ τινες τῶν Σαδδουκαίων 1 Then some of the Sadducces came Luke uses this statement to introduce these new characters into the story. It may be helpful to introduce them more fully in your translation. Alternate translation: “Some members of the group of Jews called the Sadducees then came to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 20 27 m381 figs-explicit προσελθόντες δέ τινες τῶν Σαδδουκαίων 1 Then some of the Sadducces came The implication is that these people also wanted to discredit Jesus. Alternate translation: “Because they too wanted to discredit Jesus, some members of the group of Jews called the Sadducees then came to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 20 27 m382 translate-names τῶν Σαδδουκαίων 1 the Sadducees **Sadducees** is the name of a group of Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 20 27 f9e3 figs-distinguish οἱ, λέγοντες ἀνάστασιν μὴ εἶναι 1 the ones who say there is no resurrection This phrase is identifying the Sadducees as a group of Jews that said no one would rise from the dead. It is not identifying the Sadducees who came to question Jesus as members of that group who held that belief, as if other members did not. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could begin a new sentence here to clarify this. Alternate translation: “The Sadducees believe that no one will rise from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) LUK 20 28 m383 figs-synecdoche λέγοντες 1 saying Luke could mean that one Sadducee spoke on behalf of the whole group, and you could indicate that as UST does. If you decide to do that, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “One of them said to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 20 28 m384 Διδάσκαλε 1 Teacher **Teacher** is a respectful title. You can translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use. -LUK 20 28 m385 figs-metonymy Μωϋσῆς ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν 1 Moses wrote for us These Sadducees are figuratively describing Moses giving this instruction in the law by association with the way that he **wrote** it down. Alternate translation: “Moses instructed us in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 20 28 m385 figs-metonymy Μωϋσῆς ἔγραψεν ἡμῖν 1 Moses wrote for us These Sadducees are describing Moses giving this instruction in the law by association with the way that he **wrote** it down. Alternate translation: “Moses instructed us in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 20 28 m386 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 us Here, the word **us** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. The Sadducces mean “us Jews,” and they are speaking to Jesus, who is also a Jew. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) LUK 20 28 d6yl figs-hypo ἐάν τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποθάνῃ ἔχων γυναῖκα, καὶ οὗτος ἄτεκνος ᾖ, ἵνα 1 if the brother of anyone should die, having a wife, and he is childless, that Alternate translation: “if a man’s brother dies who is married but who does not have children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 20 28 sjt5 λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα 1 his brother should take his wife Alternate translation: “that man should marry his dead brother’s widow” @@ -3566,7 +3566,7 @@ LUK 20 35 rh62 figs-idiom οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε γαμίζοντ LUK 20 36 lk28 figs-explicit οὐδὲ…ἀποθανεῖν ἔτι δύνανται 1 neither are they able to die anymore The implication is that these people will not need to get married and have children anymore in order to carry on the human race, because they will not die. Alternate translation: “they will not need to have children anymore, since they will not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 20 36 m402 figs-explicit ἰσάγγελοι γάρ εἰσιν 1 for they are like the angels Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that angels do not die. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they will be like the angels, who do not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 20 36 m403 figs-gendernotations υἱοί εἰσιν Θεοῦ 1 they are sons of God Here Jesus is using the term **sons** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “they are God’s own children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -LUK 20 36 btb3 figs-idiom τῆς ἀναστάσεως υἱοὶ ὄντες 1 being sons of the resurrection Jesus is using the term **sons** in this second case idiomatically to mean people who share the qualities of something. In this case, Jesus is describing people who share the quality of God bringing them back to life after they have died. Alternate translation: “since God has brought them back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 20 36 btb3 figs-idiom τῆς ἀναστάσεως υἱοὶ ὄντες 1 being sons of the resurrection Jesus is using the term **sons** in this second case to mean people who share the qualities of something. In this case, Jesus is describing people who share the quality of God bringing them back to life after they have died. Alternate translation: “since God has brought them back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 20 37 j8z5 figs-activepassive ἐγείρονται οἱ νεκροὶ 1 the dead are raised If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who does the action. Alternate translation: “God brings back to life people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 20 37 m404 figs-nominaladj οἱ νεκροὶ 1 the dead Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 20 37 g3xg καὶ Μωϋσῆς 1 even Moses Jesus is using the word **even** for emphasis. He is stressing the authority of Moses as someone to whom God gave an extensive revelation of his character and actions. Alternate translation: “Moses himself” @@ -3590,7 +3590,7 @@ LUK 20 40 i6sv writing-pronouns οὐκέτι…ἐτόλμων 1 they no longer LUK 20 41 t981 writing-pronouns εἶπεν…πρὸς αὐτούς 1 he said to them As in [20:40](../20/40.md), it is unclear to whom the pronoun **them** refers. It may be best to translate it with a general statement here as well. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to those who were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 20 41 mda6 figs-rquestion πῶς λέγουσιν τὸν Χριστὸν εἶναι Δαυεὶδ Υἱόν? 1 How do they say that the Christ is the son of David? This does not seem to be a rhetorical question that Jesus is using as a teaching tool. Rather, it seems to be a question that Jesus wanted his listeners to try to answer. They had asked him some difficult questions, and they had admitted that he answered them well. Now, in return, he is asking them a difficult question. None of them will be able to answer it, and this will demonstrate his wisdom even further. His question actually will teach something to those who are able to recognize its implications. But it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 20 41 sq2g writing-pronouns λέγουσιν 1 they say Here Jesus is using the pronoun **they** in an indefinite sense. He does not have specific individuals in mind. Alternate translation: “do people say that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 20 41 b7rb figs-metaphor Δαυεὶδ Υἱόν 1 the son of David Here Jesus is using the term **son** figuratively to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “a descendant of King David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 41 b7rb figs-metaphor Δαυεὶδ Υἱόν 1 the son of David Here Jesus is using the term **son** to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “a descendant of King David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 41 m412 translate-names Δαυεὶδ 1 David **David** is the name of a man, Israel’s most important king. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 20 42 y972 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς γὰρ Δαυεὶδ 1 For David himself Jesus uses the word **himself** here to emphasize to that it was **David**, the very person whom the scribes call the father of the Christ, who spoke the words in the quotation that follows. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person whom you call the father of the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) LUK 20 42 z0vc grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Jesus uses the word **For** to introduce the reason why he has asked this question. Alternate translation: “I ask this question because” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -3600,30 +3600,30 @@ LUK 20 42 e1i2 figs-euphemism εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μ LUK 20 42 m415 figs-nominaladj κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 Sit at my right In this quotation, Yahweh is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate his right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could state that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sit at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 20 42 pse3 translate-symaction κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 Sit at my right The seat at the right side of a ruler was a position of great honor and authority. By telling the Messiah to sit there, God was symbolically conferring honor and authority on him. Alternate translation: “Sit in the place of honor beside me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) LUK 20 43 m416 figs-quotesinquotes ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 until I make your enemies a footstool for your feet This is the continuation of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. If you decided in [20:42](../20/42.md) to have only one level of quotation, you could make the same adjustment here. Alternate translation: “until he made his enemies a footstool for his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 20 43 fl1h figs-metaphor ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 until I make your enemies a footstool for your feet The psalm speaks figuratively of the Messiah using his enemies as a **footstool** to mean that Yahweh would make those enemies stop resisting the Messiah and submit to him. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 43 fl1h figs-metaphor ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 until I make your enemies a footstool for your feet The psalm speaks of the Messiah using his enemies as a **footstool** to mean that Yahweh would make those enemies stop resisting the Messiah and submit to him. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 43 m418 figs-metaphor ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 a footstool for your feet If your readers would not know what a **footstool** is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “something on which you could rest your feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 44 m419 figs-quotesinquotes Δαυεὶδ οὖν, Κύριον, αὐτὸν καλεῖ 1 David therefore calls him ‘Lord’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David therefore calls the Messiah his Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 20 44 zk2h figs-explicit Δαυεὶδ οὖν, Κύριον, αὐτὸν καλεῖ 1 David therefore calls him ‘Lord’ In this culture, an ancestor was more respected than a descendant. But to call someone **Lord** was to address that person as the more respected one. As the General Notes to this chapter describe, this is a paradox, that is, is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus is calling attention to this paradox to get his listeners to think more deeply about who the Messiah is. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what makes this a paradox. Alternate translation: “David therefore addresses the Messiah respectfully as his Lord. But if the Messiah is his descendant, David should be the more respected person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 20 44 k1tp figs-rquestion καὶ πῶς υἱός αὐτοῦ ἐστιν 1 And how is he his son Like the question in [20:41](../20/41.md), this seems to be a question that Jesus wanted his listeners to try to answer, even though he is also using it to teach. It is a difficult question, like the ones they asked him, which he answered well. They will not be able to answer his question, and this should give them a further appreciation for his wisdom, in addition to what they might learn from reflecting on the question later. So it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So why do people say that the Messiah is David’s descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 20 44 m427 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Jesus is using this word to show that a conclusion should be drawn as a result of what he has just said, and that this conclusion would be different from what his listeners had previously believed. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -LUK 20 44 m426 figs-metaphor υἱός 1 son Here Jesus is using the term **son** figuratively to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 44 m426 figs-metaphor υἱός 1 son Here Jesus is using the term **son** to mean “descendant.” Alternate translation: “descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 45 k3pf grammar-connect-time-sequential δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to indicate that after asking his own difficult question to the people who had been trying to trap him, Jesus turned to speak to his disciples. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) LUK 20 45 m420 figs-hyperbole παντὸς τοῦ λαοῦ 1 all the people Luke is generalizing to refer to everyone who was present as Jesus was teaching. Alternate translation: “all the people who were there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 20 46 m421 figs-metonymy προσέχετε ἀπὸ τῶν γραμματέων 1 Beware of the scribes Jesus says **beware** to warn about the influence of these people. He is not saying that the scribes themselves are physically dangerous, but that it would be dangerous spiritually to follow their example. Alternate translation: “Be careful not to follow the example of the scribes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 20 46 ang2 translate-symaction θελόντων περιπατεῖν ἐν στολαῖς 1 who desire to walk in long robes In this culture, **long robes** were a symbol of wealth and status. To walk around in public in a long robe was to assert wealth and status. Alternate translation: “who like to walk around looking important in their long robes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) LUK 20 46 m422 figs-explicit φιλούντων ἀσπασμοὺς 1 love greetings The implication is that these would be respectful greetings, in which the scribes would be addressed by important titles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “love to be greeted respectfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 20 46 m423 figs-metaphor πρωτοκαθεδρίας…πρωτοκλισίας 1 the first seats … the first places As in [14:7](../14/07.md), **first** here figuratively means “best.” Alternate translation: “the best seats … the best places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 20 47 m424 figs-metonymy οἳ κατεσθίουσιν τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν 1 They devour the houses of widows Jesus speaks figuratively of the **houses** of widows to mean their wealth and possessions, which they would have in their houses. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 20 47 c7yv figs-metaphor οἳ κατεσθίουσιν τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν 1 They devour the houses of widows Jesus says figuratively that the scribes **devour** or eat up the possessions of widows to mean that they continually ask the widows for money until the widows have none left. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 46 m423 figs-metaphor πρωτοκαθεδρίας…πρωτοκλισίας 1 the first seats … the first places As in [14:7](../14/07.md), **first** here means “best.” Alternate translation: “the best seats … the best places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 20 47 m424 figs-metonymy οἳ κατεσθίουσιν τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν 1 They devour the houses of widows Jesus speaks of the **houses** of widows to mean their wealth and possessions, which they would have in their houses. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 20 47 c7yv figs-metaphor οἳ κατεσθίουσιν τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν 1 They devour the houses of widows Jesus says that the scribes **devour** or eat up the possessions of widows to mean that they continually ask the widows for money until the widows have none left. Alternate translation: “They defraud widows of everything they own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 20 47 g67x προφάσει μακρὰ προσεύχονται 1 for a pretext they pray at length Here, **pretext** refers to something that someone would do in order to appear a certain way. Alternate translation: “in order to seem godly, they offer long prayers” -LUK 20 47 zpp5 figs-metonymy οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 These will receive greater condemnation Jesus is using the word **condemnation** figuratively to mean the punishment that a person would receive after being condemned (found guilty) for doing something wrong. Alternate translation: “These scribes will receive greater punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 20 47 zpp5 figs-metonymy οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 These will receive greater condemnation Jesus is using the word **condemnation** to mean the punishment that a person would receive after being condemned (found guilty) for doing something wrong. Alternate translation: “These scribes will receive greater punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 20 47 zpx5 figs-explicit οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 These will receive greater condemnation The implication seems to be that these proud and greedy scribes will receive **greater** punishment than they would have if they had not pretended to be so godly. It is also implicit that God will be the one who punishes them. Alternate translation: “God will punish these scribes more severely because they do all these wrong things while pretending to be godly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 21 intro ny7d 0 # Luke 21 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about a widow who gave her little money to God (21:1-4)
2. Jesus tells his disciples what will happen before he returns (21:5-38)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “the times of the nations”

The Jews spoke of the time between when the Babylonians forced their ancestors to go to Babylon and the time when the Messiah would come as “the times of the nations.” In this expression, the term “nations” means people groups who are not Jews, that is, the Gentiles. So this expression meant the time when the Gentiles ruled over the Jews.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. There is a paradox in this chapter. Jesus tells his disciples in [21:16](../21/16.md), “they will put to death some of you,” but then, in [21:18](../21/18.md), he tells them, “not even a hair of your head will perish.” As a note to [21:18](../21/18.md) explains, Jesus means this second statement in a spiritual sense. LUK 21 1 k2zb writing-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 21 1 m425 writing-newevent εἶδεν τοὺς βάλλοντας εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον τὰ δῶρα αὐτῶν πλουσίους 1 he saw the rich who were putting their gifts into the treasury This background information that Luke provides introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “he noticed that there were some rich people who were placing gifts of money in the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 21 1 m428 figs-nominaladj τοὺς…πλουσίους 1 the rich Jesus is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “rich people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 21 1 nf4c figs-explicit τὰ δῶρα 1 gifts If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what the **gifts** were. Alternate translation: “gifts of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 21 1 unv2 figs-metonymy τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον 1 the treasury Luke is figuratively describing the boxes in the temple courtyard where people put money that they were giving to God by association with the name of the place where this money would be kept until it was needed, the **treasury**. Alternate translation: “the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 1 unv2 figs-metonymy τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον 1 the treasury Luke is describing the boxes in the temple courtyard where people put money that they were giving to God by association with the name of the place where this money would be kept until it was needed, the **treasury**. Alternate translation: “the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 2 xrk2 writing-participants εἶδεν δέ τινα χήραν πενιχρὰν 1 And he saw a certain poor widow Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “There was also a poor widow there, and Jesus saw her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 21 2 vzu8 translate-bmoney λεπτὰ δύο 1 two lepta The word **lepta** is the plural of “lepton.” A lepton was a small bronze or copper coin equivalent to a few minutes’ wages. It was the least valuable coin that people used in this culture. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or a general expression. Alternate translation: “two pennies” or “two small coins of little value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) LUK 21 3 i8gf figs-explicit εἶπεν 1 he said Jesus is still speaking to his disciples, as in [20:45](../20/45.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he said to his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -3636,7 +3636,7 @@ LUK 21 5 vgp3 figs-explicit τινων 1 some The implication is that these were LUK 21 5 m430 figs-activepassive κεκόσμηται 1 it was decorated If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people had decorated it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 21 5 vk7z figs-metonymy ἀναθέμασιν 1 offerings In this context, **offerings** refers specifically to golden ornaments that people had given to beautify the temple and its courtyards. The ornaments were known by this name since people had given them as offerings. Alternate translation: “ornaments that people had donated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 6 lcz6 ταῦτα ἃ θεωρεῖτε 1 These things that you are looking at Alternate translation: “As for this beautiful temple and its decorations” -LUK 21 6 wcd9 figs-idiom ἐλεύσονται ἡμέραι ἐν αἷς 1 the days will come in which Here Jesus is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “there will be a time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 21 6 wcd9 figs-idiom ἐλεύσονται ἡμέραι ἐν αἷς 1 the days will come in which Here Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “there will be a time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 21 6 jfl1 figs-activepassive οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται λίθος ἐπὶ λίθῳ 1 stone upon stone will not be left If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “your enemies will not leave one stone upon another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 21 6 ajx2 οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται λίθος ἐπὶ λίθῳ 1 stone upon stone will not be left If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this statement in positive form. Alternate translation: “your enemies will topple every stone off the stone it is resting on” LUK 21 6 dps1 figs-hyperbole οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται λίθος ἐπὶ λίθῳ 1 stone upon stone will not be left See how you translated the similar expression “they will not leave stone upon stone” in [19:44](../19/44.md). Here as well this is a figurative overstatement to emphasize how completely the enemies of the Jews will destroy the temple. Alternate translation: “your enemies will completely destroy this building of stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -3647,7 +3647,7 @@ LUK 21 7 m433 Διδάσκαλε 1 Teacher **Teacher** is a respectful title. Y LUK 21 7 a11j figs-explicit πότε οὖν ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα γίνεσθαι 1 when therefore will these things be, and what will be the sign when these things are about to happen The phrase **these things** refers implicitly to what Jesus has just said about enemies destroying the temple. Alternate translation: “then when will the temple be destroyed, and how will we know that our enemies are about to destroy it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 21 8 bbri figs-quotesinquotes βλέπετε μὴ πλανηθῆτε; πολλοὶ γὰρ ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου λέγοντες, ἐγώ εἰμι, καί, ὁ καιρὸς ἤγγικεν 1 Be careful that you are not deceived. For many will come in my name, saying, ‘I am {he},’ and, ‘The time has come near.’ If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Be careful that you are not deceived. For many will come in my name, saying that they are the Messiah. They will also say that the time has come near.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 21 8 vu18 figs-activepassive μὴ πλανηθῆτε 1 you are not deceived If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one deceives you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 21 8 f1ed figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 in my name Here Jesus uses the word **name** figuratively to mean identity. The people he is talking about will likely not say that their name is Jesus, but they will claim to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “claiming to be me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 8 f1ed figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 in my name Here Jesus uses the word **name** to mean identity. The people he is talking about will likely not say that their name is Jesus, but they will claim to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “claiming to be me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 8 h6zp figs-explicit ἐγώ εἰμι 1 I am he The implication is that **he** means the Messiah. Alternate translation: “I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 21 8 m434 figs-explicit ὁ καιρὸς ἤγγικεν 1 The time has come near This implicitly means the **time** when God will establish his kingdom, which these false Messiahs would understand to mean defeating their enemies. Alternate translation: “God is about to establish his kingdom” or “God is about to defeat all of our enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 21 8 sls1 figs-metaphor μὴ πορευθῆτε ὀπίσω αὐτῶν 1 Do not go after them Here the expression **go after** seems to have a figurative sense like that of the term **follow**, found in [5:27](../05/27.md) and several other places in the book, meaning to become someone’s disciple. Alternate translation: “Do not become their disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -3659,28 +3659,28 @@ LUK 21 9 jyh8 figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 the end This implicitly means the LUK 21 10 yj1i writing-pronouns τότε ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς 1 Then he said to them The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, and the word **them** refers to his disciples. Since this is a continuation of Jesus speaking from the previous verse, some languages may prefer to leave out this phrase, as UST does. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus said to his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 21 10 m436 figs-parallelism ἐγερθήσεται ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 Nation will rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Different groups of people will attack each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) LUK 21 10 ms79 figs-genericnoun ἐγερθήσεται ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος 1 Nation will rise against nation The word **nation** represents nations in general, not one particular nation. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -LUK 21 10 ax4w figs-metonymy ἐγερθήσεται ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος 1 Nation will rise against nation The term **nation** refers figuratively to the people of one nationality or ethnic group. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 10 ax4w figs-metonymy ἐγερθήσεται ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος 1 Nation will rise against nation The term **nation** refers to the people of one nationality or ethnic group. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 10 m437 figs-idiom ἐγερθήσεται ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος 1 Nation will rise against nation The expression **rise against** is an idiom that means to attack. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 21 10 e65b figs-ellipsis καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 and kingdom against kingdom Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 21 10 m438 figs-genericnoun βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 kingdom against kingdom The word **kingdom** represents kingdoms in general, not one particular kingdom. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -LUK 21 10 m439 figs-metonymy βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 kingdom against kingdom The term **kingdom** figuratively represents the people of a kingdom. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 10 m439 figs-metonymy βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 kingdom against kingdom The term **kingdom** represents the people of a kingdom. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 11 ib3l φόβηθρά 1 terrifying events Alternate translation: “events that terrify people” or “events that cause people to be very afraid” -LUK 21 11 m440 figs-metonymy σημεῖα ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ μεγάλα 1 great signs from heaven Here, the term **heaven** could mean: (1) based on what Jesus says in [21:25](../21/25.md) about signs in the sun, moon, and stars, it has the sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “great signs in the sky” (2) a way of referring to God figuratively by association, since heaven is the abode of God. Alternate translation: “great signs from God” or “great signs that God sends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 11 m440 figs-metonymy σημεῖα ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ μεγάλα 1 great signs from heaven Here, the term **heaven** could mean: (1) based on what Jesus says in [21:25](../21/25.md) about signs in the sun, moon, and stars, it has the sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “great signs in the sky” (2) a way of referring to God by association, since heaven is the abode of God. Alternate translation: “great signs from God” or “great signs that God sends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 12 unm4 figs-metonymy τούτων 1 these things This refers implicitly to the things that Jesus has said will happen. Alternate translation: “these things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 21 12 w5uz figs-metonymy ἐπιβαλοῦσιν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν 1 they will lay their hands on you This expression figuratively means to arrest a person by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of that person. Alternate translation: “they will arrest you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 12 w5uz figs-metonymy ἐπιβαλοῦσιν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν 1 they will lay their hands on you This expression means to arrest a person by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of that person. Alternate translation: “they will arrest you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 12 qd99 writing-pronouns ἐπιβαλοῦσιν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῶν 1 they will lay their hands on you The pronoun **they** refers to the government authorities, who will be led to arrest the followers of Jesus by their enemies, as Jesus explains in [21:16](../21/16.md). Alternate translation: “the authorities will arrest you” or “your enemies will get the authorities to arrest you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 21 12 w2i4 figs-metonymy παραδιδόντες εἰς τὰς συναγωγὰς 1 delivering you to the synagogues The term **synagogues** figuratively means the leaders of the synagogues, who had the authority to put Jews on trial. Alternate translation: “turning you over for trial to the leaders of the synagogues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 12 w2i4 figs-metonymy παραδιδόντες εἰς τὰς συναγωγὰς 1 delivering you to the synagogues The term **synagogues** means the leaders of the synagogues, who had the authority to put Jews on trial. Alternate translation: “turning you over for trial to the leaders of the synagogues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 12 xt6d figs-ellipsis τὰς συναγωγὰς καὶ φυλακάς, ἀπαγομένους ἐπὶ 1 the synagogues and prisons, bringing you before Jesus is speaking compactly here. Alternate translation: “the synagogue rulers, who will put you in prison and bring you before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -LUK 21 12 m441 figs-metonymy ἀπαγομένους ἐπὶ 1 bringing you before This expression figuratively means to turn someone over to an authority for trial, where the person would stand **before** the authority and answer the charges. Alternate translation: “turning you over for trial to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 21 12 cwq9 figs-metonymy ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀνόματός μου 1 for the sake of my name Here, **name** figuratively represents Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you are my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 12 m441 figs-metonymy ἀπαγομένους ἐπὶ 1 bringing you before This expression means to turn someone over to an authority for trial, where the person would stand **before** the authority and answer the charges. Alternate translation: “turning you over for trial to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 12 cwq9 figs-metonymy ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀνόματός μου 1 for the sake of my name Here, **name** represents Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you are my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 13 d98x ἀποβήσεται ὑμῖν εἰς μαρτύριον 1 It will turn out for you for a testimony Alternate translation: “This will give you an opportunity to speak about how you believe in me” LUK 21 14 q1s1 grammar-connect-logic-contrast οὖν 1 But **But** is usually translated “therefore” because it typically introduces a result or conclusion from something that has just been said. However, in some cases, including this one, the term instead indicates a contrast with what has just been said. Knowing they would be put on trial, Jesus’ disciples would naturally want to think about how to defend themselves, but Jesus is telling them, by contrast, not to do that. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -LUK 21 14 he8s figs-metaphor θέτε…ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 put in your hearts Jesus speaks figuratively of his disciples’ **hearts** as if they were containers in which the disciples could put the resolution he describes. Alternate translation: “make up your minds” or “decide firmly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 21 14 m442 figs-metaphor θέτε…ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 put in your hearts Jesus is using the disciples’ **hearts** figuratively to represent their minds. Alternate translation: “make up your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 21 14 he8s figs-metaphor θέτε…ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 put in your hearts Jesus speaks of his disciples’ **hearts** as if they were containers in which the disciples could put the resolution he describes. Alternate translation: “make up your minds” or “decide firmly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 21 14 m442 figs-metaphor θέτε…ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 put in your hearts Jesus is using the disciples’ **hearts** to represent their minds. Alternate translation: “make up your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 21 14 usf9 figs-explicit μὴ προμελετᾶν ἀπολογηθῆναι 1 not to prepare to be defended The implication is that Jesus’ disciples would be thinking about how to defend themselves against their enemies’ accusations. Alternate translation: “not to try to figure out ahead of time what you should say in order to defend yourself against the accusations of your enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 21 14 m443 figs-activepassive ἀπολογηθῆναι 1 to be defended If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “to defend yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 21 15 m788 translate-versebridge γὰρ 1 For Jesus is giving the reason why his disciples should do what he told them in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. You could combine [21:14](../21/14.md) and [21:15](../21/15.md), putting all of [21:15](../21/15.md) first, followed by all of [21:14](../21/14.md). You could begin [21:15](../21/15.md) with “Since” and have no introductory word for [21:14](../21/14.md), or you could have no introductory word for [21:15](../21/15.md) and begin [21:14](../21/14.md) with “So.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) -LUK 21 15 z6ua figs-metonymy στόμα καὶ σοφίαν 1 a mouth and wisdom Jesus is using the term **mouth** figuratively to refer to speech. Alternate translation: “speech and wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 15 z6ua figs-metonymy στόμα καὶ σοφίαν 1 a mouth and wisdom Jesus is using the term **mouth** to refer to speech. Alternate translation: “speech and wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 15 gm5t figs-hendiadys στόμα καὶ σοφίαν 1 a mouth and wisdom The phrase **a mouth and wisdom** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **wisdom** describes what kind of speech Jesus will give the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “wise things to say” or “wise responses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 21 15 d3zh figs-doublenegatives ᾗ οὐ δυνήσονται ἀντιστῆναι ἢ ἀντειπεῖν, πάντες οἱ ἀντικείμενοι ὑμῖν 1 that all the ones opposing you will not be able to resist or contradict If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the negative word **not** combined with the negative verbs **resist** and **contradict** as a single positive statement. (See note just below explaining that these two verbs likely form a doublet.) Alternate translation: “that all of your adversaries will have to agree are true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 21 15 m444 figs-doublet ἀντιστῆναι ἢ ἀντειπεῖν 1 to resist or contradict The terms **resist** and **contradict** mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these terms into a single, equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to deny” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -3689,12 +3689,12 @@ LUK 21 16 m445 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφῶν 1 brothers Here, the term * LUK 21 16 ue17 writing-pronouns θανατώσουσιν ἐξ ὑμῶν 1 they will put to death some of you The pronoun **they** could mean: (1) “the authorities will kill some of you.” (2) “those who turn you in will kill some of you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 21 17 m446 figs-activepassive ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων 1 you will be hated by all If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “everyone will hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 21 17 wbh8 figs-hyperbole ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων 1 you will be hated by all The term **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many people will hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -LUK 21 17 lm66 figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 because of my name Here, **name** figuratively represents Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you are my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 17 lm66 figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 because of my name Here, **name** represents Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you are my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 18 m447 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 And Jesus uses this word to introduce a contrast with what he has just said. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) LUK 21 18 m448 figs-doublenegatives θρὶξ ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς ὑμῶν, οὐ μὴ ἀπόληται 1 a hair of your head will not at all perish If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the negative words **not at all** combined with the negative verb **perish** as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “God will keep you entirely safe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 21 18 y7bi figs-synecdoche θρὶξ ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς ὑμῶν, οὐ μὴ ἀπόληται 1 a hair of your head will not at all perish Jesus speaks of one of the smallest parts of a person to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “God will keep you entirely safe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 21 18 m449 θρὶξ ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς ὑμῶν, οὐ μὴ ἀπόληται 1 a hair of your head will not at all perish If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate who will make sure that the disciples do not **perish**. Alternate translation: “God will keep you entirely safe” -LUK 21 18 m450 figs-metaphor θρὶξ ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς ὑμῶν, οὐ μὴ ἀπόληται 1 a hair of your head will not at all perish Since Jesus says in [21:16](../21/16.md) that some of them would be put to death, he must be speaking figuratively here. He means that his disciples will not perish spiritually; that is, their souls will be saved. Alternate translation: “God will keep you entirely safe spiritually” or “God will save your souls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 21 18 m450 figs-metaphor θρὶξ ἐκ τῆς κεφαλῆς ὑμῶν, οὐ μὴ ἀπόληται 1 a hair of your head will not at all perish Since Jesus says in [21:16](../21/16.md) that some of them would be put to death, he must be speaking here. He means that his disciples will not perish spiritually; that is, their souls will be saved. Alternate translation: “God will keep you entirely safe spiritually” or “God will save your souls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 21 19 g85h ἐν τῇ ὑπομονῇ ὑμῶν 1 By your endurance Alternate translation: “If you remain faithful to me” LUK 21 19 r5zc κτήσασθε τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν 1 you will gain your souls The **soul** means the eternal part of a person. Alternate translation: “you will receive eternal life” LUK 21 20 nqb6 figs-activepassive κυκλουμένην ὑπὸ στρατοπέδων Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Jerusalem surrounded by armies If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “armies surrounding Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -3705,31 +3705,31 @@ LUK 21 21 m453 figs-explicit εἰς τὰ ὄρη 1 to the mountains The implic LUK 21 21 ubh7 writing-pronouns ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῆς 1 in the midst of it Here the pronoun **it** means Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “within the city of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 21 21 m454 figs-explicit οἱ ἐν ταῖς χώραις, μὴ εἰσερχέσθωσαν εἰς αὐτήν 1 let those in the fields not enter into it The term **fields** refers implicitly to the farms around Jerusalem that provided the main food supply for the city. Alternate translation: “the people living on the farms around the city should not seek shelter within its protective walls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 21 21 m455 οἱ ἐν ταῖς χώραις, μὴ εἰσερχέσθωσαν εἰς αὐτήν 1 let those in the fields not enter into it If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this positively. Alternate translation: “the people living on the farms around the city should stay outside of it where they will be safer” -LUK 21 22 vs2g figs-idiom ἡμέραι ἐκδικήσεως αὗταί εἰσιν 1 these are days of vengeance Jesus is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “this will be the time when God punishes this city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 21 22 vs2g figs-idiom ἡμέραι ἐκδικήσεως αὗταί εἰσιν 1 these are days of vengeance Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “this will be the time when God punishes this city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 21 22 m456 figs-abstractnouns ἡμέραι ἐκδικήσεως αὗταί εἰσιν 1 these are days of vengeance If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **vengeance** with a verb such as “punish.” Alternate translation: “this will be the time when God punishes this city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 21 22 eba2 figs-activepassive τοῦ πλησθῆναι πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα 1 to fulfill all the things that have been written If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “when all the things that the prophets wrote in the Scriptures will happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 21 22 m457 figs-hyperbole πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα 1 all the things that have been written Here, **all** has a limited meaning. It does not mean everything that the prophets wrote about every subject. Rather, it means specifically **all** that the prophets wrote about this particular event. Alternate translation: “that the prophets wrote in the Scriptures about how Jerusalem would be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 21 23 m458 figs-idiom ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσαις 1 the ones having in the womb This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “to women who are pregnant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 21 23 e1pj ταῖς θηλαζούσαις 1 the ones nursing This does not mean babies who are nursing. Alternate translation: “mothers who are nursing their babies” -LUK 21 23 m459 figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 in those days Jesus is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 21 23 m459 figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 in those days Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 21 23 m460 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Jesus uses this word to introduce the reason why it will be very difficult for pregnant women and nursing mothers at this time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the sentence that this word introduces first in the verse, since it gives the reason for the results that the other sentence in the verse describes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -LUK 21 23 m461 figs-parallelism ἔσται…ἀνάγκη μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ ὀργὴ τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ 1 there will be great distress upon the land and wrath to this people If the word **land** figuratively means the people who live in the land (see note below), then these two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus may be using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “God will angrily punish the people who live in this land by making them suffer greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +LUK 21 23 m461 figs-parallelism ἔσται…ἀνάγκη μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ ὀργὴ τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ 1 there will be great distress upon the land and wrath to this people If the word **land** means the people who live in the land (see note below), then these two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus may be using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “God will angrily punish the people who live in this land by making them suffer greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) LUK 21 23 mzp3 figs-metonymy ἔσται…ἀνάγκη μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 there will be great distress upon the land The term **land** could be: (1) a figurative reference to the people who live there. Alternate translation: “the people who live in this land will suffer greatly” (2) literal. Alternate translation: “there will be physical disasters in the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 23 m462 figs-abstractnouns ἔσται…ἀνάγκη μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 there will be great distress upon the land If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **distress** with a verb such as “suffer.” Alternate translation: “the people who live in this land will suffer greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LUK 21 23 iw4r figs-metonymy καὶ ὀργὴ τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ 1 and wrath to this people Jesus is using the word **wrath** figuratively to mean what God will do in his **wrath**. Alternate translation: “and God will angrily punish this people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 21 24 lmj8 figs-metonymy πεσοῦνται 1 they will fall Here, **fall** figuratively means to die by association with the way that people who die **fall** to the ground. Alternate translation: “they will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 23 iw4r figs-metonymy καὶ ὀργὴ τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ 1 and wrath to this people Jesus is using the word **wrath** to mean what God will do in his **wrath**. Alternate translation: “and God will angrily punish this people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 24 lmj8 figs-metonymy πεσοῦνται 1 they will fall Here, **fall** means to die by association with the way that people who die **fall** to the ground. Alternate translation: “they will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 24 m463 figs-metaphor στόματι μαχαίρης 1 by the mouth of the sword Here, the term **mouth** may be a figurative way of saying “edge” or “end,” by analogy to the way that the mouth of an animal is typically at one end of the animal. Alternate translation: “by the edge of the sword” or “when soldiers kill them with their swords” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 21 24 m464 figs-personification στόματι μαχαίρης 1 by the mouth of the sword This phrase could also be depicting the sword figuratively as a devouring monster. Alternate translation: “as if swords were eating them up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 21 24 m464 figs-personification στόματι μαχαίρης 1 by the mouth of the sword This phrase could also be depicting the sword as a devouring monster. Alternate translation: “as if swords were eating them up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 21 24 m465 figs-genericnoun μαχαίρης 1 the sword The word **sword** represents swords in general, not one particular sword. Alternate translation: “of the swords” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -LUK 21 24 m466 figs-synecdoche μαχαίρης 1 the sword Jesus may figuratively be using one kind of weapon, **the sword**, to represent all weapons. Alternate translation: “of the weapons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 21 24 m466 figs-synecdoche μαχαίρης 1 the sword Jesus may be using one kind of weapon, **the sword**, to represent all weapons. Alternate translation: “of the weapons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 21 24 cg3n figs-activepassive αἰχμαλωτισθήσονται εἰς τὰ ἔθνη πάντα 1 they will be led captive into all the nations If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “their enemies will capture them and take them away into other countries” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 21 24 zn4e figs-hyperbole εἰς τὰ ἔθνη πάντα 1 into all the nations The word **all** is a generalization that emphasizes that their enemies will take the people away to many other countries. Alternate translation: “into many other countries” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -LUK 21 24 m467 figs-metonymy ἐθνῶν 1 nations Jesus is using the term **nations** figuratively to mean the places where various people groups live. Alternate translation: “countries” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 21 24 d356 figs-metaphor Ἰερουσαλὴμ ἔσται πατουμένη ὑπὸ ἐθνῶν 1 Jerusalem will be trampled by the nations Jesus speaks figuratively of the Gentiles walking all over the city of Jerusalem. This image could be: (1) of people walking around on land that they own or control. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will occupy Jerusalem” (2) of walking over something to flatten it. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will completely destroy Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 21 24 m467 figs-metonymy ἐθνῶν 1 nations Jesus is using the term **nations** to mean the places where various people groups live. Alternate translation: “countries” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 24 d356 figs-metaphor Ἰερουσαλὴμ ἔσται πατουμένη ὑπὸ ἐθνῶν 1 Jerusalem will be trampled by the nations Jesus speaks of the Gentiles walking all over the city of Jerusalem. This image could be: (1) of people walking around on land that they own or control. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will occupy Jerusalem” (2) of walking over something to flatten it. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will completely destroy Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 21 24 m468 figs-metaphor Ἰερουσαλὴμ ἔσται πατουμένη ὑπὸ ἐθνῶν 1 Jerusalem will be trampled by the nations If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles will occupy Jerusalem” or “the Gentiles will completely destroy Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 21 24 m469 figs-explicit ἐθνῶν 2 the nations Jesus assumes that his listeners will know that by **the nations**, he means in this instance the people groups who are not Jews. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 21 24 na6l figs-activepassive ἄχρι οὗ πληρωθῶσιν καιροὶ ἐθνῶν 1 until the times of the nations are fulfilled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. (See the discussion of the meaning of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “until the time when the Gentiles rule the Jews is over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 21 25 bza4 figs-metonymy συνοχὴ ἐθνῶν 1 distress of nations As in [21:10](../21/10.md), the term **nations** here refers figuratively to the people of one nationality or ethnic group. Alternate translation: “the people of the nations will be distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 25 bza4 figs-metonymy συνοχὴ ἐθνῶν 1 distress of nations As in [21:10](../21/10.md), the term **nations** here refers to the people of one nationality or ethnic group. Alternate translation: “the people of the nations will be distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 25 sz1c figs-metaphor ἐν ἀπορίᾳ ἤχους θαλάσσης καὶ σάλου 1 in perplexity at the roaring and tossing of the sea These storms could be literal. Jesus may be saying that there will be larger and more frequent hurricanes at this time. However, they could also be figurative. Jesus may be using the image of being in a storm at sea to portray how the people will feel about what they are experiencing. You could represent this possible metaphor as a simile in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They will be as anxious as they would be in a great storm at sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 21 25 m470 figs-doublet ἤχους θαλάσσης καὶ σάλου 1 at the roaring and tossing of the sea Jesus may be using the words **roaring** and **tossing** together to depict a great storm in the ocean, whose waves would rise up high and make loud sounds. If you decide to retain the metaphor in your translation, you could translate these words with a single expression. Alternate translation: “about the great storms at sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) LUK 21 26 m471 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 men Here Jesus is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -3745,7 +3745,7 @@ LUK 21 27 wyj9 figs-explicit ἐρχόμενον ἐν νεφέλῃ 1 coming in LUK 21 27 acp6 figs-hendiadys μετὰ δυνάμεως καὶ δόξης πολλῆς 1 with power and much glory This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The term **glory** describes what kind of **power** Jesus will have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “with very glorious power” or “shining brightly because he is so powerful” or, if you decided to use the first person, “shining brightly because I am so powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 21 27 m477 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ δυνάμεως καὶ δόξης πολλῆς 1 with power and much glory If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **power** and **glory** with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “shining brightly because he is so powerful” or, if you decided to use the first person, “shining brightly because I am so powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 21 28 mv82 translate-symaction ἀνακύψατε καὶ ἐπάρατε τὰς κεφαλὰς ὑμῶν 1 stand up and lift up your heads Jesus tells his disciples to assume this posture rather than fearfully crouching down and looking down, to demonstrate their confidence that God is coming to deliver them. Alternate translation: “confidently stand up straight and hold your heads high” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -LUK 21 28 up9z figs-metonymy διότι ἐγγίζει ἡ ἀπολύτρωσις ὑμῶν 1 because your deliverance is coming near Jesus is speaking figuratively of God as if he himself were the deliverance that he is going to bring. Alternate translation: “because God will soon deliver you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 28 up9z figs-metonymy διότι ἐγγίζει ἡ ἀπολύτρωσις ὑμῶν 1 because your deliverance is coming near Jesus is speaking of God as if he himself were the deliverance that he is going to bring. Alternate translation: “because God will soon deliver you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 28 m478 figs-abstractnouns διότι ἐγγίζει ἡ ἀπολύτρωσις ὑμῶν 1 because your deliverance is coming near If it would be helpful in your language, you could represent the idea behind the abstract noun **deliverance** with a verb such as “deliver.” Alternate translation: “because God will soon deliver you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 21 29 h6a9 figs-parables καὶ εἶπεν παραβολὴν αὐτοῖς 1 And he spoke a parable to them Jesus now gives a brief illustration to teach something that is true in a way that is easy to understand and remember. Alternate translation: “Then he gave his disciples this illustration to help them understand what he had been saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) LUK 21 29 m479 figs-genericnoun τὴν συκῆν 1 the fig tree Jesus is speaking of these trees in general, not one particular **fig tree**. Alternate translation: “the fig trees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) @@ -3755,27 +3755,27 @@ LUK 21 30 yic5 ἤδη ἐγγὺς τὸ θέρος ἐστίν 1 the summer i LUK 21 31 y81z ταῦτα 1 these things Alternate translation: “the signs I have just described” LUK 21 31 t1ca figs-abstractnouns ἐγγύς ἐστιν ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the kingdom of God is near See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “God will soon begin to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 21 32 gsh9 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “I can assure you” -LUK 21 32 h921 figs-metonymy ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη 1 this generation Jesus uses the term **generation** figuratively to refer to the people who were born in a certain generation. This could mean: (1) “the people who are alive when these signs first start happening.” (2) “the people who are alive now.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 32 h921 figs-metonymy ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη 1 this generation Jesus uses the term **generation** to refer to the people who were born in a certain generation. This could mean: (1) “the people who are alive when these signs first start happening.” (2) “the people who are alive now.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 32 m3il οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ…ἕως ἂν 1 will certainly not pass away until If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “will still be alive when” LUK 21 32 lrs1 figs-euphemism οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ 1 will certainly not pass away Passing away is different verb tense than the ULT has)... Jesus is referring to death as passing away. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different polite way of referring to this, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “will certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) LUK 21 32 m481 πάντα 1 all Alternate translation: “all of these things” -LUK 21 33 t53u figs-merism ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ παρελεύσονται 1 The heaven and the earth will pass away Jesus is using **heaven** and **earth** together figuratively to describe all of creation. Here, the term **heaven** refers to the sky, not to the abode of God, which will not cease to exist. Alternate translation: “Everything that God originally created will someday cease to exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -LUK 21 33 c3yl figs-metonymy οἱ δὲ λόγοι μου οὐ μὴ παρελεύσονται 1 but my words will certainly not pass away Jesus is using the term **words** figuratively to refer to what he has just said. Alternate translation: “but everything that I have said will always continue to be true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 21 33 t53u figs-merism ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ παρελεύσονται 1 The heaven and the earth will pass away Jesus is using **heaven** and **earth** together to describe all of creation. Here, the term **heaven** refers to the sky, not to the abode of God, which will not cease to exist. Alternate translation: “Everything that God originally created will someday cease to exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +LUK 21 33 c3yl figs-metonymy οἱ δὲ λόγοι μου οὐ μὴ παρελεύσονται 1 but my words will certainly not pass away Jesus is using the term **words** to refer to what he has just said. Alternate translation: “but everything that I have said will always continue to be true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 21 33 kym8 οὐ μὴ παρελεύσονται 1 will certainly not pass away If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “will remain forever” or “will always be true” LUK 21 34 m482 figs-activepassive μήποτε βαρηθῶσιν ὑμῶν αἱ καρδίαι ἐν κρεπάλῃ, καὶ μέθῃ, καὶ μερίμναις βιωτικαῖς 1 so that your hearts may not be burdened with hangover and drunkenness and everyday worries If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that drunken hangovers and everyday worries do not dull your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 21 34 y2qk figs-metaphor μήποτε βαρηθῶσιν ὑμῶν αἱ καρδίαι ἐν κρεπάλῃ, καὶ μέθῃ, καὶ μερίμναις βιωτικαῖς 1 so that your hearts may not be burdened with hangover and drunkenness and everyday worries Jesus speaks figuratively of these things as if they would be a weight pressing down on the minds of his disciples. Alternate translation: “so that drunken hangovers and everyday worries do not dull your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 21 34 r69y figs-metaphor ὑμῶν αἱ καρδίαι 1 your hearts Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the mind. Alternate translation: “your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 21 34 y2qk figs-metaphor μήποτε βαρηθῶσιν ὑμῶν αἱ καρδίαι ἐν κρεπάλῃ, καὶ μέθῃ, καὶ μερίμναις βιωτικαῖς 1 so that your hearts may not be burdened with hangover and drunkenness and everyday worries Jesus speaks of these things as if they would be a weight pressing down on the minds of his disciples. Alternate translation: “so that drunken hangovers and everyday worries do not dull your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 21 34 r69y figs-metaphor ὑμῶν αἱ καρδίαι 1 your hearts Here, the **heart** represents the mind. Alternate translation: “your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 21 34 se3c figs-hendiadys κρεπάλῃ, καὶ μέθῃ 1 hangover and drunkenness This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The term **drunkenness** explains the source of the **hangover**. Alternate translation: “drunken hangovers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 21 34 unw9 μερίμναις βιωτικαῖς 1 everyday worries Alternate translation: “the cares of this life” -LUK 21 34 x8jh figs-personification ἐπιστῇ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς αἰφνίδιος ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνη 1 that sudden day will come upon you Jesus speaks figuratively of this **day** as if it could actively spring upon his disciples like a trap. (The traditional verse divisions put the phrase “like a trap” at the start of the next verse. A note will discuss it there.) This could mean one of two things, depending on whether **sudden** is understood as an adjective or with the sense of an adverb. Alternate translation: “that day you are not expecting will come upon you” or “that day will come upon you suddenly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 21 34 x8jh figs-personification ἐπιστῇ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς αἰφνίδιος ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνη 1 that sudden day will come upon you Jesus speaks of this **day** as if it could actively spring upon his disciples like a trap. (The traditional verse divisions put the phrase “like a trap” at the start of the next verse. A note will discuss it there.) This could mean one of two things, depending on whether **sudden** is understood as an adjective or with the sense of an adverb. Alternate translation: “that day you are not expecting will come upon you” or “that day will come upon you suddenly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 21 34 r486 figs-explicit καὶ ἐπιστῇ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς αἰφνίδιος ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνη 1 and that sudden day will come upon you The implication is that this is why Jesus is telling his disciples to pay attention to themselves. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for if you are not careful, that day you are not expecting will come upon you” or “for if you are not careful, that day will come upon you suddenly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 21 34 q6ph figs-explicit καὶ ἐπιστῇ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς αἰφνίδιος ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνη 1 and that sudden day will come upon you This implicitly means the day when Jesus will return. Alternate translation: “the day when I return, which you will not be expecting, will come upon you” or “the day when I return will come upon you suddenly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 21 35 m483 figs-simile ὡς παγίς 1 like a trap Jesus says figuratively that just as a **trap** closes on an animal when the animal is not expecting it, so he will return when people are not expecting it. Alternate translation: “as when a trap closes suddenly on an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +LUK 21 35 m483 figs-simile ὡς παγίς 1 like a trap Jesus says that just as a **trap** closes on an animal when the animal is not expecting it, so he will return when people are not expecting it. Alternate translation: “as when a trap closes suddenly on an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) LUK 21 35 qh1b ἐπεισελεύσεται…ἐπὶ πάντας 1 it will come upon all Alternate translation: “it will affect all the people” -LUK 21 35 m484 figs-metaphor τοὺς καθημένους 1 who are sitting Jesus speaks figuratively of **sitting** to mean “living.” Alternate translation: “who are living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 21 35 ry3f figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πρόσωπον πάσης τῆς γῆς 1 on the face of the whole earth Jesus speaks figuratively of the surface of the **earth** as if it were the outward part or **face** of a person. Alternate translation: “on the surface of the whole earth” or “all over the entire earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 21 35 m484 figs-metaphor τοὺς καθημένους 1 who are sitting Jesus speaks of **sitting** to mean “living.” Alternate translation: “who are living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 21 35 ry3f figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πρόσωπον πάσης τῆς γῆς 1 on the face of the whole earth Jesus speaks of the surface of the **earth** as if it were the outward part or **face** of a person. Alternate translation: “on the surface of the whole earth” or “all over the entire earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 21 36 auh8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But Jesus uses this word to introduce a contrast with what he has just said. Alternate translation: “Instead,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -LUK 21 36 m4l4 figs-hyperbole ἀγρυπνεῖτε…ἐν παντὶ καιρῷ 1 stay awake in every time The expression **in every time** means “all the time” or “always.” Jesus is using it figuratively, as a generalization. Alternate translation: “continue to watch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +LUK 21 36 m4l4 figs-hyperbole ἀγρυπνεῖτε…ἐν παντὶ καιρῷ 1 stay awake in every time The expression **in every time** means “all the time” or “always.” Jesus is using it, as a generalization. Alternate translation: “continue to watch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 21 36 m485 figs-metaphor ἀγρυπνεῖτε 1 stay awake Jesus is using this expression in a figurative sense. Alternate translation: “stay alert” or “watch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 21 36 m486 figs-explicit ἀγρυπνεῖτε 1 stay awake The implication is that Jesus is telling his disciples to do this so that they will not be surprised when he returns. Alternate translation: “watch for the signs of my coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 21 36 m487 figs-metaphor καὶ σταθῆναι ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 and to stand before the Son of Man Here, **before** means “in front of” or “in the presence of” another person. Alternate translation: “and to stand in the presence of the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -3789,8 +3789,8 @@ LUK 21 37 m491 translate-names τὸ ὄρος τὸ καλούμενον Ἐλ LUK 21 38 m492 figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ λαὸς 1 all the people The word **all** is a generalization that emphasizes how many people came to hear Jesus teach each morning. Alternate translation: “large numbers of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 21 38 bky8 figs-ellipsis ὤρθριζεν πρὸς αὐτὸν 1 were getting up early to him Here Luke is leaving out some words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “were getting up early to come to him” or “were coming to him starting early each morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 21 38 cbx2 figs-explicit ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ 1 to hear him The implication is that the people wanted to **hear** Jesus teach. Alternate translation: “to listen to him teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 21 38 m493 figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed to enter the **temple** building, so Luke figuratively means the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -LUK 22 intro y8nr 0 # Luke 22 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Judas Iscariot agrees to betray Jesus to his enemies (22:1-6)
2. Jesus shares the Passover meal with his disciples (22:7-38)
3. Jesus prays on the Mount of Olives and is arrested there (22:39-53)
4. Peter denies Jesus (22:54-62)
5. Soldiers mock Jesus and the Jewish leaders question him (22:63-71)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The meaning of the “body” and “blood” of Jesus

[22:14-20](../22/14.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. During this meal, Jesus said of the bread, “This is my body,” and of the wine, “This cup is the new covenant in my blood.” As Jesus instructed, Christian churches around the world re-enact this meal regularly, calling it “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion.” But they have different understandings of what Jesus meant by these sayings. Some churches believe that Jesus was speaking figuratively and that he meant that the bread and wine represented his body and blood. Other churches believe that he was speaking literally and that the actual body and blood of Jesus are really present in the bread and wine of this ceremony. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

### The new covenant

Some people think that Jesus established the new covenant during the supper. Others think he established it after he went up to heaven. Others think it will not be established until Jesus comes again. Your translation should say no more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “And an angel from heaven appeared to him … his sweat became like drops of blood falling on the ground”

Verses 43 and 44 of Luke 22 are not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible, and so they are likely not an original part of the Gospel of Luke. However, many scholars consider them to provide accurate accounts of real events in Jesus’ life that were preserved in oral or written traditions about him and copied into the book of Luke at an early stage. ULT and UST include these verses, but some other versions do not. If you decide to translate these verses, you should put them inside square brackets to indicate that they are probably not original to Luke’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK 21 38 m493 figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed to enter the **temple** building, so Luke means the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 22 intro y8nr 0 # Luke 22 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Judas Iscariot agrees to betray Jesus to his enemies (22:1-6)
2. Jesus shares the Passover meal with his disciples (22:7-38)
3. Jesus prays on the Mount of Olives and is arrested there (22:39-53)
4. Peter denies Jesus (22:54-62)
5. Soldiers mock Jesus and the Jewish leaders question him (22:63-71)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The meaning of the “body” and “blood” of Jesus

[22:14-20](../22/14.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. During this meal, Jesus said of the bread, “This is my body,” and of the wine, “This cup is the new covenant in my blood.” As Jesus instructed, Christian churches around the world re-enact this meal regularly, calling it “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion.” But they have different understandings of what Jesus meant by these sayings. Some churches believe that Jesus was speaking and that he meant that the bread and wine represented his body and blood. Other churches believe that he was speaking literally and that the actual body and blood of Jesus are really present in the bread and wine of this ceremony. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

### The new covenant

Some people think that Jesus established the new covenant during the supper. Others think he established it after he went up to heaven. Others think it will not be established until Jesus comes again. Your translation should say no more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “And an angel from heaven appeared to him … his sweat became like drops of blood falling on the ground”

Verses 43 and 44 of Luke 22 are not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible, and so they are likely not an original part of the Gospel of Luke. However, many scholars consider them to provide accurate accounts of real events in Jesus’ life that were preserved in oral or written traditions about him and copied into the book of Luke at an early stage. ULT and UST include these verses, but some other versions do not. If you decide to translate these verses, you should put them inside square brackets to indicate that they are probably not original to Luke’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 22 1 q8fa grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to begin relating a new event by introducing background information that will help readers understand what happens. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 22 1 jjy9 figs-explicit ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the Festival of Unleavened Bread During this festival the Jews did not eat bread that was made with yeast. You could translate this as either a description or as a name. Alternate translation: “the festival during which the Jews did not eat any bread that was made with yeast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 1 m494 figs-activepassive ἡ λεγομένη Πάσχα 1 which is called the Passover If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “which people call Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -3809,17 +3809,17 @@ LUK 22 3 m502 translate-names τῶν δώδεκα 1 the Twelve You may have dec LUK 22 4 qpi4 figs-explicit στρατηγοῖς 1 captains The temple had its own guards, and these were their commanding officers. Alternate translation: “captains of the temple guard” or “temple military officers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 4 s7qx writing-pronouns πῶς αὐτοῖς παραδῷ αὐτόν 1 how he might deliver him to them The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “how he could help them arrest Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 22 5 ir4p ἐχάρησαν 1 they rejoiced Alternate translation: “this made the chief priests and captains very glad” -LUK 22 5 usn7 figs-metonymy αὐτῷ ἀργύριον δοῦναι 1 to give him silver Luke is speaking figuratively of money by reference to the precious metal, **silver**, that gives it its value. Alternate translation: “to pay Judas money for doing this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 5 usn7 figs-metonymy αὐτῷ ἀργύριον δοῦναι 1 to give him silver Luke is speaking of money by reference to the precious metal, **silver**, that gives it its value. Alternate translation: “to pay Judas money for doing this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 6 r6xx τοῦ παραδοῦναι αὐτὸν 1 to deliver him Alternate translation: “to help the leaders arrest Jesus” LUK 22 6 bw75 ἄτερ ὄχλου 1 away from the crowd Alternate translation: “when there was no crowd around him” LUK 22 7 veh1 figs-explicit ἡ ἡμέρα τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the Day of Unleavened Bread This was the first day of the seven-day festival described in [22:1](../22/01.md). You could translate this as either a description or as a name, depending on what you did there. Alternate translation: “the first day of the Festival of Unleavened Bread” or “the day when the Jews removed all bread made with yeast from their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 22 7 rqi1 figs-metonymy ἔδει θύεσθαι τὸ Πάσχα 1 it was necessary to sacrifice the Passover Luke is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer figuratively to the lamb that the law of Moses told Jews to kill and eat for their celebration meal. Alternate translation: “people had to kill a lamb for their Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 7 rqi1 figs-metonymy ἔδει θύεσθαι τὸ Πάσχα 1 it was necessary to sacrifice the Passover Luke is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the lamb that the law of Moses told Jews to kill and eat for their celebration meal. Alternate translation: “people had to kill a lamb for their Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 8 abcs writing-pronouns ἀπέστειλεν 1 he sent The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 22 8 m503 translate-names Πέτρον…Ἰωάννην 1 Peter … John These are the names of two men. See how you translated these names in [6:14](../06/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 22 8 m504 figs-youdual πορευθέντες, ἑτοιμάσατε 1 Going, prepare Since Jesus is speaking to two men, **you** as implied in the participle and imperative verb would be in the dual, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) LUK 22 8 nkz4 figs-explicit πορευθέντες 1 Going The implication is that Jesus is sending Peter and John into the city of Jerusalem to do this. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Your language might translate this as an imperative. Alternate translation: “Go into the city of Jerusalem and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 8 e4ev figs-exclusive ἡμῖν…ἵνα φάγωμεν 1 us … that we may eat Peter and John would be part of the group that would eat the meal, so the terms **us** and **we** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -LUK 22 8 m505 figs-metonymy τὸ Πάσχα 1 the Passover Jesus is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer figuratively to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 8 m505 figs-metonymy τὸ Πάσχα 1 the Passover Jesus is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 9 j52e figs-exclusive θέλεις ἑτοιμάσωμεν 1 do you wish that we should prepare it Jesus was not part of the group that would prepare the meal, so the word **we** does not include Jesus and it would be exclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) LUK 22 9 s8yw figs-verbs ἑτοιμάσωμεν 1 that we should prepare it Peter and John are speaking as a group of two, so this verb would be in the dual form if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]]) LUK 22 10 um6z figs-youdual αὐτοῖς…ὑμῶν…ὑμῖν…ἀκολουθήσατε 1 them … you … you … follow Since Jesus is speaking to two men, the pronouns **them** and **you** and the implied **you** in the imperative verb would all be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. Otherwise, they would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) @@ -3828,29 +3828,29 @@ LUK 22 10 i45e συναντήσει ὑμῖν ἄνθρωπος, κεράμι LUK 22 10 a677 translate-unknown κεράμιον ὕδατος 1 a pitcher of water This means not a small serving **pitcher**, but a large earthen jug, which the man would likely be carrying on his shoulder. If your language has its own term for a large container that people use to transport water, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 22 11 khy9 figs-quotesinquotes ἐρεῖτε τῷ οἰκοδεσπότῃ τῆς οἰκίας, λέγει σοι ὁ διδάσκαλος, ποῦ ἐστιν τὸ κατάλυμα, ὅπου τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου φάγω? 1 say to the master of the house, ‘The Teacher says to you, “Where is the guest room where I may eat the Passover with my disciples?”’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “tell the owner of the house that the Teacher wants to know where the guest room is where he can eat the Passover meal with his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 22 11 iv6f ὁ διδάσκαλος 1 the Teacher **Teacher** is a respectful title for Jesus. You could translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use. -LUK 22 11 pq8q figs-metonymy τὸ Πάσχα 1 the Passover Jesus is telling Peter and John to use the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer figuratively to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 11 pq8q figs-metonymy τὸ Πάσχα 1 the Passover Jesus is telling Peter and John to use the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 12 lpw6 κἀκεῖνος 1 and that one Alternate translation: “And the owner of the house” LUK 22 12 lg2z translate-unknown ἀνάγαιον 1 upper room In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. If your community does not have houses like that, you could use another expression to describe a large indoor space that people could use for a celebration meal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 22 12 m506 figs-activepassive ἐστρωμένον 1 furnished This is a passive verbal form. If your language does not use such forms, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “that has carpets, dining couches, and a dining table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 22 13 m507 grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce the results of what the previous sentences described. Because Jesus told Peter and John to do this, they did it. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 22 13 g9ty figs-explicit ἀπελθόντες 1 they went The implication is that these two disciples went into the city of Jerusalem, as Jesus had told them to do. Alternate translation: “Peter and John went into the city of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 22 13 m508 figs-metonymy τὸ Πάσχα 1 the Passover Luke is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer figuratively to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 22 14 j1dn figs-idiom ὅτε ἐγένετο ἡ ὥρα 1 when the hour came Luke is using the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “when it was time for the meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 22 13 m508 figs-metonymy τὸ Πάσχα 1 the Passover Luke is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 14 j1dn figs-idiom ὅτε ἐγένετο ἡ ὥρα 1 when the hour came Luke is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “when it was time for the meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 22 14 lnc6 translate-unknown ἀνέπεσεν 1 he reclined to eat See how you translated this phrase in [5:29](../05/29.md). It was the custom in this culture for dinner guests to eat while lying comfortably around the table on banqueting couches. Alternate translation: “Jesus took his place at the table” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 22 15 hue3 figs-explicitinfo ἐπιθυμίᾳ ἐπεθύμησα 1 With desire I have desired Jesus is using a characteristic Hebrew construction, a cognate noun with a verb, to express intensity. If your language has this same construction, you could use it here. But if this construction would seem to express unnecessary extra information in your language, you could show the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I have wanted very much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) -LUK 22 15 m509 figs-metonymy τοῦτο τὸ Πάσχα 1 this Passover Jesus is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer figuratively to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “this Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 22 15 s1sj figs-metonymy πρὸ τοῦ με παθεῖν 1 before I suffer Jesus is referring figuratively to his death by association with the way that he will **suffer** much pain and shame as he is dying. Alternate translation: “before I experience a painful death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 15 m509 figs-metonymy τοῦτο τὸ Πάσχα 1 this Passover Jesus is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. Alternate translation: “this Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 15 s1sj figs-metonymy πρὸ τοῦ με παθεῖν 1 before I suffer Jesus is referring to his death by association with the way that he will **suffer** much pain and shame as he is dying. Alternate translation: “before I experience a painful death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 16 m510 translate-versebridge γὰρ 1 For Jesus is giving the reason why he has been so eager to share this Passover meal with his disciples, as he said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. You could combine [22:15](../22/15.md) and [22:16](../22/16.md), putting all of [22:16](../22/16.md) first, followed by all of [22:15](../22/15.md). This would require saying “this Passover meal” in [22:16](../22/16.md) and **it** in [22:15](../22/15.md). You could have no introductory word for [22:16](../22/16.md) and begin [22:15](../22/15.md) with “And so.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) LUK 22 16 gbj7 λέγω…ὑμῖν 1 I say to you Jesus says this to emphasize the importance of what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “I can assure you” LUK 22 16 m511 figs-explicit οὐ μὴ φάγω αὐτὸ 1 I will certainly not eat it Since Jesus is just about to eat a Passover meal, he means implicitly that he will not eat such a meal again until the later time he describes. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not eat it again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 16 k28r figs-activepassive ἕως ὅτου πληρωθῇ ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 until when it is fulfilled in the kingdom of God If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. This could mean: (1) “until people celebrate this feast in the kingdom of God.” (2) “until God gives this feast its full meaning when he establishes his kingdom.” (3) “until I die as the true Passover sacrifice and establish the kingdom of God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 22 17 l5e6 figs-metonymy δεξάμενος ποτήριον 1 he took a cup Luke is using the term **cup** figuratively to mean what it contained, which was wine. Alternate translation: “Jesus picked up a cup of wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 17 l5e6 figs-metonymy δεξάμενος ποτήριον 1 he took a cup Luke is using the term **cup** to mean what it contained, which was wine. Alternate translation: “Jesus picked up a cup of wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 17 d7pc εὐχαριστήσας 1 having given thanks Your language may require you to state the object of the verb. Alternate translation: “when he had given thanks to God” LUK 22 17 xvm7 figs-metonymy διαμερίσατε εἰς ἑαυτούς 1 divide it among yourselves Jesus meant that the apostles were to divide up the contents of the cup, not the cup itself. Alternate translation: “share the wine that is in this cup among yourselves” or “each of you drink some wine from this cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 18 m512 translate-versebridge γὰρ 1 For Jesus is giving the reason why he wants his disciples to share the wine, as he told them to do in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this reason before the result by combining this verse and the previous one into a verse bridge. See the suggestions in the note about the similar situation in [22:16](../22/16.md) for how you might do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) LUK 22 18 m78n λέγω…ὑμῖν 1 I say to you Jesus is using this phrase to emphasize the importance of what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “I can assure you” -LUK 22 18 h5tl figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου 1 of the fruit of the vine Jesus is referring figuratively to the juice that people squeeze from grapes that grow on grapevines as if it were the **fruit** or grapes themselves. Wine is made from fermented grape juice. Alternate translation: “wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 22 18 crv5 figs-personification ἕως οὗ ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ ἔλθῃ 1 until the kingdom of God comes Jesus is speaking figuratively of the **kingdom of God** as if it could actively come on its own. Alternate translation: “until God establishes his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 22 18 h5tl figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου 1 of the fruit of the vine Jesus is referring to the juice that people squeeze from grapes that grow on grapevines as if it were the **fruit** or grapes themselves. Wine is made from fermented grape juice. Alternate translation: “wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 18 crv5 figs-personification ἕως οὗ ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ ἔλθῃ 1 until the kingdom of God comes Jesus is speaking of the **kingdom of God** as if it could actively come on its own. Alternate translation: “until God establishes his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 22 18 m513 figs-abstractnouns ἕως οὗ ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ ἔλθῃ 1 until the kingdom of God comes See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “until God begins to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 22 19 m514 translate-unknown ἄρτον 1 bread The term **bread** refers to a loaf of bread, which is a lump of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. See how you translated this term in [9:13](../09/13.md). Alternate translation: “a loaf of bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 22 19 nd2m figs-explicit ἄρτον 1 bread Since Jews did not eat bread made with yeast during this festival, this bread would not have had any yeast in it and it would have been flat. Alternate translation: “a loaf of unleavened bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -3861,12 +3861,12 @@ LUK 22 19 d8r1 figs-metaphor τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου 1 Th LUK 22 19 lc9m figs-activepassive τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν διδόμενον 1 which is given for you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “which I am giving for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 22 19 cxy5 figs-explicit τοῦτο ποιεῖτε εἰς τὴν ἐμὴν ἀνάμνησιν 1 Do this in my remembrance Jesus seems to be telling his disciples implicitly that he wants them to re-enact this part of the meal regularly in the future in order to remember him. Alternate translation: “When you meet together, break and share bread like this in order to remember me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 20 m517 figs-ellipsis καὶ τὸ ποτήριον 1 And the cup Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “And he took the cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -LUK 22 20 z3cx figs-metonymy τὸ ποτήριον…τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον 1 the cup … This cup In each case, the term **cup** figuratively means what the **cup** contained, which was wine. Alternate translation: “the cup of wine … The wine in this cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 20 z3cx figs-metonymy τὸ ποτήριον…τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον 1 the cup … This cup In each case, the term **cup** means what the **cup** contained, which was wine. Alternate translation: “the cup of wine … The wine in this cup” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 20 gc8h figs-explicit ἡ καινὴ διαθήκη ἐν τῷ αἵματί μου 1 the new covenant in my blood In the Hebrew culture, covenants were customarily ratified through animal sacrifices that involved shedding the blood of the animals. Here, Jesus is likely alluding to that practice in light of his impending sacrificial death. Alternate translation: “the new covenant that will be ratified when I shed my blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 20 v4d3 figs-activepassive τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐκχυννόμενον 1 which is poured out for you Jesus is referring to the way his blood is going to be **poured out** when he dies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “which I will pour out for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 22 21 swj1 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Jesus is using the term **behold** to get his disciples to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 22 21 g6ks figs-synecdoche ἡ χεὶρ τοῦ παραδιδόντος με μετ’ ἐμοῦ ἐπὶ τῆς τραπέζης 1 the hand of the one betraying me is with me on the table Jesus is figuratively using one part of this person, his **hand**, to represent the entire person. There is significance to the part that Jesus chooses. With the same hand with which Judas has just received the bread and wine, he will receive the money for betraying Jesus. Alternate translation: “the man who is going to betray me is sharing this meal with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -LUK 22 21 m518 figs-metonymy μετ’ ἐμοῦ ἐπὶ τῆς τραπέζης 1 is with me on the table Jesus is using the shared location of the **table** figuratively to mean sharing the meal that is being served on the **table**. Alternate translation: “sharing this meal with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 21 g6ks figs-synecdoche ἡ χεὶρ τοῦ παραδιδόντος με μετ’ ἐμοῦ ἐπὶ τῆς τραπέζης 1 the hand of the one betraying me is with me on the table Jesus is using one part of this person, his **hand**, to represent the entire person. There is significance to the part that Jesus chooses. With the same hand with which Judas has just received the bread and wine, he will receive the money for betraying Jesus. Alternate translation: “the man who is going to betray me is sharing this meal with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 22 21 m518 figs-metonymy μετ’ ἐμοῦ ἐπὶ τῆς τραπέζης 1 is with me on the table Jesus is using the shared location of the **table** to mean sharing the meal that is being served on the **table**. Alternate translation: “sharing this meal with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 22 wtj2 translate-versebridge ὅτι 1 For Jesus is giving the reason why one of his disciples is going to betray him, as he said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this reason before the result by combining this verse and the previous one into a verse bridge. See the suggestions in the note about the similar situation in [22:16](../22/16.md) for how you might do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) LUK 22 22 mk3q figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς μὲν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου…πορεύεται 1 the Son of Man indeed goes Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, indeed go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 22 22 m519 figs-explicit ὁ Υἱὸς μὲν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου…πορεύεται 1 the Son of Man indeed goes See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “I, the Messiah, indeed go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -3884,7 +3884,7 @@ LUK 22 25 m524 translate-names εὐεργέται 1 Benefactors This is a title LUK 22 26 ne9r ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως 1 But you be not thus Alternate translation: “But you should not act like that” LUK 22 26 m525 ὁ μείζων ἐν ὑμῖν, γενέσθω ὡς ὁ νεώτερος 1 let the greater among you become like the younger As the last note to [22:24](../22/24.md) discusses, your language might naturally use the superlative form of these adjectives rather than the comparative form. Alternate translation: “let the greatest one among you become like the youngest one” LUK 22 26 m526 figs-nominaladj ὁ μείζων…ὁ νεώτερος 1 the greater … the younger Jesus is using the adjectives **greater** and **younger** as nouns to describe types of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “the greatest one … the youngest one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -LUK 22 26 cdq7 figs-metonymy ὁ νεώτερος 1 the younger This culture respected older people and followed them as leaders. Jesus is referring figuratively to a person who was less important and influential by association with the fact that this would be the case if they were younger. Alternate translation: “the least important one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 26 cdq7 figs-metonymy ὁ νεώτερος 1 the younger This culture respected older people and followed them as leaders. Jesus is referring to a person who was less important and influential by association with the fact that this would be the case if they were younger. Alternate translation: “the least important one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 26 y4n1 ὁ διακονῶν 1 the one who serves Alternate translation: “a servant” LUK 22 27 mw2l grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Jesus uses this word to introduce a reason why his disciples should do what he told them in the previous verse. The reason is that he is already setting a personal example of this himself. Alternate translation: “After all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 22 27 jt7r figs-rquestion τίς…μείζων, ὁ ἀνακείμενος ἢ ὁ διακονῶν? 1 who is greater, the one who reclines to eat, or the one who serves? Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I want you to think about who is greater, the person who is dining, or the who is serving the food.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -3896,35 +3896,35 @@ LUK 22 29 w4pd κἀγὼ διατίθεμαι ὑμῖν, καθὼς διέθ LUK 22 29 nly5 figs-abstractnouns κἀγὼ διατίθεμαι ὑμῖν, καθὼς διέθετό μοι ὁ Πατήρ μου βασιλείαν 1 And I grant to you, just as my Father has granted to me, a kingdom If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “And so I am giving you the authority to rule, just as my Father has done for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 22 29 m527 grammar-connect-logic-result κἀγὼ 1 And I Jesus uses this expression to indicate that what he is about to say is the result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “And so I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 22 29 ii65 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατήρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -LUK 22 30 m528 figs-metonymy ἵνα ἔσθητε καὶ πίνητε ἐπὶ τῆς τραπέζης μου 1 so that you may eat and drink at my table Jesus may simply be referring to the way he and his disciples will renew their table fellowship in the kingdom of God, as he described in [22:16](../22/16.md). But he may also be referring figuratively to his disciples becoming important officials in his kingdom, since such officials would have their meals at the king’s **table**. Alternate translation: “so that you may be important officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 30 m528 figs-metonymy ἵνα ἔσθητε καὶ πίνητε ἐπὶ τῆς τραπέζης μου 1 so that you may eat and drink at my table Jesus may simply be referring to the way he and his disciples will renew their table fellowship in the kingdom of God, as he described in [22:16](../22/16.md). But he may also be referring to his disciples becoming important officials in his kingdom, since such officials would have their meals at the king’s **table**. Alternate translation: “so that you may be important officials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 30 m529 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ μου 1 in my kingdom If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule” and a concrete noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “when I rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 22 30 us1j translate-symaction καθῆσθε ἐπὶ θρόνων 1 sit on thrones Rulers have **thrones** that symbolize their authority. These special seats are signs of status and power. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that in some way in your translation. Alternate translation: “sit on royal thrones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -LUK 22 30 m530 figs-metonymy τὰς δώδεκα φυλὰς…τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1 the 12 tribes of Israel Here Jesus uses the term **tribes** figuratively to refer to the people who belong to those **tribes**. Alternate translation: “the people of the 12 tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 30 m530 figs-metonymy τὰς δώδεκα φυλὰς…τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1 the 12 tribes of Israel Here Jesus uses the term **tribes** to refer to the people who belong to those **tribes**. Alternate translation: “the people of the 12 tribes of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 31 t8qd Σίμων, Σίμων 1 Simon, Simon Jesus says the name of this disciple twice to show him that what he is about to say to him is very important. Your language may have a way of addressing someone to show this same thing. Alternate translation: “Now Simon” LUK 22 31 m531 translate-names Σίμων 1 Simon **Simon** is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in [4:38](../04/38.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 22 31 m532 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Jesus uses the term **behold** to get Simon to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 22 31 m533 translate-names ὁ Σατανᾶς 1 Satan **Satan** is the name of the devil. See how you translated this title in [10:18](../10/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 22 31 m534 ἐξῃτήσατο 1 has asked Your language may require you to state the object of the verb. Alternate translation: “has asked God for permission” LUK 22 31 m535 translate-unknown ὑμᾶς τοῦ σινιάσαι ὡς τὸν σῖτον 1 to sift you as wheat To **sift wheat** means to put it in a sieve, which is a container with a mesh bottom, and shake it back and forth so that the grain stays in the sieve and the husk or chaff falls out. If your readers would not be familiar with **wheat**, you could use the name of a grain that they would recognize, or use a general expression. Alternate translation: “to shake you as if he were separating grain from its husks in a sieve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -LUK 22 31 qyy7 figs-simile ἐξῃτήσατο ὑμᾶς τοῦ σινιάσαι ὡς τὸν σῖτον 1 has asked to sift you as wheat Jesus is using this comparison to say figuratively that Satan wants to put the disciples through difficult experiences in order to show that many of them are not unconditionally loyal to Jesus. You could use this same comparison in your translation, or you could explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “to shake you as if he were separating grain from its husks in a sieve” or “to test you to show that many of you will not stay loyal to me when threatened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +LUK 22 31 qyy7 figs-simile ἐξῃτήσατο ὑμᾶς τοῦ σινιάσαι ὡς τὸν σῖτον 1 has asked to sift you as wheat Jesus is using this comparison to say that Satan wants to put the disciples through difficult experiences in order to show that many of them are not unconditionally loyal to Jesus. You could use this same comparison in your translation, or you could explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “to shake you as if he were separating grain from its husks in a sieve” or “to test you to show that many of you will not stay loyal to me when threatened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) LUK 22 31 m536 figs-explicit ἐξῃτήσατο ὑμᾶς τοῦ σινιάσαι ὡς τὸν σῖτον 1 has asked to sift you as wheat The implication is that God has given Satan permission to do this, and that is why Jesus is giving this warning. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to test you to show that many of you are not unconditionally loyal to me, and God has given him permission to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 31 dmw8 figs-you ὑμᾶς 1 you Here, **you** is plural. Jesus is referring to all of the apostles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 22 32 m537 ἐγὼ…ἐδεήθην 1 I have asked Your language may require you to state the object of the verb. In this context the verb has a strong sense. Alternate translation: “I have prayed to God” or “I have pleaded with God” LUK 22 32 pd1t figs-you ἐγὼ δὲ ἐδεήθην περὶ σοῦ 1 you … your … you … you … your Jesus is addressing Simon specifically, and so the terms **you** and **your** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 22 32 zp8w figs-doublenegatives ἵνα μὴ ἐκλίπῃ ἡ πίστις σου 1 that your faith may not fail If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of the negative word **not** combined with the negative verb **fail** as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “that you will continue to have faith” or “that you will continue to trust me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -LUK 22 32 qxk7 figs-metaphor ποτε ἐπιστρέψας 1 when you have turned back This expression refers figuratively to resuming a previous course of action. Alternate translation: “when you are once more openly loyal to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 22 32 qxk7 figs-metaphor ποτε ἐπιστρέψας 1 when you have turned back This expression refers to resuming a previous course of action. Alternate translation: “when you are once more openly loyal to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 22 32 f9v8 figs-explicit στήρισον τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου 1 strengthen your brothers The implication is that Jesus wants Simon to **strengthen** the other disciples in their faith. Alternate translation: “encourage the other disciples to be strong in their faith as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 22 32 r7ux figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου 1 your brothers Jesus is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean someone who shares the same belief. Alternate translation: “your fellow believers” or “the other disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 22 32 r7ux figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου 1 your brothers Jesus is using the term **brothers** to mean someone who shares the same belief. Alternate translation: “your fellow believers” or “the other disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 22 32 m538 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου 1 your brothers Here Jesus has the other apostles, who are all men, initially in view. But he may also want Simon to strengthen the faith of any of his other disciples, male or female, who need encouragement. In that case, he would be using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “your fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 22 33 m539 writing-pronouns ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ 1 But he said to him **He** refers to Simon, who was also known as Peter, and the word **him** refers to Jesus. Jesus calls him Peter in the next verse. So that your readers will know that Jesus is talking to the same man there, you could use both of his names here. Alternate translation: “But Simon Peter said to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 22 34 m540 writing-pronouns ὁ δὲ εἶπεν 1 But he said The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “But Jesus answered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 22 34 m541 λέγω σοι 1 I say to you Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell Peter. Alternate translation: “Indeed” LUK 22 34 tu15 οὐ φωνήσει σήμερον ἀλέκτωρ, ἕως τρίς με ἀπαρνήσῃ εἰδέναι 1 the rooster will not crow today before you will deny three times that you know me If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “before the rooster crows today, you will deny three times that you know me” -LUK 22 34 pwj1 figs-metonymy οὐ φωνήσει σήμερον ἀλέκτωρ, ἕως 1 the rooster will not crow today before Jesus is referring figuratively to a certain time of day. Roosters crow just before the sun appears in the morning. In other words, Jesus is referring to dawn. Alternate translation: “before another morning begins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 34 pwj1 figs-metonymy οὐ φωνήσει σήμερον ἀλέκτωρ, ἕως 1 the rooster will not crow today before Jesus is referring to a certain time of day. Roosters crow just before the sun appears in the morning. In other words, Jesus is referring to dawn. Alternate translation: “before another morning begins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 34 eq7h translate-unknown οὐ φωνήσει σήμερον ἀλέκτωρ, ἕως 1 the rooster will not crow today before A **rooster** is a bird that calls out loudly around the time the sun comes up. If your readers would not be familiar with this bird, you could use the name of a bird in your area that calls out or sings just before dawn, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “before the birds begin to sing in the morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 22 34 m542 figs-genericnoun ἀλέκτωρ 1 the rooster Jesus is not speaking of one particular **rooster** but of roosters in general. Alternate translation: “the roosters” or “the birds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) LUK 22 34 m543 figs-explicit σήμερον 1 today The Jewish day began at sunset. Jesus was speaking after the sun had set. The rooster would crow just before morning. That morning was considered part of the same day. Alternate translation: “in the morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 22 35 m544 figs-metonymy ἄτερ βαλλαντίου, καὶ πήρας, καὶ ὑποδημάτων 1 without a money bag and sack and sandals As in [10:4](../10/04.md), Jesus is speaking of these items figuratively to mean what they represent. See how you translated these terms there. Alternate translation: “without any money or provisions or extra clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 35 m544 figs-metonymy ἄτερ βαλλαντίου, καὶ πήρας, καὶ ὑποδημάτων 1 without a money bag and sack and sandals As in [10:4](../10/04.md), Jesus is speaking of these items to mean what they represent. See how you translated these terms there. Alternate translation: “without any money or provisions or extra clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 35 m545 figs-doublenegatives μή τινος ὑστερήσατε? 1 you did not lack anything, did you? The first word of this question in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding, **did you?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Alternate translation: “did you lack anything?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 22 35 cv68 figs-rquestion μή τινος ὑστερήσατε? 1 you did not lack anything, did you? Even though Jesus already knows the answer to this question and he is using it as a teaching tool, in this case he does want the disciples to reply. If you translated his words as a statement, for example, “I know that you did not lack anything,” then the disciples might seem to be interrupting him by speaking uninvited. Since Jesus did want them to speak, it would probably be most appropriate to present his words in the form of a question. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 22 35 tb51 figs-ellipsis οὐθενός 1 Nothing Luke may be summarizing the disciples’ response briefly, or the disciples themselves may have responded this briefly. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could expand on what this means. Alternate translation: “We did not lack anything” or “We had everything we needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -3943,7 +3943,7 @@ LUK 22 37 se1d figs-explicit καὶ γὰρ τὸ περὶ ἐμοῦ τέλο LUK 22 38 kbt8 figs-explicit ἱκανόν ἐστιν 1 It is enough This could mean: (1) Jesus is indicating that when he told his disciples to buy swords, he meant for their own defense, not to attack their enemies, and that they have enough swords for that purpose. Alternate translation: “That will be enough for us to defend ourselves” (2) Jesus wants them to stop talking about having swords. The implication would be that when he said they should buy swords, he was mainly warning them that they were going to face dangers, and he did not really want them to buy swords and fight. Alternate translation: “That is enough talk about swords, I do not really want you to buy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 39 zaw6 writing-background ἐξελθὼν, ἐπορεύθη κατὰ τὸ ἔθος εἰς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν 1 going out, he went according to his custom to the Mount of Olives Luke provides this background information about where Jesus went to help readers understand what happens next in the story. Luke has already indicated in [21:37](../21/37.md) that during this time in Jerusalem, Jesus did not spend the nights in the city, but rather in this location. Alternate translation: “leaving the city of Jerusalem, Jesus went to spend the night on the Mount of Olives, as he had been doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 22 39 m550 translate-names τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν 1 the Mount of Olives This is the name of a hill or mountain. See how you translated this place in [19:29](../19/29.md). Alternate translation: “Olive Tree Mountain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -LUK 22 40 m551 figs-synecdoche γενόμενος δὲ ἐπὶ τοῦ τόπου 1 when he came to the place Luke says **he**, meaning Jesus, to refer figuratively to Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “when Jesus and his disciples arrived at the Mount of Olives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 22 40 m551 figs-synecdoche γενόμενος δὲ ἐπὶ τοῦ τόπου 1 when he came to the place Luke says **he**, meaning Jesus, to refer to Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “when Jesus and his disciples arrived at the Mount of Olives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 22 40 b6pz figs-abstractnouns προσεύχεσθε μὴ εἰσελθεῖν εἰς πειρασμόν 1 Pray not to enter into temptation If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **temptation** with a verb such as “tempt.” Alternate translation: “Pray that nothing will tempt you to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 22 40 m552 figs-explicit προσεύχεσθε μὴ εἰσελθεῖν εἰς πειρασμόν 1 Pray not to enter into temptation The implications are that the disciples will soon face the **temptation** to abandon Jesus in order to save themselves. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Pray that when the Jewish leaders come to arrest me and you are tempted to try to save yourselves by running away or denying that you know me, you will not sin by doing that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 41 sp1s figs-idiom ὡσεὶ λίθου βολήν 1 about the throw of a stone This is an idiom that means “about as far as someone can throw a stone.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could represent this with a general expression or with an estimated measurement. Alternate translation: “a short distance” or “about 30 meters” or “about 100 feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -3989,12 +3989,12 @@ LUK 22 52 m573 figs-explicit στρατηγοὺς τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 captai LUK 22 52 fa7z figs-rquestion ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθατε μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων? 1 Have you come out as against a robber, with swords and clubs? Jesus is using the question form to rebuke the Jewish leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You did not need to bring soldiers with weapons to arrest me, as if I were a bandit!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 22 52 m574 figs-explicit ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθατε μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων? 1 Have you come out as against a robber, with swords and clubs? The implication, as Jesus will say specifically in the next verse, is that he has demonstrated that he is a peaceful person. He has taught openly and undefened in the temple. He has not gathered an armed band around him and operated from a hidden location. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You have seen that I am a peaceful person, yet you come to arrest me bringing soldiers with weapons, as if I were a bandit!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 52 m575 figs-simile ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν 1 as against a robber If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the meaning of this simile. Here, the term **robber** likely indicates a violent person who steals from others by forcing them to hand over their valuables, threatening to harm them if they refuse. Alternate translation: “as if I were a bandit who needed to be subdued with force” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -LUK 22 52 m576 figs-metonymy μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων 1 swords and clubs Jesus is speaking of these weapons figuratively, to mean the soldiers who are carrying them. Alternate translation: “soldiers armed with weapons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 52 m576 figs-metonymy μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων 1 swords and clubs Jesus is speaking of these weapons, to mean the soldiers who are carrying them. Alternate translation: “soldiers armed with weapons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 53 a6qu figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed to enter the **temple** building, so Jesus means the temple courtyard. He is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -LUK 22 53 c4is figs-metonymy οὐκ ἐξετείνατε τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ ἐμέ 1 you did not lay your hands on me As in [20:19](../20/19.md), here this expression means figuratively to arrest a person by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of the person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “you did not arrest me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 22 53 gw9n figs-idiom αὕτη ἐστὶν ὑμῶν ἡ ὥρα 1 this is your hour Jesus is using the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “this is a time when you can do whatever you want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 22 53 c4is figs-metonymy οὐκ ἐξετείνατε τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ ἐμέ 1 you did not lay your hands on me As in [20:19](../20/19.md), here this expression means to arrest a person by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of the person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “you did not arrest me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 53 gw9n figs-idiom αὕτη ἐστὶν ὑμῶν ἡ ὥρα 1 this is your hour Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “this is a time when you can do whatever you want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 22 53 mzb4 figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡ ἐξουσία τοῦ σκότους 1 and the authority of the darkness Jesus is using this phrase to characterize the **hour** further. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show that by repeating the reference to “time” from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “because it is a time when darkness is in authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -LUK 22 53 m577 figs-metaphor καὶ ἡ ἐξουσία τοῦ σκότους 1 and the authority of the darkness Jesus is referring figuratively to Satan as **darkness**. Alternate translation: “because it is a time when God is allowing Satan to do what he wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 22 53 m577 figs-metaphor καὶ ἡ ἐξουσία τοῦ σκότους 1 and the authority of the darkness Jesus is referring to Satan as **darkness**. Alternate translation: “because it is a time when God is allowing Satan to do what he wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 22 54 mtp8 figs-explicit ἤγαγον 1 they led him away If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state more explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “they led Jesus away from the place where they had arrested him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 54 m578 writing-background ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἠκολούθει μακρόθεν 1 And Peter was following from a distance Luke provides this background information to help readers understand what happens next in the story. Alternate translation: “Now Peter followed the group there, staying some distance away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 22 54 m579 figs-explicit ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἠκολούθει μακρόθεν 1 And Peter was following from a distance If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why Peter followed **from a distance**. Alternate translation: “Now Peter followed the group there, staying some distance away so that he would not be recognized and arrested himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -4023,7 +4023,7 @@ LUK 22 60 al3s figs-idiom οὐκ οἶδα ὃ λέγεις 1 I do not know wha LUK 22 60 p6c5 writing-pronouns ἔτι λαλοῦντος αὐτοῦ 1 while he was still speaking The pronoun **he** refers to Peter, not to the other man. Alternate translation: “while Peter was speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 22 60 lt62 translate-unknown ἐφώνησεν ἀλέκτωρ 1 a rooster crowed See how you translated the similar phrase in [22:34](../22/34.md). You may have decided to use a general expression there. Alternate translation: “the birds began to sing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 22 61 gdp5 ὁ Κύριος…τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the Lord … the Lord Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation in each case: “the Lord Jesus” -LUK 22 61 dpk1 figs-metonymy τοῦ ῥήματος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to describe what Jesus had said using words. Alternate translation: “the statement Jesus had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 61 dpk1 figs-metonymy τοῦ ῥήματος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** to describe what Jesus had said using words. Alternate translation: “the statement Jesus had made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 61 kkq8 translate-unknown ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι 1 a rooster crows See how you translated this phrase in [22:60](../22/60.md) and the similar phrase in [22:34](../22/34.md). You may have decided to use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the birds begin to sing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 22 61 ui26 figs-explicit σήμερον 1 today See how you translated **today** in [22:34](../22/34.md). The Jewish day started at sundown and continued to the next evening. Jesus had spoken the previous evening about what would happen shortly before dawn or at dawn, so this was still the same day. Alternate translation: “in the morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 61 zjc6 ἀπαρνήσῃ με τρίς 1 you will deny me three times Alternate translation: “you will say three times that you do not know me” @@ -4037,7 +4037,7 @@ LUK 22 65 m588 βλασφημοῦντες 1 blaspheming him **Blaspheming** ca LUK 22 66 v9m2 καὶ ὡς ἐγένετο ἡμέρα 1 And when it became day Alternate translation: “As soon as it was light” LUK 22 66 vp8u writing-pronouns ἀπήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ Συνέδριον αὐτῶν 1 they led him into their Sanhedrin The pronoun **they** does not necessarily refer to **the elders**. Rather, since Jesus was in the custody of the guards, the elders would have had the guards bring Jesus in. Alternate translation: “the elders had Jesus brought into the Sanhedrin” or “the guards led Jesus into the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 22 66 m589 figs-explicit τὸ Συνέδριον αὐτῶν 1 their Sanhedrin The **Sanhedrin** is the name of the ruling council of the Jews. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, their ruling council” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 22 66 cboi figs-metonymy τὸ Συνέδριον αὐτῶν 1 their Sanhedrin Luke is figuratively using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean by association the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin, their ruling council, met” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 66 cboi figs-metonymy τὸ Συνέδριον αὐτῶν 1 their Sanhedrin Luke is using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean by association the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin, their ruling council, met” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 66 m590 translate-names Συνέδριον 1 Sanhedrin **Sanhedrin** is the name of a governing body. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 22 67 br8y λέγοντες 1 saying It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The elders said to Jesus” LUK 22 67 h12k εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός, εἰπὸν ἡμῖν 1 If you are the Christ, tell us This sounds like a conditional statement, but it is actually an imperative. Alternate translation: “Tell us whether you are the Messiah” @@ -4057,25 +4057,25 @@ LUK 22 71 u3m3 figs-rquestion τί ἔτι ἔχομεν μαρτυρίας χρ LUK 22 71 m594 figs-explicit τί ἔτι ἔχομεν μαρτυρίας χρείαν? 1 What further need do we have of a witness? The implications are that no further testimony is needed to prove a charge of blasphemy. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “We have no further need for testimony to prove a charge of blasphemy!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 71 m595 figs-exclusive ἔχομεν…αὐτοὶ…ἠκούσαμεν 1 do we have … we ourselves have heard The elders are speaking to one another about themselves, so **we** and **ourselves** would be exclusive, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) LUK 22 71 m596 grammar-connect-logic-result αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 For we ourselves have heard from his own mouth If it would be helpful in your language, you put this phrase before the previous phrase, as UST does, since this phrase gives the reason for the conclusion that the previous phrase states. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -LUK 22 71 lpm4 figs-metonymy ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 we … have heard from his own mouth The elders are using the expression **his own mouth** figuratively to refer to what Jesus has just said using his mouth. Alternate translation: “we … have heard what he just said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 22 71 lpm4 figs-metonymy ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 we … have heard from his own mouth The elders are using the expression **his own mouth** to refer to what Jesus has just said using his mouth. Alternate translation: “we … have heard what he just said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 71 m597 figs-explicit ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 we … have heard from his own mouth The implications are that what Jesus has just said proves a charge of blasphemy by itself, because Jesus has claimed to be equal with God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we have heard him say that he is equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 23 intro p6wq 0 # Luke 23 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus stands trial before Pilate and Herod (23:1-25)
2. The Roman soldiers crucify Jesus (23:26-49)
3. Joseph of Arimathea buries Jesus and women prepare spices (23:50-56)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The curtain of the temple was split in two”

The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus’ people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried (Luke 23:53) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Truly I say to you, today you will be with me in paradise”

There are two translation issues related to the statement, “Truly I say to you, today you will be with me in paradise” in [23:42](../23/42.md).

(1) When Jesus said this to the criminal who was crucified with him, it is possible that he was using the term **paradise** figuratively to mean “heaven,” describing it by association with the way that it is a place of comfort and consolation. Some groups of believers would understand it that way. However, other groups of believers would say that people who express their faith in Jesus, as this criminal did, still need to wait until the final resurrection before they go to heaven, and so **paradise** refers to a place where such people go when they die and await the final resurrection. Be sensitive to this difference in your translation. You may decide it is best simply to use the term **paradise** and leave the meaning open to either understanding. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

(2) Some groups that may be active in your area, such as the Jehovah’s Witnesses, do not honor Jesus as the Son of God, and so they do not believe that he would have been able to promise the criminal entrance into paradise with himself that day, when they both would die. And so they translate or punctuate this so that the word **today** describes when Jesus is making the statement, rather than when the criminal will be in paradise. However, if that were actually the case, the Greek wording and word order would be different. The expression that introduces the statement would be, “Truly, today, I say to you,” or, “Truly I say to you today that.” The actual expression, “Truly I say to you,” occurs ten times in the book of Luke, and it always stands by itself as an introduction to a statement that follows. So **today** belongs with the statement, not with the introduction to the statement. Your language may have a way of making this clear, for example, by saying, “Truly I say to you, you will be with me in paradise today.”

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “And he was obligated to release one to them at every feast” [23:17](../23/17.md)

This verse is not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible. Most scholars consider it to be a later addition for explanation. Many current versions of the Bible do not include it. Some versions put it into square brackets. We recommend that you do not translate this verse. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in your region that include this verse, you may include it.

### “Jesus said, ‘Father, forgive them, for they do not know what they are doing.’” [23:34](../23/34.md)

This sentence is not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible, and so it is likely not an original part of the Gospel of Luke. However, many scholars consider it an authentic saying of Jesus that was copied into the book at an early stage. ULT and UST include this sentence in this verse, but some other versions do not.

If you decide to include either [23:17](../23/17.md) or the additional sentence [23:34](../23/34.md) in your translation, you should enclose the material in square brackets to indicate that it is probably not original to Luke’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK 23 intro p6wq 0 # Luke 23 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus stands trial before Pilate and Herod (23:1-25)
2. The Roman soldiers crucify Jesus (23:26-49)
3. Joseph of Arimathea buries Jesus and women prepare spices (23:50-56)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The curtain of the temple was split in two”

The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus’ people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried (Luke 23:53) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Truly I say to you, today you will be with me in paradise”

There are two translation issues related to the statement, “Truly I say to you, today you will be with me in paradise” in [23:42](../23/42.md).

(1) When Jesus said this to the criminal who was crucified with him, it is possible that he was using the term **paradise** to mean “heaven,” describing it by association with the way that it is a place of comfort and consolation. Some groups of believers would understand it that way. However, other groups of believers would say that people who express their faith in Jesus, as this criminal did, still need to wait until the final resurrection before they go to heaven, and so **paradise** refers to a place where such people go when they die and await the final resurrection. Be sensitive to this difference in your translation. You may decide it is best simply to use the term **paradise** and leave the meaning open to either understanding. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

(2) Some groups that may be active in your area, such as the Jehovah’s Witnesses, do not honor Jesus as the Son of God, and so they do not believe that he would have been able to promise the criminal entrance into paradise with himself that day, when they both would die. And so they translate or punctuate this so that the word **today** describes when Jesus is making the statement, rather than when the criminal will be in paradise. However, if that were actually the case, the Greek wording and word order would be different. The expression that introduces the statement would be, “Truly, today, I say to you,” or, “Truly I say to you today that.” The actual expression, “Truly I say to you,” occurs ten times in the book of Luke, and it always stands by itself as an introduction to a statement that follows. So **today** belongs with the statement, not with the introduction to the statement. Your language may have a way of making this clear, for example, by saying, “Truly I say to you, you will be with me in paradise today.”

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “And he was obligated to release one to them at every feast” [23:17](../23/17.md)

This verse is not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible. Most scholars consider it to be a later addition for explanation. Many current versions of the Bible do not include it. Some versions put it into square brackets. We recommend that you do not translate this verse. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in your region that include this verse, you may include it.

### “Jesus said, ‘Father, forgive them, for they do not know what they are doing.’” [23:34](../23/34.md)

This sentence is not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible, and so it is likely not an original part of the Gospel of Luke. However, many scholars consider it an authentic saying of Jesus that was copied into the book at an early stage. ULT and UST include this sentence in this verse, but some other versions do not.

If you decide to include either [23:17](../23/17.md) or the additional sentence [23:34](../23/34.md) in your translation, you should enclose the material in square brackets to indicate that it is probably not original to Luke’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 23 1 pi3d grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to indicate that this event came after the events he has just described. Alternate translation (as in UST): “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) LUK 23 1 sgf1 figs-hyperbole ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος αὐτῶν 1 the whole multitude of them The word **whole** is a generalization. Luke says in [23:51](../23/51.md) that at least one member of the Sanhedrin did not agree that Jesus was guilty of blasphemy and should be punished. Alternate translation: “the many members of the ruling council who wanted to condemn Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -LUK 23 1 mvn9 figs-metonymy ἀναστὰν 1 rose up This means literally that they “stood up” or “stood to their feet,” but figuratively by extension it means that they adjourned the meeting and left the meeting place. Alternate translation: “ended the meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 23 1 mvn9 figs-metonymy ἀναστὰν 1 rose up This means literally that they “stood up” or “stood to their feet,” but by extension it means that they adjourned the meeting and left the meeting place. Alternate translation: “ended the meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 23 1 k4aa figs-explicit ἐπὶ τὸν Πειλᾶτον 1 to Pilate The implication is that the Jewish leaders brought Jesus to Pilate because they wanted Pilate to judge him. Alternate translation: “to Pilate so that Pilate would judge him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 1 m598 translate-names Πειλᾶτον 1 Pilate **Pilate** is the name of the man who was the Roman ruler of Judea in this time. See how you translated his name in [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 23 2 m599 figs-explicit κατηγορεῖν αὐτοῦ 1 to accuse him The chief priests and scribes accused Jesus of doing wrong things because they wanted Pilate to kill Jesus. But they were accusing him falsely, because Jesus had never done what they accused him of doing. For example, in [20:25](../20/25.md), Jesus had specifically said that the Jews could pay taxes to the Roman government. To make sure that your readers are not confused, you could state explicitly that these accusations were false. Alternate translation: “to accuse him falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 2 mtc8 figs-exclusive εὕρομεν…τὸ ἔθνος ἡμῶν 1 we found … our nation The terms **we** and **our** refer only the members of the Jewish ruling council who are speaking, not to Pilate or any of the other people nearby. So in your translation, use the exclusive forms of these words, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -LUK 23 2 im4v figs-metaphor διαστρέφοντα τὸ ἔθνος ἡμῶν 1 misleading our nation The Jewish leaders speak figuratively of Jesus as if he were a guide who was leading someone in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “encouraging our people to do things that are wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 23 2 im4v figs-metaphor διαστρέφοντα τὸ ἔθνος ἡμῶν 1 misleading our nation The Jewish leaders speak of Jesus as if he were a guide who was leading someone in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “encouraging our people to do things that are wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 23 2 xsa4 κωλύοντα φόρους…διδόναι 1 forbidding to give tribute Alternate translation: “telling them not to pay taxes” -LUK 23 2 l68k figs-metonymy Καίσαρι 1 to Caesar See how you translated **Caesar** in [20:22](../20/22.md). The Jewish leaders are referring figuratively to the Roman government by Caesar’s name, since he was its ruler. Alternate translation: “to the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 23 2 l68k figs-metonymy Καίσαρι 1 to Caesar See how you translated **Caesar** in [20:22](../20/22.md). The Jewish leaders are referring to the Roman government by Caesar’s name, since he was its ruler. Alternate translation: “to the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 23 3 m600 figs-hendiadys ὁ…ἀποκριθεὶς αὐτῷ ἔφη 1 answering him he said Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus responded to what Pilate asked him. Alternate translation: “Jesus responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 23 3 ve4s figs-idiom σὺ λέγεις 1 You say so Like the similar expression in [22:70](../22/70.md), this is an idiom. Jesus is using it to acknowledge that what Pilate has said is true. Alternate translation: “Yes, it is as you say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 23 4 fx7d writing-participants καὶ τοὺς ὄχλους 1 and the crowds Luke uses this phrase subtly within the narrative to introduce these new characters into the story. Alternate translation: “and to the crowds that had gathered there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 23 4 s8fi figs-explicit οὐδὲν εὑρίσκω αἴτιον ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τούτῳ 1 I find no cause in this man Pilate means implicitly **no cause** to convict Jesus of a crime and punish him. Alternate translation: “I do not find this man to be guilty of anything” or “I find no grounds for conviction in this man’s case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 5 m601 writing-pronouns οἱ…ἐπίσχυον 1 they were insisting The pronoun **they** refers to the Jewish leaders who had brought Jesus to Pilate for trial. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders kept insisting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 23 5 yy6w figs-metaphor ἀνασείει τὸν λαὸν 1 He stirs up the people The Jewish leaders speak figuratively as if Jesus were stirring a pot and putting in motion things that had been lying quietly on the bottom. They mean that he is encouraging rebellion. Alternate translation: “He encourages the people to rebel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 23 5 yy6w figs-metaphor ἀνασείει τὸν λαὸν 1 He stirs up the people The Jewish leaders speak as if Jesus were stirring a pot and putting in motion things that had been lying quietly on the bottom. They mean that he is encouraging rebellion. Alternate translation: “He encourages the people to rebel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 23 5 cr78 καὶ ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας ἕως ὧδε 1 beginning from Galilee as far as here It might be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “He began causing trouble in Galilee, and he has done so all the way to here” LUK 23 6 vvp6 figs-explicit Πειλᾶτος…ἀκούσας 1 when Pilate heard this As the rest of the verse shows, this refers implicitly to Pilate hearing that Jesus had begun teaching in Galilee. Alternate translation: “when Pilate heard that Jesus had begun to teach in Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 6 px94 figs-quotations ἐπηρώτησεν εἰ ὁ ἄνθρωπος Γαλιλαῖός ἐστιν 1 he asked whether the man was a Galilean If it would be helpful in your language, you could represent this as a direct quotation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -4083,10 +4083,10 @@ LUK 23 6 dr1s figs-explicit ὁ ἄνθρωπος 1 the man The term **the man** LUK 23 7 cbn1 figs-explicit ἐπιγνοὺς ὅτι 1 when he learned that The implication is that the Jewish leaders answered Pilate’s question and confirmed that Jesus came from Galilee. Alternate translation: “when the Jewish leaders confirmed to Pilate that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 7 mn6i figs-explicit ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου ἐστὶν 1 he was under the authority of Herod The implication is that Jesus was under Herod’s authority because Herod was the ruler of Galilee. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus was under the authority of Herod, since Herod ruled over Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 7 ay2i figs-explicit ἀνέπεμψεν αὐτὸν πρὸς Ἡρῴδην 1 he sent him to Herod The implication seems to be that Pilate used these grounds to get someone else to decide Jesus’ case. He did not want to decide it himself, because he would either have to release someone the Jewish leaders wanted condemned or else condemn someone he knew was innocent. Alternate translation: “he referred Jesus’ case to Herod so that he would not have to decide it himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 23 7 ys2n figs-idiom ἐν ταύταις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 in those days Luke is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 23 7 ys2n figs-idiom ἐν ταύταις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 in those days Luke is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 23 8 z3zz writing-pronouns θέλων ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν…διὰ τὸ ἀκούειν περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 he had been desiring to see him … because he had heard about him In these phrases, **he** refers to Herod and **him** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “wanting to see Jesus … because he had heard about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 23 8 b424 figs-activepassive ἤλπιζέν τι σημεῖον ἰδεῖν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ γινόμενον 1 he was hoping to see some sign happen by him If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Herod wanted to see Jesus perform a miracle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 23 9 hbp3 figs-metonymy ἐπηρώτα…αὐτὸν ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς 1 he questioned him in many words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to refer to what Herod said as he questioned Jesus. Alternate translation: “Herod asked Jesus many questions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 23 9 hbp3 figs-metonymy ἐπηρώτα…αὐτὸν ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς 1 he questioned him in many words Luke is using the term **words** to refer to what Herod said as he questioned Jesus. Alternate translation: “Herod asked Jesus many questions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 23 9 c8li οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίνατο αὐτῷ 1 he answered him nothing If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the verb negative and the object positive here. Alternate translation: “Jesus did not say anything in reply” LUK 23 10 lpu6 ἵστήκεισαν 1 stood by Alternate translation: “were standing there” LUK 23 10 hn8g εὐτόνως κατηγοροῦντες αὐτοῦ 1 vehemently accusing him Alternate translation: “insisting strongly that Jesus was guilty of doing wrong” @@ -4099,7 +4099,7 @@ LUK 23 14 dh77 figs-explicit εἶπεν πρὸς αὐτούς, προσηνέ LUK 23 14 wsw6 figs-metaphor ὡς ἀποστρέφοντα τὸν λαόν 1 as turning the people away Here Pilate uses a figurative term that is similar to the one that the council members use in [23:2](../23/02.md) when they accuse Jesus of “misleading” the Jewish nation, meaning that he was encouraging them to do wrong things. The slightly different term that Pilate uses to summarize their charges means that they accused Jesus of **turning the people away** from their duties to the Roman Empire. It does not mean that Jesus refused to welcome people who came to him for help. Alternate translation: “saying that he encourages the people to be disloyal to the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 23 14 m603 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Pilate uses the term **behold** to get the Jewish leaders and the crowd to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 23 14 m604 writing-pronouns ἐγὼ ἐνώπιον ὑμῶν ἀνακρίνας 1 I, having examined him before you For emphasis, since he is declaring Jesus innocent, Pilate uses the personal pronoun **I** here when it would not ordinarily be required in Greek. If your language uses pronouns in this same way, it would be appropriate to do that here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 23 14 m605 figs-metaphor ἐγὼ ἐνώπιον ὑμῶν ἀνακρίνας, οὐθὲν εὗρον 1 I, having examined him before you, found nothing The term **before** figuratively means “in the presence” of another person. Alternate translation: “I have questioned him in your presence, and I have found nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 23 14 m605 figs-metaphor ἐγὼ ἐνώπιον ὑμῶν ἀνακρίνας, οὐθὲν εὗρον 1 I, having examined him before you, found nothing The term **before** means “in the presence” of another person. Alternate translation: “I have questioned him in your presence, and I have found nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 23 14 ee53 figs-explicit ἐγὼ ἐνώπιον ὑμῶν ἀνακρίνας, οὐθὲν εὗρον 1 I, having examined him before you, found nothing The implication is that the Jewish leaders were witnesses to the proceedings. Alternate translation: “I have questioned him with you present as witnesses, and I have found nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 14 e517 οὐθὲν εὗρον ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τούτῳ αἴτιον ὧν κατηγορεῖτε κατ’ αὐτοῦ 1 found nothing in this man as cause for what you are accusing against him See how you translated the similar expression in [23:4](../23/04.md). Alternate translation: “found no grounds to convict this man on the charges you are making against him” LUK 23 15 h623 figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ οὐδὲ Ἡρῴδης 1 But neither did Herod Here Pilate is speaking in an abbreviated way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could clarify his meaning by adding information from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “But Herod did not find any grounds to convict him either” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -4130,14 +4130,14 @@ LUK 23 22 ck75 figs-rquestion τί γὰρ κακὸν ἐποίησεν οὗτ LUK 23 22 de5a οὐδὲν αἴτιον θανάτου εὗρον ἐν αὐτῷ 1 No cause for death have I found in him Alternate translation: “I have not found any grounds to convict him of a crime for which he should be executed” LUK 23 22 mij1 figs-explicit παιδεύσας οὖν αὐτὸν, ἀπολύσω 1 Therefore, having punished him, I will release him See the note to this same sentence in [23:16](../23/16.md). Pilate should have released Jesus without punishment, because he was innocent. It seems that Pilate decided to punish Jesus anyway to try to satisfy the Jewish leaders. However, since Luke does not provide this explanation in his book, you probably should not add it to your translation. But you could make explicit that Pilate is saying he is not going to execute Jesus. Alternate translation: “So I will not execute him, but whip him, and then let him go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 22 m616 figs-synecdoche παιδεύσας…αὐτὸν, ἀπολύσω 1 having punished him, I will release him Pilate is not going to administer this punishment personally. Rather, he will have his soldiers do it. Alternate translation: “I will have my soldiers whip him, and then I will release him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -LUK 23 23 sni4 figs-metonymy φωναῖς μεγάλαις 1 with loud voices Luke is describing the shouts of the crowd figuratively by reference to the **voices** that the people used to make them. Alternate translation: “with loud shouts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 23 23 sni4 figs-metonymy φωναῖς μεγάλαις 1 with loud voices Luke is describing the shouts of the crowd by reference to the **voices** that the people used to make them. Alternate translation: “with loud shouts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 23 23 pst8 figs-activepassive αὐτὸν σταυρωθῆναι 1 for him to be crucified If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “that Pilate have his soldiers crucify Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 23 23 pgz9 figs-personification κατίσχυον αἱ φωναὶ αὐτῶν 1 their voices prevailed Luke speaks figuratively of the **voices** as if they were a living thing that actively overcame Pilate’s reluctance. Alternate translation: “the crowd kept shouting until they convinced Pilate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 23 23 pgz9 figs-personification κατίσχυον αἱ φωναὶ αὐτῶν 1 their voices prevailed Luke speaks of the **voices** as if they were a living thing that actively overcame Pilate’s reluctance. Alternate translation: “the crowd kept shouting until they convinced Pilate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 23 24 m617 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Because the people in the crowd overcame his reluctance with their shouts, Pilate agreed to do what they wanted. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 23 24 tfw2 γενέσθαι τὸ αἴτημα αὐτῶν 1 for their demand to happen Alternate translation: “to do what the crowd was demanding” LUK 23 25 nwd3 figs-explicit τὸν…βεβλημένον εἰς φυλακὴν 1 the one who had been put in prison If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly that this means Barabbas. Alternate translation: “Barabbas, whom the Romans had put in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 25 t66f figs-activepassive βεβλημένον εἰς φυλακὴν 1 who had been put in prison If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans had put in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 23 25 z8v8 figs-personification τὸν δὲ Ἰησοῦν παρέδωκεν τῷ θελήματι αὐτῶν 1 he handed over Jesus to their will Luke speaks figuratively of the **will** of the people as if it were a living thing into whose custody Pilate delivered Jesus. Alternate translation: “but he ordered his soldiers to do to Jesus what the crowd had demanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 23 25 z8v8 figs-personification τὸν δὲ Ἰησοῦν παρέδωκεν τῷ θελήματι αὐτῶν 1 he handed over Jesus to their will Luke speaks of the **will** of the people as if it were a living thing into whose custody Pilate delivered Jesus. Alternate translation: “but he ordered his soldiers to do to Jesus what the crowd had demanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 23 26 s9kc ὡς ἀπήγαγον αὐτόν 1 as they led him away Alternate translation: “while the soldiers were leading Jesus away from where Pilate had judged him” LUK 23 26 ysu3 figs-explicit ἐπιλαβόμενοι Σίμωνά…ἐπέθηκαν 1 seizing Simon … they put Luke assumes that his readers will know that Roman soldiers had the authority to compel people to carry their loads. Be sure that your translation does not suggest that the soldiers arrested Simon or that he had done anything wrong. Alternate translation: “making use of their authority, they conscripted Simon … and put” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 26 m618 writing-background Σίμωνά, τινα Κυρηναῖον ἐρχόμενον ἀπ’ ἀγροῦ 1 Simon, a certain Cyrenean coming from the country If it would be helpful to your readers, you could treat this information about this man, where he was from, and what he was doing as background information and put it first in the verse, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -4151,18 +4151,18 @@ LUK 23 27 ad9f ἠκολούθει…αὐτῷ πολὺ πλῆθος τοῦ LUK 23 27 s7gx writing-background καὶ γυναικῶν αἳ ἐκόπτοντο καὶ ἐθρήνουν αὐτόν 1 and of women who were mourning and wailing for him Luke provides this background information to help readers understand what happens next, when Jesus speaks to these women. It might be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now the crowd included women who were mourning and wailing for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 23 27 m621 translate-symaction ἐκόπτοντο 1 mourning See the note to **mourning** at [8:52](../08/52.md), and see how you translated this word there. It could mean that the women were pounding on their chests as a sign of grief, as was customary in this culture, or it could mean more generally that they were expressing their sorrow over what was happening to Jesus. Alternate translation: “pounding on their chests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) LUK 23 27 bp3x ἠκολούθει…αὐτῷ 1 was following him Here, the word **following** is not figurative. It does not mean that these people were Jesus’ disciples. Alternate translation: “were walking along behind him” -LUK 23 28 nl38 figs-metaphor θυγατέρες Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Daughters of Jerusalem As in [13:34](../13/34.md), Jesus is figuratively describing people who live in Jerusalem as if they were the children of the city and it was their mother. Alternate translation: “You women who live in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 23 28 nl38 figs-metaphor θυγατέρες Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Daughters of Jerusalem As in [13:34](../13/34.md), Jesus is describing people who live in Jerusalem as if they were the children of the city and it was their mother. Alternate translation: “You women who live in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 23 28 wi15 figs-explicit ἐφ’ ἑαυτὰς κλαίετε, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ τέκνα ὑμῶν 1 weep for yourselves and for your children Jesus does not say specifically why the women should weep for themselves and for their children, but the implication from what he says in [23:31](../23/31.md) is that they should weep because even worse things are going to happen to them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “weep for yourselves and for your children, because even worse things are going to happen to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 29 s9uj translate-versebridge ὅτι 1 For Jesus is giving the reason why the women of Jerusalem should weep for themselves and their children, as he told them to do in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this reason before the result by combining this verse and the previous one into a verse bridge. See the suggestions in the note about the similar situation in [22:16](../22/16.md) for how you might do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) LUK 23 29 rd8v figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Jesus is using the term **behold** to get the women to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 23 29 bjb7 figs-idiom ἔρχονται ἡμέραι ἐν αἷς 1 the days are coming in which Jesus is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “there will be a time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 23 29 bjb7 figs-idiom ἔρχονται ἡμέραι ἐν αἷς 1 the days are coming in which Jesus is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “there will be a time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 23 29 xi9e writing-pronouns ἐν αἷς ἐροῦσιν 1 in which they will say Here Jesus is using the pronoun **they** in an indefinite sense. He does not have specific individuals in mind. Alternate translation: “when people will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 23 29 m622 figs-quotesinquotes ἐροῦσιν, μακάριαι αἱ στεῖραι, καὶ αἱ κοιλίαι αἳ οὐκ ἐγέννησαν, καὶ μαστοὶ οἳ οὐκ ἔθρεψαν 1 they will say, ‘Blessed are the barren, yes, the wombs that did not give birth and the breasts that did not nurse.’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “people will say that women are fortunate if they never had children, if they never gave birth or nursed babies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 23 29 rgj1 figs-parallelism αἱ στεῖραι, καὶ αἱ κοιλίαι αἳ οὐκ ἐγέννησαν, καὶ μαστοὶ οἳ οὐκ ἔθρεψαν 1 the barren, yes, the wombs that did not give birth and the breasts that did not nurse After speaking of women who were **barren**, that is, who did not have children, Jesus describes the same women in more detail. He is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) LUK 23 29 m623 figs-synecdoche αἱ κοιλίαι αἳ οὐκ ἐγέννησαν, καὶ μαστοὶ οἳ οὐκ ἔθρεψαν 1 the wombs that did not give birth and the breasts that did not nurse These are two figures of speech in which Jesus is using one part of a person to represent the entire person. Alternate translation: “women who have never given birth or nursed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 23 30 te1i grammar-connect-time-simultaneous τότε 1 Then Here, **then** does not mean that people would say this after what they said in the previous verse. Rather, it means that they would say this at the same time that they were saying that. Alternate translation: “At that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) LUK 23 30 u1x1 writing-pronouns ἄρξονται λέγειν 1 they will begin to say Here Jesus is likely using the pronoun **they** in an indefinite sense, as in the previous verse. He probably does not have specific individuals in mind. However, the general reference may be to the people of Jerusalem, as UST suggests. Alternate translation: “people will begin to say” or “the people of Jerusalem will begin to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 23 30 m624 figs-apostrophe λέγειν τοῖς ὄρεσιν, πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς; καὶ τοῖς βουνοῖς, καλύψατε ἡμᾶς 1 to say to the mountains, ‘Fall on us,’ and to the hills, ‘Cover us’ Jesus is saying that at this time people will figuratively address something they know cannot hear them in order to express in a strong way what they are feeling. Alternate translation: “to say that they wished the mountains would fall on them and the hills would cover them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) +LUK 23 30 m624 figs-apostrophe λέγειν τοῖς ὄρεσιν, πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς; καὶ τοῖς βουνοῖς, καλύψατε ἡμᾶς 1 to say to the mountains, ‘Fall on us,’ and to the hills, ‘Cover us’ Jesus is saying that at this time people will address something they know cannot hear them in order to express in a strong way what they are feeling. Alternate translation: “to say that they wished the mountains would fall on them and the hills would cover them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) LUK 23 30 m625 figs-quotesinquotes λέγειν τοῖς ὄρεσιν, πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς; καὶ τοῖς βουνοῖς, καλύψατε ἡμᾶς 1 to say to the mountains, ‘Fall on us,’ and to the hills, ‘Cover us’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to tell the mountains to fall on them and the hills to cover them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 23 30 m626 figs-imperative πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς…καλύψατε ἡμᾶς 1 Fall on us … Cover us This is an imperative, but since the people cannot order the mountains and hills to do this, they would be using the imperative to express their wishes. Alternate translation: “We wish you would fall on us … We wish you would cover us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 23 30 m627 figs-explicit πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς…καλύψατε ἡμᾶς 1 Fall on us … Cover us The people do not want the mountains and hills to fall on them to harm them, but rather to protect them. Alternate translation: “We wish you would fall on us to protect us … We wish you would cover us to protect us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -4171,7 +4171,7 @@ LUK 23 31 nkk3 figs-metaphor ὅτι εἰ ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ, τ LUK 23 31 y238 figs-rquestion ὅτι εἰ ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ, ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν; ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ, τί γένηται? 1 For if they do these things in the moist tree, what will happen in the dry? Jesus does not expect the women to tell him what people will do in the future. Rather, he is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Since people are doing this when conditions are good, they will certainly do much worse when conditions become very bad!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 23 31 m629 writing-pronouns ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν 1 they do these things Here Jesus is using the pronoun **they** in an indefinite sense. Alternate translation: “people are doing these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 23 31 m630 figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ 1 in the moist tree This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “when the wood is fresh” or “when the wood is wet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 23 31 m631 figs-metonymy ξύλῳ 1 tree Jesus is using the term **tree** figuratively to refer to wood that comes from a **tree**. Alternate translation: “wood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 23 31 m631 figs-metonymy ξύλῳ 1 tree Jesus is using the term **tree** to refer to wood that comes from a **tree**. Alternate translation: “wood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 23 31 m632 translate-unknown ξύλῳ 1 tree A **tree** is a large plant with a hard exterior that people use for fuel and as building material. If your readers would not know what a **tree** is, or if people do not use wood from a **tree** as fuel in your area, you could use the name of something else that they use for fuel, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “burning material” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 23 31 zt5s figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ 1 in the dry This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “when the wood is dry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 23 31 m633 figs-nominaladj ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ 1 in the dry Jesus is using the adjective **dry** as a noun. In context, the term means **dry** wood. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply the noun for clarity. Alternate translation: “with dry wood” or “when the wood is dry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -4205,7 +4205,7 @@ LUK 23 35 m649 translate-names ὁ ἐκλεκτός 1 the Chosen One This is a LUK 23 36 b3jz figs-explicit ἐνέπαιξαν δὲ αὐτῷ καὶ οἱ στρατιῶται, προσερχόμενοι ὄξος προσφέροντες αὐτῷ 1 Then the soldiers also mocked him, coming up and offering him vinegar Luke does not say specifically in what way the soliders **mocked** Jesus by offering him **vinegar**, that is, the sour wine that was their common drink. This could mean: (1) since Luke records in the next verse that the soldiers spoke of Jesus being the “king of the Jews,” the common drink may have been intended to show that they did not really believe he was a king, since a king would have drunk fine wine. Alternate translation: “Then the soldiers also mocked him by coming and offering him cheap sour wine, which was not what a real king would drink” (2) the soldiers may have **mocked** Jesus just by **offering** him something to drink, but then not giving it to him, even though he would have been very thirsty. Alternate translation: “Then the soldiers also mocked him by coming and offering him some of their sour wine but then not giving him any to drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 37 x5wr figs-hypo εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων, σῶσον σεαυτόν 1 If you are the King of the Jews, save yourself The soldiers are mockingly suggesting a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose you really are the King of the Jews. Then save yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 23 37 m650 figs-explicit σῶσον σεαυτόν 1 save yourself The implication is that Jesus ought to be able to save himself from dying on the cross. Alternate translation: “do a miracle to save yourself from dying on that cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 23 38 l5be figs-metonymy ἦν δὲ καὶ ἐπιγραφὴ ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 there was also an inscription over him Luke is referring figuratively to a placard that the soldiers placed above Jesus by association with the fact that it bore an **inscription**, that is, something that the soldiers had written on it. Alternate translation: “The soldiers also attached a placard at the top of Jesus’ cross on which they had written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 23 38 l5be figs-metonymy ἦν δὲ καὶ ἐπιγραφὴ ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 there was also an inscription over him Luke is referring to a placard that the soldiers placed above Jesus by association with the fact that it bore an **inscription**, that is, something that the soldiers had written on it. Alternate translation: “The soldiers also attached a placard at the top of Jesus’ cross on which they had written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 23 38 w7aw figs-irony ἦν δὲ καὶ ἐπιγραφὴ ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 there was also an inscription over him The soliders did not really believe that Jesus was **the King of the Jews**. Rather, putting up this placard was another of the ways in which they mocked him. So the sign said the opposite of what the people who wrote it actually believed. Alternate translation: “the soldiers also attached a placard at the top of Jesus’ cross on which they had written mockingly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) LUK 23 39 m651 figs-activepassive κρεμασθέντων 1 having been hung If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “whom the soldiers had hung on a cross next to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 23 39 z9ej ἐβλασφήμει αὐτόν 1 blasphemed him As in [22:65](../22/65.md), the term **blasphemed** here likely has the general sense of “insulted,” although technically this criminal was guilty of blasphemy in the more specific sense, since he was suggesting that Jesus was not the Messiah. Alternate translation: “insulted him” @@ -4216,14 +4216,14 @@ LUK 23 40 lb4e figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ ἕτερος ἐ LUK 23 40 m653 figs-nominaladj ὁ ἕτερος 1 the other Luke is using the adjective **other** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could supply the noun “criminal” for clarity. Alternate translation: “the other criminal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 23 40 nk1r figs-rquestion οὐδὲ φοβῇ σὺ τὸν Θεόν, ὅτι ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ κρίματι εἶ? 1 Do you not even fear God, since you are under the same judgment? The second criminal does not expect the first criminal to tell him whether he fears God. Rather, the second criminal is using the question form to rebuke the first criminal. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You ought to fear God, since you are dying on a cross just as he is!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 23 40 m654 figs-explicit οὐδὲ φοβῇ σὺ τὸν Θεόν, ὅτι ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ κρίματι εἶ? 1 Do you not even fear God, since you are under the same judgment? If it would be helpful to your readers, you could bring out the implications of this statement more explicitly. Alternate translation: “You ought to fear God and show more respect for this godly man, since you are dying on a cross just as he is, and you will soon have to face God and answer for your actions!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 23 40 m655 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ κρίματι εἶ 1 you are under the same judgment The second criminal is using the word **judgment** figuratively to mean the punishment to which the first criminal was sentenced when the Romans pronounced **judgment** on him. Alternate translation: “you are being executed on a cross just as he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 23 40 m655 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ κρίματι εἶ 1 you are under the same judgment The second criminal is using the word **judgment** to mean the punishment to which the first criminal was sentenced when the Romans pronounced **judgment** on him. Alternate translation: “you are being executed on a cross just as he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 23 41 qyp6 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἐπράξαμεν…ἀπολαμβάνομεν 1 we … we are receiving … we did The second criminal, speaking to the first criminal, is using the term **we** to mean himself and the first criminal. So **we** would be inclusive in all these cases, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) LUK 23 41 m656 figs-verbs ἡμεῖς…ἐπράξαμεν…ἀπολαμβάνομεν 1 we … we are receiving … we did Since the term **we** refers to two people here, it would be in the dual form if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]]) LUK 23 41 i4gm figs-ellipsis ἡμεῖς…δικαίως 1 we justly The second criminal is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we are receiving this punishment justly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 23 41 m657 figs-nominaladj ἄξια…ὧν ἐπράξαμεν 1 worthy of what we did The second criminal is using the adjective **worthy** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “a just punishment for what we did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 23 41 nu35 figs-nominaladj οὗτος 1 this one The second criminal is using the adjective **this** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person, Jesus. ULT supplies the noun **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 23 42 mht9 writing-pronouns καὶ ἔλεγεν 1 And he said The pronoun **he** refers to the second criminal, who continues speaking, now to Jesus. Alternate translation: “The second criminal then said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 23 42 j9d9 figs-idiom μνήσθητί μου 1 remember me As in [1:72](../01/72.md), the word **remember** here figuratively describes Jesus thinking about this second criminal and considering what action he can take on his behalf. It does not suggest that Jesus would forget about him. Alternate translation: “do what you could to help me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 23 42 j9d9 figs-idiom μνήσθητί μου 1 remember me As in [1:72](../01/72.md), the word **remember** here describes Jesus thinking about this second criminal and considering what action he can take on his behalf. It does not suggest that Jesus would forget about him. Alternate translation: “do what you could to help me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 23 42 m658 figs-imperative μνήσθητί μου 1 remember me This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please do what you can to help me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 23 42 zyv3 figs-idiom ὅταν ἔλθῃς ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ σου 1 when you come into your kingdom To **come into** a **kingdom** means to begin to rule as king, as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “when you begin to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 23 43 abcv writing-pronouns εἶπεν αὐτῷ 1 he said to him The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, and the pronoun **him** refers to the second criminal. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to this criminal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -4237,14 +4237,14 @@ LUK 23 44 q4t3 σκότος ἐγένετο ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν γῆν LUK 23 44 m662 figs-metonymy σκότος ἐγένετο ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν γῆν 1 darkness was over the whole land This could also be a figurative reference to the sky, since it is **over** the **land**. Alternate translation: “the entire sky became dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 23 44 e8zn ἕως ὥρας ἐνάτης 1 until the ninth hour This phrase also expresses the way people in this culture began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “until three o’clock in the afternoon” LUK 23 44 m663 translate-ordinal ἕως ὥρας ἐνάτης 1 until the ninth hour If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “until hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -LUK 23 45 hjt3 figs-personification τοῦ ἡλίου ἐκλειπόντος 1 The sun failed This means figuratively that **the sun**, as if it were an active agent, **failed** to give its light. Luke is speaking from an observational perspective. The sun was still shining above the darkness, but its light could not be seen through the darkness. Alternate translation: “It was too dark even to see the light of the sun” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +LUK 23 45 hjt3 figs-personification τοῦ ἡλίου ἐκλειπόντος 1 The sun failed This means that **the sun**, as if it were an active agent, **failed** to give its light. Luke is speaking from an observational perspective. The sun was still shining above the darkness, but its light could not be seen through the darkness. Alternate translation: “It was too dark even to see the light of the sun” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 23 45 m664 translate-symaction ἐσχίσθη δὲ τὸ καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ μέσον 1 the curtain of the temple was torn in the middle See the General Notes to this chapter for an explanation of the symbolic significance of this action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) LUK 23 45 ssh2 figs-explicit τὸ καταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ 1 the curtain of the temple Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the curtain that separated the Most Holy Place from the rest of the temple. Alternate translation: “the curtain in front of the Most Holy Place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 45 ah4k figs-activepassive ἐσχίσθη 1 was torn If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God tore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 23 45 m665 figs-explicit μέσον 1 in the middle The implication, as the General Notes to this chapter explain, is that God tearing **the curtain** opened the way into the Most Holy Place. And so **in the middle** means not “across the middle,” from side to side, but “down through the middle,” from top to bottom. Alternate translation: “into two pieces, from top to bottom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 46 z1fq figs-idiom φωνήσας φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 1 crying out with a loud voice This is an idiom that means Jesus raised the volume of his **voice**. Alternate translation: “crying out loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 23 46 r4ub guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -LUK 23 46 mix5 figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖράς σου παρατίθεμαι τὸ Πνεῦμά μου 1 into your hands I entrust my spirit Jesus is using God’s **hands** figuratively to represent God’s care. Alternate translation: “I give my spirit to you, knowing you will care for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 23 46 mix5 figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖράς σου παρατίθεμαι τὸ Πνεῦμά μου 1 into your hands I entrust my spirit Jesus is using God’s **hands** to represent God’s care. Alternate translation: “I give my spirit to you, knowing you will care for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 23 46 m666 τὸ Πνεῦμά μου 1 my spirit The **spirit** of a person lives on after they die. So you could also translate this as a reference to Jesus’ life after death. Alternate translation: “my life” LUK 23 46 bd6y figs-euphemism ἐξέπνευσεν 1 he breathed out Luke is describing the death of Jesus in a discreet way. Alternate translation: “he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) LUK 23 47 p6lh figs-explicit ὁ ἑκατοντάρχης 1 the centurion The implication is that this was the Roman officer who was in charge of the other Roman soldiers who crucified Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Roman officer in charge of the crucifixion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -4278,7 +4278,7 @@ LUK 23 53 yy3n translate-unknown μνήματι λαξευτῷ 1 a hewn tomb Th LUK 23 53 m5wu figs-doublenegatives οὗ οὐκ ἦν οὐδεὶς οὔπω κείμενος 1 where no one ever had lain Here Luke uses a triple negative in Greek for emphasis, “where no one not yet had not lain.” This stresses the honor that Joseph was showing Jesus by putting his body in a tomb that was being used for the very first time. If your language uses multiple negatives for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You might express the emphasis in other ways, and it may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “No body had ever before been put in that tomb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 23 54 m678 grammar-connect-time-background καὶ 1 And Luke uses **and** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 23 54 tia9 figs-explicit ἡμέρα ἦν παρασκευῆς 1 it was the Day of Preparation If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what this **day** was used in **preparation** for. Alternate translation: “the day when people made preparations for the Sabbath, the Jewish day of rest, since they could not do any work then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 23 54 b4i1 figs-metaphor Σάββατον ἐπέφωσκεν 1 the Sabbath was dawning For the Jews, the day began at sunset. But Luke speaks figuratively of this day **dawning** to mean that it was about to begin, even though this would happen at sunset rather than at sunrise. Alternate translation: “it was nearly sunset, when the Sabbath would begin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 23 54 b4i1 figs-metaphor Σάββατον ἐπέφωσκεν 1 the Sabbath was dawning For the Jews, the day began at sunset. But Luke speaks of this day **dawning** to mean that it was about to begin, even though this would happen at sunset rather than at sunrise. Alternate translation: “it was nearly sunset, when the Sabbath would begin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 23 55 pu3i figs-idiom αἵτινες ἦσαν συνεληλυθυῖαι ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας αὐτῷ 1 who had come out of Galilee with him The expression **had come out** is an idiom that means to have traveled from a place. Alternate translation: “who had traveled from the region of Galilee with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 23 55 m679 figs-ellipsis κατακολουθήσασαι 1 having followed after Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “followed Joseph when he took the body of Jesus away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 23 55 m680 figs-hendiadys τὸ μνημεῖον καὶ ὡς ἐτέθη τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ 1 the tomb and how his body was laid Luke is using a figure of speech in which two phrases are connected with the word **and**, and one of the phrases describes the other. Alternate translation: “the tomb where Joseph laid the body of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -4315,12 +4315,12 @@ LUK 24 7 sj3u figs-quotations λέγων…ὅτι 1 saying that These words int LUK 24 7 pl6b figs-activepassive τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου…παραδοθῆναι 1 for the Son of Man to be delivered If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for someone to betray the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 24 7 m691 figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man When Jesus said this, he was referring to himself in the third person. If you decide to represent this as a direct quotation, and If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “me, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 24 7 m692 figs-explicit τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man See how you translated this title in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “him, the Messiah” or, if you are translating as a direct quotation in the first person, “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 24 7 e4ca figs-metaphor εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων ἁμαρτωλῶν 1 into the hands of sinful men As in [9:44](../09/44.md), **hands** here figuratively represent power and control. Alternate translation: “and give sinful men power over him” or, if you are translating as a direct quotation in the first person, “and give sinful men power over me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 24 7 e4ca figs-metaphor εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων ἁμαρτωλῶν 1 into the hands of sinful men As in [9:44](../09/44.md), **hands** here represent power and control. Alternate translation: “and give sinful men power over him” or, if you are translating as a direct quotation in the first person, “and give sinful men power over me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 24 7 m693 figs-activepassive καὶ σταυρωθῆναι 1 and to be crucified If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “and for those sinful men to crucify him” or, if you are translating as a direct quotation in the first person, “and for those sinful men to crucify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 24 7 m694 figs-explicit καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἀναστῆναι 1 and on the third day to rise up See how you translated this phrase in [9:22](../09/22.md). Alternate translation: “and after spending the next full day in the grave, to come back to life on the day after that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 24 7 dta4 translate-ordinal τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the third day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “on day three” or, depending on how your culture reckons time, “on day two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -LUK 24 7 m695 figs-metonymy ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise up Jesus spoke figuratively of coming back to life in this way, since it involved coming **up** out of the grave. Alternate translation: “to come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 24 8 rew5 figs-metonymy ἐμνήσθησαν τῶν ῥημάτων αὐτοῦ 1 they remembered his words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to describe the statement that Jesus made using words. Alternate translation: “the women remembered what Jesus had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 7 m695 figs-metonymy ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise up Jesus spoke of coming back to life in this way, since it involved coming **up** out of the grave. Alternate translation: “to come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 8 rew5 figs-metonymy ἐμνήσθησαν τῶν ῥημάτων αὐτοῦ 1 they remembered his words Luke is using the term **words** to describe the statement that Jesus made using words. Alternate translation: “the women remembered what Jesus had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 24 9 iz68 figs-nominaladj τοῖς ἕνδεκα 1 the Eleven This expression is equivalent to “the Twelve,” which occurs in [8:1](../08/01.md) and several other places in the book. See how you translated this term there. Luke now says **the Eleven** because Judas Iscariot was no longer part of the group. You may have decided to translate the nominal adjective “Twelve” with an equivalent phrase. If so, you could do the same thing here. Alternate translation: “the 11 men who remained of those whom Jesus had appointed to be apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 24 9 m696 translate-names τοῖς ἕνδεκα 1 the Eleven Alternatively, you may have decided in [8:1](../08/01.md) to translate “the Twelve” as a title, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns. If so, you can do the same thing with **the Eleven** here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 24 9 fnh6 figs-explicit καὶ πᾶσιν τοῖς λοιποῖς 1 and to all the rest Implicitly this means all the other disciples of Jesus who were together with the 11 apostles at that time. Alternate translation: “and to all the rest of the disciples who were with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -4329,8 +4329,8 @@ LUK 24 10 m697 translate-names Μαγδαληνὴ Μαρία 1 Mary Magdalene * LUK 24 10 m698 translate-names Ἰωάννα 1 Joanna **Joanna** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 24 10 m699 translate-names Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου 1 Mary the mother of James **Mary** is the name of a woman, and **James** is the name of her son. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 24 11 m700 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce a contrast between the exciting good news that the women were sharing and the disbelieving reaction of the people they shared it with. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -LUK 24 11 apl7 figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 these words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to describe the report that the women gave using words. Alternate translation: “what the women were saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 24 11 m701 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν 1 before them Luke uses this expression, which means “in front them,” to mean “where they could see.” Seeing, in turn, figuratively means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “in their opinion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 24 11 apl7 figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 these words Luke is using the term **words** to describe the report that the women gave using words. Alternate translation: “what the women were saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 11 m701 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν 1 before them Luke uses this expression, which means “in front them,” to mean “where they could see.” Seeing, in turn, means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “in their opinion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 24 11 m702 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 2 and This phrase describes the result of the fact that the report seemed like nonsense to the apostles and other believers. Alternate translation: “so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 24 11 m703 writing-pronouns ἠπίστουν αὐταῖς 1 they disbelieved them The word **they** refers to the apostles and other believers, and the word **them** refers to the women. Alternate translation: “so the apostles and other believers did not believe the women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 24 12 rm1d figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 rising up This expression is an idiom that means to take initiative. It does not necessarily mean that Peter had been sitting or lying down and then stood up. Alternate translation: “taking initiative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -4350,27 +4350,27 @@ LUK 24 14 m708 figs-explicit πάντων τῶν συμβεβηκότων το LUK 24 15 m709 writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this episode. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 24 15 b3sl writing-pronouns αὐτὸς Ἰησοῦς 1 Jesus himself The word **himself** emphasizes the fact that it was truly Jesus who joined them as they walked. This was not a vision in which Jesus only appeared to be there. Alternate translation: “Jesus, risen from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 24 15 m710 ἐγγίσας, συνεπορεύετο αὐτοῖς 1 approaching, was going with them Alternate translation: “caught up with them and walked along with them” -LUK 24 16 q6nk figs-synecdoche οἱ δὲ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν ἐκρατοῦντο τοῦ μὴ ἐπιγνῶναι αὐτόν 1 But their eyes were being held so as not to recognize him Luke uses one part of the men, their **eyes**, to speak figuratively of the capacity of the men themselves to recognize Jesus. Alternate translation: “But God prevented them from recognizing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -LUK 24 16 m711 figs-metaphor οἱ δὲ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν ἐκρατοῦντο τοῦ μὴ ἐπιγνῶναι αὐτόν 1 But their eyes were being held so as not to recognize him Luke uses the term **held** figuratively, as if someone were physically holding back the eyes, to mean “restrained.” Alternate translation: “But God prevented them from recognizing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 24 16 q6nk figs-synecdoche οἱ δὲ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν ἐκρατοῦντο τοῦ μὴ ἐπιγνῶναι αὐτόν 1 But their eyes were being held so as not to recognize him Luke uses one part of the men, their **eyes**, to speak of the capacity of the men themselves to recognize Jesus. Alternate translation: “But God prevented them from recognizing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 24 16 m711 figs-metaphor οἱ δὲ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν ἐκρατοῦντο τοῦ μὴ ἐπιγνῶναι αὐτόν 1 But their eyes were being held so as not to recognize him Luke uses the term **held**, as if someone were physically holding back the eyes, to mean “restrained.” Alternate translation: “But God prevented them from recognizing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 24 16 m712 figs-activepassive οἱ δὲ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτῶν ἐκρατοῦντο τοῦ μὴ ἐπιγνῶναι αὐτόν 1 But their eyes were being held so as not to recognize him If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “But God prevented them from recognizing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 24 17 xak8 figs-youdual αὐτούς…ἀντιβάλλετε…περιπατοῦντες…ἐστάθησαν 1 them … you are exchanging … you are walking … they stood still Since Jesus is speaking to two men, all of these expressions would be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. (Your language might even put the adjective **gloomy**, which is plural in Greek, in the dual, since it describes the two men.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -LUK 24 17 m713 figs-metonymy οἱ λόγοι οὗτοι οὓς ἀντιβάλλετε πρὸς ἀλλήλους 1 these words that you are exchanging with each other Jesus is using the term **words** figuratively to describe what the men had been saying using words. Alternate translation: “these things that you have been saying to one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 17 m713 figs-metonymy οἱ λόγοι οὗτοι οὓς ἀντιβάλλετε πρὸς ἀλλήλους 1 these words that you are exchanging with each other Jesus is using the term **words** to describe what the men had been saying using words. Alternate translation: “these things that you have been saying to one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 24 17 m714 ἐστάθησαν, σκυθρωποί 1 they stood still, gloomy Alternate translation: “they stopped walking and looked sad” LUK 24 18 m715 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ εἷς ὀνόματι Κλεοπᾶς εἶπεν 1 Then, answering, one named Cleopas said Together the two words **answering** and **said** mean that Cleopas responded to what Jesus asked him. Alternate translation: “Then one named Cleopas responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 24 18 bqc9 translate-names Κλεοπᾶς 1 Cleopas **Cleopas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 24 18 qx7m figs-rquestion σὺ μόνος παροικεῖς Ἰερουσαλὴμ καὶ οὐκ ἔγνως τὰ γενόμενα ἐν αὐτῇ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις? 1 Are you alone visiting Jerusalem and have not known the things that have happened in her in these days? Cleopas does not expect Jesus to tell him whether he is the only visitor to Jerusalem who does not know what has recently happened in the city. Rather, Cleopas is using the question form to show his surprise, since he expects that everyone would know about these events. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “You must be the only person visiting Jerusalem who does not know what has just happened in the city!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 24 18 m717 writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτῇ 1 in her Conventionally, Greek referred to cities with feminine pronouns. Your language may use a different gender. You could also use a noun. Alternate translation: “in it” or “in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 24 18 m718 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in these days Cleopas is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” or “recently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 24 18 m718 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in these days Cleopas is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” or “recently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 24 19 aj5c figs-explicit ποῖα 1 What kind This implicitly means, “**What kind** of things?” But by asking about the quality of the events, rather than just the fact of the events (“What things?”), Jesus is acknowledging that they must have been very special. Alternate translation: “What kind of things?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 24 19 m719 figs-verbs οἱ…εἶπαν 1 they said Since two men are speaking, this would be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]]) LUK 24 19 m720 translate-names Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Ναζαρηνοῦ 1 Jesus the Nazarene The term **Nazarene** is a name that refers to a person who is from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated his name in [18:37](../18/37.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 24 19 m721 figs-idiom ἀνὴρ, προφήτης 1 a man, a prophet This is an idiomatic way of speaking about a person in an honorable way. Alternate translation: “a distinguished prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 24 19 m722 figs-metonymy δυνατὸς ἐν ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ 1 powerful in work and word The two men are using the term **work** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus did, and the term **word** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus said. Alternate translation: “who did great miracles and taught profound things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 24 19 x25r figs-metaphor ἐναντίον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ παντὸς τοῦ λαοῦ 1 in front of God and all the people This expression means “while God and all the people were watching.” In the case of **God**, it means figuratively that God gave Jesus the power to do miracles and to teach profound things. In the case of **the people**, it means that the miracles and teachings of Jesus amazed the people when they saw and heard them. Alternate translation: “as God empowered him, to the amazement of all the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 24 19 m722 figs-metonymy δυνατὸς ἐν ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ 1 powerful in work and word The two men are using the term **work** to describe the things that Jesus did, and the term **word** to describe the things that Jesus said. Alternate translation: “who did great miracles and taught profound things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 19 x25r figs-metaphor ἐναντίον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ παντὸς τοῦ λαοῦ 1 in front of God and all the people This expression means “while God and all the people were watching.” In the case of **God**, it means that God gave Jesus the power to do miracles and to teach profound things. In the case of **the people**, it means that the miracles and teachings of Jesus amazed the people when they saw and heard them. Alternate translation: “as God empowered him, to the amazement of all the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 24 19 m723 figs-hyperbole παντὸς τοῦ λαοῦ 1 all the people This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “great crowds of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 24 20 m724 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our This is a reference to the Jewish leaders, and the two men likely recognize Jesus as a fellow Jew, so the word **our** would be inclusive here, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -LUK 24 20 e5zt figs-metonymy παρέδωκαν αὐτὸν…εἰς κρίμα θανάτου 1 delivered him to a judgment of death The men are using the **judgment of death**, that is, the death sentence that the Romans passed on Jesus, figuratively to represent the Romans themselves. Alternate translation: “turned him over to the Romans, who sentenced him to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 24 20 m725 figs-synecdoche καὶ ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν 1 and crucified him The men speak as if their **chief priests** and **rulers** crucified Jesus themselves. They are speaking figuratively, describing all of the people who were responsible for the crucifixion of Jesus, including the crowds, Pilate, and the Roman soldiers by reference to the Jewish leaders, who set the process in motion by stirring up the crowds and persuading Pilate. Alternate translation: “so that he was crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 24 20 e5zt figs-metonymy παρέδωκαν αὐτὸν…εἰς κρίμα θανάτου 1 delivered him to a judgment of death The men are using the **judgment of death**, that is, the death sentence that the Romans passed on Jesus, to represent the Romans themselves. Alternate translation: “turned him over to the Romans, who sentenced him to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 20 m725 figs-synecdoche καὶ ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν 1 and crucified him The men speak as if their **chief priests** and **rulers** crucified Jesus themselves. They are speaking, describing all of the people who were responsible for the crucifixion of Jesus, including the crowds, Pilate, and the Roman soldiers by reference to the Jewish leaders, who set the process in motion by stirring up the crowds and persuading Pilate. Alternate translation: “so that he was crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 24 21 ei9t figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἠλπίζομεν 1 we were hoping The men are speaking of themselves and likely their fellow disciples as well, but not of Jesus, so **we** would be exclusive here, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) LUK 24 21 ljb1 figs-metaphor ὁ μέλλων λυτροῦσθαι τὸν Ἰσραήλ 1 the one who was going to redeem Israel See how you translated the similar expression in [2:38](../02/38.md). The word **redeem** means literally to “buy back,” for example, to buy someone’s freedom from slavery, but the men are using it in a figurative sense here. Alternate translation: “the person who was going to bring God’s blessings and favor back to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 24 21 m726 figs-personification τὸν Ἰσραήλ 1 Israel The men are speaking of all the Israelites as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -4387,13 +4387,13 @@ LUK 24 24 m731 figs-explicit εὗρον οὕτως, καθὼς καὶ αἱ LUK 24 24 fkw9 writing-pronouns αὐτὸν δὲ οὐκ εἶδον 1 they did not see him The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “they did not see Jesus himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 24 25 m732 figs-nominaladj ἀνόητοι 1 foolish ones Jesus is using the adjective **foolish** as a noun. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “you foolish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 24 25 m733 figs-youdual ἀνόητοι 1 foolish ones Jesus is speaking to two men, so the word “you” would be in the dual form if your language marks that form, if you choose to use that word in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -LUK 24 25 vg3z figs-metaphor καὶ βραδεῖς τῇ καρδίᾳ, τοῦ πιστεύειν 1 and slow in heart to believe The term **heart** figuratively represents the mind. Alternate translation: “who have such difficulty believing with your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 24 25 m734 figs-metonymy καὶ βραδεῖς τῇ καρδίᾳ, τοῦ πιστεύειν 1 and slow in heart to believe The word **slow** figuratively represents difficulty, since someone who has difficulty doing something will do it slowly. Alternate translation: “who have such difficulty believing with your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 25 vg3z figs-metaphor καὶ βραδεῖς τῇ καρδίᾳ, τοῦ πιστεύειν 1 and slow in heart to believe The term **heart** represents the mind. Alternate translation: “who have such difficulty believing with your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 24 25 m734 figs-metonymy καὶ βραδεῖς τῇ καρδίᾳ, τοῦ πιστεύειν 1 and slow in heart to believe The word **slow** represents difficulty, since someone who has difficulty doing something will do it slowly. Alternate translation: “who have such difficulty believing with your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 24 25 m735 figs-hyperbole πᾶσιν οἷς ἐλάλησαν οἱ προφῆται 1 all that the prophets have spoken The term **all** is a generalization that refers specifically to what the prophets said about the Messiah. Alternate translation: “what the prophets said about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 24 26 n85k figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ταῦτα ἔδει παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν καὶ εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ? 1 Was it not necessary for the Christ to suffer these things, and to enter into his glory? Jesus is using the question form to remind the disciples about what the prophets said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “The Messiah had to suffer these things in order to enter into his glory!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 24 26 m736 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ 1 and to enter into his glory This is not a second thing that it was necessary for the Messiah to do. Rather, this is the result for which it was necessary for the Messiah to do the first thing. Alternate translation: “in order to enter into his glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 24 26 f8es figs-abstractnouns εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ 1 to enter into his glory If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** with an adjective such as “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to receive a glorious position” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LUK 24 27 g4t7 figs-metonymy Μωϋσέως…τῶν προφητῶν 1 Moses … the prophets Luke is using the name **Moses** figuratively to refer to the part of Scripture that Moses wrote, and the term **the prophets** to refer to the part of Scripture that they wrote. Alternate translation: “the writings of Moses … the writings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 27 g4t7 figs-metonymy Μωϋσέως…τῶν προφητῶν 1 Moses … the prophets Luke is using the name **Moses** to refer to the part of Scripture that Moses wrote, and the term **the prophets** to refer to the part of Scripture that they wrote. Alternate translation: “the writings of Moses … the writings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 24 27 m737 καὶ ἀπὸ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν 1 and from all the prophets The term **beginning** applies just to the writings of Moses. Jesus began with that part of Scripture, and he then continued teaching from the writings of the prophets. Alternate translation: “and then from all the writings of the prophets” or “and continuing with all the writings of the prophets” LUK 24 28 m738 figs-verbs ἤγγισαν εἰς τὴν κώμην οὗ ἐπορεύοντο 1 they drew near to the village where they were going The first **they** refers to Jesus and the two disciples, while the second **they** refers only to the two disciples, so **they were going** would be in the dual form, if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]]) LUK 24 28 cdj2 figs-explicit αὐτὸς προσεποιήσατο πορρώτερον πορεύεσθαι 1 he acted as if he would travel farther This means that the two disciples understood from Jesus’ actions that he was continuing on to another destination. Perhaps he kept walking on the road when they turned off to enter Emmaus. There is no indication that Jesus deceived them with words. Alternate translation: “Jesus seemed to be heading farther down the road” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -4403,13 +4403,13 @@ LUK 24 29 pn4d figs-ellipsis παρεβιάσαντο αὐτὸν 1 they urged LUK 24 29 m741 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 us The men are speaking of themselves but not of Jesus, so **us** would be exclusive here, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) LUK 24 29 s6ps figs-parallelism πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστὶν, καὶ κέκλικεν ἤδη ἡ ἡμέρα 1 it is toward evening and the day has already declined These two phrases mean the same thing. The two disciples are likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “it is already getting dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) LUK 24 29 m742 figs-explicit πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστὶν, καὶ κέκλικεν ἤδη ἡ ἡμέρα 1 it is toward evening and the day has already declined The implications are that the disciples are saying this out of concern for Jesus’ safety. Alternate translation: “it is already getting dark, and soon it will not be safe to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 24 29 m743 figs-metonymy κέκλικεν ἤδη ἡ ἡμέρα 1 the day has already declined The disciples are referring figuratively to the sun as **the day**, since day is when the sun shines. Alternate translation: “the sun is going down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 29 m743 figs-metonymy κέκλικεν ἤδη ἡ ἡμέρα 1 the day has already declined The disciples are referring to the sun as **the day**, since day is when the sun shines. Alternate translation: “the sun is going down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 24 29 tgi6 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 3 And Luke uses this word to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Because the two disciples urged Jesus to stay with them, he agreed. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 24 30 k6ud writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this episode. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 24 30 m744 translate-unknown ἐν τῷ κατακλιθῆναι αὐτὸν μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 when he had reclined at the table with them See how you translated this phrase in [5:29](../05/29.md). It was the custom in this culture for dinner guests to eat while lying comfortably around the table on banqueting couches. Alternate translation: “when they had all sat down together to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 24 30 ecm2 εὐλόγησεν 1 he blessed it Alternate translation: “he gave thanks for it” or “he thanked God for it” LUK 24 30 m745 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 them The pronoun **them** would be in the dual form, if your language marks that form, since it refers to the two disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -LUK 24 31 h4yr figs-metonymy αὐτῶν δὲ διηνοίχθησαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ 1 their eyes were opened Here, **eyes** figuratively represents understanding of what one is seeing. Alternate translation: “God enabled them to understand what they had been seeing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 31 h4yr figs-metonymy αὐτῶν δὲ διηνοίχθησαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ 1 their eyes were opened Here, **eyes** represents understanding of what one is seeing. Alternate translation: “God enabled them to understand what they had been seeing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 24 31 m746 figs-activepassive αὐτῶν δὲ διηνοίχθησαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ 1 their eyes were opened If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God enabled them to understand what they had been seeing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 24 31 yev2 figs-idiom αὐτὸς ἄφαντος ἐγένετο ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 he became invisible from them Here Luke uses an unusual expression, saying that Jesus **became invisible**. It does not mean that Jesus remained in the room but could not be seen. Rather, it means that he left suddenly and so the two disciples did not see him any more. Alternate translation: “suddenly they did not see him any more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 24 32 m747 figs-verbs εἶπαν…ἡμῶν…ἡμῖν…ἡμῖν 1 they said … our … us … us This verb, as well as these three pronouns, would be in the dual form, if your language marks that form, since they all apply to the two disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]]) @@ -4417,12 +4417,12 @@ LUK 24 32 inw4 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν καιομ LUK 24 32 m748 figs-metaphor οὐχὶ ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν καιομένη ἦν 1 Was not our heart burning The men are using the metaphor of a **heart burning** to describe their excitement at hearing Jesus explain the Scriptures. You could indicate this meaning in your translation and represent the metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “it was so exciting, it was as if we were on fire inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 24 32 m749 figs-explicit οὐχὶ ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν καιομένη ἦν 1 Was not our heart burning If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate why the men found it so exciting when Jesus explained the Scriptures to them, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 24 32 m750 figs-possession οὐχὶ ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν καιομένη ἦν 1 Was not our heart burning If it would be unusual in your language for two people to speak as if they had one **heart**, if you decide to use this metaphor in your translation, you could make it plural, or dual if your language uses that form. Alternate translation: “Were not our hearts burning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -LUK 24 32 m751 figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν 1 our heart The men are using the term **heart** figuratively to mean the inner part of a person. Alternate translation: “inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 24 32 m751 figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν 1 our heart The men are using the term **heart** to mean the inner part of a person. Alternate translation: “inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 24 32 m752 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμῖν…ἡμῖν 1 our … us … us The men are speaking to each other about themselves, so these pronouns would be inclusive, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -LUK 24 32 xy6p figs-metaphor ὡς διήνοιγεν ἡμῖν τὰς Γραφάς 1 as he opened to us the Scriptures Jesus did not open a book or a scroll. The term **opened** figuratively means “explained.” Alternate translation: “while he explained the Scriptures to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 24 32 xy6p figs-metaphor ὡς διήνοιγεν ἡμῖν τὰς Γραφάς 1 as he opened to us the Scriptures Jesus did not open a book or a scroll. The term **opened** means “explained.” Alternate translation: “while he explained the Scriptures to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 24 33 qi47 figs-verbs ἀναστάντες…ὑπέστρεψαν…εὗρον 1 rising up … they returned … they found These verbs would be in the dual form, if your language uses that form, since they describe actions of the two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]]) LUK 24 33 ar2c figs-idiom ἀναστάντες 1 rising up As in [24:12](../24/12.md), this expression is an idiom that means to take initiative. It does not necessarily mean that the men had been sitting or lying down and then stood up. Alternate translation: “starting out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 24 33 m753 figs-idiom αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 that same hour Luke is using the term **hour** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at once” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +LUK 24 33 m753 figs-idiom αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 that same hour Luke is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at once” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 24 33 m754 figs-activepassive εὗρον ἠθροισμένους τοὺς ἕνδεκα καὶ τοὺς σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 they found the Eleven having been gathered, and those with them If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they found that the 11 apostles had gathered together with some other disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 24 33 dw85 translate-names τοὺς ἕνδεκα 1 the Eleven See how you translated this term in [24:9](../24/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 24 34 kyn4 λέγοντας 1 saying This word applies to the apostles and disciples in Jerusalem, not to the two men who had just traveled back from Emmaus. Alternate translation: “and they told the two men” @@ -4434,7 +4434,7 @@ LUK 24 34 m759 translate-names Σίμωνι 1 Simon This means the same man whom LUK 24 35 m760 writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ…αὐτοῖς 1 they … them These pronouns refer to the two men who returned from Emmaus. They would be in the dual form, if your language marks that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 24 35 fb1r figs-ellipsis τὰ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ 1 the things on the way Luke is telling this story in a concise way. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express more fully what this means. Alternate translation: “what had happened on their journey” or “how Jesus had joined them as they traveled and what they had talked about with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 24 35 mnn2 figs-activepassive ὡς ἐγνώσθη αὐτοῖς 1 how he was made known to them If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “how they recognized Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 24 35 y3f8 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 in the breaking of the bread Luke is using **the breaking of the bread** figuratively to represent something associated with it. Alternate translation: “at the time when he broke the bread” or “by the way that he broke the bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 35 y3f8 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 in the breaking of the bread Luke is using **the breaking of the bread** to represent something associated with it. Alternate translation: “at the time when he broke the bread” or “by the way that he broke the bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 24 36 m761 writing-pronouns αὐτῶν 1 they The pronoun **they** refers to the two men who returned from Emmaus, so it would be in the dual form, if your language marks that form. You could also use a noun phrase instead. Alternate translation: “the two men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 24 36 rt8d figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ἔστη 1 he himself stood Luke uses the word **himself** to emphasize the surprise of Jesus actually appearing to this group. Alternate translation: “none other than Jesus himself stood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) LUK 24 36 q7yl ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν 1 in the midst of them Alternate translation: “among them” or “in their group” @@ -4446,25 +4446,25 @@ LUK 24 37 z4q5 figs-explicit ἐδόκουν πνεῦμα θεωρεῖν 1 the LUK 24 37 q9rf πνεῦμα 1 a spirit In this context, the term **spirit** refers to the spirit of a dead person. Alternate translation: “a ghost” LUK 24 38 jj1h figs-rquestion τί τεταραγμένοι ἐστέ, καὶ διὰ τί διαλογισμοὶ ἀναβαίνουσιν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν? 1 Why are you troubled, and why are doubts arising in your heart? Jesus is using the question form to challenge and reassure his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “You do not need to be upset, and you do not need to have doubts in your minds!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 24 38 m763 figs-activepassive τί τεταραγμένοι ἐστέ 1 Why have you been troubled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state what is doing the action. Alternate translation: “Why does my appearing here upset you” or, if you chose to translate the rhetorical question as a statement or exclamation, “My appearing here should not upset you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 24 38 m764 figs-metaphor διὰ τί διαλογισμοὶ ἀναβαίνουσιν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν 1 why are doubts arising in your heart Jesus is using the term **arising** figuratively to mean coming into consciousness. Alternate translation: “why are you starting to have doubts” or, if you chose to translate the rhetorical question as a statement or exclamation, “you should not be starting to have doubts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 24 38 m764 figs-metaphor διὰ τί διαλογισμοὶ ἀναβαίνουσιν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν 1 why are doubts arising in your heart Jesus is using the term **arising** to mean coming into consciousness. Alternate translation: “why are you starting to have doubts” or, if you chose to translate the rhetorical question as a statement or exclamation, “you should not be starting to have doubts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 24 38 m765 figs-explicit διαλογισμοὶ 1 doubts If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate what the disciples were doubting. Alternate translation: “doubts that I have truly risen from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 24 38 m766 ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν 1 in your heart If it would be unusual in your language for someone speak as if a group of people had one **heart**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “in your hearts” -LUK 24 38 m767 figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν 1 in your heart As in [24:35](../24/35.md), the **heart** figuratively represents the mind here. Alternate translation: “in your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 24 39 m768 figs-metonymy ἴδετε τὰς χεῖράς μου καὶ τοὺς πόδας μου 1 See my hands and my feet Jesus is figuratively telling the disciples to look at the nail marks from crucifixion by reference to where those marks are, in his **hands** and **feet**. Alternate translation: “Look at the nail marks in my hands and feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 38 m767 figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν 1 in your heart As in [24:35](../24/35.md), the **heart** represents the mind here. Alternate translation: “in your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 24 39 m768 figs-metonymy ἴδετε τὰς χεῖράς μου καὶ τοὺς πόδας μου 1 See my hands and my feet Jesus is telling the disciples to look at the nail marks from crucifixion by reference to where those marks are, in his **hands** and **feet**. Alternate translation: “Look at the nail marks in my hands and feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 24 39 m769 figs-rpronouns ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι αὐτός 1 that I myself am Jesus uses the word **myself** to emphasize that he genuinely is who he appears to be. Alternate translation: “and you will recognize that it is really me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) LUK 24 39 a12n grammar-connect-logic-result ψηλαφήσατέ με καὶ ἴδετε, ὅτι πνεῦμα σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα οὐκ ἔχει, καθὼς ἐμὲ θεωρεῖτε ἔχοντα 1 Touch me and see, for a spirit does not have flesh and bones as you see me having If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since a ghost does not have a physical body, as you see that I have, touch me to determine that my body is real” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -LUK 24 39 m770 figs-metaphor καὶ ἴδετε 1 and see Here, **see** does not literally mean to look at something. Rather, it figuratively means to determine something. Alternate translation: “to determine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 24 39 tf2v figs-merism σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα 1 flesh and bones Jesus is describing the human body figuratively by referring to two of its major components. Alternate translation: “a physical body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -LUK 24 40 qm9p figs-metonymy τὰς χεῖρας καὶ τοὺς πόδας 1 his hands and his feet As in [24:39](../24/39.md), this figuratively means the nail marks from crucifixion in Jesus’ **hands** and **feet**. Alternate translation: “the nail marks in his hands and feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 39 m770 figs-metaphor καὶ ἴδετε 1 and see Here, **see** does not literally mean to look at something. Rather, it means to determine something. Alternate translation: “to determine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 24 39 tf2v figs-merism σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα 1 flesh and bones Jesus is describing the human body by referring to two of its major components. Alternate translation: “a physical body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +LUK 24 40 qm9p figs-metonymy τὰς χεῖρας καὶ τοὺς πόδας 1 his hands and his feet As in [24:39](../24/39.md), this means the nail marks from crucifixion in Jesus’ **hands** and **feet**. Alternate translation: “the nail marks in his hands and feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 24 41 m771 figs-doublet ἔτι δὲ ἀπιστούντων αὐτῶν…καὶ θαυμαζόντων 1 And as they were still disbelieving and wonderingg These two terms mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “And as they were still finding it very hard to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) LUK 24 41 m772 figs-explicit ἔτι δὲ ἀπιστούντων αὐτῶν…καὶ θαυμαζόντων 1 And as they were still disbelieving and wondering If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what the disciples were **disbelieving and wondering** about. Alternate translation: “And as they were still finding it very hard to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 24 41 hr4f figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς 1 from the joy If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **joy** with an adjective such as “happy.” Alternate translation: “because they were so happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 24 41 m773 τι βρώσιμον 1 anything eatable Alternate translation: “anything to eat” LUK 24 43 tyh4 figs-explicit ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν ἔφαγεν 1 he ate it before them Jesus did this to prove that he had a physical body, because a spirit or ghost would not be able to eat food. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly that this was the reason. Alternate translation: “he had them watch him eat it, to prove that he had a physical body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 24 43 j8qf figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν ἔφαγεν 1 he ate it before them This expression means “in front of them,” that is, “where they could see him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 24 44 m774 figs-metonymy οὗτοι οἱ λόγοι μου, οὓς ἐλάλησα πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 These are my words that I spoke to you Jesus is using the term **words** figuratively to refer to what he said using words. Alternate translation: “It is just as I told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 44 m774 figs-metonymy οὗτοι οἱ λόγοι μου, οὓς ἐλάλησα πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 These are my words that I spoke to you Jesus is using the term **words** to refer to what he said using words. Alternate translation: “It is just as I told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 24 44 tfk8 ἔτι ὢν σὺν ὑμῖν 1 when I was still with you Alternate translation: “when I was with you before” -LUK 24 44 q7x8 figs-merism πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Μωϋσέως, καὶ τοῖς προφήταις, καὶ ψαλμοῖς, περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 all the things written about me in the law of Moses, and in the prophets, and in the Psalms Jesus is referring figuratively to all of the Hebrew Scriptures by naming their main components. Alternate translation: “everything that the Scriptures say about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +LUK 24 44 q7x8 figs-merism πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Μωϋσέως, καὶ τοῖς προφήταις, καὶ ψαλμοῖς, περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 all the things written about me in the law of Moses, and in the prophets, and in the Psalms Jesus is referring to all of the Hebrew Scriptures by naming their main components. Alternate translation: “everything that the Scriptures say about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) LUK 24 44 g76a figs-activepassive πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα…περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 all the things having been written about me If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “everything that Scripture says about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 24 44 m776 translate-names ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Μωϋσέως, καὶ τοῖς προφήταις 1 in the law of Moses, and in the prophets Jesus is describing the first and second parts of the Hebrew Scriptures by reference to the people who wrote them. You could also use the proper names for these parts. Alternate translation: “in the Law and the Prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 24 44 m777 figs-synecdoche καὶ ψαλμοῖς 1 in the Psalms Jesus is using the name of the largest book in the third part of the Hebrew Scriptures, **Psalms**, to represent that entire part, which was known as “the Writings.” Alternate translation: “and the Writings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -4473,22 +4473,22 @@ LUK 24 45 qf61 figs-idiom διήνοιξεν αὐτῶν τὸν νοῦν 1 he LUK 24 45 m779 αὐτῶν τὸν νοῦν 1 their mind If it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a group of people had one **mind**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “their minds” LUK 24 46 cwr5 figs-activepassive οὕτως γέγραπται 1 Thus it has been written If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “This is what the Scriptures say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 24 46 m780 figs-synecdoche παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν 1 the Christ would suffer Jesus uses the word **suffer** to represent all of the things that the Scriptures said the Messiah would experience, including also betrayal and death. Alternate translation: “Someone would betray the Messiah, and he would suffer and die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -LUK 24 46 e75f figs-metonymy ἀναστῆναι 1 rise up Jesus speaks figuratively in this way of coming back to life, since it involves coming **up** out of the grave. Alternate translation: “come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 46 e75f figs-metonymy ἀναστῆναι 1 rise up Jesus speaks in this way of coming back to life, since it involves coming **up** out of the grave. Alternate translation: “come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 24 46 m781 figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Jesus is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from among the people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 24 46 m782 figs-explicit τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the third day See how you translated this phrase in [9:22](../09/22.md). Express this in the way that your language and culture reckon time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 24 46 r2zy translate-ordinal τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the third day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “on day three” or, depending on how your culture reckons time, “on day two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) LUK 24 47 m783 figs-abstractnouns κηρυχθῆναι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ μετάνοιαν εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, ἀρξάμενοι ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 repentance for forgiveness of sins would be proclaimed in his name to all the nations, beginning from Jerusalem If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **repentance** and **forgiveness** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “it would be proclaimed in his name to all the nations, beginning from Jerusalem, that God will forgive those who stop sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 24 47 w5j5 figs-activepassive κηρυχθῆναι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ μετάνοιαν εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, ἀρξάμενοι ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 repentance for forgiveness of sins would be proclaimed in his name to all the nations, beginning from Jerusalem If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “people would go and preach in his name to all the nations, beginning from Jerusalem, that God will forgive those who stop sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 24 47 lty6 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 in his name Here the **name** of the Messiah figuratively represents his authority. Alternate translation: “on his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 24 47 w1ha figs-metonymy εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 to all the nations The term **nations** refers figuratively to the people who belong to various ethnic groups. Alternate translation: “to all the people in every people group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 47 lty6 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 in his name Here the **name** of the Messiah represents his authority. Alternate translation: “on his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 47 w1ha figs-metonymy εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 to all the nations The term **nations** refers to the people who belong to various ethnic groups. Alternate translation: “to all the people in every people group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 24 47 wiq7 figs-explicit ἀρξάμενοι ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 beginning from Jerusalem The word **beginning** is a participle that is plural. In context, it must refer to the disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show the implications of this in your translation. This is really a command from Jesus. It may be good to make this a sentence of its own. Alternate translation: “You are to do this starting here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 24 48 wp38 figs-explicit ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες τούτων 1 You are witnesses of these things The implication is that because the disciples are **witnesses** of the things that happened to Jesus, they are the ones who should go and tell others about these things, from their own firsthand experience. Alternate translation: “You saw everything that happened to me, and now you must go and tell others what you saw” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 24 49 m2lm figs-explicit τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 the promise of my Father This implicitly means the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as UST does. Alternate translation: “what my Father promised” or “the Holy Spirit, as my Father promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 24 49 ynm2 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) LUK 24 49 m784 figs-imperative ὑμεῖς δὲ καθίσατε 1 But you stay This is an emphatic imperative. Alternate translation: “But be sure that you stay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 24 49 m785 figs-explicit ἐν τῇ πόλει 1 in the city This implicitly means Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 24 49 c4iv figs-metaphor ἕως οὗ ἐνδύσησθε…δύναμιν 1 until you put on power Jesus speaks figuratively of this **power** as if it were clothing that the disciples would **put on**. Alternate translation: “until you receive power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 24 49 l46b figs-metonymy ἐξ ὕψους 1 from heaven Jesus uses the term **heaven** to refer to God figuratively by association, since heaven is the abode of God. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +LUK 24 49 c4iv figs-metaphor ἕως οὗ ἐνδύσησθε…δύναμιν 1 until you put on power Jesus speaks of this **power** as if it were clothing that the disciples would **put on**. Alternate translation: “until you receive power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 24 49 l46b figs-metonymy ἐξ ὕψους 1 from heaven Jesus uses the term **heaven** to refer to God by association, since heaven is the abode of God. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 24 50 bd6p translate-names ἕως πρὸς Βηθανίαν 1 as far as towards Bethany **Bethany** is the name of a village outside Jerusalem. See how you translated this phrase in [19:29](../19/29.md). Alternate translation: “to a place near the village of Bethany” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 24 50 cm9a translate-symaction ἐπάρας τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ 1 lifting up his hands This was something that Jewish priests did when they blessed people. Alternate translation: “lifting up his hands in spiritual authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) LUK 24 51 dzr3 writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this episode. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv index 3ca5cb0cd8..62e4d606c7 100644 --- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv @@ -11,22 +11,22 @@ JHN 1 3 aqs1 figs-doublenegatives χωρὶς αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο οὐ JHN 1 3 v4yk figs-activepassive χωρὶς αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο οὐδὲ ἕν ὃ γέγονεν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “God did not make one thing without him” or “with him, God made everyting that God has made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 1 4 pz5c figs-explicit ζωὴ 1 Here it is best to use a general term for **life**. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]]) If you must use a more specific word, consider that **life** here could refer to: (1) eternal life, which is the meaning John uses for this term throughout this Gospel. Alternate translation: “the means of receiving eternal life” (2) physical life, which would mean that this verse continues the discussion about the creation of the universe in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “the life of all living things” (3) both physical life and eternal life. Alternate translation: “the life of all living things and the source of eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 4 ffbw figs-explicit καὶ ἡ ζωὴ 1 Here, **the life** refers to the same life stated in the previous phrase. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and that life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 1 4 dpeb figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Here John uses **light** figuratively to refer to God’s truth and goodness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the true and good things God has for men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 1 4 dpeb figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Here John uses **light** to refer to God’s truth and goodness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the true and good things God has for men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 4 saci figs-possession τὸ φῶς τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 John uses **of** to indicate to whom the **light** is given. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the light given to men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 1 4 jzwk figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -JHN 1 5 dgin figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς…φαίνει 1 John uses **the light shines** figuratively to refer to God’s truth and goodness being revealed as if it were a light shining. This truth and goodness was revealed to the world by Jesus. He is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “God reveals his truth and goodness” or “God’s truth and goodness is like a light that shines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 1 5 y5ry figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ…καὶ ἡ σκοτία 1 The light shines in the darkness, and the darkness did not overcome it Here John uses **darkness** figuratively to refer to what is false and evil. It is the spiritual **darkness** of the people in the world who do not love Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “in the false and evil world, and that evil world” or “in the evil world that is like a dark place, and that dark place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 1 5 dgin figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς…φαίνει 1 John uses **the light shines** to refer to God’s truth and goodness being revealed as if it were a light shining. This truth and goodness was revealed to the world by Jesus. He is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “God reveals his truth and goodness” or “God’s truth and goodness is like a light that shines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 1 5 y5ry figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ…καὶ ἡ σκοτία 1 The light shines in the darkness, and the darkness did not overcome it Here John uses **darkness** to refer to what is false and evil. It is the spiritual **darkness** of the people in the world who do not love Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “in the false and evil world, and that evil world” or “in the evil world that is like a dark place, and that dark place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 5 w9ni αὐτὸ οὐ κατέλαβεν 1 Here the word translated **overcome** could also be translated as “understand.” It could mean: (1) the evil forces in the world did not conquer God’s truth and goodness. Alternate translation: “did not conquer it” (2) the people in the world who don’t know God do not understand his truth and goodness. Alternate translation: “did not comprehend it” (3) the evil forces of this world neither conquered nor understood God’s truth and goodness. Alternate translation: “did not conquer or comprehend it” JHN 1 5 yv8l writing-pronouns αὐτὸ οὐ κατέλαβεν 1 Here, **it** refers to the light mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “did not overcome the light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 1 6 qa1s figs-activepassive ἀπεσταλμένος παρὰ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “whom God has sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 1 6 gih6 figs-explicit Ἰωάννης 1 Here, **John** refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 7 mtlb writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 **He** here refers to John the Baptist, who was introduced in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JHN 1 7 mht8 figs-metaphor περὶ τοῦ φωτός 1 testify about the light Here John uses **light** figuratively to refer to the revelation of God’s truth and goodness in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 1 7 mht8 figs-metaphor περὶ τοῦ φωτός 1 testify about the light Here John uses **light** to refer to the revelation of God’s truth and goodness in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 7 cdl5 δι’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **through him** indicates the means by which everyone might believe in the light. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of him” JHN 1 8 pn9t writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνος 1 **That one** here refers to John the Baptist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 1 8 kbwh figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς…τοῦ φωτός 1 See how you translated **light** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God … Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 1 9 xe1z figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν, ὃ 1 The true light Here John uses **light** figuratively to refer to Jesus as the one who both reveals the truth about God and is himself that truth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who truly embodied God’s truth, who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 1 9 rbsj figs-metaphor ὃ φωτίζει πάντα ἄνθρωπον 1 Here, John uses **light** figuratively to refer to God’s truth and goodness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which reveals the true and good things of God to all men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 1 9 xe1z figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν, ὃ 1 The true light Here John uses **light** to refer to Jesus as the one who both reveals the truth about God and is himself that truth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who truly embodied God’s truth, who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 1 9 rbsj figs-metaphor ὃ φωτίζει πάντα ἄνθρωπον 1 Here, John uses **light** to refer to God’s truth and goodness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which reveals the true and good things of God to all men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 9 u00s figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JHN 1 10 c2ne writing-pronouns ἦν…δι’ αὐτοῦ…αὐτὸν 1 **He** and **him** in this verse refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus was … through Jesus … Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 1 10 io8w figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 Here, **world** refers to the earth on which people live. It does not refer only to the people in the world or to the entire universe. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -40,15 +40,15 @@ JHN 1 11 va1w αὐτὸν οὐ παρέλαβον 1 receive him Here, **recei JHN 1 12 pvtl figs-infostructure ὅσοι δὲ ἔλαβον αὐτόν, ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν τέκνα Θεοῦ γενέσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. You will also need to adjust some words to fit the new order. Alternate translation: “But as many as received him and believed in his name, he gave to them the authority to become children of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) JHN 1 12 ijje ἔλαβον αὐτόν 1 Here, **receive** means to accept a person into one’s presence with friendliness. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “accepted him” or “welcomed him” JHN 1 12 x4f9 ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν 1 he gave the right Here, the word translated **authority** means either the right or ability to do something. Alternate translation: “he gave to them the right” or “he made it possible for them” -JHN 1 12 uc6e figs-metaphor τέκνα Θεοῦ 1 children of God Here John uses **children** figuratively to refer to people who love and obey God. The relationship between God and those who love him is like the relationship between a father and his children. Because this is an important concept in the Bible, you should not state the meaning plainly here, but you may use a simile. Alternate translation: “like children who have God as their father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 1 12 jp3y figs-metonymy πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 believed in his name Here John uses **name** figuratively to refer to Jesus’ identity and everything about him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 1 12 uc6e figs-metaphor τέκνα Θεοῦ 1 children of God Here John uses **children** to refer to people who love and obey God. The relationship between God and those who love him is like the relationship between a father and his children. Because this is an important concept in the Bible, you should not state the meaning plainly here, but you may use a simile. Alternate translation: “like children who have God as their father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 1 12 jp3y figs-metonymy πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 believed in his name Here John uses **name** to refer to Jesus’ identity and everything about him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 1 13 no4j figs-explicit οἳ 1 **These** here refers to the children of God mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be misunderstood for your readers, you could state this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 1 13 ygxb figs-metaphor οἳ οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων…ἐγεννήθησαν 1 John uses **born** figuratively to describe God changing a person from being spiritually dead to being spiritually alive when they believe in Jesus. John recorded Jesus referring to this change as being “born again” in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]]) If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression that indicates spiritual rebirth rather than physical birth. Alternate translation: “These were born spiritually, not from blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 1 13 ygxb figs-metaphor οἳ οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων…ἐγεννήθησαν 1 John uses **born** to describe God changing a person from being spiritually dead to being spiritually alive when they believe in Jesus. John recorded Jesus referring to this change as being “born again” in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]]) If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression that indicates spiritual rebirth rather than physical birth. Alternate translation: “These were born spiritually, not from blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 13 k24g figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων…ἐγεννήθησαν 1 Here, **bloods** refers to the bloodlines or genetic contributions of both parents of a child. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were not born from human bloodlines” or “were not born from human decent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 13 it6r ἐξ 1 Here, **from** could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of” JHN 1 13 jtjr figs-ellipsis οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς 1 John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “nor were they born from the will of the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 1 13 oj53 ἐκ 1 Here, **from** could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of” -JHN 1 13 kqdf figs-metonymy ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς 1 Here John is using the term **flesh** figuratively to refer to a human being, which is made of flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the human will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 1 13 kqdf figs-metonymy ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς 1 Here John is using the term **flesh** to refer to a human being, which is made of flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the human will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 1 13 jjyp figs-ellipsis οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος ἀνδρὸς 1 John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “nor were they born from the will of man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 1 13 v4t0 ἐκ 2 Here, **from** could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of” JHN 1 13 pbur ἐκ θελήματος ἀνδρὸς 1 The term **man** used here refers specifically to an adult male person and may also be translated “husband.” In this verse it refers to a father’s desire to have a child like himself. Alternate translation: “from the will of a husband” @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ JHN 1 14 x8l3 figs-explicit μονογενοῦς παρὰ πατρός 1 The JHN 1 14 wa23 μονογενοῦς 1 the one and only who came from the Father Here and throughout John’s Gospel, the phrase **the One and Only** is a title for Jesus that could refer to: (1) Jesus being unique as the only member of his kind. Alternate translation: “the Unique One” (2) Jesus being the only child of his Father. Alternate translation: “the Only Begotten One” JHN 1 14 zirk παρὰ πατρός 1 The phrase **from the Father** means that Jesus came from the presence of God the Father to the world. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “who came from the Father” JHN 1 14 b5t5 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples πατρός 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 1 14 tg4m figs-metaphor πλήρης χάριτος καὶ ἀληθείας 1 full of grace Here, John uses **full of** figuratively to describe Jesus fully possessing a quality, as if grace and truth were objects that could fill a person. If this might confuse you readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully possessing grace and truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 1 14 tg4m figs-metaphor πλήρης χάριτος καὶ ἀληθείας 1 full of grace Here, John uses **full of** to describe Jesus fully possessing a quality, as if grace and truth were objects that could fill a person. If this might confuse you readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fully possessing grace and truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 14 c3b4 figs-abstractnouns πλήρης χάριτος καὶ ἀληθείας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace** and **truth**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “full of God’s gracious and faithful character” or “full of kind acts and true teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 1 15 xduu figs-pastforfuture Ἰωάννης μαρτυρεῖ περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 15 qxgz writing-quotations καὶ κέκραγεν λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and has cried out, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ JHN 1 22 sa3t figs-explicit τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς 1 they said to JHN 1 23 x314 figs-quotemarks φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, εὐθύνατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου 1 In these phrases, John quotes from the Old Testament book of Isaiah ([Isaiah 40:3](../../isa/40/03.md)). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) JHN 1 23 baa5 figs-metonymy ἐγὼ φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 I am a voice, crying in the wilderness Here, **voice** refers to the person who is crying out in the wilderness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am the one calling out in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 1 23 p7kc figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, εὐθύνατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου 1 This clause is a quotation within a quotation. John is quoting from the book of Isaiah, and Isaiah is quoting the words of the person calling out in the wilderness. It would be best to indicate that by punctuating this material as a second-level quotation, since Luke is quoting from Scripture. However, if your language does not put one direct quotation within another, you could translate this material as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I am a voice crying out in the wilderness to make the way of the Lord straight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -JHN 1 23 iry1 figs-metaphor εὐθύνατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου 1 Make the way of the Lord straight Here John the Baptist quotes Isaiah, using this clause figuratively to refer to telling people to get ready to listen to the Lord’s message when it comes. They are to do this by repenting of their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Repent of your sins so that you will be ready to listen to the Lord’s message when it comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 1 23 iry1 figs-metaphor εὐθύνατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου 1 Make the way of the Lord straight Here John the Baptist quotes Isaiah, using this clause to refer to telling people to get ready to listen to the Lord’s message when it comes. They are to do this by repenting of their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Repent of your sins so that you will be ready to listen to the Lord’s message when it comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 23 v1gi translate-names Ἠσαΐας ὁ προφήτης 1 **Isaiah** is the name of a man. He wrote the book of **Isaiah**, in the Bible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 1 24 bk96 writing-background 0 This verse is background information about the people who questioned John. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 1 24 uq5b figs-explicit ἀπεσταλμένοι 1 Here, **the ones** refers to the priests and Levites, as introduced in verse [19](../01/19.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the priests and Levites who had been sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -129,8 +129,8 @@ JHN 1 29 aqo3 figs-pastforfuture βλέπει…λέγει 1 Here John uses the JHN 1 29 fpj6 figs-metaphor ἴδε 1 John the Baptist uses the term **Behold** to call his audience’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 29 gi3s figs-explicit ἴδε, ὁ Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The phrase **Lamb of God** refers to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Behold, Jesus, the Lamb of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 29 j397 figs-metaphor Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Lamb of God John the Baptist uses a metaphor here to refer to Jesus as God’s perfect sacrifice. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb]]) Since **Lamb of God** is an important title for Jesus, you should translate the words directly and not provide a non-figurative explanation in the text of your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 1 29 cgxj figs-metaphor ὁ αἴρων 1 Here John the Baptist speaks figuratively of forgiving sin as if sin were an object that Jesus is **taking away**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “who is forgiving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 1 29 rg4n figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου 1 world John the Baptist uses **world** figuratively to refer to all the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of those who live in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 1 29 cgxj figs-metaphor ὁ αἴρων 1 Here John the Baptist speaks of forgiving sin as if sin were an object that Jesus is **taking away**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “who is forgiving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 1 29 rg4n figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου 1 world John the Baptist uses **world** to refer to all the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of those who live in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 1 30 x393 ὀπίσω μου ἔρχεται ἀνὴρ, ὃς ἔμπροσθέν μου γέγονεν, ὅτι πρῶτός μου ἦν. 1 The one who comes after me is more than me, for he was before me See how you translated this in verse [15](../01/15.md). JHN 1 31 himw writing-pronouns κἀγὼ οὐκ ᾔδειν αὐτόν 1 Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And I did not know Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 1 31 hb8e figs-explicit κἀγὼ οὐκ ᾔδειν αὐτόν 1 Here John means that he did not know previously that Jesus was the Messiah. It does not mean that he didn’t know who Jesus was, because Jesus was his cousin. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “And I did not know that he was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ JHN 1 32 xyr3 figs-simile ὡς περιστερὰν 1 like a dove This phrase JHN 1 32 uji2 writing-pronouns ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 heaven Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “upon Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 1 33 y1bb figs-explicit κἀγὼ οὐκ ᾔδειν αὐτόν 1 Here John means that he did not know previously that Jesus was the Messiah. It does not mean that he didn’t recognize who Jesus was when he saw him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And I did not recognize that he was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 33 ccys figs-explicit ὁ πέμψας με βαπτίζειν ἐν ὕδατι, ἐκεῖνός 1 Here, the phrases **the one who sent me** and **that one** both refer to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who sent me to baptize in water,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 1 33 x8lb figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ βαπτίζων ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 Here John the Baptist is using literal baptism, which puts a person under water, figuratively to refer to spiritual baptism, which puts people under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who purifies them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is the one who will put you under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who will purify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 1 33 x8lb figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ βαπτίζων ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 Here John the Baptist is using literal baptism, which puts a person under water, to refer to spiritual baptism, which puts people under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who purifies them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he is the one who will put you under the influence of the Holy Spirit, who will purify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 34 ea3y translate-textvariants ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son of God Although most copies of this text say **Son of God**, some say “chosen one of God” or “chosen Son of God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the phrase it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) JHN 1 34 naf2 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 1 35 i3lg grammar-connect-time-sequential τῇ ἐπαύριον πάλιν 1 Again, the next day **The next day** here indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described in [1:29–34](../01/29.md). John saw Jesus two days after his conversation with the priests and Levites that is described in verses [19–28](../01/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “Two days after John spoke with the priests and Levites from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) @@ -253,10 +253,10 @@ JHN 2 17 q91v writing-quotations γεγραμμένον ἐστίν 1 Here John JHN 2 17 jp55 figs-quotemarks ὁ ζῆλος τοῦ οἴκου σου καταφάγεταί με 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 69:9](../../psa/69/09.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) JHN 2 17 pvct figs-yousingular τοῦ οἴκου σου 1 Here, **your** refers to God and is singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for God’s house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) JHN 2 17 ua3v figs-explicit τοῦ οἴκου σου 1 your house Here, **house** refers to the temple, which is often called God’s **house** in the Bible. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for your house, the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 2 17 gg1w figs-metaphor καταφάγεταί 1 consume Here, the author uses **consume** figuratively to refer to Jesus’ intense love for the temple, as if it were a fire that burned within him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “will be intense within” or “will be like a fire that consumes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 2 17 gg1w figs-metaphor καταφάγεταί 1 consume Here, the author uses **consume** to refer to Jesus’ intense love for the temple, as if it were a fire that burned within him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “will be intense within” or “will be like a fire that consumes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 2 18 r5rw figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 these things Here, **these things** refers to Jesus’ actions against the animal sellers and money changers in the temple. (See the discussion of this event in the General Notes to this chapter.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these disruptive activities in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 2 19 mp6i figs-imperative λύσατε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ αὐτόν 1 Destroy this temple, and in three days I will raise it up This is an imperative, but it should be translated as introducing a hypothetical situation rather than as a command. Jesus is stating a hypothetical situation in which the event in the second clause would happen if the event in the first clause took place. In this case, Jesus would certainly **raise** the **temple** up if the Jewish authorities were to **destroy** it. Alternate translation: “If you destroy this temple, then in three days I will raise it up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -JHN 2 19 of4u figs-extrainfo λύσατε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ αὐτόν 1 Here, John records Jesus using the words **Destroy** and **raise** figuratively to describe his killing and resurrection, as if tearing down and rebuilding a building. However, the Jewish leaders did not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to them. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 2 19 of4u figs-extrainfo λύσατε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ αὐτόν 1 Here, John records Jesus using the words **Destroy** and **raise** to describe his killing and resurrection, as if tearing down and rebuilding a building. However, the Jewish leaders did not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to them. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 2 20 qb4x figs-rquestion σὺ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερεῖς αὐτόν? 1 The Jewish leaders are using the question form for emphasis. They think that Jesus wants to tear down the temple and rebuild it in three days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot possibly rebuild it in three days!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 2 21 g6jx writing-endofstory 0 General Information: [Verses 21–22](../02/21.md) are a comment John made about the story that was described in [2:13–20](../02/13.md). These verses tell about something that happened later. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) JHN 2 21 b440 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνος δὲ ἔλεγεν 1 Here, **that one** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “But Jesus was speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -281,25 +281,25 @@ JHN 3 1 fz6f figs-explicit ἄρχων τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 This phrase JHN 3 2 sxo1 writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 **This one** here refers to Nicodemus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Nicodemus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 3 2 n84a writing-pronouns πρὸς αὐτὸν 1 Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 3 2 skq8 figs-exclusive οἴδαμεν 1 we know Here, **we** is exclusive. Nicodemus is only referring to himself and the other members of the Jewish council. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -JHN 3 2 hxcr figs-metaphor ἐὰν μὴ ᾖ ὁ Θεὸς μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, Nicodemus uses **with him** figuratively to refer to God’s help. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without God’s help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 3 2 hxcr figs-metaphor ἐὰν μὴ ᾖ ὁ Θεὸς μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, Nicodemus uses **with him** to refer to God’s help. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without God’s help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 3 3 nz18 figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 3 3 svpx figs-extrainfo γεννηθῇ ἄνωθεν 1 The phrase **born again** is a metaphor that refers to spiritual rebirth. See the discussion of this expression in the General Notes to this chapter. Nicodemus does not understand this metaphor and Jesus does not explain it to him in this verse. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 3 3 t8pt γεννηθῇ ἄνωθεν 1 born again Here, the word translated **again** could also be translated as “from above.” It could refer to: (1) spiritual rebirth as a second birth that takes place in addition to physical birth. Alternate translation, as in the ULT: “would be born again” (2) spiritual rebirth as a birth that is caused by God, in which case “above” is a euphemism for God. Alternate translation: “would be born from above” (3) spiritual rebirth as both a second birth and a birth caused by God. See the discussion of John’s use of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to this book. Alternate translation: “would be born again by God” -JHN 3 3 i0ew figs-metaphor ἰδεῖν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Jesus uses **see** figuratively to refer to experiencing an event or state. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience the kingdom of God” or “to participate in the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 3 3 i0ew figs-metaphor ἰδεῖν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Jesus uses **see** to refer to experiencing an event or state. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience the kingdom of God” or “to participate in the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 3 3 ikj9 figs-metaphor τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 kingdom of God Here this phrase refers to both the place where God currently rules in heaven and to the earth when God rules over it in the future. See the discussion of this concept in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “the place where God rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 3 4 z64b figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 a second time Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 3 4 wa1p figs-rquestion πῶς δύναται ἄνθρωπος γεννηθῆναι, γέρων ὤν? 1 How can a man be born when he is old? Nicodemus uses this question to emphasize that this cannot happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “A man certainly cannot be born again when he is old!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 3 4 yk9d figs-rquestion μὴ δύναται εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ δεύτερον εἰσελθεῖν καὶ γεννηθῆναι? 1 He cannot enter a second time into his mother’s womb and be born, can he? Nicodemus uses this question to emphasize his belief that a second birth is impossible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “He surely cannot enter a second time into his mother’s womb!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 3 5 il52 figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 3 5 n6d7 figs-metaphor γεννηθῇ ἐξ ὕδατος καὶ Πνεύματος 1 born of water and the Spirit The phrase **born from water and Spirit** could refer to: (1) spiritual birth that includes cleansing from sin and spiritual transformation by the Holy Spirit. In this case, Jesus’ words would be understood as a reference to Ezekiel 36:25–27, which Nicodemus would have been familiar with. Alternate translation: “would be born again by cleansing and the Spirit.” (2) physical birth and spiritual birth. Alternate translation: “would be born physically and spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 3 5 e1dj figs-metaphor εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Jesus uses **enter into** figuratively to refer to experiencing something. The meaning is similar to the meaning of “see” in [3:3](../03/03.md). Alternate translation: “to experience the kingdom of God” or “to participate in the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 3 5 e1dj figs-metaphor εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Jesus uses **enter into** to refer to experiencing something. The meaning is similar to the meaning of “see” in [3:3](../03/03.md). Alternate translation: “to experience the kingdom of God” or “to participate in the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 3 5 m37g figs-metaphor τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 enter into the kingdom of God See how you translated this phrase in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 3 6 gswx figs-activepassive τὸ γεγεννημένον ἐκ τῆς σαρκὸς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “What flesh has given birth to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 3 6 rru5 figs-metonymy τῆς σαρκὸς, σάρξ ἐστιν 1 Here Jesus is describing human beings figuratively by referring to something associated with them, the **flesh** they are made of. The word **flesh** here does not refer to sinful human nature as it does in other verses in the New Testament. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a human being is a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 3 6 rru5 figs-metonymy τῆς σαρκὸς, σάρξ ἐστιν 1 Here Jesus is describing human beings by referring to something associated with them, the **flesh** they are made of. The word **flesh** here does not refer to sinful human nature as it does in other verses in the New Testament. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a human being is a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 3 6 v3g8 figs-explicit τὸ γεγεννημένον ἐκ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, **the Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit, who enables people to be born again. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “what has been born again by means of the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 3 6 lfg1 figs-explicit πνεῦμά 1 Here, **spirit** refers to the new spiritual nature that God gives a person when they are born again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]]) If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “a new spiritual nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 3 7 t2sl figs-extrainfo γεννηθῆναι ἄνωθεν 1 See how you translated this phrase in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -JHN 3 8 p87y figs-metaphor τὸ πνεῦμα ὅπου θέλει, πνεῖ 1 The wind blows wherever it wishes The word translated **wind** can also mean spirit. Jesus here speaks figuratively of the Holy Spirit, as if he were **wind**. Just like people in Jesus’ time could not understand how the **wind** blew but could observe the effects of the wind, people cannot understand how the Holy Spirit works but can witness the effects of his work. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit is like the wind that blows wherever it wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 3 8 p87y figs-metaphor τὸ πνεῦμα ὅπου θέλει, πνεῖ 1 The wind blows wherever it wishes The word translated **wind** can also mean spirit. Jesus here speaks of the Holy Spirit, as if he were **wind**. Just like people in Jesus’ time could not understand how the **wind** blew but could observe the effects of the wind, people cannot understand how the Holy Spirit works but can witness the effects of his work. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit is like the wind that blows wherever it wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 3 8 mxjc οὕτως ἐστὶν 1 This phrase connects this sentence with the previous sentence. In the same way that people cannot understand the wind but recognize its effects, people who are not born from the Spirit cannot understand those who are born from the Spirit but can recognize the effects of the new birth. Alternate translation: “So it is with” or “So it happens with” JHN 3 8 k9ay ὁ γεγεννημένος ἐκ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 See how you translated this phrase in [3:6](../03/06.md). JHN 3 8 wh4z figs-explicit τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, **the Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit, who enables people to be born again. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -349,10 +349,10 @@ JHN 3 18 ps4n figs-metonymy μὴ πεπίστευκεν εἰς τὸ ὄνομ JHN 3 18 q8ku τοῦ μονογενοῦς Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here and throughout John’s Gospel, the phrase **One and Only** is a title for Jesus that could refer to: (1) Jesus being unique as the only member of his kind. Alternate translation: “of the Unique Son of God” (2) Jesus being the only child of his Father. Alternate translation: “of the Only Begotten Son of God” JHN 3 18 eb54 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 3 19 z9d2 ἡ κρίσις 1 Here, **judgment** could refer to: (1) a verdict a judge pronounces in a court trial. Alternate translation: “the verdict” (2) the reason for a condemning judgment. Alternate translation: “the basis for condemnation” -JHN 3 19 t9z5 figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον…ἢ τὸ φῶς 1 The light has come into the world Here Jesus uses **light** figuratively to refer to the revelation of God’s truth and goodness in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. See how you translated this term in those places where **the light** also refers to Jesus in the [1:7–9](../01/07.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God, has come into the world … than Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 3 19 t9z5 figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον…ἢ τὸ φῶς 1 The light has come into the world Here Jesus uses **light** to refer to the revelation of God’s truth and goodness in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. See how you translated this term in those places where **the light** also refers to Jesus in the [1:7–9](../01/07.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God, has come into the world … than Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 3 19 gh4i figs-123person τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον…ἢ τὸ φῶς 1 Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If your language does not allow people to speak of themselves in the third person, you may need to specify who **the light** is. Alternate translation: “I, the light, have come into the world … than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 3 19 fvvg figs-gendernotations οἱ ἄνθρωποι 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -JHN 3 19 h4nk figs-metaphor ἠγάπησαν οἱ ἄνθρωποι…τὸ σκότος 1 men loved the darkness Here Jesus uses **darkness** figuratively to refer to what is false and evil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See the discussion of light and darkness in the General Notes for Chapter 1. Alternate translation: “men loved evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 3 19 h4nk figs-metaphor ἠγάπησαν οἱ ἄνθρωποι…τὸ σκότος 1 men loved the darkness Here Jesus uses **darkness** to refer to what is false and evil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. See the discussion of light and darkness in the General Notes for Chapter 1. Alternate translation: “men loved evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 3 20 velv grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** here indicates another reason why men love the darkness, as stated in the previous verse. People who do evil things hate the light. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 3 20 bus8 πᾶς…ὁ φαῦλα πράσσων 1 This phrase refers to someone who habitually does evil things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone who habitually does evil” JHN 3 20 cg3i figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς, καὶ…πρὸς τὸ φῶς 1 See how you translated **the light** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who revealed the true and good things of God, and … to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -379,26 +379,26 @@ JHN 3 26 jr28 figs-metaphor ἴδε, οὗτος βαπτίζει 1 you have tes JHN 3 26 j8di figs-hyperbole πάντες ἔρχονται πρὸς αὐτόν 1 Here John the Baptist’s disciples use the word **all** as a generalization for emphasis. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “it seems like everyone is going to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) JHN 3 27 kl21 figs-genericnoun οὐ δύναται ἄνθρωπος 1 A man cannot receive anything unless John is speaking of people in general, not of one particular man. Alternate translation: “A person is not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) JHN 3 27 f818 figs-activepassive ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “heaven has given it to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 3 27 hap4 figs-metonymy ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 it has been given to him from heaven Here John the Baptist uses **heaven** figuratively to refer to God, who dwells in **heaven**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “it has been given to him by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 3 27 hap4 figs-metonymy ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 it has been given to him from heaven Here John the Baptist uses **heaven** to refer to God, who dwells in **heaven**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “it has been given to him by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 3 28 l9yt figs-you αὐτοὶ ὑμεῖς 1 You yourselves Here, **You** is plural and refers to all the people to whom John the Baptist is talking. Alternate translation: “You all” or “All of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JHN 3 28 p92u figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι εἶπον, οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ὁ Χριστός, ἀλλ’, ὅτι ἀπεσταλμένος εἰμὶ ἔμπροσθεν ἐκείνου 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “that I said that I am not the Christ but that I have been sent before that one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 3 28 nf9l figs-activepassive ἀπεσταλμένος εἰμὶ ἔμπροσθεν ἐκείνου 1 I have been sent before him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God sent me before that one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 3 28 vguf writing-pronouns ἐκείνου 1 Here, **that** refers to Jesus, whom John has called “the Christ” in the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JHN 3 29 p569 figs-metaphor ὁ ἔχων τὴν νύμφην, νυμφίος ἐστίν…τοῦ νυμφίου…τὴν φωνὴν τοῦ νυμφίου 1 The bride belongs to the bridegroom John the Baptist uses **bride** and **bridegroom** figuratively to refer to people who believe in Jesus and Jesus himself, respectively. Since these are important terms for Christians and for Jesus, you should translate the words directly and not provide a non-figurative explanation in the text of your translation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these words with similes. Alternate translation: “The one who is like one who has a bride is like a bridegroom … of the one who is like a bridegroom … of the voice of one who is like a bridegroom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 3 29 p569 figs-metaphor ὁ ἔχων τὴν νύμφην, νυμφίος ἐστίν…τοῦ νυμφίου…τὴν φωνὴν τοῦ νυμφίου 1 The bride belongs to the bridegroom John the Baptist uses **bride** and **bridegroom** to refer to people who believe in Jesus and Jesus himself, respectively. Since these are important terms for Christians and for Jesus, you should translate the words directly and not provide a non-figurative explanation in the text of your translation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these words with similes. Alternate translation: “The one who is like one who has a bride is like a bridegroom … of the one who is like a bridegroom … of the voice of one who is like a bridegroom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 3 29 nd5o figs-123person ὁ δὲ φίλος τοῦ νυμφίου 1 John the Baptist is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “But I am the friend of the bridegroom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 3 29 nfvx figs-doublet χαρᾷ χαίρει 1 These words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much joy John had because Jesus had come. Alternate translation: “rejoices greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 3 29 wkb8 figs-activepassive αὕτη…ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ πεπλήρωται 1 This, then, is my joy made complete If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I rejoice greatly” or “I rejoice with complete joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 3 29 hnw2 figs-123person αὕτη…ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ 1 my joy Here, **my** refers to John the Baptist, the one who is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this joy that I, John, have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 3 30 kn9s writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνον δεῖ αὐξάνειν 1 He must increase Here, **that one** refers to Jesus, whom John the Baptist called “the bridegroom” in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “It is necessary for Jesus to increase” or “It is necessary for the bridegroom to increase” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JHN 3 30 u5e0 figs-metaphor αὐξάνειν…ἐλαττοῦσθαι 1 John the Baptist uses **increase** figuratively to refer to growing in importance and influence, while **decrease** refers to diminishing in importance and influence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be more influential … to be less influential” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 3 30 u5e0 figs-metaphor αὐξάνειν…ἐλαττοῦσθαι 1 John the Baptist uses **increase** to refer to growing in importance and influence, while **decrease** refers to diminishing in importance and influence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to be more influential … to be less influential” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 3 31 wu2j figs-doublet ὁ ἄνωθεν ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν…ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. John repeats himself to emphasize that Jesus is greater than every person and every thing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and include words that show emphasis. Alternate translation: “The one who comes from heaven is certainly above all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 3 31 qd7t figs-explicit ὁ ἄνωθεν ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν…ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐρχόμενος, ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν 1 He who comes from above is above all Both of these phrases refer to Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the one who comes from above, is above all things … Jesus, the one who comes from heaven, is above all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 3 31 ksp5 figs-metonymy ἄνωθεν 1 Here John the Baptist uses **above** figuratively to refer to heaven, the place where God dwells. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 3 31 on9v figs-metaphor ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν 1 John the Baptist uses **above** figuratively to refer to having superior status. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is superior to all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 3 31 ksp5 figs-metonymy ἄνωθεν 1 Here John the Baptist uses **above** to refer to heaven, the place where God dwells. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 3 31 on9v figs-metaphor ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν 1 John the Baptist uses **above** to refer to having superior status. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is superior to all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 3 31 mhk9 figs-123person ὁ ὢν ἐκ τῆς γῆς, ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐστιν 1 He who is from the earth is from the earth and speaks about the earth Here, John the Baptist is referring to himself in the third person, but the statement is also true for all humans other than Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the one who is from the earth, am from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -JHN 3 31 p05h figs-metaphor ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐστιν 1 This phrase refers figuratively to having an earthly origin, which is the case for John the Baptist and every human being other than Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “originates from the earth” or “has an earthly origin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 3 31 ar7r figs-metaphor καὶ ἐκ τῆς γῆς λαλεῖ 1 This phrase refers figuratively to speaking based on an earthly perspective, which is the perspective of John the Baptist and every human being other than Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and speaks from an earthly perspective” or “and speaks as someone from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 3 31 yj2t figs-metaphor ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν 2 John the Baptist uses **above** figuratively to refer to having superior status. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is superior to all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 3 31 p05h figs-metaphor ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐστιν 1 This phrase refers to having an earthly origin, which is the case for John the Baptist and every human being other than Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “originates from the earth” or “has an earthly origin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 3 31 ar7r figs-metaphor καὶ ἐκ τῆς γῆς λαλεῖ 1 This phrase refers to speaking based on an earthly perspective, which is the perspective of John the Baptist and every human being other than Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and speaks from an earthly perspective” or “and speaks as someone from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 3 31 yj2t figs-metaphor ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν 2 John the Baptist uses **above** to refer to having superior status. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is superior to all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 3 32 c5yt writing-pronouns ὃ ἑώρακεν καὶ ἤκουσεν, τοῦτο μαρτυρεῖ…μαρτυρίαν αὐτοῦ 1 He testifies about what he has seen and heard **He** and **his** in this verse refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus testifies about that which he has seen and heard … Jesus’ testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 3 32 umek figs-explicit ὃ ἑώρακεν καὶ ἤκουσεν 1 This phrase refers to what Jesus saw and heard while he was in heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “which he has seen and heard in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 3 32 kqi1 figs-hyperbole τὴν μαρτυρίαν αὐτοῦ, οὐδεὶς λαμβάνει 1 no one accepts his testimony Here, John the Baptist exaggerates to emphasize that only a few people believed Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “very few people receive his testimony” or “it seems like no one receives his testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ JHN 4 10 i9eg τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **the gift of Go JHN 4 10 ed4r figs-possession τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Jesus uses **of** to describe a **gift** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the gift from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 4 10 oywu figs-123person τίς ἐστιν ὁ λέγων σοι…ᾔτησας αὐτὸν, καὶ ἔδωκεν 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “who I am who is saying to you … would have asked me, and I would have given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 4 10 ua0b figs-quotesinquotes ὁ λέγων σοι, δός μοι πεῖν, 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “who is asking you to give him a drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -JHN 4 10 zub5 figs-extrainfo ὕδωρ ζῶν 1 living water The phrase **living water** usually refers to moving or flowing water. However, Jesus uses **living water** here figuratively to refer to the Holy Spirit who works in a person to save and transform them. However, the woman does not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to her in this verse. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 4 10 zub5 figs-extrainfo ὕδωρ ζῶν 1 living water The phrase **living water** usually refers to moving or flowing water. However, Jesus uses **living water** here to refer to the Holy Spirit who works in a person to save and transform them. However, the woman does not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to her in this verse. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 4 11 pf7q figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 11 mw2b κύριε 1 The Samaritan woman calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]]) JHN 4 11 nwln τὸ ὕδωρ τὸ ζῶν 1 See how you translated **the living water** in the previous verse. @@ -465,7 +465,7 @@ JHN 4 17 bg94 figs-quotesinquotes καλῶς εἶπας, ὅτι ἄνδρα JHN 4 18 zpl1 figs-explicit τοῦτο ἀληθὲς εἴρηκας 1 What you have said is true **This you have said** refers to the Samaritan woman’s statement in the previous verse that she did not have a husband. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You have spoken the truth when you said you do not have a husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 4 19 tzs3 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 19 kfs1 κύριε 1 Sir The Samaritan woman calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]]) -JHN 4 19 za2w figs-metaphor θεωρῶ ὅτι προφήτης εἶ σύ 1 I see that you are a prophet The woman uses **see** figuratively to refer to understanding something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I understand that you are a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 4 19 za2w figs-metaphor θεωρῶ ὅτι προφήτης εἶ σύ 1 I see that you are a prophet The woman uses **see** to refer to understanding something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I understand that you are a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 4 20 hp3m figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ 1 Our fathers Here, **this mountain** refers to Mount Gerizim, the mountain where the Samaritans built their own temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “here on Mount Gerizim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 4 20 keg4 figs-you ὑμεῖς λέγετε 1 Here the word **you** is plural and refers to the Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Jewish people say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JHN 4 20 m27n figs-explicit ὁ τόπος 1 Here, **the place** refers to the Jewish temple, the place where God commanded his people to worship at that time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -501,25 +501,25 @@ JHN 4 30 d4fu writing-pronouns ἐξῆλθον 1 the disciples were urging him JHN 4 31 t6hy ἐν τῷ μεταξὺ 1 In the meantime Alternate translation: “While the woman was going into town” or “During the time that the woman was in the town” JHN 4 31 mgs7 writing-quotations ἠρώτων αὐτὸν οἱ μαθηταὶ λέγοντες 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “the disciples were urging him, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 4 31 z7wy figs-imperative Ῥαββεί, φάγε 1 Here, **eat** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Rabbi, please eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -JHN 4 32 j8h2 figs-extrainfo ἐγὼ βρῶσιν ἔχω φαγεῖν 1 I have food to eat that you do not know about Here Jesus uses the word **food** figuratively to refer to doing God’s will, as he states in [verse 34](../04/34.md). However, his disciples do not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to them in this verse. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 4 32 j8h2 figs-extrainfo ἐγὼ βρῶσιν ἔχω φαγεῖν 1 I have food to eat that you do not know about Here Jesus uses the word **food** to refer to doing God’s will, as he states in [verse 34](../04/34.md). However, his disciples do not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to them in this verse. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 4 33 w451 μή τις ἤνεγκεν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν? 1 No one has brought him anything to eat, have they? The disciples think Jesus is literally talking about something **to eat**. They begin asking each other this question, expecting a “no” response. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in a way that shows their uncertainty. Alternate translation: “Is it even possible that someone brought him food to eat?” JHN 4 34 bnke figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) -JHN 4 34 tvp1 figs-metaphor ἐμὸν βρῶμά ἐστιν ἵνα ποιήσω τὸ θέλημα τοῦ πέμψαντός με, καὶ τελειώσω αὐτοῦ τὸ ἔργον 1 My food is to do the will of him who sent me and to complete his work Here Jesus uses **food** figuratively to refer to obeying God’s **will**. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “Like food satisfies a hungry person, doing the will of the one who sent me and completing his work satisfies me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 4 34 tvp1 figs-metaphor ἐμὸν βρῶμά ἐστιν ἵνα ποιήσω τὸ θέλημα τοῦ πέμψαντός με, καὶ τελειώσω αὐτοῦ τὸ ἔργον 1 My food is to do the will of him who sent me and to complete his work Here Jesus uses **food** to refer to obeying God’s **will**. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “Like food satisfies a hungry person, doing the will of the one who sent me and completing his work satisfies me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 4 34 l64q figs-explicit τοῦ πέμψαντός με 1 Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, the one who sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 4 35 u5d6 figs-rquestion οὐχ ὑμεῖς λέγετε 1 Do you not say Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 4 35 y5d7 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Jesus using the term **Behold** to call the disciples’ attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 4 35 coiv figs-idiom ἐπάρατε τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ὑμῶν 1 This phrase, **lift up your eyes**, is a common idiom in the Bible that is used to describe the act of looking at something or direct one’s own attention toward something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “look” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JHN 4 35 tyw3 figs-metaphor θεάσασθε τὰς χώρας 1 look up and see the fields, for they are already ripe for harvest Jesus uses the word **fields** figuratively to refer to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with a simile or plainly. Alternate translation: “see these people who are like fields” or “see these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 4 35 oq29 figs-metaphor λευκαί εἰσιν πρὸς θερισμόν ἤδη 1 Jesus uses the phrase **white for harvest** figuratively to say that people are ready to receive the message of Jesus, like fields that are ready to be harvested. If it would be helpful in your language, you could convey the meaning with a simile or do it plainly. Alternate translation: “they are like a field that is ready to be harvested” or “they are already ready to believe my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 4 36 rd63 figs-exmetaphor ὁ θερίζων…καὶ ὁ θερίζων 1 Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. The act of **harvesting** crops is used figuratively to refer to the act of proclaiming Jesus’ message to those who are ready to receive it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “The one who is proclaiming the message to those who are being saved is like one who is harvesting … and the one who is like a harvester” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) -JHN 4 36 qtf8 figs-exmetaphor μισθὸν, λαμβάνει 1 Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. Those who proclaim Jesus’ message are described as those who receive **wages** for their labor. Here, **wages** refers to the joy those who proclaim the message will receive, as indicated by the last clause in this verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “has great joy that is like wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) -JHN 4 36 qc31 figs-exmetaphor καὶ συνάγει καρπὸν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 and gathers fruit for everlasting life Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. Jesus uses the phrase**fruit for eternal life** figuratively to refer to people who believe his message and are forgiven for their sins, so that they can have eternal life with God in heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as a simile. Alternate translation: “and the people who believe the message and receive eternal life are like the fruit that the one who is harvesting gathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) -JHN 4 36 nuku figs-exmetaphor ὁ σπείρων 1 Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. The act of **sowing** seed is used figuratively to refer to the act of preparing people to receive Jesus’ message. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who is preparing people to receive the message is like one who is sowing seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +JHN 4 35 tyw3 figs-metaphor θεάσασθε τὰς χώρας 1 look up and see the fields, for they are already ripe for harvest Jesus uses the word **fields** to refer to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with a simile or plainly. Alternate translation: “see these people who are like fields” or “see these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 4 35 oq29 figs-metaphor λευκαί εἰσιν πρὸς θερισμόν ἤδη 1 Jesus uses the phrase **white for harvest** to say that people are ready to receive the message of Jesus, like fields that are ready to be harvested. If it would be helpful in your language, you could convey the meaning with a simile or do it plainly. Alternate translation: “they are like a field that is ready to be harvested” or “they are already ready to believe my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 4 36 rd63 figs-exmetaphor ὁ θερίζων…καὶ ὁ θερίζων 1 Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. The act of **harvesting** crops is used to refer to the act of proclaiming Jesus’ message to those who are ready to receive it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “The one who is proclaiming the message to those who are being saved is like one who is harvesting … and the one who is like a harvester” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +JHN 4 36 qtf8 figs-exmetaphor μισθὸν, λαμβάνει 1 Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. Those who proclaim Jesus’ message are described as those who receive **wages** for their labor. Here, **wages** refers to the joy those who proclaim the message will receive, as indicated by the last clause in this verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “has great joy that is like wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +JHN 4 36 qc31 figs-exmetaphor καὶ συνάγει καρπὸν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 and gathers fruit for everlasting life Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. Jesus uses the phrase**fruit for eternal life** to refer to people who believe his message and are forgiven for their sins, so that they can have eternal life with God in heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as a simile. Alternate translation: “and the people who believe the message and receive eternal life are like the fruit that the one who is harvesting gathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +JHN 4 36 nuku figs-exmetaphor ὁ σπείρων 1 Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. The act of **sowing** seed is used to refer to the act of preparing people to receive Jesus’ message. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who is preparing people to receive the message is like one who is sowing seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) JHN 4 37 w4xn figs-explicit ἐν…τούτῳ 1 Here, **this** could refer to: (1) the statements in the rest of this verse and the next verse. Alternate translation: “regarding what I am about to say,” (2) the statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “regarding what I have just said,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 4 37 rqe7 figs-exmetaphor ἄλλος ἐστὶν ὁ σπείρων 1 One sows, and another harvests Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **sowing** is used figuratively to refer to preparing people to receive the message of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “One preparing people to receive the message is like one sowing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) -JHN 4 37 eqwf figs-exmetaphor ὁ θερίζων 1 Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **harvesting** refers to proclaiming the message of Jesus to those already prepared to receive it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “the one proclaiming the message to those who are receiving it is like one harvesting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +JHN 4 37 rqe7 figs-exmetaphor ἄλλος ἐστὶν ὁ σπείρων 1 One sows, and another harvests Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **sowing** is used to refer to preparing people to receive the message of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “One preparing people to receive the message is like one sowing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +JHN 4 37 eqwf figs-exmetaphor ὁ θερίζων 1 Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **harvesting** refers to proclaiming the message of Jesus to those already prepared to receive it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “the one proclaiming the message to those who are receiving it is like one harvesting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) JHN 4 38 cpob figs-you ὑμᾶς…ὑμεῖς…ὑμεῖς 1 In this verse **you** is plural and refers to the disciples to whom Jesus is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you who are my disciples … you … you disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -JHN 4 38 tu2y figs-exmetaphor ἐγὼ ἀπέστειλα ὑμᾶς θερίζειν 1 Jesus continues to speak figuratively to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **harvest** refers to proclaiming the message of Jesus to those already prepared to receive it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “I sent you to successfully proclaim my message like those who harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +JHN 4 38 tu2y figs-exmetaphor ἐγὼ ἀπέστειλα ὑμᾶς θερίζειν 1 Jesus continues to speak to describe people proclaiming and receiving his message. This is part of an extended metaphor in verses [35–38](../04/35.md). Here, **harvest** refers to proclaiming the message of Jesus to those already prepared to receive it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “I sent you to successfully proclaim my message like those who harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) JHN 4 38 lq36 figs-explicit ὃ οὐχ ὑμεῖς κεκοπιάκατε 1 This phrase refers to those who received Jesus’ message when his disciples proclaimed it to them. Although the disciples did not prepare those people to receive the message, they enjoyed the benefits of seeing those people trust in Jesus for salvation. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “those people whom you previously did not prepare to receive the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 4 38 fbcv figs-explicit ἄλλοι κεκοπιάκασιν 1 **Others** here refers to those people who prepared people to receive Jesus’ message before Jesus’ disciples successfully proclaimed that message to them. This would include Jesus, John the Baptist, and possibly the Old Testament prophets as well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Others such as myself and the prophets have labored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 4 38 slw4 ὑμεῖς εἰς τὸν κόπον αὐτῶν εἰσεληλύθατε 1 you have entered into their labor Here, **entered into** means to have joined others or participated with others in doing something. Alternate translation: “you have joined in doing their work” @@ -621,10 +621,10 @@ JHN 5 19 c9in figs-you λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Since Jesus is speaking to a group JHN 5 19 iuc7 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς…Πατέρα 1 Son … Father **Son** and **Father** are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 5 19 x9sl figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς…καὶ ὁ Υἱὸς…ποιεῖ 1 whatever the Father is doing, the Son does these things also. Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If this would confuse your readers, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 5 19 mc1f figs-explicit ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 Here, **from** is used to indicate the source of Jesus’ teaching and ability to do miracles. His teaching and miracles could only have authority if they came from God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on his own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 5 19 ymuo figs-metaphor τι βλέπῃ τὸν Πατέρα ποιοῦντα 1 Jesus uses **see** figuratively to refer to knowing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what he would perceive the Father doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 5 19 ymuo figs-metaphor τι βλέπῃ τὸν Πατέρα ποιοῦντα 1 Jesus uses **see** to refer to knowing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what he would perceive the Father doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 5 20 t3b4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ…Πατὴρ…τὸν Υἱὸν 1 For the Father loves the Son **Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 5 20 lk5n figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν 1 As in the previous verse, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -JHN 5 20 x8ac figs-metaphor δείκνυσιν αὐτῷ…δείξει αὐτῷ 1 loves Jesus uses **shows** and **show** figuratively to refer to revealing or making something known. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he reveals to him … he will reveal to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 5 20 x8ac figs-metaphor δείκνυσιν αὐτῷ…δείξει αὐτῷ 1 loves Jesus uses **shows** and **show** to refer to revealing or making something known. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he reveals to him … he will reveal to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 5 20 rtb6 writing-pronouns δείξει αὐτῷ 1 Here, **he** refers to God the Father and **him** refers to Jesus the Son. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Father will reveal to the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 5 20 zlr7 figs-explicit μείζονα τούτων…ἔργα 1 you will be amazed Here, **works** refers specifically to miracles. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “greater miracles than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 5 20 y4yy figs-explicit μείζονα τούτων…ἔργα 1 Here, **these** refers to the miracles that Jesus had already performed by the time he spoke these words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “greater works than these miracles I have already performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -642,7 +642,7 @@ JHN 5 24 rsqh figs-you λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Since Jesus is speaking to a group JHN 5 24 v45a figs-metaphor ὁ τὸν λόγον μου ἀκούων 1 Here, **hearing** means listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. It does not mean simply to hear what someone says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one heeding my word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 5 24 eg5h figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον μου 1 he who hears my word Here, **word** refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 5 24 s38a figs-explicit τῷ πέμψαντί με 1 Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 5 24 ql7q figs-metaphor εἰς κρίσιν οὐκ ἔρχεται 1 will not be condemned Jesus speaks figuratively of **judgment** as if it were a place a person could enter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will not be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 5 24 ql7q figs-metaphor εἰς κρίσιν οὐκ ἔρχεται 1 will not be condemned Jesus speaks of **judgment** as if it were a place a person could enter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will not be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 5 24 p5jx μεταβέβηκεν ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου εἰς τὴν ζωήν 1 Here, **passed** means to move from one state to another. Alternate translation: “he has moved from death to life” JHN 5 25 gtu6 figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 5 25 v33w figs-you λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Since Jesus is speaking to a group of Jewish leaders, **you** is plural here and through [5:47](../05/47.md). If your language does not have a different form for plural **you**, you can use another way to express it. Alternate translation: “I say to you Jews” or “I say to you all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -678,13 +678,13 @@ JHN 5 34 rvc5 figs-genericnoun παρὰ ἀνθρώπου 1 the testimony that JHN 5 34 dseu figs-explicit ταῦτα λέγω 1 Here, **these things** could refer to: (1) what Jesus said about John the Baptist in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I say this about John” (2) all that Jesus has said in verses [17–33](../05/17.md). Alternate translation: “I say these things about myself and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 5 34 a4je figs-activepassive ἵνα ὑμεῖς σωθῆτε 1 that you might be saved If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “so that God might save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 5 35 qczd writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνος 1 **That one** here refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist]]) If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JHN 5 35 w4w3 figs-metaphor ἐκεῖνος ἦν ὁ λύχνος ὁ καιόμενος καὶ φαίνων 1 John was a lamp that was burning and shining, and you were willing to rejoice in his light for a while Jesus uses the word **lamp** figuratively to refer to John the Baptist. In the way that lamps in those days burned oil and shined light, so John’s teaching helped people understand God’s truth and prepared them to receive Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “That one taught you the truth about God” or “That one was like a lamp that was burning and shining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 5 35 o2j5 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ φωτὶ αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus uses the word **light** figuratively to refer to John the Baptist’s teaching. In the way that light enables people to see in the dark, so John’s teaching helped people understand God’s truth and prepared them to receive Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “in his teaching” or “in his teaching that was like a light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 5 35 w4w3 figs-metaphor ἐκεῖνος ἦν ὁ λύχνος ὁ καιόμενος καὶ φαίνων 1 John was a lamp that was burning and shining, and you were willing to rejoice in his light for a while Jesus uses the word **lamp** to refer to John the Baptist. In the way that lamps in those days burned oil and shined light, so John’s teaching helped people understand God’s truth and prepared them to receive Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “That one taught you the truth about God” or “That one was like a lamp that was burning and shining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 5 35 o2j5 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ φωτὶ αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus uses the word **light** to refer to John the Baptist’s teaching. In the way that light enables people to see in the dark, so John’s teaching helped people understand God’s truth and prepared them to receive Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “in his teaching” or “in his teaching that was like a light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 5 35 i0l5 figs-metonymy πρὸς ὥραν 1 Here, **hour** refers to a short amount of time. It does not mean a 60-minute period of time or a specific point in time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for a moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 5 36 ll75 γὰρ 1 Here, **for** indicates that what follows is an explanation of the “testimony” Jesus has mentioned in the previous clause. Alternate translation: “that testimony is” JHN 5 36 rt6j τὰ…ἔργα 1 the works that the Father has given me to accomplish … that the Father has sent me Here, **works** could refer to: (1) the miracles that Jesus did. Alternate translation: “the miracles” (2) Jesus’ miracles and teaching. Alternate translation: “the miracles and teaching” JHN 5 36 dvr9 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ…ὅτι ὁ Πατήρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 5 36 yz3u figs-personification αὐτὰ τὰ ἔργα ἃ ποιῶ, μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 the very works that I do, testify about me Here Jesus is speaking of **works** figuratively as though they were a person who could **testify** about who he is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the very works that I do—are evidence for who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JHN 5 36 yz3u figs-personification αὐτὰ τὰ ἔργα ἃ ποιῶ, μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 the very works that I do, testify about me Here Jesus is speaking of **works** as though they were a person who could **testify** about who he is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the very works that I do—are evidence for who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JHN 5 37 p157 figs-rpronouns ὁ πέμψας με Πατὴρ, ἐκεῖνος μεμαρτύρηκεν 1 The Father who sent me has himself testified The reflexive pronoun **himself** emphasizes that it is the Father, not someone less important, who has testified about who Jesus is. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “none other than the Father himself who sent me has testified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) JHN 5 37 qjg1 figs-explicit ὁ πέμψας με Πατὴρ 1 Here this phrase refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [5:23](../05/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 5 38 rc2n figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 his word Here, **word** refers to the teachings that God gave to his people in the Scriptures. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his teachings” or “the Scriptures he gave us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -692,15 +692,15 @@ JHN 5 38 dfn1 figs-metaphor τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔχετε JHN 5 38 uj90 figs-123person ὃν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος, τούτῳ 1 This phrase refers to Jesus. He is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “me, the one whom he has sent … me whom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 5 39 xi22 figs-explicit ἐν αὐταῖς ζωὴν αἰώνιον ἔχειν 1 in them you have eternal life Some Jews in Jesus’ time believed that a person could earn their way to heaven by studying the Scriptures and doing good deeds. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will get eternal life if you study them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 5 39 bmc3 writing-pronouns ἐν αὐταῖς…ἐκεῖναί εἰσιν αἱ 1 In this verse, **them**, **these**, and **the ones** all refer to the Scriptures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state some of these words explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the Scriptures … these Scriptures are the ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JHN 5 39 fzbf figs-personification ἐκεῖναί εἰσιν αἱ μαρτυροῦσαι περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 Here Jesus is speaking of the Scriptures figuratively as though they were a person who is **testifying** about who he is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “these indicate who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JHN 5 39 fzbf figs-personification ἐκεῖναί εἰσιν αἱ μαρτυροῦσαι περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 Here Jesus is speaking of the Scriptures as though they were a person who is **testifying** about who he is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “these indicate who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JHN 5 40 dzm2 figs-explicit οὐ θέλετε ἐλθεῖν πρός με 1 you are not willing to come to me Here, **come** does not mean to merely come near Jesus, but it means to follow him and be his disciple. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you are not willing to come and by my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 5 40 xuxj figs-explicit ζωὴν ἔχητε 1 Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you might have eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 5 41 c1rx figs-gendernotations παρὰ ἀνθρώπων 1 receive Although the term **men** is masculine, Jesus uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JHN 5 42 b1j4 figs-possession τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 you do not have the love of God in yourselves This could mean: (1) they did not **love** **God**. Alternate translation: “love for God” (2) they had not received God’s love. Alternate translation: “love from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -JHN 5 43 zw65 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 in my Father’s name Here, John records Jesus using the word **name** figuratively to refer to God’s power and authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the authority of my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 5 43 zw65 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 in my Father’s name Here, John records Jesus using the word **name** to refer to God’s power and authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the authority of my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 5 43 rtb9 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 5 43 ue9f οὐ λαμβάνετέ με 1 receive Here, **receive** means to accept a person into one’s presence with friendliness. See how you translated a similar phrase in [1:11](../01/11.md). Alternate translation: “you do not welcome me” -JHN 5 43 p7jg figs-metonymy ἐὰν ἄλλος ἔλθῃ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ ἰδίῳ 1 If another should come in his own name Here, John records Jesus using the word **name** figuratively to refer to authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “If another comes in his own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 5 43 p7jg figs-metonymy ἐὰν ἄλλος ἔλθῃ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ ἰδίῳ 1 If another should come in his own name Here, John records Jesus using the word **name** to refer to authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “If another comes in his own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 5 44 e999 figs-rquestion πῶς δύνασθε ὑμεῖς πιστεῦσαι, δόξαν παρὰ ἀλλήλων λαμβάνοντες, καὶ τὴν δόξαν τὴν παρὰ τοῦ μόνου Θεοῦ, οὐ ζητεῖτε? 1 Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is no way you are able to believe, receiving glory from one another, and are not seeking the glory that is from the only God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 5 44 g7qd figs-ellipsis πιστεῦσαι 1 believe John records Jesus leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to believe me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 5 44 rn78 δόξαν παρὰ ἀλλήλων λαμβάνοντες 1 Here, **receiving** could refer to: (1) the time they are receiving glory. Alternate translation: “while receiving glory from one another” (2) a causal statement. Alternate translation: “since receiving glory from one another” @@ -709,7 +709,7 @@ JHN 5 46 m9sq grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ 1 John records Jesus mak JHN 5 47 kxa6 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…οὐ πιστεύετε 1 John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 5 47 b8dd figs-rquestion πῶς τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν πιστεύσετε? 1 If you do not believe his writings, how are you going to believe my words? Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you will certainly never believe my words!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 5 47 x7h9 figs-metonymy τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν 1 my words Here, **words** refers to what Jesus said to these Jewish leaders. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what I have told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 6 intro xe4t 0 # John 6 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus’ fourth sign: Jesus feeds a large crowd (6:1–14)
2. Jesus’ fifth sign: Jesus walks on the Sea of Galilee (6:15–21)
3. Jesus says he is the bread of life (6:22–71)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### King

The king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food. They thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people’s sins and that the world would persecute his people.

## Important Metaphors in this Chapter

### Bread

Bread was the most common and important food in Jesus’ day, so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread, because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus’ culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted the people to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life, just as people need food to sustain physical life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood

When Jesus said, “unless you would eat the flesh of the Son of Man and would drink his blood, you do not have life in yourselves,” he was speaking figuratively of believing in his sacrificial death on the cross for the forgiveness of sins. He also knew that before he died he would tell his followers to commemorate this sacrifice by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand to what the metaphor referred. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Parenthetical ideas

Several times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some background information needed to better understand the story. These explanations are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. This information is placed inside parentheses.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +JHN 6 intro xe4t 0 # John 6 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus’ fourth sign: Jesus feeds a large crowd (6:1–14)
2. Jesus’ fifth sign: Jesus walks on the Sea of Galilee (6:15–21)
3. Jesus says he is the bread of life (6:22–71)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### King

The king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food. They thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people’s sins and that the world would persecute his people.

## Important Metaphors in this Chapter

### Bread

Bread was the most common and important food in Jesus’ day, so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread, because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus’ culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted the people to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life, just as people need food to sustain physical life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood

When Jesus said, “unless you would eat the flesh of the Son of Man and would drink his blood, you do not have life in yourselves,” he was speaking of believing in his sacrificial death on the cross for the forgiveness of sins. He also knew that before he died he would tell his followers to commemorate this sacrifice by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand to what the metaphor referred. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Parenthetical ideas

Several times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some background information needed to better understand the story. These explanations are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. This information is placed inside parentheses.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 6 1 qhj7 writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus had traveled from Jerusalem to Galilee. A crowd has followed him up a mountainside. Verses [1–4](../06/01.md) tell the setting of this part of the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 6 1 el4l writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things This phrase, **After these things**, introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 6 1 z345 figs-explicit τῆς θαλάσσης τῆς Γαλιλαίας τῆς Τιβεριάδος 1 The **Sea of Galilee** was called by several names, one of which was Sea **of Tiberias**. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/seaofgalilee]]) If having two different names for the same place would be confusing in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the Sea of Galilee (also known as the Sea of Tiberias)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ JHN 6 16 tmzf figs-explicit τὴν θάλασσαν 1 Here and throughout this JHN 6 17 zu3v translate-names εἰς Καφαρναούμ 1 See how you translated **Capernaum** in [2:12](../02/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 6 17 fkj2 writing-background καὶ σκοτία ἤδη ἐγεγόνει, καὶ οὔπω ἐληλύθει πρὸς αὐτοὺς ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 It was dark by this time, and Jesus had not yet come to them In these clauses John provides background information about the situation in order to help readers understand what happens in this story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 6 18 q5f7 grammar-connect-logic-result ἥ τε θάλασσα ἀνέμου μεγάλου πνέοντος διηγείρετο 1 The first clause about the wind indicates the reason the **sea was being aroused** in the second clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because a strong wind was blowing, the sea was being aroused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -JHN 6 18 pms3 figs-metaphor διηγείρετο 1 John uses **aroused** figuratively to refer to the wind causing the sea to become turbulent. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was being stirred up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 6 18 pms3 figs-metaphor διηγείρετο 1 John uses **aroused** to refer to the wind causing the sea to become turbulent. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was being stirred up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 6 18 z381 figs-activepassive ἥ…θάλασσα…διηγείρετο 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind was causing the sea to be aroused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 6 19 xx7d translate-unknown ἐληλακότες 1 they had rowed The boats used on the Sea of Galilee usually had positions for two, four, or six people who sat together and **rowed** with oars on each side of the boat. If your readers would not be familiar with rowed boats, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having propelled the boat through the water by using oars” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JHN 6 19 sgf4 translate-bdistance ὡς σταδίους εἴκοσι πέντε ἢ τριάκοντα 1 about twenty-five or thirty stadia The word **stadia** is the plural of “stadium,” which is a Roman measurement of distance equivalent to about 185 meters or a little over 600 feet. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “about four and a half or five and a half kilometers” or “about three or three and a half miles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) @@ -777,7 +777,7 @@ JHN 6 25 tnms figs-explicit πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης 1 Here, **on th JHN 6 26 f8j4 figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase is in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 6 26 l9ws σημεῖα 1 See how you translated this term in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles” JHN 6 26 yef5 figs-activepassive ἐχορτάσθητε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “filled yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 6 27 hmfw figs-extrainfo τὴν βρῶσιν τὴν μένουσαν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 Here Jesus is using the word **food** figuratively to refer to himself, because he is the source of salvation, the One who gives **eternal life** to all who trust him. Jesus lasts forever, and so does the **eternal life** that he gives. However, the crowd does not understand this, and Jesus does not tell them this plainly at this time. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 6 27 hmfw figs-extrainfo τὴν βρῶσιν τὴν μένουσαν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 Here Jesus is using the word **food** to refer to himself, because he is the source of salvation, the One who gives **eternal life** to all who trust him. Jesus lasts forever, and so does the **eternal life** that he gives. However, the crowd does not understand this, and Jesus does not tell them this plainly at this time. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 6 27 plfi figs-ellipsis τὴν βρῶσιν τὴν μένουσαν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 John records Jesus leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “work for the food that endures to eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 6 27 w74i figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου…δώσει; τοῦτον 1 These two expressions are all refer to Jesus. He is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will give … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 6 27 czb3 figs-distinguish ἣν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου ὑμῖν δώσει 1 eternal life which the Son of Man will give you This phrase could give further information about: (1) “the food that endures to eternal life.” Alternate translation: “that is, the food the Son of Man will give you” (2) “eternal life.” Alternate translation: “that is, the life the Son of Man will give you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) @@ -788,27 +788,27 @@ JHN 6 29 he3q figs-explicit τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον τοῦ Θ JHN 6 29 aevl figs-123person ὃν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος 1 This phrase refers to Jesus. He is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 6 29 z1u9 writing-pronouns ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος 1 Here, **that one** refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God has sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 6 31 t3jt figs-explicit οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν τὸ μάννα ἔφαγον ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 In this verse, John assumes that his readers will know that the crowd is referring to a story recorded in the Old Testament book of Exodus. In that story, the Israelites complained against Moses and Aaron because they were hungry. God responded by providing a flake-like food that fell from the sky and could be baked into bread. The people called this flake-like food “manna.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/manna]]) You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation: “Our fathers ate the manna when they were wandering in the wilderness after leaving Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 6 31 gye7 figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 Our fathers The crowd used **fathers** figuratively to refer to their ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors” or “Our forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 6 31 gye7 figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 Our fathers The crowd used **fathers** to refer to their ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors” or “Our forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 6 31 jz9p figs-activepassive ἐστιν γεγραμμένον 1 heaven If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the prophets wrote in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 6 31 bc59 writing-quotations ἐστιν γεγραμμένον 1 heaven Here the crowd uses **it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 78:24](../../psa/78/24.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that the crowd is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it was written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 6 31 gzqv figs-quotesinquotes ἐστιν γεγραμμένον, ἄρτον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written that he gave them bread from heaven to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 6 31 fjoo writing-pronouns ἄρτον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν 1 **He** here could refer to: (1) Moses, in which case the crowd was mistakenly quoting a scripture about God and applying it to Moses. This is possible because Jesus says in the next verse, “Moses has not given you the bread from heaven.” Alternate translation: “Moses gave them bread from heaven to eat” (2) God, which is who it referred to in the scripture the crowd is quoting. Alternate translation: “God gave them bread from heaven to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JHN 6 31 iiaz figs-synecdoche ἄρτον 1 Here, John records the crowd using the word **bread** figuratively to represent food in general that is needed to sustain life. The manna that God gave the Israelites from heaven was not **bread**, but a food that could be baked into **bread**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +JHN 6 31 iiaz figs-synecdoche ἄρτον 1 Here, John records the crowd using the word **bread** to represent food in general that is needed to sustain life. The manna that God gave the Israelites from heaven was not **bread**, but a food that could be baked into **bread**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 6 32 e6s1 figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 6 32 qgs7 οὐ Μωϋσῆς δέδωκεν ὑμῖν 1 Here John records Jesus speaking in a way that emphasizes that **Moses** was not the source of manna in the wilderness. He seems to be correcting the crowd’s incorrect understanding of the scripture they quoted in the previous verse. Use whatever form best communicates this kind of negative emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “Moses was not the one who has given you” -JHN 6 32 qwcf figs-synecdoche τὸν ἄρτον 1 Here John records Jesus using the word **bread** figuratively to represent food in general that is needed to sustain life. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +JHN 6 32 qwcf figs-synecdoche τὸν ἄρτον 1 Here John records Jesus using the word **bread** to represent food in general that is needed to sustain life. See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 6 32 xwqx figs-explicit ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου δίδωσιν 1 This phrase serves two purposes. First, it implies that the **Father**, not Moses, was the source of the bread from heaven mentioned by the crowd in the previous verse. Second, it indicates that the **Father** is still giving bread from heaven, although not the kind of bread the crowd is expecting. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. You may also want to start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Rather, my Father has given that bread and now gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 6 32 ega4 figs-extrainfo ὁ Πατήρ μου δίδωσιν ὑμῖν τὸν ἄρτον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τὸν ἀληθινόν 1 it is my Father who is giving you the true bread from heaven Here Jesus is using **true bread** figuratively to refer to himself. However, the crowd does not understand this, and Jesus does not tell them this plainly until verse [35](../06/35.md). Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 6 32 ega4 figs-extrainfo ὁ Πατήρ μου δίδωσιν ὑμῖν τὸν ἄρτον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τὸν ἀληθινόν 1 it is my Father who is giving you the true bread from heaven Here Jesus is using **true bread** to refer to himself. However, the crowd does not understand this, and Jesus does not tell them this plainly until verse [35](../06/35.md). Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 6 32 c73l guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 6 32 an7w figs-synecdoche ἄρτον 2 See how you translated the word **bread** earlier in this verse and in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -JHN 6 33 ri0m figs-extrainfo ὁ…ἄρτος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 Here Jesus is using **bread** figuratively to refer to himself. However, the crowd does not understand this, and Jesus does not tell them this plainly until verse [35](../06/35.md). Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 6 33 ri0m figs-extrainfo ὁ…ἄρτος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 Here Jesus is using **bread** to refer to himself. However, the crowd does not understand this, and Jesus does not tell them this plainly until verse [35](../06/35.md). Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 6 33 sajx figs-possession ὁ…ἄρτος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This phrase could mean: (1) the bread came from God. Alternate translation: “the bread that God gives” (2) the bread belongs to God. Alternate translation: “God’s bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 6 33 sfbk figs-extrainfo ὁ καταβαίνων ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 This phrase refers to Jesus. However, the crowd does not understand this and Jesus does not tell them this plainly at this time. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 6 33 rrf5 figs-explicit ζωὴν 1 gives life to the world Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly, as modeled in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 33 k897 figs-metonymy τῷ κόσμῳ 1 the world Here, **the world** refers to the people who live in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people living in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 6 34 j26s κύριε 1 The crowd calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]]) JHN 6 34 z9zv figs-synecdoche τὸν ἄρτον 1 Here, **bread** could refer to: (1) food in general, as the word was used by the crowd in [verse 31](../06/31.md). This would mean that the crowd did not understand that Jesus was calling himself the bread from heaven. Alternate translation: “food” (2) some gift from God of which the crowd was uncertain. This would mean that the crowd recognized that Jesus was talking about something more spiritual than mere food but did not understand that he was talking about himself. Alternate translation: “heavenly food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -JHN 6 35 cr2m figs-exmetaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς 1 I am the bread of life John records Jesus continuing the **bread** metaphor to refer figuratively to himself. In Jesus’ culture, **bread** was the primary food people ate to stay alive. Just as **bread** is necessary for sustaining physical life, Jesus is necessary for giving spiritual life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “Just as food keeps you physically alive, I can give you spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +JHN 6 35 cr2m figs-exmetaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς 1 I am the bread of life John records Jesus continuing the **bread** metaphor to refer to himself. In Jesus’ culture, **bread** was the primary food people ate to stay alive. Just as **bread** is necessary for sustaining physical life, Jesus is necessary for giving spiritual life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “Just as food keeps you physically alive, I can give you spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) JHN 6 35 yq25 figs-possession ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς 1 Jesus uses **of life** to the source of the **life** about which he is speaking. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the bread that produces life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 6 35 hvpi figs-explicit τῆς ζωῆς 1 Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 35 lgpu figs-exmetaphor ὁ ἐρχόμενος πρὸς ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ πεινάσῃ; καὶ ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, οὐ μὴ διψήσει πώποτε 1 Jesus speaks about the person who trusts in him by continuing the metaphor of food that he began in verse [32](../06/32.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “The one coming to me will be like a person who never gets hungry, and the one believing in me will be like a person who never gets thirsty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) @@ -827,7 +827,7 @@ JHN 6 39 j7q6 figs-idiom ἀναστήσω αὐτὸ 1 will raise them up Here, JHN 6 39 npma figs-explicit τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 Here, **the last day** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when I return and judge everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 40 wnou grammar-connect-logic-result τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Πατρός μου, ἵνα πᾶς 1 **For** introduces the reason for the Father’s will that Jesus stated in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “What I have just said is my Father’s will, because his will is also that everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 6 40 b84t guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 6 40 cb1a figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ θεωρῶν τὸν Υἱὸν 1 Jesus uses **sees** figuratively to refer to understanding something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone who understands who the Son is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 6 40 cb1a figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ θεωρῶν τὸν Υἱὸν 1 Jesus uses **sees** to refer to understanding something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone who understands who the Son is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 6 40 mpm2 figs-idiom ἀναστήσω αὐτὸν ἐγὼ 1 Here, to **raise** up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. See how you translated this term in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 6 40 r8rr figs-explicit τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 Here, **the last day** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “on the day when I return and judge everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 41 t91b 0 Connecting Statement: The Jewish leaders interrupt Jesus as he is speaking to the crowd. His conversation with these Jewish leaders is in verses [41–58](../06/41.md). @@ -854,27 +854,27 @@ JHN 6 46 lcz8 figs-123person ὁ ὢν παρὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ; οὗτος JHN 6 47 de5y figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 6 47 t8lk figs-ellipsis ὁ πιστεύων 1 he who believes John records Jesus leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the one believing in me” or “the one believing that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 6 48 iih2 figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς 1 I am the bread of life See how you translated this phrase in [John 6:35](../06/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 6 49 uh76 figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν 1 Your fathers Jesus uses **fathers** figuratively to refer to ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your forefathers” or “Your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 6 49 uh76 figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν 1 Your fathers Jesus uses **fathers** to refer to ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your forefathers” or “Your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 6 49 mr3u figs-explicit ἔφαγον ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ τὸ μάννα 1 died See how you translated this expression in verse [31](../06/31.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 50 sa53 figs-exmetaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβαίνων, ἵνα τις ἐξ αὐτοῦ φάγῃ, καὶ μὴ ἀποθάνῃ 1 This is the bread Jesus continues using the **bread** metaphor to express that one must believe in him in order to have eternal life just as one must **eat** **bread** to sustain physical life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a simile. Alternate translation: “I am this bread that comes down from heaven, just as one must eat bread to live, so must one believe in me in order to not die spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) JHN 6 50 y1x9 figs-123person οὗτός ἐστιν…αὐτοῦ 1 John records Jesus referring to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I am … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 6 50 gse5 figs-metaphor ὁ ἄρτος 1 See how you translated this term in verse [48](../06/48.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 6 50 lfwm figs-metaphor ἐξ αὐτοῦ φάγῃ 1 Here Jesus uses **eat** figuratively to refer to believing in him for salvation. What Jesus said plainly in verse [47](../06/47.md) he says figuratively here. If this would confuse your readers, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “might believe in me as one eats bread to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 6 50 v212 figs-metaphor μὴ ἀποθάνῃ 1 not die Here Jesus uses **die** figuratively to refer to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might not die spiritually” or “might not experience spiritual death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 6 50 lfwm figs-metaphor ἐξ αὐτοῦ φάγῃ 1 Here Jesus uses **eat** to refer to believing in him for salvation. What Jesus said plainly in verse [47](../06/47.md) he says here. If this would confuse your readers, you could express this with a simile. Alternate translation: “might believe in me as one eats bread to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 6 50 v212 figs-metaphor μὴ ἀποθάνῃ 1 not die Here Jesus uses **die** to refer to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might not die spiritually” or “might not experience spiritual death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 6 51 e9g3 figs-exmetaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς; ἐάν τις φάγῃ ἐκ τούτου τοῦ ἄρτου, ζήσεται εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 As in the previous verse, Jesus continues using the **bread** metaphor to say that one must believe in him in order to have eternal life just as one **eats** **bread** to sustain physical life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a simile. Alternate translation: “I am the living bread that comes down from heaven. Just as one lives if they eat bread, so does one who believes in me live forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) JHN 6 51 ztqs figs-explicit ἐγώ εἰμι 1 Jesus uses this phrase emphatically to make a strong statement about who he is. Use the most natural way to express emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “I myself am” or “I am indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 51 px99 figs-explicit ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν 1 living bread Here, **living** refers to being the source of life or having the ability to produce life, which is synonymous with “of life” in the phrase “the bread of life,” which Jesus used in [verse 35](../06/35.md). See how you translated “the bread of life” in [verse 35](../06/35.md). Alternate translation: “the bread that gives life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 6 51 gs06 figs-metaphor φάγῃ ἐκ τούτου τοῦ ἄρτου 1 Here and in the previous verse, Jesus uses **eats** figuratively to refer to believing in Jesus for salvation. Jesus gives eternal life to those who believe in him. See how you translated “eat” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Just as food keeps you physically alive, I can give you spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 6 51 k4bo figs-metonymy σάρξ μού 1 Here, John records Jesus using **flesh** figuratively to refer to his whole physical body. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 6 51 gs06 figs-metaphor φάγῃ ἐκ τούτου τοῦ ἄρτου 1 Here and in the previous verse, Jesus uses **eats** to refer to believing in Jesus for salvation. Jesus gives eternal life to those who believe in him. See how you translated “eat” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Just as food keeps you physically alive, I can give you spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 6 51 k4bo figs-metonymy σάρξ μού 1 Here, John records Jesus using **flesh** to refer to his whole physical body. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 6 51 ee9d figs-extrainfo ὁ ἄρτος 2 Here Jesus is using the **bread** metaphor slightly differently from how he has used it previously. Here it refers specifically to his physical body, which he would sacrifice on the cross to pay for the sins of those who believe in him. Since Jesus says this explicitly at the end of the verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 6 51 c5z3 figs-explicit ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ κόσμου ζωῆς 1 Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the eternal life of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 6 51 nb41 figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ κόσμου ζωῆς 1 for the life of the world Here, **the world** is used figuratively to refer to the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for the life of the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 6 51 nb41 figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ κόσμου ζωῆς 1 for the life of the world Here, **the world** is used to refer to the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for the life of the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 6 52 v6g7 figs-synecdoche οὖν…οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 6 52 q5nw writing-quotations ἐμάχοντο…πρὸς ἀλλήλους οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι λέγοντες 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “then the Jews began to argue among themselves, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 6 52 fj5p figs-rquestion πῶς δύναται οὗτος ἡμῖν δοῦναι τὴν σάρκα φαγεῖν? 1 How can this man give us his flesh to eat? Here the Jewish leaders are using the form of a question to emphasize that they are reacting negatively to what Jesus has said about **his flesh**. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There is no way that this one is able to give us his flesh to eat!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 6 52 llc0 figs-metonymy τὴν σάρκα 1 Here, John records the Jews using **flesh** figuratively to refer to Jesus’ whole physical body. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 6 52 llc0 figs-metonymy τὴν σάρκα 1 Here, John records the Jews using **flesh** to refer to Jesus’ whole physical body. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 6 53 q8jl figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -JHN 6 53 r7hh figs-extrainfo φάγητε τὴν σάρκα τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, καὶ πίητε αὐτοῦ τὸ αἷμα 1 eat the flesh of the Son of Man and drink his blood Here Jesus is using the phrases **eat the flesh** and **drink his blood** figuratively. Just as people need to **eat** and **drink** in order to live, people need to trust Jesus in order to have eternal life. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 6 53 r7hh figs-extrainfo φάγητε τὴν σάρκα τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, καὶ πίητε αὐτοῦ τὸ αἷμα 1 eat the flesh of the Son of Man and drink his blood Here Jesus is using the phrases **eat the flesh** and **drink his blood**. Just as people need to **eat** and **drink** in order to live, people need to trust Jesus in order to have eternal life. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 6 53 e2w9 figs-doublet φάγητε τὴν σάρκα τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, καὶ πίητε αὐτοῦ τὸ αἷμα 1 These two phrases, **eat the flesh** and **drink his blood**, mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that trusting in Jesus is the only way to have eternal life. Because Jesus’ **flesh** and **blood** are important concepts, do not combine them. Instead, you could communicate the emphasis in a way that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you would indeed eat the flesh of the Son of Man and would indeed drink his blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 6 53 hkr8 figs-123person τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, καὶ πίητε αὐτοῦ τὸ αἷμα 1 Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 6 53 quje figs-explicit τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -883,8 +883,8 @@ JHN 6 54 hc5d figs-extrainfo ὁ τρώγων μου τὴν σάρκα, καὶ JHN 6 54 etdh figs-doublet ὁ τρώγων μου τὴν σάρκα, καὶ πίνων μου τὸ αἷμα, ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 As in the previous verse, these two phrases, **eat the flesh** and **drink his blood**, mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expressions in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the one eating my flesh and drinking my blood surely has eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 6 54 ym6w figs-idiom ἀναστήσω αὐτὸν 1 raise him up See how you translated this phrase in [verse 40](../06/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 6 54 qia5 figs-explicit τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 at the last day Here, **the last day** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) See how you translated this phrase in verse [39](../06/39.md). Alternate translation: “on the day when I return and judge everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 6 55 tw5g figs-extrainfo σάρξ μου…αἷμά μου 1 Here Jesus is using the phrases **my flesh** and **my blood** figuratively to refer to believing in him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -JHN 6 55 cik2 figs-extrainfo ἡ…σάρξ μου ἀληθής ἐστι βρῶσις, καὶ τὸ αἷμά μου ἀληθής ἐστι πόσις 1 my flesh is true food … my blood is true drink Here Jesus is using the phrases **true food** and **true drink** figuratively to say that he, Jesus, gives life to those who trust in him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 6 55 tw5g figs-extrainfo σάρξ μου…αἷμά μου 1 Here Jesus is using the phrases **my flesh** and **my blood** to refer to believing in him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 6 55 cik2 figs-extrainfo ἡ…σάρξ μου ἀληθής ἐστι βρῶσις, καὶ τὸ αἷμά μου ἀληθής ἐστι πόσις 1 my flesh is true food … my blood is true drink Here Jesus is using the phrases **true food** and **true drink** to say that he, Jesus, gives life to those who trust in him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 6 55 j4ud figs-doublet ἡ…σάρξ μου ἀληθής ἐστι βρῶσις, καὶ τὸ αἷμά μου ἀληθής ἐστι πόσις 1 As in the previous two verses, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expressions in the previous two verses. Alternate translation: “my flesh is indeed true food, and my blood is indeed true drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 6 56 eaoy figs-extrainfo ὁ τρώγων μου τὴν σάρκα, καὶ πίνων μου τὸ αἷμα 1 See how you translated this phrase in verse [54](../06/54.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 6 56 u3w4 figs-explicit ἐν ἐμοὶ μένει 1 remains in me Here, and frequently in John’s Gospel, **remains in** indicates being united in a continuous personal relationship with someone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. See the discussion of this expression in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “has a close relationship with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -893,15 +893,15 @@ JHN 6 57 y334 figs-explicit ὁ ζῶν Πατὴρ 1 Here, **living** refers t JHN 6 57 krma guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ…Πατέρα 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 6 57 oczm figs-explicit κἀγὼ ζῶ διὰ τὸν Πατέρα 1 Here, **live** refers to being the source of life or having the ability to create life. It does not mean to merely be alive. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I cause life because of the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 57 nhp9 figs-explicit κἀγὼ ζῶ διὰ τὸν Πατέρα 1 Here, **because of the Father** indicates the reason why Jesus has the ability to cause life. God the Father gave Jesus the ability to cause others to live. Jesus explained this concept in [5:25–26](../05/25.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and I cause life because the Father has enabled me to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 6 57 dba2 figs-extrainfo καὶ ὁ τρώγων με 1 so he who eats me Jesus is using **eating me** figuratively to refer to trusting him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. See how you translated similar expressions in verses [53–56](../06/53.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 6 57 dba2 figs-extrainfo καὶ ὁ τρώγων με 1 so he who eats me Jesus is using **eating me** to refer to trusting him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. See how you translated similar expressions in verses [53–56](../06/53.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 6 57 e6op figs-explicit κἀκεῖνος ζήσει δι’ ἐμέ 1 Here, **live** refers to having eternal life. It does not refer to being the source of life, as **living** and **live** are used previously in this verse. If this shift in meaning might confuse your readers, you could state the difference explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will also have eternal life because of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 58 m2nz figs-123person οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς 1 This is the bread that has come down from heaven John records Jesus referring to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -JHN 6 58 kv16 figs-extrainfo οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος…τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον 1 Jesus is continuing the **bread** metaphor to refer figuratively to himself. Just as **bread** is necessary for our physical life, Jesus is necessary for our spiritual life. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -JHN 6 58 i9ih figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες 1 the fathers Here Jesus uses**fathers** figuratively to refer to ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ancestors” or “the forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 6 58 kv16 figs-extrainfo οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος…τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον 1 Jesus is continuing the **bread** metaphor to refer to himself. Just as **bread** is necessary for our physical life, Jesus is necessary for our spiritual life. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 6 58 i9ih figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες 1 the fathers Here Jesus uses**fathers** to refer to ancestors. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ancestors” or “the forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 6 58 r174 figs-ellipsis οὐ καθὼς ἔφαγον οἱ πατέρες καὶ ἀπέθανον 1 John records Jesus leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “this bread is not just as the bread that the fathers ate and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 6 58 lb07 figs-explicit ἔφαγον οἱ πατέρες καὶ ἀπέθανον 1 The phrase **ate and died** does not mean that the people died immediately after eating the bread. If this wording would confuse your readers, you could translate it in a way that shows a time gap between eating and drinking. Alternate translation: “the fathers ate and still died at a later time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 58 j2hx figs-123person ὁ τρώγων τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον 1 He who eats this bread Jesus spoke about himself as **this bread**. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -JHN 6 58 jv4c figs-extrainfo ὁ τρώγων τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον 1 He who eats this bread Jesus is using **eating this bread** figuratively to refer to trusting him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 6 58 jv4c figs-extrainfo ὁ τρώγων τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον 1 He who eats this bread Jesus is using **eating this bread** to refer to trusting him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 6 59 ph39 writing-background 0 In this verse John gives background information about when this event happened. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 6 59 ukxi figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to what Jesus said to the crowd and Jewish leaders in verses [26–58](../06/26.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these teachings about being the bread of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 60 t1me figs-ellipsis ἀκούσαντες 1 Here, John leaves out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “having heard this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -930,14 +930,14 @@ JHN 6 65 ckfz writing-pronouns ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ 1 Here, the pr JHN 6 65 uvxb figs-activepassive ᾖ δεδομένον αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ Πατρός 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Father would give it to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 6 65 g4za guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 6 66 o1pd figs-idiom ἀπῆλθον εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω 1 Here, **stayed behind** is an idiom that refers to going back to living the way one had lived previously. Here, these people left Jesus to go back to living the way they had lived before they met him. If this might confuse your readers, you could state its meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “returned to their former manner of living” or “went back to their previous way of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JHN 6 66 h8j9 figs-metaphor οὐκέτι μετ’ αὐτοῦ περιεπάτουν 1 no longer walked with him Although Jesus did walk from one place to another, here **walking** is used figuratively to refer to how a person lives and behaves. These people were **no longer** living according to Jesus’ teaching and thus were no longer his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no longer obeyed his teachings” or “no longer were his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 6 66 h8j9 figs-metaphor οὐκέτι μετ’ αὐτοῦ περιεπάτουν 1 no longer walked with him Although Jesus did walk from one place to another, here **walking** is used to refer to how a person lives and behaves. These people were **no longer** living according to Jesus’ teaching and thus were no longer his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no longer obeyed his teachings” or “no longer were his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 6 67 bg2f figs-nominaladj τοῖς δώδεκα 1 the twelve John is using the adjective **Twelve** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom he had appointed to be apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JHN 6 67 hoye translate-names τοῖς δώδεκα 1 If your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as the ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 6 67 ezer figs-explicit μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς θέλετε ὑπάγειν? 1 John records Jesus asking this question in a way that expects a negative response. He does this to contrast **the Twelve** from the many other disciples who had just abandoned him. If your language has a question form that assumes a negative response, you should use it here. Alternate translation: “You probably do not want to go away also, am I right?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 68 n5ty translate-names Σίμων Πέτρος 1 See how you translated the name **Simon Peter** in [1:40](../01/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 6 68 g9l4 figs-rquestion Κύριε, πρὸς τίνα ἀπελευσόμεθα? 1 Lord, to whom shall we go? **Simon Peter** is using the form of a question to emphasize that he desires to follow only Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Lord, we could never follow anyone but you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 6 68 tiwh figs-possession ῥήματα ζωῆς αἰωνίου ἔχεις 1 **Peter** uses **of** to describe a **word** that gives **eternal life**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You have words that give eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -JHN 6 68 v12o figs-metonymy ῥήματα 1 John records Peter using the term **words** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 6 68 v12o figs-metonymy ῥήματα 1 John records Peter using the term **words** to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 6 69 o3w6 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 When Peter says **we**, he is speaking of himself and the rest of the twelve disciples, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) JHN 6 69 qu0n figs-possession ὁ Ἅγιος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 **Peter** uses **of** to describe **the Holy One** who comes from **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy One from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 6 70 m9ys figs-rquestion οὐκ ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς τοὺς δώδεκα ἐξελεξάμην, καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν εἷς διάβολός ἐστιν? 1 Did not I choose you, the twelve, and one of you is a devil? Jesus gives this remark in the form of a question in order to emphasize that one of the twelve disciples will betray him. Alternate translation: “I chose you, the Twelve, myself, and one of you is a devil!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -963,7 +963,7 @@ JHN 7 6 bcul figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense i JHN 7 6 n5bj figs-metonymy ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ἐμὸς οὔπω πάρεστιν 1 My time has not yet come This could mean: (1) It was not the right **time** for Jesus to go to Jerusalem for the festival because God had not yet told him to go. This meaning explains why he eventually went to the festival in verse [10](../07/10.md). Alternate translation: “Now is not the right time for me to go to Jerusalem” (2) It was not the right **time** for Jesus to publicly reveal himself as the Messiah, which is what his brothers wanted him to do. Alternate translation: “Now is not the right time for me to publicly reveal myself as the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 7 6 z9gv figs-yousingular ὁ ὑμέτερος 1 All instances of “you” and **your** in verses [6–8](../07/06.md) are plural. They only refer to Jesus’ brothers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) JHN 7 6 shs9 ὁ δὲ καιρὸς ὁ ὑμέτερος πάντοτέ ἐστιν ἕτοιμος 1 your time is always ready Alternate translation: “but any time is good for you” -JHN 7 7 h7kv figs-metonymy οὐ δύναται ὁ κόσμος μισεῖν ὑμᾶς 1 The world cannot hate you **The world** here refers figuratively to the people who live in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “All the people in the world are not able to hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 7 7 h7kv figs-metonymy οὐ δύναται ὁ κόσμος μισεῖν ὑμᾶς 1 The world cannot hate you **The world** here refers to the people who live in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “All the people in the world are not able to hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 7 7 s92r writing-pronouns μισεῖ…περὶ αὐτοῦ…τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ 1 In this verse, **it** refers to the people in **the world**. If you translated **the world** with a plural noun, then you should change these pronouns to plural form as well. Alternate translation: “they hate…about them…their works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 7 7 e5hq ἐγὼ μαρτυρῶ περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ πονηρά ἐστιν 1 I testify about it that its works are evil Alternate translation: “I tell them that what they are doing is evil” JHN 7 8 ax6v figs-explicit ὑμεῖς ἀνάβητε 1 John records Jesus saying **go up** to refer to going to Jerusalem, because that city is at a higher elevation than Galilee, which is where Jesus and his brothers were at this time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate where they would go. Alternate translation: “You go up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -975,7 +975,7 @@ JHN 7 11 i6cl figs-synecdoche οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Here, **the Jews** r JHN 7 11 er5u figs-explicit ποῦ ἐστιν ἐκεῖνος 1 Here, John records the Jewish leaders saying **that one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus without saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “Where is that so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 7 12 qc8f figs-explicit γογγυσμὸς 1 Although the word translated **murmuring** usually refers to grumbling or complaining, here it refers to speaking quietly, without a negative meaning. Some people in **the crowd** were discussing who Jesus was and didn’t want the religious leaders to hear them. If your word for **murmuring** only has a negative connotation in your language, use a different neutral expression. Alternate translation: “quiet discussion” or “whispering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 7 12 glq8 grammar-collectivenouns τοῖς ὄχλοις…τὸν ὄχλον 1 Here, **crowds** refers to several different groups of people, while **crowd** refers to a group of people in general. See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). Alternate translation: “the groups of people … the group of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -JHN 7 12 c27a figs-metaphor πλανᾷ τὸν ὄχλον 1 he leads the crowds astray Here the people use **leads** **astray** figuratively to refer to persuading someone to believe something that is not true. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he misleads the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 7 12 c27a figs-metaphor πλανᾷ τὸν ὄχλον 1 he leads the crowds astray Here the people use **leads** **astray** to refer to persuading someone to believe something that is not true. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he misleads the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 7 13 yyiv figs-possession διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 John is using **of** to describe the **fear** that the people had for the Jewish leaders. If this use of the possessive form would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “because of their fear that the Jews would harm them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 7 13 n8bb figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 7 14 yut8 τῆς ἑορτῆς 1 Here, **the festival** refers to the Jewish Festival of Shelters mentioned in verse [1](../07/01.md). See how you translated the word **festival** there. Alternate translation: “the Shelters festival” @@ -1009,7 +1009,7 @@ JHN 7 23 t21u grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ περιτομὴν λαμβ JHN 7 23 k04n figs-genericnoun λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος 1 See how you translated **man** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “men receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) JHN 7 23 owuc grammar-collectivenouns ὁ νόμος 1 See how you translated **the law** in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) JHN 7 23 ltsk figs-activepassive μὴ λυθῇ ὁ νόμος Μωϋσέως 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you might not break the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 7 23 fbk2 figs-idiom μὴ λυθῇ ὁ νόμος Μωϋσέως 1 Here, Jesus uses **broken** figuratively to refer to disobeying the regulations that God gave in **the law of Moses**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the regulations of the law of Moses might not be disobeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +JHN 7 23 fbk2 figs-idiom μὴ λυθῇ ὁ νόμος Μωϋσέως 1 Here, Jesus uses **broken** to refer to disobeying the regulations that God gave in **the law of Moses**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the regulations of the law of Moses might not be disobeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 7 23 w9wn figs-rquestion ἐμοὶ χολᾶτε ὅτι ὅλον ἄνθρωπον ὑγιῆ ἐποίησα ἐν Σαββάτῳ? 1 why are you angry with me because I made a man completely healthy on the Sabbath? Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If your language does not use this type of question, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be angry with me because I made a man completely well on the Sabbath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 7 24 x4fl figs-explicit μὴ κρίνετε κατ’ ὄψιν, ἀλλὰ τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν κρίνετε 1 Do not judge according to appearance, but judge righteously Jesus implies that the people should not decide what is right based only on what they can see. A person does something for a reason and that reason cannot be seen. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not judge people according to appearance! Instead, decide what is right according to what God says is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 7 24 mrll figs-abstractnouns κατ’ ὄψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **appearance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to what you see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1028,14 +1028,14 @@ JHN 7 28 rc3g figs-explicit ἔστιν ἀληθινὸς ὁ πέμψας με JHN 7 30 kci1 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 **Therefore** indicates that this verse states the result of what had happened in the previous verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “As a result of Jesus saying these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 7 30 e0ce writing-pronouns ἐζήτουν 1 Here, **they** could refer to: (1) the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “the Jewish authorities were seeking” (2) the Jerusalemites. Alternate translation: “the people dwelling in Jerusalem were seeking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 7 30 pamg figs-idiom οὐδεὶς ἐπέβαλεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὴν χεῖρα 1 To lay **a hand on** someone is an idiom which means to grab someone or hold onto someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “no one grabbed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JHN 7 30 pxr4 figs-metonymy οὔπω ἐληλύθει ἡ ὥρα αὐτοῦ 1 his hour had not yet come Here, the word **hour** is used figuratively to refer to the time God had planned for Jesus to be arrested and killed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the right time to arrest him had not yet come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 7 30 pxr4 figs-metonymy οὔπω ἐληλύθει ἡ ὥρα αὐτοῦ 1 his hour had not yet come Here, the word **hour** is used to refer to the time God had planned for Jesus to be arrested and killed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the right time to arrest him had not yet come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 7 31 uuzq grammar-collectivenouns ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου 1 See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) JHN 7 31 y5m8 figs-rquestion ὁ Χριστὸς, ὅταν ἔλθῃ, μὴ πλείονα σημεῖα ποιήσει ὧν οὗτος ἐποίησεν? 1 When the Christ comes, will he do more signs than what this one has done? The **crowd** uses the form of a question to add emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this type of question by translating these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “When the Christ may come, surely he will not do more signs than this one has done!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 7 31 x8e4 σημεῖα 1 signs See how you translated **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles” JHN 7 32 re08 grammar-collectivenouns τοῦ ὄχλου 1 See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) JHN 7 32 efsz γογγύζοντος 1 Although the word translated **murmuring** usually refers to grumbling or complaining, here it refers to speaking quietly, without a negative meaning. Some people in **the crowd** were discussing whether or not Jesus was the Messiah and didn’t want the religious leaders to hear them. See how you translated this word in verse [12](../07/12.md). JHN 7 33 xm7p ἔτι χρόνον μικρὸν μεθ’ ὑμῶν εἰμι 1 I am still with you for a short amount of time Alternate translation: “I will remain with you for only a short period of time” -JHN 7 33 d666 figs-extrainfo ὑπάγω 1 Here Jesus uses **go away** figuratively to refer to his death and return to heaven. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 7 33 d666 figs-extrainfo ὑπάγω 1 Here Jesus uses **go away** to refer to his death and return to heaven. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 7 33 b4m8 figs-explicit τὸν πέμψαντά με 1 then I go to him who sent me This phrase refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in verse [16](../07/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 7 34 p7w6 figs-infostructure ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ὑμεῖς, οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν 1 where I go, you will not be able to come If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “you will not be able to come to the place where I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) JHN 7 35 zn29 figs-synecdoche εἶπον οὖν οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι πρὸς ἑαυτούς 1 The Jews therefore said among themselves Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -1043,28 +1043,28 @@ JHN 7 35 ojvy figs-explicit οὗτος 1 Here, John records the Jewish leaders JHN 7 35 tc23 figs-rquestion μὴ εἰς τὴν διασπορὰν τῶν Ἑλλήνων μέλλει πορεύεσθαι, καὶ διδάσκειν τοὺς Ἕλληνας? 1 The Jewish leaders are using the form of a question to add emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this type of question by translating these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely he is not about to go to the dispersion of the Greeks and to teach the Greeks!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 7 35 ef1y figs-explicit τὴν διασπορὰν 1 Here, **dispersion** refers to the Jewish people who were spread across the Greek-speaking world that was outside of the land of Israel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who are dispersed” or “the Jews who are scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 7 35 g64h figs-possession τὴν διασπορὰν τῶν Ἑλλήνων 1 The Jews used the phrase **of the Greeks** to describe the location where the Jews were dispersed. If this use of the possessive form would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Jews who are dispersed among the Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -JHN 7 36 ib6p figs-metonymy τίς ἐστιν ὁ λόγος οὗτος ὃν εἶπε 1 What is this word that he said Here, **word** is used figuratively to refer to the meaning of the message that Jesus had shared. The Jewish leaders had failed to understand that message. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What was he talking about when he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 7 36 ib6p figs-metonymy τίς ἐστιν ὁ λόγος οὗτος ὃν εἶπε 1 What is this word that he said Here, **word** is used to refer to the meaning of the message that Jesus had shared. The Jewish leaders had failed to understand that message. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What was he talking about when he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 7 36 h18z figs-quotesinquotes εἶπε, ζητήσετέ με, καὶ οὐχ εὑρήσετέ; καὶ ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 7 36 dyy1 ζητήσετέ με, καὶ οὐχ εὑρήσετέ; καὶ ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγὼ, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν 1 See how you translated this in verse [34](../07/34.md). JHN 7 37 elc6 0 General Information: About three or four days has passed since the events described in verses [14–36](../07/14.md). It is now the last day of the Festival of Shelters, and Jesus speaks to the crowd. JHN 7 37 n3um writing-quotations ἔκραξεν λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “cried out, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 7 37 ipem ἔκραξεν 1 See how you translated this phrase in verse [28](../07/28.md). -JHN 7 37 iy9e figs-metaphor ἐάν τις διψᾷ 1 If anyone is thirsty Here Jesus uses **thirst** figuratively to refer to a person’s need for God, just as someone would **thirst** for water. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “If anyone who recognizes their need for God is like a thirsty person who desires water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 7 37 ayn6 figs-metaphor ἐρχέσθω πρός με καὶ πινέτω 1 let him come to me and drink Here Jesus uses **come** and **drink** figuratively to refer together to believing in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use similes. Alternate translation: “let him believe in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 7 37 iy9e figs-metaphor ἐάν τις διψᾷ 1 If anyone is thirsty Here Jesus uses **thirst** to refer to a person’s need for God, just as someone would **thirst** for water. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “If anyone who recognizes their need for God is like a thirsty person who desires water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 7 37 ayn6 figs-metaphor ἐρχέσθω πρός με καὶ πινέτω 1 let him come to me and drink Here Jesus uses **come** and **drink** to refer together to believing in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use similes. Alternate translation: “let him believe in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 7 38 u9cx figs-infostructure ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, καθὼς εἶπεν ἡ Γραφή 1 He who believes in me, just as the scripture says If it would be natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. You will also need to adjust some words to fit the new order. Alternate translation: “As the scripture says about anyone who believes in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) JHN 7 38 wtl7 figs-quotesinquotes καθὼς εἶπεν ἡ Γραφή, ποταμοὶ ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας αὐτοῦ ῥεύσουσιν ὕδατος ζῶντος 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “rivers of living water will flow from the stomach of the one believing in me, just as the scripture says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 7 38 q926 figs-personification εἶπεν ἡ Γραφή 1 Here Jesus uses **scripture** as if it were a person who could speak. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the prophets spoke in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -JHN 7 38 uw2q figs-metaphor ποταμοὶ…ῥεύσουσιν ὕδατος ζῶντος 1 rivers of living water will flow Here Jesus uses **rivers** figuratively to refer to a constant and abundant flow of **living water**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “an abundance of living water will flow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 7 38 yt75 figs-extrainfo ὕδατος ζῶντος 1 living water Jesus uses **living water** here figuratively to refer to the Holy Spirit who works in a person to save and transform them. However, since John explains this meaning in the next verse, you do not need to explain it further here. See how you translated **living water** in [4:10](../04/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -JHN 7 38 y1zb figs-explicit ὕδατος ζῶντος 1 Here, **living** is used figuratively to mean “giving eternal life” or “causing people to live forever.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of water that gives eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 7 38 uw2q figs-metaphor ποταμοὶ…ῥεύσουσιν ὕδατος ζῶντος 1 rivers of living water will flow Here Jesus uses **rivers** to refer to a constant and abundant flow of **living water**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “an abundance of living water will flow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 7 38 yt75 figs-extrainfo ὕδατος ζῶντος 1 living water Jesus uses **living water** here to refer to the Holy Spirit who works in a person to save and transform them. However, since John explains this meaning in the next verse, you do not need to explain it further here. See how you translated **living water** in [4:10](../04/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 7 38 y1zb figs-explicit ὕδατος ζῶντος 1 Here, **living** is used to mean “giving eternal life” or “causing people to live forever.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of water that gives eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 7 38 ebk7 writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **his** could refer to: (1) the person who believes in Jesus. This meaning is used in most Bible translations and assumes that a new sentence begins at the beginning of this verse. Alternate translation, as in the ULT: “his” (2) Jesus. This meaning is used in some ancient church writings and assumes that the sentence at the end of the previous verse continues into through **the one believing in me** in this verse. Alternate translation: “my” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JHN 7 38 cx1q figs-metonymy ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας αὐτοῦ 1 from his stomach Here the **stomach** is used figuratively to refer to the non-physical part of a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from inside of him” or “from his heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 7 38 cx1q figs-metonymy ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας αὐτοῦ 1 from his stomach Here the **stomach** is used to refer to the non-physical part of a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from inside of him” or “from his heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 7 39 i8wx writing-background 0 General Information: In this verse John gives information to clarify what Jesus was talking about in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 7 39 qbr1 figs-explicit οὔπω…ἦν Πνεῦμα 1 the Spirit had not yet been given John implies here that **the Spirit** would later come to dwell in those who trusted in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Spirit had not yet come to dwell in the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 7 39 n599 figs-explicit οὐδέπω ἐδοξάσθη 1 Here the word **glorified** could refer to: (1) the time when Jesus would die on the cross and rise from the dead (see John [12:23](../12/23.md)). Alternate translation: “had not yet been crucified and resurrected” (2) the time when Jesus would ascend to his Father in heaven. [Acts 1–2](../act/01/01.md) records the Holy Spirit coming after Jesus went up to heaven. Alternate translation: “had not yet returned to God in glory” (3) both the crucifixion, resurrection, and ascension of Jesus. Alternate translation: “had not yet been glorified by his death, resurrection, and return to heaven” See the discussion of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 7 40 xvts grammar-connect-time-sequential οὖν 1 **Then** here indicates that what follows is the continuation of the narrative from [verse 38](../07/38.md), which John had interrupted with background information in [verse 39](../07/39.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could show reference to earlier events by translating this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After Jesus had said this about the Holy Spirit,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) JHN 7 40 schi grammar-collectivenouns ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου 1 See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -JHN 7 40 ifli figs-metonymy τῶν λόγων τούτων 1 John uses the term **words** figuratively to describe the content of what Jesus had said by referring to something associated with it, the **words** he used to communicate it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these things he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 7 40 ifli figs-metonymy τῶν λόγων τούτων 1 John uses the term **words** to describe the content of what Jesus had said by referring to something associated with it, the **words** he used to communicate it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these things he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 7 40 shq8 figs-explicit ὁ προφήτης 1 This is indeed the prophet See how you translated **the prophet** in [1:21](01/21.md). Alternate translation: “the prophet whom God promised to send to us” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) JHN 7 41 alq3 figs-rquestion μὴ γὰρ ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας ὁ Χριστὸς ἔρχεται 1 Does the Christ come from Galilee? These people are using the form of a question to add emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this type of question by translating these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the Christ surely does not come from Galilee!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 7 42 n8nb figs-rquestion οὐχ ἡ Γραφὴ εἶπεν, ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ, καὶ ἀπὸ Βηθλέεμ, τῆς κώμης ὅπου ἦν Δαυεὶδ, ἔρχεται ὁ Χριστός? 1 Have the scriptures not said that the Christ will come from the descendants of David and from Bethlehem, the village where David was? The people are using the form of a question to add emphasis. This group of people does not believe Jesus is the Messiah, because they do not think he came from Bethlehem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this type of question by translating the words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “The scriptures surely say that the Christ will come from the seed of David and from Bethlehem, the village where David was!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1084,7 +1084,7 @@ JHN 7 50 u5ha writing-background ὁ ἐλθὼν πρὸς αὐτὸν πρό JHN 7 50 yw8i εἷς ὢν ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 Alternate translation: “although he was one of them” or “despite being one of them” JHN 7 50 hj1u figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 7 51 ia3j figs-rquestion μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ πρῶτον παρ’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ γνῷ τί ποιεῖ? 1 Does our law judge a man … what he does? Nicodemus is using the form of a question to add emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this type of question by translating his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Our law certainly does not judge a man unless it might first hear from him and might know what he does!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 7 51 y8df figs-personification μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ πρῶτον παρ’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ γνῷ 1 Does our law judge a man Nicodemus speaks of the **law** figuratively as if it were a person. If this use of **law** is not natural in your language, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “It is not written in our law that we may judge a man unless we might first hear from him and might know … is it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JHN 7 51 y8df figs-personification μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ πρῶτον παρ’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ γνῷ 1 Does our law judge a man Nicodemus speaks of the **law** as if it were a person. If this use of **law** is not natural in your language, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “It is not written in our law that we may judge a man unless we might first hear from him and might know … is it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JHN 7 51 c2h5 figs-genericnoun τὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 Here, **a man** does not refer to a specific man. It refers to any man in general. Alternate translation: “any man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) JHN 7 52 pt91 figs-rquestion μὴ καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἶ? 1 Are you also from Galilee? The Jewish leaders know that Nicodemus is not **from Galilee**. They ask this question as a way of scoffing at him. If your language does not use questions in this way, use another way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “You must also be one of those people from Galilee!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 7 52 k6pg figs-ellipsis ἐραύνησον καὶ ἴδε 1 Search and see Here, John records the Jewish leaders leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the missing words from the context. Alternate translation: “Look carefully and read what is written in the Scriptures to learn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -1095,16 +1095,16 @@ JHN 8 intro e667 0 # John 8 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting< JHN 8 1 mkz2 translate-textvariants 0 General Information: The best early texts do not have [7:53–8:11](../07/53.md). The ULT has set them apart in square brackets ([ ]) to show that John probably did not include them in his original text. See the discussion of this textual issue in the General Notes to this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) JHN 8 12 m4ma writing-newevent 0 In this verse Jesus begins speaking to a crowd near the treasury in the temple some time after the events of [John 7:1–52](../07/01.md). John does not mark the beginning of this new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 8 12 pvpr writing-quotations πάλιν…αὐτοῖς ἐλάλησεν…λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “spoke to the people again, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -JHN 8 12 k5ib figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου…ἀλλ’ ἕξει τὸ φῶς 1 I am the light of the world Here Jesus uses **light** figuratively to refer to God’s truth and goodness that are revealed to the world by Jesus. He is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. See the discussion of **light** and **darkness** in the General Notes to this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “I am the one who reveals God’s truth and goodness, that is like a light, to the world … but will have that truth and goodness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 8 12 yc5p figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου 1 the world Here, **world** refers figuratively to all the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 8 12 k5ib figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου…ἀλλ’ ἕξει τὸ φῶς 1 I am the light of the world Here Jesus uses **light** to refer to God’s truth and goodness that are revealed to the world by Jesus. He is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. See the discussion of **light** and **darkness** in the General Notes to this chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “I am the one who reveals God’s truth and goodness, that is like a light, to the world … but will have that truth and goodness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 8 12 yc5p figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου 1 the world Here, **world** refers to all the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 8 12 zf41 figs-idiom ὁ ἀκολουθῶν ἐμοὶ 1 he who follows me Here, **following** means to become Jesus’ disciple and obey his teachings. See how you translated a similar phrase in [1:43](../01/43.md). Alternate translation: “the one who becomes my disciple” or “the one who obeys me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JHN 8 12 tse3 figs-metaphor οὐ μὴ περιπατήσῃ ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ 1 will not walk in the darkness Here Jesus uses the phrase **walk in the darkness** figuratively to refer to living a sinful life. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “may certainly not live as if he were living in the darkness of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 8 12 tse3 figs-metaphor οὐ μὴ περιπατήσῃ ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ 1 will not walk in the darkness Here Jesus uses the phrase **walk in the darkness** to refer to living a sinful life. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “may certainly not live as if he were living in the darkness of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 12 vw7r figs-possession φῶς τῆς ζωῆς 1 light of life Here, John records Jesus using the **of** to describe **light** that gives **life**. If this use of the possessive form is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “light that brings life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 8 12 lvdg figs-explicit τῆς ζωῆς 1 Here, **life** refers to eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 13 ih9h figs-explicit σὺ περὶ σεαυτοῦ μαρτυρεῖς 1 You bear witness about yourself The Pharisees assumed that their listeners understood that they were referring to Jesus testifying about himself without there being any other witnesses to confirm his **testimony**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are testifying about yourself without any other witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 13 mrj6 figs-explicit ἡ μαρτυρία σου οὐκ ἔστιν ἀληθής 1 your witness is not true The Pharisees are implying that the **testimony** of only one person **is not true** because of a rule in the law of Moses. According to [Deuteronomy 19:15](../deu/19/15.md), a statement had to be confirmed by at least two witnesses in order to be considered true in legal decisions. If your audience is not familiar with the law of Moses in the Old Testament, then you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “your testimony about yourself cannot be true because the law of Moses requires at least two witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 14 bh68 figs-you ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐκ οἴδατε 1 In [verses 14–20](../08/14.md) Jesus uses the plural form of **you** to indicate that he is speaking to the Pharisees. He is not speaking directly to those who believe in him. If this would confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “but you Pharisees do not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -JHN 8 15 k92s figs-metaphor τὴν σάρκα 1 the flesh Here Jesus uses **the flesh** figuratively to refer to human standards. Such standards are superficial and based on the limitations of sinful human nature. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “standards limited by human nature” or “superficial human standards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 8 15 k92s figs-metaphor τὴν σάρκα 1 the flesh Here Jesus uses **the flesh** to refer to human standards. Such standards are superficial and based on the limitations of sinful human nature. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “standards limited by human nature” or “superficial human standards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 15 j79i figs-ellipsis ἐγὼ οὐ κρίνω οὐδένα 1 I judge no one This could mean: (1) Jesus does not judge anyone in the same manner as the Pharisees, that is, **according to the flesh**. Alternate translation: “I do not judge anyone according to the flesh” (2) Jesus is not judging anyone at that time. Alternate translation: “I do not judge anyone at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 8 16 ys2e figs-abstractnouns ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 8 16 jb2f ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ ἀληθινή ἐστιν 1 my judgment is true Here, Jesus is contrasting the nature of the Pharisees’ **judgment** with the nature of his own **judgment**. Alternate translation: “my judgment is right” or “my judgment is according to what is true” @@ -1122,9 +1122,9 @@ JHN 8 19 wcd1 grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ἐμὲ ᾔδειτε, JHN 8 20 p01r writing-background 0 In this verse John finishes telling about the events in the story by giving background information about where these events happened. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Some languages may require the information about the setting to be placed at the beginning of this part of the story in [8:12](../08/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 8 20 xa7h figs-metonymy ταῦτα τὰ ῥήματα 1 Here, **these words** refers to what Jesus had just spoken in verses [12–19](../08/12.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these things about himself” or “these things to the Pharisees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 8 20 witr translate-unknown τῷ γαζοφυλακίῳ 1 A **treasury** is the place where treasures are stored. In Jesus’ time, the temple **treasury** referred to a place in the courtyard that had containers for receiving money offerings. If your readers would not be familiar with this use of **treasury**, you could give a fuller description. Alternate translation: “the place where people gave money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -JHN 8 20 b11j figs-metonymy οὔπω ἐληλύθει ἡ ὥρα αὐτοῦ 1 his hour had not yet come Here, the word **hour** is used figuratively to refer to the time God had planned for Jesus to be arrested and killed. See how you translated this phrase in [7:30](../07/30.md). Alternate translation: “the right time to arrest him had not yet come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 8 20 b11j figs-metonymy οὔπω ἐληλύθει ἡ ὥρα αὐτοῦ 1 his hour had not yet come Here, the word **hour** is used to refer to the time God had planned for Jesus to be arrested and killed. See how you translated this phrase in [7:30](../07/30.md). Alternate translation: “the right time to arrest him had not yet come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 8 21 ls93 writing-newevent εἶπεν οὖν πάλιν αὐτοῖς 1 **Then again** here introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “At another time he again said to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -JHN 8 21 lxox figs-extrainfo ἐγὼ ὑπάγω…ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω 1 Two times in this verse Jesus uses **go away** figuratively to refer to his death and return to God in heaven. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 8 21 lxox figs-extrainfo ἐγὼ ὑπάγω…ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω 1 Two times in this verse Jesus uses **go away** to refer to his death and return to God in heaven. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 8 21 d70v figs-genericnoun ἐν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ὑμῶν 1 Here, **sin** is singular. This could refer to one: (1) the specific sin of rejecting Jesus as the Messiah. Alternate translation: “in your sin of unbelief” (2) sinfulness in general. Alternate translation: “in your state of sinfulness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) JHN 8 21 m0w8 figs-infostructure ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “You are not able to come to where I go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) JHN 8 22 a4p4 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 The Jews said Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -1133,9 +1133,9 @@ JHN 8 22 vskt figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι λέγει, ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπά JHN 8 22 mi1t ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω ὑμεῖς, οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν 1 See how you translated this clause in the previous verse. JHN 8 23 oc6i figs-you ὑμεῖς ἐκ τῶν κάτω ἐστέ 1 In [verses 23–30](../08/23.md) Jesus uses the plural form of **you** to indicate that he is speaking to the Jewish leaders. He is not speaking directly to those who believe in him. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You Jewish authorities are from below” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JHN 8 23 zug9 figs-explicit ὑμεῖς ἐκ τῶν κάτω ἐστέ 1 You are from below The phrase **from below** could refer to: (1) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “You came from the things below” (2) the place where the subject belongs. Alternate translation: “You belong to the things below” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 8 23 tg9d figs-explicit τῶν κάτω 1 Here, John records Jesus using **the things below** figuratively to refer to **this world**. It does not refer to hell. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are from this lower world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 8 23 tg9d figs-explicit τῶν κάτω 1 Here, John records Jesus using **the things below** to refer to **this world**. It does not refer to hell. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are from this lower world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 23 a7ny figs-explicit ἐγὼ ἐκ τῶν ἄνω εἰμί 1 I am from above The phrase **from the things above** could refer to: (1) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “I came from the things above” (2) the place where the subject belongs, which is heaven. Alternate translation: “I belong to the things above” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 8 23 qlv4 figs-explicit τῶν ἄνω 1 Here, John records Jesus using **the things above** figuratively to refer to heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 8 23 qlv4 figs-explicit τῶν ἄνω 1 Here, John records Jesus using **the things above** to refer to heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 23 svn1 figs-explicit ὑμεῖς ἐκ τούτου τοῦ κόσμου ἐστέ, ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου 1 The phrase **from this world** could refer to: (1) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “You come from this world; I do not come from this world” (2) the place where the subject belongs. Alternate translation: “You belong to this world; I do not belong to this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 23 w3vx figs-metonymy τούτου τοῦ κόσμου…τοῦ κόσμου τούτου 1 Here, **this world** refers to everything in the universe that has been corrupted by sin and is hostile to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this sinful world … this sinful world” or “this world that opposes God … this world that opposes God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 8 24 jgw4 ἀποθανεῖσθε ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν…ἐγώ εἰμι, ἀποθανεῖσθε ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν 1 you will die in your sins This phrase **you will die in your sins** is different from the similar statement in verse [21](../08/21.md) because **sins** is plural in this verse but singular in that verse. Therefore, make sure that you translate **sins** differently than how you translated “sin” in verse [21](../08/21.md). @@ -1146,7 +1146,7 @@ JHN 8 26 f9pp figs-infostructure ἀλλ’ ὁ πέμψας με ἀληθής JHN 8 26 n3gf figs-extrainfo ὁ πέμψας με…παρ’ αὐτοῦ 1 These phrases refer to God. However, since the Jewish leaders did not understand what Jesus meant when he used these phrases, you do not need to explain their meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 8 26 ivk5 ὁ πέμψας με ἀληθής ἐστιν 1 Here, **true** means to be truthful or to speak only the truth. If this use of **true** would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who sent me is truthful” or “the one who sent me tells the truth” JHN 8 26 xj8y figs-explicit κἀγὼ ἃ ἤκουσα παρ’ αὐτοῦ, ταῦτα 1 Jesus says that **the one who sent** him **is true** in order to imply that **these things** he **heard** and spoke are **true**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the true things that I heard from him, these true things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 8 26 lsc7 figs-metonymy ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 these things I say to the world Here, John records Jesus using **the world** figuratively to refer to the people who live in **the world**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these things I say to everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 8 26 lsc7 figs-metonymy ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 these things I say to the world Here, John records Jesus using **the world** to refer to the people who live in **the world**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these things I say to everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 8 27 i7gq writing-background 0 General Information: In this verse John gives information about the Jewish leaders to explain their reaction to Jesus’ teaching. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 8 27 hh1s guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 8 28 x6ca figs-explicit ὅταν ὑψώσητε 1 When you have lifted up Here, John records Jesus referring to when he would be **lifted up** on the cross to be killed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “When you have lifted me up on a cross to kill me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1156,34 +1156,34 @@ JHN 8 28 tcs5 figs-explicit ἐγώ εἰμι 1 I AM See how you translated this JHN 8 28 zysh figs-explicit ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase, **from myself**, in [5:30](../05/30.md). Alternate translation: “on my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 28 vq9k guidelines-sonofgodprinciples καθὼς ἐδίδαξέν με ὁ Πατὴρ, ταῦτα λαλῶ 1 As the Father taught me, I speak these things **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 8 29 w9cl figs-explicit ὁ πέμψας με 1 He who sent me Here, this phrase refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 8 29 vai4 figs-metaphor μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 Here Jesus uses **with me** figuratively to refer to God’s help. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “helping me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 8 29 vai4 figs-metaphor μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 Here Jesus uses **with me** to refer to God’s help. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “helping me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 30 ld9x grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ταῦτα αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος 1 As Jesus was saying these things Here, John is describing something that happened at the same time as the other clause in the sentence. If this might confuse your readers, you could make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “At the time Jesus was saying these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) JHN 8 31 tgat figs-synecdoche τοὺς…Ἰουδαίους 1 In [verses 31–59](../08/31.md) **those Jews** could refer to: (1) some Jewish people from Judea who were in the temple courtyard with Jesus. Alternate translation: “those Judeans” (2) some of the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “those Jewish authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 8 31 f79h figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 In [verses 31–59](../08/31.md) Jesus uses the plural form of **you** to indicate that he could be speaking to: (1) some Jewish people from Judea who were in the temple courtyard with Jesus. Alternate translation: “you Judeans” (2) some of the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JHN 8 31 g752 figs-idiom μείνητε ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τῷ ἐμῷ 1 remain in my word The phrase **remain in my word** means to obey what **Jesus** said. If this might confuse your readers, you can express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “obey what I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JHN 8 32 esz8 figs-personification ἡ ἀλήθεια ἐλευθερώσει ὑμᾶς 1 the truth will set you free Jesus speaks of **truth** figuratively as though it were a person who could **free** someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “knowing the truth will cause you to be free” or “if you obey the truth, God will set you free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JHN 8 32 esz8 figs-personification ἡ ἀλήθεια ἐλευθερώσει ὑμᾶς 1 the truth will set you free Jesus speaks of **truth** as though it were a person who could **free** someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “knowing the truth will cause you to be free” or “if you obey the truth, God will set you free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JHN 8 32 xf9m figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν…ἡ ἀλήθεια 1 the truth Here, **the truth** refers to what Jesus reveals about God, which would include his plan for forgiving sinful people through Jesus’ death on the cross. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is true about God … those true things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]). JHN 8 33 n34n figs-rquestion πῶς σὺ λέγεις, ὅτι ἐλεύθεροι γενήσεσθε 1 how can you say, ‘You will be set free’? The Jews are using the question form here to emphasize their shock at what Jesus has said. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We do not need to be set free!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 8 33 s6jz figs-quotesinquotes πῶς σὺ λέγεις, ὅτι ἐλεύθεροι γενήσεσθε 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “how can you say that we will be free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 8 34 i2pn figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -JHN 8 34 jg3z figs-metaphor δοῦλός ἐστιν τῆς ἁμαρτίας 1 is the slave of sin Here Jesus uses the word **slave** figuratively to refer to someone who cannot stop sinning. This implies that **sin** is like a master for the person who sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile instead. Alternate translation: “is like a slave to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 8 34 jg3z figs-metaphor δοῦλός ἐστιν τῆς ἁμαρτίας 1 is the slave of sin Here Jesus uses the word **slave** to refer to someone who cannot stop sinning. This implies that **sin** is like a master for the person who sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile instead. Alternate translation: “is like a slave to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 35 nfyp figs-genericnoun ὁ…δοῦλος οὐ μένει…ὁ Υἱὸς μένει 1 Jesus is speaking of slaves and sons in general, not of one particular **slave** and **son**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “slaves do not remain … sons remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -JHN 8 35 sg4a figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ 1 in the house Here, Jesus uses **house** figuratively to refer to the family that lives inside the **house**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as a permanent member of a family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 8 35 sg4a figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ 1 in the house Here, Jesus uses **house** to refer to the family that lives inside the **house**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as a permanent member of a family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 8 35 mknn grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὁ Υἱὸς μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 This clause is in contrast to the previous clause. Although slaves do not remain permanent members of the family who owns them, sons are permanent family members. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but the son remains into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) JHN 8 35 j73t figs-ellipsis ὁ Υἱὸς μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “the son remains in the house into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 8 36 n6fp figs-explicit ἐὰν…ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ, ὄντως ἐλεύθεροι ἔσεσθε 1 if the Son sets you free, you will be truly free It is implied that Jesus is talking about freedom from sin. Alternate translation: “if the Son sets you free from sin, you will truly be free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 36 w3q1 figs-123person ἐὰν…ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ 1 if the Son sets you free Unlike the generic use of **son** in the previous verse, here Jesus uses **the Son** to refer to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “if I, the Son, free you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -JHN 8 36 mapu figs-metaphor ἐὰν…ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ 1 Here Jesus uses **frees** figuratively to refer to stopping people from being controlled by their sinful desires. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “if the Son frees you from being controlled by sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 8 36 mapu figs-metaphor ἐὰν…ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ 1 Here Jesus uses **frees** to refer to stopping people from being controlled by their sinful desires. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “if the Son frees you from being controlled by sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 36 nqcr guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς 1 **Son** is an important title for Jesus, **the Son** of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 8 36 ak0s figs-metaphor ὄντως ἐλεύθεροι ἔσεσθε 1 Here Jesus uses **free** figuratively to refer to people no longer being controlled by their sinful desires and thus able to avoid sinning. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “you will truly no longer be controlled by sin” or “you will truly be able to refrain from sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 8 36 ak0s figs-metaphor ὄντως ἐλεύθεροι ἔσεσθε 1 Here Jesus uses **free** to refer to people no longer being controlled by their sinful desires and thus able to avoid sinning. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “you will truly no longer be controlled by sin” or “you will truly be able to refrain from sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 37 p4xm translate-names Ἀβραάμ 1 **Abraham** is the name of a man, the most important ancestor of the Jewish people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 8 37 orw8 figs-idiom ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐμὸς οὐ χωρεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 This phrase **has no place in you** is an idiom that means to truly accept or believe something. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a similar idiom in your language or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you do not receive my words in your hearts” or “you reject my words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 8 37 ph1q figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐμὸς 1 my word Here, **word** refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 8 38 m62y guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τῷ Πατρὶ 1 I say what I have seen with my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 8 38 f9yu figs-extrainfo καὶ ὑμεῖς…ἃ ἠκούσατε παρὰ τοῦ πατρὸς, ποιεῖτε 1 you also do what you heard from your father In this clause, Jesus uses the phrase **the father** to refer to the devil. Despite using the same words as in the previous clause, here Jesus is not referring to God. However, since Jesus did not yet reveal what he meant when he used this phrase, but was speaking ambiguously, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -JHN 8 39 qp2r figs-metaphor ὁ πατὴρ 1 father Here the people use **father** figuratively to refer to their ancestor. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Our forefather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 8 39 qp2r figs-metaphor ὁ πατὴρ 1 father Here the people use **father** to refer to their ancestor. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Our forefather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 39 wg9n figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) -JHN 8 39 v7og figs-metaphor τέκνα τοῦ Ἀβραάμ 1 Here Jesus uses **children** figuratively to mean “descendants.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “descendants of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 8 39 v7og figs-metaphor τέκνα τοῦ Ἀβραάμ 1 Here Jesus uses **children** to mean “descendants.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “descendants of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 39 xcnx figs-possession τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Ἀβραὰμ 1 Jesus is using **of** to describe **works** that were done by **Abraham**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works done by Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 8 40 s615 figs-explicit τοῦτο Ἀβραὰμ οὐκ ἐποίησεν 1 Abraham did not do this Here, **this** refers to what Jesus said earlier in the verse about what the Jews were trying to do to him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham did not seek to kill someone who told him the truth from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 41 i87r figs-extrainfo ὑμεῖς ποιεῖτε τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν 1 You do the works of your father Jesus uses the phrase **your father** to refer to the devil. However, since the Jews did not understand what Jesus meant when he used this phrase, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) @@ -1193,14 +1193,14 @@ JHN 8 42 mk2w figs-explicit ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐλήλυθα 1 Here, * JHN 8 42 p7iv writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνός 1 Here, **that one** refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 8 43 ig11 figs-rquestion διὰ τί τὴν λαλιὰν τὴν ἐμὴν οὐ γινώσκετε? 1 Why do you not understand my words? Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I will tell you why you do not understand what I say!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 8 43 yham figs-metaphor οὐ δύνασθε ἀκούειν τὸν λόγον τὸν ἐμόν 1 Here, **hear** means to listen to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. It does not mean simply to hear what someone says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are not able to heed my words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 8 43 cf8v figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τὸν ἐμόν 1 It is because you cannot hear my words Here, Jesus uses **words** figuratively to refer to his teachings. See how you translated this phrase in [5:47](../05/47.md). Alternate translation: “my teachings.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 8 43 cf8v figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τὸν ἐμόν 1 It is because you cannot hear my words Here, Jesus uses **words** to refer to his teachings. See how you translated this phrase in [5:47](../05/47.md). Alternate translation: “my teachings.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 8 44 vgy1 figs-explicit ὑμεῖς ἐκ τοῦ πατρὸς τοῦ διαβόλου ἐστὲ 1 You are of your father, the devil The phrase **from your father** could refer to: (1) the person to whom the subject belongs, as in the UST. (2) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “You came from your father, the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 44 csgm writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνος 1 Here, **that one** refers to **the devil**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 8 44 pmda figs-explicit ἀνθρωποκτόνος ἦν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 Here, **the beginning** refers to the time when the first humans, Adam and Eve, sinned. It does not refer to the very beginning of time. The devil tempted Eve to sin and Adam sinned as well. Because they sinned, all living things die as part of the punishment for sin. Therefore, Jesus calls **the devil** a **murderer** for starting the process that brought death to the world. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation: “was a murderer from the time when he tempted the first people to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 44 i1e4 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ οὐκ ἔστηκεν 1 The phrase **does not stand in the truth** is an idiom that means to not accept or approve of what is true. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “does not approve of the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JHN 8 44 j6rz figs-metaphor οὐκ ἔστιν ἀλήθεια ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Here Jesus speaks figuratively of **truth** as if it were an object that could exist inside someone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he never speaks the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 8 44 j6rz figs-metaphor οὐκ ἔστιν ἀλήθεια ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Here Jesus speaks of **truth** as if it were an object that could exist inside someone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he never speaks the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 44 hqmo ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων λαλεῖ 1 Alternate translation: “he speaks according to his character” or “he speaks what is most natural for him to speak” -JHN 8 44 k1qu figs-metaphor ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ 1 the father of lies Here Jesus uses **father** figuratively to refer to the one who originated the act of lying. Since **the devil** is the first being to tell a lie, he is called the **father** of lying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first one to lie” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 8 44 k1qu figs-metaphor ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ 1 the father of lies Here Jesus uses **father** to refer to the one who originated the act of lying. Since **the devil** is the first being to tell a lie, he is called the **father** of lying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first one to lie” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 44 x11i figs-explicit ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **it** refers to the act of lying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the father of lying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 46 y3gz figs-rquestion τίς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐλέγχει με περὶ ἁμαρτίας? 1 Which one of you convicts me of sin? Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he has never sinned. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “None of you can convict me concerning sin!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 8 46 kh6a grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἀλήθειαν λέγω 1 If I speak the truth John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) @@ -1208,7 +1208,7 @@ JHN 8 46 ibp1 figs-rquestion διὰ τί ὑμεῖς οὐ πιστεύετέ JHN 8 47 lien figs-explicit ὁ ὢν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ…ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐκ ἐστέ 1 The phrase **from God** could refer to: (1) the person to whom the subject belongs, as in the UST. (2) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “He who came from God … you did not come from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 47 nmmq figs-gendernotations ὁ ὢν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Although **He** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “A person who is from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JHN 8 47 njo6 figs-metaphor ἀκούει…ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀκούετε 1 Here, **hear** means to listen to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated **hear** in verse [43](../08/43.md). Alternate translation: “heeds … you do not heed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 8 47 l7gy figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the words of God Here, Jesus uses **words** figuratively to refer to what God has said. See how you translated **words** in [5:47](../05/47.md). Alternate translation: “the things that God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 8 47 l7gy figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the words of God Here, Jesus uses **words** to refer to what God has said. See how you translated **words** in [5:47](../05/47.md). Alternate translation: “the things that God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 8 48 vu1h figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 The Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 8 48 cic5 figs-rquestion οὐ καλῶς λέγομεν ἡμεῖς ὅτι Σαμαρείτης εἶ σὺ, καὶ δαιμόνιον ἔχεις? 1 Do we not truly say that you are a Samaritan and have a demon? **The Jews** are using a rhetorical question here to accuse Jesus and to dishonor him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We certainly say rightly that you are a Samaritan and have a demon!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 8 48 ovbe figs-explicit Σαμαρείτης εἶ σὺ 1 Most Jewish people in Jesus’ time hated and despised Samaritans, so his Jewish opponents here called Jesus a **Samaritan** in order to insult him. Use the natural form in your language to indicate that this is an insult. Alternate translation: “you are one of those accursed Samaritans” or “you are an enemy Samaritan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1220,24 +1220,24 @@ JHN 8 50 d00s figs-ellipsis ὁ ζητῶν 1 Here, Jesus is leaving out some o JHN 8 50 cs55 figs-ellipsis κρίνων 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. Here, **judging** could refer to: (1) God **judging** between what Jesus said about himself and what his Jewish opponents were saying about him. Alternate translation: “judging between your testimony and mine” (2) God condemning those who dishonor Jesus. Alternate translation: “judging those who dishonor me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 8 51 fb52 figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 8 51 m46r figs-metonymy τὸν ἐμὸν λόγον 1 keeps my word Here, **word** refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. See how you translated this phrase in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “my message” or “what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 8 51 bgrt figs-metaphor θάνατον οὐ μὴ θεωρήσῃ 1 see death Here Jesus uses **see** figuratively to refer to experiencing or participating in something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will certainly not experience death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 8 51 bgrt figs-metaphor θάνατον οὐ μὴ θεωρήσῃ 1 see death Here Jesus uses **see** to refer to experiencing or participating in something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will certainly not experience death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 51 gx7l figs-extrainfo θάνατον οὐ μὴ θεωρήσῃ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 see death Jesus uses **death** to refer to spiritual **death**, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical **death**. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. Alternate translation: “he will certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 8 52 e9xz figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 8 52 bwhv δαιμόνιον ἔχεις 1 Alternate translation: “a demon is inside of you” or “you must be under the control of a demon” JHN 8 52 dxll translate-names Ἀβραὰμ 1 See how you translated **Abraham** in [verse 37](../08/37.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 8 52 wzq3 figs-quotesinquotes σὺ λέγεις, ἐάν τις τὸν λόγον μου τηρήσῃ 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “you say that if anyone keeps your word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 8 52 zah1 ἐάν τις τὸν λόγον μου τηρήσῃ 1 If anyone keeps my word See how you translated this in the previous verse. -JHN 8 52 a1ls figs-metaphor οὐ μὴ γεύσηται θανάτου εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 taste death **The Jews** say here that Jesus used **taste** figuratively to refer to experiencing or participating in something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will certainly not experience death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 8 52 a1ls figs-metaphor οὐ μὴ γεύσηται θανάτου εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 taste death **The Jews** say here that Jesus used **taste** to refer to experiencing or participating in something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he will certainly not experience death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 52 il4r figs-metaphor θανάτου 1 See how you translated **death** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 53 shp3 figs-rquestion μὴ σὺ μείζων εἶ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἀβραάμ, ὅστις ἀπέθανεν? 1 You are not greater than our father Abraham who died, are you? The Jews are using this question to emphasize that they do not think that Jesus is **greater than Abraham**. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are certainly not greater than our father Abraham who died!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 8 53 p38s figs-metaphor τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 father See how you translated this phrase in verse [39](../08/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 53 cei7 figs-rquestion τίνα σεαυτὸν ποιεῖς? 1 Who do you make yourself out to be? The Jews are using this question to rebuke Jesus for thinking that he is more important than Abraham. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not think that you are so important!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 8 54 ab13 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 8 54 lomt figs-quotesinquotes ὃν ὑμεῖς λέγετε, ὅτι Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐστιν 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “about whom you say that he is your God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -JHN 8 55 c3bm figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 Here Jesus uses **word** figuratively to refer what God has said. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what God says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 8 55 c3bm figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 Here Jesus uses **word** to refer what God has said. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what God says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 8 56 wofu figs-metaphor ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν 1 See how you translated this phrase in verse [39](../08/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 8 56 vb1v figs-metaphor ἴδῃ…εἶδεν 1 Here Jesus uses **see** figuratively to refer to experiencing or participating in something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he might experience … he experienced it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 8 56 tyu5 figs-metonymy τὴν ἡμέραν τὴν ἐμήν 1 my day Here Jesus uses **my day** figuratively to refer to the time when Jesus came to earth. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my coming” or “the time when I would come to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 8 56 vb1v figs-metaphor ἴδῃ…εἶδεν 1 Here Jesus uses **see** to refer to experiencing or participating in something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he might experience … he experienced it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 8 56 tyu5 figs-metonymy τὴν ἡμέραν τὴν ἐμήν 1 my day Here Jesus uses **my day** to refer to the time when Jesus came to earth. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my coming” or “the time when I would come to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 8 56 hv5g figs-metaphor εἶδεν καὶ ἐχάρη 1 he saw it and was glad This phrase could mean: (1) Abraham literally **saw** a prophetic vision of Jesus coming to earth. Alternate translation: “he foresaw my coming through revelation from God and was glad” (2) when his son Isaac was born, Abraham metaphorically **saw** that God was beginning to fulfill the covenant that would culminate in Jesus coming to earth. Alternate translation: “he perceived my coming when God gave him a son, and he was glad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 57 yzf9 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 The Jews said to him See how you translated **the Jews** in [verse 31](../08/31.md). Alternate translation: “the Judeans” or “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 8 57 r1ek figs-rquestion πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις, καὶ Ἀβραὰμ ἑώρακας? 1 You are not yet fifty years old, and you have seen Abraham? Here, **the Jews** opposing Jesus are using this question to express their shock that Jesus claims to have seen Abraham. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are less than fifty years old! You could not possibly have seen Abraham!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1258,8 +1258,8 @@ JHN 9 4 h231 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 We When Jesus says **us** here, he is i JHN 9 4 qs5q figs-possession τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πέμψαντός με 1 Here, Jesus is using **of** to describe **works** that God wants Jesus and his disciples to do. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works that the one who sent me demands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 9 4 mv5u figs-explicit τοῦ πέμψαντός με 1 Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 9 4 x8rx figs-explicit ἕως ἡμέρα ἐστίν; ἔρχεται νὺξ 1 Here, **day** and **night** could mean: (1) the time when Jesus was on the earth with his disciples and the time when he was no longer on earth, respectively. Alternate translation: “while I am still with you. The time when I will leave you is coming” (2) a person’s lifetime and the time that person dies, respectively. Alternate translation: “while we are still alive. The time when we will die is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 9 4 g92d figs-metaphor ἕως ἡμέρα ἐστίν 1 Here Jesus uses **day** figuratively. He compares the time when he and his disciples can do God’s work to the daytime, which is the time when people normally work. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while it is the time like the daylight hours when people usually work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 9 4 rloj figs-metaphor ἔρχεται νὺξ 1 Here Jesus uses **Night** figuratively. He compares the time when he and his disciples cannot do God’s work to the nighttime, which is the time when people normally cannot work because it is too dark to see. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “The time like the night hours is coming when people cannot work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 9 4 g92d figs-metaphor ἕως ἡμέρα ἐστίν 1 Here Jesus uses **day**. He compares the time when he and his disciples can do God’s work to the daytime, which is the time when people normally work. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “while it is the time like the daylight hours when people usually work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 9 4 rloj figs-metaphor ἔρχεται νὺξ 1 Here Jesus uses **Night**. He compares the time when he and his disciples cannot do God’s work to the nighttime, which is the time when people normally cannot work because it is too dark to see. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “The time like the night hours is coming when people cannot work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 9 5 f2xu figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 in the world Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the earth on which people live. It does not refer only to the people in the world or to the entire universe. Alternate translation: “on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 9 5 dd8k figs-metaphor φῶς εἰμι τοῦ κόσμου 1 light of the world See how you translated this clause in [8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “I am the one who is like a light and who reveals God’s truth and goodness to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 9 6 y3s4 figs-explicit ἐποίησεν πηλὸν ἐκ τοῦ πτύσματος 1 made mud with the saliva Jesus used his fingers to mix the dirt and **saliva** into **mud**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “used his fingers to mix the dirt and saliva to make mud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1273,7 +1273,7 @@ JHN 9 7 rj0w figs-explicit βλέπων 1 Here, **seeing** means that the man b JHN 9 8 d1vq figs-ellipsis ὅτι προσαίτης ἦν 1 This clause is missing some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “those who had seen that he was a beggar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 9 8 r79x figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ καθήμενος καὶ προσαιτῶν? 1 Is not this the man that used to sit and beg? The people here are using a rhetorical question to express their surprise at seeing the blind man who has been healed. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This man is the one who used to sit and beg!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 9 10 m97n figs-activepassive πῶς ἠνεῴχθησάν σου οἱ ὀφθαλμοί? 1 Then how were your eyes opened? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “How did your eyes become opened?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 9 10 yy53 figs-metonymy πῶς ἠνεῴχθησάν σου οἱ ὀφθαλμοί 1 Then how were your eyes opened? Here, **eyes** **opened** figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How are you able to see?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 9 10 yy53 figs-metonymy πῶς ἠνεῴχθησάν σου οἱ ὀφθαλμοί 1 Then how were your eyes opened? Here, **eyes** **opened** describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How are you able to see?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 9 11 nii1 figs-activepassive ὁ λεγόμενος Ἰησοῦς 1 smeared it on my eyes If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom we call Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 9 11 a42y figs-explicit πηλὸν ἐποίησεν 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 6](../09/06.md). Alternate translation: “used his fingers to mix the dirt with saliva to make mud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 9 11 b5zf figs-explicit νίψαι…καὶ νιψάμενος 1 See how you translated **wash** in [verse 7](../09/07.md). Alternate translation: “wash your eyes … and having washed my eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1281,7 +1281,7 @@ JHN 9 11 ajxb figs-abstractnouns ἀνέβλεψα 1 If your language does not JHN 9 13 cu14 figs-pastforfuture ἄγουσιν 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 9 14 dl48 writing-background 0 General Information: In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about when Jesus healed the man. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 9 14 ef0w figs-explicit τὸν πηλὸν ἐποίησεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς, καὶ ἀνέῳξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς 1 The negative reaction of the Pharisees described in the following verses is based on their belief that, according to their religious law, Jesus’ actions were considered to be work. Therefore, they believed that he was disobeying God’s command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]]). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus made the mud and opened his eyes. These were two deeds the Pharisees considered to be work.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 9 14 qxy9 figs-metonymy ἀνέῳξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς 1 Here, **opened** **eyes** figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused him to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 9 14 qxy9 figs-metonymy ἀνέῳξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς 1 Here, **opened** **eyes** describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused him to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 9 15 d6xd figs-explicit πάλιν οὖν ἠρώτων αὐτὸν καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 1 Then again the Pharisees asked him Here, **again** means that this is the second time people questioned the blind man whom Jesus had healed. It does not mean that this is the second time **the Pharisees** questioned him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then, in addition to his neighbors questioning him, the Pharisees also began asking him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 9 15 exy2 figs-abstractnouns ἀνέβλεψεν 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 11](../09/11.md). Alternate translation: “he could see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 9 15 g2vb figs-explicit ἐνιψάμην 1 See how you translated **washed** in [verse 11](../09/11.md). Alternate translation: “I washed my eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1292,7 +1292,7 @@ JHN 9 16 qn73 σημεῖα 1 signs See how you translated this term in [2:11]( JHN 9 16 jeyz figs-abstractnouns σχίσμα ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **division**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they divided themselves against each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 9 17 lxnf figs-pastforfuture λέγουσιν 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 9 17 glud figs-explicit ὅτι ἠνέῳξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς 1 Because the next verse indicates that the Pharisees did not believe that the man used to be blind, here, **since** does not mean that they thought the man had really been healed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “since you claim that he opened your eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 9 17 lcb3 figs-metonymy ἠνέῳξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς 1 Here, **he opened your eyes** figuratively describes the newly gained ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “he caused you to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 9 17 lcb3 figs-metonymy ἠνέῳξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς 1 Here, **he opened your eyes** describes the newly gained ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “he caused you to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 9 18 y3wn grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 **Therefore** here indicates that what follows is the result of what the man said about Jesus in the previous verse. Because the formerly blind man believed Jesus was a prophet, **the Jews** who opposed Jesus refused to believe that the man had really been blind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Since the man said that Jesus was a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 9 18 awp6 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders, which in this chapter may have been a group of leaders among the Pharisees. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 9 19 umip writing-quotations ἠρώτησαν αὐτοὺς λέγοντες 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “they asked him, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) @@ -1301,13 +1301,13 @@ JHN 9 20 pg6a figs-activepassive τυφλὸς ἐγεννήθη 1 If your lang JHN 9 21 ahky figs-explicit ἡλικίαν ἔχει 1 The phrase **full maturity** describes a person who is an adult and is legally responsible for himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “is an adult” or “is a full-grown man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 9 22 yq73 writing-background 0 General Information: In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about the man’s parents being afraid of the Jewish leaders. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 9 22 k2iw figs-synecdoche τοὺς Ἰουδαίους…οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 they were afraid of the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders, which in this chapter may have been a group of leaders among the Pharisees. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -JHN 9 22 yjv9 figs-metaphor ἀποσυνάγωγος γένηται 1 he would be thrown out of the synagogue Here John uses **put out of the synagogue** figuratively to refer to no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attend services at the synagogue. When people were **put out of the synagogue**, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he would not be allowed to enter the synagogue” or “he would no longer belong to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 9 22 yjv9 figs-metaphor ἀποσυνάγωγος γένηται 1 he would be thrown out of the synagogue Here John uses **put out of the synagogue** to refer to no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attend services at the synagogue. When people were **put out of the synagogue**, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he would not be allowed to enter the synagogue” or “he would no longer belong to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 9 23 go77 figs-explicit ἡλικίαν ἔχει 1 he would be thrown out of the synagogue See how you translated this phrase in [verse 21](../09/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 9 24 h1tl ἐφώνησαν…τὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 they called the man Here, **they** refers to the Jewish leaders introduced in ([verse 18](../09/18.md)) JHN 9 24 bkx6 figs-idiom δὸς δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Give glory to God This is an idiom that Jewish people used when commanding someone to take an oath. It first appears in [Joshua 7:19](../jos/07/19.md) when Joshua orders Achan to confess his sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Speak the truth before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 9 24 ww3t figs-explicit οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος 1 this man Here, John records the Jewish leaders saying **this man** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 9 25 sr93 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνος 1 that man Here, **that one** refers to the man who had been blind. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the man who had been blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JHN 9 26 z2l2 figs-metonymy πῶς ἤνοιξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς 1 Here, **open eyes** figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How did he cause you to see?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 9 26 z2l2 figs-metonymy πῶς ἤνοιξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς 1 Here, **open eyes** describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How did he cause you to see?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 9 27 cf2d figs-rquestion τί πάλιν θέλετε ἀκούειν? 1 Why do you want to hear it again? The man is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize his amazement that the Jewish leaders have asked him to tell them again what happened. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I am surprised that you want to listen again to what happened to me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 9 27 rpav figs-irony μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς θέλετε αὐτοῦ μαθηταὶ γενέσθαι? 1 Here the formerly blind man actually means to communicate the opposite of the literal meaning of his words. He knows that the Jewish leaders do not want to follow Jesus, but asks this question to ridicule them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “It sounds like you also want to become his disciples!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) JHN 9 28 h7hy figs-explicit ἐκείνου 1 Here John records the Jewish leaders saying **that one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “of that so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1328,7 +1328,7 @@ JHN 9 33 ry9j figs-explicit οὐδέν 1 Here, **anything** does not mean “a JHN 9 34 da3z figs-rquestion ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος, καὶ σὺ διδάσκεις ἡμᾶς? 1 You were completely born in sins, and you are teaching us? The Jewish leaders are using a question to emphasize their belief that this man was not qualified to question their opinion. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You were completely born in sins, and you are not qualified to teach us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 9 34 wo1z figs-activepassive ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος 1 You were completely born in sins If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Your mother bore you completely in sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 9 34 mcm3 figs-explicit ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήθης ὅλος 1 You were completely born in sins The Jewish leaders mention the formerly blind man being **born in sins** to imply that the **sins** of his parents had caused his blindness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You were born blind completely because of your parents’ sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 9 34 kl2x figs-metaphor ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω 1 they threw him out Here John uses **threw him out** figuratively to refer to him no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attend services at the synagogue. When people were thrown out of the synagogue, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he was forbidden to enter the synagogue” or “he was forbidden to belong to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 9 34 kl2x figs-metaphor ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω 1 they threw him out Here John uses **threw him out** to refer to him no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attend services at the synagogue. When people were thrown out of the synagogue, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he was forbidden to enter the synagogue” or “he was forbidden to belong to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 9 35 z6r9 0 General Information: Jesus finds the man whom he healed in ([verses 1–7](../09/01.md)) and begins to speak to him and the crowd. JHN 9 35 amfh figs-metaphor ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “they had forbidden him from entering the synagogue” or “they had forbidden him from belonging to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 9 35 mxkw figs-explicit εὑρὼν αὐτὸν 1 Here, **found** implies that **Jesus** had first searched for the man. It does not mean that Jesus unintentionally or accidentally met the man at another time. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having looked for him and found him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1342,9 +1342,9 @@ JHN 9 39 azp3 figs-abstractnouns εἰς κρίμα 1 If your language does not JHN 9 39 te5y figs-metaphor ἵνα οἱ μὴ βλέποντες, βλέπωσιν; καὶ οἱ βλέποντες, τυφλοὶ γένωνται 1 so that those who do not see may see and so that those who see may become blind Here, **not seeing**, **see**, **seeing**, and **become blind** are metaphors. See the discussion of these metaphors in the General Notes for this chapter. If these uses of these words would confuse your readers, you could use similes or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “so that those who know they are spiritually blind might receive spiritual sight, and those who falsely think they have spiritual sight might remain spiritually blind” or “so that those who recognize that they don’t know God might know him, and those who falsely think they know God might continue not knowing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 9 39 t9vo grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα οἱ μὴ βλέποντες, βλέπωσιν; καὶ οἱ βλέποντες, τυφλοὶ γένωνται 1 so that those who do not see may see and so that those who see may become blind Here, **so that** could indicate that: (1) the rest of the verse is the result of Jesus’ **judgment**, which may require starting a new sentence. Alternate translation: “The result of my judgment will be that those not seeing might see and those seeing might become blind” (2) the rest of the verse is an explanation of the **judgment** Jesus mentioned at the beginning of the verse, which may also require starting a new sentence. Alternate translation: “That judgment is that those not seeing might see and those seeing might become blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 9 40 d8mm figs-rquestion μὴ καὶ ἡμεῖς τυφλοί ἐσμεν 1 Are we also blind? Several **Pharisees** are using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that they do not think that they are spiritually blind. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We surely are not also blind!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 9 40 c8zs figs-metaphor μὴ καὶ ἡμεῖς τυφλοί ἐσμεν 1 Are we also blind? Here the Pharisees use **blind** figuratively to refer to not knowing God’s truth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “We are not also ignorant of God’s truth, are we?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 9 40 c8zs figs-metaphor μὴ καὶ ἡμεῖς τυφλοί ἐσμεν 1 Are we also blind? Here the Pharisees use **blind** to refer to not knowing God’s truth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “We are not also ignorant of God’s truth, are we?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 9 41 rh3l figs-metaphor εἰ τυφλοὶ ἦτε, οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε ἁμαρτίαν 1 If you were blind, you would have no sin See how you translated **blind** in [verses 39–40](../09/39.md). Alternate translation: “If you did not know God’s truth, you would have no sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 9 41 bj0s figs-metaphor οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε ἁμαρτίαν…ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει 1 If you were blind, you would have no sin In these two phrases, Jesus speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess or that could remain with a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you would not be sinful … You are still sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 9 41 bj0s figs-metaphor οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε ἁμαρτίαν…ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει 1 If you were blind, you would have no sin In these two phrases, Jesus speaks of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess or that could remain with a person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you would not be sinful … You are still sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 9 41 jmq7 figs-metaphor λέγετε, ὅτι βλέπομεν, ἡ ἁμαρτία ὑμῶν μένει 1 See how you translated **see** in [verse 39](../09/39.md). Alternate translation: “you say, ‘We know God’s truth.’ Your sin remains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 9 41 ch0y figs-quotesinquotes λέγετε, ὅτι βλέπομεν 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “you say that you see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 10 intro e8mb 0 # John 10 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus tells the Parable of the Sheep Pen (10:1–6)
2. Jesus says he is the gate of the sheep pen (10:7–10)
3. Jesus says he is the Good Shepherd (10:11–18)
4. The Jewish leaders disagree about who Jesus is (10:19–21)
5. Jesus says he is God at the Festival of Dedication (10:22–42)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Blasphemy

Blasphemy is when a person claims that he is God or claims that God has told him to speak when God has not told him to speak. The law of Moses commanded the Israelites to kill blasphemers by throwing stones at them until they died. When Jesus said, “I and the Father are one,” the Jews thought he was blaspheming, so they picked up stones to kill him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Parables

Parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people who wanted to believe in him could easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. People who did not want to believe in him would not be able to understand the message ([10:1–6](../10/01.md)).

### Sheep

Jesus spoke metaphorically of people as sheep because sheep do not see well, do not think well, often walk away from those who care for them, and cannot defend themselves when other animals attack them. God’s people are similar to sheep in that they also are weak and do foolish things like rebelling against God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/sheep]])

### Sheep pen

A sheep pen was a space with a stone wall around it in which shepherds would keep their sheep for periods of time, such as over night. There were large sheep pens in which multiple flocks were kept, and also smaller sheep pens for a single flock. Once they were inside the sheep pen, the sheep could not run away, and animals and thieves could not easily get inside to kill or steal them. In [10:1–5](../10/01.md), Jesus uses the sheep pen as a metaphor for the people of Israel. Out of the “sheep pen” of the Jewish people, Jesus calls his first “sheep.”

### Laying down and taking up life

Jesus speaks of his life as if it were a physical object that he could: (1) lay down on the ground, which is a metaphor for dying, or (2) pick up again, which is a metaphor for becoming alive again. @@ -1365,32 +1365,32 @@ JHN 10 6 u3nw figs-parables ταύτην τὴν παροιμίαν 1 this parab JHN 10 6 i3ot writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 this parable In this verse, **them**, **those ones**, and **they** refer to the Pharisees, whom Jesus was speaking with in [9:40–41](../09/40.md). If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 10 7 q3na 0 Connecting Statement: In [verses 7–18](../10/07.md), Jesus uses ideas from the parable he told in [verses 1–5](../10/01.md) in order to teach about himself, those who believe in him, and those who deceive the people. JHN 10 7 q4hs figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -JHN 10 7 nj4k figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ θύρα τῶν προβάτων 1 I am the gate Here Jesus uses the word **gate** differently than he did in [verse 1–2](../10/01.md). Here, Jesus uses **gate** figuratively to say that he provides access into heaven, where God dwells. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “I am like the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 7 nj4k figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ θύρα τῶν προβάτων 1 I am the gate Here Jesus uses the word **gate** differently than he did in [verse 1–2](../10/01.md). Here, Jesus uses **gate** to say that he provides access into heaven, where God dwells. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “I am like the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 7 wk8s figs-possession ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ θύρα τῶν προβάτων 1 Jesus is using **of** to describe himself as a **gate** that is for **the sheep** to use. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “I am the gate for the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -JHN 10 7 posn figs-metaphor τῶν προβάτων 1 I am the gate of the sheep Here, Jesus uses **sheep** figuratively to refer to people who believe in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “of those who follow me like sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 7 posn figs-metaphor τῶν προβάτων 1 I am the gate of the sheep Here, Jesus uses **sheep** to refer to people who believe in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “of those who follow me like sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 8 k4z6 figs-hyperbole πάντες ὅσοι ἦλθον πρὸ ἐμοῦ 1 Everyone who came before me **Everyone** here is an exaggeration that refers to the majority of Israel’s leaders, including the Pharisees and other Jewish leaders. Not every leader of Israel throughout history was wicked, but most were. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Most leaders who came before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -JHN 10 8 hqq3 figs-metaphor κλέπται…καὶ λῃσταί 1 a thief and a robber Here Jesus uses **thief** and **robber** figuratively to refer to the Jewish leaders who were deceiving the people. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “like a thief and a robber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 8 hqq3 figs-metaphor κλέπται…καὶ λῃσταί 1 a thief and a robber Here Jesus uses **thief** and **robber** to refer to the Jewish leaders who were deceiving the people. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “like a thief and a robber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 8 o7ou figs-explicit κλέπται…καὶ λῃσταί 1 a thief and a robber The words translated **thief** and **robber** describe two different kinds of criminals. See how you translated this expression in [verse 1](../10/01.md). Alternate translation: “a thief or a robber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 10 8 z4hb figs-metaphor τὰ πρόβατα 1 In this verse, Jesus uses **sheep** figuratively to refer specifically to the Jewish people who believed in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the sheep who follow me” or “the sheep, my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 8 z4hb figs-metaphor τὰ πρόβατα 1 In this verse, Jesus uses **sheep** to refer specifically to the Jewish people who believed in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the sheep who follow me” or “the sheep, my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 8 xa5u figs-metaphor οὐκ ἤκουσαν αὐτῶν 1 Here, **hear** means listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. It does not mean simply to **hear** what someone says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “did not heed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 10 9 yp3g figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ θύρα 1 I am the gate Here Jesus uses the word **gate** figuratively to say that he provides access into heaven, where God dwells. See how you translated this phrase in [verse 7](../10/07.md). Alternate translation: “I am like the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 10 9 gda6 figs-metaphor δι’ ἐμοῦ ἐάν τις εἰσέλθῃ 1 I am the gate Here Jesus uses **enters through me** figuratively to refer to trusting in him for salvation. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “If anyone believes in me for salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 9 yp3g figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ θύρα 1 I am the gate Here Jesus uses the word **gate** to say that he provides access into heaven, where God dwells. See how you translated this phrase in [verse 7](../10/07.md). Alternate translation: “I am like the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 9 gda6 figs-metaphor δι’ ἐμοῦ ἐάν τις εἰσέλθῃ 1 I am the gate Here Jesus uses **enters through me** to refer to trusting in him for salvation. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “If anyone believes in me for salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 9 xl78 figs-metaphor σωθήσεται 1 I am the gate Here, **saved** refers to being **saved** from the eternal punishment in hell that all people deserve because of their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will be saved from hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 9 nmvk figs-activepassive σωθήσεται 1 I am the gate If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will save him” or “I will save him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 10 9 n70e figs-idiom εἰσελεύσεται, καὶ ἐξελεύσεται 1 I am the gate The phrase **go in and go out** is a common Old Testament idiom meaning to travel and move around freely in a safe environment. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he will move about freely” or “he will go around in a safe environment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JHN 10 9 in9p figs-metaphor νομὴν εὑρήσει 1 pasture Jesus uses the phrase ** find pasture** figuratively to refer to having one’s needs provided for. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will find sustenance” or “will receive everything that he needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 9 in9p figs-metaphor νομὴν εὑρήσει 1 pasture Jesus uses the phrase ** find pasture** to refer to having one’s needs provided for. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will find sustenance” or “will receive everything that he needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 10 ymc7 figs-genericnoun ὁ κλέπτης 1 does not come if he would not steal Jesus is speaking of thieves in general, not of one particular **thief**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “A thief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -JHN 10 10 nicf figs-metaphor ὁ κλέπτης 1 Jesus uses **thief** figuratively to refer to the Jewish leaders who were deceiving the people. See how you translated the similar use of this word in [verse 8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “Every leader is like a thief who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 10 nicf figs-metaphor ὁ κλέπτης 1 Jesus uses **thief** to refer to the Jewish leaders who were deceiving the people. See how you translated the similar use of this word in [verse 8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “Every leader is like a thief who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 10 h2gf figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔρχεται εἰ μὴ ἵνα κλέψῃ 1 does not come if he would not steal If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “comes only in order that he might steal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) JHN 10 10 h56c figs-ellipsis κλέψῃ, καὶ θύσῃ, καὶ ἀπολέσῃ 1 steal and kill and destroy Here, Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he might steal and kill and destroy the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 10 10 zho7 writing-pronouns ἔχωσιν 1 Here, **they** refers to the sheep, which is a metaphor for God’s people. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sheep might have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 10 10 j2k6 figs-explicit ἵνα ζωὴν ἔχωσιν 1 so that they will have life Here, **life** refers to eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that they might have eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 10 10 fnu5 figs-explicit καὶ περισσὸν ἔχωσιν 1 Here, **abundantly** implies that the eternal **life** Jesus’ followers will receive has more blessings than anyone could expect. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and might have it with abundant blessings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 10 11 x196 0 Connecting Statement: In [verses 11–18](../10/11.md), Jesus uses ideas from the parable he told in [verses 1–5](../10/01.md) to proclaim that he is the good shepherd who leads his sheep to heaven and takes care of them. -JHN 10 11 xs4m figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός 1 I am the good shepherd Jesus uses the phrase **good shepherd** figuratively to refer to himself. Just as a **good shepherd** takes care of his **sheep**, Jesus takes care of his followers. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “I am like a good shepherd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 11 xs4m figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός 1 I am the good shepherd Jesus uses the phrase **good shepherd** to refer to himself. Just as a **good shepherd** takes care of his **sheep**, Jesus takes care of his followers. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “I am like a good shepherd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 11 llr4 figs-euphemism τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ τίθησιν 1 lays down his life Here Jesus uses **lays down his life** to refer to voluntarily dying. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “voluntarily dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) JHN 10 11 p4tv figs-metaphor τῶν προβάτων 1 lays down his life See how you translated **sheep** in the [verse 8](../10/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 10 12 ym8w figs-metaphor ὁ μισθωτὸς 1 The hired servant Jesus uses the phrase **hired servant** figuratively to refer to the Jewish leaders and teachers. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “each of your leaders is like a hired servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 12 ym8w figs-metaphor ὁ μισθωτὸς 1 The hired servant Jesus uses the phrase **hired servant** to refer to the Jewish leaders and teachers. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “each of your leaders is like a hired servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 12 n6ci figs-activepassive ὁ μισθωτὸς 1 The hired servant If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the man whom someone hired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 10 12 bbwn translate-unknown τὸν λύκον…ὁ λύκος 1 The hired servant A **wolf** is a fierce wild dog that is known for attacking and devouring livestock. If your readers would not be familiar with this animal, you could use the name of a fierce predator or wild dog in your area that commonly eats farmers’ livestock, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the fierce predator … that predator” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JHN 10 12 ue4m figs-metaphor τὰ πρόβατα…τὰ πρόβατα 1 abandons the sheep See how you translated **sheep** in the [verse 8](../10/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1401,18 +1401,18 @@ JHN 10 14 fg93 figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός JHN 10 15 qr9g guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ…τὸν Πατέρα 1 The Father knows me, and I know the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 10 15 pn9w figs-euphemism τὴν ψυχήν μου τίθημι 1 I lay down my life for the sheep See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “I voluntarily die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) JHN 10 15 mwpf figs-metaphor τῶν προβάτων 1 I lay down my life for the sheep See how you translated this phrase in the [verse 8](../10/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 10 16 y3g7 figs-metaphor ἄλλα πρόβατα ἔχω, ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης 1 I have other sheep Jesus uses **other sheep** figuratively to refer to his followers who are not Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “I have disciples who are not from the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 10 16 la1v figs-metaphor τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης 1 I have other sheep Jesus uses **sheep pen** figuratively to refer to the people of Israel. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 16 y3g7 figs-metaphor ἄλλα πρόβατα ἔχω, ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης 1 I have other sheep Jesus uses **other sheep** to refer to his followers who are not Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “I have disciples who are not from the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 16 la1v figs-metaphor τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης 1 I have other sheep Jesus uses **sheep pen** to refer to the people of Israel. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 16 v95z figs-ellipsis κἀκεῖνα…ἀγαγεῖν 1 I have other sheep Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. This could mean: (1) Jesus will bring them to himself, as in the UST. (2) Jesus will bring them to God. Alternate translation: “to bring them also to God”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 10 16 kq11 figs-metaphor τῆς φωνῆς μου ἀκούσουσιν 1 I have other sheep Here, **hear** refers to listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated this word in [verse 8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “they will heed my voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 10 16 w86n figs-metaphor μία ποίμνη 1 one flock and one shepherd Jesus uses **flock** figuratively to refer to all of his followers, including Jews and non-Jews, as if they are one group, like a **flock** of **sheep**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 10 16 bobi figs-metaphor εἷς ποιμήν 1 one flock and one shepherd Jesus uses **shepherd** figuratively to refer to himself. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for the chapter. See also how you translated **shepherd** in [verse 11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “one united group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 16 w86n figs-metaphor μία ποίμνη 1 one flock and one shepherd Jesus uses **flock** to refer to all of his followers, including Jews and non-Jews, as if they are one group, like a **flock** of **sheep**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 16 bobi figs-metaphor εἷς ποιμήν 1 one flock and one shepherd Jesus uses **shepherd** to refer to himself. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for the chapter. See also how you translated **shepherd** in [verse 11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “one united group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 17 kd16 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus finishes speaking to the crowd. JHN 10 17 i59j figs-infostructure διὰ τοῦτό, με ὁ Πατὴρ ἀγαπᾷ, ὅτι ἐγὼ τίθημι τὴν ψυχήν μου, ἵνα πάλιν λάβω αὐτήν 1 Here, **this** refers to all the information in the second clause. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Because I lay down my life so that I might take it up again, the Father loves me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) JHN 10 17 kpr5 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 10 17 wc4l figs-euphemism ἐγὼ τίθημι τὴν ψυχήν μου 1 I lay down my life so that I may take it again See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “I voluntarily die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -JHN 10 17 s9ck figs-metaphor ἵνα πάλιν λάβω αὐτήν 1 so that I may take it again Jesus figuratively refers to becoming alive again as if life were an object that he could **take up**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “so that I might cause myself to be alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 10 18 z4xh figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς ἦρεν αὐτὴν ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 Here Jesus refers to his life figuratively as if it were an object that someone could take away. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “No one is causing me to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 17 s9ck figs-metaphor ἵνα πάλιν λάβω αὐτήν 1 so that I may take it again Jesus refers to becoming alive again as if life were an object that he could **take up**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “so that I might cause myself to be alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 18 z4xh figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς ἦρεν αὐτὴν ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 Here Jesus refers to his life as if it were an object that someone could take away. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “No one is causing me to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 18 rnj4 figs-euphemism ἐγὼ τίθημι αὐτὴν…θεῖναι αὐτήν 1 I lay it down of myself See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I voluntarily die … to voluntarily die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) JHN 10 18 j945 figs-rpronouns ἐγὼ τίθημι αὐτὴν ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ 1 I lay it down of myself The reflexive pronoun **myself** is used here to emphasize that Jesus voluntarily lays down his own life. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I myself lay it down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) JHN 10 18 lo79 figs-metaphor πάλιν λαβεῖν αὐτήν 1 See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “to cause myself to be alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1424,7 +1424,7 @@ JHN 10 20 uoce δαιμόνιον ἔχει 1 See how you translated a similar JHN 10 20 gm3r figs-rquestion τί αὐτοῦ ἀκούετε? 1 Why do you listen to him? Jesus’ opponents are using the form of a question to emphasize that the people should not listen to Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should certainly not listen to him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 10 21 zrwb figs-metonymy ταῦτα τὰ ῥήματα οὐκ ἔστιν δαιμονιζομένου 1 Here, **words** refers to what a **demon-possessed man** would say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “These things are not what a demon-possessed man would say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 10 21 mj2b figs-rquestion μὴ δαιμόνιον δύναται τυφλῶν ὀφθαλμοὺς ἀνοῖξαι? 1 Can a demon open the eyes of the blind? The people are using the form of a question to emphasize that they do not believe that a **demon** could heal a **blind** person. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly a demon cannot cause a blind man to see!” or “Certainly a demon cannot give sight to blind people!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 10 21 dcau figs-metonymy τυφλῶν ὀφθαλμοὺς ἀνοῖξαι 1 Can a demon open the eyes of the blind? Here, **open the eyes** figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, **the eyes**. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to cause the blind to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 10 21 dcau figs-metonymy τυφλῶν ὀφθαλμοὺς ἀνοῖξαι 1 Can a demon open the eyes of the blind? Here, **open the eyes** describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, **the eyes**. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to cause the blind to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 10 22 f9cm writing-background 0 General Information: Some Jews begin to question Jesus during **the Festival of Dedication**. This verse gives background information about the time when the events of [verses 24–39](../10/24.md) took place. The next verse gives background information about the place where those events too place. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 10 22 w25f translate-unknown τὰ ἐνκαίνια 1 Festival of Dedication The **Festival of Dedication** is an eight-day holiday that Jews celebrate in the **winter** to remember when they dedicated the Jewish temple to God after it had been defiled by the Syrians. If your readers would not be familiar with this holiday, you could use a general expression to explain it. Alternate translation: “the Jewish temple dedication festival” or “the Jewish festival for remembering the dedication of their temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JHN 10 23 v6wn figs-synecdoche περιεπάτει ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 Jesus was walking in the temple **Jesus was walking** in the courtyard of **the temple**. See how you translated** temple** in [8:14](../08/14.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus was walking in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -1436,14 +1436,14 @@ JHN 10 24 nk9t figs-idiom τὴν ψυχὴν ἡμῶν αἴρεις 1 hold us JHN 10 25 cb95 figs-explicit τὰ ἔργα 1 Here, **works** could refer to: (1) the miracles that Jesus did. Alternate translation: “The miracles” (2) Jesus’ miracles and teaching. Alternate translation: “The miracles and teaching” See how you translated **works** in [5:36](../05/36.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 10 25 e7zh figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 in the name of my Father Here, **name** could mean: (1) Jesus performed miracles by means of God’s authority. Alternate translation: “through my Father’s authority” (2) Jesus performed miracles as God’s representative. Alternate translation: “as my Father’s representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 10 25 bqz1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 10 25 n34x figs-personification ταῦτα μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 these testify concerning me Jesus speaks figuratively of his **works** as though they were a person who could testify and offer proof in a court of law. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “these offer proof concerning me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -JHN 10 26 als6 figs-metaphor οὐκ…ἐκ τῶν προβάτων τῶν ἐμῶν 1 not my sheep Jesus uses **sheep** figuratively to refer to people who believe in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not my followers” or “not my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 10 25 n34x figs-personification ταῦτα μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 these testify concerning me Jesus speaks of his **works** as though they were a person who could testify and offer proof in a court of law. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “these offer proof concerning me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JHN 10 26 als6 figs-metaphor οὐκ…ἐκ τῶν προβάτων τῶν ἐμῶν 1 not my sheep Jesus uses **sheep** to refer to people who believe in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not my followers” or “not my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 27 rdw7 figs-metaphor τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἐμὰ 1 My sheep hear my voice See how you translated **My sheep** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “My followers” or “My disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 27 xakd figs-metaphor τῆς φωνῆς μου ἀκούουσιν 1 Here, **hear** means listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated this word in [verse 16](../10/16.md). Alternate translation: “heed my voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 27 f7y8 figs-idiom ἀκολουθοῦσίν μοι 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in [8:12](../08/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JHN 10 28 bpx3 figs-metonymy οὐχ ἁρπάσει τις αὐτὰ ἐκ τῆς χειρός μου 1 no one will snatch them out of my hand Here, Jesus uses the word **hand** figuratively to refer to his protective care and **snatch** to refer to removing someone from that care. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no one will steal any of them away from me” or “they all will remain secure forever in my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 10 28 bpx3 figs-metonymy οὐχ ἁρπάσει τις αὐτὰ ἐκ τῆς χειρός μου 1 no one will snatch them out of my hand Here, Jesus uses the word **hand** to refer to his protective care and **snatch** to refer to removing someone from that care. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no one will steal any of them away from me” or “they all will remain secure forever in my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 10 29 g82a guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου ὃς δέδωκέν μοι 1 My Father, who has given them to me **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 10 29 k1ya figs-metonymy οὐδεὶς δύναται ἁρπάζειν ἐκ τῆς χειρὸς τοῦ Πατρός 1 the hand of the Father Here, Jesus uses the word **hand** figuratively to refer to God’s protective care and **snatch** to refer to removing someone from that care. See how you translated **hand** and **snatch** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “no one will steal any of them away from my Father” or “they all will remain secure forever in my Father’s care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 10 29 k1ya figs-metonymy οὐδεὶς δύναται ἁρπάζειν ἐκ τῆς χειρὸς τοῦ Πατρός 1 the hand of the Father Here, Jesus uses the word **hand** to refer to God’s protective care and **snatch** to refer to removing someone from that care. See how you translated **hand** and **snatch** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “no one will steal any of them away from my Father” or “they all will remain secure forever in my Father’s care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 10 30 xok8 figs-explicit ἕν ἐσμεν 1 I and the Father are one Here, the word translated **one** means to be one entity. Although this expression implies that Jesus is God, he is not identical to God **the Father**. Therefore, **one** cannot be translated as “one person.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “are one entity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 10 30 rs4j guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 I and the Father are one **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 10 31 fl8i figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Then the Jews took up stones Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -1464,8 +1464,8 @@ JHN 10 34 b3gp figs-123person ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε 1 You are g JHN 10 34 h189 figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε 1 You are gods If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I said that you are gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 10 35 nfly 0 Verses 35 and 36 are one sentence. In this sentence, Jesus argues by moving from a weaker reason to a stronger reason (an argument from the lesser to the greater). Based on the scripture he quoted in verse 34, Jesus argues that, since God calls humans **gods** in that verse, it is even more appropriate to call him God because he is the Son of God. You may need to change the order of the clauses in order for this idea to be clearer in your language. JHN 10 35 ieot grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐκείνους εἶπεν θεοὺς 1 the word of God came **If** indicates a conditional sentence that extends until the end of the next verse. Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since he called them gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -JHN 10 35 gtb4 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐγένετο 1 the word of God came Here, Jesus used the term **word** figuratively to describe the message that God said by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s message came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 10 35 m8ji figs-personification ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐγένετο 1 the word of God came Jesus speaks of **the word of God** figuratively as though it were a person who moved toward those who heard it. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “God spoke his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JHN 10 35 gtb4 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐγένετο 1 the word of God came Here, Jesus used the term **word** to describe the message that God said by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s message came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 10 35 m8ji figs-personification ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐγένετο 1 the word of God came Jesus speaks of **the word of God** as though it were a person who moved toward those who heard it. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “God spoke his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JHN 10 35 g0kv figs-activepassive οὐ δύναται λυθῆναι ἡ Γραφή 1 the scripture cannot be broken If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one can break the Scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 10 35 u9j2 figs-metaphor οὐ δύναται λυθῆναι ἡ Γραφή 1 the scripture cannot be broken This phrase could mean: (1) no one can prove that the Scriptures are false or contain errors. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures are not able to be proven false” (2) the authority of Scripture cannot be ignored. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures are not able to be ignored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 36 dvp5 figs-rquestion ὃν ὁ Πατὴρ ἡγίασεν καὶ ἀπέστειλεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον, ὑμεῖς λέγετε, ὅτι βλασφημεῖς, ὅτι εἶπον, Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰμι? 1 do you say to him whom the Father set apart and sent into the world, ‘You are blaspheming,’ because I said, ‘I am the Son of God’? Here Jesus uses the form of a question to rebuke his opponents for accusing him of blasphemy. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not say to the one the Father sanctified and sent into the world, ‘You are blaspheming,’ because I said, ‘I am the Son of God!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1480,7 +1480,7 @@ JHN 10 38 finz grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ ποιῶ 1 believe in JHN 10 38 k2zf figs-explicit τοῖς ἔργοις πιστεύετε 1 believe in the works Here, **believe in** means to acknowledge that the **works** Jesus does are done with the authority of the Father and prove that he is God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “believe that the works I do are from God” or “believe that the works I do are done with God’s power”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 10 38 t8uf figs-idiom ἐν ἐμοὶ ὁ Πατὴρ, κἀγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί 1 the Father is in me and that I am in the Father Here Jesus uses the word **in** to express the close personal relationship between himself and God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my Father has a close relationship with me, and I have a close relationship with my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 10 38 n8ue figs-doublet ἐν ἐμοὶ ὁ Πατὴρ, κἀγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί 1 the Father is in me and that I am in the Father These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the truth of what Jesus is saying. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “my Father and I are completely joined together as one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -JHN 10 39 eqh1 figs-metonymy ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῶν 1 went away out of their hand Here, John used the word **hand** figuratively to refer to the custody or possession of the Jewish leaders. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he escaped from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 10 39 eqh1 figs-metonymy ἐξῆλθεν ἐκ τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῶν 1 went away out of their hand Here, John used the word **hand** to refer to the custody or possession of the Jewish leaders. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he escaped from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 10 40 b41s figs-explicit πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 beyond the Jordan Here,** beyond the Jordan** refers to the region of Judea that is on the east side of the **Jordan** River, which is the side opposite from Jerusalem. See how you translated this expression in [1:28](../01/28.md). Alternate translation: “on the side of the Jordan River opposite from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 10 40 t8mj figs-explicit Ἰωάννης 1 Here, **John** refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist]]) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. See how you translated **John** in [1:26](../01/26.md). Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 10 40 wztl figs-explicit ἦν Ἰωάννης τὸ πρῶτον βαπτίζων 1 Here, **first** refers to the beginning of John’s ministry. It does not mean that **John** was the **first** person to baptize people in that location. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “John was baptizing during the first days of his ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1513,8 +1513,8 @@ JHN 11 7 zq1l figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense JHN 11 8 p4x9 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md) and the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 11 8 y4jm figs-rquestion πάλιν ὑπάγεις ἐκεῖ? 1 Rabbi, right now the Jews are trying to stone you, and you are going back there again? Here the disciples use the form of a question to emphasize that they do not want Jesus to go to Jerusalem. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you surely should not go back there again!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 11 9 uv34 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ δώδεκα ὧραί εἰσιν τῆς ἡμέρας? 1 Are there not twelve hours of light in a day? Jesus is using the form of a question for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There are surely 12 hours in the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 11 9 ln4r figs-metaphor ἐάν τις περιπατῇ ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, οὐ προσκόπτει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου τούτου βλέπει 1 If someone walks in the daytime, he will not stumble, because he sees by the light of this world Here Jesus speaks figuratively about **someone** walking **in the daytime** in order to comfort his disciples who were worried about going to Judea. In this metaphor Jesus uses **the light of this world** figuratively to refer to himself, who has previously called himself “the Light of the World” in [8:12](../09/12.md) and [9:5](../09/05.md).This whole metaphor could mean: (1) if Jesus and his disciples did God’s work during the limited time God had given him to work with them (**the daytime**), they would not fail (**stumble**) because Jesus was with them. This interpretation has a similar meaning to Jesus’ statement in [9:4](../09/04.md). Alternate translation: “If you do God’s work during the time I am here, you will succeed, because you are with me, the light of this world.” (2) someone who acts according to God’s will (**walks in the daytime**) does not fail (**stumble**) because Jesus guides that person. Alternate translation: “If someone acts according to God’s will, he will succeed, because I, the light of this world, will guide him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 11 10 vm6h figs-exmetaphor ἐὰν δέ τις περιπατῇ ἐν τῇ νυκτί, προσκόπτει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 if he walks at night In this verse Jesus expands the metaphor from the previous verse about a person walking outside. In this metaphor Jesus uses **the light** figuratively to refer to himself, who has previously called himself “the Light of the World” in [8:12](../09/12.md) and [9:5](../09/05.md). This whole metaphor could mean: (1) if his disciples tried to do God’s work after the limited time God had given him to be with them (the **night** which comes after “the daytime”), they would fail (**stumble**) because Jesus would not be with them. This interpretation has a similar meaning to Jesus’ statement in [9:4](../09/04.md). Alternate translation: “If you try to do this work after I have left, you will fail because I, the light, am not with you.” (2) someone who does not act according to God’s will (**walks at night**) is an unbeliever who fails completely (**stumble**) because that person does not know Jesus. Alternate translation: “If someone does not act according to God’s will, he will fail because he does not know me, the light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +JHN 11 9 ln4r figs-metaphor ἐάν τις περιπατῇ ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, οὐ προσκόπτει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου τούτου βλέπει 1 If someone walks in the daytime, he will not stumble, because he sees by the light of this world Here Jesus speaks about **someone** walking **in the daytime** in order to comfort his disciples who were worried about going to Judea. In this metaphor Jesus uses **the light of this world** to refer to himself, who has previously called himself “the Light of the World” in [8:12](../09/12.md) and [9:5](../09/05.md).This whole metaphor could mean: (1) if Jesus and his disciples did God’s work during the limited time God had given him to work with them (**the daytime**), they would not fail (**stumble**) because Jesus was with them. This interpretation has a similar meaning to Jesus’ statement in [9:4](../09/04.md). Alternate translation: “If you do God’s work during the time I am here, you will succeed, because you are with me, the light of this world.” (2) someone who acts according to God’s will (**walks in the daytime**) does not fail (**stumble**) because Jesus guides that person. Alternate translation: “If someone acts according to God’s will, he will succeed, because I, the light of this world, will guide him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 11 10 vm6h figs-exmetaphor ἐὰν δέ τις περιπατῇ ἐν τῇ νυκτί, προσκόπτει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 if he walks at night In this verse Jesus expands the metaphor from the previous verse about a person walking outside. In this metaphor Jesus uses **the light** to refer to himself, who has previously called himself “the Light of the World” in [8:12](../09/12.md) and [9:5](../09/05.md). This whole metaphor could mean: (1) if his disciples tried to do God’s work after the limited time God had given him to be with them (the **night** which comes after “the daytime”), they would fail (**stumble**) because Jesus would not be with them. This interpretation has a similar meaning to Jesus’ statement in [9:4](../09/04.md). Alternate translation: “If you try to do this work after I have left, you will fail because I, the light, am not with you.” (2) someone who does not act according to God’s will (**walks at night**) is an unbeliever who fails completely (**stumble**) because that person does not know Jesus. Alternate translation: “If someone does not act according to God’s will, he will fail because he does not know me, the light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) JHN 11 11 fan2 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 11 11 bev5 figs-euphemism Λάζαρος ὁ φίλος ἡμῶν κεκοίμηται 1 Our friend Lazarus has fallen asleep Jesus uses **fallen asleep** to refer to being dead. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. Since Jesus explains the meaning in [verse 14](../11/14.md), you do not need to explain it here. However, If you have an idiom for this idea in your language, you may use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) JHN 11 11 ze1z figs-idiom ἀλλὰ πορεύομαι ἵνα ἐξυπνίσω αὐτόν 1 but I am going so that I may wake him out of sleep Here, **wake him out of sleep** refers to Jesus’ plan to cause Lazarus to become alive again. If you have an idiom for this idea in your language, you may use it here. Since the disciples do not understand what Jesus is saying here, do not translate this in a non-figurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1596,7 +1596,7 @@ JHN 11 47 z5e9 figs-explicit τί ποιοῦμεν 1 What will we do? It is imp JHN 11 47 q01y figs-explicit οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος 1 Here, the Jewish leaders say **this man** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 11 47 ha2e σημεῖα 1 See how you translated **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of signs in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles” JHN 11 48 kq4z figs-explicit πάντες πιστεύσουσιν εἰς αὐτὸν 1 all will believe in him The Jewish leaders were afraid that the people would try to make Jesus their king and rebel against the Roman government. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone will believe in him, make him king, and revolt against the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 11 48 hr3p figs-synecdoche ἐλεύσονται οἱ Ῥωμαῖοι 1 the Romans will come The Jewish leaders use **the Romans** figuratively to refer to the Roman army. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Roman soldiers will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +JHN 11 48 hr3p figs-synecdoche ἐλεύσονται οἱ Ῥωμαῖοι 1 the Romans will come The Jewish leaders use **the Romans** to refer to the Roman army. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Roman soldiers will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 11 48 ah4r figs-explicit καὶ ἀροῦσιν ἡμῶν καὶ τὸν τόπον 1 take away both our place and our nation Here, **place** could mean: (1) the Jewish temple, as in the UST. (2) the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “and will take away both our city, Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 11 48 zy0k figs-explicit τὸ ἔθνος 1 Here, **nation** refers to all of the Jewish people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jewish nation” or “the people of our nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 11 49 efq8 writing-participants εἷς…τις ἐξ αὐτῶν, Καϊάφας 1 a certain man among them This phrase introduces **Caiaphas** as a new character in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “there was a man among them named Caiaphas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -1608,13 +1608,13 @@ JHN 11 51 kw41 figs-explicit ἀφ’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 Here, **from himself** c JHN 11 51 mw4e grammar-connect-logic-result ἀλλὰ ἀρχιερεὺς ὢν τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ἐκείνου 1 This clause indicates the reason why Caiaphas **prophesied** a true prophecy from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he was high priest that year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 11 51 eh17 figs-synecdoche ἀποθνῄσκειν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἔθνους 1 die for the nation See how you translated **nation** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 11 52 gee2 figs-synecdoche τοῦ ἔθνους 1 See how you translated **nation** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -JHN 11 52 mle1 figs-metaphor τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 children of God Here John uses the word **children** figuratively to express the relationship between God and those who trust Jesus for salvation. That relationship is like the relationship between **children** and their father. See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to chapter 1. Since this is an important metaphor in the Bible, you should keep it in your translation. However, you can use a simile if it might confuse your readers. Alternate translation: “those who are like God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 11 52 mle1 figs-metaphor τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 children of God Here John uses the word **children** to express the relationship between God and those who trust Jesus for salvation. That relationship is like the relationship between **children** and their father. See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to chapter 1. Since this is an important metaphor in the Bible, you should keep it in your translation. However, you can use a simile if it might confuse your readers. Alternate translation: “those who are like God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 11 52 tpe1 figs-activepassive ἵνα καὶ τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ, τὰ διεσκορπισμένα συναγάγῃ εἰς ἕν 1 If your language does not use the passive voice, you could express the ideas of these two passive phrases in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. You may need to change the sentence structure in order to do this. Alternate translation: “so that also Jesus would gather together into one the children of God whom God had scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 11 52 d85p figs-ellipsis συναγάγῃ εἰς ἕν 1 would be gathered together into one Here, John is leaving out a word that some languages would need in order for the sentence to be complete. The word **people** is implied by the context. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “would be gathered into one people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 11 53 xyda grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 would be gathered together into one John is telling his readers what the Jewish leaders did as a result of what Caiaphas said in [verses 49–50](../11/49.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Consequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 11 53 psay ἐβουλεύσαντο 1 The word translated **plotted** could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders made plans together for how to kill Jesus. Alternate translation: “they schemed” (2) the Jewish leaders were determined to kill Jesus. Alternate translation: “they resolved” JHN 11 54 bnd8 figs-synecdoche παρρησίᾳ περιεπάτει ἐν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 walk openly among the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not refer to the Jewish people in general. It could refer to: (1) the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “among the Jewish authorities” (2) the people living in Judea. Alternate translation: “among the Judeans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -JHN 11 54 s9km figs-metaphor παρρησίᾳ περιεπάτει ἐν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 Here John uses **walked openly** figuratively to mean “walked around where everyone could see him.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “walked around where all the Jews could see him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 11 54 s9km figs-metaphor παρρησίᾳ περιεπάτει ἐν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 Here John uses **walked openly** to mean “walked around where everyone could see him.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “walked around where all the Jews could see him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 11 54 cg66 τὴν χώραν 1 the country Here, **country** could refer to: (1) an area of land. Alternate translation: “the area” or “the district” (2) the rural area outside cities where fewer people live. Alternate translation: “the countryside” or “the rural area” JHN 11 54 h5jk figs-explicit κἀκεῖ ἔμεινεν μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν 1 There he stayed with the disciples Jesus and his disciples **stayed** in Ephraim for a short period of time. If your language requires a length of time for **stayed**, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “There he stayed with the disciples for a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 11 55 qd5y ἀνέβησαν…εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα 1 went up to Jerusalem The phrase **went up** is used here because Jerusalem is at a higher elevation than the surrounding areas. See how you translated **went up** in [7:10](../07/10.md). @@ -1666,7 +1666,7 @@ JHN 12 10 nt9p ἐβουλεύσαντο 1 See how you translated **plotted** JHN 12 10 b9ri figs-explicit καὶ τὸν Λάζαρον ἀποκτείνωσιν 1 Here, **also** implies that **the chief priests** want to kill **Lazarus** in addition to Jesus, whom they have already plotted to kill in [11:53](../11/53.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they might put Lazarus to death in addition to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 11 kjk7 figs-explicit δι’ αὐτὸν 1 because of him This phrase implies that the fact that Lazarus was alive after he had been dead caused many **Jews** to believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because Lazarus was alive after having died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 11 n6gl τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 because of him See how you translated this phrase in [verse 9](../12/09.md). -JHN 12 11 ex1y figs-explicit ὑπῆγον 1 because of him Here, John uses **went away** figuratively to refer to the fact that **many of the Jews** stopped believing the teachings of the Jewish religious authorities and starting trusting Jesus instead. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “stopped listening to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 12 11 ex1y figs-explicit ὑπῆγον 1 because of him Here, John uses **went away** to refer to the fact that **many of the Jews** stopped believing the teachings of the Jewish religious authorities and starting trusting Jesus instead. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “stopped listening to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 12 f1im 0 General Information: Jesus enters Jerusalem and the people honor him as a king of Israel. JHN 12 12 w1c2 writing-newevent τῇ ἐπαύριον 1 On the next day John uses this phrase to mark the beginning of a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “On the day after that happened,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 12 12 sy8h grammar-collectivenouns ὁ ὄχλος πολὺς 1 a great crowd See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) @@ -1675,13 +1675,13 @@ JHN 12 13 nu7x figs-explicit τὰ βαΐα τῶν φοινίκων 1 In that JHN 12 13 cw5w writing-quotations ἐκραύγαζον 1 This phrase introduces a quotation from the Old Testament book of Psalms ([Psalm 118:25–26](../psa/118/25.md)) which occurs next in the verse. The Jews recite Psalm 118 at the Passover festival to express their hope that the Messiah would come. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 12 13 hf0a figs-quotemarks ὡσαννά! εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου, καὶ ὁ Βασιλεὺς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 118:25–26](../psa/118/25.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) JHN 12 13 lzn9 figs-explicit ὡσαννά 1 Hosanna **Hosanna** is the Greek pronunciation of an expression in the Hebrew language that means “Please save!” It is a quotation from part of [Psalm 118:25](../psa/118/25.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Save us now!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 12 13 w7ty figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 comes in the name of the Lord Here, **name** refers figuratively to a person’s power and authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Lord’s authority” or “as God’s representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 12 13 w7ty figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 comes in the name of the Lord Here, **name** refers to a person’s power and authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Lord’s authority” or “as God’s representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 12 14 dbc5 writing-background 0 In [verses 14–16](../12/14.md) John interrupts the story to give background information about how Jesus fulfilled an Old Testament prophecy about the Messiah riding on a **donkey**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 12 14 b9ry figs-explicit εὑρὼν…ὁ Ἰησοῦς ὀνάριον, ἐκάθισεν ἐπ’ αὐτό 1 John implies that Jesus will ride the **donkey** into Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, having found a young donkey, sat on it, riding it into the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 14 lqyy writing-quotations καθώς ἐστιν γεγραμμένον 1 as it was written This phrase introduces a combination of parts of various quotations from the Old Testament which occur in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “just as the prophets wrote in the Old Testament” or “as it had been written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 12 14 h6xz figs-activepassive καθώς ἐστιν γεγραμμένον 1 as it was written If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as prophets wrote in the Scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 12 15 ts1f figs-quotemarks 0 This verse is a combination of parts of various quotations from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -JHN 12 15 vra1 figs-metonymy θυγάτηρ Σιών 1 daughter of Zion Here, **daughter of Zion** is used figuratively to refer to the people who lived in Jerusalem. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you people of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 12 15 vra1 figs-metonymy θυγάτηρ Σιών 1 daughter of Zion Here, **daughter of Zion** is used to refer to the people who lived in Jerusalem. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you people of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 12 15 c36a πῶλον ὄνου 1 A **colt** is a young male **donkey**. JHN 12 16 rq52 figs-explicit ταῦτα…ταῦτα…ταῦτα 1 His disciples did not understand these things In this verse, **these things** refers to the words of the Old Testament prophecies that were quoted in the previous verse, which were fulfilled in the events described in [verses 13–14](../12/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “His disciples did not understand the meaning of these words from the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 16 xdm7 figs-activepassive ὅτε ἐδοξάσθη Ἰησοῦς 1 when Jesus was glorified If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “when God glorified Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1718,7 +1718,7 @@ JHN 12 23 pfmt figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus JHN 12 23 ekcc figs-explicit ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated **the Son of Man** in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 23 j0dp figs-activepassive ἵνα δοξασθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Jesus implies that God will do it. Alternate translation: “so that God might glorify the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 12 24 m255 figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly, I say to you Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -JHN 12 24 gq2y figs-metaphor ἐὰν μὴ ὁ κόκκος τοῦ σίτου πεσὼν εἰς τὴν γῆν ἀποθάνῃ, αὐτὸς μόνος μένει; ἐὰν δὲ ἀποθάνῃ, πολὺν καρπὸν φέρει 1 unless a grain of wheat falls into the earth and dies … it will bear much fruit Here Jesus uses **a grain of wheat** figuratively to refer to himself. He speaks of the death of that **grain** to refer to his death, burial, and resurrection. He also uses **fruit** to refer to those people who will trust in him for salvation after his resurrection. Just as a seed is planted and grows into a plant that will bear **much fruit**, so will many people trust in Jesus after he is killed, buried, and raised back to life. If this would confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am like a grain of wheat. Unless that grain of wheat, having fallen into the earth, dies, it remains by itself; but if it would die, it bears much fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 24 gq2y figs-metaphor ἐὰν μὴ ὁ κόκκος τοῦ σίτου πεσὼν εἰς τὴν γῆν ἀποθάνῃ, αὐτὸς μόνος μένει; ἐὰν δὲ ἀποθάνῃ, πολὺν καρπὸν φέρει 1 unless a grain of wheat falls into the earth and dies … it will bear much fruit Here Jesus uses **a grain of wheat** to refer to himself. He speaks of the death of that **grain** to refer to his death, burial, and resurrection. He also uses **fruit** to refer to those people who will trust in him for salvation after his resurrection. Just as a seed is planted and grows into a plant that will bear **much fruit**, so will many people trust in Jesus after he is killed, buried, and raised back to life. If this would confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am like a grain of wheat. Unless that grain of wheat, having fallen into the earth, dies, it remains by itself; but if it would die, it bears much fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 12 25 sk6e figs-idiom ὁ φιλῶν τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ, ἀπολλύει αὐτήν 1 He who loves his life will lose it Here, **the one loving his life** refers to someone who thinks that his own physical life is more important than anything else. If this clause would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Whoever values his own life more than anything else will still die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 12 25 mp7b figs-idiom ὁ μισῶν τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ τούτῳ, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον φυλάξει αὐτήν 1 he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life Here, **the one hating his life** refers to someone who values his own physical life less than he values being a disciple of Jesus. The word “hating” here does not refer to having negative feelings about one’s life or despising oneself. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever values being my disciple more than he values his own life will keep it for eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 12 25 r4h6 grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life The phrase **eternal life** states the result of what precedes it. The **one hating his life** will **keep** that life, which will result in **eternal life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and also gain eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -1735,7 +1735,7 @@ JHN 12 28 r6qk figs-metaphor ἦλθεν…φωνὴ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανο JHN 12 29 dnsk grammar-collectivenouns ὁ…ὄχλος 1 See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) JHN 12 30 kd86 figs-metonymy οὐ…ἡ φωνὴ αὕτη γέγονεν 1 Here, Jesus refers to the sound of God’s **voice** as if it were an object that came down from heaven (see [verse 28](../12/28.md)). If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God did not speak this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 12 31 hlcg figs-abstractnouns νῦν κρίσις ἐστὶν τοῦ κόσμου τούτου 1 Now is the judgment of this world If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Now God will judge this world”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JHN 12 31 fc6r figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου τούτου 1 Now is the judgment of this world Here, **this world** is used figuratively to refer to all the people in the **world**. See how you translated **world** in [1:29](../01/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 12 31 fc6r figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου τούτου 1 Now is the judgment of this world Here, **this world** is used to refer to all the people in the **world**. See how you translated **world** in [1:29](../01/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 12 31 pv51 figs-explicit νῦν ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου ἐκβληθήσεται ἔξω 1 Now will the ruler of this world be thrown out Here, **ruler of this world** refers to Satan. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now Satan will be thrown out”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 31 o63p figs-activepassive νῦν ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου ἐκβληθήσεται ἔξω 1 Now will the ruler of this world be thrown out If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Jesus implies that God will do it. Alternate translation: “Now God will throw out the ruler of this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 12 32 a7tc figs-activepassive ὑψωθῶ ἐκ τῆς γῆς 1 When I am lifted up from the earth If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people lift me up from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1748,12 +1748,12 @@ JHN 12 34 su0r figs-synecdoche τοῦ νόμου 1 The crowd is using the name JHN 12 34 mx1k figs-explicit δεῖ ὑψωθῆναι τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 The Son of Man must be lifted up Here, the phrase **lifted up** means “crucified.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for the Son of Man to be crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 34 jzfm figs-explicit τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου…ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated **the Son of Man** in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 34 t386 figs-explicit τίς ἐστιν οὗτος ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Who is this Son of Man? This could mean: (1) they are asking to know the identity of **the Son of Man**. Alternate translation: “What is the identity of this Son of Man?” (2) they are asking to know what Jesus means when he says, ‘Son of Man.’ Alternate translation: “What kind of Son of Man are you talking about?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 12 35 l2w4 figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν…ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε 1 Jesus uses **light** figuratively to refer to refer to himself. He is “the Light of the World” who reveals God’s truth and goodness the way a **light** reveals a person’s surroundings. See how you translated **light** in [8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “The one who reveals God’s truth and goodness will be with you … while you have him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 35 l2w4 figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν…ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε 1 Jesus uses **light** to refer to refer to himself. He is “the Light of the World” who reveals God’s truth and goodness the way a **light** reveals a person’s surroundings. See how you translated **light** in [8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “The one who reveals God’s truth and goodness will be with you … while you have him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 12 35 k6td figs-123person τὸ φῶς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐστιν…ὡς τὸ φῶς ἔχετε 1 Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these phrases in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the light, will be with you … while you have me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -JHN 12 35 ughp figs-metaphor περιπατεῖτε 1 Jesus uses **walk** figuratively to refer to how a person lives and behaves. He is telling the crowd to live and act according to the example that he has shown them while he has been with them. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Behave righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 12 35 e715 figs-personification ἵνα μὴ σκοτία ὑμᾶς καταλάβῃ 1 Jesus uses **darkness** figuratively as though it were a person who could **overtake** someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way or with a simile. Alternate translation: “so that you do not act sinfully, as if the darkness of sin had taken control of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -JHN 12 35 veok figs-metaphor σκοτία 1 Here Jesus uses **darkness** figuratively to refer to what is false and evil. See how you translated this term in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 12 35 h0q9 figs-metaphor ὁ περιπατῶν ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ 1 Jesus uses this phrase figuratively to refer to a person who lives a sinful life and behaves sinfully. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who lives sinfully” or “the one who does not behave righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 35 ughp figs-metaphor περιπατεῖτε 1 Jesus uses **walk** to refer to how a person lives and behaves. He is telling the crowd to live and act according to the example that he has shown them while he has been with them. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Behave righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 35 e715 figs-personification ἵνα μὴ σκοτία ὑμᾶς καταλάβῃ 1 Jesus uses **darkness** as though it were a person who could **overtake** someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way or with a simile. Alternate translation: “so that you do not act sinfully, as if the darkness of sin had taken control of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JHN 12 35 veok figs-metaphor σκοτία 1 Here Jesus uses **darkness** to refer to what is false and evil. See how you translated this term in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 35 h0q9 figs-metaphor ὁ περιπατῶν ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ 1 Jesus uses this phrase to refer to a person who lives a sinful life and behaves sinfully. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who lives sinfully” or “the one who does not behave righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 12 36 j1rs figs-metaphor τὸ φῶς…εἰς τὸ φῶς 1 While you have the light, believe in the light so that you may be sons of light Both occurrences of **the light** here refer to Jesus. See how you translated **light** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 12 36 xu4p figs-idiom υἱοὶ φωτὸς 1 While you have the light, believe in the light so that you may be sons of light Here, **sons of light** is an idiom that refers to people who live according to God’s truth and goodness, which Jesus has revealed to them. Here, **sons** does not refer specifically to male children and **light** does not refer to Jesus. If this expression would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “people who share in God’s truth and goodness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 12 37 s1wh writing-background 0 General Information: In [verses 37–43](../12/37.md) John interrupts the main storyline in order to explain how the Jewish people had fulfilled prophecies that had been spoken by the prophet Isaiah. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information for these verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -1765,21 +1765,21 @@ JHN 12 38 y9ya writing-quotations ὃν εἶπεν 1 so that the word of Isaiah JHN 12 38 aa5b figs-quotemarks Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν? καὶ ὁ βραχίων Κυρίου τίνι ἀπεκαλύφθη? 1 so that the word of Isaiah the prophet would be fulfilled This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 53:1](../../isa/53/01.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) JHN 12 38 gx5x figs-rquestion Κύριε, τίς ἐπίστευσεν τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν? καὶ ὁ βραχίων Κυρίου τίνι ἀπεκαλύφθη? 1 Lord, who has believed our report, and to whom has the arm of the Lord been revealed? This quotation from [Isaiah 53:1](../../isa/53/01.md) contains two rhetorical questions to express the prophet’s dismay that the people do not believe his **report**. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as two statements or exclamations and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Lord, no one has believed our message! It seems like the arm of the Lord has been revealed to no one!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 12 38 tcb7 figs-activepassive ὁ βραχίων Κυρίου τίνι ἀπεκαλύφθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to whom has the Lord revealed his arm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 12 38 dh6s figs-metaphor ὁ βραχίων Κυρίου 1 the arm of the Lord Here, John quotes **Isaiah** using **arm** figuratively to refer to the Lord’s power. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Lord’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 38 dh6s figs-metaphor ὁ βραχίων Κυρίου 1 the arm of the Lord Here, John quotes **Isaiah** using **arm** to refer to the Lord’s power. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Lord’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 12 39 f28y τοῦτο 1 Here, **this reason** refers to the **reason** for the Jews’ unbelief. That reason is given in the quotation from **Isaiah** provided in the next verse. It does not refer back to the quotation from **Isaiah** in the previous verse. JHN 12 39 cskd writing-quotations ὅτι πάλιν εἶπεν Ἠσαΐας 1 This phrase introduces a quotation from the Old Testament book written by **Isaiah** the prophet ([Isaiah 6:10](../../isa/06/10.md)) which occurs in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “for Isaiah had again said in the Old Testament” or “for according to Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 12 40 q8k8 figs-quotemarks τετύφλωκεν αὐτῶν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς καὶ ἐπώρωσεν αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν, ἵνα μὴ ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς καὶ νοήσωσιν τῇ καρδίᾳ, καὶ στραφῶσιν καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 This verse is a quotation from [Isaiah 6:10](../../isa/06/10.md). It is a prophecy that God told Isaiah to speak against the Jewish people because they kept rejecting God. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -JHN 12 40 opz8 figs-metaphor τετύφλωκεν αὐτῶν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς 1 Here John quotes Isaiah using **blinded their eyes** figuratively to refer to causing people to not be able to understanding what they see. Although the Jews saw Jesus’ many miracles, most of them did not understand that those miracles proved that Jesus was sent by God. If this use of **blinded** and **eyes** would confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “He has caused them to not be able to understand” or “He has made them like those who are blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 12 40 wac6 figs-metaphor ἐπώρωσεν αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν 1 John quotes Isaiah using the phrase **hardened their heart** figuratively to refer to causing the Jewish people to become stubborn. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he has made them stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 40 opz8 figs-metaphor τετύφλωκεν αὐτῶν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς 1 Here John quotes Isaiah using **blinded their eyes** to refer to causing people to not be able to understanding what they see. Although the Jews saw Jesus’ many miracles, most of them did not understand that those miracles proved that Jesus was sent by God. If this use of **blinded** and **eyes** would confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “He has caused them to not be able to understand” or “He has made them like those who are blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 40 wac6 figs-metaphor ἐπώρωσεν αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν 1 John quotes Isaiah using the phrase **hardened their heart** to refer to causing the Jewish people to become stubborn. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he has made them stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 12 40 zs9l grammar-collectivenouns αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν…τῇ καρδίᾳ 1 Both occurrences of the singular noun **heart** in this verse refer to all of the hearts of the people as a group. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “their hearts … with their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -JHN 12 40 v6ic figs-metaphor μὴ ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς 1 John quotes Isaiah using the phrase **see with their eyes** figuratively here to refer to people understanding something that they **see**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might not see and perceive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 12 40 btbb figs-metaphor νοήσωσιν τῇ καρδίᾳ 1 John quotes Isaiah using the phrase **understand with their heart** figuratively to refer to the Jewish people truly understanding something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might fully understand” or “might understand deep within themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 12 40 h99a figs-metaphor καὶ στραφῶσιν 1 and turn John quotes Isaiah using **turn** figuratively to mean “repent,” which means to stop sinning and start obeying the Lord. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they would repent” or “and they would stop sinning and obey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 12 40 be3d figs-metaphor καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 and turn John quotes Isaiah using **heal** figuratively to refer to forgiving people of their sins. It does not refer to physical healing. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and I would forgive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 40 v6ic figs-metaphor μὴ ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς 1 John quotes Isaiah using the phrase **see with their eyes** here to refer to people understanding something that they **see**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might not see and perceive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 40 btbb figs-metaphor νοήσωσιν τῇ καρδίᾳ 1 John quotes Isaiah using the phrase **understand with their heart** to refer to the Jewish people truly understanding something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might fully understand” or “might understand deep within themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 40 h99a figs-metaphor καὶ στραφῶσιν 1 and turn John quotes Isaiah using **turn** to mean “repent,” which means to stop sinning and start obeying the Lord. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they would repent” or “and they would stop sinning and obey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 40 be3d figs-metaphor καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 and turn John quotes Isaiah using **heal** to refer to forgiving people of their sins. It does not refer to physical healing. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and I would forgive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 12 41 q2x6 figs-abstractnouns τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how glorious he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 12 42 srml figs-explicit τῶν ἀρχόντων 1 Here, **rulers** refers to the Jewish religious leadership, specifically the Jewish council called the Sanhedrin, which made decisions about Jewish law. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/council]]) See how you translated **rulers** in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “members of the Jewish ruling council” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 42 hdh1 figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ ἀποσυνάγωγοι γένωνται 1 so that they would not be banned from the synagogue If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that the Pharisees would not ban them from the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 12 42 jl6b figs-metaphor ἀποσυνάγωγοι 1 John uses **put out of the synagogue** figuratively to refer to no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attended services at the synagogue. When people were put out of the synagogue, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they would not be allowed to enter the synagogue” or “they would no longer belong to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 42 jl6b figs-metaphor ἀποσυνάγωγοι 1 John uses **put out of the synagogue** to refer to no longer being allowed to go into the synagogue and no longer belonging to the group of people who attended services at the synagogue. When people were put out of the synagogue, they were shunned by their local community. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they would not be allowed to enter the synagogue” or “they would no longer belong to the synagogue community” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 12 43 fx72 figs-explicit ἠγάπησαν…τὴν δόξαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων μᾶλλον ἤπερ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 They loved the praise that comes from people more than the praise that comes from God Here, **loved** refers to preferring one thing over something else. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “they preferred the glory of men more than the glory of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 43 cqqw figs-possession τὴν δόξαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 They loved the praise that comes from people more than the praise that comes from God John is using **of** to describe **glory** that is given by **men**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the glory that is given by men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 12 43 pib1 figs-gendernotations τὴν δόξαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 They loved the praise that comes from people more than the praise that comes from God Although the term **men** is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both **men** and women. Alternate translation: “the glory of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -1788,16 +1788,16 @@ JHN 12 44 t7cq writing-newevent δὲ 1 **Now** here introduces a new event tha JHN 12 44 d27w figs-explicit Ἰησοῦς…ἔκραξεν καὶ εἶπεν 1 Jesus cried out and said John uses **cried out** to imply that Jesus was speaking loudly to a crowd of people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus cried out and said to a crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 44 kcnd figs-explicit τὸν πέμψαντά με 1 Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 45 s6xx figs-explicit τὸν πέμψαντά με 1 Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 12 46 wib3 figs-metaphor ἐγὼ φῶς εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἐλήλυθα 1 I have come as a light Here Jesus uses **light** figuratively to refer to himself. See how you translated **light** in [8:12](../08/12). Alternate translation: “I have come as the one who reveals God’s truth and goodness to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 46 wib3 figs-metaphor ἐγὼ φῶς εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἐλήλυθα 1 I have come as a light Here Jesus uses **light** to refer to himself. See how you translated **light** in [8:12](../08/12). Alternate translation: “I have come as the one who reveals God’s truth and goodness to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 12 46 nggy figs-metonymy εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 I have come as a light Here, **world** refers to the people who live in it. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the people living in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 12 46 i31g figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ μὴ μείνῃ 1 may not remain in the darkness Here Jesus uses **darkness** figuratively to refer to what is false and evil. See how you translated **darkness** in [verse 35](../12/35.md) and also see the discussion of **light** and **darkness** in the General Notes for Chapter 1. Alternate translation: “might not remain in sin and evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 12 46 i31g figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ μὴ μείνῃ 1 may not remain in the darkness Here Jesus uses **darkness** to refer to what is false and evil. See how you translated **darkness** in [verse 35](../12/35.md) and also see the discussion of **light** and **darkness** in the General Notes for Chapter 1. Alternate translation: “might not remain in sin and evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 12 47 vehn figs-metonymy μου…τῶν ῥημάτων 1 Here, **words** refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my message” or “what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 12 47 xlyd figs-explicit καὶ μὴ φυλάξῃ 1 Here, **keep** means to obey. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “but does not obey them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 47 xvq6 figs-explicit ἐγὼ οὐ κρίνω αὐτόν…ἵνα κρίνω τὸν κόσμον 1 If anyone hears my words but does not keep them, I do not judge him; for I have not come to judge the world, but to save the world In this verse, the word **judge** implies condemnation. Jesus did not come to condemn people to be eternally punished in hell. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I do not condemn him … so that I might condemn the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 47 u4o4 figs-metonymy τὸν κόσμον…σώσω τὸν κόσμον 1 See how you translated **the world** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 12 48 wtwv τὰ ῥήματά μου 1 on the last day See how you translated **my words** in the previous verse. JHN 12 48 uxjk τὸν κρίνοντα…κρινεῖ 1 on the last day See how you translated this **judge** in the previous verse. -JHN 12 48 c76d figs-personification τὸν κρίνοντα αὐτόν…ὁ λόγος ὃν ἐλάλησα, ἐκεῖνος κρινεῖ αὐτὸν 1 on the last day Jesus refers to his **word** figuratively as though it were a person who could judge someone. He means that his teachings will be used as the criterion by which God will judge those who have rejected Jesus. If this might be confusing to your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “one by which he will be judged. The word which I have spoken, this will be the standard by which you will be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JHN 12 48 c76d figs-personification τὸν κρίνοντα αὐτόν…ὁ λόγος ὃν ἐλάλησα, ἐκεῖνος κρινεῖ αὐτὸν 1 on the last day Jesus refers to his **word** as though it were a person who could judge someone. He means that his teachings will be used as the criterion by which God will judge those who have rejected Jesus. If this might be confusing to your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “one by which he will be judged. The word which I have spoken, this will be the standard by which you will be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JHN 12 48 b1ds figs-explicit ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the last day See how you translated this phrase in [6:39](../06/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 49 ovmm figs-explicit ἐξ ἐμαυτοῦ 1 Here, **from** is used to indicate the source of what Jesus spoke. See how you translated this phrase in [7:17](../07/17.md). Alternate translation: “by my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 49 ybm5 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ…Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -1806,7 +1806,7 @@ JHN 12 50 tar2 figs-explicit οἶδα, ὅτι ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ JHN 12 50 q9cr figs-explicit ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ ζωὴ αἰώνιός ἐστιν 1 I know that his command is eternal life This phrase means that what God commanded Jesus to say gives **eternal life** to those who believe it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “his command gives eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 intro zk68 0 # John 13 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. The Passover meal begins: Jesus washes his disciples’ feet (13:1–20)
2. Jesus predicts that Judas will betray him (13:21–30)
3. Jesus commands his disciples to love each other (13:31–35)
4. Jesus predicts that Peter will deny him (13:36–38)

The events of this chapter are commonly referred to as the “Last Supper.” In many ways this Passover meal parallels the sacrifice of Jesus as the lamb of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lordssupper]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The washing of feet

People in the Ancient Near East thought that feet were very dirty. Only servants would wash people’s feet. The disciples did not want Jesus to wash their feet, because they considered him to be their master and themselves to be his servants, and it was a servant’s job to wash the feet of master and guests. However, Jesus wanted to show them that his disciples need to humbly serve and love each other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])

### I AM

John records Jesus saying these words as an independent phrase one time in this chapter ([13:19](../13/19.md)). They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew expression “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses in [Exodus 3:14](../../exo/03/14.md). For these reasons many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### “The disciple whom Jesus loved”

The Apostle John first referred to himself as the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in this chapter ([13:23](../13/23.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. If this is the case, then you will need to add a first person pronoun to these references and the other references to John in ([13:23–25](../13/23.md)). If your language can retain the third person references, then you may still want to make these references to John explicit by adding “John” next to them. See the discussion of this in Part 1 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johntheapostle]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([13:31](../13/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 13 1 wk2k writing-background 0 General Information: It is not yet **Passover**, and **Jesus** is with his disciples for the evening meal. [Verses 1–4](../13/01.md) explain the setting of the story and give background information about Jesus and Judas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -JHN 13 1 z4q9 figs-metonymy ἦλθεν αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα 1 Here, the word **hour** is used figuratively to refer to the time God had planned for Jesus to be arrested and killed. See how you translated this word in [7:30](../07/30.md). Alternate translation: “the right time to arrest him had come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 13 1 z4q9 figs-metonymy ἦλθεν αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα 1 Here, the word **hour** is used to refer to the time God had planned for Jesus to be arrested and killed. See how you translated this word in [7:30](../07/30.md). Alternate translation: “the right time to arrest him had come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 13 1 w7w3 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 13 1 a1w4 figs-explicit τοὺς ἰδίους τοὺς ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 This phrase refers to Jesus’ disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “his own disciples who were with him in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 1 g86x figs-idiom εἰς τέλος ἠγάπησεν αὐτούς 1 Here, **to the end** could mean: (1) **to the end** of Jesus’ life. If you use this meaning, make sure that you do not translate this phrase in a way that could imply that Jesus did not continue to love them after his death. Alternate translation: “he loved them to the time of his death” (2) utterly or completely. Alternate translation: “he loved them to the uttermost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1814,7 +1814,7 @@ JHN 13 2 xn6r figs-idiom τοῦ διαβόλου ἤδη βεβληκότος JHN 13 2 iq56 translate-names Ἰούδας, Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτης 1 See how you translated this phrase in [6:71](../06/71.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 13 3 qtr3 grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδὼς 1 Father Here, the word **knowing** could mean: (1) the rest of this verse is the reason why Jesus did the result that John describes in the next verse. Alternate translation: “because he knew” (2) this verse provides a contrast between who Jesus is and what he would do in the next verse. Alternate translation: “although he knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 13 3 fd2t guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 13 3 x8hc figs-metonymy εἰς τὰς χεῖρας 1 had given everything over into his hands Here, John uses **hands** figuratively to refer to power and authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into his power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 13 3 x8hc figs-metonymy εἰς τὰς χεῖρας 1 had given everything over into his hands Here, John uses **hands** to refer to power and authority. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into his power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 13 4 t7cu figs-pastforfuture ἐγείρεται…τίθησιν 1 He got up from dinner and took off his outer clothing Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 4 nm8h figs-explicit ἐγείρεται ἐκ τοῦ δείπνου 1 He got up from dinner and took off his outer clothing During Jesus’ time, people would often eat meals while lying on their sides on low couches next to the table. Here, **gets up** means that Jesus went from lying on his side on a couch next to the table where he was eating **supper** to standing up. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he gets up from the table where he was eating supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 4 a9yt τίθησιν τὰ ἱμάτια 1 He got up from dinner and took off his outer clothing Here, **outer clothing** refers to clothing that is worn over undergarments. It does not refer to a coat that would be worn over a person’s regular clothing. Use the term in your language for the regular clothing that people wear on top of their underwear. @@ -1830,9 +1830,9 @@ JHN 13 8 m90p figs-explicit ἐὰν μὴ νίψω σε, οὐκ ἔχεις μ JHN 13 9 bjgq figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 9 irnh figs-ellipsis μὴ τοὺς πόδας μου μόνον, 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “wash not only my feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 13 10 dp8l figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) -JHN 13 10 is57 figs-metaphor ὁ λελουμένος οὐκ ἔχει χρείαν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς πόδας νίψασθαι 1 He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet In this verse, Jesus uses **washed** figuratively to refer to God forgiving a person for their sins. He also uses **feet** figuratively to refer to daily sins, because people in Jesus’ culture had to wash their **feet** frequently due to wearing sandals while walking on dusty, dirty roads. If this might confuse your readers, you could state their meanings clearly or use similes. Alternate translation: “The one who has received God’s forgiveness for their sins, only needs to be forgiven for his daily sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 13 10 is57 figs-metaphor ὁ λελουμένος οὐκ ἔχει χρείαν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς πόδας νίψασθαι 1 He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet In this verse, Jesus uses **washed** to refer to God forgiving a person for their sins. He also uses **feet** to refer to daily sins, because people in Jesus’ culture had to wash their **feet** frequently due to wearing sandals while walking on dusty, dirty roads. If this might confuse your readers, you could state their meanings clearly or use similes. Alternate translation: “The one who has received God’s forgiveness for their sins, only needs to be forgiven for his daily sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 13 10 bbon figs-activepassive ὁ λελουμένος 1 He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The one who someone had washed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 13 10 o25q figs-metaphor ἀλλ’ ἔστιν καθαρὸς ὅλος; καὶ ὑμεῖς καθαροί ἐστε 1 He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet In this verse, Jesus uses **clean** figuratively to refer to someone who has been forgiven for their sins. If this might be confusing in your language, you could state its meaning clearly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “but he has been completely forgiven for his sins, and you have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 13 10 o25q figs-metaphor ἀλλ’ ἔστιν καθαρὸς ὅλος; καὶ ὑμεῖς καθαροί ἐστε 1 He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet In this verse, Jesus uses **clean** to refer to someone who has been forgiven for their sins. If this might be confusing in your language, you could state its meaning clearly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “but he has been completely forgiven for his sins, and you have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 13 10 tv57 figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς 1 Here Jesus uses the word **you** to refer to all of his disciples, not only Peter. Use a plural form of **you** if your language distinguishes between singular and plural **you**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) JHN 13 11 tzj7 writing-background 0 Here John interrupts the story to give the reason why Jesus made his comment in the end of the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 13 11 ccz4 figs-metaphor οὐχὶ πάντες καθαροί ἐστε 1 Not all of you are clean See how you translated **clean** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Not all of you have received God’s forgiveness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1843,8 +1843,8 @@ JHN 13 15 pk3l figs-declarative καθὼς ἐγὼ ἐποίησα ὑμῖν, JHN 13 16 h6gt figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 13 16 tpl8 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ, οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν 1 greater Here, **greater** means to be more important or deserving of more respect than another person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “a slave is not respected more than his master, nor is a messenger respected more than the one who sent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 16 rj4z figs-doublet οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ, οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν 1 greater These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus’ disciples are not more important than him, so they should humbly serve each other. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “none of you are greater than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -JHN 13 16 k3zj figs-metaphor οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ 1 greater Jesus uses the words **slave** and **master** figuratively to refer to his disciples and himself, respectively. He is telling his disciples that they should humbly serve each other because they are not more important than him, and he has humbly served them. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Jesus’ meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “you are not greater than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 13 16 la0x figs-metaphor οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν 1 greater Jesus uses **messenger** and **the one who sent him** figuratively to refer to his disciples and himself, respectively. He is telling his disciples that they should humbly serve each other because they are not more important than him, and he has humbly served them. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Jesus’ meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “and you are not greater than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 13 16 k3zj figs-metaphor οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ 1 greater Jesus uses the words **slave** and **master** to refer to his disciples and himself, respectively. He is telling his disciples that they should humbly serve each other because they are not more important than him, and he has humbly served them. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Jesus’ meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “you are not greater than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 13 16 la0x figs-metaphor οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν 1 greater Jesus uses **messenger** and **the one who sent him** to refer to his disciples and himself, respectively. He is telling his disciples that they should humbly serve each other because they are not more important than him, and he has humbly served them. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Jesus’ meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “and you are not greater than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 13 17 nwhg grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ταῦτα οἴδατε 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you know these things, which you do,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 13 17 nxou figs-activepassive μακάριοί ἐστε 1 you are blessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 13 18 ji7u figs-explicit οὐ περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν λέγω 1 Here Jesus is referring back to what he just said in the previous verse. He means that not all of those to whom he is speaking will be blessed for serving each other, because one of them, Judas Iscariot, will betray him. If this clause would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not speaking this about all of you” or “I am not saying that God will bless all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1880,7 +1880,7 @@ JHN 13 29 p66v figs-explicit ἑορτήν 1 Here, **festival** refers to the J JHN 13 29 rv4z figs-quotations τοῖς πτωχοῖς ἵνα τι δῷ 1 that he should give something to the poor If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Give something to the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) JHN 13 30 dw7m writing-background ἦν δὲ νύξ 1 It was night In this sentence John provides background information about the time of day when Judas **went out** to betray Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 13 31 wi4o figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) -JHN 13 31 apde figs-pastforfuture νῦν ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ἐδοξάσθη ἐν αὐτῷ 1 In this verse, Jesus twice uses the past tense **has been glorified** figuratively in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “Now the Son of Man will be glorified, and God will be glorified in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JHN 13 31 apde figs-pastforfuture νῦν ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ἐδοξάσθη ἐν αὐτῷ 1 In this verse, Jesus twice uses the past tense **has been glorified** in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “Now the Son of Man will be glorified, and God will be glorified in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 31 d6l8 figs-activepassive νῦν ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Now the Son of Man is glorified, and God is glorified in him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “Now God will glorify the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 13 31 gd4y figs-123person ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, have been glorified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 13 31 o91a figs-explicit ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated **the Son of Man** in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1888,7 +1888,7 @@ JHN 13 31 n421 figs-activepassive ὁ Θεὸς ἐδοξάσθη ἐν αὐτ JHN 13 32 i7yz translate-textvariants 0 In some Bibles, this verse begins with the clause, “If God has been glorified in him”. However, these words are not in most of the oldest ancient manuscripts. Nevertheless, if a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) JHN 13 32 bfxt writing-pronouns ὁ Θεὸς δοξάσει αὐτὸν…αὐτόν 1 God will glorify him in himself, and he will glorify him immediately Both occurrences of the pronoun **him** refer to the Son of Man, Jesus. If this use of **him** would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God will glorify the Son of Man … the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 13 32 uaj7 figs-rpronouns ὁ Θεὸς δοξάσει αὐτὸν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 God will glorify him in himself, and he will glorify him immediately The word **himself** here refers to God and is used to emphasize that God is the one who would **glorify** Jesus. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “God himself will glorify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -JHN 13 33 zki6 figs-metaphor τεκνία 1 Little children Jesus is using the phrase **Little children** figuratively to describe the disciples to whom he is speaking. He loves them as if they were his own children. If this might confuse your readers, you could translate this in a non-figurative way or use a simile. Alternate translation: “You dear disciples who are like children to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 13 33 zki6 figs-metaphor τεκνία 1 Little children Jesus is using the phrase **Little children** to describe the disciples to whom he is speaking. He loves them as if they were his own children. If this might confuse your readers, you could translate this in a non-figurative way or use a simile. Alternate translation: “You dear disciples who are like children to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 13 33 lp65 figs-synecdoche τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 as I said to the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 13 33 zrqu figs-infostructure καὶ καθὼς εἶπον τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις, ὅτι ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν, καὶ ὑμῖν λέγω ἄρτι 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “and just as I said to the Jews, now I also say this to you, ‘Where I go, you are not able to come.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) JHN 13 33 sjwl figs-infostructure ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν 1 See how you translated this sentence in [8:21](../08/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) @@ -1900,26 +1900,26 @@ JHN 13 37 ye6m figs-euphemism τὴν ψυχήν μου…θήσω 1 lay down my JHN 13 38 qp88 figs-rquestion τὴν ψυχήν σου ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ θήσεις? 1 Will you lay down your life for me? **Jesus** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. He knows that Peter is not really willing to **lay down** his life for Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You will certainly not lay down your life for me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 13 38 juha figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι 1 Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 13 38 sp7p οὐ μὴ ἀλέκτωρ φωνήσῃ, ἕως οὗ ἀρνήσῃ με τρίς 1 the rooster will not crow before you have denied me three times If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this negative statement as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “you will surely deny me three times before the rooster crows” -JHN 13 38 ef9n figs-metonymy οὐ μὴ ἀλέκτωρ φωνήσῃ, ἕως οὗ 1 the rooster will not crow before you have denied me three times Jesus is referring figuratively to a certain time of day. Roosters crow just before the sun appears in the morning. In other words, Jesus is referring to dawn. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “before another morning begins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 13 38 ef9n figs-metonymy οὐ μὴ ἀλέκτωρ φωνήσῃ, ἕως οὗ 1 the rooster will not crow before you have denied me three times Jesus is referring to a certain time of day. Roosters crow just before the sun appears in the morning. In other words, Jesus is referring to dawn. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “before another morning begins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 13 38 ui2h translate-unknown ἀλέκτωρ 1 A **rooster** is a bird that calls out loudly around the time the sun comes up. If your readers would not be familiar with this bird, you could use the name of a bird in your area that calls out or sings just before dawn, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the bird that sings in the morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JHN 13 38 kfze figs-genericnoun ἀλέκτωρ 1 Jesus is not speaking of one particular **rooster** but of roosters in general. Alternate translation: “the roosters” or “the birds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) JHN 14 intro kv6m 0 # John 14 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus says he is the way to the Father (14:1–14)
2. Jesus promises that the Holy Spirit will come (14:15–31)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### “My Father’s house”

Jesus used these words to refer to heaven, where God dwells. It does not refer to any temple in Jerusalem or to a church building. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

### The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. He called the Holy Spirit the Helper ([14:16](../14/16.md)), who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them. Jesus also called him the Spirit of Truth ([14:17](../14/17.md)), who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]]) JHN 14 1 a2xv 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues in this chapter. Jesus reclines at the table with his disciples during the evening meal and continues to speak to them. JHN 14 1 ughe figs-you 0 In [verses 1–7](../14/01.md) the word “you” is always plural and refers to Jesus’ disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -JHN 14 1 w3dn figs-metaphor μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία 1 Do not let your heart be troubled Jesus uses **heart** figuratively to represent the disciples’ thoughts and emotions. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not let your thoughts be troubled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 1 w3dn figs-metaphor μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία 1 Do not let your heart be troubled Jesus uses **heart** to represent the disciples’ thoughts and emotions. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not let your thoughts be troubled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 14 1 rq43 figs-declarative πιστεύετε εἰς τὸν Θεόν, καὶ εἰς ἐμὲ πιστεύετε 1 Both of these clauses could be: (1) commands, as in the UST. (2) statements. Alternate translation: “You believe in God; you also believe in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) -JHN 14 2 eca3 figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 In my Father’s house Jesus uses **house** figuratively to refer to heaven, which is the place where God dwells. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “In the place where my Father dwells” or “In heaven where my Father dwells”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 2 eca3 figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 In my Father’s house Jesus uses **house** to refer to heaven, which is the place where God dwells. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “In the place where my Father dwells” or “In heaven where my Father dwells”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 14 2 v9px guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 14 2 n3wl εἰ δὲ μή, εἶπον ἂν ὑμῖν, ὅτι πορεύομαι ἑτοιμάσαι τόπον ὑμῖν 1 Father The word translated **for** could also be translated “that,” in which case this sentence would be a question instead of a statement. With either interpretation the point of the sentence is the same: Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said in the previous sentence is true. He is going to heaven **to prepare a place for** his people. Alternate translation: “But if not, would I have told you that I am going to prepare a place for you?” JHN 14 3 sadi grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν πορευθῶ 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that it will actually take place. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when I go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -JHN 14 4 ir1d figs-extrainfo τὴν ὁδόν 1 the way Here Jesus uses **the way** figuratively. This could refer to: (1) himself as the means by which people can go to God in heaven, which is clearly the meaning for **the way** in [verse 6](../14/06.md). (2) a manner of life that will eventually lead someone to be with God in heaven. Since the disciples did not understand this when Jesus said it, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 14 4 ir1d figs-extrainfo τὴν ὁδόν 1 the way Here Jesus uses **the way**. This could refer to: (1) himself as the means by which people can go to God in heaven, which is clearly the meaning for **the way** in [verse 6](../14/06.md). (2) a manner of life that will eventually lead someone to be with God in heaven. Since the disciples did not understand this when Jesus said it, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 14 5 aode translate-names Θωμᾶς 1 See how you translated the name **Thomas** in [11:16](../11/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 14 5 o21d figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 14 5 j2go figs-rquestion πῶς δυνάμεθα τὴν ὁδὸν εἰδέναι 1 Thomas is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We surely do not know the way!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 14 6 jdwf figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 the truth Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) -JHN 14 6 qoc0 figs-metaphor ἡ ὁδὸς 1 Here Jesus uses **the way** figuratively to indicate that he is the means by which people can go to God, who is in heaven. Trusting in Jesus is the only way to have access to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who gives people access to the Father” or “the means by which one may come to the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 14 6 i8le figs-metaphor ἡ ἀλήθεια 1 the truth Jesus uses **the truth** figuratively to indicate that he is the one who reveals God’s truth to people. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who reveals God’s truth” or “the means by which people can know God’s truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 14 6 z9tr figs-metaphor ἡ ζωή 1 the life Jesus uses **the life** figuratively to indicate that he is the means by which people can receive eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who makes people spiritually alive” or “the means by which one may receive eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 6 qoc0 figs-metaphor ἡ ὁδὸς 1 Here Jesus uses **the way** to indicate that he is the means by which people can go to God, who is in heaven. Trusting in Jesus is the only way to have access to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who gives people access to the Father” or “the means by which one may come to the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 6 i8le figs-metaphor ἡ ἀλήθεια 1 the truth Jesus uses **the truth** to indicate that he is the one who reveals God’s truth to people. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who reveals God’s truth” or “the means by which people can know God’s truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 6 z9tr figs-metaphor ἡ ζωή 1 the life Jesus uses **the life** to indicate that he is the means by which people can receive eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who makes people spiritually alive” or “the means by which one may receive eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 14 6 g5hn figs-explicit οὐδεὶς ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα, εἰ μὴ δι’ ἐμοῦ 1 no one comes to the Father except through me Here, **through me** means that a person can come to God only by trusting Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “No one comes to the Father except by believing in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 6 f95q guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 14 7 wx89 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐγνώκατε με 1 Father Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you have known me, and you have known me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) @@ -1955,9 +1955,9 @@ JHN 14 15 bws1 figs-explicit τὰς ἐντολὰς τὰς ἐμὰς τηρ JHN 14 16 tu1e figs-explicit Παράκλητον 1 Comforter **Helper** here refers to the Holy Spirit. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “one who helps, the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 17 sc6r figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Spirit of truth The **Spirit of Truth** refers to the Holy Spirit. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Holy Spirit of Truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 17 ms9g figs-possession τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Spirit of truth Jesus is using **of** to describe the **Spirit** who teaches people the **Truth** about God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the Spirit that teaches God’s truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -JHN 14 17 i2v7 figs-metonymy ὃ ὁ κόσμος οὐ δύναται λαβεῖν 1 The world cannot receive him Here Jesus uses **world** figuratively to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whom the people in this world who oppose God are not able to receive” or “whom those who oppose God are not able to receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 14 17 i2v7 figs-metonymy ὃ ὁ κόσμος οὐ δύναται λαβεῖν 1 The world cannot receive him Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whom the people in this world who oppose God are not able to receive” or “whom those who oppose God are not able to receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 14 17 clz3 figs-explicit ἐν ὑμῖν ἔσται 1 The world cannot receive him Jesus uses the future tense **will** to indicate that the Holy **Spirit** would be inside Jesus’ disciples at a future point in time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will be in you at a future time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 14 18 hy8v figs-metaphor οὐκ ἀφήσω ὑμᾶς ὀρφανούς 1 leave you alone Jesus uses **orphans** figuratively to refer to people who have no one to care for them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will not leave you with no one to care for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 18 hy8v figs-metaphor οὐκ ἀφήσω ὑμᾶς ὀρφανούς 1 leave you alone Jesus uses **orphans** to refer to people who have no one to care for them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will not leave you with no one to care for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 14 18 k5bs figs-pastforfuture ἔρχομαι 1 Here Jesus uses the present tense **I am coming** to refer to something that will happen in the near future. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “I will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 14 19 r5q8 figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 the world See how you translated **the world** in [verse 17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 14 19 yjsl figs-explicit ὅτι ἐγὼ ζῶ, καὶ ὑμεῖς ζήσεσθε 1 the world In this verse, Jesus uses **live** to refer to living forever after one’s resurrection. Because Jesus will live forever after his death and resurrection, so too will his disciples life forever after they die and are resurrected. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because I live forever, you will also life forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1966,7 +1966,7 @@ JHN 14 20 ckki figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 you will JHN 14 20 b87j figs-explicit ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί μου, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν ἐμοὶ, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 you will know that I am in my Father In this verse Jesus uses **in** to indicate being united with someone. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am united with my Father, and you are united with me, and I am united with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 20 he2a guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρί μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 14 20 ht8z figs-doublet ὑμεῖς ἐν ἐμοὶ, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 you are in me, and that I am in you These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the unity between Jesus and his disciples. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “you and I are just like one person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -JHN 14 21 rw8n figs-metaphor ὁ ἔχων τὰς ἐντολάς μου 1 Jesus speaks figuratively of **commandments** as if they were an object that someone could possess. If your readers would not speak of knowing **commandments** in this way, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “The one knowing my commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 21 rw8n figs-metaphor ὁ ἔχων τὰς ἐντολάς μου 1 Jesus speaks of **commandments** as if they were an object that someone could possess. If your readers would not speak of knowing **commandments** in this way, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “The one knowing my commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 14 21 x8m8 figs-explicit τηρῶν αὐτὰς 1 Here, **keeping** means obeying. See how you translated this word in [verse 15](../14/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 21 gjl8 figs-activepassive ὁ δὲ ἀγαπῶν με, ἀγαπηθήσεται ὑπὸ τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 he who loves me will be loved by my Father If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and my Father will love the one loving me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 14 21 qsu7 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -1992,7 +1992,7 @@ JHN 14 26 hk8n guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is JHN 14 26 jjhy figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 Father Here, **in my name** could mean: (1) as the representative of Jesus or in place of Jesus. Alternate translation: “as my representative” or “in place of me” (2) with the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 14 26 ig83 figs-hyperbole πάντα 1 Here, **everything** is an exaggeration that Jesus uses for emphasis. He means that the **Holy Spirit** would teach the disciples all that they needed to know about what he had taught them. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the plain meaning. Alternate translation: “everything that you need to know about what I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) JHN 14 27 t9c4 figs-abstractnouns εἰρήνην ἀφίημι ὑμῖν; εἰρήνην τὴν ἐμὴν δίδωμι ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I leave you a peaceful feeling; I give you my peaceful feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JHN 14 27 fb4o figs-metaphor εἰρήνην ἀφίημι ὑμῖν 1 Jesus speaks of **peace** figuratively as if it were an object that he could **leave** with someone. If this would confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “You will feel peace after I leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 27 fb4o figs-metaphor εἰρήνην ἀφίημι ὑμῖν 1 Jesus speaks of **peace** as if it were an object that he could **leave** with someone. If this would confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “You will feel peace after I leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 14 27 jve8 figs-ellipsis οὐ καθὼς ὁ κόσμος δίδωσιν, ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you peace as the world gives peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 14 27 i7gm figs-explicit οὐ καθὼς ὁ κόσμος δίδωσιν, ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν 1 Here, **as the world gives** could mean: (1) the manner in which **the world gives** **peace**. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you in the manner that the world gives” (2) the type of **peace** that **the world gives**. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you the kind of peace that the world gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 27 nx8a figs-metonymy κόσμος 1 world See how you translated the **world** in [verse 17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2010,12 +2010,12 @@ JHN 14 31 jhq1 figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 in order that the world will kno JHN 14 31 r9ub guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα…ὁ Πατὴρ 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 15 intro k9jd 0 # John 15 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus says he is the vine (15:1–8)
2. Jesus commands his disciples to love each other (15:9–17)
3. Jesus promises that his disciples will be persecuted (15:18–16:4)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Vine

Jesus used the vine as a metaphor for himself. The vine of the grape plant takes water and minerals from the ground and gives them to the leaves and grapes that are on the branches. Without the vine, the branches, grapes, and leaves die. He wanted his followers to know that unless they loved and obeyed him, they would be unable to do anything that pleased God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/vine]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/grape]], and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### “Remain in me”

Jesus uses the word “remain” as a metaphor. He is speaking of a believer being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. In ([15:7](../15/07.md)), the UST expresses this idea of “my words remain in you” as “obey what I have taught you.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model. JHN 15 1 aws2 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus continues to speak to his disciples either at the end of their evening meal or after they have finished that meal and are walking to Gethsemane. It is unclear whether or not they left immediately after Jesus said “Let us go from here,” at the end of the previous chapter ([John 14:31](../14/31.md)). -JHN 15 1 fen5 figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος ἡ ἀληθινή 1 I am the true vine Jesus uses the **true vine** figuratively to refer to himself. As a **vine** is the source of life for its branches, so Jesus causes people to live in a way that pleases God and brings other people to believe in Jesus. Since the **vine** is an important metaphor in the Bible, you should translate the words directly or use a simile and not provide a non-figurative explanation in the text of your translation. Alternate translation: “I am like a true vine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 1 fen5 figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος ἡ ἀληθινή 1 I am the true vine Jesus uses the **true vine** to refer to himself. As a **vine** is the source of life for its branches, so Jesus causes people to live in a way that pleases God and brings other people to believe in Jesus. Since the **vine** is an important metaphor in the Bible, you should translate the words directly or use a simile and not provide a non-figurative explanation in the text of your translation. Alternate translation: “I am like a true vine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 15 1 puzl translate-unknown ἡ ἀληθινή 1 The word translated **vine** refers specifically to the grapevine plant that produces grapes. If your readers would not be familiar with grapevines, use an equivalent word in your language for a **vine** that produces fruit. Alternate translation: “grapevine” or “fruit-producing vine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JHN 15 1 hqj7 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 15 1 w2d4 figs-metaphor ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ γεωργός ἐστιν 1 my Father is the gardener Jesus uses **farmer** figuratively to refer to God. Just as a **farmer** takes care of the**vine** to ensure it is as fruitful as possible, so God takes care of his people. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “my Father is like a gardener” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 1 w2d4 figs-metaphor ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ γεωργός ἐστιν 1 my Father is the gardener Jesus uses **farmer** to refer to God. Just as a **farmer** takes care of the**vine** to ensure it is as fruitful as possible, so God takes care of his people. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “my Father is like a gardener” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 15 1 t4ne ὁ γεωργός 1 my Father is the gardener While **farmer** is a general term for anyone who farms the ground, in this context it refers to someone who takes care of grapevines and grows grapes. Alternate translation: “vine grower” or “grape farmer” -JHN 15 2 p311 figs-exmetaphor πᾶν κλῆμα ἐν ἐμοὶ μὴ φέρον καρπὸν…καὶ πᾶν τὸ καρπὸν φέρον…ἵνα καρπὸν πλείονα φέρῃ 1 He takes away every branch in me that does not bear fruit Jesus speaks about people who claim to be his disciples but are not by continuing the metaphor of a vine. In this paragraph, Jesus uses **branch** figuratively to refer to both true and false disciples. He also uses **bearing fruit**, **bears fruit**, and **bear more fruit** figuratively to refer to living in a manner that pleases God, especially demonstrating the Christian qualities called the “fruit of the Spirit” in [Galatians 5:22–23](../../gal/05/22.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “Everyone who claims to be my disciple but does not please God is like a branch in me that does not bear fruit … and every person who pleases God is like a branch that bears fruit … so that he might be like a branch that bears more fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +JHN 15 2 p311 figs-exmetaphor πᾶν κλῆμα ἐν ἐμοὶ μὴ φέρον καρπὸν…καὶ πᾶν τὸ καρπὸν φέρον…ἵνα καρπὸν πλείονα φέρῃ 1 He takes away every branch in me that does not bear fruit Jesus speaks about people who claim to be his disciples but are not by continuing the metaphor of a vine. In this paragraph, Jesus uses **branch** to refer to both true and false disciples. He also uses **bearing fruit**, **bears fruit**, and **bear more fruit** to refer to living in a manner that pleases God, especially demonstrating the Christian qualities called the “fruit of the Spirit” in [Galatians 5:22–23](../../gal/05/22.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “Everyone who claims to be my disciple but does not please God is like a branch in me that does not bear fruit … and every person who pleases God is like a branch that bears fruit … so that he might be like a branch that bears more fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) JHN 15 2 wt8w αἴρει αὐτό 1 takes away Alternate translation: “he cuts it off of the vine and takes it away” or “he breaks it off of the vine and throws it away” JHN 15 2 enrh καθαίρει αὐτὸ 1 takes away The word translated **prunes** could mean: (1) to remove excess parts from a plant. Alternate translation: “he trims it” (2) to cause something to become clean. Alternate translation: “he cleans it” (3) to remove excess parts from a plant in order to make it clean. See the discussion of John’s use of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to this book. Alternate translation: “he prunes it so that it will be clean” JHN 15 3 xn3j figs-metaphor ἤδη ὑμεῖς καθαροί ἐστε 1 You are already clean because of the message that I have spoken to you The word translated **clean** is related to the word translated “prunes” in the previous verse. Here Jesus uses **clean** to imply that the branches have already been cleaned by pruning off the excess parts. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “You are like branches that have already been pruned and are clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2029,20 +2029,20 @@ JHN 15 5 b1qd figs-explicit ποιεῖν οὐδέν 1 he bears much fruit Here JHN 15 6 fgnm ἐὰν μή τις μένῃ ἐν ἐμοί, ἐβλήθη ἔξω ὡς τὸ κλῆμα καὶ ἐξηράνθη, καὶ συνάγουσιν αὐτὰ καὶ εἰς τὸ πῦρ βάλλουσιν, καὶ καίεται 1 In the middle of this verse, Jesus changes from referring to the **branch** in a singular form to a plural form. If this change would be confusing in your language, you could change the singular forms into plural forms. Alternate translation: “If people do not remain in me, they are thrown outside like branches and are dried up, and they gather them into the fire, and they are burned up” JHN 15 6 d5mt figs-explicit μένῃ ἐν ἐμοί 1 See how you translated **remain in me** in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 6 h6cu figs-activepassive ἐβλήθη ἔξω ὡς τὸ κλῆμα καὶ ἐξηράνθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the farmer throws him outside like a branch, and he dries up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 15 6 k1tm figs-metaphor τὸ κλῆμα 1 he is thrown away like a branch and dries up Jesus uses **branch** figuratively to refer to someone who claims to be Jesus’ disciple, but is not. See how you translated the similar use of **branch** in [verse 2](../15/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 6 k1tm figs-metaphor τὸ κλῆμα 1 he is thrown away like a branch and dries up Jesus uses **branch** to refer to someone who claims to be Jesus’ disciple, but is not. See how you translated the similar use of **branch** in [verse 2](../15/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 15 6 ura6 writing-pronouns καὶ συνάγουσιν αὐτὰ καὶ εἰς τὸ πῦρ βάλλουσιν, καὶ καίεται 1 he is thrown away like a branch and dries up The first **they** in this verse refers to an indefinite subject, but the second **they** refers to the object. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate them differently. Alternate translation: “and some helpers gather them and throw them into the fire, and they are burned up” or “and someone gathers them and throws them into the fire, and those branches are burned up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 15 6 e789 figs-activepassive καίεται 1 they are burned up If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the fire burns them up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 15 7 knr4 figs-explicit μείνητε ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 ask whatever you wish See how you translated **remain in me** in the previous three verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 7 lpzq figs-idiom τὰ ῥήματά μου ἐν ὑμῖν μείνῃ 1 ask whatever you wish This is an idiom that means to obey Jesus. See how you translated a similar expression in [8:31](../08/31.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 15 7 m38f figs-ellipsis ὃ ἐὰν θέλητε, αἰτήσασθε 1 ask whatever you wish Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “ask God whatever you desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 15 7 mcz5 figs-activepassive γενήσεται ὑμῖν 1 it will be done for you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will do it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 15 8 pq2t figs-pastforfuture ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 My Father is glorified in this Jesus is figuratively using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “My Father will be glorified in this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JHN 15 8 pq2t figs-pastforfuture ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 My Father is glorified in this Jesus is using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “My Father will be glorified in this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 15 8 yq67 figs-activepassive ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 My Father is glorified in this If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You have glorifed my Father in this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 15 8 z1ww guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 My Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 15 8 wpa6 figs-metaphor καρπὸν πολὺν φέρητε 1 that you bear much fruit See how you translated a similar expression in [verse 5](../15/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 15 8 vtg5 γένησθε ἐμοὶ μαθηταί 1 are my disciples Alternate translation: “show that you are my disciples” or “demonstrate that you are my disciples” JHN 15 9 nf5v guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ 1 As the Father has loved me, I have also loved you **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 15 9 d32z figs-metaphor μείνατε ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐμῇ 1 Remain in my love Jesus uses **remain in** figuratively to refer to continuing in a certain state. Jesus is commanding his disciples to continue being in a close and loving relationship with him by obeying his commands. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “continue having a loving relationship with me” or “live in a way that enables you to continue experiencing my love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 9 d32z figs-metaphor μείνατε ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐμῇ 1 Remain in my love Jesus uses **remain in** to refer to continuing in a certain state. Jesus is commanding his disciples to continue being in a close and loving relationship with him by obeying his commands. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “continue having a loving relationship with me” or “live in a way that enables you to continue experiencing my love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 15 10 thg9 figs-explicit τηρήσητε…τετήρηκα 1 If you keep my commandments, you will remain in my love, as I have kept the commandments of my Father and remain in his love Here, **keep** and **kept** refer to obeying. See how you translated this word in [14:15](../14/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 10 cu4e figs-metaphor μενεῖτε ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ μου…μένω αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 If you keep my commandments, you will remain in my love, as I have kept the commandments of my Father and remain in his love See how you translated the similar clause in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 15 10 k1nm guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -2059,18 +2059,18 @@ JHN 15 16 bcy1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 the Father * JHN 15 16 acqo figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 See how you translated **in my name** in [14:13](../14/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 15 17 rib2 ταῦτα 1 Here, **These things** could refer to: (1) the commands Jesus referred to in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “These commands” (2) the command in the second half of this verse. Alternate translation: “This” JHN 15 18 ntzw grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ὁ κόσμος ὑμᾶς μισεῖ 1 the world Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If the world hates you, and it does hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -JHN 15 18 d5ff figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 the world Here Jesus uses **world** figuratively to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 18 d5ff figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 the world Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 19 aj8s grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἦτε 1 the world Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that his disciples are not **from the world**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If you were from the world, but you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) JHN 15 19 x6q8 figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου…ὁ κόσμος…τοῦ κόσμου…τοῦ κόσμου…ὁ κόσμος 1 the world See how you translated **the world** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 19 ayo7 figs-infostructure ὅτι δὲ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου οὐκ ἐστέ, ἀλλ’ ἐγὼ ἐξελεξάμην ὑμᾶς ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, διὰ τοῦτο μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὁ κόσμος 1 the world If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “But because you are not from the world, this world hates you, but I chose you from the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -JHN 15 20 v53s figs-metonymy μνημονεύετε τοῦ λόγου οὗ ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν 1 Remember the word that I said to you Here, Jesus uses **word** figuratively to refer to what he says later in this sentence. If this use of **word** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Remember the teaching that I said to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 20 v53s figs-metonymy μνημονεύετε τοῦ λόγου οὗ ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν 1 Remember the word that I said to you Here, Jesus uses **word** to refer to what he says later in this sentence. If this use of **word** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Remember the teaching that I said to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 20 wzg6 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ 1 Remember the word that I said to you See how you translated this phrase in [13:16](../13/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 20 a8kw figs-metonymy εἰ τὸν λόγον μου ἐτήρησαν…τηρήσουσιν 1 Remember the word that I said to you See how you translated a similar phrase in [8:51](../08/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 21 eh1v figs-metonymy ταῦτα πάντα ποιήσουσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 because of my name Here, **all these things** refers to the bad things Jesus told his disciples that the unbelievers in the world would do to them in [verses 18–20](../15/18.md). If this use of **these things** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will hate and persecute you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 15 21 z35m figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 because of my name Here, Jesus uses **my name** figuratively to refer to himself. People will make his followers suffer because they belong to him. If this use of **name** would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because you belong to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 21 z35m figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 because of my name Here, Jesus uses **my name** to refer to himself. People will make his followers suffer because they belong to him. If this use of **name** would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because you belong to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 21 hs9x figs-explicit τὸν πέμψαντά με 1 Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 22 m75h grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ μὴ ἦλθον καὶ ἐλάλησα αὐτοῖς 1 If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He knows that he did come and speak to the world. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If I had not come and spoken to them, but I did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) -JHN 15 22 uble figs-metaphor ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν 1 If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin Jesus speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess. See how you translated a similar phrase in [9:41](../09/41.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 22 uble figs-metaphor ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν 1 If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin Jesus speaks of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess. See how you translated a similar phrase in [9:41](../09/41.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 15 22 uj4o figs-explicit ἁμαρτίαν…ἁμαρτίας 1 If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin Here, Jesus uses **sin** to refer specifically to the **sin** of rejecting Jesus and his teachings. It does not refer to **sin** in general, because everyone is guilty of **sin**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sin of rejecting me and my teachings … sin of rejecting me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 23 u9u7 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 15 24 bd47 figs-doublenegatives εἰ τὰ ἔργα μὴ ἐποίησα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος ἐποίησεν, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν…δὲ 1 If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, they would have no sin, but If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Because I have done the works that no one else did among them, they have sin, and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) @@ -2078,7 +2078,7 @@ JHN 15 24 rnt4 grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ τὰ ἔργα μὴ JHN 15 24 v23s figs-metaphor ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν 1 they would have no sin See how you translated this phrase in [15:22](../15/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 15 24 z6we figs-ellipsis καὶ ἑωράκασιν 1 The object of the verb **seen** could be: (1) **the works** referred to earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “they have both seen the works” (2) Jesus and the **Father**, referred to at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “they have both seen me and my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 15 24 v6pt guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα μου 1 they have seen and hated both me and my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 15 25 x7g9 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 to fulfill the word that is written in their law Here, Jesus uses **word** figuratively to refer to a specific prophecy in the Old Testament. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the prophecy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 25 x7g9 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 to fulfill the word that is written in their law Here, Jesus uses **word** to refer to a specific prophecy in the Old Testament. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the prophecy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 25 s5wj writing-quotations ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ αὐτῶν γεγραμμένος 1 Here Jesus uses **the word that is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 35:19](../../psa/35/19.md) or [69:4](../../psa/69/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “the statement that has been written in their scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 15 25 rod8 figs-activepassive πληρωθῇ ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ αὐτῶν γεγραμμένος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they might fulfill the word that a prophet wrote in their law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 15 25 j2m2 figs-synecdoche τῷ νόμῳ 1 law Jesus is using the name of the first part of the Hebrew Scriptures, the **law**, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. See how you translated a similar expression in [10:34](../10/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -2086,12 +2086,12 @@ JHN 15 25 jhqg figs-quotemarks ἐμίσησάν με δωρεάν 1 law This se JHN 15 26 eexc figs-explicit ὁ Παράκλητος 1 See how you translated **Helper** in [14:16](../14/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 26 tpw6 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός…Πατρὸς 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 15 26 tzi9 figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the Spirit of truth See how you translated **the Spirit of Truth** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 15 27 ew2v figs-metonymy ἀρχῆς 1 the beginning Here Jesus uses **beginning** figuratively to refer to the first days of his ministry. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the very first days when I began teaching the people and doing miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 27 ew2v figs-metonymy ἀρχῆς 1 the beginning Here Jesus uses **beginning** to refer to the first days of his ministry. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the very first days when I began teaching the people and doing miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 16 intro wb8v 0 # John 16 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus promises that his disciples will be persecuted (15:18–16:4)
2. Jesus describes the work of the Holy Spirit (16:5–15)
3. Jesus says that he will return to his Father (16:16–28)
4. Jesus says that his disciples will soon abandon him (16:29–33)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Helper ([14:16](../14/16.md)) who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them. He is also the Spirit of Truth ([14:17](../14/17.md)) who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

### “The hour is coming”

Jesus used the words, “the hour is coming,” to begin prophecies about events that were about to occur. He is not referring to the 60 minute hour, but to a point in time when these prophecies will be fulfilled. “The hour” in which people would persecute his followers ([16:2](../16/02.md)) lasted for many years. However, “the hour” in which his disciples would scatter and leave him alone ([16:32](../16/32.md)) was less than sixty minutes long. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Simile

Jesus said that just as a woman is in pain when she gives birth to a baby, so also his followers would be sad when he died. But just as the woman is happy after the baby is born, so also his followers would be happy when Jesus became alive again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) JHN 16 1 pbc8 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus continues to speak to his disciples either at the end of their evening meal or after they have finished that meal and are walking to Gethsemane. It is unclear whether or not they left immediately after Jesus said “Let us go from here” at the end of the Chapter 14 ([John 14:31](../14/31.md)). JHN 16 1 hn4j 0 Connecting Statement: Verses 1–4 are part of the same topic Jesus began in [15:18](../15/18.md). He is speaking about the persecution that his disciples will experience. JHN 16 1 kz43 figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to what Jesus has just said in [15:18–25](../15/18.md) about the coming persecution of his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the warnings that you will be hated by everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 16 1 vui6 figs-explicit μὴ σκανδαλισθῆτε 1 you will not fall away Here, Jesus uses **fall away** figuratively to refer to no longer trusting in him or no longer being his disciple. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you might not stop trusting me” or “you might not stop being my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 16 1 vui6 figs-explicit μὴ σκανδαλισθῆτε 1 you will not fall away Here, Jesus uses **fall away** to refer to no longer trusting in him or no longer being his disciple. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you might not stop trusting me” or “you might not stop being my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 16 2 hhgj figs-metaphor ἀποσυναγώγους 1 the hour is coming when everyone who kills you will think that he is offering a service to God See how you translated a similar phrase in [9:22](../09/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 16 2 i79b figs-metonymy ἔρχεται ὥρα 1 the hour is coming when everyone who kills you will think that he is offering a service to God See how you translated this phrase in [4:21](../04/21.md) and see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to Chapter 4. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 16 2 xueq grammar-connect-words-phrases ἵνα πᾶς ὁ ἀποκτείνας ὑμᾶς 1 Here, **for** could indicate: (1) time, as in the UST. (2) an explanation of to what **an hour** refers. Alternate translation: “that everyone who kills you wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -2102,7 +2102,7 @@ JHN 16 4 dh5i figs-metonymy ἐξ ἀρχῆς 1 in the beginning See how you tr JHN 16 5 gbpt figs-explicit τὸν πέμψαντά με 1 Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 16 5 c542 figs-explicit καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐρωτᾷ 1 Here Jesus uses **and** to emphasize his surprise that they are not asking him where he is going, as they had done previously in [13:36](../13/36.md) and [14:5](../14/05.md). Use a natural form in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “but none of you are even asking” or “but how is it that none of you asks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 16 5 cq44 figs-quotesinquotes ἐρωτᾷ με, ποῦ ὑπάγεις 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “asks me where I am going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -JHN 16 6 zhlg figs-metaphor ἡ λύπη πεπλήρωκεν ὑμῶν τὴν καρδίαν 1 sadness has filled your heart Jesus speaks of **sadness** figuratively as if it were a thing that could fill someone. If this use of **sadness** would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your heart is very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 16 6 zhlg figs-metaphor ἡ λύπη πεπλήρωκεν ὑμῶν τὴν καρδίαν 1 sadness has filled your heart Jesus speaks of **sadness** as if it were a thing that could fill someone. If this use of **sadness** would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your heart is very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 16 6 kr4d figs-metaphor ἡ λύπη πεπλήρωκεν ὑμῶν τὴν καρδίαν 1 sadness has filled your heart See how you translated **heart** in [14:1](../14/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 16 7 g3ze figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν…μὴ ἀπέλθω, ὁ Παράκλητος οὐκ ἐλεύσεται πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 if I do not go away, the Comforter will not come to you If it would be more natural in your language, you can translate this double negative expression in a positive form. Alternate translation: “the Helper will come to you only if I go away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) JHN 16 7 d1zd Παράκλητος 1 Comforter See how you translated **Helper** in [14:26](../14/26.md). @@ -2138,7 +2138,7 @@ JHN 16 19 j7wv figs-rquestion περὶ τούτου ζητεῖτε μετ’ JHN 16 19 rwoq grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι εἶπον 1 The word **that** introduces a clause that explains to what the preceding **this** refers. Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “namely, that I said,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) JHN 16 19 ya90 μικρὸν καὶ οὐ θεωρεῖτέ με; καὶ πάλιν μικρὸν καὶ ὄψεσθέ με 1 See how you translated this statement in [verses 16](../16/16.md). JHN 16 20 jx6s figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly, I say to you Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -JHN 16 20 p9x1 figs-metonymy ὁ δὲ κόσμος χαρήσεται 1 but the world will be glad Here Jesus uses **world** figuratively to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 16 20 p9x1 figs-metonymy ὁ δὲ κόσμος χαρήσεται 1 but the world will be glad Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 16 20 p6v5 figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς λυπηθήσεσθε 1 but your sorrow will be turned into joy If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You will have grief” or “What happens will grieve you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 16 20 i94b figs-abstractnouns ἡ λύπη ὑμῶν εἰς χαρὰν γενήσεται 1 but your sorrow will be turned into joy If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sorrow** and **joy**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “you will change from being sorrowful to being joyful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 16 21 km17 figs-genericnoun ἡ γυνὴ ὅταν τίκτῃ, λύπην ἔχει, ὅτι ἦλθεν ἡ ὥρα αὐτῆς; ὅταν δὲ γεννήσῃ τὸ παιδίον, οὐκέτι μνημονεύει τῆς θλίψεως διὰ τὴν χαρὰν, ὅτι ἐγεννήθη ἄνθρωπος εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 but your sorrow will be turned into joy Jesus is speaking of women in general, not of one particular **woman**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “When women give birth, they have pain because their hour has come, but when they have given birth to their children, they no longer remember their suffering, because of the joy that men have been born into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) @@ -2172,43 +2172,43 @@ JHN 16 32 yza2 figs-activepassive σκορπισθῆτε 1 you will be scattere JHN 16 32 zjnx εἰς τὰ ἴδια 1 Alternate translation: “each of you to his own place” or “every one of you to his own place” JHN 16 32 k3br guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 the Father is with me **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 16 33 k6d6 figs-explicit ἵνα ἐν ἐμοὶ εἰρήνην ἔχητε 1 so that you will have peace in me If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **peace** in another way. Alternate translation: “so that you might experience a peaceful feeling in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 16 33 wraa figs-metaphor εἰρήνην ἔχητε…θλῖψιν ἔχετε 1 so that you will have peace in me Here, Jesus speaks figuratively of **peace** and **troubles** as if they were objects that someone can possess. If these uses of **peace** and **troubles** might confuse your readers, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “you might be peaceful … you experience troubles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 16 33 wraa figs-metaphor εἰρήνην ἔχητε…θλῖψιν ἔχετε 1 so that you will have peace in me Here, Jesus speaks of **peace** and **troubles** as if they were objects that someone can possess. If these uses of **peace** and **troubles** might confuse your readers, you could use different expressions. Alternate translation: “you might be peaceful … you experience troubles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 16 33 ysh6 figs-idiom ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 so that you will have peace in me Here, **in me** refers to being united with Jesus or having a close relationship with him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because of your relationship with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JHN 16 33 z7wj figs-metonymy ἐγὼ νενίκηκα τὸν κόσμον 1 I have conquered the world Here Jesus uses **world** figuratively to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 16 33 z7wj figs-metonymy ἐγὼ νενίκηκα τὸν κόσμον 1 I have conquered the world Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 intro nb2a 0 # John 17 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

This chapter is one long prayer that can be divided into three parts according to the topics of Jesus’ prayer requests:

1. Jesus prays for himself (17:1–5)
2. Jesus prays for his disciples (17:6–19)
3. Jesus prays for all Christians (17:20–26)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Glory

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, bright light that visually represents how great God is. When people see this light, they are afraid. In this chapter Jesus asks God to show his followers his true glory ([17:1](../17/01.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]])

### Jesus is eternal

Jesus existed before God created the world ([17:5](../17/05.md)). John wrote about this in [1:1](../01/01.md).

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Prayer

Jesus is God’s one and only Son ([3:16](../03/16.md)), so he could pray differently from the way other people pray. He used many words that might seem to be commands. Your translation should make Jesus sound like a son speaking with love and respect to his father and telling him what the father needs to do so that the father will be honored. JHN 17 1 uf8z 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus had been speaking to his disciples, but now he begins to pray to God. JHN 17 1 an1o figs-explicit ταῦτα ἐλάλησεν 1 Here, **these things** refers to everything that Jesus told his disciples in [chapters 13–16](../13/01.md). If this use of **these things** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “described what would happen to him and his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 17 1 b4pj figs-idiom ἐπάρας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 he lifted up his eyes to the heavens See how you translated this idiom in [6:5](../06/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 17 1 k7tb figs-explicit εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 heavens Here, **heaven** refers to the sky. The Jews believed that **heaven**, the place where God dwells, was located above the sky. If this use of **heaven** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “beyond the sky toward God in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 17 1 l8sa guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ…Υἱὸς 1 Father … Son **Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 17 1 jup7 figs-metonymy ἐλήλυθεν ἡ ὥρα 1 the hour has come Here, Jesus uses **hour** figuratively to refer to the time when Jesus would suffer and die. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the time for me to suffer and die has come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 17 1 jup7 figs-metonymy ἐλήλυθεν ἡ ὥρα 1 the hour has come Here, Jesus uses **hour** to refer to the time when Jesus would suffer and die. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the time for me to suffer and die has come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 1 ya24 figs-imperative δόξασόν 1 the hour has come **Glorify** here is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please glorify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) JHN 17 1 bk1m figs-123person σου τὸν Υἱόν…ὁ Υἱὸς 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 17 2 jzlt grammar-connect-logic-result καθὼς ἔδωκας αὐτῷ ἐξουσίαν πάσης σαρκός 1 Here, **since** indicates that this clause is the reason for the request given in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because you gave him authority over all flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 17 2 cpi0 figs-123person αὐτῷ…αὐτῷ…δώσῃ 1 all flesh Throughout this verse Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -JHN 17 2 vbt4 figs-metonymy πάσης σαρκός 1 all flesh Jesus is describing people figuratively by referring to something associated with them, the **flesh** that they are made of. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “over all human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 17 2 vbt4 figs-metonymy πάσης σαρκός 1 all flesh Jesus is describing people by referring to something associated with them, the **flesh** that they are made of. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “over all human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 3 i5pm αὕτη δέ ἐστιν ἡ αἰώνιος ζωὴ 1 all flesh The clause could mean: (1) the rest of the verse describes what **eternal life** is. Alternate translation: “Now this is what it means to have eternal life” (2) the rest of the verse describes the means by which one receives eternal life. Alternate translation: “Now this is how people live forever” JHN 17 3 zmsw figs-123person ὃν ἀπέστειλας, Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν 1 all flesh Jesus uses **the one whom you sent** and **Jesus Christ** to refer to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -JHN 17 4 h4hu figs-metonymy τὸ ἔργον…ὃ δέδωκάς μοι 1 the work that you have given me to do Here, Jesus uses **work** figuratively to refer to Jesus’ entire ministry while on the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ministry that you have given me here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 17 4 h4hu figs-metonymy τὸ ἔργον…ὃ δέδωκάς μοι 1 the work that you have given me to do Here, Jesus uses **work** to refer to Jesus’ entire ministry while on the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ministry that you have given me here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 5 k9ra figs-explicit δόξασόν με σύ, Πάτερ, παρὰ σεαυτῷ, τῇ δόξῃ ᾗ εἶχον…παρὰ σοί 1 Father, glorify me … with the glory that I had with you before the world was made Here, **with yourself** and **with you** refer to Jesus and God the **Father** being physically near to each other. If this use of **with** might be confusing to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Father, glorify me at your side with the glory that I had at your side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 17 5 g8at guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 17 5 ximp figs-imperative δόξασόν 1 Father Here, **glorify** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please glorify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) JHN 17 5 xhph figs-abstractnouns τῇ δόξῃ 1 Father If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with the glorious characteristics” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 17 5 s4p3 figs-activepassive πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κόσμον, εἶναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “before we made the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 17 6 vbn8 figs-metonymy ἐφανέρωσά σου τὸ ὄνομα 1 I revealed your name Jesus uses **name** figuratively to refer to God himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I revealed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 17 6 vbn8 figs-metonymy ἐφανέρωσά σου τὸ ὄνομα 1 I revealed your name Jesus uses **name** to refer to God himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I revealed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 6 hn8z figs-metonymy ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου 1 from the world See how you translated **world** in [1:29](../01/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 6 u8lc figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον σου τετήρηκαν 1 kept your word See how you translated a similar phrase in [8:51](../08/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 8 bzvc figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα 1 kept your word See how you translated **words** in [5:47](../05/47.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 17 9 ndb1 figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου 1 I do not pray for the world Here Jesus uses **world** figuratively to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 17 9 ndb1 figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου 1 I do not pray for the world Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 10 mql5 figs-activepassive δεδόξασμαι ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they glorify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 17 10 q0tm figs-explicit ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 This could mean: (1) **all things** are the means by which Jesus is glorified. Alternate translation: “by means of them” (2) Jesus is glorified **in all things**. Alternate translation: “within them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 17 11 viya figs-pastforfuture οὐκέτι εἰμὶ…πρὸς σὲ ἔρχομαι 1 Here Jesus uses **am** in the present tense to refer to something that will happen in the near future. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will no longer … I am about to come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) -JHN 17 11 bk2h figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ εἰσίν 1 in the world Here Jesus uses **world** figuratively to refer to both being on the earth and being among the people in the **world** who oppose God. If this use of **world** would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in this world with people who oppose you, but they are in this hostile world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 17 11 bk2h figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ εἰσίν 1 in the world Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to both being on the earth and being among the people in the **world** who oppose God. If this use of **world** would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in this world with people who oppose you, but they are in this hostile world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 11 kp1d guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 17 11 dvel figs-imperative τήρησον 1 Here, **keep** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “please keep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) JHN 17 11 yq9z figs-metonymy τήρησον αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου 1 keep them in your name that you have given me Here, **name** could refer to: (1) God’s power. Alternate translation: “keep them by your power” (2) God himself, as in [verse 6](../17/06.md). In this case, Jesus would be requesting that God keep his disciples united with God. Alternate translation: “keep them in unity with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 12 s5kw figs-metonymy ἐγὼ ἐτήρουν αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου 1 I kept them in your name See how you translated a similar phrase in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 17 12 a4s8 figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀπώλετο, εἰ μὴ ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 not one of them was destroyed, except for the son of destruction Here Jesus uses **perished** and **destruction** figuratively to refer to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If this use of these words might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not one of them died spiritually, except for the son of spiritual death” or “not one of them experienced spiritual death, except for the son of spiritual death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 17 12 a4s8 figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀπώλετο, εἰ μὴ ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 not one of them was destroyed, except for the son of destruction Here Jesus uses **perished** and **destruction** to refer to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If this use of these words might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not one of them died spiritually, except for the son of spiritual death” or “not one of them experienced spiritual death, except for the son of spiritual death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 17 12 buiv figs-pastforfuture οὐδεὶς ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀπώλετο, εἰ μὴ ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 not one of them was destroyed, except for the son of destruction Jesus uses the past tense **perished** to refer to eternal punishment as if it had already happened, even though **the son of destruction** had not yet **perished**. If this use of the past tense might confuse your readers, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “not one of them will perish, except for the son of destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 17 12 az2m figs-explicit ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 the son of destruction Here, **son of destruction** refers to Judas, the disciple who betrayed Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Judas, the son of destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 17 12 dkpa figs-idiom ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 the son of destruction Here, **son of** is an idiom used to describe what a person is like. The defining characteristic of Judas was that he would be destroyed because he betrayed Jesus. If this use of **son of** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one characterized by destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2219,7 +2219,7 @@ JHN 17 13 jp4v figs-activepassive ἵνα ἔχωσιν τὴν χαρὰν τ JHN 17 14 bc1y figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον σου 1 I have given them your word See how you translated **your word** in [verse 6](../17/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 14 qf43 figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος…ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου…ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου 1 the world … because they are not of the world … I am not of the world Here, **the world** refers to the people in **the world** who oppose God. If this use of **the world** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people who oppose you … from those who oppose you … I am not from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 14 wz9e figs-explicit οὐκ εἰσὶν ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, καθὼς ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου 1 The phrase **from the world** could refer to: (1) the place where the subject belongs. Alternate translation: “they do not belong to the world, just as I do not belong to the world” (2) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “they did not come from the world, just as I did not come from the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 17 15 hg22 figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου 1 the world Here Jesus uses **world** figuratively to refer to both being on the earth and being among the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated this use of **world** in [verse 11](../17/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 17 15 hg22 figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου 1 the world Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to both being on the earth and being among the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated this use of **world** in [verse 11](../17/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 15 s3vp figs-explicit τηρήσῃς αὐτοὺς ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 keep them from the evil one Here, **the evil one** refers to Satan. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you would keep them from Satan, the evil one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 17 16 pw1m figs-explicit ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου οὐκ εἰσὶν, καθὼς ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου 1 keep them from the evil one See how you translated **from the world** in [verse 14](../17/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 17 17 qtld figs-imperative ἁγίασον 1 Set them apart by the truth **Sanctify** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please sanctify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) @@ -2234,7 +2234,7 @@ JHN 17 21 jwiu figs-explicit ἵνα…ἵνα 1 The first **that** in this ver JHN 17 21 s8a1 figs-doublet σύ, Πάτερ, ἐν ἐμοὶ, κἀγὼ ἐν σοί 1 they will all be one, just as you, Father, are in me, and I am in you. May they also be in us These two phrases mean basically the same thing. See how you translated a similar phrase in [10:38](../10/38.md). Alternate translation: “you, Father, and I are completely joined together as one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 17 21 yt2w guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 17 21 v6i7 ἵνα ὁ κόσμος πιστεύῃ ὅτι σύ με ἀπέστειλας 1 Here, **so that** could indicate: (1) that what follows is the purpose for believers to be united to Jesus and God the Father, as in the UST. (2) that what follows is the result of believers being united to Jesus and God the Father. Alternate translation (with a comma preceding): “with the result that the world would believe that you have sent me” -JHN 17 21 nef9 figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 the world Here, **the world** is used figuratively to refer to all the people in **the world**. See how you translated **the world** in [1:29](../01/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 17 21 nef9 figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 the world Here, **the world** is used to refer to all the people in **the world**. See how you translated **the world** in [1:29](../01/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 22 p4mj figs-infostructure κἀγὼ τὴν, δόξαν ἣν δέδωκάς μοι, δέδωκα αὐτοῖς 1 The glory that you gave me, I have given to them If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “I have also given to them the glory that you gave to me” or “I have honored them just as you have honored me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) JHN 17 23 yznz figs-explicit ἐγὼ ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 that they may be brought to complete unity This verse explains the statement “they would be one, just as we are one,” which is in the previous verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I mean that I am in them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 17 23 fld5 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα ὦσιν τετελειωμένοι εἰς ἕν 1 that they may be brought to complete unity Here, **so that** indicates that this is the second purpose for Jesus giving the glory he received from God to those who believe in him, which he stated in the previous verse. If this use of **so that** might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly by repeating the idea from the previous verse and starting a new sentence. Alternate translation: “I have given them your glory so that they may be completely united” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) @@ -2249,7 +2249,7 @@ JHN 17 24 hz83 figs-metonymy κόσμου 1 Here, **world** refers to the unive JHN 17 25 ur9j guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ 1 Righteous Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 17 25 xpf5 figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος σε οὐκ ἔγνω 1 the world did not know you Here, **the world** refers to the people in **the world** who are opposed to God. Alternate translation: “those who are against you did not know you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 26 xpi3 figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομά 1 I made your name known to them Here, **name** refers to God himself. See how you translated this word in [verse 6](../17/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 17 26 gk2j figs-metaphor ἡ ἀγάπη ἣν ἠγάπησάς με, ἐν αὐτοῖς ᾖ 1 love … loved Here Jesus speaks of God’s **love** figuratively as if it were an object that could be inside a person. If this use of **love** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they may love others in the same way that you have loved me” or “the love with which you have loved me may be experienced by them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 17 26 gk2j figs-metaphor ἡ ἀγάπη ἣν ἠγάπησάς με, ἐν αὐτοῖς ᾖ 1 love … loved Here Jesus speaks of God’s **love** as if it were an object that could be inside a person. If this use of **love** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they may love others in the same way that you have loved me” or “the love with which you have loved me may be experienced by them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 17 26 ilzj figs-idiom κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 love … loved Here, Jesus uses the word **in** to express the close personal relationship between himself and those who believe in him. See how you translated a similar phrase in [10:38](../10/38.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 18 intro ltl2 0 # John 18 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Soldiers and guards arrest Jesus (18:1–11)
2. The priests question Jesus, and Peter denies Jesus (18:12–27)
3. Pilate questions Jesus (18:28–40)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### “It is not lawful for us to put any man to death”

The Roman government did not allow the Jews to kill criminals, so the Jews needed to ask Pilate, the governor, to kill him ([18:31](../18/31.md)).

### King of the Jews

When Pilate asked if Jesus were the King of the Jews ([18:33](../18/33.md)), he was asking if Jesus were claiming to be a political leader like King Herod, whom the Romans allowed to rule Judea. When he asked the crowd if he should release the King of the Jews ([18:39](../18/39.md)), he is mocking the Jews, because the Romans and Jews hated each other. He was also mocking Jesus, because he did not think that Jesus was a king at all. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) JHN 18 1 sq3t writing-background 0 General Information: [Verses 1–2](../18/01.md) give background information for the events that follow. Verse 1 says where the events took place. Verse 2 gives background information about Judas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -2275,7 +2275,7 @@ JHN 18 10 betq translate-names Σίμων…Πέτρος 1 See how you translat JHN 18 10 yq44 figs-explicit μάχαιραν 1 The word translated **sword** here refers to a small sword that is similar to a dagger or long knife. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “a dagger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 18 10 fe37 translate-names Μάλχος 1 Malchus **Malchus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 18 11 ghz6 figs-rquestion τὸ ποτήριον ὃ δέδωκέν μοι ὁ Πατὴρ, οὐ μὴ πίω αὐτό? 1 Should I not drink the cup that the Father has given me? **Jesus** is using the form of a question to add emphasis to his statement. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I should certainly drink the cup that the Father has given to me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 18 11 m4f3 figs-metaphor τὸ ποτήριον ὃ δέδωκέν μοι ὁ Πατὴρ, οὐ μὴ πίω αὐτό 1 the cup Here Jesus uses **cup** figuratively to refer to the sufferings he will soon experience as if they were a **cup** of bitter-tasting liquid that God would give him to **drink**. If this use of **cup** and **drink** would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “My suffering which the Father wants me to endure, should I certainly not endure it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 18 11 m4f3 figs-metaphor τὸ ποτήριον ὃ δέδωκέν μοι ὁ Πατὴρ, οὐ μὴ πίω αὐτό 1 the cup Here Jesus uses **cup** to refer to the sufferings he will soon experience as if they were a **cup** of bitter-tasting liquid that God would give him to **drink**. If this use of **cup** and **drink** would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “My suffering which the Father wants me to endure, should I certainly not endure it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 18 11 cjx7 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 18 12 cl3f figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 18 12 i6bz figs-explicit ἔδησαν αὐτὸν 1 seized Jesus and tied him up The soldiers **tied** Jesus’ hands together in order to prevent him from escaping. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “tied his hands to prevent him from escaping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2297,7 +2297,7 @@ JHN 18 18 hbw6 writing-background 0 In this verse John interrupts the main sto JHN 18 18 g8xj figs-infostructure ἵστήκεισαν δὲ οἱ δοῦλοι καὶ οἱ ὑπηρέται, ἀνθρακιὰν πεποιηκότες, ὅτι ψῦχος ἦν, καὶ ἐθερμαίνοντο 1 Now If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “Now because it was cold, the servants and the officers had made a charcoal fire and were standing there, warming themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) JHN 18 18 bbe9 figs-explicit οἱ δοῦλοι 1 Now the servants and the officers were standing there, and they had made a charcoal fire, for it was cold, and they were warming themselves Here, **the servants** refers to the personal **servants** of the high priest. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the servants of the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 18 19 e8h3 figs-explicit ὁ…ἀρχιερεὺς 1 The high priest According to [18:13](../18/13.md) the **high priest** here is Annas. He would later send Jesus to Caiaphas in [verse 24](../18/24.md). If this use of **high priest** might confuse your readers, you could state who the person is explicitly. Alternate translation: “Annas, the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 18 20 h2kj figs-metonymy τῷ κόσμῳ 1 I have spoken openly to the world Here Jesus uses **the world** figuratively to refer to all of the people in the world. If this use of **world** would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 18 20 h2kj figs-metonymy τῷ κόσμῳ 1 I have spoken openly to the world Here Jesus uses **the world** to refer to all of the people in the world. If this use of **world** would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 18 20 ltlp figs-hyperbole ἐγὼ παρρησίᾳ λελάληκα τῷ κόσμῳ 1 Here, **to the world** is an exaggeration that Jesus uses to emphasize that he spoke publicly. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows emphasis. Alternate translation: “I have spoken openly to the people” or “I have spoken openly for everyone to hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) JHN 18 20 s4k6 figs-genericnoun ἐν συναγωγῇ 1 Jesus is speaking of synagogues in general, not of one particular **synagogue**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “in synagogues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) JHN 18 20 vcv3 figs-hyperbole ὅπου πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι συνέρχονται 1 where all the Jews come together Here, **all the Jews** is an exaggeration that Jesus uses to emphasize that Jesus spoke where many Jewish people could hear him. If this would confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows emphasis. Alternate translation: “where so many Jews come together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -2323,7 +2323,7 @@ JHN 18 28 fyx3 figs-explicit εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον 1 The **governo JHN 18 28 v6e4 writing-background ἦν δὲ πρωΐ. καὶ αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον, ἵνα μὴ μιανθῶσιν, ἀλλὰ φάγωσιν τὸ Πάσχα 1 In this sentence John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about why the Jewish people with Jesus did not enter the **governor’s palace**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 18 28 h3vx figs-doublenegatives αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον, ἵνα μὴ μιανθῶσιν, ἀλλὰ φάγωσιν τὸ Πάσχα 1 they did not enter the government headquarters so that they would not be defiled If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “they remained outside the governor’s palace so that they would remain ceremonially clean, and might eat the Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) JHN 18 28 f47s figs-explicit αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον, ἵνα μὴ μιανθῶσιν, ἀλλὰ φάγωσιν τὸ Πάσχα 1 Pilate, the Roman governor, was not a Jew. The Jewish leaders believed that they would become ceremonially unclean if they entered the house of someone who was not a Jew. If they became ceremonially unclean, then they would not be allowed to celebrate the Passover festival. Therefore, the Jewish leaders did not enter the governor’s palace. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain this in the simplest way possible. Alternate translation: “they themselves did not enter into the governor’s palace because the governor was a Gentile. They believed that entering a Gentile’s home would defile them, so that they would not be allowed to eat the Passover.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 18 28 bj1x figs-metonymy τὸ Πάσχα 1 John is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer figuratively to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 18 28 bj1x figs-metonymy τὸ Πάσχα 1 John is using the name of this part of the festival, **Passover**, to refer to the meal that people shared on that occasion. If your readers might not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Passover meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 18 29 g7jo translate-names ὁ Πειλᾶτος 1 **Pilate** is the name of a man. He was the Roman governor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 18 29 c9aj figs-abstractnouns τίνα κατηγορίαν φέρετε κατὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **accusation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “What crime do you accuse this man of committing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 18 30 j9w3 figs-explicit οὗτος 1 Here the Jewish leaders say **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus without saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2339,7 +2339,7 @@ JHN 18 34 liov figs-explicit ἀπὸ σεαυτοῦ 1 Here, **from** indicate JHN 18 35 kfq5 figs-rquestion μήτι ἐγὼ Ἰουδαῖός εἰμι? 1 I am not a Jew, am I? **Pilate** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he was not interested in Jewish religious disagreements. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Well I am certainly not a Jew, and I have no interest in these matters!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 18 35 en38 figs-metonymy τὸ ἔθνος τὸ σὸν 1 Your own people Here, **nation** refers to the people who were part of the Jewish **nation**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 18 36 wsd9 figs-explicit ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου -1 My kingdom is not of this world See how you translated **from this world** in [8:23](../08/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 18 36 gq19 figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου τούτου…τοῦ κόσμου τούτου…ἐντεῦθεν 1 My kingdom is not of this world In this verse, Jesus uses **this world** and **here** figuratively to refer to everything in the universe that has been corrupted by sin and is hostile to God. See how you translated a similar use of **this world** in [8:23](../08/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 18 36 gq19 figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου τούτου…τοῦ κόσμου τούτου…ἐντεῦθεν 1 My kingdom is not of this world In this verse, Jesus uses **this world** and **here** to refer to everything in the universe that has been corrupted by sin and is hostile to God. See how you translated a similar use of **this world** in [8:23](../08/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 18 36 bf3i grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου ἦν ἡ βασιλεία ἡ ἐμή, οἱ ὑπηρέται οἱ ἐμοὶ ἠγωνίζοντο ἄν, ἵνα μὴ παραδοθῶ τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 My kingdom is not of this world Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he already knows that the condition is not true. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If my kingdom were from this world, but it is not, my servants would fight so that I would not be handed over to the Jews, but they do not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) JHN 18 36 s2lq figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ παραδοθῶ τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 so that I would not be given over to the Jews If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that someone would not have handed me over to the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 18 36 pu8j figs-synecdoche τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -2349,12 +2349,12 @@ JHN 18 37 ug7i figs-explicit τὸν κόσμον 1 I have come into the world H JHN 18 37 gl3k figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 1 bear witness to the truth Here, **truth** refers to what Jesus reveals about God, which would include his plan for forgiving sinful people through Jesus’ death on the cross. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to the true things about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 18 37 ltn9 figs-idiom ὁ ὢν ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας 1 who belongs to the truth This phrase is an idiom that refers to someone who believes the **truth** about God. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who believes the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 18 37 b8gv figs-metaphor ἀκούει 1 who belongs to the truth Here, **hears** means to listen to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated this word in [8:43](../08/43.md). Alternate translation: “heeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 18 37 fa97 figs-synecdoche μου τῆς φωνῆς 1 my voice Jesus uses **voice** figuratively to refer to what Jesus says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the things I say” or “to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +JHN 18 37 fa97 figs-synecdoche μου τῆς φωνῆς 1 my voice Jesus uses **voice** to refer to what Jesus says. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the things I say” or “to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 18 38 ygns figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 18 38 zbm5 figs-rquestion τί ἐστιν ἀλήθεια? 1 What is truth? **Pilate** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he does not believe anyone really knows what **truth** is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No one can know the truth!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 18 38 lcrg figs-abstractnouns ἀλήθεια 1 What is truth? Here, **truth** refers to any true information. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “What is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 18 38 rma7 figs-synecdoche τοὺς Ἰουδαίους 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -JHN 18 38 h1b8 figs-metaphor ἐγὼ οὐδεμίαν αἰτίαν εὑρίσκω ἐν αὐτῷ 1 **Pilate** speaks figuratively of **guilt** as if it were an object that can be inside a person. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “I find no evidence that he is guilty of any crime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 18 38 h1b8 figs-metaphor ἐγὼ οὐδεμίαν αἰτίαν εὑρίσκω ἐν αὐτῷ 1 **Pilate** speaks of **guilt** as if it were an object that can be inside a person. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “I find no evidence that he is guilty of any crime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 18 39 nhqn figs-explicit ἕνα ἀπολύσω ὑμῖν 1 Pilate implies that he would **release** a prisoner when the Jewish leaders asked him to do so. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would release one prisoner to you at your request” or “I would release one prisoner to you when you asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 18 39 fm16 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ Πάσχα 1 Here, **the Passover** refers to the entire **Passover** festival. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the Passover festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 18 40 xdxz writing-quotations ἐκραύγασαν…πάλιν λέγοντες 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “they cried out again and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) @@ -2389,10 +2389,10 @@ JHN 19 9 lb11 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense JHN 19 10 wcm8 figs-rquestion ἐμοὶ οὐ λαλεῖς? 1 Are you not speaking to me? **Pilate** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize his surprise that Jesus does not answer his question. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I cannot believe you are refusing to speak to me!” or “Answer me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 19 10 iap3 figs-rquestion οὐκ οἶδας ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχω ἀπολῦσαί σε, καὶ ἐξουσίαν ἔχω σταυρῶσαί σε? 1 Do you not know that I have power to release you, and power to crucify you? **Pilate** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should know that I am able to release you or to order my soldiers to crucify you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 19 11 x2as figs-doublenegatives οὐκ εἶχες ἐξουσίαν κατ’ ἐμοῦ οὐδεμίαν, εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν 1 You do not have any power over me except for what has been given to you from above If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You only have authority over me because that authority has been given to you from above” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -JHN 19 11 fxu9 figs-metaphor εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν 1 Here, **above** is used figuratively to refer to God who dwells in heaven **above**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 19 11 fxu9 figs-metaphor εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν 1 Here, **above** is used to refer to God who dwells in heaven **above**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 19 11 i7nu figs-activepassive εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “except for what God has given to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 19 11 vc79 figs-ellipsis μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει 1 gave me over Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has a greater sin than your sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -JHN 19 11 kbrx figs-metaphor μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει 1 gave me over Jesus speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess in varying amounts. If this use of **sin** might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are more sinful” or “has committed worse sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 19 11 kbrx figs-metaphor μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει 1 gave me over Jesus speaks of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess in varying amounts. If this use of **sin** might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are more sinful” or “has committed worse sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 19 12 a39p figs-explicit ἐκ τούτου 1 At this answer Here, **this** refers to Jesus’ answer. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Pilate heard Jesus’ answer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 19 12 q1vq figs-synecdoche οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 19 12 r8va figs-explicit τοῦτον 1 The Jewish leaders say **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus and to avoid saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2447,10 +2447,10 @@ JHN 19 25 b38l translate-names Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνή 1 **Mary** is JHN 19 26 gkf1 figs-explicit τὸν μαθητὴν…ὃν ἠγάπα 1 the disciple whom he loved See how you translated a similar phrase in [13:23](./13/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 19 26 mva3 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 19 26 cxlv γύναι 1 Woman, see, your son See how you translated **Woman** in [2:4](../02/04.md). -JHN 19 26 t7tc figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ὁ υἱός σου 1 Woman, see, your son Here, Jesus uses **son** figuratively to indicate that he wants his disciple, John, to be like a **son** to his mother. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “here is the man who will act like a son to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 19 26 t7tc figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ὁ υἱός σου 1 Woman, see, your son Here, Jesus uses **son** to indicate that he wants his disciple, John, to be like a **son** to his mother. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “here is the man who will act like a son to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 19 27 a8x3 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 See, your mother Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 19 27 iz8j figs-explicit τῷ μαθητῇ…ἔλαβεν ὁ μαθητὴς αὐτὴν εἰς τὰ ἴδια 1 See, your mother In this verse, **the disciple** and **his** refer to John, who calls himself “the disciple whom he loved” in the previous verse and who is the author of this Gospel. If this would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the disciple whom Jesus loved … that disciple took her into his own home” or “to me … I took her into my own home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 19 27 qc7d figs-metaphor ἴδε, ἡ μήτηρ σου 1 See, your mother Here, Jesus uses **mother** figuratively to indicate that he wants his **mother** to be like a **mother** to his disciple, John. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “here is the woman who will be like a mother to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 19 27 qc7d figs-metaphor ἴδε, ἡ μήτηρ σου 1 See, your mother Here, Jesus uses **mother** to indicate that he wants his **mother** to be like a **mother** to his disciple, John. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “here is the woman who will be like a mother to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 19 27 q615 figs-metonymy ἀπ’ ἐκείνης τῆς ὥρας 1 From that hour Here, **hour** refers to a point in time. It does not refer to a 60-minute length of time. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 19 28 uynk writing-newevent μετὰ τοῦτο 1 knowing that everything was now completed **After this** introduces a new event that happened soon after the events the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Soon afterward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 19 28 crd3 figs-activepassive ἤδη πάντα τετέλεσται 1 knowing that everything was now completed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he had already completed all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2634,7 +2634,7 @@ JHN 21 3 p8f0 figs-go ἐρχόμεθα 1 Your language may state “going” r JHN 21 3 l2s6 figs-explicit ἐνέβησαν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον 1 Here, **got in a boat** implies that they also took the boat out on the Sea of Tiberias in order to fish. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “got into a boat and went fishing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 21 4 j7jx figs-pastforfuture ἐστιν 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 21 5 jrth figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) -JHN 21 5 wgd7 figs-metaphor παιδία 1 Here Jesus uses the word **Children** figuratively as an affectionate way to address his disciples. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My dear friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 21 5 wgd7 figs-metaphor παιδία 1 Here Jesus uses the word **Children** as an affectionate way to address his disciples. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My dear friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 21 5 o62p figs-explicit μή τι προσφάγιον ἔχετε? 1 Jesus asks this question in a way that expects a negative response. He knows that the disciples did not catch any fish. If your language has a question form that assumes a negative response, you should use it here. Alternate translation: “you were not able to get any fish to eat, were you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 21 6 l2jd figs-explicit εὑρήσετε 1 you will find some Here, **some** refers to fish. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will find some fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 21 7 u5c3 figs-explicit ὁ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος ὃν ἠγάπα ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 loved This phrase refers to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. See the discussion of this phrase in Part 1 of the Introduction to the Gospel of John and the General Notes for this chapter. See also how you translated similar phrases in [13:23](../13/23.md), [18:15](../18/15.md), and [20:2](../20/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2661,7 +2661,7 @@ JHN 21 14 y94q figs-idiom ἐγερθεὶς ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 the third tim JHN 21 15 avdf figs-pastforfuture λέγει…λέγει…λέγει 1 do you love me Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 21 15 xwxd figs-explicit ἀγαπᾷς με…φιλῶ σε 1 the third time The two occurrences of **love** in this verse are two different words in the original language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this in your translation. See the discussion of this concept in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “do you love me with great esteem … I love you with affection” or “do you love me deeply… I love you like a friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 21 15 t1uj figs-explicit πλέον τούτων 1 Here, **these** could refer to: (1) the other disciples who were there with Jesus and Peter. This meaning would indicate Jesus is asking Peter if he loves Jesus more than the other disciples love him. Alternate translation: “more than these disciples love me” (2) the fish, boat, and other equipment that were used for catching fish, which was Peter’s former job. Alternate translation: “more than these fishing tools” or “more than your former job” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 21 15 qja3 figs-metaphor βόσκε τὰ ἀρνία μου 1 Feed my lambs Jesus uses **Feed my lambs** figuratively to refer to providing for the spiritual needs of people who trust in Jesus. Here Jesus is commanding Peter to take care of other believers in the same way that Jesus took care of them while he was with them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “Take care of the people who believe in me like a shepherd feeds lambs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 21 15 qja3 figs-metaphor βόσκε τὰ ἀρνία μου 1 Feed my lambs Jesus uses **Feed my lambs** to refer to providing for the spiritual needs of people who trust in Jesus. Here Jesus is commanding Peter to take care of other believers in the same way that Jesus took care of them while he was with them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “Take care of the people who believe in me like a shepherd feeds lambs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 21 16 szk8 figs-pastforfuture λέγει…λέγει…λέγει 1 do you love me Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 21 16 p9vr translate-ordinal δεύτερον 1 do you love me If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “time number 2.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) JHN 21 16 rfew figs-explicit ἀγαπᾷς με…φιλῶ σε 1 do you love me The two occurrences of **love** in this verse are two different words in the original language. See how you translated these phrases in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2672,7 +2672,7 @@ JHN 21 17 kmch figs-explicit φιλεῖς με…φιλεῖς με…φιλῶ JHN 21 17 ayds figs-quotations εἶπεν αὐτῷ τὸ τρίτον, φιλεῖς με 1 He said to him a third time If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he asked him the third time if he loved him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) JHN 21 17 p8aa figs-metaphor βόσκε τὰ προβάτια μου 1 Feed my sheep This sentence has the same meaning as “Feed my lambs” in verse 15 and “Take care of my sheep” in the previous verse. See how you translated those similar sentences in the previous two verses. Alternate translation: “Take care of the people who believe in me like a shepherd feeds sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 21 18 sqb7 figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -JHN 21 18 bqps figs-metonymy ἐζώννυες σεαυτὸν…ζώσει σε 1 Although **gird** means to put on a belt, Jesus uses it figuratively in this verse to refer to putting on clothes. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you used to dress yourself … will dress you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 21 18 bqps figs-metonymy ἐζώννυες σεαυτὸν…ζώσει σε 1 Although **gird** means to put on a belt, Jesus uses it in this verse to refer to putting on clothes. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you used to dress yourself … will dress you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 21 18 qltf figs-explicit ἐκτενεῖς τὰς χεῖράς σου 1 Truly, truly Here, **stretch out** means to extend one’s hands away from one’s sides. This describes the posture of someone who is being crucified. It does not mean that the **hands** themselves stretch. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you will extend your hands out from your sides” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 21 19 ys3m writing-background τοῦτο δὲ εἶπεν σημαίνων ποίῳ θανάτῳ δοξάσει τὸν Θεόν 1 Now **Now** here indicates that in this sentence John is giving background information in order to explain what Jesus said in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 21 19 kpf6 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) @@ -2690,7 +2690,7 @@ JHN 21 22 tef8 figs-explicit ἔρχομαι 1 I come Jesus uses **come** here t JHN 21 22 tf23 figs-rquestion τί πρὸς σέ? 1 what is that to you? **Jesus** is using a rhetorical question here to mildly rebuke Peter. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “that has nothing to do with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 21 22 dvts figs-idiom μοι ἀκολούθει 1 See how you translated this sentence in [1:43](../01/43.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 21 23 wmzo figs-metonymy οὗτος ὁ λόγος 1 Here, **this word** refers to what **the brothers** say about John’s future in the next clause. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the following report about John’s future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 21 23 np23 figs-metaphor ἐξῆλθεν…οὗτος ὁ λόγος 1 John uses **spread** figuratively to refer to **this word** being repeated among the believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this word was repeated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 21 23 np23 figs-metaphor ἐξῆλθεν…οὗτος ὁ λόγος 1 John uses **spread** to refer to **this word** being repeated among the believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this word was repeated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 21 23 c2cr figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Although the term **brothers** is masculine, John is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JHN 21 23 chsq figs-explicit ὁ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος 1 Here, **that disciple** refers to the apostle John. If this might confuse your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 21 23 wb7e figs-pastforfuture οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει…ὅτι οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει 1 the brothers John is using the present tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. If this might confuse your readers, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “will not die … that he will not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 8515116a9c..2c28e4ecc9 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 3 1 r5w5 figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ὡς σαρκίνοις, ὡς νηπίοις 1 fleshly people Here Paul leaves out some words that might be required in your language to make a complete thought. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the needed words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but I spoke to you as to fleshly; I spoke to you as to infants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 3 1 ja6t figs-metaphor νηπίοις ἐν Χριστῷ 1 as to little children in Christ Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were **infants**. He wants the Corinthians to think about how **infants** are immature, lack knowledge, and are unable to understand most things. By calling the Corinthians **infants in Christ**, he means that in their relationship with Jesus, they are immature, have little knowledge, and are unable to understand very much. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul calls the Corinthians **infants** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to beginners in Christ” or “to those who could understand very little about their faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 3 1 m588 figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains in what area of their lives they were like **infants**. They acted like **infants** in their relationship with Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **in Christ**by referring to their “faith” in **Christ** or their “relationship” with **Christ**. Alternate translation: “in their faith in Christ” or “in their relationship with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 3 2 vg2v figs-metaphor γάλα ὑμᾶς ἐπότισα, οὐ βρῶμα 1 I fed you milk, not solid food Paul is figuratively using **milk**, the food of “infants" (see [3:1](../03/01.md)), which is easy to digest, to represent things that are easy to understand. Paul is using **solid food**, which is harder to digest, to represent things that are harder to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I had to let you crawl, not walk” or “I taught you things that are easy to understand, not things that are hard to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 3 2 vg2v figs-metaphor γάλα ὑμᾶς ἐπότισα, οὐ βρῶμα 1 I fed you milk, not solid food Paul is using **milk**, the food of “infants" (see [3:1](../03/01.md)), which is easy to digest, to represent things that are easy to understand. Paul is using **solid food**, which is harder to digest, to represent things that are harder to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I had to let you crawl, not walk” or “I taught you things that are easy to understand, not things that are hard to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 3 2 fujt figs-ellipsis οὐ βρῶμα 1 Here Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If your language needs these words, you could add a phrase such as “to eat.” Alternate translation: “not solid food to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 3 2 d2x5 figs-ellipsis οὔπω…ἐδύνασθε…οὐδὲ νῦν δύνασθε 1 Here Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If your language needs these words, you could add them here, supplying the idea from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “you were not yet able to eat solid food … even now, you are not able to eat solid food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 3 2 i3r5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, **Indeed** functions to contrast the time when Paul visited the Corinthians with the time when Paul is writing this letter. He speaks of these two different times to say that the Corinthians could not to eat the **solid food** at either time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Indeed** with a word or phrase that contrasts two times or a word that introduces additional information. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -544,12 +544,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 4 19 hr6o figs-go ἐλεύσομαι…πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “I will arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) 1CO 4 19 eyq3 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν ὁ Κύριος θελήσῃ 1 Here Paul says that he will only visit the Corinthians **if the Lord wills**. He is not sure whether the Lord will “will” or not. Use a form in your language that indicates a true hypothetical. Alternate translation: “only if the Lord wills, of course” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 4 19 tdbk figs-explicit τὸν λόγον…τὴν δύναμιν 1 The contrast between **word** and **power** was well known in Paul’s culture. The contrast states that people can say many things, but they cannot always do what they say they can. If your language has a way to express this contrast between “talk” and “action,” you could use it here. Alternate translation: “the talk … their deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 4 19 kbp1 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῶν πεφυσιωμένων 1 Here, **word** figuratively represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what these who have been puffed up say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 4 19 kbp1 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῶν πεφυσιωμένων 1 Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what these who have been puffed up say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 4 19 fz8n figs-activepassive τῶν πεφυσιωμένων 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the people “puff” themselves up. Alternate translation: “of these people who have puffed themselves up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 4 19 m92u figs-abstractnouns τὴν δύναμιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **power**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “how powerful they are” or “their powerful deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 4 20 iucw figs-metaphor οὐ…ἐν λόγῳ ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀλλ’ ἐν δυνάμει 1 Here Paul speaks as if **the kingdom of God** exists **in**, not **word**, but **power**. By this, he means that **the kingdom of God** does not consist in what people say but in what they do. To say it another way, **word**, or what people say, by itself does not make people part of God’s kingdom. Rather, it takes God’s **power** working for and through people to make them part of God’s kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God consists not in word but in power” or “the kingdom of God is not about word but about power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 4 20 shgb figs-explicit ἐν λόγῳ…ἀλλ’ ἐν δυνάμει 1 The contrast between **word** and **power** was well-known in Paul’s culture. The contrast states that people can say many things, but they cannot always do what they say they can do. If your language has a way to express this contrast between “talk” and “action,” you could use it here. Alternate translation: “not in talk but in deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 4 20 gfhp figs-metonymy λόγῳ 1 Here, **word** figuratively represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what people say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 4 20 gfhp figs-metonymy λόγῳ 1 Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what people say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 4 20 wzpo figs-abstractnouns δυνάμει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **power**, you can express the idea another way. Alternate translation: “powerful deeds” or “what people powerfully do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 4 21 ix5g figs-rquestion τί θέλετε? 1 What do you want? Paul asks the Corinthians **What** they **want** because he wants them to realize that their behavior will show him how to respond to them. He does not want the Corinthians to tell him all their desires. Rather, he presents two options in the rest of the verse, and the question **What do you want?** shows the Corinthians that they can choose between those two options by listening to Paul or choosing not to listen to him. If your language does not use a question to express this idea, you can translate the question in statement form. Alternate translation: “Depending on what you do, I will behave towards you in one of two ways.” or “How you respond to me will tell me how to respond to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 4 21 wv61 figs-rquestion ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ἢ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος? 1 Shall I come to you with a rod or with love and in a spirit of gentleness? Here Paul uses a question to present the two options for how he could act toward the Corinthians when he “comes” to them. He asks a question for the same reason he asked the first question in this verse. He wants them to realize that how they choose to respond to him will dictate how he will act when he visits. If they do not listen to him, he will **come with a rod**. If they do listen, he will come **with love and a spirit of gentleness**. If your language does not use a question to express this idea, you can translate the question in statement form. Alternate translation: “I will either come to you with a rod or with love and a spirit of gentleness.” or “If you do not listen, I will come to you with a rod. If you do listen, I will come to you with love and a spirit of gentleness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1042,7 +1042,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 8 4 tx5b figs-explicit εἰ μὴ εἷς 1 Here Paul does not directly quote from the Old Testament, but he uses words that would make any reader who is familiar with the Old Testament think about [Deuteronomy 6:4](../deu/06/04.md), where it is written that “the Lord is one.” If your readers would not make this connection, you could include a footnote or a brief reference to Deuteronomy. Alternate translation: “except one, as Moses wrote in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 8 5 s77m grammar-connect-condition-contrary καὶ…εἴπερ 1 so-called gods Here, **even if** introduces a possibility that Paul does not believe to be true. In other words, Paul does not think that there are **many gods** and **many lords**. He does think that people speak about **many gods** and **many lords**. Thus, his main point is that, no matter how many **gods** and **lords** other people talk about, believers only acknowledge one God and one Lord ([8:6](../08/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **even if** with a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “although it might be that” or “while some people claim that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) 1CO 8 5 sl8j εἰσὶν λεγόμενοι θεοὶ 1 so-called gods Alternate translation: “people name many ‘gods’” -1CO 8 5 x4ob figs-merism θεοὶ, εἴτε ἐν οὐρανῷ εἴτε ἐπὶ γῆς 1 so-called gods Paul speaks figuratively, using **heaven** and **earth** in order to include them and everything in between. By speaking in this way, he includes every place that God created. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “gods in all parts of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +1CO 8 5 x4ob figs-merism θεοὶ, εἴτε ἐν οὐρανῷ εἴτε ἐπὶ γῆς 1 so-called gods Paul speaks, using **heaven** and **earth** in order to include them and everything in between. By speaking in this way, he includes every place that God created. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “gods in all parts of creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 1CO 8 5 l7ib figs-irony θεοὶ πολλοὶ καὶ κύριοι πολλοί 1 many “gods” and many “lords.” Here Paul acknowledges that there are **many “gods”** and **“lords”**. He implies that **so-called** from earlier in the verse also applies here, so the ULT has put quotation marks around **gods** and **lords** to indicate that these are the names people use. Paul himself does not believe that what people call **gods** and **lords** really are those things; rather, [10:20–21](../10/20.md) suggests that Paul thinks these **gods** and **lords** are actually demons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what Paul means by **“gods”** and **“lords”** with a form that indicates that Paul is speaking from someone else’s perspective. Alternate translation: “many so-called gods and many so-called lords” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) 1CO 8 6 y6hq figs-explicit ἡμῖν εἷς Θεὸς 1 Yet for us there is only one God In this verse, Paul does not directly quote from the Old Testament, but he uses words that would make any reader who is familiar with the Old Testament think about [Deuteronomy 6:4](../deu/06/04.md), just like he did in [8:4](../08/04.md). The Old Testament passage says, “The Lord is our God, the Lord is one.” If your readers would not make this connection, you could include a footnote or a brief reference to Deuteronomy. Alternate translation: “we accept from the Scriptures that there is one God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 8 6 sv67 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 Yet for us there is only one God **Father** is an important title that describes one person in the Trinity. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “that is, the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -1094,7 +1094,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 8 12 o0w5 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 your knowledge Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a non=gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “your brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 8 12 ti84 figs-metaphor τύπτοντες αὐτῶν τὴν συνείδησιν ἀσθενοῦσαν 1 your knowledge Here Paul speaks as if **consciences** were body parts that could be wounded. By speaking in this way, he emphasizes that the Corinthians who have knowledge are hurting the **weak consciences** of other believers as surely as if they had wounded their arms or bodies. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **wounding their weak consciences** by clarifying that Paul means that the Corinthians who have knowledge are hurting **weak consciences** or making the **weak consciences** feel guilty. Alternate translation: “hurting their weak consciences” or “making their weak consciences feel guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 8 12 x857 figs-metaphor τὴν συνείδησιν ἀσθενοῦσαν 1 your knowledge Here, **weak** identifies **consciences** that easily lead people to feel guilty. **Weak consciences** condemn some things that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “sensitive consciences” or “consciences, which often condemn them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 8 13 i8tb figs-personification βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου 1 Therefore Here, **food** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could cause someone **to stumble**. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that the **food** is the key issue that leads to “stumbling.” If this might be confusing for your readers, you could clarify that the person who eats the food causes someone **to stumble**. Alternate translation: “how I eat causes my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1CO 8 13 i8tb figs-personification βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου 1 Therefore Here, **food** is spoken of as though it were a person who could cause someone **to stumble**. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that the **food** is the key issue that leads to “stumbling.” If this might be confusing for your readers, you could clarify that the person who eats the food causes someone **to stumble**. Alternate translation: “how I eat causes my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 8 13 seua figs-123person εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου, οὐ μὴ φάγω κρέα εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 Therefore Here Paul uses the first-person singular in order to use himself as an example for the Corinthians to follow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that this is why Paul uses the first person by clarifying that Paul is offering himself as an example. Alternate translation: “if food causes my brother to stumble, I, for one, will certainly not ever eat meat” or “take me as an example: if food causes my brother to stumble, I will certainly not ever eat meat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 8 13 vf92 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου 1 if food causes to stumble Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “in cases where” or “since.” Alternate translation: “because food causes my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 8 13 eyrr figs-gendernotations τὸν ἀδελφόν -1 Therefore Although **brother** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brother** with a nongendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brother or sister … brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -1281,7 +1281,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 1 n16b figs-go διὰ…διῆλθον 1 passed through the sea Here Paul is speaking about how God parted a sea and the Israelites **passed through** that sea without getting wet. Use a word or phrase that refers to going through an area to get to the other side. Alternate translation: “went through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) 1CO 10 2 q15x figs-activepassive πάντες εἰς τὸν Μωϋσῆν ἐβαπτίσαντο 1 All were baptized into Moses If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **baptized** rather than focusing on the person doing the “baptizing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” or an unknown person does it. Alternate translation: “they all experienced baptism into Moses” or “God baptized them all into Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 2 f7cq figs-idiom πάντες εἰς τὸν Μωϋσῆν ἐβαπτίσαντο 1 All were baptized into Moses Here, **baptized into** identifies the person with whom one is united in baptism. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **baptized into** by clarifying the idea by using language of union or relationship. Alternate translation: “they all were baptized so that they followed Moses” or “they all were baptized into relationship with Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 10 2 d4ho figs-metaphor πάντες εἰς τὸν Μωϋσῆν ἐβαπτίσαντο 1 All were baptized into Moses Here Paul speaks as if the Israelites had been **baptized**, just like believers in Jesus are **baptized**. By this, he does not mean that the Israelites had a different savior, Moses. Rather, he wants to connect the Israelites and the Corinthians, and one way to do that is to connect their leaders (**Moses** and Jesus). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **baptized into Moses**by using an analogy or indicating that Paul is speaking figuratively. Since Paul’s point is to connect the ideas in this verse to “baptism into Jesus,” preserve the metaphor here. Alternate translation: “they all were baptized, so to speak, into Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 10 2 d4ho figs-metaphor πάντες εἰς τὸν Μωϋσῆν ἐβαπτίσαντο 1 All were baptized into Moses Here Paul speaks as if the Israelites had been **baptized**, just like believers in Jesus are **baptized**. By this, he does not mean that the Israelites had a different savior, Moses. Rather, he wants to connect the Israelites and the Corinthians, and one way to do that is to connect their leaders (**Moses** and Jesus). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **baptized into Moses**by using an analogy or indicating that Paul is speaking. Since Paul’s point is to connect the ideas in this verse to “baptism into Jesus,” preserve the metaphor here. Alternate translation: “they all were baptized, so to speak, into Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 2 isfd translate-names τὸν Μωϋσῆν 1 All were baptized into Moses **Moses** is the name of a man. He is the man whom God used to lead the Israelites out of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1CO 10 2 y72i figs-explicit ἐν τῇ νεφέλῃ, καὶ ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ 1 in the cloud For the significance of the **cloud** and the **sea**, see the notes on the previous verse. God led the Israelites with the cloud, and he led them through the sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 3 la48 figs-explicit πάντες τὸ αὐτὸ πνευματικὸν βρῶμα ἔφαγον 1 in the cloud In this verse, Paul refers to how God provided the Israelites with **spiritual food** while they were traveling through the desert. This food was called “manna.” For the story, see [Exodus 16](../exo/16/01.md). While Paul does not explicitly state this, it is clear that he is comparing the “manna” to the bread in the Lord’s Supper, just as he compared passing through the Red Sea with baptism in the last two verses. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1330,7 +1330,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 12 hn4j figs-imperative βλεπέτω 1 does not fall Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using words such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “he needs to be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 10 12 s8yj figs-gendernotations ἑστάναι, βλεπέτω μὴ πέσῃ 1 does not fall Although **he** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **he** and **him** with nongendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she stands, let him or her be careful that he or she might not fall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 10 13 a8vj grammar-connect-exceptions πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν, εἰ μὴ ἀνθρώπινος 1 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “The only temptations that have seized you are those that are common to humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) -1CO 10 13 hc7q figs-personification πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Here, a **temptation** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could “seize” someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “You have encountered no temptation” or “No temptation has tempted you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1CO 10 13 hc7q figs-personification πειρασμὸς ὑμᾶς οὐκ εἴληφεν 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Here, a **temptation** is spoken of as though it were a person who could “seize” someone. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “You have encountered no temptation” or “No temptation has tempted you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 10 13 e4je figs-abstractnouns πειρασμὸς…οὐκ…σὺν τῷ πειρασμῷ 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **temptation**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “tempt.” Alternate translation: “Nothing that is tempting … with what is tempting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 13 r066 figs-idiom ἀνθρώπινος 1 He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability Something that **is common to humanity** is something that many humans experience, and it is not unique to one or two people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **what is common to humanity** with a comparable phrase or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “what is usual for humans” or “what other people experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 13 a72t figs-activepassive ὑμᾶς πειρασθῆναι 1 will not let you be tempted If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **tempted** rather than focusing on who or what does the “tempting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” or “something” does it. Alternate translation: “someone to tempt you” or “anybody to tempt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1433,7 +1433,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 33 k86v figs-abstractnouns τὸ ἐμαυτοῦ σύμφορον, ἀλλὰ τὸ τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **benefit**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “benefit.” Alternate translation: “what benefits me but what benefits the many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 33 hd2z figs-nominaladj τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of many people” or “of everyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 10 33 qsg4 figs-activepassive σωθῶσιν 1 the many If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **saved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. On food (8:1–11:1)
* Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)
6. On head coverings (11:2–16)
* Heads and honor (11:2–7)
* Order for men and women (11:8–12)
* Argument from nature (11:13–16)
7. On the Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)
* The problem at Corinth (11:17–22)
* The tradition from the Lord (11:23–26)
* Proper behavior at the Lord’s Supper (11:27–34)

Many translations include 11:1 as the conclusion of the last section of chapter 10. Consider whether translations your readers are familiar with do this or not.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The head

Paul refers frequently to “the head” in [11:2–10](../11/02.md). In some places, “head” refers to a person’s body part: his or her head (see the first occurrences of “head” in [11:4–5](../11/04.md); see also [11:6–7](../11/06.md); [11:10](../11/10.md)). In other places, “head” is used figuratively to refer to a specific kind of relationship between persons (see [11:3](../11/03.md)). Sometimes, it is not clear which use of “head” Paul intends, and perhaps it could be both (see especially the second occurrences of “head” in [11:4–5](../11/04.md)). See the notes on these verses for translation options in context. For the figurative meaning of “head,” see the section below on “Head as metaphor.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/head]])

### Women and men

Throughout [11:2–16](../11/02.md), Paul uses words that could identify “women” and “men” in general or that could more specifically refer to “wives” and “husbands.” Further, Paul refers to the story about how God created the first man and the first woman as it is told in [Genesis 2:15–25](../gen/02/15.md) (see [11:8–9](../11/08.md)). This means that Paul could be speaking about women and men in general, husbands and wives in general, or the first man and first woman whenever he uses the words “man” and “woman.” It is likely that Paul either meant women and men in general in every verse (the ULT models this option), or he had different nuances of the words “woman” and “man” in mind in different verses (the UST models this option). If your language has words that are general enough that they could indicate any of these possible nuances of “woman” and “man,” you could use those words in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])

### Head coverings

Paul’s instructions in [11:2–16](../11/02.md) about “head coverings” are not clear enough to indicate exactly what the Corinthians were doing or what exactly Paul wants them to do instead. There are multiple issues that are uncertain: (1) what is the “head covering” that Paul speaks about? (2) What does the “head covering” indicate in the Corinthians’ culture? (3) Why would some women uncover their heads?

First (1), the “head covering” can be understood in roughly three ways: (a) a cloth that was worn on the top and back of the head, (b) long hair itself (it is unclear how long it would need to be to count as “long”), or (c) a specific hairstyle. The UST generally follows the interpretation that argues that the head covering is a “cloth.” Other options are included in the notes.

Second (2), the “head covering” could be an indication of (a) proper gender distinctions between men (uncovered) and women (covered), (b) submission to authority (that is, a wife’s submission to her husband), or (c) the honor and respectability of the woman (and men who are related to her). Of course, the “head covering” could indicate several of these options.

Third (3), women in Corinth might have uncovered their heads for several reasons: (a) they thought that the work of Jesus had nullified the importance of gender, so head coverings that indicated gender distinctions were unnecessary; (b) they thought that, in church worship, there was no hierarchy of authority based on gender or marriage, so head coverings that indicated submission to authority were unnecessary; or (c) they considered the whole group of believers to be family, so head coverings that indicated honor and respectability in public were unnecessary. Of course, several of these reasons might be true.

The number of interpretations and options indicates again how little we know about what Paul is talking about in [11:2–16](../11/02.md). If possible, your translation should allow for all these interpretations since the original text of 1 Corinthians also does. For specific translation options and comments on specific issues, see the notes on the verses.

### “because of the angels”

In [11:10](../11/10.md), Paul makes his claim that “the woman ought to have authority on the head,” and then he gives a reason: “because of the angels.” However, Paul does not state what about “angels” he has in mind. There are at least three important options for understanding what he could mean. First (1), sometimes the angels are described as those who oversee the order of the world and especially of worship. The woman having “authority on the head” would satisfy what the angels require for worship practices. Second (2), sometimes the angels are described as sexually attracted to earthly women. The woman “ought to have authority on the head” to keep the angels from acting or being tempted to act sexually with these women. Third (3), sometimes angels are described as involved in the worship of the community. The woman “ought to have authority on the head” as a sign of respect to them. Paul’s sentence does not specify anything beyond the fact that “the angels” are a reason for the “authority on the head,” so the best translation also expresses “the angels” as the reason without choosing between options. (See [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/angel]])

### The issue with the Lord’s Supper

In [11:17–34](../11/17.md), Paul corrects how the Corinthians are practicing the Lord’s Supper. Since the Corinthians would know the problem he is addressing, Paul himself is not very specific about it. The clearest hints about what the problem is can be found in [11:21](../11/21.md) and [11:33](../11/33.md). From these two verses, the problem with how the Corinthians are practicing the Lord’s Supper can be understood in primarily three ways. First (1), the people who arrived first began to eat right away without waiting for everyone else to gather. Because of this, they would have too much to eat and drink, and those who arrived later would not get enough. Second (2), some people, especially those who were more wealthy or powerful, would bring or receive special food and more of it than other people. Third (3), some people might not be showing hospitality or offering to share food with others who did not have their own houses or lots of food. If possible, your translation should allow for readers to accept several or all three of these possible understandings. See the notes for specific translation options, especially the notes on [11:21](../11/21.md) and [11:33](../11/33.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lordssupper]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Rhetorical questions

In [11:13–15](../11/13.md) and [22](../11/22.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Head as metaphor

As noted above, “head” functions figuratively in [11:3–5](../11/03.md). The two most common understandings are these: (1) “head” is a metaphor for authority, and (2) “head” is a metaphor for source. A third (3) option is to understand “head” as a metaphor for whom one represents or to whom one brings honor. Of course, some or all of these three options could be understood as part of the “head” metaphor. What is clear is that Paul uses “head” at least partly because he wants to connect the figurative use of “head” with the nonfigurative use of “head” for the body part. Because of this connection, you should try to express the “head” metaphor with a word that refers to the body part. For specific issues and translation options, see the notes on [11:3–5](../11/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/head]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Metaphor with bread and cup

In [11:24–25](../11/24.md), Jesus identifies bread as “my body” and the wine in a cup as “the new covenant in my blood.” These metaphors can be understood in at least three primary ways: (1) the bread and wine somehow become Jesus’ body and blood; (2) Jesus’ body and blood are present, physically or spiritually, in the bread and wine; or (3) the bread and wine memorialize or symbolize Jesus’ body and blood. Christians are divided on this question, and metaphors that link body and blood to bread and wine are very significant in the Bible and in Christian teaching. For these reasons, it is best to preserve these metaphors without expressing them as similes or in another nonfigurative way. If you must express them in another way, see the notes on [11:24–25](../11/24.md) for translation possibilities. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/bread]], and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Legal language

In [11:27–32](../11/27.md), Paul uses a number of words that would normally be used in a court of law or in other legal settings. These words include “guilty,” “examine,” “discern,” “judge,” and “condemn.” If possible, use words related to legal settings or courts of law in your translation of these verses.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Translating gendered words

In [11:2–16](../11/02.md), Paul uses masculine and feminine words to identify when he is addressing men and when he is addressing women. Unlike in most of the previous chapters, then, you should intentionally preserve most of the gendered language in this chapter. The notes will identify any cases of gendered language that could refer to all people. If there is no note, assume that the gendered language is functioning to distinguish between genders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])

### Are [11:8–9](../11/08.md) a parenthesis?

Some translations mark [11:8–9](../11/08.md) as an interruption or parenthesis in Paul’s argument. They do this because [11:10](../11/10.md) seems to draw a conclusion from the point made at the end of [11:7](../11/07.md). However, it is also quite possible that [11:10](../11/10.md) draws its conclusion from all of [11:7–9](../11/07.md). Because of that, neither the UST nor the ULT marks [11:8–9](../11/08.md) as a parenthesis. Consider whether translations your readers are familiar with use parentheses here or not.

### Different accounts of the Last Supper

In [11:23–25](../11/23.md), Paul recounts the tradition of the Last Supper, which is the last meal Jesus had with his closest disciples before he was arrested and put to death. Paul uses this story to explain how the Corinthians should act at the Lord’s Supper, so he considers the Last Supper the time when Jesus began the practice of what we call the Lord’s Supper. The same story can be found in very similar form in [Luke 22:19–20](../luk/22/19.md) and in slightly different form in [Matthew 26:26–29](../mat/26/26.md) and [Mark 14:22–25](../mrk/14/22.md). You should translate the story as you find it here without making it the same as the other accounts.

### “First, …”

In [11:18](../11/18.md), Paul uses “first” to introduce his instructions about the Lord’s Supper. However, he never goes on to use “second.” Most likely, he did not think he had enough time or space to cover further commands, which would have been about the Lord’s Supper, related issues of worship, or something else. In [11:34](../11/34.md), he says “Now {about} the remaining things, I will give directions when I come.” Perhaps these “remaining things” included what he planned to introduce with “second” and “third” but never did. Consider whether your readers would be confused by a “first” without a “second.” If so, you could make it clearer that [11:34](../11/34.md) refers to “second” (and so on) instructions. +1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. On food (8:1–11:1)
* Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)
6. On head coverings (11:2–16)
* Heads and honor (11:2–7)
* Order for men and women (11:8–12)
* Argument from nature (11:13–16)
7. On the Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)
* The problem at Corinth (11:17–22)
* The tradition from the Lord (11:23–26)
* Proper behavior at the Lord’s Supper (11:27–34)

Many translations include 11:1 as the conclusion of the last section of chapter 10. Consider whether translations your readers are familiar with do this or not.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The head

Paul refers frequently to “the head” in [11:2–10](../11/02.md). In some places, “head” refers to a person’s body part: his or her head (see the first occurrences of “head” in [11:4–5](../11/04.md); see also [11:6–7](../11/06.md); [11:10](../11/10.md)). In other places, “head” is used to refer to a specific kind of relationship between persons (see [11:3](../11/03.md)). Sometimes, it is not clear which use of “head” Paul intends, and perhaps it could be both (see especially the second occurrences of “head” in [11:4–5](../11/04.md)). See the notes on these verses for translation options in context. For the figurative meaning of “head,” see the section below on “Head as metaphor.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/head]])

### Women and men

Throughout [11:2–16](../11/02.md), Paul uses words that could identify “women” and “men” in general or that could more specifically refer to “wives” and “husbands.” Further, Paul refers to the story about how God created the first man and the first woman as it is told in [Genesis 2:15–25](../gen/02/15.md) (see [11:8–9](../11/08.md)). This means that Paul could be speaking about women and men in general, husbands and wives in general, or the first man and first woman whenever he uses the words “man” and “woman.” It is likely that Paul either meant women and men in general in every verse (the ULT models this option), or he had different nuances of the words “woman” and “man” in mind in different verses (the UST models this option). If your language has words that are general enough that they could indicate any of these possible nuances of “woman” and “man,” you could use those words in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])

### Head coverings

Paul’s instructions in [11:2–16](../11/02.md) about “head coverings” are not clear enough to indicate exactly what the Corinthians were doing or what exactly Paul wants them to do instead. There are multiple issues that are uncertain: (1) what is the “head covering” that Paul speaks about? (2) What does the “head covering” indicate in the Corinthians’ culture? (3) Why would some women uncover their heads?

First (1), the “head covering” can be understood in roughly three ways: (a) a cloth that was worn on the top and back of the head, (b) long hair itself (it is unclear how long it would need to be to count as “long”), or (c) a specific hairstyle. The UST generally follows the interpretation that argues that the head covering is a “cloth.” Other options are included in the notes.

Second (2), the “head covering” could be an indication of (a) proper gender distinctions between men (uncovered) and women (covered), (b) submission to authority (that is, a wife’s submission to her husband), or (c) the honor and respectability of the woman (and men who are related to her). Of course, the “head covering” could indicate several of these options.

Third (3), women in Corinth might have uncovered their heads for several reasons: (a) they thought that the work of Jesus had nullified the importance of gender, so head coverings that indicated gender distinctions were unnecessary; (b) they thought that, in church worship, there was no hierarchy of authority based on gender or marriage, so head coverings that indicated submission to authority were unnecessary; or (c) they considered the whole group of believers to be family, so head coverings that indicated honor and respectability in public were unnecessary. Of course, several of these reasons might be true.

The number of interpretations and options indicates again how little we know about what Paul is talking about in [11:2–16](../11/02.md). If possible, your translation should allow for all these interpretations since the original text of 1 Corinthians also does. For specific translation options and comments on specific issues, see the notes on the verses.

### “because of the angels”

In [11:10](../11/10.md), Paul makes his claim that “the woman ought to have authority on the head,” and then he gives a reason: “because of the angels.” However, Paul does not state what about “angels” he has in mind. There are at least three important options for understanding what he could mean. First (1), sometimes the angels are described as those who oversee the order of the world and especially of worship. The woman having “authority on the head” would satisfy what the angels require for worship practices. Second (2), sometimes the angels are described as sexually attracted to earthly women. The woman “ought to have authority on the head” to keep the angels from acting or being tempted to act sexually with these women. Third (3), sometimes angels are described as involved in the worship of the community. The woman “ought to have authority on the head” as a sign of respect to them. Paul’s sentence does not specify anything beyond the fact that “the angels” are a reason for the “authority on the head,” so the best translation also expresses “the angels” as the reason without choosing between options. (See [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/angel]])

### The issue with the Lord’s Supper

In [11:17–34](../11/17.md), Paul corrects how the Corinthians are practicing the Lord’s Supper. Since the Corinthians would know the problem he is addressing, Paul himself is not very specific about it. The clearest hints about what the problem is can be found in [11:21](../11/21.md) and [11:33](../11/33.md). From these two verses, the problem with how the Corinthians are practicing the Lord’s Supper can be understood in primarily three ways. First (1), the people who arrived first began to eat right away without waiting for everyone else to gather. Because of this, they would have too much to eat and drink, and those who arrived later would not get enough. Second (2), some people, especially those who were more wealthy or powerful, would bring or receive special food and more of it than other people. Third (3), some people might not be showing hospitality or offering to share food with others who did not have their own houses or lots of food. If possible, your translation should allow for readers to accept several or all three of these possible understandings. See the notes for specific translation options, especially the notes on [11:21](../11/21.md) and [11:33](../11/33.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lordssupper]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Rhetorical questions

In [11:13–15](../11/13.md) and [22](../11/22.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Head as metaphor

As noted above, “head” functions in [11:3–5](../11/03.md). The two most common understandings are these: (1) “head” is a metaphor for authority, and (2) “head” is a metaphor for source. A third (3) option is to understand “head” as a metaphor for whom one represents or to whom one brings honor. Of course, some or all of these three options could be understood as part of the “head” metaphor. What is clear is that Paul uses “head” at least partly because he wants to connect the figurative use of “head” with the nonfigurative use of “head” for the body part. Because of this connection, you should try to express the “head” metaphor with a word that refers to the body part. For specific issues and translation options, see the notes on [11:3–5](../11/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/head]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Metaphor with bread and cup

In [11:24–25](../11/24.md), Jesus identifies bread as “my body” and the wine in a cup as “the new covenant in my blood.” These metaphors can be understood in at least three primary ways: (1) the bread and wine somehow become Jesus’ body and blood; (2) Jesus’ body and blood are present, physically or spiritually, in the bread and wine; or (3) the bread and wine memorialize or symbolize Jesus’ body and blood. Christians are divided on this question, and metaphors that link body and blood to bread and wine are very significant in the Bible and in Christian teaching. For these reasons, it is best to preserve these metaphors without expressing them as similes or in another nonfigurative way. If you must express them in another way, see the notes on [11:24–25](../11/24.md) for translation possibilities. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/bread]], and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Legal language

In [11:27–32](../11/27.md), Paul uses a number of words that would normally be used in a court of law or in other legal settings. These words include “guilty,” “examine,” “discern,” “judge,” and “condemn.” If possible, use words related to legal settings or courts of law in your translation of these verses.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Translating gendered words

In [11:2–16](../11/02.md), Paul uses masculine and feminine words to identify when he is addressing men and when he is addressing women. Unlike in most of the previous chapters, then, you should intentionally preserve most of the gendered language in this chapter. The notes will identify any cases of gendered language that could refer to all people. If there is no note, assume that the gendered language is functioning to distinguish between genders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])

### Are [11:8–9](../11/08.md) a parenthesis?

Some translations mark [11:8–9](../11/08.md) as an interruption or parenthesis in Paul’s argument. They do this because [11:10](../11/10.md) seems to draw a conclusion from the point made at the end of [11:7](../11/07.md). However, it is also quite possible that [11:10](../11/10.md) draws its conclusion from all of [11:7–9](../11/07.md). Because of that, neither the UST nor the ULT marks [11:8–9](../11/08.md) as a parenthesis. Consider whether translations your readers are familiar with use parentheses here or not.

### Different accounts of the Last Supper

In [11:23–25](../11/23.md), Paul recounts the tradition of the Last Supper, which is the last meal Jesus had with his closest disciples before he was arrested and put to death. Paul uses this story to explain how the Corinthians should act at the Lord’s Supper, so he considers the Last Supper the time when Jesus began the practice of what we call the Lord’s Supper. The same story can be found in very similar form in [Luke 22:19–20](../luk/22/19.md) and in slightly different form in [Matthew 26:26–29](../mat/26/26.md) and [Mark 14:22–25](../mrk/14/22.md). You should translate the story as you find it here without making it the same as the other accounts.

### “First, …”

In [11:18](../11/18.md), Paul uses “first” to introduce his instructions about the Lord’s Supper. However, he never goes on to use “second.” Most likely, he did not think he had enough time or space to cover further commands, which would have been about the Lord’s Supper, related issues of worship, or something else. In [11:34](../11/34.md), he says “Now {about} the remaining things, I will give directions when I come.” Perhaps these “remaining things” included what he planned to introduce with “second” and “third” but never did. Consider whether your readers would be confused by a “first” without a “second.” If so, you could make it clearer that [11:34](../11/34.md) refers to “second” (and so on) instructions. 1CO 11 1 h5fg μιμηταί μου γίνεσθε, καθὼς κἀγὼ Χριστοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “Imitate me, just as I also imitate Christ” 1CO 11 2 epnu grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 you remember me in everything Here, **Now** introduces a whole new section in Paul’s argument. He **Now** begins speaking about proper behavior during worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Now** with a word or phrase that introduces a new topic or leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 11 2 ibw5 figs-metonymy μου 1 you remember me in everything Here, **me** refers specifically to what Paul teaches and how Paul behaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **me** by clarifying exactly what about **me** Paul has in mind. Alternate translation: “my doctrine and behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1499,7 +1499,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 13 eex3 translate-unknown πρέπον 1 Judge for yourselves Here, **proper** identifies behavior that most people in a culture would agree is “appropriate” or “right” for a certain people or situations. Use a word or phrase that identifies what is “appropriate” or “right” for someone or at some time. Alternate translation: “right for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 11 13 ylgd figs-explicit ἀκατακάλυπτον 1 Judge for yourselves Just as in [11:5](../11/05.md), **uncovered** could refer to: (1) not wearing a piece of clothing on the hair and back of the head. Alternate translation: “without a cloth on the head” (2) not putting the hair up in a traditional hairstyle but instead letting it flow freely. Alternate translation: “with her hair unbound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 14 v5b5 figs-rquestion οὐδὲ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ διδάσκει ὑμᾶς, ὅτι ἀνὴρ μὲν ἐὰν κομᾷ, ἀτιμία αὐτῷ ἐστιν; 1 Does not even nature itself teach you … for him? This is the first part of a rhetorical question that continues into the next verse. Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, it does.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong affirmation. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to translate the beginning of the next verse as a separate affirmation. Alternate translation: “Even nature itself teaches you that if a man might have long hair, it is a disgrace for him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 11 14 gyw9 figs-personification οὐδὲ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ διδάσκει ὑμᾶς 1 Does not even nature itself teach you … for him? Here, **nature** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could **teach** someone. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize what the Corinthians should learn from **nature**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “Does not even nature itself show you” or “Do you not understand from nature itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1CO 11 14 gyw9 figs-personification οὐδὲ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ διδάσκει ὑμᾶς 1 Does not even nature itself teach you … for him? Here, **nature** is spoken of as though it were a person who could **teach** someone. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize what the Corinthians should learn from **nature**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “Does not even nature itself show you” or “Do you not understand from nature itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 11 14 wflv translate-unknown ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ 1 Does not even nature itself teach you … for him? Here, **nature** refers to the way things work in the world. The word does not refer simply to the “natural world” but rather can include everything that exists and how it all functions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **nature** with a word or phrase that refers to “the way things work.” Alternate translation: “how the world itself works” or “what naturally happens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 11 14 vqmf figs-rpronouns ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ 1 Does not even nature itself teach you … for him? Here, **itself** focuses attention on **nature**. If **itself** would not draw attention in this way in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “nature” or “nature indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1CO 11 14 rurk grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἀνὴρ μὲν ἐὰν κομᾷ, ἀτιμία αὐτῷ ἐστιν 1 Does not even nature itself teach you … for him? Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **a man might have long hair**, or he might not. He specifies the result for **if a man** does **have long hair**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “when” or by avoiding the **if** structure. Alternate translation: “when a man has long hair, it is a disgrace for him” or “it is a disgrace for a man to have long hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) @@ -1640,7 +1640,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 12 7 rd8z figs-abstractnouns πρὸς τὸ συμφέρον 1 to each one is given If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **benefit**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “benefit” or “help.” Alternate translation: “in order to benefit everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 12 8 c9ak figs-activepassive ᾧ μὲν…διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος δίδοται 1 to one is given by the Spirit a word If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses this form to emphasize what **is given** over who gives it. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” or **the Spirit** did it. Alternate translation: “the Spirit gives to one” or “God gives to one through the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 12 8 i6n9 writing-pronouns ᾧ…ἄλλῳ 1 to one is given by the Spirit a word While Paul specifically refers to **one** and to **another**, he is not speaking about just two people. Rather, he is using this form to give two examples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that Paul is using two examples here with a form in your language that does indicate representative examples, or you could use plural forms here. Alternate translation: “to certain people … to other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 12 8 us1k figs-metonymy λόγος -1 a word Here, **word** figuratively represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a message … a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 12 8 us1k figs-metonymy λόγος -1 a word Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a message … a message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 12 8 terk figs-abstractnouns λόγος σοφίας 1 a word If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **wisdom**, you can express the idea in another way. Paul could mean that: (1) the **word** is characterized by **wisdom**. Alternate translation: “a wise word” (2) the **word** gives **wisdom** to those who hear it. Alternate translation: “a word that makes others wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 12 8 pe8s figs-ellipsis ἄλλῳ…λόγος 1 is given Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**is given**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “to another is given a word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 12 8 pbe4 figs-abstractnouns λόγος γνώσεως 1 is given If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you can express the idea in another way. Paul could mean that: (1) the **word** is characterized by **knowledge**. Alternate translation: “an enlightened word” (2) the **word** gives **knowledge** to those who hear it. Alternate translation: “a word that makes others knowledgeable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -2036,7 +2036,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 36 h8lp figs-rquestion ἢ ἀφ’ ὑμῶν ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν, ἢ εἰς ὑμᾶς μόνους κατήντησεν? 1 Did the word of God come from you? Are you the only ones it has reached? Paul does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the answer to both is “no, it did not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these questions by stating the ideas with strong negations. If you do so, you will need to replace **Or** with different transition words. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the word of God certainly did not go out from you, and it certainly did not come only to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 14 36 o8sf figs-personification ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν…κατήντησεν 1 Did the word of God come from you? Are you the only ones it has reached? Here Paul speaks as if **the word of God** were a person who could travel. He speaks in this way to emphasize **the word** over the people who proclaim that **word**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that people travel with the **word** and indicate the emphasis on **the word of God** in another way. Alternate translation: “did the people who proclaim the word of God go out … did people who proclaim it come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 14 36 tmfn figs-go ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐξῆλθεν…εἰς ὑμᾶς μόνους κατήντησεν 1 the word of God In the first question, **go out** refers to the Corinthians as the source of the **word of God**. In the second question, **come** refers to the Corinthians as the recipients of the **word of God**. Use movement words that make this clear in your language. Alternate translation: “did the word of God depart … did it reach only you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -1CO 14 36 mj6b figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Here, **word** figuratively represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 14 36 mj6b figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 14 36 hdu2 figs-possession ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Here Paul uses the possessive to describe a **word** that is: (1) from **God**. Alternate translation: “the word from God” (2) about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 14 37 lrzp grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ τις δοκεῖ προφήτης εἶναι ἢ πνευματικός 1 he should acknowledge Here Paul speaks as **If** some of the Corinthians might think that they are “prophets” or **spiritual**, but he knows that some of them do think in this way. He uses **If** to identify these people as the ones that he is addressing. If your language does not use **If** to identify a certain group of people, you can use a form that does do this. Alternate translation: “Whoever thinks himself to be a prophet or spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 14 37 h265 figs-gendernotations δοκεῖ…ἐπιγινωσκέτω 1 he should acknowledge Although **himself** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **himself** and **him** with nongendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “thinks himself or herself … let him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -2068,7 +2068,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 2 s83s σῴζεσθε 1 you are being saved Here Paul uses the present tense to speak about the Corinthians’ salvation. Paul could use this tense because: (1) he wants the Corinthians to realize that they are only finally **saved** when Jesus comes back, and right now they are in the process of **being saved**. Alternate translation: “you are currently being saved” or “you will be saved” (2) he is using the present tense to speak about something that is generally true. He does not have a specific time in mind for when the Corinthians are **saved**. Alternate translation: “you are saved” 1CO 15 2 nx1q grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ 1 you are being saved Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that holding **firmly to the word** leads to **being saved**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “as long as” or “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 15 2 d8or figs-metaphor τίνι λόγῳ…κατέχετε 1 you are being saved Here Paul speaks as if **the word** were a physical object that the Corinthians could **hold firmly to**. He speaks in this way to refer to trust or belief that is as strong as someone’s grip on an object that they do not wish to lose. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you never let go of the word” or “you persistently believe the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 15 2 le2k figs-metonymy τίνι λόγῳ 1 the word I preached to you Here, **word** figuratively represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 15 2 le2k figs-metonymy τίνι λόγῳ 1 the word I preached to you Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to what” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 15 2 opvd grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἐκτὸς εἰ μὴ 1 the word I preached to you Here, **unless** introduces the opposite of holding **firmly to the word**. Paul means that they **believed in vain** if they do not **hold firmly to the word**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this contrast by stating the contrast more explicitly. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “However, if you do not hold firmly to the word, you believed in vain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1CO 15 3 cqxn figs-metaphor παρέδωκα…ὑμῖν ἐν πρώτοις 1 as of first importance Here Paul speaks as if the gospel that he preached to the Corinthians were a physical object that he **delivered** to them. By speaking in this way, he emphasizes that he truly taught the Corinthians the gospel, and they now know it as well as if they held it in their hands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I instructed you among the first in” or “I handed over to you among the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 3 sp4p figs-explicit ἐν πρώτοις 1 as of first importance Here, **among the first** could mean that: (1) what Paul is about to say is one of the **first** things he told them when he visited Corinth. Alternate translation: “as one of the first things I said” (2) what Paul is about to say is one of the most important things he told them when he visited Corinth. Alternate translation: “as one of the most important things I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2246,7 +2246,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 31 p3ym figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, τῷ Κυρίῳ ἡμῶν 1 my boasting in you Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus our Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, identifies Paul’s **boasting** as something that only matters or is valid in his union with Christ. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus our Lord” or “because I am united to Christ Jesus our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 32 q6mb figs-rquestion εἰ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ἐθηριομάχησα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ, τί μοι τὸ ὄφελος? 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The implied answer to the question is “There is no profit.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionby using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “There is no profit to me, according to men, if I fought wild beasts at Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 15 32 vgax figs-idiom τί μοι τὸ ὄφελος 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Here, **the profit to me** refers to something that is good for Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the profit to me** with a comparable word or phrase that refers to something that is good or beneficial for someone. Alternate translation: “What good is it to me” or “How does it benefit me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 15 32 ghif figs-infostructure εἰ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ἐθηριομάχησα 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Here, **according to men** could modify: (1) **I fought**. In this case, Paul would be fighting with merely human goals and strategies. Alternate translation: “if I fought according to men against wild beasts” (2) **wild beasts**. In this case, Paul would be identifying the phrase **wild beasts** as a figurative reference to his enemies. Alternate translation: “if I fought wild beasts, speaking figuratively,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 15 32 ghif figs-infostructure εἰ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ἐθηριομάχησα 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Here, **according to men** could modify: (1) **I fought**. In this case, Paul would be fighting with merely human goals and strategies. Alternate translation: “if I fought according to men against wild beasts” (2) **wild beasts**. In this case, Paul would be identifying the phrase **wild beasts** as a figurative reference to his enemies. Alternate translation: “if I fought wild beasts, speaking,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 15 32 vslh figs-idiom κατὰ ἄνθρωπον 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Here, **according to men** identifies thinking or acting in only human ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **according to men**by using a word or phrase that refers to what people who do not believe say and argue. Alternate translation: “according to what mere humans think” or “according to this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 15 32 rqte figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a nongendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 15 32 wvra grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Paul is speaking as if fighting **wild beasts** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it actually happened. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying did not happen, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “when.” Alternate translation: “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) @@ -2324,7 +2324,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 45 f507 figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than focusing on the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that: (1) the scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “Moses has written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 45 hbse figs-quotations γέγραπται, ἐγένετο ὁ πρῶτος ἄνθρωπος, Ἀδὰμ, εἰς ψυχὴν ζῶσαν 1 If your language does not use this form, you can translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “it is written that the first man Adam became a living soul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 1CO 15 45 yo2p figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 Although **man** is masculine, and **Adam** was male, Paul is focusing on how **Adam** was the first human being. He is not focusing on how **Adam** was the first male human being. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **man** with a nongendered word. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1CO 15 45 lnfh translate-names Ἀδὰμ -1 **Adam** is the name of a man. It is the name that God gave to the first human he created. Paul uses **Adam** first to refer to this man and then to refer figuratively to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +1CO 15 45 lnfh translate-names Ἀδὰμ -1 **Adam** is the name of a man. It is the name that God gave to the first human he created. Paul uses **Adam** first to refer to this man and then to refer to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1CO 15 45 nuru translate-unknown ψυχὴν ζῶσαν 1 Here, **soul** is a different form of the word that was translated “natural” in [15:44](../15/44.md). Paul uses this similar word to make the point that **Adam** had a “natural body” when God created him. If possible, use words that connect back to how you translated “natural” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “a living, this-worldly human” or “a living person with a regular body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 45 jeve figs-metaphor ὁ ἔσχατος Ἀδὰμ 1 Here, **The last Adam** refers to Jesus. Paul wishes to draw connections between Adam and Jesus, and so he calls **Adam** the **first man Adam**, and he calls Jesus the **last Adam**. Each “Adam” is the first person to have a specific kind of body: the **first** Adam has a “natural body” as a **living soul**, while the **last** Adam has a “spiritual body” as a **life-giving spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express who **The last Adam** is by clarifying that it refers to Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the last Adam,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 45 qscs figs-ellipsis Ἀδὰμ εἰς πνεῦμα ζῳοποιοῦν 1 Here Paul omits some words that your language may need to make a complete thought. Paul could be implying: (1) a word such as “is.” See the ULT. (2) the word **became** from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Adam became a life-giving spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -2357,7 +2357,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 50 by1o figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Connecting Statement: Although **brothers** is in masculine form, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a nongendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 15 50 mwy3 figs-parallelism σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα Βασιλείαν Θεοῦ κληρονομῆσαι οὐ δύναται, οὐδὲ ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν κληρονομεῖ 1 flesh and blood cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither does what is perishable inherit what is imperishable Here Paul makes two very similar statements in which **flesh and blood** goes with **perishable** and **the kingdom of God** goes with **imperishable**. These two statements could: (1) be basically synonymous, and Paul repeats himself to emphasize the point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the two sentences into one to show why Paul uses two parallel sentences. Alternate translation: “perishable flesh and blood are not able to inherit the imperishable kingdom of God” (2) refer first to people who are alive (**flesh and blood**) and then to people who are dead (**perishable**). In this case, you should preserve some distinction between the two sentences. Alternate translation: “flesh and blood are not able to inherit the kingdom of God, and the perishable are not able to inherit the imperishable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1CO 15 50 nz7s figs-hendiadys σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα 1 flesh and blood This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The words **flesh** and **blood** together describe the human body as it currently exists. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “the fleshly” or “the things that exist now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -1CO 15 50 zele figs-metonymy σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα 1 flesh and blood Here, **flesh and blood** figuratively represents a body that is made out of **flesh and blood**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **flesh and blood** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “flesh and blood bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 15 50 zele figs-metonymy σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα 1 flesh and blood Here, **flesh and blood** represents a body that is made out of **flesh and blood**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **flesh and blood** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “flesh and blood bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 15 50 e4gd figs-metaphor κληρονομῆσαι…κληρονομεῖ 1 inherit Here Paul speaks of **the kingdom of God** that is **imperishable** as if it were property that a parent could pass on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers will eventually receive and live in **the kingdom of God** that God has promised to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to live in … does … live in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 50 b9hc translate-unknown ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν 1 the perishable … the imperishable Here, **perishable** and **imperishable** identify whether people or things last or fall apart. These words are the same ones translated as “decay” and “immortality” in [15:42](../15/42.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **perishable** and **imperishable** with two words or phrases that refer to how long things last. Alternate translation: “what passes away … what never passes away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 50 t68j figs-nominaladj ἡ φθορὰ, τὴν ἀφθαρσίαν 1 the perishable … the imperishable Paul is using the adjectives **perishable** and **imperishable** as nouns in order to refer to **perishable** bodies and the **imperishable** kingdom. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with appropriate noun phrases. Alternate translation: “a perishable body … the imperishable kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -2389,7 +2389,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 54 yjhy figs-abstractnouns ἀφθαρσίαν…ἀθανασίαν 1 this mortal body has put on immortality If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **incorruptibility** and **immortality**, you can express the idea by using adjectives such as “incorruptible” and “immortal.” Alternate translation: “what is incorruptible … what is immortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 54 m0l5 translate-unknown τὸ θνητὸν τοῦτο…ἀθανασίαν 1 this mortal body has put on immortality Here, **mortal** and **immortality** identify whether people or things die or cannot die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **mortal** and **immortality** with two words or phrases that refer to whether things can die or not. See how you translated these words in [15:53](../15/53.md). Alternate translation: “what can die … what never dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 54 idtf figs-idiom γενήσεται 1 this mortal body has put on immortality Here, **will come about** identifies that something will happen or come to pass. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **will come about** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will come to pass” or “will be realized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 15 54 ozha figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 this mortal body has put on immortality Here, **word** figuratively represents what someone says or writes in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1CO 15 54 ozha figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 this mortal body has put on immortality Here, **word** represents what someone says or writes in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **word** with an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 15 54 asfj writing-quotations ὁ λόγος ὁ γεγραμμένος 1 this mortal body has put on immortality In Paul’s culture, **the word that is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from or reference to an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Isaiah” (see ([Isaiah 25:8](../isa/25/08.md))). Most likely, this phrase introduces the quote from [Hosea 13:14](../hos/13/14.md) in the next verse as well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the word that is written** with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from or referring to an important text. Alternate translation: “what can be read in the Scriptures” or “the words that Isaiah and Hosea wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 15 54 r5he figs-activepassive ὁ γεγραμμένος 1 this mortal body has put on immortality If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than focusing on the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that: (1) the scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “the prophets have written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 54 b3xw figs-quotations ὁ γεγραμμένος, κατεπόθη ὁ θάνατος εἰς νῖκος 1 this mortal body has put on immortality If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “that is written about how death is swallowed up in victory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -2398,7 +2398,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 54 ph5j figs-abstractnouns θάνατος εἰς νῖκος 1 this mortal body has put on immortality If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **Death** and **victory**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “conquer.” Alternate translation: “How people die … when God conquers” or “The fact that people die … by God, who is victorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 55 pav7 writing-quotations θάνατε 1 Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting? Here Paul quotes from [Hosea 13:14](../hos/13/14.md) without providing a new quote introduction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this way of introducing a new quotation with a form in your language that introduces another quote. Alternate translation: “And again, ‘O death’” or “It is further written, ‘O death’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 15 55 zw75 figs-quotations ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον? 1 Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting? If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. You may need to include a word or phrase at the beginning to indicate that Paul is introducing a new quotation. Alternate translation: “It is further written that death is asked about where its victory is and about where its sting is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -1CO 15 55 c9zw figs-apostrophe ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον? 1 Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting? Here Paul quotes how Hosea figuratively addresses something that he knows cannot hear him, **death**, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. If this is confusing in your language, consider expressing this feeling by talking about **death**. Alternate translation: “Where is the victory of death? Where is the sting of death?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) +1CO 15 55 c9zw figs-apostrophe ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον? 1 Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting? Here Paul quotes how Hosea addresses something that he knows cannot hear him, **death**, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. If this is confusing in your language, consider expressing this feeling by talking about **death**. Alternate translation: “Where is the victory of death? Where is the sting of death?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) 1CO 15 55 rn56 figs-abstractnouns ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον? 1 Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **death**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” If you do this, you may need to express the direct address to **death** in another way. Alternate translation: “When people die, where is the victory? When people die, where is the sting?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 15 55 l23m figs-parallelism ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον? 1 Death, where is your victory? Death, where is your sting? Here Paul quotes how Hosea repeats **O death, where {is} your**. Parallel structures like this were poetic in Hosea’s culture. If it would be helpful in your language, and if it would not be worded powerfully in your culture, you could indicate why Paul repeats words and structure by eliminate some or all of the repetition and by making the statements powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “O death, where is your conquest?” or “O death, where are are your victory and sting?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1CO 15 55 pdxo figs-rquestion ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ νῖκος? ποῦ σου, θάνατε, τὸ κέντρον? 1 Paul does not quote these questions because he is looking for information about **where** death’s **victory** and **sting** are. Rather, the questions involve the Corinthians in what Paul is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nowhere.” In other words, there is no **victory** or **sting** for **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these questionswith a strong negation. Alternate translation: “O death, you have no victory! O death, you have no sting!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) diff --git a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv index fb8f9c651c..105f19e3d7 100644 --- a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv +++ b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ PHP 1 7 jn2s συνκοινωνούς μου τῆς χάριτος…ὄντα PHP 1 7 df00 figs-abstractnouns χάριτος 1 Here, **grace** refers to the way that God kindly gives us good things that we do not deserve. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with a verb or adjective. In this context, Paul considers both his imprisonment and his ministry of defending and confirming the gospel to be gifts from God. Alternate translation: “of God’s gracious gift” or “in experiencing how kind God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 7 o7ef figs-metonymy δεσμοῖς μου 1 Paul refers to his imprisonment in Rome by using the phrase **my chains**. Paul was chained to a guard and the Philippian Christians would have understood that Paul was referring to his imprisonment when he used the phrase **my chains** because of the close association between **chains** and being in prison. If this association is not clear in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHP 1 7 wey7 figs-doublet καὶ ἐν τῇ ἀπολογίᾳ καὶ βεβαιώσει τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 The words translated **defense** and **confirmation** could be used to refer to defending and confirming in a court of law the truth of something against which a charge was made. These two words mean very similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize that this is hard work. If your language has one word for these ideas, use that here and add emphasis another way. If there is a word or phrase that could be used with this legal sense but could also be used in the context of defending the gospel, consider using it here. Alternate translation: “and as I contend for the truth of the gospel” or “and as I labor to show people that the gospel is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -PHP 1 8 xun1 figs-idiom ἐν σπλάγχνοις Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the bowels of Christ Jesus The Greek word translated as **inner parts** is a term which refers to body organs, particularly to the intestines, liver, lungs, and heart. Paul is using **inner parts** figuratively to refer to love or affection. You can use the body part that represents the seat of affection in your language, or translate the plain meaning. Alternate translation: “with the heart of Christ Jesus” or “with the affection of Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +PHP 1 8 xun1 figs-idiom ἐν σπλάγχνοις Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the bowels of Christ Jesus The Greek word translated as **inner parts** is a term which refers to body organs, particularly to the intestines, liver, lungs, and heart. Paul is using **inner parts** to refer to love or affection. You can use the body part that represents the seat of affection in your language, or translate the plain meaning. Alternate translation: “with the heart of Christ Jesus” or “with the affection of Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) PHP 1 8 bo0r ἐν σπλάγχνοις Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the bowels of Christ Jesus Here, **the inner parts of Christ Jesus** could mean: (1) the same kind of love as Christ Jesus gives to people. (2) love that originates with Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “with love that comes from Christ Jesus” PHP 1 9 jlyu figs-abstractnouns ἵνα ἡ ἀγάπη ὑμῶν ἔτι μᾶλλον καὶ μᾶλλον περισσεύῃ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **love** with the verb form. Alternate translation: “that you will be able to love others more and more abundantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 9 f4q5 ὑμῶν 1 See how you translated the word **your** in [Philippians 1:5](../01/05.md). @@ -33,20 +33,20 @@ PHP 1 9 tbtt figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει καὶ πάσῃ α PHP 1 10 e17g figs-explicit εἰς τὸ δοκιμάζειν ὑμᾶς τὰ διαφέροντα 1 The word **what** here refers to that which a person does, and the word **excels** here refers to something that is best, according to God. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state these things explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that you may approve and choose to do what pleases God the most” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHP 1 10 ybw6 grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς 1 Here, the phrase **so that** shows that what follows this phrase is the desired result of Paul’s prayer in verse nine. Consider using a connecting word or phrase that will clearly show that what follows it is the desired result of what Paul prayed in verse nine. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) PHP 1 10 siv8 figs-doublet εἰλικρινεῖς καὶ ἀπρόσκοποι 1 pure and blameless The words **pure** and **blameless** have very similar meanings. Paul uses these two words together to emphasize the idea of moral purity. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine these two words and translate them as one idea. Alternate translation: “completely innocent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -PHP 1 11 lu5n figs-metaphor πεπληρωμένοι καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης τὸν 1 Here, the phrase **being filled with** is a metaphor meaning to be occupied in doing something. The phrase **the fruit of righteousness** is a metaphor which figuratively refers to what characterizes a person, namely what a person produces. This metaphor is a comparison between a good tree that produces good fruit and a person who is filled with righteousness and produces good actions as a result. So with these two metaphors, Paul is telling the Philippians to be occupied in doing righteous deeds. If this would be unclear in your language, you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “filling your lives with the righteous deeds that are” or “habitually doing the good works that are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHP 1 11 lu5n figs-metaphor πεπληρωμένοι καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης τὸν 1 Here, the phrase **being filled with** is a metaphor meaning to be occupied in doing something. The phrase **the fruit of righteousness** is a metaphor which refers to what characterizes a person, namely what a person produces. This metaphor is a comparison between a good tree that produces good fruit and a person who is filled with righteousness and produces good actions as a result. So with these two metaphors, Paul is telling the Philippians to be occupied in doing righteous deeds. If this would be unclear in your language, you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “filling your lives with the righteous deeds that are” or “habitually doing the good works that are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 1 11 t3w4 figs-activepassive πεπληρωμένοι 1 The phrase **being filled with** is a passive form. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “letting God fill you with” or “continually producing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) PHP 1 11 yq99 figs-metaphor τὸν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **through Christ Jesus** is a metaphor meaning that Christ Jesus is the one who makes it possible for a person to be righteous and thus to do the things that a righteous person does. Alternate translation: “that Christ Jesus produces in you” or “that Christ Jesus enables you to produce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 1 11 jwgb figs-abstractnouns εἰς δόξαν καὶ ἔπαινον Θεοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **glory** and **praise** with verbs. Alternate translation: “which will cause people to glorify and praise God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 11 mfs6 figs-doublet εἰς δόξαν καὶ ἔπαινον Θεοῦ 1 The words **glory** and **praise** mean very similar things here. They are used together to emphasize how much people will praise God. If you have one word for this in your language, you could use it here and show emphasis another way. Alternate translation: “which will cause people to greatly praise God” or “which will cause people to declare how great God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) PHP 1 12 tu2t figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a spiritual sense to include both men and women who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -PHP 1 12 ygt3 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** figuratively here to refer to anyone who is a fellow believer in Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternative translation, “my companions who believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHP 1 12 ygt3 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** here to refer to anyone who is a fellow believer in Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternative translation, “my companions who believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 1 12 zy4g figs-explicit τὰ κατ’ ἐμὲ 1 the things concerning me The phrase **the things concerning me** refers to Paul’s imprisonment. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things I have suffered because I was put into prison for preaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -PHP 1 12 q288 figs-metaphor μᾶλλον εἰς προκοπὴν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἐλήλυθεν 1 have really happened for the advancement of the gospel The phrase **advancement of the gospel** figuratively refers to an increasing number of people hearing and believing the gospel. Alternate translation: “have actually caused more people to hear the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHP 1 12 q288 figs-metaphor μᾶλλον εἰς προκοπὴν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἐλήλυθεν 1 have really happened for the advancement of the gospel The phrase **advancement of the gospel** refers to an increasing number of people hearing and believing the gospel. Alternate translation: “have actually caused more people to hear the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 1 13 wi6n grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 my chains in Christ became apparent among the whole palace guard and all the others Here, the phrase **As a result** shows that what follows this phrase is the result of Paul’s circumstances which he began discussing in verse 12, namely, his imprisonment. Consider using a connecting word or phrase that will clearly show that what follows it is the result of Paul’s imprisonment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) PHP 1 13 h1ly figs-metonymy δεσμούς μου 1 my chains in Christ became apparent Paul again refers to his imprisonment in a figurative way by using the phrase **my chains**. See how you translated this phrase in [1:7](../01/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHP 1 13 f8az figs-explicit τοὺς δεσμούς μου…ἐν Χριστῷ 1 my chains in Christ Here, the phrase **my chains in Christ** means that Paul is imprisoned because of his work for the cause of Christ. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “my chains for the sake of Christ” or “my chains because I teach people about Christ” or “my chains for the cause of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHP 1 14 a1kh τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 See how you translated **brothers** in the previous verse [1:12](../01/12.md). -PHP 1 14 eurs figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** figuratively here to refer to anyone who is a fellow believer in Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternative translation, “my companions who believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHP 1 14 eurs figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** here to refer to anyone who is a fellow believer in Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternative translation, “my companions who believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 1 14 sz29 figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ πεποιθότας τοῖς δεσμοῖς μου 1 The phrase **encouraged in the Lord** means that the Philippian Christians had grown in their trust of the Lord because of Paul’s imprisonment. Alternate translation: “trust the Lord more because of my chains” or “have received more courage from the Lord as a result of my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 1 14 k4tm figs-activepassive καὶ τοὺς πλείονας τῶν ἀδελφῶν ἐν Κυρίῳ πεποιθότας τοῖς δεσμοῖς μου 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who or what caused the action. Alternate translation: “The Lord has encouraged most of the brothers because of my chains” or “My chains have given most of the brothers more trust in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) PHP 1 14 ecy8 figs-metonymy δεσμοῖς μου 1 Paul is referring to his imprisonment by mentioning one part of it: the chains that bound his feet and hands. If this is unclear in your language, you could mention the imprisonment directly. See how you translated the phrase **my chains** in [1:7](../01/07.md) and [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “because of my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -72,12 +72,12 @@ PHP 1 19 h9hf figs-abstractnouns οἶδα γὰρ ὅτι τοῦτό μοι PHP 1 19 zr2k figs-abstractnouns ἐπιχορηγίας τοῦ Πνεύματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 of the Spirit of Jesus Christ If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning behind the abstract noun **provision** by using a verbal phrase. You could also say who does the action, if necessary. Alternate translation: “by God providing to me the Spirit of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 20 fh48 figs-doublet ἀποκαραδοκίαν καὶ ἐλπίδα 1 according to my eager expectation and hope Both **eager expectation** and **hope** have similar meanings and together express a single idea. Paul uses these two words together to emphasize the strength of his expectation. If you have a single word or phrase in your language which expresses the meaning of these two words, consider using that to express the strength of the hope in another way. Alternate translation: “sincere expectation” or “sure hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) PHP 1 20 tk7l figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν ἀποκαραδοκίαν καὶ ἐλπίδα μου 1 but in everything have boldness Both **expectation** and **hope** are abstract nouns. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express them together in a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “because I fully believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -PHP 1 20 jz1z figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ σώματί μου 1 Christ will be exalted in my body Here, the phrase **in my body** is used figuratively to mean the activities that Paul does with his body. Paul speaks of his **body** because it was with his earthly body that he would serve God on earth until he died, as he explains in more detail in [1:22-24](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “in everything that I do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +PHP 1 20 jz1z figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ σώματί μου 1 Christ will be exalted in my body Here, the phrase **in my body** is used to mean the activities that Paul does with his body. Paul speaks of his **body** because it was with his earthly body that he would serve God on earth until he died, as he explains in more detail in [1:22-24](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “in everything that I do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHP 1 20 ysty figs-doublenegatives ἐν οὐδενὶ αἰσχυνθήσομαι, ἀλλ’ 1 Christ will be exalted in my body If the double-negative phrase **in nothing be ashamed** would be confusing in your language, you could translate it in a positive way. Alternate translation: “I will always do the right thing and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) PHP 1 20 ch6v figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ παρρησίᾳ 1 whether through life or through death If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **boldness** with a similar adverb. Alternate translation: “always act boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 20 y78k figs-abstractnouns εἴτε διὰ ζωῆς εἴτε διὰ θανάτου 1 whether through life or through death If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **life** and **death** with their verbal forms. Alternate translation: “whether I live or I die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 21 n3jd figs-abstractnouns κέρδος 1 to die is gain If the abstract noun **gain** would be unclear in your language, you may express the meaning behind this word by using a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “to die is to go to Christ” or “to die would give me more blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -PHP 1 22 a21c figs-synecdoche ἐν σαρκί 1 Now if to live in the flesh Here Paul is using the word **flesh** figuratively to refer to his entire body. The phrase **in the flesh** then refers to living as physical beings. If this would be confusing in your language, consider using a different word or phrase that refers to this present physical life. Alternate translation: “on this earth” or “in this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +PHP 1 22 a21c figs-synecdoche ἐν σαρκί 1 Now if to live in the flesh Here Paul is using the word **flesh** to refer to his entire body. The phrase **in the flesh** then refers to living as physical beings. If this would be confusing in your language, consider using a different word or phrase that refers to this present physical life. Alternate translation: “on this earth” or “in this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) PHP 1 22 mwl6 figs-metaphor τοῦτό μοι καρπὸς ἔργου 1 this is fruitful labor for me Here, the word **fruitful** refers to Paul’s work producing good results. This is a metaphor in which Paul’s anticipated productive work is compared to a plant or tree which produces good fruit. Alternate translation: “this will mean effectively serving God” or “this will mean productively working for the advancement of the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 1 22 kxuu figs-abstractnouns τοῦτό μοι καρπὸς ἔργου 1 If the an abstract noun **labor** would be unclear in your language, you may express the meaning behind this word by using a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “I will accomplish something important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 23 tq29 figs-metaphor συνέχομαι δὲ ἐκ τῶν δύο 1 But I am hard pressed between the two The phrase **I am hard pressed between the two** is a metaphor. Paul speaks as if he were experiencing literal pressure from two opposite sides at the same time. Paul uses this figurative expression to show his difficulty in deciding which decision is best, if given the option between living or dying. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate this phrase using a metaphor that would make sense in your language, or you could choose to use plain language to express it. Alternate translation: “both options have their advantages, so the decision is not an easy one for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -103,9 +103,9 @@ PHP 1 26 j1d2 figs-go παρουσίας 1 Here the word **coming** describes P PHP 1 26 ay37 grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τῆς ἐμῆς παρουσίας 1 Here the word **through** could refer to: (1) the reason the Philippians would greatly boast in Christ. Therefore, the word **through** means “because”. Alternate translation: …because of my coming” (2) the means by which the Philippians would greatly boast in Christ. Therefore, the word **through** means “by”. Alternate translation: “by my coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) PHP 1 27 bwmq figs-go ἐλθὼν 1 Your language may have a different way of expressing the motion described by the word **come**. Here, the word **come** refers to Paul traveling to where the Philippians live and visiting them. See how you translated the form of this word in the previous verse, [1:26](../01/26.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) PHP 1 27 yddq figs-yousingular ἀξίως τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τοῦ Χριστοῦ πολιτεύεσθε 1 This is a command or instruction to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -PHP 1 27 u09z figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 Here, the phrase **stand firm** is used figuratively to mean not changing one’s beliefs but, rather, remaining steadfast in what one believes. If this would be unclear in your language, consider using an equivalent expression from your language, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you be unmoved” or “you remain strong in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHP 1 27 u09z figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 Here, the phrase **stand firm** is used to mean not changing one’s beliefs but, rather, remaining steadfast in what one believes. If this would be unclear in your language, consider using an equivalent expression from your language, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “you be unmoved” or “you remain strong in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 1 27 kmn8 figs-doublet ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, μιᾷ ψυχῇ 1 Here, the phrases **in one spirit** and **with one soul** mean essentially the same thing and are used together to emphasize the importance of unity. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate them together as one expression and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “unified as one spirit” or “with complete unity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -PHP 1 27 jfxp figs-metaphor ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, μιᾷ ψυχῇ 1 Here, the phrases **in one spirit** and **with one soul** are used figuratively to mean “to have unity in one’s primary purposes and beliefs.” Both phrases refer to being in agreement about what matters. If these expressions would be confusing in your language, you may use plain language or use a similar expression from your language. Alternate translation: “with one mind” or “with singleness of purpose” or “in full agreement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHP 1 27 jfxp figs-metaphor ἐν ἑνὶ πνεύματι, μιᾷ ψυχῇ 1 Here, the phrases **in one spirit** and **with one soul** are used to mean “to have unity in one’s primary purposes and beliefs.” Both phrases refer to being in agreement about what matters. If these expressions would be confusing in your language, you may use plain language or use a similar expression from your language. Alternate translation: “with one mind” or “with singleness of purpose” or “in full agreement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 1 27 ej2s συναθλοῦντες 1 striving together Alternate translation: “cooperating together in the work” PHP 1 27 ya3h figs-abstractnouns τῇ πίστει τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 for the faith of the gospel Here, the abstract noun **faith** in the phrase **the faith of the gospel** refers to what believers understand and do as a result of believing the gospel, which is God’s message about Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 28 u9an figs-explicit τῶν ἀντικειμένων 1 The phrase **those opposing you** refers to the people who were opposing the Philippian Christians and causing them trouble. If this would be unclear in your language, consider stating this plainly. Alternate translation: “the people opposing you” or “the people opposing you because you believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ PHP 2 10 b3ai grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** con PHP 2 10 tk45 figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ, πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ 1 at the name of Jesus every knee would bend Here, **every knee** bending is an idiomatic way of saying that Jesus will be worshiped and honored by all. If this would be clear in your language, consider using this expression, but If it would be helpful in your language, consider using an equivalent expression to communicate the idea of worship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) PHP 2 10 xz1u figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ, πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ 1 at the name of Jesus every knee would bend Here, **name** is a metonym for the person, telling who it is they will worship. Alternate translation: “before the person of Jesus” or “every person and being will worship Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHP 2 10 xn7a ἐπουρανίων καὶ ἐπιγείων καὶ καταχθονίων 1 Paul uses the phrase **in heaven and on earth and under the earth** to include to all beings, including human beings and angels. This phrase emphasizes that all beings everywhere will bow in reverence to Jesus. Consider the best way to express this in your language. Alternate translation: “every being in heaven, and on earth, and under the earth” -PHP 2 11 xy4f figs-metonymy πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσηται 1 every tongue Here Paul uses the word **tongue** figuratively to represent the mouth and what comes out of the mouth. Paul is figuratively describing what is said by associating it with the tongue. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “every mouth will declare” or “every being will say” or “everyone will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +PHP 2 11 xy4f figs-metonymy πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσηται 1 every tongue Here Paul uses the word **tongue** to represent the mouth and what comes out of the mouth. Paul is describing what is said by associating it with the tongue. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “every mouth will declare” or “every being will say” or “everyone will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHP 2 11 mr2i grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 to the glory of God the Father Here the word **to** expresses result. Alternate translation: “with the result that God the Father will be honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) PHP 2 11 equs figs-abstractnouns εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 to the glory of God the Father If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** by using a verbal form of this word or by some other way. Alternate translation: “and honor God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 2 12 jnp3 grammar-connect-words-phrases ὥστε 1 Connecting Statement: The phrase **So then** shows that what follows it is the desired result of what preceded it in [2:5-11](../02/05.md). Use the most natural form in your language to show this relationship. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -189,13 +189,13 @@ PHP 2 14 gy6p figs-yousingular πάντα ποιεῖτε χωρὶς γογγυ PHP 2 15 z2lz figs-doublet ἄμεμπτοι καὶ ἀκέραιοι 1 blameless and pure The words **blameless** and **pure** are very similar in meaning and are used together to emphasize the idea of living a morally pure life. You may translate these words individually, as the ULT does, or combine them together into one idea and express their meaning together as a single expression. Consider what would be most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “completely innocent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) PHP 2 15 sp0g figs-metaphor τέκνα Θεοῦ 1 The phrase **children of God** is a metaphorical way of describing people who have entered into a father-child relationship with God by putting their faith and trust in Jesus. Here, **children** does not refer to those who are young, but only to the relationship that people have at any age to their father. If you translate **children** using a literal term, choose a word that can refer to people of any age in relation to their fathers. Alternate translation: “God’s spiritual offspring” or “spiritual children of God” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) PHP 2 15 im15 figs-explicit ἄμωμα 1 The phrase **without blemish** means being free from flaws or defects. Here the phrase **without blemish** specifically means being free from moral flaws or corruption. Consider using an equivalent phrase from your language that would be understood in this context, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who abstain from all evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -PHP 2 15 f957 figs-metonymy ἐν οἷς φαίνεσθε ὡς φωστῆρες ἐν κόσμῳ 1 Paul is figuratively describing people by associating them with the world in which they live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “among whom you shine as lights before the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +PHP 2 15 f957 figs-metonymy ἐν οἷς φαίνεσθε ὡς φωστῆρες ἐν κόσμῳ 1 Paul is describing people by associating them with the world in which they live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “among whom you shine as lights before the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHP 2 15 p71u figs-metaphor φαίνεσθε ὡς φωστῆρες ἐν κόσμῳ 1 you shine as lights in the world Here, the word **lights** represents believers who are living in a righteous way that shows other people what is true and good. “Light”, is often used metaphorically in the Bible to represent truth and the righteous living that aligns with truth. In the Bible, light is often contrasted with darkness, which represents falsehood and living according to it. To **shine as lights in the world** means to live in a way that helps people see God’s truth and character. You can retain this metaphor or express this using plain language. Alternate translation: “you will be examples of God’s goodness and truth in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 2 15 jb7y figs-doublet μέσον γενεᾶς σκολιᾶς καὶ διεστραμμένης 1 in the world, in the midst of a crooked and depraved generation The words **crooked** and **perverted** are used together to emphasize the idea of extreme sinfulness. These two words are very similar in meaning. You may translate these words individually, as the ULT does, or combine them together into one idea and express their meaning together as a single expression. Consider what would be most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “among people who are very sinful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) PHP 2 16 u3qb λόγον ζωῆς ἐπέχοντες 1 holding forth the word of life Here, **holding forth** could mean: (1) holding out to others the word of life. Alternate translation: “holding out the word of life” or “offering the word of life” (2) holding firmly to the word of life. Alternate translation: “holding tightly to the word of life” or “holding firmly to the word of life” PHP 2 16 cher λόγον ζωῆς ἐπέχοντες 1 The phrase **holding forth the word of life** continues the thought from the previous verse and shows in more detail how Christians can become “blameless and pure, children of God” who “shine as lights in the world.” Consider the best way to show this connection in your language. Alternate translation: “as you hold forth the word of life” PHP 2 16 eq86 figs-explicit λόγον ζωῆς 1 the word of life The phrase **word of life** refers to the good news about Jesus. If this would be unclear in your language, consider translating this phrase in plain language. Alternate translation: “the message that gives life” or “the life-giving gospel” or “the life-giving message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -PHP 2 16 nmix figs-metonymy λόγον 1 Here the phrase **the word** means “the gospel.” In his writings, Paul often uses **word** to refer to the message of the gospel. In doing this, Paul is figuratively describing something Christians communicate to others by associating it with words. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the gospel” or “the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +PHP 2 16 nmix figs-metonymy λόγον 1 Here the phrase **the word** means “the gospel.” In his writings, Paul often uses **word** to refer to the message of the gospel. In doing this, Paul is describing something Christians communicate to others by associating it with words. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the gospel” or “the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHP 2 16 i448 figs-explicit λόγον ζωῆς 1 The phrase **the word of life** could mean: (1) the word that gives people life. Alternate translation: “the word that gives life” (2) the word that is about life and that gives life. Alternate translation: “the word that is about life and gives life” (3) the word which contains life and has the ability to give people life. Alternate translation: “the word that contains and gives life” If your language allows you to keep the phrase **the word of life** ambiguous, this is the best option. If your language does not allow you to do this, you may specify clearly how the phrase **of life** is related to **the word**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHP 2 16 fz1d figs-abstractnouns λόγον ζωῆς 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the abstract noun **life** by using it in a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the life-giving word” or “the word which gives life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 2 16 s3z9 grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς καύχημα ἐμοὶ εἰς ἡμέραν Χριστοῦ, ὅτι οὐκ εἰς κενὸν ἔδραμον, οὐδὲ εἰς κενὸν ἐκοπίασα 1 With the phrase **for my boasting on the day of Christ**, Paul introduces a reason that the Philippian believers should try to live out the things he has just told them to do in [2:12](../02/12.md) and ending with the phrase **holding forth the word of life**. Paul here gives one reason for what he has just asked them to do. He says that if they live out what he has just told them, then when Christ returns, he can be proud of the fact that he did not work in vain among them. Consider the best way in your language to show this reason-result relationship. Alternate translation: “so that I will be able to boast on the day Christ returns that I did not run in vain or labor in vain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ PHP 2 16 wyyg εἰς κενὸν…εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translatio PHP 2 16 btgu figs-explicit οὐδὲ εἰς κενὸν ἐκοπίασα 1 Here Paul uses the word **labor** to refer to his spiritual work of sharing the gospel with the Philippian believers and working to help them grow in spiritual maturity. Paul assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to his spiritual work among them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “or work hard for nothing, trying to help you believe in Christ and obey him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHP 2 17 p9km grammar-connect-words-phrases ἀλλ’ εἰ καὶ 1 **But even if** connects the idea of running and laboring for the advance of the gospel, which Paul discussed in [2:16](../02/16.md), with what he says in the rest of this verse. Consider how to translate this phrase in your language in a way that shows this connection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) PHP 2 17 j2ov translate-symaction σπένδομαι ἐπὶ τῇ θυσίᾳ καὶ λειτουργίᾳ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 The phrase **I am being poured out as an offering on the sacrifice** uses imagery from the Old Testament Jewish sacrificial system. A priest would sacrifice an animal on the altar as a burnt offering to God and then pour out wine as a drink offering to God, in order to make the sacrifice complete. See [Num 28:7](../num/28/07.md). If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, consider using it here, but if this imagery would be confusing in your culture, consider translating this imagery using plain language. Alternate translation: “I work and give my life for your sake in order to complete the sacrificial service of your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -PHP 2 17 xlv0 figs-metaphor σπένδομαι 1 Paul uses the phrase **I am being poured out as an offering** to figuratively depict his imprisonment and suffering for the advancement of the gospel. Paul probably is also thinking of the fact that he could be killed in the future for preaching the gospel. If this metaphor would not be clear in your language, consider using plain language to express this idea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHP 2 17 xlv0 figs-metaphor σπένδομαι 1 Paul uses the phrase **I am being poured out as an offering** to depict his imprisonment and suffering for the advancement of the gospel. Paul probably is also thinking of the fact that he could be killed in the future for preaching the gospel. If this metaphor would not be clear in your language, consider using plain language to express this idea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 2 17 ji4w figs-abstractnouns σπένδομαι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the abstract noun **offering** by using a verbal form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 2 17 thi0 figs-activepassive ἐπὶ τῇ θυσίᾳ καὶ λειτουργίᾳ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “on your sacrifice and service which you offer because you believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) PHP 2 17 ip8i figs-hendiadys ἐπὶ τῇ θυσίᾳ καὶ λειτουργίᾳ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 The words **sacrifice** and **service** express a single idea by using two words connected by **and**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this meaning as a single idea or phrase. Alternate translation: “to complete your sacrificial service which you offer because you believe the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ PHP 2 30 kjti figs-abstractnouns παραβολευσάμενος τῇ ψυχ PHP 2 30 x4rl figs-abstractnouns ἵνα ἀναπληρώσῃ τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα, τῆς πρός με λειτουργίας 1 he came near even to death If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **service**, you can express the idea behind the word **service** by using a verb form such as “serve.” Alternate translation: “so that he might make up for your being unable to serve me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 2 30 g98z figs-explicit ἵνα ἀναπληρώσῃ τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα, τῆς πρός με λειτουργίας 1 he might make up your lack of service to me The **lack of service** Paul speaks of here is the inability of the Philippian believers to be present with him in prison. By sending Epaphroditus to Paul, the Philippian believers ministered to Paul’s needs through Epaphroditus, and so Epaphroditus supplied what they could not. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that he might supply what you could not give me” or “so that he might make up for what you could not give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHP 3 intro btx3 0 # Philippians 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 4-8, Paul lists the ways he qualifies for being considered a righteous Jew. In every way, Paul was an exemplary Jew, but he contrasts this with the greatness of knowing Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Dogs

The people of the ancient Near East used dogs as an image to refer to people in a negative way. Not all cultures use the term “dogs” in this way.

### Resurrected bodies

We know very little about what people will be like in heaven. Paul teaches here that Christians will have some kind of glorious body and will be free from sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Prize

Paul uses an extended illustration to describe the Christian life. The goal of the Christian life is to grow to be like Christ while we live on earth. We can never achieve this goal perfectly, but we must strive for it. -PHP 3 1 zu9l figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** figuratively here to refer to anyone who is a fellow believer in Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this plainly. See how you translated this word in [Philippians 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +PHP 3 1 zu9l figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** here to refer to anyone who is a fellow believer in Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this plainly. See how you translated this word in [Philippians 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) PHP 3 1 ymm2 figs-yousingular χαίρετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 rejoice in the Lord The word **rejoice** is a command or instruction to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “I exhort each of you to rejoice in the Lord” or “each of you rejoice in the Lord” or “all of you rejoice in the Lord” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular) PHP 3 1 b8y6 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 rejoice in the Lord Alternate translation: “in your relationship with the Lord” or “in who the Lord is and what he has done” PHP 3 1 qb78 figs-explicit ὑμῖν δὲ ἀσφαλές 1 and is a safeguard for you If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly how writing these things is a **safeguard** for the Philippians. Alternate translation: “and these teachings will protect you from those who teach what is false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -340,10 +340,10 @@ PHP 3 17 h4tv τοὺς οὕτω περιπατοῦντας, καθὼς ἔ PHP 3 18 ab61 figs-metonymy πολλοὶ γὰρ περιπατοῦσιν 1 many walk … as enemies of the cross of Christ Here, the word **walk** is a Jewish figure of speech meaning to “live” or to “conduct one’s life.” In Jewish culture a person’s behavior was spoken of as if that person was walking along a path. If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating this in plain language. Alternate translation: “For many live” or “For many people conduct their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHP 3 18 zwp3 figs-ellipsis πολλοὶ γὰρ 1 I have often told you The phrase **For many** leaves out a word that would be needed in some languages to be completely clear. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply the missing word from the context. Alternate translation: “For many people walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) PHP 3 18 h6pc νῦν δὲ καὶ κλαίων 1 weeping, I say Alternate translation: “but now telling you with great sadness” -PHP 3 18 n8q2 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐχθροὺς τοῦ σταυροῦ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 as enemies of the cross of Christ Paul is figuratively describing the good news of Jesus’ death and resurrection and the work of sharing this good news by associating these things with **the cross of Christ**. Here, the phrase **the cross of Christ** is synonymous with the gospel message and the work of spreading the gospel message. The phrase **enemies of the cross of Christ** refers to the people who are opposed to the message of the gospel and who oppose the people who share the gospel with others. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this with plain language. Alternate translation: “as enemies of the good news about Jesus” or “as enemies of the message about Jesus and enemies of those who proclaim it” or “as enemies of the message about Jesus and enemies of those who share it with others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +PHP 3 18 n8q2 figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐχθροὺς τοῦ σταυροῦ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 as enemies of the cross of Christ Paul is describing the good news of Jesus’ death and resurrection and the work of sharing this good news by associating these things with **the cross of Christ**. Here, the phrase **the cross of Christ** is synonymous with the gospel message and the work of spreading the gospel message. The phrase **enemies of the cross of Christ** refers to the people who are opposed to the message of the gospel and who oppose the people who share the gospel with others. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this with plain language. Alternate translation: “as enemies of the good news about Jesus” or “as enemies of the message about Jesus and enemies of those who proclaim it” or “as enemies of the message about Jesus and enemies of those who share it with others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHP 3 19 v8gv figs-abstractnouns ὧν τὸ τέλος ἀπώλεια 1 whose end is destruction If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **end**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **end** in another way. Alternate translation: “whom God will destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 3 19 vcap figs-abstractnouns ὧν τὸ τέλος ἀπώλεια 1 whose end is destruction If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **destruction**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** by using a verb such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “whom God will destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -PHP 3 19 hn9i figs-synecdoche ὧν ὁ Θεὸς ἡ κοιλία 1 whose god is their belly Here Paul uses **belly** figuratively to represent all physical desires for pleasure. By Paul calling their **belly** their **god**, he means that these people love and serve their physical desire for pleasure rather than loving and serving God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture, or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “who serve their desire for food and other pleasures rather than serve God” or “who obey their physical appetites instead of obeying God” or “who love pleasure more than they love God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +PHP 3 19 hn9i figs-synecdoche ὧν ὁ Θεὸς ἡ κοιλία 1 whose god is their belly Here Paul uses **belly** to represent all physical desires for pleasure. By Paul calling their **belly** their **god**, he means that these people love and serve their physical desire for pleasure rather than loving and serving God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture, or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “who serve their desire for food and other pleasures rather than serve God” or “who obey their physical appetites instead of obeying God” or “who love pleasure more than they love God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) PHP 3 19 u9cl figs-metonymy ἡ δόξα ἐν τῇ αἰσχύνῃ αὐτῶν 1 their glory is in their shame Here, **shame** stands for the actions that people should be ashamed of but are not. Alternate translation: “they are proud of the things that should cause them shame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHP 3 19 exy0 figs-abstractnouns ἡ δόξα ἐν τῇ αἰσχύνῃ αὐτῶν 1 their glory is in their shame If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** by using an adjective such as “proud.” Alternate translation: “who take pride in what should bring them shame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 3 19 r3t0 figs-abstractnouns ἡ δόξα ἐν τῇ αἰσχύνῃ αὐτῶν 1 their glory is in their shame If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **shame**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **shame** by using an adjective such as “ashamed.” Alternate translation: “ who take pride in what should cause them to be ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -358,11 +358,11 @@ PHP 4 1 ngs7 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you transla PHP 4 1 fe2y ἀγαπητοὶ καὶ ἐπιπόθητοι 1 my brothers, beloved and longed for Alternate translation: “whom I love and greatly desire to see” PHP 4 1 wx5w figs-abstractnouns χαρὰ καὶ στέφανός μου 1 my joy and crown If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **joy** by using a verbal form such as “rejoice” or by using an adjective such as “happy.” Alternate translation: “who cause me to be very happy and are my crown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 4 1 lg9a figs-extrainfo χαρὰ καὶ στέφανός μου 1 my joy and crown The phrase **my joy and crown** could refer to: (1) Paul’s current feelings of joy regarding the Philippian Christians and his future hope of being rewarded for his labor among them. Alternate translation: “my source of joy and my future hope of being rewarded when Christ returns” (2) Paul’s joy and reward in the future when Christ returns. Alternate translation: “my hope for joy and reward when Christ returns” (3) Paul’s present joy in the Philippian believers and his present feeling that they are his reward for his work among them. Alternate translation: “my joy and reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -PHP 4 1 kvsk figs-metaphor στέφανός 1 my joy and crown Paul speaks figuratively of the Philippian Christians as if they were his **crown**. At the time Paul wrote this letter, a **crown** was made of leaves and was worn by a person on their head as a sign of their achievement after they had won an important victory. Here, the word **crown** means that the Philippian Christians brought great honor to Paul before God and were a sign of his hard work among them. If your readers would not understand the meaning of this metaphor, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “my reward” or “my honor” or “the sign of my hard work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHP 4 1 kvsk figs-metaphor στέφανός 1 my joy and crown Paul speaks of the Philippian Christians as if they were his **crown**. At the time Paul wrote this letter, a **crown** was made of leaves and was worn by a person on their head as a sign of their achievement after they had won an important victory. Here, the word **crown** means that the Philippian Christians brought great honor to Paul before God and were a sign of his hard work among them. If your readers would not understand the meaning of this metaphor, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “my reward” or “my honor” or “the sign of my hard work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 4 1 t07j οὕτως στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ, ἀγαπητοί 1 in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved Alternate translation: “so continue living for the Lord in the way that I have taught you, dear friends” PHP 4 1 dz44 οὕτως στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ, ἀγαπητοί 1 in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved The phrase **in this way** could refer to: (1) what comes before it, in which case this phrase would mean, “in the way that I have just explained to you” Alternate translation: “stand firm in the Lord in the way that I have just explained to you, beloved” (2) what Paul commands the Philippian Christians to do in [Philippians 4:2-9](../04/02.md). Alternate translation: “stand firm in the Lord, beloved, in this way” PHP 4 1 zu0i figs-yousingular στήκετε 1 in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved The phrase **stand firm** is a command or instruction to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -PHP 4 1 j6fp figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved Here the phrase **stand firm** is used figuratively to refer to the imagery of a soldier remaining in place, not moved by the enemy. Here, Paul gives this metaphor a spiritual meaning to exhort the Philippian Christians to not change their minds but continue believing what they have already believed. If it would be helpful in your language, consider using another metaphor that would make sense in your culture, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “remain unmoved in your belief in Christ” or “remain firm in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHP 4 1 j6fp figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved Here the phrase **stand firm** is used to refer to the imagery of a soldier remaining in place, not moved by the enemy. Here, Paul gives this metaphor a spiritual meaning to exhort the Philippian Christians to not change their minds but continue believing what they have already believed. If it would be helpful in your language, consider using another metaphor that would make sense in your culture, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “remain unmoved in your belief in Christ” or “remain firm in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 4 1 i8ad οὕτως στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved Alternate translation: “stand firm in your union and relationship with the Lord” or “stand firm in your union and communion with the Lord” PHP 4 2 x5qf translate-names Εὐοδίαν…Συντύχην 1 I urge Euodia, and I urge Syntyche **Euodia** and **Syntyche** are the names of women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) PHP 4 3 yb3f figs-yousingular σέ 1 I also ask you Here, **you** refers to the **true companion** and is singular. This is the only occurrence of the word **you** in Philippians that is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) @@ -437,18 +437,18 @@ PHP 4 15 rgxx εἰς λόγον δόσεως καὶ λήμψεως 1 no churc PHP 4 16 getb ὅτι καὶ ἐν Θεσσαλονίκῃ 1 no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone Alternate translation: “for even when I was in Thessalonica” PHP 4 16 puar figs-idiom καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δὶς 1 no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone The phrase **both once and twice** is an idiom meaning that something occurred more than one time. If your readers would not understand this idiom, you could use an equivalent idiom from your language, or you could state this in plain language. Alternate translation: “several times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) PHP 4 16 lqor figs-ellipsis εἰς τὴν χρείαν μοι ἐπέμψατε 1 no church shared with me in the matter of giving and receiving except you alone Paul is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you sent me money to help me with my needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -PHP 4 17 bh3t figs-metaphor ἐπιζητῶ τὸν καρπὸν τὸν πλεονάζοντα εἰς λόγον ὑμῶν 1 I seek the fruit that increases to your account At the time Paul wrote this letter, the word **fruit** could be used in a business context to refer to what was gained in a financial transaction. When used in a business context, the word **fruit** meant “profit” or “gain.” Here Paul is using this business meaning figuratively to refer to God’s reward. If your language has an equivalent word that could be used in a business context, consider using it here if it would be natural in your language. Alternately, you may express this meaning using plain language, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “I seek the profit that increases to your account” or “I seek the gain that increases to your account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHP 4 17 bh3t figs-metaphor ἐπιζητῶ τὸν καρπὸν τὸν πλεονάζοντα εἰς λόγον ὑμῶν 1 I seek the fruit that increases to your account At the time Paul wrote this letter, the word **fruit** could be used in a business context to refer to what was gained in a financial transaction. When used in a business context, the word **fruit** meant “profit” or “gain.” Here Paul is using this business meaning to refer to God’s reward. If your language has an equivalent word that could be used in a business context, consider using it here if it would be natural in your language. Alternately, you may express this meaning using plain language, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “I seek the profit that increases to your account” or “I seek the gain that increases to your account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 4 18 fs44 ἀπέχω…πάντα 1 I have everything in full The phrase **I have everything in full** could mean: (1) that Paul has received **everything** that he needs from the Philippian believers and is therefore sufficiently supplied. Alternate translation: “I have everything I need and am content” (2) that Paul is continuing the business metaphor from [Philippians 4:17](../04/17.md) and is here offering the Philippians a figurative receipt for the gifts they gave him. Alternate translation: “I have received the gift that you sent” PHP 4 18 en6t figs-explicit περισσεύω 1 I abound The phrase **I abound** means that Paul has more than enough of the things that he needs for himself. If it would be helpful in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have more than enough of the things I need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHP 4 18 p6y1 figs-activepassive πεπλήρωμαι, δεξάμενος παρὰ Ἐπαφροδίτου τὰ παρ’ ὑμῶν 1 Connecting Statement: If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the phrase **I have been filled** with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “You have fully provided for me by giving me the things which Epaphroditus brought to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) PHP 4 18 hte4 translate-names Ἐπαφροδίτου 1 I abound **Epaphroditus** is the name of a man. See how you translated his name in [Philippians 2:25](../02/25.md). (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names) -PHP 4 18 s68v figs-metaphor ὀσμὴν εὐωδίας, θυσίαν δεκτήν, εὐάρεστον τῷ Θεῷ 1 an aroma, a sweet smell, an acceptable, pleasing sacrifice to God Here Paul speaks figuratively of the gift from the Philippian believers as if it were a **sacrifice** offered **to God** on an altar. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase by stating the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “which are very pleasing to God” or “which make God happy” or “which I assure you are gifts very pleasing to God, like an acceptable sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHP 4 18 s68v figs-metaphor ὀσμὴν εὐωδίας, θυσίαν δεκτήν, εὐάρεστον τῷ Θεῷ 1 an aroma, a sweet smell, an acceptable, pleasing sacrifice to God Here Paul speaks of the gift from the Philippian believers as if it were a **sacrifice** offered **to God** on an altar. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase by stating the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “which are very pleasing to God” or “which make God happy” or “which I assure you are gifts very pleasing to God, like an acceptable sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 4 19 r96p figs-idiom πληρώσει πᾶσαν χρείαν ὑμῶν 1 will fulfill all your needs The word for **will fulfill** is the same word translated as “have been fulfilled” in verse 18. This phrase is an idiom meaning “will provide everything you need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) PHP 4 19 xmk2 κατὰ τὸ πλοῦτος αὐτοῦ ἐν δόξῃ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 according to his riches in glory in Christ Jesus Alternate translation: “from his glorious riches that he gives through Christ Jesus” PHP 4 20 fba5 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Now to our God When Paul says **our**, he is speaking of himself and the Philippian believers, so **our** is inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) PHP 4 21 h2jr figs-yousingular ἀσπάσασθε 1 The brothers This is a command or instruction to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -PHP 4 21 z65a figs-metaphor οἱ σὺν ἐμοὶ ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated the word **brothers** in [Philippians 1:12](../01/12.md). Paul is using the term **brothers** figuratively here to refer to anyone who is a fellow believer in Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternative translation, “My fellow believers here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHP 4 21 z65a figs-metaphor οἱ σὺν ἐμοὶ ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated the word **brothers** in [Philippians 1:12](../01/12.md). Paul is using the term **brothers** here to refer to anyone who is a fellow believer in Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternative translation, “My fellow believers here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 4 21 kaxz figs-gendernotations οἱ σὺν ἐμοὶ ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated the word **brothers** in [Philippians 1:12](../01/12.md). Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a spiritual sense to include both men and women who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “The brothers and sisters with me” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations) PHP 4 22 rg96 translate-unknown τῆς Καίσαρος οἰκίας 1 especially those from the household of Caesar The phrase **the household of Caesar** refers to the servants who worked in Caesar’s palace. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -PHP 4 23 a3f8 figs-synecdoche μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν 1 be with your spirit Paul figuratively describes the Philippian Christians as whole persons by reference to their **spirit**. Alternate translation: “be with you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche) +PHP 4 23 a3f8 figs-synecdoche μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν 1 be with your spirit Paul describes the Philippian Christians as whole persons by reference to their **spirit**. Alternate translation: “be with you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche) PHP 4 23 nd4z figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν 1 be with your spirit The word **grace** is an abstract noun that can be translated with an adverb. Alternate translation: “May the Lord Jesus Christ act graciously to you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) diff --git a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv index 9c40fd7eec..8fe6126955 100644 --- a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv @@ -19,8 +19,8 @@ COL 1 4 gjwb figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀγάπην ἣν ἔχετε εἰς COL 1 5 n1qz figs-metonymy τὴν ἐλπίδα 1 because of the hope that is reserved for you in the heavens Here, **hope** refers not only to the attitude of hopefulness but also to what the believer hopes for, that is, what God has promised to give to all believers. If **hope** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “what you hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 1 5 bmpc figs-activepassive τὴν ἀποκειμένην 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “that God is reserving for” or “that God has prepared for” or “that God has ready for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) COL 1 5 xn8s figs-possession τῷ λόγῳ τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the word of truth, the gospel Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **word** that is characterized by **truth**. This could refer to: (1) a message that is truth. Alternate translation: “the message that is true” (2) a message concerning the truth. Alternate translation: “the message about the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -COL 1 5 ir6k figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ 1 the word of truth, the gospel Here, **word** figuratively represents a message that is made up of words. If **word** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the announcement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -COL 1 6 p5rv figs-personification τοῦ παρόντος εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, the good news is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could be **present** with the Colossians. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “which was told to you in Colossae” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +COL 1 5 ir6k figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ 1 the word of truth, the gospel Here, **word** represents a message that is made up of words. If **word** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the announcement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +COL 1 6 p5rv figs-personification τοῦ παρόντος εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, the good news is spoken of as though it were a person who could be **present** with the Colossians. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “which was told to you in Colossae” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) COL 1 6 z3g5 figs-hyperbole ἐν παντὶ τῷ κόσμῳ 1 in all the world Here, **in all the world** is a generalization referring to the part of the **world** that Paul and the Colossians knew about. If **all the world** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that **world** refers to the known world at that time. Alternate translation: “in every place that we know about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) COL 1 6 wk21 figs-metaphor ἐστὶν καρποφορούμενον καὶ αὐξανόμενον 1 is bearing fruit and is growing Here, Paul speaks of the gospel as if it were a plant that could grow and produce fruit. He means that the gospel reaches more people and that it changes how people think and behave. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “is reaching more people so that they do what is pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 1 6 ev91 figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Paul leaves out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your language needs these words, you could supply them from the context. Alternate translation: “just as this good news has reached you so that you do what is pleasing to God” or “just as it has done among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ COL 1 9 k8x2 σοφίᾳ καὶ συνέσει πνευματικῇ 1 Here, COL 1 9 w78g figs-doublet σοφίᾳ καὶ συνέσει πνευματικῇ 1 in all wisdom and spiritual understanding The words **wisdom** and **understanding** mean very similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the breadth of spiritual wisdom. If your language does not use repetition in this way or has only one word for this concept, you can use just one word. Alternate translation: “spiritual comprehension” or “spiritual insight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) COL 1 10 m4hf figs-metaphor περιπατῆσαι ἀξίως τοῦ Κυρίου 1 to walk worthily of the Lord Here, the word **walk** is a figurative way to refer to behavior in life. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to behave in the way that the Lord expects you to behave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 1 10 vv4g figs-abstractnouns εἰς πᾶσαν ἀρεσκείαν 1 in every pleasing way If your language does not use abstract nouns, you can express the idea behind the phrase **pleasing way** with a verb. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “doing everything that pleases him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -COL 1 10 vfp3 figs-metaphor ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ ἀγαθῷ καρποφοροῦντες 1 bearing fruit Paul is speaking figuratively of the Colossian believers as if they were trees or plants and of the things that they do as if it were their fruit. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a different figure or in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “performing many good deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 1 10 vfp3 figs-metaphor ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ ἀγαθῷ καρποφοροῦντες 1 bearing fruit Paul is speaking of the Colossian believers as if they were trees or plants and of the things that they do as if it were their fruit. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a different figure or in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “performing many good deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 1 10 b9l1 figs-abstractnouns αὐξανόμενοι τῇ ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you can express the idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “knowing God better and better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 1 11 gxv6 figs-activepassive δυναμούμενοι 1 being strengthened If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea with an active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God strengthening you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) COL 1 11 da4r figs-possession τὸ κράτος τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ 1 Paul uses the possessive form to describe **power** that is characterized by God’s **glory**. If your language does not use this form to express that idea, you can use an adjective such as “glorious” or “great” instead of the noun **glory**. Alternate translation: “his glorious power” or “his great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ COL 1 13 dw5k figs-metaphor τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ σκότους 1 t COL 1 13 z8b5 figs-possession τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ σκότους 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an **authority** that is characterized by **darkness** (a metaphor for evil). If your language does not use this form to express that idea, you can use a verb such as “rule” or “control” for the noun **authority**. Alternate translation: “the evil that ruled us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 1 13 i0sn figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ σκότους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **authority**, you can express that idea in another way, such as with a verb. Alternate translation: “the dark things that controlled us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 1 13 kgvf figs-metaphor μετέστησεν 1 Here Paul speaks about a change in who rules over believers as if they were moving from one location to another. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “made us subject instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -COL 1 13 l2ex figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τῆς ἀγάπης αὐτοῦ 1 Paul speaks figuratively of the people who belong to God’s Son as if they were citizens of a kingdom. He means that they are members of a community that obeys God’s Son Jesus and belongs to him. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “so that his beloved Son reigns over us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 1 13 l2ex figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τῆς ἀγάπης αὐτοῦ 1 Paul speaks of the people who belong to God’s Son as if they were citizens of a kingdom. He means that they are members of a community that obeys God’s Son Jesus and belongs to him. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “so that his beloved Son reigns over us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 1 13 o1pl figs-possession τοῦ Υἱοῦ τῆς ἀγάπης αὐτοῦ 1 Paul uses the possessive form to characterize the **Son** as **his beloved**. If your language does not use this form to express that idea, you can express the idea behind **his beloved** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “of the Son he loves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 1 13 zav6 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Υἱοῦ τῆς ἀγάπης αὐτοῦ 1 of his beloved Son **Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between God the Father (who is mentioned in the previous verse ([1:12](../01/12.md))) and Jesus. Alternate translation: “of Jesus, God the Father’s beloved Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) COL 1 14 qe6x translate-textvariants τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν 1 in whom Some later manuscripts add “through his blood” after **redemption**. Most likely, “through his blood” was accidentally added because of how similar this verse is to [Ephesians 1:7](../eph/01/07.md), which does include “through his blood.” Most likely, you should not include “through his blood” in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) @@ -90,8 +90,8 @@ COL 1 18 ybqn figs-nominaladj τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Paul is using the adjecti COL 1 18 uqrv grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα γένηται ἐν πᾶσιν αὐτὸς πρωτεύων 1 This clause could identify: (1) the result of Jesus starting the church and coming back from the dead. Alternate translation: “with the result that he is first among all things” (2) the purpose of Jesus starting the church and coming back from the dead. Alternate translation: “in order that he might be first among all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) COL 1 18 jjgh figs-metaphor γένηται ἐν πᾶσιν αὐτὸς πρωτεύων 1 Paul here describes Jesus as if he were **first** to do or be something. This does not refer to time or sequence, but rather it refers to importance. If the meaning of **first** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable expression or in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he himself might become the most important person in all creation” or “he himself might be greater than everything and anybody else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 1 19 npzz grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 The word **for** provides a reason for previous statements. If **for** by itself would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify for which statements this verse gives a reason. These statements could be (1) everything in the previous verse, including the Son’s headship over the church, his founding of the church, his resurrection, and his status as most important. Alternate translation: “He is all these things because” (2) why the Son is first among all things. Alternate translation: “He is first among all things because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -COL 1 19 nyos figs-explicit ἐν αὐτῷ εὐδόκησεν πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα κατοικῆσαι 1 The verb **was pleased** implies a personal subject, which must be God the Father. By using the phrase **all the fullness**, Paul is speaking figuratively of everything that God the Father is, either by ellipsis or metonymy. If this way of speaking would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “God the Father was pleased to make all of his fullness dwell in the Son” or “all the fullness of God the Father was pleased to dwell in the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -COL 1 19 zu89 figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ εὐδόκησεν πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα κατοικῆσαι 1 Here, Paul speaks figuratively of the Son as though he were a house in which God’s **fullness** could **dwell**. This does not mean that God lives inside of the Son or that the Son is part of God. This means that the Son has all the divinity of God. It means that the Son is fully God just as the Father is fully God. If the metaphor might be misunderstood in your language, you could state it more plainly. Alternate translation: “the Son is fully God in every way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 1 19 nyos figs-explicit ἐν αὐτῷ εὐδόκησεν πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα κατοικῆσαι 1 The verb **was pleased** implies a personal subject, which must be God the Father. By using the phrase **all the fullness**, Paul is speaking of everything that God the Father is, either by ellipsis or metonymy. If this way of speaking would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “God the Father was pleased to make all of his fullness dwell in the Son” or “all the fullness of God the Father was pleased to dwell in the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +COL 1 19 zu89 figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ εὐδόκησεν πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα κατοικῆσαι 1 Here, Paul speaks of the Son as though he were a house in which God’s **fullness** could **dwell**. This does not mean that God lives inside of the Son or that the Son is part of God. This means that the Son has all the divinity of God. It means that the Son is fully God just as the Father is fully God. If the metaphor might be misunderstood in your language, you could state it more plainly. Alternate translation: “the Son is fully God in every way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 1 19 wmdw figs-metonymy πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα 1 In the context, **fullness** stands for the **fullness** of divinity, or everything that characterizes God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clear that **fullness** refers to the **fullness** of God. Alternate translation: “the full divinity of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 1 20 qweh ἀποκαταλλάξαι 1 through the blood of his cross This verse continues the sentence from the previous verse, so **to reconcile** continues the same verb from there, “was pleased,” along with its implied subject, God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could repeat that subject and verb here. Alternate translation: “God the Father was pleased to reconcile” COL 1 20 cf2d τὰ πάντα 1 through the blood of his cross Here, **all things** includes everything that God created, including people. If **all things** would be misunderstood in your language, you could be more specific. Alternate translation: “all things and all people” @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ COL 1 25 j4xm figs-abstractnouns τὴν οἰκονομίαν 1 The word **ste COL 1 25 t0oa figs-possession τὴν οἰκονομίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **stewardship** that could (1) come from God. Alternate translation: “the stewardship from God” (2) belong to God and be **given** to Paul. Alternate translation: “God’s own stewardship” or “God’s own oversight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 1 25 s0ax figs-activepassive τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “that God gave to me” or “that he gave me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) COL 1 25 t6ud figs-possession τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to fulfill the word of God Paul uses the possessive form to describe a word that is (1) from God. Alternate translation: “the word that came from God” (2) about God. Alternate translation: “the word about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -COL 1 25 elpv figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to fulfill the word of God Here, **word** figuratively represents a message that is made up of words. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message from God” or “God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +COL 1 25 elpv figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to fulfill the word of God Here, **word** represents a message that is made up of words. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message from God” or “God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 1 26 f3mt figs-activepassive τὸ μυστήριον τὸ ἀποκεκρυμμένον 1 the mystery that had been hidden If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “the mystery that God had hidden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) COL 1 26 ijtl translate-unknown τὸ μυστήριον 1 Here Paul calls “the word of God,” from [1:25](../01/25.md), a **mystery**. This does not mean that it is hard to understand, but rather, it had not yet been revealed. Now, however, Paul says that it “has been revealed.” If your language would not use **mystery** to refer to something that has been revealed, you could replace **mystery** with a short descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “the concealed message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 1 26 emw6 figs-explicit τὸ ἀποκεκρυμμένον ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν γενεῶν 1 This clause does not mean that the **ages** and the **generations** were unable to understand the “mystery.” Instead, **from the ages** and **from the generations** refer to the time during which the mystery was hidden. Those from whom the mystery was hidden are not expressed explicitly, but it is clear that they are those who were alive during those times. If your language would express explicitly those from whom the mystery was hidden, you could insert it into the sentence. Alternate translation: “that has been hidden from the people who lived during the ages and in the generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ COL 1 27 nkz3 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς δόξης 1 the hope COL 1 28 va1x figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς καταγγέλλομεν…παραστήσωμεν 1 We proclaim … we may present The pronoun **we** in this verse does not include the Colossians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) COL 1 28 lyz1 figs-explicit πάντα ἄνθρωπον -1 so that we may present every man Here, **every man** refers to every person whom Paul has told about Jesus. If **every man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “every man whom we talk to … each of them … each of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 1 28 pwff figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον -1 Here, the word **man** does not refer to only male people but to any human being. If **man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a term that refers to humans in general. Alternate translation: “human” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -COL 1 28 y1sb figs-hyperbole πάσῃ σοφίᾳ 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively when he says that he uses **all wisdom**, by which he means that he uses all of the wisdom that he possesses. He does not mean that he possesses all the wisdom that exists. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could state this more plainly. Alternate translation: “all of the wisdom that we have” or “all of the wisdom that God has given us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +COL 1 28 y1sb figs-hyperbole πάσῃ σοφίᾳ 1 Here Paul speaks when he says that he uses **all wisdom**, by which he means that he uses all of the wisdom that he possesses. He does not mean that he possesses all the wisdom that exists. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could state this more plainly. Alternate translation: “all of the wisdom that we have” or “all of the wisdom that God has given us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) COL 1 28 p1la grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα παραστήσωμεν 1 Paul here explains the goal or purpose for which he and those with him “admonish” and “teach” people. In your translation, use a phrase that designates goal or purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that we may present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) COL 1 28 rrvr figs-explicit παραστήσωμεν πάντα ἄνθρωπον τέλειον ἐν Χριστῷ 1 In this context, when Paul says that he intends to **present** people, he does not say to whom or where he will **present** them. If your language would include this information, you could explain what the situation is. Paul could be referring to (1) when people appear before God on the judgment day. Alternate translation: “we may present every man complete in Christ to God the Father on the judgment day” (2) when people worship God. Alternate translation: “we may present every man complete in Christ when they come before God in worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 1 28 uk2i translate-unknown τέλειον 1 complete The word **complete** in this context means that a person is what he or she is supposed to be and is able to do what he or she is called to do. If **complete** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that has this meaning, such as “perfect” or “excellent,” or you could translate **complete** with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “fit for what God has called him to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ COL 2 22 klsg figs-possession τὰ ἐντάλματα καὶ διδασκαλ COL 2 22 d4lu figs-abstractnouns τὰ ἐντάλματα καὶ διδασκαλίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **commands** and **teachings**, you can express the idea by using verbs. Alternate translation: “what men command and teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 2 22 oqmf figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the word **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether men or women. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of men and women” or “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) COL 2 23 r2m8 figs-idiom λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας 1 Commands that have **a word of wisdom** are commands that come from wise thinking or require wise behavior. If this **having indeed a word of wisdom** would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idiom with a comparable expression, or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “are indeed characterized by wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -COL 2 23 h2hk figs-metonymy λόγον 1 Here, **word** figuratively represents a message that is made up of words. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a message” or “a lesson” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +COL 2 23 h2hk figs-metonymy λόγον 1 Here, **word** represents a message that is made up of words. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a message” or “a lesson” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 2 23 y2dc figs-hypo ἅτινά…λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας ἐν ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ καὶ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ, ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος 1 These, having indeed a word of wisdom in self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body While there is no grammatical marker for a condition here, the word **in** functionally introduces a condition: these commands have a **word of wisdom** “if” one values **self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body**. It is only if one values these things that the commands have wisdom. If Paul’s explanation of how these commands could have **wisdom** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using a conditional expression, or use the word “seem.” Alternate translation: “which, having indeed a word of wisdom if one values self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) COL 2 23 g60j figs-abstractnouns λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας ἐν ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ καὶ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ, ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος, 1 These, having indeed a word of wisdom in self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body If your language does not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **wisdom**, **religion**, **humility**, and **severity**, you can rephrase this part of the verse so that you can express these ideas with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “having indeed a word that seems wise according to people who serve God in their own way, who humble themselves for gain, and who act severely to their bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 2 23 vr8p translate-unknown ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ 1 The phrase **self-made religion** could describe (1) people who worship God however they want to. Alternate translation: “invented religion” (2) people who pretend to worship God but do not. Alternate translation: “mock worship” or “false worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ COL 3 15 bfnp εὐχάριστοι γίνεσθε 1 in your hearts Alternate t COL 3 16 agax figs-imperative ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐνοικείτω ἐν ὑμῖν πλουσίως 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Here Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express Paul’s command in the second person with the Colossians as the subject of a verb such as “welcome.” Alternate translation: “Welcome the word of Christ richly into your lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) COL 3 16 w9dv figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐνοικείτω ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Here Paul speaks as if the **word of Christ** were a person who could **dwell** or live in a location, which is the group of believers in Colossae. This metaphor emphasizes how the **word of Christ** should be a consistent and constant part of the Colossians’ lives as surely as if it were somebody permanently living with them. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “Let the word of Christ be a part of your lives consistently and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 16 g0h5 figs-possession ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Here Paul uses the possessive form to relate **the word** to **Christ**. This could mean: (1) that **the word** is about **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the word concerning the Messiah” (2) that **the word** is spoken by **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the word from Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -COL 3 16 mz40 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Here, **word** figuratively represents a message that is made up of words. If **word** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +COL 3 16 mz40 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Here, **word** represents a message that is made up of words. If **word** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 3 16 frn8 figs-metaphor πλουσίως 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Here Paul speaks as if the “word” were wealthy and could do something **richly**. He uses this metaphor to command that the word should dwell in the Colossians completely and with all the blessings that come from it. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “in every way and with every blessing” or “fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 16 aqx3 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **wisdom**, you can express the idea another way. Alternate translation: “in all wise ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 3 16 e44g grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ, διδάσκοντες καὶ νουθετοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς…ᾄδοντες 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Paul uses the words **teaching**, **admonishing**, and **singing** to show the Colossians some ways in which they can “let the word of Christ dwell” in them. Therefore, **teaching**, **admonishing**, and **singing** happen at the same time as **the word of Christ** dwelling in them. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could directly state it. Alternate translation: (start a new sentence) “you could do this by teaching and admonishing one another in all wisdom … and by singing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) @@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ COL 4 3 sct4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμῖν 1 In this verse, the word * COL 4 3 ql6g grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the content of what they should pray. Alternate translation: “that” or “asking that” (2) the purpose for which the Colossians should pray for Paul. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) COL 4 3 ub1i figs-metaphor ὁ Θεὸς ἀνοίξῃ ἡμῖν θύραν τοῦ λόγου 1 God may open a door Here Paul speaks of God providing opportunities for Paul and Timothy to preach the gospel as if God were “opening” a **door** to them **for the word**. The image is of God opening a door so that Paul and Timothy can go in and preach the message about Christ. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “God may give us opportunities to preach the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 4 3 m7z4 figs-doublet τοῦ λόγου, λαλῆσαι 1 God may open a door Here, **for the word** and **to speak** mean almost the same thing. If your language would not use both of phrases here, you could combine them into one. Alternate translation: “to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -COL 4 3 w4fl figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου 1 God may open a door Here, **word** figuratively represents a message that is made up of words. If **word** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for the message” or “for what we say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +COL 4 3 w4fl figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου 1 God may open a door Here, **word** represents a message that is made up of words. If **word** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for the message” or “for what we say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 4 3 tl71 grammar-connect-logic-goal λαλῆσαι 1 may open a door to us for the word The phrase **to speak** indicates the purpose for which the “door” is opened. If **to speak** would not indicate purpose in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does indicate purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that we might speak” or “so that we can speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) COL 4 3 ce37 translate-unknown τὸ μυστήριον 1 the mystery of Christ Paul speaks of his message as **the mystery** of Christ. This does not mean that the message is hard to understand, but rather that it had not previously been revealed. Now, however, Paul does “make it clear” (as [4:4](../04/04.md) says). If a **mystery** that is revealed or spoken would be misunderstood in your language, you could replace **mystery** with a short descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “the concealed message” or “the previously hidden message” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown) COL 4 3 fkva figs-possession τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the mystery of Christ Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of a **mystery** whose content is a message about **Christ**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can express the idea with a preposition such as “about” or a relative clause such as “that concerns.” Alternate translation: “the mystery that concerns Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) diff --git a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv index 97cc25189d..07dfb7d185 100644 --- a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv @@ -4,13 +4,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 1 1 ms5e figs-ellipsis Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Paul and Silvanus and Timothy to the church Here some words are omitted that a sentence would need in order to be complete in many languages. Alternate translation: “We are Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, writing to the church” (See rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis) 1TH 1 1 zivb figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Paul and Silvanus and Timothy to the church Paul is understood to be the author of this letter. Silvanus and Timothy are with him as he writes and are in agreement with what he writes. If that might not be understood in your language, you could include this information in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, together with Silvanus and Timothy, write” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 1 1 r7n0 translate-names Σιλουανὸς 1 Paul and Silvanus and Timothy to the church The name **Silvanus** is a longer form of the name **Silas**, the form of the name used for this same man in the book of Acts. You could choose to use the shorter form here as well, or you could choose to use the longer form here and include a footnote explaining that they are forms of the same name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -1TH 1 1 z7wu figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Paul and Silvanus and Timothy to the church Here Paul speaks figuratively of the believers as though they were occupying space inside of God and Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “sharing life with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 1 1 z7wu figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Paul and Silvanus and Timothy to the church Here Paul speaks of the believers as though they were occupying space inside of God and Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “sharing life with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 1 1 vlb3 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεῷ Πατρὶ καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 When **God** is called **Father** (See [1:3](../01/03.md)), it is meant to highlight his relationship to **Jesus** as “Son” (See [1:10](../01/10.md)). Here, the Old Testament title for **God**, **Lord**, is applied to **Jesus**, equating him with **God**. Be sure to accurately translate these titles in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1TH 1 1 luw5 translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 Grace and peace to you This phrase is a common biblical blessing formula and greeting (See Rom. 1:7; 1 Cor. 1:3; 2 Cor. 1:2; Gal. 1:3; Eph. 1:2; Phil. 1:2; Col. 1:2; 2 Th. 1:2; Philem. 1:3; 1 Pet. 1:2; 2 Pet. 1:2; Rev. 1:4). Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing that could be used as a greeting in your language. Alternate translation: “May God give you his grace and peace” or “I pray that God shows you favor and keeps you safe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) 1TH 1 1 qx70 figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 Grace and peace to you The words **grace** and **peace** are abstract nouns. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs or description words. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “We pray that God will treat you kindly and give you peaceful relationships.” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) 1TH 1 1 nn67 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 to you Throughout this letter the word **you** is plural and refers to the church of Thessalonica, unless otherwise noted. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you) 1TH 1 2 of3g figs-infostructure εὐχαριστοῦμεν…ποιούμενοι 1 In this verse Paul describes the apostles’ prayers for the Thessalonians in two clauses. The first clause is specific, that they **give thanks to God**, and the second is general, that they are **making mention** of them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of the clauses, as done in the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure) -1TH 1 2 o7cp figs-hyperbole πάντοτε…μνείαν ποιούμενοι ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν ἡμῶν, ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Here the words **always** and **continually** are exaggerations that figuratively express the intensity and frequency of the prayers offered up to God by Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy for the Thessalonians. If your language would not use exaggeration in this way, use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We regularly give thanks to God for all of you, very often making mention of you in our prayers” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole) +1TH 1 2 o7cp figs-hyperbole πάντοτε…μνείαν ποιούμενοι ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν ἡμῶν, ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Here the words **always** and **continually** are exaggerations that express the intensity and frequency of the prayers offered up to God by Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy for the Thessalonians. If your language would not use exaggeration in this way, use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We regularly give thanks to God for all of you, very often making mention of you in our prayers” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole) 1TH 1 3 ecw0 figs-idiom μνημονεύοντες ὑμῶν τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης, καὶ τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν; 1 The main verb of this sentence is “we give thanks” (See [1:2](../01/02.md)). The phrase **remembering … before our God and Father** is an idiom that also means to thank God in prayer. The apostles are **remembering** these things about the Thessalonians and thanking God for them. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could move the phrase **before our God and Father** to follow **remembering**. Alternate translation: “offering thanks for … to our God and Father” or “gratefully mentioning to our God and Father … Christ” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom) 1TH 1 3 w769 figs-possession τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης, καὶ τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Paul uses three pairs of words in a possessive relationship here. The most likely meaning of this possessive relationship is that the second word of each pair is the motivation for the first word of the pair. Alternate translation: “work motivated by faith and labor because of love and endurance based on future promises” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession) 1TH 1 3 kr8q figs-possession τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The words **in our Lord Jesus Christ** is a possessive form. The relationship between **our Lord Jesus Christ** and **hope** could refer to: (1) Jesus as the object of hope. Alternate translation: “that our Lord Jesus Christ will do what he has promised” (2) Jesus as the source of hope. Alternate translation: “that comes from our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession) @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 1 6 kgjr ὑμεῖς 1 you became imitators The word translated **you** is in a position that gives it special emphasis as a new topic. Use a natural way in your language to show that Paul is now going to talk about the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “on your part, you” or “you yourselves” 1TH 1 6 b607 figs-explicit τοῦ Κυρίου 1 **Lord** here refers to Jesus, as in [1:3](../01/03.md). Throughout this letter, whenever Paul uses the title **Lord**, it refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include the name here. See the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) 1TH 1 6 w222 grammar-connect-logic-contrast μετὰ χαρᾶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 If it is natural in your language, you may want to indicate a contrast between this phrase and the one before it. Alternate translation: “yet in spite of that, you had joy from the Holy Spirit” or “and even so, the Holy Spirit caused you to be joyful” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast) -1TH 1 6 c2hl figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, **the word** figuratively represents a message that is made up of words. It refers to the same message called “our gospel” in [1:5](../01/05.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the gospel message” or “God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TH 1 6 c2hl figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, **the word** represents a message that is made up of words. It refers to the same message called “our gospel” in [1:5](../01/05.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the gospel message” or “God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 1 6 wura figs-abstractnouns ἐν θλίψει πολλῇ 1 If your language would not use the abstract noun **hardship**, you could express the idea behind it with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “while you were deeply distressed” or “as people made you suffer” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) 1TH 1 6 r7o6 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ χαρᾶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 If your language would not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **joy**, you could translate this with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “you rejoiced because of the Holy Spirit” or “but remaining joyful because of the Holy Spirit” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) 1TH 1 6 ohen figs-possession μετὰ χαρᾶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a relationship between **the Holy Spirit** and **joy**. This relationship could be: (1) the Holy Spirit is the source of joy. Alternate translation: “with joy from the Holy Spirit” or “as the Holy Spirit caused you to rejoice” (2) joy is the response to having the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “with the joy of those who belong to the Holy Spirit” or “with joy because you belong to the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 1 7 xetp ἐν τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 The phrases **in Macedonia** and **in Achaia** mean that **those who believe** lived in any part of those provinces. Alternate translation: “throughout Macedonia and Achaia” or “throughout the regions of Macedonia and Achaia” or “across all of Macedonia and Achaia” 1TH 1 8 da73 figs-infostructure ἀφ’ ὑμῶν γὰρ ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 By putting **For from you** at the beginning of the sentence, Paul is emphasizing that it was the Thessalonians who have spread the word of God throughout the area. Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this. Alternate translation: “Indeed, it was from you that people heard the word of the Lord” or “Yes, you were the ones who proclaimed the word of the Lord” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure) 1TH 1 8 smjv grammar-connect-words-phrases ἀφ’ ὑμῶν γὰρ 1 This verse connects to verse 7 as an explanation of how the Thessalonian church became an example of faithfulness to God throughout Macedonia and Achaia and beyond. Use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation in your language. Alternate translation: “Certainly, from you” or “Indeed, from all of you” or “Because from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 1 8 qyk6 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord The phrase **the word of the Lord** figuratively refers to “the whole message of the Lord’s gospel.” Alternate translation: “the gospel message about the Lord Jesus Christ” or “the Lord’s gospel message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TH 1 8 qyk6 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord The phrase **the word of the Lord** refers to “the whole message of the Lord’s gospel.” Alternate translation: “the gospel message about the Lord Jesus Christ” or “the Lord’s gospel message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 1 8 sht4 figs-metaphor ἐξήχηται 1 has been sounded out Here, **has been sounded out** uses a metaphor of a ringing bell or resounding instrument that can be heard from far away to describe how clearly and far the news of the Thessalonians’ faithfulness to God has spread throughout the world. If this might be misunderstood in your language, use an equivalent metaphor, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “has shone forth” or “has spread far and wide” or “has been heard” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) 1TH 1 8 esk9 figs-synecdoche ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν 1 Here, **faith** stands for the way that the Thessalonian church lived in faithful obedience to God. If this might be misunderstood in your language, use an expanded phrase. Alternate translation: “news of the way that you trust in God” or “the report about your faithfulness toward God” or “your faithful example before God” (See rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche) 1TH 1 8 lxc3 figs-metaphor ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἐξελήλυθεν 1 Here, **your faith toward God has gone out** is a metaphor that pictures **faith** as something that can travel. This metaphor has the same meaning as the previous one about the sound of a bell going out. It means that the news of the Thessalonians’ faithfulness to God has spread very far. If this might be misunderstood in your language, use an equivalent metaphor, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “people have heard about your faith toward God in every place” or “news of your trust in God has been heard in every place” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 1 9 xeff figs-explicit ὁποίαν εἴσοδον ἔσχομεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 what kind of reception we had with you Paul implies that the **kind of reception** they had from the Thessalonians was a good one. If that would not be understood by your readers, you could indicate it explicitly. Alternate translation: “what a good reception we had from you” or “how gladly you welcomed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 1 9 dkv4 figs-idiom πῶς ἐπεστρέψατε πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν 1 you turned to God from the idols to serve the living and true God Here, the phrase **how you turned** is an idiom that simply refers to the fact that they turned, not to the manner of how they turned. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “that you turned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 1 9 wpbm figs-doublet ἐπεστρέψατε πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἀπὸ τῶν εἰδώλων, δουλεύειν Θεῷ ζῶντι καὶ ἀληθινῷ 1 you turned to God from the idols to serve the living and true God If it would be more natural in your language, you could combine the two phrases **to God** and **to serve the living and true God** into one phrase. Alternate translation: “you turned from serving the idols to serve the living and true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1TH 1 9 u1um figs-metaphor ἐπεστρέψατε πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἀπὸ τῶν εἰδώλων 1 you turned to God from the idols to serve the living and true God Paul speaks figuratively of the Thessalonian believers as if they had been facing toward their idols and then turned around to face toward God. He means that they no longer worship idols, but now they worship God. If this metaphor might be misunderstood in your language, use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you started worshiping God and left the idols behind” or “you abandoned the idols so that you could worship God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 1 9 u1um figs-metaphor ἐπεστρέψατε πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἀπὸ τῶν εἰδώλων 1 you turned to God from the idols to serve the living and true God Paul speaks of the Thessalonian believers as if they had been facing toward their idols and then turned around to face toward God. He means that they no longer worship idols, but now they worship God. If this metaphor might be misunderstood in your language, use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you started worshiping God and left the idols behind” or “you abandoned the idols so that you could worship God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 1 9 fa47 grammar-connect-logic-goal δουλεύειν 1 Here, **to serve** introduces a purpose clause. The reason why these people stopped worshiping idols was in order to serve God. Use a natural method of introducing a purpose clause in your language. Alternate translation: “in order to begin serving” or “for the purpose of serving” or “so that you could serve” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal) 1TH 1 9 gv76 figs-parallelism ἀπὸ τῶν εἰδώλων, δουλεύειν Θεῷ ζῶντι καὶ ἀληθινῷ 1 This phrase expresses parallelism, by contrasting the deadness and falseness of idols with the living and real God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1TH 1 9 ou5h figs-explicit ἀπὸ τῶν εἰδώλων, δουλεύειν Θεῷ ζῶντι καὶ ἀληθινῷ 1 By using the terms **living and true** to describe God, Paul is implying that these terms do not apply to the idols or to the gods that those idols represent. The idols themselves are made of materials that are not alive. The gods that they represent are living beings, but they are not **true** gods, because people do not owe them obedience or worship as they do to the God who created them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include this information in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “from worshiping the non-living statues of false gods in order to serve the real God who is alive” or “from the dead idols in order to serve the God who lives and deserves our worship” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 1 10 yh5s figs-explicit τὸν ῥυόμενον 1 Here, **rescuing** does not mean being taken away from God’s wrath after experiencing it. Instead, it means being taken away from any danger of experiencing God’s wrath. Alternate translation: “the one saving us” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) 1TH 1 10 pt1s figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 the one rescuing us This is an inclusive use of **us**, including Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, and the Thessalonians–and by extension—all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “all of us Christians” or “we who trust in Christ” or “all of us believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 1 10 g3zz figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 Here, **wrath** is an abstract noun referring to the destined **coming** of God’s future and final Judgment. If it is clearer in your language, you could translate this as a verb form. Alternate translation: “from the future time when God punishes those who do not trust in him” or “when God will certainly punish those who worship idols” or “from God’s impending judgment” (See: [What is the “second coming” of Jesus?](../front/intro)) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 1 10 cx5g figs-metaphor τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 Paul speaks figuratively of **wrath** as though it were something that could travel and is **coming** to where people are. He means by this that in the future an event will happen when God will act wrathfully against people who have sinned and who have not trusted in Jesus to forgive their sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment that will happen” or “when God will punish people for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 1 10 cx5g figs-metaphor τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 Paul speaks of **wrath** as though it were something that could travel and is **coming** to where people are. He means by this that in the future an event will happen when God will act wrathfully against people who have sinned and who have not trusted in Jesus to forgive their sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment that will happen” or “when God will punish people for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 2 intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 2 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 2

1. Apostolic Suffering (2:1-13)
* Apostolic preaching (2:1-6)
* Apostolic conduct (2:7-9)
* Apostolic witness (2:10-3)
2. Persecution of the Church (2:14-16)
* Thessalonian persecution (2:14a)
* Jewish persecution (2:14b-16)
3. Paul’s Desire to Visit (2:17-20)

## Structure and Formatting

The first part of this chapter is a defense of their apostleship and sufferings. The second part is a recounting of the Thessalonian church’s sufferings. Lastly, the apostle Paul makes known his deep desire to visit the Thessalonian church.

## “We” and “You”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Apostolic witness

Here, Paul defends how he, Silvanus, and Timothy are God’s apostles. By their preaching, conduct, and witness, they prove to be authorized messengers of Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]])

### The gospel of God

The foundation of the apostolic witness is that they were “entrusted with the gospel” (See [2:4](../02/04.md)).The apostles’ authority makes them: “bold to speak” (See [2:2](../02/02.md)), “impart” (See [2:8](../02/08.md)), “preach” (See [2:9](../02/09.md)), and thank God that the Thessalonian church “received the word of God” (See [2:13](../02/13.md)).

### The Second Coming of Christ

In this chapter is the first mention of the Second Coming of Christ in its two facets. First, Paul mentions that the persecutors of Christ’s Church will be judged by using the phrase “wrath has come upon them” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Next, Paul speaks of the “hope” and “joy” and “glory” for those who will “be saved” (See [2:16](../02/16.md)) “in the presence of our Lord Jesus Christ at his coming” (See [2:19-20](../02/19.md)). 1TH 2 1 ii5j grammar-connect-words-phrases αὐτοὶ γὰρ οἴδατε, ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **For you yourselves know, brothers** functions as a chapter transition into the next topic, the apostles’ suffering. You could emphasize this if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “Certainly, you are fully aware” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 2 1 gpr4 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ…οἴδατε 1 you yourselves know The words **you** and **yourselves** refer to the Thessalonian church. Paul uses this emphasis to express how well the Thessalonians understand the benefit of the apostles’ previous visit. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you fully realize” or “you personally understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) @@ -97,28 +97,28 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 2 5 xk2o grammar-connect-words-phrases οὔτε γάρ ποτε ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας ἐγενήθημεν 1 Here, the phrase **For we did not come at that time** marks a transition where the apostles defend their motives by describing their previous godly conduct. Alternate translation: “Because previously when we came, it was not to flatter you” or “Certainly we never came in order to flatter you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 2 5 u28j figs-litany οὔτε…ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας…οὔτε ἐν προφάσει πλεονεξίας 1 Here, Paul uses a series of negative examples in [2:5-6](../02/05.md) to describe behavior that is not fitting for Christ’s apostles. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” You can use a form in your language to list things that someone should not do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) 1TH 2 5 hqih figs-infostructure οὔτε γάρ ποτε ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας ἐγενήθημεν, 1 Paul places **just as you know** in a position that gives it special emphasis (See also [2:2](../02/02.md)). If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “As you are well aware, we did not previously come to flatter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -1TH 2 5 q2yh figs-metaphor ἐν προφάσει πλεονεξίας 1 Here, **pretext** figuratively expresses the idea of people with greedy motives by comparing them to people wearing a mask or a disguise to cover up their evil intent. If the concept of a masking or disguising would not communicate a covering of true motives, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “disguising greedy intent” or “trying to hide greed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 2 5 q2yh figs-metaphor ἐν προφάσει πλεονεξίας 1 Here, **pretext** expresses the idea of people with greedy motives by comparing them to people wearing a mask or a disguise to cover up their evil intent. If the concept of a masking or disguising would not communicate a covering of true motives, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “disguising greedy intent” or “trying to hide greed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 2 5 qqia figs-ellipsis (Θεὸς μάρτυς) 1 In the phrase **God {is} witness**, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “God is our witness!”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1TH 2 5 lfym figs-metaphor (Θεὸς μάρτυς) 1 The apostles are appealing to God to validate their gospel message and personal motives. They figuratively speak as if they are summoning God as a witness to testify on their behalf before a judge. If your readers would not understand what **God {is} witness** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “We swear to/by God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 2 6 j6c4 figs-synecdoche οὔτε ζητοῦντες ἐξ ἀνθρώπων δόξαν, οὔτε ἀφ’ ὑμῶν, οὔτε ἀπ’ ἄλλων 1 Here Paul refers figuratively to **men** to speak of any individual person. He also refers to **from you or from others** as another way of saying “all people.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “We were not looking for praise from any human being–not you or anyone else–” or “We were not hoping for any human honors from anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1TH 2 5 lfym figs-metaphor (Θεὸς μάρτυς) 1 The apostles are appealing to God to validate their gospel message and personal motives. They speak as if they are summoning God as a witness to testify on their behalf before a judge. If your readers would not understand what **God {is} witness** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “We swear to/by God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 2 6 j6c4 figs-synecdoche οὔτε ζητοῦντες ἐξ ἀνθρώπων δόξαν, οὔτε ἀφ’ ὑμῶν, οὔτε ἀπ’ ἄλλων 1 Here Paul refers to **men** to speak of any individual person. He also refers to **from you or from others** as another way of saying “all people.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “We were not looking for praise from any human being–not you or anyone else–” or “We were not hoping for any human honors from anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1TH 2 6 afcc figs-abstractnouns ἐξ ἀνθρώπων δόξαν 1 If your language does not use the abstract noun **glory**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “for people to praise us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 2 7 u7y2 figs-hypo δυνάμενοι ἐν βάρει εἶναι, ὡς Χριστοῦ ἀπόστολοι 1 With the phrase **being able to be a burden**, Paul uses a hypothetical condition to draw attention to the divine authority of the **apostles of Christ**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. This phrase could refer to: (1) authority of the apostles. “as Christ’s apostles we have authority to force obedience” (2) rights of the apostles. Alternate translation: “as Christ’s apostles, we could have burdened you by demanding financial support” (3) authority and rights of the apostles. Alternate translation: “as Christ’s apostles, we have the power to demand support and submission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -1TH 2 7 a75z figs-metaphor δυνάμενοι ἐν βάρει εἶναι 1 Paul speaks figuratively of the apostles as if they were a heavy weight or pack. He means that if they wanted to, they could impose their apostolic authority in a way that could seem oppressive to the Thessalonian church. If your readers would not understand what **burden** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “although we could impose our authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 2 7 a75z figs-metaphor δυνάμενοι ἐν βάρει εἶναι 1 Paul speaks of the apostles as if they were a heavy weight or pack. He means that if they wanted to, they could impose their apostolic authority in a way that could seem oppressive to the Thessalonian church. If your readers would not understand what **burden** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “although we could impose our authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 2 7 bslq grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, **but** signals that the rest of the verse will contrast the idea of **burden**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “however” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1TH 2 7 y3bi figs-metaphor ἐγενήθημεν νήπιοι ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν 1 Here, **became little children in the midst of you** is a metaphor indicating how gently the apostles treated the Thessalonian church. You could translate this with an active form, using a simile. Alternate translation: “we acted as mild as infants when we visited you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 2 7 bnp2 figs-idiom ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν 1 Paul uses the idiom **in the midst of you** that means “spending time” or “visiting”. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “while visiting you” or “while spending time with you” or “when we were with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 2 7 ag1l figs-simile ὡς ἐὰν τροφὸς θάλπῃ τὰ ἑαυτῆς τέκνα 1 as if a mother might comfort her own children The point of this comparison is that in the same way a **mother** would gently **comfort** her **children**, so the apostles gently and affectionately nurtured the Thessalonian church (See [2:8](../02/08.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “as we affectionately cared for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1TH 2 8 r8b4 figs-abstractnouns οὕτως ὁμειρόμενοι ὑμῶν 1 Having affection for you in this manner If your language does not use the abstract noun **affection**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “Because we desire you so much” or “Since we yearn for you like this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 2 8 q86v figs-metaphor τὰς ἑαυτῶν ψυχάς 1 we were pleased to impart to you not only the gospel of God but also our own souls Paul uses **our own souls** to speak figuratively of the apostles’ bodies or their life. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our own selves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 2 8 q86v figs-metaphor τὰς ἑαυτῶν ψυχάς 1 we were pleased to impart to you not only the gospel of God but also our own souls Paul uses **our own souls** to speak of the apostles’ bodies or their life. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “our own selves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 2 9 v837 grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here the connecting word **For** emphasizes that what follows is something else important that the Thessalonian church should pay attention to. Alternate translation: “Certainly,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 2 9 exw6 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1TH 2 9 tc98 figs-doublet τὸν κόπον ἡμῶν καὶ τὸν μόχθον 1 our labor and toil Here, **labor** and **toil** mean basically the same thing. The repetition emphasizes how hard the apostles worked. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases or make them active. Alternate translation: “our toilsome labor” or “how hard we worked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TH 2 9 ilj2 figs-distinguish νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι 1 This phrase further explains **our labor and toil**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “although working night and day” or “despite the fact that we kept working night and day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1TH 2 9 ylkl figs-idiom νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι 1 Here, **night and day working** is an idiom for excessive labor. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “we stayed busy working” or “we never stopped laboring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 2 9 kedf figs-metaphor πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἐπιβαρῆσαί τινα ὑμῶν 1 Paul speaks figuratively of the apostles as if they were a heavy weight or pack (See note at [2:7](../02/07.md)). Alternative translation, “so that none of you would have to financially support us” or “so that we would not impose on anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 2 9 kedf figs-metaphor πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἐπιβαρῆσαί τινα ὑμῶν 1 Paul speaks of the apostles as if they were a heavy weight or pack (See note at [2:7](../02/07.md)). Alternative translation, “so that none of you would have to financially support us” or “so that we would not impose on anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 2 9 tw00 grammar-connect-logic-goal πρὸς τὸ μὴ 1 This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why the apostles worked so much. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1TH 2 9 ezqn figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Again, the phrase **the gospel of God** is used to indicate that the apostles’ message is of divine origin (See your translation at [2:2](../02/02.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1TH 2 10 re18 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες καὶ ὁ Θεός 1 The apostles are appealing to the Thessalonian church and God to validate their gospel message and personal motives (See also [2:5](../02/05.md)). They figuratively speak as if they are summoning both the church and God as a witness to testify on their behalf before a judge. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “You are our witnesses, as well as God himself” or “As well as God, you could personally testify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 2 10 re18 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες καὶ ὁ Θεός 1 The apostles are appealing to the Thessalonian church and God to validate their gospel message and personal motives (See also [2:5](../02/05.md)). They speak as if they are summoning both the church and God as a witness to testify on their behalf before a judge. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “You are our witnesses, as well as God himself” or “As well as God, you could personally testify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 2 10 h52a figs-ellipsis ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες καὶ ὁ Θεός 1 In this phrase, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “As well as God, you could personally testify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1TH 2 10 il3e figs-litany ὡς ὁσίως, καὶ δικαίως, καὶ ἀμέμπτως, ὑμῖν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐγενήθημεν 1 holy, and righteous, and blameless Paul uses a repetitive series of proofs of the apostles’ godly behavior in [2:10-12](../02/10.md). This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the evidence for which the Thessalonian church and God are evoked as witnesses. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done right. Alternate translation: “just how faithfully and justly and innocently we conducted ourselves toward you believers in God” or “how we acted reverently, and fairly, and blamelessly while visiting the faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) 1TH 2 10 ufdv figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς…ὑμῖν 1 holy, and righteous, and blameless The pronouns **You** and **you** are plural and refer to all the believers in God at Thessalonica. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “You all … among all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) @@ -139,15 +139,15 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 2 13 i39s figs-events ὅτι παραλαβόντες λόγον ἀκοῆς παρ’ ἡμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἐδέξασθε 1 General Information: Paul is stressing that it is **the word of God** that the apostles reported. This is why he first mentions that the Thessalonians **received the word of God** before mentioning that they **heard** it. If this is confusing in your language, you can make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “that when we told you God’s message, you heard it, and then you accepted it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) 1TH 2 13 dr6q grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, **that** marks the reasons in [2:13-14](../02/13.md) for why the apostles are thankful for the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language to express the reason why people should do things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 2 13 zj5f grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ καθὼς ἀληθῶς ἐστὶν 1 not as the word of man Paul uses this contrasting clause to strongly negate the idea that the apostles’ message is of human origin. Use a natural way in your language for introducing an emphatic contrast. Alternate translation: “but in fact what it really is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1TH 2 13 f6ta figs-metonymy λόγον ἀνθρώπων…λόγον Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses the phrase **the word** figuratively to represent a message that is made up of words. Here, **the word of man** refers to a message of human origin. In contrast, **the word of God** refers to the same message, called “the gospel of God” in [2:8-9](../02/08.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “a human message … God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1TH 2 13 ci1e figs-personification ὃς καὶ ἐνεργεῖται ἐν ὑμῖν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν 1 which is also working in you who believe The apostles refer to God’s gospel message figuratively as if it were a person or tool doing work. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and God is energizing you faithful ones with this message” or “and God is activating this message among you who trust in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1TH 2 13 f6ta figs-metonymy λόγον ἀνθρώπων…λόγον Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses the phrase **the word** to represent a message that is made up of words. Here, **the word of man** refers to a message of human origin. In contrast, **the word of God** refers to the same message, called “the gospel of God” in [2:8-9](../02/08.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “a human message … God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TH 2 13 ci1e figs-personification ὃς καὶ ἐνεργεῖται ἐν ὑμῖν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν 1 which is also working in you who believe The apostles refer to God’s gospel message as if it were a person or tool doing work. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and God is energizing you faithful ones with this message” or “and God is activating this message among you who trust in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1TH 2 13 z89g writing-pronouns ὃς 1 which is also working in you who believe Here, the word translated **which** could refer to **God** or **the word**. Alternate translation: “and God” or “and God’s word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1TH 2 13 x7oi figs-yousingular ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here, the pronoun **you** is plural and refers to all the believers in God at Thessalonica (See [2:10](../02/10.md)). Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “among all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) 1TH 2 14 mh8n writing-background 0 became imitators of the churches Verses 14-16 provide background information about how the Thessalonian church suffered persecutions similar to the Judean church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) 1TH 2 14 xopt grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** indicates that what follows is the proof of how God’s message is working among the Thessalonian church. Alternate translation: “Because” or “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 2 14 cj05 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1TH 2 14 ij9j μιμηταὶ ἐγενήθητε…τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν 1 Here, **imitators** is a noun that can be translated with a verb (See [1:6](../01/06.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “mimicked the churches” or “imitated the churches” or “copied the behavior of the churches” -1TH 2 14 g0t5 figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, Paul speaks figuratively of the churches of God **in Christ Jesus** as though they were occupying space inside Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus (See also [1:1](../01/01.md)). Here, it also highlights the communion that Thessalonian believers **in Christ Jesus** have with Judean believers **in Christ Jesus** through the Holy Trinity. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “who are united to Jesus Christ” or “who share life with Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 2 14 g0t5 figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, Paul speaks of the churches of God **in Christ Jesus** as though they were occupying space inside Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus (See also [1:1](../01/01.md)). Here, it also highlights the communion that Thessalonian believers **in Christ Jesus** have with Judean believers **in Christ Jesus** through the Holy Trinity. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “who are united to Jesus Christ” or “who share life with Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 2 15 a6xd writing-background τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων 1 This is the specific content of the background information about the Jewish persecution of Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) 1TH 2 15 pgzz figs-merism τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων 1 The whole history of the persecution of God’s people is summarized in three parts: the killing of Old Testament prophets, the crucifixion of the Lord Jesus, and persecution of the apostles. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 1TH 2 15 ucaz figs-events τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων 1 This list of those persecuted by the Jews is not chronological, but emphasizes the order of importance and intensity of persecution. If this is confusing in your language, you can make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “who have killed the prophets, then the Lord Jesus, and finally persecuted us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) @@ -155,15 +155,15 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 2 15 tfc4 figs-parallelism καὶ Θεῷ μὴ ἀρεσκόντων, καὶ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ἐναντίων, 1 These two phrases mean similar things. These phrases are meant to express how the Jewish persecution of Christians is the same thing as opposing God himself. If it would be clearer in your language, you could combine the phrases into one clarifying idea. Alternate translation: “and they make themselves enemies of God by how hostile they are against the Jewish and Gentile churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1TH 2 15 g6q1 figs-possession πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ἐναντίων, 1 Paul is using the possessive form of **hostile** to describe how the persecutors of the Christian Church are characterized by a hostile attitude. Alternate translation: “characterized by being opposed to all people types” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1TH 2 15 dmxm figs-ellipsis ἐναντίων 1 A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, the word **are** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are opposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1TH 2 15 u6ko figs-synecdoche πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Paul speaks figuratively about **all men** to refer to “all people types” or “the whole human race.” Here, **all men** refers to two parts of humanity represented by Jews (See [2:14](../02/14.md)) and Gentiles (See [2:16](../02/16.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to all people types” or “to all the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1TH 2 15 u6ko figs-synecdoche πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Paul speaks about **all men** to refer to “all people types” or “the whole human race.” Here, **all men** refers to two parts of humanity represented by Jews (See [2:14](../02/14.md)) and Gentiles (See [2:16](../02/16.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to all people types” or “to all the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1TH 2 15 ywwr figs-hyperbole πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Here, **to all men** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to express his emotions about the hostile Jews. Paul does not mean that the Jews are hostile to every individual human being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows this emphasis. Alternate translation: “toward all of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1TH 2 15 vfyv figs-gendernotations πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both **men** and women. Alternate translation: “to all humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1TH 2 16 u012 figs-distinguish κωλυόντων ἡμᾶς τοῖς ἔθνεσιν λαλῆσαι, ἵνα σωθῶσιν 1 This clause gives further information for why the Gentiles are “not pleasing to God and {are} hostile to all men” (See [2:15](../02/15.md)). If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1TH 2 16 o0vb figs-genericnoun τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 Here, **Gentiles** refers to all the non-Christian nations in general, not one group of people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “among the non-Jews” or “to all the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1TH 2 16 r5fi grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα σωθῶσιν 1 This purpose clause gives the reason why the Jews are trying to prevent the apostles from preaching the gospel to the Gentiles. Here, **to speak** expresses the way the Gentiles **might be saved.** This clause could refer to: (1) the Jews purposely trying to keep the Gentiles from salvation. Alternate translation: “to hinder the Gentiles from being saved” (2) how the speaking is for the purpose of saving the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “in order that the Gentiles can be saved” or “for the purpose of saving the nations” The clause could also refer to both ideas. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1TH 2 16 n2ue figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ ἀναπληρῶσαι αὐτῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας πάντοτε 1 to always fill up their own sins Paul speaks figuratively of the Jews’ sins as if they fill a container. He means that these Jews sin so much and so extremely that they can never escape God’s **wrath**. If your readers would not understand what it means to **to always fill up** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “causing them to always reach the limit of their sinfulness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 2 16 n2ue figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ ἀναπληρῶσαι αὐτῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας πάντοτε 1 to always fill up their own sins Paul speaks of the Jews’ sins as if they fill a container. He means that these Jews sin so much and so extremely that they can never escape God’s **wrath**. If your readers would not understand what it means to **to always fill up** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “causing them to always reach the limit of their sinfulness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 2 16 z5fr grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ ἀναπληρῶσαι αὐτῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας πάντοτε 1 This result clause explains what will happen to the Jews for **forbidding** the apostles **to speak to the Gentiles**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “as a result, God will no longer forgive their many sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 2 16 jzjj figs-pastforfuture ἔφθασεν δὲ ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργὴ εἰς τέλος. 1 Paul is figuratively using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. Paul is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If the use of the past tense here is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. This phrase could refer to: (1) final judgment. Alternate translation: “In fact, final wrath will overtake them” (See also [5:9](../05/09.md)) (2) certain judgment. Alternate translation: “Certainly, their punishment has finally arrived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +1TH 2 16 jzjj figs-pastforfuture ἔφθασεν δὲ ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργὴ εἰς τέλος. 1 Paul is using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. Paul is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If the use of the past tense here is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. This phrase could refer to: (1) final judgment. Alternate translation: “In fact, final wrath will overtake them” (See also [5:9](../05/09.md)) (2) certain judgment. Alternate translation: “Certainly, their punishment has finally arrived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 1TH 2 16 fq9m grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 wrath has come upon them in the end Paul uses **But** to indicate that what follows is important. Here, **But** could refer to: (1) certainty. Alternate translation: “Certainly” or “In fact” (2) contrast. Alternate translation: “However” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 2 16 uwuq figs-abstractnouns ἔφθασεν δὲ ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργὴ 1 wrath has come upon them in the end If your language does not use the abstract noun **the wrath**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 2 17 edb1 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἡμεῖς δέ, ἀδελφοί 1 brothers The phrase **But we, brothers** expresses that this is a contrasting phrase that switches the attention back to the apostles’ relationship with the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -182,16 +182,16 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 2 18 crv7 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 3 to see your faces What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to what was expected, that Paul would visit the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “however” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1TH 2 18 uuae figs-explicit καὶ ἐνέκοψεν 1 to see your faces Since the Greek word that ULT translates as **hindered** often means “cut off” or “beat in,” Paul may be stressing the violent nature of Satan’s obstruction. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “powerfully prevented us” or “violently obstructed us” or “cut off our route” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 2 19 j7j5 figs-rquestion 0 For what is our hope, or joy, or crown of boasting? Is it not even you before our Lord Jesus at his coming? Paul uses these rhetorical questions here to emphasize why the apostles want to visit the Thessalonian church. If you would not use rhetorical questions for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1TH 2 19 mj9n figs-personification ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 our hope … Is it not even you Here, **hope** **joy** and **crown** are spoken of figuratively as if they were the people in the Thessalonian church. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because who makes us hopeful? Who causes us to rejoice? Who gives us reason to boast victoriously?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1TH 2 19 mj9n figs-personification ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 our hope … Is it not even you Here, **hope** **joy** and **crown** are spoken of as if they were the people in the Thessalonian church. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because who makes us hopeful? Who causes us to rejoice? Who gives us reason to boast victoriously?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1TH 2 19 ulj7 figs-ellipsis τίς γὰρ ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως? ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 our hope … Is it not even you Some words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is it** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1TH 2 19 jfak figs-personification ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 our hope … Is it not even you Here, **hope**, **joy**, and **crown of boasting** are spoken of figuratively as if these concepts were the Thessalonian church. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because who makes us hopeful? Who causes us to rejoice? Who gives us reason to boast victoriously?”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -1TH 2 19 e7tl figs-metonymy στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 crown of boasting Here, **crown** refers figuratively to a laurel wreath awarded to victorious athletes. The expression **crown of boasting** means a reward for victory or for having competed well. The proof of the apostles’ success will ultimately be displayed at the Second Coming of Christ if the Thessalonian church remains faithful to God (See [4:13-5:11](../04/13/.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “reward for victory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TH 2 19 jfak figs-personification ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 our hope … Is it not even you Here, **hope**, **joy**, and **crown of boasting** are spoken of as if these concepts were the Thessalonian church. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because who makes us hopeful? Who causes us to rejoice? Who gives us reason to boast victoriously?”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1TH 2 19 e7tl figs-metonymy στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 crown of boasting Here, **crown** refers to a laurel wreath awarded to victorious athletes. The expression **crown of boasting** means a reward for victory or for having competed well. The proof of the apostles’ success will ultimately be displayed at the Second Coming of Christ if the Thessalonian church remains faithful to God (See [4:13-5:11](../04/13/.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “reward for victory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 2 19 uvb4 figs-possession στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 crown of boasting Paul is using this possessive form to describe either: (1) the product of boasting. Alternate translation: “crown that produces boasting” (2) the means of boasting. Alternate translation: “crown through which we boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1TH 2 19 h7gh figs-metonymy ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 crown of boasting Here, **before** refers to location or sphere, used as a substitute for “in front of” or “in the presence of.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our Lord Jesus” or “in front of our Lord Jesus” or “in the sight of our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 2 19 mksc figs-idiom ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ 1 crown of boasting Here, **his coming** is a well-known idiom in 1-2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [3:13](../03/13.md)) or the “Day of the Lord” (See [5:2](../05/02.md)). Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this idea. Alternate translation: “at his Second Coming” or “when he arrives again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 2 20 l3m0 figs-parallelism ὑμεῖς γάρ ἐστε ἡ δόξα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἡ χαρά 1 crown of boasting This verse means the same thing as “our hope or joy or crown of boasting” in [2:19](../02/19.md). Paul says the same thing twice in slightly different ways to emphasize that he is genuinely pleased with the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1TH 2 20 d8dz figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς 1 crown of boasting Paul uses the word **you** to emphasize how the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness to God brings honor and joy to the apostles. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1TH 2 20 nlbd figs-personification ὑμεῖς γάρ ἐστε ἡ δόξα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἡ χαρά 1 crown of boasting Here, the Thessalonian church is figuratively compared to the abstract concepts of **glory and joy**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because of you, God will honor us and make us rejoice” or “Certainly, we will become glorified and rejoice because of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1TH 2 20 nlbd figs-personification ὑμεῖς γάρ ἐστε ἡ δόξα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἡ χαρά 1 crown of boasting Here, the Thessalonian church is compared to the abstract concepts of **glory and joy**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because of you, God will honor us and make us rejoice” or “Certainly, we will become glorified and rejoice because of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1TH 3 intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 3 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 3

1. Timothy’s Visit (3:1-5)
* Apostolic concern (3:1-2)
* Apostolic encouragement (3:3-5)
2. Timothy’s Report (3:6-13)
* Good news (3:6-10)
* Apostolic prayer (3:11-13)

## Structure and Formatting

The first part of this chapter recounts Timothy’s visit to Thessalonica. The second part tells about his report to Paul and Silvanus at Athens. Lastly, the apostles offer a prayer on behalf of the Thessalonian church.

## “We” and “You”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Metaphor

In this chapter, the Apostle Paul uses the phrase “stand firm” in [3:8](../03/08.md) as a metaphor of faithfulness to the Gospel, and “be shaken” in [3:3](../03/03.md) as the opposite of being faithful. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

Use a building metaphor, the apostles pray that God will “strengthen the “hearts” of the Thessalonian church “blameless” (See [3:13](../03/13.md)).

The enemy of God’s people, “Satan” (See [2:18](../02/18.md)) is here called “the tempter” (See [3:5](../03/05.md)).

### Hyperbole

Paul uses emotional and extreme language when speaking of his memory of the Thessalonian church. “Enduring it no longer,” the apostles and especially Paul (See [3:1,5](../03/01.md)) feel compelled to find out about the spiritual condition of the church. The intensity and duration of the apostles’ prayers is described as “night and day pleading earnestly” (See [3:10](../03/10.md)).

### The Second Coming of Christ

Here the apostles pray that the Thessalonian church will be preserved holy when Christ comes again with all his holy ones or “saints” (See [3:13](../03/13.md)). 1TH 3 1 fqe3 grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ μηκέτι στέγοντες, ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι ἐν Ἀθήναις μόνοι, 1 enduring it no longer This is a result clause. Paul is explaining why he sent Timothy to Thessalonica in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “Because we could not restrain ourselves any longer, we thought it proper to stay behind in Athens alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 3 1 zvgz grammar-connect-words-phrases διὸ 1 enduring it no longer Here, **Therefore** indicates a return to the topic of a visit from the apostles (See [2:17-18](../02/17/.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -240,29 +240,29 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 3 8 y1vb figs-hyperbole ὅτι νῦν ζῶμεν 1 we live Here, **For now we live** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how thankful he is that the Thessalonians **stand firm** in the Christian faith (See [3:7](../03/07.md)). Paul is not trying to say that he was dead. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows thankfulness. Alternate translation (replace the comma): “O how we are now refreshed!” or “O how we now feel alive!” or “Certainly now we thrive!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1TH 3 8 x4zn figs-idiom ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Here, the term **stand firm** is an idiom meaning “remain faithful.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when you remain faithful to the Lord” or “if you continue unwavering in your relationship with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 3 8 zbyo grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you are remaining faithful to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -1TH 3 8 hk91 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Paul speaks figuratively of the Thessalonian church as though they were occupying space inside the Lord Jesus. Here, this metaphor, **in the Lord**, could express these ideas: (1) devotion to Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are really devoted to the Lord Jesus” (2) relationship with Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are truly standing firm in your relationship with the Lord Jesus” (3) union with Jesus. Alternate translation: “all of you are firmly united to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 3 8 hk91 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Paul speaks of the Thessalonian church as though they were occupying space inside the Lord Jesus. Here, this metaphor, **in the Lord**, could express these ideas: (1) devotion to Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are really devoted to the Lord Jesus” (2) relationship with Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are truly standing firm in your relationship with the Lord Jesus” (3) union with Jesus. Alternate translation: “all of you are firmly united to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 3 8 e3pe figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize his joy for the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternative translation: “indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 3 9 pzq7 figs-rquestion τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν δι’ ὑμᾶς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν. 1 For what thanks are we able to give back to God concerning you, for all the joy in which we rejoice before our God because of you, Paul is using a rhetorical question that continues to the end of [3:10](../03/10.md) in order to emphasize the apostles’ thankful joy for the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness to God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We could not possibly thank God enough for what he has done for you! When we pray to our God, we greatly rejoice because of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1TH 3 9 pdc5 figs-metaphor τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν 1 before our God With the phrase **give back**, Paul speaks figuratively of the apostles as if they owe God a debt for the sake of the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness. Paul means that the apostles cannot adequately express how thankful they are. If your readers would not understand what it means to **give back** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because, how could we possibly show how grateful we are to God for you” or “Indeed, what kind of thanksgiving for you could we give to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 3 9 pdc5 figs-metaphor τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν 1 before our God With the phrase **give back**, Paul speaks of the apostles as if they owe God a debt for the sake of the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness. Paul means that the apostles cannot adequately express how thankful they are. If your readers would not understand what it means to **give back** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because, how could we possibly show how grateful we are to God for you” or “Indeed, what kind of thanksgiving for you could we give to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 3 9 j6pj grammar-connect-logic-result ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν δι’ ὑμᾶς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 before our God If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Since this is a rhetorical question, you could change it to a statement, and begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Because of you, we greatly rejoice when we pray to God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 3 9 u00t figs-doublet ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν 1 before our God Here, **joy** and **rejoice** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much joy the apostles have because of how faithful the Thessalonian church has been towards God. Alternate translation: “for how much we greatly rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TH 3 9 p5ka figs-idiom χαίρομεν…ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 before our God Here, **before our God** is an idiom for being in the personal presence of God. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “we rejoice in the presence of our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 3 10 k71n figs-hyperbole νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας, ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ δεόμενοι 1 earnestly This emphatic phrase is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how much and often the apostles pray for the Thessalonian church. Paul does not mean to say he never does anything else except pray. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we never stop intensely pleading” or “we continually and fervently pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1TH 3 10 eb26 figs-idiom εἰς τὸ ἰδεῖν ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον 1 to see your face Here, the phrase **to see your face** is an idiom meaning “visit.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to visit you” or “to spend time with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 3 10 s0xz figs-synecdoche ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον 1 to see your face Paul refers figuratively to **your face** to mean the whole Thessalonian church. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1TH 3 10 s0xz figs-synecdoche ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον 1 to see your face Paul refers to **your face** to mean the whole Thessalonian church. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. Alternate translation: “all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1TH 3 10 e5fh figs-abstractnouns καὶ καταρτίσαι τὰ ὑστερήματα τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 to see your face If your language does not use the abstract noun **faith**, you can express the idea behind it in another way (See also [2:17](../02/17.md)). Alternate translation: “and to provide support so that you remain faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 3 11 tet9 translate-blessing δὲ…κατευθύναι 1 General Information: Here the verb forms indicate that this is a blessing or prayer that continues through [3:13](../03/13.md). Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “Now we pray that … would guide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) 1TH 3 11 f3wh figs-hendiadys ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 our God and Father … our Lord Here, **our God and Father** refers to the one divine person who is both God and Father. This phrase is a hendiadys, since Father further describes God (See also [1:3](../01/03.md)). Alternate translation: “God our Father” or “our Father God” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys) 1TH 3 11 mc2m figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς 1 may our God and Father … direct Paul uses the word **himself** to distinguish **our God and Father** from **our Lord Jesus**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 3 11 bql9 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμῶν…ἡμῶν 1 our God and Father … our Lord It is possible that these first two uses of **our** are inclusive of the whole Christian Church. Yet, the third use of **our** exclusively refers to the apostles. So, it is most likely that **our** refers exclusively to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy in this whole verse (see also [1:9, 2:1, 3:9](../01/09.md)). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1TH 3 11 um1c figs-metaphor κατευθύναι τὴν ὁδὸν ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς. 1 may … direct our way to you Paul speaks figuratively about God as if he were a pilot or captain of a ship. Paul means that he wants God to allow the apostles to visit the Thessalonian church again. If your readers would not understand what **direct our way to you** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “quickly bring us to you” or “direct our voyage so that we can visit you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 3 11 um1c figs-metaphor κατευθύναι τὴν ὁδὸν ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς. 1 may … direct our way to you Paul speaks about God as if he were a pilot or captain of a ship. Paul means that he wants God to allow the apostles to visit the Thessalonian church again. If your readers would not understand what **direct our way to you** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “quickly bring us to you” or “direct our voyage so that we can visit you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 3 12 f4ma figs-doublet ὑμᾶς δὲ ὁ Κύριος πλεονάσαι καὶ περισσεύσαι 1 may the Lord make you increase and abound in love Here, **increase** and **abound** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much the apostles want the Thessalonian church to keep increasing in their love for all people. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “May the Lord Jesus make you completely excel” or “O that the Lord Jesus would cause you to fully thrive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1TH 3 12 o80n figs-metaphor τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 may the Lord make you increase and abound in love Paul speaks figuratively of **love** as something that can be quantified or measured. He means that he hopes the Thessalonian church will keep loving people well. If your readers would not understand what **in love** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “in the way you love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 3 12 ofl2 figs-merism εἰς ἀλλήλους, καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 may the Lord make you increase and abound in love Paul could be speaking figuratively, using these phrases in order to include the whole human race. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “toward each and every person” or “toward the whole human race” or “toward Christians and non-Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +1TH 3 12 o80n figs-metaphor τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 may the Lord make you increase and abound in love Paul speaks of **love** as something that can be quantified or measured. He means that he hopes the Thessalonian church will keep loving people well. If your readers would not understand what **in love** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “in the way you love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 3 12 ofl2 figs-merism εἰς ἀλλήλους, καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 may the Lord make you increase and abound in love Paul could be speaking, using these phrases in order to include the whole human race. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “toward each and every person” or “toward the whole human race” or “toward Christians and non-Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 1TH 3 12 gyy3 figs-nominaladj εἰς πάντας 1 may the Lord make you increase and abound in love Paul could be using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. It could refer to: (1) the whole human race. Alternate translation: “toward all humanity” (2) all Christians. Alternate translation: “for all your fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1TH 3 12 dm6c καθάπερ καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 may the Lord make you increase and abound in love Here, **just as we also toward you** is an emphatic phrase meant to reinforce the deep love the apostles have for the Thessalonian church (also in [3:6](../03/06.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “in the same way that we love you” 1TH 3 13 ms8t figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, ἀμέμπτους ἐν ἁγιωσύνῃ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus If your language does not use the abstract nouns **hearts** and **holiness**, you can express the ideas behind them in another way. Alternate translation: “so that how you love one another strengthens you to become resolved to live blamelessly, as is appropriate for those who belong to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 3 13 ly21 figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 to strengthen your hearts, blameless Paul speaks figuratively of the people of the Thessalonian church as if they have one heart that is like a building that can be established or supported. He means that he wants God to increase their willpower or affections so that they would remain faithful to God. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to establish your affections” or “to strengthen your will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 3 13 ly21 figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 to strengthen your hearts, blameless Paul speaks of the people of the Thessalonian church as if they have one heart that is like a building that can be established or supported. He means that he wants God to increase their willpower or affections so that they would remain faithful to God. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to establish your affections” or “to strengthen your will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 3 13 taws grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 to strengthen your hearts, blameless This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why he prays that God will increase the Thessalonian church’s love for all people. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord will establish your affections for him” or “in order that the Lord will strengthen your willpower” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1TH 3 13 jev8 figs-doublet ἀμέμπτους ἐν ἁγιωσύνῃ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus Here, **blameless** and **holiness** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize total sanctification. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. This phrase could refer to: (1) a condition of holiness. Alternate translation: “blameless in a condition of holiness” (2) how to become holy. Alternate translation: “blameless through holiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TH 3 13 p12j figs-idiom ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus This phrase is an idiom for being in the personal presence of God (See [3:9](../03/09.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our Father God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -271,14 +271,14 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 intro b1z5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 4 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 4

1. Apostolic Teachings on Holiness (4:1-8)
2. Apostolic Teachings on Christian Love (4:9-12)
* Reminder (4:9-10)
* Keep Busy (4:11-12)
3. Apostolic Teachings on the Manner of the Second Coming of Christ (4:13-18)

## “We” and “You”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Christian love

The apostles address the topic of Christian love that the Thessalonian church had previously asked about. The apostles encouraged the church that they were already loving well, and they should continue to grow in this practice. The apostles also link “brotherly love” to living in harmony with each other and minding their own business, so that they would be a good example to non-Christians (See [4:11-12](../04/11.md)).

### Dying before the Second Coming of Christ

The Thessalonian church was concerned about what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They were anxious to know whether or not those who died before Christ returned would be part of the Kingdom of God. Paul addresses that concern in [4:13-5:11](../04/13.md).

### The manner of the Second Coming of Christ

In [4:13-18](../04/13.md), the apostles teach about the events related to the Second Coming of Christ (called “the day of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md)). This is so that the Thessalonians can “comfort one another with these words” (See [4:18](../04/18.md)).

## Important Translation Issues in this Chapter

### Sexual immorality

Different cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators will have to consider the most appropriate way to communicate these sensitive issues.

### The Second Coming of Christ and the Day of the Lord

All Christians believe that Jesus will return to earth to judge all people and to rule forever. As the Nicene Creed (381 A.D.) states: “I await the resurrection of the dead and the life of the age to come.” Christ came once as Incarnate God and will return once as Resurrected Judge. However, there are various ways that Christians understand the “coming of the Lord” as explained in [4:13-5:11](../04/13.md), and the “day of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md). Some believe they are one and the same event, but others believe them to be two separate events. Your translation should state clearly only what is clear in these verses without promoting any particular interpretation. 1TH 4 1 vtas grammar-connect-words-phrases λοιπὸν οὖν 1 brothers Here, **So finally** could refer to: (1) a summary of the apostles’ teachings. Alternate translation: “So, in summary,” (2) the remaining things to address. “So then, here is what remains for us to talk about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 4 1 u2lw figs-doublet ἐρωτῶμεν ὑμᾶς καὶ παρακαλοῦμεν 1 we beg and exhort you These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how seriously the apostles want the Thessalonian church to follow their teachings. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “we are urging and appealing to you” or “we strongly urge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1TH 4 1 foeh figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ 1 we beg and exhort you Paul speaks figuratively as if the apostles are occupying space inside of **the Lord Jesus**. Here, the metaphor expresses the idea that the apostles represent Jesus himself like ambassadors who possess a king’s authority. If your readers would not understand what **in the Lord** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with our authority from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 1 foeh figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ 1 we beg and exhort you Paul speaks as if the apostles are occupying space inside of **the Lord Jesus**. Here, the metaphor expresses the idea that the apostles represent Jesus himself like ambassadors who possess a king’s authority. If your readers would not understand what **in the Lord** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with our authority from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 4 1 p4db figs-metaphor τὸ πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν 1 it is necessary for you to walk Here, **to walk** is a metaphor that means “to live” or “to obey” (See [2:12](../02/12.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means **to walk** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “about how you must live” or “about how you are obligated to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 4 1 ckii figs-hendiadys τὸ πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν καὶ ἀρέσκειν Θεῷ (καθὼς καὶ περιπατεῖτε) 1 it is necessary for you to walk Here, **to walk and to please** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **please** describes how the Thessalonian church should **walk**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “about how you must live to please God (exactly as you live now)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 1TH 4 1 q937 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα περισσεύητε μᾶλλον 1 it is necessary for you to walk This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which apostles are begging and exhorting the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that you can excel more and more” or “in order that you thrive even more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1TH 4 2 oyu3 grammar-connect-time-background 0 through the Lord Jesus Paul is providing this background information about the apostles’ teachings during their previous visit to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) 1TH 4 2 dg4p grammar-connect-logic-result οἴδατε γὰρ τίνας παραγγελίας ἐδώκαμεν ὑμῖν διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 through the Lord Jesus This verse expresses that the Thessalonian church should do what the apostles previously taught them (See [4:1](../04/01.md)), because these teachings are actually commands from **the Lord Jesus** himself. Use a natural way in your language to express a result clause. Alternate translation: “The reason we beg and exhort you is because you realize that when we gave commands, it was actually the Lord Jesus who taught you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 4 2 ebjm grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 through the Lord Jesus Here, **For** indicates that what follows is something else important that the Thessalonian church should pay attention to. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 4 2 vg16 figs-metaphor διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 through the Lord Jesus Paul speaks figuratively of the **commands** that the apostles gave to the Thessalonian church as though **Jesus** personally told them to the apostles. Paul means that **Jesus** made the apostles his messengers, not that **Jesus** is a messenger of the apostles. If your readers would not understand what **through the Lord Jesus** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “through a message from the Lord Jesus” or “by order of the Lord Jesus himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 2 vg16 figs-metaphor διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 through the Lord Jesus Paul speaks of the **commands** that the apostles gave to the Thessalonian church as though **Jesus** personally told them to the apostles. Paul means that **Jesus** made the apostles his messengers, not that **Jesus** is a messenger of the apostles. If your readers would not understand what **through the Lord Jesus** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “through a message from the Lord Jesus” or “by order of the Lord Jesus himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 4 3 ycsw figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὁ ἁγιασμὸς ὑμῶν, 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality If your language does not use the abstract nouns **will** and **sanctification**, you can express the ideas behind them in another way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, God desires that you live like those who belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 4 3 lit4 grammar-connect-words-phrases τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality Here, **For this is** indicates that this is the beginning of a section about the content of the commands from the Lord Jesus in [4:2](../04/02.md). Use a natural way in your language to indicate the beginning of new topic. Alternate translation: “Now, this is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 4 3 vnp0 grammar-collectivenouns τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality Here, **this** is a singular pronoun that emphasizes what **is the will of God**. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Certainly, this very thing is God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) @@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 4 u98k figs-distinguish εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ 1 to know to possess his own vessel Here Paul gives more instructions about the **sanctification** God wants for his people, by telling the Thessalonian church that every husband needs to treat his wife’s body and his own body **in sanctification and honor**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these verses clearer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1TH 4 4 vhbp figs-euphemism εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ, 1 to know to possess his own vessel Here, **to know to possess** refers to sexual intimacy. This is a polite way of referring to something private. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “God desires that you treat your wives’ bodies like they belong to God and to honor them” or “each of you men must use your own body for God’s holy and honorable purposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1TH 4 4 fk6n figs-nominaladj ἕκαστον 1 to know to possess his own vessel Paul is using the adjective **each** as a noun in order to describe a group of men. Here it specifically is used to emphasize that every husband or man must obey this teaching. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “each and every man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1TH 4 4 f4ux figs-metaphor τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι 1 to know to possess his own vessel Here Paul speaks figuratively of a person’s body as if it were a container. Here, **to possess his own vessel** is a metaphor that compares sexual self-control to a proper use of a container. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. It could refer to: (1) a wife’s body. Alternate translation: “to use his wife’s body” or “to properly care for his own wife” (2) a husband’s own body. Alternate translation: “to control his own body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 4 f4ux figs-metaphor τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι 1 to know to possess his own vessel Here Paul speaks of a person’s body as if it were a container. Here, **to possess his own vessel** is a metaphor that compares sexual self-control to a proper use of a container. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. It could refer to: (1) a wife’s body. Alternate translation: “to use his wife’s body” or “to properly care for his own wife” (2) a husband’s own body. Alternate translation: “to control his own body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 4 4 arkf figs-possession τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος 1 to know to possess his own vessel Paul is using the possessive form **his own** to express ownership. Use a natural way in your language to express ownership. Alternate translation: “the wife that belongs to you” or “your very own wife” or “the body that belongs to you”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1TH 4 4 ihqe figs-hendiadys ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ 1 to know to possess his own vessel This phrase could express a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **honor** tells how a husband or man must live in **sanctification**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “by honorably setting it apart for God’s purposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 1TH 4 5 utvd figs-abstractnouns μὴ ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 in the passion of lust If your language does not use the abstract noun phrase **in the passion of lust**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “not passionately lusting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -298,8 +298,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 5 tz8o figs-genericnoun τὰ ἔθνη 1 in the passion of lust Here, **the Gentiles** refers to all the non-Christian nations in general, not one group of people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase (See your translation at [2:16](../02/16.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1TH 4 5 w03g figs-distinguish τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν 1 in the passion of lust Here, **who do not know God** is meant to give further information about the **Gentiles**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who have no relationship with God” or “who remain ignorant of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1TH 4 6 wmb6 figs-hendiadys ὑπερβαίνειν καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν 1 transgress and wrong This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **exploit** describes **transgress** . If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “exploits by transgressing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -1TH 4 6 ho6h figs-metaphor ὑπερβαίνειν καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν 1 transgress and wrong Here, **transgress and exploit** speaks figuratively about adultery, by comparing it to a person who unlawfully enters someone’s property and claims it for their own. If your readers would not understand what it means to **transgress and exploit** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “must trespass and defraud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 4 6 ckez figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ πράγματι τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 the Lord is an avenger Here, **in this matter** could be speaking figuratively of adultery as if someone is intruding in another person’s business matters. If your readers would not understand what **in this matter** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the marital matters of his fellow believer in Christ” or “the marriage relationship of another believer in Christ” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 6 ho6h figs-metaphor ὑπερβαίνειν καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν 1 transgress and wrong Here, **transgress and exploit** speaks about adultery, by comparing it to a person who unlawfully enters someone’s property and claims it for their own. If your readers would not understand what it means to **transgress and exploit** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “must trespass and defraud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 6 ckez figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ πράγματι τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 the Lord is an avenger Here, **in this matter** could be speaking of adultery as if someone is intruding in another person’s business matters. If your readers would not understand what **in this matter** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the marital matters of his fellow believer in Christ” or “the marriage relationship of another believer in Christ” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 4 6 q7bf grammar-connect-logic-result διότι ἔκδικος Κύριος περὶ πάντων τούτων 1 the Lord is an avenger This clause gives the final result for those who live “in the passion of lust” (See [4:5](../04/05.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express result. This could refer to: 1) all the matters spoken of in [4:3-6](../04/03.md). Alternate translation: “Certainly, the Lord Jesus will avenge all these things” 2) the sexually immoral people. Alternate translation: “This is because the Lord Jesus will punish all those people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 4 6 d1ip writing-background καθὼς καὶ προείπαμεν ὑμῖν καὶ διεμαρτυράμεθα 1 we also forewarned you and testified Paul provides this background information about what the apostles said in an earlier visit (See in [2:10-12](../02/10.md)). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “This will happen just as we already told you and solemnly testified to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) 1TH 4 6 ix4p figs-doublet καθὼς καὶ προείπαμεν ὑμῖν καὶ διεμαρτυράμεθα 1 we also forewarned you and testified These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize what the apostles had already told the Thessalonian church during a previous visit. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “exactly as we also solemnly forewarned you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -315,14 +315,14 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 9 l1n7 figs-hyperbole οὐ χρείαν ἔχετε γράφειν ὑμῖν 1 brotherly love Here, **no need** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how successfully the Thessalonian church is practicing Christian love. Paul knows that they still have things to learn about loving fellow believers in Christ. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “we feel no need to write to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1TH 4 9 fyqe figs-ellipsis οὐ χρείαν 1 brotherly love A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **for us** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1TH 4 9 ctiq αὐτοὶ γὰρ ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε, εἰς τὸ ἀγαπᾶν ἀλλήλους 1 brotherly love This clause could refer to: (1) the content of God’s teaching. Alternate translation: “because it is God himself who teaches you: love each other” (2) the manner of God’s teaching. Alternate translation: “indeed, it is God who teaches you how to love each other” (3) the purpose of God’s teaching. Alternate translation: “the reason why God teaches you is so that you would love each other” Use a natural way in your language for expressing this idea. -1TH 4 9 j7z0 figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ γὰρ ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε 1 brotherly love Paul speaks figuratively of the Thessalonian church as though God himself were physically present as their teacher. Paul means that the Thessalonian church already has been taught **to love one another** through the words of Jesus (See John 13:34; 15:12, 17) by the apostles. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **taught by God** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “because you have learned well what God teaches,” or “since this is what God teaches you to do,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 9 j7z0 figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ γὰρ ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε 1 brotherly love Paul speaks of the Thessalonian church as though God himself were physically present as their teacher. Paul means that the Thessalonian church already has been taught **to love one another** through the words of Jesus (See John 13:34; 15:12, 17) by the apostles. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **taught by God** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “because you have learned well what God teaches,” or “since this is what God teaches you to do,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 4 9 zroq figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ 1 brotherly love Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize that the Thessalonian church is doing what God teaches. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 4 10 e3e0 writing-background καὶ γὰρ ποιεῖτε αὐτὸ εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, τοὺς ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ 1 you do this to all the brothers who are in all Macedonia Paul provides this background information to show another aspect of how the Thessalonian church “became an example” to the churches in Macedonia and Achaia (See [1:7-8](../01/07.md)). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Certainly, you habitually show love to all your fellow believers in Christ throughout the region of Macedonia” or “In fact, you are doing just that to all the fellow Christians throughout the province of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) 1TH 4 10 dec9 grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 you do this to all the brothers who are in all Macedonia Here, **For indeed** indicates that what follows in an example of how the Thessalonian church shows Christian love. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 4 10 hg7a figs-explicit ποιεῖτε αὐτὸ 1 you do this to all the brothers who are in all Macedonia What is implied here is that **this** refers back to the phrase “to love” in [4:9](../04/09.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 4 10 gxfa figs-litany παρακαλοῦμεν δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, 1 brothers Speaking of what the apostles **exhort** the Thessalonian church to do, Paul uses a repetitive series of five verb forms that continues into [4:11](../04/11.md). This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone is urged to do. Alternate translation: “Now, fellow believers in Christ, we are urging you” or “But, fellow Christians, we strongly encourage you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) 1TH 4 10 u3fl grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 abound Here, **But** indicates that what follows are numerous exhortations. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “However” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 4 11 h2df figs-metonymy καὶ φιλοτιμεῖσθαι, ἡσυχάζειν καὶ πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια, καὶ ἐργάζεσθαι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν ὑμῶν 1 to strive Paul is figuratively describing peaceful communal living by using this combination of ideas. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and seek to lovingly honor others: by living quietly and tending to your own business and focusing on doing your own work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TH 4 11 h2df figs-metonymy καὶ φιλοτιμεῖσθαι, ἡσυχάζειν καὶ πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια, καὶ ἐργάζεσθαι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν ὑμῶν 1 to strive Paul is describing peaceful communal living by using this combination of ideas. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and seek to lovingly honor others: by living quietly and tending to your own business and focusing on doing your own work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 4 11 d2fg καὶ φιλοτιμεῖσθαι, ἡσυχάζειν 1 to strive These phrases continue the apostles’ exhortations. Here, the phrases translated **and to strive to live quietly** could refer to: (1) phrases that complement each other. Alternate translation: “and to aspire to live quietly” (2) phrases that express separate ideas. Alternate translation: “and seek to lovingly honor others, to live quietly,” Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this. 1TH 4 11 j4c7 figs-explicit πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια 1 to live quietly Here, **to perform your own things** implies that the Thessalonian church should tend to their own concerns. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to tend to your own business” or “to focus on your own tasks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 4 11 jmt9 figs-idiom ἐργάζεσθαι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν ὑμῶν 1 to perform your own things Here, **to work with your own hands** is an idiom meaning “earn what you need to live.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to work hard to earn what you need” or “to labor to pay for your expenses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 12 wj25 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 you may walk properly Here, **so that** could introduce a purpose clause. Paul could be stating the purpose for the apostles’ exhortation in [4:10](../04/10.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1TH 4 12 oo9l grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα περιπατῆτε 1 you may walk properly Here, **so that you may walk** could be a result clause. It is possible that this phrase refers to both purpose and result. If there is a way to indicate this in your language, you could express this dual meaning. Alternate translation: “as a result you now live” or “then you will live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 4 12 hp6g figs-metaphor περιπατῆτε εὐσχημόνως 1 you may walk properly Here, **to walk** is a metaphor that means “to live” or “behave.” If your readers would not understand what it means **to walk** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you would live appropriately” or “you would live nobly” or “you would behave modestly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 4 12 k59r figs-metaphor πρὸς τοὺς ἔξω 1 before those outside Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were physically located outside of an area. He means that they are not part of the Christian community. If your readers would not understand what “before those outside” means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in the presence of non-Christians” or “in front of those who do not trust in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 12 k59r figs-metaphor πρὸς τοὺς ἔξω 1 before those outside Paul speaks of these people as if they were physically located outside of an area. He means that they are not part of the Christian community. If your readers would not understand what “before those outside” means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in the presence of non-Christians” or “in front of those who do not trust in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 4 12 nait grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ μηδενὸς χρείαν ἔχητε 1 before those outside This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for the apostles’ exhortation in [4:10](../04/10.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “and so that you would not need anything” or “and then you could be self-sufficient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 4 13 vi2y grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 General Information: Here, **Now** is a connecting word that signals the beginning of an extended section in [4:13-5:11](../04/13.md) about the Second Coming of Christ (See chapter and book introduction)(See also 2 Thessalonians 1:7-10; 2:3-12). If our language has a special section marker, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 4 13 lan8 figs-litotes οὐ θέλομεν δὲ ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 General Information: Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “We want you to know for certain” or “Now we desire to clarify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) @@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 14 m1fy figs-possession ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς κοιμηθέντας διὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἄξει σὺν αὐτῷ. 1 rose again Paul is using the possessive form. Here, **through Jesus** could refer to: (1) being united to Jesus’ resurrection power **through** death. Alternate translation: “God will bring back with Jesus those who are united to him in death” (2) those who God will also bring back again **through** Jesus. Alternate translation: “it is through Jesus that God will bring back the dead people who are with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1TH 4 14 tjqj figs-explicit αὐτῷ 1 rose again Here Paul implies that **him** refers to **Jesus**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 4 15 vvda grammar-connect-words-phrases τοῦτο γὰρ ὑμῖν λέγομεν ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου 1 by the word of the Lord This clause indicates that what follows is something else important that the Thessalonian church should pay attention to (See also [1:8](../01/08.md) for **the word of the Lord**). Alternate translation: “Certainly, what we now say to you is the Lord Jesus’ message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 4 15 ni3m figs-metonymy ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου 1 by the word of the Lord The phrase **the word of the Lord** figuratively refers to “the whole message of the Lord’s gospel.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Here, **word** could refer to: (1) the authority of the message. Alternate translation: “because the Lord Jesus authorized our message” (2) the means of the message. Alternate translation: “with a message from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TH 4 15 ni3m figs-metonymy ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου 1 by the word of the Lord The phrase **the word of the Lord** refers to “the whole message of the Lord’s gospel.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Here, **word** could refer to: (1) the authority of the message. Alternate translation: “because the Lord Jesus authorized our message” (2) the means of the message. Alternate translation: “with a message from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 4 15 gbe1 grammar-connect-words-phrases Κυρίου, ὅτι ἡμεῖς 1 by the word of the Lord Here, **that** indicates that the rest of the verse is the content of **the word of the Lord**. You could indicate this by changing the punctuation or some other natural way in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord: we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 4 15 fdwk figs-exclusive λέγομεν…ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 by the word of the Lord When Paul says **we say**, he is speaking of himself, Silvanus, and Timothy, so **we** would be exclusive. However, when Paul says **we who are alive**, since he seems to be referring to all Christians, **we who are alive** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we apostles say … all of us believers in Christ who are still alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 4 15 hdlr figs-distinguish οἱ περιλειπόμενοι 1 by the word of the Lord This phrase gives us further information about **we who are alive**. It is not making a distinction between **who are left behind** and **we who are alive**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “and survive” or “and remain here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) @@ -361,7 +361,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 16 pjrh figs-parallelism καταβήσεται ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ; καὶ οἱ νεκροὶ ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστήσονται πρῶτον 1 the Lord himself … will descend The first main verb **descend** is listed after the events that describe it. This is to show contrast with the second verb **rise**. After the **Lord** Jesus comes down from **heaven**, the **dead** Christians will resurrect from the earth. Paul makes two opposite statements, in similar ways, to emphasis the dramatic nature of the Lord’s Second Coming. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “will come down from heaven, but the first to resurrect from the earth will be the dead people who are united to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1TH 4 16 k7sg grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 2 the Lord himself … will descend The word **and** indicates that the event the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “and then after that,” or “and afterward,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1TH 4 16 dr89 figs-explicit οἱ νεκροὶ 1 the dead in Christ will rise first Paul assumes that the Thessalonian church knows that **the dead** are the same as “those who are asleep” in [4:13–15](../04/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated “fallen asleep” in [4:13–15](../04/13.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 4 16 xrxu figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 the dead in Christ will rise first Here Paul speaks figuratively about **the dead** as though they were occupying space inside **Christ**. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to **Christ** (See also [2:14](../02/14.md)). Here, it also highlights the communion that living Thessalonian believers **in Christ** have with the believers **in Christ** who have died. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “who are united to Jesus Christ” or “who share life with Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 16 xrxu figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 the dead in Christ will rise first Here Paul speaks about **the dead** as though they were occupying space inside **Christ**. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to **Christ** (See also [2:14](../02/14.md)). Here, it also highlights the communion that living Thessalonian believers **in Christ** have with the believers **in Christ** who have died. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “who are united to Jesus Christ” or “who share life with Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 4 17 iy00 grammar-connect-time-sequential ἔπειτα 1 we who are alive Here, **Then** indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After that,” or “Afterward,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1TH 4 17 l5l1 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 we who are alive Though **we who are alive** could be exclusive of the apostles (See note for the same phrase at [4:15](../04/15.md)), the universal content of this section implies that all Christians are in view, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “all of us believers in Christ who remain alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 4 17 otiq writing-pronouns ἅμα σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 we who are alive Here, Paul refers to “the dead in Christ” (See [4:16](../04/16.md)) as **them**. If this is confusing in your language, you can make the reference explicit. Alternate translation: “together with the dead in Christ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 18 gt91 grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε παρακαλεῖτε 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “So then, keep encouraging” or “Because of this, you must comfort” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 4 18 y7zi figs-imperative παρακαλεῖτε 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This is an imperative, but it communicates an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an appeal. Alternate translation: “you should encourage” or “please continue to comfort (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1TH 4 18 aya5 writing-pronouns ἀλλήλους 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air The pronoun **one another** refers to the Thessalonian church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “each fellow member of your church” or “your fellow Thessalonian believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1TH 4 18 xsus figs-synecdoche ἐν τοῖς λόγοις τούτοις 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air Here, **with these words** could refer to “we will always be with the Lord” in [4:17](../04/17.md) or figuratively to all that has been said in [4:13-17](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “by reminding each other of our message” or “with these promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1TH 4 18 xsus figs-synecdoche ἐν τοῖς λόγοις τούτοις 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air Here, **with these words** could refer to “we will always be with the Lord” in [4:17](../04/17.md) or to all that has been said in [4:13-17](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “by reminding each other of our message” or “with these promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1TH 5 intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 5 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 5

1. Apostolic Teachings on the Second Coming of Christ (5:1-10)
* Timing (5:1-3)
* Preparation (5:4-8)
* God’s plan (5:9-10)
2. Final Instructions (5:11-28)
* Final Commands (5:11-22)
* Final Prayer (5:23-24)
* Final Appeals (5:25-27)
* Final blessing (5:25-27)

## Structure and Formatting

Paul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.

## “We” and “You”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Idiom

#### Day of the Lord

The “day of the Lord” is an idiom for the time of final salvation for God’s people and final judgment for God’s enemies. “Day” is metaphorical for a time period. Thus, the exact time of the coming “day of the Lord” will be a surprise to the world. The simile “like a thief in the night” refers to this surprise timing. Because of this, Christians must prepare for the coming of the Lord by living with faith, hope and love [5:8](../05/08.md) toward God and others. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]])

### Simile

#### Like a thief

The simile “like a thief in the night” refers to this surprise timing. Because of this, Christians must prepare for the coming of the Lord by living with faith, hope, and love [5:8](../05/08.md) toward God and others. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

### Metaphor

#### Day and night, light and darkness

The apostles use many metaphors throughout [5:1-11](../05/1.md). “Night,” “darkness,” “drunk,” “sleep” are all metaphors about spiritual ignorance or lack of readiness. “Day,” “light,” “sober,” “watch” are all metaphors about spiritual awareness and readiness.

#### Armor

Here, the apostles use a military metaphor to urge the Thessalonian church to be ready for Christ’s Second Coming at “the day of the Lord.” Just as soldiers must always be armed and ready to fight, so the Christian must live prepared for Christ’s return. Faithfulness and love are compared to a breastplate, and the hope of salvation is likened to a helmet [5:8](../05/08.md).

#### Prophecy

Those who “despise prophecies” in [5:20](../05/20.md) are said to “quench the Spirit.” This is a metaphor for trying to hinder the Holy Spirit’s guidance in the Church. All prophecies are to be examined and tested to determine if they adhere to apostolic teaching [5:21](../05/21.md). All prophecies that are proven to agree with apostolic teaching, are to be retained as good [5:21-22](../05/21/.md).

### Submission to Christian leadership

The apostles link the well-being and spiritual safety of the Thessalonian church to obedience to their leaders. Christian leaders are to be given recognition and loving respect by the church [5:12-13](../05/12.md).

### Holy Kiss

This refers to the ancient practice of exchanging a kiss of peace on the cheek during the liturgy. Different cultures have different standards of appropriate physical contact. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators will have to consider the most appropriate way to communicate this sensitive issue [5:26](../05/26.md). 1TH 5 1 i2vm figs-explicit περὶ δὲ τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 General Information: Here, **Now concerning** signals a change in subject (See also [4:9](../04/09.md)). This phrase implies that the apostles are answering a specific question previously asked by the Thessalonian church about the timing of “the coming of the Lord” and how the church should prepare for it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now, about your question related to the exact timing of the Lord’s return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 5 1 a8f3 figs-idiom τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 General Information: Here, **the times and the seasons** is an idiom referring to a specific point in time or a time period. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. This phrase could refer to: (1) a specific point in time. Alternate translation: “the appointed time when Jesus returns” or “the fixed time when Jesus returns” (See [Acts 1:7](acts/01/07.md)) for this exact phrase referring to the same thing)). (2) a specific amount of time. Alternate translation: “how long it will take for the Lord Jesus to return” or “when the Lord Jesus will return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -393,32 +393,32 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 5 3 iwc2 figs-idiom τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ 1 like birth pains to the one having in the womb Here, **having in the womb** is an idiom meaning “pregnant.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “do for a woman in late pregnancy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 5 3 undo figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 like birth pains to the one having in the womb Here, **certainly not** is a strong prohibition meaning “never” (See [4:15](../04/15.md)). If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “they will never escape” or “there is no way to possibly escape” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1TH 5 4 sk6v grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὑμεῖς δέ 1 you, brothers Here what follows the words **But you** is in contrast to the “sudden destruction” of the people in [5:3](../05/03.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Certainly you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1TH 5 4 b6lv figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐστὲ ἐν σκότει 1 are not in darkness Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they actually live in place without light. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **in darkness** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “are not unprepared” or “are not living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 4 b6lv figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐστὲ ἐν σκότει 1 are not in darkness Paul speaks of these people as if they actually live in place without light. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **in darkness** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “are not unprepared” or “are not living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 4 elp9 grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα ἡ ἡμέρα ὑμᾶς ὡς κλέπτας καταλάβῃ 1 so that the day might overtake you like a thief This is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “causing you to be like people such as those surprised by a robber. You are ready for the time when the Lord Jesus will return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 4 otz2 figs-metaphor ἡ ἡμέρα 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Here, Paul speaks figuratively about the idiom “the **day** of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md), by contrasting **the day** with **darkness**. He means that because the Thessalonian church is not unaware of “the **day** of the Lord,” they will not be unprepared, like people who live **in darkness**. If your readers would not understand what **the day** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “the day of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 4 ywez figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡ ἡμέρα ὑμᾶς ὡς κλέπτας καταλάβῃ 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Paul speaks figuratively of “the **day** of the Lord” as if it were a thief who surprises a person. He means that “the **day** of the Lord” will come suddenly for those who are unprepared (See “sudden destruction” in [5:3](../05/03.md)). If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “making you unprepared, like when a robber breaks in at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 4 otz2 figs-metaphor ἡ ἡμέρα 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Here, Paul speaks about the idiom “the **day** of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md), by contrasting **the day** with **darkness**. He means that because the Thessalonian church is not unaware of “the **day** of the Lord,” they will not be unprepared, like people who live **in darkness**. If your readers would not understand what **the day** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “the day of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 4 ywez figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡ ἡμέρα ὑμᾶς ὡς κλέπτας καταλάβῃ 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Paul speaks of “the **day** of the Lord” as if it were a thief who surprises a person. He means that “the **day** of the Lord” will come suddenly for those who are unprepared (See “sudden destruction” in [5:3](../05/03.md)). If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “making you unprepared, like when a robber breaks in at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 5 ddce figs-doublet πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας. οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Here, **sons of the light** means basically the same thing as **sons of the day**. Also, **of the night** means basically the same thing as **of the darkness**. The repetition is used to emphasize how **light** characterizes **day** and how **darkness** characterizes **night**. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Certainly, all of you are ready for Christ’s Second Coming. None of us are unprepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1TH 5 5 zp3z figs-metaphor πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Paul speaks figuratively of the Thessalonian church as if the **light** and **day** were their physical parents. He means that the Thessalonian church members are God’s spiritual children who are characterized by spiritual readiness. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **sons of the light and sons of the day** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “This is because all of you who belong to God are ready for Christ’s coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 5 zp3z figs-metaphor πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Paul speaks of the Thessalonian church as if the **light** and **day** were their physical parents. He means that the Thessalonian church members are God’s spiritual children who are characterized by spiritual readiness. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **sons of the light and sons of the day** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “This is because all of you who belong to God are ready for Christ’s coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 5 ilv4 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church will escape God’s judgment on “the **day** of the Lord” (See [5:2](../05/02.md)). Alternate translation: “Because in fact” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 5 5 cxo9 figs-nominaladj πάντες…ὑμεῖς…ἐστε 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe the whole Thessalonian church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “you Thessalonians are all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1TH 5 5 d6fm figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 We are not of the night nor of the darkness Again, Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they actually live in a place without light. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully (See [5:4](../05/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to be **of the night** or **of the darkness** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “We are not unprepared like those at night or those who live in the darkness, ” or “We are not characterized by being spiritually ignorant” or “We do not live like those who are characterized by sinful activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 5 d6fm figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 We are not of the night nor of the darkness Again, Paul speaks of these people as if they actually live in a place without light. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully (See [5:4](../05/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to be **of the night** or **of the darkness** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “We are not unprepared like those at night or those who live in the darkness, ” or “We are not characterized by being spiritually ignorant” or “We do not live like those who are characterized by sinful activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 5 kq0x figs-exclusive ἐσμὲν 1 We are not of the night nor of the darkness In [5:5-10](../05/05.md), **We** is inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “We believers in Christ are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 5 5 f4uw figs-possession νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 We are not of the night nor of the darkness Paul is using the possessive form to describe people who are characterized by spiritual ignorance or who live sinfully. This means that they will not be prepared at “**the day** of the Lord.” If this is not clear in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “characterized by being spiritually unprepared and living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1TH 5 6 paqf grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα οὖν 1 we might keep watch and be sober Here, **so then** emphatically introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “therefore” or “as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 6 d2aj figs-metaphor μὴ καθεύδωμεν ὡς οἱ λοιποί 1 we might keep watch and be sober Here Paul speaks figuratively about the people “of the night” and “of the darkness” are if they are sleeping. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully (See notes for “darkness” at [5:4-5](../05/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to **sleep** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “we must not be unprepared like non-Christians” or “let us not be like the rest of humanity, who are not aware that Jesus is coming back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 6 d2aj figs-metaphor μὴ καθεύδωμεν ὡς οἱ λοιποί 1 we might keep watch and be sober Here Paul speaks about the people “of the night” and “of the darkness” are if they are sleeping. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully (See notes for “darkness” at [5:4-5](../05/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to **sleep** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “we must not be unprepared like non-Christians” or “let us not be like the rest of humanity, who are not aware that Jesus is coming back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 6 on3d figs-imperative μὴ καθεύδωμεν…γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 we might keep watch and be sober Here, the verb forms **sleep**, **keep watch**, and **be sober** could also refer to: (1) commands. Alternate translation: “we must not sleep … we must keep watch and be sober” (2) appeals. Alternate translation: “let us not sleep … let us keep watch and let us be sober” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1TH 5 6 x0zh figs-nominaladj οἱ λοιποί 1 we might keep watch and be sober Paul is using the adjective **the rest** as a noun in order to describe those who are unprepared for Christ’s return. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “like others who are not ready for the Lord Jesus to return” or “like the rest of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1TH 5 6 q33e grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 we might not sleep Here, what follows the word **but** is in contrast to **the rest** who **sleep**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation (starting a new sentence): “On the contrary,” or “Instead,” or “Rather,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1TH 5 6 sdww figs-metaphor γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 we might not sleep Here, Paul speaks figuratively of Christians as if they are watch guards. He means that they should be aware and be prepared for the Lord’s return by living as God’s people should live. If your readers would not understand what it means to **keep watch** or **be sober** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “instead, we must stay spiritually alert and prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 6 sdww figs-metaphor γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 we might not sleep Here, Paul speaks of Christians as if they are watch guards. He means that they should be aware and be prepared for the Lord’s return by living as God’s people should live. If your readers would not understand what it means to **keep watch** or **be sober** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “instead, we must stay spiritually alert and prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 6 osxu figs-hendiadys γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 we might not sleep These verbs express a similar idea by using two words connected with **and**. The verb **be sober** tells how Christians should **keep watch**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “we should remain calmly alert” or “let us remain soberly awake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 1TH 5 7 fxca figs-parallelism οἱ γὰρ καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν; καὶ οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν 1 For those who are sleeping, sleep at night These two phrases convey similar ideas by repeating the same verb forms twice. Paul says the same thing twice, in different ways, to show that **sleeping** and **getting drunk** are states of being that make people unaware or unprepared. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could condense each phrase. Alternate translation: “Certainly, people sleep at night, and people get drunk at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1TH 5 7 oyjo grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For those who are sleeping, sleep at night Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church should “not sleep” or be unprepared for the Lord’s return (See [5:6](../05/06.md)). Alternate translation: “Because in fact,” or “Certainly,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 7 s253 figs-metaphor οἱ γὰρ καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν 1 For those who are sleeping, sleep at night Here again, like in [5:6](../05/06.md), Paul speaks figuratively as if these people are actually sleeping, or it is night time. He means that these people are spiritually unprepared or unaware or even sinful (See also notes at [5:2,4](../05/02.md)). If your readers would not understand what **sleep** and **night** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Those who are sleeping are unaware” or “Certainly those who are asleep are unprepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 7 exa8 figs-metaphor οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν 1 those who are getting drunk, get drunk at night Paul speaks figuratively as if these people are actually drunk, or it is night time. He means that these people are spiritually unprepared or unaware or sinful. If your readers would not understand what **getting drunk** or **night** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “those who are drunk are unprepared” or “those who are drunk are unaware” or “those who drink too much alcohol tend to drink at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 7 s253 figs-metaphor οἱ γὰρ καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν 1 For those who are sleeping, sleep at night Here again, like in [5:6](../05/06.md), Paul speaks as if these people are actually sleeping, or it is night time. He means that these people are spiritually unprepared or unaware or even sinful (See also notes at [5:2,4](../05/02.md)). If your readers would not understand what **sleep** and **night** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Those who are sleeping are unaware” or “Certainly those who are asleep are unprepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 7 exa8 figs-metaphor οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν 1 those who are getting drunk, get drunk at night Paul speaks as if these people are actually drunk, or it is night time. He means that these people are spiritually unprepared or unaware or sinful. If your readers would not understand what **getting drunk** or **night** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “those who are drunk are unprepared” or “those who are drunk are unaware” or “those who drink too much alcohol tend to drink at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 8 wh3g grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 we, being of the day What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to “getting drunk” at “night” in [5:7](../05/07.md). Instead, Christians are characterized by the activities of **the day** and staying **sober** (See [5:5–6](../05/05.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1TH 5 8 iv63 figs-imperative ἡμεῖς…νήφωμεν 1 we, being of the day Here, **should stay sober** could refer to: (1) a command. Alternate translation: “we … must stay sober” (2) an appeal. Alternate translation: “let us … stay sober” (See your translation at [5:6](../05/06.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -1TH 5 8 jqqo figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς δὲ ἡμέρας ὄντες 1 we, being of the day Paul speaks figuratively of Christians as if they are actually a part of the day time. He means that they are characterized by spiritual readiness for the Lord’s return. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **of the day** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Now, because we are ready for Christ’s coming, we” or “Since we are characterized by being ready, we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 8 ev6i figs-metaphor ἐνδυσάμενοι θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ περικεφαλαίαν, ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας 1 having put on the breastplate of faith and of love Paul speaks figuratively of Christians as if they are soldiers. He means that just as a soldier must equip himself with armor in order to be ready to fight, so Christians must prepare themselves for the Second Coming of Christ with the spiritual protection of **faith**, **love**, and **hope** (See also [Ephesians 6:10-18,23](../eph/06/10.md)). If your readers would not understand what these phrases mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 8 jqqo figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς δὲ ἡμέρας ὄντες 1 we, being of the day Paul speaks of Christians as if they are actually a part of the day time. He means that they are characterized by spiritual readiness for the Lord’s return. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **of the day** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Now, because we are ready for Christ’s coming, we” or “Since we are characterized by being ready, we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 8 ev6i figs-metaphor ἐνδυσάμενοι θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ περικεφαλαίαν, ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας 1 having put on the breastplate of faith and of love Paul speaks of Christians as if they are soldiers. He means that just as a soldier must equip himself with armor in order to be ready to fight, so Christians must prepare themselves for the Second Coming of Christ with the spiritual protection of **faith**, **love**, and **hope** (See also [Ephesians 6:10-18,23](../eph/06/10.md)). If your readers would not understand what these phrases mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 9 h5y2 figs-abstractnouns ὅτι οὐκ ἔθετο ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς ὀργὴν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Here, **wrath** refers to God’s future and final Judgment (See your translation of **wrath** at [1:10](../01/10/.md), [2:16](../02/16/.md)). (See also [What is the “second coming” of Jesus?](../front/intro)). If your language does not use the abstract noun **wrath**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. “Certainly, God did not destine that he would punish us” or “Indeed, God did not determine that he would judge us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 5 9 lrx6 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church should have “the hope of salvation” (See [5:8](../05/08.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 5 8 l89q figs-possession πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης…σωτηρίας 1 having put on the breastplate of faith and of love Paul uses the possessive form to describe things that are characterized by **faith** and **hope** and **love**. You could turn these phrases into similes if it would be clearer in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -427,26 +427,26 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 5 9 qfcf figs-possession εἰς περιποίησιν σωτηρίας 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Here, the phrase translated **to obtain salvation** is a possessive form that Paul uses to indicate that **salvation** is something that belongs to God’s people. If this is not clear in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “for the possessing of salvation” or “for the acquiring of salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1TH 5 10 arhm figs-distinguish τοῦ ἀποθανόντος περὶ ἡμῶν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Here, **the one who died for us** gives us further information about what “salvation through our Lord Jesus Christ” is (See [5:9](../05/09.md)). Paul means that God gives the guarantee that Christians will “obtain salvation,” because Jesus **died for us**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who died on our behalf” or “who died for our sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1TH 5 10 dzq0 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα…ἅμα σὺν αὐτῷ ζήσωμεν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating why Jesus **died for us**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that … we could live together with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1TH 5 10 w59c figs-metaphor εἴτε γρηγορῶμεν εἴτε καθεύδωμεν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were physically **awake or asleep**. He means that they are “alive or dead” (See [4:14–17](../04/14.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to be **awake or asleep** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “whether we are living or even if we are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 10 w59c figs-metaphor εἴτε γρηγορῶμεν εἴτε καθεύδωμεν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Paul speaks of these people as if they were physically **awake or asleep**. He means that they are “alive or dead” (See [4:14–17](../04/14.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to be **awake or asleep** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “whether we are living or even if we are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 11 r921 grammar-connect-words-phrases διὸ 1 build up one the other Here, **Therefore** indicates the conclusion of this section about timing of “the day of the Lord,” and connects to the manner of Christ’s return in [4:14–18](../04/14.md) by again using the same phrase, **comfort one another**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 5 11 o85i grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ παρακαλεῖτε 1 build up one the other **Therefore** begins a result clause. Paul explains how the Thessalonian church should respond to the fact that Jesus died so that Christians can “obtain salvation” (See [5:9](../05/09.md)). Alternate translation: “This is why you should encourage” or “As a result, you must comfort” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 5 11 m2c9 figs-doublet διὸ παρακαλεῖτε ἀλλήλους, καὶ οἰκοδομεῖτε εἷς τὸν ἕνα 1 build up one the other These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much Paul wants the Thessalonian church to encourage and support each other. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “As a result, continue to be supportive of what each person needs” or “This is why you must supportively console each other with this message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TH 5 11 hepx figs-imperative παρακαλεῖτε…οἰκοδομεῖτε 1 build up one the other These verbs are imperatives but could communicate an appeal rather than a command. You could use a form in your language that communicates an urgent request or appeal. Alternate translation: “we apostles urge you to comfort … build up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -1TH 5 11 fx2f figs-idiom οἰκοδομεῖτε 1 build up one the other Paul speaks figuratively of the Thessalonian church as if they were a building that can be constructed. He means that they should mutually support one another in the Christian life. If your readers would not understand what it means to **build up** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “keep supporting” or “continue to confirm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 11 fx2f figs-idiom οἰκοδομεῖτε 1 build up one the other Paul speaks of the Thessalonian church as if they were a building that can be constructed. He means that they should mutually support one another in the Christian life. If your readers would not understand what it means to **build up** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “keep supporting” or “continue to confirm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 11 kdae figs-idiom εἷς τὸν ἕνα 1 build up one the other Here, the term **one the one** is an idiom meaning “each and every one” or “each one.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “each one” or “one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 5 11 sfv4 καθὼς καὶ ποιεῖτε 1 build up one the other Here Paul uses the emphatic phrase **just as also you are doing** to encourage the Thessalonian church to continue their practice of mutually supporting each other. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “exactly as you have been doing” 1TH 5 12 pd47 grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 General Information: Here, **Now** indicates that what follows is the final section of instructions from the apostles. Alternate translation: “Lastly” or “Indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 5 12 fqh3 figs-distinguish τοὺς κοπιῶντας ἐν ὑμῖν, καὶ προϊσταμένους ὑμῶν ἐν Κυρίῳ, καὶ νουθετοῦντας ὑμᾶς 1 leading you in the Lord This clause expresses different functions for the same group of leaders. It is not making a distinction between **those who are laboring among you** and **leading you** and **admonishing you**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “your leaders who are working among you and guiding you in the Lord and training you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -1TH 5 12 f4jv figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 leading you in the Lord Paul speaks figuratively as if the leaders of the church at Thessalonica were occupying space inside of **the Lord**. Here, the metaphor expresses the idea that these men represent Jesus himself in their leadership role in the Thessalonian church (See also [4:1](../04/01.md). If your readers would not understand what **in the Lord** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with authority from the Lord Jesus” or “as spokespersons for the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 12 f4jv figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 leading you in the Lord Paul speaks as if the leaders of the church at Thessalonica were occupying space inside of **the Lord**. Here, the metaphor expresses the idea that these men represent Jesus himself in their leadership role in the Thessalonian church (See also [4:1](../04/01.md). If your readers would not understand what **in the Lord** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with authority from the Lord Jesus” or “as spokespersons for the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 13 jq0o grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, διὰ τὸ ἔργον αὐτῶν 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “and because of their work on your behalf, we also ask you to lovingly show them the utmost consideration” or “and since they work so hard for you, we also urge you to show them the highest honor out of love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 13 p6m4 figs-metaphor ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Paul speaks figuratively as if the Thessalonian church is occupying space inside of **love**. He is describing how they should show honor to their leaders. If your readers would not understand what **in love** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Here, **in love** could refer to: (1) the means of love. Alternate translation: “by loving them” (2) the basis for love. Alternate translation: “on the basis of your love for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 13 p6m4 figs-metaphor ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Paul speaks as if the Thessalonian church is occupying space inside of **love**. He is describing how they should show honor to their leaders. If your readers would not understand what **in love** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Here, **in love** could refer to: (1) the means of love. Alternate translation: “by loving them” (2) the basis for love. Alternate translation: “on the basis of your love for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 13 rqs8 figs-imperative εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here is the first of 17 final appeals in [5:13-26](../05/13.md) that the apostles give the Thessalonian church. **Be at peace** is an imperative, but here it could be an urgent request rather than a command. Use a natural way in your language to communicate an appeal or urgent request. Alternate translation: “We urge you to continue to live peacefully with your leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1TH 5 14 lajk figs-litany 0 to regard them highly in love because of their work Paul uses a repetitive series of imperative sentences in [5:14–22](../05/14) to urge the Thessalonian church to show practical love to one another. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone should do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) 1TH 5 14 tdxa grammar-connect-words-phrases παρακαλοῦμεν δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work This phrase signals the apostles’ final appeals to the Thessalonian church. Since there are 14 commands in this section [5:14-22](../05/14.md), you could use a marker from your language to indicate this final section. Alternate translation: “Finally, we urge you, fellow believers in Christ” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 5 14 qadb figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here the idiom **brothers** could refer to: (1) the whole Thessalonian church including the leaders. Alternate translation: “our fellow believers in Christ” (2) the leaders of the Thessalonian church. Alternate translation: “fellow leaders of Christ’s church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 5 14 g34k figs-nominaladj πρὸς πάντας 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe the Thessalonian church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “toward all your fellow believers in Christ” or “with the whole Thessalonian church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1TH 5 15 vlp7 figs-idiom ὁρᾶτε 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here, **See that** is an idiom used to command attention. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Be certain that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 5 15 dqs8 figs-metaphor κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ τινι ἀποδῷ 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Paul speaks figuratively of **evil** as if it were goods or money that could be exchanged. He means that if a someone treats you badly, you should not respond in the same way. If your readers would not understand what it means to **pay back evil for evil** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “treats anyone wrongly because they treated you wrongly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 15 dqs8 figs-metaphor κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ τινι ἀποδῷ 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Paul speaks of **evil** as if it were goods or money that could be exchanged. He means that if a someone treats you badly, you should not respond in the same way. If your readers would not understand what it means to **pay back evil for evil** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “treats anyone wrongly because they treated you wrongly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 15 oz10 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here what follows the word **but** is in contrast to repaying **evil for evil**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “and instead,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1TH 5 15 mc2z figs-hyperbole πάντοτε 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here, **always** could be using exaggeration to express emphasis. Paul means that the Thessalonian church should make it a habit to **pursue what is good**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses this emphasis. Alternate translation: “make every effort to” or “constantly” or “habitually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1TH 5 15 pe3l figs-merism καὶ εἰς ἀλλήλους καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here, **both for one another and for all** is used to emphasize groups of people. In this context, the phrase could refer to: (1) the Thessalonian church and all believers in Christ. Alternate translation (remove preceding comma): “for your church at Thessalonica and for all believers in Christ” (2) the Thessalonian church and the whole human race (See how you translated this phrase in [3:12](../03/12.md)). Alternate translation (remove preceding comma): “for everyone” or “for each and every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) @@ -459,23 +459,23 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 5 18 l3sk grammar-collectivenouns τοῦτο γὰρ θέλημα Θεοῦ 1 for this is the will of God Here, **this** is a singular pronoun that could refer to: (1) all the commands in [5:14-18](../05/14.md) Alternate translation: “because all these things are what God desires” (2) **give thanks**. Alternate translation: “for in fact, this is God’s will” or “for certainly, this thing is God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 1TH 5 18 yu36 figs-ellipsis τοῦτο 1 for this is the will of God A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1TH 5 18 sw8b figs-abstractnouns θέλημα Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 for this is the will of God If your language does not use the abstract noun phrase **the will of God in Christ Jesus for you**, you can express the idea it in another way. Alternate translation: “how God desires people to live who are united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 5 18 mbz1 figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 for this is the will of God Here, Paul speaks figuratively of **the will of God** as though it were occupying space inside **Christ Jesus**. This metaphor means that the way God desires his people to live is inseparable from being united to **Christ Jesus** (See also [2:14](../02/14.md)). If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “for those of you who are united to Jesus Christ” or “for all of you who share life with Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 19 j1ei figs-metaphor τὸ Πνεῦμα μὴ σβέννυτε 1 Do not quench the Spirit Paul speaks figuratively of **the** Holy **Spirit** as if he is fire that can be extinguished. Paul means that the Thessalonian church must not hinder the work of the Holy **Spirit**, especially by despising prophecies (See [5:20](../05/20.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to **quench** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Do not extinguish the Spirit” or “Do not reject the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 18 mbz1 figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 for this is the will of God Here, Paul speaks of **the will of God** as though it were occupying space inside **Christ Jesus**. This metaphor means that the way God desires his people to live is inseparable from being united to **Christ Jesus** (See also [2:14](../02/14.md)). If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “for those of you who are united to Jesus Christ” or “for all of you who share life with Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 19 j1ei figs-metaphor τὸ Πνεῦμα μὴ σβέννυτε 1 Do not quench the Spirit Paul speaks of **the** Holy **Spirit** as if he is fire that can be extinguished. Paul means that the Thessalonian church must not hinder the work of the Holy **Spirit**, especially by despising prophecies (See [5:20](../05/20.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to **quench** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Do not extinguish the Spirit” or “Do not reject the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 19 sv8r figs-litotes μὴ σβέννυτε 1 Do not quench the Spirit Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Continue to kindle” or “Be fervent in” or “Keep working along with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1TH 5 20 iv1n figs-litotes μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 Do not despise prophecies Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Readily accept” or “Cherish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1TH 5 20 rrza figs-parallelism προφητείας μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 Do not despise prophecies The two phrases in [5:19–20](../05/19.md) could refer to the same thing. Paul could be saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to correct how the Thessalonian church viewed prophecy. He means that the Holy Spirit is the source of true prophecy (See [2 Peter 1:21](2pet/01/21.md)), so they should not “quench the Spirit” by rejecting all prophecies. You could use a natural way in your language to emphasize this. Alternate translation: “Do not continue to despise prophetic messages from the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1TH 5 21 ihzh figs-metaphor πάντα δοκιμάζετε; τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 Test all things This could mean: (1) Paul is beginning a general list of things that the Thessalonians should **Test** and **Hold fast** if they are **good**. (2) Paul is continuing to refer to the prophesies in the previous verse, and he wants the Thessalonians to **Test** those and **Hold fast** to the prophesies that are truly from God. -1TH 5 21 wx69 figs-metaphor πάντα δοκιμάζετε 1 Test all things Paul speaks figuratively as if the Thessalonians could make **all things** pass a test. This could mean: (1) they should examine everything they hear and do to make sure it conforms to what honors God. Alternate translation: “Carefully examine everything you hear and do” (2) they should examine and approve prophecies to determine whether or not they are genuinely from the Holy Spirit (See [2:4](../02/04.md) for a similar context)). Alternate translation: “examine and approve all prophecies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 21 wx69 figs-metaphor πάντα δοκιμάζετε 1 Test all things Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians could make **all things** pass a test. This could mean: (1) they should examine everything they hear and do to make sure it conforms to what honors God. Alternate translation: “Carefully examine everything you hear and do” (2) they should examine and approve prophecies to determine whether or not they are genuinely from the Holy Spirit (See [2:4](../02/04.md) for a similar context)). Alternate translation: “examine and approve all prophecies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 21 sjh0 figs-nominaladj πάντα 1 Test all things Here, **all things** is an adjectival phrase. Depending on whether you decided this is a new list or a continuation of verse 20, this could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “everything you hear and do” (2) Alternate translation: “all prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1TH 5 21 n1jv figs-metaphor τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 Test all things Paul speaks figuratively of **good** things as if they were objects that someone could hold tightly in his hands. He means that the Thessalonian church should only believe and practice things that prove to be from the Holy Spirit. If your readers would not understand what it means to **hold fast to what {is} good** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Keep only the valid things” or “Retain what is from the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 21 n1jv figs-metaphor τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 Test all things Paul speaks of **good** things as if they were objects that someone could hold tightly in his hands. He means that the Thessalonian church should only believe and practice things that prove to be from the Holy Spirit. If your readers would not understand what it means to **hold fast to what {is} good** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Keep only the valid things” or “Retain what is from the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 21 jska figs-ellipsis τὸ καλὸν 1 Test all things A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1TH 5 22 z9k0 figs-personification παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ 1 Test all things Here, **evil** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could be seen. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “anything clearly wicked” or “all that is obviously evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1TH 5 22 z9k0 figs-personification παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ 1 Test all things Here, **evil** is spoken of as though it were a person who could be seen. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “anything clearly wicked” or “all that is obviously evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1TH 5 23 mqi7 translate-blessing αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης ἁγιάσαι 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Here, the verb forms indicate that this is a blessing or prayer (See also [3:11–13](../03/11.md)). Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “Now we pray that God himself, who gives peace, would sanctify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) 1TH 5 23 ozyh figs-parallelism ἁγιάσαι ὑμᾶς ὁλοτελεῖς, καὶ ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως…τηρηθείη 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how much he wants God to preserve the Thessalonian church as his people. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “may … fully preserve you as his people to the end, and may every part of you be protected” or “may … completely preserve each and every one of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1TH 5 23 sbxc figs-possession ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Here Paul uses the possessive form **the God of peace**, which is a title for God found in the New Testament (See Romans 15:33; 16:20; Philippians 4:9; Hebrews 13:20). If this is not clear in your language, you could make it explicit. In this context, **the God of peace** could refer to: (1) who God is. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by peace” (2) what God does. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” (3) Both. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1TH 5 23 nb1x figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Paul uses the word **himself** to emphasize the urgency of the apostles’ prayer or blessing by drawing attention to **God**, who is the only one who can sanctify and keep the Christian person blameless. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 5 23 vkhs figs-activepassive ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως…τηρηθείη. 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly If it would be more natural in your language, you could say **be kept** with an active form, and you could emphasize who did the action. Alternate translation: “may God keep you completely blameless” or “may God make your whole life sinless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1TH 5 23 s36k figs-merism ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Paul speaks figuratively, using these three aspects of the human person in order to represent the whole human being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “your whole being” or “your whole life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +1TH 5 23 s36k figs-merism ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Paul speaks, using these three aspects of the human person in order to represent the whole human being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “your whole being” or “your whole life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 1TH 5 23 nyma figs-idiom ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Here, **coming of the Lord** is a well-known idiom in 1-2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [4:15](../04/15.md)) or the “Day of the **Lord**” in [5:2](../05/02.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when our Lord Jesus Christ comes back to earth again” or “at the arrival of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 5 24 i03k grammar-connect-logic-result πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς, ὃς καὶ ποιήσει 1 who will also do it Here, **who will also do it** expresses the result of God’s faithfulness. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Because God is faithful, he will also preserve you sanctified” or “Since God is trustworthy, he will also completely sanctify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 5 24 vx20 figs-explicit πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς 1 Faithful is he who calls you Here it is implied that **he** refers to “the God of peace” in [5:23](../05/23.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Faithful is God who calls you” or “The God who continues to summon you is faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) diff --git a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv index a34cac54fc..a685c7b21b 100644 --- a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 1 1 hm3e translate-names Σιλουανὸς 1 Silvanus **Silvanus** is the Latin form of “Silas.” **Silvanus** is the name of a man, the same person listed in the book of Acts as Paul’s fellow traveler. If your readers may not know that these two are the same person, you could use the name “Silas” in the text and “Silvanus” in the footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TH 1 1 ge00 figs-ellipsis Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 You may want to fill in the words necessary to make this a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy send this letter to the church” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis) 2TH 1 1 l8q8 figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Although Paul wrote this letter, he identifies Silvanus and Timothy as also sending it. This means that they were with him and were in agreement with it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that clear, as in the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) -2TH 1 1 eajo figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of the believers as though they were occupying space inside of God and Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “sharing life with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +2TH 1 1 eajo figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul speaks of the believers as though they were occupying space inside of God and Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “sharing life with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) 2TH 1 2 g6rb translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Grace to you Many languages have different ways to offer good wishes as they greet. Paul greeted his letter recipients with a blessing. Use a form that would be a good wish or blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “We pray that God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” or “I wish you grace and peace from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “May the grace and peace of God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be your portion” or “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show grace and give peace to your hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) 2TH 1 2 bv9m figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **grace** and **peace**, you can express these ideas as verbs or in another way. Alternate translation: “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and give rest to your inner being” or “...be favorable to you and make you at ease” or “...be kind to you and set your heart at rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TH 1 3 o6v9 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 3-12, Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica and prays for them. A heading for this section might be, “Thanks and Prayers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 1 11 r8gk figs-abstractnouns πληρώσῃ πᾶσαν εὐδοκίαν ἀγαθωσύνης, καὶ ἔργον πίστεως ἐν δυνάμει 1 he may fulfill every desire of goodness If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **desire**, **goodness**, **faith**, and **power**, you can express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “he may make you able to do all of the good things that you want to do because you trust in Jesus and because God is powerful” or “he may empower you to act on what you believe in order to do good things in every way that you desire, because God is powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TH 1 11 c7o6 figs-ellipsis καὶ πληρώσῃ 1 Here, **and he may fulfill** adds another reason why Paul and his associates **pray always** for the Thessalonian believers. This part of the sentence assumes some of the words from earlier in the sentence. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the earlier part of the sentence. Alternate translation: “and we also pray so that he may fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2TH 1 12 nvth grammar-connect-logic-goal ὅπως 1 Here, **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul and his associates pray all of the things mentioned in verse 11. It is a repetition of the same purpose that was given in verse 10, using similar words. Alternate translation: “and we also pray so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -2TH 1 12 c6ec figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **the name of our Lord Jesus** figuratively stands for the person of the Lord Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the reputation of our Lord Jesus” or “our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TH 1 12 c6ec figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **the name of our Lord Jesus** stands for the person of the Lord Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the reputation of our Lord Jesus” or “our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TH 1 12 q994 figs-activepassive ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν ὑμῖν 1 so that the name of our Lord Jesus might be glorified in you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers will glorify Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that you would glorify the name of our Lord Jesus” (2) others will glorify Jesus because of what he has done for the Thessalonian believers. Alternate translation: “so that people would glorify the name of our Lord Jesus because of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 12 pg2i figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 and you in him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Jesus might glorify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 12 l4l1 figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 The phrase **and you in him** leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could make a complete sentence by supplying these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and so that you might be glorified in him” or “and so that he might glorify you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis) @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 2 7 si9i figs-abstractnouns τὸ…μυστήριον ἤδη ἐνεργεῖται τῆς ἀνομίας 1 mystery of lawlessness Here, **lawlessness** is characterized as a **mystery** because we cannot understand why people rebel against God’s wise instructions unless we understand the spiritual forces at work, which Paul explains here. If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you can express them in another way. Alternate translation: “people are already mysteriously rebelling against God” or “Satan is already secretly leading people to reject God’s laws, as this man will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TH 2 7 fcu7 ὁ κατέχων 1 the one who restrains him To restrain someone is to hold him back or to keep him from doing what he wants to do. Alternate translation: “the one who has been holding him back” 2TH 2 7 bijc writing-pronouns γένηται 1 Here, **he** refers to the one who is restraining the man of lawlessness. If this is not clear to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who restrains the man of lawlessness moves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2TH 2 7 tt88 figs-metaphor ἐκ μέσου γένηται 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of the person who is restraining the man of lawlessness as though he were standing in front of him and blocking his path. If this does not make sense in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor or you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “he stops restraining him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TH 2 7 tt88 figs-metaphor ἐκ μέσου γένηται 1 Here Paul speaks of the person who is restraining the man of lawlessness as though he were standing in front of him and blocking his path. If this does not make sense in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor or you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “he stops restraining him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 2 8 hn67 figs-activepassive καὶ τότε ἀποκαλυφθήσεται ὁ ἄνομος 1 and then the lawless one will be revealed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and then God will allow the lawless one to show himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 2 8 vay9 figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 with the breath of his mouth In this figure of speech, **breath** represents the power of God and **mouth** represents the spoken word of Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by the power of his spoken word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TH 2 8 hy3y figs-parallelism ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ, καὶ καταργήσει τῇ ἐπιφανείᾳ τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 and will bring to nothing by the appearance of his coming These two phrases describe the same event. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how much more powerful Jesus is than the man of lawlessness. If it is confusing for your readers to talk about killing someone and then bringing him to nothing, you could reverse the order of the phrases, as in the UST, or you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “will destroy by his glorious appearance and with the breath of his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 2 10 sl5b grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness This phrase could express: (1) the result of receiving the love of the truth. Alternate translation: “and thus be saved” or (2) the purpose of loving the truth. Alternate translation: “so that they could be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2TH 2 10 xst1 figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς 1 in all deceit of unrighteousness If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, that would be God. Alternate translation: “for God to save them” or “so that God would save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 2 11 sj1v grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 because of this What follows this connector is the result of the action of the people who “did not receive the love of the truth” in verse 10. Use a connector that shows that what the people did in verse 10 is the reason for what follows in this verse. Alternate translation: “for this reason” or “because the people did not receive the love of the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -2TH 2 11 en8e figs-metaphor πέμπει αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς ἐνέργειαν πλάνης, εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς τῷ ψεύδει 1 God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie Paul is speaking figuratively of **God** allowing something to happen to people as if he is **sending** something to them. Alternate translation: “God is allowing them to think wrongly so that they believe the lies of the man of lawlessness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TH 2 11 en8e figs-metaphor πέμπει αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς ἐνέργειαν πλάνης, εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς τῷ ψεύδει 1 God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie Paul is speaking of **God** allowing something to happen to people as if he is **sending** something to them. Alternate translation: “God is allowing them to think wrongly so that they believe the lies of the man of lawlessness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 2 11 u7a0 figs-possession ἐνέργειαν πλάνης 1 God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **working** that is characterized by **error**. This means something that works to produce error in them. Alternate translation: “the ability to think in a wrong way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2TH 2 11 nass grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς 1 God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God sends the **working of error**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that they may believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 2TH 2 11 bkpm writing-pronouns εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς 1 God is sending them a working of error for them to believe the lie Here, **them** refers to the people who “did not receive the love of the truth” in verse 10. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that these people may believe” or “in order that the people who did not receive the love of the truth may believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -128,8 +128,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 2 14 pke7 figs-abstractnouns εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “so that you might become glorious like our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TH 2 15 holv grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα οὖν 1 The words **So then** connect this verse with verses 13 and 14 as their logical conclusion. Because God did the wonderful things in those verses, the Thessalonians should do what verse 15 says. Use a natural way to introduce a conclusion in your language. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Because God did all of that for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2TH 2 15 pa9j figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow believers in Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2TH 2 15 u9ss figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 So then, brothers, stand firm Here, the phrase **stand firm** is used figuratively to mean to not change one’s beliefs but, rather, to remain steadfast in what one believes. If this would be unclear in your language, consider using an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “continue to believe the truth” or “do not give up your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TH 2 15 l4vr figs-metaphor κρατεῖτε τὰς παραδόσεις 1 hold tight to the traditions Here, **traditions** refers to the truths about Christ that Paul and the other apostles taught. Paul speaks of them figuratively as if his readers could hold on to them with their hands. Alternate translation: “do not give up believing those truths” or “continue to believe the true teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TH 2 15 u9ss figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 So then, brothers, stand firm Here, the phrase **stand firm** is used to mean to not change one’s beliefs but, rather, to remain steadfast in what one believes. If this would be unclear in your language, consider using an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “continue to believe the truth” or “do not give up your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TH 2 15 l4vr figs-metaphor κρατεῖτε τὰς παραδόσεις 1 hold tight to the traditions Here, **traditions** refers to the truths about Christ that Paul and the other apostles taught. Paul speaks of them as if his readers could hold on to them with their hands. Alternate translation: “do not give up believing those truths” or “continue to believe the true teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 2 15 cpdo figs-doublet στήκετε καὶ κρατεῖτε 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the importance of doing this. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “keep on firmly believing” or “do not allow anyone to change your mind in any way about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2TH 2 15 whp8 figs-activepassive ἐδιδάχθητε 1 you were taught If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “we have taught you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 2 15 z2vs figs-synecdoche διὰ λόγου 1 whether by word or by our letter Here, **by word** is an expression that means that Paul had been present with them and taught them personally. Alternate translation: “by what we said to you in person” or “when we were talking to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 3 3 yx9g figs-explicit ὃς στηρίξει 1 who will strengthen The word **strengthen** here refers to spiritual strength, not physical strength. If your readers might misunderstand this, it can be made clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “who will strengthen you spiritually” or “who will make you inwardly strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 3 3 p91k τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 the evil one This could mean: (1) the evil being Satan. Alternate translation: “Satan” or (2) evil in general. Alternate translation: “evil” 2TH 3 4 xk85 figs-nominaladj πεποίθαμεν δὲ 1 we are confident The phrase **We are also confident** may be confusing in some languages. If that is the case in your language, you could translate this as a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “We also have faith” or “We also trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -2TH 3 4 w79e figs-metaphor πεποίθαμεν δὲ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) Paul has confidence in the Thessalonian believers because of the close relationship that they have with the Lord Jesus. In this case, Paul is speaking figuratively of this relationship as if they were inside the Lord Jesus. Alternative translation: “Because you are united to the Lord, we are also confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) Paul has confidence in the Lord Jesus, that he will cause them to do what is right. Alternative translation: “Because we trust in the Lord Jesus to enable you, we are also confident” +2TH 3 4 w79e figs-metaphor πεποίθαμεν δὲ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) Paul has confidence in the Thessalonian believers because of the close relationship that they have with the Lord Jesus. In this case, Paul is speaking of this relationship as if they were inside the Lord Jesus. Alternative translation: “Because you are united to the Lord, we are also confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) Paul has confidence in the Lord Jesus, that he will cause them to do what is right. Alternative translation: “Because we trust in the Lord Jesus to enable you, we are also confident” 2TH 3 5 giz4 figs-metonymy ὁ…Κύριος κατευθύναι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 may the Lord direct your hearts Here, **hearts** stands for a person’s thoughts or mind. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may the Lord cause you to understand the love of God and the endurance of Christ” or “may the Lord help you to know the love of God and the endurance of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TH 3 5 wre3 figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 to the love of God and to the endurance of Christ Paul speaks of God’s **love** and Christ’s **endurance** as if they were destinations on a path. If your readers would not understand this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you and the endurance that Christ supplies you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 3 5 dzbn figs-possession εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **love of God** can mean (1) the love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you” or (2) the love that people give to God. Alternate translation: “to love God more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -165,9 +165,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 3 6 mst3 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 6-15, Paul gives the believers some final instructions about working and not being idle. A heading for this section might be, “Believers Must Work.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 2TH 3 6 v33v grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Now The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2TH 3 6 x9l8 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…ἀδελφοῦ 1 brothers Here, the words **brothers** and **brother** refer to fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2TH 3 6 y4a9 figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ Here, **name** figuratively stands for the person of Jesus Christ. It can also mean “with the authority of.” If using this term figuratively is not clear in your language, you could express it directly. Alternate translation: “as if our Lord Jesus Christ himself were speaking” or “with the authority that our Lord Jesus Christ has given us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TH 3 6 y4a9 figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ Here, **name** stands for the person of Jesus Christ. It can also mean “with the authority of.” If using this term is not clear in your language, you could express it directly. Alternate translation: “as if our Lord Jesus Christ himself were speaking” or “with the authority that our Lord Jesus Christ has given us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TH 3 6 jvw1 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 of our Lord Here, **our** refers to all believers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person plural pronouns in your language, this should be an inclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -2TH 3 6 x2r8 figs-metaphor ἀτάκτως περιπατοῦντος 1 Here Paul speaks figuratively of people who are not living well as if they walk in a haphazard manner. If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “who is living in a bad way” or “who is not living correctly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TH 3 6 x2r8 figs-metaphor ἀτάκτως περιπατοῦντος 1 Here Paul speaks of people who are not living well as if they walk in a haphazard manner. If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “who is living in a bad way” or “who is not living correctly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 3 6 se1g τὴν παράδοσιν 1 Here, **the traditions** refers to the teachings that the apostles received from Jesus and are passing along to all believers. Alternate translation: “the teachings” or “the instructions” 2TH 3 7 h222 figs-explicit μιμεῖσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 to imitate us The phrase **to imitate** may be a difficult word to translate in your language. In that case, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “to act the way that my fellow workers and I act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 3 7 b1i1 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἠτακτήσαμεν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 we did not behave disorderly among you Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “we lived among you as those who had much discipline” or “we worked diligently when we were with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) @@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 3 13 jx8t grammar-connect-logic-contrast δέ 1 But Paul here uses the word **But** to contrast the lazy believers with the hardworking believers. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Concerning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 2TH 3 13 e59v figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 you The word **you** refers to all the Thessalonian believers, so it should be in plural form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 2TH 3 13 usu9 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2TH 3 14 mzs4 figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ἡμῶν 1 if anyone does not obey our word Paul is figuratively referring to his command to the Thessalonian believers as a **word**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “our instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TH 3 14 mzs4 figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ἡμῶν 1 if anyone does not obey our word Paul is referring to his command to the Thessalonian believers as a **word**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “our instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TH 3 14 nv3v figs-idiom τοῦτον σημειοῦσθε 1 note this one Paul wants the Thessalonians to notice who this person is. Alternate translation: “point out that person” or “make sure everyone knows who he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TH 3 14 y552 figs-explicit ἵνα ἐντραπῇ 1 so that he may be put to shame Paul instructs believers to avoid lazy believers as a disciplinary action. If necessary, you could make this explicit to make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “in order that he will know that his laziness is wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 3 15 idj6 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφόν 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) diff --git a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv index dfa3e87d20..7413cdcd19 100644 --- a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 1TI front intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Timothy

In this letter, Paul alternates between personal commands to Timothy that empower him to act as his representative and with his authority, and instructions for how followers of Jesus should live in community.

1. Greetings (1:1-2)
2. Paul commands Timothy to tell people not to teach false doctrines (1:3-20)
3. Paul gives instructions about how to re-establish order and decency in the church (2:1-15)
4. Paul gives instructions about how to ensure that elders and deacons are properly qualified (3:1-13)
5. Paul commands Timothy regarding his own personal conduct (3:14-5:2)
6. Paul gives instructions to ensure church support for worthy widows (5:3-16) and elders (5:17-20)
7. Paul commands Timothy that he must be impartial (5:21-25)
8. Paul gives instructions to ensure order in master-servant relationships (6:1-2a)
9. Paul commands Timothy regarding how he should teach and conduct himself (6:2b-16)
10. Paul gives instructions for how people who are rich should live (6:17-19)
11. Paul commands Timothy to guard what has been entrusted to his care (6:20-21a)
12. Closing blessing to the whole church (6:21b)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Timothy?

A man named Paul wrote 1 Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul may have written other letters to Timothy, but this is the earliest one that we still have. That is why it is known as 1 Timothy or First Timothy. Timothy was Paul’s disciple and close friend. Paul probably wrote this letter near the end of his life.

### What is the Book of 1 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed included church worship, qualifications for church leaders, and warnings against false teachers. This letter shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches while Timothy himself trained other leaders.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its customary title, “1 Timothy” or “First Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is discipleship?

Discipleship is the process of making people to be disciples of Christ. The goal of discipleship is to encourage other Christians to be more like Christ. This letter gives many instructions about how a leader should train a less mature Christian. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 Timothy?

In [6:5](../06/05.md), the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TI 1 intro a4v2 0 # 1 Timothy 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Metaphor

In this chapter Paul speaks figuratively of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks figuratively of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.” +1TI 1 intro a4v2 0 # 1 Timothy 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Metaphor

In this chapter Paul speaks of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.” 1TI 1 1 i3zz Παῦλος 1 Paul In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Immediately after introducing the writer, you might also want to indicate to whom the letter was written. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am the one writing this letter to you, Timothy” 1TI 1 1 xl6d κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν Θεοῦ 1 by the command of God Alternate translation: “by the authority of God” 1TI 1 1 wb8j Θεοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν 1 God our Savior Alternate translation: “God, who saves us” -1TI 1 1 sw77 figs-metonymy Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῆς ἐλπίδος ἡμῶν 1 the Lord Jesus Christ our hope Here, **our hope** refers figuratively to the person in whom we have hope. Alternate translations: “Christ Jesus, the one in whom we have confidence” or “Christ Jesus, whom we trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TI 1 1 sw77 figs-metonymy Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τῆς ἐλπίδος ἡμῶν 1 the Lord Jesus Christ our hope Here, **our hope** refers to the person in whom we have hope. Alternate translations: “Christ Jesus, the one in whom we have confidence” or “Christ Jesus, whom we trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TI 1 2 pyi6 figs-metaphor γνησίῳ τέκνῳ 1 a true son Paul speaks of his close relationship to Timothy as though they were father and **son**. This shows Paul’s sincere love and approval of Timothy. It is also likely that Paul personally led Timothy to trust in Christ. That would be another reason why Paul considered him to be like his own child, since Timothy entered his new life as a follower of Jesus because of Paul. Alternate translation: “who is truly like a son to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 1 2 rd5v χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη 1 Grace, mercy, peace In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Alternate translation: “I hope you are experiencing God’s kindness, mercy, and peace” 1TI 1 2 p4lz guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 God the Father Here, **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God, who is our Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -25,13 +25,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 1 5 iwnk grammar-connect-logic-goal τὸ δὲ τέλος τῆς παραγγελίας ἐστὶν 1 Now the goal of this command is Here Paul is expressing to Timothy the **goal** or the outcome that he desires from the commands that Paul gave him. Alternate translation: “I am commanding these things in order to get this result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1TI 1 5 l7un τῆς παραγγελίας 1 command Here, **this command** refers to the instructions that Paul has given Timothy in [1:3](../01/03.md) and [1:4](../01/04.md). 1TI 1 5 i9rs figs-explicit ἐστὶν ἀγάπη 1 is love That God’s people would show **love** is the goal of the command. If it is necessary to include the object of “love,” you could state “each other” or “others.” This may also include love for God. Alternate translation: “is that God’s people would love others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TI 1 5 t123 figs-metaphor ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a pure heart Here the **heart** figuratively represents a person’s thoughts and inclinations. Alternate translation: “from a desire for only what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TI 1 5 mbe6 figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a pure heart Here, **pure** figuratively indicates that the person wants only good things and does not have mixed motives that also include some bad ones. Alternate translation: “from a desire for only what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TI 1 5 t123 figs-metaphor ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a pure heart Here the **heart** represents a person’s thoughts and inclinations. Alternate translation: “from a desire for only what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 1 5 mbe6 figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a pure heart Here, **pure** indicates that the person wants only good things and does not have mixed motives that also include some bad ones. Alternate translation: “from a desire for only what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TI 1 5 ar8t συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς 1 a good conscience Your translation should make it clear that love is the one goal of the command and is followed by three things that lead to this love. This is the second thing, after “a pure heart.” Alternate translation: “and from a conscience that leads a person to choose right instead of wrong” 1TI 1 5 m53g πίστεως ἀνυποκρίτου 1 a sincere faith Paul presents **a sincere faith** as the third thing that leads to love, which is the one goal of the command. It is not a third goal of the command. Alternate translations: “and from faith that is genuine” or “and from faith that is without hypocrisy” 1TI 1 5 zziu figs-abstractnouns πίστεως ἀνυποκρίτου 1 a sincere faith If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the phrase **a sincere faith**behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) trust in God. (2) belief in true teaching about God. Alternate translations: “firmly trusting in God” or “sincerely believing the true message about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TI 1 6 j4z3 figs-metaphor τινες ἀστοχήσαντες 1 some, having missed the mark Paul speaks figuratively of faith in Christ as if it were a target that people should aim at. Paul means that some people are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith, which is to love, as he has just explained. Alternate translation: “some people, who are not fulfilling the purpose of faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TI 1 6 se38 figs-metaphor ἐξετράπησαν εἰς 1 have turned away to Here, **turned away** figuratively means these people have stopped doing what God has commanded. Alternate translation: “are no longer doing what God commands. Instead of that, they just engage in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 1 6 j4z3 figs-metaphor τινες ἀστοχήσαντες 1 some, having missed the mark Paul speaks of faith in Christ as if it were a target that people should aim at. Paul means that some people are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith, which is to love, as he has just explained. Alternate translation: “some people, who are not fulfilling the purpose of faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 1 6 se38 figs-metaphor ἐξετράπησαν εἰς 1 have turned away to Here, **turned away** means these people have stopped doing what God has commanded. Alternate translation: “are no longer doing what God commands. Instead of that, they just engage in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 1 7 v28u figs-explicit νομοδιδάσκαλοι 1 teachers of the law Here, **law** refers specifically to the law of Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 1 7 kz8x grammar-connect-logic-contrast μὴ νοοῦντες 1 not understanding If the contrast is not clear in your language between what these people want to be (teachers of the law) and their ability to do it, you may want to mark the contrast. Alternate translations: “but not understanding” or “and yet they do not understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1TI 1 7 t131 figs-doublenegatives μὴ…μήτε…μήτε 1 not … either … or Paul uses a triple negative in Greek for emphasis here, “not … neither … nor.” None of these negatives cancel each other to create a positive meaning. Instead, the negative meaning is retained throughout. If your language uses double negatives for emphasis that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 1 9 t141 πατρολῴαις καὶ μητρολῴαις, ἀνδροφόνοις 1 father-killers and mother-killers, man-slayers In this list Paul uses several compound words to express his meaning concisely and vividly. In each case the first term in the compound, a noun, is the object of the second term in the compound, a verb. Three of these compound words are in this verse, and two more are in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these terms by translating them either with single terms or with phrases. Alternate translations: “patricides and matricides, murders” or “people who kill other people, even their own fathers and mothers” 1TI 1 9 t142 figs-gendernotations ἀνδροφόνοις 1 man-slayers Paul uses the term **man** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “murderers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1TI 1 10 y5dx figs-nominaladj πόρνοις 1 the immoral Paul is using the adjective **immoral** as a noun to refer to a class of people that it describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this term by translating it with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who have sexual relations outside of marriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1TI 1 10 v1gh figs-idiom ἀρσενοκοίταις 1 male-liers The term **male-liers** is the fourth compound word on the list. The term “lie” figuratively means to have sexual relations. Alternate translation: “men who have sexual relations with other males” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TI 1 10 v1gh figs-idiom ἀρσενοκοίταις 1 male-liers The term **male-liers** is the fourth compound word on the list. The term “lie” means to have sexual relations. Alternate translation: “men who have sexual relations with other males” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TI 1 10 bzw4 figs-gendernotations ἀνδραποδισταῖς 1 man-stealers The term **man-stealers** is the fifth and last compound word on the list. Paul uses the term **man** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people who kidnap other people to sell them as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1TI 1 10 gg42 καὶ εἴ τι ἕτερον τῇ ὑγιαινούσῃ διδασκαλίᾳ ἀντίκειται 1 and if anything else is contrary to healthy teaching Here Paul leaves out some of the words that, in many languages, a sentence would need to be complete. He means that if anything else is contrary to healthy teaching, then the law is made for people who do that, too. Alternate translation: “and for people who do anything else that is against wholesome teaching” 1TI 1 10 t147 figs-metonymy τῇ ὑγιαινούσῃ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 healthy teaching The phrase **healthy teaching** is a figurative way to say that the teaching is good and reliable in every way and has no defect or corruption. A person with a healthy mind would recognize this teaching as correct. Alternate translation: “correct teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 1 13 nv6k figs-activepassive ἠλεήθην 1 I was shown mercy If it would be helpful in your language, you could express who showed mercy to Paul with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “Jesus had mercy on me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 1 14 t158 δὲ 1 Indeed Paul here uses the word **indeed** to introduce an expanded description of the way Jesus treated him mercifully even though he persecuted the followers of Jesus. This description will help Timothy and the other believers in Ephesus to understand how great the mercy of Jesus is. Alternate translation: “in fact” 1TI 1 14 c1lg figs-metaphor ὑπερεπλεόνασεν…ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 the grace of our Lord overflowed Paul speaks of the **grace** of Jesus as if it were a liquid that fills a container until it flows over the top. Alternate translation: “Jesus showed me unlimited grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TI 1 14 z5lv figs-idiom μετὰ πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 with the faith and love that are in Christ Jesus This could refer to: (1) faith and love that he received from Jesus when he became **in** him, which would mean figuratively “in relationship with” him. Alternate translation: “and enabled me to trust him and love him” (2) the faith and love that Jesus himself possesses and could be saying that these were the basis of the mercy that Jesus showed him. Alternate translation: “because he believed in me and loved me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TI 1 14 z5lv figs-idiom μετὰ πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 with the faith and love that are in Christ Jesus This could refer to: (1) faith and love that he received from Jesus when he became **in** him, which would mean “in relationship with” him. Alternate translation: “and enabled me to trust him and love him” (2) the faith and love that Jesus himself possesses and could be saying that these were the basis of the mercy that Jesus showed him. Alternate translation: “because he believed in me and loved me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TI 1 15 z48s πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy In this context, the term **word** refers to an entire statement. Alternate translation: “this statement is dependable” 1TI 1 15 rh2r καὶ πάσης ἀποδοχῆς ἄξιος 1 and worthy of all acceptance If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly who does this action. Alternate translations: “and we should believe it without any doubt” or “and we should have full confidence in it” 1TI 1 15 t163 figs-quotemarks Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ἦλθεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἁμαρτωλοὺς σῶσαι 1 Christ Jesus came into the world to save sinners Paul uses this phrase as a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by setting off the words that follow, “Christ Jesus came into the world to save sinners,” with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language may use to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) @@ -74,17 +74,17 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 1 18 ijn8 figs-metaphor ταύτην τὴν παραγγελίαν παρατίθεμαί σοι 1 This command I am placing before you Paul speaks of his instructions as if he could physically put them in front of Timothy. Alternate translations: “I am entrusting you with this command” or “this is what I am commanding you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 1 18 b6uq figs-metaphor τέκνον 1 child Paul speaks of his close relationship to Timothy as though they were father and **child**. This shows Paul’s sincere love and approval of Timothy. It is also likely that Paul personally led Timothy to trust in Christ, and that would be another reason why Paul considered him to be like his own child. Alternate translation: “you who are like my very own child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 1 18 y6jg κατὰ τὰς προαγούσας ἐπὶ σὲ προφητείας 1 in accordance with the earlier prophecies about you If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly how these prophecies happened and who did this action. Alternate translation: “in agreement with what other believers prophesied about you” -1TI 1 18 w2ex figs-metaphor στρατεύῃ…τὴν καλὴν στρατείαν 1 fight the good fight Paul speaks figuratively about Timothy doing his best for the Lord as if he were a soldier fighting a battle. Alternate translation: “continue to do your best on behalf of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 1 18 w2ex figs-metaphor στρατεύῃ…τὴν καλὴν στρατείαν 1 fight the good fight Paul speaks about Timothy doing his best for the Lord as if he were a soldier fighting a battle. Alternate translation: “continue to do your best on behalf of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 1 19 jj6k figs-abstractnouns ἔχων πίστιν 1 holding faith If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a phrase that uses a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) a relationship with Jesus. Alternate translation: “continue trusting in Jesus” (2) a belief in the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “keep believing the true teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 1 19 ly6q figs-abstractnouns ἀγαθὴν συνείδησιν 1 a good conscience See how you translated this phrase in [1:5](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “continuing to choose to do what is right instead of what is wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TI 1 19 h2wk figs-metaphor τινες…περὶ τὴν πίστιν ἐναυάγησαν 1 have shipwrecked regarding the faith Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were a ship that had sunk. He means that these people no longer believe in Jesus and no longer live as his followers. You could use this same figure, or a similar one from your culture, if your readers would understand this meaning. Otherwise, you could state as an alternative translation, “no longer belong to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 1 19 h2wk figs-metaphor τινες…περὶ τὴν πίστιν ἐναυάγησαν 1 have shipwrecked regarding the faith Paul speaks of these people as if they were a ship that had sunk. He means that these people no longer believe in Jesus and no longer live as his followers. You could use this same figure, or a similar one from your culture, if your readers would understand this meaning. Otherwise, you could state as an alternative translation, “no longer belong to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 1 19 dyr6 figs-abstractnouns περὶ τὴν πίστιν 1 regarding the faith If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith**. Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) a relationship with Jesus (or God). Alternate translation: “their relationship with Jesus” (2) the teachings about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 1 20 pv7f translate-names Ὑμέναιος…Ἀλέξανδρος 1 Hymenaeus … Alexander **Hymenaeus** and **Alexander** are names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -1TI 1 20 ty7n figs-metaphor οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ 1 whom I have given over to Satan Paul speaks figuratively as if he physically took hold of these men and handed them **to Satan**. If this does not make sense in your language, you could state it plainly. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to command them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 1 20 ty7n figs-metaphor οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ 1 whom I have given over to Satan Paul speaks as if he physically took hold of these men and handed them **to Satan**. If this does not make sense in your language, you could state it plainly. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to command them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 1 20 az10 figs-explicit οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ 1 This probably means that Paul expelled them from the community of believers. Since they are no longer a part of the community, Satan has access to them and can harm them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you may want to include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to make them suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 1 20 s76c figs-activepassive ἵνα παιδευθῶσι 1 so that they may be taught If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God may teach them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 2 intro c6rf 0 # 1 Timothy 2 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Peace

Paul encourages Christians to pray for everyone. They should pray for rulers so that Christians can live peacefully, in a godly and dignified way.

### Women in the church

Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe that God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Other scholars believe that God wants women to use the gifts He gives them on an equal basis with men. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage. -1TI 2 1 yk2z figs-idiom πρῶτον πάντων 1 first of all As in [1:15](../01/15.md), the term **first** figuratively means the superlative example of a class. Alternate translation: “most importantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TI 2 1 yk2z figs-idiom πρῶτον πάντων 1 first of all As in [1:15](../01/15.md), the term **first** means the superlative example of a class. Alternate translation: “most importantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TI 2 1 iag7 παρακαλῶ 1 I urge Alternate translation: “I encourage” or “I exhort” 1TI 2 1 ql7a figs-activepassive ποιεῖσθαι δεήσεις, προσευχάς, ἐντεύξεις, εὐχαριστίας 1 for requests, prayers, intercessions, and thanksgivings to be made If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who would do the action and who would receive the action. Alternate translation: “I urge all believers to make requests, prayers, intercessions, and thanksgivings to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 2 1 t183 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 men Paul uses the term **men** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 2 15 krx4 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Use a natural way in your language to indicate that this sentence provides a contrast to the previous sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1TI 2 15 t222 σωθήσεται 1 she will be saved Here, **she** likely refers to Eve, mentioned in the preceding verse, and whom Paul describes as “the woman.” Later in the sentence, **they** refers to women in general. To show how Paul shifts the topic from Eve, a representative woman, to all women, the word **she** could be translated here as “women.” 1TI 2 15 u8iv σωθήσεται…διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας 1 she will be saved through childbearing This could mean: (1) people thought that women would be condemned because of Eve’s sin and punished even more than with the pain of childbearing (see Genesis 3:16), or they may have thought that a woman who believed in Jesus was no longer under the punishment that God gave in Genesis 3:16. Since the Greek word translated **through** can also mean “with” or “while,” Paul may be saying here that women continue to have the punishment of pain in childbirth but will be saved from additional punishment as long as they have faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “God will save women, although they do have to endure childbirth” (2) the women of the church in Ephesus were being led away from faith in Jesus by the false teachers (see 2 Timothy 3:6), so Paul is recommending that they focus on raising their families rather than listening to (or participating in) the “foolish talk” (1:6). Alternate translation: “God will save women as they attend to their families” (3) a reference to the birth of Jesus as a human child to be the Savior. Alternate translation: “God will save women through Jesus, who was born as a child” -1TI 2 15 i0ap figs-synecdoche διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας 1 If option number 2 from the previous note is correct, then Paul is figuratively referring to all of the aspects of motherhood by mentioning the beginning part of it: childbearing. Alternate translation: “as they attend to their families” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1TI 2 15 i0ap figs-synecdoche διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας 1 If option number 2 from the previous note is correct, then Paul is referring to all of the aspects of motherhood by mentioning the beginning part of it: childbearing. Alternate translation: “as they attend to their families” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1TI 2 15 n818 figs-activepassive σωθήσεται 1 she will be saved If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God will save women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 2 15 gh3c ἐὰν μείνωσιν 1 if they remain Here, **they** refers to women. Paul switches from the singular to the plural as he switches from talking about Eve as the representative of women to women in general. Alternate translation: “if women continue living” 1TI 2 15 sl57 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει, καὶ ἀγάπῃ, καὶ ἁγιασμῷ 1 in faith and love and holiness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **faith**, **love**, and **holiness** by stating the ideas behind them with verbs. Alternate translation: “trusting Jesus, loving others, and living in a holy way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -150,18 +150,18 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 3 5 c814 figs-metonymy ἐκκλησίας Θεοῦ 1 the church of God Here the term **church** refers to a local group of God’s people, not to a building. Alternate translations: “a group of God’s people” or “a local gathering of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TI 3 6 q7hu μὴ νεόφυτον 1 not a new convert Alternate translations: “he should not be still just learning the faith” or “he must be mature from a long, steady growth in the faith” 1TI 3 6 t240 figs-explicit τυφωθεὶς 1 puffed up Paul is warning that a new convert might become excessively proud if he were given an important leadership position right away. Alternate translation: “becoming proud of himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TI 3 6 t241 figs-metaphor τυφωθεὶς 1 puffed up Paul describes being proud figuratively as if it made a person swell in size. Alternate translation: “thinking that he is better than others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 3 6 t241 figs-metaphor τυφωθεὶς 1 puffed up Paul describes being proud as if it made a person swell in size. Alternate translation: “thinking that he is better than others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 3 6 v6f5 figs-metaphor ἵνα μὴ…εἰς κρίμα ἐμπέσῃ τοῦ διαβόλου 1 so that he may not fall … into the judgment of the devil Paul describes the experience of being condemned for having done wrong as like falling into a hole. Alternate translation: “and have God condemn him … as he condemned the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TI 3 7 si1d figs-metaphor τῶν ἔξωθεν 1 those outside Paul speaks of the church figuratively as though it were a place and unbelievers were physically outside of it. Alternate translation: “those who are not believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TI 3 7 qsa6 figs-metaphor μὴ εἰς ὀνειδισμὸν ἐμπέσῃ 1 so that he may not fall into disgrace Paul speaks of disgrace figuratively as if it were a hole that a person could fall into. Alternate translation: “so that he does not do anything that would make him ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 3 7 si1d figs-metaphor τῶν ἔξωθεν 1 those outside Paul speaks of the church as though it were a place and unbelievers were physically outside of it. Alternate translation: “those who are not believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 3 7 qsa6 figs-metaphor μὴ εἰς ὀνειδισμὸν ἐμπέσῃ 1 so that he may not fall into disgrace Paul speaks of disgrace as if it were a hole that a person could fall into. Alternate translation: “so that he does not do anything that would make him ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 3 7 t245 figs-metaphor παγίδα τοῦ διαβόλου 1 the trap of the devil Paul speaks of the devil tempting someone to sin as if it were a trap that could catch a person. Alternate translation: “so that the devil is not able to tempt him to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 3 8 nz2w διακόνους ὡσαύτως 1 Likewise deacons Alternate translation: “deacons, just like overseers” -1TI 3 8 sxq4 figs-metaphor μὴ διλόγους 1 not double-talkers Paul speaks figuratively about some people as if they could say two things at once. Alternate translation: “they should not say one thing but mean something else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 3 8 sxq4 figs-metaphor μὴ διλόγους 1 not double-talkers Paul speaks about some people as if they could say two things at once. Alternate translation: “they should not say one thing but mean something else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 3 8 g5qi figs-doublenegatives μὴ διλόγους 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **not double-talkers** positively. Alternate translation: “be honest in what they say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1TI 3 9 c44a figs-metaphor ἔχοντας 1 holding Paul speaks of true teaching about God as if it were an object that a person could hold. Alternate translation: “they must continue to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 3 9 jda1 figs-abstractnouns τὸ μυστήριον 1 the mystery Paul uses the abstract noun **mystery** to refer to a truth that had existed for some time but that God was revealing at that moment. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this term with a verb such as “reveal.” Alternate translation: “what God has now revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 3 9 rfv7 figs-abstractnouns τὸ μυστήριον τῆς πίστεως 1 the mystery of the faith Here, **faith** refers to the content of the **mystery**, that is, the specific things that God has revealed and that followers of Jesus must believe. Alternate translation: “the teachings that God has revealed to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TI 3 9 y91f figs-metaphor ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει 1 with a clean conscience Paul speaks figuratively of a person’s sense of right and wrong being **clean**, which means that it assures that person that he has done nothing wrong. Alternate translation: “knowing that they are not doing anything wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 3 9 y91f figs-metaphor ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει 1 with a clean conscience Paul speaks of a person’s sense of right and wrong being **clean**, which means that it assures that person that he has done nothing wrong. Alternate translation: “knowing that they are not doing anything wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 3 10 hl1p figs-activepassive καὶ οὗτοι…δοκιμαζέσθωσαν πρῶτον 1 let them also be tested first If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who would the action. Alternate translations: “the leaders should observe and approve of them first” or “they should first prove themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 3 11 xyc9 γυναῖκας 1 the women This could mean: (1) deacons’ wives. (2) female deacons. 1TI 3 11 q5qx σεμνάς 1 dignified Alternate translations: “people who act properly” or “people who are worthy of respect” @@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 3 16 t271 figs-explicit μέγα ἐστὶν τὸ τῆς εὐσεβείας μυστήριον 1 great is the mystery of godliness Since Paul follows this statement by quoting a hymn or poem about the life of Jesus, the implication is that he sees Jesus as having made it possible for people to worship God in the most genuine way. Alternate translation: “the truth that God has revealed about why we worship Jesus is great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 3 16 y8sp writing-poetry ὃς ἐφανερώθη ἐν σαρκί, ἐδικαιώθη ἐν Πνεύματι, ὤφθη ἀγγέλοις, ἐκηρύχθη ἐν ἔθνεσιν, ἐπιστεύθη ἐν κόσμῳ, ἀνελήμφθη ἐν δόξῃ 1 Who was revealed in flesh, was justified in the Spirit, was seen by angels, was proclaimed among the nations, was believed in the world, was taken up in glory. This is most likely a song or poem that Paul is quoting. If your language has a way of indicating that this is poetry, such as through line-by-line formatting, you could use that here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]]) 1TI 3 16 m4xi figs-activepassive ὃς ἐφανερώθη ἐν σαρκί 1 Who was revealed in flesh If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form. (Be sure not to suggest in your translation that Jesus only seemed or appeared to be human.) Alternate translations: “he revealed himself as a human being” or “he came to earth as a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1TI 3 16 rqp6 figs-metonymy ἐν σαρκί 1 in flesh Paul uses the term **flesh** figuratively here to mean “in a human body.” He is describing the human body by reference to something associated with it, the flesh that envelops it. Alternate translation: “as a true human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TI 3 16 rqp6 figs-metonymy ἐν σαρκί 1 in flesh Paul uses the term **flesh** here to mean “in a human body.” He is describing the human body by reference to something associated with it, the flesh that envelops it. Alternate translation: “as a true human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TI 3 16 gm36 figs-activepassive ἐδικαιώθη ἐν Πνεύματι 1 was justified in the Spirit If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit confirmed that he was who he said he was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 3 16 fn1k figs-activepassive ὤφθη ἀγγέλοις 1 was seen by angels If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form. Alternate translation: “the angels saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 3 16 c3wx figs-activepassive ἐκηρύχθη ἐν ἔθνεσιν 1 was proclaimed among the nations If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “people in many nations told others about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 4 1 q13m προσέχοντες 1 attending to Alternate translations: “and turn their attention to” or “because they are paying attention to” 1TI 4 1 ae5w figs-doublet πνεύμασι πλάνοις καὶ διδασκαλίαις δαιμονίων 1 deceiving spirits and teachings of demons These two phrases mean similar things. Paul may be using them together for emphasis. If you think having both phrases in your translation might be confusing for your readers, you could combine them into a single expression. Alternate translation: “the things that evil spirits say to trick people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TI 4 2 pw29 ἐν ὑποκρίσει ψευδολόγων 1 in false-speaking hypocrisy If it would be helpful in your language, you could start a separate sentence here. Alternate translation: “The people who teach these things are hypocrites, and they tell lies” -1TI 4 2 u2f4 figs-metaphor κεκαυστηριασμένων τὴν ἰδίαν συνείδησιν 1 their own consciences having been seared Paul is speaking figuratively of these people as if their sense of right and wrong had been ruined like skin that someone had burned with a hot iron. Alternate translation: “they will not have any sense of right and wrong any more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 4 2 u2f4 figs-metaphor κεκαυστηριασμένων τὴν ἰδίαν συνείδησιν 1 their own consciences having been seared Paul is speaking of these people as if their sense of right and wrong had been ruined like skin that someone had burned with a hot iron. Alternate translation: “they will not have any sense of right and wrong any more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 4 2 t288 figs-activepassive κεκαυστηριασμένων τὴν ἰδίαν συνείδησιν 1 their own consciences having been seared If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form. Alternate translation: “they will be people who have destroyed their sense of right and wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 4 3 t289 κωλυόντων γαμεῖν 1 forbidding to marry If it would be helpful to your readers, you could begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “these people teach that it is wrong to marry” 1TI 4 3 wd2l figs-explicit κωλυόντων γαμεῖν 1 forbidding to marry The implication of this phrase is that these false teachers will forbid believers to **marry**. Alternate translation: “these people will forbid believers to marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -218,13 +218,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 4 6 ks5x figs-metaphor ταῦτα ὑποτιθέμενος τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Placing these things before the brothers Paul speaks of his instructions as if they were objects that could be physically placed in front of the other believers. Alternate translation: “if you help the believers remember these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 4 6 hfx3 ταῦτα 1 these things This refers to the teaching that began in [3:16](../03/16.md). 1TI 4 6 h6qr figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 before the brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** in a generic sense that includes men and women. Alternate translation: “the brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1TI 4 6 uyeb figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 the brothers The term **the brothers** figuratively means fellow believers in Jesus. Alternative translation: “your fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 4 6 uyeb figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 the brothers The term **the brothers** means fellow believers in Jesus. Alternative translation: “your fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 4 6 t304 figs-activepassive ἐντρεφόμενος τοῖς λόγοις τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τῆς καλῆς διδασκαλίας ᾗ παρηκολούθηκας 1 being nourished by the words of the faith and of the good teaching that you have followed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state what is doing the action. Alternate translation: “the statements of what we believe, expessed in proper teaching, are causing you to trust more strongly in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 4 6 f8vs figs-metaphor ἐντρεφόμενος τοῖς λόγοις τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τῆς καλῆς διδασκαλίας ᾗ παρηκολούθηκας 1 being nourished by the words of the faith and of the good teaching that you have followed Paul speaks of these statements and teachings as if they could physically feed Timothy and make him strong. Alternate translation: “the statements of what we believe, expressed in proper teaching, are causing you to trust more strongly in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TI 4 6 ny78 figs-metonymy τοῖς λόγοις τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τῆς καλῆς διδασκαλίας 1 by the words of the faith and of the good teaching Paul uses the term **words** figuratively to describe the statements of belief and the teachings that explain them, both expressed in words. Alternate translation: “the statements of what we believe, expressed in proper teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TI 4 6 ny78 figs-metonymy τοῖς λόγοις τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τῆς καλῆς διδασκαλίας 1 by the words of the faith and of the good teaching Paul uses the term **words** to describe the statements of belief and the teachings that explain them, both expressed in words. Alternate translation: “the statements of what we believe, expressed in proper teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TI 4 7 th4i τοὺς…βεβήλους καὶ γραώδεις μύθους 1 the profane and old-womanish myths See how you translated **myths** in [1:4](../01/04.md) and **profane** in [1:9](../01/09.md). Alternate translation: “foolish, made-up stories in which nothing is sacred” 1TI 4 7 elk7 figs-idiom γραώδεις μύθους 1 old-womanish myths The term **old-womanish** is an idiom that means “silly” or “foolish.” Paul tells Timothy in [5:2](../05/02.md) that he should respect older women as mothers, so Paul’s expression here should be recognized as idiomatic rather than disrespectful. Your language may have a similar expression. Alternate translation: “old wives’ tales” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TI 4 7 sea5 figs-metaphor γύμναζε…σεαυτὸν πρὸς εὐσέβειαν 1 train yourself for godliness Paul tells Timothy figuratively to work to develop godly character as if he were an athlete improving his physical conditioning. Alternate translation: “diligently practice acting in ways that please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 4 7 sea5 figs-metaphor γύμναζε…σεαυτὸν πρὸς εὐσέβειαν 1 train yourself for godliness Paul tells Timothy to work to develop godly character as if he were an athlete improving his physical conditioning. Alternate translation: “diligently practice acting in ways that please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 4 8 t311 figs-quotemarks γὰρ 1 for What follows after the word **for** is a direct quotation of a saying that Paul uses for teaching. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by setting off the words that follow in the rest of the verse with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language may use to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1TI 4 8 i6rh σωματικὴ γυμνασία 1 bodily training Alternate translation: “physical exercise” 1TI 4 8 t313 πρὸς ὀλίγον ἐστὶν ὠφέλιμος 1 is valuable for a little This could mean: (1) it has some small value. (2) it has value for a little while. (3) it does not have very much value. @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 4 14 xp1k figs-activepassive ὃ ἐδόθη σοι διὰ προφητείας 1 which was given to you through prophecy If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “which you received when leaders of the church prophesied about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 4 14 rr8f translate-symaction ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν τοῦ πρεσβυτερίου 1 with the imposition of the hands of the elders Paul is speaking of a ceremony during which the church leaders put their **hands** on Timothy and prayed that God would enable him to do the work he had commanded him to do. Alternate translation: “when the elders all laid their hands on you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) 1TI 4 15 sbcg figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 these things If it is helpful in your language, you may want to make explicit what **these things** are. Alternate translation: “these things that I am telling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TI 4 15 m65m figs-metaphor ἐν τούτοις ἴσθι 1 Study these things, be in them Paul is speaking figuratively as if Timothy could physically be inside the instructions he has just given him. Alternate translation: “and follow them consistently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 4 15 m65m figs-metaphor ἐν τούτοις ἴσθι 1 Study these things, be in them Paul is speaking as if Timothy could physically be inside the instructions he has just given him. Alternate translation: “and follow them consistently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 4 15 merc figs-explicit σου ἡ προκοπὴ 1 your progress If it is helpful in your language, you may want to make explicit in what way Timothy is to make **progress**. Alternate translation: “your increasing ability to live the way that Jesus wants you to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 4 16 uq6c ἔπεχε σεαυτῷ καὶ τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 Pay attention to yourself and to the teaching Alternate translation: “Pay attention to how you live and to what you teach” 1TI 4 16 zxe7 ἐπίμενε αὐτοῖς 1 Continue in these things Alternate translation: “continue to do these things” @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 5 4 w38h πρῶτον 1 first This could mean one of two things, or possibly both: (1) of all of their religious duties, taking care of their family is the most important one and the one that they should learn to do before anything else. Alternate translation: “as the most basic part of belonging to God’s people” (2) these children and grandchildren should be the first ones to take care of their family members, before the rest of the congregation. Alternate translation: “before the church offers any support” 1TI 5 4 fnab μανθανέτωσαν…εὐσεβεῖν 1 let them learn to honor Here, **learn** means to practice, that is, to learn by doing. Alternate translation: “let them become proficient in honoring” 1TI 5 4 t344 figs-parallelism μανθανέτωσαν…τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον εὐσεβεῖν, καὶ ἀμοιβὰς ἀποδιδόναι τοῖς προγόνοις 1 let them learn to honor their own household and to make repayment to their forebears These two phrases may: (1) mean similar things and you could combine them if that would be helpful to your readers. If **honor** is an idiom for “provide” here, as in the previous verse, then Paul may be using repetition for emphasis. Alternate translation: “let them provide the support that their widowed mother or grandmother needs and deserves” (2) have a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. Paul may actually be giving two reasons why people should support their widowed mothers or grandmothers. Alternate translation: “this is a respectful thing to do for widowed family members, and it will repay them for supporting their children and grandchildren as they were growing up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TI 5 4 g5mu figs-metonymy τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον 1 their own household Paul uses this phrase figuratively to refer to family members, by association to the way they live in the same house. Alternate translations: “their own family members” or “those living in their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TI 5 4 g5mu figs-metonymy τὸν ἴδιον οἶκον 1 their own household Paul uses this phrase to refer to family members, by association to the way they live in the same house. Alternate translations: “their own family members” or “those living in their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TI 5 4 q5c8 ἀμοιβὰς ἀποδιδόναι τοῖς προγόνοις 1 make repayment to their forebears Alternate translation: “let them do good to their mother or grandmother in return for the good things their parents and grandparents gave them” 1TI 5 4 t347 grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 for Paul uses the term **for** to introduce an additional reason why family members should support their widowed mothers or grandmothers. Alternate translation: “also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TI 5 4 t348 figs-metaphor τοῦτο…ἐστιν ἀπόδεκτον ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 this is pleasing before God Paul uses the expression **before God**, which means “in front of God,” to mean “where God can see.” Alternate translations: “this is pleasing in God’s view” or “this pleases God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 5 5 u1lj figs-ellipsis προσμένει ταῖς δεήσεσιν καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς 1 continues in requests and prayers Paul leaves a verb unexpressed here that your language might need to express. Alternate translations: “continues in making requests and prayers” or “continues to make requests and to offer prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1TI 5 5 rwp4 figs-hendiadys ταῖς δεήσεσιν καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς 1 in requests and prayers The phrase **requests and prayers** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **requests** tells what kind of **prayers** Paul is talking about here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase by stating the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translations: “making requests to God in prayer” or “praying to God for what she needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]). 1TI 5 5 rb9f figs-merism νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας 1 night and day The words **night** and **day** are used together to mean that she prays to God often, no matter what time it is. It does not mean that she prays all night and all day without ever stopping. Alternate translation: “at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -1TI 5 6 qy5h figs-metaphor ζῶσα τέθνηκεν 1 living, has died Paul speaks figuratively about people who do not seek to please God as if they were dead. Alternate translation: “has died in her spirit, even though she is still alive physically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 5 6 qy5h figs-metaphor ζῶσα τέθνηκεν 1 living, has died Paul speaks about people who do not seek to please God as if they were dead. Alternate translation: “has died in her spirit, even though she is still alive physically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 5 7 qw6m καὶ ταῦτα παράγγελλε, ἵνα ἀνεπίλημπτοι ὦσιν 1 Also command these things, so that they may be irreproachable This statement seems to refer back to [4:11](../04/11.md), “Command and teach these things,” which Paul tells Timothy after telling him in [4:6](../04/06.md) to “place these things before the brothers.” So **they** seems to refer to all the believers in this situation, including the widows, their families, and the local church that is supposed to organize the list of widows and make sure that the widows are cared for well. Alternate translation: “also give these instructions to the believers, so that no one will be able to accuse them of doing anything wrong” 1TI 5 8 p7h2 figs-idiom τις τῶν ἰδίων καὶ μάλιστα οἰκείων οὐ προνοεῖ 1 someone does not provide for his own, and especially for household members Here, **his own** is an idiom that means “his own relatives.” Alternate translation: “a person does not help with his relatives’ needs, and especially those of the family members living in his home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TI 5 8 y645 figs-abstractnouns τὴν πίστιν ἤρνηται 1 he has denied the faith Here, **the faith** refers to believing in Jesus and obeying him. Paul explains that this action would be equivalent to denying all of this. Alternate translations: “by doing that, he denies that he belongs to Jesus” or “he has shown that he does not follow the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 5 10 l8nm figs-activepassive ἐν ἔργοις καλοῖς μαρτυρουμένη 1 attested in good works If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “people must be able to attest to her good deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 5 10 mik7 ἐξενοδόχησεν 1 has received strangers Alternate translations: “has welcomed strangers into her home” or “practiced hospitality” 1TI 5 10 ygl3 translate-symaction ἁγίων πόδας ἔνιψεν 1 has washed the feet of the saints In this culture, people walked barefoot or in sandals on roads that were dusty or muddy, so washing their feet once they entered a home was a way of helping them be comfortable and clean. If the people of your culture would not be familiar with this practice, you could use a general expression instead. Alternate translation: “has cared for believers who visited her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -1TI 5 10 t366 figs-synecdoche ἁγίων πόδας ἔνιψεν 1 has washed the feet of the saints Paul may be using one type of humble service figuratively to represent humble service in general. Alternate translation: “has done humble things to help other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1TI 5 10 t366 figs-synecdoche ἁγίων πόδας ἔνιψεν 1 has washed the feet of the saints Paul may be using one type of humble service to represent humble service in general. Alternate translation: “has done humble things to help other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1TI 5 10 bw4h figs-idiom ἁγίων 1 the saints The term **saints** refers to believers in Jesus as people who are “holy” or “set apart” for God. Alternate translations: “the believers” or “God’s holy people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TI 5 10 ey6i figs-nominaladj θλιβομένοις ἐπήρκεσεν 1 she has relieved the afflicted Paul is using the adjective **afflicted** as a noun to refer to a class of people that it describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this term by translating it with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “has helped people who were suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1TI 5 10 h96j figs-hyperbole παντὶ ἔργῳ ἀγαθῷ ἐπηκολούθησεν 1 she has pursued every good work Paul uses the word **every** here as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “she has done many good deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -301,16 +301,16 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 5 14 u94k τῷ ἀντικειμένῳ 1 the one opposing This expression could refer by implication to: (1) This could refer to: (1) Satan. This is the reading of UST. Alternate translation: “the devil” (2) unbelievers who are opposing the followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “unbelievers who are opposing you” 1TI 5 15 fy54 figs-metaphor ἐξετράπησαν ὀπίσω τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 having … turned aside after Satan Paul speaks of living in faithfulness to Christ as if it were a path that one can either follow or turn aside from. He means that some younger widows have stopped obeying Jesus and have started to do what Satan would want them to do instead. Alternate translation: “have stopped living in obedience to Jesus and have decided to obey Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 5 16 mf4s figs-explicit ἔχει χήρας 1 has widows The implication is that she **has widows** within her extended family. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “has relatives who are widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TI 5 16 y6hf figs-metaphor καὶ μὴ βαρείσθω ἡ ἐκκλησία 1 let the church not be weighed down Paul speaks figuratively of the community having to help more people than it is able to help as if it were carrying too much weight on its back. Alternate translations: “so that the church will not have more work than it can do” or “so that the Christian community will not have to support widows whose families could provide for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 5 16 y6hf figs-metaphor καὶ μὴ βαρείσθω ἡ ἐκκλησία 1 let the church not be weighed down Paul speaks of the community having to help more people than it is able to help as if it were carrying too much weight on its back. Alternate translations: “so that the church will not have more work than it can do” or “so that the Christian community will not have to support widows whose families could provide for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 5 16 t384 figs-activepassive καὶ μὴ βαρείσθω ἡ ἐκκλησία 1 let the church not be weighed down If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form. Alternate translations: “so that the church will not have more work than it can do” or “so that the Christian community will not have to support widows whose families could provide for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 5 16 d35m ὄντως χήραις 1 genuine widows Alternate translation: “widows who have no one else to provide for them” 1TI 5 17 u93q figs-activepassive οἱ καλῶς προεστῶτες πρεσβύτεροι…ἀξιούσθωσαν 1 The elders having ruled well, let them be considered worthy If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “All believers should consider elders who are good leaders to be deserving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 5 17 wp9d figs-abstractnouns διπλῆς τιμῆς 1 of double honor Here, **double honor** could mean: (1) the congregation should honor the elders in two ways. Alternate translation: “of both respect and payment for their work” (2) they should honor them twice as much as others. Since Paul quotes two Scriptures in the next verse that support the idea of church leaders being paid for their work, the first possibility is more likely. Alternate translation: “of more respect than others receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 5 17 t389 figs-hendiadys ἐν λόγῳ καὶ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 in the word and in teaching This phrase may be expressing a single idea by using two phrases (which are actually just two words in Greek) connected with **and**. The phrase **in the word** would be identifying the content of the **teaching**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by stating the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “at teaching from the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -1TI 5 17 t390 figs-metonymy λόγῳ 1 the word Paul may be using the term **word** here figuratively to describe the Scriptures, which God inspired people to put into words. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1TI 5 18 kh55 figs-personification λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφή 1 For the Scripture says Paul figuratively describes Scripture as if it could speak for itself. Alternate translations: “for it is written in the Scriptures” or “for we read in the Scriptures that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1TI 5 17 t390 figs-metonymy λόγῳ 1 the word Paul may be using the term **word** here to describe the Scriptures, which God inspired people to put into words. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TI 5 18 kh55 figs-personification λέγει γὰρ ἡ Γραφή 1 For the Scripture says Paul describes Scripture as if it could speak for itself. Alternate translations: “for it is written in the Scriptures” or “for we read in the Scriptures that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1TI 5 18 t392 figs-declarative βοῦν ἀλοῶντα οὐ φιμώσεις 1 You will not muzzle a threshing ox Here the Scriptures use a statement in order to give a command. Alternate translation: “you must not muzzle an ox while it is treading on grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) -1TI 5 18 vw3a figs-metaphor βοῦν ἀλοῶντα οὐ φιμώσεις 1 You will not muzzle a threshing ox Paul is quoting this passage figuratively. He is using it to indicate that, just as God wanted oxen to be able to eat some of the grain that they were working to separate from its husks, so church leaders deserve to receive payment from the Christian community that they are serving. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 5 18 vw3a figs-metaphor βοῦν ἀλοῶντα οὐ φιμώσεις 1 You will not muzzle a threshing ox Paul is quoting this passage. He is using it to indicate that, just as God wanted oxen to be able to eat some of the grain that they were working to separate from its husks, so church leaders deserve to receive payment from the Christian community that they are serving. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 5 18 g985 translate-unknown οὐ φιμώσεις 1 you will not muzzle A **muzzle** is a sleeve that goes over an animal’s snout to prevent it from opening its jaws and eating while it is doing work. If your readers would not be familiar with this object, you could use a more general expression instead. Alternate translations: “Do not keep an ox’s mouth shut” or “You must not prevent an ox from eating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1TI 5 18 t6kp translate-unknown βοῦν ἀλοῶντα 1 a threshing ox An **ox** in this culture would “thresh” grain by walking on it or pulling a heavy object over it to separate the grain from the husks. Alternate translation: “an ox that is separating grain from husks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1TI 5 18 kys1 ἄξιος ὁ ἐργάτης τοῦ μισθοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 The worthy is worthy of his wages Alternate translations: “a worker has a right to be paid” or “a worker should receive his wages” @@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 5 20 ql4m figs-explicit ἵνα καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ φόβον ἔχωσιν 1 so that the rest also may have fear If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state what, by implication, people will be afraid of doing. Alternate translation: “so that other people will be afraid to sin themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 5 20 t404 figs-idiom φόβον ἔχωσιν 1 may have fear This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “will be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TI 5 21 x0zp διαμαρτύρομαι ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ, καὶ τῶν ἐκλεκτῶν ἀγγέλων 1 I adjure you, before God and Christ Jesus and the chosen angels By calling on **God and Christ Jesus and the chosen angels** as witnesses to what Paul is saying, Paul is making Timothy responsible to God to do what he says. If this is not clear, then put this into the form that your language uses for an oath. Alternate translation: “as God and Christ Jesus and the chosen angels are my witnesses, I put you under oath” -1TI 5 21 t405 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 before God and Christ Jesus Paul uses the expression **before**, meaning “in front of,” to indicate “where they can see.” Seeing, in turn, figuratively means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “as God and Christ Jesus and the chosen angels are watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 5 21 t405 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 before God and Christ Jesus Paul uses the expression **before**, meaning “in front of,” to indicate “where they can see.” Seeing, in turn, means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “as God and Christ Jesus and the chosen angels are watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 5 21 t7jq figs-idiom τῶν ἐκλεκτῶν ἀγγέλων 1 the chosen angels This phrase refers to the **angels** whom God has **chosen** to serve him in a special way. Alternate translation: “the angels who are God’s special servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TI 5 21 dph6 ταῦτα φυλάξῃς 1 keep these things Alternate translation: “you follow these instructions” 1TI 5 21 t409 ταῦτα 1 these things Grammatically, this could refer either to the instructions Paul has just given Timothy about elders or to the instructions he is about to give Timothy regarding his own personal conduct. But since Paul tells Timothy to follow these instructions without favoring one person over another, it is most likely that this refers to the instructions about elders. Alternate translation: “these things that I have just told you” @@ -345,12 +345,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 6 1 e3ce ἵνα μὴ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ διδασκαλία βλασφημῆται 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this negative phrase in a positive way. Alternate translation: “so that unbelievers will always speak respectfully about God’s character and about the things that we teach” 1TI 6 1 xb92 figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the name of God Here, **name** is a figurative way of referring to the fame or reputation of a person. Alternate translations: “God’s character” or “God’s reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TI 6 1 f5pc figs-explicit ἡ διδασκαλία 1 the teaching Implicitly Paul means **the teaching** about Jesus and about how his followers should live. Alternate translation: “our teaching about how believers should live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TI 6 2 fvv7 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί εἰσιν 1 they are brothers Here, **brothers** figuratively means fellow believers in Jesus, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “they are fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1TI 6 2 fvv7 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί εἰσιν 1 they are brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow believers in Jesus, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “they are fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1TI 6 2 nmh9 καὶ ἀγαπητοὶ 1 beloved This could have either, or both, meanings: (1) God loves these people. Alternate translation: “whom God loves” (2) other believers love these people. Alternate translation: “and so their believing slaves should love them” 1TI 6 3 t430 figs-metonymy ὑγιαίνουσι λόγοις 1 to the healthy words See how you translated the term **healthy** in [1:10](../01/10.md). Here, as well, it is a figurative way to say that the teaching is good and reliable in every way and has no defect or corruption. A person with a healthy mind would recognize this teaching as correct. Alternate translations: “to the correct words” or “to the true expression of our faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1TI 6 3 t431 figs-metonymy ὑγιαίνουσι λόγοις 1 to the healthy words Paul uses the term **words** figuratively to describe the verbal expression of what followers of Jesus genuinely believe. Alternate translation: “the true expression of our faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TI 6 3 t431 figs-metonymy ὑγιαίνουσι λόγοις 1 to the healthy words Paul uses the term **words** to describe the verbal expression of what followers of Jesus genuinely believe. Alternate translation: “the true expression of our faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TI 6 3 sshf τοῖς τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could refer to: (1) the message about the Lord Jesus. (2) words spoken by the Lord Jesus. -1TI 6 4 pn8n figs-metaphor τετύφωται 1 he is puffed up Paul speaks figuratively of a person who is excessively proud as if they were inflated with air. See how you translated this phrase in [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “that person is excessively proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 6 4 pn8n figs-metaphor τετύφωται 1 he is puffed up Paul speaks of a person who is excessively proud as if they were inflated with air. See how you translated this phrase in [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “that person is excessively proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 4 t433 figs-activepassive τετύφωται 1 he is puffed up If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the phrase **puffed up** with an active form. Alternate translation: “that person is excessively proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 6 4 t434 figs-gendernotations τετύφωται 1 he is puffed up Here, **he** refers to anyone in general who teaches what is not correct. Alternate translation: “that person is excessively proud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1TI 6 4 z2rb figs-hyperbole μηδὲν ἐπιστάμενος 1 understanding nothing Paul uses the term **nothing** here as a generalization for emphasis. It is specifically God’s true message that the person does not understand. Alternate translation: “he understands nothing about God’s truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -373,25 +373,25 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 6 8 lbk5 figs-declarative ἀρκεσθησόμεθα 1 we will be satisfied Here Paul uses a statement in order to express a moral imperative. Alternate translation: “that should be enough for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) 1TI 6 8 t451 figs-activepassive ἀρκεσθησόμεθα 1 we will be satisfied If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form. Alternate translation: “that should be enough for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 6 9 ij4j grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Now Paul uses the word **Now** to indicate that he is returning to the topic of those who think being godly will make them wealthy. You can translate the term with the word or phrase in your language that is most similar in meaning and significance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1TI 6 9 pl5d figs-metaphor ἐμπίπτουσιν εἰς πειρασμὸν, καὶ παγίδα 1 fall into temptation and a trap Paul speaks figuratively about those who let the **temptation** of money cause them to sin as if they were animals that **fall into** a hole that a hunter is using as **a trap**. Alternate translation: “will encounter more temptation than they can resist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 6 9 pl5d figs-metaphor ἐμπίπτουσιν εἰς πειρασμὸν, καὶ παγίδα 1 fall into temptation and a trap Paul speaks about those who let the **temptation** of money cause them to sin as if they were animals that **fall into** a hole that a hunter is using as **a trap**. Alternate translation: “will encounter more temptation than they can resist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 9 gfy7 figs-metaphor καὶ ἐπιθυμίας πολλὰς ἀνοήτους καὶ βλαβεράς 1 and many foolish and harmful desires This phrase continues the figure of speech from the previous phrase. Paul speaks about these desires if they too were a hole that a hunter was using as a trap. Alternate translation: “and will experience destructive impulses than they cannot overcome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 9 t456 figs-hendiadys ἐπιθυμίας…ἀνοήτους καὶ βλαβεράς 1 foolish and harmful desires Here Paul expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **foolish** tells why these desires are **harmful**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by stating the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “destructive impulses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -1TI 6 9 nc3i figs-metaphor αἵτινες βυθίζουσι τοὺς ἀνθρώπους εἰς ὄλεθρον καὶ ἀπώλειαν 1 whatever plunges men into ruin and destruction This phrase summarizes the character of the temptations and impulses that Paul has just described. He speaks of them figuratively as if they could make people drown in deep water. Alternate translation: “people cannot escape from such things and they destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 6 9 nc3i figs-metaphor αἵτινες βυθίζουσι τοὺς ἀνθρώπους εἰς ὄλεθρον καὶ ἀπώλειαν 1 whatever plunges men into ruin and destruction This phrase summarizes the character of the temptations and impulses that Paul has just described. He speaks of them as if they could make people drown in deep water. Alternate translation: “people cannot escape from such things and they destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 9 t458 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπους 1 men Paul uses the term **men** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1TI 6 9 t459 figs-doublet ὄλεθρον καὶ ἀπώλειαν 1 ruin and destruction These two words **ruin** and **destruction** mean very similar things. Paul uses them both to emphasize that this is very bad. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use one term with a word that adds emphasis. Alternate translations: “complete destruction” or “total ruin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TI 6 10 t460 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Paul uses the word **For** to introduce the reasons for what the previous sentence stated. Alternate translation: “this is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TI 6 10 xs9d figs-metaphor ῥίζα…πάντων τῶν κακῶν ἐστιν ἡ φιλαργυρία 1 a root of all evils is the love of money Paul speaks figuratively of evil as if it were a plant, and of **the love of money** as if it were the **root** from which that plant grew. Alternate translation: “loving money leads a person to do all kinds of wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 6 10 xs9d figs-metaphor ῥίζα…πάντων τῶν κακῶν ἐστιν ἡ φιλαργυρία 1 a root of all evils is the love of money Paul speaks of evil as if it were a plant, and of **the love of money** as if it were the **root** from which that plant grew. Alternate translation: “loving money leads a person to do all kinds of wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 10 t462 figs-hyperbole πάντων τῶν κακῶν 1 of all evils Paul uses the term **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “of many kinds of wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1TI 6 10 j5z9 ἧς τινες ὀρεγόμενοι 1 which, some desiring The reference here is to people **desiring** money, not evil. You could start a new sentence here if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “people who want to become rich” -1TI 6 10 b83v figs-metaphor ἀπεπλανήθησαν ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως 1 have been led away from the faith Paul speaks figuratively of the desire for money as if it were an evil guide that intentionally leads people down the wrong path. Alternate translation: “have stopped believing in Jesus because of their desire for money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 6 10 b83v figs-metaphor ἀπεπλανήθησαν ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως 1 have been led away from the faith Paul speaks of the desire for money as if it were an evil guide that intentionally leads people down the wrong path. Alternate translation: “have stopped believing in Jesus because of their desire for money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 10 t465 figs-activepassive ἧς τινες ὀρεγόμενοι, ἀπεπλανήθησαν ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως 1 have been led away from the faith If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form. Alternate translations: “which has led some people away from believing in Jesus” or “this love for money has led some people to stop following Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 6 10 a1fx figs-metaphor ἑαυτοὺς περιέπειραν ὀδύναις πολλαῖς 1 have pierced themselves with many sorrows Paul speaks about grief as if it were a sword that people use to stab themselves. Alternate translation: “have experienced great sorrows in their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 11 tp97 ὦ ἄνθρωπε Θεοῦ 1 O man of God Alternate translations: “you servant of God” or “you person who belongs to God” 1TI 6 11 h9c6 figs-metaphor ταῦτα φεῦγε 1 flee these things Paul speaks of these temptations and sins as if they were things a person could physically run away from. Alternate translation: “make sure that you do not do these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 11 a88g ταῦτα 1 these things This phrase could refer to: (1) everything Paul has been talking about in this section of the letter (false teachings, pride, arguments, and the love of money). (2) what Paul has been talking about most recently (the love of money). If possible, it is best to leave it as a general reference. 1TI 6 11 zjl3 figs-metaphor δίωκε 1 pursue Paul speaks of righteousness and other good qualities as if they were things that a person could run after and catch. This metaphor is the opposite of “flee from.” It means to try your best to obtain something. Alternate translation: “seek to acquire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TI 6 12 w21p figs-metaphor ἀγωνίζου τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα τῆς πίστεως 1 Fight the good fight of the faith Here, Paul speaks figuratively about a person persevering in following Jesus as if he were a warrior fighting at his best, or an athlete doing his best to win an event. Alternate translation: “do your best to obey Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TI 6 12 y6m8 figs-metaphor ἐπιλαβοῦ τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς 1 grasp eternal life Paul speaks figuratively about people wanting **eternal life** so much that they hold onto it firmly in their hands. He may be continuing the metaphor of an athlete who worked hard to win an event and now holds the trophy in his hands. Alternate translations: “eagerly desire to live with God forever” or “do whatever is necessary to pursue life with God forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 6 12 w21p figs-metaphor ἀγωνίζου τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα τῆς πίστεως 1 Fight the good fight of the faith Here, Paul speaks about a person persevering in following Jesus as if he were a warrior fighting at his best, or an athlete doing his best to win an event. Alternate translation: “do your best to obey Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 6 12 y6m8 figs-metaphor ἐπιλαβοῦ τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς 1 grasp eternal life Paul speaks about people wanting **eternal life** so much that they hold onto it firmly in their hands. He may be continuing the metaphor of an athlete who worked hard to win an event and now holds the trophy in his hands. Alternate translations: “eagerly desire to live with God forever” or “do whatever is necessary to pursue life with God forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 12 usd1 figs-activepassive εἰς ἣν ἐκλήθης 1 to which you were called If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “to which God called you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 6 12 qw96 ὡμολόγησας τὴν καλὴν ὁμολογίαν 1 you confessed the good confession Alternate translation: “you publicly stated your faith in Jesus” 1TI 6 12 vm6q figs-explicit ἐνώπιον πολλῶν μαρτύρων 1 before many witnesses The implication is that Timothy’s statement of his faith was binding because these **witnesses** were present and could testify that he had made it. In your translation, you could use the expression used in your culture for a public, legal commitment. Alternate translation: “while many people were watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 6 13 t477 figs-explicit καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 and Christ Jesus The implication is that Paul is also asking **Jesus** to be his witness. Alternate translation: “and with Christ Jesus … as my witness as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 6 13 amy1 figs-explicit τοῦ μαρτυρήσαντος ἐπὶ Ποντίου Πειλάτου τὴν καλὴν ὁμολογίαν 1 the one having testified the good confession before Pontius Pilate Paul is offering Jesus to Timothy as an example of someone who publicly affirmed his obedience to God even when others were hostile and threatening. Alternate translation: “who acknowledged God himself when Pontius Pilate put him on trial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 6 14 p9n9 figs-doublet ἄσπιλον ἀνεπίλημπτον 1 spotless, irreproachable The terms **spotless** and **irreproachable** mean similar things. Paul may be using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these terms and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “completely blameless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1TI 6 14 t480 figs-metaphor ἄσπιλον 1 spotless A spot figuratively means a moral fault. This could mean: (1) Timothy should live in such a way that Jesus will not find fault with him or blame him for doing wrong. (2) Timothy should live in such a way that other people will not find fault with him or blame him for doing wrong. Alternate translation: “blameless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 6 14 t480 figs-metaphor ἄσπιλον 1 spotless A spot means a moral fault. This could mean: (1) Timothy should live in such a way that Jesus will not find fault with him or blame him for doing wrong. (2) Timothy should live in such a way that other people will not find fault with him or blame him for doing wrong. Alternate translation: “blameless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 14 nk52 μέχρι τῆς ἐπιφανείας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 until the appearance of our Lord Jesus Christ Alternate translation: “until our Lord Jesus Christ returns” 1TI 6 15 t482 figs-idiom καιροῖς ἰδίοις 1 in its own times See how you translated this expression in [2:6](../02/06.md). Alternate translation: “at the time that God will choose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TI 6 15 ac6y figs-explicit ὁ μακάριος καὶ μόνος Δυνάστης 1 the blessed and only Sovereign This expression refers implicitly to God. Alternate translation: “God, the One we praise, who alone rules over the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -411,11 +411,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 6 17 z4ec ἐν τῷ νῦν αἰῶνι 1 in the present age The **present age** is the time period in which we are living, before Jesus returns and establishes God’s rule over all people. Alternate translation: “at this time” 1TI 6 17 drj6 figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ πλούτου ἀδηλότητι 1 in the uncertainty of riches If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **uncertainty**behind this with a verbal phrase. Alternate translations: “in riches, which are so uncertain” or “in wealth, which a person can lose so easily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 6 17 iq61 figs-ellipsis πάντα πλουσίως εἰς ἀπόλαυσιν 1 all things richly unto enjoyment By **all**, Paul is referring to all of the things that anyone actually has, not to everything that it might be possible to have. If it would be helpful in your language, you may want to include words to make that clear. Alternate translation: “all of the things that we have so that we can enjoy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1TI 6 18 cii3 figs-metaphor πλουτεῖν ἐν ἔργοις καλοῖς 1 to be rich in good works Paul speaks figuratively of doing things to help others as a way of becoming wealthy, but it is measured in something other than money. Alternate translation: “to serve and help others in many ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TI 6 19 zc9d figs-metaphor ἀποθησαυρίζοντας ἑαυτοῖς θεμέλιον καλὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον 1 storing up for themselves a good foundation for what is coming Paul speaks figuratively about the blessings that God will give to those who have served him faithfully as if they were riches that a person was **storing** in a safe place. Alternate translation: “securing a good start now on their future life in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TI 6 19 t493 figs-metaphor ἀποθησαυρίζοντας ἑαυτοῖς θεμέλιον καλὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον 1 storing up for themselves a good foundation for what is coming Paul also speaks figuratively about the blessings that God will give as if they were the **foundation** of a building. He means that they will give a person a good start on their new life in the presence of God forever. Alternate translation: “securing a good start now on their future life in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 6 18 cii3 figs-metaphor πλουτεῖν ἐν ἔργοις καλοῖς 1 to be rich in good works Paul speaks of doing things to help others as a way of becoming wealthy, but it is measured in something other than money. Alternate translation: “to serve and help others in many ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 6 19 zc9d figs-metaphor ἀποθησαυρίζοντας ἑαυτοῖς θεμέλιον καλὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον 1 storing up for themselves a good foundation for what is coming Paul speaks about the blessings that God will give to those who have served him faithfully as if they were riches that a person was **storing** in a safe place. Alternate translation: “securing a good start now on their future life in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 6 19 t493 figs-metaphor ἀποθησαυρίζοντας ἑαυτοῖς θεμέλιον καλὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον 1 storing up for themselves a good foundation for what is coming Paul also speaks about the blessings that God will give as if they were the **foundation** of a building. He means that they will give a person a good start on their new life in the presence of God forever. Alternate translation: “securing a good start now on their future life in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 19 t494 figs-idiom εἰς τὸ μέλλον 1 for what is coming In the New Testament, this expression can refer to different things, but in this case it seems to refer to the new life that believers will have in God’s presence after death and the end of history. It is equivalent to the expression “the coming life” in [4:8](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “their future life in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TI 6 19 z5ru figs-metaphor ἵνα ἐπιλάβωνται τῆς ὄντως ζωῆς 1 so that they may grasp genuine life Paul is using the same image as in the phrase **grasp** eternal **life** in [6:12](../06/12.md). He is speaking figuratively about people wanting eternal life so much that they hold onto it firmly in their hands. Alternate translation: “so that they can indeed live with God forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TI 6 19 z5ru figs-metaphor ἵνα ἐπιλάβωνται τῆς ὄντως ζωῆς 1 so that they may grasp genuine life Paul is using the same image as in the phrase **grasp** eternal **life** in [6:12](../06/12.md). He is speaking about people wanting eternal life so much that they hold onto it firmly in their hands. Alternate translation: “so that they can indeed live with God forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 20 dd1v figs-explicit τὴν παραθήκην φύλαξον 1 guard the entrustment The implication is that Jesus has entrusted Timothy with the message to proclaim about him. Alternate translation: “protect the message about Jesus that he has put in your care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 6 20 vgr8 figs-metonymy ἐκτρεπόμενος τὰς βεβήλους κενοφωνίας 1 avoiding the profane chatter In order to avoid **profane chatter**, Timothy must avoid the people who do the chattering. Alternate translation: “do not pay attention to the talk of people for whom nothing is sacred” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TI 6 20 t498 καὶ ἀντιθέσεις 1 and contradictions This could mean: (1) the false teachers are saying things that are contrary to true Christian belief. Alternate translations: “and teachings that contradict us” or “and the opposing statements” (2) the false teachers are saying things that cannot all be true at the same time. diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index fd55d1f82b..845e31fa06 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 1 5 ayl4 figs-idiom ὑπόμνησιν λαβὼν 1 having received remembrance This is an idiom that simply means, “remembering.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 1 5 buc3 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως 1 of the genuine faith in you Paul refers to Timothy’s **faith** with an abstract noun. Your language may have a particular way of expressing this concept, such as with a verb. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “that you genuinely believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 1 5 p008 figs-metaphor τῆς ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως 1 of the genuine faith in you Paul speaks of **faith** as if it were an object inside of Timothy. Paul is referring to Timothy’s faith in God here, not to anyone’s faith in Timothy. Alternate translation: “your genuine faith” or “your faith that is genuine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 1 5 vgz2 figs-personification ἐν σοὶ…πίστεως, ἥτις ἐνῴκησεν πρῶτον ἐν τῇ μάμμῃ σου, Λωΐδι, καὶ τῇ μητρί σου, Εὐνίκῃ; πέπεισμαι δὲ ὅτι καὶ ἐν σοί 1 of … faith in you, which dwelt first in your grandmother Lois and your mother Eunice, and I am convinced that it is also in you Paul is speaking figuratively of their **faith** as if it were something that was alive and lived **in** each of them. Alternate translation: “of … faith that you have. Lois, your grandmother, and then Eunice, your mother, had this genuine faith in God, and now I am confident that you have this same genuine faith as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +2TI 1 5 vgz2 figs-personification ἐν σοὶ…πίστεως, ἥτις ἐνῴκησεν πρῶτον ἐν τῇ μάμμῃ σου, Λωΐδι, καὶ τῇ μητρί σου, Εὐνίκῃ; πέπεισμαι δὲ ὅτι καὶ ἐν σοί 1 of … faith in you, which dwelt first in your grandmother Lois and your mother Eunice, and I am convinced that it is also in you Paul is speaking of their **faith** as if it were something that was alive and lived **in** each of them. Alternate translation: “of … faith that you have. Lois, your grandmother, and then Eunice, your mother, had this genuine faith in God, and now I am confident that you have this same genuine faith as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2TI 1 5 l8wc translate-names Λωΐδι 1 Lois This is the name of a woman, Timothy’s grandmother, who is probably his mother’s mother. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 5 p009 translate-names Εὐνίκῃ 1 Eunice This is the name of a woman, Timothy’s mother. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 6 j58k δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν 1 for which reason Paul writes that the **reason** for asking Timothy to rekindle his gift is that he is confident of Timothy’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “for this reason” or “because of your faith in Jesus” @@ -47,11 +47,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 1 9 lmas οὐ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα ἡμῶν 1 not according to our works It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. If you do start a new sentence, for clarity you may wish to repeat some words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “He did not save us and call us because of our works” 2TI 1 9 kyr5 figs-hendiadys ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἰδίαν πρόθεσιν καὶ χάριν 1 but according to his own purpose and grace Here the words **purpose and grace** work together to mean “gracious purpose.” Paul is saying that God’s purpose or plan for us includes showing us grace or kindness through Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “but because of his gracious purpose” or “but because he planned to show us kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 2TI 1 9 p012 figs-activepassive καὶ χάριν, τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 and grace, which was given to us in Christ Jesus If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and grace, which God gave to us in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 1 9 pq1z figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in Christ Jesus Paul speaks figuratively of God’s **purpose and grace** or “gracious purpose” as if it were an object inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to God’s plan to save people that Jesus fulfilled. So when people begin a relationship with Jesus, then God saves them. Alternate translation: “through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 1 9 pq1z figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in Christ Jesus Paul speaks of God’s **purpose and grace** or “gracious purpose” as if it were an object inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to God’s plan to save people that Jesus fulfilled. So when people begin a relationship with Jesus, then God saves them. Alternate translation: “through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 9 zq7m figs-idiom πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων 1 before eternal times This is an idiom that indicates that God decided to save through faith in Christ before time and the creation of the world. Alternate translation: “before time began” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 1 10 h5e5 figs-metaphor φανερωθεῖσαν δὲ νῦν 1 and which now has been revealed Paul speaks of God’s gracious plan to save us as if it were an object that could be uncovered and shown to people through the arrival of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “and which now people can know” or “and which now people can experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 10 p013 figs-activepassive φανερωθεῖσαν δὲ νῦν 1 and which now has been revealed If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “which now God has revealed” or “which now God has allowed people to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 1 10 i3wl figs-metaphor φωτίσαντος δὲ ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 and brought to light life and immortality through the gospel Paul refers to **life and immortality** as if they were objects that could be brought from darkness into light so that people could see them. He is figuratively speaking of revealing something or making it known to people. Alternate translation: “and revealed life and immortality through the gospel” or “and declared life and immortality through the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 1 10 i3wl figs-metaphor φωτίσαντος δὲ ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 and brought to light life and immortality through the gospel Paul refers to **life and immortality** as if they were objects that could be brought from darkness into light so that people could see them. He is speaking of revealing something or making it known to people. Alternate translation: “and revealed life and immortality through the gospel” or “and declared life and immortality through the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 10 a1n7 figs-hendiadys ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν 1 life and immortality Here, **life and immortality** are probably working together to mean “immortal life.” Alternate translation: “eternal life” or “incorruptible life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 2TI 1 11 tb9b figs-activepassive ἐτέθην ἐγὼ κῆρυξ 1 I was appointed a herald If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God chose me to be a herald” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 1 11 p014 translate-unknown κῆρυξ 1 a herald A **herald** is someone who is sent out to announce a message. If your language does not have a similar term and your readers would not know what a **herald** is, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a messenger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -62,11 +62,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 1 12 p6pi figs-metaphor τὴν παραθήκην μου φυλάξαι 1 to guard my deposit Paul is using a metaphor of a person leaving something with another person who is supposed to protect it until he gives it back to the first person. The two people involved are Jesus and Paul, but it is not clear which one is holding the **deposit**. This could mean: (1) Paul is trusting Jesus to keep something safe that Paul has entrusted to Jesus. This could be Paul’s own life, or, more specifically, that Paul would remain faithful to Jesus all of his life. Alternate translation: “to keep me faithful to him” (2) Paul is trusting Jesus to preserve the good news that Jesus has deposited with Paul for Paul to preach. Alternate translation: “to help me keep preaching his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 12 hhu5 figs-possession τὴν παραθήκην μου 1 my deposit The term **my** here conveys the idea that this **deposit** is associated with Paul in some way. The particular association depends on what we consider the deposit to be. This could mean: (1) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is Paul’s own life or Paul’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “my faithfulness to him” (2) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is the gospel message that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “the gospel message that he has entrusted to me to preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2TI 1 12 qcu3 figs-explicit ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 that day This refers to the **day** when Jesus returns for judgment. Alternate translation: “the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 1 13 h1qd figs-metonymy ὑγιαινόντων λόγων 1 of the healthy words Paul wants Timothy to teach the things that he taught and thereby to follow his example. The expression **the healthy words** figuratively means “the correct message” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that the correct message was reasonable. Alternate translation: “the correct message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2TI 1 13 p016 figs-metonymy λόγων 1 of … words Paul uses the term **words** figuratively to describe the expression in words of what Christians believe. Alternate translation: “of … message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 1 13 h1qd figs-metonymy ὑγιαινόντων λόγων 1 of the healthy words Paul wants Timothy to teach the things that he taught and thereby to follow his example. The expression **the healthy words** means “the correct message” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that the correct message was reasonable. Alternate translation: “the correct message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 1 13 p016 figs-metonymy λόγων 1 of … words Paul uses the term **words** to describe the expression in words of what Christians believe. Alternate translation: “of … message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 1 13 p017 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the faith and love that are in Christ Jesus Paul uses two abstract nouns, **faith** and **love**, to refer to actions that Timothy should do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 1 13 b2ld ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the faith and love that are in Christ Jesus Here, **love** could refer to: (1) the love that Timothy should show others. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (2) the love that Timothy should show to God. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving him” -2TI 1 13 ix6w figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in Christ Jesus Paul speaks figuratively of **faith and love** as if they were objects inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to the faith and love that Jesus enables us to have when we belong to him. See how you translated this phrase in 1:9. Alternate translation: “ours through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 1 13 ix6w figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in Christ Jesus Paul speaks of **faith and love** as if they were objects inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to the faith and love that Jesus enables us to have when we belong to him. See how you translated this phrase in 1:9. Alternate translation: “ours through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 14 i5g5 figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην 1 the good deposit Here, **the good deposit** refers to the gospel message that God has entrusted to Timothy to share with his people. Alternate translation: “the good message entrusted to you for God’s people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 1 14 cb5q figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην φύλαξον 1 Guard the good deposit Timothy needs to be alert to protect the gospel message because people will oppose him and try to distort what he says and teaches, turning it into a different message. Alternate translation: “Protect the good deposit against those who will try to distort it” or “Because people will try to distort the gospel message, guard it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 1 14 a3v2 διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 through the Holy Spirit Here, **through** means “by means of” or “by the power of.” Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit” or “with the help of the Holy Spirit” @@ -116,16 +116,16 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 7 bdk9 figs-explicit νόει ὃ λέγω, δώσει γάρ σοι ὁ Κύριος σύνεσιν 1 Think about what I am saying, for the Lord will give you understanding Paul gave Timothy three metaphors in verses 3-6, but he did not completely explain their implications. He expected Timothy to figure out, with God’s help, the lesson of these metaphors for Christ’s servants. For that reason, if you want to include an explanation of the meaning of the metaphors, we recommend that you state the meaning in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. Alternate translation: “you will have to think carefully about what I have just told you to understand it completely, but you can depend on God to help you to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 7 p036 figs-metonymy ὃ λέγω 1 what I am saying Paul refers to what he has just written in his letter with the verb **saying** to express the idea of communicating. Alternate translation: “what I have just told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 7 a22q figs-explicit ἐν πᾶσιν 1 in everything Here, **in everything** refers to everything related to the three metaphors that Paul has written just before this. Alternate translation: “about everything that I have just said” or “about all that I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 2 8 mh1k figs-metaphor ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυείδ 1 from the seed of David The phrase **from the seed of** refers figuratively to Jesus being descended from King David. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 8 mh1k figs-metaphor ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυείδ 1 from the seed of David The phrase **from the seed of** refers to Jesus being descended from King David. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 8 p037 translate-names Δαυείδ 1 of David This is the name of a man, a great king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 2 8 wt31 figs-idiom ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised from the dead The expression **raised from the dead** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “whom God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 2 8 p038 figs-activepassive ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised from the dead If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “whom God raised from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 2 8 s4vh figs-possession κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου 1 according to my gospel The term **my** conveys the idea that it is the gospel associated with Paul because he preaches it. Alternate translation: “according to the gospel message that I preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -2TI 2 9 t2ax figs-metonymy μέχρι δεσμῶν 1 unto chains Paul uses the expression **unto chains** figuratively to express how far his suffering has gone: from being beaten, to being arrested, to being in chains in prison. Alternate translation: “to the point of being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 2 9 t2ax figs-metonymy μέχρι δεσμῶν 1 unto chains Paul uses the expression **unto chains** to express how far his suffering has gone: from being beaten, to being arrested, to being in chains in prison. Alternate translation: “to the point of being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 9 p039 figs-simile ὡς κακοῦργος 1 like a criminal Paul compares his situation to the shameful one that a person would be in who had actually committed a crime. Alternate translation: “as if I were a criminal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 2TI 2 9 pc6t figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐ δέδεται 1 the word of God is not bound Here, **bound** means being held in chains as a prisoner, referring to Paul’s condition. Paul contrasts himself, an actual prisoner, with God’s message, which can never be held prisoner. Alternate translation: “nothing is holding back the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 9 p040 figs-activepassive ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐ δέδεται 1 the word of God is not bound If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this idea. Alternate translation: “nothing is holding back the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 2 9 p041 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Paul uses the term **word** figuratively to describe the message from God that he and others are communicating with words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 2 9 p041 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Paul uses the term **word** to describe the message from God that he and others are communicating with words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 10 p042 figs-hyperbole πάντα ὑπομένω 1 I endure all things Here the term **all** is a generalization that likely refers to the sufferings that Paul describes in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I endure all of these sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 2TI 2 10 aa1x figs-nominaladj διὰ τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς 1 for the chosen The term **chosen** is an adjective that functions as a noun here and refers to a group of people. If your language would not use an adjective in that way, you could translate this term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “for the people whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 2TI 2 10 j2bk καὶ αὐτοὶ σωτηρίας τύχωσιν τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 they also may obtain the salvation that is in Christ Jesus The phrase **obtain the salvation** could also be expressed with Christ Jesus, who grants salvation, as the subject. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus may grant them salvation” @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 11 p044 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy You could represent the meaning of the adjective **trustworthy** with an active verb, if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you could trust this statement” 2TI 2 11 p045 figs-quotemarks πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. The words that follow in the rest of this verse and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md) are a poem or hymn that expresses the message that Paul says is trustworthy. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these words as a direct quotation or by setting them farther to the right, as the General Notes at the beginning of this chapter suggest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 2TI 2 11 g6e4 writing-poetry εἰ γὰρ συναπεθάνομεν, καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 For if we died with him, we will also live with him This is the beginning of a poem or hymn that Paul is probably quoting. If your language has a way of indicating that this is poetry, such as by setting individual phrases on separate lines, you could use it here and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md). If not, you could translate this material as regular prose rather than as poetry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]]) -2TI 2 11 in38 figs-metaphor εἰ…συναπεθάνομεν 1 if we died with him Paul is speaking figuratively since he and Timothy and other believers who should trust this statement have not actually died. This could refer to: (1) the way that believers accept Jesus’ death for their sins when they trust him for salvation. This means that they have figuratively “died” to their old life of sin. Alternate translation: “if we have ended our old way of life by accepting Jesus’ death for us” (2) the way that people who believe in Jesus may suffer for him, possibly to the point of dying for him. Alternate translation: “if we are prepared to die for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 11 in38 figs-metaphor εἰ…συναπεθάνομεν 1 if we died with him Paul is speaking since he and Timothy and other believers who should trust this statement have not actually died. This could refer to: (1) the way that believers accept Jesus’ death for their sins when they trust him for salvation. This means that they have “died” to their old life of sin. Alternate translation: “if we have ended our old way of life by accepting Jesus’ death for us” (2) the way that people who believe in Jesus may suffer for him, possibly to the point of dying for him. Alternate translation: “if we are prepared to die for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 11 p046 καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 we will also live with him Although Paul is referring to dying with Christ in a figurative sense, **live** is probably not figurative, but could refer to: (1) life after physical death. This seems most likely given Paul’s mention of “eternal glory” in the previous verse and “we will reign with him” in the next. Alternate translation: “then God will raise us from the dead to live with Jesus” (2) how believers will act in this life before physical death. Alternate translation: “we will not pursue our own desires, instead we will do what Jesus wants us to do” 2TI 2 12 p048 εἰ ἀρνησόμεθα 1 if we deny him Paul uses the term **deny** to refer to the action of believers saying that they do not know Jesus Christ during this present life. It is presented as the opposite of **endure**, so it refers to someone who gives in to persecution and denies being a follower of Jesus. Alternate translation: “if we say now that we do not know him” 2TI 2 12 p049 κἀκεῖνος ἀρνήσεται ἡμᾶς 1 he also will deny us In this second usage of the word **deny**, Paul is referring to the action of Jesus Christ on the day of final judgment. On that day, Jesus will either receive a faithful believer or reject those who are not true followers. Those who deny that they are followers of Jesus while on earth are not true followers. Alternate translation: “he will reject us on the day of judgment” @@ -143,29 +143,29 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 13 p050 figs-explicit ἐκεῖνος πιστὸς μένει 1 he remains faithful This could mean : (1) he remains faithful to them. (2) he remains true to himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 13 ihd4 ἀρνήσασθαι…ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται 1 he is not able to deny himself Paul states that Jesus is not able to **deny himself**, meaning that Jesus is not able to go against his character and will remain true to what he said he would do. Paul may have one or both of the following ideas in mind. (1) Jesus’ character includes being the Savior who can forgive our unfaithfulness when we repent of it, as Peter experienced (John 21:15-19). This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains faithful to us.” (2) Jesus’ character also includes being the holy God who judges people for their sin when they do not repent. This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains true to himself.” Alternate translation: “he must always act according to his character” 2TI 2 14 u661 ὑπομίμνῃσκε 1 Remind them The word **them**, which is implicit in the Greek verb, probably refers to the people that Timothy has responsibility over. Alternate translation: “Remind the people there” -2TI 2 14 p051 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God Paul uses the expression **before God**, which means “in front of God,” to mean “where God can see.” Seeing, in turn, figuratively means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “as God is watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 14 p051 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God Paul uses the expression **before God**, which means “in front of God,” to mean “where God can see.” Seeing, in turn, means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “as God is watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 14 r5lq figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God The implication is that Paul is telling Timothy to tell the believers, when he gives them this command, that God will be watching what they do. Alternate translation: “with God as their witness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 2 14 g6p7 figs-metaphor μὴ λογομαχεῖν 1 not to battle about words Paul uses the term **battle** figuratively to describe arguments. This could mean: (1) the believers are not to argue about unimportant things such as the words that someone uses to present the gospel message. That only distracts people from talking about important things, such as the gospel message itself. Alternate translation: “not to fight about small things like words” (2) the believers are not to argue about what words mean. Again, this causes disunity among the believers for no good reason. Alternate translation: “not to fight about the meanings of words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 14 g6p7 figs-metaphor μὴ λογομαχεῖν 1 not to battle about words Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. This could mean: (1) the believers are not to argue about unimportant things such as the words that someone uses to present the gospel message. That only distracts people from talking about important things, such as the gospel message itself. Alternate translation: “not to fight about small things like words” (2) the believers are not to argue about what words mean. Again, this causes disunity among the believers for no good reason. Alternate translation: “not to fight about the meanings of words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 14 rke6 ἐπ’ οὐδὲν χρήσιμον 1 it is useful for nothing Paul adds that battling about words has no benefit for those involved. Alternate translation: “it does not benefit anyone” 2TI 2 14 ywty figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων 1 to the destruction of those who hear If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “it destroys those who hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 2 14 x7gx figs-metonymy ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων 1 to the destruction of those who hear Here, **destruction** refers not to physical harm, but to the spiritual harm that is done to believers who hear their teachers foolishly arguing about unimportant things. This teaches the believers that being seen as right about small things is more important than love and unity, and can cause them to have wrong ideas about the faith or to stop following Jesus altogether. Alternate translation: “and can make those who hear it want to stop following Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 15 m3vy σπούδασον σεαυτὸν, δόκιμον παραστῆσαι τῷ Θεῷ 1 Strive to present yourself approved to God Alternate translation: “Do your best to please God” -2TI 2 15 rj6y figs-metaphor ἐργάτην 1 a worker Paul says figuratively that Timothy will be a skilled workman if he correctly teaches God’s word. Alternate translation: “like a craftsman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 15 xgz9 figs-metaphor ὀρθοτομοῦντα τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 cutting the word of truth straight Paul refers figuratively to **the word of truth** as if it were a path that someone was cutting through difficult terrain. When such a path is **straight**, travelers can follow it directly to their destination. By contrast, the useless discussions that Paul describes in [2:14](../02/14.md) and [2:16](../02/16.md) would be needless detours in terms of this same metaphor. Alternate translation: “show people how to follow the Scriptures directly” or “teach the Scriptures correctly so that people can follow them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 15 p052 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the word of truth Paul uses the term **word** figuratively to refer to something that is expressed in words. This could refer to: (1) the message that Timothy is to teach. Alternate translation: “the true message” (2) the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 2 15 rj6y figs-metaphor ἐργάτην 1 a worker Paul says that Timothy will be a skilled workman if he correctly teaches God’s word. Alternate translation: “like a craftsman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 15 xgz9 figs-metaphor ὀρθοτομοῦντα τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 cutting the word of truth straight Paul refers to **the word of truth** as if it were a path that someone was cutting through difficult terrain. When such a path is **straight**, travelers can follow it directly to their destination. By contrast, the useless discussions that Paul describes in [2:14](../02/14.md) and [2:16](../02/16.md) would be needless detours in terms of this same metaphor. Alternate translation: “show people how to follow the Scriptures directly” or “teach the Scriptures correctly so that people can follow them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 15 p052 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the word of truth Paul uses the term **word** to refer to something that is expressed in words. This could refer to: (1) the message that Timothy is to teach. Alternate translation: “the true message” (2) the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 15 p053 figs-abstractnouns τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the word of truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the true message” or “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2TI 2 16 e27q figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πλεῖον…προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας 1 they will advance into greater ungodliness Paul speaks of these discussions figuratively as if they could physically progress in a certain direction, and he speaks of godlessness as that direction. Paul is figuratively describing the effect that these discussions have on people. Alternate translation: “they cause people to become more and more ungodly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 16 e27q figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πλεῖον…προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας 1 they will advance into greater ungodliness Paul speaks of these discussions as if they could physically progress in a certain direction, and he speaks of godlessness as that direction. Paul is describing the effect that these discussions have on people. Alternate translation: “they cause people to become more and more ungodly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 17 i73t figs-simile ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν ὡς γάγγραινα νομὴν ἕξει 1 their word will have a spreading like gangrene This is a simile. It means that something will spread from person to person and harm the faith of all those who hear it. The thing that will spread could refer to: (1) the habit of having useless and godless discussions. (2) the things that the people were saying in these empty discussions, or both. Alternate translation: “these empty discussions will spread quickly and cause destruction like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -2TI 2 17 p054 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν 1 their word Paul uses the term **word** figuratively to refer to something that is expressed in words. Alternate translation: “these discussions” or “what people who take part in these discussions say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 2 17 p054 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν 1 their word Paul uses the term **word** to refer to something that is expressed in words. Alternate translation: “these discussions” or “what people who take part in these discussions say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 17 p055 translate-unknown ὡς γάγγραινα 1 like gangrene **Gangrene** is type of tissue death caused by infection or lack of blood circulation. It quickly spreads in a person’s body and can lead to death. If your readers would not know what **gangrene** is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 2TI 2 17 p056 writing-pronouns ὧν ἐστιν Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 among whom are Hymenaeus and Philetus Paul gives Timothy the names of two men who are examples of ungodliness and foolish talk. To make the relationship between these names and the preceding **their word** clear in your language, you may have to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Hymeneus and Philetus are such people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2TI 2 17 x2k6 translate-names Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 Hymenaeus and Philetus These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 2 18 fi9z figs-metaphor οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν 1 who have missed the mark regarding the truth Paul uses this expression to speak figuratively of faith in Christ as if it were a target at which people should aim. Those who have **missed the mark** do not believe or teach what is true. Alternate translation: “who are teaching things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 18 fi9z figs-metaphor οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν 1 who have missed the mark regarding the truth Paul uses this expression to speak of faith in Christ as if it were a target at which people should aim. Those who have **missed the mark** do not believe or teach what is true. Alternate translation: “who are teaching things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 18 p057 figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν 1 who have missed the mark regarding the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “who teach things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 2 18 pu22 figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασιν ἤδη γεγονέναι 1 the resurrection has already happened If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **resurrection** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “God has already raised the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 2 18 ura5 figs-metaphor ἀνατρέπουσιν τήν τινων πίστιν 1 who are destroying the faith of some Paul refers to **faith** as though it were an object that could be destroyed. Alternate translation: “they are causing some people to stop believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 19 ir1z figs-metaphor ὁ…στερεὸς θεμέλιος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἕστηκεν 1 the firm foundation of God stands Paul uses the image of the foundation of a building to explain that even though a false and destructive message has been destroying the faith of some people, God has nevertheless given people who want to continue to follow him a true message, which figuratively provides for them a safe and secure “place to stand.” Alternate translation: “God has provided a secure basis for people to continue to believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 19 p058 figs-metonymy ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην 1 having this seal Paul speaks figuratively of the inscription on this foundation as if it were a **seal**, since seals on the outside of documents often bore inscriptions describing their contents. Alternate translation: “having this inscription” or “which can be described in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 2 19 ir1z figs-metaphor ὁ…στερεὸς θεμέλιος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἕστηκεν 1 the firm foundation of God stands Paul uses the image of the foundation of a building to explain that even though a false and destructive message has been destroying the faith of some people, God has nevertheless given people who want to continue to follow him a true message, which provides for them a safe and secure “place to stand.” Alternate translation: “God has provided a secure basis for people to continue to believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 19 p058 figs-metonymy ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην 1 having this seal Paul speaks of the inscription on this foundation as if it were a **seal**, since seals on the outside of documents often bore inscriptions describing their contents. Alternate translation: “having this inscription” or “which can be described in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 19 p059 figs-quotemarks ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην 1 having this seal Paul uses this phrase to introduce two direct quotations. The statements that follow in the rest of this verse describe two aspects of the basis that God has provided for people to continue to believe in him. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these statements as quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 2TI 2 19 nd7t figs-idiom ὁ ὀνομάζων τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 who names the name of the Lord The expression **names the name of the Lord** is an idiom that refers to saying the name of the Lord in order to declare that one belongs to him. Alternate translation: “who says he believes in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 2 19 y3bc figs-abstractnouns ἀποστήτω ἀπὸ ἀδικίας 1 must abstain from unrighteousness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “must stop doing evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -173,28 +173,28 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 20 p061 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα 1 but also wood and clay Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2TI 2 20 j75l σκεύη 1 containers The word **container** is a general term for items used to hold other things, such as grain, food, drink, or refuse. If your language does not have a general word, you can use a specific word such as “bowl” or “pot.” 2TI 2 20 mt5e figs-abstractnouns ἃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν, ἃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν 1 both some for honor and some for dishonor If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **honor** and **dishonor** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “he uses the former at events to honor people and he uses the latter to do things that no one wants to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2TI 2 21 jm3p figs-metaphor ἐκκαθάρῃ ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ τούτων 1 has cleansed himself from these Here Paul continues the metaphor that compares people in the church to containers in a great house that have different uses. Paul speaks figuratively of a person washing himself clean as though he had been a pot full of something bad. By this he means that the person has given up certain associations or activities. Here, **these** could refer to: (1) the false teachers who are destroying the faith of some people. Alternate translation: “has disassociated himself from these false teachers” (2) the activities of quarreling and false teaching that Paul has warned Timothy about. Alternate translation: “has stopped doing these ungodly actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 21 g79f figs-metaphor ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 he will be a container for honor Paul speaks figuratively of a person who has given up these associations or activities as if he were a particular kind of container. Alternate translation: “he will be like a dish for special occasions” or “he will be like a dish that is used to honor people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 21 jm3p figs-metaphor ἐκκαθάρῃ ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ τούτων 1 has cleansed himself from these Here Paul continues the metaphor that compares people in the church to containers in a great house that have different uses. Paul speaks of a person washing himself clean as though he had been a pot full of something bad. By this he means that the person has given up certain associations or activities. Here, **these** could refer to: (1) the false teachers who are destroying the faith of some people. Alternate translation: “has disassociated himself from these false teachers” (2) the activities of quarreling and false teaching that Paul has warned Timothy about. Alternate translation: “has stopped doing these ungodly actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 21 g79f figs-metaphor ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 he will be a container for honor Paul speaks of a person who has given up these associations or activities as if he were a particular kind of container. Alternate translation: “he will be like a dish for special occasions” or “he will be like a dish that is used to honor people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 21 p062 figs-explicit ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 he will be a container for honor The implication is that God will be able to give important assignments to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will be someone to whom God can give important assignments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 21 mh63 ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν, ἡγιασμένον εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ, εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 he will be a container for honor, having been sanctified, useful to the Master, having been prepared for every good work These four phrases could mean: (1) the ones beginning with **having been** give the reason for the phrase before them. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor because he has been sanctified, and he will be useful to the Master because he has been prepared for every good work” (2) all four phrases could simply be describing the person. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor, someone who is sanctified, useful to the Master, and ready for every good work” 2TI 2 21 p063 figs-activepassive ἡγιασμένον 1 having been sanctified If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for himself” or “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 2 21 nl5d figs-metaphor ἡγιασμένον 1 having been sanctified If this phrase is continuing the metaphor of objects in a house, then Paul is referring to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities as if he were a precious object whose owner keeps it in a special place. Whether this phrase is continuing the metaphor or not, it still expresses the idea of being “dedicated” for a special purpose. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 21 p064 figs-metaphor εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ 1 useful to the Master In the context of the metaphor of the house, Paul speaks of God figuratively as the head of the household. Alternate translation: “useful to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 21 p064 figs-metaphor εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ 1 useful to the Master In the context of the metaphor of the house, Paul speaks of God as the head of the household. Alternate translation: “useful to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 21 p065 figs-activepassive εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 having been prepared for every good work If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “who has gotten himself ready to do any good work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 2 22 h9p6 figs-metaphor τὰς…νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε 1 flee youthful lusts Paul speaks about youthful desires as if they were a dangerous person or animal that Timothy should run away from. Alternate translation: “control your youthful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 22 p066 figs-metonymy τὰς…νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε 1 flee youthful lusts Paul speaks figuratively of immoral activities by association with the desires that lead a person to engage in them. Alternate translation: “refuse to do the wrong things that young people want to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 2 22 p066 figs-metonymy τὰς…νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε 1 flee youthful lusts Paul speaks of immoral activities by association with the desires that lead a person to engage in them. Alternate translation: “refuse to do the wrong things that young people want to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 22 srb7 figs-metaphor δίωκε δὲ δικαιοσύνην, πίστιν, ἀγάπην, εἰρήνην 1 and pursue righteousness, faith, love, and peace Paul is using the verb **pursue** in contrast to **flee**. He speaks of these positive things as if Timothy should run towards them because they will do him good. Alternate translation: “be eager to do what is right, to believe in God, to love God and others, and to live in peace with people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 22 p067 figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην, πίστιν, ἀγάπην, εἰρήνην 1 righteousness, faith, love, and peace If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **righteousness**, **faith**, **love**, and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “do what is right, believe in God, love other people, and live peacefully with other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 2 22 hg99 μετὰ τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 with those who call on the Lord from a clean heart This likely means that Paul wants Timothy to pursue these positive things together with others who are sincere in their faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could put this phrase at the beginning of Paul’s command to Timothy, as in the UST, before **pursue**. Alternate translation: “together with those who worship the Lord with sincere intentions” 2TI 2 22 gl3q figs-idiom τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον 1 those who call on the Lord The expression **call on the Lord** is an idiom that means to trust and worship the Lord. Alternate translation: “those who worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2TI 2 22 p068 figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a clean heart Paul uses a physical part of the body, the **heart**, figuratively to represent the intentions and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 2 22 p068 figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a clean heart Paul uses a physical part of the body, the **heart**, to represent the intentions and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 22 b2ti figs-metaphor ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a clean heart Paul uses the word **clean** to describe the intentions or thoughts of a person as though they were an object that could be made clean. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 23 tmf7 figs-metonymy τὰς…μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις παραιτοῦ 1 avoid foolish and ignorant questions Paul refers to certain kinds of discussions figuratively by association with the kind of questions that people might ask that would lead to these discussions or by association with the kind of people that would ask these questions. Alternate translation: “do not become involved in foolish and ignorant discussions” or “do not allow people to involve you in discussions that they start because they are foolish and ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 2 23 tmf7 figs-metonymy τὰς…μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις παραιτοῦ 1 avoid foolish and ignorant questions Paul refers to certain kinds of discussions by association with the kind of questions that people might ask that would lead to these discussions or by association with the kind of people that would ask these questions. Alternate translation: “do not become involved in foolish and ignorant discussions” or “do not allow people to involve you in discussions that they start because they are foolish and ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 23 p069 figs-doublet μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις 1 foolish and ignorant questions Paul may be using the words **foolish** and **ignorant** together to emphasize a single idea. Alternate translation: “very stupid questions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -2TI 2 23 kh6p figs-metaphor γεννῶσι μάχας 1 they give birth to battles Paul speaks of the **questions** figuratively as if they were women giving birth to children (the **battles**). Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 23 p070 figs-metaphor μάχας 1 battles Paul uses the term **battle** figuratively to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 24 p071 figs-metaphor δοῦλον…Κυρίου 1 the slave of the Lord Paul is using the expression **slave of the Lord** figuratively to refer to leaders in the church, including Timothy, who do what God tells them to do. This includes teaching the believers and interacting with the quarrelsome teachers who challenge their authority and the truth. Alternate translation: “a leader in the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 24 p072 figs-metaphor οὐ δεῖ μάχεσθαι 1 must not battle Paul uses the term **battle** figuratively to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “must not argue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 23 kh6p figs-metaphor γεννῶσι μάχας 1 they give birth to battles Paul speaks of the **questions** as if they were women giving birth to children (the **battles**). Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 23 p070 figs-metaphor μάχας 1 battles Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 24 p071 figs-metaphor δοῦλον…Κυρίου 1 the slave of the Lord Paul is using the expression **slave of the Lord** to refer to leaders in the church, including Timothy, who do what God tells them to do. This includes teaching the believers and interacting with the quarrelsome teachers who challenge their authority and the truth. Alternate translation: “a leader in the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 24 p072 figs-metaphor οὐ δεῖ μάχεσθαι 1 must not battle Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “must not argue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 25 un9l figs-abstractnouns ἐν πραΰτητι 1 in meekness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **meekness** in this expression with an adverb. Alternate translation: “meekly” or “gently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 2 25 u6rp παιδεύοντα 1 educating Paul presents this as the godly response to quarrels. This term can mean “teach” or “correct.” Alternate translation: “teaching” or “correcting” 2TI 2 25 jt1r figs-metaphor μήποτε δώῃ αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς μετάνοιαν 1 God may perhaps give them repentance Paul speaks of **repentance** as if it were an object that God could give people. Alternate translation: “God may cause them to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 26 p074 figs-activepassive ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 having been captured by him for his will If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “after the devil has captured them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 2 26 dj4j figs-metaphor ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 having been captured by him for his will Paul speaks of the devil’s deception as if the devil had physically captured them and made them do what he wanted. Alternate translation: “after the devil has deceived them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 intro k2cr 0 # 2 Timothy 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

Many scholars understand the **last days** to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return, which includes Paul’s time. If so, then what Paul teaches in this chapter about being persecuted applies to all believers. But some scholars understand the **last days** to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. If that is the meaning, then Paul is prophesying in verses 1-9 and 13 about those days. If possible, translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]]) -2TI 3 1 g65r figs-idiom ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 in the last days Paul is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the period of time before the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2TI 3 1 g65r figs-idiom ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 in the last days Paul is using the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the period of time before the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 3 1 n7gs figs-explicit ἐνστήσονται καιροὶ χαλεποί 1 there will be difficult times The implication from what Paul goes on to say about people becoming ungodly and violent is that it will be difficult for believers in this time period. Alternate translation: “believers will face difficult situations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 3 2 p075 figs-gendernotations οἱ ἄνθρωποι 1 men Here Paul is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2TI 3 2 jb27 φίλαυτοι 1 self-loving Here, **self-loving** refers to loving oneself more than loving family or friends with a natural human love. This is not the kind of love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “self-centered” @@ -219,13 +219,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 3 5 p077 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Paul uses this word to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2TI 3 5 p078 figs-nominaladj τούτους ἀποτρέπου 1 turn away from these The term **these** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to the people who show the ungodly qualities that Paul lists in the previous verses. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can add the word “people” in your translation. Alternate translation: “avoid these people” or “avoid such people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 2TI 3 5 xm1c figs-metaphor τούτους ἀποτρέπου 1 turn away from these The expression **turn away** is a metaphor for avoiding someone. Alternate translation: “avoid these people” or “avoid such people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 3 6 gu4b figs-metaphor αἰχμαλωτίζοντες 1 captivating Here Paul uses the term **captivating** figuratively to mean greatly influencing someone by the use of deception. Alternate translation: “manipulating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 3 6 gu4b figs-metaphor αἰχμαλωτίζοντες 1 captivating Here Paul uses the term **captivating** to mean greatly influencing someone by the use of deception. Alternate translation: “manipulating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 6 u9m5 γυναικάρια 1 foolish women The term **foolish women** refers to women who are spiritually weak and immature. They allow these men into their homes and listen to them because they are weak, idle, and have many sins. Alternate translation: “women who are spiritually weak” -2TI 3 6 e9ex figs-metaphor σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 who are loaded with sins Paul speaks figuratively of these **sins** as if they were heaped up on the backs of these women. Paul is explaining why these men can easily influence these women. This could mean: (1) these women sin often or even continually. Alternate translation: “who sin often” (2) these women feel terrible guilt because they sin. Alternate translation: “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 3 6 e9ex figs-metaphor σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 who are loaded with sins Paul speaks of these **sins** as if they were heaped up on the backs of these women. Paul is explaining why these men can easily influence these women. This could mean: (1) these women sin often or even continually. Alternate translation: “who sin often” (2) these women feel terrible guilt because they sin. Alternate translation: “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 6 p079 figs-activepassive σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 who are loaded with sins If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “who sin often” or “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 3 6 p080 figs-activepassive ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 led away by various desires If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “various desires lead them away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 3 6 izz9 figs-personification ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 led away by various desires Paul speaks figuratively about these **various desires** as if they could physically lead a person away. He means that the women decide to do evil things in order to satisfy their desires. Alternate translation: “they decide to sin in various ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -2TI 3 7 p082 figs-metaphor μηδέποτε εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν ἀληθείας ἐλθεῖν δυνάμενα 1 never able to come to the knowledge of the truth Paul speaks figuratively of the **knowledge of the truth** as if it were a destination at which people could arrive. Alternate translation: “never able to understand the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 3 6 izz9 figs-personification ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 led away by various desires Paul speaks about these **various desires** as if they could physically lead a person away. He means that the women decide to do evil things in order to satisfy their desires. Alternate translation: “they decide to sin in various ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +2TI 3 7 p082 figs-metaphor μηδέποτε εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν ἀληθείας ἐλθεῖν δυνάμενα 1 never able to come to the knowledge of the truth Paul speaks of the **knowledge of the truth** as if it were a destination at which people could arrive. Alternate translation: “never able to understand the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 8 p083 ὃν τρόπον δὲ 1 And what way Alternate translation: “Just as” 2TI 3 8 b8el translate-names Ἰάννης καὶ Ἰαμβρῆς 1 Jannes and Jambres These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 3 8 p084 figs-explicit Ἰάννης καὶ Ἰαμβρῆς 1 Jannes and Jambres Paul assumes that Timothy will know that he is referring here to the magicians in Pharaoh’s court who tried to duplicate the miracles that Moses was doing. The Bible does not record their names, but according to Jewish tradition their names were Jannes and Jambres. These men wanted to show that Pharaoh did not have to listen to Moses or obey Yahweh. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify them more explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jannes and Jambres, Pharaoh’s magicians,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -249,13 +249,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 3 10 l4pp figs-abstractnouns τῇ ὑπομονῇ 1 longsuffering If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **endurance** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I endure when I suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 3 11 p092 translate-names ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ, ἐν Ἰκονίῳ, ἐν Λύστροις 1 in Antioch, in Iconium, in Lystra These are the names of three cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 3 11 p093 οἵους διωγμοὺς ὑπήνεγκα 1 what kind of persecutions I endured Paul is reminding Timothy that he knows of the various ways in which Paul suffered and how he endured until God rescued him. Alternate translation: “how I endured various persecutions” -2TI 3 11 r9vk figs-metaphor ἐκ πάντων, με ἐρρύσατο ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord rescued me from them all Paul speaks figuratively as if God had physically removed him from a situation of danger. Alternate translation: “the Lord preserved me through them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 3 11 r9vk figs-metaphor ἐκ πάντων, με ἐρρύσατο ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord rescued me from them all Paul speaks as if God had physically removed him from a situation of danger. Alternate translation: “the Lord preserved me through them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 12 ke7f ζῆν εὐσεβῶς 1 to live piously The term **piously** means in an obedient way that honors God. Alternate translation: “to live in a godly way” 2TI 3 12 xm9l figs-activepassive διωχθήσονται 1 will be persecuted If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “people will persecute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 3 13 p094 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωποι 1 men Here Paul is using the term **men** in a generic sense that can include both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2TI 3 13 xo4q figs-hendiadys πονηροὶ…ἄνθρωποι καὶ γόητες 1 evil men and impostors This is probably a hendiadys, and the **evil men and impostors** are not two groups of people, but one group of people. Alternate translation: “evil people who only pretend to follow Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 2TI 3 13 s7f2 γόητες 1 impostors The term **impostors** refers here to a person who wants other people to think he is a true Christian when he is not. Alternate translation: “people who are pretending to be believers” -2TI 3 13 imc8 figs-metaphor προκόψουσιν ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον 1 will advance unto the worse Paul speaks figuratively of evil people and their character as something that moves forward physically, making gradual progress in a direction. Alternate translation: “will become worse and worse” or “will become even more evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 3 13 imc8 figs-metaphor προκόψουσιν ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον 1 will advance unto the worse Paul speaks of evil people and their character as something that moves forward physically, making gradual progress in a direction. Alternate translation: “will become worse and worse” or “will become even more evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 13 p095 figs-idiom ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον 1 unto the worse This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “worse and worse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 3 13 eyx5 figs-metaphor πλανῶντες καὶ πλανώμενοι 1 leading astray and being led astray The expression **leading astray** uses the image of physically taking a person to a place that he didn’t think he was going to. This is a figurative reference to persuading someone to believe something that is not true. Alternate translation: “teaching lies and believing lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 13 p096 figs-activepassive πλανῶντες καὶ πλανώμενοι 1 leading astray and being led astray If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “teaching lies and believing lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -277,10 +277,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 4 1 cb15 figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 before God and Christ Jesus Here the word **before** means “in front of,” that is, “in the presence of.” The implication is that God and Christ Jesus will witness and approve this command or oath. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God and Christ Jesus” or “with God and Christ Jesus as the witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 4 1 u32g figs-merism ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 the living and the dead Paul refers to **the living** and **the dead** together to mean all people, whether they are alive at the time of judgment or have died. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 2TI 4 1 p100 figs-nominaladj ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 the living and the dead The terms **living** and **dead** are adjectives that Paul is using as nouns to refer to groups of people. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can translate these terms with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -2TI 4 1 lwt2 figs-metonymy καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 and by his appearing and his kingdom Paul refers figuratively to Christ’s return by association to the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns, and he refers figuratively to Christ’s rule as king by association to the kingdom that he will rule. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “and on Christ’s return and on his rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 4 1 lwt2 figs-metonymy καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 and by his appearing and his kingdom Paul refers to Christ’s return by association to the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns, and he refers to Christ’s rule as king by association to the kingdom that he will rule. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “and on Christ’s return and on his rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 4 1 anqh καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 and by his appearing and his kingdom This can be understood in two different ways, depending on if Paul is placing Timothy under an oath or giving Timothy a command. (1) If Paul is placing Timothy under an oath, then he is saying that these are the things that Timothy would be denying if he fails to fulfill the oath. Alternate translation: “with an oath as strong as your desire for Christ’s return and for his rule as king” (2) If Paul is introducing a command in this verse, then Paul is appealing to these things to strengthen his command. Alternate translation: “and as surely as Christ will return and rule as king” -2TI 4 2 j2z7 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Paul is using the term **word** to refer figuratively to the whole message about Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the Gospel message” or “the Good News” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2TI 4 2 zzh4 figs-merism εὐκαίρως, ἀκαίρως 1 opportunely, inopportunely Paul means that Timothy should be ready to preach about Jesus when it seems like a good time to do so and also when it does not seem like a good time. He is using the two types of occasions together figuratively to indicate all occasions. Alternate translation: “when it is convenient and when it is not convenient” or “at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +2TI 4 2 j2z7 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Paul is using the term **word** to refer to the whole message about Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the Gospel message” or “the Good News” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 4 2 zzh4 figs-merism εὐκαίρως, ἀκαίρως 1 opportunely, inopportunely Paul means that Timothy should be ready to preach about Jesus when it seems like a good time to do so and also when it does not seem like a good time. He is using the two types of occasions together to indicate all occasions. Alternate translation: “when it is convenient and when it is not convenient” or “at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 2TI 4 2 g7ax figs-explicit ἔλεγξον 1 reprove The command to **reprove** implies that the action is directed toward people who have done something wrong and are in need of correction. Alternate translation: “correct those who have sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 4 2 p101 ἐπιτίμησον 1 rebuke The word **rebuke** involves telling someone that they have done something wrong and warning them not to do it again. Alternate translation: “tell them not to sin” 2TI 4 2 p102 figs-hendiadys ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 with all patience and teaching Here, **patience and teaching** is a hendiadys, with **patience** modifying **teaching**. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -289,12 +289,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 4 3 jv7a ἔσται…καιρὸς ὅτε 1 there will be a time when Alternate translation: “the time will come when” 2TI 4 3 u2cc οὐκ ἀνέξονται 1 they will not endure Alternate translation: “they will no longer listen patiently to” 2TI 4 3 ilx7 figs-explicit οὐκ ἀνέξονται 1 they will not endure The context indicates that **they** means people who are a part of the community of believers. Alternate translation: “some believers will no longer listen patiently to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 4 3 fyl3 figs-metonymy τῆς ὑγιαινούσης διδασκαλίας 1 healthy teaching The expression **healthy teaching** figuratively means “correct teaching” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that correct teaching was reasonable. Alternate translation: “correct teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 4 3 fyl3 figs-metonymy τῆς ὑγιαινούσης διδασκαλίας 1 healthy teaching The expression **healthy teaching** means “correct teaching” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that correct teaching was reasonable. Alternate translation: “correct teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 4 3 e5t2 figs-metaphor κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας, ἑαυτοῖς ἐπισωρεύσουσιν διδασκάλους 1 they will heap up for themselves teachers according to their own desires Paul speaks of how people will obtain many teachers as if they were putting them into a heap or pile. They will want many teachers, but not value these teachers for how they live godly lives or how accurately they teach. Alternate translation: “they will gather many teachers for themselves who will teach what they want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 3 s375 figs-idiom κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν 1 their ear itching Paul speaks of people badly wanting to hear something as if their ears itched and could only be relieved if they found many teachers who would tell them what they wanted to hear. Alternate translation: “because they want to hear it so badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2TI 4 3 p104 figs-metonymy κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν 1 their ear itching Paul uses the **ear** figuratively to mean hearing. Alternate translation: “because they want to hear it so badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 4 3 p104 figs-metonymy κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν 1 their ear itching Paul uses the **ear** to mean hearing. Alternate translation: “because they want to hear it so badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 4 4 rh2i figs-metaphor ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν 1 will both turn their ear away from the truth Paul speaks about people no longer paying attention as if they were physically turning their ears away so that they could not hear. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 4 4 p105 figs-metonymy ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν 1 will both turn their ear away from the truth Paul uses the **ear** figuratively to mean listening. Listening, in turn, figuratively means paying attention. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 4 4 p105 figs-metonymy ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν 1 will both turn their ear away from the truth Paul uses the **ear** to mean listening. Listening, in turn, means paying attention. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 4 4 xrv7 figs-metaphor ἐπὶ…τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 be turned aside to myths Paul speaks about people starting to pay attention to myths as if someone were getting them to wander off in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 4 p106 figs-activepassive ἐπὶ…τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 be turned aside to myths If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 4 5 ehz7 figs-metaphor νῆφε 1 be sober Paul wants his readers to think correctly about everything, and so he speaks as if he wanted them to be sober rather than drunk. Alternate translation: “think clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -303,18 +303,18 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 4 6 sh23 figs-metaphor ἐγὼ…ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 I am already being poured out Paul speaks of himself as if he were wine in a cup that was being poured out as a sacrifice to God. Alternate translation: “the sacrifice of my life to God will soon be complete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 6 p108 figs-activepassive ἐγὼ…ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 I am already being poured out If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “My life will soon end as a sacrifice to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 4 6 fb7l figs-euphemism ὁ καιρὸς τῆς ἀναλύσεώς μου ἐφέστηκεν 1 the time of my departure is here Paul refers to his death as a **departure**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. Alternate translation: “soon I will die and leave this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -2TI 4 7 d9ts figs-metaphor τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα ἠγώνισμαι 1 I have fought the good fight Paul speaks of himself figuratively as if he has been competing in an athletic contest. Here, **good** could mean: (1) the kind of effort Paul has made. Alternate translation: “I have done my best” (2) Paul has pursued a worthwhile endeavor. Alternate translation: “I have worked hard for what really matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 4 7 d9ts figs-metaphor τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα ἠγώνισμαι 1 I have fought the good fight Paul speaks of himself as if he has been competing in an athletic contest. Here, **good** could mean: (1) the kind of effort Paul has made. Alternate translation: “I have done my best” (2) Paul has pursued a worthwhile endeavor. Alternate translation: “I have worked hard for what really matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 7 kq83 figs-metaphor τὸν δρόμον τετέλεκα 1 I have finished the race Paul speaks of his life of service to God as if he had been running a race on foot. Alternate translation: “I have completed what I needed to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 7 vk2p figs-metaphor τὴν πίστιν τετήρηκα 1 I have kept the faith Paul speaks of **the faith**, by which he means his trust in Christ and his obedience to God, as if they were valuable objects that he has kept safe in his possession. This could mean: (1) Paul was faithful to do what God told him to do. Alternate translation: “I have remained faithful in doing my ministry” (2) Paul was faithful to teach the truth. Alternate translation: “I have preserved the teachings from any error” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 8 ujg5 figs-activepassive ἀπόκειταί μοι ὁ τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 the crown of righteousness has been reserved for me If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God has reserved the crown of righteousness for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 4 8 hg8i figs-metaphor τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 the crown of righteousness Here, the **crown** could: (1) figuratively represent the reward that God gives to people who have lived the right way. Alternate translation: “the reward for the righteous” (2) represent righteousness itself. Just as the judge of a race gives a crown to the winner, when Paul finishes his life, God will declare that Paul is righteous. Alternate translation: “the reward that is righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 4 8 hg8i figs-metaphor τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 the crown of righteousness Here, the **crown** could: (1) represent the reward that God gives to people who have lived the right way. Alternate translation: “the reward for the righteous” (2) represent righteousness itself. Just as the judge of a race gives a crown to the winner, when Paul finishes his life, God will declare that Paul is righteous. Alternate translation: “the reward that is righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 8 dwn6 translate-unknown στέφανος 1 crown See how you translated **crown** in [2:5](../02/05.md). The **crown** that Paul is using as an illustration of the future award from God was a wreath made of laurel tree leaves that was given to winners of athletic contests. You can use a word in your language that would refer to a prize for winning a contest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 2TI 4 8 n3k8 figs-explicit ἐν, ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on that day As in [1:12](../01/12.md), this refers to the **day** when Jesus returns to judge people. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 4 8 uh88 τοῖς ἠγαπηκόσι τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 those who have loved his appearing Alternate translation: “those who are looking forward to his return” -2TI 4 8 p109 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 his appearing See how you translated **his appearing** in [4:1](../04/01.md). Paul is referring figuratively to Christ’s return by association with the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns. Alternate translation: “his return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 4 8 p109 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 his appearing See how you translated **his appearing** in [4:1](../04/01.md). Paul is referring to Christ’s return by association with the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns. Alternate translation: “his return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 4 9 t8b7 σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν…ταχέως 1 come … quickly Alternate translation: “come … as soon as possible” 2TI 4 10 e4xx translate-names Δημᾶς…Κρήσκης…Τίτος 1 Demas … Crescens … Titus These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 4 10 ji2l figs-metonymy τὸν νῦν αἰῶνα 1 the present age The expression **the present age** refers to worldly things as opposed to the things of God. Paul refers to these worldly things figuratively by association with the present time when people generally desire them, as opposed to the future time when the things of God will be established throughout the earth. Alternate translation: “the temporary comforts of this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 4 10 ji2l figs-metonymy τὸν νῦν αἰῶνα 1 the present age The expression **the present age** refers to worldly things as opposed to the things of God. Paul refers to these worldly things by association with the present time when people generally desire them, as opposed to the future time when the things of God will be established throughout the earth. Alternate translation: “the temporary comforts of this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 4 10 u2qb figs-ellipsis Κρήσκης εἰς Γαλατίαν, Τίτος εἰς Δαλματίαν 1 Crescens to Galatia, Titus to Dalmatia Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. He means that like Demas, Crescens and Titus have left him. However, he is probably not saying that they did this because they also “loved this present age” like Demas. It is more likely that they are traveling to help the churches. Alternate translation: “Crescens has left me and gone to Galatia, and Titus has left me and gone to Dalmatia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2TI 4 10 gs61 translate-names Γαλατίαν…Δαλματίαν 1 Galatia … Dalmatia This are the names of parts of the Roman empire. **Galatia** is an official Roman province and **Dalmatia** is an area in the southern part of the province of Illyricum. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 11 p110 translate-names Λουκᾶς…Μᾶρκον 1 Luke … Mark These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -329,7 +329,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 4 13 e395 translate-unknown μάλιστα τὰς μεμβράνας 1 especially the parchments The term **parchments** may refer to a specific type of scroll. Alternate translation: “especially those made from animal skins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 2TI 4 14 un4v translate-unknown Ἀλέξανδρος ὁ χαλκεὺς 1 Alexander the coppersmith The term **coppersmith** refers to a person who worked with things made of copper and other metals. Alternate translation: “Alexander, who works with metal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 2TI 4 14 kv94 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρος 1 Alexander This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 4 14 wbx4 figs-metaphor ἀποδώσει αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ 1 The Lord will repay him according to his deeds Paul speaks figuratively of punishment as if it were repayment. Alternate translation: “the Lord will give him the right punishment for what he has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 4 14 wbx4 figs-metaphor ἀποδώσει αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ 1 The Lord will repay him according to his deeds Paul speaks of punishment as if it were repayment. Alternate translation: “the Lord will give him the right punishment for what he has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 15 i4aj figs-metonymy ἀντέστη τοῖς ἡμετέροις λόγοις 1 he … opposed our words The term **words** refers to the message that Paul and Timothy and their co-workers teach. Alternate translation: “he … opposed the message that we teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 4 16 v847 ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ μου ἀπολογίᾳ 1 At my first defense Paul is referring to the opening session of his trial. By writing **first**, he is likely indicating that he will have to appear in court again. Alternate translation: “At the opening session of my trial” or “When I first appeared in court and explained my actions” 2TI 4 16 f2c3 οὐδείς μοι παρεγένετο 1 no one appeared with me Paul explains to Timothy that he had to go to court alone, without any supporters. Alternate translation: “no one testified on my behalf” @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 4 17 t1fw figs-metaphor ὁ…Κύριός μοι παρέστη 1 the Lord stood with me Paul is speaking as if the Lord had physically stood with him. Alternate translation: “the Lord helped me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 17 y69m figs-activepassive ἵνα δι’ ἐμοῦ τὸ κήρυγμα πληροφορηθῇ 1 so that through me, the proclamation might be fully carried out If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. This could mean: (1) at his trial, Paul was able to explain the entire message God had given him to proclaim. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to proclaim all of the Lord’s message” (2) Paul was able to continue proclaiming God’s message right through to this time when he expected to lose his life. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to continue proclaiming the Lord’s message right to the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 4 17 p113 figs-hyperbole καὶ ἀκούσωσιν πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 and all the Gentiles might hear Here, **all** could be: (1) a figurative generalization. Alternate translation: “so that as many Gentiles as possible could hear it” (2) a reference to all the Gentiles in the court. Alternate translation: “so that all the Gentiles who were there might hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -2TI 4 17 gsr8 figs-metaphor ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 I was rescued out of the mouth of the lion Paul speaks figuratively as if he had been in danger of being killed by a lion at his court appearance. He could mean the physical danger of being sentenced to execution, or the spiritual danger of being tempted not to speak boldly for Jesus, or both. It would probably be best to leave both possibilities open in your translation. Alternate translation: “I was rescued from great danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 4 17 gsr8 figs-metaphor ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 I was rescued out of the mouth of the lion Paul speaks as if he had been in danger of being killed by a lion at his court appearance. He could mean the physical danger of being sentenced to execution, or the spiritual danger of being tempted not to speak boldly for Jesus, or both. It would probably be best to leave both possibilities open in your translation. Alternate translation: “I was rescued from great danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 17 p114 figs-activepassive ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 I was rescued out of the mouth of the lion If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God rescued me from great danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 4 18 p115 figs-idiom εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων 1 to the ages of the ages This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “forever and ever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 4 19 p116 translate-names Πρίσκαν 1 Priscilla This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -354,6 +354,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 4 21 er77 translate-names Κλαυδία 1 Claudia This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 21 mk26 figs-gendernotations οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers The word **brothers** means all believers, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all the believers here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2TI 4 22 tx26 figs-you ὁ Κύριος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματός σου 1 The Lord be with your spirit Paul ends his letter with a blessing for Timothy. Here, **you** is singular and refers to Timothy. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord makes your spirit strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -2TI 4 22 p119 figs-synecdoche ὁ Κύριος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματός σου 1 The Lord be with your spirit Paul figuratively describes Timothy as a whole person by reference to his **spirit**, perhaps because he is wishing particularly for Timothy to receive spiritual strengthening. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord makes you strong” or “I pray that the Lord will strengthen you spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +2TI 4 22 p119 figs-synecdoche ὁ Κύριος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματός σου 1 The Lord be with your spirit Paul describes Timothy as a whole person by reference to his **spirit**, perhaps because he is wishing particularly for Timothy to receive spiritual strengthening. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord makes you strong” or “I pray that the Lord will strengthen you spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 2TI 4 22 k85y figs-you ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 Grace be with you Paul ends his letter with a second blessing. The **you** here is plural and refers to all of the believers who are with Timothy. Alternate translation: “May grace be with all of you there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 2TI 4 22 p120 ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 Grace be with you If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly who Paul wishes will make this happen. Alternate translation: “May God give grace to all of you” diff --git a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv index d2a1cd1c4d..7c3852e94b 100644 --- a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo PHM front intro sz2w 0 # Introduction to Philemon

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Philemon

1. Paul greets Philemon (1:1-3)
2. Paul makes requests of Philemon about Onesimus (1:4-21)
3. Conclusion (1:22-25)

### Who wrote the Book of Philemon?

Paul wrote Philemon. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Saul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul was in a prison when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of Philemon about?

Paul wrote this letter to a man named Philemon. Philemon was a believer in Jesus who lived in the city of Colossae. He owned a slave named Onesimus. Onesimus had run away from Philemon and possibly stole something from him as well. Onesimus went to Rome and visited Paul in prison there, where Paul brought Onesimus to Jesus.

Paul told Philemon that he was sending Onesimus back to him. Philemon had the right to execute Onesimus according to Roman law. But Paul said that Philemon should accept Onesimus back as a Christian brother. He even suggested that Philemon should allow Onesimus to come back to Paul and help him in prison.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philemon.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Philemon” or “The Letter Paul wrote to Philemon.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Does this letter approve the practice of slavery?

Paul sent Onesimus back to his former master. But that did not mean that Paul thought that slavery was an acceptable practice. Instead, Paul was more concerned with people being reconciled to each other and that they serve God in whatever situation they were in. It is important to note that in the culture of the time, people became slaves for various reasons and it was not considered a permanent state.

### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Philemon. The two exceptions to this are 1:22 and 1:25. There “you” refers to Philemon and the believers that met at his house. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

Three times Paul identifies himself as the author of this letter (in verses 1, 9, and 19). Evidently Timothy was with him and may have written down the words as Paul said them. All instances of “I,” “me,” and “my” refer to Paul. Philemon is the main person to whom this letter is written. All instances of “you” and “your” refer to him and are singular unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) PHM 1 1 ne8k figs-123person Παῦλος 1 Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Use that here. Alternate translations: “From me, Paul” or “I, Paul” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person) PHM 1 1 cgs4 δέσμιος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 a prisoner of Christ Jesus Paul was in prison because people in authority did not want him to preach about Jesus. They put him there in order to stop him and to punish him. This does not mean that Jesus had put Paul in prison. Alternate translation: “a prisoner for the sake of Christ Jesus” -PHM 1 1 sv3p ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 our brother Paul is using the term **brother** figuratively to mean someone who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “our fellow Christian” or “our companion in the faith” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +PHM 1 1 sv3p ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 our brother Paul is using the term **brother** to mean someone who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “our fellow Christian” or “our companion in the faith” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) PHM 1 1 y9zu figs-exclusive ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Here, the word **our** is not in the original, but was necessary for English, which requires that a relationship word indicate who the person is related to. In this case, **our** would be inclusive, relating Timothy to Paul and the readers as a brother in Christ. If your language requires this, you could do the same. If not, you could follow the original wording, which says, “the brother.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) PHM 1 1 gvmy translate-names Φιλήμονι 1 This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) PHM 1 1 q84z figs-explicit Φιλήμονι 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could include the information that this is a letter in which Paul is speaking directly to Philemon, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ PHM 1 1 r3l9 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our The word **our** here refers to Pau PHM 1 1 ww3l καὶ συνεργῷ ἡμῶν 1 and our fellow worker If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly how Philemon worked with Paul. Alternate translation: “who, like us, works to spread the gospel” or “who works as we do to serve Jesus” PHM 1 2 b37l translate-names Ἀπφίᾳ 1 This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) PHM 1 2 bb1s figs-exclusive τῇ ἀδελφῇ 1 Here, the word **our** is not in the original, but was necessary for English, which requires that a relationship word indicate who the person is related to. In this case, **our** would be inclusive, relating Apphia to Paul and the readers as a sister in Christ. If your language requires this, you could do the same. If not, you could do the same as the original, which says, “the sister.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -PHM 1 2 hhpc figs-metaphor τῇ ἀδελφῇ 1 Paul is using the term **sister** figuratively to mean a woman who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “our fellow Christian” or “our spiritual sister” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +PHM 1 2 hhpc figs-metaphor τῇ ἀδελφῇ 1 Paul is using the term **sister** to mean a woman who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “our fellow Christian” or “our spiritual sister” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) PHM 1 2 e8su figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our The word **our** here refers to Paul and those with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) PHM 1 2 kyzo Ἀπφίᾳ…Ἀρχίππῳ…τῇ…ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 The letter is predominantly addressed to Philemon. It could be misleading to suggest Paul is writing to **Apphia**, **Archippus**, and **the church** in Philemon’s house, on the same level as he is writing to Philemon. PHM 1 2 sq44 translate-names Ἀρχίππῳ 1 Archippus This is the name of a man in the church with Philemon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ PHM 1 6 n25e figs-explicit εἰς Χριστόν 1 in Christ If it would be hel PHM 1 7 vyc7 figs-abstractnouns χαρὰν γὰρ πολλὴν ἔσχον καὶ παράκλησιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **joy** and **comfort**behind them with adjectives. Alternate translation: “For you made me very joyful and comforted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHM 1 7 xlp6 figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ ἀγάπῃ σου 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **love** with a verb. Alternate translation: “because you love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHM 1 7 shpv figs-activepassive τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων ἀναπέπαυται διὰ σοῦ 1 the inward parts of the saints are being refreshed by you If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you have refreshed the inward parts of the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -PHM 1 7 aq4g figs-metonymy τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων 1 the inward parts of the saints Here, **inward parts** figuratively refers to a person’s emotions or inner being. Use the figure that is normal in your language for this, such as “hearts” or “livers,” or give the plain meaning. Alternate translation: “the thoughts and feelings of the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -PHM 1 7 z0ne figs-metaphor τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων ἀναπέπαυται διὰ σοῦ 1 Here, **being refreshed** figuratively refers to the feeling of encouragement or relief. Alternate translation: “you have encouraged the saints” or “you have helped the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHM 1 7 aq4g figs-metonymy τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων 1 the inward parts of the saints Here, **inward parts** refers to a person’s emotions or inner being. Use the figure that is normal in your language for this, such as “hearts” or “livers,” or give the plain meaning. Alternate translation: “the thoughts and feelings of the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +PHM 1 7 z0ne figs-metaphor τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων ἀναπέπαυται διὰ σοῦ 1 Here, **being refreshed** refers to the feeling of encouragement or relief. Alternate translation: “you have encouraged the saints” or “you have helped the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHM 1 7 m5ip figs-metaphor σοῦ, ἀδελφέ 1 you, brother Paul called Philemon **brother** because they were both believers, and he wanted to emphasize their friendship. Alternate translation: “you, dear brother” or “you, dear friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHM 1 8 ayy1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul begins his plea and the reason for his letter. PHM 1 8 fd84 πολλὴν ἐν Χριστῷ παρρησίαν 1 all boldness in Christ This could mean: (1) “all authority because of Christ” (2) “all courage because of Christ.” diff --git a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv index 8d338f22ef..8f74743e45 100644 --- a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv +++ b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv @@ -62,10 +62,10 @@ HEB 1 8 jlql πρὸς…τὸν Υἱόν 1 Here, **with regard to** could in HEB 1 8 b155 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱόν 1 Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) HEB 1 8 x9uc figs-quotations πρὸς…τὸν Υἱόν, ὁ θρόνος σου, ὁ Θεὸς, εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ αἰῶνος, καὶ ἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος ῥάβδος τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ. 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the next verse as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “to the Son he says that he is God and that his throne is forever and ever, and the scepter of righteousness is the scepter of his kingdom.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 1 8 jqi7 figs-yousingular σου 1 Here, **Your** refers to one person, the **Son**. Therefore, **Your** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -HEB 1 8 ewm4 figs-metonymy ὁ θρόνος σου 1 Your throne, God, is forever and ever Here, **throne** figuratively refers to what the person on the **throne** does, which is to rule. If your readers would misunderstand **throne**, you could express the idea by referring to “rule” or “reign.” Alternate translation: “Your reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 1 8 ewm4 figs-metonymy ὁ θρόνος σου 1 Your throne, God, is forever and ever Here, **throne** refers to what the person on the **throne** does, which is to rule. If your readers would misunderstand **throne**, you could express the idea by referring to “rule” or “reign.” Alternate translation: “Your reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 1 8 qi4x figs-exclamations ὁ Θεὸς 1 Here, **O God** directly addresses and names who “you” in the quote is. **O** is an older way to indicate direct address in English. Use a form in your language that indicates direct address. Alternate translation: “God” or “you who are God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) HEB 1 8 eg09 figs-idiom εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ αἰῶνος 1 Here, **forever {and} ever** indicates that something lasts forever or does not come to an end. If your readers would misunderstand this idiom, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “lasts forever” or “never ends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 1 8 k4cf figs-metonymy ἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος ῥάβδος τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ 1 The scepter of your kingdom is the scepter of justice Here, **scepter** figuratively refers to how the person who has the **scepter** rules. If your readers would misunderstand **scepter**, you could express the idea by referring to how the person “rules” or “reigns.” Alternate translation: “with righteousness is how he rules his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 1 8 k4cf figs-metonymy ἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος ῥάβδος τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ 1 The scepter of your kingdom is the scepter of justice Here, **scepter** refers to how the person who has the **scepter** rules. If your readers would misunderstand **scepter**, you could express the idea by referring to how the person “rules” or “reigns.” Alternate translation: “with righteousness is how he rules his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 1 8 iprl figs-abstractnouns ἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous.” Alternate translation: “a righteous scepter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 1 8 vl1n figs-123person αὐτοῦ 1 Here the author refers to the **Son** in the third person instead of in the second person. He is still referring to the same person. If your readers would misunderstand **his** here, you could continue to use **you** instead. Alternate translation: “your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) HEB 1 8 b7f0 translate-textvariants αὐτοῦ 1 Most later manuscripts have “your” here instead of **his**. However, the earliest manuscripts have **his**, and later scribes probably changed it to “your” to be consistent with the rest of the quote. Unless there is a good reason not to use **his**, you should follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ HEB 1 9 p5va figs-yousingular ἠγάπησας…ἐμίσησας…σε…σ HEB 1 9 ollt figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην…ἀνομίαν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **righteousness** and **lawlessness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective or adverbs. Alternate translation: “what is righteous … what is lawless” or “what people do righteously … what people do lawlessly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 1 9 lu3m figs-doublet ἔχρισέν…ὁ Θεός, ὁ Θεός σου 1 Here the quotation repeats **God** in order to emphasize that **God** is the one who “anoints” and also to identify him as **your God**, which means that he is the **God** whom **you** serve. If your readers would misunderstand why the quotation repeats **God**, you could express the idea by using **God** once and emphasize the phrase in another way. Alternate translation: “the God whom you serve has anointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 1 9 eyqe figs-123person ἔχρισέν…ὁ Θεός, ὁ Θεός σου 1 Since **God** is the one speaking this quotation, he refers to himself in the third person here. If your readers would misunderstand that God is speaking about himself, you could use the first person here to clarify that this is not another **God**. Alternate translation: “I, who am your God, have anointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -HEB 1 9 t9yw figs-metaphor ἔχρισέν σε…ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως 1 has anointed you with the oil of joy more than your companions In the author’s culture, people were often **anointed** with **oil** when they received special authority or power, including when a person became king. Here the author applies this “anointing” to the Son. In this situation, it figuratively refers to how God has exalted the Son and given him power and authority. The phrase **oil of exultation** refers to how the “anointing” leads to or results in **exultation**. If your readers would misunderstand the anointing language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “has honored and empowered you so that you exult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 1 9 t9yw figs-metaphor ἔχρισέν σε…ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως 1 has anointed you with the oil of joy more than your companions In the author’s culture, people were often **anointed** with **oil** when they received special authority or power, including when a person became king. Here the author applies this “anointing” to the Son. In this situation, it refers to how God has exalted the Son and given him power and authority. The phrase **oil of exultation** refers to how the “anointing” leads to or results in **exultation**. If your readers would misunderstand the anointing language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “has honored and empowered you so that you exult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 1 9 w1l1 figs-possession ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως 1 Here the quotation uses the possessive form to show that the **oil** leads to **exultation**. If your language does not use the possessive form for that idea, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that indicates result. Alternate translation: “with the oil that leads to exultation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 1 9 h3ne figs-abstractnouns ἀγαλλιάσεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **exultation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “exult” or “rejoice.” Alternate translation: “that makes you rejoice” or “which causes you to exult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 1 9 akn8 figs-extrainfo τοὺς μετόχους σου 1 Here the author does not clarify who the **companions** are. In the context of the quotation, they probably referred to other people in the royal family who did not become king. In the context of Hebrews, they probably refer to those who believe in Jesus. God saves them, but he does not seat them at his right hand like he does with Jesus. However, neither the quotation nor the author of Hebrews state explicitly who the **companions** are, so you should leave their identify unspecified if possible. Alternate translation: “those who are with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ HEB 1 10 tmu5 figs-idiom κατ’ ἀρχάς 1 In the beginning Here, **accord HEB 1 10 klk9 figs-exclamations Κύριε 1 Here, **O Lord** directly addresses and names who **you** in the quote is. **O** is an older way to indicate direct address in English. Use a form in your language that indicates direct address. Alternate translation: “Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) HEB 1 10 j64k figs-metaphor τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας 1 you laid the earth’s foundation Here the quotation refers to **the earth** as if it were a building that was set on a “foundation.” The **Lord** is the one who put **the earth** on its foundation, or **founded** it. The author of the quotations speaks in this way in order to show that the **Lord** is the one who created and sustains **the earth**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “perfectly set up the earth” or “made the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 1 10 k199 figs-abstractnouns ἔργα τῶν χειρῶν σού 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “make” or “do.” Alternate translation: “what your hands made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 1 10 r19v figs-metonymy τῶν χειρῶν σού 1 The heavens are the work of your hands Here, **hands** figuratively refer to the power and action that a person has to do **works**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “of your power” or “that you powerfully did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 1 10 r19v figs-metonymy τῶν χειρῶν σού 1 The heavens are the work of your hands Here, **hands** refer to the power and action that a person has to do **works**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “of your power” or “that you powerfully did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 1 11 zugp figs-quotations αὐτοὶ ἀπολοῦνται, σὺ δὲ διαμένεις; καὶ πάντες ὡς ἱμάτιον παλαιωθήσονται, 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the previous and following verses as indirect quotes as well. Alternate translation: “They themselves will perish, but he himself will continue; and they will all wear out like a garment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 1 11 a6le writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ ἀπολοῦνται…πάντες…παλαιωθήσονται 1 They will perish Here, **They** and **they** refer to the “earth” and the “heavens” in [1:10](../01/10.md), which together refer to everything that God has made. If your readers would misunderstand **They** and **they**, you could clarify what they refer back to. Alternate translation: “Earth and heavens themselves will perish … they will all wear out” or “Every created thing itself will perish … every one of them will wear out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 1 11 fqk2 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ ἀπολοῦνται, σὺ δὲ διαμένεις 1 Here, the words translated **themselves** and **yourself** emphasize the contrast between “them” and “you.” Consider using a natural way to emphasize this contrast in your language. Alternate translation: “It is they who will perish, but it is you who will continue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ HEB 2 3 mrsy figs-explicit ἡμεῖς ἐκφευξόμεθα 1 Here the auth HEB 2 3 vond grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἡμεῖς ἐκφευξόμεθα τηλικαύτης ἀμελήσαντες σωτηρίας 1 Here, **having neglected** introduces a hypothetical possibility. The author is not claiming that he or his audience have **neglected** or will “neglect” the **salvation**. Instead, he is asking the question about what we would happen if he or his audience did “neglect” the **salvation**. If your readers would misunderstand that **having neglected** introduces a possibility, you could use a form that does introduce a possibility. Alternate translation: “will we escape if we neglect so great a salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) HEB 2 3 i2zv translate-unknown ἀμελήσαντες 1 ignore Here, **neglected** refers to ignoring or failing to pay attention to something. If your readers would misunderstand **neglected**, you could use a word or phrase that expresses the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “pay no attention to” or “consider unimportant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 2 3 gm6v figs-abstractnouns τηλικαύτης…σωτηρίας? ἥτις 1 This is salvation that was first announced by the Lord and confirmed to us by those who heard it If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “the amazing way in which God saves us? This way in which God saves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 2 3 dmsh figs-metonymy τηλικαύτης…σωτηρίας? ἥτις 1 Here, **salvation** figuratively refers to the “message” about **salvation**. The author makes this clear in the second half of the verse, when he refers to how the **salvation** is **spoken**. If your readers would misunderstand **salvation**, you could express the idea by referring to a “message” or “proclamation” about **salvation**. Alternate translation: “the proclamation about so great a salvation? Which proclamation about salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 2 3 dmsh figs-metonymy τηλικαύτης…σωτηρίας? ἥτις 1 Here, **salvation** refers to the “message” about **salvation**. The author makes this clear in the second half of the verse, when he refers to how the **salvation** is **spoken**. If your readers would misunderstand **salvation**, you could express the idea by referring to a “message” or “proclamation” about **salvation**. Alternate translation: “the proclamation about so great a salvation? Which proclamation about salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 2 3 dyn1 figs-activepassive ἀρχὴν λαβοῦσα, λαλεῖσθαι διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what was **chosen** and **spoken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “choosing” and “speaking.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did the “choosing” and **the Lord** did the “speaking.” Alternate translation: “God having chosen the Lord to speak it first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 2 3 le2l figs-idiom ἀρχὴν λαβοῦσα, λαλεῖσθαι 1 Here, **first having been chosen** identifies that something was the **first** or began some process. If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use a word or phrase that identifies that something begins a process or was the **first**. Alternate translation: “first spoken” or “which had its beginning when it was spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 2 3 fpvx figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ἀκουσάντων εἰς ἡμᾶς ἐβεβαιώθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what was **confirmed** rather than focusing on the people doing the “confirming.” Alternate translation: “those who heard confirmed to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ HEB 2 12 y2es writing-quotations λέγων 1 Here the author quotes from an im HEB 2 12 dtkn figs-quotations λέγων, ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄνομά σου τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου; ἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας ὑμνήσω σε 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “saying that he will proclaim your name to his brothers; he will sing to you in the midst of the assembly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 2 12 cou1 figs-parallelism ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄνομά σου τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου; ἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας ὑμνήσω σε 1 Here, the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If your readers would misunderstand the parallelism, and if this would not be good poetry in your culture, you could combine the two statements. The author of Hebrews particularly focuses on the word **brothers**, so be sure to include that phrase in your translation. Alternate translation: “I will sing praise to you in the midst of my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) HEB 2 12 kewm figs-yousingular σου…σε 1 Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, here **you** is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -HEB 2 12 e88p figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 I will proclaim your name to my brothers Here, **name** figuratively refers to what the person who has that **name** is like. If your readers would misunderstand **name**, you could express the idea by referring to what the person is like. Alternate translation: “who you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 2 12 e88p figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 I will proclaim your name to my brothers Here, **name** refers to what the person who has that **name** is like. If your readers would misunderstand **name**, you could express the idea by referring to what the person is like. Alternate translation: “who you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 2 12 yh0b figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου 1 Although **brothers** is masculine, the author of the quotation is using it to refer to all those who worship God, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to my brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 2 12 bui0 translate-kinship τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου 1 Just as in [2:11](../02/11.md), the author refers to believers as **brothers** of Jesus, which identifies believers as part of God’s family. This is an important idea in Hebrews, so preserve the language of kinship if possible. See how you translated **brothers** in [2:11](../02/11.md). Alternate translation: “to the people who are like my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) HEB 2 12 tn8n figs-explicit ἐκκλησίας 1 from inside the assembly Here, the audience would know that the **assembly** was a gathering to worship God. If your readers would not make this inference, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the gathering to glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ HEB 3 1 mnd4 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὁμολογίας ἡμῶν 1 of our HEB 3 2 m4dh writing-pronouns τῷ ποιήσαντι 1 Here, **the one who appointed** is God the Father. If your readers would not know who **the one who appointed** is, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “to God, who appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 3 2 my64 translate-names Μωϋσῆς 1 **Moses** is the name of a man. God had him lead the Israelites when he delivered them from being slaves in the land of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 3 2 u5qc figs-extrainfo ὡς καὶ Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 Here the author uses words that are very similar to the Greek translation of [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md). It is possible that he is thinking of that verse or directly referencing it. However, he does not introduce the words as a quotation or indicate that he is referring to another text. So, you should not include any quotation information in your translation. If you wish to refer to [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md), you could do so with a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -HEB 3 2 eqp7 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 in God’s house Here, **house** figuratively refers to a group of people, here the Israelites. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “among God’s tribe” or “in his clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 3 2 eqp7 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 in God’s house Here, **house** refers to a group of people, here the Israelites. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “among God’s tribe” or “in his clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 2 k4u8 writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **his** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand **his**, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 3 2 wnzn translate-textvariants τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 Instead of **his house**, many ancient manuscripts have the phrase “all his house.” This phrase is in the Old Testament story about **Moses** (see [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md)). So, it is possible that scribes added “all” to **his house** because they knew this passage. Unless there is a good reason to use “all his house,” you should use **his house**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) HEB 3 3 os46 translate-versebridge 0 To help your readers understand the author’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put the general principle about buildings and builders in a first sentence and the application of that general principle in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “For every house is built by someone, and the one building the house has greater honor than the house. According to that much, since God is the one who built all things, this one has been considered worthy of greater glory than Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) @@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ HEB 3 4 aya1 πᾶς…οἶκος 1 Here, just as in [3:3](../03/03.md), the HEB 3 4 f8n8 figs-metaphor ὁ…πάντα κατασκευάσας 1 the one who built everything Here the author speaks as if everything that God created were a “house” that God **built**. He speaks in this to connect God’s act of creation with the “house” and “building” language. Use the same word or phrase here that you used for **built** earlier in the verse. If necessary, you could express the idea with an analogy. Alternate translation: “the one who was like a builder when he created all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 5 c8wh figs-extrainfo Μωϋσῆς μὲν πιστὸς ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ, ὡς θεράπων 1 Here, just as in [3:2](../03/02.md), the author uses words that are very similar to the Greek translation of [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md). It is possible that he is thinking of that verse or directly referencing it. However, he does not introduce the words as a quotation or indicate that he is referring to another text. So, you should not include any quotation information in your translation. If you wish to refer to [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md), you could do so with a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) HEB 3 5 zjna translate-names Μωϋσῆς 1 **Moses** is the name of a man. God had him lead the Israelites when he delivered them from being slaves in the land of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -HEB 3 5 d57q figs-metaphor ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 in God’s entire house Here, **house** figuratively refers to a group of people, here the Israelites. See how you translated **house** in [Hebrews 3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “among God’s entire tribe” or “in his entire clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 3 5 d57q figs-metaphor ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 in God’s entire house Here, **house** refers to a group of people, here the Israelites. See how you translated **house** in [Hebrews 3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “among God’s entire tribe” or “in his entire clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 5 uz5d writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **his** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand **his**, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 3 5 m4xr figs-abstractnouns εἰς μαρτύριον τῶν 1 bearing witness about the things If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **testimony**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “testify” or “proclaim.” Alternate translation: “to testify to the things that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 3 5 u37w figs-explicit τῶν λαληθησομένων 1 Here the author does not clarify what exactly is **spoken**. He may be referring to what God the Father said about the Son in chapter 1, or he could be referring in general to the good news about Jesus. If your readers need to know what is **spoken**, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the good news that would be spoken in the future” or “of the things that would be spoken about Jesus in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ HEB 3 5 gt8c figs-activepassive λαληθησομένων 1 were to be spoken o HEB 3 6 nsfg figs-ellipsis Χριστὸς…ὡς Υἱὸς 1 Here the author omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete thought. He omits these words because he stated them in the previous verse (“was faithful”). If your language needs these words to make a complete thought, you could include them here. Alternate translation: “Christ was faithful as a Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) HEB 3 6 dgt5 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς 1 Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. See how you translated this word in [1:2](../01/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) HEB 3 6 pfrj figs-explicit ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **over his house** contrasts with how Moses was “in his entire house” (see [3:5](../03/05.md)). The phrase **over his house** indicates that the **Son** rules or is in charge of the **house**. If your readers would misunderstand the implications of **over his house**, you could make them explicit. Alternate translation: “in charge of his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 3 6 djm7 figs-metaphor ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς 1 in charge of God’s house Here, **house** figuratively refers to a group of people, here God’s people. See how you translated house in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “over his clan (whose clan we are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 3 6 djm7 figs-metaphor ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς 1 in charge of God’s house Here, **house** refers to a group of people, here God’s people. See how you translated house in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “over his clan (whose clan we are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 6 x89x writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ, οὗ 1 Here, **his* and **whose** refer to God. If your readers would misunderstand **his** and **whose**, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “God’s … whose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 3 6 u94p figs-infostructure οἶκον…οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς, ἐὰν τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος κατάσχωμεν. 1 This sentence transitions from what the author has said about God’s **house**, Jesus, and Moses to an exhortation to continue to **hold fast**. The ULT has connected the sentence to the preceding information but put it in parentheses to indicate that it is slightly disconnected. Consider a natural way to include a transition sentence in your language. Alternate translation: “house. We are his house if we hold fast to the confidence and the boasting of our hope.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 3 6 tlak grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν 1 Here the author uses the conditional form to show that “holding fast” leads to being God’s **house**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) @@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ HEB 3 18 l1gc figs-rquestion τίσιν…ὤμοσεν μὴ εἰσελεύσ HEB 3 18 q16u ὤμοσεν μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ 1 they would not enter his rest The author uses **they would not enter into his rest** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. See how you translated “If they will enter into my rest” in [3:11](../03/11.md). Alternate translation: “did he swear, ‘they will never enter into my rest,’” HEB 3 19 impp grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, **And** introduces a summary or conclusion for the argument, especially for what the author has said in [3:16–18](../03/16.md). If your readers would misunderstand **And**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a summary or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 3 19 henz figs-infostructure βλέπομεν ὅτι οὐκ ἠδυνήθησαν εἰσελθεῖν δι’ ἀπιστίαν 1 If your language would naturally put the reason before the result, you could rearrange the sentence. The author puts **because of unbelief** last in order to emphasize it, so use a form that emphasizes this phrase. Alternate translation: “we that it was because of unbelief that they were not able to enter”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -HEB 3 19 u2mo figs-metaphor βλέπομεν 1 Here the author uses **we see** figuratively to refer to knowing or understanding something. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “we learn” or “we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 3 19 u2mo figs-metaphor βλέπομεν 1 Here the author uses **we see** to refer to knowing or understanding something. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “we learn” or “we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 19 evf1 figs-explicit εἰσελθεῖν 1 Here the author uses **enter** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. Translate **enter** the same way that you did in [3:11](../03/11.md). If your readers would misunderstand that **enter** refers back to this quotation, you could make the reference more explicit. Alternate translation: “to enter into God’s rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 3 19 x18z figs-abstractnouns δι’ ἀπιστίαν 1 because of unbelief If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **unbelief**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “did not believe” or an adjective such as “unbelieving.” Alternate translation: “because they were unbelieving” or “because they refused to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 4 intro u72n 0 # Hebrews 4 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

3. Example of the wilderness generation (3:1–4:13)
* Exhortation: Strive to enter the rest! (3:7–4:11)
* Exhortation: The power of God’s word (4:12–13)
4. Summary statement (4:14–16)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [4:3–5](../04/03.md), [7](../04/07.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### God’s rest

The author continues to refer to “rest” in this chapter. This time, he also includes how God “rested” after he created everything. Continue to translate “rest” the way you did in chapter 3. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/rest]])

### “Today”

The quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “today.” Much like in the previous chapter, the author references “today” several times (see [4:7–8](../04/07.md)). In [4:7](../04/07.md), he refers to how we always call the current day “today.” This means that the “rest” is available “today,” or right now. In [4:8](../04/08.md), the author refers to “another day” that happens after Joshua led the Israelites into the promised land. This refers again to “today” from the Psalm quotation. In these verses, translate “today” with a word or phrase that someone would use for the current day or time, and translate “day” so that it is clear that it refers to “today.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/biblicaltimeday]])

### Joshua, David, and the audience

In [4:7–9](../04/07.md), the author makes an argument that is based on sequence in time. First, Joshua led the Israelites into the promised land. Many years later, God spoke through David that people could enter the rest “today.” Finally, the author quotes these words to his audience after Jesus died and rose again. The author’s point is that what Joshua led the Israelites into could not count as “rest” because David was still speaking about entering the “rest” many years later. The author argues that this means that the words about entering the rest still apply when he himself is writing this letter. When you translate these verses, make sure that your readers understand that the author is making an argument based on sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])

### Jesus the high priest

In [4:14–15](../04/14.md), much like in [2:17](../02/17.md), the author refers to Jesus as a “priest,” here specifically a “high priest.” This is an important theme in Hebrews. In much of the rest of the letter, the author argues that Jesus is a high priest who offers a sacrifice in the heavenly sanctuary. Here the author begins to develop that theme by showing that Jesus is a sympathetic and merciful high priest. Translate “high priest” like you did in [2:17](../02/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The word of God as a sword

In [4:12](../04/12.md), the author says that God’s word is “sharper than any two-edged sword,” and it can “pierce” and “divide” people’s joints and marrow and their souls and spirits. The author makes this comparison because he wants to show that God uses his “word” to discern and judge everything, even things that are very hard to know or understand. Just like a sharp sword can cut anything apart, even things that are securely fastened together, so God uses his “word” to get to the core of what every person is and thinks. If possible, preserve the comparison between God’s word and a sharp blade, since this is an important metaphor that appears in other biblical books. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Who “speaks” the quotations?

In [4:3–5](../04/03.md), [7](../04/07.md), the author refers to the person who “speaks” the quotations as “he.” Since the author identified the Holy Spirit as the one who “speaks” Psalm 95, it is likely that he is referring to the Holy Spirit again as the speaker of these quotations. However, it is also possible that the author means that God considered as a whole speaks these quotations, or perhaps the author is avoiding identifying the speaker. If possible, preserve the ambiguity by referring simply to “he” or an unnamed person. If necessary, you could make it more explicit that the “Holy Spirit” or “God” speaks these words. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])

### The logic of [4:3–7](../04/03.md)

In [4:3–7](../04/03.md), the author uses [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) to comment on [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md). This is a complicated argument, and it is likely that the author is making several points.

First (1), he could be identifying the “rest” as the result of God’s “works.” In other words, the “rest” is something that God finished and then enjoyed on the seventh day. The author uses [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) to show that the “rest” has been completed since God created the world. This means that the “rest” to which [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md) refers has been available since then. This explains why the author says that the “rest” remains for some to enter (see [4:6](../04/06.md)).

Second (2), he could be using what [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) says about “rest” to define what “rest” means in [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md). In the Psalm, the “rest” would have originally referred primarily to the promised land. However, the author uses how God “rested” on the seventh day to define the “rest” primarily as something that people do with God rather than as a place. This explains why the author defines “entering the rest” as “resting from works” (see [4:10](../04/10.md)).

Since the author does not include much explanation and instead quotes the two verses together, you should also put the two verses together without including much explanation. See the notes for specific translation decisions. The author gives some conclusions in [4:6–10](../04/06.md), so focus on translating these verses clearly. @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ HEB 4 11 rtj7 figs-metaphor ἐν…πέσῃ 1 will fall into the kind of disob HEB 4 11 eoso figs-possession τῷ αὐτῷ…ὑποδείγματι…τῆς ἀπειθείας 1 Here the author uses the possessive form to show that the **example** is the **disobedience**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. The idea is that the Israelite ancestors provided the **example** of **disobedience** that we should not follow. Alternate translation: “the same thing, which is disobedience” or “disobedience that is like that of the Israelite ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 4 11 uznd figs-abstractnouns τῷ αὐτῷ…ὑποδείγματι…τῆς ἀπειθείας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **disobedience**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “disobey.” Alternate translation: “disobeying in the same way that they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 4 12 iwtk grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **For** introduces a further reason for why we need to “be eager” ([4:11](../04/11.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the basis for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “We should do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -HEB 4 12 h5d2 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God is living Here, **word** figuratively represents what someone says in words. If your readers would misunderstand **word**, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of God” or “what God says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 4 12 h5d2 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God is living Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If your readers would misunderstand **word**, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of God” or “what God says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 4 12 hnc2 figs-possession ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the author uses a possessive to describe a **word** that: (1) **God** speaks. Alternate translation: “the word that God speaks” (2) is **God**. Alternate translation: “the divine Word” or “God the Word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 4 12 j9qy figs-personification ζῶν…καὶ ἐνεργὴς…διϊκνούμενος…καὶ κριτικὸς 1 living and active In these phrases, the author describes the **word of God** as if it were a person that was **living and active** and that could “pierce” and **judge** other people. He speaks in this way to show that God accomplishes these things through his **word**, that is, when he speaks. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea by making God the subject of these actions or by using analogy form. Alternate translation: “is from the living and active God … God uses it to pierce … God uses it to judge” or “is like a living and active person … piercing like a person pierces … and able, like a person, to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) HEB 4 12 g4tc figs-metaphor τομώτερος, ὑπὲρ πᾶσαν μάχαιραν δίστομον, καὶ διϊκνούμενος ἄχρι μερισμοῦ 1 sharper than any two-edged sword Here the author compares the **word of God** to a **sword** that has two edges. God’s word is even **sharper** than that kind of sword, which means it is even better at **piercing**. The author uses this figure of speech to show how good the **word of God** is at discerning and judging humans. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “is like a very sharp two-edged sword that pierces to the dividing” or “able to distinguish what is wrong from what is right, including even the dividing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ HEB 4 13 nx6n figs-activepassive οὐκ ἔστιν κτίσις ἀφανὴς HEB 4 13 f3h1 figs-metaphor πάντα…γυμνὰ καὶ τετραχηλισμένα 1 everything is bare and open Here the author speaks about **all {things}** as if they were a naked person whose body was **bare** for all to see. He also speaks of **all {things}** as if someone had pulled another person’s head back to “lay open” his or her neck. Both of these expressions indicate that God sees and knows everything about **all {things}**. If your readers would misunderstand either of these expressions, you could use comparable metaphors or express the ideas nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “all things are visible and revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 4 13 yk64 figs-doublet γυμνὰ καὶ τετραχηλισμένα 1 bare and open These two terms mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize that God sees and knows everything. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these ideas, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “are visible” or “are revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 4 13 sltw figs-activepassive τετραχηλισμένα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since the author is describing a characteristic of **all {things}**, avoid stating a subject here. It may be best to translate **laid open** with an adjective that has a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “open” or “visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 4 13 i9hh figs-metonymy τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 to the eyes of the one to whom we must give account Here, **eyes** figuratively refers to seeing or knowing. If your readers would misunderstand **eyes**, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “to the sight of him” or “for him to know, who is the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 4 13 i9hh figs-metonymy τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 to the eyes of the one to whom we must give account Here, **eyes** refers to seeing or knowing. If your readers would misunderstand **eyes**, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “to the sight of him” or “for him to know, who is the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 4 13 k8k0 figs-idiom πρὸς ὃν ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος 1 This phrase could mean: (1) that God is the one whom the author is speaking about to his audience. The **word** here would refer to the “words” that the author is speaking to his audience. Alternate translation: “about whom we are speaking” (2) that God is one whom the audience must relate to or deal with. Alternate translation: “with whom we have to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 4 14 iv8x grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, **Therefore** refers back to what the author already said about how Jesus is a **high priest** (see [2:17–3:1](../02/17.md)). It may refer especially to [3:1](../03/01.md), where the author stated that Jesus is “the high priest of our confession.” So, **Therefore** introduces how the author wants his audience to act, given that Jesus is a **great high priest**. If your readers would misunderstand **Therefore**, you could use a word or phrase that resumes a previous topic, or you could use a word or phrase that introduces the result or consequence of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of all that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 4 14 spfu grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, **having** introduces a reason for the exhortation to **firmly hold**. If your readers would misunderstand this relationship, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “since we have” or “because we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -487,14 +487,14 @@ HEB 4 15 fve3 χωρὶς ἁμαρτίας 1 he is without sin Alternate trans HEB 4 16 ujt6 grammar-connect-logic-result προσερχώμεθα οὖν 1 Here, **then** introduces an exhortation that is based [4:14–15](../04/14.md). If your readers would misunderstand **then**, you could use a word or phrase that does introduce an exhortation. Alternate translation: “Therefore, let us approach” or “Because of that, let us approach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 4 16 sy6y figs-go προσερχώμεθα οὖν μετὰ παρρησίας τῷ θρόνῳ τῆς χάριτος 1 Here, **approach** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author wants believers to **approach** God’s **throne** in heaven. This means that they enter into God’s presence. It does not mean that they enter into heaven to be right next to the **throne**. If your readers would misunderstand **approach**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someone’s presence. Alternate translation: “Let us then with confidence go before the throne of grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 4 16 h49r figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “boldly” or “confidently.” Alternate translation: “confidently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 4 16 aj1p figs-metonymy τῷ θρόνῳ 1 to the throne of grace Here, **throne** refers figuratively to the one sitting on the **throne**: God. If your readers would misunderstand **throne**, you could clarify that it refers to God on his **throne**. Alternate translation: “to God on his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 4 16 aj1p figs-metonymy τῷ θρόνῳ 1 to the throne of grace Here, **throne** refers to the one sitting on the **throne**: God. If your readers would misunderstand **throne**, you could clarify that it refers to God on his **throne**. Alternate translation: “to God on his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 4 16 s6vp figs-possession τῷ θρόνῳ τῆς χάριτος 1 Here the author uses the possessive form to describe how **grace** comes from God on the **throne**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “to throne from which grace comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 4 16 e6nb figs-abstractnouns τῷ θρόνῳ τῆς χάριτος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **grace**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “gracious” or an adverb such as “graciously.” Alternate translation: “to the gracious throne” or “to throne where God rules graciously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 4 16 py6d figs-abstractnouns λάβωμεν ἔλεος, καὶ χάριν εὕρωμεν, εἰς εὔκαιρον βοήθειαν 1 we may receive mercy and find grace to help in time of need If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **mercy**, **grace**, and **help**, you could express the idea by using verbs or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “God may be merciful and gracious to us to help us when we need it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 4 16 x3hv figs-doublet λάβωμεν ἔλεος, καὶ χάριν εὕρωμεν 1 The two phrases **receive mercy** and **find grace** mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize how God will act kindly and lovingly toward those who believe in Jesus. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “we may receive grace” or “we may receive favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 4 16 f149 figs-idiom χάριν εὕρωμεν 1 Here, **find grace** refers to receiving **grace** from someone. If your readers would misunderstand **find grace**, you could express the idea in a natural way in your language. Alternate translation: “grace” or “experience grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 4 16 n654 translate-unknown εὔκαιρον βοήθειαν 1 Here, **timely** refers to something that happens at just the right time. Here, it means that the **help** happens just when someone needs that **help**. If your readers would misunderstand **timely**, you could use a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “help at the right time” or “well-timed help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 5 intro b67j 0 # Hebrews 5 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: The Son becomes high priest (5:1–10)
* Exhortation: Make sure to persevere! (5:11–6:12)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [5:5–6](../05/05.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### High priest

In [5:1–4](../05/01.md), the author explains what it means to be a high priest: (1) he must offer things to God, (2) he must be sympathetic to others because he also experiences weakness, and (3) he must be appointed by God. The author then applies these qualifications and duties to Jesus ([5:5–10](../05/05.md)): (1) he was appointed by God, (2) he suffered like all humans do, and (3) he himself is the offering that brings eternal salvation. Make that your translation clearly draws connections what high priests experience and do and what Jesus has experienced and done. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])

### Melchizedek

In the entire Old Testament, only two passages mention Melchizedek: [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md) and [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). In this chapter, the author quotes from the Psalm, and in chapter 7 he will refer to Genesis. Melchizedek was a king and priest in the city of Salem. Abraham, the ancestor of the Israelites, met him and gave him a gift. Much later, the author of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md) writes how God appointed the king of Israel (David) to be a priest like Melchizedek. Since the author simply introduces Melchizedek here and saves his explanation for chapter 7, you also should simply refer to him here. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/melchizedek]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Metaphor with “milk” and “solid food”

In [5:12–14](../05/12.md), the author uses “milk” to refer figuratively to basic teachings about God and about what is right and wrong. He uses “solid food” to refer figuratively to the more complex teachings. Since “infants” are the ones who drink “milk” in the author’s culture, he refers to those who only know the basic teachings as “infants.” Those who know complex teachings are “mature” adults who eat “solid food.” If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, if possible use a figure of speech that contrasts between adults and little children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Jesus “learning obedience” and “being made perfect”

In [5:8–9](../05/08.md), the author states that Jesus “learned obedience” and was “made perfect.” These statements do not mean that Jesus failed to obey and sometimes sinned before this time. Instead, “learning obedience” refers to fully understanding or experiencing what obedience means, and being “made perfect” refers to “perfect” qualifications for a position or office. So, Jesus fully experienced what it means to obey God, and God made him a “perfect” fit for the office of high priest. Translate these phrases in such a way that your readers will not think that Jesus went from being disobedient and sinful to obedient and perfect. +HEB 5 intro b67j 0 # Hebrews 5 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: The Son becomes high priest (5:1–10)
* Exhortation: Make sure to persevere! (5:11–6:12)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [5:5–6](../05/05.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### High priest

In [5:1–4](../05/01.md), the author explains what it means to be a high priest: (1) he must offer things to God, (2) he must be sympathetic to others because he also experiences weakness, and (3) he must be appointed by God. The author then applies these qualifications and duties to Jesus ([5:5–10](../05/05.md)): (1) he was appointed by God, (2) he suffered like all humans do, and (3) he himself is the offering that brings eternal salvation. Make that your translation clearly draws connections what high priests experience and do and what Jesus has experienced and done. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])

### Melchizedek

In the entire Old Testament, only two passages mention Melchizedek: [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md) and [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). In this chapter, the author quotes from the Psalm, and in chapter 7 he will refer to Genesis. Melchizedek was a king and priest in the city of Salem. Abraham, the ancestor of the Israelites, met him and gave him a gift. Much later, the author of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md) writes how God appointed the king of Israel (David) to be a priest like Melchizedek. Since the author simply introduces Melchizedek here and saves his explanation for chapter 7, you also should simply refer to him here. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/melchizedek]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Metaphor with “milk” and “solid food”

In [5:12–14](../05/12.md), the author uses “milk” to refer to basic teachings about God and about what is right and wrong. He uses “solid food” to refer to the more complex teachings. Since “infants” are the ones who drink “milk” in the author’s culture, he refers to those who only know the basic teachings as “infants.” Those who know complex teachings are “mature” adults who eat “solid food.” If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, if possible use a figure of speech that contrasts between adults and little children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Jesus “learning obedience” and “being made perfect”

In [5:8–9](../05/08.md), the author states that Jesus “learned obedience” and was “made perfect.” These statements do not mean that Jesus failed to obey and sometimes sinned before this time. Instead, “learning obedience” refers to fully understanding or experiencing what obedience means, and being “made perfect” refers to “perfect” qualifications for a position or office. So, Jesus fully experienced what it means to obey God, and God made him a “perfect” fit for the office of high priest. Translate these phrases in such a way that your readers will not think that Jesus went from being disobedient and sinful to obedient and perfect. HEB 5 1 dn18 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **For** indicates that the author is going to explain more about high priests and about how Jesus is a high priest. It also signals that the author is beginning a new section. Use a word or phrase that indicates that a new section is beginning, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 5 1 whq1 figs-activepassive λαμβανόμενος 1 chosen from among people If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **taken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “taking.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God taking him” or “whom God takes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 5 1 u4gd figs-gendernotations ἐξ ἀνθρώπων…ὑπὲρ ἀνθρώπων 1 Although **men** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all the people in a group, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **men**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “from among humans on the behalf of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ HEB 5 3 e806 writing-pronouns αὐτὴν 1 Here, **this** refers back to “w HEB 5 3 q5xi figs-activepassive ὀφείλει 1 he also is required If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the priest, who is **obligated** rather than focusing on the person doing the “obligating.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God commands him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 5 3 sogb figs-infostructure ὀφείλει, καθὼς περὶ τοῦ λαοῦ οὕτως καὶ περὶ αὑτοῦ, προσφέρειν περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν 1 If the structure of this sentence would confuse your readers, you could rearrange the elements so that they come in a more natural order. The author is emphasizing the comparison between the people and the priest, so use a form that emphasizes those elements. Alternate translation: “he is obligated to offer sacrifices for sins, just as for the people, so also for himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 5 3 qlq6 figs-idiom προσφέρειν περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν 1 Here, **{sacrifices} for sins** refers to a specific category of sacrifice that dealt with people’s **sins**. You can read more about this kind of sacrifice in [Leviticus 16](../../lev/16/01.md). If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use a word or phrase that refers clearly to **sacrifices** that are meant to deal with **sins**. Alternate translation: “to offer sin offerings” or “to offer sacrifices to deal with sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 5 4 n2e1 figs-metonymy λαμβάνει τὴν τιμήν 1 takes this honor Here, the word **honor** figuratively refers to the position that gives the person **honor**. This position is that of high priest. If your readers would misunderstand **honor**, you could express the idea by referring to the position of high priest, if possible including the idea that this is an “honored” position. Alternate translation: “takes the honor of being a high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 5 4 n2e1 figs-metonymy λαμβάνει τὴν τιμήν 1 takes this honor Here, the word **honor** refers to the position that gives the person **honor**. This position is that of high priest. If your readers would misunderstand **honor**, you could express the idea by referring to the position of high priest, if possible including the idea that this is an “honored” position. Alternate translation: “takes the honor of being a high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 5 4 rvnj figs-abstractnouns τὴν τιμήν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **honorable**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “honorable.” Alternate translation: “becoming honorable in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 5 4 lswf figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but he receives this honor only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) HEB 5 4 cj9l grammar-connect-logic-result καλούμενος 1 Here, the phrase **being called** introduces something that could: (1) give the real reason why a person becomes a high priest. Alternate translation: “because he is called” (2) give the situation in which a person actually becomes a high priest. Alternate translation: “when he is called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ HEB 5 6 pb9k figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Because the quotation is referring to one HEB 5 6 ede5 translate-unknown κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ 1 after the manner of Melchizedek Here, the word **order** refers to requirements and duties that go along with a specific office or position. If someone serves **according to the order of** someone else, that means that he or she meets the same requirements and perform the same duties that that person did. If your readers would misunderstand **according to the order of**, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest” or “with a priesthood just like Melchizedek’s priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 5 6 a4sl translate-names Μελχισέδεκ 1 The word **Melchizedek** is the name of a man. He is mentioned in the Scriptures only in Hebrews and in [Genesis 14:18–20](../../GEN/14/18.md). The author will give many more details about **Melchizedek** in chapter 7, so leave any explanation for that chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 5 7 alje writing-pronouns ὃς 1 Here, the word **He** refers back to Christ. If your readers would misunderstand **He**, you could make to whom it refers explicit. Alternate translation: “Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -HEB 5 7 mv2c figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 During the days of his flesh Here, the words **the days** refer to an undefined period of time, and the word **flesh** figuratively refers to Jesus’s earthly life. The phrase as a whole refers to the time during which Jesus had a human body that could die, in contrast to how he now has a human body that is glorious and can never die. Alternate translation: “when he lived on earth” or “during the time when he was mortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 5 7 mv2c figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 During the days of his flesh Here, the words **the days** refer to an undefined period of time, and the word **flesh** refers to Jesus’s earthly life. The phrase as a whole refers to the time during which Jesus had a human body that could die, in contrast to how he now has a human body that is glorious and can never die. Alternate translation: “when he lived on earth” or “during the time when he was mortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 5 7 iel9 figs-doublet δεήσεις τε καὶ ἱκετηρίας 1 prayers and requests These two terms mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize the how much Jesus prayed to God. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these prayers, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “many prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 5 7 n9sg figs-abstractnouns δεήσεις τε καὶ ἱκετηρίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **prayers** and **requests**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “pray” and “request.” Alternate translation: “what he both prayed and requested” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 5 7 bkfz translate-unknown μετὰ κραυγῆς ἰσχυρᾶς καὶ δακρύων 1 Here, the phrase **loud cries** refers to speech at a high volume. Usually, **loud cries** are used when a person feels very strongly about something. The word **tears** refers to how a person weeps when they feel strong emotions, particularly sad ones. If your readers would misunderstand **with loud cries and tears**, you could use words that show that Jesus felt very strongly about the **prayers and requests**, including experiencing sadness and concern. Alternate translation: “as he wept and shouted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -576,7 +576,7 @@ HEB 5 14 k2j1 figs-exmetaphor τελείων…ἐστιν ἡ στερεὰ τ HEB 5 14 e3yh figs-idiom διὰ τὴν ἕξιν 1 who because of their maturity have their understanding trained for distinguishing good from evil Here, the phrase **through habit** refers to how a person develops skills or abilities by repeating the same thing over and over again. If your readers would misunderstand **through habit**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to learning by repetition. Alternate translation: “by means of repetition” or “through consistent practice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 5 14 hhzb figs-metaphor γεγυμνασμένα 1 Here, the word **trained** is often used for how athletes practice so that their bodies become stronger and better at their sport. If your readers would misunderstand how the author applies this language to **senses**, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “educated” or “developed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 5 14 mq0p translate-unknown τὰ αἰσθητήρια 1 Here, the word **senses** identifies all the ways in which people receive information about the world around them, including tasting, touching, and hearing. The author’s point here is that people can learn to tell between what is **good** and what is **evil** by using these **senses**. If your readers would misunderstand **senses**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the part or parts of the person that experience the world around him or her. Alternate translation: “their faculties” or “themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 6 intro nz5i 0 # Hebrews 6 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Exhortation: Make sure to persevere! (5:11–6:12)
* Exhortation: God’s promise is certain (6:13–20)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The promise to Abraham ([6:13–15](../06/13.md))

In [6:13–14](../06/13.md), the author speaks about God’s promise to Abraham. He quotes directly from [Genesis 22:17](../gen/22/17.md), but he also has in mind other times when God made similar promises to Abraham: [Genesis 12:1–3](../gen/12/01.md); [15:1–21](../gen/15/01.md); [17:1–8](../gen/17/01.md). The author’s point is that God “swore by himself,” which means that he himself guaranteed what he promised. Abraham waited for God to fulfill that promise, and God eventually did so when he gave Abraham a son and then numerous descendants. If your readers would need some of this information to understand the passage, you could include it in a footnote.

### “Swearing” and the “oath”

In [6:13–18](../06/13.md), the author refers to “swearing” and using an “oath.” In this context, “swearing” by someone refers to the action of guaranteeing a promise, while the “oath” refers to the guaranteeing words themselves. When someone makes an “oath,” they “swear by” a person or thing that is more powerful than they are. What they are saying is that the powerful person or thing will punish them if they are lying. If your readers would misunderstand “swearing” and “oath,” you could use language that comes from how people guarantee what they say in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/oath]])

### The heavenly sanctuary

In [6:19–20](../06/19.md), the author first refers to the heavenly sanctuary. He will discuss this sanctuary more in the following chapters. At this point, he simply refers to how our “hope” figuratively “enters” where Jesus himself “entered”: the area “inside” the “curtain.” In the author’s culture, a sanctuary would have solid wall or a cloth “curtain” that marked off the most sacred part of the sanctuary from the rest of the structure. This part of the sanctuary is most sacred because it is where God is most strongly present. Use words that would clearly refer to the most sacred part of a sanctuary. Since the author describes the heavenly sanctuary in words that come from how the tabernacle is described in the Old Testament, you should preserve as much of the details as possible (such as a “curtain” instead of a wall). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/curtain]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The farming metaphor in [6:7–8](../06/07.md)

In these verses, the author uses land that people use to grow food as an analogy for how people respond to God’s gifts and his message about salvation. In [6:7](../06/07.md), the author describes farmland that grows helpful crops when rain falls on it. This good farmland is like people who hear the good news, believe it, and then obey God. In [6:8](../06/08.md), the author describes farmland that grows plants that are not useful and that can hurt people. A farmer will set these plants on fire to destroy them. This bad farmland is like people who hear the good news and receive gifts from God but fail to firmly believe the good news and obey God. God will punish them, much like the farmer burns the bad plants. If your readers would misunderstand this analogy, you could make the comparison more explicit in the text.

### Hope as an anchor

In [6:19](../06/19.md), the author states that “hope” has the qualities of an “anchor.” An anchor is a heavy piece of metal attached to the end of a rope. The other end of the rope is tied to a boat, and the anchor is dropped over the edge so that its weight keeps the boat from moving around or drifting away. The author’s point is that hope functions like an anchor for believers: it keeps them focused on Jesus and what God has promised, and they do not “drift away” from what they believe (see the warning in [2:1](../02/01.md)). If your readers would not know what an “anchor” is, you could compare hope to some other thing in your culture that holds things in place.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### The “foundational” teachings in [6:1–2](../06/01.md)

In these verses, the author lists six things that are “foundational” or “elementary” teachings. These are not the only “foundational” teachings, but the author uses them as examples. The structure of the list can be understood in several ways:

(1)
* the foundation
* of repentance from dead works and
* of faith in God,
* teaching
* about baptisms and
* laying on of hands and
* resurrection of the dead and
* eternal judgment.

(2)
* the foundation
* of repentance from dead works and
* of faith in God,
* {of} teaching
* about baptisms and
* laying on of hands and
* resurrection of the dead and
* eternal judgment.

(3)
* the foundation
* of repentance from dead works and
* of faith in God,
* {of} teaching about baptisms and
* {of} laying on of hands and
* {of} resurrection of the dead and
* {of} eternal judgment.

See the note at the beginning of [6:2](../06/02.md) for translation suggestions for each of these options.

### Are those who “fall away” in [6:4–6](../06/04.md) truly believers?

In [6:4–5](../06/04.md), the author gives a list of things that a person can experience but then still “fall away” ([6:6](../06/06.md)). Scholars debate whether this list describes people who truly believe in Jesus and then stop believing, or if it describes people came close to believing in Jesus but then did not truly believe. Since the author focuses on how these people have experienced good things from God but then still reject Jesus, he does not clearly express whether these people are truly believers are not. If possible, focus your translation on what the people experience rather than on whether they have truly believed. +HEB 6 intro nz5i 0 # Hebrews 6 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Exhortation: Make sure to persevere! (5:11–6:12)
* Exhortation: God’s promise is certain (6:13–20)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The promise to Abraham ([6:13–15](../06/13.md))

In [6:13–14](../06/13.md), the author speaks about God’s promise to Abraham. He quotes directly from [Genesis 22:17](../gen/22/17.md), but he also has in mind other times when God made similar promises to Abraham: [Genesis 12:1–3](../gen/12/01.md); [15:1–21](../gen/15/01.md); [17:1–8](../gen/17/01.md). The author’s point is that God “swore by himself,” which means that he himself guaranteed what he promised. Abraham waited for God to fulfill that promise, and God eventually did so when he gave Abraham a son and then numerous descendants. If your readers would need some of this information to understand the passage, you could include it in a footnote.

### “Swearing” and the “oath”

In [6:13–18](../06/13.md), the author refers to “swearing” and using an “oath.” In this context, “swearing” by someone refers to the action of guaranteeing a promise, while the “oath” refers to the guaranteeing words themselves. When someone makes an “oath,” they “swear by” a person or thing that is more powerful than they are. What they are saying is that the powerful person or thing will punish them if they are lying. If your readers would misunderstand “swearing” and “oath,” you could use language that comes from how people guarantee what they say in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/oath]])

### The heavenly sanctuary

In [6:19–20](../06/19.md), the author first refers to the heavenly sanctuary. He will discuss this sanctuary more in the following chapters. At this point, he simply refers to how our “hope” “enters” where Jesus himself “entered”: the area “inside” the “curtain.” In the author’s culture, a sanctuary would have solid wall or a cloth “curtain” that marked off the most sacred part of the sanctuary from the rest of the structure. This part of the sanctuary is most sacred because it is where God is most strongly present. Use words that would clearly refer to the most sacred part of a sanctuary. Since the author describes the heavenly sanctuary in words that come from how the tabernacle is described in the Old Testament, you should preserve as much of the details as possible (such as a “curtain” instead of a wall). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/curtain]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The farming metaphor in [6:7–8](../06/07.md)

In these verses, the author uses land that people use to grow food as an analogy for how people respond to God’s gifts and his message about salvation. In [6:7](../06/07.md), the author describes farmland that grows helpful crops when rain falls on it. This good farmland is like people who hear the good news, believe it, and then obey God. In [6:8](../06/08.md), the author describes farmland that grows plants that are not useful and that can hurt people. A farmer will set these plants on fire to destroy them. This bad farmland is like people who hear the good news and receive gifts from God but fail to firmly believe the good news and obey God. God will punish them, much like the farmer burns the bad plants. If your readers would misunderstand this analogy, you could make the comparison more explicit in the text.

### Hope as an anchor

In [6:19](../06/19.md), the author states that “hope” has the qualities of an “anchor.” An anchor is a heavy piece of metal attached to the end of a rope. The other end of the rope is tied to a boat, and the anchor is dropped over the edge so that its weight keeps the boat from moving around or drifting away. The author’s point is that hope functions like an anchor for believers: it keeps them focused on Jesus and what God has promised, and they do not “drift away” from what they believe (see the warning in [2:1](../02/01.md)). If your readers would not know what an “anchor” is, you could compare hope to some other thing in your culture that holds things in place.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### The “foundational” teachings in [6:1–2](../06/01.md)

In these verses, the author lists six things that are “foundational” or “elementary” teachings. These are not the only “foundational” teachings, but the author uses them as examples. The structure of the list can be understood in several ways:

(1)
* the foundation
* of repentance from dead works and
* of faith in God,
* teaching
* about baptisms and
* laying on of hands and
* resurrection of the dead and
* eternal judgment.

(2)
* the foundation
* of repentance from dead works and
* of faith in God,
* {of} teaching
* about baptisms and
* laying on of hands and
* resurrection of the dead and
* eternal judgment.

(3)
* the foundation
* of repentance from dead works and
* of faith in God,
* {of} teaching about baptisms and
* {of} laying on of hands and
* {of} resurrection of the dead and
* {of} eternal judgment.

See the note at the beginning of [6:2](../06/02.md) for translation suggestions for each of these options.

### Are those who “fall away” in [6:4–6](../06/04.md) truly believers?

In [6:4–5](../06/04.md), the author gives a list of things that a person can experience but then still “fall away” ([6:6](../06/06.md)). Scholars debate whether this list describes people who truly believe in Jesus and then stop believing, or if it describes people came close to believing in Jesus but then did not truly believe. Since the author focuses on how these people have experienced good things from God but then still reject Jesus, he does not clearly express whether these people are truly believers are not. If possible, focus your translation on what the people experience rather than on whether they have truly believed. HEB 6 1 f1nk grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the phrase **So then** introduces what the author wants his audience to do in response to the warning he gave in [5:11–14](../05/11.md). If your readers would misunderstand **So then**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an application or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 6 1 i4xr figs-metaphor ἀφέντες τὸν τῆς ἀρχῆς τοῦ Χριστοῦ λόγον, ἐπὶ τὴν τελειότητα φερώμεθα 1 let us leave the beginning of the message of Christ and move forward to maturity Here the author speaks as if the **beginning of the message of Christ** were the starting point for a journey and as if **maturity** were the destination. He speaks in this way to encourage his audience to focus more time and energy on the destination (**maturity**) than on where they started out (**the beginning of the message**). He does not want them to replace **the beginning of the message** with what is related to **maturity**. Rather, he is exhorting them about what to focus their time and energy on. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “putting to the side the beginning of the message of Christ, let us take up maturity” or “focusing less on the beginning of the message of Christ, let us focus more on maturity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 1 gsvd figs-abstractnouns τὸν τῆς ἀρχῆς…λόγον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **beginning**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “basic” or “elementary.” Alternate translation: “the elementary message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ HEB 6 4 e2e6 figs-activepassive τοὺς ἅπαξ φωτισθέντας, γε HEB 6 4 l5mc figs-metaphor γευσαμένους…τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς ἐπουρανίου 1 who tasted the heavenly gift Here the author speaks as if **the heavenly gift** were food that people could “taste.” He speaks in this way to show that these people experienced **the heavenly gift** as much as a person who eats food truly experiences that food. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “had experience of the heavenly gift” or “participated in the heavenly gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 4 ysas figs-explicit τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς ἐπουρανίου 1 Here, the phrase **the heavenly gift** identifies what God gives to those who believe in Jesus. This includes new life and forgiveness of sins. If your readers would misunderstand **the heavenly gift**, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of God’s gift of new life” or “of God’s gifts from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 4 d2lp figs-possession μετόχους γενηθέντας Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 who were sharers of the Holy Spirit Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that these people “share” the **Holy Spirit**. This form means that the people whom the author is speaking about were among the group of people who received the **Holy Spirit**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could use a form that makes meaning clearer. Alternate translation: “received the Holy Spirit along with other believers” or “participated in the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -HEB 6 5 vp46 figs-metaphor γευσαμένους 1 who tasted God’s good word Here the author again uses the word **tasted** figuratively. Express the meaning the same way you did in the previous verse ([6:4](../06/04.md)). Alternate translation: “who had experience of” or “who participated in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 6 5 vp46 figs-metaphor γευσαμένους 1 who tasted God’s good word Here the author again uses the word **tasted**. Express the meaning the same way you did in the previous verse ([6:4](../06/04.md)). Alternate translation: “who had experience of” or “who participated in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 5 vf2t figs-possession δυνάμεις…μέλλοντος αἰῶνος 1 Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that the **powers** will be fully experienced in **the age to come**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could use a word or phrase that makes it clear. Alternate translation: “the powers that belong to the age to come” or “the powers that will be experienced in the age to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 6 5 tw1u figs-abstractnouns δυνάμεις…μέλλοντος αἰῶνος 1 the powers of the age to come If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **powers**, you could express the idea in another way. The **powers** could refer to: (1) what God will do, sometimes through other people, for those who believe. Alternate translation: “what God will do powerfully in the age to come” (2) how people can do “powerful” things. Alternate translation: “the powerful things that people will do in the age to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 5 virg figs-idiom μέλλοντος αἰῶνος 1 Here, the phrase **the age to come** refers to the time during and after which God will make people alive again and renew everything that he created. This **age** begins when Jesus comes back. If your readers would misunderstand **the age to come**, you could use a phrase that makes that meaning clear. Alternate translation: “of the time when Jesus comes back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -639,7 +639,7 @@ HEB 6 10 t2hb figs-litotes οὐ…ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ἐπιλαθέ HEB 6 10 puu1 figs-explicit ἐπιλαθέσθαι 1 Here, the word **forget** does not mean simply that a person does not remember something. It also includes how a person will not consider or include something that they have “forgotten.” If your readers would misunderstand **forget**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how a person “overlooks” or “fails to include” something. Alternate translation: “to ignore” or “to pass over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 10 gzvj figs-abstractnouns τοῦ ἔργου ὑμῶν, καὶ τῆς ἀγάπης ἧς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **work** and **love**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “do” and “love.” Alternate translation: “what you do and the way that you love, which” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 10 vljf translate-unknown ἐνεδείξασθε 1 Here, people who have **demonstrated** something prove or show that it is true. The author tells his audience that they have “proved” or “shown” that they have **love**. If your readers would misunderstand **demonstrated**, you could use a word or phrase that makes the idea clearer. Alternate translation: “you have shown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 6 10 r9xx figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 for his name Here, the word **name** figuratively refers to a person’s reputation or honor. In other words, “serving the saints” is something that is “toward God’s name,” which means that it brings him honor. If your readers would misunderstand **name**, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “with regard to his honor” or “that glorifies God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 6 10 r9xx figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 for his name Here, the word **name** refers to a person’s reputation or honor. In other words, “serving the saints” is something that is “toward God’s name,” which means that it brings him honor. If your readers would misunderstand **name**, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “with regard to his honor” or “that glorifies God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 6 10 szt0 figs-explicit διακονήσαντες τοῖς ἁγίοις καὶ διακονοῦντες 1 Here, the ones who **serve** are the audience. The authors point is that they served **the saints** in the past, and they are still serving **the saints** in the present. If your readers would misunderstand who is “serving” or what times the author is referring to, you could make the ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “since you have served the saints in the past and even now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 11 j7f5 figs-exclusive ἐπιθυμοῦμεν 1 We greatly desire Here the author uses the first person plural (**we**), but he is referring only to himself. If your readers would misunderstand **we**, you could use a form that more naturally refers to the author. Alternate translation: “I long for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) HEB 6 11 k4si translate-unknown ἐνδείκνυσθαι 1 diligence Here, just as in [6:10](../06/10.md), people who **demonstrate** something prove or show that it is true. The author wants his audience to “prove” or “show” that they have **diligence**. If your readers would misunderstand **demonstrate**, you could use a word or phrase that makes the idea clearer. Alternate translation: “to show” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -651,7 +651,7 @@ HEB 6 12 zjgw figs-metaphor μὴ νωθροὶ γένησθε 1 Here the autho HEB 6 12 x9zn figs-ellipsis μιμηταὶ δὲ 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but so that you might become imitators” or “but become imitators” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) HEB 6 12 yrh2 figs-abstractnouns τῶν διὰ πίστεως καὶ μακροθυμίας, κληρονομούντων 1 imitators If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **faith** and **patience**, you could express the idea by using verbs or adverbs. Alternate translation: “of those who, by means of how they believed and were patient, are inheriting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 12 q8ry figs-metaphor τῶν διὰ πίστεως καὶ μακροθυμίας, κληρονομούντων τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 inherit the promises Here the author speaks as if believers were children who would receive property that a parent passes on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers receive the **promises** from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “of those to whom, because of their faith and patience, God is giving the promises” or “of those who by faith and patience are obtaining the promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 6 12 mrbc figs-metonymy τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, the word **promises** figuratively refers to the contents of the **promises**, or what God has “promised” to give. If your readers would misunderstand **promises**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of these **promises**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promise” or “the things that God has promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 6 12 mrbc figs-metonymy τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, the word **promises** refers to the contents of the **promises**, or what God has “promised” to give. If your readers would misunderstand **promises**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of these **promises**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promise” or “the things that God has promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 6 12 eydr figs-abstractnouns τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promises**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “what God has pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 13 afl4 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces more explanation about the “promises” that the author mentioned in the previous verse ([6:21](../06/21.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word that introduces explanation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Now I will tell you more about these promises:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 6 13 qicr figs-extrainfo ἐπαγγειλάμενος 1 Here the author does not clarify what God **promised** to Abraham. He does not do this because he quotes the promise itself in the following verse ([6:14](../06/14.md)). If possible, leave what God **promised** vague or unclear in this verse. Alternate translation: “having made a promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) @@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ HEB 6 14 n47a figs-idiom πληθύνων, πληθυνῶ σε 1 I will greatly HEB 6 15 f3cs figs-explicit οὕτως 1 Here, the phrase **in this way** could refer back to: (1) how God guaranteed what he promised (see [6:13–14](../06/13.md)). Alternate translation: “as God promised” (2) how Abraham had “faith and patience” (see [6:12](../06/12.md)). Alternate translation: “as one who had faith and patience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 15 li7e figs-explicit μακροθυμήσας 1 Here the author refers to how Abraham was 75 years old when God first made the **promise** to him (see [Genesis 12:1–4](../gen/12/01.md)), and he was 100 years old when Sarah gave birth to his son Isaac (see [Genesis 21:1–5](../gen/21/01.md). So, Abraham **patiently waited** for 25 years before God gave him what he had promised. If your readers would misunderstand **patiently waited**, you could use a footnote to give this background information, or you could include some short extra information in your translation. Alternation translation: “having patiently waited for 25 years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 15 aefm translate-unknown ἐπέτυχεν 1 Here, the phrase **he obtained** refers to how he received the **promise**. It does not mean that he took the **promise** for himself. If your readers would misunderstand **obtained**, you could translate this phrase like you translated “inheriting the promises” in [6:12](../06/12.md). Alternate translation: “he received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 6 15 pw9h figs-metonymy τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, the word **promise** figuratively refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If your readers would misunderstand **promise**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promise” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 6 15 pw9h figs-metonymy τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, the word **promise** refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If your readers would misunderstand **promise**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promise” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 6 15 ky28 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “what God pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 16 ib90 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of how “swearing” by someone works (see [6:13](../06/13.md) especially). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could express the idea with a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “About swearing,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 6 16 vri2 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωποι 1 Although **men** is masculine, the author is using it to all people, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **men**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ HEB 6 16 pqcw figs-abstractnouns πάσης αὐτοῖς ἀντιλογίας HEB 6 17 jq1k grammar-connect-words-phrases ἐν ᾧ 1 Here, the word **which** refers back to how humans “swear” with an **oath** (see [6:16](../06/16.md)). The phrase **in which** means that what the author speaks about in this verse happens in that same context or way. In other words, God used an **oath**, just like humans do. If your readers would misunderstand **in which**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happens according to a previously stated pattern. Alternate translation: “in which same way” or “in which pattern” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 6 17 dw5n figs-infostructure περισσότερον…ἐπιδεῖξαι 1 Here, the phrase **even more** modifies **to show**. If your readers would misunderstand what **even more** modifies, you could rearrange the elements in this sentence to make it clearer. Alternate translation: “to show even more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 6 17 rpv9 figs-metaphor τοῖς κληρονόμοις τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 to the heirs of the promise Here the author speaks as if believers were children who would receive property that a parent passes on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers receive the **promise** from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “to those who were to receive the promise” or “to the recipients of the promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 6 17 wlbg figs-metonymy τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, the word **promise** figuratively refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If your readers would misunderstand **promise**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “of the things from the promise” or “of the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 6 17 wlbg figs-metonymy τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, the word **promise** refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If your readers would misunderstand **promise**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “of the things from the promise” or “of the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 6 17 zz5f figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise.” Alternate translation: “of what God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 17 ug6j figs-abstractnouns τὸ ἀμετάθετον τῆς βουλῆς αὐτοῦ 1 the unchangeable quality of his purpose If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **quality** and **purpose**, you could express the ideas by using verbs or in another natural way. Alternate translation: “that what he purposes is unchangeable” or “how unchangeable what he plans is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 17 rezy figs-idiom ἐμεσίτευσεν ὅρκῳ 1 Here, the author refers to God making a promise **with an oath** as “mediating” that promise. He speaks in this way because the **oath** is between God and his people and guarantees that what God promises will happen, just like a “mediator” stands between two parties and guarantees what those parties decide. If your readers would misunderstand **mediated**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies how an **oath** functions when a person makes a promise. Alternate translation: “used an oath to do so” or “made it certain by using an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -711,7 +711,7 @@ HEB 7 1 h4n1 translate-names τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου 1 The ph HEB 7 1 ucr1 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ 1 The word **Abraham** is the name of a man. He is the man from whom all the Israelites and Jews are descended. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 1 ji3f grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὑποστρέφοντι 1 Here, the word **returning** refers to action that happened at the same time as when Melchizedek **met Abraham**. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “when he was returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) HEB 7 1 rx36 figs-explicit Ἀβραὰμ ὑποστρέφοντι ἀπὸ τῆς κοπῆς τῶν βασιλέων 1 Abraham returning from the slaughter of the kings The phrase **the slaughter of the kings** refers to a story in [Genesis 14:1–16](../gen/14/01.md). Four **kings** conquered a city in which Abraham’s nephew was living, and they captured his nephew. Abraham took the fighting men that he had, and he conquered and “slaughtered” the armies of these four **kings**. He recovered all the valuable things that these **kings** had taken, including his nephew. When he was going back home after defeating the **kings**, he met **Melchizedek**. If your readers would need to know more about this background than the author states explicitly, you could include some extra information in your translation, or you could use a footnote to explain the story. Alternate translation: “Abraham, who was returning from the battle in which he defeated the four kings who had kidnapped his nephew,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 7 1 np7o figs-synecdoche τῶν βασιλέων 1 Here, the word **kings** figuratively refers to the **kings** and their armies. If your readers would misunderstand **kings**, you could refer explicitly to their armies. Alternate translation: “of the kings and their fighting men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +HEB 7 1 np7o figs-synecdoche τῶν βασιλέων 1 Here, the word **kings** refers to the **kings** and their armies. If your readers would misunderstand **kings**, you could refer explicitly to their armies. Alternate translation: “of the kings and their fighting men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) HEB 7 2 q87x writing-pronouns ᾧ 1 It was to him Here, **whom** refers back to Melchizedek. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **whom** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “to whom—that is, Melchizedek—” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 7 2 dplz translate-unknown δεκάτην…ἐμέρισεν 1 Here, the word **apportioned** refers to how a person might divide a group of things into “portions” and share give each portion to a person. Here, Abraham divides up what he has into ten portions, and he gives Melchizedek one of those portions. If your readers would misunderstand **apportioned a tenth**, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “handed over one tenth” or “presented one part out of ten” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 7 2 pw9x figs-explicit ἀπὸ πάντων 1 Here, **all {things}** refers to the things that Abraham took from the kings that he had defeated. This would have included what the kings took from their enemies and things that they themselves had. If your readers would misunderstand what **all {things}** refers to, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “from all that he had plundered from the kings” or “from everything that he took after defeating the kings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -744,7 +744,7 @@ HEB 7 5 hn3k figs-abstractnouns ἀποδεκατοῦν 1 from the people If yo HEB 7 5 ri2y translate-kinship τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτῶν 1 from their brothers Here, the word **brothers** refers to anyone who is descended from **Abraham** and Jacob, which would be all Israelites. It does not refer to just children of one’s parents. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to everyone from one tribe or nation. Alternate translation: “from their fellow Israelites” or “from the others in their nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) HEB 7 5 busq figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτῶν 1 Although the word **brothers** is masculine, it refers to any relative, both male and female. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “from their relatives” or “from their brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 7 5 rx2f grammar-connect-logic-contrast καίπερ 1 Here, the phrase **even though** introduces something that is unexpected given what the author has already said. In other words, it is surprising that the **sons of Levi** receive tithes from **their brothers** when they have all **come from the loin of Abraham**. If your readers would misunderstand **even though**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that is contrary to what is expected. Alternate translation: “although” or “despite how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -HEB 7 5 x4za figs-idiom ἐξεληλυθότας ἐκ τῆς ὀσφύος Ἀβραάμ 1 they, too, have come from Abraham’s body The phrase **from the loin of Abraham** identifies everyone who has **come** from that **loin** as descendants of **Abraham**. The word **loin** refers figuratively to the male sexual organ, so anyone who has come from someone’s **loin** is descended from that person. If your readers would misunderstand **come from the loin of Abraham**, you could use a phrase that identifies people who have descended from one ancestor. Alternate translation: “they have Abraham as a common ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 7 5 x4za figs-idiom ἐξεληλυθότας ἐκ τῆς ὀσφύος Ἀβραάμ 1 they, too, have come from Abraham’s body The phrase **from the loin of Abraham** identifies everyone who has **come** from that **loin** as descendants of **Abraham**. The word **loin** refers to the male sexual organ, so anyone who has come from someone’s **loin** is descended from that person. If your readers would misunderstand **come from the loin of Abraham**, you could use a phrase that identifies people who have descended from one ancestor. Alternate translation: “they have Abraham as a common ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 7 5 m23m translate-names Ἀβραάμ 1 The word **Abraham** is the name of a man. He is the man from whom all the Israelites and Jews are descended. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 6 bg0k grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces the second half of the contrast. The first half is in the previous verse ([7:5](../07/05.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **But**, you could use a word that introduces the second half of a contrast, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “And on the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 7 6 e0ic writing-pronouns ὁ 1 Here, the phrase **{this} one** refers to Melchizedek. If your readers would misunderstand **{this} one**, you could make to whom it refers explicit. Alternate translation: “Melchizedek,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ HEB 7 9 zvd3 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ…Λευεὶς 1 The word **Levi** HEB 7 9 e9gc figs-metonymy Λευεὶς, ὁ δεκάτας λαμβάνων 1 Here, the name **Levi** stands for the descendants of **Levi** who were priests and collected **tithes**. If your readers would misunderstand that **Levi** stands for the descendants of **Levi**, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “Levi’s descendants, the ones collecting tithes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 7 9 v1yu figs-abstractnouns καὶ…ὁ δεκάτας λαμβάνων, δεδεκάτωται 2 Levi, who received tithes, also paid tithes through Abraham If your language does not use abstract nouns for the idea behind **tithe** and **tithes**, you could express the ideas by using an adjective such as “tenth” or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “the one collecting one out of ten portions, also had paid one out of ten portions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 7 9 odg8 figs-explicit δι’ Ἀβραὰμ…δεδεκάτωται 1 Here the author refers to how Abraham **paid a tithe** to Melchizedek, an event the author has already mentioned (see [7:4](../07/04.md)). If your readers would misunderstand that the author is speaking about this event, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “had paid a tithe to Melchizedek through Abraham after Abraham defeated his enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 7 10 g26s figs-idiom ἔτι…ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ τοῦ πατρὸς ἦν 1 Levi was in the body of his ancestor The phrase **the loin of {his} father** refers figuratively to the male sexual organ. In the author’s culture, one way to speak about children was to refer to them as the product of the father’s semen. So, Abraham’s descendants can be referred to as if they were semen that was still inside Abraham. The author uses this figure of speech to make two points. First, Levi and the priests descended from him had not yet been born and thus could be considered semen that was still inside Abraham. Second, because they were inside Abraham, they participated in whatever Abraham did. This included giving a tithe to Melchizedek. If your readers would misunderstand **still in the loin of {his} father**, you could use a phrase that closely identifies Levi and Abraham while showing that Levi was not yet born. Alternate translation: “he was not yet born, and Abraham represented him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 7 10 g26s figs-idiom ἔτι…ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ τοῦ πατρὸς ἦν 1 Levi was in the body of his ancestor The phrase **the loin of {his} father** refers to the male sexual organ. In the author’s culture, one way to speak about children was to refer to them as the product of the father’s semen. So, Abraham’s descendants can be referred to as if they were semen that was still inside Abraham. The author uses this figure of speech to make two points. First, Levi and the priests descended from him had not yet been born and thus could be considered semen that was still inside Abraham. Second, because they were inside Abraham, they participated in whatever Abraham did. This included giving a tithe to Melchizedek. If your readers would misunderstand **still in the loin of {his} father**, you could use a phrase that closely identifies Levi and Abraham while showing that Levi was not yet born. Alternate translation: “he was not yet born, and Abraham represented him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 7 10 bd2l translate-kinship τοῦ πατρὸς 1 Here the author uses the word **father** to refer in general to a male ancestor. Abraham was more specifically Levi’s great-grandfather on his father’s side. Use an appropriate word for this relationship in your culture. Alternate translation: “of his ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) HEB 7 10 p0zd translate-names Μελχισέδεκ 1 The word **Melchizedek** is the name of a man, the same man that the author has been discussing in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 10 l5dd writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 Here, the word **him** refers to Abraham. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **him** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -835,7 +835,7 @@ HEB 7 19 t5w7 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** int HEB 7 19 ia8j figs-personification οὐδὲν…ἐτελείωσεν ὁ νόμος 1 the law made nothing perfect Here the author speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who was ineffective and could “perfect” nothing. He speaks in this way to indicate that the system of laws that God gave through Moses, particularly the laws about priests, did not lead to people or things becoming “perfect.” If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the law was not something that people could follow to become perfect” or “nothing was perfected through Moses’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) HEB 7 19 otzd grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the phrase **on the other hand** introduces the second part of the author’s explanation. Make sure you translate this phrase so that it works well with how you translated “on the one hand” in [7:18](../07/18.md). Alternate translation: “and second, there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 7 19 stc2 figs-abstractnouns ἐπεισαγωγὴ…κρείττονος ἐλπίδος 1 a better hope is introduced If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **introduction** and **hope**, you could express the idea by using verbs such as “introduce” and “hope.” Alternate translation: “God introduces something better for which we hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 7 19 xp1h figs-metonymy κρείττονος ἐλπίδος 1 a better hope is introduced Here, the word **hope** figuratively refers to the contents of the **hope**, or what believers confidently expect. If your readers would misunderstand **hope**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **hope**. Alternate translation: “of the better things that we hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 7 19 xp1h figs-metonymy κρείττονος ἐλπίδος 1 a better hope is introduced Here, the word **hope** refers to the contents of the **hope**, or what believers confidently expect. If your readers would misunderstand **hope**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **hope**. Alternate translation: “of the better things that we hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 7 19 c9tz figs-go ἐγγίζομεν τῷ Θεῷ 1 through which we come near to God Here, the phrase **come near** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author wants believers to approach God in heaven. This means that they enter into God’s presence. If your readers would misunderstand **come near**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someone’s presence. Alternate translation: “we go before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 7 20 e97r translate-versebridge 0 General Information: To help your readers understand the author’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put the background information about how the Israelite priests were not appointed with an oath while Jesus was appointed with an oath in a first sentence. Then, you could put the comparison between how Jesus was appointed with an oath and how he is the guarantor of a better covenant in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “For indeed they without swearing an oath are become priests, but he with an oath-taking, through God saying to him, “The Lord swore and will not change his mind: ‘You are a priest forever.’” So, by as much as not without swearing an oath,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) HEB 7 20 f3cd grammar-connect-words-phrases καθ’ ὅσον 1 General Information: Here, the phrase **by as much as** introduces the first half a comparison that the author will complete in [7:22](../07/22.md). The point is that, just as **swearing an oath** is more guaranteed than not using an oath, so Jesus’s priesthood and covenant are better than the priesthood of the descendant’s of Levi. If your readers would misunderstand **by as much as**, you could use a form that introduces a comparison between two situations or concepts. Alternate translation: “just as it was” or “in the same way that it was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -894,11 +894,11 @@ HEB 7 28 esfp figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπους 1 the law appoints as hig HEB 7 28 u5ny figs-abstractnouns ἀνθρώπους…ἔχοντας ἀσθένειαν 1 men who have weaknesses If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **weakness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “weak.” Alternate translation: “men who are weak” or “men who fail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 7 28 lboj figs-personification ὁ λόγος…τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας, τῆς μετὰ τὸν νόμον, Υἱόν 1 men who have weaknesses Just as with **law**, the author speaks of **the word of the swearing of an oath** as if it were a person who could “appoint” someone. He speaks in this way to indicate that the **Son** fulfill what God “swore” in [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could refer to the one who swore **the oath** as the one who **{appoints}**, or you could express the idea in another natural way. Alternate translation: “in the word of the swearing of an oath, which came after the law, it is written that God appoints a Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) HEB 7 28 gzm1 figs-possession ὁ λόγος…τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας 1 the word of the oath, which came after the law, appointed a Son Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **word** that records how God “swore” **an oath**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the word that records how God swore an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -HEB 7 28 yez2 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος…τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας 1 the word of the oath, which came after the law, appointed a Son Here, **word** figuratively represents what someone says in words. If your readers would misunderstand **word**, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message concerning the swearing of an oath” or “what God said about the swearing of an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 7 28 yez2 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος…τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας 1 the word of the oath, which came after the law, appointed a Son Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If your readers would misunderstand **word**, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message concerning the swearing of an oath” or “what God said about the swearing of an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 7 28 msa4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱόν 1 Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) HEB 7 28 r5lc εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τετελειωμένον 1 who has been made perfect Here, the phrase **having been made perfect forever** could refer to: (1) who the **Son** is. Alternate translation: “who has been made perfect forever” (2) something that happened before the **Son** became a high priest. Alternate translation: “after he was made perfect forever” HEB 7 28 fkl3 figs-activepassive τετελειωμένον 1 who has been made perfect If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the one who is **made perfect** rather than focusing on the person doing the “perfecting.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God having made him perfect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 8 intro ks94 0 # Hebrews 8 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: The ministry of the Son (8:1–6)
* Teaching: The new covenant (8:7–13)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [8:8–12](../08/08.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### New covenant

In [8:6–13](../08/06.md), the author refers to a “second,” “better,” or “new” covenant. All these phrases refer to the same covenant, the one that God promised in the words that the author quotes from [Jeremiah 31:31–34](../jer/31/31.md). This new covenant is “mediated” through Jesus the Son ([8:6](../08/06.md)), and when God initiates this covenant, the “first covenant” (the one God made with the Israelites through Moses) becomes “old” or “obsolete” ([8:13](../08/13.md)). In your translation, use words or phrases that refer to an agreement or formal contract between people or groups. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### The heavenly sanctuary

In [8:1–2](../08/01.md), the author refers to how Jesus has sat down at the right side of God’s throne and is a “servant of the holy place and the true tabernacle.” Most likely, the author considers the throne where Jesus sat down to be inside this heavenly sanctuary. Scholars debate whether “holy place” and “true tabernacle” are two different names for the same thing or whether the “holy place” is the most sacred area inside the “true tabernacle.” Either way, these names refer to the sanctuary in heaven where Jesus acts as a high priest. You should refer to the heavenly sanctuary with the same words that you use to refer to the earthly sanctuary. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The “house” of Israel or Judah

In [8:8](../08/08.md), [10](../08/10.md), the quotation refers to the “house” of Israel or of Judah. In this context, “house” refers figuratively to groups of people who are connected because they are all descended from the same person or because they are all ruled by the same leader. In this case, both are true: the “house” refers to the people who are descended from Abraham and are ruled by a king. In [10](../08/10.md), the “house of Israel” refers to all the Israelites. In [8:8](../08/08.md), the “house of Israel” and the “house of Judah” refer to the two different kingdoms that the original kingdom of Israel split into. In both cases, the quotation is referring to all the Israelites. Consider using a natural way to refer to a group of people who go together. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/house]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Was Jesus a priest when he lived and died on earth?

In [8:4](../08/04.md), the author argues that Jesus would not be a priest if he were on earth. His basis for this claim seems to be that God has already appointed priests to offer sacrifices on earth. Scholars frequently debate whether the author of Hebrews claims that Jesus served as a priest when he obeyed during his earthly life and when he died on the cross, or whether he only served as a priest after he came back to life and ascended to heaven. Either way, the author’s point in this verse is that Jesus would not be a priest if he were on earth right now. See the notes on this verse for ways to translate the contrary-to-fact condition.

### What is the “fault” in the first covenant?

In [8:7](../08/07.md), the author implies that the “first covenant” was not “faultless.” However, in [8:8](../08/08.md), he claims that God finds “fault” with “them,” that is, the Israelites who received that covenant. Most likely, the the “fault” in the first covenant was that it did not enable the Israelites to keep the covenant, and so they failed. This contrasts with the “new covenant,” in which God will put his laws in the minds and hearts of his people. Since the people are the “fault” in the new covenant, there is no need to harmonize these two verses. +HEB 8 intro ks94 0 # Hebrews 8 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: The ministry of the Son (8:1–6)
* Teaching: The new covenant (8:7–13)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [8:8–12](../08/08.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### New covenant

In [8:6–13](../08/06.md), the author refers to a “second,” “better,” or “new” covenant. All these phrases refer to the same covenant, the one that God promised in the words that the author quotes from [Jeremiah 31:31–34](../jer/31/31.md). This new covenant is “mediated” through Jesus the Son ([8:6](../08/06.md)), and when God initiates this covenant, the “first covenant” (the one God made with the Israelites through Moses) becomes “old” or “obsolete” ([8:13](../08/13.md)). In your translation, use words or phrases that refer to an agreement or formal contract between people or groups. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### The heavenly sanctuary

In [8:1–2](../08/01.md), the author refers to how Jesus has sat down at the right side of God’s throne and is a “servant of the holy place and the true tabernacle.” Most likely, the author considers the throne where Jesus sat down to be inside this heavenly sanctuary. Scholars debate whether “holy place” and “true tabernacle” are two different names for the same thing or whether the “holy place” is the most sacred area inside the “true tabernacle.” Either way, these names refer to the sanctuary in heaven where Jesus acts as a high priest. You should refer to the heavenly sanctuary with the same words that you use to refer to the earthly sanctuary. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The “house” of Israel or Judah

In [8:8](../08/08.md), [10](../08/10.md), the quotation refers to the “house” of Israel or of Judah. In this context, “house” refers to groups of people who are connected because they are all descended from the same person or because they are all ruled by the same leader. In this case, both are true: the “house” refers to the people who are descended from Abraham and are ruled by a king. In [10](../08/10.md), the “house of Israel” refers to all the Israelites. In [8:8](../08/08.md), the “house of Israel” and the “house of Judah” refer to the two different kingdoms that the original kingdom of Israel split into. In both cases, the quotation is referring to all the Israelites. Consider using a natural way to refer to a group of people who go together. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/house]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Was Jesus a priest when he lived and died on earth?

In [8:4](../08/04.md), the author argues that Jesus would not be a priest if he were on earth. His basis for this claim seems to be that God has already appointed priests to offer sacrifices on earth. Scholars frequently debate whether the author of Hebrews claims that Jesus served as a priest when he obeyed during his earthly life and when he died on the cross, or whether he only served as a priest after he came back to life and ascended to heaven. Either way, the author’s point in this verse is that Jesus would not be a priest if he were on earth right now. See the notes on this verse for ways to translate the contrary-to-fact condition.

### What is the “fault” in the first covenant?

In [8:7](../08/07.md), the author implies that the “first covenant” was not “faultless.” However, in [8:8](../08/08.md), he claims that God finds “fault” with “them,” that is, the Israelites who received that covenant. Most likely, the the “fault” in the first covenant was that it did not enable the Israelites to keep the covenant, and so they failed. This contrasts with the “new covenant,” in which God will put his laws in the minds and hearts of his people. Since the people are the “fault” in the new covenant, there is no need to harmonize these two verses. HEB 8 1 tw7l grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Now Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section in the author’s argument. If your readers would misunderstand **Now**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 8 1 nb8q translate-unknown κεφάλαιον…ἐπὶ τοῖς λεγομένοις 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the word **point** refers to the main or most significant idea in a speech or argument. The author could be referring to the most significant idea in: (1) everything he is writing, including what follows. Alternate translation: “the most significant thing in what is being said is this” (2) what he has already said, not including what follows. Alternate translation: “the most significant thing in what has been said is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 8 1 noty figs-activepassive τοῖς λεγομένοις 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **being said** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that he himself did it. Alternate translation: “the things that I have said is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ HEB 8 7 obo7 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 first covenant … second co HEB 8 7 tqku grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ…ἡ πρώτη ἐκείνη ἦν ἄμεμπτος 1 first covenant … second covenant Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the **first {covenant}** was not **faultless**. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by pointing out that God set up a **second** covenant. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if that first covenant had really been faultless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) HEB 8 7 wb9d translate-ordinal ἡ πρώτη…δευτέρας 1 first covenant … second covenant If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “covenant one … for a covenant two” or “earlier covenant … for a later covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) HEB 8 7 gig6 figs-explicit ἡ πρώτη ἐκείνη…δευτέρας 1 had been faultless Here, the words **first** and **second** refer to two covenants that God made. The **first** covenant is the one that God made with the Israelites through Moses, and it was made before the **second** covenant, which is the one that God makes with his people through Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand what the **first** and **second** covenants are, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the covenant that God made with his people at first … for another, later covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 8 7 np7l figs-idiom οὐκ ἂν δευτέρας ἐζητεῖτο τόπος 1 had been faultless Here, the phrase **no place would have been sought** figuratively refers to how God would not have made another covenant if the first one had been **faultless**. The word **place** refers figuratively to a situation in which another covenant would exist. The idiom avoids referring to who is doing the “seeking.” If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use an expression that refers to an “opportunity” or “situation” in which another covenant is made. Alternate translation: “there would not have been a situation in which another covenant was made” or “there would have been no need for a second one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 8 7 np7l figs-idiom οὐκ ἂν δευτέρας ἐζητεῖτο τόπος 1 had been faultless Here, the phrase **no place would have been sought** refers to how God would not have made another covenant if the first one had been **faultless**. The word **place** refers to a situation in which another covenant would exist. The idiom avoids referring to who is doing the “seeking.” If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use an expression that refers to an “opportunity” or “situation” in which another covenant is made. Alternate translation: “there would not have been a situation in which another covenant was made” or “there would have been no need for a second one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 8 7 pktf figs-activepassive οὐκ…ἐζητεῖτο τόπος 1 had been faultless If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **place** that is **sought** rather than focusing on the person doing the “seeking.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “no one would have sought a place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 8 8 ya4n grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 General Information: Here, the word **For** introduces support for what the author has claimed about how the first covenant was not “faultless” (see [8:7](../08/07.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “We know that the first first covenant was not faultless, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 8 8 sqb4 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 with the people Here, the word **them** refers to the people with whom God made the “first covenant”: the people of Israel. The author may be referring specifically to the people whom God led out of Egypt, or he may be referring to all the people who lived under the “first covenant.” If your readers would misunderstand **them**, you could clarify to whom it refers. Alternate translation: “with the Israelite ancestors” or “with the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -960,7 +960,7 @@ HEB 8 8 ncqt figs-quotations λέγει, ἰδοὺ, ἡμέραι ἔρχοντ HEB 8 8 xhp8 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἡμέραι 1 See The **Lord** is using the term **Behold** to focus the audience’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Listen! Days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 8 8 qzx8 figs-idiom ἡμέραι ἔρχονται 1 See Here, the clause **days are coming** indicates that some event is going to happen soon. If your readers would misunderstand **days are coming**, you could use a word or phrase that anticipates that something is about to happen. Alternate translation: “the time will soon be here” or “it is almost the moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 8 8 nzgz figs-123person λέγει Κύριος 1 See Here the author has God speaking about himself in the third person. He uses this form because the quotation uses the third person to speak about God, and the author claims that God speaks the quotation. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could clarify that God is speaking about himself. Alternate translation: “I the Lord say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -HEB 8 8 c6zm figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον Ἰούδα 1 the house of Israel and with the house of Judah Here, the word **house** figuratively refers to a group of people. The **house of Israel** refers to the group of people who lived in the country of Israel, and the **house of Judah** refers to the group of people who lived in the country of Judah. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel and with the people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 8 8 c6zm figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον Ἰούδα 1 the house of Israel and with the house of Judah Here, the word **house** refers to a group of people. The **house of Israel** refers to the group of people who lived in the country of Israel, and the **house of Judah** refers to the group of people who lived in the country of Judah. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel and with the people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 8 8 mlop figs-explicit τὸν οἶκον Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον Ἰούδα 1 the house of Israel and with the house of Judah Here God refers to the two kingdoms that the Israelites lived in. The northern area was called **Israel**, and the southern area was called **Judah**. When David and Solomon ruled as kings, these two areas together made up one kingdom. After Solomon died, the northern area rebelled and created its own kingdom. God refers to both kingdoms because he wants the audience to know that he is making this **new covenant** with all of his people. If your readers would misunderstand why God mentions both **Israel** and **Judah**, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the houses of both Israel and Judah” or “with all my people, including the house of Israel and the house of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 8 9 r0ap figs-quotations οὐ κατὰ τὴν διαθήκην ἣν ἐποίησα τοῖς πατράσιν αὐτῶν, ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἐπιλαβομένου μου τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῶν, ἐξαγαγεῖν αὐτοὺς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου; ὅτι αὐτοὶ οὐκ ἐνέμειναν ἐν τῇ διαθήκῃ μου, κἀγὼ ἠμέλησα αὐτῶν, λέγει Κύριος. 1 I took them by their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these words as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you translate these words as an indirect quote, you also need to translate the words in the previous verse and the following three verses as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “not according to the covenant that he made with their fathers on the day when he grasped their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt, because they did not continue in his covenant, and he did not care about them, so he says.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 8 9 qses translate-kinship τοῖς πατράσιν αὐτῶν 1 I took them by their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt Here, **their fathers** refers to the Israelites who were alive before Jesus lived on earth. The audience of the original quotation were Israelites who descended from these people. Use a word or phrase that refers to ancestors. Alternate translation: “with their forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) @@ -975,7 +975,7 @@ HEB 8 9 a9r8 figs-123person λέγει Κύριος 1 I took them by their hand HEB 8 10 guov grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 the house of Israel Here, the word **For** introduces a description of the new covenant in contrast to the old covenant that God described in [8:9](../08/09.md). This description of the new covenant continues through [8:11–12](../08/11.md) If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces a description that contrasts with a previous description. Alternate translation: “But” or “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 8 10 fh1c figs-quotations ὅτι αὕτη ἡ διαθήκη, ἣν διαθήσομαι τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰσραὴλ μετὰ τὰς ἡμέρας ἐκείνας, λέγει Κύριος, διδοὺς νόμους μου εἰς τὴν διάνοιαν αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν ἐπιγράψω αὐτούς; καὶ ἔσομαι αὐτοῖς εἰς Θεόν, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔσονταί μοι εἰς λαόν. 1 General Information: If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these words as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you translate these words as an indirect quote, you also need to translate the words in the previous two verses and the following two verses as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “For this is the covenant that he will covenant with the house of Israel after those days, so he says, putting his laws into their mind, and he will write them on their hearts, and he will be to them as God, and they will be to him as a people.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 8 10 z7wf διαθήσομαι 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “I will set up” -HEB 8 10 k2ew figs-metaphor τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰσραὴλ 1 the house of Israel Here, the word **house** figuratively refers to a group of people. The phrase **the house of Israel** thus refers to everyone whom God considers to be part of the people of **Israel**. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “with the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 8 10 k2ew figs-metaphor τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰσραὴλ 1 the house of Israel Here, the word **house** refers to a group of people. The phrase **the house of Israel** thus refers to everyone whom God considers to be part of the people of **Israel**. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “with the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 8 10 q78u figs-idiom μετὰ τὰς ἡμέρας ἐκείνας 1 after those days Here, the phrase **after those days** identifies something happens after a certain period of time. That period of time could be long or short, not necessarily just several **days**. Here, God’s point is that he will make this new covenant in the future. If your readers would misunderstand **after those days**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to action that will happen at some point in the future. Alternate translation: “in the future” or “after that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 8 10 du3y figs-123person λέγει Κύριος 1 after those days Here, just as in [8:8–9](../08/08.md), the author has God speaking about himself in the third person. He uses this form because the quotation uses the third person to speak about God, and the author claims that God speaks the quotation. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could clarify that God is speaking about himself. Alternate translation: “I the Lord say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) HEB 8 10 axqs figs-parallelism διδοὺς νόμους μου εἰς τὴν διάνοιαν αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν ἐπιγράψω αὐτούς 1 after those days Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement uses “putting” and **mind** language, and the other uses “writing” and **heart** language. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If your readers would misunderstand the parallelism, and if this would not be good poetry in your culture, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “writing my laws on their hearts” or “putting my laws inside them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -990,7 +990,7 @@ HEB 8 11 wne2 figs-parallelism ἕκαστος τὸν πολίτην αὐτο HEB 8 11 v36j figs-gendernotations αὐτοῦ…τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 neighbor … brother Although **his** and **brother** are masculine, they refer to anyone, whether male or female. If your readers would misunderstand **his** and **brother**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her … his or her sibling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 8 11 jl1h figs-quotesinquotes λέγων, γνῶθι τὸν Κύριον 1 They will not teach each one his neighbor and each one his brother, saying, ‘Know the Lord.’ If a direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that he should know the Lord,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) HEB 8 11 mehi figs-yousingular γνῶθι 1 They will not teach each one his neighbor and each one his brother, saying, ‘Know the Lord.’ Because **each one** is speaking to one person, the imperative **Know** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -HEB 8 11 q5ki figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου αὐτῶν 1 Know the Lord … will all know me Here God speaks figuratively, using **the least** and **the greatest** in order to include them and every person in between. By speaking in this way, he includes every person who is part of his people. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “every single one of them” or “including people of every status” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +HEB 8 11 q5ki figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου αὐτῶν 1 Know the Lord … will all know me Here God speaks, using **the least** and **the greatest** in order to include them and every person in between. By speaking in this way, he includes every person who is part of his people. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “every single one of them” or “including people of every status” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) HEB 8 11 u98k figs-idiom ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου αὐτῶν 1 Know the Lord … will all know me Here, the phrases **the least** and **the greatest** refer to people who have the least and the most importance and power in a society. If your readers would misunderstand **the least** and **the greatest**, you could use comparable phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least powerful of them to the most powerful” or “from the littlest ones to the biggest ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 8 11 ne4p figs-nominaladj μικροῦ…μεγάλου 1 Know the Lord … will all know me The author is using the adjectives **least** and **greatest** as nouns in order to refer to people who are **least** and **greatest**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “the least person … the greatest person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) HEB 8 12 zksg figs-quotations ὅτι ἵλεως ἔσομαι ταῖς ἀδικίαις αὐτῶν, καὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν οὐ μὴ μνησθῶ ἔτι 1 toward their evil deeds If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these words as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you translate these words as an indirect quote, you also need to translate the words in the previous four verses as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “For he will be merciful toward their unrighteousness, and their sins he will certainly not remember any longer.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -1065,7 +1065,7 @@ HEB 9 8 e14c figs-explicit τῆς πρώτης σκηνῆς 1 the first tabern HEB 9 8 y9hg translate-ordinal τῆς πρώτης σκηνῆς 1 the first tabernacle was still standing If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “tabernacle one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) HEB 9 8 qujz figs-metaphor ἐχούσης στάσιν 1 the first tabernacle was still standing Here the author refers to how the **first tabernacle** has a **place**. By speaking in this way, he could be referring to: (1) how the **first tabernacle** has legal standing. In other words, when the **first tabernacle** has a **place**, that means that people are required to use when they worship God. Alternate translation: “still having cultic standing” or “functioning as part of God’s sanctuary” (2) how the **first tabernacle** exists in a **place**. In other words, when the **first tabernacle** has a **place**, that means that it still exists. Alternate translation: “continuing to exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 9 9 ojuy writing-pronouns ἥτις 1 This was an illustration Here, the word **which** could refer to: (1) the “first tabernacle” ([9:8](../09/08.md)). Alternate translation: “which first tabernacle is” (2) everything about the earthly “tabernacle” that the author has discussed. Alternate translation: “all of which is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -HEB 9 9 cu76 translate-unknown ἥτις παραβολὴ 1 This was an illustration Here, the word **parable** refers to a figure of speech in which one thing represents another thing. Here the first tabernacle (or the earthly tabernacle as a whole) figuratively represents **the present time**. If your readers would misunderstand **parable**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a figure of speech. Alternate translation: “which represents” or “which figuratively stands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +HEB 9 9 cu76 translate-unknown ἥτις παραβολὴ 1 This was an illustration Here, the word **parable** refers to a figure of speech in which one thing represents another thing. Here the first tabernacle (or the earthly tabernacle as a whole) represents **the present time**. If your readers would misunderstand **parable**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a figure of speech. Alternate translation: “which represents” or “which stands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 9 9 fl6i figs-explicit εἰς τὸν καιρὸν τὸν ἐνεστηκότα 1 for the present time Here, the phrase **the present time** could refer to: (1) the period during which the earthly tabernacle functioned as God’s sanctuary on earth. In this case, the **parable** represents **the present time** Alternate translation: “for the time during which it functioned” or “for their time” (2) the period between Jesus’s first and second comings. In this case, the **parable** represents the period up to **the present time**. Alternate translation: “for the time up to the present” or “for the period of time until Jesus came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 9 eqhz writing-pronouns καθ’ ἣν 1 for the present time Here, the word **which** could refer to: (1) the **parable**. In this case, the way that the **gifts and sacrifices** cannot **perfect the worshiper** is part of the **parable**. Alternate translation: “according to which parable” (2) the “first tabernacle” in [9:8](../09/08.md). In this case, the **gifts and sacrifices** are offered in a way that matches the nature of the “first tabernacle.” Alternate translation: “according to which tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 9 9 wb9n figs-doublet δῶρά τε καὶ θυσίαι 1 for the present time Here, **gifts** and **sacrifices** function together to refer to anything that an Israelite would have offered to God. It is probable that **sacrifices** refers to animals that would be killed and offered to God, while **gifts** identifies anything else that a person would give to God. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to refer to what an Israelite would offer to God. See you how you translated the same phrase in [8:3](../08/03.md). Alternate translation: “sacrifices” or “things presented to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -1088,7 +1088,7 @@ HEB 9 11 czx6 figs-explicit τῆς μείζονος καὶ τελειοτέρ HEB 9 11 jyqn figs-doublet μείζονος καὶ τελειοτέρας 1 the greater and more perfect tabernacle Here, **greater** and **more perfect** function together to refer to identify the heavenly **tabernacle** as superior to the earthly one. It is probable that **greater** identifies the heavenly **tabernacle** as more important, while **more perfect** identifies it as more able to accomplish what it was intended to do. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to refer to identify the heavenly **tabernacle** as more important and effective than the earthly one. Alternate translation: “better” or “more powerfully effective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 9 11 h434 figs-explicit οὐ χειροποιήτου τοῦτ’ ἔστιν, οὐ ταύτης τῆς κτίσεως 1 the greater and more perfect tabernacle Here, the phrase **not made by human hands** means that God, not humans, made this **tabernacle**. The phrase **not of this creation** means that the **tabernacle** is not part of the earthly world. Scholars debate whether this means that it belongs to the heavenly world (“another creation”) or whether this means that it is “uncreated.” If your readers would misunderstand these phrases, you could make the ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “made not by humans but by God, that is, of the heavenly creation” or “not made by people, that is, not created at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 11 lxw8 figs-activepassive οὐ χειροποιήτου τοῦτ’ ἔστιν, οὐ 1 that was not made by human hands If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus the **tabernacle**, which is **not made** rather than focusing on the **human hands** that did not make it. Alternate translation: “that human hands did not make, that is, that is not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 9 11 mtj9 figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτου 1 human hands Here, the phrase **human hands** refers to main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase figuratively refers to the whole person who makes things. If your readers would misunderstand **made by human hands**, you could clarify that it refers to “humans” in general, not just their hands. Alternate translation: “made by humans” or “made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +HEB 9 11 mtj9 figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτου 1 human hands Here, the phrase **human hands** refers to main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase refers to the whole person who makes things. If your readers would misunderstand **made by human hands**, you could clarify that it refers to “humans” in general, not just their hands. Alternate translation: “made by humans” or “made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) HEB 9 12 dp2i figs-explicit οὐδὲ δι’ αἵματος τράγων καὶ μόσχων, διὰ δὲ τοῦ ἰδίου αἵματος 1 most holy place Here the author refers to how a high priest would “enter” the sanctuary, taking with him **blood** from a sacrifice. He would present the **blood** to God and then apply it to various parts of the sanctuary, the altar, and the ark. In this verse, the author contrasts how those priests presented **blood** from animals with how Jesus presented **his own blood**. Scholars debate what **his own blood** represents. It could refer to his resurrected body, his death, or his actual blood. See the book introduction for more information on how Jesus functions as a high priest. If your readers would misunderstand what the author is talking about here, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “and not by the blood from slaughtered goats and calves, which is what the Levitical priests use, but by his own blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 12 ox1p figs-doublet τράγων καὶ μόσχων 1 most holy place Here the author refers to **goats** and **calves** as two examples of animals that could be sacrificed so that the Levitical high priest could enter the sanctuary with their **blood**. These were not the only animals that could be sacrificed. If your readers would misunderstand why the author refers specifically to **goats and calves**, you could use a form in your language that refers generally to animals that are sacrificed. Alternate translation: “of sacrificed animals” or “of animals from flock or herd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 9 12 a8oh figs-go εἰσῆλθεν…εἰς 1 most holy place Here, the phrase **entered into** refers to movement from outside a structure into a structure. Use a word or phrase that identifies this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “he moved into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -1127,7 +1127,7 @@ HEB 9 15 hgp3 figs-metaphor οἱ κεκλημένοι 1 first covenant Here, th HEB 9 15 ve3v figs-activepassive οἱ κεκλημένοι 1 those who are called If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **the ones** who are **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 9 15 mfzh λάβωσιν 1 those who are called Here the author may be indicating that **the ones called** are able to **receive the promise**: (1) at least partially right now. Alternate translation: “are receiving” (2) in the future. Alternate translation: “will receive” HEB 9 15 j3ac figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν…τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας 1 inheritance If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **promise** and **inheritance**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “promise” and “inherit.” Alternate translation: “imitate me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 9 15 vdpc figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν…τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας 1 inheritance Here, the word **promise** figuratively refers to the content of the **promise**. If your readers would misunderstand **promise**, you could refer to what is promised. Alternate translation: “what is promised concerning the eternal inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 9 15 vdpc figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν…τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας 1 inheritance Here, the word **promise** refers to the content of the **promise**. If your readers would misunderstand **promise**, you could refer to what is promised. Alternate translation: “what is promised concerning the eternal inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 9 15 e1ii figs-possession τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν…τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας 1 inheritance Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **promise** whose content is **the eternal inheritance**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the promise, that is, the eternal inheritance” or “the promised eternal inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 9 15 xb9f figs-metaphor τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας 1 inheritance Here the author speaks as if believers were children who would “inherit” property that a parent passes on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers receive what God promised. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “of what God gives his people forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 9 16 lfsq grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 the death of the person who made it must be proven Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what the author said in the previous verse ([9:15](../09/15.md)) about “a death” and “a mediator of a new covenant.” If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “About covenants and deaths,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -1188,7 +1188,7 @@ HEB 9 23 xyys figs-genericnoun κρείττοσι θυσίαις 1 the heavenly HEB 9 24 drtu grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 the most holy place made with hands, which Here, the word **for** introduces a further explanation of what the author said in the previous verse ([9:23](../09/23.md)) about the “heavenly things” and the “better sacrifices.” The explanation continues through [9:25–26](../09/25.md). If your readers would misunderstand **for**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “which is why” or “and so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 9 24 xo5m figs-go οὐ…εἰς…εἰσῆλθεν 1 the most holy place made with hands, which Here, the phrase **did not enter** refers to movement from outside a structure into the structure. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “did not pass into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 9 24 svu2 figs-explicit χειροποίητα…ἅγια…ἀντίτυπα τῶν ἀληθινῶν 1 the most holy place made with hands, which Here, the phrases **holy {places}** and **copies** refer to the earthly Most Holy Place. The phrase **the true ones** refers to the heavenly Most Holy Place. If your readers would misunderstand these phrases, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a Most Holy Place made with hands—a copy of the true heavenly one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 9 24 cy2x figs-synecdoche χειροποίητα 1 the most holy place made with hands, which Here, the word **hands** refers to main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase figuratively refers to the whole person who makes things. If your readers would misunderstand **made with hands**, you could clarify that it refers to “humans” in general, not just their **hands**. Alternate translation: “made by humans” or “made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +HEB 9 24 cy2x figs-synecdoche χειροποίητα 1 the most holy place made with hands, which Here, the word **hands** refers to main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase refers to the whole person who makes things. If your readers would misunderstand **made with hands**, you could clarify that it refers to “humans” in general, not just their **hands**. Alternate translation: “made by humans” or “made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) HEB 9 24 akii figs-activepassive χειροποίητα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **holy {places}** that are **made** rather than focusing on the **hands**, which **made** them. Alternate translation: “that hands made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 9 24 l1ce translate-unknown ἀντίτυπα 1 Here, the word **copies** identifies the **holy {places} made with hands** as something that models or is based on **the true ones**. If your readers would misunderstand **copies**, you could use a word or phrase that describes something that is based on something else. See you how translated **examples** in [9:23](../09/23.md). Alternate translation: “illustrations” or “replicas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 9 24 p0y0 figs-explicit αὐτὸν τὸν οὐρανόν 1 Here, the phrase **heaven itself** is singular instead of plural, which is what the author has usually used when he speaks about the “heavens” in this letter. It is likely that the author uses the phrase **heaven itself** to refer to the highest of multiple heavens, which is where the heavenly sanctuary and God’s throne are. If your readers would misunderstand **heaven itself**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the highest or most important heaven. Alternate translation: “the heaven that is above all the others” or “the most important heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1250,7 +1250,7 @@ HEB 10 3 z3je figs-abstractnouns ἐν αὐταῖς ἀνάμνησις ἁμ HEB 10 3 l4me figs-idiom κατ’ ἐνιαυτόν 1 Here, just as in [10:1](../10/01.md), the phrase **every year** identifies an action that happens often and repeatedly. If your readers would misunderstand **every year**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies a frequent and repeated action. Alternate translation: “day after day” or “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 10 4 di8i grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins Here, the word **For** introduces support for the author’s claim that the sacrifices give a “reminder of sins every year” ([10:3](../10/03.md)). His point here is that the sacrifices cannot **take away sins**, so all they can do is function as a “reminder” of the sins that they do not **take away**. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 10 4 stkp figs-explicit αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων ἀφαιρεῖν ἁμαρτίας 1 For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins Here, the phrase **blood of bulls and goats** may refer specifically to the offerings performed on the Day of Atonement (see [Leviticus 16](../lev/16/01.md)). However, the author is also referring in general to **blood** from any sacrifice. You should express the idea in general terms, as the author does. Alternate translation: “blood from animal sacrifices to take away sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 10 4 lbdu figs-metonymy αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων ἀφαιρεῖν ἁμαρτίας 1 For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins Here, the word **blood** refers figuratively to offering the **blood**. The word **sins** refers figuratively to the consequences of sin that people experience, including guilt, impurity, and alienation from God. If your readers would misunderstand **blood** and **sins**, you could express the ideas with short phrases. Alternate translation: “the offering of the blood of bulls and goats to take away the consequences of sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 10 4 lbdu figs-metonymy αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων ἀφαιρεῖν ἁμαρτίας 1 For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins Here, the word **blood** refers to offering the **blood**. The word **sins** refers to the consequences of sin that people experience, including guilt, impurity, and alienation from God. If your readers would misunderstand **blood** and **sins**, you could express the ideas with short phrases. Alternate translation: “the offering of the blood of bulls and goats to take away the consequences of sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 4 bvu5 figs-doublet ταύρων καὶ τράγων 1 the blood of bulls and goats Here the author refers to **bulls and goats** as two examples of animals that were sacrificed so that the high priest could enter the sanctuary with their **blood**. These were not the only animals that could be sacrificed, and the author is not trying to be exhaustive. If your readers would misunderstand why the author refers specifically to **bulls and goats**, you could use a form in your language that refers generally to animals that are sacrificed. Alternate translation: “of sacrificed animals” or “of animals from flock or herd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 10 5 q4ye grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 General Information: Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference based on what the author has said about how “blood of bulls and goats” does not “take away sins” (see [10:4](../10/04.md)). Because that is true, Jesus speaks the words that the author quotes. If your readers would misunderstand **Therefore**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 10 5 xp0e grammar-connect-time-simultaneous εἰσερχόμενος 1 you did not desire Here, the word **entering** introduces an action that could happen (1) at the same as he **says** the quotation that follows. Alternate translation: “as he enters” (2) before he **says** the quotation that follows. Alternate translation: “as he was about to enter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) @@ -1295,7 +1295,7 @@ HEB 10 11 x83h grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ…μὲν 1 can never take HEB 10 11 y25p translate-unknown ἕστηκεν 1 can never take away sins Here, the word **stands** refers to someone staying on their feet and not sitting down. It does not mean that the person does not move. The author uses the word **stands** because he will contrast it with how Jesus “sits” (see [10:12](../10/12.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **stands**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how a person does not sit down but stays in an upright position. Alternate translation: “stays on his feet” or “stands and walks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 10 11 jq4i figs-idiom καθ’ ἡμέραν 1 can never take away sins Here, the phrase **every day** identifies an action that happens very often and repeatedly. If your readers would misunderstand **every day**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies a very frequent and repeated action. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 10 11 uw6i figs-infostructure ἕστηκεν καθ’ ἡμέραν λειτουργῶν 1 can never take away sins Here, the phrase **each day** could modify: (1) **stands**. Alternate translation: “stands every day, serving” (2) **serving**. Alternate translation: “stands, serving every day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -HEB 10 11 bh1w figs-metonymy θυσίας, αἵτινες οὐδέποτε δύνανται περιελεῖν ἁμαρτίας 1 can never take away sins Here, the word **that** refers figuratively to offering the **sacrifices**, not just to the **sacrifices** themselves. The word **sins** refers figuratively to the consequences of sin that people experience, including guilt, impurity, and alienation from God. If your readers would misunderstand **that** and **sins**, you could express the ideas with short phrases. Alternate translation: “sacrifices. When people offer these sacrifices, they cannot take away the consequences of their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 10 11 bh1w figs-metonymy θυσίας, αἵτινες οὐδέποτε δύνανται περιελεῖν ἁμαρτίας 1 can never take away sins Here, the word **that** refers to offering the **sacrifices**, not just to the **sacrifices** themselves. The word **sins** refers to the consequences of sin that people experience, including guilt, impurity, and alienation from God. If your readers would misunderstand **that** and **sins**, you could express the ideas with short phrases. Alternate translation: “sacrifices. When people offer these sacrifices, they cannot take away the consequences of their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 12 zr61 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 he sat down at the right hand of God Here, the word **But** introduces the second half of the contrast that the author introduced in [10:11](../10/11.md). If your readers would misunderstand **But**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the second part of a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” or “But second,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) HEB 10 12 mksp writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 he sat down at the right hand of God Here, the word **he** refers to Christ. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **he** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 10 12 lfl1 grammar-connect-time-sequential προσενέγκας 1 he sat down at the right hand of God Here, the phrase **having offered** could introduce an action (1) that occurs before he **sat down**. Alternate translation: “after having offered” (2) that is the means by which or the reason why he **sat down**. Alternate translation: “because he offered” or “by means of having offered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) @@ -1340,11 +1340,11 @@ HEB 10 20 l7wh translate-unknown πρόσφατον 1 living way Here, the word HEB 10 20 zx1a figs-metaphor ὁδὸν πρόσφατον καὶ ζῶσαν 1 living way Here, the author describes the **way** as if it were a person or thing that was **living**. By speaking in this way, he could be identifying the **way** as: (1) something that is effective at accomplishing what it intends, just like a **living** person can do or accomplish things. Alternate translation: “a fresh and powerful way” or “a fresh and effectual way” (2) something that leads to “life.” Alternate translation: “a fresh way that leads to life” (3) something that is related to Jesus, who is **living** when he “inaugurates” this way. Alternate translation: “a fresh way given by the living Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 20 c3ve figs-explicit διὰ τοῦ καταπετάσματος 1 through the curtain Here, the phrase **the curtain** refers to the cloth hanging that separates the Most Holy Place from the Holy Place. Scholars debate whether the author considers the **curtain** to be a barrier, a means of access, or simply a dividing line. However you understand the curtain, you should translate the phrase much like you did in [6:19](../06/19.md). Alternate translation: “through the dividing curtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 10 20 p3a9 figs-explicit τοῦτ’ ἔστιν τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 through the curtain Here, the phrase **that is, his flesh** could modify: (1) the **curtain**. In this case, the author is identifying the **curtain** and the **flesh**, which is metaphor. The author’s point is that Jesus had to go through the **curtain** to enter the Most Holy Place, and similarly he had to live and die in **his flesh** before he entered the Most Holy Place. Alternate translation: “which is his flesh” (2) the whole previous clause. In this case, the word **through** is implied, and **his flesh** is the means by which he **inaugurated** the **way**. In this case, the word **through** with **curtain** refers to where Jesus went, while the implied **through** with **his flesh** refers to means by which he went there. Alternate translation: “that is, through his flesh” or “that is, by means of his flesh” (3) the word **way**. In this case, the author is describing the **way** as what Jesus did in **his flesh** or as the **flesh** itself. Alternate translation: “that is, the way of his flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 10 20 ega9 figs-metonymy τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 his flesh Here, the word **flesh** could refer figuratively to: (1) Jesus’ earthly life. In other words, the phrase **his flesh** refers to Jesus as he lived on earth before his death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “his earthly life” (2) Jesus’ body offered to God in obedience up to and including death. Alternate translation: “the body that he offered” or “his sacrificial death” (3) Jesus’ humanity in general. Alternate translation: “his humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 10 20 ega9 figs-metonymy τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 his flesh Here, the word **flesh** could refer to: (1) Jesus’ earthly life. In other words, the phrase **his flesh** refers to Jesus as he lived on earth before his death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “his earthly life” (2) Jesus’ body offered to God in obedience up to and including death. Alternate translation: “the body that he offered” or “his sacrificial death” (3) Jesus’ humanity in general. Alternate translation: “his humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 21 uh6i figs-explicit ἱερέα μέγαν 1 we have a great priest over the house of God Here the author implies that the **great priest** is Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand who the **great priest** is, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “a great priest, Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 10 21 pkxk ἱερέα μέγαν 1 we have a great priest over the house of God Here, the phrase **great priest** could be: (1) a synonym for “high priest.” Alternate translation: “a high priest” (2) a description of the **priest** as **great**, or important and powerful. Alternate translation: “a priest who is great” HEB 10 21 bmh1 figs-idiom ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον 1 over the house The phrase **over the house** indicates that the **great priest** rules or is in charge of the **house**. If your readers would misunderstand **over the house**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the **great priest** as the one who rules or is in charge of the **house**. See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “in charge of the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 10 21 d1u1 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the house of God Here, the word **house** figuratively refers to a group of people, here all God’s people. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. See how you translated **house** in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “God’s tribe” or “God’s clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 10 21 d1u1 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the house of God Here, the word **house** refers to a group of people, here all God’s people. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. See how you translated **house** in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “God’s tribe” or “God’s clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 22 l4ik figs-go προσερχώμεθα 1 let us approach Here, **approach** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author wants believers to **approach** the heavenly sanctuary (see [10:19](../10/19.md)). This means that they enter into God’s presence. It does not mean that they enter into heaven to be within the sanctuary itself. If your readers would misunderstand **approach**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someone’s presence. See how you translated the similar construction in [4:16](../04/16.md). Alternate translation: “let us go before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 10 22 von8 translate-unknown μετὰ ἀληθινῆς καρδίας 1 let us approach Here, the word **true** refers to something that is reliable or sure. In this case, **a true heart** would refer to a **heart** that is “sincere” or “single-minded.” If your readers would misunderstand **true**, you could use a word that identifies the **heart** as “sincere” or with only one aim or goal. Alternate translation: “with a sincere heart” or “with a single-minded heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 10 22 wez1 figs-metonymy ἀληθινῆς καρδίας…τὰς καρδίας 1 with true hearts In the author’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and plan. If your readers would misunderstand **heart**, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “true desire … our desires” or “true thoughts … our thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1359,7 +1359,7 @@ HEB 10 22 tk9p grammar-collectivenouns τὸ σῶμα 1 our bodies washed with HEB 10 23 k5ui figs-metaphor κατέχωμεν 1 Let us also hold tightly to the confession of our hope Here, the phrase **hold tightly** refers to continuing to firmly believe or trust something, particularly something that one has been told. If your readers would misunderstand **hold tightly**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to continuing to believe or trust. See how you translated the phrase “hold fast” in [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “Let us tightly grasp” or “Let us remain in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 23 dhu8 figs-possession τὴν ὁμολογίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Let us also hold tightly to the confession of our hope Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **confession** that affirms or “confesses” **{our} hope**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the confession about our hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 10 23 n57o figs-abstractnouns τὴν ὁμολογίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **confession** and **hope**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “confess” and “hope.” Alternate translation: “what we confess that we hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 10 23 pckf figs-metonymy τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Here, the word **hope** figuratively refers to the contents of the **hope**, or what believers confidently expect. If your readers would misunderstand **hope**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **hope**. Alternate translation: “of the things that we hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 10 23 pckf figs-metonymy τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Here, the word **hope** refers to the contents of the **hope**, or what believers confidently expect. If your readers would misunderstand **hope**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **hope**. Alternate translation: “of the things that we hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 23 jy4t figs-metaphor ἀκλινῆ 1 without wavering Here, the phrase **without wavering** describes what the **confession** should be like as Christians **hold tightly** to it. The phrase refers to something that does not move or sway from side to side. In other words, something that stays firmly in one place is **without wavering**. The author speaks in this way to encourage the audience to maintain the **confession** in such a way that it does not change or vary. If your readers would misunderstand **without wavering**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to something that does not change or that is constant. Alternate translation: “steadfast” or “so that it stays the same” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 23 dtxl writing-pronouns ὁ ἐπαγγειλάμενος 1 without wavering Here, the word **one** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **one** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the one having promised, God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 10 24 i6ks figs-idiom κατανοῶμεν ἀλλήλους 1 without wavering Here, the phrase **consider one another** refers to thinking and caring about fellow believers. If your readers would misunderstand **consider one another**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to thinking about or spending time on fellow believers. See how you translated the similar phrase with Jesus as the object in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “let us focus on one another” or “let us spend time thinking about one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1439,7 +1439,7 @@ HEB 10 36 zmf9 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** i HEB 10 36 lgu4 figs-abstractnouns ὑπομονῆς…ἔχετε χρείαν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **need** and **endurance**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “need” and “endure” or “persevere.” Alternate translation: “you must persevere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 10 36 zdcx grammar-connect-time-sequential ποιήσαντες 1 Here, the phrase **having done** could introduce: (1) an action which occurs before “obtaining the promise.” Alternate translation: “after having done” (2) the basis or reason for “obtaining the promise.” Alternate translation: “because you have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) HEB 10 36 xy9j figs-abstractnouns τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **will**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “want” or “desire.” Alternate translation: “what God wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 10 36 ezun figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν 1 Here, the word **promise** figuratively refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promise” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 10 36 ezun figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν 1 Here, the word **promise** refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promise” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 36 hj2e figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “what God pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 10 37 uvq3 figs-quotemarks ἔτι γὰρ μικρὸν ὅσον, ὅσον ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 For in a very little while The words of the quotation could begin with: (1) **yet**. Alternate translation: “For ‘yet in a very little while, the one coming” (2) **{in} a very little {while}**. Alternate translation: “For yet ‘in a very little while, the one coming” (3) **the one coming**. Alternate translation: “For yet in a very little while, ‘the one coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) HEB 10 37 gpp8 writing-quotations γὰρ 1 For in a very little while Here the author uses the word **For** to introduce a quotation from the Old Testament, which continues in the following verse. This quotation supports what he has said about how the audience needs “endurance” (see [10:37](../10/37.md)). The quotation is from [Habakkuk 2:3–4](../hab/02/03.md), although the author rearranges some clauses in the following verse. Further, the phrase **yet {in} a very little {while}** paraphrases the beginning of [Habakkuk 2:3](../hab/02/03.md), and it sounds much like part of [Isaiah 26:20](../isa/26/20.md). However, the author introduces these words as one quotation, so you should also do that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit that the author is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For in the Scriptures it says,” or “For someone wrote in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) @@ -1570,7 +1570,7 @@ HEB 11 12 x8b2 figs-simile καθὼς τὰ ἄστρα τοῦ οὐρανο HEB 11 12 mu4e figs-simile ὡς ἡ ἄμμος, ἡ παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τῆς θαλάσσης, ἡ ἀναρίθμητος 1 as countless as sand by the seashore Here the author compares the number of Abraham’s descendants to the amount of **sand** on a beach by the **sea**, which is so great that no one can count it (**countless**). He uses this comparison to emphasize how many descendants there are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that the author is referring to many descendants and many grains of **sand**. Alternate translation: “as many as the numberless grains of sand along the shore of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) HEB 11 13 tw2p figs-abstractnouns κατὰ πίστιν 1 without receiving the promises If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “While they were believing,” or “As they believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 13 rxtn writing-pronouns οὗτοι πάντες 1 without receiving the promises Here, and throughout [11:13–16](../11/13.md), the author could be referring: (1) generally to all the people that the author has discussed in the chapter. Alternate translation: “those I have mentioned” or “all these who had faith” (2) specifically to Abraham, Sarah, Isaac, and Jacob, who are mentioned in [11:8–12](../11/08.md). Alternate translation: “the patriarchs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -HEB 11 13 yin6 figs-metonymy τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 without receiving the promises Here, the word **promises** figuratively refers to the contents of the **promises**, or what God has “promised” to give. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of the **promises**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promises” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 11 13 yin6 figs-metonymy τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 without receiving the promises Here, the word **promises** refers to the contents of the **promises**, or what God has “promised” to give. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of the **promises**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promises” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 11 13 l2ln figs-abstractnouns τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 without receiving the promises If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promises**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “what God pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 13 g5ut figs-personification πόρρωθεν αὐτὰς ἰδόντες καὶ ἀσπασάμενοι 1 after seeing and greeting them from far off Here the author speaks as if **the promises** were travelers arriving from far away that people could “see” and “greet.” The author means that the people he has mentioned in this chapter were as sure of the **promises** as if they could already see and communicate with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “but anticipating and expecting them in the future” or “seeing and greeting them from far off as if the promises were expected visitors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) HEB 11 13 n71b figs-pastforfuture εἰσιν 1 they admitted Here the author uses the present tense because he is reporting what **all these** people **confessed** while they were alive. Use a natural tense in your language to report what people in the past said. Alternate translation: “they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) @@ -1613,7 +1613,7 @@ HEB 11 18 c23z figs-idiom κληθήσεταί 1 your descendants will be named HEB 11 19 spl8 grammar-connect-logic-result λογισάμενος 1 God was able to raise up Isaac from the dead Here, the phrase **having reasoned** introduces the reason why Abraham acted as the author described in [11:17](../11/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because he reasoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 11 19 p43u figs-idiom καὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγείρειν 1 God was able to raise up Isaac from the dead Here the author uses the phrase **raise up** to refer to how God makes someone who has died come back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or translate the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to restore even the dead to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 11 19 sar1 figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 to raise up … from the dead The author is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -HEB 11 19 aea3 translate-unknown αὐτὸν…ἐν παραβολῇ ἐκομίσατο 1 figuratively speaking Here, the phrase **in a parable** indicates that what the author is about to say should not be understood literally. The **parable** could refer to: (1) how Isaac did not really die, so the statement that Abraham received Isaac back from the dead overstates what actually happened. Alternate translation: “it was as if he received him back” (2) how Isaac almost dying and then being **received** back figuratively represents how God will resurrect everyone who believes. Alternate translation: “in a type, he received him back” or “in a foreshadowing, he received him back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +HEB 11 19 aea3 translate-unknown αὐτὸν…ἐν παραβολῇ ἐκομίσατο 1 figuratively speaking Here, the phrase **in a parable** indicates that what the author is about to say should not be understood literally. The **parable** could refer to: (1) how Isaac did not really die, so the statement that Abraham received Isaac back from the dead overstates what actually happened. Alternate translation: “it was as if he received him back” (2) how Isaac almost dying and then being **received** back represents how God will resurrect everyone who believes. Alternate translation: “in a type, he received him back” or “in a foreshadowing, he received him back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 11 19 hjxf writing-pronouns αὐτὸν…ἐκομίσατο 1 figuratively speaking Here, the word **he** refers to Abraham, and the word **him** refers to Isaac. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make to whom these words refer more explicit. Alternate translation: “Abraham received Isaac back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 11 19 k7u3 ὅθεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν παραβολῇ ἐκομίσατο 1 from there Here, the word translated **from there** could be: (1) a reference back to the **dead**, specifically the state of being **dead**. Alternate translation: “and in a parable, he received him back from being dead” (2) a linking word that indicates the cause of Abraham receiving Isaac back. Alternate translation: “because of which, also in a parable, he received him back” HEB 11 20 o8gj 0 he received him back Here the author refers to a story about how **Isaac** blessed his twin sons **Jacob** and **Esau**. In the story, Jacob pretends to be Esau and receives the blessing that Isaac intended for Esau. When Esau comes to receive his blessing, Isaac realizes that Jacob stole the blessing from Esau. He then gives Esau a different blessing. You can read about Isaac blessing his sons in [Genesis 27:1–40](../gen/27/01.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 0b5a574744..dc6bfbe7ed 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -1,23 +1,23 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -JAS front intro exs3 0 # Introduction to James

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of James

1. Greetings (1:1)
2. Gaining endurance through trials (1:2-4)
3. Trusting God for wisdom (1:5-8)
4. What poor and rich people should boast about (1:9-11)
5. Enduring temptation (1:12-15)
6. Hearing and doing what God’s Word says (1:16-27)
7. A warning against favoring rich people (2:1-13)
8. Faith and works (2:14-26)
9. The need for self-control in speech (3:1-12)
10. Worldly wisdom and heavenly wisdom contrasted (3:13-18)
11. Worldly desires and the sin and conflict they cause (4:1-12)
12. A warning against boasting about tomorrow (4:13-17)
13. Rebuke of rich people (5:1-6)
14. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7-11)
15. Oaths forbidden (5:12)
16. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13-18)
17. Restoration of a sinner (5:19-20)

### Who wrote the book of James?

There is wide agreement among biblical scholars that the author of this book was James the half-brother of Jesus, who was a leader in the early church in the city of Jerusalem. He was respected for his wisdom and authority. For example, he had the last word at the Jerusalem Council, an important meeting of the early church, that is described in [Acts 15:13-21](../act/15/13.md). In [Galatians 2:9](../gal/02/09.md), the apostle Paul calls him a “pillar” of the church, meaning one of its most important leaders. However, even though James was an influential church leader and the half-brother of Jesus, in this letter he introduces himself humbly as “a servant of God and of the Lord Jesus Christ.”

This is not the same man as the apostle James, who was the brother of the apostle John. That James was killed for his faith a few years after Jesus himself was killed and rose from the dead. This letter was written many years after that.

### What kind of writing is the book of James?

The book of James has an opening that is typical of the letters of its time, but it does not have a main body that develops sequentially and logically the way a letter would have. Instead, the book presents a collection of short sayings and reflections on various subjects. (In that way it is similar to the book of Proverbs.) As the outline at the beginning of this introduction shows, the book is made up of many short sections that move around from topic to topic.

James uses many of the devices that speakers used in his time, such as anticipating and answering a question that someone might ask. He also uses many vivid examples drawn from both nature and everyday life. For this reason, many interpreters believe that for the content of this book, James drew on sermons he had preached and on wise advice he had given. He wanted to share all of that wisdom with Christians living in different parts of the Roman Empire to help them face difficult times. It is also possible that James wrote this letter because he was nearing the end of his life and he wanted his wisdom to be preserved and shared after his death.

### To whom was the book of James written?

James wrote this letter to believers in Jesus who had a Jewish background. This is clear from many of the things that he says in the letter. For example, he addresses his readers figuratively as “the twelve tribes” in [1:1](../01/01.md). He speaks of their meeting place as a “synagogue” in [2:2](../02/02.md). He assumes in [2:19](../02/19.md) that they are familiar with the essential Jewish affirmation that “God is one,” and in [2:21](../02/21.md) he calls Abraham “our father.” He calls God by the Hebrew title the Lord of Sabaoth in [5:4](../05/04.md). He assumes that his readers will be familiar from the Hebrew Scriptures with the stories of people such as Job ([5:11](../05/11.md)) and Elijah ([5:17](../05/17.md)). These notes will call attention to the places where James engages his readers in light of their Jewish background.

### What is the book of James about?

In this letter, James writes to believers living all over the Roman Empire who are suffering. He tells them that God is working through their sufferings to help them become more mature Christians. James also writes much in this letter about how believers should live in this world and treat one another. He urges them to treat other people fairly, not to quarrel and fight, and to be compassionate and generous.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “James.” Alternatively, they may choose a different title such as “A Letter from James” or “The Letter James Wrote.” But note that “James” is actually the English form of the author’s name. In the letter itself, he calls himself “Jacob,” which is the original Hebrew form of his name. So you may want to refer to him in the title of the book by the same name that you will use in your translation for the character of Jacob in the book of Genesis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Did James disagree with Paul about how a person is justified before God?

Paul taught in Romans that Christians are justified by faith and not by works. James seems to teach that Christians are justified by works. This could be confusing. However, a better understanding of what Paul and James each taught shows that they actually agree with one another. Both of them taught that a person needs faith in order to be justified. They both also taught that true faith would lead a person to do good works. Paul and James taught about these things in different ways because they had different audiences who needed to know different things about being justified. James wrote primarily to Jewish Christians, while Paul wrote to communities in which there were many Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How should the translator signal transitions between topics in the book of James?

James moves briskly from one topic to another. Often he does not end his discussion of one topic with a summary and then begin the discussion of the next topic with an introduction. It might be helpful to your readers if you set topics apart by putting blank lines between them. However, your readers would have the same experience of the letter that its original audience did if you allowed the transitions between topics to remain abrupt. Just as happens in the book of Proverbs, James seems to have wanted each new thought to strike his audience with fresh force. So you may also choose not to put any blank lines between topics in your translation.

James often makes the link between topics through key words, for example, “rejoice” in 1:1 and “joy” in 1:2; “lacking” in 1:4 and “lacks” in 1:5; and so forth. If you could find ways to translate these key words similarly in both of their occurrences, this should help your readers appreciate the link and the transition.

### Changes from the present tense to the past tense

In several places where James offers an illustration of a point he has just made, he narrates that illustration in the past tense as if he were telling the story of something that had happened. If this would be confusing for your readers, you could translate these illustrations in the present tense. Notes will identify each of these places and make that suggestion.

### Textual issues in the book of James

See the General Notes to chapter 2 for a discussion of one important textual issue in this book. +JAS front intro exs3 0 # Introduction to James

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of James

1. Greetings (1:1)
2. Gaining endurance through trials (1:2-4)
3. Trusting God for wisdom (1:5-8)
4. What poor and rich people should boast about (1:9-11)
5. Enduring temptation (1:12-15)
6. Hearing and doing what God’s Word says (1:16-27)
7. A warning against favoring rich people (2:1-13)
8. Faith and works (2:14-26)
9. The need for self-control in speech (3:1-12)
10. Worldly wisdom and heavenly wisdom contrasted (3:13-18)
11. Worldly desires and the sin and conflict they cause (4:1-12)
12. A warning against boasting about tomorrow (4:13-17)
13. Rebuke of rich people (5:1-6)
14. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7-11)
15. Oaths forbidden (5:12)
16. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13-18)
17. Restoration of a sinner (5:19-20)

### Who wrote the book of James?

There is wide agreement among biblical scholars that the author of this book was James the half-brother of Jesus, who was a leader in the early church in the city of Jerusalem. He was respected for his wisdom and authority. For example, he had the last word at the Jerusalem Council, an important meeting of the early church, that is described in [Acts 15:13-21](../act/15/13.md). In [Galatians 2:9](../gal/02/09.md), the apostle Paul calls him a “pillar” of the church, meaning one of its most important leaders. However, even though James was an influential church leader and the half-brother of Jesus, in this letter he introduces himself humbly as “a servant of God and of the Lord Jesus Christ.”

This is not the same man as the apostle James, who was the brother of the apostle John. That James was killed for his faith a few years after Jesus himself was killed and rose from the dead. This letter was written many years after that.

### What kind of writing is the book of James?

The book of James has an opening that is typical of the letters of its time, but it does not have a main body that develops sequentially and logically the way a letter would have. Instead, the book presents a collection of short sayings and reflections on various subjects. (In that way it is similar to the book of Proverbs.) As the outline at the beginning of this introduction shows, the book is made up of many short sections that move around from topic to topic.

James uses many of the devices that speakers used in his time, such as anticipating and answering a question that someone might ask. He also uses many vivid examples drawn from both nature and everyday life. For this reason, many interpreters believe that for the content of this book, James drew on sermons he had preached and on wise advice he had given. He wanted to share all of that wisdom with Christians living in different parts of the Roman Empire to help them face difficult times. It is also possible that James wrote this letter because he was nearing the end of his life and he wanted his wisdom to be preserved and shared after his death.

### To whom was the book of James written?

James wrote this letter to believers in Jesus who had a Jewish background. This is clear from many of the things that he says in the letter. For example, he addresses his readers as “the twelve tribes” in [1:1](../01/01.md). He speaks of their meeting place as a “synagogue” in [2:2](../02/02.md). He assumes in [2:19](../02/19.md) that they are familiar with the essential Jewish affirmation that “God is one,” and in [2:21](../02/21.md) he calls Abraham “our father.” He calls God by the Hebrew title the Lord of Sabaoth in [5:4](../05/04.md). He assumes that his readers will be familiar from the Hebrew Scriptures with the stories of people such as Job ([5:11](../05/11.md)) and Elijah ([5:17](../05/17.md)). These notes will call attention to the places where James engages his readers in light of their Jewish background.

### What is the book of James about?

In this letter, James writes to believers living all over the Roman Empire who are suffering. He tells them that God is working through their sufferings to help them become more mature Christians. James also writes much in this letter about how believers should live in this world and treat one another. He urges them to treat other people fairly, not to quarrel and fight, and to be compassionate and generous.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “James.” Alternatively, they may choose a different title such as “A Letter from James” or “The Letter James Wrote.” But note that “James” is actually the English form of the author’s name. In the letter itself, he calls himself “Jacob,” which is the original Hebrew form of his name. So you may want to refer to him in the title of the book by the same name that you will use in your translation for the character of Jacob in the book of Genesis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Did James disagree with Paul about how a person is justified before God?

Paul taught in Romans that Christians are justified by faith and not by works. James seems to teach that Christians are justified by works. This could be confusing. However, a better understanding of what Paul and James each taught shows that they actually agree with one another. Both of them taught that a person needs faith in order to be justified. They both also taught that true faith would lead a person to do good works. Paul and James taught about these things in different ways because they had different audiences who needed to know different things about being justified. James wrote primarily to Jewish Christians, while Paul wrote to communities in which there were many Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How should the translator signal transitions between topics in the book of James?

James moves briskly from one topic to another. Often he does not end his discussion of one topic with a summary and then begin the discussion of the next topic with an introduction. It might be helpful to your readers if you set topics apart by putting blank lines between them. However, your readers would have the same experience of the letter that its original audience did if you allowed the transitions between topics to remain abrupt. Just as happens in the book of Proverbs, James seems to have wanted each new thought to strike his audience with fresh force. So you may also choose not to put any blank lines between topics in your translation.

James often makes the link between topics through key words, for example, “rejoice” in 1:1 and “joy” in 1:2; “lacking” in 1:4 and “lacks” in 1:5; and so forth. If you could find ways to translate these key words similarly in both of their occurrences, this should help your readers appreciate the link and the transition.

### Changes from the present tense to the past tense

In several places where James offers an illustration of a point he has just made, he narrates that illustration in the past tense as if he were telling the story of something that had happened. If this would be confusing for your readers, you could translate these illustrations in the present tense. Notes will identify each of these places and make that suggestion.

### Textual issues in the book of James

See the General Notes to chapter 2 for a discussion of one important textual issue in this book. JAS 1 intro pz2q 0 # James 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Greetings (1:1)
2. Gaining endurance through trials (1:2-4)
3. Trusting God for wisdom (1:5-8)
4. What poor and rich people should boast about (1:9-11)
5. Enduring temptation (1:12-15)
6. Hearing and doing what God’s Word says (1:16-27)

James begins this letter in [1:1](../01/01.md) by giving his name, identifying the people to whom he is writing, and offering a greeting. That was the way people typically began letters at this time. However, as Part 1 of the Introduction to James explains, the letter does not then develop the way other letters did. Instead, it is a collection of short sayings and reflections.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Testing and temptation

James uses a word in this chapter that can mean both “trial,” as in [1:2](../01/02.md) and [1:12](../01/12.md), and “temptation,” as in [1:13-14](../01/13.md). In both cases the word speaks of the situation of a person who needs to choose between doing something good and doing something evil. The difference between the two senses is important. When ULT translates the word as “trial,” God is testing the person and wants him to do what is good. When ULT translates the word as “temptation,” Satan is tempting the person and wants him to do what is evil. JAS 1 1 pkt2 figs-123person Ἰάκωβος 1 James In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, and they would refer to themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the first person. If your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, you could also use that if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I, James, am writing this letter” or “From James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JAS 1 1 j000 translate-names Ἰάκωβος 1 James This is the name of a man, the half-brother of Jesus. See the information about him in Part 1 of the Introduction to James. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -JAS 1 1 j001 figs-metonymy ταῖς δώδεκα φυλαῖς 1 to the twelve tribes James is speaking figuratively of the nation of Israel by association with the fact that it was made up of twelve tribes. Alternate translation: “to the nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JAS 1 1 l4i7 figs-metaphor ταῖς δώδεκα φυλαῖς 1 to the twelve tribes James is speaking figuratively of Jesus’ followers as if they were the nation of Israel, since the community of the people of God had expanded from that nation to include people of every nation who followed Jesus. Alternate translation: “to followers of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 1 j001 figs-metonymy ταῖς δώδεκα φυλαῖς 1 to the twelve tribes James is speaking of the nation of Israel by association with the fact that it was made up of twelve tribes. Alternate translation: “to the nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 1 1 l4i7 figs-metaphor ταῖς δώδεκα φυλαῖς 1 to the twelve tribes James is speaking of Jesus’ followers as if they were the nation of Israel, since the community of the people of God had expanded from that nation to include people of every nation who followed Jesus. Alternate translation: “to followers of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 1 j002 figs-123person ταῖς δώδεκα φυλαῖς 1 to the twelve tribes In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would then say to whom they were writing, naming those people in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “to you followers of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JAS 1 1 vza9 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ διασπορᾷ 1 in the dispersion At this time, the term **dispersion** referred to those Jews who were living away from their homeland of Israel and who were scattered into various parts of the Roman Empire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **dispersion** with a verb such as “scattered.” Alternate translation: “scattered throughout the world” or, if you are using the second person, “who are scattered throughout the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JAS 1 1 j003 figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ διασπορᾷ 1 in the dispersion While the term **dispersion** referred literally to Jews, James is using it figuratively to describe followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “scattered throughout the world” or, if you are using the second person, “who are scattered throughout the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 1 j003 figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ διασπορᾷ 1 in the dispersion While the term **dispersion** referred literally to Jews, James is using it to describe followers of Jesus. Alternate translation: “scattered throughout the world” or, if you are using the second person, “who are scattered throughout the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 1 huk9 figs-idiom χαίρειν. 1 Rejoice! The word **Rejoice** was used at this time as a greeting. In your translation, you could use the greeting that is typical of your language and culture. Alternate translation: “Greetings!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 1 2 knw6 figs-abstractnouns πᾶσαν χαρὰν ἡγήσασθε 1 Consider it all joy If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **joy** with an adjective such as “happy.” Alternate translation: “You should be happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 1 2 j004 figs-hyperbole πᾶσαν χαρὰν ἡγήσασθε 1 Consider it all joy James says **all** as an overstatement for emphasis. He does not mean that believers should be happy about all the bad things that happen to them when they encounter **trials**. Rather, he means that the **trials** provide a general occasion for them to rejoice because of the valuable things God that is developing in their lives. He describes these things in the next verse. Alternate translation: “You should be very happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -JAS 1 2 j005 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου 1 my brothers James is using the term **brothers** figuratively to refer to fellow believers in Jesus. Alternate translation, as in UST: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 2 j005 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου 1 my brothers James is using the term **brothers** to refer to fellow believers in Jesus. Alternate translation, as in UST: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 2 j006 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί μου 1 my brothers James is using the term **brothers** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Be sure that this is clear in your translation so that your readers do not get the impression that James is addressing only men. If you use a non-figurative word such as “believers” to translate the metaphor **brothers**, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you retain the metaphor, you could state “my brothers and sisters.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -JAS 1 2 j007 figs-metaphor περιπέσητε 1 you fall into James is speaking figuratively of **trials** as if they were a hole or pit that believers could **fall into**. Alternate translation: “you encounter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 2 j007 figs-metaphor περιπέσητε 1 you fall into James is speaking of **trials** as if they were a hole or pit that believers could **fall into**. Alternate translation: “you encounter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 2 j008 figs-you περιπέσητε 1 you fall into The pronoun **you** is plural here, since James is writing to believers in Jesus as a group. Generally throughout the letter, the pronouns “you” and “your” are plural for this same reason. These notes will identify the few places where they are singular instead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JAS 1 3 j009 γινώσκοντες ὅτι 1 knowing that It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here, as UST does. Alternate translation: “I want you to know that” or “You should realize that” JAS 1 3 xud2 figs-abstractnouns τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως κατεργάζεται ὑπομονήν 1 the testing of your faith produces endurance If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **testing**, **faith**, and **endurance** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “when you rely on God to help you through a difficult situation, this teaches you not to give up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JAS 1 4 j2p4 figs-personification ἡ δὲ ὑπομονὴ ἔργον τέλειον ἐχέτω 1 But let endurance have a perfect work The expression **let endurance have a perfect work** means “let endurance complete its work.” James is speaking figuratively as if the quality of **endurance** were actively developing the character of believers. Alternate translation: “But make sure that you completely develop the ability not to give up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 1 4 j2p4 figs-personification ἡ δὲ ὑπομονὴ ἔργον τέλειον ἐχέτω 1 But let endurance have a perfect work The expression **let endurance have a perfect work** means “let endurance complete its work.” James is speaking as if the quality of **endurance** were actively developing the character of believers. Alternate translation: “But make sure that you completely develop the ability not to give up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 1 4 unh4 figs-doublet τέλειοι καὶ ὁλόκληροι 1 perfect and whole The words **perfect** and **whole** mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. In this context, the word **perfect** does not mean without any flaws. Rather, it refers to something that has reached its goal. The word **whole** describes something that is not missing any of its parts or pieces. Together, the words describe mature Christian character. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea by translating this pair of words with a single expression. Alternate translation: “completely mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JAS 1 4 l7ef ἐν μηδενὶ λειπόμενοι 1 lacking in nothing You could state this positively in your translation. Alternate translation: “having all that you need” or “being all that you need to be” JAS 1 5 du7z figs-abstractnouns λείπεται σοφίας 1 lacks wisdom If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “is not sure what would be the wise thing to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -29,12 +29,12 @@ JAS 1 6 p12l figs-simile ἔοικεν κλύδωνι θαλάσσης, ἀνε JAS 1 6 j011 translate-unknown κλύδωνι θαλάσσης, ἀνεμιζομένῳ καὶ ῥιπιζομένῳ 1 a wave of the sea, wind-blown and tossed If you would like to use a simile in your translation but your readers would not be familiar with a **wave of the sea**, you could use another illustration that would be familiar to them. Alternate translation: “the desert sand swirling in the wind” or “stalks of tall grass swaying back and forth in the wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JAS 1 6 j012 figs-activepassive κλύδωνι θαλάσσης, ἀνεμιζομένῳ καὶ ῥιπιζομένῳ 1 a wave of the sea, wind-blown and tossed If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “an ocean wave that the wind is blowing and tossing around” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 1 7 j013 figs-gendernotations μὴ γὰρ οἰέσθω ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖνος 1 For let that man not think James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “Such a person should not think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -JAS 1 8 b5t6 figs-metaphor ἀνὴρ δίψυχος 1 a double-minded man James speaks figuratively of this person as if he had two minds, with one mind deciding to do one thing and the other mind deciding to do something else. Alternate translation: “a man who cannot make up his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 8 b5t6 figs-metaphor ἀνὴρ δίψυχος 1 a double-minded man James speaks of this person as if he had two minds, with one mind deciding to do one thing and the other mind deciding to do something else. Alternate translation: “a man who cannot make up his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 8 j014 figs-gendernotations ἀνὴρ δίψυχος 1 a double-minded man James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a person who cannot make up his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -JAS 1 8 k89p figs-metaphor ἀκατάστατος ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 unsettled in all his ways James is speaking figuratively as if life presented paths for people to follow, and he is speaking figuratively of this person as if he could not settle on which path to take. Alternate translation: “who cannot decide whether to do one thing or another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 8 k89p figs-metaphor ἀκατάστατος ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 unsettled in all his ways James is speaking as if life presented paths for people to follow, and he is speaking of this person as if he could not settle on which path to take. Alternate translation: “who cannot decide whether to do one thing or another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 9 j015 καυχάσθω δὲ ὁ ἀδελφὸς ὁ ταπεινὸς 1 Now let the lowly brother boast James is using the word **boast** in a positive sense. He does not mean it in the sinful sense of bragging or vaunting oneself over others. Alternate translation: “Now let the lowly brother take satisfaction” JAS 1 9 gc9b figs-metaphor ὁ ἀδελφὸς ὁ ταπεινὸς 1 the lowly brother Since James contrasts this person with “the rich” in the next verse, he is using the word **lowly** as a spatial metaphor to mean “poor.” Alternate translation: “a believer who is poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 1 9 j016 figs-metaphor ἀδελφὸς 1 brother James is using the term **brother** figuratively to refer to a fellow believer in Jesus. See how you translated **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 9 j016 figs-metaphor ἀδελφὸς 1 brother James is using the term **brother** to refer to a fellow believer in Jesus. See how you translated **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 9 j017 figs-abstractnouns τῷ ὕψει αὐτοῦ 1 his exaltation If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **exaltation** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the high place he occupies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 1 9 yxs5 figs-metaphor τῷ ὕψει αὐτοῦ 1 his exaltation James is using a spatial metaphor to describe poor believers as if they were in a high place. He wants to convey that God has shown special concern for them. Alternate translation: “the special concern that God has shown for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 10 uzk7 figs-ellipsis ὁ δὲ πλούσιος, ἐν τῇ ταπεινώσει αὐτοῦ 1 but the rich in his lowliness James is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “but let the rich boast in his lowliness” or “but let the rich take satisfaction in his lowliness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -49,18 +49,18 @@ JAS 1 11 j022 ἀνέτειλεν γὰρ ὁ ἥλιος σὺν τῷ καύ JAS 1 11 j023 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James is giving the reason for the result he implicitly described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 1 11 j024 σὺν τῷ καύσωνι 1 with heat Here, **heat** could mean one of two things. (1) It could refer to intense, withering heat. Alternate translation: “and radiated withering heat” or, if you are using the present tense, “and radiates withering heat” (2) It could refer to a hot wind that occurs in full sunlight. Alternate translation: “and caused a hot wind” or, if you are using the present tense, “and causes a hot wind” JAS 1 11 j025 figs-abstractnouns ἡ εὐπρέπεια τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ ἀπώλετο 1 the beauty of its face perished If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **beauty** with an adjective such as “beautiful.” Alternate translation: “it no longer had a beautiful appearance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JAS 1 11 j026 figs-metaphor ἡ εὐπρέπεια τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ ἀπώλετο 1 the beauty of its face perished James speaks figuratively of the wild **flower** as if it had a **face**. Alternate translation: “it no longer had a beautiful appearance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 1 11 gv7v figs-metaphor ἡ εὐπρέπεια τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ ἀπώλετο 1 the beauty of its face perished James speaks figuratively of the flower’s **beauty** as if it **perished** or died. Alternate translation: “it no longer had a beautiful appearance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 11 j026 figs-metaphor ἡ εὐπρέπεια τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ ἀπώλετο 1 the beauty of its face perished James speaks of the wild **flower** as if it had a **face**. Alternate translation: “it no longer had a beautiful appearance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 11 gv7v figs-metaphor ἡ εὐπρέπεια τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ ἀπώλετο 1 the beauty of its face perished James speaks of the flower’s **beauty** as if it **perished** or died. Alternate translation: “it no longer had a beautiful appearance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 11 j027 figs-simile οὕτως καὶ 1 Thus also James uses the words **Thus also** to introduce a simile or comparison between a rich person and a fading flower. Alternate translation: “In the same way” or “Likewise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) JAS 1 11 j028 figs-nominaladj ὁ πλούσιος 1 the rich James is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “a person who is rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -JAS 1 11 ng26 figs-metaphor μαρανθήσεται 1 will wither James speaks of the **rich** person as if he were a flower that would **wither**. James means figuratively that this person will “die,” as UST indicates. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 1 11 sdi2 figs-metaphor ἐν ταῖς πορείαις αὐτοῦ 1 in his journeys James speaks figuratively of a **rich** person’s activities as if they were a journey that he was taking. This metaphor implies that he is giving no thought to his coming death and that it will take him by surprise. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 11 ng26 figs-metaphor μαρανθήσεται 1 will wither James speaks of the **rich** person as if he were a flower that would **wither**. James means that this person will “die,” as UST indicates. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 11 sdi2 figs-metaphor ἐν ταῖς πορείαις αὐτοῦ 1 in his journeys James speaks of a **rich** person’s activities as if they were a journey that he was taking. This metaphor implies that he is giving no thought to his coming death and that it will take him by surprise. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 12 m13d figs-idiom μακάριος ἀνὴρ ὃς ὑπομένει πειρασμόν 1 Blessed is the man who endures trial **Blessed is** indicates that God is giving favor to someone or that his situation is positive or good. Alternate translation: “The person who endures trial receives God’s favor” or “The person who endures trial is in a positive situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 1 12 j029 figs-gendernotations ἀνὴρ 1 the man James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JAS 1 12 vr4a ὑπομένει πειρασμόν 1 endures trial Here, **trial** could mean one of two things. See the discussion of the word in the General Notes to this chapter. James may actually want his readers to hear both senses in this case, as this verse is making a transition from a discussion of testing into a discussion of temptation. (1) The word **trial** could mean the same thing as in [1:2-3](../01/02.md), where it describes the “testing” of “faith.” The reading of UST expresses this interpretation. (2) The word could refer to being tempted, that is, being led by one’s desires to do something wrong, which James discusses in the following verses. Alternate translation: “resists temptation” JAS 1 12 vta6 δόκιμος γενόμενος 1 becoming approved How you translate this will depend on how you translate **trial** earlier in the sentence. (In your translation, you could also focus on the way that God approves of this person, as UST does.) Alternate translation: “once he has demonstrated his faithfulness” of “once he has demonstrated his obedience” JAS 1 12 j030 figs-possession λήμψεται τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς 1 he will receive the crown of life James is using the possessive form not to refer to a **crown** that belongs to **life** but to describe **life** as if it were a **crown**. Alternate translation: “he will receive the crown that is life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -JAS 1 12 k3hh figs-metaphor λήμψεται τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς 1 he will receive the crown of life James is using the image of a **crown** figuratively to indicate that God will honor this person. Alternate translation: “God will honor him by giving him life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 12 k3hh figs-metaphor λήμψεται τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς 1 he will receive the crown of life James is using the image of a **crown** to indicate that God will honor this person. Alternate translation: “God will honor him by giving him life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 12 j031 figs-metaphor λήμψεται τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς 1 he will receive the crown of life James is likely not speaking of physical **life** but of spiritual **life**, that is, of living forever in the presence of God after physical death. Alternate translation: “God will honor that person by giving him everlasting life in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 12 hx28 writing-pronouns ὃν ἐπηγγείλατο τοῖς ἀγαπῶσιν αὐτόν 1 which he promised to the ones who love him In this last clause in the verse, the words **he** and **him** refer to God, not to the person who **endures trial**. Alternate translation: “which God promised to those who love him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JAS 1 13 lh7z figs-activepassive ἀπὸ Θεοῦ πειράζομαι 1 I am tempted by God If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God is tempting me” or “God is leading me to do something wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -68,30 +68,30 @@ JAS 1 13 p5cp ὁ…Θεὸς ἀπείραστός ἐστιν κακῶν 1 G JAS 1 13 zb13 πειράζει δὲ αὐτὸς οὐδένα 1 and he himself tempts no one Alternate translation: “and God himself never leads anyone to do anything wrong” JAS 1 14 j032 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But James is using the word **But** to indicate a contrast between the wrong idea that God might tempt someone and the truth that each person **is tempted by his own desire**. This is actually a strong contrast, and you may wish to use a strong expression for it. Alternate translation: “No, on the contrary,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) JAS 1 14 j033 figs-activepassive ἕκαστος…πειράζεται ὑπὸ τῆς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας, ἐξελκόμενος καὶ δελεαζόμενος 1 each is tempted by his own desire, dragged away and enticed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these passive phrases by stating each of these things with active verbal forms. Alternate translation: “each person’s own desire tempts him by enticing him and then dragging him away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JAS 1 14 nj9m figs-personification ἕκαστος…πειράζεται ὑπὸ τῆς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας, ἐξελκόμενος καὶ δελεαζόμενος 1 each is tempted by his own desire, dragged away and enticed James is speaking figuratively of **desire** as if it were a living thing that could actively tempt people, entice them, and drag them away captive. Alternate translation: “each person wants to do wrong when he desires something that he should not desire and, because he is attracted to that thing, he commits sin and then cannot stop sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 1 14 nj9m figs-personification ἕκαστος…πειράζεται ὑπὸ τῆς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας, ἐξελκόμενος καὶ δελεαζόμενος 1 each is tempted by his own desire, dragged away and enticed James is speaking of **desire** as if it were a living thing that could actively tempt people, entice them, and drag them away captive. Alternate translation: “each person wants to do wrong when he desires something that he should not desire and, because he is attracted to that thing, he commits sin and then cannot stop sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 1 14 nle5 figs-events ἐξελκόμενος καὶ δελεαζόμενος 1 dragged away and enticed Since the word translated as **enticed** often means to use bait to trap prey, James may be stressing the result (the captured prey being **dragged away**) by speaking of it before the method that was used to achieve it (baiting a trap). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate that the method came before the result. Alternate translation: “enticed and dragged away” or “dragged away after being enticed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) -JAS 1 14 z4bd figs-metaphor ἐξελκόμενος καὶ δελεαζόμενος 1 dragged away and enticed James is speaking figuratively of temptation as if the person who gave in to it were captured in a baited trap. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate this metaphor as a simile. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It is as if the wrong thing he desired were bait in a trap that caught him so that a hunter could then drag him away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 14 z4bd figs-metaphor ἐξελκόμενος καὶ δελεαζόμενος 1 dragged away and enticed James is speaking of temptation as if the person who gave in to it were captured in a baited trap. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate this metaphor as a simile. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It is as if the wrong thing he desired were bait in a trap that caught him so that a hunter could then drag him away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 15 j034 grammar-connect-time-sequential εἶτα ἡ ἐπιθυμία συλλαβοῦσα τίκτει ἁμαρτίαν 1 Then desire, having conceived, bears sin James uses the word **Then** to indicate that what he describes in this verse happens after something that he described in the previous verse. However, he does not mean that this happens after a person is “dragged away and enticed,” as he said at the end of that verse. Rather, he means that it happens after a person begins to entertain the temptation of a wrong “desire,” as he said at the beginning of that verse. It may be helpful to your readers to use the word “when” to indicate this. Alternate translation: “When desire has conceived, it bears sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -JAS 1 15 s4cd figs-personification εἶτα ἡ ἐπιθυμία συλλαβοῦσα τίκτει ἁμαρτίαν 1 Then desire, having conceived, bears sin James continues to speak figuratively of **desire** as if it were a living thing, in this case as if it were a woman who became pregnant and gave birth. Alternate translation: “If a person entertains wrong desires, he will become more and more inclined to sin until he finally does commit sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -JAS 1 15 j035 figs-personification ἡ δὲ ἁμαρτία ἀποτελεσθεῖσα, ἀποκύει θάνατον 1 and sin, having grown up, gives birth to death James also speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were a living thing, a baby girl who grew up to be a woman who also became pregnant and gave birth. Alternate translation: “and if he continues to sin, it will affect more and more of his life until it causes his death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 1 15 s4cd figs-personification εἶτα ἡ ἐπιθυμία συλλαβοῦσα τίκτει ἁμαρτίαν 1 Then desire, having conceived, bears sin James continues to speak of **desire** as if it were a living thing, in this case as if it were a woman who became pregnant and gave birth. Alternate translation: “If a person entertains wrong desires, he will become more and more inclined to sin until he finally does commit sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 1 15 j035 figs-personification ἡ δὲ ἁμαρτία ἀποτελεσθεῖσα, ἀποκύει θάνατον 1 and sin, having grown up, gives birth to death James also speaks of **sin** as if it were a living thing, a baby girl who grew up to be a woman who also became pregnant and gave birth. Alternate translation: “and if he continues to sin, it will affect more and more of his life until it causes his death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 1 15 j036 figs-metaphor ἀποκύει θάνατον 1 gives birth to death Here, **death** could mean: (1) spiritual death, that is, separation from God. This is the interpretation in UST. (2) physical death. Alternate translation: “causes the person to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 1 16 v195 figs-metaphor μὴ πλανᾶσθε 1 Do not be led astray James is speaking figuratively as if some deceptive guides were trying to lead his readers in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “Do not be deceived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 16 v195 figs-metaphor μὴ πλανᾶσθε 1 Do not be led astray James is speaking as if some deceptive guides were trying to lead his readers in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “Do not be deceived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 16 j037 figs-activepassive μὴ πλανᾶσθε 1 Do not be led astray If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. The meaning here is probably not truly passive. That is, even though James speaks as if someone else might lead his readers astray, that is probably not what he means. This could be: (1) a warning James’ readers not to lead themselves astray, that is, not to deceive themselves. That is the interpretation in UST. (2) a simple active meaning. Alternate translation: “Make no mistake about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 1 16 j038 figs-explicit μὴ πλανᾶσθε 1 Do not be led astray James is referring back to his statement in [1:13](../01/13.md) that God never desires to do evil and that God never leads anyone to do evil. Instead, as James will say in the next two verses, God gives only good things to people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “Do not deceive yourselves, God is not evil, God is good” or “Make no mistake about this, God is not evil, God is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 1 16 j039 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου ἀγαπητοί 1 my beloved brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my dear fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 1 17 j040 figs-metaphor πᾶσα δόσις ἀγαθὴ, καὶ πᾶν δώρημα τέλειον, ἄνωθέν ἐστιν 1 Every good present and every perfect gift is from above Here, **from above** is a spatial metaphor that figuratively describes God. Alternate translation: “God gives us every good present and every perfect gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 17 j040 figs-metaphor πᾶσα δόσις ἀγαθὴ, καὶ πᾶν δώρημα τέλειον, ἄνωθέν ἐστιν 1 Every good present and every perfect gift is from above Here, **from above** is a spatial metaphor that describes God. Alternate translation: “God gives us every good present and every perfect gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 17 t2nn figs-doublet πᾶσα δόσις ἀγαθὴ, καὶ πᾶν δώρημα τέλειον, ἄνωθέν ἐστιν 1 Every good present and every perfect gift is from above The phrases **good present** and **perfect gift** mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. (As in [1:4](../01/04.md), the word **perfect** refers to something that has developed to the point where it is fully suited to its purpose.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by translating both phrases with a single expression. Alternate translation: “God gives us the things that are just right for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -JAS 1 17 j041 figs-metaphor καταβαῖνον ἀπὸ 1 coming down from Continuing the spatial metaphor, James speaks figuratively of these gifts **coming down from** God. If you use a non-figurative expression to translate this, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They come to us from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 1 17 n7d8 figs-metaphor τοῦ Πατρὸς τῶν φώτων 1 the Father of lights Here, **lights** likely means the lights in the sky, that is, the sun, moon, and stars. James says figuratively that God is their **Father** because he created them. Alternate translation: “God, who created all the lights in the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 17 j041 figs-metaphor καταβαῖνον ἀπὸ 1 coming down from Continuing the spatial metaphor, James speaks of these gifts **coming down from** God. If you use a non-figurative expression to translate this, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They come to us from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 17 n7d8 figs-metaphor τοῦ Πατρὸς τῶν φώτων 1 the Father of lights Here, **lights** likely means the lights in the sky, that is, the sun, moon, and stars. James says that God is their **Father** because he created them. Alternate translation: “God, who created all the lights in the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 17 j042 figs-doublet παρ’ ᾧ οὐκ ἔνι παραλλαγὴ ἢ τροπῆς ἀποσκίασμα 1 with whom there is no change or shadow of turning Here, **change** and **shadow of turning** mean similar things. James is using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them into a single phrase and express the metaphor of a **shadow** (see later note) as a simile. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “God does not change as shifting shadows do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JAS 1 17 j043 figs-possession τροπῆς ἀποσκίασμα 1 shadow of turning James is using the possessive form to describe a **shadow** that is characterized by **turning**. Alternate translation: “shadow that turns” or “shadow that changes position” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JAS 1 17 j044 figs-explicit τροπῆς ἀποσκίασμα 1 shadow of turning James is contrasting God, the Creator of the lights in the sky, with those lights themselves, which are not as great as their Creator. They create shadows that change position, but God never deviates from wanting only good things for people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “turning shadow such as the sun or moon casts. No, God always wants good things for people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 1 17 g5ge figs-metaphor τροπῆς ἀποσκίασμα 1 shadow of turning There could not literally be a **shadow** in God, so this is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “variability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 18 j045 βουληθεὶς, ἀπεκύησεν ἡμᾶς 1 Having willed, he gave birth to us Alternate translation: “God chose to give birth to us” -JAS 1 18 mj29 figs-metaphor βουληθεὶς, ἀπεκύησεν ἡμᾶς 1 Having willed, he gave birth to us James says figuratively that God **gave birth to us** because God gives spiritual life to everyone who believes in Jesus. Alternate translation: “God chose to give us spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 18 mj29 figs-metaphor βουληθεὶς, ἀπεκύησεν ἡμᾶς 1 Having willed, he gave birth to us James says that God **gave birth to us** because God gives spiritual life to everyone who believes in Jesus. Alternate translation: “God chose to give us spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 18 j046 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἡμᾶς 1 us … us Here and throughout this letter, James uses the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his readers. Sometimes by extension he also means all believers or all people. In every case, therefore, the pronoun **us** is inclusive, so use the inclusive form if your language makes that distinction. The same applies to the pronoun “our.” However, in some cases the pronoun “we” is exclusive. Notes will identify those places. Everywhere else, the pronoun “we” is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) JAS 1 18 j047 figs-possession λόγῳ ἀληθείας 1 by the word of truth James is using the possessive form to describe a **word** that is characterized by **truth**. Alternate translation: “by the true word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -JAS 1 18 ykq9 figs-metonymy λόγῳ ἀληθείας 1 by the word of truth James is using term **word** figuratively to describe the message about Jesus that was conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “by the true message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 1 18 ykq9 figs-metonymy λόγῳ ἀληθείας 1 by the word of truth James is using term **word** to describe the message about Jesus that was conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “by the true message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 1 18 j048 figs-abstractnouns λόγῳ ἀληθείας 1 by the word of truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **truth** by translating the idea behind it with an equivalent expression that uses an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “when we believed the true message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 1 18 j049 figs-explicit λόγῳ ἀληθείας 1 by the word of truth James is referring implicitly to the message about Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when we believed the true message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 1 18 j346 grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ εἶναι ἡμᾶς ἀπαρχήν τινα τῶν αὐτοῦ κτισμάτων 1 for us to be something like a firstfruits of his creatures This is a purpose clause. James is stating the purpose for which God **desired to give us birth**. In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that we would be like a firstfruits of his creatures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) @@ -108,21 +108,21 @@ JAS 1 20 ej4p figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην Θεοῦ οὐκ ἐρ JAS 1 21 j055 grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Therefore Here James is telling his readers what they should do as a result of what he explained to them in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Consequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 1 21 hit5 figs-metaphor ἀποθέμενοι πᾶσαν ῥυπαρίαν καὶ περισσείαν κακίας 1 laying aside all filth and abundance of wickedness James is speaking of **filth** and **abundance of wickedness** as if they were clothing that could be taken off. By those expressions he means sin and wrong actions (see later notes to this verse). Alternate translation: “stop committing sin and doing so many wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 21 h226 figs-doublet ῥυπαρίαν καὶ περισσείαν κακίας 1 filth and abundance of wickedness The expressions **filth** and **abundance of wickedness** mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “every kind of sinful behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -JAS 1 21 h8ty figs-metaphor ῥυπαρίαν 1 filth James is speaking figuratively of sin as if it were **filth**, that is, something that made people dirty. Alternate translation: “sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 21 h8ty figs-metaphor ῥυπαρίαν 1 filth James is speaking of sin as if it were **filth**, that is, something that made people dirty. Alternate translation: “sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 21 j056 figs-abstractnouns περισσείαν κακίας 1 abundance of wickedness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **wickedness** by translating the idea behind it with an adjective such as “wrong.” Alternate translation: “the many wrong things that people do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 1 21 a3u3 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πραΰτητι 1 in humility If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **humility** by translating the idea behind it with an adverb such as “humbly.” Alternate translation: “humbly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JAS 1 21 i9w1 figs-metaphor δέξασθε τὸν ἔμφυτον λόγον 1 receive the implanted word The word **implanted** describes something that has been placed inside another thing. James is speaking of God’s word figuratively as if it had been planted and was growing inside believers. Alternate translation: “obey the word that you have heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 1 21 j057 figs-metonymy δέξασθε τὸν ἔμφυτον λόγον 1 receive the implanted word James is using term **word** figuratively to describe the message about Jesus that was conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “obey the message about Jesus that you have heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JAS 1 21 ekl3 figs-personification τὸν δυνάμενον σῶσαι τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν 1 which is able to save your souls James is speaking figuratively of the **word** or message as if it were a living thing that could actively **save** believers. He means that obedience to the message will lead to salvation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “If you do that, you will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -JAS 1 21 z73e figs-synecdoche τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν 1 your souls James is figuratively referring to one part of his readers, their **souls**, to mean their whole beings. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +JAS 1 21 i9w1 figs-metaphor δέξασθε τὸν ἔμφυτον λόγον 1 receive the implanted word The word **implanted** describes something that has been placed inside another thing. James is speaking of God’s word as if it had been planted and was growing inside believers. Alternate translation: “obey the word that you have heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 21 j057 figs-metonymy δέξασθε τὸν ἔμφυτον λόγον 1 receive the implanted word James is using term **word** to describe the message about Jesus that was conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “obey the message about Jesus that you have heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 1 21 ekl3 figs-personification τὸν δυνάμενον σῶσαι τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν 1 which is able to save your souls James is speaking of the **word** or message as if it were a living thing that could actively **save** believers. He means that obedience to the message will lead to salvation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “If you do that, you will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 1 21 z73e figs-synecdoche τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν 1 your souls James is referring to one part of his readers, their **souls**, to mean their whole beings. Alternate translation: “you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JAS 1 22 j058 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But **But** draws a contrast not with what James has just said, but with a potential misunderstanding of what he has just said. He wants to clarify that by “receive the implanted word” he does not mean simply to believe it, but to put it into practice. It may be appropriate in your language to translate the word **but** with an expression that introduces a clarification. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) JAS 1 22 j059 figs-ellipsis γίνεσθε δὲ ποιηταὶ λόγου, καὶ μὴ μόνον ἀκροαταὶ 1 be doers of the word and not only hearers At the end of this clause, James is leaving out some of the words that it would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the clause. Alternate translation: “be doers of the word and not only hearers of the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -JAS 1 22 x14m figs-metonymy γίνεσθε…ποιηταὶ λόγου, καὶ μὴ μόνον ἀκροαταὶ 1 be doers of the word and not only hearers James is using the term **word** figuratively to describe the message about Jesus that was conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “obey the message about Jesus, do not just listen to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 1 22 x14m figs-metonymy γίνεσθε…ποιηταὶ λόγου, καὶ μὴ μόνον ἀκροαταὶ 1 be doers of the word and not only hearers James is using the term **word** to describe the message about Jesus that was conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “obey the message about Jesus, do not just listen to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 1 22 wvp4 figs-idiom καὶ μὴ μόνον ἀκροαταὶ 1 and not only hearers In the Bible, the word “hear” often has the idiomatic sense of agreeing with what is heard. James may be using the word in that sense. Alternate translation: “and do not just decide that you agree with it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 1 23 j060 figs-hypo ὅτι εἴ τις ἀκροατὴς λόγου ἐστὶν, καὶ οὐ ποιητής, οὗτος ἔοικεν ἀνδρὶ κατανοοῦντι τὸ πρόσωπον τῆς γενέσεως αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐσόπτρῳ 1 For if anyone is a hearer of the word and not a doer, he is like a man beholding the face of his birth in a mirror James is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone is a hearer of the word and not a doer. Then he is like a man beholding the face of his birth in a mirror” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) JAS 1 23 r6pp figs-ellipsis ἀκροατὴς λόγου ἐστὶν, καὶ οὐ ποιητής 1 is a hearer of the word and not a doer At the end of this clause, James is leaving out some of the words that it would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the clause. Alternate translation: “is a hearer of the word and not a doer of the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JAS 1 23 j061 figs-idiom ἀκροατὴς λόγου ἐστὶν, καὶ οὐ ποιητής 1 is a hearer of the word and not a doer See how you translated these expressions in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “just listens to the word but does not obey it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JAS 1 23 j062 figs-metonymy λόγου 1 of the word James is using term **word** figuratively to describe the message about Jesus that was conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “of the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 1 23 j062 figs-metonymy λόγου 1 of the word James is using term **word** to describe the message about Jesus that was conveyed by using words. Alternate translation: “of the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 1 23 pw5x figs-simile οὗτος ἔοικεν ἀνδρὶ κατανοοῦντι τὸ πρόσωπον τῆς γενέσεως αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐσόπτρῳ 1 he is like a man beholding the face of his birth in a mirror Here James begins a simile, an illustrative comparison, that continues through the next two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) JAS 1 23 j063 figs-gendernotations ἀνδρὶ 1 a man James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JAS 1 23 shn9 figs-idiom τὸ πρόσωπον τῆς γενέσεως αὐτοῦ 1 the face of his birth This is an idiom that refers to the **face** a person was born with, that is, that person’s natural or physical face. Since the term “face” had many figurative meanings at this time, James is using this idiomatic expression to clarify that he means the hypothetical person’s literal, physical face. You may not need to make this clarification in your language. Alternate translation: “his physical face” or “his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ JAS 1 24 j066 writing-pronouns κατενόησεν…ἑαυτὸν 1 he beheld JAS 1 24 j067 figs-explicit καὶ ἀπελήλυθεν, καὶ εὐθέως ἐπελάθετο ὁποῖος ἦν 1 and went away and immediately forgot of what sort he was James is saying implicitly that this is a person who sees but does not do, just like a person who hears the word of God but does not obey it. The implication is that he sees in the mirror that he needs to do something such as wash his face or fix his hair. But because he does not do that when he is looking in the mirror, when he walks away, he forgets to do it. The point of the comparison is that a person who does not obey God’s word is like this. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but because he did not immediately do what he saw he should do, when he walked away from the mirror, he forgot what he saw and so he did nothing about it” or, if you are using the present tense, “but because he does not immediately do what he sees he should do, when he walks away from the mirror, he forgets what he saw and so he does nothing about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 1 24 j068 ὁποῖος ἦν 1 of what sort he was Alternate translation: “what he needed to do about his appearance” or, if you are using the present tense, “what he needs to do about his appearance” JAS 1 25 j069 figs-hypo ὁ δὲ παρακύψας εἰς νόμον τέλειον, τὸν τῆς ἐλευθερίας, καὶ παραμείνας…οὗτος μακάριος…ἔσται 1 But the one having gazed into the perfect law of freedom and having continued … this one will be blessed James is using a further hypothetical situation to teach. This illustration is a contrast to the one he offered in [1:23](../01/23.md). Alternate translation: “But suppose someone gazes into the perfect law of freedom and perseveres …. Then that person will be blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -JAS 1 25 kvr7 figs-metaphor ὁ…παρακύψας εἰς νόμον τέλειον 1 the one having gazed into the perfect law In this verse, James continues to compare hearing the word of God to looking in a mirror. But the image now becomes a metaphor rather than a simile, since James speaks figuratively about someone who has **gazed into** the **law**. He means someone who has listened attentively to God’s word. Alternate translation: “someone who has listened attentively to the perfect law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 25 kvr7 figs-metaphor ὁ…παρακύψας εἰς νόμον τέλειον 1 the one having gazed into the perfect law In this verse, James continues to compare hearing the word of God to looking in a mirror. But the image now becomes a metaphor rather than a simile, since James speaks about someone who has **gazed into** the **law**. He means someone who has listened attentively to God’s word. Alternate translation: “someone who has listened attentively to the perfect law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 25 j070 figs-possession νόμον τέλειον, τὸν τῆς ἐλευθερίας 1 the perfect law of freedom James is using the possessive form to describe a **law** that brings **freedom**. See the notes to [2:12](../02/12.md) for a further explanation of what James means by the **law of freedom**. Alternate translation: “the perfect law that brings freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JAS 1 25 sf8k figs-abstractnouns νόμον τέλειον, τὸν τῆς ἐλευθερίας 1 the perfect law of freedom If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **freedom** by translating the idea behind it with an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “the perfect law that sets people free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 1 25 j071 figs-explicit νόμον τέλειον, τὸν τῆς ἐλευθερίας 1 the perfect law of freedom If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what this **law** gives people the **freedom** to do. Alternate translation: “the law that sets people free to obey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -141,17 +141,17 @@ JAS 1 25 j072 νόμον τέλειον, τὸν τῆς ἐλευθερίας JAS 1 25 j073 figs-ellipsis καὶ παραμείνας 1 and having continued James is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the context. Alternate translation: “and who has continued to obey that law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JAS 1 25 j074 figs-possession ἀκροατὴς ἐπιλησμονῆς 1 a hearer of forgetfulness James is using the possessive form to describe a **hearer** who is characterized by **forgetfulness**. Alternate translation: “a hearer who is forgetful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JAS 1 25 j075 figs-abstractnouns ἀκροατὴς ἐπιλησμονῆς 1 a hearer of forgetfulness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **forgetfulness** by translating the idea behind it with a verb such as “forget.” Alternate translation: “a hearer who forgets” or “someone who forgets what he hears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JAS 1 25 j076 figs-metonymy ποιητὴς ἔργου 1 a doer of the work By association with the **work** that it takes to carry out God’s commands, James is using the term **work** figuratively to mean what God commands. Alternate translation: “someone who does what God commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 1 25 j076 figs-metonymy ποιητὴς ἔργου 1 a doer of the work By association with the **work** that it takes to carry out God’s commands, James is using the term **work** to mean what God commands. Alternate translation: “someone who does what God commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 1 25 jku1 figs-activepassive οὗτος μακάριος…αὐτοῦ ἔσται 1 this one will be blessed While the word **blessed** is an adjective and so the expression **will be blessed** is not a passive verbal form, it may be helpful to your readers to translate this with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “God will bless such a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 1 25 j077 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ποιήσει αὐτοῦ 1 in his doing If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **doing** by translating the idea behind it with a verb such as “do.” Alternate translation: “in what he does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 1 26 j078 figs-hypo εἴ τις δοκεῖ θρησκὸς εἶναι, μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀπατῶν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ, τούτου μάταιος ἡ θρησκεία 1 If anyone thinks to be religious, not bridling his tongue, but deceiving his heart, the religion of that one is worthless James is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone thinks that he is religious, but he does not bridle his tongue, thus deceiving his heart. Then his religion is worthless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) JAS 1 26 j1bg δοκεῖ θρησκὸς εἶναι 1 thinks to be religious The word translated **religious** could refer to a pattern of behavior rather than to participation in worship activities. Alternate translation: “thinks that he is honoring God by his actions” -JAS 1 26 j079 figs-metaphor μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ 1 not bridling his tongue James speaks figuratively of a person **bridling his tongue** as if he were controlling a horse with a bridle. Alternate translation: “but he does not control his tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 26 j079 figs-metaphor μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ 1 not bridling his tongue James speaks of a person **bridling his tongue** as if he were controlling a horse with a bridle. Alternate translation: “but he does not control his tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 26 j080 translate-unknown μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ 1 not bridling his tongue A **bridle** is headgear that is used to control a horse. If your readers would not be familiar with what a **bridle** is, you could use a different illustration that would be familiar to them of a device that is used in your culture to control animals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -JAS 1 26 vxu1 figs-metonymy μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ 1 not bridling his tongue By association with the way that the **tongue** is used in speech, James is using the term **tongue** figuratively to mean what a person says. Alternate translation: “not controlling what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JAS 1 26 sex6 figs-synecdoche ἀπατῶν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 deceiving his heart James is figuratively using one part of this hypothetical person, his **heart**, to mean the person himself. Alternate translation: “deceiving himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +JAS 1 26 vxu1 figs-metonymy μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ 1 not bridling his tongue By association with the way that the **tongue** is used in speech, James is using the term **tongue** to mean what a person says. Alternate translation: “not controlling what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 1 26 sex6 figs-synecdoche ἀπατῶν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 deceiving his heart James is using one part of this hypothetical person, his **heart**, to mean the person himself. Alternate translation: “deceiving himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JAS 1 26 q83d figs-hyperbole τούτου μάταιος ἡ θρησκεία 1 the religion of that one is worthless James says **worthless** as an overstatement for emphasis. There would conceivably still be some value in the religion of a person even if he did not carefully control what he said. But James wants to emphasize how inconsistent it is to claim to love God but then to say things that hurt and disparage other people. He will develop this point further in [3:9-10](../03/09.md). Alternate translation: “his actions are not as pleasing to God as he thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -JAS 1 27 j081 figs-metaphor θρησκεία καθαρὰ καὶ ἀμίαντος 1 Pure and undefiled religion James is speaking figuratively of **religion** as if it could be physically **pure** and **undefiled**. Alternate translation: “Religion that is pleasing and acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 27 j081 figs-metaphor θρησκεία καθαρὰ καὶ ἀμίαντος 1 Pure and undefiled religion James is speaking of **religion** as if it could be physically **pure** and **undefiled**. Alternate translation: “Religion that is pleasing and acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 27 g11k figs-doublet θρησκεία καθαρὰ καὶ ἀμίαντος 1 Pure and undefiled religion The terms **pure** and **undefiled** mean similar things. They both indicate that something is free of contamination. James is using these terms together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Religion that is completely acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JAS 1 27 skf4 figs-metaphor παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ 1 before God The word **before** means “in front of” or “in the presence of” another person, and in this case **before** him indicates “where God can see.” Seeing, for its part, represents attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “from God’s perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 27 j082 figs-hendiadys τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί 1 God and the Father James is not talking about two different people. He is expressing a single idea by using two nouns connected with **and**. The noun **Father** further identifies **God**. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -159,8 +159,8 @@ JAS 1 27 j083 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρί 1 the Father **Father** i JAS 1 27 iiv2 figs-idiom ἐπισκέπτεσθαι ὀρφανοὺς καὶ χήρας ἐν τῇ θλίψει αὐτῶν 1 to look upon orphans and widows in their distress Here, **look upon** is an idiom that means “show concern for” or “help compassionately.” Alternate translation: “to help orphans and widows in their distress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 1 27 r8nj figs-explicit ἐπισκέπτεσθαι ὀρφανοὺς καὶ χήρας ἐν τῇ θλίψει αὐτῶν 1 to look upon orphans and widows in their distress James assumes that his readers will know that orphans and widows are in practical and financial **distress** because their fathers or husbands have died and so are no longer providing for them. In this culture, women and children were dependent on male relatives for support. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly what kind of **distress** James wants his readers to help relieve. Alternate translation: “to help poor orphans and widows with their practical needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 1 27 j084 ἄσπιλον ἑαυτὸν τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ κόσμου 1 to keep oneself unstained by the world This is not a purpose or result clause. James is not telling his readers that they should help **orphans and widows** in order to stay **unstained by the world** or that this would be the result if they did help them. Rather, James is saying that this is a second thing that characterizes **religion** that pleases God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could add the word “and” before this clause in order to clarify this. -JAS 1 27 j085 figs-metonymy ἄσπιλον ἑαυτὸν τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ κόσμου 1 to keep oneself unstained by the world James is using the term **world** figuratively to mean the system of values shared by people who do not honor God, by association with the way those people live in the world. Alternate translation: “to keep oneself unstained by the value system of ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JAS 1 27 nmf7 figs-metaphor ἄσπιλον ἑαυτὸν τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ κόσμου 1 to keep oneself unstained by the world James is speaking figuratively of the influence of ungodly people as if it could physically stain a person. By **unstained** he actually means free from sin. Alternate translation: “not to allow ungodly people and their influence to cause oneself to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 27 j085 figs-metonymy ἄσπιλον ἑαυτὸν τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ κόσμου 1 to keep oneself unstained by the world James is using the term **world** to mean the system of values shared by people who do not honor God, by association with the way those people live in the world. Alternate translation: “to keep oneself unstained by the value system of ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 1 27 nmf7 figs-metaphor ἄσπιλον ἑαυτὸν τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ κόσμου 1 to keep oneself unstained by the world James is speaking of the influence of ungodly people as if it could physically stain a person. By **unstained** he actually means free from sin. Alternate translation: “not to allow ungodly people and their influence to cause oneself to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 2 intro f5zd 0 # James 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. A warning against favoring rich people (2:1-13)
2. Faith and works (2:14-26)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Favoritism

Some of James’s readers treated rich and powerful people well and they treated poor people badly. Treating some people better than others is called favoritism. James tells his readers that this is wrong. God wants his people to treat everyone well.

### Justification

Justification is what happens when God makes a person righteous, that is, when God puts a person in right standing with himself. James says in this chapter that God justifies people when they do good works along with having faith. But that is because the good works demonstrate the faith that a person has, as James says explicitly in [2:18](../02/18.md). James is not saying that people need to add good works to their faith in order to be justified. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### But someone may say, “You have faith, and I have works” (2:18)

When James says this, he seems to be raising an objection that someone might make to what he has been saying. Public speakers at this time commonly raised such objections in order to answer them, and James is probably using that device. However, if that is what he is doing, we would expect the objection to be, “You have works, and I have faith,” since James has been stressing the importance of works accompanying faith. So why does this hypothetical speaker say instead, “You have faith, and I have works”?

It appears that James actually has this speaker addressing these words to the same “you” whom he has been addressing himself since 2:16 as “one of you” and whom he then goes on to address in the rest of this chapter. In other words, James is raising this hypothetical objection so that he can address this same “you” in this verse as well. James is saying, “Someone might reassure you that you nevertheless have faith, while I (James) have works. He might argue that both are valid expressions of religion and that it is not necessary for a person to have both.” James then answers this argument by observing that he can show his faith through his works, while a person who claims to have faith but not works has no means of proving that.

In your translation, you may wish to express this implicit information, as UST does. Alternatively, you may wish to translate as ULT does and leave it to Bible teachers and preachers to explain the meaning. See the further discussion in the notes to [2:18](../02/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Major textual issues in this chapter

### Faith without works is “useless” or “dead” (2:20)

In James [2:20](../02/20.md), some ancient manuscripts say that faith without works is “useless.” ULT and UST follow that reading. Some other ancient manuscripts say that it is “dead,” perhaps under the influence of [2:17](../02/17.md) and [2:26](../02/26.md), where James uses the term “dead” to describe faith that is not expressed in works. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, consider using the reading found in that translation. If not, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) JAS 2 1 kab4 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου 1 My brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 2 1 en1c figs-abstractnouns μὴ ἐν προσωπολημψίαις ἔχετε 1 do not with favoritism have If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **favoritism** with an equivalent phrase. (See the discussion of favoritism in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “you should not treat some people better than others, because that is not consistent with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -191,9 +191,9 @@ JAS 2 5 m5jr figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου ἀγαπητοί 1 my beloved JAS 2 5 ha52 figs-rquestion οὐχ ὁ Θεὸς ἐξελέξατο τοὺς πτωχοὺς τῷ κόσμῳ, πλουσίους ἐν πίστει, καὶ κληρονόμους τῆς βασιλείας ἧς ἐπηγγείλατο τοῖς ἀγαπῶσιν αὐτόν? 1 did not God choose the poor in the world to be rich in faith and heirs of the kingdom that he promised to the ones loving him? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “God has chosen the poor in the world to be rich in faith and to be heirs of the kingdom that he has promised to those who love him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 2 5 ke2q figs-nominaladj τοὺς πτωχοὺς 1 the poor James is using the adjective **poor** as a noun to refer to a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 2 5 j100 figs-metonymy τῷ κόσμῳ 1 in the world James is using the term **world** in a different sense than in 1:27. Here it refers to the world that we live in, and so it indicates ordinary life. Alternate translation: “in this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JAS 2 5 s38z figs-metaphor πλουσίους ἐν πίστει 1 to be rich in faith James speaks figuratively of having much **faith** as if that made a person wealthy. Alternate translation: “to have strong faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 2 5 s38z figs-metaphor πλουσίους ἐν πίστει 1 to be rich in faith James speaks of having much **faith** as if that made a person wealthy. Alternate translation: “to have strong faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 2 5 j101 figs-explicit πλουσίους ἐν πίστει 1 to be rich in faith Your language may require you to specify the object of **faith**. Alternate translation: “to have strong faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JAS 2 5 qii5 figs-metaphor κληρονόμους τῆς βασιλείας ἧς 1 heirs of the kingdom that James speaks figuratively of the people to whom God has promised the kingdom as if they were going to inherit wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “participants in the kingdom that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 2 5 qii5 figs-metaphor κληρονόμους τῆς βασιλείας ἧς 1 heirs of the kingdom that James speaks of the people to whom God has promised the kingdom as if they were going to inherit wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “participants in the kingdom that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 2 5 j102 figs-abstractnouns κληρονόμους τῆς βασιλείας ἧς 1 to be heirs of the kingdom that If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “to enjoy advantages when God rules, as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 2 6 vr53 ἠτιμάσατε τὸν πτωχόν 1 you have dishonored the poor What James means by this is clear from the example he gives in [2:2-3](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “you have treated people who are poor much worse than you have treated people who are rich” JAS 2 6 j103 figs-nominaladj τὸν πτωχόν 1 the poor James is using the adjective **poor** as a noun to refer to a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -202,11 +202,11 @@ JAS 2 6 l2lu figs-rquestion οὐχ οἱ πλούσιοι καταδυναστ JAS 2 6 j105 figs-explicit οὐχ οἱ πλούσιοι καταδυναστεύουσιν ὑμῶν, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἕλκουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς κριτήρια? 1 Do not the rich overpower you and themselves drag you into court? James is implying that rich people do not deserve to be treated better by the believers to whom he is writing, since rich people have actually treated them badly. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “People who are rich do not deserve to have you treat them better than others. They are the ones who overpower you and drag you into court themselves!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 6 eeg5 figs-nominaladj οἱ πλούσιοι 1 the rich James is using the adjective **rich** as a noun to refer to a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 2 6 z73x οὐχ οἱ πλούσιοι καταδυναστεύουσιν ὑμῶν 1 Do not the rich overpower you Alternate translation: “Is it not the rich who oppress you” -JAS 2 6 s9k1 figs-metaphor ἕλκουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς κριτήρια 1 drag you into court James is speaking figuratively of the rich as if they would physically **drag** the poor into court. Alternate translation: “force you to go to court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 2 6 s9k1 figs-metaphor ἕλκουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς κριτήρια 1 drag you into court James is speaking of the rich as if they would physically **drag** the poor into court. Alternate translation: “force you to go to court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 2 6 h8jn figs-explicit ἕλκουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς κριτήρια 1 drag you into court If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why rich people were taking poor people to court. Alternate translation: “force you to go to court so that they can exploit you through lawsuits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 7 las1 figs-rquestion οὐκ αὐτοὶ βλασφημοῦσιν τὸ καλὸν ὄνομα τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς? 1 Do they not blaspheme the good name that has been called upon you? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “They are the ones who blaspheme the good name that has been called upon you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 2 7 j106 οὐκ αὐτοὶ βλασφημοῦσιν τὸ καλὸν ὄνομα 1 Do they not blaspheme the good name The word **blaspheme** can have a technical sense. It can describe a human being wrongly denying that something is divine. But the word can also have the general sense of “insult,” and that is probably the sense in which James is using it here. (However, by insulting the **name** of Jesus, these rich people were also guilty of blasphemy in the technical sense, since Jesus is divine and his name should be honored.) Alternate translation: “Do they not insult the good name” -JAS 2 7 wd8y figs-metonymy τὸ καλὸν ὄνομα 1 the good name James is referring figuratively to the **name** of Jesus by association with the way that it is **good**. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 2 7 wd8y figs-metonymy τὸ καλὸν ὄνομα 1 the good name James is referring to the **name** of Jesus by association with the way that it is **good**. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 2 7 j107 figs-idiom τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 that has been called upon you This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “by which you are called” or “by which you are known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 2 7 j108 figs-activepassive τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 that has been called upon you If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “by which people call you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 2 8 j109 grammar-connect-logic-contrast εἰ μέντοι 1 If, however James is using these words to introduce a contrast with what he said in [2:6](../02/06.md), “you have dishonored the poor,” meaning “you have treated rich people much better than you have treated poor people.” Alternate translation: “But if, instead of favoring rich people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -218,10 +218,10 @@ JAS 2 8 gll2 figs-idiom τὸν πλησίον σου 1 your neighbor This is an JAS 2 8 b9wu καλῶς ποιεῖτε 1 you do well Alternate translation: “you are doing what God wants you to do” JAS 2 9 xt6y figs-explicit προσωπολημπτεῖτε 1 you favor Your language may require you to specify the object of **favor**. Alternate translation: “you favor the rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 9 cq5h figs-activepassive ἐλεγχόμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου ὡς παραβάται 1 convicted by the law as transgressors If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and the law convicts you as transgressors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JAS 2 9 gl2e figs-personification ἐλεγχόμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου ὡς παραβάται 1 convicted by the law as transgressors James is speaking figuratively of the law as if it were a human judge. Alternate translation: “and you are guilty of breaking God’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 2 9 gl2e figs-personification ἐλεγχόμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου ὡς παραβάται 1 convicted by the law as transgressors James is speaking of the law as if it were a human judge. Alternate translation: “and you are guilty of breaking God’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 2 10 j112 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James is giving the reason for the statement he made in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The reason why showing favoritism makes a person guilty of breaking God’s law is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 2 10 l29g figs-idiom ὅστις…τηρήσῃ 1 whoever might keep Here, **keep** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “whoever might obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JAS 2 10 jb5u figs-metaphor πταίσῃ δὲ ἐν ἑνί 1 but stumble in one thing James speaks figuratively of a person disobeying a commandment as if he would **stumble**, that is, trip and lose his balance while walking. Alternate translation: “but disobey one thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 2 10 jb5u figs-metaphor πταίσῃ δὲ ἐν ἑνί 1 but stumble in one thing James speaks of a person disobeying a commandment as if he would **stumble**, that is, trip and lose his balance while walking. Alternate translation: “but disobey one thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 2 10 m8ep figs-nominaladj πταίσῃ δὲ ἐν ἑνί 1 but stumble in one thing James is using the adjective **one** as a noun to refer to one commandment of the law. (ULT adds the term **thing** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “but disobey one commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 2 10 j113 πάντων ἔνοχος 1 guilty of all Alternate translation: “guilty of breaking the entire law” JAS 2 10 j114 figs-explicit πάντων ἔνοχος 1 guilty of all If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why James says that this is true. Alternate translation: “guilty of breaking the entire law, because God gave the entire law to show people how he wanted them to live, and if you break one part of it, you are not living in that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -235,11 +235,11 @@ JAS 2 12 j116 figs-abstractnouns νόμου ἐλευθερίας 1 the law of f JAS 2 12 j117 figs-explicit νόμου ἐλευθερίας 1 the law of freedom If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what the **law** gives people the **freedom** to do. Alternate translation: “the law that sets people free to obey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 12 j118 figs-explicit νόμου ἐλευθερίας 1 the law of freedom In this context, it appears that when James speaks of **the law of freedom**, he is referring to the commandment that he quoted in [2:8](../02/08.md), “You will love your neighbor as yourself.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly and explain how this law sets people free. Alternate translation: “the law to love one’s neighbor, which sets people free to obey God by giving them a principle to follow in all of their actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 13 j119 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James is giving the reason why people should be guided in their actions by the principle of loving others, as he said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “You should follow the principle of loving others because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -JAS 2 13 j120 figs-metonymy ἡ γὰρ κρίσις ἀνέλεος τῷ μὴ ποιήσαντι ἔλεος 1 judgment is merciless to those who have not done mercy James is using the word **judgment** figuratively to represent God, the one who judges. Alternate translation: “when God judges people, he will not be merciful to people who have not shown mercy to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JAS 2 13 yv6l figs-personification ἡ γὰρ κρίσις ἀνέλεος τῷ μὴ ποιήσαντι ἔλεος 1 judgment is merciless to those who have not done mercy James is speaking figuratively of **judgment** as if it were a living thing that could act in a **merciless** way. Alternate translation: “When God judges people, he will not be merciful to people who have not shown mercy to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 2 13 j120 figs-metonymy ἡ γὰρ κρίσις ἀνέλεος τῷ μὴ ποιήσαντι ἔλεος 1 judgment is merciless to those who have not done mercy James is using the word **judgment** to represent God, the one who judges. Alternate translation: “when God judges people, he will not be merciful to people who have not shown mercy to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 2 13 yv6l figs-personification ἡ γὰρ κρίσις ἀνέλεος τῷ μὴ ποιήσαντι ἔλεος 1 judgment is merciless to those who have not done mercy James is speaking of **judgment** as if it were a living thing that could act in a **merciless** way. Alternate translation: “When God judges people, he will not be merciful to people who have not shown mercy to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 2 13 j121 τῷ μὴ ποιήσαντι ἔλεος 1 to those who have not done mercy The word translated **mercy** can also refer to compassion. Since James is referring in this context to following the command to love others, that is likely what it means here. Alternate translation: “those who have not acted compassionately towards others” JAS 2 13 j122 grammar-connect-logic-contrast κατακαυχᾶται ἔλεος κρίσεως 1 Mercy boasts against judgment There is an implied contrast between this sentence and the statement in the previous sentence that “judgment is merciless.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that contrast explicitly at the start of this sentence with a word such as “however.” Alternate translation: “However, mercy boasts against judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -JAS 2 13 j123 figs-personification κατακαυχᾶται ἔλεος κρίσεως 1 Mercy boasts against judgment James is speaking figuratively of **mercy** and **judgment** as if they were living things that could fight a contest against one another. He is also speaking figuratively of **mercy** as if it could boast after defeating **judgment** in such a contest. James is continuing to describe how God will judge people. Alternate translation: “However, God will show mercy when he judges people who have acted compassionately towards others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 2 13 j123 figs-personification κατακαυχᾶται ἔλεος κρίσεως 1 Mercy boasts against judgment James is speaking of **mercy** and **judgment** as if they were living things that could fight a contest against one another. He is also speaking of **mercy** as if it could boast after defeating **judgment** in such a contest. James is continuing to describe how God will judge people. Alternate translation: “However, God will show mercy when he judges people who have acted compassionately towards others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 2 14 k4e4 figs-rquestion τί τὸ ὄφελος, ἀδελφοί μου, ἐὰν πίστιν λέγῃ τις, ἔχειν ἔργα, δὲ μὴ ἔχῃ? 1 What would be the profit, my brothers, if someone said he had faith, but he did not have works? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “It does no good, my brothers, for someone to say he has faith if he does not have works.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 2 14 j124 figs-idiom τί τὸ ὄφελος 1 What would be the profit This is an idiom. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use here. Alternate translation: “What good would it do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 2 14 j125 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου 1 my brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -254,16 +254,16 @@ JAS 2 15 f6el figs-metaphor ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἀδελφὴ 1 a brother or s JAS 2 15 j130 γυμνοὶ 1 unclothed **Unclothed** can mean “naked,” and if a Bible translation already exists in your area, it may say that. But in this context, the word actually refers to lacking adequate clothes. Alternate translation: “badly clothed” JAS 2 16 j131 figs-hypo δέ 1 and James is continuing to describe the condition of the hypothetical situation that he is using to teach. Alternate translation: “and suppose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) JAS 2 16 j132 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς…αὐτοῖς 1 to them … them Even though in the previous verse James spoke in the singular of “a brother or sister,” he now speaks of needy people generally in the plural, saying **them**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use the singular in this verse as well. Alternate translation: “to him or her … him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JAS 2 16 j133 figs-metonymy θερμαίνεσθε καὶ χορτάζεσθε 1 warm yourself and be satisfied The person who would say this to people in need would be speaking figuratively of clothing by association with the way its keeps people warm and figuratively of food by association with the way it satisfies people. Alternate translation: “have adequate clothing and enough food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 2 16 j133 figs-metonymy θερμαίνεσθε καὶ χορτάζεσθε 1 warm yourself and be satisfied The person who would say this to people in need would be speaking of clothing by association with the way its keeps people warm and of food by association with the way it satisfies people. Alternate translation: “have adequate clothing and enough food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 2 16 lj89 θερμαίνεσθε 1 warm yourself Alternate translation: “stay warm” JAS 2 16 ngj8 figs-activepassive χορτάζεσθε 1 be satisfied If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an equivalent expression that uses an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “have enough food to satisfy you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 2 16 j134 figs-hypo δὲ 1 but James is continuing to describe the hypothetical situation that he is using to teach. Alternate translation: “but also suppose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) JAS 2 16 j135 writing-pronouns μὴ δῶτε 1 you do not give At the beginning of this verse, James speaks in the third-person singular of **one of you**. But he now speaks of believers generally in the second-person plural, saying **you**, to indicate how the community as a whole might respond to this situation. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use the third-person singular here as well. Alternate translation: “he does not give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JAS 2 16 j136 figs-nominaladj τὰ ἐπιτήδεια 1 the necessary things James is using the adjective **necessary** in the plural as a noun. (ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the things that are necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -JAS 2 16 n5jh figs-metonymy τοῦ σώματος 1 for the body James is speaking figuratively of meeting physical needs that also have an emotional and spiritual dimension by association with the way that these are needs of the human **body**. Alternate translation: “for people to be warm and well-fed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 2 16 n5jh figs-metonymy τοῦ σώματος 1 for the body James is speaking of meeting physical needs that also have an emotional and spiritual dimension by association with the way that these are needs of the human **body**. Alternate translation: “for people to be warm and well-fed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 2 16 yi63 figs-rquestion τί τὸ ὄφελος? 1 what would be the profit? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement or an exclamation. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “that does no good!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 2 16 j137 figs-hypo τί τὸ ὄφελος? 1 what would be the profit? This is the result of the hypothetical situation that James has been using to teach. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Then that does no good!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -JAS 2 17 me1d figs-personification ἡ πίστις, ἐὰν μὴ ἔχῃ ἔργα, νεκρά ἐστιν καθ’ ἑαυτήν 1 faith by itself, if it does not have works, is dead James is speaking figuratively of **faith** as if it would be a living thing if it had works but not be alive if it did not have them. Alternate translation: “a person’s faith is not genuine by itself; he must express it through works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 2 17 me1d figs-personification ἡ πίστις, ἐὰν μὴ ἔχῃ ἔργα, νεκρά ἐστιν καθ’ ἑαυτήν 1 faith by itself, if it does not have works, is dead James is speaking of **faith** as if it would be a living thing if it had works but not be alive if it did not have them. Alternate translation: “a person’s faith is not genuine by itself; he must express it through works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 2 17 j138 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις, ἐὰν μὴ ἔχῃ ἔργα, νεκρά ἐστιν καθ’ ἑαυτήν 1 faith by itself, if it does not have works, is dead If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **faith** and **works** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “if a person says he believes in God but he does not do what God wants him to do, then he does not really believe in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 2 18 j139 figs-quotations ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις, κἀγὼ ἔργα ἔχω 1 But someone will say, “You have faith and I have works.” See the discussion of this sentence in the General Notes to this chapter. You may want to turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation to help your readers understand that the **you** who is being addressed is the same “one of you” as in [2:16](../02/16.md) and that when James says **I**, he is referring to himself. Alternate translation: “But someone may tell you that you have faith and I have works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) JAS 2 18 j140 figs-explicit ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις, κἀγὼ ἔργα ἔχω 1 But someone will say, “You have faith, and I have works.” See the discussion of this sentence in the General Notes to this chapter. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate more explicitly what this statement means. (UST explains the implications even further than is suggested here.) Alternate translation: “But someone may try to reassure you that you nevertheless have faith, while I, James, have works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -283,19 +283,19 @@ JAS 2 20 ax95 figs-rquestion θέλεις δὲ γνῶναι, ὦ ἄνθρωπ JAS 2 20 j150 figs-idiom θέλεις…γνῶναι 1 do you wish to know This is an idiom. It means “I can show you” by suggesting implicitly, “If you really want to know, I can show you.” Alternate translation as a statement: “I can show you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 2 20 j151 ὦ ἄνθρωπε κενέ 1 O foolish man James is addressing this hypothetical **man** in the vocative after an exclamation. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you foolish man” JAS 2 20 j152 figs-gendernotations ὦ ἄνθρωπε κενέ 1 O foolish man James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that could mean any person, male or female. Alternate translation: “you foolish person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -JAS 2 20 j153 figs-personification ἡ πίστις χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων ἀργή ἐστιν 1 faith without works is idle James is speaking figuratively of **faith** as if it were a living thing that would be lazily doing nothing if it did not have works. Alternate translation: “a person’s faith is useless if he does not express it through works” or “a person’s faith is unproductive if he does not express it through works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 2 20 j153 figs-personification ἡ πίστις χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων ἀργή ἐστιν 1 faith without works is idle James is speaking of **faith** as if it were a living thing that would be lazily doing nothing if it did not have works. Alternate translation: “a person’s faith is useless if he does not express it through works” or “a person’s faith is unproductive if he does not express it through works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 2 20 sd63 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων ἀργή ἐστιν 1 faith without works is idle If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **faith** and **works** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “it is useless for a person to say that he believes in God if he does not do what God wants him to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 2 20 j154 translate-textvariants ἡ πίστις χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων ἀργή ἐστιν 1 faith without works is idle See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use this reading in your translation or a different reading, “faith without works is dead.” The note below discusses a translation issue in that reading, for those who decide to use it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -JAS 2 20 j155 figs-personification ἡ πίστις χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων ἀργή ἐστιν 1 faith without works is idle If the reading “faith without works is dead” is accurate, then James is speaking figuratively of **faith** as if it would be alive if it had works but it would not be alive if it did not have them. Alternate translation: “a person’s faith is not genuine if he does not express it through works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 2 20 j155 figs-personification ἡ πίστις χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων ἀργή ἐστιν 1 faith without works is idle If the reading “faith without works is dead” is accurate, then James is speaking of **faith** as if it would be alive if it had works but it would not be alive if it did not have them. Alternate translation: “a person’s faith is not genuine if he does not express it through works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 2 21 q8iv figs-rquestion Ἀβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἀνενέγκας Ἰσαὰκ τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ θυσιαστήριον? 1 Was not Abraham our father justified by works when he offered up Isaac his son on the altar? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “Abraham our father was justified by works when he offered up Isaac his son on the altar.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 2 21 j156 figs-explicit Ἀβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἀνενέγκας Ἰσαὰκ τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ θυσιαστήριον? 1 Was not Abraham our father justified by works when he offered up Isaac his son on the altar? James assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to a story recorded in the book of Genesis. In that story, God tells Abraham to offer his son Isaac as a sacrifice, but God does not really want Abraham to do that. Rather, God wants Abraham to demonstrate his faith and obedience by showing that he is willing to do it. God ultimately stops Abraham from sacrificing his son Isaac. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story and if they would think that Abraham actually did offer his son as a sacrifice. Alternate translation, as a statement: “Abraham our father was justified by works when he demonstrated that he was willing to obey God even if that meant offering his son Isaac as a sacrifice, although God did not actually want him to do that and God stopped him from doing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 21 v3ft figs-explicit Ἀβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη 1 Was not Abraham our father justified by works See the discussion in Part 2 of the General Introduction to James about how a person is justified before God. James is not saying that Abraham did something that made God consider him righteous. Rather, as James will explain in more detail in the next two verses, God had previously declared Abraham to be righteous because Abraham believed in him. What Abraham did subsequently, when he proved that he was willing to obey God, demonstrated that his faith was genuine. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they might misunderstand and think that Abraham did something that made God consider him righteous. Alternate translation, as a statement: “God declared Abraham our father to be righteous because what he did demonstrated that he genuinely believed in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 21 j157 figs-activepassive Ἀβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν οὐκ…ἐδικαιώθη 1 Was not Abraham our father justified If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation, as a statement: “God justified Abraham our father” or “God declared Abraham our father to be righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 2 21 j158 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ…Ἰσαὰκ 1 Abraham … Isaac These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -JAS 2 21 ph1s figs-metaphor ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 our father James is using the term **father** figuratively to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “Abraham our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 2 21 ph1s figs-metaphor ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 our father James is using the term **father** to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “Abraham our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 2 21 j159 figs-exclusive ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 our father James is Jewish, descended from Abraham, and the people to whom he is writing also come from a Jewish background, so the word **our** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -JAS 2 22 l1gj figs-metaphor βλέπεις 1 You see Here, to **see** figuratively represents to understand. Alternate translation: “So you should understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 2 22 vde4 figs-personification ἡ πίστις συνήργει τοῖς ἔργοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἔργων ἡ πίστις ἐτελειώθη 1 faith was working with his works and faith was perfected from works James is speaking figuratively of **faith** and **works** as if they were living things that could work together and help each other. Alternate translation: “Abraham was strengthened to do these works by his faith, and doing these works made his faith even stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 2 22 l1gj figs-metaphor βλέπεις 1 You see Here, to **see** represents to understand. Alternate translation: “So you should understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 2 22 vde4 figs-personification ἡ πίστις συνήργει τοῖς ἔργοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἔργων ἡ πίστις ἐτελειώθη 1 faith was working with his works and faith was perfected from works James is speaking of **faith** and **works** as if they were living things that could work together and help each other. Alternate translation: “Abraham was strengthened to do these works by his faith, and doing these works made his faith even stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 2 22 j160 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις συνήργει τοῖς ἔργοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἔργων ἡ πίστις ἐτελειώθη 1 faith was working with his works and faith was perfected from works If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **faith** and **works** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “Abraham did these things because he believed in God, and because he did these things, he believed in God even more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 2 22 j161 figs-activepassive ἐκ τῶν ἔργων ἡ πίστις ἐτελειώθη 1 faith was perfected from works If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his works perfected his faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 2 22 j162 ἐκ τῶν ἔργων ἡ πίστις ἐτελειώθη 1 faith was perfected from works The verb **perfected** comes from the same root as the adjective “perfect” that James uses several times earlier in this letter. The verb refers similarly to something developing to the point where it is fully suited to its purpose. Alternate translation: “what he did helped his faith become fully mature” @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ JAS 2 23 qh4i figs-activepassive ἐπληρώθη ἡ Γραφὴ 1 the scriptu JAS 2 23 l818 figs-explicit ἐπίστευσεν δὲ Ἀβραὰμ τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ ἐλογίσθη αὐτῷ εἰς δικαιοσύνην 1 And Abraham believed God, and it was counted to him as righteousness This is a quotation from [Genesis 15:6](../gen/15/06.md). James assumes that his readers will know that it refers to how Abraham responded to God’s promise that even though he and his wife were old and had no children, he would have as many descendants as the stars in the sky. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give an explicit indication of this. Alternate translation: “Abraham believed God’s promise that he would have many descendants, and so God considered Abraham to be in a right relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 23 j163 figs-explicit φίλος Θεοῦ ἐκλήθη 1 he was called a friend of God James assumes that his readers will know that in [Isaiah 41:8](../isa/41/08.md), God refers to the Israelites as “the offspring of Abraham my friend” and that in [2 Chronicles 20:7](../2ch/20/07.md), in a prayer to God, King Jehoshaphat refers to the Israelites as “the descendants of Abraham your friend.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give an explicit indication of this. Alternate translation: “he was called a friend of God in later scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 23 j164 figs-activepassive φίλος Θεοῦ ἐκλήθη 1 he was called a friend of God If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God, speaking through Isaiah, later called him his friend, and in prayer King Jehoshaphat also described him as God’s friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JAS 2 24 j165 figs-metaphor ὁρᾶτε 1 You see Here, to **see** figuratively represents to understand. Alternate translation: “So you should understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 2 24 j165 figs-metaphor ὁρᾶτε 1 You see Here, to **see** represents to understand. Alternate translation: “So you should understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 2 24 j166 figs-you ὁρᾶτε 1 you see James returns here to the plural usage that he follows in most of the letter. So in your translation, use the plural form of “you” if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating the shift back to plural here. Alternate translation: “So all of you should understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JAS 2 24 j167 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 a man James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that could mean any person, male or female. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JAS 2 24 yha5 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται 1 is justified If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “becomes right with God” or “comes to have a right relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ JAS 2 25 pn2f figs-explicit ὑποδεξαμένη τοὺς ἀγγέλους, JAS 2 25 xm5m writing-pronouns ἐκβαλοῦσα 1 having sent them away Since there were two **messengers**, the pronoun **them** would be in the dual, if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JAS 2 26 j172 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James is using this word to introduce a general principle that can be deduced from the argument he has been making since [2:14](../02/14.md) that **faith** needs to be expressed in **works**. He does not say **For**, which often means “because,” to indicate that God justified Abraham and Rahab for this reason. Rather, he is using the word **For** in order to bring his argument to its conclusion. Alternate translation: “These specific cases confirm the general principle that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 2 26 j173 τὸ σῶμα χωρὶς πνεύματος νεκρόν ἐστιν 1 the body without the spirit is dead The word translated **spirit** can also mean “breath.” Alternate translation: “a body that does not have the breath of life in it is dead” -JAS 2 26 uum8 figs-personification ἡ πίστις χωρὶς ἔργων νεκρά ἐστιν 1 faith without works is dead James is speaking figuratively of **faith** as if it would be a living thing if it had works but not be alive if it did not have them. Alternate translation: “a person’s faith is not genuine if he does not express it through works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 2 26 uum8 figs-personification ἡ πίστις χωρὶς ἔργων νεκρά ἐστιν 1 faith without works is dead James is speaking of **faith** as if it would be a living thing if it had works but not be alive if it did not have them. Alternate translation: “a person’s faith is not genuine if he does not express it through works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 2 26 j174 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις χωρὶς ἔργων νεκρά ἐστιν 1 faith without works is dead If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **faith** and **works** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “if a person says he believes in God but he does not do what God wants him to do, then he does not really believe in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 3 intro py3p 0 # James 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. The need for self-control in speech (3:1-12)
2. Worldy wisdom and heavenly wisdom contrasted (3:13-18)

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

In this chapter, James uses many illustrations from everyday life to teach his readers how to live in a way that pleases God. He speaks about horses in [3:3](../03/03.md), ships in [3:4](../03/04.md), forest fires in [3:5](../03/05.md), animal taming in [3:7](../03/07.md), springs of water in [3:11](../03/11.md), and fruit trees in [3:12](../03/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 1 p4uu μὴ πολλοὶ διδάσκαλοι γίνεσθε 1 Do not become many teachers Alternate translation: “Not many of you should become teachers” @@ -329,21 +329,21 @@ JAS 3 1 aw5f figs-explicit μεῖζον κρίμα λημψόμεθα 1 we will JAS 3 2 j176 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James is using **For** to introduce the reason why most of his readers should not become teachers, not the reason why God will judge teachers more strictly. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain this reason more fully as a separate sentence, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 3 2 j177 πολλὰ…πταίομεν ἅπαντες 1 we all stumble much James is using the adjective **much** as an adverb. Alternate translation: “we all stumble in many ways” JAS 3 2 ab9h figs-exclusive πολλὰ…πταίομεν ἅπαντες 1 we all stumble much James is now speaking of himself and other teachers and also of his readers and people in general, so the pronoun **we** is inclusive here. Alternate translation: “everyone stumbles in many ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -JAS 3 2 p9ek figs-metaphor πολλὰ…πταίομεν ἅπαντες…ἐν λόγῳ οὐ πταίει 1 we all stumble much … does not stumble in word As in [2:10](../02/10.md), James is speaking figuratively of people sinning as if they would **stumble**, that is, trip and lose their balance while walking. Alternate translation: “we all sin in many ways … does not sin in word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 3 2 t6xt figs-metonymy εἴ τις ἐν λόγῳ οὐ πταίει 1 If anyone does not stumble in word James is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what people say by using words. Alternate translation: “If anyone does not sin in what he says” or “If anyone does not say things that are wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 3 2 p9ek figs-metaphor πολλὰ…πταίομεν ἅπαντες…ἐν λόγῳ οὐ πταίει 1 we all stumble much … does not stumble in word As in [2:10](../02/10.md), James is speaking of people sinning as if they would **stumble**, that is, trip and lose their balance while walking. Alternate translation: “we all sin in many ways … does not sin in word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 2 t6xt figs-metonymy εἴ τις ἐν λόγῳ οὐ πταίει 1 If anyone does not stumble in word James is using the term **word** to mean what people say by using words. Alternate translation: “If anyone does not sin in what he says” or “If anyone does not say things that are wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 3 2 kn4v οὗτος τέλειος ἀνήρ 1 he is a perfect man As in [1:4](../01/04.md) and several other places earlier in this letter, the term **perfect** refers to something that has developed to the point where it is fully suited to its purpose. Alternate translation: “he is a spiritually mature person” -JAS 3 2 j178 figs-metaphor δυνατὸς χαλιναγωγῆσαι καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα 1 able to bridle even the whole body As in [1:26](../01/26.md), James speaks figuratively of a person being able to **bridle** himself as if that person were controlling a horse with a bridle. Alternate translation: “able to control his whole body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 3 2 b16h figs-synecdoche δυνατὸς χαλιναγωγῆσαι καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα 1 able to bridle even the whole body James speaks figuratively of a person’s **body** to mean all of that person, including his actions and behavior. Alternate translation: “able to control everything he does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +JAS 3 2 j178 figs-metaphor δυνατὸς χαλιναγωγῆσαι καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα 1 able to bridle even the whole body As in [1:26](../01/26.md), James speaks of a person being able to **bridle** himself as if that person were controlling a horse with a bridle. Alternate translation: “able to control his whole body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 2 b16h figs-synecdoche δυνατὸς χαλιναγωγῆσαι καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα 1 able to bridle even the whole body James speaks of a person’s **body** to mean all of that person, including his actions and behavior. Alternate translation: “able to control everything he does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JAS 3 3 s1nf grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now James uses **Now** to introduce background information in the form of an illustration that will help his readers understand what he wants to teach them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate the word with a phrase that shows that James is going to offer an illustration, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) JAS 3 3 zql3 translate-unknown τῶν ἵππων τοὺς χαλινοὺς εἰς τὰ στόματα βάλλομεν 1 we put bits into the mouths of horses **Horses** are large animals that are used in many cultures to transport people and goods. **Bits** are small pieces of metal that are placed into horses’ mouths to control where they go. If your readers would not be familiar with **horses** and **bits**, in your translation you could use the name of another animal and a different device, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “we put pegs into the noses of camels” or “we use small devices on the bodies of large animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JAS 3 3 j179 εἰς τὸ πείθεσθαι αὐτοὺς ἡμῖν 1 for them to obey us Alternate translation: “so that they will obey us” -JAS 3 3 j180 figs-metonymy καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα αὐτῶν μετάγομεν 1 we also turn their whole body James means that by using a bit, people can **turn** the body of a horse in whatever direction they want. James is figuratively using the action of turning a horse to mean guiding or controlling it in general. Alternate translation: “this enables us to guide their whole body” or “this enables us to control their whole body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 3 3 j180 figs-metonymy καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα αὐτῶν μετάγομεν 1 we also turn their whole body James means that by using a bit, people can **turn** the body of a horse in whatever direction they want. James is using the action of turning a horse to mean guiding or controlling it in general. Alternate translation: “this enables us to guide their whole body” or “this enables us to control their whole body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 3 3 j181 ὅλον τὸ σῶμα αὐτῶν 1 their whole body Since James speaks of **horses** in the plural, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **body**. Alternate translation: “their whole bodies” -JAS 3 4 j182 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, καὶ τὰ πλοῖα 1 Behold also the ships The term **behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used figuratively to mean giving notice and attention, and that is how James is using it here. Alternate translation: “Also consider the case of ships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 4 j182 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, καὶ τὰ πλοῖα 1 Behold also the ships The term **behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used to mean giving notice and attention, and that is how James is using it here. Alternate translation: “Also consider the case of ships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 4 yn42 translate-unknown πλοῖα…πηδαλίου 1 ships … rudder **Ships** are large vessels that are used to transport people or goods by water. A **rudder** is a flat device attached to the back of a ship that is used to steer it. If your readers would not be familiar with what **ships** are and what a **rudder** is, in your translation you could use the name of another transportation vehicle and a different device, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “trucks … steering wheel” or “large vehicles … steering device” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JAS 3 4 j183 τηλικαῦτα ὄντα, καὶ ὑπὸ ἀνέμων σκληρῶν ἐλαυνόμενα 1 being so large and driven by strong winds It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Even though they are so large and driven by strong winds” JAS 3 4 k7f5 figs-activepassive τηλικαῦτα ὄντα, καὶ ὑπὸ ἀνέμων σκληρῶν ἐλαυνόμενα 1 being so large and driven by strong winds If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Even though they are so large and strong winds drive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JAS 3 4 jrk1 figs-metonymy μετάγεται ὑπὸ ἐλαχίστου πηδαλίου 1 it is turned by the smallest rudder James is figuratively using the action of turning a ship to mean guiding or controlling the ship in general. (For example, a person might turn a ship in order to keep it upright, not just to direct it to a certain place.) Alternate translation: “it is controlled by the smallest rudder” or “it is guided by the smallest rudder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 3 4 jrk1 figs-metonymy μετάγεται ὑπὸ ἐλαχίστου πηδαλίου 1 it is turned by the smallest rudder James is using the action of turning a ship to mean guiding or controlling the ship in general. (For example, a person might turn a ship in order to keep it upright, not just to direct it to a certain place.) Alternate translation: “it is controlled by the smallest rudder” or “it is guided by the smallest rudder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 3 4 j184 figs-activepassive μετάγεται ὑπὸ ἐλαχίστου πηδαλίου 1 it is turned by the smallest rudder If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the smallest rudder turns it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 3 4 j185 μετάγεται ὑπὸ ἐλαχίστου πηδαλίου 1 it is turned by the smallest rudder Since James speaks of **ships** in the plural, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural in this clause as well. Alternate translation: “they are turned by the smallest rudders” or “the smallest rudders turn them” JAS 3 4 j186 ἐλαχίστου πηδαλίου 1 the smallest rudder James says **smallest**, using the superlative form of the adjective “small,” to express a meaning of the adjective in its positive form. Your language may use superlative forms in the same way. If not, you could translate this using the positive form. Alternate translation: “a very small rudder” @@ -351,51 +351,51 @@ JAS 3 4 j187 figs-personification ὅπου ἡ ὁρμὴ τοῦ εὐθύνο JAS 3 5 wt6i figs-simile οὕτως καὶ 1 Thus also James uses the words **thus also** to introduce a simile or comparison between the human tongue and the small items he discussed in the previous two verses, a horse’s bit and a ship’s rudder. Alternate translation: “In the same way” or “Likewise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) JAS 3 5 j189 μικρὸν μέλος 1 a small member Alternate translation: “a part of the body” JAS 3 5 j190 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 2 but Here, **but** introduces a contrast between the small size of the tongue and the great things that people use their tongues in speech to boast about. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -JAS 3 5 j191 figs-personification μεγάλα αὐχεῖ 1 it boasts great things James is saying figuratively that the **tongue** is a living thing that **boasts**. Alternate translation: “with it people boast great things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 3 5 j191 figs-personification μεγάλα αὐχεῖ 1 it boasts great things James is saying that the **tongue** is a living thing that **boasts**. Alternate translation: “with it people boast great things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 3 5 qx1k figs-nominaladj μεγάλα αὐχεῖ 1 it boasts great things James is using the adjective **great** in the plural as a noun. (ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “with it people boast that they have done great things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 3 5 ub5h figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. Alternate translation: “Consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 5 j192 figs-explicit ἰδοὺ 1 Behold The implication is that James is offering his readers a further analogy. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Consider as a further example” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 3 5 fr8x translate-unknown ἡλίκον πῦρ, ἡλίκην ὕλην ἀνάπτει 1 how small a fire kindles so large a forest A **forest** is a place where there are many trees. If your readers would not be familiar with what a **forest** is, you could use a different illustration that would be familiar to them of an area that could be destroyed by fire, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “how a small fire can quickly spread and burn much grassland” or “how a small fire can quickly spread and burn everything in a large area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -JAS 3 6 wm5q figs-metonymy καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα πῦρ 1 The tongue is also a fire James is using the **tongue** figuratively to represent what people say, by association with the way the tongue is used for speech. Alternate translation: “What we say is also a fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 3 6 wm5q figs-metonymy καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα πῦρ 1 The tongue is also a fire James is using the **tongue** to represent what people say, by association with the way the tongue is used for speech. Alternate translation: “What we say is also a fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 3 6 j193 figs-metaphor καὶ ἡ γλῶσσα πῦρ 1 The tongue is also a fire James is using **fire** as an analogy for the destructive effects of what people say. Alternate translation: “What we say can also be very destructive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 6 i61e figs-idiom ὁ κόσμος τῆς ἀδικίας 1 a world of unrighteousness This is an idiom. The sense is that all the **unrighteousness** in the **world** could be expressed in what someone said. Alternate translation: “a vast source of unrighteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 3 6 j194 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀδικίας 1 of unrighteousness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with an equivalent expression. In this context, the term refers to wrong things that people say. Alternate translation: “of sinful sayings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 3 6 j195 figs-activepassive καθίσταται ἐν 1 is placed among If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “is in the middle of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 3 6 j196 τοῖς μέλεσιν ἡμῶν 1 our members Alternate translation: “the other parts of our body” -JAS 3 6 sv44 figs-metaphor σπιλοῦσα ὅλον τὸ σῶμα 1 staining the whole body James speaks figuratively of the effects of speech as if a person’s tongue were **staining** his **body**. Alternate translation: “making the whole body impure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 3 6 j198 figs-metaphor σπιλοῦσα ὅλον τὸ σῶμα 1 staining the whole body James is figuratively using the **body** to represent the entire person, since he is saying in this verse that bad speech has morally corrupting effects. Alternate translation: “making the whole person morally corrupt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 6 sv44 figs-metaphor σπιλοῦσα ὅλον τὸ σῶμα 1 staining the whole body James speaks of the effects of speech as if a person’s tongue were **staining** his **body**. Alternate translation: “making the whole body impure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 6 j198 figs-metaphor σπιλοῦσα ὅλον τὸ σῶμα 1 staining the whole body James is using the **body** to represent the entire person, since he is saying in this verse that bad speech has morally corrupting effects. Alternate translation: “making the whole person morally corrupt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 6 j199 figs-idiom φλογίζουσα τὸν τροχὸν τῆς γενέσεως 1 setting the course of existence on fire The **course of existence** is an idiom that could refer to: (1) a person’s entire life, from birth to death. Alternate translation: “setting a person’s entire life on fire” (2) succeeding generations. Alternate translation: “setting on fire one generation of people after another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JAS 3 6 lf1j figs-metaphor φλογίζουσα τὸν τροχὸν τῆς γενέσεως 1 setting the course of existence on fire James is speaking figuratively of the destructive effects of bad speech as if they were **setting** a person’s life **on fire**. Alternate translation: “causing destruction throughout a person’s entire life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 6 lf1j figs-metaphor φλογίζουσα τὸν τροχὸν τῆς γενέσεως 1 setting the course of existence on fire James is speaking of the destructive effects of bad speech as if they were **setting** a person’s life **on fire**. Alternate translation: “causing destruction throughout a person’s entire life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 6 a7qd figs-activepassive φλογιζομένη ὑπὸ τῆς Γεέννης 1 it is set on fire by Gehenna If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “Gehenna sets it on fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JAS 3 6 j200 figs-metaphor φλογιζομένη ὑπὸ τῆς Γεέννης 1 it is set on fire by Gehenna James continues to speak figuratively of the destructive effects of bad speech as if they were **fire**. Alternate translation: “its destructive effects come from Gehenna” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 6 j200 figs-metaphor φλογιζομένη ὑπὸ τῆς Γεέννης 1 it is set on fire by Gehenna James continues to speak of the destructive effects of bad speech as if they were **fire**. Alternate translation: “its destructive effects come from Gehenna” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 6 j201 translate-names τῆς Γεέννης 1 Gehenna **Gehenna** is the Greek name for a place, the Valley of Hinnom just outside Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -JAS 3 6 j202 figs-metaphor τῆς Γεέννης 1 Gehenna James is figuratively using the name of this place, where refuse was thrown and fires burned continually, to mean hell. Alternate translation: “hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 3 6 j203 figs-metaphor τῆς Γεέννης 1 Gehenna Since hell, as a location, would not be able to influence people’s speech and conduct, James is likely using the name **Gehenna** figuratively to mean the devil by association. Alternate translation: “the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 6 j202 figs-metaphor τῆς Γεέννης 1 Gehenna James is using the name of this place, where refuse was thrown and fires burned continually, to mean hell. Alternate translation: “hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 6 j203 figs-metaphor τῆς Γεέννης 1 Gehenna Since hell, as a location, would not be able to influence people’s speech and conduct, James is likely using the name **Gehenna** to mean the devil by association. Alternate translation: “the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 7 j204 grammar-connect-time-background γὰρ 1 For James uses **For** to introduce background information in the form of an illustration that will help his readers understand what he wants to teach them. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) JAS 3 7 j205 figs-hyperbole πᾶσα…φύσις θηρίων τε καὶ πετεινῶν, ἑρπετῶν τε καὶ ἐναλίων, δαμάζεται καὶ δεδάμασται 1 every kind, both of beasts and birds, both of reptiles and marine animals, is being tamed and has been tamed Here, **every** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many different kinds of beasts, birds, reptiles, and marine animals are being tamed and have been tamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) JAS 3 7 j206 πᾶσα γὰρ φύσις θηρίων τε καὶ πετεινῶν, ἑρπετῶν τε καὶ ἐναλίων 1 every kind, both of beasts and birds, both of reptiles and marine animals If you retain the generalization in your translation, it might be more natural in your language to use the singular for the creatures on this list. Alternate translation: “every kind of beast, bird, reptile, and marine animal” -JAS 3 7 j207 figs-merism πᾶσα γὰρ φύσις θηρίων τε καὶ πετεινῶν, ἑρπετῶν τε καὶ ἐναλίων 1 every kind, both of beasts and birds, both of reptiles and marine animals James is figuratively using various categories of creatures to mean every creature. Alternate translation: “every kind of creature that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +JAS 3 7 j207 figs-merism πᾶσα γὰρ φύσις θηρίων τε καὶ πετεινῶν, ἑρπετῶν τε καὶ ἐναλίων 1 every kind, both of beasts and birds, both of reptiles and marine animals James is using various categories of creatures to mean every creature. Alternate translation: “every kind of creature that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) JAS 3 7 zw5m figs-nominaladj ἐναλίων 1 marine animals James is using the adjective **marine** in the plural as a noun. (ULT adds **animals** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “sea creatures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 3 7 ug59 figs-activepassive δαμάζεται καὶ δεδάμασται τῇ φύσει τῇ ἀνθρωπίνῃ 1 is being tamed and has been tamed by the human kind If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation (place the phrase right after “For”): “the human kind is taming and has tamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 3 7 j208 figs-doublet δαμάζεται καὶ δεδάμασται τῇ φύσει τῇ ἀνθρωπίνῃ 1 is being tamed and has been tamed by the human kind James says both **is being tamed** and **has been tamed** for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation (place the phrase right after “For”): “the human kind is in the process of taming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JAS 3 7 j209 τῇ φύσει τῇ ἀνθρωπίνῃ 1 by the human kind Alternate translation: “by people” JAS 3 8 j210 figs-gendernotations οὐδεὶς…ἀνθρώπων 1 none of men James is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “no human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JAS 3 8 q9xe figs-metaphor δαμάσαι 1 to tame By analogy with the animals he discussed in the previous verse, James is using the word **tame** to mean “control.” Alternate translation: “to control” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 3 8 j211 figs-metonymy τὴν…γλῶσσαν 1 the tongue James is using the **tongue** figuratively to represent what people say, by association with the way the tongue is used for speech. Alternate translation: “what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 3 8 j211 figs-metonymy τὴν…γλῶσσαν 1 the tongue James is using the **tongue** to represent what people say, by association with the way the tongue is used for speech. Alternate translation: “what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 3 8 j212 figs-nominaladj ἀκατάστατον κακόν 1 an unsettled evil James is using the adjective **evil** as a noun. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “an unsettled evil thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -JAS 3 8 j213 figs-personification ἀκατάστατον κακόν 1 an unsettled evil In this context, the word **unsettled** means “restless.” James is speaking figuratively of the **tongue** as if it were a living thing that could never rest because it always had to be saying bad things. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “We are constantly saying evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 3 8 j213 figs-personification ἀκατάστατον κακόν 1 an unsettled evil In this context, the word **unsettled** means “restless.” James is speaking of the **tongue** as if it were a living thing that could never rest because it always had to be saying bad things. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “We are constantly saying evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 3 8 m7vi figs-metaphor μεστὴ ἰοῦ θανατηφόρου 1 full of deadly poison James is using **deadly poison** as an analogy for the destructive effects of what people say. Alternate translation (continuing a new sentence): “and what we say has very destructive effects” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 9 le6h writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτῇ εὐλογοῦμεν…καὶ ἐν αὐτῇ καταρώμεθα 1 With it we bless … and with it we curse The pronoun **it** refers to the tongue. Alternate translation: “With our tongue we bless … and with our tongue we curse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JAS 3 9 j214 figs-metonymy ἐν αὐτῇ εὐλογοῦμεν…καὶ ἐν αὐτῇ καταρώμεθα 1 With it we bless … and with it we curse James is using the **tongue** figuratively to represent what people say, by association with the way the tongue is used for speech. Alternate translation: “We use our tongue in speech to bless … and we use our tongue in speech to curse” or “By what we say, we bless … and by what we say, we curse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 3 9 j214 figs-metonymy ἐν αὐτῇ εὐλογοῦμεν…καὶ ἐν αὐτῇ καταρώμεθα 1 With it we bless … and with it we curse James is using the **tongue** to represent what people say, by association with the way the tongue is used for speech. Alternate translation: “We use our tongue in speech to bless … and we use our tongue in speech to curse” or “By what we say, we bless … and by what we say, we curse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 3 9 ucm9 εὐλογοῦμεν 1 we bless In this context, **bless** does not mean to confer a blessing on someone, as a superior would to an inferior. Rather, it means to say good things about someone. Alternate translation: “we say good things about” JAS 3 9 j215 figs-hendiadys τὸν Κύριον καὶ Πατέρα 1 the Lord and Father James is not talking about two different people. He is expressing a single idea by using two nouns connected with **and**. The noun **Father** further identifies **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord our Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) JAS 3 9 j216 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JAS 3 9 j217 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀνθρώπους 1 men James is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JAS 3 9 umg1 figs-explicit τοὺς καθ’ ὁμοίωσιν Θεοῦ γεγονότας 1 who have come into being according to the likeness of God James means implicitly that God created people in his own **likeness**. Alternate translation: “whom God made according to his own likeness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JAS 3 10 j218 figs-metonymy ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ στόματος ἐξέρχεται εὐλογία καὶ κατάρα 1 Out of the same mouth come blessing and cursing James is using the **mouth** figuratively to represent what people say, by association with the way the mouth is used for speech. Alternate translation: “The same person speaks blessing and cursing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 3 10 j218 figs-metonymy ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ στόματος ἐξέρχεται εὐλογία καὶ κατάρα 1 Out of the same mouth come blessing and cursing James is using the **mouth** to represent what people say, by association with the way the mouth is used for speech. Alternate translation: “The same person speaks blessing and cursing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 3 10 a1ly figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ στόματος ἐξέρχεται εὐλογία καὶ κατάρα 1 Out of the same mouth come blessing and cursing If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **blessing** and **cursing** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “The same person says things to bless God and to curse people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 3 10 j219 εὐλογία 1 blessing See how you translated the word “bless” in [3:9](../03/09.md). You may wish to use a similar translation here. Alternate translation: “good sayings” -JAS 3 10 n9zy figs-idiom οὐ χρή, ἀδελφοί μου, ταῦτα οὕτως γίνεσθαι 1 It is not necessary, my brothers, for these things to happen thus James is speaking idiomatically here. Alternate translation: “My brothers, things like this should not happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +JAS 3 10 n9zy figs-idiom οὐ χρή, ἀδελφοί μου, ταῦτα οὕτως γίνεσθαι 1 It is not necessary, my brothers, for these things to happen thus James is speaking here. Alternate translation: “My brothers, things like this should not happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 3 10 qrs2 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου 1 my brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 11 j220 figs-doublenegatives μήτι ἡ πηγὴ ἐκ τῆς αὐτῆς ὀπῆς βρύει τὸ γλυκὺ καὶ τὸ πικρόν 1 A spring does not gush the sweet and the bitter from the same opening, does it The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding “does it?” Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Does a spring gush the sweet and the bitter from the same opening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) JAS 3 11 mz8d figs-rquestion μήτι ἡ πηγὴ ἐκ τῆς αὐτῆς ὀπῆς βρύει τὸ γλυκὺ καὶ τὸ πικρόν? 1 A spring does not gush the sweet and the bitter from the same opening, does it? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “A spring does not gush the sweet and the bitter from the same opening!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ JAS 3 13 fgb7 figs-rquestion τίς σοφὸς καὶ ἐπιστήμων ἐ JAS 3 13 j230 figs-doublet σοφὸς καὶ ἐπιστήμων 1 wise and understanding The words **wise** and **understanding** mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by translating them with a single expression. Alternate translation: “truly wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JAS 3 13 f9xv figs-abstractnouns δειξάτω ἐκ τῆς καλῆς ἀναστροφῆς τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ ἐν πραΰτητι σοφίας 1 Let him show his works from good conduct in the humility of wisdom If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **works**, **conduct**, **humility**, and **wisdom** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “Let him show by conducting himself well, and by being humble as a wise person should be, that he does what God wants him to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 3 13 j231 figs-possession ἐν πραΰτητι σοφίας 1 in the humility of wisdom James is using the possessive form to describe **humility** that comes from **wisdom**. Alternate translation: “in the humility that comes from wisdom” or “with the humble attitude that comes from being wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -JAS 3 14 j232 figs-metaphor ζῆλον πικρὸν ἔχετε, καὶ ἐριθείαν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν 1 you have bitter envy and ambition in your heart James is using the **heart** figuratively to represent the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “you have bitterly envious and ambitious thoughts and feelings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 14 j232 figs-metaphor ζῆλον πικρὸν ἔχετε, καὶ ἐριθείαν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν 1 you have bitter envy and ambition in your heart James is using the **heart** to represent the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “you have bitterly envious and ambitious thoughts and feelings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 14 js7b figs-abstractnouns ζῆλον πικρὸν ἔχετε, καὶ ἐριθείαν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν 1 you have bitter jealousy and ambition in your heart If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **jealousy** and **ambition** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “in your heart you resent what other people have and you want to be more successful than anyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 3 14 j233 τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν 1 your heart Since **you** and **your** are plural in this verse, if you retain the metaphor **heart** in your translation, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of that word. Alternate translation: “your hearts” JAS 3 14 j234 figs-explicit μὴ κατακαυχᾶσθε καὶ ψεύδεσθε κατὰ τῆς ἀληθείας 1 do not boast and lie against the truth Since James says in the previous verse that someone who is truly wise will be humble, he could be saying here that if someone claims to be wise but is jealous and ambitious, he is showing that he is actually not wise. Alternate translation: “then do not boast that you are wise, because that would not be true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -425,75 +425,75 @@ JAS 3 15 j236 figs-explicit αὕτη 1 This **This** refers to the “bitter je JAS 3 15 g44u figs-abstractnouns ἡ σοφία 1 the wisdom If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise way of living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 3 15 clz6 figs-metaphor ἄνωθεν κατερχομένη 1 that comes down from above James says **from above**, meaning “from heaven,” as a spatial metaphor that means “from God.” Alternate translation: “that comes from God” or “that God teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 15 h36b figs-metonymy ἐπίγειος 1 earthly The word **earthly** refers to the values and behavior of people who do not honor God. James uses the word by association with the way such people live on earth without regard for the values and behavior that are characteristic of heaven. Alternate translation: “not honoring to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JAS 3 15 a2u6 figs-metonymy ψυχική 1 soulish James is figuratively using one part of the human being, the soul, as opposed to another part, the spirit, to mean “unspiritual.” The sense could be either that this behavior has no regard for spiritual things or that it does not come from the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “unspiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 3 15 a2u6 figs-metonymy ψυχική 1 soulish James is using one part of the human being, the soul, as opposed to another part, the spirit, to mean “unspiritual.” The sense could be either that this behavior has no regard for spiritual things or that it does not come from the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “unspiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 3 15 mzc9 δαιμονιώδης 1 demonic Alternate translation: “from demons” or “like the behavior of demons” JAS 3 16 j237 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James is giving the reason for the statement he made in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “It is clear that this is not godly wisdom, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 3 16 x5jz figs-abstractnouns ὅπου…ζῆλος καὶ ἐριθεία, ἐκεῖ ἀκαταστασία καὶ πᾶν φαῦλον πρᾶγμα 1 where there is envy and ambition, there is unsettledness and every wicked deed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **envy**, **ambition**, and **unsettledness** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “when people are envious and ambitious, this causes them to act in disorderly and evil ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 3 16 vmt4 figs-hyperbole πᾶν φαῦλον πρᾶγμα 1 every wicked deed Here, **every** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many kinds of wicked deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) JAS 3 17 s8w4 figs-abstractnouns ἡ…σοφία 1 the wisdom If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise way of living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 3 17 hhk5 figs-metaphor ἄνωθεν 1 from above See how you translated this phrase in [3:15](../03/15.md). Alternate translation: “that comes from God” or “that God teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 3 17 hfh9 figs-metaphor καρπῶν ἀγαθῶν 1 good fruits James speaks figuratively of **good fruits** to mean kind things that people do for others as a result of having wisdom from God. Alternate translation: “good deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 17 hfh9 figs-metaphor καρπῶν ἀγαθῶν 1 good fruits James speaks of **good fruits** to mean kind things that people do for others as a result of having wisdom from God. Alternate translation: “good deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 17 by2l ἀνυπόκριτος 1 sincere Alternate translation: “not hypocritical” or “honest” or “truthful” -JAS 3 18 md56 figs-metaphor καρπὸς…δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην 1 the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace James speaks figuratively of those who **make peace** as if they were sowing seeds, and of righteousness as if it were **fruit** that grew from those seeds. Alternate translation: “those who work in peace to make peace produce righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 18 md56 figs-metaphor καρπὸς…δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην 1 the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace James speaks of those who **make peace** as if they were sowing seeds, and of righteousness as if it were **fruit** that grew from those seeds. Alternate translation: “those who work in peace to make peace produce righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 18 htr1 figs-abstractnouns καρπὸς…δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην 1 the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **righteousness** and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who work peacefully to help people live together peacefully are helping those people to live in the right way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 3 18 j238 figs-activepassive καρπὸς…δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην 1 the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace If you decide to retain the metaphor of sowing, you could express it with an active verbal form, if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “those who make peace sow the fruit of righteousness in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 4 intro r6vv 0 # James 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Worldly desires and the sin and conflict they cause (4:1-12)
2. A warning against boasting about tomorrow (4:13-17)

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Adultery

Writers in the Bible often speak of adultery as a metaphor for people who say they love God but do things that God hates. James uses the same metaphor in [4:4](../04/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]]) JAS 4 1 j239 πόθεν πόλεμοι καὶ πόθεν μάχαι ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Whence are wars and whence are battles among you The word translated **whence** means “from where.” Your language may have a similar word that you can use in your translation. Otherwise, you could express the same meaning in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Where do wars and battles among you come from” -JAS 4 1 j240 figs-metaphor πόθεν πόλεμοι καὶ πόθεν μάχαι ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Whence are wars and whence are battles among you James is using the terms **wars** and **battles** figuratively. Alternate translation: “Where do the conflicts and disputes that you are having come from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 4 1 j240 figs-metaphor πόθεν πόλεμοι καὶ πόθεν μάχαι ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Whence are wars and whence are battles among you James is using the terms **wars** and **battles**. Alternate translation: “Where do the conflicts and disputes that you are having come from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 1 pqx2 figs-rquestion πόθεν πόλεμοι καὶ πόθεν μάχαι ἐν ὑμῖν? 1 Whence are wars and whence are battles among you? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you where the conflicts and disputes that you are having come from.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 4 1 ub82 figs-doublet πόθεν πόλεμοι καὶ πόθεν μάχαι ἐν ὑμῖν? 1 Whence are wars and whence are battles among you? The words **wars** and **battles** mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by translating them with a single expression. Alternate translation (as a statement): “I will tell you where the continual conflicts that you are having come from.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JAS 4 1 j241 figs-rquestion οὐκ ἐντεῦθεν ἐκ τῶν ἡδονῶν ὑμῶν, τῶν στρατευομένων ἐν τοῖς μέλεσιν ὑμῶν? 1 Are they not hence, from your lusts, which fight in your members? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “This is where they come from: from your lusts, which fight in your members.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 4 1 j242 οὐκ ἐντεῦθεν 1 Are they not hence The word translated **hence** means “from here.” Your language may have a similar word that you can use in your translation. Otherwise, you could express the same meaning in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do they not come from here” -JAS 4 1 v5kg figs-metaphor τῶν ἡδονῶν ὑμῶν, τῶν στρατευομένων ἐν τοῖς μέλεσιν ὑμῶν 1 your lusts, which fight in your members As in [3:6](../03/06.md), **members** means “parts of the body.” This could mean: (1) the phrase **in your members** indicates the location of the **lusts** that James is describing. He could be saying that the outward fights between members of the community have their origin in inward lusts that lead people to fight for what they want, as he describes in the next verse. If so, he is using the parts of the body figuratively to represent a person’s thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “the lusts inside of you that fight” (2) the word translated **in** means “among.” The sense would then be that these **lusts** fight against one part of the person after another, seeking to gain control of the whole person. Since the **lusts** would actually be gaining control over non-physical aspects of a person, such as his will and values, James would once again be using the physical parts of the body figuratively to express his meaning. Alternate translation: “your lusts, which fight to control you” (3) James is speaking figuratively of the community of believers as if it were a body and of individual believers as if they were parts of that body. Alternate translation: “your lusts, which fight against other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 4 1 vpe2 figs-personification τῶν ἡδονῶν ὑμῶν, τῶν στρατευομένων ἐν τοῖς μέλεσιν ὑμῶν 1 your lusts, which fight in your members In all of the cases that the previous note discusses, James would be speaking figuratively of **lusts** as if they were living things that could **fight.** Alternate translation: “the lusts inside of you that cause you to fight to get what you want” of “your lusts, which cause you to value and choose certain things in order to gratify them” or “your lusts, which cause you to fight against other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 4 1 v5kg figs-metaphor τῶν ἡδονῶν ὑμῶν, τῶν στρατευομένων ἐν τοῖς μέλεσιν ὑμῶν 1 your lusts, which fight in your members As in [3:6](../03/06.md), **members** means “parts of the body.” This could mean: (1) the phrase **in your members** indicates the location of the **lusts** that James is describing. He could be saying that the outward fights between members of the community have their origin in inward lusts that lead people to fight for what they want, as he describes in the next verse. If so, he is using the parts of the body to represent a person’s thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “the lusts inside of you that fight” (2) the word translated **in** means “among.” The sense would then be that these **lusts** fight against one part of the person after another, seeking to gain control of the whole person. Since the **lusts** would actually be gaining control over non-physical aspects of a person, such as his will and values, James would once again be using the physical parts of the body to express his meaning. Alternate translation: “your lusts, which fight to control you” (3) James is speaking of the community of believers as if it were a body and of individual believers as if they were parts of that body. Alternate translation: “your lusts, which fight against other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 4 1 vpe2 figs-personification τῶν ἡδονῶν ὑμῶν, τῶν στρατευομένων ἐν τοῖς μέλεσιν ὑμῶν 1 your lusts, which fight in your members In all of the cases that the previous note discusses, James would be speaking of **lusts** as if they were living things that could **fight.** Alternate translation: “the lusts inside of you that cause you to fight to get what you want” of “your lusts, which cause you to value and choose certain things in order to gratify them” or “your lusts, which cause you to fight against other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 4 2 j243 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἐπιθυμεῖτε καὶ οὐκ ἔχετε; φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε, καὶ οὐ δύνασθε ἐπιτυχεῖν 1 You covet, and you do not have. You kill and envy, and you are not able to obtain In both of these sentences, James is using the word translated **and** to introduce a contrast between the first and second clauses. Alternate translation: “You covet, but you do not have. You kill and envy, but you are not able to obtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) JAS 4 2 j244 ἐπιθυμεῖτε καὶ οὐκ ἔχετε; φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε, καὶ οὐ δύνασθε ἐπιτυχεῖν 1 You covet, and you do not have. You kill and envy, and you are not able to obtain Your language may require you to specify the objects of **have** and **obtain**. Alternate translation: “You covet, but you do not have what you covet. You kill and envy, but you are not able to obtain the things that you envy” JAS 4 2 j245 figs-parallelism ἐπιθυμεῖτε καὶ οὐκ ἔχετε; φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε, καὶ οὐ δύνασθε ἐπιτυχεῖν 1 You covet, and you do not have. You kill and envy, and you are not able to obtain These two sentences mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “You desperately want things that other people have, but you could not get them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) JAS 4 2 khh9 figs-metaphor φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε 1 You kill and envy James probably does not mean the word **kill** literally. Rather, this could mean: (1) James is using the word in a figurative and spiritual sense to mean “hate.” This usage would reflect the teaching of Jesus and the apostles. Jesus said that the meaning of the commandment “do not kill” also applied to being angry with others and insulting them ([Matthew 5:21-22](../mat/05/21.md)). The apostle John wrote that “everyone who hates his brother is a murderer” ([1 John 3:15](../1jn/03/15.md)). Alternate translation: “You hate and envy” (2) James is describing someone wanting something so badly that he would almost kill to get it. Alternate translation: “You envy almost to the point of murder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 2 j246 figs-hendiadys φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε 1 You kill and envy James is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **kill** describes how his readers **envy** what others have. Alternate translation: “you envy hatefully” of “you envy murderously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -JAS 4 2 j247 figs-metaphor μάχεσθε καὶ πολεμεῖτε 1 You battle and war As in [4:1](../04/01.md), James is using the terms **battle** and **war** figuratively. Alternate translation: “You engage in disputes and conflicts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 4 2 j247 figs-metaphor μάχεσθε καὶ πολεμεῖτε 1 You battle and war As in [4:1](../04/01.md), James is using the terms **battle** and **war**. Alternate translation: “You engage in disputes and conflicts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 2 v9m8 figs-doublet μάχεσθε καὶ πολεμεῖτε 1 You battle and war The words **battle** and **war** mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by translating them with a single expression. Alternate translation: “You have continual conflicts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JAS 4 2 j248 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔχετε, διὰ τὸ μὴ αἰτεῖσθαι ὑμᾶς 1 You do not have because you do not ask If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express more fully what this means. Alternate translation: “You do not get what you want because you do not ask God for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 4 3 j249 grammar-connect-logic-contrast αἰτεῖτε καὶ οὐ λαμβάνετε 1 You ask and you do not receive James is using the word translated **and** to introduce a contrast between these two clauses. Alternate translation: “You ask but you do not receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) JAS 4 3 nk57 κακῶς αἰτεῖσθε 1 you ask badly James does not mean that his readers are asking for things in the wrong way. He means that they are asking for the wrong reason. Alternate translation: “you are asking for the wrong reason” -JAS 4 3 j250 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἐν ταῖς ἡδοναῖς ὑμῶν δαπανήσητε 1 so that you may spend on your lusts James says figuratively that his readers would **spend** what they acquired on their lusts. Alternate translation: “so that you could gratify your sinful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 4 3 j250 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἐν ταῖς ἡδοναῖς ὑμῶν δαπανήσητε 1 so that you may spend on your lusts James says that his readers would **spend** what they acquired on their lusts. Alternate translation: “so that you could gratify your sinful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 4 j251 μοιχαλίδες 1 Adulteresses James is addressing his readers in the vocative. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You adulteresses” -JAS 4 4 efi8 figs-metaphor μοιχαλίδες 1 Adulteresses James is figuratively describing his readers as married women who have sexual relations with men who are not their husbands. This metaphor is used many places in the Bible to represent unfaithfulness to God. Alternate translation: “You are not being faithful to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 4 4 efi8 figs-metaphor μοιχαλίδες 1 Adulteresses James is describing his readers as married women who have sexual relations with men who are not their husbands. This metaphor is used many places in the Bible to represent unfaithfulness to God. Alternate translation: “You are not being faithful to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 4 wu5v figs-rquestion οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἡ φιλία τοῦ κόσμου, ἔχθρα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν? 1 Do you not know that friendship with the world is enmity with God? James is using the question form for emphasis and as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Certainly you know that friendship with the world is enmity with God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 4 4 j252 figs-abstractnouns ἡ φιλία τοῦ κόσμου, ἔχθρα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 friendship with the world is enmity with God If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **friendship** and **enmity** by stating the ideas behind them with the concrete nouns “friend” and “enemy.” Alternate translation: “if you are a friend of the world, you are an enemy of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JAS 4 4 b5ly figs-metonymy ἡ φιλία τοῦ κόσμου 1 friendship with the world As in [1:27](../01/27.md), James is using the term **world** figuratively to mean the system of values shared by people who do not honor God. Alternate translation: “friendship with an ungodly value system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JAS 4 4 br36 figs-personification ἡ φιλία τοῦ κόσμου 1 friendship with the world James is speaking figuratively of this ungodly value system as if it were a person with whom someone could be friends. Alternate translation: “living by an ungodly value system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -JAS 4 4 jf1g figs-metaphor ἔχθρα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 is enmity with God James probably does not consider that his readers have literally become sworn enemies of God. He is using the term **enmity** figuratively to describe how opposed the worldly value system is to the way God wants people to live. Alternate translation: “is contrary to what God wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 4 4 b5ly figs-metonymy ἡ φιλία τοῦ κόσμου 1 friendship with the world As in [1:27](../01/27.md), James is using the term **world** to mean the system of values shared by people who do not honor God. Alternate translation: “friendship with an ungodly value system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 4 4 br36 figs-personification ἡ φιλία τοῦ κόσμου 1 friendship with the world James is speaking of this ungodly value system as if it were a person with whom someone could be friends. Alternate translation: “living by an ungodly value system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 4 4 jf1g figs-metaphor ἔχθρα τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 is enmity with God James probably does not consider that his readers have literally become sworn enemies of God. He is using the term **enmity** to describe how opposed the worldly value system is to the way God wants people to live. Alternate translation: “is contrary to what God wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 4 j253 figs-metonymy φίλος εἶναι τοῦ κόσμου 1 to be a friend of the world See how you translated the term **world** earlier in this verse. Alternate translation: “to be a friend of an ungodly value system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JAS 4 4 j254 figs-personification φίλος εἶναι τοῦ κόσμου 1 to be a friend of the world James speaks figuratively again of the ungodly value system as if it were a person with whom someone could be friends. Alternate translation: “to live by an ungodly value system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 4 4 j254 figs-personification φίλος εἶναι τοῦ κόσμου 1 to be a friend of the world James speaks again of the ungodly value system as if it were a person with whom someone could be friends. Alternate translation: “to live by an ungodly value system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 4 4 j255 figs-activepassive καθίσταται 1 is made If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “makes himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 4 4 j256 figs-metaphor ἐχθρὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 an enemy of God See how you translated the similar expression earlier in this verse. Alternate translation: “someone who lives in a way contrary to what God wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 5 i2y4 figs-rquestion ἢ δοκεῖτε ὅτι κενῶς ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει 1 Or do you think that the Scripture says vainly James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. (In this context, the term **vainly** means “for no good reason,” not “in a conceited way.”) Alternate translation: “There is a good reason why the Scripture says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 4 5 j257 ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει 1 the Scripture says James is describing the general teaching of the Bible, not referring to a specific passage. In cases like this, your language might use the plural instead of the singular. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures say” -JAS 4 5 j258 figs-personification ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει 1 the Scripture says James is speaking figuratively of the Bible as if it could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “it is written in the Scriptures” or “we can read in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 4 5 j258 figs-personification ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει 1 the Scripture says James is speaking of the Bible as if it could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “it is written in the Scriptures” or “we can read in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 4 5 bx68 πρὸς φθόνον ἐπιποθεῖ τὸ Πνεῦμα ὃ κατῴκισεν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 The Spirit whom he caused to live in us longs with jealousy Here, **Spirit** could mean: (1) the Holy Spirit, who could be the subject of the verb **longs**. The idea of the Spirit being jealous would fit with the adultery metaphor in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The Spirit whom God has caused to live in us longs for us to live faithfully to God” (2) the Holy Spirit, who could be the object of the verb **longs**, in which case God would be the subject of that verb. This interpretation would also fit with the adultery metaphor. Alternate translation: “God longs jealously for us to live by the Spirit whom he has caused to live in us” (3) the human spirit, in which case the statement would be repeating what James said in [4:2](../04/02.md) about people coveting and envying. Alternate translation: “The spirit that God has caused to live in us longs jealously for things that it does not have” JAS 4 5 j259 writing-pronouns ὃ κατῴκισεν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 whom he caused to live in us Whatever the interpretation of the entire sentence, the pronoun **he** in this clause refers to God. Alternate translation: “whom God caused to live in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JAS 4 6 ub8z figs-explicit μείζονα δὲ δίδωσιν χάριν 1 But he gives greater grace In light of what he says in the previous two verses, James is drawing a contrast between what God might be expected to do and what God actually does. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the contrast more explicitly. Alternate translation: “But even though God is jealous if we are friends with the world, he does not reject us. Instead, he gives us even more grace to be friends with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 4 6 j260 writing-pronouns μείζονα δὲ δίδωσιν χάριν 1 But he gives greater grace The pronoun **he** refers to God. Alternate translation: “But God gives greater grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JAS 4 6 j261 μείζονα…χάριν 1 greater grace The comparative **greater** refers to quantity rather than to size. Alternate translation: “even more grace” JAS 4 6 hyh2 writing-pronouns διὸ λέγει 1 Therefore it says The pronoun **it** refers to the Scripture, the antecedent from the previous verse. Even though James is now quoting a specific passage, [Proverbs 3:34](../pro/03/34.md), rather than a general teaching, the reference is to the Bible as a whole. Alternate translation: “Therefore the Scripture says” or “Therefore the Scriptures say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JAS 4 6 j262 figs-personification λέγει 1 it says James is speaking figuratively of the Bible as if it could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “it is written in the Scriptures” or “we can read in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 4 6 j262 figs-personification λέγει 1 it says James is speaking of the Bible as if it could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “it is written in the Scriptures” or “we can read in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 4 6 qs61 figs-nominaladj ὑπερηφάνοις…ταπεινοῖς 1 the proud … the humble James is using the adjectives **proud** and **humble** as nouns to refer to types of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “proud people … humble people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 4 7 g7e5 figs-activepassive ὑποτάγητε οὖν 1 Be submitted, therefore If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Submit, therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 4 7 da5t grammar-connect-logic-result ὑποτάγητε οὖν 1 Be submitted, therefore James is giving the reason for the result he described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Because God gives grace to the humble, be submitted” or “Because God gives grace to the humble, submit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 4 7 j263 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀντίστητε δὲ τῷ διαβόλῳ, καὶ φεύξεται ἀφ’ ὑμῶν 1 But resist the devil, and he will flee from you James is using the word translated **and** to describe a result. Alternate translation: “But resist the devil. If you do, then he will flee from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 4 7 nud3 ἀντίστητε…τῷ διαβόλῳ 1 resist the devil Alternate translation: “resolve not to do what the devil wants” -JAS 4 7 w9ue figs-metaphor φεύξεται ἀφ’ ὑμῶν 1 he will flee from you James is speaking figuratively of the devil as if he would run away from a believer who resisted him after humbling himself before God. Alternate translation: “he will stop trying to get you to do what he wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 4 7 w9ue figs-metaphor φεύξεται ἀφ’ ὑμῶν 1 he will flee from you James is speaking of the devil as if he would run away from a believer who resisted him after humbling himself before God. Alternate translation: “he will stop trying to get you to do what he wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 8 j264 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐγγίσατε τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ ἐγγιεῖ ὑμῖν 1 Come near to God and he will come near to you James is using the word translated **and** to describe a result. Alternate translation: “If you come near to God, then he will come near to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 4 8 g62m figs-metaphor ἐγγίσατε τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ ἐγγιεῖ ὑμῖν 1 Come near to God and he will come near to you James is using a spatial metaphor to describe two people in a good relationship as if they were **near** to one another. Alternate translation: “Do your part to have a good relationship with God, and you will find that God also wants to have a good relationship with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 8 j265 figs-metaphor καθαρίσατε χεῖρας 1 Cleanse your hands James is using the image of washing hands to describe a person removing sin from his life. Alternate translation: “Stop sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 4 8 elh1 figs-metonymy καθαρίσατε χεῖρας 1 Cleanse your hands James is using the word **hands** figuratively to mean actions, by association with the way people use their hands to do things. Alternate translation: “Stop doing things that are wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 4 8 elh1 figs-metonymy καθαρίσατε χεῖρας 1 Cleanse your hands James is using the word **hands** to mean actions, by association with the way people use their hands to do things. Alternate translation: “Stop doing things that are wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 4 8 j266 ἁμαρτωλοί 1 sinners James is addressing his readers in the vocative. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you sinners” -JAS 4 8 j267 figs-metaphor ἁγνίσατε καρδίας 1 purify your hearts James says **hearts** figuratively to mean people’s thoughts and desires. Alternate translation: “purify your thoughts and desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 4 8 mw54 figs-metaphor ἁγνίσατε καρδίας 1 purify your hearts The term **purify** refers to a ceremonial cleansing that allows a person to participate in religious activities. James is speaking figuratively as if his readers’ **hearts** could be cleansed in this way. Alternate translation: “make sure you are not thinking or desiring anything wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 4 8 j267 figs-metaphor ἁγνίσατε καρδίας 1 purify your hearts James says **hearts** to mean people’s thoughts and desires. Alternate translation: “purify your thoughts and desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 4 8 mw54 figs-metaphor ἁγνίσατε καρδίας 1 purify your hearts The term **purify** refers to a ceremonial cleansing that allows a person to participate in religious activities. James is speaking as if his readers’ **hearts** could be cleansed in this way. Alternate translation: “make sure you are not thinking or desiring anything wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 8 j268 figs-nominaladj δίψυχοι 1 double-minded James is using the adjective **double-minded** as a noun to refer to a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “double-minded people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 4 8 j269 δίψυχοι 1 double-minded James is addressing his readers in the vocative. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you double-minded people” -JAS 4 8 iw61 figs-metaphor δίψυχοι 1 double-minded See how you translated the same expression in [1:8](../01/08.md). James is speaking figuratively of his readers as if they had two minds, with one mind deciding to do one thing and the other mind deciding to do something else. Alternate translation: “you people who cannot decide whether to obey God or not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 4 8 iw61 figs-metaphor δίψυχοι 1 double-minded See how you translated the same expression in [1:8](../01/08.md). James is speaking of his readers as if they had two minds, with one mind deciding to do one thing and the other mind deciding to do something else. Alternate translation: “you people who cannot decide whether to obey God or not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 9 kdn8 figs-doublet ταλαιπωρήσατε, καὶ πενθήσατε, καὶ κλαύσατε 1 Be miserable and mourn and weep These three verbs have similar meanings. James is using them together to emphasize how sorry his readers should be. Alternate translation: “Be extremely sorry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JAS 4 9 j270 figs-explicit ταλαιπωρήσατε, καὶ πενθήσατε, καὶ κλαύσατε 1 Be miserable and mourn and weep If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what James is telling his readers to be sorry for. Alternate translation: “Be extremely sorry for not obeying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 4 9 j271 figs-ellipsis ὁ γέλως ὑμῶν εἰς πένθος μετατραπήτω, καὶ ἡ χαρὰ εἰς κατήφειαν 1 Let your laughter be changed into mourning, and your joy into gloom In the second part of this sentence, James leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the first part of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Let your laughter be changed into mourning, and let your joy be changed into gloom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ JAS 4 9 j274 figs-explicit ὁ γέλως ὑμῶν εἰς πένθος μετ JAS 4 10 j275 grammar-connect-logic-result ταπεινώθητε ἐνώπιον Κυρίου, καὶ ὑψώσει ὑμᾶς 1 Be humbled before the Lord, and he will lift you up James is using the word translated **and** to describe a result. Alternate translation: “If you are humbled before the Lord, then he will lift you up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 4 10 j276 figs-activepassive ταπεινώθητε 1 Be humbled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Humble yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 4 10 an8i figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον Κυρίου 1 before the Lord The word **before** means “in front of” or “in the presence of” another person. While in one sense God is present everywhere, the believers to whom James is writing are not in the direct physical presence of God, so he likely means this expression in a figurative sense. He is referring to the attitude they should have towards God. Alternate translation: “in your attitude towards God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 4 10 tn5w figs-metaphor ὑψώσει ὑμᾶς 1 he will lift you up James is speaking figuratively as if his readers would humbly kneel down or bow down in front of God to show their repentance and as if God would have them stand up to show that he accepted them. Alternate translation: “he will show that he accepts you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 4 10 tn5w figs-metaphor ὑψώσει ὑμᾶς 1 he will lift you up James is speaking as if his readers would humbly kneel down or bow down in front of God to show their repentance and as if God would have them stand up to show that he accepted them. Alternate translation: “he will show that he accepts you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 11 r3hc μὴ καταλαλεῖτε ἀλλήλων 1 Do not speak against one another Alternate translation: “Do not say bad things about one another” JAS 4 11 uyi9 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί…ἀδελφοῦ…τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 brothers … a brother … his brother See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers … a fellow believer … his fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 11 j277 figs-explicit καταλαλεῖ νόμου καὶ κρίνει νόμον 1 speaks against the law and judges the law By **the law**, James means the same thing that he calls the “royal law” in [2:8](../02/08.md) and the “law of freedom” in [1:25](../01/25.md) and [2:12](../02/12.md). That is, he means the commandment “you will love your neighbor as yourself.” James is teaching his readers that by saying or assuming that their fellow believers were doing wrong things, they were not following this commandment and they were treating the commandment as if it were not important to follow. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the term “neighbor” in [2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “contradicts the law that says to love other people as oneself and judges that law to be unimportant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ JAS 4 13 j287 figs-idiom τήνδε τὴν πόλιν 1 this city This is an id JAS 4 13 iz9h figs-idiom ποιήσομεν ἐκεῖ ἐνιαυτὸν 1 do a year there This is another idiom. Alternate translation: “stay there for a year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 4 13 j288 κερδήσομεν 1 gain Alternate translation: “make a profit” JAS 4 14 b7ir figs-rquestion οἵτινες οὐκ ἐπίστασθε τὸ τῆς αὔριον, ποία ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν? 1 You who do not know the thing of tomorrow, what is your life? James is using the question form to challenge and teach his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You do not know what will happen tomorrow, and you may not even be alive then!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JAS 4 14 a9v2 figs-metaphor ἀτμὶς γάρ ἐστε, ἡ πρὸς ὀλίγον φαινομένη, ἔπειτα καὶ ἀφανιζομένη 1 For you are a mist that appears for a little and then disappears James is speaking figuratively of his readers as if they were a **mist** that forms briefly in the morning but then quickly dissipates when the sun rises. In your translation you could explain the meaning of this image, or you could represent it as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “For you will only be alive for a short time, and then you will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 4 14 a9v2 figs-metaphor ἀτμὶς γάρ ἐστε, ἡ πρὸς ὀλίγον φαινομένη, ἔπειτα καὶ ἀφανιζομένη 1 For you are a mist that appears for a little and then disappears James is speaking of his readers as if they were a **mist** that forms briefly in the morning but then quickly dissipates when the sun rises. In your translation you could explain the meaning of this image, or you could represent it as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “For you will only be alive for a short time, and then you will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 15 e1il καὶ ζήσομεν καὶ ποιήσομεν 1 we will both live and do James is using a construction that puts the word “and” before two things that would both be the case, more literally “and we will live and we will do.” Your language may have a similar construction that you could use here. If not, it may not be necessary for you to translate the first occurrence of “and,” which ULT represents as **both**. (The term **both** in ULT does not mean “the two of us.”) Alternate translation: “we will live and we will do” JAS 4 15 j289 figs-exclusive καὶ ζήσομεν καὶ ποιήσομεν 1 we will both live and do These people would be speaking only of themselves, so the pronoun **we** is exclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) JAS 4 15 j290 figs-idiom τοῦτο ἢ ἐκεῖνο 1 this or that This is an idiom. No specific actions are intended. Your language may have a comparable idiom that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “such-and-such” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -539,34 +539,34 @@ JAS 5 1 j295 ἐπὶ ταῖς ταλαιπωρίαις ὑμῶν ταῖς JAS 5 1 l3wd figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ ταῖς ταλαιπωρίαις ὑμῶν ταῖς ἐπερχομέναις 1 because of your coming miseries If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **miseries** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “because many bad things are going to happen to you soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 5 2 j296 translate-versebridge 0 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [5:2](../05/02.md) and [5:3](../05/03.md) into a verse bridge. You could put the last sentence of [5:3](../05/03.md) first, followed by all of [5:2](../05/02.md) and then the rest of [5:3](../05/03.md). This would allow you to address several translation issues that are discussed in the notes to this verse and the next verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) JAS 5 2 gq45 figs-pastforfuture ὁ πλοῦτος ὑμῶν σέσηπεν, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτια ὑμῶν σητόβρωτα γέγονεν 1 Your wealth has rotted and your clothes have become moth-eaten James is using the past tense to refer to things that will happen in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Your wealth is going to rot and your clothes are going to be eaten by moths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) -JAS 5 2 v241 figs-synecdoche ὁ πλοῦτος ὑμῶν σέσηπεν, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτια ὑμῶν σητόβρωτα γέγονεν 1 Your wealth has rotted and your clothes have become moth-eaten In these two clauses and in the first clause in the next verse (“your gold and silver have been tarnished”), James is figuratively using certain things that these rich people own to mean everything that they own. If you create a verse bridge, you could combine all of these clauses into a single sentence that expresses this meaning. (You would need to begin a new sentence right afterwards.) Alternate translation: “Everything of value that you own is going to be ruined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -JAS 5 2 j297 figs-explicit ὁ πλοῦτος ὑμῶν σέσηπεν, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτια ὑμῶν σητόβρωτα γέγονεν 1 Your wealth has rotted and your clothes have become moth-eaten Depending on the meaning of the statement “you have stored up in the last days” in the next verse (see the note to that statement), James may be saying figuratively that the wealth and expensive clothing of the rich have become worthless. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JAS 5 2 v241 figs-synecdoche ὁ πλοῦτος ὑμῶν σέσηπεν, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτια ὑμῶν σητόβρωτα γέγονεν 1 Your wealth has rotted and your clothes have become moth-eaten In these two clauses and in the first clause in the next verse (“your gold and silver have been tarnished”), James is using certain things that these rich people own to mean everything that they own. If you create a verse bridge, you could combine all of these clauses into a single sentence that expresses this meaning. (You would need to begin a new sentence right afterwards.) Alternate translation: “Everything of value that you own is going to be ruined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +JAS 5 2 j297 figs-explicit ὁ πλοῦτος ὑμῶν σέσηπεν, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτια ὑμῶν σητόβρωτα γέγονεν 1 Your wealth has rotted and your clothes have become moth-eaten Depending on the meaning of the statement “you have stored up in the last days” in the next verse (see the note to that statement), James may be saying that the wealth and expensive clothing of the rich have become worthless. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 2 j298 figs-simile ὁ πλοῦτος ὑμῶν σέσηπεν, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτια ὑμῶν σητόβρωτα γέγονεν 1 Your wealth has rotted and your clothes have become moth-eaten If you decide to indicate explicitly that James is saying that the wealth and expensive clothing of the rich have become worthless, you could do that by expressing his past-for-future statement as a simile, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) JAS 5 3 am1u figs-pastforfuture ὁ χρυσὸς ὑμῶν καὶ ὁ ἄργυρος κατίωται 1 Your gold and silver have been tarnished James is using the past tense to refer to something that will happen in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Your gold and silver are going to be tarnished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JAS 5 3 wj9v figs-activepassive ὁ χρυσὸς ὑμῶν καὶ ὁ ἄργυρος κατίωται 1 Your gold and silver have been tarnished If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Your gold and silver have tarnished” or “Your gold and silver are going to tarnish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JAS 5 3 j299 figs-explicit ὁ χρυσὸς ὑμῶν καὶ ὁ ἄργυρος κατίωται 1 Your gold and silver have been tarnished Depending on the meaning of the statement “you have stored up in the last days” (see the first note to that statement below), James may be saying figuratively that the gold and silver of the rich have become worthless. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JAS 5 3 j299 figs-explicit ὁ χρυσὸς ὑμῶν καὶ ὁ ἄργυρος κατίωται 1 Your gold and silver have been tarnished Depending on the meaning of the statement “you have stored up in the last days” (see the first note to that statement below), James may be saying that the gold and silver of the rich have become worthless. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 3 q4pm figs-simile ὁ χρυσὸς ὑμῶν καὶ ὁ ἄργυρος κατίωται 1 Your gold and silver have been tarnished If you decide to indicate explicitly that James is saying that the gold and silver of the rich have become worthless, you could do that by expressing his past-for-future statement as a simile, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) JAS 5 3 j300 καὶ ὁ ἰὸς αὐτῶν εἰς μαρτύριον ὑμῖν ἔσται 1 and their rust will be for a testimony against you If you created a verse bridge and you also combined the statement “your gold and silver have been tarnished” with the two clauses in [5:2](../05/02.md), it would be helpful to begin a new sentence here and to use a general expression that would apply to everything that these rich people own. Alternate translation: “The ruins of your possessions will be for a testimony against you” or “The ruins of your possessions will testify against you” -JAS 5 3 e55t figs-metaphor ὁ ἰὸς αὐτῶν εἰς μαρτύριον ὑμῖν ἔσται 1 their rust will be for a testimony against you James is speaking figuratively of this **rust** as if it would be presented as evidence in a case against the rich people. Alternate translation: “the rust on your gold and silver will show that you did the wrong thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 3 e55t figs-metaphor ὁ ἰὸς αὐτῶν εἰς μαρτύριον ὑμῖν ἔσται 1 their rust will be for a testimony against you James is speaking of this **rust** as if it would be presented as evidence in a case against the rich people. Alternate translation: “the rust on your gold and silver will show that you did the wrong thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 3 j301 figs-explicit ὁ ἰὸς αὐτῶν εἰς μαρτύριον ὑμῖν ἔσται 1 their rust will be for a testimony against you If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what wrong thing these rich people have done, as evidenced by this **rust**. Alternate translation: “the rust of your gold and silver will show that you have done the wrong thing by devoting yourselves to accumulating wealth rather than to helping other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 3 w3aj figs-metonymy φάγεται τὰς σάρκας ὑμῶν ὡς πῦρ 1 it will eat your flesh James is using the word **flesh** to mean the human body, by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “it will eat your bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JAS 5 3 j6fe figs-metaphor φάγεται τὰς σάρκας ὑμῶν ὡς πῦρ 1 it will eat your flesh James is saying figuratively that this rust will corrode and consume the owners of the gold and silver that it is also corroding. Alternate translation: “it will consume you” or “it will ruin you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 3 j6fe figs-metaphor φάγεται τὰς σάρκας ὑμῶν ὡς πῦρ 1 it will eat your flesh James is saying that this rust will corrode and consume the owners of the gold and silver that it is also corroding. Alternate translation: “it will consume you” or “it will ruin you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 3 i37x figs-simile ὡς πῦρ 1 like fire It may be helpful to express the meaning of this simile more fully. Alternate translation: “just as fire consumes everything that it burns” or “just as fire ruins everything that it burns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) JAS 5 3 j302 figs-explicit ἐθησαυρίσατε ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 You have stored up in the last days If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what these rich people have **stored up** and why it was wrong for them to do that. This could mean: (1) they have accumulated riches in the **last days**, that is, in the time just before Jesus returns. That would be wrong because once Jesus returns, earthly riches will no longer have any value. Instead of trying to get more and more wealth, these people should have been helping others with what they had. Alternate translation: “Instead of helping others, you have wrongly stored up wealth at a time when earthly riches are about to lose all of their value” (2) by their wrongdoing, such as he describes in [5:4-6](../05/04.md), these rich people have **stored up** punishment for themselves. Alternate translation: “God is just about to punish wrongdoers, and you have given God many reasons to punish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 3 j303 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐθησαυρίσατε ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 You have stored up in the last days If the first interpretation of this statement in the note just above is correct, then James is giving the reason for the results that he describes in the previous verse and in the earlier part of this verse. If you created a verse bridge as described in the first note to [5:2](../05/02.md), you could put this reason before the result by placing this statement first in that bridge. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 5 3 np1u figs-idiom ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 the last days This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the time just before Jesus returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 5 4 j304 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ὁ μισθὸς τῶν ἐργατῶν 1 Behold, the pay of the workers The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. It may be helpful to express its meaning as a separate sentence here. Alternate translation: “Consider this! The pay of the workers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 4 j305 figs-activepassive ὁ μισθὸς τῶν ἐργατῶν, τῶν ἀμησάντων τὰς χώρας ὑμῶν, ὁ ἀφυστερημένος ἀφ’ ὑμῶν, κράζει 1 the pay of the workers who have reaped your fields, which has been withheld from you, is crying out If your language does not use this passive form, you can express it with an active form. When James says **from you**, he does not mean that this payment has been withheld from the rich owners of these fields. He is saying that it was due from them, but they have not paid it to their workers. Alternate translation: “the pay that you have withheld from the workers who reaped your fields is crying out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JAS 5 4 e9iy figs-personification κράζει 1 is crying out James is speaking figuratively of this **pay** as if it were a living thing that could cry out. Alternate translation: “is obvious evidence that you have done wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -JAS 5 4 n21a figs-metonymy αἱ βοαὶ τῶν θερισάντων, εἰς τὰ ὦτα Κυρίου Σαβαὼθ εἰσελήλυθαν 1 the cries of the harvesting ones have entered into the ears of the Lord of Sabaoth James is speaking figuratively of the **ears** of the Lord to mean his hearing. Alternate translation: “the Lord of Sabaoth has heard the cries of the harvesting ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 5 4 e9iy figs-personification κράζει 1 is crying out James is speaking of this **pay** as if it were a living thing that could cry out. Alternate translation: “is obvious evidence that you have done wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 5 4 n21a figs-metonymy αἱ βοαὶ τῶν θερισάντων, εἰς τὰ ὦτα Κυρίου Σαβαὼθ εἰσελήλυθαν 1 the cries of the harvesting ones have entered into the ears of the Lord of Sabaoth James is speaking of the **ears** of the Lord to mean his hearing. Alternate translation: “the Lord of Sabaoth has heard the cries of the harvesting ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 5 4 j306 figs-explicit Κυρίου Σαβαὼθ 1 the Lord of Sabaoth James assumes that his readers will know that he is speaking of God by a name by which he is often known in the Old Testament. The Hebrew term **Sabaoth** means “military forces.” Alternate translation: “God, the Lord of the Heavenly Armies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JAS 5 4 j307 figs-metonymy Κυρίου Σαβαὼθ 1 the Lord of Sabaoth James may be speaking figuratively of God’s almighty power by association with the way that God has all the armies of heaven at his command. Alternate translation: “God, the Lord Almighty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 5 4 j307 figs-metonymy Κυρίου Σαβαὼθ 1 the Lord of Sabaoth James may be speaking of God’s almighty power by association with the way that God has all the armies of heaven at his command. Alternate translation: “God, the Lord Almighty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 5 5 j308 figs-parallelism ἐτρυφήσατε ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς. καὶ ἐσπαταλήσατε 1 You have lived luxuriously on the earth and have lived self-indulgently These two phrases mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “You have indulged yourselves with earthly luxuries” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -JAS 5 5 xt8h figs-metaphor ἐθρέψατε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σφαγῆς 1 You have fattened your hearts in a day of slaughter James is speaking figuratively of these rich people as if they were cattle that had been fed luxuriously on grain so they would become fattened for slaughter as banqueting food. In this case the banquet is not a positive image, as it often is elsewhere when it describes God’s future reign. Alternate translation: “Your self-indulgence has made you subject to harsh judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 5 5 pr31 figs-metaphor ἐθρέψατε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σφαγῆς 1 You have fattened your hearts James is speaking figuratively of the heart as the center of human desire. Alternate translation: “You have indulged your desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 5 5 j309 figs-idiom ἐν ἡμέρᾳ 1 in a day James is using the term **day** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “at a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JAS 5 5 j310 figs-metaphor ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σφαγῆς 1 in a day of slaughter James is using the idea of **slaughter** figuratively to refer to God’s judgment. Alternate translation: “at a time when God is about to judge everyone for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 5 6 u5c5 figs-synecdoche κατεδικάσατε, ἐφονεύσατε τὸν δίκαιον 1 You have condemned, you have killed the righteous James probably does not mean that these rich people have done these things personally. He is likely referring to the kind of actions he described in [2:6](../02/06.md), where he told how rich people “overpower” the poor by taking them to court. He may mean that the rich people have gotten the courts to condemn innocent people and in some cases even to execute them. He could also mean that the rich people have gotten the courts to decide lawsuits in their favor and that as a result, some poor people have died because of the great poverty this caused them. James would be speaking figuratively of the rich people as the ones who did these actions, using them to represent all the people who were involved. Alternate translation: “You have gotten the courts to condemn and even execute innocent people” or “You have gotten the courts to decide lawsuits in your favor and, as a result, innocent people have died from poverty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +JAS 5 5 xt8h figs-metaphor ἐθρέψατε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σφαγῆς 1 You have fattened your hearts in a day of slaughter James is speaking of these rich people as if they were cattle that had been fed luxuriously on grain so they would become fattened for slaughter as banqueting food. In this case the banquet is not a positive image, as it often is elsewhere when it describes God’s future reign. Alternate translation: “Your self-indulgence has made you subject to harsh judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 5 pr31 figs-metaphor ἐθρέψατε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σφαγῆς 1 You have fattened your hearts James is speaking of the heart as the center of human desire. Alternate translation: “You have indulged your desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 5 j309 figs-idiom ἐν ἡμέρᾳ 1 in a day James is using the term **day** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “at a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +JAS 5 5 j310 figs-metaphor ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σφαγῆς 1 in a day of slaughter James is using the idea of **slaughter** to refer to God’s judgment. Alternate translation: “at a time when God is about to judge everyone for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 6 u5c5 figs-synecdoche κατεδικάσατε, ἐφονεύσατε τὸν δίκαιον 1 You have condemned, you have killed the righteous James probably does not mean that these rich people have done these things personally. He is likely referring to the kind of actions he described in [2:6](../02/06.md), where he told how rich people “overpower” the poor by taking them to court. He may mean that the rich people have gotten the courts to condemn innocent people and in some cases even to execute them. He could also mean that the rich people have gotten the courts to decide lawsuits in their favor and that as a result, some poor people have died because of the great poverty this caused them. James would be speaking of the rich people as the ones who did these actions, using them to represent all the people who were involved. Alternate translation: “You have gotten the courts to condemn and even execute innocent people” or “You have gotten the courts to decide lawsuits in your favor and, as a result, innocent people have died from poverty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JAS 5 6 j311 figs-nominaladj τὸν δίκαιον 1 the righteous James is using the adjective **righteous** as a noun to refer to a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the righteous person” or “the innocent person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 5 6 lq6p figs-genericnoun τὸν δίκαιον 1 the righteous The expression **the righteous** refers to righteous people in general, not to one specific person. Alternate translation: “righteous people” or “innocent people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) JAS 5 6 z7w1 figs-explicit οὐκ ἀντιτάσσεται ὑμῖν 1 He does not resist you This could mean: (1) the innocent people are not able to resist what the rich people are doing. Alternate translation: “He is not able to resist you” (2) the innocent people wanted a peaceful resolution and were not fighting back. Alternate translation: “You have done this even though the innocent person wanted a peaceful resolution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -581,26 +581,26 @@ JAS 5 7 j316 writing-pronouns μακροθυμῶν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ ἕως JAS 5 7 j317 figs-nominaladj πρόϊμον καὶ ὄψιμον 1 the early and the late James is using the adjectives **early** and **late** as nouns to refer to types of rain. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “the rain that comes early in the growing season and the rain that comes late in the growing season” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 5 7 j318 figs-explicit πρόϊμον καὶ ὄψιμον 1 the early and the late If it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not be familiar with rainfed agriculture, you could state why these farmers needed to wait for rain to fall on their crops. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 8 j319 μακροθυμήσατε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 You also wait patiently Here James makes clear that what he said about farmers in the previous verse was an analogy for his readers. Alternate translation: “You should also wait patiently, just as a farmer does” -JAS 5 8 bbn1 figs-metaphor στηρίξατε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν 1 Strengthen your hearts James is using the **heart** figuratively to represent the will. Alternate translation: “Stay committed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 8 bbn1 figs-metaphor στηρίξατε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν 1 Strengthen your hearts James is using the **heart** to represent the will. Alternate translation: “Stay committed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 8 jw3b ἡ παρουσία τοῦ Κυρίου ἤγγικεν 1 the coming of the Lord has come near James is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. (By **near** he means near in time. This is not a spatial metaphor.) Alternate translation: “Jesus will return soon” or “the Lord Jesus will return soon” JAS 5 9 k74r figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 9 z3p7 figs-activepassive μὴ κριθῆτε 1 you may be not judged If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “God may not judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 5 9 ita4 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ὁ κριτὴς 1 Behold, the judge The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. Alternate translation: “Be aware that the judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 5 9 g938 figs-metaphor ὁ κριτὴς πρὸ τῶν θυρῶν ἕστηκεν 1 the judge is standing at the door James is figuratively comparing Jesus to a judge who is just about to walk into a courtroom. Alternate translation: “Jesus will soon return and judge everyone for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 9 g938 figs-metaphor ὁ κριτὴς πρὸ τῶν θυρῶν ἕστηκεν 1 the judge is standing at the door James is comparing Jesus to a judge who is just about to walk into a courtroom. Alternate translation: “Jesus will soon return and judge everyone for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 10 j320 ὑπόδειγμα λάβετε, ἀδελφοί, τῆς κακοπαθίας 1 Take an example, brothers, of the suffering Alternate translation: “Take as your example, brothers, the suffering” JAS 5 10 j321 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 10 sic1 figs-hendiadys τῆς κακοπαθίας καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας, τοὺς προφήτας 1 the suffering and the patience of the prophets James is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **patience** describes how the prophets endured **suffering**. Alternate translation: “of the patient suffering of the prophets” or “of how patiently the prophets suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -JAS 5 10 pvs3 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord James is figuratively using the **name** of the Lord to mean his person and authority. Alternate translation: “on behalf of the Lord” or “with the authority of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 5 10 pvs3 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord James is using the **name** of the Lord to mean his person and authority. Alternate translation: “on behalf of the Lord” or “with the authority of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 5 11 xwr8 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. Alternate translation: “Indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 11 s3nl figs-explicit τὴν ὑπομονὴν Ἰὼβ ἠκούσατε 1 You have heard of the endurance of Job James assumes that his readers will know the story of Job from the Scriptures. If your readers might not be familiar with his story, you could describe it in more detail. Alternate translation: “You know from the Scriptures how a man named Job who lived long ago patiently endured great suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JAS 5 11 j322 figs-metaphor τὸ τέλος Κυρίου εἴδετε 1 you have seen the end of the Lord James is continuing to refer to the story of Job. Here, **end** could mean: (1) purpose. In that case, James would be using the term **seen** figuratively to mean “recognized.” Alternate translation: “you have recognized the purpose that the Lord had for Job’s sufferings” (2) final result. In that case, James would be using the term **seen** figuratively to mean “learned.” Alternate translation: “you have learned from the Scriptures how the Lord helped Job in the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 11 j322 figs-metaphor τὸ τέλος Κυρίου εἴδετε 1 you have seen the end of the Lord James is continuing to refer to the story of Job. Here, **end** could mean: (1) purpose. In that case, James would be using the term **seen** to mean “recognized.” Alternate translation: “you have recognized the purpose that the Lord had for Job’s sufferings” (2) final result. In that case, James would be using the term **seen** to mean “learned.” Alternate translation: “you have learned from the Scriptures how the Lord helped Job in the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 11 j323 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι πολύσπλαγχνός ἐστιν ὁ Κύριος καὶ οἰκτίρμων 1 that the Lord is greatly compassionate and merciful Here, **that** could mean: (1) “for” and introduce a reason. James may be giving the reason why God was pursuing a good purpose even in Job’s sufferings or why God helped Job in the end. Alternate translation: “for the Lord is very compassionate and merciful” (2) something further that James’ readers would have learned from the story of Job. Alternate translation: “and you have realized from this story that the Lord is greatly compassionate and merciful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 5 12 fug7 figs-metaphor πρὸ πάντων 1 before all James is using a spatial metaphor to emphasize the importance of what he is about to say. Your language may use a different spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “above all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 12 bjt3 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου 1 my brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 12 s755 μὴ ὀμνύετε 1 do not swear Here, to **swear** means to guarantee, by appealing to something that is considered to be certain and reliable, that a statement is true or that an action will be performed. Alternate translation: “do not make an oath” or “do not make a vow” JAS 5 12 j324 figs-ellipsis ἤτω…ὑμῶν τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ 1 let your “Yes” be “Yes” and “No,” “No” In the second phrase, James is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the first phrase. Alternate translation: “let your ‘Yes’ be ‘Yes’ and let your ‘No’ be ‘No’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JAS 5 12 m3ve ἤτω…ὑμῶν τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ 1 let your “Yes” be “Yes” and “No,” “No” Alternate translation: “simply give your word, without making an oath” -JAS 5 12 f6mx figs-metaphor ἵνα μὴ ὑπὸ κρίσιν πέσητε 1 so that you may not fall under judgment James is speaking figuratively of **judgment** as something that a person might **fall under**. Alternate translation: “so that you will not be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 12 f6mx figs-metaphor ἵνα μὴ ὑπὸ κρίσιν πέσητε 1 so that you may not fall under judgment James is speaking of **judgment** as something that a person might **fall under**. Alternate translation: “so that you will not be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 12 j325 figs-explicit ἵνα μὴ ὑπὸ κρίσιν πέσητε 1 so that you may not fall under judgment If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state more explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “so that God will not have to judge and punish you for breaking your oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 13 m3e6 figs-rquestion κακοπαθεῖ τις ἐν ὑμῖν? προσευχέσθω 1 Is anyone among you suffering hardship? Let him pray James is not looking for information. He is using the question form to state a condition, and he describes the result in a short sentence right after the question. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating the question and that sentence together as a single statement. Alternate translation: “If anyone among you is suffering hardship, then he should pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 5 13 wdf7 figs-rquestion εὐθυμεῖ τις? ψαλλέτω 1 Is anyone cheerful? Let him sing praise James is again using the question form to state a condition and describing the result in a following sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating the question and that sentence together as a single statement. Alternate translation: “If anyone is cheerful, then he should sing praise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -608,33 +608,33 @@ JAS 5 14 in34 figs-rquestion ἀσθενεῖ τις ἐν ὑμῖν? προσ JAS 5 14 j326 προσευξάσθωσαν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν, ἀλείψαντες αὐτὸν ἐλαίῳ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου 1 let them pray over him, having anointed him with oil in the name of the Lord It is unclear whether James means that the prayer or the anointing is to be done in the name of the Lord. Alternate translation: “let them pray over him in the name of the Lord after they have anointed him with oil” or “let them anoint him with oil in the name of the Lord and then pray for him” JAS 5 14 j327 figs-metaphor προσευξάσθωσαν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν 1 pray over him James is using a spatial metaphor to indicate that the sick person is the beneficiary of the elders’ prayers. Alternate translation: “pray for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 14 j328 translate-unknown ἀλείψαντες αὐτὸν ἐλαίῳ 1 having anointed him with oil In the biblical culture, anointing people with **oil** was a way of consecrating them to God, but it was also a medical treatment. Since James is talking about a person who is **sick**, he seems to speak of the oil at least in part for its medical value. So he may be telling believers to do what they can practically to help the sick person recover, in addition to praying for him. If your readers would not recognize that the medical benefits were one reason why James says to anoint the sick person with oil, you could include an explanation in your translation or in a note, or you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “having done what they can to help him practically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -JAS 5 14 fik7 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord James is figuratively using the **name** of the Lord to mean his person and authority. Alternate translation: “on behalf of the Lord” or “with the authority of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 5 14 fik7 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord James is using the **name** of the Lord to mean his person and authority. Alternate translation: “on behalf of the Lord” or “with the authority of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 5 15 qiw4 figs-possession ἡ εὐχὴ τῆς πίστεως σώσει τὸν κάμνοντα 1 the prayer of faith will save the sick James is using the possessive form to describe **prayer** that is characterized by **faith**. Alternate translation: “the prayer that is offered in faith will save the sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JAS 5 15 j329 figs-possession ἡ εὐχὴ τῆς πίστεως σώσει τὸν κάμνοντα 1 the prayer of faith will save the sick James is using the word translated **save** in one of its senses to mean “heal.” (He uses a more specific word to mean “healed” in the next verse.) Alternate translation: “the prayer that is offered in faith will heal the sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JAS 5 15 j330 figs-nominaladj ἡ εὐχὴ τῆς πίστεως σώσει τὸν κάμνοντα 1 the prayer of faith will save the sick James is using the adjective **sick** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the prayer that is offered in faith will heal the sick person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -JAS 5 15 c8q6 figs-personification ἡ εὐχὴ τῆς πίστεως σώσει τὸν κάμνοντα 1 the prayer of faith will save the sick James is speaking figuratively of this **prayer** as if it would heal the sick person itself. Alternate translation: “in answer to this prayer that is offered in faith, God will heal the sick person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -JAS 5 15 ei3q figs-metonymy ἐγερεῖ αὐτὸν ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord will raise him up James is speaking figuratively of the sick person’s restoration to health by association with the way that the person will get **up** out of bed when he recovers. Alternate translation: “the Lord will make him well” or “the Lord will enable him to resume his regular activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 5 15 c8q6 figs-personification ἡ εὐχὴ τῆς πίστεως σώσει τὸν κάμνοντα 1 the prayer of faith will save the sick James is speaking of this **prayer** as if it would heal the sick person itself. Alternate translation: “in answer to this prayer that is offered in faith, God will heal the sick person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 5 15 ei3q figs-metonymy ἐγερεῖ αὐτὸν ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord will raise him up James is speaking of the sick person’s restoration to health by association with the way that the person will get **up** out of bed when he recovers. Alternate translation: “the Lord will make him well” or “the Lord will enable him to resume his regular activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 5 15 j331 figs-activepassive ἀφεθήσεται αὐτῷ 1 it will be forgiven to him If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will forgive him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 5 16 dl5k grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore James uses **Therefore** to introduce something that believers should do as a result of what he said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain in more detail what he means, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 5 16 mzk8 figs-activepassive ἰαθῆτε 1 you may be healed If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “God may heal you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 5 16 j332 πολὺ ἰσχύει δέησις δικαίου ἐνεργουμένη 1 The working prayer of the righteous is very strong The term **working** has the sense of an adverb rather than an adjective. Alternate translation: “The prayer of the righteous is very strong as it is working” or “The prayer of the righteous is very strong in its effects” JAS 5 16 j333 figs-nominaladj πολὺ ἰσχύει δέησις δικαίου ἐνεργουμένη 1 The working prayer of the righteous is very strong James is using the adjective **righteous** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “The working prayer of a person who is righteous is very strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -JAS 5 16 zk62 figs-personification πολὺ ἰσχύει δέησις δικαίου ἐνεργουμένη 1 The working prayer of the righteous is very strong James is speaking figuratively of **prayer** as if it were a living thing that was **very strong** by itself. Alternate translation: “When a person who is righteous prays, God does very powerful things in response” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 5 16 zk62 figs-personification πολὺ ἰσχύει δέησις δικαίου ἐνεργουμένη 1 The working prayer of the righteous is very strong James is speaking of **prayer** as if it were a living thing that was **very strong** by itself. Alternate translation: “When a person who is righteous prays, God does very powerful things in response” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 5 17 j334 figs-explicit Ἠλείας 1 Elijah James assumes that his readers will know from the Scriptures about this episode in Elijah’s life. If your readers might not be familiar with it, you could describe it in more detail. Alternate translation: “You know from the Scriptures how a prophet named Elijah who lived long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 17 j335 figs-explicit ὁμοιοπαθὴς ἡμῖν 1 of similar passions to us This expression means that Elijah had the same feelings as any other human being. In context, James is indicating specifically that he too had the kind of feelings that make it difficult for people to pray. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who had the same doubts and fears that we all do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 17 vhw2 figs-explicitinfo προσευχῇ προσηύξατο 1 he prayed with prayer To indicate that Elijah prayed intensely, James is using an indirect object with a verb that comes from the same root. If your language uses a similar construction, it would be appropriate to have it here in your translation. But if this construction would seem to express unnecessary extra information in your language, you could express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “he prayed intensely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) JAS 5 18 j336 writing-pronouns πάλιν προσηύξατο 1 he prayed again The pronoun **he** refers to Elijah. Alternate translation: “Elijah prayed again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JAS 5 18 zwc9 figs-personification ὁ οὐρανὸς ὑετὸν ἔδωκεν 1 the heaven gave rain In this context, **the heaven** means “the sky.” James is speaking figuratively of the sky as if it were a living thing that **gave rain**. Alternate translation: “rain fell from the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -JAS 5 18 yi7m figs-personification ἡ γῆ ἐβλάστησεν τὸν καρπὸν αὐτῆς 1 the earth produced its fruit James is speaking figuratively of the **earth** as if it were a living thing that **produced fruit**. As in [5:7](../05/07.md), James is using the word **fruit** in a broad sense to mean things that plants produce that are good for food. He does not mean only the kind of fruit that grows on trees and vines. Alternate translation: “crops grew from the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 5 18 zwc9 figs-personification ὁ οὐρανὸς ὑετὸν ἔδωκεν 1 the heaven gave rain In this context, **the heaven** means “the sky.” James is speaking of the sky as if it were a living thing that **gave rain**. Alternate translation: “rain fell from the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +JAS 5 18 yi7m figs-personification ἡ γῆ ἐβλάστησεν τὸν καρπὸν αὐτῆς 1 the earth produced its fruit James is speaking of the **earth** as if it were a living thing that **produced fruit**. As in [5:7](../05/07.md), James is using the word **fruit** in a broad sense to mean things that plants produce that are good for food. He does not mean only the kind of fruit that grows on trees and vines. Alternate translation: “crops grew from the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 5 19 xr4l figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου 1 My brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 5 19 dv4v figs-metaphor ἐάν τις ἐν ὑμῖν πλανηθῇ ἀπὸ τῆς ἀληθείας 1 if anyone among you may have been led astray from the truth As in [1:16](../01/16.md), James is speaking figuratively as if a deceptive guide may have led one of his readers in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “if anyone among you may have been deceived regarding the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 19 dv4v figs-metaphor ἐάν τις ἐν ὑμῖν πλανηθῇ ἀπὸ τῆς ἀληθείας 1 if anyone among you may have been led astray from the truth As in [1:16](../01/16.md), James is speaking as if a deceptive guide may have led one of his readers in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “if anyone among you may have been deceived regarding the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 19 j337 figs-activepassive ἐάν τις ἐν ὑμῖν πλανηθῇ ἀπὸ τῆς ἀληθείας 1 if anyone among you may have been led astray from the truth If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “if someone may have deceived anyone among you regarding the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 5 19 j338 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 5 19 j339 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψῃ τις αὐτόν 1 someone turns him back James is continuing the metaphor of someone guiding a person in the right direction. Alternate translation: “someone corrects him” or “someone shows him what is actually true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 20 j340 writing-pronouns γινωσκέτω 1 let him know The pronoun **him** refers to the person who corrects another believer who has been deceived. Alternate translation: “the person who corrects the deceived believer should know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JAS 5 20 j341 figs-possession ὁ ἐπιστρέψας ἁμαρτωλὸν ἐκ πλάνης ὁδοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 the one who turns back a sinner from the wandering of his way James is using the possessive form to describe a **way** or path that is characterized by **wandering**. Alternate translation: “the one who turns back a sinner who has wandered away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JAS 5 20 xg1y figs-metaphor ὁ ἐπιστρέψας ἁμαρτωλὸν ἐκ πλάνης ὁδοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 the one who turns back a sinner from the wandering of his way The expressions **turns back** and **wandering** continue the metaphor of someone guiding a person in the right direction. Alternate translation: “anyone who corrects a sinner who has stopped doing what God wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 5 20 j342 figs-metonymy σώσει ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἐκ θανάτου 1 will save his soul from death James is speaking figuratively as if this person’s actions would save the sinner’s soul from death. But James means by association that God will use those actions to persuade the sinner to repent and be saved. Alternate translation: “will be an instrument of God’s work to save the sinner’s soul from death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 5 20 j342 figs-metonymy σώσει ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἐκ θανάτου 1 will save his soul from death James is speaking as if this person’s actions would save the sinner’s soul from death. But James means by association that God will use those actions to persuade the sinner to repent and be saved. Alternate translation: “will be an instrument of God’s work to save the sinner’s soul from death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 5 20 pd78 figs-metaphor σώσει ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἐκ θανάτου 1 will save his soul from death James seems to be speaking not of literal, physical death but of spiritual death, that is, of eternal separation from God. Alternate translation: “from spiritual death” (as in UST) or “from eternal separation from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 20 j343 figs-synecdoche σώσει ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἐκ θανάτου 1 will save his soul from death However, some interpreters believe that James actually is speaking of literal, physical death. They believe he is saying that a person who stops his sinful lifestyle will not experience physical death as a consequence of his sin. In that case, James would be using one part of a person, his **soul**, to mean all of the person. Alternate translation: “will keep him from dying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -JAS 5 20 rh4d figs-metaphor καλύψει πλῆθος ἁμαρτιῶν 1 will cover a multitude of sins James is speaking figuratively of one person’s sins as if they were objects that another person could cover so that God would not see them. He means that by helping a sinner to repent, another believer can help that sinner to be forgiven. Alternate translation: “will help him to be forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 20 rh4d figs-metaphor καλύψει πλῆθος ἁμαρτιῶν 1 will cover a multitude of sins James is speaking of one person’s sins as if they were objects that another person could cover so that God would not see them. He means that by helping a sinner to repent, another believer can help that sinner to be forgiven. Alternate translation: “will help him to be forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 1bb3f1ed3d..0a86a62faf 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -17,11 +17,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 2 ukos figs-explicit εἰς ὑπακοὴν καὶ ῥαντισμὸν αἵματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **obedience** could refer to: (1) obeying God. Alternate translation: “for obedience of God and the sprinkling of the blood of Jesus Christ” (2) obeying Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “for obedience of Jesus Christ and the sprinkling of his blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 2 oiuz figs-abstractnouns εἰς ὑπακοὴν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **obedience**, you can express the same idea with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “for you to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 2 j96u grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ὑπακοὴν 1 Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Peter is stating a purpose for which the Holy Spirit sanctifies believers. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of obedience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1PE 1 2 rwkk figs-metaphor ῥαντισμὸν αἵματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the sprinkling of the blood of Jesus Christ Peter uses **sprinkling** figuratively to refer to believers being in a covenant relationship with God. Just as Moses sprinkled blood on the people of Israel in [Exodus 24:1–11](../exo/24/01.md) to symbolize that they were joining in a covenant relationship with God, believers are joined in a covenant relationship with God by means of Jesus’ death. Moses also sprinkled blood on the priests to set them apart to serve God as priests ([Leviticus 8:30](../lev/08/30.md)). If your readers would not understand this, you could use a simile or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the covenant between believers and God established by the blood of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 1 2 i9kf figs-metonymy αἵματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 of the blood of Jesus Christ Here, **blood** refers figuratively to the death of Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “of the blood, the symbol of the death of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 1 2 rwkk figs-metaphor ῥαντισμὸν αἵματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the sprinkling of the blood of Jesus Christ Peter uses **sprinkling** to refer to believers being in a covenant relationship with God. Just as Moses sprinkled blood on the people of Israel in [Exodus 24:1–11](../exo/24/01.md) to symbolize that they were joining in a covenant relationship with God, believers are joined in a covenant relationship with God by means of Jesus’ death. Moses also sprinkled blood on the priests to set them apart to serve God as priests ([Leviticus 8:30](../lev/08/30.md)). If your readers would not understand this, you could use a simile or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the covenant between believers and God established by the blood of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 1 2 i9kf figs-metonymy αἵματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 of the blood of Jesus Christ Here, **blood** refers to the death of Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “of the blood, the symbol of the death of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 1 2 k547 translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. Alternate translation: “May God increase his kind acts to you and make you more peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) 1PE 1 2 iam1 figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **grace** and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “May God multiply his kind acts to you and give you a more peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 1 2 z7df figs-metaphor χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 May grace be to you, and may your peace increase Peter speaks of **grace** and **peace** figuratively as if they were objects that could increase in size or number. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different metaphor that means that these things will increase, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “May grace and peace increase in your lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 1 2 z7df figs-metaphor χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 May grace be to you, and may your peace increase Peter speaks of **grace** and **peace** as if they were objects that could increase in size or number. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different metaphor that means that these things will increase, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “May grace and peace increase in your lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 2 gj71 figs-activepassive χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May God multiply grace and peace to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 1 3 y6aq 0 General Information: Peter begins to talk about the believers’ salvation and faith. [Verses 3–5](../01/03.md) are one sentence, but you may need to divide them into shorter sentences in your language. 1PE 1 3 l4vi figs-declarative εὐλογητὸς 1 Peter is using a statement to give an exhortation. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for exhortation. Alternate translation: “Let us bless” or “Let us praise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) @@ -32,11 +32,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 3 c92y figs-metaphor ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς 1 he has given us new birth The phrase **born again** is a metaphor that refers to spiritual rebirth. Since this is an important metaphor in the Bible, you should keep it in your translation and include an explanation if necessary. Alternate translation: “has caused us to be spiritually reborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 3 cbxb figs-infostructure ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς εἰς ἐλπίδα ζῶσαν, δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 The clause **into a living hope** is parallel to “into an imperishable and undefiled and unfading inheritance” in the next verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of the phrases in this verse in order to show that parallel structure. Alternate translation: “who has caused us to be born again through the resurrection of Jesus Christ from dead ones into a living hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1PE 1 3 qe1c grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ἐλπίδα ζῶσαν 1 Here, **into** introduces a purpose clause. Peter is stating a purpose for which God causes believers to be born again. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of giving us a living hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1PE 1 3 kngt figs-metaphor εἰς ἐλπίδα ζῶσαν 1 Peter uses **living** figuratively to describe **hope** that is certain and will not lead to disappointment. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into a hope that will not disappoint you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 1 3 kngt figs-metaphor εἰς ἐλπίδα ζῶσαν 1 Peter uses **living** to describe **hope** that is certain and will not lead to disappointment. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into a hope that will not disappoint you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 3 lh0r figs-abstractnouns δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “through Jesus Christ being resurrected from among dead ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 4 v9jq grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς κληρονομίαν ἄφθαρτον, καὶ ἀμίαντον, καὶ ἀμάραντον 1 Here, **into** introduces a purpose clause. Peter is stating a second purpose for which God causes believers to be born again. This clause states what the “living hope” in the previous verse is. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of giving us an imperishable and undefiled and unfading inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1PE 1 4 b2zy figs-abstractnouns εἰς κληρονομίαν ἄφθαρτον, καὶ ἀμίαντον, καὶ ἀμάραντον 1 for an imperishable and undefiled and unfading inheritance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **inheritance**, you can express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “into what we will inherit that is imperishable and undefiled and unfading” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 1 4 cy1g figs-metaphor κληρονομίαν ἄφθαρτον, καὶ ἀμίαντον, καὶ ἀμάραντον 1 an … inheritance Peter uses **inheritance** figuratively to refer to what we will receive in heaven. This could refer to: (1) The promise of God that we will live forever with him. Alternate translation: “a sure and unfailing promise the we will live forever with God” (2) future blessings in heaven after this life. Alternate translation: “imperishable and undefiled and unfading blessings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 1 4 cy1g figs-metaphor κληρονομίαν ἄφθαρτον, καὶ ἀμίαντον, καὶ ἀμάραντον 1 an … inheritance Peter uses **inheritance** to refer to what we will receive in heaven. This could refer to: (1) The promise of God that we will live forever with him. Alternate translation: “a sure and unfailing promise the we will live forever with God” (2) future blessings in heaven after this life. Alternate translation: “imperishable and undefiled and unfading blessings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 4 z6w4 figs-activepassive τετηρημένην ἐν οὐρανοῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 reserved in heaven for you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which God has kept in heaven for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 1 5 r4es figs-activepassive τοὺς ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ φρουρουμένους 1 who are protected by the power of God If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God is protecting with his power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 1 5 a4ab figs-abstractnouns διὰ πίστεως 1 through faith If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by believing in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 6 hy8d grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν ᾧ ἀγαλλιᾶσθε 1 In this you greatly rejoice **In** here introduces the reason why Peter’s readers rejoice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “On account of this you greatly rejoice” or “Because of this you greatly rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1PE 1 6 dtvb grammar-connect-condition-fact ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary, and it is, to have been distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1PE 1 6 a2bq figs-activepassive ὀλίγον ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες ἐν ποικίλοις πειρασμοῖς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary for various trials to distress you a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 1 7 vvp1 figs-metaphor τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως…διὰ πυρὸς δὲ δοκιμαζομένου 1 so that the proof of your faith Here Peter speaks of **faith** figuratively, as if it were gold that is refined by passing it through **fire**. He also uses **fire** figuratively to refer to the hardships that test how well believers trust in Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the genuineness of your faith … but being tested by hardships the way fire tests gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 1 7 vvp1 figs-metaphor τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως…διὰ πυρὸς δὲ δοκιμαζομένου 1 so that the proof of your faith Here Peter speaks of **faith**, as if it were gold that is refined by passing it through **fire**. He also uses **fire** to refer to the hardships that test how well believers trust in Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the genuineness of your faith … but being tested by hardships the way fire tests gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 7 ct3n figs-abstractnouns τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως 1 the proof of your faith If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **genuineness** and **faith**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the fact that you genuinely believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 7 g1oe figs-infostructure ἵνα τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως πολυτιμότερον χρυσίου τοῦ ἀπολλυμένου, διὰ πυρὸς δὲ δοκιμαζομένου, εὑρεθῇ εἰς ἔπαινον, καὶ δόξαν, καὶ τιμὴν, ἐν ἀποκαλύψει Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “so that the genuineness of your faith might be found to result in praise and glory and honor at the revelation of Jesus Christ; that faith is more precious than the perishing gold, but being tested by fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1PE 1 7 u63m figs-explicit ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως πολυτιμότερον χρυσίου τοῦ ἀπολλυμένου, διὰ πυρὸς δὲ δοκιμαζομένου 1 of your faith, which is more precious than gold that perishes. But, being tested by fire In this clause Peter means that **faith** is more valuable than **gold** because faith lasts forever but gold does not, even if it is refined by someone passing it through **fire**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “of your faith, which is more precious than gold because even gold that is tested by fire can perish, but your faith will not perish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 7 lewt figs-explicit ἐν ἀποκαλύψει Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Peter assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the future **revelation of Jesus Christ**, when Jesus returns to earth. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the future revelation of Jesus Christ” or “when Jesus Christ reveals himself again in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 7 bkr9 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀποκαλύψει Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 at the revealing of Jesus Christ If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “at the time when Jesus Christ is revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 8 eka3 figs-doublet χαρᾷ ἀνεκλαλήτῳ καὶ δεδοξασμένῃ 1 with joy that is inexpressible and filled with glory Here, **inexpressible** and **filled with glory** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how great the joy is. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “with joy so great that words cannot describe it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1PE 1 9 hw6y figs-metaphor κομιζόμενοι…σωτηρίαν 1 the salvation Here Peter speaks figuratively of **salvation** as if it were an object that someone could receive. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experiencing … the salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 1 9 hw6y figs-metaphor κομιζόμενοι…σωτηρίαν 1 the salvation Here Peter speaks of **salvation** as if it were an object that someone could receive. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “experiencing … the salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 9 jkcb figs-abstractnouns τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “of you believing in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 9 j2qe figs-abstractnouns σωτηρίαν ψυχῶν 1 the salvation of your souls If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God saving your souls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 9 uk4a figs-synecdoche σωτηρίαν ψυχῶν 1 the salvation of your souls Here, **souls** refers to the individual Christians to whom Peter is writing this letter. If this might confuse your readers, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “your salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -72,16 +72,16 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 12 c7jz figs-explicit Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, ἀποσταλέντι ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ 1 This phrase indicates the means by which the evangelists proclaimed the gospel to Peter’s readers. Peter uses **the Holy Spirit** here to refer specifically to the Holy Spirit’s work of giving those evangelists the ability or power to proclaim the gospel effectively. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit sent from heaven enabling them to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 12 yzqk figs-activepassive ἀποσταλέντι ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 1 12 lyzl figs-explicit εἰς ἃ 1 Here, **things** refers to what God had revealed to the prophets and some evangelists had proclaimed to Peter’s readers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “into which things God revealed to the prophets and which were declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 1 12 xi4d figs-metaphor εἰς ἃ ἐπιθυμοῦσιν ἄγγελοι παρακύψαι 1 into which things angels long to look Peter uses **look** figuratively to refer to getting a clearer understanding of what God has revealed about salvation. This does not mean that the angels do not understand salvation at all. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “things which angels desire to understand more clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 1 12 xi4d figs-metaphor εἰς ἃ ἐπιθυμοῦσιν ἄγγελοι παρακύψαι 1 into which things angels long to look Peter uses **look** to refer to getting a clearer understanding of what God has revealed about salvation. This does not mean that the angels do not understand salvation at all. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “things which angels desire to understand more clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 13 bjg9 grammar-connect-words-phrases διὸ 1 So **Therefore** here refers back to everything that Peter has written in [verses 1–12](../01/01.md). If it might be helpful to your readers, you could state this concisely. Alternate translation: “Since all these things I have just written are true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1PE 1 13 zvgh figs-declarative ἀναζωσάμενοι τὰς ὀσφύας τῆς διανοίας ὑμῶν, νήφοντες, τελείως ἐλπίσατε 1 The clauses **having girded up the loins of your mind** and **being sober** could indicate: (1) two commands in addition to the command to **hope fully** that occurs in the next phrase. Alternate translation: “gird up the loins of your mind, be sober, hope fully” (2) two actions that are means by which Peter wants his readers to obey the command to **hope fully**. Alternate translation: “hope fully, by having girded up the loins of your mind and by being sober” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) 1PE 1 13 u87y figs-idiom ἀναζωσάμενοι τὰς ὀσφύας τῆς διανοίας ὑμῶν 1 having girded the loins of your mind Girding up **the loins** is an idiom that means to prepare to work hard. It comes from the custom of tucking the bottom of one’s robe into a belt around the waist in order to move with ease. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having prepared your minds for action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1PE 1 13 i56f figs-metaphor νήφοντες 1 Here Peter uses **sober** figuratively to refer to mental clarity and alertness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “thinking clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 1 13 i56f figs-metaphor νήφοντες 1 Here Peter uses **sober** to refer to mental clarity and alertness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “thinking clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 13 y771 figs-activepassive τὴν φερομένην ὑμῖν χάριν 1 the grace that is being brought to you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the grace God is bringing to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 1 13 ut69 figs-metaphor τὴν φερομένην ὑμῖν χάριν 1 the grace that is being brought to you Here Peter speaks of **grace** as if it were an object that could be brought to people. If this might confuse you readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the grace God is giving to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 13 qk5s figs-metonymy τὴν φερομένην ὑμῖν χάριν 1 Here, **the grace** refers to salvation, as it also does in [verse 10](../01/10.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the gracious salvation being brought to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 1 13 l45d figs-possession ἀποκαλύψει Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the revelation of Jesus Christ See how you translated this phrase in [verse 7](../01/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1PE 1 14 opvh figs-metaphor ὡς τέκνα ὑπακοῆς 1 Here Peter uses **children** figuratively to refer to people who love and obey God. The relationship between God and those who love him is like the relationship between a father and his children. Because this is an important concept in the Bible, you should not express the meaning plainly here, but you may use a simile. Alternate translation: “Like children of obedience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 1 14 opvh figs-metaphor ὡς τέκνα ὑπακοῆς 1 Here Peter uses **children** to refer to people who love and obey God. The relationship between God and those who love him is like the relationship between a father and his children. Because this is an important concept in the Bible, you should not express the meaning plainly here, but you may use a simile. Alternate translation: “Like children of obedience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 14 n5wg figs-possession τέκνα ὑπακοῆς 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **children** who are characterized by **obedience**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “obedient” instead of the noun “obedience.” Alternate translation: “obedient children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1PE 1 14 e4tb figs-idiom μὴ συνσχηματιζόμενοι ταῖς πρότερον…ἐπιθυμίαις 1 not being conformed to your former desires Here, **not being conformed to** is an idiom meaning “not letting one’s life be controlled by.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “not being controlled by your former desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1PE 1 14 nepq figs-declarative μὴ συνσχηματιζόμενοι ταῖς πρότερον…ἐπιθυμίαις 1 Peter is using a statement to give a command. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “do not be conformed to your former desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) @@ -97,10 +97,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 17 s6gv figs-metaphor τὸν τῆς παροικίας ὑμῶν χρόνον 1 conduct yourselves in fear during the time of your journey Here Peter speaks of his readers as if they were people living in a foreign land far away from their homes. Like people living away from home, so are Christians living away from their home in heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “during the time that you are living away from your true home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 18 pcm5 figs-infostructure οὐ φθαρτοῖς, ἀργυρίῳ ἢ χρυσίῳ, ἐλυτρώθητε ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ὑμῶν ἀναστροφῆς πατροπαραδότου 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “you have been redeemed from your futile behavior handed down from your fathers, not with perishable things, with silver or with gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1PE 1 18 q4pc figs-activepassive ἐλυτρώθητε 1 you have been redeemed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has redeemed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 1 18 git3 figs-metaphor ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ὑμῶν ἀναστροφῆς πατροπαραδότου 1 Here, **handed down** figuratively refers to one generation teaching **futile behavior** to another generation, as if that behavior were an object that could be passed by hand from one person to another. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from your futile behavior taught to you by your fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 1 18 git3 figs-metaphor ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ὑμῶν ἀναστροφῆς πατροπαραδότου 1 Here, **handed down** refers to one generation teaching **futile behavior** to another generation, as if that behavior were an object that could be passed by hand from one person to another. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from your futile behavior taught to you by your fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 18 ctgm figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ὑμῶν ἀναστροφῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **behavior**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from behaving in futile ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 18 b5qa figs-activepassive πατροπαραδότου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that your fathers handed down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 1 19 s4jd figs-metonymy τιμίῳ αἵματι…Χριστοῦ 1 with the precious blood of Christ Peter uses **the blood of Christ** figuratively to refer to Jesus’ death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with Christ’s precious death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 1 19 s4jd figs-metonymy τιμίῳ αἵματι…Χριστοῦ 1 with the precious blood of Christ Peter uses **the blood of Christ** to refer to Jesus’ death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with Christ’s precious death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 1 19 gk6a figs-simile ὡς ἀμνοῦ ἀμώμου καὶ ἀσπίλου 1 as an unblemished and spotless lamb Peter compares Jesus’ blood to the blood of the lambs that the Jewish priests sacrificed to God because of the people’s sins. The point of this comparison is that Jesus died as a sacrifice so that God would forgive people’s sins. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “like that of the unblemished and spotless lambs that the Jewish priests sacrificed to God for sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 1 19 smu8 figs-doublet ἀμώμου καὶ ἀσπίλου 1 unblemished and spotless The words **unblemished** and **spotless** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses this repetition to emphasize that Christ was completely perfect and sinless. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “completely perfect” or “with no imperfections at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 1 20 msw5 figs-activepassive προεγνωσμένου 1 He has been chosen If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having foreknown him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -112,55 +112,55 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 21 lt5u figs-idiom τὸν ἐγείραντα αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 who has raised him from the dead Here, to **raise him** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who caused him to live again so that he was no longer among the dead people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1PE 1 21 f7mn figs-abstractnouns δόξαν αὐτῷ δόντα 1 has given him glory If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “has glorified him” or “has shown that he is glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 21 k85r figs-abstractnouns τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν καὶ ἐλπίδα, εἶναι εἰς Θεόν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith** and **hope**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “you would believe and hope in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 1 22 hj14 figs-metaphor τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν ἡγνικότες 1 Having purified **Having purified** figuratively refers to being forgiven for sins. In the Bible, sin is often referred to as something that makes people dirty, and the forgiveness for sin is referred to as the removal of that dirt. God is the one who forgives sins and **purifies** those who believe in Jesus. However, here Peter is referring to his readers’ responsibility in their salvation, which is the responsibility to repent and believe that the gospel is true. Alternate translation: “Having made your souls spiritually pure” or “Having cleansed your souls from sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 1 22 hj14 figs-metaphor τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν ἡγνικότες 1 Having purified **Having purified** refers to being forgiven for sins. In the Bible, sin is often referred to as something that makes people dirty, and the forgiveness for sin is referred to as the removal of that dirt. God is the one who forgives sins and **purifies** those who believe in Jesus. However, here Peter is referring to his readers’ responsibility in their salvation, which is the responsibility to repent and believe that the gospel is true. Alternate translation: “Having made your souls spiritually pure” or “Having cleansed your souls from sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 22 luj3 figs-synecdoche τὰς ψυχὰς 1 Having purified your souls See how you translated **souls** in [verse 9](../01/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1PE 1 22 qyt5 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ὑπακοῇ τῆς ἀληθείας 1 by obedience to the truth If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **obedience** and **truth**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by obeying what is true” or “by obeying the true information” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 22 iyze figs-explicit τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Here, **the truth** refers to the true teaching about Jesus, which includes the command to repent and believe the gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the true message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 22 j777 figs-gendernotations φιλαδελφίαν 1 brotherly love Although **brotherly** is a masculine word, Peter is using the phrase **brotherly love** in a generic sense to refer to the kind of love that all believers should have for other believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “love for fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1PE 1 22 e9wr figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας, ἀλλήλους ἀγαπήσατε ἐκτενῶς 1 love one another earnestly from a pure heart Peter uses **heart** here figuratively to refer to a person’s thoughts or emotions. The word **from** indicates that the **heart** must be the source of the **love** that Peter is telling his readers to have. Therefore, this phrase has a similar meaning to the word “sincere” in the previous clause. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “love one another earnestly based on sincere thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 1 22 e9wr figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας, ἀλλήλους ἀγαπήσατε ἐκτενῶς 1 love one another earnestly from a pure heart Peter uses **heart** here to refer to a person’s thoughts or emotions. The word **from** indicates that the **heart** must be the source of the **love** that Peter is telling his readers to have. Therefore, this phrase has a similar meaning to the word “sincere” in the previous clause. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “love one another earnestly based on sincere thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 1 23 k79f figs-metaphor ἀναγεγεννημένοι 1 See how you translated **born again** in [verse 3](../01/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 23 w4v3 figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐκ σπορᾶς φθαρτῆς 1 having been born again, not from perishable seed, but from imperishable The word **seed** usually refers to either the seed of a plant or the sperm cell of a man, which is used to produce a baby. However, here Peter uses **seed** as a metaphor. It could refer to: (1) the **word of God** mentioned later in the verse. In this case, Peter is saying what the **word of God** is not. Alternate translation: “not by means of a human message that can perish” (2) physical human birth, in which case the meaning is similar to the idea expressed in [John 1:13](../jhn/01/13.md). Alternate translation: “not by means of mortal physical birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 23 nh9r figs-ellipsis ἀφθάρτου 1 from imperishable Peter is leaving out a word that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “from imperishable seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1PE 1 23 tjq9 figs-metonymy λόγου ζῶντος Θεοῦ, καὶ μένοντος 1 through the living and enduring word of God Here Peter uses **word** figuratively to describe the gospel message that came from God and was proclaimed to Peter’s readers by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s living and enduring message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 1 23 tjq9 figs-metonymy λόγου ζῶντος Θεοῦ, καὶ μένοντος 1 through the living and enduring word of God Here Peter uses **word** to describe the gospel message that came from God and was proclaimed to Peter’s readers by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s living and enduring message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 1 23 pkpl figs-doublet ζῶντος…καὶ μένοντος 1 Here, **living** and **enduring** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that God’s word is permanent. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “perpetually enduring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 1 24 kyc5 writing-quotations διότι 1 **For** here introduces a quotation of some phrases from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 40:6–8](../isa/40/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “It is as Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1PE 1 24 e299 figs-quotemarks πᾶσα σὰρξ ὡς χόρτος, καὶ πᾶσα δόξα αὐτῆς ὡς ἄνθος χόρτου. ἐξηράνθη ὁ χόρτος, καὶ τὸ ἄνθος ἐξέπεσεν, 1 In these clauses and the first clause of the next verse, Peter quotes parts of [Isaiah 40:6–8](../isa/40/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -1PE 1 24 dr75 figs-metonymy πᾶσα σὰρξ 1 All flesh Here Peter quotes Isaiah using the term **flesh** figuratively to refer to human beings in general, which are made of flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “All humankind” or “Everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 1 24 zaa4 figs-metaphor πᾶσα δόξα αὐτῆς 1 Peter quotes Isaiah using **glory** figuratively to refer to whatever is beautiful or magnificent about humankind. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that is glorious about humankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 1 24 dr75 figs-metonymy πᾶσα σὰρξ 1 All flesh Here Peter quotes Isaiah using the term **flesh** to refer to human beings in general, which are made of flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “All humankind” or “Everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 1 24 zaa4 figs-metaphor πᾶσα δόξα αὐτῆς 1 Peter quotes Isaiah using **glory** to refer to whatever is beautiful or magnificent about humankind. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that is glorious about humankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 24 ysnb figs-genericnoun ἄνθος χόρτου. ἐξηράνθη ὁ χόρτος, καὶ τὸ ἄνθος ἐξέπεσεν 1 Peter quotes Isaiah speaking of **grass** and flowers in general, not of one particular blade of **grass** or one **flower**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “flowers of grass. Grass dried up, and flowers fell off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1PE 1 24 w0s8 figs-possession ἄνθος χόρτου 1 Here Peter quotes Isaiah using the possessive form to describe the **flower** that grows in the **grass**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the flower that grows in the grass” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1PE 1 24 r0fd figs-simile ἐξηράνθη ὁ χόρτος 1 All flesh is like grass … The grass dries up In this clause the prophet Isaiah continues the comparison between humankind and **grass**. Just like **grass** dies quickly, so human beings only live a short time. If this would confuse your readers, you could express this meaning by repeating the simile language from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “Like the grass dries up, so do people die after a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 1 24 hd2f figs-simile τὸ ἄνθος ἐξέπεσεν 1 all its glory is like the flower of the grass … its flower falls off In this clause the prophet Isaiah continues the comparison between the glory of humankind and flowers. Just like a **flower** dies and falls to the ground, so does the beauty of mankind disappear. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this meaning by repeating the simile language from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “like the flower that fell off the plant, so does everything that is glorious about humankind come to an end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 1 25 lqjz figs-quotemarks τὸ δὲ ῥῆμα Κυρίου μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 This clause completes Peters quotation of [Isaiah 40:6–8](../isa/40/06.md) that began in the previous verse. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this ending by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -1PE 1 25 aba2 figs-metonymy τὸ…ῥῆμα Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Peter quotes Isaiah using **word** figuratively to describe all that God has spoken by using words. This general reference to God’s word would include what God had said about the Messiah. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message that comes from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 1 25 aba2 figs-metonymy τὸ…ῥῆμα Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Peter quotes Isaiah using **word** to describe all that God has spoken by using words. This general reference to God’s word would include what God had said about the Messiah. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message that comes from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 1 25 pp62 figs-metonymy τοῦτο δέ ἐστιν τὸ ῥῆμα 1 Here Peter uses **word** in the same specific sense as in [verse 23](../01/23.md). It is not the general meaning of **word** used earlier in the verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “And this is the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 1 25 s11j figs-activepassive τὸ ῥῆμα τὸ εὐαγγελισθὲν 1 the word that has been proclaimed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the word that we have proclaimed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 2 intro a121 0 # 1 Peter 2 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Command to love each other as a family (1:22–2:10)
2. How believers should act toward other people (2:11–3:12)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:10 and the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:6, 7, 8, and 22.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Stones

The Bible uses a building made of large stones as a metaphor for the church. Jesus is the cornerstone, which is the most important stone. According to [Ephesians 2:20](../eph/02/20.md), the apostles and prophets are the foundation, which is the part of the building on which all the other stones rest. In this chapter, Christians are the stones that make up the walls of the building. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/cornerstone]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/foundation]])

### Milk and babies

When Peter tells his readers to “long for pure spiritual milk” in [2:2](../02/02.md), he is using the metaphor of a baby craving his mother’s milk. Peter wants Christians to crave God’s word the same way a baby craves milk. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Sheep and shepherds

The Bible often speaks metaphorically of people as sheep because sheep do not see well, do not think well, often walk away from those who care for them, and cannot defend themselves when other animals attack them. In [verse 25](../02/25.md), Peter alludes to [Isaiah 53:6](../isa/53/06.md) to describe unbelievers as sheep that wander aimlessly and don’t know where they are going. God’s people are also similar to sheep in that they are weak and do foolish things like rebelling against God. In [verse 25](../02/25.md), Peter also refers to Jesus as a shepherd who takes care of believers, which is a similar idea to what Jesus said in [John 10:11–18](../jhn/10/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/sheep]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/shepherd]]) 1PE 2 1 n3x5 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore **Therefore** here refers back to everything that Peter has said in the previous paragraph ([1:22–25](../01/22.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1PE 2 1 inct figs-declarative ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς 1 This clause indicates a command in addition to the command to “long for pure spiritual milk” that occurs next in the verse. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “put aside all evil and all deceit and hypocrisies and envies and all slanders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) -1PE 2 1 g65y figs-metaphor ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς 1 having put aside all evil, and all deceit and hypocrisy and envy, and all slander Peter speaks of these sinful actions figuratively as if they were objects that people could **put aside** the way people remove dirty clothing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having stopped being evil or being deceptive or being hypocritical or being envious or speaking slander” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 1 g65y figs-metaphor ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς 1 having put aside all evil, and all deceit and hypocrisy and envy, and all slander Peter speaks of these sinful actions as if they were objects that people could **put aside** the way people remove dirty clothing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having stopped being evil or being deceptive or being hypocritical or being envious or speaking slander” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 1 r853 figs-abstractnouns ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil**, **deceit**, **hypocrisies**, **envies**, or **slanders**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “having put aside every kind of evil and all deceitful, hypocritical, deceptive, and slanderous acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 2 2 y6fv figs-simile ὡς ἀρτιγέννητα βρέφη τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα ἐπιποθήσατε 1 As newborn infants, long for pure spiritual milk The point of this comparison is that Peter wanted his readers to desire knowledge of God’s word just as **newborn babies** desire milk. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Just as babies long for their mother’s milk, so you must long for the pure rational milk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 2 2 rm71 ἐπιποθήσατε 1 long for Alternate translation: “desire intensely” or “yearn for” -1PE 2 2 fn81 figs-metaphor τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα 1 pure spiritual milk The word translated as **rational** could also be translated “pertaining to the word”; it refers to the word of God. Peter speaks figuratively of the word of God as if it were **rational milk** that nourishes children. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s pure word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 2 ypy6 figs-metaphor αὐξηθῆτε 1 you may grow up Peter speaks figuratively of believers advancing in the knowledge of God and faithfulness to him as if they were children growing up. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you may mature in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 2 fn81 figs-metaphor τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα 1 pure spiritual milk The word translated as **rational** could also be translated “pertaining to the word”; it refers to the word of God. Peter speaks of the word of God as if it were **rational milk** that nourishes children. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s pure word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 2 ypy6 figs-metaphor αὐξηθῆτε 1 you may grow up Peter speaks of believers advancing in the knowledge of God and faithfulness to him as if they were children growing up. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you may mature in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 2 vg76 figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 to salvation If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “until you are saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 2 2 wmw2 figs-explicit εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 Here, **salvation** refers to when Jesus returns and God completes the **salvation** of his people. Peter also uses this meaning for **salvation** in [1:5](../01/05.md). See how you translated **salvation** there. Alternate translation: “until God saves you completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 3 uja9 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐγεύσασθε 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have tasted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -1PE 2 3 tui9 figs-metaphor εἰ ἐγεύσασθε 1 if you have tasted that the Lord is kind Peter uses **tasted** figuratively to refer to personally experiencing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if you have experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 3 tui9 figs-metaphor εἰ ἐγεύσασθε 1 if you have tasted that the Lord is kind Peter uses **tasted** to refer to personally experiencing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if you have experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 3 hruw figs-quotemarks ἐγεύσασθε ὅτι χρηστὸς ὁ Κύριος 1 This clause is a paraphrase of [Psalm 34:8](../psa/34/08.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 2 4 n5pm figs-explicit πρὸς ὃν προσερχόμενοι 1 Here, **coming** could indicate: (1) a factual statement, as in the UST. (2) a command, in which case “being built up” in the next verse would also be a command. Alternate translation: “Come to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 4 apbp writing-pronouns πρὸς ὃν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus, who is called “Lord” in the previous verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1PE 2 4 c4lu figs-metaphor πρὸς ὃν προσερχόμενοι λίθον ζῶντα 1 coming to him, a living stone Peter refers to Jesus figuratively as if he were a **stone** in a building. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “coming to him, who is like a living stone in a building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 4 ihq2 figs-personification λίθον ζῶντα 1 him, a living stone Peters speaks of a **stone** figuratively as if it were **living**. This could refer to: (1) a stone that is alive. This interpretation emphasizes the fact that Jesus is alive even though he had died. Alternate translation: “a stone that lives” (2) a stone that gives life. This interpretation emphasizes the fact that Jesus gives eternal life to everyone who believes in him. Alternate translation: “a stone that gives eternal life to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1PE 2 4 c4lu figs-metaphor πρὸς ὃν προσερχόμενοι λίθον ζῶντα 1 coming to him, a living stone Peter refers to Jesus as if he were a **stone** in a building. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “coming to him, who is like a living stone in a building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 4 ihq2 figs-personification λίθον ζῶντα 1 him, a living stone Peters speaks of a **stone** as if it were **living**. This could refer to: (1) a stone that is alive. This interpretation emphasizes the fact that Jesus is alive even though he had died. Alternate translation: “a stone that lives” (2) a stone that gives life. This interpretation emphasizes the fact that Jesus gives eternal life to everyone who believes in him. Alternate translation: “a stone that gives eternal life to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1PE 2 4 e8sy figs-activepassive ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπων μὲν ἀποδεδοκιμασμένον 1 having been rejected by men If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “one that men have rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 2 4 euuz figs-gendernotations ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1PE 2 4 a438 figs-activepassive παρὰ δὲ Θεῷ ἐκλεκτὸν 1 but chosen by God If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but that God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 5 z11h figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ ὡς λίθοι ζῶντες οἰκοδομεῖσθε, οἶκος πνευματικὸς 1 you, like living stones, are being built up as a spiritual house Peter uses **stones** figuratively to refer to his readers, people who believe in Jesus. Just as people in the Old Testament used **stones** to build the temple that God dwelled in, God is using believers to bring together a group of people in whom he will dwell. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you, like stones that are put together and built into a house, are living stones that are being brought together into a spiritual community in which God dwells” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 5 g33x figs-simile αὐτοὶ ὡς λίθοι ζῶντες 1 you, like living stones Peters uses **stones** figuratively as if they were **living**. This emphasizes the fact that Peter’s readers have eternal life because they believe in Jesus. In this verse, **living** cannot mean to give life, because only God can give life. Alternate translation: “like stones that live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +1PE 2 5 z11h figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ ὡς λίθοι ζῶντες οἰκοδομεῖσθε, οἶκος πνευματικὸς 1 you, like living stones, are being built up as a spiritual house Peter uses **stones** to refer to his readers, people who believe in Jesus. Just as people in the Old Testament used **stones** to build the temple that God dwelled in, God is using believers to bring together a group of people in whom he will dwell. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you, like stones that are put together and built into a house, are living stones that are being brought together into a spiritual community in which God dwells” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 5 g33x figs-simile αὐτοὶ ὡς λίθοι ζῶντες 1 you, like living stones Peters uses **stones** as if they were **living**. This emphasizes the fact that Peter’s readers have eternal life because they believe in Jesus. In this verse, **living** cannot mean to give life, because only God can give life. Alternate translation: “like stones that live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 2 5 v3jw figs-activepassive οἰκοδομεῖσθε, οἶκος πνευματικὸς 1 living stones, are being built up as a spiritual house If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God is building up as a spiritual house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 2 5 e6dm figs-explicit οἰκοδομεῖσθε 1 Here, **are being built up** could indicate: (1) a factual statement, as in the UST. (2) a command, in which case “coming to him” in the previous verse would also be a command. Alternate translation: “be built up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 2 5 i4bn figs-metaphor εἰς ἱεράτευμα ἅγιον ἀνενέγκαι πνευματικὰς θυσίας 1 a holy priesthood to offer the spiritual sacrifices Here Peter speaks of believers figuratively as if they were part of a **priesthood** and as if their good deeds and acts of worship were **sacrifices** offered to God. Just as the priests in the Old Testament offered sacrifices to God, so should believers do good deeds and worship God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a synonym. Alternate translation: “like the holy priesthood that offered sacrifices to God, so you are made into a group which does good spiritual deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 5 i4bn figs-metaphor εἰς ἱεράτευμα ἅγιον ἀνενέγκαι πνευματικὰς θυσίας 1 a holy priesthood to offer the spiritual sacrifices Here Peter speaks of believers as if they were part of a **priesthood** and as if their good deeds and acts of worship were **sacrifices** offered to God. Just as the priests in the Old Testament offered sacrifices to God, so should believers do good deeds and worship God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a synonym. Alternate translation: “like the holy priesthood that offered sacrifices to God, so you are made into a group which does good spiritual deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 5 ekkp grammar-collectivenouns εἰς ἱεράτευμα ἅγιον 1 The word **priesthood** is a singular noun that refers to a group of priests. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of holy priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 1PE 2 5 zf45 figs-explicit πνευματικὰς θυσίας εὐπροσδέκτους 1 This could mean: (1) the **sacrifices** are of a spiritual, rather than physical, nature. Alternate translation: “the sacrifices of a spiritual nature that are acceptable” (2) the **sacrifices** are offered by the power of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the sacrifices offered by the power of the Holy Spirit, which are acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 6 ibi1 figs-personification περιέχει ἐν Γραφῇ 1 it stands in scripture Here the quotation of **scripture** that occurs next in the verse is spoken of as if it were a person who **stands**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it is written in scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -168,18 +168,18 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 6 wdwx figs-quotemarks ἰδοὺ, τίθημι ἐν Σιὼν λίθον, ἀκρογωνιαῖον ἐκλεκτὸν ἔντιμον; καὶ ὁ πιστεύων ἐπ’ αὐτῷ, οὐ μὴ καταισχυνθῇ. 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 28:16](../isa/28/16.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 2 6 q7jx figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Peter quotes Isaiah using **Behold** to call his readers to pay attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 6 skrt figs-123person τίθημι 1 In this quotation from the Old Testament, **I** refers to God. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, lay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -1PE 2 6 xsx8 figs-metaphor λίθον, ἀκρογωνιαῖον 1 a cornerstone Here God refers to the Messiah figuratively as if he were not only a **stone**, but even the most important **stone** in a building, the **cornerstone**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who is like the most important stone in a building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 6 xsx8 figs-metaphor λίθον, ἀκρογωνιαῖον 1 a cornerstone Here God refers to the Messiah as if he were not only a **stone**, but even the most important **stone** in a building, the **cornerstone**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who is like the most important stone in a building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 6 klv2 figs-distinguish λίθον, ἀκρογωνιαῖον ἐκλεκτὸν ἔντιμον 1 a cornerstone, chosen, precious Here, **chosen** and **precious** show a distinction between this **cornerstone** and any other **cornerstone**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “a cornerstone that is chosen and precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1PE 2 6 lrxm figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ 1 The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. God uses them together to emphasize the truth of this statement. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1PE 2 7 ze1c figs-explicit ἡ τιμὴ 1 Here, **this honor** refers to the statement in the previous verse that people who believe in Jesus will “certainly not be ashamed.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this honor of never being ashamed is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 7 rdhk figs-explicit ἡ τιμὴ 1 The phrase translated **this honor** could also be translated as “precious,” in which case it would refer to the “cornerstone” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “he is precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 7 sj13 figs-ellipsis ἀπιστοῦσιν δὲ 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But to those who do not believe, God says in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 2 7 hext figs-quotemarks λίθος ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 118:22](../psa/118/22.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -1PE 2 7 uu3j figs-metaphor λίθος ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες 1 The stone that was rejected by … has become the head of the corner The author uses **stone** figuratively to refer to the Messiah, and he uses **builders** figuratively to refer to those who **rejected** Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “The Messiah who was rejected just like builders reject a stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 7 uu3j figs-metaphor λίθος ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες 1 The stone that was rejected by … has become the head of the corner The author uses **stone** to refer to the Messiah, and he uses **builders** to refer to those who **rejected** Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “The Messiah who was rejected just like builders reject a stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 7 ql12 figs-metaphor κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the head of the corner This phrase has the same meaning as “cornerstone” in the previous verse. It refers to the most important stone in a building. Here it refers specifically to the Messiah. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Messiah, who is like a cornerstone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 8 k0dm writing-quotations καὶ 1 Here, **and** introduces a quotation of an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 8:14](../isa/08/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “and Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1PE 2 8 vxhb figs-quotemarks λίθος προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτρα σκανδάλου 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 8:14](../isa/08/14.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -1PE 2 8 i72g figs-metaphor λίθος προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτρα σκανδάλου 1 Peter quotes Isaiah speaking figuratively of the Messiah as if he were a **stone** or **rock** that people tripped over. Peter means that many people would be offended by Jesus’ teachings and reject him. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a simile or express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “He is like a stone of stumbling and like a rock of offense” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 8 i72g figs-metaphor λίθος προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτρα σκανδάλου 1 Peter quotes Isaiah speaking of the Messiah as if he were a **stone** or **rock** that people tripped over. Peter means that many people would be offended by Jesus’ teachings and reject him. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a simile or express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “He is like a stone of stumbling and like a rock of offense” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 8 ydkr figs-possession λίθος προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτρα σκανδάλου 1 Peter quotes Isaiah using the possessive form twice in this sentence to describe a **stone** that causes **stumbling** and a **rock** that causes **offense**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “A stone that makes people stumble and a rock that makes people feel offended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1PE 2 8 ptx5 figs-parallelism λίθος προσκόμματος, καὶ πέτρα σκανδάλου 1 A stone of stumbling and a rock of offense These two phrases mean almost the same thing. Isaiah says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that people will be offended by this **stone**. If stating the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “a stone or a rock over which people will surely stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1PE 2 8 h7ta figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ 1 stumble because they disobey the word Here, **the word** refers to the gospel message, which includes the command to repent and believe the gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -194,18 +194,18 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 9 m1f8 grammar-collectivenouns βασίλειον ἱεράτευμα 1 The word **priesthood** is a singular noun that refers to a group of priests. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of royal priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 1PE 2 9 qk7f figs-abstractnouns λαὸς εἰς περιποίησιν 1 a people for possession If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **possession**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a people for God to possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 2 9 ra7z figs-explicit τοῦ ἐκ σκότους ὑμᾶς καλέσαντος, εἰς τὸ θαυμαστὸν αὐτοῦ φῶς 1 who called you from This clause refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, who called you from darkness into his marvelous light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 2 9 nvf5 figs-metaphor ἐκ σκότους…εἰς τὸ θαυμαστὸν αὐτοῦ φῶς 1 from darkness into his marvelous light Here, **darkness** refers figuratively to the condition of people who do not know God and are sinful, and **light** refers figuratively to the condition of people who know God and are righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use similes. Alternate translation: “from a life of sin and ignorance of God to a life of knowing and pleasing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 9 nvf5 figs-metaphor ἐκ σκότους…εἰς τὸ θαυμαστὸν αὐτοῦ φῶς 1 from darkness into his marvelous light Here, **darkness** refers to the condition of people who do not know God and are sinful, and **light** refers to the condition of people who know God and are righteous. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use similes. Alternate translation: “from a life of sin and ignorance of God to a life of knowing and pleasing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 10 pveb figs-quotemarks οὐ λαὸς…λαὸς Θεοῦ…οὐκ ἠλεημένοι…ἐλεηθέντες 1 All four of these phrases are quotations from the Old Testament ([Hosea 1:6–10](../hos/01/06.md)). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate these quotations with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 2 11 jnr9 0 General Information: Peter begins to tell his readers how to live Christian lives. 1PE 2 11 ve9u figs-doublet παροίκους καὶ παρεπιδήμους 1 foreigners and exiles Here, **foreigners** and **exiles** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Christians on this earth are far away from their home in heaven. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “true exiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1PE 2 11 x8af figs-metaphor παροίκους 1 Peter uses **foreigners** here figuratively to refer to his Christian readers. Just like a foreigner is not in his homeland, so are Christians not at home while living on the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those living away from their home in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 11 x8af figs-metaphor παροίκους 1 Peter uses **foreigners** here to refer to his Christian readers. Just like a foreigner is not in his homeland, so are Christians not at home while living on the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those living away from their home in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 11 hjuk figs-metaphor παρεπιδήμους 1 foreigners and exiles See how you translated **exiles** in [1:1](../01/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 11 ubn9 figs-metonymy ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν σαρκικῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν 1 to abstain from fleshly desires Here, **fleshly** refers figuratively to a person’s sinful nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to abstain from satisfying your sinful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 2 11 q4zn figs-personification στρατεύονται κατὰ τῆς ψυχῆς 1 make war against your soul Peter speaks of **fleshly desires** figuratively as if they were soldiers trying to destroy the spiritual life of believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “will destroy your spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1PE 2 11 ubn9 figs-metonymy ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν σαρκικῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν 1 to abstain from fleshly desires Here, **fleshly** refers to a person’s sinful nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to abstain from satisfying your sinful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 2 11 q4zn figs-personification στρατεύονται κατὰ τῆς ψυχῆς 1 make war against your soul Peter speaks of **fleshly desires** as if they were soldiers trying to destroy the spiritual life of believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “will destroy your spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1PE 2 11 x3q5 figs-genericnoun τῆς ψυχῆς 1 your soul Peter is referring to each individual Christian to whom he is writing this letter, not one particular **soul**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “your souls” or “you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1PE 2 12 uiwd figs-declarative τὴν ἀναστροφὴν ὑμῶν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἔχοντες καλήν 1 Peter is using a statement to give a command. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for command, starting a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Keep your behavior among the Gentiles good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) 1PE 2 12 b5nv figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀναστροφὴν ὑμῶν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἔχοντες καλήν 1 keeping your behavior among the Gentiles good If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **behavior**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “behaving well among the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 2 12 nqql figs-metaphor ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 Peter uses **Gentiles** here figuratively to refer to people who are not Christians. Just like a **Gentile** was not a member of the Jewish people, so people who are not Christians are not members of God’s people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “among those who do not believe in Jesus” or “among those who are not Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 12 nqql figs-metaphor ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 Peter uses **Gentiles** here to refer to people who are not Christians. Just like a **Gentile** was not a member of the Jewish people, so people who are not Christians are not members of God’s people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “among those who do not believe in Jesus” or “among those who are not Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 12 mkt4 ἐν ᾧ καταλαλοῦσιν ὑμῶν ὡς 1 in whatever they speak about you as Alternate translation: “with regard to what they slander you for as ” or “with respect to the very things that they slander you for as” 1PE 2 12 w3yn figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τῶν καλῶν ἔργων ἐποπτεύοντες 1 from observing your good works If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **works**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they may observe the good things that you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 2 12 s2ji figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἐπισκοπῆς 1 in the day of visitation If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **visitation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “on the day when he visits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 17 gwy8 figs-metaphor τὴν ἀδελφότητα 1 the brotherhood Here, **brotherhood** refers to all Christian believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the community of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 18 w2nc 0 General Information: Peter begins to speak specifically to people who were slaves who worked in people’s houses. 1PE 2 18 xgk8 figs-doublet τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς καὶ ἐπιεικέσιν 1 the good and gentle The words **good** and **gentle** mean similar things. Peter uses this repetition to emphasize that such masters treat their servants very kindly. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “to the very kind ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1PE 2 18 mueb figs-metaphor τοῖς σκολιοῖς 1 Here, **crooked ones** is used figuratively to refer to people who act dishonestly or unjustly as if their morals were an object that could be bent or twisted. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the dishonest ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 18 mueb figs-metaphor τοῖς σκολιοῖς 1 Here, **crooked ones** is used to refer to people who act dishonestly or unjustly as if their morals were an object that could be bent or twisted. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the dishonest ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 19 r1h1 figs-explicit τοῦτο…χάρις 1 this is praiseworthy Peter assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to finding **favor** with God, which is what he states in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this is deserving of God’s favor” or “this is pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 19 zm8e figs-abstractnouns διὰ συνείδησιν Θεοῦ 1 because of awareness of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **consciousness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because one is aware of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 2 19 rjyf figs-possession διὰ συνείδησιν Θεοῦ 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **consciousness** that is about or concerning **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “because of having consciousness about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -234,28 +234,28 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 20 qii1 τοῦτο χάρις παρὰ Θεῷ 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in the previous verse. 1PE 2 21 c1jn figs-explicit εἰς τοῦτο 1 Here, **this** refers back to what Peter stated at the end of the previous verse. Believers are called by God to endure suffering while doing what is good. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to endure suffering when you have done what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 21 xit1 figs-activepassive εἰς τοῦτο…ἐκλήθητε 1 to this you were called If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has called you to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 21 si3l figs-metaphor ἐπακολουθήσητε τοῖς ἴχνεσιν αὐτοῦ 1 for you so that you might follow in his footsteps Peter uses **follow in his footsteps** figuratively to refer to following Jesus’ example about enduring suffering. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you might imitate his behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 21 si3l figs-metaphor ἐπακολουθήσητε τοῖς ἴχνεσιν αὐτοῦ 1 for you so that you might follow in his footsteps Peter uses **follow in his footsteps** to refer to following Jesus’ example about enduring suffering. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you might imitate his behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 22 wii5 figs-quotemarks ὃς ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ ἐποίησεν, οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ 1 This verse is a quotation from [Isaiah 53:9](../isa/53/09.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 2 22 tyz4 figs-activepassive οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ 1 neither was deceit found in his mouth If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “neither did anyone find deceit in his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 22 cjai figs-metaphor οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ 1 Peter quotes Isaiah referring to **deceit** figuratively as if it were an object that could be found inside someone’s mouth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “neither was deceit spoken out of his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 22 lw1u figs-metonymy οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ 1 neither was deceit found in his mouth Peter quotes Isaiah figuratively describing something the Messiah would say by association with **his mouth**, which he would use to say something. In this case it is something the Messiah did not say. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “neither did he say something deceitful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 2 22 cjai figs-metaphor οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ 1 Peter quotes Isaiah referring to **deceit** as if it were an object that could be found inside someone’s mouth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “neither was deceit spoken out of his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 22 lw1u figs-metonymy οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ 1 neither was deceit found in his mouth Peter quotes Isaiah describing something the Messiah would say by association with **his mouth**, which he would use to say something. In this case it is something the Messiah did not say. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “neither did he say something deceitful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 2 23 lj4a figs-activepassive ὃς λοιδορούμενος, οὐκ ἀντελοιδόρει 1 He, being reviled, did not revile back If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people reviled, did not revile them back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 2 23 gqb5 figs-explicit παρεδίδου…τῷ κρίνοντι δικαίως 1 Here, **the one who judges justly** refers to God. This means that Jesus trusted God to punish those who reviled him or to prove that he was innocent. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he entrusted himself to God, who judges justly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 24 k632 figs-rpronouns ὃς τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν αὐτὸς ἀνήνεγκεν 1 He himself Peter uses the word **himself** here to emphasize that Jesus alone is the one who bore our sins. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “none other than Jesus bore our sins” or “Jesus, that very person, bore our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1PE 2 24 w49m figs-metaphor τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν…ἀνήνεγκεν ἐν τῷ σώματι αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον 1 carried our sins in his body to the tree Peter uses **bore our sins** figuratively to refer to Jesus being punished for **our sins** as if **sins** were an object that he carried on **his body**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “suffered the punishment for our sins in his body on the tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 24 zl8e figs-metonymy τὸ ξύλον 1 the tree Peter uses **tree** figuratively to refer to the cross on which Jesus died, which was made of wood. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 2 24 w49m figs-metaphor τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν…ἀνήνεγκεν ἐν τῷ σώματι αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον 1 carried our sins in his body to the tree Peter uses **bore our sins** to refer to Jesus being punished for **our sins** as if **sins** were an object that he carried on **his body**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “suffered the punishment for our sins in his body on the tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 24 zl8e figs-metonymy τὸ ξύλον 1 the tree Peter uses **tree** to refer to the cross on which Jesus died, which was made of wood. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 2 24 x7ni figs-metaphor ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ἀπογενόμενοι 1 Here, **having died to sins** is a metaphor that means to no longer be controlled by sin. Like a dead person is free from sinning because they are no longer alive, so believers are free to stop sinning because Jesus bore the punishment for their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being no longer controlled by sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 24 fxej grammar-connect-time-sequential ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ἀπογενόμενοι 1 This clause refers to an event that occurs before the event in the next clause. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “after having died to sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) 1PE 2 24 jaka figs-exclusive τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ ζήσωμεν 1 When Peter says **we**, he is speaking of himself and other believers in Christ, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1PE 2 24 w69k figs-quotemarks οὗ τῷ μώλωπι ἰάθητε 1 This clause is a quotation from [Isaiah 53:5](../isa/53/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 2 24 ep4s figs-activepassive οὗ τῷ μώλωπι ἰάθητε 1 of whose wounds you were healed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has healed you by means of his wounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 24 lx3n figs-synecdoche οὗ τῷ μώλωπι 1 Here, **wounds** figuratively refers to all the suffering Jesus endured when he was beaten and killed on the cross. If our readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by whose suffering and death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1PE 2 24 lx3n figs-synecdoche οὗ τῷ μώλωπι 1 Here, **wounds** refers to all the suffering Jesus endured when he was beaten and killed on the cross. If our readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by whose suffering and death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1PE 2 24 n0l5 figs-metaphor ἰάθητε 1 Here, **healed** could mean: (1) being freed from the penalty and power of sin, which could include physical healing. Alternate translation: “you were freed from the effects of sin” (2) being forgiven for their sins and having a restored relationship with God. Alternate translation: “you were forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 2 25 sgt9 figs-simile ἦτε…ὡς πρόβατα πλανώμενοι 1 you as sheep are being led astray Peter speaks figuratively about his readers before they believed in Christ as if they had been similar to lost sheep that were wandering around aimlessly. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you were living aimlessly without knowing God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +1PE 2 25 sgt9 figs-simile ἦτε…ὡς πρόβατα πλανώμενοι 1 you as sheep are being led astray Peter speaks about his readers before they believed in Christ as if they had been similar to lost sheep that were wandering around aimlessly. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you were living aimlessly without knowing God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 2 25 jkfu figs-activepassive ἐπεστράφητε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has turned you back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 25 i5lu figs-metaphor τὸν ποιμένα καὶ ἐπίσκοπον τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 the shepherd and guardian of your souls Peter uses **shepherd** and **overseer** figuratively to refer to Jesus. Just as a **shepherd** protects his sheep and an **overseer** takes care of his workers, Jesus protects and takes care of those who trust in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who protects and takes care of your souls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 25 i5lu figs-metaphor τὸν ποιμένα καὶ ἐπίσκοπον τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 the shepherd and guardian of your souls Peter uses **shepherd** and **overseer** to refer to Jesus. Just as a **shepherd** protects his sheep and an **overseer** takes care of his workers, Jesus protects and takes care of those who trust in him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who protects and takes care of your souls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 25 z6q2 figs-synecdoche τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 See how you translated **souls** in [1:9](../01/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -1PE 3 intro cqf4 0 # 1 Peter 3 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. How believers should act toward other people (2:11–3:12)
2. How believers should endure suffering (3:13–4:6)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in [verses 10–12](../03/10.md).

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### “the spirits in prison”

[Verse 19](../03/19.md) states that Jesus went and proclaimed to “the spirits in prison,” but does not mention what Jesus proclaimed or who those spirits are. [Verse 20](../03/20.md) states that these spirits disobeyed God during the time of Noah. Many scholars think that this means one of the following three meanings, each of which will be discussed in the notes for verses [19](../03/19.md) and [20](../03/20.md): (1) The spirits are demons who were imprisoned by God because they did something evil during Noah’s time (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../jud/01/06.md); [Genesis 6:1–4](../gen/06/01.md)). [Verse 19](../03/19.md) then means that Jesus went to the place where they are imprisoned and proclaimed his victory to them at some time between his death on the cross and his return to heaven. (2) The spirits are sinful human beings who died during the flood in Noah’s time, and the prison is the realm of the dead. [Verse 19](../03/19.md) then means that Jesus went to hell and proclaimed his victory to those dead people there at some time between his death and resurrection. (3) The spirits are sinful human beings who died during the flood in Noah’s time, but [verse 19](../03/19.md) refers to the pre-incarnate form of Jesus indirectly preaching the gospel to them through the preaching of Noah.

### “Baptism now saves you”

In [verse 20](../03/20.md) Peter refers to the story of God rescuing Noah and his family from the flood “through water.” Then in [verse 21](../03/21.md) he states that the water is an “antitype” for baptism, which is a Christian ritual by which a person publicly identifies as a Christian. Then Peter makes the statement that baptism “now saves you.” Since the New Testament authors repeatedly state that God alone saves people and that no one can do any work to be saved, Peter’s statement cannot mean that a person can be saved by being baptized. Rather, Peter uses the word “baptism” figuratively to refer to the faith in Jesus that a person publicly confesses when that person is baptized. Peter indicates later in [verse 21](../03/21.md) that he is not referring to water baptism, which he describes as “the removal of dirt from the flesh.” Peter further states that the baptism he is referring to saves “through the resurrection of Jesus Christ,” which means that a person is saved by faith in Jesus, because Jesus rose from the dead. +1PE 3 intro cqf4 0 # 1 Peter 3 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. How believers should act toward other people (2:11–3:12)
2. How believers should endure suffering (3:13–4:6)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in [verses 10–12](../03/10.md).

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### “the spirits in prison”

[Verse 19](../03/19.md) states that Jesus went and proclaimed to “the spirits in prison,” but does not mention what Jesus proclaimed or who those spirits are. [Verse 20](../03/20.md) states that these spirits disobeyed God during the time of Noah. Many scholars think that this means one of the following three meanings, each of which will be discussed in the notes for verses [19](../03/19.md) and [20](../03/20.md): (1) The spirits are demons who were imprisoned by God because they did something evil during Noah’s time (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../jud/01/06.md); [Genesis 6:1–4](../gen/06/01.md)). [Verse 19](../03/19.md) then means that Jesus went to the place where they are imprisoned and proclaimed his victory to them at some time between his death on the cross and his return to heaven. (2) The spirits are sinful human beings who died during the flood in Noah’s time, and the prison is the realm of the dead. [Verse 19](../03/19.md) then means that Jesus went to hell and proclaimed his victory to those dead people there at some time between his death and resurrection. (3) The spirits are sinful human beings who died during the flood in Noah’s time, but [verse 19](../03/19.md) refers to the pre-incarnate form of Jesus indirectly preaching the gospel to them through the preaching of Noah.

### “Baptism now saves you”

In [verse 20](../03/20.md) Peter refers to the story of God rescuing Noah and his family from the flood “through water.” Then in [verse 21](../03/21.md) he states that the water is an “antitype” for baptism, which is a Christian ritual by which a person publicly identifies as a Christian. Then Peter makes the statement that baptism “now saves you.” Since the New Testament authors repeatedly state that God alone saves people and that no one can do any work to be saved, Peter’s statement cannot mean that a person can be saved by being baptized. Rather, Peter uses the word “baptism” to refer to the faith in Jesus that a person publicly confesses when that person is baptized. Peter indicates later in [verse 21](../03/21.md) that he is not referring to water baptism, which he describes as “the removal of dirt from the flesh.” Peter further states that the baptism he is referring to saves “through the resurrection of Jesus Christ,” which means that a person is saved by faith in Jesus, because Jesus rose from the dead. 1PE 3 1 p454 0 General Information: In [verses 1–6](../03/01.md) Peter gives instructions specifically to women who are wives. 1PE 3 1 wp5p figs-metonymy τινες ἀπειθοῦσιν τῷ λόγῳ 1 some are disobedient to the word Here, **being disobedient to the word** could refer to: (1) refusing to believe the gospel message, as in [2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “some do not believe the message about Jesus” (2) disobeying the commands God gave in his word. Alternate translation: “some do not obey what God commands in his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 1 kbis figs-activepassive κερδηθήσονται 1 they will be won If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will win them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -273,8 +273,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 4 l1js figs-possession ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος 1 Peter is using the possessive form to indicate that the **imperishable thing** is the same thing as **a gentle and quiet spirit**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the imperishable thing, which is a gentle and quiet spirit” or “in the imperishable thing, namely, a gentle and quiet spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1PE 3 4 spi6 figs-metonymy τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος 1 Here,**quiet** means “peaceful” or “calm.” It does not mean the opposite of loud. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of a gentle and peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 4 gbw9 figs-metonymy τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος 1 of a gentle and quiet spirit Here, **spirit** refers to a person’s attitude or temperament. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of a gentle and quiet attitude.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 3 4 j5bu figs-metaphor ὅ ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ πολυτελές 1 which is precious before God Peter refers to God’s opinion figuratively as if it were a person standing directly in front of him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which God considers to be very precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 5 dq60 figs-metaphor ἐκόσμουν ἑαυτάς 1 Peter speaks figuratively of the attitude of the holy women as if it were something with which they **adorned themselves**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “made themselves beautiful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 4 j5bu figs-metaphor ὅ ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ πολυτελές 1 which is precious before God Peter refers to God’s opinion as if it were a person standing directly in front of him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which God considers to be very precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 5 dq60 figs-metaphor ἐκόσμουν ἑαυτάς 1 Peter speaks of the attitude of the holy women as if it were something with which they **adorned themselves**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “made themselves beautiful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 3 5 jbuf ὑποτασσόμεναι τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν 1 See how you translated the similar clause in [verse 1](../03/01.md). 1PE 3 6 kpnl translate-names Σάρρα…τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 **Sarah** is the name of a woman and **Abraham** is the name of her husband. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1PE 3 6 t3xl figs-idiom ἧς ἐγενήθητε τέκνα 1 whose children you have become Peter uses a Hebrew idiom here in which people are said to be the **children** of someone who has qualities similar to theirs. Women who believe and who act like Sarah acted are thought of as if they were her actual **children**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “who resemble her as if you were her children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -282,24 +282,24 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 7 lbc2 0 General Information: In this verse Peter gives instructions specifically to men who are husbands. 1PE 3 7 uddn figs-genericnoun συνοικοῦντες…τῷ γυναικείῳ 1 Here, **the female** refers to the wives of the men to whom Peter is writing, not to one particular woman. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “live with the women whom you have married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1PE 3 7 lulz figs-abstractnouns κατὰ γνῶσιν 1 live with your wife according to understanding, as with a weaker container If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **knowledge**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a knowledgeable way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 3 7 eq1z figs-metaphor ὡς ἀσθενεστέρῳ σκεύει 1 as with a weaker container Here Peter refers to women figuratively as if they were **weaker** containers. The word **container** is a term used to refer to both men and women in the Bible ([Acts 9:15](../act/09/15.md)). Just as clay pots can break easily, so are human beings weak. Here Peter specifically refers to women as **weaker** containers because woman are usually physically weaker than men. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as with someone who is weaker than you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 7 eq1z figs-metaphor ὡς ἀσθενεστέρῳ σκεύει 1 as with a weaker container Here Peter refers to women as if they were **weaker** containers. The word **container** is a term used to refer to both men and women in the Bible ([Acts 9:15](../act/09/15.md)). Just as clay pots can break easily, so are human beings weak. Here Peter specifically refers to women as **weaker** containers because woman are usually physically weaker than men. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as with someone who is weaker than you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 3 7 a88w figs-abstractnouns ἀπονέμοντες τιμήν ὡς καὶ συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς 1 assigning her honor as also fellow heirs of the grace of life If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **honor** and **heirs**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “honor them as also those who will inherit with you the grace of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 3 7 n4rf figs-metaphor συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς 1 fellow heirs of the grace of life Peter speaks of **the grace of life** figuratively as if it were something that people inherit. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those who will experience the grace of life together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 7 n4rf figs-metaphor συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς 1 fellow heirs of the grace of life Peter speaks of **the grace of life** as if it were something that people inherit. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those who will experience the grace of life together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 3 7 quba figs-possession χάριτος ζωῆς 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that is **life**. The word **grace** refers to a gracious gift and **life** refers to eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the gracious gift, namely, eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1PE 3 7 dwm6 figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ μὴ ἐνκόπτεσθαι τὰς προσευχὰς ὑμῶν 1 so that your prayers will not be hindered If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that nothing will hinder your prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 3 8 nk97 0 General Information: In [verses 8–12](../03/08.md) Peter writes instructions to all believers. 1PE 3 8 f5y7 ὁμόφρονες 1 be likeminded Alternate translation: “have the same opinion and be” or “have the same attitude and be” 1PE 3 8 tzgc figs-gendernotations φιλάδελφοι 1 Although **brothers** is masculine, Peter is using the phrase **loving as brothers** in a generic sense to refer to the kind of love that all believers should have for other believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “loving as fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1PE 3 9 z5u3 figs-metaphor μὴ ἀποδιδόντες κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ, ἢ λοιδορίαν ἀντὶ λοιδορίας 1 Do not pay back evil in exchange for evil or insult in exchange for insult Peter uses **paying back** figuratively to refer to responding to the actions of another person as if one was returning money to that person for those actions. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not doing evil to someone who does evil to you or insulting someone who insults you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 9 z5u3 figs-metaphor μὴ ἀποδιδόντες κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ, ἢ λοιδορίαν ἀντὶ λοιδορίας 1 Do not pay back evil in exchange for evil or insult in exchange for insult Peter uses **paying back** to refer to responding to the actions of another person as if one was returning money to that person for those actions. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not doing evil to someone who does evil to you or insulting someone who insults you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 3 9 t6il figs-ellipsis εὐλογοῦντες 1 blessing Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “blessing those who do evil to you or insult you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 3 9 w5df figs-activepassive εἰς τοῦτο ἐκλήθητε 1 to this you were called If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God called you to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 3 9 wx2r figs-explicit εἰς τοῦτο ἐκλήθητε, ἵνα 1 Here, **this** could refer to: (1) **blessing** earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “you were called to bless so that” (2) **inherit a blessing** later in the verse “to this you were called so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 3 9 n3xc figs-metaphor ἵνα εὐλογίαν κληρονομήσητε 1 so that you might inherit a blessing Peter speaks of experiencing God’s **blessing** figuratively as if one is receiving an inheritance. If this might confuse your readers, you could express it plainly. Alternate translation: “so that you might experience God’s blessing as your permanent possession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 9 n3xc figs-metaphor ἵνα εὐλογίαν κληρονομήσητε 1 so that you might inherit a blessing Peter speaks of experiencing God’s **blessing** as if one is receiving an inheritance. If this might confuse your readers, you could express it plainly. Alternate translation: “so that you might experience God’s blessing as your permanent possession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 3 10 dpf2 writing-quotations γὰρ 1 **For** here introduces a quotation from the Old Testament ([Psalm 34:12–16](../psa/34/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “It is as David wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1PE 3 10 tce3 figs-quotemarks ὁ…θέλων ζωὴν ἀγαπᾶν, καὶ ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς, παυσάτω 1 From this clause through to the end of [verse 12](../03/12.md), Peter quotes from [Psalm 34:12–16](../psa/34/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 3 10 p9bl figs-parallelism ὁ…θέλων ζωὴν ἀγαπᾶν, καὶ ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς 1 to love life and to see good days These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize the desire to have a good life. If stating the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the one truly wanting to have a good life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1PE 3 10 btkp figs-metaphor ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς 1 to see good days Peter quotes David speaking figuratively of experiencing a good lifetime as **seeing good days**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience a good lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 10 rqa9 figs-synecdoche τὴν γλῶσσαν ἀπὸ κακοῦ, καὶ χείλη τοῦ μὴ λαλῆσαι δόλον 1 his tongue … his lips Peter quotes David using the words **tongue** and **lips** figuratively to refer to the person who is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “himself from speaking evil and from speaking deceit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1PE 3 10 btkp figs-metaphor ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς 1 to see good days Peter quotes David speaking of experiencing a good lifetime as **seeing good days**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience a good lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 10 rqa9 figs-synecdoche τὴν γλῶσσαν ἀπὸ κακοῦ, καὶ χείλη τοῦ μὴ λαλῆσαι δόλον 1 his tongue … his lips Peter quotes David using the words **tongue** and **lips** to refer to the person who is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “himself from speaking evil and from speaking deceit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1PE 3 10 y4kd figs-abstractnouns τὴν γλῶσσαν ἀπὸ κακοῦ, καὶ χείλη τοῦ μὴ λαλῆσαι δόλον 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil** and **deceit**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “his tongue from saying evil things and his lips from speaking deceitful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 3 11 n5sr figs-metaphor ἐκκλινάτω…ἀπὸ κακοῦ 1 let him turn away from evil Here, **turn away from** is a metaphor that means to avoid doing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let him avoid doing evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 3 11 fu8e figs-doublet ζητησάτω εἰρήνην καὶ διωξάτω αὐτήν 1 The phrases **seek peace** and **pursue it** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the importance of living peacefully with other people. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Let him earnestly pursue peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 12 r5xf figs-idiom ὦτα αὐτοῦ εἰς δέησιν αὐτῶν 1 his ears are upon their requests Here, **ears** being **toward** someone’s **request** is an idiom that refers to God listening to that person’s request. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a similar idiom in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord listens to their request” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1PE 3 12 tytz figs-explicit ὦτα αὐτοῦ εἰς δέησιν αὐτῶν 1 his ears are upon their requests The idea that the Lord listens to the requests of righteous people also implies that he responds to those requests. If this might be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he listens to and grants their request” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 3 12 p2vi figs-genericnoun δέησιν αὐτῶν 1 his ears are upon their requests Here, **request** refers to requests in general, not to one particular **request**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “their requests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -1PE 3 12 es9n figs-synecdoche πρόσωπον δὲ Κυρίου ἐπὶ 1 But the face of the Lord is against Here, **face** refers figuratively to the Lord himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “But the Lord is against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1PE 3 12 es9n figs-synecdoche πρόσωπον δὲ Κυρίου ἐπὶ 1 But the face of the Lord is against Here, **face** refers to the Lord himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “But the Lord is against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1PE 3 12 t22b figs-idiom πρόσωπον δὲ Κυρίου ἐπὶ 1 But the face of the Lord is against Here, **the face** being **against** someone is an idiom that refers to one person opposing another person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a similar idiom in your language. Alternate translation: “But the Lord opposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1PE 3 12 gw7w figs-quotemarks ποιοῦντας κακά 1 After this phrase, Peter also ends his quotation from the book of Psalms. If you decided in [verse 10](../03/10.md) to mark this as a quotation, indicate that ending here with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 3 13 wkw4 0 Connecting Statement: In [verses 13–22](../03/13.md) Peter teaches the believers how to behave when unbelievers persecute them. @@ -319,11 +319,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 14 j8ds figs-quotemarks τὸν δὲ φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε μηδὲ ταραχθῆτε 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 8:12](../isa/08/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 3 14 f9u8 figs-parallelism τὸν δὲ φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε μηδὲ ταραχθῆτε 1 But do not fear their fear, nor be troubled These two phrases mean the same thing. Peter states the same idea twice in order to emphasize that believers should not be afraid of people who persecute them. If stating the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “But you should not fear at all what people might do to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1PE 3 14 yz6y figs-possession τὸν…φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε 1 their fear This could refer to: (1) the fear that unbelievers have. Alternate translation: “you should not fear what they fear” or “you should not fear the same things that they fear” (2) the fear that righteous people have for unbelievers. Alternate translation: “you should not fear them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1PE 3 15 vgv7 figs-metaphor Κύριον…τὸν Χριστὸν ἁγιάσατε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 sanctify the Lord Christ in your hearts Peter uses **sanctify the Lord Christ** figuratively to refer to acknowledging Christ’s holiness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “acknowledge in your hearts that the Lord Christ is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 15 vgv7 figs-metaphor Κύριον…τὸν Χριστὸν ἁγιάσατε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 sanctify the Lord Christ in your hearts Peter uses **sanctify the Lord Christ** to refer to acknowledging Christ’s holiness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “acknowledge in your hearts that the Lord Christ is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 3 15 qjg3 figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 in your hearts Here, **hearts** refers to the thoughts or emotions of Peter’s readers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your minds” or “within yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 15 d69e figs-abstractnouns πρὸς ἀπολογίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **defense**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to defend your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 3 15 q8i1 figs-metonymy τῷ αἰτοῦντι ὑμᾶς λόγον 1 Peter uses **word** figuratively to refer to an answer or explanation spoken by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who asks you for a statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 3 15 w3xw figs-metaphor περὶ τῆς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐλπίδος 1 Peter speaks of **hope** figuratively as if it were something that could be inside a person. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “concerning your hope” or “concerning the hope that you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 15 q8i1 figs-metonymy τῷ αἰτοῦντι ὑμᾶς λόγον 1 Peter uses **word** to refer to an answer or explanation spoken by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who asks you for a statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 15 w3xw figs-metaphor περὶ τῆς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐλπίδος 1 Peter speaks of **hope** as if it were something that could be inside a person. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “concerning your hope” or “concerning the hope that you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 3 16 hzya figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πραΰτητος καὶ φόβου 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **meekness** and **fear**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by being meek and fearful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 3 16 ctk3 figs-abstractnouns συνείδησιν ἔχοντες ἀγαθήν 1 This phrase implies not doing anything sinful that would cause a person to not have a **good conscience**. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “doing nothing wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 3 16 wrk5 figs-infostructure ἵνα ἐν ᾧ καταλαλεῖσθε, καταισχυνθῶσιν, οἱ ἐπηρεάζοντες ὑμῶν τὴν ἀγαθὴν ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστροφήν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “so that the ones who are reviling your good behavior in Christ may be ashamed about why you are being slandered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 16 qflw figs-explicit ὑμῶν τὴν ἀγαθὴν ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστροφήν 1 Here, **in Christ** refers to being a Christian. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “your good behavior as a Christian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 3 16 dvwr figs-activepassive καταισχυνθῶσιν, οἱ ἐπηρεάζοντες ὑμῶν τὴν ἀγαθὴν ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστροφήν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God may shame the ones who are reviling your good behavior in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 3 17 bt09 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀγαθοποιοῦντας…κακοποιοῦντας 1 These two phrases indicate two different reasons for suffering. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of doing good … because of doing evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1PE 3 17 x8qu figs-metonymy εἰ θέλοι τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Peter uses **the will of God** figuratively to refer to God himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if God wills” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 17 x8qu figs-metonymy εἰ θέλοι τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Peter uses **the will of God** to refer to God himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if God wills” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 18 me4u figs-explicit περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν 1 Here, **sins** implies the **sins** of people other than Jesus, because Jesus never sinned. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the sins of others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 3 18 q9fa figs-activepassive θανατωθεὶς…σαρκὶ 1 having been put to death in the flesh If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people having killed him in the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 3 18 j5lh figs-metonymy θανατωθεὶς…σαρκὶ 1 having been put to death in the flesh Here, **flesh** refers to Christ’s body, which was made of **flesh**. Peter is saying that the body of Christ was killed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having been killed physically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -342,61 +342,61 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 19 ez3d figs-explicit τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν 1 to the spirits in prison Here, **spirits** could refer to: (1) evil spirits whom God imprisoned because of what they did before the flood that occurred in Noah’s time (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../jud/01/06.md); [Genesis 6:1–4](../gen/06/01.md)), as in the UST. (2) the spirits of people who died during the flood that occurred in Noah’s time. This interpretation is a less likely to be correct because Peter never refers to people as **spirits**, but rather “souls,” as in the next verse. Alternate translation: “to those people who had died and were in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 3 19 zpyr figs-metaphor ἐν φυλακῇ 1 Here Peter uses **prison** as a metaphor. It could refer to: (1) a place where God imprisoned certain evil spirits whom he will judge when he judges the whole world (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../jud/01/06.md)). Alternate translation: “whom God had imprisoned to await judgment” (2) the place where sinful people go when they die. Alternate translation: “in hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 3 20 qxah figs-ellipsis ἀπειθήσασίν 1 when the patience of God was waiting Peter is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “having disobeyed God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1PE 3 20 s7qm figs-metonymy ἡ τοῦ Θεοῦ μακροθυμία 1 the patience of God Peter uses **patience of God** figuratively to refer to God himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 3 20 yyth figs-metonymy ἐν ἡμέραις Νῶε 1 Here Peter uses **days of Noah** figuratively to refer to the time period when Noah was alive. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the time of Noah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 20 s7qm figs-metonymy ἡ τοῦ Θεοῦ μακροθυμία 1 the patience of God Peter uses **patience of God** to refer to God himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 20 yyth figs-metonymy ἐν ἡμέραις Νῶε 1 Here Peter uses **days of Noah** to refer to the time period when Noah was alive. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the time of Noah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 20 c6mi figs-activepassive κατασκευαζομένης κιβωτοῦ 1 in the days of Noah, while an ark was being constructed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when Noah was constructing an ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 3 21 dqjy writing-pronouns ὃ 1 Here, **which** refers back to the “water” mentioned at the end of the last verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1PE 3 21 vxoh figs-infostructure ὃ καὶ ὑμᾶς ἀντίτυπον νῦν σῴζει βάπτισμα 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “which, being an antitype for baptism, now saves you also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1PE 3 21 tz6l figs-explicit ὃ καὶ ὑμᾶς ἀντίτυπον νῦν σῴζει βάπτισμα 1 Here, **antitype** refers to one thing that is an analogy for another thing. In this context the “water” from the previous verse is an analogy for baptism. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is a symbol for baptism, now saves you also” or “which is analogous to baptism, now saves you also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 3 21 ium3 figs-metonymy βάπτισμα 1 Here Peter uses **baptism** figuratively to refer to the faith in Jesus that believers profess when they are baptized. The Bible clearly states that God saves people by grace through faith, not by any work like baptism ([Ephesians 2:8–9](../eph/02/08.md)). See the discussion in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the faith in Jesus demonstrated by baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 21 ium3 figs-metonymy βάπτισμα 1 Here Peter uses **baptism** to refer to the faith in Jesus that believers profess when they are baptized. The Bible clearly states that God saves people by grace through faith, not by any work like baptism ([Ephesians 2:8–9](../eph/02/08.md)). See the discussion in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the faith in Jesus demonstrated by baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 21 owi3 figs-abstractnouns οὐ σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου, ἀλλὰ συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **removal** and **appeal**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “it does not remove dirt from the flesh, but appeals to God for a good conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 3 21 hmp9 figs-metonymy σαρκὸς 1 Here, Peter uses **flesh** figuratively to refer to a person’s physical body that is made of **flesh**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 21 hmp9 figs-metonymy σαρκὸς 1 Here, Peter uses **flesh** to refer to a person’s physical body that is made of **flesh**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 21 uz0u figs-explicit συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν 1 Here the phrase **a good conscience** means Peter’s readers do not feel guilty because they know that God has forgiven their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “an appeal to God to know that your sins have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 3 21 jti3 figs-infostructure καὶ ὑμᾶς…νῦν σῴζει βάπτισμα, οὐ σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου, ἀλλὰ συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, 1 through the resurrection of Jesus Christ Here, **through the resurrection of Jesus Christ** indicates the means by which the faith demonstrated by baptism saves. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases to make that meaning clear. Alternate translation: “baptism now saves you also through the resurrection of Jesus Christ. It is not a removal of dirt from the flesh, but an appeal to God for a good conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1PE 3 21 rixf figs-abstractnouns δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “through God raising Jesus Christ from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 3 22 p5ij figs-infostructure ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ, πορευθεὶς εἰς οὐρανὸν, ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ ἀγγέλων, καὶ ἐξουσιῶν, καὶ δυνάμεων 1 The phrases **having gone** and **having been subjected** indicate that those two clauses describe events that occurred before the event in the first clause in this verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases so that they appear in chronological order. Alternate translation: “after having gone into heaven, with angels and authorities and powers having been subjected to him, he is at the right hand of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -1PE 3 22 g4qh figs-metonymy ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ 1 who is at the right hand of God Here, Peter uses **right hand** figuratively to refer to the place located at the right side of God in heaven. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who is at God’s right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 22 g4qh figs-metonymy ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ 1 who is at the right hand of God Here, Peter uses **right hand** to refer to the place located at the right side of God in heaven. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who is at God’s right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 22 ldrw figs-explicit ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ 1 In this culture, the place at the **right** side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who is at the place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 3 22 q72i figs-doublet ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ ἀγγέλων, καὶ ἐξουσιῶν, καὶ δυνάμεων 1 The words **angels**, **authorities**, and **powers** are all terms for the ranks of supernatural beings, both angelic and demonic. If your language does not have three different terms for rulers or authorities, you can combine them. Alternate translation: “all types of supernatural beings having been subjected to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 3 22 f6jq figs-activepassive ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ ἀγγέλων, καὶ ἐξουσιῶν, καὶ δυνάμεων 1 after … had been subjected to him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having subjected angels and authorities and powers to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 4 intro zh5n 0 # 1 Peter 4 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. How believers should endure suffering (3:13–4:6)
2. How believers should act because the end is near (4:7–11)
3. How believers should respond to trials (4:12–19)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in [verse 18](../04/18.md).

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Ungodly Gentiles

Although the term “Gentiles” usually refers to people who are not Jewish, in [verse 3](../04/03.md) Peter uses “Gentiles” to refer to all ungodly people who are not Jews. It does not include Gentiles who have become Christians. Actions like “licentiousness, lusts, drunkenness, carousing, drinking parties, and lawless idolatry” were typical of ungodly Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### “Let him” and “Let those”

In [verses 16–19](../04/16.md) Peter uses these phrases to tell his readers what he wants them to do. Although they are commands that he wants his readers to obey, it is as if he were telling one person what he wants other people to do. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate these as commands, like the UST does. 1PE 4 1 b8d4 grammar-connect-words-phrases οὖν 1 **Therefore** here refers back to what Peter has said about Jesus’ suffering in [3:18](../03/18.md). If it might help your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Considering what I have written about Christ’s suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1PE 4 1 ess6 figs-metonymy σαρκὶ…σαρκὶ 1 in the flesh Here, **flesh** refers to the human body, which is made of flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the body … in the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 4 1 p2rv figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς τὴν αὐτὴν ἔννοιαν ὁπλίσασθε 1 arm yourselves with the same intention Here Peter uses **arm yourselves** figuratively to refer to preparing one’s mind for something. As soldiers get their weapons ready for battle, so should Christians be mentally prepared to suffer for their faith. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “prepare your minds with the same way of thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 4 1 p2rv figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς τὴν αὐτὴν ἔννοιαν ὁπλίσασθε 1 arm yourselves with the same intention Here Peter uses **arm yourselves** to refer to preparing one’s mind for something. As soldiers get their weapons ready for battle, so should Christians be mentally prepared to suffer for their faith. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “prepare your minds with the same way of thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 4 1 yxs5 figs-explicit τὴν αὐτὴν ἔννοιαν 1 Here Peter uses **the same way of thinking** to refer to Jesus’ **way of thinking** when he suffered. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with the same way of thinking about suffering that Christ had when he suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 1 d66g figs-explicit πέπαυται ἁμαρτίας 1 has ceased from sin Here, **ceased from sin** means “no longer living with a sinful mindset.” The idea is that suffering because of one’s faith indicates that a person is not living sinfully. Christians are often persecuted by unbelievers because they refuse to act sinfully. This phrase does not mean that Christians who suffer never sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “has stopped living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 2 tjdq grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς 1 Here, **in order to** introduces a purpose clause. This could mean: (1) this verse states the purpose for ceasing from sin mentioned at the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that he will” (2) this verse states the purpose for the command to “arm yourselves” in the previous verse. Alternate translation (starting a new sentence): “Arm yourselves in order to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1PE 4 2 d49a figs-metonymy τὸν ἐπίλοιπον ἐν σαρκὶ…χρόνον 1 Peter uses **time in the flesh** figuratively to refer to a person’s lifetime. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the remaining time of your life” or “the rest of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 4 2 d49a figs-metonymy τὸν ἐπίλοιπον ἐν σαρκὶ…χρόνον 1 Peter uses **time in the flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the remaining time of your life” or “the rest of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 4 2 fsvk figs-explicit ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαις 1 Here, **desires** refers specifically to sinful **desires**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the sinful desires of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 2 gbb6 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαις 1 for the desires of men Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense to refer to humans in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for human desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1PE 4 3 anhj ἀρκετὸς…ὁ παρεληλυθὼς χρόνος 1 Alternate translation: “enough time has passed” -1PE 4 3 efte figs-metaphor τὸ βούλημα τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 Here Peter uses **Gentiles** figuratively to refer to sinful people who do not know God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “the will of those people who do not know God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 4 3 rp5p figs-metaphor πεπορευμένους ἐν ἀσελγείαις, ἐπιθυμίαις, οἰνοφλυγίαις, κώμοις, πότοις, καὶ ἀθεμίτοις εἰδωλολατρίαις 1 Peter speaks of these different sins figuratively as if they were places that his readers had formerly **lived in**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having practiced licentiousness, lusts, drunkenness, carousing, drinking parties, and lawless idolatry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 4 3 efte figs-metaphor τὸ βούλημα τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 Here Peter uses **Gentiles** to refer to sinful people who do not know God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “the will of those people who do not know God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 4 3 rp5p figs-metaphor πεπορευμένους ἐν ἀσελγείαις, ἐπιθυμίαις, οἰνοφλυγίαις, κώμοις, πότοις, καὶ ἀθεμίτοις εἰδωλολατρίαις 1 Peter speaks of these different sins as if they were places that his readers had formerly **lived in**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having practiced licentiousness, lusts, drunkenness, carousing, drinking parties, and lawless idolatry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 4 3 lm35 figs-abstractnouns πεπορευμένους ἐν ἀσελγείαις, ἐπιθυμίαις, οἰνοφλυγίαις, κώμοις, πότοις, καὶ ἀθεμίτοις εἰδωλολατρίαις 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **licentiousness, lusts, drunkenness, carousing**, and **idolatry**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “having lived licentious and lustful lives, getting drunk, attending immoral parties and drinking parties, and worshiping prohibited idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 4 4 c4ma figs-metaphor μὴ συντρεχόντων ὑμῶν εἰς τὴν αὐτὴν τῆς ἀσωτίας ἀνάχυσιν 1 Peter uses **running into** figuratively to refer to being eager to participate in sinful acts with unbelievers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are not eagerly joining them to participate in the same outpouring of recklessness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 4 4 q6k6 figs-metaphor τῆς ἀσωτίας ἀνάχυσιν 1 outpouring of their reckless behavior Peter uses **outpouring** figuratively to refer to acting sinfully to such a high degree that it is as if sin were pouring out of the person like a flood. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “abundant acts of recklessness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 4 4 c4ma figs-metaphor μὴ συντρεχόντων ὑμῶν εἰς τὴν αὐτὴν τῆς ἀσωτίας ἀνάχυσιν 1 Peter uses **running into** to refer to being eager to participate in sinful acts with unbelievers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are not eagerly joining them to participate in the same outpouring of recklessness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 4 4 q6k6 figs-metaphor τῆς ἀσωτίας ἀνάχυσιν 1 outpouring of their reckless behavior Peter uses **outpouring** to refer to acting sinfully to such a high degree that it is as if sin were pouring out of the person like a flood. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “abundant acts of recklessness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 4 4 w1d8 figs-explicit τῆς ἀσωτίας 1 of their reckless behavior The word **recklessness** refers to dangerous behavior that shows that a person does not care about the consequences of his actions. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of careless sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 4 5 datm figs-metaphor οἳ ἀποδώσουσιν λόγον 1 Here Peter uses **give** figuratively to refer to speaking something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will speak a word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 4 5 r288 figs-metonymy οἳ ἀποδώσουσιν λόγον 1 Here Peter uses **word** figuratively to refer to an explanation that they would speak using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will give an account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 4 5 datm figs-metaphor οἳ ἀποδώσουσιν λόγον 1 Here Peter uses **give** to refer to speaking something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will speak a word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 4 5 r288 figs-metonymy οἳ ἀποδώσουσιν λόγον 1 Here Peter uses **word** to refer to an explanation that they would speak using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will give an account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 4 5 xw39 figs-explicit τῷ ἑτοίμως ἔχοντι κρῖναι 1 to the one who is ready to judge Here, **the one who is ready to judge** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “to God, who is ready to judge” (2) Christ. Alternate translation: “to Christ, who is ready to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 5 dx7v figs-merism ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 the living and the dead The phrase **living and dead ones** refers to all people, whether they are still alive or have died. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 1PE 4 6 u54m figs-explicit καὶ νεκροῖς εὐηγγελίσθη 1 the gospel was preached also to the dead Here, **dead ones** refers to people who heard the gospel while they were alive but had died by the time Peter wrote this letter. Some people believe that this clause means that Jesus went to hell and preached the gospel to people who had died before Jesus himself died on the cross. However, that idea would contradict the statement in [Hebrews 9:27](../heb/09/27.md) that “men are appointed to die once, and after that, the judgment.” The Bible does not state that God gave anyone a second chance to believe in Jesus after they had already died. If this use of **dead ones** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the gospel was preached also to those who have since died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 6 ql11 figs-activepassive εὐηγγελίσθη 1 the gospel was preached If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) people preached the gospel. Alternate translation: “people preached the gospel” (2) Christ preached the gospel. Alternate translation: “Christ preached the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 4 6 hsg6 figs-activepassive κριθῶσι…κατὰ ἀνθρώπους σαρκὶ 1 they were judged in the flesh according to men If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) men judged and persecuted them during their lives according to human standards. Alternate translation: “men judged them in the flesh by human standards” (2) God judged them as humans during their lives. Alternate translation: “God judged them in the flesh as humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 4 6 gm1m figs-gendernotations κατὰ ἀνθρώπους 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “according to people” or “as people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1PE 4 6 s72f figs-metonymy σαρκὶ 1 they were judged in the flesh according to men Here Peter uses **in the flesh** figuratively to refer to a person’s lifetime. See how you translated this expression in [verse 2](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 4 6 s72f figs-metonymy σαρκὶ 1 they were judged in the flesh according to men Here Peter uses **in the flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. See how you translated this expression in [verse 2](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 4 6 encm figs-explicit ζῶσι 1 Here, **live** refers to experiencing eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might experience eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 6 h154 figs-explicit ζῶσι…πνεύματι 1 Here, **the spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which the people received eternal life. Alternate translation: “they might live by the Spirit” (2) their spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is contrasted with the physical realm mentioned earlier in the verse with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “they might live spiritually” or “they might live in the spiritual realm” See how you translated the same expression in [3:18](../03/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 7 e445 figs-explicit πάντων…τὸ τέλος 1 the end of all things Here, **the end of all things** refers to the end of the world, when Jesus returns and judges everyone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the end of the world, when Jesus returns,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 4 7 qs1t figs-metaphor ἤγγικεν 1 has come near Peter uses **has come near** figuratively to refer to something that will happen soon. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will soon happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 4 7 qs1t figs-metaphor ἤγγικεν 1 has come near Peter uses **has come near** to refer to something that will happen soon. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will soon happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 4 7 ubd4 figs-doublet σωφρονήσατε…καὶ νήψατε 1 be of sound mind, and be sober The words translated as **sound mind** and **sober** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses them to emphasize the need to think clearly since the end of the world is near. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “be completely clearheaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 4 7 k5hh figs-metaphor νήψατε 1 be sober See how you translated **sober** in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 4 7 qb4j grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς προσευχάς 1 Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Peter is stating a purpose for his readers to think clearly. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of praying prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1PE 4 8 f1lr figs-metaphor ὅτι ἀγάπη καλύψει πλῆθος ἁμαρτιῶν 1 for love covers a multitude of sins Peter describes **love** figuratively as if it were a person who could cover something up, and he describes **sins** figuratively as if they were objects that could be covered up. This clause, **covers up**, means that people who love others will forgive them for the sins that they commit against them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use similes. Alternate translation: “for those who love forgive the many sins committed against them by others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 4 8 f1lr figs-metaphor ὅτι ἀγάπη καλύψει πλῆθος ἁμαρτιῶν 1 for love covers a multitude of sins Peter describes **love** as if it were a person who could cover something up, and he describes **sins** as if they were objects that could be covered up. This clause, **covers up**, means that people who love others will forgive them for the sins that they commit against them. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use similes. Alternate translation: “for those who love forgive the many sins committed against them by others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 4 9 g3vw figs-explicit φιλόξενοι 1 hospitable The word **hospitable** refers to showing kindness to and providing for the needs of guests and travelers. This was especially important in Peter’s time because inns were dangerous places where people did many immoral activities, so Christians could not stay in them. If it might be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “be those who provide food and a sleeping place” or “be those who provide room and board” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 9 rzbi figs-litotes ἄνευ γογγυσμοῦ 1 Here Peter uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “with cheerfulness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1PE 4 10 xvj3 figs-explicit ἕκαστος καθὼς ἔλαβεν χάρισμα 1 Just as each one has received a gift Here, **gift** refers to special spiritual abilities that God gives to believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “just as each one has received a special spiritual ability from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 4 10 a30t figs-metaphor ὡς καλοὶ οἰκονόμοι ποικίλης χάριτος Θεοῦ 1 Peter uses **stewards** figuratively to refer to Christians using spiritual abilities from God to serve other believers as if they were managing resources for a boss. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “as those managing well the diverse grace of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 4 10 a30t figs-metaphor ὡς καλοὶ οἰκονόμοι ποικίλης χάριτος Θεοῦ 1 Peter uses **stewards** to refer to Christians using spiritual abilities from God to serve other believers as if they were managing resources for a boss. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “as those managing well the diverse grace of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 4 10 smyw figs-possession ποικίλης χάριτος Θεοῦ 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that is given by God. The word **grace** refers to the various spiritual gifts that God graciously gives believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the diverse, gracious gifts from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1PE 4 11 b81x figs-ellipsis εἴ τις λαλεῖ, ὡς λόγια Θεοῦ 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if anyone speaks, let him speak as if he is speaking the words of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 4 11 vs2d figs-ellipsis εἴ τις διακονεῖ, ὡς ἐξ ἰσχύος ἧς χορηγεῖ ὁ Θεός 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if anyone serves others, let him serve others as if he were serving them with the strength that God supplies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 4 16 xb0e figs-123person μὴ αἰσχυνέσθω, δοξαζέτω δὲ τὸν Θεὸν 1 Peter is addressing his readers indirectly by using the third person. If this might be confusing in your language, you could use the second person, as the previous verse does. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “do not be ashamed, but glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1PE 4 16 xm8z figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 in this name Here, **this name** refers to the title “Christian” mentioned earlier in the verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he bears the name ‘Christian’” or “because people have recognized him as a Christian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 17 nawr figs-abstractnouns ὁ καιρὸς τοῦ ἄρξασθαι τὸ κρίμα ἀπὸ τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “it is time for God to begin judging the household of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 4 17 x9np figs-metaphor τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the household of God Here Peter uses **household** figuratively to refer to all believers as if they were a family that belongs to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 4 17 x9np figs-metaphor τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the household of God Here Peter uses **household** to refer to all believers as if they were a family that belongs to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 4 17 v74q figs-ellipsis εἰ δὲ πρῶτον ἀφ’ ἡμῶν 1 the household of God Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but if it is time for judgment to begin first with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 4 17 phx3 figs-exclusive ἀφ’ ἡμῶν 1 the household of God When Peter says **us**, he is speaking of himself and his readers, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1PE 4 17 c8ke figs-rquestion τί τὸ τέλος τῶν ἀπειθούντων τῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγελίῳ? 1 but if first with us, what will be the end of those disobeying the gospel of God? Peter is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize that God’s judgment will be more severe for people who reject the gospel than for those who believe it. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “how terrible will be the end of the ones disobeying the gospel of God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -439,19 +439,19 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 5 1 a6ve figs-activepassive τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης 1 of the glory that is about to be revealed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in the glory that God is about to reveal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 5 1 wead figs-abstractnouns τῆς…δόξης 1 of the glory that is about to be revealed If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the glorious nature of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 5 1 yb3l figs-explicit τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης 1 of the glory that is about to be revealed The phrase **the glory that is about to be revealed** refers to Christ’s glorious return to earth in the future. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the glory that is about to be revealed when Christ returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 5 2 f63v figs-metaphor ποιμάνατε τὸ…ποίμνιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Shepherd the flock of God Here Peter uses **Shepherd** figuratively to refer to leading and taking care of believers, and he uses **flock** figuratively to refer to those believers. Elders who lead assemblies of believers should take care of those believers like shepherds take care of their sheep. Since the shepherd and sheep metaphors are important metaphors in the Bible, you should keep the metaphors in your translation or use similes. Alternate translation: “Take care of God’s people as if they were a flock of sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 5 2 f63v figs-metaphor ποιμάνατε τὸ…ποίμνιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Shepherd the flock of God Here Peter uses **Shepherd** to refer to leading and taking care of believers, and he uses **flock** to refer to those believers. Elders who lead assemblies of believers should take care of those believers like shepherds take care of their sheep. Since the shepherd and sheep metaphors are important metaphors in the Bible, you should keep the metaphors in your translation or use similes. Alternate translation: “Take care of God’s people as if they were a flock of sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 2 dvai figs-abstractnouns ἐπισκοποῦντες μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **oversight** and **compulsion**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “supervising—not because you must do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 5 2 zfei figs-ellipsis ἐπισκοποῦντες μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “exercising oversight over them—not doing this under compulsion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 5 2 k4dk figs-doublet μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς, ἀλλὰ ἑκουσίως 1 The phrases **not under compulsion** and **willingly** mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Peter wants church leaders to voluntarily take care of believers. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “with complete willingness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 5 2 cp7u figs-explicit κατὰ Θεόν 1 This phrase refers to acting according to God’s will or requirements. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to God’s will” or “as God wants you to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 5 2 c6qf figs-doublet μηδὲ αἰσχροκερδῶς, ἀλλὰ προθύμως 1 The phrases **not greedily** and **eagerly** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Peter wants church leaders to eagerly take care of believers. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “with complete eagerness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1PE 5 3 lta9 figs-metaphor ὡς κατακυριεύοντες 1 And not as lording it over those who are allotted to you, but be examples Here Peter uses **lording it over** figuratively to refer to acting toward people in a harsh and controlling manner, as if someone were a harsh master who abuses his servants. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “harshly controlling” or “acting like harsh masters over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 5 3 lta9 figs-metaphor ὡς κατακυριεύοντες 1 And not as lording it over those who are allotted to you, but be examples Here Peter uses **lording it over** to refer to acting toward people in a harsh and controlling manner, as if someone were a harsh master who abuses his servants. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “harshly controlling” or “acting like harsh masters over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 3 xwr3 figs-abstractnouns τῶν κλήρων 1 those who are allotted to you If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **portion**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “those who are assigned to you” or “those whom God has apportioned to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 5 3 n485 figs-possession τύποι γινόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου 1 those who are allotted to you Peter is using the possessive form to describe **examples** that are for **the flock**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being examples for the flock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1PE 5 3 vg31 figs-metaphor τοῦ ποιμνίου 1 See how you translated **flock** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 4 oz14 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 when the Chief Shepherd has been revealed **And** here indicates that what follows is the result of obeying the commands that Peter gave in [verses 2–3](../05/02.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “As a result of doing these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1PE 5 4 pfjr figs-explicit τοῦ ἀρχιποίμενος 1 when the Chief Shepherd has been revealed **Chief Shepherd** is a title for Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Chief Shepherd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 5 4 td11 figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀρχιποίμενος 1 when the Chief Shepherd has been revealed Here Peter speaks of Jesus figuratively as if he were a **shepherd** who has authority over all the leaders of the assemblies of believers. Peter told those leaders to shepherd their flocks in [verse 2](../05/02.md). Since **Chief Shepherd** is an important title for Jesus that connects to some prophecies about the Messiah in the Old Testament, you should keep the metaphor in your translation or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who is like a lead shepherd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 5 4 td11 figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀρχιποίμενος 1 when the Chief Shepherd has been revealed Here Peter speaks of Jesus as if he were a **shepherd** who has authority over all the leaders of the assemblies of believers. Peter told those leaders to shepherd their flocks in [verse 2](../05/02.md). Since **Chief Shepherd** is an important title for Jesus that connects to some prophecies about the Messiah in the Old Testament, you should keep the metaphor in your translation or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who is like a lead shepherd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 4 qlek figs-activepassive φανερωθέντος τοῦ ἀρχιποίμενος 1 when the Chief Shepherd has been revealed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the Chief Shepherd appears” or “when God reveals the Chief Shepherd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 5 4 ll4r figs-metaphor τὸν ἀμαράντινον τῆς δόξης στέφανον 1 the unfading crown of glory Here,**crown** refers to a symbol of victory. It does not refer to the type of **crown** that kings wear. In ancient times an athlete would receive this **crown** as a reward for winning a competition. Those crowns were often made of leaves or flowers that would fade. Unlike those victory crowns, the reward that God gives will be **unfading**, which means that it will last forever. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a glorious reward that will last forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 4 c6h3 figs-possession τῆς δόξης στέφανον 1 crown of glory This could refer to: (1) a **crown** that is characterized by **glory**. Alternate translation: “glorious crown” (2) a **crown** that is the **glory** referred to in [verse 1](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “crown, that is, glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -459,17 +459,17 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 5 5 z13n figs-activepassive ὑποτάγητε 1 all of you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “subject yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 5 5 bjt6 figs-explicit πρεσβυτέροις 1 all of you See how you translated **elders** in [verse 1](../05/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 5 5 uh4n figs-explicit πάντες 1 all of you Here, **everyone** refers to all the believers to whom Peter is writing this letter, and not to all people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “every one of you believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 5 5 r6s6 figs-metaphor τὴν ταπεινοφροσύνην ἐγκομβώσασθε 1 clothe yourselves with humility Peter speaks of **humility** figuratively as if it were a piece of clothing that a person could put on. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “act with humility” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 5 5 r6s6 figs-metaphor τὴν ταπεινοφροσύνην ἐγκομβώσασθε 1 clothe yourselves with humility Peter speaks of **humility** as if it were a piece of clothing that a person could put on. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “act with humility” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 5 jr8h figs-abstractnouns τὴν ταπεινοφροσύνην 1 clothe yourselves with humility If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **humility**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with humble actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 5 5 v49g writing-quotations ὅτι 1 clothe yourselves with humility Here, **for** introduces a quotation from the Old Testament ([Proverbs 3:34](../pro/03/34.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “for it is as Solomon wrote in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1PE 5 5 r4gv figs-quotemarks ὁ Θεὸς ὑπερηφάνοις ἀντιτάσσεται, ταπεινοῖς δὲ δίδωσιν χάριν 1 clothe yourselves with humility This sentence is a quotation from [Proverbs 3:34](../pro/03/34.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 5 5 xgeg figs-abstractnouns δίδωσιν χάριν 1 clothe yourselves with humility If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “acts graciously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 5 6 bie6 figs-metonymy ὑπὸ τὴν κραταιὰν χεῖρα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 under the mighty hand of God Peter uses **hand** figuratively to refer to God’s power to save humble people and punish proud people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “under God’s great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 5 6 bie6 figs-metonymy ὑπὸ τὴν κραταιὰν χεῖρα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 under the mighty hand of God Peter uses **hand** to refer to God’s power to save humble people and punish proud people. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “under God’s great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 5 6 qwn9 figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς ὑψώσῃ 1 under the mighty hand of God Peter is using a spatial metaphor to describe God honoring someone as if God would **lift** that person **up**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God may show honor to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 5 7 c1uu figs-metaphor πᾶσαν τὴν μέριμναν ὑμῶν ἐπιρίψαντες ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 having cast all your anxiety on him Here Peter speaks of **anxiety** figuratively as if it were a heavy burden that a person can take off of his back and **cast** onto God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “trusting him with everything that worries you” or “letting him take care of all the things that trouble you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 5 7 c1uu figs-metaphor πᾶσαν τὴν μέριμναν ὑμῶν ἐπιρίψαντες ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 having cast all your anxiety on him Here Peter speaks of **anxiety** as if it were a heavy burden that a person can take off of his back and **cast** onto God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “trusting him with everything that worries you” or “letting him take care of all the things that trouble you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 8 wbb5 figs-doublet νήψατε, γρηγορήσατε 1 Be sober The words translated as **sober** and **watchful** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses them to emphasize that believers need to be alert since the devil wants to destroy them. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Be completely alert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 5 8 k9nt figs-metaphor νήψατε 1 Be sober See how you translated **sober** in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 5 8 tl7i figs-simile ὡς λέων ὠρυόμενος περιπατεῖ, ζητῶν τινα καταπιεῖν 1 the devil, is walking around like a roaring lion, seeking someone to devour Peter speaks of **the devil** figuratively as if he were a **roaring lion** who wants to **devour** people. Just as a hungry lion devours its prey, the devil is **seeking** to destroy the faith of believers. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is trying to find ways to destroy the faith of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +1PE 5 8 tl7i figs-simile ὡς λέων ὠρυόμενος περιπατεῖ, ζητῶν τινα καταπιεῖν 1 the devil, is walking around like a roaring lion, seeking someone to devour Peter speaks of **the devil** as if he were a **roaring lion** who wants to **devour** people. Just as a hungry lion devours its prey, the devil is **seeking** to destroy the faith of believers. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is trying to find ways to destroy the faith of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 5 9 v4t5 figs-ellipsis στερεοὶ τῇ πίστει 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “being firm in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 5 9 vwtc figs-abstractnouns τῇ πίστει 1 Here, **the faith** could refer to: (1) a person’s trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “in the faith that you have” (2) the Christian faith in general. Alternate translation: “in the Christian faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 5 9 tusy figs-abstractnouns τὰ αὐτὰ τῶν παθημάτων…ἐπιτελεῖσθαι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sufferings**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that people are suffering in the same ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -487,13 +487,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 5 12 dhvh figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοῦ 1 Through Silvanus … I wrote to you briefly Although **brother** is masculine and Silvanus is a man, here Peter is using **brother** in a generic sense to refer to another believer. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fellow Christian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1PE 5 12 ca38 writing-pronouns ταύτην 1 this is the true grace of God Here, **this** refers back to what Peter has written in this letter, especially the gospel message that the letter contains. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “what I have written to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1PE 5 12 g1t6 figs-metonymy ταύτην εἶναι ἀληθῆ χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 this is the true grace of God Here the word **grace** refers to the gospel message, which tells of the kind things that God has done for believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this letter I have written contains God’s true and gracious message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 5 12 cssm figs-metaphor εἰς ἣν στῆτε 1 Stand in it Peter uses **Stand** figuratively to refer to being strongly committed to something as if someone is standing firmly in one place and refusing to move. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Remain strongly committed to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 5 12 cssm figs-metaphor εἰς ἣν στῆτε 1 Stand in it Peter uses **Stand** to refer to being strongly committed to something as if someone is standing firmly in one place and refusing to move. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Remain strongly committed to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 12 nm72 writing-pronouns εἰς ἣν στῆτε 1 Stand in it Here, **it** refers to **the true grace of God** mentioned earlier in the verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Stand in this true grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1PE 5 13 muq7 writing-symlanguage ἡ ἐν Βαβυλῶνι συνεκλεκτὴ 1 She who is in Babylon **She** and **fellow-elect one** here both refer to the group of believers who were with Peter when he wrote this letter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This group of believers in Babylon, who are fellow-elect ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) 1PE 5 13 pzpw writing-symlanguage ἐν Βαβυλῶνι 1 Here, **Babylon** could mean: (1) the city of Rome. Alternate translation: “in Rome, which is like Babylon” (2) the city of Babylon, as it appears in the ULT. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) 1PE 5 13 rpf5 figs-activepassive συνεκλεκτὴ 1 chosen together with you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “one whom God has elected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 5 13 kc8s ἀσπάζεται 1 chosen together with you As was customary in this culture, Peter concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “asks to be remembered by” or “says hello to” -1PE 5 13 ws2x figs-metaphor ὁ υἱός μου 1 my son Peter refers to Mark figuratively as if he were his **son**, because he taught him about Christianity and loved him like a **son**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who is like my son” or “my spiritual son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 5 13 ws2x figs-metaphor ὁ υἱός μου 1 my son Peter refers to Mark as if he were his **son**, because he taught him about Christianity and loved him like a **son**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who is like my son” or “my spiritual son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 13 d9hx translate-names Μᾶρκος 1 **Mark** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1PE 5 14 jqd8 figs-imperative ἀσπάσασθε 1 **Greet** here is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. Alternate translation: “Make it your habit to greet” or “Make it your practice to greet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1PE 5 14 fc7b translate-symaction ἐν φιλήματι ἀγάπης 1 a kiss of love A **kiss** was an action that expressed Christian affection in this culture. It showed the unity of those who belong to Christ. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “with a loving kiss” or “a kiss to show your love for each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index be1e1bde65..29e9dacab6 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 3 zwdo figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, **us** refers to Peter and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 2PE 1 3 rtxn writing-pronouns τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **his** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “God’s divine power” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus, by his power as God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 1 3 xdrw figs-abstractnouns τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **power** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “God, because he can do anything,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 1 3 xz3s figs-personification τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ…δεδωρημένης 1 Peter is speaking figuratively of God’s **divine power** as if it were a living thing that could give something to people. God is the one who is giving, and he uses his **divine power** to do so. Alternate translation: “God has used his divine power to give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +2PE 1 3 xz3s figs-personification τῆς θείας δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ…δεδωρημένης 1 Peter is speaking of God’s **divine power** as if it were a living thing that could give something to people. God is the one who is giving, and he uses his **divine power** to do so. Alternate translation: “God has used his divine power to give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2PE 1 3 x8qv grammar-connect-logic-goal πρὸς ζωὴν καὶ εὐσέβειαν 1 Here, the word **for** indicates the purpose for which God has given all these things to believers. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of life and godliness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 2PE 1 3 epx9 figs-hendiadys πρὸς ζωὴν καὶ εὐσέβειαν 1 for life and godliness Here, **godliness** describes the word **life**. Alternate translation: “for a godly life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 2PE 1 3 xr1r figs-abstractnouns εὐσέβειαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **godliness** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “acting honorably toward God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 4 f42f διὰ τούτων 1 The word **through** here indicates the means by which you might be sharers of the divine nature. Alternate translation: “by means of them” 2PE 1 4 umh8 writing-pronouns διὰ τούτων 1 Here the pronoun **them** refers back to the precious and great promises of the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “through these promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 1 4 yk7g figs-abstractnouns θείας…φύσεως 1 The abstract noun **nature** refers to the inherent features of something or what it is like. Alternate translation: “of what God is like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 1 4 p2yj figs-metaphor ἀποφυγόντες τῆς…φθορᾶς 1 Peter speaks figuratively of people not suffering from the **corruption** that wicked desires cause as if they had **escaped** from that corruption. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a non-figurative expression. Alternate translation: “no longer being corrupted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 1 4 p2yj figs-metaphor ἀποφυγόντες τῆς…φθορᾶς 1 Peter speaks of people not suffering from the **corruption** that wicked desires cause as if they had **escaped** from that corruption. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a non-figurative expression. Alternate translation: “no longer being corrupted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 4 xxuj figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 Here, **the world** could mean: (1) the place where we all live, where we are surrounded by sinful people and temptations to sin. Alternate translation: “that is all around us” (2) the system of values that people share who do not honor God. Alternate translation: “of the world’s ungodly value system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2PE 1 4 wnec ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ 1 Here, **by** indicates the means by which the world became corrupt. It does not indicate the means by which Peter’s addressees escaped corruption. Alternate translation: “by means of lust” 2PE 1 4 kjnh figs-abstractnouns φθορᾶς 1 corruption If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **corruption** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “things that corrupt you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 9 xenf figs-hendiadys τυφλός ἐστιν μυωπάζων 1 Although the words **blind** and **nearsighted** have similar meanings, **blind** is more extreme than **nearsighted,** and a person cannot be both at the same time. If it is confusing in your language to describe someone using both of these words in this way, you could use a word like “or” between them or show how they might work together. Alternate translation: “he … is blind or nearsighted” or “he … is blindly nearsighted” or “he … is so nearsighted that he is blind to what is spiritually important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 2PE 1 9 i0hq figs-abstractnouns λήθην λαβὼν τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **forgetfulness** in this phrase with a verb. Alternate translation: “having forgotten the cleansing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 1 9 gq4d figs-abstractnouns τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ τῶν πάλαι αὐτοῦ ἁμαρτιῶν 1 of the cleansing from his past sins If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **cleansing** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “that God has cleansed him from his old sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 1 9 gopx figs-metaphor τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ τῶν πάλαι αὐτοῦ ἁμαρτιῶν. 1 Peter is speaking figuratively of forgiving sin as if sin were something that made people dirty and thus required **cleansing** from God. Alternate translation: “of the forgiving of his past sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 1 9 gopx figs-metaphor τοῦ καθαρισμοῦ τῶν πάλαι αὐτοῦ ἁμαρτιῶν. 1 Peter is speaking of forgiving sin as if sin were something that made people dirty and thus required **cleansing** from God. Alternate translation: “of the forgiving of his past sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 10 ob38 grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Peter uses **Therefore** to introduce a description of what his readers should do as a result of what he has just said. He is referring specifically to the two reasons for obedience given in [1:8–9](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “Because of these reasons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 1 10 xfdb figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Peter is using the term **brothers** as a way to directly address his fellow believers in Jesus. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 10 ot7y figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Peter is using the term **brothers** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Be sure that this is clear in your translation so that your readers do not get the impression that Peter is addressing only men. If you use a non-figurative word such as “believers” to translate the metaphor **brothers**, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you retain the metaphor, you could state “my brothers and sisters.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -94,13 +94,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 12 du69 grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Connecting Statement: Peter uses **Therefore** to introduce the purpose of his letter. In order to encourage his readers to do everything he has said in [1:5–10](../01/05.md), and especially because of the promise in [1:11](../01/11.md), he wants to keep reminding them about these things. Use a natural form in your language to show that this introduces a result or purpose for saying what came before. Alternate translation: “Because these things are very important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 1 12 xxjq writing-pronouns τούτων 1 Here, **these {things}** refers back to what Peter has stated in the previous verses, specifically to faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 1 12 onqh figs-activepassive ἐστηριγμένους ἐν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you learned well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2PE 1 12 l2kh figs-metaphor ἐστηριγμένους ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ 1 you are strong in the present truth Here, **established** is used figuratively to refer to one being firmly committed to something. Alternate translation: “you strongly believe the truth that you now have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 1 12 l2kh figs-metaphor ἐστηριγμένους ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ 1 you are strong in the present truth Here, **established** is used to refer to one being firmly committed to something. Alternate translation: “you strongly believe the truth that you now have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 12 jys8 ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ 1 Here, **in** has the meaning of “in reference to” or “with regard to.” Alternate translation: “in reference to the present truth” -2PE 1 12 pqq2 figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ 1 Here, **present** is used figuratively as if **truth** were an object that could be there with Peter’s audience. Here it does not refer to present time. Alternate translation: “in the truth that you have” or “in the truth that is with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 1 12 pqq2 figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ 1 Here, **present** is used as if **truth** were an object that could be there with Peter’s audience. Here it does not refer to present time. Alternate translation: “in the truth that you have” or “in the truth that is with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 12 yy7r figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ παρούσῃ ἀληθείᾳ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective, such as “true.” Alternate translation: “in these true teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 1 13 p1da grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 **But** could mean: (1) Peter is contrasting what he just said in the previous verse with what he is about to say. His audience already knows the truth, but he wants to remind them again. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “Nevertheless.” (2) Peter is connecting this statement with what he said at the beginning of the previous verse. Peter is always ready to remind them of the truth, and he thinks it is correct to do so. Alternate translation: “And” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2PE 1 13 ax2a figs-metaphor ἐφ’ ὅσον εἰμὶ ἐν τούτῳ τῷ σκηνώματι 1 as long as I am in this tent Peter speaks of his body as if it were a **tent** that he is wearing and will take off. Being in his body represents being alive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “as long as I am in this body” or “as long as I live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2PE 1 13 vmj2 figs-metaphor διεγείρειν ὑμᾶς ἐν ὑπομνήσει 1 to stir you up in remembrance Peter uses **arouse** figuratively to refer to causing his readers to think about these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this usage by translating this with a non-figurative expression. Alternate translation: “to remind you of these things so that you will think about them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 1 13 vmj2 figs-metaphor διεγείρειν ὑμᾶς ἐν ὑπομνήσει 1 to stir you up in remembrance Peter uses **arouse** to refer to causing his readers to think about these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this usage by translating this with a non-figurative expression. Alternate translation: “to remind you of these things so that you will think about them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 13 q0sv figs-abstractnouns διεγείρειν ὑμᾶς ἐν ὑπομνήσει 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **remembrance** in this phrase with the verb “remind.” Alternate translation: “to remind you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 1 14 slej grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδὼς 1 In this clause Peter is giving a reason why he will always remind his audience of doctrinal truths in this letter, specifically faith, goodness, knowledge, self-control, endurance, godliness, brotherly affection, and love, which Peter mentioned in [1:5–7](../01/05.md). Alternate translation: “This is because I know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 1 14 j8f5 figs-metaphor ταχινή ἐστιν ἡ ἀπόθεσις τοῦ σκηνώματός μου 1 the putting off of my tent is imminent Peter speaks of his body as if it were a **tent** that he is wearing and will take off. Being in his body represents being alive, and taking it off represents dying. Alternate translation: “I will soon take off this body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -134,12 +134,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 18 daqi figs-explicit τῷ ἁγίῳ ὄρει 1 The **mountain** Peter refers to is the mountain on which Jesus was powerfully transformed in the event known as the “transfiguration.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this information explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the holy mountain on which Jesus was powerfully transformed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 1 19 h498 ἔχομεν βεβαιότερον τὸν προφητικὸν λόγον 1 The word translated as **very certain** could refer to: (1) something that is extremely reliable. In this case, Peter is saying in [1:18–19](../01/18.md) that we have two reliable witnesses to Jesus’ glory: God’s own voice speaking on the mountain of transfiguration and the extremely reliable prophetic scriptures. Alternate translation: “We also have the most reliable prophetic word” (2) something that is confirmed by something else. In this case, Peter is saying that God’s voice on the mountain confirms, or makes even more trustworthy, the prophetic scripture that we already trusted completely. Alternate translation: “we have the prophetic word confirmed” 2PE 1 19 z3na figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 we have Here, **we** refers to all believers, including Peter and his readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -2PE 1 19 l7zq figs-explicit βεβαιότερον τὸν προφητικὸν λόγον 1 this more certain prophetic word Peter uses the phrase **prophetic word** to refer figuratively to the entire Old Testament. It does not refer only to those Old Testament books called “the Prophets,” nor only to the predictive prophecies within the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures, which the prophets spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2PE 1 19 l7zq figs-explicit βεβαιότερον τὸν προφητικὸν λόγον 1 this more certain prophetic word Peter uses the phrase **prophetic word** to refer to the entire Old Testament. It does not refer only to those Old Testament books called “the Prophets,” nor only to the predictive prophecies within the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures, which the prophets spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 1 19 sjd3 figs-pronouns ᾧ καλῶς ποιεῖτε προσέχοντες 1 to which you do well to pay attention Here the relative pronoun **which** refers to the prophetic word mentioned in the previous phrase. Peter instructs the believers to pay close attention to the prophetic message, which is the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]]) 2PE 1 19 xilf figs-declarative ᾧ καλῶς ποιεῖτε προσέχοντες 1 Peter uses the statement **you do well** to tell his audience that they should pay attention to the Old Testament Scriptures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase by translating this phrase as a suggestion or command. Alternate translation: “to which you should pay attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) 2PE 1 19 xt8i figs-simile ὡς λύχνῳ φαίνοντι ἐν αὐχμηρῷ τόπῳ 1 as to a lamp shining in a dark place, until the day may dawn Peter compares the prophetic word to a **lamp** that gives light in the darkness. Just as a lamp gives light in order for someone to see in **a dark place**, so the prophetic word gives believers guidance for how to live properly in this sin-filled world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this simile in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “a guide for you to know how to live in this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -2PE 1 19 hmb7 figs-metaphor ἕως οὗ ἡμέρα διαυγάσῃ 1 Peter speaks figuratively of Christ’s second coming by calling it the new **day** that comes in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “until the day Christ returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2PE 1 19 kc3l figs-metaphor φωσφόρος ἀνατείλῃ ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 the morning star may rise in your hearts Peter speaks figuratively of Christ as the **morning star**, which is a star that indicates daybreak and the end of the night. Christ will **rise** by bringing light into the hearts of believers, ending all doubt and bringing full understanding of who he is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way or change the metaphor to a simile. Alternate translation: “Christ brings full understanding to you like the morning star shines its light into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 1 19 hmb7 figs-metaphor ἕως οὗ ἡμέρα διαυγάσῃ 1 Peter speaks of Christ’s second coming by calling it the new **day** that comes in the morning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “until the day Christ returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 1 19 kc3l figs-metaphor φωσφόρος ἀνατείλῃ ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 the morning star may rise in your hearts Peter speaks of Christ as the **morning star**, which is a star that indicates daybreak and the end of the night. Christ will **rise** by bringing light into the hearts of believers, ending all doubt and bringing full understanding of who he is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way or change the metaphor to a simile. Alternate translation: “Christ brings full understanding to you like the morning star shines its light into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 19 v0ju figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 in your hearts Here, **hearts** is a metonym for people’s minds. Alternate translation: “in your minds” or “to help you understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2PE 1 19 bl8s figs-explicit φωσφόρος 1 the morning star The **morning star** refers to the planet Venus, which is sometimes visible in the sky just before the sun rises, thus indicating that daybreak is near. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make this information more explicit. Alternate translation: “the star that appears just before the sun rises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 1 20 wcn9 τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες 1 Above all, you must understand Peter uses **first** here to refer to the degree of importance. It does not to refer to order in time. Alternate translation: “Most importantly, you must understand” @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 21 evx4 figs-activepassive οὐ…θελήματι ἀνθρώπου ἠνέχθη προφητεία ποτέ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “no prophet ever prophesied by the will of man” or “the will of man never produced any prophecy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 1 21 yxdx figs-abstractnouns οὐ…θελήματι ἀνθρώπου ἠνέχθη προφητεία ποτέ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **will** with a verbal phrase, such as “what a man desires.” Alternate translation: “no prophecy was ever made according to what a man desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 1 21 x2hv figs-gendernotations θελήματι ἀνθρώπου 1 Peter is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “by human desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2PE 1 21 mh2s figs-metaphor ὑπὸ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου φερόμενοι, ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 1 men spoke from God being carried along by the Holy Spirit Peter speaks figuratively of the **Holy Spirit** helping the prophets to write what God wanted them to write as if the Holy Spirit **carried** them from one place to another. Alternate translation: “men spoke from God by the Holy Spirit directing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 1 21 mh2s figs-metaphor ὑπὸ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου φερόμενοι, ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 1 men spoke from God being carried along by the Holy Spirit Peter speaks of the **Holy Spirit** helping the prophets to write what God wanted them to write as if the Holy Spirit **carried** them from one place to another. Alternate translation: “men spoke from God by the Holy Spirit directing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 21 x1xw figs-ellipsis ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 In this phrase, Peter is leaving out a word that it would need in many languages in order to be complete. If this word is required in your language, it can be supplied from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “spoke prophecy from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2PE 2 intro mv79 0 # 2 Peter 2 General Notes


## Structure and formatting


1. Prediction of false teachers (2:1–3)
1. Examples of divine judgment (2:4–10a)
1. Description and denunciation of false teachers (2:10b–22)

Peter continues this letter in [2:1–3](../02/01.md) by predicting that false teachers will try to deceive the believers, just as false prophets did during the time true prophets were writing the Old Testament. Then in [2:4–10a](../02/04.md) Peter describes examples of God punishing those who acted similarly to the coming false teachers. Peter then closes this section in [2:10b–22](../02/10.md) by describing the wicked character and deeds of these false teachers.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh

“Flesh” is a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. It is not the physical part of man that is sinful. “Flesh” represents the human nature that rejects all things godly and desires what is sinful. This is the condition of all humans before they receive the Holy Spirit by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### Implicit information

There are several analogies in [2:4–8](../02/04.md) that are difficult to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. Further explanation may be necessary. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 1 us8u grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 The term translated **Now** could refer to: (1) a new topic expressed by **Now** in the ULT. (2) a contrast between the false prophets in this clause and the true Old Testament prophets mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -160,19 +160,19 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 1 jif2 figs-possession αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe an opinion that is characterized by **destruction**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the adjective “destructive” instead of the noun “destruction.” Alternate translation: “destructive heresies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2PE 2 1 wnuv αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας 1 Here, **destruction** could refer to: (1) the eternal damnation of those who teach or accept these **heresies**. Alternate translation: “heresies that result in their eternal damnation” (2) the destruction of the faith of those who teach or accept these **heresies**. Alternate translation: “heresies that destroy their faith in the Messiah” 2PE 2 1 xscu figs-explicit τὸν ἀγοράσαντα αὐτοὺς Δεσπότην 1 the master Here, **master** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “master Jesus who bought them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2PE 2 1 g99z figs-metaphor τὸν ἀγοράσαντα αὐτοὺς Δεσπότην 1 the master who bought them Peter uses the phrase **master who bought** to speak figuratively of Jesus as the owner of the people he has saved from damnation by paying the penalty for their sins with his death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Jesus who saved them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 1 g99z figs-metaphor τὸν ἀγοράσαντα αὐτοὺς Δεσπότην 1 the master who bought them Peter uses the phrase **master who bought** to speak of Jesus as the owner of the people he has saved from damnation by paying the penalty for their sins with his death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Jesus who saved them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 1 xaan grammar-connect-logic-result ἐπάγοντες ἑαυτοῖς ταχινὴν ἀπώλειαν 1 Here, **bringing** indicates that this clause is the result of the deeds of the false teachers described in the previous clauses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make a new sentence here and state this connection plainly. Alternate translation: “As a result, they are bringing swift destruction on themselves.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 2 1 xk1x ταχινὴν ἀπώλειαν 1 Here,**swift** could mean: (1) their destruction will come soon. Alternate translation: “destruction that will happen soon” or “imminent destruction” (2) their destruction will be sudden or quick. Alternate translation: “quick destruction” 2PE 2 1 flv3 figs-abstractnouns ἐπάγοντες ἑαυτοῖς ταχινὴν ἀπώλειαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verb, such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “they are causing themselves to be destroyed soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 2 eevb figs-explicit πολλοὶ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly, as the UST does, that this refers to people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2PE 2 2 xzw1 figs-metaphor ἐξακολουθήσουσιν 1 Here Peter uses the word **follow** figuratively to refer to someone imitating the actions of someone else, like someone who walks behind another person in the same direction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “will imitate their licentious acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 2 xzw1 figs-metaphor ἐξακολουθήσουσιν 1 Here Peter uses the word **follow** to refer to someone imitating the actions of someone else, like someone who walks behind another person in the same direction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “will imitate their licentious acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 2 dg82 writing-pronouns αὐτῶν ταῖς ἀσελγείαις 1 Here the pronoun **their** refers to the false teachers introduced in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the licentious acts of these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 2 z53e ταῖς ἀσελγείαις 1 Here, **licentious acts** refers to immoral sexual actions that demonstrate a lack of self-control. Alternate translation: “uncontrolled sensual acts” 2PE 2 2 fz5m writing-pronouns δι’ οὓς 1 Here, **whom** refers to the false teachers. It does not refer to the licentious acts in the previous clause. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly, as the UST does, that this refers to the false teachers. Alternate translation: “through these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2PE 2 2 cqjb figs-metaphor ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Peter uses the phrase **the way of truth** here figuratively to refer to the Christian faith or how a Christian person lives his or her life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “the true Christian manner of living” or “the true Christian faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 2 cqjb figs-metaphor ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Peter uses the phrase **the way of truth** here to refer to the Christian faith or how a Christian person lives his or her life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “the true Christian manner of living” or “the true Christian faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 2 vspm figs-possession ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **the way** that is characterized by **truth**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the adjective “true” instead of the noun “truth.” Alternate translation: “the true way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2PE 2 2 nzx7 figs-activepassive ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ἀληθείας βλασφημηθήσεται 1 the way of truth will be slandered If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form and say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “unbelievers will slander the way of truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2PE 2 2 x3oo figs-personification ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ἀληθείας βλασφημηθήσεται 1 Peter speaks figuratively of **the way of truth** as if it were a person who could be **slandered** or shown disrespect. Alternate translation: “they will say bad things about the way of truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +2PE 2 2 x3oo figs-personification ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ἀληθείας βλασφημηθήσεται 1 Peter speaks of **the way of truth** as if it were a person who could be **slandered** or shown disrespect. Alternate translation: “they will say bad things about the way of truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2PE 2 2 l8ta figs-explicit ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ἀληθείας βλασφημηθήσεται 1 Peter assumes that his audience will know that unbelievers will be the ones who slander the Christian faith when they see the sensual lives of the false teachers and their followers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the way of truth will be slandered by unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 3 xs4g ἐν πλεονεξίᾳ 1 Here, **in** indicates the reason for what the false teachers do. Alternate translation: “because of greed” 2PE 2 3 td8q figs-abstractnouns ἐν πλεονεξίᾳ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **greed** by translating the idea behind it with an adjective, such as “greedy.” Alternate translation: “because they are greedy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 3 xvw3 οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ 1 Here, **for whom** indicates that the condemnation is directed again the false teachers. Alternate translation: “against whom condemnation from long ago is not idle” 2PE 2 3 k359 figs-parallelism οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 their condemnation from long ago is not idle, and their destruction does not sleep These two long phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that the false teachers will certainly be condemned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “their destruction from long ago is certain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 2PE 2 3 jetw figs-doublenegatives οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 whose condemnation from long ago is not idle, and their destruction does not sleep You can translate these phrases with verbs in positive terms. Alternate translation: “their condemnation from long ago is active, and their destruction is awake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -2PE 2 3 jvh9 figs-personification τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 Peter speaks of **condemnation** and **destruction** figuratively as if they are people who can be **idle** or **sleep**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “condemnation from long ago is not ineffective, and their destruction is not delayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +2PE 2 3 jvh9 figs-personification τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 Peter speaks of **condemnation** and **destruction** as if they are people who can be **idle** or **sleep**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “condemnation from long ago is not ineffective, and their destruction is not delayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2PE 2 3 c57u figs-abstractnouns οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 their condemnation has not been idle, and their destruction is not asleep If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns “condemnation” and “destruction” by stating the ideas behind them with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “they are not idly condemned from long ago, and they will not be destroyed too late” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 4 k2g4 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** indicates here that Peter is giving the reason for the result he implicitly described in the previous verse. He is saying why the destruction of the false teachers is certain. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 2 4 s115 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **if** indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since God did not spare the angels who had sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) @@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 4 uzy2 figs-metaphor σειροῖς ζόφου 1 in chains of darkness This phrase could refer to: (1) chains in a very dark place. Alternate translation: “in chains in darkness” (2) a very deep darkness that imprisons them like chains. Alternate translation: “bound in darkness like chains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 4 b54v translate-names ταρταρώσας 1 having been thrown down to Tartarus The word **Tartarus** is a term from Ancient Greek religion that refers to the place where evil spirits and wicked men who have died are punished. Some Ancient Jewish literature written in Greek uses **Tartarus** as a term for the place where God punishes the wicked. Alternate translation: “he cast them into hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2PE 2 4 xgmp figs-explicit παρέδωκεν 1 God is the one who **handed over** the angels who had sinned. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that explicit in your translation. Alternate translation: “God handed over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2PE 2 4 jjzw figs-metaphor παρέδωκεν 1 Here, Peter speaks figuratively of God imprisoning the angels who sinned like someone who has **handed over** a criminal to the prison guards for imprisonment. Alternate translation: “imprisoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 4 jjzw figs-metaphor παρέδωκεν 1 Here, Peter speaks of God imprisoning the angels who sinned like someone who has **handed over** a criminal to the prison guards for imprisonment. Alternate translation: “imprisoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 4 c2ak grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς κρίσιν 1 to judgment This phrase gives the purpose or goal for which the sinning angels are being held in captivity. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 2PE 2 4 plhp figs-abstractnouns εἰς κρίσιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **judgment** by translating it with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “to be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 4 e0ue figs-explicit εἰς κρίσιν τηρουμένους 1 This phrase refers to the sinful angels mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those sinful angels who are being kept for judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -243,8 +243,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 9 ms6u εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως 1 Here, **in** could refer to: (1) when the unrighteous ones will be punished. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (2) the point in time up to which the unrighteous ones will be punished. Alternate translation: “until the day of judgment” 2PE 2 9 xnf3 figs-possession ἡμέραν κρίσεως 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe a **day** that is characterized by **judgment**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “the day when God judges mankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2PE 2 10 skh8 grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **but** indicates a connection between the last clause of the previous verse and what follows. It does not indicate a contrast between “the unrighteous” in the previous verse and “those going after the flesh” in this verse. Alternate translation: “and especially those going after the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -2PE 2 10 xuxw figs-metaphor τοὺς ὀπίσω…πορευομένους 1 Connecting Statement: Peter uses the phrase **going after** figuratively to refer to habitually doing something. This expression is frequently used in the Bible to describe people worshiping false gods or engaging in sexual immorality. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “those habitually engaging in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2PE 2 10 eb1k figs-metonymy σαρκὸς 1 those who go after the flesh in its lusts of defilement Here, **flesh** is used figuratively to refer to person’s sinful nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this figure of speech literally. Alternate translation: “their sinful nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2PE 2 10 xuxw figs-metaphor τοὺς ὀπίσω…πορευομένους 1 Connecting Statement: Peter uses the phrase **going after** to refer to habitually doing something. This expression is frequently used in the Bible to describe people worshiping false gods or engaging in sexual immorality. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “those habitually engaging in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 10 eb1k figs-metonymy σαρκὸς 1 those who go after the flesh in its lusts of defilement Here, **flesh** is used to refer to person’s sinful nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this figure of speech literally. Alternate translation: “their sinful nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2PE 2 10 xg5a ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ μιασμοῦ 1 those who go after the flesh in its lusts of defilement Here, **in** indicates that this phrase shows the means by which the wicked people go after the flesh. Alternate translation: “by means of practicing its lusts of defilement” 2PE 2 10 xndv figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ μιασμοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **defilement** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “in its lusts that defile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 10 c571 grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ κυριότητος καταφρονοῦντας 1 Here, **and** indicates that this clause provides an additional characteristic of those mentioned in the previous clause. It does not indicate a second group of wicked people. These wicked people not only pursue their sinful desires, but also despise authority. Alternate translation: “and who also despise authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 12 h4v8 καὶ φθαρήσονται 1 Here, **also** is used for emphasis and may be translated as “indeed” or “surely.” Alternate translation: “they will indeed be destroyed” or “they will surely be destroyed” 2PE 2 12 ai6a ἐν τῇ φθορᾷ αὐτῶν 1 This clause indicates the time when the false teachers will be destroyed. Alternate translation: “at the time of their destruction” 2PE 2 12 ig4v figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ φθορᾷ αὐτῶν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verb, such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “when they are destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 2 13 p7g7 figs-metaphor ἀδικούμενοι μισθὸν ἀδικίας 1 Peter speaks of the punishment that the false teachers will receive figuratively as if it were a wage they had earned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “receiving the punishment they deserve for their unrighteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 13 p7g7 figs-metaphor ἀδικούμενοι μισθὸν ἀδικίας 1 Peter speaks of the punishment that the false teachers will receive as if it were a wage they had earned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “receiving the punishment they deserve for their unrighteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 13 x4gd figs-abstractnouns ἀδικίας 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **unrighteousness** by translating it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “of the wrong things they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 13 xjr6 figs-abstractnouns ἡδονὴν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **pleasure** by translating it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “something that pleases” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 13 e62s figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ τρυφήν 1 their reveling during the day Here, **reveling** refers to immoral activity that includes gluttony, drunkenness, and sexual activity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this abstract noun by translating it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “their ability to revel in the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -281,24 +281,24 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 13 pwd5 figs-doublet σπίλοι καὶ μῶμοι 1 They are stains and blemishes The words **stains** and **blemishes** share similar meanings. Peter is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate them with a single expression. Alternate translation: “unsightly stains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2PE 2 13 vz0j figs-ellipsis σπίλοι καὶ μῶμοι 1 For emphasis, here Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the context. Alternate translation: “They are stains and blemishes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2PE 2 13 x3uj figs-abstractnouns ἐντρυφῶντες ἐν ταῖς ἀπάταις αὐτῶν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **deceptions** with an adjective like “deceptive.” Alternate translation: “reveling in their deceptive deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 2 14 v7t4 figs-metonymy ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες μεστοὺς μοιχαλίδος 1 having eyes full of adultery Here, **eyes** refers figuratively to a person’s desires, and **eyes full** means that a person constantly desires one thing. Alternate translation: “constantly desiring an adulteress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2PE 2 14 v7t4 figs-metonymy ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες μεστοὺς μοιχαλίδος 1 having eyes full of adultery Here, **eyes** refers to a person’s desires, and **eyes full** means that a person constantly desires one thing. Alternate translation: “constantly desiring an adulteress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2PE 2 14 xo71 ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχοντες μεστοὺς μοιχαλίδος 1 This clause could mean: (1) the false teachers constantly desired to have immoral sexual relations with any woman they saw, thereby viewing every women as a potential adulteress. Alternate translation: “constantly desiring women with whom to commit adultery” (2) the false teachers were constantly looking for immoral women with whom to have immoral sexual relations. Alternate translation: “constantly seeking sexually immoral women” 2PE 2 14 xb2q figs-explicit δελεάζοντες ψυχὰς ἀστηρίκτους 1 This clause refers to the actions of the false teachers Peter introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers entice unstable souls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 14 wt89 figs-synecdoche δελεάζοντες ψυχὰς ἀστηρίκτους 1 enticing unstable souls Here, **souls** refers to persons. Alternate translation: “enticing unstable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 2PE 2 14 mn07 figs-explicit καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας ἔχοντες 1 This clause refers to the actions of the false teachers Peter introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they have hearts trained in covetousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 14 xgkb figs-activepassive καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας ἔχοντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “they trained their hearts to be covetous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2PE 2 14 c55u figs-metonymy καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας ἔχοντες 1 hearts trained in covetousness Peter is using **hearts** figuratively to refer to whole persons, including their thoughts, desires, and emotions. The term can thus be translated here with the reflexive pronoun “themselves.” Alternate translation: “having trained themselves to covet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2PE 2 14 c55u figs-metonymy καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας ἔχοντες 1 hearts trained in covetousness Peter is using **hearts** to refer to whole persons, including their thoughts, desires, and emotions. The term can thus be translated here with the reflexive pronoun “themselves.” Alternate translation: “having trained themselves to covet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2PE 2 14 sbp2 figs-abstractnouns καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας ἔχοντες 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **covetousness** with a verb. Alternate translation: “having training their hearts to covet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 14 sv4r figs-idiom κατάρας τέκνα 1 Peter is using a Hebrew idiom in which a person is said to be a “child” of the thing that characterizes that person. Here **children of cursing** refers to people who are cursed by God. He is not speaking of people who curse others. Alternate translation: “accursed people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2PE 2 14 c7cc figs-exclamations κατάρας τέκνα 1 These words are an exclamation that emphasizes the wickedness of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “They are such cursed children!” or “What cursed children they are!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) -2PE 2 15 et62 figs-metaphor καταλειπόντες εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν 1 abandoning the right way, led astray, having followed Peter uses the metaphor **Abandoning the straight way** to give an image of walkers leaving a certain pathway. He speaks figuratively of the false teachers refusing to live their lives in obedience to the Lord as if they had stopped walking on the Lord’s path. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “refusing to live in obedience to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 15 et62 figs-metaphor καταλειπόντες εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν 1 abandoning the right way, led astray, having followed Peter uses the metaphor **Abandoning the straight way** to give an image of walkers leaving a certain pathway. He speaks of the false teachers refusing to live their lives in obedience to the Lord as if they had stopped walking on the Lord’s path. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “refusing to live in obedience to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 15 ky5q figs-idiom εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν 1 the right way Here, **the straight way** refers to the way of living life that is right and pleasing to the Lord. Peter may also be using it here to refer specifically to the Christian faith, similar to his use of “the way of truth” in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “the right way of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2PE 2 15 x3k9 figs-metaphor ἐπλανήθησαν 1 Here, Peter continues the path metaphor from the previous clause. He figuratively describes the wicked lifestyles of the false teachers as if they had been **led astray** from the straight path. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “they have been behaving wickedly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 15 x3k9 figs-metaphor ἐπλανήθησαν 1 Here, Peter continues the path metaphor from the previous clause. He describes the wicked lifestyles of the false teachers as if they had been **led astray** from the straight path. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “they have been behaving wickedly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 15 b39g figs-activepassive ἐπλανήθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they went astray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 2 15 xkt6 figs-explicit ἐξακολουθήσαντες τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ, ὃς μισθὸν ἀδικίας ἠγάπησεν 1 In this verse, Peter compares the false teachers to **Balaam**. Peter assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to a story recorded in the Old Testament book of Numbers. In that story, Balaam was hired by wicked kings to curse the Israelites. When God did not allow Balaam to do so, he used wicked women to seduce the Israelites into sexual immorality and idol worship so that God would punish them for their disobedience. Balaam did these wicked things because he wanted to be paid by the wicked kings, but he was eventually killed by the Israelites when they conquered the land of Canaan. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation, as a statement: “following the way of Balaam son of Bosor, who loved the wages of unrighteousness so much that he led the Israelites into immorality and idolatry in order to receive money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2PE 2 15 xi4q figs-metaphor ἐξακολουθήσαντες τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ 1 Here, Peter uses the word **followed** figuratively to refer to someone imitating the actions of someone else, like someone who walks behind another person in the same direction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “having imitated the way of Balaam son of Bosor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 15 xi4q figs-metaphor ἐξακολουθήσαντες τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ 1 Here, Peter uses the word **followed** to refer to someone imitating the actions of someone else, like someone who walks behind another person in the same direction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “having imitated the way of Balaam son of Bosor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 15 v9lx translate-names Βαλαὰμ…Βοσὸρ 1 the right way **Balaam** and **Bosor** are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2PE 2 15 alxl figs-metaphor τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ 1 Here, Peter uses **the way of Balaam** figuratively to refer to how Balaam lived his life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “the manner of living of Balaam son of Bosor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 15 alxl figs-metaphor τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ 1 Here, Peter uses **the way of Balaam** to refer to how Balaam lived his life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “the manner of living of Balaam son of Bosor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 15 v3wn writing-pronouns ὃς μισθὸν ἀδικίας ἠγάπησεν 1 Here, the pronoun**who** refers to Balaam. It does not refer to Bosor, nor to the false teachers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this directly. If you begin a new sentence, you will have to replace the comma with a period. Alternate translation: “Balaam loved the wages of unrighteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 15 befr figs-possession ὃς μισθὸν ἀδικίας ἠγάπησεν 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **wages** that are characterized by **unrighteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “who loved the unrighteous wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2PE 2 15 x5gg figs-abstractnouns μισθὸν ἀδικίας 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with the adjective “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “the unrighteous wages” or “the wages for unrighteous acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -308,44 +308,44 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 16 xspp figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ προφήτου παραφρονίαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **irrationality** with an adjective like “irrational” or “foolish.” Alternate translation: “the irrational action of the prophet” or “the foolish action of the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 16 tf38 figs-explicit ἐκώλυσεν τὴν τοῦ προφήτου παραφρονίαν 1 restrained the madness of the prophet Here, **the prophet** refers to Balaam. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “restrained the madness of the prophet Balaam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 17 x5rj writing-pronouns οὗτοί 1 **These men** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2PE 2 17 t137 figs-metaphor οὗτοί εἰσιν πηγαὶ ἄνυδροι 1 These men are springs without water Peter speaks figuratively of the false teachers to describe their uselessness. People expect **springs** to provide water to quench thirst, but **waterless springs** leave thirsty people disappointed. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative way or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternate translation: “These men are disappointing, like springs without water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 17 t137 figs-metaphor οὗτοί εἰσιν πηγαὶ ἄνυδροι 1 These men are springs without water Peter speaks of the false teachers to describe their uselessness. People expect **springs** to provide water to quench thirst, but **waterless springs** leave thirsty people disappointed. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative way or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternate translation: “These men are disappointing, like springs without water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 17 hzu1 figs-metaphor ὁμίχλαι ὑπὸ λαίλαπος ἐλαυνόμεναι 1 mists driven by a storm Peter gives a second figurative description of the uselessness of the false teachers. When people see storm clouds, they expect rain to fall. When the winds from the **storm** blow the clouds away before the rain can fall, the people are disappointed. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative way, or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternate translation: “they never give what they promise” or “they are disappointing like rain clouds that the storm drives away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 17 von6 figs-doublet οὗτοί εἰσιν πηγαὶ ἄνυδροι, καὶ ὁμίχλαι ὑπὸ λαίλαπος ἐλαυνόμεναι 1 mists driven by a storm These two metaphors mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by translating them with a single expression. Alternate translation: “These are men who surely never give what they promise” or “These are men who surely disappoint” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2PE 2 17 xe3y figs-activepassive οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους τετήρηται 1 for whom the gloom of darkness has been reserved If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “for whom God has reserved the gloom of darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 2 17 v90z ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους 1 This could mean: (1) the **gloom** is characterized by **darkness**. Alternate translation: “the dark gloom” (2) the **gloom** is identical to the **darkness**. Alternate translation: “the gloom, which is darkness.” -2PE 2 17 xrpf figs-metaphor ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους 1 Here, Peter uses **gloom** and **darkness** figuratively to refer to hell. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this directly. Alternate translation: “for whom God has reserved the gloom of darkness of hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 17 xrpf figs-metaphor ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους 1 Here, Peter uses **gloom** and **darkness** to refer to hell. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this directly. Alternate translation: “for whom God has reserved the gloom of darkness of hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 18 xgoc grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates the reason why the false teachers are reserved for punishment in the gloom of darkness, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “This is so because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 2 18 cxt8 ὑπέρογκα…ματαιότητος φθεγγόμενοι 1 speaking arrogant things of vanity This clause indicates the means by which the false teachers entice others to sin. Alternate translation: “by means of speaking arrogant things of vanity” 2PE 2 18 x2by figs-possession ὑπέρογκα…ματαιότητος 1 speaking arrogant things of vanity Peter is using the possessive form to describe **arrogant** speech that is characterized by **vanity**. Alternate translation: “vain, arrogant things” or “vain and arrogant things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2PE 2 18 n2pr figs-abstractnouns ματαιότητος 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **vanity** with an adjective, such as “vain.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 18 f8tg writing-pronouns δελεάζουσιν ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις σαρκὸς 1 They entice people by the lusts of the flesh Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers entice by the lusts of the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2PE 2 18 t543 figs-metaphor ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις σαρκὸς 1 Here, **flesh** is used figuratively to refer to a person’s sinful nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the literal meaning for the metaphor. Alternate translation: “by the lusts of their sinful natures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 18 t543 figs-metaphor ἐν ἐπιθυμίαις σαρκὸς 1 Here, **flesh** is used to refer to a person’s sinful nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the literal meaning for the metaphor. Alternate translation: “by the lusts of their sinful natures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 18 bibq ἀσελγείαις 1 Here, **licentious acts** refers to immoral sexual actions that demonstrate a lack of self-control. See how you translated this term in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “uncontrolled sensual acts” -2PE 2 18 nks3 figs-metaphor τοὺς ὀλίγως ἀποφεύγοντας τοὺς ἐν πλάνῃ ἀναστρεφομένους 1 those who are barely escaping from those who live in error Here, Peter speaks figuratively of people who recently became believers as **those barely escaping** from sinful humanity. He also refers to unbelievers who still live according to their sinful desires as **those living in error**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “people who recently ceased living sinfully as other people do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 18 nks3 figs-metaphor τοὺς ὀλίγως ἀποφεύγοντας τοὺς ἐν πλάνῃ ἀναστρεφομένους 1 those who are barely escaping from those who live in error Here, Peter speaks of people who recently became believers as **those barely escaping** from sinful humanity. He also refers to unbelievers who still live according to their sinful desires as **those living in error**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “people who recently ceased living sinfully as other people do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 19 xqla ἐλευθερίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπαγγελλόμενοι 1 This clause refers to another means by which the false teachers enticed their followers, continuing from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “They also entice them by promising freedom to them” 2PE 2 19 uyw6 figs-metaphor ἐλευθερίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπαγγελλόμενοι 1 promising freedom to them, while they themselves are slaves of corruption Here, **freedom** is a metaphor for the ability to live exactly as one wants. Alternate translation: “promising to give them the ability to live exactly as they want to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 19 je1k writing-pronouns ἐλευθερίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπαγγελλόμενοι 1 Here, the pronoun **them** refers to those people who are deceived by the false teachers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “promising freedom to those whom they deceive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 19 n0bh figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ δοῦλοι ὑπάρχοντες τῆς φθορᾶς; 1 Peter uses the word **themselves** here to emphasize the irony of spiritually enslaved people promising spiritual freedom to others. Alternate translation: “while they themselves are slaves of destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -2PE 2 19 v5tt figs-metaphor δοῦλοι 1 Peter speaks figuratively of people who live sinfully as if they were **slaves** to sin who need to escape from their captivity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “like slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 19 v5tt figs-metaphor δοῦλοι 1 Peter speaks of people who live sinfully as if they were **slaves** to sin who need to escape from their captivity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “like slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 19 xyua figs-possession δοῦλοι…τῆς φθορᾶς 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **slaves** that are characterized by **destruction**. Alternate translation: “slaves that will be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2PE 2 19 b79v figs-metaphor ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 For by what someone has been overcome, by this he has been enslaved Peter speaks of a person as being **enslaved** when anything has control over that person, he speaks of that thing as the master of that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this non-figuratively or as a simile. Alternate translation: “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes controlled by that thing” or “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes like a slave to that thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 19 xqmy figs-activepassive ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive sentence with an active form. Alternate translation: “For if something overpowers a person, that thing enslaves that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 2 20 v3xc γὰρ 1 Here, **For** could refer to: (1) another explanation of Peter’s statement “themselves being slaves of destruction” in the previous verse, (2) a transition from what Peter said in the previous verse to what he is going to say in this verse. Here, **For** does not indicate the reason or result of what was said in the previous verse. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “And” 2PE 2 20 q96i grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου, ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τούτοις δὲ πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται, γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “they have escaped the impurities of the world through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, but having become entangled and overcome by them again, the last has become worse for them than the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -2PE 2 20 efnj figs-metaphor εἰ…ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 Using a similar metaphor to that in [2:18](../02/18.md), here Peter speaks figuratively of believers as if they had been slaves to the **defilements** of the world and have **escaped** that captivity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “if they have ceased living in the defiling manner of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 20 efnj figs-metaphor εἰ…ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 Using a similar metaphor to that in [2:18](../02/18.md), here Peter speaks of believers as if they had been slaves to the **defilements** of the world and have **escaped** that captivity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “if they have ceased living in the defiling manner of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 20 xpo9 figs-abstractnouns τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **defilements** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that sinful human society does to defile itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 20 lu22 figs-metonymy τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 the impurities of the world Here, the **world** refers to human society, which has been corrupted by sin. Alternate translation: “the defiling practices of sinful human society” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2PE 2 20 bi73 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** with a verbal phrase. See how you translated similar phrases in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “by knowing our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 20 zxcf figs-possession τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος 1 Here, **our Lord** means “the person who is lord over us” or “the person who rules over us.” The conjunction **and** indicates that **our** also applies to **Savior**, meaning “the person who saves us.” Alternate translation: “of the person who rules over us and saves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2PE 2 20 ih4w figs-activepassive τούτοις…πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can supply the doer of the action from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “these things having entangled them again; these things have overcome them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2PE 2 20 ygag figs-metaphor πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες 1 Here, Peter speaks figuratively of people who seem to have been believers but have returned to living sinfully as if they have become **entangled** in a net. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “if they have begun to live sinfully again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 20 ygag figs-metaphor πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες 1 Here, Peter speaks of people who seem to have been believers but have returned to living sinfully as if they have become **entangled** in a net. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “if they have begun to live sinfully again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 20 noa9 writing-pronouns τούτοις 1 Here, the pronoun **these things** refers to “the defilements of the world.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could specify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “by these defilements of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 20 d6ra writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md) and discussed in [2:12–19](../02/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 20 d42g figs-nominaladj γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 the last has become worse for them than the first Here, the adjectives **last** and **first** function as nouns. They are plural, and ULT supplies the noun **things** in each case to show that. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you can supply a more specific singular noun. Alternate translation: “the final condition for them is worse than their original condition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 2PE 2 21 x7gd grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates the reason why the last condition of the false teachers was worse than their first condition, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “This is so because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 2 21 e3dv writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 21 xg05 figs-possession τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **the way** that is characterized by **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “the righteous way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -2PE 2 21 pm7b figs-idiom τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 the way of righteousness Peter speaks figuratively of life as a **way** or path. This phrase refers to the way of living life that is right and pleasing to the Lord. Peter may also be using it here to refer specifically to the Christian faith, similar to his use of “the way of truth” in [2:2](../02/02.md) and “the straight way” in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “the manner of living that pleases the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2PE 2 21 pm7b figs-idiom τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 the way of righteousness Peter speaks of life as a **way** or path. This phrase refers to the way of living life that is right and pleasing to the Lord. Peter may also be using it here to refer specifically to the Christian faith, similar to his use of “the way of truth” in [2:2](../02/02.md) and “the straight way” in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “the manner of living that pleases the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2PE 2 21 lib0 ἐπιγνοῦσιν 1 This clause indicates that the next clause describes an event that happened after the event of this clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “after having known it” 2PE 2 21 ic3c figs-metaphor ὑποστρέψαι ἐκ τῆς…ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 1 to turn away from the holy commandment Here, **to turn away from** is a metaphor that means to stop doing something. Alternate translation: “to stop obeying the holy commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 21 j7s6 figs-genericnoun τῆς…ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 2 Peter uses **the holy commandment** to speak of the commands of God in general. He is not referring to one specific **commandment**. These commands were **delivered** by the apostles to the believers. Alternate translation: “the holy commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) @@ -359,9 +359,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 3 intro c1id 0 # 2 Peter 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Reminder that Jesus will return at the right time (3:1–13)
2. Concluding exhortation to live godly lives (3:14–17)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fire

People often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore, when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, that action is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])

### Day of the Lord

The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared at all times for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 2PE 3 1 n92f figs-explicit ἀγαπητοί 1 **Beloved ones** refers here to those to whom Peter is writing, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this term explicitly. Alternate translation: “Beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 3 1 aah9 writing-pronouns ἐν αἷς 1 Here, **which** refers to both this letter and the previous letter that Peter had written to this group of believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could start a new sentence to say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In both of these letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2PE 3 1 gc3m figs-metaphor διεγείρω ὑμῶν ἐν ὑπομνήσει τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν 1 I am stirring up your sincere mind Here, Peter uses **arouse** figuratively, as if the minds of his readers are asleep, to refer to causing his readers to think about these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this with a non-figurative expression. See how you translated this term in [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “to remind your sincere mind of these things so that you will think about them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 3 1 gc3m figs-metaphor διεγείρω ὑμῶν ἐν ὑπομνήσει τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν 1 I am stirring up your sincere mind Here, Peter uses **arouse**, as if the minds of his readers are asleep, to refer to causing his readers to think about these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this with a non-figurative expression. See how you translated this term in [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “to remind your sincere mind of these things so that you will think about them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 3 1 deoa figs-abstractnouns ἐν ὑπομνήσει 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **remembrance** in this phrase with a verb. See how you translated this term in [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “to remember” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 3 1 qxt2 figs-metaphor ὑμῶν…τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν 1 Although the word **pure** usually refers to something being uncontaminated or not mixed with something else, Peter uses it figuratively here to indicate that his readers have minds which have not been deceived by the false teachers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “your undeceived minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 3 1 qxt2 figs-metaphor ὑμῶν…τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν 1 Although the word **pure** usually refers to something being uncontaminated or not mixed with something else, Peter uses it here to indicate that his readers have minds which have not been deceived by the false teachers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “your undeceived minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 3 2 bp8r grammar-connect-logic-goal μνησθῆναι 1 Here, Peter is stating a purpose for which he is writing this letter. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “that you should remember” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 2PE 3 2 gxj7 figs-activepassive τῶν προειρημένων ῥημάτων, ὑπὸ τῶν ἁγίων προφητῶν 1 the words spoken beforehand by the holy prophets If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the words that the holy prophets spoke previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 3 2 p4i5 figs-metonymy τῶν προειρημένων ῥημάτων 1 Peter is using **words** here to describe the prophecies of the Old Testament prophets that were conveyed by using words, especially those prophecies about the future return of Christ. Alternate translation: “the prophecies spoken previously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -376,15 +376,15 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 3 3 lm1a τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες 1 knowing this first Peter uses **first** here to refer to the degree of importance. It does not to refer to order in time. See how you translated this in [1:20](../01/20.md). Alternate translation: “Most importantly, you must understand” 2PE 3 3 xcd9 figs-declarative τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες 1 knowing this first Peter is using a statement to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this by translating it as a command. If you do so, it might be helpful to start a new sentence here. See how you translated this in [1:20](../01/20.md). Alternate translation: “Above all, know this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) 2PE 3 3 mjgr figs-abstractnouns ἐλεύσονται…ἐν ἐμπαιγμονῇ ἐμπαῖκται 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **mockery** with a verb. Alternate translation: “mockers will come and mock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 3 3 s69n figs-metaphor κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας αὐτῶν πορευόμενοι 1 Here, Peter uses **going** figuratively to refer to habitually doing something, like someone who walks toward something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “those habitually living according to their own lusts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 3 3 s69n figs-metaphor κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας αὐτῶν πορευόμενοι 1 Here, Peter uses **going** to refer to habitually doing something, like someone who walks toward something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “those habitually living according to their own lusts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 3 3 znh2 figs-explicit κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας αὐτῶν πορευόμενοι 1 Here, **lusts** refers to sinful desires that are opposed to God’s will. Alternate translation: “living according to their own sinful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 3 4 fe37 writing-quotations καὶ λέγοντες 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and they will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 2PE 3 4 hgdm figs-rquestion ποῦ ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ? 1 Where is the promise of his coming? The mockers ask this rhetorical question to emphasize that they do not believe that Jesus will return. Alternate translation: “There is no promise of his coming!” or “The promise of his coming is not true!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -2PE 3 4 lw3y figs-idiom ποῦ ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ? 1 Here, **Where** is used idiomatically to ask what has happened to the promise. The mockers are not asking for the location of something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idiom by translating this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “What happened to the promise of his coming?” or “What has come about regarding the promise of his coming?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2PE 3 4 lw3y figs-idiom ποῦ ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ? 1 Here, **Where** is used to ask what has happened to the promise. The mockers are not asking for the location of something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idiom by translating this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “What happened to the promise of his coming?” or “What has come about regarding the promise of his coming?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2PE 3 4 zrj7 figs-metonymy ποῦ ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 Where is the promise of his coming? Here, **promise** refers to the fulfillment of the promise that Jesus will return. Alternate translation: “Where is the fulfillment of the promise of his coming?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2PE 3 4 wm6z writing-pronouns ἡ ἐπαγγελία τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the pronoun **his** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise of Jesus’ coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 3 4 u54w figs-explicit τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **his coming** refers to the return of the Lord Jesus to earth. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the return of Jesus to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2PE 3 4 xfkr figs-metaphor ἀφ’ ἧς γὰρ οἱ πατέρες ἐκοιμήθησαν 1 Here, **the fathers** is used figuratively. It could refer to: (1) the Old Testament ancestors of the Israelites, often called “the patriarchs.” Alternate translation: “For since Israel’s patriarchs fell asleep” (2) those leaders of the first generation of Christians who had died by the time Peter wrote this letter. Alternate translation: “For since the first Christian leaders fell asleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 3 4 xfkr figs-metaphor ἀφ’ ἧς γὰρ οἱ πατέρες ἐκοιμήθησαν 1 Here, **the fathers** is used. It could refer to: (1) the Old Testament ancestors of the Israelites, often called “the patriarchs.” Alternate translation: “For since Israel’s patriarchs fell asleep” (2) those leaders of the first generation of Christians who had died by the time Peter wrote this letter. Alternate translation: “For since the first Christian leaders fell asleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 3 4 t6hl figs-euphemism οἱ πατέρες ἐκοιμήθησαν 1 the fathers fell asleep Here, **fell asleep** is a euphemism meaning they died. You could either use a similar euphemism for death in your language or say this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the fathers died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 2PE 3 4 c2en figs-hyperbole πάντα οὕτως διαμένει ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως 1 all things continue in the same way from the beginning of creation Here, **all things** is an exaggeration the mockers use to argue that nothing in the world has ever changed, so it cannot be true that Jesus will return. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 2PE 3 4 yue7 figs-abstractnouns ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως 1 from the beginning of creation If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **creation** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “since God created the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 3 13 ptmy figs-infostructure καινοὺς…οὐρανοὺς καὶ γῆν καινὴν, κατὰ τὸ ἐπάγγελμα αὐτοῦ προσδοκῶμεν 1 Peter put the direct object of the main verb at the front of this sentence for emphasis. If your language uses a similar construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to have it here in your translation. But if this construction would be confusing in your language, you could express this emphasis in another way and change the structure of the sentence. Alternate translation: “according to his promise, we are waiting for new heavens and a new earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 2PE 3 13 r2y9 writing-pronouns κατὰ τὸ ἐπάγγελμα αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the pronoun **his** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “according to God’s promise” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “according to Jesus’ promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 3 13 evi0 τὸ ἐπάγγελμα αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **promise** could refer to: (1) God’s promise to create a new heavens and earth, as promised in Isaiah 65:17 and Isaiah 66:22. Alternate translation: “his promise of new heavens and a new earth” (2) the promise of Jesus’ second coming, as in [3:4](../03/04.md). Alternate translation: “his promise of the return of Jesus” -2PE 3 13 df3v figs-personification ἐν οἷς δικαιοσύνη κατοικεῖ 1 in which righteousness dwells Here, **righteousness** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could dwell somewhere. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in which righteousness exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +2PE 3 13 df3v figs-personification ἐν οἷς δικαιοσύνη κατοικεῖ 1 in which righteousness dwells Here, **righteousness** is spoken of as though it were a person who could dwell somewhere. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in which righteousness exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2PE 3 13 r5qo figs-abstractnouns ἐν οἷς δικαιοσύνη κατοικεῖ 1 in which righteousness dwells If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **righteousness** by translating the idea behind it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “in which everyone is righteous” or “in which everyone does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 3 14 d178 grammar-connect-logic-result διό 1 Peter uses **Therefore** to introduce a description of what his readers should do as a result of what he has just said. He is referring specifically to the discussion of the coming day of the Lord given in [3:10–13](../03/10.md). Alternate translation: “Because of these reasons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 3 14 qjca figs-explicit ἀγαπητοί 1 Here, **beloved ones** refers to those whom Peter is writing to, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. See how you translated this in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -450,26 +450,26 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 3 15 g35u figs-explicit τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν μακροθυμίαν, σωτηρίαν ἡγεῖσθε 1 consider the patience of our Lord as salvation Because the Lord is patient, the day of judgment has not yet happened. This gives people an opportunity to repent and be saved, as Peter explained in [3:9](../03/09.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “consider the patience of our Lord as an opportunity to repent and be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 3 15 pd30 figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν μακροθυμίαν, σωτηρίαν ἡγεῖσθε 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **patience** and **salvation** by translating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “that our Lord is patient to save people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 3 15 vbso figs-abstractnouns σωτηρίαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **salvation** by translating the idea behind it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to save people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 3 15 vo82 figs-metaphor ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἡμῶν ἀδελφὸς Παῦλος 1 Peter is using the term **brother** figuratively to refer to Paul as a fellow believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “our beloved fellow Christian brother Paul” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +2PE 3 15 vo82 figs-metaphor ὁ ἀγαπητὸς ἡμῶν ἀδελφὸς Παῦλος 1 Peter is using the term **brother** to refer to Paul as a fellow believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “our beloved fellow Christian brother Paul” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) 2PE 3 15 nnd7 figs-activepassive κατὰ τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτῷ σοφίαν 1 according to the wisdom having been given to him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “according to the wisdom that God gave to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 3 15 esr7 figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτῷ σοφίαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **wisdom** by translating the idea behind it with an adjective, such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “according to the wise words having been given to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 3 16 zzko figs-explicit ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐπιστολαῖς 1 Here, the context suggests that Paul is the author of **the letters**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in all Paul’s letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 3 16 wil1 writing-pronouns λαλῶν ἐν αὐταῖς περὶ τούτων 1 Here, **these things** could refer to: (1) the events related to the day of the Lord discussed in [3:10–13](../03/10.md) and called “these things” in [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “these things that will happen on the day of the Lord” (2) the need to live godly lives and consider that God’s patience is for saving people, as discussed in [3:14–15](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “these things I have just said about living blamelessly and about God’s patience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 3 16 z4cj writing-pronouns ἃ οἱ ἀμαθεῖς καὶ ἀστήρικτοι στρεβλοῦσιν 1 Here, **which** refers to the things in Paul’s letters that are difficult to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “The ignorant and unstable ones distort these difficult things found in Paul’s letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2PE 3 16 weh2 figs-metaphor ἃ οἱ ἀμαθεῖς καὶ ἀστήρικτοι στρεβλοῦσιν 1 Here, **distort** is used figuratively to describe changing the meaning of a statement in order to give a false meaning like twisting something so that it changes shape. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “which the ignorant and unstable ones interpret falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 3 16 weh2 figs-metaphor ἃ οἱ ἀμαθεῖς καὶ ἀστήρικτοι στρεβλοῦσιν 1 Here, **distort** is used to describe changing the meaning of a statement in order to give a false meaning like twisting something so that it changes shape. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “which the ignorant and unstable ones interpret falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 3 16 sg60 figs-explicit ὡς καὶ τὰς λοιπὰς Γραφὰς 1 Here, **the other scriptures** refers to both the entire Old Testament and the New Testament texts that had been written by the time Peter wrote this letter. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as also the other authoritative scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 3 16 sh4j grammar-connect-logic-result πρὸς τὴν ἰδίαν αὐτῶν ἀπώλειαν 1 to their own destruction Here, **to** indicates that this clause provides the result of the “ignorant and unstable ones” falsely interpreting the scriptures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “resulting in their own destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 3 16 wrqu figs-abstractnouns πρὸς τὴν ἰδίαν αὐτῶν ἀπώλειαν 1 to their own destruction If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “so that they will be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 3 17 kn3d grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Connecting Statement: Here, Peter uses **therefore** to introduce a description of what his readers should do as a result of what he has said, which could be: (1) the destruction of those who falsely interpret the scriptures mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Because those who falsely interpret the Scriptures will be destroyed” (2) the previous content of the entire letter, especially the sure destruction of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “Because of all these things I have told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 3 17 wk5v figs-explicit ἀγαπητοί 1 Here, **beloved ones** refers to those whom Peter is writing to, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. See how you translated this in [3:1](../03/01.md) and [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 3 17 bq8o grammar-connect-logic-result προγινώσκοντες 1 Connecting Statement: Here, Peter is giving the reason why his readers should heed his command in the next phrase. Alternate translation: “since you know beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -2PE 3 17 w3sp figs-metaphor ἵνα μὴ…ἐκπέσητε τοῦ ἰδίου στηριγμοῦ 1 you might not lose your own steadfastness Here, Peter speaks figuratively of **steadfastness** as if it were a possession that believers could **lose**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “so that you might not stop being steadfast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 3 17 w3sp figs-metaphor ἵνα μὴ…ἐκπέσητε τοῦ ἰδίου στηριγμοῦ 1 you might not lose your own steadfastness Here, Peter speaks of **steadfastness** as if it were a possession that believers could **lose**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “so that you might not stop being steadfast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 3 17 v5cb figs-abstractnouns ἵνα μὴ…ἐκπέσητε τοῦ ἰδίου στηριγμοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **steadfastness** with the adjective “steadfast.” Alternate translation: “so that you might not lose your own steadfast faith” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) 2PE 3 17 um49 grammar-connect-logic-result τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ συναπαχθέντες 1 This clause indicates the reason why people might lose their own steadfastness. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of being led astray by the error of the lawless ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 3 17 xjht figs-activepassive τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ συναπαχθέντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the error of the lawless ones having led you astray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2PE 3 17 h2ik figs-metaphor τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ συναπαχθέντες 1 Here, Peter uses **led astray** figuratively to describe people being deceived into living wickedly by false teachers as if they had been led away from the straight path. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “having been deceived into living wickedly by the error of the lawless ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 3 17 h2ik figs-metaphor τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ συναπαχθέντες 1 Here, Peter uses **led astray** to describe people being deceived into living wickedly by false teachers as if they had been led away from the straight path. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “having been deceived into living wickedly by the error of the lawless ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 3 17 px85 τῇ τῶν ἀθέσμων πλάνῃ 1 This phrase indicates the means by which one might be led astray. Alternate translation: “by means of the error of the lawless ones” -2PE 3 18 ccm3 figs-metaphor αὐξάνετε…ἐν χάριτι, καὶ γνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 grow in grace and knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ Here, **grow** is used figuratively to express experiencing or having something in increasing amounts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “have more and more of the grace and knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 3 18 ccm3 figs-metaphor αὐξάνετε…ἐν χάριτι, καὶ γνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 grow in grace and knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ Here, **grow** is used to express experiencing or having something in increasing amounts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “have more and more of the grace and knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 3 18 zjqa ἐν χάριτι, καὶ γνώσει 1 Here, **in** means “with reference to.” Alternate translation: “with reference to the grace and knowledge” 2PE 3 18 lk3c figs-abstractnouns χάριτι 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **grace** by translating it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “kind acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 3 18 qlbc figs-abstractnouns γνώσει 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **knowledge** by translating it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) diff --git a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv index 64c3c754ec..496fca7cdf 100644 --- a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1JN front intro nl27 0 # Introduction to 1 John

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 1 John

This is a letter that the apostle John wrote to challenge and correct false teachings that were leading followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and live in wrong ways. At that time, the letter form had distinct opening and closing sections. The main body of the letter came in between.
1. Opening of Letter (1:1-4)
1. Main Body of Letter (1:5–5:12)
* Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–2:17)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18–2:27)
* Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28–3:10)
* Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11–18)
* Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19–24)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1–6)
* Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7–21)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1–12)
1. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)

### Who wrote the book of 1 John?

The author of this letter does not give his name. However, since early Christian times, the church has widely considered the apostle John to be the author. He wrote the Gospel of John, and there are many similarities between the content of that book and this letter. If John did write this letter, he probably did so near the end of his life.

### To whom was the book of 1 John written?

The author wrote this letter to people whom he addresses as “beloved” and, figuratively, as “my little children.” This probably refers to believers in various churches located in the area where John was then living.

### What is the book of 1 John about?

False teachers were encouraging followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and to live in wrong ways. John wanted to challenge and correct those false teachings so that the people who received his letter would continue to believe the truth that they had been taught and live in right ways. The false teachers were saying that these people were not saved; John wanted to assure them that they were saved.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 John” or “First John.” They may also choose a different title, such as “The First Letter from John” or “The First Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Who were the people whom John spoke against?

The false teachers whom John was challenging seem to have held beliefs similar to what would later become known as Gnosticism. Those false teachers believed that the physical world was evil. They thought that God would not become human, since they considered the physical body to be evil, so they denied that Jesus was God come to earth in human form. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### “sin”

In chapter 1, John says that we should not deny that we have sinned. Rather, if we confess our sin, God will forgive us. In chapter 2, John says that he is writing this letter so that the recipients will not sin, but he adds that if they do sin, Jesus will advocate on their behalf. But in chapter 3, John says that everyone who has been begotten from God and who remains in God does not commit sin and is not able to sin. And in chapter 5, John says that we should not pray for people who are sinning in certain ways, although we should pray for people who are sinning in other ways. This may seem confusing and contradictory.

However, the explanation is that the people whose teachings John challenged and corrected in this letter were saying that it did not matter what people did in their bodies. This was because they thought that physical matter was evil, and so they thought that God did not care about it. In effect, they were saying that there was no such thing as sin. So John needed to say, in chapter 1, that sin is real and that everyone has sinned. Some of the believers may have been deceived by the false teaching and committed sins, so John also needed to reassure them that if they repented and confessed their sins, God would forgive them. John says similar things in chapter 2. Then in chapter 3 he explains that the new nature that believers have as children of God is one that does not want to sin and that does not enjoy sinning. So they should recognize that those who excuse or condone sin are not truly children of God, and that as children of God themselves, they can become more and more obedient and free from sin. Finally, in chapter 5, John warns that if a person sins wantonly and continually, this likely means that they have rejected Jesus and are not influenced by the Holy Spirit. He says that in that case, it may not be effective to pray for them. But he then encourages his readers that if a person sins occasionally but feels remorse, he is influenced by the Spirit, and so the prayers of other believers will help him repent and live in a right way again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]])

### “remain”

In this letter, John often uses the word “remain” (which could also be translated as “reside” or “abide”) as a spatial metaphor. John speaks of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if the teaching of Jesus “remained” in the believer. He speaks of a person being spiritually joined to someone else as if that person “remained” in the other person: He writes that Christians “remain” in Christ and in God, and he says that the Father “remains” in the Son, the Son “remains” in the Father, the Son “remains” in believers, and the Holy Spirit “remains” in believers.

Translators may find it difficult to represent these ideas in their own languages if they try to use exactly the same words and expressions each time. For example, in [2:6](../02/06.md), when John speaks of a believer “remaining” in God, he intends to express the idea of that believer being spiritually unified with God. Accordingly, UST speaks of how the believer “shares life with God.” To give another example, for the statement in [2:14](../02/14.md) that “the word of God remains in you,” UST says, “you continue to obey what God commands.” This shows how other expressions can be found that accurately communicate the various ideas that John is expressing through the term “remain.”

### “appear”

In several places in this letter, John uses a term that ULT usually translates as “appear.” This is actually a passive verbal form in Greek, but as is often the case with such forms in that language, it can have an active meaning. When it has an active meaning, it is important to recognize that it does not simply mean “seemed to be there,” as the word “appeared” might suggest. Rather, it means “came to be there.” This is illustrated well by the use of the term in another New Testament book, 2 Corinthians, in which Paul writes in [5:10](../2co/05/10.md) that “we must all appear before the judgment seat of Christ.” Clearly this does not mean that we must only seem to be present there. Rather, we must actually arrive there.

Throughout the epistle, it is a subtle matter of interpretation to decide whether John is using the term “appear” in an active sense or in a passive sense. For example, in [1:2](../01/02.md), John applies the term twice to the “Word of life,” that is, to Jesus. But it is not clear whether he is saying that Jesus himself “appeared,” that is, he came to earth, or that he “was made apparent” (made visible), with the emphasis on the idea that God revealed Jesus to the world and in the process revealed himself to the world through Jesus. At each place where John uses this term, notes will call attention to it and discuss what it likely means in that context.

### “the world”

John also uses the term “world” in a variety of senses in this letter. It can mean the earth, something material, the people who live in the world, the people who do not honor God, or the values of the people who do not honor God. Notes will address the meaning of the term “world” in each instance where John uses it.

### “to know”

The verb “to know” is used in two different ways in this letter. Sometimes it is used about knowing a fact, as in 3:2, 3:5, and 3:19. Sometimes it means to experience and understand someone or something, as in 3:1, 3:6, 3:16, and 3:20. Sometimes John uses it in two different senses in the same sentence, as in 2:3, “in this we know that we have known him.” Your language may have different words for these different meanings. If so, you must be careful to use the appropriate word in the right place in your translation.

### “We”

In most cases in this letter, the first-person plural pronouns (“we, our,” etc.) are inclusive, and so if your language marks that distinction, use the inclusive form in your translation. In those cases, John is speaking of what both he and the recipients know, or of things that are true of both him and the recipients. However, in a few cases, the first-person pronouns are exclusive, since John is telling the recipients what he and his fellow apostles saw and heard from Jesus. The notes will identify all such places, and in them you should use the exclusive forms, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

### “You, your”

The words “you” and “your” in this letter are plural.

### Light and darkness

In 1:5-7 and 2:8-11 John uses an extended metaphor in which light represents what is good or holy and darkness represents what is evil. If this is not easily understood in your language, you may need to say explicitly that light represents goodness or that light is like goodness, or you may choose to talk about goodness without using the symbol of light. There will be a note explaining the metaphor in each place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])

### Major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 John

When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate in its text, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1JN front intro nl27 0 # Introduction to 1 John

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 1 John

This is a letter that the apostle John wrote to challenge and correct false teachings that were leading followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and live in wrong ways. At that time, the letter form had distinct opening and closing sections. The main body of the letter came in between.
1. Opening of Letter (1:1-4)
1. Main Body of Letter (1:5–5:12)
* Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–2:17)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18–2:27)
* Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28–3:10)
* Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11–18)
* Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19–24)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1–6)
* Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7–21)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1–12)
1. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)

### Who wrote the book of 1 John?

The author of this letter does not give his name. However, since early Christian times, the church has widely considered the apostle John to be the author. He wrote the Gospel of John, and there are many similarities between the content of that book and this letter. If John did write this letter, he probably did so near the end of his life.

### To whom was the book of 1 John written?

The author wrote this letter to people whom he addresses as “beloved” and,, as “my little children.” This probably refers to believers in various churches located in the area where John was then living.

### What is the book of 1 John about?

False teachers were encouraging followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and to live in wrong ways. John wanted to challenge and correct those false teachings so that the people who received his letter would continue to believe the truth that they had been taught and live in right ways. The false teachers were saying that these people were not saved; John wanted to assure them that they were saved.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 John” or “First John.” They may also choose a different title, such as “The First Letter from John” or “The First Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Who were the people whom John spoke against?

The false teachers whom John was challenging seem to have held beliefs similar to what would later become known as Gnosticism. Those false teachers believed that the physical world was evil. They thought that God would not become human, since they considered the physical body to be evil, so they denied that Jesus was God come to earth in human form. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### “sin”

In chapter 1, John says that we should not deny that we have sinned. Rather, if we confess our sin, God will forgive us. In chapter 2, John says that he is writing this letter so that the recipients will not sin, but he adds that if they do sin, Jesus will advocate on their behalf. But in chapter 3, John says that everyone who has been begotten from God and who remains in God does not commit sin and is not able to sin. And in chapter 5, John says that we should not pray for people who are sinning in certain ways, although we should pray for people who are sinning in other ways. This may seem confusing and contradictory.

However, the explanation is that the people whose teachings John challenged and corrected in this letter were saying that it did not matter what people did in their bodies. This was because they thought that physical matter was evil, and so they thought that God did not care about it. In effect, they were saying that there was no such thing as sin. So John needed to say, in chapter 1, that sin is real and that everyone has sinned. Some of the believers may have been deceived by the false teaching and committed sins, so John also needed to reassure them that if they repented and confessed their sins, God would forgive them. John says similar things in chapter 2. Then in chapter 3 he explains that the new nature that believers have as children of God is one that does not want to sin and that does not enjoy sinning. So they should recognize that those who excuse or condone sin are not truly children of God, and that as children of God themselves, they can become more and more obedient and free from sin. Finally, in chapter 5, John warns that if a person sins wantonly and continually, this likely means that they have rejected Jesus and are not influenced by the Holy Spirit. He says that in that case, it may not be effective to pray for them. But he then encourages his readers that if a person sins occasionally but feels remorse, he is influenced by the Spirit, and so the prayers of other believers will help him repent and live in a right way again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]])

### “remain”

In this letter, John often uses the word “remain” (which could also be translated as “reside” or “abide”) as a spatial metaphor. John speaks of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if the teaching of Jesus “remained” in the believer. He speaks of a person being spiritually joined to someone else as if that person “remained” in the other person: He writes that Christians “remain” in Christ and in God, and he says that the Father “remains” in the Son, the Son “remains” in the Father, the Son “remains” in believers, and the Holy Spirit “remains” in believers.

Translators may find it difficult to represent these ideas in their own languages if they try to use exactly the same words and expressions each time. For example, in [2:6](../02/06.md), when John speaks of a believer “remaining” in God, he intends to express the idea of that believer being spiritually unified with God. Accordingly, UST speaks of how the believer “shares life with God.” To give another example, for the statement in [2:14](../02/14.md) that “the word of God remains in you,” UST says, “you continue to obey what God commands.” This shows how other expressions can be found that accurately communicate the various ideas that John is expressing through the term “remain.”

### “appear”

In several places in this letter, John uses a term that ULT usually translates as “appear.” This is actually a passive verbal form in Greek, but as is often the case with such forms in that language, it can have an active meaning. When it has an active meaning, it is important to recognize that it does not simply mean “seemed to be there,” as the word “appeared” might suggest. Rather, it means “came to be there.” This is illustrated well by the use of the term in another New Testament book, 2 Corinthians, in which Paul writes in [5:10](../2co/05/10.md) that “we must all appear before the judgment seat of Christ.” Clearly this does not mean that we must only seem to be present there. Rather, we must actually arrive there.

Throughout the epistle, it is a subtle matter of interpretation to decide whether John is using the term “appear” in an active sense or in a passive sense. For example, in [1:2](../01/02.md), John applies the term twice to the “Word of life,” that is, to Jesus. But it is not clear whether he is saying that Jesus himself “appeared,” that is, he came to earth, or that he “was made apparent” (made visible), with the emphasis on the idea that God revealed Jesus to the world and in the process revealed himself to the world through Jesus. At each place where John uses this term, notes will call attention to it and discuss what it likely means in that context.

### “the world”

John also uses the term “world” in a variety of senses in this letter. It can mean the earth, something material, the people who live in the world, the people who do not honor God, or the values of the people who do not honor God. Notes will address the meaning of the term “world” in each instance where John uses it.

### “to know”

The verb “to know” is used in two different ways in this letter. Sometimes it is used about knowing a fact, as in 3:2, 3:5, and 3:19. Sometimes it means to experience and understand someone or something, as in 3:1, 3:6, 3:16, and 3:20. Sometimes John uses it in two different senses in the same sentence, as in 2:3, “in this we know that we have known him.” Your language may have different words for these different meanings. If so, you must be careful to use the appropriate word in the right place in your translation.

### “We”

In most cases in this letter, the first-person plural pronouns (“we, our,” etc.) are inclusive, and so if your language marks that distinction, use the inclusive form in your translation. In those cases, John is speaking of what both he and the recipients know, or of things that are true of both him and the recipients. However, in a few cases, the first-person pronouns are exclusive, since John is telling the recipients what he and his fellow apostles saw and heard from Jesus. The notes will identify all such places, and in them you should use the exclusive forms, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

### “You, your”

The words “you” and “your” in this letter are plural.

### Light and darkness

In 1:5-7 and 2:8-11 John uses an extended metaphor in which light represents what is good or holy and darkness represents what is evil. If this is not easily understood in your language, you may need to say explicitly that light represents goodness or that light is like goodness, or you may choose to talk about goodness without using the symbol of light. There will be a note explaining the metaphor in each place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])

### Major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 John

When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate in its text, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 1 intro ab9v 0 # 1 John 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Opening of the letter (1:1-4)
2. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–10, continues through 2:17)

## Important translation issues in this chapter

Like many Greek compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes this letter begins with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the middle of [1:3](../01/03.md). The parts of this sentence are not in the order that is customary in many languages. The direct object comes first, and it is very long, made up of many different clauses. The subject and verb do not come until near the end. And in the middle, there is a long digression. So it will be a challenge to translate.

One approach that might work well in your language would be to create a verse bridge that includes all of 1:1–3. You could break up this long sentence into several smaller sentences, repeating the subject and verb for clarity. This would allow you to present the parts of the sentence in an order that might be more customary in your language and that your readers might understand better. Here is an example of 1 John 1:1-3 rearranged into an order that might be clearer in your language:

“So that you will have fellowship with us, we are declaring to you what we have seen and heard. We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched. It has to do with the Word of life. Indeed, the life appeared, and we have seen it, and we are testifying to it. Yes, we are announcing to you the eternal life that was with the Father and that then came to us.”

If you take this approach, another way to translate the second sentence would be, “We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, what we have heard, what we have seen with our eyes, what we have looked at and our hands have touched.”

Another approach that could also work well, and which would not require a verse bridge, would be to leave the phrases in their present order, but to divide the sentence into three parts at the verse divisions. If you do that, you could also put your translation of the phrase “regarding the Word of life” at the beginning rather than the end of [1:1](../01/01.md) and present it as a topical introduction to the letter. Otherwise, your readers might not get the sense that this is a letter until they reached [1:4](../01/04.md), where John formally states his purpose for writing.

The notes to [1:1–4](../01/01.md) provide further specific suggestions for how to translate this long opening sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [1:4](../01/04.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “so that our joy may be fulfilled.” ULT follows that reading. However, some other ancient manuscripts read “your joy” instead of “our joy.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 1 1 honh checking/headings 0 If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 1. Suggested heading: “The Word of Life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 1JN 1 1 j363 writing-pronouns ὃ ἦν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς, ὃ ἀκηκόαμεν, ὃ ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν, ὃ ἐθεασάμεθα, καὶ αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν, περὶ τοῦ λόγου τῆς ζωῆς— 1 What was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter for how to translate the long sentence in [1:1–3](../01/01.md). If you follow the suggestion to translate the phrase **regarding the Word of life** as a topical introduction to this letter, you will already have indicated that the four clauses in this verse refer to a person, Jesus. If you have pronouns in your language that refer to people, such as “he,” “who,” and “whom,” it would be appropriate to use them here. Alternate translation: “Regarding the Word of life—he is the one who has existed from all eternity, whom we heard speak, whom we saw with our own eyes, and whom we looked at and touched with our own hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -13,14 +13,14 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 1 1 j004 writing-pronouns περὶ τοῦ λόγου τῆς ζωῆς 1 regarding the Word of life Letter writers of this time typically began by giving their own names. That is the case for most of the letters in the New Testament. This letter is an exception, but if it would be helpful to your readers, you could supply John’s name here, as UST does. As noted above, John uses the plural pronoun “we” because he is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to Jesus’ earthly life. But it may be more natural in your language for him to refer to himself with a singular pronoun, and if so, you could do that in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, John, am writing to you about Jesus, the Word of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 1 1 gt44 figs-explicit τοῦ λόγου τῆς ζωῆς 1 the Word of life Here, **the Word of life** is implicitly a description of Jesus. As the General Introduction explains, there are many similarities between this letter and the Gospel of John. That gospel begins by saying about Jesus, “In the beginning was the Word.” So it is likely that when John speaks in this letter of **the Word of life** that “was from the beginning,” he is also speaking about Jesus. ULT indicates this by capitalizing **Word** to indicate that this is a title for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Word of God, who gives life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 1 1 j005 figs-possession τῆς ζωῆς 1 of life This could be referring either to the **life** that Jesus has or to the life that Jesus gives. But since John is writing this letter to reassure believers, it seems more likely that this expression is referring to the **life** that “the Word” (Jesus) gives to those who believe. Alternate translation: “who gives life to everyone who believes in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1JN 1 1 i8b4 figs-metaphor τῆς ζωῆς 1 of life In this letter, John uses **life** in different ways, either to refer literally to physical life or figuratively to spiritual life. Here the reference is to spiritual life. Alternate translation: “of spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 1 1 i8b4 figs-metaphor τῆς ζωῆς 1 of life In this letter, John uses **life** in different ways, either to refer literally to physical life or to spiritual life. Here the reference is to spiritual life. Alternate translation: “of spiritual life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 1 2 la4a figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ ζωὴ ἐφανερώθη 1 indeed, the life appeared See the discussion of the term “appear” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. Here the term could mean one of two things. (1) John could be emphasizing how Jesus came to this earth. (UST brings this out by saying “he came here to the earth.”) In that case, this would be a situation in which a Greek passive verbal form has an active meaning. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the life came right here” (2) John could be emphasizing how God revealed Jesus to the world and thereby revealed himself to the world through Jesus. To bring out that emphasis, you could translate this with a passive verbal form or, if your language does not use passive forms, you can use an active form and say who did the action. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the life was made visible” or “Indeed, God made the life visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1JN 1 2 j006 figs-metonymy ἡ ζωὴ 1 the life John is speaking figuratively of Jesus, whom he calls the “Word of life” in the previous verse, by referring to **the life** that is associated with him. In this case it seems to describe the **life** that Jesus embodies rather than the **life** that he gives. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “Jesus, who is life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 1 2 j006 figs-metonymy ἡ ζωὴ 1 the life John is speaking of Jesus, whom he calls the “Word of life” in the previous verse, by referring to **the life** that is associated with him. In this case it seems to describe the **life** that Jesus embodies rather than the **life** that he gives. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “Jesus, who is life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 1 2 j007 figs-exclusive ἑωράκαμεν…μαρτυροῦμεν…ἀπαγγέλλομεν…ἡμῖν 1 we have seen … we are bearing witness … we are announcing … us John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus, so the pronouns **we** and **us** are exclusive in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1JN 1 2 j008 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 you As the General Introduction explains, John is writing this letter to believers in various churches, and so the pronouns **you**, “your,” and “yourselves” are plural throughout the entire letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1JN 1 2 jp6s writing-pronouns ἑωράκαμεν, καὶ μαρτυροῦμεν, 1 we have seen it, and we are testifying to it If you decided to use personal pronouns in [1:1](../01/01.md), you could use them in these cases as well. Alternate translation: “we have seen him, and we are testifying that we saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 1 2 ih36 figs-parallelism μαρτυροῦμεν, καὶ ἀπαγγέλλομεν ὑμῖν 1 we are testifying to it, yes, we are announcing to you These two phrases mean similar things. John is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and express the emphasis in another way, as UST does. Alternate translation: “we are enthusiastically telling you about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1JN 1 2 lyt6 figs-metonymy τὴν ζωὴν τὴν αἰώνιον 1 the eternal life As earlier in the verse, John is speaking figuratively of Jesus by referring to the **life** that is associated with him. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who is eternal life” or “Jesus, who has always been alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 1 2 lyt6 figs-metonymy τὴν ζωὴν τὴν αἰώνιον 1 the eternal life As earlier in the verse, John is speaking of Jesus by referring to the **life** that is associated with him. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who is eternal life” or “Jesus, who has always been alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 1 2 itv8 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 the Father The title **the Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 1 2 fru2 figs-activepassive καὶ ἐφανερώθη ἡμῖν 1 and appeared to us See how you translated **appeared** earlier in this verse. Alternate translation: “and came right to us” or “and was made visible to us” or “and whom God made visible to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 1 3 j009 grammar-connect-logic-result ὃ ἑωράκαμεν, καὶ ἀκηκόαμεν, ἀπαγγέλλομεν καὶ ὑμῖν, ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς κοινωνίαν ἔχητε μεθ’ ἡμῶν 1 what we have seen and heard, we declare also to you, so you also will have fellowship with us If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange the parts of this section. You could move the clause beginning with **so you also** to the beginning of the verse, since that clause gives the reason for the action that the rest of the verse describes. For clarity, you could also place the direct-object clause **what we have seen and heard** after the subject and verb **we declare … to you**. In that case, you would not need to translate **also** after **declare**. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “So that you also may have fellowship with us, we are declaring to you what we have seen and heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -40,46 +40,46 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 1 5 djn4 figs-exclusive ἀκηκόαμεν 1 we have heard The pronoun **we** is exclusive, since John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1JN 1 5 j017 writing-pronouns ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 from him The pronoun **him** in this first instance in the verse refers to Jesus, since John is speaking of the message that he and the other eyewitnesses heard from Jesus. Alternate translation: “from Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 1 5 j018 figs-parallelism ὁ Θεὸς φῶς ἐστιν, καὶ σκοτία ἐν αὐτῷ, οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδεμία 1 God is light, and darkness is not in him at all These two phrases mean similar things. John is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God is entirely light” or, if you represent these metaphors non-figuratively (see next two notes), “God is completely holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1JN 1 5 cd6f figs-metaphor ὁ Θεὸς φῶς ἐστιν 1 God is light John often uses **light** figuratively in this letter to mean what is holy, right, and good. Here, in reference to God, it indicates holiness. Alternate translation: “God is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 1 5 e9m2 figs-metaphor σκοτία ἐν αὐτῷ, οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδεμία 1 darkness is not in him at all John often uses the word **darkness** figuratively in this letter to mean what is evil. Alternate translation: “God is not evil at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 1 5 cd6f figs-metaphor ὁ Θεὸς φῶς ἐστιν 1 God is light John often uses **light** in this letter to mean what is holy, right, and good. Here, in reference to God, it indicates holiness. Alternate translation: “God is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 1 5 e9m2 figs-metaphor σκοτία ἐν αὐτῷ, οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδεμία 1 darkness is not in him at all John often uses the word **darkness** in this letter to mean what is evil. Alternate translation: “God is not evil at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 1 5 j019 figs-doublenegatives σκοτία ἐν αὐτῷ, οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδεμία 1 darkness is not in him at all John is using a double negative in Greek for emphasis. In English it would come out as, “darkness is not in him not at all.” In Greek the second negative does not cancel the first negative to create a positive meaning. In English the meaning would inaccurately be positive, which is why ULT uses only one negative and says “darkness is not in him at all.” But if your language uses double negatives for emphasis that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1JN 1 5 j020 writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτῷ 1 in him In this second instance in the verse, the pronoun **him** refers to God. Alternate translation: “in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 1 6 j021 figs-hypo ἐὰν εἴπωμεν ὅτι κοινωνίαν ἔχομεν μετ’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τῷ σκότει περιπατῶμεν, ψευδόμεθα καὶ οὐ ποιοῦμεν τὴν ἀλήθειαν 1 If we say that we have fellowship with him and walk in darkness, we are lying and are not doing the truth John is using a hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the importance of consistency between their words and their actions. Alternate translation: “Suppose we say that we have fellowship with him, but we walk in darkness. Then we are lying and are not doing the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1JN 1 6 j022 figs-abstractnouns ἐὰν εἴπωμεν ὅτι κοινωνίαν ἔχομεν μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 If we say that we have fellowship with him If your language does not use abstract nouns, see how you expressed the idea behind the abstract noun **fellowship** in [1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “If we say that we are close friends with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 1 6 j023 writing-pronouns μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 with him The pronoun **him** here refers to God, the antecedent from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 1 6 j024 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 and John is using the word **and** here to introduce a contrast between what would be expected of a person who claims to have fellowship with God and what such a person might do instead. Alternate translation: “but” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1JN 1 6 f958 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ σκότει περιπατῶμεν 1 walk in darkness John is using the word **walk** figuratively to mean how a person lives and behaves. Alternate translation: “do what is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 1 6 j025 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ σκότει περιπατῶμεν 1 walk in darkness As in [1:5](../01/05.md), John is using the word **darkness** figuratively to mean evil. Alternate translation: “do what is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 1 6 f958 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ σκότει περιπατῶμεν 1 walk in darkness John is using the word **walk** to mean how a person lives and behaves. Alternate translation: “do what is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 1 6 j025 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ σκότει περιπατῶμεν 1 walk in darkness As in [1:5](../01/05.md), John is using the word **darkness** to mean evil. Alternate translation: “do what is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 1 6 j026 figs-parallelism ψευδόμεθα καὶ οὐ ποιοῦμεν τὴν ἀλήθειαν 1 we are lying and we are not doing the truth These two phrases mean similar things. John is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “we are really not truthful at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1JN 1 6 j027 figs-abstractnouns οὐ ποιοῦμεν τὴν ἀλήθειαν 1 we are not doing the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with the concrete noun “message” from the previous verse, since that seems to be what John means by **the truth** in this case. Alternate translation: “we are not living according to God’s true message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 1 7 j028 figs-hypo ἐὰν δὲ ἐν τῷ φωτὶ περιπατῶμεν, ὡς αὐτός ἐστιν ἐν τῷ φωτί, κοινωνίαν ἔχομεν μετ’ ἀλλήλων 1 But if we walk in the light as he is in the light, we have fellowship with one another John is using another hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the value and benefits of living a life that is holy, as God is holy. Alternate translation: “But suppose we walk in the light as he is in the light. Then we have fellowship with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -1JN 1 7 lpr3 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ φωτὶ περιπατῶμεν 1 we walk in the light John is using the word **walk** figuratively to mean how a person lives and behaves. Alternate translation: “we do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 1 7 j029 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ φωτὶ περιπατῶμεν 1 we walk in the light As in [1:5](../01/05.md), John is using the word **light** figuratively to mean what is holy, right, and good. Alternate translation: “we do what is holy” or “we do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 1 7 lpr3 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ φωτὶ περιπατῶμεν 1 we walk in the light John is using the word **walk** to mean how a person lives and behaves. Alternate translation: “we do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 1 7 j029 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ φωτὶ περιπατῶμεν 1 we walk in the light As in [1:5](../01/05.md), John is using the word **light** to mean what is holy, right, and good. Alternate translation: “we do what is holy” or “we do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 1 7 j030 writing-pronouns ὡς αὐτός ἐστιν ἐν τῷ φωτί 1 as he is in the light Here the pronoun **he** refers to God. Alternate translation: “as God is in the light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1JN 1 7 j031 figs-metaphor ὡς αὐτός ἐστιν ἐν τῷ φωτί 1 as he is in the light John is using the word **light** figuratively to mean what is holy. Alternate translation: “as God is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 1 7 j031 figs-metaphor ὡς αὐτός ἐστιν ἐν τῷ φωτί 1 as he is in the light John is using the word **light** to mean what is holy. Alternate translation: “as God is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 1 7 j032 figs-abstractnouns κοινωνίαν ἔχομεν μετ’ ἀλλήλων 1 we have fellowship with one another If your language does not use abstract nouns, see how you expressed the idea behind the abstract noun **fellowship** in [1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “then we are close friends with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1JN 1 7 d7d8 figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα Ἰησοῦ 1 the blood of Jesus John is using the word **blood** figuratively here to refer to the sacrificial death of Jesus, by association with the **blood** that Jesus shed when he died for our sins. Alternate translation: “the death of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1JN 1 7 j033 figs-metaphor τὸ αἷμα Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, καθαρίζει ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἁμαρτίας 1 cleanses us from all sin John is speaking figuratively of **sin** as if it made a person dirty and of the **blood** of Jesus as if it made a person clean. Alternate translation: “takes away all of our sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 1 7 d7d8 figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα Ἰησοῦ 1 the blood of Jesus John is using the word **blood** here to refer to the sacrificial death of Jesus, by association with the **blood** that Jesus shed when he died for our sins. Alternate translation: “the death of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 1 7 j033 figs-metaphor τὸ αἷμα Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, καθαρίζει ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἁμαρτίας 1 cleanses us from all sin John is speaking of **sin** as if it made a person dirty and of the **blood** of Jesus as if it made a person clean. Alternate translation: “takes away all of our sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 1 7 jb3e guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus his Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 1 8 j034 figs-hypo ἐὰν εἴπωμεν ὅτι ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ ἔχομεν, ἑαυτοὺς πλανῶμεν καὶ ἡ ἀλήθεια οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 If we say that we have no sin, we are leading ourselves astray, and the truth is not in us John is using another hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the importance of consistency between their words and their actions. Alternate translation: “Suppose we say that we have no sin. Then we are leading ourselves astray, and the truth is not in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1JN 1 8 enu7 ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ ἔχομεν 1 we have no sin Alternate translation: “we never sin” -1JN 1 8 m8hf figs-metaphor ἑαυτοὺς πλανῶμεν 1 we are leading ourselves astray John speaks figuratively of those who say this as if they were guides who were leading people—themselves, actually—in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “we are deceiving ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 1 8 tt51 figs-metaphor ἡ ἀλήθεια οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 the truth is not in us John speaks figuratively of the **truth** as if it were an object that could be inside believers. Alternate translation: “we do not believe that what God says is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 1 8 m8hf figs-metaphor ἑαυτοὺς πλανῶμεν 1 we are leading ourselves astray John speaks of those who say this as if they were guides who were leading people—themselves, actually—in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “we are deceiving ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 1 8 tt51 figs-metaphor ἡ ἀλήθεια οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 the truth is not in us John speaks of the **truth** as if it were an object that could be inside believers. Alternate translation: “we do not believe that what God says is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 1 8 j035 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀλήθεια οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 the truth is not in us If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “we do not believe that what God says is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 1 9 j036 figs-hypo ἐὰν ὁμολογῶμεν τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν, πιστός ἐστιν καὶ δίκαιος 1 If we confess our sins, he is faithful and righteous John is using another hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the value and benefits of living in holiness. Alternate translation: “Suppose we confess our sins. Then he is faithful and righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1JN 1 9 agve figs-explicit ἐὰν ὁμολογῶμεν τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν 1 Part of confessing sin to God is rejecting them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “If we confess our sins to God and turn away from them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 1 9 gb5l writing-pronouns πιστός ἐστιν…ἵνα ἀφῇ 1 he is faithful … that he should forgive The pronoun **he** refers to God in both instances in this verse. Alternate translation: “God is faithful … and God will forgive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 1 9 f68c figs-parallelism ἵνα ἀφῇ ἡμῖν τὰς ἁμαρτίας, καὶ καθαρίσῃ ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἀδικίας 1 that he should forgive us our sins and cleanse us from all unrighteousness These two phrases mean basically the same thing. John is likely using them together for emphasis. If including both phrases would be confusing for your readers, you could combine them and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “and he will completely forgive us of what we have done wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1JN 1 9 j038 figs-metaphor ἀφῇ ἡμῖν τὰς ἁμαρτίας, καὶ καθαρίσῃ ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἀδικίας 1 cleanse us from all unrighteousness As in [1:7](../01/07.md), John is speaking figuratively of **sins** as if they made a person dirty and of God’s forgiveness as if it made a person clean. Alternate translation: “not hold against us anything that we have done wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 1 9 j038 figs-metaphor ἀφῇ ἡμῖν τὰς ἁμαρτίας, καὶ καθαρίσῃ ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἀδικίας 1 cleanse us from all unrighteousness As in [1:7](../01/07.md), John is speaking of **sins** as if they made a person dirty and of God’s forgiveness as if it made a person clean. Alternate translation: “not hold against us anything that we have done wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 1 9 j039 figs-abstractnouns πάσης ἀδικίας 1 all unrighteousness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “anything that we have done wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 1 10 j040 figs-hypo ἐὰν εἴπωμεν ὅτι οὐχ ἡμαρτήκαμεν, ψεύστην ποιοῦμεν αὐτὸν 1 If we say that we have not sinned, we make him a liar John is using another hypothetical situation to help his readers recognize the serious implications of not living in holiness. Alternate translation: “Suppose we say that we have not sinned. Then we are calling God a liar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1JN 1 10 j041 writing-pronouns αὐτὸν…αὐτοῦ 1 him … his The pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God in this verse. Alternate translation: “God … God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 1 10 hii2 figs-explicit ψεύστην ποιοῦμεν αὐτὸν 1 we make him a liar Be sure that it is clear in your translation that God would not actually be a **liar** in this case. Rather, a person who claimed to be without sin would be calling God a liar, since God has said that everyone is a sinner. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “that is the same as calling God a liar, because God has said that we have all sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1JN 1 10 j042 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 his word is not in us John is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what God has said by using words. Alternate translation: “we do not believe what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1JN 1 10 m3p1 figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 his word is not in us As he did about the “truth” in [1:8](../01/08.md), John is speaking figuratively of God’s **word** as if it were an object that could be inside believers. Alternate translation: “we do not believe what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 1 10 j042 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 his word is not in us John is using the term **word** to mean what God has said by using words. Alternate translation: “we do not believe what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 1 10 m3p1 figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 his word is not in us As he did about the “truth” in [1:8](../01/08.md), John is speaking of God’s **word** as if it were an object that could be inside believers. Alternate translation: “we do not believe what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 intro zjj9 0 # 1 John 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (2:1–17, continuing from 1:5)
2. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18–2:27)
3. Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28–29, continues through 3:10)

In order to show that John is writing something like poetry in [2:12–14](../02/12.md), some translations set the statements in those verses farther to the right than the rest of the text, and they begin a new line at the start of each statement.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Antichrist

In [2:18](../02/18.md) and [2:22](../02/22.md), John writes both about a specific person called the Antichrist and about many people who will be “antichrists.” The word “antichrist” means “opposed to Christ.” The Antichrist is a person who will come just before the return of Jesus and imitate Jesus’ work, but he will do that for evil purposes. Before that person comes, there will be many other people who work against Christ. They too are called “antichrists,” but as a description rather than as a name. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [2:20](../02/20.md), some ancient manuscripts read “you all know,” and that is the reading that ULT follows. However, other ancient manuscripts read “you know all things.” It seems more likely, based on everything else in the letter, that “you all know” is the correct original reading, since John is countering the claim of false teachers to know more than other believers. The reading “you know all things” seems to have arisen because copyists felt a need to have an object for the verb “know.” Nevertheless, if a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 2 1 j043 τεκνία μου 1 My little children Here and in several other places in the book, John uses the diminutive form of the word **children** as an affectionate form of address. Alternate translation: “My dear children” -1JN 2 1 v57g figs-metaphor τεκνία μου 1 My little children John is using the word **children** figuratively to describe the believers to whom he is writing. They are under his spiritual care, and so he regards them in that sense as if they were his own children. You could translate this in a non-figurative way, or you could represent the metaphor as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “You dear believers who are under my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 1 v57g figs-metaphor τεκνία μου 1 My little children John is using the word **children** to describe the believers to whom he is writing. They are under his spiritual care, and so he regards them in that sense as if they were his own children. You could translate this in a non-figurative way, or you could represent the metaphor as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “You dear believers who are under my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 1 p49e ταῦτα γράφω 1 I am writing these things Here, **these things** refers generally to everything that John has written about in the letter so far. Alternate translation: “I am writing this letter” 1JN 2 1 j044 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 And The word **And** here introduces a contrast between what John hopes to achieve by writing, that these believers will not sin, and what might happen, that one of them might sin. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1JN 2 1 bi4g figs-hypo ἐάν τις ἁμάρτῃ, Παράκλητον ἔχομεν πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα 1 if anyone should sin, we have an advocate with the Father John is describing a hypothetical situation in order to reassure his readers. Alternate translation: “suppose someone does sin. Then we have an advocate with the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 2 1 j046 figs-nominaladj δίκαιον 1 the righteous John is using the adjective **righteous** as a noun in order to indicate a specific type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the one who is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1JN 2 2 j047 writing-pronouns αὐτὸς 1 he The pronoun **he** here refers to Jesus, the antecedent in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 2 2 h8fg figs-abstractnouns αὐτὸς ἱλασμός ἐστιν περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν, οὐ περὶ τῶν ἡμετέρων δὲ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ ὅλου τοῦ κόσμου 1 he is the propitiation for our sins, and not for ours only, but also for the whole world The abstract noun **propitiation** refers to something that someone does for someone else or gives to someone else so that he will no longer be angry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this term by translating it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “because of Jesus, God is no longer angry about our sins, and not only about ours, but also about those of the whole world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1JN 2 2 j048 figs-metonymy ὅλου τοῦ κόσμου 1 the whole world John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it figuratively refers to the people living in the world. Alternate translation: “everyone in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 2 2 j048 figs-metonymy ὅλου τοῦ κόσμου 1 the whole world John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it refers to the people living in the world. Alternate translation: “everyone in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 2 2 m14q figs-ellipsis οὐ περὶ τῶν ἡμετέρων δὲ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ ὅλου τοῦ κόσμου 1 John leaves out the word for “sins” in these clauses because it is understood from the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include the missing word. Alternate translation: “and not only for our sins, but also for the sins of the whole world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1JN 2 3 j049 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι ἐγνώκαμεν αὐτόν, ἐὰν τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ τηρῶμεν 1 in this we know that we have known him, if we keep his commandments If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “if we obey what he has commanded, then we can be assured that we have a close relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1JN 2 3 ubc9 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι ἐγνώκαμεν αὐτόν, ἐὰν τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ τηρῶμεν 1 If your language would not use a conditional statement with **if** for something that is true, you could express the same idea using a word like “by” or another way. Alternate translation: “there is a way to be sure that we truly know God. This is by obeying his commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) @@ -103,111 +103,111 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 2 4 j054 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 and John is using the word **and** to introduce a contrast between what such a person might say and what his conduct actually indicates to be true. Alternate translation: “but” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1JN 2 4 qp1j figs-idiom μὴ τηρῶν 1 does not keep In this instance, the word **keep** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “does not obey” or “disobeys” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 2 4 j055 figs-parallelism ψεύστης ἐστίν, καὶ ἐν τούτῳ ἡ ἀλήθεια οὐκ ἔστιν 1 is a liar, and the truth is not in this one These two phrases mean similar things. John is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “is certainly not speaking the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1JN 2 4 cj84 figs-metaphor καὶ ἐν τούτῳ ἡ ἀλήθεια οὐκ ἔστιν 1 and the truth is not in this one John is speaking figuratively of the **truth** as if it were an object that could be inside someone. See how you translated a similar expression in [1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “and such a person is not speaking the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 4 cj84 figs-metaphor καὶ ἐν τούτῳ ἡ ἀλήθεια οὐκ ἔστιν 1 and the truth is not in this one John is speaking of the **truth** as if it were an object that could be inside someone. See how you translated a similar expression in [1:8](../01/08.md). Alternate translation: “and such a person is not speaking the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 4 j056 figs-abstractnouns καὶ ἐν τούτῳ ἡ ἀλήθεια οὐκ ἔστιν 1 and the truth is not in this one If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “and what such a person says is not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 2 5 a3x8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δ’ 1 This sentence makes a contrast by saying in a positive way what the previous sentence said in a negative way. Indicate this contrast in a natural way in your language. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1JN 2 5 j057 figs-hypo ὃς δ’ ἂν τηρῇ αὐτοῦ τὸν λόγον, ἀληθῶς ἐν τούτῳ ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ τετελείωται 1 But whoever keeps his word, in this one truly the love of God has been perfected John is suggesting another hypothetical situation in order to reassure his readers. Alternate translation: “But suppose someone keeps his word. Then the love of God truly has been perfected in that person.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -1JN 2 5 j058 figs-metonymy τηρῇ αὐτοῦ τὸν λόγον 1 keeps his word John is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what God has commanded by using words. Alternate translation: “obeys God’s commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 2 5 j058 figs-metonymy τηρῇ αὐτοῦ τὸν λόγον 1 keeps his word John is using the term **word** to mean what God has commanded by using words. Alternate translation: “obeys God’s commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 2 5 aqa4 figs-idiom τηρῇ αὐτοῦ τὸν λόγον 1 keeps his word In this instance, the word **keep** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “obeys God’s commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 2 5 j059 writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ…αὐτῷ 1 his … him The pronouns **his** and **him** in this verse refer to God. Alternate translation: “God’s … God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 2 5 x88p figs-possession ἀληθῶς ἐν τούτῳ ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ τετελείωται 1 in this one truly the love of God has been perfected The phrase **the love of God** could mean one of two things. (1) It could refer to a person loving God. Alternate translation: “that person indeed loves God completely” (2) It could refer to God loving people. Alternate translation: “God’s love has completely achieved its purpose in that person’s life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1JN 2 5 j060 figs-activepassive ἀληθῶς ἐν τούτῳ ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ τετελείωται 1 in this one truly the love of God has been perfected If it would be helpful in your language, you could restate the passive verbal form **has been perfected** with an active verbal form in its place. The person or thing doing the action will depend on how you decide to translate the phrase **the love of God**. Alternate translation: “that person indeed loves God completely” or “God’s love has completely achieved its purpose in that person’s life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 2 5 jdzb figs-metaphor ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι ἐν αὐτῷ ἐσμεν 1 The word **this** could be referring to (1) what John is about to say in verse 6, or (2) what John has just said in verse 5, or (3) both. If your language allows it, you could choose option (3), since both verses are talking about completely obeying God, but most languages will need to choose one or the other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 5 b688 figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ ἐσμεν 1 we are in him John is speaking figuratively as if believers could be inside of God. This expression describes having a close relationship with God. Alternate translation: “we are living in fellowship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 5 b688 figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ ἐσμεν 1 we are in him John is speaking as if believers could be inside of God. This expression describes having a close relationship with God. Alternate translation: “we are living in fellowship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 6 u6lu figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ μένειν 1 he remains in him See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to this book. Here to **remain in** God means very much the same thing as to have “fellowship with God” in [1:3](../01/03.md) and [1:6](../01/06.md) and to “be in” God in [2:5](../02/05.md). John is repeating the same idea in different ways. Alternate translation: “he has close fellowship with God” or “he shares life with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 6 j061 figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ μένειν 1 he remains in him John once again speaks figuratively as if believers could be inside of God. Alternate translation: “he is close friends with God” or “he shares life with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 6 j061 figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ μένειν 1 he remains in him John once again speaks as if believers could be inside of God. Alternate translation: “he is close friends with God” or “he shares life with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 6 j062 writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτῷ 1 in him The pronoun **him** refers to God. Alternate translation: “in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1JN 2 6 x5n1 figs-metaphor ὀφείλει καθὼς ἐκεῖνος περιεπάτησεν, καὶ αὐτὸς περιπατεῖν 1 ought, just as that one walked, also to walk himself As in [1:6](../01/06.md) and [1:7](../01/07.md), John is using the word **walk** figuratively to mean how a person lives and behaves. Alternate translation: “must live as Jesus lived” or “must obey God just as Jesus did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 6 x5n1 figs-metaphor ὀφείλει καθὼς ἐκεῖνος περιεπάτησεν, καὶ αὐτὸς περιπατεῖν 1 ought, just as that one walked, also to walk himself As in [1:6](../01/06.md) and [1:7](../01/07.md), John is using the word **walk** to mean how a person lives and behaves. Alternate translation: “must live as Jesus lived” or “must obey God just as Jesus did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 6 lvw4 figs-explicit ὀφείλει καθὼς ἐκεῖνος περιεπάτησεν, καὶ αὐτὸς περιπατεῖν 1 John is using the phrase **just as that one walked** specifically to refer to the way that Jesus behaved when he lived on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “must walk in the same way as Jesus walked when he was living on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 2 6 j063 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνος 1 that one John is using the demonstrative pronoun **that one** to refer to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 2 7 py9g figs-nominaladj ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved **Beloved** is another term of affection by which John addresses the believers to whom he is writing. It involves using the adjective “beloved” as a noun in order to indicate a specific group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” or “My dear friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1JN 2 7 vz9w figs-idiom ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 from the beginning John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to the time when the people to whom he is writing first believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “ever since you first believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1JN 2 7 eia9 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος ὃν ἠκούσατε 1 the word that you heard John is using **word** figuratively to refer to the message that these believers heard, which was communicated through words. Alternate translation: “the message that you heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 2 7 eia9 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος ὃν ἠκούσατε 1 the word that you heard John is using **word** to refer to the message that these believers heard, which was communicated through words. Alternate translation: “the message that you heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 2 7 amu6 figs-explicit ὁ λόγος ὃν ἠκούσατε 1 the word that you heard The implication is that the specific **word** or message that John is describing is the commandment Jesus gave to believers that they should love one another. See the Gospel of John [13:34](../jhn/13/34.md) and [15:12](../jhn/15/12.md). John indicates this explicitly in this letter in [3:23](../03/23.md) and [4:21](../04/21.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly at this point as well. Alternate translation: “the commandment Jesus gave that we should love one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1JN 2 8 j064 figs-idiom πάλιν 1 Again John is using the term **Again** idiomatically in the sense of “Looking at this again from another perspective.” Alternate translation: “On the other hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1JN 2 8 j064 figs-idiom πάλιν 1 Again John is using the term **Again** in the sense of “Looking at this again from another perspective.” Alternate translation: “On the other hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 2 8 i1up figs-explicit ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφω ὑμῖν 1 I am writing a new commandment to you John is referring to the same **commandment** as in [2:7](../02/07.md), the commandment that Jesus gave to love one another, which the believers have had all along. So he does not mean that he is now writing a **new** and different commandment, but rather that this same commandment, which he called “old” there, can also be considered **new** in a certain sense. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what **commandment** John is referring to, and you could give the likely reason why it can be considered **new** as well as “old.” Alternate translation: “the commandment that I am writing to you, to love one another, is also, in a sense, a new commandment, because it is characteristic of a new way of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 2 8 j065 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅ ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν, ὅτι ἡ σκοτία παράγεται, καὶ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν ἤδη φαίνει 1 which is true in him and in you, because the darkness is going away and the true light is already shining If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses, since the second clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Because the darkness is going away and the true light is already shining, this commandment is true in Jesus and in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1JN 2 8 j066 figs-explicit ὅ ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 which is true in him and in you Since Jesus consistently obeyed the commandment to love, it is likely that John is emphasizing that believers are doing the same thing themselves. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could bring out this implicit emphasis in your translation. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus truly obeyed this commandment, and you are now truly obeying it as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1JN 2 8 c2fa figs-metaphor ὅ ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 which is true in him and in you John is speaking figuratively as if this commandment were **true** inside of Jesus and these believers. Alternate translation: “Jesus truly obeyed this commandment, and you are now truly obeying it as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 8 c2fa figs-metaphor ὅ ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 which is true in him and in you John is speaking as if this commandment were **true** inside of Jesus and these believers. Alternate translation: “Jesus truly obeyed this commandment, and you are now truly obeying it as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 8 j067 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 him The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus. John is using him as the supreme example of loving others. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1JN 2 8 i8gr figs-metaphor ἡ σκοτία παράγεται, καὶ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν ἤδη φαίνει 1 the darkness is going away and the true light is already shining As in [1:5](../01/05.md), John is using the word **darkness** figuratively to represent evil and the word **light** figuratively to represent what is holy, right, and good. The **shining** of the light figuratively represents its influence on people. Alternate translation: “what is evil is going away and people are able to see what is genuinely good more and more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 8 i8gr figs-metaphor ἡ σκοτία παράγεται, καὶ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν ἤδη φαίνει 1 the darkness is going away and the true light is already shining As in [1:5](../01/05.md), John is using the word **darkness** to represent evil and the word **light** to represent what is holy, right, and good. The **shining** of the light represents its influence on people. Alternate translation: “what is evil is going away and people are able to see what is genuinely good more and more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 8 j068 figs-metonymy τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν 1 the true light Since John calls God “the True One” in [5:20](../05/20.md), he may be referring to God’s goodness and holiness when he says **the true light**. Alternate translation: “the goodness of God” or “the holiness of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 2 9 a3jt figs-hypo ὁ λέγων ἐν τῷ φωτὶ εἶναι, καὶ τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ μισῶν, ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ ἐστὶν ἕως ἄρτι 1 The one who says he is in the light and hates his brother is in the darkness until now John is suggesting a further hypothetical situation in order to challenge his readers. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone says that he is in the light, but he hates his brother. That person is actually still in the darkness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -1JN 2 9 srl7 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ φωτὶ εἶναι 1 he is in the light As in [1:5](../01/05.md) and [2:8](../02/08.md), John is using the word **light** figuratively to mean what is holy, right, and good. Alternate translation: “he does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 9 srl7 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ φωτὶ εἶναι 1 he is in the light As in [1:5](../01/05.md) and [2:8](../02/08.md), John is using the word **light** to mean what is holy, right, and good. Alternate translation: “he does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 9 j069 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 and John is using the word **and** here to introduce a contrast between what such a person might say and what his conduct actually indicates to be true. Alternate translation: “but” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1JN 2 9 j4f7 figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his brother John is using the term **brother** figuratively to mean someone who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 9 j4f7 figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his brother John is using the term **brother** to mean someone who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 9 j070 figs-gendernotations τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his brother Although the term **brother** is masculine, John is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1JN 2 9 mp9f figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ ἐστὶν 1 is in the darkness As in [1:5](../01/05.md), John is using the word **darkness** figuratively to mean what is wrong or evil. Alternate translation: “is doing what is wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 9 mp9f figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ ἐστὶν 1 is in the darkness As in [1:5](../01/05.md), John is using the word **darkness** to mean what is wrong or evil. Alternate translation: “is doing what is wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 9 j071 ἕως ἄρτι 1 until now Alternate translation: “still” 1JN 2 10 j072 figs-hypo ὁ ἀγαπῶν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐν τῷ φωτὶ μένει 1 The one who loves his brother remains in the light John is suggesting a further hypothetical situation in order to reassure his readers. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone does love his fellow believers. Then he is genuinely doing what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1JN 2 10 j073 figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his brother See how you translated **his brother** in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “each fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 10 j074 figs-genericnoun τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his brother If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this term by translating this in the plural, since John is speaking of loving all believers. Alternate translation: “each of his brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -1JN 2 10 j075 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ φωτὶ μένει 1 remains in the light John is using the word **light** figuratively to mean what is holy, right, and good. Alternate translation: “is genuinely doing what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 10 j075 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ φωτὶ μένει 1 remains in the light John is using the word **light** to mean what is holy, right, and good. Alternate translation: “is genuinely doing what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 10 j076 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ φωτὶ μένει 1 remains in the light See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. Here the word seems to describe behavior that is recognized to be genuine because it is consistent. Alternate translation: “is genuinely doing what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 10 q2x1 figs-metaphor σκάνδαλον ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν 1 a stumbling-block is not in him John is using the term **stumbling-block**, which means something that a person would trip over, figuratively to mean something that would cause a person to sin. Alternate translation: “he has no reason to sin” or “nothing will cause him to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 10 q2x1 figs-metaphor σκάνδαλον ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν 1 a stumbling-block is not in him John is using the term **stumbling-block**, which means something that a person would trip over, to mean something that would cause a person to sin. Alternate translation: “he has no reason to sin” or “nothing will cause him to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 10 j077 figs-explicit σκάνδαλον ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν 1 a stumbling-block is not in him John speaks of this **stumbling-block** being **in** or inside a person because it represents the hatred for a fellow believer that he describes in [2:9](../02/09.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he has no hatred inside of him that will cause him to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 2 11 j078 figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his brother See how you translated **his brother** in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 11 j079 figs-parallelism ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ ἐστὶν, καὶ ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ περιπατεῖ 1 is in the darkness and walks in the darkness These two phrases mean similar things. John is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and express the emphasis in a different way. Alternate translation: “is living in complete darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1JN 2 11 w4r2 figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ ἐστὶν, καὶ ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ περιπατεῖ 1 is in the darkness As in [1:5](../01/05.md), John is using the word **darkness** figuratively to mean what is wrong or evil. Alternate translation: “is living in a way that is wrong” or “does what is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 11 u44x figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ περιπατεῖ 1 walks in the darkness John is using the word **walks** figuratively to mean how a person lives and behaves. Alternate translation: “conducts his life in wrong ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 11 w4r2 figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ ἐστὶν, καὶ ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ περιπατεῖ 1 is in the darkness As in [1:5](../01/05.md), John is using the word **darkness** to mean what is wrong or evil. Alternate translation: “is living in a way that is wrong” or “does what is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 11 u44x figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ περιπατεῖ 1 walks in the darkness John is using the word **walks** to mean how a person lives and behaves. Alternate translation: “conducts his life in wrong ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 11 j080 grammar-connect-logic-result οὐκ οἶδεν ποῦ ὑπάγει, ὅτι ἡ σκοτία ἐτύφλωσεν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 he does not know where he is going, because the darkness has blinded his eyes If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because the darkness has blinded his eyes, he does not know where he is going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1JN 2 11 y5cs figs-metaphor οὐκ οἶδεν ποῦ ὑπάγει 1 he does not know where he is going This is a continuation of the metaphor of walking as a figurative description of how a person lives and behaves. Alternate translation: “he does not know the right way to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 11 j081 figs-metaphor ὅτι ἡ σκοτία ἐτύφλωσεν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 because the darkness has blinded his eyes John is using blindness figuratively to mean a loss of moral sense. Alternate translation: “because his evil thoughts are keeping him from knowing right and wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 12 in8n figs-metaphor τεκνία 1 little children The term **little children** here could refer to: (1) all of the believers to whom John is writing. This is the way that he uses this term in [2:1](../02/01.md) and in several other places in this letter. See the explanation of it in two of the notes to [2:1](../02/01.md). If that is the sense, then John divides the believers into only two groups in verses 12-14, the older ones and the younger ones. See the UST. Or it could refer to: (2) only some of the believers. In that case, John is addressing the believers in three different groups in verses 12-14, and this group would figuratively represent new believers, that is, those who have very recently put their faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of their sins. This would also apply to the similar term in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “new believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 11 j081 figs-metaphor ὅτι ἡ σκοτία ἐτύφλωσεν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 because the darkness has blinded his eyes John is using blindness to mean a loss of moral sense. Alternate translation: “because his evil thoughts are keeping him from knowing right and wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 12 in8n figs-metaphor τεκνία 1 little children The term **little children** here could refer to: (1) all of the believers to whom John is writing. This is the way that he uses this term in [2:1](../02/01.md) and in several other places in this letter. See the explanation of it in two of the notes to [2:1](../02/01.md). If that is the sense, then John divides the believers into only two groups in verses 12-14, the older ones and the younger ones. See the UST. Or it could refer to: (2) only some of the believers. In that case, John is addressing the believers in three different groups in verses 12-14, and this group would represent new believers, that is, those who have very recently put their faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of their sins. This would also apply to the similar term in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “new believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 12 y00g ὅτι 1 The word translated as **because** here could also be translated as “that.” In other words, what follows this word could be either: (1) the reason that John is writing or (2) the content that John wants to communicate. This also applies to the same phrase that is used several times in verses 13 and 14. Alternate translation: “that” 1JN 2 12 ed41 figs-activepassive ἀφέωνται ὑμῖν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 your sins have been forgiven If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “God has forgiven your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 2 12 j082 writing-pronouns διὰ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 because of his name The pronoun **his** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1JN 2 12 yjy8 figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 because of his name John is using the **name** of Jesus figuratively to represent who Jesus is and what he has done. Alternate translation: “on account of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 2 12 yjy8 figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 because of his name John is using the **name** of Jesus to represent who Jesus is and what he has done. Alternate translation: “on account of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 2 13 kue2 figs-metaphor πατέρες 1 fathers The term **fathers** here is likely a figurative description of one part of the believers. In that case, it could mean either: (1) “mature believers” or (2) “church leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 13 y1vm ἐγνώκατε 1 you know As in [2:4](../02/04.md), John is using the word **know** in a specific sense. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “you know very well” 1JN 2 13 wmt8 figs-idiom τὸν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 the one who is from the beginning John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to Jesus or possibly to God the Father. John refers to Jesus with these same words at the beginning of this letter and in a similar way in John 1:1-2. Alternate translation: “him who has always existed” or “Jesus, who has always existed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 2 13 wg4v figs-metaphor νεανίσκοι 1 young men Here, **young men** is likely a figurative description of a part of the group of believers. It probably refers to people who have become strong in their faith, even if they are not yet as mature as those in the group of **fathers**, since **young men** are in the time of life when they are strong and vigorous. Alternate translation: “strong believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 13 j083 figs-gendernotations νεανίσκοι 1 young men Although the term **men** is masculine, John is likely using the word figuratively in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “strong believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1JN 2 13 tfh1 figs-metaphor νενικήκατε τὸν πονηρόν 1 you have overcome the evil one John speaks figuratively of these strong believers refusing to do what the devil wants them to do as if they had defeated him in a struggle. Alternate translation: “you refuse to do what the devil wants you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 13 j083 figs-gendernotations νεανίσκοι 1 young men Although the term **men** is masculine, John is likely using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “strong believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1JN 2 13 tfh1 figs-metaphor νενικήκατε τὸν πονηρόν 1 you have overcome the evil one John speaks of these strong believers refusing to do what the devil wants them to do as if they had defeated him in a struggle. Alternate translation: “you refuse to do what the devil wants you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 13 j084 figs-nominaladj τὸν πονηρόν 1 the evil one John is using the adjective **evil** as a noun in order to indicate a specific being. ULT adds **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the one who is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1JN 2 13 j085 figs-metonymy τὸν πονηρόν 1 the evil one John is speaking figuratively of the devil by association with his characteristic of being **evil**. Alternate translation: “the devil” or “Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 2 13 j085 figs-metonymy τὸν πονηρόν 1 the evil one John is speaking of the devil by association with his characteristic of being **evil**. Alternate translation: “the devil” or “Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 2 14 j086 figs-parallelism ἔγραψα ὑμῖν, παιδία, ὅτι ἐγνώκατε τὸν Πατέρα 1 I have written to you, young children, because you know the Father This sentence is similar to the sentence in [2:12](../02/12.md). The next two sentences in this verse mean basically the same thing as the two sentences in [2:13](../02/13.md). John is using these repetitions for emphasis and for poetic effect. For those reasons, it would be appropriate to translate all of these sentences separately and not combine them with the ones in the previous two verses, even if you combine parallel statements with similar meanings elsewhere in the book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1JN 2 14 j087 translate-textvariants ἔγραψα ὑμῖν, παιδία, ὅτι ἐγνώκατε τὸν Πατέρα 1 I have written to you, young children, because you know the Father In some Bibles, this sentence comes at the end of [2:13](../02/13.md) instead of at the beginning of this verse. The verse divisions were introduced to the Bible many centuries after its books were written, and their purpose is only to help readers find things easily. So the placement of this sentence, either at the start of this verse or at the end of the previous one, does not create any significant difference in meaning. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the placement in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the placement in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 2 14 j088 figs-verbs ἔγραψα ὑμῖν 1 I have written to you By saying **I have written**, John is expressing himself slightly differently than in [2:12–13](../02/12.md), where he says, “I am writing.” The difference is likely only for emphasis, as John looks back at what he has just said and indicates that he is saying it again. However, if your language distinguishes between the present and present perfect tenses, it would be appropriate to show the difference in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]]) -1JN 2 14 j089 figs-metaphor παιδία 1 young children While **young children** is a different term from “little children” in [2:12](../02/12.md), figuratively it means the same thing. See how you translated the similar term there. Alternate translation: “who are like my own children” or “new believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 14 j089 figs-metaphor παιδία 1 young children While **young children** is a different term from “little children” in [2:12](../02/12.md), it means the same thing. See how you translated the similar term there. Alternate translation: “who are like my own children” or “new believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 14 j090 ἐγνώκατε 1 you know As in [2:4](../02/04.md), John is using the word **know** in a specific sense. See how you translated it there and in [2:13](../02/13.md). Alternate translation: “you are very close with” 1JN 2 14 j091 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 2 14 j092 figs-metaphor πατέρες 1 fathers The term **fathers** likely has the same figurative meaning as in [2:13](../02/13.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: (1) “mature believers” or (2) “church leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 14 j093 ἐγνώκατε 2 you know As in [2:4](../02/04.md), [2:13](../02/13.md), and earlier in this verse, John is using the word **know** in a specific sense. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “you are very close with” 1JN 2 14 j094 figs-idiom τὸν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 the one who is from the beginning John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to Jesus or possibly to God the Father. John refers to Jesus with these same words at the beginning of this letter, in [2:13](../02/13.md), and in a similar way in John 1:1-2. Alternate translation: “him who has always existed” or “Jesus, who has always existed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 2 14 j095 figs-metaphor νεανίσκοι 1 young men The term **young men** likely has the same figurative meaning here as in [2:13](../02/13.md). Alternate translation: “strong believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 14 j096 figs-gendernotations νεανίσκοι 1 young men Although the term **men** is masculine, John is likely using the word figuratively in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “strong believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1JN 2 14 l74j figs-metaphor ἰσχυροί ἐστε 1 you are strong John is using the word **strong** not literally to describe believers’ physical strength, but figuratively to describe their faithfulness to Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are faithful to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 14 j096 figs-gendernotations νεανίσκοι 1 young men Although the term **men** is masculine, John is likely using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “strong believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1JN 2 14 l74j figs-metaphor ἰσχυροί ἐστε 1 you are strong John is using the word **strong** not literally to describe believers’ physical strength, but to describe their faithfulness to Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are faithful to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 14 u3n8 figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν ὑμῖν μένει 1 the word of God remains in you See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. Here the word seems to describe behavior that is recognized to be genuine because it is consistent. Alternate translation: “you genuinely obey what God has commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 14 j097 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God John is using the term **word** figuratively to refer to what God has commanded using words. Alternate translation: “what God has commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1JN 2 14 j098 figs-metaphor νενικήκατε τὸν πονηρόν 1 you have overcome the evil one John speaks figuratively of these strong believers refusing to do what the devil wants them to do as if they had defeated him in a struggle. Alternate translation: “you refuse to do what the devil wants you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 14 j097 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God John is using the term **word** to refer to what God has commanded using words. Alternate translation: “what God has commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 2 14 j098 figs-metaphor νενικήκατε τὸν πονηρόν 1 you have overcome the evil one John speaks of these strong believers refusing to do what the devil wants them to do as if they had defeated him in a struggle. Alternate translation: “you refuse to do what the devil wants you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 14 j099 figs-nominaladj τὸν πονηρόν 1 the evil one John is using the adjective **evil** as a noun in order to indicate a specific being. ULT adds **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the one who is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1JN 2 14 j100 figs-metonymy τὸν πονηρόν 1 the evil one John is speaking figuratively of the devil by association with his characteristic of being **evil**. Alternate translation: “the devil” or “Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 2 14 j100 figs-metonymy τὸν πονηρόν 1 the evil one John is speaking of the devil by association with his characteristic of being **evil**. Alternate translation: “the devil” or “Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 2 15 j101 figs-ellipsis μὴ ἀγαπᾶτε τὸν κόσμον, μηδὲ τὰ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 Do not love the world, nor the things that are in the world In the second phrase in this sentence, John leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the first phrase. Alternate translation: “Do not love the world, and do not love any of the things that are in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1JN 2 15 xig6 figs-metonymy μὴ ἀγαπᾶτε τὸν κόσμον 1 Do not love the world John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it figuratively refers to the system of values that people share who do not honor God. This system is necessarily contrary to the values that godly people have. Alternate translation: “Do not share the ungodly value system of the people who do not honor God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 2 15 xig6 figs-metonymy μὴ ἀγαπᾶτε τὸν κόσμον 1 Do not love the world John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it refers to the system of values that people share who do not honor God. This system is necessarily contrary to the values that godly people have. Alternate translation: “Do not share the ungodly value system of the people who do not honor God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 2 15 h2hm figs-parallelism μηδὲ τὰ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 nor the things that are in the world This phrase means essentially the same thing as the preceding one. John is likely using repetition for emphasis. However, since there is a slight difference in meaning, you may wish to translate these phrases separately rather than combining them. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “No, do not share any of the values that characterize the worldly system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1JN 2 15 p56b figs-hypo ἐάν τις ἀγαπᾷ τὸν κόσμον, οὐκ ἔστιν ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Πατρὸς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If anyone loves the world, the love of the Father is not in him John is describing a hypothetical situation in order to challenge his readers. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone loves the world. Then the love of the Father is not in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1JN 2 15 s48z figs-possession οὐκ ἔστιν ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Πατρὸς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 the love of the Father is not in him The phrase **the love of the Father** could mean: (1) the love that a person has for God the Father. Alternate translation: “that person does not really love God the Father” or (2) the love that God has for people. Alternate translation: “God the Father’s love is not genuinely at work in that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1JN 2 15 j102 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 of the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “of God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 2 16 j103 translate-versebridge ὅτι 1 For In this verse, John is giving the reason why the previous sentence is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this reason before that statement of result by combining this verse and the previous one into a verse bridge. In order to create a verse bridge, you could begin this verse with “since” instead of **For**; you could end it with a comma instead of a period; and you could make it the beginning of the second sentence in the previous verse, putting it before “if anyone loves the world.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) 1JN 2 16 j104 figs-metonymy πᾶν τὸ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 everything that is in the world See how you translated the similar expression in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “everything that characterizes the ungodly value system of the people who do not honor God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1JN 2 16 pz3q figs-metonymy ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῆς σαρκὸς 1 the lust of the flesh John is using the term **flesh** figuratively to mean the physical human body, which is made of **flesh**. Alternate translation: “the strong desire to have sinful physical pleasure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1JN 2 16 x124 figs-metonymy ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν 1 the lust of the eyes John is using the term **eyes** figuratively to mean the ability to see. Alternate translation: “the strong desire to have the things that we see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 2 16 pz3q figs-metonymy ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῆς σαρκὸς 1 the lust of the flesh John is using the term **flesh** to mean the physical human body, which is made of **flesh**. Alternate translation: “the strong desire to have sinful physical pleasure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 2 16 x124 figs-metonymy ἡ ἐπιθυμία τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν 1 the lust of the eyes John is using the term **eyes** to mean the ability to see. Alternate translation: “the strong desire to have the things that we see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 2 16 j105 ἡ ἀλαζονία τοῦ βίου 1 the arrogance of life John is likely using the Greek term that ULT translates as **life** in one of its specific senses, to mean “possessions,” as in [3:17](../03/17.md). Alternate translation: “pride in one’s possessions” 1JN 2 16 c3xw figs-metonymy οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ Πατρός, ἀλλὰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἐστίν 1 is not from the Father, but is from the world See how you translated the term **world** in [2:15](../02/15.md). It has a similar meaning in this verse. Alternate translation: “does not represent how God the Father wants us to live, but instead comes from an ungodly value system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 2 16 j106 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 2 17 j107 figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 the world See how you translated the term **world** in [2:15](../02/15.md). It has a similar meaning in this verse. Alternate translation: “the ungodly value system of the people who do not honor God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1JN 2 17 ct43 figs-metaphor ὁ κόσμος παράγεται 1 the world is going away John speaks figuratively of the **world** as if it were leaving. Alternate translation: “the world will not last very much longer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 17 ct43 figs-metaphor ὁ κόσμος παράγεται 1 the world is going away John speaks of the **world** as if it were leaving. Alternate translation: “the world will not last very much longer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 17 j108 figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡ ἐπιθυμία αὐτοῦ 1 and its desire John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and its desire is also going away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1JN 2 17 j109 figs-possession ἡ ἐπιθυμία αὐτοῦ 1 its desire John is using the possessive form to show that the **world** is the source of this **desire** and gives it its character. Alternate translation: “the worldly desire” or “people’s desire for the world” or “the desire that this system of values creates in people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1JN 2 17 j110 figs-genericnoun ἡ ἐπιθυμία αὐτοῦ 1 its desire If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this term by translating this in the plural, since John is referring to all of the different types of **desire** associated with the **world** that he described in [2:16](../02/16.md). Alternate translation: “worldly desires” or “the desires that this system of values creates in people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1JN 2 17 j111 figs-metaphor μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 remains to the age See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. Here the word refers to continuing existence. Alternate translation: “will live forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 17 j112 figs-idiom εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 to the age This is an idiom. Consider using an idiom in your language that has this meaning. Alternate translation: “forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 2 18 t903 checking/headings 0 If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 18. Suggested heading: “False Teaching and True Teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) -1JN 2 18 c7td figs-metaphor παιδία 1 Young children **Young children** is the same term that John used figuratively in [2:14](../02/14.md) that seems to be a stylistic variation of the term that he uses in [2:1](../02/01.md) and [2:12](../02/012.md), as well as in several other places in the book, to address all of the believers to whom he is writing. See how you translated this in those places. Alternate translation: “My dear children” or “You dear believers who are under my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 18 esd9 figs-idiom ἐσχάτη ὥρα ἐστίν -1 it is the last hour … that it is the last hour John is using the term **hour** figuratively to refer a specific time. The expression **the last hour** refers specifically to the time at the end of earthly history just before Jesus returns. Alternate translation: “Jesus will return soon … Jesus will return soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1JN 2 18 c7td figs-metaphor παιδία 1 Young children **Young children** is the same term that John used in [2:14](../02/14.md) that seems to be a stylistic variation of the term that he uses in [2:1](../02/01.md) and [2:12](../02/012.md), as well as in several other places in the book, to address all of the believers to whom he is writing. See how you translated this in those places. Alternate translation: “My dear children” or “You dear believers who are under my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 18 esd9 figs-idiom ἐσχάτη ὥρα ἐστίν -1 it is the last hour … that it is the last hour John is using the term **hour** to refer a specific time. The expression **the last hour** refers specifically to the time at the end of earthly history just before Jesus returns. Alternate translation: “Jesus will return soon … Jesus will return soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 2 18 r2vq translate-unknown ἀντίχριστος ἔρχεται, καὶ νῦν ἀντίχριστοι πολλοὶ γεγόνασιν 1 the Antichrist is coming, indeed now many antichrists have come See the discussion of the terms **antichrist** and **antichrists** in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “someone is coming who will lead a great opposition to Jesus, already many people are opposing Jesus in that way now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1JN 2 19 rmj7 figs-metaphor ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐξῆλθαν 1 They went out from us These people formerly met with the group of believers to whom John is writing. While they physically left the places where the believers met, John is also using the expression **went out** figuratively to mean that these people stopped being part of the group. Alternate translation: “They left our group of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 19 rmj7 figs-metaphor ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐξῆλθαν 1 They went out from us These people formerly met with the group of believers to whom John is writing. While they physically left the places where the believers met, John is also using the expression **went out** to mean that these people stopped being part of the group. Alternate translation: “They left our group of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 19 ytb1 figs-explicit ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἦσαν ἐξ ἡμῶν…οὐκ εἰσὶν πάντες ἐξ ἡμῶν 1 but they were not from us … they are all not from us John is using the expression **from us** in a slightly different sense in these instances than in the first instance in the verse. In the first instance, it means that these people left the group. In this instance, it means that they were never genuinely part of the group. Alternate translation: “but they were never genuinely part of our group … none of them are genuinely part of our group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 2 19 j113 figs-explicit οὐκ ἦσαν ἐξ ἡμῶν 1 they were not from us If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why John makes this claim. Alternate translation: “they were never genuinely part of our group, because they did not actually believe in Jesus in the first place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 2 19 j114 grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ γὰρ ἐξ ἡμῶν ἦσαν, μεμενήκεισαν ἂν μεθ’ ἡμῶν 1 For if they had been from us, they would have remained with us John is presenting a situation that is not real to help his readers recognize why the claim that he is making is true. Alternate translation: “We know that they were not genuinely part of our group because they did not continue to participate in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) @@ -218,14 +218,14 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 2 20 j118 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 And John is using the word **And** to introduce a contrast between the people who left the group and the remaining believers to whom he is writing. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1JN 2 20 i3m1 figs-abstractnouns ὑμεῖς χρῖσμα ἔχετε ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου 1 you have an anointing from the Holy One If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **anointing** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the Holy One has anointed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 2 20 j119 translate-unknown ὑμεῖς χρῖσμα ἔχετε ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου 1 you have an anointing from the Holy One The word **anointing** refers to the practice, seen often in the Old Testament, of pouring oil on a person to set that person apart to serve God. If your readers would not be familiar with this practice, you could describe it specifically in your translation. Alternate translation: “the Holy One has poured oil on you to set you apart to serve him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1JN 2 20 j120 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς χρῖσμα ἔχετε ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου 1 you have an anointing from the Holy One Here John is using **anointing** figuratively to refer to the Holy Spirit. Just as people poured oil on kings and priests to set them apart for service to God, God gives the Holy Spirit to believers to set them apart and equip them to serve God. John says specifically in [3:24](../03/24.md) and [4:13](../04/13.md) that God has given the Spirit to believers in this way. Alternate translation: “the Holy One has given you his Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 20 j120 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς χρῖσμα ἔχετε ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου 1 you have an anointing from the Holy One Here John is using **anointing** to refer to the Holy Spirit. Just as people poured oil on kings and priests to set them apart for service to God, God gives the Holy Spirit to believers to set them apart and equip them to serve God. John says specifically in [3:24](../03/24.md) and [4:13](../04/13.md) that God has given the Spirit to believers in this way. Alternate translation: “the Holy One has given you his Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 20 gy16 figs-nominaladj τοῦ Ἁγίου 1 the Holy One John is using the adjective **Holy** as a noun in order to indicate a specific person. ULT adds **One** to show this. John is referring specifically to God, and so ULT capitalizes both of these words to show that they are describing a divine person. Your language may allow you to use this adjective as a noun. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “God, the One who is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1JN 2 20 j121 translate-textvariants οἴδατε πάντες 1 you all know See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to follow the reading of ULT and say **you all know** or to follow the reading of some other versions and say “you know all things.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 2 20 j122 figs-explicit οἴδατε πάντες 1 you all know Based on what he says in the next verse, John likely means here that the believers to whom he is writing **all know** the truth. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you all know the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 2 21 j123 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔγραψα ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν ἀλήθειαν, ἀλλ’ ὅτι οἴδατε αὐτήν 1 I have not written to you because you do not know the truth, but because you do know it If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this double negative by translating it as a positive statement. Since John then repeats the statement in positive form in the next phrase, you could make the connection to that phrase as an affirmation rather than as a contrast. Alternate translation: “I have written to you because you know the truth, yes, because you do know it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1JN 2 21 w4fm grammar-connect-exceptions οὐκ ἔγραψα ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν ἀλήθειαν, ἀλλ’ ὅτι οἴδατε αὐτήν 1 If saying **I have not written to you** seems wrong or confusing in your language, you could move the negative to the next clause. Alternate translation: “I have written to you not because you do not know the truth, but because you do know the truth” or “I have written to you not to inform you of the truth, but I have written to you because you already know it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) 1JN 2 21 r8yr figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν…ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the truth … from the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “what is true … from what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1JN 2 21 j124 figs-metonymy τὴν ἀλήθειαν…ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the truth … from the truth John is likely referring figuratively to the teaching that believers have received from Jesus by association with the way that it is true. Alternate translation: “the true teaching that we received from Jesus … from this true teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 2 21 j124 figs-metonymy τὴν ἀλήθειαν…ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the truth … from the truth John is likely referring to the teaching that believers have received from Jesus by association with the way that it is true. Alternate translation: “the true teaching that we received from Jesus … from this true teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 2 21 j125 figs-ellipsis καὶ ὅτι πᾶν ψεῦδος ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας οὐκ ἔστιν 1 and that every lie is not from the truth John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and you know that every lie is not from the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1JN 2 21 j126 πᾶν ψεῦδος ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας οὐκ ἔστιν 1 every lie is not from the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase by clarifying it by making the subject negative and the verb positive. Alternate translation: “no lie is from the truth” 1JN 2 21 nruw ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας 1 This second occurrence of **the truth** could refer to: (1) The same as the first occurrence. Alternate translation: “part of God’s true message” (2) God, who is the source of all truth. Alternate translation: “from God, the One who is true” @@ -248,7 +248,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 2 25 llj2 ἡ ἐπαγγελία ἣν αὐτὸς ἐπηγγείλατο ἡμῖν 1 the promise that he promised to us If it is unnatural in your language to use both the noun **promise** and the verb **promised**, you could use just one form of the word in your translation. Alternate translation: “the promise that he made to us” or “what he promised us” 1JN 2 25 j134 writing-pronouns αὐτὸς 1 he The pronoun **he** could refer in this context either to Jesus or to God the Father. However, it seems more likely that it refers to Jesus, since John has just talked in [2:22–23](../02/22.md) about denying or confessing him, and it was Jesus who promised **eternal life** to everyone who believed in him. See, for example, the Gospel of John [3:36](../jhn/03/36.md) and [6:47](../jhn/06/47.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 2 25 id51 figs-metaphor τὴν ζωὴν τὴν αἰώνιον 1 eternal life John means more than physical **life**. This expression can indicate living forever in the presence of God after death, a commonly recognized meaning, but it can also indicate receiving power from God in this life to live in a new way. Alternate translation: “that we would have power to live a new life now and that we would live with him forever after we die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 26 fe44 figs-metaphor τῶν πλανώντων ὑμᾶς 1 those who are leading you astray John speaks figuratively of these people as if they were guides who were **leading** others in the wrong direction. This is a metaphor for their attempts to get the people to whom John is writing to believe things that are not true. Alternate translation: “those who are deceiving you” or “those who are trying to get you to believe things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 26 fe44 figs-metaphor τῶν πλανώντων ὑμᾶς 1 those who are leading you astray John speaks of these people as if they were guides who were **leading** others in the wrong direction. This is a metaphor for their attempts to get the people to whom John is writing to believe things that are not true. Alternate translation: “those who are deceiving you” or “those who are trying to get you to believe things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 26 d3f5 figs-explicit τῶν πλανώντων ὑμᾶς 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly in what way these people are **leading** others astray. Alternate translation: “the people who are leading you astray about Jesus” or “the people who are lying to you about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 2 27 cn2f figs-metaphor τὸ χρῖσμα ὃ ἐλάβετε ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 the anointing that you received from him See how you translated the word **anointing** in [2:20](../02/20.md). Alternate translation: “the Spirit, whom Jesus has given you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 27 j135 writing-pronouns ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ…ἐν αὐτῷ 1 from him … his … in him Like the pronoun “he” in [2:25](../02/25.md), the words **him** and **his** in this verse likely refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name instead of a pronoun. Alternate translation: “from Jesus … in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 2 27 j139 ἀληθές ἐστιν καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ψεῦδος 1 is true and is not a lie Alternate translation: “tells the truth and does not lie” 1JN 2 27 j140 writing-pronouns ἐδίδαξεν ὑμᾶς 1 it has taught you Since the Spirit is a person, if you translate **anointing** as “Spirit” in this verse, it may also be more appropriate in your language to use a personal pronoun in this clause. Alternate translation: “he has taught you” or “the Spirit has taught you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 2 27 wr63 figs-metaphor μένετε ἐν αὐτῷ 1 remain in him See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as in [2:6](../02/06.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “continue to have a close relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 27 j141 figs-metaphor μένετε ἐν αὐτῷ 1 remain in him John is speaking figuratively as if believers could be inside of God. Alternate translation: “continue to have a close relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 27 j141 figs-metaphor μένετε ἐν αὐτῷ 1 remain in him John is speaking as if believers could be inside of God. Alternate translation: “continue to have a close relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 28 co6g checking/headings 0 If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 28. Suggested heading: “Children of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 1JN 2 28 tii1 καὶ νῦν 1 And now John uses the expression **And now** to introduce a new part of the letter, in which he will talk about being children of God and the return of Jesus. In your translation, you could use a word, phrase, or other method that is natural in your language for introducing a new topic. 1JN 2 28 kjn9 figs-metaphor τεκνία 1 little children John readdresses the recipients as he begins a new section of the letter. See how you translated **little children** in [2:1](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “you dear believers who are under my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -268,23 +268,23 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 2 28 zz4x figs-activepassive ἐὰν φανερωθῇ 1 when he appears See the discussion of the term “appear” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. Here the term could have either an active or a passive meaning. In either case, John is not saying that Jesus will only appear to return. (1) If the meaning is active, John is speaking of the act of Jesus physically returning to earth. Alternate translation: “when Jesus returns” (2) If the meaning is passive, John is speaking of God revealing Jesus to the world as its true king. To bring out that meaning, you could translate this with a passive verbal form or, if your language does not use passive forms, you can use an active form and say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “when Jesus is revealed” or “when God reveals Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 2 28 j144 figs-parallelism σχῶμεν παρρησίαν, καὶ μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 we may have boldness and not be put to shame by him These two phrases mean similar things. John is likely using the repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases into an emphatic expression. Alternate translation: “we may be completely confident at his coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1JN 2 28 lnk2 figs-abstractnouns σχῶμεν παρρησίαν 1 we may have boldness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **boldness** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “we may be bold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1JN 2 28 d4ql figs-synecdoche μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 may not be put to shame by him John is using the word **him**, meaning Jesus, figuratively to mean the presence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “we will not be ashamed to be in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1JN 2 28 d4ql figs-synecdoche μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 may not be put to shame by him John is using the word **him**, meaning Jesus, to mean the presence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “we will not be ashamed to be in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1JN 2 28 j145 figs-activepassive μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 may not be put to shame by him If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “we will not be ashamed to be in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 2 28 x7ic ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 at his coming Alternate translation: “when he returns to earth” 1JN 2 29 j146 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν εἰδῆτε ὅτι δίκαιός ἐστιν 1 If you know that he is righteous John is using the form of conditional possibility here, but he is stating something that is actually true. In Greek, this was a way of affirming that the part that follows this statement is also true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1JN 2 29 j147 writing-pronouns ἐστιν…αὐτοῦ 1 he is … him The pronouns **he** and **him** likely refer to God the Father, since in the next two verses John says that believers are “children of God,” and he speaks in this verse of those who have **been begotten from him**. Alternate translation: “God is … God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 2 29 j148 figs-abstractnouns πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην 1 everyone who does righteousness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an adjective such as “right.” Alternate translation: “everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 2 29 u6er figs-activepassive πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγέννηται 1 everyone who does righteousness has been begotten from him If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God is the father of everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1JN 2 29 j149 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγέννηται 1 everyone who does righteousness has been begotten from him Since believers have not literally **been begotten** by God, John means this figuratively. He says in [4:9](../04/09.md) that Jesus is the “only-begotten” of God, since God is the actual Father of Jesus in a way that he is not the actual father of believers. Alternate translation: “God is the spiritual father of everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 29 j149 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγέννηται 1 everyone who does righteousness has been begotten from him Since believers have not literally **been begotten** by God, John means this. He says in [4:9](../04/09.md) that Jesus is the “only-begotten” of God, since God is the actual Father of Jesus in a way that he is not the actual father of believers. Alternate translation: “God is the spiritual father of everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 intro d8r2 0 # 1 John 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Genuine children of God do not sin (3:1–10, continuing from 2:28)
2. Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11–18)
3. Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19–24)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “children of God”

People are sometimes described as “children of God” because God created them. However, John uses this expression in a different sense in this chapter. He uses it to describe people who have entered into a father-child relationship with God by putting their faith and trust in Jesus. God indeed created all people, but people can only become children of God in this sense by believing in Jesus. “Children” in this usage does not refer to those who are young, but only to the relationship that people have at any age to their father. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “the one who keeps his commandments remains in him, and he in him” (3:24)

This does not mean that keeping our salvation is conditional on doing certain works. Rather, John is describing the results of keeping the commandments that he describes in [3:32](../03/32.md). Those commandments are to believe in Jesus and to love one another. John is saying that the person who believes in Jesus and loves others shows that he has a close relationship with God, and that he will continue to have that close relationship because of this obedience. Christians around the world hold different beliefs about whether people who have been saved can lose their salvation. That is not what John is addressing here, and translators should be careful not to let how they understand that issue affect how they translate this passage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [3:1](../03/01.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts include the words “and we are.” That is the reading that ULT follows. However, some other ancient manuscripts do not include these words, and so some Bibles do not have them. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1JN 3 1 gl8n figs-metaphor ἴδετε 1 See John is using the term **See** figuratively. Alternate translation: “Consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 3 1 gl8n figs-metaphor ἴδετε 1 See John is using the term **See**. Alternate translation: “Consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 1 j150 ποταπὴν ἀγάπην δέδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Πατὴρ 1 what kind of love the Father has given to us Alternate translation: “how greatly the Father has loved us” 1JN 3 1 j151 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 3 1 x99a figs-activepassive ἵνα τέκνα Θεοῦ κληθῶμεν 1 that we should be called children of God If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that God should call us his children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 3 1 j362 figs-metaphor τέκνα Θεοῦ 1 children of God Here John expresses the same metaphor as in [2:29](../02/29.md) in a slightly different way. See whether you decided to indicate the figurative meaning there. If you translate **children** using a literal term, choose a word that can refer to people of any age in relation to their father. Alternate translation: “spiritual children of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 1 j152 translate-textvariants καὶ ἐσμέν 1 and we are See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to follow the reading of ULT and include these words or to follow the reading of some other versions and not include them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 3 1 fq4t grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο, ὁ κόσμος οὐ γινώσκει ἡμᾶς, ὅτι οὐκ ἔγνω αὐτόν 1 For this reason the world does not know us, because it did not know him If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because the world did not know God, for that reason it does not know us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1JN 3 1 l5e7 figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦτο, ὁ κόσμος οὐ γινώσκει ἡμᾶς, ὅτι οὐκ ἔγνω αὐτόν 1 For this reason the world does not know us, because it did not know him. John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it figuratively refers to people who do not honor God and who do not live as God wishes. Alternate translation: “because ungodly people have not known God, for that reason they do not know us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 3 1 l5e7 figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦτο, ὁ κόσμος οὐ γινώσκει ἡμᾶς, ὅτι οὐκ ἔγνω αὐτόν 1 For this reason the world does not know us, because it did not know him. John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it refers to people who do not honor God and who do not live as God wishes. Alternate translation: “because ungodly people have not known God, for that reason they do not know us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 3 1 j155 οὐ γινώσκει ἡμᾶς…οὐκ ἔγνω αὐτόν 1 does not know us … it did not know him John is using the word **know** in two different senses. See the discussion of the word “know” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. If your language has different words for these different senses, it would be appropriate to use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “does not recognize who we are … it did not become acquainted with him” 1JN 3 1 j156 figs-explicit οὐ γινώσκει ἡμᾶς 1 does not know us If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what **the world does not know** about believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “does not recognize that we are God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 3 1 j157 writing-pronouns αὐτόν 1 him The pronoun **him** refers to God, the antecedent in the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -301,13 +301,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 3 4 j165 πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν ἁμαρτίαν, καὶ τὴν ἀνομίαν ποιεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐστὶν ἡ ἀνομία 1 Everyone who commits sin also commits lawlessness. Indeed, sin is lawlessness If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain why John gives this warning. See the discussion of “sin” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. Suggested footnote: “The false teachers were saying that it does not matter what people do in their physical bodies. In this way, they were tempting the people to sin.” 1JN 3 5 j166 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνος…ἄρῃ…αὐτῷ 1 that one … he might take away … him The pronouns **that one**, **he**, and **him** refer to Jesus in this verse. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “Jesus” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 3 5 g4ph figs-activepassive ἐκεῖνος ἐφανερώθη 1 that one appeared See the discussion of the term “appear” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. Here the term seems to have an active meaning. Alternate translation: “Jesus came to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1JN 3 5 j167 figs-metaphor ἁμαρτία ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν 1 sin is not in him John speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were an object that could be inside of Jesus, although he is emphasizing that **sin** is not in Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has never sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 3 5 j167 figs-metaphor ἁμαρτία ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν 1 sin is not in him John speaks of **sin** as if it were an object that could be inside of Jesus, although he is emphasizing that **sin** is not in Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has never sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 6 j999 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ ἐν αὐτῷ μένων 1 Everyone who remains in him See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as in [2:6](../02/06.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “Everyone who has a close relationship with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 3 6 j168 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ ἐν αὐτῷ μένων 1 Everyone who remains in him John is speaking figuratively as if believers could be inside of Jesus. Alternate translation: “Everyone who has a close relationship with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 3 6 j168 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ ἐν αὐτῷ μένων 1 Everyone who remains in him John is speaking as if believers could be inside of Jesus. Alternate translation: “Everyone who has a close relationship with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 6 j169 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ…αὐτὸν…αὐτόν 1 him … him … him The pronoun **him** refers to Jesus in this verse. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “Jesus” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 3 6 j170 figs-explicit οὐχ ἁμαρτάνει 1 does not sin If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state what this implicitly means in light of the situation that John is addressing in this letter. See the discussion of “sin” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. John acknowledges elsewhere in this letter that genuine believers actually do sin, but they do not sin continually or wantonly. Alternate translation: “does not sin wantonly and continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 3 6 eu9c figs-doublet οὐχ ἑώρακεν αὐτὸν, οὐδὲ ἔγνωκεν αὐτόν 1 has not seen him and has not known him The words **seen** and **known** mean similar things. John is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these terms into a single expression. Alternate translation: “certainly does not have a close relationship with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1JN 3 6 j172 figs-metaphor οὐχ ἑώρακεν αὐτὸν 1 has not seen him John is not referring to people literally seeing Jesus. Rather, he is using sight figuratively to mean perception and recognition. Alternate translation: “has not recognized who Jesus is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 3 6 j172 figs-metaphor οὐχ ἑώρακεν αὐτὸν 1 has not seen him John is not referring to people literally seeing Jesus. Rather, he is using sight to mean perception and recognition. Alternate translation: “has not recognized who Jesus is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 7 ia4z figs-metaphor τεκνία 1 Little children See how you translated **Little children** in [2:1](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “You dear believers who are under my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 7 wg85 figs-metaphor μηδεὶς πλανάτω ὑμᾶς 1 let no one lead you astray See how you translated the similar expression in [2:26](../02/26.md). Alternate translation: “do not be deceived by anyone” or “do not let anyone get you to believe things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 7 v4yp figs-abstractnouns ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην 1 The one who does righteousness See how you translated the similar expression in [2:29](../02/29.md). Alternate translation: “The one who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -322,9 +322,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 3 9 j176 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ γεγεννημένος ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ…ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ γεγέννηται 1 Everyone who has been begotten from God … because he has been begotten from God See whether in [2:29](../02/29.md) you decided to explain this metaphor. Alternate translation: “Everyone whose spiritual father is God … because God is his spiritual father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 9 j177 writing-pronouns σπέρμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ μένει 1 his seed remains in him In this phrase, **his** refers to **God** and **him** refers to the person **who has been begotten from God**. Alternate translation: “God’s seed remains in such a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 3 9 j178 figs-metaphor σπέρμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ μένει 1 his seed remains in him See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, as in [2:27](../02/27.md), it seems to refer to a continuing presence. Alternate translation: “God’s seed continues to be present in such a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 3 9 ps9v figs-metaphor σπέρμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ μένει 1 his seed remains in him John is using the word **seed** figuratively here. It could mean: (1) The characteristics of a father that a child inherits from him and displays more and more as he grows. Alternate translation: “the characteristics that show that God is his father become continually more evident” (2) Something that gives life such as the **seed** from which plants grow. Alternate translation: “the new life that God has put in that person continues to grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 3 9 ps9v figs-metaphor σπέρμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ μένει 1 his seed remains in him John is using the word **seed** here. It could mean: (1) The characteristics of a father that a child inherits from him and displays more and more as he grows. Alternate translation: “the characteristics that show that God is his father become continually more evident” (2) Something that gives life such as the **seed** from which plants grow. Alternate translation: “the new life that God has put in that person continues to grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 10 w33l figs-idiom ἐν τούτῳ φανερά ἐστιν τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ τὰ τέκνα τοῦ διαβόλου 1 In this the children of God and the children of the devil are apparent **In this** means something similar to the idiomatic expression “in this we know” that John uses many times in this letter. The word **this** refers to what John says in the next sentence. Alternate translation: “This is how we can tell the difference between the children of God and the children of the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1JN 3 10 j179 figs-idiom τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ τὰ τέκνα τοῦ διαβόλου 1 the children of God and the children of the devil John is using the word **children** idiomatically in both of these instances. His usage is similar to the Hebrew idiom in which the “child” of something shares its characteristics. Alternate translation: “people who are living a new life in close relationship with God and people who are still in their old way of life influenced by the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1JN 3 10 j179 figs-idiom τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ τὰ τέκνα τοῦ διαβόλου 1 the children of God and the children of the devil John is using the word **children** in both of these instances. His usage is similar to the Hebrew idiom in which the “child” of something shares its characteristics. Alternate translation: “people who are living a new life in close relationship with God and people who are still in their old way of life influenced by the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 3 10 ctk6 figs-doublenegatives πᾶς ὁ μὴ ποιῶν δικαιοσύνην, οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Everyone who does not do righteousness is not from God If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this double negative by translating it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Everyone who does wrong is alienated from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1JN 3 10 j180 figs-abstractnouns ὁ μὴ ποιῶν δικαιοσύνην 1 who does not do righteousness See how you translated the similar expression in [2:29](../02/29.md). Alternate translation: “who does not do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 3 10 j181 figs-idiom οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 is not from God The expression **from God** is an idiom. John uses it in various ways in this letter. Alternate translation: “does not belong to God” or “is not living in relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -337,40 +337,40 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 3 12 j184 translate-names Κάϊν 1 Cain **Cain** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1JN 3 12 j185 ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ ἦν 1 who was from the evil one This is similar to the phrase “from the devil” in [3:8](../03/08.md). See how you translated that phrase. Alternate translation: “who belonged to the evil one” or “who was influenced by the evil one” 1JN 3 12 j186 figs-nominaladj τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 the evil one John is using the adjective **evil** as a noun in order to indicate a specific being. ULT adds **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the one who is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1JN 3 12 j187 figs-metonymy τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 the evil one John is speaking figuratively of the devil by association with the way that he is **evil**. Alternate translation: “the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 3 12 j187 figs-metonymy τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 the evil one John is speaking of the devil by association with the way that he is **evil**. Alternate translation: “the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 3 12 b1xh figs-rquestion καὶ χάριν τίνος ἔσφαξεν αὐτόν? ὅτι 1 And on account of what did he kill him? Because John is using a question as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “He killed him because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1JN 3 12 mq7x figs-ellipsis τὰ δὲ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ, δίκαια 1 but those of his brother, righteous John is leaving out a word, “were,” that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. The word “were” can be supplied for clarity. Alternate translation: “but his brother’s works were righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1JN 3 13 j188 grammar-connect-logic-result μὴ θαυμάζετε 1 Do not wonder If it would be helpful in your language, you could show the connection between this sentence and the previous one by using a connecting word like “so” or “therefore.” Using the example of Cain, John shows that evil people naturally hate righteous people. Alternate translation: “So do not be surprised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1JN 3 13 wc1m figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated **brothers** in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “my friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 3 13 lq9f figs-metonymy εἰ μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὁ κόσμος 1 if the world hates you John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it figuratively refers to people who do not honor God and who do not live as God wishes, as in [3:1](../03/01.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “if ungodly people hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 3 13 lq9f figs-metonymy εἰ μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὁ κόσμος 1 if the world hates you John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it refers to people who do not honor God and who do not live as God wishes, as in [3:1](../03/01.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “if ungodly people hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 3 14 j189 grammar-connect-logic-result ἡμεῖς οἴδαμεν ὅτι μεταβεβήκαμεν ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου εἰς τὴν ζωήν, ὅτι ἀγαπῶμεν τοὺς ἀδελφούς 1 We know that we have relocated from death into life, because we love the brothers If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because we love the brothers, we know that we have relocated from death into life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1JN 3 14 gc6e ἡμεῖς οἴδαμεν ὅτι μεταβεβήκαμεν ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου εἰς τὴν ζωήν, ὅτι ἀγαπῶμεν τοὺς ἀδελφούς 1 Be sure that your translation does not communicate that loving the brothers is what causes people to pass from death to life. Alternate translation: “The way that we know that we have relocated from death into life is because we love the brothers” -1JN 3 14 fs1x figs-metaphor μεταβεβήκαμεν ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου εἰς τὴν ζωήν 1 we have relocated from death into life John is speaking figuratively of the conditions of being dead and alive as if they were physical locations between which a person could move. Alternate translation: “we are no longer dead but have become alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 3 14 fs1x figs-metaphor μεταβεβήκαμεν ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου εἰς τὴν ζωήν 1 we have relocated from death into life John is speaking of the conditions of being dead and alive as if they were physical locations between which a person could move. Alternate translation: “we are no longer dead but have become alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 14 ybc4 figs-metaphor μεταβεβήκαμεν ἐκ τοῦ θανάτου εἰς τὴν ζωήν 1 we have relocated from death into life Since John and his readers were not literally dead, he is referring to spiritual **death** and to spiritual **life**. Alternate translation: “we are no longer dead spiritually but have become alive spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 14 j190 figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφούς 1 the brothers See how you translated **the brothers** in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 14 j191 figs-ellipsis ὁ μὴ ἀγαπῶν 1 The one who does not love John does not say specifically whom such a person **does not love**. In context, it appears that he means other believers. But it is also possible that John means other people in general. Alternate translation: “The one who does not love his fellow believers” or “The one who does not love other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1JN 3 14 qa7l figs-metaphor μένει ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ 1 remains in death See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it means staying in the same place. John is once again speaking figuratively of the state of **death** as if it were a location. Alternate translation: “remains dead spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 3 15 mqu2 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ μισῶν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, ἀνθρωποκτόνος ἐστίν 1 Everyone who hates his brother is a murderer John is using the term **murderer** figuratively, and he is echoing the teaching of Jesus that is recorded in Matthew [5:21–22](../05/21.md). John means that since people commit murder because they hate other people, anyone who hates is the same on the inside as someone who actually kills another person. It may be helpful to translate this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “Whoever hates another believer is just like someone who kills a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 3 14 qa7l figs-metaphor μένει ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ 1 remains in death See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it means staying in the same place. John is once again speaking of the state of **death** as if it were a location. Alternate translation: “remains dead spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 3 15 mqu2 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ μισῶν τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ, ἀνθρωποκτόνος ἐστίν 1 Everyone who hates his brother is a murderer John is using the term **murderer**, and he is echoing the teaching of Jesus that is recorded in Matthew [5:21–22](../05/21.md). John means that since people commit murder because they hate other people, anyone who hates is the same on the inside as someone who actually kills another person. It may be helpful to translate this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “Whoever hates another believer is just like someone who kills a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 15 j192 figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his brother See how you translated **his brother** in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 15 j193 πᾶς ἀνθρωποκτόνος οὐκ ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 every murderer does not have eternal life If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the subject negative and the verb positive. Alternate translation: “no murderer has eternal life” 1JN 3 15 j194 figs-metaphor ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 eternal life Since John is speaking of a present reality, by **eternal life** he does not mean living forever in the presence of God after death, which is one thing that this expression can describe. Rather, he means the regenerating power that God gives to believers in this life that helps them to stop sinning and to do what pleases him. Clearly, anyone who is a **murderer** does not have this power at work in him. Alternate translation: “the power that God gives to help us become new people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 3 15 s3aw figs-personification οὐκ ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώνιον ἐν αὐτῷ μένουσαν 1 does not have eternal life remaining in him See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, John seems to be using the term literally, in the sense of “residing,” to depict **eternal life** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could actively reside within a person. Alternate translation: “has not received eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1JN 3 15 s3aw figs-personification οὐκ ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώνιον ἐν αὐτῷ μένουσαν 1 does not have eternal life remaining in him See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, John seems to be using the term literally, in the sense of “residing,” to depict **eternal life** as if it were a living thing that could actively reside within a person. Alternate translation: “has not received eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1JN 3 16 j195 figs-idiom ἐν τούτῳ ἐγνώκαμεν τὴν ἀγάπην 1 In this we have known love **In this we have known** means something similar to the idiomatic expression “in this we know” that John uses many times in this letter. Alternate translation: “This is how we have come to understand what love is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 3 16 j196 writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνος 1 that one The demonstrative pronoun **that one** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 3 16 a2cq figs-idiom ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἔθηκεν 1 laid down his life for us This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “willingly gave his life for us” or “willingly died for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1JN 3 16 j197 figs-metaphor καὶ ἡμεῖς ὀφείλομεν ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀδελφῶν, τὰς ψυχὰς θεῖναι 1 We also ought to lay down our lives for the brothers John is not saying that we should seek out ways to die for our fellow believers in a literal sense, but that we should be prepared to do so, if necessary. However, he is also using the expression **lay down our lives** figuratively to mean that we should seek ways to love our fellow believers in sacrificial ways, as he illustrates in the next verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 3 16 j197 figs-metaphor καὶ ἡμεῖς ὀφείλομεν ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀδελφῶν, τὰς ψυχὰς θεῖναι 1 We also ought to lay down our lives for the brothers John is not saying that we should seek out ways to die for our fellow believers in a literal sense, but that we should be prepared to do so, if necessary. However, he is also using the expression **lay down our lives** to mean that we should seek ways to love our fellow believers in sacrificial ways, as he illustrates in the next verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 16 j198 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers See how you translated **the brothers** in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 17 j199 figs-hypo ὃς…ἂν ἔχῃ τὸν βίον τοῦ κόσμου 1 whoever has the possessions of the world John uses this expression to introduce a hypothetical situation, which he discusses over the course of the whole verse. He is not talking about any specific person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could restate this as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1JN 3 17 nlj7 figs-metonymy τὸν βίον τοῦ κόσμου 1 the possessions of the world In this letter, John uses **world** to mean various things. Here it refers to the created world, and so to material things such as, in this context, money, food, and clothing. Alternate translation: “material possessions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 3 17 j200 figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his brother See how you translated **his brother** in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 17 b6lh χρείαν ἔχοντα 1 having need Alternate translation: “who needs help” -1JN 3 17 zql1 figs-idiom κλείσῃ τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 closes his entrails from him This is an idiom in which the **entrails** or internal organs figuratively represent the emotions that would lead a person to act generously. Your language may have an equivalent figurative expression that you could use. You could also express the plain meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “closes his heart to him” or “refuses to have compassion on him” or “declines to help him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1JN 3 17 zql1 figs-idiom κλείσῃ τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 closes his entrails from him This is an idiom in which the **entrails** or internal organs represent the emotions that would lead a person to act generously. Your language may have an equivalent figurative expression that you could use. You could also express the plain meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “closes his heart to him” or “refuses to have compassion on him” or “declines to help him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 3 17 l8u4 figs-rquestion πῶς ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ μένει ἐν αὐτῷ? 1 how does the love of God remain in him? John is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “the love of God does not remain in such a person!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1JN 3 17 j201 figs-metaphor πῶς ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ μένει ἐν αὐτῷ 1 how does the love of God remain in him? See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. As in [2:14](../02/14.md), here the word seems to describe behavior that is recognized to be genuine because it is consistent. Alternate translation: “such a person does not genuinely love others with love that is from God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 17 j202 figs-possession πῶς ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ μένει ἐν αὐτῷ 1 the love of God As in [2:5](../02/05.md), the phrase **the love of God** could mean: (1) God loving people. Alternate translation: “Is it possible that he has truly received God’s love” (2) a person loving God. Alternate translation: “is it really possible that he truly loves God” We recommend option (1) if you must choose. But it is probable that John intends both meanings here, so if your translation can leave the possibilities open, that would be best. Alternate translation: “is he really loving others the way that God loves him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1JN 3 18 g6uh figs-metaphor τεκνία 1 Little children See how you translated **Little children** in [2:1](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “You dear believers who are under my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 18 p91w figs-doublet μὴ ἀγαπῶμεν λόγῳ, μηδὲ τῇ γλώσσῃ 1 let us not love in word, nor in tongue The phrases **in word** and **in tongue** mean similar things. John is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these terms into a single expression. Alternate translation: “let us not love only by what we say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1JN 3 18 j203 figs-metonymy μὴ ἀγαπῶμεν λόγῳ, μηδὲ τῇ γλώσσῃ 1 let us not love in word, nor in tongue John is using the phrases **in word** and **in tongue** figuratively to refer to what a person says. Alternate translation: “let us not love only by what we say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 3 18 j203 figs-metonymy μὴ ἀγαπῶμεν λόγῳ, μηδὲ τῇ γλώσσῃ 1 let us not love in word, nor in tongue John is using the phrases **in word** and **in tongue** to refer to what a person says. Alternate translation: “let us not love only by what we say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 3 18 b4mm figs-hyperbole μὴ ἀγαπῶμεν λόγῳ, μηδὲ τῇ γλώσσῃ 1 John is not saying that we should never express love through words. He is using hyperbole to make a contrast between words and actions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a word such as “only” or “merely.” Alternate translation: “let us not love only by what we say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1JN 3 18 j204 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ ἐν ἔργῳ καὶ ἀληθείᾳ 1 but in deed and truth John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but let us love in deed and in truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1JN 3 18 j205 figs-hendiadys ἐν ἔργῳ καὶ ἀληθείᾳ 1 in deed and truth John is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **truth** indicates the quality that loving **in deed** would have. Alternate translation: “truly, in actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -379,17 +379,17 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 3 19 k2rv ἐν τούτῳ 1 **In this** could refer either to: (1) What John has just said in verse 18. Alternate translation: “If we do that” (2) What John is about to say in verse 20. Alternate translation: “I will tell you how” 1JN 3 19 j207 figs-idiom ἐν τούτῳ γνωσόμεθα 1 In this we will know This is an idiomatic expression that John uses many times in this letter. Alternate translation: “This is how we can know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 3 19 j208 figs-parallelism γνωσόμεθα, ὅτι ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν, καὶ…πείσομεν τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν 1 we will know that we are from the truth and we will persuade our hearts The phrases **we will know** and **we will persuade our hearts** mean similar things. John is likely using the repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases into an emphatic expression. Alternate translation: “we will be completely convinced that we are from the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1JN 3 19 qx9c figs-metonymy ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν 1 we are from the truth This could mean one of two things. (1) John could be referring figuratively to God by association with the way that God is true. In other words, God always tells **the truth** and does what he says. Alternate translation: “we are from God, who is true” (2) As in [2:21](../02/21.md), the word **truth** could refer to the true teaching that believers have received from Jesus. Alternate translation: “we are conducting our lives according to the true message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 3 19 qx9c figs-metonymy ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν 1 we are from the truth This could mean one of two things. (1) John could be referring to God by association with the way that God is true. In other words, God always tells **the truth** and does what he says. Alternate translation: “we are from God, who is true” (2) As in [2:21](../02/21.md), the word **truth** could refer to the true teaching that believers have received from Jesus. Alternate translation: “we are conducting our lives according to the true message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 3 19 j209 figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν 1 we are from the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “we are from the One who is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 3 19 j210 figs-idiom ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας ἐσμέν 1 we are from the truth See how you translated the expression in [3:10](../03/10.md) that has a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “we belong to God” or “we are living in relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1JN 3 19 mv6c figs-metaphor πείσομεν τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν 1 we will persuade our hearts John is speaking figuratively of **hearts** to mean thoughts and feelings. There may be a similar expression in your language. Alternate translation: “we can reassure ourselves about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 3 19 mv6c figs-metaphor πείσομεν τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν 1 we will persuade our hearts John is speaking of **hearts** to mean thoughts and feelings. There may be a similar expression in your language. Alternate translation: “we can reassure ourselves about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 19 j211 writing-pronouns ἔμπροσθεν αὐτοῦ 1 before him The pronoun **him** refers to God. Alternate translation: “before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 3 19 j212 figs-metaphor ἔμπροσθεν αὐτοῦ 1 before him The word **before** means “in front of” or “in the presence of” someone. It likely refers to when we pray to God or are otherwise aware that he sees everything that we do. Alternate translation: “when we pray to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 20 j213 figs-hypo ὅτι ἐὰν καταγινώσκῃ ἡμῶν ἡ καρδία, ὅτι μείζων ἐστὶν ὁ Θεὸς τῆς καρδίας ἡμῶν, καὶ γινώσκει πάντα 1 that if our heart condemns us, that God is greater than our heart and knows everything John is discussing a hypothetical situation in order to reassure his readers. Alternate translation: “Suppose our heart condemns us. Then we should remember that God is greater than our heart and knows everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -1JN 3 20 f594 figs-metaphor ἐὰν καταγινώσκῃ ἡμῶν ἡ καρδία 1 if our heart condemns us John continues speaking figuratively of the **heart** to mean the thoughts and feelings. There may be a similar expression in your language. Alternate translation: “if our feelings condemn us” or “if our thoughts accuse us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 3 20 f594 figs-metaphor ἐὰν καταγινώσκῃ ἡμῶν ἡ καρδία 1 if our heart condemns us John continues speaking of the **heart** to mean the thoughts and feelings. There may be a similar expression in your language. Alternate translation: “if our feelings condemn us” or “if our thoughts accuse us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 20 j214 figs-explicit ἐὰν καταγινώσκῃ ἡμῶν ἡ καρδία 1 if our heart condemns us The topic here, continuing from [3:19](../03/19.md), is how we can know that “we are from the truth,” so this is likely a reference to needing reassurance about that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “if we ever feel that we do not belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 3 20 j215 figs-possession ἡμῶν ἡ καρδία…τῆς καρδίας ἡμῶν 1 our heart … our heart If it would be unusual in your language to speak of one **heart** in reference to many people, and if you decide to retain the word **heart** as a metaphor in your translation, you could make it plural. Alternate translation: “our hearts … our hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1JN 3 20 j216 figs-parallelism μείζων ἐστὶν ὁ Θεὸς τῆς καρδίας ἡμῶν, καὶ γινώσκει πάντα 1 God is greater than our heart and knows everything Since John is using the **heart** figuratively to mean the thoughts and feelings, the statement that **God is greater than our heart** likely means that God knows and understands more than we do and that God has greater compassion for us than we have for ourselves. In that case, the phrases **is greater than our heart** and **knows everything** would mean similar things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases into an emphatic expression. Alternate translation: “God certainly knows better than we do that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1JN 3 20 j216 figs-parallelism μείζων ἐστὶν ὁ Θεὸς τῆς καρδίας ἡμῶν, καὶ γινώσκει πάντα 1 God is greater than our heart and knows everything Since John is using the **heart** to mean the thoughts and feelings, the statement that **God is greater than our heart** likely means that God knows and understands more than we do and that God has greater compassion for us than we have for ourselves. In that case, the phrases **is greater than our heart** and **knows everything** would mean similar things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases into an emphatic expression. Alternate translation: “God certainly knows better than we do that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1JN 3 20 lv7z figs-explicit μείζων ἐστὶν ὁ Θεὸς τῆς καρδίας ἡμῶν, καὶ γινώσκει πάντα 1 God is greater than our heart and knows everything The implications are that, given God’s greater knowledge, we should believe what he has said rather than what our thoughts and feelings are saying. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God certainly knows better than we do that we belong to him, and so we should believe that because he has said so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 3 21 rf96 figs-nominaladj ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved See how you translated **Beloved** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1JN 3 21 j217 figs-hypo ἐὰν ἡ καρδία μὴ καταγινώσκῃ, παρρησίαν ἔχομεν πρὸς τὸν Θεόν, 1 if the heart does not condemn, we have confidence toward God John discusses another hypothetical situation in order to reassure his readers. Alternate translation: “Suppose our hearts do not condemn us. Then we have confidence toward God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) @@ -402,28 +402,28 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 3 22 j224 figs-nominaladj τὰ ἀρεστὰ ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ 1 we do the pleasing things before him John is using the adjective **pleasing** as a noun. ULT adds **things** to show this. (The word is plural.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that please him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1JN 3 22 p3ga figs-metaphor τὰ ἀρεστὰ ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ 1 the pleasing things before him The word **before** means “in front of” or “in the presence of” another person. In this case, **before him** indicates “in God’s sight.” Seeing, for its part, represents attention and judgment. So this means the things that God regards as pleasing. Alternate translation: “the things that please him” or “what God considers to be good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 23 irb3 writing-pronouns αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ 1 this is his commandment … as he gave us commandment The pronoun **his** refers to God in this verse. Alternate translation: “this is what God has commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1JN 3 23 j225 figs-metonymy τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of his Son Jesus Christ As in [2:12](../02/12.md), John is using the **name** of Jesus figuratively to represent who Jesus is and what he has done. Alternate translation: “in Jesus Christ his Son and what he has done for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 3 23 j225 figs-metonymy τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of his Son Jesus Christ As in [2:12](../02/12.md), John is using the **name** of Jesus to represent who Jesus is and what he has done. Alternate translation: “in Jesus Christ his Son and what he has done for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 3 23 feq7 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Υἱοῦ 1 his Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 3 23 sip4 writing-pronouns ἔδωκεν 1 The pronoun **he** here may refer to: (1) Jesus or (2) God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 3 24 j226 writing-pronouns ὁ τηρῶν τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ, ἐν αὐτῷ μένει 1 the one who keeps his commandments remains in him, and he in him The pronouns **his** and **him** here refer to God. Alternate translation: “the one who keeps God’s commandments remains in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 3 24 j227 figs-idiom ὁ τηρῶν τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ 1 the one who keeps his commandments The word **keep** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “the person who obeys God’s commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 3 24 we1m figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ μένει 1 remains in him See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as in [2:6](../02/06.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “continues to have a close relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 3 24 j228 figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ μένει 1 remains in him John is speaking figuratively as if believers could be inside of God. Alternate translation: “continues to have a close relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 3 24 j228 figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ μένει 1 remains in him John is speaking as if believers could be inside of God. Alternate translation: “continues to have a close relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 24 j229 figs-ellipsis καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 and he in him John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and God remains in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1JN 3 24 j230 figs-metaphor καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 and he in him John is speaking figuratively as if God could be inside of believers. Alternate translation: “and God continues to have a close relationship with that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 3 24 j230 figs-metaphor καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 and he in him John is speaking as if God could be inside of believers. Alternate translation: “and God continues to have a close relationship with that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 24 fz4g figs-gendernotations καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Although the term **him** here is masculine, John is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “and God continues to have a close relationship with that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1JN 3 24 j231 figs-idiom ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι 1 in this we know that This is an idiomatic expression that John uses many times in this letter. Alternate translation: “this is how we know that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 3 24 j232 figs-metaphor μένει ἐν ἡμῖν 1 he remains in us See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as it does earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “he continues to have a close relationship with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 4 intro l3qa 0 # 1 John 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1–6)
2. Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7–21)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Spirit” and “spirit”

John uses the word “spirit” in different ways in this chapter.
Sometimes the word “spirit” clearly refers to a supernatural being.
Sometimes the word “spirit” may refer either to the human spirit, to the character of something, or to a supernatural being. Therefore, the expressions “the spirit of the antichrist,” “the spirit of truth,” and “the spirit of error” may refer to the spirit of the humans who promote those things, the attitudes and thinking that are typical of those things, or to spiritual beings who inspire those things.
When the word is written with a capital letter, as in the expressions “the Spirit of God” and “his Spirit,” it refers to the Holy Spirit.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Loving God

If people love God, they should show it in the way that they live and the way that they treat other people. Doing this may assure us that God has saved us and that we belong to him. But loving others does not save us. Be sure that this is clear in your translation. John says in 4:7 that “everyone who loves is begotten from God and knows God.” As the notes explain, this means that God is the spiritual father of everyone who loves, and everyone who loves is in a close relationship with God. But this love from God is a sign that they belong to God only because of what Jesus did for them on the cross, as John says in 4:10. They were saved by what Jesus did, not because they themselves loved others. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [4:3](../04/03.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts say “acknowledge Jesus.” That is the reading that ULT follows. Some other ancient manuscripts say “acknowledge Jesus Christ having come in the flesh.” (Some of these manuscripts say “Jesus” or “the Lord Jesus” instead of “Jesus Christ.”) If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 4 1 a7h4 checking/headings 0 If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 1. Suggested heading: “Recognizing the Spirit of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 1JN 4 1 h1lv figs-nominaladj ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved See how you translated **Beloved** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1JN 4 1 zm7f figs-metonymy μὴ παντὶ πνεύματι πιστεύετε, ἀλλὰ δοκιμάζετε τὰ πνεύματα 1 do not believe every spirit, but test the spirits John is speaking figuratively of a prophet by association with the **spirit** that would inspire a prophet to speak. Alternate translation: “do not believe every prophet; instead, consider carefully what prophets say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 4 1 zm7f figs-metonymy μὴ παντὶ πνεύματι πιστεύετε, ἀλλὰ δοκιμάζετε τὰ πνεύματα 1 do not believe every spirit, but test the spirits John is speaking of a prophet by association with the **spirit** that would inspire a prophet to speak. Alternate translation: “do not believe every prophet; instead, consider carefully what prophets say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 4 1 j234 εἰ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 whether they are from God John uses the expression **from God** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to origin. Alternate translation: “in order to determine whether God has sent them” or “in order to determine whether God is inspiring them” 1JN 4 1 x71q figs-ellipsis εἰ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 This sentence leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “to see whether they are from God, or whether they are not from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1JN 4 1 j235 figs-metonymy ἐξεληλύθασιν εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 have gone out into the world John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it figuratively refers to the people living in the world. Alternate translation: “are out there speaking to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 4 1 j235 figs-metonymy ἐξεληλύθασιν εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 have gone out into the world John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it refers to the people living in the world. Alternate translation: “are out there speaking to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 4 2 j236 figs-idiom ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκετε 1 In this you know This is an idiomatic expression that John uses many times in this letter. Alternate translation: “This is how you can recognize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1JN 4 2 j237 figs-metonymy πᾶν πνεῦμα ὃ ὁμολογεῖ 1 Every spirit that confesses John is speaking figuratively of a prophet by association with the **spirit** that would inspire a prophet to speak. Alternate translation: “Every prophet who teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1JN 4 2 e6ww figs-metonymy Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἐν σαρκὶ ἐληλυθότα 1 Jesus Christ having come in the flesh As in [2:16](../02/16.md), John is using the term **flesh** figuratively to mean the physical human body, which is made of **flesh**. See Part 2 of the Introduction to 1 John for an explanation of why the false teachers denied that Jesus had a human body. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ had a real human body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 4 2 j237 figs-metonymy πᾶν πνεῦμα ὃ ὁμολογεῖ 1 Every spirit that confesses John is speaking of a prophet by association with the **spirit** that would inspire a prophet to speak. Alternate translation: “Every prophet who teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 4 2 e6ww figs-metonymy Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἐν σαρκὶ ἐληλυθότα 1 Jesus Christ having come in the flesh As in [2:16](../02/16.md), John is using the term **flesh** to mean the physical human body, which is made of **flesh**. See Part 2 of the Introduction to 1 John for an explanation of why the false teachers denied that Jesus had a human body. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ had a real human body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 4 2 j238 ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 is from God See how you translated this expression in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “is inspired by God” or, if your language does not use passive forms, “God is inspiring,” placing that phrase before **every spirit** or “every prophet” 1JN 4 3 j239 figs-metonymy πᾶν πνεῦμα ὃ μὴ ὁμολογεῖ 1 every spirit that does not confess See how you translated the similar expression in [4:2](../04/02.md). Alternate translation: “every prophet who does not teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 4 3 j240 translate-textvariants Ἰησοῦν 1 confess Jesus See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to follow the reading of ULT and say **Jesus** here or to follow the reading of some other manuscripts and say “Jesus Christ having come in the flesh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) @@ -433,17 +433,17 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 4 3 cda6 writing-pronouns τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ τοῦ ἀντιχρίστου 1 this is that of the Antichrist The word **that** most likely means “the spirit,” referring back to the word **spirit** in the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “this is the spirit of the antichrist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 4 3 j244 τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ τοῦ ἀντιχρίστου 1 this is that of the Antichrist Assuming that the word **that** means “the spirit,” see the discussion of the word “spirit” in the General Notes to this chapter. In this instance, John is referring to either: (1) the characteristic attitude of something, or (2) a supernatural being who inspires that attitude. Also see how you translated the term **antichrist** in [2:18](../02/18.md). Alternate translation: “this false teaching is opposed to Jesus” 1JN 4 3 j245 writing-pronouns ὃ ἀκηκόατε ὅτι ἔρχεται, καὶ νῦν ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ ἐστὶν ἤδη 1 which you have heard about, that it is coming, and it is now already in the world The word **which** refers to the **spirit** of **the antichrist**, which was already **in the world** at the time when John wrote, and not to **the antichrist** himself, who was not **in the world**. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You have heard that this false teaching is coming, and it is now already circulating among people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1JN 4 3 j246 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 in the world John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here, while it could possibly mean the literal earth (so this expression would mean “on this earth”), it more likely refers figuratively to the people living in the world. Alternate translation: “circulating among people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 4 3 j246 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 in the world John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here, while it could possibly mean the literal earth (so this expression would mean “on this earth”), it more likely refers to the people living in the world. Alternate translation: “circulating among people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 4 4 j247 figs-idiom ὑμεῖς ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστε 1 You are from God The expression **from God** means something different in this verse than in the previous three verses, since it refers to believers rather than to the spirits that are inspiring prophets. It means the same thing as in [3:10](../03/10.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “You belong to God” or “You are living in relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 4 4 w1yr figs-metaphor τεκνία 1 little children See how you translated **little children** in [2:1](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “you dear believers who are under my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 4 4 avj3 figs-metaphor νενικήκατε αὐτούς 1 you have overcome them As in [2:13](../02/13.md) and [2:14](../02/14.md), John is using the word **overcome** figuratively. He is speaking of the believers’ refusal to believe the false prophets as if the believers had defeated these prophets in a struggle. Alternate translation: “you have refused to believe these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 4 4 avj3 figs-metaphor νενικήκατε αὐτούς 1 you have overcome them As in [2:13](../02/13.md) and [2:14](../02/14.md), John is using the word **overcome**. He is speaking of the believers’ refusal to believe the false prophets as if the believers had defeated these prophets in a struggle. Alternate translation: “you have refused to believe these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 4 4 j248 writing-pronouns αὐτούς 1 them The pronoun **them** refers to the false prophets whom John describes in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1JN 4 4 j5ve figs-metaphor ἐστὶν ὁ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 the one who is in you As in [3:24](../03/24.md), John is speaking figuratively as if God could be inside of believers. Alternate translation: “God, with whom you have a close relationship,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 4 4 j5ve figs-metaphor ἐστὶν ὁ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 the one who is in you As in [3:24](../03/24.md), John is speaking as if God could be inside of believers. Alternate translation: “God, with whom you have a close relationship,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 4 4 j249 μείζων…ἢ 1 greater than If it would be helpful in your language, for this context you could use a more specific word than **greater**. Alternate translation: “stronger than” 1JN 4 4 tp4q figs-metonymy ὁ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 the one in the world The phrase **in the world** here and in [verse 5](../04/05.md) seems to have a different meaning than in [verse 1](../04/01.md) and [verse 3](../04/03.md). There, it refers to location, so when John says in [verse 3](../04/03.md) that the spirit of the antichrist is “in the world,” it means “on this earth” or “circulating among people.” But here, John seems to be using the term **world** to mean the value system that is opposed to God. In that case, the phrase **the one in the world** would refer to the devil by association with the way that he inspires that system. Alternate translation: “the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1JN 4 5 y2z8 figs-metonymy αὐτοὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου εἰσίν; διὰ τοῦτο ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου λαλοῦσιν 1 They are from the world. Because of this, they speak from the world John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here in these first two instances, it figuratively refers to the system of values shared by people who do not know God. Alternate translation: “These false teachers are influenced by the ungodly value system of the people who do not honor God. As a result, they express the perspectives of that system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 4 5 y2z8 figs-metonymy αὐτοὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου εἰσίν; διὰ τοῦτο ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου λαλοῦσιν 1 They are from the world. Because of this, they speak from the world John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here in these first two instances, it refers to the system of values shared by people who do not know God. Alternate translation: “These false teachers are influenced by the ungodly value system of the people who do not honor God. As a result, they express the perspectives of that system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 4 5 j252 writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ 1 They The pronoun **They** refers to the false prophets whom John describes in [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “These false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1JN 4 5 em2t figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος αὐτῶν ἀκούει 1 the world listens to them In this instance, the term **world** figuratively refers to people who share the world’s value system. That is, they do not honor or obey God. Alternate translation: “ungodly people listen to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 4 5 em2t figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος αὐτῶν ἀκούει 1 the world listens to them In this instance, the term **world** refers to people who share the world’s value system. That is, they do not honor or obey God. Alternate translation: “ungodly people listen to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 4 5 j253 figs-idiom ὁ κόσμος αὐτῶν ἀκούει 1 the world listens to them The word **listens** is an idiom that means “believes” or “is persuaded by.” Alternate translation: “ungodly people believe them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 4 6 j254 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἡμῶν…ἡμῶν 1 We … us … us The pronouns **We** and **us** in this verse are probably exclusive, and so if your language marks that distinction, we recommend using the exclusive form in your translation. John appears to be speaking here of himself and his fellow eyewitnesses of the resurrection as teachers of the truth about Jesus. He has already said that the believers to whom he is writing are from God in [4:4](../04/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1JN 4 6 j328 figs-idiom ἡμεῖς ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐσμεν 1 We are from God Here, **from God** could mean: (1) that John and his fellow eyewitnesses teach the truth about Jesus because God has sent them to do that. Alternate translation: “God has sent us” (2) the same thing as it does in [4:4](../04/04.md) and in [4:1–3](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “We belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 4 6 j260 figs-idiom ἐκ τούτου γινώσκομεν 1 From this we know This is an idiomatic expression. It means the same thing as the expression “in this we know” which John uses several times in this letter. Alternate translation: “This is how we can recognize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 4 6 arsa writing-pronouns ἐκ τούτου γινώσκομεν 1 Here, **this** refers back to what John has just written in the previous two sentences. We can know if someone is teaching a true message if it agrees with what John and the other apostles teach, and that it is a false message if it does not. John may have intended for **this** to also include what he said in [4:2–3](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 4 6 j261 figs-exclusive γινώσκομεν 1 we know Since John is once again speaking of himself and the believers to whom he is writing, **we** in this last sentence in the verse would be inclusive, and so if your language marks that distinction, use the inclusive form in your translation. This inclusive usage continues through [4:13](../04/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1JN 4 6 j262 figs-metonymy τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης 1 the spirit of truth and the spirit of error See the discussion of the word **spirit** in the General Notes to this chapter. In these instances, the word may refer to: (1) spirits that inspire messages of a certain kind. In this case, **the spirit of truth** would refer to God’s Spirit, and **the spirit of error** would refer to the devil. These would also be what John refers to as “the one in you” and “the one in the world” in [4:4](../04/04.md). See the UST. (2) the character of something. In this case, John would be using **spirit** figuratively to refer to people whose teaching has a certain character. Alternate translation: “whose teaching is true and whose teaching is false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 4 6 j262 figs-metonymy τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης 1 the spirit of truth and the spirit of error See the discussion of the word **spirit** in the General Notes to this chapter. In these instances, the word may refer to: (1) spirits that inspire messages of a certain kind. In this case, **the spirit of truth** would refer to God’s Spirit, and **the spirit of error** would refer to the devil. These would also be what John refers to as “the one in you” and “the one in the world” in [4:4](../04/04.md). See the UST. (2) the character of something. In this case, John would be using **spirit** to refer to people whose teaching has a certain character. Alternate translation: “whose teaching is true and whose teaching is false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 4 6 j263 figs-abstractnouns τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης 1 the spirit of truth and the spirit of error If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **truth** and **error**behind them with the adjectives “true” and “false.” Alternate translation: “the spirit whose messages are true and the spirit whose messages are false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 4 7 bse1 checking/headings 0 If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 7. Suggested heading: “Love Comes from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 1JN 4 7 fpl5 figs-nominaladj ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved See how you translated **Beloved** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 4 13 dge3 ἐκ τοῦ Πνεύματος αὐτοῦ δέδωκεν ἡμῖν 1 he has given us of his Spirit The word **of** here means “some of.” However, God’s Spirit is not something that can be divided. Rather, John is saying that God is sharing his Spirit with us. God’s Spirit can be in many places, and he is fully present in every place. John is saying that through his Spirit, God is fully present in the entire community, and that each believer experiences some of that full presence of God through the presence of the Spirit in his own life. Be sure that it is also clear in your translation that God does not have less of his Spirit now that each of us has some. Alternate translation: “he has sent his Spirit to live in each of us” 1JN 4 14 w6mz figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς τεθεάμεθα καὶ μαρτυροῦμεν, ὅτι 1 we have seen and we testify that In this verse, John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses of the earthly life of Jesus, so the pronoun **we** is exclusive. Alternate translation: “we apostles have seen and bear witness to the fact that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1JN 4 14 m7cb guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ…τὸν Υἱὸν 1 the Father … the Son **Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. Alternate translation: “God the Father … Jesus his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -1JN 4 14 j277 figs-metonymy Σωτῆρα τοῦ κόσμου 1 as the Savior of the world John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it figuratively refers to the people living in the world. Alternate translation: “to save the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 4 14 j277 figs-metonymy Σωτῆρα τοῦ κόσμου 1 as the Savior of the world John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter. Here it refers to the people living in the world. Alternate translation: “to save the people in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 4 15 j278 figs-hypo ὃς ἐὰν ὁμολογήσῃ ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὁ Θεὸς ἐν αὐτῷ μένει, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Whoever confesses that Jesus is the Son of God, God remains in him, and he in God This can be translated as a conditional statement. John is saying that what he describes in the second phrase will happen only if what he describes in the first phrase happens. Then it will certainly happen. Alternate translation: “If someone confesses that Jesus is the Son of God, then God will remain in him and he will remain in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1JN 4 15 nvb1 figs-explicit ὃς ἐὰν ὁμολογήσῃ ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Whoever confesses that Jesus is the Son of God The meaning of this expression is similar to the expression “the one who confesses the Son” in [2:23](../02/23.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “Everyone who truly believes and acknowledges publicly that Jesus is the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 4 15 b6td guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -510,15 +510,15 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 4 17 j281 grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα παρρησίαν ἔχωμεν ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῆς κρίσεως 1 In this love has been perfected with us so that we may have confidence in the day of judgment The clause beginning **so that** could function as: (1) a result clause. That is, John may be saying that as a result of God’s love achieving its purposes in our lives now, we will be confident on the day of judgment of his forgiveness and acceptance. If you decide that is the case, then your translation should follow the conventions of your language for result clauses. Alternate translation: “with the result that we may have confidence in the day of judgment” (2) a purpose clause. That is, John may be saying that one reason why God is having his love achieve its purpose in our lives now is because he wants us to be confident on the day of judgment of his forgiveness and acceptance. If you decide that is the case, then your translation should follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1JN 4 17 j282 figs-explicit ἵνα παρρησίαν ἔχωμεν 1 so that we may have confidence If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what believers will **have confidence** about. Alternate translation: “so that we will be confident that God has forgiven us and will accept us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 4 17 j283 figs-abstractnouns ἵνα παρρησίαν ἔχωμεν 1 so that we may have confidence If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **confidence** with an adjective such as “confident.” Alternate translation: “so that we will be confident that God has forgiven us and will accept us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1JN 4 17 j284 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῆς κρίσεως 1 in the day of judgment John is using the term **day** figuratively to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time when God judges us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1JN 4 17 j284 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῆς κρίσεως 1 in the day of judgment John is using the term **day** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time when God judges us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 4 17 j285 ὅτι 1 that The word translated **because** here can be understood in different ways, depending on how you translated **In this** at the beginning of the verse. (1) If you translated **In this** as referring back to verse 16, then this word can be translated as “because.” (2) If you translated **In this** as referring to the clause beginning with this word, then translate this word with one that introduces the content of **In this**, such as “that.” 1JN 4 17 l78r writing-pronouns ὅτι καθὼς ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν, καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐσμεν 1 as that one is, we also are The demonstrative pronoun **that one** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “since we are becoming more and more like Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 4 17 j286 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ τούτῳ 1 in this world John uses **world** to mean various things in this letter, usually in a figurative sense. Here, however, it refers literally to the created world. Alternate translation: “as we live in this world” or “in our lives on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 4 18 j287 grammar-connect-logic-result φόβος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ, ἀλλ’ ἡ τελεία ἀγάπη ἔξω βάλλει τὸν φόβον, ὅτι ὁ φόβος κόλασιν ἔχει 1 Fear is not in love, but perfect love throws fear outside, because fear has punishment If it would be helpful in your language, you could put the third clause before the first clause, since the third clause gives the reason for the result that the first clause describes. Alternate translation: “Because fear has punishment, fear is not in love, but perfect love throws fear outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1JN 4 18 sq7k figs-explicit φόβος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ, ἀλλ’ ἡ τελεία ἀγάπη ἔξω βάλλει τὸν φόβον, ὅτι ὁ φόβος κόλασιν ἔχει 1 Fear is not in love, but perfect love throws fear outside, because fear has punishment If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly what John means by **fear**, **perfect love**, and **punishment**, particularly in light of what he says in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “A person who thinks he is going to be punished is afraid, but no one who truly understands how much God loves him will be afraid, because when God’s love has achieved its purpose in our lives, we are confident that he has forgiven us and will accept us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1JN 4 18 j288 figs-metaphor φόβος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 Fear is not in love John speaks figuratively as if **Fear** could be inside of **love**. Alternate translation: “no one who truly understands how much God loves him will be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 4 18 j288 figs-metaphor φόβος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 Fear is not in love John speaks as if **Fear** could be inside of **love**. Alternate translation: “no one who truly understands how much God loves him will be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 4 18 j290 ἡ τελεία ἀγάπη ἔξω βάλλει τὸν φόβον 1 perfect love throws fear outside By **perfect love**, John means the same thing as when he speaks in the previous verse of love that “has been perfected.” See how you translated that expression. Alternate translation: “when God’s love has achieved its purpose in our lives, it keeps us from being afraid” -1JN 4 18 bu17 figs-personification ἡ τελεία ἀγάπη ἔξω βάλλει τὸν φόβον 1 perfect love throws fear outside John speaks figuratively of **love** as if it could actively throw **fear** far away from us. Alternate translation: “when God’s love has achieved its purpose in our lives, it keeps us from being afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1JN 4 18 bu17 figs-personification ἡ τελεία ἀγάπη ἔξω βάλλει τὸν φόβον 1 perfect love throws fear outside John speaks of **love** as if it could actively throw **fear** far away from us. Alternate translation: “when God’s love has achieved its purpose in our lives, it keeps us from being afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1JN 4 18 zsl7 ὁ φόβος κόλασιν ἔχει 1 Alternate translation: “fear has to do with punishment” or “people are afraid when they think they will be punished” 1JN 4 18 yg1r figs-activepassive ὁ δὲ φοβούμενος, οὐ τετελείωται ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 So the one who fears has not been perfected in love See how you translated the similar expression in [2:5](../02/05.md). Here, as there, **love** could mean: (1) God’s love for us. Alternate translation: “So if someone is afraid, then God’s love has not achieved its purpose in his life” (2) our love for God. Alternate translation: “So if someone is afraid, then he does not yet love God perfectly” It could also mean both things, as in [3:17](../03/17.md). If you must choose, then we recommend option (1). But if your translation can leave both possibilities open, that would be best. Alternate translation: “So if someone is afraid, then love is not yet fully working in his life”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 4 18 j291 figs-explicit ὁ δὲ φοβούμενος, οὐ τετελείωται ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 So the one who fears has not been perfected in love If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what such a person **fears**. This is clear from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “So if someone is afraid that God has not forgiven him and that God will not accept him, then God’s love has not achieved its purpose in his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -548,15 +548,15 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 5 3 ve87 figs-explicit αὕτη γάρ ἐστιν ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἵνα τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ τηρῶμεν 1 For this is the love of God, that we should keep his commandments If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why this is the reason for the statement that John makes in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “And this is why: If we really do love God, we will love other believers, as he has commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 5 3 j306 figs-possession ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the love of God In this context, the phrase **the love of God** refers to believers loving God. John speaks in the previous verse of “when we love God.” Alternate translation: “what it means to love God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1JN 5 3 uik3 figs-idiom ἵνα τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ τηρῶμεν 1 that we should keep his commandments Here, **keep** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “that we should obey his commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1JN 5 3 c5z1 figs-metaphor αἱ ἐντολαὶ αὐτοῦ βαρεῖαι οὐκ εἰσίν 1 his commandments are not burdensome John speaks figuratively of God’s **commandments** as if they had weight but did not weigh very much. Alternate translation: “his commandments are not difficult to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 5 3 c5z1 figs-metaphor αἱ ἐντολαὶ αὐτοῦ βαρεῖαι οὐκ εἰσίν 1 his commandments are not burdensome John speaks of God’s **commandments** as if they had weight but did not weigh very much. Alternate translation: “his commandments are not difficult to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 4 j307 translate-versebridge ὅτι πᾶν τὸ γεγεννημένον ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ, νικᾷ τὸν κόσμον 1 For everyone who has been begotten from God overcomes the world In order to create a verse bridge, you could begin this sentence with “since” instead of **for**; you could end it with a comma instead of a period; and you could make it the beginning of the second sentence in the previous verse. It would go before “his commandments are not burdensome.” The word “And” would be left out. The result of combining verses 4 and 5 would be: “For this is the love of God, that we should keep his commandments. Since everyone who has been begotten from God overcomes the world, his commandments are not burdensome. And this is the victory that has overcome the world, our faith.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) 1JN 5 4 i2bf figs-activepassive πᾶν τὸ γεγεννημένον ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 everyone who has been begotten from God See how you translated the similar expression in [2:29](../02/29.md). Alternate translation: “everyone whose father is God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 5 4 j308 figs-metaphor πᾶν τὸ γεγεννημένον ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 everyone who has been begotten from God See whether in [2:29](../02/29.md) you decided to explain this metaphor. Alternate translation: “everyone whose spiritual father is God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 5 4 g3uw figs-metaphor νικᾷ τὸν κόσμον 1 overcomes the world As in [2:13](../02/13.md), John is using the word **overcomes** figuratively. He is speaking of the believers’ refusal to live by the value system of ungodly people as if the believers had defeated that system in a struggle. Alternate translation: “does not live by the value system of ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 5 4 g3uw figs-metaphor νικᾷ τὸν κόσμον 1 overcomes the world As in [2:13](../02/13.md), John is using the word **overcomes**. He is speaking of the believers’ refusal to live by the value system of ungodly people as if the believers had defeated that system in a struggle. Alternate translation: “does not live by the value system of ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 4 yq2d figs-metonymy τὸν κόσμον 1 the world See how you translated the term **world** in [2:15](../02/15.md). It has a similar meaning in this verse. Alternate translation: “the value system of ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1JN 5 4 j309 figs-metonymy ἡ νίκη 1 the victory John is speaking figuratively of the thing that has won **the victory** as if it were **the victory** itself. Alternate translation: “what has won the victory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 5 4 j309 figs-metonymy ἡ νίκη 1 the victory John is speaking of the thing that has won **the victory** as if it were **the victory** itself. Alternate translation: “what has won the victory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 5 4 k26g figs-abstractnouns ἡ νίκη ἡ νικήσασα 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **victory** by combining it with the verb **overcome**. Alternate translation: “what has enabled us to overcome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1JN 5 4 tf9x figs-metaphor ἡ νικήσασα τὸν κόσμον 1 that has overcome the world Once again John is using the word **overcome** figuratively. He is speaking of the **faith** that he and his readers share as if it had defeated the ungodly value system in a struggle. Alternate translation: “that enables us to live differently from the value system of ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 5 4 tf9x figs-metaphor ἡ νικήσασα τὸν κόσμον 1 that has overcome the world Once again John is using the word **overcome**. He is speaking of the **faith** that he and his readers share as if it had defeated the ungodly value system in a struggle. Alternate translation: “that enables us to live differently from the value system of ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 4 j310 figs-metonymy τὸν κόσμον 2 the world John is using the term **world** to mean the same thing as in the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “the value system of ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 5 4 w8ob figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις ἡμῶν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “that we believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 5 5 qm85 figs-rquestion τίς ἐστιν δέ ὁ νικῶν τὸν κόσμον, εἰ μὴ ὁ πιστεύων ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ? 1 But who is the one who overcomes the world, if not the one who believes that Jesus is the Son of God? John is using the question form for emphasis, to reaffirm what he said in the first sentence of the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “But only someone who believes that Jesus is the Son of God overcomes the world.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -586,21 +586,21 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 5 10 kala figs-genericnoun ὁ πιστεύων 1 John is speaking of everyone who believes, not of any particular person. Alternate translation: “Any person who believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1JN 5 10 j325 figs-explicit εἰς τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 in the Son of God John implicitly means that they believe that Jesus is the Son of God. Alternate translation: “that Jesus is the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 5 10 j326 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -1JN 5 10 gkj1 figs-metaphor ἔχει τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἐν αὑτῷ 1 has the testimony in him John speaks figuratively of the **testimony** as if it were an object that could be inside believers. Alternate translation: “completely accepts what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 5 10 gkj1 figs-metaphor ἔχει τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἐν αὑτῷ 1 has the testimony in him John speaks of the **testimony** as if it were an object that could be inside believers. Alternate translation: “completely accepts what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 10 j327 figs-abstractnouns τὴν μαρτυρίαν 1 the testimony If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **testimony** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 5 10 j255 figs-explicit ψεύστην πεποίηκεν αὐτόν 1 has made him a liar As in [1:10](../01/10.md), be sure that it is clear in your translation that God would not actually be a **liar** in this case. Rather, since God has said that Jesus is his Son, a person who did not believe that would be calling God a liar. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “is, in effect, calling God a liar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 5 10 sii2 τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἣν μεμαρτύρηκεν ὁ Θεὸς περὶ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 the testimony that God has testified about his Son If it is unnatural in your language to use both the noun **testimony** and the verb **testified**, you could use just one form of the word in your translation. Alternate translation: “what God has solemnly said to be true about his Son” 1JN 5 11 bi7k αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ μαρτυρία 1 this is the testimony Alternate translation: “this is what God has said about his Son” 1JN 5 11 rhpw figs-quotations ζωὴν αἰώνιον ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς, καὶ αὕτη ἡ ζωὴ ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ αὐτοῦ ἐστιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -1JN 5 11 u1w5 figs-metaphor ζωὴν αἰώνιον ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς, καὶ αὕτη ἡ ζωὴ ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ αὐτοῦ ἐστιν 1 God gave us eternal life, and this life is in his Son John speaks figuratively of **life** as if it were an object that was inside Jesus. Alternate translation: “God gave us eternal life, which people receive by believing in his Son Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 5 11 u1w5 figs-metaphor ζωὴν αἰώνιον ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς, καὶ αὕτη ἡ ζωὴ ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ αὐτοῦ ἐστιν 1 God gave us eternal life, and this life is in his Son John speaks of **life** as if it were an object that was inside Jesus. Alternate translation: “God gave us eternal life, which people receive by believing in his Son Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 11 k2qn figs-metaphor ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 eternal life As in [4:9](../04/09.md), **eternal life** means two things at once. It means receiving power from God in this life to live in a new way, and it also means living forever in the presence of God after death. See how you translated the expression in [4:9](../04/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 11 sz21 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τῷ Υἱῷ 1 his Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus. Alternate translation: “his Son Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -1JN 5 12 st2z figs-metaphor ὁ ἔχων τὸν Υἱὸν, ἔχει τὴν ζωήν; ὁ μὴ ἔχων τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, τὴν ζωὴν οὐκ ἔχει 1 The one who has the Son has life. The one who does not have the Son of God does not have life John speaks figuratively of believers who are in a close relationship with Jesus as if Jesus were their possession. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Anyone who is in a close relationship with the Son has life. Anyone who is not in a close relationship with the Son of God does not have life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 5 12 st2z figs-metaphor ὁ ἔχων τὸν Υἱὸν, ἔχει τὴν ζωήν; ὁ μὴ ἔχων τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, τὴν ζωὴν οὐκ ἔχει 1 The one who has the Son has life. The one who does not have the Son of God does not have life John speaks of believers who are in a close relationship with Jesus as if Jesus were their possession. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Anyone who is in a close relationship with the Son has life. Anyone who is not in a close relationship with the Son of God does not have life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 12 j329 figs-metaphor ἔχει τὴν ζωήν…τὴν ζωὴν οὐκ ἔχει 1 has life … does not have life Since both groups of people are physically alive, John means this in a spiritual sense. As in [4:9](../04/09.md), he is likely referring to what he calls “eternal life” in [3:15](../03/15.md) and [5:11](../05/11.md). See how you translated that term in those verses. Alternate translation: “has power from God to live as a new person now and will live forever in God’s presence after death … does not have power from God to live as a new person now and will not live forever in God’s presence after death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 12 j330 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱὸν…τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son … the Son of God **Son** and **Son of God** are important titles for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 5 13 rr7y checking/headings 0 If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 13. Suggested heading: “Eternal Life with the True God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 1JN 5 13 ezl8 writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things Here, **these things** refers back to everything that John has written so far in the letter. Alternate translation: “all of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1JN 5 13 wns6 figs-metonymy τοῖς πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 you, the ones believing in the name of the Son of God As in [2:12](../02/12.md), John is using the **name** of Jesus figuratively to represent who Jesus is and what he has done. Alternate translation: “who believe in the Son of God and what he has done for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 5 13 wns6 figs-metonymy τοῖς πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 you, the ones believing in the name of the Son of God As in [2:12](../02/12.md), John is using the **name** of Jesus to represent who Jesus is and what he has done. Alternate translation: “who believe in the Son of God and what he has done for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 5 13 gg32 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 5 13 j331 figs-metaphor ὅτι ζωὴν ἔχετε αἰώνιον 1 that you have eternal life The emphasis in this verse seems to be more on the future aspect of the expression **eternal life**. Alternate translation: “that you will live forever in God’s presence after you die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 14 j332 figs-explicit αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ παρρησία ἣν ἔχομεν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 this is the confidence that we have towards him If it would be helpful to your readers, as in [3:21](../03/21.md) you could state explicitly what this **confidence** applies to, in light of what John says in the rest of this sentence. Alternate translation: “we can be confident of this as we pray to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -616,10 +616,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 5 16 j339 figs-hypo ἐάν τις ἴδῃ τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ ἁμαρτάνοντα ἁμαρτίαν μὴ πρὸς θάνατον, αἰτήσει 1 If anyone sees his brother sinning a sin not towards death, he will ask John is describing a hypothetical situation in order to counsel his readers. UST models a way of showing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1JN 5 16 sc1f figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his brother See how you translated **his brother** in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 16 j340 ἁμαρτάνοντα ἁμαρτίαν 1 sinning a sin If it is unnatural in your language to use both the verb **sinning** and the noun **sin**, you could use just one form of the word in your translation. Alternate translation: “committing a sin” -1JN 5 16 j341 figs-metaphor ἁμαρτίαν μὴ πρὸς θάνατον…τοῖς ἁμαρτάνουσιν μὴ πρὸς θάνατον…ἁμαρτία πρὸς θάνατον 1 a sin not towards death … those sinning not towards death … a sin towards death The word **death** in this verse and the next refers figuratively to spiritual death, that is, to eternal separation from God. (See the later note to this verse for a discussion of what kind of sin John may have in mind that would lead to that.) Alternate translation: “a sin that does not lead to eternal separation from God … for those whose sin will not lead to eternal separation from God … a sin that does lead to eternal separation from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 5 16 j341 figs-metaphor ἁμαρτίαν μὴ πρὸς θάνατον…τοῖς ἁμαρτάνουσιν μὴ πρὸς θάνατον…ἁμαρτία πρὸς θάνατον 1 a sin not towards death … those sinning not towards death … a sin towards death The word **death** in this verse and the next refers to spiritual death, that is, to eternal separation from God. (See the later note to this verse for a discussion of what kind of sin John may have in mind that would lead to that.) Alternate translation: “a sin that does not lead to eternal separation from God … for those whose sin will not lead to eternal separation from God … a sin that does lead to eternal separation from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 16 j342 figs-declarative αἰτήσει 1 he will ask John is using a future statement to give an instruction and command. Alternate translation: “he should pray for that fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) 1JN 5 16 j343 writing-pronouns δώσει αὐτῷ ζωήν 1 he will give him life In this clause, the pronoun **him** refers to the believer who is sinning, and the pronoun **he** could refer to: (1) God, since only God can give spiritual life. Alternate translation: “God will give life to the believer who is sinning” (2) **anyone**, that is, the person praying. In this case, John may be picturing God giving life by means of the person’s prayers, as in James 5:15, 20. Alternate translation: “he will be God’s instrument to give life to the believer who is sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1JN 5 16 myf6 figs-metaphor δώσει αὐτῷ ζωήν 1 he will give him life The word **life** here refers figuratively to spiritual life, that is, to eternal life with God. Alternate translation: “God will make sure that the believer who is sinning is not separated from him eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 5 16 myf6 figs-metaphor δώσει αὐτῷ ζωήν 1 he will give him life The word **life** here refers to spiritual life, that is, to eternal life with God. Alternate translation: “God will make sure that the believer who is sinning is not separated from him eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 16 q1me figs-explicit ἔστιν ἁμαρτία πρὸς θάνατον; οὐ περὶ ἐκείνης λέγω ἵνα ἐρωτήσῃ 1 There is a sin towards death; I am not saying that he should pray about that If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state more explicitly what this means. In the context of the whole letter, by **a sin towards death**, John is probably referring to behavior such as the false teachers engaged in and encouraged. As Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John explains, these false teachers claimed that it did not matter what people did in their bodies, and so they would have been committing many serious sins without feeling any conviction that their actions were wrong. This showed that they had abandoned faith in Jesus and had rejected the influence of the Holy Spirit. John implicitly corrects this false teaching again in [5:18](../05/18.md). His statement that believers should not pray for people who behave in this way is likely descriptive rather than prescriptive. That is, he is not saying that he does not want the believers to pray for them. Rather, he is explaining that it will not do any good to pray for them, since they are determined to live in a way that is contrary to faith in Jesus and the influence of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “There are people (such as the false teachers) who are sinning in a way that shows that they have decided to be separated from God for eternity. Praying for them is not likely to make any difference” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 5 17 j344 figs-abstractnouns πᾶσα ἀδικία ἁμαρτία ἐστίν, καὶ ἔστιν ἁμαρτία οὐ πρὸς θάνατον 1 All unrighteousness is sin, and there is sin not towards death If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “Every time we do what God does not want, that is sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 5 17 j345 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 and John is using the word **and** to introduce a contrasting statement that is intended to encourage the believers to whom he is writing. Alternate translation: “however,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -630,19 +630,19 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 5 18 j350 ὁ γεννηθεὶς ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the One who was begotten from God This is a description of Jesus, whom John calls “the only-begotten” in [4:9](../04/09.md). See how you translated that expression there. Alternate translation: “Jesus, God’s actual Son” 1JN 5 18 j351 figs-explicit τηρεῖ ἑαυτὸν 1 keeps him This could mean one of two things. Alternate translation: (1) “keeps him in a close relationship with God” or (2) “keeps him from sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 5 18 l7h8 figs-nominaladj ὁ πονηρὸς 1 the evil one As in [2:13](../02/13.md), John is using the adjective **evil** as a noun in order to indicate a specific being. ULT adds **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the one who is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1JN 5 18 j352 figs-metonymy ὁ πονηρὸς 1 the evil one John is speaking figuratively of the devil by association with the way that he is **evil**. Alternate translation: “the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 5 18 j352 figs-metonymy ὁ πονηρὸς 1 the evil one John is speaking of the devil by association with the way that he is **evil**. Alternate translation: “the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 5 18 j353 figs-idiom οὐχ ἅπτεται αὐτοῦ 1 does not touch him This is an idiom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “cannot harm him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 5 19 j354 figs-idiom ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐσμεν 1 we are from God See how you translated the similar expression in [4:4](../04/04.md). Alternate translation: “we are sharing life with God” or “we are living in relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1JN 5 19 eh5z figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος ὅλος 1 the whole world John uses the term **world** in various ways in this letter. In this instance, it likely refers figuratively both to the people living in the **world** who do not honor God and to their value system. Alternate translation: “all ungodly people and their value system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1JN 5 19 n9ig figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κεῖται 1 lies in the evil one The expression **lies in** figuratively represents being controlled by someone or something. Alternate translation: “is controlled by the evil one” or “is controlled by evil influences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 5 19 j355 figs-abstractnouns τῷ πονηρῷ 1 the evil one If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **evil** by stating the meaning behind it with an equivalent expression. This could mean: (1) John may be speaking figuratively of the devil, as in [2:13](../02/13.md). Alternate translation: “the devil” (2) John may be speaking of evil influences. Alternate translation: “evil influences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1JN 5 19 eh5z figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος ὅλος 1 the whole world John uses the term **world** in various ways in this letter. In this instance, it likely refers both to the people living in the **world** who do not honor God and to their value system. Alternate translation: “all ungodly people and their value system” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 5 19 n9ig figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κεῖται 1 lies in the evil one The expression **lies in** represents being controlled by someone or something. Alternate translation: “is controlled by the evil one” or “is controlled by evil influences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 5 19 j355 figs-abstractnouns τῷ πονηρῷ 1 the evil one If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **evil** by stating the meaning behind it with an equivalent expression. This could mean: (1) John may be speaking of the devil, as in [2:13](../02/13.md). Alternate translation: “the devil” (2) John may be speaking of evil influences. Alternate translation: “evil influences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 5 20 je13 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 5 20 j356 figs-explicit ἥκει 1 has come If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state more explicitly what this means, as you may have done in [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: “has come to earth from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 5 20 n1nh figs-abstractnouns δέδωκεν ἡμῖν διάνοιαν 1 has given us understanding If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **understanding** with a verb such as “understand.” Alternate translation: “has enabled us to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 5 20 j357 figs-abstractnouns δέδωκεν ἡμῖν διάνοιαν 1 has given us understanding If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what Jesus has enabled us to understand. Alternate translation: “has enabled us to understand the truth” or “has enabled us to understand the truth about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 5 20 hvr7 figs-nominaladj τὸν Ἀληθινόν…τῷ Ἀληθινῷ 1 the True One … the True One John is using the adjective **True** as a noun in order to indicate a specific being. ULT adds **One** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the One who is true … the One who is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1JN 5 20 j358 figs-metonymy τὸν Ἀληθινόν…τῷ Ἀληθινῷ 1 the True One … the True One John is speaking figuratively of God by association with the way that he is **True**. This could mean: (1) The God who is genuine, in contrast to false gods. Alternate translation: “the real God … the real God” (2) The God who is true in all that he says and does. Alternate translation: “God, who always tells the truth and does what he says he will do … God, who always tells the truth and does what he says he will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1JN 5 20 ge7c figs-metaphor ἐσμὲν ἐν τῷ Ἀληθινῷ, ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 we are in the True One, in his Son Jesus Christ As in [2:5](../02/05.md), John is speaking figuratively as if believers could be inside of God and Jesus. This expression describes having a close relationship with God and Jesus. Alternate translation: “we have a close relationship with the true God, with his Son Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 5 20 j358 figs-metonymy τὸν Ἀληθινόν…τῷ Ἀληθινῷ 1 the True One … the True One John is speaking of God by association with the way that he is **True**. This could mean: (1) The God who is genuine, in contrast to false gods. Alternate translation: “the real God … the real God” (2) The God who is true in all that he says and does. Alternate translation: “God, who always tells the truth and does what he says he will do … God, who always tells the truth and does what he says he will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1JN 5 20 ge7c figs-metaphor ἐσμὲν ἐν τῷ Ἀληθινῷ, ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 we are in the True One, in his Son Jesus Christ As in [2:5](../02/05.md), John is speaking as if believers could be inside of God and Jesus. This expression describes having a close relationship with God and Jesus. Alternate translation: “we have a close relationship with the true God, with his Son Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 20 gobu figs-metaphor ἐσμὲν ἐν τῷ Ἀληθινῷ, ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 This second occurrence of **the True One** could refer to: (1) Jesus, as the rest of the clause makes clear. In this case, John is saying that both God and Jesus are the true God, and we are in both. See the UST. (2) God, just as the first occurrence of **the True One** refers to God. In this case, John is saying that we are in God because of being in Jesus. Alternate translation: “we are in the True One through being in Jesus Christ, his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 20 j359 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τῷ Υἱῷ αὐτοῦ 1 his Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 5 20 w5yl writing-pronouns οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἀληθινὸς Θεὸς 1 This is the true God **This** could refer either to (1) Jesus, who was mentioned just before, or (2) God, who was mentioned earlier. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) diff --git a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv index 89cc6fdd4d..57b2989cc6 100644 --- a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv @@ -3,9 +3,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2JN 1 1 uspy figs-123person ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you could use the first person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “I, the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 2JN 1 1 z4tk figs-explicit ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder **The elder** likely means John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as **elder** either because of his old age, or because he is a leader in the church, or both. If you have a term for an older, respected leader, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, John, am writing this letter” or Alternate translation: “I, John the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2JN 1 1 y7hw figs-123person ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς 1 to the chosen lady and her children In this culture, letter writers would name the addressees next, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you could use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “to you, chosen lady, and to your children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -2JN 1 1 a9w3 figs-metaphor ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ 1 to the chosen lady Here, **chosen lady** could mean: (1) John is writing to a church and figuratively describing the group of believers as a **lady**. (In Greek, the word for “church” is feminine.) (2) John is writing to a specific woman and referring to her respectfully as **lady**. Alternate translation: “to the chosen church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2JN 1 1 a9w3 figs-metaphor ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ 1 to the chosen lady Here, **chosen lady** could mean: (1) John is writing to a church and describing the group of believers as a **lady**. (In Greek, the word for “church” is feminine.) (2) John is writing to a specific woman and referring to her respectfully as **lady**. Alternate translation: “to the chosen church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2JN 1 1 ueev figs-idiom ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ 1 to the chosen lady In this context, the term **chosen** indicates a person or group of people whom God has chosen to receive salvation. Alternate translation: “to the congregation that God has saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2JN 1 1 axty figs-metaphor καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς 1 and her children Here, **her children** could mean: (1) just as “chosen lady” figuratively refers to a church, **her children** refers figuratively to the people who are part of that church. Alternate translation: “and to the believers in that group” (2) if this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it may refer to her biological children. (3) it refers figuratively to people whom the woman has led to faith as her spiritual children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2JN 1 1 axty figs-metaphor καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς 1 and her children Here, **her children** could mean: (1) just as “chosen lady” refers to a church, **her children** refers to the people who are part of that church. Alternate translation: “and to the believers in that group” (2) if this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it may refer to her biological children. (3) it refers to people whom the woman has led to faith as her spiritual children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2JN 1 1 src4 figs-abstractnouns ἀγαπῶ ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 1 love in the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an equivalent expression. The phrase **the truth** could: (1) refer to how John loves. Alternate translation: “truly love” (2) provide the reason for John’s love. Alternate translation: “love because we both know the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2JN 1 1 a50f figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἐγνωκότες τὴν ἀλήθειαν 1 all who have known the truth John uses the phrase **all the ones having known the truth** to refer to believers who know and accept the true message about Jesus Christ. John is most likely using the term **all** as a generalization to mean all the believers who are with him and who know the people of this church. Alternate translation: “all who are with me and who know and accept the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 2JN 1 2 spdg figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν 1 the truth John uses the abstract noun **truth** to refer to the true message that Christians believe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this termbehind this term with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the true message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2JN 1 4 ir6v figs-you σου 1 your The word **your** is singular here, since John is either addressing one woman, or the church collectively, as a “lady.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 2JN 1 4 ajlf grammar-connect-logic-result ἐχάρην λείαν 1 If it is more natural in your language to state the reason first and then the result, you can put this after “I found some of your children walking in the truth,” as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2JN 1 4 a3vs figs-metaphor τῶν τέκνων σου 1 your children See how you translated the term **children** in [1:1](../01/01.md). This could refer to: (1) the people who are part of a certain congregation. (2) if this letter is addressed to an actual woman, it may mean either her biological children or (3) her spiritual children. Alternate translation: “the believers from your group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2JN 1 4 w2b6 figs-metaphor περιπατοῦντας ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 1 walking in the truth John refers figuratively to living one’s life with the expression **walking**. Alternate translation: “living according to the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2JN 1 4 w2b6 figs-metaphor περιπατοῦντας ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 1 walking in the truth John refers to living one’s life with the expression **walking**. Alternate translation: “living according to the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2JN 1 4 ddnx figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for **truth**, you could use a phrase with an adjective. Alternate translation: “in a way that agrees with the true message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2JN 1 4 s7hr καθὼς ἐντολὴν ἐλάβομεν παρὰ τοῦ Πατρός 1 just as we have received a commandment from the Father The expression **received a commandment** expresses the idea that God commanded the believers to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make **the Father** the subject of a sentence with the verb “command.” Alternate translation: “just as the Father has commanded us” 2JN 1 4 w7f1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Be careful to translate it accurately and consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2JN 1 5 u38f figs-explicit οὐχ ὡς ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφων σοι 1 not as writing a new commandment to you John does not refer to himself explicitly as the person writing. If your language requires you to state the subject of a verb, you could add a pronoun here. Alternate translation: “not as though I were writing you a new commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2JN 1 5 uhs8 figs-explicit ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 from the beginning The phrase **from the beginning** refers to the time when John and his audience first believed in Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “since the time that we first believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2JN 1 5 vmm8 ἀρχῆς, ἵνα ἀγαπῶμεν ἀλλήλους 1 the beginning—that we should love one another If it would be helpful in your language, you could start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “the beginning. He commanded that we should love one another” -2JN 1 6 nw4g figs-metaphor περιπατῶμεν κατὰ…ἐν αὐτῇ περιπατῆτε 1 we should walk according to … you should walk in In these instances the expression **walk** figuratively means to “obey.” Alternate translation: “we should obey … you should obey it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2JN 1 6 nw4g figs-metaphor περιπατῶμεν κατὰ…ἐν αὐτῇ περιπατῆτε 1 we should walk according to … you should walk in In these instances the expression **walk** means to “obey.” Alternate translation: “we should obey … you should obey it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2JN 1 6 cl95 figs-you ἠκούσατε…περιπατῆτε 1 you heard … you should walk The term **you** is plural in this verse, because John is addressing a congregation of believers. This is the case throughout the rest of the letter, as well, except in verse 13, because there John returns to his metaphor of referring to a church as a woman and its members as her children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 2JN 1 7 u749 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 For Here, **For** introduces the reason why John wrote about the commandment to love and obey God in the previous verses—it is because there are many who pretend to be believers but they do not love or obey God. Use a natural way to introduce this reason in your language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2JN 1 7 w25m figs-explicit ὅτι πολλοὶ πλάνοι ἐξῆλθαν εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 For many deceivers have gone out into the world This seems to be an implicit reference to the false teachers whom John discusses in [verses 10-11](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “For many deceivers are going around from place to place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2JN 1 8 it9t figs-explicit βλέπετε ἑαυτούς 1 Watch yourselves The implication is that the believers are to “watch” themselves, that is, be careful, so that they are not deceived by the deceivers and antichrists. Alternate translation: “Be careful not to let the deceivers and antichrists influence you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2JN 1 8 i8n6 figs-explicit ἃ 1 what The word **what** is more fully defined in the next phrase as a “reward.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state “reward” here, as well. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2JN 1 8 r9ky figs-exclusive εἰργασάμεθα 1 we have worked for The word **we** here is inclusive. John, his audience, and others have all worked to build up the faith of the believers to whom John is writing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -2JN 1 9 mn3v figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ προάγων καὶ μὴ μένων ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 everyone who goes beyond and does not remain in the teaching of Christ John refers to **the teaching of Christ** figuratively as a place where faithful believers **remain** and also as a place that false teachers leave as they go **beyond**. The expression **goes beyond** refers to teaching new and false things that Jesus did not teach. Alternate translation: “Everyone who teaches things that Jesus did not teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2JN 1 9 mn3v figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ προάγων καὶ μὴ μένων ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 everyone who goes beyond and does not remain in the teaching of Christ John refers to **the teaching of Christ** as a place where faithful believers **remain** and also as a place that false teachers leave as they go **beyond**. The expression **goes beyond** refers to teaching new and false things that Jesus did not teach. Alternate translation: “Everyone who teaches things that Jesus did not teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2JN 1 9 x3ae figs-infostructure πᾶς ὁ προάγων καὶ μὴ μένων ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Everyone who goes beyond and does not remain in the teaching of Christ These two phrases mean the same thing, one stated positively (**goes beyond**) and the other stated negatively (**does not remain**). If it is mote natural in your language, you can reverse the order of these, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 2JN 1 9 xty9 figs-explicit Θεὸν οὐκ ἔχει 1 does not have God To **have God** means to have a relationship with God as Savior through faith in Jesus Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “does not belong to God” or “does not have a right relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2JN 1 9 x523 ὁ μένων ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ, οὗτος καὶ τὸν Πατέρα καὶ τὸν Υἱὸν ἔχει 1 The one who remains in the teaching, this one has both the Father and the Son Alternate translation: “Someone who follows Christ’s teaching belongs to both the Father and the Son” @@ -52,13 +52,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2JN 1 11 uhea ὁ λέγων…αὐτῷ χαίρειν 1 the one who says to him, “Greetings” Alternate translation: “any person who gives him a respectful public greeting” 2JN 1 11 n7zt κοινωνεῖ τοῖς ἔργοις αὐτοῦ τοῖς πονηροῖς 1 shares in his evil deeds The verb **shares in** expresses the concept of assisting and helping to advance the activity of the false teacher. Alternate translation: “takes part in his evil deeds” or “helps him in his evil deeds” 2JN 1 12 gq26 figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἐβουλήθην διὰ χάρτου καὶ μέλανος 1 I did not want with paper and ink Here John leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “I did not want to write these things with paper and ink” (See: Ellipsis)(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2JN 1 12 nx77 figs-metonymy διὰ χάρτου καὶ μέλανος 1 with paper and ink John is not saying that he would rather write these things with something other than **paper and ink**. Rather, he is speaking figuratively of those writing materials to represent writing in general. He means that he wants to visit the believers personally and to continue his communication with them directly. Alternate translation: “to communicate these things in writing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2JN 1 12 nx77 figs-metonymy διὰ χάρτου καὶ μέλανος 1 with paper and ink John is not saying that he would rather write these things with something other than **paper and ink**. Rather, he is speaking of those writing materials to represent writing in general. He means that he wants to visit the believers personally and to continue his communication with them directly. Alternate translation: “to communicate these things in writing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2JN 1 12 v4v2 figs-idiom στόμα πρὸς στόμα λαλῆσαι 1 to speak mouth to mouth The expression **mouth to mouth** is an idiom, meaning to speak in their presence. Use an idiom in your language with this same meaning, or simply express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to speak face to face” or “to speak to you in person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2JN 1 12 auwq figs-activepassive ἵνα ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πεπληρωμένη ᾖ 1 so that your joy might be made complete If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active verb form. Alternate translation: “so that this will make your joy complete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2JN 1 12 hwtk figs-abstractnouns ἵνα ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πεπληρωμένη ᾖ 1 so that your joy might be made complete If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **joy** with an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “so that this will make you completely joyful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2JN 1 12 lt77 translate-textvariants ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πεπληρωμένη ᾖ 1 your joy might be made complete See the note in Part 3 of the General Introduction to 2 John about the textual issue here. Alternate translation: “our joy might be made complete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 2JN 1 12 k9yt figs-exclusive ὑμῶν 1 your If you use “our” here instead of **your**, it would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -2JN 1 13 fh6j figs-metaphor τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἀδελφῆς σου τῆς ἐκλεκτῆς 1 The children of your chosen sister This could: (1) be a metaphor. Just as John uses the term “chosen lady” as a figurative expression for the group of believers to whom he is writing in [verse 1](../01/01.md) and the term “her children” for the members of that group, also here John is figuratively describing his own group of believers as the **chosen sister** of that group and the members of his group as the **children** of this sister. Alternate translation: “The members of the chosen group of believers here” If you choose to keep the metaphor in the text, you may want to include an explanation of the meaning in a footnote. (2) refer to the biological children of a specific woman who is the biological sister of another specific woman to whom John is writing. (3) John may be using the words **sister** and **children** figuratively in a spiritual sense, but to refer to an individual woman and the other people that she has led to faith in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2JN 1 13 fh6j figs-metaphor τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἀδελφῆς σου τῆς ἐκλεκτῆς 1 The children of your chosen sister This could: (1) be a metaphor. Just as John uses the term “chosen lady” as a figurative expression for the group of believers to whom he is writing in [verse 1](../01/01.md) and the term “her children” for the members of that group, also here John is describing his own group of believers as the **chosen sister** of that group and the members of his group as the **children** of this sister. Alternate translation: “The members of the chosen group of believers here” If you choose to keep the metaphor in the text, you may want to include an explanation of the meaning in a footnote. (2) refer to the biological children of a specific woman who is the biological sister of another specific woman to whom John is writing. (3) John may be using the words **sister** and **children** in a spiritual sense, but to refer to an individual woman and the other people that she has led to faith in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2JN 1 13 aonw figs-idiom τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἀδελφῆς σου τῆς ἐκλεκτῆς 1 The children of your chosen sister In this context, the term **chosen** indicates someone whom God has chosen to receive salvation. In the context of John’s metaphor, this indicates a church or group of people whom God has chosen to receive salvation. Alternate translation: “The members of this group of believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2JN 1 13 a4rc ἀσπάζεταί σε 1 greet you As was customary in this culture, John concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you can use that form here. Alternate translation: “send you their greetings” or “ask to be remembered to you” 2JN 1 13 qjdz figs-you σε…σου 1 your … you The pronouns **you** and **your** are singular here, in keeping with John’s metaphor of writing to a congregation as though it were a lady. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) diff --git a/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv b/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv index 1c00dd93db..a71de3a6a2 100644 --- a/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv +++ b/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ JUD 1 4 qevn figs-ellipsis παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρ JUD 1 4 wwz3 figs-activepassive οἱ πάλαι προγεγραμμένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίμα 1 who long ago have been designated beforehand for this condemnation If your language does not use this passive form **having been designated, you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “men whom God long ago designated beforehand for this condemnation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JUD 1 4 c7a6 figs-abstractnouns εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίμα 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **condemnation** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to be condemned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JUD 1 4 u2oj figs-explicit ἀσεβεῖς 1 Here, **ungodly ones** refers to the “certain men” mentioned at the beginning of the verse. They are the false teachers Jude is warning his readers about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this term explicitly. Alternate translation: “ungodly false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JUD 1 4 c642 figs-metaphor τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν χάριτα μετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν 1 Here, God’s **grace** is spoken of figuratively as if it were a thing that could be changed into something sinful. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate this in a non-figurative way. The false teachers were teaching that believers could do sexually immoral acts because God’s grace allowed it. Paul addressed this kind of false teaching when he wrote in Romans 6:1-2a: “Should we continue in sin so that grace may abound? May it never be!” Alternate translation: “teaching that God’s grace permits licentiousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 4 c642 figs-metaphor τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν χάριτα μετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν 1 Here, God’s **grace** is spoken of as if it were a thing that could be changed into something sinful. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate this in a non-figurative way. The false teachers were teaching that believers could do sexually immoral acts because God’s grace allowed it. Paul addressed this kind of false teaching when he wrote in Romans 6:1-2a: “Should we continue in sin so that grace may abound? May it never be!” Alternate translation: “teaching that God’s grace permits licentiousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 4 g35s figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμῶν 1 Both occurrences of **our** in this verse refer to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) JUD 1 4 esef figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν χάριτα 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the kind acts of our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JUD 1 4 tmju figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἀσέλγειαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **licentiousness** with an adjective phrase. Alternate translation: “into licentious behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ JUD 1 6 ccz6 figs-explicit μεγάλης ἡμέρας 1 of the great day Here, JUD 1 7 yn36 figs-metonymy Σόδομα καὶ Γόμορρα, καὶ αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις 1 Here, **Sodom**, **Gomorrah**, and **cities** all refer to the people who lived in those cities. Alternate translation: “the people in the region of Sodom and Gomorrah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JUD 1 7 r3e9 writing-pronouns τὸν ὅμοιον τρόπον τούτοις 1 having committed sexual immorality in the same manner as these Here, **these** refers to the angels mentioned in the previous verse. The sexual sins of Sodom and Gomorrah were the result of the same kind of rebellion as the angels’ evil ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the same manner as these wicked angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JUD 1 7 tr3y figs-abstractnouns ἐκπορνεύσασαι 1 having committed sexual immorality in the same manner as these If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **sexual immortality** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “having committed sexually immoral acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JUD 1 7 q9jk figs-metaphor καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας 1 Here Jude uses the phrase **having gone after** figuratively to refer to actively engaging in an improper activity instead of a proper one. This expression is frequently used in the Bible to describe people worshiping false gods or engaging in sexual immorality. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase literally. Alternate translation: “and habitually engaging in sexual immorality with other flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 7 q9jk figs-metaphor καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας 1 Here Jude uses the phrase **having gone after** to refer to actively engaging in an improper activity instead of a proper one. This expression is frequently used in the Bible to describe people worshiping false gods or engaging in sexual immorality. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase literally. Alternate translation: “and habitually engaging in sexual immorality with other flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 7 wp6v σαρκὸς ἑτέρας 1 Here, **other flesh** could refer to: (1) the sexual immorality mentioned in the previous clause. Alternate translation: “improper sexual relations” (2) flesh of a different species, in this case referring to the angels whom the people of Sodom and Gomorrah wants to have sexual relations with. Alternate translation: “flesh of a different type” JUD 1 7 pi4t figs-explicit πρόκεινται δεῖγμα 1 The destruction of the people of Sodom and Gomorrah is an **example** of what happens to people who reject God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “are being displayed as an example of those who reject God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JUD 1 7 jhdl figs-abstractnouns πυρὸς αἰωνίου δίκην ὑπέχουσαι 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **punishment** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “suffering when God punished them with eternal fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ JUD 1 8 ez4l figs-metonymy σάρκα μὲν μιαίνουσιν 1 Here, **fl JUD 1 8 q9ct κυριότητα 1 Here, **lordship** could refer to: (1) the lordship of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ruling authority of Jesus” (2) the lordship of God. Alternate translation: “the ruling authority of God” JUD 1 8 qvhs figs-abstractnouns κυριότητα…ἀθετοῦσιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **lordship** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “reject what Jesus commands” or “reject what God commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JUD 1 8 pn3j δόξας 1 the glorious ones Here, **glorious ones** refers to spiritual beings, such as angels. Alternate translation: “glorious spiritual beings” -JUD 1 9 uzj1 figs-metaphor κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας 1 Here Jude speaks figuratively of **judgment** as if it were something someone can **bring** from one place to another. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to speak a judgment of slander against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 9 uzj1 figs-metaphor κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας 1 Here Jude speaks of **judgment** as if it were something someone can **bring** from one place to another. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to speak a judgment of slander against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 9 v9fh figs-abstractnouns κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **judgment** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to accuse him of slander” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JUD 1 9 lxf3 figs-possession κρίσιν ἐπενεγκεῖν βλασφημίας 1 Jude is using the possessive form to describe a **judgment** that is characterized by **slander**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “to bring a slanderous judgment against him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JUD 1 10 h6sq writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 Here, **these ones** refers to the false teachers introduced in verse [4](../01/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -75,32 +75,32 @@ JUD 1 11 yg9b figs-explicit τοῦ Κάϊν 1 Here Jude compares the false tea JUD 1 11 zsdw ἐξεχύθησαν 1 Alternate translation: “they have fully committed themselves” JUD 1 11 tmf2 figs-explicit τοῦ Βαλαὰμ μισθοῦ 1 Here Jude compares the false teachers to **Balaam**. Jude assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to a story recorded in the Old Testament book of Numbers. In that story, Balaam was hired by wicked kings to curse the Israelites. When God did not allow Balaam to do so, Balaam used wicked women to seduce the Israelites into sexual immorality and idol worship so that God would punish them for their disobedience. Balaam did these wicked things because he wanted to be paid by the wicked kings, but he was eventually killed by the Israelites when they conquered the land of Canaan. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation, as a statement: “of Balaam, who led the Israelites into immorality for money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JUD 1 11 qlof figs-explicit τοῦ Κόρε 1 Here Jude compares the false teachers to **Korah**. Jude assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to a story recorded in the Old Testament book of Numbers. In that story, Korah was a man of Israel who led a rebellion against the leadership of Moses and Aaron, whom God had appointed. God killed Korah and all those who rebelled with him by burning some of them and opening up the ground to swallow up the others. You could indicate some of this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation, as a statement: “of Korah, who rebelled against God’s appointed leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JUD 1 11 tspu figs-pastforfuture ἀπώλοντο 1 Jude is figuratively using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “they will certainly perish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JUD 1 11 tspu figs-pastforfuture ἀπώλοντο 1 Jude is using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “they will certainly perish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JUD 1 12 r875 writing-pronouns οὗτοί 1 Here, **These ones** refers to the false teachers introduced in verse [4](../01/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “These false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JUD 1 12 e25d figs-metaphor σπιλάδες 1 hidden reefs Here, **reefs** are large rocks that are very close to the surface of water in the sea. Because sailors cannot see them, they are very dangerous. Ships can easily be destroyed if they hit these rocks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor with a simile or in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “they are like hidden reefs” or “although they are inconspicuous, these people are extremely dangerous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 12 aq79 translate-unknown ταῖς ἀγάπαις 1 Here, **love feasts** refers to gatherings of Christians where they ate a meal together. These **feasts** took place in the early church and most likely included sharing the bread and wine to remember the death of Jesus, which Paul calls “the Lord’s Supper” in 1 Corinthians 11:20. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express some of this information explicitly. Alternate translation: “communal meals with fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -JUD 1 12 emua figs-metaphor ἑαυτοὺς ποιμαίνοντες 1 Here Jude speaks figuratively of the false teachers selfishly taking care of their own needs as if they are shepherds who feed and care for themselves instead of their flocks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor with a simile or in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “like shepherds that feed themselves instead of their flocks” or “only caring for themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JUD 1 12 s2st figs-metaphor νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέμων παραφερόμεναι 1 Jude speaks figuratively of the false teachers to describe their uselessness. People expect clouds to provide water to grow crops, but **waterless clouds** disappoint farmers by being blown away by the wind without giving rain. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative way or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternate translation: “These false teachers never give what they promise” or “These false teachers disappoint like clouds without water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 12 emua figs-metaphor ἑαυτοὺς ποιμαίνοντες 1 Here Jude speaks of the false teachers selfishly taking care of their own needs as if they are shepherds who feed and care for themselves instead of their flocks. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor with a simile or in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “like shepherds that feed themselves instead of their flocks” or “only caring for themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 12 s2st figs-metaphor νεφέλαι ἄνυδροι ὑπὸ ἀνέμων παραφερόμεναι 1 Jude speaks of the false teachers to describe their uselessness. People expect clouds to provide water to grow crops, but **waterless clouds** disappoint farmers by being blown away by the wind without giving rain. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative way or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternate translation: “These false teachers never give what they promise” or “These false teachers disappoint like clouds without water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 12 diqd figs-activepassive ὑπὸ ἀνέμων παραφερόμεναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form **carried along**, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “which the wind carries along” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JUD 1 12 gs99 figs-metaphor δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα 1 Here Jude again speaks figuratively of the false teachers to describe their uselessness. People expect trees in the autumn to provide fruit, but **fruitless autumn trees** disappoint them. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative way or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternate translation: “never giving what they promise” or “like barren fruit trees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JUD 1 12 doxh figs-pastforfuture δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα 1 Here Jude is figuratively using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “they will certainly die twice, they will certainly be uprooted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JUD 1 12 gs99 figs-metaphor δένδρα φθινοπωρινὰ ἄκαρπα 1 Here Jude again speaks of the false teachers to describe their uselessness. People expect trees in the autumn to provide fruit, but **fruitless autumn trees** disappoint them. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative way or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternate translation: “never giving what they promise” or “like barren fruit trees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 12 doxh figs-pastforfuture δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα 1 Here Jude is using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “they will certainly die twice, they will certainly be uprooted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JUD 1 12 zk57 δὶς ἀποθανόντα ἐκριζωθέντα 1 Here, **having died twice** could mean: (1) the trees are considered to be dead firstly because they do not produce fruit, but doubly dead because they are uprooted in response to their lack of fruit. Alternate translation: “having died twice by being fruitless and uprooted” (2) the trees, which represent the false teachers, are spiritually dead but will also be physically dead when God kills them. “being spiritually dead and then physically dead when they were uprooted” -JUD 1 12 t28p figs-metaphor ἐκριζωθέντα 1 Jude describes God’s judgment of these false teachers figuratively like trees that have been completely pulled out of the ground by their roots. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “having been destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 12 t28p figs-metaphor ἐκριζωθέντα 1 Jude describes God’s judgment of these false teachers like trees that have been completely pulled out of the ground by their roots. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “having been destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 12 g76g figs-activepassive ἐκριζωθέντα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could this with an active form and say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God uprooted them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JUD 1 13 e4rm figs-metaphor κύματα ἄγρια θαλάσσης 1 Here Jude speaks figuratively of the false teachers to describe their unrestrained and untamable behavior. He describes them as **wild waves** that thrash about in an uncontrollable manner. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative way or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternate translation: “they act in an unrestrained manner” or “they are unrestrained like wild waves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JUD 1 13 fgr9 figs-metaphor ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας 1 Here Jude expands the wave metaphor of the previous phrase, speaking figuratively of the **shameful deeds** of the false teachers. As waves leave dirty foam on the shore that everyone can see, so the false teachers keep on acting shamefully in the sight of others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative way or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternate translation: “they make their shameful deeds visible to everyone” or “they show their shameful deeds like waves leave foam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JUD 1 13 r6rj figs-metaphor ἀστέρες πλανῆται 1 wandering stars Here, the phrase **wandering stars** describes **stars** that have wandered away from their normal path of movement. Jude uses this expression figuratively to describe the false teachers as people who have stopped doing what pleases the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way or with a simile. Alternate translation: “no longer living righteously” or “like stars that wander away from their proper path” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 13 e4rm figs-metaphor κύματα ἄγρια θαλάσσης 1 Here Jude speaks of the false teachers to describe their unrestrained and untamable behavior. He describes them as **wild waves** that thrash about in an uncontrollable manner. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative way or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternate translation: “they act in an unrestrained manner” or “they are unrestrained like wild waves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 13 fgr9 figs-metaphor ἐπαφρίζοντα τὰς ἑαυτῶν αἰσχύνας 1 Here Jude expands the wave metaphor of the previous phrase, speaking of the **shameful deeds** of the false teachers. As waves leave dirty foam on the shore that everyone can see, so the false teachers keep on acting shamefully in the sight of others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative way or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternate translation: “they make their shameful deeds visible to everyone” or “they show their shameful deeds like waves leave foam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 13 r6rj figs-metaphor ἀστέρες πλανῆται 1 wandering stars Here, the phrase **wandering stars** describes **stars** that have wandered away from their normal path of movement. Jude uses this expression to describe the false teachers as people who have stopped doing what pleases the Lord. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way or with a simile. Alternate translation: “no longer living righteously” or “like stars that wander away from their proper path” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 13 djm4 figs-activepassive οἷς ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους εἰς αἰῶνα τετήρηται 1 If your language does not use the passive form **has been kept**, you could express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “for whom God has kept the gloom and darkness to eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JUD 1 13 n4oc writing-pronouns οἷς 1 Here, **whom** refers to the false teachers that Jude called “wandering stars” in the previous phrase. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly that this refers to the false teachers. Alternate translation: “false teachers for whom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JUD 1 13 iast ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους 1 Here, **gloom of darkness** could mean: (1) the gloom is characterized by darkness. Alternate translation: “the dark gloom” (2) the gloom is identical to the darkness. Alternate translation: “the gloom, which is darkness.” -JUD 1 13 oey6 figs-metaphor ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους 1 Here Jude uses **gloom** and **darkness** figuratively to refer to hell. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor directly. Alternate translation: “for whom God has reserved the gloom of darkness of hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 13 oey6 figs-metaphor ὁ ζόφος τοῦ σκότους 1 Here Jude uses **gloom** and **darkness** to refer to hell. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor directly. Alternate translation: “for whom God has reserved the gloom of darkness of hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 14 crwg translate-names Ἑνὼχ 1 **Enoch** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JUD 1 14 e5wv ἕβδομος ἀπὸ Ἀδὰμ 1 Since **Adam** is considered to be the first generation of mankind, Enoch is the seventh generation. JUD 1 14 br8e translate-names Ἀδὰμ 1 **Adam** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JUD 1 14 marg writing-pronouns τούτοις 1 Here, **these ones** refers to the false teachers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “about these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JUD 1 14 yenq writing-quotations λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -JUD 1 14 lu2y figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used figuratively to mean giving notice and attention, and that is how James is using it here. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to what I have to say!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JUD 1 14 acin figs-pastforfuture ἦλθεν Κύριος 1 Here Jude is figuratively using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “The Lord will certainly come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JUD 1 14 lu2y figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used to mean giving notice and attention, and that is how James is using it here. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to what I have to say!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 14 acin figs-pastforfuture ἦλθεν Κύριος 1 Here Jude is using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “The Lord will certainly come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JUD 1 14 pylm Κύριος 1 Here, **Lord** could refer to: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “The Lord Jesus” (2) God. Alternate translation: “The Lord God” JUD 1 14 tyf8 translate-unknown μυριάσιν 1 The word **myriads** is the plural of the Greek word “myriad,” which means ten thousand (10,000) but is often used to refer to a large number. You can express this number in the way that would be most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “tens of thousands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JUD 1 14 ljm1 ἁγίαις 1 Here, **holy ones** could refer to: (1) angels, as suggested by the presence of angels in similar statements about judgment in Matthew 24:31, 25:31, Mark 89:38, and 2 Thessalonians 1:7. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “his holy angels” (2) believers. Alternate translation: “his holy believers” or “his saints” @@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ JUD 1 15 y4y5 τῶν σκληρῶν 1 Here, **harsh {things}** refers to har JUD 1 15 d6hy writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 Here the pronoun **him** could refer to: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “Jesus” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God” The option you choose must agree with your choice for the meaning of “Lord” in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JUD 1 16 a4le writing-pronouns οὗτοί 1 Here, **These ones** refers to the false teachers that Jude first introduced in verse [4](../01/04.md) and has discussed throughout the letter. Since Jude shifted in the previous verse to describing the judgment of everyone who does wicked deeds, it may be helpful for you to inform your readers that this verse returns to specifically focusing on the false teachers. Alternate translation: “These false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JUD 1 16 zs28 εἰσιν γογγυσταί μεμψίμοιροι 1 Here the terms **murmurers** and **complainers** refer to two different ways of expressing discontent or unhappiness. While **grumblers** are people who speak their complaints quietly, **complainers** speak them openly. When the Israelites were traveling in the wilderness after leaving Egypt, they were often punished by God for grumbling and complaining against him and their leaders, which is evidently what these false teachers were doing in Jude’s day. Alternate translation: “grumble quietly to themselves and complain loudly” -JUD 1 16 z5bn figs-metaphor πορευόμενοι 1 Here Jude uses **going** figuratively to refer to habitually doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “those habitually living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 16 z5bn figs-metaphor πορευόμενοι 1 Here Jude uses **going** to refer to habitually doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “those habitually living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 16 jhrq τὰς ἐπιθυμίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, **lusts** refers to sinful desires that are opposed to God’s will. Alternate translation: “their sinful desires” JUD 1 16 xum2 τὸ στόμα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ 1 Here Jude uses the singular **mouth** in a distributive way. If this would be confusing to your readers, you could express this explicitly or use a plural noun and verb. Alternate translation: “the mouth of each of them speaks” or “their mouths speak” JUD 1 16 xuf0 figs-metonymy τὸ στόμα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ 1 their mouth speaks Here, **mouth** represents the person who is speaking. Alternate translation: “they speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -125,20 +125,20 @@ JUD 1 17 nyja figs-possession τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our Lor JUD 1 17 qjsf figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our** refers to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) JUD 1 18 toms ὅτι ἔλεγον ὑμῖν 1 This phrase indicates that this verse contains the content of the “words” spoken by the apostles, which Jude referred to in the previous verse. JUD 1 18 nlh9 figs-idiom ἐσχάτου χρόνου 1 Here, **the last time** is an idiom that refers to the time before the return of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the time just before Jesus returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JUD 1 18 w1mx figs-metaphor πορευόμενοι 1 Here Jude uses the word **going** figuratively to refer to habitually doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “those habitually living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 18 w1mx figs-metaphor πορευόμενοι 1 Here Jude uses the word **going** to refer to habitually doing something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “those habitually living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 18 j5m4 κατὰ τὰς ἑαυτῶν ἐπιθυμίας…τῶν ἀσεβειῶν 1 Here, **lusts of ungodliness** refers to sinful desires that are opposed to God’s will. Alternate translation: “according to their own sinful and ungodly desires” JUD 1 19 r28j writing-pronouns οὗτοί 1 Here, **These** refers to the mockers Jude referred to in the previous verse. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “These mockers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JUD 1 19 l568 figs-abstractnouns οἱ ἀποδιορίζοντες 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **divisions** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the ones dividing others against each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JUD 1 19 jwyt figs-explicit Πνεῦμα 1 Here, **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. It does not refer to the spirit of a human or to an evil spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JUD 1 19 ba6u figs-metonymy ψυχικοί 1 Jude is figuratively using one part of the human being, the soul, as opposed to another part, the spirit, to mean “unspiritual.” The word **soulish** describes someone who lives according to their natural instincts instead of according to God’s word and Spirit. It is used to refer to people who are not true believers. Alternate translation: “unspiritual” or “worldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JUD 1 19 qn4p figs-metaphor Πνεῦμα μὴ ἔχοντες 1 The Holy **Spirit** is spoken of figuratively as if he were something that people can possess. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “the Spirit is not within them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 19 ba6u figs-metonymy ψυχικοί 1 Jude is using one part of the human being, the soul, as opposed to another part, the spirit, to mean “unspiritual.” The word **soulish** describes someone who lives according to their natural instincts instead of according to God’s word and Spirit. It is used to refer to people who are not true believers. Alternate translation: “unspiritual” or “worldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JUD 1 19 qn4p figs-metaphor Πνεῦμα μὴ ἔχοντες 1 The Holy **Spirit** is spoken of as if he were something that people can possess. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “the Spirit is not within them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 20 xm93 figs-explicit ἀγαπητοί 1 Here, **beloved ones** refers to those to whom Jude is writing, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. See how you translated this in verse [3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JUD 1 20 cc68 figs-metaphor ἐποικοδομοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑμῶν πίστει 1 building yourselves up Here Jude speaks figuratively of becoming increasingly able to trust in God as if it were the process of constructing a building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner or use a simile. Alternate translation: “causing yourselves to increase in trust in God” or “causing yourselves to increase in trust like one builds up a building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 20 cc68 figs-metaphor ἐποικοδομοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑμῶν πίστει 1 building yourselves up Here Jude speaks of becoming increasingly able to trust in God as if it were the process of constructing a building. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner or use a simile. Alternate translation: “causing yourselves to increase in trust in God” or “causing yourselves to increase in trust like one builds up a building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 20 c2o9 ἐποικοδομοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς 1 building yourselves up This clause refers to one means by which Jude’s readers can obey the command to keep themselves in the love of God, which he makes in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of building yourselves up” JUD 1 20 uyfx figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἁγιωτάτῃ ὑμῶν πίστει 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb, such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “in what you believe that is most holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JUD 1 20 m3rg ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ προσευχόμενοι 1 This clause refers to a second means by which Jude’s readers can obey the command to keep themselves in the love of God, which he makes in the next verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of praying in the Holy Spirit” JUD 1 21 j9su translate-versebridge ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ Θεοῦ τηρήσατε 1 keep yourselves in the love of God If your language would put the command at the front of the sentence and before other modifying clauses, then you could create a verse bridge by moving this clause to the previous verse, placing it just before “building yourselves up in your most holy faith”. You would need to present the combined verses as 20–21. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) -JUD 1 21 zd2c figs-metaphor ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ Θεοῦ τηρήσατε 1 keep yourselves in the love of God Here Jude speaks figuratively of remaining able to receive the **love of God** as if one were keeping oneself in a certain place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor explicitly. Alternate translation: “keep yourselves able to receive the love of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 21 zd2c figs-metaphor ἑαυτοὺς ἐν ἀγάπῃ Θεοῦ τηρήσατε 1 keep yourselves in the love of God Here Jude speaks of remaining able to receive the **love of God** as if one were keeping oneself in a certain place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor explicitly. Alternate translation: “keep yourselves able to receive the love of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 21 s6w6 προσδεχόμενοι τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 waiting for This clause occurs at the same time as the clause that precedes it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this connection explicitly. Alternate translation: “while waiting for the mercy of our Lord” or “while expecting the mercy of our Lord” JUD 1 21 p3bw figs-abstractnouns τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **mercy** could refer to: (1) the mercy Jesus will show to believers when he returns to earth. Alternate translation: “our Lord Jesus Christ to return and act mercifully” (2) Jesus’ continued acts of mercy toward believers in general. Alternate translation: “our Lord Jesus Christ to act mercifully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JUD 1 21 mzqu figs-possession τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our Lord** means “the person who is lord over us” or “the person who rules over us.” See how you translated this expression in verse [17](../01/17.md). Alternate translation: “of the person who rules over us,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -147,13 +147,13 @@ JUD 1 21 qb29 grammar-connect-logic-result τὸ ἔλεος τοῦ Κυρίο JUD 1 22 ynz1 figs-abstractnouns ἐλεᾶτε 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **mercy** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “act mercifully toward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JUD 1 22 wbr5 οὓς…διακρινομένους 1 The phrase **{some} who are doubting** refers to people who have become confused because of the teaching and activities of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “some who are uncertain about what to believe” JUD 1 23 gx9t ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες 1 This clause indicates the means by which Jude wants his audience to save a certain group of people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this connection explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of snatching from fire” -JUD 1 23 wkj9 figs-metaphor ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες 1 Here Jude speaks figuratively of urgently rescuing some people from going to hell as though it was like pulling people from a **fire** before they start to burn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner or use a simile. Alternate translation: “doing whatever must be done to keep them from going to hell” or “doing whatever must be done to save them, as if pulling them from fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 23 wkj9 figs-metaphor ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες 1 Here Jude speaks of urgently rescuing some people from going to hell as though it was like pulling people from a **fire** before they start to burn. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner or use a simile. Alternate translation: “doing whatever must be done to keep them from going to hell” or “doing whatever must be done to save them, as if pulling them from fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 23 ign7 figs-abstractnouns ἐλεᾶτε 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **mercy** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “act mercifully toward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JUD 1 23 uavk ἐν φόβῳ 1 This phrase indicates the manner by which Jude wanted his readers to have mercy on a certain group of people. Alternate translation: “by being cautious” JUD 1 23 u4px figs-hyperbole μισοῦντες καὶ τὸν ἀπὸ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐσπιλωμένον χιτῶνα 1 Jude exaggerates to warn his readers that they can become like those sinners. Alternate translation: “treating them as though you could become guilty of sin just by touching their clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -JUD 1 23 sexc figs-metaphor τῆς σαρκὸς 1 Here, **flesh** is used figuratively to refer to a person’s sinful nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “their sinful nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 23 sexc figs-metaphor τῆς σαρκὸς 1 Here, **flesh** is used to refer to a person’s sinful nature. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “their sinful nature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 24 r3jx figs-explicit τῷ δὲ δυναμένῳ φυλάξαι 1 Here, **the one** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to God, who is able to keep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JUD 1 24 jvpm figs-metaphor φυλάξαι ὑμᾶς ἀπταίστους 1 Here Jude uses **stumbling** to speak figuratively of returning to habitual sin as if one is tripping over something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to prevent you from returning to sinful habits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 24 jvpm figs-metaphor φυλάξαι ὑμᾶς ἀπταίστους 1 Here Jude uses **stumbling** to speak of returning to habitual sin as if one is tripping over something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to prevent you from returning to sinful habits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 24 w1dc figs-abstractnouns τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **glory** refers to the bright light that surrounds the presence of God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this abstract noun by translating it with an adjective. Alternate translation: “his glorious presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JUD 1 24 gq9e ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει 1 This phrase describes the manner in which believers will stand before God. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “with great joy” JUD 1 25 a3ua μόνῳ Θεῷ Σωτῆρι ἡμῶν 1 to the only God our Savior through Jesus Christ our Lord Here, **our Savior** refers to God. It does not refer to Jesus. This phrase emphasizes that God the Father, as well as the Son, is the Savior. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the only God, who is our Savior” From c597c73629aea8246803d1bbebef6a8a7ed2acb9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 20:59:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 304/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index da3282c1b4..038093f6f1 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -129,6 +129,7 @@ GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 19788c33fe1aa2caa8f7ac09a80fc544d876b61f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 17:18:27 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 305/446] Replace "might misunderstand" statements in completed NT books --- en_tn_42-MRK.tsv | 44 +++++++++--------- en_tn_43-LUK.tsv | 12 ++--- en_tn_44-JHN.tsv | 114 +++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 36 +++++++-------- en_tn_53-1TH.tsv | 4 +- en_tn_54-2TH.tsv | 10 ++--- en_tn_58-PHM.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 32 ++++++------- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 10 ++--- en_tn_63-1JN.tsv | 10 ++--- 10 files changed, 137 insertions(+), 137 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv index f3ff378880..aeb6dc8ab2 100644 --- a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ MRK 4 20 tdwj translate-numbers τριάκοντα…ἑξήκοντα…ἑκα MRK 4 21 zzw7 αὐτοῖς 1 And he was saying to them Here, **to them** refers back to the Twelve and others around Jesus in verse [10](../mrk/04/10.md). Alternate translation: “to the Twelve and others with him” MRK 4 21 nn7e figs-rquestion μήτι ἔρχεται ὁ λύχνος ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην? 1 The lamp does not come in order to be put under a basket, or under the bed, does it? Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You certainly do not bring a light inside the house to put it under a basket or under a bed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 4 21 dkq7 figs-doublet ἵνα ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεθῇ, ἢ ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην 1 Mark mentions two household items here for the sake of emphasis. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases, as modeled by the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -MRK 4 22 y5kn figs-litotes οὐ γάρ ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν 1 For nothing is hidden except so that it might be revealed, and nothing secret has happened except so that it might come to exposure If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “For everything that is hidden will be made known, and everything that is secret will come out into the open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +MRK 4 22 y5kn figs-litotes οὐ γάρ ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν 1 For nothing is hidden except so that it might be revealed, and nothing secret has happened except so that it might come to exposure If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “For everything that is hidden will be made known, and everything that is secret will come out into the open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) MRK 4 22 kc6k figs-parallelism οὐ…ἐστιν κρυπτὸν, ἐὰν μὴ ἵνα φανερωθῇ; οὐδὲ ἐγένετο ἀπόκρυφον, ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἔλθῃ εἰς φανερόν 1 nothing is hidden … and nothing secret has happened These two phrases, **nothing is hidden** and **nothing secret has happened**, both have the same meaning. Jesus is emphasizing that everything that is secret will be made known. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Absolutely everything that is hidden will be revealed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MRK 4 23 k1a8 εἴ τις ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 If anyone has ears to hear, let him hear See how you translated this in [4:9](../04/09.md) MRK 4 24 r2r1 ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς 1 he was saying to them See how you translated this phrase in [4:21](../04/21.md) @@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ MRK 8 22 mx9q figs-explicit ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψηται 1 that he would t MRK 8 24 r6tk figs-simile βλέπω τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ὅτι ὡς δένδρα ὁρῶ περιπατοῦντας 1 I see men who look like walking trees The man sees people **walking** around, yet they are not clear to him. To the man, people just look like tall figures, so he compares them to **trees**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Yes, I see people! They are walking around, but I cannot see them clearly. They look like trees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MRK 8 25 td9l figs-activepassive καὶ διέβλεψεν καὶ ἀπεκατέστη 1 and he looked intently and was restored The phrase **was restored** can be written is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Jesus restored the man’s sight, and then the man opened his eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 8 27 e4l3 figs-go ἐξῆλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὰς κώμας 1 Connecting Statement: Your language may say “came” rather than **went** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples came out into the villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -MRK 8 28 nn1f figs-ellipsis ἄλλοι…ἄλλοι 1 other … others The two occurrences of **others** in this verse both refer to “other people.” If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “other people say you are … other people say you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 8 28 nn1f figs-ellipsis ἄλλοι…ἄλλοι 1 other … others The two occurrences of **others** in this verse both refer to “other people.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “other people say you are … other people say you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 8 30 rgy8 figs-quotations ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς ἵνα μηδενὶ λέγωσιν περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 he warned them that they might tell no one about him If it would be more natural in your language, you could express **they might tell no one about him** as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus warned them, ‘Do not tell anyone that I am the Christ’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MRK 8 31 d4dc τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md). MRK 8 31 m32p figs-activepassive ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμματέων, καὶ ἀποκτανθῆναι, καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἀναστῆναι 1 to be rejected by the elders and the chief priests and the scribes, and to be killed, and to rise up after three days If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the elders and the chief priests and the scribes would reject him, and that men would kill him, and that after three days he would rise up from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -614,7 +614,7 @@ MRK 9 35 fkf6 figs-declarative ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ MRK 9 35 jzl5 figs-metaphor εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος 1 If anyone wants to be first, he will be last of all Being **first** refers to people who are esteemed by others because of their social position, wealth, and privileges. Being **last** refers to people who are not esteemed by others, because they lack social position, wealth, and privileges. Jesus speaks of being the “most important” as being **first** and of being the “least important” as being **last**. If it would help your readers to understand what it means to be **first** and **last** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternately, you could express the meaning using plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 9 35 ioiu figs-nominaladj εἴ τις θέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος 1 Jesus is using the adjective **first** as a noun in order to describe a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “If anyone wants to be most important in God’s sight, he should act as if he is the least important in God’s sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 9 35 um58 translate-ordinal πρῶτος 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **first**, you can express the meaning behind the word **first** in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -MRK 9 35 jqo3 figs-ellipsis ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he will be last of all people and a servant of all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 9 35 jqo3 figs-ellipsis ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος καὶ πάντων διάκονος 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he will be last of all people and a servant of all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 9 35 z9x2 figs-declarative ἔσται…ἔσχατος 1 Jesus is using the future statement **he will be last** to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “he must be last” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) MRK 9 35 t526 πάντων…πάντων 1 of all … of all Alternate translation: “of all people … of all people” MRK 9 36 qqcu writing-pronouns ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the 12 disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -718,7 +718,7 @@ MRK 10 32 hq7y figs-explicit οἱ…ἀκολουθοῦντες 1 those who ar MRK 10 32 k1nn figs-nominaladj τοὺς δώδεκα 1 See how you translated the phrase **the Twelve** in [3:16](../3/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 10 33 pv4w figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Behold **Behold** is an exclamation word which Jesus is using to draw attention to the words that he says next. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) MRK 10 33 qkq9 figs-exclusive ἀναβαίνομεν 1 When Jesus says **we**, he is speaking of himself and the 12 disciples, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -MRK 10 33 s1hp figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν καὶ γραμματεῦσιν, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ, καὶ παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 the Son of Man will be delivered In speaking of himself as **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will be delivered to the chief priests and the scribes, and they will condemn me to death and deliver me to the Gentiles” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person) +MRK 10 33 s1hp figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν καὶ γραμματεῦσιν, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ, καὶ παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 the Son of Man will be delivered In speaking of himself as **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, will be delivered to the chief priests and the scribes, and they will condemn me to death and deliver me to the Gentiles” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person) MRK 10 33 ha2g figs-activepassive ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδοθήσεται 1 the Son of Man will be delivered If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the meaning behind the phrase **will be handed over** by using an active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they will deliver the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 10 33 ohsf figs-abstractnouns καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτὸν θανάτῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using a verbal form of this word, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 10 33 ils2 παραδώσουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 deliver him to the Gentiles Alternate translation: “put him under the control of the Gentiles” @@ -752,7 +752,7 @@ MRK 10 43 gfun figs-declarative ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος 1 Jesus MRK 10 44 e7sn figs-metaphor εἶναι πρῶτος 1 to be first Here, **to be first** means being the most important. See how you translated **first** in [Mark 9:35](../mrk/09/35.md). Alternate translation: “to be the most important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 10 44 qzo8 figs-declarative ἔσται πάντων δοῦλος 1 Jesus is using the future statement **will be a slave of all** to give an instruction. See how you translated the phrase “will be” in [10:43](../10/43.md), where it occurs with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “must be a slave of all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) MRK 10 44 u5yb figs-hyperbole ἔσται…δοῦλος 1 Jesus speaks of being **a slave** to emphasize the great effort Jesus’ followers should make to serve others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows service, or you could clarify that Jesus is teaching that his followers must act in a way that is similar to slaves in their service to others. as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MRK 10 45 ctta figs-123person καὶ γὰρ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person) +MRK 10 45 ctta figs-123person καὶ γὰρ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person) MRK 10 45 pmk3 figs-go οὐκ ἦλθεν 1 Your language may say “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “did not leave heaven and go to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) MRK 10 45 a3fr figs-activepassive διακονηθῆναι 1 For even the Son of Man did not come to be served The phrase **to be served** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have people serve him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 10 45 rik1 διακονηθῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι 1 to be served, but to serve Alternate translation: “to be served by people, but to serve people” @@ -823,7 +823,7 @@ MRK 11 15 ve56 figs-synecdoche ἱερῷ 1 General Information: See how you tra MRK 11 16 ohxg figs-synecdoche ἱεροῦ 1 See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:11](../11/11.md), where it is used with the same meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MRK 11 17 xrz2 figs-rquestion οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν? 1 Is it not written, ‘My house will be called a house of prayer for all the nations’? **Has it not been written** is a rhetorical question which Jesus is using to emphasize God’s purpose for the temple, as recorded in the Old Testament Scriptures. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate Jesus’ words as a statement and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Listen to me! You should have paid closer attention to the scripture which says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 11 17 dxwe figs-quotesinquotes οὐ γέγραπται, ὅτι ὁ οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν? ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπήλαιον λῃστῶν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “God says in the Scriptures that his temple would be a place of prayer for all nations, but you have made it a den of robbers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -MRK 11 17 t9x9 figs-activepassive οὐ γέγραπται 1 If your readers would misunderstand the phrase **been written**, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “Has God not said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MRK 11 17 t9x9 figs-activepassive οὐ γέγραπται 1 If your readers might not understand the phrase **been written**, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “Has God not said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 11 17 qeix figs-metaphor οἶκός μου 1 God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to his temple as his **house** because his presence is there. Alternate translation: “My temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 11 17 t1ho figs-metaphor οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται πᾶσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 God, speaking through the prophet Isaiah, refers to a place where people would pray as a **house of prayer**. Alternate translation: “will be called a place where people from all nations can pray to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 11 17 npdf figs-activepassive οἶκός μου, οἶκος προσευχῆς κληθήσεται 1 The phrase **will be called** is passive in form. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is probably best to say that people will call God’s temple a house of prayer, although it is also possible to say that God will call it that as well. Alternate translation: “People will call my house a house of prayer” or “Everyone will call my temple a house of prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -869,12 +869,12 @@ MRK 11 30 i5is figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 from men Here, Jesus is MRK 11 30 fr1b ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 was it from heaven or from men Alternate translation: “was it authorized by God or by men” MRK 11 30 mc8n figs-yousingular ἀποκρίθητέ μοι 1 In the original language in which Mark wrote this book, the word **Answer** is a command written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) MRK 11 31 s9vv grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ 1 If we would say, ‘From heaven,’ The Jewish leaders are describing a hypothetical situation. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Suppose we say, ‘From heaven.’ Then he will ask, ‘Then why did you not believe him’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -MRK 11 31 e7j4 figs-quotesinquotes ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “If we say that John’s authority came from God, Jesus will ask us why we did not believe him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 11 31 e7j4 figs-quotesinquotes ἐὰν εἴπωμεν, ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐρεῖ, διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “If we say that John’s authority came from God, Jesus will ask us why we did not believe him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MRK 11 31 nu1m figs-metonymy ἐξ οὐρανοῦ 1 From heaven See how you translated **heaven** in [11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 11 32 tczm grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 Here, the Jewish leaders are describing another hypothetical situation. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “But suppose we say, ‘From men’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) MRK 11 32 aus1 figs-explicit ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 But we might say, ‘From men,’ The phrase **From men** refers to the source of the baptism of John. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘John’s baptism was from men,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 11 32 v2gs figs-gendernotations ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 From men See how you translated the phrase **From men** in [11:30](../11/30.md). Alternate translation: “From people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -MRK 11 32 b5qb figs-quotesinquotes ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 But we might say, ‘From men,’… If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But if we say that John’s authority came from people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 11 32 b5qb figs-quotesinquotes ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων 1 But we might say, ‘From men,’… If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But if we say that John’s authority came from people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MRK 11 32 z93u figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ εἴπωμεν, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων? 1 But we might say, ‘From men,’… The religious leaders do not finish their statement, since they all understand what would happen if they said John’s baptism was not from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But if we say, ‘From men,’ that would not be good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 11 32 z998 grammar-connect-time-background ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον, ἅπαντες γὰρ εἶχον τὸν Ἰωάννην, ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν 1 They were afraid of the crowd The author of the Gospel of Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “They said this to each other because they were afraid of the crowd, for all the people in the crowd believed that John really was a prophet” or “They did not want to say that John’s baptism was from men because they were afraid of the crowd, since all the people in the crowd believed that John truly was a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) MRK 11 32 dqlt grammar-collectivenouns ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν ὄχλον 1 The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “They were afraid of the group of people gathered there” or “They were afraid of the many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) @@ -958,10 +958,10 @@ MRK 12 21 cgzm figs-metaphor σπέρμα 1 See how you translated this sense o MRK 12 21 tbzw figs-explicit καὶ ὁ τρίτος ὡσαύτως 1 The Sadducees are speaking in a compact way in order to keep the story short. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the information they leave out from the context. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “In the same way, the third brother married this widow but also died before they had any children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 12 21 l1ds figs-nominaladj ὁ τρίτος 1 the third likewise Jesus is using the adjective **third** as a noun in order to indicate a particular person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify the person. Alternate translation: “the third brother” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 12 21 hx1q translate-ordinal ὁ τρίτος 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “brother number three” or “the next oldest brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -MRK 12 22 wjq8 figs-ellipsis οἱ ἑπτὰ 1 the seven The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 22 wjq8 figs-ellipsis οἱ ἑπτὰ 1 the seven The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 12 22 l3dg figs-metaphor σπέρμα 1 the seven did not leave offspring See how you translated this sense of the word **seed** in [12:19](../12/19.md).. Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 12 23 w4wu ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει 1 In the resurrection, when they may rise again, of which of them will she be a wife? The Sadducees did not actually believe that there would be a resurrection. Your language may have a way of showing this. Alternate translation: “in the supposed resurrection” or “when people supposedly rise from the dead” -MRK 12 23 c4p5 figs-ellipsis οἱ…ἑπτὰ 1 The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 23 c4p5 figs-ellipsis οἱ…ἑπτὰ 1 The Sadducees are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the seven brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 12 24 zp2p figs-rquestion οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ? 1 Are you not being led astray because of this, not knowing the scriptures nor the power of God? Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the fact that the Sadducees do not correctly understand the Scriptures or God’s power. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are greatly misunderstanding this matter because you do not know the Scriptures or the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 12 24 sie3 figs-activepassive οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλανᾶσθε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς Γραφὰς, μηδὲ τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You are greatly mistaken because you do not know the Scriptures or God’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 12 24 i8il τὴν δύναμιν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the power of God Alternate translation: “how powerful God is” @@ -997,16 +997,16 @@ MRK 12 30 m8hi ἐξ…ἐξ…ἐξ…ἐξ 1 Alternate translation: “with MRK 12 30 x3n5 figs-abstractnouns ψυχῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **soul**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “essence” or “being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 12 30 ln0t figs-abstractnouns διανοίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mind**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 12 30 mii2 figs-abstractnouns ἰσχύος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **strength**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “power” or “ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MRK 12 31 eu8b figs-ellipsis δευτέρα αὕτη 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The second commandment is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 31 eu8b figs-ellipsis δευτέρα αὕτη 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “The second commandment is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 12 31 fz8g figs-explicit δευτέρα 1 Here, Jesus is using the word **second** to mean “second most important.” If your readers would not understand the use of **second** in this context, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “The second most important commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 12 31 oegh translate-ordinal δευτέρα 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers such as **second**, you can express the meaning behind the word **second** in a way that would be natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -MRK 12 31 np4y figs-ellipsis ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “You will love your neighbor as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 31 np4y figs-ellipsis ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “You will love your neighbor as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 12 31 tp6p figs-declarative ἀγαπήσεις 1 You will love your neighbor as yourself Here, Jesus is quoting a scripture in which a future statement is used to give an instruction. If it would be helpful in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) MRK 12 31 pyc1 figs-explicit τούτων 1 than these Here, the word **these** refers to the two commandments that Jesus has just quoted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 12 32 uhgy Διδάσκαλε 1 See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md). MRK 12 32 qqm4 figs-abstractnouns ἀληθείας 1 Good, Teacher If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 12 32 awe3 εἷς ἐστιν 1 he is one See how you translated the phrase **is one** in [12:29](../12/29.md). -MRK 12 32 as2j figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλος 1 that there is no other The scribe is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that there is no other god” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 32 as2j figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλος 1 that there is no other The scribe is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “that there is no other god” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 12 33 v8yn figs-metaphor ὅλης τῆς καρδίας 1 See how you translated the phrase **whole heart** in [12:30](../12/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 12 33 xnq9 figs-abstractnouns συνέσεως 1 from your whole heart … from your whole understanding … from your whole strength If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **understanding**, you can express the same idea in another way, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 12 33 k42a figs-abstractnouns ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος 1 from your whole heart See how you translated the phrase **whole strength** in [12:30](../12/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1021,7 +1021,7 @@ MRK 12 35 ptc8 figs-synecdoche ἱερῷ 1 answering, Jesus, teaching in the te MRK 12 35 q6e4 πῶς λέγουσιν οἱ γραμματεῖς ὅτι ὁ Χριστὸς, υἱὸς Δαυείδ ἐστιν? 1 How do the scribes say that the Christ is the son of David? This is not a rhetorical question. Rather, Jesus’ listeners had asked him some difficult questions, and they had admitted that he answered them well. Now, in return, he is asking them a difficult question. None of them will be able to answer it, and this will demonstrate his wisdom even further. His question actually will teach something to those who are able to recognize its implications. But it would be appropriate to leave it in question form and not translate it as a statement. MRK 12 35 i6a4 figs-metaphor υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 the son of David Here, Jesus is using the term **son** to mean “descendant.” If your readers would not understand what **son** means in this context, you could express its meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 12 36 e1zq figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς Δαυεὶδ 1 David himself Jesus uses the word **himself** here to emphasize that it was David, the very person whom the scribes call the father of the Christ, who spoke the words in the quotation that follows. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “None other than David” or “David, the very person whom you call the father of the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -MRK 12 36 jlbd figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ, εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “said, by inspiration of the Holy Spirit, that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right side until he made his enemies a footstool for his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 12 36 jlbd figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ, εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation within that one. Alternate translation: “said, by inspiration of the Holy Spirit, that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right side until he made his enemies a footstool for his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MRK 12 36 ejy2 ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι τῷ ἁγίῳ 1 in the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “by the inspiration of the Holy Spirit” MRK 12 36 dv7b figs-euphemism εἶπεν ὁ Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου 1 said, ‘The Lord said to my Lord Here, the term **Lord** does not refer to the same person in both instances. The first instance is representing the name Yahweh, which David actually uses in this psalm. In order to honor the commandment not to misuse God’s name, Jewish people often avoided saying that name and said Lord instead. The second instance is the regular term for “lord” or “master.” The ULT and UST capitalize the word because it refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “The Lord God said to my Lord” or “God said to my Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MRK 12 36 v53p translate-symaction κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 Sit at my right hand The seat at the right side of a ruler was a position of great honor and authority. By telling the Messiah to sit there, God was symbolically conferring honor and authority on him. Alternate translation: “Sit in the place of honor beside me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) @@ -1050,7 +1050,7 @@ MRK 12 41 nohd writing-newevent καθίσας κατέναντι τοῦ γαζ MRK 12 41 p2kp figs-metonymy τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου…τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον 1 the temple offering box Mark is speaking of the boxes in the temple courtyard where people put money that they were giving to God. He associates the boxes with **the treasury**, the name of the place where this money would be kept until it was needed. Alternate translation: “the offering boxes … the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 12 41 w4xc grammar-collectivenouns ὁ ὄχλος 1 The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression such as “many people,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) MRK 12 41 jgkw figs-nominaladj πλούσιοι 1 Mark is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression such as “rich people,” as the UST does. Alternate translation: “wealthy people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MRK 12 41 rl1l figs-ellipsis πολλά 1 Mark is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “much money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 12 41 rl1l figs-ellipsis πολλά 1 Mark is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “much money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 12 42 g6ry translate-bmoney λεπτὰ δύο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 1 two mites The word lepta is the plural of “lepton.” A lepton was a small bronze or copper coin used by the Jews. It was equivalent to a few minutes’ wages. It was the least valuable coin that people used in this culture. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead, you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or use a general expression. Alternate translation: “two pennies” or “two small coins of little value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) MRK 12 42 n29e translate-bmoney ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 1 are a quadrans A **quadrans** was the smallest Roman coin. Mark is seeking to help his readers, who are Roman, understand the value of **two leptas** in their own currency. You could clarify in your translation that a **quadrans** is a Roman coin, as the UST does, or you can leave this information untranslated. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) MRK 12 43 ipl1 translate-versebridge 0 General Information: In verse 43 Jesus says that the widow put more money in the offering than the rich people put in, and in verse 44 he gives his reason for saying that. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 43–44, as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) @@ -1081,7 +1081,7 @@ MRK 13 6 wv12 figs-explicit ἐγώ εἰμι 1 they will lead many astray The i MRK 13 7 fl5h πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων 1 you may hear of wars and rumors of wars The phrase “wars and rumors of wars” could mean: (1) reports of wars that are currently happening and reports of wars that might happen in the future. (2) reports of wars that are already taking place near by and reports of wars that are happening in distant places. Alternate translation: “reports of wars that are close by and of wars that are far away” MRK 13 7 d1k9 figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ οὔπω τὸ τέλος 1 but the end is not yet Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the end will not happen immediately” or “but the end will not happen until later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 13 7 mi4d figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 the end Here, **the end** implicitly means “the end of the world.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 13 8 ydrb figs-parallelism ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could combine these two phrases into one phrase. Alternate translation: “Different groups of people will attack each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +MRK 13 8 ydrb figs-parallelism ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Jesus is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two phrases into one phrase. Alternate translation: “Different groups of people will attack each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MRK 13 8 rlxf figs-genericnoun ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος 1 The word **nation** represents nations in general, not one particular nation. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MRK 13 8 oyrd figs-metonymy ἐγερθήσεται…ἔθνος ἐπ’ ἔθνος 1 The term **nation** refers to the people of one nationality or ethnic group. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 13 8 xln4 figs-idiom ἐγερθήσεται…ἐπ’ 1 will rise against The phrase **rise against** is an idiom that means to attack. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The people of some nations will attack the people of other nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1107,7 +1107,7 @@ MRK 13 11 uy91 figs-idiom παραδιδόντες 1 handing you over Here, **ha MRK 13 11 m0xq figs-activepassive δοθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus says later in this verse that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. Alternate translation: “whatever the Holy Spirit gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 13 11 nr2r figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 13 11 q2o3 figs-explicit οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 The phrase **for you will not be the ones speaking, but the Holy Spirit** implicitly means that it is the Holy Spirit who will give the disciples the words to say. This does not mean that the Holy Spirit audibly speaks for the disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit will give you the words to say” or “for the Holy Spirit will instruct you what to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MRK 13 11 a9b6 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 but the Holy Spirit Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit will speak through you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 13 11 a9b6 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 but the Holy Spirit Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but the Holy Spirit will speak through you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 13 12 toqp figs-explicit παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς καὶ θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς 1 Here, the implication is that these people will do these bad things to their family members, because these people hate Jesus, but their family members believe in him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because people hate me, they will deliver their own family members who believe in me to the authorities in order to have them killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 13 12 py9u figs-explicit παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον; καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐπὶ γονεῖς 1 brother will deliver brother to death Here, Jesus is explaining to his disciples what “some” brothers and “some” fathers and “some” children will do to their family members. He is speaking in general terms and is not saying that “all” brothers or fathers or children will do this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 13 12 m6iq figs-gendernotations παραδώσει ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters will deliver their siblings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -1146,7 +1146,7 @@ MRK 13 20 fz5f figs-doublet τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς, οὓς ἐξελέ MRK 13 20 af7n figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς 1 Jesus is using the adjective **elect** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase as modeled by the UST.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 13 21 d9gr translate-versebridge 0 General Information: In verse 21 Jesus gives a command, and in verse 22 he gives the reason for the command. If your language would put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge by moving this verse to the end of the following verse. You would then present the combined verses as 21–22 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) MRK 13 21 qsfu figs-quotesinquotes καὶ τότε ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ, ἴδε, ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, ἴδε, ἐκεῖ, μὴ πιστεύετε 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And do not believe anyone who says to you that the Christ is either here or there” or “And do not believe anyone who says to you that the Christ is in this location or that location” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -MRK 13 21 yfd3 figs-ellipsis ἴδε, ἐκεῖ 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Look, there is the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 13 21 yfd3 figs-ellipsis ἴδε, ἐκεῖ 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Look, there is the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 13 22 yw81 figs-activepassive ἐγερθήσονται 1 to deceive If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “will arise” or “will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 13 22 n81i figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς 1 false Christs See how you translated the phrase **the elect** in [13:20](../13/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 13 23 jq8p figs-metaphor βλέπετε 1 But you, watch out See how you translated the word **watch** in [13:9](../13/09.md) where it is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “pay attention to yourselves” or “be watchful” or “be alert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1161,7 +1161,7 @@ MRK 13 25 hge7 figs-parallelism αἱ δυνάμεις 1 the powers that are in MRK 13 25 au6l figs-activepassive αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς σαλευθήσονται 1 the powers that are in the heavens will be shaken If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that it is “God” who will do it. Alternate translation: “God will cause the powers that are in the heavens to be shaken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 13 26 kl95 writing-pronouns τότε ὄψονται 1 then they will see The pronoun **they** refers to the people of the nations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “then the people of the nations will see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 13 26 yn52 τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [2:10](../02/10.md). -MRK 13 26 a130 figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 By calling himself **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MRK 13 26 a130 figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 By calling himself **the Son of Man**, Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MRK 13 26 nlo7 figs-explicit ἐρχόμενον ἐν νεφέλαις 1 Jesus assumes that his disciples will know that the phrase **coming in clouds** means **coming** down from heaven **in clouds**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “coming down from heaven in clouds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 13 26 cd1e figs-hendiadys μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης 1 The phrase **with great power and glory** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The term **glory** describes what kind of **power** Jesus will have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “with very glorious power” or “shining brightly because he is so powerful” or, if you decided to use the first person, “with majesty and splendor” or “with awesome might and supreme honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) MRK 13 26 h4z1 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ δυνάμεως πολλῆς καὶ δόξης 1 with great power and glory If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **power** or **glory**, you can express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **power** and **glory** with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “to show he is very powerful and everyone should praise him” or, if you decided to use the first person, “to show I am very powerful and everyone should praise me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1301,7 +1301,7 @@ MRK 14 27 pu4s λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 Jesus says to the MRK 14 27 lty4 figs-idiom πάντες σκανδαλισθήσεσθε 1 will fall away Here, **fall away** is an idiom meaning “to desert.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You will all leave me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 14 27 gkb5 writing-quotations γέγραπται 1 Here, Mark uses **it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament passage of Scripture, ([Zechariah 13:7](../zec/13/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Mark is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it is written in God’s Word” or “it is written by Zechariah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) MRK 14 27 jp51 figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form, as modeled by the UST, or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “Zechariah” did it. Alternate translation: “regarding what would happen to the Messiah and his followers, Zechariah wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 14 27 qzzv figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι γέγραπται, πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “because Zechariah the prophet wrote that God would strike the shepherd and the sheep would be scattered” or “because Zechariah the prophet predicted in the Scriptures that God would strike the shepherd and the sheep would be scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MRK 14 27 qzzv figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι γέγραπται, πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “because Zechariah the prophet wrote that God would strike the shepherd and the sheep would be scattered” or “because Zechariah the prophet predicted in the Scriptures that God would strike the shepherd and the sheep would be scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MRK 14 27 cv7z figs-metaphor πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα καὶ τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται 1 Jesus is quoting a prophecy from from ([Zechariah 13:7](../zec/13/07.md)) in which the prophet Zechariah speaks of the Messiah as if he were a **shepherd** and of the Messiah’s followers as if they were **sheep**. Since this is a quotation from Scripture, translate the words directly rather than providing an explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 14 27 w2az figs-activepassive τὰ πρόβατα διασκορπισθήσονται 1 the sheep will be scattered If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea behind the phrase **the sheep will be scattered** in another way that is natural in your language. The phrase **the sheep will be scattered** does not necessarily imply that there is someone making the action of scattering happen, so try to translate this phrase in a way that simply shows that **the sheep will be scattered** without saying who will make the action happen. Alternate translation: “the sheep will run away in different directions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 14 28 dm1q figs-explicit ἐγερθῆναί με 1 I am raised up The phrase **raised up** means to having become alive again after having died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am made alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1316,7 +1316,7 @@ MRK 14 32 deg7 writing-pronouns ἔρχονται 1 they come to a place The pro MRK 14 32 ni66 figs-go ἔρχονται 1 Connecting Statement: Your language may say “went” rather than **come** or “came” in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went” or “they go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) MRK 14 34 eyw3 figs-synecdoche ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου 1 My soul is By using the phrase **my soul**, Jesus is speaking of his entire self by referring to one part of himself, his **soul**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MRK 14 34 krj1 figs-abstractnouns ψυχή μου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **soul**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MRK 14 34 ic1g figs-hyperbole ἕως θανάτου 1 even to the point of death Jesus is using the phrase **even unto death** to describe the extent of his grief. Jesus is exaggerating in order to show the depth of the distress and sorrow that he feels. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses great sorrow, or you could turn the phrase **even unto death** into a simile, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “and I have so much grief that it makes me feel like I am near death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MRK 14 34 ic1g figs-hyperbole ἕως θανάτου 1 even to the point of death Jesus is using the phrase **even unto death** to describe the extent of his grief. Jesus is exaggerating in order to show the depth of the distress and sorrow that he feels. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses great sorrow, or you could turn the phrase **even unto death** into a simile, as modeled by the UST. Alternate translation: “and I have so much grief that it makes me feel like I am near death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MRK 14 35 nk8l figs-explicit εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν 1 if it is possible Alternate translation: “if possible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 14 35 wc6d figs-idiom παρέλθῃ…ἡ ὥρα 1 the hour might pass Jesus is using the term **hour** to refer to a specific time at which an event or events would take place. Here, the phrase **the hour** refers specifically to the time of Jesus’ suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning in plain language, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 14 35 gj74 figs-metonymy παρέλθῃ ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα 1 Here, Jesus is referring to the events that would take place during the upcoming hours as if they were the **hour** itself. Because Jesus is associating the upcoming events with the time of the events themselves, by asking that **the hour might pass**, Jesus is actually asking that the events themselves would not happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the upcoming events would pass from him” or “he would not have to experience the upcoming things which he knew he was going to have to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1330,7 +1330,7 @@ MRK 14 38 hi36 figs-abstractnouns προσεύχεσθε, ἵνα μὴ ἔλθ MRK 14 38 zrp4 figs-explicit προσεύχεσθε, ἵνα μὴ ἔλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν 1 so that you may not enter into temptation The implications are that the disciples will soon experience the **temptation** to abandon Jesus in order to save themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “pray that when the Jewish leaders come to arrest me and you are tempted to try to save yourselves by running away or denying that you know me, you will not sin by doing that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 14 38 c1je figs-metonymy τὸ…πνεῦμα 1 The spirit … the flesh Jesus is describing the inner part of a person (which includes their desires and will) by association with their **spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or use plain language. See how you translated **spirit** in [2:8](../02/08.md), where **spirit** is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “The inner self” or “The inner person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 14 38 djxc figs-abstractnouns τὸ…πνεῦμα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **spirit**, you can express the same idea in another way, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MRK 14 38 gt2n figs-ellipsis πρόθυμον 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “is willing to do what is right” or “is willing to do what pleases God” or “is willing to obey me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MRK 14 38 gt2n figs-ellipsis πρόθυμον 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “is willing to do what is right” or “is willing to do what pleases God” or “is willing to obey me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 14 38 b909 ἡ…σὰρξ ἀσθενής 1 Here, the word **flesh** could: (1) include the meaning of both option 2 and option 3 and therefore **flesh** would refer to both the weakness of the human body and also to the deficiency of human desire and ability to do what is right. Alternate translation: “the body and your spiritual strength is weak” (2) refer to the human “body.” Alternate translation: “the body is weak” (3) refer to the sinful part of human nature that prefers to seek comfort and seek what it desires rather than obey God and do the things that please him. Alternate translation: “the sinful human nature is weak” MRK 14 39 l9nj τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον εἰπών 1 having said the same thing Alternate translation: “and said the same thing he had prayed the first time” MRK 14 40 zkb2 grammar-connect-logic-result εὗρεν αὐτοὺς καθεύδοντας, ἦσαν γὰρ αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καταβαρυνόμενοι 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because the three disciples’ eyes were weighed down, he found them sleeping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv index 04a1bfe9a0..4f151e653f 100644 --- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv @@ -1869,7 +1869,7 @@ LUK 11 12 r52w figs-rquestion ἢ καὶ αἰτήσει ᾠόν, ἐπιδώσ LUK 11 12 l658 figs-hypo ἢ καὶ αἰτήσει ᾠόν, ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ σκορπίον? 1 Or also he will ask for an egg, he will give him a scorpion? Jesus is also using a hypothetical situation to teach. You could translate his words that way. Alternate translation: “Or suppose a son asked for an egg to eat. His father would not give him a scorpion instead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 11 12 e8hr translate-unknown σκορπίον 1 scorpion A **scorpion** is a small animal related to the spider. It has two claws and a poisonous stinger in its tail. If your readers would not be familiar with scorpions, you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a poisonous stinging animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 11 12 ls05 figs-explicit σκορπίον 1 a scorpion In this culture, people did not eat scorpions. So Jesus is saying that a father would not give a son something the son could not eat if the son asked for something that he could eat. If people do eat scorpions in your culture, you could use the name of something that they do not eat, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “something he cannot eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 11 13 g99r grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ὑμεῖς πονηροὶ ὑπάρχοντες, οἴδατε 1 if you who are evil know Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you who are evil know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +LUK 11 13 g99r grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ὑμεῖς πονηροὶ ὑπάρχοντες, οἴδατε 1 if you who are evil know Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you who are evil know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) LUK 11 13 aww7 figs-rquestion πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὁ Πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, δώσει Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον τοῖς αἰτοῦσιν αὐτόν? 1 how much more will the Father who is from heaven give the Holy Spirit to those who ask him? Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “your Heavenly Father will even more certainly give the Holy Spirit to those who ask him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 11 14 uyu1 grammar-connect-time-background καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to begin relating a new event by introducing background information that will help readers understand what happens. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 11 14 afa8 figs-explicit ἦν ἐκβάλλων δαιμόνιον κωφόν 1 he was driving out a mute demon The **demon** itself was not unable to speak. Rather, it was preventing the man whom it was controlling from speaking. Alternate translation: “Jesus was driving out a demon that was causing a man to be unable to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1899,7 +1899,7 @@ LUK 11 19 l668 figs-explicit εἰ δὲ ἐγὼ ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ LUK 11 19 l669 translate-names Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 Beelzebul See how you translated the name **Beelzebul** in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 11 19 l670 figs-metaphor οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν 1 your sons Here, Jesus uses the word **sons** to mean “followers.” Alternate translation: “your followers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 19 bs8x figs-explicit αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν κριταὶ ἔσονται 1 they will be your judges If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the implications of this statement more explicitly. Alternate translation: “your own followers will say that you are wrong for claiming that I make demons leave people by using the power of Beelzebul, because they know that they are not using that power themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 11 20 l671 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ, ἐγὼ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 if I drive out the demons by the finger of God, then the kingdom of God has come to you Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “So I must be making demons leave people by the power of God. This shows that the kingdom of God has come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +LUK 11 20 l671 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ, ἐγὼ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 if I drive out the demons by the finger of God, then the kingdom of God has come to you Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “So I must be making demons leave people by the power of God. This shows that the kingdom of God has come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) LUK 11 20 y643 figs-metonymy ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ 1 the finger of God This phrase refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “by the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 20 ja3u figs-abstractnouns ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the kingdom of God has come to you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” This could mean: (1) the kingdom of God has arrived in this place, that is, its activities are happening here. Alternate translation: “God is ruling in this area” (2) the kingdom of God has arrived in time, that is, it already beginning. Alternate translation: “God is beginning to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 11 21 e4d1 figs-parables ὅταν ὁ ἰσχυρὸς καθωπλισμένος 1 When the strong man who is fully armed To help the people in the crowd understand what he has been teaching, Jesus tells a brief story that provides an illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told the crowd this story to help them understand. ‘When a strong man who has all his weapons’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) @@ -2161,7 +2161,7 @@ LUK 12 27 l781 λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, οὐδὲ Σολομὼν 1 But I sa LUK 12 27 nug5 figs-abstractnouns Σολομὼν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ 1 Solomon in all his glory The abstract noun **glory** could mean: (1) “Solomon, who had great wealth.” (2) “Solomon, who wore beautiful clothes.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 12 27 l782 translate-names Σολομὼν 1 Solomon **Solomon** is the name of a man, a great king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 12 28 rur9 figs-metaphor εἰ…ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει 1 if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven Jesus speaks of God making the wild plants beautiful as if God were putting beautiful clothing on them. Alternate translation: “if God makes the wild plants beautiful like this, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 12 28 l783 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει 1 if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it must be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since God makes the wild plants so beautiful, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +LUK 12 28 l783 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει 1 if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it must be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since God makes the wild plants so beautiful, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) LUK 12 28 l784 figs-explicit ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον 1 the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven While Jesus uses a term that typically means **grass**, in this context he must implicitly mean wild plants in general, since he is referring back to the wild lilies he has just mentioned. So you could express this with a general term in your translation. Alternate translation: “the wild plants, which are alive today and tomorrow are thrown into the oven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 12 28 l785 translate-unknown ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον 1 the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven It would be particularly appropriate to use a general term in your translation if your readers would not know what **grass** is. Alternate translation: “the wild plants, which are alive today and tomorrow are thrown into the oven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 12 28 t9am figs-activepassive ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον 1 the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who does the action. Alternate translation: “the grass in the field, which exists today, but tomorrow someone throws it into an oven” or, if you decided to say “plants,” “the wild plants, which exist today, but tomorrow someone throws them into an oven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2879,7 +2879,7 @@ LUK 16 30 m097 figs-explicit οὐχί 1 No The rich man uses this word to indic LUK 16 30 d84a figs-hypo ἐάν τις ἀπὸ νεκρῶν πορευθῇ πρὸς αὐτοὺς, μετανοήσουσιν 1 if someone would go to them from the dead, they will repent The rich man is describing a hypothetical situation that he would like to happen. Alternate translation: “suppose someone who had died went and warned them. Then they would repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 16 30 m098 figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead The rich man is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from among the people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 16 31 abcl figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ, εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται 1 But he said to him, ‘If they do not hear Moses and the prophets, neither will they be persuaded if someone would rise from the dead’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But Abraham told the rich man that if his brothers would not obey the teaching of Moses and the prophets, then they would not change their ways even if someone who had died came back to life and warned them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 16 31 n9s4 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται 1 If they do not listen to Moses and the prophets, neither will they be persuaded if someone should rise from the dead Abraham is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Abraham is saying is not actually the case, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since they will not obey the teaching of Moses and the prophets, a dead person who came back to life would not be able to convince them either” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +LUK 16 31 n9s4 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται 1 If they do not listen to Moses and the prophets, neither will they be persuaded if someone should rise from the dead Abraham is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Abraham is saying is not actually the case, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since they will not obey the teaching of Moses and the prophets, a dead person who came back to life would not be able to convince them either” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) LUK 16 31 m099 figs-idiom εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν 1 If they do not listen to Moses and the prophets The term **listen to** is an idiom that means “obey.” See how you translated this idiom in [16:29](../16/29.md). Alternate translation: “If they will not obey what Moses and the prophets have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 16 31 xkr7 figs-metonymy Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 Moses and the prophets Abraham is using the names of the authors of the biblical books to refer to their writings. Alternate translation: “what Moses and the prophets have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 16 31 m100 figs-merism Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 Moses and the prophets Abraham is referring to all of God’s Word that had been written up to that time. He is using two of its major collections of writings to do so. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) @@ -3078,7 +3078,7 @@ LUK 18 3 kj2l figs-imperative ἐκδίκησόν με ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀντ LUK 18 3 xc7k translate-unknown τοῦ ἀντιδίκου μου 1 my opponent The term **opponent** refers specifically to the opposing party in a lawsuit. It is not clear whether the widow is suing the man to protect her interests, or the man is suing the widow to try to take things from her unfairly. If your language has a specific term for a legal adversary, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 18 4 m197 μετὰ ταῦτα 1 after these things Alternate translation: “later on” or “eventually” LUK 18 4 m198 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, εἰ καὶ τὸν Θεὸν οὐ φοβοῦμαι οὐδὲ ἄνθρωπον ἐντρέπομαι 1 he said to himself, ‘Even if I do not fear God or respect man’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he decided that even though he did not make his decisions based on what God wanted or on what other people thought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 18 4 m199 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ τὸν Θεὸν οὐ φοβοῦμαι οὐδὲ ἄνθρωπον ἐντρέπομαι 1 Even if I do not fear God or respect man The judge speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the judge is saying is not actually the case, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Even though I do not make my decisions based on what God wants or on what other people think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +LUK 18 4 m199 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ τὸν Θεὸν οὐ φοβοῦμαι οὐδὲ ἄνθρωπον ἐντρέπομαι 1 Even if I do not fear God or respect man The judge speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what the judge is saying is not actually the case, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Even though I do not make my decisions based on what God wants or on what other people think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) LUK 18 4 bh3q figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 men The judge is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 18 5 m200 figs-quotesinquotes διά γε τὸ παρέχειν μοι κόπον τὴν χήραν ταύτην, ἐκδικήσω αὐτήν, ἵνα μὴ εἰς τέλος ἐρχομένη ὑπωπιάζῃ με 1 yet because this widow causes me trouble, I will vindicate her, so that she will not beat me up by coming to the end If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation (continuing the sentence from the previous verse): “because this widow bothered him, he would give a fair ruling in her case, so that she would not wear him out by coming incessantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 18 5 v9uu παρέχειν μοι κόπον 1 causes me trouble Alternate translation: “bothers me” @@ -3249,7 +3249,7 @@ LUK 19 8 m267 translate-symaction σταθεὶς 1 stood At a relaxed meal such LUK 19 8 s46z τὸν Κύριον 1 the Lord Here Luke refers to Jesus by the respectful title **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” LUK 19 8 m268 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Zacchaeus uses **behold** to get Jesus to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Please listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 19 8 m269 Κύριε 1 Lord Zacchaeus is addressing Jesus directly by a respectful title. It would be appropriate to represent the title with the corresponding term in your language and culture, rather than using the name “Jesus.” -LUK 19 8 m270 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ τινός τι ἐσυκοφάντησα, ἀποδίδωμι τετραπλοῦν 1 if I have defrauded anything from anyone, I will restore four-fold Zacchaeus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He is inviting anyone he has cheated to come to him for restitution. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Zacchaeus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “I know that I have cheated many people out of their money, and I promise to pay each one back four times as much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +LUK 19 8 m270 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ τινός τι ἐσυκοφάντησα, ἀποδίδωμι τετραπλοῦν 1 if I have defrauded anything from anyone, I will restore four-fold Zacchaeus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He is inviting anyone he has cheated to come to him for restitution. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Zacchaeus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “I know that I have cheated many people out of their money, and I promise to pay each one back four times as much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) LUK 19 8 u2bt ἀποδίδωμι τετραπλοῦν 1 I will restore four-fold Alternate translation: “I will return to them four times as much as I took from them” LUK 19 9 m271 figs-explicit εἶπεν δὲ πρὸς αὐτὸν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 Then Jesus said to him Jesus spoke not just to Zacchaeus but also to the people from the crowd who were complaining that he had gone to visit him. In this culture, people were allowed to stand around the walls of the banquet room in a private home and listen to what an invited guest was saying. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus said to Zacchaeus and to the people from the crowd who were standing around the room” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 19 9 m272 figs-123person σωτηρία τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ ἐγένετο, καθότι καὶ αὐτὸς υἱὸς Ἀβραάμ ἐστιν 1 salvation has come to this house, because he too is a son of Abraham Jesus is speaking to Zacchaeus, but he addresses him in the third person because he is also speaking to the people from the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person here. Alternate translation: “salvation has come to your household, because you too are a son of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv index 62e4d606c7..c4389c60c5 100644 --- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv @@ -46,13 +46,13 @@ JHN 1 13 no4j figs-explicit οἳ 1 **These** here refers to the children of Go JHN 1 13 ygxb figs-metaphor οἳ οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων…ἐγεννήθησαν 1 John uses **born** to describe God changing a person from being spiritually dead to being spiritually alive when they believe in Jesus. John recorded Jesus referring to this change as being “born again” in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]]) If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an expression that indicates spiritual rebirth rather than physical birth. Alternate translation: “These were born spiritually, not from blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 13 k24g figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐξ αἱμάτων…ἐγεννήθησαν 1 Here, **bloods** refers to the bloodlines or genetic contributions of both parents of a child. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were not born from human bloodlines” or “were not born from human decent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 13 it6r ἐξ 1 Here, **from** could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of” -JHN 1 13 jtjr figs-ellipsis οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς 1 John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “nor were they born from the will of the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 1 13 jtjr figs-ellipsis οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς 1 John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “nor were they born from the will of the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 1 13 oj53 ἐκ 1 Here, **from** could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of” JHN 1 13 kqdf figs-metonymy ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς 1 Here John is using the term **flesh** to refer to a human being, which is made of flesh. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the human will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 1 13 jjyp figs-ellipsis οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος ἀνδρὸς 1 John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “nor were they born from the will of man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 1 13 jjyp figs-ellipsis οὐδὲ ἐκ θελήματος ἀνδρὸς 1 John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “nor were they born from the will of man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 1 13 v4t0 ἐκ 2 Here, **from** could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of” JHN 1 13 pbur ἐκ θελήματος ἀνδρὸς 1 The term **man** used here refers specifically to an adult male person and may also be translated “husband.” In this verse it refers to a father’s desire to have a child like himself. Alternate translation: “from the will of a husband” -JHN 1 13 bljo figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ἐκ Θεοῦ 1 John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but they were born from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 1 13 bljo figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ἐκ Θεοῦ 1 John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but they were born from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 1 13 yo2q ἐκ 3 Here, **from** could refer to any of the following: (1) the means by which God’s children are born. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “by” (2) the source from which God’s children are born. Alternate translation: “of” (3) the cause of the birth of God’s children. Alternate translation: “as a result of” JHN 1 14 ft2l figs-explicit ὁ λόγος 1 The Word Here, **the Word** refers to Jesus. It does not refer to a spoken word. ULT indicates this by capitalizing **Word** to indicate that this is a title for Jesus. Use whatever convention your language uses to indicate that this is a name. If “word” is feminine in your language, it could be translated as “the one who is called the Word.” See how you translated this phrase in [John 1:1](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 14 x1ae figs-synecdoche σὰρξ ἐγένετο 1 became flesh Here, **flesh** represents “a person” or “a human being.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “became human” or “became a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ JHN 1 21 vk6r translate-names Ἠλείας 1 **Elijah** is the name of a man. JHN 1 21 h2dv figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 21 nhx9 figs-explicit ὁ προφήτης 1 Here, **the prophet** refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in Deuteronomy 18:15. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the prophet whom God promised to send to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 22 t8ib writing-pronouns εἶπαν…αὐτῷ 1 Here, the pronouns **they** and **him** refer to the priests and Levites and John the Baptist, respectively. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the priests and Levites … John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JHN 1 22 wbd9 figs-ellipsis τίς εἶ? ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς; τί 1 John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. This may require you to change the punctuation of the sentences. Alternate translation: “Who are you? Tell us so that we might given an answer to those who sent us. What” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 1 22 wbd9 figs-ellipsis τίς εἶ? ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς; τί 1 John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. This may require you to change the punctuation of the sentences. Alternate translation: “Who are you? Tell us so that we might given an answer to those who sent us. What” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 1 22 x8wz figs-exclusive δῶμεν…ἡμᾶς 1 we may give … us Here, **we** and **us** refer to the priests and Levites, not to John. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) JHN 1 22 fmc8 ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν 1 Alternate translation: “so that we might tell your answer” JHN 1 22 sa3t figs-explicit τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς 1 they said to him This phrase refers to the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to those leaders in Jerusalem who sent us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ JHN 1 48 a0ym figs-explicit ὄντα ὑπὸ τὴν συκῆν 1 The subjec JHN 1 49 l666 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 1 50 d53b grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι εἶδόν σε ὑποκάτω τῆς συκῆς, πιστεύεις? 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the result for the reason that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Do you believe because I said to you that I saw you underneath the fig tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 1 50 p3ma figs-rquestion ὅτι εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι εἶδόν σε ὑποκάτω τῆς συκῆς, πιστεύεις? 1 Because I said to you … do you believe? John records Jesus using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You believe because I said, ‘I saw you underneath the fig tree’!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 1 50 fhzr figs-ellipsis πιστεύεις 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, these words can be supplied from the context. Alternate translation: “do you believe that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 1 50 fhzr figs-ellipsis πιστεύεις 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “do you believe that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 1 50 oubk figs-explicit μείζω τούτων 1 Jesus uses the plural pronoun **these** to refer to a general category of something, in this case the miraculous display of supernatural knowledge that took place in [verse 48](../01/48.md). Alternate translation: “greater things than this type of thing” or “greater things that this kind of miracle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 51 byxy figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 51 ga44 figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus repeats **Truly** in order to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases, forming a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “What I am about to tell you is very true.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ JHN 3 10 vx3u figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to all JHN 3 11 jt1f figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 3 11 upi7 figs-exclusive ὃ οἴδαμεν λαλοῦμεν…τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἡμῶν 1 we speak When Jesus says **we** and **our** in this verse, he was not including Nicodemus. Jesus used these pronouns as a contrast to Nicodemus saying **we** in [3:2](../03/02.md). While Nicodemus used **we** to refer to himself and the other Jewish religious leaders, Jesus could have been referring to: (1) himself and his disciples. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “my disciples and I speak what we know … our testimony” (2) himself and the other members of the Godhead. Alternate translation: “the Father, Spirit, and I speak what we know … our testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) JHN 3 11 j1k1 figs-you οὐ λαμβάνετε 1 you do not accept The word **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -JHN 3 12 y4e9 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ τὰ ἐπίγεια εἶπον ὑμῖν 1 John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I told you earthly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 3 12 y4e9 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ τὰ ἐπίγεια εἶπον ὑμῖν 1 John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I told you earthly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 3 12 pt4x figs-you εἶπον ὑμῖν…οὐ πιστεύετε, πῶς ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν…πιστεύσετε 1 I told you … you do not believe … how will you believe if I tell you Throughout this verse, **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders” See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JHN 3 12 mf2x figs-explicit τὰ ἐπίγεια 1 Here, **earthly things** refers to what Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). Those things are called **earthly** because they are about things that take place on earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “these truths about what takes place on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 3 12 c6ia figs-rquestion πῶς ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν τὰ ἐπουράνια, πιστεύσετε? 1 how will you believe if I tell you about heavenly things? Jesus uses a question to emphasize the disbelief of Nicodemus and the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you certainly will not believe if I tell you about heavenly things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ JHN 5 44 g7qd figs-ellipsis πιστεῦσαι 1 believe John records Jesus lea JHN 5 44 rn78 δόξαν παρὰ ἀλλήλων λαμβάνοντες 1 Here, **receiving** could refer to: (1) the time they are receiving glory. Alternate translation: “while receiving glory from one another” (2) a causal statement. Alternate translation: “since receiving glory from one another” JHN 5 45 kk5q figs-metonymy ἔστιν ὁ κατηγορῶν ὑμῶν Μωϋσῆς, εἰς ὃν ὑμεῖς ἠλπίκατε 1 **Moses** here could refer to: (1) the person named Moses who gave the Israelites the law of Moses. (2) the law of Moses itself. Alternate translation: “Moses accuses you in the Law, the very Law in which you have hoped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 5 46 m9sq grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ 1 John records Jesus making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. Jesus knows that the Jewish leaders do not truly believe Moses. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “you must not believe Moses since you do not believe me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) -JHN 5 47 kxa6 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…οὐ πιστεύετε 1 John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 5 47 kxa6 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…οὐ πιστεύετε 1 John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 5 47 b8dd figs-rquestion πῶς τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν πιστεύσετε? 1 If you do not believe his writings, how are you going to believe my words? Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you will certainly never believe my words!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 5 47 x7h9 figs-metonymy τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν 1 my words Here, **words** refers to what Jesus said to these Jewish leaders. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what I have told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 6 intro xe4t 0 # John 6 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus’ fourth sign: Jesus feeds a large crowd (6:1–14)
2. Jesus’ fifth sign: Jesus walks on the Sea of Galilee (6:15–21)
3. Jesus says he is the bread of life (6:22–71)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### King

The king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food. They thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people’s sins and that the world would persecute his people.

## Important Metaphors in this Chapter

### Bread

Bread was the most common and important food in Jesus’ day, so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread, because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus’ culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted the people to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life, just as people need food to sustain physical life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood

When Jesus said, “unless you would eat the flesh of the Son of Man and would drink his blood, you do not have life in yourselves,” he was speaking of believing in his sacrificial death on the cross for the forgiveness of sins. He also knew that before he died he would tell his followers to commemorate this sacrifice by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand to what the metaphor referred. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Parenthetical ideas

Several times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some background information needed to better understand the story. These explanations are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. This information is placed inside parentheses.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) @@ -955,7 +955,7 @@ JHN 7 3 x8ce translate-kinship οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ 1 brothers Th JHN 7 3 id2z figs-explicit σοῦ τὰ ἔργα ἃ ποιεῖς 1 the works that you do Here, **works** refers to the powerful miracles that Jesus was performing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “your miracles that you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 7 4 by1h figs-rpronouns ζητεῖ αὐτὸς 1 Here, Jesus’ brothers use the reflexive pronoun **himself** in order to emphasize their belief that Jesus wants to make **himself** famous. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “seeks for his own benefit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) JHN 7 4 uj59 ζητεῖ αὐτὸς ἐν παρρησίᾳ εἶναι 1 Alternate translation: “seeks publicity for himself” or “seeks public attention” -JHN 7 4 mc8r grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ταῦτα ποιεῖς 1 John records Jesus’ brothers speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but they mean that it is actually true. Although they didn’t believe that Jesus was the Messiah at this time, they did not deny that he was doing miracles. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the brothers are saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 7 4 mc8r grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ταῦτα ποιεῖς 1 John records Jesus’ brothers speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but they mean that it is actually true. Although they didn’t believe that Jesus was the Messiah at this time, they did not deny that he was doing miracles. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what the brothers are saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 7 4 f33j figs-metonymy τῷ κόσμῳ 1 the world Here, **the world** is used figurative to refer to all of the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 7 5 mz2b writing-background οὐδὲ γὰρ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπίστευον εἰς αὐτὸν 1 In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about the brothers of Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ brothers said this because even they did not believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 7 5 bs7f translate-kinship οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his brothers See how you translated **brothers** in verse [3](../07/03.md). Alternate translation: “his younger brothers” or “his half-brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) @@ -1005,7 +1005,7 @@ JHN 7 22 d8sw writing-background οὐχ ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Μωϋσέως JHN 7 22 w22v figs-explicit τῶν πατέρων 1 Here, **fathers** refers specifically to the first ancestors of the Jewish people, who are often called “the Patriarchs.” Those people are Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. It does not refer to the ancestors of the Jewish people in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Patriarchs” or “the men who founded the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 7 22 cs9z figs-explicit ἐν Σαββάτῳ περιτέμνετε ἄνθρωπον 1 on the Sabbath you circumcise a man Jesus implies that the act of **circumcision** was a kind of work. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you circumcise a male baby on the Sabbath. That is working too” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 7 22 dl6z figs-genericnoun ἄνθρωπον 1 Jesus is speaking of any Jewish **man** in general, not of one particular **man**. If this use of **man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -JHN 7 23 t21u grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ περιτομὴν λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος ἐν Σαββάτῳ 1 If a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 7 23 t21u grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ περιτομὴν λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος ἐν Σαββάτῳ 1 If a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 7 23 k04n figs-genericnoun λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος 1 See how you translated **man** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “men receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) JHN 7 23 owuc grammar-collectivenouns ὁ νόμος 1 See how you translated **the law** in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) JHN 7 23 ltsk figs-activepassive μὴ λυθῇ ὁ νόμος Μωϋσέως 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you might not break the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1170,7 +1170,7 @@ JHN 8 34 jg3z figs-metaphor δοῦλός ἐστιν τῆς ἁμαρτίας JHN 8 35 nfyp figs-genericnoun ὁ…δοῦλος οὐ μένει…ὁ Υἱὸς μένει 1 Jesus is speaking of slaves and sons in general, not of one particular **slave** and **son**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “slaves do not remain … sons remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) JHN 8 35 sg4a figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ 1 in the house Here, Jesus uses **house** to refer to the family that lives inside the **house**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as a permanent member of a family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 8 35 mknn grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὁ Υἱὸς μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 This clause is in contrast to the previous clause. Although slaves do not remain permanent members of the family who owns them, sons are permanent family members. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but the son remains into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -JHN 8 35 j73t figs-ellipsis ὁ Υἱὸς μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “the son remains in the house into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 8 35 j73t figs-ellipsis ὁ Υἱὸς μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “the son remains in the house into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 8 36 n6fp figs-explicit ἐὰν…ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ, ὄντως ἐλεύθεροι ἔσεσθε 1 if the Son sets you free, you will be truly free It is implied that Jesus is talking about freedom from sin. Alternate translation: “if the Son sets you free from sin, you will truly be free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 36 w3q1 figs-123person ἐὰν…ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ 1 if the Son sets you free Unlike the generic use of **son** in the previous verse, here Jesus uses **the Son** to refer to himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “if I, the Son, free you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 8 36 mapu figs-metaphor ἐὰν…ὁ Υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευθερώσῃ 1 Here Jesus uses **frees** to refer to stopping people from being controlled by their sinful desires. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “if the Son frees you from being controlled by sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1203,7 +1203,7 @@ JHN 8 44 hqmo ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων λαλεῖ 1 Alternate translation: JHN 8 44 k1qu figs-metaphor ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ 1 the father of lies Here Jesus uses **father** to refer to the one who originated the act of lying. Since **the devil** is the first being to tell a lie, he is called the **father** of lying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first one to lie” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 44 x11i figs-explicit ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **it** refers to the act of lying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the father of lying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 46 y3gz figs-rquestion τίς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐλέγχει με περὶ ἁμαρτίας? 1 Which one of you convicts me of sin? Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he has never sinned. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “None of you can convict me concerning sin!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 8 46 kh6a grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἀλήθειαν λέγω 1 If I speak the truth John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 8 46 kh6a grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἀλήθειαν λέγω 1 If I speak the truth John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 8 46 ibp1 figs-rquestion διὰ τί ὑμεῖς οὐ πιστεύετέ μοι? 1 why do you not believe me? Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to scold the Jews for their unbelief. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you have no reason for not believing me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 8 47 lien figs-explicit ὁ ὢν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ…ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐκ ἐστέ 1 The phrase **from God** could refer to: (1) the person to whom the subject belongs, as in the UST. (2) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “He who came from God … you did not come from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 47 nmmq figs-gendernotations ὁ ὢν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Although **He** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “A person who is from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -1216,7 +1216,7 @@ JHN 8 48 fk8t δαιμόνιον ἔχεις 1 See how you translated this phr JHN 8 49 pgts ἐγὼ δαιμόνιον οὐκ ἔχω 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “a demon is not inside of me” or “I am not under the control of a demon” JHN 8 50 wmmd figs-abstractnouns ζητῶ τὴν δόξαν μου 1 there is one seeking and judging If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “seek to glorify myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 8 50 fg43 figs-explicit ἔστιν ὁ ζητῶν καὶ κρίνων 1 there is one seeking and judging Here, **one** refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God is the one seeking and judging” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 8 50 d00s figs-ellipsis ὁ ζητῶν 1 Here, Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “one seeking my glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 8 50 d00s figs-ellipsis ὁ ζητῶν 1 Here, Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “one seeking my glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 8 50 cs55 figs-ellipsis κρίνων 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. Here, **judging** could refer to: (1) God **judging** between what Jesus said about himself and what his Jewish opponents were saying about him. Alternate translation: “judging between your testimony and mine” (2) God condemning those who dishonor Jesus. Alternate translation: “judging those who dishonor me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 8 51 fb52 figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 8 51 m46r figs-metonymy τὸν ἐμὸν λόγον 1 keeps my word Here, **word** refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. See how you translated this phrase in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “my message” or “what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1270,7 +1270,7 @@ JHN 9 7 ri9h writing-background ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, ἀπεσταλμέ JHN 9 7 p54y figs-explicit ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, ἀπεσταλμένος 1 which is translated “Sent” John assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name **Siloam** means when translated from the Aramaic language into Greek. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is the Aramaic word for ‘Sent’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 9 7 q68b figs-go ἦλθεν 1 which is translated “Sent” As the next verse suggests, the man **came back** to his home, not to Jesus. Your language may state “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “went back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) JHN 9 7 rj0w figs-explicit βλέπων 1 Here, **seeing** means that the man became able to see before coming back. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “after becoming able to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 9 8 d1vq figs-ellipsis ὅτι προσαίτης ἦν 1 This clause is missing some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “those who had seen that he was a beggar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 9 8 d1vq figs-ellipsis ὅτι προσαίτης ἦν 1 This clause is missing some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “those who had seen that he was a beggar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 9 8 r79x figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ καθήμενος καὶ προσαιτῶν? 1 Is not this the man that used to sit and beg? The people here are using a rhetorical question to express their surprise at seeing the blind man who has been healed. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This man is the one who used to sit and beg!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 9 10 m97n figs-activepassive πῶς ἠνεῴχθησάν σου οἱ ὀφθαλμοί? 1 Then how were your eyes opened? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “How did your eyes become opened?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 9 10 yy53 figs-metonymy πῶς ἠνεῴχθησάν σου οἱ ὀφθαλμοί 1 Then how were your eyes opened? Here, **eyes** **opened** describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “How are you able to see?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1337,7 +1337,7 @@ JHN 9 35 v3a0 figs-explicit τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 See JHN 9 36 gurg κύριε 1 The formerly blind man calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. He does not yet know that Jesus is the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]]) JHN 9 37 z3rk figs-123person καὶ ὁ λαλῶν μετὰ σοῦ ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν 1 Here, Jesus is referring to himself in third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person form. Alternate translation: “and I, the one who is speaking with you, am that one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 9 38 emlm Κύριε 1 Now that the formerly blind man knows that Jesus is the **Lord,** he calls Jesus **Lord**. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]]) -JHN 9 38 gf4d figs-ellipsis πιστεύω 1 Here, the formerly blind man is leaving out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from [verse 36](../09/36.md). Alternate translation: “I believe that you are the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 9 38 gf4d figs-ellipsis πιστεύω 1 Here, the formerly blind man is leaving out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from [verse 36](../09/36.md). Alternate translation: “I believe that you are the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 9 39 azp3 figs-abstractnouns εἰς κρίμα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “In order to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 9 39 te5y figs-metaphor ἵνα οἱ μὴ βλέποντες, βλέπωσιν; καὶ οἱ βλέποντες, τυφλοὶ γένωνται 1 so that those who do not see may see and so that those who see may become blind Here, **not seeing**, **see**, **seeing**, and **become blind** are metaphors. See the discussion of these metaphors in the General Notes for this chapter. If these uses of these words would confuse your readers, you could use similes or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “so that those who know they are spiritually blind might receive spiritual sight, and those who falsely think they have spiritual sight might remain spiritually blind” or “so that those who recognize that they don’t know God might know him, and those who falsely think they know God might continue not knowing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 9 39 t9vo grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα οἱ μὴ βλέποντες, βλέπωσιν; καὶ οἱ βλέποντες, τυφλοὶ γένωνται 1 so that those who do not see may see and so that those who see may become blind Here, **so that** could indicate that: (1) the rest of the verse is the result of Jesus’ **judgment**, which may require starting a new sentence. Alternate translation: “The result of my judgment will be that those not seeing might see and those seeing might become blind” (2) the rest of the verse is an explanation of the **judgment** Jesus mentioned at the beginning of the verse, which may also require starting a new sentence. Alternate translation: “That judgment is that those not seeing might see and those seeing might become blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -1355,7 +1355,7 @@ JHN 10 1 xq1f translate-unknown αὐλὴν τῶν προβάτων 1 sheep pe JHN 10 1 zz7x figs-explicit κλέπτης…καὶ λῃστής 1 a thief and a robber The words translated **thief** and **robber** describe two different kinds of criminals. A **thief** is a person who steals by stealth, but a **robber** is a person who steals by force or violence. For this reason, you may want to use “or” instead of **and** between these two terms. Alternate translation: “a thief or a robber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 10 2 ib4y figs-possession ποιμήν…τῶν προβάτων 1 Jesus is using **of** to describe a **shepherd** who takes care of **the sheep**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the shepherd who cares for the sheep” or “the shepherd in charge of the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 10 3 uy2v translate-unknown ὁ θυρωρὸς 1 The gatekeeper opens for him A **gatekeeper** is a person who guards the sheep pen and opens the gate for the shepherd. If your readers would not be familiar with this way of protecting livestock, you could use a general expression for a person who guards an entrance. Alternate translation: “The gate guard” or “The person guarding the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -JHN 10 3 q48q figs-ellipsis ὁ θυρωρὸς ἀνοίγει 1 The gatekeeper opens Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The gatekeeper opens the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 10 3 q48q figs-ellipsis ὁ θυρωρὸς ἀνοίγει 1 The gatekeeper opens Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The gatekeeper opens the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 10 3 ploz writing-pronouns τούτῳ…τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ…τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα φωνεῖ 1 In this verse, **this one**, **his**, and **he** refer to the shepherd mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for this shepherd … the shepherd’s voice … the shepherd calls his own sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 10 3 db3c figs-metaphor τὰ πρόβατα τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ ἀκούει 1 The sheep hear his voice Here, **hear** could mean: (1) all the sheep in the pen **hear** the shepherd’s **voice**, but not all of them respond to it, as in the ULT. This meaning implies that there are multiple flocks in the sheep pen. (2) the sheep that belong to the shepherd heed or obey his **voice**. This implies that **the sheep** are identical with **his own sheep**. Alternate translation: “the sheep heed his voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 3 zxsd figs-explicit τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα φωνεῖ κατ’ ὄνομα 1 Here, **his own sheep** are designated as a separate group among **the sheep** of the previous clause. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he calls his own sheep by name out from among all the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1382,7 +1382,7 @@ JHN 10 9 in9p figs-metaphor νομὴν εὑρήσει 1 pasture Jesus uses the JHN 10 10 ymc7 figs-genericnoun ὁ κλέπτης 1 does not come if he would not steal Jesus is speaking of thieves in general, not of one particular **thief**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “A thief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) JHN 10 10 nicf figs-metaphor ὁ κλέπτης 1 Jesus uses **thief** to refer to the Jewish leaders who were deceiving the people. See how you translated the similar use of this word in [verse 8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “Every leader is like a thief who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 10 h2gf figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔρχεται εἰ μὴ ἵνα κλέψῃ 1 does not come if he would not steal If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “comes only in order that he might steal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -JHN 10 10 h56c figs-ellipsis κλέψῃ, καὶ θύσῃ, καὶ ἀπολέσῃ 1 steal and kill and destroy Here, Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he might steal and kill and destroy the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 10 10 h56c figs-ellipsis κλέψῃ, καὶ θύσῃ, καὶ ἀπολέσῃ 1 steal and kill and destroy Here, Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he might steal and kill and destroy the sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 10 10 zho7 writing-pronouns ἔχωσιν 1 Here, **they** refers to the sheep, which is a metaphor for God’s people. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sheep might have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 10 10 j2k6 figs-explicit ἵνα ζωὴν ἔχωσιν 1 so that they will have life Here, **life** refers to eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that they might have eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 10 10 fnu5 figs-explicit καὶ περισσὸν ἔχωσιν 1 Here, **abundantly** implies that the eternal **life** Jesus’ followers will receive has more blessings than anyone could expect. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and might have it with abundant blessings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1403,7 +1403,7 @@ JHN 10 15 pn9w figs-euphemism τὴν ψυχήν μου τίθημι 1 I lay dow JHN 10 15 mwpf figs-metaphor τῶν προβάτων 1 I lay down my life for the sheep See how you translated this phrase in the [verse 8](../10/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 16 y3g7 figs-metaphor ἄλλα πρόβατα ἔχω, ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης 1 I have other sheep Jesus uses **other sheep** to refer to his followers who are not Jews. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “I have disciples who are not from the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 16 la1v figs-metaphor τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης 1 I have other sheep Jesus uses **sheep pen** to refer to the people of Israel. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 10 16 v95z figs-ellipsis κἀκεῖνα…ἀγαγεῖν 1 I have other sheep Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. This could mean: (1) Jesus will bring them to himself, as in the UST. (2) Jesus will bring them to God. Alternate translation: “to bring them also to God”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 10 16 v95z figs-ellipsis κἀκεῖνα…ἀγαγεῖν 1 I have other sheep Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. This could mean: (1) Jesus will bring them to himself, as in the UST. (2) Jesus will bring them to God. Alternate translation: “to bring them also to God”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 10 16 kq11 figs-metaphor τῆς φωνῆς μου ἀκούσουσιν 1 I have other sheep Here, **hear** refers to listening to something with the intent to heed it and respond appropriately. See how you translated this word in [verse 8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “they will heed my voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 16 w86n figs-metaphor μία ποίμνη 1 one flock and one shepherd Jesus uses **flock** to refer to all of his followers, including Jews and non-Jews, as if they are one group, like a **flock** of **sheep**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 10 16 bobi figs-metaphor εἷς ποιμήν 1 one flock and one shepherd Jesus uses **shepherd** to refer to himself. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for the chapter. See also how you translated **shepherd** in [verse 11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “one united group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1463,7 +1463,7 @@ JHN 10 34 rycn figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν 1 Jesus is usin JHN 10 34 b3gp figs-123person ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε 1 You are gods Jesus quotes [Psalm 82:6](../psa/82/06.md) where God calls some humans **gods**. Jesus does this in order to show that God also used the word “god” to refer to people other than himself. In the verse that Jesus quotes, the first person **I** refers to God. If this might be misunderstood by your readers, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, said, ‘You are gods’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 10 34 h189 figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε 1 You are gods If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I said that you are gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 10 35 nfly 0 Verses 35 and 36 are one sentence. In this sentence, Jesus argues by moving from a weaker reason to a stronger reason (an argument from the lesser to the greater). Based on the scripture he quoted in verse 34, Jesus argues that, since God calls humans **gods** in that verse, it is even more appropriate to call him God because he is the Son of God. You may need to change the order of the clauses in order for this idea to be clearer in your language. -JHN 10 35 ieot grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐκείνους εἶπεν θεοὺς 1 the word of God came **If** indicates a conditional sentence that extends until the end of the next verse. Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since he called them gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 10 35 ieot grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐκείνους εἶπεν θεοὺς 1 the word of God came **If** indicates a conditional sentence that extends until the end of the next verse. Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since he called them gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 10 35 gtb4 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐγένετο 1 the word of God came Here, Jesus used the term **word** to describe the message that God said by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s message came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 10 35 m8ji figs-personification ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐγένετο 1 the word of God came Jesus speaks of **the word of God** as though it were a person who moved toward those who heard it. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “God spoke his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JHN 10 35 g0kv figs-activepassive οὐ δύναται λυθῆναι ἡ Γραφή 1 the scripture cannot be broken If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one can break the Scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1472,11 +1472,11 @@ JHN 10 36 dvp5 figs-rquestion ὃν ὁ Πατὴρ ἡγίασεν καὶ ἀ JHN 10 36 fj9f figs-quotesinquotes ὑμεῖς λέγετε, ὅτι βλασφημεῖς, ὅτι εἶπον, Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ εἰμι 1 You are blaspheming If the direct quotations inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the two instances of second direct quotations as indirect quotations. Alternate translation: “do you say … that he is blaspheming because I said that I am the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 10 36 wzhd figs-123person ὃν ὁ Πατὴρ ἡγίασεν καὶ ἀπέστειλεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “to me whom the Father sanctified and sent into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 10 36 rax1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 Father … Son of God **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 10 36 r7ex figs-ellipsis βλασφημεῖς 1 Jesus is leaving a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. See how you translated “blasphemy” in [verse 33](../10/33.md) and also see the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “You have committed the crime of blaspheming God” or “You are guilty of blaspheming God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 10 36 r7ex figs-ellipsis βλασφημεῖς 1 Jesus is leaving a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. See how you translated “blasphemy” in [verse 33](../10/33.md) and also see the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “You have committed the crime of blaspheming God” or “You are guilty of blaspheming God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 10 36 bkl5 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This phrase, **the Son of God**, is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 10 37 wyd2 figs-possession τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 Here Jesus is using **of** to describe **works** that God wants him to do. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. See how you translated a similar phrase in [9:4](../09/04.md). Alternate translation: “the works that my Father demands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 10 37 us7v guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 10 38 finz grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ ποιῶ 1 believe in the works Here, Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But since I am doing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 10 38 finz grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ ποιῶ 1 believe in the works Here, Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But since I am doing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 10 38 k2zf figs-explicit τοῖς ἔργοις πιστεύετε 1 believe in the works Here, **believe in** means to acknowledge that the **works** Jesus does are done with the authority of the Father and prove that he is God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “believe that the works I do are from God” or “believe that the works I do are done with God’s power”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 10 38 t8uf figs-idiom ἐν ἐμοὶ ὁ Πατὴρ, κἀγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί 1 the Father is in me and that I am in the Father Here Jesus uses the word **in** to express the close personal relationship between himself and God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my Father has a close relationship with me, and I have a close relationship with my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 10 38 n8ue figs-doublet ἐν ἐμοὶ ὁ Πατὴρ, κἀγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί 1 the Father is in me and that I am in the Father These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the truth of what Jesus is saying. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “my Father and I are completely joined together as one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -1497,7 +1497,7 @@ JHN 11 1 p19k translate-kinship Μάρθας τῆς ἀδελφῆς αὐτῆ JHN 11 2 c6r9 figs-events ἦν δὲ Μαρία ἡ ἀλείψασα τὸν Κύριον μύρῳ, καὶ ἐκμάξασα τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ ταῖς θριξὶν αὐτῆς 1 It was Mary who anointed the Lord … her hair Here, John refers to an event that would happen at a time following the events recorded in this chapter ([12:1–8](../12/01.md)). If this might confuse your readers, you could translate this as a future event. Alternate translation: “Now it was Mary who would later anoint the Lord with myrrh and wipe his feet with her hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) JHN 11 2 xlio translate-kinship ὁ ἀδελφὸς Λάζαρος 1 Because those who wrote scripture usually listed the names of siblings in order from oldest to youngest, the list in [verse 5](../11/05.md) suggests that Martha was the oldest and **Lazarus** was the youngest of the three siblings. If your language uses different words for **brother** depending on birth order, use the word for a younger **brother** here. Alternate translation: “younger brother Lazarus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) JHN 11 3 ue08 writing-quotations ἀπέστειλαν…αἱ ἀδελφαὶ πρὸς αὐτὸν λέγουσαι 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “the sisters sent to him, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -JHN 11 3 i2ar figs-ellipsis ἀπέστειλαν…πρὸς αὐτὸν 1 sent for Jesus Here, John is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “sent messengers to him” or “sent a message to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 11 3 i2ar figs-ellipsis ἀπέστειλαν…πρὸς αὐτὸν 1 sent for Jesus Here, John is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “sent messengers to him” or “sent a message to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 11 3 g1im figs-declarative Κύριε, ἴδε, ὃν φιλεῖς ἀσθενεῖ 1 Here, the **sisters** are using a present statement to make a request indirectly. They tell Jesus that Lazarus is **sick**, because they want Jesus to come and heal him. If this use of a statement is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “Sir, behold, he whom you love is sick and needs your help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) JHN 11 3 czm1 figs-metaphor ἴδε 1 Here, **behold** means to take notice of something or pay attention to something. It is used here to emphasize the urgency of the words that follow. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “take notice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 11 4 nk3g grammar-connect-logic-result οὐκ ἔστιν πρὸς θάνατον 1 This sickness is not to death Here, **not to** indicates that what follows is not the result of the **sickness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “This sickness will not result in death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -1579,7 +1579,7 @@ JHN 11 39 l2pd translate-kinship ἡ ἀδελφὴ 1 Martha, the sister of Laza JHN 11 39 lt1d figs-explicit τεταρταῖος γάρ ἐστιν 1 This means that it has been **four days** since Lazarus **died**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for he has been dead for four days” or “for it has been four days since he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 11 40 c082 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 11 40 q5mw figs-rquestion οὐκ εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι ἐὰν πιστεύσῃς, ὄψῃ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ? 1 Did I not say to you that, if you believed, you would see the glory of God? Jesus is using the form of a question to emphasize that God is about to do something wonderful. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I certainly said to you that, if you believe, you would see the glory of God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 11 40 mpl5 figs-ellipsis ἐὰν πιστεύσῃς 1 Here, Jesus is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “if you believe in me” or “if you believe that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 11 40 mpl5 figs-ellipsis ἐὰν πιστεύσῃς 1 Here, Jesus is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “if you believe in me” or “if you believe that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 11 40 pbc9 figs-possession τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) God receives the glory. Alternate translation: “the glorification of God” (2) glory that comes from God. Alternate translation: “the glory from God”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 11 40 lfrs figs-abstractnouns τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God glorified” or “how glorious God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 11 41 lj5j figs-idiom Ἰησοῦς ἦρεν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ἄνω 1 Jesus lifted up his eyes Here, “lifted up his eyes” is an idiom that means to look upward. See how you translated a similar phrase in [4:35](../04/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1610,7 +1610,7 @@ JHN 11 51 eh17 figs-synecdoche ἀποθνῄσκειν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἔθ JHN 11 52 gee2 figs-synecdoche τοῦ ἔθνους 1 See how you translated **nation** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 11 52 mle1 figs-metaphor τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 children of God Here John uses the word **children** to express the relationship between God and those who trust Jesus for salvation. That relationship is like the relationship between **children** and their father. See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to chapter 1. Since this is an important metaphor in the Bible, you should keep it in your translation. However, you can use a simile if it might confuse your readers. Alternate translation: “those who are like God’s children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 11 52 tpe1 figs-activepassive ἵνα καὶ τὰ τέκνα τοῦ Θεοῦ, τὰ διεσκορπισμένα συναγάγῃ εἰς ἕν 1 If your language does not use the passive voice, you could express the ideas of these two passive phrases in active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. You may need to change the sentence structure in order to do this. Alternate translation: “so that also Jesus would gather together into one the children of God whom God had scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 11 52 d85p figs-ellipsis συναγάγῃ εἰς ἕν 1 would be gathered together into one Here, John is leaving out a word that some languages would need in order for the sentence to be complete. The word **people** is implied by the context. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “would be gathered into one people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 11 52 d85p figs-ellipsis συναγάγῃ εἰς ἕν 1 would be gathered together into one Here, John is leaving out a word that some languages would need in order for the sentence to be complete. The word **people** is implied by the context. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “would be gathered into one people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 11 53 xyda grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 would be gathered together into one John is telling his readers what the Jewish leaders did as a result of what Caiaphas said in [verses 49–50](../11/49.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Consequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 11 53 psay ἐβουλεύσαντο 1 The word translated **plotted** could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders made plans together for how to kill Jesus. Alternate translation: “they schemed” (2) the Jewish leaders were determined to kill Jesus. Alternate translation: “they resolved” JHN 11 54 bnd8 figs-synecdoche παρρησίᾳ περιεπάτει ἐν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 walk openly among the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not refer to the Jewish people in general. It could refer to: (1) the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “among the Jewish authorities” (2) the people living in Judea. Alternate translation: “among the Judeans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -1625,7 +1625,7 @@ JHN 11 56 kc75 writing-pronouns ἐζήτουν…τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 They JHN 11 56 y3xz figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 The people were standing in the courtyard of **the temple**. See how you translated **temple** in [verse 14](../08/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 11 56 i7en figs-idiom τί δοκεῖ ὑμῖν 1 What do you think? That he will not come to the festival? This is an idiom used to ask for someone’s opinion. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “What is your opinion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 11 56 p2wz figs-rquestion ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν? 1 What do you think? That he will not come to the festival? The people are using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that they do not think Jesus will **come** to the **Passover** festival. The speakers here were wondering if Jesus would come to the festival since the Jewish leaders wanted to kill him. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He will certainly not come to the festival!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 11 56 x6im figs-ellipsis ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν? 1 The people are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Does it seem to you that he will come to the festival?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 11 56 x6im figs-ellipsis ὅτι οὐ μὴ ἔλθῃ εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν? 1 The people are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “Does it seem to you that he will come to the festival?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 11 57 glb6 figs-events δὲ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς 1 Now the chief priests This event occurs before that of the previous verse. If this order might confuse your readers, you can combine these verses and put the text of this verse before the text of [verse 56](../11/56.md). Another option would be to clearly state that this verse refers to an earlier event. Alternate translation: “Earlier, the chief priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) JHN 12 intro qzv4 0 # John 12 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Mary pours perfume on Jesus (12:1–11)
2. Jesus enters Jerusalem (12:12–19)
3. Some Greeks come to Jesus (12:20–26)
4. Jesus predicts his death (12:27–36)
5. John explains the Jews’ rejection of Jesus (12:37–43)
6. Jesus says that he is God (12:44–50)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry sections in [12:38](../12/38.md) and [40](../12/40.md), which are quotations from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Mary poured perfume on Jesus’ feet

The Jews would put oil on a person’s head to make that person feel welcome and comfortable. They would also put oil on a person’s body after the person had died but before they buried the body. However, they would never think to put oil on a person’s feet, because they thought that feet were dirty.

### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal, which was a common practice for kings. The kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on donkeys. So by riding on a donkey Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel.

### Glory

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. In [12:16](../12/16.md) John says that the glory of Jesus is his resurrection and possibly his return to heaven as well.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Light and darkness

In [12:35–36, 46](../12/35.md), Jesus uses an extended metaphor in which light represents what is true and good, and darkness represents what is false and evil. He applies that light metaphor to himself in order to show that he is the embodiment of God’s truth and goodness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in [12:25](../12/25.md): “He who loves his life will lose it; but he who hates his life in this world will keep it for eternal life.” But in [12:26](../12/26.md) Jesus explains what it means to keep one’s life for eternal life.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 12 1 s1v2 writing-newevent οὖν…πρὸ ἓξ ἡμερῶν τοῦ Πάσχα 1 Six days before the Passover John uses this phrase to mark the beginning of a new event. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later, six days before the Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -1648,7 +1648,7 @@ JHN 12 5 tted figs-nominaladj πτωχοῖς 1 Judas is using the adjective ** JHN 12 6 ri5l writing-background 0 In this verse John interrupts the story to explain why Judas made the statement in the previous verse. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 12 6 sl8u figs-infostructure εἶπεν…τοῦτο, οὐχ ὅτι περὶ τῶν πτωχῶν ἔμελεν αὐτῷ, ἀλλ’ ὅτι κλέπτης ἦν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “he said this because he was a thief, not because it was a concern to him about the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) JHN 12 6 mgm8 figs-nominaladj τῶν πτωχῶν 1 See how you translated **the poor** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -JHN 12 6 qoun figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ὅτι κλέπτης ἦν 1 John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but he said this because he was a thief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 12 6 qoun figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ὅτι κλέπτης ἦν 1 John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but he said this because he was a thief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 12 6 ol4t figs-activepassive τὰ βαλλόμενα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what people gave him to put in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 12 7 z6s7 figs-ellipsis ἄφες αὐτήν, ἵνα εἰς τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ ἐνταφιασμοῦ μου, τηρήσῃ αὐτό 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus is stating the purpose for which Mary did not sell the perfume. In this case he would be leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. This translation would require supplying those words from Judas’ objection in [verse 5](../12/05.md) and making a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone. She did not sell this perfumed oil so that she might keep it for the day of my burial” (2) Jesus is giving the purpose for his command in the previous clause. In this case he would be implying that there was some leftover perfumed oil which Mary could later put on his dead body. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone so that she might keep it for the day of my burial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 12 7 dcn3 figs-explicit ἄφες αὐτήν, ἵνα εἰς τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ ἐνταφιασμοῦ μου, τηρήσῃ αὐτό 1 Allow her to keep what she has for the day of my burial If Jesus is stating the reason why Mary had the perfume, then Jesus is implying that Mary’s actions can be understood as anticipating his death and **burial**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. You may need to add a new sentence. Alternate translation: “Leave her alone. She did not sell this perfumed oil so that she might keep it to prepare my body for burial, as she had just done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1828,7 +1828,7 @@ JHN 13 8 oy8j figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense JHN 13 8 f6dg figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ νίψω σε, οὐκ ἔχεις μέρος μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 If I do not wash you, you have no share with me **Jesus** uses two negative statements to convince **Peter** to allow him to **wash** his **feet**. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I must wash you so that you can have a share with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) JHN 13 8 m90p figs-explicit ἐὰν μὴ νίψω σε, οὐκ ἔχεις μέρος μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 Here, Jesus’ use of **no share with me** could imply: (1) that Peter must let him wash his feet if he wants to receive his **share** of the inheritance that God promised to give his people. Alternate translation: “If I do not wash you, you will not share in God’s promised inheritance with me” (2) that Peter must let him wash his feet if he wants to continue being his disciple. Alternate translation: “If I do not wash you, you will no longer be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 9 bjgq figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) -JHN 13 9 irnh figs-ellipsis μὴ τοὺς πόδας μου μόνον, 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “wash not only my feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 13 9 irnh figs-ellipsis μὴ τοὺς πόδας μου μόνον, 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “wash not only my feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 13 10 dp8l figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 10 is57 figs-metaphor ὁ λελουμένος οὐκ ἔχει χρείαν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς πόδας νίψασθαι 1 He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet In this verse, Jesus uses **washed** to refer to God forgiving a person for their sins. He also uses **feet** to refer to daily sins, because people in Jesus’ culture had to wash their **feet** frequently due to wearing sandals while walking on dusty, dirty roads. If this might confuse your readers, you could state their meanings clearly or use similes. Alternate translation: “The one who has received God’s forgiveness for their sins, only needs to be forgiven for his daily sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 13 10 bbon figs-activepassive ὁ λελουμένος 1 He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The one who someone had washed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1838,24 +1838,24 @@ JHN 13 11 tzj7 writing-background 0 Here John interrupts the story to give the JHN 13 11 ccz4 figs-metaphor οὐχὶ πάντες καθαροί ἐστε 1 Not all of you are clean See how you translated **clean** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Not all of you have received God’s forgiveness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 13 12 p45l figs-rquestion γινώσκετε τί πεποίηκα ὑμῖν? 1 Do you know what I have done for you? Jesus is using a question to emphasize the importance of what he is teaching his disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You need to understand what I have done for you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 13 13 m9z8 figs-explicit ὑμεῖς φωνεῖτέ με ὁ Διδάσκαλος καὶ, ὁ Κύριος 1 You call me ‘teacher’ and ‘Lord,’ Here Jesus implies that his disciples have great respect for him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You show me great respect when you call me ‘teacher’ and ‘Lord.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 13 14 xlgr grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ οὖν ἐγὼ ἔνιψα ὑμῶν τοὺς πόδας, ὁ Κύριος καὶ ὁ Διδάσκαλος 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If I then, the Lord and the Teacher, have washed your feet, and I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 13 14 xlgr grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ οὖν ἐγὼ ἔνιψα ὑμῶν τοὺς πόδας, ὁ Κύριος καὶ ὁ Διδάσκαλος 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If I then, the Lord and the Teacher, have washed your feet, and I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 13 15 pk3l figs-declarative καθὼς ἐγὼ ἐποίησα ὑμῖν, καὶ ὑμεῖς ποιῆτε 1 you should also do just as I did for you Jesus is using a statement to give an instruction. Jesus is telling his disciples to follow his example and serve one another. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “you also must do just as I did to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) JHN 13 16 h6gt figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 13 16 tpl8 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ, οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν 1 greater Here, **greater** means to be more important or deserving of more respect than another person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “a slave is not respected more than his master, nor is a messenger respected more than the one who sent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 16 rj4z figs-doublet οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ, οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν 1 greater These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus’ disciples are not more important than him, so they should humbly serve each other. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “none of you are greater than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 13 16 k3zj figs-metaphor οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ 1 greater Jesus uses the words **slave** and **master** to refer to his disciples and himself, respectively. He is telling his disciples that they should humbly serve each other because they are not more important than him, and he has humbly served them. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Jesus’ meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “you are not greater than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 13 16 la0x figs-metaphor οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν 1 greater Jesus uses **messenger** and **the one who sent him** to refer to his disciples and himself, respectively. He is telling his disciples that they should humbly serve each other because they are not more important than him, and he has humbly served them. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Jesus’ meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “and you are not greater than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 13 17 nwhg grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ταῦτα οἴδατε 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you know these things, which you do,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 13 17 nwhg grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ταῦτα οἴδατε 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you know these things, which you do,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 13 17 nxou figs-activepassive μακάριοί ἐστε 1 you are blessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 13 18 ji7u figs-explicit οὐ περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν λέγω 1 Here Jesus is referring back to what he just said in the previous verse. He means that not all of those to whom he is speaking will be blessed for serving each other, because one of them, Judas Iscariot, will betray him. If this clause would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not speaking this about all of you” or “I am not saying that God will bless all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 18 ztpw figs-explicit ἐγὼ οἶδα τίνας ἐξελεξάμην 1 Here Jesus states that he knew the character of every person he chose to be his disciple. Therefore, he knew Judas would betray him when he chose him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know exactly the kind of men I have chosen to be my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 13 18 lpug figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but I chose one who will betray me so that the scripture might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 13 18 lpug figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but I chose one who will betray me so that the scripture might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 13 18 u5fl figs-activepassive ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ 1 this so that the scripture will be fulfilled If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this is in order to fulfill the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 13 18 dk5l writing-quotations ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ 1 Here Jesus uses **that the scripture might be fulfilled** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 41:9](../../psa/41/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “so that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 13 18 tx1f figs-quotemarks ὁ τρώγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ τὸν ἄρτον, ἐπῆρεν ἐπ’ ἐμὲ τὴν πτέρναν αὐτοῦ 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 41:9](../../psa/41/09.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) JHN 13 18 v5pv figs-idiom ὁ τρώγων μετ’ ἐμοῦ τὸν ἄρτον, ἐπῆρεν ἐπ’ ἐμὲ τὴν πτέρναν αὐτοῦ 1 He who eats my bread lifted up his heel against me The phrase, **The one eating bread with me**, here is an idiom that refers to someone who acts like a friend would act. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “The one who has acted like he is my friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 13 18 wr0c figs-idiom ἐπῆρεν ἐπ’ ἐμὲ τὴν πτέρναν αὐτοῦ 1 He who eats my bread lifted up his heel against me Here, **lifted up his heel** is an idiom that refers to someone who has become an enemy. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “has turned against me” or “has become my enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JHN 13 19 qd39 figs-ellipsis ἀπ’ ἄρτι λέγω ὑμῖν 1 I tell you this now before it happens Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 13 19 qd39 figs-ellipsis ἀπ’ ἄρτι λέγω ὑμῖν 1 I tell you this now before it happens Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 13 19 gg19 figs-explicit ἐγώ εἰμι 1 I AM See how you translated **I am** in [8:24](../08/24.md), and also see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes for Chapter 8. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 20 di3t figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 13 20 zcyh figs-doublet ὁ λαμβάνων…λαμβάνει…λαμβάνων…λαμβάνει 1 In this verse, **receiving** and **receives** mean to accept or welcome a person into one’s presence with friendliness. See how you translated this word in [1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -1870,7 +1870,7 @@ JHN 13 25 iqcj figs-explicit ἐκεῖνος…λέγει 1 Jesus’ side Here, JHN 13 25 kqza figs-explicit λέγει 1 Jesus’ side [Verse 28](../13/28.md) indicates that the disciples did not know why Jesus spoke to Judas in the way he did. This means that they must not have heard the conversation in this verse and the next, because John and Jesus were speaking quietly. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “said in a quite voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 25 b22k figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Jesus’ side Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 26 qpj8 translate-names Ἰούδᾳ Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτη 1 See how you translated this phrase in [6:71](../06/71.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -JHN 13 27 r8lk figs-ellipsis καὶ μετὰ τὸ ψωμίον 1 Then after the bread John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And after Judas took the bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 13 27 r8lk figs-ellipsis καὶ μετὰ τὸ ψωμίον 1 Then after the bread John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And after Judas took the bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 13 27 xk39 figs-idiom τότε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς ἐκεῖνον ὁ Σατανᾶς 1 Satan entered into him Here, **entered into** is an idiom that means that **Satan** took control of Judas. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Satan then started to command Judas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 13 27 agd7 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 28 r37z writing-background 0 In [verses 28–29](../13/28.md) John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide background information about the disciples’ confusion. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -1911,7 +1911,7 @@ JHN 14 1 rq43 figs-declarative πιστεύετε εἰς τὸν Θεόν, κα JHN 14 2 eca3 figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 In my Father’s house Jesus uses **house** to refer to heaven, which is the place where God dwells. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “In the place where my Father dwells” or “In heaven where my Father dwells”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 14 2 v9px guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 14 2 n3wl εἰ δὲ μή, εἶπον ἂν ὑμῖν, ὅτι πορεύομαι ἑτοιμάσαι τόπον ὑμῖν 1 Father The word translated **for** could also be translated “that,” in which case this sentence would be a question instead of a statement. With either interpretation the point of the sentence is the same: Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said in the previous sentence is true. He is going to heaven **to prepare a place for** his people. Alternate translation: “But if not, would I have told you that I am going to prepare a place for you?” -JHN 14 3 sadi grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν πορευθῶ 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that it will actually take place. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when I go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 14 3 sadi grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν πορευθῶ 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that it will actually take place. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when I go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 14 4 ir1d figs-extrainfo τὴν ὁδόν 1 the way Here Jesus uses **the way**. This could refer to: (1) himself as the means by which people can go to God in heaven, which is clearly the meaning for **the way** in [verse 6](../14/06.md). (2) a manner of life that will eventually lead someone to be with God in heaven. Since the disciples did not understand this when Jesus said it, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 14 5 aode translate-names Θωμᾶς 1 See how you translated the name **Thomas** in [11:16](../11/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 14 5 o21d figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) @@ -1922,7 +1922,7 @@ JHN 14 6 i8le figs-metaphor ἡ ἀλήθεια 1 the truth Jesus uses **the tru JHN 14 6 z9tr figs-metaphor ἡ ζωή 1 the life Jesus uses **the life** to indicate that he is the means by which people can receive eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who makes people spiritually alive” or “the means by which one may receive eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 14 6 g5hn figs-explicit οὐδεὶς ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα, εἰ μὴ δι’ ἐμοῦ 1 no one comes to the Father except through me Here, **through me** means that a person can come to God only by trusting Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “No one comes to the Father except by believing in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 6 f95q guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 7 wx89 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐγνώκατε με 1 Father Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you have known me, and you have known me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 14 7 wx89 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐγνώκατε με 1 Father Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you have known me, and you have known me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 14 8 wwv7 translate-names Φίλιππος 1 See how you translated the name **Philip** in [1:43](../01/43.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 14 8 fy8b figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 14 8 kum1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Κύριε, δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν Πατέρα 1 Lord, show us the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -1943,9 +1943,9 @@ JHN 14 11 r2w8 figs-explicit τὰ ἔργα 1 See how you translated **work** JHN 14 12 gh64 figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν, 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 14 12 icjc figs-infostructure ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, τὰ ἔργα ἃ ἐγὼ ποιῶ, κἀκεῖνος ποιήσει 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the one believing in me will also do the works that I do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) JHN 14 12 h2rh figs-explicit τὰ ἔργα 1 See how you translated **works** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 14 12 ui5t figs-ellipsis καὶ μείζονα τούτων ποιήσει 1 Jesus is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and he will do greater works than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 14 12 ui5t figs-ellipsis καὶ μείζονα τούτων ποιήσει 1 Jesus is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and he will do greater works than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 14 12 cn14 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 13 bn30 figs-ellipsis ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε 1 Whatever you ask in my name Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 14 13 bn30 figs-ellipsis ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε 1 Whatever you ask in my name Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 14 13 n2id figs-idiom ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 Whatever you ask in my name Here, **ask in my name** could mean: (1) to request something as the representative of Jesus or as if Jesus himself were requesting it. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask as if I were asking” or “whatever you might ask that I would ask” (2) to request something with the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “whatever you ask with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 14 13 i138 figs-activepassive ἵνα δοξασθῇ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ 1 so that the Father will be glorified in the Son If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The one that may do the action could be: (1) Jesus, in which case **in the Son** would mean “by the Son.” Alternate translation: “so that the Son may glorify the Father” (2) everyone who experiences the result of what has been asked. Alternate translation: “so that everyone may glorify the Father in the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 14 13 j6nh guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ…Υἱῷ 1 Father … Son **Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -1993,7 +1993,7 @@ JHN 14 26 jjhy figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 Father Here, **in JHN 14 26 ig83 figs-hyperbole πάντα 1 Here, **everything** is an exaggeration that Jesus uses for emphasis. He means that the **Holy Spirit** would teach the disciples all that they needed to know about what he had taught them. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the plain meaning. Alternate translation: “everything that you need to know about what I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) JHN 14 27 t9c4 figs-abstractnouns εἰρήνην ἀφίημι ὑμῖν; εἰρήνην τὴν ἐμὴν δίδωμι ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I leave you a peaceful feeling; I give you my peaceful feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 14 27 fb4o figs-metaphor εἰρήνην ἀφίημι ὑμῖν 1 Jesus speaks of **peace** as if it were an object that he could **leave** with someone. If this would confuse your readers, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “You will feel peace after I leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 14 27 jve8 figs-ellipsis οὐ καθὼς ὁ κόσμος δίδωσιν, ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you peace as the world gives peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 14 27 jve8 figs-ellipsis οὐ καθὼς ὁ κόσμος δίδωσιν, ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you peace as the world gives peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 14 27 i7gm figs-explicit οὐ καθὼς ὁ κόσμος δίδωσιν, ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν 1 Here, **as the world gives** could mean: (1) the manner in which **the world gives** **peace**. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you in the manner that the world gives” (2) the type of **peace** that **the world gives**. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you the kind of peace that the world gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 27 nx8a figs-metonymy κόσμος 1 world See how you translated the **world** in [verse 17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 14 27 m6qq figs-metaphor μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία 1 Do not let your heart be troubled, and do not be afraid See how you translated this clause in [verse 1](../14/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2002,7 +2002,7 @@ JHN 14 28 ayiy grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ἠγαπᾶτέ με, JHN 14 28 s3t3 figs-explicit πορεύομαι πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα 1 I am going to the Father Here Jesus implies that he will return to his **Father**. Alternate translation: “I am going back to the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 28 gtk5 figs-explicit ὁ Πατὴρ μείζων μού ἐστιν 1 the Father is greater than I Here Jesus could mean: (1) that the Father has greater authority than the Son while the Son is on the earth. Alternate translation: “the Father has greater authority than I have here” (2) that Jesus functions in a subordinate role to the Father for all time. Alternate translation: “the role of the Father is superior to the role that I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 28 ymq4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα…ὁ Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 29 cj9y figs-ellipsis εἴρηκα ὑμῖν 1 Father Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I have told you this” or “I have told you what will happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 14 29 cj9y figs-ellipsis εἴρηκα ὑμῖν 1 Father Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I have told you this” or “I have told you what will happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 14 30 ah3s figs-explicit ὁ τοῦ κόσμου ἄρχων 1 ruler of this world Here, **the ruler of this world** refers to Satan. See how you translated this phrase in [12:31](../12/31.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 30 ea6m figs-explicit ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν 1 ruler … is coming Here, **has nothing in me** means that Satan has no control over Jesus and cannot make him do anything. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is not able to control me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 31 n3et grammar-connect-logic-goal ἀλλ’ ἵνα γνῷ ὁ κόσμος, ὅτι ἀγαπῶ τὸν Πατέρα, καὶ καθὼς ἐνετείλατο μοι ὁ Πατὴρ, οὕτως ποιῶ 1 Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. The first event that is done to accomplish this purpose could be: (1) a phrase Jesus left out that can be supplied from the context of the previous verses. Alternate translation: “but the ruler of this world is coming so that the world might know that I love the Father, and just as the Father commanded me, thus I do” or “but these things will happen so that the world might know that I love the Father, and just as the Father commanded me, thus I do” (2) what is stated later in the sentence, in which case the order of the clauses must be changed. Alternate translation: “but just as the Father commanded me, thus I do so that the world might know that I love the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) @@ -2034,7 +2034,7 @@ JHN 15 6 ura6 writing-pronouns καὶ συνάγουσιν αὐτὰ καὶ JHN 15 6 e789 figs-activepassive καίεται 1 they are burned up If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the fire burns them up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 15 7 knr4 figs-explicit μείνητε ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 ask whatever you wish See how you translated **remain in me** in the previous three verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 7 lpzq figs-idiom τὰ ῥήματά μου ἐν ὑμῖν μείνῃ 1 ask whatever you wish This is an idiom that means to obey Jesus. See how you translated a similar expression in [8:31](../08/31.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JHN 15 7 m38f figs-ellipsis ὃ ἐὰν θέλητε, αἰτήσασθε 1 ask whatever you wish Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “ask God whatever you desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 15 7 m38f figs-ellipsis ὃ ἐὰν θέλητε, αἰτήσασθε 1 ask whatever you wish Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “ask God whatever you desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 15 7 mcz5 figs-activepassive γενήσεται ὑμῖν 1 it will be done for you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will do it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 15 8 pq2t figs-pastforfuture ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 My Father is glorified in this Jesus is using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “My Father will be glorified in this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 15 8 yq67 figs-activepassive ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 My Father is glorified in this If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You have glorifed my Father in this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2058,7 +2058,7 @@ JHN 15 16 kc4z grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητ JHN 15 16 bcy1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 15 16 acqo figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 See how you translated **in my name** in [14:13](../14/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 15 17 rib2 ταῦτα 1 Here, **These things** could refer to: (1) the commands Jesus referred to in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “These commands” (2) the command in the second half of this verse. Alternate translation: “This” -JHN 15 18 ntzw grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ὁ κόσμος ὑμᾶς μισεῖ 1 the world Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If the world hates you, and it does hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 15 18 ntzw grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ὁ κόσμος ὑμᾶς μισεῖ 1 the world Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If the world hates you, and it does hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 15 18 d5ff figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 the world Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 19 aj8s grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἦτε 1 the world Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that his disciples are not **from the world**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If you were from the world, but you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) JHN 15 19 x6q8 figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου…ὁ κόσμος…τοῦ κόσμου…τοῦ κόσμου…ὁ κόσμος 1 the world See how you translated **the world** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2284,7 +2284,7 @@ JHN 18 13 je4z figs-explicit πρὸς Ἅνναν πρῶτον, ἦν γὰρ JHN 18 14 kzvh writing-background 0 In this verse John interrupts the main storyline in order to provide some background information about Caiaphas. This information helps the reader understand why they took Jesus to Caiaphas. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 18 14 xq5l figs-synecdoche τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 See how you translated **to the Jews** in [verse 12](../18/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 18 14 fkx1 συμφέρει ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἀποθανεῖν ὑπὲρ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 See how you translated the similar clause in [11:50](../11/50.md). -JHN 18 14 uqs5 figs-ellipsis συμφέρει ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἀποθανεῖν ὑπὲρ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 Caiaphas is leaving out a clause that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from his original statement in [11:50](../11/50.md). Alternate translation: “it would be better for one man to die on behalf of the people than to let the Romans kill all of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 18 14 uqs5 figs-ellipsis συμφέρει ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἀποθανεῖν ὑπὲρ τοῦ λαοῦ 1 Caiaphas is leaving out a clause that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from his original statement in [11:50](../11/50.md). Alternate translation: “it would be better for one man to die on behalf of the people than to let the Romans kill all of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 18 15 p7ms translate-names Σίμων Πέτρος 1 See how you translated **Simon Peter** in [1:40](../01/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 18 15 xshi figs-explicit ἠκολούθει…τῷ Ἰησοῦ…ἄλλος μαθητής. ὁ δὲ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος ἦν γνωστὸς τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ, καὶ συνεισῆλθεν 1 Here, **another disciple** and **that disciple** could refer to: (1) the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. This interpretation would mean that these phrases would be similar to the phrase “the other disciple, whom Jesus loved” that occurs in ([20:2](../20/02.md)). Alternate translation: “I, another disciple, followed Jesus. Now I was known to the high priest, and I entered” (2) an unknown disciple. Alternate translation: “a certain disciple, followed Jesus. Now that other disciple was known to the high priest, and he entered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 18 15 hch7 figs-activepassive ὁ δὲ μαθητὴς ἐκεῖνος ἦν γνωστὸς τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ 1 Now that disciple was known to the high priest, and he entered with Jesus If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Now the high priest knew that disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2358,7 +2358,7 @@ JHN 18 38 h1b8 figs-metaphor ἐγὼ οὐδεμίαν αἰτίαν εὑρί JHN 18 39 nhqn figs-explicit ἕνα ἀπολύσω ὑμῖν 1 Pilate implies that he would **release** a prisoner when the Jewish leaders asked him to do so. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would release one prisoner to you at your request” or “I would release one prisoner to you when you asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 18 39 fm16 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ Πάσχα 1 Here, **the Passover** refers to the entire **Passover** festival. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the Passover festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 18 40 xdxz writing-quotations ἐκραύγασαν…πάλιν λέγοντες 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “they cried out again and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -JHN 18 40 a7pl figs-ellipsis μὴ τοῦτον, ἀλλὰ τὸν Βαραββᾶν 1 Not this man, but Barabbas The Jewish leaders are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Do not release this one, but release Barabbas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 18 40 a7pl figs-ellipsis μὴ τοῦτον, ἀλλὰ τὸν Βαραββᾶν 1 Not this man, but Barabbas The Jewish leaders are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Do not release this one, but release Barabbas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 18 40 qy3p figs-explicit τοῦτον 1 Not this man, but Barabbas Here the Jewish leaders say **this one** as a disrespectful way to refer to Jesus without saying his name. If your language has a similar way to refer to someone in an indirect but derogatory manner, you may use it here. Alternate translation: “this so-and-so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 18 40 h11k writing-background ἦν δὲ ὁ Βαραββᾶς λῃστής 1 Now Barabbas was a robber In this sentence John provides background information about **Barabbas**. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 18 40 ovim translate-names τὸν Βαραββᾶν…ὁ Βαραββᾶς 1 **Barabbas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2383,7 +2383,7 @@ JHN 19 7 x7bg figs-synecdoche ἀπεκρίθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ Ἰουδ JHN 19 7 vr7p figs-idiom Υἱὸν Θεοῦ ἑαυτὸν ἐποίησεν 1 he has to die because he claimed to be the Son of God Here, **made himself** is an idiom that refers to pretending to be something they think he is not. If this might confuse your readers, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “he pretended to be the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 19 7 xt93 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸν Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 19 8 lw3u figs-metonymy τοῦτον τὸν λόγον 1 Here, **word** refers to what the Jewish leaders said in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “what they said about Jesus claiming to be the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 19 8 nx2u figs-ellipsis μᾶλλον ἐφοβήθη 1 John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he grew even more afraid of condemning Jesus” or “he grew even more afraid than before of what might happen to him if he condemned Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 19 8 nx2u figs-ellipsis μᾶλλον ἐφοβήθη 1 John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he grew even more afraid of condemning Jesus” or “he grew even more afraid than before of what might happen to him if he condemned Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 19 9 seyo figs-explicit εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον πάλιν, καὶ λέγει τῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 John implies that the soldiers brought Jesus back into the governor’s palace so Pilate could speak with him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he entered into the governor’s palace again and told the soldiers to bring Jesus back inside. Then he says to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 19 9 lb11 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 19 10 wcm8 figs-rquestion ἐμοὶ οὐ λαλεῖς? 1 Are you not speaking to me? **Pilate** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize his surprise that Jesus does not answer his question. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I cannot believe you are refusing to speak to me!” or “Answer me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -2391,7 +2391,7 @@ JHN 19 10 iap3 figs-rquestion οὐκ οἶδας ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔ JHN 19 11 x2as figs-doublenegatives οὐκ εἶχες ἐξουσίαν κατ’ ἐμοῦ οὐδεμίαν, εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν 1 You do not have any power over me except for what has been given to you from above If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “You only have authority over me because that authority has been given to you from above” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) JHN 19 11 fxu9 figs-metaphor εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν 1 Here, **above** is used to refer to God who dwells in heaven **above**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 19 11 i7nu figs-activepassive εἰ μὴ ἦν δεδομένον σοι ἄνωθεν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “except for what God has given to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 19 11 vc79 figs-ellipsis μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει 1 gave me over Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has a greater sin than your sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 19 11 vc79 figs-ellipsis μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει 1 gave me over Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has a greater sin than your sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 19 11 kbrx figs-metaphor μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει 1 gave me over Jesus speaks of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess in varying amounts. If this use of **sin** might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are more sinful” or “has committed worse sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 19 12 a39p figs-explicit ἐκ τούτου 1 At this answer Here, **this** refers to Jesus’ answer. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “When Pilate heard Jesus’ answer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 19 12 q1vq figs-synecdoche οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -2420,9 +2420,9 @@ JHN 19 16 j6jg figs-explicit ἀπήγαγον 1 The phrase **led him away** im JHN 19 17 qv6j figs-activepassive εἰς τὸν λεγόμενον, Κρανίου Τόπον, ὃ λέγεται Ἑβραϊστὶ, Γολγοθᾶ 1 to the place called “The Place of a Skull,” If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to the place that the people called ‘The Place of a Skull,’ which the Jews call ‘Golgotha’ in Hebrew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 19 17 mwy4 figs-explicit Ἑβραϊστὶ 1 to the place called “The Place of a Skull,” See how you translated this phrase in [5:2](../05/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 19 17 hs8e Γολγοθᾶ 1 Here John writes out the sounds of this Jewish Aramaic word using Greek letters. Since John translates the meaning earlier in the verse, you should write out this word using the most similar sounds in your language. -JHN 19 18 fb84 figs-ellipsis μετ’ αὐτοῦ ἄλλους δύο 1 with him two other men John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “they also crucified two others with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 19 18 fb84 figs-ellipsis μετ’ αὐτοῦ ἄλλους δύο 1 with him two other men John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “they also crucified two others with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 19 19 cx5s figs-explicit ἔγραψεν…καὶ τίτλον ὁ Πειλᾶτος, καὶ ἔθηκεν ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Pilate also wrote a sign and put it on the cross John uses **Pilate** to imply that **Pilate** ordered his soldiers to write the title and put it on the cross. Pilate probably would not have done this himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Pilate also commanded his soldiers to write a title on a sign and put it on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 19 19 ziak figs-explicit ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Pilate also wrote a sign and put it on the cross Here, **the cross** refers specifically to **the cross** on which Jesus was crucified. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the cross they used to crucify Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 19 19 ziak figs-explicit ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Pilate also wrote a sign and put it on the cross Here, **the cross** refers specifically to **the cross** on which Jesus was crucified. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the cross they used to crucify Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 19 19 gk8e figs-activepassive ἦν…γεγραμμένον, Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος, ὁ Βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἰουδαίων. 1 There it was written: JESUS OF NAZARETH, THE KING OF THE JEWS If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that person wrote on it these words: Jesus the Nazarene, the King of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 19 20 ke3t figs-activepassive ὁ τόπος…ὅπου ἐσταυρώθη ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 the place where Jesus was crucified If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the place where they crucified Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 19 20 k3mp figs-explicit τῆς πόλεως 1 the place where Jesus was crucified Here, **the city** refers to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the city called Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2437,7 +2437,7 @@ JHN 19 22 vgn9 figs-explicit ὃ γέγραφα, γέγραφα 1 What I have wr JHN 19 23 s74c figs-explicit καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα 1 also the tunic The next verse implies that the soldiers kept the tunic separate from the clothes that they divided. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the tunic they did not divide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 19 23 lis8 writing-background δὲ 1 There is a break from the main storyline that begins with the word **Now** and continues to the end of the next verse. In this break John tells us how this event fulfills Scripture. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 19 23 sk7l figs-activepassive ὑφαντὸς δι’ ὅλου 1 also the tunic If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone had woven it in one piece” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 19 24 ks7m figs-ellipsis λάχωμεν περὶ αὐτοῦ, τίνος ἔσται 1 let us cast lots for it to decide whose it will be The soldiers are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The soldiers will **cast lots** and the winner will receive the shirt. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we should cast lots for it in order to decide whose it will be” or “we should cast lots for it and the winner will get to keep it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 19 24 ks7m figs-ellipsis λάχωμεν περὶ αὐτοῦ, τίνος ἔσται 1 let us cast lots for it to decide whose it will be The soldiers are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The soldiers will **cast lots** and the winner will receive the shirt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “we should cast lots for it in order to decide whose it will be” or “we should cast lots for it and the winner will get to keep it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 19 24 umc2 translate-unknown λάχωμεν περὶ αὐτοῦ…ἔβαλον κλῆρον 1 let us cast lots for it to decide whose it will be The term **lots** refers to objects with different markings on various sides that were used to decide randomly among several possibilities. They were tossed onto the ground to see which marked side would come up on top. If your readers would not be familiar with **lots**, you could use a general expression for gambling. Alternate translation: “we should gamble for it … gambled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JHN 19 24 us8x writing-quotations ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ ἡ λέγουσα 1 let us cast lots for it to decide whose it will be Here John uses **that the scripture would be fulfilled** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 22:18](../../psa/22/18.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “This happened so that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 19 24 j1f9 figs-activepassive ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ ἡ λέγουσα 1 so that the scripture would be fulfilled which said If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This fulfilled the scripture that said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2454,7 +2454,7 @@ JHN 19 27 qc7d figs-metaphor ἴδε, ἡ μήτηρ σου 1 See, your mother H JHN 19 27 q615 figs-metonymy ἀπ’ ἐκείνης τῆς ὥρας 1 From that hour Here, **hour** refers to a point in time. It does not refer to a 60-minute length of time. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 19 28 uynk writing-newevent μετὰ τοῦτο 1 knowing that everything was now completed **After this** introduces a new event that happened soon after the events the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Soon afterward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 19 28 crd3 figs-activepassive ἤδη πάντα τετέλεσται 1 knowing that everything was now completed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he had already completed all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 19 28 pxie figs-explicit πάντα 1 knowing that everything was now completed Here, **all things** refers to everything that God sent Jesus to the world to do. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the things that God had sent him to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 19 28 pxie figs-explicit πάντα 1 knowing that everything was now completed Here, **all things** refers to everything that God sent Jesus to the world to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the things that God had sent him to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 19 28 wh4n figs-activepassive τελειωθῇ ἡ Γραφὴ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might fulfill the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 19 28 w999 writing-quotations ἵνα τελειωθῇ ἡ Γραφὴ 1 Here John uses **that the scripture might be completed** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 69:21](../../psa/69/21.md)).If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “so that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 19 28 ezfy figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) @@ -2477,7 +2477,7 @@ JHN 19 31 gz48 figs-explicit κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη JHN 19 32 q2yq figs-activepassive τοῦ ἄλλου τοῦ συνσταυρωθέντος αὐτῷ 1 who had been crucified with Jesus If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of the other man with whom they had crucified him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 19 35 p17b writing-background 0 This verse is a break from the main storyline in which John provides some background information about himself. John is telling readers that they can trust what he has written because he saw these events happen. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 19 35 bs5s figs-123person ὁ ἑωρακὼς…αὐτοῦ…ἐκεῖνος οἶδεν ὅτι ἀληθῆ λέγει 1 The one who saw this This phrase refers to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. He is speaking of himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the one who saw this … my … I know that I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -JHN 19 35 c9q7 figs-ellipsis ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς πιστεύητε 1 so that you would also believe John is leaving out some of the words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “so that you would also believe that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 19 35 c9q7 figs-ellipsis ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς πιστεύητε 1 so that you would also believe John is leaving out some of the words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “so that you would also believe that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 19 36 wid6 writing-background 0 General Information: [Verses 36–37](../19/36.md) are another break from the main storyline in which John tells us that the two events in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md) made some prophecies in scripture come true. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 19 36 uyvo writing-quotations ἐγένετο…ταῦτα, ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ 1 in order to fulfill scripture Here John uses **that the scripture would be fulfilled** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 34:20](../../psa/34/20.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “these things happened in order that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 19 36 l8zi figs-explicit ἐγένετο…ταῦτα 1 in order to fulfill scripture Here, **these things** refers to the two events described in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md). If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the soldiers did not break Jesus’ legs but pierced his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2538,8 +2538,8 @@ JHN 20 7 v9yg translate-unknown ὀθονίων 1 See how you translated **line JHN 20 7 yc78 figs-activepassive ἀλλὰ χωρὶς ἐντετυλιγμένον εἰς ἕνα τόπον 1 but was folded up in a place by itself If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but someone had folded it up in one place by itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 20 8 vl84 figs-explicit ὁ ἄλλος μαθητὴς 1 the other disciple See how you translated **the other disciple** in [verse 2](../20/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 20 8 b7h5 figs-123person εἰσῆλθεν…καὶ εἶδεν καὶ ἐπίστευσεν 1 the other disciple If you translated **the other disciple** with a first person form in this verse, then you will need to use the first person throughout this verse. Alternate translation: “went in, and I saw and believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -JHN 20 8 ww3z figs-ellipsis εἶδεν 1 he saw and believed John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he saw the linen cloths where Jesus’ body had lain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -JHN 20 8 eydm figs-ellipsis ἐπίστευσεν 1 he saw and believed John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he believed that Jesus had risen from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 20 8 ww3z figs-ellipsis εἶδεν 1 he saw and believed John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he saw the linen cloths where Jesus’ body had lain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 20 8 eydm figs-ellipsis ἐπίστευσεν 1 he saw and believed John is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he believed that Jesus had risen from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 20 9 jywe writing-background γὰρ 1 they still did not know the scripture **For** here indicates that this verse provides background information about the kind of belief that was mentioned in the previous clause. **For** here does not indicate a reason or cause. At that time, the disciples believed Jesus had risen from the dead only because the tomb was empty. They still did not understand that the scriptures said Jesus would rise from the dead. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “But even then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 20 9 u5q9 figs-idiom ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι 1 rise Here, **rise from the dead** is an idiom that refers to a dead person becoming alive again. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “become alive after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 20 10 p5um figs-explicit ἀπῆλθον…πάλιν πρὸς αὑτοὺς 1 went back home again Since the disciples were staying within walking distance of Jesus’ tomb, the **homes** they went to must have been in Jerusalem. They did not go back to their homes in Galilee. Alternate translation: “went back to where they were staying in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2567,7 +2567,7 @@ JHN 20 17 hogb figs-pastforfuture ἀναβαίνω 1 I will go up to my Father JHN 20 17 xbr1 figs-doublet πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα μου, καὶ Πατέρα ὑμῶν, καὶ Θεόν μου, καὶ Θεὸν ὑμῶν 1 I will go up to my Father and your Father, and my God and your God These two long phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize to whom Jesus will return. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “to God, who is my Father and your Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 20 18 unzu figs-pastforfuture ἔρχεται 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 20 18 m6xn figs-go ἔρχεται Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ 1 Mary Magdalene came and told the disciples Your language may state “goes” rather than **comes** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Mary Magdalene goes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -JHN 20 18 zf17 figs-ellipsis ἔρχεται Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ 1 Mary Magdalene came and told the disciples John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Mary Magdalene comes to where the disciples were staying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 20 18 zf17 figs-ellipsis ἔρχεται Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ 1 Mary Magdalene came and told the disciples John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Mary Magdalene comes to where the disciples were staying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 20 19 qj6n figs-explicit τῇ μιᾷ σαββάτων 1 that day, the first day of the week See how you translated **the first of the week** in [verse 1](../20/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 20 19 hh2g translate-ordinal τῇ μιᾷ σαββάτων 1 that day, the first day of the week Here John is actually using a cardinal number, “one,” to mean **first**. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can also use a cardinal number here in your translation. Alternate translation: “on day one of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) JHN 20 19 e7cb figs-activepassive τῶν θυρῶν κεκλεισμένων ὅπου ἦσαν οἱ μαθηταὶ 1 the doors of where the disciples were, were closed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the disciples having closed the doors of where they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2580,7 +2580,7 @@ JHN 20 20 nb0v grammar-connect-logic-result ἰδόντες τὸν Κύριον JHN 20 21 ylp8 figs-idiom εἰρήνη ὑμῖν 1 Peace to you See how you translated **Peace to you** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 20 21 env3 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατήρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 20 21 hw1z figs-infostructure καθὼς ἀπέσταλκέν με ὁ Πατήρ, κἀγὼ πέμπω ὑμᾶς 1 Father If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “I send you just as the Father has sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -JHN 20 21 vhzq figs-ellipsis ἀπέσταλκέν με…πέμπω ὑμᾶς 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has sent me into the world … send you into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 20 21 vhzq figs-ellipsis ἀπέσταλκέν με…πέμπω ὑμᾶς 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “has sent me into the world … send you into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 20 22 vjs8 translate-symaction ἐνεφύσησεν 1 When Jesus **breathed on them**, he did this symbolic action in order to show that he would give his disciples the **Holy Spirit** in the near future. If this would be helpful to your readers, you could explain its significance. Alternate translation: “he breathed on them as a symbolic action” or “he breathed on them to symbolically show that he was going to give them the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) JHN 20 22 avgi figs-explicit ἐνεφύσησεν 1 Here, **breathed on** refers to Jesus blowing air out of his mouth. It does not refer to the normal act of inhaling and exhaling air into one’s lungs. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he blew air on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 20 22 v9el figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) @@ -2595,7 +2595,7 @@ JHN 20 25 n8vc figs-infostructure ἐὰν μὴ ἴδω ἐν ταῖς χερ JHN 20 25 i7ex figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ ἴδω ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτοῦ τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων, καὶ βάλω τὸν δάκτυλόν μου εἰς τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων, καὶ βάλω μου τὴν χεῖρα εἰς τὴν πλευρὰν αὐτοῦ, οὐ μὴ πιστεύσω 1 Unless I see … his side, I will not believe If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I will believe only if I see in his hands the mark of the nails and put my finger into the mark of the nails and put my hand into his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) JHN 20 25 ss17 figs-possession τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων -1 In both of these occurrences, Thomas is using **of** to describe **mark** made by **nails**. He is referring to the holes in Jesus’ hands that were made by the nails that soldiers used to crucify him. Alternate translation: “the marks made by nails … those marks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 20 25 xasr figs-metonymy εἰς τὴν πλευρὰν αὐτοῦ 1 See how you translated **his side** in [verse 20](../20/20md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 20 25 iqn0 figs-ellipsis οὐ μὴ πιστεύσω 1 Thomas is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not believe that Jesus has become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 20 25 iqn0 figs-ellipsis οὐ μὴ πιστεύσω 1 Thomas is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not believe that Jesus has become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 20 26 vzm5 figs-pastforfuture ἔρχεται 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 20 26 r3iz figs-activepassive τῶν θυρῶν κεκλεισμένων 1 while the doors were closed See how you translated this phrase in [verse 19](../20/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 20 26 m5tl figs-idiom εἰρήνη ὑμῖν 1 Peace to you See how you translated **Peace to you** in [verse 19](../20/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2604,11 +2604,11 @@ JHN 20 27 xgwl figs-explicit ὧδε 1 Jesus uses **here** to refer to the plac JHN 20 27 ai73 figs-metonymy τὰς χεῖράς μου 1 Jesus uses **my hands** to refer to the holes in Jesus’ **hands** that were made by the nails that soldiers used to crucify him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the nail marks in my hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 20 27 tax6 figs-metonymy τὴν πλευράν μου 1 Jesus uses **my side** to refer to the wound that a Roman soldier made in his **side** with a spear. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spear wound in his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 20 27 ncc3 figs-doublet μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος, ἀλλὰ πιστός 1 Do not be unbelieving, but believe These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus wants Thomas to believe that he has become alive again. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you absolutely must believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -JHN 20 27 n4pi figs-ellipsis μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος, ἀλλὰ πιστός 1 believe Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “do not be unbelieving that I have become alive again, but believe it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 20 27 n4pi figs-ellipsis μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος, ἀλλὰ πιστός 1 believe Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “do not be unbelieving that I have become alive again, but believe it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 20 29 zgv1 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) -JHN 20 29 q81m figs-ellipsis πεπίστευκας…πιστεύσαντες 1 you have believed Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you have believed that I have become alive again … having believed that I have become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 20 29 q81m figs-ellipsis πεπίστευκας…πιστεύσαντες 1 you have believed Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “you have believed that I have become alive again … having believed that I have become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 20 29 sax7 figs-activepassive μακάριοι οἱ μὴ ἰδόντες 1 you have believed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God blesses those not having seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 20 29 q9fb figs-ellipsis μὴ ἰδόντες 1 who have not seen Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “not having seen me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 20 29 q9fb figs-ellipsis μὴ ἰδόντες 1 who have not seen Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “not having seen me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 20 30 yd1j writing-endofstory 0 General Information: In [verses 30–31](../20/30.md) John comments about the story he has written in chapters 1 through 20. He also states his reason for writing this book. He does this in order to indicate that the story is almost finished. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) JHN 20 30 azxu σημεῖα 1 See how you translated the term **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles” JHN 20 30 xz6j figs-activepassive ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τούτῳ 1 signs that have not been written in this book If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since John wrote this Gospel, you should use the first person pronoun “I” to indicate who did the action. Alternate translation: “which I have not written in this book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2616,7 +2616,7 @@ JHN 20 31 zlc5 figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** could mean: ( JHN 20 31 am9l figs-activepassive ταῦτα δὲ γέγραπται 1 but these have been written If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but the author wrote about these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 20 31 mlqg figs-you πιστεύητε…ἔχητε 1 but these have been written In this verse **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) people who are reading this Gospel and do not trust in Jesus for salvation. Alternate translation: “you might believe … you might have” (2) people who are reading this Gospel and already believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you would continue believing … you would continue to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JHN 20 31 p5k4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 20 31 uem2 figs-ellipsis πιστεύοντες 1 life in his name Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you can supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believing that Jesus is the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 20 31 uem2 figs-ellipsis πιστεύοντες 1 life in his name Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “believing that Jesus is the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 20 31 ip1i figs-explicit ζωὴν 1 life Here, **life** refers to eternal **life**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 20 31 vgwe figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **in** indicates the means by which people can have eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 20 31 qxdy figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 life in his name Here, **his name** could refer to: (1) Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “through union with him” or “by the power of his person” (2) calling on Jesus’ name for salvation. Alternate translation: “by calling on his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 2c28e4ecc9..f25206064f 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 4 7 fnu3 figs-yousingular σε…ἔχεις…ἔλαβες…ἔλαβες…καυχᾶσαι…λαβών 1 between you … do you have that you did not … you have freely … do you boast … you had not In this verse, Paul uses the singular form for **you**. He does this in order to directly address each specific person among the Corinthian believers. In the next verse, he again uses the plural form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) 1CO 4 7 gtb5 figs-rquestion τίς…σε διακρίνει? 1 For who makes you superior? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is no one who makes you superior.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 4 7 r6yw figs-rquestion τί…ἔχεις ὃ οὐκ ἔλαβες? 1 What do you have that you did not freely receive? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is nothing that you have that you did not receive.” or “you received everything that you have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 4 7 eixw grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ καὶ ἔλαβες 1 Paul is speaking as if “receiving it” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since you indeed received it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 4 7 eixw grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ καὶ ἔλαβες 1 Paul is speaking as if “receiving it” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since you indeed received it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 4 7 e8l2 figs-rquestion τί καυχᾶσαι ὡς μὴ λαβών? 1 why do you boast as if you had not done so? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, there is no answer to the question, since that is exactly Paul’s point. There is no reason for them to **boast**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an imperative or a “should” statement. Alternate translation: “do not boast as if you did not receive it.” or “you should not boast as if you did not receive it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 4 7 p0hg writing-pronouns ἔλαβες…λαβών 2 Here, both uses of **it** refer back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. If your language does not use **it** to refer to an unstated “thing,” you can use a word or phrase that does refer clearly back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. Alternate translation: “you received everything … you did … receive everything” or “you received what you have … you did … receive what you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 4 8 yp8s figs-irony ἤδη κεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ, ἤδη ἐπλουτήσατε, χωρὶς ἡμῶν ἐβασιλεύσατε 1 General Information: With these statements, Paul is stating what he thinks the Corinthians would say about themselves. He does not mean that he believes that these things are true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some words that clarify that Paul is speaking from the Corinthians’s perspective, such as “it is as if” or “you say.” Alternate translation: “Already it is as if you are satisfied! Already it is as if you have become rich! It is as if you began to reign apart from us” or “Already you say that you are satisfied! Already you say that you have become rich! You say that you have begun to reign apart from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) @@ -655,7 +655,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 6 2 r8sj grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ 1 The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in [6:1](../06/01.md). The Corinthians currently think that going to court in public is fine. Paul gives the true alternative: they **will judge the world** and thus should not need to take their quarrels and lawsuits anywhere else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 6 2 i1m5 figs-rquestion ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ ἅγιοι τὸν κόσμον κρινοῦσιν? 1 Or do you not know that the believers will judge the world? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “You already know that the saints will judge the world.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 6 2 i67f figs-rquestion ἀνάξιοί ἐστε κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων? 1 If then, you will judge the world, are you not able to settle matters of little importance? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong negative or positive statement. Alternate translation: “you are definitely not unworthy of the smallest cases” or “you are definitely worthy of the smallest cases (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 6 2 py6h grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος 1 Paul is speaking as if **the world is judged by you** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because the world is judged by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 6 2 py6h grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος 1 Paul is speaking as if **the world is judged by you** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because the world is judged by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 6 2 yq8e figs-activepassive ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **the world**, which is **judged**, rather than **you**, who do the “judging.” Alternate translation: “you judge the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 6 2 jqvf figs-pastforfuture κρίνεται 1 Here, **is judged** makes a general statement about what **you**, that is, the **saints**, do. The present tense does not mean that the **saints** are currently passing final judgment and will not do so in the future. Rather, Paul uses the present tense to state a general fact about the **saints**. The judgment itself will occur in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the present tense of **is judged** with the future tense here. Alternate translation: “will be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 1CO 6 2 stvc figs-idiom ἀνάξιοί…κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων 1 Here, to be **unworthy of** something means that one is not capable of doing that thing or is not qualified to do it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **unworthy of** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “unqualified concerning the smallest cases” “not able to judge the smallest cases” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1070,7 +1070,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 8 9 loo1 ἡ ἐξουσία ὑμῶν αὕτη 1 those who are weak Alternate translation: “this authority that you have” 1CO 8 9 f3ds figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν 1 those who are weak Much like in [8:7](../08/07.md), **weak** identifies a person who easily feels guilty. A **weak** person thinks some things are wrong that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “for the sensitive” or “for those who often condemn themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 8 9 deu5 figs-nominaladj τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν 1 those who are weak Paul is using the adjective **weak** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1CO 8 10 usg7 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν…τις ἴδῃ 1 sees the one who has Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “when” or “after”. Alternate translation: “whenever someone might see” or “after someone sees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 8 10 usg7 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν…τις ἴδῃ 1 sees the one who has Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “when” or “after”. Alternate translation: “whenever someone might see” or “after someone sees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 8 10 a7qn figs-explicit γνῶσιν 1 sees the one who has Here Paul does not specify what the **knowledge** is about. However, it is clear from [8:4–6](../08/04.md) that Paul is speaking about **knowledge** about other gods, specifically knowing that there is only one God and that other gods do not really exist. If you must specify what the knowledge is about, you could clarify that it is about the idols or the topic of things sacrificed to idols. Alternate translation: “knowledge about idols” or “knowledge about this issue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 8 10 v611 figs-abstractnouns τὸν ἔχοντα γνῶσιν 1 sees the one who has If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “the person who knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 8 10 xhn9 translate-unknown κατακείμενον 1 sees the one who has In Paul’s culture, people ate lying down on their side (**reclining**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **reclining to eat** with a word or phrase that describes the normal position for eating in your culture or indicate that the person is about to eat. Alternate translation: “about to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1096,7 +1096,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 8 12 x857 figs-metaphor τὴν συνείδησιν ἀσθενοῦσαν 1 your knowledge Here, **weak** identifies **consciences** that easily lead people to feel guilty. **Weak consciences** condemn some things that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “sensitive consciences” or “consciences, which often condemn them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 8 13 i8tb figs-personification βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου 1 Therefore Here, **food** is spoken of as though it were a person who could cause someone **to stumble**. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that the **food** is the key issue that leads to “stumbling.” If this might be confusing for your readers, you could clarify that the person who eats the food causes someone **to stumble**. Alternate translation: “how I eat causes my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 8 13 seua figs-123person εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου, οὐ μὴ φάγω κρέα εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 Therefore Here Paul uses the first-person singular in order to use himself as an example for the Corinthians to follow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that this is why Paul uses the first person by clarifying that Paul is offering himself as an example. Alternate translation: “if food causes my brother to stumble, I, for one, will certainly not ever eat meat” or “take me as an example: if food causes my brother to stumble, I will certainly not ever eat meat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -1CO 8 13 vf92 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου 1 if food causes to stumble Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “in cases where” or “since.” Alternate translation: “because food causes my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 8 13 vf92 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου 1 if food causes to stumble Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “in cases where” or “since.” Alternate translation: “because food causes my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 8 13 eyrr figs-gendernotations τὸν ἀδελφόν -1 Therefore Although **brother** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brother** with a nongendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brother or sister … brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 8 13 ucfd figs-genericnoun τὸν ἀδελφόν μου -1 Therefore Paul is speaking of “brothers” in general, not of one particular **brother**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **my brother** with a word or phrase that refers to “brothers” in general. Alternate translation: “any brother of mine … any brother of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 8 13 ra1m figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ 1 Therefore The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In Paul’s culture, two negative words made the statement even more negative. English speakers would think that the two negatives form a positive, so the ULT expresses the idea with one strong negative. If your language can use two negatives as Paul’s culture did, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in this way, you can translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) @@ -1165,10 +1165,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 10 q1q2 figs-ellipsis ὁ ἀλοῶν ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 for our sake Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**ought to plow**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “the one who threshes ought to thresh in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 9 11 zn5m figs-metaphor εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῖν τὰ πνευματικὰ ἐσπείραμεν, μέγα εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῶν τὰ σαρκικὰ θερίσομεν? 1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? In this verse, Paul applies the farming language he used in [9:9–10](../09/09.md). When he and Barnabas “sow,” they should also “reap” the harvest. Paul clarifies that what they **sowed** was **spiritual things**, which means the good news. The **material things** that they can **reap** are money and support from the Corinthians. If your reader would misunderstand this application of the farming language, you could use analogies to clarify what Paul is referring to or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Similarly, if we told you about the good news, is it too much if we receive material support from you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 11 b5g9 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς -1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Here, **we** refers particularly to Paul and Barnabas. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1CO 9 11 jpjj grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Paul is speaking as if **we** “sowing spiritual things” was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 9 11 jpjj grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Paul is speaking as if **we** “sowing spiritual things” was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 9 11 g1wh figs-rquestion μέγα εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῶν τὰ σαρκικὰ θερίσομεν? 1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, it is not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong negation. Alternate translation: “it is by no means too much if we will reap material things from you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 9 11 czcs grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ 2 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **we** could **reap material things from you**, though **we** might not do so. He specifies the result for if **we** do **reap material things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “that.” Alternate translation: “that” or “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -1CO 9 12 v333 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 If others exercised this right Paul is speaking as if **others** “sharing” **the right over you** was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 9 12 v333 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 If others exercised this right Paul is speaking as if **others** “sharing” **the right over you** was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 9 12 z3mr figs-explicit τῆς ὑμῶν ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν 1 If others exercised this right While Paul does not directly state this, the Corinthians would have understood **right** to refer to the **right** to receive financial support. If your readers would not understand **right** in this way, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “shared the right to financial support from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 9 12 cr62 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὑμῶν ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν…ἡμεῖς…τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ταύτῃ 1 If others exercised this right If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **right**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “able to.” If you do so, you may need to express an object, which here is receiving financial support. Alternate translation: “were able to require financial support from you, are we … being able to require financial support from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 9 12 lld4 figs-rquestion οὐ μᾶλλον ἡμεῖς? 1 If others exercised this right over you, should we not even more? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, you do.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we certainly do even more.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1196,7 +1196,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 15 fd69 figs-metaphor τὸ καύχημά μου…κενώσει 1 deprive me of my boasting Here Paul speaks as if a **boast** was a container that someone could make **empty**. By speaking in this way, Paul means that someone could take away what he boasts about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **make my boast empty** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will remove my reason for boasting” or “will deflate my boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 15 rl1y figs-abstractnouns τὸ καύχημά μου 1 deprive me of my boasting If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **boast**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “boast.” Alternate translation: “what I boast about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 9 16 lq4l figs-infostructure ἐὰν…εὐαγγελίζωμαι, οὐκ ἔστιν μοι καύχημα, ἀνάγκη γάρ μοι ἐπίκειται 1 this necessity was placed upon me If your language would normally put the reason before the result, you could rearrange the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “because compulsion is placed on me, there is nothing for me to boast about if I proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -1CO 9 16 xpve grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 this necessity was placed upon me Paul is speaking as if “proclaiming” **the gospel** was only a possibility, but he means that he actually does this. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when” or “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 9 16 xpve grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 this necessity was placed upon me Paul is speaking as if “proclaiming” **the gospel** was only a possibility, but he means that he actually does this. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when” or “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 9 16 ecw2 figs-activepassive ἀνάγκη…ἐπίκειται 1 this necessity was placed upon me If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on himself, upon whom the **compulsion is placed**, rather than focusing on the person placing the **compulsion**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God places compulsion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 9 16 qyp0 figs-abstractnouns ἀνάγκη…μοι ἐπίκειται 1 this necessity was placed upon me If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **compulsion**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “compel” and rephrase the clause. Alternate translation: “I am compelled to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 9 16 eimr figs-metaphor ἀνάγκη…μοι ἐπίκειται 1 this necessity was placed upon me Here Paul speaks as if **compulsion** were a physical object that someone had **placed upon** him. By speaking in this way, he means that he is required to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I am commanded to do so” or “I have an obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1341,7 +1341,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 14 dab4 figs-activepassive ἀγαπητοί μου 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **beloved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “loving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that he himself loves them. Alternate translation: “people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 14 n5tb figs-metaphor φεύγετε ἀπὸ 1 flee away from idolatry Just as in [6:18](../06/18.md), here Paul wants the Corinthians to avoid **idolatry** as urgently as if it were an enemy or danger that they might **flee from**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “carefully stay away from” or “fight against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 14 ly4k figs-abstractnouns τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **idolatry**, you can express the idea by using a phrase such as “worshiping other gods” or “serving idols.” Alternate translation: “serving idols” or “worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 10 15 ed82 grammar-connect-condition-fact ὡς φρονίμοις 1 flee away from idolatry Paul here uses **as**, but he means that he thinks he really is speaking to **sensible people**. If your language does not use **as** if what it introduces is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea by identifying the Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” or “like someone who is talking to reasonable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 10 15 ed82 grammar-connect-condition-fact ὡς φρονίμοις 1 flee away from idolatry Paul here uses **as**, but he means that he thinks he really is speaking to **sensible people**. If your language does not use **as** if what it introduces is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea by identifying the Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” or “like someone who is talking to reasonable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 10 15 mnb2 writing-pronouns ὅ φημι 1 flee away from idolatry Here, **what I say** refers to what Paul is about to say in the next verses (especially [10:16–22](../10/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **what I say** with a form that naturally refers to the next sentences. Alternate translation: “what I will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 16 gi4s figs-possession τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας 1 The cup of blessing Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **cup** that is characterized by **blessing**. This phrase identifies a specific **cup**, here, the **cup** used in the Lord’s Supper. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can identify the **cup** as the one used in the Lord’s Supper. Alternate translation: “The cup in the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 16 tavb figs-metonymy τὸ ποτήριον 1 The cup of blessing Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside the **cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **cup** by more explicitly referring to what would be in the **cup**. Alternate translation: “The drink” or “The wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1384,7 +1384,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 24 bpf8 figs-imperative μηδεὶς…ζητείτω 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “No one should seek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 10 24 i6ek figs-gendernotations ἑαυτοῦ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **his** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **his**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 10 24 mcwj figs-possession τὸ ἑαυτοῦ…ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Here Paul speaks of a **good** that belongs to oneself or to another person. By this, he refers to what is **good** for oneself or for **the other person**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can clarify that the **good** is “for” somebody. Alternate translation: “what is good for himself, but what is good for the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1CO 10 24 pn70 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but let each person seek the good of the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1CO 10 24 pn70 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but let each person seek the good of the other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 24 dppr figs-genericnoun τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 not everything builds people up Paul is speaking of other people in general, not of one particular **other person**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the other person** with a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “of every other person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 10 25 djh4 figs-explicit ἐν μακέλλῳ 1 not everything builds people up Here, **the market** is the public place where meat and other foods were **sold**. At least sometimes, meat that came from sacrifices to idols would be sold in this **market**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote to explain the context and say why Paul is speaking about **the market**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 10 25 m6w7 figs-activepassive πωλούμενον 1 not everything builds people up If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **sold** rather than focusing on the person doing the “selling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “butchers” or “sellers” do it. Alternate translation: “butchers sell” or “people sell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1425,7 +1425,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “you should not be.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I must not be insulted for that which I give thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 30 bafd figs-activepassive βλασφημοῦμαι 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on himself, who is **insulted**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “insulting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that some other person does it. Alternate translation: “do they insult me” or “does someone insult me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 31 ub3g grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Here, **Therefore** introduces the conclusion of what Paul has argued in [8:1–10:30](../08/01.md). If you have a way to introduce the conclusion to an entire section, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “In conclusion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1CO 10 31 pxzd grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε…ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul is speaking as if “eating,” “drinking,” and “doing” things were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that the Corinthians will do these things. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when you eat or drink, or when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 10 31 pxzd grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε…ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul is speaking as if “eating,” “drinking,” and “doing” things were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that the Corinthians will do these things. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when you eat or drink, or when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 10 31 zmvv figs-abstractnouns εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “glorify.” Alternate translation: “to glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 32 sj34 figs-abstractnouns ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **offense**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “offend.” Alternate translation: “Do not offend either Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 32 ag47 figs-explicit καὶ Ἰουδαίοις…καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks Here the three groups to which Paul refers would include every person in Paul’s context. The **Jews** are those who practice Jewish customs and faith, while **the church of God** refers to everyone who believes in Jesus the Messiah. The word **Greeks** includes everyone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these three groups and think that Paul is leaving some people out by clarifying that Paul includes everyone. Alternate translation: “to anyone, whether Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1463,7 +1463,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 6 lac8 figs-explicit οὐ κατακαλύπτεται…κατακαλυπτέσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Just as in [11:5](../11/05.md), **not** “covering” the **head** could refer to: (1) not wearing a piece of clothing on the hair and back of the head. Alternate translation: “does not wear a cloth on her head … let her wear a cloth on her head” (2) not putting the hair up in a traditional hairstyle but instead letting it flow freely. Alternate translation: “loosens her hair … let her bind up her hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 6 ahln figs-imperative καὶ κειράσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “her hair also needs to be cut off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 11 6 i9ou figs-activepassive καὶ κειράσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **hair**, which is **cut off**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “cutting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” does it. Alternate translation: “let a person cut her hair off also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 11 6 s4r5 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 2 If it is disgraceful for a woman Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because it is” or “since it is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 11 6 s4r5 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 2 If it is disgraceful for a woman Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because it is” or “since it is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 11 6 lqlu figs-doublet τὸ κείρασθαι ἢ ξυρᾶσθαι 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here, **to have her hair cut off** refers to how **hair** is trimmed or cut much shorter. The phrase **to be shaved** refers to how **hair** can be cut so short that it is no longer visible. If your language has separate words for these two actions, you could use them here. If your language has only one word for cutting **hair** short, you could use just one word here. Alternate translation: “to have her hair cut short” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 11 6 pflq figs-activepassive τὸ κείρασθαι ἢ ξυρᾶσθαι 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **hair** that is **cut off** or **shaved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “cutting” or “shaving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” does it. Alternate translation: “to have someone cut her hair off or to shave her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 6 od1s figs-imperative κατακαλυπτέσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “she needs to cover her head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) @@ -1550,7 +1550,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 22 d2cm figs-hyperbole τοὺς μὴ ἔχοντας 1 despise Here, **those who have nothing** is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to mean that these people do not **have** very much. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize the contrast between those who **have houses** and those who **have nothing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could qualify Paul’s claim and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have very little” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1CO 11 22 nz88 figs-rquestion τί εἴπω ὑμῖν? 1 What should I say to you? Should I praise you? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “we know that you are going to rebuke us.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong statement about what Paul is going to say. Alternate translation: “You know what I am going to say to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 11 22 uv6z figs-rquestion ἐπαινέσω ὑμᾶς ἐν τούτῳ? 1 What should I say to you? Should I praise you? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, you should not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I will definitely not praise you for this.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 11 22 qc27 figs-doublet ἐπαινέσω ὑμᾶς ἐν τούτῳ? οὐκ ἐπαινῶ! 1 What should I say to you? Should I praise you? Here Paul indicates that he will **not praise** the Corinthians by using both a rhetorical question and a negative statement. He uses both sentences in order to strongly emphasize how displeased he is. If your language does not use repetition for emphasis, and if your readers might misunderstand why Paul repeats the same idea, you can combine these two sentences into one strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “I will never praise you for this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +1CO 11 22 qc27 figs-doublet ἐπαινέσω ὑμᾶς ἐν τούτῳ? οὐκ ἐπαινῶ! 1 What should I say to you? Should I praise you? Here Paul indicates that he will **not praise** the Corinthians by using both a rhetorical question and a negative statement. He uses both sentences in order to strongly emphasize how displeased he is. If your language does not use repetition for emphasis, and if your readers would not understand why Paul repeats the same idea, you could combine these two sentences into one strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “I will never praise you for this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 11 23 av31 ἐγὼ…παρέλαβον ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου, ὃ 1 For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord This could refer to: (1) how Paul learned the tradition he is about to recount indirectly **from the Lord**. In other words, Paul learns about these things from others, who received the tradition directly from the Lord. Alternate translation: “from others who knew the Lord I received what the Lord himself did, which” (2) how Paul learned the tradition directly **from the Lord**. In other words, **the Lord** himself revealed this information to Paul. Alternate translation: “I received directly from the Lord what” 1CO 11 23 xgh4 translate-unknown ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ᾗ 1 For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord Here, **on the night** states that the events that Paul will describe all happened “during” one specific **night**. Use a natural way to refer to “during the night” as the time in which the events occur. Alternate translation: “during the night when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 11 23 iy93 figs-explicit ἐν τῇ νυκτὶ ᾗ παρεδίδετο 1 For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord Here Paul refers to the story about how Jesus was arrested. One of Jesus’ closest disciples, Judas Iscariot, made a deal with the religious leaders to “betray” Jesus to them (see [Matthew 26:14–16](../mat/26/14.md); [Mark 14:10–11](../mrk/14/10.md); [Luke 22:3–6](../luk/22/03.md)). After Jesus eats with his disciples and spends time praying, Judas leads the religious leaders to Jesus, and they arrest him (see [Matthew 26:47–50](../mat/26/47.md); [Mark 14:43–46](../mrk/14/43.md); [Luke 22:47–48](../luk/22/47.md); [John 18:2–12](../jhn/18/02.md)). Paul is not primarily interested in this part of the story, but he mentions it to explain when Jesus **took bread**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **on the night in which he was betrayed** refers to with a footnote to explain the context or include some short, extra information. Alternate translation: “on the night in which he was handed over to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1979,14 +1979,14 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 26 xzz2 figs-imperative πάντα πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν γινέσθω 1 interpretation Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “All things must happen for building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 14 26 fnba figs-metaphor οἰκοδομὴν 1 interpretation Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that the Corinthians should focus on helping other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated this metaphor in [14:12](../14/12.md). Alternate translation: “the growth” or “the edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 26 jvgw figs-explicit πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν 1 interpretation Here the Corinthians would have understood Paul to mean that the **building up** applies to other believers. If your readers would not infer this, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “for building up believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 27 u8ew grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε 1 and each one in turn Paul is speaking as if someone “speaking” **in a tongue** was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that someone often does “speak” **in a tongue**. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 14 27 u8ew grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε 1 and each one in turn Paul is speaking as if someone “speaking” **in a tongue** was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that someone often does “speak” **in a tongue**. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 14 27 gqdr figs-ellipsis κατὰ 1 and each one in turn Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. English needs these words, so the ULT has supplied them in brackets. If your language also needs these words, you could use these or similar ones. Alternate translation: “this should be done by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 14 27 qhl3 figs-explicit κατὰ δύο ἢ τὸ πλεῖστον τρεῖς 1 and each one in turn Paul does not explicitly state in what situation only **two or at most three** believers should speak **in a tongue**. The Corinthians would have understood him to be speaking about each time the believers gathered to worship God (see the expression “in the church” in [14:28](../14/28.md)). Paul does not mean that only **two or most three** people can ever speak in tongues. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what situation Paul is speaking about more explicitly. Alternate translation: “it should be by two or at most three every time you gather together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 27 wc1z figs-idiom ἀνὰ μέρος 1 and each one in turn Here, **in turn** means that people do something one after the other or in order. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in turn** with a word or phrase that refers to doing things successively or in order. Alternate translation: “in order” or “successively” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 14 27 njmu figs-imperative εἷς διερμηνευέτω 1 and each one in turn Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “let.” Alternate translation: “one should interpret” or “let one interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 14 27 vvge figs-extrainfo εἷς 1 and each one in turn Here Paul does not indicate whether **one** is one of the people who is speaking **in a tongue** or if it is someone else. It is likely that Paul thinks that both options are acceptable. If possible, you should translate **one** in such a way that it could refer to one of the people speaking **in a tongue** or to someone else. Alternate translation: “somebody” or “one person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 14 27 ari2 figs-explicit διερμηνευέτω 1 must interpret Here, just as in [14:26](../14/26.md), **interpret** refers specifically to interpreting a **tongue**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the person should **interpret** the **tongue**. Alternate translation: “must interpret the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 28 rlag grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 must interpret Much like in [14:27](../14/27.md), Paul is speaking as if **an interpreter** not being present was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that sometimes this is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 14 28 rlag grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 must interpret Much like in [14:27](../14/27.md), Paul is speaking as if **an interpreter** not being present was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that sometimes this is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 14 28 bkc6 figs-explicit διερμηνευτής 1 must interpret Here, much like in [14:26–27](../14/26.md), **interpreter** refers specifically to someone who can interpret a tongue. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the **interpreter** is the person who “interprets” the tongue. Alternate translation: “an interpreter for the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 28 znt9 figs-extrainfo μὴ ᾖ διερμηνευτής 1 must interpret Just as in [14:27](../14/27.md), the **interpreter** could be someone who speaks in tongues or some other person. If possible, you should translate **an interpreter** in such a way that it could refer to one of the people speaking in a tongue or to someone else. Alternate translation: “no one can interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 14 28 u0ia figs-gendernotations σιγάτω…ἑαυτῷ…λαλείτω 1 must interpret Although **him** and **himself** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** and **himself** with nongendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her be silent … let him or speak to himself or herself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -2114,7 +2114,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 11 uoji writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνοι 1 the grace of God that is with me Here, just as in [15:10](../15/10.md), **they** refers back to the “apostles” that Paul mentions in [15:9](../15/09.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this reference by referring explicitly to “apostles” here. Alternate translation: “other apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 15 11 vqai writing-pronouns οὕτως κηρύσσομεν, καὶ οὕτως ἐπιστεύσατε 1 the grace of God that is with me In both places, **in this way** could refer to: (1) the gospel as Paul has outlined it in [15:3–8](../15/03.md). Alternate translation: “it is this gospel that we preach, and it is this gospel that you believed” (2) the “grace” that Paul discussed in the last verse ([15:10](../15/10.md)). Alternate translation: “by God’s grace we preach, and by God’s grace you believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 15 11 z7b6 figs-exclusive κηρύσσομεν 1 the grace of God that is with me Here, **we** refers to **I** and **they** earlier in the sentence. It includes Paul and other apostles but not the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1CO 15 12 h62z grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead? Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 15 12 h62z grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead? Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 15 12 k9rb εἰ…Χριστὸς κηρύσσεται, ὅτι ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγήγερται 1 how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead? Alternate translation: “if it is proclaimed that Christ was raised from the dead” 1CO 15 12 jhia figs-activepassive Χριστὸς κηρύσσεται 1 how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that anyone who preaches the gospel does it, particularly he and other “apostles.” Alternate translation: “we proclaim Christ, specifically” or “believing preachers proclaim Christ, specifically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 12 jbi8 figs-idiom ἐγήγερται 1 raised Here, **raised** refers to someone who died and comes back to life. If your language does not use **raised** to describe coming back to life, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he was restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2249,7 +2249,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 32 ghif figs-infostructure εἰ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ἐθηριομάχησα 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Here, **according to men** could modify: (1) **I fought**. In this case, Paul would be fighting with merely human goals and strategies. Alternate translation: “if I fought according to men against wild beasts” (2) **wild beasts**. In this case, Paul would be identifying the phrase **wild beasts** as a figurative reference to his enemies. Alternate translation: “if I fought wild beasts, speaking,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 15 32 vslh figs-idiom κατὰ ἄνθρωπον 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Here, **according to men** identifies thinking or acting in only human ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **according to men**by using a word or phrase that refers to what people who do not believe say and argue. Alternate translation: “according to what mere humans think” or “according to this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 15 32 rqte figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a nongendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1CO 15 32 wvra grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Paul is speaking as if fighting **wild beasts** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it actually happened. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying did not happen, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “when.” Alternate translation: “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 15 32 wvra grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Paul is speaking as if fighting **wild beasts** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it actually happened. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying did not happen, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “when.” Alternate translation: “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 15 32 lm3v figs-metaphor ἐθηριομάχησα 1 I fought with beasts at Ephesus Here, the **wild beasts** could be: (1) a figurative reference to enemies, who acted like **wild beasts**. In support of this is the fact that, except for this verse, the Bible does not talk about Paul fighting **wild beasts**. Alternate translation: “I fought savage enemies” or “I strove with opponents as fierce as wild beasts” (2) a literal reference to fighting **wild** animals. Alternate translation: “I fought against wild animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 32 maht translate-unknown ἐν Ἐφέσῳ 1 I fought with beasts at Ephesus **Ephesus** was a city on the west coast of what is now Turkey. Paul spent time there soon after leaving Corinth (see [Acts 18:19–21](../act/18/19.md)). After some more travels, he visited **Ephesus** and stayed there for more than two years ( [Acts 19:1–20:1](../act/19/01.md)). Neither story mentions **wild beasts**, and Paul does not clarify which visit he is speaking about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Ephesus** with a word or phrase that more clearly identifies it as a city that Paul visited. Alternate translation: “in Ephesus city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 32 nu0s grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 I fought with beasts at Ephesus Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **the dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim that **the dead are not raised**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If the dead actually are not raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) @@ -2318,7 +2318,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 44 b4dm figs-activepassive σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the body that **is sown** and **raised** rather than focusing on the people who do those actions. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “people” do the sowing and “God” does the raising. Alternate translation: “People sow it as … God raises it as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 44 f93u translate-unknown σῶμα ψυχικόν -1 Here, **natural body** refers to human bodies before they are **raised**. These bodies are those that function in the ways that we can observe right now and that fit with life on earth right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **natural body** with a word or phrase that refers to human bodies as they currently exist on earth before God transforms them. Alternate translation: “a this-worldly body … a this-worldly body” or “a regular body … a regular body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 44 n07f translate-unknown σῶμα πνευματικόν…πνευματικόν 1 Here, **spiritual body** refers to human bodies after they are **raised**. It could specifically refer to: (1) how the **body** is controlled by God’s Spirit and thus fits with how people will live when God renews everything he has created. Alternate translation: “a body fit for the new creation … a body fit for the new creation” or “a body controlled by God’s Spirit … a body controlled by God’s Spirit” (2) how the **body** is made out of “spirit” as opposed to “soul” or “flesh.” Alternate translation: “a body made out of spirit … a body made out of spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 15 44 ktad grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if the **natural body** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “Since” or “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 15 44 ktad grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if the **natural body** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “Since” or “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 15 45 zsb9 grammar-connect-logic-result οὕτως καὶ 1 Here, **So also** introduces the basis for the claim Paul made about the existence of both “natural” and “spiritual” bodies in the last verse ([15:44](../15/44.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **So also** with a word or phrase that introduces evidence or support. Alternate translation: “For” or “As” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 15 45 y5c0 writing-quotations γέγραπται 1 In Paul’s culture, **it is written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text. In this case, the quotation comes from [Genesis 2:7](../gen/02/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces the quotation with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it can be read in Genesis” or “the author of the book of Genesis says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 15 45 f507 figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than focusing on the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that: (1) the scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “Moses has written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2465,7 +2465,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 9 px3c figs-explicit θύρα…ἀνέῳγεν μεγάλη καὶ ἐνεργής 1 a wide door has opened Here Paul speaks as if the **door** opens itself, but he implies that “God” is the one who has opened the door. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how the **door has opened** by clarifying that God opens it. Alternate translation: “God has opened a wide and effective door” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 16 9 wsc0 grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 2 a wide door has opened Here, **and** could introduce: (1) another reason why Paul plans on staying in Ephesus. In other words, he stays both to take advantage of the “open door” and because he needs to resist those who “oppose” him. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a potential reason why Paul would not stay in Ephesus. Paul would be saying that the “open door” is enough reason to stay even though there are **many** who “oppose” him. Alternate translation: “even though” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 16 9 ycte figs-nominaladj πολλοί 1 a wide door has opened Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1CO 16 10 axhg grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν…ἔλθῃ Τιμόθεος 1 see that he is with you unafraid Paul is speaking as if **Timothy** coming was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He has already stated that he has sent Timothy to the Corinthians (see [4:17](../04/17.md)). He uses **if** here to indicate that he is not sure when Timothy will arrive, not that he is unsure if Timothy will arrive at all. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. If possible, include the idea that the time of Timothy’s arrival is uncertain. Alternate translation: “when Timothy eventually comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 16 10 axhg grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν…ἔλθῃ Τιμόθεος 1 see that he is with you unafraid Paul is speaking as if **Timothy** coming was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He has already stated that he has sent Timothy to the Corinthians (see [4:17](../04/17.md)). He uses **if** here to indicate that he is not sure when Timothy will arrive, not that he is unsure if Timothy will arrive at all. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. If possible, include the idea that the time of Timothy’s arrival is uncertain. Alternate translation: “when Timothy eventually comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 16 10 as9e translate-names Τιμόθεος 1 see that he is with you unafraid **Timothy** is the name of a man. He was one of Paul’s closest and most trusted companions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1CO 16 10 b83r figs-go ἔλθῃ 1 see that he is with you unafraid Here Paul is speaking about how Timothy will visit the Corinthians. Use a word in your language that refers to a person arriving where someone lives to visit them. Alternate translation: “visits you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) 1CO 16 10 p6vb figs-idiom βλέπετε ἵνα 1 see that he is with you unafraid Here, **see that** refers to carefully doing something or making sure that something happens. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **see that** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “ensure that” or “be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) diff --git a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv index 07dfb7d185..160bdccba1 100644 --- a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 3 8 utk3 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι νῦν ζῶμεν, ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since you are remaining faithful to the Lord Jesus, we are now refreshed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 3 8 y1vb figs-hyperbole ὅτι νῦν ζῶμεν 1 we live Here, **For now we live** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how thankful he is that the Thessalonians **stand firm** in the Christian faith (See [3:7](../03/07.md)). Paul is not trying to say that he was dead. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows thankfulness. Alternate translation (replace the comma): “O how we are now refreshed!” or “O how we now feel alive!” or “Certainly now we thrive!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1TH 3 8 x4zn figs-idiom ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Here, the term **stand firm** is an idiom meaning “remain faithful.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when you remain faithful to the Lord” or “if you continue unwavering in your relationship with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 3 8 zbyo grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you are remaining faithful to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1TH 3 8 zbyo grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you are remaining faithful to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1TH 3 8 hk91 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Paul speaks of the Thessalonian church as though they were occupying space inside the Lord Jesus. Here, this metaphor, **in the Lord**, could express these ideas: (1) devotion to Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are really devoted to the Lord Jesus” (2) relationship with Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are truly standing firm in your relationship with the Lord Jesus” (3) union with Jesus. Alternate translation: “all of you are firmly united to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 3 8 e3pe figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize his joy for the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternative translation: “indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 3 9 pzq7 figs-rquestion τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν δι’ ὑμᾶς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν. 1 For what thanks are we able to give back to God concerning you, for all the joy in which we rejoice before our God because of you, Paul is using a rhetorical question that continues to the end of [3:10](../03/10.md) in order to emphasize the apostles’ thankful joy for the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness to God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We could not possibly thank God enough for what he has done for you! When we pray to our God, we greatly rejoice because of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 13 r9f8 figs-nominaladj καθὼς καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ 1 so that you may not grieve just as also the rest Paul is using the adjective phrase **the rest** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “like the rest of people” or “in the same way as the rest of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1TH 4 13 f9eq figs-explicit οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα 1 so that you may not grieve just as also the rest Here Paul assumes that his readers will know that **hope** refers to salvation at the final resurrection (See [1:3; 2:19; 4:16; 5:8](../01/03.md)). Previously **hope** was associated with the Second Coming of Christ in [2:19](../02/19.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who possess no confidence of life after death” or “who possess no assurance of life after death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 4 13 puvg figs-abstractnouns οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα 1 so that you may not grieve just as also the rest If your language does not use the abstract noun **hope**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. Alternate translation: “who are not confident of life after death” “who are not sure about life after death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 4 14 j09o grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ γὰρ πιστεύομεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἀπέθανεν καὶ ἀνέστη 1 if we believe Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he actually means that it is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think what the apostles are saying is not certain, then you can translate their words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “As we certainly believe that Jesus died and resurrected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1TH 4 14 j09o grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ γὰρ πιστεύομεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἀπέθανεν καὶ ἀνέστη 1 if we believe Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he actually means that it is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might what the apostles are saying is not certain, then you could translate their words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “As we certainly believe that Jesus died and resurrected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1TH 4 14 hmw4 figs-explicit πιστεύομεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἀπέθανεν καὶ ἀνέστη 1 if we believe Here it is assumed that the Thessalonian church knows the apostolic teaching that **Jesus died and rose again**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we apostles trust―as you already know―that Jesus died and rose again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 4 14 ybz6 figs-exclusive πιστεύομεν 1 if we believe Although **we believe** could be inclusive of the Thessalonian church (and by extension all Christians), it is most likely exclusive, referring to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. The previous use in [4:11](../04/11.md) and subsequent uses (See “we say” in [4:15](../04/15.md)) are clearly referring to the apostles. Here, it mostly likely is a reference to their authoritative teaching. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 4 14 kmk2 grammar-connect-logic-result οὕτως…ὁ Θεὸς 1 rose again This phrase could refer to: (1) result. Alternate translation: “then God” (2) manner. Alternate translation: “this is the way God” or “this is how God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) diff --git a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv index a685c7b21b..e019e89d0d 100644 --- a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 1 3 o6v9 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 3-12, Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica and prays for them. A heading for this section might be, “Thanks and Prayers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 2TH 1 3 m6z5 εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν…πάντοτε 1 General Information: Paul is expressing here that he has a moral obligation to God to give thanks for the believers in Thessalonica. Use a natural expression for this in your language. Alternate translation: “We are bound always to thank” or “We can do no other than to thank” or “We must give thanks continually to” 2TH 1 3 ea59 figs-hyperbole εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε 1 We ought always to give thanks to God Paul uses **always** as a generalization meaning “often” or “regularly.” Alternate translation: “We should often give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -2TH 1 3 o01t figs-explicit εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί 1 If your readers might misunderstand his meaning and think that Paul is expressing an obligation only and that he does not actually pray for the Thessalonians, you could express the reality explicitly. Alternate translation: “We always thank God for you, brothers, as we ought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2TH 1 3 o01t figs-explicit εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί 1 If your readers might think that Paul is expressing an obligation only and that he does not actually pray for the Thessalonians, you could express the reality explicitly. Alternate translation: “We always thank God for you, brothers, as we ought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 1 3 h6t9 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a nonfigurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2TH 1 3 ezaf writing-pronouns καθὼς ἄξιόν ἐστιν 1 If it is difficult to express **just as it is fitting** in your language or if it is unclear what **it** refers to, consider starting a new sentence here to state it clearly. Alternate translation: “When we give thanks for you we are doing the right thing” or “Giving thanks for you is right for us to be doing” or “…is the right thing to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2TH 1 3 emu9 figs-abstractnouns ὑπεραυξάνει ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express this idea as a verb. Alternate translation: “you believe in Christ more and more” or “you increasingly trust in Christ” or “you rely on Christ more each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 1 5 rs3b figs-explicit ἔνδειγμα τῆς δικαίας κρίσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς 1 The **evidence** that Paul is referring to here is the faithful endurance of the Thessalonian believers while suffering persecution, which he mentioned in verse 4. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may also be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Your endurance while suffering is a clear indication of God’s righteous judgment, that he considers you worthy” or “Your faithfulness through persecution shows that God is just and right to consider you worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 1 5 dad9 figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 for you to be considered worthy of the kingdom of God You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God will consider you worthy to be part of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 5 xm2g figs-explicit ὑπὲρ ἧς καὶ πάσχετε 1 Here, **also** could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers are suffering for the kingdom of God as well as being counted worthy of it. Alternate translation: “being a part of which is also the reason that you are suffering” (2) the Thessalonian believers are suffering along with other believers. Alternate translation: “which is why you are going through sufferings along with many others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TH 1 6 cxx1 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ 1 if indeed it is righteous for God Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is just” or “for God is certainly right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +2TH 1 6 cxx1 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ 1 if indeed it is righteous for God Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is just” or “for God is certainly right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 2TH 1 6 id3i figs-metaphor παρὰ Θεῷ, ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 for God to return affliction to those who are afflicting you Here, **to return** means to cause someone to experience the same thing that they did to someone else as though the same action were bouncing back onto the people who did that action. Use a natural expression for this kind of reciprocal action. Alternate translation: “for God to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “for God to pay back those who are afflicting you” “for God to do the same to those who are afflicting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 1 6 zemk figs-abstractnouns ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “to trouble those who are troubling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TH 1 7 hxy2 figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμῖν…ἄνεσιν 1 and relief to you The words **and relief to you** continue the description of what God is right “to return” to people (verse 6). If this would not be understood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and it is righteous for God to give relief to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 2 2 k4dk figs-ellipsis ὡς ὅτι 1 as if that Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “that talks as if” or “that falsely claims that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2TH 2 2 ib6m ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the day of the Lord Here, **the day of the Lord** refers to the time when Jesus will come back to the earth for all believers. 2TH 2 3 l9c5 μή τις ὑμᾶς ἐξαπατήσῃ κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “Do not permit anyone to fool you” or “Do not believe at all the wrong words that people are telling you about this” -2TH 2 3 ej66 figs-ellipsis ὅτι ἐὰν μὴ ἔλθῃ ἡ ἀποστασία πρῶτον 1 it may not come Here, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for the day of the Lord will not come unless the apostacy comes first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +2TH 2 3 ej66 figs-ellipsis ὅτι ἐὰν μὴ ἔλθῃ ἡ ἀποστασία πρῶτον 1 it may not come Here, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for the day of the Lord will not come unless the apostacy comes first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2TH 2 3 y7ch figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀποστασία 1 the apostacy Here, **the apostacy** refers to a future time when many people will turn away from God. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express it in another way. Alternate translation: “the time when many people will rebel against God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TH 2 3 e86v figs-activepassive ἀποκαλυφθῇ ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 the man of lawlessness may be revealed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the man of lawlessness arrives” or “the man of lawlessness makes himself known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 2 3 jsyj figs-possession ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a man who is characterized by lawlessness. By this Paul means that this man will oppose all of God’s commandments and instructions. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless man” or “the man who opposes God’s rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -149,12 +149,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 3 1 v8k2 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **us** refers to Paul and his companions. If you have exclusive and inclusive first person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 2TH 3 1 r54v figs-metaphor τρέχῃ 1 so that the word of the Lord might run and might be glorified, just as also with you Paul speaks of God’s **word** spreading as if it were running from place to place. He is comparing the rapid spread of God’s word to a person who takes good news to others. Alternate translation: “might spread rapidly” or “might be heard by many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 3 1 yvkm figs-activepassive καὶ δοξάζηται 1 so that the word of the Lord might run and might be glorified, just as also with you You can state this in active form, if the passive construction is not natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and that many people would honor it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TH 3 1 egho figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “just as also happened with you” or “which is exactly what you did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +2TH 3 1 egho figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “just as also happened with you” or “which is exactly what you did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2TH 3 2 xg2h figs-activepassive ῥυσθῶμεν 1 we might be rescued You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may save us” or “God may rescue us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 3 2 h11p figs-doublet ἀτόπων καὶ πονηρῶν 1 These two terms mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize the amount of evil. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “very wicked men” or “many wicked men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2TH 3 2 p1ct figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ πάντων ἡ πίστις 1 for not everyone has faith The phrase **not everyone** is a negative understatement that emphasizes how rare faith is. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “for only some people believe in the Lord” or “for people who believe in Jesus are few” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 2TH 3 2 appf figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “believes in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2TH 3 3 yx9g figs-explicit ὃς στηρίξει 1 who will strengthen The word **strengthen** here refers to spiritual strength, not physical strength. If your readers might misunderstand this, it can be made clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “who will strengthen you spiritually” or “who will make you inwardly strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2TH 3 3 yx9g figs-explicit ὃς στηρίξει 1 who will strengthen The word **strengthen** here refers to spiritual strength, not physical strength. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “who will strengthen you spiritually” or “who will make you inwardly strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 3 3 p91k τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 the evil one This could mean: (1) the evil being Satan. Alternate translation: “Satan” or (2) evil in general. Alternate translation: “evil” 2TH 3 4 xk85 figs-nominaladj πεποίθαμεν δὲ 1 we are confident The phrase **We are also confident** may be confusing in some languages. If that is the case in your language, you could translate this as a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “We also have faith” or “We also trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 2TH 3 4 w79e figs-metaphor πεποίθαμεν δὲ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) Paul has confidence in the Thessalonian believers because of the close relationship that they have with the Lord Jesus. In this case, Paul is speaking of this relationship as if they were inside the Lord Jesus. Alternative translation: “Because you are united to the Lord, we are also confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) Paul has confidence in the Lord Jesus, that he will cause them to do what is right. Alternative translation: “Because we trust in the Lord Jesus to enable you, we are also confident” diff --git a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv index 7c3852e94b..6388672b41 100644 --- a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ PHM 1 16 bynb ὑπὲρ δοῦλον 1 Alternate translation: “more valuab PHM 1 16 f8tz figs-metaphor ἀδελφὸν 1 a beloved brother Here, **brother** is a metaphor for a fellow believer. Alternative translation, “spiritual brother” or “brother in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHM 1 16 qxi0 ἀγαπητόν 1 Alternate translation: “dear” or “precious” PHM 1 16 scj1 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 in the Lord Alternate translation: “in the fellowship of brotherhood through Jesus” or “in the fellowship of believers in the Lord” -PHM 1 17 e1j2 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…με ἔχεις κοινωνόν 1 if you have me as a partner Paul is writing in a way that makes it seem as though it is possible that Philemon does not consider that Paul is his partner, but he knows that Philemon does consider Paul to be his partner. This is a way of getting Philemon to agree on one thing (that Paul is a partner) so that he will agree to the other thing (to receive Onesimus). If your language does not state something as uncertain if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have me as a partner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +PHM 1 17 e1j2 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…με ἔχεις κοινωνόν 1 if you have me as a partner Paul is writing in a way that makes it seem as though it is possible that Philemon does not consider that Paul is his partner, but he knows that Philemon does consider Paul to be his partner. This is a way of getting Philemon to agree on one thing (that Paul is a partner) so that he will agree to the other thing (to receive Onesimus). If your language does not state something as uncertain if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have me as a partner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) PHM 1 17 e0es grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 **Therefore** means that what came before this word is the reason for what comes after it. It may be that Paul intends for everything that came before to be the reason, because this word also indicates that Paul is now coming to the main point of the letter. Use a natural method in your language to indicate this transition. Alternate translation: “Because of all of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) PHM 1 17 d56r figs-ellipsis προσλαβοῦ αὐτὸν ὡς ἐμέ. 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words here that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “receive him just as you would receive me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) PHM 1 18 nq4j grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δέ τι ἠδίκησέν σε ἢ ὀφείλει 1 Onesimus certainly did wrong to Philemon by running away, and he probably also stole some of Philemon’s property. But Paul is stating these things as uncertain in order to be polite. If your language does not use a conditional statement in this way, then use a more natural way to state this. Alternate translation: “But whatever he has taken or whatever wrong he has done to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 0a86a62faf..06b13ac576 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 5 xsp2 figs-explicit ἐν καιρῷ ἐσχάτῳ 1 Here, **the last time** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when Jesus returns to the world to judge everyone and vindicate those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the last time, when Jesus returns and judges everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 6 p1ta writing-pronouns ἐν ᾧ 1 Here, **this** could refer to: (1) the “last time” referred to at the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation: “About this last time” (2) everything described in [verses 3–5](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “In all of this that I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1PE 1 6 hy8d grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν ᾧ ἀγαλλιᾶσθε 1 In this you greatly rejoice **In** here introduces the reason why Peter’s readers rejoice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “On account of this you greatly rejoice” or “Because of this you greatly rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1PE 1 6 dtvb grammar-connect-condition-fact ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary, and it is, to have been distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1PE 1 6 dtvb grammar-connect-condition-fact ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary, and it is, to have been distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1PE 1 6 a2bq figs-activepassive ὀλίγον ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες ἐν ποικίλοις πειρασμοῖς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary for various trials to distress you a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 1 7 vvp1 figs-metaphor τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως…διὰ πυρὸς δὲ δοκιμαζομένου 1 so that the proof of your faith Here Peter speaks of **faith**, as if it were gold that is refined by passing it through **fire**. He also uses **fire** to refer to the hardships that test how well believers trust in Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the genuineness of your faith … but being tested by hardships the way fire tests gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 7 ct3n figs-abstractnouns τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως 1 the proof of your faith If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **genuineness** and **faith**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the fact that you genuinely believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 16 e6el writing-quotations γέγραπται 1 Here Peter uses **it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Leviticus 11:44](../lev/11/44.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1PE 1 16 tt52 figs-declarative ἅγιοι ἔσεσθε 1 Peter quotes God using a future statement to give a command. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “You must be holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) 1PE 1 16 s8kz figs-123person ὅτι ἐγὼ ἅγιος 1 You will be holy, because I am holy In this quotation from the Old Testament, **I** refers to God. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because I, God, am holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -1PE 1 17 x0xl grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἐπικαλεῖσθε 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because you call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1PE 1 17 x0xl grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἐπικαλεῖσθε 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because you call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1PE 1 17 c53b figs-explicit τὸν ἀπροσωπολήμπτως κρίνοντα 1 This phrase refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who judges impartially” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 17 s6gv figs-metaphor τὸν τῆς παροικίας ὑμῶν χρόνον 1 conduct yourselves in fear during the time of your journey Here Peter speaks of his readers as if they were people living in a foreign land far away from their homes. Like people living away from home, so are Christians living away from their home in heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “during the time that you are living away from your true home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 18 pcm5 figs-infostructure οὐ φθαρτοῖς, ἀργυρίῳ ἢ χρυσίῳ, ἐλυτρώθητε ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ὑμῶν ἀναστροφῆς πατροπαραδότου 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “you have been redeemed from your futile behavior handed down from your fathers, not with perishable things, with silver or with gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 22 e9wr figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας, ἀλλήλους ἀγαπήσατε ἐκτενῶς 1 love one another earnestly from a pure heart Peter uses **heart** here to refer to a person’s thoughts or emotions. The word **from** indicates that the **heart** must be the source of the **love** that Peter is telling his readers to have. Therefore, this phrase has a similar meaning to the word “sincere” in the previous clause. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “love one another earnestly based on sincere thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 1 23 k79f figs-metaphor ἀναγεγεννημένοι 1 See how you translated **born again** in [verse 3](../01/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 23 w4v3 figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐκ σπορᾶς φθαρτῆς 1 having been born again, not from perishable seed, but from imperishable The word **seed** usually refers to either the seed of a plant or the sperm cell of a man, which is used to produce a baby. However, here Peter uses **seed** as a metaphor. It could refer to: (1) the **word of God** mentioned later in the verse. In this case, Peter is saying what the **word of God** is not. Alternate translation: “not by means of a human message that can perish” (2) physical human birth, in which case the meaning is similar to the idea expressed in [John 1:13](../jhn/01/13.md). Alternate translation: “not by means of mortal physical birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 1 23 nh9r figs-ellipsis ἀφθάρτου 1 from imperishable Peter is leaving out a word that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “from imperishable seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 1 23 nh9r figs-ellipsis ἀφθάρτου 1 from imperishable Peter is leaving out a word that a phrase would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “from imperishable seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 1 23 tjq9 figs-metonymy λόγου ζῶντος Θεοῦ, καὶ μένοντος 1 through the living and enduring word of God Here Peter uses **word** to describe the gospel message that came from God and was proclaimed to Peter’s readers by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s living and enduring message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 1 23 pkpl figs-doublet ζῶντος…καὶ μένοντος 1 Here, **living** and **enduring** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that God’s word is permanent. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “perpetually enduring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 1 24 kyc5 writing-quotations διότι 1 **For** here introduces a quotation of some phrases from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 40:6–8](../isa/40/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “It is as Isaiah wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) @@ -140,13 +140,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 1 inct figs-declarative ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς 1 This clause indicates a command in addition to the command to “long for pure spiritual milk” that occurs next in the verse. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “put aside all evil and all deceit and hypocrisies and envies and all slanders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) 1PE 2 1 g65y figs-metaphor ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς 1 having put aside all evil, and all deceit and hypocrisy and envy, and all slander Peter speaks of these sinful actions as if they were objects that people could **put aside** the way people remove dirty clothing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having stopped being evil or being deceptive or being hypocritical or being envious or speaking slander” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 1 r853 figs-abstractnouns ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil**, **deceit**, **hypocrisies**, **envies**, or **slanders**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “having put aside every kind of evil and all deceitful, hypocritical, deceptive, and slanderous acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 2 2 y6fv figs-simile ὡς ἀρτιγέννητα βρέφη τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα ἐπιποθήσατε 1 As newborn infants, long for pure spiritual milk The point of this comparison is that Peter wanted his readers to desire knowledge of God’s word just as **newborn babies** desire milk. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Just as babies long for their mother’s milk, so you must long for the pure rational milk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +1PE 2 2 y6fv figs-simile ὡς ἀρτιγέννητα βρέφη τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα ἐπιποθήσατε 1 As newborn infants, long for pure spiritual milk The point of this comparison is that Peter wanted his readers to desire knowledge of God’s word just as **newborn babies** desire milk. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Just as babies long for their mother’s milk, so you must long for the pure rational milk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 2 2 rm71 ἐπιποθήσατε 1 long for Alternate translation: “desire intensely” or “yearn for” 1PE 2 2 fn81 figs-metaphor τὸ λογικὸν ἄδολον γάλα 1 pure spiritual milk The word translated as **rational** could also be translated “pertaining to the word”; it refers to the word of God. Peter speaks of the word of God as if it were **rational milk** that nourishes children. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s pure word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 2 ypy6 figs-metaphor αὐξηθῆτε 1 you may grow up Peter speaks of believers advancing in the knowledge of God and faithfulness to him as if they were children growing up. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you may mature in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 2 vg76 figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 to salvation If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “until you are saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 2 2 wmw2 figs-explicit εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 Here, **salvation** refers to when Jesus returns and God completes the **salvation** of his people. Peter also uses this meaning for **salvation** in [1:5](../01/05.md). See how you translated **salvation** there. Alternate translation: “until God saves you completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 2 3 uja9 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐγεύσασθε 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have tasted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1PE 2 3 uja9 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐγεύσασθε 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have tasted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1PE 2 3 tui9 figs-metaphor εἰ ἐγεύσασθε 1 if you have tasted that the Lord is kind Peter uses **tasted** to refer to personally experiencing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if you have experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 3 hruw figs-quotemarks ἐγεύσασθε ὅτι χρηστὸς ὁ Κύριος 1 This clause is a paraphrase of [Psalm 34:8](../psa/34/08.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 2 4 n5pm figs-explicit πρὸς ὃν προσερχόμενοι 1 Here, **coming** could indicate: (1) a factual statement, as in the UST. (2) a command, in which case “being built up” in the next verse would also be a command. Alternate translation: “Come to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 6 lrxm figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ 1 The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. God uses them together to emphasize the truth of this statement. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1PE 2 7 ze1c figs-explicit ἡ τιμὴ 1 Here, **this honor** refers to the statement in the previous verse that people who believe in Jesus will “certainly not be ashamed.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this honor of never being ashamed is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 7 rdhk figs-explicit ἡ τιμὴ 1 The phrase translated **this honor** could also be translated as “precious,” in which case it would refer to the “cornerstone” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “he is precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 2 7 sj13 figs-ellipsis ἀπιστοῦσιν δὲ 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But to those who do not believe, God says in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 2 7 sj13 figs-ellipsis ἀπιστοῦσιν δὲ 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But to those who do not believe, God says in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 2 7 hext figs-quotemarks λίθος ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 118:22](../psa/118/22.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 2 7 uu3j figs-metaphor λίθος ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες 1 The stone that was rejected by … has become the head of the corner The author uses **stone** to refer to the Messiah, and he uses **builders** to refer to those who **rejected** Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “The Messiah who was rejected just like builders reject a stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 7 ql12 figs-metaphor κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the head of the corner This phrase has the same meaning as “cornerstone” in the previous verse. It refers to the most important stone in a building. Here it refers specifically to the Messiah. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Messiah, who is like a cornerstone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 14 bxm9 figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἐκδίκησιν κακοποιῶν, ἔπαινον δὲ ἀγαθοποιῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **punishment** and **praise**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to punish evildoers and praise those who do good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 2 15 mh6s figs-infostructure ἀγαθοποιοῦντας φιμοῦν τὴν τῶν ἀφρόνων ἀνθρώπων ἀγνωσίαν 1 doing good to silence the ignorant talk of foolish people If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “to silence the ignorance of foolish people by doing good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1PE 2 15 nzwv figs-abstractnouns ἀγαθοποιοῦντας φιμοῦν τὴν τῶν ἀφρόνων ἀνθρώπων ἀγνωσίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **ignorance**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “doing good to silence the ignorant things that foolish people are saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 2 16 zqe3 figs-ellipsis ὡς ἐλεύθεροι 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. These words could be: (1) the command to submit to authorities stated in [verse 13](../02/13.md). Alternate translation: “submit as free people” (2) an implied imperative verb. Alternate translation: “act as free people” or “live as free people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 2 16 zqe3 figs-ellipsis ὡς ἐλεύθεροι 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. These words could be: (1) the command to submit to authorities stated in [verse 13](../02/13.md). Alternate translation: “submit as free people” (2) an implied imperative verb. Alternate translation: “act as free people” or “live as free people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 2 16 y9pg figs-metaphor ὡς ἐπικάλυμμα…τῆς κακίας 1 as a covering for wickedness Here, **covering** could refer to: (1) something to prevent people from knowing about one’s evil deeds. Alternate translation: “as a way to prevent others from seeing your evil” (2) an excuse or pretext to do evil deeds. Alternate translation: “as an excuse to do evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 17 gwy8 figs-metaphor τὴν ἀδελφότητα 1 the brotherhood Here, **brotherhood** refers to all Christian believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the community of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 18 w2nc 0 General Information: Peter begins to speak specifically to people who were slaves who worked in people’s houses. @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 1 wp5p figs-metonymy τινες ἀπειθοῦσιν τῷ λόγῳ 1 some are disobedient to the word Here, **being disobedient to the word** could refer to: (1) refusing to believe the gospel message, as in [2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “some do not believe the message about Jesus” (2) disobeying the commands God gave in his word. Alternate translation: “some do not obey what God commands in his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 1 kbis figs-activepassive κερδηθήσονται 1 they will be won If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will win them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 3 1 bs56 figs-idiom κερδηθήσονται 1 they will be won Here, **won** is an idiom that means that the unbelieving husbands will become believers in Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they will be persuaded to believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1PE 3 1 qp4q figs-ellipsis ἄνευ λόγου 1 without a word Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “without you saying a word.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 3 1 qp4q figs-ellipsis ἄνευ λόγου 1 without a word Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “without you saying a word.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 3 1 b56u figs-metonymy ἄνευ λόγου 1 Here, **word** refers to anything the wives might say to their husbands about the gospel message. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without a word about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 2 rzrl grammar-connect-logic-result ἐποπτεύσαντες 1 This phrase indicates the reason why the unbelieving husbands would become believers in Jesus. These husbands became believers because they **observed** how their wives behaved. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because they observed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1PE 3 2 zft4 figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐν φόβῳ ἁγνὴν ἀναστροφὴν ὑμῶν 1 having seen your pure behavior with respect If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **behavior**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you behave purely and with fear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 8 f5y7 ὁμόφρονες 1 be likeminded Alternate translation: “have the same opinion and be” or “have the same attitude and be” 1PE 3 8 tzgc figs-gendernotations φιλάδελφοι 1 Although **brothers** is masculine, Peter is using the phrase **loving as brothers** in a generic sense to refer to the kind of love that all believers should have for other believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “loving as fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1PE 3 9 z5u3 figs-metaphor μὴ ἀποδιδόντες κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ, ἢ λοιδορίαν ἀντὶ λοιδορίας 1 Do not pay back evil in exchange for evil or insult in exchange for insult Peter uses **paying back** to refer to responding to the actions of another person as if one was returning money to that person for those actions. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not doing evil to someone who does evil to you or insulting someone who insults you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 9 t6il figs-ellipsis εὐλογοῦντες 1 blessing Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “blessing those who do evil to you or insult you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 3 9 t6il figs-ellipsis εὐλογοῦντες 1 blessing Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “blessing those who do evil to you or insult you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 3 9 w5df figs-activepassive εἰς τοῦτο ἐκλήθητε 1 to this you were called If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God called you to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 3 9 wx2r figs-explicit εἰς τοῦτο ἐκλήθητε, ἵνα 1 Here, **this** could refer to: (1) **blessing** earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “you were called to bless so that” (2) **inherit a blessing** later in the verse “to this you were called so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 3 9 n3xc figs-metaphor ἵνα εὐλογίαν κληρονομήσητε 1 so that you might inherit a blessing Peter speaks of experiencing God’s **blessing** as if one is receiving an inheritance. If this might confuse your readers, you could express it plainly. Alternate translation: “so that you might experience God’s blessing as your permanent possession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -338,10 +338,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 18 h6v4 figs-activepassive ζῳοποιηθεὶς…πνεύματι 1 having been made alive in the spirit If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God’s spirit having made him alive” or “God having made him alive in the spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 3 18 n7nh figs-explicit ζῳοποιηθεὶς…πνεύματι 1 in the spirit Here, **the spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which Jesus was made alive. Alternate translation: “having been made him alive by the Spirit” (2) Jesus’ spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is in contrast to the physical realm referred to with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “having been made alive spiritually” or “having been made alive in the spiritual realm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 3 19 hp82 figs-explicit ἐν ᾧ 1 in which Here, **which** refers to “the spirit” in the previous verse. As in the previous verse, this could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit” (2) Jesus’ spiritual existence. Alternate translation: “in the spiritual realm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 3 19 ewuu figs-ellipsis ἐκήρυξεν 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. This phrase could mean: (1) Jesus proclaimed God’s victory over sin and death, which he accomplished through his death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “he proclaimed God’s victory” (2) Jesus preached the gospel to wicked people indirectly through the preaching of Noah during the time before the great flood. This interpretation is less likely to be correct, because it would mean that Noah was actually the one preaching and Peter does not mention Noah preaching or Jesus’ pre-incarnate existence anywhere in this letter. Alternate translation: “he preached the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 3 19 ewuu figs-ellipsis ἐκήρυξεν 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. This phrase could mean: (1) Jesus proclaimed God’s victory over sin and death, which he accomplished through his death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “he proclaimed God’s victory” (2) Jesus preached the gospel to wicked people indirectly through the preaching of Noah during the time before the great flood. This interpretation is less likely to be correct, because it would mean that Noah was actually the one preaching and Peter does not mention Noah preaching or Jesus’ pre-incarnate existence anywhere in this letter. Alternate translation: “he preached the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 3 19 ez3d figs-explicit τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν 1 to the spirits in prison Here, **spirits** could refer to: (1) evil spirits whom God imprisoned because of what they did before the flood that occurred in Noah’s time (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../jud/01/06.md); [Genesis 6:1–4](../gen/06/01.md)), as in the UST. (2) the spirits of people who died during the flood that occurred in Noah’s time. This interpretation is a less likely to be correct because Peter never refers to people as **spirits**, but rather “souls,” as in the next verse. Alternate translation: “to those people who had died and were in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 3 19 zpyr figs-metaphor ἐν φυλακῇ 1 Here Peter uses **prison** as a metaphor. It could refer to: (1) a place where God imprisoned certain evil spirits whom he will judge when he judges the whole world (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../jud/01/06.md)). Alternate translation: “whom God had imprisoned to await judgment” (2) the place where sinful people go when they die. Alternate translation: “in hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 20 qxah figs-ellipsis ἀπειθήσασίν 1 when the patience of God was waiting Peter is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “having disobeyed God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 3 20 qxah figs-ellipsis ἀπειθήσασίν 1 when the patience of God was waiting Peter is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “having disobeyed God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 3 20 s7qm figs-metonymy ἡ τοῦ Θεοῦ μακροθυμία 1 the patience of God Peter uses **patience of God** to refer to God himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 20 yyth figs-metonymy ἐν ἡμέραις Νῶε 1 Here Peter uses **days of Noah** to refer to the time period when Noah was alive. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the time of Noah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 20 c6mi figs-activepassive κατασκευαζομένης κιβωτοῦ 1 in the days of Noah, while an ark was being constructed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when Noah was constructing an ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -398,8 +398,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 4 10 xvj3 figs-explicit ἕκαστος καθὼς ἔλαβεν χάρισμα 1 Just as each one has received a gift Here, **gift** refers to special spiritual abilities that God gives to believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “just as each one has received a special spiritual ability from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 10 a30t figs-metaphor ὡς καλοὶ οἰκονόμοι ποικίλης χάριτος Θεοῦ 1 Peter uses **stewards** to refer to Christians using spiritual abilities from God to serve other believers as if they were managing resources for a boss. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “as those managing well the diverse grace of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 4 10 smyw figs-possession ποικίλης χάριτος Θεοῦ 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that is given by God. The word **grace** refers to the various spiritual gifts that God graciously gives believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the diverse, gracious gifts from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1PE 4 11 b81x figs-ellipsis εἴ τις λαλεῖ, ὡς λόγια Θεοῦ 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if anyone speaks, let him speak as if he is speaking the words of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1PE 4 11 vs2d figs-ellipsis εἴ τις διακονεῖ, ὡς ἐξ ἰσχύος ἧς χορηγεῖ ὁ Θεός 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if anyone serves others, let him serve others as if he were serving them with the strength that God supplies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 4 11 b81x figs-ellipsis εἴ τις λαλεῖ, ὡς λόγια Θεοῦ 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if anyone speaks, let him speak as if he is speaking the words of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 4 11 vs2d figs-ellipsis εἴ τις διακονεῖ, ὡς ἐξ ἰσχύος ἧς χορηγεῖ ὁ Θεός 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “if anyone serves others, let him serve others as if he were serving them with the strength that God supplies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 4 11 ir6x figs-activepassive δοξάζηται ὁ Θεὸς 1 so that in all God may be glorified If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you might glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 4 11 wq9e figs-abstractnouns ᾧ ἐστιν ἡ δόξα καὶ τὸ κράτος 1 may be glorified If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory** and **power**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “may he be recognized as glorious and powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 4 12 vw9s figs-metaphor τῇ ἐν ὑμῖν πυρώσει 1 the fiery trial among you that is happening for a testing to you Peter refers to suffering Christians as if they were gold being refined by being passed through a fire. In the same way that fire refines gold, trials test and strengthen a Christian’s faith. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a simile. Alternate translation: “the trial you are experiencing that is refining you like gold is refined in fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 4 16 xm8z figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ 1 in this name Here, **this name** refers to the title “Christian” mentioned earlier in the verse. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he bears the name ‘Christian’” or “because people have recognized him as a Christian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 17 nawr figs-abstractnouns ὁ καιρὸς τοῦ ἄρξασθαι τὸ κρίμα ἀπὸ τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgment**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “it is time for God to begin judging the household of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 4 17 x9np figs-metaphor τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the household of God Here Peter uses **household** to refer to all believers as if they were a family that belongs to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “those who belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 4 17 v74q figs-ellipsis εἰ δὲ πρῶτον ἀφ’ ἡμῶν 1 the household of God Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but if it is time for judgment to begin first with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 4 17 v74q figs-ellipsis εἰ δὲ πρῶτον ἀφ’ ἡμῶν 1 the household of God Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the the previous clause. Alternate translation: “but if it is time for judgment to begin first with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 4 17 phx3 figs-exclusive ἀφ’ ἡμῶν 1 the household of God When Peter says **us**, he is speaking of himself and his readers, so **us** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1PE 4 17 c8ke figs-rquestion τί τὸ τέλος τῶν ἀπειθούντων τῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγελίῳ? 1 but if first with us, what will be the end of those disobeying the gospel of God? Peter is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize that God’s judgment will be more severe for people who reject the gospel than for those who believe it. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “how terrible will be the end of the ones disobeying the gospel of God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1PE 4 17 e5fn figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 but if first with us, what will be the end of those disobeying the gospel of God? Here, **end** refers to the final result of the lives of people who do not believe in Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the final result” or “the outcome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -441,7 +441,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 5 1 yb3l figs-explicit τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης 1 of the glory that is about to be revealed The phrase **the glory that is about to be revealed** refers to Christ’s glorious return to earth in the future. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the glory that is about to be revealed when Christ returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 5 2 f63v figs-metaphor ποιμάνατε τὸ…ποίμνιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Shepherd the flock of God Here Peter uses **Shepherd** to refer to leading and taking care of believers, and he uses **flock** to refer to those believers. Elders who lead assemblies of believers should take care of those believers like shepherds take care of their sheep. Since the shepherd and sheep metaphors are important metaphors in the Bible, you should keep the metaphors in your translation or use similes. Alternate translation: “Take care of God’s people as if they were a flock of sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 2 dvai figs-abstractnouns ἐπισκοποῦντες μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **oversight** and **compulsion**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “supervising—not because you must do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 5 2 zfei figs-ellipsis ἐπισκοποῦντες μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “exercising oversight over them—not doing this under compulsion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 5 2 zfei figs-ellipsis ἐπισκοποῦντες μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “exercising oversight over them—not doing this under compulsion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 5 2 k4dk figs-doublet μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς, ἀλλὰ ἑκουσίως 1 The phrases **not under compulsion** and **willingly** mean the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Peter wants church leaders to voluntarily take care of believers. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “with complete willingness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 5 2 cp7u figs-explicit κατὰ Θεόν 1 This phrase refers to acting according to God’s will or requirements. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to God’s will” or “as God wants you to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 5 2 c6qf figs-doublet μηδὲ αἰσχροκερδῶς, ἀλλὰ προθύμως 1 The phrases **not greedily** and **eagerly** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Peter wants church leaders to eagerly take care of believers. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “with complete eagerness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 5 8 wbb5 figs-doublet νήψατε, γρηγορήσατε 1 Be sober The words translated as **sober** and **watchful** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses them to emphasize that believers need to be alert since the devil wants to destroy them. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Be completely alert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 5 8 k9nt figs-metaphor νήψατε 1 Be sober See how you translated **sober** in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 8 tl7i figs-simile ὡς λέων ὠρυόμενος περιπατεῖ, ζητῶν τινα καταπιεῖν 1 the devil, is walking around like a roaring lion, seeking someone to devour Peter speaks of **the devil** as if he were a **roaring lion** who wants to **devour** people. Just as a hungry lion devours its prey, the devil is **seeking** to destroy the faith of believers. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is trying to find ways to destroy the faith of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -1PE 5 9 v4t5 figs-ellipsis στερεοὶ τῇ πίστει 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “being firm in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1PE 5 9 v4t5 figs-ellipsis στερεοὶ τῇ πίστει 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “being firm in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 5 9 vwtc figs-abstractnouns τῇ πίστει 1 Here, **the faith** could refer to: (1) a person’s trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “in the faith that you have” (2) the Christian faith in general. Alternate translation: “in the Christian faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 5 9 tusy figs-abstractnouns τὰ αὐτὰ τῶν παθημάτων…ἐπιτελεῖσθαι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sufferings**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that people are suffering in the same ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 5 9 uk06 figs-activepassive τὰ αὐτὰ τῶν παθημάτων…ἐπιτελεῖσθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the same kind of sufferings are occurring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 29e9dacab6..e4f1df00d7 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 3 jvh9 figs-personification τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 Peter speaks of **condemnation** and **destruction** as if they are people who can be **idle** or **sleep**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “condemnation from long ago is not ineffective, and their destruction is not delayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2PE 2 3 c57u figs-abstractnouns οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 their condemnation has not been idle, and their destruction is not asleep If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns “condemnation” and “destruction” by stating the ideas behind them with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “they are not idly condemned from long ago, and they will not be destroyed too late” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 4 k2g4 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** indicates here that Peter is giving the reason for the result he implicitly described in the previous verse. He is saying why the destruction of the false teachers is certain. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -2PE 2 4 s115 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **if** indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since God did not spare the angels who had sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +2PE 2 4 s115 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **if** indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since God did not spare the angels who had sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 2PE 2 4 pr13 οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 did not spare Here, **spare** means “to refrain from punishing.” Alternate translation: “did not refrain from punishing” 2PE 2 4 dzi2 figs-distinguish ἀγγέλων ἁμαρτησάντων 1 Peter uses **who had sinned** to distinguish the angels who were punished by God from those that were not. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 2PE 2 4 xwxn translate-textvariants σειροῖς ζόφου 1 Some of the best ancient manuscripts read “pits” instead of “chains.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading in the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 4 plhp figs-abstractnouns εἰς κρίσιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **judgment** by translating it with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “to be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 4 e0ue figs-explicit εἰς κρίσιν τηρουμένους 1 This phrase refers to the sinful angels mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those sinful angels who are being kept for judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 4 ppvc figs-activepassive εἰς κρίσιν τηρουμένους 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active verbal form and you can indicate who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “those whom God is keeping for judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2PE 2 5 zx4k grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the second condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +2PE 2 5 zx4k grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the second condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 2PE 2 5 hpv7 figs-metonymy ἀρχαίου κόσμου οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 he did not spare the ancient world Here, **world** refers to the people who lived in it. Alternate translation: “he did not spare the people who lived in the ancient times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2PE 2 5 f000 οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 As in [2:4](../02/04.md), the word **spare** here means “to refrain from punishing.” Alternate translation: “did not refrain from punishing” 2PE 2 5 t2w9 writing-pronouns οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God did not spare” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 5 xy9u figs-possession δικαιοσύνης κήρυκα 1 Peter could be using the possessive form to refer to: (1) a preacher who is characterized by righteousness. Alternate translation: “a preacher who is righteous” (2) a preacher who tells others to live righteously. Alternate translation: “one who urged others to live righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2PE 2 5 enbs κατακλυσμὸν κόσμῳ ἀσεβῶν ἐπάξας 1 This clause indicates when God protected Noah and his other seven family members, when he brought a flood upon the world, as it is translated in the UST. 2PE 2 5 z814 figs-possession κόσμῳ ἀσεβῶν 1 Peter could be using the possessive form to refer to: (1) the human content of the ancient world. Alternate translation: “the world that contained ungodly people” (2) the world as being characterized by ungodliness. Alternate translation: “the ungodly world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -2PE 2 6 xhcb grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the third condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +2PE 2 6 xhcb grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the third condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 2PE 2 6 ap1j figs-infostructure καὶ πόλεις Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας τεφρώσας καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν 1 If it would be natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “and he condemned the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to destruction, having reduced them to ashes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 2PE 2 6 gp3e πόλεις Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας τεφρώσας 1 having reduced the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to ashes This phrase indicates the means by which God destroyed Sodom and Gomorrah. Alternate translation: “by means of reducing the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to ashes” 2PE 2 6 xi0n translate-names Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας 1 **Sodom and Gomorrah** are the names of two cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 6 w1b9 figs-abstractnouns καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **destruction** by translating the idea behind it with an verb, such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “he condemned them to be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 6 hgt7 grammar-connect-logic-result ὑπόδειγμα μελλόντων ἀσεβέσιν τεθεικώς 1 an example of what is going to happen to the ungodly This clause indicates the result of what happened in the previous clauses of the verse. God’s destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah resulted in them being an **example** and a warning of what happens to others who disobey God. Alternate translation: “with the result that God set them as an example of the things that will happen to the ungodly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 2 6 eocy figs-genericnoun ἀσεβέσιν 1 Here, **ungodly** refers to wicked people in general, not to one specific wicked person. Alternate translation: “to an ungodly person” or “to ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -2PE 2 7 fm1p grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the fourth condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +2PE 2 7 fm1p grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the fourth condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 2PE 2 7 zif8 writing-pronouns ἐρύσατο 1 the behavior of the lawless in their sensuality Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “God rescued” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 7 xjq6 translate-names Λὼτ 1 Connecting Statement: **Lot** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2PE 2 7 uknf figs-distinguish καταπονούμενον ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς 1 Connecting Statement: This clause is giving more information about **Lot**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could begin a new sentence here to clarify this. Alternate translation: “He was being oppressed by the behavior of the lawless ones in licentiousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 19 b79v figs-metaphor ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 For by what someone has been overcome, by this he has been enslaved Peter speaks of a person as being **enslaved** when anything has control over that person, he speaks of that thing as the master of that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this non-figuratively or as a simile. Alternate translation: “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes controlled by that thing” or “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes like a slave to that thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 19 xqmy figs-activepassive ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive sentence with an active form. Alternate translation: “For if something overpowers a person, that thing enslaves that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 2 20 v3xc γὰρ 1 Here, **For** could refer to: (1) another explanation of Peter’s statement “themselves being slaves of destruction” in the previous verse, (2) a transition from what Peter said in the previous verse to what he is going to say in this verse. Here, **For** does not indicate the reason or result of what was said in the previous verse. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “And” -2PE 2 20 q96i grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου, ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τούτοις δὲ πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται, γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “they have escaped the impurities of the world through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, but having become entangled and overcome by them again, the last has become worse for them than the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +2PE 2 20 q96i grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου, ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τούτοις δὲ πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται, γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “they have escaped the impurities of the world through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, but having become entangled and overcome by them again, the last has become worse for them than the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 2PE 2 20 efnj figs-metaphor εἰ…ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 Using a similar metaphor to that in [2:18](../02/18.md), here Peter speaks of believers as if they had been slaves to the **defilements** of the world and have **escaped** that captivity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “if they have ceased living in the defiling manner of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 20 xpo9 figs-abstractnouns τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **defilements** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that sinful human society does to defile itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 20 lu22 figs-metonymy τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 the impurities of the world Here, the **world** refers to human society, which has been corrupted by sin. Alternate translation: “the defiling practices of sinful human society” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) diff --git a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv index 496fca7cdf..7d273c6e67 100644 --- a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 2 28 d4ql figs-synecdoche μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 may not be put to shame by him John is using the word **him**, meaning Jesus, to mean the presence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “we will not be ashamed to be in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1JN 2 28 j145 figs-activepassive μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 may not be put to shame by him If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “we will not be ashamed to be in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 2 28 x7ic ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 at his coming Alternate translation: “when he returns to earth” -1JN 2 29 j146 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν εἰδῆτε ὅτι δίκαιός ἐστιν 1 If you know that he is righteous John is using the form of conditional possibility here, but he is stating something that is actually true. In Greek, this was a way of affirming that the part that follows this statement is also true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1JN 2 29 j146 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν εἰδῆτε ὅτι δίκαιός ἐστιν 1 If you know that he is righteous John is using the form of conditional possibility here, but he is stating something that is actually true. In Greek, this was a way of affirming that the part that follows this statement is also true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1JN 2 29 j147 writing-pronouns ἐστιν…αὐτοῦ 1 he is … him The pronouns **he** and **him** likely refer to God the Father, since in the next two verses John says that believers are “children of God,” and he speaks in this verse of those who have **been begotten from him**. Alternate translation: “God is … God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 2 29 j148 figs-abstractnouns πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην 1 everyone who does righteousness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an adjective such as “right.” Alternate translation: “everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 2 29 u6er figs-activepassive πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγέννηται 1 everyone who does righteousness has been begotten from him If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God is the father of everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -481,9 +481,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 4 10 j274 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus. Alternate translation: “his Son Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 4 10 b39j figs-abstractnouns ἀπέστειλεν τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ, ἱλασμὸν περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν 1 sent his Son as the propitiation for our sins If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **propitiation** by stating the meaning behind it with an equivalent expression. See how you translated the term in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “sent his Son to be the offering that made him no longer angry with us because of our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 4 11 i4tf figs-nominaladj ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved See how you translated **Beloved** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1JN 4 11 g4gu grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς ἠγάπησεν ἡμᾶς 1 if God thus loved us John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because God loved us in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1JN 4 11 g4gu grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς ἠγάπησεν ἡμᾶς 1 if God thus loved us John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because God loved us in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1JN 4 11 dy86 grammar-connect-condition-fact οὕτως 1 The word **thus** refers to the manner in which God showed his love to us, as described in verses 9 and 10. Alternate translation: “in that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -1JN 4 12 j275 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν ἀγαπῶμεν ἀλλήλους, ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ἡμῖν μένει, καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη αὐτοῦ τετελειωμένη ἐν ἡμῖν ἐστιν 1 If we love one another, God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us John is speaking of a real situation as if it were a hypothetical condition. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is already real, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not real, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But as we love each other, God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us” or “But we do love each other, so that means that God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1JN 4 12 j275 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν ἀγαπῶμεν ἀλλήλους, ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ἡμῖν μένει, καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη αὐτοῦ τετελειωμένη ἐν ἡμῖν ἐστιν 1 If we love one another, God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us John is speaking of a real situation as if it were a hypothetical condition. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is already real, and if your readers might that what John is saying is not real, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But as we love each other, God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us” or “But we do love each other, so that means that God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1JN 4 12 sh9q figs-metaphor ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ἡμῖν μένει 1 God remains in us See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as in [2:6](../02/06.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “God continues to have a close relationship with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 4 12 vt14 figs-activepassive ἡ ἀγάπη αὐτοῦ τετελειωμένη ἐν ἡμῖν ἐστιν 1 his love is perfected in us See how you translated the similar expression in [2:5](../02/05.md). In this case, it is clear that John is referring to God’s love for us, rather than to our love for God. Alternate translation: “God’s love has achieved its purpose in our lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 4 13 gj7p ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι ἐν αὐτῷ μένομεν, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν ἡμῖν, ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Πνεύματος αὐτοῦ δέδωκεν ἡμῖν 1 In this we know that we remain in him and he in us: that he has given us of his Spirit This verse is very similar to the second half of [3:24](../03/24.md). See how you translated that verse. **In this** may set up an awkward sentence in your language. If so, try wording it in other ways. Alternate translation: “This is how we know that we remain in him, and he in us: He has given us of his Spirit” or “We know that we remain in him, and he in us, because he has given us of his Spirit” @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 5 7 qpab figs-personification οἱ μαρτυροῦντες 1 Here, John speaks of water and blood as though they were people who could **testify**, or speak about what they saw. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “ways that God has given us to know that he sent Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1JN 5 8 j320 figs-metonymy τὸ ὕδωρ, καὶ τὸ αἷμα 1 the water and the blood See how you decided to translate the terms **water** and **blood** in [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: (1) “the baptism of Jesus and his death on the cross” or (2) “the birth of Jesus and his death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 5 8 j321 figs-idiom οἱ τρεῖς εἰς τὸ ἕν εἰσιν 1 the three are unto the one This is an idiom. If this does not communicate well in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “these three all say the same thing” or “these three all agree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1JN 5 9 j322 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων λαμβάνομεν 1 If we receive the testimony of men John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something this way if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since we receive the testimony of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1JN 5 9 j322 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων λαμβάνομεν 1 If we receive the testimony of men John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something this way if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since we receive the testimony of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1JN 5 9 ai6a figs-idiom τὴν μαρτυρίαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων λαμβάνομεν 1 we receive the testimony of men This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “we believe people when they give testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 5 9 j323 figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 of men Although the term **men** is masculine, John is using the word in a generic sense that could include both men and women. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1JN 5 9 k2de figs-explicit ἡ μαρτυρία τοῦ Θεοῦ μείζων ἐστίν 1 the testimony of God is greater The word **greater** implicitly means that the testimony of God is more reliable than human testimony, since God knows everything and God always tells the truth. Alternate translation: “the testimony of God is more reliable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -608,7 +608,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 5 14 j333 writing-pronouns αὐτόν…αὐτοῦ…ἀκούει 1 him … his … he listens The pronouns **him**, **his**, and **he** refer to God in this verse. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “God” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 5 14 at5n ἐάν τι αἰτώμεθα κατὰ τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ 1 if we ask anything according to his will Alternate translation: “if we ask for the things that God wants for us” 1JN 5 14 j334 figs-idiom ἀκούει ἡμῶν 1 he listens to us As in [4:5](../04/05.md), the word **listens** is an idiom. However, the meaning here is different than the meaning there, which was, “is persuaded by.” Rather, here it refers to God being willing to grant what we ask. Alternate translation: “he is willing to give it to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1JN 5 15 j335 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀκούει ἡμῶν 1 if we know that he listens to us John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since we know that he listens to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1JN 5 15 j335 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀκούει ἡμῶν 1 if we know that he listens to us John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since we know that he listens to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1JN 5 15 j336 figs-idiom ἀκούει ἡμῶν 1 he listens to us As in [5:14](../05/14.md), the word **listens** is an idiom. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “he is willing to give us what we ask for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 5 15 j337 figs-explicit ἀκούει ἡμῶν 1 he listens to us It may be helpful to repeat the condition that John specifies in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “he is disposed to give us what we ask for if it is according to his will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 5 15 j338 writing-pronouns ἀκούει…αὐτοῦ 1 he listens … him The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to God in this verse. Consider whether it might be more natural in your language to use the name “God” for **he** and to say **him** later in the verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From 7225f6e740484874d23eae14829ddb306cca27ed Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 21:19:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 306/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 3 ++- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 038093f6f1..dd537d1ad5 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -128,8 +128,9 @@ GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alt GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “to ensure I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” -GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] +GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases are making a distinction between Titus and some other person, as if they were two separate entities. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 9b4e3a46ae50baa1d15d5ef3154f6ce4f5d4d11b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 21:22:47 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 308/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index dd537d1ad5..d27acf08e4 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] -GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases are making a distinction between Titus and some other person, as if they were two separate entities. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases are making a distinction between Titus and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. From 3eb51a3ecf746754e9a3fb907cd398d89402a7cb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 21:24:54 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 309/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index d27acf08e4..d64e7a01a5 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] -GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases are making a distinction between Titus and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases are making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. From 75ac8b17ed33adb59b4324b2747146110c32a1fa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Wed, 12 Oct 2022 17:30:50 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 310/446] Restored Hebrews to before "figuratively" and "idiomatically" were removed, in order to prevent conflicts. --- en_tn_59-HEB.tsv | 224 +++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ 1 file changed, 112 insertions(+), 112 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv index 8f74743e45..fb014dd7bc 100644 --- a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv +++ b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote HEB front intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Hebrews

Hebrews alternates between exposition and exhortation. To put it another way, the author switches between teaching and warning his audience. The following outline identifies which sections are which.

1. Introduction: God and his Son (1:1–4)
2. The Son and the angels (1:5–2:18)
* Teaching: The Son is greater than the angels (1:5–14)
* Exhortation: Listen to the message! (2:1–4)
* Teaching: The Son becomes lower than the angels to help his brothers (2:5–18)
3. Example of the wilderness generation (3:1–4:13)
* Exhortation: The Son is greater than Moses (3:1–6)
* Exhortation: Strive to enter the rest! (3:7–4:11)
* Exhortation: The power of God’s word (4:12–13)
4. Summary statement (4:14–16)
5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: The Son becomes high priest (5:1–10)
* Exhortation: Make sure to persevere! (5:11–6:12)
* Exhortation: God’s promise is certain (6:13–20)
* Teaching: Melchizedek the priest (7:1–10)
* Teaching: The Son is high priest in the order of Melchizedek (7:11–28)
* Teaching: The ministry of the Son (8:1–6)
* Teaching: The new covenant (8:7–13)
* Teaching: Old and new ministries (9:1–10:18)
6. Summary statement (10:19–25)
7. Faith and endurance (10:26–12:29)
* Exhortation: Endure in the faith! (10:26–39)
* Exhortation: Examples of faith (11:1–40)
* Exhortation: Imitate Jesus in rejecting sin and enduring discipline (12:1–17)
* Exhortation: Mount Sinai and Mount Zion (12:18–29)
8. Closing (13:1–25)
* Final commands and exhortations (13:1–19)
* Benediction and letter closing (13:20–25)

### Who wrote the Book of Hebrews?

No one knows who wrote Hebrews. Scholars have suggested several different people who could possibly be the author. Possible authors are Paul, Luke, and Barnabas. The date of writing is also not known. Most scholars think it was written before A.D. 70. Jerusalem was destroyed in A.D. 70, but the writer of this letter spoke about Jerusalem as if it had not yet been destroyed.

### What is the Book of Hebrews about?

In the Book of Hebrews, the author shows that Jesus fulfilled Old Testament prophecies. The author did this in order to encourage the Jewish Christians and to explain that Jesus is better than anything that the old covenant had to offer. Jesus is the perfect High Priest. Jesus was also the perfect sacrifice. Animal sacrifices became useless because Jesus’ sacrifice was once and for all time. Therefore, Jesus is the one and only way for people to be accepted by God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Hebrews.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Letter to the Hebrews” or “A Letter to the Jewish Christians.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Can readers understand this book without knowing about the sacrifices and the work of the priests required in the Old Testament?

It would be very difficult for readers to understand this book without understanding these matters. Translators might consider explaining some of these Old Testament concepts in notes or in an introduction to this book.

### How is the idea of blood used in the Book of Hebrews?

Beginning in [Hebrews 9:7](../heb/09/07.md), the idea of blood is often used as metonymy to represent the death of any animal that was sacrificed according to God’s covenant with Israel. The author also used blood to represent the death of Jesus Christ. Jesus became the perfect sacrifice so that God would forgive people for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

Beginning in [Hebrews 9:19](../heb/09/19.md), the author used the idea of sprinkling as a symbolic action. Old Testament priests sprinkled the blood of the animals sacrificed. This was a symbol of the benefits of the animal’s death being applied to the people or to an object. This showed that the people or the object was acceptable to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])

### When and where does Jesus make atonement in Hebrews?


### What does it mean to “take away sin”?

See Isa 27:9?

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Terminology for sacred spaces and buildings

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Hebrews in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”
* Sometimes the meaning indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:10; 13:24)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 2:11: 9:13; 10:10, 14, 29; 13:12)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### How should “we” and “you” be translated?

Throughout the letter, “we” includes the author and the audience unless a note specifies otherwise. Similarly, “you” is always plural unless a note specifies otherwise.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Hebrews?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “you crowned him with glory and honor” (2:7). Some older versions read, “you crowned him with glory and honor and you have put him over the works of your hands.”
* “those who did not unite in faith with those who obeyed” (4:2). Some older versions read, “those who heard it without joining faith to it.”
* “Christ came as a high priest of the good things that have come” (9:11). Some modern versions and older versions read, “Christ came as a high priest of the good things that are to come.”
* “on those who were prisoners” (10:34). Some older versions read, “of me in my chains.”
* “They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were killed with the sword” (11:37). Some older versions read, “They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were tempted. They were killed with the sword.”
* “If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned” (12:20). Some older versions read, “If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned or shot with an arrow.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -HEB 1 intro aaf9 0 # Hebrews 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Introduction: God and his Son (1:1–4)
2. The Son and the angels (1:5–2:18)
* Teaching: The Son is greater than the angels (1:5–14)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [1:5](../01/05.md), [7–13](../01/07.md), which are quotations from books of poetry in the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### God speaking Scripture

In this chapter, the author quotes the Old Testament seven times. Each time, he says that God is the one who speaks the words, and God speaks them to or about the Son or the angels. The audience would have recognized that these quotations came from the Old Testament, but the author wished to introduce them as words that God himself said and says. He can do this because he believed that God is the author of the entire Old Testament, since he is the one who spoke through the prophets (see [1:1](../01/01.md)). In your translation, you should express these quotations as words that God says. If your readers would not recognize that God is speaking quotations from the Old Testament, you could identify the quotations for your readers in footnotes or in some other way.

### Old Testament quotations

When the author quotes from the Old Testament, he uses a Greek translation that is sometimes different than the original Hebrew version that most modern translations use for the Old Testament. This is particularly obvious in [1:6](../01/06.md), which quotes from the Greek version of [Deuteronomy 32:43](../../deu/32/43.md). In other places, the author may paraphrase or loosely quote the Old Testament. Since the author chose to use these forms of the quotations, you should represent the words the author uses, not the words that may be found in an Old Testament you are familiar with. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])

### The Son and the Father

In this chapter, the author refers to the “Son” and several times speaks of God as a “father.” These are important terms for two person of the Trinity: God the Father and God the Son. The author uses these terms partly because the Old Testament texts he quotes use them. Also, “Son” and “Father” refer to two people who are closely related but not the same person, so the words provide good language to speak about two persons of the Trinity. If possible, preserve the father and son language in this chapter, but make sure that your translation does not make it sound like the Son did not exist until a certain time or that the Father at some point physically gave birth to the Son. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])

### Angels

The author mentions “angels” many times in this chapter. In his culture, everyone knew about “angels.” They were spiritual beings who could appear in human form. Some people talked about good and evil angels. The author only speaks about the good angels in this chapter. These angels serve and worship God, and they do whatever God tells them to do. Some scholars think that the author is arguing against people who said that Jesus was an angel. More likely, the author wishes to prove that Jesus the Son is God, and he uses the angels to do that. The author thinks that the angels are between humans and God in power and position. If the Son is above the angels, that means he must be God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/angel]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Rhetorical questions

The author asks rhetorical questions in [1:5](../01/05.md), [13–14](../01/13.md). He is not asking these questions because he wants the audience to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the audience to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with the author. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Parallelisms

In the Old Testament, good poetry often included two parallel lines that expressed one idea in two different ways. When the author quotes the Old Testament, he often includes this kind of parallelism. Since both lines contribute to the meaning of the idea, it is best to preserve the parallelism. If your readers would find it confusing, however, you could combine the two parallel lines into one idea. See the notes on each instance of parallel lines for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])

### Inheriting

In [1:2](../01/02.md), [4](../01/04.md), [14](../01/14.md), the author uses language related to “inheriting” or being an “heir.” In the author’s culture, children often “inherited” property or money when their parents died. In these verses, the author uses the “inheriting” language metaphorically to refer to receiving something from God. In this chapter, the metaphor does not imply that someone must die for the person to “inherit.” If possible, preserve this metaphor since it is an important concept in Hebrews. See the notes on each verse for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Descriptions of the Son in [1:3](../01/03.md)

In [1:3](../01/03.md), the author describes the Son as “the brightness of God’s glory” and the “exact representation of God’s being.” Both of these phrases identify the Son as God and as unique. In other words, these phrases are the author’s way of saying that the Son is God, but God is not just the Son. Carefully consider how you translate these phrases, and be sure that your translation makes it clear that the Son is God but God is not just the Son. The author uses images and metaphors to express the idea, so consider using similar images and metaphors. +HEB 1 intro aaf9 0 # Hebrews 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Introduction: God and his Son (1:1–4)
2. The Son and the angels (1:5–2:18)
* Teaching: The Son is greater than the angels (1:5–14)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [1:5](../01/05.md), [7–13](../01/07.md), which are quotations from books of poetry in the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### God speaking Scripture

In this chapter, the author quotes the Old Testament seven times. Each time, he says that God is the one who speaks the words, and God speaks them to or about the Son or the angels. The audience would have recognized that these quotations came from the Old Testament, but the author wished to introduce them as words that God himself said and says. He can do this because he believed that God is the author of the entire Old Testament, since he is the one who spoke through the prophets (see [1:1](../01/01.md)). In your translation, you should express these quotations as words that God says. If your readers would not recognize that God is speaking quotations from the Old Testament, you could identify the quotations for your readers in footnotes or in some other way.

### Old Testament quotations

When the author quotes from the Old Testament, he uses a Greek translation that is sometimes different than the original Hebrew version that most modern translations use for the Old Testament. This is particularly obvious in [1:6](../01/06.md), which quotes from the Greek version of [Deuteronomy 32:43](../../deu/32/43.md). In other places, the author may paraphrase or loosely quote the Old Testament. Since the author chose to use these forms of the quotations, you should represent the words the author uses, not the words that may be found in an Old Testament you are familiar with. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])

### The Son and the Father

In this chapter, the author refers to the “Son” and several times speaks of God as a “father.” These are important terms for two person of the Trinity: God the Father and God the Son. The author uses these terms partly because the Old Testament texts he quotes use them. Also, “Son” and “Father” refer to two people who are closely related but not the same person, so the words provide good language to speak about two persons of the Trinity. If possible, preserve the father and son language in this chapter, but make sure that your translation does not make it sound like the Son did not exist until a certain time or that the Father at some point physically gave birth to the Son. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])

### Angels

The author mentions “angels” many times in this chapter. In his culture, everyone knew about “angels.” They were spiritual beings who could appear in human form. Some people talked about good and evil angels. The author only speaks about the good angels in this chapter. These angels serve and worship God, and they do whatever God tells them to do. Some scholars think that the author is arguing against people who said that Jesus was an angel. More likely, the author wishes to prove that Jesus the Son is God, and he uses the angels to do that. The author thinks that the angels are between humans and God in power and position. If the Son is above the angels, that means he must be God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/angel]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Rhetorical questions

The author asks rhetorical questions in [1:5](../01/05.md), [13–14](../01/13.md). He is not asking these questions because he wants the audience to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the audience to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with the author. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Parallelisms

In the Old Testament, good poetry often included two parallel lines that expressed one idea in two different ways. When the author quotes the Old Testament, he often includes this kind of parallelism. Since both lines contribute to the meaning of the idea, it is best to preserve the parallelism. If your readers would find it confusing, however, you could combine the two parallel lines into one idea. See the notes on each instance of parallel lines for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])

### Inheriting

In [1:2](../01/02.md), [4](../01/04.md), [14](../01/14.md), the author uses language related to “inheriting” or being an “heir.” In the author’s culture, children often “inherited” property or money when their parents died. In these verses, the author uses the “inheriting” language metaphorically to refer to receiving something from God. In this chapter, the metaphor does not imply that someone must die for the person to “inherit.” If possible, preserve this metaphor since it is an important concept in Hebrews. See the notes on each verse for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Descriptions of the Son in [1:3](../01/03.md)

In [1:3](../01/03.md), the author describes the Son as “the brightness of God’s glory” and the “exact representation of God’s being.” Both of these phrases identify the Son as God and as unique. In other words, these phrases are the author’s way of saying that the Son is God, but God is not just the Son. Carefully consider how you translate these phrases, and be sure that your translation makes it clear that the Son is God but God is not just the Son. The author uses images and metaphors to express the idea, so consider using similar images and metaphors. HEB 1 1 dhcr figs-doublet πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως πάλαι 1 Here, **In many portions** shows that God did not speak just once. Rather, he spoke often throughout the time called **long ago**. Then, **in many ways** shows that God used various means and people to speak to the **fathers**. The author uses both of these phrases because he wishes to emphasize the variety of times and ways in which God has **spoken**. If your language does not use repetition for emphasis, and if you cannot represent the author’s two phrases well, you could express the idea using one phrase that emphasizes variety. Alternate translation: “Long ago, with great variety” or “Long ago, using multiple methods in different times,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -HEB 1 1 c7us figs-infostructure πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως πάλαι, ὁ Θεὸς, λαλήσας τοῖς πατράσιν ἐν τοῖς προφήταις 1 Here, **In many portions and in many ways long ago** describes how God “spoke” **to {our} fathers**. If your readers would misunderstand this sentence structure, you could rearrange the phrases so that **In many portions and in many ways long ago** does modify **having spoken**. Alternate translation: “God, having spoken to our fathers through the prophets in many portions and in many ways long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +HEB 1 1 c7us figs-infostructure πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως πάλαι, ὁ Θεὸς, λαλήσας τοῖς πατράσιν ἐν τοῖς προφήταις 1 Here, **In many portions and in many ways long ago** describes how God “spoke” **to {our} fathers**. If your readers would misunderstand this sentence structure, you could rearrange the phrases so that **In many portions and in many ways long ago** does modify **having spoken**. Alternate translation: “God, having spoken to our fathers through the prophets in many portions and in many ways long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 1 1 uuix figs-idiom πάλαι 1 Here, **long ago** refers to past time. It often identifies events that happened in the distant past and about which stories are told. Use a word or phrase that refers to the distant past. Alternate translation: “in the past days” or “in ancient times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 1 1 ct15 grammar-connect-time-sequential λαλήσας 1 Here, **having spoken** introduces an action that took place before the actions that take place in the next verse ([1:2](../01/02.md)). Use a form that introduces action that takes place before something else. Alternate translation: “after speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) HEB 1 1 in2c translate-kinship τοῖς πατράσιν 1 Here, **{our} fathers** refers to the Israelites who were alive before Jesus lived on earth. Not all the audience were descended from these Israelites. However, the author can still refer to the Israelites as their **fathers** because he thinks that all Christians have been included in the family of Abraham, the ancestor of the Israelites. If possible, preserve the family language in your translation. Alternate translation: “our forefathers” or “to the Israelite ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ HEB 1 4 bn6t translate-unknown τοσούτῳ κρείττων…τῶν ἀγ HEB 1 4 fzg3 figs-extrainfo διαφορώτερον…ὄνομα 1 as the name he has inherited is more excellent than their name Here the author does not clarify what **name** this is. It could be the title “Son,” the title “Lord,” the name “Jesus,” or God’s own special name, “Yahweh.” Since the author did not clarify what **name** he is referring to, it is best to refer to a name or title without stating what it is. Alternate translation: “a more excellent title” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) HEB 1 4 qt7q figs-metaphor κεκληρονόμηκεν 1 he has inherited Here the author speaks as if Jesus were child who would receive property that a parent passes on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus receives a **name** from God the Father, although this does not mean that God the Father has died. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “he has received” or “God has given him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 1 4 uu4s figs-ellipsis παρ’ αὐτοὺς 1 Here the author omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete comparison. He omits these words because he stated them in the first half of the comparison (a **name**). If your language needs these words to make a complete comparison, you could include them here. Alternate translation: “than their names” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -HEB 1 5 d964 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **For** introduces the support or basis that proves that the Son is “superior to the angels” ([1:4](../01/04.md)). The supporting statements that **For** introduces can be found in [1:5–14](../01/05.md). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a support or basis for a claim. Alternate translation: “Here is the proof for that:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +HEB 1 5 d964 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **For** introduces the support or basis that proves that the Son is “superior to the angels” ([1:4](../01/04.md)). The supporting statements that **For** introduces can be found in [1:5–14](../01/05.md). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a support or basis for a claim. Alternate translation: “Here is the proof for that:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 1 5 ww5h figs-rquestion τίνι γὰρ εἶπέν ποτε τῶν ἀγγέλων, Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε? καὶ πάλιν, ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν? 1 For to which of the angels did God ever say, “You are my son … a son to me”? The author does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the answer to both is “none of them,” for God said these words to his own Son. If your readers would misunderstand these questions, you could express the ideas with strong negations. Alternate translation: “For God never said to any of the angels ‘You are my son, and I today I have become your father.’ And again, ‘I will be as a father to him, and he will be as a son to me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) HEB 1 5 pzkc writing-quotations τίνι γὰρ εἶπέν ποτε τῶν ἀγγέλων…καὶ πάλιν 1 Here the author quotes from important texts, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce them as quotations but instead introduces them as words that God has spoken to his Son, not to angels. However, the audience would have understood that these were quotations from the Old Testament. The first quotation comes from [Psalm 2:7](../../psa/02/07.md), and the second quotation comes from [2 Samuel 7:14](../../2sa/07/14.md). Since the author introduces these quotations as words that God has said to his Son, not to angels, you should introduce these quotations as words that someone has or has not said. If your readers would not know that the quotations are from the Old Testament, you could include footnotes or use some other form to identify the quotations. The phrase **And again** is a normal form that the author uses to connect a second statement to the first statement. Alternate translation: “For to which of the angels did he ever speak … And” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) HEB 1 5 wmyy figs-quotations εἶπέν ποτε…Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε? καὶ πάλιν, ἐγὼ ἔσομαι αὐτῷ εἰς Πατέρα, καὶ αὐτὸς ἔσται μοι εἰς Υἱόν? 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the questions as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “did he ever say that he was his son, today he had fathered him, and again that he would be as a father to him, and that he would be as a son to him?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -62,10 +62,10 @@ HEB 1 8 jlql πρὸς…τὸν Υἱόν 1 Here, **with regard to** could in HEB 1 8 b155 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱόν 1 Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) HEB 1 8 x9uc figs-quotations πρὸς…τὸν Υἱόν, ὁ θρόνος σου, ὁ Θεὸς, εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ αἰῶνος, καὶ ἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος ῥάβδος τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ. 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the next verse as an indirect quote as well. Alternate translation: “to the Son he says that he is God and that his throne is forever and ever, and the scepter of righteousness is the scepter of his kingdom.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 1 8 jqi7 figs-yousingular σου 1 Here, **Your** refers to one person, the **Son**. Therefore, **Your** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -HEB 1 8 ewm4 figs-metonymy ὁ θρόνος σου 1 Your throne, God, is forever and ever Here, **throne** refers to what the person on the **throne** does, which is to rule. If your readers would misunderstand **throne**, you could express the idea by referring to “rule” or “reign.” Alternate translation: “Your reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 1 8 ewm4 figs-metonymy ὁ θρόνος σου 1 Your throne, God, is forever and ever Here, **throne** figuratively refers to what the person on the **throne** does, which is to rule. If your readers would misunderstand **throne**, you could express the idea by referring to “rule” or “reign.” Alternate translation: “Your reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 1 8 qi4x figs-exclamations ὁ Θεὸς 1 Here, **O God** directly addresses and names who “you” in the quote is. **O** is an older way to indicate direct address in English. Use a form in your language that indicates direct address. Alternate translation: “God” or “you who are God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) HEB 1 8 eg09 figs-idiom εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ αἰῶνος 1 Here, **forever {and} ever** indicates that something lasts forever or does not come to an end. If your readers would misunderstand this idiom, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “lasts forever” or “never ends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 1 8 k4cf figs-metonymy ἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος ῥάβδος τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ 1 The scepter of your kingdom is the scepter of justice Here, **scepter** refers to how the person who has the **scepter** rules. If your readers would misunderstand **scepter**, you could express the idea by referring to how the person “rules” or “reigns.” Alternate translation: “with righteousness is how he rules his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 1 8 k4cf figs-metonymy ἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος ῥάβδος τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ 1 The scepter of your kingdom is the scepter of justice Here, **scepter** figuratively refers to how the person who has the **scepter** rules. If your readers would misunderstand **scepter**, you could express the idea by referring to how the person “rules” or “reigns.” Alternate translation: “with righteousness is how he rules his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 1 8 iprl figs-abstractnouns ἡ ῥάβδος τῆς εὐθύτητος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous.” Alternate translation: “a righteous scepter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 1 8 vl1n figs-123person αὐτοῦ 1 Here the author refers to the **Son** in the third person instead of in the second person. He is still referring to the same person. If your readers would misunderstand **his** here, you could continue to use **you** instead. Alternate translation: “your” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) HEB 1 8 b7f0 translate-textvariants αὐτοῦ 1 Most later manuscripts have “your” here instead of **his**. However, the earliest manuscripts have **his**, and later scribes probably changed it to “your” to be consistent with the rest of the quote. Unless there is a good reason not to use **his**, you should follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ HEB 1 9 p5va figs-yousingular ἠγάπησας…ἐμίσησας…σε…σ HEB 1 9 ollt figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην…ἀνομίαν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **righteousness** and **lawlessness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective or adverbs. Alternate translation: “what is righteous … what is lawless” or “what people do righteously … what people do lawlessly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 1 9 lu3m figs-doublet ἔχρισέν…ὁ Θεός, ὁ Θεός σου 1 Here the quotation repeats **God** in order to emphasize that **God** is the one who “anoints” and also to identify him as **your God**, which means that he is the **God** whom **you** serve. If your readers would misunderstand why the quotation repeats **God**, you could express the idea by using **God** once and emphasize the phrase in another way. Alternate translation: “the God whom you serve has anointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 1 9 eyqe figs-123person ἔχρισέν…ὁ Θεός, ὁ Θεός σου 1 Since **God** is the one speaking this quotation, he refers to himself in the third person here. If your readers would misunderstand that God is speaking about himself, you could use the first person here to clarify that this is not another **God**. Alternate translation: “I, who am your God, have anointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -HEB 1 9 t9yw figs-metaphor ἔχρισέν σε…ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως 1 has anointed you with the oil of joy more than your companions In the author’s culture, people were often **anointed** with **oil** when they received special authority or power, including when a person became king. Here the author applies this “anointing” to the Son. In this situation, it refers to how God has exalted the Son and given him power and authority. The phrase **oil of exultation** refers to how the “anointing” leads to or results in **exultation**. If your readers would misunderstand the anointing language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “has honored and empowered you so that you exult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 1 9 t9yw figs-metaphor ἔχρισέν σε…ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως 1 has anointed you with the oil of joy more than your companions In the author’s culture, people were often **anointed** with **oil** when they received special authority or power, including when a person became king. Here the author applies this “anointing” to the Son. In this situation, it figuratively refers to how God has exalted the Son and given him power and authority. The phrase **oil of exultation** refers to how the “anointing” leads to or results in **exultation**. If your readers would misunderstand the anointing language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “has honored and empowered you so that you exult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 1 9 w1l1 figs-possession ἔλαιον ἀγαλλιάσεως 1 Here the quotation uses the possessive form to show that the **oil** leads to **exultation**. If your language does not use the possessive form for that idea, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that indicates result. Alternate translation: “with the oil that leads to exultation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 1 9 h3ne figs-abstractnouns ἀγαλλιάσεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **exultation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “exult” or “rejoice.” Alternate translation: “that makes you rejoice” or “which causes you to exult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 1 9 akn8 figs-extrainfo τοὺς μετόχους σου 1 Here the author does not clarify who the **companions** are. In the context of the quotation, they probably referred to other people in the royal family who did not become king. In the context of Hebrews, they probably refer to those who believe in Jesus. God saves them, but he does not seat them at his right hand like he does with Jesus. However, neither the quotation nor the author of Hebrews state explicitly who the **companions** are, so you should leave their identify unspecified if possible. Alternate translation: “those who are with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ HEB 1 10 tmu5 figs-idiom κατ’ ἀρχάς 1 In the beginning Here, **accord HEB 1 10 klk9 figs-exclamations Κύριε 1 Here, **O Lord** directly addresses and names who **you** in the quote is. **O** is an older way to indicate direct address in English. Use a form in your language that indicates direct address. Alternate translation: “Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) HEB 1 10 j64k figs-metaphor τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας 1 you laid the earth’s foundation Here the quotation refers to **the earth** as if it were a building that was set on a “foundation.” The **Lord** is the one who put **the earth** on its foundation, or **founded** it. The author of the quotations speaks in this way in order to show that the **Lord** is the one who created and sustains **the earth**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “perfectly set up the earth” or “made the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 1 10 k199 figs-abstractnouns ἔργα τῶν χειρῶν σού 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **works**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “make” or “do.” Alternate translation: “what your hands made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 1 10 r19v figs-metonymy τῶν χειρῶν σού 1 The heavens are the work of your hands Here, **hands** refer to the power and action that a person has to do **works**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “of your power” or “that you powerfully did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 1 10 r19v figs-metonymy τῶν χειρῶν σού 1 The heavens are the work of your hands Here, **hands** figuratively refer to the power and action that a person has to do **works**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “of your power” or “that you powerfully did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 1 11 zugp figs-quotations αὐτοὶ ἀπολοῦνται, σὺ δὲ διαμένεις; καὶ πάντες ὡς ἱμάτιον παλαιωθήσονται, 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to express the rest of the quote in the previous and following verses as indirect quotes as well. Alternate translation: “They themselves will perish, but he himself will continue; and they will all wear out like a garment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 1 11 a6le writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ ἀπολοῦνται…πάντες…παλαιωθήσονται 1 They will perish Here, **They** and **they** refer to the “earth” and the “heavens” in [1:10](../01/10.md), which together refer to everything that God has made. If your readers would misunderstand **They** and **they**, you could clarify what they refer back to. Alternate translation: “Earth and heavens themselves will perish … they will all wear out” or “Every created thing itself will perish … every one of them will wear out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 1 11 fqk2 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ ἀπολοῦνται, σὺ δὲ διαμένεις 1 Here, the words translated **themselves** and **yourself** emphasize the contrast between “them” and “you.” Consider using a natural way to emphasize this contrast in your language. Alternate translation: “It is they who will perish, but it is you who will continue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ HEB 1 14 ivy4 figs-abstractnouns εἰς διακονίαν 1 If your language HEB 1 14 v541 figs-metaphor κληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν 1 for those who will inherit salvation Here the author speaks as if believers were children who would receive property that a parent passes on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers receive **salvation** from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “to receive salvation from God” or “to be given salvation by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 1 14 fgs4 τοὺς μέλλοντας 1 Alternate translation: “those who are about” or “those who are destined” HEB 1 14 id6k figs-abstractnouns κληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” In this case, you may need to find another way to express the idea behind **inherit**. Alternate translation: “to be saved as a gift from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 2 intro s2gd 0 # Hebrews 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

2. The Son and the angels (1:5–2:18)
* Exhortation: Listen to the message! (2:1–4)
* Teaching: The Son becomes lower than the angels to help his brothers (2:5–18)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [2:6–8](../02/06.md), [12–13](../02/12.md), which are quotations from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Angels

In this chapter, the author continues to speak about angels. In [2:2](../02/02.md), he refers to a tradition that says that God gave the law to Moses through angels. Then, in [2:5–9](../02/05.md), he shows that Jesus, not angels, is the one who rules the “world that is coming.” In fact, Jesus came for the sake of humans, not angels ([2:16](../02/16.md)). Again, the author is not attacking angels. Instead, he uses angels, whom everyone knows are powerful and important, to show how much more important Jesus and the salvation he offers are. Translate “angels” the way you did in the previous chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/angel]])

### Jesus as high priest

In [2:17](../02/17.md), the author first refers to Jesus as a “priest,” here specifically a “high priest.” This is an important theme in Hebrews. In much of the rest of the letter, the author argues that Jesus is a high priest who offers a sacrifice in the heavenly sanctuary. The author simply introduces the title “high priest” here, but he will develop the idea later. So, do not include any extra information here, but carefully consider how to translate “high priest” so that it fits with what the author later says about Jesus as a high priest. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Kinship language

Throughout this chapter, the author uses kinship language to describe those who believe in Jesus. They are God’s “sons” or “children” ([2:10](../02/10.md), [13–14](../02/13.md)), Jesus’ “brothers” ([2:11–12](../02/11.md), [17](../02/17.md)), and each is a “descendant of Abraham” ([2:16](../02/16.md)). As God’s children, they are Jesus’ brothers and part of the family of Abraham, who is Jesus’ ancestor. The idea that believers are part of God’s family is important in Hebrews and the Bible in general, so if possible preserve this language in your translation. Consider using words that refer to adopted family members. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/son]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/children]], and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Who is the “man” in the quotation from Psalm 8?

In [2:6–8](../02/06.md), the author quotes from [Psalm 8:4–6](../psa/08/04.md). The Psalm refers to “man” and “son of man.” In the context of the Psalm itself, these words use the masculine singular form to refer to humans in general. However, Jesus used the phrase “Son of Man” to refer to himself during his earthly ministry. Some scholars argue that the author of Hebrews quotes “son of man” from Psalm 8 because he is using it to refer to Jesus directly. Others argue that the author uses “son of man” and “man” in the Psalm quotation to refer to humans in general but then applies what the Psalm says is true about humans to Jesus, who is the only human who is now “crowned with honor and glory” ([2:9](../02/09.md)). Since the author never refers to Jesus as “Son of Man,” this second option is probably correct. Consider how you can translate “man” and “son of man” in the Psalm quotation so that they can apply first to humans in general and then to Jesus in particular. +HEB 2 intro s2gd 0 # Hebrews 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

2. The Son and the angels (1:5–2:18)
* Exhortation: Listen to the message! (2:1–4)
* Teaching: The Son becomes lower than the angels to help his brothers (2:5–18)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [2:6–8](../02/06.md), [12–13](../02/12.md), which are quotations from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Angels

In this chapter, the author continues to speak about angels. In [2:2](../02/02.md), he refers to a tradition that says that God gave the law to Moses through angels. Then, in [2:5–9](../02/05.md), he shows that Jesus, not angels, is the one who rules the “world that is coming.” In fact, Jesus came for the sake of humans, not angels ([2:16](../02/16.md)). Again, the author is not attacking angels. Instead, he uses angels, whom everyone knows are powerful and important, to show how much more important Jesus and the salvation he offers are. Translate “angels” the way you did in the previous chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/angel]])

### Jesus as high priest

In [2:17](../02/17.md), the author first refers to Jesus as a “priest,” here specifically a “high priest.” This is an important theme in Hebrews. In much of the rest of the letter, the author argues that Jesus is a high priest who offers a sacrifice in the heavenly sanctuary. The author simply introduces the title “high priest” here, but he will develop the idea later. So, do not include any extra information here, but carefully consider how to translate “high priest” so that it fits with what the author later says about Jesus as a high priest. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Kinship language

Throughout this chapter, the author uses kinship language to describe those who believe in Jesus. They are God’s “sons” or “children” ([2:10](../02/10.md), [13–14](../02/13.md)), Jesus’ “brothers” ([2:11–12](../02/11.md), [17](../02/17.md)), and each is a “descendant of Abraham” ([2:16](../02/16.md)). As God’s children, they are Jesus’ brothers and part of the family of Abraham, who is Jesus’ ancestor. The idea that believers are part of God’s family is important in Hebrews and the Bible in general, so if possible preserve this language in your translation. Consider using words that refer to adopted family members. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/son]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/children]], and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Who is the “man” in the quotation from Psalm 8?

In [2:6–8](../02/06.md), the author quotes from [Psalm 8:4–6](../psa/08/04.md). The Psalm refers to “man” and “son of man.” In the context of the Psalm itself, these words use the masculine singular form to refer to humans in general. However, Jesus used the phrase “Son of Man” to refer to himself during his earthly ministry. Some scholars argue that the author of Hebrews quotes “son of man” from Psalm 8 because he is using it to refer to Jesus directly. Others argue that the author uses “son of man” and “man” in the Psalm quotation to refer to humans in general but then applies what the Psalm says is true about humans to Jesus, who is the only human who is now “crowned with honor and glory” ([2:9](../02/09.md)). Since the author never refers to Jesus as “Son of Man,” this second option is probably correct. Consider how you can translate “man” and “son of man” in the Psalm quotation so that they can apply first to humans in general and then to Jesus in particular. HEB 2 1 x7px grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 Connecting Statement: Here the author introduces a result or implication from what he said about the Son and the angels in [1:1–14](../01/01.md). Because God now speaks through his Son, who is greater than the angels, the audience needs to **give attention**. If your readers would misunderstand that **Because of this** draws an inference from the previous chapter, you could use a word or phrase that do does draw this inference. Alternate translation: “Because God is speaking through his Son” or “Because of all that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 2 1 ooqp δεῖ περισσοτέρως προσέχειν ἡμᾶς 1 Alternate translation: “it is most important for us to give attention” or “we must above all give attention” HEB 2 1 ol8m figs-infostructure δεῖ περισσοτέρως προσέχειν ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **far more** could modify (1) **necessary**. See the ULT. (2) **give attention**. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for us to give far more attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ HEB 2 3 mrsy figs-explicit ἡμεῖς ἐκφευξόμεθα 1 Here the auth HEB 2 3 vond grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἡμεῖς ἐκφευξόμεθα τηλικαύτης ἀμελήσαντες σωτηρίας 1 Here, **having neglected** introduces a hypothetical possibility. The author is not claiming that he or his audience have **neglected** or will “neglect” the **salvation**. Instead, he is asking the question about what we would happen if he or his audience did “neglect” the **salvation**. If your readers would misunderstand that **having neglected** introduces a possibility, you could use a form that does introduce a possibility. Alternate translation: “will we escape if we neglect so great a salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) HEB 2 3 i2zv translate-unknown ἀμελήσαντες 1 ignore Here, **neglected** refers to ignoring or failing to pay attention to something. If your readers would misunderstand **neglected**, you could use a word or phrase that expresses the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “pay no attention to” or “consider unimportant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 2 3 gm6v figs-abstractnouns τηλικαύτης…σωτηρίας? ἥτις 1 This is salvation that was first announced by the Lord and confirmed to us by those who heard it If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “the amazing way in which God saves us? This way in which God saves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 2 3 dmsh figs-metonymy τηλικαύτης…σωτηρίας? ἥτις 1 Here, **salvation** refers to the “message” about **salvation**. The author makes this clear in the second half of the verse, when he refers to how the **salvation** is **spoken**. If your readers would misunderstand **salvation**, you could express the idea by referring to a “message” or “proclamation” about **salvation**. Alternate translation: “the proclamation about so great a salvation? Which proclamation about salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 2 3 dmsh figs-metonymy τηλικαύτης…σωτηρίας? ἥτις 1 Here, **salvation** figuratively refers to the “message” about **salvation**. The author makes this clear in the second half of the verse, when he refers to how the **salvation** is **spoken**. If your readers would misunderstand **salvation**, you could express the idea by referring to a “message” or “proclamation” about **salvation**. Alternate translation: “the proclamation about so great a salvation? Which proclamation about salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 2 3 dyn1 figs-activepassive ἀρχὴν λαβοῦσα, λαλεῖσθαι διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what was **chosen** and **spoken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “choosing” and “speaking.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did the “choosing” and **the Lord** did the “speaking.” Alternate translation: “God having chosen the Lord to speak it first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 2 3 le2l figs-idiom ἀρχὴν λαβοῦσα, λαλεῖσθαι 1 Here, **first having been chosen** identifies that something was the **first** or began some process. If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use a word or phrase that identifies that something begins a process or was the **first**. Alternate translation: “first spoken” or “which had its beginning when it was spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 2 3 fpvx figs-activepassive ὑπὸ τῶν ἀκουσάντων εἰς ἡμᾶς ἐβεβαιώθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what was **confirmed** rather than focusing on the people doing the “confirming.” Alternate translation: “those who heard confirmed to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ HEB 2 12 y2es writing-quotations λέγων 1 Here the author quotes from an im HEB 2 12 dtkn figs-quotations λέγων, ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄνομά σου τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου; ἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας ὑμνήσω σε 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “saying that he will proclaim your name to his brothers; he will sing to you in the midst of the assembly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 2 12 cou1 figs-parallelism ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄνομά σου τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου; ἐν μέσῳ ἐκκλησίας ὑμνήσω σε 1 Here, the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If your readers would misunderstand the parallelism, and if this would not be good poetry in your culture, you could combine the two statements. The author of Hebrews particularly focuses on the word **brothers**, so be sure to include that phrase in your translation. Alternate translation: “I will sing praise to you in the midst of my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) HEB 2 12 kewm figs-yousingular σου…σε 1 Since the author of the quotation is speaking to God, here **you** is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -HEB 2 12 e88p figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 I will proclaim your name to my brothers Here, **name** refers to what the person who has that **name** is like. If your readers would misunderstand **name**, you could express the idea by referring to what the person is like. Alternate translation: “who you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 2 12 e88p figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 I will proclaim your name to my brothers Here, **name** figuratively refers to what the person who has that **name** is like. If your readers would misunderstand **name**, you could express the idea by referring to what the person is like. Alternate translation: “who you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 2 12 yh0b figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου 1 Although **brothers** is masculine, the author of the quotation is using it to refer to all those who worship God, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to my brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 2 12 bui0 translate-kinship τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου 1 Just as in [2:11](../02/11.md), the author refers to believers as **brothers** of Jesus, which identifies believers as part of God’s family. This is an important idea in Hebrews, so preserve the language of kinship if possible. See how you translated **brothers** in [2:11](../02/11.md). Alternate translation: “to the people who are like my brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) HEB 2 12 tn8n figs-explicit ἐκκλησίας 1 from inside the assembly Here, the audience would know that the **assembly** was a gathering to worship God. If your readers would not make this inference, you could express the idea explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the gathering to glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -250,8 +250,8 @@ HEB 2 17 u6ch figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὸ ἱλάσκεσθαι τὰς ἁ HEB 2 18 gqfo grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** introduces an explanation of how Jesus functions as “a merciful and faithful high priest.” If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “He can be merciful and faithful because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 2 18 jnzj figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς 1 Here, **himself** emphasizes Jesus to set up the comparison with everyone else who is **tempted**. If your readers would misunderstand **himself**, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes **he**, that is, Jesus. Alternate translation: “is one who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) HEB 2 18 xde4 figs-activepassive πειρασθείς…πειραζομένοις 1 was tempted If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **tempted** rather than focusing on the person or thing doing the “tempting.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject, since many things “tempt” people. Alternate translation: “things having tempted him … whom things tempt” or “having experienced temptation … who experience temptation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 2 18 a3a6 πέπονθεν αὐτὸς, πειρασθείς 1 who are tempted Here, **having been tempted** could identify: (1) the situation in which Jesus **suffered**. Alternate translation: “he himself had suffered when he was tempted” (2) what resulted from the “suffering.” Alternate translation: “he was tempted when he suffered” -HEB 3 intro mu26 0 # Hebrews 3 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

3. Example of the wilderness generation (3:1–4:13)
* Exhortation: The Son is greater than Moses (3:1–6)
* Exhortation: Strive to enter the rest! (3:7–4:11)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [3:7b–11](../03/07.md), [15](../03/15.md), which are quotations from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### “Today”

The quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “today.” The author mentions “today” again in [3:13](../03/13.md), [15](../03/15.md). In both of these verses, he refers to how we always call the current day “today.” So, anything that happens during the time we call “today” must happen every day, since every day is “today.” In this way, the author shows that the quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) applies to his audience every day. In these verses, translate “today” with a word or phrase that someone would use for the current day. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/biblicaltimeday]])

### Rest

The quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “rest.” In the context of the Psalm, this “rest” probably refers to the land that God promised to give to the Israelites. However, scholars debate what the author of Hebrews means when he uses the word “rest.” This is important because the author speaks much more about “rest” in chapter 4. There are two major options for what “rest” could mean: (1) “rest” could refer to how people rest, that is, to the state or experiencing of “resting.” (2) “rest” could refer to the place where people rest. For the author of Hebrews, this place of “rest” is either in heaven or on a renewed earth. Before you choose how to translate “rest,” consider reading [Hebrews 4:1–11](../../heb/04/01.md) so that you can decide what the author means when he uses “rest.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/rest]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The “house” in [3:1–6](../03/01.md)

In [3:1–6](../03/01.md), the author refers to a “house.” In the author’s culture, “house” could refer to a building that people live in, or it could refer to a “household” or a group of related people. In these verses, the author uses both meanings of “house.” In [3:2](../03/02.md), [5–6](../03/05.md), “house” refers to a group of related people, God’s people. In [3:3–4](../03/03.md), “house” refers to a building that people live in. In these verses, the author uses a “house” (the building) as an example to explain more about the “house” (the people). If you do not have a word that could mean both “building” and “people,” you may need to express “house” with two different words. If so, you will need to make sure that your readers know that the author is comparing a building to people, especially in [3:3–4](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/house]])

### Rhetorical questions

The author asks several questions in this chapter (see [3:16–18](../03/16.md)). He is not asking these questions because he wants the audience to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the audience to think about the quotation from Psalm 95. In [3:16–17](../03/16.md), the second question in each verse answers the first question. In [3:18](../03/18.md), the second half of the question answers the first half of the question. For ways to translate these questions, see the notes on [3:16–18](../03/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### The quotation from Psalm 95

David wrote [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) many years after the events that the Psalm refers to. You can read the story about these events in [Num 14:1–38](../../num/14/01.md) (see also the related story in [Exodus 17:1–7](../../exo/17/01.md)). In these stories, the Israelites complain and disobey God, and God punishes them. David refers back to these stories to encourage the Israelites whom he ruled to act differently. He wanted them to listen to and obey God. The author of Hebrews quotes what David wrote for a similar reason. He wants to encourage his audience to listen to and obey God, and he shows that what David wrote still applies to his audience. Consider reading the Old Testament stories and Psalm 95 before translating this chapter. See the notes for places where the author refers directly to Psalm 95 or to the Old Testament stories. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])

### What does “for 40 years” modify?

In [3:10](../03/10.md), “for 40 years” tells how long the Israelites saw God’s works. However, in [3:17](../03/17.md), it refers to the time during which God “was upset” with the Israelites. This is not a contradiction, because the author knew that the Israelites saw God’s works and that God was upset with them during the same period of “40 years.” There is no need to harmonize these two verses. +HEB 2 18 a3a6 πέπονθεν αὐτὸς, πειρασθείς 1 who are tempted Here, **having been tempted** could identify: (1) the situation in which Jesus **suffered**. Alternate translation: “he himself had suffered when he was tempted” (2) what resulted from the “suffering.” Alternate translation: “he was tempted when he suffered” +HEB 3 intro mu26 0 # Hebrews 3 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

3. Example of the wilderness generation (3:1–4:13)
* Exhortation: The Son is greater than Moses (3:1–6)
* Exhortation: Strive to enter the rest! (3:7–4:11)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [3:7b–11](../03/07.md), [15](../03/15.md), which are quotations from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### “Today”

The quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “today.” The author mentions “today” again in [3:13](../03/13.md), [15](../03/15.md). In both of these verses, he refers to how we always call the current day “today.” So, anything that happens during the time we call “today” must happen every day, since every day is “today.” In this way, the author shows that the quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) applies to his audience every day. In these verses, translate “today” with a word or phrase that someone would use for the current day. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/biblicaltimeday]])

### Rest

The quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “rest.” In the context of the Psalm, this “rest” probably refers to the land that God promised to give to the Israelites. However, scholars debate what the author of Hebrews means when he uses the word “rest.” This is important because the author speaks much more about “rest” in chapter 4. There are two major options for what “rest” could mean: (1) “rest” could refer to how people rest, that is, to the state or experiencing of “resting.” (2) “rest” could refer to the place where people rest. For the author of Hebrews, this place of “rest” is either in heaven or on a renewed earth. Before you choose how to translate “rest,” consider reading [Hebrews 4:1–11](../../heb/04/01.md) so that you can decide what the author means when he uses “rest.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/rest]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The “house” in [3:1–6](../03/01.md)

In [3:1–6](../03/01.md), the author refers to a “house.” In the author’s culture, “house” could refer to a building that people live in, or it could refer to a “household” or a group of related people. In these verses, the author uses both meanings of “house.” In [3:2](../03/02.md), [5–6](../03/05.md), “house” refers to a group of related people, God’s people. In [3:3–4](../03/03.md), “house” refers to a building that people live in. In these verses, the author uses a “house” (the building) as an example to explain more about the “house” (the people). If you do not have a word that could mean both “building” and “people,” you may need to express “house” with two different words. If so, you will need to make sure that your readers know that the author is comparing a building to people, especially in [3:3–4](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/house]])

### Rhetorical questions

The author asks several questions in this chapter (see [3:16–18](../03/16.md)). He is not asking these questions because he wants the audience to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the audience to think about the quotation from Psalm 95. In [3:16–17](../03/16.md), the second question in each verse answers the first question. In [3:18](../03/18.md), the second half of the question answers the first half of the question. For ways to translate these questions, see the notes on [3:16–18](../03/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### The quotation from Psalm 95

David wrote [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) many years after the events that the Psalm refers to. You can read the story about these events in [Num 14:1–38](../../num/14/01.md) (see also the related story in [Exodus 17:1–7](../../exo/17/01.md)). In these stories, the Israelites complain and disobey God, and God punishes them. David refers back to these stories to encourage the Israelites whom he ruled to act differently. He wanted them to listen to and obey God. The author of Hebrews quotes what David wrote for a similar reason. He wants to encourage his audience to listen to and obey God, and he shows that what David wrote still applies to his audience. Consider reading the Old Testament stories and Psalm 95 before translating this chapter. See the notes for places where the author refers directly to Psalm 95 or to the Old Testament stories. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])

### What does “for 40 years” modify?

In [3:10](../03/10.md), “for 40 years” tells how long the Israelites saw God’s works. However, in [3:17](../03/17.md), it refers to the time during which God “was upset” with the Israelites. This is not a contradiction, because the author knew that the Israelites saw God’s works and that God was upset with them during the same period of “40 years.” There is no need to harmonize these two verses. HEB 3 1 m1cv grammar-connect-logic-result ὅθεν 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **Therefore** introduces an inference from what the author has said about Jesus in [2:5–18](../02/05.md). If your readers would misunderstand **Therefore**, you could use a word or phrase that clearly introduces an inference. Alternate translation: “As a result of all that” or “Because of those things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 3 1 tp7e figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 holy brothers Although **brothers** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all believers, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 3 1 af15 figs-possession κλήσεως ἐπουρανίου, μέτοχοι 1 you share in a heavenly calling Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that believers “share” a **heavenly calling**. Believers could “share” this **calling** with: (1) other believers. Alternate translation: “who share together in a heavenly calling” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “share with Jesus a heavenly calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ HEB 3 1 mnd4 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὁμολογίας ἡμῶν 1 of our HEB 3 2 m4dh writing-pronouns τῷ ποιήσαντι 1 Here, **the one who appointed** is God the Father. If your readers would not know who **the one who appointed** is, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “to God, who appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 3 2 my64 translate-names Μωϋσῆς 1 **Moses** is the name of a man. God had him lead the Israelites when he delivered them from being slaves in the land of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 3 2 u5qc figs-extrainfo ὡς καὶ Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 Here the author uses words that are very similar to the Greek translation of [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md). It is possible that he is thinking of that verse or directly referencing it. However, he does not introduce the words as a quotation or indicate that he is referring to another text. So, you should not include any quotation information in your translation. If you wish to refer to [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md), you could do so with a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -HEB 3 2 eqp7 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 in God’s house Here, **house** refers to a group of people, here the Israelites. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “among God’s tribe” or “in his clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 3 2 eqp7 figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 in God’s house Here, **house** figuratively refers to a group of people, here the Israelites. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “among God’s tribe” or “in his clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 2 k4u8 writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **his** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand **his**, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 3 2 wnzn translate-textvariants τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 Instead of **his house**, many ancient manuscripts have the phrase “all his house.” This phrase is in the Old Testament story about **Moses** (see [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md)). So, it is possible that scribes added “all” to **his house** because they knew this passage. Unless there is a good reason to use “all his house,” you should use **his house**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) HEB 3 3 os46 translate-versebridge 0 To help your readers understand the author’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put the general principle about buildings and builders in a first sentence and the application of that general principle in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “For every house is built by someone, and the one building the house has greater honor than the house. According to that much, since God is the one who built all things, this one has been considered worthy of greater glory than Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) @@ -275,10 +275,10 @@ HEB 3 3 w8v5 figs-abstractnouns πλείονα τιμὴν ἔχει…ὁ κα HEB 3 3 i68f τοῦ οἴκου…αὐτόν 1 Here the author uses **house** nonfiguratively to refer to a building or structure. He wants his readers to apply what is true about a **house** (the building) to the “house” (the people). If you used a different word for “house” in the previous verses, make sure that your readers know that the author is drawing a comparison between people and houses here. Alternate translation: “the structure … than the structure” HEB 3 4 wvw1 figs-activepassive πᾶς…οἶκος κατασκευάζεται ὑπό τινος 1 every house is built by someone If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **house** that is **built** rather than focusing on the person doing the “building.” Alternate translation: “someone built every house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 3 4 aya1 πᾶς…οἶκος 1 Here, just as in [3:3](../03/03.md), the author uses **house** nonfiguratively to refer to a building or structure. He wants his readers to apply what is true about a **house** (the building) to the “house” (the people). If you used a different word for “house” in the previous verses, make sure that your readers know that the author is drawing a comparison between people and houses here. Alternate translation: “every structure” -HEB 3 4 f8n8 figs-metaphor ὁ…πάντα κατασκευάσας 1 the one who built everything Here the author speaks as if everything that God created were a “house” that God **built**. He speaks in this to connect God’s act of creation with the “house” and “building” language. Use the same word or phrase here that you used for **built** earlier in the verse. If necessary, you could express the idea with an analogy. Alternate translation: “the one who was like a builder when he created all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 3 4 f8n8 figs-metaphor ὁ…πάντα κατασκευάσας 1 the one who built everything Here the author speaks as if everything that God created were a “house” that God **built**. He speaks in this to connect God’s act of creation with the “house” and “building” language. Use the same word or phrase here that you used for **built** earlier in the verse. If necessary, you could express the idea with an analogy. Alternate translation: “the one who was like a builder when he created all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 5 c8wh figs-extrainfo Μωϋσῆς μὲν πιστὸς ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ, ὡς θεράπων 1 Here, just as in [3:2](../03/02.md), the author uses words that are very similar to the Greek translation of [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md). It is possible that he is thinking of that verse or directly referencing it. However, he does not introduce the words as a quotation or indicate that he is referring to another text. So, you should not include any quotation information in your translation. If you wish to refer to [Numbers 12:7](../../num/12/07.md), you could do so with a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) HEB 3 5 zjna translate-names Μωϋσῆς 1 **Moses** is the name of a man. God had him lead the Israelites when he delivered them from being slaves in the land of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -HEB 3 5 d57q figs-metaphor ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 in God’s entire house Here, **house** refers to a group of people, here the Israelites. See how you translated **house** in [Hebrews 3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “among God’s entire tribe” or “in his entire clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 3 5 d57q figs-metaphor ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 in God’s entire house Here, **house** figuratively refers to a group of people, here the Israelites. See how you translated **house** in [Hebrews 3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “among God’s entire tribe” or “in his entire clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 5 uz5d writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **his** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand **his**, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “God’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 3 5 m4xr figs-abstractnouns εἰς μαρτύριον τῶν 1 bearing witness about the things If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **testimony**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “testify” or “proclaim.” Alternate translation: “to testify to the things that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 3 5 u37w figs-explicit τῶν λαληθησομένων 1 Here the author does not clarify what exactly is **spoken**. He may be referring to what God the Father said about the Son in chapter 1, or he could be referring in general to the good news about Jesus. If your readers need to know what is **spoken**, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the good news that would be spoken in the future” or “of the things that would be spoken about Jesus in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ HEB 3 5 gt8c figs-activepassive λαληθησομένων 1 were to be spoken o HEB 3 6 nsfg figs-ellipsis Χριστὸς…ὡς Υἱὸς 1 Here the author omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete thought. He omits these words because he stated them in the previous verse (“was faithful”). If your language needs these words to make a complete thought, you could include them here. Alternate translation: “Christ was faithful as a Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) HEB 3 6 dgt5 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς 1 Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. See how you translated this word in [1:2](../01/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) HEB 3 6 pfrj figs-explicit ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **over his house** contrasts with how Moses was “in his entire house” (see [3:5](../03/05.md)). The phrase **over his house** indicates that the **Son** rules or is in charge of the **house**. If your readers would misunderstand the implications of **over his house**, you could make them explicit. Alternate translation: “in charge of his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 3 6 djm7 figs-metaphor ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς 1 in charge of God’s house Here, **house** refers to a group of people, here God’s people. See how you translated house in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “over his clan (whose clan we are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 3 6 djm7 figs-metaphor ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς 1 in charge of God’s house Here, **house** figuratively refers to a group of people, here God’s people. See how you translated house in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “over his clan (whose clan we are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 6 x89x writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ, οὗ 1 Here, **his* and **whose** refer to God. If your readers would misunderstand **his** and **whose**, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “God’s … whose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 3 6 u94p figs-infostructure οἶκον…οὗ οἶκός ἐσμεν ἡμεῖς, ἐὰν τὴν παρρησίαν καὶ τὸ καύχημα τῆς ἐλπίδος κατάσχωμεν. 1 This sentence transitions from what the author has said about God’s **house**, Jesus, and Moses to an exhortation to continue to **hold fast**. The ULT has connected the sentence to the preceding information but put it in parentheses to indicate that it is slightly disconnected. Consider a natural way to include a transition sentence in your language. Alternate translation: “house. We are his house if we hold fast to the confidence and the boasting of our hope.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 3 6 tlak grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν 1 Here the author uses the conditional form to show that “holding fast” leads to being God’s **house**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause and effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) @@ -367,10 +367,10 @@ HEB 3 18 l1gc figs-rquestion τίσιν…ὤμοσεν μὴ εἰσελεύσ HEB 3 18 q16u ὤμοσεν μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ 1 they would not enter his rest The author uses **they would not enter into his rest** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. See how you translated “If they will enter into my rest” in [3:11](../03/11.md). Alternate translation: “did he swear, ‘they will never enter into my rest,’” HEB 3 19 impp grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, **And** introduces a summary or conclusion for the argument, especially for what the author has said in [3:16–18](../03/16.md). If your readers would misunderstand **And**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a summary or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 3 19 henz figs-infostructure βλέπομεν ὅτι οὐκ ἠδυνήθησαν εἰσελθεῖν δι’ ἀπιστίαν 1 If your language would naturally put the reason before the result, you could rearrange the sentence. The author puts **because of unbelief** last in order to emphasize it, so use a form that emphasizes this phrase. Alternate translation: “we that it was because of unbelief that they were not able to enter”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -HEB 3 19 u2mo figs-metaphor βλέπομεν 1 Here the author uses **we see** to refer to knowing or understanding something. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “we learn” or “we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 3 19 u2mo figs-metaphor βλέπομεν 1 Here the author uses **we see** figuratively to refer to knowing or understanding something. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “we learn” or “we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 19 evf1 figs-explicit εἰσελθεῖν 1 Here the author uses **enter** to refer back to the words that the quotation used. Translate **enter** the same way that you did in [3:11](../03/11.md). If your readers would misunderstand that **enter** refers back to this quotation, you could make the reference more explicit. Alternate translation: “to enter into God’s rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 3 19 x18z figs-abstractnouns δι’ ἀπιστίαν 1 because of unbelief If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **unbelief**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “did not believe” or an adjective such as “unbelieving.” Alternate translation: “because they were unbelieving” or “because they refused to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 4 intro u72n 0 # Hebrews 4 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

3. Example of the wilderness generation (3:1–4:13)
* Exhortation: Strive to enter the rest! (3:7–4:11)
* Exhortation: The power of God’s word (4:12–13)
4. Summary statement (4:14–16)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [4:3–5](../04/03.md), [7](../04/07.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### God’s rest

The author continues to refer to “rest” in this chapter. This time, he also includes how God “rested” after he created everything. Continue to translate “rest” the way you did in chapter 3. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/rest]])

### “Today”

The quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “today.” Much like in the previous chapter, the author references “today” several times (see [4:7–8](../04/07.md)). In [4:7](../04/07.md), he refers to how we always call the current day “today.” This means that the “rest” is available “today,” or right now. In [4:8](../04/08.md), the author refers to “another day” that happens after Joshua led the Israelites into the promised land. This refers again to “today” from the Psalm quotation. In these verses, translate “today” with a word or phrase that someone would use for the current day or time, and translate “day” so that it is clear that it refers to “today.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/biblicaltimeday]])

### Joshua, David, and the audience

In [4:7–9](../04/07.md), the author makes an argument that is based on sequence in time. First, Joshua led the Israelites into the promised land. Many years later, God spoke through David that people could enter the rest “today.” Finally, the author quotes these words to his audience after Jesus died and rose again. The author’s point is that what Joshua led the Israelites into could not count as “rest” because David was still speaking about entering the “rest” many years later. The author argues that this means that the words about entering the rest still apply when he himself is writing this letter. When you translate these verses, make sure that your readers understand that the author is making an argument based on sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])

### Jesus the high priest

In [4:14–15](../04/14.md), much like in [2:17](../02/17.md), the author refers to Jesus as a “priest,” here specifically a “high priest.” This is an important theme in Hebrews. In much of the rest of the letter, the author argues that Jesus is a high priest who offers a sacrifice in the heavenly sanctuary. Here the author begins to develop that theme by showing that Jesus is a sympathetic and merciful high priest. Translate “high priest” like you did in [2:17](../02/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The word of God as a sword

In [4:12](../04/12.md), the author says that God’s word is “sharper than any two-edged sword,” and it can “pierce” and “divide” people’s joints and marrow and their souls and spirits. The author makes this comparison because he wants to show that God uses his “word” to discern and judge everything, even things that are very hard to know or understand. Just like a sharp sword can cut anything apart, even things that are securely fastened together, so God uses his “word” to get to the core of what every person is and thinks. If possible, preserve the comparison between God’s word and a sharp blade, since this is an important metaphor that appears in other biblical books. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Who “speaks” the quotations?

In [4:3–5](../04/03.md), [7](../04/07.md), the author refers to the person who “speaks” the quotations as “he.” Since the author identified the Holy Spirit as the one who “speaks” Psalm 95, it is likely that he is referring to the Holy Spirit again as the speaker of these quotations. However, it is also possible that the author means that God considered as a whole speaks these quotations, or perhaps the author is avoiding identifying the speaker. If possible, preserve the ambiguity by referring simply to “he” or an unnamed person. If necessary, you could make it more explicit that the “Holy Spirit” or “God” speaks these words. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])

### The logic of [4:3–7](../04/03.md)

In [4:3–7](../04/03.md), the author uses [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) to comment on [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md). This is a complicated argument, and it is likely that the author is making several points.

First (1), he could be identifying the “rest” as the result of God’s “works.” In other words, the “rest” is something that God finished and then enjoyed on the seventh day. The author uses [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) to show that the “rest” has been completed since God created the world. This means that the “rest” to which [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md) refers has been available since then. This explains why the author says that the “rest” remains for some to enter (see [4:6](../04/06.md)).

Second (2), he could be using what [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) says about “rest” to define what “rest” means in [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md). In the Psalm, the “rest” would have originally referred primarily to the promised land. However, the author uses how God “rested” on the seventh day to define the “rest” primarily as something that people do with God rather than as a place. This explains why the author defines “entering the rest” as “resting from works” (see [4:10](../04/10.md)).

Since the author does not include much explanation and instead quotes the two verses together, you should also put the two verses together without including much explanation. See the notes for specific translation decisions. The author gives some conclusions in [4:6–10](../04/06.md), so focus on translating these verses clearly. +HEB 4 intro u72n 0 # Hebrews 4 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

3. Example of the wilderness generation (3:1–4:13)
* Exhortation: Strive to enter the rest! (3:7–4:11)
* Exhortation: The power of God’s word (4:12–13)
4. Summary statement (4:14–16)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [4:3–5](../04/03.md), [7](../04/07.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### God’s rest

The author continues to refer to “rest” in this chapter. This time, he also includes how God “rested” after he created everything. Continue to translate “rest” the way you did in chapter 3. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/rest]])

### “Today”

The quotation from [Psalm 95](../../psa/95/01.md) includes the word “today.” Much like in the previous chapter, the author references “today” several times (see [4:7–8](../04/07.md)). In [4:7](../04/07.md), he refers to how we always call the current day “today.” This means that the “rest” is available “today,” or right now. In [4:8](../04/08.md), the author refers to “another day” that happens after Joshua led the Israelites into the promised land. This refers again to “today” from the Psalm quotation. In these verses, translate “today” with a word or phrase that someone would use for the current day or time, and translate “day” so that it is clear that it refers to “today.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/biblicaltimeday]])

### Joshua, David, and the audience

In [4:7–9](../04/07.md), the author makes an argument that is based on sequence in time. First, Joshua led the Israelites into the promised land. Many years later, God spoke through David that people could enter the rest “today.” Finally, the author quotes these words to his audience after Jesus died and rose again. The author’s point is that what Joshua led the Israelites into could not count as “rest” because David was still speaking about entering the “rest” many years later. The author argues that this means that the words about entering the rest still apply when he himself is writing this letter. When you translate these verses, make sure that your readers understand that the author is making an argument based on sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])

### Jesus the high priest

In [4:14–15](../04/14.md), much like in [2:17](../02/17.md), the author refers to Jesus as a “priest,” here specifically a “high priest.” This is an important theme in Hebrews. In much of the rest of the letter, the author argues that Jesus is a high priest who offers a sacrifice in the heavenly sanctuary. Here the author begins to develop that theme by showing that Jesus is a sympathetic and merciful high priest. Translate “high priest” like you did in [2:17](../02/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The word of God as a sword

In [4:12](../04/12.md), the author says that God’s word is “sharper than any two-edged sword,” and it can “pierce” and “divide” people’s joints and marrow and their souls and spirits. The author makes this comparison because he wants to show that God uses his “word” to discern and judge everything, even things that are very hard to know or understand. Just like a sharp sword can cut anything apart, even things that are securely fastened together, so God uses his “word” to get to the core of what every person is and thinks. If possible, preserve the comparison between God’s word and a sharp blade, since this is an important metaphor that appears in other biblical books. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Who “speaks” the quotations?

In [4:3–5](../04/03.md), [7](../04/07.md), the author refers to the person who “speaks” the quotations as “he.” Since the author identified the Holy Spirit as the one who “speaks” Psalm 95, it is likely that he is referring to the Holy Spirit again as the speaker of these quotations. However, it is also possible that the author means that God considered as a whole speaks these quotations, or perhaps the author is avoiding identifying the speaker. If possible, preserve the ambiguity by referring simply to “he” or an unnamed person. If necessary, you could make it more explicit that the “Holy Spirit” or “God” speaks these words. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])

### The logic of [4:3–7](../04/03.md)

In [4:3–7](../04/03.md), the author uses [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) to comment on [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md). This is a complicated argument, and it is likely that the author is making several points.

First (1), he could be identifying the “rest” as the result of God’s “works.” In other words, the “rest” is something that God finished and then enjoyed on the seventh day. The author uses [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) to show that the “rest” has been completed since God created the world. This means that the “rest” to which [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md) refers has been available since then. This explains why the author says that the “rest” remains for some to enter (see [4:6](../04/06.md)).

Second (2), he could be using what [Genesis 2:2](../../gen/02/02.md) says about “rest” to define what “rest” means in [Psalm 95:11](../../psa/95/11.md). In the Psalm, the “rest” would have originally referred primarily to the promised land. However, the author uses how God “rested” on the seventh day to define the “rest” primarily as something that people do with God rather than as a place. This explains why the author defines “entering the rest” as “resting from works” (see [4:10](../04/10.md)).

Since the author does not include much explanation and instead quotes the two verses together, you should also put the two verses together without including much explanation. See the notes for specific translation decisions. The author gives some conclusions in [4:6–10](../04/06.md), so focus on translating these verses clearly. HEB 4 1 ay25 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore Here, **Therefore** introduces an exhortation that is based on everything that the author has said about the Israelite ancestors in [3:7–19](../03/07.md). If your readers would misunderstand **Therefore**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an exhortation that is based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 4 1 n98m figs-doublenegatives φοβηθῶμεν…μήποτε καταλειπομένης 1 Connecting Statement: If your readers would misunderstand why the author puts two negative words together, you could express **be afraid lest** with a positive statement. The author uses this construction for emphasis, so use an emphatic form in your language. Alternate translation: “let us be careful so that while there remains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) HEB 4 1 ti1x figs-idiom μήποτε καταλειπομένης ἐπαγγελίας εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ 1 When a **promise** **remains**, people can still receive what is promised. In other words, the promise is still valid or true. If your readers would misunderstand a **promise** remaining, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “lest while a promise to enter into his rest is still valid” or “lest while God still offers a promise to enter into his rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -384,11 +384,11 @@ HEB 4 2 zc7k figs-ellipsis καθάπερ κἀκεῖνοι 1 This phrase leav HEB 4 2 znk9 writing-pronouns κἀκεῖνοι…ἐκείνους 1 as they were Here, **them** refers to the Israelites whom God led out of Egypt and who died in the wilderness without entering the rest (see [3:16–19](../03/16.md)). If your readers would not know to whom **them** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “to the Israelite ancestors also … them” or “to that generation also … them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 4 2 qtgc figs-possession ὁ λόγος τῆς ἀκοῆς 1 Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **message** that someone, in this case the Israelite ancestors, “heard.” If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the message that they heard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 4 2 zza4 grammar-connect-logic-result μὴ συνκεκερασμένους 1 But that message did not benefit those who did not unite in faith with those who obeyed Here, **not having been mixed** introduces the reason why **the message** did not **benefit them**. If your readers not infer this relationship, you could express it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it had not been mixed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -HEB 4 2 vexi translate-unknown μὴ συνκεκερασμένους τῇ πίστει τοῖς ἀκούσασιν 1 Here, **not having been joined** refers back to **them**, who are not **joined** with **those who heard** as part of the group of those who believe. In this construction, **faith** can refer to: (1) what those who are **joined** have in common. Alternate translation: “not having been joined as people with faith to those who heard it” (2) what does the “joining.” Alternate translation: “not having been joined by faith to those who heard it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +HEB 4 2 vexi translate-unknown μὴ συνκεκερασμένους τῇ πίστει τοῖς ἀκούσασιν 1 Here, **not having been joined** refers back to **them**, who are not **joined** with **those who heard** as part of the group of those who believe. In this construction, **faith** can refer to: (1) what those who are **joined** have in common. Alternate translation: “not having been joined as people with faith to those who heard it” (2) what does the “joining.” Alternate translation: “not having been joined by faith to those who heard it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 4 2 fzjj translate-textvariants μὴ συνκεκερασμένους τῇ πίστει τοῖς ἀκούσασιν 1 Most early manuscripts make **not having been joined** refer back to **them**. However, a few early manuscripts make **not having been joined** refer back to **the message**. In this case, the clause would refer to how **those who heard** the message did not join **faith** to it when they heard it. In other words, they did not believe what they heard. However, the option that the ULT follows has the most support, so it is best to make **not having been joined** refer back to **them**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) HEB 4 2 zwpf figs-activepassive μὴ συνκεκερασμένους 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **joined** rather than focusing on the person doing the “joining.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” or they themselves did it. Alternate translation: “not having joined themselves” or “God not having joined them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 4 2 uinq figs-abstractnouns τῇ πίστει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “in trusting it” or “in believing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 4 3 n6dw grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **For** introduces how one does “benefit” from hearing the “good news” ([4:2](../04/02.md)). It is those who “believe” who are able to **enter into rest**. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +HEB 4 3 n6dw grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **For** introduces how one does “benefit” from hearing the “good news” ([4:2](../04/02.md)). It is those who “believe” who are able to **enter into rest**. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 4 3 w6t4 figs-explicit εἰσερχόμεθα…εἰς κατάπαυσιν, οἱ πιστεύσαντες 1 we who have believed enter that rest Here, **rest** could refer to: (1) the state of “resting.” Alternate translation: “we who have believed participate in the way that God rests” or “we who have believed rest” (2) the place where people rest, particularly the land that God promised to give to his people. Alternate translation: “we who have believed enter into the resting place” or “we who have believed enter into the land of rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 4 3 egfo figs-explicit καθὼς εἴρηκεν 1 Here, **just as** indicates that the quotation will support the claim that **we who have believed enter into rest**. However, the quotation is a negative statement about how the Israelite ancestors will not **enter into rest**. The quotation could support the claim by: (1) proving the opposite point. Since the Israelite ancestors did not enter because they did not believe (see [3:19](../03/19.md)), that means that those who believe can enter. Alternate translation: “which you know because he said this about those who did not believe:” (2) proving that the **rest** is still available. In other words, because the Israelite ancestors did not **enter**, someone still can **enter**. Alternate translation: “which you can tell is still available because he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 4 3 x2kq writing-quotations καθὼς εἴρηκεν 1 just as he said Here the author uses **just as he said** to requote a part of the quotation that he introduced earlier (see especially [3:11](../03/11.md)). If your readers would misunderstand that the author is requoting the previous quotation to focus on a specific portion of it, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that has already been quoted. Alternate translation: “just as he said in what I already quoted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) @@ -450,8 +450,8 @@ HEB 4 11 bmg5 figs-explicit εἰσελθεῖν εἰς ἐκείνην τὴν HEB 4 11 rtj7 figs-metaphor ἐν…πέσῃ 1 will fall into the kind of disobedience that they did Here the author speaks as if **disobedience** were a hole that a person could physically **fall into**. This “falling into” the hole of **disobedience** keeps a person from reaching their goal or arriving at their destination. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “might fail by following” or “might follow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 4 11 eoso figs-possession τῷ αὐτῷ…ὑποδείγματι…τῆς ἀπειθείας 1 Here the author uses the possessive form to show that the **example** is the **disobedience**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. The idea is that the Israelite ancestors provided the **example** of **disobedience** that we should not follow. Alternate translation: “the same thing, which is disobedience” or “disobedience that is like that of the Israelite ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 4 11 uznd figs-abstractnouns τῷ αὐτῷ…ὑποδείγματι…τῆς ἀπειθείας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **disobedience**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “disobey.” Alternate translation: “disobeying in the same way that they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 4 12 iwtk grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **For** introduces a further reason for why we need to “be eager” ([4:11](../04/11.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the basis for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “We should do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -HEB 4 12 h5d2 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God is living Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If your readers would misunderstand **word**, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of God” or “what God says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 4 12 iwtk grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **For** introduces a further reason for why we need to “be eager” ([4:11](../04/11.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the basis for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “We should do that because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +HEB 4 12 h5d2 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God is living Here, **word** figuratively represents what someone says in words. If your readers would misunderstand **word**, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of God” or “what God says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 4 12 hnc2 figs-possession ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the author uses a possessive to describe a **word** that: (1) **God** speaks. Alternate translation: “the word that God speaks” (2) is **God**. Alternate translation: “the divine Word” or “God the Word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 4 12 j9qy figs-personification ζῶν…καὶ ἐνεργὴς…διϊκνούμενος…καὶ κριτικὸς 1 living and active In these phrases, the author describes the **word of God** as if it were a person that was **living and active** and that could “pierce” and **judge** other people. He speaks in this way to show that God accomplishes these things through his **word**, that is, when he speaks. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea by making God the subject of these actions or by using analogy form. Alternate translation: “is from the living and active God … God uses it to pierce … God uses it to judge” or “is like a living and active person … piercing like a person pierces … and able, like a person, to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) HEB 4 12 g4tc figs-metaphor τομώτερος, ὑπὲρ πᾶσαν μάχαιραν δίστομον, καὶ διϊκνούμενος ἄχρι μερισμοῦ 1 sharper than any two-edged sword Here the author compares the **word of God** to a **sword** that has two edges. God’s word is even **sharper** than that kind of sword, which means it is even better at **piercing**. The author uses this figure of speech to show how good the **word of God** is at discerning and judging humans. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “is like a very sharp two-edged sword that pierces to the dividing” or “able to distinguish what is wrong from what is right, including even the dividing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -467,9 +467,9 @@ HEB 4 13 nx6n figs-activepassive οὐκ ἔστιν κτίσις ἀφανὴς HEB 4 13 f3h1 figs-metaphor πάντα…γυμνὰ καὶ τετραχηλισμένα 1 everything is bare and open Here the author speaks about **all {things}** as if they were a naked person whose body was **bare** for all to see. He also speaks of **all {things}** as if someone had pulled another person’s head back to “lay open” his or her neck. Both of these expressions indicate that God sees and knows everything about **all {things}**. If your readers would misunderstand either of these expressions, you could use comparable metaphors or express the ideas nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “all things are visible and revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 4 13 yk64 figs-doublet γυμνὰ καὶ τετραχηλισμένα 1 bare and open These two terms mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize that God sees and knows everything. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these ideas, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “are visible” or “are revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 4 13 sltw figs-activepassive τετραχηλισμένα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since the author is describing a characteristic of **all {things}**, avoid stating a subject here. It may be best to translate **laid open** with an adjective that has a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “open” or “visible” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 4 13 i9hh figs-metonymy τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 to the eyes of the one to whom we must give account Here, **eyes** refers to seeing or knowing. If your readers would misunderstand **eyes**, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “to the sight of him” or “for him to know, who is the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 4 13 i9hh figs-metonymy τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς αὐτοῦ 1 to the eyes of the one to whom we must give account Here, **eyes** figuratively refers to seeing or knowing. If your readers would misunderstand **eyes**, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “to the sight of him” or “for him to know, who is the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 4 13 k8k0 figs-idiom πρὸς ὃν ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος 1 This phrase could mean: (1) that God is the one whom the author is speaking about to his audience. The **word** here would refer to the “words” that the author is speaking to his audience. Alternate translation: “about whom we are speaking” (2) that God is one whom the audience must relate to or deal with. Alternate translation: “with whom we have to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 4 14 iv8x grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, **Therefore** refers back to what the author already said about how Jesus is a **high priest** (see [2:17–3:1](../02/17.md)). It may refer especially to [3:1](../03/01.md), where the author stated that Jesus is “the high priest of our confession.” So, **Therefore** introduces how the author wants his audience to act, given that Jesus is a **great high priest**. If your readers would misunderstand **Therefore**, you could use a word or phrase that resumes a previous topic, or you could use a word or phrase that introduces the result or consequence of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of all that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +HEB 4 14 iv8x grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, **Therefore** refers back to what the author already said about how Jesus is a **high priest** (see [2:17–3:1](../02/17.md)). It may refer especially to [3:1](../03/01.md), where the author stated that Jesus is “the high priest of our confession.” So, **Therefore** introduces how the author wants his audience to act, given that Jesus is a **great high priest**. If your readers would misunderstand **Therefore**, you could use a word or phrase that resumes a previous topic, or you could use a word or phrase that introduces the result or consequence of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of all that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 4 14 spfu grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, **having** introduces a reason for the exhortation to **firmly hold**. If your readers would misunderstand this relationship, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “since we have” or “because we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 4 14 a51p figs-go διεληλυθότα τοὺς οὐρανούς 1 who has passed through the heavens Here, **passed through** refers to travel or movement within a specific area, here **the heavens**. It does not necessarily mean that Jesus traveled through and then left **the heavens**. Use a word that you would use for traveling in a specific direction through an area. Alternate translation: “who has gone through the heavens” or “who has traveled through the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 4 14 ejwy figs-explicit τοὺς οὐρανούς 1 Many people in the author’s culture believed that the space that they called “heaven” contained multiple layers or spheres of individual **heavens**. Paul speaks this way in [2 Corinthians 12:2](../../2co/12/02.md). Here, the author uses this language without clarifying how many **heavens** there are. The main point is that Jesus **passed through** these **heavens** to where God dwells. Often, this place where God dwells is in the highest of the **heavens**. Since the author does not include details about the **heavens**, translate **heavens** with a word or phrase that refers to all of heavenly space, including the idea of multiple **heavens** if possible. Alternate translation: “the heavenly realm” or “the heavenly spaces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -487,14 +487,14 @@ HEB 4 15 fve3 χωρὶς ἁμαρτίας 1 he is without sin Alternate trans HEB 4 16 ujt6 grammar-connect-logic-result προσερχώμεθα οὖν 1 Here, **then** introduces an exhortation that is based [4:14–15](../04/14.md). If your readers would misunderstand **then**, you could use a word or phrase that does introduce an exhortation. Alternate translation: “Therefore, let us approach” or “Because of that, let us approach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 4 16 sy6y figs-go προσερχώμεθα οὖν μετὰ παρρησίας τῷ θρόνῳ τῆς χάριτος 1 Here, **approach** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author wants believers to **approach** God’s **throne** in heaven. This means that they enter into God’s presence. It does not mean that they enter into heaven to be right next to the **throne**. If your readers would misunderstand **approach**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someone’s presence. Alternate translation: “Let us then with confidence go before the throne of grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 4 16 h49r figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “boldly” or “confidently.” Alternate translation: “confidently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 4 16 aj1p figs-metonymy τῷ θρόνῳ 1 to the throne of grace Here, **throne** refers to the one sitting on the **throne**: God. If your readers would misunderstand **throne**, you could clarify that it refers to God on his **throne**. Alternate translation: “to God on his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 4 16 aj1p figs-metonymy τῷ θρόνῳ 1 to the throne of grace Here, **throne** refers figuratively to the one sitting on the **throne**: God. If your readers would misunderstand **throne**, you could clarify that it refers to God on his **throne**. Alternate translation: “to God on his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 4 16 s6vp figs-possession τῷ θρόνῳ τῆς χάριτος 1 Here the author uses the possessive form to describe how **grace** comes from God on the **throne**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “to throne from which grace comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 4 16 e6nb figs-abstractnouns τῷ θρόνῳ τῆς χάριτος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **grace**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “gracious” or an adverb such as “graciously.” Alternate translation: “to the gracious throne” or “to throne where God rules graciously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 4 16 py6d figs-abstractnouns λάβωμεν ἔλεος, καὶ χάριν εὕρωμεν, εἰς εὔκαιρον βοήθειαν 1 we may receive mercy and find grace to help in time of need If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **mercy**, **grace**, and **help**, you could express the idea by using verbs or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “God may be merciful and gracious to us to help us when we need it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 4 16 x3hv figs-doublet λάβωμεν ἔλεος, καὶ χάριν εὕρωμεν 1 The two phrases **receive mercy** and **find grace** mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize how God will act kindly and lovingly toward those who believe in Jesus. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “we may receive grace” or “we may receive favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 4 16 f149 figs-idiom χάριν εὕρωμεν 1 Here, **find grace** refers to receiving **grace** from someone. If your readers would misunderstand **find grace**, you could express the idea in a natural way in your language. Alternate translation: “grace” or “experience grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 4 16 n654 translate-unknown εὔκαιρον βοήθειαν 1 Here, **timely** refers to something that happens at just the right time. Here, it means that the **help** happens just when someone needs that **help**. If your readers would misunderstand **timely**, you could use a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “help at the right time” or “well-timed help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 5 intro b67j 0 # Hebrews 5 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: The Son becomes high priest (5:1–10)
* Exhortation: Make sure to persevere! (5:11–6:12)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [5:5–6](../05/05.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### High priest

In [5:1–4](../05/01.md), the author explains what it means to be a high priest: (1) he must offer things to God, (2) he must be sympathetic to others because he also experiences weakness, and (3) he must be appointed by God. The author then applies these qualifications and duties to Jesus ([5:5–10](../05/05.md)): (1) he was appointed by God, (2) he suffered like all humans do, and (3) he himself is the offering that brings eternal salvation. Make that your translation clearly draws connections what high priests experience and do and what Jesus has experienced and done. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])

### Melchizedek

In the entire Old Testament, only two passages mention Melchizedek: [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md) and [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). In this chapter, the author quotes from the Psalm, and in chapter 7 he will refer to Genesis. Melchizedek was a king and priest in the city of Salem. Abraham, the ancestor of the Israelites, met him and gave him a gift. Much later, the author of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md) writes how God appointed the king of Israel (David) to be a priest like Melchizedek. Since the author simply introduces Melchizedek here and saves his explanation for chapter 7, you also should simply refer to him here. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/melchizedek]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Metaphor with “milk” and “solid food”

In [5:12–14](../05/12.md), the author uses “milk” to refer to basic teachings about God and about what is right and wrong. He uses “solid food” to refer to the more complex teachings. Since “infants” are the ones who drink “milk” in the author’s culture, he refers to those who only know the basic teachings as “infants.” Those who know complex teachings are “mature” adults who eat “solid food.” If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, if possible use a figure of speech that contrasts between adults and little children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Jesus “learning obedience” and “being made perfect”

In [5:8–9](../05/08.md), the author states that Jesus “learned obedience” and was “made perfect.” These statements do not mean that Jesus failed to obey and sometimes sinned before this time. Instead, “learning obedience” refers to fully understanding or experiencing what obedience means, and being “made perfect” refers to “perfect” qualifications for a position or office. So, Jesus fully experienced what it means to obey God, and God made him a “perfect” fit for the office of high priest. Translate these phrases in such a way that your readers will not think that Jesus went from being disobedient and sinful to obedient and perfect. +HEB 5 intro b67j 0 # Hebrews 5 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: The Son becomes high priest (5:1–10)
* Exhortation: Make sure to persevere! (5:11–6:12)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [5:5–6](../05/05.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### High priest

In [5:1–4](../05/01.md), the author explains what it means to be a high priest: (1) he must offer things to God, (2) he must be sympathetic to others because he also experiences weakness, and (3) he must be appointed by God. The author then applies these qualifications and duties to Jesus ([5:5–10](../05/05.md)): (1) he was appointed by God, (2) he suffered like all humans do, and (3) he himself is the offering that brings eternal salvation. Make that your translation clearly draws connections what high priests experience and do and what Jesus has experienced and done. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])

### Melchizedek

In the entire Old Testament, only two passages mention Melchizedek: [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md) and [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). In this chapter, the author quotes from the Psalm, and in chapter 7 he will refer to Genesis. Melchizedek was a king and priest in the city of Salem. Abraham, the ancestor of the Israelites, met him and gave him a gift. Much later, the author of [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md) writes how God appointed the king of Israel (David) to be a priest like Melchizedek. Since the author simply introduces Melchizedek here and saves his explanation for chapter 7, you also should simply refer to him here. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/melchizedek]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Metaphor with “milk” and “solid food”

In [5:12–14](../05/12.md), the author uses “milk” to refer figuratively to basic teachings about God and about what is right and wrong. He uses “solid food” to refer figuratively to the more complex teachings. Since “infants” are the ones who drink “milk” in the author’s culture, he refers to those who only know the basic teachings as “infants.” Those who know complex teachings are “mature” adults who eat “solid food.” If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, if possible use a figure of speech that contrasts between adults and little children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Jesus “learning obedience” and “being made perfect”

In [5:8–9](../05/08.md), the author states that Jesus “learned obedience” and was “made perfect.” These statements do not mean that Jesus failed to obey and sometimes sinned before this time. Instead, “learning obedience” refers to fully understanding or experiencing what obedience means, and being “made perfect” refers to “perfect” qualifications for a position or office. So, Jesus fully experienced what it means to obey God, and God made him a “perfect” fit for the office of high priest. Translate these phrases in such a way that your readers will not think that Jesus went from being disobedient and sinful to obedient and perfect. HEB 5 1 dn18 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **For** indicates that the author is going to explain more about high priests and about how Jesus is a high priest. It also signals that the author is beginning a new section. Use a word or phrase that indicates that a new section is beginning, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 5 1 whq1 figs-activepassive λαμβανόμενος 1 chosen from among people If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **taken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “taking.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God taking him” or “whom God takes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 5 1 u4gd figs-gendernotations ἐξ ἀνθρώπων…ὑπὲρ ἀνθρώπων 1 Although **men** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all the people in a group, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **men**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “from among humans on the behalf of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -512,7 +512,7 @@ HEB 5 3 e806 writing-pronouns αὐτὴν 1 Here, **this** refers back to “w HEB 5 3 q5xi figs-activepassive ὀφείλει 1 he also is required If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the priest, who is **obligated** rather than focusing on the person doing the “obligating.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God commands him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 5 3 sogb figs-infostructure ὀφείλει, καθὼς περὶ τοῦ λαοῦ οὕτως καὶ περὶ αὑτοῦ, προσφέρειν περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν 1 If the structure of this sentence would confuse your readers, you could rearrange the elements so that they come in a more natural order. The author is emphasizing the comparison between the people and the priest, so use a form that emphasizes those elements. Alternate translation: “he is obligated to offer sacrifices for sins, just as for the people, so also for himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 5 3 qlq6 figs-idiom προσφέρειν περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν 1 Here, **{sacrifices} for sins** refers to a specific category of sacrifice that dealt with people’s **sins**. You can read more about this kind of sacrifice in [Leviticus 16](../../lev/16/01.md). If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use a word or phrase that refers clearly to **sacrifices** that are meant to deal with **sins**. Alternate translation: “to offer sin offerings” or “to offer sacrifices to deal with sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 5 4 n2e1 figs-metonymy λαμβάνει τὴν τιμήν 1 takes this honor Here, the word **honor** refers to the position that gives the person **honor**. This position is that of high priest. If your readers would misunderstand **honor**, you could express the idea by referring to the position of high priest, if possible including the idea that this is an “honored” position. Alternate translation: “takes the honor of being a high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 5 4 n2e1 figs-metonymy λαμβάνει τὴν τιμήν 1 takes this honor Here, the word **honor** figuratively refers to the position that gives the person **honor**. This position is that of high priest. If your readers would misunderstand **honor**, you could express the idea by referring to the position of high priest, if possible including the idea that this is an “honored” position. Alternate translation: “takes the honor of being a high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 5 4 rvnj figs-abstractnouns τὴν τιμήν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **honorable**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “honorable.” Alternate translation: “becoming honorable in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 5 4 lswf figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but he receives this honor only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) HEB 5 4 cj9l grammar-connect-logic-result καλούμενος 1 Here, the phrase **being called** introduces something that could: (1) give the real reason why a person becomes a high priest. Alternate translation: “because he is called” (2) give the situation in which a person actually becomes a high priest. Alternate translation: “when he is called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ HEB 5 6 pb9k figs-yousingular σὺ 1 Because the quotation is referring to one HEB 5 6 ede5 translate-unknown κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ 1 after the manner of Melchizedek Here, the word **order** refers to requirements and duties that go along with a specific office or position. If someone serves **according to the order of** someone else, that means that he or she meets the same requirements and perform the same duties that that person did. If your readers would misunderstand **according to the order of**, you could use a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest” or “with a priesthood just like Melchizedek’s priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 5 6 a4sl translate-names Μελχισέδεκ 1 The word **Melchizedek** is the name of a man. He is mentioned in the Scriptures only in Hebrews and in [Genesis 14:18–20](../../GEN/14/18.md). The author will give many more details about **Melchizedek** in chapter 7, so leave any explanation for that chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 5 7 alje writing-pronouns ὃς 1 Here, the word **He** refers back to Christ. If your readers would misunderstand **He**, you could make to whom it refers explicit. Alternate translation: “Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -HEB 5 7 mv2c figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 During the days of his flesh Here, the words **the days** refer to an undefined period of time, and the word **flesh** refers to Jesus’s earthly life. The phrase as a whole refers to the time during which Jesus had a human body that could die, in contrast to how he now has a human body that is glorious and can never die. Alternate translation: “when he lived on earth” or “during the time when he was mortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 5 7 mv2c figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 During the days of his flesh Here, the words **the days** refer to an undefined period of time, and the word **flesh** figuratively refers to Jesus’s earthly life. The phrase as a whole refers to the time during which Jesus had a human body that could die, in contrast to how he now has a human body that is glorious and can never die. Alternate translation: “when he lived on earth” or “during the time when he was mortal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 5 7 iel9 figs-doublet δεήσεις τε καὶ ἱκετηρίας 1 prayers and requests These two terms mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize the how much Jesus prayed to God. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these prayers, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “many prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 5 7 n9sg figs-abstractnouns δεήσεις τε καὶ ἱκετηρίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **prayers** and **requests**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “pray” and “request.” Alternate translation: “what he both prayed and requested” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 5 7 bkfz translate-unknown μετὰ κραυγῆς ἰσχυρᾶς καὶ δακρύων 1 Here, the phrase **loud cries** refers to speech at a high volume. Usually, **loud cries** are used when a person feels very strongly about something. The word **tears** refers to how a person weeps when they feel strong emotions, particularly sad ones. If your readers would misunderstand **with loud cries and tears**, you could use words that show that Jesus felt very strongly about the **prayers and requests**, including experiencing sadness and concern. Alternate translation: “as he wept and shouted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -558,7 +558,7 @@ HEB 5 11 cm78 figs-idiom περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος 1 HEB 5 11 q45w translate-unknown δυσερμήνευτος λέγειν 1 Here, the phrase **hard to speak {about}** describes a topic that the speaker and the audience find difficult. Here, the author specifically focuses on how the audience will find the topic difficult. If your readers would misunderstand **hard to speak {about}**, you could use a phrase that makes the idea clearer. Alternate translation: “difficult to discuss” or “hard to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 5 11 r2u2 figs-metaphor νωθροὶ γεγόνατε ταῖς ἀκοαῖς 1 you have become dull in hearing Here the author speaks as if **hearing** could **become dull**, just as if it were a sharp tool that became **dull** and no longer cut things well. He speaks in this way to describe their **hearing** as ineffective and slow. If your readers would misunderstand **dull in {your} hearing**, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “you have become slow in your hearing” or “your hearing does not work as it should” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 5 11 jkpj figs-abstractnouns ταῖς ἀκοαῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **hearing**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “hear” or “listen.” Alternate translation: “when you listen” or “whenever you hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 5 12 idsj grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces explanation about how the audience has “become dull” in their “hearing” ([5:11](../05/11.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +HEB 5 12 idsj grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces explanation about how the audience has “become dull” in their “hearing” ([5:11](../05/11.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 5 12 dnzj figs-idiom διὰ τὸν χρόνον 1 Here, the phrase **by this time** refers to a period of time that is long enough for a person to become good at something. In other words, the author reminds the audience that they have been Christians for enough time that they should be able to teach others. If your readers would misunderstand **by this time**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies a period of time that is long enough to become a teacher. Alternate translation: “you have had enough time that” or “after this many years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 5 12 tcg0 figs-abstractnouns πάλιν χρείαν ἔχετε τοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **need**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “you again need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 5 12 rt4n figs-abstractnouns τὰ στοιχεῖα τῆς ἀρχῆς τῶν λογίων τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **principles** and **oracles**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the elementary parts of what God has declared” or “the first things that you learned about God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -576,7 +576,7 @@ HEB 5 14 k2j1 figs-exmetaphor τελείων…ἐστιν ἡ στερεὰ τ HEB 5 14 e3yh figs-idiom διὰ τὴν ἕξιν 1 who because of their maturity have their understanding trained for distinguishing good from evil Here, the phrase **through habit** refers to how a person develops skills or abilities by repeating the same thing over and over again. If your readers would misunderstand **through habit**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to learning by repetition. Alternate translation: “by means of repetition” or “through consistent practice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 5 14 hhzb figs-metaphor γεγυμνασμένα 1 Here, the word **trained** is often used for how athletes practice so that their bodies become stronger and better at their sport. If your readers would misunderstand how the author applies this language to **senses**, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “educated” or “developed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 5 14 mq0p translate-unknown τὰ αἰσθητήρια 1 Here, the word **senses** identifies all the ways in which people receive information about the world around them, including tasting, touching, and hearing. The author’s point here is that people can learn to tell between what is **good** and what is **evil** by using these **senses**. If your readers would misunderstand **senses**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the part or parts of the person that experience the world around him or her. Alternate translation: “their faculties” or “themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 6 intro nz5i 0 # Hebrews 6 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Exhortation: Make sure to persevere! (5:11–6:12)
* Exhortation: God’s promise is certain (6:13–20)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The promise to Abraham ([6:13–15](../06/13.md))

In [6:13–14](../06/13.md), the author speaks about God’s promise to Abraham. He quotes directly from [Genesis 22:17](../gen/22/17.md), but he also has in mind other times when God made similar promises to Abraham: [Genesis 12:1–3](../gen/12/01.md); [15:1–21](../gen/15/01.md); [17:1–8](../gen/17/01.md). The author’s point is that God “swore by himself,” which means that he himself guaranteed what he promised. Abraham waited for God to fulfill that promise, and God eventually did so when he gave Abraham a son and then numerous descendants. If your readers would need some of this information to understand the passage, you could include it in a footnote.

### “Swearing” and the “oath”

In [6:13–18](../06/13.md), the author refers to “swearing” and using an “oath.” In this context, “swearing” by someone refers to the action of guaranteeing a promise, while the “oath” refers to the guaranteeing words themselves. When someone makes an “oath,” they “swear by” a person or thing that is more powerful than they are. What they are saying is that the powerful person or thing will punish them if they are lying. If your readers would misunderstand “swearing” and “oath,” you could use language that comes from how people guarantee what they say in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/oath]])

### The heavenly sanctuary

In [6:19–20](../06/19.md), the author first refers to the heavenly sanctuary. He will discuss this sanctuary more in the following chapters. At this point, he simply refers to how our “hope” “enters” where Jesus himself “entered”: the area “inside” the “curtain.” In the author’s culture, a sanctuary would have solid wall or a cloth “curtain” that marked off the most sacred part of the sanctuary from the rest of the structure. This part of the sanctuary is most sacred because it is where God is most strongly present. Use words that would clearly refer to the most sacred part of a sanctuary. Since the author describes the heavenly sanctuary in words that come from how the tabernacle is described in the Old Testament, you should preserve as much of the details as possible (such as a “curtain” instead of a wall). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/curtain]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The farming metaphor in [6:7–8](../06/07.md)

In these verses, the author uses land that people use to grow food as an analogy for how people respond to God’s gifts and his message about salvation. In [6:7](../06/07.md), the author describes farmland that grows helpful crops when rain falls on it. This good farmland is like people who hear the good news, believe it, and then obey God. In [6:8](../06/08.md), the author describes farmland that grows plants that are not useful and that can hurt people. A farmer will set these plants on fire to destroy them. This bad farmland is like people who hear the good news and receive gifts from God but fail to firmly believe the good news and obey God. God will punish them, much like the farmer burns the bad plants. If your readers would misunderstand this analogy, you could make the comparison more explicit in the text.

### Hope as an anchor

In [6:19](../06/19.md), the author states that “hope” has the qualities of an “anchor.” An anchor is a heavy piece of metal attached to the end of a rope. The other end of the rope is tied to a boat, and the anchor is dropped over the edge so that its weight keeps the boat from moving around or drifting away. The author’s point is that hope functions like an anchor for believers: it keeps them focused on Jesus and what God has promised, and they do not “drift away” from what they believe (see the warning in [2:1](../02/01.md)). If your readers would not know what an “anchor” is, you could compare hope to some other thing in your culture that holds things in place.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### The “foundational” teachings in [6:1–2](../06/01.md)

In these verses, the author lists six things that are “foundational” or “elementary” teachings. These are not the only “foundational” teachings, but the author uses them as examples. The structure of the list can be understood in several ways:

(1)
* the foundation
* of repentance from dead works and
* of faith in God,
* teaching
* about baptisms and
* laying on of hands and
* resurrection of the dead and
* eternal judgment.

(2)
* the foundation
* of repentance from dead works and
* of faith in God,
* {of} teaching
* about baptisms and
* laying on of hands and
* resurrection of the dead and
* eternal judgment.

(3)
* the foundation
* of repentance from dead works and
* of faith in God,
* {of} teaching about baptisms and
* {of} laying on of hands and
* {of} resurrection of the dead and
* {of} eternal judgment.

See the note at the beginning of [6:2](../06/02.md) for translation suggestions for each of these options.

### Are those who “fall away” in [6:4–6](../06/04.md) truly believers?

In [6:4–5](../06/04.md), the author gives a list of things that a person can experience but then still “fall away” ([6:6](../06/06.md)). Scholars debate whether this list describes people who truly believe in Jesus and then stop believing, or if it describes people came close to believing in Jesus but then did not truly believe. Since the author focuses on how these people have experienced good things from God but then still reject Jesus, he does not clearly express whether these people are truly believers are not. If possible, focus your translation on what the people experience rather than on whether they have truly believed. +HEB 6 intro nz5i 0 # Hebrews 6 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Exhortation: Make sure to persevere! (5:11–6:12)
* Exhortation: God’s promise is certain (6:13–20)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The promise to Abraham ([6:13–15](../06/13.md))

In [6:13–14](../06/13.md), the author speaks about God’s promise to Abraham. He quotes directly from [Genesis 22:17](../gen/22/17.md), but he also has in mind other times when God made similar promises to Abraham: [Genesis 12:1–3](../gen/12/01.md); [15:1–21](../gen/15/01.md); [17:1–8](../gen/17/01.md). The author’s point is that God “swore by himself,” which means that he himself guaranteed what he promised. Abraham waited for God to fulfill that promise, and God eventually did so when he gave Abraham a son and then numerous descendants. If your readers would need some of this information to understand the passage, you could include it in a footnote.

### “Swearing” and the “oath”

In [6:13–18](../06/13.md), the author refers to “swearing” and using an “oath.” In this context, “swearing” by someone refers to the action of guaranteeing a promise, while the “oath” refers to the guaranteeing words themselves. When someone makes an “oath,” they “swear by” a person or thing that is more powerful than they are. What they are saying is that the powerful person or thing will punish them if they are lying. If your readers would misunderstand “swearing” and “oath,” you could use language that comes from how people guarantee what they say in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/oath]])

### The heavenly sanctuary

In [6:19–20](../06/19.md), the author first refers to the heavenly sanctuary. He will discuss this sanctuary more in the following chapters. At this point, he simply refers to how our “hope” figuratively “enters” where Jesus himself “entered”: the area “inside” the “curtain.” In the author’s culture, a sanctuary would have solid wall or a cloth “curtain” that marked off the most sacred part of the sanctuary from the rest of the structure. This part of the sanctuary is most sacred because it is where God is most strongly present. Use words that would clearly refer to the most sacred part of a sanctuary. Since the author describes the heavenly sanctuary in words that come from how the tabernacle is described in the Old Testament, you should preserve as much of the details as possible (such as a “curtain” instead of a wall). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/curtain]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The farming metaphor in [6:7–8](../06/07.md)

In these verses, the author uses land that people use to grow food as an analogy for how people respond to God’s gifts and his message about salvation. In [6:7](../06/07.md), the author describes farmland that grows helpful crops when rain falls on it. This good farmland is like people who hear the good news, believe it, and then obey God. In [6:8](../06/08.md), the author describes farmland that grows plants that are not useful and that can hurt people. A farmer will set these plants on fire to destroy them. This bad farmland is like people who hear the good news and receive gifts from God but fail to firmly believe the good news and obey God. God will punish them, much like the farmer burns the bad plants. If your readers would misunderstand this analogy, you could make the comparison more explicit in the text.

### Hope as an anchor

In [6:19](../06/19.md), the author states that “hope” has the qualities of an “anchor.” An anchor is a heavy piece of metal attached to the end of a rope. The other end of the rope is tied to a boat, and the anchor is dropped over the edge so that its weight keeps the boat from moving around or drifting away. The author’s point is that hope functions like an anchor for believers: it keeps them focused on Jesus and what God has promised, and they do not “drift away” from what they believe (see the warning in [2:1](../02/01.md)). If your readers would not know what an “anchor” is, you could compare hope to some other thing in your culture that holds things in place.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### The “foundational” teachings in [6:1–2](../06/01.md)

In these verses, the author lists six things that are “foundational” or “elementary” teachings. These are not the only “foundational” teachings, but the author uses them as examples. The structure of the list can be understood in several ways:

(1)
* the foundation
* of repentance from dead works and
* of faith in God,
* teaching
* about baptisms and
* laying on of hands and
* resurrection of the dead and
* eternal judgment.

(2)
* the foundation
* of repentance from dead works and
* of faith in God,
* {of} teaching
* about baptisms and
* laying on of hands and
* resurrection of the dead and
* eternal judgment.

(3)
* the foundation
* of repentance from dead works and
* of faith in God,
* {of} teaching about baptisms and
* {of} laying on of hands and
* {of} resurrection of the dead and
* {of} eternal judgment.

See the note at the beginning of [6:2](../06/02.md) for translation suggestions for each of these options.

### Are those who “fall away” in [6:4–6](../06/04.md) truly believers?

In [6:4–5](../06/04.md), the author gives a list of things that a person can experience but then still “fall away” ([6:6](../06/06.md)). Scholars debate whether this list describes people who truly believe in Jesus and then stop believing, or if it describes people came close to believing in Jesus but then did not truly believe. Since the author focuses on how these people have experienced good things from God but then still reject Jesus, he does not clearly express whether these people are truly believers are not. If possible, focus your translation on what the people experience rather than on whether they have truly believed. HEB 6 1 f1nk grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the phrase **So then** introduces what the author wants his audience to do in response to the warning he gave in [5:11–14](../05/11.md). If your readers would misunderstand **So then**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an application or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 6 1 i4xr figs-metaphor ἀφέντες τὸν τῆς ἀρχῆς τοῦ Χριστοῦ λόγον, ἐπὶ τὴν τελειότητα φερώμεθα 1 let us leave the beginning of the message of Christ and move forward to maturity Here the author speaks as if the **beginning of the message of Christ** were the starting point for a journey and as if **maturity** were the destination. He speaks in this way to encourage his audience to focus more time and energy on the destination (**maturity**) than on where they started out (**the beginning of the message**). He does not want them to replace **the beginning of the message** with what is related to **maturity**. Rather, he is exhorting them about what to focus their time and energy on. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “putting to the side the beginning of the message of Christ, let us take up maturity” or “focusing less on the beginning of the message of Christ, let us focus more on maturity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 1 gsvd figs-abstractnouns τὸν τῆς ἀρχῆς…λόγον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **beginning**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “basic” or “elementary.” Alternate translation: “the elementary message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -585,7 +585,7 @@ HEB 6 1 ydpy figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τὴν τελειότητα 1 If your HEB 6 1 thw8 figs-metaphor μὴ πάλιν θεμέλιον καταβαλλόμενοι 1 Let us not lay again the foundation … of faith in God Here the author speaks about teaching basic things as if it were **laying** a **foundation**. He speaks in this way because the **foundation** is the first thing that a builder “lays,” and the builder soon begins to build on top of that foundation. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “not rehearsing again the simple teachings” or “not learning again the basics” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 1 y7ki figs-abstractnouns μετανοίας ἀπὸ νεκρῶν ἔργων, καὶ πίστεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **repentance**, **works**, and **faith**, you could express the ideas in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “about repenting from doing what is dead and about believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 1 d5q3 figs-personification νεκρῶν ἔργων 1 dead works Here the author describes the **works** as if they were a **dead** person or animal. The author could describe the **works** as **dead** because: (1) they cannot accomplish anything, just like a **dead** person cannot do anything. Alternate translation: “works that accomplish nothing” (2) they lead to physical and spiritual death for the person who does them. Alternate translation: “works that lead to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -HEB 6 2 s1cv figs-infostructure βαπτισμῶν διδαχὴν, ἐπιθέσεώς τε χειρῶν, ἀναστάσεώς τε νεκρῶν, καὶ κρίματος αἰωνίου 1 nor the foundation of teaching … eternal judgment Here, the **teaching** could (see the chapter introduction): (1) redefine the “foundation” in the previous verse ([6:2](../06/02.md)) and go with all four topics in this verse. Alternate translation: “that is, teaching concerning baptisms and concerning laying on of hands and concerning resurrection of the dead and concerning eternal judgment” (2) identify the third part of the “foundation,” along with “repentance from dead works” and “faith in God” (see [6:2](../06/02.md)). In this case, it goes with the four topics in this verse. Alternate translation: “and of teaching about baptisms and about laying on of hands and about resurrection of the dead and about eternal judgment” (3) identify the third part of the “foundation,” and the rest of the topics in this verse also identify parts of the “foundation.” Alternate translation: “and of teaching about baptisms and of laying on of hands and of resurrection of the dead and of eternal judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +HEB 6 2 s1cv figs-infostructure βαπτισμῶν διδαχὴν, ἐπιθέσεώς τε χειρῶν, ἀναστάσεώς τε νεκρῶν, καὶ κρίματος αἰωνίου 1 nor the foundation of teaching … eternal judgment Here, the **teaching** could (see the chapter introduction): (1) redefine the “foundation” in the previous verse ([6:2](../06/02.md)) and go with all four topics in this verse. Alternate translation: “that is, teaching concerning baptisms and concerning laying on of hands and concerning resurrection of the dead and concerning eternal judgment” (2) identify the third part of the “foundation,” along with “repentance from dead works” and “faith in God” (see [6:2](../06/02.md)). In this case, it goes with the four topics in this verse. Alternate translation: “and of teaching about baptisms and about laying on of hands and about resurrection of the dead and about eternal judgment” (3) identify the third part of the “foundation,” and the rest of the topics in this verse also identify parts of the “foundation.” Alternate translation: “and of teaching about baptisms and of laying on of hands and of resurrection of the dead and of eternal judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 6 2 fe8e figs-abstractnouns βαπτισμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **baptisms**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “about baptizing people” or “about what baptizing someone means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 2 rd3q figs-explicit βαπτισμῶν 1 Here, the word **baptisms** is plural. It could refer to: (1) different kinds of **baptisms** that people knew about. See the discussion about “John’s baptism” in [Acts 19:1–7](../act/19/01.md) for an example of different kinds of **baptisms**. Alternate translation: “about various baptisms” or “different kinds of baptisms” (2) many different kinds of washing rituals. Alternate translation: “about washings” or “about kinds of washing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 2 srvc figs-explicit ἐπιθέσεώς…χειρῶν 1 Here, the **laying on of hands** refers to how believers would put their hands on a fellow believer when they were commissioning him or her, praying for him or her, asking God to heal him or her, or helping him or her receive the Holy Spirit. For examples, see [Acts 8:14–17](../act/08/14.md); [Acts 13:2–3](../act/13/02.md); [Acts 28:8](../act/28/08.md); [1 Timothy 4:14](../1ti/04/14.md). In all of these situations, God uses the **laying on of hands** to help a fellow believer. If possible, express the idea in such a way that your readers understand the physical action and also that the action helps other believers. If it is necessary, you could include some short extra information in your translation or more information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “laying on of hands through which God works” or “placing hands on believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -594,22 +594,22 @@ HEB 6 2 qdfn figs-abstractnouns ἀναστάσεώς…νεκρῶν, καὶ HEB 6 2 tfu3 figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 The author is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of the dead people” or “of the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) HEB 6 2 g1ke figs-explicit κρίματος αἰωνίου 1 Here, the phrase **eternal judgment** could identify a **judgment** that: (1) has **eternal** validity or consequences. In other words, what God decides in this **judgment** will never change. Alternate translation: “judgment that leads to eternal destiny” (2) happens at the end of this time and at the beginning of the **eternal** time. In other words, the **eternal judgment** is God’s last **judgment** when he renews the creation. Alternate translation: “final judgment” or “God’s last judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 3 xut9 writing-pronouns τοῦτο ποιήσομεν 1 Here, the word **this** refers back to [6:1](../06/01.md), where the author exhorted his audience: “let us go forward to maturity.” If your readers would misunderstand what **this** refers to, you could make it explicit by repeating words from [6:1](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “we will go forward to maturity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -HEB 6 3 yo9q figs-idiom ἐάνπερ ἐπιτρέπῃ ὁ Θεός 1 Here, the phrase **if God permits** is the proper way to indicate that God is in control of what will happen. The phrase implies that it is likely that God will “permit” what the author wants to **do**. If your readers would misunderstand **if God permits**, you could use a comparable expression that indicates that God is in control. Alternate translation: “God willing” or “as long as that is what God wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 6 4 land grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the audience needs to “go forward” (see [6:1](../06/01.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word that introduces a basis for an exhortation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “We need to go forward, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +HEB 6 3 yo9q figs-idiom ἐάνπερ ἐπιτρέπῃ ὁ Θεός 1 Here, the phrase **if God permits** is the proper way to indicate that God is in control of what will happen. The phrase implies that it is likely that God will “permit” what the author wants to **do**. If your readers would misunderstand **if God permits**, you could use a comparable expression that indicates that God is in control. Alternate translation: “God willing” or “as long as that is what God wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 6 4 land grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the audience needs to “go forward” (see [6:1](../06/01.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word that introduces a basis for an exhortation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “We need to go forward, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 6 4 r14x figs-infostructure ἀδύνατον γὰρ τοὺς 1 Here, the word **impossible** goes with the phrase “to restore {them} again” in [6:6](../06/06.md). If your readers would misunderstand **impossible** when it is so far away from the words it goes with, you could move **{it is} impossible** to verse 6. If you do this, make sure that you also follow the infostructure note on verse 6. Alternate translation: “For consider those” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 6 4 e7px figs-metaphor τοὺς ἅπαξ φωτισθέντας 1 those who were once enlightened Here the author speaks of receiving and understanding the good news as if it were light shining on a person. If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “for those who once understood the message about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 4 e2e6 figs-activepassive τοὺς ἅπαξ φωτισθέντας, γευσαμένους τε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who were **enlightened** rather than focusing on the person doing the “enlightening.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “for those whom God has once enlightened, and who tasted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 6 4 l5mc figs-metaphor γευσαμένους…τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς ἐπουρανίου 1 who tasted the heavenly gift Here the author speaks as if **the heavenly gift** were food that people could “taste.” He speaks in this way to show that these people experienced **the heavenly gift** as much as a person who eats food truly experiences that food. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “had experience of the heavenly gift” or “participated in the heavenly gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 4 ysas figs-explicit τῆς δωρεᾶς τῆς ἐπουρανίου 1 Here, the phrase **the heavenly gift** identifies what God gives to those who believe in Jesus. This includes new life and forgiveness of sins. If your readers would misunderstand **the heavenly gift**, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of God’s gift of new life” or “of God’s gifts from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 4 d2lp figs-possession μετόχους γενηθέντας Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 who were sharers of the Holy Spirit Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that these people “share” the **Holy Spirit**. This form means that the people whom the author is speaking about were among the group of people who received the **Holy Spirit**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could use a form that makes meaning clearer. Alternate translation: “received the Holy Spirit along with other believers” or “participated in the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -HEB 6 5 vp46 figs-metaphor γευσαμένους 1 who tasted God’s good word Here the author again uses the word **tasted**. Express the meaning the same way you did in the previous verse ([6:4](../06/04.md)). Alternate translation: “who had experience of” or “who participated in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 6 5 vp46 figs-metaphor γευσαμένους 1 who tasted God’s good word Here the author again uses the word **tasted** figuratively. Express the meaning the same way you did in the previous verse ([6:4](../06/04.md)). Alternate translation: “who had experience of” or “who participated in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 5 vf2t figs-possession δυνάμεις…μέλλοντος αἰῶνος 1 Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that the **powers** will be fully experienced in **the age to come**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could use a word or phrase that makes it clear. Alternate translation: “the powers that belong to the age to come” or “the powers that will be experienced in the age to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 6 5 tw1u figs-abstractnouns δυνάμεις…μέλλοντος αἰῶνος 1 the powers of the age to come If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **powers**, you could express the idea in another way. The **powers** could refer to: (1) what God will do, sometimes through other people, for those who believe. Alternate translation: “what God will do powerfully in the age to come” (2) how people can do “powerful” things. Alternate translation: “the powerful things that people will do in the age to come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 5 virg figs-idiom μέλλοντος αἰῶνος 1 Here, the phrase **the age to come** refers to the time during and after which God will make people alive again and renew everything that he created. This **age** begins when Jesus comes back. If your readers would misunderstand **the age to come**, you could use a phrase that makes that meaning clear. Alternate translation: “of the time when Jesus comes back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 6 6 fcrq figs-infostructure καὶ παραπεσόντας, πάλιν ἀνακαινίζειν 1 If you decided to move “{it is} impossible” from [6:4](../06/04.md) to here, you will need to consider a natural way to include it. If you used the alternate translation from the note in verse 4, the following alternate translation will work here. Alternate translation: “but who fell away. It is impossible to restore these people again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 6 6 y24v figs-metaphor παραπεσόντας 1 Here the author speaks of how people reject how they used to believe in Jesus as if they were walking on a path and then **fell away** from it. He speaks in this way to emphasize how significant it is when a person stops believing in Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand **fell away**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “who deserted Christ” or “who stopped believing the good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 6 l8nx figs-abstractnouns εἰς μετάνοιαν 1 it is impossible to restore them again to repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **repentance**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “repent.” Alternate translation: “so that they repent” or “so that they return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 6 6 dj3g figs-metaphor ἀνασταυροῦντας 1 they crucify the Son of God for themselves again Here the author speaks as if those who “fall away” are **crucifying** Jesus. He speaks in this way to indicate how bad “falling away” really is. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use an analogy or some other comparable form. Alternate translation: “since it is as if they are crucifying again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 6 6 dj3g figs-metaphor ἀνασταυροῦντας 1 they crucify the Son of God for themselves again Here the author speaks as if those who “fall away” are **crucifying** Jesus. He speaks in this way to indicate how bad “falling away” really is. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use an analogy or some other comparable form. Alternate translation: “since it is as if they are crucifying again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 6 up5c translate-unknown ἀνασταυροῦντας 1 Here, the word translated **they are crucifying again** could refer to: (1) causing the Son to undergo crucifixion a second time. Alternate translation: “since they are re-crucifying” (2) nailing the Son “up” on the cross. Alternate translation: “since they are nailing up on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 6 6 jkue figs-explicit ἀνασταυροῦντας ἑαυτοῖς 1 Here, the phrase **for themselves** could mean that: (1) they are acting to benefit themselves only. Alternate translation: “since they are crucifying again for their own benefit” (2) they do these things **themselves**. Alternate translation: “since they themselves are crucifying again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 6 y47b guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God The phrase **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God the Father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -639,11 +639,11 @@ HEB 6 10 t2hb figs-litotes οὐ…ἄδικος ὁ Θεὸς, ἐπιλαθέ HEB 6 10 puu1 figs-explicit ἐπιλαθέσθαι 1 Here, the word **forget** does not mean simply that a person does not remember something. It also includes how a person will not consider or include something that they have “forgotten.” If your readers would misunderstand **forget**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how a person “overlooks” or “fails to include” something. Alternate translation: “to ignore” or “to pass over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 10 gzvj figs-abstractnouns τοῦ ἔργου ὑμῶν, καὶ τῆς ἀγάπης ἧς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **work** and **love**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “do” and “love.” Alternate translation: “what you do and the way that you love, which” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 10 vljf translate-unknown ἐνεδείξασθε 1 Here, people who have **demonstrated** something prove or show that it is true. The author tells his audience that they have “proved” or “shown” that they have **love**. If your readers would misunderstand **demonstrated**, you could use a word or phrase that makes the idea clearer. Alternate translation: “you have shown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 6 10 r9xx figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 for his name Here, the word **name** refers to a person’s reputation or honor. In other words, “serving the saints” is something that is “toward God’s name,” which means that it brings him honor. If your readers would misunderstand **name**, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “with regard to his honor” or “that glorifies God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 6 10 r9xx figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 for his name Here, the word **name** figuratively refers to a person’s reputation or honor. In other words, “serving the saints” is something that is “toward God’s name,” which means that it brings him honor. If your readers would misunderstand **name**, you could express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “with regard to his honor” or “that glorifies God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 6 10 szt0 figs-explicit διακονήσαντες τοῖς ἁγίοις καὶ διακονοῦντες 1 Here, the ones who **serve** are the audience. The authors point is that they served **the saints** in the past, and they are still serving **the saints** in the present. If your readers would misunderstand who is “serving” or what times the author is referring to, you could make the ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “since you have served the saints in the past and even now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 11 j7f5 figs-exclusive ἐπιθυμοῦμεν 1 We greatly desire Here the author uses the first person plural (**we**), but he is referring only to himself. If your readers would misunderstand **we**, you could use a form that more naturally refers to the author. Alternate translation: “I long for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) HEB 6 11 k4si translate-unknown ἐνδείκνυσθαι 1 diligence Here, just as in [6:10](../06/10.md), people who **demonstrate** something prove or show that it is true. The author wants his audience to “prove” or “show” that they have **diligence**. If your readers would misunderstand **demonstrate**, you could use a word or phrase that makes the idea clearer. Alternate translation: “to show” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 6 11 abfz figs-explicit τὴν αὐτὴν…σπουδὴν 1 Here the author could want the audience to have **diligence** that is **the same** as: (1) the **diligence** that they have shown in the past. Alternate translation: “consistent diligence” (2) how they have “demonstrated” love (see [6:10](../06/10.md)). Alternate translation: “diligence, just as you demonstrate love,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 6 11 abfz figs-explicit τὴν αὐτὴν…σπουδὴν 1 Here the author could want the audience to have **diligence** that is **the same** as: (1) the **diligence** that they have shown in the past. Alternate translation: “consistent diligence” (2) how they have “demonstrated” love (see [6:10](../06/10.md)). Alternate translation: “diligence, just as you demonstrate love,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 11 i2yc figs-abstractnouns τὴν αὐτὴν…σπουδὴν, πρὸς τὴν πληροφορίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 in order to make your hope certain If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **diligence**, **assurance**, and **hope**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that you strive diligently to be fully assured of what you hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 11 uwj3 figs-possession πρὸς τὴν πληροφορίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Here the author uses the possessive form to speak about **full assurance** that concerns **hope**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “toward becoming fully assured of your hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 6 11 xfy1 figs-explicit ἄχρι τέλους 1 to the end Here, **the end** could refer to: (1) the **end** of the audience’s lives. Alternate translation: “until your lives end” (2) the **end** of the current time period, which would be when Jesus comes back. Alternate translation: “until the end of the age” or “until Jesus comes back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -651,14 +651,14 @@ HEB 6 12 zjgw figs-metaphor μὴ νωθροὶ γένησθε 1 Here the autho HEB 6 12 x9zn figs-ellipsis μιμηταὶ δὲ 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but so that you might become imitators” or “but become imitators” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) HEB 6 12 yrh2 figs-abstractnouns τῶν διὰ πίστεως καὶ μακροθυμίας, κληρονομούντων 1 imitators If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **faith** and **patience**, you could express the idea by using verbs or adverbs. Alternate translation: “of those who, by means of how they believed and were patient, are inheriting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 12 q8ry figs-metaphor τῶν διὰ πίστεως καὶ μακροθυμίας, κληρονομούντων τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 inherit the promises Here the author speaks as if believers were children who would receive property that a parent passes on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers receive the **promises** from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “of those to whom, because of their faith and patience, God is giving the promises” or “of those who by faith and patience are obtaining the promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 6 12 mrbc figs-metonymy τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, the word **promises** refers to the contents of the **promises**, or what God has “promised” to give. If your readers would misunderstand **promises**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of these **promises**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promise” or “the things that God has promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 6 12 mrbc figs-metonymy τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, the word **promises** figuratively refers to the contents of the **promises**, or what God has “promised” to give. If your readers would misunderstand **promises**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of these **promises**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promise” or “the things that God has promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 6 12 eydr figs-abstractnouns τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promises**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “what God has pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 13 afl4 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces more explanation about the “promises” that the author mentioned in the previous verse ([6:21](../06/21.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word that introduces explanation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Now I will tell you more about these promises:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 6 13 qicr figs-extrainfo ἐπαγγειλάμενος 1 Here the author does not clarify what God **promised** to Abraham. He does not do this because he quotes the promise itself in the following verse ([6:14](../06/14.md)). If possible, leave what God **promised** vague or unclear in this verse. Alternate translation: “having made a promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) HEB 6 13 c8ip grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἐπαγγειλάμενος 1 Here, the words **having promised** refer to something that takes place at the same time as when God **swore by himself**. If your readers would misunderstand the relationship between these two actions, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “at the time when he promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) HEB 6 13 dcy9 translate-names τῷ…Ἀβραὰμ 1 The word **Abraham** is the name of a man. He is the man from whom all the Israelites and Jews are descended. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 6 13 e3mt writing-pronouns εἶχεν 1 Here, the word **he** refers back to **God**, not to **Abraham**. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **he** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “God had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -HEB 6 13 p1sg figs-explicit ἐπεὶ κατ’ οὐδενὸς εἶχεν μείζονος ὀμόσαι, ὤμοσεν καθ’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 In the author’s culture, people often **swore by** someone else. The other person needed to be someone important and powerful enough to guarantee or enforce what the person who **swore** promised to do. Often people would **swear** by God, since he always is important and powerful enough to guarantee or enforce what was sworn. If your readers would misunderstand why God is “swearing by” someone, you could make the practice more explicit. Alternate translation: “since he wanted to guarantee that promise by swearing by someone greater, swore by himself (since there is no one greater than him)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 6 13 p1sg figs-explicit ἐπεὶ κατ’ οὐδενὸς εἶχεν μείζονος ὀμόσαι, ὤμοσεν καθ’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 In the author’s culture, people often **swore by** someone else. The other person needed to be someone important and powerful enough to guarantee or enforce what the person who **swore** promised to do. Often people would **swear** by God, since he always is important and powerful enough to guarantee or enforce what was sworn. If your readers would misunderstand why God is “swearing by” someone, you could make the practice more explicit. Alternate translation: “since he wanted to guarantee that promise by swearing by someone greater, swore by himself (since there is no one greater than him)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 13 i5or figs-explicit μείζονος 1 Here, the word **greater** specifically identifies someone who has more power or authority than another person. If your readers would misunderstand what **greater** identifies, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “with greater power” or “with more authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 14 ymh2 writing-quotations λέγων 1 He said Here the author quotes what God said to Abraham. These words are recorded in [Genesis 22:17](../gen/22/17.md). Since the author introduces this quotation as words that God said to Abraham, you should introduce the quotation as words that someone has said. If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify the quotation. Alternate translation: “speaking” or “promising” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) HEB 6 14 wd6t figs-quotations λέγων, εἰ μὴν εὐλογῶν, εὐλογήσω σε, καὶ πληθύνων, πληθυνῶ σε 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “saying that he would most certainly bless Abraham and multiply him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -668,7 +668,7 @@ HEB 6 14 n47a figs-idiom πληθύνων, πληθυνῶ σε 1 I will greatly HEB 6 15 f3cs figs-explicit οὕτως 1 Here, the phrase **in this way** could refer back to: (1) how God guaranteed what he promised (see [6:13–14](../06/13.md)). Alternate translation: “as God promised” (2) how Abraham had “faith and patience” (see [6:12](../06/12.md)). Alternate translation: “as one who had faith and patience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 15 li7e figs-explicit μακροθυμήσας 1 Here the author refers to how Abraham was 75 years old when God first made the **promise** to him (see [Genesis 12:1–4](../gen/12/01.md)), and he was 100 years old when Sarah gave birth to his son Isaac (see [Genesis 21:1–5](../gen/21/01.md). So, Abraham **patiently waited** for 25 years before God gave him what he had promised. If your readers would misunderstand **patiently waited**, you could use a footnote to give this background information, or you could include some short extra information in your translation. Alternation translation: “having patiently waited for 25 years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 6 15 aefm translate-unknown ἐπέτυχεν 1 Here, the phrase **he obtained** refers to how he received the **promise**. It does not mean that he took the **promise** for himself. If your readers would misunderstand **obtained**, you could translate this phrase like you translated “inheriting the promises” in [6:12](../06/12.md). Alternate translation: “he received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 6 15 pw9h figs-metonymy τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, the word **promise** refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If your readers would misunderstand **promise**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promise” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 6 15 pw9h figs-metonymy τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, the word **promise** figuratively refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If your readers would misunderstand **promise**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promise” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 6 15 ky28 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “what God pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 16 ib90 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of how “swearing” by someone works (see [6:13](../06/13.md) especially). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could express the idea with a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “About swearing,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 6 16 vri2 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωποι 1 Although **men** is masculine, the author is using it to all people, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **men**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ HEB 6 16 pqcw figs-abstractnouns πάσης αὐτοῖς ἀντιλογίας HEB 6 17 jq1k grammar-connect-words-phrases ἐν ᾧ 1 Here, the word **which** refers back to how humans “swear” with an **oath** (see [6:16](../06/16.md)). The phrase **in which** means that what the author speaks about in this verse happens in that same context or way. In other words, God used an **oath**, just like humans do. If your readers would misunderstand **in which**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happens according to a previously stated pattern. Alternate translation: “in which same way” or “in which pattern” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 6 17 dw5n figs-infostructure περισσότερον…ἐπιδεῖξαι 1 Here, the phrase **even more** modifies **to show**. If your readers would misunderstand what **even more** modifies, you could rearrange the elements in this sentence to make it clearer. Alternate translation: “to show even more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 6 17 rpv9 figs-metaphor τοῖς κληρονόμοις τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 to the heirs of the promise Here the author speaks as if believers were children who would receive property that a parent passes on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers receive the **promise** from God. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “to those who were to receive the promise” or “to the recipients of the promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 6 17 wlbg figs-metonymy τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, the word **promise** refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If your readers would misunderstand **promise**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “of the things from the promise” or “of the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 6 17 wlbg figs-metonymy τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, the word **promise** figuratively refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If your readers would misunderstand **promise**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “of the things from the promise” or “of the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 6 17 zz5f figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise.” Alternate translation: “of what God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 17 ug6j figs-abstractnouns τὸ ἀμετάθετον τῆς βουλῆς αὐτοῦ 1 the unchangeable quality of his purpose If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **quality** and **purpose**, you could express the ideas by using verbs or in another natural way. Alternate translation: “that what he purposes is unchangeable” or “how unchangeable what he plans is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 6 17 rezy figs-idiom ἐμεσίτευσεν ὅρκῳ 1 Here, the author refers to God making a promise **with an oath** as “mediating” that promise. He speaks in this way because the **oath** is between God and his people and guarantees that what God promises will happen, just like a “mediator” stands between two parties and guarantees what those parties decide. If your readers would misunderstand **mediated**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies how an **oath** functions when a person makes a promise. Alternate translation: “used an oath to do so” or “made it certain by using an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ HEB 6 20 onb9 translate-unknown πρόδρομος 1 Here, the word **forerunne HEB 6 20 a16c figs-infostructure πρόδρομος ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν εἰσῆλθεν 1 Here, the phrase **on our behalf** could modify: (1) **entered**. In this case, Jesus has **entered** for our sake, or to help us. Alternate translation: “has entered for our sake as a forerunner” (2) **forerunner**. In this case, Jesus opened the way **on our behalf**. Alternate translation: “has entered as a forerunner who leads us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 6 20 q9tt grammar-connect-time-sequential γενόμενος 1 Here, the phrase **having become** introduces action that could happen: (1) before Jesus **entered**. In this case, God makes him a **high priest**, and then he enters the heavenly sanctuary. Alternate translation: “already having become” (2) at the same time as Jesus **entered**. In this case, the “entering” and the “becoming” describe the same thing or happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “when he became” or “at the same time as he became” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) HEB 6 20 zgj6 κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ 1 after the order of Melchizedek Here the author uses the same words he used in [5:6](../05/06.md), [10](../05/10.md). You should translate this phrase in exactly the same way as you did in those verses. -HEB 7 intro y8j3 0 # Hebrews 7 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: Melchizedek the priest (7:1–10)
* Teaching: The Son is high priest in the order of Melchizedek (7:11–28)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [7:17](../07/17.md), [21](../07/21.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### High priests

In this chapter, the author frequently discusses high priests. He speaks about their “order,” which refers to the requirements, system, and service that go along with being a priest in that “order.” He focuses on two “orders.” First is the order of Aaron, made up of priests who are descended from Levi. These priests are required by Moses’s law and must offer sacrifices for themselves as well as for the rest of the people since they also sin. Also, each priest eventually dies and must be replaced by another. Second is the order of Melchizedek, made up of priests who have an “indestructible life.” This order only includes Melchizedek and Jesus. Jesus only offers sacrifices for the sins of other people, since he does not sin. Also, he never dies, so he can be a priest forever. Consider how to refer to these two different kinds of priests in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])

### Melchizedek

In this chapter, the author refers to Melchizedek as he is described in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md), including how the story does not mention his father, mother, birth, or death. Scholars debate whether the author thought that Melchizedek was a supernatural being, such as an angel, or whether the author simply describes the character Melchizedek without referring to the historical person named Melchizedek. What is clear is that the author thinks that Melchizedek was “made like” Jesus, not the other way around (see [7:3](../07/03.md)). In other words, the author speaks about Melchizedek because the description of him in Genesis is a helpful way to think about Jesus. Since Melchizedek was greater than Abraham, Jesus, whom Melchizedek is like, is greater than Abraham’s descendants who became priests. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/melchizedek]])

### Tithes

In [7:1–10](../07/01.md), the author refers multiple times to giving and collecting “tithes” or “a tenth.” These words refer to the practice of separating out one tenth of what a person earned or grew and giving it to someone else. In the law that God gave through Moses, the Israelites were required to give a “tenth” or “tithe” to priests. This enabled the priests to perform their service without having to do other work. The author uses the “tithes” language to show that Abraham, Levi’s great-grandfather, paid a “tithe” to Melchizedek. That means that the descendants of Abraham who received “tithes” actually paid “tithes” through Abraham to Melchizedek. In the author’s argument, this shows that Melchizedek and his priesthood are greater than Levi and his priesthood. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/tenth]])

### “Swearing” and the “oath”

Just as in chapter 6, the author refers multiple times to “swearing” and using an “oath.” In this context, “swearing” refers to the action of guaranteeing a promise, while the “oath” refers to the guaranteeing words themselves. The author implies that words spoken with an “oath” have more significance or indicate something greater than words without an “oath.” If your readers would misunderstand “swearing” and “oath,” you could use language that comes from how people guarantee what they say in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/oath]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### The “loin” of Abraham

In [7:5](../07/05.md), [10](../07/10.md), the author refers to the “loin” of Abraham. This word is a polite way to refer to the male sexual organ. In [7:5](../07/05.md), the author’s point is that all the Israelites are descended from Abraham, since they all come from his “loin.” In [7:10](../07/10.md), the author’s point is that Levi, the great-grandson of Abraham, could be considered to be inside Abraham’s “loin” before Abraham and Sarah had their son, Isaac. In the author’s culture, one could speak of the descendants of a man as if they were inside the man’s sexual organ. Consider natural ways to express these ideas in your language, and see the notes on these two verses. +HEB 7 intro y8j3 0 # Hebrews 7 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: Melchizedek the priest (7:1–10)
* Teaching: The Son is high priest in the order of Melchizedek (7:11–28)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [7:17](../07/17.md), [21](../07/21.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### High priests

In this chapter, the author frequently discusses high priests. He speaks about their “order,” which refers to the requirements, system, and service that go along with being a priest in that “order.” He focuses on two “orders.” First is the order of Aaron, made up of priests who are descended from Levi. These priests are required by Moses’s law and must offer sacrifices for themselves as well as for the rest of the people since they also sin. Also, each priest eventually dies and must be replaced by another. Second is the order of Melchizedek, made up of priests who have an “indestructible life.” This order only includes Melchizedek and Jesus. Jesus only offers sacrifices for the sins of other people, since he does not sin. Also, he never dies, so he can be a priest forever. Consider how to refer to these two different kinds of priests in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/highpriest]])

### Melchizedek

In this chapter, the author refers to Melchizedek as he is described in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md), including how the story does not mention his father, mother, birth, or death. Scholars debate whether the author thought that Melchizedek was a supernatural being, such as an angel, or whether the author simply describes the character Melchizedek without referring to the historical person named Melchizedek. What is clear is that the author thinks that Melchizedek was “made like” Jesus, not the other way around (see [7:3](../07/03.md)). In other words, the author speaks about Melchizedek because the description of him in Genesis is a helpful way to think about Jesus. Since Melchizedek was greater than Abraham, Jesus, whom Melchizedek is like, is greater than Abraham’s descendants who became priests. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/melchizedek]])

### Tithes

In [7:1–10](../07/01.md), the author refers multiple times to giving and collecting “tithes” or “a tenth.” These words refer to the practice of separating out one tenth of what a person earned or grew and giving it to someone else. In the law that God gave through Moses, the Israelites were required to give a “tenth” or “tithe” to priests. This enabled the priests to perform their service without having to do other work. The author uses the “tithes” language to show that Abraham, Levi’s great-grandfather, paid a “tithe” to Melchizedek. That means that the descendants of Abraham who received “tithes” actually paid “tithes” through Abraham to Melchizedek. In the author’s argument, this shows that Melchizedek and his priesthood are greater than Levi and his priesthood. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/tenth]])

### “Swearing” and the “oath”

Just as in chapter 6, the author refers multiple times to “swearing” and using an “oath.” In this context, “swearing” refers to the action of guaranteeing a promise, while the “oath” refers to the guaranteeing words themselves. The author implies that words spoken with an “oath” have more significance or indicate something greater than words without an “oath.” If your readers would misunderstand “swearing” and “oath,” you could use language that comes from how people guarantee what they say in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/oath]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### The “loin” of Abraham

In [7:5](../07/05.md), [10](../07/10.md), the author refers to the “loin” of Abraham. This word is a polite way to refer to the male sexual organ. In [7:5](../07/05.md), the author’s point is that all the Israelites are descended from Abraham, since they all come from his “loin.” In [7:10](../07/10.md), the author’s point is that Levi, the great-grandson of Abraham, could be considered to be inside Abraham’s “loin” before Abraham and Sarah had their son, Isaac. In the author’s culture, one could speak of the descendants of a man as if they were inside the man’s sexual organ. Consider natural ways to express these ideas in your language, and see the notes on these two verses. HEB 7 1 mwy8 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the word **For** signals that the author will now go on to explain who “Melchizedek” is and why he is important. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 7 1 smhy figs-idiom οὗτος…ὁ Μελχισέδεκ 1 Here, the phrase **this Melchizedek** identifies this **Melchizedek** as the same one whom the author was speaking about in the previous verse (see [6:20](../06/20.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **this Melchizedek**, you could use a form that clearly identifies that this is the same **Melchizedek**. Alternate translation: “Melchizedek, the one whom I just mentioned,” or “this man Melchizedek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 7 1 rfc9 translate-names Σαλήμ 1 Salem The word **Salem** is the name of a city that existed somewhere in the middle of what is now Israel. Some scholars think that it is another name for the city of Shechem, while other scholars think it is another name for the city of Jerusalem. Since our author is referring directly to [Genesis 14:18](../gen/14/18.md), you should preserve this name as much as possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -711,17 +711,17 @@ HEB 7 1 h4n1 translate-names τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ Ὑψίστου 1 The ph HEB 7 1 ucr1 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ 1 The word **Abraham** is the name of a man. He is the man from whom all the Israelites and Jews are descended. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 1 ji3f grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὑποστρέφοντι 1 Here, the word **returning** refers to action that happened at the same time as when Melchizedek **met Abraham**. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “when he was returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) HEB 7 1 rx36 figs-explicit Ἀβραὰμ ὑποστρέφοντι ἀπὸ τῆς κοπῆς τῶν βασιλέων 1 Abraham returning from the slaughter of the kings The phrase **the slaughter of the kings** refers to a story in [Genesis 14:1–16](../gen/14/01.md). Four **kings** conquered a city in which Abraham’s nephew was living, and they captured his nephew. Abraham took the fighting men that he had, and he conquered and “slaughtered” the armies of these four **kings**. He recovered all the valuable things that these **kings** had taken, including his nephew. When he was going back home after defeating the **kings**, he met **Melchizedek**. If your readers would need to know more about this background than the author states explicitly, you could include some extra information in your translation, or you could use a footnote to explain the story. Alternate translation: “Abraham, who was returning from the battle in which he defeated the four kings who had kidnapped his nephew,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 7 1 np7o figs-synecdoche τῶν βασιλέων 1 Here, the word **kings** refers to the **kings** and their armies. If your readers would misunderstand **kings**, you could refer explicitly to their armies. Alternate translation: “of the kings and their fighting men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +HEB 7 1 np7o figs-synecdoche τῶν βασιλέων 1 Here, the word **kings** figuratively refers to the **kings** and their armies. If your readers would misunderstand **kings**, you could refer explicitly to their armies. Alternate translation: “of the kings and their fighting men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) HEB 7 2 q87x writing-pronouns ᾧ 1 It was to him Here, **whom** refers back to Melchizedek. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **whom** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “to whom—that is, Melchizedek—” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 7 2 dplz translate-unknown δεκάτην…ἐμέρισεν 1 Here, the word **apportioned** refers to how a person might divide a group of things into “portions” and share give each portion to a person. Here, Abraham divides up what he has into ten portions, and he gives Melchizedek one of those portions. If your readers would misunderstand **apportioned a tenth**, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “handed over one tenth” or “presented one part out of ten” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 7 2 pw9x figs-explicit ἀπὸ πάντων 1 Here, **all {things}** refers to the things that Abraham took from the kings that he had defeated. This would have included what the kings took from their enemies and things that they themselves had. If your readers would misunderstand what **all {things}** refers to, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “from all that he had plundered from the kings” or “from everything that he took after defeating the kings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 2 x3bd figs-explicit πρῶτον μὲν ἑρμηνευόμενος 1 Here the author does not state what is **translated**. The word **first** implies that it is the first name for this person: “Melchizedek.” If your readers would misunderstand what is **translated** here, you could clarify that it is the name “Melchizedek.” Alternate translation: “his name first being translated as” or “first indeed the name ‘Melchizedek’ being translated as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 2 trz1 translate-names πρῶτον μὲν ἑρμηνευόμενος βασιλεὺς δικαιοσύνης, ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ βασιλεὺς Σαλήμ, ὅ ἐστιν, βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης 1 Here the author provides translations of Melchizedek’s name (“Melchizedek”) and his title (**king of Salem**) from Hebrew, the language that Abraham spoke. The name “Melchizedek” means **king of righteousness**, and the name **Salem** sounds like the Hebrew word for **peace**. If your readers would misunderstand what the author is doing here, you could use a form in your language that gives the meaning of names. Alternate translation: “first indeed his name means ‘king of righteousness,’ and then also ‘Salem’ means ‘peace,’ so ‘king of Salem’ means ‘king of peace,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 2 kfsz figs-activepassive πρῶτον μὲν ἑρμηνευόμενος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author wishes to emphasize what the words mean in a different language rather than focusing on the person doing the translating. Alternate translation: “first whose name we translate as” or “first indeed meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 7 2 abh4 figs-possession βασιλεὺς δικαιοσύνης…βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης 1 king of righteousness … king of peace Here the author uses the possessive form to speak about a **king** who is characterized by **righteousness** and **peace**. This means that he rules in a “righteous” and “peaceful” way and that what he does leads to **righteousness** and **peace** in his kingdom. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “king who rules righteously … king who rules peacefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +HEB 7 2 abh4 figs-possession βασιλεὺς δικαιοσύνης…βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης 1 king of righteousness … king of peace Here the author uses the possessive form to speak about a **king** who is characterized by **righteousness** and **peace**. This means that he rules in a “righteous” and “peaceful” way and that what he does leads to **righteousness** and **peace** in his kingdom. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “king who rules righteously … king who rules peacefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 7 2 yaa0 figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνης… εἰρήνης 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **righteousness** and **peace**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “who does what is righteous … who does what is peaceful” or “who makes things righteous … who makes things peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 7 2 bm11 translate-names Σαλήμ 1 The word **Salem** refers to the same city that the author mentioned in [7:1](../07/01.md). Translate it the same way you did there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -HEB 7 3 q4eh figs-explicit ἀπάτωρ, ἀμήτωρ, ἀγενεαλόγητος, μήτε ἀρχὴν ἡμερῶν, μήτε ζωῆς τέλος ἔχων 1 He is without father, without mother, without ancestors, with neither beginning of days nor end of life Here the author is describing the character “Melchizedek” as he appears in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). The author of that story does not mention anything about Melchizedek’s parents, how old he was, when he was born, or when he died. This is unusual, especially since priests usually needed to be the children of priests. The author of Hebrews probably did not think that Melchizedek was a supernatural being. Instead, he uses the character “Melchizedek” from the Old Testament story to help his audience understand Jesus better. If your readers would misunderstand why the author describes Melchizedek in these ways, you could make it explicit that the author is referring to what the Old Testament tells us about Melchizedek. Alternate translation: “concerning whom there is no record of his father, mother, or genealogy, and no record of the beginning of his days or the end of his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 7 3 q4eh figs-explicit ἀπάτωρ, ἀμήτωρ, ἀγενεαλόγητος, μήτε ἀρχὴν ἡμερῶν, μήτε ζωῆς τέλος ἔχων 1 He is without father, without mother, without ancestors, with neither beginning of days nor end of life Here the author is describing the character “Melchizedek” as he appears in [Genesis 14:18–20](../gen/14/18.md). The author of that story does not mention anything about Melchizedek’s parents, how old he was, when he was born, or when he died. This is unusual, especially since priests usually needed to be the children of priests. The author of Hebrews probably did not think that Melchizedek was a supernatural being. Instead, he uses the character “Melchizedek” from the Old Testament story to help his audience understand Jesus better. If your readers would misunderstand why the author describes Melchizedek in these ways, you could make it explicit that the author is referring to what the Old Testament tells us about Melchizedek. Alternate translation: “concerning whom there is no record of his father, mother, or genealogy, and no record of the beginning of his days or the end of his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 3 hodw translate-unknown ἀγενεαλόγητος 1 The word **genealogy** refers to a list of ancestors. In the author’s culture, this list primarily included one’s father, one’s grandfather, one’s great-grandfather, and so on. If your readers would not know what a **genealogy** is, you could use a comparable word or a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “without a list of ancestors” or “without known ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 7 3 ro3u figs-idiom μήτε ἀρχὴν ἡμερῶν, μήτε ζωῆς τέλος ἔχων 1 Here, the phrase **beginning of days** refers to when a person is born. The phrase **end of life** refers to when a person dies. If your readers would misunderstand these phrases, you could use comparable expressions. Alternate translation: “having neither a day of birth nor a day of death” or “having no birth or death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 7 3 wx4m figs-activepassive ἀφωμοιωμένος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on Melchizedek, who is **made like**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “making.” If you must state who did the action, you could refer to Moses, who described Melchizedek in this way in Genesis, or you could refer to God, who inspired Moses to write this way. Alternate translation: “God having made him like” or “Moses having made him like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -731,7 +731,7 @@ HEB 7 4 h2bg grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, t HEB 7 4 iyvq θεωρεῖτε 1 Alternate translation: “observe” or “see” HEB 7 4 qdtp figs-explicit πηλίκος 1 Here the author does not specify in what way Melchizedek was **great**. The audience would have inferred that he was **great** in importance and rank. If your readers would misunderstand **how great**, you could clarify what about Melchizedek was **great**. Alternate translation: “how great in rank” or “how significant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 4 w2gg writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 this man was The phrase **this one** refers to Melchizedek. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **this one** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “this Melchizedek was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -HEB 7 4 usbu figs-explicit ᾧ δεκάτην Ἀβραὰμ, ἔδωκεν ἐκ τῶν ἀκροθινίων, ὁ πατριάρχης 1 Here the audience would have agreed that the person who is “greater” would receive the **tenth** from the person who is not as **great**. If your readers would not make this inference or agree that this is true, you may need to make the reasoning explicit. Alternate translation: “to whom the patriarch Abraham gave a tenth from the best plunder, which is what people do for a greater person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 7 4 usbu figs-explicit ᾧ δεκάτην Ἀβραὰμ, ἔδωκεν ἐκ τῶν ἀκροθινίων, ὁ πατριάρχης 1 Here the audience would have agreed that the person who is “greater” would receive the **tenth** from the person who is not as **great**. If your readers would not make this inference or agree that this is true, you may need to make the reasoning explicit. Alternate translation: “to whom the patriarch Abraham gave a tenth from the best plunder, which is what people do for a greater person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 4 kwpe translate-unknown ἐκ τῶν ἀκροθινίων 1 Here, the phrase **the best plunder** refers to the most valuable objects that Abraham took from the “kings” (see [7:1](../07/01.md)) when he defeated them. The author means that the **tenth** that Abraham gave to Melchizedek only included the most valuable objects. If your readers would misunderstand **the best plunder**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the most valuable things that Abraham took from his enemies. Alternate translation: “from the best things that he took from his enemies” or “of the most expensive items that he plundered from the four kings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 7 5 l29w grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ οἱ μὲν 1 Here, the word **indeed** indicates that the author is introducing the first half of a contrast (the second half of the contrast is in [7:6](../07/06.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **indeed**, you could use a word that introduces the first half of a contrast, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “And on the one hand, those” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 7 5 j5c3 ἐκ τῶν υἱῶν Λευεὶ 1 Here, the phrase **from the sons of Levi** could refer to: (1) how only some of the **sons of Levi** became priests. Alternate translation: “out of the sons of Levi” (2) how every one of the **sons of Levi** is a priest. Alternate translation: “who are sons of Levi and” @@ -744,7 +744,7 @@ HEB 7 5 hn3k figs-abstractnouns ἀποδεκατοῦν 1 from the people If yo HEB 7 5 ri2y translate-kinship τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτῶν 1 from their brothers Here, the word **brothers** refers to anyone who is descended from **Abraham** and Jacob, which would be all Israelites. It does not refer to just children of one’s parents. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to everyone from one tribe or nation. Alternate translation: “from their fellow Israelites” or “from the others in their nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) HEB 7 5 busq figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτῶν 1 Although the word **brothers** is masculine, it refers to any relative, both male and female. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “from their relatives” or “from their brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 7 5 rx2f grammar-connect-logic-contrast καίπερ 1 Here, the phrase **even though** introduces something that is unexpected given what the author has already said. In other words, it is surprising that the **sons of Levi** receive tithes from **their brothers** when they have all **come from the loin of Abraham**. If your readers would misunderstand **even though**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that is contrary to what is expected. Alternate translation: “although” or “despite how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -HEB 7 5 x4za figs-idiom ἐξεληλυθότας ἐκ τῆς ὀσφύος Ἀβραάμ 1 they, too, have come from Abraham’s body The phrase **from the loin of Abraham** identifies everyone who has **come** from that **loin** as descendants of **Abraham**. The word **loin** refers to the male sexual organ, so anyone who has come from someone’s **loin** is descended from that person. If your readers would misunderstand **come from the loin of Abraham**, you could use a phrase that identifies people who have descended from one ancestor. Alternate translation: “they have Abraham as a common ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 7 5 x4za figs-idiom ἐξεληλυθότας ἐκ τῆς ὀσφύος Ἀβραάμ 1 they, too, have come from Abraham’s body The phrase **from the loin of Abraham** identifies everyone who has **come** from that **loin** as descendants of **Abraham**. The word **loin** refers figuratively to the male sexual organ, so anyone who has come from someone’s **loin** is descended from that person. If your readers would misunderstand **come from the loin of Abraham**, you could use a phrase that identifies people who have descended from one ancestor. Alternate translation: “they have Abraham as a common ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 7 5 m23m translate-names Ἀβραάμ 1 The word **Abraham** is the name of a man. He is the man from whom all the Israelites and Jews are descended. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 6 bg0k grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces the second half of the contrast. The first half is in the previous verse ([7:5](../07/05.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **But**, you could use a word that introduces the second half of a contrast, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “And on the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 7 6 e0ic writing-pronouns ὁ 1 Here, the phrase **{this} one** refers to Melchizedek. If your readers would misunderstand **{this} one**, you could make to whom it refers explicit. Alternate translation: “Melchizedek,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -771,7 +771,7 @@ HEB 7 9 zvd3 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ…Λευεὶς 1 The word **Levi** HEB 7 9 e9gc figs-metonymy Λευεὶς, ὁ δεκάτας λαμβάνων 1 Here, the name **Levi** stands for the descendants of **Levi** who were priests and collected **tithes**. If your readers would misunderstand that **Levi** stands for the descendants of **Levi**, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “Levi’s descendants, the ones collecting tithes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 7 9 v1yu figs-abstractnouns καὶ…ὁ δεκάτας λαμβάνων, δεδεκάτωται 2 Levi, who received tithes, also paid tithes through Abraham If your language does not use abstract nouns for the idea behind **tithe** and **tithes**, you could express the ideas by using an adjective such as “tenth” or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “the one collecting one out of ten portions, also had paid one out of ten portions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 7 9 odg8 figs-explicit δι’ Ἀβραὰμ…δεδεκάτωται 1 Here the author refers to how Abraham **paid a tithe** to Melchizedek, an event the author has already mentioned (see [7:4](../07/04.md)). If your readers would misunderstand that the author is speaking about this event, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “had paid a tithe to Melchizedek through Abraham after Abraham defeated his enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 7 10 g26s figs-idiom ἔτι…ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ τοῦ πατρὸς ἦν 1 Levi was in the body of his ancestor The phrase **the loin of {his} father** refers to the male sexual organ. In the author’s culture, one way to speak about children was to refer to them as the product of the father’s semen. So, Abraham’s descendants can be referred to as if they were semen that was still inside Abraham. The author uses this figure of speech to make two points. First, Levi and the priests descended from him had not yet been born and thus could be considered semen that was still inside Abraham. Second, because they were inside Abraham, they participated in whatever Abraham did. This included giving a tithe to Melchizedek. If your readers would misunderstand **still in the loin of {his} father**, you could use a phrase that closely identifies Levi and Abraham while showing that Levi was not yet born. Alternate translation: “he was not yet born, and Abraham represented him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 7 10 g26s figs-idiom ἔτι…ἐν τῇ ὀσφύϊ τοῦ πατρὸς ἦν 1 Levi was in the body of his ancestor The phrase **the loin of {his} father** refers figuratively to the male sexual organ. In the author’s culture, one way to speak about children was to refer to them as the product of the father’s semen. So, Abraham’s descendants can be referred to as if they were semen that was still inside Abraham. The author uses this figure of speech to make two points. First, Levi and the priests descended from him had not yet been born and thus could be considered semen that was still inside Abraham. Second, because they were inside Abraham, they participated in whatever Abraham did. This included giving a tithe to Melchizedek. If your readers would misunderstand **still in the loin of {his} father**, you could use a phrase that closely identifies Levi and Abraham while showing that Levi was not yet born. Alternate translation: “he was not yet born, and Abraham represented him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 7 10 bd2l translate-kinship τοῦ πατρὸς 1 Here the author uses the word **father** to refer in general to a male ancestor. Abraham was more specifically Levi’s great-grandfather on his father’s side. Use an appropriate word for this relationship in your culture. Alternate translation: “of his ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) HEB 7 10 p0zd translate-names Μελχισέδεκ 1 The word **Melchizedek** is the name of a man, the same man that the author has been discussing in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 10 l5dd writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 Here, the word **him** refers to Abraham. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **him** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -811,7 +811,7 @@ HEB 7 15 uf6c writing-pronouns ἐστιν 1 Here, the word **this** could refe HEB 7 15 jn1p καὶ περισσότερον ἔτι κατάδηλόν ἐστιν 1 What we say is clearer yet Here, the phrase **still even more obvious** is a stronger form of the phrase “{it is} obvious” in [7:14](../07/14.md). The author’s point is that everyone must acknowledge that **this** (see the previous note) is true given that the following **if** statement is also true. If your readers would misunderstand **still even more obvious**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that everyone must agree with. Alternate translation: “And everyone must agree that this is true” or “And everyone knows that this is surely correct” HEB 7 15 md9i grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἀνίσταται ἱερεὺς ἕτερος 1 if another priest arises Here the author is speaking as if **another priest** “emerging” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what the author is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “because” or “since.” Alternate translation: “now that another priest has emerged” or “because another priest has emerged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) HEB 7 15 i17g figs-explicit ἱερεὺς ἕτερος 1 General Information: Here, the phrase **another priest** refers to Jesus, who is a different kind of **priest** than the priests who are descended from Levi. If your readers would misunderstand who **another priest** is, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who is a different priest,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 7 15 chxb figs-metaphor ἀνίσταται 1 Here the author speaks of how Jesus has become a priest as if he were a person “emerging” from underneath a covering or screen. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus became a **priest** at a specific point in time. If your readers would misunderstand **emerges**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to becoming a priest. Alternate translation: “takes office” or “begins to serve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 7 15 chxb figs-metaphor ἀνίσταται 1 Here the author speaks of how Jesus has become a priest as if he were a person “emerging” from underneath a covering or screen. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus became a **priest** at a specific point in time. If your readers would misunderstand **emerges**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to becoming a priest. Alternate translation: “takes office” or “begins to serve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 7 15 z1yl translate-unknown κατὰ τὴν ὁμοιότητα Μελχισέδεκ 1 in the likeness of Melchizedek Here, the phrase **according to the likeness of** means something very similar to “according to the order of.” See how you translated that phrase in [7:11](../07/11.md). If possible, use similar but not identical words here. The word **likeness** emphasizes similar behavior and identity, while “order” emphasizes similar requirements and duties. Alternate translation: “much like how Melchizedek was a priest” or “with a priesthood much like Melchizedek’s priesthood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 7 15 afqi figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν ὁμοιότητα Μελχισέδεκ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **likeness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “like” or “similar.” Alternate translation: “who is like Melchizedek” or “who is similar to Melchizedek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 7 16 nt6b writing-pronouns ὃς…γέγονεν 1 Here, the word **who** refers back to the phrase “another priest” in the previous verse ([7:15](../07/15.md)). If your readers would misunderstand to whom **who** refers, you could make it explicit. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “That priest has become one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -821,21 +821,21 @@ HEB 7 16 el4j figs-explicit ἐντολῆς σαρκίνης 1 Here, the phras HEB 7 16 l4mg figs-abstractnouns ἐντολῆς σαρκίνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **command**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “command.” Alternate translation: “that commands what is fleshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 7 16 kw1a figs-possession κατὰ δύναμιν ζωῆς ἀκαταλύτου 1 Here the author uses the possessive form to indicate that **power** comes from or is based in the **indestructible life**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “according to the power that comes from an indestructible life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 7 16 oiwa figs-abstractnouns κατὰ δύναμιν ζωῆς ἀκαταλύτου 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **power** and **life**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “according to how powerful he is because he never stops living” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 7 16 m4kl figs-explicit ζωῆς ἀκαταλύτου 1 Here, the phrase **indestructible life** refers to how Jesus died but then resurrected and is alive again. The phrase also explains what being a priest “forever” (see [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md)) means. The author will cite this Psalm again in the following verse. If your readers would misunderstand **indestructible life**, you could make what it refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “of a life that death could not destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 7 16 m4kl figs-explicit ζωῆς ἀκαταλύτου 1 Here, the phrase **indestructible life** refers to how Jesus died but then resurrected and is alive again. The phrase also explains what being a priest “forever” (see [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md)) means. The author will cite this Psalm again in the following verse. If your readers would misunderstand **indestructible life**, you could make what it refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “of a life that death could not destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 17 xmj8 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For scripture witnesses about him Here, the word **For** introduces the evidence or proof that Jesus has become a priest “according to the power of an indestructible life” (see [7:16](../07/16.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces evidence or proof. Alternate translation: “You know that is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 7 17 gqya figs-activepassive μαρτυρεῖται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **testified** rather than focusing on who or what does the “testifying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it when he spoke [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). Alternate translation: “God is testifying” or “the Psalm is testifying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 7 17 t8nv writing-quotations μαρτυρεῖται 1 Here the author quotes from an important text, the Old Testament scriptures. He does not introduce the words as a quotation but instead introduces them as something that has been **testified**. However, the audience would have understood that these were words from the Old Testament, specifically from [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). If your readers would not know that the quotation is from the Old Testament, you could include a footnote or use some other form to identify it. Alternate translation: “it is being testified in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) HEB 7 17 oo1b figs-quotations μαρτυρεῖται…ὅτι σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ 1 If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “it is being testified that he is a priest forever, after the order of Melchizedek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 7 17 g6zd σὺ ἱερεὺς εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ 1 according to the order of Melchizedek Since the author repeats here the same words that he quoted in [5:6](../05/06.md), you should translate these words in exactly the same way as you did in that verse. -HEB 7 18 bzht grammar-connect-words-phrases μὲν γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what the quote in the previous verse means. The phrase **on the one hand** signals to the audience that this explanation has two parts. The second part begins with “on the other hand” in [7:19b](../07/19.md). If your readers would misunderstand **For on the one hand**, you could use words that introduce a two-part explanation. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to follow something like the alternate translation for “on the other hand” in 7:19b. Alternate translation: “First then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +HEB 7 18 bzht grammar-connect-words-phrases μὲν γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what the quote in the previous verse means. The phrase **on the one hand** signals to the audience that this explanation has two parts. The second part begins with “on the other hand” in [7:19b](../07/19.md). If your readers would misunderstand **For on the one hand**, you could use words that introduce a two-part explanation. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to follow something like the alternate translation for “on the other hand” in 7:19b. Alternate translation: “First then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 7 18 dm50 figs-abstractnouns ἀθέτησις…γίνεται προαγούσης ἐντολῆς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **annulment** and **commandment**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “annul” and “command.” Alternate translation: “what was formerly commanded is annulled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 7 18 x8tw figs-explicit προαγούσης ἐντολῆς 1 Here, the phrase **the former commandment** identifies what God commanded Moses to tell the people about how the descendants of Levi would serve as priests and what they would do. If your readers would misunderstand what **commandment** this is, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the former commandment about the Levitical priesthood” or “of the former commandment concerning priests in Moses’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 18 ez4i figs-doublet ἀσθενὲς, καὶ ἀνωφελές 1 These two terms mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize how ineffective the “former commandment” was. If your language does not use repetition to do this, or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “is very weak” or “cannot accomplish anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 7 19 t5w7 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces support for how the “former commandment” is “weak and useless” (see [7:18](../07/18.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “indeed,” or “that is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 7 19 ia8j figs-personification οὐδὲν…ἐτελείωσεν ὁ νόμος 1 the law made nothing perfect Here the author speaks of **the law** as if it were a person who was ineffective and could “perfect” nothing. He speaks in this way to indicate that the system of laws that God gave through Moses, particularly the laws about priests, did not lead to people or things becoming “perfect.” If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the law was not something that people could follow to become perfect” or “nothing was perfected through Moses’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -HEB 7 19 otzd grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the phrase **on the other hand** introduces the second part of the author’s explanation. Make sure you translate this phrase so that it works well with how you translated “on the one hand” in [7:18](../07/18.md). Alternate translation: “and second, there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +HEB 7 19 otzd grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the phrase **on the other hand** introduces the second part of the author’s explanation. Make sure you translate this phrase so that it works well with how you translated “on the one hand” in [7:18](../07/18.md). Alternate translation: “and second, there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 7 19 stc2 figs-abstractnouns ἐπεισαγωγὴ…κρείττονος ἐλπίδος 1 a better hope is introduced If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **introduction** and **hope**, you could express the idea by using verbs such as “introduce” and “hope.” Alternate translation: “God introduces something better for which we hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 7 19 xp1h figs-metonymy κρείττονος ἐλπίδος 1 a better hope is introduced Here, the word **hope** refers to the contents of the **hope**, or what believers confidently expect. If your readers would misunderstand **hope**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **hope**. Alternate translation: “of the better things that we hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 7 19 xp1h figs-metonymy κρείττονος ἐλπίδος 1 a better hope is introduced Here, the word **hope** figuratively refers to the contents of the **hope**, or what believers confidently expect. If your readers would misunderstand **hope**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **hope**. Alternate translation: “of the better things that we hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 7 19 c9tz figs-go ἐγγίζομεν τῷ Θεῷ 1 through which we come near to God Here, the phrase **come near** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author wants believers to approach God in heaven. This means that they enter into God’s presence. If your readers would misunderstand **come near**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someone’s presence. Alternate translation: “we go before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 7 20 e97r translate-versebridge 0 General Information: To help your readers understand the author’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put the background information about how the Israelite priests were not appointed with an oath while Jesus was appointed with an oath in a first sentence. Then, you could put the comparison between how Jesus was appointed with an oath and how he is the guarantor of a better covenant in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “For indeed they without swearing an oath are become priests, but he with an oath-taking, through God saying to him, “The Lord swore and will not change his mind: ‘You are a priest forever.’” So, by as much as not without swearing an oath,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) HEB 7 20 f3cd grammar-connect-words-phrases καθ’ ὅσον 1 General Information: Here, the phrase **by as much as** introduces the first half a comparison that the author will complete in [7:22](../07/22.md). The point is that, just as **swearing an oath** is more guaranteed than not using an oath, so Jesus’s priesthood and covenant are better than the priesthood of the descendant’s of Levi. If your readers would misunderstand **by as much as**, you could use a form that introduces a comparison between two situations or concepts. Alternate translation: “just as it was” or “in the same way that it was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -865,10 +865,10 @@ HEB 7 23 vn5m figs-abstractnouns θανάτῳ 1 has given the guarantee of a be HEB 7 23 tfba figs-explicit παραμένειν 1 has given the guarantee of a better covenant Here the author implies that they **are prevented {from} continuing** to be priests. If your readers would not make this inference, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “from continuing to be priests” or “from continuing to act as priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 24 ywjc grammar-connect-words-phrases ὁ δὲ 1 he has a permanent priesthood Here, the words **but** and **on the other hand** introduce the second part of the contrast that the author began in [7:23](../07/23.md). Make sure you express the idea here in a way that matches how you introduced the first half of the contrast in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “and on the other hand, he” or “but second, he” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 7 24 y2uu writing-pronouns ὁ 1 he has a permanent priesthood Here, the word **he** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **he** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the Son” or “Jesus the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -HEB 7 24 z20u figs-explicit μένειν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 he has a permanent priesthood Here, the phrase **he remains forever** means something similar to the phrase “indestructible life” in [7:16](../07/16.md): Jesus lives forever, that is, he will never die. If your readers would misunderstand **he remains forever**, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “he remains alive forever” or “his life never ends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 7 24 z20u figs-explicit μένειν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 he has a permanent priesthood Here, the phrase **he remains forever** means something similar to the phrase “indestructible life” in [7:16](../07/16.md): Jesus lives forever, that is, he will never die. If your readers would misunderstand **he remains forever**, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “he remains alive forever” or “his life never ends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 24 u941 figs-abstractnouns ἀπαράβατον ἔχει τὴν ἱερωσύνην 1 he has a permanent priesthood If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **priesthood**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “imitate.” Alternate translation: “is permanently a priest” or “who permanently acts as a priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 7 25 a4gg grammar-connect-logic-result ὅθεν 1 Therefore he Here, the phrase **because of which** introduces a conclusion based on the fact that Jesus has “the permanent priesthood” ([7:24](../07/24.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **because of which**, you could use a natural form that introduces a conclusion. Alternate translation: “as a result of which” or “so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -HEB 7 25 sn4h figs-explicit σῴζειν εἰς τὸ παντελὲς 1 Therefore he Here, **completely** identifies the way that Jesus “saves” people as something that he himself does totally and finally. In other words, he does not need someone else to assist him in “saving” his people. If your readers would misunderstand **completely**, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “to save entirely” or “to save all the way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 7 25 sn4h figs-explicit σῴζειν εἰς τὸ παντελὲς 1 Therefore he Here, **completely** identifies the way that Jesus “saves” people as something that he himself does totally and finally. In other words, he does not need someone else to assist him in “saving” his people. If your readers would misunderstand **completely**, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “to save entirely” or “to save all the way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 25 b182 figs-go τοὺς προσερχομένους…τῷ Θεῷ 1 those who approach God through him Here, the word **approaching** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author speaks of people **approaching God**. This means that they enter into God’s presence. If your readers would misunderstand **approaching**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someone’s presence. Alternate translation: “the ones going before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 7 25 l29k grammar-connect-time-simultaneous πάντοτε ζῶν 1 those who approach God through him Here, the phrase **always living** could introduce: (1) another reason why he is **able to save completely**. Alternate translation: “because he always lives” (2) something that happens as part of or during his “saving” of those **approaching God through him**. Alternate translation: “as one who always lives” or “part of which is how he always lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) HEB 7 26 x23q grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 has become higher than the heavens Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of the way in which Jesus serves as a priest. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces more explanation, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -878,7 +878,7 @@ HEB 7 26 t182 figs-doublet ὅσιος, ἄκακος, ἀμίαντος 1 has b HEB 7 26 xxf1 κεχωρισμένος ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν 1 has become higher than the heavens Here, the phrase **separated from the sinners** could refer to: (1) how Jesus is distinct from or different than **the sinners**. Alternate translation: “not one of the sinners” or “distinct from the sinners” (2) how Jesus does not come into contact with **sinners** because he is now **higher than the heavens**. Alternate translation: “dwelling far away from sinners” or “not coming into contact with the sinners” HEB 7 26 cmq1 figs-explicit ὑψηλότερος τῶν οὐρανῶν γενόμενος 1 has become higher than the heavens Many people in the author’s culture believed that the space that they called “heaven” contained multiple layers or spheres of individual heavens. The author has already used the plural **heavens** in [4:14](../04/14.md). Here, the author uses this language without clarifying how many heavens there are. The main point is that Jesus is **higher than the heavens**. This could mean that: (1) Jesus is in the highest heaven, **higher** than all the other **heavens**. Alternate translation: “having come to the highest place in the heavens” (2) Jesus has gone beyond all the **heavens**. This could be a metaphor for how greatly God has honored him, or it could mean that Jesus has left the creation. Alternate translation: “having become more exalted than the heavens” or “having gone beyond the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 27 yc7r figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔχει καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀνάγκην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **need**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “does not need each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 7 27 nfh7 figs-infostructure καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀνάγκην, ὥσπερ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς, πρότερον ὑπὲρ τῶν ἰδίων ἁμαρτιῶν θυσίας ἀναφέρειν, ἔπειτα τῶν τοῦ λαοῦ 1 If your readers would find the order in which the author presents information confusing, you could rearrange the elements so that they appear in more natural order. Alternate translation: “a need each day to offer up sacrifices, first on behalf of his own sins and then on behalf of the those of the people, even as the high priests do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +HEB 7 27 nfh7 figs-infostructure καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀνάγκην, ὥσπερ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς, πρότερον ὑπὲρ τῶν ἰδίων ἁμαρτιῶν θυσίας ἀναφέρειν, ἔπειτα τῶν τοῦ λαοῦ 1 If your readers would find the order in which the author presents information confusing, you could rearrange the elements so that they appear in more natural order. Alternate translation: “a need each day to offer up sacrifices, first on behalf of his own sins and then on behalf of the those of the people, even as the high priests do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 7 27 lxug figs-explicit ὥσπερ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς 1 Here, the phrase **high priests** refers to other **high priests** besides Jesus, more specifically those who are descended from Levi and Aaron. If your readers would misunderstand **high priests**, you could make it more explicit which **high priests** these are. Alternate translation: “even as the other high priests” or “even as the Levitical high priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 7 27 jdb8 πρότερον ὑπὲρ τῶν ἰδίων ἁμαρτιῶν θυσίας ἀναφέρειν, ἔπειτα τῶν τοῦ λαοῦ 1 Here the author uses words and ideas that are very similar to what he used in [5:3](../05/03.md). They are not the same words, but the main idea is very similar. Consider referring to that verse when you translate these words. HEB 7 27 qnj1 grammar-connect-time-sequential πρότερον…ἔπειτα 1 Here, the words **first** and **then** indicate sequence in time. In other words, only after making an offering **on behalf of his own sins** does the high priest do so **{on behalf of} {those} of the people**. If your readers would misunderstand **first** and **then**, you could use words or phrases that introduce two actions in a sequence. Alternate translation: “in the first place … and in the second place” or “first … and second” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) @@ -894,11 +894,11 @@ HEB 7 28 esfp figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπους 1 the law appoints as hig HEB 7 28 u5ny figs-abstractnouns ἀνθρώπους…ἔχοντας ἀσθένειαν 1 men who have weaknesses If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **weakness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “weak.” Alternate translation: “men who are weak” or “men who fail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 7 28 lboj figs-personification ὁ λόγος…τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας, τῆς μετὰ τὸν νόμον, Υἱόν 1 men who have weaknesses Just as with **law**, the author speaks of **the word of the swearing of an oath** as if it were a person who could “appoint” someone. He speaks in this way to indicate that the **Son** fulfill what God “swore” in [Psalm 110:4](../psa/110/04.md). If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could refer to the one who swore **the oath** as the one who **{appoints}**, or you could express the idea in another natural way. Alternate translation: “in the word of the swearing of an oath, which came after the law, it is written that God appoints a Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) HEB 7 28 gzm1 figs-possession ὁ λόγος…τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας 1 the word of the oath, which came after the law, appointed a Son Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **word** that records how God “swore” **an oath**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the word that records how God swore an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -HEB 7 28 yez2 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος…τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας 1 the word of the oath, which came after the law, appointed a Son Here, **word** represents what someone says in words. If your readers would misunderstand **word**, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message concerning the swearing of an oath” or “what God said about the swearing of an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 7 28 yez2 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος…τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας 1 the word of the oath, which came after the law, appointed a Son Here, **word** figuratively represents what someone says in words. If your readers would misunderstand **word**, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message concerning the swearing of an oath” or “what God said about the swearing of an oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 7 28 msa4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱόν 1 Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) HEB 7 28 r5lc εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τετελειωμένον 1 who has been made perfect Here, the phrase **having been made perfect forever** could refer to: (1) who the **Son** is. Alternate translation: “who has been made perfect forever” (2) something that happened before the **Son** became a high priest. Alternate translation: “after he was made perfect forever” HEB 7 28 fkl3 figs-activepassive τετελειωμένον 1 who has been made perfect If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the one who is **made perfect** rather than focusing on the person doing the “perfecting.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God having made him perfect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 8 intro ks94 0 # Hebrews 8 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: The ministry of the Son (8:1–6)
* Teaching: The new covenant (8:7–13)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [8:8–12](../08/08.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### New covenant

In [8:6–13](../08/06.md), the author refers to a “second,” “better,” or “new” covenant. All these phrases refer to the same covenant, the one that God promised in the words that the author quotes from [Jeremiah 31:31–34](../jer/31/31.md). This new covenant is “mediated” through Jesus the Son ([8:6](../08/06.md)), and when God initiates this covenant, the “first covenant” (the one God made with the Israelites through Moses) becomes “old” or “obsolete” ([8:13](../08/13.md)). In your translation, use words or phrases that refer to an agreement or formal contract between people or groups. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### The heavenly sanctuary

In [8:1–2](../08/01.md), the author refers to how Jesus has sat down at the right side of God’s throne and is a “servant of the holy place and the true tabernacle.” Most likely, the author considers the throne where Jesus sat down to be inside this heavenly sanctuary. Scholars debate whether “holy place” and “true tabernacle” are two different names for the same thing or whether the “holy place” is the most sacred area inside the “true tabernacle.” Either way, these names refer to the sanctuary in heaven where Jesus acts as a high priest. You should refer to the heavenly sanctuary with the same words that you use to refer to the earthly sanctuary. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The “house” of Israel or Judah

In [8:8](../08/08.md), [10](../08/10.md), the quotation refers to the “house” of Israel or of Judah. In this context, “house” refers to groups of people who are connected because they are all descended from the same person or because they are all ruled by the same leader. In this case, both are true: the “house” refers to the people who are descended from Abraham and are ruled by a king. In [10](../08/10.md), the “house of Israel” refers to all the Israelites. In [8:8](../08/08.md), the “house of Israel” and the “house of Judah” refer to the two different kingdoms that the original kingdom of Israel split into. In both cases, the quotation is referring to all the Israelites. Consider using a natural way to refer to a group of people who go together. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/house]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Was Jesus a priest when he lived and died on earth?

In [8:4](../08/04.md), the author argues that Jesus would not be a priest if he were on earth. His basis for this claim seems to be that God has already appointed priests to offer sacrifices on earth. Scholars frequently debate whether the author of Hebrews claims that Jesus served as a priest when he obeyed during his earthly life and when he died on the cross, or whether he only served as a priest after he came back to life and ascended to heaven. Either way, the author’s point in this verse is that Jesus would not be a priest if he were on earth right now. See the notes on this verse for ways to translate the contrary-to-fact condition.

### What is the “fault” in the first covenant?

In [8:7](../08/07.md), the author implies that the “first covenant” was not “faultless.” However, in [8:8](../08/08.md), he claims that God finds “fault” with “them,” that is, the Israelites who received that covenant. Most likely, the the “fault” in the first covenant was that it did not enable the Israelites to keep the covenant, and so they failed. This contrasts with the “new covenant,” in which God will put his laws in the minds and hearts of his people. Since the people are the “fault” in the new covenant, there is no need to harmonize these two verses. +HEB 8 intro ks94 0 # Hebrews 8 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: The ministry of the Son (8:1–6)
* Teaching: The new covenant (8:7–13)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [8:8–12](../08/08.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### New covenant

In [8:6–13](../08/06.md), the author refers to a “second,” “better,” or “new” covenant. All these phrases refer to the same covenant, the one that God promised in the words that the author quotes from [Jeremiah 31:31–34](../jer/31/31.md). This new covenant is “mediated” through Jesus the Son ([8:6](../08/06.md)), and when God initiates this covenant, the “first covenant” (the one God made with the Israelites through Moses) becomes “old” or “obsolete” ([8:13](../08/13.md)). In your translation, use words or phrases that refer to an agreement or formal contract between people or groups. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### The heavenly sanctuary

In [8:1–2](../08/01.md), the author refers to how Jesus has sat down at the right side of God’s throne and is a “servant of the holy place and the true tabernacle.” Most likely, the author considers the throne where Jesus sat down to be inside this heavenly sanctuary. Scholars debate whether “holy place” and “true tabernacle” are two different names for the same thing or whether the “holy place” is the most sacred area inside the “true tabernacle.” Either way, these names refer to the sanctuary in heaven where Jesus acts as a high priest. You should refer to the heavenly sanctuary with the same words that you use to refer to the earthly sanctuary. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The “house” of Israel or Judah

In [8:8](../08/08.md), [10](../08/10.md), the quotation refers to the “house” of Israel or of Judah. In this context, “house” refers figuratively to groups of people who are connected because they are all descended from the same person or because they are all ruled by the same leader. In this case, both are true: the “house” refers to the people who are descended from Abraham and are ruled by a king. In [10](../08/10.md), the “house of Israel” refers to all the Israelites. In [8:8](../08/08.md), the “house of Israel” and the “house of Judah” refer to the two different kingdoms that the original kingdom of Israel split into. In both cases, the quotation is referring to all the Israelites. Consider using a natural way to refer to a group of people who go together. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/house]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Was Jesus a priest when he lived and died on earth?

In [8:4](../08/04.md), the author argues that Jesus would not be a priest if he were on earth. His basis for this claim seems to be that God has already appointed priests to offer sacrifices on earth. Scholars frequently debate whether the author of Hebrews claims that Jesus served as a priest when he obeyed during his earthly life and when he died on the cross, or whether he only served as a priest after he came back to life and ascended to heaven. Either way, the author’s point in this verse is that Jesus would not be a priest if he were on earth right now. See the notes on this verse for ways to translate the contrary-to-fact condition.

### What is the “fault” in the first covenant?

In [8:7](../08/07.md), the author implies that the “first covenant” was not “faultless.” However, in [8:8](../08/08.md), he claims that God finds “fault” with “them,” that is, the Israelites who received that covenant. Most likely, the the “fault” in the first covenant was that it did not enable the Israelites to keep the covenant, and so they failed. This contrasts with the “new covenant,” in which God will put his laws in the minds and hearts of his people. Since the people are the “fault” in the new covenant, there is no need to harmonize these two verses. HEB 8 1 tw7l grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Now Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section in the author’s argument. If your readers would misunderstand **Now**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 8 1 nb8q translate-unknown κεφάλαιον…ἐπὶ τοῖς λεγομένοις 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the word **point** refers to the main or most significant idea in a speech or argument. The author could be referring to the most significant idea in: (1) everything he is writing, including what follows. Alternate translation: “the most significant thing in what is being said is this” (2) what he has already said, not including what follows. Alternate translation: “the most significant thing in what has been said is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 8 1 noty figs-activepassive τοῖς λεγομένοις 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **being said** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that he himself did it. Alternate translation: “the things that I have said is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -950,8 +950,8 @@ HEB 8 6 ntwl figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ κρείττοσιν ἐπαγγελί HEB 8 7 obo7 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 first covenant … second covenant Here, the word **For** introduces support for what the author has claimed about how the covenant that Jesus mediates is “better” (see [8:6](../08/06.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “You can tell that the second covenant is greater, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 8 7 tqku grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ…ἡ πρώτη ἐκείνη ἦν ἄμεμπτος 1 first covenant … second covenant Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the **first {covenant}** was not **faultless**. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by pointing out that God set up a **second** covenant. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if that first covenant had really been faultless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) HEB 8 7 wb9d translate-ordinal ἡ πρώτη…δευτέρας 1 first covenant … second covenant If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use cardinal numbers here. Alternate translation: “covenant one … for a covenant two” or “earlier covenant … for a later covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -HEB 8 7 gig6 figs-explicit ἡ πρώτη ἐκείνη…δευτέρας 1 had been faultless Here, the words **first** and **second** refer to two covenants that God made. The **first** covenant is the one that God made with the Israelites through Moses, and it was made before the **second** covenant, which is the one that God makes with his people through Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand what the **first** and **second** covenants are, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the covenant that God made with his people at first … for another, later covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 8 7 np7l figs-idiom οὐκ ἂν δευτέρας ἐζητεῖτο τόπος 1 had been faultless Here, the phrase **no place would have been sought** refers to how God would not have made another covenant if the first one had been **faultless**. The word **place** refers to a situation in which another covenant would exist. The idiom avoids referring to who is doing the “seeking.” If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use an expression that refers to an “opportunity” or “situation” in which another covenant is made. Alternate translation: “there would not have been a situation in which another covenant was made” or “there would have been no need for a second one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 8 7 gig6 figs-explicit ἡ πρώτη ἐκείνη…δευτέρας 1 had been faultless Here, the words **first** and **second** refer to two covenants that God made. The **first** covenant is the one that God made with the Israelites through Moses, and it was made before the **second** covenant, which is the one that God makes with his people through Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand what the **first** and **second** covenants are, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the covenant that God made with his people at first … for another, later covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 8 7 np7l figs-idiom οὐκ ἂν δευτέρας ἐζητεῖτο τόπος 1 had been faultless Here, the phrase **no place would have been sought** figuratively refers to how God would not have made another covenant if the first one had been **faultless**. The word **place** refers figuratively to a situation in which another covenant would exist. The idiom avoids referring to who is doing the “seeking.” If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use an expression that refers to an “opportunity” or “situation” in which another covenant is made. Alternate translation: “there would not have been a situation in which another covenant was made” or “there would have been no need for a second one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 8 7 pktf figs-activepassive οὐκ…ἐζητεῖτο τόπος 1 had been faultless If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **place** that is **sought** rather than focusing on the person doing the “seeking.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “no one would have sought a place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 8 8 ya4n grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 General Information: Here, the word **For** introduces support for what the author has claimed about how the first covenant was not “faultless” (see [8:7](../08/07.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “We know that the first first covenant was not faultless, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 8 8 sqb4 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 with the people Here, the word **them** refers to the people with whom God made the “first covenant”: the people of Israel. The author may be referring specifically to the people whom God led out of Egypt, or he may be referring to all the people who lived under the “first covenant.” If your readers would misunderstand **them**, you could clarify to whom it refers. Alternate translation: “with the Israelite ancestors” or “with the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -960,7 +960,7 @@ HEB 8 8 ncqt figs-quotations λέγει, ἰδοὺ, ἡμέραι ἔρχοντ HEB 8 8 xhp8 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἡμέραι 1 See The **Lord** is using the term **Behold** to focus the audience’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Listen! Days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 8 8 qzx8 figs-idiom ἡμέραι ἔρχονται 1 See Here, the clause **days are coming** indicates that some event is going to happen soon. If your readers would misunderstand **days are coming**, you could use a word or phrase that anticipates that something is about to happen. Alternate translation: “the time will soon be here” or “it is almost the moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 8 8 nzgz figs-123person λέγει Κύριος 1 See Here the author has God speaking about himself in the third person. He uses this form because the quotation uses the third person to speak about God, and the author claims that God speaks the quotation. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could clarify that God is speaking about himself. Alternate translation: “I the Lord say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -HEB 8 8 c6zm figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον Ἰούδα 1 the house of Israel and with the house of Judah Here, the word **house** refers to a group of people. The **house of Israel** refers to the group of people who lived in the country of Israel, and the **house of Judah** refers to the group of people who lived in the country of Judah. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel and with the people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 8 8 c6zm figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον Ἰούδα 1 the house of Israel and with the house of Judah Here, the word **house** figuratively refers to a group of people. The **house of Israel** refers to the group of people who lived in the country of Israel, and the **house of Judah** refers to the group of people who lived in the country of Judah. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel and with the people of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 8 8 mlop figs-explicit τὸν οἶκον Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον Ἰούδα 1 the house of Israel and with the house of Judah Here God refers to the two kingdoms that the Israelites lived in. The northern area was called **Israel**, and the southern area was called **Judah**. When David and Solomon ruled as kings, these two areas together made up one kingdom. After Solomon died, the northern area rebelled and created its own kingdom. God refers to both kingdoms because he wants the audience to know that he is making this **new covenant** with all of his people. If your readers would misunderstand why God mentions both **Israel** and **Judah**, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the houses of both Israel and Judah” or “with all my people, including the house of Israel and the house of Judah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 8 9 r0ap figs-quotations οὐ κατὰ τὴν διαθήκην ἣν ἐποίησα τοῖς πατράσιν αὐτῶν, ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἐπιλαβομένου μου τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῶν, ἐξαγαγεῖν αὐτοὺς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου; ὅτι αὐτοὶ οὐκ ἐνέμειναν ἐν τῇ διαθήκῃ μου, κἀγὼ ἠμέλησα αὐτῶν, λέγει Κύριος. 1 I took them by their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these words as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you translate these words as an indirect quote, you also need to translate the words in the previous verse and the following three verses as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “not according to the covenant that he made with their fathers on the day when he grasped their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt, because they did not continue in his covenant, and he did not care about them, so he says.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 8 9 qses translate-kinship τοῖς πατράσιν αὐτῶν 1 I took them by their hand to lead them out of the land of Egypt Here, **their fathers** refers to the Israelites who were alive before Jesus lived on earth. The audience of the original quotation were Israelites who descended from these people. Use a word or phrase that refers to ancestors. Alternate translation: “with their forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) @@ -975,7 +975,7 @@ HEB 8 9 a9r8 figs-123person λέγει Κύριος 1 I took them by their hand HEB 8 10 guov grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 the house of Israel Here, the word **For** introduces a description of the new covenant in contrast to the old covenant that God described in [8:9](../08/09.md). This description of the new covenant continues through [8:11–12](../08/11.md) If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces a description that contrasts with a previous description. Alternate translation: “But” or “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 8 10 fh1c figs-quotations ὅτι αὕτη ἡ διαθήκη, ἣν διαθήσομαι τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰσραὴλ μετὰ τὰς ἡμέρας ἐκείνας, λέγει Κύριος, διδοὺς νόμους μου εἰς τὴν διάνοιαν αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν ἐπιγράψω αὐτούς; καὶ ἔσομαι αὐτοῖς εἰς Θεόν, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔσονταί μοι εἰς λαόν. 1 General Information: If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these words as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you translate these words as an indirect quote, you also need to translate the words in the previous two verses and the following two verses as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “For this is the covenant that he will covenant with the house of Israel after those days, so he says, putting his laws into their mind, and he will write them on their hearts, and he will be to them as God, and they will be to him as a people.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) HEB 8 10 z7wf διαθήσομαι 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “I will set up” -HEB 8 10 k2ew figs-metaphor τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰσραὴλ 1 the house of Israel Here, the word **house** refers to a group of people. The phrase **the house of Israel** thus refers to everyone whom God considers to be part of the people of **Israel**. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “with the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 8 10 k2ew figs-metaphor τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰσραὴλ 1 the house of Israel Here, the word **house** figuratively refers to a group of people. The phrase **the house of Israel** thus refers to everyone whom God considers to be part of the people of **Israel**. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “with the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 8 10 q78u figs-idiom μετὰ τὰς ἡμέρας ἐκείνας 1 after those days Here, the phrase **after those days** identifies something happens after a certain period of time. That period of time could be long or short, not necessarily just several **days**. Here, God’s point is that he will make this new covenant in the future. If your readers would misunderstand **after those days**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to action that will happen at some point in the future. Alternate translation: “in the future” or “after that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 8 10 du3y figs-123person λέγει Κύριος 1 after those days Here, just as in [8:8–9](../08/08.md), the author has God speaking about himself in the third person. He uses this form because the quotation uses the third person to speak about God, and the author claims that God speaks the quotation. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could clarify that God is speaking about himself. Alternate translation: “I the Lord say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) HEB 8 10 axqs figs-parallelism διδοὺς νόμους μου εἰς τὴν διάνοιαν αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐπὶ καρδίας αὐτῶν ἐπιγράψω αὐτούς 1 after those days Here the quotation includes two statements that mean almost the same thing. One statement uses “putting” and **mind** language, and the other uses “writing” and **heart** language. This was considered good poetry in the author’s culture. If your readers would misunderstand the parallelism, and if this would not be good poetry in your culture, you could combine the two statements. Alternate translation: “writing my laws on their hearts” or “putting my laws inside them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -990,7 +990,7 @@ HEB 8 11 wne2 figs-parallelism ἕκαστος τὸν πολίτην αὐτο HEB 8 11 v36j figs-gendernotations αὐτοῦ…τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 neighbor … brother Although **his** and **brother** are masculine, they refer to anyone, whether male or female. If your readers would misunderstand **his** and **brother**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her … his or her sibling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 8 11 jl1h figs-quotesinquotes λέγων, γνῶθι τὸν Κύριον 1 They will not teach each one his neighbor and each one his brother, saying, ‘Know the Lord.’ If a direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that he should know the Lord,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) HEB 8 11 mehi figs-yousingular γνῶθι 1 They will not teach each one his neighbor and each one his brother, saying, ‘Know the Lord.’ Because **each one** is speaking to one person, the imperative **Know** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -HEB 8 11 q5ki figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου αὐτῶν 1 Know the Lord … will all know me Here God speaks, using **the least** and **the greatest** in order to include them and every person in between. By speaking in this way, he includes every person who is part of his people. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “every single one of them” or “including people of every status” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +HEB 8 11 q5ki figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου αὐτῶν 1 Know the Lord … will all know me Here God speaks figuratively, using **the least** and **the greatest** in order to include them and every person in between. By speaking in this way, he includes every person who is part of his people. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “every single one of them” or “including people of every status” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) HEB 8 11 u98k figs-idiom ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου αὐτῶν 1 Know the Lord … will all know me Here, the phrases **the least** and **the greatest** refer to people who have the least and the most importance and power in a society. If your readers would misunderstand **the least** and **the greatest**, you could use comparable phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least powerful of them to the most powerful” or “from the littlest ones to the biggest ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 8 11 ne4p figs-nominaladj μικροῦ…μεγάλου 1 Know the Lord … will all know me The author is using the adjectives **least** and **greatest** as nouns in order to refer to people who are **least** and **greatest**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “the least person … the greatest person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) HEB 8 12 zksg figs-quotations ὅτι ἵλεως ἔσομαι ταῖς ἀδικίαις αὐτῶν, καὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν οὐ μὴ μνησθῶ ἔτι 1 toward their evil deeds If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these words as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you translate these words as an indirect quote, you also need to translate the words in the previous four verses as indirect quotes. Alternate translation: “For he will be merciful toward their unrighteousness, and their sins he will certainly not remember any longer.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -1000,13 +1000,13 @@ HEB 8 12 w69r ἵλεως ἔσομαι ταῖς ἀδικίαις αὐτῶ HEB 8 12 cu1b figs-abstractnouns ταῖς ἀδικίαις αὐτῶν 1 toward their evil deeds If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **unrighteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “unrighteous” or an adverb such as “unrighteously.” Alternate translation: “toward the unrighteous things they have done” or “toward how they have acted unrighteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 8 12 a1xr figs-idiom οὐ μὴ μνησθῶ 1 their sins I will not remember any longer Here, the phrase **I will certainly not remember** refers to how God chooses not to bring up or act on **their sins**. It does not mean that God forgets or does not know about the **sins**. If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that indicates that God will not bring up or act on **their sins**. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not act on” or “I will certainly not consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 8 12 k1vo figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ 1 their sins I will not remember any longer The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In the author’s culture, two negative words made the statement even more negative. English speakers would think that the two negatives form a positive, so the ULT expresses the idea with one strong negative. If your language can use two negatives as the author’s culture did, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in this way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -HEB 8 13 pzqj writing-quotations ἐν τῷ λέγειν, καινὴν 1 their sins I will not remember any longer Here the author refers back to how the quotation used the word **new** to describe the “new covenant” (see [8:8](../08/08.md)). Use a natural form in your language for referring back to a specific word that was quoted. Alternate translation: “By using the word ‘new’ for this new covenant,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +HEB 8 13 pzqj writing-quotations ἐν τῷ λέγειν, καινὴν 1 their sins I will not remember any longer Here the author refers back to how the quotation used the word **new** to describe the “new covenant” (see [8:8](../08/08.md)). Use a natural form in your language for referring back to a specific word that was quoted. Alternate translation: “By using the word ‘new’ for this new covenant,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) HEB 8 13 ofnl translate-unknown πεπαλαίωκεν τὴν πρώτην; τὸ…παλαιούμενον 1 their sins I will not remember any longer Here, to make something **obsolete** means to provide something newer and better that makes the older version out of date or no longer relevant. If your readers would misunderstand the phrase “make obsolete,” you could use a word or phrase that refers to how something is out of date or not relevant. Alternate translation: “he has made the first out of date … what is out of date” or “he has made the first no longer relevant … what is no longer relevant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 8 13 grcm writing-pronouns πεπαλαίωκεν τὴν πρώτην 1 their sins I will not remember any longer Here, **he** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand **he**, you could make the reference explicit. Alternate translation: “God has made the first obsolete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 8 13 zpho figs-explicit τὴν πρώτην 1 their sins I will not remember any longer Here, the phrase **the first** refers specifically to “the first covenant,” the one that God made with the Israelites through Moses. If your readers would misunderstand **the first**, you could make it explicit that the author is referring to this “first covenant.” Alternate translation: “the first covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 8 13 ta59 figs-doublet τὸ…παλαιούμενον καὶ γηράσκον 1 their sins I will not remember any longer Here, **being made obsolete** and **growing old** mean almost the same thing. The author uses both words to emphasize that **the first** covenant is no longer the current covenant. If your readers would misunderstand why the author uses two very similar phrases, or if you do not have two phrases that express this particular meaning, you could use one phrase here. Alternate translation: “what is becoming obsolete” or “what is old and obsolete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 8 13 v2tt ἐγγὺς ἀφανισμοῦ 1 their sins I will not remember any longer Alternate translation: “is going to disappear soon” -HEB 9 intro p8vy 0 # Hebrews 9 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: Old and new ministries (9:1–10:18)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The earthly tabernacle

In [9:1–10](../09/01.md), the author describes and evaluates the earthly tabernacle. When the author wrote this letter, there was a temple in Jerusalem, and the tabernacle no longer existed. So, his descriptions are based on the Old Testament only, not on personal experience. The tabernacle was a large tent divided into two parts: the outer “Holy Place” and the inner “Most Holy Place.” This tabernacle contained an “ark,” in which God had the people store important objects. God was specially present where the ark was. The tabernacle also contained a lampstand that burned continually, a table on which the priests laid bread in God’s presence, and an altar for burning incense. Priests frequently went into the “Holy Place,” but only the high priest would enter the “Most Holy Place” on one special day in the year. The author does not describe everything about the tabernacle, and his descriptions do not always perfectly match what you might read in the Old Testament. Make sure to translate what the author actually says. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])

### The heavenly sanctuary

In [9:11](../09/12.md), the author refers again to a “tabernacle” and “holy places.” Scholars debate what these two names identify, much like in [8:1–2](../08/01.md). Most likely the “tabernacle” refers to the entire heavenly sanctuary that Jesus passes “through” to enter into the inner section, the “holy places.” However, the two names could each refer to the entire sanctuary from two different perspectives. The author mentions the heavenly sanctuary again in [9:23–24](../09/23.md). However, here he refers simply to “the things in the heavens,” “the heavenly things,” and the “true ones.” The meaning of these general terms depend on how you understand the more specific words in [8:1–2](../08/01.md); [9:11–12](../09/11.md). See the specific verses for translation options. Make sure that you refer to the heavenly sanctuary with the same or similar words that you use to refer to the earthly sanctuary. (See [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

### Old covenant offerings and rituals

The author refers to multiple different rituals and offerings that God commanded Moses and the Israelites to perform.
* In [9:6](../09/06.md), he refers generally to “service” that the priests would perform in the first section of the tabernacle.
* In [9:7](../09/07.md), he refers to the Day of Atonement, the special day on which the high priest would enter the inner part of the tabernacle. You can read about the Day of Atonement in [Leviticus 16](../lev/16/01.md).
* In [9:13](../09/13.md), the author refers to blood of “bulls and goats,” which may be a general statement about animal sacrifices, or it may be another specific reference to the Day of Atonement, which included sacrifices of bulls and goats. Further, he refers to a “heifer,” which identifies a ceremony related to purification. You can read about this ceremony in [Numbers 19:1–10](../num/19/01.md).
* In [9:19–21](../09/19.md), the author describes how Moses inaugurated the covenant and the tabernacle. You can read about what he did in [Exodus 24:1–8](../exo/24/01.md).

### Covenant

The author speaks about “covenants” throughout this chapter. The “new” covenant refers to the agreement that God has made with his people through Jesus. The “first” covenant refers to the agreement that God made with the Israelites through Moses. In the author’s culture, the word translated “covenant” could also be used to refer to a “will,” a paper that a person writes to tell others what to do with that person’s belongings when he or she dies. Scholars debate whether the author focuses on this specific meaning of “covenant” in [9:16–17](../09/16.md) or not. The UST follows the interpretation that the author uses the specific meaning “will” as an analogy to better understand “covenant.” See the notes on those verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### Blood

Throughout this chapter, the author refers to “blood.” This blood always comes from someone or something that has died. Scholars debate what blood symbolizes or represents: the death of the sacrifice, the life of the sacrifice, or something else. Either way, the author argues from the Old Testament and the sacrifices that God required that blood is required for both “cleansing” and “forgiveness.” This is true for both the old covenant and the new covenant. In your translation, you should refer to shed blood, since the blood always comes from someone or something that has died. Also, you should refer directly to “blood,” not to what it might symbolize or represent. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The “parable” in [9:8–9](../09/08.md)

In these verses, the author explains what meaning the “Spirit” gives to the earthly tabernacle. While the exact details about what the author means by the “first tent” and the “holy places” are not perfectly clear, what is clear is that the first section of the earthly tabernacle, or perhaps the earthly tabernacle as a whole, indicates how people could not go to the “holy places.” Whether the “holy places” refers to the heavenly sanctuary as a whole, to the second section of the earthly tabernacle, or to the inner part of the heavenly sanctuary, it indicates a place where God is specially present. What the author is saying, then, is that the use of the “first tent” signifies lack of access to God. The “parable” in [9:9](../09/09.md) further explains that this lack of access applies to “the present time,” which is when sacrifices are offered. The details of these two verses are debated by scholars, so for more details see the notes. If possible, translate these two verses in such a way that they allow the various possible views.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Where does the altar of incense belong?

In [9:3–4](../09/03.md), the author places the “incense altar” inside the Most Holy Place. However, [Exodus 30:6](../exo/30/06.md) seems to place the incense altar outside the curtain, in the Holy Place. There are many theories about why the author describes the “incense altar” inside the Most Holy Place. However, there is no reason to harmonize your translation with Exodus’s description. If you think your readers would recognized and be confused by the difference, you could include a footnote with some possible solutions. It is possible that the author interpreted [Exodus 30:6](../exo/30/06.md) to mean that the altar was in the Most Holy Place, and it is possible that he knew a tradition that put the altar there. It is also possible that he places the altar there for the sake of his argument. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/altar]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/incense]])

### Cleansing the heavenly things


In [9:23](../09/23.md), the author refers to how the “heavenly things” need to be cleansed with “better sacrifices” than those used to cleanse the earthly things. Some scholars think that the heavenly things are perfect and cannot be made impure, so they argue that the “cleansing” refers to inauguration, or they suggest that the “heavenly things” refers to human consciences. Other scholars think that the heavenly sanctuary could be defiled by people’s sin, just like the earthly sanctuary was, so it too needed to be cleansed. This is most likely what the author means. However, no matter what interpretation you choose, you should translate the verse with a word or phrase that refers to the removal of defilement or impurity. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]]) +HEB 9 intro p8vy 0 # Hebrews 9 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: Old and new ministries (9:1–10:18)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The earthly tabernacle

In [9:1–10](../09/01.md), the author describes and evaluates the earthly tabernacle. When the author wrote this letter, there was a temple in Jerusalem, and the tabernacle no longer existed. So, his descriptions are based on the Old Testament only, not on personal experience. The tabernacle was a large tent divided into two parts: the outer “Holy Place” and the inner “Most Holy Place.” This tabernacle contained an “ark,” in which God had the people store important objects. God was specially present where the ark was. The tabernacle also contained a lampstand that burned continually, a table on which the priests laid bread in God’s presence, and an altar for burning incense. Priests frequently went into the “Holy Place,” but only the high priest would enter the “Most Holy Place” on one special day in the year. The author does not describe everything about the tabernacle, and his descriptions do not always perfectly match what you might read in the Old Testament. Make sure to translate what the author actually says. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])

### The heavenly sanctuary

In [9:11](../09/12.md), the author refers again to a “tabernacle” and “holy places.” Scholars debate what these two names identify, much like in [8:1–2](../08/01.md). Most likely the “tabernacle” refers to the entire heavenly sanctuary that Jesus passes “through” to enter into the inner section, the “holy places.” However, the two names could each refer to the entire sanctuary from two different perspectives. The author mentions the heavenly sanctuary again in [9:23–24](../09/23.md). However, here he refers simply to “the things in the heavens,” “the heavenly things,” and the “true ones.” The meaning of these general terms depend on how you understand the more specific words in [8:1–2](../08/01.md); [9:11–12](../09/11.md). See the specific verses for translation options. Make sure that you refer to the heavenly sanctuary with the same or similar words that you use to refer to the earthly sanctuary. (See [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

### Old covenant offerings and rituals

The author refers to multiple different rituals and offerings that God commanded Moses and the Israelites to perform.
* In [9:6](../09/06.md), he refers generally to “service” that the priests would perform in the first section of the tabernacle.
* In [9:7](../09/07.md), he refers to the Day of Atonement, the special day on which the high priest would enter the inner part of the tabernacle. You can read about the Day of Atonement in [Leviticus 16](../lev/16/01.md).
* In [9:13](../09/13.md), the author refers to blood of “bulls and goats,” which may be a general statement about animal sacrifices, or it may be another specific reference to the Day of Atonement, which included sacrifices of bulls and goats. Further, he refers to a “heifer,” which identifies a ceremony related to purification. You can read about this ceremony in [Numbers 19:1–10](../num/19/01.md).
* In [9:19–21](../09/19.md), the author describes how Moses inaugurated the covenant and the tabernacle. You can read about what he did in [Exodus 24:1–8](../exo/24/01.md).

### Covenant

The author speaks about “covenants” throughout this chapter. The “new” covenant refers to the agreement that God has made with his people through Jesus. The “first” covenant refers to the agreement that God made with the Israelites through Moses. In the author’s culture, the word translated “covenant” could also be used to refer to a “will,” a paper that a person writes to tell others what to do with that person’s belongings when he or she dies. Scholars debate whether the author focuses on this specific meaning of “covenant” in [9:16–17](../09/16.md) or not. The UST follows the interpretation that the author uses the specific meaning “will” as an analogy to better understand “covenant.” See the notes on those verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### Blood

Throughout this chapter, the author refers to “blood.” This blood always comes from someone or something that has died. Scholars debate what blood symbolizes or represents: the death of the sacrifice, the life of the sacrifice, or something else. Either way, the author argues from the Old Testament and the sacrifices that God required that blood is required for both “cleansing” and “forgiveness.” This is true for both the old covenant and the new covenant. In your translation, you should refer to shed blood, since the blood always comes from someone or something that has died. Also, you should refer directly to “blood,” not to what it might symbolize or represent. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The “parable” in [9:8–9](../09/08.md)

In these verses, the author explains what meaning the “Spirit” gives to the earthly tabernacle. While the exact details about what the author means by the “first tent” and the “holy places” are not perfectly clear, what is clear is that the first section of the earthly tabernacle, or perhaps the earthly tabernacle as a whole, indicates how people could not go to the “holy places.” Whether the “holy places” refers to the heavenly sanctuary as a whole, to the second section of the earthly tabernacle, or to the inner part of the heavenly sanctuary, it indicates a place where God is specially present. What the author is saying, then, is that the use of the “first tent” signifies lack of access to God. The “parable” in [9:9](../09/09.md) further explains that this lack of access applies to “the present time,” which is when sacrifices are offered. The details of these two verses are debated by scholars, so for more details see the notes. If possible, translate these two verses in such a way that they allow the various possible views.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Where does the altar of incense belong?

In [9:3–4](../09/03.md), the author places the “incense altar” inside the Most Holy Place. However, [Exodus 30:6](../exo/30/06.md) seems to place the incense altar outside the curtain, in the Holy Place. There are many theories about why the author describes the “incense altar” inside the Most Holy Place. However, there is no reason to harmonize your translation with Exodus’s description. If you think your readers would recognized and be confused by the difference, you could include a footnote with some possible solutions. It is possible that the author interpreted [Exodus 30:6](../exo/30/06.md) to mean that the altar was in the Most Holy Place, and it is possible that he knew a tradition that put the altar there. It is also possible that he places the altar there for the sake of his argument. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/altar]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/incense]])

### Cleansing the heavenly things


In [9:23](../09/23.md), the author refers to how the “heavenly things” need to be cleansed with “better sacrifices” than those used to cleanse the earthly things. Some scholars think that the heavenly things are perfect and cannot be made impure, so they argue that the “cleansing” refers to inauguration, or they suggest that the “heavenly things” refers to human consciences. Other scholars think that the heavenly sanctuary could be defiled by people’s sin, just like the earthly sanctuary was, so it too needed to be cleansed. This is most likely what the author means. However, no matter what interpretation you choose, you should translate the verse with a word or phrase that refers to the removal of defilement or impurity. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]]) HEB 9 1 av9i grammar-connect-words-phrases μὲν οὖν 1 Now Here, the word **Now** resumes what the author has been saying about the **first {covenant}** (see [8:7](../08/07.md)). The word **indeed** signals to the audience that this explanation has two parts. The second part begins with “but” in [9:11](../09/11.md). If your readers would misunderstand **Now indeed**, you could use words that introduce a two-part development. Alternate translation: “As for the covenants, on the one hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]), HEB 9 1 d3vs ἡ πρώτη 1 first covenant See how you translated **first covenant** in [Hebrews 8:7](../08/07.md). HEB 9 1 pw63 figs-abstractnouns εἶχε…δικαιώματα…λατρείας…τε 1 had regulations If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **regulations** and **worship**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “regulate” and “worship.” Alternate translation: “regulated how people worshiped and included” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1030,8 +1030,8 @@ HEB 9 4 zopy figs-activepassive περικεκαλυμμένην πάντοθε HEB 9 4 w3ef figs-doublet περικεκαλυμμένην πάντοθεν 1 Inside it Here, **completely** and **all around** mean almost the same thing. The author uses both words to emphasize that every part of the **ark** was covered **with gold**. If your readers would misunderstand why the author uses two very similar terms, or if you do not have two words that express this particular meaning, you could use one word or phrase here. Alternate translation: “having been covered completely” or “having been covered on every side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 9 4 kt3u writing-pronouns ἐν ᾗ 1 Inside it Here, **which** refers to the **ark**, not the “tent.” If your readers would misunderstand **which**, you could make the reference explicit. Alternate translation: “in which ark was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 9 4 md1f figs-explicit στάμνος χρυσῆ ἔχουσα τὸ μάννα 1 that budded Here the author refers to **manna**, which is the food that God miraculously provided for his people while they traveled through the wilderness. God told Moses to keep some **manna** as a reminder of how he provided for them. You can read about Moses and Aaron putting a **jar** of **manna** in the **ark** in [Exodus 16:32–34](../exo/16/32.md). It is not clear what kind of **jar** this is, so use a general word if possible. If your readers would misunderstand what the author is referring to here, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a golden vessel containing the manna that God provided for his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 9 4 jj9y figs-explicit ἡ ῥάβδος Ἀαρὼν ἡ βλαστήσασα 1 Aaron’s rod that budded Here the author refers to a story about how some people wanted to be priests instead of **Aaron**. God had the leaders of each of the twelve tribes put a **rod** or walking stick in his presence. God made the **rod of Aaron** “bud” as proof that God had chosen him to be priest. You can read the story about **the rod of Aaron** in [Numbers 17:1–11](../num/17/01.md). If your readers would misunderstand what the author is referring to here, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “Aaron’s staff that budded, which proved that God had chosen him as priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 9 4 zh6d translate-names Ἀαρὼν 1 Aaron’s rod that budded The word **Aaron** is the name of a man. He was the first person whom God chose to a be a high priest for his people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])  +HEB 9 4 jj9y figs-explicit ἡ ῥάβδος Ἀαρὼν ἡ βλαστήσασα 1 Aaron’s rod that budded Here the author refers to a story about how some people wanted to be priests instead of **Aaron**. God had the leaders of each of the twelve tribes put a **rod** or walking stick in his presence. God made the **rod of Aaron** “bud” as proof that God had chosen him to be priest. You can read the story about **the rod of Aaron** in [Numbers 17:1–11](../num/17/01.md). If your readers would misunderstand what the author is referring to here, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “Aaron’s staff that budded, which proved that God had chosen him as priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 9 4 zh6d translate-names Ἀαρὼν 1 Aaron’s rod that budded The word **Aaron** is the name of a man. He was the first person whom God chose to a be a high priest for his people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 9 4 q9w3 figs-explicit αἱ πλάκες τῆς διαθήκης 1 tablets of the covenant Here the author refers to two stone **tablets** on which Moses wrote the most important parts of God’s **covenant** with the Israelites. You can read about the **tablets** in [Exodus 34:1–28](../exo/34/01.md). The words on these tablets were the “Ten Commandments,” which you can find in [Exodus 20:1–17](../exo/20/01.md). If your readers would misunderstand what the author is referring to here, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the stone plaques on which Moses wrote the Ten Commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 5 uap3 figs-explicit ὑπεράνω…αὐτῆς 1 tablets of the covenant Here, the phrase **above it** places the **cherubim** on top of the “ark of the covenant.” They were not floating above the ark but were built on top of the ark. If your readers would misunderstand **above it**, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “set on the ark” or “built on top of the ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 5 ue5q translate-unknown Χερουβεὶν δόξης κατασκιάζοντα τὸ ἱλαστήριον 1 glorious cherubim overshadowed the atonement lid Here, the word **cherubim** refers to figures or statues of winged beings. They are **glorious** because they show that God is present where they are. The author describes them as **overshadowing the atonement lid** because God commanded the Israelites to make them so that their wings spread over the top of the ark. You can read about the **cherubim** and the **atonement lid** in [Exodus 25:17–22](../exo/25/17.md). If your readers would misunderstand what the author is referring to here, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “statues of glorious cherubim spreading their wings over the lid of the ark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1043,7 +1043,7 @@ HEB 9 5 qw39 writing-pronouns ὧν 1 cherubim Here, **which {things}** refers t HEB 9 6 mra7 figs-activepassive τούτων…οὕτως κατεσκευασμένων 1 After these things were prepared If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **things** that are **prepared** rather than focusing on the people doing the “preparing.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “when people had thus prepared these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 9 6 zinf writing-pronouns τούτων…οὕτως κατεσκευασμένων 1 After these things were prepared Here, **these things** refers to all the objects and structures the author has mentioned in [9:1–5](../09/01.md). The word **thus** refers to what the author has said about how these objects and structures were created and arranged. If your readers would misunderstand **these things** and **thus**, you could make the references more explicit. Alternate translation: “when what I have described had been prepared as I have described it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 9 6 mrj4 figs-idiom διὰ παντὸς 1 After these things were prepared Here, the word **always** indicates that the **priests** consistently would **enter**, usually twice a day. It does not mean that some was **always** entering at every moment. If your readers would misunderstand **always**, you could express the idea with a form that refers to something that happens frequently and consistently. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “very frequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 9 6 crlt figs-go εἰς…εἰσίασιν 1 After these things were prepared Here, the phrase **enter into** refers to movement from outside a structure into a structure. Use a word or phrase that identifies this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “move into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +HEB 9 6 crlt figs-go εἰς…εἰσίασιν 1 After these things were prepared Here, the phrase **enter into** refers to movement from outside a structure into a structure. Use a word or phrase that identifies this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “move into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 9 6 vh9r figs-explicit τὴν πρώτην σκηνὴν 1 After these things were prepared Here, the phrase **first tabernacle** refers to the **first** or outer section of the **tabernacle**. See how you translated the similar phrase in [9:2](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “the outer room of the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 6 uwy4 translate-ordinal τὴν πρώτην σκηνὴν 1 After these things were prepared If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “tabernacle one” or “tent one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) HEB 9 6 jte8 figs-abstractnouns τὰς λατρείας ἐπιτελοῦντες 1 After these things were prepared If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **services**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “serve.” Alternate translation: “performing what they do to serve God” or “doing what God requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1065,17 +1065,17 @@ HEB 9 8 e14c figs-explicit τῆς πρώτης σκηνῆς 1 the first tabern HEB 9 8 y9hg translate-ordinal τῆς πρώτης σκηνῆς 1 the first tabernacle was still standing If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “tabernacle one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) HEB 9 8 qujz figs-metaphor ἐχούσης στάσιν 1 the first tabernacle was still standing Here the author refers to how the **first tabernacle** has a **place**. By speaking in this way, he could be referring to: (1) how the **first tabernacle** has legal standing. In other words, when the **first tabernacle** has a **place**, that means that people are required to use when they worship God. Alternate translation: “still having cultic standing” or “functioning as part of God’s sanctuary” (2) how the **first tabernacle** exists in a **place**. In other words, when the **first tabernacle** has a **place**, that means that it still exists. Alternate translation: “continuing to exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 9 9 ojuy writing-pronouns ἥτις 1 This was an illustration Here, the word **which** could refer to: (1) the “first tabernacle” ([9:8](../09/08.md)). Alternate translation: “which first tabernacle is” (2) everything about the earthly “tabernacle” that the author has discussed. Alternate translation: “all of which is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -HEB 9 9 cu76 translate-unknown ἥτις παραβολὴ 1 This was an illustration Here, the word **parable** refers to a figure of speech in which one thing represents another thing. Here the first tabernacle (or the earthly tabernacle as a whole) represents **the present time**. If your readers would misunderstand **parable**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a figure of speech. Alternate translation: “which represents” or “which stands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +HEB 9 9 cu76 translate-unknown ἥτις παραβολὴ 1 This was an illustration Here, the word **parable** refers to a figure of speech in which one thing represents another thing. Here the first tabernacle (or the earthly tabernacle as a whole) figuratively represents **the present time**. If your readers would misunderstand **parable**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a figure of speech. Alternate translation: “which represents” or “which figuratively stands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 9 9 fl6i figs-explicit εἰς τὸν καιρὸν τὸν ἐνεστηκότα 1 for the present time Here, the phrase **the present time** could refer to: (1) the period during which the earthly tabernacle functioned as God’s sanctuary on earth. In this case, the **parable** represents **the present time** Alternate translation: “for the time during which it functioned” or “for their time” (2) the period between Jesus’s first and second comings. In this case, the **parable** represents the period up to **the present time**. Alternate translation: “for the time up to the present” or “for the period of time until Jesus came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 9 eqhz writing-pronouns καθ’ ἣν 1 for the present time Here, the word **which** could refer to: (1) the **parable**. In this case, the way that the **gifts and sacrifices** cannot **perfect the worshiper** is part of the **parable**. Alternate translation: “according to which parable” (2) the “first tabernacle” in [9:8](../09/08.md). In this case, the **gifts and sacrifices** are offered in a way that matches the nature of the “first tabernacle.” Alternate translation: “according to which tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 9 9 wb9n figs-doublet δῶρά τε καὶ θυσίαι 1 for the present time Here, **gifts** and **sacrifices** function together to refer to anything that an Israelite would have offered to God. It is probable that **sacrifices** refers to animals that would be killed and offered to God, while **gifts** identifies anything else that a person would give to God. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to refer to what an Israelite would offer to God. See you how you translated the same phrase in [8:3](../08/03.md). Alternate translation: “sacrifices” or “things presented to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 9 9 g16u figs-activepassive δῶρά τε καὶ θυσίαι προσφέρονται 1 that are now being offered If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **being offered** rather than focusing on the people doing the “offering.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that the Israelites, or more specifically the priests, did it. Alternate translation: “the priests offer both gifts and sacrifices” or “they offer both gifts and sacrifices” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 9 9 qsa1 figs-idiom κατὰ συνείδησιν 1 are not able to perfect the worshiper’s conscience Here, the phrase **according to {the} conscience** indicates that the “perfecting” is related to or in the sphere of the **conscience**. If your readers would misunderstand **according to {the} conscience**, you could express the idea in a clearer way. Alternate translation: “with reference to the conscience” or “in the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 9 9 qsa1 figs-idiom κατὰ συνείδησιν 1 are not able to perfect the worshiper’s conscience Here, the phrase **according to {the} conscience** indicates that the “perfecting” is related to or in the sphere of the **conscience**. If your readers would misunderstand **according to {the} conscience**, you could express the idea in a clearer way. Alternate translation: “with reference to the conscience” or “in the conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 9 9 c31d figs-genericnoun τὸν λατρεύοντα 1 the worshiper’s conscience Here the author is speaking of “worshipers” in general, not of one particular **worshiper**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a form that refers to “worshipers” in general. Alternate translation: “the worshipers” or “any worshiper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -HEB 9 10 vzim grammar-connect-logic-contrast μόνον ἐπὶ 1 until the time of the new order Here, the phrase **only concerning** introduces what the old covenant could actually accomplish, since the author claimed in the previous verse that it was not able “according to the conscience to perfect the worshiper” ([9:9](../09/09.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **only concerning**, you could make it clearer that the author is introducing a contrast with “perfecting the worshiper according to the conscience.” Alternate translation: “but only having to do with” or “but instead dealing with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +HEB 9 10 vzim grammar-connect-logic-contrast μόνον ἐπὶ 1 until the time of the new order Here, the phrase **only concerning** introduces what the old covenant could actually accomplish, since the author claimed in the previous verse that it was not able “according to the conscience to perfect the worshiper” ([9:9](../09/09.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **only concerning**, you could make it clearer that the author is introducing a contrast with “perfecting the worshiper according to the conscience.” Alternate translation: “but only having to do with” or “but instead dealing with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) HEB 9 10 v7gb figs-explicit βρώμασιν, καὶ πόμασιν, καὶ διαφόροις βαπτισμοῖς 1 until the time of the new order Here, the words **foods**, **drinks**, and **baptisms** refer to some of the topics that the law of Moses covered. There were laws about what **foods** the Israelites could eat and what **drinks** they could consume. There were also laws about **baptisms**, or washing rituals, that accomplished various **different** goals, all related to cleansing. If your readers would misunderstand what the author is referring to, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “what one could eat or drink and how one should wash oneself in various ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 10 lx8j figs-abstractnouns διαφόροις βαπτισμοῖς 1 until the time of the new order If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **baptisms**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “baptizing people in various ways” or “how to baptize in different ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 9 10 ufti figs-possession δικαιώματα σαρκὸς 1 until the time of the new order Here the author uses the possessive form to describe **regulations** that have to do with **the body**. In other words, these **regulations** deal only with “bodily” matters. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a clearer way. Alternate translation: “regulations concerning the body” or “regulations that deal with the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +HEB 9 10 ufti figs-possession δικαιώματα σαρκὸς 1 until the time of the new order Here the author uses the possessive form to describe **regulations** that have to do with **the body**. In other words, these **regulations** deal only with “bodily” matters. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a clearer way. Alternate translation: “regulations concerning the body” or “regulations that deal with the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 9 10 ddl3 figs-abstractnouns δικαιώματα σαρκὸς 1 until the time of the new order If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **regulations**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “require” or “command.” Alternate translation: “what God required concerning the body” or “things related to the body that they were commanded to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 9 10 i1ke translate-unknown ἐπικείμενα 1 until the time of the new order Here, the word **imposed** refers to how a person in authority requires someone under their authority to do certain things. The word is not necessarily negative in tone, but it does indicate that what is **imposed** is definitely required. If your readers would misunderstand **imposed**, you could use a word or phrase that expresses the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “being commanded” or “being laid down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 9 10 voxo figs-activepassive ἐπικείμενα 1 until the time of the new order If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **regulations**, which are **imposed**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “imposing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “which God imposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1088,7 +1088,7 @@ HEB 9 11 czx6 figs-explicit τῆς μείζονος καὶ τελειοτέρ HEB 9 11 jyqn figs-doublet μείζονος καὶ τελειοτέρας 1 the greater and more perfect tabernacle Here, **greater** and **more perfect** function together to refer to identify the heavenly **tabernacle** as superior to the earthly one. It is probable that **greater** identifies the heavenly **tabernacle** as more important, while **more perfect** identifies it as more able to accomplish what it was intended to do. If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to refer to identify the heavenly **tabernacle** as more important and effective than the earthly one. Alternate translation: “better” or “more powerfully effective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 9 11 h434 figs-explicit οὐ χειροποιήτου τοῦτ’ ἔστιν, οὐ ταύτης τῆς κτίσεως 1 the greater and more perfect tabernacle Here, the phrase **not made by human hands** means that God, not humans, made this **tabernacle**. The phrase **not of this creation** means that the **tabernacle** is not part of the earthly world. Scholars debate whether this means that it belongs to the heavenly world (“another creation”) or whether this means that it is “uncreated.” If your readers would misunderstand these phrases, you could make the ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “made not by humans but by God, that is, of the heavenly creation” or “not made by people, that is, not created at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 11 lxw8 figs-activepassive οὐ χειροποιήτου τοῦτ’ ἔστιν, οὐ 1 that was not made by human hands If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus the **tabernacle**, which is **not made** rather than focusing on the **human hands** that did not make it. Alternate translation: “that human hands did not make, that is, that is not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 9 11 mtj9 figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτου 1 human hands Here, the phrase **human hands** refers to main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase refers to the whole person who makes things. If your readers would misunderstand **made by human hands**, you could clarify that it refers to “humans” in general, not just their hands. Alternate translation: “made by humans” or “made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +HEB 9 11 mtj9 figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτου 1 human hands Here, the phrase **human hands** refers to main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase figuratively refers to the whole person who makes things. If your readers would misunderstand **made by human hands**, you could clarify that it refers to “humans” in general, not just their hands. Alternate translation: “made by humans” or “made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) HEB 9 12 dp2i figs-explicit οὐδὲ δι’ αἵματος τράγων καὶ μόσχων, διὰ δὲ τοῦ ἰδίου αἵματος 1 most holy place Here the author refers to how a high priest would “enter” the sanctuary, taking with him **blood** from a sacrifice. He would present the **blood** to God and then apply it to various parts of the sanctuary, the altar, and the ark. In this verse, the author contrasts how those priests presented **blood** from animals with how Jesus presented **his own blood**. Scholars debate what **his own blood** represents. It could refer to his resurrected body, his death, or his actual blood. See the book introduction for more information on how Jesus functions as a high priest. If your readers would misunderstand what the author is talking about here, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “and not by the blood from slaughtered goats and calves, which is what the Levitical priests use, but by his own blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 12 ox1p figs-doublet τράγων καὶ μόσχων 1 most holy place Here the author refers to **goats** and **calves** as two examples of animals that could be sacrificed so that the Levitical high priest could enter the sanctuary with their **blood**. These were not the only animals that could be sacrificed. If your readers would misunderstand why the author refers specifically to **goats and calves**, you could use a form in your language that refers generally to animals that are sacrificed. Alternate translation: “of sacrificed animals” or “of animals from flock or herd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 9 12 a8oh figs-go εἰσῆλθεν…εἰς 1 most holy place Here, the phrase **entered into** refers to movement from outside a structure into a structure. Use a word or phrase that identifies this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “he moved into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -1127,10 +1127,10 @@ HEB 9 15 hgp3 figs-metaphor οἱ κεκλημένοι 1 first covenant Here, th HEB 9 15 ve3v figs-activepassive οἱ κεκλημένοι 1 those who are called If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **the ones** who are **called** rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 9 15 mfzh λάβωσιν 1 those who are called Here the author may be indicating that **the ones called** are able to **receive the promise**: (1) at least partially right now. Alternate translation: “are receiving” (2) in the future. Alternate translation: “will receive” HEB 9 15 j3ac figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν…τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας 1 inheritance If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **promise** and **inheritance**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “promise” and “inherit.” Alternate translation: “imitate me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 9 15 vdpc figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν…τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας 1 inheritance Here, the word **promise** refers to the content of the **promise**. If your readers would misunderstand **promise**, you could refer to what is promised. Alternate translation: “what is promised concerning the eternal inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 9 15 vdpc figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν…τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας 1 inheritance Here, the word **promise** figuratively refers to the content of the **promise**. If your readers would misunderstand **promise**, you could refer to what is promised. Alternate translation: “what is promised concerning the eternal inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 9 15 e1ii figs-possession τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν…τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας 1 inheritance Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **promise** whose content is **the eternal inheritance**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the promise, that is, the eternal inheritance” or “the promised eternal inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 9 15 xb9f figs-metaphor τῆς αἰωνίου κληρονομίας 1 inheritance Here the author speaks as if believers were children who would “inherit” property that a parent passes on to their child when the parent dies. He speaks in this way to indicate that believers receive what God promised. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “of what God gives his people forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 9 16 lfsq grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 the death of the person who made it must be proven Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what the author said in the previous verse ([9:15](../09/15.md)) about “a death” and “a mediator of a new covenant.” If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “About covenants and deaths,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +HEB 9 16 lfsq grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 the death of the person who made it must be proven Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what the author said in the previous verse ([9:15](../09/15.md)) about “a death” and “a mediator of a new covenant.” If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “About covenants and deaths,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 9 16 ua79 figs-idiom ὅπου…διαθήκη 1 the death of the person who made it must be proven Here, the word **where** does not indicate that the **covenant** is in a specific place. Rather, it indicates that what the author is about to say is about a **covenant**. If your readers would misunderstand **where {there is} a covenant**, you could use a form that introduces or highlights the topic. Alternate translation: “concerning a covenant” or “when we consider a covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 9 16 vlxa figs-explicit διαθήκη 1 the death of the person who made it must be proven Here, the word **covenant** could refer to: (1) a specific type of agreement in which a person declares or writes what should be done with their possessions when they die. In this case, the author is slightly shifting the meaning of **covenant** when he uses the word in [9:16–17](../09/16.md). Alternate translation: “there is a covenant about what happens after a person dies” or “there is a last testament” (2) the same kind of **covenant** that he has been speaking about throughout the letter. Alternate translation: “there is any covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 16 dzg3 figs-abstractnouns θάνατον ἀνάγκη φέρεσθαι τοῦ διαθεμένου 1 the death of the person who made it must be proven If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **necessity** and **death**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “need” and “die.” Alternate translation: “it needs to be proved that the one having covenanted it has died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1149,11 +1149,11 @@ HEB 9 18 m9c3 figs-litotes οὐδ’ ἡ πρώτη χωρὶς αἵματος HEB 9 18 kq87 figs-explicit πρώτη 1 first covenant Here, the phrase **first {covenant}** refers to the agreement that God made with the Israelites through Moses. If your readers would misunderstand **first {covenant}**, you could make the idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [8:7](../08/07.md); [9:15](../09/15.md). Alternate translation: “the covenant that God made with his people at first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 18 v838 figs-explicit αἵματος 1 blood The author assumes that his audience knows that the use of **blood** also requires the “death” that he has been speaking about. If your readers would not make this inference, you could make it explicit that **blood** requires someone or something to die. Alternate translation: “blood from sacrificed animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 19 uupi grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people Here, the word **For** introduces an important example of what the author said in the previous verse ([9:18](../09/18.md)) about how the “first covenant” was “inaugurated” with “blood.” If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example. Alternate translation: “For example,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -HEB 9 19 zl2n figs-explicit λαληθείσης…πάσης ἐντολῆς κατὰ τὸν νόμον ὑπὸ Μωϋσέως παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, λαβὼν τὸ αἷμα τῶν μόσχων, καὶ τῶν τράγων, μετὰ ὕδατος, καὶ ἐρίου κοκκίνου, καὶ ὑσσώπου, αὐτό τε τὸ βιβλίον καὶ πάντα τὸν λαὸν, ἐράντισεν 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people Here the author refers to several Old Testament texts. The story about Moses “speaking” the law and then “sprinkling” the people with **blood** comes from [Exodus 24:1–8](../exo/24/01.md). In these verses the Israelites agreed to follow the law and keep the covenant. The references to **red wool** and **hyssop** could come from the instructions for cleansing a person with a skin disease, which you can find in [Leviticus 14:1–7](../lev/14/01.md). However, it is more likely that the author is referring to the **red wool** and **hyssop** that the priest burned along with a “heifer” to make “ashes” that could be mixed with water and used for cleansing. You can read about this ritual in [Numbers 19:1–10](../num/19/01.md), and the author has already mentioned it in [9:13](../09/13.md). The author’s point here is that Moses cleansed the people when they agreed to the covenant, and according to the law the cleansing would require **blood**, **water**, **red wool**, and **hyssop**. If your readers would misunderstand what the author is referring to here, you could make it more explicit that he is speaking about how Moses cleansed the people when they heard and agreed to the covenant with God. Alternate translation: “every command having been spoken according to the law by Moses to all the people, they agreed to keep them. Then, Moses took the blood of calves and goats that had been sacrificed, and he mixed it with water and red wool and hyssop. Then, he sprinkled both the scroll of the law itself and all the people with the mixture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 9 19 zl2n figs-explicit λαληθείσης…πάσης ἐντολῆς κατὰ τὸν νόμον ὑπὸ Μωϋσέως παντὶ τῷ λαῷ, λαβὼν τὸ αἷμα τῶν μόσχων, καὶ τῶν τράγων, μετὰ ὕδατος, καὶ ἐρίου κοκκίνου, καὶ ὑσσώπου, αὐτό τε τὸ βιβλίον καὶ πάντα τὸν λαὸν, ἐράντισεν 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people Here the author refers to several Old Testament texts. The story about Moses “speaking” the law and then “sprinkling” the people with **blood** comes from [Exodus 24:1–8](../exo/24/01.md). In these verses the Israelites agreed to follow the law and keep the covenant. The references to **red wool** and **hyssop** could come from the instructions for cleansing a person with a skin disease, which you can find in [Leviticus 14:1–7](../lev/14/01.md). However, it is more likely that the author is referring to the **red wool** and **hyssop** that the priest burned along with a “heifer” to make “ashes” that could be mixed with water and used for cleansing. You can read about this ritual in [Numbers 19:1–10](../num/19/01.md), and the author has already mentioned it in [9:13](../09/13.md). The author’s point here is that Moses cleansed the people when they agreed to the covenant, and according to the law the cleansing would require **blood**, **water**, **red wool**, and **hyssop**. If your readers would misunderstand what the author is referring to here, you could make it more explicit that he is speaking about how Moses cleansed the people when they heard and agreed to the covenant with God. Alternate translation: “every command having been spoken according to the law by Moses to all the people, they agreed to keep them. Then, Moses took the blood of calves and goats that had been sacrificed, and he mixed it with water and red wool and hyssop. Then, he sprinkled both the scroll of the law itself and all the people with the mixture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 19 we5r figs-activepassive λαληθείσης…πάσης ἐντολῆς κατὰ τὸν νόμον ὑπὸ Μωϋσέως 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **every command** that was **spoken** rather than focusing on the person doing the “speaking.” Alternate translation: “Moses having spoken every command according to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 9 19 nj2q figs-abstractnouns πάσης ἐντολῆς 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **command**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “command.” Alternate translation: “everything that God commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 9 19 bd4k figs-idiom λαληθείσης…κατὰ τὸν νόμον 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people Here, the phrase **according to the law** identifies **every command** as the ones that God included in **the law**. If your readers would misunderstand **according to the law**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the specific commands in **the law**. Alternate translation: “in the law having been spoken” or “that God included in the law having been spoken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 9 19 g9vv translate-names Μωϋσέως 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people The word **Moses** is the name of a man. God used him to give the **law** to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])  +HEB 9 19 g9vv translate-names Μωϋσέως 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people The word **Moses** is the name of a man. God used him to give the **law** to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 9 19 ejk4 figs-doublet τῶν μόσχων, καὶ τῶν τράγων 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people Here the author refers to **calves** and **goats** as two examples of animals that could be sacrificed so that a priest could use their blood. These were not the only animals that could be sacrificed, and the story about Moses speaking the commands only mentions **bulls**. If your readers would misunderstand why the author refers specifically to **calves** and **goats**, you could use a form in your language that refers generally to animals that are sacrificed. Alternate translation: “of sacrificed animals” or “of animals from flock or herd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 9 19 yfc6 figs-explicit μετὰ ὕδατος, καὶ ἐρίου κοκκίνου, καὶ ὑσσώπου 1 took the blood … with water … and sprinkled … the scroll … and all the people Here the author does not state how **Moses** used the **water**, **red wool**, and **hyssop**. The story in [Exodus 24:1–8](../exo/24/01.md) mentions that Moses mixed the blood with **water**, but it does not mention the other two things. The author could imply that: (1) Moses tied stalks of **hyssop** plant together with the **red wool** to create a brush that he used to sprinkle the **blood** and **water**. That is what **hyssop** and **red wool** are used for in [Leviticus 14:1–7](../lev/14/01.md). Alternate translation: “mixing it with water and dipping hyssop tied with red wool in it” (2) Moses burned the **red wool** and **hyssop** and mixed them in with the **blood** and **water**. That is what **hyssop** and **red wool** are used for in [Numbers 19:1–10](../num/19/01.md). Alternate translation: “mixing it with water and ashes from red wool and hyssop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 19 tgc2 translate-unknown ἐρίου κοκκίνου 1 hyssop Here, the phrase **red wool** refers to cloth or string made from the fur of animals, especially sheep, that is dyed **red** or scarlet. If your readers would misunderstand **red wool**, you could use words or phrases that make the meaning clearer. Alternate translation: “scarlet cloth” or “fabric colored red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1181,14 +1181,14 @@ HEB 9 23 zgbc translate-unknown ὑποδείγματα 1 the copies of the thin HEB 9 23 fduq figs-explicit ὑποδείγματα τῶν ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 the copies of the things in heaven should be cleansed with these animal sacrifices Here, the phrase **examples of the {things} in the heavens** could refer to: (1) the earthly tabernacle, which is an “example” of the “tabernacle” **in the heavens**. Alternate translation: “example of the tabernacle in the heavens” (2) the earthly tabernacle, its priesthood, its sacrifices, and all the objects associated with it, which are **examples** of the same things **in the heavens**. Alternate translation: “examples of the tabernacle, priesthood, and service in the heavens” or “examples of the heavenly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 23 rqw2 writing-pronouns τούτοις…ταύτας 1 the copies of the things in heaven should be cleansed with these animal sacrifices In both places, the word **these** refers back to the sacrifices and blood that the author has discussed in [9:18–22](../09/18.md). If your readers would misunderstand **these**, you could make what it refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “with those sacrifices … those sacrifices” or “with the blood of animals … the blood of animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 9 23 y9b7 figs-ellipsis αὐτὰ…τὰ ἐπουράνια κρείττοσι θυσίαις παρὰ ταύτας 1 the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “it is necessary for the heavenly things themselves to be cleansed with better sacrifices than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -HEB 9 23 eqn8 αὐτὰ…τὰ ἐπουράνια κρείττοσι θυσίαις παρὰ ταύτας 1 the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices What the author says about how the **heavenly things themselves** need to **be cleansed** could mean: (1) that when people sin, they defile or make impure the heavenly sanctuary. Thus, the heavenly sanctuary needs **to be cleansed** from this impurity. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things themselves need to be cleansed from impurity with better sacrifices than these” (2) that the heavenly sanctuary needs to be “inaugurated” or “consecrated.” In this case, “cleansing” refers primarily to making a place ready to function as a tabernacle, not to purifying sin from it. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things themselves need to be consecrated with better sacrifices than these” +HEB 9 23 eqn8 αὐτὰ…τὰ ἐπουράνια κρείττοσι θυσίαις παρὰ ταύτας 1 the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices What the author says about how the **heavenly things themselves** need to **be cleansed** could mean: (1) that when people sin, they defile or make impure the heavenly sanctuary. Thus, the heavenly sanctuary needs **to be cleansed** from this impurity. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things themselves need to be cleansed from impurity with better sacrifices than these” (2) that the heavenly sanctuary needs to be “inaugurated” or “consecrated.” In this case, “cleansing” refers primarily to making a place ready to function as a tabernacle, not to purifying sin from it. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things themselves need to be consecrated with better sacrifices than these” HEB 9 23 u2hm figs-explicit αὐτὰ…τὰ ἐπουράνια 1 the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices Here, the phrase **the heavenly things themselves** could refer to: (1) the heavenly tabernacle. Alternate translation: “the heavenly tabernacle itself” (2) the heavenly tabernacle, its priesthood, its sacrifices, and all the objects associated with it. Alternate translation: “the heavenly tabernacle, priesthood, and service themselves” or “the things in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 23 oup0 figs-rpronouns αὐτὰ…τὰ ἐπουράνια 1 the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices Here, the word translated **themselves** emphasizes **the heavenly things**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **the heavenly things** in your language. Alternate translation: “the very things in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) HEB 9 23 xyys figs-genericnoun κρείττοσι θυσίαις 1 the heavenly things themselves had to be cleansed with much better sacrifices Here the author refers to **better sacrifices** in general to make a contrast with the earthly sacrifices. However, he thinks that Jesus only offered one “sacrifice.” If your readers would misunderstand that **better sacrifices** refers to what is generally true rather than to the details of what Jesus did, you could use a singular form instead. Alternate translation: “with a better sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) HEB 9 24 drtu grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 the most holy place made with hands, which Here, the word **for** introduces a further explanation of what the author said in the previous verse ([9:23](../09/23.md)) about the “heavenly things” and the “better sacrifices.” The explanation continues through [9:25–26](../09/25.md). If your readers would misunderstand **for**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “which is why” or “and so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 9 24 xo5m figs-go οὐ…εἰς…εἰσῆλθεν 1 the most holy place made with hands, which Here, the phrase **did not enter** refers to movement from outside a structure into the structure. Use a word or phrase in your language that refers to this kind of movement. Alternate translation: “did not pass into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 9 24 svu2 figs-explicit χειροποίητα…ἅγια…ἀντίτυπα τῶν ἀληθινῶν 1 the most holy place made with hands, which Here, the phrases **holy {places}** and **copies** refer to the earthly Most Holy Place. The phrase **the true ones** refers to the heavenly Most Holy Place. If your readers would misunderstand these phrases, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a Most Holy Place made with hands—a copy of the true heavenly one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 9 24 cy2x figs-synecdoche χειροποίητα 1 the most holy place made with hands, which Here, the word **hands** refers to main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase refers to the whole person who makes things. If your readers would misunderstand **made with hands**, you could clarify that it refers to “humans” in general, not just their **hands**. Alternate translation: “made by humans” or “made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +HEB 9 24 cy2x figs-synecdoche χειροποίητα 1 the most holy place made with hands, which Here, the word **hands** refers to main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase figuratively refers to the whole person who makes things. If your readers would misunderstand **made with hands**, you could clarify that it refers to “humans” in general, not just their **hands**. Alternate translation: “made by humans” or “made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) HEB 9 24 akii figs-activepassive χειροποίητα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the **holy {places}** that are **made** rather than focusing on the **hands**, which **made** them. Alternate translation: “that hands made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 9 24 l1ce translate-unknown ἀντίτυπα 1 Here, the word **copies** identifies the **holy {places} made with hands** as something that models or is based on **the true ones**. If your readers would misunderstand **copies**, you could use a word or phrase that describes something that is based on something else. See you how translated **examples** in [9:23](../09/23.md). Alternate translation: “illustrations” or “replicas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 9 24 p0y0 figs-explicit αὐτὸν τὸν οὐρανόν 1 Here, the phrase **heaven itself** is singular instead of plural, which is what the author has usually used when he speaks about the “heavens” in this letter. It is likely that the author uses the phrase **heaven itself** to refer to the highest of multiple heavens, which is where the heavenly sanctuary and God’s throne are. If your readers would misunderstand **heaven itself**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the highest or most important heaven. Alternate translation: “the heaven that is above all the others” or “the most important heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1199,7 +1199,7 @@ HEB 9 25 f17a figs-ellipsis οὐδ’ 1 He did not go there This clause leaves HEB 9 25 rlua figs-explicit ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς εἰσέρχεται εἰς τὰ ἅγια κατ’ ἐνιαυτὸν ἐν αἵματι ἀλλοτρίῳ 1 He did not go there Here the author refers to how the **high priest** was required to enter the Most Holy Place every single year to offer blood from sacrifices. You can read about what God required for this Day of Atonement in [Leviticus 16](../lev/16/01.md). If your readers would misunderstand what the author is referring to here, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “the high priest enters in the Most Holy Place on the Day of Atonement each year with blood that comes from a sacrificed animal, not from himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 25 s0va figs-go εἰσέρχεται εἰς 1 He did not go there Here, the phrase **enters into** refers to movement from outside a structure into a structure. Use a word or phrase that identifies this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “moves into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 9 25 hlrs figs-explicit τὰ ἅγια 1 He did not go there Here, the phrase **the holy {places}** could refer to: (1) the Most Holy Place, the inner part of the earthly sanctuary that the **high priest** entered once a year. Alternate translation: “the Most Holy Place” (2) the entire earthly sanctuary, which the high priest entered many times in the year but especially on the Day of Atonement. Alternate translation: “the sanctuary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 9 25 fxtc figs-idiom κατ’ ἐνιαυτὸν 1 He did not go there Here, the phrase **each year** refers to something that happens one year, and then the next year, and so on. One way of expressing this idea is with the phrase “year by year.” The author’s point is that the **high priest enters** every single year. If your readers would misunderstand **each year**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to sequential years. Alternate translation: “year by year” or “every single year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 9 25 fxtc figs-idiom κατ’ ἐνιαυτὸν 1 He did not go there Here, the phrase **each year** refers to something that happens one year, and then the next year, and so on. One way of expressing this idea is with the phrase “year by year.” The author’s point is that the **high priest enters** every single year. If your readers would misunderstand **each year**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to sequential years. Alternate translation: “year by year” or “every single year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 9 25 zpf3 figs-explicit ἐν αἵματι ἀλλοτρίῳ 1 with the blood of another Here, the **blood** is **not his his own** because it comes from an animal that someone has sacrificed. The author expresses the idea in this way because he is contrasting the **high priest** with Jesus, who did use his own blood (see [9:12](../09/12.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **blood {that is} not his own**, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “with another being’s blood” or “with blood from an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 26 o42h figs-ellipsis ἐπεὶ ἔδει 1 If that had been the case Here the author does not directly state the basis for his inference (**since**). Instead, he implies that it is a positive version of the negative statement “not in order to offer himself many times” in [9:25](../09/25.md). In other words, the point is that Christ could not make an offering many times, **since** then it would be **necessary for him to suffer many times**. If your readers would misunderstand what **since** introduces, you could include some of the implied words to make the idea clearer. Alternate translation: “since he would have offered himself many times, it would have been necessary for” or “since otherwise it would have been necessary for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) HEB 9 26 kg1l writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 If that had been the case Here, the word **him** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **him** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1217,17 +1217,17 @@ HEB 9 27 w2v8 translate-unknown ἀπόκειται τοῖς ἀνθρώποι HEB 9 27 h6rr figs-activepassive ἀπόκειται τοῖς ἀνθρώποις…ἀποθανεῖν 1 to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **appointed** rather than focusing on the person doing the “appointing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has appointed men to die” or “God has made it so that men die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 9 27 giz9 figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself Although the word **men** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all people, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **men**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to people” or “to men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 9 27 ewjt figs-extrainfo μετὰ…τοῦτο 1 to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself Here the author does not specify how soon **judgment** comes **after** people die. If possible, express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to an event that comes later without specifying how much later. Alternate translation: “once that happens” or “some time after that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -HEB 9 27 j084 figs-explicit κρίσις 1 to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself Here, **judgment** refers to how God will “judge” everyone based on what they have done when Jesus comes back. If your readers would misunderstand what **judgment** refers to, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the final judgment” or “God’s judgment of everyone at the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 9 27 j084 figs-explicit κρίσις 1 to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself Here, **judgment** refers to how God will “judge” everyone based on what they have done when Jesus comes back. If your readers would misunderstand what **judgment** refers to, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the final judgment” or “God’s judgment of everyone at the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 27 p6oi figs-abstractnouns κρίσις 1 to do away with sin by the sacrifice of himself If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **judgment**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “judge.” Alternate translation: “they are judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 9 28 nwwq grammar-connect-words-phrases οὕτως καὶ 1 Christ was offered once Here, the phrase **so also** introduces what the author will compare with humans dying and being judged ([9:27](../09/27.md)). The comparison between humans and **Christ** is about two primary things. First, both die **once**. Second, God’s final decision, either judgment or **salvation**, follows this death at some point. If your readers would misunderstand **so also**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the second part of a comparison. “likewise” or “in much the same way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 9 28 p8b6 figs-activepassive προσενεχθεὶς 1 Christ was offered once If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “Christ” did it to himself. Alternate translation: “having offered himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 9 28 hv2t figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ…ἀνενεγκεῖν ἁμαρτίας 1 to take away the sins Here the author refers to how Jesus deals with **sins** as if he were “bearing” or taking them off someone. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus eliminates the guilt and the power of these **sins** over people. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “to remove the sins” or “to deal with the sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 9 28 hv2t figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ…ἀνενεγκεῖν ἁμαρτίας 1 to take away the sins Here the author refers to how Jesus deals with **sins** as if he were “bearing” or taking them off someone. He speaks in this way to indicate that Jesus eliminates the guilt and the power of these **sins** over people. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “to remove the sins” or “to deal with the sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 9 28 p6th figs-explicit ὀφθήσεται 1 the sins Here, the phrase **will appear** refers to how Jesus will be seen by everyone on earth when comes back to earth from heaven. If your readers would misunderstand **will appear**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to Jesus coming back to earth. Alternate translation: “will come” or “will reveal himself on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 9 28 s9jy figs-explicit ἐκ δευτέρου 1 the sins Here the author refers to **a second time** because Jesus already “appeared” on earth the “first time,” which is when he became human, lived, and died. If your readers would misunderstand why the author refers to **a second time**, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “one more time” or “again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 9 28 s9jy figs-explicit ἐκ δευτέρου 1 the sins Here the author refers to **a second time** because Jesus already “appeared” on earth the “first time,” which is when he became human, lived, and died. If your readers would misunderstand why the author refers to **a second time**, you could make the idea explicit. Alternate translation: “one more time” or “again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 28 scnu translate-ordinal δευτέρου 1 the sins If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “time two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) HEB 9 28 b99a figs-explicit χωρὶς ἁμαρτίας 1 the sins Here, the phrase **apart from sin** refers to how what Jesus will do is not about **sin**. The phrase does not refer to how Jesus himself does not have **sin**, although that is true (see [4:15](../04/15.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **apart from sin**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how Jesus’ second “appearing” does not deal with **sin**. Alternate translation: “without reference to sin” or “not dealing with sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 9 28 aijj figs-abstractnouns τοῖς…εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 the sins If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “to save those” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 10 intro nev1 0 # Hebrews 10 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: Old and new ministries (9:1–10:18)
6. Summary statement (10:19–25)
7. Faith and endurance (10:26–12:29)
* Exhortation: Endure in the faith! (10:26–39)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [10:5–7](../10/05.md), [16–17](../10/16.md), [37–38](../10/37.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The sacrifices that Moses’ law required

In [10:1–11](../10/01.md), the author points out several reasons why it is clear that the sacrifices that God required the Israelites to offer did not take away sins on their own. First, he states that these sacrifices are a “shadow” of the coming good things. It is the real thing, not the shadow, that takes away sins. Second, these sacrifices needed to be repeated. If they actually took away sin, the author reasons, they would only need to be done once. Third, he argues from the Scriptures that God replaces these sacrifices with Jesus doing God’s will. In this chapter, the author does not spend much time speaking about what those sacrifices actually did accomplish. He only says that they are a “reminder” of sins (see [10:3](../10/03.md)). See [9:13](../09/13.md) for more information on what the sacrifices actually could accomplish. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/sacrifice]])

### “Once” versus “repeatedly”

Throughout this chapter, the author states that Christ offered himself once and that his sacrifice has eternal effects. In contrast, he states that the sacrifices that the earthly priests offered happened repeatedly and had limited effects. In your translation, be sure to use words that emphasize the contrast between a single, effective sacrifice and multiple, ineffective sacrifices.

### The “former days”

In [10:32](../10/32.md), the author refers to the “former days,” which he then goes on to describe in [10:32–34](../10/32.md). This phrase refers to a period of time in the audience’s past, a time when they had just been “enlightened,” which means they had recently believed in Jesus. During this time, they suffered but also persevered and rejoiced in knowing God. The author wishes them to continue to show the endurance and joy they showed during these “former days.” In these verses, use verb tenses and forms that you would normally use for describing what happened in a person’s past.

### “The one coming” in [10:37](../10/37.md)

In [10:37](../10/37.md), the “one coming” refers to the Messiah, whom the author knows is Jesus. In this context, the Messiah “coming” refers to Jesus’ second coming, not his incarnation. Use words here that could be understood as a reference to Jesus’ second coming.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### “Shadow” and “image” in [10:1](../10/01.md)

In this verse, the law has a “shadow” of the coming good things, which means that the law of Moses gives an outline or vague image of those good things. A “shadow” is not bad, but it is not the thing that casts the shadow. Instead, it just gives a foretaste or a hint of what that thing is. The author uses the word “image” to refer to the thing itself. The author’s point, then, is that the law of Moses provides a hint or foretaste of the coming good things, which are what Christ offers to those who believe in him. That means that the law is good, but if people can have the “image” itself (what Christ gives), they do not need the “shadow” (the law) anymore. See the notes on this verse for translation ideas. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/shadow]])

### “The curtain, that is, his flesh” in [10:20](../10/20.md)

In this verse, the phrase “that is, his flesh” can be understood in three main ways.
(1) it could go with “curtain,” in which case the author is stating that Jesus’ “flesh” is somehow like this “curtain.” It could mean that he needed to live his life in the “flesh” before he could enter the heavenly sanctuary, just like a priest needed to pass through the “curtain” before he could enter the Most Holy Place. Or, it could mean that his “flesh” needed to die before he could enter the heavenly sanctuary, just like a priest needed to penetrate through the curtain to enter the Most Holy Place.
(2) it could go with the whole clause “which he has inaugurated for us as a fresh and living way.” In this case, the word “through” is implied with “flesh” as well as “curtain,” and the author is saying that Jesus “inaugurated” this way “through” (or “by means of”) his “flesh.” 
(3) it could go with “way,” in which case the author is stating that Jesus’ “way” was his “flesh.” This would most likely mean that the path or “way” that Jesus took to get to the heavenly sanctuary was his earthly life in the “flesh.”
The first option makes the most sense of the way the author wrote the words in the sentence, but some scholars argue that the idea it expresses does not match the rest of what the author says. Consider using a construction that could modify either “curtain” or “way” to preserve the ambiguity.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### What sins are those for which there is no longer a sacrifice?

In [10:26–31](../10/26.md), the author refers to sin which no sacrifice can take away and which God will punish with “fire.” Scholars debate what sin or sins the author is speaking about and whether the people who commit the sin or sins are really Christians or not. What is clear is that this is very serious sin: it involves “trampling” Christ and insulting the Holy Spirit. No one could commit this kind of sin by accident. Further, the word for “sinning” in [10:26](../10/26.md) indicates that the author is thinking about more than one individual act. In your translation, make sure that you refer to a pattern or repeated behavior of sinning. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Old Testament quotations

When the author quotes from the Old Testament, he uses a Greek translation that is sometimes different than the original Hebrew version that most modern translations use for the Old Testament. This is particularly obvious in [10:5–7](../10/05.md), which quotes from a Greek version of [Psalm 40:6–8](../psa/40/06.md), and in [10:37–38](../10/37.md), which quotes from a Greek version of [Habakkuk 2:3–4](../hab/02/03.md). Since the author chose to use these forms of the quotations, you should represent the words the author uses, not the words that may be found in an Old Testament you are familiar with. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +HEB 10 intro nev1 0 # Hebrews 10 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. The Son as high priest (5:1–10:18)
* Teaching: Old and new ministries (9:1–10:18)
6. Summary statement (10:19–25)
7. Faith and endurance (10:26–12:29)
* Exhortation: Endure in the faith! (10:26–39)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [10:5–7](../10/05.md), [16–17](../10/16.md), [37–38](../10/37.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The sacrifices that Moses’ law required

In [10:1–11](../10/01.md), the author points out several reasons why it is clear that the sacrifices that God required the Israelites to offer did not take away sins on their own. First, he states that these sacrifices are a “shadow” of the coming good things. It is the real thing, not the shadow, that takes away sins. Second, these sacrifices needed to be repeated. If they actually took away sin, the author reasons, they would only need to be done once. Third, he argues from the Scriptures that God replaces these sacrifices with Jesus doing God’s will. In this chapter, the author does not spend much time speaking about what those sacrifices actually did accomplish. He only says that they are a “reminder” of sins (see [10:3](../10/03.md)). See [9:13](../09/13.md) for more information on what the sacrifices actually could accomplish. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/sacrifice]])

### “Once” versus “repeatedly”

Throughout this chapter, the author states that Christ offered himself once and that his sacrifice has eternal effects. In contrast, he states that the sacrifices that the earthly priests offered happened repeatedly and had limited effects. In your translation, be sure to use words that emphasize the contrast between a single, effective sacrifice and multiple, ineffective sacrifices.

### The “former days”

In [10:32](../10/32.md), the author refers to the “former days,” which he then goes on to describe in [10:32–34](../10/32.md). This phrase refers to a period of time in the audience’s past, a time when they had just been “enlightened,” which means they had recently believed in Jesus. During this time, they suffered but also persevered and rejoiced in knowing God. The author wishes them to continue to show the endurance and joy they showed during these “former days.” In these verses, use verb tenses and forms that you would normally use for describing what happened in a person’s past.

### “The one coming” in [10:37](../10/37.md)

In [10:37](../10/37.md), the “one coming” refers to the Messiah, whom the author knows is Jesus. In this context, the Messiah “coming” refers to Jesus’ second coming, not his incarnation. Use words here that could be understood as a reference to Jesus’ second coming.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### “Shadow” and “image” in [10:1](../10/01.md)

In this verse, the law has a “shadow” of the coming good things, which means that the law of Moses gives an outline or vague image of those good things. A “shadow” is not bad, but it is not the thing that casts the shadow. Instead, it just gives a foretaste or a hint of what that thing is. The author uses the word “image” to refer to the thing itself. The author’s point, then, is that the law of Moses provides a hint or foretaste of the coming good things, which are what Christ offers to those who believe in him. That means that the law is good, but if people can have the “image” itself (what Christ gives), they do not need the “shadow” (the law) anymore. See the notes on this verse for translation ideas. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/shadow]])

### “The curtain, that is, his flesh” in [10:20](../10/20.md)

In this verse, the phrase “that is, his flesh” can be understood in three main ways.
(1) it could go with “curtain,” in which case the author is stating that Jesus’ “flesh” is somehow like this “curtain.” It could mean that he needed to live his life in the “flesh” before he could enter the heavenly sanctuary, just like a priest needed to pass through the “curtain” before he could enter the Most Holy Place. Or, it could mean that his “flesh” needed to die before he could enter the heavenly sanctuary, just like a priest needed to penetrate through the curtain to enter the Most Holy Place.
(2) it could go with the whole clause “which he has inaugurated for us as a fresh and living way.” In this case, the word “through” is implied with “flesh” as well as “curtain,” and the author is saying that Jesus “inaugurated” this way “through” (or “by means of”) his “flesh.”
(3) it could go with “way,” in which case the author is stating that Jesus’ “way” was his “flesh.” This would most likely mean that the path or “way” that Jesus took to get to the heavenly sanctuary was his earthly life in the “flesh.”
The first option makes the most sense of the way the author wrote the words in the sentence, but some scholars argue that the idea it expresses does not match the rest of what the author says. Consider using a construction that could modify either “curtain” or “way” to preserve the ambiguity.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### What sins are those for which there is no longer a sacrifice?

In [10:26–31](../10/26.md), the author refers to sin which no sacrifice can take away and which God will punish with “fire.” Scholars debate what sin or sins the author is speaking about and whether the people who commit the sin or sins are really Christians or not. What is clear is that this is very serious sin: it involves “trampling” Christ and insulting the Holy Spirit. No one could commit this kind of sin by accident. Further, the word for “sinning” in [10:26](../10/26.md) indicates that the author is thinking about more than one individual act. In your translation, make sure that you refer to a pattern or repeated behavior of sinning. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Old Testament quotations

When the author quotes from the Old Testament, he uses a Greek translation that is sometimes different than the original Hebrew version that most modern translations use for the Old Testament. This is particularly obvious in [10:5–7](../10/05.md), which quotes from a Greek version of [Psalm 40:6–8](../psa/40/06.md), and in [10:37–38](../10/37.md), which quotes from a Greek version of [Habakkuk 2:3–4](../hab/02/03.md). Since the author chose to use these forms of the quotations, you should represent the words the author uses, not the words that may be found in an Old Testament you are familiar with. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) HEB 10 1 kwq1 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the word **For** introduces a new development in the argument that is based on what the author has said in [9:23–28](../09/23.md). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces development, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 10 1 kj83 figs-metaphor σκιὰν…ἔχων…τῶν…ἀγαθῶν 1 the law is only a shadow of the good things to come Here the author speaks as if the **law** has a **shadow** that is cast by **the good things that are coming**. He speaks in this way to indicate that the **law** is not one of **the good things that are coming**, but that it does “foreshadow” or give a outline or forecast of what those **good things** are like. If your readers would misunderstand **having a shadow of the good things**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “foreshadowing the good things” or “only pointing to the good things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 1 mz05 figs-extrainfo τῶν μελλόντων ἀγαθῶν 1 the law is only a shadow of the good things to come Here the author does not clarify exactly what these **good things** are. What is clear is that God gives them to believers as gifts or blessings. If possible, express the idea without including specifics about what the **things** are. Alternate translation: “of the good gifts that are coming” or “of the blessings that are coming from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) @@ -1241,7 +1241,7 @@ HEB 10 2 mww3 grammar-connect-words-phrases ἐπεὶ 1 would the sacrifices no HEB 10 2 aw6g figs-rquestion οὐκ ἂν ἐπαύσαντο προσφερόμεναι, διὰ τὸ μηδεμίαν ἔχειν ἔτι συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν, τοὺς λατρεύοντας ἅπαξ κεκαθαρισμένους? 1 would the sacrifices not have ceased to be offered? The author does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the audience in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “yes, they would have ceased being offered.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea by using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “they would certainly have ceased being offered, because the ones serving would no longer have consciousness of sins, having been cleansed once.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) HEB 10 2 zk99 figs-infostructure οὐκ ἂν ἐπαύσαντο προσφερόμεναι, διὰ τὸ μηδεμίαν ἔχειν ἔτι συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν, τοὺς λατρεύοντας ἅπαξ κεκαθαρισμένους? 1 would the sacrifices not have ceased to be offered? Here the author expresses the conclusion before he gives his reasons. This was a natural order of information in his language. If your readers would find this order confusing, you could express the reasons before the conclusion, or you could use some other natural order. Alternate translation: “since the ones serving, having been cleansed once, would no longer have consciousness of sins, would they not have ceased being offered?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) HEB 10 2 xor4 figs-activepassive οὐκ ἂν ἐπαύσαντο προσφερόμεναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on the sacrifices, which have not **ceased being offered**, rather than focusing on the person who would “cease offering” them. If you must state who would do the action, the author implies that the “priests” or the “Israelites” would. Alternate translation: “would the priests not have ceased offering them” or “would the Israelites not have ceased offering them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 10 2 twab writing-pronouns οὐκ ἂν ἐπαύσαντο 1 Here, the word **they** refers to the “sacrifices” (see [10:1](../10/01.md)). If your readers would misunderstand what **they** refers to, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “would the sacrifices not have ceased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +HEB 10 2 twab writing-pronouns οὐκ ἂν ἐπαύσαντο 1 Here, the word **they** refers to the “sacrifices” (see [10:1](../10/01.md)). If your readers would misunderstand what **they** refers to, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “would the sacrifices not have ceased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 10 2 mu42 figs-explicit τοὺς λατρεύοντας 1 the worshipers would have been cleansed Here, the phrase **the ones serving** refers to everyone who worshiped God, not just to those acting as priests. If your readers would misunderstand **the ones serving**, you could make it clear that it refers to all the worshipers. Alternate translation: “the worshipers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 10 2 m9tj figs-abstractnouns μηδεμίαν ἔχειν ἔτι συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 would no longer have any consciousness of sin If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **consciousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “conscious” or a verb such as “recognize.” Alternate translation: “would no longer be conscious of sins” or “no longer recognize their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 10 2 vzcg figs-activepassive ἅπαξ κεκαθαρισμένους 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **cleansed** rather than focusing on the person or thing doing the “cleansing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “the sacrifices,” or God working through these sacrifices, did it. Alternate translation: “would have become clean once” or “being those whom God has cleansed once” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1250,7 +1250,7 @@ HEB 10 3 z3je figs-abstractnouns ἐν αὐταῖς ἀνάμνησις ἁμ HEB 10 3 l4me figs-idiom κατ’ ἐνιαυτόν 1 Here, just as in [10:1](../10/01.md), the phrase **every year** identifies an action that happens often and repeatedly. If your readers would misunderstand **every year**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies a frequent and repeated action. Alternate translation: “day after day” or “all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 10 4 di8i grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins Here, the word **For** introduces support for the author’s claim that the sacrifices give a “reminder of sins every year” ([10:3](../10/03.md)). His point here is that the sacrifices cannot **take away sins**, so all they can do is function as a “reminder” of the sins that they do not **take away**. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 10 4 stkp figs-explicit αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων ἀφαιρεῖν ἁμαρτίας 1 For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins Here, the phrase **blood of bulls and goats** may refer specifically to the offerings performed on the Day of Atonement (see [Leviticus 16](../lev/16/01.md)). However, the author is also referring in general to **blood** from any sacrifice. You should express the idea in general terms, as the author does. Alternate translation: “blood from animal sacrifices to take away sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 10 4 lbdu figs-metonymy αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων ἀφαιρεῖν ἁμαρτίας 1 For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins Here, the word **blood** refers to offering the **blood**. The word **sins** refers to the consequences of sin that people experience, including guilt, impurity, and alienation from God. If your readers would misunderstand **blood** and **sins**, you could express the ideas with short phrases. Alternate translation: “the offering of the blood of bulls and goats to take away the consequences of sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 10 4 lbdu figs-metonymy αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων ἀφαιρεῖν ἁμαρτίας 1 For it is impossible for the blood of bulls and goats to take away sins Here, the word **blood** refers figuratively to offering the **blood**. The word **sins** refers figuratively to the consequences of sin that people experience, including guilt, impurity, and alienation from God. If your readers would misunderstand **blood** and **sins**, you could express the ideas with short phrases. Alternate translation: “the offering of the blood of bulls and goats to take away the consequences of sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 4 bvu5 figs-doublet ταύρων καὶ τράγων 1 the blood of bulls and goats Here the author refers to **bulls and goats** as two examples of animals that were sacrificed so that the high priest could enter the sanctuary with their **blood**. These were not the only animals that could be sacrificed, and the author is not trying to be exhaustive. If your readers would misunderstand why the author refers specifically to **bulls and goats**, you could use a form in your language that refers generally to animals that are sacrificed. Alternate translation: “of sacrificed animals” or “of animals from flock or herd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 10 5 q4ye grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 General Information: Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference based on what the author has said about how “blood of bulls and goats” does not “take away sins” (see [10:4](../10/04.md)). Because that is true, Jesus speaks the words that the author quotes. If your readers would misunderstand **Therefore**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 10 5 xp0e grammar-connect-time-simultaneous εἰσερχόμενος 1 you did not desire Here, the word **entering** introduces an action that could happen (1) at the same as he **says** the quotation that follows. Alternate translation: “as he enters” (2) before he **says** the quotation that follows. Alternate translation: “as he was about to enter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) @@ -1262,9 +1262,9 @@ HEB 10 5 ml8e figs-yousingular οὐκ ἠθέλησας…κατηρτίσω 1 HEB 10 6 t9bn figs-quotations ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας οὐκ εὐδόκησας. 1 you did not desire If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you do, you will need to translate the previous and following verses as indirect quotes as well. Alternate translation: “in whole burnt offerings and concerning sin offerings God was not well-pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]} HEB 10 6 q416 figs-doublet ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ περὶ ἁμαρτίας 1 you did not desire Here, the phrases **whole burnt {offerings}** and **concerning sin {offerings}** function together to refer to sacrifices that the Israelites offered. The **whole burnt {offering}** refers to how a cow, goat, sheep, or bird would be killed and then completely burned before God. The **concerning sin {offering}** refers to how a bull, goat, lamb, or birds would be killed and the blood from the animal would be sprinkled in specific places. The author refers to both types of offerings in order to refer in general to sacrifices related to sin and atoning for that sin. If you do not have two descriptions for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase to refer to what an Israelite would offer to God to take care of sin. Alternate translation: “in sacrifices concerning sin” or “in animals that people offer to deal with ins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 10 6 bfaq translate-unknown περὶ ἁμαρτίας 1 you did not desire Here, the phrase **concerning sin {offerings}** refers to a specific type of sacrifice that people would offer when they sinned. An important part of this offering was how the priest sprinkled blood from the animal in specific places within the tabernacle. You can read about this offering in [Leviticus 4:1–5:13](../lev/04/01.md). If your readers would misunderstand **concerning sin {offerings}**, you could use a word or phrase that describes sacrifices offered to deal with sin. Alternate translation: “sin offerings” or “offerings to take away sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -HEB 10 6 q3r6 figs-yousingular οὐκ εὐδόκησας  1 you did not desire Because Christ is speaking to one person (God the Father), **you** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +HEB 10 6 q3r6 figs-yousingular οὐκ εὐδόκησας 1 you did not desire Because Christ is speaking to one person (God the Father), **you** is singular here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) HEB 10 7 dpvi figs-quotations τότε εἶπον, ἰδοὺ, ἥκω (ἐν κεφαλίδι βιβλίου γέγραπται περὶ ἐμοῦ) τοῦ ποιῆσαι ὁ Θεός τὸ θέλημά σου. 1 Then I said If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate the sentence as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. If you do, you will need to translate the previous two verses as indirect quotes as well. Alternate translation: “Then he said, ‘Behold, I have come—as it is written about me in a section of a scroll—to do God’s will.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]} -HEB 10 7 kwzf grammar-connect-logic-result τότε 1 Then I said Here, the word **Then** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what the author of the quotation has said about how God does not desire sacrifices. If your readers would misunderstand **Then**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +HEB 10 7 kwzf grammar-connect-logic-result τότε 1 Then I said Here, the word **Then** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what the author of the quotation has said about how God does not desire sacrifices. If your readers would misunderstand **Then**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 10 7 pjuj writing-pronouns εἶπον 1 Then I said Here, the word **I** refers to Christ, who is speaking the quotation. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **I** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “I, Christ, said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 10 7 zn6c writing-quotations εἶπον 1 Then I said Here the author of the quotation reports something that he himself has said. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a form for when someone quotes what they have already said. Alternate translation: “I myself said what follows:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) HEB 10 7 n9vg figs-quotesinquotes εἶπον, ἰδοὺ, ἥκω (ἐν κεφαλίδι βιβλίου γέγραπται περὶ ἐμοῦ) τοῦ ποιῆσαι ὁ Θεός τὸ θέλημά σου. 1 Then I said If a direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I said that I had certain come—as it is written about me in a section of a scroll—to do God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -1295,20 +1295,20 @@ HEB 10 11 x83h grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ…μὲν 1 can never take HEB 10 11 y25p translate-unknown ἕστηκεν 1 can never take away sins Here, the word **stands** refers to someone staying on their feet and not sitting down. It does not mean that the person does not move. The author uses the word **stands** because he will contrast it with how Jesus “sits” (see [10:12](../10/12.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **stands**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how a person does not sit down but stays in an upright position. Alternate translation: “stays on his feet” or “stands and walks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 10 11 jq4i figs-idiom καθ’ ἡμέραν 1 can never take away sins Here, the phrase **every day** identifies an action that happens very often and repeatedly. If your readers would misunderstand **every day**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies a very frequent and repeated action. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 10 11 uw6i figs-infostructure ἕστηκεν καθ’ ἡμέραν λειτουργῶν 1 can never take away sins Here, the phrase **each day** could modify: (1) **stands**. Alternate translation: “stands every day, serving” (2) **serving**. Alternate translation: “stands, serving every day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -HEB 10 11 bh1w figs-metonymy θυσίας, αἵτινες οὐδέποτε δύνανται περιελεῖν ἁμαρτίας 1 can never take away sins Here, the word **that** refers to offering the **sacrifices**, not just to the **sacrifices** themselves. The word **sins** refers to the consequences of sin that people experience, including guilt, impurity, and alienation from God. If your readers would misunderstand **that** and **sins**, you could express the ideas with short phrases. Alternate translation: “sacrifices. When people offer these sacrifices, they cannot take away the consequences of their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 10 11 bh1w figs-metonymy θυσίας, αἵτινες οὐδέποτε δύνανται περιελεῖν ἁμαρτίας 1 can never take away sins Here, the word **that** refers figuratively to offering the **sacrifices**, not just to the **sacrifices** themselves. The word **sins** refers figuratively to the consequences of sin that people experience, including guilt, impurity, and alienation from God. If your readers would misunderstand **that** and **sins**, you could express the ideas with short phrases. Alternate translation: “sacrifices. When people offer these sacrifices, they cannot take away the consequences of their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 12 zr61 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 he sat down at the right hand of God Here, the word **But** introduces the second half of the contrast that the author introduced in [10:11](../10/11.md). If your readers would misunderstand **But**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the second part of a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” or “But second,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) HEB 10 12 mksp writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 he sat down at the right hand of God Here, the word **he** refers to Christ. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **he** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 10 12 lfl1 grammar-connect-time-sequential προσενέγκας 1 he sat down at the right hand of God Here, the phrase **having offered** could introduce an action (1) that occurs before he **sat down**. Alternate translation: “after having offered” (2) that is the means by which or the reason why he **sat down**. Alternate translation: “because he offered” or “by means of having offered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) HEB 10 12 o8m4 figs-idiom εἰς τὸ διηνεκὲς 1 he sat down at the right hand of God Here, the phrase **for all time** identifies that something is always true or effective. In other words, there will never be a **time** when it is not true or effective. If your readers would misunderstand **for all time**, you could express the idea with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “forever” or “permanently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 10 12 vjto figs-infostructure μίαν ὑπὲρ ἁμαρτιῶν…θυσίαν, εἰς τὸ διηνεκὲς, ἐκάθισεν 1 he sat down at the right hand of God Here, the phrase **for all time** could modify (1) **offered**. Alternate translation: “one sacrifice for sins for all time, sat down” (2) **sat down**. Alternate translation: “one sacrifice for sins, sat down for all time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -HEB 10 12 egky figs-idiom ὑπὲρ ἁμαρτιῶν  1 he sat down at the right hand of God Here, the phrase **for sins** indicates that Jesus’s **sacrifice** was intended to take away **sins**. The phrase does not mean that the **sacrifice** helps or allows the **sins**. If your readers would misunderstand **for sins**, you could use a phrase that makes this idea clear. Alternate translation: “for the forgiveness of sins” or “so that God would forgive sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 10 12 egky figs-idiom ὑπὲρ ἁμαρτιῶν 1 he sat down at the right hand of God Here, the phrase **for sins** indicates that Jesus’s **sacrifice** was intended to take away **sins**. The phrase does not mean that the **sacrifice** helps or allows the **sins**. If your readers would misunderstand **for sins**, you could use a phrase that makes this idea clear. Alternate translation: “for the forgiveness of sins” or “so that God would forgive sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 10 12 fy8w translate-symaction ἐκάθισεν ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 he sat down at the right hand of God When someone sits **at the right hand of God**, it symbolizes that person’s honor, authority, and ability to rule. If your readers would misunderstand what **sat down at the right hand** means, you could express the idea explicitly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “sat down to rule at the right hand of God” or “took the place of honor and authority at the right hand of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) HEB 10 12 wl76 figs-metonymy ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 he sat down at the right hand of God Here, **at the right hand** refers to the place next to a person’s **right hand**, which would be the “right side.” In the author’s culture, this side was associated with honor or authority. If your readers would misunderstand **at the right hand**, you could refer to the “right side.” Make sure that your readers understand that this side indicates that Jesus has honor and authority when he sits there. Alternate translation: “at the right side of God” or “in the honorable place next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 13 w782 figs-explicit ἐκδεχόμενος 1 Here the author does not clarify what Jesus is **waiting** for. He implies that it is his return to earth, which the author has already mentioned in [9:28](../09/28.md). If your readers would misunderstand what Jesus is **waiting** for, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “waiting to return to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 10 13 ljg5 grammar-connect-time-sequential τὸ λοιπὸν 1 Here, the phrase **from then** refers to a span of time from a previous action (in this case, Jesus “sitting down” as described in [10:12](../10/12.md)) up to and including the present. If your readers would misunderstand **from then**, you could use a form that refers to this span of time. Alternate translation: “from that time on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) HEB 10 13 qnby figs-activepassive τεθῶσιν οἱ ἐχθροὶ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus the **enemies** that are **made a footstool** rather than focusing on the person who makes them the **footstool**. If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God makes his enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 10 13 s6sn figs-metaphor ἕως τεθῶσιν οἱ ἐχθροὶ αὐτοῦ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ 1 until his enemies are made a stool for his feet Here the author speaks as if the Son’s **enemies** could become a **footstool** on which he puts his **feet**. In the author’s culture, something that is under **feet** has been conquered and is powerless and shamed, so the point is that God will conquer and shame all the enemies of the Son. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. See how you translated the similar clause in [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “until his enemies might be made to kneel before him” or “until his enemies might be conquered and shamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 10 14 ske9 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 those who are being sanctified Here, the word **For** introduces one reason why Jesus is currently “waiting” ([10:13](../10/13.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “He can wait because” or “That is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +HEB 10 14 ske9 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 those who are being sanctified Here, the word **For** introduces one reason why Jesus is currently “waiting” ([10:13](../10/13.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “He can wait because” or “That is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 10 14 tfmy τετελείωκεν εἰς τὸ διηνεκὲς τοὺς ἁγιαζομένους 1 those who are being sanctified Here the author indicates that the Messiah has **perfected** believers once and in the past. He indicates that **being sanctified** is something that believers are still experiencing and that is not yet finished. In your translation, preserve the timing of these two actions. Alternate translation: “he perfected for all time those who are currently being sanctified” HEB 10 14 c298 figs-idiom εἰς τὸ διηνεκὲς 1 those who are being sanctified Here, the phrase **for all time** identifies that something is always true or effective. In other words, there will never be a time when it is not true or effective. If your readers would misunderstand **for all time**, you could express the idea with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “forever” or “permanently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 10 14 dz9n figs-activepassive τοὺς ἁγιαζομένους 1 those who are being sanctified If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **sanctified** rather than focusing on the person doing the “sanctifying.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “those whom God is sanctifying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1332,7 +1332,7 @@ HEB 10 19 ih5u grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Connecting Statement: Here HEB 10 19 f6g3 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Although the word **brothers** is masculine, the author is using it to refer to all believers, both men and women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 10 19 vr9d grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 brothers Here, the word **having** introduces a basis or reason for the author’s exhortation to “approach” in [10:22](../10/22.md). If your readers would misunderstand this relationship, you could use a word or phrase that clearly introduces a basis or reason. Alternate translation: “since we have” or “because we have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 10 19 cxi4 figs-abstractnouns ἔχοντες…παρρησίαν 1 brothers If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident” or “authorized.” Alternate translation: “being confident” or “being authorized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 10 19 hty9 figs-explicit εἰς τὴν εἴσοδον 1 brothers Here, the word translated **to enter** could refer primarily to: (1) the “entry-way” or “entrance” that belongs to the heavenly sanctuary. This option is more likely if you consider the phrase **the holy {places}** to refer to a sanctuary that is in heaven. Alternate translation: “with regard to the entrance of” or “concerning the entry-way of” (2) the act of “entering” the heavenly sanctuary. This option is more likely if you consider the phrase **the holy {places}** to refer primarily to God’s presence. Alternate translation: “for entering into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 10 19 hty9 figs-explicit εἰς τὴν εἴσοδον 1 brothers Here, the word translated **to enter** could refer primarily to: (1) the “entry-way” or “entrance” that belongs to the heavenly sanctuary. This option is more likely if you consider the phrase **the holy {places}** to refer to a sanctuary that is in heaven. Alternate translation: “with regard to the entrance of” or “concerning the entry-way of” (2) the act of “entering” the heavenly sanctuary. This option is more likely if you consider the phrase **the holy {places}** to refer primarily to God’s presence. Alternate translation: “for entering into” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 10 19 fii7 figs-explicit τῶν ἁγίων 1 the most holy place Here, the phrase **the holy {places}** could refer to: (1) the inner section of the heavenly sanctuary. Alternate translation: “the Most Holy Place in heaven” (2) the entire heavenly sanctuary. Alternate translation: “the heavenly sanctuary” (3) God’s presence, metaphorically. Alternate translation: “God’s holy presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 10 19 zl87 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ αἵματι Ἰησοῦ 1 by the blood of Jesus Scholars debate what **the blood of Jesus** represents in Hebrews. It could refer to his resurrected body, his death, or his actual blood. See the book introduction for more information on what Jesus’ blood refers to. Since **blood** is a very important concept in Hebrews, preserve the word here if at all possible. Alternate translation: “by Jesus’ blood, which is his sacrifice” or “by the blood of Jesus, that is, his death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 20 aj91 writing-pronouns ἣν 1 living way Here, the word **which** refers to the place of “entering” that the author mentioned in [10:19](../10/19.md). If your readers would misunderstand what **which** refers to, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “which entrance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1340,11 +1340,11 @@ HEB 10 20 l7wh translate-unknown πρόσφατον 1 living way Here, the word HEB 10 20 zx1a figs-metaphor ὁδὸν πρόσφατον καὶ ζῶσαν 1 living way Here, the author describes the **way** as if it were a person or thing that was **living**. By speaking in this way, he could be identifying the **way** as: (1) something that is effective at accomplishing what it intends, just like a **living** person can do or accomplish things. Alternate translation: “a fresh and powerful way” or “a fresh and effectual way” (2) something that leads to “life.” Alternate translation: “a fresh way that leads to life” (3) something that is related to Jesus, who is **living** when he “inaugurates” this way. Alternate translation: “a fresh way given by the living Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 20 c3ve figs-explicit διὰ τοῦ καταπετάσματος 1 through the curtain Here, the phrase **the curtain** refers to the cloth hanging that separates the Most Holy Place from the Holy Place. Scholars debate whether the author considers the **curtain** to be a barrier, a means of access, or simply a dividing line. However you understand the curtain, you should translate the phrase much like you did in [6:19](../06/19.md). Alternate translation: “through the dividing curtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 10 20 p3a9 figs-explicit τοῦτ’ ἔστιν τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 through the curtain Here, the phrase **that is, his flesh** could modify: (1) the **curtain**. In this case, the author is identifying the **curtain** and the **flesh**, which is metaphor. The author’s point is that Jesus had to go through the **curtain** to enter the Most Holy Place, and similarly he had to live and die in **his flesh** before he entered the Most Holy Place. Alternate translation: “which is his flesh” (2) the whole previous clause. In this case, the word **through** is implied, and **his flesh** is the means by which he **inaugurated** the **way**. In this case, the word **through** with **curtain** refers to where Jesus went, while the implied **through** with **his flesh** refers to means by which he went there. Alternate translation: “that is, through his flesh” or “that is, by means of his flesh” (3) the word **way**. In this case, the author is describing the **way** as what Jesus did in **his flesh** or as the **flesh** itself. Alternate translation: “that is, the way of his flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 10 20 ega9 figs-metonymy τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 his flesh Here, the word **flesh** could refer to: (1) Jesus’ earthly life. In other words, the phrase **his flesh** refers to Jesus as he lived on earth before his death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “his earthly life” (2) Jesus’ body offered to God in obedience up to and including death. Alternate translation: “the body that he offered” or “his sacrificial death” (3) Jesus’ humanity in general. Alternate translation: “his humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 10 20 ega9 figs-metonymy τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 his flesh Here, the word **flesh** could refer figuratively to: (1) Jesus’ earthly life. In other words, the phrase **his flesh** refers to Jesus as he lived on earth before his death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “his earthly life” (2) Jesus’ body offered to God in obedience up to and including death. Alternate translation: “the body that he offered” or “his sacrificial death” (3) Jesus’ humanity in general. Alternate translation: “his humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 21 uh6i figs-explicit ἱερέα μέγαν 1 we have a great priest over the house of God Here the author implies that the **great priest** is Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand who the **great priest** is, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “a great priest, Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 10 21 pkxk ἱερέα μέγαν 1 we have a great priest over the house of God Here, the phrase **great priest** could be: (1) a synonym for “high priest.” Alternate translation: “a high priest” (2) a description of the **priest** as **great**, or important and powerful. Alternate translation: “a priest who is great” HEB 10 21 bmh1 figs-idiom ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον 1 over the house The phrase **over the house** indicates that the **great priest** rules or is in charge of the **house**. If your readers would misunderstand **over the house**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the **great priest** as the one who rules or is in charge of the **house**. See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “in charge of the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 10 21 d1u1 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the house of God Here, the word **house** refers to a group of people, here all God’s people. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. See how you translated **house** in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “God’s tribe” or “God’s clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 10 21 d1u1 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the house of God Here, the word **house** figuratively refers to a group of people, here all God’s people. If your readers would misunderstand **house**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea nonfiguratively. See how you translated **house** in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “God’s tribe” or “God’s clan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 22 l4ik figs-go προσερχώμεθα 1 let us approach Here, **approach** refers to getting close to something but not necessarily being right next to it. Here, the author wants believers to **approach** the heavenly sanctuary (see [10:19](../10/19.md)). This means that they enter into God’s presence. It does not mean that they enter into heaven to be within the sanctuary itself. If your readers would misunderstand **approach**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to being in someone’s presence. See how you translated the similar construction in [4:16](../04/16.md). Alternate translation: “let us go before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 10 22 von8 translate-unknown μετὰ ἀληθινῆς καρδίας 1 let us approach Here, the word **true** refers to something that is reliable or sure. In this case, **a true heart** would refer to a **heart** that is “sincere” or “single-minded.” If your readers would misunderstand **true**, you could use a word that identifies the **heart** as “sincere” or with only one aim or goal. Alternate translation: “with a sincere heart” or “with a single-minded heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 10 22 wez1 figs-metonymy ἀληθινῆς καρδίας…τὰς καρδίας 1 with true hearts In the author’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and plan. If your readers would misunderstand **heart**, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea nonfiguratively. Alternate translation: “true desire … our desires” or “true thoughts … our thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1359,7 +1359,7 @@ HEB 10 22 tk9p grammar-collectivenouns τὸ σῶμα 1 our bodies washed with HEB 10 23 k5ui figs-metaphor κατέχωμεν 1 Let us also hold tightly to the confession of our hope Here, the phrase **hold tightly** refers to continuing to firmly believe or trust something, particularly something that one has been told. If your readers would misunderstand **hold tightly**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to continuing to believe or trust. See how you translated the phrase “hold fast” in [3:6](../03/06.md). Alternate translation: “Let us tightly grasp” or “Let us remain in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 23 dhu8 figs-possession τὴν ὁμολογίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Let us also hold tightly to the confession of our hope Here the author uses the possessive form to describe a **confession** that affirms or “confesses” **{our} hope**. If your readers would misunderstand that form, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “the confession about our hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) HEB 10 23 n57o figs-abstractnouns τὴν ὁμολογίαν τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **confession** and **hope**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “confess” and “hope.” Alternate translation: “what we confess that we hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 10 23 pckf figs-metonymy τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Here, the word **hope** refers to the contents of the **hope**, or what believers confidently expect. If your readers would misunderstand **hope**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **hope**. Alternate translation: “of the things that we hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 10 23 pckf figs-metonymy τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Here, the word **hope** figuratively refers to the contents of the **hope**, or what believers confidently expect. If your readers would misunderstand **hope**, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **hope**. Alternate translation: “of the things that we hope for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 23 jy4t figs-metaphor ἀκλινῆ 1 without wavering Here, the phrase **without wavering** describes what the **confession** should be like as Christians **hold tightly** to it. The phrase refers to something that does not move or sway from side to side. In other words, something that stays firmly in one place is **without wavering**. The author speaks in this way to encourage the audience to maintain the **confession** in such a way that it does not change or vary. If your readers would misunderstand **without wavering**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to something that does not change or that is constant. Alternate translation: “steadfast” or “so that it stays the same” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 23 dtxl writing-pronouns ὁ ἐπαγγειλάμενος 1 without wavering Here, the word **one** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **one** refers, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the one having promised, God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 10 24 i6ks figs-idiom κατανοῶμεν ἀλλήλους 1 without wavering Here, the phrase **consider one another** refers to thinking and caring about fellow believers. If your readers would misunderstand **consider one another**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to thinking about or spending time on fellow believers. See how you translated the similar phrase with Jesus as the object in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “let us focus on one another” or “let us spend time thinking about one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1368,11 +1368,11 @@ HEB 10 24 a75t figs-abstractnouns ἀγάπης καὶ καλῶν ἔργων HEB 10 25 xej1 μὴ ἐγκαταλείποντες…ἀλλὰ παρακαλοῦντες 1 Let us not stop meeting together Here, the phrases **not abandoning** and **exhorting {one another}** introduce two ways in which the audience can accomplish what the author has encouraged them to do in [10:24](../10/24.md). If your readers would misunderstand this relationship, you could express the it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “by not abandoning … and by exhorting one another” or “not by means of abandoning … but by means of exhorting one another” HEB 10 25 w4hc translate-unknown ἐγκαταλείποντες 1 Let us not stop meeting together Here, the word **abandoning** refers to avoiding or leaving something behind. In this case, the author means that they should not stop participating in the group’s meetings. If your readers would misunderstand **abandoning**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to failing to participate in something. Alternate translation: “giving up on” or “ceasing to participate in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 10 25 v4fa figs-explicit τὴν ἐπισυναγωγὴν ἑαυτῶν 1 Let us not stop meeting together Here, the phrase **our own meeting together** refers to how the Christian group the author is writing to would gather together and participate in worship and meals. If your readers would misunderstand **our own meeting together**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a regular gathering for specific purposes. Alternate translation: “our own congregation” or “our assembling as a group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 10 25 kvwm figs-abstractnouns καθὼς ἔθος τισίν 1 Let us not stop meeting together If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **habit**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “customarily” or “frequently.” Alternate translation: “just as some people frequently do” or “as some people do customarily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])  +HEB 10 25 kvwm figs-abstractnouns καθὼς ἔθος τισίν 1 Let us not stop meeting together If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **habit**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “customarily” or “frequently.” Alternate translation: “just as some people frequently do” or “as some people do customarily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 10 25 jdqw figs-idiom καὶ τοσούτῳ μᾶλλον, ὅσῳ 1 Let us not stop meeting together Here, the phrase **so much more in as much as** indicates that the **exhorting** should happen in proportion to how much they **see {that} day approaching**. As they **see** the **day** coming closer, they should “exhort” more. If your readers would misunderstand **so much more in as much as**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of proportional comparison. Alternate translation: “and all the more as” or “doing so as much as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 10 25 rqfz figs-metonymy τὴν ἡμέραν 1 Here, the word **day** refers to the event of Jesus’ return back to earth (see [9:28](../09/28.md)). In the Old Testament, the phrase “the day of the Lord” refers to the time when God will judge his enemies and save his people. Here, the author applies that idea of the **day** to Jesus’ return. If your readers would misunderstand **{that} day**, you could either refer to “the day of the Lord,” or you could more clearly explain that the author is referring to Jesus’ return. Alternate translation: “the day of the Lord” or “the day when Jesus returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 25 k9c7 figs-personification βλέπετε ἐγγίζουσαν τὴν ἡμέραν 1 as you see the day coming closer Here the author speaks as if a **day** were a person that the audience could **see** as he or she was **approaching**. The author speaks in this way to indicate that the audience can know that the **day** will happen soon. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a phrase that naturally refers to something in the future that will happen soon. Alternate translation: “you recognize that that day will happen soon” or “you observe that day getting closer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -HEB 10 26 gm7l grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the author wants the audience to “hold tightly” to the “confession” ([10:23](../10/23.md)), “stimulate” one another to “love and good works” ([10:24](../10/24.md)), and “meet together” and “exhort one another” (see [10:25](../10/25.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “I want you to do those things because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +HEB 10 26 gm7l grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the author wants the audience to “hold tightly” to the “confession” ([10:23](../10/23.md)), “stimulate” one another to “love and good works” ([10:24](../10/24.md)), and “meet together” and “exhort one another” (see [10:25](../10/25.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “I want you to do those things because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 10 26 nz9k grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἑκουσίως…ἁμαρτανόντων ἡμῶν 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the word **if** introduces a situation in which the second half of the verse (**a sacrifice on behalf of sins no longer remains**) is true. The author does not mean that **we** have “deliberately kept on sinning” or not. Rather, he uses **if** to introduce the situation as a possibility. If your readers would misunderstand **if**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a possible situation. Alternate translation: “were we to keep on sinning deliberately” or “supposing that we deliberately keep on sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) HEB 10 26 byv6 translate-unknown ἑκουσίως…ἡμῶν 1 we deliberately go on sinning Here, the word **deliberately** identifies an action as something that a person has done “on purpose” or planned ahead of time. Any action that someone does accidentally or without intending to is excluded. If your readers would misunderstand **deliberately**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies an action as something that a person does because the intend or want to. Alternate translation: “if we on purpose” or “if we knowingly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 10 26 q13r ἁμαρτανόντων 1 we deliberately go on sinning Here, the author wrote the word **sinning** in a form that implies that the person is sinning in the present and doing it more than once. That is why the ULT uses the words **keep on**. If your readers would misunderstand **keep on sinning**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to present, continuing sin. Alternate translation: “continue to sin” or “make a habit of sinning” @@ -1408,8 +1408,8 @@ HEB 10 30 v8ad figs-abstractnouns ἐμοὶ ἐκδίκησις 1 Vengeance bel HEB 10 30 pdw9 figs-metaphor ἐγὼ ἀνταποδώσω 1 I will pay back Here God speaks as if he were going to **pay** people **back** for what he owed them. God speaks in this way to indicate that the way he will punish people will match what they have done wrong, just like a repayment matches a debt. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I will give people what they deserve” or “I will fittingly punish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 30 u7qv figs-123person κρινεῖ Κύριος τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ 1 I will pay back Here the author has God speaking about himself in the third person. He uses this form because the quotation uses the third person to speak about God, and the author claims that God speaks the quotation. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could clarify that God is speaking about himself. Alternate translation: “I am the Lord; I will judge my people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) HEB 10 31 swmv figs-idiom φοβερὸν τὸ ἐμπεσεῖν 1 to fall into the hands Here, something that is **fearful** is something that causes “fear.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could more clearly express the idea that **to fall into {the} hands of {the} living God** causes “fear.” Alternate translation: “We should fear falling” or “It is a terrifying thing to fall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -HEB 10 31 hhu7 figs-metaphor τὸ ἐμπεσεῖν εἰς χεῖρας 1 to fall into the hands The phrase **to fall into** the **hands** of someone indicates that the person who “falls” is in the power of the other person. In other words, the person with the **hands** has total control over the person who “falls.” In the context, the author implies that God will use the power or control to punish the person who “falls into” his **hands**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to be in the power of” or “to be under the judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 10 31 mr1p figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας 1 Here, **hands** refers to the “power” or “actions” of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “into the power” or “under the control” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 10 31 hhu7 figs-metaphor τὸ ἐμπεσεῖν εἰς χεῖρας 1 to fall into the hands The phrase **to fall into** the **hands** of someone indicates that the person who “falls” is in the power of the other person. In other words, the person with the **hands** has total control over the person who “falls.” In the context, the author implies that God will use the power or control to punish the person who “falls into” his **hands**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to be in the power of” or “to be under the judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 10 31 mr1p figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας 1 Here, **hands** refers to the “power” or “actions” of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “into the power” or “under the control” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 31 gz60 figs-idiom Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 Here, much like in [3:12](../03/12.md) and [9:14](../09/14.md), the phrase **{the} living God** identifies **God** as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives “life.” The primary point is that **God** actually “lives,” unlike idols and other things that people call “god.”If your readers would misunderstand **{the} living God**, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really “lives.” Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 10 32 y0v5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 the former days Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with the warning that the author has given in [10:26–31](../10/26.md). While the author does give a stern warning, he contrasts that here with confidence that they were and will remain faithful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” or “But as for you,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) HEB 10 32 tlh3 figs-idiom τὰς πρότερον ἡμέρας 1 the former days Here, the phrase **the former days** refers to a period of time in the past. It does not refer to just a few **days**, and it does not specify how long in the past this period of time is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a period of time in the past. Alternate translation: “the time in the past” or “the previous period of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1434,12 +1434,12 @@ HEB 10 35 xh64 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 General Information: Here, HEB 10 35 m35c figs-metaphor μὴ ἀποβάλητε…τὴν παρρησίαν ὑμῶν 1 do not throw away your confidence, which has a great reward Here the author speaks as if **confidence** were an object that the audience **throw away** and lose. The author speaks in this way to urge the audience to remain firmly confident, as firmly as they would hold onto a valuable possession. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “leg go of your confidence” or “must not cease being confident” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 10 35 sl3k figs-explicit τὴν παρρησίαν ὑμῶν 1 do not throw away your confidence, which has a great reward Here the author does not state explicitly what the **confidence** is in. He implies that the **confidence** is in God and in what God has promised to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the object of **confidence** more explicit. Alternate translation: “your confidence in God” or “your confidence in what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 10 35 bksd figs-abstractnouns τὴν παρρησίαν ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident” or an adverb such as “confidently.” Alternate translation: “how confident you are” or “the way you confidently trust God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 10 35 w3pr figs-personification ἥτις ἔχει μεγάλην μισθαποδοσίαν 1 Here the author speaks as if **confidence** were a person who could “have” a **great reward**. The author speaks in this way to indicate that people who have this kind of **confidence** will receive that **great reward** from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “which God will greatly reward” or “since those with this confidence will receive a great reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +HEB 10 35 w3pr figs-personification ἥτις ἔχει μεγάλην μισθαποδοσίαν 1 Here the author speaks as if **confidence** were a person who could “have” a **great reward**. The author speaks in this way to indicate that people who have this kind of **confidence** will receive that **great reward** from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “which God will greatly reward” or “since those with this confidence will receive a great reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) HEB 10 36 zmf9 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation or development of what the author said in the previous verse ([10:35](../10/35.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further development, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 10 36 lgu4 figs-abstractnouns ὑπομονῆς…ἔχετε χρείαν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **need** and **endurance**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “need” and “endure” or “persevere.” Alternate translation: “you must persevere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 10 36 zdcx grammar-connect-time-sequential ποιήσαντες 1 Here, the phrase **having done** could introduce: (1) an action which occurs before “obtaining the promise.” Alternate translation: “after having done” (2) the basis or reason for “obtaining the promise.” Alternate translation: “because you have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) HEB 10 36 xy9j figs-abstractnouns τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **will**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “want” or “desire.” Alternate translation: “what God wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 10 36 ezun figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν 1 Here, the word **promise** refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promise” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 10 36 ezun figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν 1 Here, the word **promise** figuratively refers to the contents of the **promise**, or what God has “promised” to give. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of this **promise**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promise” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 10 36 hj2e figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “what God pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 10 37 uvq3 figs-quotemarks ἔτι γὰρ μικρὸν ὅσον, ὅσον ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 For in a very little while The words of the quotation could begin with: (1) **yet**. Alternate translation: “For ‘yet in a very little while, the one coming” (2) **{in} a very little {while}**. Alternate translation: “For yet ‘in a very little while, the one coming” (3) **the one coming**. Alternate translation: “For yet in a very little while, ‘the one coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) HEB 10 37 gpp8 writing-quotations γὰρ 1 For in a very little while Here the author uses the word **For** to introduce a quotation from the Old Testament, which continues in the following verse. This quotation supports what he has said about how the audience needs “endurance” (see [10:37](../10/37.md)). The quotation is from [Habakkuk 2:3–4](../hab/02/03.md), although the author rearranges some clauses in the following verse. Further, the phrase **yet {in} a very little {while}** paraphrases the beginning of [Habakkuk 2:3](../hab/02/03.md), and it sounds much like part of [Isaiah 26:20](../isa/26/20.md). However, the author introduces these words as one quotation, so you should also do that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit that the author is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For in the Scriptures it says,” or “For someone wrote in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) @@ -1477,7 +1477,7 @@ HEB 11 1 ybd8 figs-abstractnouns πραγμάτων ἔλεγχος 1 certain of HEB 11 2 smr4 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 For because of this Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what the author said about “faith” in the previous verse ([11:1](../11/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 11 2 vyiy writing-pronouns ταύτῃ 1 For because of this Here, the word **this** refers to the “faith” that the author discussed in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **this** refers to explicit. Alternate translation: “this faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 11 2 kmq6 figs-activepassive ἐμαρτυρήθησαν οἱ πρεσβύτεροι 1 the ancestors were approved If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **commended** rather than focusing on the person doing the “commending.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God commended the ancients” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 11 2 u66c figs-explicit οἱ πρεσβύτεροι 1 the ancestors Here, the word **ancients** refers to people who lived before the audience. The word implies that there are stories about these people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to famous people who are no longer living. See how you translated “fathers” in [1:1](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “the forefathers” or “the ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 11 2 u66c figs-explicit οἱ πρεσβύτεροι 1 the ancestors Here, the word **ancients** refers to people who lived before the audience. The word implies that there are stories about these people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to famous people who are no longer living. See how you translated “fathers” in [1:1](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “the forefathers” or “the ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 2 wfde translate-unknown ἐμαρτυρήθησαν 1 the ancestors Here, the phrase **were commended** refers to how someone testifies in favor of another person. The idea is that God has testified that **the ancients** were pleasing to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to receiving a favorable testimony. Alternate translation: “were spoken highly of” or “were endorsed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 11 3 e74z figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 the universe was created by God’s command If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing” or “Because we believe,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 3 u5i9 figs-activepassive κατηρτίσθαι τοὺς αἰῶνας ῥήματι Θεοῦ 1 the universe was created by God’s command If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **the ages** that **have been prepared** rather than focusing on the person doing the “preparing.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it by using his **word**. Alternate translation: “that God has prepared the ages by his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1524,7 +1524,7 @@ HEB 11 7 z9dd translate-names Νῶε 1 having been given a divine message The w HEB 11 7 p3pn figs-activepassive χρηματισθεὶς 1 about things not yet seen If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Noah**, who was **warned**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “warning.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “when God warned him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 7 ctop figs-activepassive τῶν μηδέπω βλεπομένων 1 about things not yet seen If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on what is **not yet being seen** rather than focusing on the person doing the “seeing.” If you must state who did the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “things no one could yet see” or “the things that people could not yet see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 11 7 b5lb figs-explicit τῶν μηδέπω βλεπομένων 1 about things not yet seen Here, the phrase **{things} not yet being seen** refers to events that have not yet happened. In this case, it refers specifically to the flood that drowned everyone except for Noah and his family. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that this phrase refers to events that had not yet happened. Alternate translation: “the things not yet having happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -HEB 11 7 l9c4 figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν τοῦ οἴκου αὐτοῦ 1 about things not yet seen If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rescue” or “save.” Alternate translation: “to save his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +HEB 11 7 l9c4 figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν τοῦ οἴκου αὐτοῦ 1 about things not yet seen If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rescue” or “save.” Alternate translation: “to save his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 7 bqpr writing-pronouns ἧς 1 about things not yet seen Here, the word **which** could refer to: (1) **faith**. Alternate translation: “which faith” (2) the **ark**. Alternate translation: “which ark” (3) **salvation**. Alternate translation: “which salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 11 7 pf7b figs-metonymy τὸν κόσμον 1 the world Here, the word **world** refers primarily to the people who were living in the **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer specifically to people here. Alternate translation: “everyone in the world” or “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 11 7 c9yc figs-metaphor τῆς…δικαιοσύνης, ἐγένετο κληρονόμος 1 became an heir of the righteousness Here the author speaks as if **Noah** were a child who would receive property from a relative. He speaks in this way to indicate that Noah received **righteousness** from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “became one who received the righteousness” or “received the righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1534,14 +1534,14 @@ HEB 11 8 hj87 0 when he was called In [11:8–12](../11/08.md), the author ref HEB 11 8 sgtm figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 when he was called If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 8 hjaa translate-names Ἀβραὰμ 1 when he was called The word **Abraham** is the name of a man. He was the ancestor of all the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 11 8 a7c2 figs-activepassive καλούμενος 1 when he was called If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The author uses the passive form here to focus on **Abraham**, who was **called**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who did the action, the author implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “when God called him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 11 8 sq21 figs-idiom ὑπήκουσεν ἐξελθεῖν 1 He went out Here, the phrase **obeyed to go out** means that Abraham **obeyed** God’s command by “going out.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to doing what someone commands. Alternate translation: “obeyed by going out” or “obeyed and went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +HEB 11 8 sq21 figs-idiom ὑπήκουσεν ἐξελθεῖν 1 He went out Here, the phrase **obeyed to go out** means that Abraham **obeyed** God’s command by “going out.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to doing what someone commands. Alternate translation: “obeyed by going out” or “obeyed and went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 11 8 kkt5 figs-go ἐξελθεῖν…ἐξῆλθεν 1 went out to the place Here, the phrases **go out** and **went out** refer to travel in which a person leaves one areas and goes to another area. Use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “to depart … departed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -HEB 11 8 e00q figs-extrainfo τόπον 1 went out to the place Here the author uses the word **place** because it is a vague word that refers to a location without giving any more details. He uses a vague word because Abraham did “not fully know where he was going.” If possible, use a vague or indefinite word here as well. Alternate translation: “a locale” or “an area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +HEB 11 8 e00q figs-extrainfo τόπον 1 went out to the place Here the author uses the word **place** because it is a vague word that refers to a location without giving any more details. He uses a vague word because Abraham did “not fully know where he was going.” If possible, use a vague or indefinite word here as well. Alternate translation: “a locale” or “an area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) HEB 11 8 d1zf figs-metaphor ἤμελλεν λαμβάνειν εἰς κληρονομίαν 1 that he was to receive as an inheritance Here the author speaks of the **place** as if it were property that **Abraham** was **going to receive** from a relative. The author speaks in this way to indicate that God was **going to** give this **place** to Abraham. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “God was going to give him as his own” or “he was going to receive from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 11 8 z1fo figs-pastforfuture ἔρχεται 1 that he was to receive as an inheritance Here the author uses the present tense to refer to the process of **going**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to the process of going. Make sure the tense fits with the rest of the verse. Alternate translation: “he was going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) HEB 11 8 s82j figs-go ἔρχεται 1 that he was to receive as an inheritance Here, the word **going** refers to traveling from one place to another. Use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of movement in your language. Alternate translation: “he is traveling” or “he is journeying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 11 9 be1c figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 he lived in the land of promise as a foreigner If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 9 pmb6 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐπαγγελίας…τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῆς αὐτῆς 1 he lived in the land of promise as a foreigner If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “that God had pledged to him … of the same things that God had pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +HEB 11 9 pmb6 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐπαγγελίας…τῆς ἐπαγγελίας τῆς αὐτῆς 1 he lived in the land of promise as a foreigner If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promise**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “that God had pledged to him … of the same things that God had pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 9 c0g3 figs-explicit ὡς ἀλλοτρίαν 1 he lived in the land of promise as a foreigner Here, the phrase **as a foreign {land}** indicates that Abraham had not yet “inherited” the **land of the promise**, so the **land** belonged to someone else. So, while God had promised to give it to him, while he was living there, it was **foreign** and not his own **land**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as if it were a foreign country” or “as if he were living in a foreign land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 9 pj3f figs-explicit ἐν σκηναῖς κατοικήσας 1 he lived in the land of promise as a foreigner In the author’s culture, people who lived in **tents** did not have one permanent home. Rather, they moved around and did not stay in one place for long. The author refers to **tents** here to indicate that Abraham, **Isaac**, and **Jacob** did not have a permanent home but rather moved around. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this implication more explicit. Alternate translation: “having lived in moveable tents” or “having lived in many places in tents” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 9 lbsd translate-names Ἰσαὰκ…Ἰακὼβ 1 fellow heirs The words **Isaac** and **Jacob** are the names of two men. **Isaac** was Abraham’s son, and **Jacob** was Isaac’s son. These three men are considered the original ancestors of the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1570,17 +1570,17 @@ HEB 11 12 x8b2 figs-simile καθὼς τὰ ἄστρα τοῦ οὐρανο HEB 11 12 mu4e figs-simile ὡς ἡ ἄμμος, ἡ παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τῆς θαλάσσης, ἡ ἀναρίθμητος 1 as countless as sand by the seashore Here the author compares the number of Abraham’s descendants to the amount of **sand** on a beach by the **sea**, which is so great that no one can count it (**countless**). He uses this comparison to emphasize how many descendants there are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that the author is referring to many descendants and many grains of **sand**. Alternate translation: “as many as the numberless grains of sand along the shore of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) HEB 11 13 tw2p figs-abstractnouns κατὰ πίστιν 1 without receiving the promises If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “While they were believing,” or “As they believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 13 rxtn writing-pronouns οὗτοι πάντες 1 without receiving the promises Here, and throughout [11:13–16](../11/13.md), the author could be referring: (1) generally to all the people that the author has discussed in the chapter. Alternate translation: “those I have mentioned” or “all these who had faith” (2) specifically to Abraham, Sarah, Isaac, and Jacob, who are mentioned in [11:8–12](../11/08.md). Alternate translation: “the patriarchs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -HEB 11 13 yin6 figs-metonymy τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 without receiving the promises Here, the word **promises** refers to the contents of the **promises**, or what God has “promised” to give. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of the **promises**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promises” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +HEB 11 13 yin6 figs-metonymy τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 without receiving the promises Here, the word **promises** figuratively refers to the contents of the **promises**, or what God has “promised” to give. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to the contents of the **promises**. Alternate translation: “the things from God’s promises” or “the things that God promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 11 13 l2ln figs-abstractnouns τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 without receiving the promises If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **promises**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “what God pledged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 13 g5ut figs-personification πόρρωθεν αὐτὰς ἰδόντες καὶ ἀσπασάμενοι 1 after seeing and greeting them from far off Here the author speaks as if **the promises** were travelers arriving from far away that people could “see” and “greet.” The author means that the people he has mentioned in this chapter were as sure of the **promises** as if they could already see and communicate with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “but anticipating and expecting them in the future” or “seeing and greeting them from far off as if the promises were expected visitors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) HEB 11 13 n71b figs-pastforfuture εἰσιν 1 they admitted Here the author uses the present tense because he is reporting what **all these** people **confessed** while they were alive. Use a natural tense in your language to report what people in the past said. Alternate translation: “they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) HEB 11 13 q1nq figs-doublet ξένοι καὶ παρεπίδημοί 1 they were foreigners and exiles on earth Here, the words **strangers** and **foreigners** function together to identify **all these** people as those who are not living in their homeland. In other words, they are “resident aliens.” If you do not have two words for these categories, you could use a single word or phrase that refers to people who are living somewhere besides their home or homeland. Alternate translation: “aliens” or “foreign people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) HEB 11 14 l1cx grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 a homeland Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what the author said in the previous verse ([11:13](../11/13.md)) about how the faithful people “confessed” that they were “strangers and foreigners on the earth.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 11 14 jb1c writing-pronouns τοιαῦτα 1 a homeland Here, the phrase **such {things}** refers back to what the author said about the faithful people in the previous verse: they “confessed that they are strangers and foreigners on the earth.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **such {things}** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “that they are strangers and foreigners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -HEB 11 14 xwa4 translate-unknown πατρίδα 1 a homeland Here, the word **homeland** refers to the place in which a person most deeply belongs. It often refers to the place where a person was born, but that is not the implication here. Rather, the author is referring to the place where the faithful people belong, a place he has already called a “city” (see [11:10](../11/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the place or country in which a person belongs. Alternate translation: “a country where they belong” or “a fatherland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +HEB 11 14 xwa4 translate-unknown πατρίδα 1 a homeland Here, the word **homeland** refers to the place in which a person most deeply belongs. It often refers to the place where a person was born, but that is not the implication here. Rather, the author is referring to the place where the faithful people belong, a place he has already called a “city” (see [11:10](../11/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the place or country in which a person belongs. Alternate translation: “a country where they belong” or “a fatherland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 11 15 y4jr grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ εἰ μὲν 1 a homeland Here, the word **And** introduces another step in the author’s argument. The word **indeed** indicates that this further step is in two parts, with the second part beginning with “but” in [11:16](../11/16.md). The word **if** indicates that the first part of the further step is in conditional form. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form to indicate these relationships in a natural way. Alternate translation: “Further, on the one hand, if” or “First, if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) HEB 11 15 vd0k grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ μὲν…μνημονεύουσιν 1 a homeland Here the author is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **they** were not actually **thinking of that {land} from which they went out**. He proves that the conditional statement is not true by pointing out that they **had opportunity to return** but did not take that opportunity. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if indeed they had really been thinking” or “were they indeed thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) -HEB 11 15 mbd3 figs-explicit ἐκείνης μνημονεύουσιν ἀφ’ ἧς ἐξέβησαν 1 a homeland Here the author implies that they could have thought of **that {land} from which they went out** as their “homeland.” He does not mean that they could have just thought about that land. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to **thinking of that {land}** as a “homeland.” Alternate translation: “they had been thinking of that {land} from which they went out as their homeland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 11 15 mbd3 figs-explicit ἐκείνης μνημονεύουσιν ἀφ’ ἧς ἐξέβησαν 1 a homeland Here the author implies that they could have thought of **that {land} from which they went out** as their “homeland.” He does not mean that they could have just thought about that land. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the author is referring to **thinking of that {land}** as a “homeland.” Alternate translation: “they had been thinking of that {land} from which they went out as their homeland” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 15 gf7l figs-go ἐξέβησαν…ἀνακάμψαι 1 a homeland Here, the clause **they went out** refers to movement out of one location and into another. The phrase **to return** refers to going back to that same place. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use natural phrases that refer to these kinds of movements. Alternate translation: “they departed … to travel back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) HEB 11 15 vavd figs-abstractnouns εἶχον ἂν καιρὸν 1 a homeland If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **opportunity**, you could express the idea in a more natural way. Alternate translation: “they would have been able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 16 bhrv grammar-connect-logic-contrast νῦν δὲ 1 heavenly one Here, the phrase **But now** introduces what is true, in contrast to the hypothetical situation the author presented in [11:15](../11/15.md). The word **now** does not refer to time here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces reality in contrast to a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “In reality, though,” or “As it really is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -1613,7 +1613,7 @@ HEB 11 18 c23z figs-idiom κληθήσεταί 1 your descendants will be named HEB 11 19 spl8 grammar-connect-logic-result λογισάμενος 1 God was able to raise up Isaac from the dead Here, the phrase **having reasoned** introduces the reason why Abraham acted as the author described in [11:17](../11/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because he reasoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) HEB 11 19 p43u figs-idiom καὶ ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγείρειν 1 God was able to raise up Isaac from the dead Here the author uses the phrase **raise up** to refer to how God makes someone who has died come back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or translate the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to restore even the dead to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) HEB 11 19 sar1 figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 to raise up … from the dead The author is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” or “the corpses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -HEB 11 19 aea3 translate-unknown αὐτὸν…ἐν παραβολῇ ἐκομίσατο 1 figuratively speaking Here, the phrase **in a parable** indicates that what the author is about to say should not be understood literally. The **parable** could refer to: (1) how Isaac did not really die, so the statement that Abraham received Isaac back from the dead overstates what actually happened. Alternate translation: “it was as if he received him back” (2) how Isaac almost dying and then being **received** back represents how God will resurrect everyone who believes. Alternate translation: “in a type, he received him back” or “in a foreshadowing, he received him back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +HEB 11 19 aea3 translate-unknown αὐτὸν…ἐν παραβολῇ ἐκομίσατο 1 figuratively speaking Here, the phrase **in a parable** indicates that what the author is about to say should not be understood literally. The **parable** could refer to: (1) how Isaac did not really die, so the statement that Abraham received Isaac back from the dead overstates what actually happened. Alternate translation: “it was as if he received him back” (2) how Isaac almost dying and then being **received** back figuratively represents how God will resurrect everyone who believes. Alternate translation: “in a type, he received him back” or “in a foreshadowing, he received him back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 11 19 hjxf writing-pronouns αὐτὸν…ἐκομίσατο 1 figuratively speaking Here, the word **he** refers to Abraham, and the word **him** refers to Isaac. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make to whom these words refer more explicit. Alternate translation: “Abraham received Isaac back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) HEB 11 19 k7u3 ὅθεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν παραβολῇ ἐκομίσατο 1 from there Here, the word translated **from there** could be: (1) a reference back to the **dead**, specifically the state of being **dead**. Alternate translation: “and in a parable, he received him back from being dead” (2) a linking word that indicates the cause of Abraham receiving Isaac back. Alternate translation: “because of which, also in a parable, he received him back” HEB 11 20 o8gj 0 he received him back Here the author refers to a story about how **Isaac** blessed his twin sons **Jacob** and **Esau**. In the story, Jacob pretends to be Esau and receives the blessing that Isaac intended for Esau. When Esau comes to receive his blessing, Isaac realizes that Jacob stole the blessing from Esau. He then gives Esau a different blessing. You can read about Isaac blessing his sons in [Genesis 27:1–40](../gen/27/01.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. @@ -1642,7 +1642,7 @@ HEB 11 23 n6fz τρίμηνον 1 Moses, when he was born, was hidden for three HEB 11 23 rlnm translate-unknown ἀστεῖον 1 Moses, when he was born, was hidden for three months by his parents Here, the word **beautiful** refers to how someone is charming, good-looking, or has good qualities in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies that a person has good qualities. Alternate translation: “extraordinary” or “excellent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) HEB 11 23 mz1o figs-explicit οὐκ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸ διάταγμα 1 Moses, when he was born, was hidden for three months by his parents Here the author means that Moses’ parents were **not afraid** to break or disobey **the decree**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “they were not afraid of breaking the decree” or “they did not fear the consequences of breaking the decree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 23 wwo6 figs-abstractnouns τὸ διάταγμα τοῦ βασιλέως 1 Moses, when he was born, was hidden for three months by his parents If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **decree**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “decree” or “command.” Alternate translation: “of what the king decreed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 11 23 n63g figs-explicit τὸ διάταγμα τοῦ βασιλέως 1 Moses, when he was born, was hidden for three months by his parents Here the author assumes that his audience knew who the **king** was and what the **decree** was about. The **king** is the ruler over the land of Egypt, sometimes also called a “Pharaoh.” The **decree** required all the sons born to the Israelites to be drowned in the river Nile. If your readers would not make these inferences, you could make them more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the king of Egypt’s decree that all the male children of the Israelites should be drowned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +HEB 11 23 n63g figs-explicit τὸ διάταγμα τοῦ βασιλέως 1 Moses, when he was born, was hidden for three months by his parents Here the author assumes that his audience knew who the **king** was and what the **decree** was about. The **king** is the ruler over the land of Egypt, sometimes also called a “Pharaoh.” The **decree** required all the sons born to the Israelites to be drowned in the river Nile. If your readers would not make these inferences, you could make them more explicit. Alternate translation: “of the king of Egypt’s decree that all the male children of the Israelites should be drowned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) HEB 11 24 ngi7 0 had grown up In [11:24–27](../11/24.md), the author refers to a story about **Moses**. This man **Moses** grew up as the adopted son of Pharaoh’s daughter. However, one day Moses saw an Egyptian hitting one of his fellow Israelites. He killed the Egyptian, but Pharaoh found out and wanted to kill Moses. Moses escaped to a land called Midian. You can read about this story in [Exodus 2:11–15](../exo/02/11.md). You might want to include this information in a footnote. HEB 11 24 s1t9 figs-abstractnouns πίστει 1 had grown up If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “By believing,” or “Because he believed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) HEB 11 24 rtx6 translate-names Μωϋσῆς…Φαραώ 1 had grown up The word **Moses** is the name of a man. He is the one whom God used to lead the Israelites out of Egypt. The word **Pharaoh** was the title of the king of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1883,4 +1883,4 @@ HEB 13 22 d5e6 ἀνέχεσθε τοῦ λόγου τῆς παρακλήσε HEB 13 22 l8b3 figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου τῆς παρακλήσεως 1 the word of encouragement Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the encouraging message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 13 23 w3m2 figs-activepassive ἀπολελυμένον 1 has been set free If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “is no longer in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 13 24 r7kn ἀσπάζονται ὑμᾶς οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας 1 Those from Italy greet you This could mean: (1) the author is not in **Italy**, but there is a group of believers with him who have come from Italy. (2) the author is in **Italy** while writing this letter. -HEB 13 24 kk9c translate-names τῆς Ἰταλίας 1 Italy **Italy** is the name of a region at that time. At that time, Rome was the capital city of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +HEB 13 24 kk9c translate-names τῆς Ἰταλίας 1 Italy **Italy** is the name of a region at that time. At that time, Rome was the capital city of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) \ No newline at end of file From c44e47d1c4bced5d70596ff066e5bfabc3234d96 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 11:54:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 311/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 38 +++++++++++++++++++------------------- 1 file changed, 19 insertions(+), 19 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index be31a8f54d..cedaf7660e 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1060,10 +1060,10 @@ MAT 14 35 xd7c figs-hyperbole πάντας 1 sent Here, **all** does not mean ev MAT 14 36 mw8n figs-activepassive διεσώθησαν 1 were healed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “Jesus” did it. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 intro i9a5 0 # Matthew 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 15:8-9, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The “traditions of the elders”

The “traditions of the elders” were oral laws that the Jewish religious leaders developed because they wanted to make sure that everyone obeyed the law of Moses. However, they often worked harder to obey these rules than to obey the law of Moses itself. Jesus rebuked the religious leaders for this, and they became angry as a result. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Jews and Gentiles

The Jews of Jesus’ time thought that only Jews could please God by the way they lived. Jesus healed a Canaanite Gentile woman’s daughter to show his followers that he would accept both Jews and Gentiles as his people.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Sheep

The Bible often speaks of people as if they were sheep because sheep need someone to take care of them. This is because they do not see well and they often go to where other animals can kill them easily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 15 1 q6af writing-newevent τότε 1 General Information: Jesus is using the word translated **Then** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -MAT 15 2 j1b8 figs-rquestion διὰ τί οἱ μαθηταί σου παραβαίνουσιν τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων? 1 Why do your disciples violate the traditions of the elders? The Pharisees are not asking for information, but are using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what they are saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Your disciples certainly violate the traditions of the elder!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 15 2 yn6l translate-unknown τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 the traditions of the elders Here, ***traditions of the elders** is not talking about the law of Moses, but other rules that previous people had created. If your readers would not understand this, you can state what it means explicitly. Alternate translation: “traditional teachings which previous people created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 15 2 gfn6 figs-explicit οὐ…νίπτονται τὰς χεῖρας 1 they do not wash their hands This washing is not only to clean the hands of filth, but also to rid the body of impurities. This washing is one which the Pharisees participated in, and often they compelled others to do the same. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they do not wash their hands of their impurities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 15 3 ia1e figs-rquestion διὰ τί καὶ ὑμεῖς παραβαίνετε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν? 1 Why do you also violate the commandment of God because of your traditions? Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are violating the commandment of God because of your traditions!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 15 2 j1b8 figs-rquestion διὰ τί οἱ μαθηταί σου παραβαίνουσιν τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων? 1 Why do your disciples violate the traditions of the elders? The Pharisees are using the question form to challenge Jesus about why his disciples are not following the traditions of the elders. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Your disciples certainly violate the traditions of the elder!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 15 2 yn6l translate-unknown τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 the traditions of the elders Here, **the traditions of the elders** is not referring to the law of Moses, but to man-made laws. Your language and culture may have a term for this that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “traditional teachings which previous people created” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 15 2 gfn6 figs-explicit οὐ…νίπτονται τὰς χεῖρας 1 they do not wash their hands This washing is not only to clean the hands of filth, but also to rid the body of impurities. It is one which the Pharisees participated in, and often they compelled other people to do so as well. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they do not wash their hands of their impurities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 15 3 ia1e figs-rquestion διὰ τί καὶ ὑμεῖς παραβαίνετε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν? 1 Why do you also violate the commandment of God because of your traditions? Jesus is using the question form to challenge the Pharisees. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You are violating the commandment of God because of your traditions!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 15 4 srz6 figs-quotesinquotes τίμα τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν μητέρα…ὁ κακολογῶν πατέρα ἢ μητέρα, θανάτῳ τελευτάτω 1 General Information: If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “For Moses said to honor your father and mother. He also said that the person who speaks evil against his father or mother deserves to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MAT 15 5 ql75 figs-explicit δῶρον 1 But you say It might be necessary in your language to say who the gift is for. This gift is given to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “is a gift for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 15 5 l8t0 figs-quotesinquotes ὑμεῖς δὲ λέγετε, ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί, δῶρον ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφεληθῇς 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “But you say that whoever says to his father or mother 'Whatever from might have been helpful is a gift'” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -1073,30 +1073,30 @@ MAT 15 7 t4fq figs-exclamations ὑποκριταί 1 General Information: Jesus MAT 15 7 n4ti writing-quotations λέγων 1 saying Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “when he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) MAT 15 8 qw69 figs-metonymy ὁ λαὸς οὗτος τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ 1 This people honors me with their lips Isaiah, who Jesus is quoting, is using the term **lips** figuratively to mean when someone is speaking. Alternate translation: “This people honors me when they speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 8 bz91 writing-pronouns με…ἐμοῦ 1 me … me Here, the words **me** are referring to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “me, God … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -MAT 15 8 wuw3 figs-metonymy ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far from me Jesus is using the term **heart** figuratively to mean a person's inner thoughts or emotions. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 15 8 wuw3 figs-metonymy ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far from me Jesus is using the term **heart** figuratively to mean a person's inner thoughts or emotions. Alternate translation: “desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 8 q7vm figs-idiom ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far away from me Here, the phrase **far from me** is an idiom meaning that they do not love him. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “but they are not love me in their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 15 8 hr29 figs-idiom δὲ 1 Here, **but** contrasts what is before it to what comes after it. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -MAT 15 9 vvb9 ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων 1 the commandments of men James is using the possessive form to describe these **commandments** as something which are created by people instead of God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “man-made” instead of the noun “men.” Alternate translation: “man-made commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -MAT 15 11 s28y figs-metonymy εἰσερχόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα…ἐκπορευόμενον ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 1 enters into the mouth … what comes out of the mouth Jesus is contrasting what a person eats to what a person says. Jesus means that God is concerned with what a person says rather than what a person eats. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 15 8 hr29 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, **but** contrasts what is before it to what comes after it. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +MAT 15 9 vvb9 figs-possession ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων 1 the commandments of men James is using the possessive form to describe these **commandments** as something which are created by people instead of God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “man-made” instead of the noun “men.” Alternate translation: “man-made commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +MAT 15 11 s28y figs-metonymy οὐ τὸ εἰσερχόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἀλλὰ τὸ ἐκπορευόμενον ἐκ τοῦ στόματος, τοῦτο κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 enters into the mouth … what comes out of the mouth Jesus is using the phrase **enters into the mouth** to mean what a person eats. He is using the phrase **comes out from the mouth** to mean what a person says. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Nothing that a person eats defiles them, but what a person says, this is what defiles them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n MAT 15 12 l2uj figs-activepassive οἱ Φαρισαῖοι…ἐσκανδαλίσθησαν 1 the Pharisees, having heard this word, were offended If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The Pharisees … were upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 15 13 n5ij figs-metaphor πᾶσα φυτεία ἣν οὐκ ἐφύτευσεν ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος ἐκριζωθήσεται 1 Every plant that my heavenly Father has not planted will be uprooted Here, Jesus refers to the Pharisees as if they were plants. He also speaks of God as if he is a farmer who **uproots** the plants, or judges them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The Pharisees are like plants that my Heavenly Father will pull up because he did not plant them” or “The Pharisees will be judged severely by my Heavenly Father because they do not obey him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 15 13 n5ij figs-metaphor πᾶσα φυτεία ἣν οὐκ ἐφύτευσεν ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος ἐκριζωθήσεται 1 Every plant that my heavenly Father has not planted will be uprooted Here, Jesus refers to the Pharisees as if they were plants. He also speaks of God as if he is a farmer who **uproots** the plants, or judges them. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The Pharisees are like plants that my Heavenly Father will pull up because he did not plant them” or “The Pharisees will be judged severely by my Heavenly Father because they do not obey him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 15 13 j49e guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος 1 my heavenly Father **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 15 13 hs4t figs-activepassive ἐκριζωθήσεται 1 will be uprooted If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will uproot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 14 r167 writing-pronouns ἄφετε αὐτούς 1 Let them go! The word **them** refers to the Pharisees. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -MAT 15 14 ai9x figs-metaphor ὁδηγοί εἰσιν τυφλοί τυφλὸς, δὲ τυφλὸν ἐὰν ὁδηγῇ, ἀμφότεροι εἰς βόθυνον πεσοῦνται 1 They are blind guides. But if the blind might guide the blind, both will fall into a pit Jesus speaks of the Pharisees as if they were blind people trying to **guide** other **blind** people. Jesus means that the Pharisees do not understand God’s commands or how to please him. Therefore, they cannot teach others how to please God. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “They are like blind guides. But if the blind lead the blind along, both will fall into a hole” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 15 14 ai9x figs-metaphor ὁδηγοί εἰσιν τυφλοί τυφλὸς, δὲ τυφλὸν ἐὰν ὁδηγῇ, ἀμφότεροι εἰς βόθυνον πεσοῦνται 1 They are blind guides. But if the blind might guide the blind, both will fall into a pit Jesus speaks of the Pharisees as if they were blind people trying to **guide** other **blind** people. Jesus means that the Pharisees do not understand how to help people obey God. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “They are like blind guides. But if the blind lead the blind along, both will fall into a hole” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 15 15 shg6 writing-pronouns ἡμῖν 1 to us Here, **us** refers to the disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to us disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -MAT 15 16 al9z figs-rquestion ἀκμὴν καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε? 1 Are you also still without understanding? Jesus uses this question to express his disappointment that they do not understand. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “After all I have said and done, I am amazed that you still do not understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 15 17 l5nt figs-rquestion οὔπω νοεῖτε ὅτι πᾶν τὸ εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα, εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν χωρεῖ, καὶ εἰς ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκβάλλεται? 1 Do you not yet understand that everything that enters into the mouth passes into the stomach and is passed out into the latrine? Jesus is continuing to express his disappointment. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You ought to understand that everything that go into a persons mouth passes into the stomach and is passed out into the toilet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 15 17 s9z6 translate-unknown ἀφεδρῶνα 1 the latrine A **latrine** is a term which signifies the place where people bury their bodily waste. Use a word in your language for this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 15 18 ca1w figs-metonymy τὰ…ἐκπορευόμενα ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 1 the things that proceed out from the mouth Jesus is using the phrase **proceeding out of the mouth** figuratively to mean speaking. Alternate translation: “the things which a person speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 15 18 jt6o figs-metonymy τῆς καρδίας 1 Jesus is using the term **heart** figuratively to mean a persons inner desires or thoughts. Alternate translation: “a persons inner thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 15 20 bme7 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον…ἄνθρωπον 1 to eat with unwashed hands Here, **man** can refer to both men and women. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +MAT 15 16 al9z figs-rquestion ἀκμὴν καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε? 1 Are you also still without understanding? Jesus is using the question form to challenge the disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “After all I have said and done, I am amazed that you still do not understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 15 17 l5nt figs-rquestion οὔπω νοεῖτε ὅτι πᾶν τὸ εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα, εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν χωρεῖ, καὶ εἰς ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκβάλλεται? 1 Do you not yet understand that everything that enters into the mouth passes into the stomach and is passed out into the latrine? Jesus is using the question form to challenge his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You ought to understand that everything that go into a persons mouth passes into the stomach and is passed out into the toilet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 15 17 s9z6 translate-unknown ἀφεδρῶνα 1 the latrine Here, **latrine** is a word which means the place where you bury your bodily waste. Your language and culture may have a term for this that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 15 18 ca1w figs-metonymy τὰ…ἐκπορευόμενα ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 1 the things that proceed out from the mouth Jesus is using the phrase **proceeding out of the mouth** to mean speaking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things which a person speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 15 18 jt6o figs-metonymy τῆς καρδίας 1 Jesus is using the term **heart** figuratively to mean a persons inner desires or thoughts. If it would it would be helpful to your readers, you can state this in a plain way. Alternate translation: “a persons inner thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 15 20 bme7 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον…ἄνθρωπον 1 to eat with unwashed hands Although the term **man** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “people” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MAT 15 21 e5gv writing-newevent 0 General Information: Here, Matthew is introducing a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 15 21 t81u figs-explicit ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν 1 Jesus withdrew It is implied that the disciples went with Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples withdrew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 15 22 x1wm writing-participants ἰδοὺ, γυνὴ Χαναναία ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων ἐκείνων ἐξελθοῦσα 1 behold, a Canaanite woman having come out Matthew is using the phrase **behold, a Canaanite woman having come out** to introduce the **Canaanite woman** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Behold, there was a woman from the people called the Canaanites who was coming from the region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -MAT 15 22 xs64 Υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 Son of David Jesus was not David's literal **Son**, but his descendant. The title **Son of David** is also an important messianic title. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “Descendant of King David, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) +MAT 15 22 xs64 translate-kinship Υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 Son of David Jesus was not David's literal **Son**, but his descendant. The title **Son of David** is also an important messianic title. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “Descendant of King David, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) MAT 15 22 j6rt figs-activepassive ἡ θυγάτηρ μου κακῶς δαιμονίζεται 1 My daughter is severely demon-possessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “a demon” did it. Alternate translation: “A demon is controlling my daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 15 23 hd2i figs-metonymy οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῇ λόγον 1 did not answer her a word Matthew is using the term **word** figuratively to mean something spoken. Alternate translation: “Jesus did not say anything in response to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 15 23 hd2i figs-metonymy οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῇ λόγον 1 did not answer her a word Matthew is using the phrase **he did not answer her a word** to mean that he did not respond to her cries for help. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 24 t9ga figs-activepassive οὐκ ἀπεστάλην 1 I was not sent If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God did not send me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 24 wfnx grammar-connect-exceptions οὐκ ἀπεστάλην εἰ μὴ εἰς τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα οἴκου Ἰσραήλ 1 If it would in appear your language that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “I was sent only for the lost sheep of the house of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) MAT 15 24 u9t4 figs-metaphor εἰς τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα οἴκου Ἰσραήλ 1 to the lost sheep of the house of Israel Here, Jesus is referring to the people of **Israel** who have gone astray as **lost sheep**. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel who have wondered like lost sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1115,7 +1115,7 @@ MAT 15 30 gy3h writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 Here, the word **them** is ref MAT 15 31 be52 figs-nominaladj κωφοὺς…κυλλοὺς…χωλοὺς…τυφλοὺς 1 the crippled … the lame … the blind See the note in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 15 33 uhi3 figs-rquestion πόθεν ἡμῖν ἐν ἐρημίᾳ, ἄρτοι τοσοῦτοι ὥστε χορτάσαι ὄχλον τοσοῦτον? 1 From where would be to us in a wilderness enough bread to satisfy so large a crowd? The disciples are using the question form to emphasize that there is nowhere to get food for that many people. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is certainly no place in the wilderness where we can get enough food to feed this large crowd!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]). MAT 15 34 k86l figs-ellipsis ἑπτά, καὶ ὀλίγα ἰχθύδια 1 Seven, and a few small fish The disciples are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “seven loaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 15 36 a9s4 figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις 1 was giving them Matthew is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the disciples were giving {them} to the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 15 36 a9s4 figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις 1 was giving them Matthew is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the disciples were giving them to the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 15 38 z66m translate-numbers τετρακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 4,000 men Alternate translation: “four thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 15 39 m8dp translate-names Μαγαδάν 1 of Magadan This region is sometimes called “Magdala.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 16 intro za2k 0 # Matthew 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Yeast

Jesus spoke of the way people thought about God as if it were bread, and he spoke of what people taught about God as if it were the yeast that makes bread dough become larger and the baked bread taste good. He did not want his followers to listen to what the Pharisees and Sadducees taught. This was because if they did listen, they would not understand who God is and how he wants his people to live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Jesus told his people to obey his commands. He did this by telling them to “follow” him. It is as if he were walking on a path and they were walking after him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Background information

Matthew continues his account from chapter 15 in verses 1-20. The account stops in verse 21 so Matthew can tell the reader that Jesus told his disciples again and again that people would kill him after he arrived in Jerusalem. Then the account continues in verses 22-27 with what happened the first time Jesus told the disciples that he would die.

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Matthew 16:25](../mat/16/25.md)). From 64fc9ee7a73d84178b43adbc53bbed4d875c2516 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: NateKreider Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 12:35:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 312/446] Edit 'en_tn_41-MAT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 22 +++++++++++----------- 1 file changed, 11 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index cedaf7660e..47fad31401 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1099,22 +1099,22 @@ MAT 15 22 j6rt figs-activepassive ἡ θυγάτηρ μου κακῶς δαιμ MAT 15 23 hd2i figs-metonymy οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῇ λόγον 1 did not answer her a word Matthew is using the phrase **he did not answer her a word** to mean that he did not respond to her cries for help. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 24 t9ga figs-activepassive οὐκ ἀπεστάλην 1 I was not sent If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God did not send me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 24 wfnx grammar-connect-exceptions οὐκ ἀπεστάλην εἰ μὴ εἰς τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα οἴκου Ἰσραήλ 1 If it would in appear your language that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “I was sent only for the lost sheep of the house of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) -MAT 15 24 u9t4 figs-metaphor εἰς τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα οἴκου Ἰσραήλ 1 to the lost sheep of the house of Israel Here, Jesus is referring to the people of **Israel** who have gone astray as **lost sheep**. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel who have wondered like lost sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 15 24 u9t4 figs-metaphor εἰς τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα οἴκου Ἰσραήλ 1 to the lost sheep of the house of Israel Here, Jesus is referring to the people of **Israel** who have gone astray as **lost sheep**. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel who have wandered like lost sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 15 25 u3jj translate-symaction προσεκύνει αὐτῷ 1 bowed down to him Here, **bowing down to him** was a sign of honor which was often shown in their culture. If it would be helpful to your readers, use a similar action from your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) MAT 15 26 ihz4 writing-proverbs οὐκ ἔστιν καλὸν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων καὶ βαλεῖν τοῖς κυναρίοις 1 It is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw it to the little dogs This proverb draws a figurative comparison: The people of Israel are like the children of a house because they are the offspring of the parents. But non-Israelite people are like dogs because they are not the offspring. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “It is not good to share the message intended for the people of Israel with those from other places” or “It is not good to give something to a person for whom it was not intended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) -MAT 15 26 a5bc figs-synecdoche τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων 1 the bread of the children Here, the word **bread** is referring to food in general. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MAT 15 27 yvw1 figs-metaphor καὶ…τὰ κυνάρια ἐσθίει ἀπὸ τῶν ψιχίων τῶν πιπτόντων ἀπὸ τῆς τραπέζης τῶν κυρίων αὐτῶν 1 even the little dogs eat from the crumbs that fall from the tables of their masters The woman responds by using the same imagery as Jesus used in the proverb he just spoke. She means non-Jews should be able to have a small amount of the good things Jews are throwing away. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 15 26 a5bc figs-synecdoche τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων 1 the bread of the children Jesus is using **bread** to represent food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 15 27 yvw1 figs-metaphor καὶ…τὰ κυνάρια ἐσθίει ἀπὸ τῶν ψιχίων τῶν πιπτόντων ἀπὸ τῆς τραπέζης τῶν κυρίων αὐτῶν 1 even the little dogs eat from the crumbs that fall from the tables of their masters The woman responds by using the same imagery as Jesus used in the metaphor he just spoke. She means non-Jews should be able to have a small amount of the good things Jews are throwing away. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 15 27 i5tt τὰ κυνάρια 1 the little dogs See how you translated **little dogs** in the previous verse. -MAT 15 28 tea2 figs-activepassive γενηθήτω 1 let it be done If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “I” did it. Alternate translation: “I will do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 15 28 tea2 figs-activepassive γενηθήτω 1 let it be done If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that Jesus did it. Alternate translation: “I will do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 28 n229 figs-activepassive ἰάθη ἡ θυγάτηρ αὐτῆς 1 her daughter was healed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed her daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 15 28 wwq3 figs-idiom ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 1 from that hour Here, the phrase **from that hour** is an idiom meaning “at that moment”. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “at that moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 15 29 np6e writing-newevent 0 General Information: Jesus is using this verse to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -MAT 15 30 c8td figs-nominaladj χωλούς, τυφλούς, κυλλούς, κωφούς 1 the lame, the blind, the crippled, the mute Jesus is using the adjectives **the lame, the blind, the crippled, the mute** as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 15 30 yf7i figs-idiom ἔρριψαν αὐτοὺς παρὰ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 they laid them at his feet Here, the phrase **they laid them at his feet** is an idiom meaning “they laid them in front of him”. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they laid them in front of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 15 28 wwq3 figs-idiom ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 1 from that hour Here, **from that hour** is an idiom that means “at that moment”. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 15 29 np6e writing-newevent 0 General Information: Matthew is using this verse to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +MAT 15 30 c8td figs-nominaladj χωλούς, τυφλούς, κυλλούς, κωφούς 1 the lame, the blind, the crippled, the mute Jesus is using the adjectives **the lame, the blind, the crippled, the mute** as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase as demonstrated in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 15 30 yf7i figs-idiom ἔρριψαν αὐτοὺς παρὰ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 they laid them at his feet Here, the phrase **they laid them at his feet** is an idiom meaning “they laid them in front of him”. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they laid them in front of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 15 30 gy3h writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 Here, the word **them** is referring to the many sick people. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sick people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -MAT 15 31 be52 figs-nominaladj κωφοὺς…κυλλοὺς…χωλοὺς…τυφλοὺς 1 the crippled … the lame … the blind See the note in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 15 33 uhi3 figs-rquestion πόθεν ἡμῖν ἐν ἐρημίᾳ, ἄρτοι τοσοῦτοι ὥστε χορτάσαι ὄχλον τοσοῦτον? 1 From where would be to us in a wilderness enough bread to satisfy so large a crowd? The disciples are using the question form to emphasize that there is nowhere to get food for that many people. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is certainly no place in the wilderness where we can get enough food to feed this large crowd!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]). -MAT 15 34 k86l figs-ellipsis ἑπτά, καὶ ὀλίγα ἰχθύδια 1 Seven, and a few small fish The disciples are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “seven loaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 15 31 be52 figs-nominaladj κωφοὺς…κυλλοὺς…χωλοὺς…τυφλοὺς 1 the crippled … the lame … the blind See the note in the previous verse for how to translate these adjectives. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 15 33 uhi3 figs-rquestion πόθεν ἡμῖν ἐν ἐρημίᾳ, ἄρτοι τοσοῦτοι ὥστε χορτάσαι ὄχλον τοσοῦτον? 1 From where would be to us in a wilderness enough bread to satisfy so large a crowd? The disciples are using the question form to challenge Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is certainly no place in the wilderness where we can get enough food to feed this large crowd!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]). +MAT 15 34 k86l figs-ellipsis ἑπτά 1 Seven, and a few small fish The disciples are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “seven loaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 15 36 a9s4 figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις 1 was giving them Matthew is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the disciples were giving them to the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 15 38 z66m translate-numbers τετρακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 4,000 men Alternate translation: “four thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 15 39 m8dp translate-names Μαγαδάν 1 of Magadan This region is sometimes called “Magdala.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 20b703ab76ad0a2d10df65a1f410b5e803681ce9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 08:54:10 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 313/446] Fix format of Matthew --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 212 +++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ 1 file changed, 106 insertions(+), 106 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 7aece3aa3b..1af20f2596 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ MAT 1 22 c1vw figs-activepassive τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑπὸ Κυρίου δι MAT 1 22 p39k figs-explicit τοῦ προφήτου 1 the prophet There were many prophets. Matthew was speaking specifically of Isaiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 1 22 e8ld writing-quotations λέγοντος 1 In Paul’s culture, **saying** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Isaiah the prophet. If your readers would not understand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “He wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) MAT 1 23 sln1 translate-names Ἐμμανουήλ 1 Immanuel **Immanuel** is a male name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 1 23 wlft figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 The term **behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” in this case seeing figuratively means giving notice and attention. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to what I am saying to you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 1 23 wlft figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 The term **behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” in this case seeing means giving notice and attention. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to what I am saying to you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 1 23 lm6t grammar-connect-time-background ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, μεθ’ ἡμῶν ὁ Θεός 1 which is translated, “God with us.” Matthew is providing this background information to help readers understand what the name **Immanuel** means. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “This name means, ‘God with us’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) MAT 1 24 iue3 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐποίησεν ὡς προσέταξεν αὐτῷ ὁ ἄγγελος Κυρίου, καὶ παρέλαβεν τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Joseph took Mary as his wife, just as the angel of the Lord commanded Him to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) MAT 1 25 i7p5 figs-euphemism οὐκ ἐγίνωσκεν αὐτὴν 1 he did not know her Mark uses a polite expression to say that they had not engaged in sexual activity. Alternate translation: “He did not have sexual with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ MAT 3 2 hvx8 figs-metonymy ἤγγικεν…ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐ MAT 3 3 fl4v figs-activepassive οὗτος γάρ ἐστιν ὁ ῥηθεὶς διὰ Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος 1 For this is he who was spoken of by Isaiah the prophet, saying If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For John was the one who Isaiah spoke about when he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 3 3 yhe7 figs-quotesinquotes ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου; εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ 1 Make ready the way of the Lord … make his paths straight Here there is a direct quotation inside a direct quotation, as Mark quotes Isaiah who quotes the messenger. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “a voice crying out in the wilderness, telling people to make ready the way of the Lord and to make his paths straight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MAT 3 3 hxb6 writing-quotations φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 The voice of one calling out in the wilderness Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “The voice of someone crying out in the wilderness is heard, saying:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -MAT 3 3 s62r figs-synecdoche φωνὴ βοῶντος 1 Here, a voice figuratively refers to the messenger who uses his voice to cry out. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “people will hear the messenger’s voice as he cries out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 3 3 s62r figs-synecdoche φωνὴ βοῶντος 1 Here, a voice refers to the messenger who uses his voice to cry out. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “people will hear the messenger’s voice as he cries out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 3 3 n7lh figs-parallelism ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου; εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ 1 **Make ready the way of the Lord** and **make his paths straight** mean the same thing. If this would be confusing in your language, you could combine the two. “Prepare to hear and obey the Lord’s message when he comes”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 3 3 j99i figs-metaphor ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν Κυρίου 1 Make ready the way of the Lord Isaiah uses a metaphor here of preparing paths or the way that someone will travel on. If someone prepares a path for another, they make the path walkable. If someone in high authority were coming, they would make sure the roads were clear from any hazards. So this metaphor means that the people should prepare themselves to receive the Lord’s message when he comes. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or use plain speech. Alternate translation: “Prepare to hear and obey the Lord’s message when he comes” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) MAT 3 4 j647 writing-background αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Ἰωάννης εἶχεν τὸ ἔνδυμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τριχῶν καμήλου καὶ ζώνην δερματίνην περὶ τὴν ὀσφὺν αὐτοῦ, ἡ δὲ τροφὴ ἦν αὐτοῦ ἀκρίδες καὶ μέλι ἄγριον 1 Now this John had his clothing from the hair of a camel and a leather belt around his waist, and his food was locusts and wild honey The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Matthew gives the reader some background information about what John the Baptist ate, and what he looked like. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -88,18 +88,18 @@ MAT 3 7 c4cl figs-rquestion τίς ὑπέδειξεν ὑμῖν φυγεῖν MAT 3 7 h7ac figs-personification φυγεῖν ἀπὸ τῆς μελλούσης ὀργῆς 1 to flee from the coming wrath The phrase **coming wrath** is being used to refer to God’s punishment. Wrath itself cannot come, but God is the one who causes it to happen. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “to flee from God’s wrath which he is bringing against you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) MAT 3 8 s8ac figs-metaphor ποιήσατε οὖν καρπὸν ἄξιον τῆς μετανοίας 1 Therefore produce fruit worthy of repentance The phrase **produce fruit** is a metaphor referring to a person’s actions. Just as a healthy tree bears good fruit, so should someone who love God do good. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “Let your actions show that you have truly repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 3 9 anyf figs-explicit πατέρα ἔχομεν τὸν Ἀβραάμ 1 They would say **We have Abraham {as} father** because they thought being Abraham’s descendants would protect them from God’s judgement. Alternate translation: “Abraham is our ancestor, so God would not punish us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 3 9 s4og figs-metaphor πατέρα 1 Here, the word father figuratively means “ancestor.” If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “Abraham is our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 3 9 s4og figs-metaphor πατέρα 1 Here, the word father means “ancestor.” If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “Abraham is our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 3 9 k843 figs-hyperbole δύναται ὁ Θεὸς ἐκ τῶν λίθων τούτων ἐγεῖραι τέκνα τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 God is able to raise up children for Abraham from these stones John uses an exaggeration here to show that God does not need these Pharisees and Sadducees to fulfill his promises which he made to **Abraham**. If our readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that portrays this exaggeration. Alternate translation: “God could make children of Abraham even out of these rocks!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MAT 3 9 eedc figs-metaphor τέκνα τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 Here, the word children figuratively means “descendants.” If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “descendants for Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 3 9 eedc figs-metaphor τέκνα τῷ Ἀβραάμ 1 Here, the word children means “descendants.” If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “descendants for Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 3 10 d4j5 figs-activepassive ἤδη δὲ ἡ ἀξίνη πρὸς τὴν ῥίζαν τῶν δένδρων κεῖται; πᾶν οὖν δένδρον μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται 1 But already the ax is placed against the root of the trees. So every tree not producing good fruit is chopped down and is thrown into the fire. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the person who is going to cut down the tree has already placed his ax against the roots. So, he will cut down every tree which does not bear good fruit and throw it into the fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 3 10 a8m8 figs-metaphor πᾶν οὖν δένδρον μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται 1 **every tree not producing good fruit is chopped down and is thrown into the fire** is a figurative way of describing punishment. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “God will certainly punish every person who does not repent of their sins and do good deeds to show it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 3 11 c1xf figs-explicit οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς τὰ ὑποδήματα βαστάσαι 1 is mightier than I **carrying…sandals** was a duty of a slave. John is saying implicitly that the one who is coming will be so great that he is not even worthy to be his slave. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not even worthy to be his slave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 3 11 gtm7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ὑμᾶς βαπτίσει ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ πυρί 1 He will baptize you with the Holy Spirit and with fire John is using literal baptism, which puts a person under water, to speak figuratively of spiritual baptism, which cleanses people from their sin. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 3 12 gcq8 figs-metaphor οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ 1 whose winnowing fork is in his hand, and he will thoroughly clear off his threshing floor John is saying figuratively that the Messiah will come prepared to judge people right away. You could express this metaphor as a simile in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here in your translation. Alternate translation: “He will already be prepared to judge people, just like a farmer who is ready to thresh grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 3 11 gtm7 figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ὑμᾶς βαπτίσει ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ πυρί 1 He will baptize you with the Holy Spirit and with fire John is using literal baptism, which puts a person under water, to speak of spiritual baptism, which cleanses people from their sin. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 3 12 gcq8 figs-metaphor οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ 1 whose winnowing fork is in his hand, and he will thoroughly clear off his threshing floor John is saying that the Messiah will come prepared to judge people right away. You could express this metaphor as a simile in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here in your translation. Alternate translation: “He will already be prepared to judge people, just like a farmer who is ready to thresh grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 3 12 sq4p figs-idiom οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ 1 whose winnowing fork is in his hand Here, **in his hand** means the person is ready to act. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and Christ is holding a winnowing fork because he is ready” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 3 12 b5m4 translate-unknown τὸ πτύον 1 winnowing fork A **winnowing fork** is a tool for tossing wheat into the air to separate the wheat grain from the chaff. The heavier grain falls back down, and the wind blows away the unwanted chaff. This tool is similar to a pitchfork. If you have a similar tool in your culture, you can use the word for it here. Otherwise, you can use a phrase that would express the meaning. Alternate translation: “tool for threshing grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 3 12 r2ua translate-unknown τὴν ἅλωνα αὐτοῦ 1 his threshing floor The **threshing floor** was the place where wheat was stacked in preparation for threshing. To clear off the floor is to finish threshing all the grain. If your readers would not be familiar with this place, you could use the name of a place of similar use in your culture, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “The place where food is prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 3 12 av8l figs-metaphor συνάξει τὸν σῖτον αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν ἀποθήκην…τὸ δὲ ἄχυρον κατακαύσει πυρὶ ἀσβέστῳ 1 gather his wheat into the storehouse … he will burn up the chaff with unquenchable fire John continues to speak figuratively to describe how the coming Messiah will judge people. The wheat is the part of the crop that is useful. It represents people who are obedient to God, who will be welcomed into his presence. The chaff is the husk that surrounds the grain. It is not useful for anything, so people burn it up.You could express this metaphor as a simile in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He will welcome those who are obedient to God, just as a farmer stores good grain in his barn. But he will punish those who are disobedient to God, just as a farmer burns up the useless chaff” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 3 12 av8l figs-metaphor συνάξει τὸν σῖτον αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν ἀποθήκην…τὸ δὲ ἄχυρον κατακαύσει πυρὶ ἀσβέστῳ 1 gather his wheat into the storehouse … he will burn up the chaff with unquenchable fire John continues to speak to describe how the coming Messiah will judge people. The wheat is the part of the crop that is useful. It represents people who are obedient to God, who will be welcomed into his presence. The chaff is the husk that surrounds the grain. It is not useful for anything, so people burn it up.You could express this metaphor as a simile in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He will welcome those who are obedient to God, just as a farmer stores good grain in his barn. But he will punish those who are disobedient to God, just as a farmer burns up the useless chaff” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 3 13 vl93 writing-newevent τότε 1 Connecting Statement: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 3 13 zbj9 figs-activepassive βαπτισθῆναι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 to be baptized by him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so John could baptize him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 3 14 cl7t figs-rquestion ἐγὼ χρείαν ἔχω ὑπὸ σοῦ βαπτισθῆναι, καὶ σὺ ἔρχῃ πρός με? 1 I need to be baptized by you, and yet you come to me? John uses a question to show his surprise at Jesus’ request. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are more important than I am. I should not baptize you. You should baptize me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -108,9 +108,9 @@ MAT 3 15 wdcu figs-idiom πληρῶσαι πᾶσαν δικαιοσύνην 1 MAT 3 16 inf6 figs-activepassive βαπτισθεὶς 1 But having been baptized If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “After John baptized Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 3 16 jh1v figs-activepassive ἀνεῴχθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ οὐρανοί 1 the heavens were opened to him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sky opened up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 3 16 e3na figs-simile τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ καταβαῖνον ὡσεὶ περιστερὰν ἐρχόμενον ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 coming down like a dove The phrase like a dove could mean: (1) the Spirit looked like a dove as he descended upon Jesus. Alternate translation: “he Spirit come down from heaven, looking like a dove” (2) the Spirit descend upon Jesus as a dove descends from the sky toward the ground. Alternate translation: “The Spirit of God came down from heaven as a dove comes down” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile) -MAT 3 17 m2wk figs-personification φωνὴ ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν λέγουσα 1 a voice from the heavens saying Mark speaks figuratively of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. The voice is God’s voice. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven and said” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification) +MAT 3 17 m2wk figs-personification φωνὴ ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν λέγουσα 1 a voice from the heavens saying Mark speaks of this voice as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. The voice is God’s voice. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven and said” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification) MAT 3 17 myz8 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου 1 my Son This is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 4 intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 5 and 16, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Devil

The devil, or Satan, is a fallen angel who attacks God's people and tries to get them to turn against God. The devil hates God and all that God created because he wants to take the place of God and be worshiped as God. rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
+MAT 4 intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 5 and 16, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Devil

The devil, or Satan, is a fallen angel who attacks God's people and tries to get them to turn against God. The devil hates God and all that God created because he wants to take the place of God and be worshiped as God. rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter MAT 4 1 k51m writing-newevent τότε 1 General Information: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “After this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 4 1 aq3s figs-activepassive ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνήχθη…ὑπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Jesus was led up by the Spirit If your language does not use the passive form, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Spirit led Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 4 1 wy4b figs-activepassive πειρασθῆναι ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου 1 to be tempted by the devil If your language does not use the passive form, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so the devil could tempt Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ MAT 4 12 v7p4 writing-background δὲ 1 General Information: This is the beginn MAT 4 12 d1vi figs-activepassive Ἰωάννης παρεδόθη 1 John had been arrested If your language does not use the passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the king had arrested John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 4 13 hpm4 figs-explicit ἐν ὁρίοις Ζαβουλὼν καὶ Νεφθαλείμ 1 in the territories of Zebulun and Naphtali **Zebulun** and **Naphtali** are the names of the tribes that lived in these territories many years earlier before foreigners took control of the land of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 4 14 tj7c figs-activepassive τὸ ῥηθὲν 1 what was spoken If your language does not use the passive form, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 4 15 egx6 figs-synecdoche γῆ Ζαβουλὼν καὶ γῆ Νεφθαλείμ…Γαλιλαία τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 The land of Zebulun and the land of Naphtali … Galilee of the Gentiles! Jesus refers figuratively to these places, when he is really referring to the people who live in them. If our readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “You who live in Zebulun and Naphtali” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 4 15 egx6 figs-synecdoche γῆ Ζαβουλὼν καὶ γῆ Νεφθαλείμ…Γαλιλαία τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 The land of Zebulun and the land of Naphtali … Galilee of the Gentiles! Jesus refers to these places, when he is really referring to the people who live in them. If our readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “You who live in Zebulun and Naphtali” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 4 15 se2r ὁδὸν θαλάσσης 1 **the way of the sea** could also be a title referring to a road which ran along the Sea of Galilee. MAT 4 16 fsl6 figs-explicit ὁ λαὸς ὁ καθήμενος ἐν σκοτίᾳ 1 **the people** being referred to here are the Jews. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The Jews, who are sitting in darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 4 16 h2xr figs-metaphor ὁ λαὸς ὁ καθήμενος ἐν σκοτίᾳ φῶς εἶδεν μέγα…ἐν χώρᾳ καὶ σκιᾷ θανάτου, φῶς 1 The people who are sitting in darkness have seen a great light Here, **darkness** and **region and shadow of death** are metaphors for not knowing the truth about God. And **light** is a metaphor for God’s true message that saves people from their sin. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “The people sitting in sin have heard the message that God saves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ MAT 5 34 u7su figs-metaphor μήτε ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, ὅτι θρό MAT 5 35 e7z8 translate-unknown ὑποπόδιόν ἐστιν τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ 1 it is the footstool for his feet Here, **footstool** is used to refer to the earth. If your readers would not know what a footstool is, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “something on which God can rest his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 5 35 mvcd figs-metaphor ὅτι ὑποπόδιόν ἐστιν τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ 1 God does not need **a footstool for his feet**, for he does not have feet. This language is metaphorical, telling the reader that the earth belongs to God. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “no longer belong to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 5 36 l9c8 figs-you μήτε ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ σου ὀμόσῃς, ὅτι οὐ δύνασαι μίαν τρίχα λευκὴν ποιῆσαι ἢ μέλαιναν 1 Neither may you swear by your head, for you are not able to make one hair white or black Jesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should and should not do. All occurrences of the words **you** and **your** are singular, but you may have to translate them as plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 5 36 z5vu μήτε ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ σου ὀμόσῃς 1 may you swear To **swear by your head** figuratively means to swear by your own authority. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “Neither should you swear by your own authority” or “Neither should you swear by your own knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 5 36 z5vu μήτε ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ σου ὀμόσῃς 1 may you swear To **swear by your head** means to swear by your own authority. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “Neither should you swear by your own authority” or “Neither should you swear by your own knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 5 38 zar1 figs-activepassive ὅτι ἐρρέθη 1 that it was said If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God said” or “that Moses said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 5 38 w53l figs-explicit ὀφθαλμὸν ἀντὶ ὀφθαλμοῦ καὶ ὀδόντα ἀντὶ ὀδόντος 1 An eye in exchange for an eye, and a tooth in exchange for a tooth This passages is speaking of the punishment of injuring someone’s **eye** or **tooth**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 5 39 qrx1 figs-nominaladj τῷ πονηρῷ 1 the evil person Jesus is using the adjective **evil** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “someone who is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ MAT 6 8 nv9i guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** i MAT 6 9 mq4x figs-metonymy ἁγιασθήτω τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 let your name be sanctified Here, **your name** refers to God himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “make everyone honor you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 6 9 sxsy figs-explicit οὕτως οὖν προσεύχεσθε ὑμεῖς 1 Jesus was not saying that this was the only way to pray. He was giving an example of how one should pray. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Therefore, instead of babbling like the Gentiles, you should pray similar to this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 6 9 sc3d figs-metonymy ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 See how you translated **who is in the heavens** in [5:16](../05/16.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 6 9 knx7 figs-activepassive ἁγιασθήτω τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “make people glory your name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 6 9 knx7 figs-activepassive ἁγιασθήτω τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “make people glory your name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 6 9 tqm4 figs-metonymy ἁγιασθήτω τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 Here, **your name** refers to God himself. The name of something is very closely associated with who it belongs to. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “May people honor you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 6 10 n67c figs-metonymy ἐλθέτω ἡ βασιλεία σου 1 Let your kingdom come See how your translated **kingdom** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 6 10 pdc5 figs-activepassive γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου, ὡς ἐν οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ γῆς 1 Let your will also be done on earth as it is in heaven If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May everything on earth happen in accordance with your will just as everything in heaven does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ MAT 6 22 hvrq figs-exmetaphor ἐὰν οὖν ᾖ ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου MAT 6 23 dl86 figs-exmetaphor ἐὰν δὲ ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου πονηρὸς ᾖ, ὅλον τὸ σῶμά σου σκοτεινὸν ἔσται. εἰ οὖν τὸ φῶς τὸ ἐν σοὶ σκότος, ἐστίν τὸ σκότος πόσον 1 But if your eye … how great is that darkness Jesus continues to draw an extended comparison between physical vision and spiritual receptivity. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the comparison. Alternate translation: “But when your eye is unhealthy, it does not let light into any of your body. In the same way, if you are not willing to obey God, you will not understand and live by his message for any part of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) MAT 6 24 z5ol figs-genericnoun οὐδεὶς 1 Jesus is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “No person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 6 24 ijn3 figs-parallelism ἢ γὰρ τὸν ἕνα μισήσει καὶ τὸν ἕτερον ἀγαπήσει, ἢ ἑνὸς ἀνθέξεται καὶ τοῦ ἑτέρου καταφρονήσει 1 for either he will hate the one and love the other, or else he will be devoted to one and will despise the other Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that a person cannot love and be devoted both to God and money at the same time. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “For he will obey one of them and disobey the other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MAT 6 24 zt2u figs-personification οὐ δύνασθε Θεῷ δουλεύειν καὶ μαμωνᾷ 1 You are not able to serve God and wealth Here, **money** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who someone could serve. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “You are not able to serve God and completely desire riches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +MAT 6 24 zt2u figs-personification οὐ δύνασθε Θεῷ δουλεύειν καὶ μαμωνᾷ 1 You are not able to serve God and wealth Here, **money** is spoken of as though it were a person who someone could serve. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “You are not able to serve God and completely desire riches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) MAT 6 25 s5uy figs-you ὑμῖν…ὑμῶν…φάγητε…πίητε…ὑμῶν…ἐνδύσησθε 1 Here the instances of **you** and **your** are all plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 6 25 nt96 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἡ ψυχὴ πλεῖόν ἐστι τῆς τροφῆς, καὶ τὸ σῶμα τοῦ ἐνδύματος? 1 Is not life more than food, and the body more than clothing? Jesus uses a question to teach the people about what is important in life. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Life is much more than just food, and the body is much more than just what you wear!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 6 26 a9w6 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ MAT 7 intro bz7e 0 # Matthew 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatti MAT 7 1 xk6w figs-explicit μὴ κρίνετε 1 Do not judge It is implied here that **judge** has a strong negative meaning. Jesus is not saying that judgment is always bad, but that in this case it is negative. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Do not condemn people harshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 7 1 bk8y figs-activepassive μὴ κριθῆτε 1 you may not be judged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will not condemn you harshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 7 2 kj24 figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ…κρίματι κρίνετε, κριθήσεσθε 1 with the judgment you judge, you will be judged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will condemn you in the same way you condemn others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 7 2 ifm3 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ᾧ γὰρ κρίματι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “In the manner that you judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MAT 7 2 ifm3 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ᾧ γὰρ κρίματι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “In the manner that you judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 7 2 tbi8 figs-explicit κρίνετε…μετρεῖτε 1 Here, Jesus leaves out that **you judge** and **you measure** is being done to other people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you judge other people…you measure other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 7 2 wmxo figs-metaphor καὶ ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, μετρηθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 To **measure** someone is to hold them up to a high standard. Here, Jesus is saying that they are holding others up by too high of a standard. If your readers would not understand what **measure** means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “with the standard of behavior that you expect of other people, God will expect of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 7 2 c006 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **judgement**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “In the manner that you judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **measure**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “In the manner that you measure other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ MAT 7 3 q1z4 figs-metaphor τὴν…ἐν τῷ σῷ ὀφθαλμῷ δοκ MAT 7 3 xdcg figs-hyperbole τὴν…ἐν τῷ σῷ ὀφθαλμῷ δοκὸν οὐ κατανοεῖς 1 the log that is in your own eye A **log** cannot fit into a person's eye. Jesus is exaggerating to emphasize that a person should pay attention to their own more offensive sins before he deals with another person’s less offensive sins. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows this exaggeration. Alternate translation: “you do not see your own very offensive sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 7 4 k58h figs-rquestion ἢ πῶς ἐρεῖς τῷ ἀδελφῷ σου, ἄφες ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ σου, καὶ ἰδοὺ, ἡ δοκὸς ἐν τῷ ὀφθαλμῷ σοῦ? 1 Or how will you say to your brother, ‘Let me take out the speck from your eye,’ while behold, the log is in your own eye? Jesus asks this question to challenge the people to pay attention to their own sins before they pay attention to another person’s sins. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You should not say to your brother, ‘Let me take out the speck from your eye,’ while there is log in your own eye.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 7 6 wohg figs-metaphor μὴ δῶτε τὸ ἅγιον τοῖς κυσίν, μηδὲ βάλητε τοὺς μαργαρίτας ὑμῶν ἔμπροσθεν τῶν χοίρων 1 Here, to **give what is holy** and to **throw your pearls** means to share about God with people. The message about God is seen as very valuable and holy. Also, **dogs** and **pigs** are figurative for people who would reject this message. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Do not share the holy message about God with people who would hurt you, nor should you try to share the valuable message about God with people who do not care to listen to it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 7 6 xy2e translate-unknown τοὺς μαργαρίτας 1 pearls These pearls are beautiful and valuable mineral balls that people use as jewelry. They are formed inside the shell of a small animal that lives in the ocean. If your readers would not be familiar with pearls, you could express this idea in a more general way. Alternate translation: “decorations made from valuable materials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])\n\n +MAT 7 6 xy2e translate-unknown τοὺς μαργαρίτας 1 pearls These pearls are beautiful and valuable mineral balls that people use as jewelry. They are formed inside the shell of a small animal that lives in the ocean. If your readers would not be familiar with pearls, you could express this idea in a more general way. Alternate translation: “decorations made from valuable materials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 7 7 ut6i figs-parallelism αἰτεῖτε καὶ δοθήσεται ὑμῖν; ζητεῖτε καὶ εὑρήσετε; κρούετε καὶ ἀνοιγήσεται ὑμῖν 1 Ask … Seek … Knock Here, **Ask**, **seek**, and **knock** have a similar meaning of praying to God. If saying the same thing three times might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Pray to God for what you need, and he will give it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 7 7 tv49 figs-activepassive δοθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 it will be given to you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will give it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 7 7 rt8g figs-explicit κρούετε 1 Knock To **knock** on a door is a polite way to request that the person inside the house or room open the door. If knocking on a door is impolite or not done in your culture, use the word that describes how people politely ask for people to let you into their house. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “knock on the door” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ MAT 7 15 lj5v figs-metaphor οἵτινες ἔρχονται πρὸς ὑμᾶ MAT 7 16 pul5 figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς 1 By their fruits you will know them Here, **their fruits** is referring to a person's actions before God. Just as a good tree produces good fruit and a bad tree produces bad fruit, so a person who loves God will obey him and a person who does not love God will not obey him. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “Just as you know a tree by the fruit that grows on it, you will know false prophets by the fact that they do not speak the words of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 7 16 nve4 figs-rquestion μήτι συλλέγουσιν ἀπὸ ἀκανθῶν σταφυλὰς, ἢ ἀπὸ τριβόλων σῦκα? 1 they do not gather grapes from a thornbush or figs from thistles, do they? Jesus uses a question to teach the people about false prophets. The people would have known that the answer is no. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “People do not gather grapes from a thornbush or figs from thistles.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 7 17 f5l3 figs-metaphor οὕτως πᾶν δένδρον ἀγαθὸν καρποὺς καλοὺς ποιεῖ; τὸ δὲ σαπρὸν δένδρον καρποὺς πονηροὺς ποιεῖ 1 the rotten tree produces bad fruit Jesus continues to use the metaphor of **fruit** to refer to bad prophets who produce evil works. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation “Just as when a good tree bears good fruit and a bad tree bears bad fruit, so those who preach God's words do good and those who do not preach God's words do evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 7 19 xwrm figs-metaphor πᾶν δένδρον μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται 1 Every tree not producing good fruit is cut down and thrown into the fire Here, Jesus continues talking figuratively about **trees**. He is saying that those who do not preach God's words will be judged by him. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation “And just as every bad tree which does not bear good fruit is cut down and thrown into the fire, so everyone who disobeys God will be judged by him forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 7 19 xwrm figs-metaphor πᾶν δένδρον μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται 1 Every tree not producing good fruit is cut down and thrown into the fire Here, Jesus continues talking about **trees**. He is saying that those who do not preach God's words will be judged by him. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation “And just as every bad tree which does not bear good fruit is cut down and thrown into the fire, so everyone who disobeys God will be judged by him forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 7 19 g7fs figs-activepassive ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται 1 is cut down and thrown into the fire If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people cut down and throw them into a fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 7 20 x87m figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς 1 you will recognize them from their fruits See how you translated this in [7:16](../07/16.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 7 21 dkh7 figs-exclamations Κύριε, Κύριε 1 Here, **Lord, Lord** is an exclamation that shows that these people think that Jesus is their master. This is what a servant would say to their master. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “My Lord!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) @@ -405,7 +405,7 @@ MAT 7 26 o85y figs-activepassive ὁμοιωθήσεται ἀνδρὶ μωρ MAT 7 27 k4hi figs-abstractnouns ἦν ἡ πτῶσις αὐτῆς μεγάλη 1 its destruction was great If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **destruction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the waters and the wind greatly destroyed it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 7 28 jrh7 writing-endofstory 0 General Information: This verse describe how the people in the crowds reacted to Jesus’ teaching. This marks the end of the Sermon on the Mount. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) MAT 7 28 fo8g figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of boldness, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we may be bold” or “we may act boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **teaching**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by the way that he taught them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MAT 8 intro f33a 0 # Matthew 8 General Notes\n\n## Figures of Speech\n\n### Metonymy\n\nMetonymy is used often in this chapter to refer to people. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n\n### Rhetorical Questions\n\nJesus uses rhetorical questions in this chapter to ask his listeners questions that will make think deeply about what he is saying. Often when rhetorical questions are used, Jesus is being emphatic. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### Idiom\n\nIdioms are often used in this chapter. These may not be understood by your audience, as they were sayings that only people in that culture would have understood. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])\n +MAT 8 intro f33a 0 # Matthew 8 General Notes

## Figures of Speech

### Metonymy

Metonymy is used often in this chapter to refer to people. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

### Rhetorical Questions

Jesus uses rhetorical questions in this chapter to ask his listeners questions that will make think deeply about what he is saying. Often when rhetorical questions are used, Jesus is being emphatic. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Idiom

Idioms are often used in this chapter. These may not be understood by your audience, as they were sayings that only people in that culture would have understood. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 8 1 qb1d writing-newevent δὲ 1 General Information: This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 8 2 vas8 writing-participants ἰδοὺ, λεπρὸς προσελθὼν 1 behold This introduces the **leper** as a new character in the story. A leper is a person with a skin disease. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Since he is a new participant, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a common way in your language for introducing a new person to a story. Alternate translation: “There was a man who was a leper approaching him" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) MAT 8 2 yc3f grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν θέλῃς δύνασαί με καθαρίσαι 1 if you would be willing The leper is using a hypothetical situation to show that he believes Jesus will heal him. Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “If you would desire to heal me, you are able to do it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ MAT 8 8 hig7 figs-metonymy εἰπὲ λόγῳ 1 speak a word Here, **speak** i MAT 8 8 rk1z figs-activepassive ἰαθήσεται ὁ παῖς μου 1 will be healed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will make my servant well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 8 9 ds2m figs-activepassive ἐγὼ ἄνθρωπός εἰμι ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν, τασσόμενος ἔχων ὑπ’ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας 1 I … am a man under authority, having soldiers placed under me If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am a man who is under the authority of someone else, and I myself authority over a group of soldiers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 8 9 da25 figs-idiom ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν…ὑπ’ ἐμαυτὸν 1 under authority … under me To be **under** someone means to be less important and to obey the commands of someone of a higher status. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “who obeys other people's commands…who obey me (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 8 9 qz61 figs-idiom καὶ ἄλλῳ…καὶ τῷ δούλῳ μου 1 The centurion is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and to another I say…and to my servant I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 8 9 qz61 figs-idiom καὶ ἄλλῳ…καὶ τῷ δούλῳ μου 1 The centurion is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and to another I say…and to my servant I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 8 10 c7y6 figs-explicit παρ’ οὐδενὶ τοσαύτην πίστιν ἐν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ εὗρον 1 I have found such great faith from no one in Israel Jesus’ hearers would have thought that the Jews in **Israel**, who claim to be children of God, would have greater **faith** than anyone. Jesus is saying that the centurion’s faith was greater. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have found such faith from no one in Israel, who should have more faith (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 8 10 fjgc figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 Here, the name **Israel** is not referring to the country, but to the people who live in Israel. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “among the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 8 11 xee4 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 you Here, **you** is plural and refers to “those who were following him” in [8:10](../08/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -466,7 +466,7 @@ MAT 8 31 cgf7 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us Here, **us** is exclusive, referrin MAT 8 33 ev2w figs-activepassive τὰ τῶν δαιμονιζομένων 1 the things concerning the men who were possessed by demons If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what Jesus did to help the men whom demons were controlling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 8 34 j6sp figs-metonymy πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 the whole city The word **city** is a metonym for the people of the city. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “all the people who lived in the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 8 34 xb5x figs-hyperbole πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 the whole city The word **whole** is an exaggeration to emphasize how very many people came out to see Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows this. Alternate translation: “many of the people in the city (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MAT 9 intro tg41 0 # Matthew 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure\n\n## Formatting\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n## Figures of Speech\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n +MAT 9 intro tg41 0 # Matthew 9 General Notes

## Structure

## Formatting

## Special concepts in this chapter

## Figures of Speech

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter MAT 9 1 lje9 figs-explicit διεπέρασεν 1 into his own city Here, Matthew does not specify that Jesus **crossed over** the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he crossed over the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 9 2 i6xp writing-newevent ἰδοὺ 1 behold Here, **behold** introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “When they arrived in Jesus' town” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 9 2 szd4 translate-unknown παραλυτικὸν 1 they were bringing See how you translated **paralytic** in [4:24](../04/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ MAT 9 20 gv15 figs-euphemism αἱμορροοῦσα 1 suffering from a dischar MAT 9 20 m9zq figs-extrainfo ἥψατο τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ 1 of his garment Matthew does not explain why she **touched the edge of his garment**. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) MAT 9 21 eb6t writing-background ἔλεγεν γὰρ ἐν ἑαυτῇ, ἐὰν μόνον ἅψωμαι τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ, σωθήσομαι. 1 for she was saying to herself, “If only I might touch his garments, I will be made well.” This verse tells us why she touched Jesus' garment. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “She did this because she was thinking to herself, ‘If I just touch his garments, then he will heal me’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 9 21 ukb8 figs-activepassive σωθήσομαι 1 If only I might touch his garments If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he will make me well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 9 22 x398 translate-kinship θύγατερ 1 Daughter Jesus was using this term figuratively to refer to the woman as a believer. She was not actually his daughter. Make sure this is understood by your readers. Alternate translation: “Beloved woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) +MAT 9 22 x398 translate-kinship θύγατερ 1 Daughter Jesus was using this term to refer to the woman as a believer. She was not actually his daughter. Make sure this is understood by your readers. Alternate translation: “Beloved woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) MAT 9 22 q6ca figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 your faith has saved you Here, **faith** is spoken of as having **saved** a person. This is figurative, meaning that because she believed that Jesus was able to heal her, he did heal her. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “because you believed I have healed you, I have healed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) MAT 9 22 zv2n figs-activepassive ἐσώθη ἡ γυνὴ ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 1 the woman was healed from that very hour If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed the woman at that moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 9 23 jae1 translate-symaction ἰδὼν τοὺς αὐλητὰς καὶ τὸν ὄχλον θορυβούμενον 1 the flute players and the crowd being stirred up There were **flute players** at the house because it was customary in that culture to play the flute in a time of mourning. If you think your readers might not understand the significance of these actions, you could explain generally what the people were doing. Or you could describe the actions and say why the people were doing them. Alternate translation: “having see the flute players and the upset crowd performing their mourning rituals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) @@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ MAT 9 25 nqs6 figs-activepassive ὅτε δὲ ἐξεβλήθη ὁ ὄχλος MAT 9 25 r7zs grammar-connect-time-sequential ὅτε δὲ ἐξεβλήθη ὁ ὄχλος 1 Here, **when** is showing that Jesus did not enter the house until after he made the family leave. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After Jesus made the family go out of the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) MAT 9 25 mm3q figs-activepassive ἠγέρθη τὸ κοράσιον 1 was raised up If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus raised the girl from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 9 26 rxs4 figs-personification καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἡ φήμη αὕτη εἰς ὅλην τὴν γῆν ἐκείνην 1 And this report went out into all that region Here, **this report** is said to have **gone out** as a person might go out from a place. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “People reported what Jesus had done to the whole region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -MAT 9 26 pfq3 figs-synecdoche εἰς ὅλην τὴν γῆν ἐκείνην 1 Jesus refers figuratively to the **region** to mean the people who live in that region. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to many of the people in that region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 9 26 pfq3 figs-synecdoche εἰς ὅλην τὴν γῆν ἐκείνην 1 Jesus refers to the **region** to mean the people who live in that region. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to many of the people in that region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 9 27 d8bu figs-explicit ἐλέησον ἡμᾶς 1 Have mercy on us Here, **have mercy** means that they want Jesus to heal them from their blindness. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Heal us from our blindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 9 27 dh5d translate-kinship Υἱὲ Δαυείδ 1 Son of David Jesus was not David's literal **Son**, but his descendant. The title **Son of David** is also an important messianic title. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “Descendant of King David, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) MAT 9 28 e81f figs-ellipsis ναί, Κύριε 1 Yes, Lord The two blind men are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, we believe you can heal us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ MAT 9 35 x9ck figs-hyperbole τὰς πόλεις πάσας 1 all the cities Th MAT 9 35 uz5e figs-abstractnouns κηρύσσων τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς βασιλείας 1 the gospel of the kingdom Here the abstract noun **kingdom** refers to God’s rule as king. See how you translated this in [4:23](../04/23.md). Alternate translation: “preaching the good news that God will make them one of his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 9 35 e7at figs-hendiadys πᾶσαν νόσον καὶ πᾶσαν μαλακίαν 1 every disease and every sickness This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use and. Alternate translation: “many different kinds of illnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) MAT 9 36 t47i figs-simile ὡσεὶ πρόβατα μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα 1 like sheep not having a shepherd Jesus compares the people sheep to who do not have a shepherd to lead them and take care of them. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “they did not have someone to lead them and take care of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MAT 9 37 al89 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 21, 30, 37, 40 and 44. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])" To call attention to a development in the story, Matthew uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])" +MAT 9 37 al89 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 21, 30, 37, 40 and 44. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])" To call attention to a development in the story, Matthew uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])" MAT 9 37 mur4 writing-proverbs ὁ μὲν θερισμὸς πολύς, οἱ δὲ ἐργάται ὀλίγοι 1 The harvest is plentiful, but the laborers are few Jesus uses a proverb to respond to what he is seeing. Jesus means there are a lot of people who are ready to believe God but only few people to teach them God’s truth. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 9 37 kxap translate-unknown ἐργάται 1 Here, **laborers** is a word that refers to people who work in a field to bring in food. Use a term in your language for this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 9 38 vz8y figs-possession δεήθητε…τοῦ Κυρίου τοῦ θερισμοῦ 1 beg the Lord of the harvest Here, **of** means that the harvest belongs to the Lord, and that he has control over it. If this is not clear in your language, you could state this in a clearer way. Alternate translation: “beg the Lord, who is in charge of the harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ MAT 10 24 syb2 figs-ellipsis οὐδὲ δοῦλος ὑπὲρ τὸν κύρ MAT 10 25 e6z3 figs-ellipsis ὁ δοῦλος ὡς ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ 1 the slave like his master Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “it is enough for a slave to be like his master” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 10 25 pu5y figs-metaphor εἰ τὸν οἰκοδεσπότην Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐπεκάλεσαν 1 the master of the house Jesus refers to himself as **the master of the house**. This is figurative, meaning that he is the most important person among the group of him and disciples. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “If they call me, who is like the master of the house, Beelzebul” or “If they call me, who is more important, Beelzebul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 10 25 y5md translate-transliterate Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 Beelzebul The name **Beelzebul** could be translated: (1) as “Beelzebul” or (2) with its original, intended meaning of “Satan”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) -MAT 10 25 r5ll figs-metaphor τοὺς οἰκιακοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 the members of his household Here, **the members of his household** is figuratively referring to Jesus' disciples. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “Jesus' disciples, who are like the members of his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 10 25 r5ll figs-metaphor τοὺς οἰκιακοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 the members of his household Here, **the members of his household** is referring to Jesus' disciples. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “Jesus' disciples, who are like the members of his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 10 26 x4o8 figs-parallelism οὐδὲν…ἐστιν κεκαλυμμένον ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται, καὶ κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ γνωσθήσεται 1 there is nothing concealed that will not be revealed, and hidden, that will not be made known Here, **there is nothing concealed that will not be revealed** means the same thing as **hidden, that will not be made known**. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “there is nothing hidden that will not be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 10 26 cnzb writing-proverbs οὐδὲν γάρ ἐστιν κεκαλυμμένον ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται, καὶ κρυπτὸν ὃ οὐ γνωσθήσεται 1 Here, Jesus uses a proverb to teach his disciples. Jesus is explaining that all of the evil which people have done in secret, God will reveal when he judges people. you can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 10 26 xqs4 figs-doublenegatives οὐδὲν…ἐστιν κεκαλυμμένον ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφθήσεται 1 there is nothing concealed that will not be revealed, and hidden, that will not be made known If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “everything which is hidden will be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) @@ -609,7 +609,7 @@ MAT 10 27 kw75 figs-metonymy ὃ λέγω ὑμῖν ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ, MAT 10 27 fc49 figs-idiom ὃ εἰς τὸ οὖς ἀκούετε 1 what you hear in your ear Here, **what you hear in {your} ear** is a way of referring to whispering. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “what I whisper to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 10 27 v1b7 figs-metonymy κηρύξατε ἐπὶ τῶν δωμάτων 1 Here, **housetops** refers to any high place where all people can hear a person speaking. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “speak loudly in a public place where many people can hear you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 10 28 pk7k grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 2 But instead, fear the one who is able Matthew contrasts people with God by using the word **but**. People are only able to kill our physical bodies, but God **is able** to kill both our physical bodies and our spiritual souls. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “But rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -MAT 10 28 w5rq figs-metaphor Γεέννῃ 1 Jesus figuratively uses the name of **Gehenna**, where refuse was thrown and fires burned continually, to mean hell. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “Hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 10 28 w5rq figs-metaphor Γεέννῃ 1 Jesus uses the name of **Gehenna**, where refuse was thrown and fires burned continually, to mean hell. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “Hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 10 28 x3y1 translate-names Γεέννῃ 1 Gehenna is the name for a place, the Valley of Hinnom just outside Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 10 29 tm3s writing-proverbs οὐχὶ δύο στρουθία ἀσσαρίου πωλεῖται? καὶ ἓν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐ πεσεῖται ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, ἄνευ τοῦ Πατρὸς ὑμῶν 1 Are not two sparrows sold for an assarion? Jesus uses this proverb to express that even though sparrows are worth very little money, God still watches over them because he created them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 10 29 glbl figs-rquestion οὐχὶ δύο στρουθία ἀσσαρίου πωλεῖται? 1 Are not two sparrows sold for an assarion? Jesus uses this question to teach his disciples about how much God cares about them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Sparrows have so little value that you can buy two of them for only one small coin.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -640,7 +640,7 @@ MAT 10 40 y9ck figs-metaphor ὁ ἐμὲ δεχόμενος δέχεται τ MAT 10 41 f9pv writing-proverbs ὁ δεχόμενος προφήτην εἰς ὄνομα προφήτου, μισθὸν προφήτου λήμψεται; καὶ ὁ δεχόμενος δίκαιον εἰς ὄνομα δικαίου, μισθὸν δικαίου λήμψεται 1 in the name of a prophet Jesus tells this proverb to show how important it is for people to receive his disciples. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “People who welcome one of God's prophets, God will reward him as a he rewards the prophets. And people who welcome someone who obeys God, God will reward him like that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 10 41 yj1q figs-explicit ὁ δεχόμενος προφήτην εἰς ὄνομα προφήτου, μισθὸν προφήτου λήμψεται; καὶ ὁ δεχόμενος δίκαιον εἰς ὄνομα δικαίου, μισθὸν δικαίου λήμψεται 1 a reward of a prophet This **reward** is referring to living with God forever. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “To the one who receives the prophet, God will give him the reward of living with him forever, as he gives to the prophets. And to the one who receives the person who obeys God, God will give to him the reward of living with him forever, which he gives to those who obey him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 10 42 v6jg figs-genericnoun ὃς ἐὰν ποτίσῃ 1 whoever might give … to drink Jesus is speaking of people in general, not of one particular person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “If a person gives…to drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -MAT 10 42 z8tk ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων 1 to one of these little ones The phrase **these little ones** refers figuratively to Jesus’ disciples. If your readers would not understand what **little ones** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “one of my disciples, who are like my children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 10 42 z8tk ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων 1 to one of these little ones The phrase **these little ones** refers to Jesus’ disciples. If your readers would not understand what **little ones** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “one of my disciples, who are like my children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 10 42 d61l figs-explicit τὸν μισθὸν αὐτοῦ 1 he may certainly not lose See the note on **reward** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 11 intro puf4 0 # Matthew 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 11:10.

Some scholars believe that [Matthew 11:20](../mat/11/20.md) begins a new stage in the ministry of Christ because of Israel’s rejection of him.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hidden revelation

After [Matthew 11:20](../mat/11/20.md), Jesus begins to reveal information about himself and about the plans of God the Father, while hiding this information from those who reject him ([Matthew 11:25](../mat/11/25.md)).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “The kingdom of heaven is near”

No one knows for sure whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use The phrase **at hand**, but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases “is coming near” and “has come near.” MAT 11 1 z2y7 writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 General Information: **And it happened** is the beginning of a new part of the story where Matthew tells of how Jesus responded to disciples of John the Baptist. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -657,7 +657,7 @@ MAT 11 5 k796 figs-activepassive νεκροὶ ἐγείρονται 1 the dead MAT 11 5 g3k4 figs-activepassive πτωχοὶ εὐαγγελίζονται 1 the poor are being told the gospel If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that he did it. Alternate translation: “I am telling the poor good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 11 7 d4lo figs-explicit τούτων δὲ πορευομένων 1 Here, the word **these** refers to John's disciples. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “As John's disciples left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 11 7 ysq6 figs-rquestion τί ἐξήλθατε εἰς τὴν ἔρημον θεάσασθαι? κάλαμον ὑπὸ ἀνέμου σαλευόμενον? 1 What did you go out in the wilderness to see—a reed being shaken by the wind? Jesus uses a question to cause the people to think about what kind of person John the Baptist is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely you did not go out to the wilderness to see a reed being shaken by the wind!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 11 7 ydn2 figs-metaphor κάλαμον ὑπὸ ἀνέμου σαλευόμενον 1 Here, the phrase **reed being shaken by the wind** is figuratively referring to a person who is easily affected by the people around them as a reed is affected by the wind. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context, you could use a simile, as in the UST. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “a man who is easily affected by other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 11 7 ydn2 figs-metaphor κάλαμον ὑπὸ ἀνέμου σαλευόμενον 1 Here, the phrase **reed being shaken by the wind** is referring to a person who is easily affected by the people around them as a reed is affected by the wind. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context, you could use a simile, as in the UST. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “a man who is easily affected by other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 11 7 w269 figs-activepassive κάλαμον ὑπὸ ἀνέμου σαλευόμενον 1 being shaken by the wind If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a reed which the wind is blowing around” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 11 8 n5hx figs-rquestion ἀλλὰ τί ἐξήλθατε ἰδεῖν? ἄνθρωπον ἐν μαλακοῖς ἠμφιεσμένον? 1 But what did you go out to see—a man dressed in soft clothing? Jesus uses these questions to cause the people to think about what kind of person John the Baptist is. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Likewise, surely you did not go out to see a man clothed in expensive clothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 11 8 y24r figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τί ἐξήλθατε ἰδεῖν 1 dressed in soft clothing Here, Jesus leaves out the word “desert” from the previous verse. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “But what did you go out to the desert to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -694,7 +694,7 @@ MAT 11 19 vwk4 writing-proverbs καὶ ἐδικαιώθη ἡ σοφία ἀπ MAT 11 19 o3zh figs-activepassive ἐδικαιώθη ἡ σοφία ἀπὸ τῶν τέκνων αὐτῆς 1 wisdom has been justified by her children If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God proves his wisdom by his children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 11 20 w4g8 figs-metonymy ὀνειδίζειν τὰς πόλεις 1 to rebuke the cities Here, **the cities** refers to the people who live in the cities. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to scold the people of the cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 11 20 t51a figs-activepassive ἐν αἷς ἐγένοντο αἱ πλεῖσται δυνάμεις αὐτοῦ 1 in which most of his miracles were done If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in which he did most of his miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 11 21 xxb3 figs-apostrophe οὐαί σοι, Χοραζείν! οὐαί σοι, Βηθσαϊδάν! 1 Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! Jesus is figuratively addressing something that he knows cannot hear him, the cities of **Chorazin** and **Bethsaida**, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. If this is confusing in your language, consider expressing this feeling by talking about these two cities. Alternate translation: “It will not be good for the cities of Chorazin and Bethsaida” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) +MAT 11 21 xxb3 figs-apostrophe οὐαί σοι, Χοραζείν! οὐαί σοι, Βηθσαϊδάν! 1 Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! Jesus is addressing something that he knows cannot hear him, the cities of **Chorazin** and **Bethsaida**, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. If this is confusing in your language, consider expressing this feeling by talking about these two cities. Alternate translation: “It will not be good for the cities of Chorazin and Bethsaida” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) MAT 11 21 y2hr figs-exclamations οὐαί σοι…οὐαί σοι 2 The phrase **Woe to you** is a common exclamation which brings a charge of judgement against a person or group of people. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “Judgement is coming against you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) MAT 11 21 y9d3 figs-metonymy Χοραζείν…Βηθσαϊδάν…Τύρῳ…Σιδῶνι 1 Chorazin … Bethsaida … Tyre … Sidon Here, the words **Chorazin**, **Bethsaida**, **Tyre and Sidon** refers to the people who live in those cities. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 11 21 lh46 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν, πάλαι ἂν ἐν σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ μετενόησαν 1 if the miracles … they would have repented long ago in sackcloth and ashes Jesus is using this hypothetical situation to rebuke the people in those cities. Alternate translation: “suppose the miracles were done among Tyre and Sidon which I did among you. Then they surely would have repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) @@ -703,7 +703,7 @@ MAT 11 21 k3in figs-you αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν 1 which were d MAT 11 22 mr18 figs-metonymy Χοραζείν…Βηθσαϊδάν…Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι 1 it will be more tolerable for Tyre and Sidon at the day of judgment than for you See how you translated **Tyre** and **Sidon** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 11 22 ibpo figs-explicit ἢ ὑμῖν 1 than for you The reason why it will be **more tolerable** is because Chorazin and Bethsaida did see Jesus' miracles, and they still did not repent. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “than for you, because you did not repent and believe in me, even though you saw me do miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 11 23 vpz6 figs-you καὶ σύ, Καφαρναούμ, μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ? ἕως ᾍδου καταβήσῃ; ὅτι εἰ ἐν Σοδόμοις ἐγενήθησαν αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν σοί, ἔμεινεν ἂν μέχρι τῆς σήμερον 1 And you, Capernaum, you will not be exalted to heaven, will you? You will be brought down to Hades. For if the miracles that were done in you had been done in Sodom, it would have remained until today The pronoun **you** is singular and refers to Capernaum throughout this verse and the next. If it is more natural to refer to the people of the city, you could translate with a plural **you**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 11 23 h8e4 figs-apostrophe καὶ σύ, Καφαρναούμ μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ 1 Jesus is figuratively addressing something that he knows cannot hear him, the city of Jerusalem, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. If this is confusing in your language, consider expressing this feeling by talking about Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “I am very upset with the city of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) Jesus is figuratively addressing something that he knows cannot hear him, the city of Capernaum, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. If this is confusing in your language, consider expressing this feeling by talking about Capernaum. Alternate translation: “Certainly Capernaum will not be lifted up to heaven, will it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) +MAT 11 23 h8e4 figs-apostrophe καὶ σύ, Καφαρναούμ μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ 1 Jesus is addressing something that he knows cannot hear him, the city of Jerusalem, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. If this is confusing in your language, consider expressing this feeling by talking about Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “I am very upset with the city of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) Jesus is addressing something that he knows cannot hear him, the city of Capernaum, in order to show his listeners in a strong way how he feels about it. If this is confusing in your language, consider expressing this feeling by talking about Capernaum. Alternate translation: “Certainly Capernaum will not be lifted up to heaven, will it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) MAT 11 23 fj7d figs-metonymy Καφαρναούμ…Σοδόμοις 1 Capernaum … Sodom Here the words **Capernaum** and **Sodom** are referring to the people who live in those cities. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “people of Capernaum…people of Sodom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 11 23 aa7t figs-activepassive μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ? 1 you will not be exalted to heaven, will you? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: Alternate translation: “God will not raise you up to heaven, will he?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 11 23 nddz figs-rquestion μὴ ἕως οὐρανοῦ ὑψωθήσῃ? 1 you will not be exalted to heaven, will you? Jesus uses a rhetorical question to rebuke the people of Capernaum for their pride, because the think they deserve to be taken straight to heaven. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “God will certainly not bring you up to heaven like you think he will!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -736,24 +736,24 @@ MAT 11 30 ynf1 figs-parallelism ὁ γὰρ ζυγός μου χρηστὸς κ MAT 12 intro y7z6 0 # Matthew 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:18-21, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Sabbath

This chapter has much to say about how God’s people are to obey the Sabbath. Jesus said that the rules that the Pharisees made up did not help people obey the Sabbath the way God wanted them to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

### “Blasphemy against the Spirit”

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Brothers and sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]]) MAT 12 1 m2n1 writing-newevent ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 1 At that time This introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 12 1 tvt9 translate-unknown τῶν σπορίμων 1 the grainfields A grainfield is a place where grain is grown and harvested. This grain is usually turned into bread. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a field where grain is grown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 12 1 y5vr figs-explicit στάχυας 1 heads of grain The **heads** are the topmost part of the wheat plant, which is a kind of tall grass. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant. The disciples were picking the heads of grain to eat the kernels, or seeds, in them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, think of a type of food that you have to remove from a shell or casing. Alternate translation: “picking the tops of grain and eating the seeds”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n +MAT 12 1 y5vr figs-explicit στάχυας 1 heads of grain The **heads** are the topmost part of the wheat plant, which is a kind of tall grass. The heads hold the mature grain or seeds of the plant. The disciples were picking the heads of grain to eat the kernels, or seeds, in them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, think of a type of food that you have to remove from a shell or casing. Alternate translation: “picking the tops of grain and eating the seeds”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 2 swl7 figs-explicit ποιοῦσιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν ποιεῖν ἐν Σαββάτῳ 1 do what is not lawful to do on the Sabbath According to the law of Moses, people are not allowed to work on the Sabbath in order to focus on worshipping God. The Pharisees considered even the small action of plucking and rubbing heads of grain to be work. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You are harvesting grain, and that is work that the law does not permit you to do on the Sabbath!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 3 d712 figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε τί ἐποίησεν Δαυεὶδ, ὅτε ἐπείνασεν καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Have you never read what David did, when he was hungry, and those who were with him— This begins a question that continues into the next verse. See the note in the next verse for how to address this rhetorical question. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 4 u3ye figs-rquestion πῶς εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως ἔφαγεν, ὃ οὐκ ἐξὸν ἦν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν, οὐδὲ τοῖς μετ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν μόνοις 1 Jesus asks this question to respond to the criticism of the Pharisees. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly you have read what David did when he and those with him were hungry, how he went into the God's house and ate the bread of the presence, which they was not allowed to do. Only the priests were allowed to do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 12 4 blm5 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the house of God Jesus is figuratively describing the tabernacle as the house of God. He is speaking as if it were the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “David went into the tabernacle” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +MAT 12 4 blm5 figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the house of God Jesus is describing the tabernacle as the house of God. He is speaking as if it were the place where God lived, since God’s presence was there. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “David went into the tabernacle” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) MAT 12 4 ue7l figs-explicit τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως 1 the loaves of the presence This refers to the 12 loaves of bread that were placed on a golden table in the tabernacle or temple building as a sacrifice to God during Old Testament times. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the 12 loaves of the bread of the presence which were in the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 4 lkx9 figs-ellipsis εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν μόνοις 1 except only for the priests Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but it was only lawful for the priests to eat it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 12 5 f79q figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῷ νόμῳ, ὅτι τοῖς Σάββασιν οἱ ἱερεῖς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ τὸ Σάββατον βεβηλοῦσιν, καὶ ἀναίτιοί εἰσιν? 1 have you not read in the law that on the Sabbaths the priests in the temple profane the Sabbath, but are innocent? Jesus uses a question to respond to the criticism of the Pharisees. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Surely you have read in the law of Moses that on the Sabbaths the priests in the temple profane the Sabbath, but are innocent.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 5 dqe9 figs-explicit τὸ Σάββατον βεβηλοῦσιν 1 profane the Sabbath The priests are said to **profane the Sabbath** because they had to fulfill their priestly duties on the Sabbath. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “defile the Sabbath by working their priestly duties” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 6 k4mn figs-123person τοῦ ἱεροῦ μεῖζόν 1 greater than the temple Jesus was referring to himself as the one who is **greater than the temple** If it would be helpful to your readers, you can state this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I am someone who is more important than the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 12 7 ypj7 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ δὲ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν, ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 But if you had known what this is, ‘I desire mercy and not sacrifice,’ you would not have condemned the innocent Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach the Pharisees about why they were wrong for accusing Jesus' disciples of working on the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “Suppose you had understood what the phrase ‘I desire you to have mercy and not to sacrifice’ meant, then you certainly would not have condemned my innocent disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -MAT 12 7 e1ju ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν 1 I desire mercy and not sacrifice In the law of Moses, God did command the Israelites to offer sacrifices. This verse is saying that God would prefer the Israelites to have **mercy** than for them to have to offer a **sacrifice** for their sins. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “I would rather you be merciful to others than for you to continually offer sacrifices for your wrongful deeds. +MAT 12 7 e1ju ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν 1 I desire mercy and not sacrifice In the law of Moses, God did command the Israelites to offer sacrifices. This verse is saying that God would prefer the Israelites to have **mercy** than for them to have to offer a **sacrifice** for their sins. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “I would rather you be merciful to others than for you to continually offer sacrifices for your wrongful deeds. MAT 12 7 s23l figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 the innocent Jesus is using the adjective **innocent** as a noun in order to describe his disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are innocent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 12 8 l7g3 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself as the **Son of Man**. If your readers would not understand this, you can use the first person here to clarify, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 12 8 nca0 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 **Son of Man** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 12 9 y4me writing-pronouns εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν αὐτῶν 1 their synagogue The word **their** likely refers to the Pharisees who Jesus was just speaking to. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “into those Pharisees synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MAT 12 10 xb13 translate-unknown ἄνθρωπος χεῖρα ἔχων ξηράν 1 there was a man having a withered hand This means that the man’s hand was damaged in such a way that he could not stretch it out. It was probably bent almost into a fist, making it look smaller. State this in a way that would be understandable to your readers. Alternate translation: “his hand was shriveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 12 10 c1cc writing-background καὶ ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν …ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ 1 so that they might accuse him Here, Matthew is giving background information to help to reader understand why the Pharisees **questioned** Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “and they were questioning him … to try to find fault in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])\n +MAT 12 10 c1cc writing-background καὶ ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν …ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ 1 so that they might accuse him Here, Matthew is giving background information to help to reader understand why the Pharisees **questioned** Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “and they were questioning him … to try to find fault in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 12 11 ng4j figs-rquestion τίς ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν ἄνθρωπος, ὃς ἕξει πρόβατον ἕν, καὶ ἐὰν ἐμπέσῃ τοῦτο τοῖς Σάββασιν εἰς βόθυνον, οὐχὶ κρατήσει αὐτὸ καὶ ἐγερεῖ? 1 What man will there be among you, who, will have one sheep, and if it might fall into a pit on the Sabbaths, would not grasp hold of it and lift it out? Jesus uses a question to respond to the Pharisees. He is challenging them to think about what kind of work they do on the Sabbath. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Every one of you, if you only had one sheep, and it fell into a pit on the Sabbath, would certainly grab the sheep and lift it out.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 12 s2tu figs-rquestion πόσῳ οὖν διαφέρει ἄνθρωπος προβάτου? 1 How much more valuable, then, is a man than a sheep? Jesus asks this question to prove the point that the Pharisees would be willing to help a sheep, but not a person, on the Sabbath. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “A person is certainly more valuable than a sheep!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 13 be8u figs-imperative τότε λέγει τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ, ἔκτεινόν σου τὴν χεῖρα. 1 Then he says to the man, “Stretch out your hand.” This is an imperative, but this was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “Stretch out your hand! Be healed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) @@ -766,7 +766,7 @@ MAT 12 18 jh8p figs-abstractnouns κρίσιν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπα MAT 12 19 gj1p figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἐρίσει, οὐδὲ κραυγάσει 1 He will not strive … his Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “He will not strive with people, nor will he cry out loud to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 12 19 jr87 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς πλατείαις 1 in the streets Here, the phrase **in the streets** is an idiom that means in public. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the cities and towns where people are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 12 20 cdk2 figs-metaphor κάλαμον συντετριμμένον οὐ κατεάξει, καὶ λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει 1 He will not break a bruised reed; and he will not quench a smoking flax Both of the phrases **He will not break a bruised reed** and **and he will not quench a smoking flax** are metaphors emphasizing that God’s servant will be gentle and kind. Both **bruised reed** and **smoking flax** represent weak and hurting people. If your readers would not understand what these mean, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “He will be kind to weak people, and he will be gentle to those who are hurting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 12 20 kbu9 figs-parallelism κάλαμον συντετριμμένον οὐ κατεάξει, καὶ λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει 1 He will not break a bruised reed; and he will not quench a smoking flax Both of the phrases **He will not break a bruised reed** and **and he will not quench a smoking flax** mean the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “He will not destroy something already very weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +MAT 12 20 kbu9 figs-parallelism κάλαμον συντετριμμένον οὐ κατεάξει, καὶ λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει 1 He will not break a bruised reed; and he will not quench a smoking flax Both of the phrases **He will not break a bruised reed** and **and he will not quench a smoking flax** mean the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “He will not destroy something already very weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 12 20 y8mn translate-unknown λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ σβέσει 1 he will not quench a smoking flax Here, **flax** refers to a burning wick, or a small flame. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a small flame” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 12 20 b6tw figs-abstractnouns ἕως ἂν ἐκβάλῃ εἰς νῖκος τὴν κρίσιν 1 he may lead justice to victory If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **justice** or **victory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “until he would cause people to be justified before God, and cause them to be victorious over death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 12 21 w3rq figs-synecdoche τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 in his name Here, the word **name** refers to God himself. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -777,9 +777,9 @@ MAT 12 23 ink7 translate-unknown ὁ υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 the Son of David MAT 12 23 h8kf figs-metonymy υἱὸς 1 Son Here, the word **Son** is figurative for a descendant of someone. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “offspring (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 12 24 p1mi figs-doublenegatives οὗτος οὐκ ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια, εἰ μὴ ἐν τῷ Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 He does not cast out demons except by Beelzebul If it would appear in your language that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “He throws out demons only by the Beelzebul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) MAT 12 25 ckth figs-explicit εἰδὼς δὲ τὰς ἐνθυμήσεις αὐτῶν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 1 This phrase implies that Jesus had supernatural knowledge. It indicates that Jesus knew what the scribes were saying even though he did not hear what they said. If it would be helpful to your readers, your could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Even though no one told Jesus, he know their thoughts. So he said to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 12 25 i1sd writing-proverbs πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται, καὶ πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται  1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate, and every city or house divided against itself will not stand Jesus uses a proverb to respond to the Pharisees saying that he casts out demons by Beelzebul. Translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “If the people of a nation are fighting against each other, they will certainly cause its destruction. Similarly, if people of a city or even a house are fighting against each other, they will will not be united together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 12 25 i1sd writing-proverbs πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται, καὶ πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται  1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate, and every city or house divided against itself will not stand Jesus uses a proverb to respond to the Pharisees saying that he casts out demons by Beelzebul. Translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “If the people of a nation are fighting against each other, they will certainly cause its destruction. Similarly, if people of a city or even a house are fighting against each other, they will will not be united together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 12 25 ll42 figs-parallelism πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται…πᾶσα πόλις ἢ οἰκία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταθήσεται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate, and every city or house divided against itself will not stand The phrases **Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate** and **every city or house divided against itself will not stand** mean the same thing. Jesus says the same thing to show that if any group of people fights against each other, it will eventually loose its unity. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Any group of people fighting against each other will eventually fall apart and no longer be united” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MAT 12 25 g9ec figs-metonymy βασιλεία…πόλις ἢ οἰκία\n 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate Here, the words **kingdom**, **city**, refer figuratively to the people who live in them. The word **house** refers figuratively to a family, who would all live in the same house. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: "people who live in a nation … people who live in a city or house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 12 25 g9ec figs-metonymy βασιλεία…πόλις ἢ οἰκία 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate Here, the words **kingdom**, **city**, refer to the people who live in them. The word **house** refers to a family, who would all live in the same house. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: "people who live in a nation … people who live in a city or house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 12 25 rvzh figs-activepassive πᾶσα βασιλεία μερισθεῖσα καθ’ ἑαυτῆς ἐρημοῦται 1 Every kingdom divided against itself is made desolate If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People living in a country who fight against each other destroy their own country” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 12 26 i42r figs-metonymy Σατανᾶν 1 if Satan casts out Satan The second word **Satan** is figurative, referring to the demons that serve Satan. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the demons who serve Satan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 12 26 ah7t figs-rquestion πῶς οὖν σταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ 1 How then will his kingdom stand? Jesus uses this question to show the Pharisees that accusing Jesus of casting out demons by Satan is foolish. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “His kingdom will surely not stand!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -787,8 +787,8 @@ MAT 12 27 gee9 figs-rquestion οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβ MAT 12 27 x9je figs-metaphor οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν 1 your sons The phrase **your sons** refers to their the disciples of the Pharisees. If your readers would not understand what **sons** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “your disciples” or “your followers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 27 jja2 διὰ τοῦτο, αὐτοὶ κριταὶ ἔσονται ὑμῶν 1 For this reason they will be your judges The phrase **For this reason they will be your judges** could mean (1) that they will judge the Pharisees's accusations against Jesus to be wrong. Alternate translation: “Because of this your disciples will show that you are wrong". Or (2) they will stand with God at the end of time to judge the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “Because of this yours sons will be your judges” MAT 12 28 zb4d grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ ἐν Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ἐγὼ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 But if I Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what John is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But since I throw out demons by the Spirit of God, the kingdom of God has come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -MAT 12 28 r5dg figs-metonymy ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 then the kingdom of God has come upon you See how you translated **kingdom** in [3:2](../03/02.md).\nAlternate translation: “then God is make people a part of his people over whom he will rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n -MAT 12 29 t4vu figs-parables ἢ\n 1 how is anyone able to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings unless first he might have tied up the strong man? And then he will plunder his house This parable tells about how Jesus is binding Satan and his evil spirits, and saving the people whom he had controlled previously. Make sure it is clear to your readers that this is a story. Alternate translate: “Then Jesus told them a story, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 12 28 r5dg figs-metonymy ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 then the kingdom of God has come upon you See how you translated **kingdom** in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “then God is make people a part of his people over whom he will rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 12 29 t4vu figs-parables ἢ 1 how is anyone able to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings unless first he might have tied up the strong man? And then he will plunder his house This parable tells about how Jesus is binding Satan and his evil spirits, and saving the people whom he had controlled previously. Make sure it is clear to your readers that this is a story. Alternate translate: “Then Jesus told them a story, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 12 29 w54c figs-rquestion πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυρόν? 1 how is anyone able to enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings unless first he might have tied up the strong man? Jesus uses a question to teach the Pharisees and the crowd that he is more powerful than Satan. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly, no one can enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings without tying up the strong man first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 29 b2et figs-genericnoun τις 1 The word **anyone** is a generic noun, and is not referring to any specific person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 12 29 tsrk figs-metaphor πῶς δύναταί τις εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἁρπάσαι 1 To **enter into the house of the strong man and steal his belongings** is figurative. The **strong man** is referring to Satan. So to enter into his house and steal his belongings means to throw out his demons from people who they controlled. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “Someone cannot take from Satan the demons the belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -819,10 +819,10 @@ MAT 12 39 d8b9 figs-123person γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶ MAT 12 39 a5di figs-metaphor γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς 1 An … adulterous generation Here, **adulterous** is a metaphor for people who are not faithful to God in their relationship with him like a person who is not faithful in their relationship with a spouse. If your readers would not understand what **adulterous** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “An evil and unfaithful generation” or “an evil and unloving generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 39 j21p grammar-connect-exceptions καὶ σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ, εἰ μὴ τὸ σημεῖον Ἰωνᾶ τοῦ προφήτου 1 except the sign of Jonah the prophet If it would appear in your language that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “but the only sign that I will give will be the sign of the prophet Jonah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) MAT 12 39 c6hy figs-activepassive σημεῖον οὐ δοθήσεται αὐτῇ 1 no sign will be given to it If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will not give them a sign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 12 40 vh9i figs-merism τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας…τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας 2 three days and three nights The phrase **three days and three nights** is referring to three entire days If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “three complete days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +MAT 12 40 vh9i figs-merism τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας…τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας 2 three days and three nights The phrase **three days and three nights** is referring to three entire days If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “three complete days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) MAT 12 40 hzem figs-explicit ὥσπερ γὰρ ἦν Ἰωνᾶς ἐν τῇ κοιλίᾳ τοῦ κήτους τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας, οὕτως 1 The phrase **three days and three nights** refers to three entire day. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “three full days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) Jesus is assuming that his audience is familiar with the story of Jonah, which tells about how the prophet Jonah was swallowed by a fish because he disobeyed God. But once he repented, after three days, the fish spit him out. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could reference this story explicitly. Alternate translation: “Think about the story of Jonah the prophet in the Scriptures. He was swallowed by a large fish for three days because he disobeyed God. After he repented, three days later, the fish spit him out. Similarly,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 40 iuv8 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself here in the third person. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 12 40 gg65 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ τῆς γῆς 1 in the heart of the earth The phrase **the heart of the earth** is figuratively referring to being deep in the ground. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 12 40 gg65 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ τῆς γῆς 1 in the heart of the earth The phrase **the heart of the earth** is referring to being deep in the ground. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 12 41 sn8j grammar-connect-logic-result ἄνδρες Νινευεῖται ἀναστήσονται ἐν τῇ κρίσει μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης, καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὐτήν; ὅτι μετενόησαν εἰς τὸ κήρυγμα Ἰωνᾶ; καὶ ἰδοὺ, πλεῖον Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “The men of Ninevah repented when Jonah came to them, and behold, something greater than Jonah is here before you. Therefore, the men of Ninevah will stand up at the time of judgment with this generation and condemn it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) MAT 12 41 gnh1 figs-gendernotations ἄνδρες Νινευεῖται 1 The men of Nineveh The phrase **men of Nineveh** is referring to both men and women. Alternate translation: “Citizens of Ninevah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MAT 12 41 b94i ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 at the judgment The phrase **will stand up at the judgement** could either mean (1) that God will resurrect them, as in the UST. Or it could mean (2) that they will stand up with God as fellow judges over Israel. Alternate translation: “they will stand with God at the judgement” @@ -831,15 +831,15 @@ MAT 12 41 qg29 καὶ ἰδοὺ 1 and behold The word **behold** emphasizes w MAT 12 41 dbs3 figs-ellipsis πλεῖον Ἰωνᾶ ὧδε 1 something greater Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “something greater than Jonah is here and you have not repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 12 41 zb6a figs-123person πλεῖον 1 something greater Jesus is speaking about himself here in the third person. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 12 42 zwv7 translate-names βασίλισσα νότου 1 The Queen of the South This refers to the **Queen** of the country called Sheba. Sheba was a land south of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 12 42 kku7 ἐγερθήσεται ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 will rise up at the judgment See the note on this phrase in the previous verse. +MAT 12 42 kku7 ἐγερθήσεται ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 will rise up at the judgment See the note on this phrase in the previous verse. MAT 12 42 z46e ἐν τῇ κρίσει 1 at the judgment See how you translated this phrase in [12:41](../12/41.md). -MAT 12 42 zc72 τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 this generation See how you translated **generation** in the previous verse. +MAT 12 42 zc72 τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 1 this generation See how you translated **generation** in the previous verse. MAT 12 42 q8q8 figs-idiom ἦλθεν ἐκ τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς 1 she came from the ends of the earth Here, the phrase **the ends of the earth** is an idiom that means “very far away.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “she came from very far away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 12 42 t521 grammar-connect-logic-result βασίλισσα νότου ἐγερθήσεται ἐν τῇ κρίσει μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης, καὶ κατακρινεῖ αὐτήν; ὅτι ἦλθεν ἐκ τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς ἀκοῦσαι τὴν σοφίαν Σολομῶνος; καὶ ἰδοὺ, πλεῖον Σολομῶνος ὧδε 1 for she came from the ends of the earth to hear the wisdom of Solomon If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “The Queen of Sheba came from the ends of the earth to hear the wisdom of Solomon, and behold, I am much greater than her. Therefore, she will be raised in the judgement with this generation and will judge it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) MAT 12 42 aj1x πλεῖον Σολομῶνος ὧδε 1 something greater Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “something greater than Solomon is here, and you will not come and listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 12 42 uf5k figs-123person πλεῖον 1 something greater Jesus is speaking about himself here in the third person. If it would be helpful to your readers, you can state this in the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 12 43 tnea figs-parables δὲ 1 Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Alternate translation: “Suppose a demon goes out of a person. And suppose it then wanders through the desert looking for another place to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) In this verse Jesus begins telling a parable that go through [12:45](../12/45.md). Jesus is teaching the people the dangers of not allowing the Holy Spirit to live in them, and how this allows demons to control them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “No I am going to teach you through telling you a story” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 12 43 f5jr figs-metonymy ἀνύδρων τόπων 1 waterless places Jesus is describing the desert figuratively by reference to the lack of water there. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the desert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] +MAT 12 43 f5jr figs-metonymy ἀνύδρων τόπων 1 waterless places Jesus is describing the desert by reference to the lack of water there. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the desert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] MAT 12 44 ty9b figs-metaphor εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου…ὅθεν ἐξῆλθον 1 to my house from which I departed Here, **my house** is a metaphor for the person in whom the unclean spirit was living and controlling. If your readers would not understand what house means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to the person I left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 12 44 cd4f figs-activepassive εὑρίσκει σχολάζοντα σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον 1 it finds it empty, having been swept out and put in order If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the spirit finds that it was empty, and someone swept it and left it organized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 12 44 s6jf figs-metaphor σχολάζοντα σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον 1 empty and swept out and put in order Here, the phrase **empty, having been swept out and put in order** is figurative language referring to a house that has been cleaned and moved out of so no one lives there. Similar to this, the spirit found this person to not have any spirit living in it. Jesus is saying that the person did not have the Holy Spirit living within them so the demon came back. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “the spirit finds that the person did not have the Holy Spirit living in them, but that there was no spirit living in them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -856,7 +856,7 @@ MAT 13 1 cy1t writing-background ἐξελθὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τῆς ο MAT 13 2 d16z figs-activepassive συνήχθησαν πρὸς αὐτὸν ὄχλοι πολλοί 1 so that, having stepped into a boat, he sat down If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Many crowds gathered around him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 2 d0v5 grammar-collectivenouns ὁ ὄχλος 1 The word crowd is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people” or “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) MAT 13 3 o5f9 figs-parables ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἐν παραβολαῖς 1 Jesus teaches the crowd a parable about what happens when different people hear his teaching. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 13 3 f5mv writing-quotations ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἐν παραβολαῖς λέγων 1 And he spoke many things to them in parables Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “he said many things to them in parables, and this is what he said:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +MAT 13 3 f5mv writing-quotations ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἐν παραβολαῖς λέγων 1 And he spoke many things to them in parables Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “he said many things to them in parables, and this is what he said:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) MAT 13 4 qr2d figs-explicit καὶ ἐν τῷ σπείρειν αὐτὸν, ἃ μὲν ἔπεσεν παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 devoured them Many cultures, when they plant seeds, bury them after planting them to protect them from animals that eat seeds. The seeds on path did not have a chance to be hidden from the birds, so they ate them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “As he was scattering the seeds, some of them fell onto the path where they were unprotected from animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 4 v7r8 figs-ellipsis ἃ μὲν ἔπεσεν 1 beside the road Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “some seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 5 ql87 figs-ellipsis καὶ εὐθέως ἐξανέτειλεν 1 And immediately they sprang up In this verse and in the following verses, the word **others** is referring to seeds that fell in different areas as the sower was planting. If this would be misunderstood, see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -864,20 +864,20 @@ MAT 13 6 qq5x figs-activepassive ἐκαυματίσθη 1 they were scorched If MAT 13 6 pz44 figs-idiom ἡλίου δὲ ἀνατείλαντος 1 the sun rose is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) The phrase **the sun had risen** is an idiom which means when the sun got to its highest and hottest point in the sky. If this would be misunderstood, you state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the hottest time of the day came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 13 7 k69q figs-ellipsis ἄλλα 1 See the note on **others** in [13:5](../13/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 7 vt8z figs-explicit ἀνέβησαν αἱ ἄκανθαι καὶ ἀπέπνιξαν αὐτά 1 choked them The phrase **the thorns grew up and choked them** might be confusing to come readers. What this means is that the weeds grew much faster than the crops which the sower planted did, and so they did not allow the crops to grow. If this would be confusing to your readers, you can state this explicitly with an example from your culture. Alternate translation: “the thorns grew much faster and overwhelmed the plants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 8 iwv2 figs-ellipsis ἄλλα 1 produced fruit See the note in [13:5](../13/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 13 8 iwv2 figs-ellipsis ἄλλα 1 produced fruit See the note in [13:5](../13/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 8 e91e figs-ellipsis ὃ μὲν ἑκατὸν, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ δὲ τριάκοντα 1 some one 100 times as much, and some 60, and some 30 The amount of grain each plant produced is being compared to the single seed from which it grew. Ellipsis is used here to shorten the phrases but they can be written out. Alternate translation: “Some plants bore 100 times as much grain, some produced 60 times as much grain, and some produced 30 times as much grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 13 9 q2e2 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear See the note in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n -MAT 13 9 gkv1 figs-123person ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])\n\n +MAT 13 9 q2e2 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear See the note in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 9 gkv1 figs-123person ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 13 11 fc5n figs-activepassive ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God has given to you to understand mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but God has not given it to these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 11 xq2v figs-ellipsis ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “but to those it has not been given to know the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 11 rcd3 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 To you has been given to understand The word **you** is plural here and refers to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 13 11 ah6u figs-metonymy Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated this in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n +MAT 13 11 ah6u figs-metonymy Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated this in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 12 x34s writing-proverbs ὅστις γὰρ ἔχει, δοθήσεται αὐτῷ καὶ περισσευθήσεται; ὅστις δὲ οὐκ ἔχει, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 This proverb draws a figurative comparison: Jesus talks about understanding as if it were a physical item which could either be given or taken away. He is saying that whoever is able to understand, God will allow them to understand even more. But whoever does not understand, he will take away even whatever little understanding they have. Alternate translation: “For whoever understands, God will allow that person to understand even more, and it will be plenty. But whoever does not have understanding, God will take away what understanding they do have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]] MAT 13 12 j3rl ὅστις…ὅστις 1 whoever has The word **whoever** is referring to people in general, and not to any specific person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “if a person … if a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 13 12 v61y figs-activepassive δοθήσεται…ἀρθήσεται 1 it will be given If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God will give … God will take it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 14 jz9n figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ἀναπληροῦται αὐτοῖς ἡ προφητεία Ἠσαΐου ἡ λέγουσα ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 And to them the prophecy of Isaiah is being fulfilled, which says Matthew is quoting Jesus, and Jesus is quoting the prophet Isaiah. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to them the prophecy of Isaiah is being fulfilled which says that though they hear, they will not understand, and though they see, they will not perceive” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes) MAT 13 14 a1im figs-metaphor ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 In hearing you will hear, but you may certainly not understand See how you translated the words **see** and **hear** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 15 tfl1 figs-metonymy ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου…καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν 1 Here, the word **heart** is used figuratively to refer to a persons mind or inner intentions. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “something he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 15 tfl1 figs-metonymy ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου…καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν 1 Here, the word **heart** is used to refer to a persons mind or inner intentions. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “something he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 15 ps56 ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 they might turn back The phrase **they might turn back** is figurative, referring to someone who repents of their sins and asks God for forgiveness. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they might repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 13 15 q1h9 figs-metaphor ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 I will heal them The phrase **I will heal them** is figurative, meaning that he will forgive them for the sins that they have confessed. If your readers would not understand what it means, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “I will forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 16 glp8 figs-synecdoche ὑμῶν δὲ μακάριοι οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ ὅτι βλέπουσιν καὶ τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶν ὅτι ἀκούουσιν 1 But blessed are your eyes, for they see Here, **see** and **hear** are referring to the disciples ability to understand what Jesus is saying and doing. These words refer to the ability to understand what a person sees and hears. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “You are blessed because you understand what you see with your eyes and what you hear with your ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -887,42 +887,42 @@ MAT 13 17 bsj7 figs-you ὑμῖν…βλέπετε…ἀκούετε 1 to you MAT 13 17 e6ci figs-explicit ἃ βλέπετε 1 the things you see The phrase **the things you see** is referring to the healings and miracles which Jesus did. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the miracles you have seen me do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 17 lslf figs-explicit καὶ οὐκ εἶδαν 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give the reason why the prophets and kings **did not see** these things. Alternate translation: “but could not see them because they lived before my time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 17 q14w figs-explicit ἃ ἀκούετε 1 the things you hear The phrase what you hear probably refers to the teachings of Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the things that you have heard me teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 18 w35t figs-parables ὑμεῖς οὖν ἀκούσατε τὴν παραβολὴν τοῦ σπείραντος 1 Connecting Statement: Jesus is not retelling the parable again, but is now explaining it to the disciples. Make sure this is clear to your audience. See the note in the chapter introduction for more information about this parable. Alternate translation: “Therefore, hear me explain the parable of the one who sowed the seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 13 19 v2d7 figs-genericnoun παντὸς ἀκούοντος 1 the word of the kingdom Jesus is speaking of people in general, and not about any specific person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “people who hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) \n -MAT 13 19 suhi figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας 1 Jesus refers figuratively to bread, one common food, to mean food in general. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “the food we need that day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) The phrase **the word** is referring to the entire message about **the kingdom**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of the kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MAT 13 19 het1 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας 1 Here the word **kingdom** is figuratively referring to how God is making people his people to rule over them. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message about how God is making people his people to rule over them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 19 uo3l figs-ellipsis τῆς βασιλείας 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 13 19 a8nu figs-metaphor ἔρχεται ὁ πονηρὸς καὶ ἁρπάζει τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 the evil one comes and snatches away what has been sown in his heart Jesus is speaking figuratively about Satan as if he were a bird who **snatches away** seeds. God's message is spoken of as if it **has been sown** in a person's heart. If your readers would not understand what it means to be shipwrecked in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “the evil one comes and takes away their understanding of God's message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 18 w35t figs-parables ὑμεῖς οὖν ἀκούσατε τὴν παραβολὴν τοῦ σπείραντος 1 Connecting Statement: Jesus is not retelling the parable again, but is now explaining it to the disciples. Make sure this is clear to your audience. See the note in the chapter introduction for more information about this parable. Alternate translation: “Therefore, hear me explain the parable of the one who sowed the seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 13 19 v2d7 figs-genericnoun παντὸς ἀκούοντος 1 the word of the kingdom Jesus is speaking of people in general, and not about any specific person. If your readers would misunderstand this, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “people who hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +MAT 13 19 suhi figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας 1 Jesus refers to bread, one common food, to mean food in general. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “the food we need that day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) The phrase **the word** is referring to the entire message about **the kingdom**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message of the kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 13 19 het1 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς βασιλείας 1 Here the word **kingdom** is referring to how God is making people his people to rule over them. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message about how God is making people his people to rule over them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 19 uo3l figs-ellipsis τῆς βασιλείας 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of the heavens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 13 19 a8nu figs-metaphor ἔρχεται ὁ πονηρὸς καὶ ἁρπάζει τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 the evil one comes and snatches away what has been sown in his heart Jesus is speaking about Satan as if he were a bird who **snatches away** seeds. God's message is spoken of as if it **has been sown** in a person's heart. If your readers would not understand what it means to be shipwrecked in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “the evil one comes and takes away their understanding of God's message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 19 sb7u figs-explicit ὁ πονηρὸς 1 the evil one Here, **the evil one** refers to Satan. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Satan, who is the evil one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 19 r9u6 figs-activepassive τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 what has been sown in his heart If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the seed which God sowed in his heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 13 19 r9u6 figs-activepassive τὸ ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 what has been sown in his heart If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the seed which God sowed in his heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 19 xi8f figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 in his heart Here, the word **heart** is referring to the mind of the person. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 19 wfd3 figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν σπαρείς 1 This is what was sown beside the road Jesus speaks about what happens to these people figuratively as if it were what happens when seed is thrown alongside the road. The seed is referring to God's message. The road is referring to the persons **heart**. If your readers would not understand what this means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “when this happens, it is like what happened to seed being sown along the path” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 19 wfd3 figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν σπαρείς 1 This is what was sown beside the road Jesus speaks about what happens to these people as if it were what happens when seed is thrown alongside the road. The seed is referring to God's message. The road is referring to the persons **heart**. If your readers would not understand what this means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “when this happens, it is like what happened to seed being sown along the path” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 19 xgz5 παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν 1 beside the road See how you translated this in [13:4](../13/04.md). -MAT 13 20 l5iv figs-explicit ὁ…σπαρείς 1 Now that sown on the rocky ground The phrase **the one having been sown** is talking about the the seed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the seed which was sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 20 l5iv figs-explicit ὁ…σπαρείς 1 Now that sown on the rocky ground The phrase **the one having been sown** is talking about the the seed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the seed which was sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 20 rnct figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τὸν λόγον ἀκούων καὶ εὐθὺς μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμβάνων αὐτόν 1 Jesus is comparing **the one hearing the word and immediately receiving it with joy** with the seed which is sown on rocky ground. In the same way that the seed sown on rocky soil does not have deep roots, so the person who immediately receives it has not fully believed in God's message. If your readers would not understand what it means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “this is like the person who hears the word and quickly receives it with joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 20 w4f9 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον 1 Now that sown on rocky ground, this is See how you translated **word** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 13 20 cl6g figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Here, **the word** represents God’s message. Alternate translation: “the message” or “God’s teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 20 z76f figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τὸν λόγον ἀκούων καὶ εὐθὺς μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμβάνων αὐτόν 1 receiving it with joy Jesus is speaking figuratively, speaking about believing as if they were **recieving** God's message. If your readers would not understand what **receiving** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “this seed is like the person who quickly receives God's message with joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 21 zg9q figs-idiom οὐκ ἔχει δὲ ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, ἀλλὰ πρόσκαιρός ἐστιν 1 But he has no root in himself, but is temporary The expression **but he has no root in himself, but is temporary** figuratively means that the plant does not have deep enough roots to stay alive. Alternate translation: “but he does not have deep roots to stay alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 13 21 ixil grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 What follows the word **but** is in contrast to what precedes it. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -MAT 13 21 lxuy figs-abstractnouns γενομένης δὲ θλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ διὰ τὸν λόγον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **tribulation** and **persecution**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “people afflicted and persecuted them because of the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MAT 13 21 xv50 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον 1 See how you translated **word** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MAT 13 21 lim9 figs-metaphor εὐθὺς σκανδαλίζεται 1 immediately he is caused to stumble The expression **to stumble** figuratively means that he no longer believes God's message. Alternate translation: “immediately he stops believing God's message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])   +MAT 13 20 z76f figs-metaphor οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τὸν λόγον ἀκούων καὶ εὐθὺς μετὰ χαρᾶς λαμβάνων αὐτόν 1 receiving it with joy Jesus is speaking, speaking about believing as if they were **recieving** God's message. If your readers would not understand what **receiving** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “this seed is like the person who quickly receives God's message with joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 21 zg9q figs-idiom οὐκ ἔχει δὲ ῥίζαν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, ἀλλὰ πρόσκαιρός ἐστιν 1 But he has no root in himself, but is temporary The expression **but he has no root in himself, but is temporary** means that the plant does not have deep enough roots to stay alive. Alternate translation: “but he does not have deep roots to stay alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 13 21 ixil grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 What follows the word **but** is in contrast to what precedes it. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +MAT 13 21 lxuy figs-abstractnouns γενομένης δὲ θλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ διὰ τὸν λόγον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **tribulation** and **persecution**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “people afflicted and persecuted them because of the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MAT 13 21 xv50 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον 1 See how you translated **word** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 13 21 lim9 figs-metaphor εὐθὺς σκανδαλίζεται 1 immediately he is caused to stumble The expression **to stumble** means that he no longer believes God's message. Alternate translation: “immediately he stops believing God's message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])   MAT 13 22 d4h5 figs-explicit ὁ…σπαρείς 1 that which has been sown Here, Jesus is talking about the story of seed which was **sown** among the thorns, If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the seed having been sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 22 rcj8 ὁ δὲ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπαρείς 1 Now that which has been sown among the thorn plants See how you translated **thorns** in [13:7](../13/07.md) -MAT 13 22 a3u1 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον…τὸν λόγον 2 the word See how you translated **the word** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MAT 13 22 q2nh figs-explicit ἡ μέριμνα τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου καὶ ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου συνπνίγει τὸν λόγον 1 the cares of this age and the deceitfulness of riches choke the word The phrase **the cares of this age** is likely referring to caring about what a person will eat or drink. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “worrying about what you need to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 22 wwf5 figs-personification ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου 1 the deceitfulness of riches Jesus speaks of **riches** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could deceive. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “finding all of their pleasure in riches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +MAT 13 22 rcj8 ὁ δὲ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας σπαρείς 1 Now that which has been sown among the thorn plants See how you translated **thorns** in [13:7](../13/07.md) +MAT 13 22 a3u1 figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον…τὸν λόγον 2 the word See how you translated **the word** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 13 22 q2nh figs-explicit ἡ μέριμνα τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου καὶ ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου συνπνίγει τὸν λόγον 1 the cares of this age and the deceitfulness of riches choke the word The phrase **the cares of this age** is likely referring to caring about what a person will eat or drink. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “worrying about what you need to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 22 wwf5 figs-personification ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ πλούτου 1 the deceitfulness of riches Jesus speaks of **riches** as if it were a living thing that could deceive. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “finding all of their pleasure in riches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) MAT 13 22 gn6z figs-metaphor ἄκαρπος γίνεται 1 it becomes unfruitful The person is spoken of as if he were a plant. Being **unfruitful** represents being unproductive. Alternate translation: “he becomes unproductive” or “he does not do what God wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 23 xw4b figs-explicit ὁ…ἐπὶ τὴν καλὴν γῆν σπαρείς 1 that which has been sown on the good soil Here Jesus is referring to the story of the seed which fell on the **good soil**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the seed having been sown on the good soil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 23 ptb8 figs-metaphor ὃς δὴ καρποφορεῖ καὶ ποιεῖ 1 who indeed bears fruit, and some yield Here the phrase **who indeed produces a crop and yields** figuratively means “a person who does many good things that please God”. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who does many good things that please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n +MAT 13 23 ptb8 figs-metaphor ὃς δὴ καρποφορεῖ καὶ ποιεῖ 1 who indeed bears fruit, and some yield Here the phrase **who indeed produces a crop and yields** means “a person who does many good things that please God”. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who does many good things that please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 23 wm3p figs-ellipsis ποιεῖ, ὃ μὲν ἑκατὸν, ὃ δὲ ἑξήκοντα, ὃ δὲ τριάκοντα 1 some yield 100 times, and some 60, and some 30 This refers to the grain that the plants produce. Alternate translation: “some produce 100 times the grain that was sown, some produce 60 times the grain that was sown, and some produce 30 times the grain that was sown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 13 23 i4t0 translate-numbers ἑκατὸν…ἑξήκοντα…τριάκοντα 1 You can state the numbers as text. Alternate translation: “a hundred … sixty … thirty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -MAT 13 24 l5yx figs-parables ἄλλην παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὐτοῖς λέγων, 1 Connecting Statement: To help the people understand his message, Jesus tells a story. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told a story to help them understand:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 13 24 xkov figs-metaphor ἄλλην παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὐτοῖς 1 Here the phrase **set before** figuratively means that Jesus told the people another story. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told them another parable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Here the term **set before them** figuratively means that Jesus told the disciples another parable. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told them another parable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])  -MAT 13 24 iiv7 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -MAT 13 24 k8pu figs-simile ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἀνθρώπῳ σπείραντι καλὸν σπέρμα ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ αὐτοῦ 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like a man Jesus is comparing **the kingdom of the heavens** with the entire story through [13:30](../13/30.md). See the note in the chapter introduction for more information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MAT 13 24 f8j5 figs-metonymy ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like See how you translated **The kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 24 l5yx figs-parables ἄλλην παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὐτοῖς λέγων, 1 Connecting Statement: To help the people understand his message, Jesus tells a story. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told a story to help them understand:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 13 24 xkov figs-metaphor ἄλλην παραβολὴν παρέθηκεν αὐτοῖς 1 Here the phrase **set before** means that Jesus told the people another story. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told them another parable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) Here the term **set before them** means that Jesus told the disciples another parable. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told them another parable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])  +MAT 13 24 iiv7 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +MAT 13 24 k8pu figs-simile ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἀνθρώπῳ σπείραντι καλὸν σπέρμα ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ αὐτοῦ 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like a man Jesus is comparing **the kingdom of the heavens** with the entire story through [13:30](../13/30.md). See the note in the chapter introduction for more information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MAT 13 24 f8j5 figs-metonymy ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like See how you translated **The kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 24 u21k figs-explicit καλὸν σπέρμα 1 good seed Here **good seed** is referring to seed that produces edible crops. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “seed for food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 25 zn8v ἦλθεν αὐτοῦ ὁ ἐχθρὸς 1 his enemy came Alternate translation: “his enemy came to the field” MAT 13 25 q4tv ζιζάνια 1 darnel The **darnel** that was sown looks like food plants when it is young, but its grain is poison. Alternate translation: “bad seed” or “weed seeds” @@ -938,12 +938,12 @@ MAT 13 29 c9jc ὁ δέ φησιν 1 But he says Alternate translation: “But MAT 13 30 z36a figs-quotations ἐρῶ τοῖς θερισταῖς, συλλέξατε πρῶτον τὰ ζιζάνια καὶ δήσατε αὐτὰ εἰς δέσμας πρὸς τὸ κατακαῦσαι αὐτά; τὸν δὲ σῖτον συναγάγετε εἰς τὴν ἀποθήκην μου. 1 I will say to the reapers, “First gather up the darnel and tie them in bundles to burn them up, but gather the wheat into my barn.” You can translate this direct quotation as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “I will tell the reapers to first gather up the darnel and tie them in bundles to burn them, and then gather the wheat into my barn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MAT 13 30 ll14 τὴν ἀποθήκην 1 barn A **barn** is a farm building that can be used for storing grain, animals, and other farm items. MAT 13 31 tdf4 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus describes the kingdom of heaven by telling a parable about a very small seed that grows into a very big plant. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 13 31 jw7u figs-metonymy ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like See how you translated **kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 31 jw7u figs-metonymy ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like See how you translated **kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 31 qby8 translate-unknown κόκκῳ σινάπεως 1 a mustard seed A **mustard seed** is a very small seed that grows into a large plant. If this is unknown in your culture, use a similar type of seed in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 13 32 gyi1 figs-explicit ὃ μικρότερον μέν ἐστιν πάντων τῶν σπερμάτων 1 which is indeed the smallest of all the seeds The phrase **which is indeed the smallest of all the seeds** shows how small the seed it compared with how big it grows. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “This seed was the smallest of any seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 13 32 g6v8 figs-idiom γίνεται δένδρον 1 becomes a tree Here, the phrase **becomes a tree** is an idiom meaning it grows until it becomes the size of a tree. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “grows to be a tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 13 33 z94k figs-simile ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν ζύμῃ 1 The kingdom of heaven is like yeast In this passage, Jesus is comparing **the kingdom of the heavens** with **yeast**. Jesus is saying that, Just as yeast is mixed into flour and causes it to grow, so the kingdom of the heavens will grow. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MAT 13 33 w8sb figs-metonymy ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like See how you translated **The kingdom of the heavens** in [4:2](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 33 w8sb figs-metonymy ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like See how you translated **The kingdom of the heavens** in [4:2](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 33 xc9t translate-unknown ζύμῃ, ἣν λαβοῦσα, γυνὴ ἐνέκρυψεν εἰς ἀλεύρου σάτα τρία, ἕως οὗ ἐζυμώθη ὅλον 1 The word **yeast** is something used in making bread that causes it to grow. If this would not be understood in your language, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “yeast, which is used to make bread grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 13 33 r88g translate-bvolume ἀλεύρου σάτα τρία 1 three measures of flour You can translate this phrase as “a large amount of flour” or use a term that your culture uses for measuring large amounts of flour. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) MAT 13 34 nt7u figs-parallelism ταῦτα πάντα ἐλάλησεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἐν παραβολαῖς τοῖς ὄχλοις, καὶ χωρὶς παραβολῆς οὐδὲν ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς 1 All these things Jesus spoke to the crowds in parables; and he was speaking nothing to them without a parable The phrases **All these things Jesus spoke in parables to the crowds** and **he was speaking nothing to them without a parable** mean the same thing. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “Jesus spoke all of these things in parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -951,26 +951,26 @@ MAT 13 34 n54e figs-explicit ταῦτα πάντα 1 All these things The phras MAT 13 34 a5c7 figs-doublenegatives χωρὶς παραβολῆς οὐδὲν ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς 1 he was speaking nothing to them without a parable If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “he spoke only with parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) MAT 13 35 ybq5 figs-activepassive πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ τοῦ προφήτου 1 what had been said through the prophet might be fulfilled, saying If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what God said through the prophet might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 35 p3tb writing-quotations διὰ τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος, 1 saying Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “through the prophet … and this is what he said:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -MAT 13 35 f9gl figs-metonymy ἀνοίξω ἐν παραβολαῖς τὸ στόμα μου 1 Jesus is using the phrase **I will open my mouth in parables** figuratively to mean speaking. Alternate translation: “I will speak in parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 35 f9gl figs-metonymy ἀνοίξω ἐν παραβολαῖς τὸ στόμα μου 1 Jesus is using the phrase **I will open my mouth in parables** to mean speaking. Alternate translation: “I will speak in parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 35 yx6y figs-activepassive κεκρυμμένα 1 what has been hidden If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what I have hidden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 35 th8t figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 from the foundation of the world If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **foundation**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “since God founded the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +MAT 13 35 th8t figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 from the foundation of the world If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **foundation**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “since God founded the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 13 36 pq2h writing-newevent τότε 1 Connecting Statement: Jesus is using the word translated **Then** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 13 37 r9wr ὁ σπείρων τὸ καλὸν σπέρμα ἐστὶν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 The phrase **the Son of Man** is explaining what the phrase **The one sowing the good seed** means which Jesus used in [13:24](../13/24.md). MAT 13 37 xj4s figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself as the **Son of Man**. If this would be confusing to your readers, you can express this in the first person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 13 38 eea8 ὁ δὲ ἀγρός ἐστιν ὁ κόσμος; τὸ δὲ καλὸν σπέρμα, οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας; τὰ δὲ ζιζάνιά εἰσιν οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 The phrase **the world** is explaining what the phrase **the field** means which Jesus used in [13:24](../13/24.md). The phrase **the sons of the kingdom** is explaining what the phrase **the good seed** means which Jesus used in [13:24](../13/24.md). The phrase **the sons of the evil one** is explaining what the phrase **the darnel** means which Jesus used in [13:25](../13/25.md). MAT 13 38 h9iz figs-idiom οἱ υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας…οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 the sons of the kingdom Here, the phrase **sons of the kingdom** is an idiom meaning “people over whom God rules.” The phrase **sons of the evil one** is an idiom meaning “people over whom Satan rules.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “the people over whom God rules … the people over whom Satan rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 13 38 eni3 figs-metonymy τῆς βασιλείας 1 of the kingdom See how you translated **the kingdom** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 38 eni3 figs-metonymy τῆς βασιλείας 1 of the kingdom See how you translated **the kingdom** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 39 sgx2 ὁ…ἐχθρὸς, ὁ σπείρας αὐτά ἐστιν ὁ διάβολος; ὁ δὲ θερισμὸς συντέλεια αἰῶνός ἐστιν; οἱ δὲ θερισταὶ ἄγγελοί εἰσιν. 1 the enemy who sowed them The phrase **the devil** is explaining what the phrase **the enemy** means which Jesus used in [13:25](../13/25.md). The phrase **the end of the age** is explaining what the phrase **the harvest** means which Jesus used in [13:30](../13/30.md). The word **angels** is explaining what the phrase **the reapers** means which Jesus used in [13:30](../13/30.md) MAT 13 40 rn64 figs-simile ὥσπερ οὖν συλλέγεται τὰ ζιζάνια καὶ πυρὶ κατακαίεται, οὕτως ἔσται ἐν τῇ συντελείᾳ τοῦ αἰῶνος 1 Therefore, just as the darnel are gathered up and burned with fire Jesus is comparing the parable to what is actually going to happen in the end times. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Therefore, similar to how the weeds were gathered up, this is what God is going to do with evil doers in the final days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MAT 13 40 hzih grammar-connect-words-phrases οὕτως ἔσται ἐν τῇ συντελείᾳ τοῦ αἰῶνος 1 The word **thus** tells the reader that Jesus is going to explain what the parable is similar to in the following passage. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “here is a description of what it will be like in the end days for evil people:” +MAT 13 40 hzih grammar-connect-words-phrases οὕτως ἔσται ἐν τῇ συντελείᾳ τοῦ αἰῶνος 1 The word **thus** tells the reader that Jesus is going to explain what the parable is similar to in the following passage. Make sure this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “here is a description of what it will be like in the end days for evil people:” MAT 13 41 fiy4 figs-123person ἀποστελεῖ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ 1 The Son of Man will send out his angels See how you translated **Son of Man** in [13:37](../13/37.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 13 41 p5p9 figs-metonymy ἐκ τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus is using the term **kingdom** figuratively here to refer to the whole world. If it would be helpful to your readers, make sure they understand this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the world which he rules over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 41 ptw9 figs-metaphor πάντα τὰ σκάνδαλα 1 those doing lawlessness Here, the phrase **stumbling blocks** is speaking figuratively about people who cause other people to sin. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all of the people who cause others to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 42 d9md figs-metaphor τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρός 1 the furnace of fire Here, Jesus is referring to hell figuratively as a **furnace of fire**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “hell, which is hot like a fiery furnace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 13 42 zu3j translate-symaction ὁ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων 1 weeping and grinding of teeth Here, **grinding of the teeth** is a symbolic act, representing extreme pain and suffering. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “weeping and extreme suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])\n\n +MAT 13 41 p5p9 figs-metonymy ἐκ τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus is using the term **kingdom** here to refer to the whole world. If it would be helpful to your readers, make sure they understand this explicitly. Alternate translation: “from the world which he rules over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 41 ptw9 figs-metaphor πάντα τὰ σκάνδαλα 1 those doing lawlessness Here, the phrase **stumbling blocks** is speaking about people who cause other people to sin. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all of the people who cause others to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 42 d9md figs-metaphor τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρός 1 the furnace of fire Here, Jesus is referring to hell as a **furnace of fire**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “hell, which is hot like a fiery furnace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 13 42 zu3j translate-symaction ὁ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων 1 weeping and grinding of teeth Here, **grinding of the teeth** is a symbolic act, representing extreme pain and suffering. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “weeping and extreme suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) MAT 13 43 azqy figs-nominaladj οἱ δίκαιοι 1 Jesus is using the adjective righteous as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 13 43 u6sm figs-simile ἐκλάμψουσιν ὡς ὁ ἥλιος 1 will shine as the sun Here, Jesus is comparing **the righteous** as if they were shining like **the sun**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MAT 13 43 j487 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ 1 Jesus is using the term **kingdom** figuratively to mean where God dwells and where the righteous will dwell with him. Alternate translation: “in heaven where God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 43 j487 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ 1 Jesus is using the term **kingdom** to mean where God dwells and where the righteous will dwell with him. Alternate translation: “in heaven where God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 43 sea2 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτῶν 1 of their Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 13 43 zxh2 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one having ears, let him hear See how you translated a similar phrase in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 44 fjm1 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: In [13:44-46](../13/44-46.md), Jesus describes **the kingdom of heaven** by telling two parables about people who sold their possessions to purchase something of great value. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) @@ -985,44 +985,44 @@ MAT 13 45 auj6 figs-metonymy ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 See MAT 13 45 khy6 translate-unknown ἀνθρώπῳ ἐμπόρῳ 1 a man, a merchant A **merchant** is a trader who often obtains merchandise from distant places and sells them to other people. If your readers would not understand the word **merchant**, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “a person who sells items” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 13 45 b88q translate-unknown καλοὺς μαργαρίτας 1 fine pearls These pearls are beautiful and valuable mineral balls that people use as jewelry. They are formed inside the shell of a small animal that lives in the ocean. If your readers would not be familiar with pearls, you could express this idea in a more general way. Alternate translation: “decorations made from valuable materials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 13 47 vw24 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus describes **the kingdom of heaven** by telling a parable about fishermen who use a large net to catch fish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 13 47 s2dd figs-extrainfo 0 Jesus explains the meaning of this parable in [13:49](../13/49.md) so you do not need to explain the meaning here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) Jesus explains the meaning of the parable in [13:49](../13/49.md), so you do not need to explain the meaning here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +MAT 13 47 s2dd figs-extrainfo 0 Jesus explains the meaning of this parable in [13:49](../13/49.md) so you do not need to explain the meaning here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) Jesus explains the meaning of the parable in [13:49](../13/49.md), so you do not need to explain the meaning here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) MAT 13 47 g79n figs-simile ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν σαγήνῃ βληθείσῃ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν καὶ ἐκ παντὸς γένους συναγαγούσῃ 1 the kingdom of the heavens is like a net Here, Jesus compares **the kingdom of the heavens** with how a **net** catches many different kinds of fish. In this sentence, Jesus is not comparing the kingdom of the heavens with the net itself. He is rather comparing the kingdom of the heavens with what the net is doing. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of the heavens is comparable to how a net is cast into the see, and gathers every kind of fish in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 13 47 rjm4 figs-metonymy ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the kingdom of the heavens is like Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule as king. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is used only in Matthew. if possible, use **heavens** in your translation. See how you translated this in [13:24](../13/24.md). Alternate translation: “When our God in heaven shows himself to be king, it will be like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 47 vrp4 figs-activepassive ὁμοία…σαγήνῃ βληθείσῃ εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν 1 like a net having been cast into the sea If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is like a net which fisherman threw into the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 48 aqhl figs-activepassive ἐπληρώθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fish filled the net” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 48 cnp7 figs-nominaladj τὰ καλὰ…τὰ…σαπρὰ 1 the good things Jesus is using the adjectives **good** and **worthless** as a noun here in order to describe a group of as either good for eating or not good for eating. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “good fish … worthless fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 13 49 zawv figs-explicit ἐξελεύσονται οἱ ἄγγελοι 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Jesus does not say where the angels **go out** from. Jesus and his audience would have known that the angels went out from God's presence. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The angels will go out from God's presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 49 zawv figs-explicit ἐξελεύσονται οἱ ἄγγελοι 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Jesus does not say where the angels **go out** from. Jesus and his audience would have known that the angels went out from God's presence. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “The angels will go out from God's presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 49 ah2k figs-nominaladj τοὺς πονηροὺς ἐκ μέσου τῶν δικαίων 1 the wicked from among the righteous Jesus is using the adjectives **wicked** and **righteous** as nouns in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are wicked … people who are righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 13 50 j8nf καὶ βαλοῦσιν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρός. ἐκεῖ ἔσται ὁ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων 1 the furnace of fire See how you translated this verse in [13:42](../13/42.md). MAT 13 51 p5ej figs-quotations συνήκατε ταῦτα πάντα? λέγουσιν αὐτῷ, ναί. 1 Have you understood all these things?” They say to him, “Yes.” If it would be more natural in your language, you could express these as indirect quotations. Alternate translation: “Jesus asked them if they had understood all this, and they said that they did understand.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MAT 13 52 g4dd figs-metonymy μαθητευθεὶς τῇ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 who has been discipled for the kingdom of the heavens See how you translated **the kingdom of the heavens** in [3:2](../03/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 52 gr36 figs-parables \n is like a man, an owner of a house, who draws out new things and old things from his treasure Jesus speaks another parable. In this parable, he talks about a man who gives people treasures out of his old and new belongings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 13 52 ip6e figs-simile πᾶς γραμματεὺς…ὅμοιός ἐστιν ἀνθρώπῳ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅστις ἐκβάλλει ἐκ τοῦ θησαυροῦ αὐτοῦ καινὰ καὶ παλαιά 1\n Here, Jesus is comparing a **scribe** who obeys Jesus with **a man** who gives people new and old things from his treasure. Here, the treasure is referring to both old teachings of the law as well as new teachings which Jesus is brought. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “every scribe … is comparable to a person who gives old and new things from their valuable items” or ”every scribe … teaches both new and old teachings, which are like treasures to the people to whom they teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MAT 13 52 g59c translate-unknown τοῦ θησαυροῦ αὐτοῦ 1 his treasure See how you translated **** in [13:44](../13/44.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 13 52 gr36 figs-parables is like a man, an owner of a house, who draws out new things and old things from his treasure Jesus speaks another parable. In this parable, he talks about a man who gives people treasures out of his old and new belongings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 13 52 ip6e figs-simile πᾶς γραμματεὺς…ὅμοιός ἐστιν ἀνθρώπῳ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅστις ἐκβάλλει ἐκ τοῦ θησαυροῦ αὐτοῦ καινὰ καὶ παλαιά 1 Here, Jesus is comparing a **scribe** who obeys Jesus with **a man** who gives people new and old things from his treasure. Here, the treasure is referring to both old teachings of the law as well as new teachings which Jesus is brought. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “every scribe … is comparable to a person who gives old and new things from their valuable items” or ”every scribe … teaches both new and old teachings, which are like treasures to the people to whom they teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +MAT 13 52 g59c translate-unknown τοῦ θησαυροῦ αὐτοῦ 1 his treasure See how you translated **** in [13:44](../13/44.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 13 53 jwv2 writing-endofstory καὶ ἐγένετο ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὰς παραβολὰς ταύτας, μετῆρεν ἐκεῖθεν 1 And it happened that when This verse tells the reader that the story about Jesus telling many parable to his disciples is ending. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) MAT 13 54 qnh9 writing-newevent 0 General Information: Jesus is using the phrase **And having entered into his hometown** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a way in your language that people use to introduce a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 13 54 q3ml figs-explicit τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ 1 his hometown Here, **his hometown** refers to the town of Nazareth, where Jesus grew up. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his hometown, Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 54 it1f ἐκπλήσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς 1 they were astonished Alternate translation: “they were amazed” MAT 13 54 b3d2 figs-explicit πόθεν τούτῳ ἡ σοφία αὕτη καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις? 1 From where to this one is this wisdom and these miracles? The people asked this question because they did not believe that Jesus had the power to do miracles and heal people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “How can it be that this man has such great wisdom and does these miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 55 rk5e figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός? οὐχ ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ λέγεται Μαριὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ, Ἰάκωβος, καὶ Ἰωσὴφ, καὶ Σίμων, καὶ Ἰούδας? 1 Is not this the son of the carpenter? Is not his mother called Mary, and his brothers, James, and Joseph, and Simon, and Judas? The crowd uses these questions to express their belief that they know who Jesus is and that he is just an ordinary man. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “He is just the son of a carpenter. We know his mother Mary, and his brothers James, Joseph, Simon, and Judas.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 13 55 rpj9 translate-unknown ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός 1 the son of the carpenter The word **carpenter** here is referring to someone who works with wood. If your readers would not understand the word **carpenter**, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the son of the man who builds with wood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 13 55 qspg figs-metonymy ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός 1 Jesus is using the phrase **the carpenter** figuratively to mean Jospeh, Jesus' father. Alternate translation: “the son of Joseph, the carpenter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 13 55 rpj9 translate-unknown ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός 1 the son of the carpenter The word **carpenter** here is referring to someone who works with wood. If your readers would not understand the word **carpenter**, you can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the son of the man who builds with wood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 13 55 qspg figs-metonymy ὁ τοῦ τέκτονος υἱός 1 Jesus is using the phrase **the carpenter** to mean Jospeh, Jesus' father. Alternate translation: “the son of Joseph, the carpenter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 56 m9pn figs-rquestion αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ οὐχὶ πᾶσαι πρὸς ἡμᾶς εἰσιν? 1 are not all his sisters with us? The crowd uses this question to express their belief that they know who Jesus is and that he is just an ordinary man. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “all his sisters are with us, too.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 13 56 bnv1 figs-rquestion πόθεν οὖν τούτῳ ταῦτα πάντα? 1 From where therefore to this one are all these things? The crowd uses this question to show their doubt concerning where Jesus got his abilities from. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “We do not know where he got these abilities!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 13 56 pqf1 ταῦτα πάντα 1 all these things Here, **all these things** refers to Jesus’ wisdom and ability to do miracles mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “are his wisdom and ability to do miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 57 f5md figs-activepassive ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ 1 they were offended by him If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Jesus offended them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 57 azn4 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔστιν προφήτης ἄτιμος 1 A prophet is not without honor Jesus uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “A prophet is always honored, except” or “The only place a prophet is not honored is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -MAT 13 57 sq8j τῇ πατρίδι 1 his hometown See how you translated **hometown** in [4:2](../04/02.md). +MAT 13 57 sq8j τῇ πατρίδι 1 his hometown See how you translated **hometown** in [4:2](../04/02.md). MAT 13 57 w4x8 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 in his own family Jesus uses the phrase **in his house** to refer to his closest relatives, like his father, mother, or siblings. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “among his closest family members” or “by his father, mother, and siblings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 13 58 e2cp grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ οὐκ ἐποίησεν ἐκεῖ δυνάμεις πολλὰς, διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν 1 he did not do many miracles there If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since they did not believe, Jesus did not do many miracles in that place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])\n +MAT 13 58 e2cp grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ οὐκ ἐποίησεν ἐκεῖ δυνάμεις πολλὰς, διὰ τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν 1 he did not do many miracles there If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since they did not believe, Jesus did not do many miracles in that place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) MAT 14 intro g5mc 0 # Matthew 14 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verses 1 and 2 continue the account from chapter 13. Verses 3-12 stop the account and speak of things that happened earlier, possibly soon after Satan tempted Jesus (see [4:12](../mat/04/12.md)). Verse 13 continues the account from verse 2. Be sure to have words in verses 3-12 that tell the reader that Matthew has stopped his account to give new information before he continues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. For example, the writer does not tell who brought John’s head to Herodias’s daughter ([14:11](../mat/14/11.md)). You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 14 2 pd1b figs-quotesinquotes καὶ εἶπεν τοῖς παισὶν αὐτοῦ, οὗτός ἐστιν Ἰωάννης ὁ Βαπτιστής; αὐτὸς ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο αἱ δυνάμεις ἐνεργοῦσιν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 he said If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And he said to his servants that this is John the Baptist, and that he has been raised from the dead. Because of this, great powers are working in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])\n +MAT 14 2 pd1b figs-quotesinquotes καὶ εἶπεν τοῖς παισὶν αὐτοῦ, οὗτός ἐστιν Ἰωάννης ὁ Βαπτιστής; αὐτὸς ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο αἱ δυνάμεις ἐνεργοῦσιν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 he said If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And he said to his servants that this is John the Baptist, and that he has been raised from the dead. Because of this, great powers are working in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MAT 14 2 nx7x figs-activepassive αὐτὸς ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 has been raised from the dead If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Matthew implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God raised him from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 14 2 vve7 figs-personification διὰ τοῦτο αἱ δυνάμεις ἐνεργοῦσιν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 because of this, miraculous powers are at work in him Jesus speaks of **the miraculous powers** figuratively as if it were a living thing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This is why God has given him great power to do miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +MAT 14 2 vve7 figs-personification διὰ τοῦτο αἱ δυνάμεις ἐνεργοῦσιν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 because of this, miraculous powers are at work in him Jesus speaks of **the miraculous powers** as if it were a living thing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This is why God has given him great power to do miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) MAT 14 3 zgp9 writing-background γὰρ 1 Connecting Statement: From here until [14:12](../14/12.md), Jesus gives the reader background information explaining why Herod said that John was raised from the dead. He is explaining how John died. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “For John died in this way:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 14 3 zsvz grammar-connect-logic-result ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of Herodias, Herod's brother's wife, John was arrested, bound, and thrown into prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -MAT 14 3 d3gp grammar-connect-time-sequential ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” The events described by **arrested**, **bound** and **put in prison** happened in that order. Make sure this is understandable to your audience. Alternate translation: “For Herod first arrested him. Then he bound him and then threw him and prison” -MAT 14 3 h466 figs-metonymy ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For Herod, having arrested John, bound him, and put him in prison Jesus is using the term **Herod** figuratively to mean the soldiers who work for him. If it would be helpful to your reader, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Herod sent his soldiers to arrest John, bind him, and throw him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 14 3 d3gp grammar-connect-time-sequential ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” The events described by **arrested**, **bound** and **put in prison** happened in that order. Make sure this is understandable to your audience. Alternate translation: “For Herod first arrested him. Then he bound him and then threw him and prison” +MAT 14 3 h466 figs-metonymy ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For Herod, having arrested John, bound him, and put him in prison Jesus is using the term **Herod** to mean the soldiers who work for him. If it would be helpful to your reader, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Herod sent his soldiers to arrest John, bind him, and throw him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 14 3 lr92 translate-names τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου 1 the wife of Philip **Philip** was Herod’s brother, and the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 14 4 n1t6 figs-quotations ἔλεγεν γὰρ αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰωάννης, οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν αὐτήν. 1 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “For John was saying that it was not lawful for him to have her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MAT 14 6 fvs5 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ μέσῳ 1 in the midst If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express who she was dancing **in the midst** of explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the midst of the guests attending the birthday celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1040,7 +1040,7 @@ MAT 14 13 ipm9 figs-idiom πεζῇ 1 on foot Here, **on foot** is an idiom mean MAT 14 14 d8n3 καὶ ἐξελθὼν 1 And having come out Alternate translation: “And when Jesus got off the boat” MAT 14 15 otp3 figs-idiom ἡ ὥρα ἤδη παρῆλθεν 1 This phrase means it was late in the day. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “it is already late in the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 14 16 r5gd figs-you δότε αὐτοῖς ὑμεῖς 1 You give them The word **You** is plural, referring to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 14 17 ih48 grammar-connect-exceptions πέντε ἄρτους 1 five loaves If it would appear in your language that the disciples are making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “we only have five loaves and two fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])\n +MAT 14 17 ih48 grammar-connect-exceptions πέντε ἄρτους 1 five loaves If it would appear in your language that the disciples are making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “we only have five loaves and two fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) MAT 14 19 i34u translate-symaction ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 having broken it, he gave the loaves Here, **looked up to heaven** is symbolic for praying that God would provide enough food for the crowd. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) MAT 14 19 bf1a figs-ellipsis εὐλόγησεν καὶ κλάσας 1 the loaves Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “he blessed them, and having broken the food into pieces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 14 19 t7ei figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις 1 Having looked up Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the disciples gave the loaves to the crowds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -1050,9 +1050,9 @@ MAT 14 22 yp8l writing-background ἠνάγκασεν τοὺς μαθητὰς MAT 14 24 vzd1 writing-background τὸ δὲ πλοῖον ἤδη μέσον τῆς θαλάσσης ἦν βασανιζόμενον ὑπὸ τῶν κυμάτων, ἦν γὰρ ἐναντίος ὁ ἄνεμος 1 was being tossed about by the waves Matthew provides more information to help the reader understand the follow verses. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “The boat was already in the middle of the sea, and was being tossed around by waves because of a strong opposing wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 14 25 pmw8 translate-unknown τετάρτῃ δὲ φυλακῇ τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Now in the fourth watch of the night If your readers would not understand the phrase **fourth watch**, you can state what it means explicitly. Alternate translation: “some time just before the sun rose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 14 26 h7df figs-quotations λέγοντες, ὅτι φάντασμά 1 a ghost If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that he is a ghost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MAT 14 30 sk3j βλέπων…τὸν ἄνεμον ἰσχυρὸν 1 seeing the strong wind Here, **seeing** the **wind** means he "he became afraid" because he became aware of the wind and the large waves that it caused. Alternate translation: “when Peter saw that the wind was tossing the waves back and forth” or “when he realized how strong the wind was” +MAT 14 30 sk3j βλέπων…τὸν ἄνεμον ἰσχυρὸν 1 seeing the strong wind Here, **seeing** the **wind** means he "he became afraid" because he became aware of the wind and the large waves that it caused. Alternate translation: “when Peter saw that the wind was tossing the waves back and forth” or “when he realized how strong the wind was” MAT 14 31 ia1d figs-explicit εἰς τί ἐδίστασας? 1 why did you doubt? Here, **doubt** is referring to Peter doubting that Jesus could help him from sinking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “why did you doubt that I could keep you from sinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 14 31 cr9i figs-rquestion εἰς τί ἐδίστασας? 1 why did you doubt? Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you certainly should not have doubted!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 14 31 cr9i figs-rquestion εἰς τί ἐδίστασας? 1 why did you doubt? Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you certainly should not have doubted!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 14 33 u8pu guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Υἱὸς 1 the Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 14 34 cv3f figs-explicit καὶ διαπεράσαντες 1 And having crossed over Matthew implies that they **crossed over** the Sea of Galilee. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “after crossing over the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 14 34 x9nu translate-names Γεννησαρέτ 1 Gennesaret **Gennesaret** is a small town on the northwest shore of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1071,13 +1071,13 @@ MAT 15 6 q3kt figs-explicit πατέρα 1 he will certainly not honor his fathe MAT 15 6 znt9 figs-explicit ἠκυρώσατε τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 you have made void the word of God Here, the phrase **the word of God** is referring to God's commandments in the Old Testament. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you have made void the God's commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 15 7 t4fq figs-exclamations ὑποκριταί 1 General Information: Jesus calls them **hypocrites** in an exclamatory way to emphasize his anger with them. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for communicating this. Alternate translation: “You are hypocrites!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) MAT 15 7 n4ti writing-quotations λέγων 1 saying Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “when he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -MAT 15 8 qw69 figs-metonymy ὁ λαὸς οὗτος τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ 1 This people honors me with their lips Isaiah, who Jesus is quoting, is using the term **lips** figuratively to mean when someone is speaking. Alternate translation: “This people honors me when they speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 15 8 qw69 figs-metonymy ὁ λαὸς οὗτος τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ 1 This people honors me with their lips Isaiah, who Jesus is quoting, is using the term **lips** to mean when someone is speaking. Alternate translation: “This people honors me when they speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 8 bz91 writing-pronouns με…ἐμοῦ 1 me … me Here, the words **me** are referring to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “me, God … me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -MAT 15 8 wuw3 figs-metonymy ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far from me Jesus is using the term **heart** figuratively to mean a person's inner thoughts or emotions. Alternate translation: “desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 15 8 wuw3 figs-metonymy ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far from me Jesus is using the term **heart** to mean a person's inner thoughts or emotions. Alternate translation: “desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 8 q7vm figs-idiom ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόρρω ἀπέχει ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 but their heart is far away from me Here, the phrase **far from me** is an idiom meaning that they do not love him. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “but they are not love me in their hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 15 8 hr29 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, **but** contrasts what is before it to what comes after it. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) MAT 15 9 vvb9 figs-possession ἐντάλματα ἀνθρώπων 1 the commandments of men James is using the possessive form to describe these **commandments** as something which are created by people instead of God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “man-made” instead of the noun “men.” Alternate translation: “man-made commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -MAT 15 11 s28y figs-metonymy οὐ τὸ εἰσερχόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἀλλὰ τὸ ἐκπορευόμενον ἐκ τοῦ στόματος, τοῦτο κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 enters into the mouth … what comes out of the mouth Jesus is using the phrase **enters into the mouth** to mean what a person eats. He is using the phrase **comes out from the mouth** to mean what a person says. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Nothing that a person eats defiles them, but what a person says, this is what defiles them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])\n +MAT 15 11 s28y figs-metonymy οὐ τὸ εἰσερχόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἀλλὰ τὸ ἐκπορευόμενον ἐκ τοῦ στόματος, τοῦτο κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 enters into the mouth … what comes out of the mouth Jesus is using the phrase **enters into the mouth** to mean what a person eats. He is using the phrase **comes out from the mouth** to mean what a person says. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Nothing that a person eats defiles them, but what a person says, this is what defiles them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 12 l2uj figs-activepassive οἱ Φαρισαῖοι…ἐσκανδαλίσθησαν 1 the Pharisees, having heard this word, were offended If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The Pharisees … were upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 13 n5ij figs-metaphor πᾶσα φυτεία ἣν οὐκ ἐφύτευσεν ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος ἐκριζωθήσεται 1 Every plant that my heavenly Father has not planted will be uprooted Here, Jesus refers to the Pharisees as if they were plants. He also speaks of God as if he is a farmer who **uproots** the plants, or judges them. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “The Pharisees are like plants that my Heavenly Father will pull up because he did not plant them” or “The Pharisees will be judged severely by my Heavenly Father because they do not obey him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 15 13 j49e guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος 1 my heavenly Father **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -1089,7 +1089,7 @@ MAT 15 16 al9z figs-rquestion ἀκμὴν καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετο MAT 15 17 l5nt figs-rquestion οὔπω νοεῖτε ὅτι πᾶν τὸ εἰσπορευόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα, εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν χωρεῖ, καὶ εἰς ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκβάλλεται? 1 Do you not yet understand that everything that enters into the mouth passes into the stomach and is passed out into the latrine? Jesus is using the question form to challenge his disciples. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You ought to understand that everything that go into a persons mouth passes into the stomach and is passed out into the toilet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 15 17 s9z6 translate-unknown ἀφεδρῶνα 1 the latrine Here, **latrine** is a word which means the place where you bury your bodily waste. Your language and culture may have a term for this that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 15 18 ca1w figs-metonymy τὰ…ἐκπορευόμενα ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 1 the things that proceed out from the mouth Jesus is using the phrase **proceeding out of the mouth** to mean speaking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the things which a person speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 15 18 jt6o figs-metonymy τῆς καρδίας 1 Jesus is using the term **heart** figuratively to mean a persons inner desires or thoughts. If it would it would be helpful to your readers, you can state this in a plain way. Alternate translation: “a persons inner thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 15 18 jt6o figs-metonymy τῆς καρδίας 1 Jesus is using the term **heart** to mean a persons inner desires or thoughts. If it would it would be helpful to your readers, you can state this in a plain way. Alternate translation: “a persons inner thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 15 20 bme7 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον…ἄνθρωπον 1 to eat with unwashed hands Although the term **man** is masculine, Jesus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “people” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MAT 15 21 e5gv writing-newevent 0 General Information: Here, Matthew is introducing a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 15 21 t81u figs-explicit ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν 1 Jesus withdrew It is implied that the disciples went with Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples withdrew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1101,7 +1101,7 @@ MAT 15 24 t9ga figs-activepassive οὐκ ἀπεστάλην 1 I was not sent I MAT 15 24 wfnx grammar-connect-exceptions οὐκ ἀπεστάλην εἰ μὴ εἰς τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα οἴκου Ἰσραήλ 1 If it would in appear your language that Jesus was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “I was sent only for the lost sheep of the house of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) MAT 15 24 u9t4 figs-metaphor εἰς τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα οἴκου Ἰσραήλ 1 to the lost sheep of the house of Israel Here, Jesus is referring to the people of **Israel** who have gone astray as **lost sheep**. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel who have wandered like lost sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 15 25 u3jj translate-symaction προσεκύνει αὐτῷ 1 bowed down to him Here, **bowing down to him** was a sign of honor which was often shown in their culture. If it would be helpful to your readers, use a similar action from your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -MAT 15 26 ihz4 writing-proverbs οὐκ ἔστιν καλὸν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων καὶ βαλεῖν τοῖς κυναρίοις 1 It is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw it to the little dogs This proverb draws a figurative comparison: The people of Israel are like the children of a house because they are the offspring of the parents. But non-Israelite people are like dogs because they are not the offspring. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “It is not good to share the message intended for the people of Israel with those from other places” or “It is not good to give something to a person for whom it was not intended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 15 26 ihz4 writing-proverbs οὐκ ἔστιν καλὸν λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων καὶ βαλεῖν τοῖς κυναρίοις 1 It is not good to take the bread of the children and to throw it to the little dogs This proverb draws a figurative comparison: The people of Israel are like the children of a house because they are the offspring of the parents. But non-Israelite people are like dogs because they are not the offspring. You can translate the proverb itself in a way that will be recognized as a proverb and be meaningful in your language and culture. Alternate translation: “It is not good to share the message intended for the people of Israel with those from other places” or “It is not good to give something to a person for whom it was not intended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 15 26 a5bc figs-synecdoche τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων 1 the bread of the children Jesus is using **bread** to represent food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 15 27 yvw1 figs-metaphor καὶ…τὰ κυνάρια ἐσθίει ἀπὸ τῶν ψιχίων τῶν πιπτόντων ἀπὸ τῆς τραπέζης τῶν κυρίων αὐτῶν 1 even the little dogs eat from the crumbs that fall from the tables of their masters The woman responds by using the same imagery as Jesus used in the metaphor he just spoke. She means non-Jews should be able to have a small amount of the good things Jews are throwing away. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 15 27 i5tt τὰ κυνάρια 1 the little dogs See how you translated **little dogs** in the previous verse. @@ -1114,7 +1114,7 @@ MAT 15 30 yf7i figs-idiom ἔρριψαν αὐτοὺς παρὰ τοὺς π MAT 15 30 gy3h writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 Here, the word **them** is referring to the many sick people. If this might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sick people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MAT 15 31 be52 figs-nominaladj κωφοὺς…κυλλοὺς…χωλοὺς…τυφλοὺς 1 the crippled … the lame … the blind See the note in the previous verse for how to translate these adjectives. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 15 33 uhi3 figs-rquestion πόθεν ἡμῖν ἐν ἐρημίᾳ, ἄρτοι τοσοῦτοι ὥστε χορτάσαι ὄχλον τοσοῦτον? 1 From where would be to us in a wilderness enough bread to satisfy so large a crowd? The disciples are using the question form to challenge Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “There is certainly no place in the wilderness where we can get enough food to feed this large crowd!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]). -MAT 15 34 k86l figs-ellipsis ἑπτά 1 Seven, and a few small fish The disciples are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “seven loaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 15 34 k86l figs-ellipsis ἑπτά 1 Seven, and a few small fish The disciples are leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “seven loaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 15 36 a9s4 figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ μαθηταὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις 1 was giving them Matthew is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the disciples were giving them to the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 15 38 z66m translate-numbers τετρακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 4,000 men Alternate translation: “four thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 15 39 m8dp translate-names Μαγαδάν 1 of Magadan This region is sometimes called “Magdala.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 9a62d63615cbbb7a79cfe3a420538a21759973f6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 14:08:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 314/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index d64e7a01a5..6cf76fc43a 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -128,9 +128,9 @@ GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alt GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “to ensure I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” -GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] +GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases are making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is a passive phrase. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner Titus to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From c2b334a4b4f2e1bd270c26dfeae504130ad6716f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 14:11:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 315/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 6cf76fc43a..0bbeab8cac 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running— GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases are making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is a passive phrase. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner Titus to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner Titus to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From e2adfd7e08e04a93767768e238ac19c737d58ffd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 14:20:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 317/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 0bbeab8cac..f353e37766 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running— GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases are making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner Titus to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner Titus to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 50edcb2d4375bff7ba02653bfa6006acaa407299 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 10:40:17 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 318/446] Changed "non-figuratively" to "plainly" in completed NT books --- en_tn_52-COL.tsv | 130 +++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_63-1JN.tsv | 2 +- 3 files changed, 67 insertions(+), 67 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv index 8fe6126955..08b5833062 100644 --- a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ COL 1 9 s903 figs-infostructure πληρωθῆτε τὴν ἐπίγνωσιν COL 1 9 mzz8 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ συνέσει πνευματικῇ 1 in all wisdom and spiritual understanding If your language does not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **wisdom** and **understanding**, you can express the ideas with adjectives or verbs. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “which includes being spiritually very wise and intelligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 1 9 k8x2 σοφίᾳ καὶ συνέσει πνευματικῇ 1 Here, **spiritual wisdom and understanding** could refer to: (1) wisdom and understanding that comes from the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “wisdom and understanding given by the Holy Spirit” (2) wisdom and understanding in spiritual matters. Alternate translation: “wisdom and understanding about spiritual things” COL 1 9 w78g figs-doublet σοφίᾳ καὶ συνέσει πνευματικῇ 1 in all wisdom and spiritual understanding The words **wisdom** and **understanding** mean very similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize the breadth of spiritual wisdom. If your language does not use repetition in this way or has only one word for this concept, you can use just one word. Alternate translation: “spiritual comprehension” or “spiritual insight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -COL 1 10 m4hf figs-metaphor περιπατῆσαι ἀξίως τοῦ Κυρίου 1 to walk worthily of the Lord Here, the word **walk** is a figurative way to refer to behavior in life. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to behave in the way that the Lord expects you to behave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 1 10 m4hf figs-metaphor περιπατῆσαι ἀξίως τοῦ Κυρίου 1 to walk worthily of the Lord Here, the word **walk** is a figurative way to refer to behavior in life. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to behave in the way that the Lord expects you to behave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 1 10 vv4g figs-abstractnouns εἰς πᾶσαν ἀρεσκείαν 1 in every pleasing way If your language does not use abstract nouns, you can express the idea behind the phrase **pleasing way** with a verb. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “doing everything that pleases him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 1 10 vfp3 figs-metaphor ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ ἀγαθῷ καρποφοροῦντες 1 bearing fruit Paul is speaking of the Colossian believers as if they were trees or plants and of the things that they do as if it were their fruit. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a different figure or in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “performing many good deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 1 10 b9l1 figs-abstractnouns αὐξανόμενοι τῇ ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you can express the idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “knowing God better and better” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ COL 1 23 lptz translate-unknown τῇ ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν 1 In Pau COL 1 23 g8iq figs-personification οὗ ἐγενόμην ἐγὼ Παῦλος διάκονος 1 of which I, Paul, became a servant Here Paul speaks as if the good news were a person of whom he could become **a servant**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could explain that Paul is **a servant** of God, but his task from God is to proclaim the good news. Alternate translation: “which I, Paul, proclaim as God has commanded me, his servant, to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) COL 1 24 z01x grammar-connect-words-phrases νῦν 1 The word **Now** indicates that Paul wishes to tell the Colossians how he is currently serving the gospel. It does not indicate a change of topic, as it sometimes does in English. If **Now** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a longer phrase to express this idea. Alternate translation: “While I write this letter,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) COL 1 24 gq1n ἐν τοῖς παθήμασιν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “while I suffer for your sake” -COL 1 24 fm9y figs-metaphor ἀνταναπληρῶ τὰ ὑστερήματα τῶν θλίψεων τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου 1 I fill up in my flesh Paul speaks of his **flesh** as if it were a container that could **fill** up with **afflictions**. By this, he means that his bodily sufferings function to satisfy a specific purpose, which here is to finish what **Christ** started with his **afflictions**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “with my bodily suffering, I finish what the Messiah started when he suffered. I do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 1 24 fm9y figs-metaphor ἀνταναπληρῶ τὰ ὑστερήματα τῶν θλίψεων τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐν τῇ σαρκί μου 1 I fill up in my flesh Paul speaks of his **flesh** as if it were a container that could **fill** up with **afflictions**. By this, he means that his bodily sufferings function to satisfy a specific purpose, which here is to finish what **Christ** started with his **afflictions**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “with my bodily suffering, I finish what the Messiah started when he suffered. I do this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 1 24 nb2g figs-explicit τὰ ὑστερήματα τῶν θλίψεων τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul is not saying that there is a **lack** in Christ’s **afflictions** because those **afflictions** did not succeed in doing what they were supposed to do. Instead, the **lack** refers to what Christ wished for his disciples to do as his servants. The **lack**, then, is something that Christ intentionally did not accomplish, because he wanted Paul to do it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rephrase **lack** so that it is clearer that Christ intentionally left something for Paul to do. Alternate translation: “the afflictions that Christ has called me to suffer to complete his work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 1 24 k5yd figs-possession τὰ ὑστερήματα τῶν θλίψεων τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul uses two possessive forms to speak about the **lack** that characterizes the **afflictions** that **Christ** suffered. If your language would not use possessive forms to express that idea, you could express the idea with a relative clause or two clauses. Alternate translation: “what Christ, when he suffered, left for me to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 1 24 mge9 figs-metaphor τοῦ σώματος αὐτοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἡ ἐκκλησία 1 for the sake of his body, which is the church Here Paul speaks of the **church** as if it were Christ’s **body**, and he provides the explanation of what **body** means. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could refer to the **church** first and then identify it as his **body**. Alternate translation: “the church, which is his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -167,8 +167,8 @@ COL 2 1 fn4z figs-explicit ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, καὶ τῶν ἐν Λαοδ COL 2 1 rj7d figs-idiom οὐχ ἑόρακαν τὸ πρόσωπόν μου ἐν σαρκί 1 as many as have not seen my face in the flesh In Paul’s culture, seeing a **face in the flesh** refers to meeting someone in person. If the meaning of **have not seen my face in the flesh** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “have not personally made my acquaintance” or “have not personally met me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 2 2 ge1w figs-123person αὐτῶν 1 so that their hearts Paul here switches from the second person to the third person because he wishes to include everyone he has not met in person, including the Colossians. If this switch would be misunderstood in your language, you could (1) use the second person from the previous verse but make it clear that this includes everyone Paul has not met in person. Alternate translation “your hearts and their” (2) retain the third person here and reverse the list in the previous verse as suggested by the note there (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) COL 2 2 oyih figs-activepassive παρακληθῶσιν αἱ καρδίαι αὐτῶν, συμβιβασθέντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express these verbs in their active forms, with Paul as the subject of the “encouraging” and God as the subject of the “bringing together.” Alternate translation: “I might encourage their hearts, with God bringing them together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -COL 2 2 spxx figs-synecdoche αἱ καρδίαι αὐτῶν 1 Here when Paul refers to **their hearts**, the Colossians would have understood him to mean the entire person. Paul uses **hearts** because his culture identified **hearts** as the body part where people experienced encouragement. If that meaning of **their hearts** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the location where people experience encouragement in your culture, or you could express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -COL 2 2 a4px figs-metaphor πᾶν πλοῦτος τῆς πληροφορίας 1 having been brought together Paul here speaks as if **full assurance** could be characterized as having **all the riches**. He uses this metaphor to describe **the full assurance** as complete and valuable. If **all the riches of the full assurance** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the complete and valuable full assurance” or “all the blessings of the full assurance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 2 spxx figs-synecdoche αἱ καρδίαι αὐτῶν 1 Here when Paul refers to **their hearts**, the Colossians would have understood him to mean the entire person. Paul uses **hearts** because his culture identified **hearts** as the body part where people experienced encouragement. If that meaning of **their hearts** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the location where people experience encouragement in your culture, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +COL 2 2 a4px figs-metaphor πᾶν πλοῦτος τῆς πληροφορίας 1 having been brought together Paul here speaks as if **full assurance** could be characterized as having **all the riches**. He uses this metaphor to describe **the full assurance** as complete and valuable. If **all the riches of the full assurance** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the complete and valuable full assurance” or “all the blessings of the full assurance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 2 kdg8 figs-possession τῆς πληροφορίας τῆς συνέσεως 1 all the riches of the full assurance of understanding Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **full assurance** that is gained from **understanding**. From the rest of the verse, it is clear that what is “understood” is **the mystery of God**. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a relative clause to translate **of understanding**. Alternate translation: “of the full assurance that comes from understanding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 2 2 qgi2 figs-abstractnouns εἰς πᾶν πλοῦτος τῆς πληροφορίας τῆς συνέσεως; εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν τοῦ μυστηρίου τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 of the mystery of God If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **full assurance**, **understanding**, and **knowledge**, you can express the ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “having all the riches that come when they completely trust God because they understand, that is, they know the mystery of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 2 2 ahpn figs-doublet τῆς συνέσεως; εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν 1 of the mystery of God Here, the words **understanding** and **knowledge** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses both words to emphasize the breadth of spiritual knowledge he speaks about. If your language does not use repetition in this way or has only one word for this concept, you can use just one word or translate **understanding** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “of wise knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -185,9 +185,9 @@ COL 2 4 ksh8 μηδεὶς ὑμᾶς παραλογίζηται 1 Alternate t COL 2 4 y4r3 translate-unknown πιθανολογίᾳ 1 persuasive speech The phrase **persuasive speech** refers to arguments that appear plausible. The phrase itself does not suggest that the arguments are true or false, but the context here suggests that the arguments are false even though they sound believable. If **persuasive speech** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or a short phrase that expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “plausible arguments” or “words that sound true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 2 5 ydw1 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 The word **For** introduces further support for why the Colossians should not be “deceived” ([2:4](../02/04.md)). Even if Paul is physically absent, he is thinking about them and caring for them. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could specify what the word **For** is supporting. Alternate translation: “This persuasive speech is false because,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) COL 2 5 ubd9 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…καὶ 1 Paul speaks as if being “absent” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language would not use a conditional statement for something that is a current fact, you could translate these words as an affirmation. Alternate translation: “while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -COL 2 5 g1rp figs-idiom τῇ σαρκὶ ἄπειμι 1 I am absent in the flesh In Paul’s culture, being **absent in the flesh** is a figurative way to speak about not being present in person. If **absent in the flesh** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or translate the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I am not there with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +COL 2 5 g1rp figs-idiom τῇ σαρκὶ ἄπειμι 1 I am absent in the flesh In Paul’s culture, being **absent in the flesh** is a figurative way to speak about not being present in person. If **absent in the flesh** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or translate the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not there with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 2 5 fz3t grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 The word **yet** introduces a contrast with “absent in the flesh.” While the Colossians might expect that, since Paul is “absent in the flesh,” he is also absent “in the spirit,” Paul says the opposite: he is with them “in the spirit.” Use a word that indicates contrast or contraexpectation in your language. Alternate translation: “despite this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -COL 2 5 bz56 figs-idiom τῷ πνεύματι σὺν ὑμῖν εἰμι 1 I am with you in the spirit In Paul’s culture, being with someone **in the spirit** is a figurative way to speak of thinking about and caring about that person. If **with you in the spirit** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I am still connected to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +COL 2 5 bz56 figs-idiom τῷ πνεύματι σὺν ὑμῖν εἰμι 1 I am with you in the spirit In Paul’s culture, being with someone **in the spirit** is a figurative way to speak of thinking about and caring about that person. If **with you in the spirit** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “I am still connected to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 2 5 yvvr τῷ πνεύματι 1 I am with you in the spirit Here, **the spirit** could refer to: (1) Paul’s spirit, which would be the part of him that rejoices over the Colossians from a distance. Alternate translation: “in my spirit” (2) the Holy Spirit, which connects Paul with the Colossians, even though they are not physically together. Alternate translation: “in God’s Spirit” or “by the power of God’s Spirit” COL 2 5 w0ye grammar-connect-time-simultaneous χαίρων καὶ βλέπων 1 Here, **rejoicing and seeing** are what Paul does while he is with them “in the spirit.” If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make the relationship between the ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: (adding a period after “spirit”) “When I think about you, I rejoice and see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) COL 2 5 t8mc figs-hendiadys χαίρων καὶ βλέπων 1 Paul here expresses a single idea with the two words **rejoicing** and **seeing**. He means that he “rejoices” when he “sees.” If **rejoicing and seeing** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea by translating **rejoicing** as an adverb or prepositional phrase. Alternate translation: “joyfully seeing” or “seeing with joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -196,12 +196,12 @@ COL 2 5 hth1 figs-possession τὸ στερέωμα…πίστεως ὑμῶν COL 2 5 kw3x figs-abstractnouns τὸ στερέωμα…πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 the strength of your faith If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words **strength** and **faith**, you can express the ideas behind these abstract nouns in another way. Alternate translation: “how you strongly believe” or “the fact that you firmly believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 2 6 a6cr grammar-connect-words-phrases οὖν 1 The word **Therefore** draws an inference or conclusion from what Paul has said in [2:1–5](../02/01.md), which includes the truth about Paul and the benefits that flow from knowing the Messiah. If **Therefore** by itself would be misunderstood in your language, you could specify from what does Paul draw his inference. Alternate translation: “Because of what I have told you about myself and about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) COL 2 6 wqwi figs-infostructure ὡς…παρελάβετε τὸν Χριστὸν Ἰησοῦν τὸν Κύριον, ἐν αὐτῷ περιπατεῖτε, 1 Paul here draws a comparison between the way in which the Colossians **received** the Messiah and the way in which he wishes them to behave now. If your language would put the comparison second, you could reverse the two clauses. Alternate translation: “walk in Christ Jesus the Lord just as you received him” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure) -COL 2 6 s99k figs-metaphor παρελάβετε τὸν Χριστὸν 1 Paul says that the Colossians **received Christ** as if they had welcomed him into their homes or received him as a gift. What this means is that they believed in Jesus and the teachings about him. If **received Christ** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to coming to believe in Jesus, or you could express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you first believed in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 6 s99k figs-metaphor παρελάβετε τὸν Χριστὸν 1 Paul says that the Colossians **received Christ** as if they had welcomed him into their homes or received him as a gift. What this means is that they believed in Jesus and the teachings about him. If **received Christ** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to coming to believe in Jesus, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you first believed in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 6 m3f1 figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ περιπατεῖτε 1 walk in him This command does not require the Colossians to walk around inside Jesus. Rather, in Paul’s culture, to **walk** is a common metaphor for how people live their lives, and the words **in him** refer to being united to Christ. If **walk in him** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a verb that refers to behavior in life and connect it with how you have translated “in Christ” elsewhere. Alternate translation: “act as those who are united to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 7 e2x6 figs-explicit ἐρριζωμένοι…ἐποικοδομούμενοι…βεβαιούμενοι…περισσεύοντες 1 being rooted … built up in him … confirmed in the faith … abounding in thanksgiving Paul uses these four verbs to give examples of how the Colossians should “walk in” the Messiah ([2:6](../02/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could add a phrase that makes this relationship clear. Alternate translation: “Walking in him entails being rooted … built up … confirmed … abounding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 2 7 en3l figs-activepassive ἐρριζωμένοι…ἐποικοδομούμενοι…βεβαιούμενοι 1 If your language does not use these passive forms, you can translate all three of these words in their active forms with the Colossians as the subject. Alternate translation: “rooting yourselves … building yourselves up … having confidence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -COL 2 7 fw47 figs-metaphor ἐρριζωμένοι…ἐν αὐτῷ 1 being rooted Paul wants the Colossians to be united so closely to Christ that he speaks of this union as if the Colossians were a plant with roots growing into Christ. If this image would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor, or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “being closely connected with … in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -COL 2 7 tb5m figs-metaphor καὶ ἐποικοδομούμενοι ἐν αὐτῷ 1 built up in him Paul wants the Colossians to base everything they think and do on Christ as if they were a house built on Christ, who is the foundation. If this image would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor, or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “in him, and basing everything you think and do on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 7 fw47 figs-metaphor ἐρριζωμένοι…ἐν αὐτῷ 1 being rooted Paul wants the Colossians to be united so closely to Christ that he speaks of this union as if the Colossians were a plant with roots growing into Christ. If this image would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “being closely connected with … in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 7 tb5m figs-metaphor καὶ ἐποικοδομούμενοι ἐν αὐτῷ 1 built up in him Paul wants the Colossians to base everything they think and do on Christ as if they were a house built on Christ, who is the foundation. If this image would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “in him, and basing everything you think and do on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 7 yh83 translate-unknown βεβαιούμενοι τῇ πίστει 1 confirmed in the faith The word **confirmed** refers to something being sure or valid. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or a short phrase. Alternate translation: “sure about the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 2 7 umcl figs-abstractnouns τῇ πίστει 1 confirmed in the faith If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express the idea in a different way, such as with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “in what you believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 2 7 l1is figs-activepassive ἐδιδάχθητε 1 just as you were taught If your language does not use this passive form, you can translate this verb (1) in its active form with Epaphras as the subject (we know he was their teacher from [1:7](../01/07.md)) (2) with a verb such as “learned.” Alternate translation: “you learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -215,39 +215,39 @@ COL 2 8 l9jt figs-abstractnouns τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν ἀνθρώπ COL 2 8 oy49 figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 the tradition of men … the elemental teaching of the world Although the word **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If **men** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) COL 2 8 jg16 translate-unknown τὰ στοιχεῖα τοῦ κόσμου 1 The phrase **elemental teaching** could refer to (1) basic human opinions about how the world works. Alternate translation: “human worldviews” (2) the spiritual powers of this world. Alternate translation: “spiritual beings that rule the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 2 9 slg7 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 The word **for** introduces a reason why the Colossians need to watch out for anyone who provides teaching that is “not according to Christ” ([2:8](../02/08.md)): Christ is God and provides access to God. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make what Paul is supporting more explicit. Alternate translation: “You must beware of any teaching without Christ, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -COL 2 9 ahq5 figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ κατοικεῖ πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα τῆς Θεότητος σωματικῶς 1 in him all the fullness of God dwells in bodily form Paul speaks as if Jesus were a place in which complete divinity (**fullness of deity**) lives (**dwells**). This metaphor indicates that Jesus, who is human (**in bodily form**), is truly and fully God. If this metaphor does not indicate Jesus’ full divinity and full humanity in your language, you could express this idea with a metaphor that does indicate this or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “he is both fully God and fully man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 9 ahq5 figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ κατοικεῖ πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα τῆς Θεότητος σωματικῶς 1 in him all the fullness of God dwells in bodily form Paul speaks as if Jesus were a place in which complete divinity (**fullness of deity**) lives (**dwells**). This metaphor indicates that Jesus, who is human (**in bodily form**), is truly and fully God. If this metaphor does not indicate Jesus’ full divinity and full humanity in your language, you could express this idea with a metaphor that does indicate this or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he is both fully God and fully man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 9 m529 figs-abstractnouns πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα τῆς Θεότητος 1 in him all the fullness of God dwells in bodily form If your language does not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **fullness** and **deity**, you can express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “everything that it means to be God” or “everything that belongs fully to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 2 10 oykt grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 The word **and** introduces another reason why the Colossians need to watch out for anyone who provides teaching that is “not according to Christ” ([2:8](../02/08.md)): not only is Christ fully God ([2:9](../02/09.md)), but he provides the way in which the Colossians are filled with everything they need. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this link more explicit. Alternate translation: “and furthermore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -COL 2 10 lbk7 figs-metaphor ἐστὲ ἐν αὐτῷ πεπληρωμένοι 1 you are filled in him Here Paul speaks as if people were containers that are filled when they are united to Christ, which means that people receive everything they need, including salvation, in their union with Christ. The word **filled** is very similar to the word Paul used in [2:9](../02/09.md) for “fullness.” If your language uses similar words in these two sentences, you could use a word like the one you used in [2:9](../02/09.md). If not, you could express this idea in another way, using a comparable metaphor, or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you lack nothing because of your union with the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 10 lbk7 figs-metaphor ἐστὲ ἐν αὐτῷ πεπληρωμένοι 1 you are filled in him Here Paul speaks as if people were containers that are filled when they are united to Christ, which means that people receive everything they need, including salvation, in their union with Christ. The word **filled** is very similar to the word Paul used in [2:9](../02/09.md) for “fullness.” If your language uses similar words in these two sentences, you could use a word like the one you used in [2:9](../02/09.md). If not, you could express this idea in another way, using a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “you lack nothing because of your union with the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 10 sbi0 figs-activepassive ἐστὲ…πεπληρωμένοι 1 If in your language does not use this passive form, you can translate this verb in the active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God has filled you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -COL 2 10 je36 figs-metaphor ἡ κεφαλὴ πάσης ἀρχῆς καὶ ἐξουσίας 1 who is the head of all rule and authority The expression **head of** here refers to supremacy and authority over something or somebody. If **head** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively with another noun, such as “sovereign” or “ruler,” or a verb, such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “the sovereign over all rule and authority” or “the one who rules over all rule and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 10 je36 figs-metaphor ἡ κεφαλὴ πάσης ἀρχῆς καὶ ἐξουσίας 1 who is the head of all rule and authority The expression **head of** here refers to supremacy and authority over something or somebody. If **head** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly with another noun, such as “sovereign” or “ruler,” or a verb, such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “the sovereign over all rule and authority” or “the one who rules over all rule and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 10 pwg2 translate-unknown πάσης ἀρχῆς καὶ ἐξουσίας 1 The words **rule** and **authority** could refer to (1) powerful spiritual beings, as in [1:16](../01/16.md). Translate these words here as you translated them there. Alternate translation: “of all spirit beings who govern and rule” (2) anyone or anything with power and authority. Alternate translation: “of anyone with power and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -COL 2 11 xeq7 figs-exmetaphor καὶ περιετμήθητε περιτομῇ ἀχειροποιήτῳ, ἐν τῇ ἀπεκδύσει τοῦ σώματος τῆς σαρκός, ἐν τῇ περιτομῇ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in whom you were also circumcised Here Paul uses **circumcision** as an image to describe what happens to believers when they are united to the Messiah. In the metaphor, the **circumcision** is completed **without hands**, which means that God accomplishes it. What is “removed” or cut off is the **body of flesh**, which refers to the broken and sinful parts of the person. If this metaphor about **circumcision** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with the language of analogy or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you were also marked off by God as his own when he took away your body of flesh by the work of the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +COL 2 11 xeq7 figs-exmetaphor καὶ περιετμήθητε περιτομῇ ἀχειροποιήτῳ, ἐν τῇ ἀπεκδύσει τοῦ σώματος τῆς σαρκός, ἐν τῇ περιτομῇ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in whom you were also circumcised Here Paul uses **circumcision** as an image to describe what happens to believers when they are united to the Messiah. In the metaphor, the **circumcision** is completed **without hands**, which means that God accomplishes it. What is “removed” or cut off is the **body of flesh**, which refers to the broken and sinful parts of the person. If this metaphor about **circumcision** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with the language of analogy or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “you were also marked off by God as his own when he took away your body of flesh by the work of the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) COL 2 11 f6ek figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ καὶ περιετμήθητε 1 in whom you were also circumcised If your language does not use this passive form, you can translate this verb in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “in whom God also circumcised you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) COL 2 11 ii43 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ἀπεκδύσει τοῦ σώματος τῆς σαρκός 1 with a circumcision made without hands If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **removal**, you can express the idea with a verb such as “remove.” Alternate translation: “when he removed the body of flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 2 11 m3xu figs-possession ἐν τῇ περιτομῇ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, Paul uses the possessive form to connect **circumcision** with **Christ**. This does not refer to when Christ himself was circumcised or how he himself circumcises believers. Instead, the possessive form connects the extended metaphor of circumcision with Christ’s work: the circumcision that Paul speaks about is accomplished in what Christ has done. If your language does not use this form to express that idea, you can make the relationship between **circumcision** and **Christ** more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the circumcision accomplished by Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 2 11 fw80 figs-metonymy τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the word **Christ** to refer primarily to what **Christ** has accomplished. If your language does not use a person’s name to identify something that they have done, you can clarify that Paul is speaking of the “work” **of Christ**. Alternate translation: “that comes from what Christ did” or “that Christ’s work accomplished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -COL 2 12 ln8e figs-metaphor συνταφέντες αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ βαπτισμῷ 1 having been buried with him in baptism Paul here uses a metaphor that connects **baptism** to “burial” to further explain what happens to believers when they are united to Christ. This metaphor expresses how, when they are baptized, believers are united to Christ in his (death and) burial and are no longer who they once were. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with the language of analogy, or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “having been united with the Messiah in his burial when you were baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 12 ln8e figs-metaphor συνταφέντες αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ βαπτισμῷ 1 having been buried with him in baptism Paul here uses a metaphor that connects **baptism** to “burial” to further explain what happens to believers when they are united to Christ. This metaphor expresses how, when they are baptized, believers are united to Christ in his (death and) burial and are no longer who they once were. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with the language of analogy, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “having been united with the Messiah in his burial when you were baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 12 s2a0 figs-synecdoche συνταφέντες 1 Here Paul refers only to being **buried**, but he also implies “dying.” If **buried** would not include the idea of “dying” in your language, you could include “dying” in your translation. Alternate translation: “having died and been buried with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) COL 2 12 r8l8 figs-activepassive συνταφέντες αὐτῷ 1 having been buried with him in baptism If your language does not use this passive form, you can translate this phrase in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God burying you with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -COL 2 12 g1rq figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ…συνηγέρθητε 1 in whom you were raised up Paul here explains that believers are not only united to Christ in his burial but also in his resurrection. It is by being united to him in his resurrection that believers receive new life. If believers being **raised up** now would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “in union with the Messiah in his resurrection you received new life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 12 g1rq figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ…συνηγέρθητε 1 in whom you were raised up Paul here explains that believers are not only united to Christ in his burial but also in his resurrection. It is by being united to him in his resurrection that believers receive new life. If believers being **raised up** now would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in union with the Messiah in his resurrection you received new life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 12 yp7u figs-activepassive συνηγέρθητε 1 in whom you were raised up If your language does not use this passive form, you can translate the idea in its active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God raised you up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) COL 2 12 rec6 figs-idiom συνηγέρθητε…τοῦ ἐγείραντος αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 you were raised up Paul uses the words **raised up** and **raised him from the dead** to refer to someone who had died and then came back to life. If your language does not use these words to describe coming back to life, use a comparable idiom or a short phrase. Alternate translation: “you were restored to life … who restored him to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 2 12 oo6l figs-abstractnouns διὰ τῆς πίστεως τῆς ἐνεργείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 you were raised up If your language does not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **faith** and **power**, you can express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “because you trusted in the powerful God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 2 12 j4uy figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “among the dead people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) COL 2 13 oxde writing-pronouns ὑμᾶς νεκροὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς παραπτώμασιν καὶ τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν, συνεζωοποίησεν ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul begins the sentence with **you**, and then he restates **you** when he identifies what God has done for **you**. If your language would not restate **you** or use this structure, you could separate the two uses of **you** into separate sentences. Alternate translation: “you were dead in the trespasses and the uncircumcision of your flesh. Then, he made you alive together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) COL 2 13 c40c grammar-connect-time-background νεκροὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς παραπτώμασιν καὶ τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν 1 This clause does not refer to the current situation of the Colossians, but rather it describes their situation before God acted to make them alive, as expressed in the rest of the verse. If the time of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that this clause describes a time before **he made you alive**. Alternate translation: “who used to be dead in the trespasses and the uncircumcision of your flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) -COL 2 13 v6vi figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς νεκροὺς ὄντας 1 you, being dead Paul speaks of people who are without Christ as if they were dead. By this he means that those who lack any relationship with God and are not united to Christ are spiritually dead. If calling the Colossians **dead** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul speaks of spiritual death or express the idea with a simile, or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you, being like dead people” or “you, being totally separated from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 13 v6vi figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς νεκροὺς ὄντας 1 you, being dead Paul speaks of people who are without Christ as if they were dead. By this he means that those who lack any relationship with God and are not united to Christ are spiritually dead. If calling the Colossians **dead** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul speaks of spiritual death or express the idea with a simile, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “you, being like dead people” or “you, being totally separated from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 13 emdw figs-metaphor νεκροὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς παραπτώμασιν καὶ τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν 1 When Paul speaks of someone **being dead in** something, this identifies both why and in what state the person is dead. In other words, the Colossians were **dead** because of their **trespasses** and because of their **uncircumcision**, and these things also characterized them while they were dead. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a phrase like “because of,” or you could translate **trespasses** and **uncircumcision** as descriptors of **dead**. Alternate translation: “being dead because of your trespasses and the uncircumcision of your flesh” or “being dead, that is, trespassing God’s commands and being uncircumcised in your flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 13 pphm translate-unknown τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν 1 Here, **uncircumcision** could refer (1) to how the Colossians were not circumcised Jews and thus not part of God’s people. Alternate translation: “among the non-Jews without God’s promises” (2) to the metaphor about circumcision in [2:11](../02/11.md). Alternate translation: “apart from God’s saving work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 2 13 gdke figs-possession τῇ ἀκροβυστίᾳ τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **flesh** that has not been “circumcised.” If your language does not express this idea with the possessive form, you can translate **uncircumcision** as an adjective. Alternate translation: “your uncircumcised flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -COL 2 13 f9ms figs-metaphor συνεζωοποίησεν ὑμᾶς σὺν αὐτῷ 1 you, being dead … he made you alive together Here Paul speaks of God’s work in restoring people to himself as if he brought these people back to life physically. If this image would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul speaks of spiritual life or express the idea with a simile or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “he did something like making you alive together with him” or “he restored you to proper relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 13 f9ms figs-metaphor συνεζωοποίησεν ὑμᾶς σὺν αὐτῷ 1 you, being dead … he made you alive together Here Paul speaks of God’s work in restoring people to himself as if he brought these people back to life physically. If this image would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that Paul speaks of spiritual life or express the idea with a simile or plainly. Alternate translation: “he did something like making you alive together with him” or “he restored you to proper relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 13 upyk writing-pronouns συνεζωοποίησεν ὑμᾶς σὺν αὐτῷ 1 The word **he** refers to God the Father, while the word translated **him** refers to God the Son. If these pronouns would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify the antecedent of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “he made you alive together with the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -COL 2 14 w22z figs-metaphor ἐξαλείψας τὸ καθ’ ἡμῶν χειρόγραφον τοῖς δόγμασιν, ὃ ἦν ὑπεναντίον ἡμῖν, καὶ αὐτὸ ἦρκεν ἐκ τοῦ μέσου, προσηλώσας αὐτὸ τῷ σταυρῷ; 1 having canceled the written record of the decrees against us, which were opposed to us Paul speaks of the way God forgives our sins as if God **canceled** debts that we owed him. In the metaphor, God has crossed out or erased the **written record** of those debts and thus removed any impact these debts have on our relationship to him. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “having taken away the guilt from our sins, he has kept those sins from impacting our relationship with him, having nailed them to the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 14 w22z figs-metaphor ἐξαλείψας τὸ καθ’ ἡμῶν χειρόγραφον τοῖς δόγμασιν, ὃ ἦν ὑπεναντίον ἡμῖν, καὶ αὐτὸ ἦρκεν ἐκ τοῦ μέσου, προσηλώσας αὐτὸ τῷ σταυρῷ; 1 having canceled the written record of the decrees against us, which were opposed to us Paul speaks of the way God forgives our sins as if God **canceled** debts that we owed him. In the metaphor, God has crossed out or erased the **written record** of those debts and thus removed any impact these debts have on our relationship to him. If this metaphor would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having taken away the guilt from our sins, he has kept those sins from impacting our relationship with him, having nailed them to the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 14 k0fg figs-doublet καθ’ ἡμῶν…ὃ ἦν ὑπεναντίον ἡμῖν 1 The phrases **against us** and **opposed to us** might be considered redundant in your language. If this is the case, you could combine the two phrases into one. Alternate translation: “which were opposed to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -COL 2 14 phgg figs-metaphor αὐτὸ ἦρκεν ἐκ τοῦ μέσου 1 Paul speaks as if the **written record** was within the community of believers, and God takes it away. What he means by this is that the **written record** of our sins no longer affects our relationship with God and each other. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “he has kept it from affecting our relationship with him and others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -COL 2 14 o5mx figs-metaphor προσηλώσας αὐτὸ τῷ σταυρῷ 1 Here Paul speaks as if God had nailed the “written record” to the cross. He means that Christ’s death on the cross “canceled” the “written record” as surely as if it had been nailed to the cross and died with Christ. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea using a simile, or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “destroying it through the Messiah’s death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -COL 2 15 gh24 figs-metaphor ἀπεκδυσάμενος…ἐδειγμάτισεν ἐν παρρησίᾳ…θριαμβεύσας 1 he made a public spectacle of them Here Paul speaks of God’s victory over powerful spiritual beings in terms that fit with what a conqueror often did to his prisoners in Paul’s culture. He would make a **public spectacle** or example of them, “stripping” them of their clothes and forcing them to parade behind him in his “triumph.” If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express these ideas with a comparable metaphor, or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “having defeated … he showed everyone that he had conquered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 14 phgg figs-metaphor αὐτὸ ἦρκεν ἐκ τοῦ μέσου 1 Paul speaks as if the **written record** was within the community of believers, and God takes it away. What he means by this is that the **written record** of our sins no longer affects our relationship with God and each other. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he has kept it from affecting our relationship with him and others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 14 o5mx figs-metaphor προσηλώσας αὐτὸ τῷ σταυρῷ 1 Here Paul speaks as if God had nailed the “written record” to the cross. He means that Christ’s death on the cross “canceled” the “written record” as surely as if it had been nailed to the cross and died with Christ. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea using a simile, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “destroying it through the Messiah’s death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 15 gh24 figs-metaphor ἀπεκδυσάμενος…ἐδειγμάτισεν ἐν παρρησίᾳ…θριαμβεύσας 1 he made a public spectacle of them Here Paul speaks of God’s victory over powerful spiritual beings in terms that fit with what a conqueror often did to his prisoners in Paul’s culture. He would make a **public spectacle** or example of them, “stripping” them of their clothes and forcing them to parade behind him in his “triumph.” If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express these ideas with a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “having defeated … he showed everyone that he had conquered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 15 pbkm translate-unknown τὰς ἀρχὰς καὶ τὰς ἐξουσίας 1 Just as in [1:16](../01/16.md) and [2:10](../02/10.md), the **rulers** and **authorities** could refer to (1) powerful spiritual beings that rule this world. Alternate translation: “the spiritual powers, including those known as rulers and authorities” (2) anybody or anything that rules and has authority. Alternate translation: “those who rule with authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 2 15 h7kx ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Alternate translation: “by the cross” or “through the cross” COL 2 15 cg37 figs-metonymy αὐτῷ 1 in the cross Here Paul uses **the cross** to refer to Christ’s death on the cross. If the meaning of **cross** would be misunderstood in your language, you could include a word or a phrase which includes Christ’s death. Alternate translation: “the Messiah’s death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -255,29 +255,29 @@ COL 2 16 bvs7 grammar-connect-words-phrases οὖν 1 The word **Therefore** dr COL 2 16 e1rp figs-imperative μὴ…τις ὑμᾶς κρινέτω 1 This phrase translates a third-person imperative. If your language has third-person imperatives, you could use one here. If your language does not have third-person imperatives, you can use a comparable phrase or express the idea with a second-person imperative. Alternate translation: “you should not let anyone judge you” or “do not permit anyone to judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) COL 2 16 cii9 figs-explicit ἐν βρώσει, καὶ ἐν πόσει, ἢ ἐν μέρει ἑορτῆς, ἢ νουμηνίας, ἢ Σαββάτων 1 in food or in drink This list of areas in which someone might judge the Colossians refers to parts of the law of Moses. Some of these areas were also important for other religions in Paul’s culture. If Paul’s list of things that someone could **judge** the Colossians in would be misunderstood in your translation, you could clarify that these areas are covered by the law of Moses and sometimes by the traditions of other religions as well. Alternate translation: “for you how behave in relationship to the law of Moses and other religious traditions, including in the areas of food and drink and festivals, new moons or Sabbaths.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 2 16 b4kd figs-metonymy νουμηνίας 1 in regard to a festival, or a new moon, or Sabbaths The word **new moon** refers to a festival or celebration that would take place when it was the time of the new moon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or translate the idea with a longer phrase. Alternate translation: “a new moon celebration” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -COL 2 17 ip3a figs-metaphor ἅ ἐστιν σκιὰ τῶν μελλόντων, τὸ δὲ σῶμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 which are a shadow of the things coming, but the body is of Christ A **shadow** shows the shape and outline of a **body**, but it is not the **body** itself. In a similar way, the things listed in the previous verse show the shape and outline of the **things coming**, but the **body** that casts this **shadow** is **Christ**. He is the substance of the **things coming**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “which are a foretaste of the things coming, but the full experience is of Christ” or “which hint at the things that were to come, but Christ is the one who came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 17 ip3a figs-metaphor ἅ ἐστιν σκιὰ τῶν μελλόντων, τὸ δὲ σῶμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 which are a shadow of the things coming, but the body is of Christ A **shadow** shows the shape and outline of a **body**, but it is not the **body** itself. In a similar way, the things listed in the previous verse show the shape and outline of the **things coming**, but the **body** that casts this **shadow** is **Christ**. He is the substance of the **things coming**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “which are a foretaste of the things coming, but the full experience is of Christ” or “which hint at the things that were to come, but Christ is the one who came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 17 sev8 figs-possession σκιὰ τῶν μελλόντων 1 Paul here uses the possession form to show that the **shadow** is cast by the **things coming**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express this idea, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a shadow cast by the things coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 2 17 liqe translate-unknown τῶν μελλόντων 1 The **things coming** primarily refers to things that will happen or be experienced in the future. They can be connected with both the first and the second coming of Christ, which is why the **body** is of Christ in this verse. If that meaning of **coming** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that **coming** refers to what Christ has blessed believers with at his first coming and what he will bless them with at his second coming. Alternate translation: “blessings that Christ brings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 2 17 ykh9 figs-possession τὸ…σῶμα τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify **Christ** as the **body** that casts the “shadow.” If your language would not use the possessive form to express this idea, you could express the idea with a simple “being” verb. Alternate translation: “the body is Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 2 18 aa4v figs-gendernotations μηδεὶς…ἑόρακεν…αὐτοῦ 1 The words **no one**, **he**, and **his** do not refer to one male person. Instead, they refer in a generic way to anyone who acts in these ways. If the meaning of these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate these words with a comparable generic phrase in your language or make them plural. Alternate translation: “no one … they have seen … their” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) COL 2 18 ontu figs-imperative μηδεὶς ὑμᾶς καταβραβευέτω 1 This phrase translates a third-person imperative. If your language has third-person imperatives, you could use one here. If your language does not, you can use a comparable phrase or express the idea with a second-person imperative. Alternate translation: “Do not allow anyone … deprive you of your prize” or “Be on your guard against anyone … so that he does not deprive you of your prize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -COL 2 18 zv2t figs-metaphor μηδεὶς ὑμᾶς καταβραβευέτω 1 Let no one … deprive you of your prize Here Paul refers to the false teachers as if they were judges or umpires at a contest who could decide against the Colossians, thus keeping them from receiving the prize for winning the contest. This metaphor fits with the “judging” language in [2:16](../02/16.md). These two verses together suggest that the Colossians are tempted to choose the false teachers as their judges instead of Christ. If these figures of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “Let no one … act instead of Christ as your judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 18 zv2t figs-metaphor μηδεὶς ὑμᾶς καταβραβευέτω 1 Let no one … deprive you of your prize Here Paul refers to the false teachers as if they were judges or umpires at a contest who could decide against the Colossians, thus keeping them from receiving the prize for winning the contest. This metaphor fits with the “judging” language in [2:16](../02/16.md). These two verses together suggest that the Colossians are tempted to choose the false teachers as their judges instead of Christ. If these figures of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Let no one … act instead of Christ as your judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 18 b5ce figs-abstractnouns ταπεινοφροσύνῃ 1 delighting in false humility If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **humility**, you can express the idea in another way, such as with a verb. Alternate translation: “humbling themselves falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 2 18 pmcn figs-possession θρησκείᾳ τῶν ἀγγέλων 1 Paul uses the possessive form to describe the act of worshiping angels, not the worship that angels present to God. If **worship of the angels** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify with a phrase such as “presented to.” Alternate translation: “worship presented to the angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -COL 2 18 kn5d figs-metaphor ἐμβατεύων 1 standing on things he has seen Here Paul speaks as if the false teachers were **standing** on “things they have seen.” This metaphor means that they talk about what they have seen and base teachings on it. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate **standing** with a verb that expresses this idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “constantly talking about” or “basing his teaching on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 18 kn5d figs-metaphor ἐμβατεύων 1 standing on things he has seen Here Paul speaks as if the false teachers were **standing** on “things they have seen.” This metaphor means that they talk about what they have seen and base teachings on it. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate **standing** with a verb that expresses this idea plainly. Alternate translation: “constantly talking about” or “basing his teaching on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 18 p67q figs-explicit ἃ ἑόρακεν 1 In the context of angel worship, **things he has seen** refers to visions and dreams that reveal powerful beings, heaven, the future, or other secrets. If these implications would not be understood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to these kinds of visions or dreams or use a phrase to express the idea. Alternate translation: “things he has seen in visions” or “secrets revealed to him in visions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 2 18 p7q4 figs-activepassive εἰκῇ φυσιούμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ νοὸς τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 becoming puffed up without cause by the mind of his flesh If your language does not use this passive form, you can translate the phrase in its active form. Alternate translation: “the mind of his flesh puffing him up without cause” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -COL 2 18 wp42 figs-metaphor φυσιούμενος 1 becoming puffed up Here Paul describes people who boast as if they had made themselves larger by filling themselves with air. He means that they think of themselves as more important than they really are. If **becoming puffed up** would not mean “becoming prideful” in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “becoming self-important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 18 wp42 figs-metaphor φυσιούμενος 1 becoming puffed up Here Paul describes people who boast as if they had made themselves larger by filling themselves with air. He means that they think of themselves as more important than they really are. If **becoming puffed up** would not mean “becoming prideful” in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “becoming self-important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 18 zz4a figs-abstractnouns ὑπὸ τοῦ νοὸς τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **mind**, you can express this idea by using a verb such as “think.” Alternate translation: “by how he thinks in fleshly ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 2 18 if94 figs-possession τοῦ νοὸς τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ 1 the mind of his flesh Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of a **mind** that belongs to the **flesh**. This phrase refers to thinking that is characterized by the flesh in its weakness and sinfulness. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can express the idea by translating **flesh** as an adjective. Alternate translation: “his fleshly mind” or “his weak and sinful mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -COL 2 19 m2dz figs-metaphor οὐ κρατῶν τὴν κεφαλήν 1 not holding on to the head Paul describes the false teachers as if they had let go of the **head**, which is Christ. This means that they have stopped treating Christ as the source and authority behind their teaching. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or translate the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “not staying connected to the head” or “not treating the head, which is Christ, as most important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -COL 2 19 r4ca figs-exmetaphor τὴν κεφαλήν, ἐξ οὗ πᾶν τὸ σῶμα διὰ τῶν ἁφῶν καὶ συνδέσμων ἐπιχορηγούμενον καὶ συμβιβαζόμενον, αὔξει τὴν αὔξησιν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 from which the whole body throughout the joints and ligaments is being supplied and held together In this verse Paul uses an extended metaphor in which Christ is the **head** of the **body**, which is his church, which has **joints** and **ligaments**, and which **grows**. Paul uses this metaphor to describe how Christ leads, directs, nourishes, and unifies his church to help it become what he wants it to be. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea using the language of analogy, or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to the Messiah, from whom the whole church receives nourishment and leadership and in whom the church is united as it grows with the growth from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +COL 2 19 m2dz figs-metaphor οὐ κρατῶν τὴν κεφαλήν 1 not holding on to the head Paul describes the false teachers as if they had let go of the **head**, which is Christ. This means that they have stopped treating Christ as the source and authority behind their teaching. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or translate the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “not staying connected to the head” or “not treating the head, which is Christ, as most important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 19 r4ca figs-exmetaphor τὴν κεφαλήν, ἐξ οὗ πᾶν τὸ σῶμα διὰ τῶν ἁφῶν καὶ συνδέσμων ἐπιχορηγούμενον καὶ συμβιβαζόμενον, αὔξει τὴν αὔξησιν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 from which the whole body throughout the joints and ligaments is being supplied and held together In this verse Paul uses an extended metaphor in which Christ is the **head** of the **body**, which is his church, which has **joints** and **ligaments**, and which **grows**. Paul uses this metaphor to describe how Christ leads, directs, nourishes, and unifies his church to help it become what he wants it to be. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea using the language of analogy, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “to the Messiah, from whom the whole church receives nourishment and leadership and in whom the church is united as it grows with the growth from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) COL 2 19 i2yd figs-activepassive ἐξ οὗ πᾶν τὸ σῶμα διὰ τῶν ἁφῶν καὶ συνδέσμων ἐπιχορηγούμενον καὶ συμβιβαζόμενον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the sentence in active form. Alternate translation: “which supplies and holds the whole body together throughout the joints and ligaments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) COL 2 19 qnsp translate-unknown τῶν ἁφῶν καὶ συνδέσμων 1 The word **joints** refers to where parts of the body are connected together, while the word translated **ligaments** refers to what holds these parts together. If these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could use technical terms that correspond to **joints** and **ligaments**, or you could use more general language for what holds the body together. Alternate translation: “what holds it together” or “all its parts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 2 19 wcds figs-doublet αὔξει τὴν αὔξησιν 1 The words **grows** and **growth** are directly related and may be redundant in your language. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can use just one form of “grow.” Alternate translation: “experiences the growth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) COL 2 19 n3y4 figs-possession τὴν αὔξησιν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul here speaks of **growth** that is **from God** to show that the church’s **growth** is given by **God** and fits with what **God** desires. If your language would not use this form to express that idea, you could express the idea with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “with the growth that God gives” or “with the growth that God enables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 2 20 cpki grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἀπεθάνετε σὺν Χριστῷ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, then you can translate the clause as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you died with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -COL 2 20 yg7h figs-metaphor ἀπεθάνετε σὺν Χριστῷ 1 If you died with Christ from the elemental principles of the world Paul now returns to a metaphor he has used earlier: believers have died and “been buried with” Christ ([2:12](../02/12.md)). This means that, in their union with Christ, believers share in his death so that they too have died. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use the language of analogy, or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you participated in the Messiah’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 2 20 yg7h figs-metaphor ἀπεθάνετε σὺν Χριστῷ 1 If you died with Christ from the elemental principles of the world Paul now returns to a metaphor he has used earlier: believers have died and “been buried with” Christ ([2:12](../02/12.md)). This means that, in their union with Christ, believers share in his death so that they too have died. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use the language of analogy, or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you participated in the Messiah’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 2 20 oshk figs-idiom ἀπεθάνετε σὺν Χριστῷ ἀπὸ 1 To “die from” something does not identify what caused the death, but rather it indicates what the death separated the person from. Here, then, the Colossians were separated from the **elemental principles** by participating in Christ’s death. If “dying” **from** something would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “you died with Christ, which separated you from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 2 20 ydqo translate-unknown τῶν στοιχείων τοῦ κόσμου 1 As in [2:8](../02/08.md), the word **elemental principles** could refer to (1) the spiritual powers of this world. Alternate translation: “the powerful spiritual beings in this world” (2) basic human opinions about how the world works. Alternate translation: “the basic things that humans teach about the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 2 20 uu77 figs-infostructure τί ὡς ζῶντες ἐν κόσμῳ δογματίζεσθε 1 as living in the world, are you being subjected to its decrees If this structure would be difficult to understand in your language, you could move the phrase **as living in the world** to the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “why are you being subjected to the world’s decrees as living in the world” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure) @@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ COL 2 22 cmnf figs-abstractnouns εἰς φθορὰν τῇ ἀποχρήσει COL 2 22 klsg figs-possession τὰ ἐντάλματα καὶ διδασκαλίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Paul here uses the possessive form to describe **commands and teachings** that come from **men**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can clarify that these teachings “come from” **men**. Alternate translation: “the commands and teachings that come from men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 2 22 d4lu figs-abstractnouns τὰ ἐντάλματα καὶ διδασκαλίας τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **commands** and **teachings**, you can express the idea by using verbs. Alternate translation: “what men command and teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 2 22 oqmf figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the word **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether men or women. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of men and women” or “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -COL 2 23 r2m8 figs-idiom λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας 1 Commands that have **a word of wisdom** are commands that come from wise thinking or require wise behavior. If this **having indeed a word of wisdom** would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idiom with a comparable expression, or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “are indeed characterized by wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +COL 2 23 r2m8 figs-idiom λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας 1 Commands that have **a word of wisdom** are commands that come from wise thinking or require wise behavior. If this **having indeed a word of wisdom** would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idiom with a comparable expression, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “are indeed characterized by wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 2 23 h2hk figs-metonymy λόγον 1 Here, **word** represents a message that is made up of words. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a message” or “a lesson” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 2 23 y2dc figs-hypo ἅτινά…λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας ἐν ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ καὶ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ, ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος 1 These, having indeed a word of wisdom in self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body While there is no grammatical marker for a condition here, the word **in** functionally introduces a condition: these commands have a **word of wisdom** “if” one values **self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body**. It is only if one values these things that the commands have wisdom. If Paul’s explanation of how these commands could have **wisdom** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using a conditional expression, or use the word “seem.” Alternate translation: “which, having indeed a word of wisdom if one values self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) COL 2 23 g60j figs-abstractnouns λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας ἐν ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ καὶ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ, ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος, 1 These, having indeed a word of wisdom in self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body If your language does not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **wisdom**, **religion**, **humility**, and **severity**, you can rephrase this part of the verse so that you can express these ideas with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “having indeed a word that seems wise according to people who serve God in their own way, who humble themselves for gain, and who act severely to their bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -308,22 +308,22 @@ COL 2 23 k3x6 figs-abstractnouns πλησμονὴν τῆς σαρκός 1 If COL 3 intro qtl2 0 # Colossians 3 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

[4:1](../04/01.md) belongs to the section that begins in [3:18](../03/18.md), even though it is in the next chapter.

3. Exhortation Section
* Seek the Things Above (3:1–4)
* Take off Vices, Put on Virtues (3:5–17)
* Commands for the Household (3:18–4:1)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Old and new “man”

Paul refers to the old and new “man” in [3:9–10](../03/09.md). These terms refer to the person before (“old”) and after (“new”) dying and rising with Christ. With these key words, Paul makes a similar claim to what he argued in [2:11–13](../02/11.md): believers are not who they used to be; rather, they have received new life in Christ and are new people. Your translation should reflect the idea that Paul tells the Colossians that they are new people in their union with Christ.

### The wrath of God

In [3:6](../03/06.md), Paul speaks of the “wrath of God,” which is “coming.” God’s “wrath” is not primarily an emotion, but rather, it is his act of judgment on those who do not believe and who disobey. It is “coming” because God will act in judgment soon. In your translation, emphasize God’s act over his emotion.

### No Greek and Jew …

In [3:11](../03/11.md), Paul refers to multiple different ways to categorize people in his world. See the notes on that verse for details. Paul says that none of these categories exist in the “new man.” By this, he means that these categories are not relevant for those who have died and risen with Christ. It is one’s status as a “new” person that is relevant and important.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Christ, your life

In [3:4](../03/04.md), Paul identifies Christ as the Colossians’ “life.” This metaphor comes from the previous verse, where Paul says that the Colossians’ life is “hidden with Christ.” Since their life is in Christ, Christ can be called their life. To say this a different way, the Colossians only have life in Christ, so their life and Christ’s life are bound together.

### Avoiding vices, pursuing virtues

In his exhortation to the Colossians to avoid vices and pursue virtues, Paul uses a number of metaphors. For avoiding vices, he uses the language of “putting to death” ([3:5](../03/05.md)), “laying aside” ([3:8](../03/08.md)), and “taking off” ([3:9](../03/09.md)). All these metaphors require separation from vices, whether that is pictured as putting to death parts of the body that pursue vices or as taking off evil desires as if they were clothing. For pursuing virtues, he opposes “taking off” with “putting on” ([3:10](../03/10.md); [3:12](../03/12.md)). Just as the Colossians should “take off” the desire to pursue vices, they should “put on” the desire to pursue virtues. These metaphors are all intended to help the Colossians pursue virtue instead of vice.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Vice and virtue lists

In [3:5](../03/05.md) and [3:8](../03/08.md), Paul gives lists of vices. These lists are not meant to provide a complete catalog of immoral and evil behaviors. Instead, they provide some examples that are meant to show the Colossians the kinds of behaviors that Paul has in mind. In [3:12](../03/12.md), he provides a corresponding list of virtues. The same thinking applies here: this is not a complete catalog of correct or good behavior but instead gives examples of the kinds of things that Paul wants the Colossians to do. You could introduce these lists as examples if it would help your readers understand.

### The “household code”

In [3:18](../03/18.md)–[4:1](../04/01.md), Paul uses a form that was well-known in his culture. It is often called a “household code,” and it consists of a list of instructions to different members of the household, including parents, children, slaves, and others. Paul uses this form and gives his own specific instructions to members of the household. Of course, he is not addressing a household but a church. He gives his instructions to whomever in the audience was a parent or a child or a slave. COL 3 1 r5yh grammar-connect-words-phrases οὖν 1 If, therefore The word **therefore** introduces an exhortation based on what Paul has already said about being “raised with Christ” in [2:12](../02/12.md). Use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or concluding command based on what has already been said. Alternate translation: “then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) COL 3 1 oav8 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…συνηγέρθητε τῷ Χριστῷ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since … you were raised with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -COL 3 1 t1jv figs-metaphor συνηγέρθητε τῷ Χριστῷ 1 you were raised with Christ Paul again states that believers have been raised from the dead with Christ. By this, he means that believers are united to Christ in his resurrection and thus receive new life. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “in union with the Messiah in his resurrection you received new life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 1 t1jv figs-metaphor συνηγέρθητε τῷ Χριστῷ 1 you were raised with Christ Paul again states that believers have been raised from the dead with Christ. By this, he means that believers are united to Christ in his resurrection and thus receive new life. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in union with the Messiah in his resurrection you received new life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 1 qmzv figs-idiom συνηγέρθητε 1 you were raised with Christ Paul uses the word **raised** to refer to someone who had died coming back to life. If this word does not refer to coming back to life in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or a short phrase. Alternate translation: “you were restored to life with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 1 sl1f figs-activepassive συνηγέρθητε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God the Father raised you with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -COL 3 1 vuct figs-metaphor τὰ ἄνω ζητεῖτε 1 Here Paul speaks as if he wants the Colossians to look for or try to find **things above**. By using the word **seek**, Paul wants to tell the Colossians to focus on **the things above** as if they were something valuable that the Colossians had lost and needed to find. If **seek the things above** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor, or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “direct your attention to the things above” or “focus on the things above” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 1 vuct figs-metaphor τὰ ἄνω ζητεῖτε 1 Here Paul speaks as if he wants the Colossians to look for or try to find **things above**. By using the word **seek**, Paul wants to tell the Colossians to focus on **the things above** as if they were something valuable that the Colossians had lost and needed to find. If **seek the things above** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “direct your attention to the things above” or “focus on the things above” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 1 p3fw figs-idiom τὰ ἄνω 1 the things above The **things above** is another term for heavenly things, which Paul makes clear in the next phrase. If **the things above** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that the phrase refers specifically to things in heaven. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 1 upi9 figs-explicit ἐν δεξιᾷ τοῦ Θεοῦ καθήμενος 1 This phrase implies two things. First, what Christ sits on is the divine throne in heaven. Second, **sitting** on this throne means that Christ has assumed a position of authority over the universe with God the Father. If **sitting at the right hand of God** would be misunderstood in your language, you could make either or both of these points explicit. Alternate translation: “sitting on the throne at the right hand of God” or “ruling at the right hand of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 3 2 vpat φρονεῖτε 1 The phrase **think about** refers not just to reasoning but also to focus and desire. Alternate translation: “Focus on” COL 3 2 f181 figs-idiom τὰ ἄνω 1 Just as in [3:1](../03/01.md), the **things above** is another term for heavenly things. If **the things above** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that the phrase refers specifically to things in heaven. Alternate translation: “the heavenly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 2 ow7x figs-explicit τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 The **things on the earth** describes those things in this world that are not connected to Christ, which are not **the things above**. Not thinking about **the things on the earth** does not mean that the Colossians are supposed to abandon all care for earthly things. Instead, Paul is urging them to focus on Christ and what he has promised for them, not on whatever they could gain on earth. If the meaning of **the things on the earth** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify this contrast by further describing **the things on the earth**. Alternate translation: “the things that matter in this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 3 3 oa5x grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 The word **for** introduces the reason why the Colossians should think about the things above ([3:1–2](../03/01.md)): it is because they **have died**. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the transition more explicitly. Alternate translation: “You should think about the things above because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -COL 3 3 l9yk figs-metaphor ἀπεθάνετε 1 For you died Here Paul expresses in slightly different form the idea he already stated in [2:20](../02/20.md): the Colossians have been united to Christ in his death. As Christ actually died, so God counts the Colossian believers as having **died** with Christ. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idea as you did in [2:20](../02/20.md), or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you died in union with the Messiah” or “you participated in the Messiah’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -COL 3 3 gkz6 figs-metaphor ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν κέκρυπται σὺν τῷ Χριστῷ ἐν τῷ Θεῷ 1 your life has been hidden with Christ in God Here Paul speaks as if the Colossians’ lives were objects that could be **hidden** where Christ is, and as if the place they were hidden was God. By using this metaphor, Paul wants the Colossians to know that they are safe (**with Christ in God**) but also that their new life is not yet fully revealed (**hidden**). If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “God is protecting your new life with Christ and will reveal it when the time comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 3 l9yk figs-metaphor ἀπεθάνετε 1 For you died Here Paul expresses in slightly different form the idea he already stated in [2:20](../02/20.md): the Colossians have been united to Christ in his death. As Christ actually died, so God counts the Colossian believers as having **died** with Christ. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this idea as you did in [2:20](../02/20.md), or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “you died in union with the Messiah” or “you participated in the Messiah’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 3 gkz6 figs-metaphor ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν κέκρυπται σὺν τῷ Χριστῷ ἐν τῷ Θεῷ 1 your life has been hidden with Christ in God Here Paul speaks as if the Colossians’ lives were objects that could be **hidden** where Christ is, and as if the place they were hidden was God. By using this metaphor, Paul wants the Colossians to know that they are safe (**with Christ in God**) but also that their new life is not yet fully revealed (**hidden**). If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “God is protecting your new life with Christ and will reveal it when the time comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 3 xetc figs-activepassive ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν κέκρυπται σὺν τῷ Χριστῷ ἐν τῷ Θεῷ 1 your life has been hidden with Christ in God If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in active form. Alternate translation: “God has hidden your life with Christ in himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) COL 3 3 ihr6 figs-abstractnouns ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν κέκρυπται 1 your life has been hidden with Christ in God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **life**, you can rephrase the sentence so that you can use a verb for “living.” Alternate translation: “you live in a hidden way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 3 4 ugge figs-activepassive ὁ Χριστὸς φανερωθῇ, ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can translate the idea in active form with: (1) Christ as the subject. Alternate translation: “Christ, your life, reveals himself” or “Christ, your life, appears” (2) God the Father as the subject. Alternate translation: “God the Father reveals Christ, your life,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -COL 3 4 n4nj figs-metaphor ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν 1 your life Continuing the theme of the Colossians’ life being hidden with Christ, Paul now identifies Christ as the Colossians’ **life**. In other words, if the Colossians’ life is hidden with Christ, then Christ can be called their **life**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor, or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who holds your life” or “with whom you have life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 4 n4nj figs-metaphor ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν 1 your life Continuing the theme of the Colossians’ life being hidden with Christ, Paul now identifies Christ as the Colossians’ **life**. In other words, if the Colossians’ life is hidden with Christ, then Christ can be called their **life**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor, or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “who holds your life” or “with whom you have life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 4 kpqf figs-abstractnouns ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν 1 your life If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **life**, you can express the idea with a verb for “living.” Alternate translation: “in whom you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 3 4 b2io translate-unknown φανερωθῇ…σὺν αὐτῷ φανερωθήσεσθε 1 Paul uses the word **is revealed** to refer to Christ’s second coming, when he is **revealed** to everyone as who he truly is. Paul uses the phrase **will be revealed with him** to refer to how the Colossians will participate with Christ in that second coming and also be **revealed** as who they truly are. If the meaning of **revealed** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use words such as “coming” or “returning” instead of “revealing.” Alternate translation: “comes again … will come with him” or “returns … will return with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 3 4 vlxm grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὅταν…τότε 1 The word **when** indicates a moment in time, and the word translated **then** refers back to that same time. Therefore, the events described in two parts of this sentence occur at the same time. Use a construction that indicates simultaneous time in your language. Alternate translation: “When … at the same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) @@ -331,8 +331,8 @@ COL 3 4 mz6o translate-unknown ἐν δόξῃ 1 As a previous note pointed out COL 3 4 ajcy figs-abstractnouns ἐν δόξῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **glory**, you can express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as very great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 3 5 xvsp grammar-connect-words-phrases οὖν 1 Here, the word **therefore** introduces an exhortation based on previous statements. In this case, Paul bases his exhortation on what he has said about the Colossians’ union with Christ and its end goal: being revealed with him in glory. If the meaning of **therefore** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable connecting word or express the idea with a phrase that refers back to what Paul has already said. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) COL 3 5 jl45 figs-infostructure νεκρώσατε οὖν 1 If your language would normally put a transition word like **therefore** at the beginning of the sentence, you could move it there in your translation. Alternate translation: “Therefore, put to death” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure) -COL 3 5 zn6i figs-metaphor νεκρώσατε…τὰ μέλη τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 Here Paul speaks of the **members** as if they were people that one could kill or **put to death**. By using this metaphor, he wants to show the Colossians that the evil desires he lists should be treated as enemies and dealt with as harshly as possible. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “Eliminate … the members that are on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -COL 3 5 gdz8 figs-metaphor τὰ μέλη τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 Paul here speaks of sins as if they were **members** or limbs of the body that are part of the person **on the earth**. What this metaphor means is that these sins can be so much a part of a person while they are living on earth that getting rid of them is like cutting off an arm or leg. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the sins that have become part of you while you live on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 5 zn6i figs-metaphor νεκρώσατε…τὰ μέλη τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 Here Paul speaks of the **members** as if they were people that one could kill or **put to death**. By using this metaphor, he wants to show the Colossians that the evil desires he lists should be treated as enemies and dealt with as harshly as possible. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Eliminate … the members that are on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 5 gdz8 figs-metaphor τὰ μέλη τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 Paul here speaks of sins as if they were **members** or limbs of the body that are part of the person **on the earth**. What this metaphor means is that these sins can be so much a part of a person while they are living on earth that getting rid of them is like cutting off an arm or leg. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the sins that have become part of you while you live on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 5 pu2k figs-abstractnouns πορνείαν, ἀκαθαρσίαν, πάθος, ἐπιθυμίαν κακήν, καὶ τὴν πλεονεξίαν, ἥτις ἐστὶν εἰδωλολατρία; 1 If your language would not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **immorality**, **uncleanness**, **passion**, **desire**, **envy**, and **idolatry**, you could rephrase this sentence and use adjectives or verbs to express the idea. Alternate translation: “behaving in ways that are sexually immoral, unclean, wrongly emotional, lustful, and envious, which is idolatrous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 3 5 p9w9 translate-unknown ἀκαθαρσίαν 1 uncleanness The word **uncleanness** describes morally dirty or impure behavior. This is a general term that covers many sins that would make one unclean, that is, that would make other people avoid one. If you have a comparable expression in your language, you could use it here, or you could express the idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “unclean behavior” or “disgusting acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 3 5 e65k translate-unknown πάθος 1 passion The word **passion** refers to negative emotions that are triggered by outside events. Examples would include forms of anger and jealousy. If **passion** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that these are improper emotions, since Paul is not saying that all emotions are wrong. Alternate translation: “improper emotions” or “evil passions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -341,24 +341,24 @@ COL 3 5 h5v4 translate-unknown τὴν πλεονεξίαν 1 envy, which is ido COL 3 5 j4n0 writing-pronouns ἥτις 1 envy, which is idolatry Here, **which** refers back to **envy** only, not to other items in the list. If what **which** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that it refers to **envy**. Alternate translation: “and envy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) COL 3 6 wm23 translate-textvariants ἔρχεται 1 Many ancient manuscripts include “on the sons of disobedience” after **is coming**. Several early and reliable manuscripts do not include it, however. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to include these words if that translation includes them. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of the ULT and not include these words. The phrase “sons of disobedience” is an idiom that refers to people who disobey. Alternate translation: “is coming against people who disobey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) COL 3 6 dj6g writing-pronouns δι’ ἃ 1 With this phrase, Paul identifies the sins listed in the previous verse as the reason why God’s “wrath” is coming. If what the pronoun **which** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify this idea by including a word such as “sins” in the phrase. Alternate translation: “because of which sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -COL 3 6 s9lm figs-metaphor ἔρχεται ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the wrath of God Here Paul speaks of **the wrath of God** as if it were a person or package that can arrive somewhere. By this, he means that God has not yet acted upon his **wrath** but that he will act soon. The Colossians can expect **the wrath** to come soon, just like a package that is arriving soon. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “God will act upon his wrath soon” or “the wrath of God will be enacted soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 6 s9lm figs-metaphor ἔρχεται ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the wrath of God Here Paul speaks of **the wrath of God** as if it were a person or package that can arrive somewhere. By this, he means that God has not yet acted upon his **wrath** but that he will act soon. The Colossians can expect **the wrath** to come soon, just like a package that is arriving soon. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “God will act upon his wrath soon” or “the wrath of God will be enacted soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 6 ygaj figs-explicit ἔρχεται ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ Θεοῦ, 1 When the **wrath of God** “comes,” it must arrive somewhere and be against certain people. If you would explicitly state these things in your language, you could clarify that the **wrath** of God comes on earth and against those who do the sins listed in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “the wrath of God is coming on earth against those who do these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 3 6 xb24 figs-metonymy ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ Θεοῦ, 1 The **wrath of God** does not refer simply to an emotion. Rather, this phrase primarily refers to God acting against the sin he hates (examples of which appear in the previous verse). If **wrath** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates action and not just emotion. Alternate translation: “punishment from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 3 7 u4p6 writing-pronouns ἐν οἷς 1 The word **which** refers again back to the list of sins in [3:5](../03/05.md). If what **which** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could include the word “sins” to clarify this reference. Alternate translation: “in which sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -COL 3 7 p4q8 figs-metaphor ἐν οἷς καὶ ὑμεῖς περιεπατήσατέ ποτε 1 in which you also formerly walked Paul speaks of behavior that is characteristic of one’s life as if it were something that one could “walk in.” By this, he means that the sinful behaviors were things that they normally did. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “which formerly characterized your lives too” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 7 p4q8 figs-metaphor ἐν οἷς καὶ ὑμεῖς περιεπατήσατέ ποτε 1 in which you also formerly walked Paul speaks of behavior that is characteristic of one’s life as if it were something that one could “walk in.” By this, he means that the sinful behaviors were things that they normally did. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “which formerly characterized your lives too” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 7 jz5d figs-explicit περιεπατήσατέ ποτε 1 The word **formerly** is used to refer to some indefinite time in the past. Here Paul uses it to refer to the time before the Colossians believed in Jesus. If **formerly** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify the specific time reference. Alternate translation: “walked before you believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 3 7 jsfs grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὅτε 1 The word **when** introduces a clause that occurs simultaneously with the main clause. Here, the Colossians “lived” **in them** at the same time as they were “walking” in them. Use an expression that indicates simultaneous time in your language. Alternate translation: “at the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) COL 3 7 s824 figs-metaphor ἐζῆτε ἐν τούτοις 1 when you were living in them The phrase **living in** something could mean (1) that the Colossians practiced these sins in addition to having lives characterized by them (“walking in them”). Alternate translation: “you were doing these things” (2) that the Colossians were living among people who did these things. Alternate translation: “you were living among people who did these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 7 pw57 figs-doublet ἐν οἷς καὶ ὑμεῖς περιεπατήσατέ ποτε ὅτε ἐζῆτε ἐν τούτοις. 1 If **which** and **them** both refer to the sins mentioned in [3:5](../03/05.md), then “walking” and **living** in them mean very similar things. Paul uses the repetition to emphasize how thoroughly the Colossians’ lives were characterized by sins. If your language does not use repetition in this way or has only one phrase for this concept, you can use just one of these phrases. Alternate translation: “in which you also formerly walked” or “in which you used to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) COL 3 8 k2dx grammar-connect-logic-contrast νυνὶ δὲ 1 The phrase **but now** introduces a contrast with the previous verse, a contrast that focuses on time. The word translated **now** refers to the time after the Colossians believed. It introduces how they should behave **now** in contrast to how they behaved “formerly” ([3:7](../03/07.md)). If this contrast would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify what **now** refers to. Alternate translation: “But now that you believe in Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -COL 3 8 l019 figs-metaphor ἀπόθεσθε 1 Here Paul exhorts the Colossians to **lay aside** sins as if the sins were garments that they could take off or objects they could set down and stop using. By talking this way, Paul encourages the Colossians to no longer use or be associated with sins that are not part of who they are in their union with Christ, just as clothes and objects are not part of the person but can be removed. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “must … separate yourselves from” or “must … no longer do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 8 l019 figs-metaphor ἀπόθεσθε 1 Here Paul exhorts the Colossians to **lay aside** sins as if the sins were garments that they could take off or objects they could set down and stop using. By talking this way, Paul encourages the Colossians to no longer use or be associated with sins that are not part of who they are in their union with Christ, just as clothes and objects are not part of the person but can be removed. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “must … separate yourselves from” or “must … no longer do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 8 zltd figs-abstractnouns ὀργήν, θυμόν, κακίαν, βλασφημίαν, αἰσχρολογίαν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind these words, you can express the ideas by using verbs or adjectives. Alternate translation: “wrathful, angry, and lustful behavior, and slanderous and obscene words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 3 8 ahhs figs-doublet ὀργήν, θυμόν 1 The words **wrath** and **anger** are almost synonymous, with **wrath** emphasizing angry actions and **anger** emphasizing angry emotions. If your language does not have two words for “anger” that work here, you can express the idea with one word. Alternate translation: “anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) COL 3 8 d3wr translate-unknown κακίαν 1 evil desire The phrase **evil desire** is a broad term that means “vice,” the opposite of “virtue.” If your language has a general term for “vice,” you could use it here. Alternate translation: “vice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 3 8 f59z translate-unknown αἰσχρολογίαν 1 and obscene speech The phrase **obscene speech** refers to “shameful words,” words that are not spoken in polite company. If your language has a word or phrase for these kinds of words, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “and obscenities” or “and cursing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 3 8 n23c figs-idiom ἐκ τοῦ στόματος ὑμῶν 1 from your mouth Here, **from your mouth** is an idiom that refers to speaking, since speech comes out of the **mouth**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea with a word such as “talk.” Alternate translation: “in your talk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 9 molr grammar-connect-logic-result ἀπεκδυσάμενοι 1 The clause that begins with **having taken off** could: (1) give the reason why the Colossians should not lie to each other (and should put off the sins listed in the previous verse). Alternate translation: “because you have taken off” (2) give another command. Alternate translation: “and take off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -COL 3 9 vsd8 figs-metaphor ἀπεκδυσάμενοι τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 having taken off the old man with its practices Here Paul uses a metaphor that is similar to one he used in [2:11](../02/11.md), where he speaks of the “circumcision of Christ” that “puts off” the body of flesh. Here, he speaks of the **old man** as if it were a piece of clothing that the Colossians could “take off.” This does not mean that their true selves are found underneath the **old man**, since the next verse has them putting on the **new man**. Instead, Paul uses the metaphor to illustrate how they have changed identity from **old** to “new.” If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “having forsaken your old identity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 9 vsd8 figs-metaphor ἀπεκδυσάμενοι τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 having taken off the old man with its practices Here Paul uses a metaphor that is similar to one he used in [2:11](../02/11.md), where he speaks of the “circumcision of Christ” that “puts off” the body of flesh. Here, he speaks of the **old man** as if it were a piece of clothing that the Colossians could “take off.” This does not mean that their true selves are found underneath the **old man**, since the next verse has them putting on the **new man**. Instead, Paul uses the metaphor to illustrate how they have changed identity from **old** to “new.” If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “having forsaken your old identity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 9 x13d figs-idiom τὸν παλαιὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 Paul uses the phrase **the old man** as part of his language about dying and rising with Christ. The **old man** is thus the person who died with Christ. It does not refer to a part of the person, but rather, it refers to what the whole person used to be before dying with Christ. This is why the ULT uses the neuter pronoun **its** to refer to **old man** later in the verse. If **the old man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a term that refers to the whole person and who he or she used to be. Alternate translation: “the old ‘you’” or “your old identity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 9 qlmf figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 While the word **man** is grammatically masculine, it does not refer primarily to male people but to humans in general. If you have a general word for humans in your language, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “human” or “human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) COL 3 9 cowf figs-abstractnouns σὺν ταῖς πράξεσιν αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **practices**, you can express the idea by using a relative clause that refers to what the **old man** “normally does.” Alternate translation: “along with what it does” or “with how it acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -386,48 +386,48 @@ COL 3 12 yyfe figs-metaphor ἐνδύσασθε 1 The phrase **put on** uses th COL 3 12 vcc5 grammar-connect-logic-result ὡς 1 Paul uses the word **as** to introduce his description of who the Colossians are. He describes them in ways that will give them a reason to “put on” the virtues he lists. If **as** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea by using a word or phrase that gives a reason or basis for a command. Alternate translation: “because you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) COL 3 12 b5ti figs-possession ἐκλεκτοὶ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 as chosen ones of God, holy and beloved Paul here uses the possessive form to indicate that the Colossians are **chosen ones** because **God** chose them. If your language would not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could express the idea by translating **chosen** with a verb such as “chose,” with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “ones whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 3 12 u914 figs-abstractnouns σπλάγχνα οἰκτιρμοῦ, χρηστότητα, ταπεινοφροσύνην, πραΰτητα, μακροθυμίαν; 1 as chosen ones of God, holy and beloved If your language would not use abstract nouns to express these ideas, you could (1) translate the abstract nouns as verbs. Alternate translation: “the character traits of showing care to others, treating them nicely, not thinking highly of yourselves, considering others more important than yourselves, and not being easily annoyed” (2) translate the abstract nouns as adjectives. Alternate translation: “the merciful, kind, humble, gentle, and patient new man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -COL 3 12 w259 figs-idiom σπλάγχνα οἰκτιρμοῦ 1 Greek speakers could refer to the **inner parts** as the location of emotions, especially emotions related to love or empathy for another person. The **inner parts of mercy**, then, refers to having **mercy** where one experiences emotions. In this sentence, **inner parts** is connected with an **of** only to **mercy**, not to any of the other character traits. If **inner parts of mercy** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an alternate metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “a heart of mercy” or “a merciful heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +COL 3 12 w259 figs-idiom σπλάγχνα οἰκτιρμοῦ 1 Greek speakers could refer to the **inner parts** as the location of emotions, especially emotions related to love or empathy for another person. The **inner parts of mercy**, then, refers to having **mercy** where one experiences emotions. In this sentence, **inner parts** is connected with an **of** only to **mercy**, not to any of the other character traits. If **inner parts of mercy** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an alternate metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “a heart of mercy” or “a merciful heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 12 d217 translate-unknown χρηστότητα 1 put on inward parts of mercy, kindness, humility, gentleness, and patience The word **kindness** refers to the character trait of being good, kind, or helpful to others. If **kindness** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word or express the idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “a generous attitude toward others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 3 12 dzuj translate-unknown πραΰτητα 1 put on inward parts of mercy, kindness, humility, gentleness, and patience The word **gentleness** describes the character trait of being considerate of and gentle with others. If **gentleness** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word or express the idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “a considerate attitude” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 3 12 yn05 translate-unknown μακροθυμίαν 1 put on inward parts of mercy, kindness, humility, gentleness, and patience In this context, the word **patience** refers to the ability to remain calm and even-tempered even when others do things that provoke one to anger. If **patience** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word or express the idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “and forbearance” or “and the ability to remain calm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 3 13 m1d9 figs-infostructure ἀνεχόμενοι ἀλλήλων καὶ χαριζόμενοι ἑαυτοῖς, ἐάν τις πρός τινα ἔχῃ μομφήν 1 bearing with one another If your language would put the conditional statement first, you could move the **if** clause to the beginning, starting a new sentence. Alternate translation: “If someone may have a complaint against someone else, bear with one another and be gracious to each other” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure) -COL 3 13 r8iy figs-idiom ἀνεχόμενοι ἀλλήλων 1 bearing with one another In Paul’s culture, the phrase **bearing with one another** refers to being patient with others, even when they do things that are annoying or strange. If **bearing with one another** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “putting up with one another” or “being patient with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +COL 3 13 r8iy figs-idiom ἀνεχόμενοι ἀλλήλων 1 bearing with one another In Paul’s culture, the phrase **bearing with one another** refers to being patient with others, even when they do things that are annoying or strange. If **bearing with one another** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “putting up with one another” or “being patient with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 13 rts1 figs-hypo ἐάν 1 being gracious to each other Paul uses **if** to introduce a hypothetical situation that he thinks will happen among the Colossians at times. It is in this kind of situation that he wants them to “bear with one another and be gracious to each other.” If your language would not use **if** to express that idea, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that refers to any time something happens. Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) COL 3 13 f5f9 figs-idiom τις πρός τινα ἔχῃ μομφήν 1 being gracious to each other This phrase indicates a situation in which one person feels offended or hurt by another person. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or an expression that indicates that one party has been offended or hurt by another. Alternate translation: “a person has been offended by another person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 13 p474 figs-abstractnouns πρός…ἔχῃ μομφήν 1 may have a complaint against If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **complaint**, you can express the idea by translating the abstract noun as a verb. Alternate translation: “may complain against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 3 13 lp1o figs-infostructure καθὼς καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἐχαρίσατο ὑμῖν, οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 may have a complaint against If your language would put the comparison after the command, you could switch them in your translation, including “forgive” in the new first clause. Alternate translation: “you should forgive others, just as the Lord forgave you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) COL 3 13 lkdl figs-simile καθὼς καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἐχαρίσατο ὑμῖν 1 may have a complaint against Here Paul draws a comparison between how he wants the Colossians to forgive and how Jesus has forgiven them. Use a word or phrase that would normally be used for comparing things that are similar. Alternate translation: “in the same way that the Lord forgave you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) COL 3 13 l0kr figs-ellipsis οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 may have a complaint against Paul leaves out words that could be needed in some languages to make a complete statement. If your language needs these words, you could supply words such as “forgive one another.” Alternate translation: “so also you should forgive each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -COL 3 14 l1ik figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πᾶσιν δὲ τούτοις, τὴν ἀγάπην 1 love, which is the bond of perfection Here Paul speaks as if **love** is higher than, or **above**, all the things he has said. By this, he means that **love** is more important than **all these things**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively with a word such as “important” or “essential.” Alternate translation: “But what is most essential is love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 14 l1ik figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πᾶσιν δὲ τούτοις, τὴν ἀγάπην 1 love, which is the bond of perfection Here Paul speaks as if **love** is higher than, or **above**, all the things he has said. By this, he means that **love** is more important than **all these things**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly with a word such as “important” or “essential.” Alternate translation: “But what is most essential is love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 14 mlfc figs-ellipsis τὴν ἀγάπην 1 love, which is the bond of perfection Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. If your language would include more words, you could insert the words that Paul implies, which can be found in [3:12](../03/12.md): “put on.” Alternate translation: “put on love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) COL 3 14 c5o7 figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀγάπην 1 love, which is the bond of perfection If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb. If your language requires you to specify who the Colossians are supposed to “love,” you can clarify that Paul has other believers in mind first, but he is also thinking of God. Alternate translation: “love one another” or “love each other and God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 3 14 x5g8 figs-metaphor ὅ ἐστιν σύνδεσμος τῆς τελειότητος 1 love, which is the bond of perfection Here, **the bond of perfection** is a metaphor for something that brings people together in perfect unity. This could refer to (1) the perfect unity in community that Paul wishes for believers. Alternate translation: “which brings you together in perfect unity” (2) the perfect unity that love brings to all Christian virtues. Alternate translation: “which brings all these virtues together to perfection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 14 bp1w figs-possession σύνδεσμος τῆς τελειότητος 1 love, which is the bond of perfection Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe: (1) **the bond** that leads to **perfection**. Alternate translation: “the bond that brings perfection” (2) **the bond** that has **perfection**. Alternate translation: “the perfect bond” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 3 14 welw figs-abstractnouns σύνδεσμος τῆς τελειότητος 1 love, which is the bond of perfection If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **perfection**, you can express the idea by an adjective such as “perfect” or a verb such as “complete.” Alternate translation: “the perfect bond” or “the bond that completes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 3 15 gtz3 figs-imperative ἡ εἰρήνη τοῦ Χριστοῦ βραβευέτω ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 let the peace of Christ rule in your hearts Here Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could translate this imperative in the second person, with the Colossians as the subject of a verb such as “obey” and the **peace of Christ** as the object. Alternate translation: “in your hearts obey the peace of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -COL 3 15 hdg5 figs-metaphor ἡ εἰρήνη τοῦ Χριστοῦ βραβευέτω ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 let the peace of Christ rule in your hearts Paul speaks of the **peace of Christ** as if it should be the “ruler” in the Colossians’ hearts. The word **rule** is closely related to the word translated “deprive of your prize” that Paul uses in [2:18](../02/18.md): both are used of a judge or an umpire making a decision, although in [2:18](../02/18.md), the judge or umpire decides against the Colossians. Here, the idea is that the **peace of Christ** acts as the judge or umpire in the **hearts** of the Colossians, which means that this **peace** helps them decide what to feel and do. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “let the peace of Christ make your decisions in your hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -COL 3 15 pz4p figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 let the peace of Christ rule in your hearts In Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. If that meaning of **hearts** would be misunderstood in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “in your minds” or “your thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +COL 3 15 hdg5 figs-metaphor ἡ εἰρήνη τοῦ Χριστοῦ βραβευέτω ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 let the peace of Christ rule in your hearts Paul speaks of the **peace of Christ** as if it should be the “ruler” in the Colossians’ hearts. The word **rule** is closely related to the word translated “deprive of your prize” that Paul uses in [2:18](../02/18.md): both are used of a judge or an umpire making a decision, although in [2:18](../02/18.md), the judge or umpire decides against the Colossians. Here, the idea is that the **peace of Christ** acts as the judge or umpire in the **hearts** of the Colossians, which means that this **peace** helps them decide what to feel and do. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “let the peace of Christ make your decisions in your hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 15 pz4p figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 let the peace of Christ rule in your hearts In Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. If that meaning of **hearts** would be misunderstood in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in your minds” or “your thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 3 15 okpr writing-pronouns ἣν 1 in your hearts The pronoun **which** refers to “the peace of Christ.” If what **which** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “which peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) COL 3 15 nj4e figs-activepassive καὶ ἐκλήθητε 1 in your hearts If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in active form, with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “God called you also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -COL 3 15 pod6 figs-metaphor ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι 1 in your hearts Paul speaks of the Colossians as if they were **in**, or part of, **one body**. With this metaphor, he clarifies the situation in which they have been called to peace: in the **one body**, which is the church. Just as the parts of a body are at “peace” with each other (when the body is working properly), so also the Colossians are to be at peace with each other in the church. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “as you together make up the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 15 pod6 figs-metaphor ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι 1 in your hearts Paul speaks of the Colossians as if they were **in**, or part of, **one body**. With this metaphor, he clarifies the situation in which they have been called to peace: in the **one body**, which is the church. Just as the parts of a body are at “peace” with each other (when the body is working properly), so also the Colossians are to be at peace with each other in the church. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “as you together make up the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 15 bfnp εὐχάριστοι γίνεσθε 1 in your hearts Alternate translation: “become thankful people” or “be thankful” COL 3 16 agax figs-imperative ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐνοικείτω ἐν ὑμῖν πλουσίως 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Here Paul uses a third person imperative. If you have third person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third person imperatives, you could express Paul’s command in the second person with the Colossians as the subject of a verb such as “welcome.” Alternate translation: “Welcome the word of Christ richly into your lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -COL 3 16 w9dv figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐνοικείτω ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Here Paul speaks as if the **word of Christ** were a person who could **dwell** or live in a location, which is the group of believers in Colossae. This metaphor emphasizes how the **word of Christ** should be a consistent and constant part of the Colossians’ lives as surely as if it were somebody permanently living with them. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “Let the word of Christ be a part of your lives consistently and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 16 w9dv figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐνοικείτω ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Here Paul speaks as if the **word of Christ** were a person who could **dwell** or live in a location, which is the group of believers in Colossae. This metaphor emphasizes how the **word of Christ** should be a consistent and constant part of the Colossians’ lives as surely as if it were somebody permanently living with them. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “Let the word of Christ be a part of your lives consistently and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 16 g0h5 figs-possession ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Here Paul uses the possessive form to relate **the word** to **Christ**. This could mean: (1) that **the word** is about **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the word concerning the Messiah” (2) that **the word** is spoken by **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the word from Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 3 16 mz40 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Here, **word** represents a message that is made up of words. If **word** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -COL 3 16 frn8 figs-metaphor πλουσίως 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Here Paul speaks as if the “word” were wealthy and could do something **richly**. He uses this metaphor to command that the word should dwell in the Colossians completely and with all the blessings that come from it. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “in every way and with every blessing” or “fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 16 frn8 figs-metaphor πλουσίως 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Here Paul speaks as if the “word” were wealthy and could do something **richly**. He uses this metaphor to command that the word should dwell in the Colossians completely and with all the blessings that come from it. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “in every way and with every blessing” or “fully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 16 aqx3 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **wisdom**, you can express the idea another way. Alternate translation: “in all wise ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 3 16 e44g grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ, διδάσκοντες καὶ νουθετοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς…ᾄδοντες 1 Let the word of Christ dwell in you Paul uses the words **teaching**, **admonishing**, and **singing** to show the Colossians some ways in which they can “let the word of Christ dwell” in them. Therefore, **teaching**, **admonishing**, and **singing** happen at the same time as **the word of Christ** dwelling in them. If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could directly state it. Alternate translation: (start a new sentence) “you could do this by teaching and admonishing one another in all wisdom … and by singing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) COL 3 16 h5k9 figs-doublet διδάσκοντες καὶ νουθετοῦντες 1 admonishing one another These two verbs have only slightly different meanings. The word **teaching** refers positively to giving someone information, skills, or concepts. The word **admonishing** refers negatively to warning someone against something. If you have words that fit these two ideas, you could use them here. If you do not have words that make these distinctions, you could translate both of them with a single verb such as “instruct.” Alternate translation: “instructing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) COL 3 16 ubi5 translate-unknown ψαλμοῖς, ὕμνοις, ᾠδαῖς πνευματικαῖς 1 with psalms, hymns, and spiritual songs These three terms name different kinds of songs. The word **psalms** refers to songs from the book of Psalms in the Bible. The word **hymns** refers to songs sung in praise, usually to a deity. Finally, the word **songs** refers to vocal music that celebrates someone or something, usually in poem form. If you have words that roughly match these categories in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have words that match these categories, you could express the idea with only one or two words or use adjectives to describe the different types of songs. Alternate translation: “psalms and spiritual songs” or “biblical songs, praise songs, and celebratory spiritual songs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 3 16 eapz translate-unknown ᾠδαῖς πνευματικαῖς 1 with psalms, hymns, and spiritual songs The word **spiritual** could refer to (1) the Holy Spirit as the origin or inspiration of the **songs**. Alternate translation: “and songs from the Spirit” (2) **songs** that are sung by or in the power of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “and songs empowered by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 3 16 ese7 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ χάριτι, 1 with psalms, hymns, and spiritual songs If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **thankfulness**, you can express the idea by using an adverb such as “thankfully” or an adjective such as “thankful.” Alternate translation: “in thankful ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -COL 3 16 jv2b figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 with psalms, hymns, and spiritual songs Here the Colossians would have understood the phrase **in your hearts** to describe something that people do that they fully believe in. It means that the **singing** should be done with sincerity and the full approval of one’s own mind. If this idiom would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable idiom or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “wholeheartedly” or “with genuineness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -COL 3 16 ives figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 with psalms, hymns, and spiritual songs In Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and desire. If that meaning of **hearts** would be misunderstood in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “in your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +COL 3 16 jv2b figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 with psalms, hymns, and spiritual songs Here the Colossians would have understood the phrase **in your hearts** to describe something that people do that they fully believe in. It means that the **singing** should be done with sincerity and the full approval of one’s own mind. If this idiom would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable idiom or plainly. Alternate translation: “wholeheartedly” or “with genuineness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +COL 3 16 ives figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 with psalms, hymns, and spiritual songs In Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and desire. If that meaning of **hearts** would be misunderstood in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in your minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 3 17 ivxg figs-infostructure πᾶν, ὅ τι ἐὰν ποιῆτε ἐν λόγῳ ἢ ἐν ἔργῳ, πάντα ἐν 1 in word or in deed The word **all** refers back to **everything, whatever you might do in word or in deed**. If your language would not write the object (**everything, whatever you might do in word or in deed**) first, you could put it where **all** is, after the verb. Or, you could change the object into a relative clause. Alternate translation: “do everything, whatever you might do in word or in deed, in” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure) COL 3 17 g059 figs-idiom πᾶν, ὅ τι ἐὰν ποιῆτε 1 in word or in deed In Paul’s culture, this is a natural way to refer to anything someone might do, including all possibilities. If this form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a customary way to refer to all possible actions. Alternate translation: “anything you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 17 g8p8 figs-abstractnouns ἐν λόγῳ ἢ ἐν ἔργῳ 1 in word or in deed If your language does not use abstract nouns to express the ideas behind **word** and **deed**, you can express the idea with verbs such as “speak” and “act.” Alternate translation: “in speaking or in acting” or “when you speak or act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -COL 3 17 uix9 figs-idiom ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of the Lord Jesus Acting **in the name of** a person means representing that person. Representatives, those who do anything **in the name of** someone else, should act so as to help others think well of and honor the people they represent. If **in the name of** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom for representing someone or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “as representatives of the Lord Jesus” or “in a way that leads to honor for the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +COL 3 17 uix9 figs-idiom ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of the Lord Jesus Acting **in the name of** a person means representing that person. Representatives, those who do anything **in the name of** someone else, should act so as to help others think well of and honor the people they represent. If **in the name of** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom for representing someone or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “as representatives of the Lord Jesus” or “in a way that leads to honor for the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 17 bv84 figs-explicit δι’ αὐτοῦ 1 through him The phrase **through him** does not mean that the prayers of thanks are mediated to God the Father by God the Son. Rather, it is **through** the Son that the Colossians are able to give thanks. This means that they can give thanks because of what the Son has done for them. If that meaning of **through him** would not be understood in your language, you could express the idea with a preposition such as “because” or clarify that it is **through** the “work” of the Son. Alternate translation: “because of what he has done” or “through his work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 3 18 tt9u αἱ γυναῖκες 1 Wives, submit to your husbands Here Paul directly addresses the **wives** in the audience. Use a form in your language that indicates that the speaker is singling out a specific group of people as the intended audience of the following words. Alternate translation: “You wives” COL 3 18 gtft figs-activepassive ὑποτάσσεσθε τοῖς ἀνδράσιν 1 is fitting If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in active form with a verb such as “obey” or “submit.” Alternate translation: “obey your husbands” or “submit to your husbands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -458,10 +458,10 @@ COL 3 22 p36t translate-unknown μὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοδουλεία 1 all COL 3 22 b5en translate-unknown ὡς ἀνθρωπάρεσκοι 1 all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers The phrase **people pleasers** describes the kind of people who care about “eyeservice.” Here, **people pleasers** are those who focus on impressing humans rather than doing what God desires. If these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could emphasize that **people pleasers** want to please humans only, not God. Alternate translation: “as people who want to please humans rather than God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 3 22 r22m figs-possession ἐν ἁπλότητι καρδίας 1 with sincerity of heart Paul here uses the possessive form to describe a **heart** that is characterized by its **sincerity**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could express the idea by translating **sincerity** with an adjective such as “sincere.” Alternate translation: “with a sincere heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 3 22 ouca figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἁπλότητι καρδίας 1 with sincerity of heart If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **sincerity**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “sincere” or and adverb such as “sincerely.” Alternate translation: “sincerely in your heart” or “with a sincere heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -COL 3 22 m27w figs-metonymy καρδίας 1 with sincerity of heart In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where a person thinks and desires. If that meaning of **heart** would be misunderstood in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “of mind” or “of desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +COL 3 22 m27w figs-metonymy καρδίας 1 with sincerity of heart In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where a person thinks and desires. If that meaning of **heart** would be misunderstood in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “of mind” or “of desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 3 22 tsn9 grammar-connect-logic-result φοβούμενοι τὸν Κύριον 1 with sincerity of heart The phrase **fearing the Lord** could describe: (1) the reason why the slaves should obey their masters. Alternate translation: “because you fear the Lord” (2) the way or manner in which the slaves should obey their masters. Alternate translation: “showing fear for the Lord” or “in a way that shows that you fear the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) COL 3 23 olwu figs-idiom ὃ ἐὰν ποιῆτε 1 as to the Lord In Paul’s culture, this is a natural way to refer to anything someone might do, including all possibilities. If this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a customary way of referring to all possible actions. Alternate translation: “In anything you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -COL 3 23 itn9 figs-idiom ἐκ ψυχῆς 1 as to the Lord Working **from the soul** is comparable to the English idiom working “with all one’s heart,” which refers to doing something with diligence, without holding anything back. If **from the soul** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable idiom or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “with all your heart” or “with all your strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +COL 3 23 itn9 figs-idiom ἐκ ψυχῆς 1 as to the Lord Working **from the soul** is comparable to the English idiom working “with all one’s heart,” which refers to doing something with diligence, without holding anything back. If **from the soul** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable idiom or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “with all your heart” or “with all your strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 23 arw4 figs-idiom ὡς τῷ Κυρίῳ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώποις 1 as to the Lord This contrast indicates that, even though they serve **men**, they should consider their work to be directed to or in service of **the Lord**. If the meaning of this phrase would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a contrast phrase such as “even as.” Alternate translation: “to serve the Lord, even as you are serving men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 23 ckiz figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 as to the Lord The word **men** does not refer to only male people but to humans in general. If **men** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that refers to people or humans in general. Alternate translation: “to humans” or “to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) COL 3 24 p5qy grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδότες 1 the reward of the inheritance The word **knowing** introduces a reason why the slaves should obey as Paul commands them to in [3:22–23](../03/22.md). If **knowing** would not introduce a reason in your language, you could clarify this by using a word such as “because.” Alternate translation: “since you know” or “for you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -471,7 +471,7 @@ COL 3 24 oyo4 figs-declarative τῷ Κυρίῳ Χριστῷ δουλεύετ COL 3 25 fvw0 grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 the reward of the inheritance The word **for** introduces support for what has already been said. Here Paul uses it to introduce a negative reason for obedience (he already gave a positive reason in [3:24](../03/24.md)). If **for** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify that it introduces another reason for obedience. Alternate translation: “Do these things because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) COL 3 25 u5lx figs-genericnoun ὁ…ἀδικῶν…ἠδίκησεν 1 the one who does unrighteousness will receive what he did unrighteously Here Paul speaks in general of anyone who does **unrighteousness**. However, he directs this general statement to the slaves he has been addressing (not the masters, since he does not address them until [4:1](../04/01.md)). If this generic form would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a customary form for generic statements or include the slaves as the ones being addressed. Alternate translation: “any of you who do unrighteousness … you did unrighteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) COL 3 25 sttw figs-abstractnouns ἀδικῶν 1 the one who does unrighteousness will receive what he did unrighteously If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **unrighteousness**, you can express the idea differently, such as with an adverb. Alternate translation: “acting unrighteously” or “doing unrighteous things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -COL 3 25 ak8j figs-metaphor κομιεῖται ὃ ἠδίκησεν 1 doing unrighteousness In this context, the phrase **will receive** refers to getting something in payment or in return for something else. Paul, then, speaks as if **the one doing unrighteousness** will **receive** as payment or recompense exactly **what he did unrighteously**. By this, Paul means that God will punish those who do **unrighteousness** in a way that fits with what they did. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “will receive a punishment that fits the crime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 25 ak8j figs-metaphor κομιεῖται ὃ ἠδίκησεν 1 doing unrighteousness In this context, the phrase **will receive** refers to getting something in payment or in return for something else. Paul, then, speaks as if **the one doing unrighteousness** will **receive** as payment or recompense exactly **what he did unrighteously**. By this, Paul means that God will punish those who do **unrighteousness** in a way that fits with what they did. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will receive a punishment that fits the crime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 25 c9fx figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολημψία 1 there is no favoritism If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **favoritism**, you can express the idea with a verb such as “favor” or with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “God does not favor anyone” or “God judges everyone by the same standard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 4 intro nm3y 0 # Colossians 4 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

[4:1](../col/04/01.md) belongs to the section that begins in [3:18](../03/18.md), even though it is in this chapter.

3. Exhortation Section
* Prayer Request and Behavior towards Outsiders (4:2–6)

4. Letter Closing (4:7–18)
* The Messengers (4:7–9)
* Greetings from Friends (4:10–14)
* Greetings and Instructions from Paul (4:15–17)
* Greeting in Paul’s Own Hand (4:18)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Letter writing and sending

In this culture, someone who wanted to send a letter often spoke what they wanted to say, and a scribe would write it down for them. Then, they would send the letter with a messenger, who would read the letter to the person or people to whom it was addressed. In this chapter, Paul mentions the messengers with whom he is sending his letter: Tychicus and Onesimus ([4:7–9](../04/07.md)). They also are able to communicate more about Paul’s situation than he says in the letter. Additionally, Paul mentions that he writes the final greeting “by my own hand” ([4:18](../04/18.md)). This is because the rest of the letter was written by a scribe, who wrote down what Paul dictated. Paul writes the last greeting as a personal touch and to prove that he was indeed the author.

### Greetings

In this culture, it was common for those who sent letters to include greetings to and from others in their letter. In this way, many people could greet each other but only send one letter. In [4:10–15](../04/10.md) Paul includes greetings to and from many people whom he and the Colossians know.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Paul’s chains

Paul refers to his imprisonment in this chapter by using the language of “chains” and “binding.” He says that he has “been bound” in [4:3](../04/03.md), and he mentions his “chains” in [4:18](../04/18.md). The language of binding and chains emphasizes how Paul is restricted in his movements and activities by being imprisoned.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### A “master in heaven”

In [4:1](../04/01.md), Paul refers to a “master in heaven.” The word translated “master” and “masters” in this verse is the same word that is translated as “Lord” throughout Colossians. It is translated “master” in this verse to illustrate Paul’s point: those who are “masters” on earth also have a “master,” their Lord in heaven. If possible, make this wordplay clear in your translation. COL 4 1 b9nm οἱ κύριοι 1 what is right and fair Here Paul directly addresses the **Masters** in the audience. Use a form in your language that indicates that the speaker is singling out a specific group of people as the intended audience of the following words. Alternate translation: “You masters” @@ -486,28 +486,28 @@ COL 4 2 calz figs-abstractnouns ἐν εὐχαριστίᾳ 1 Continue steadfas COL 4 3 iqjo grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἅμα 1 : In this context, the word **together** does not refer to people being together but rather, it refers to actions happening **together** or at the same time. If **together** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that the Colossians should pray for Paul at the same time they pray about other things (the things mentioned in [4:2](../04/02.md)). Alternate translation: “at the same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) COL 4 3 sct4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμῖν 1 In this verse, the word **us** refers to Paul and Timothy but not to the Colossians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) COL 4 3 ql6g grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the content of what they should pray. Alternate translation: “that” or “asking that” (2) the purpose for which the Colossians should pray for Paul. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -COL 4 3 ub1i figs-metaphor ὁ Θεὸς ἀνοίξῃ ἡμῖν θύραν τοῦ λόγου 1 God may open a door Here Paul speaks of God providing opportunities for Paul and Timothy to preach the gospel as if God were “opening” a **door** to them **for the word**. The image is of God opening a door so that Paul and Timothy can go in and preach the message about Christ. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “God may give us opportunities to preach the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 4 3 ub1i figs-metaphor ὁ Θεὸς ἀνοίξῃ ἡμῖν θύραν τοῦ λόγου 1 God may open a door Here Paul speaks of God providing opportunities for Paul and Timothy to preach the gospel as if God were “opening” a **door** to them **for the word**. The image is of God opening a door so that Paul and Timothy can go in and preach the message about Christ. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “God may give us opportunities to preach the word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 4 3 m7z4 figs-doublet τοῦ λόγου, λαλῆσαι 1 God may open a door Here, **for the word** and **to speak** mean almost the same thing. If your language would not use both of phrases here, you could combine them into one. Alternate translation: “to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) COL 4 3 w4fl figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου 1 God may open a door Here, **word** represents a message that is made up of words. If **word** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for the message” or “for what we say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 4 3 tl71 grammar-connect-logic-goal λαλῆσαι 1 may open a door to us for the word The phrase **to speak** indicates the purpose for which the “door” is opened. If **to speak** would not indicate purpose in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does indicate purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that we might speak” or “so that we can speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) COL 4 3 ce37 translate-unknown τὸ μυστήριον 1 the mystery of Christ Paul speaks of his message as **the mystery** of Christ. This does not mean that the message is hard to understand, but rather that it had not previously been revealed. Now, however, Paul does “make it clear” (as [4:4](../04/04.md) says). If a **mystery** that is revealed or spoken would be misunderstood in your language, you could replace **mystery** with a short descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “the concealed message” or “the previously hidden message” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown) COL 4 3 fkva figs-possession τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the mystery of Christ Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of a **mystery** whose content is a message about **Christ**. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can express the idea with a preposition such as “about” or a relative clause such as “that concerns.” Alternate translation: “the mystery that concerns Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 4 3 gs8f writing-pronouns δι’ ὃ 1 the mystery of Christ The pronoun **which** refers back to the “mystery of Christ.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly what **which** refers to more clearly by adding a word such as “mystery.” Alternate translation: “on account of which mystery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -COL 4 3 q4jx figs-metonymy δέδεμαι 1 on account of which also I have been bound Here Paul uses the phase **I have been bound** to refer to how he is in prison. If **I have been bound** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that stands for being in prison or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I am imprisoned” or “I am incarcerated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +COL 4 3 q4jx figs-metonymy δέδεμαι 1 on account of which also I have been bound Here Paul uses the phase **I have been bound** to refer to how he is in prison. If **I have been bound** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase that stands for being in prison or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I am imprisoned” or “I am incarcerated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 4 3 lsdv figs-activepassive δέδεμαι 1 on account of which also I have been bound If your language does not use this passive form, you can express the idea in active form with a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “they have bound me” or “the authorities have bound me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) COL 4 4 x8bf grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 in order that I may make it clear The phrase **in order that** could introduce: (1) another thing for which the Colossians should pray (in addition to what is said in [4:3](../04/03.md)). Alternate translation: “and that” or “and asking that” (2) another purpose for which the Colossians should pray for Paul (in addition to what is said in [4:3](../04/03.md)). Alternate translation: “and so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) COL 4 4 hm5w φανερώσω αὐτὸ 1 in order that I may make it clear Alternate translation: “I may reveal it” or “I may express it clearly” COL 4 4 rkal grammar-connect-logic-result ὡς 1 in order that I may make it clear Here, the word **as** functions to introduce a reason why Paul must preach his message clearly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of **as** with a word or phrase that introduces a reason for an action. Alternate translation: “because this is how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) COL 4 4 ofin figs-explicit δεῖ με λαλῆσαι 1 in order that I may make it clear If your language would state who requires Paul to speak in these ways, you could include “God” as the one that role. Alternate translation: “God has commanded me to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -COL 4 5 z3ax figs-metaphor περιπατεῖτε πρὸς 1 Walk in wisdom toward those outside Here Paul uses the word **walk** to refer to consistent, habitual behavior (like putting one foot in front of the other). In this image, walking **toward** someone refers to consistent behavior in relationship with that person. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “Act … with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 4 5 z3ax figs-metaphor περιπατεῖτε πρὸς 1 Walk in wisdom toward those outside Here Paul uses the word **walk** to refer to consistent, habitual behavior (like putting one foot in front of the other). In this image, walking **toward** someone refers to consistent behavior in relationship with that person. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “Act … with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 4 5 u3j7 figs-abstractnouns ἐν σοφίᾳ 1 Walk in wisdom toward those outside If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **wisdom**, you can express the idea with an adverb such as “wisely” or an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “in wise ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 4 5 ww8p figs-idiom τοὺς ἔξω 1 Walk in wisdom toward those outside The phrase **those outside** is a way to identify people who do not belong to one’s group. Here, **those outside** would be anyone who does not believe in Jesus. If **those outside** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word or phrase for people who are not in one’s group. Alternate translation: “outsiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 4 5 nvqu grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἐξαγοραζόμενοι 1 Walk in wisdom toward those outside The word **redeeming** introduces an example of how to “walk in wisdom toward those outside.” If this connection would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a customary way to indicate that the **redeeming** happens at the same time as “walking in wisdom” and gives an example of how it might look. Alternate translation: “which includes redeeming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) -COL 4 5 b525 figs-metaphor τὸν καιρὸν ἐξαγοραζόμενοι 1 redeeming the time Here Paul speaks of **time** as something that one could be **redeeming**. The picture is of a person buying **time** from someone. Paul uses this picture to refer to making the most of (**redeeming**) one’s opportunities (**the time**). If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “making the most of every chance you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 4 5 b525 figs-metaphor τὸν καιρὸν ἐξαγοραζόμενοι 1 redeeming the time Here Paul speaks of **time** as something that one could be **redeeming**. The picture is of a person buying **time** from someone. Paul uses this picture to refer to making the most of (**redeeming**) one’s opportunities (**the time**). If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or express it plainly. Alternate translation: “making the most of every chance you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 4 6 bza7 0 your words always with grace, seasoned with salt This verse provides one way in which Paul wants the Colossians to “walk in wisdom toward those outside” ([4:5](../04/05.md)). They are to speak with words that are compelling and carefully chosen to fit the situation. COL 4 6 v14n figs-ellipsis ὁ λόγος ὑμῶν πάντοτε ἐν χάριτι 1 your words always with grace, seasoned with salt Paul has not included a verb for “speaking” in this phrase, because it was not necessary in his language. If your language would require a verb of speaking here, you could include it. Alternate translation: “speaking your words always with grace” or “your words always spoken with grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) COL 4 6 u9mh figs-abstractnouns ἐν χάριτι 1 your words always with grace, seasoned with salt If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **grace**, you can express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “gracious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -COL 4 6 fuv5 figs-metaphor ἅλατι ἠρτυμένος 1 your words always with grace, seasoned with salt In Paul’s culture, when food was **seasoned with salt**, it would taste good and be nourishing. Paul thus speaks of seasoning one’s “words” **with salt** to say that the words should be interesting (like food that tastes good) and helpful (like food that is nourishing). If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable idiom or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “both compelling and helpful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 4 6 fuv5 figs-metaphor ἅλατι ἠρτυμένος 1 your words always with grace, seasoned with salt In Paul’s culture, when food was **seasoned with salt**, it would taste good and be nourishing. Paul thus speaks of seasoning one’s “words” **with salt** to say that the words should be interesting (like food that tastes good) and helpful (like food that is nourishing). If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable idiom or plainly. Alternate translation: “both compelling and helpful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 4 6 c1w4 grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδέναι 1 to know how it is necessary for you to answer Here Paul uses the phrase **to know** to introduce the result of speaking words **with grace** and **seasoned with salt**. If **to know** does not introduce a result in your language, you could use a word or phrase that more clearly expresses that Paul is speaking about a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that you will know” or “ so that you might know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) COL 4 6 jdtx πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς…ἀποκρίνεσθαι 1 to know how it is necessary for you to answer Alternate translation: “how to best answer” or “the right answer to give to” COL 4 6 djl0 writing-pronouns ἑνὶ ἑκάστῳ 1 to know how it is necessary for you to answer The phrase **each one** refers to individuals who would be considered part of “those outside” ([4:5](../04/05.md)). If what **each one** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could explicitly refer back to how you translated “those outside.” Alternate translation: “each outsider” or “each one who does not believe in the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -523,7 +523,7 @@ COL 4 8 iv0m translate-textvariants ἵνα γνῶτε τὰ περὶ ἡμῶ COL 4 8 fr1z grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα…καὶ 1 he might encourage your hearts The words **so that** and **and that** introduce two of Paul’s purposes in sending Tychicus to the Colossians. If **so that** and **and that** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a customary way to introduce a goal or purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that … and in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) COL 4 8 cty1 figs-idiom τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν 1 the things concerning us Just like the phrase “all the things concerning me” in [4:7](../04/07.md), the phrase **the things concerning us** refers to details about life such as where people are living, their health, how their work is progressing, and other similar details. If your language has a customary way to refer to this kind of information, you could use it here, or you could express the idea with a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “the news about us” or “the details about how we are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 4 8 vyq5 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 the things concerning us The word **us** does not include the Colossians. Instead, Paul is referring to himself and those who are with him, including Timothy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -COL 4 8 rw4z figs-synecdoche τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν 1 the things concerning us Here when Paul refers to **your hearts**, the Colossians would have understood him to mean the entire person. Paul uses **hearts** because his culture identified **hearts** as the body part where people experienced encouragement. If that meaning of **your hearts** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the location where people experience encouragement in your culture, or you could express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “your souls” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche) +COL 4 8 rw4z figs-synecdoche τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν 1 the things concerning us Here when Paul refers to **your hearts**, the Colossians would have understood him to mean the entire person. Paul uses **hearts** because his culture identified **hearts** as the body part where people experienced encouragement. If that meaning of **your hearts** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies the location where people experience encouragement in your culture, or you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “your souls” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche) COL 4 9 f18w figs-explicit σὺν Ὀνησίμῳ 1 the faithful and beloved brother Paul uses this phrase to tell the Colossians that he is sending Onesimus along with Tychicus to the city of Colossae. If this implication would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit by adding a verb such as “sending.” Alternate translation: “With him I send Onesimus” (start a new sentence with “they will make”) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 4 9 yqh9 translate-names Ὀνησίμῳ 1 the faithful and beloved brother **Onesimus** is the name of a man. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names) COL 4 9 aqe3 figs-idiom ἐστιν ἐξ ὑμῶν 1 the faithful and beloved brother The phrase **from among you** means that Onesimus used to live with the Colossians and was part of the group to whom Paul is writing the letter. To express this idea, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that a person belongs to a specific group of people. Alternate translation: “is from your town” or “used to live with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -544,15 +544,15 @@ COL 4 11 ktfz figs-activepassive ὁ λεγόμενος 1 Jesus who is called Ju COL 4 11 oscc figs-ellipsis καὶ Ἰησοῦς, ὁ λεγόμενος Ἰοῦστος 1 Jesus who is called Justus Paul has not included the verb “greet” in this clause because it was unnecessary in his language. If it is necessary in your language, you could include it here. Alternate translation: “and Jesus who is called Justus also greets you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) COL 4 11 o5rh writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 Jesus who is called Justus The word **These** refers back to the three men mentioned in this verse and the previous verse: Aristarchus, Mark, and Justus. If what **These** refers to would be misunderstood in your language, you could restate their names or indicate the reference in another way. Alternate translation: “These three are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) COL 4 11 ehgz figs-distinguish οἱ ὄντες ἐκ περιτομῆς οὗτοι, μόνοι συνεργοὶ εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, οἵτινες ἐγενήθησάν μοι παρηγορία. 1 Jesus who is called Justus Paul here describes the three men in two ways. First, he identifies them as the **only** ones among his **fellow workers** who are Jewish (**from the circumcision**). In other words, Paul distinguishes them from all the other people who work with him, because these three men are the only ones who are circumcised Jews. Second, he describes them as ones **who have been a comfort** to him. Here, he is not distinguishing them from other fellow workers; instead, he just wishes to say that they have **been a comfort** to him. If these descriptions would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate the two descriptions differently so that it is clear that the first distinguishes the three men while the second describes the three men. Alternate translation: “Out of all my fellow workers for the kingdom of God, these are the only ones being from the circumcision, and they have been a comfort to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -COL 4 11 ci74 figs-metonymy ὄντες ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 These are the only fellow workers for the kingdom of God being from the circumcision Paul uses the label **from the circumcision** to identify the men as Jews who had received circumcision. If **from the circumcision** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea non-figuratively by using a term such as “Jewish.” Alternate translation: “who are Jewish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +COL 4 11 ci74 figs-metonymy ὄντες ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 These are the only fellow workers for the kingdom of God being from the circumcision Paul uses the label **from the circumcision** to identify the men as Jews who had received circumcision. If **from the circumcision** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea plainly by using a term such as “Jewish.” Alternate translation: “who are Jewish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 4 11 b7l6 figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες ἐγενήθησάν μοι παρηγορία 1 These are the only fellow workers for the kingdom of God being from the circumcision If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **comfort**, you can express the idea with a verb such as “comfort.” Alternate translation: “who have comforted me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 4 12 gg86 translate-names Ἐπαφρᾶς 1 Epaphras **Epaphras** is the name of a man. He was the one who first preached the good news to the people in Colossae (see [Colossians 1:7](../01/07.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) COL 4 12 et2g ἀσπάζεται 1 As was customary in this culture, Paul concludes the letter by extending greetings from people who are with him and who know the people to whom he is writing. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “asks to be remembered to” or “says hello to” COL 4 12 rq61 figs-idiom ὁ ἐξ ὑμῶν 1 He is from among you The phrase **from among you** means that Epaphras used to live with the Colossians and was part of the group to whom Paul is writing the letter. To express this idea, you could use a word or phrase that indicates in your language that a person belongs to a specific group of people. Alternate translation: “He is from your town” or “He used to live with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 4 12 ek51 figs-hyperbole πάντοτε 1 a servant of Christ Jesus Here, **always** is an exaggeration that the Colossians would have understood to mean that Epaphras prays for them very often. If **always** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that indicates frequency. Alternate translation: “consistently” or “frequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -COL 4 12 p8ff figs-metaphor ἀγωνιζόμενος ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐν ταῖς προσευχαῖς 1 always striving on behalf of you in prayers The word **striving** is usually used for attempting to win a contest, whether that is athletic, military, or legal. While Epaphras is not actually participating in an athletic or military contest, Paul uses the metaphor to explain how earnestly Epaphras prays for the Colossians. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “praying zealously for you” or “spending much effort on his prayers for you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +COL 4 12 p8ff figs-metaphor ἀγωνιζόμενος ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐν ταῖς προσευχαῖς 1 always striving on behalf of you in prayers The word **striving** is usually used for attempting to win a contest, whether that is athletic, military, or legal. While Epaphras is not actually participating in an athletic or military contest, Paul uses the metaphor to explain how earnestly Epaphras prays for the Colossians. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “praying zealously for you” or “spending much effort on his prayers for you” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) COL 4 12 sn23 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 you may stand complete and fully assured The phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the content of Epaphras’ prayers. Alternate translation: “asking that” (2) the purpose or goal of Epaphras’ prayers. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -COL 4 12 nuh9 figs-metaphor σταθῆτε τέλειοι καὶ πεπληροφορημένοι ἐν παντὶ θελήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 you may stand complete and fully assured Here Paul speaks as if the Colossians can **stand complete and fully assured in all the will of God**. By this, he means that they should consistently do God’s will, just as if God’s will served as a foundation underneath them. The words **complete and fully assured** explain the way in which they are supposed to **stand** or continue to obey. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you may be complete and fully assured as you consistently do all the will of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 4 12 nuh9 figs-metaphor σταθῆτε τέλειοι καὶ πεπληροφορημένοι ἐν παντὶ θελήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 you may stand complete and fully assured Here Paul speaks as if the Colossians can **stand complete and fully assured in all the will of God**. By this, he means that they should consistently do God’s will, just as if God’s will served as a foundation underneath them. The words **complete and fully assured** explain the way in which they are supposed to **stand** or continue to obey. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you may be complete and fully assured as you consistently do all the will of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 4 12 t6o3 translate-unknown τέλειοι 1 you may stand complete and fully assured The word **complete** in this context means that a person is what he or she is supposed to be and is able to do what he or she is called to do. If **complete** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that has this meaning, such as “perfect” or “excellent,” or translate **complete** with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “fit for what God has called you to be” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown) COL 4 12 ojtu translate-unknown πεπληροφορημένοι 1 you may stand complete and fully assured The phrase **fully assured** describes people who are confident or sure of what they believe and do. If **fully assured** would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “convinced about what you know” or “without doubts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 4 12 s7e7 figs-abstractnouns ἐν παντὶ θελήματι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 you may stand complete and fully assured If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **will**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “wants” or “desires.” Alternate translation: “in whatever God desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -575,13 +575,13 @@ COL 4 17 z330 καὶ εἴπατε 1 say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry COL 4 17 do70 translate-names Ἀρχίππῳ 1 say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.” **Archippus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) COL 4 17 yy8s figs-quotations βλέπε τὴν διακονίαν ἣν παρέλαβες ἐν Κυρίῳ, ἵνα αὐτὴν πληροῖς 1 say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.” The instruction from Paul to Archippus is written as a direct quote. If your language does not use this form, you can write it as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “that he must look to the ministry that he has received in the Lord, so that he may fulfill it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) COL 4 17 d39x figs-yousingular εἴπατε Ἀρχίππῳ, βλέπε τὴν διακονίαν ἣν παρέλαβες ἐν Κυρίῳ, ἵνα αὐτὴν πληροῖς. 1 say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.” The words **Look**, **you have received**, and **you may fulfill** all refer to Archippus alone and are singular. However, the word **say** refers to the Colossians and is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -COL 4 17 dy11 figs-metaphor βλέπε τὴν διακονίαν 1 say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.” Here Paul speaks as if Archippus’ **ministry** were something he can **look to**. By this, he means that he wants Archippus to focus on carrying out his ministry just as if it were something he could stare at. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “Focus on the ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 4 17 dy11 figs-metaphor βλέπε τὴν διακονίαν 1 say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.” Here Paul speaks as if Archippus’ **ministry** were something he can **look to**. By this, he means that he wants Archippus to focus on carrying out his ministry just as if it were something he could stare at. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “Focus on the ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 4 17 dau6 figs-extrainfo τὴν διακονίαν…παρέλαβες 1 say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.” Paul does not clarify or even hint at what **the ministry** is or from whom Archippus **received** it. If it is possible, leave this information unclear in your translation. If you must include some extra information, you could clarify that “God” gave him the **ministry** of serving the church. Alternate translation: “the task of serving the church … God gave you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) COL 4 17 uble figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.” Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of Archippus with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord** or united to the Lord identifies the situation in which he **received** his **ministry**. He received this **ministry** when he was united to **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “in union with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 4 17 ufdy grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 say to Archippus, “Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, so that you may fulfill it.” The phrase **so that** introduces a goal or purpose. Here, it is the purpose for which Archippus should **look to** or stay focused on his ministry. Use a word or phrase that introduces the goal or purpose of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) COL 4 18 t5js ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ 1 Remember my chains Paul concludes his letter by writing a final greeting to the Colossians. Your language may have a particular way of sharing greetings in a letter. If so, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “I ask to be remembered by my own hand” or “I say hello by my own hand” COL 4 18 fqek figs-explicit τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ 1 Remember my chains In this culture, it was normal for a scribe to write down what the author of the letter was saying. Paul here indicates that he himself is writing these last words. The phrase **by my own hand** means that it was his own hand that took up the pen and wrote. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **by my own hand**by using a comparable expression or include any extra information needed to make it clear. Alternate translation: “is in my handwriting” or “I write myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 4 18 sz0k figs-123person Παύλου 1 Remember my chains Here Paul speaks of himself in the third person. He does this to sign his name to the letter, which shows that the letter is from Paul himself and carries his authority. If your language has a specific form for signing letters or documents, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “I am Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -COL 4 18 h3kx figs-metonymy μου τῶν δεσμῶν 1 Remember my chains Paul speaks of his **chains**, by which he means his imprisonment. If **chains** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “that I am in jail” or “remember my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +COL 4 18 h3kx figs-metonymy μου τῶν δεσμῶν 1 Remember my chains Paul speaks of his **chains**, by which he means his imprisonment. If **chains** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “that I am in jail” or “remember my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 4 18 w2vm translate-blessing ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 Grace be with you As was customary in his culture, Paul closes his letter with a blessing for the Colossians. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness within you” or “I pray that you will have grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) COL 4 18 v7qw figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις μεθ’ 1 Grace be with you If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **Grace**, you can express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “May God be gracious to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index e4f1df00d7..4bcaff00c4 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 19 n0bh figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ δοῦλοι ὑπάρχοντες τῆς φθορᾶς; 1 Peter uses the word **themselves** here to emphasize the irony of spiritually enslaved people promising spiritual freedom to others. Alternate translation: “while they themselves are slaves of destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 2PE 2 19 v5tt figs-metaphor δοῦλοι 1 Peter speaks of people who live sinfully as if they were **slaves** to sin who need to escape from their captivity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “like slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 19 xyua figs-possession δοῦλοι…τῆς φθορᾶς 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **slaves** that are characterized by **destruction**. Alternate translation: “slaves that will be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -2PE 2 19 b79v figs-metaphor ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 For by what someone has been overcome, by this he has been enslaved Peter speaks of a person as being **enslaved** when anything has control over that person, he speaks of that thing as the master of that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this non-figuratively or as a simile. Alternate translation: “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes controlled by that thing” or “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes like a slave to that thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 19 b79v figs-metaphor ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 For by what someone has been overcome, by this he has been enslaved Peter speaks of a person as being **enslaved** when anything has control over that person, he speaks of that thing as the master of that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this plainly or as a simile. Alternate translation: “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes controlled by that thing” or “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes like a slave to that thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 19 xqmy figs-activepassive ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive sentence with an active form. Alternate translation: “For if something overpowers a person, that thing enslaves that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 2 20 v3xc γὰρ 1 Here, **For** could refer to: (1) another explanation of Peter’s statement “themselves being slaves of destruction” in the previous verse, (2) a transition from what Peter said in the previous verse to what he is going to say in this verse. Here, **For** does not indicate the reason or result of what was said in the previous verse. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “And” 2PE 2 20 q96i grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου, ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τούτοις δὲ πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται, γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “they have escaped the impurities of the world through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, but having become entangled and overcome by them again, the last has become worse for them than the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) diff --git a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv index 7d273c6e67..d88d79d039 100644 --- a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 1 5 hdrv checking/headings 0 If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 5. Suggested heading: “Sin Prevents Fellowship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 1JN 1 5 djn4 figs-exclusive ἀκηκόαμεν 1 we have heard The pronoun **we** is exclusive, since John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1JN 1 5 j017 writing-pronouns ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 from him The pronoun **him** in this first instance in the verse refers to Jesus, since John is speaking of the message that he and the other eyewitnesses heard from Jesus. Alternate translation: “from Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1JN 1 5 j018 figs-parallelism ὁ Θεὸς φῶς ἐστιν, καὶ σκοτία ἐν αὐτῷ, οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδεμία 1 God is light, and darkness is not in him at all These two phrases mean similar things. John is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God is entirely light” or, if you represent these metaphors non-figuratively (see next two notes), “God is completely holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1JN 1 5 j018 figs-parallelism ὁ Θεὸς φῶς ἐστιν, καὶ σκοτία ἐν αὐτῷ, οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδεμία 1 God is light, and darkness is not in him at all These two phrases mean similar things. John is likely using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “God is entirely light” or, if you represent these metaphors plainly (see next two notes), “God is completely holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1JN 1 5 cd6f figs-metaphor ὁ Θεὸς φῶς ἐστιν 1 God is light John often uses **light** in this letter to mean what is holy, right, and good. Here, in reference to God, it indicates holiness. Alternate translation: “God is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 1 5 e9m2 figs-metaphor σκοτία ἐν αὐτῷ, οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδεμία 1 darkness is not in him at all John often uses the word **darkness** in this letter to mean what is evil. Alternate translation: “God is not evil at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 1 5 j019 figs-doublenegatives σκοτία ἐν αὐτῷ, οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδεμία 1 darkness is not in him at all John is using a double negative in Greek for emphasis. In English it would come out as, “darkness is not in him not at all.” In Greek the second negative does not cancel the first negative to create a positive meaning. In English the meaning would inaccurately be positive, which is why ULT uses only one negative and says “darkness is not in him at all.” But if your language uses double negatives for emphasis that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) From 169db28c8cd4d1cc5992c8895c96327fd054c3c3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 14:45:58 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 319/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index f353e37766..25b901568d 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -133,6 +133,7 @@ GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλ GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner Titus to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. +GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” GAL 2 6 afy6 figs-metonymy ἐμοὶ…οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο 1 added nothing to me Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 0734c41d6270a9df7ac6eb1a76b65b6424359192 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 14:55:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 320/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 25b901568d..6dc535c658 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -134,6 +134,7 @@ GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕ GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” GAL 2 6 afy6 figs-metonymy ἐμοὶ…οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο 1 added nothing to me Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From dcbf02bcdbd9713809e11eae0b85693531067dcb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 15:05:43 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 321/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 6dc535c658..5964f99d72 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕ GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free”, as modeled by the UST, or you could express the meaning in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free”, as modeled by the UST, or a verb such as **freed**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” GAL 2 6 afy6 figs-metonymy ἐμοὶ…οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο 1 added nothing to me Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From f9e457db67cfeeef8f48831939c85ba583e14597 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 15:06:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 322/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 5964f99d72..7e6c81e184 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕ GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free”, as modeled by the UST, or a verb such as **freed**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” GAL 2 6 afy6 figs-metonymy ἐμοὶ…οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο 1 added nothing to me Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 8bfe23ede7ab85cbf4bf957f6bc952f8e1cc361d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 15:09:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 323/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 7e6c81e184..f27d90e587 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -135,6 +135,7 @@ GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 4 uvjw ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **in Christ Jesus** refers to If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” GAL 2 6 afy6 figs-metonymy ἐμοὶ…οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο 1 added nothing to me Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 73e19c01875ad7c7a86527e8f443ac7169b55535 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 15:09:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 324/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index f27d90e587..2e832c3a96 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 4 uvjw ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **in Christ Jesus** refers to If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” GAL 2 6 afy6 figs-metonymy ἐμοὶ…οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο 1 added nothing to me Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 9 he6q figs-metaphor δοκοῦντες στῦλοι εἶναι 1 built up the church Here, **pillars** refers to men who were leaders of the believers in Jerusalem and taught people the word of God. Alternate translation: “who were like pillars of the church” or “who were recognized as important leaders” or “who were considered to have authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 286090e3bfd7e739be5f0ec9df68b95865ff0bdb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 15:15:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 325/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 2e832c3a96..61da1053b2 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -135,6 +135,7 @@ GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +GAL 2 4 lyqj figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 4 uvjw ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **in Christ Jesus** refers to If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” From 7cfd301a67f6e8895f7f48443f1015cb729bc193 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 11:46:19 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 326/446] Added braces for bolded "these {thigs}" in completed NT books. --- en_tn_42-MRK.tsv | 6 +++--- en_tn_43-LUK.tsv | 12 ++++++------ en_tn_44-JHN.tsv | 36 ++++++++++++++++++------------------ en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- en_tn_54-2TH.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_55-1TI.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 8 ++++---- en_tn_63-1JN.tsv | 4 ++-- 8 files changed, 44 insertions(+), 44 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv index aeb6dc8ab2..b18a3be99f 100644 --- a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv @@ -1070,7 +1070,7 @@ MRK 13 2 rez6 figs-rquestion βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας MRK 13 2 xdhj figs-activepassive οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ μὴ καταλυθῇ 1 Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here, which may certainly not be torn down If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “Your enemies will not leave one stone upon another here, but will tear them down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 13 3 izt8 writing-pronouns καὶ καθημένου αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ Ὄρος τῶν Ἐλαιῶν κατέναντι τοῦ ἱεροῦ, ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν κατ’ ἰδίαν Πέτρος, καὶ Ἰάκωβος, καὶ Ἰωάννης, καὶ Ἀνδρέας 1 And as he was sitting on the Mount of Olives opposite the temple, Peter Here, the pronouns **he** and **him** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “And as Jesus was sitting on the Mount of Olives opposite the temple, Peter, and James, and John, and Andrew were privately asking him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 13 3 u7ju κατ’ ἰδίαν 1 by himself Alternate translation: “when they were alone with him” or “privately” -MRK 13 4 uf37 figs-explicit πότε ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα 1 when will these things be? And what is the sign when all these things are about to be fulfilled Both occurrences of the phrase **these things** refer to what Jesus said in [13:2](../13/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could say explicitly what the phrase **these things** refers to, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 13 4 uf37 figs-explicit πότε ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα 1 when will these things be? And what is the sign when all these things are about to be fulfilled Both occurrences of the phrase **these {things}** refer to what Jesus said in [13:2](../13/02.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could say explicitly what the phrase **these {things}** refers to, as the UST models. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 13 4 lw1n figs-activepassive ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα 1 when all these things If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “when God is about to fulfill all these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 13 5 fe42 writing-pronouns λέγειν αὐτοῖς 1 to say to them The pronoun **them** refers to Peter, James, John, and Andrew, who are mentioned in [13:3](../13/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to say to these four disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 13 5 qekc figs-yousingular βλέπετε 1 In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase **Be careful** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “All of you be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) @@ -1088,7 +1088,7 @@ MRK 13 8 xln4 figs-idiom ἐγερθήσεται…ἐπ’ 1 will rise against MRK 13 8 e2ln figs-ellipsis βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 kingdom against kingdom Jesus is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 13 8 hz6g figs-genericnoun βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 The word **kingdom** represents kingdoms in general, not one particular kingdom. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MRK 13 8 wpd3 figs-metonymy βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 The term **kingdom** represents the people of a kingdom. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of some kingdoms will attack the people of other kingdoms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 13 8 pcyi figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **These things** refers to the things that Jesus has said will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “These things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 13 8 pcyi figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **These {things}** refers to the things that Jesus has said will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “These things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 13 8 dz8g figs-metaphor ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων ταῦτα 1 These are the beginnings of birth pains Jesus uses the metaphor of **birth pains** because, in the same way that the pain of childbirth is eventually replaced by joy when the child is born, so the suffering that is experienced by true believers will eventually be replaced by joy when Christ returns. Because childbirth occurs in all cultures, you should retain this metaphor in your translation. Alternate translation: “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to bear a child” or “These events will be like the first pains a woman suffers when she is about to give birth to a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 13 9 nuti figs-metaphor βλέπετε…ἑαυτούς 1 Jesus uses a word for seeing to indicate the need for paying attention or being ready. If your readers would not understand what it means to **watch yourselves** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “pay attention to yourselves” or “beware”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 13 9 c2cl figs-yousingular βλέπετε…ἑαυτούς 1 But you, watch yourselves In the original language in which Mark wrote this Gospel, the phrase **watch yourselves** is a command or instruction written in the plural form. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “all of you, watch yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) @@ -1174,7 +1174,7 @@ MRK 13 28 ti6e τῆς συκῆς 1 See how you translated the phrase **fig t MRK 13 28 u8ha figs-genericnoun τῆς συκῆς 1 tender Jesus is speaking of these trees in general, not one particular **fig tree**. Alternate translation: “fig trees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MRK 13 28 z417 ἐγγὺς τὸ θέρος ἐστίν 1 summer Alternate translation: “summer is about to begin” or “the warm season is about to start” MRK 13 29 q53b ταῦτα 1 these things Alternate translation: “the signs I have just described” or “the things I have just described” -MRK 13 29 w1k7 ἐγγύς ἐστιν 1 The Greek phrase which the ULT translates as **he is near** could also be translated as “it is near.” If the phrase **these things** refers to the destruction of Jerusalem, then the translation “it is near” is the preferred choice. The phrase “it is near” then refers to the abomination of desolation and the other events related to Jerusalem’s destruction rather than to Christ’s second coming, which the translation **he is near** would indicate. Alternate translation: “it is almost here” +MRK 13 29 w1k7 ἐγγύς ἐστιν 1 The Greek phrase which the ULT translates as **he is near** could also be translated as “it is near.” If the phrase **these {things}** refers to the destruction of Jerusalem, then the translation “it is near” is the preferred choice. The phrase “it is near” then refers to the abomination of desolation and the other events related to Jerusalem’s destruction rather than to Christ’s second coming, which the translation **he is near** would indicate. Alternate translation: “it is almost here” MRK 13 29 aul8 writing-pronouns ἐγγύς ἐστιν 1 he is near The pronoun **he** refers to “the Son of Man”, which is the title Jesus used for himself in [13:26](../13/26.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Son of Man is near” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 13 29 ini9 figs-123person ἐγγύς ἐστιν 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I am near” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MRK 13 29 iavl γινώσκετε ὅτι ἐγγύς ἐστιν ἐπὶ θύραις. 1 The phrase **at the doors** adds further detail to the phrase **he is near**. The phrase **at the doors** explains how **near** he is. diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv index 4f151e653f..cb6c94f24d 100644 --- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv @@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ LUK 5 25 l263 ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν 1 before them Here, the term **befor LUK 5 26 l264 figs-personification ἔκστασις ἔλαβεν ἅπαντας 1 amazement seized of them all Luke describes the **amazement** of the crowd as if it were something that could actively take hold of the people. Alternate translation: “they were all completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 5 26 f6tp figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν φόβου λέγοντες 1 they were filled with fear, saying If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “fear filled them and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 5 26 l265 figs-personification ἐπλήσθησαν φόβου 1 they were filled with fear Luke describes the **fear** of the crowd as if it were something that could actively fill the people. Alternate translation: “they became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LUK 5 27 k6r2 writing-newevent καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα 1 And after these things Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event. The expression **these things** refers to what the previous verses describe. Alternate translation: “After that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +LUK 5 27 k6r2 writing-newevent καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα 1 And after these things Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event. The expression **these {things}** refers to what the previous verses describe. Alternate translation: “After that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 5 27 abc8 writing-pronouns ἐξῆλθεν 1 he went out The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus left that house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 5 27 xf15 ἐθεάσατο τελώνην 1 saw a tax collector The Greek word that Luke uses for **saw** indicates that Jesus gave careful attention to this man when he saw him. Alternate translation: “observed a tax collector” or “looked carefully at a tax collector” LUK 5 27 l266 figs-idiom ἀκολούθει μοι 1 Follow me In this context, to **follow** someone means to become that person’s disciple. Alternate translation: “Become my disciple” or “Come, follow me as your teacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1994,7 +1994,7 @@ LUK 11 42 ans4 figs-explicit ἀποδεκατοῦτε τὸ ἡδύοσμον, LUK 11 42 p71g translate-unknown τὸ ἡδύοσμον, καὶ τὸ πήγανον 1 the mint and the rue These are the names of herbs. People put just a little bit of their leaves into their food to give it flavor. If your readers would not know what **mint** and **rue** are, you could use the name of herbs that they would know. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 11 42 l25z figs-hyperbole πᾶν λάχανον 1 every garden herb This does not mean every **herb** that exists, but every **herb** that the Pharisees were growing in their gardens. Alternate translation: “every other herb in your gardens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 11 42 yk7d τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the justice and the love of God Alternate translation: “to make sure that people are treated fairly and compassionately, as God would want” -LUK 11 42 l707 ταῦτα…κἀκεῖνα 1 these things, and … those things By **these things**, Jesus means the justice and the love of God. By **those things**, he means devotional practices such as tithing. Your language may have its own way of expressing distinctions like this. Alternate translation: “the latter, and … the former” +LUK 11 42 l707 ταῦτα…κἀκεῖνα 1 these things, and … those things By **these {things}**, Jesus means the justice and the love of God. By **those things**, he means devotional practices such as tithing. Your language may have its own way of expressing distinctions like this. Alternate translation: “the latter, and … the former” LUK 11 42 myv2 figs-doublenegatives κἀκεῖνα μὴ παρεῖναι 1 and not to neglect those things If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative, which consists of a negative particle and a negative verb, as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “while making sure to express your devotion to God as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 11 43 w6pv figs-idiom τὴν πρωτοκαθεδρίαν 1 the first seats This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the best seats” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 11 43 sz72 figs-explicit τοὺς ἀσπασμοὺς 1 the greetings The implication is that people would greet the Pharisees in public by addressing them with honorary titles. Alternate translation: “for people to greet you with special titles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2173,7 +2173,7 @@ LUK 12 30 g8jy figs-explicit πάντα τὰ ἔθνη τοῦ κόσμου 1 a LUK 12 30 ns35 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὑμῶν…ὁ Πατὴρ 1 your Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) LUK 12 31 gvj9 ζητεῖτε τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 seek his kingdom As in [12:29](../12/29.md), the word **seek** has a specific meaning here. Alternate translation: “concentrate on God’s kingdom” LUK 12 31 jni1 figs-activepassive ταῦτα προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 these things will be added to you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will also give you these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 12 31 l788 figs-explicit ταῦτα προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 these things will be added to you In context, the expression **these things** refers to food and clothing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God will also give you the food and clothing that you need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 12 31 l788 figs-explicit ταῦτα προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 these things will be added to you In context, the expression **these {things}** refers to food and clothing. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God will also give you the food and clothing that you need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 12 32 eej3 figs-metaphor τὸ μικρὸν ποίμνιον 1 little flock Jesus speaks to his disciples as if they were a small group of sheep or goats. The image means that as a shepherd cares for his **flock**, God will care for the disciples. Alternate translation: “my dear disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 32 e3tv guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) LUK 12 33 rlg7 translate-unknown πωλήσατε τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ὑμῶν, καὶ δότε ἐλεημοσύνην 1 Sell your possessions and give alms This culture referred to charitable donations or gifts to the poor as **alms**. Alternate translation: “Sell your possessions and give the proceeds to the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -3198,7 +3198,7 @@ LUK 18 33 m245 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ LUK 18 33 m246 translate-ordinal τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρίτῃ 1 on the third day If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “on day three” or, depending on how your culture reckons time, “on day two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) LUK 18 33 m247 figs-metonymy ἀναστήσεται 1 he will rise up Jesus speaks of his coming back to life as if he will **rise up**, since he will come **up** out of the grave. Alternate translation: “he will come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 18 34 bm7h αὐτοὶ οὐδὲν τούτων συνῆκαν 1 they understood none of these things If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the verb negative and the object positive here. Alternate translation: “they did not understand any of these things” -LUK 18 34 b29z figs-explicit οὐδὲν τούτων 1 none of these things Implicitly, **these things** refers to Jesus’ description of how he would suffer and die in Jerusalem and then rise from the dead. Alternate translation: “none of what Jesus had told them about what was going to happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 18 34 b29z figs-explicit οὐδὲν τούτων 1 none of these things Implicitly, **these {things}** refers to Jesus’ description of how he would suffer and die in Jerusalem and then rise from the dead. Alternate translation: “none of what Jesus had told them about what was going to happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 18 34 fn58 figs-activepassive ἦν τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο κεκρυμμένον ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 this word was hidden from them If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God prevented them from understanding the meaning of what Jesus was telling them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 18 34 m248 τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο 1 this word Here Luke uses the term **word** in a specific sense. Alternate translation: “this saying” or “what Jesus was telling them” LUK 18 34 qx2n figs-activepassive τὰ λεγόμενα 1 the things that were spoken If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “the things that Jesus said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -3644,7 +3644,7 @@ LUK 21 6 m431 ὃς οὐ καταλυθήσεται 1 which will not be torn d LUK 21 6 m432 figs-activepassive ὃς οὐ καταλυθήσεται 1 which will not be torn down If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this as a separate sentence with an active form, and you could state who will do the action. (In the alternate translation that is suggested here, “they” would mean “your enemies,” and “it” would mean “this building of stone,” as in the alternate translation in the last note to the previous phrase in this verse.) Alternate translation: “They will tear it all down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 21 7 rix4 writing-pronouns ἐπηρώτησαν…αὐτὸν 1 they asked him The pronoun **they** refers to Jesus’ disciples, and the word **him** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the disciples asked Jesus” or “Jesus’ disciples asked him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 21 7 m433 Διδάσκαλε 1 Teacher **Teacher** is a respectful title. You could translate it with an equivalent term that your language and culture would use. -LUK 21 7 a11j figs-explicit πότε οὖν ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα γίνεσθαι 1 when therefore will these things be, and what will be the sign when these things are about to happen The phrase **these things** refers implicitly to what Jesus has just said about enemies destroying the temple. Alternate translation: “then when will the temple be destroyed, and how will we know that our enemies are about to destroy it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 21 7 a11j figs-explicit πότε οὖν ταῦτα ἔσται, καὶ τί τὸ σημεῖον ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα γίνεσθαι 1 when therefore will these things be, and what will be the sign when these things are about to happen The phrase **these {things}** refers implicitly to what Jesus has just said about enemies destroying the temple. Alternate translation: “then when will the temple be destroyed, and how will we know that our enemies are about to destroy it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 21 8 bbri figs-quotesinquotes βλέπετε μὴ πλανηθῆτε; πολλοὶ γὰρ ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου λέγοντες, ἐγώ εἰμι, καί, ὁ καιρὸς ἤγγικεν 1 Be careful that you are not deceived. For many will come in my name, saying, ‘I am {he},’ and, ‘The time has come near.’ If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Be careful that you are not deceived. For many will come in my name, saying that they are the Messiah. They will also say that the time has come near.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 21 8 vu18 figs-activepassive μὴ πλανηθῆτε 1 you are not deceived If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one deceives you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 21 8 f1ed figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 in my name Here Jesus uses the word **name** to mean identity. The people he is talking about will likely not say that their name is Jesus, but they will claim to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “claiming to be me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -4346,7 +4346,7 @@ LUK 24 13 s5n1 figs-explicit ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on that same LUK 24 13 m707 σταδίους ἑξήκοντα ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλήμ, ᾗ ὄνομα Ἐμμαοῦς 1 that was named Emmaus, 60 stadia from Jerusalem It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The name of the village was Emmaus, and it was 60 stadia from Jerusalem” LUK 24 13 d8jk translate-names Ἐμμαοῦς 1 Emmaus **Emmaus** is the name of a village. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 24 13 cea7 translate-bdistance σταδίους ἑξήκοντα 1 60 stadia The word **stadia** is the plural of “stadium,” a Roman measurement of distance equivalent to about 185 meters or a little over 600 feet. Alternate translation: “about eleven kilometers” or “about seven miles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) -LUK 24 14 m708 figs-explicit πάντων τῶν συμβεβηκότων τούτων 1 all these things that had happened If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what **these things** means. Alternate translation: “how Jesus had been arrested and crucified, and how the women had said his body was no longer in the tomb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 24 14 m708 figs-explicit πάντων τῶν συμβεβηκότων τούτων 1 all these things that had happened If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what **these {things}** means. Alternate translation: “how Jesus had been arrested and crucified, and how the women had said his body was no longer in the tomb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 24 15 m709 writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this episode. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 24 15 b3sl writing-pronouns αὐτὸς Ἰησοῦς 1 Jesus himself The word **himself** emphasizes the fact that it was truly Jesus who joined them as they walked. This was not a vision in which Jesus only appeared to be there. Alternate translation: “Jesus, risen from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 24 15 m710 ἐγγίσας, συνεπορεύετο αὐτοῖς 1 approaching, was going with them Alternate translation: “caught up with them and walked along with them” diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv index c4389c60c5..26e1dfe00f 100644 --- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ JHN 1 26 aupp writing-quotations ἀπεκρίθη αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰωάν JHN 1 27 x2ki figs-explicit ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος 1 who comes after me Here, John is speaking about Jesus. The phrase **coming after me** means that John’s ministry has already started and Jesus’ ministry will start later. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who starts his ministry after I have done so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 27 y7v5 figs-metaphor μου…οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ἄξιος, ἵνα λύσω αὐτοῦ τὸν ἱμάντα τοῦ ὑποδήματος 1 me, the strap of whose sandal I am not worthy to untie Untying sandals was the work of a slave or servant. John the Baptist uses this expression figurative to refer to the most unpleasant work of a servant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “me. I am not even worthy to untie the strap of his sandal” or “me, whom I am not worthy to serve in even the most unpleasant way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 28 r4ty writing-background 0 General Information: This verse provides background information about the setting of the story that is recorded in [1:19–27](../01/19.md). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -JHN 1 28 u0iq figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to the events that were described in [1:19–27](../01/19.md). If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This conversation between John and the priests and Levites from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 1 28 u0iq figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these {things}** refers to the events that were described in [1:19–27](../01/19.md). If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “This conversation between John and the priests and Levites from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 28 civp translate-names Βηθανίᾳ 1 **Bethany** is the name of a village. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 1 28 tfxy translate-names τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 **Jordan** is the name of a river. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 1 28 f5he translate-names πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 Here, **beyond the Jordan** refers to the region of Judea that is on the east side of the Jordan River, which is the side opposite from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “on the side of the Jordan River opposite from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ JHN 2 17 jp55 figs-quotemarks ὁ ζῆλος τοῦ οἴκου σου κατ JHN 2 17 pvct figs-yousingular τοῦ οἴκου σου 1 Here, **your** refers to God and is singular. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for God’s house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) JHN 2 17 ua3v figs-explicit τοῦ οἴκου σου 1 your house Here, **house** refers to the temple, which is often called God’s **house** in the Bible. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “for your house, the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 2 17 gg1w figs-metaphor καταφάγεταί 1 consume Here, the author uses **consume** to refer to Jesus’ intense love for the temple, as if it were a fire that burned within him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “will be intense within” or “will be like a fire that consumes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 2 18 r5rw figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 these things Here, **these things** refers to Jesus’ actions against the animal sellers and money changers in the temple. (See the discussion of this event in the General Notes to this chapter.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these disruptive activities in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 2 18 r5rw figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 these things Here, **these {things}** refers to Jesus’ actions against the animal sellers and money changers in the temple. (See the discussion of this event in the General Notes to this chapter.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these disruptive activities in the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 2 19 mp6i figs-imperative λύσατε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ αὐτόν 1 Destroy this temple, and in three days I will raise it up This is an imperative, but it should be translated as introducing a hypothetical situation rather than as a command. Jesus is stating a hypothetical situation in which the event in the second clause would happen if the event in the first clause took place. In this case, Jesus would certainly **raise** the **temple** up if the Jewish authorities were to **destroy** it. Alternate translation: “If you destroy this temple, then in three days I will raise it up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) JHN 2 19 of4u figs-extrainfo λύσατε τὸν ναὸν τοῦτον, καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ αὐτόν 1 Here, John records Jesus using the words **Destroy** and **raise** to describe his killing and resurrection, as if tearing down and rebuilding a building. However, the Jewish leaders did not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to them. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 2 20 qb4x figs-rquestion σὺ ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερεῖς αὐτόν? 1 The Jewish leaders are using the question form for emphasis. They think that Jesus wants to tear down the temple and rebuild it in three days. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you cannot possibly rebuild it in three days!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -304,11 +304,11 @@ JHN 3 8 mxjc οὕτως ἐστὶν 1 This phrase connects this sentence wit JHN 3 8 k9ay ὁ γεγεννημένος ἐκ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 See how you translated this phrase in [3:6](../03/06.md). JHN 3 8 wh4z figs-explicit τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, **the Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit, who enables people to be born again. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 3 9 g4ji figs-rquestion πῶς δύναται ταῦτα γενέσθαι? 1 How can these things be? This question could be: (1) a genuine question that shows that Nicodemus is confused. Alternate translation: “How are these things possible” (2) a rhetorical question Nicodemus uses to add emphasis to the statement. Alternate translation: “These things cannot be!” or “These things are impossible!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 3 9 phe2 figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to all that Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things you have just told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 3 9 phe2 figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these {things}** refers to all that Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things you have just told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 3 10 gw2h figs-rquestion σὺ εἶ ὁ διδάσκαλος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ, καὶ ταῦτα οὐ γινώσκεις 1 Are you a teacher of Israel, and yet you do not understand these things? Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. He is not asking Nicodemus a question in order to get information. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are a teacher of Israel, so I am surprised you do not understand these things!” or “You are a teacher of Israel, so you should understand these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 3 10 gbu5 figs-you σὺ εἶ ὁ διδάσκαλος…οὐ γινώσκεις 1 Are you a teacher … yet you do not understand The word **you** is singular and refers to Nicodemus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Are you, Nicodemus, the teacher … you do not understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JHN 3 10 ljiy figs-explicit ὁ διδάσκαλος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 Here, **the teacher** indicates that Nicodemus was recognized as a master teacher and religious authority in the land of Israel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the renowned religious teacher in Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 3 10 vx3u figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to all that Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated this phrase is the previous verse. Alternate translation: “these things you have just told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 3 10 vx3u figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these {things}** refers to all that Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. See how you translated this phrase is the previous verse. Alternate translation: “these things you have just told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 3 11 jt1f figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 3 11 upi7 figs-exclusive ὃ οἴδαμεν λαλοῦμεν…τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἡμῶν 1 we speak When Jesus says **we** and **our** in this verse, he was not including Nicodemus. Jesus used these pronouns as a contrast to Nicodemus saying **we** in [3:2](../03/02.md). While Nicodemus used **we** to refer to himself and the other Jewish religious leaders, Jesus could have been referring to: (1) himself and his disciples. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “my disciples and I speak what we know … our testimony” (2) himself and the other members of the Godhead. Alternate translation: “the Father, Spirit, and I speak what we know … our testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) JHN 3 11 j1k1 figs-you οὐ λαμβάνετε 1 you do not accept The word **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ JHN 5 15 auad figs-synecdoche τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 Here, **the Jews* JHN 5 16 efg2 writing-background καὶ διὰ τοῦτο, ἐδίωκον οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι ταῦτα ἐποίει ἐν Σαββάτῳ. 1 Now The writer uses the phrase **And because of this** to show that previous verse gave background information for what John will now present. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now the Jews began to persecute Jesus because he was doing these things on the Sabbath.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 5 16 ef9i figs-explicit διὰ τοῦτο 1 Here, **this** refers to what the man whom Jesus had healed told the Jewish leaders. The Jewish leaders began to persecute Jesus because he had healed the man on the Sabbath, which was something they believed was against the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because Jesus had healed him on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 5 16 kup5 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -JHN 5 16 acn0 figs-explicit ὅτι ταῦτα ἐποίει 1 This phrase indicates a second reason why the Jewish leaders began persecuting Jesus. Here, **these things** refers to Jesus healing people on the Sabbath. The plural **things** indicates that he healed on the Sabbath multiple times, not just on the occasion recorded in verses [5–9](../05/05.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he was doing these healings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 5 16 acn0 figs-explicit ὅτι ταῦτα ἐποίει 1 This phrase indicates a second reason why the Jewish leaders began persecuting Jesus. Here, **these {things}** refers to Jesus healing people on the Sabbath. The plural **things** indicates that he healed on the Sabbath multiple times, not just on the occasion recorded in verses [5–9](../05/05.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he was doing these healings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 5 16 f69o ἐν Σαββάτῳ 1 Your language might use an indefinite article rather than the definite article here, since the synagogue ruler is not speaking of a specific Sabbath. Alternate translation: “on a Sabbath day” JHN 5 17 lq1v guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 My Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 5 18 zrmw figs-explicit διὰ τοῦτο οὖν 1 Here, **this** refers to what Jesus had said in the previous verse. One of the reasons why the Jewish leaders wanted to kill Jesus was that Jesus called God his Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because Jesus said this, therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ JHN 5 33 uxh5 figs-you ὑμεῖς ἀπεστάλκατε πρὸς Ἰωάν JHN 5 33 athw figs-ellipsis ὑμεῖς ἀπεστάλκατε πρὸς Ἰωάννην 1 Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “You have sent messengers to John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 5 33 qrdg figs-explicit πρὸς Ἰωάννην 1 Here, **John** refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist) It does not refer to the apostle John, who wrote this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to John the Baptist” or “to John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 5 34 rvc5 figs-genericnoun παρὰ ἀνθρώπου 1 the testimony that I receive is not from man Here, **man** does not refer to any specific man, but to any human being. Alternate translation: “from mankind” or “from anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -JHN 5 34 dseu figs-explicit ταῦτα λέγω 1 Here, **these things** could refer to: (1) what Jesus said about John the Baptist in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I say this about John” (2) all that Jesus has said in verses [17–33](../05/17.md). Alternate translation: “I say these things about myself and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 5 34 dseu figs-explicit ταῦτα λέγω 1 Here, **these {things}** could refer to: (1) what Jesus said about John the Baptist in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I say this about John” (2) all that Jesus has said in verses [17–33](../05/17.md). Alternate translation: “I say these things about myself and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 5 34 a4je figs-activepassive ἵνα ὑμεῖς σωθῆτε 1 that you might be saved If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “so that God might save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 5 35 qczd writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνος 1 **That one** here refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist]]) If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 5 35 w4w3 figs-metaphor ἐκεῖνος ἦν ὁ λύχνος ὁ καιόμενος καὶ φαίνων 1 John was a lamp that was burning and shining, and you were willing to rejoice in his light for a while Jesus uses the word **lamp** to refer to John the Baptist. In the way that lamps in those days burned oil and shined light, so John’s teaching helped people understand God’s truth and prepared them to receive Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could state this plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “That one taught you the truth about God” or “That one was like a lamp that was burning and shining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -903,7 +903,7 @@ JHN 6 58 lb07 figs-explicit ἔφαγον οἱ πατέρες καὶ ἀπέθ JHN 6 58 j2hx figs-123person ὁ τρώγων τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον 1 He who eats this bread Jesus spoke about himself as **this bread**. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 6 58 jv4c figs-extrainfo ὁ τρώγων τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον 1 He who eats this bread Jesus is using **eating this bread** to refer to trusting him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 6 59 ph39 writing-background 0 In this verse John gives background information about when this event happened. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -JHN 6 59 ukxi figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to what Jesus said to the crowd and Jewish leaders in verses [26–58](../06/26.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these teachings about being the bread of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 6 59 ukxi figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these {things}** refers to what Jesus said to the crowd and Jewish leaders in verses [26–58](../06/26.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these teachings about being the bread of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 60 t1me figs-ellipsis ἀκούσαντες 1 Here, John leaves out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “having heard this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 6 60 wf67 figs-metonymy ἐστιν ὁ λόγος οὗτος 1 Here, **word** stands for what Jesus had just spoken to the crowd in verses [26–58](../06/26.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “What he has just said is” or “These words are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 6 60 lmcv figs-explicit σκληρός 1 Here, **hard** refers to something that causes a negative reaction because it is harsh or unpleasant. It does not refer to something that is difficult to understand, but something that is difficult to accept. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “hard to accept” or “offensive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1145,7 +1145,7 @@ JHN 8 25 c106 figs-rquestion τὴν ἀρχὴν ὅ τι καὶ λαλῶ ὑ JHN 8 26 f9pp figs-infostructure ἀλλ’ ὁ πέμψας με ἀληθής ἐστιν, κἀγὼ ἃ ἤκουσα παρ’ αὐτοῦ, ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases and make a new sentence. Alternate translation: “But I will say to the world the things that I heard from him who sent me. He is true.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) JHN 8 26 n3gf figs-extrainfo ὁ πέμψας με…παρ’ αὐτοῦ 1 These phrases refer to God. However, since the Jewish leaders did not understand what Jesus meant when he used these phrases, you do not need to explain their meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 8 26 ivk5 ὁ πέμψας με ἀληθής ἐστιν 1 Here, **true** means to be truthful or to speak only the truth. If this use of **true** would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who sent me is truthful” or “the one who sent me tells the truth” -JHN 8 26 xj8y figs-explicit κἀγὼ ἃ ἤκουσα παρ’ αὐτοῦ, ταῦτα 1 Jesus says that **the one who sent** him **is true** in order to imply that **these things** he **heard** and spoke are **true**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the true things that I heard from him, these true things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 8 26 xj8y figs-explicit κἀγὼ ἃ ἤκουσα παρ’ αὐτοῦ, ταῦτα 1 Jesus says that **the one who sent** him **is true** in order to imply that **these {things}** he **heard** and spoke are **true**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the true things that I heard from him, these true things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 26 lsc7 figs-metonymy ταῦτα λαλῶ εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 these things I say to the world Here, John records Jesus using **the world** to refer to the people who live in **the world**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “these things I say to everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 8 27 i7gq writing-background 0 General Information: In this verse John gives information about the Jewish leaders to explain their reaction to Jesus’ teaching. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 8 27 hh1s guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -1683,7 +1683,7 @@ JHN 12 14 h6xz figs-activepassive καθώς ἐστιν γεγραμμένον JHN 12 15 ts1f figs-quotemarks 0 This verse is a combination of parts of various quotations from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) JHN 12 15 vra1 figs-metonymy θυγάτηρ Σιών 1 daughter of Zion Here, **daughter of Zion** is used to refer to the people who lived in Jerusalem. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you people of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 12 15 c36a πῶλον ὄνου 1 A **colt** is a young male **donkey**. -JHN 12 16 rq52 figs-explicit ταῦτα…ταῦτα…ταῦτα 1 His disciples did not understand these things In this verse, **these things** refers to the words of the Old Testament prophecies that were quoted in the previous verse, which were fulfilled in the events described in [verses 13–14](../12/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “His disciples did not understand the meaning of these words from the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 12 16 rq52 figs-explicit ταῦτα…ταῦτα…ταῦτα 1 His disciples did not understand these things In this verse, **these {things}** refers to the words of the Old Testament prophecies that were quoted in the previous verse, which were fulfilled in the events described in [verses 13–14](../12/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “His disciples did not understand the meaning of these words from the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 16 xdm7 figs-activepassive ὅτε ἐδοξάσθη Ἰησοῦς 1 when Jesus was glorified If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, John implies that God did it. Alternate translation: “when God glorified Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 12 16 u9hf figs-explicit ἐδοξάσθη 1 when Jesus was glorified Here, **glorified** could refer to: (1) when Jesus became alive again after he was killed. Alternate translation: “when Jesus came back to life” (2) when Jesus returned to heaven. Alternate translation: “when Jesus went back to heaven” (3) both Jesus’ resurrection and return to heaven. Alternate translation: “when Jesus came back to life and went back to heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 16 w0hx figs-activepassive ταῦτα ἦν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ γεγραμμένα 1 when Jesus was glorified If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the prophets have written these things about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1823,7 +1823,7 @@ JHN 13 5 qfqd figs-pastforfuture βάλλει 1 began to wash the feet of the di JHN 13 5 adm9 figs-activepassive ᾧ ἦν διεζωσμένος 1 began to wash the feet of the disciples If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that he had tied around himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 13 6 hevx figs-pastforfuture ἔρχεται…λέγει 1 Lord, are you going to wash my feet? Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 6 bz27 figs-rquestion Κύριε, σύ μου νίπτεις τοὺς πόδας? 1 Lord, are you going to wash my feet? **Peter** is using a rhetorical question here to show that he does not want Jesus to wash his feet. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Lord, it is not right for you to wash my feet!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 13 7 o7nf figs-explicit μετὰ ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to Jesus’ crucifixion and resurrection. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “after the events that are about to take place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 13 7 o7nf figs-explicit μετὰ ταῦτα 1 Here, **these {things}** refers to Jesus’ crucifixion and resurrection. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “after the events that are about to take place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 8 oy8j figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 8 f6dg figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ νίψω σε, οὐκ ἔχεις μέρος μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 If I do not wash you, you have no share with me **Jesus** uses two negative statements to convince **Peter** to allow him to **wash** his **feet**. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I must wash you so that you can have a share with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) JHN 13 8 m90p figs-explicit ἐὰν μὴ νίψω σε, οὐκ ἔχεις μέρος μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 Here, Jesus’ use of **no share with me** could imply: (1) that Peter must let him wash his feet if he wants to receive his **share** of the inheritance that God promised to give his people. Alternate translation: “If I do not wash you, you will not share in God’s promised inheritance with me” (2) that Peter must let him wash his feet if he wants to continue being his disciple. Alternate translation: “If I do not wash you, you will no longer be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2057,7 +2057,7 @@ JHN 15 16 v3je figs-explicit καὶ ὁ καρπὸς ὑμῶν μένῃ 1 th JHN 15 16 kc4z grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε 1 that your fruit should remain Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. It could mean: (1) the content of this clause is the purpose for Jesus choosing his disciples. Alternate translation: “and he chose you so that whatever you would ask” (2) the content of this clause is the purpose for the disciples’ fruit remaining. Alternate translation: “and this fruit would remain so that whatever you would ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) JHN 15 16 bcy1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 15 16 acqo figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 See how you translated **in my name** in [14:13](../14/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JHN 15 17 rib2 ταῦτα 1 Here, **These things** could refer to: (1) the commands Jesus referred to in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “These commands” (2) the command in the second half of this verse. Alternate translation: “This” +JHN 15 17 rib2 ταῦτα 1 Here, **These {things}** could refer to: (1) the commands Jesus referred to in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “These commands” (2) the command in the second half of this verse. Alternate translation: “This” JHN 15 18 ntzw grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ὁ κόσμος ὑμᾶς μισεῖ 1 the world Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If the world hates you, and it does hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 15 18 d5ff figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 the world Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 19 aj8s grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἦτε 1 the world Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that his disciples are not **from the world**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If you were from the world, but you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) @@ -2066,7 +2066,7 @@ JHN 15 19 ayo7 figs-infostructure ὅτι δὲ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου οὐ JHN 15 20 v53s figs-metonymy μνημονεύετε τοῦ λόγου οὗ ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν 1 Remember the word that I said to you Here, Jesus uses **word** to refer to what he says later in this sentence. If this use of **word** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Remember the teaching that I said to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 20 wzg6 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ 1 Remember the word that I said to you See how you translated this phrase in [13:16](../13/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 20 a8kw figs-metonymy εἰ τὸν λόγον μου ἐτήρησαν…τηρήσουσιν 1 Remember the word that I said to you See how you translated a similar phrase in [8:51](../08/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 15 21 eh1v figs-metonymy ταῦτα πάντα ποιήσουσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 because of my name Here, **all these things** refers to the bad things Jesus told his disciples that the unbelievers in the world would do to them in [verses 18–20](../15/18.md). If this use of **these things** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will hate and persecute you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 21 eh1v figs-metonymy ταῦτα πάντα ποιήσουσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 because of my name Here, **all these things** refers to the bad things Jesus told his disciples that the unbelievers in the world would do to them in [verses 18–20](../15/18.md). If this use of **these {things}** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will hate and persecute you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 21 z35m figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 because of my name Here, Jesus uses **my name** to refer to himself. People will make his followers suffer because they belong to him. If this use of **name** would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because you belong to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 21 hs9x figs-explicit τὸν πέμψαντά με 1 Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 22 m75h grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ μὴ ἦλθον καὶ ἐλάλησα αὐτοῖς 1 If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He knows that he did come and speak to the world. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If I had not come and spoken to them, but I did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) @@ -2090,13 +2090,13 @@ JHN 15 27 ew2v figs-metonymy ἀρχῆς 1 the beginning Here Jesus uses **begi JHN 16 intro wb8v 0 # John 16 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus promises that his disciples will be persecuted (15:18–16:4)
2. Jesus describes the work of the Holy Spirit (16:5–15)
3. Jesus says that he will return to his Father (16:16–28)
4. Jesus says that his disciples will soon abandon him (16:29–33)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Helper ([14:16](../14/16.md)) who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them. He is also the Spirit of Truth ([14:17](../14/17.md)) who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

### “The hour is coming”

Jesus used the words, “the hour is coming,” to begin prophecies about events that were about to occur. He is not referring to the 60 minute hour, but to a point in time when these prophecies will be fulfilled. “The hour” in which people would persecute his followers ([16:2](../16/02.md)) lasted for many years. However, “the hour” in which his disciples would scatter and leave him alone ([16:32](../16/32.md)) was less than sixty minutes long. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Simile

Jesus said that just as a woman is in pain when she gives birth to a baby, so also his followers would be sad when he died. But just as the woman is happy after the baby is born, so also his followers would be happy when Jesus became alive again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) JHN 16 1 pbc8 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus continues to speak to his disciples either at the end of their evening meal or after they have finished that meal and are walking to Gethsemane. It is unclear whether or not they left immediately after Jesus said “Let us go from here” at the end of the Chapter 14 ([John 14:31](../14/31.md)). JHN 16 1 hn4j 0 Connecting Statement: Verses 1–4 are part of the same topic Jesus began in [15:18](../15/18.md). He is speaking about the persecution that his disciples will experience. -JHN 16 1 kz43 figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to what Jesus has just said in [15:18–25](../15/18.md) about the coming persecution of his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the warnings that you will be hated by everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 16 1 kz43 figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these {things}** refers to what Jesus has just said in [15:18–25](../15/18.md) about the coming persecution of his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the warnings that you will be hated by everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 16 1 vui6 figs-explicit μὴ σκανδαλισθῆτε 1 you will not fall away Here, Jesus uses **fall away** to refer to no longer trusting in him or no longer being his disciple. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “you might not stop trusting me” or “you might not stop being my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 16 2 hhgj figs-metaphor ἀποσυναγώγους 1 the hour is coming when everyone who kills you will think that he is offering a service to God See how you translated a similar phrase in [9:22](../09/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 16 2 i79b figs-metonymy ἔρχεται ὥρα 1 the hour is coming when everyone who kills you will think that he is offering a service to God See how you translated this phrase in [4:21](../04/21.md) and see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to Chapter 4. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 16 2 xueq grammar-connect-words-phrases ἵνα πᾶς ὁ ἀποκτείνας ὑμᾶς 1 Here, **for** could indicate: (1) time, as in the UST. (2) an explanation of to what **an hour** refers. Alternate translation: “that everyone who kills you wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) JHN 16 3 k4r6 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 16 4 b8z1 figs-explicit ταῦτα λελάληκα ὑμῖν 1 Here, **these things** refers to what Jesus has just said in [16:2–3](../16/02.md) regarding what the Jews will do to his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have told you that the Jews will persecute you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 16 4 b8z1 figs-explicit ταῦτα λελάληκα ὑμῖν 1 Here, **these {things}** refers to what Jesus has just said in [16:2–3](../16/02.md) regarding what the Jews will do to his disciples. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have told you that the Jews will persecute you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 16 4 blb2 figs-metonymy ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἡ ὥρα αὐτῶν 1 when their hour comes See how you translated **hour** in [verse 2](../16/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 16 4 dh5i figs-metonymy ἐξ ἀρχῆς 1 in the beginning See how you translated **beginning** in [15:27](../15/27.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 16 5 gbpt figs-explicit τὸν πέμψαντά με 1 Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2177,7 +2177,7 @@ JHN 16 33 ysh6 figs-idiom ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 so that you will have peace in me H JHN 16 33 z7wj figs-metonymy ἐγὼ νενίκηκα τὸν κόσμον 1 I have conquered the world Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 intro nb2a 0 # John 17 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

This chapter is one long prayer that can be divided into three parts according to the topics of Jesus’ prayer requests:

1. Jesus prays for himself (17:1–5)
2. Jesus prays for his disciples (17:6–19)
3. Jesus prays for all Christians (17:20–26)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Glory

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, bright light that visually represents how great God is. When people see this light, they are afraid. In this chapter Jesus asks God to show his followers his true glory ([17:1](../17/01.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]])

### Jesus is eternal

Jesus existed before God created the world ([17:5](../17/05.md)). John wrote about this in [1:1](../01/01.md).

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Prayer

Jesus is God’s one and only Son ([3:16](../03/16.md)), so he could pray differently from the way other people pray. He used many words that might seem to be commands. Your translation should make Jesus sound like a son speaking with love and respect to his father and telling him what the father needs to do so that the father will be honored. JHN 17 1 uf8z 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus had been speaking to his disciples, but now he begins to pray to God. -JHN 17 1 an1o figs-explicit ταῦτα ἐλάλησεν 1 Here, **these things** refers to everything that Jesus told his disciples in [chapters 13–16](../13/01.md). If this use of **these things** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “described what would happen to him and his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 17 1 an1o figs-explicit ταῦτα ἐλάλησεν 1 Here, **these {things}** refers to everything that Jesus told his disciples in [chapters 13–16](../13/01.md). If this use of **these {things}** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “described what would happen to him and his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 17 1 b4pj figs-idiom ἐπάρας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 he lifted up his eyes to the heavens See how you translated this idiom in [6:5](../06/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 17 1 k7tb figs-explicit εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 heavens Here, **heaven** refers to the sky. The Jews believed that **heaven**, the place where God dwells, was located above the sky. If this use of **heaven** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “beyond the sky toward God in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 17 1 l8sa guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ…Υἱὸς 1 Father … Son **Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -2480,7 +2480,7 @@ JHN 19 35 bs5s figs-123person ὁ ἑωρακὼς…αὐτοῦ…ἐκεῖν JHN 19 35 c9q7 figs-ellipsis ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς πιστεύητε 1 so that you would also believe John is leaving out some of the words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “so that you would also believe that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 19 36 wid6 writing-background 0 General Information: [Verses 36–37](../19/36.md) are another break from the main storyline in which John tells us that the two events in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md) made some prophecies in scripture come true. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 19 36 uyvo writing-quotations ἐγένετο…ταῦτα, ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ 1 in order to fulfill scripture Here John uses **that the scripture would be fulfilled** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 34:20](../../psa/34/20.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “these things happened in order that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -JHN 19 36 l8zi figs-explicit ἐγένετο…ταῦτα 1 in order to fulfill scripture Here, **these things** refers to the two events described in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md). If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the soldiers did not break Jesus’ legs but pierced his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 19 36 l8zi figs-explicit ἐγένετο…ταῦτα 1 in order to fulfill scripture Here, **these {things}** refers to the two events described in [verses 33–34](../19/33.md). If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the soldiers did not break Jesus’ legs but pierced his side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 19 36 qwl5 figs-activepassive ἵνα ἡ Γραφὴ πληρωθῇ 1 in order to fulfill scripture If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in order to fulfill the words that someone wrote in scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 19 36 bm8y figs-quotemarks ὀστοῦν οὐ συντριβήσεται αὐτοῦ 1 in order to fulfill scripture This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 34:20](../../psa/34/20.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) JHN 19 36 b1kx figs-activepassive ὀστοῦν οὐ συντριβήσεται αὐτοῦ 1 Not one of his bones will be broken This is a quotation from [Psalm 34:20](../../psa/34/20.md). If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one will break even one of his bones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2612,7 +2612,7 @@ JHN 20 29 q9fb figs-ellipsis μὴ ἰδόντες 1 who have not seen Jesus is JHN 20 30 yd1j writing-endofstory 0 General Information: In [verses 30–31](../20/30.md) John comments about the story he has written in chapters 1 through 20. He also states his reason for writing this book. He does this in order to indicate that the story is almost finished. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) JHN 20 30 azxu σημεῖα 1 See how you translated the term **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles” JHN 20 30 xz6j figs-activepassive ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ τούτῳ 1 signs that have not been written in this book If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Since John wrote this Gospel, you should use the first person pronoun “I” to indicate who did the action. Alternate translation: “which I have not written in this book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 20 31 zlc5 figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** could mean: (1) the miraculous signs that John wrote about in his Gospel and mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “these signs” (2) everything that John wrote about in his Gospel. Alternate translation: “everything in this book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 20 31 zlc5 figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these {things}** could mean: (1) the miraculous signs that John wrote about in his Gospel and mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “these signs” (2) everything that John wrote about in his Gospel. Alternate translation: “everything in this book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 20 31 am9l figs-activepassive ταῦτα δὲ γέγραπται 1 but these have been written If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but the author wrote about these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 20 31 mlqg figs-you πιστεύητε…ἔχητε 1 but these have been written In this verse **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) people who are reading this Gospel and do not trust in Jesus for salvation. Alternate translation: “you might believe … you might have” (2) people who are reading this Gospel and already believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you would continue believing … you would continue to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JHN 20 31 p5k4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -2699,7 +2699,7 @@ JHN 21 23 elmi writing-pronouns ὅτι οὐκ ἀποθνῄσκει…αὐτ JHN 21 23 qxqr ἐὰν αὐτὸν θέλω μένειν ἕως ἔρχομαι, τί πρὸς σέ 1 See how you translated this sentence in the previous verse. JHN 21 24 s5bp writing-endofstory 0 General Information: In [verses 24–25](../21/24.md) John indicates the end of his Gospel by giving a closing comment about himself and what he has written in this book. Use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) JHN 21 24 d6t5 figs-123person οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ μαθητὴς ὁ μαρτυρῶν περὶ τούτων, καὶ ὁ γράψας ταῦτα, καὶ οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀληθὴς αὐτοῦ ἡ μαρτυρία ἐστίν 1 the disciple In this verse John is speaking about himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “I am the disciple who testifies about these things and who wrote these things, and we know that my testimony is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -JHN 21 24 f7ww figs-explicit τούτων…ταῦτα 1 who testifies about these things In this verse, **these things** refers to everything that John has written in this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “everything in this book … all these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 21 24 f7ww figs-explicit τούτων…ταῦτα 1 who testifies about these things In this verse, **these {things}** refers to everything that John has written in this Gospel. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “everything in this book … all these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 21 24 h5i9 figs-exclusive οἴδαμεν 1 we know Here the pronoun **we** is exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) JHN 21 24 l03o figs-extrainfo οἴδαμεν 1 we know Here, **we** could refer to: (1) John and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus, as in [1:14](../01/14.md) and [1 John 1:2–7](../../1jn/01/02.md). Alternate translation: “We eyewitnesses of Jesus’ life know” (2) the elders in the church at Ephesus where John lived at the end of his life. Alternate translation: “We elders of the church at Ephesus know” However, since who **we** refers to is uncertain, it would be best not to explain the meaning further. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 21 25 l3hz figs-activepassive ἐὰν γράφηται καθ’ ἕν 1 If each one were written down If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if someone wrote down each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index f25206064f..37d2832ce3 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -456,14 +456,14 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 4 5 tgox figs-metonymy τῶν καρδιῶν 1 In Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state clearly the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea of **hearts**. Alternate translation: “of the minds” or “that humans plan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 4 5 pw6r figs-idiom ὁ ἔπαινος γενήσεται ἑκάστῳ ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks as if **praise** were something that could **come** or travel from **God** to humans. Paul means that **God** is the source of the **praise** that **each one** will receive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this sentence by translating it so that **God** is the one who gives the **praise**. Alternate translation: “God will give praise to each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 4 5 kcya figs-explicit ὁ ἔπαινος γενήσεται ἑκάστῳ ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul might seem to be saying that every person will receive some **praise** from **God**. However, Paul does not mean that. Instead, he only gives the example of the person who has been faithful to God, not the example of the person who has not been faithful to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express why Paul uses only one example by clarifying that this example is only about those who are faithful, or you could include the opposite example about those who have been unfaithful. Alternate translation: “the praise from God will come to each faithful one” or “the praise and blame from God will come to each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 4 6 agfz writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers back to everything Paul has said about himself and Apollos in [3:4–23](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **these things** refers to by clarifying that it refers to what Paul has said about farming and building. Alternate translation: “what I have said about farming and building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 4 6 agfz writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 Here, **these {things}** refers back to everything Paul has said about himself and Apollos in [3:4–23](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what **these {things}** refers to by clarifying that it refers to what Paul has said about farming and building. Alternate translation: “what I have said about farming and building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 4 6 ijn5 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a nongendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 4 6 xxp2 translate-names Ἀπολλῶν 1 **Apollos** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1CO 4 6 ymxi figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, **us** refers to Paul and Apollos only. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 4 6 ziz9 figs-quotations μάθητε, τό μὴ ὑπὲρ ἃ γέγραπται 1 for your sakes If your language does not use this form, you can translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “you might learn not to go beyond what is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 1CO 4 6 o02a figs-explicit τό μὴ ὑπὲρ ἃ γέγραπται, 1 Here Paul quotes a short phrase that is not from the Old Testament but that would have been well-known to the Corinthians. The phrase **what is written** could refer to: (1) the Old Testament scriptures. Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should only act in ways that the Old Testament approves. Alternate translation: “Not beyond what the Scriptures say” (2) general principles of life that everyone knows about. Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should only act in ways that are generally approved and accepted. Alternate translation: “Not beyond proper standards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 4 6 kyrt figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than focusing on the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that: (1) the Scriptures or scriptural author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “the authors of Scripture have written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 4 6 hk55 figs-infostructure ἵνα 2 The statement introduced by **so that** could be the purpose for: (1) learning that they should not go **beyond what is written**. Alternate translation: “with the goal that” (2) Paul applying **these things** to himself and Apollos. Alternate translation: “so that, in the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 4 6 hk55 figs-infostructure ἵνα 2 The statement introduced by **so that** could be the purpose for: (1) learning that they should not go **beyond what is written**. Alternate translation: “with the goal that” (2) Paul applying **these {things}** to himself and Apollos. Alternate translation: “so that, in the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 4 6 e79m figs-activepassive μὴ εἷς…φυσιοῦσθε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the person “puffs” himself or herself up. Alternate translation: “no one would puff himself or herself up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 4 6 hjfu writing-pronouns τοῦ ἑνὸς…τοῦ ἑτέρου 1 Here, **the one** and **the other** refer to any specific leaders the Corinthians might praise or blame. Perhaps Paul specifically has himself and Apollos in mind, but he intentionally uses words that would include any leader whom the Corinthians could praise or blame. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **the one** and **the other**by using a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is speaking generally of any leaders here. Alternate translation: “of any leader … any other leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 4 7 fnu3 figs-yousingular σε…ἔχεις…ἔλαβες…ἔλαβες…καυχᾶσαι…λαβών 1 between you … do you have that you did not … you have freely … do you boast … you had not In this verse, Paul uses the singular form for **you**. He does this in order to directly address each specific person among the Corinthian believers. In the next verse, he again uses the plural form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) @@ -514,7 +514,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 4 13 z4tt figs-idiom ἕως ἄρτι 1 Here Paul ends this sentence in a similar way to how he began his sentence in [4:11](../04/11.md). In Paul’s culture, the phrase **even until now** means that what Paul speaks about has been happening and continues to happen up to the time when he writes this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to this very day” “all the time we serve Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 4 14 k1at figs-infostructure οὐκ ἐντρέπων ὑμᾶς γράφω ταῦτα, ἀλλ’ ὡς τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ, νουθετῶ 1 I do not write these things to shame you, but to correct you If your language would not put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “I correct you as my beloved children. I do not write these things as shaming you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 4 14 r9pj grammar-connect-logic-goal ἐντρέπων ὑμᾶς 1 Here, the phrase **as shaming you** introduces what Paul did **not write** to do. If your readers would not understand **as shaming** as a purpose, you could use a word or phrase that does clearly indicate purpose. Alternate translation: “in order to shame you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1CO 4 14 nlzx writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers back to what Paul has already written, focusing on [4:6–13](../04/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **these things** with a word or phrase that refers back to what Paul has just finished writing. Alternate translation: “what I have said about us apostles and you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 4 14 nlzx writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 Here, **these {things}** refers back to what Paul has already written, focusing on [4:6–13](../04/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **these {things}** with a word or phrase that refers back to what Paul has just finished writing. Alternate translation: “what I have said about us apostles and you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 4 14 t8jc grammar-connect-logic-result ὡς τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ 1 correct Here, the phrase **as my beloved children** could introduce: (1) the reason why Paul corrects the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because you are my beloved children” (2) the way in which he corrects the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “as a father corrects his beloved children, so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 4 14 ruu5 figs-metaphor τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ 1 my beloved children Here Paul speaks of the Corinthians as if they were his **beloved children**. He speaks in this way because he is their spiritual father, the one who first preached the good news to them. Also, he loves them in the same way a father loves his own children. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind why Paul calls the Corinthians his **beloved children**with a comparable metaphor or plainly. Alternate translation: “my beloved younger siblings” or “fellow believers whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 4 15 ur1i grammar-connect-condition-contrary ἐὰν…μυρίους παιδαγωγοὺς ἔχητε ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the Corinthians do not have **myriads of guardians**, but he speaks in this way to emphasize that they have only one spiritual father, no matter how many **guardians** they have. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “even if you somehow had myriads of guardians in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) @@ -1142,8 +1142,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 8 jld4 figs-rquestion μὴ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ταῦτα λαλῶ 1 Am I not saying these things according to human authority? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, you are not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong negation. If you do so, you will need to separate the first half of the verse from the second half. Alternate translation: “I am not saying these things according to men.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 9 8 igpe figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 Am I not saying these things according to human authority? Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any humans, whether men or women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a nongendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 9 8 drqe figs-idiom κατὰ ἄνθρωπον 1 Am I not saying these things according to human authority? Here Paul speaks of **saying** things **according to men**. By using this phrase, he wishes to identify arguments made by people who think and act in only human ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the phrase **according to men**by using a word or phrase that refers to what unbelievers say and argue. Alternate translation: “according to what mere humans argue” or “according to this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 9 8 tdze writing-pronouns ταῦτα -1 Am I not saying these things according to human authority? In both places where it appears, **these things** refers back to what Paul has said in [9:3–7](../09/03.md) about his “right” to receive financial support from the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **these things** with a word or phrase that clearly refers back to what has already been said. Alternate translation: “those things … those things” or “what I have said … what I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 9 8 ou7a grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ 1 Or does not the law also say this? The word **or** introduces an alternate to what Paul says in the first half of the verse. Paul could be **saying these things according to men**. However, with **or** he introduces what he thinks is actually true: **the law also** says **these things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this use of **or** with another word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to end the first half of the sentence with its own question mark. Alternate translation: “Instead,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1CO 9 8 tdze writing-pronouns ταῦτα -1 Am I not saying these things according to human authority? In both places where it appears, **these {things}** refers back to what Paul has said in [9:3–7](../09/03.md) about his “right” to receive financial support from the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **these {things}** with a word or phrase that clearly refers back to what has already been said. Alternate translation: “those things … those things” or “what I have said … what I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 9 8 ou7a grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ 1 Or does not the law also say this? The word **or** introduces an alternate to what Paul says in the first half of the verse. Paul could be **saying these things according to men**. However, with **or** he introduces what he thinks is actually true: **the law also** says **these {things}**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this use of **or** with another word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to end the first half of the sentence with its own question mark. Alternate translation: “Instead,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 9 8 vy1n figs-rquestion ἢ καὶ ὁ νόμος ταῦτα οὐ λέγει? 1 Or does not the law also say this? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, the law says these things.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong statement. If you do so, you will need to separate the second half of the verse from the first half. Alternate translation: “No, the law also says these things.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 9 8 spqj translate-unknown ὁ νόμος 1 Or does not the law also say this? Here, **the law** refers specifically to the first five books of the Old Testament, often called the Pentateuch or “the law of Moses.” Make sure your readers can tell that Paul is referring to this specific **law** here. Alternate translation: “the Pentateuch” or “Moses’ law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 9 9 lf1q writing-quotations ἐν γὰρ τῷ Μωϋσέως νόμῳ, γέγραπται 1 Do not put a muzzle on In Paul’s culture, **For it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text. In this case, Paul clarifies that the quote comes from **the law of Moses**. It is specifically from [Deuteronomy 25:4](../deu/25/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces the quotation with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the law of Moses” or “For in the book of Deuteronomy, in the law of Moses we read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) @@ -1188,7 +1188,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 14 rj38 figs-metonymy τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 get their living from the gospel Here, **the gospel** refers to: (1) the job or occupation of proclaiming **the gospel**. Alternate translation: “preaching the gospel” (2) the people who hear and believe in **the gospel**. Alternate translation: “those who believe the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 9 15 fs7a translate-unknown οὐ κέχρημαι 1 these rights Here, **taken advantage of** refers to “making use of” a resource or “requiring” a specific behavior. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **taken advantage of** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “have not made use of” or “have not required you to provide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 9 15 j8zn figs-doublenegatives οὐ κέχρημαι οὐδενὶ 1 these rights Here Paul uses two negative words in the Greek: “have not taken advantage of none.” In Paul’s culture, two negative words made the statement even more negative. English speakers would misunderstand these two negatives, so the ULT expresses the idea with one strong negative. If your language can use two negatives as Paul’s culture did, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in this way, you can translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “have by no means taken advantage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -1CO 9 15 wese writing-pronouns τούτων 1 these rights Here, **these things** could refer to: (1) the “right” or “rights” that Paul has to financial support from the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “of these rights” (2) all the reasons he has given in [9:6–14](../09/06.md) for why those who proclaim the gospel should receive financial support. Alternate translation: “of these reasons” or “of these arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 9 15 wese writing-pronouns τούτων 1 these rights Here, **these {things}** could refer to: (1) the “right” or “rights” that Paul has to financial support from the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “of these rights” (2) all the reasons he has given in [9:6–14](../09/06.md) for why those who proclaim the gospel should receive financial support. Alternate translation: “of these reasons” or “of these arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 9 15 u9my figs-pastforfuture οὐκ ἔγραψα 1 these rights Here Paul refers to 1 Corinthians itself, the letter he is currently writing. Use whatever tense in your language would be appropriate to refer to the letter itself. Alternate translation: “I have not written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 1CO 9 15 ygaz writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these rights Here Paul refers to what he has already written, especially to [9:6–14](../09/06.md). Use a form in your language that refers back to things that have just been said. Alternate translation: “those things” or “what I have just written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 9 15 vf7d writing-pronouns οὕτως γένηται 1 these rights Here, **thus** refers to receiving financial support from the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **thus** with a word or phrase that more clearly refers to receiving financial support. Alternate translation: “these things might be done” or “support might be given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1296,8 +1296,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 5 w673 figs-activepassive κατεστρώθησαν 1 their corpses were scattered about If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **scattered** rather than focusing on the person doing the “scattering.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God scattered them about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 5 jxua figs-euphemism κατεστρώθησαν…ἐν 1 their corpses were scattered about Paul is referring to the deaths of many Israelites as “scattering about.” This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant while still expressing the idea that they died in many different places. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **they were scattered about** with a different polite way of referring to deaths or you could state it plainly. Alternate translation: “they passed away throughout” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 10 5 b96g figs-explicit κατεστρώθησαν…ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 in the wilderness Here Paul speaks in general of how the Israelites left Egypt to go to the land that God had promised to give them. To get to that land, they traveled through **the wilderness**. However, the Israelites often disobeyed or grumbled against God, and so he **was not well pleased with most of them**. He punished them by letting most of them die **in the wilderness** and only allowing their children to enter the land that he had promised. See [Numbers 14:20–35](../num/14/20.md) for God’s announcement of judgment. If your readers are not familiar with this story, you could add a footnote that refers to or summarizes the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 10 6 dzkm writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 in the wilderness Here, **these things** refers to what Paul has said about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **these things** to more clearly express what it refers to. Alternate translation: “what happened to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1CO 10 6 nr6j figs-idiom ἐγενήθησαν 1 in the wilderness Here Paul states that things that happened to the Israelites **became examples**. This means that what happened can be interpreted as **examples** or occurred as **examples**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **became** to more clearly state that **these things** should be understood as **examples**. Alternate translation: “can be understood as” or “happened as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 10 6 dzkm writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 in the wilderness Here, **these {things}** refers to what Paul has said about the Israelites in [10:1–5](../10/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **these {things}** to more clearly express what it refers to. Alternate translation: “what happened to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 10 6 nr6j figs-idiom ἐγενήθησαν 1 in the wilderness Here Paul states that things that happened to the Israelites **became examples**. This means that what happened can be interpreted as **examples** or occurred as **examples**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **became** to more clearly state that **these {things}** should be understood as **examples**. Alternate translation: “can be understood as” or “happened as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 10 6 afxo μὴ εἶναι ἡμᾶς ἐπιθυμητὰς 1 in the wilderness Alternate translation: “we would not desire” 1CO 10 6 eisd figs-ellipsis ἐπεθύμησαν 1 to play Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. If your language needs these words, you could supply them from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “desired evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 10 7 lven writing-quotations ὥσπερ γέγραπται 1 to play In Paul’s culture, **even as it is written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text. In this case, the quotation comes from [Exodus 32:6](../exo/32/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces the quotation with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “for it can be read in Exodus” or “For in the book of Exodus we read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) @@ -1319,7 +1319,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 10 cz1e grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here, **and** introduces the result of the Israelites “grumbling.” If your language does not use **and** to introduce a result, you can use a word or phrase that is more natural. Alternate translation: “and as a result” or “with the result that they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 10 10 i3q3 figs-activepassive ἀπώλοντο ὑπὸ τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **destroyed** rather than focusing on who or what does the “destroying.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it by using **the destroyer**. Alternate translation: “God used the destroyer to destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 10 h02d translate-unknown τοῦ ὀλοθρευτοῦ 1 were destroyed by the destroyer Here, **destroyer** refers to an angelic messenger whom God sends to “destroy.” Sometimes, this angel is called “the Angel of Death.” The stories that Paul refers to do not explicitly mention **the destroyer**, but Paul understands **the destroyer** to be the one who acts out God’s judgment by bringing a plague and killing Israelites. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the destroyer** with a word or phrase that refers to a spiritual being that “destroys.” However, this spiritual being must be one whom God could send. Alternate translation: “the angel of death” or “a destroying angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 10 11 u1mp writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things happened to them Here, **these things** refers back to what Paul has said about the Israelites in [10:7–10](../10/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **these things** to clarify what the phrase refers to. Alternate translation: “the events that I have mentioned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1CO 10 11 u1mp writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things happened to them Here, **these {things}** refers back to what Paul has said about the Israelites in [10:7–10](../10/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **these {things}** to clarify what the phrase refers to. Alternate translation: “the events that I have mentioned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 11 bxef translate-unknown τυπικῶς 1 these things happened to them Just as in [10:6](../10/06.md), **examples** here refers to how the stories about the Israelites function as **examples** or “illustrations” for the believers who hear or read those stories. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **examples** with a comparable word or phrase and compare with how you translated “examples” in [10:6](../10/06.md). Alternate translation: “as patterns” or “as models” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 10 11 xlwp grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 2 these things happened to them Here, **but** introduces a further development. It does not contrast with the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **but**with a word or phrase that introduces a further development. Alternate translation: “and” or “and then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 10 11 zavw figs-activepassive ἐγράφη 1 these things happened to them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **written** rather than focusing on the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “Moses” or “someone” did it. Alternate translation: “a person wrote them” or “Moses wrote them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv index e019e89d0d..89ec4adb8b 100644 --- a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 2 4 sk8t figs-pastforfuture αὐτὸν…καθίσαι 1 Here, **he sits** is part of a description of the kinds of things that this person does. If it is confusing in your language to use the present tense for this, you could use the future tense, since this will happen in the future. Alternate translation: “he will sit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 2TH 2 4 wj33 ἀποδεικνύντα ἑαυτὸν ὅτι ἔστιν Θεός 1 showing that he himself is God Here, **showing that he himself is God** does not mean that this man is God, but only that he is displaying himself to the world as though he were God. Alternate translation: “showing himself as God” or “attempting to demonstrate to people that he is God” 2TH 2 5 rsz1 figs-rquestion οὐ μνημονεύετε ὅτι, ἔτι ὢν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ταῦτα ἔλεγον ὑμῖν 1 Do you not remember … these things? Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form to remind the Thessalonians of what he taught when he was with them previously. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -2TH 2 5 lkk7 writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things Here, **these things** refers to the topics that Paul mentioned in verses 3 and 4, including the rebellion against God, the man of lawlessness, and the return of Jesus on the day of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2TH 2 5 lkk7 writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things Here, **these {things}** refers to the topics that Paul mentioned in verses 3 and 4, including the rebellion against God, the man of lawlessness, and the return of Jesus on the day of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2TH 2 6 hph0 καὶ νῦν τὸ κατέχον οἴδατε 1 There are two possibilities for understanding the function of the word **now** here. (1) It goes with **what is restraining him**. Alternate translation: “And you know what is restraining him now” or (2) it goes with **you know**. Alternate translation: “And now you know what is restraining him” 2TH 2 6 ask4 figs-activepassive τὸ ἀποκαλυφθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ καιρῷ 1 he is revealed in his time If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proper time, when God will allow him to reveal himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 2 7 faa5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast γὰρ 1 Here, the word translated **For** serves to connect this sentence as a contrast to what Paul has said about **lawlessness**, starting in verse 3. Until here, Paul was talking about lawlessness in the future, but now he wants to clarify that people are already being lawless.Use a natural way in your language for introducing this contrast. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Actually,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) diff --git a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv index 7413cdcd19..543a3bb2c5 100644 --- a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 4 14 hdd9 figs-explicit μὴ ἀμέλει τοῦ ἐν σοὶ χαρίσματος 1 Do not neglect the gift in you The implication is that this **gift** is the ability that God has given Timothy for ministry. Alternate translation: “do not neglect the ability that God has given you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 4 14 xp1k figs-activepassive ὃ ἐδόθη σοι διὰ προφητείας 1 which was given to you through prophecy If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “which you received when leaders of the church prophesied about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 4 14 rr8f translate-symaction ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν τοῦ πρεσβυτερίου 1 with the imposition of the hands of the elders Paul is speaking of a ceremony during which the church leaders put their **hands** on Timothy and prayed that God would enable him to do the work he had commanded him to do. Alternate translation: “when the elders all laid their hands on you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -1TI 4 15 sbcg figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 these things If it is helpful in your language, you may want to make explicit what **these things** are. Alternate translation: “these things that I am telling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TI 4 15 sbcg figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 these things If it is helpful in your language, you may want to make explicit what **these {things}** are. Alternate translation: “these things that I am telling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 4 15 m65m figs-metaphor ἐν τούτοις ἴσθι 1 Study these things, be in them Paul is speaking as if Timothy could physically be inside the instructions he has just given him. Alternate translation: “and follow them consistently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 4 15 merc figs-explicit σου ἡ προκοπὴ 1 your progress If it is helpful in your language, you may want to make explicit in what way Timothy is to make **progress**. Alternate translation: “your increasing ability to live the way that Jesus wants you to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 4 16 uq6c ἔπεχε σεαυτῷ καὶ τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 Pay attention to yourself and to the teaching Alternate translation: “Pay attention to how you live and to what you teach” diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 4bcaff00c4..55698c40fd 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 20 zxcf figs-possession τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος 1 Here, **our Lord** means “the person who is lord over us” or “the person who rules over us.” The conjunction **and** indicates that **our** also applies to **Savior**, meaning “the person who saves us.” Alternate translation: “of the person who rules over us and saves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2PE 2 20 ih4w figs-activepassive τούτοις…πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can supply the doer of the action from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “these things having entangled them again; these things have overcome them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 2 20 ygag figs-metaphor πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες 1 Here, Peter speaks of people who seem to have been believers but have returned to living sinfully as if they have become **entangled** in a net. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “if they have begun to live sinfully again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2PE 2 20 noa9 writing-pronouns τούτοις 1 Here, the pronoun **these things** refers to “the defilements of the world.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could specify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “by these defilements of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2PE 2 20 noa9 writing-pronouns τούτοις 1 Here, the pronoun **these {things}** refers to “the defilements of the world.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could specify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “by these defilements of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 20 d6ra writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md) and discussed in [2:12–19](../02/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 20 d42g figs-nominaladj γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 the last has become worse for them than the first Here, the adjectives **last** and **first** function as nouns. They are plural, and ULT supplies the noun **things** in each case to show that. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you can supply a more specific singular noun. Alternate translation: “the final condition for them is worse than their original condition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 2PE 2 21 x7gd grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates the reason why the last condition of the false teachers was worse than their first condition, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “This is so because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 3 10 z9f6 γῆ καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ ἔργα εὑρεθήσεται 1 Here, **found** indicates that the removal of the heavens and elements will leave the earth and what has been done on it exposed for God to see and judge. Alternate translation: “the earth and the deeds in it will be exposed” or “the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed” 2PE 3 11 buq4 grammar-connect-logic-result τούτων οὕτως πάντων λυομένων 1 This clause indicates the reason for the expected result that follows in the rest of the verse. Peter tells his readers that God’s future destruction of heaven and earth should result in them living holy and godly lives. Alternate translation: “Because of all of these things being thus destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 3 11 nq63 figs-activepassive τούτων οὕτως πάντων λυομένων 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form and you can state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “Since God will thus destroy all of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2PE 3 11 tpfg writing-pronouns τούτων 1 Here, **these things** refers to the heavens, the elements, and the earth mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2PE 3 11 tpfg writing-pronouns τούτων 1 Here, **these {things}** refers to the heavens, the elements, and the earth mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things that I have just described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 3 11 t8wx figs-rquestion ποταποὺς δεῖ ὑπάρχειν ὑμᾶς? 1 Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this emphasis by translating his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. If it you translate these words as a statement, then you will need to change the question mark at the end of the next verse into a period. Alternate translation: “it is certainly necessary for you to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 2PE 3 11 qoui figs-ellipsis ἐν ἁγίαις ἀναστροφαῖς καὶ εὐσεβείαις 1 Peter is leaving out words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the context. Alternate translation: “living with holy behaviors and godly acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2PE 3 12 bqnn προσδοκῶντας καὶ σπεύδοντας 1 Here, **waiting for and hastening** are two things Peter wanted his readers to do while also living holy and godly lives, as stated in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “while expecting and hastening” @@ -442,7 +442,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 3 13 r5qo figs-abstractnouns ἐν οἷς δικαιοσύνη κατοικεῖ 1 in which righteousness dwells If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **righteousness** by translating the idea behind it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “in which everyone is righteous” or “in which everyone does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 3 14 d178 grammar-connect-logic-result διό 1 Peter uses **Therefore** to introduce a description of what his readers should do as a result of what he has just said. He is referring specifically to the discussion of the coming day of the Lord given in [3:10–13](../03/10.md). Alternate translation: “Because of these reasons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 3 14 qjca figs-explicit ἀγαπητοί 1 Here, **beloved ones** refers to those whom Peter is writing to, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. See how you translated this in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2PE 3 14 ndxd writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers back to the events related to the coming day of the Lord, which Peter described in [3:10–13](../03/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things that will happen on the day of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2PE 3 14 ndxd writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 Here, **these {things}** refers back to the events related to the coming day of the Lord, which Peter described in [3:10–13](../03/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things that will happen on the day of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 3 14 fj1l figs-activepassive σπουδάσατε ἄσπιλοι καὶ ἀμώμητοι αὐτῷ εὑρεθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “be diligent so that God will find you spotless and blameless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 3 14 s141 figs-doublet ἄσπιλοι καὶ ἀμώμητοι 1 spotless and blameless The words **spotless** and **blameless** share similar meanings. Peter is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by translating them with a single expression. Alternate translation: “completely pure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2PE 3 14 byr8 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 Here, the pronoun **him** could refer to: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation: “by Jesus” (2) God. Alternate translation: “by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 3 15 nnd7 figs-activepassive κατὰ τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτῷ σοφίαν 1 according to the wisdom having been given to him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “according to the wisdom that God gave to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 3 15 esr7 figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτῷ σοφίαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **wisdom** by translating the idea behind it with an adjective, such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “according to the wise words having been given to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 3 16 zzko figs-explicit ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐπιστολαῖς 1 Here, the context suggests that Paul is the author of **the letters**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in all Paul’s letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2PE 3 16 wil1 writing-pronouns λαλῶν ἐν αὐταῖς περὶ τούτων 1 Here, **these things** could refer to: (1) the events related to the day of the Lord discussed in [3:10–13](../03/10.md) and called “these things” in [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “these things that will happen on the day of the Lord” (2) the need to live godly lives and consider that God’s patience is for saving people, as discussed in [3:14–15](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “these things I have just said about living blamelessly and about God’s patience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2PE 3 16 wil1 writing-pronouns λαλῶν ἐν αὐταῖς περὶ τούτων 1 Here, **these {things}** could refer to: (1) the events related to the day of the Lord discussed in [3:10–13](../03/10.md) and called “these things” in [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “these things that will happen on the day of the Lord” (2) the need to live godly lives and consider that God’s patience is for saving people, as discussed in [3:14–15](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “these things I have just said about living blamelessly and about God’s patience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 3 16 z4cj writing-pronouns ἃ οἱ ἀμαθεῖς καὶ ἀστήρικτοι στρεβλοῦσιν 1 Here, **which** refers to the things in Paul’s letters that are difficult to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly and start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “The ignorant and unstable ones distort these difficult things found in Paul’s letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 3 16 weh2 figs-metaphor ἃ οἱ ἀμαθεῖς καὶ ἀστήρικτοι στρεβλοῦσιν 1 Here, **distort** is used to describe changing the meaning of a statement in order to give a false meaning like twisting something so that it changes shape. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “which the ignorant and unstable ones interpret falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 3 16 sg60 figs-explicit ὡς καὶ τὰς λοιπὰς Γραφὰς 1 Here, **the other scriptures** refers to both the entire Old Testament and the New Testament texts that had been written by the time Peter wrote this letter. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as also the other authoritative scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) diff --git a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv index d88d79d039..1839925a09 100644 --- a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 2 intro zjj9 0 # 1 John 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (2:1–17, continuing from 1:5)
2. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18–2:27)
3. Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28–29, continues through 3:10)

In order to show that John is writing something like poetry in [2:12–14](../02/12.md), some translations set the statements in those verses farther to the right than the rest of the text, and they begin a new line at the start of each statement.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Antichrist

In [2:18](../02/18.md) and [2:22](../02/22.md), John writes both about a specific person called the Antichrist and about many people who will be “antichrists.” The word “antichrist” means “opposed to Christ.” The Antichrist is a person who will come just before the return of Jesus and imitate Jesus’ work, but he will do that for evil purposes. Before that person comes, there will be many other people who work against Christ. They too are called “antichrists,” but as a description rather than as a name. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [2:20](../02/20.md), some ancient manuscripts read “you all know,” and that is the reading that ULT follows. However, other ancient manuscripts read “you know all things.” It seems more likely, based on everything else in the letter, that “you all know” is the correct original reading, since John is countering the claim of false teachers to know more than other believers. The reading “you know all things” seems to have arisen because copyists felt a need to have an object for the verb “know.” Nevertheless, if a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 2 1 j043 τεκνία μου 1 My little children Here and in several other places in the book, John uses the diminutive form of the word **children** as an affectionate form of address. Alternate translation: “My dear children” 1JN 2 1 v57g figs-metaphor τεκνία μου 1 My little children John is using the word **children** to describe the believers to whom he is writing. They are under his spiritual care, and so he regards them in that sense as if they were his own children. You could translate this in a non-figurative way, or you could represent the metaphor as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “You dear believers who are under my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 1 p49e ταῦτα γράφω 1 I am writing these things Here, **these things** refers generally to everything that John has written about in the letter so far. Alternate translation: “I am writing this letter” +1JN 2 1 p49e ταῦτα γράφω 1 I am writing these things Here, **these {things}** refers generally to everything that John has written about in the letter so far. Alternate translation: “I am writing this letter” 1JN 2 1 j044 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 And The word **And** here introduces a contrast between what John hopes to achieve by writing, that these believers will not sin, and what might happen, that one of them might sin. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1JN 2 1 bi4g figs-hypo ἐάν τις ἁμάρτῃ, Παράκλητον ἔχομεν πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα 1 if anyone should sin, we have an advocate with the Father John is describing a hypothetical situation in order to reassure his readers. Alternate translation: “suppose someone does sin. Then we have an advocate with the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 1JN 2 1 stj2 figs-explicit Παράκλητον ἔχομεν πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα, Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν 1 we have an advocate with the Father, Jesus Christ John assumes that his readers will know that an **advocate** is someone who takes a person’s side and pleads on his behalf. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ will take our side and ask God the Father to forgive us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -599,7 +599,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 5 12 j329 figs-metaphor ἔχει τὴν ζωήν…τὴν ζωὴν οὐκ ἔχει 1 has life … does not have life Since both groups of people are physically alive, John means this in a spiritual sense. As in [4:9](../04/09.md), he is likely referring to what he calls “eternal life” in [3:15](../03/15.md) and [5:11](../05/11.md). See how you translated that term in those verses. Alternate translation: “has power from God to live as a new person now and will live forever in God’s presence after death … does not have power from God to live as a new person now and will not live forever in God’s presence after death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 5 12 j330 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱὸν…τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son … the Son of God **Son** and **Son of God** are important titles for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 5 13 rr7y checking/headings 0 If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 13. Suggested heading: “Eternal Life with the True God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) -1JN 5 13 ezl8 writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things Here, **these things** refers back to everything that John has written so far in the letter. Alternate translation: “all of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1JN 5 13 ezl8 writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 these things Here, **these {things}** refers back to everything that John has written so far in the letter. Alternate translation: “all of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 5 13 wns6 figs-metonymy τοῖς πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 you, the ones believing in the name of the Son of God As in [2:12](../02/12.md), John is using the **name** of Jesus to represent who Jesus is and what he has done. Alternate translation: “who believe in the Son of God and what he has done for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 5 13 gg32 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 5 13 j331 figs-metaphor ὅτι ζωὴν ἔχετε αἰώνιον 1 that you have eternal life The emphasis in this verse seems to be more on the future aspect of the expression **eternal life**. Alternate translation: “that you will live forever in God’s presence after you die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 1c957eeb3b521a82f8a24a60003c42dee2df90bf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 15:50:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 327/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 55698c40fd..32964decc7 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -160,11 +160,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 1 jif2 figs-possession αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe an opinion that is characterized by **destruction**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the adjective “destructive” instead of the noun “destruction.” Alternate translation: “destructive heresies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2PE 2 1 wnuv αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας 1 Here, **destruction** could refer to: (1) the eternal damnation of those who teach or accept these **heresies**. Alternate translation: “heresies that result in their eternal damnation” (2) the destruction of the faith of those who teach or accept these **heresies**. Alternate translation: “heresies that destroy their faith in the Messiah” 2PE 2 1 xscu figs-explicit τὸν ἀγοράσαντα αὐτοὺς Δεσπότην 1 the master Here, **master** refers to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “master Jesus who bought them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2PE 2 1 g99z figs-metaphor τὸν ἀγοράσαντα αὐτοὺς Δεσπότην 1 the master who bought them Peter uses the phrase **master who bought** to speak of Jesus as the owner of the people he has saved from damnation by paying the penalty for their sins with his death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Jesus who saved them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 1 g99z figs-metaphor τὸν ἀγοράσαντα αὐτοὺς Δεσπότην 1 the master who bought them Peter uses the phrase **the master who bought** to speak of Jesus as the owner of the people he has saved from damnation by paying the penalty for their sins with his death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Jesus who saved them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 1 xaan grammar-connect-logic-result ἐπάγοντες ἑαυτοῖς ταχινὴν ἀπώλειαν 1 Here, **bringing** indicates that this clause is the result of the deeds of the false teachers described in the previous clauses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make a new sentence here and state this connection plainly. Alternate translation: “As a result, they are bringing swift destruction on themselves.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 2 1 xk1x ταχινὴν ἀπώλειαν 1 Here,**swift** could mean: (1) their destruction will come soon. Alternate translation: “destruction that will happen soon” or “imminent destruction” (2) their destruction will be sudden or quick. Alternate translation: “quick destruction” 2PE 2 1 flv3 figs-abstractnouns ἐπάγοντες ἑαυτοῖς ταχινὴν ἀπώλειαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verb, such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “they are causing themselves to be destroyed soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 2 2 eevb figs-explicit πολλοὶ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly, as the UST does, that this refers to people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2PE 2 2 eevb figs-explicit πολλοὶ 1 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly, as the UST does, that **many** refers to people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 2 xzw1 figs-metaphor ἐξακολουθήσουσιν 1 Here Peter uses the word **follow** to refer to someone imitating the actions of someone else, like someone who walks behind another person in the same direction. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor literally. Alternate translation: “will imitate their licentious acts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 2 dg82 writing-pronouns αὐτῶν ταῖς ἀσελγείαις 1 Here the pronoun **their** refers to the false teachers introduced in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the licentious acts of these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 2 z53e ταῖς ἀσελγείαις 1 Here, **licentious acts** refers to immoral sexual actions that demonstrate a lack of self-control. Alternate translation: “uncontrolled sensual acts” From 2f65d31370527730c963fa863071fbc08f74b1ef Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 15:57:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 328/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 32964decc7..306352ae50 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -207,12 +207,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 5 llfu figs-distinguish Νῶε, δικαιοσύνης κήρυκα 1 This phrase gives us more information about Noah. It tells us that Noah proclaimed **righteousness** to the ungodly people of the ancient world. It does not distinguish this Noah from any other person named Noah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 2PE 2 5 kro6 figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνης κήρυκα 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an equivalent expression. In this context, the term refers righteous deeds. Alternate translation: “a preacher of righteous deeds” or “a preacher of how to act rightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 5 xy9u figs-possession δικαιοσύνης κήρυκα 1 Peter could be using the possessive form to refer to: (1) a preacher who is characterized by righteousness. Alternate translation: “a preacher who is righteous” (2) a preacher who tells others to live righteously. Alternate translation: “one who urged others to live righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -2PE 2 5 enbs κατακλυσμὸν κόσμῳ ἀσεβῶν ἐπάξας 1 This clause indicates when God protected Noah and his other seven family members, when he brought a flood upon the world, as it is translated in the UST. +2PE 2 5 enbs κατακλυσμὸν κόσμῳ ἀσεβῶν ἐπάξας 1 This clause indicates when God protected Noah and his other seven family members, when he **brought a flood upon {the} world**, as it is translated in the UST. 2PE 2 5 z814 figs-possession κόσμῳ ἀσεβῶν 1 Peter could be using the possessive form to refer to: (1) the human content of the ancient world. Alternate translation: “the world that contained ungodly people” (2) the world as being characterized by ungodliness. Alternate translation: “the ungodly world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2PE 2 6 xhcb grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the third condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 2PE 2 6 ap1j figs-infostructure καὶ πόλεις Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας τεφρώσας καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν 1 If it would be natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “and he condemned the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to destruction, having reduced them to ashes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -2PE 2 6 gp3e πόλεις Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας τεφρώσας 1 having reduced the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to ashes This phrase indicates the means by which God destroyed Sodom and Gomorrah. Alternate translation: “by means of reducing the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to ashes” -2PE 2 6 xi0n translate-names Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας 1 **Sodom and Gomorrah** are the names of two cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2PE 2 6 gp3e πόλεις Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας τεφρώσας 1 having reduced the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to ashes This phrase indicates the means by which God destroyed **Sodom and Gomorrah**. Alternate translation: “by means of reducing the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to ashes” +2PE 2 6 xi0n translate-names Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας 1 **Sodom** and **Gomorrah** are the names of two cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2PE 2 6 xfyx writing-pronouns καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν 1 Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God condemned them to destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 6 w1b9 figs-abstractnouns καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **destruction** by translating the idea behind it with an verb, such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “he condemned them to be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 6 hgt7 grammar-connect-logic-result ὑπόδειγμα μελλόντων ἀσεβέσιν τεθεικώς 1 an example of what is going to happen to the ungodly This clause indicates the result of what happened in the previous clauses of the verse. God’s destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah resulted in them being an **example** and a warning of what happens to others who disobey God. Alternate translation: “with the result that God set them as an example of the things that will happen to the ungodly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 7 mort figs-activepassive καταπονούμενον ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the behavior of the lawless ones in licentiousness oppressed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 2 7 x8vy grammar-connect-logic-result ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς 1 Here, **by** could refer to: (1) the thing that was oppressing Lot, as in the ULT. (2) the reason why Lot was oppressed. Alternate translation: “because of the behavior of the lawless ones in licentiousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 2 7 wrba figs-abstractnouns ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων…ἀναστροφῆς 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **behavior** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “by what the lawless ones did” or “by how the lawless ones acted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 2 7 wq2r ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς 1 Here, **in** indicates the content of what the lawless people were doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **in licentiousness** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the licentious behavior” +2PE 2 7 wq2r τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς 1 Here, **in** indicates the content of what the lawless people were doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **in licentiousness** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the licentious behavior of the lawless ones” 2PE 2 7 xnys figs-abstractnouns τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the abstract noun **licentiousness** with an adjective. See how you translated the plural form of this term in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “the licentious behavior of the lawless ones” or “the wild sensual behavior of the lawless ones”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 7 k79d figs-explicit τῶν ἀθέσμων 1 Here, **the lawless ones** refers to the people who lived in the city of Sodom, where Lot lived. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this phrase explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the lawless people of Sodom” or “of the people who act as if there is no law in Sodom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 8 dvle writing-background γὰρ 1 Peter uses **for** here to provide background information about Lot’s life in Sodom. This is to help readers understand why Peter called Lot a righteous person in the previous verse. Peter is not using **for** here to indicate result. Use the natural form in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) From 7f4545a00aeaebe2a9fe58ac99b0e8dffb5add73 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 15:59:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 329/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 61da1053b2..4f518401bf 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases are making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner Titus to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 4 j5ka τοὺς παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους 1 The false brothers came in secretly Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” +GAL 2 4 j5ka figs-metaphor παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι 1 The false brothers came in secretly Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers and with the intent of observing what was going. Paul does not mean that those around the **false brothers** were unaware of their presence. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 09d4cb4d6099efc1909ccbc897dd068902d91ab1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 16:00:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 330/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 306352ae50..dc05306715 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -234,9 +234,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 8 xa7g writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the inhabitants of Sodom. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could specify what the pronoun **them** refers to. Alternate translation: “the people of Sodom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 8 ujf1 figs-idiom ἐνκατοικῶν ἐν αὐτοῖς ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας 1 This phrase, **day from day**, is an idiom meaning “day after day” or “every day.” You may need to express this literally in your language. Alternate translation: “living among them day after day” or “living among them every day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2PE 2 8 hpi4 figs-synecdoche ψυχὴν δικαίαν…ἐβασάνιζεν 1 was tormenting his righteous soul Here, **soul** refers to Lot’s thoughts and emotions. The immoral behavior of the citizens of Sodom and Gomorrah disturbed him emotionally. Alternate translation: “was greatly disturbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -2PE 2 8 co5v ἀνόμοις ἔργοις 1 This phrase could mean: (1) the lawless works were the means by which Lot tormented his soul. Alternate translation: “with lawless works” (2) the lawless works were the reason why Lot tormented his soul. Alternate translation: “because of lawless works” +2PE 2 8 co5v ἀνόμοις ἔργοις 1 This phrase could mean: (1) the **lawless works** were the means by which Lot tormented his soul. Alternate translation: “with lawless works” (2) the **lawless works** were the reason why Lot tormented his soul. Alternate translation: “because of lawless works” 2PE 2 9 j0m1 grammar-connect-condition-fact οἶδεν Κύριος 1 This verse and the next verse are the end of a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is giving the result of the previous conditions being true. If you have made [2:4–10](../02/04.md) into separate sentences, then you will need to indicate that [2:9](../02/09.md) is the result of the previous conditions being true. Alternate translation: “Therefore, it is true that the Lord knows how” or “Since these things are true, it is also true that the Lord knows how” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -2PE 2 9 xk2a grammar-connect-words-phrases ἀδίκους δὲ εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως κολαζομένους τηρεῖν 1 Here, **but** could refer to: (1) a contrast between the previous clause and what follows, as in the ULT and UST. (2) a simple connection between the previous clause and what follows. Alternate translation: “and to keep the unrighteous ones to be punished in the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2PE 2 9 xk2a grammar-connect-words-phrases ἀδίκους δὲ εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως κολαζομένους τηρεῖν 1 Here, **and** could refer to: (1) a contrast between the previous clause and what follows, as in the ULT and UST. (2) a simple connection between the previous clause and what follows. Alternate translation: “and to keep the unrighteous ones to be punished in the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2PE 2 9 bcf3 figs-ellipsis πειρασμοῦ…ἀδίκους δὲ εἰς ἡμέραν κρίσεως κολαζομένους τηρεῖν 1 In this clause, Peter is leaving out some words that it would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “a trial and the Lord knows how to keep the unrighteous ones to be punished in the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2PE 2 9 xdos grammar-connect-logic-goal κολαζομένους 1 This is a purpose clause. Peter is stating the purpose for which God is keeping the unrighteous people. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “in order to be punished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 2PE 2 9 qwcm figs-activepassive ἀδίκους…κολαζομένους τηρεῖν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “to keep the unrighteous ones to punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 9e5d19c103c501927213ad34470010205bc54d7a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 16:59:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 331/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 4f518401bf..5aa6070464 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -128,10 +128,10 @@ GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alt GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “to ensure I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” -GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] +GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases are making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner Titus to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 4 j5ka figs-metaphor παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι 1 The false brothers came in secretly Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers and with the intent of observing what was going. Paul does not mean that those around the **false brothers** were unaware of their presence. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])Alternate translation: “People who pretended to be Christians came into the church,” or “People who said they were Christians but were not came into our group” +GAL 2 4 j5ka figs-metaphor παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι 1 The false brothers came in secretly Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers with the intent of observing what Paul and the other believers were doing. If your readers would not understand what **spy on** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “people who pretended to be Christians and were deceptively brought in, who came into our midst in order to watch us closely,” or “people who said they were Christians but were not, who came into our group to view closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 6cb7f31da83759fd64855459865ff2ca5d8b065f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 17:01:41 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 332/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 5aa6070464..6304476715 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 4 lyqj figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -GAL 2 4 uvjw ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **in Christ Jesus** refers to If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 4 uvjw figs-explicit ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **in Christ Jesus** refers to If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” GAL 2 6 afy6 figs-metonymy ἐμοὶ…οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο 1 added nothing to me Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 1e3b9f75aa230885a63d9358182703e5d44dcd14 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 17:02:26 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 333/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 6304476715..17274cdffb 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 4 lyqj figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 4 uvjw figs-explicit ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **in Christ Jesus** refers to If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what **enslave** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” GAL 2 6 afy6 figs-metonymy ἐμοὶ…οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο 1 added nothing to me Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 9 he6q figs-metaphor δοκοῦντες στῦλοι εἶναι 1 built up the church Here, **pillars** refers to men who were leaders of the believers in Jerusalem and taught people the word of God. Alternate translation: “who were like pillars of the church” or “who were recognized as important leaders” or “who were considered to have authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From d2239d5cb95ab5580a9351f343f6366447459cc4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 17:21:38 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 334/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 17274cdffb..2e39e1be8d 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -129,8 +129,8 @@ GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] -GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases are making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner Titus to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases is making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner, Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner, Titus, to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka figs-metaphor παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι 1 The false brothers came in secretly Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers with the intent of observing what Paul and the other believers were doing. If your readers would not understand what **spy on** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “people who pretended to be Christians and were deceptively brought in, who came into our midst in order to watch us closely,” or “people who said they were Christians but were not, who came into our group to view closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 1c555aa8f8e537f35b739c02383e97c083d56579 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 17:30:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 335/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index dc05306715..0f433360fd 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -252,21 +252,21 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 10 n89f τολμηταὶ 1 **Audacious ones** marks the beginning of the second section of this chapter, which continues until the end of [2:22](../02/22.md). In this section Peter describes the wicked character and deeds of the false teachers. 2PE 2 10 nkjm figs-exclamations τολμηταὶ αὐθάδεις 1 The words **Audacious ones** and **Self-willed ones** are exclamations that emphasize the bold pride of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “They are so audacious and self-willed!” or “How audacious and self-willed they are!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 2PE 2 10 esb2 αὐθάδεις 1 self-willed **Self-willed** means “doing whatever one wants to do.” Alternate translation: “Those who do whatever they want” -2PE 2 10 x82c writing-pronouns οὐ τρέμουσιν 1 Here, **they** refers to the false teachers Peter introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These false teachers do not tremble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2PE 2 10 x82c writing-pronouns οὐ τρέμουσιν 1 Here, **They** refers to the false teachers Peter introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These false teachers do not tremble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 10 f4gi δόξας…βλασφημοῦντες 1 This clause indicates the time when the false teachers do not tremble. Alternate translation: “when insulting glorious ones” 2PE 2 10 s7l1 δόξας 1 Here, **glorious ones** could refer to: (1) spiritual beings, such as angels, demons, or both. Alternate translation: “glorious spiritual beings” (2) important human beings, such as church leaders. Alternate translation: “glorious people” 2PE 2 11 u2jk figs-distinguish ἰσχύϊ καὶ δυνάμει μείζονες ὄντες 1 This clause could refer to: (1) a contrast between the description of the **angels** in this clause with their behavior in the next clause. Alternate translation: “despite being greater in strength and power” (2) a description of the **angels**. Alternate translation: “who are greater in strength and power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 2PE 2 11 ljdy figs-ellipsis ἰσχύϊ καὶ δυνάμει μείζονες ὄντες 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the surrounding context, which is a description of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “being greater in strength and power than these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2PE 2 11 vg2j figs-doublet ἰσχύϊ καὶ δυνάμει μείζονες ὄντες 1 The words **strength** and **power** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Together, the words describe extreme power. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this pair of words with a single expression. Alternate translation: “being much more powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2PE 2 11 v1qt writing-pronouns οὐ φέρουσιν κατ’ αὐτῶν…βλάσφημον κρίσιν 1 do not bring insulting judgments against them Here, **them** could mean: (1) the “glorious ones.” Alternate translation: “do not bring an insulting judgment against these glorious ones.” (2) the false teachers. Alternate translation: “do not bring an insulting judgment against these false teachers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2PE 2 12 ytrj writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 Here, **these** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2PE 2 12 ytrj writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 Here, **these {men}** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 12 y4bl figs-metaphor οὗτοι…ὡς ἄλογα ζῷα 1 these unreasoning animals are naturally made for capture and destruction. Peter describes the false teachers by comparing them to **unreasoning animals**. Just as **animals** cannot think rationally, neither can these people. Alternate translation: “these false teachers are like animals who are not capable of thinking rationally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 12 xhxj figs-distinguish γεγεννημένα φυσικὰ εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν 1 This clause gives more information about the unreasoning animals and thus, by way of comparison, the false teachers. Alternate translation: “which have by nature been born for capture and destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 2PE 2 12 yxsy γεγεννημένα φυσικὰ εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν 1 Here, **by nature** means that the unreasoning animals (and false teachers by comparison) were destined for capture and destruction due to their very nature as animals born for this purpose. Alternate translation: “according to their nature, these animals are born for capture and destruction” 2PE 2 12 x14h grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν 1 This is a purpose clause. The word **for** here indicates that what follows it is the purpose for which these animals have been born. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of capture and destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 2PE 2 12 erfh figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἅλωσιν καὶ φθοράν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **capture** and **destruction** by stating the ideas behind them with verbs. Alternate translation: “in order to capture and destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 12 ipd4 ἐν οἷς ἀγνοοῦσιν βλασφημοῦντες 1 This clause could refer to: (1) more information about the false teachers. Alternate translation: “who slander those things in which they are ignorant” (2) the reason the false teachers will be destroyed. Alternate translation: “because they slander those things in which they are ignorant” -2PE 2 12 c4b8 ἐν οἷς ἀγνοοῦσιν 1 Here, **those things** could refer to: (1) the “glorious ones” of [2:10](../02/10.md). Alternate translation: “who slander those of whom they are ignorant” (2) the Christian teachings that these false teachers are rejecting. Alternate translation: “who slander the teachings of which they are ignorant” +2PE 2 12 c4b8 ἐν οἷς ἀγνοοῦσιν 1 Here, **those {things}** could refer to: (1) the “glorious ones” of [2:10](../02/10.md). Alternate translation: “who slander those of whom they are ignorant” (2) the Christian teachings that these false teachers are rejecting. Alternate translation: “who slander the teachings of which they are ignorant” 2PE 2 12 xzcp writing-pronouns ἐν τῇ φθορᾷ αὐτῶν καὶ φθαρήσονται 1 Here, the pronouns **they** and **their** refer to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers will also be destroyed in their destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 12 jw8d figs-activepassive καὶ φθαρήσονται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will also destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 2 12 h4v8 καὶ φθαρήσονται 1 Here, **also** is used for emphasis and may be translated as “indeed” or “surely.” Alternate translation: “they will indeed be destroyed” or “they will surely be destroyed” From d5ce65a7f7535cd81916b1714eca5acc62b3f535 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 17:32:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 336/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 2e39e1be8d..8737683f5b 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases is making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner, Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner, Titus, to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 4 j5ka figs-metaphor παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι 1 The false brothers came in secretly Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers with the intent of observing what Paul and the other believers were doing. If your readers would not understand what **spy on** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “people who pretended to be Christians and were deceptively brought in, who came into our midst in order to watch us closely,” or “people who said they were Christians but were not, who came into our group to view closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 4 j5ka figs-metaphor παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι 1 The false brothers came in secretly Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers with the intent of observing what Paul and the other believers were doing. If your readers would not understand what **spy on** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “people who pretended to be Christians, who came into our midst in order to watch us closely,” or “people who said they were Christians but were not, who came into our group to view closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 7d9ecf65e835ad18126a23db5082a169b6223537 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 17:35:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 337/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 8737683f5b..6b773ce082 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases is making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner, Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner, Titus, to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 4 j5ka figs-metaphor παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι 1 The false brothers came in secretly Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers with the intent of observing what Paul and the other believers were doing. If your readers would not understand what **spy on** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “people who pretended to be Christians, who came into our midst in order to watch us closely,” or “people who said they were Christians but were not, who came into our group to view closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 4 j5ka figs-metaphor παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι 1 The false brothers came in secretly Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers with the intent of observing what Paul and the other believers were doing. By using this metaphor Paul means that these people had bad motives for wanting to observe the believers. If your readers would not understand what **spy on** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “people who pretended to be Christians, who came into our midst in order to watch us closely,” or “people who said they were Christians but were not, who came into our group to view closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 7edcc14ad4dee6ccc34577d86d026a0271586eae Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 13:37:33 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 338/446] Place "things" in braces in completed NT books. --- en_tn_42-MRK.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_43-LUK.tsv | 10 +++---- en_tn_44-JHN.tsv | 16 +++++------ en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 70 ++++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ en_tn_51-PHP.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_52-COL.tsv | 10 +++---- en_tn_53-1TH.tsv | 6 ++--- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 4 +-- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 4 +-- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 4 +-- en_tn_63-1JN.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_66-JUD.tsv | 2 +- 13 files changed, 67 insertions(+), 67 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv index b18a3be99f..9be4f792dc 100644 --- a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv @@ -858,7 +858,7 @@ MRK 11 25 swa3 figs-yousingular ἀφίετε 1 In the original language in whi MRK 11 25 jjs9 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Jesus says **forgive** with the goal that **your Father who {is} in the heavens may also forgive you your trespasses.** Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) MRK 11 25 omze figs-abstractnouns τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **trespasses**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “sinned” or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “for the times you have sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 11 27 alh5 figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ περιπατοῦντος αὐτοῦ 1 as he is walking around in the temple The phrase, **he is walking around in the temple** means that Jesus was walking around in the temple courtyard. Jesus was not walking in the temple, since only priests were allowed inside the temple building. See how you translated the word **temple** in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -MRK 11 28 se9b figs-parallelism ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς 1 By what authority do you do these things, and who gave you this authority, so that you might do them? The question **By what authority do you do these things**, and the question **who gave you this authority** could: (1) both have the same meaning and be asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two questions into one question. Alternate translation: “Who gave you authority to do these things?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) (2) be two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to Jesus. Alternate translation: “By what kind of authority do you do these things, and who gave you this authority, so that you might do these things?” +MRK 11 28 se9b figs-parallelism ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς? ἢ, τίς σοι ἔδωκεν τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ταῦτα ποιῇς 1 By what authority do you do these things, and who gave you this authority, so that you might do them? The question **By what authority do you do these {things}**, and the question **who gave you this authority** could: (1) both have the same meaning and be asked together to strongly question Jesus’ authority. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these two questions into one question. Alternate translation: “Who gave you authority to do these things?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) (2) be two separate questions, the first asking about the nature of the authority and the second about who gave it to Jesus. Alternate translation: “By what kind of authority do you do these things, and who gave you this authority, so that you might do these things?” MRK 11 28 ooxp figs-abstractnouns ἐξουσίᾳ…ἐξουσίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized,” as modeled by the UST, or you can express the meaning some other way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 11 29 erqp figs-abstractnouns ἐξουσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized,” as modeled by the UST, or you can express the meaning some other way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 11 29 aak2 ἕνα λόγον 1 Here, Jesus is using the term **word** in a specific sense. Alternate translation: “a question” diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv index cb6c94f24d..3c4ab63edc 100644 --- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv @@ -958,7 +958,7 @@ LUK 6 31 l312 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 you Jesus now returns to speaking to his dis LUK 6 32 qh81 figs-rquestion ποία ὑμῖν χάρις ἐστίν? 1 what credit is that to you? Here Jesus is using the question form as a teaching tool. He wants to make a point and get his listeners to reflect on it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “God will not reward you for doing that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 6 33 l313 figs-rquestion ποία ὑμῖν χάρις ἐστίν? 1 what credit is that to you? Once again Jesus is using the question form as a teaching tool. You could translate his words as a statement here as well. Alternate translation: “God will not reward you for doing that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 6 34 l314 figs-rquestion ποία ὑμῖν χάρις ἐστίν? 1 what credit is that to you? Jesus is using the question form once again as a teaching tool. You could also translate his words as a statement here. Alternate translation: “God will not reward you for doing that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -LUK 6 34 kgc9 figs-nominaladj ἵνα ἀπολάβωσιν τὰ ἴσα 1 so that they may receive back the same things Here the adjective **same** functions as a noun. It is plural, and ULT supplies the noun **things** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. The adjective is also neuter, and this is a use of the neuter plural in Greek to refer to a single thing in order to describe it in its entirety. Alternate translation: “expecting that everything they lend will be repaid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +LUK 6 34 kgc9 figs-nominaladj ἵνα ἀπολάβωσιν τὰ ἴσα 1 so that they may receive back the same things Here the adjective **same** functions as a noun. It is plural, and ULT supplies the noun **{things}** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. The adjective is also neuter, and this is a use of the neuter plural in Greek to refer to a single thing in order to describe it in its entirety. Alternate translation: “expecting that everything they lend will be repaid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 6 35 s8j7 μηδὲν ἀπελπίζοντες 1 expecting nothing in return Alternate translation: “without expecting the person to pay you back” LUK 6 35 l315 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 3 and This word introduces the results of what has been said so far in this verse. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 6 35 ly98 ἔσται ὁ μισθὸς ὑμῶν πολύς 1 your reward will be great Your language may require you to say who will do this action. Alternate translation: “God will reward you greatly” @@ -1092,7 +1092,7 @@ LUK 7 17 g4zt figs-personification ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λόγος οὗτος LUK 7 18 r11g writing-newevent ἀπήγγειλαν Ἰωάννῃ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ περὶ πάντων τούτων 1 his disciples reported to John concerning all these things This sentence introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “the disciples of John told him about all these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 7 18 r11x writing-newevent οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his disciples The term **his** refers to John the Baptist, not to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the disciples of John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 7 18 l362 figs-explicit Ἰωάννῃ 1 John Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to John the Baptist. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 7 18 jf5m figs-explicit πάντων τούτων 1 all these things The implication is that **all these things** refers to Jesus healing the centurion’s servant and restoring the life of the widow’s son. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the things that Jesus had just done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 7 18 jf5m figs-explicit πάντων τούτων 1 all these things The implication is that **all these {things}** refers to Jesus healing the centurion’s servant and restoring the life of the widow’s son. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the things that Jesus had just done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 7 19 l363 τὸν Κύριον 1 the Lord Here Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” LUK 7 19 l364 λέγων 1 to say Alternate translation: “to ask” LUK 7 19 l365 figs-you σὺ 1 you Since this question would be for Jesus alone, **you** is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -1924,7 +1924,7 @@ LUK 11 24 s89t figs-metaphor τὸν οἶκόν μου, ὅθεν ἐξῆλθ LUK 11 25 b4u3 figs-activepassive εὑρίσκει σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον 1 it finds it swept out and put in order If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “it finds that someone has swept the house and put it in order” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 11 25 l680 figs-exmetaphor εὑρίσκει σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον 1 it finds it swept out and put in order Jesus speaks about the person whom the demon left by continuing the metaphor of a house. You could express this metaphor as a simile if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the demon finds that the person it left is like a house that someone has swept clean and organized by putting everything where it belongs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) LUK 11 25 l681 figs-explicit εὑρίσκει σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον 1 it finds it swept out and put in order The implication is that the house is still empty. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the demon finds that the person it left is like a house that someone has swept clean and organized by putting everything where it belongs, but which is still empty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 11 26 wqq4 figs-nominaladj γίνεται τὰ ἔσχατα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκείνου, χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 the last things of that man become worse than the first things Here the adjectives **last** and **first** function as nouns. They are plural, and ULT supplies the noun **things** in each case to show that. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you can supply a more specific singular noun. Alternate translation: “the final condition of that person is worse than his original condition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +LUK 11 26 wqq4 figs-nominaladj γίνεται τὰ ἔσχατα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκείνου, χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 the last things of that man become worse than the first things Here the adjectives **last** and **first** function as nouns. They are plural, and ULT supplies the noun **{things}** in each case to show that. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you can supply a more specific singular noun. Alternate translation: “the final condition of that person is worse than his original condition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 11 26 l682 figs-gendernotations τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκείνου 1 that man Here Jesus is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 11 27 m86m writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 11 27 pk7m figs-idiom ἐπάρασά…φωνὴν…εἶπεν 1 lifting up her voice, said The idiom **lifting up her voice** means that the woman spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “said in a loud voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1994,7 +1994,7 @@ LUK 11 42 ans4 figs-explicit ἀποδεκατοῦτε τὸ ἡδύοσμον, LUK 11 42 p71g translate-unknown τὸ ἡδύοσμον, καὶ τὸ πήγανον 1 the mint and the rue These are the names of herbs. People put just a little bit of their leaves into their food to give it flavor. If your readers would not know what **mint** and **rue** are, you could use the name of herbs that they would know. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 11 42 l25z figs-hyperbole πᾶν λάχανον 1 every garden herb This does not mean every **herb** that exists, but every **herb** that the Pharisees were growing in their gardens. Alternate translation: “every other herb in your gardens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 11 42 yk7d τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the justice and the love of God Alternate translation: “to make sure that people are treated fairly and compassionately, as God would want” -LUK 11 42 l707 ταῦτα…κἀκεῖνα 1 these things, and … those things By **these {things}**, Jesus means the justice and the love of God. By **those things**, he means devotional practices such as tithing. Your language may have its own way of expressing distinctions like this. Alternate translation: “the latter, and … the former” +LUK 11 42 l707 ταῦτα…κἀκεῖνα 1 these things, and … those things By **these {things}**, Jesus means the justice and the love of God. By **those {things}**, he means devotional practices such as tithing. Your language may have its own way of expressing distinctions like this. Alternate translation: “the latter, and … the former” LUK 11 42 myv2 figs-doublenegatives κἀκεῖνα μὴ παρεῖναι 1 and not to neglect those things If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative, which consists of a negative particle and a negative verb, as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “while making sure to express your devotion to God as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 11 43 w6pv figs-idiom τὴν πρωτοκαθεδρίαν 1 the first seats This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the best seats” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 11 43 sz72 figs-explicit τοὺς ἀσπασμοὺς 1 the greetings The implication is that people would greet the Pharisees in public by addressing them with honorary titles. Alternate translation: “for people to greet you with special titles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -4468,7 +4468,7 @@ LUK 24 44 q7x8 figs-merism πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ ν LUK 24 44 g76a figs-activepassive πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα…περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 all the things having been written about me If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “everything that Scripture says about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 24 44 m776 translate-names ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Μωϋσέως, καὶ τοῖς προφήταις 1 in the law of Moses, and in the prophets Jesus is describing the first and second parts of the Hebrew Scriptures by reference to the people who wrote them. You could also use the proper names for these parts. Alternate translation: “in the Law and the Prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 24 44 m777 figs-synecdoche καὶ ψαλμοῖς 1 in the Psalms Jesus is using the name of the largest book in the third part of the Hebrew Scriptures, **Psalms**, to represent that entire part, which was known as “the Writings.” Alternate translation: “and the Writings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -LUK 24 44 m778 figs-activepassive δεῖ πληρωθῆναι 1 must be fulfilled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. If you do that, it would be appropriate to put this phrase before **all the things**. Alternate translation: “God would make happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LUK 24 44 m778 figs-activepassive δεῖ πληρωθῆναι 1 must be fulfilled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. If you do that, it would be appropriate to put this phrase before **all the {things}**. Alternate translation: “God would make happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 24 45 qf61 figs-idiom διήνοιξεν αὐτῶν τὸν νοῦν 1 he opened their mind This is an idiom that means to enable people to realize and recognize things they could not before. Alternate translation: “he equipped their minds” or “he empowered their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 24 45 m779 αὐτῶν τὸν νοῦν 1 their mind If it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a group of people had one **mind**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “their minds” LUK 24 46 cwr5 figs-activepassive οὕτως γέγραπται 1 Thus it has been written If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “This is what the Scriptures say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv index 26e1dfe00f..f4daa9c184 100644 --- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv @@ -314,9 +314,9 @@ JHN 3 11 upi7 figs-exclusive ὃ οἴδαμεν λαλοῦμεν…τὴν μ JHN 3 11 j1k1 figs-you οὐ λαμβάνετε 1 you do not accept The word **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JHN 3 12 y4e9 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ τὰ ἐπίγεια εἶπον ὑμῖν 1 John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I told you earthly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 3 12 pt4x figs-you εἶπον ὑμῖν…οὐ πιστεύετε, πῶς ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν…πιστεύσετε 1 I told you … you do not believe … how will you believe if I tell you Throughout this verse, **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders” See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -JHN 3 12 mf2x figs-explicit τὰ ἐπίγεια 1 Here, **earthly things** refers to what Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). Those things are called **earthly** because they are about things that take place on earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “these truths about what takes place on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 3 12 mf2x figs-explicit τὰ ἐπίγεια 1 Here, **earthly {things}** refers to what Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). Those things are called **earthly** because they are about things that take place on earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “these truths about what takes place on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 3 12 c6ia figs-rquestion πῶς ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν τὰ ἐπουράνια, πιστεύσετε? 1 how will you believe if I tell you about heavenly things? Jesus uses a question to emphasize the disbelief of Nicodemus and the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you certainly will not believe if I tell you about heavenly things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 3 12 dfqi figs-explicit τὰ ἐπουράνια 1 Here, **heavenly things** refers to things that take place in heaven or are related to heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “truths about what takes place in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 3 12 dfqi figs-explicit τὰ ἐπουράνια 1 Here, **heavenly {things}** refers to things that take place in heaven or are related to heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “truths about what takes place in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 3 13 ld0m figs-123person ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “me, the one who descended from heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 3 13 ocj0 figs-explicit ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 The title **Son of Man** is equivalent to “Messiah.” Jesus uses it to claim that role subtly and implicitly. You may want to translate this title directly into your language. On the other hand, if you think it would be helpful to your readers, you could state what it means. See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 3 14 tb3s figs-simile καὶ καθὼς Μωϋσῆς ὕψωσεν τὸν ὄφιν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 Just as Moses lifted up the serpent in the wilderness, so must the Son of Man be lifted up In this verse, John records Jesus comparing his crucifixion to Moses lifting up a bronze snake. John assumes that his readers will know that Jesus is referring to a story recorded in the Old Testament book of Numbers. In that story, the Israelites complained against God, and God punished them by sending poisonous snakes to kill them. God then told Moses to make a bronze snake and raise it up on a pole so that whoever was bitten by one of the poisonous snakes and looked at the bronze snake would not die. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation: “And just as Moses lifted up the bronze serpent on a pole when the Israelites were wandering in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) @@ -598,7 +598,7 @@ JHN 5 13 qtsj figs-activepassive ὁ…ἰαθεὶς 1 If your language does n JHN 5 13 tijo figs-ellipsis τίς ἐστιν 1 John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “who it was who had healed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 5 13 sgx1 grammar-connect-logic-result ὄχλου ὄντος ἐν τῷ τόπῳ 1 This could refer to: (1) the reason why Jesus left secretly. Alternate translation: “because a crowd was in the place” (2) the time when Jesus left secretly. Alternate translation: “while a crowd was in the place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 5 13 qzpi grammar-collectivenouns ὄχλου 1 The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people” or “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -JHN 5 14 rl0k writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 **After these things** introduces a new event that happened some time after the events which the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +JHN 5 14 rl0k writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 **After these {things}** introduces a new event that happened some time after the events which the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 5 14 h1ri figs-pastforfuture εὑρίσκει 1 Jesus found him Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 5 14 qo3z writing-pronouns αὐτὸν…αὐτῷ 1 Here, **him** refers to the man whom Jesus had healed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the healed man … that man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 5 14 h39z figs-metaphor ἴδε 1 See Jesus uses the term **Behold** to call the man’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -606,7 +606,7 @@ JHN 5 15 auad figs-synecdoche τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 Here, **the Jews* JHN 5 16 efg2 writing-background καὶ διὰ τοῦτο, ἐδίωκον οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι ταῦτα ἐποίει ἐν Σαββάτῳ. 1 Now The writer uses the phrase **And because of this** to show that previous verse gave background information for what John will now present. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now the Jews began to persecute Jesus because he was doing these things on the Sabbath.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 5 16 ef9i figs-explicit διὰ τοῦτο 1 Here, **this** refers to what the man whom Jesus had healed told the Jewish leaders. The Jewish leaders began to persecute Jesus because he had healed the man on the Sabbath, which was something they believed was against the law of Moses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because Jesus had healed him on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 5 16 kup5 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. See how you translated this term in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -JHN 5 16 acn0 figs-explicit ὅτι ταῦτα ἐποίει 1 This phrase indicates a second reason why the Jewish leaders began persecuting Jesus. Here, **these {things}** refers to Jesus healing people on the Sabbath. The plural **things** indicates that he healed on the Sabbath multiple times, not just on the occasion recorded in verses [5–9](../05/05.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he was doing these healings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 5 16 acn0 figs-explicit ὅτι ταῦτα ἐποίει 1 This phrase indicates a second reason why the Jewish leaders began persecuting Jesus. Here, **these {things}** refers to Jesus healing people on the Sabbath. The plural **{things}** indicates that he healed on the Sabbath multiple times, not just on the occasion recorded in verses [5–9](../05/05.md). If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he was doing these healings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 5 16 f69o ἐν Σαββάτῳ 1 Your language might use an indefinite article rather than the definite article here, since the synagogue ruler is not speaking of a specific Sabbath. Alternate translation: “on a Sabbath day” JHN 5 17 lq1v guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 My Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 5 18 zrmw figs-explicit διὰ τοῦτο οὖν 1 Here, **this** refers to what Jesus had said in the previous verse. One of the reasons why the Jewish leaders wanted to kill Jesus was that Jesus called God his Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because Jesus said this, therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -711,7 +711,7 @@ JHN 5 47 b8dd figs-rquestion πῶς τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν πι JHN 5 47 x7h9 figs-metonymy τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν 1 my words Here, **words** refers to what Jesus said to these Jewish leaders. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what I have told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 6 intro xe4t 0 # John 6 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus’ fourth sign: Jesus feeds a large crowd (6:1–14)
2. Jesus’ fifth sign: Jesus walks on the Sea of Galilee (6:15–21)
3. Jesus says he is the bread of life (6:22–71)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### King

The king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food. They thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people’s sins and that the world would persecute his people.

## Important Metaphors in this Chapter

### Bread

Bread was the most common and important food in Jesus’ day, so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread, because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus’ culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted the people to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life, just as people need food to sustain physical life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood

When Jesus said, “unless you would eat the flesh of the Son of Man and would drink his blood, you do not have life in yourselves,” he was speaking of believing in his sacrificial death on the cross for the forgiveness of sins. He also knew that before he died he would tell his followers to commemorate this sacrifice by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand to what the metaphor referred. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Parenthetical ideas

Several times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some background information needed to better understand the story. These explanations are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. This information is placed inside parentheses.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 6 1 qhj7 writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus had traveled from Jerusalem to Galilee. A crowd has followed him up a mountainside. Verses [1–4](../06/01.md) tell the setting of this part of the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -JHN 6 1 el4l writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things This phrase, **After these things**, introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +JHN 6 1 el4l writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things This phrase, **After these {things}**, introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Some time later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 6 1 z345 figs-explicit τῆς θαλάσσης τῆς Γαλιλαίας τῆς Τιβεριάδος 1 The **Sea of Galilee** was called by several names, one of which was Sea **of Tiberias**. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/seaofgalilee]]) If having two different names for the same place would be confusing in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the Sea of Galilee (also known as the Sea of Tiberias)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 2 ebel grammar-collectivenouns ὄχλος πολύς 1 See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) JHN 6 2 g6zm σημεῖα 1 signs See how you translated **signs** in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles” @@ -2066,7 +2066,7 @@ JHN 15 19 ayo7 figs-infostructure ὅτι δὲ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου οὐ JHN 15 20 v53s figs-metonymy μνημονεύετε τοῦ λόγου οὗ ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν 1 Remember the word that I said to you Here, Jesus uses **word** to refer to what he says later in this sentence. If this use of **word** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Remember the teaching that I said to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 20 wzg6 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ 1 Remember the word that I said to you See how you translated this phrase in [13:16](../13/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 20 a8kw figs-metonymy εἰ τὸν λόγον μου ἐτήρησαν…τηρήσουσιν 1 Remember the word that I said to you See how you translated a similar phrase in [8:51](../08/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 15 21 eh1v figs-metonymy ταῦτα πάντα ποιήσουσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 because of my name Here, **all these things** refers to the bad things Jesus told his disciples that the unbelievers in the world would do to them in [verses 18–20](../15/18.md). If this use of **these {things}** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will hate and persecute you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 21 eh1v figs-metonymy ταῦτα πάντα ποιήσουσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 because of my name Here, **all these {things}** refers to the bad things Jesus told his disciples that the unbelievers in the world would do to them in [verses 18–20](../15/18.md). If this use of **these {things}** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will hate and persecute you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 21 z35m figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 because of my name Here, Jesus uses **my name** to refer to himself. People will make his followers suffer because they belong to him. If this use of **name** would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because you belong to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 21 hs9x figs-explicit τὸν πέμψαντά με 1 Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated this phrase in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 22 m75h grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ μὴ ἦλθον καὶ ἐλάλησα αὐτοῖς 1 If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He knows that he did come and speak to the world. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If I had not come and spoken to them, but I did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) @@ -2201,7 +2201,7 @@ JHN 17 6 u8lc figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον σου τετήρηκαν 1 kept JHN 17 8 bzvc figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα 1 kept your word See how you translated **words** in [5:47](../05/47.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 9 ndb1 figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου 1 I do not pray for the world Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 10 mql5 figs-activepassive δεδόξασμαι ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they glorify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 17 10 q0tm figs-explicit ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 This could mean: (1) **all things** are the means by which Jesus is glorified. Alternate translation: “by means of them” (2) Jesus is glorified **in all things**. Alternate translation: “within them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 17 10 q0tm figs-explicit ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 This could mean: (1) **all {things}** are the means by which Jesus is glorified. Alternate translation: “by means of them” (2) Jesus is glorified **in all {things}**. Alternate translation: “within them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 17 11 viya figs-pastforfuture οὐκέτι εἰμὶ…πρὸς σὲ ἔρχομαι 1 Here Jesus uses **am** in the present tense to refer to something that will happen in the near future. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “I will no longer … I am about to come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 17 11 bk2h figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ εἰσίν 1 in the world Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to both being on the earth and being among the people in the **world** who oppose God. If this use of **world** would be confusing in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in this world with people who oppose you, but they are in this hostile world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 17 11 kp1d guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -2454,7 +2454,7 @@ JHN 19 27 qc7d figs-metaphor ἴδε, ἡ μήτηρ σου 1 See, your mother H JHN 19 27 q615 figs-metonymy ἀπ’ ἐκείνης τῆς ὥρας 1 From that hour Here, **hour** refers to a point in time. It does not refer to a 60-minute length of time. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 19 28 uynk writing-newevent μετὰ τοῦτο 1 knowing that everything was now completed **After this** introduces a new event that happened soon after the events the story has just told. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “Soon afterward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 19 28 crd3 figs-activepassive ἤδη πάντα τετέλεσται 1 knowing that everything was now completed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he had already completed all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 19 28 pxie figs-explicit πάντα 1 knowing that everything was now completed Here, **all things** refers to everything that God sent Jesus to the world to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the things that God had sent him to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 19 28 pxie figs-explicit πάντα 1 knowing that everything was now completed Here, **all {things}** refers to everything that God sent Jesus to the world to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the things that God had sent him to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 19 28 wh4n figs-activepassive τελειωθῇ ἡ Γραφὴ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he might fulfill the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 19 28 w999 writing-quotations ἵνα τελειωθῇ ἡ Γραφὴ 1 Here John uses **that the scripture might be completed** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 69:21](../../psa/69/21.md)).If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “so that what is written in the Psalms might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 19 28 ezfy figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 37d2832ce3..da11008cc3 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -144,18 +144,18 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 1 26 unig writing-pronouns οὐ πολλοὶ -1 While Paul does not explicitly state that **not many** refers to the Corinthians, he is referring to the Corinthians when he says **not many**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could insert “you.” Alternate translation: “not many of you … not many of you … and not many of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 1 26 camj figs-infostructure οὐ πολλοὶ σοφοὶ κατὰ σάρκα, οὐ πολλοὶ δυνατοί, οὐ πολλοὶ εὐγενεῖς 1 Paul here uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to clarify what he means by **wise**, and also **powerful**, and also **of noble birth**, not just **wise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move the phrase **according to the flesh** so that it is clear that it modifies all three of these statements. Alternate translation: “according to the flesh, not many were wise, not many were powerful, and not many were of noble birth (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 1 26 pws2 figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα 1 wise according to the flesh Here Paul uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to refer to human ways of thinking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase by stating the idiom **according to the flesh** with a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to human definitions” or “according to what humans value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 1 27 qjvd grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here Paul introduces a contrast. He is contrasting **God chose the foolish things** with what a person might expect about how God would treat foolish and weak people like the Corinthians. He is not contrasting how **God chose the foolish things** with the statements in the previous verse about the foolishness and weakness of the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this contrast by clarifying that Paul writes **But** to contrast this statement with what a person might expect about God. Alternate translation: “Despite what might be expected,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +1CO 1 27 qjvd grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here Paul introduces a contrast. He is contrasting **God chose the foolish {things}** with what a person might expect about how God would treat foolish and weak people like the Corinthians. He is not contrasting how **God chose the foolish {things}** with the statements in the previous verse about the foolishness and weakness of the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this contrast by clarifying that Paul writes **But** to contrast this statement with what a person might expect about God. Alternate translation: “Despite what might be expected,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1CO 1 27 qv5l figs-parallelism τὰ μωρὰ τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός, ἵνα καταισχύνῃ τοὺς σοφούς; καὶ τὰ ἀσθενῆ τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός, ἵνα καταισχύνῃ τὰ ἰσχυρά 1 God chose … wise. God chose … strong Here Paul makes two very similar statements in which **foolish** goes with **weak** and **wise** goes with **strong**. These two statements are almost synonymous, and Paul repeats himself to emphasize the point. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the two sentences into one. Alternate translation: “God chose the unimportant things of the world in order that he might shame the important things” or “God chose the foolish and weak things of the world in order that he might shame the wise and strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1CO 1 27 r4ly figs-possession τὰ μωρὰ τοῦ κόσμου…τὰ ἀσθενῆ τοῦ κόσμου 1 Paul uses the possessive form twice to clarify that the **foolish things** and **weak things** are only **foolish** and **weak** from the perspective of the **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this formwith a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “things that are foolish according to the world … things that are weak according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 1 27 r4ly figs-possession τὰ μωρὰ τοῦ κόσμου…τὰ ἀσθενῆ τοῦ κόσμου 1 Paul uses the possessive form twice to clarify that the **foolish {things}** and **weak {things}** are only **foolish** and **weak** from the perspective of the **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this formwith a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “things that are foolish according to the world … things that are weak according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 1 27 gdob figs-synecdoche τοῦ κόσμου -1 When Paul uses **the world** in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses **the world** to refer to human beings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the world** with an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of people … of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1CO 1 27 iwho grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα -1 Here, **in order that** could introduce: (1) the purpose for which **God chose the foolish things of the world** and **the weak things of the world**. Alternate translation: “so that … so that” (2) what happened when **God chose the foolish things of the world** and **the weak things of the world**. Alternate translation: “with the result that … with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1CO 1 27 vtzx figs-nominaladj τοὺς σοφούς…τὰ ἰσχυρά 1 Paul uses the adjective **wise** to describe a group of people, and he uses the adjective **strong** to describe a group of people and things. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these two adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are wise … people and things which are strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 1 28 tqxg figs-parallelism τοῦ κόσμου…ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός,…ἵνα 1 In this verse, Paul repeats many of the words from the parallel parts of the previous verse. He does this because, in his culture, repeating the same idea with different examples was more convincing than using just one example. If possible, translate these words the same way that you translated them in [1:27](../01/27.md). You could remove or change some of the words if it makes the sentence sound more convincing. Alternate translation: “he chose … of the world … in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1CO 1 28 k3kd translate-unknown τὰ ἀγενῆ 1 what is low and despised Here, **base things** is the opposite of the word translated “of noble birth” in [1:26](../01/26.md). Paul uses it to refer to things and people that were not considered important or powerful in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **base things** with a word or phrase that refers to people and things that have low status or low importance. Alternate translation: “the marginalized things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 1 28 d5pa translate-unknown τὰ ἐξουθενημένα 1 While **base things** refers to a person’s status or a thing’s status, the word translated **despised things** refers to how people treat other people or things that have low status. Usually, people badly treat others whom they consider to be of lower status, ignoring them or mocking them. That is what Paul means when he says **despised**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **despised things** with a word or phrase that refers to how people mistreat others of lower status. Alternate translation: “the scorned things” or “the things people treat with contempt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 1 28 wir6 figs-possession τὰ ἀγενῆ τοῦ κόσμου καὶ τὰ ἐξουθενημένα 1 Here Paul uses **of the world** to describe both **the base things** and **the despised things**. As in [1:27](../01/27.md), he uses the possessive form to clarify that **base things and the despised things** are only **base** and **despised** from the perspective of the world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **of the world**with a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “the base things and the despised things according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 1 28 k3kd translate-unknown τὰ ἀγενῆ 1 what is low and despised Here, **base {things}** is the opposite of the word translated “of noble birth” in [1:26](../01/26.md). Paul uses it to refer to things and people that were not considered important or powerful in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **base {things}** with a word or phrase that refers to people and things that have low status or low importance. Alternate translation: “the marginalized things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 1 28 d5pa translate-unknown τὰ ἐξουθενημένα 1 While **base {things}** refers to a person’s status or a thing’s status, the word translated **despised {things}** refers to how people treat other people or things that have low status. Usually, people badly treat others whom they consider to be of lower status, ignoring them or mocking them. That is what Paul means when he says **despised**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **despised {things}** with a word or phrase that refers to how people mistreat others of lower status. Alternate translation: “the scorned things” or “the things people treat with contempt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 1 28 wir6 figs-possession τὰ ἀγενῆ τοῦ κόσμου καὶ τὰ ἐξουθενημένα 1 Here Paul uses **of the world** to describe both **the base {things}** and **the despised {things}**. As in [1:27](../01/27.md), he uses the possessive form to clarify that **base things and the despised {things}** are only **base** and **despised** from the perspective of the world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **of the world**with a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “the base things and the despised things according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 1 28 unyl figs-synecdoche τοῦ κόσμου 1 When Paul uses **the world** in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses **the world** to refer to human beings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the world** with an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -1CO 1 28 gj19 figs-hyperbole τὰ μὴ ὄντα 1 nothing, to bring to nothing things that are held as valuable Here Paul further describes the **base things** and **the despised things** as if they were **things that are not**. He does not mean that the **base** and **despised things** do not exist. Instead, he is identifying how people often ignore the **base** and **despised things**, just as if they did not exist at all. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the things that are not** with a comparable phrase or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the things that people ignore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +1CO 1 28 gj19 figs-hyperbole τὰ μὴ ὄντα 1 nothing, to bring to nothing things that are held as valuable Here Paul further describes the **base {things}** and **the despised {things}** as if they were **things that are not**. He does not mean that the **base** and **despised {things}** do not exist. Instead, he is identifying how people often ignore the **base** and **despised {things}**, just as if they did not exist at all. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the things that are not** with a comparable phrase or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the things that people ignore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1CO 1 28 f11p grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 things that are held as valuable Here, **in order that** could introduce: (1) the purpose for which **God chose the base things and the despised things of the world, the things that are not**. Alternate translation: “so that” (2) what happened when **God chose the base things and the despised things of the world, the things that are not**. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1CO 1 28 f9s5 translate-unknown καταργήσῃ 1 Here, **he might bring to nothing** refers to making something ineffective, useless, or irrelevant. What Paul means is that God has made **the things that are** unimportant and without function because he instead worked through **the things that are not**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **bring to nothing** with a word or phrase that indicates that a person has acted so that something else is no longer important, useful, or effective. Alternate translation: “he might tear down” or “render ineffective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 1 28 etjg figs-idiom τὰ ὄντα 1 In this context, **the things that are** does not refer primarily to things that exist. Rather, it refers primarily to things that are important in society and culture. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the things that are** with a comparable phrase that refers to important or significant things and people in your culture. Alternate translation: “the things that people care about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -258,13 +258,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 2 12 ev7j figs-possession τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **spirit** that comes from or has its source in **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a word or phrase that indicates that **the world** is the source or origin of this **spirit**. Alternate translation: “the spirit from the world” or “the spirit that comes from the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 2 12 vw4v figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα 1 Here Paul omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete thought. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply some words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we received the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 2 12 w1qd figs-activepassive τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could make God the subject of the **who** statement. Alternate translation: “the Spirit whom God sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 2 12 n1c7 figs-activepassive τὰ ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ χαρισθέντα ἡμῖν 1 freely given to us by God If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **the things** that are **given** rather than God, who does the “giving.” Alternate translation: “the things that God has freely given to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 2 12 n1c7 figs-activepassive τὰ ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ χαρισθέντα ἡμῖν 1 freely given to us by God If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **the {things}** that are **given** rather than God, who does the “giving.” Alternate translation: “the things that God has freely given to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 2 13 nan2 figs-exclusive λαλοῦμεν 1 Here, **we** refers to Paul and others who proclaim the gospel with him. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 2 13 u797 figs-infostructure οὐκ ἐν διδακτοῖς ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας λόγοις, ἀλλ’ ἐν διδακτοῖς Πνεύματος 1 The Spirit interprets spiritual words with spiritual wisdom If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them, putting **words** with the positive statement. Alternate translation: “in words taught by the Spirit, not in those taught by human wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 2 13 yg45 figs-activepassive διδακτοῖς ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας λόγοις 1 The Spirit interprets spiritual words with spiritual wisdom If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **words** that are **taught** rather than focusing on the person doing the “teaching.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “humans” or “people” do it. Alternate translation: “words that human wisdom teaches” or “words that humans teach as wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 2 13 ywbw figs-activepassive διδακτοῖς Πνεύματος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **words** that are **taught** rather than the **Spirit**, who does the “teaching.” Alternate translation: “those that the Spirit teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 2 13 gueq translate-unknown πνευματικοῖς πνευματικὰ συνκρίνοντες 1 Here, the phrase **combining spiritual things with spiritual words** could mean: (1) that Paul and those with him interpret **spiritual things** and ideas with **spiritual words**. Alternate translation: “interpreting spiritual things with spiritual words” (2) that Paul and those with him explain **spiritual things** to **spiritual** people. Alternate translation: “explaining spiritual things to spiritual people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 2 13 kinz grammar-connect-time-simultaneous συνκρίνοντες 1 Here, **combining** introduces an action that takes place at the same time as when **we speak**. The idea is that **combining spiritual things with spiritual words** is the way that **we speak these things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this connectionby including a word or phrase that indicates that **combining** is the way in which **we speak**. Alternate translation: “by means of combining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) +1CO 2 13 gueq translate-unknown πνευματικοῖς πνευματικὰ συνκρίνοντες 1 Here, the phrase **combining spiritual things with spiritual words** could mean: (1) that Paul and those with him interpret **spiritual {things}** and ideas with **spiritual words**. Alternate translation: “interpreting spiritual things with spiritual words” (2) that Paul and those with him explain **spiritual {things}** to **spiritual** people. Alternate translation: “explaining spiritual things to spiritual people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 2 13 kinz grammar-connect-time-simultaneous συνκρίνοντες 1 Here, **combining** introduces an action that takes place at the same time as when **we speak**. The idea is that **combining spiritual things with spiritual words** is the way that **we speak these {things}**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this connectionby including a word or phrase that indicates that **combining** is the way in which **we speak**. Alternate translation: “by means of combining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) 1CO 2 13 mnpq translate-unknown συνκρίνοντες 1 Here, **combining** could mean: (1) interpreting or explaining an idea. Alternate translation: “interpreting” (2) putting two things together, either to compare or blend them together. Alternate translation: “comparing” or “compounding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 2 14 i8jw grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, **But** introduces a new part of Paul’s argument, and it also introduces a contrast with how Paul and those with him speak by the power of the Spirit in [2:13](../02/13.md). Unlike Paul and those with him, the **natural person** does not have the Spirit and does not use spiritual words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could leave **But** untranslated or use a word that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1CO 2 14 hq3u translate-unknown ψυχικὸς…ἄνθρωπος 1 unspiritual person The phrase **the natural person** describes a person who does not have God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this phraseby using a word or phrase that describes someone who has not received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person without the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 2 14 vznr πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται 1 Alternate translation: “they are discerned by the power of the Spirit” or “they are discerned by people who are indwelt by the Spirit” 1CO 2 15 w4q7 translate-unknown ὁ…πνευματικὸς 1 the one who is spiritual Here Paul uses **the spiritual one** as the opposite of “the natural person” in [2:14](../02/14.md). The phrase **the spiritual one** describes a person who does have God’s Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the meaning of this phraseby using a word or phrase that describes someone who has received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person with the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 2 15 gcv7 figs-genericnoun ὁ…πνευματικὸς ἀνακρίνει…αὐτὸς…ἀνακρίνεται 1 Paul uses the words **spiritual one** and **he himself** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of these words with a form that indicates people in general. Alternate translation: “any spiritual person discerns … he himself or she herself” or “spiritual people discern … they themselves are discerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -1CO 2 15 ap89 figs-hyperbole τὰ πάντα 1 Here Paul uses **all things** as an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to emphasize that the **spiritual one** can discern God’s gifts and the message of the gospel. Paul does not mean that every **spiritual** person is able to discern everything there is to know. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this exaggerationby using a phrase such as “many things,” and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “many things indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +1CO 2 15 ap89 figs-hyperbole τὰ πάντα 1 Here Paul uses **all {things}** as an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to emphasize that the **spiritual one** can discern God’s gifts and the message of the gospel. Paul does not mean that every **spiritual** person is able to discern everything there is to know. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this exaggerationby using a phrase such as “many things,” and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “many things indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1CO 2 15 ji5n figs-activepassive αὐτὸς…ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **he** who is **discerned** rather than the person doing the “discerning.” Alternate translation: “no one discerns him himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 2 15 ypl6 figs-gendernotations αὐτὸς…ἀνακρίνεται 1 Here, the words translated **he himself** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **he himself**by using a word that does not have gender, or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “that person is discerned” or “he himself or she herself is discerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 2 15 zg4b figs-explicit αὐτὸς…ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται 1 Here Paul wishes to say that it is impossible for someone without the Spirit to properly understand or make judgments about the person who does have the Spirit. If this implication would be missed by your readers, you could make it more explicit that Paul is speaking about the impossibility of someone without the Spirit “discerning” someone with the Spirit. Alternate translation: “he himself cannot be discerned by anyone who is not spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -420,7 +420,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 3 22 x1w6 εἴτε Παῦλος, εἴτε Ἀπολλῶς, εἴτε Κηφᾶς, εἴτε κόσμος, εἴτε ζωὴ, εἴτε θάνατος, εἴτε ἐνεστῶτα, εἴτε μέλλοντα; 1 Paul does not want his readers to think that this list tells the Corinthians everything that they have. Rather, he uses the list to give examples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a word or phrase that shows that the list gives examples. Alternate translation: “including Paul and Apollos and Cephas and the world and life and death and things present and things to come” 1CO 3 22 o3k5 figs-explicit εἴτε ζωὴ, εἴτε θάνατος 1 When Paul says that **life** and **death** are theirs, he means that neither **life** nor **death** has control over the Corinthians. Rather, they have control over **life** and **death**. What this means is that they can live their lives without being afraid of what will happen while they are alive or afraid of losing their lives when they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add some words that clarify the meaning of **life** and **death**. Alternate translation: “or confidence in life or peace in death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 3 22 pyir figs-explicit εἴτε ἐνεστῶτα, εἴτε μέλλοντα 1 Here Paul refers to **things present** because it refers to what was happening at the time when Paul wrote this letter. On the other hand, **things to come** refers to what is going to happen in the future, specifically when Jesus comes back. The **things present** is the way the world works right now. The **things to come** is the way the world will work when Jesus returns. If it would be helpful in your language, you could add some words that clarify the meaning of these phrases. Alternate translation: “or the current order or the order that Jesus will bring” or “or what happens now or what will happen soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 3 22 jt0x figs-infostructure πάντα ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul uses the same phrase he used at the end of [3:21](../03/21.md): **all things are yours**. He repeats the phrase here to explain that the list provides examples of **all things** and also to introduce the point he is about to make in the next verse. Because **all things are yours** ends the list and also introduces the next idea, the ULT begins a new sentence with **all things are yours**. Use whatever form in your language most clearly identifies a conclusion that also introduces the next statement. Alternate translation: “Thus, all things are yours,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1CO 3 22 jt0x figs-infostructure πάντα ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul uses the same phrase he used at the end of [3:21](../03/21.md): **all things are yours**. He repeats the phrase here to explain that the list provides examples of **all {things}** and also to introduce the point he is about to make in the next verse. Because **all things are yours** ends the list and also introduces the next idea, the ULT begins a new sentence with **all things are yours**. Use whatever form in your language most clearly identifies a conclusion that also introduces the next statement. Alternate translation: “Thus, all things are yours,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 3 23 nj48 figs-possession ὑμεῖς…Χριστοῦ 1 you are Christ’s, and Christ is God’s Here Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that they belong to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this formby using a phrase such as “belong to” or a verb such as “has.” Alternate translation: “you belong to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 3 23 dc6v figs-possession Χριστὸς…Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that **Christ** belongs to who **God** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this formby using a phrase such as “belongs to” or a verb such as “includes.” Alternate translation: “Christ belongs to God” or “Christ is part of who God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 4 intro vg5z 0 # 1 Corinthians 4 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)
* God alone is judge (4:1–5)
* Present weakness (4:6–15)
3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)
* Paul’s planned visit (4:16–21)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Judgment

In [4:3–5](../04/03.md), Paul refers to three different judgments. The first judgment is what humans think of each other, including what they think of Paul. The second is Paul’s own judgment of himself. The third is God’s judgment, which occurs when the Lord returns. Paul argues that the first two judgments are not important and carry no weight. Rather, the only judgment that matters is God’s judgment. Therefore, Paul argues that no one should issue a final verdict about anything until God has performed his judgment ([4:5](../04/05.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/discernment]])

### Pride

Paul mentions the Corinthians’ pride many times in this chapter. He speaks specifically of being “puffed up” ([4:6](../04/06.md); [4:18–19](../04/18.md)), and boasting ([4:7](../04/07.md)). In contrast, Paul describes himself and the other apostles as humble and weak ([4:9–13](../04/09.md)). By making this contrast, Paul wants the Corinthians to rethink their opinions about themselves. If the apostles, the leaders of the church, are weak and humble, they need to think again about whether they really are as great as they think they are.

### Word and power

In [4:19–20](../04/19.md), Paul contrasts “word” with “power.” This is a common comparison in his culture that contrasts talk and deeds. Anyone can say they are capable of doing something, but only those with “power” can actually do what they claim. Paul introduces this contrast because he is coming to see if those who claim greatness (“word”) can do what they claim (“power”). He argues that “power” is what matters more than “word” because God’s kingdom is a matter of “power,” not “word.” It is about action, not just talk. If your language has a standard comparison between “talk” and “deeds,” you could use it in these verses.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Paul as father

In [4:14–15](../04/14.md), Paul identifies the Corinthians as his children, which makes him their father. He became their father when he preached the gospel to them. Thus, he is their spiritual father, the one who helped bring them into the Christian life. In the metaphor, Paul does not specify who the mother is, and he does not intend his audience to make an inference as to who it might be. In [4:17](../04/17.md), Paul continues this metaphor by claiming Timothy as his spiritual child. If possible, use words in your language that do not always require biological relationships. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/father]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/children]])

### The spectacle

In [4:9](../04/09.md), Paul speaks of the “spectacle” that he and the other apostles participate in. The “spectacle” could be a victory parade in which Paul and the other apostles are prisoners who will be killed, or it could be a gladiatorial performance in an arena in which Paul and the other apostles are destined to die. See the notes on the verse for translation options. Whichever “spectacle” Paul refers to, he is presenting himself and the other apostles as people who are going to be humiliated and killed in public. With this metaphor he continues the theme of Christ working in power through his and others’ weakness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Irony

In [4:8](../04/08.md), Paul says that the Corinthians are satisfied, rich, and reigning. In the second half of the verse, however, he says that he “wishes” that they were actually reigning. The first part of the verse, then, presents how the Corinthians think about themselves. Paul speaks from their perspective in order to show them that their views are foolish and impossible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Rhetorical questions

In [4:7](../04/07.md) and [4:21](../04/21.md), Paul uses several questions. All the questions in these two verses are not seeking answers that provide information or further knowledge. Rather, all the questions are meant to make the Corinthians think about what they are thinking and doing. For translation options, see the notes on these two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### “Not beyond what is written”

In [4:6](../04/06.md), Paul quotes a phrase: “Not beyond what is written.” This is not a quote from Scripture, and Paul does not say where the phrase comes from. However, the way he quotes it shows that both he and the Corinthians were familiar with this saying. Most likely, the phrase is a well-known proverb or wise saying that Paul uses to strengthen his argument. For the meaning of the phrase and translation options, see the notes on that verse.

### Paul’s coming

In [4:18–21](../04/18.md), Paul speaks many times about how he will “come” to them. He intends to visit them again, and he speaks in these verses about what his visit might be like. Use words in your language that refer to someone temporarily visiting someone else. @@ -449,7 +449,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 4 5 qi3g figs-explicitinfo πρὸ καιροῦ…ἕως ἂν ἔλθῃ ὁ Κύριος 1 Therefore If the form **before the time, until the Lord comes** contains redundant information that would be unnatural to state in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “before the Lord comes” or “until the Lord comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) 1CO 4 5 t1oq figs-go ἔλθῃ 1 Therefore Here Paul is speaking about how **the Lord** will “come” back to earth at some point in the future. Use a form in your language that could refer to Jesus’ return to earth. Alternate translation: “returns to the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) 1CO 4 5 wl3i figs-metaphor ὃς καὶ φωτίσει τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους 1 He will bring to light the hidden things of darkness and reveal the purposes of the heart Here Paul speaks as if **the Lord** will bring a flashlight or torch when he comes, and he will use that torch or flashlight to shine **light** on things that are currently **hidden** in the **darkness**. By speaking in this way, Paul means that **the Lord** will reveal what no person knows right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning of this phrase with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who will both disclose what people do not know about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1CO 4 5 dcje figs-possession τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **things** that are **hidden** in **darkness**. If the **hidden things** would not be understood to be in **darkness** in your language, you could express the idea by using a word such “in” or “within.” Alternate translation: “the things hidden in darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 4 5 dcje figs-possession τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **{things}** that are **hidden** in **darkness**. If the **hidden {things}** would not be understood to be in **darkness** in your language, you could express the idea by using a word such “in” or “within.” Alternate translation: “the things hidden in darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 4 5 ywuk figs-abstractnouns τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους 1 If your language does not use the abstract noun **darkness**, you can express the idea by using a word or phrase that describes something that cannot be seen because there is no light, such as “in shadow.” Alternate translation: “the hidden things in shadow” or “the things hidden where no light shines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 4 5 spwh figs-possession τὰς βουλὰς τῶν καρδιῶν 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **purposes** that come from or are created in **the hearts**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that **the purposes** are located in **the hearts**by using a word such as “from” or “in.” Alternate translation: “the purposes in the hearts” or “the purposes from the hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 4 5 tgdg translate-unknown τὰς βουλὰς 1 Here, **purposes** refers to how humans have specific goals in mind and plan ways of attaining those goals. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **purposes** with a word such as “plans” or “intentions.” Alternate translation: “the plans” or “the intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -510,7 +510,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 4 13 uubg figs-doublet περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου…πάντων περίψημα 1 Here Paul uses two different words for garbage. The word **scum** refers to what people throw away after they clean something. The word **refuse** refers to dirt or filth that people wipe or scrub off an object. Paul uses two very similar words in order to emphasize that the world thinks that he and other apostles are like garbage. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the filthy scum of all the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 4 13 gqxj figs-possession περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe what **the world** identifies as **scum**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a short phrase to clarify that **scum** is what **the world** thinks he and other apostles are. Alternate translation: “what the world considers scum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 4 13 flf9 figs-synecdoche τοῦ κόσμου 1 When Paul uses **the world** in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses **the world** to refer to human beings who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the world** with an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -1CO 4 13 ip6p figs-possession πάντων περίψημα 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **refuse** that: (1) comes from **all things**. Alternate translation: “the refuse from all things” (2) **all** people consider to be garbage. Alternate translation: “what all people consider to be refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 4 13 ip6p figs-possession πάντων περίψημα 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **refuse** that: (1) comes from **all {things}**. Alternate translation: “the refuse from all things” (2) **all** people consider to be garbage. Alternate translation: “what all people consider to be refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 4 13 z4tt figs-idiom ἕως ἄρτι 1 Here Paul ends this sentence in a similar way to how he began his sentence in [4:11](../04/11.md). In Paul’s culture, the phrase **even until now** means that what Paul speaks about has been happening and continues to happen up to the time when he writes this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this phrase with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to this very day” “all the time we serve Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 4 14 k1at figs-infostructure οὐκ ἐντρέπων ὑμᾶς γράφω ταῦτα, ἀλλ’ ὡς τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ, νουθετῶ 1 I do not write these things to shame you, but to correct you If your language would not put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “I correct you as my beloved children. I do not write these things as shaming you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 4 14 r9pj grammar-connect-logic-goal ἐντρέπων ὑμᾶς 1 Here, the phrase **as shaming you** introduces what Paul did **not write** to do. If your readers would not understand **as shaming** as a purpose, you could use a word or phrase that does clearly indicate purpose. Alternate translation: “in order to shame you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) @@ -958,22 +958,22 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 32 f569 figs-genericnoun ὁ ἄγαμος 1 concerned about Here Paul refers to **The unmarried man** in the singular, but he is speaking generically about any **unmarried man**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “Each unmarried man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 7 32 d4zd figs-gendernotations ὁ ἄγαμος…ἀρέσῃ 1 concerned about Here Paul is referring only to men. He will go on address unmarried women in [7:34](../07/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 7 32 fouj figs-activepassive μεριμνᾷ 1 concerned about If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **man** who is **concerned** rather than focusing on what makes him **concerned**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the **unmarried man** himself does it. Alternate translation: “concerns himself with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 7 32 zqfz figs-possession τὰ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 concerned about Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **things** that are directly related to **the Lord**. This phrase identifies anything that one does that relates to **the Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the things of the Lord** with a word or phrase that refers to anything related to **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “everything that concerns the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 7 32 zqfz figs-possession τὰ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 concerned about Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **{things}** that are directly related to **the Lord**. This phrase identifies anything that one does that relates to **the Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the things of the Lord** with a word or phrase that refers to anything related to **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “everything that concerns the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 7 32 g3nk πῶς ἀρέσῃ τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 concerned about Here, **how he might please the Lord** further explains what being **concerned about the things of the Lord** means. If **how** would not introduce a further explanation in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does introduce such an explanation. Alternate translation: “that is, how he might please the Lord” 1CO 7 33 upzf figs-genericnoun ὁ…γαμήσας 1 concerned about Here Paul refers to **the married man** in the singular, but he is speaking generically about any married man. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each unmarried man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 7 33 hzcp figs-activepassive μεριμνᾷ 1 concerned about If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **man** who is **concerned** rather than focusing on what makes him **concerned**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the **married man** himself does it. Alternate translation: “concerns himself with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 7 33 gcvl figs-possession τὰ τοῦ κόσμου 1 concerned about Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **things** that are directly related to the **world**. This phrase identifies anything that one does that relates to the **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the **things of the world** with a word or phrase that refers to anything related to the **world**. Alternate translation: “many things that relate to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 7 33 gcvl figs-possession τὰ τοῦ κόσμου 1 concerned about Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **{things}** that are directly related to the **world**. This phrase identifies anything that one does that relates to the **world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the **things of the world** with a word or phrase that refers to anything related to the **world**. Alternate translation: “many things that relate to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 7 33 sank figs-genericnoun τῇ γυναικί 1 concerned about Here Paul refers to **the wife**, but he specifically has in mind the wife of the **married man** already mentioned. If your language would not use this form to refer to the man’s wife, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 7 33 s16y figs-metaphor μεμέρισται 1 concerned about Here Paul speaks as if the man **is divided** into two pieces. By speaking in this way, Paul means that the **married man** has conflicting interests or concerns. He is concerned about how to please the Lord and how to please his wife. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **is divided** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he is pulled in two directions” or “he is of two minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 7 33 llv3 figs-activepassive μεμέρισται 1 concerned about If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **he** who is **divided** rather than focusing on what does the “dividing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the man’s “concerns” do it. Alternate translation: “concerns about the Lord and the world divide him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 7 33 z7rv figs-genericnoun ἡ γυνὴ ἡ ἄγαμος καὶ ἡ παρθένος 1 concerned about Here Paul refers to **the unmarried woman** and **the virgin** in the singular, but he is speaking generically about **unmarried woman** or **virgin**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you can use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each unmarried woman or virgin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 7 33 hnoo translate-unknown ἡ γυνὴ ἡ ἄγαμος καὶ ἡ παρθένος 1 concerned about Here Paul could be distinguishing between: (1) older single women (**the unmarried woman**) and younger single women (**the virgin**). Alternate translation: “the older or younger single woman” (2) divorced women (**the unmarried woman**) and women who have never been married (**the virgin**). Alternate translation: “the divorced woman or the woman who has never married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 7 34 ug6n figs-activepassive μεριμνᾷ 1 is concerned about If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **concerned** rather than focusing on what makes them **concerned**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “the unmarried woman or the virgin” ([7:33](../07/33.md)) does it. Alternate translation: “concerns herself with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 7 34 b884 figs-possession τὰ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 is concerned about Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **things** that are directly related to **the Lord**. This phrase identifies anything that one does that relates to **the Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the things of the Lord** with a word or phrase that refers to anything related to **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “everything that concerns the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 7 34 b884 figs-possession τὰ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 is concerned about Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **{things}** that are directly related to **the Lord**. This phrase identifies anything that one does that relates to **the Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the things of the Lord** with a word or phrase that refers to anything related to **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “everything that concerns the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 7 34 el97 figs-merism καὶ τῷ σώματι καὶ τῷ πνεύματι 1 is concerned about Here Paul refers to **the body** and **the spirit** as a way to refer to everything that a person is. The **body** is the outward part of the person, while the **spirit** is in the inward part of the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **both in the body and in the spirit** with a word or phrase that emphasizes that the entire person is in view. Alternate translation: “in body and soul” or “in every part” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 1CO 7 34 mfin figs-gendernotations ἡ…γαμήσασα 1 is concerned about Here, **the one who is married** is feminine. If this is not clear for your readers, you could clarify that this phrase speaks about women. Alternate translation: “the woman who is married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 7 34 h91l figs-activepassive μεριμνᾷ 2 is concerned about If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **concerned** rather than focusing on what makes them **concerned**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that **the one who is married** does it. Alternate translation: “concerns herself with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 7 34 edvb figs-possession τὰ τοῦ κόσμου 1 is concerned about Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **things** that are directly related to **the world**. This phrase identifies anything that one does that relates to **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the things of the world** with a word or phrase that refers to anything related to **the world**. Alternate translation: “many things that relate to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1CO 7 34 edvb figs-possession τὰ τοῦ κόσμου 1 is concerned about Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **{things}** that are directly related to **the world**. This phrase identifies anything that one does that relates to **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **the things of the world** with a word or phrase that refers to anything related to **the world**. Alternate translation: “many things that relate to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 7 34 puzh figs-genericnoun τῷ ἀνδρί 1 is concerned about Here Paul refers to **the husband**, but he specifically has in mind the husband of the **the one who is married** already mentioned. If your language would not use this form to refer to the woman’s husband, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 7 35 ah8e writing-pronouns τοῦτο 1 constraint Here, **this** refers back to what Paul has said about how unmarried people can serve the Lord better in [7:32–34](../07/32.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **this** by clarifying what it refers back to. Alternate translation: “this about marriage and serving the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 7 35 x1kh figs-abstractnouns πρὸς τὸ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν σύμφορον 1 constraint If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **benefit**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “benefit” or “help.” Alternate translation: “to benefit you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1046,7 +1046,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 8 5 l7ib figs-irony θεοὶ πολλοὶ καὶ κύριοι πολλοί 1 many “gods” and many “lords.” Here Paul acknowledges that there are **many “gods”** and **“lords”**. He implies that **so-called** from earlier in the verse also applies here, so the ULT has put quotation marks around **gods** and **lords** to indicate that these are the names people use. Paul himself does not believe that what people call **gods** and **lords** really are those things; rather, [10:20–21](../10/20.md) suggests that Paul thinks these **gods** and **lords** are actually demons. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what Paul means by **“gods”** and **“lords”** with a form that indicates that Paul is speaking from someone else’s perspective. Alternate translation: “many so-called gods and many so-called lords” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) 1CO 8 6 y6hq figs-explicit ἡμῖν εἷς Θεὸς 1 Yet for us there is only one God In this verse, Paul does not directly quote from the Old Testament, but he uses words that would make any reader who is familiar with the Old Testament think about [Deuteronomy 6:4](../deu/06/04.md), just like he did in [8:4](../08/04.md). The Old Testament passage says, “The Lord is our God, the Lord is one.” If your readers would not make this connection, you could include a footnote or a brief reference to Deuteronomy. Alternate translation: “we accept from the Scriptures that there is one God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 8 6 sv67 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 Yet for us there is only one God **Father** is an important title that describes one person in the Trinity. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “that is, the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -1CO 8 6 x3d6 figs-explicit ἐξ οὗ τὰ πάντα 1 Yet for us there is only one God Here Paul emphasizes that **God the Father** created all things and is their ultimate source. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **from whom {are} all things** with a phrase that identifies **God the Father** as the creator of everything that exists. Alternate translation: “who is the creator of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 8 6 x3d6 figs-explicit ἐξ οὗ τὰ πάντα 1 Yet for us there is only one God Here Paul emphasizes that **God the Father** created all things and is their ultimate source. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **from whom {are} all {things}** with a phrase that identifies **God the Father** as the creator of everything that exists. Alternate translation: “who is the creator of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 8 6 vw06 figs-explicit ἡμεῖς εἰς αὐτόν 1 Yet for us there is only one God Here Paul emphasizes that the purpose for which **we** exist is to serve and honor God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **for whom we {are}** with a phrase that identifies **God the Father** as the goal or purpose of Christian life. Alternate translation: “whom we are to serve” or “whom we worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 8 6 cokf figs-explicit δι’ οὗ τὰ πάντα 1 Yet for us there is only one God Here Paul emphasizes that the **Lord Jesus Christ** is the agent through whom **God the Father** created all things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **through whom all things {are}** with a phrase that identifies the **Lord Jesus Christ** as the agent in the creation of everything that exists. Alternate translation: “through whom God the Father created all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 8 6 jsqb figs-explicit ἡμεῖς δι’ αὐτοῦ 1 Yet for us there is only one God Here Paul could be expressing the idea: (1) that **we** exist because of what Christ has done by creating and then saving us. Alternate translation: “through whom we live” (2) that **we** have been saved and given new life by Christ. Alternate translation: “through whom we have new life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1163,11 +1163,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 10 bdlk figs-abstractnouns ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι…ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τοῦ μετέχειν 1 for our sake If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **hope**, you can express the idea by using an adverb such as “hopefully” or a verb such as “expect.” Alternate translation: “hopefully … hopefully expecting to share the harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 9 10 pas5 figs-ellipsis ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 for our sake Here Paul does not mention what the **hope** expects because he states it at the end of the verse: **sharing the harvest**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could explicitly state that **sharing the harvest** is what the **hope** expects. Alternate translation: “in hope of sharing the harvest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 9 10 q1q2 figs-ellipsis ὁ ἀλοῶν ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 for our sake Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**ought to plow**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “the one who threshes ought to thresh in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 9 11 zn5m figs-metaphor εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῖν τὰ πνευματικὰ ἐσπείραμεν, μέγα εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῶν τὰ σαρκικὰ θερίσομεν? 1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? In this verse, Paul applies the farming language he used in [9:9–10](../09/09.md). When he and Barnabas “sow,” they should also “reap” the harvest. Paul clarifies that what they **sowed** was **spiritual things**, which means the good news. The **material things** that they can **reap** are money and support from the Corinthians. If your reader would misunderstand this application of the farming language, you could use analogies to clarify what Paul is referring to or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Similarly, if we told you about the good news, is it too much if we receive material support from you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 9 11 zn5m figs-metaphor εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῖν τὰ πνευματικὰ ἐσπείραμεν, μέγα εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῶν τὰ σαρκικὰ θερίσομεν? 1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? In this verse, Paul applies the farming language he used in [9:9–10](../09/09.md). When he and Barnabas “sow,” they should also “reap” the harvest. Paul clarifies that what they **sowed** was **spiritual {things}**, which means the good news. The **material {things}** that they can **reap** are money and support from the Corinthians. If your reader would misunderstand this application of the farming language, you could use analogies to clarify what Paul is referring to or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Similarly, if we told you about the good news, is it too much if we receive material support from you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 11 b5g9 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς -1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Here, **we** refers particularly to Paul and Barnabas. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 9 11 jpjj grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Paul is speaking as if **we** “sowing spiritual things” was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 9 11 g1wh figs-rquestion μέγα εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῶν τὰ σαρκικὰ θερίσομεν? 1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, it is not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong negation. Alternate translation: “it is by no means too much if we will reap material things from you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 9 11 czcs grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ 2 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **we** could **reap material things from you**, though **we** might not do so. He specifies the result for if **we** do **reap material things**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “that.” Alternate translation: “that” or “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +1CO 9 11 czcs grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ 2 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **we** could **reap material things from you**, though **we** might not do so. He specifies the result for if **we** do **reap material {things}**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “that.” Alternate translation: “that” or “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) 1CO 9 12 v333 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 If others exercised this right Paul is speaking as if **others** “sharing” **the right over you** was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 9 12 z3mr figs-explicit τῆς ὑμῶν ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν 1 If others exercised this right While Paul does not directly state this, the Corinthians would have understood **right** to refer to the **right** to receive financial support. If your readers would not understand **right** in this way, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “shared the right to financial support from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 9 12 cr62 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὑμῶν ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν…ἡμεῖς…τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ταύτῃ 1 If others exercised this right If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **right**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “able to.” If you do so, you may need to express an object, which here is receiving financial support. Alternate translation: “were able to require financial support from you, are we … being able to require financial support from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1223,7 +1223,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 19 s48l figs-metaphor ἐλεύθερος…ὢν ἐκ πάντων, πᾶσιν ἐμαυτὸν ἐδούλωσα 1 I am free from all Here Paul uses the language of slavery and freedom to describe how he proclaims the gospel. Since he does not charge money when he proclaims the gospel, he is **free**. No person employs him or tells him what to do. However, Paul decides to serve others, to “enslave himself,” by doing what others think is right. In this way, he acts like a slave who has to do what his master requires. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the slavery and freedom metaphor with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “not having to obey all, I choose to obey all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 19 gv2u figs-explicit πάντων, πᾶσιν 1 I am free from all Here, the Corinthians would have understood **all** to refer specifically to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **all** by including a word or phrase that clarifies that Paul is speaking about “people.” Alternate translation: “all people … to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 9 19 xlhn translate-unknown κερδήσω 1 I am free from all Here, to **gain** someone means to help them toward belief in the Messiah. Once people believe, they belong to Christ and his church, and so the person who preached the gospel to them “gained” them as a new part of the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **gain**plainly or with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “I might convert” or “I might gain for Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 9 19 mms9 figs-explicit τοὺς πλείονας 1 I might gain even more Here Paul is speaking about how “enslaving himself” **to all** gains **more** than if he did not “enslave himself” in this way. He refers specifically to people here, just like **all** refers to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **even more things** by clarifying that Paul is referring to gaining **more** people than if he did not “enslave himself.” Alternate translation: “even more people” or “more people in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 9 19 mms9 figs-explicit τοὺς πλείονας 1 I might gain even more Here Paul is speaking about how “enslaving himself” **to all** gains **more** than if he did not “enslave himself” in this way. He refers specifically to people here, just like **all** refers to people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **even more {things}** by clarifying that Paul is referring to gaining **more** people than if he did not “enslave himself.” Alternate translation: “even more people” or “more people in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 9 20 hh8t ἐγενόμην…ὡς Ἰουδαῖος 1 I became like a Jew Alternate translation: “I practiced Jewish customs” 1CO 9 20 g1ig translate-unknown κερδήσω -1 I became like a Jew Just as in [9:19](../09/19.md), to **gain** someone means to help them to believe in the Messiah. Translate this word the same way you did in [9:19](../09/19.md). Alternate translation: “to convert” or “to gain for Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 9 20 s9tu figs-metaphor ὑπὸ νόμον -1 I became like one under the law Here Paul speaks about those who think that they need to obey the law as if they were physically **under law**. By speaking as if the **law** were on top of these people, Paul emphasizes how the **law** controls their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **under law** with a word or phrase that refers to the obligation to obey the **law**. Alternate translation: “who keep the law … one who keeps the law … one who keeps the law … who keep the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1242,8 +1242,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 22 zimr figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν, ἀσθενής…τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς 1 outside the law Much like in [8:7–12](../08/07.md), **weak** identifies a person who easily feels guilty. A **weak** person thinks some things are wrong that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “To the sensitive … sensitive … the sensitive” or “To those who often condemn themselves … one who condemns himself … those who often condemn themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 22 dd4r figs-nominaladj τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν…τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς 1 outside the law Paul is using the adjective **weak** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “To people who are weak … the people who are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 9 22 zbip translate-unknown κερδήσω 1 outside the law Just as in [9:19](../09/19.md), to **gain** someone means to help that person believe in the Messiah. Translate this word the same way you did in [9:19](../09/19.md). Alternate translation: “I might convert” or “I might gain for Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 9 22 wgy4 figs-idiom τοῖς πᾶσιν γέγονα πάντα 1 outside the law Here, to **become all things** means that Paul has lived in many different ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **I have become all things**more naturally in your language. Alternate translation: “I have lived in all ways with everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 9 22 pkkx figs-hyperbole τοῖς πᾶσιν γέγονα πάντα 1 outside the law Here, **all things** and **everyone** are exaggerations that the Corinthians would have understood to mean that Paul has become many things to many people. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he is willing to **become** anything to anyone as long it leads to saving people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could qualify Paul’s claim and expression the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I have become many things to many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +1CO 9 22 wgy4 figs-idiom τοῖς πᾶσιν γέγονα πάντα 1 outside the law Here, to **become all {things}** means that Paul has lived in many different ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **I have become all {things}**more naturally in your language. Alternate translation: “I have lived in all ways with everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 9 22 pkkx figs-hyperbole τοῖς πᾶσιν γέγονα πάντα 1 outside the law Here, **all {things}** and **everyone** are exaggerations that the Corinthians would have understood to mean that Paul has become many things to many people. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that he is willing to **become** anything to anyone as long it leads to saving people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could qualify Paul’s claim and expression the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I have become many things to many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1CO 9 22 q4ai ἵνα πάντως…σώσω 1 outside the law Alternate translation: “so that, by using every means I have, I might save” 1CO 9 22 ezm2 figs-metonymy πάντως…σώσω 1 outside the law Here Paul speaks of how he leads others to faith in Jesus as “saving” them. By this, he means that he himself is the means by which God will save **some**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul says that he can **save some** with a word or phrase that refers to leading someone towards “salvation,” that is, helping them to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “God might by all means use me to save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 9 23 tald grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 outside the law Here, **But** introduces a summary of what Paul has said in [9:19–22](../09/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **But** with a word or phrase that introduces a summary or concluding statement. Alternate translation: “In the end,” or “So,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) @@ -1437,7 +1437,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 1 h5fg μιμηταί μου γίνεσθε, καθὼς κἀγὼ Χριστοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “Imitate me, just as I also imitate Christ” 1CO 11 2 epnu grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 you remember me in everything Here, **Now** introduces a whole new section in Paul’s argument. He **Now** begins speaking about proper behavior during worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Now** with a word or phrase that introduces a new topic or leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 11 2 ibw5 figs-metonymy μου 1 you remember me in everything Here, **me** refers specifically to what Paul teaches and how Paul behaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **me** by clarifying exactly what about **me** Paul has in mind. Alternate translation: “my doctrine and behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 11 2 qsk9 figs-idiom πάντα 1 you remember me in everything Here, **all things** refers to anything the Corinthians might do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in all things** with a word or phrase that expresses the same idea in your language. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 11 2 qsk9 figs-idiom πάντα 1 you remember me in everything Here, **all {things}** refers to anything the Corinthians might do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in all {things}** with a word or phrase that expresses the same idea in your language. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 11 2 ttwu figs-metaphor τὰς παραδόσεις κατέχετε 1 you remember me in everything Here Paul speaks as if **the traditions** were something physical that the Corinthians would **hold firmly to**. By using this figure of speech, Paul wishes to emphasize that the Corinthians are believing the traditions and acting in line with them as carefully and consistently as if they were physically holding on to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **hold firmly** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “you keep the traditions” or “you follow the traditions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 11 2 bwes figs-abstractnouns τὰς παραδόσεις 1 you remember me in everything If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **traditions**, you can express the idea by using a relative clause with a verb such as “teach” or “learn.” Alternate translation: “to the things you learned from me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 11 2 akeb figs-metaphor παρέδωκα ὑμῖν 1 you remember me in everything Here Paul speaks as if the **traditions** were a physical object that he **delivered** to the Corinthians. By speaking in this way, he emphasizes that he truly taught them **the traditions**, and they now know these **traditions** as well as if they held them in their hands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I instructed you” or “I told them to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1607,7 +1607,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 34 jjqd figs-gendernotations ἐσθιέτω 1 let him eat at home Although **him** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** with a nongendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 11 34 x1l8 grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς κρίμα 1 not be for judgment Here, **for judgment** indicates what will happen if the Corinthians do not obey Paul’s instruction to **eat at home**. It does not indicate why the Corinthians are “coming together.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **for judgment** with a word or phrase that more clearly introduces a result. Alternate translation: “with judgment as the result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 11 34 ti9q figs-abstractnouns εἰς κρίμα 1 not be for judgment If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **judgment**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “judge.” Paul implies that “God” is the one who is doing the “judging.” Alternate translation: “with the result that God judges you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 11 34 xuu7 figs-extrainfo τὰ…λοιπὰ 1 not be for judgment Here Paul does not clarify what **the remaining things** are, and it is best to leave the reference unclear. Use a form that could be interpreted in the following ways. The phrase could refer to: (1) everything else Paul wishes to say about the Lord’s Supper. (2) Paul’s responses to other things that the Corinthians asked him about. (3) other instructions about worship practices. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +1CO 11 34 xuu7 figs-extrainfo τὰ…λοιπὰ 1 not be for judgment Here Paul does not clarify what **the remaining {things}** are, and it is best to leave the reference unclear. Use a form that could be interpreted in the following ways. The phrase could refer to: (1) everything else Paul wishes to say about the Lord’s Supper. (2) Paul’s responses to other things that the Corinthians asked him about. (3) other instructions about worship practices. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 11 34 r3hj figs-abstractnouns διατάξομαι 1 not be for judgment If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **directions**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “direct” or “instruct.” Alternate translation: “I will direct you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 11 34 zy1v figs-go ὡς ἂν ἔλθω 1 not be for judgment Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. The language that he uses indicates that he does not yet have a plan for how and when he will visit. What he is saying is that he does plan to visit them at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans. Alternate translation: “whenever I can next visit you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) 1CO 12 intro abcf 0 # 1 Corinthians 12 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)
* God is the source of every gift (12:1–11)
* The body (12:12–26)
* Diversity of gifts (12:27–31)

Some translations put the second half of [12:31](../12/31.md) with the next section. The short sentence is a transition sentence, so it could end the current section or begin a new section. Consider how translations that your readers might be familiar with treat this verse.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Spiritual gifts

In [12:1](../12/01.md), Paul introduces “spiritual gifts.” This phrase refers to specific ways in which the Holy Spirit has empowered specific believers to do specific things. The examples that Paul uses in this chapter include things that we might consider to be amazing or “supernatural,” such as speaking in tongues or healing others, and things that we might consider to be everyday or “normal,” including “helps” and “administration.” Make sure to use a word or phrase that could include both kinds of things in the category of “spiritual gifts.” Paul implies that the Holy Spirit empowers all believers with “gifts,” but this does not necessarily mean that each believer receives only one “gift” for his or her entire life. The “gifts” are ways that the Holy Spirit empowers believers, not things that believers themselves possess. Avoid language that implies that each believer possesses one specific gift for their whole life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/gift]])

### Speaking in tongues

Three times in this chapter, Paul refers to speaking in “tongues” (see [12:10](../12/10.md), [28](../12/28.md), [30](../12/30.md)). He will develop this theme with much more detail in chapter 14, so you may want to look ahead at chapter 14 before you decide how to translate the expressions that refer to speaking in “tongues.” The “tongues” could refer to: (1) an otherwise unknown language that one person speaks to God. (2) the language or languages spoken by angels. (3) foreign languages that believers in the church do not speak. Of course, it could refer to any or all of these languages. Since Paul’s words are not very specific, you may also want to use relatively generic terms that refer to “unknown languages” or “special languages.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/tongue]])

### Ranking of gifts?

In [12:31](../12/31.md), Paul refers to “greater gifts.” Further, in [12:28](../12/28.md), he numbers the first three items in his list: “first apostles, second prophets, third teachers.” These two verses could suggest that some “gifts” are more valuable or have more importance than other gifts. However, in [12:22–25](../12/22.md), Paul argues that the “weaker,” “less honorable,” and “unpresentable” body parts are essential, honorable, and full of dignity. This seems to suggest that none of the “gifts” are more valuable or important than others. Consider the implications of how you translate especially [12:28](../12/28.md), [31](../12/31.md) for this issue. See the notes on those verses for translation options that fit with each view about the ranking of gifts.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Body analogy and metaphor

In [12:12–27](../12/12.md), Paul speaks about a “body.” He directly speaks about the human body, but he wants the Corinthians to apply what he says about a human body to their own group of believers. He uses the human body as an analogy for the group of believers because he identifies them as “the body of Christ” ([12:27](../12/27.md)). He uses this metaphor because wants them to realize that they are so closely connected to each other and to Christ that they are like one body. Because he uses this metaphor about the “body of Christ,” he also uses the human body as an analogy to understand the “body of Christ.” In the human body, there are different body parts, and each one has a specific function. Despite that, they all work together. Paul wants each of the Corinthians to think about himself or herself as a body part that works with all the other body parts to function together as a body, the “body of Christ.” Paul speaks mostly about the human “body” throughout, and your translation should reflect that. The notes point out specific figures of speech, but much of this section is description of how human body parts work together. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/member]])

### Personification of body parts

In [12:15–16](../12/15.md), [21](../12/21.md), Paul develops quotes of what body parts might say if they could speak. In [12:25–26](../12/25.md), he speaks as if body parts could care for, suffer with, and rejoice with each other. So that he can make a point, he speaks as if the body parts were people. However, he also wants the Corinthians to identify themselves with the body parts in the analogy, so personifying them helps the Corinthians see themselves as “body parts.” If possible, preserve this figure of speech so that your readers can identify themselves as body parts. If you must express the idea in some other way, you could indicate that Paul is using a hypothetical situation or telling a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])

### Rhetorical questions

In [12:17](../12/17.md), [19](../12/19.md), [29–30](../12/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Non-exhaustive lists

In [12:8–10](../12/08.md), [28](../12/28.md), [29–30](../12/29.md), Paul provides three different lists of “spiritual gifts.” Each of these lists contain some of the same items that the others contain, but none of them contain all of the same items. This shows that Paul did not intend these lists to identify every spiritual gift that might exist. Instead, Paul is listing particular gifts as examples. Make sure that your translation does not imply that the gifts that Paul lists are the only ones that exist.

### “Members”

Throughout [12:12–27](../12/12.md), Paul refers to “members,” which identifies any of the human body parts. In English, “members” has other meanings besides parts of the body, which is why the UST translates it as “body parts.” In your translation, make sure to use a word that refers specifically to parts of the body, including external limbs (such as arms, legs, and toes) and internal organs (such as heart, lungs, and stomach). If you must choose a word that identifies only external or internal body parts, it is better to refer to external body parts because Paul refers specifically to head, ears, eyes, hands, and feet. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/member]])

### Names for the Holy Spirit

Paul refers to the Holy Spirit as “the Spirit of God” ([12:3](../12/03.md)), as “the Holy Spirit” ([12:3](../12/03.md)), as “one Spirit” ([12:13](../12/13.md)), and as “the Spirit” ([12:4](../12/04.md), [7–9](../12/07.md), [11](../12/11.md)). All these phrases refer to the Holy Spirit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that these phrases all refer to the same Spirit by stating that in some specific way or by using “Holy Spirit” in all these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1633,7 +1633,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 12 6 ybaf figs-abstractnouns διαιρέσεις ἐνεργημάτων 1 who is working all things in everyone If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **varieties**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “various” or “different.” Alternate translation: “various workings” or “different workings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 12 6 mmdx translate-unknown ἐνεργημάτων 1 who is working all things in everyone Here, **workings** refers to “activities” or “actions,” that is, doing things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **workings** with a word or phrase that refers generally to “doing things.” Alternate translation: “of activities” or “of ways to do things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 12 6 r3vr figs-ellipsis ὁ αὐτὸς Θεός 1 who is working all things in everyone Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul implies that it is **the same God** who empowers the **varieties of workings**. If your readers would not infer that information, and if your language requires these words to make a complete thought, you could supply them. Alternate translation: “it is the same God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1CO 12 6 eth3 figs-explicit τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν 1 who is working all things in everyone Here, **all things in everyone** could refer: (1) specifically to **all** gifts, ministries, and workings that God **works** in **everyone** who believes. Alternate translation: “each of these things in each person” (2) generally to how God **works all things** in “everything and everyone.” Alternate translation: “everything in everyone” or “all things in every situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 12 6 eth3 figs-explicit τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν 1 who is working all things in everyone Here, **all things in everyone** could refer: (1) specifically to **all** gifts, ministries, and workings that God **works** in **everyone** who believes. Alternate translation: “each of these things in each person” (2) generally to how God **works all {things}** in “everything and everyone.” Alternate translation: “everything in everyone” or “all things in every situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 12 7 x7mv figs-activepassive ἑκάστῳ…δίδοται 1 to each one is given If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses this form to focus on the gifts rather than focusing on the one who gives them. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it (see [12:6](../12/06.md)). Alternate translation: “to each one God gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 12 7 zyqc figs-abstractnouns ἡ φανέρωσις τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 to each one is given If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **display**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “display” or “manifest.” Alternate translation: “how they display the Spirit” or “how they manifest the power of the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 12 7 j2rf figs-possession ἡ φανέρωσις τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 to each one is given Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate how **the Spirit** is revealed by **the outward display**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind that **the outward display** is a revelation of **the Spirit**with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the ability to outwardly display the Spirit” or “a way to outwardly display the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -1789,9 +1789,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 13 6 koaf figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 It does not rejoice in unrighteousness. Instead, it rejoices in the truth If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **unrighteousness**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “unrighteous” or an adverb such as “unrighteously.” Alternate translation: “unrighteous acts” or “in what people do unrighteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 13 6 g57e figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 1 It does not rejoice in unrighteousness. Instead, it rejoices in the truth If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **truth**, you can express the idea by using an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “in true things” or “things that are true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 13 7 vf6x figs-personification πάντα στέγει, πάντα πιστεύει, πάντα ἐλπίζει, πάντα ὑπομένει 1 Connecting Statement: Here, just like in [13:4–6](../13/4.md), Paul speaks as if “love” were a person. Continue to follow the translation strategies you chose in those verses. Alternate translation: “If you love others, you bear all things, believe all things, hope all things, endure all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -1CO 13 7 ksy2 figs-idiom πάντα στέγει, πάντα πιστεύει, πάντα ἐλπίζει, πάντα ὑπομένει 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **all things** refers primarily to the situation or time in which “love” **bears**, **believes**, **hopes**, and **endures**. The phrase **all things** does not mean that “love” **believes** everything it hears or **hopes** for everything that could happen. Rather, the point is that “love” **believes** in every situation and **hopes** at all times. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **all things**in a way that more clearly refers to time or situation. Alternate translation: “It bears up in every situation, believes in every situation, hopes in every situation, endures in every situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1CO 13 7 y5dm figs-explicit πάντα στέγει, πάντα πιστεύει, πάντα ἐλπίζει, πάντα ὑπομένει 1 Connecting Statement: If you follow the previous note and understand **all things** as referring to time or situation, then **bears**, **believes**, **hopes**, and **endures** do not have stated objects. Paul does not state the objects because he wants the description to be general and easily applied to many situations. If you must express objects, the verbs **bears** and **endures** imply that a person **bears** and **endures** bad things that other people do. The verbs **believes** and **hopes** imply that a person **believes** and **hopes** that God will do what he has promised to do. Alternate translation: “It bears what others do in every situation; believes God in every situation; hopes in God in every situation; endures what others do in every situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 13 7 oamf figs-parallelism πάντα στέγει, πάντα πιστεύει, πάντα ἐλπίζει, πάντα ὑπομένει 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul repeats **all things** and the same structure in four straight clauses. This was worded powerfully in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, and if it would not be worded powerfully in your culture, you could indicate why Paul repeats words and structure by eliminate some or all of the repetition and by making the statements powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “It bears, believes, hopes, and endures all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1CO 13 7 ksy2 figs-idiom πάντα στέγει, πάντα πιστεύει, πάντα ἐλπίζει, πάντα ὑπομένει 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **all {things}** refers primarily to the situation or time in which “love” **bears**, **believes**, **hopes**, and **endures**. The phrase **all {things}** does not mean that “love” **believes** everything it hears or **hopes** for everything that could happen. Rather, the point is that “love” **believes** in every situation and **hopes** at all times. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **all {things}**in a way that more clearly refers to time or situation. Alternate translation: “It bears up in every situation, believes in every situation, hopes in every situation, endures in every situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 13 7 y5dm figs-explicit πάντα στέγει, πάντα πιστεύει, πάντα ἐλπίζει, πάντα ὑπομένει 1 Connecting Statement: If you follow the previous note and understand **all {things}** as referring to time or situation, then **bears**, **believes**, **hopes**, and **endures** do not have stated objects. Paul does not state the objects because he wants the description to be general and easily applied to many situations. If you must express objects, the verbs **bears** and **endures** imply that a person **bears** and **endures** bad things that other people do. The verbs **believes** and **hopes** imply that a person **believes** and **hopes** that God will do what he has promised to do. Alternate translation: “It bears what others do in every situation; believes God in every situation; hopes in God in every situation; endures what others do in every situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 13 7 oamf figs-parallelism πάντα στέγει, πάντα πιστεύει, πάντα ἐλπίζει, πάντα ὑπομένει 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul repeats **all {things}** and the same structure in four straight clauses. This was worded powerfully in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, and if it would not be worded powerfully in your culture, you could indicate why Paul repeats words and structure by eliminate some or all of the repetition and by making the statements powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “It bears, believes, hopes, and endures all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1CO 13 7 lfoo translate-unknown στέγει 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **bears** could refer to: (1) keeping things that are outside from getting inside. The point here would be that “love” is able to “bear” or endure bad things that other people do. Alternate translation: “It endures” or “It tolerates” (2) keeping things that are inside from getting outside. The point here would be that “love” protects or shields other people from bad things. Alternate translation: “It protects against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 13 8 o6tv figs-personification ἡ ἀγάπη οὐδέποτε πίπτει 1 Connecting Statement: Here, just like in [13:4–7](../13/4.md), Paul speaks as if **love** were a person. Continue to follow the translation strategies you chose in those verses. Alternate translation: “If you love others, you will never stop doing so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 13 8 sb1a figs-litotes οὐδέποτε πίπτει 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul uses two negative words, **never** and **fails**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you can instead use a strong positive word. Alternate translation: “always keeps going” or “love always continues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) @@ -1807,7 +1807,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 13 11 tn5r figs-123person ὅτε ἤμην νήπιος, ἐλάλουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐφρόνουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐλογιζόμην ὡς νήπιος; ὅτε γέγονα ἀνήρ, κατήργηκα τὰ τοῦ νηπίου 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul uses the first person **I** to describe himself as an example, but he implies that most people experience what he describes here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **I** with a form that provides a general example. Alternate translation: “When people were children, they spoke like children, they thought like children, they reasoned like children. When they became adults, they put away childish things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 13 11 dx63 figs-parallelism ἐλάλουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐφρόνουν ὡς νήπιος, ἐλογιζόμην ὡς νήπιος 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul repeats **like a child** and the same structure in three consecutive clauses. This was worded powerfully in his culture. If it would be helpful in your language, and if it would not be worded powerfully in your culture, you could indicate why Paul repeats words and structure by eliminate some or all of the repetition and by making the statements powerful in another way. Alternate translation: “I did everything like a child” “I spoke, thought, and reasoned like a child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1CO 13 11 msy8 γέγονα ἀνήρ 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “I became an adult” -1CO 13 11 sp79 figs-metaphor κατήργηκα τὰ τοῦ νηπίου 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul speaks as if he took **childish things** and **put** them **away** in a box or a closet. He means that he stopped doing **childish things**, such as “speaking,” “thinking,” or “reasoning” **like a child**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I got rid of childish things” or “I stopped doing childish things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 13 11 sp79 figs-metaphor κατήργηκα τὰ τοῦ νηπίου 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul speaks as if he took **childish {things}** and **put** them **away** in a box or a closet. He means that he stopped doing **childish {things}**, such as “speaking,” “thinking,” or “reasoning” **like a child**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I got rid of childish things” or “I stopped doing childish things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 13 12 w2eu figs-explicit βλέπομεν 1 now we see Here Paul does not state what it is that **we see**. The Corinthians would have inferred that he meant that **we see** God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this implicationexplicitly. Alternate translation: “we see God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 13 12 mtw1 figs-metaphor δι’ ἐσόπτρου ἐν αἰνίγματι 1 now we see Here Paul speaks as if **we** were looking at **a mirror** and could see a reflection **unclearly**. With this metaphor, Paul could be expressing the idea: (1) that **now** we can **see** God only indirectly, like a reflection **in a mirror** is an indirect image. Alternate translation: “an indirect reflection of God, as if we were looking in a mirror” (2) that **now** we can only **see** some things about God, like a **mirror** only imperfectly reflects an image. Alternate translation: “imperfectly, as if we were looking at a vague reflection in a mirror” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 13 12 bn3h translate-unknown δι’ ἐσόπτρου 1 For now we see indirectly in a mirror In Paul’s culture, **a mirror** was often made of polished metal. Often, these mirrors were relatively high quality and could reflect images well. Use a word in your language that describes something that reflects an image. Alternate translation: “in a looking glass” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1862,7 +1862,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 6 v7a9 grammar-connect-exceptions τί ὑμᾶς ὠφελήσω, ἐὰν μὴ ὑμῖν λαλήσω 1 how will I benefit you? If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “will I not benefit you only when I speak to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) 1CO 14 6 vqpn figs-abstractnouns ἢ ἐν ἀποκαλύψει, ἢ ἐν γνώσει, ἢ ἐν προφητείᾳ, ἢ διδαχῇ 1 how will I benefit you? If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **revelation**, **knowledge**, **prophecy**, or **teaching**, you can express the ideas by using verbs such as “reveal,” “know,” “prophesy,” and “teach.” Alternate translation: “either to show you things or to make you understand things or to prophesy to you or to instruct you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 14 7 d6mt figs-infostructure ὅμως τὰ ἄψυχα φωνὴν διδόντα, εἴτε αὐλὸς, εἴτε κιθάρα, ἐὰν διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ 1 they do not make different sounds Here Paul identifies what he is talking about first (**lifeless things giving sounds—whether flute or harp**) and then refers back to that phrase by using **they** in his sentence. If your readers would be confused by this structure, you could restructure the sentence and indicate what Paul is talking about in another way. Alternate translation: “If even lifeless things giving sounds—whether flute or harp—would not give different sounds” or “Take even lifeless things giving sounds—whether flute or harp—as an example. If they would not give different sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -1CO 14 7 cv7t translate-unknown τὰ ἄψυχα 1 they do not make different sounds Here**lifeless things** are things are inanimate objects, things that have never been alive. Paul is specifically thinking of instruments that humans use to make sounds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **lifeless things** with a word or phrase that normally refers to things that have never been alive. Alternate translation: “inanimate things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +1CO 14 7 cv7t translate-unknown τὰ ἄψυχα 1 they do not make different sounds Here**lifeless {things}** are things are inanimate objects, things that have never been alive. Paul is specifically thinking of instruments that humans use to make sounds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **lifeless {things}** with a word or phrase that normally refers to things that have never been alive. Alternate translation: “inanimate things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 14 7 g2fx figs-idiom φωνὴν διδόντα…διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ 1 they do not make different sounds In Paul’s culture, people would speak about how something could **give** a sound. This means that the thing creates or makes the sound. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **giving sounds** or **give different sounds** with a comparable idiom or expression. Alternate translation: “creating sounds … they would not create different sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 14 7 xunn grammar-connect-condition-contrary ἐὰν διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ 1 they do not make different sounds Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **flute** and **harp** really do **give different sounds**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if they actually did not give different sounds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) 1CO 14 7 t3rb figs-explicit διαστολὴν τοῖς φθόγγοις μὴ δῷ 1 they do not make different sounds Here Paul refers to how an instrument like a **flute** or a **harp** produces many **different sounds**. It is only because it produces a variety of different sounds that it can create a melody or a song. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate what Paul is talking about here by making it more explicit that he is talking about how different sounds make up a song or melody. Alternate translation: “they did not make many different pitches” or “they did not create various notes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2054,7 +2054,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 39 xgjw grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues Here, **So then** introduces a conclusion of the argument from [14:1–38](../14/01.md). Use a word or phrase in your language that introduces the conclusion to an argument. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “To sum up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 14 39 oe0c figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the term to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brothers** with a nongendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 14 39 jvr7 τὸ λαλεῖν…γλώσσαις 1 do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues Alternate translation: “speaking in tongues” -1CO 14 40 d7ia figs-activepassive πάντα…γινέσθω 1 But let all things be done properly and in order If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to avoid stating who is “doing” **all things**, which makes the imperative more general. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “you” do the action. Alternate translation: “you should do all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 14 40 d7ia figs-activepassive πάντα…γινέσθω 1 But let all things be done properly and in order If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to avoid stating who is “doing” **all {things}**, which makes the imperative more general. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “you” do the action. Alternate translation: “you should do all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 14 40 mrnf figs-imperative πάντα…γινέσθω 1 But let all things be done properly and in order Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “all things must be done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 14 40 y5wb translate-unknown εὐσχημόνως 1 But let all things be done properly and in order Here, **properly** refers to behavior that is appropriate for the situation. See how you translated the similar word “appropriate” in [7:35](../07/35.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **properly** with a word or phrase that refers to appropriate or decent behavior. Alternate translation: “correctly” or “decently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 14 40 yh07 translate-unknown κατὰ τάξιν 1 But let all things be done properly and in order Here, **in order** refers to how things, people, and actions are in proper place and sequence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in order** with a word or phrase that indicates such proper and organized things, people, and actions. Alternate translation: “in an organized way” or “in a correctly arranged way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -2215,11 +2215,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 27 bvxd figs-idiom δῆλον ὅτι 1 he has put everything under his feet Here, **{it is} clear** indicates that someone is pointing out something that is or should be obvious. In other words, the author does not need to argue for what is **clear** and can instead just point it out. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **{it is} clear** with a comparable word or phrase that introduces something obvious. Alternate translation: “you could tell that” or “it is obvious that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 15 27 lzex figs-explicit τοῦ ὑποτάξαντος αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα 1 he has put everything under his feet Here the Corinthians would have known that **the one who put everything** is God the Father. If your readers would not make this inference, you could include an explicit reference to “God.” Alternate translation: “the one who put everything in subjection to him, that is, God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 27 p2m3 translate-unknown ἐκτὸς 1 he has put everything under his feet Here, **excepted** identifies something as an “exception” to a general rule or statement. Here Paul means that **the one who put everything** is not included in **everything**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **{is} excepted** with a word or phrase that identifies an exception. Alternate translation: “is not included” or “is not subjected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 15 28 xm8u figs-activepassive ὑποταγῇ…τὰ πάντα 1 all things are subjected to him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **all things** that are **subjected**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “subjecting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has subjected all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1CO 15 28 xm8u figs-activepassive ὑποταγῇ…τὰ πάντα 1 all things are subjected to him If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **all {things}** that are **subjected**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “subjecting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has subjected all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 28 im2j guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς 1 the Son Paul here refers to God **the Son** as opposed to God “the Father,” whom he referred to in [15:24](../15/24.md). Use a translation that clearly refers to God **the Son**. Alternate translation: “God’s Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1CO 15 28 a1cd figs-activepassive καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ Υἱὸς, ὑποταγήσεται 1 the Son himself will be subjected If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive here to focus on **the Son** who is **subjected**, rather than focusing on the one doing the “subjecting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul could imply that: (1) the **Son** does it to himself. Alternate translation: “the Son will also subject himself” (2) “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God will subject the Son himself also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 28 m6e3 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ὁ Υἱὸς 1 the Son himself will be subjected Here, **himself** focuses attention on **the Son** and emphasizes that **the Son** is the one doing this. If **himself** would not draw attention to **the Son** in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “even the Son” or “the Son indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1CO 15 28 ksj4 figs-explicit τῷ ὑποτάξαντι αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα 1 the Son himself Here, just as in [15:27](../15/27.md), the Corinthians would have known that **the one who subjected all things** is God the Father. If your readers would not make this inference, you could include an explicit reference to “God.” Alternate translation: “to the one who subjected all things to him, that is, God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1CO 15 28 ksj4 figs-explicit τῷ ὑποτάξαντι αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα 1 the Son himself Here, just as in [15:27](../15/27.md), the Corinthians would have known that **the one who subjected all {things}** is God the Father. If your readers would not make this inference, you could include an explicit reference to “God.” Alternate translation: “to the one who subjected all things to him, that is, God,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 15 28 aye7 ὁ Θεὸς 1 the Son himself Here, **God** could refer to: (1) **God** the Father specifically. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (2) all three persons that are **God**. Alternate translation: “the Trinity” or “the trinitarian God” 1CO 15 28 v3lb figs-idiom πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν 1 the Son himself Here, **all in all** is a phrase that emphasizes that **God** rules and controls everything that exists. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **all in all** with a comparable phrase that refers to how **God** rules and controls **all** things. Alternate translation: “supreme” or “the one who rules all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 15 29 j7o9 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἐπεὶ 1 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? Here, **Otherwise** introduces the opposite of what Paul has argued in [15:12–28](../15/12.md). If what he has argued about Jesus’ resurrection and its importance is not true, then what he says in this verse must be true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Otherwise** with a word or phrase that introduces an opposite or contrast. Alternate translation: “If all that is not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -2499,7 +2499,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 13 a3fs figs-idiom ἀνδρίζεσθε 1 act like men Here, **act like men** is a way to urge someone to be brave and courageous. The opposite of acting **like men** is acting like cowards. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idiom with a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “be stouthearted” or “act with courage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 16 13 xwvg figs-explicit κραταιοῦσθε 1 act like men Here, **be strong** does not refer to physical strength but rather to mental strength or determination. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **be strong** with a word or phrase that urges mental strength or determination. Alternate translation: “keep persevering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 16 14 rij5 figs-imperative πάντα ὑμῶν…γινέσθω 1 Let all that you do be done in love Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “All your things must happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -1CO 16 14 kpnl figs-idiom πάντα ὑμῶν 1 Let all that you do be done in love Here, **all your things** refers to everything that a person thinks and does. If your reader would misunderstand **all your things**, you could use an expression that refers to all the **things** that a person thinks and does. Alternate translation: “all that you do” or “all things that you think and do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1CO 16 14 kpnl figs-idiom πάντα ὑμῶν 1 Let all that you do be done in love Here, **all your {things}** refers to everything that a person thinks and does. If your reader would misunderstand **all your {things}**, you could use an expression that refers to all the **{things}** that a person thinks and does. Alternate translation: “all that you do” or “all things that you think and do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 16 14 pbvz figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 Let all that you do be done in love If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “love” or an adjective such as “loving.” Alternate translation: “in a loving way” or “so that you are loving people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 16 15 fy4e grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **Now** introduces a new topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Now** with a comparable word or leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 16 15 wgyu figs-infostructure παρακαλῶ…ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, οἴδατε τὴν οἰκίαν Στεφανᾶ, ὅτι ἐστὶν ἀπαρχὴ τῆς Ἀχαΐας, καὶ εἰς διακονίαν τοῖς ἁγίοις ἔταξαν ἑαυτούς; 1 Connecting Statement: Here Paul begins a sentence with **I urge you, brothers**. He continues this sentence in the next verse with “that you also would be subject” (see [16:16](../16/16.md)). The rest of this verse interrupts that sentence with information about the people that Paul is going to speak about. The ULT indicates this interruption by using parentheses. If your readers would find this interruption confusing, you could use markers that indicate such an interruption in your language, or you could rearrange the verse so that **I urge you, brothers** goes more directly with the next verse. Alternate translation: “you know the household of Stephanas, that they are the firstfruits of Achaia, and they have devoted themselves to the service of the saints. I urge you, brothers,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) diff --git a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv index 105f19e3d7..73a4c58357 100644 --- a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv +++ b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv @@ -425,7 +425,7 @@ PHP 4 12 iqtr figs-merism χορτάζεσθαι καὶ πεινᾶν 1 to be f PHP 4 12 ufv4 figs-ellipsis περισσεύειν καὶ ὑστερεῖσθαι 1 to abound and to be in need Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that a phrase would need in many languages to be understandable. If it would help your readers, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “to have an abundance of things I need and to live contentedly when I do not have certain things I need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) PHP 4 12 fwes figs-merism περισσεύειν καὶ ὑστερεῖσθαι 1 to abound and to be in need Here, the phrases **to abound** and **to be in need** refer to two opposite extremes and to everything in between them. If it would help your readers, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “to abound and to be in need and to everything in between” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) PHP 4 13 z1pb writing-pronouns πάντα ἰσχύω ἐν τῷ ἐνδυναμοῦντί με 1 I can do all things in him who strengthens me Here, the pronoun **him** refers to Christ. Alternate translation: “I can do all things because Christ gives me strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -PHP 4 13 fpo4 figs-explicit πάντα ἰσχύω ἐν τῷ ἐνδυναμοῦντί με 1 I can do all things in him who strengthens me Here, **all things** refers to all situations. The phrase **I can do all things** means “I can handle all situations.” Alternate translation: “I can deal with anything through him who strengthens me” or “I am able to act properly in every situation because Jesus makes me strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +PHP 4 13 fpo4 figs-explicit πάντα ἰσχύω ἐν τῷ ἐνδυναμοῦντί με 1 I can do all things in him who strengthens me Here, **all {things}** refers to all situations. The phrase **I can do all {things}** means “I can handle all situations.” Alternate translation: “I can deal with anything through him who strengthens me” or “I am able to act properly in every situation because Jesus makes me strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHP 4 14 fe2z figs-explicit συνκοινωνήσαντές μου τῇ θλίψει 1 in my affliction The phrase **having shared together in my affliction** means that the Philippian believers helped Paul while he was experiencing difficulties by giving him money and sending Epaphroditus to him. If it would help your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by helping me in my affliction through your gift of money and sending Epaphroditus to me” or “by helping me when I faced difficult circumstances by sending Epaphroditus to encourage me and bring me your gift of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHP 4 14 ulzo figs-abstractnouns μου τῇ θλίψει 1 in my affliction If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **affliction** with an adjective such as **difficult** or in some other way. Alternate translation: “when I was suffering” or “when I was mistreated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 4 14 tlur μου τῇ θλίψει 1 in my affliction Alternate translation: “in my trials” or “in my troubles” or “in my difficulties” diff --git a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv index 08b5833062..6827bc455c 100644 --- a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv @@ -94,11 +94,11 @@ COL 1 19 nyos figs-explicit ἐν αὐτῷ εὐδόκησεν πᾶν τὸ COL 1 19 zu89 figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ εὐδόκησεν πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα κατοικῆσαι 1 Here, Paul speaks of the Son as though he were a house in which God’s **fullness** could **dwell**. This does not mean that God lives inside of the Son or that the Son is part of God. This means that the Son has all the divinity of God. It means that the Son is fully God just as the Father is fully God. If the metaphor might be misunderstood in your language, you could state it more plainly. Alternate translation: “the Son is fully God in every way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 1 19 wmdw figs-metonymy πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα 1 In the context, **fullness** stands for the **fullness** of divinity, or everything that characterizes God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clear that **fullness** refers to the **fullness** of God. Alternate translation: “the full divinity of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) COL 1 20 qweh ἀποκαταλλάξαι 1 through the blood of his cross This verse continues the sentence from the previous verse, so **to reconcile** continues the same verb from there, “was pleased,” along with its implied subject, God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could repeat that subject and verb here. Alternate translation: “God the Father was pleased to reconcile” -COL 1 20 cf2d τὰ πάντα 1 through the blood of his cross Here, **all things** includes everything that God created, including people. If **all things** would be misunderstood in your language, you could be more specific. Alternate translation: “all things and all people” +COL 1 20 cf2d τὰ πάντα 1 through the blood of his cross Here, **all {things}** includes everything that God created, including people. If **all {things}** would be misunderstood in your language, you could be more specific. Alternate translation: “all things and all people” COL 1 20 c3qd figs-abstractnouns εἰρηνοποιήσας 1 through the blood of his cross If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **peace**, you can express this idea in another way. Alternate translation: “having made things right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 1 20 as3p figs-possession τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ σταυροῦ αὐτοῦ 1 through the blood of his cross Paul uses the possessive form to describe **blood** characterized by **his cross**, which is the location where the blood was shed. If your language does not use this form to express that idea, you can make the relationship between the two words clearer with a short phrase such as “shed on.” Alternate translation: “the blood shed on his cross.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) COL 1 20 x5av figs-metonymy τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ σταυροῦ αὐτοῦ 1 the blood of his cross Here, **blood** stands for the death of Christ on the cross. If the meaning of **blood** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable word that stands for death or express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “his death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -COL 1 20 mbra figs-infostructure τὰ πάντα εἰς αὐτόν…εἴτε τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, εἴτε τὰ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 The last part of this verse (**whether the things on the earth or the things in the heavens**) describes **all things**, found near the beginning of the verse. If your language does not separate a description from the thing it describes, you can move the description next to **all things**. Alternate translation: “all things, whether the things on the earth or the things in the heavens, to himself” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure) +COL 1 20 mbra figs-infostructure τὰ πάντα εἰς αὐτόν…εἴτε τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, εἴτε τὰ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 The last part of this verse (**whether the things on the earth or the things in the heavens**) describes **all {things}**, found near the beginning of the verse. If your language does not separate a description from the thing it describes, you can move the description next to **all {things}**. Alternate translation: “all things, whether the things on the earth or the things in the heavens, to himself” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure) COL 1 20 quxc figs-merism εἴτε τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, εἴτε τὰ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Paul refers to the **things on the earth** and **the things in the heavens** to include them and everything in between, that is, everything in all of creation. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the idea in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “everything in the whole creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) COL 1 21 kv5u grammar-connect-time-sequential ποτε 1 Connecting Statement: The phrase **At one time** does not refer to one specific instance in time when the Colossians were alienated from God. Instead, it refers to all the time before they believed in Jesus. If **At one time** would be misunderstood in your language, you could clarify what **time** Paul is referring to. Alternate translation: “During the time before you believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) COL 1 21 wp3t figs-activepassive ὄντας ἀπηλλοτριωμένους 1 alienated If your language does not use this passive form, you can describe the Colossians’ state with an active form. Alternate translation: “did not want a relationship with God” or “were people who did not want to be near God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ COL 3 13 p474 figs-abstractnouns πρός…ἔχῃ μομφήν 1 may have a c COL 3 13 lp1o figs-infostructure καθὼς καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἐχαρίσατο ὑμῖν, οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 may have a complaint against If your language would put the comparison after the command, you could switch them in your translation, including “forgive” in the new first clause. Alternate translation: “you should forgive others, just as the Lord forgave you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) COL 3 13 lkdl figs-simile καθὼς καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἐχαρίσατο ὑμῖν 1 may have a complaint against Here Paul draws a comparison between how he wants the Colossians to forgive and how Jesus has forgiven them. Use a word or phrase that would normally be used for comparing things that are similar. Alternate translation: “in the same way that the Lord forgave you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) COL 3 13 l0kr figs-ellipsis οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 may have a complaint against Paul leaves out words that could be needed in some languages to make a complete statement. If your language needs these words, you could supply words such as “forgive one another.” Alternate translation: “so also you should forgive each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -COL 3 14 l1ik figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πᾶσιν δὲ τούτοις, τὴν ἀγάπην 1 love, which is the bond of perfection Here Paul speaks as if **love** is higher than, or **above**, all the things he has said. By this, he means that **love** is more important than **all these things**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly with a word such as “important” or “essential.” Alternate translation: “But what is most essential is love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +COL 3 14 l1ik figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πᾶσιν δὲ τούτοις, τὴν ἀγάπην 1 love, which is the bond of perfection Here Paul speaks as if **love** is higher than, or **above**, all the things he has said. By this, he means that **love** is more important than **all these {things}**. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly with a word such as “important” or “essential.” Alternate translation: “But what is most essential is love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) COL 3 14 mlfc figs-ellipsis τὴν ἀγάπην 1 love, which is the bond of perfection Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. If your language would include more words, you could insert the words that Paul implies, which can be found in [3:12](../03/12.md): “put on.” Alternate translation: “put on love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) COL 3 14 c5o7 figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀγάπην 1 love, which is the bond of perfection If your language does not use an abstract noun to express the idea behind **love**, you can express the idea by using a verb. If your language requires you to specify who the Colossians are supposed to “love,” you can clarify that Paul has other believers in mind first, but he is also thinking of God. Alternate translation: “love one another” or “love each other and God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) COL 3 14 x5g8 figs-metaphor ὅ ἐστιν σύνδεσμος τῆς τελειότητος 1 love, which is the bond of perfection Here, **the bond of perfection** is a metaphor for something that brings people together in perfect unity. This could refer to (1) the perfect unity in community that Paul wishes for believers. Alternate translation: “which brings you together in perfect unity” (2) the perfect unity that love brings to all Christian virtues. Alternate translation: “which brings all these virtues together to perfection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ COL 3 19 n9dm figs-explicit τὰς γυναῖκας 1 do not be embittered aga COL 3 19 lc4a translate-unknown μὴ πικραίνεσθε πρὸς 1 do not be embittered against The phrase **be embittered** could refer to (1) the husband doing or saying things that cause his wife to be bitter or upset with him. Alternate translation: “do not do what makes them bitter against you” (2) the husband becoming bitter or upside with his wife for doing or saying certain things. Alternate translation: “do not become bitter against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 3 20 mlu2 τὰ τέκνα 1 do not be embittered against Here Paul directly addresses the **Children** in the audience. Use a form in your language that indicates that the speaker is singling out a specific group of people as the intended audience of the following words. Alternate translation: “You children” COL 3 20 imh3 figs-explicit τοῖς γονεῦσιν 1 do not be embittered against Here Paul does not explicitly state that children must **obey** “their own” parents. However, Paul writes this sentence in such a way that the Colossians would have understood him to mean this. The ULT includes **{your}** because this is an essential part of what Paul is saying. Use a form in your language that specifies that Paul has each child’s parents in mind. Alternate translation: “your own parents” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -COL 3 20 gu2o figs-idiom κατὰ πάντα 1 do not be embittered against The phrase **in all things** is an idiom that indicates that children should obey “everything their parents command” or “in every situation.” If **in all things** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or indicate what the **things** are. Alternate translation: “in everything they tell you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +COL 3 20 gu2o figs-idiom κατὰ πάντα 1 do not be embittered against The phrase **in all {things}** is an idiom that indicates that children should obey “everything their parents command” or “in every situation.” If **in all {things}** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or indicate what the **{things}** are. Alternate translation: “in everything they tell you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 20 kadq grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 do not be embittered against The word **for** introduces the basis or reason for somethin; here it is Paul’s command to children. Use a word that indicates the reason for a command in your language. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) COL 3 20 vbad translate-unknown εὐάρεστόν ἐστιν 1 do not be embittered against If something **is pleasing**, that means that the person it “pleases” finds that thing acceptable, agreeable, or pleasant. If **is pleasing** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a word that emphasizes that obedience to parents is something that is acceptable to God. Alternate translation: “is acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 3 20 vps1 figs-explicit εὐάρεστόν 1 do not be embittered against Paul does not state to whom obedience to parents is **pleasing**, but it is clear that it pleases God. If your language would state who is pleased, you could expressly state that it is God. Alternate translation: “pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -453,7 +453,7 @@ COL 3 21 bjk2 translate-unknown ἀθυμῶσιν 1 do not provoke your childre COL 3 22 lf6k οἱ δοῦλοι 1 all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers Here Paul directly addresses the **Slaves** in the audience. Use a form in your language that indicates that the speaker is singling out a specific group of people as the intended audience of the following words. Alternate translation: “You slaves” COL 3 22 cx6a figs-idiom τοῖς κατὰ σάρκα κυρίοις 1 obey your masters according to the flesh The phrase **according to the flesh** describes the **masters** as humans on this earth. Paul uses this phrase to describe these **masters** because he is already setting up a contrast with the “Master” over these masters: Jesus (see [4:1](../04/01.md)). If **according to the flesh** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea with an adjective such as “human” or “earthly.” Alternate translation: “your earthly masters” or “your human masters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 22 o6mi figs-explicit τοῖς…κυρίοις 1 obey your masters according to the flesh Here Paul does not explicitly state that slaves must **obey** “their own” masters. However, Paul writes this sentence in such a way that the Colossians would have understood him to mean this. The ULT includes **{your}** because this is an essential part of what Paul is saying. Use a form in your language that specifies that Paul has each slave’s master in mind. Alternate translation: “your own masters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -COL 3 22 iy1n figs-idiom κατὰ πάντα 1 all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers Just as in [3:20](../03/20.md), the phrase **in all things** is an idiom that indicates that slaves should obey “everything their masters command” or “in every situation.” If **in all things** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or indicate what the **things** are. Alternate translation: “in everything they tell you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +COL 3 22 iy1n figs-idiom κατὰ πάντα 1 all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers Just as in [3:20](../03/20.md), the phrase **in all {things}** is an idiom that indicates that slaves should obey “everything their masters command” or “in every situation.” If **in all {things}** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or indicate what the **{things}** are. Alternate translation: “in everything they tell you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 22 p36t translate-unknown μὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοδουλεία 1 all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers The word **eyeservice** describes how people sometimes behave to look good more than to do the right thing. If **eyeservice** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable expression or a short phrase such as “wanting to look impressive.” Alternate translation: “not focusing on how you appear to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 3 22 b5en translate-unknown ὡς ἀνθρωπάρεσκοι 1 all things, not with eyeservice as people pleasers The phrase **people pleasers** describes the kind of people who care about “eyeservice.” Here, **people pleasers** are those who focus on impressing humans rather than doing what God desires. If these words would be misunderstood in your language, you could emphasize that **people pleasers** want to please humans only, not God. Alternate translation: “as people who want to please humans rather than God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) COL 3 22 r22m figs-possession ἐν ἁπλότητι καρδίας 1 with sincerity of heart Paul here uses the possessive form to describe a **heart** that is characterized by its **sincerity**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could express the idea by translating **sincerity** with an adjective such as “sincere.” Alternate translation: “with a sincere heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) diff --git a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv index 160bdccba1..6e452bd83e 100644 --- a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 10 u3fl grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 abound Here, **But** indicates that what follows are numerous exhortations. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “However” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 4 11 h2df figs-metonymy καὶ φιλοτιμεῖσθαι, ἡσυχάζειν καὶ πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια, καὶ ἐργάζεσθαι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν ὑμῶν 1 to strive Paul is describing peaceful communal living by using this combination of ideas. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “and seek to lovingly honor others: by living quietly and tending to your own business and focusing on doing your own work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 4 11 d2fg καὶ φιλοτιμεῖσθαι, ἡσυχάζειν 1 to strive These phrases continue the apostles’ exhortations. Here, the phrases translated **and to strive to live quietly** could refer to: (1) phrases that complement each other. Alternate translation: “and to aspire to live quietly” (2) phrases that express separate ideas. Alternate translation: “and seek to lovingly honor others, to live quietly,” Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this. -1TH 4 11 j4c7 figs-explicit πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια 1 to live quietly Here, **to perform your own things** implies that the Thessalonian church should tend to their own concerns. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to tend to your own business” or “to focus on your own tasks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 4 11 j4c7 figs-explicit πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια 1 to live quietly Here, **to perform your own {things}** implies that the Thessalonian church should tend to their own concerns. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to tend to your own business” or “to focus on your own tasks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 4 11 jmt9 figs-idiom ἐργάζεσθαι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν ὑμῶν 1 to perform your own things Here, **to work with your own hands** is an idiom meaning “earn what you need to live.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to work hard to earn what you need” or “to labor to pay for your expenses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 4 11 bz8s figs-distinguish καθὼς ὑμῖν παρηγγείλαμεν 1 to work with your own hands This phrase and the following verse signal the end of this larger section of teaching about how to live in Christian community (See [4:1,2](../04/01.md) for the same wording). Here, **just as we commanded** also expresses that what the apostles teach is the same as being “taught by God” (See [4:9](../04/09.md)). If this would not be understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation as a new sentence: “This is what we already commanded you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1TH 4 12 wj25 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 you may walk properly Here, **so that** could introduce a purpose clause. Paul could be stating the purpose for the apostles’ exhortation in [4:10](../04/10.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) @@ -465,8 +465,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 5 20 iv1n figs-litotes μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 Do not despise prophecies Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Readily accept” or “Cherish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1TH 5 20 rrza figs-parallelism προφητείας μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 Do not despise prophecies The two phrases in [5:19–20](../05/19.md) could refer to the same thing. Paul could be saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to correct how the Thessalonian church viewed prophecy. He means that the Holy Spirit is the source of true prophecy (See [2 Peter 1:21](2pet/01/21.md)), so they should not “quench the Spirit” by rejecting all prophecies. You could use a natural way in your language to emphasize this. Alternate translation: “Do not continue to despise prophetic messages from the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1TH 5 21 ihzh figs-metaphor πάντα δοκιμάζετε; τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 Test all things This could mean: (1) Paul is beginning a general list of things that the Thessalonians should **Test** and **Hold fast** if they are **good**. (2) Paul is continuing to refer to the prophesies in the previous verse, and he wants the Thessalonians to **Test** those and **Hold fast** to the prophesies that are truly from God. -1TH 5 21 wx69 figs-metaphor πάντα δοκιμάζετε 1 Test all things Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians could make **all things** pass a test. This could mean: (1) they should examine everything they hear and do to make sure it conforms to what honors God. Alternate translation: “Carefully examine everything you hear and do” (2) they should examine and approve prophecies to determine whether or not they are genuinely from the Holy Spirit (See [2:4](../02/04.md) for a similar context)). Alternate translation: “examine and approve all prophecies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 21 sjh0 figs-nominaladj πάντα 1 Test all things Here, **all things** is an adjectival phrase. Depending on whether you decided this is a new list or a continuation of verse 20, this could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “everything you hear and do” (2) Alternate translation: “all prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +1TH 5 21 wx69 figs-metaphor πάντα δοκιμάζετε 1 Test all things Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians could make **all {things}** pass a test. This could mean: (1) they should examine everything they hear and do to make sure it conforms to what honors God. Alternate translation: “Carefully examine everything you hear and do” (2) they should examine and approve prophecies to determine whether or not they are genuinely from the Holy Spirit (See [2:4](../02/04.md) for a similar context)). Alternate translation: “examine and approve all prophecies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 21 sjh0 figs-nominaladj πάντα 1 Test all things Here, **all {things}** is an adjectival phrase. Depending on whether you decided this is a new list or a continuation of verse 20, this could mean: (1) Alternate translation: “everything you hear and do” (2) Alternate translation: “all prophesies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1TH 5 21 n1jv figs-metaphor τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 Test all things Paul speaks of **good** things as if they were objects that someone could hold tightly in his hands. He means that the Thessalonian church should only believe and practice things that prove to be from the Holy Spirit. If your readers would not understand what it means to **hold fast to what {is} good** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Keep only the valid things” or “Retain what is from the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 21 jska figs-ellipsis τὸ καλὸν 1 Test all things A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1TH 5 22 z9k0 figs-personification παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ 1 Test all things Here, **evil** is spoken of as though it were a person who could be seen. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “anything clearly wicked” or “all that is obviously evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index 845e31fa06..abd575fed5 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 1 11 p014 translate-unknown κῆρυξ 1 a herald A **herald** is someone who is sent out to announce a message. If your language does not have a similar term and your readers would not know what a **herald** is, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a messenger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 2TI 1 11 p015 figs-metaphor κῆρυξ 1 a herald Paul compares himself to a **herald** because God has sent him out to announce the gospel message. Alternate translation: “a preacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 12 j37g δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν 1 for which reason Paul provides the **reason** for his suffering by referring back to his status as an apostle. Alternate translation: “because I am an apostle” -2TI 1 12 y8l4 figs-explicit καὶ ταῦτα πάσχω 1 I also suffer also these things Paul does not mention the specific **things** that he is **suffering**, but from the context of the letter, the implication is that he is referring to suffering as a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I also suffer as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2TI 1 12 y8l4 figs-explicit καὶ ταῦτα πάσχω 1 I also suffer also these things Paul does not mention the specific **{things}** that he is **suffering**, but from the context of the letter, the implication is that he is referring to suffering as a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I also suffer as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 1 12 td39 πέπεισμαι 1 I am certain Paul expresses that he is certain that God will make everything right in the end. Alternate translation: “I am sure” 2TI 1 12 p6pi figs-metaphor τὴν παραθήκην μου φυλάξαι 1 to guard my deposit Paul is using a metaphor of a person leaving something with another person who is supposed to protect it until he gives it back to the first person. The two people involved are Jesus and Paul, but it is not clear which one is holding the **deposit**. This could mean: (1) Paul is trusting Jesus to keep something safe that Paul has entrusted to Jesus. This could be Paul’s own life, or, more specifically, that Paul would remain faithful to Jesus all of his life. Alternate translation: “to keep me faithful to him” (2) Paul is trusting Jesus to preserve the good news that Jesus has deposited with Paul for Paul to preach. Alternate translation: “to help me keep preaching his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 12 hhu5 figs-possession τὴν παραθήκην μου 1 my deposit The term **my** here conveys the idea that this **deposit** is associated with Paul in some way. The particular association depends on what we consider the deposit to be. This could mean: (1) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is Paul’s own life or Paul’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “my faithfulness to him” (2) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is the gospel message that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “the gospel message that he has entrusted to me to preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index dc6bfbe7ed..77b63758c8 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ JAS 2 16 lj89 θερμαίνεσθε 1 warm yourself Alternate translation: “ JAS 2 16 ngj8 figs-activepassive χορτάζεσθε 1 be satisfied If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an equivalent expression that uses an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “have enough food to satisfy you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 2 16 j134 figs-hypo δὲ 1 but James is continuing to describe the hypothetical situation that he is using to teach. Alternate translation: “but also suppose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) JAS 2 16 j135 writing-pronouns μὴ δῶτε 1 you do not give At the beginning of this verse, James speaks in the third-person singular of **one of you**. But he now speaks of believers generally in the second-person plural, saying **you**, to indicate how the community as a whole might respond to this situation. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use the third-person singular here as well. Alternate translation: “he does not give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JAS 2 16 j136 figs-nominaladj τὰ ἐπιτήδεια 1 the necessary things James is using the adjective **necessary** in the plural as a noun. (ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the things that are necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +JAS 2 16 j136 figs-nominaladj τὰ ἐπιτήδεια 1 the necessary things James is using the adjective **necessary** in the plural as a noun. (ULT adds **{things}** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the things that are necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 2 16 n5jh figs-metonymy τοῦ σώματος 1 for the body James is speaking of meeting physical needs that also have an emotional and spiritual dimension by association with the way that these are needs of the human **body**. Alternate translation: “for people to be warm and well-fed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 2 16 yi63 figs-rquestion τί τὸ ὄφελος? 1 what would be the profit? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement or an exclamation. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “that does no good!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 2 16 j137 figs-hypo τί τὸ ὄφελος? 1 what would be the profit? This is the result of the hypothetical situation that James has been using to teach. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Then that does no good!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ JAS 3 5 wt6i figs-simile οὕτως καὶ 1 Thus also James uses the words ** JAS 3 5 j189 μικρὸν μέλος 1 a small member Alternate translation: “a part of the body” JAS 3 5 j190 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 2 but Here, **but** introduces a contrast between the small size of the tongue and the great things that people use their tongues in speech to boast about. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) JAS 3 5 j191 figs-personification μεγάλα αὐχεῖ 1 it boasts great things James is saying that the **tongue** is a living thing that **boasts**. Alternate translation: “with it people boast great things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -JAS 3 5 qx1k figs-nominaladj μεγάλα αὐχεῖ 1 it boasts great things James is using the adjective **great** in the plural as a noun. (ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “with it people boast that they have done great things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +JAS 3 5 qx1k figs-nominaladj μεγάλα αὐχεῖ 1 it boasts great things James is using the adjective **great** in the plural as a noun. (ULT adds **{things}** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “with it people boast that they have done great things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 3 5 ub5h figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. Alternate translation: “Consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 5 j192 figs-explicit ἰδοὺ 1 Behold The implication is that James is offering his readers a further analogy. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Consider as a further example” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 3 5 fr8x translate-unknown ἡλίκον πῦρ, ἡλίκην ὕλην ἀνάπτει 1 how small a fire kindles so large a forest A **forest** is a place where there are many trees. If your readers would not be familiar with what a **forest** is, you could use a different illustration that would be familiar to them of an area that could be destroyed by fire, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “how a small fire can quickly spread and burn much grassland” or “how a small fire can quickly spread and burn everything in a large area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 06b13ac576..d8be469f2d 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 12 hi9u figs-activepassive ἃ νῦν ἀνηγγέλη ὑμῖν, διὰ τῶν εὐαγγελισαμένων ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which those who proclaimed the gospel to you have now declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 1 12 c7jz figs-explicit Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, ἀποσταλέντι ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ 1 This phrase indicates the means by which the evangelists proclaimed the gospel to Peter’s readers. Peter uses **the Holy Spirit** here to refer specifically to the Holy Spirit’s work of giving those evangelists the ability or power to proclaim the gospel effectively. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit sent from heaven enabling them to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 12 yzqk figs-activepassive ἀποσταλέντι ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 1 12 lyzl figs-explicit εἰς ἃ 1 Here, **things** refers to what God had revealed to the prophets and some evangelists had proclaimed to Peter’s readers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “into which things God revealed to the prophets and which were declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 1 12 lyzl figs-explicit εἰς ἃ 1 Here, **{things}** refers to what God had revealed to the prophets and some evangelists had proclaimed to Peter’s readers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “into which things God revealed to the prophets and which were declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 12 xi4d figs-metaphor εἰς ἃ ἐπιθυμοῦσιν ἄγγελοι παρακύψαι 1 into which things angels long to look Peter uses **look** to refer to getting a clearer understanding of what God has revealed about salvation. This does not mean that the angels do not understand salvation at all. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “things which angels desire to understand more clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 13 bjg9 grammar-connect-words-phrases διὸ 1 So **Therefore** here refers back to everything that Peter has written in [verses 1–12](../01/01.md). If it might be helpful to your readers, you could state this concisely. Alternate translation: “Since all these things I have just written are true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1PE 1 13 zvgh figs-declarative ἀναζωσάμενοι τὰς ὀσφύας τῆς διανοίας ὑμῶν, νήφοντες, τελείως ἐλπίσατε 1 The clauses **having girded up the loins of your mind** and **being sober** could indicate: (1) two commands in addition to the command to **hope fully** that occurs in the next phrase. Alternate translation: “gird up the loins of your mind, be sober, hope fully” (2) two actions that are means by which Peter wants his readers to obey the command to **hope fully**. Alternate translation: “hope fully, by having girded up the loins of your mind and by being sober” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 4 6 s72f figs-metonymy σαρκὶ 1 they were judged in the flesh according to men Here Peter uses **in the flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. See how you translated this expression in [verse 2](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 4 6 encm figs-explicit ζῶσι 1 Here, **live** refers to experiencing eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might experience eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 6 h154 figs-explicit ζῶσι…πνεύματι 1 Here, **the spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which the people received eternal life. Alternate translation: “they might live by the Spirit” (2) their spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is contrasted with the physical realm mentioned earlier in the verse with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “they might live spiritually” or “they might live in the spiritual realm” See how you translated the same expression in [3:18](../03/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 4 7 e445 figs-explicit πάντων…τὸ τέλος 1 the end of all things Here, **the end of all things** refers to the end of the world, when Jesus returns and judges everyone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the end of the world, when Jesus returns,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 4 7 e445 figs-explicit πάντων…τὸ τέλος 1 the end of all things Here, **the end of all {things}** refers to the end of the world, when Jesus returns and judges everyone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the end of the world, when Jesus returns,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 7 qs1t figs-metaphor ἤγγικεν 1 has come near Peter uses **has come near** to refer to something that will happen soon. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will soon happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 4 7 ubd4 figs-doublet σωφρονήσατε…καὶ νήψατε 1 be of sound mind, and be sober The words translated as **sound mind** and **sober** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses them to emphasize the need to think clearly since the end of the world is near. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “be completely clearheaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 4 7 k5hh figs-metaphor νήψατε 1 be sober See how you translated **sober** in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 0f433360fd..e23f66e032 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 20 ygag figs-metaphor πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες 1 Here, Peter speaks of people who seem to have been believers but have returned to living sinfully as if they have become **entangled** in a net. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “if they have begun to live sinfully again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 20 noa9 writing-pronouns τούτοις 1 Here, the pronoun **these {things}** refers to “the defilements of the world.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could specify this in your translation. Alternate translation: “by these defilements of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 20 d6ra writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md) and discussed in [2:12–19](../02/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2PE 2 20 d42g figs-nominaladj γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 the last has become worse for them than the first Here, the adjectives **last** and **first** function as nouns. They are plural, and ULT supplies the noun **things** in each case to show that. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you can supply a more specific singular noun. Alternate translation: “the final condition for them is worse than their original condition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +2PE 2 20 d42g figs-nominaladj γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 the last has become worse for them than the first Here, the adjectives **last** and **first** function as nouns. They are plural, and ULT supplies the noun **{things}** in each case to show that. If your language does not use adjectives in this way, you can supply a more specific singular noun. Alternate translation: “the final condition for them is worse than their original condition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 2PE 2 21 x7gd grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates the reason why the last condition of the false teachers was worse than their first condition, as mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “This is so because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 2 21 e3dv writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 21 xg05 figs-possession τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **the way** that is characterized by **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase to explain it. Alternate translation: “the righteous way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 3 4 u54w figs-explicit τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **his coming** refers to the return of the Lord Jesus to earth. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the return of Jesus to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 3 4 xfkr figs-metaphor ἀφ’ ἧς γὰρ οἱ πατέρες ἐκοιμήθησαν 1 Here, **the fathers** is used. It could refer to: (1) the Old Testament ancestors of the Israelites, often called “the patriarchs.” Alternate translation: “For since Israel’s patriarchs fell asleep” (2) those leaders of the first generation of Christians who had died by the time Peter wrote this letter. Alternate translation: “For since the first Christian leaders fell asleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 3 4 t6hl figs-euphemism οἱ πατέρες ἐκοιμήθησαν 1 the fathers fell asleep Here, **fell asleep** is a euphemism meaning they died. You could either use a similar euphemism for death in your language or say this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the fathers died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -2PE 3 4 c2en figs-hyperbole πάντα οὕτως διαμένει ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως 1 all things continue in the same way from the beginning of creation Here, **all things** is an exaggeration the mockers use to argue that nothing in the world has ever changed, so it cannot be true that Jesus will return. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +2PE 3 4 c2en figs-hyperbole πάντα οὕτως διαμένει ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως 1 all things continue in the same way from the beginning of creation Here, **all {things}** is an exaggeration the mockers use to argue that nothing in the world has ever changed, so it cannot be true that Jesus will return. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 2PE 3 4 yue7 figs-abstractnouns ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως 1 from the beginning of creation If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **creation** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “since God created the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 3 5 g2ph figs-activepassive λανθάνει γὰρ αὐτοὺς τοῦτο, θέλοντας 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For they willingly hide this from themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 3 5 xgsy figs-ellipsis θέλοντας ὅτι οὐρανοὶ ἦσαν ἔκπαλαι 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “that the heavens existed long ago by the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) diff --git a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv index 1839925a09..4edb3d4cf5 100644 --- a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 3 21 j221 figs-abstractnouns παρρησίαν ἔχομεν πρὸς τὸν Θεόν 1 we have confidence toward God If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **confidence** with an adverb such as “confidently.” Alternate translation: “we can pray to God confidently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 3 22 j222 figs-explicit ὅτι τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ τηροῦμεν, καὶ τὰ ἀρεστὰ ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ ποιοῦμεν 1 because we keep his commandments and we do the pleasing things before him John is not saying that we **receive** **whatever we ask** in return for obeying God’s commandments and doing what pleases him. Our obedience does not obligate God to give us what we ask for. Our obedience is simply what God has a right to expect from us. Rather, the word **because** reaches back to the statement earlier in this sentence, in the previous verse, that “we have confidence toward God,” that is, we can pray to God confidently. Living in obedience and doing what pleases God gives us confidence to ask for things according to his will. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly by starting a new sentence here that refers back to that statement and explains how John’s statement in this verse relates to it. Alternate translation: “We can pray confidently like this because we obey God’s commandments and do what pleases him, and that assures us that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 3 22 j223 figs-idiom τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ τηροῦμεν 1 we keep his commandments As in [2:3](../02/03.md), the word **keep** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “we obey his commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1JN 3 22 j224 figs-nominaladj τὰ ἀρεστὰ ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ 1 we do the pleasing things before him John is using the adjective **pleasing** as a noun. ULT adds **things** to show this. (The word is plural.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that please him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +1JN 3 22 j224 figs-nominaladj τὰ ἀρεστὰ ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ 1 we do the pleasing things before him John is using the adjective **pleasing** as a noun. ULT adds **{things}** to show this. (The word is plural.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that please him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1JN 3 22 p3ga figs-metaphor τὰ ἀρεστὰ ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ 1 the pleasing things before him The word **before** means “in front of” or “in the presence of” another person. In this case, **before him** indicates “in God’s sight.” Seeing, for its part, represents attention and judgment. So this means the things that God regards as pleasing. Alternate translation: “the things that please him” or “what God considers to be good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 23 irb3 writing-pronouns αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ 1 this is his commandment … as he gave us commandment The pronoun **his** refers to God in this verse. Alternate translation: “this is what God has commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 3 23 j225 figs-metonymy τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of his Son Jesus Christ As in [2:12](../02/12.md), John is using the **name** of Jesus to represent who Jesus is and what he has done. Alternate translation: “in Jesus Christ his Son and what he has done for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) diff --git a/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv b/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv index a71de3a6a2..8b32f70cac 100644 --- a/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv +++ b/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ JUD 1 16 z5bn figs-metaphor πορευόμενοι 1 Here Jude uses **going** t JUD 1 16 jhrq τὰς ἐπιθυμίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, **lusts** refers to sinful desires that are opposed to God’s will. Alternate translation: “their sinful desires” JUD 1 16 xum2 τὸ στόμα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ 1 Here Jude uses the singular **mouth** in a distributive way. If this would be confusing to your readers, you could express this explicitly or use a plural noun and verb. Alternate translation: “the mouth of each of them speaks” or “their mouths speak” JUD 1 16 xuf0 figs-metonymy τὸ στόμα αὐτῶν λαλεῖ 1 their mouth speaks Here, **mouth** represents the person who is speaking. Alternate translation: “they speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JUD 1 16 eaf2 λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα 1 speaks boastful things Here, **boastful things** refers to arrogant statements about themselves that these false teachers were making. Alternate translation: “boasts about themselves” or “speaks boastful statements” +JUD 1 16 eaf2 λαλεῖ ὑπέρογκα 1 speaks boastful things Here, **boastful {things}** refers to arrogant statements about themselves that these false teachers were making. Alternate translation: “boasts about themselves” or “speaks boastful statements” JUD 1 16 w3ma figs-idiom θαυμάζοντες πρόσωπα 1 This is an idiom that means to show favoritism toward someone or to flatter someone. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “favoring people” or “flattering people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JUD 1 16 j8rh figs-metonymy θαυμάζοντες πρόσωπα 1 Here, **faces** refers to the people they are flattering. Alternate translation: “admiring people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JUD 1 17 vpgz figs-explicit ἀγαπητοί 1 Here, **beloved ones** refers to those whom Jude is writing to, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this term explicitly. See how you translated this in verse [3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From f94308fc498dad25d8b6d87deaba25797ac38231 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 17:43:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 339/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 6b773ce082..b83c921573 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -132,6 +132,7 @@ GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases is making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner, Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner, Titus, to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 j5ka figs-metaphor παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι 1 The false brothers came in secretly Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers with the intent of observing what Paul and the other believers were doing. By using this metaphor Paul means that these people had bad motives for wanting to observe the believers. If your readers would not understand what **spy on** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “people who pretended to be Christians, who came into our midst in order to watch us closely,” or “people who said they were Christians but were not, who came into our group to view closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 4 jx0q παρεισάκτους 1 In the language that Paul wrote this letter in the phrase **brought in** could mean: (1) that these **false brothers** were invited in by someone. Alternate translation: “secretly invited” or (2) that they came into the midst of the believers by their own initiative. Alternate translation: “deceptive coming of” GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 251f391d9352788cf342e739caa451fcbff74835 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 17:49:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 340/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index e23f66e032..75c279ca11 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -291,8 +291,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 14 sbp2 figs-abstractnouns καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας ἔχοντες 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **covetousness** with a verb. Alternate translation: “having training their hearts to covet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 14 sv4r figs-idiom κατάρας τέκνα 1 Peter is using a Hebrew idiom in which a person is said to be a “child” of the thing that characterizes that person. Here **children of cursing** refers to people who are cursed by God. He is not speaking of people who curse others. Alternate translation: “accursed people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2PE 2 14 c7cc figs-exclamations κατάρας τέκνα 1 These words are an exclamation that emphasizes the wickedness of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “They are such cursed children!” or “What cursed children they are!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) -2PE 2 15 et62 figs-metaphor καταλειπόντες εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν 1 abandoning the right way, led astray, having followed Peter uses the metaphor **Abandoning the straight way** to give an image of walkers leaving a certain pathway. He speaks of the false teachers refusing to live their lives in obedience to the Lord as if they had stopped walking on the Lord’s path. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “refusing to live in obedience to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2PE 2 15 ky5q figs-idiom εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν 1 the right way Here, **the straight way** refers to the way of living life that is right and pleasing to the Lord. Peter may also be using it here to refer specifically to the Christian faith, similar to his use of “the way of truth” in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “the right way of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2PE 2 15 et62 figs-metaphor καταλειπόντες εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν 1 abandoning the right way, led astray, having followed Peter uses the metaphor **Abandoning {the} straight way** to give an image of walkers leaving a certain pathway. He speaks of the false teachers refusing to live their lives in obedience to the Lord as if they had stopped walking on the Lord’s path. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “refusing to live in obedience to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2PE 2 15 ky5q figs-idiom εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν 1 the right way Here, **{the} straight way** refers to the way of living life that is right and pleasing to the Lord. Peter may also be using it here to refer specifically to the Christian faith, similar to his use of “the way of truth” in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “the right way of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2PE 2 15 x3k9 figs-metaphor ἐπλανήθησαν 1 Here, Peter continues the path metaphor from the previous clause. He describes the wicked lifestyles of the false teachers as if they had been **led astray** from the straight path. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “they have been behaving wickedly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 15 b39g figs-activepassive ἐπλανήθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “they went astray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 2 15 xkt6 figs-explicit ἐξακολουθήσαντες τῇ ὁδῷ τοῦ Βαλαὰμ τοῦ Βοσὸρ, ὃς μισθὸν ἀδικίας ἠγάπησεν 1 In this verse, Peter compares the false teachers to **Balaam**. Peter assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to a story recorded in the Old Testament book of Numbers. In that story, Balaam was hired by wicked kings to curse the Israelites. When God did not allow Balaam to do so, he used wicked women to seduce the Israelites into sexual immorality and idol worship so that God would punish them for their disobedience. Balaam did these wicked things because he wanted to be paid by the wicked kings, but he was eventually killed by the Israelites when they conquered the land of Canaan. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation, as a statement: “following the way of Balaam son of Bosor, who loved the wages of unrighteousness so much that he led the Israelites into immorality and idolatry in order to receive money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 644e4d920fca0622221b17224f4bf4da1038998b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 17:50:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 341/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 75c279ca11..39505934b6 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 16 x7zu figs-explicit ἰδίας παρανομίας 1 This **transgression** specifically refers to Balaam’s use of wicked women to lead the Israelites into sexual immorality and idolatry. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for his wicked act of leading the Israelites into immorality” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 16 xspp figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ προφήτου παραφρονίαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **irrationality** with an adjective like “irrational” or “foolish.” Alternate translation: “the irrational action of the prophet” or “the foolish action of the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 16 tf38 figs-explicit ἐκώλυσεν τὴν τοῦ προφήτου παραφρονίαν 1 restrained the madness of the prophet Here, **the prophet** refers to Balaam. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “restrained the madness of the prophet Balaam” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2PE 2 17 x5rj writing-pronouns οὗτοί 1 **These men** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2PE 2 17 x5rj writing-pronouns οὗτοί 1 **These {men}** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “These false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 17 t137 figs-metaphor οὗτοί εἰσιν πηγαὶ ἄνυδροι 1 These men are springs without water Peter speaks of the false teachers to describe their uselessness. People expect **springs** to provide water to quench thirst, but **waterless springs** leave thirsty people disappointed. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative way or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternate translation: “These men are disappointing, like springs without water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 17 hzu1 figs-metaphor ὁμίχλαι ὑπὸ λαίλαπος ἐλαυνόμεναι 1 mists driven by a storm Peter gives a second figurative description of the uselessness of the false teachers. When people see storm clouds, they expect rain to fall. When the winds from the **storm** blow the clouds away before the rain can fall, the people are disappointed. In the same way, false teachers, although they promise many things, are unable to do what they promise. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this in a non-figurative way, or turn the metaphor into a simile. Alternate translation: “they never give what they promise” or “they are disappointing like rain clouds that the storm drives away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 17 von6 figs-doublet οὗτοί εἰσιν πηγαὶ ἄνυδροι, καὶ ὁμίχλαι ὑπὸ λαίλαπος ἐλαυνόμεναι 1 mists driven by a storm These two metaphors mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by translating them with a single expression. Alternate translation: “These are men who surely never give what they promise” or “These are men who surely disappoint” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) From 3ae0a6440470d14b7fc04d4057c5c7255346257a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 17:52:41 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 342/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 39505934b6..c27dd1185c 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 21 j7s6 figs-genericnoun τῆς…ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 2 Peter uses **the holy commandment** to speak of the commands of God in general. He is not referring to one specific **commandment**. These commands were **delivered** by the apostles to the believers. Alternate translation: “the holy commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 2PE 2 21 xwid figs-abstractnouns τῆς…ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 2 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract noun **commandment** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what God commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 21 blr5 figs-activepassive τῆς παραδοθείσης αὐτοῖς ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 1 the holy commandment delivered to them If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “the holy commandment that the apostles delivered to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2PE 2 22 hqr3 writing-pronouns συμβέβηκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ τῆς ἀληθοῦς παροιμίας 1 This has happened to them according to the true proverb Here, **This** refers to the **proverb** Peter states later in this verse. It does not refer back to a statement from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “What this true proverb says has happened to them” or “This true proverb describes what happened to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2PE 2 22 hqr3 writing-pronouns συμβέβηκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ τῆς ἀληθοῦς παροιμίας 1 This has happened to them according to the true proverb Here, **{This}** refers to the **proverb** Peter states later in this verse. It does not refer back to a statement from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “What this true proverb says has happened to them” or “This true proverb describes what happened to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 22 pc36 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 This has happened to them according to the true proverb Here, the pronoun **them** refers to the false teachers introduced in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to these false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 22 h42r writing-proverbs κύων ἐπιστρέψας ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα, καί, ὗς λουσαμένη, εἰς κυλισμὸν βορβόρου 1 A dog returns to its own vomit, and a washed pig to wallowing in the mud Peter uses two proverbs to illustrate what the false teachers have done. These proverbs make a figurative comparison: Just as a dog returns to eat its own vomit and a washed pig rolls in the mud again, so these false teachers, who once stopped living a sinful life, have now gone back to living sinfully. Although they knew “the way of righteousness,” they went back to doing the things that defile them morally and spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning by translating these proverbs as similes. Alternate translation: “They are like dogs that eat their own vomit or like clean pigs that go back to rolling in the mud.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) 2PE 2 22 xgjp translate-unknown κύων 1 A **dog** is an animal that is considered to be unclean and disgusting by Jews and many cultures of the Ancient Near East. Therefore, calling someone a **dog** was an insult. If dogs are unfamiliar to your culture and you have a different animal that is considered unclean and disgusting or whose name is used as an insult, you could use the name of this animal instead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) From ecfafea49abdcec05376de9171645d9041629758 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 17:57:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 343/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index c27dd1185c..74b975fe4e 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 22 h42r writing-proverbs κύων ἐπιστρέψας ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα, καί, ὗς λουσαμένη, εἰς κυλισμὸν βορβόρου 1 A dog returns to its own vomit, and a washed pig to wallowing in the mud Peter uses two proverbs to illustrate what the false teachers have done. These proverbs make a figurative comparison: Just as a dog returns to eat its own vomit and a washed pig rolls in the mud again, so these false teachers, who once stopped living a sinful life, have now gone back to living sinfully. Although they knew “the way of righteousness,” they went back to doing the things that defile them morally and spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning by translating these proverbs as similes. Alternate translation: “They are like dogs that eat their own vomit or like clean pigs that go back to rolling in the mud.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) 2PE 2 22 xgjp translate-unknown κύων 1 A **dog** is an animal that is considered to be unclean and disgusting by Jews and many cultures of the Ancient Near East. Therefore, calling someone a **dog** was an insult. If dogs are unfamiliar to your culture and you have a different animal that is considered unclean and disgusting or whose name is used as an insult, you could use the name of this animal instead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 2PE 2 22 xycp translate-unknown ὗς 1 A **pig** is an animal that is considered to be unclean and disgusting by Jews and many cultures of the Ancient Near East. Therefore, calling someone a **pig** was an insult. If pigs are unfamiliar to your culture and you have a different animal that is considered unclean and disgusting or whose name is used as an insult, you could use the name of this animal instead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -2PE 3 intro c1id 0 # 2 Peter 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Reminder that Jesus will return at the right time (3:1–13)
2. Concluding exhortation to live godly lives (3:14–17)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fire

People often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore, when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, that action is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])

### Day of the Lord

The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared at all times for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +2PE 3 intro c1id 0 # 2 Peter 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n1. Reminder that Jesus will return at the right time (3:1–13)\n2. Concluding exhortation to live godly lives (3:14–17)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Fire\n\nPeople often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore, when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, that action is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])\n\n### Day of the Lord\n\nThe exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared at all times for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 2PE 3 1 n92f figs-explicit ἀγαπητοί 1 **Beloved ones** refers here to those to whom Peter is writing, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this term explicitly. Alternate translation: “Beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 3 1 aah9 writing-pronouns ἐν αἷς 1 Here, **which** refers to both this letter and the previous letter that Peter had written to this group of believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could start a new sentence to say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In both of these letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 3 1 gc3m figs-metaphor διεγείρω ὑμῶν ἐν ὑπομνήσει τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν 1 I am stirring up your sincere mind Here, Peter uses **arouse**, as if the minds of his readers are asleep, to refer to causing his readers to think about these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this with a non-figurative expression. See how you translated this term in [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “to remind your sincere mind of these things so that you will think about them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 3 4 yue7 figs-abstractnouns ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως 1 from the beginning of creation If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **creation** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “since God created the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 3 5 g2ph figs-activepassive λανθάνει γὰρ αὐτοὺς τοῦτο, θέλοντας 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For they willingly hide this from themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 3 5 xgsy figs-ellipsis θέλοντας ὅτι οὐρανοὶ ἦσαν ἔκπαλαι 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that this clause would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “that the heavens existed long ago by the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2PE 3 5 mku9 figs-activepassive γῆ…συνεστῶσα τῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ λόγῳ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the word of God formed the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +2PE 3 5 mku9 figs-activepassive γῆ ἐξ ὕδατος καὶ δι’ ὕδατος συνεστῶσα τῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ λόγῳ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the word of God formed the earth out of water and through water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 3 5 s77f ἐξ ὕδατος καὶ δι’ ὕδατος συνεστῶσα 1 had been formed from water and through water This clause refers to God causing the land to come up **out of** and **through** the **water**, gathering the bodies of water together to make the land appear. 2PE 3 5 o7sz figs-metonymy τῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ λόγῳ 1 Here, **the word of God** refers to the God’s specific commands by which the earth was created. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “by the commands of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2PE 3 6 jh4r writing-pronouns δι’ ὧν 1 through which Here, **which** refers both to God’s word and water. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “through the word of God and water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From fd3dc5a61cdeef9cfad7cd1dbd8576815247b65b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 18:00:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 344/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 74b975fe4e..692fa75648 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 3 7 y3gg figs-abstractnouns ἡμέραν κρίσεως καὶ ἀπωλείας τῶν ἀσεβῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **judgment** and **destruction** by stating the ideas behind them with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “the day when God judges mankind and destroys the ungodly men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 3 7 zxxk figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀσεβῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “of the ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2PE 3 8 s5cy ἓν…τοῦτο μὴ λανθανέτω ὑμᾶς 1 Alternate translation: “do not fail to understand this one fact” or “do not ignore this one thing” -2PE 3 8 enh9 ὅτι μία ἡμέρα παρὰ Κυρίῳ ὡς χίλια ἔτη 1 that one day with the Lord is like a thousand years Here, **with the Lord** means “in the judgment of the Lord.” Alternate translation: “that from the Lord’s point of view, one day is like a thousand years” +2PE 3 8 enh9 ὅτι μία ἡμέρα παρὰ Κυρίῳ ὡς χίλια ἔτη 1 that one day with the Lord is like a thousand years Here, **with {the} Lord** means “in the judgment of the Lord.” Alternate translation: “that from the Lord’s point of view, one day is like a thousand years” 2PE 3 8 o1wc figs-doublet μία ἡμέρα παρὰ Κυρίῳ ὡς χίλια ἔτη, καὶ χίλια ἔτη ὡς ἡμέρα μία 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that God does not perceive of time the same way that humans do. What might seem to be a short or long time for people would not seem so for God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “one day and 1,000 years are alike for the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2PE 3 9 zv9m figs-metonymy οὐ βραδύνει Κύριος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here, **promise** refers to the fulfillment of the **promise** that Jesus will return. See how you translated it in [3:4](../03/04.md). Alternate translation: “The Lord does not delay to fulfill his promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2PE 3 9 dzq8 figs-explicit ὥς τινες βραδύτητα ἡγοῦνται 1 as some consider slowness Here, **some** refers to the “mockers” introduced in [3:3](../03/03.md) and anyone else who believed that the Lord is slow to fulfill his promises, because Jesus had not yet returned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as some, such as these mockers, consider slowness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From a0cfe250656ecaaf41ec6cb3dd32bb7649b962aa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 18:05:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 345/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 692fa75648..8b3c77b21a 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 3 12 b73o writing-pronouns δι’ ἣν 1 Here, **which** refers to “the day of God” from the previous clause. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of that day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 3 12 ko6c πυρούμενοι 1 This phrase indicates the means by which the heavens will be destroyed. Alternate translation: “by means of being set on fire” 2PE 3 12 rq9g figs-activepassive οὐρανοὶ πυρούμενοι, λυθήσονται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form and say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy the heavens with fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2PE 3 12 v15i στοιχεῖα…τήκεται 1 the elements Here, **elements** could refer to: (1) the basic elements that make up the natural universe. Alternate translation: “the components of nature will be destroyed” (2) the heavenly bodies, such as the sun, moon, and stars. Alternate translation: “the heavenly bodies will be destroyed” See how you translated this in [3:10](../03/10.md). +2PE 3 12 v15i στοιχεῖα καυσούμενα, τήκεται 1 the elements Here, **elements** could refer to: (1) the basic elements that make up the natural universe. Alternate translation: “the components of nature will be destroyed by heat” (2) the heavenly bodies, such as the sun, moon, and stars. Alternate translation: “the heavenly bodies will be destroyed by heat” See how you translated this in [3:10](../03/10.md). 2PE 3 12 i1ry καυσούμενα 1 the elements This phrase indicates the means by which the heavens will be destroyed. Alternate translation: “by means of being burned up by heat” 2PE 3 13 ptmy figs-infostructure καινοὺς…οὐρανοὺς καὶ γῆν καινὴν, κατὰ τὸ ἐπάγγελμα αὐτοῦ προσδοκῶμεν 1 Peter put the direct object of the main verb at the front of this sentence for emphasis. If your language uses a similar construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to have it here in your translation. But if this construction would be confusing in your language, you could express this emphasis in another way and change the structure of the sentence. Alternate translation: “according to his promise, we are waiting for new heavens and a new earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 2PE 3 13 r2y9 writing-pronouns κατὰ τὸ ἐπάγγελμα αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the pronoun **his** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “according to God’s promise” (2) Jesus. Alternate translation: “according to Jesus’ promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From ca81e29081e2f3923a27da7b5d7624817e6b061e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 18:23:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 346/446] Edit 'en_tn_62-2PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 8b3c77b21a..10308c9ea7 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 3 16 sg60 figs-explicit ὡς καὶ τὰς λοιπὰς Γραφὰς 1 Here, **the other scriptures** refers to both the entire Old Testament and the New Testament texts that had been written by the time Peter wrote this letter. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “as also the other authoritative scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 3 16 sh4j grammar-connect-logic-result πρὸς τὴν ἰδίαν αὐτῶν ἀπώλειαν 1 to their own destruction Here, **to** indicates that this clause provides the result of the “ignorant and unstable ones” falsely interpreting the scriptures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “resulting in their own destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 3 16 wrqu figs-abstractnouns πρὸς τὴν ἰδίαν αὐτῶν ἀπώλειαν 1 to their own destruction If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “so that they will be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 3 17 kn3d grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Connecting Statement: Here, Peter uses **therefore** to introduce a description of what his readers should do as a result of what he has said, which could be: (1) the destruction of those who falsely interpret the scriptures mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Because those who falsely interpret the Scriptures will be destroyed” (2) the previous content of the entire letter, especially the sure destruction of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “Because of all these things I have told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +2PE 3 17 kn3d grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Connecting Statement: Here, Peter uses **Therefore** to introduce a description of what his readers should do as a result of what he has said, which could be: (1) the destruction of those who falsely interpret the scriptures mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Because those who falsely interpret the Scriptures will be destroyed” (2) the previous content of the entire letter, especially the sure destruction of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “Because of all these things I have told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 3 17 wk5v figs-explicit ἀγαπητοί 1 Here, **beloved ones** refers to those whom Peter is writing to, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. See how you translated this in [3:1](../03/01.md) and [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 3 17 bq8o grammar-connect-logic-result προγινώσκοντες 1 Connecting Statement: Here, Peter is giving the reason why his readers should heed his command in the next phrase. Alternate translation: “since you know beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 3 17 w3sp figs-metaphor ἵνα μὴ…ἐκπέσητε τοῦ ἰδίου στηριγμοῦ 1 you might not lose your own steadfastness Here, Peter speaks of **steadfastness** as if it were a possession that believers could **lose**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “so that you might not stop being steadfast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -475,4 +475,4 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 3 18 qlbc figs-abstractnouns γνώσει 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **knowledge** by translating it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “what you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 3 18 z13o figs-possession τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος 1 Here, **our Lord** means “the person who is lord over us” or “the person who rules over us.” The conjunction and indicates that our also applies to **Savior**, meaning “the person who saves us.” If you include both of these phrases in your translation, then you will also need to put a comma at the end of the second phrase. Alternate translation: “of the person who rules over us and saves us,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2PE 3 18 bpnr figs-abstractnouns αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **glory** by translating it with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “May everyone glorify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 3 18 u1g9 figs-idiom εἰς ἡμέραν αἰῶνος 1 Here, **to the day of the age** is an idiom that means “forever.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to eternity” or “forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2PE 3 18 u1g9 figs-idiom εἰς ἡμέραν αἰῶνος 1 Here, **to {the} day of {the} age** is an idiom that means “forever.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to eternity” or “forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From 08236ef877b6c0fe6e955ccd3b1feb427dd44087 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 14:29:52 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 347/446] Fix format of 2 Peter --- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 16 ++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 10308c9ea7..247abf8b03 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 5 x74i figs-ellipsis ἐν δὲ τῇ ἀρετῇ τὴν γνῶσιν 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in your goodness, knowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2PE 1 5 r61t figs-abstractnouns τὴν γνῶσιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **knowledge** using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “knowing more about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 1 6 anfs figs-ellipsis ἐν δὲ τῇ γνώσει τὴν ἐνκράτειαν 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in knowledge, self-control” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2PE 1 6 anfa figs-abstractnouns τῇ γνώσει 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **knowledge** by translating it using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “knowing more about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2PE 1 6 anfa figs-abstractnouns τῇ γνώσει 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **knowledge** by translating it using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “knowing more about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 1 6 s5ni figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐνκράτειαν…τῇ ἐνκρατείᾳ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **self-control** with a verbal phrase in both occurrences in this verse. Alternate translation: “controlling yourself … controlling yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 1 6 wloy figs-ellipsis ἐν δὲ τῇ ἐνκρατείᾳ τὴν ὑπομονήν 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and supply in self-control, endurance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2PE 1 6 ajag figs-abstractnouns τὴν ὑπομονήν…τῇ ὑπομονῇ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **endurance** with a verbal phrase in both occurrences in this verse. Alternate translation: “enduring hardship … enduring hardship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 21 x2hv figs-gendernotations θελήματι ἀνθρώπου 1 Peter is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “by human desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2PE 1 21 mh2s figs-metaphor ὑπὸ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου φερόμενοι, ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 1 men spoke from God being carried along by the Holy Spirit Peter speaks of the **Holy Spirit** helping the prophets to write what God wanted them to write as if the Holy Spirit **carried** them from one place to another. Alternate translation: “men spoke from God by the Holy Spirit directing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 1 21 x1xw figs-ellipsis ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 In this phrase, Peter is leaving out a word that it would need in many languages in order to be complete. If this word is required in your language, it can be supplied from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “spoke prophecy from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2PE 2 intro mv79 0 # 2 Peter 2 General Notes


## Structure and formatting


1. Prediction of false teachers (2:1–3)
1. Examples of divine judgment (2:4–10a)
1. Description and denunciation of false teachers (2:10b–22)

Peter continues this letter in [2:1–3](../02/01.md) by predicting that false teachers will try to deceive the believers, just as false prophets did during the time true prophets were writing the Old Testament. Then in [2:4–10a](../02/04.md) Peter describes examples of God punishing those who acted similarly to the coming false teachers. Peter then closes this section in [2:10b–22](../02/10.md) by describing the wicked character and deeds of these false teachers.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh

“Flesh” is a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. It is not the physical part of man that is sinful. “Flesh” represents the human nature that rejects all things godly and desires what is sinful. This is the condition of all humans before they receive the Holy Spirit by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### Implicit information

There are several analogies in [2:4–8](../02/04.md) that are difficult to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. Further explanation may be necessary. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2PE 2 intro mv79 0 # 2 Peter 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Prediction of false teachers (2:1–3)
1. Examples of divine judgment (2:4–10a)
1. Description and denunciation of false teachers (2:10b–22)

Peter continues this letter in [2:1–3](../02/01.md) by predicting that false teachers will try to deceive the believers, just as false prophets did during the time true prophets were writing the Old Testament. Then in [2:4–10a](../02/04.md) Peter describes examples of God punishing those who acted similarly to the coming false teachers. Peter then closes this section in [2:10b–22](../02/10.md) by describing the wicked character and deeds of these false teachers.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh

“Flesh” is a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. It is not the physical part of man that is sinful. “Flesh” represents the human nature that rejects all things godly and desires what is sinful. This is the condition of all humans before they receive the Holy Spirit by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### Implicit information

There are several analogies in [2:4–8](../02/04.md) that are difficult to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. Further explanation may be necessary. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 1 us8u grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 The term translated **Now** could refer to: (1) a new topic expressed by **Now** in the ULT. (2) a contrast between the false prophets in this clause and the true Old Testament prophets mentioned in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “But” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 2PE 2 1 l2cg figs-explicit ἐν τῷ λαῷ 1 false prophets also came to the people, as false teachers will also come to you Here, **the people** refers specifically to the Israelites. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 1 tbz8 translate-unknown αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας 1 destructive heresies Here, **heresies** refers to opinions that are contrary to the teaching of Christ and the apostles. Alternate translation: “opinions of destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 3 jvh9 figs-personification τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 Peter speaks of **condemnation** and **destruction** as if they are people who can be **idle** or **sleep**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “condemnation from long ago is not ineffective, and their destruction is not delayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2PE 2 3 c57u figs-abstractnouns οἷς τὸ κρίμα ἔκπαλαι οὐκ ἀργεῖ, καὶ ἡ ἀπώλεια αὐτῶν οὐ νυστάζει 1 their condemnation has not been idle, and their destruction is not asleep If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns “condemnation” and “destruction” by stating the ideas behind them with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “they are not idly condemned from long ago, and they will not be destroyed too late” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 4 k2g4 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 **For** indicates here that Peter is giving the reason for the result he implicitly described in the previous verse. He is saying why the destruction of the false teachers is certain. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -2PE 2 4 s115 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **if** indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since God did not spare the angels who had sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +2PE 2 4 s115 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **if** indicates the beginning of a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since God did not spare the angels who had sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 2PE 2 4 pr13 οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 did not spare Here, **spare** means “to refrain from punishing.” Alternate translation: “did not refrain from punishing” 2PE 2 4 dzi2 figs-distinguish ἀγγέλων ἁμαρτησάντων 1 Peter uses **who had sinned** to distinguish the angels who were punished by God from those that were not. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 2PE 2 4 xwxn translate-textvariants σειροῖς ζόφου 1 Some of the best ancient manuscripts read “pits” instead of “chains.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading in the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) @@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 4 plhp figs-abstractnouns εἰς κρίσιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **judgment** by translating it with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “to be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 4 e0ue figs-explicit εἰς κρίσιν τηρουμένους 1 This phrase refers to the sinful angels mentioned earlier in the verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “those sinful angels who are being kept for judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 4 ppvc figs-activepassive εἰς κρίσιν τηρουμένους 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active verbal form and you can indicate who is doing the action. Alternate translation: “those whom God is keeping for judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2PE 2 5 zx4k grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the second condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +2PE 2 5 zx4k grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the second condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 2PE 2 5 hpv7 figs-metonymy ἀρχαίου κόσμου οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 he did not spare the ancient world Here, **world** refers to the people who lived in it. Alternate translation: “he did not spare the people who lived in the ancient times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2PE 2 5 f000 οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 As in [2:4](../02/04.md), the word **spare** here means “to refrain from punishing.” Alternate translation: “did not refrain from punishing” 2PE 2 5 t2w9 writing-pronouns οὐκ ἐφείσατο 1 Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “God did not spare” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 5 xy9u figs-possession δικαιοσύνης κήρυκα 1 Peter could be using the possessive form to refer to: (1) a preacher who is characterized by righteousness. Alternate translation: “a preacher who is righteous” (2) a preacher who tells others to live righteously. Alternate translation: “one who urged others to live righteously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2PE 2 5 enbs κατακλυσμὸν κόσμῳ ἀσεβῶν ἐπάξας 1 This clause indicates when God protected Noah and his other seven family members, when he **brought a flood upon {the} world**, as it is translated in the UST. 2PE 2 5 z814 figs-possession κόσμῳ ἀσεβῶν 1 Peter could be using the possessive form to refer to: (1) the human content of the ancient world. Alternate translation: “the world that contained ungodly people” (2) the world as being characterized by ungodliness. Alternate translation: “the ungodly world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -2PE 2 6 xhcb grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the third condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +2PE 2 6 xhcb grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the third condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 2PE 2 6 ap1j figs-infostructure καὶ πόλεις Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας τεφρώσας καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν 1 If it would be natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “and he condemned the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to destruction, having reduced them to ashes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 2PE 2 6 gp3e πόλεις Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας τεφρώσας 1 having reduced the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to ashes This phrase indicates the means by which God destroyed **Sodom and Gomorrah**. Alternate translation: “by means of reducing the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah to ashes” 2PE 2 6 xi0n translate-names Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρας 1 **Sodom** and **Gomorrah** are the names of two cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 6 w1b9 figs-abstractnouns καταστροφῇ κατέκρινεν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **destruction** by translating the idea behind it with an verb, such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “he condemned them to be destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 6 hgt7 grammar-connect-logic-result ὑπόδειγμα μελλόντων ἀσεβέσιν τεθεικώς 1 an example of what is going to happen to the ungodly This clause indicates the result of what happened in the previous clauses of the verse. God’s destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah resulted in them being an **example** and a warning of what happens to others who disobey God. Alternate translation: “with the result that God set them as an example of the things that will happen to the ungodly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2PE 2 6 eocy figs-genericnoun ἀσεβέσιν 1 Here, **ungodly** refers to wicked people in general, not to one specific wicked person. Alternate translation: “to an ungodly person” or “to ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -2PE 2 7 fm1p grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the fourth condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +2PE 2 7 fm1p grammar-connect-condition-fact καὶ 1 Connecting Statement: Here, **and** indicates the beginning of the fourth condition in a conditional sentence that extends from [2:4](../02/04.md) to [2:10](../02/10.md). Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 2PE 2 7 zif8 writing-pronouns ἐρύσατο 1 the behavior of the lawless in their sensuality Here, **he** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “God rescued” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 2 7 xjq6 translate-names Λὼτ 1 Connecting Statement: **Lot** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2PE 2 7 uknf figs-distinguish καταπονούμενον ὑπὸ τῆς τῶν ἀθέσμων ἐν ἀσελγείᾳ ἀναστροφῆς 1 Connecting Statement: This clause is giving more information about **Lot**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could begin a new sentence here to clarify this. Alternate translation: “He was being oppressed by the behavior of the lawless ones in licentiousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 19 b79v figs-metaphor ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 For by what someone has been overcome, by this he has been enslaved Peter speaks of a person as being **enslaved** when anything has control over that person, he speaks of that thing as the master of that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this plainly or as a simile. Alternate translation: “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes controlled by that thing” or “For if a person is overpowered by something, that person becomes like a slave to that thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 19 xqmy figs-activepassive ᾧ γάρ τις ἥττηται, τούτῳ δεδούλωται 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive sentence with an active form. Alternate translation: “For if something overpowers a person, that thing enslaves that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 2 20 v3xc γὰρ 1 Here, **For** could refer to: (1) another explanation of Peter’s statement “themselves being slaves of destruction” in the previous verse, (2) a transition from what Peter said in the previous verse to what he is going to say in this verse. Here, **For** does not indicate the reason or result of what was said in the previous verse. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “And” -2PE 2 20 q96i grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου, ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τούτοις δὲ πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται, γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “they have escaped the impurities of the world through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, but having become entangled and overcome by them again, the last has become worse for them than the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +2PE 2 20 q96i grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου, ἐν ἐπιγνώσει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν καὶ Σωτῆρος, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τούτοις δὲ πάλιν ἐμπλακέντες ἡττῶνται, γέγονεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ἔσχατα χείρονα τῶν πρώτων 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “they have escaped the impurities of the world through the knowledge of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ, but having become entangled and overcome by them again, the last has become worse for them than the first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 2PE 2 20 efnj figs-metaphor εἰ…ἀποφυγόντες τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 Using a similar metaphor to that in [2:18](../02/18.md), here Peter speaks of believers as if they had been slaves to the **defilements** of the world and have **escaped** that captivity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative manner. Alternate translation: “if they have ceased living in the defiling manner of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 20 xpo9 figs-abstractnouns τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **defilements** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the things that sinful human society does to defile itself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2PE 2 20 lu22 figs-metonymy τὰ μιάσματα τοῦ κόσμου 1 the impurities of the world Here, the **world** refers to human society, which has been corrupted by sin. Alternate translation: “the defiling practices of sinful human society” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 22 h42r writing-proverbs κύων ἐπιστρέψας ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα, καί, ὗς λουσαμένη, εἰς κυλισμὸν βορβόρου 1 A dog returns to its own vomit, and a washed pig to wallowing in the mud Peter uses two proverbs to illustrate what the false teachers have done. These proverbs make a figurative comparison: Just as a dog returns to eat its own vomit and a washed pig rolls in the mud again, so these false teachers, who once stopped living a sinful life, have now gone back to living sinfully. Although they knew “the way of righteousness,” they went back to doing the things that defile them morally and spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning by translating these proverbs as similes. Alternate translation: “They are like dogs that eat their own vomit or like clean pigs that go back to rolling in the mud.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) 2PE 2 22 xgjp translate-unknown κύων 1 A **dog** is an animal that is considered to be unclean and disgusting by Jews and many cultures of the Ancient Near East. Therefore, calling someone a **dog** was an insult. If dogs are unfamiliar to your culture and you have a different animal that is considered unclean and disgusting or whose name is used as an insult, you could use the name of this animal instead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 2PE 2 22 xycp translate-unknown ὗς 1 A **pig** is an animal that is considered to be unclean and disgusting by Jews and many cultures of the Ancient Near East. Therefore, calling someone a **pig** was an insult. If pigs are unfamiliar to your culture and you have a different animal that is considered unclean and disgusting or whose name is used as an insult, you could use the name of this animal instead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -2PE 3 intro c1id 0 # 2 Peter 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n1. Reminder that Jesus will return at the right time (3:1–13)\n2. Concluding exhortation to live godly lives (3:14–17)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Fire\n\nPeople often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore, when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, that action is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])\n\n### Day of the Lord\n\nThe exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared at all times for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +2PE 3 intro c1id 0 # 2 Peter 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Reminder that Jesus will return at the right time (3:1–13)
2. Concluding exhortation to live godly lives (3:14–17)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fire

People often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore, when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, that action is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])

### Day of the Lord

The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared at all times for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 2PE 3 1 n92f figs-explicit ἀγαπητοί 1 **Beloved ones** refers here to those to whom Peter is writing, which can be extended to all believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this term explicitly. Alternate translation: “Beloved fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 3 1 aah9 writing-pronouns ἐν αἷς 1 Here, **which** refers to both this letter and the previous letter that Peter had written to this group of believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could start a new sentence to say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “In both of these letters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2PE 3 1 gc3m figs-metaphor διεγείρω ὑμῶν ἐν ὑπομνήσει τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν 1 I am stirring up your sincere mind Here, Peter uses **arouse**, as if the minds of his readers are asleep, to refer to causing his readers to think about these things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this metaphor by translating this with a non-figurative expression. See how you translated this term in [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “to remind your sincere mind of these things so that you will think about them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From ae6ee76d5c3dd8dbe134ecb49ba80d3e491566a3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 14:32:06 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 348/446] Added missing "think" in some NT notes --- en_tn_43-LUK.tsv | 12 ++++++------ en_tn_44-JHN.tsv | 24 ++++++++++++------------ en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 32 ++++++++++++++++---------------- en_tn_53-1TH.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_54-2TH.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_58-PHM.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 6 +++--- en_tn_63-1JN.tsv | 10 +++++----- 8 files changed, 45 insertions(+), 45 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv index 3c4ab63edc..6470163901 100644 --- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv @@ -1869,7 +1869,7 @@ LUK 11 12 r52w figs-rquestion ἢ καὶ αἰτήσει ᾠόν, ἐπιδώσ LUK 11 12 l658 figs-hypo ἢ καὶ αἰτήσει ᾠόν, ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ σκορπίον? 1 Or also he will ask for an egg, he will give him a scorpion? Jesus is also using a hypothetical situation to teach. You could translate his words that way. Alternate translation: “Or suppose a son asked for an egg to eat. His father would not give him a scorpion instead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 11 12 e8hr translate-unknown σκορπίον 1 scorpion A **scorpion** is a small animal related to the spider. It has two claws and a poisonous stinger in its tail. If your readers would not be familiar with scorpions, you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a poisonous stinging animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 11 12 ls05 figs-explicit σκορπίον 1 a scorpion In this culture, people did not eat scorpions. So Jesus is saying that a father would not give a son something the son could not eat if the son asked for something that he could eat. If people do eat scorpions in your culture, you could use the name of something that they do not eat, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “something he cannot eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 11 13 g99r grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ὑμεῖς πονηροὶ ὑπάρχοντες, οἴδατε 1 if you who are evil know Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you who are evil know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +LUK 11 13 g99r grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ὑμεῖς πονηροὶ ὑπάρχοντες, οἴδατε 1 if you who are evil know Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you who are evil know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) LUK 11 13 aww7 figs-rquestion πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὁ Πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, δώσει Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον τοῖς αἰτοῦσιν αὐτόν? 1 how much more will the Father who is from heaven give the Holy Spirit to those who ask him? Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or exclamation. Alternate translation: “your Heavenly Father will even more certainly give the Holy Spirit to those who ask him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 11 14 uyu1 grammar-connect-time-background καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to begin relating a new event by introducing background information that will help readers understand what happens. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 11 14 afa8 figs-explicit ἦν ἐκβάλλων δαιμόνιον κωφόν 1 he was driving out a mute demon The **demon** itself was not unable to speak. Rather, it was preventing the man whom it was controlling from speaking. Alternate translation: “Jesus was driving out a demon that was causing a man to be unable to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1899,7 +1899,7 @@ LUK 11 19 l668 figs-explicit εἰ δὲ ἐγὼ ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ LUK 11 19 l669 translate-names Βεελζεβοὺλ 1 Beelzebul See how you translated the name **Beelzebul** in [11:15](../11/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 11 19 l670 figs-metaphor οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν 1 your sons Here, Jesus uses the word **sons** to mean “followers.” Alternate translation: “your followers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 19 bs8x figs-explicit αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν κριταὶ ἔσονται 1 they will be your judges If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the implications of this statement more explicitly. Alternate translation: “your own followers will say that you are wrong for claiming that I make demons leave people by using the power of Beelzebul, because they know that they are not using that power themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 11 20 l671 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ, ἐγὼ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 if I drive out the demons by the finger of God, then the kingdom of God has come to you Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “So I must be making demons leave people by the power of God. This shows that the kingdom of God has come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +LUK 11 20 l671 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ, ἐγὼ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 if I drive out the demons by the finger of God, then the kingdom of God has come to you Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “So I must be making demons leave people by the power of God. This shows that the kingdom of God has come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) LUK 11 20 y643 figs-metonymy ἐν δακτύλῳ Θεοῦ 1 the finger of God This phrase refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “by the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 11 20 ja3u figs-abstractnouns ἔφθασεν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the kingdom of God has come to you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” This could mean: (1) the kingdom of God has arrived in this place, that is, its activities are happening here. Alternate translation: “God is ruling in this area” (2) the kingdom of God has arrived in time, that is, it already beginning. Alternate translation: “God is beginning to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 11 21 e4d1 figs-parables ὅταν ὁ ἰσχυρὸς καθωπλισμένος 1 When the strong man who is fully armed To help the people in the crowd understand what he has been teaching, Jesus tells a brief story that provides an illustration. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told the crowd this story to help them understand. ‘When a strong man who has all his weapons’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) @@ -2161,7 +2161,7 @@ LUK 12 27 l781 λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, οὐδὲ Σολομὼν 1 But I sa LUK 12 27 nug5 figs-abstractnouns Σολομὼν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ 1 Solomon in all his glory The abstract noun **glory** could mean: (1) “Solomon, who had great wealth.” (2) “Solomon, who wore beautiful clothes.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 12 27 l782 translate-names Σολομὼν 1 Solomon **Solomon** is the name of a man, a great king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 12 28 rur9 figs-metaphor εἰ…ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει 1 if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven Jesus speaks of God making the wild plants beautiful as if God were putting beautiful clothing on them. Alternate translation: “if God makes the wild plants beautiful like this, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 12 28 l783 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει 1 if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it must be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since God makes the wild plants so beautiful, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +LUK 12 28 l783 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον, ὁ Θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέζει 1 if God so clothes the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven Jesus speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it must be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since God makes the wild plants so beautiful, even though they are alive today and are thrown into the oven tomorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) LUK 12 28 l784 figs-explicit ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον 1 the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven While Jesus uses a term that typically means **grass**, in this context he must implicitly mean wild plants in general, since he is referring back to the wild lilies he has just mentioned. So you could express this with a general term in your translation. Alternate translation: “the wild plants, which are alive today and tomorrow are thrown into the oven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 12 28 l785 translate-unknown ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον 1 the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven It would be particularly appropriate to use a general term in your translation if your readers would not know what **grass** is. Alternate translation: “the wild plants, which are alive today and tomorrow are thrown into the oven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 12 28 t9am figs-activepassive ἐν ἀγρῷ τὸν χόρτον ὄντα σήμερον, καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον 1 the grass in the field, which exists today and tomorrow is thrown into the oven If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who does the action. Alternate translation: “the grass in the field, which exists today, but tomorrow someone throws it into an oven” or, if you decided to say “plants,” “the wild plants, which exist today, but tomorrow someone throws them into an oven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2879,7 +2879,7 @@ LUK 16 30 m097 figs-explicit οὐχί 1 No The rich man uses this word to indic LUK 16 30 d84a figs-hypo ἐάν τις ἀπὸ νεκρῶν πορευθῇ πρὸς αὐτοὺς, μετανοήσουσιν 1 if someone would go to them from the dead, they will repent The rich man is describing a hypothetical situation that he would like to happen. Alternate translation: “suppose someone who had died went and warned them. Then they would repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 16 30 m098 figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead The rich man is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from among the people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 16 31 abcl figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ, εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται 1 But he said to him, ‘If they do not hear Moses and the prophets, neither will they be persuaded if someone would rise from the dead’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But Abraham told the rich man that if his brothers would not obey the teaching of Moses and the prophets, then they would not change their ways even if someone who had died came back to life and warned them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 16 31 n9s4 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται 1 If they do not listen to Moses and the prophets, neither will they be persuaded if someone should rise from the dead Abraham is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Abraham is saying is not actually the case, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since they will not obey the teaching of Moses and the prophets, a dead person who came back to life would not be able to convince them either” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +LUK 16 31 n9s4 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται 1 If they do not listen to Moses and the prophets, neither will they be persuaded if someone should rise from the dead Abraham is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Abraham is saying is not actually the case, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since they will not obey the teaching of Moses and the prophets, a dead person who came back to life would not be able to convince them either” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) LUK 16 31 m099 figs-idiom εἰ Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν 1 If they do not listen to Moses and the prophets The term **listen to** is an idiom that means “obey.” See how you translated this idiom in [16:29](../16/29.md). Alternate translation: “If they will not obey what Moses and the prophets have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 16 31 xkr7 figs-metonymy Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 Moses and the prophets Abraham is using the names of the authors of the biblical books to refer to their writings. Alternate translation: “what Moses and the prophets have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 16 31 m100 figs-merism Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 Moses and the prophets Abraham is referring to all of God’s Word that had been written up to that time. He is using two of its major collections of writings to do so. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) @@ -3078,7 +3078,7 @@ LUK 18 3 kj2l figs-imperative ἐκδίκησόν με ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀντ LUK 18 3 xc7k translate-unknown τοῦ ἀντιδίκου μου 1 my opponent The term **opponent** refers specifically to the opposing party in a lawsuit. It is not clear whether the widow is suing the man to protect her interests, or the man is suing the widow to try to take things from her unfairly. If your language has a specific term for a legal adversary, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 18 4 m197 μετὰ ταῦτα 1 after these things Alternate translation: “later on” or “eventually” LUK 18 4 m198 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, εἰ καὶ τὸν Θεὸν οὐ φοβοῦμαι οὐδὲ ἄνθρωπον ἐντρέπομαι 1 he said to himself, ‘Even if I do not fear God or respect man’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he decided that even though he did not make his decisions based on what God wanted or on what other people thought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -LUK 18 4 m199 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ τὸν Θεὸν οὐ φοβοῦμαι οὐδὲ ἄνθρωπον ἐντρέπομαι 1 Even if I do not fear God or respect man The judge speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what the judge is saying is not actually the case, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Even though I do not make my decisions based on what God wants or on what other people think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +LUK 18 4 m199 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ τὸν Θεὸν οὐ φοβοῦμαι οὐδὲ ἄνθρωπον ἐντρέπομαι 1 Even if I do not fear God or respect man The judge speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what the judge is saying is not actually the case, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Even though I do not make my decisions based on what God wants or on what other people think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) LUK 18 4 bh3q figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 men The judge is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) LUK 18 5 m200 figs-quotesinquotes διά γε τὸ παρέχειν μοι κόπον τὴν χήραν ταύτην, ἐκδικήσω αὐτήν, ἵνα μὴ εἰς τέλος ἐρχομένη ὑπωπιάζῃ με 1 yet because this widow causes me trouble, I will vindicate her, so that she will not beat me up by coming to the end If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation (continuing the sentence from the previous verse): “because this widow bothered him, he would give a fair ruling in her case, so that she would not wear him out by coming incessantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 18 5 v9uu παρέχειν μοι κόπον 1 causes me trouble Alternate translation: “bothers me” @@ -3249,7 +3249,7 @@ LUK 19 8 m267 translate-symaction σταθεὶς 1 stood At a relaxed meal such LUK 19 8 s46z τὸν Κύριον 1 the Lord Here Luke refers to Jesus by the respectful title **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” LUK 19 8 m268 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Zacchaeus uses **behold** to get Jesus to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “Please listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 19 8 m269 Κύριε 1 Lord Zacchaeus is addressing Jesus directly by a respectful title. It would be appropriate to represent the title with the corresponding term in your language and culture, rather than using the name “Jesus.” -LUK 19 8 m270 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ τινός τι ἐσυκοφάντησα, ἀποδίδωμι τετραπλοῦν 1 if I have defrauded anything from anyone, I will restore four-fold Zacchaeus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He is inviting anyone he has cheated to come to him for restitution. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Zacchaeus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “I know that I have cheated many people out of their money, and I promise to pay each one back four times as much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +LUK 19 8 m270 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ τινός τι ἐσυκοφάντησα, ἀποδίδωμι τετραπλοῦν 1 if I have defrauded anything from anyone, I will restore four-fold Zacchaeus speaks as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He is inviting anyone he has cheated to come to him for restitution. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Zacchaeus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “I know that I have cheated many people out of their money, and I promise to pay each one back four times as much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) LUK 19 8 u2bt ἀποδίδωμι τετραπλοῦν 1 I will restore four-fold Alternate translation: “I will return to them four times as much as I took from them” LUK 19 9 m271 figs-explicit εἶπεν δὲ πρὸς αὐτὸν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 Then Jesus said to him Jesus spoke not just to Zacchaeus but also to the people from the crowd who were complaining that he had gone to visit him. In this culture, people were allowed to stand around the walls of the banquet room in a private home and listen to what an invited guest was saying. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Then Jesus said to Zacchaeus and to the people from the crowd who were standing around the room” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 19 9 m272 figs-123person σωτηρία τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ ἐγένετο, καθότι καὶ αὐτὸς υἱὸς Ἀβραάμ ἐστιν 1 salvation has come to this house, because he too is a son of Abraham Jesus is speaking to Zacchaeus, but he addresses him in the third person because he is also speaking to the people from the crowd. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the second person here. Alternate translation: “salvation has come to your household, because you too are a son of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv index f4daa9c184..ab0f56fd75 100644 --- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ JHN 3 10 vx3u figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Here, **these {things}** refers to al JHN 3 11 jt1f figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 3 11 upi7 figs-exclusive ὃ οἴδαμεν λαλοῦμεν…τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἡμῶν 1 we speak When Jesus says **we** and **our** in this verse, he was not including Nicodemus. Jesus used these pronouns as a contrast to Nicodemus saying **we** in [3:2](../03/02.md). While Nicodemus used **we** to refer to himself and the other Jewish religious leaders, Jesus could have been referring to: (1) himself and his disciples. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “my disciples and I speak what we know … our testimony” (2) himself and the other members of the Godhead. Alternate translation: “the Father, Spirit, and I speak what we know … our testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) JHN 3 11 j1k1 figs-you οὐ λαμβάνετε 1 you do not accept The word **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -JHN 3 12 y4e9 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ τὰ ἐπίγεια εἶπον ὑμῖν 1 John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I told you earthly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 3 12 y4e9 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ τὰ ἐπίγεια εἶπον ὑμῖν 1 John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I told you earthly things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 3 12 pt4x figs-you εἶπον ὑμῖν…οὐ πιστεύετε, πῶς ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν…πιστεύσετε 1 I told you … you do not believe … how will you believe if I tell you Throughout this verse, **you** is plural and could refer to: (1) the Jewish people in general. Alternate translation: “you Jews” (2) Nicodemus and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you Jewish leaders” See how you translated this word in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JHN 3 12 mf2x figs-explicit τὰ ἐπίγεια 1 Here, **earthly {things}** refers to what Jesus had spoken in [3:3–8](../03/03.md). Those things are called **earthly** because they are about things that take place on earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “these truths about what takes place on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 3 12 c6ia figs-rquestion πῶς ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν τὰ ἐπουράνια, πιστεύσετε? 1 how will you believe if I tell you about heavenly things? Jesus uses a question to emphasize the disbelief of Nicodemus and the Jews. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you certainly will not believe if I tell you about heavenly things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ JHN 5 44 g7qd figs-ellipsis πιστεῦσαι 1 believe John records Jesus lea JHN 5 44 rn78 δόξαν παρὰ ἀλλήλων λαμβάνοντες 1 Here, **receiving** could refer to: (1) the time they are receiving glory. Alternate translation: “while receiving glory from one another” (2) a causal statement. Alternate translation: “since receiving glory from one another” JHN 5 45 kk5q figs-metonymy ἔστιν ὁ κατηγορῶν ὑμῶν Μωϋσῆς, εἰς ὃν ὑμεῖς ἠλπίκατε 1 **Moses** here could refer to: (1) the person named Moses who gave the Israelites the law of Moses. (2) the law of Moses itself. Alternate translation: “Moses accuses you in the Law, the very Law in which you have hoped” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 5 46 m9sq grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ 1 John records Jesus making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. Jesus knows that the Jewish leaders do not truly believe Moses. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “you must not believe Moses since you do not believe me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) -JHN 5 47 kxa6 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…οὐ πιστεύετε 1 John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 5 47 kxa6 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…οὐ πιστεύετε 1 John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do not believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 5 47 b8dd figs-rquestion πῶς τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν πιστεύσετε? 1 If you do not believe his writings, how are you going to believe my words? Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you will certainly never believe my words!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 5 47 x7h9 figs-metonymy τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν 1 my words Here, **words** refers to what Jesus said to these Jewish leaders. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “what I have told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 6 intro xe4t 0 # John 6 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus’ fourth sign: Jesus feeds a large crowd (6:1–14)
2. Jesus’ fifth sign: Jesus walks on the Sea of Galilee (6:15–21)
3. Jesus says he is the bread of life (6:22–71)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### King

The king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food. They thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people’s sins and that the world would persecute his people.

## Important Metaphors in this Chapter

### Bread

Bread was the most common and important food in Jesus’ day, so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread, because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus’ culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted the people to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life, just as people need food to sustain physical life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood

When Jesus said, “unless you would eat the flesh of the Son of Man and would drink his blood, you do not have life in yourselves,” he was speaking of believing in his sacrificial death on the cross for the forgiveness of sins. He also knew that before he died he would tell his followers to commemorate this sacrifice by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand to what the metaphor referred. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Parenthetical ideas

Several times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some background information needed to better understand the story. These explanations are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. This information is placed inside parentheses.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” several times in this chapter. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) @@ -955,7 +955,7 @@ JHN 7 3 x8ce translate-kinship οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ 1 brothers Th JHN 7 3 id2z figs-explicit σοῦ τὰ ἔργα ἃ ποιεῖς 1 the works that you do Here, **works** refers to the powerful miracles that Jesus was performing. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “your miracles that you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 7 4 by1h figs-rpronouns ζητεῖ αὐτὸς 1 Here, Jesus’ brothers use the reflexive pronoun **himself** in order to emphasize their belief that Jesus wants to make **himself** famous. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “seeks for his own benefit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) JHN 7 4 uj59 ζητεῖ αὐτὸς ἐν παρρησίᾳ εἶναι 1 Alternate translation: “seeks publicity for himself” or “seeks public attention” -JHN 7 4 mc8r grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ταῦτα ποιεῖς 1 John records Jesus’ brothers speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but they mean that it is actually true. Although they didn’t believe that Jesus was the Messiah at this time, they did not deny that he was doing miracles. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what the brothers are saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 7 4 mc8r grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ταῦτα ποιεῖς 1 John records Jesus’ brothers speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but they mean that it is actually true. Although they didn’t believe that Jesus was the Messiah at this time, they did not deny that he was doing miracles. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what the brothers are saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you do these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 7 4 f33j figs-metonymy τῷ κόσμῳ 1 the world Here, **the world** is used figurative to refer to all of the people in the world. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 7 5 mz2b writing-background οὐδὲ γὰρ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπίστευον εἰς αὐτὸν 1 In this verse John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about the brothers of Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ brothers said this because even they did not believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 7 5 bs7f translate-kinship οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his brothers See how you translated **brothers** in verse [3](../07/03.md). Alternate translation: “his younger brothers” or “his half-brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) @@ -1005,7 +1005,7 @@ JHN 7 22 d8sw writing-background οὐχ ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Μωϋσέως JHN 7 22 w22v figs-explicit τῶν πατέρων 1 Here, **fathers** refers specifically to the first ancestors of the Jewish people, who are often called “the Patriarchs.” Those people are Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob. It does not refer to the ancestors of the Jewish people in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Patriarchs” or “the men who founded the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 7 22 cs9z figs-explicit ἐν Σαββάτῳ περιτέμνετε ἄνθρωπον 1 on the Sabbath you circumcise a man Jesus implies that the act of **circumcision** was a kind of work. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you circumcise a male baby on the Sabbath. That is working too” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 7 22 dl6z figs-genericnoun ἄνθρωπον 1 Jesus is speaking of any Jewish **man** in general, not of one particular **man**. If this use of **man** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -JHN 7 23 t21u grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ περιτομὴν λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος ἐν Σαββάτῳ 1 If a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 7 23 t21u grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ περιτομὴν λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος ἐν Σαββάτῳ 1 If a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since a man receives circumcision on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 7 23 k04n figs-genericnoun λαμβάνει ἄνθρωπος 1 See how you translated **man** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “men receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) JHN 7 23 owuc grammar-collectivenouns ὁ νόμος 1 See how you translated **the law** in [1:17](../01/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) JHN 7 23 ltsk figs-activepassive μὴ λυθῇ ὁ νόμος Μωϋσέως 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you might not break the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1203,7 +1203,7 @@ JHN 8 44 hqmo ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων λαλεῖ 1 Alternate translation: JHN 8 44 k1qu figs-metaphor ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ 1 the father of lies Here Jesus uses **father** to refer to the one who originated the act of lying. Since **the devil** is the first being to tell a lie, he is called the **father** of lying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the first one to lie” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 44 x11i figs-explicit ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **it** refers to the act of lying. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the father of lying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 46 y3gz figs-rquestion τίς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐλέγχει με περὶ ἁμαρτίας? 1 Which one of you convicts me of sin? Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he has never sinned. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “None of you can convict me concerning sin!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 8 46 kh6a grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἀλήθειαν λέγω 1 If I speak the truth John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 8 46 kh6a grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἀλήθειαν λέγω 1 If I speak the truth John records Jesus speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I speak the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 8 46 ibp1 figs-rquestion διὰ τί ὑμεῖς οὐ πιστεύετέ μοι? 1 why do you not believe me? Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to scold the Jews for their unbelief. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you have no reason for not believing me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 8 47 lien figs-explicit ὁ ὢν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ…ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐκ ἐστέ 1 The phrase **from God** could refer to: (1) the person to whom the subject belongs, as in the UST. (2) the origin of the subject. Alternate translation: “He who came from God … you did not come from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 8 47 nmmq figs-gendernotations ὁ ὢν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Although **He** is masculine, Jesus is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “A person who is from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -1463,7 +1463,7 @@ JHN 10 34 rycn figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν 1 Jesus is usin JHN 10 34 b3gp figs-123person ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε 1 You are gods Jesus quotes [Psalm 82:6](../psa/82/06.md) where God calls some humans **gods**. Jesus does this in order to show that God also used the word “god” to refer to people other than himself. In the verse that Jesus quotes, the first person **I** refers to God. If this might be misunderstood by your readers, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, said, ‘You are gods’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 10 34 h189 figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε 1 You are gods If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I said that you are gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 10 35 nfly 0 Verses 35 and 36 are one sentence. In this sentence, Jesus argues by moving from a weaker reason to a stronger reason (an argument from the lesser to the greater). Based on the scripture he quoted in verse 34, Jesus argues that, since God calls humans **gods** in that verse, it is even more appropriate to call him God because he is the Son of God. You may need to change the order of the clauses in order for this idea to be clearer in your language. -JHN 10 35 ieot grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐκείνους εἶπεν θεοὺς 1 the word of God came **If** indicates a conditional sentence that extends until the end of the next verse. Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since he called them gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 10 35 ieot grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐκείνους εἶπεν θεοὺς 1 the word of God came **If** indicates a conditional sentence that extends until the end of the next verse. Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since he called them gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 10 35 gtb4 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐγένετο 1 the word of God came Here, Jesus used the term **word** to describe the message that God said by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s message came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 10 35 m8ji figs-personification ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐγένετο 1 the word of God came Jesus speaks of **the word of God** as though it were a person who moved toward those who heard it. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “God spoke his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JHN 10 35 g0kv figs-activepassive οὐ δύναται λυθῆναι ἡ Γραφή 1 the scripture cannot be broken If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one can break the Scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1476,7 +1476,7 @@ JHN 10 36 r7ex figs-ellipsis βλασφημεῖς 1 Jesus is leaving a word th JHN 10 36 bkl5 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This phrase, **the Son of God**, is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 10 37 wyd2 figs-possession τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 Here Jesus is using **of** to describe **works** that God wants him to do. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. See how you translated a similar phrase in [9:4](../09/04.md). Alternate translation: “the works that my Father demands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 10 37 us7v guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 10 38 finz grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ ποιῶ 1 believe in the works Here, Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But since I am doing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 10 38 finz grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ ποιῶ 1 believe in the works Here, Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But since I am doing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 10 38 k2zf figs-explicit τοῖς ἔργοις πιστεύετε 1 believe in the works Here, **believe in** means to acknowledge that the **works** Jesus does are done with the authority of the Father and prove that he is God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “believe that the works I do are from God” or “believe that the works I do are done with God’s power”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 10 38 t8uf figs-idiom ἐν ἐμοὶ ὁ Πατὴρ, κἀγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί 1 the Father is in me and that I am in the Father Here Jesus uses the word **in** to express the close personal relationship between himself and God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “my Father has a close relationship with me, and I have a close relationship with my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 10 38 n8ue figs-doublet ἐν ἐμοὶ ὁ Πατὴρ, κἀγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί 1 the Father is in me and that I am in the Father These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the truth of what Jesus is saying. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “my Father and I are completely joined together as one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -1838,14 +1838,14 @@ JHN 13 11 tzj7 writing-background 0 Here John interrupts the story to give the JHN 13 11 ccz4 figs-metaphor οὐχὶ πάντες καθαροί ἐστε 1 Not all of you are clean See how you translated **clean** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Not all of you have received God’s forgiveness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 13 12 p45l figs-rquestion γινώσκετε τί πεποίηκα ὑμῖν? 1 Do you know what I have done for you? Jesus is using a question to emphasize the importance of what he is teaching his disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You need to understand what I have done for you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 13 13 m9z8 figs-explicit ὑμεῖς φωνεῖτέ με ὁ Διδάσκαλος καὶ, ὁ Κύριος 1 You call me ‘teacher’ and ‘Lord,’ Here Jesus implies that his disciples have great respect for him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “You show me great respect when you call me ‘teacher’ and ‘Lord.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 13 14 xlgr grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ οὖν ἐγὼ ἔνιψα ὑμῶν τοὺς πόδας, ὁ Κύριος καὶ ὁ Διδάσκαλος 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If I then, the Lord and the Teacher, have washed your feet, and I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 13 14 xlgr grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ οὖν ἐγὼ ἔνιψα ὑμῶν τοὺς πόδας, ὁ Κύριος καὶ ὁ Διδάσκαλος 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If I then, the Lord and the Teacher, have washed your feet, and I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 13 15 pk3l figs-declarative καθὼς ἐγὼ ἐποίησα ὑμῖν, καὶ ὑμεῖς ποιῆτε 1 you should also do just as I did for you Jesus is using a statement to give an instruction. Jesus is telling his disciples to follow his example and serve one another. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “you also must do just as I did to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) JHN 13 16 h6gt figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 13 16 tpl8 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ, οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν 1 greater Here, **greater** means to be more important or deserving of more respect than another person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “a slave is not respected more than his master, nor is a messenger respected more than the one who sent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 16 rj4z figs-doublet οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ, οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν 1 greater These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that Jesus’ disciples are not more important than him, so they should humbly serve each other. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “none of you are greater than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 13 16 k3zj figs-metaphor οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ 1 greater Jesus uses the words **slave** and **master** to refer to his disciples and himself, respectively. He is telling his disciples that they should humbly serve each other because they are not more important than him, and he has humbly served them. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Jesus’ meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “you are not greater than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 13 16 la0x figs-metaphor οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν 1 greater Jesus uses **messenger** and **the one who sent him** to refer to his disciples and himself, respectively. He is telling his disciples that they should humbly serve each other because they are not more important than him, and he has humbly served them. If this might confuse your readers, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Jesus’ meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “and you are not greater than me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 13 17 nwhg grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ταῦτα οἴδατε 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you know these things, which you do,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 13 17 nwhg grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ταῦτα οἴδατε 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you know these things, which you do,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 13 17 nxou figs-activepassive μακάριοί ἐστε 1 you are blessed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that God did it. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 13 18 ji7u figs-explicit οὐ περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν λέγω 1 Here Jesus is referring back to what he just said in the previous verse. He means that not all of those to whom he is speaking will be blessed for serving each other, because one of them, Judas Iscariot, will betray him. If this clause would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am not speaking this about all of you” or “I am not saying that God will bless all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 18 ztpw figs-explicit ἐγὼ οἶδα τίνας ἐξελεξάμην 1 Here Jesus states that he knew the character of every person he chose to be his disciple. Therefore, he knew Judas would betray him when he chose him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I know exactly the kind of men I have chosen to be my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1911,7 +1911,7 @@ JHN 14 1 rq43 figs-declarative πιστεύετε εἰς τὸν Θεόν, κα JHN 14 2 eca3 figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 In my Father’s house Jesus uses **house** to refer to heaven, which is the place where God dwells. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “In the place where my Father dwells” or “In heaven where my Father dwells”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 14 2 v9px guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 14 2 n3wl εἰ δὲ μή, εἶπον ἂν ὑμῖν, ὅτι πορεύομαι ἑτοιμάσαι τόπον ὑμῖν 1 Father The word translated **for** could also be translated “that,” in which case this sentence would be a question instead of a statement. With either interpretation the point of the sentence is the same: Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said in the previous sentence is true. He is going to heaven **to prepare a place for** his people. Alternate translation: “But if not, would I have told you that I am going to prepare a place for you?” -JHN 14 3 sadi grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν πορευθῶ 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that it will actually take place. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when I go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 14 3 sadi grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν πορευθῶ 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that it will actually take place. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when I go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 14 4 ir1d figs-extrainfo τὴν ὁδόν 1 the way Here Jesus uses **the way**. This could refer to: (1) himself as the means by which people can go to God in heaven, which is clearly the meaning for **the way** in [verse 6](../14/06.md). (2) a manner of life that will eventually lead someone to be with God in heaven. Since the disciples did not understand this when Jesus said it, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 14 5 aode translate-names Θωμᾶς 1 See how you translated the name **Thomas** in [11:16](../11/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 14 5 o21d figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) @@ -1922,7 +1922,7 @@ JHN 14 6 i8le figs-metaphor ἡ ἀλήθεια 1 the truth Jesus uses **the tru JHN 14 6 z9tr figs-metaphor ἡ ζωή 1 the life Jesus uses **the life** to indicate that he is the means by which people can receive eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who makes people spiritually alive” or “the means by which one may receive eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 14 6 g5hn figs-explicit οὐδεὶς ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα, εἰ μὴ δι’ ἐμοῦ 1 no one comes to the Father except through me Here, **through me** means that a person can come to God only by trusting Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “No one comes to the Father except by believing in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 6 f95q guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 7 wx89 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐγνώκατε με 1 Father Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you have known me, and you have known me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 14 7 wx89 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐγνώκατε με 1 Father Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you have known me, and you have known me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 14 8 wwv7 translate-names Φίλιππος 1 See how you translated the name **Philip** in [1:43](../01/43.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 14 8 fy8b figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 14 8 kum1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Κύριε, δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν Πατέρα 1 Lord, show us the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -2058,7 +2058,7 @@ JHN 15 16 kc4z grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητ JHN 15 16 bcy1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 15 16 acqo figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 See how you translated **in my name** in [14:13](../14/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 15 17 rib2 ταῦτα 1 Here, **These {things}** could refer to: (1) the commands Jesus referred to in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “These commands” (2) the command in the second half of this verse. Alternate translation: “This” -JHN 15 18 ntzw grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ὁ κόσμος ὑμᾶς μισεῖ 1 the world Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If the world hates you, and it does hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 15 18 ntzw grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ὁ κόσμος ὑμᾶς μισεῖ 1 the world Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If the world hates you, and it does hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) JHN 15 18 d5ff figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 the world Here Jesus uses **world** to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated **world** in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 19 aj8s grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἦτε 1 the world Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that his disciples are not **from the world**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If you were from the world, but you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) JHN 15 19 x6q8 figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου…ὁ κόσμος…τοῦ κόσμου…τοῦ κόσμου…ὁ κόσμος 1 the world See how you translated **the world** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index da11008cc3..4171effc7f 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 4 7 fnu3 figs-yousingular σε…ἔχεις…ἔλαβες…ἔλαβες…καυχᾶσαι…λαβών 1 between you … do you have that you did not … you have freely … do you boast … you had not In this verse, Paul uses the singular form for **you**. He does this in order to directly address each specific person among the Corinthian believers. In the next verse, he again uses the plural form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) 1CO 4 7 gtb5 figs-rquestion τίς…σε διακρίνει? 1 For who makes you superior? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is no one who makes you superior.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 4 7 r6yw figs-rquestion τί…ἔχεις ὃ οὐκ ἔλαβες? 1 What do you have that you did not freely receive? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is nothing that you have that you did not receive.” or “you received everything that you have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 4 7 eixw grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ καὶ ἔλαβες 1 Paul is speaking as if “receiving it” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since you indeed received it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 4 7 eixw grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ καὶ ἔλαβες 1 Paul is speaking as if “receiving it” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since you indeed received it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 4 7 e8l2 figs-rquestion τί καυχᾶσαι ὡς μὴ λαβών? 1 why do you boast as if you had not done so? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, there is no answer to the question, since that is exactly Paul’s point. There is no reason for them to **boast**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionas an imperative or a “should” statement. Alternate translation: “do not boast as if you did not receive it.” or “you should not boast as if you did not receive it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 4 7 p0hg writing-pronouns ἔλαβες…λαβών 2 Here, both uses of **it** refer back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. If your language does not use **it** to refer to an unstated “thing,” you can use a word or phrase that does refer clearly back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. Alternate translation: “you received everything … you did … receive everything” or “you received what you have … you did … receive what you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 4 8 yp8s figs-irony ἤδη κεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ, ἤδη ἐπλουτήσατε, χωρὶς ἡμῶν ἐβασιλεύσατε 1 General Information: With these statements, Paul is stating what he thinks the Corinthians would say about themselves. He does not mean that he believes that these things are true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some words that clarify that Paul is speaking from the Corinthians’s perspective, such as “it is as if” or “you say.” Alternate translation: “Already it is as if you are satisfied! Already it is as if you have become rich! It is as if you began to reign apart from us” or “Already you say that you are satisfied! Already you say that you have become rich! You say that you have begun to reign apart from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) @@ -655,7 +655,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 6 2 r8sj grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ 1 The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in [6:1](../06/01.md). The Corinthians currently think that going to court in public is fine. Paul gives the true alternative: they **will judge the world** and thus should not need to take their quarrels and lawsuits anywhere else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 6 2 i1m5 figs-rquestion ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ ἅγιοι τὸν κόσμον κρινοῦσιν? 1 Or do you not know that the believers will judge the world? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “You already know that the saints will judge the world.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 6 2 i67f figs-rquestion ἀνάξιοί ἐστε κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων? 1 If then, you will judge the world, are you not able to settle matters of little importance? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong negative or positive statement. Alternate translation: “you are definitely not unworthy of the smallest cases” or “you are definitely worthy of the smallest cases (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 6 2 py6h grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος 1 Paul is speaking as if **the world is judged by you** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because the world is judged by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 6 2 py6h grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος 1 Paul is speaking as if **the world is judged by you** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because the world is judged by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 6 2 yq8e figs-activepassive ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **the world**, which is **judged**, rather than **you**, who do the “judging.” Alternate translation: “you judge the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 6 2 jqvf figs-pastforfuture κρίνεται 1 Here, **is judged** makes a general statement about what **you**, that is, the **saints**, do. The present tense does not mean that the **saints** are currently passing final judgment and will not do so in the future. Rather, Paul uses the present tense to state a general fact about the **saints**. The judgment itself will occur in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the present tense of **is judged** with the future tense here. Alternate translation: “will be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) 1CO 6 2 stvc figs-idiom ἀνάξιοί…κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων 1 Here, to be **unworthy of** something means that one is not capable of doing that thing or is not qualified to do it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **unworthy of** with a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “unqualified concerning the smallest cases” “not able to judge the smallest cases” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1070,7 +1070,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 8 9 loo1 ἡ ἐξουσία ὑμῶν αὕτη 1 those who are weak Alternate translation: “this authority that you have” 1CO 8 9 f3ds figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν 1 those who are weak Much like in [8:7](../08/07.md), **weak** identifies a person who easily feels guilty. A **weak** person thinks some things are wrong that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “for the sensitive” or “for those who often condemn themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 8 9 deu5 figs-nominaladj τοῖς ἀσθενέσιν 1 those who are weak Paul is using the adjective **weak** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1CO 8 10 usg7 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν…τις ἴδῃ 1 sees the one who has Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “when” or “after”. Alternate translation: “whenever someone might see” or “after someone sees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 8 10 usg7 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν…τις ἴδῃ 1 sees the one who has Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “when” or “after”. Alternate translation: “whenever someone might see” or “after someone sees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 8 10 a7qn figs-explicit γνῶσιν 1 sees the one who has Here Paul does not specify what the **knowledge** is about. However, it is clear from [8:4–6](../08/04.md) that Paul is speaking about **knowledge** about other gods, specifically knowing that there is only one God and that other gods do not really exist. If you must specify what the knowledge is about, you could clarify that it is about the idols or the topic of things sacrificed to idols. Alternate translation: “knowledge about idols” or “knowledge about this issue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 8 10 v611 figs-abstractnouns τὸν ἔχοντα γνῶσιν 1 sees the one who has If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “the person who knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 8 10 xhn9 translate-unknown κατακείμενον 1 sees the one who has In Paul’s culture, people ate lying down on their side (**reclining**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **reclining to eat** with a word or phrase that describes the normal position for eating in your culture or indicate that the person is about to eat. Alternate translation: “about to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1096,7 +1096,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 8 12 x857 figs-metaphor τὴν συνείδησιν ἀσθενοῦσαν 1 your knowledge Here, **weak** identifies **consciences** that easily lead people to feel guilty. **Weak consciences** condemn some things that are probably acceptable before God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **weak** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “sensitive consciences” or “consciences, which often condemn them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 8 13 i8tb figs-personification βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου 1 Therefore Here, **food** is spoken of as though it were a person who could cause someone **to stumble**. Paul speaks in this way to emphasize that the **food** is the key issue that leads to “stumbling.” If this might be confusing for your readers, you could clarify that the person who eats the food causes someone **to stumble**. Alternate translation: “how I eat causes my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1CO 8 13 seua figs-123person εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου, οὐ μὴ φάγω κρέα εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 Therefore Here Paul uses the first-person singular in order to use himself as an example for the Corinthians to follow. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that this is why Paul uses the first person by clarifying that Paul is offering himself as an example. Alternate translation: “if food causes my brother to stumble, I, for one, will certainly not ever eat meat” or “take me as an example: if food causes my brother to stumble, I will certainly not ever eat meat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -1CO 8 13 vf92 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου 1 if food causes to stumble Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “in cases where” or “since.” Alternate translation: “because food causes my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 8 13 vf92 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει τὸν ἀδελφόν μου 1 if food causes to stumble Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will happen at some point. If your language does not state something as a condition if it will happen, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying might not happen, then you can introduce the clause by using a word such as “in cases where” or “since.” Alternate translation: “because food causes my brother to stumble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 8 13 eyrr figs-gendernotations τὸν ἀδελφόν -1 Therefore Although **brother** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **brother** with a nongendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brother or sister … brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1CO 8 13 ucfd figs-genericnoun τὸν ἀδελφόν μου -1 Therefore Paul is speaking of “brothers” in general, not of one particular **brother**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **my brother** with a word or phrase that refers to “brothers” in general. Alternate translation: “any brother of mine … any brother of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1CO 8 13 ra1m figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ 1 Therefore The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In Paul’s culture, two negative words made the statement even more negative. English speakers would think that the two negatives form a positive, so the ULT expresses the idea with one strong negative. If your language can use two negatives as Paul’s culture did, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in this way, you can translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “by no means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) @@ -1165,10 +1165,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 10 q1q2 figs-ellipsis ὁ ἀλοῶν ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 for our sake Here Paul omits some words that your language may require to make a complete thought. Paul omits these words because he stated them explicitly in the previous clause (**ought to plow**). If your language does need these words, you could supply them from that clause. Alternate translation: “the one who threshes ought to thresh in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 9 11 zn5m figs-metaphor εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῖν τὰ πνευματικὰ ἐσπείραμεν, μέγα εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῶν τὰ σαρκικὰ θερίσομεν? 1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? In this verse, Paul applies the farming language he used in [9:9–10](../09/09.md). When he and Barnabas “sow,” they should also “reap” the harvest. Paul clarifies that what they **sowed** was **spiritual {things}**, which means the good news. The **material {things}** that they can **reap** are money and support from the Corinthians. If your reader would misunderstand this application of the farming language, you could use analogies to clarify what Paul is referring to or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “Similarly, if we told you about the good news, is it too much if we receive material support from you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 11 b5g9 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς -1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Here, **we** refers particularly to Paul and Barnabas. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1CO 9 11 jpjj grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Paul is speaking as if **we** “sowing spiritual things” was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 9 11 jpjj grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Paul is speaking as if **we** “sowing spiritual things” was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 9 11 g1wh figs-rquestion μέγα εἰ ἡμεῖς ὑμῶν τὰ σαρκικὰ θερίσομεν? 1 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, it is not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong negation. Alternate translation: “it is by no means too much if we will reap material things from you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 9 11 czcs grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ 2 is it too much for us to reap material things from you? Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **we** could **reap material things from you**, though **we** might not do so. He specifies the result for if **we** do **reap material {things}**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form by stating the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “that.” Alternate translation: “that” or “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -1CO 9 12 v333 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 If others exercised this right Paul is speaking as if **others** “sharing” **the right over you** was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 9 12 v333 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 If others exercised this right Paul is speaking as if **others** “sharing” **the right over you** was a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since” or “Given that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 9 12 z3mr figs-explicit τῆς ὑμῶν ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν 1 If others exercised this right While Paul does not directly state this, the Corinthians would have understood **right** to refer to the **right** to receive financial support. If your readers would not understand **right** in this way, you could express the idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “shared the right to financial support from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 9 12 cr62 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὑμῶν ἐξουσίας μετέχουσιν…ἡμεῖς…τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ταύτῃ 1 If others exercised this right If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **right**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “able to.” If you do so, you may need to express an object, which here is receiving financial support. Alternate translation: “were able to require financial support from you, are we … being able to require financial support from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 9 12 lld4 figs-rquestion οὐ μᾶλλον ἡμεῖς? 1 If others exercised this right over you, should we not even more? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, you do.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “we certainly do even more.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1196,7 +1196,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 9 15 fd69 figs-metaphor τὸ καύχημά μου…κενώσει 1 deprive me of my boasting Here Paul speaks as if a **boast** was a container that someone could make **empty**. By speaking in this way, Paul means that someone could take away what he boasts about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **make my boast empty** with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will remove my reason for boasting” or “will deflate my boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 9 15 rl1y figs-abstractnouns τὸ καύχημά μου 1 deprive me of my boasting If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **boast**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “boast.” Alternate translation: “what I boast about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 9 16 lq4l figs-infostructure ἐὰν…εὐαγγελίζωμαι, οὐκ ἔστιν μοι καύχημα, ἀνάγκη γάρ μοι ἐπίκειται 1 this necessity was placed upon me If your language would normally put the reason before the result, you could rearrange the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “because compulsion is placed on me, there is nothing for me to boast about if I proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -1CO 9 16 xpve grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 this necessity was placed upon me Paul is speaking as if “proclaiming” **the gospel** was only a possibility, but he means that he actually does this. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when” or “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 9 16 xpve grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 this necessity was placed upon me Paul is speaking as if “proclaiming” **the gospel** was only a possibility, but he means that he actually does this. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when” or “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 9 16 ecw2 figs-activepassive ἀνάγκη…ἐπίκειται 1 this necessity was placed upon me If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on himself, upon whom the **compulsion is placed**, rather than focusing on the person placing the **compulsion**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God places compulsion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 9 16 qyp0 figs-abstractnouns ἀνάγκη…μοι ἐπίκειται 1 this necessity was placed upon me If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **compulsion**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “compel” and rephrase the clause. Alternate translation: “I am compelled to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 9 16 eimr figs-metaphor ἀνάγκη…μοι ἐπίκειται 1 this necessity was placed upon me Here Paul speaks as if **compulsion** were a physical object that someone had **placed upon** him. By speaking in this way, he means that he is required to do something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I am commanded to do so” or “I have an obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1341,7 +1341,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 14 dab4 figs-activepassive ἀγαπητοί μου 1 Connecting Statement: If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **beloved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “loving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that he himself loves them. Alternate translation: “people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 14 n5tb figs-metaphor φεύγετε ἀπὸ 1 flee away from idolatry Just as in [6:18](../06/18.md), here Paul wants the Corinthians to avoid **idolatry** as urgently as if it were an enemy or danger that they might **flee from**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “carefully stay away from” or “fight against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 10 14 ly4k figs-abstractnouns τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας 1 flee away from idolatry If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **idolatry**, you can express the idea by using a phrase such as “worshiping other gods” or “serving idols.” Alternate translation: “serving idols” or “worshiping idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1CO 10 15 ed82 grammar-connect-condition-fact ὡς φρονίμοις 1 flee away from idolatry Paul here uses **as**, but he means that he thinks he really is speaking to **sensible people**. If your language does not use **as** if what it introduces is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea by identifying the Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” or “like someone who is talking to reasonable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 10 15 ed82 grammar-connect-condition-fact ὡς φρονίμοις 1 flee away from idolatry Paul here uses **as**, but he means that he thinks he really is speaking to **sensible people**. If your language does not use **as** if what it introduces is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea by identifying the Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” Corinthians as **sensible people**. Alternate translation: “to you like this because you are sensible people” or “like someone who is talking to reasonable people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 10 15 mnb2 writing-pronouns ὅ φημι 1 flee away from idolatry Here, **what I say** refers to what Paul is about to say in the next verses (especially [10:16–22](../10/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **what I say** with a form that naturally refers to the next sentences. Alternate translation: “what I will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 10 16 gi4s figs-possession τὸ ποτήριον τῆς εὐλογίας 1 The cup of blessing Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **cup** that is characterized by **blessing**. This phrase identifies a specific **cup**, here, the **cup** used in the Lord’s Supper. If your language does not use the possessive form to express that idea, you can identify the **cup** as the one used in the Lord’s Supper. Alternate translation: “The cup in the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1CO 10 16 tavb figs-metonymy τὸ ποτήριον 1 The cup of blessing Here the Corinthians would have understood **cup** to refer to the drink inside the **cup**, which in Paul’s culture would have been wine. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **cup** by more explicitly referring to what would be in the **cup**. Alternate translation: “The drink” or “The wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1425,7 +1425,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 30 dv5f figs-rquestion τί βλασφημοῦμαι ὑπὲρ οὗ ἐγὼ εὐχαριστῶ? 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “you should not be.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this questionwith a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I must not be insulted for that which I give thanks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 10 30 bafd figs-activepassive βλασφημοῦμαι 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on himself, who is **insulted**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “insulting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that some other person does it. Alternate translation: “do they insult me” or “does someone insult me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 10 31 ub3g grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Here, **Therefore** introduces the conclusion of what Paul has argued in [8:1–10:30](../08/01.md). If you have a way to introduce the conclusion to an entire section, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “In conclusion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1CO 10 31 pxzd grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε…ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul is speaking as if “eating,” “drinking,” and “doing” things were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that the Corinthians will do these things. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when you eat or drink, or when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 10 31 pxzd grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε…ἐσθίετε, εἴτε πίνετε, εἴτε τι ποιεῖτε 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? Paul is speaking as if “eating,” “drinking,” and “doing” things were hypothetical possibilities, but he means that the Corinthians will do these things. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when you eat or drink, or when you do anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 10 31 zmvv figs-abstractnouns εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **glory**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “glorify.” Alternate translation: “to glorify God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 32 sj34 figs-abstractnouns ἀπρόσκοποι καὶ Ἰουδαίοις γίνεσθε, καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **offense**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “offend.” Alternate translation: “Do not offend either Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 32 ag47 figs-explicit καὶ Ἰουδαίοις…καὶ Ἕλλησιν, καὶ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Give no offense to Jews or to Greeks Here the three groups to which Paul refers would include every person in Paul’s context. The **Jews** are those who practice Jewish customs and faith, while **the church of God** refers to everyone who believes in Jesus the Messiah. The word **Greeks** includes everyone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express these three groups and think that Paul is leaving some people out by clarifying that Paul includes everyone. Alternate translation: “to anyone, whether Jews or Greeks or the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1463,7 +1463,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 11 6 lac8 figs-explicit οὐ κατακαλύπτεται…κατακαλυπτέσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Just as in [11:5](../11/05.md), **not** “covering” the **head** could refer to: (1) not wearing a piece of clothing on the hair and back of the head. Alternate translation: “does not wear a cloth on her head … let her wear a cloth on her head” (2) not putting the hair up in a traditional hairstyle but instead letting it flow freely. Alternate translation: “loosens her hair … let her bind up her hair” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 11 6 ahln figs-imperative καὶ κειράσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “her hair also needs to be cut off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 11 6 i9ou figs-activepassive καὶ κειράσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **hair**, which is **cut off**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “cutting.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” does it. Alternate translation: “let a person cut her hair off also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 11 6 s4r5 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 2 If it is disgraceful for a woman Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because it is” or “since it is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 11 6 s4r5 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 2 If it is disgraceful for a woman Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because it is” or “since it is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 11 6 lqlu figs-doublet τὸ κείρασθαι ἢ ξυρᾶσθαι 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here, **to have her hair cut off** refers to how **hair** is trimmed or cut much shorter. The phrase **to be shaved** refers to how **hair** can be cut so short that it is no longer visible. If your language has separate words for these two actions, you could use them here. If your language has only one word for cutting **hair** short, you could use just one word here. Alternate translation: “to have her hair cut short” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1CO 11 6 pflq figs-activepassive τὸ κείρασθαι ἢ ξυρᾶσθαι 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **hair** that is **cut off** or **shaved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “cutting” or “shaving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “someone” does it. Alternate translation: “to have someone cut her hair off or to shave her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 11 6 od1s figs-imperative κατακαλυπτέσθω 1 If it is disgraceful for a woman Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “needs to.” Alternate translation: “she needs to cover her head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) @@ -1979,14 +1979,14 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 14 26 xzz2 figs-imperative πάντα πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν γινέσθω 1 interpretation Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “All things must happen for building up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 14 26 fnba figs-metaphor οἰκοδομὴν 1 interpretation Paul here speaks as if believers were a building that one “builds up.” With this metaphor, he emphasizes that the Corinthians should focus on helping other believers become stronger and more mature, just like the one who builds a house makes it strong and complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this figure of speech with a comparable metaphor or express the idea plainly. See how you translated this metaphor in [14:12](../14/12.md). Alternate translation: “the growth” or “the edification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 14 26 jvgw figs-explicit πρὸς οἰκοδομὴν 1 interpretation Here the Corinthians would have understood Paul to mean that the **building up** applies to other believers. If your readers would not infer this, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “for building up believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 27 u8ew grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε 1 and each one in turn Paul is speaking as if someone “speaking” **in a tongue** was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that someone often does “speak” **in a tongue**. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 14 27 u8ew grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε 1 and each one in turn Paul is speaking as if someone “speaking” **in a tongue** was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that someone often does “speak” **in a tongue**. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “Whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 14 27 gqdr figs-ellipsis κατὰ 1 and each one in turn Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. English needs these words, so the ULT has supplied them in brackets. If your language also needs these words, you could use these or similar ones. Alternate translation: “this should be done by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1CO 14 27 qhl3 figs-explicit κατὰ δύο ἢ τὸ πλεῖστον τρεῖς 1 and each one in turn Paul does not explicitly state in what situation only **two or at most three** believers should speak **in a tongue**. The Corinthians would have understood him to be speaking about each time the believers gathered to worship God (see the expression “in the church” in [14:28](../14/28.md)). Paul does not mean that only **two or most three** people can ever speak in tongues. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what situation Paul is speaking about more explicitly. Alternate translation: “it should be by two or at most three every time you gather together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 27 wc1z figs-idiom ἀνὰ μέρος 1 and each one in turn Here, **in turn** means that people do something one after the other or in order. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **in turn** with a word or phrase that refers to doing things successively or in order. Alternate translation: “in order” or “successively” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 14 27 njmu figs-imperative εἷς διερμηνευέτω 1 and each one in turn Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “let.” Alternate translation: “one should interpret” or “let one interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1CO 14 27 vvge figs-extrainfo εἷς 1 and each one in turn Here Paul does not indicate whether **one** is one of the people who is speaking **in a tongue** or if it is someone else. It is likely that Paul thinks that both options are acceptable. If possible, you should translate **one** in such a way that it could refer to one of the people speaking **in a tongue** or to someone else. Alternate translation: “somebody” or “one person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 14 27 ari2 figs-explicit διερμηνευέτω 1 must interpret Here, just as in [14:26](../14/26.md), **interpret** refers specifically to interpreting a **tongue**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the person should **interpret** the **tongue**. Alternate translation: “must interpret the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1CO 14 28 rlag grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 must interpret Much like in [14:27](../14/27.md), Paul is speaking as if **an interpreter** not being present was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that sometimes this is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 14 28 rlag grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 must interpret Much like in [14:27](../14/27.md), Paul is speaking as if **an interpreter** not being present was a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that sometimes this is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can express the idea with a word that refers to a situation rather than to a possibility. Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 14 28 bkc6 figs-explicit διερμηνευτής 1 must interpret Here, much like in [14:26–27](../14/26.md), **interpreter** refers specifically to someone who can interpret a tongue. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly that the **interpreter** is the person who “interprets” the tongue. Alternate translation: “an interpreter for the tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 14 28 znt9 figs-extrainfo μὴ ᾖ διερμηνευτής 1 must interpret Just as in [14:27](../14/27.md), the **interpreter** could be someone who speaks in tongues or some other person. If possible, you should translate **an interpreter** in such a way that it could refer to one of the people speaking in a tongue or to someone else. Alternate translation: “no one can interpret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) 1CO 14 28 u0ia figs-gendernotations σιγάτω…ἑαυτῷ…λαλείτω 1 must interpret Although **him** and **himself** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **him** and **himself** with nongendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her be silent … let him or speak to himself or herself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -2114,7 +2114,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 11 uoji writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνοι 1 the grace of God that is with me Here, just as in [15:10](../15/10.md), **they** refers back to the “apostles” that Paul mentions in [15:9](../15/09.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this reference by referring explicitly to “apostles” here. Alternate translation: “other apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 15 11 vqai writing-pronouns οὕτως κηρύσσομεν, καὶ οὕτως ἐπιστεύσατε 1 the grace of God that is with me In both places, **in this way** could refer to: (1) the gospel as Paul has outlined it in [15:3–8](../15/03.md). Alternate translation: “it is this gospel that we preach, and it is this gospel that you believed” (2) the “grace” that Paul discussed in the last verse ([15:10](../15/10.md)). Alternate translation: “by God’s grace we preach, and by God’s grace you believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1CO 15 11 z7b6 figs-exclusive κηρύσσομεν 1 the grace of God that is with me Here, **we** refers to **I** and **they** earlier in the sentence. It includes Paul and other apostles but not the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1CO 15 12 h62z grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead? Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 15 12 h62z grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead? Paul is speaking as if this was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 15 12 k9rb εἰ…Χριστὸς κηρύσσεται, ὅτι ἐκ νεκρῶν ἐγήγερται 1 how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead? Alternate translation: “if it is proclaimed that Christ was raised from the dead” 1CO 15 12 jhia figs-activepassive Χριστὸς κηρύσσεται 1 how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead? If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that anyone who preaches the gospel does it, particularly he and other “apostles.” Alternate translation: “we proclaim Christ, specifically” or “believing preachers proclaim Christ, specifically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 12 jbi8 figs-idiom ἐγήγερται 1 raised Here, **raised** refers to someone who died and comes back to life. If your language does not use **raised** to describe coming back to life, you can use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he was restored to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2249,7 +2249,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 32 ghif figs-infostructure εἰ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον, ἐθηριομάχησα 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Here, **according to men** could modify: (1) **I fought**. In this case, Paul would be fighting with merely human goals and strategies. Alternate translation: “if I fought according to men against wild beasts” (2) **wild beasts**. In this case, Paul would be identifying the phrase **wild beasts** as a figurative reference to his enemies. Alternate translation: “if I fought wild beasts, speaking,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1CO 15 32 vslh figs-idiom κατὰ ἄνθρωπον 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Here, **according to men** identifies thinking or acting in only human ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind **according to men**by using a word or phrase that refers to what people who do not believe say and argue. Alternate translation: “according to what mere humans think” or “according to this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1CO 15 32 rqte figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **men** with a nongendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1CO 15 32 wvra grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Paul is speaking as if fighting **wild beasts** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it actually happened. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying did not happen, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “when.” Alternate translation: “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 15 32 wvra grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 What do I gain … if I fought with beasts at Ephesus … not raised Paul is speaking as if fighting **wild beasts** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it actually happened. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying did not happen, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “when.” Alternate translation: “when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 15 32 lm3v figs-metaphor ἐθηριομάχησα 1 I fought with beasts at Ephesus Here, the **wild beasts** could be: (1) a figurative reference to enemies, who acted like **wild beasts**. In support of this is the fact that, except for this verse, the Bible does not talk about Paul fighting **wild beasts**. Alternate translation: “I fought savage enemies” or “I strove with opponents as fierce as wild beasts” (2) a literal reference to fighting **wild** animals. Alternate translation: “I fought against wild animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 15 32 maht translate-unknown ἐν Ἐφέσῳ 1 I fought with beasts at Ephesus **Ephesus** was a city on the west coast of what is now Turkey. Paul spent time there soon after leaving Corinth (see [Acts 18:19–21](../act/18/19.md)). After some more travels, he visited **Ephesus** and stayed there for more than two years ( [Acts 19:1–20:1](../act/19/01.md)). Neither story mentions **wild beasts**, and Paul does not clarify which visit he is speaking about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Ephesus** with a word or phrase that more clearly identifies it as a city that Paul visited. Alternate translation: “in Ephesus city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 32 nu0s grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ νεκροὶ οὐκ ἐγείρονται 1 I fought with beasts at Ephesus Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that **the dead** really are **raised**. He uses this form to show the Corinthians the implications of their claim that **the dead are not raised**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If the dead actually are not raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) @@ -2318,7 +2318,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 15 44 b4dm figs-activepassive σπείρεται…ἐγείρεται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the body that **is sown** and **raised** rather than focusing on the people who do those actions. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “people” do the sowing and “God” does the raising. Alternate translation: “People sow it as … God raises it as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 15 44 f93u translate-unknown σῶμα ψυχικόν -1 Here, **natural body** refers to human bodies before they are **raised**. These bodies are those that function in the ways that we can observe right now and that fit with life on earth right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **natural body** with a word or phrase that refers to human bodies as they currently exist on earth before God transforms them. Alternate translation: “a this-worldly body … a this-worldly body” or “a regular body … a regular body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 1CO 15 44 n07f translate-unknown σῶμα πνευματικόν…πνευματικόν 1 Here, **spiritual body** refers to human bodies after they are **raised**. It could specifically refer to: (1) how the **body** is controlled by God’s Spirit and thus fits with how people will live when God renews everything he has created. Alternate translation: “a body fit for the new creation … a body fit for the new creation” or “a body controlled by God’s Spirit … a body controlled by God’s Spirit” (2) how the **body** is made out of “spirit” as opposed to “soul” or “flesh.” Alternate translation: “a body made out of spirit … a body made out of spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -1CO 15 44 ktad grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if the **natural body** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “Since” or “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 15 44 ktad grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if the **natural body** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “because.” Alternate translation: “Since” or “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 15 45 zsb9 grammar-connect-logic-result οὕτως καὶ 1 Here, **So also** introduces the basis for the claim Paul made about the existence of both “natural” and “spiritual” bodies in the last verse ([15:44](../15/44.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **So also** with a word or phrase that introduces evidence or support. Alternate translation: “For” or “As” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1CO 15 45 y5c0 writing-quotations γέγραπται 1 In Paul’s culture, **it is written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text. In this case, the quotation comes from [Genesis 2:7](../gen/02/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how Paul introduces the quotation with a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it can be read in Genesis” or “the author of the book of Genesis says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1CO 15 45 f507 figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than focusing on the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you can express it so that: (1) the scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “Moses has written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2465,7 +2465,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 16 9 px3c figs-explicit θύρα…ἀνέῳγεν μεγάλη καὶ ἐνεργής 1 a wide door has opened Here Paul speaks as if the **door** opens itself, but he implies that “God” is the one who has opened the door. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express how the **door has opened** by clarifying that God opens it. Alternate translation: “God has opened a wide and effective door” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 16 9 wsc0 grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 2 a wide door has opened Here, **and** could introduce: (1) another reason why Paul plans on staying in Ephesus. In other words, he stays both to take advantage of the “open door” and because he needs to resist those who “oppose” him. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a potential reason why Paul would not stay in Ephesus. Paul would be saying that the “open door” is enough reason to stay even though there are **many** who “oppose” him. Alternate translation: “even though” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 16 9 ycte figs-nominaladj πολλοί 1 a wide door has opened Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1CO 16 10 axhg grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν…ἔλθῃ Τιμόθεος 1 see that he is with you unafraid Paul is speaking as if **Timothy** coming was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He has already stated that he has sent Timothy to the Corinthians (see [4:17](../04/17.md)). He uses **if** here to indicate that he is not sure when Timothy will arrive, not that he is unsure if Timothy will arrive at all. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. If possible, include the idea that the time of Timothy’s arrival is uncertain. Alternate translation: “when Timothy eventually comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1CO 16 10 axhg grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν…ἔλθῃ Τιμόθεος 1 see that he is with you unafraid Paul is speaking as if **Timothy** coming was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He has already stated that he has sent Timothy to the Corinthians (see [4:17](../04/17.md)). He uses **if** here to indicate that he is not sure when Timothy will arrive, not that he is unsure if Timothy will arrive at all. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. If possible, include the idea that the time of Timothy’s arrival is uncertain. Alternate translation: “when Timothy eventually comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1CO 16 10 as9e translate-names Τιμόθεος 1 see that he is with you unafraid **Timothy** is the name of a man. He was one of Paul’s closest and most trusted companions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1CO 16 10 b83r figs-go ἔλθῃ 1 see that he is with you unafraid Here Paul is speaking about how Timothy will visit the Corinthians. Use a word in your language that refers to a person arriving where someone lives to visit them. Alternate translation: “visits you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) 1CO 16 10 p6vb figs-idiom βλέπετε ἵνα 1 see that he is with you unafraid Here, **see that** refers to carefully doing something or making sure that something happens. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **see that** with a comparable phrase. Alternate translation: “ensure that” or “be careful that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) diff --git a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv index 6e452bd83e..e27c167d65 100644 --- a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv @@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 3 8 utk3 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι νῦν ζῶμεν, ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since you are remaining faithful to the Lord Jesus, we are now refreshed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 3 8 y1vb figs-hyperbole ὅτι νῦν ζῶμεν 1 we live Here, **For now we live** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how thankful he is that the Thessalonians **stand firm** in the Christian faith (See [3:7](../03/07.md)). Paul is not trying to say that he was dead. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows thankfulness. Alternate translation (replace the comma): “O how we are now refreshed!” or “O how we now feel alive!” or “Certainly now we thrive!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1TH 3 8 x4zn figs-idiom ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Here, the term **stand firm** is an idiom meaning “remain faithful.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when you remain faithful to the Lord” or “if you continue unwavering in your relationship with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 3 8 zbyo grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you are remaining faithful to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1TH 3 8 zbyo grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you are remaining faithful to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1TH 3 8 hk91 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Paul speaks of the Thessalonian church as though they were occupying space inside the Lord Jesus. Here, this metaphor, **in the Lord**, could express these ideas: (1) devotion to Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are really devoted to the Lord Jesus” (2) relationship with Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are truly standing firm in your relationship with the Lord Jesus” (3) union with Jesus. Alternate translation: “all of you are firmly united to the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 3 8 e3pe figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς 1 if you stand firm in the Lord Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize his joy for the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternative translation: “indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 3 9 pzq7 figs-rquestion τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν δι’ ὑμᾶς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν. 1 For what thanks are we able to give back to God concerning you, for all the joy in which we rejoice before our God because of you, Paul is using a rhetorical question that continues to the end of [3:10](../03/10.md) in order to emphasize the apostles’ thankful joy for the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness to God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We could not possibly thank God enough for what he has done for you! When we pray to our God, we greatly rejoice because of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) diff --git a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv index 89ec4adb8b..bd56733f8a 100644 --- a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 1 5 rs3b figs-explicit ἔνδειγμα τῆς δικαίας κρίσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς 1 The **evidence** that Paul is referring to here is the faithful endurance of the Thessalonian believers while suffering persecution, which he mentioned in verse 4. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may also be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Your endurance while suffering is a clear indication of God’s righteous judgment, that he considers you worthy” or “Your faithfulness through persecution shows that God is just and right to consider you worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 1 5 dad9 figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 for you to be considered worthy of the kingdom of God You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God will consider you worthy to be part of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 5 xm2g figs-explicit ὑπὲρ ἧς καὶ πάσχετε 1 Here, **also** could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers are suffering for the kingdom of God as well as being counted worthy of it. Alternate translation: “being a part of which is also the reason that you are suffering” (2) the Thessalonian believers are suffering along with other believers. Alternate translation: “which is why you are going through sufferings along with many others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TH 1 6 cxx1 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ 1 if indeed it is righteous for God Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is just” or “for God is certainly right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +2TH 1 6 cxx1 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ 1 if indeed it is righteous for God Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is just” or “for God is certainly right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 2TH 1 6 id3i figs-metaphor παρὰ Θεῷ, ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 for God to return affliction to those who are afflicting you Here, **to return** means to cause someone to experience the same thing that they did to someone else as though the same action were bouncing back onto the people who did that action. Use a natural expression for this kind of reciprocal action. Alternate translation: “for God to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “for God to pay back those who are afflicting you” “for God to do the same to those who are afflicting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 1 6 zemk figs-abstractnouns ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “to trouble those who are troubling you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TH 1 7 hxy2 figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμῖν…ἄνεσιν 1 and relief to you The words **and relief to you** continue the description of what God is right “to return” to people (verse 6). If this would not be understood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and it is righteous for God to give relief to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) diff --git a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv index 6388672b41..c46c2978f6 100644 --- a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ PHM 1 16 bynb ὑπὲρ δοῦλον 1 Alternate translation: “more valuab PHM 1 16 f8tz figs-metaphor ἀδελφὸν 1 a beloved brother Here, **brother** is a metaphor for a fellow believer. Alternative translation, “spiritual brother” or “brother in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHM 1 16 qxi0 ἀγαπητόν 1 Alternate translation: “dear” or “precious” PHM 1 16 scj1 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 in the Lord Alternate translation: “in the fellowship of brotherhood through Jesus” or “in the fellowship of believers in the Lord” -PHM 1 17 e1j2 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…με ἔχεις κοινωνόν 1 if you have me as a partner Paul is writing in a way that makes it seem as though it is possible that Philemon does not consider that Paul is his partner, but he knows that Philemon does consider Paul to be his partner. This is a way of getting Philemon to agree on one thing (that Paul is a partner) so that he will agree to the other thing (to receive Onesimus). If your language does not state something as uncertain if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have me as a partner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +PHM 1 17 e1j2 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…με ἔχεις κοινωνόν 1 if you have me as a partner Paul is writing in a way that makes it seem as though it is possible that Philemon does not consider that Paul is his partner, but he knows that Philemon does consider Paul to be his partner. This is a way of getting Philemon to agree on one thing (that Paul is a partner) so that he will agree to the other thing (to receive Onesimus). If your language does not state something as uncertain if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have me as a partner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) PHM 1 17 e0es grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 **Therefore** means that what came before this word is the reason for what comes after it. It may be that Paul intends for everything that came before to be the reason, because this word also indicates that Paul is now coming to the main point of the letter. Use a natural method in your language to indicate this transition. Alternate translation: “Because of all of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) PHM 1 17 d56r figs-ellipsis προσλαβοῦ αὐτὸν ὡς ἐμέ. 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words here that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “receive him just as you would receive me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) PHM 1 18 nq4j grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δέ τι ἠδίκησέν σε ἢ ὀφείλει 1 Onesimus certainly did wrong to Philemon by running away, and he probably also stole some of Philemon’s property. But Paul is stating these things as uncertain in order to be polite. If your language does not use a conditional statement in this way, then use a more natural way to state this. Alternate translation: “But whatever he has taken or whatever wrong he has done to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index d8be469f2d..c86a5dd7c4 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 5 xsp2 figs-explicit ἐν καιρῷ ἐσχάτῳ 1 Here, **the last time** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when Jesus returns to the world to judge everyone and vindicate those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the last time, when Jesus returns and judges everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 6 p1ta writing-pronouns ἐν ᾧ 1 Here, **this** could refer to: (1) the “last time” referred to at the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation: “About this last time” (2) everything described in [verses 3–5](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “In all of this that I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1PE 1 6 hy8d grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν ᾧ ἀγαλλιᾶσθε 1 In this you greatly rejoice **In** here introduces the reason why Peter’s readers rejoice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “On account of this you greatly rejoice” or “Because of this you greatly rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1PE 1 6 dtvb grammar-connect-condition-fact ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary, and it is, to have been distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1PE 1 6 dtvb grammar-connect-condition-fact ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary, and it is, to have been distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1PE 1 6 a2bq figs-activepassive ὀλίγον ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες ἐν ποικίλοις πειρασμοῖς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary for various trials to distress you a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 1 7 vvp1 figs-metaphor τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως…διὰ πυρὸς δὲ δοκιμαζομένου 1 so that the proof of your faith Here Peter speaks of **faith**, as if it were gold that is refined by passing it through **fire**. He also uses **fire** to refer to the hardships that test how well believers trust in Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the genuineness of your faith … but being tested by hardships the way fire tests gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 7 ct3n figs-abstractnouns τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως 1 the proof of your faith If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **genuineness** and **faith**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the fact that you genuinely believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 16 e6el writing-quotations γέγραπται 1 Here Peter uses **it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Leviticus 11:44](../lev/11/44.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1PE 1 16 tt52 figs-declarative ἅγιοι ἔσεσθε 1 Peter quotes God using a future statement to give a command. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a command. Alternate translation: “You must be holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) 1PE 1 16 s8kz figs-123person ὅτι ἐγὼ ἅγιος 1 You will be holy, because I am holy In this quotation from the Old Testament, **I** refers to God. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “because I, God, am holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -1PE 1 17 x0xl grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἐπικαλεῖσθε 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because you call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1PE 1 17 x0xl grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…ἐπικαλεῖσθε 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because you call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1PE 1 17 c53b figs-explicit τὸν ἀπροσωπολήμπτως κρίνοντα 1 This phrase refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “God, who judges impartially” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 17 s6gv figs-metaphor τὸν τῆς παροικίας ὑμῶν χρόνον 1 conduct yourselves in fear during the time of your journey Here Peter speaks of his readers as if they were people living in a foreign land far away from their homes. Like people living away from home, so are Christians living away from their home in heaven. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “during the time that you are living away from your true home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 18 pcm5 figs-infostructure οὐ φθαρτοῖς, ἀργυρίῳ ἢ χρυσίῳ, ἐλυτρώθητε ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ὑμῶν ἀναστροφῆς πατροπαραδότου 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “you have been redeemed from your futile behavior handed down from your fathers, not with perishable things, with silver or with gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 2 ypy6 figs-metaphor αὐξηθῆτε 1 you may grow up Peter speaks of believers advancing in the knowledge of God and faithfulness to him as if they were children growing up. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you may mature in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 2 vg76 figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 to salvation If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “until you are saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 2 2 wmw2 figs-explicit εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 Here, **salvation** refers to when Jesus returns and God completes the **salvation** of his people. Peter also uses this meaning for **salvation** in [1:5](../01/05.md). See how you translated **salvation** there. Alternate translation: “until God saves you completely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 2 3 uja9 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐγεύσασθε 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have tasted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1PE 2 3 uja9 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐγεύσασθε 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have tasted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1PE 2 3 tui9 figs-metaphor εἰ ἐγεύσασθε 1 if you have tasted that the Lord is kind Peter uses **tasted** to refer to personally experiencing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if you have experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 3 hruw figs-quotemarks ἐγεύσασθε ὅτι χρηστὸς ὁ Κύριος 1 This clause is a paraphrase of [Psalm 34:8](../psa/34/08.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 2 4 n5pm figs-explicit πρὸς ὃν προσερχόμενοι 1 Here, **coming** could indicate: (1) a factual statement, as in the UST. (2) a command, in which case “being built up” in the next verse would also be a command. Alternate translation: “Come to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) diff --git a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv index 4edb3d4cf5..eeab74d21e 100644 --- a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv @@ -271,7 +271,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 2 28 d4ql figs-synecdoche μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 may not be put to shame by him John is using the word **him**, meaning Jesus, to mean the presence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “we will not be ashamed to be in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1JN 2 28 j145 figs-activepassive μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 may not be put to shame by him If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “we will not be ashamed to be in his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 2 28 x7ic ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 at his coming Alternate translation: “when he returns to earth” -1JN 2 29 j146 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν εἰδῆτε ὅτι δίκαιός ἐστιν 1 If you know that he is righteous John is using the form of conditional possibility here, but he is stating something that is actually true. In Greek, this was a way of affirming that the part that follows this statement is also true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1JN 2 29 j146 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν εἰδῆτε ὅτι δίκαιός ἐστιν 1 If you know that he is righteous John is using the form of conditional possibility here, but he is stating something that is actually true. In Greek, this was a way of affirming that the part that follows this statement is also true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1JN 2 29 j147 writing-pronouns ἐστιν…αὐτοῦ 1 he is … him The pronouns **he** and **him** likely refer to God the Father, since in the next two verses John says that believers are “children of God,” and he speaks in this verse of those who have **been begotten from him**. Alternate translation: “God is … God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 2 29 j148 figs-abstractnouns πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην 1 everyone who does righteousness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an adjective such as “right.” Alternate translation: “everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 2 29 u6er figs-activepassive πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγέννηται 1 everyone who does righteousness has been begotten from him If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God is the father of everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -481,9 +481,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 4 10 j274 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus. Alternate translation: “his Son Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 4 10 b39j figs-abstractnouns ἀπέστειλεν τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ, ἱλασμὸν περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν 1 sent his Son as the propitiation for our sins If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **propitiation** by stating the meaning behind it with an equivalent expression. See how you translated the term in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “sent his Son to be the offering that made him no longer angry with us because of our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 4 11 i4tf figs-nominaladj ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved See how you translated **Beloved** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1JN 4 11 g4gu grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς ἠγάπησεν ἡμᾶς 1 if God thus loved us John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because God loved us in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1JN 4 11 g4gu grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς ἠγάπησεν ἡμᾶς 1 if God thus loved us John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because God loved us in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1JN 4 11 dy86 grammar-connect-condition-fact οὕτως 1 The word **thus** refers to the manner in which God showed his love to us, as described in verses 9 and 10. Alternate translation: “in that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -1JN 4 12 j275 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν ἀγαπῶμεν ἀλλήλους, ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ἡμῖν μένει, καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη αὐτοῦ τετελειωμένη ἐν ἡμῖν ἐστιν 1 If we love one another, God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us John is speaking of a real situation as if it were a hypothetical condition. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is already real, and if your readers might that what John is saying is not real, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But as we love each other, God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us” or “But we do love each other, so that means that God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1JN 4 12 j275 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν ἀγαπῶμεν ἀλλήλους, ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ἡμῖν μένει, καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη αὐτοῦ τετελειωμένη ἐν ἡμῖν ἐστιν 1 If we love one another, God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us John is speaking of a real situation as if it were a hypothetical condition. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is already real, and if your readers might think that what John is saying is not real, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But as we love each other, God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us” or “But we do love each other, so that means that God remains in us, and his love is perfected in us”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1JN 4 12 sh9q figs-metaphor ὁ Θεὸς ἐν ἡμῖν μένει 1 God remains in us See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as in [2:6](../02/06.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “God continues to have a close relationship with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 4 12 vt14 figs-activepassive ἡ ἀγάπη αὐτοῦ τετελειωμένη ἐν ἡμῖν ἐστιν 1 his love is perfected in us See how you translated the similar expression in [2:5](../02/05.md). In this case, it is clear that John is referring to God’s love for us, rather than to our love for God. Alternate translation: “God’s love has achieved its purpose in our lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 4 13 gj7p ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι ἐν αὐτῷ μένομεν, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν ἡμῖν, ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Πνεύματος αὐτοῦ δέδωκεν ἡμῖν 1 In this we know that we remain in him and he in us: that he has given us of his Spirit This verse is very similar to the second half of [3:24](../03/24.md). See how you translated that verse. **In this** may set up an awkward sentence in your language. If so, try wording it in other ways. Alternate translation: “This is how we know that we remain in him, and he in us: He has given us of his Spirit” or “We know that we remain in him, and he in us, because he has given us of his Spirit” @@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 5 7 qpab figs-personification οἱ μαρτυροῦντες 1 Here, John speaks of water and blood as though they were people who could **testify**, or speak about what they saw. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “ways that God has given us to know that he sent Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1JN 5 8 j320 figs-metonymy τὸ ὕδωρ, καὶ τὸ αἷμα 1 the water and the blood See how you decided to translate the terms **water** and **blood** in [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: (1) “the baptism of Jesus and his death on the cross” or (2) “the birth of Jesus and his death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 5 8 j321 figs-idiom οἱ τρεῖς εἰς τὸ ἕν εἰσιν 1 the three are unto the one This is an idiom. If this does not communicate well in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “these three all say the same thing” or “these three all agree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1JN 5 9 j322 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων λαμβάνομεν 1 If we receive the testimony of men John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something this way if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since we receive the testimony of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1JN 5 9 j322 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων λαμβάνομεν 1 If we receive the testimony of men John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something this way if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since we receive the testimony of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1JN 5 9 ai6a figs-idiom τὴν μαρτυρίαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων λαμβάνομεν 1 we receive the testimony of men This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “we believe people when they give testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 5 9 j323 figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 of men Although the term **men** is masculine, John is using the word in a generic sense that could include both men and women. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1JN 5 9 k2de figs-explicit ἡ μαρτυρία τοῦ Θεοῦ μείζων ἐστίν 1 the testimony of God is greater The word **greater** implicitly means that the testimony of God is more reliable than human testimony, since God knows everything and God always tells the truth. Alternate translation: “the testimony of God is more reliable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -608,7 +608,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 5 14 j333 writing-pronouns αὐτόν…αὐτοῦ…ἀκούει 1 him … his … he listens The pronouns **him**, **his**, and **he** refer to God in this verse. Consider whether it might be helpful to your readers or more natural in your language to use the name “God” in one or more of these instances. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 5 14 at5n ἐάν τι αἰτώμεθα κατὰ τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ 1 if we ask anything according to his will Alternate translation: “if we ask for the things that God wants for us” 1JN 5 14 j334 figs-idiom ἀκούει ἡμῶν 1 he listens to us As in [4:5](../04/05.md), the word **listens** is an idiom. However, the meaning here is different than the meaning there, which was, “is persuaded by.” Rather, here it refers to God being willing to grant what we ask. Alternate translation: “he is willing to give it to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1JN 5 15 j335 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀκούει ἡμῶν 1 if we know that he listens to us John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true, and if your readers might that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since we know that he listens to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1JN 5 15 j335 grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν οἴδαμεν ὅτι ἀκούει ἡμῶν 1 if we know that he listens to us John is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a possibility if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what John is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since we know that he listens to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) 1JN 5 15 j336 figs-idiom ἀκούει ἡμῶν 1 he listens to us As in [5:14](../05/14.md), the word **listens** is an idiom. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “he is willing to give us what we ask for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 5 15 j337 figs-explicit ἀκούει ἡμῶν 1 he listens to us It may be helpful to repeat the condition that John specifies in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “he is disposed to give us what we ask for if it is according to his will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 5 15 j338 writing-pronouns ἀκούει…αὐτοῦ 1 he listens … him The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to God in this verse. Consider whether it might be more natural in your language to use the name “God” for **he** and to say **him** later in the verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) From 3ea39374b522ab07ad1fd63f2ed78929ba8a8fd3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 18:37:14 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 349/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index b83c921573..b9ca9b03e9 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -GAL front intro i6u9 0 # Introduction to Galatians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of Galatians\n\n1. Paul declares his authority as an apostle of Jesus Christ; he says that he is surprised by the false teachings that the Christians in Galatia have accepted from other people (1:1-10).\n1. Paul says that people are saved by trusting in Christ alone, not by keeping the law (1:11-2:21).\n1. God puts people right with himself only when they trust in Christ; the example of Abraham; the curse which the law brings (and not a means of salvation); slavery and freedom compared and illustrated by Hagar and Sarah (3:1-4:31).\n1. When people are joined to Christ, they become free from having to keep the law of Moses. They are also free to live as the Holy Spirit guides them. They are free to refuse the demands of sin. They are free to bear each other’s burdens (5:1-6:10).\n1. Paul warns the Christians not to trust in being circumcised and in keeping the law of Moses. Instead, they must trust in Christ (6:11-18).\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Galatians?\n\nPaul wrote the book of Galatians. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he began to trust in Jesus Christ, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus and establishing churches.\n\nIt is uncertain when Paul wrote this letter and where he was when he wrote it. Some Bible scholars think Paul was in the city of Ephesus and wrote this letter after the second time he traveled to tell people about Jesus and establish churches. Other scholars think Paul was in the city of Antioch in Syria and wrote the letter soon after the first time he traveled.\n\n### What is the Book of Galatians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to both Jewish and non-Jewish Christians in the region of Galatia. He wanted to write against the false teachers who said that Christians need to follow the law of Moses. Paul defended the gospel by explaining that a person is saved by believing in Jesus Christ. In the book of Galatians Paul explains that people are saved as result of believing in Jesus and not as a result of obeying the law of Moses and he proves this by using various Old Testament passages to illustrate this truth. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Galatians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Galatia.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What does it mean to “live like Jews” (2:14)?\n\nTo “live like Jews” means to obey the law of Moses, even though one trusts in Christ. The people who taught that it was necessary to follow the law of Moses in addition to believing in Jesus were called “Judaizers.”\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### How did Paul use the terms “law” and “grace” in the Book of Galatians?\n\nThese terms are used in a unique way in Galatians. There is an important teaching in Galatians about Christian living. Under the law of Moses, righteous or holy living required a person to obey a set of rules and regulations. As Christians, holy living is now motivated by grace. This means that Christians have freedom in Christ and are not required to obey a specific set of rules. Instead, Christians are to live a holy life because they are thankful that God has been so kind to them. This is called “the law of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” and “in Christ Jesus?” \n\nPaul uses the spatial metaphor “in Christ” or the related phrase “in Christ Jesus” very frequently in this letter. This expression occurs with a metaphorical meaning in 1:22; 2:4,17; 3:14, 26, 28; and 5:6. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the people who believe in him. This metaphor emphasizes that believers are as closely united to Christ as if they were inside him. Paul believes that this is true for all believers, and sometimes he uses “in Christ” simply to identify that what he is speaking about is true for those who believe in Jesus such as in 2:4. Other times, he emphasizes union with Christ as the means or the basis for some statement or exhortation. Sometimes when Paul uses the phrase “in Christ” he intends a different meaning. See, for example, 2:16 where Paul says “we also believed in Christ Jesus, so that we might be justified by faith in Christ” and see 2:17 where Paul spoke of Christ being the object of faith when he said “when we seek for God to justify us in Christ.” See the notes on specific verses for help in understanding the contextual meaning of “in Christ” and related phrases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\nPlease see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Galatians?\n* “Foolish Galatians, whose evil eye has harmed you? Was not Jesus Christ depicted as crucified before your eyes” (3:1)? The ULT, UST, and the other modern versions have this reading. However, older versions of the Bible add, “[so] that ye should not obey the truth.” Translators are advised not to include this expression. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have the passage, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +GAL front intro i6u9 0 # Introduction to Galatians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of Galatians\n\n1. Paul declares his authority as an apostle of Jesus Christ; he says that he is surprised by the false teachings that the Christians in Galatia have accepted from other people (1:1-10).\n1. Paul says that people are saved by trusting in Christ alone, not by keeping the law (1:11-2:21).\n1. God puts people right with himself only when they trust in Christ; the example of Abraham; the curse which the law brings (and not a means of salvation); slavery and freedom compared and illustrated by Hagar and Sarah (3:1-4:31).\n1. When people are joined to Christ, they become free from having to keep the law of Moses. They are also free to live as the Holy Spirit guides them. They are free to refuse the demands of sin. They are free to bear each other’s burdens (5:1-6:10).\n1. Paul warns the Christians not to trust in being circumcised and in keeping the law of Moses. Instead, they must trust in Christ (6:11-18).\n\n### Who wrote the Book of Galatians?\n\nPaul wrote the book of Galatians. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he began to trust in Jesus Christ, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus and establishing churches.\n\nIt is uncertain when Paul wrote this letter and where he was when he wrote it. Some Bible scholars think Paul was in the city of Ephesus and wrote this letter after the second time he traveled to tell people about Jesus and establish churches. Other scholars think Paul was in the city of Antioch in Syria and wrote the letter soon after the first time he traveled.\n\n### What is the Book of Galatians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to both Jewish and non-Jewish Christians in the region of Galatia. He wanted to write against the false teachers who said that Christians need to follow the law of Moses. Paul defended the gospel by explaining that a person is saved by believing in Jesus Christ. In the book of Galatians Paul explains that people are saved as result of believing in Jesus and not as a result of obeying the law of Moses and he proves this by using various Old Testament passages to illustrate this truth. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Galatians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Galatia.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What does it mean to “live like Jews” (2:14)?\n\nTo “live like Jews” means to obey the law of Moses, even though one trusts in Christ. The people who taught that it was necessary to follow the law of Moses in addition to believing in Jesus were called “Judaizers.”\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### How did Paul use the terms “law” and “grace” in the Book of Galatians?\n\nThese terms are used in a unique way in Galatians. There is an important teaching in Galatians about Christian living. Under the law of Moses, righteous or holy living required a person to obey a set of rules and regulations. As Christians, holy living is now motivated by grace. This means that Christians have freedom in Christ and are not required to obey a specific set of rules. Instead, Christians are to live a holy life because they are thankful that God has been so kind to them. This is called “the law of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” and “in Christ Jesus?” \n\nPaul uses the spatial metaphor “in Christ” or the related phrase “in Christ Jesus” very frequently in this letter. This expression occurs with a metaphorical meaning in 1:22; 2:4,17; 3:14, 26, 28; and 5:6. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the people who believe in him. This metaphor emphasizes that believers are as closely united to Christ as if they were inside him. Paul believes that this is true for all believers, and sometimes he uses “in Christ” simply to identify that what he is speaking about is true for those who believe in Jesus. Other times, he emphasizes union with Christ as the means or the basis for some statement or exhortation. Sometimes when Paul uses the phrase “in Christ” he intends a different meaning. See, for example, 2:16 where Paul says “we also believed in Christ Jesus, so that we might be justified by faith in Christ” and see 2:17 where Paul spoke of Christ being the object of faith when he said “when we seek for God to justify us in Christ.” See the notes on specific verses for help in understanding the contextual meaning of “in Christ” and related phrases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\nPlease see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Galatians?\n* “Foolish Galatians, whose evil eye has harmed you? Was not Jesus Christ depicted as crucified before your eyes” (3:1)? The ULT, UST, and the other modern versions have this reading. However, older versions of the Bible add, “[so] that ye should not obey the truth.” Translators are advised not to include this expression. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have the passage, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) GAL 1 intro f3n5 0 # Galatians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul started this letter differently than his other letters. He adds that he was “not an apostle from men nor by human agency, but through Jesus Christ and God the Father, who raised him from the dead ones.” Paul probably included these words because false teachers were opposing him and trying to undermine his authority.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Heresy\n\nGod eternally saves people only through the true, biblical gospel. God condemns any other version of the gospel. Paul asks God to curse those who teach a false gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/curse]])\n\n### Paul’s qualifications\n\nSome people in the early church were teaching that Gentiles needed to obey the law of Moses. To refute this teaching, in verses 13-16 Paul explains how he was formerly a zealous Jew. But Paul still needed God to save him through believing in Jesus. As a Jew, and the apostle to Gentile people, Paul was uniquely qualified to address this issue. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “You are turning so quickly to a different gospel”\n\nThe Book of Galatians is one of Paul’s earliest letters in Scripture. It shows that heresies troubled even the early church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 1 1 o4ns Παῦλος 1 Here, Paul is introducing himself as the author of this letter. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Use that here. Alternate translation: “This letter is from me, Paul” GAL 1 1 uhhp figs-123person Παῦλος 1 Paul is speaking of himself in the third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person. Alternate translation: “This letter is from me, Paul” or “I, Paul” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person) From 585eb0459af2b2fc5e08bec39b57ded1b068a354 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 14:38:08 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 350/446] Reduced triple
in completed NT books to double
--- en_tn_50-EPH.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_54-2TH.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_55-1TI.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_64-2JN.tsv | 2 +- 5 files changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv index 2664fb2141..ca4cd25bb9 100644 --- a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -EPH front intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of Ephesians

1. Greeting and prayer for the spiritual blessings in Christ (1:1-23)
1. Sin and salvation (2:1-10)
1. Unity and peace (2:11-22)
1. Mystery of Christ in the believers, made known (3:1-13)
1. Prayer for riches of his glory to make the believers strong (3:14-21)
1. Unity of the Spirit, building up the Body of Christ (4:1-16)
1. New life (4:17-32)
1. Imitators of God (5:1-21)
1. 1 Wives and husbands; children and parents; slaves and masters (5:22-6:9)
11. Armor of God (6:10-20)
1. Final greeting (6:21-24)

### Who wrote the Book of Ephesians?

Paul wrote Ephesians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

The Apostle Paul helped start the church in Ephesus on one of his trips. He also lived in Ephesus for a year and a half and helped the believers there. Paul probably wrote this letter while he was in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Ephesians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Ephesus to explain God’s love for them in Christ Jesus. He described the blessings that God was giving them because they were now united with Christ. He explained that all believers are united together, whether Jew or Gentile. Paul also wanted to encourage them to live in a way that pleases God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Ephesians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Ephesus” or “A Letter to the Christians in Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the “mystery” in the book of Ephesians?

The expression translated in the ULT as “mystery” or “hidden” occurs six times. By it, Paul always meant something that God had to reveal to human beings because they could not know it on their own. It always referred to something about how God planned to save mankind. Sometimes it was about his plan to bring about peace between himself and mankind. Sometimes it was more specifically about his plan to save both Jews and Gentiles by uniting them through Christ. This hidden truth was that Gentiles are now able to benefit from the promises of Christ as equals with the Jews.

### What did Paul say about salvation and righteous living?

Paul said much about salvation and righteous living in this letter and in many of his letters. He said that God has been very kind and saved Christians because they believe in Jesus. Therefore, after they become Christians, they should live in a righteous way to show that they have faith in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers who may read this letter. The three exceptions to this are: 5:14, 6:2, and 6:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What did Paul mean by the “new self” or the “new man”?

When Paul spoke of the “new self” or the “new man,” he meant the new nature that a believer receives from the Holy Spirit. This new nature was created in God’s image (See: 4:24). The phrase “new man” is also used for God bringing about peace between Jews and Gentiles. God brought them together as one people group that belong to him (See: 2:15).

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Ephesians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of several ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the use of “holy” to express the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another use of “holy” is to express the idea that God is perfect and faultless. A third use is to express the idea that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “saints.” (See: 1:1, 4)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “saint” or “saints.”
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 3:5)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 20; 2:6, 7, 10, 13, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22; 3:5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 21; 4:1, 17, 21, 32; 5:8, 18, 19; 6:1, 10, 18, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Ephesians?
* “in Ephesus” (1:1). Some of the earliest manuscripts do not include this phrase. It is likely that Paul intended this letter to be read in many churches, including Ephesus and many other cities. He may have originally left a blank space for the city name to be filled in by those copying the letter and carrying it to different cities. But “Ephesus” is the only name found on manuscripts that have a city name. Therefore, the ULT, UST, and many modern versions include it.
* “because we are members of his body” (5:30). Most modern versions, including the ULT and UST, read in this way. Some older versions read, “because we are members of his body and of his bones.” Translators might decide to choose the second reading if other versions in their area have it that way. If translators choose the second reading, they should put the additional words inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they are probably not original to the book of Ephesians.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +EPH front intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of Ephesians

1. Greeting and prayer for the spiritual blessings in Christ (1:1-23)
1. Sin and salvation (2:1-10)
1. Unity and peace (2:11-22)
1. Mystery of Christ in the believers, made known (3:1-13)
1. Prayer for riches of his glory to make the believers strong (3:14-21)
1. Unity of the Spirit, building up the Body of Christ (4:1-16)
1. New life (4:17-32)
1. Imitators of God (5:1-21)
1. 1 Wives and husbands; children and parents; slaves and masters (5:22-6:9)
11. Armor of God (6:10-20)
1. Final greeting (6:21-24)

### Who wrote the Book of Ephesians?

Paul wrote Ephesians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

The Apostle Paul helped start the church in Ephesus on one of his trips. He also lived in Ephesus for a year and a half and helped the believers there. Paul probably wrote this letter while he was in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Ephesians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Ephesus to explain God’s love for them in Christ Jesus. He described the blessings that God was giving them because they were now united with Christ. He explained that all believers are united together, whether Jew or Gentile. Paul also wanted to encourage them to live in a way that pleases God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Ephesians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Ephesus” or “A Letter to the Christians in Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the “mystery” in the book of Ephesians?

The expression translated in the ULT as “mystery” or “hidden” occurs six times. By it, Paul always meant something that God had to reveal to human beings because they could not know it on their own. It always referred to something about how God planned to save mankind. Sometimes it was about his plan to bring about peace between himself and mankind. Sometimes it was more specifically about his plan to save both Jews and Gentiles by uniting them through Christ. This hidden truth was that Gentiles are now able to benefit from the promises of Christ as equals with the Jews.

### What did Paul say about salvation and righteous living?

Paul said much about salvation and righteous living in this letter and in many of his letters. He said that God has been very kind and saved Christians because they believe in Jesus. Therefore, after they become Christians, they should live in a righteous way to show that they have faith in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers who may read this letter. The three exceptions to this are: 5:14, 6:2, and 6:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What did Paul mean by the “new self” or the “new man”?

When Paul spoke of the “new self” or the “new man,” he meant the new nature that a believer receives from the Holy Spirit. This new nature was created in God’s image (See: 4:24). The phrase “new man” is also used for God bringing about peace between Jews and Gentiles. God brought them together as one people group that belong to him (See: 2:15).

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Ephesians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of several ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the use of “holy” to express the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another use of “holy” is to express the idea that God is perfect and faultless. A third use is to express the idea that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “saints.” (See: 1:1, 4)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “saint” or “saints.”
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 3:5)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 20; 2:6, 7, 10, 13, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22; 3:5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 21; 4:1, 17, 21, 32; 5:8, 18, 19; 6:1, 10, 18, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Ephesians?
* “in Ephesus” (1:1). Some of the earliest manuscripts do not include this phrase. It is likely that Paul intended this letter to be read in many churches, including Ephesus and many other cities. He may have originally left a blank space for the city name to be filled in by those copying the letter and carrying it to different cities. But “Ephesus” is the only name found on manuscripts that have a city name. Therefore, the ULT, UST, and many modern versions include it.
* “because we are members of his body” (5:30). Most modern versions, including the ULT and UST, read in this way. Some older versions read, “because we are members of his body and of his bones.” Translators might decide to choose the second reading if other versions in their area have it that way. If translators choose the second reading, they should put the additional words inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they are probably not original to the book of Ephesians.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) EPH 1 intro fg42 0 # Ephesians 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### “I pray”

Paul structures part of this chapter like a prayer of praise to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is teaching the church in Ephesus. He also tells the Ephesians how he is praying for them.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Predestination

Many scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” See the use of the word “predestine” in 1:5, 11. Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]]) EPH 1 1 kx1g figs-you 0 General Information: Paul names himself as the writer of this letter to the believers in the church at Ephesus (and elsewhere). Except where noted, all instances of “you” and “your” refer to the Ephesian believers as well as to all believers, and so are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EPH 1 1 ilf2 Παῦλος, ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ…τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν 1 Paul, an apostle of Christ Jesus … to the saints who are Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and the intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, an apostle of Jesus Christ … write this letter to you, God’s holy people” diff --git a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv index bd56733f8a..6b40cb68aa 100644 --- a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -2TH front intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 2 Thessalonians

1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1-2)
1. Believers suffer from persecution (1:3-12)
* God uses persecution to increase faith, love, and endurance in believers (1:3-4)
* God is just: (1:5-12)
* God will make believers worthy of his kingdom
* God will give relief to believers
* God will punish those who persecute believers
1. Some believers misunderstand about the second coming of Christ (2:1-12)
* Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1-2)
* Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3-12)
1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian believers (2:13-17)
* Paul calls the Thessalonian believers to “stand firm” (2:13-15)
* Paul prays that God will comfort them (2:16-17)
1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1-5)
1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6-15)
1. Closing (3:16-17)

### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted believers. After he became a believer, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. Paul wrote this letter while he, Silvanus, and Timothy were staying in the city of Corinth.

### What is the book of 2 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return. He also warned them that they should not be idle but should work as they wait for Christ to return.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians/believers in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### How are pronouns used in this letter?

In this letter, the words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. If your language differentiates between inclusive and exclusive pronouns, use an exclusive pronoun for these. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])


In this letter, the words “you” and “your” are plural and refer to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 2 Thessalonians?

For the following verses, some ancient manuscripts have a different reading than others. The ULT follows the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate and puts the other reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in your area that your people are familiar with, consider using the reading that it follows. If not, translators are advised to follow the reading in the ULT.
* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Other versions follow the reading, “and the man of sin is revealed.”
* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. The other reading is, “For God chose you from the first/beginning for salvation.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2TH front intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 2 Thessalonians

1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1-2)
1. Believers suffer from persecution (1:3-12)
* God uses persecution to increase faith, love, and endurance in believers (1:3-4)
* God is just: (1:5-12)
* God will make believers worthy of his kingdom
* God will give relief to believers
* God will punish those who persecute believers
1. Some believers misunderstand about the second coming of Christ (2:1-12)
* Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1-2)
* Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3-12)
1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian believers (2:13-17)
* Paul calls the Thessalonian believers to “stand firm” (2:13-15)
* Paul prays that God will comfort them (2:16-17)
1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1-5)
1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6-15)
1. Closing (3:16-17)

### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted believers. After he became a believer, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. Paul wrote this letter while he, Silvanus, and Timothy were staying in the city of Corinth.

### What is the book of 2 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return. He also warned them that they should not be idle but should work as they wait for Christ to return.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians/believers in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### How are pronouns used in this letter?

In this letter, the words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. If your language differentiates between inclusive and exclusive pronouns, use an exclusive pronoun for these. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

In this letter, the words “you” and “your” are plural and refer to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 2 Thessalonians?

For the following verses, some ancient manuscripts have a different reading than others. The ULT follows the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate and puts the other reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in your area that your people are familiar with, consider using the reading that it follows. If not, translators are advised to follow the reading in the ULT.
* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Other versions follow the reading, “and the man of sin is revealed.”
* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. The other reading is, “For God chose you from the first/beginning for salvation.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 2TH 1 intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Verses 1-2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type in which the sender identified himself, then the recipient, then gave a greeting.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible.

A paradox occurs in verses 4-5 where Paul talks about the Thessalonian believers’ faithfulness through persecution as “evidence of the righteous judgment of God.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But the fact that God gave them the ability to persevere in their faith is evidence that God claims them as his own and will judge them as worthy of his kingdom. In verses 5-10, Paul goes on to explain more of God’s righteous judgment, that God will reward those who believe in him and that he will punish those who afflict his people. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4-5](./04.md))

Another paradox occurs in verse 9 where Paul describes the penalty for rejecting God as “eternal destruction.” Normally when something is destroyed it ceases to exist. But in this case, the people who reject God will experience eternal separation from God, as the verse goes on to explain. Being separated from God destroys all that was enjoyable about their lives, and this continuous destruction is what they experience through eternity. ([2 Thessalonians 1:9](../01/09.md)) 2TH 1 1 hm3e translate-names Σιλουανὸς 1 Silvanus **Silvanus** is the Latin form of “Silas.” **Silvanus** is the name of a man, the same person listed in the book of Acts as Paul’s fellow traveler. If your readers may not know that these two are the same person, you could use the name “Silas” in the text and “Silvanus” in the footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TH 1 1 ge00 figs-ellipsis Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 You may want to fill in the words necessary to make this a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy send this letter to the church” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis) diff --git a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv index 543a3bb2c5..9cc7d501c8 100644 --- a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1TI front intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Timothy

In this letter, Paul alternates between personal commands to Timothy that empower him to act as his representative and with his authority, and instructions for how followers of Jesus should live in community.

1. Greetings (1:1-2)
2. Paul commands Timothy to tell people not to teach false doctrines (1:3-20)
3. Paul gives instructions about how to re-establish order and decency in the church (2:1-15)
4. Paul gives instructions about how to ensure that elders and deacons are properly qualified (3:1-13)
5. Paul commands Timothy regarding his own personal conduct (3:14-5:2)
6. Paul gives instructions to ensure church support for worthy widows (5:3-16) and elders (5:17-20)
7. Paul commands Timothy that he must be impartial (5:21-25)
8. Paul gives instructions to ensure order in master-servant relationships (6:1-2a)
9. Paul commands Timothy regarding how he should teach and conduct himself (6:2b-16)
10. Paul gives instructions for how people who are rich should live (6:17-19)
11. Paul commands Timothy to guard what has been entrusted to his care (6:20-21a)
12. Closing blessing to the whole church (6:21b)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Timothy?

A man named Paul wrote 1 Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul may have written other letters to Timothy, but this is the earliest one that we still have. That is why it is known as 1 Timothy or First Timothy. Timothy was Paul’s disciple and close friend. Paul probably wrote this letter near the end of his life.

### What is the Book of 1 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed included church worship, qualifications for church leaders, and warnings against false teachers. This letter shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches while Timothy himself trained other leaders.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its customary title, “1 Timothy” or “First Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is discipleship?

Discipleship is the process of making people to be disciples of Christ. The goal of discipleship is to encourage other Christians to be more like Christ. This letter gives many instructions about how a leader should train a less mature Christian. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 Timothy?

In [6:5](../06/05.md), the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1TI front intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Timothy

In this letter, Paul alternates between personal commands to Timothy that empower him to act as his representative and with his authority, and instructions for how followers of Jesus should live in community.

1. Greetings (1:1-2)
2. Paul commands Timothy to tell people not to teach false doctrines (1:3-20)
3. Paul gives instructions about how to re-establish order and decency in the church (2:1-15)
4. Paul gives instructions about how to ensure that elders and deacons are properly qualified (3:1-13)
5. Paul commands Timothy regarding his own personal conduct (3:14-5:2)
6. Paul gives instructions to ensure church support for worthy widows (5:3-16) and elders (5:17-20)
7. Paul commands Timothy that he must be impartial (5:21-25)
8. Paul gives instructions to ensure order in master-servant relationships (6:1-2a)
9. Paul commands Timothy regarding how he should teach and conduct himself (6:2b-16)
10. Paul gives instructions for how people who are rich should live (6:17-19)
11. Paul commands Timothy to guard what has been entrusted to his care (6:20-21a)
12. Closing blessing to the whole church (6:21b)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Timothy?

A man named Paul wrote 1 Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul may have written other letters to Timothy, but this is the earliest one that we still have. That is why it is known as 1 Timothy or First Timothy. Timothy was Paul’s disciple and close friend. Paul probably wrote this letter near the end of his life.

### What is the Book of 1 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed included church worship, qualifications for church leaders, and warnings against false teachers. This letter shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches while Timothy himself trained other leaders.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its customary title, “1 Timothy” or “First Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is discipleship?

Discipleship is the process of making people to be disciples of Christ. The goal of discipleship is to encourage other Christians to be more like Christ. This letter gives many instructions about how a leader should train a less mature Christian. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 Timothy?

In [6:5](../06/05.md), the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1TI 1 intro a4v2 0 # 1 Timothy 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Metaphor

In this chapter Paul speaks of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.” 1TI 1 1 i3zz Παῦλος 1 Paul In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Immediately after introducing the writer, you might also want to indicate to whom the letter was written. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am the one writing this letter to you, Timothy” 1TI 1 1 xl6d κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν Θεοῦ 1 by the command of God Alternate translation: “by the authority of God” diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index abd575fed5..340fa04030 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy

1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1-2:13).
2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14-26).
3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1-4:8).
4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9-22).

### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?

Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.

### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?

As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”

In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?

For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.
* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”
* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy

1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1-2:13).
2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14-26).
3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1-4:8).
4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9-22).

### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?

Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.

### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?

As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”

In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?

For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.
* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”
* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 2TI 1 intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Persecution

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel. 2TI 1 1 p001 translate-names Παῦλος 1 Paul This is the name of a man, the author of the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 1 ha4l Παῦλος 1 Paul This letter follows the normal custom of the time by beginning with the name and identity of the author, then mentioning the recipient (in verse 2). Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am writing this letter” diff --git a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv index 57b2989cc6..09c502c804 100644 --- a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -2JN front intro vpa9 0 # Introduction to 2 John


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 John

1. Opening of letter (1:1-3)
2. Encouragement and the commandment to love one another (1:4-6)
3. Warning about false teachers (1:7-11)
4. Closing of letter (1:12-13)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 John?

The author of this letter identifies himself only as “the elder.” However, the content of 2 John is similar to the content in John’s gospel. This suggests that the apostle John wrote this letter, and he would have done so near the end of his life.

### To whom was the Book of 2 John written?

The author addresses this letter to someone he calls “the chosen lady” and to “her children” (1:1). Although this could refer to a specific woman and her children, that interpretation is unlikely. More probably, this is a figurative way to refer to a specific congregation and its members. This interpretation is supported by the way that John refers to the congregation with him as “the children of your chosen sister” in verse 13. This would be a readily understandable metaphor, since the word for “church” in Greek is a feminine noun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### What is the book of 2 John about?

It appears that John addressed this letter to a specific congregation of believers. John’s purpose in writing this letter to them was to warn his audience about false teachers. John did not want believers helping or giving money to false teachers.

He probably intended this message to be passed on to all believers in general.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 John” or “Second John.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Second Letter from John” or “The Second Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is hospitality?

Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. John wanted believers to offer hospitality to guests. However, he did not want believers to offer hospitality to false teachers.

### Who were the people John spoke against?

The people John spoke against may have been those who later became known as Gnostics. These people believed that the physical world was evil. Since the physical body was seen as evil, they did not think that God could become human. Therefore, they believed that Jesus was divine but denied that he was human. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the Book of 2 John?

In [1:12](../01/12.md), most modern versions of the Bible read “our joy.” There is another traditional reading that says “your joy.” If a version of the Bible already exists in your region, you should consider using the reading of that version in your translation. If not, you may wish to follow the reading that most Bible scholars consider to be authentic and say “our joy.” In this case, “our” would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2JN front intro vpa9 0 # Introduction to 2 John

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 John

1. Opening of letter (1:1-3)
2. Encouragement and the commandment to love one another (1:4-6)
3. Warning about false teachers (1:7-11)
4. Closing of letter (1:12-13)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 John?

The author of this letter identifies himself only as “the elder.” However, the content of 2 John is similar to the content in John’s gospel. This suggests that the apostle John wrote this letter, and he would have done so near the end of his life.

### To whom was the Book of 2 John written?

The author addresses this letter to someone he calls “the chosen lady” and to “her children” (1:1). Although this could refer to a specific woman and her children, that interpretation is unlikely. More probably, this is a figurative way to refer to a specific congregation and its members. This interpretation is supported by the way that John refers to the congregation with him as “the children of your chosen sister” in verse 13. This would be a readily understandable metaphor, since the word for “church” in Greek is a feminine noun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### What is the book of 2 John about?

It appears that John addressed this letter to a specific congregation of believers. John’s purpose in writing this letter to them was to warn his audience about false teachers. John did not want believers helping or giving money to false teachers.

He probably intended this message to be passed on to all believers in general.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 John” or “Second John.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Second Letter from John” or “The Second Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is hospitality?

Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. John wanted believers to offer hospitality to guests. However, he did not want believers to offer hospitality to false teachers.

### Who were the people John spoke against?

The people John spoke against may have been those who later became known as Gnostics. These people believed that the physical world was evil. Since the physical body was seen as evil, they did not think that God could become human. Therefore, they believed that Jesus was divine but denied that he was human. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the Book of 2 John?

In [1:12](../01/12.md), most modern versions of the Bible read “our joy.” There is another traditional reading that says “your joy.” If a version of the Bible already exists in your region, you should consider using the reading of that version in your translation. If not, you may wish to follow the reading that most Bible scholars consider to be authentic and say “our joy.” In this case, “our” would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 2JN 1 1 uspy figs-123person ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you could use the first person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “I, the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 2JN 1 1 z4tk figs-explicit ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder **The elder** likely means John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as **elder** either because of his old age, or because he is a leader in the church, or both. If you have a term for an older, respected leader, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, John, am writing this letter” or Alternate translation: “I, John the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2JN 1 1 y7hw figs-123person ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς 1 to the chosen lady and her children In this culture, letter writers would name the addressees next, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you could use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “to you, chosen lady, and to your children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) From 797f431802f4233433504fc25cadeef98ca8b434 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 18:41:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 351/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index b9ca9b03e9..a306925533 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 4 lyqj figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -GAL 2 4 uvjw figs-explicit ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **in Christ Jesus** refers to If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 2 4 uvjw figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union believers have with Christ. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe Paul’s meaning here. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what **enslave** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” GAL 2 6 afy6 figs-metonymy ἐμοὶ…οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο 1 added nothing to me Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 8c25513b0ae248f22843fa88df7849954c72e662 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 18:42:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 352/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index a306925533..50aa8e0b72 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 4 lyqj figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -GAL 2 4 uvjw figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union believers have with Christ. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe Paul’s meaning here. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 4 uvjw figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union that believers have with Christ. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe Paul’s meaning. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what **enslave** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” GAL 2 6 afy6 figs-metonymy ἐμοὶ…οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο 1 added nothing to me Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 7416808b74a192a094d3681c25ffa37d985959d4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 18:45:45 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 353/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 50aa8e0b72..0c6a882e9b 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 4 lyqj figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 4 uvjw figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union that believers have with Christ. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe Paul’s meaning. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what **enslave** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what **enslave** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” GAL 2 6 afy6 figs-metonymy ἐμοὶ…οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο 1 added nothing to me Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) GAL 2 9 he6q figs-metaphor δοκοῦντες στῦλοι εἶναι 1 built up the church Here, **pillars** refers to men who were leaders of the believers in Jerusalem and taught people the word of God. Alternate translation: “who were like pillars of the church” or “who were recognized as important leaders” or “who were considered to have authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From b95d71c84cb7bacf4b12e107a89b7c05fb2ab811 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 18:54:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 354/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index c86a5dd7c4..2c2044751a 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 1 g3n3 figs-abstractnouns ἐκλεκτοῖς παρεπιδήμοις διασπορᾶς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **elect** and **dispersion**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to those whom God has elected and exiled among those whom God has dispersed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 1 u3zc figs-metaphor ἐκλεκτοῖς παρεπιδήμοις διασπορᾶς 1 to the elect foreigners of the dispersion When Peter calls his readers **exiles**, he could mean: (1) they are **exiles** because they are far away from their true home in heaven. Alternate translation: “to the elect exiles of the dispersion who are far from their home in heaven” (2) they are **exiles** because they were forced to leave their homes and go far away to Pontus, Galatia, Cappadocia, Asia, and Bithynia. Alternate translation: “to you elect exiles of the dispersion who are far away from your homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 1 bg47 figs-metaphor διασπορᾶς 1 Here, **dispersion** could refer to: (1) groups of Gentile Christians who were spread throughout the world instead of in their true home in heaven. In this case, **dispersion** would have a similar meaning to **exiles** and would add emphasis. Alternate translation: “among those dispersed outside of their true home in heaven” (2) the groups of Jewish people who were spread across the Greek-speaking world that was outside of the land of Israel, which is the common technical meaning for this word. Alternate translation: “among the dispersed Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 1 1 qkl8 translate-names Πόντου, Γαλατίας, Καππαδοκίας, Ἀσίας, καὶ Βιθυνίας 1 Cappadocia … Bithynia **Pontus, Galatia, Cappadocia, Asia, and Bithynia** are names of Roman provinces that were located in what is now the country of Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +1PE 1 1 qkl8 translate-names Πόντου, Γαλατίας, Καππαδοκίας, Ἀσίας, καὶ Βιθυνίας 1 Cappadocia … Bithynia **Pontus**, **Galatia**, **Cappadocia**, **Asia**, and **Bithynia** are names of Roman provinces that were located in what is now the country of Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 1PE 1 2 ba1h figs-abstractnouns πρόγνωσιν Θεοῦ Πατρός 1 the foreknowledge of God the Father If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **foreknowledge**, you can express the same idea with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “what God the Father foreknew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 2 lcps figs-explicit πρόγνωσιν Θεοῦ Πατρός 1 This phrase could mean: (1) God had determined what would happen ahead of time. Alternate translation: “what God the Father planned previously” (2) God knew what would happen ahead of time. Alternate translation: “what God the Father knew beforehand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 2 z59t guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -20,8 +20,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 2 rwkk figs-metaphor ῥαντισμὸν αἵματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the sprinkling of the blood of Jesus Christ Peter uses **sprinkling** to refer to believers being in a covenant relationship with God. Just as Moses sprinkled blood on the people of Israel in [Exodus 24:1–11](../exo/24/01.md) to symbolize that they were joining in a covenant relationship with God, believers are joined in a covenant relationship with God by means of Jesus’ death. Moses also sprinkled blood on the priests to set them apart to serve God as priests ([Leviticus 8:30](../lev/08/30.md)). If your readers would not understand this, you could use a simile or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the covenant between believers and God established by the blood of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 2 i9kf figs-metonymy αἵματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 of the blood of Jesus Christ Here, **blood** refers to the death of Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “of the blood, the symbol of the death of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 1 2 k547 translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 In this culture, letter writers would offer a good wish for the recipient before introducing the main business of the letter. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. Alternate translation: “May God increase his kind acts to you and make you more peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) -1PE 1 2 iam1 figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **grace** and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “May God multiply his kind acts to you and give you a more peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 1 2 z7df figs-metaphor χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 May grace be to you, and may your peace increase Peter speaks of **grace** and **peace** as if they were objects that could increase in size or number. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different metaphor that means that these things will increase, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “May grace and peace increase in your lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 1 2 iam1 figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **Grace** and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “May God multiply his kind acts to you and give you a more peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 1 2 z7df figs-metaphor χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 May grace be to you, and may your peace increase Peter speaks of **Grace** and **peace** as if they were objects that could increase in size or number. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a different metaphor that means that these things will increase, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “May grace and peace increase in your lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 2 gj71 figs-activepassive χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη πληθυνθείη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May God multiply grace and peace to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 1 3 y6aq 0 General Information: Peter begins to talk about the believers’ salvation and faith. [Verses 3–5](../01/03.md) are one sentence, but you may need to divide them into shorter sentences in your language. 1PE 1 3 l4vi figs-declarative εὐλογητὸς 1 Peter is using a statement to give an exhortation. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for exhortation. Alternate translation: “Let us bless” or “Let us praise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) From 00dda2914b373e2ef4586fc47c4aa49179af0e35 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 18:56:22 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 355/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 2c2044751a..54a721e2e9 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -29,8 +29,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 3 cyf6 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμᾶς 1 our … us The words **our** and **us** are inclusive. They refer to Peter and those believers to whom he is writing. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1PE 1 3 ib1x figs-possession τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe Jesus as the **Lord** who rules over those who believe in him. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the person who is lord over us,” or “of the person who rules over us,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1PE 1 3 mdvi figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὸ πολὺ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to his great merciful character” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 1 3 c92y figs-metaphor ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς 1 he has given us new birth The phrase **born again** is a metaphor that refers to spiritual rebirth. Since this is an important metaphor in the Bible, you should keep it in your translation and include an explanation if necessary. Alternate translation: “has caused us to be spiritually reborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 1 3 cbxb figs-infostructure ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς εἰς ἐλπίδα ζῶσαν, δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 The clause **into a living hope** is parallel to “into an imperishable and undefiled and unfading inheritance” in the next verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of the phrases in this verse in order to show that parallel structure. Alternate translation: “who has caused us to be born again through the resurrection of Jesus Christ from dead ones into a living hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1PE 1 3 c92y figs-metaphor ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς 1 he has given us new birth The phrase **born again** is a metaphor that refers to spiritual rebirth. Since this is an important metaphor in the Bible, you should keep it in your translation and include an explanation if necessary. Alternate translation: “who … has caused us to be spiritually reborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 1 3 cbxb figs-infostructure ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς εἰς ἐλπίδα ζῶσαν, δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 The clause **into a living hope** is parallel to “into an imperishable and undefiled and unfading inheritance” in the next verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of the phrases in this verse in order to show that parallel structure. Alternate translation: “who … has caused us to be born again through the resurrection of Jesus Christ from dead ones into a living hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1PE 1 3 qe1c grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ἐλπίδα ζῶσαν 1 Here, **into** introduces a purpose clause. Peter is stating a purpose for which God causes believers to be born again. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of giving us a living hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1PE 1 3 kngt figs-metaphor εἰς ἐλπίδα ζῶσαν 1 Peter uses **living** to describe **hope** that is certain and will not lead to disappointment. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into a hope that will not disappoint you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 3 lh0r figs-abstractnouns δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “through Jesus Christ being resurrected from among dead ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 5 ymh2 grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Peter is stating a purpose for which God is protecting believers. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of giving us a salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1PE 1 5 gj5s figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν ἑτοίμην ἀποκαλυφθῆναι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for the time when God saves you, which is ready to be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 5 g4rb figs-activepassive ἑτοίμην ἀποκαλυφθῆναι 1 that is ready to be revealed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God is ready to reveal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 1 5 xsp2 figs-explicit ἐν καιρῷ ἐσχάτῳ 1 Here, **the last time** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when Jesus returns to the world to judge everyone and vindicate those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the last time, when Jesus returns and judges everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 1 5 xsp2 figs-explicit ἐν καιρῷ ἐσχάτῳ 1 Here, **{the} last time** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when Jesus returns to the world to judge everyone and vindicate those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the last time, when Jesus returns and judges everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 6 p1ta writing-pronouns ἐν ᾧ 1 Here, **this** could refer to: (1) the “last time” referred to at the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation: “About this last time” (2) everything described in [verses 3–5](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “In all of this that I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1PE 1 6 hy8d grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν ᾧ ἀγαλλιᾶσθε 1 In this you greatly rejoice **In** here introduces the reason why Peter’s readers rejoice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “On account of this you greatly rejoice” or “Because of this you greatly rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1PE 1 6 dtvb grammar-connect-condition-fact ἄρτι, εἰ δέον λυπηθέντες 1 Peter is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Peter is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “if now it is necessary, and it is, to have been distressed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) From d22037dd53dbccf9fee6aa404d407c4907d1a4ef Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 18:58:52 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 356/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 54a721e2e9..5c82268a28 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -62,14 +62,14 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 9 uk4a figs-synecdoche σωτηρίαν ψυχῶν 1 the salvation of your souls Here, **souls** refers to the individual Christians to whom Peter is writing this letter. If this might confuse your readers, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “your salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1PE 1 10 yyz4 figs-doublet ἐξεζήτησαν καὶ ἐξηραύνησαν 1 searched and inquired carefully The phrases **searched** and **inquired carefully** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how hard the prophets tried to understand this salvation. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “examined very carefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 1 10 gmcy figs-abstractnouns ἧς σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 1 10 wx95 figs-abstractnouns εἰς ὑμᾶς χάριτος 1 Here, **this grace** refers to **this salvation**, mentioned earlier in this verse. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God being gracious to you by saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1PE 1 10 wx95 figs-abstractnouns τῆς εἰς ὑμᾶς χάριτος 1 Here, **{this} grace** refers to **{this} salvation**, mentioned earlier in this verse. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God being gracious to you by saving you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 11 j917 figs-explicit εἰς τίνα ἢ ποῖον καιρὸν 1 The word translated **whom** could also be translated “what.” In that case, “what” would refer to the time when salvation would take place and **what time** would then refer to the specific circumstances. However, most translations agree with the ULT’s use of **whom**. Alternate translation: “into what time or what circumstances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 11 w3n8 figs-possession τὸ…Πνεῦμα Χριστοῦ 1 the Spirit of Christ Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as being **the Spirit** that is associated with **Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, associated with Christ,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1PE 1 11 hjq5 προμαρτυρόμενον 1 This could indicate: (1) the time when **the Spirit of Christ was revealing** information to the prophets. Alternate translation: “when testifying beforehand” (2) the means by which **the Spirit of Christ was revealing** information to the prophets. Alternate translation: “by means of testifying beforehand” 1PE 1 11 x5x8 figs-abstractnouns τὰ εἰς Χριστὸν παθήματα, καὶ τὰς μετὰ ταῦτα δόξας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sufferings** and **glories**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “about how Christ would suffer, and glorious things would happen afterwards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 12 x4b1 figs-activepassive οἷς ἀπεκαλύφθη 1 It was revealed to them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God revealed to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 1 12 hi9u figs-activepassive ἃ νῦν ἀνηγγέλη ὑμῖν, διὰ τῶν εὐαγγελισαμένων ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which those who proclaimed the gospel to you have now declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 1 12 c7jz figs-explicit Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, ἀποσταλέντι ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ 1 This phrase indicates the means by which the evangelists proclaimed the gospel to Peter’s readers. Peter uses **the Holy Spirit** here to refer specifically to the Holy Spirit’s work of giving those evangelists the ability or power to proclaim the gospel effectively. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit sent from heaven enabling them to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 1 12 c7jz figs-explicit Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, ἀποσταλέντι ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ 1 This phrase indicates the means by which the evangelists proclaimed the gospel to Peter’s readers. Peter uses **{the} Holy Spirit** here to refer specifically to the Holy Spirit’s work of giving those evangelists the ability or power to proclaim the gospel effectively. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit sent from heaven enabling them to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 12 yzqk figs-activepassive ἀποσταλέντι ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 1 12 lyzl figs-explicit εἰς ἃ 1 Here, **{things}** refers to what God had revealed to the prophets and some evangelists had proclaimed to Peter’s readers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “into which things God revealed to the prophets and which were declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 12 xi4d figs-metaphor εἰς ἃ ἐπιθυμοῦσιν ἄγγελοι παρακύψαι 1 into which things angels long to look Peter uses **look** to refer to getting a clearer understanding of what God has revealed about salvation. This does not mean that the angels do not understand salvation at all. If this might confuse your readers, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “things which angels desire to understand more clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 5ff78412be791eb9491ff8a18e9587d273ac8b03 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:02:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 357/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 5c82268a28..287c6ac560 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 18 git3 figs-metaphor ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ὑμῶν ἀναστροφῆς πατροπαραδότου 1 Here, **handed down** refers to one generation teaching **futile behavior** to another generation, as if that behavior were an object that could be passed by hand from one person to another. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from your futile behavior taught to you by your fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 18 ctgm figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τῆς ματαίας ὑμῶν ἀναστροφῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **behavior**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from behaving in futile ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 18 b5qa figs-activepassive πατροπαραδότου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that your fathers handed down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 1 19 s4jd figs-metonymy τιμίῳ αἵματι…Χριστοῦ 1 with the precious blood of Christ Peter uses **the blood of Christ** to refer to Jesus’ death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with Christ’s precious death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 1 19 s4jd figs-metonymy τιμίῳ αἵματι…Χριστοῦ 1 with the precious blood of Christ Peter uses **{the} precious blood of Christ** to refer to Jesus’ death. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with Christ’s precious death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 1 19 gk6a figs-simile ὡς ἀμνοῦ ἀμώμου καὶ ἀσπίλου 1 as an unblemished and spotless lamb Peter compares Jesus’ blood to the blood of the lambs that the Jewish priests sacrificed to God because of the people’s sins. The point of this comparison is that Jesus died as a sacrifice so that God would forgive people’s sins. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “like that of the unblemished and spotless lambs that the Jewish priests sacrificed to God for sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 1 19 smu8 figs-doublet ἀμώμου καὶ ἀσπίλου 1 unblemished and spotless The words **unblemished** and **spotless** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses this repetition to emphasize that Christ was completely perfect and sinless. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “completely perfect” or “with no imperfections at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 1 20 msw5 figs-activepassive προεγνωσμένου 1 He has been chosen If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having foreknown him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 20 ky7a figs-abstractnouns πρὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 before the foundation of the world If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **foundation**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “before God founded the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 20 dkk2 figs-activepassive φανερωθέντος 1 he has been revealed … for your sake If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God having revealed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 1 20 pmf2 figs-explicit φανερωθέντος 1 Here, **having been revealed** refers to the first time Jesus came to the earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “having been revealed when he came to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 1 20 kzi0 figs-explicit ἐπ’ ἐσχάτου τῶν χρόνων 1 Here, **the last of the times** refers to the final period of history which began when Jesus came to the earth for the first time. This period will end when Jesus returns to earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “in this final time period of history” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 1 20 kzi0 figs-explicit ἐπ’ ἐσχάτου τῶν χρόνων 1 Here, **{the} last of the times** refers to the final period of history which began when Jesus came to the earth for the first time. This period will end when Jesus returns to earth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “in this final time period of history” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 1 21 lt5u figs-idiom τὸν ἐγείραντα αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 who has raised him from the dead Here, to **raise him** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “who caused him to live again so that he was no longer among the dead people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1PE 1 21 f7mn figs-abstractnouns δόξαν αὐτῷ δόντα 1 has given him glory If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “has glorified him” or “has shown that he is glorious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 1 21 k85r figs-abstractnouns τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν καὶ ἐλπίδα, εἶναι εἰς Θεόν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith** and **hope**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “you would believe and hope in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From fd0a62cfc352098279802170aa8ce12b83572bb1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:06:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 358/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 287c6ac560..054e46c2e1 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -158,8 +158,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 4 a438 figs-activepassive παρὰ δὲ Θεῷ ἐκλεκτὸν 1 but chosen by God If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but that God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 2 5 z11h figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ ὡς λίθοι ζῶντες οἰκοδομεῖσθε, οἶκος πνευματικὸς 1 you, like living stones, are being built up as a spiritual house Peter uses **stones** to refer to his readers, people who believe in Jesus. Just as people in the Old Testament used **stones** to build the temple that God dwelled in, God is using believers to bring together a group of people in whom he will dwell. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you, like stones that are put together and built into a house, are living stones that are being brought together into a spiritual community in which God dwells” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 5 g33x figs-simile αὐτοὶ ὡς λίθοι ζῶντες 1 you, like living stones Peters uses **stones** as if they were **living**. This emphasizes the fact that Peter’s readers have eternal life because they believe in Jesus. In this verse, **living** cannot mean to give life, because only God can give life. Alternate translation: “like stones that live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -1PE 2 5 v3jw figs-activepassive οἰκοδομεῖσθε, οἶκος πνευματικὸς 1 living stones, are being built up as a spiritual house If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God is building up as a spiritual house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 5 e6dm figs-explicit οἰκοδομεῖσθε 1 Here, **are being built up** could indicate: (1) a factual statement, as in the UST. (2) a command, in which case “coming to him” in the previous verse would also be a command. Alternate translation: “be built up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 5 v3jw figs-activepassive οἰκοδομεῖσθε, οἶκος πνευματικὸς 1 living stones, are being built up as a spiritual house If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you … that God is building up as a spiritual house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 2 5 e6dm figs-explicit οἰκοδομεῖσθε 1 Here, **are being built up** could indicate: (1) a factual statement, as in the UST. (2) a command, in which case “coming to him” in the previous verse would also be a command. Alternate translation: “you … be built up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 5 i4bn figs-metaphor εἰς ἱεράτευμα ἅγιον ἀνενέγκαι πνευματικὰς θυσίας 1 a holy priesthood to offer the spiritual sacrifices Here Peter speaks of believers as if they were part of a **priesthood** and as if their good deeds and acts of worship were **sacrifices** offered to God. Just as the priests in the Old Testament offered sacrifices to God, so should believers do good deeds and worship God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or with a synonym. Alternate translation: “like the holy priesthood that offered sacrifices to God, so you are made into a group which does good spiritual deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 5 ekkp grammar-collectivenouns εἰς ἱεράτευμα ἅγιον 1 The word **priesthood** is a singular noun that refers to a group of priests. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of holy priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 1PE 2 5 zf45 figs-explicit πνευματικὰς θυσίας εὐπροσδέκτους 1 This could mean: (1) the **sacrifices** are of a spiritual, rather than physical, nature. Alternate translation: “the sacrifices of a spiritual nature that are acceptable” (2) the **sacrifices** are offered by the power of the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the sacrifices offered by the power of the Holy Spirit, which are acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From a83539dc6314255d1c9640f22648f8357f8a32b6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:08:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 359/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 054e46c2e1..cbf2a7b8d0 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -171,8 +171,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 6 xsx8 figs-metaphor λίθον, ἀκρογωνιαῖον 1 a cornerstone Here God refers to the Messiah as if he were not only a **stone**, but even the most important **stone** in a building, the **cornerstone**. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone who is like the most important stone in a building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 6 klv2 figs-distinguish λίθον, ἀκρογωνιαῖον ἐκλεκτὸν ἔντιμον 1 a cornerstone, chosen, precious Here, **chosen** and **precious** show a distinction between this **cornerstone** and any other **cornerstone**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “a cornerstone that is chosen and precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1PE 2 6 lrxm figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ 1 The phrase **certainly not** translates two negative words in Greek. God uses them together to emphasize the truth of this statement. If your language can use two negatives together for emphasis without them cancelling each other to create a positive meaning, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -1PE 2 7 ze1c figs-explicit ἡ τιμὴ 1 Here, **this honor** refers to the statement in the previous verse that people who believe in Jesus will “certainly not be ashamed.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this honor of never being ashamed is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 2 7 rdhk figs-explicit ἡ τιμὴ 1 The phrase translated **this honor** could also be translated as “precious,” in which case it would refer to the “cornerstone” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “he is precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 7 ze1c figs-explicit ἡ τιμὴ 1 Here, **the honor** refers to the statement in the previous verse that people who believe in Jesus will “certainly not be ashamed.” If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “this honor of never being ashamed is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 7 rdhk figs-explicit ἡ τιμὴ 1 The phrase translated **the honor** could also be translated as “precious,” in which case it would refer to the “cornerstone” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “he is precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 7 sj13 figs-ellipsis ἀπιστοῦσιν δὲ 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “But to those who do not believe, God says in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 2 7 hext figs-quotemarks λίθος ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήθη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Psalm 118:22](../psa/118/22.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 2 7 uu3j figs-metaphor λίθος ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες 1 The stone that was rejected by … has become the head of the corner The author uses **stone** to refer to the Messiah, and he uses **builders** to refer to those who **rejected** Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “The Messiah who was rejected just like builders reject a stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 24e21f851a4ca25e516a1e3f29e264d8b4c4a91c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:09:06 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 360/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 0c6a882e9b..cf882a923f 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 4 lyqj figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -GAL 2 4 uvjw figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union that believers have with Christ. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe Paul’s meaning. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 4 uvjw figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union that believers have with Christ. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe Paul’s meaning. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus” or “through our union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what **enslave** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” GAL 2 6 afy6 figs-metonymy ἐμοὶ…οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο 1 added nothing to me Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 389f03cfa50dbfad784e706dd2a1fbbd97989a12 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:10:58 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 361/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index cf882a923f..9fdd598a08 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ GAL 1 20 pp11 figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, the phras GAL 1 21 ny6z grammar-connect-time-sequential ἔπειτα ἦλθον εἰς 1 The word **then** indicates that the events Paul will now relate came after the events Paul has just described in [1:18-19](../01/18.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase or by expressing the meaning in some other way that is natural to your readers. Alternate translation: “After I left Jerusalem I went to” or “After that I went to” or “Afterwards I went to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) GAL 1 22 y6l4 figs-activepassive ἤμην…ἀγνοούμενος τῷ προσώπῳ ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Ἰουδαίας, ταῖς ἐν Χριστῷ 1 I was still not personally known to the churches of Judea that are in Christ If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “none of the people in the churches of Judea that are in Christ had ever met me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 1 22 wleq figs-synecdoche ἤμην…ἀγνοούμενος τῷ προσώπῳ ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Ἰουδαίας, ταῖς ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Paul uses the main feature of his appearance, his **face**, to refer figuratively to seeing his entire person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -GAL 1 22 sr0y figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union believers have with Christ and here it is specifically describing/modifying **the churches of Judea**. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe what the phrase “in Christ” means here. See the discussion of the phrase “in Christ” in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 1 22 sr0y figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union believers have with Christ and here it is specifically describing/modifying **the churches of Judea**. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe what the phrase “in Christ” means here. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 1 23 bdmz grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** is introducing a contrast between what the Judean believers did know about Paul (they were **hearing** that he was **now proclaiming the faith**) with what they did not know about Paul (how he looked, [1:22](../01/22.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) GAL 1 23 hw08 μόνον…ἀκούοντες ἦσαν 1 Alternate translation: “all that the believers in the region of Judea knew about me was that people were saying” or “all that the people belonging to the churches in the region of Judea knew about me was that people were saying” GAL 1 23 ss1e figs-explicit ὁ 1 Here, the phrase **The one** refers to Paul. If it would help your readers, you could express that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 293d4c39ae89dfcb7fecb6d1b31395fa54aefa64 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:11:04 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 362/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index cbf2a7b8d0..516157d8cf 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 8 uwg1 figs-explicit εἰς ὃ 1 Here, **which** refers back to the previous part of this sentence. Those who do not believe in Jesus were appointed to stumble and disobey the word. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “To this, stumbling and disobeying the word,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 9 dc8m figs-quotemarks γένος ἐκλεκτόν, βασίλειον ἱεράτευμα, ἔθνος ἅγιον, λαὸς εἰς περιποίησιν 1 All four of these phrases are quotations from the Old Testament. The phrase **a chosen people** is from [Isaiah 43:20](../isa/43/20.md), **a royal priesthood** and **a holy nation** are from [Exodus 19:6](../exo/19/06.md), and **a people for possession** is from [Isaiah 43:21](../isa/43/21.md). It may be helpful for your readers to indicate these quotations with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 2 9 zla9 figs-activepassive γένος ἐκλεκτόν 1 a chosen people If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a family whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 9 g39z figs-explicit βασίλειον ἱεράτευμα 1 a royal priesthood This could refer to: (1) members of a priesthood who are also members of the king’s family. Alternate translation: “a kingly priesthood” (2) a priesthood which serves the king. Alternate translation: “a priesthood which serves the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 9 g39z figs-explicit βασίλειον ἱεράτευμα 1 a royal priesthood This could refer to: (1) members of a **priesthood** who are also members of the king’s family. Alternate translation: “a kingly priesthood” (2) a **priesthood** which serves the king. Alternate translation: “a priesthood which serves the king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 9 m1f8 grammar-collectivenouns βασίλειον ἱεράτευμα 1 The word **priesthood** is a singular noun that refers to a group of priests. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of royal priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 1PE 2 9 qk7f figs-abstractnouns λαὸς εἰς περιποίησιν 1 a people for possession If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **possession**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a people for God to possess” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 2 9 ra7z figs-explicit τοῦ ἐκ σκότους ὑμᾶς καλέσαντος, εἰς τὸ θαυμαστὸν αὐτοῦ φῶς 1 who called you from This clause refers to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, who called you from darkness into his marvelous light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 2daf54fd4797729e7df2c29307188ec3b82fd565 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:13:02 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 363/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 516157d8cf..ca84d61ef6 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 17 gwy8 figs-metaphor τὴν ἀδελφότητα 1 the brotherhood Here, **brotherhood** refers to all Christian believers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the community of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 18 w2nc 0 General Information: Peter begins to speak specifically to people who were slaves who worked in people’s houses. 1PE 2 18 xgk8 figs-doublet τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς καὶ ἐπιεικέσιν 1 the good and gentle The words **good** and **gentle** mean similar things. Peter uses this repetition to emphasize that such masters treat their servants very kindly. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “to the very kind ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1PE 2 18 mueb figs-metaphor τοῖς σκολιοῖς 1 Here, **crooked ones** is used to refer to people who act dishonestly or unjustly as if their morals were an object that could be bent or twisted. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the dishonest ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 18 mueb figs-metaphor τοῖς σκολιοῖς 1 Here, **crooked {ones}** is used to refer to people who act dishonestly or unjustly as if their morals were an object that could be bent or twisted. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the dishonest ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 19 r1h1 figs-explicit τοῦτο…χάρις 1 this is praiseworthy Peter assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to finding **favor** with God, which is what he states in the next verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “this is deserving of God’s favor” or “this is pleasing to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 19 zm8e figs-abstractnouns διὰ συνείδησιν Θεοῦ 1 because of awareness of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **consciousness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because one is aware of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 2 19 rjyf figs-possession διὰ συνείδησιν Θεοῦ 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **consciousness** that is about or concerning **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “because of having consciousness about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From f33cba935ff27300cebbebebe5eb81e540e839d1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:14:59 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 364/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index ca84d61ef6..ef091d2606 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 22 cjai figs-metaphor οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ 1 Peter quotes Isaiah referring to **deceit** as if it were an object that could be found inside someone’s mouth. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “neither was deceit spoken out of his mouth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 22 lw1u figs-metonymy οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ 1 neither was deceit found in his mouth Peter quotes Isaiah describing something the Messiah would say by association with **his mouth**, which he would use to say something. In this case it is something the Messiah did not say. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “neither did he say something deceitful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 2 23 lj4a figs-activepassive ὃς λοιδορούμενος, οὐκ ἀντελοιδόρει 1 He, being reviled, did not revile back If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people reviled, did not revile them back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 23 gqb5 figs-explicit παρεδίδου…τῷ κρίνοντι δικαίως 1 Here, **the one who judges justly** refers to God. This means that Jesus trusted God to punish those who reviled him or to prove that he was innocent. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he entrusted himself to God, who judges justly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 2 23 gqb5 figs-explicit παρεδίδου…τῷ κρίνοντι δικαίως 1 Here, **the one judging justly** refers to God. This means that Jesus trusted God to punish those who reviled him or to prove that he was innocent. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he entrusted himself to God, who judges justly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 2 24 k632 figs-rpronouns ὃς τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν αὐτὸς ἀνήνεγκεν 1 He himself Peter uses the word **himself** here to emphasize that Jesus alone is the one who bore our sins. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “none other than Jesus bore our sins” or “Jesus, that very person, bore our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1PE 2 24 w49m figs-metaphor τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν…ἀνήνεγκεν ἐν τῷ σώματι αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον 1 carried our sins in his body to the tree Peter uses **bore our sins** to refer to Jesus being punished for **our sins** as if **sins** were an object that he carried on **his body**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “suffered the punishment for our sins in his body on the tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 24 zl8e figs-metonymy τὸ ξύλον 1 the tree Peter uses **tree** to refer to the cross on which Jesus died, which was made of wood. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From f8a5492b43b0b8e9108d356a1161ff87dd21c562 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:22:06 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 365/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 9fdd598a08..715fbfba35 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -128,12 +128,12 @@ GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alt GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “to ensure I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” -GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 What follows the word **But** introduces an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] +GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 The word **But** could: (1) connected to [2:3](../02/03.md) and be introducing an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] (2) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases is making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner, Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner, Titus, to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +GAL 2 4 kwoz δὲ 1 The word **But** could: (1) be connected to [2:3](../02/03.md) and be introducing an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] (2) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 j5ka figs-metaphor παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι 1 The false brothers came in secretly Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers with the intent of observing what Paul and the other believers were doing. By using this metaphor Paul means that these people had bad motives for wanting to observe the believers. If your readers would not understand what **spy on** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “people who pretended to be Christians, who came into our midst in order to watch us closely,” or “people who said they were Christians but were not, who came into our group to view closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 4 jx0q παρεισάκτους 1 In the language that Paul wrote this letter in the phrase **brought in** could mean: (1) that these **false brothers** were invited in by someone. Alternate translation: “secretly invited” or (2) that they came into the midst of the believers by their own initiative. Alternate translation: “deceptive coming of” -GAL 2 4 mzx0 διὰ δὲ 1 **But is was because of** could be: (1) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (2) connected to v. 3, which explains why people wanted to circumcise Titus (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 4 lyqj figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 1a923a1558eba43801331a96353ec5ba4a16991a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:23:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 366/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 715fbfba35..a405853973 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 those who seemed to be important Alt GAL 2 2 t6we figs-doublenegatives μή πως εἰς κενὸν τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 in vain If your readers would misunderstand this double negative, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “to ensure I was doing profitable work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) GAL 2 2 ejb8 figs-metaphor τρέχω ἢ ἔδραμον 1 I was not running—or had not run—in vain Here, Paul uses the word **run** to mean “work.” Paul specifically means working for the advancement of the gospel. Paul uses the word **run** to bring to the Galatians’ minds the image of a runner who is running a race in order to win a prize. If this image is familiar to people in your culture, consider using this metaphor. If this image is not familiar to your readers, consider stating this idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “I might work for the advancement of the gospel—or had” or “I might not work for the spread of the good news—or had worked for it” ( See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” or “without positive results” or “for nothing” -GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 The word **But** could: (1) connected to [2:3](../02/03.md) and be introducing an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] (2) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. +GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, the word **But** is introducing an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases is making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner, Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner, Titus, to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) GAL 2 4 kwoz δὲ 1 The word **But** could: (1) be connected to [2:3](../02/03.md) and be introducing an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] (2) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. From 01a89b8cb2df723636abbaf85bd86b1555a5865b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:23:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 367/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index ef091d2606..3a0de8d279 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 4 oav8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could begin this verse as a new sentence. If you do so, then you will need to repeat the subject and verb from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Rather, let your adornment be the inner man of the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1PE 3 4 m2n3 figs-metonymy ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος 1 Here, **hidden man** and **heart** both refer to a person’s thoughts or emotions. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the inner thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 4 l2yq figs-possession ὁ κρυπτὸς τῆς καρδίας ἄνθρωπος 1 the inner person of the heart Peter is using the possessive form to indicate that the **hidden man** is the same thing as **the heart**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the hidden man, which is the heart” or “the hidden man, namely, the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1PE 3 4 l1js figs-possession ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος 1 Peter is using the possessive form to indicate that the **imperishable thing** is the same thing as **a gentle and quiet spirit**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the imperishable thing, which is a gentle and quiet spirit” or “in the imperishable thing, namely, a gentle and quiet spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1PE 3 4 l1js figs-possession ἐν τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος 1 Peter is using the possessive form to indicate that the **imperishable {thing}** is the same thing as **a gentle and quiet spirit**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “in the imperishable thing, which is a gentle and quiet spirit” or “in the imperishable thing, namely, a gentle and quiet spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1PE 3 4 spi6 figs-metonymy τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος 1 Here,**quiet** means “peaceful” or “calm.” It does not mean the opposite of loud. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of a gentle and peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 4 gbw9 figs-metonymy τοῦ πραέως καὶ ἡσυχίου πνεύματος 1 of a gentle and quiet spirit Here, **spirit** refers to a person’s attitude or temperament. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of a gentle and quiet attitude.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 4 j5bu figs-metaphor ὅ ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ πολυτελές 1 which is precious before God Peter refers to God’s opinion as if it were a person standing directly in front of him. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “which God considers to be very precious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 2860f384e1343972f955afef594f9fe38a3389cc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:26:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 368/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 3a0de8d279..1e91bfb98f 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 7 lulz figs-abstractnouns κατὰ γνῶσιν 1 live with your wife according to understanding, as with a weaker container If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **knowledge**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a knowledgeable way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 3 7 eq1z figs-metaphor ὡς ἀσθενεστέρῳ σκεύει 1 as with a weaker container Here Peter refers to women as if they were **weaker** containers. The word **container** is a term used to refer to both men and women in the Bible ([Acts 9:15](../act/09/15.md)). Just as clay pots can break easily, so are human beings weak. Here Peter specifically refers to women as **weaker** containers because woman are usually physically weaker than men. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as with someone who is weaker than you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 3 7 a88w figs-abstractnouns ἀπονέμοντες τιμήν ὡς καὶ συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς 1 assigning her honor as also fellow heirs of the grace of life If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **honor** and **heirs**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “honor them as also those who will inherit with you the grace of life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 3 7 n4rf figs-metaphor συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς 1 fellow heirs of the grace of life Peter speaks of **the grace of life** as if it were something that people inherit. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those who will experience the grace of life together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 7 n4rf figs-metaphor συνκληρονόμοις χάριτος ζωῆς 1 fellow heirs of the grace of life Peter speaks of **{the} grace of life** as if it were something that people inherit. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “those who will experience the grace of life together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 3 7 quba figs-possession χάριτος ζωῆς 1 Peter is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that is **life**. The word **grace** refers to a gracious gift and **life** refers to eternal **life**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the gracious gift, namely, eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1PE 3 7 dwm6 figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ μὴ ἐνκόπτεσθαι τὰς προσευχὰς ὑμῶν 1 so that your prayers will not be hindered If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that nothing will hinder your prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 3 8 nk97 0 General Information: In [verses 8–12](../03/08.md) Peter writes instructions to all believers. @@ -298,7 +298,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 10 dpf2 writing-quotations γὰρ 1 **For** here introduces a quotation from the Old Testament ([Psalm 34:12–16](../psa/34/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Peter is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “It is as David wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) 1PE 3 10 tce3 figs-quotemarks ὁ…θέλων ζωὴν ἀγαπᾶν, καὶ ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς, παυσάτω 1 From this clause through to the end of [verse 12](../03/12.md), Peter quotes from [Psalm 34:12–16](../psa/34/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 3 10 p9bl figs-parallelism ὁ…θέλων ζωὴν ἀγαπᾶν, καὶ ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς 1 to love life and to see good days These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize the desire to have a good life. If stating the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “the one truly wanting to have a good life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1PE 3 10 btkp figs-metaphor ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς 1 to see good days Peter quotes David speaking of experiencing a good lifetime as **seeing good days**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience a good lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 10 btkp figs-metaphor ἰδεῖν ἡμέρας ἀγαθὰς 1 to see good days Peter quotes David speaking of experiencing a good lifetime as **to see good days**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience a good lifetime” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 3 10 rqa9 figs-synecdoche τὴν γλῶσσαν ἀπὸ κακοῦ, καὶ χείλη τοῦ μὴ λαλῆσαι δόλον 1 his tongue … his lips Peter quotes David using the words **tongue** and **lips** to refer to the person who is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “himself from speaking evil and from speaking deceit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1PE 3 10 y4kd figs-abstractnouns τὴν γλῶσσαν ἀπὸ κακοῦ, καὶ χείλη τοῦ μὴ λαλῆσαι δόλον 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **evil** and **deceit**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “his tongue from saying evil things and his lips from speaking deceitful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 3 11 n5sr figs-metaphor ἐκκλινάτω…ἀπὸ κακοῦ 1 let him turn away from evil Here, **turn away from** is a metaphor that means to avoid doing something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let him avoid doing evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From bae574156644e298c303c450c0f3e15d156a5ee0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:28:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 369/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 1e91bfb98f..eebb0bc3a2 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 12 tytz figs-explicit ὦτα αὐτοῦ εἰς δέησιν αὐτῶν 1 his ears are upon their requests The idea that the Lord listens to the requests of righteous people also implies that he responds to those requests. If this might be helpful to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he listens to and grants their request” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 3 12 p2vi figs-genericnoun δέησιν αὐτῶν 1 his ears are upon their requests Here, **request** refers to requests in general, not to one particular **request**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “their requests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1PE 3 12 es9n figs-synecdoche πρόσωπον δὲ Κυρίου ἐπὶ 1 But the face of the Lord is against Here, **face** refers to the Lord himself. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “But the Lord is against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -1PE 3 12 t22b figs-idiom πρόσωπον δὲ Κυρίου ἐπὶ 1 But the face of the Lord is against Here, **the face** being **against** someone is an idiom that refers to one person opposing another person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a similar idiom in your language. Alternate translation: “But the Lord opposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1PE 3 12 t22b figs-idiom πρόσωπον δὲ Κυρίου ἐπὶ 1 But the face of the Lord is against Here, **{the} face** being **against** someone is an idiom that refers to one person opposing another person. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly or use a similar idiom in your language. Alternate translation: “but the Lord opposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1PE 3 12 gw7w figs-quotemarks ποιοῦντας κακά 1 After this phrase, Peter also ends his quotation from the book of Psalms. If you decided in [verse 10](../03/10.md) to mark this as a quotation, indicate that ending here with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 3 13 wkw4 0 Connecting Statement: In [verses 13–22](../03/13.md) Peter teaches the believers how to behave when unbelievers persecute them. 1PE 3 13 e1ma figs-rquestion τίς ὁ κακώσων ὑμᾶς, ἐὰν τοῦ ἀγαθοῦ ζηλωταὶ γένησθε? 1 who is the one who will harm you if you are a zealot of what is good? Peter is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to emphasize that it is unlikely that someone would harm them if they did good things. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “no one will harm you if you become zealous ones of the good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 14 j8ds figs-quotemarks τὸν δὲ φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε μηδὲ ταραχθῆτε 1 This sentence is a quotation from [Isaiah 8:12](../isa/08/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1PE 3 14 f9u8 figs-parallelism τὸν δὲ φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε μηδὲ ταραχθῆτε 1 But do not fear their fear, nor be troubled These two phrases mean the same thing. Peter states the same idea twice in order to emphasize that believers should not be afraid of people who persecute them. If stating the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you could combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “But you should not fear at all what people might do to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1PE 3 14 yz6y figs-possession τὸν…φόβον αὐτῶν, μὴ φοβηθῆτε 1 their fear This could refer to: (1) the fear that unbelievers have. Alternate translation: “you should not fear what they fear” or “you should not fear the same things that they fear” (2) the fear that righteous people have for unbelievers. Alternate translation: “you should not fear them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1PE 3 15 vgv7 figs-metaphor Κύριον…τὸν Χριστὸν ἁγιάσατε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 sanctify the Lord Christ in your hearts Peter uses **sanctify the Lord Christ** to refer to acknowledging Christ’s holiness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “acknowledge in your hearts that the Lord Christ is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 15 vgv7 figs-metaphor Κύριον…τὸν Χριστὸν ἁγιάσατε ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 sanctify the Lord Christ in your hearts Peter uses **sanctify {the} Lord Christ** to refer to acknowledging Christ’s holiness. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “acknowledge in your hearts that the Lord Christ is holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 3 15 qjg3 figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν 1 in your hearts Here, **hearts** refers to the thoughts or emotions of Peter’s readers. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your minds” or “within yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 15 d69e figs-abstractnouns πρὸς ἀπολογίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **defense**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to defend your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 3 15 q8i1 figs-metonymy τῷ αἰτοῦντι ὑμᾶς λόγον 1 Peter uses **word** to refer to an answer or explanation spoken by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who asks you for a statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From bd5e42bf2aa50561507b5728b7367a46630aed6b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:32:43 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 370/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index eebb0bc3a2..34f8b78a37 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -333,11 +333,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 17 bt09 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀγαθοποιοῦντας…κακοποιοῦντας 1 These two phrases indicate two different reasons for suffering. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of doing good … because of doing evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1PE 3 17 x8qu figs-metonymy εἰ θέλοι τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Peter uses **the will of God** to refer to God himself. If your readers would not understand this, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “if God wills” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 18 me4u figs-explicit περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν 1 Here, **sins** implies the **sins** of people other than Jesus, because Jesus never sinned. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the sins of others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 3 18 q9fa figs-activepassive θανατωθεὶς…σαρκὶ 1 having been put to death in the flesh If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people having killed him in the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 3 18 j5lh figs-metonymy θανατωθεὶς…σαρκὶ 1 having been put to death in the flesh Here, **flesh** refers to Christ’s body, which was made of **flesh**. Peter is saying that the body of Christ was killed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having been killed physically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 3 18 q9fa figs-activepassive θανατωθεὶς μὲν σαρκὶ 1 having been put to death in the flesh If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people having indeed killed him in the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 3 18 j5lh figs-metonymy θανατωθεὶς μὲν σαρκὶ 1 having been put to death in the flesh Here, **flesh** refers to Christ’s body, which was made of **flesh**. Peter is saying that the body of Christ was killed. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having indeed been killed physically” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 18 h6v4 figs-activepassive ζῳοποιηθεὶς…πνεύματι 1 having been made alive in the spirit If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God’s spirit having made him alive” or “God having made him alive in the spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 3 18 n7nh figs-explicit ζῳοποιηθεὶς…πνεύματι 1 in the spirit Here, **the spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which Jesus was made alive. Alternate translation: “having been made him alive by the Spirit” (2) Jesus’ spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is in contrast to the physical realm referred to with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “having been made alive spiritually” or “having been made alive in the spiritual realm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 3 19 hp82 figs-explicit ἐν ᾧ 1 in which Here, **which** refers to “the spirit” in the previous verse. As in the previous verse, this could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit” (2) Jesus’ spiritual existence. Alternate translation: “in the spiritual realm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 18 n7nh figs-explicit ζῳοποιηθεὶς…πνεύματι 1 in the spirit Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which Jesus was made alive. Alternate translation: “having been made him alive by the Spirit” (2) Jesus’ spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is in contrast to the physical realm referred to with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “having been made alive spiritually” or “having been made alive in the spiritual realm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 3 19 hp82 figs-explicit ἐν ᾧ 1 in which Here, **which** refers to “spirit” in the previous verse. As in the previous verse, this could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “by means of the Spirit” (2) Jesus’ spiritual existence. Alternate translation: “in the spiritual realm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 3 19 ewuu figs-ellipsis ἐκήρυξεν 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. This phrase could mean: (1) Jesus proclaimed God’s victory over sin and death, which he accomplished through his death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “he proclaimed God’s victory” (2) Jesus preached the gospel to wicked people indirectly through the preaching of Noah during the time before the great flood. This interpretation is less likely to be correct, because it would mean that Noah was actually the one preaching and Peter does not mention Noah preaching or Jesus’ pre-incarnate existence anywhere in this letter. Alternate translation: “he preached the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 3 19 ez3d figs-explicit τοῖς ἐν φυλακῇ πνεύμασιν 1 to the spirits in prison Here, **spirits** could refer to: (1) evil spirits whom God imprisoned because of what they did before the flood that occurred in Noah’s time (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../jud/01/06.md); [Genesis 6:1–4](../gen/06/01.md)), as in the UST. (2) the spirits of people who died during the flood that occurred in Noah’s time. This interpretation is a less likely to be correct because Peter never refers to people as **spirits**, but rather “souls,” as in the next verse. Alternate translation: “to those people who had died and were in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 3 19 zpyr figs-metaphor ἐν φυλακῇ 1 Here Peter uses **prison** as a metaphor. It could refer to: (1) a place where God imprisoned certain evil spirits whom he will judge when he judges the whole world (see [2 Peter 2:4–5](../2pe/02/04.md); [Jude 6–7](../jud/01/06.md)). Alternate translation: “whom God had imprisoned to await judgment” (2) the place where sinful people go when they die. Alternate translation: “in hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 21 owi3 figs-abstractnouns οὐ σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου, ἀλλὰ συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **removal** and **appeal**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “it does not remove dirt from the flesh, but appeals to God for a good conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 3 21 hmp9 figs-metonymy σαρκὸς 1 Here, Peter uses **flesh** to refer to a person’s physical body that is made of **flesh**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 21 uz0u figs-explicit συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν 1 Here the phrase **a good conscience** means Peter’s readers do not feel guilty because they know that God has forgiven their sins. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “an appeal to God to know that your sins have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 3 21 jti3 figs-infostructure καὶ ὑμᾶς…νῦν σῴζει βάπτισμα, οὐ σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου, ἀλλὰ συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, 1 through the resurrection of Jesus Christ Here, **through the resurrection of Jesus Christ** indicates the means by which the faith demonstrated by baptism saves. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases to make that meaning clear. Alternate translation: “baptism now saves you also through the resurrection of Jesus Christ. It is not a removal of dirt from the flesh, but an appeal to God for a good conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1PE 3 21 jti3 figs-infostructure καὶ ὑμᾶς…νῦν σῴζει βάπτισμα, οὐ σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου, ἀλλὰ συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς, ἐπερώτημα εἰς Θεόν δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, 1 through the resurrection of Jesus Christ Here, **through {the} resurrection of Jesus Christ** indicates the means by which the faith demonstrated by baptism saves. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases to make that meaning clear. Alternate translation: “baptism now saves you also through the resurrection of Jesus Christ. It is not a removal of dirt from the flesh, but an appeal to God for a good conscience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1PE 3 21 rixf figs-abstractnouns δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “through God raising Jesus Christ from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 3 22 p5ij figs-infostructure ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ, πορευθεὶς εἰς οὐρανὸν, ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ ἀγγέλων, καὶ ἐξουσιῶν, καὶ δυνάμεων 1 The phrases **having gone** and **having been subjected** indicate that those two clauses describe events that occurred before the event in the first clause in this verse. If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases so that they appear in chronological order. Alternate translation: “after having gone into heaven, with angels and authorities and powers having been subjected to him, he is at the right hand of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1PE 3 22 g4qh figs-metonymy ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ 1 who is at the right hand of God Here, Peter uses **right hand** to refer to the place located at the right side of God in heaven. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who is at God’s right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 8fbd632d32b46b698293887e45cc12115b8215bb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:46:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 371/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index a405853973..cf614e34ad 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, the word **But** is introducing an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases is making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner, Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner, Titus, to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 4 kwoz δὲ 1 The word **But** could: (1) be connected to [2:3](../02/03.md) and be introducing an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] (2) connected to v. 1, which gives the reason for why Paul explained the gospel privately to the leaders in Jerusalem (3) unconnected and begins an unfinished sentence. +GAL 2 4 kwoz διὰ δὲ 1 The word **But** could: (1) be connected to [2:1-2](../02/01.md) and be giving the reason why Paul “went up again to Jerusalem” (2:1) and privately “set before” (communicated to) the church leaders in Jerusalem the gospel that he proclaimed among the Gentiles (2:2). Alternate translation: “But we went to Jerusalem because of” (2) be connected to [2:3](../02/03.md) and be giving the reason why some people were demanding that Titus be circumcised (3) be beginning a sentence which Paul never completes. GAL 2 4 j5ka figs-metaphor παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι 1 The false brothers came in secretly Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers with the intent of observing what Paul and the other believers were doing. By using this metaphor Paul means that these people had bad motives for wanting to observe the believers. If your readers would not understand what **spy on** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “people who pretended to be Christians, who came into our midst in order to watch us closely,” or “people who said they were Christians but were not, who came into our group to view closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 4 jx0q παρεισάκτους 1 In the language that Paul wrote this letter in the phrase **brought in** could mean: (1) that these **false brothers** were invited in by someone. Alternate translation: “secretly invited” or (2) that they came into the midst of the believers by their own initiative. Alternate translation: “deceptive coming of” GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 20aef74e44ce35c829e1bb2a7892a9ba798ce729 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:48:37 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 372/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index cf614e34ad..7c9e53f2c1 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, the word **But** is introducing an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases is making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner, Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner, Titus, to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 4 kwoz διὰ δὲ 1 The word **But** could: (1) be connected to [2:1-2](../02/01.md) and be giving the reason why Paul “went up again to Jerusalem” (2:1) and privately “set before” (communicated to) the church leaders in Jerusalem the gospel that he proclaimed among the Gentiles (2:2). Alternate translation: “But we went to Jerusalem because of” (2) be connected to [2:3](../02/03.md) and be giving the reason why some people were demanding that Titus be circumcised (3) be beginning a sentence which Paul never completes. +GAL 2 4 kwoz διὰ δὲ 1 The word **But** could: (1) be connected to [2:1-2](../02/01.md) and be giving the reason why Paul “went up again to Jerusalem” (2:1) and privately “set before” (communicated to) the church leaders in Jerusalem the gospel that he proclaimed among the Gentiles (2:2). Alternate translation: “But we went to Jerusalem because of” (2) be connected to [2:3](../02/03.md) and be giving the reason why some people were demanding that Titus be circumcised. Alternate translation: “But this problem occurred because of” (3) be beginning a sentence which Paul never completes. GAL 2 4 j5ka figs-metaphor παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι 1 The false brothers came in secretly Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers with the intent of observing what Paul and the other believers were doing. By using this metaphor Paul means that these people had bad motives for wanting to observe the believers. If your readers would not understand what **spy on** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “people who pretended to be Christians, who came into our midst in order to watch us closely,” or “people who said they were Christians but were not, who came into our group to view closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 4 jx0q παρεισάκτους 1 In the language that Paul wrote this letter in the phrase **brought in** could mean: (1) that these **false brothers** were invited in by someone. Alternate translation: “secretly invited” or (2) that they came into the midst of the believers by their own initiative. Alternate translation: “deceptive coming of” GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 8cbd65f6314f13a38047a29f7c1f9a9f595b09f0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:57:03 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 373/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 7c9e53f2c1..c4dae9b7a4 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ GAL 2 2 svvy εἰς κενὸν 1 Alternate translation: “for no purpose” GAL 2 3 wyrr grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, the word **But** is introducing an idea that is in contrast to an idea that was presented in [2:2](../02/02.md). Paul is probably presenting the fact that **not even Titus … was forced to be circumcised** as being in contrast to the idea in [2:2](../02/02.md) that he might have “run in vain” (labored in vain). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]] GAL 2 3 ybww figs-distinguish ὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν 1 The phrase **the one with me** and the phrase **being a Greek** both give further information about **Titus**. Neither of these phrases is making a distinction between **Titus** and some other person. If this might confuse your readers, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “my non-Jewish ministry partner, Titus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) GAL 2 3 xs8k figs-activepassive οὐδὲ Τίτος ὁ σὺν ἐμοί, Ἕλλην ὤν, ἠναγκάσθη περιτμηθῆναι 1 to be circumcised The phrase **was forced to be circumcised** is passive. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the church in Jerusalem did not even require my Greek ministry partner, Titus, to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -GAL 2 4 kwoz διὰ δὲ 1 The word **But** could: (1) be connected to [2:1-2](../02/01.md) and be giving the reason why Paul “went up again to Jerusalem” (2:1) and privately “set before” (communicated to) the church leaders in Jerusalem the gospel that he proclaimed among the Gentiles (2:2). Alternate translation: “But we went to Jerusalem because of” (2) be connected to [2:3](../02/03.md) and be giving the reason why some people were demanding that Titus be circumcised. Alternate translation: “But this problem occurred because of” (3) be beginning a sentence which Paul never completes. +GAL 2 4 kwoz διὰ δὲ…ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 The word **But** could: (1) be connected to [2:1-2](../02/01.md) and be giving the reason why Paul “went up again to Jerusalem” (2:1) and privately “set before” (communicated to) the church leaders in Jerusalem the gospel that he proclaimed among the Gentiles (2:2). Alternate translation: “But we went to Jerusalem because of” (2) be connected to [2:3](../02/03.md) and be giving the reason why some people were demanding that Titus be circumcised. Alternate translation: “But this problem occurred because of” (3) be beginning a sentence which Paul never completes. Alternate tranlsation (notice that only the punctuation differs from the ULT. The closing “—” indicates that Paul does not complete his thought before moving onto the next verse): “But it was because of … so that they will enslave us—” GAL 2 4 j5ka figs-metaphor παρεισάκτους ψευδαδέλφους, οἵτινες παρεισῆλθον κατασκοπῆσαι 1 The false brothers came in secretly Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were spies. He means that they came pretending to be fellow believers with the intent of observing what Paul and the other believers were doing. By using this metaphor Paul means that these people had bad motives for wanting to observe the believers. If your readers would not understand what **spy on** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “people who pretended to be Christians, who came into our midst in order to watch us closely,” or “people who said they were Christians but were not, who came into our group to view closely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 4 jx0q παρεισάκτους 1 In the language that Paul wrote this letter in the phrase **brought in** could mean: (1) that these **false brothers** were invited in by someone. Alternate translation: “secretly invited” or (2) that they came into the midst of the believers by their own initiative. Alternate translation: “deceptive coming of” GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers** does not refer to biological brothers but rather to believers in Jesus. The phrase **false brothers** refers to those who pretended to be fellow believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 5c07c6d1bb09c34d184ecbbd4bbba3395d0ddbe4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:57:09 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 374/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 34f8b78a37..9aa2c4af3a 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 4 1 yxs5 figs-explicit τὴν αὐτὴν ἔννοιαν 1 Here Peter uses **the same way of thinking** to refer to Jesus’ **way of thinking** when he suffered. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “with the same way of thinking about suffering that Christ had when he suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 1 d66g figs-explicit πέπαυται ἁμαρτίας 1 has ceased from sin Here, **ceased from sin** means “no longer living with a sinful mindset.” The idea is that suffering because of one’s faith indicates that a person is not living sinfully. Christians are often persecuted by unbelievers because they refuse to act sinfully. This phrase does not mean that Christians who suffer never sin. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “has stopped living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 2 tjdq grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς 1 Here, **in order to** introduces a purpose clause. This could mean: (1) this verse states the purpose for ceasing from sin mentioned at the end of the previous verse. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that he will” (2) this verse states the purpose for the command to “arm yourselves” in the previous verse. Alternate translation (starting a new sentence): “Arm yourselves in order to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1PE 4 2 d49a figs-metonymy τὸν ἐπίλοιπον ἐν σαρκὶ…χρόνον 1 Peter uses **time in the flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the remaining time of your life” or “the rest of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 4 2 d49a figs-metonymy τὸν ἐπίλοιπον ἐν σαρκὶ…χρόνον 1 Peter uses **time in {the} flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the remaining time of your life” or “the rest of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 4 2 fsvk figs-explicit ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαις 1 Here, **desires** refers specifically to sinful **desires**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for the sinful desires of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 2 gbb6 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων ἐπιθυμίαις 1 for the desires of men Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense to refer to humans in general. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for human desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1PE 4 3 anhj ἀρκετὸς…ὁ παρεληλυθὼς χρόνος 1 Alternate translation: “enough time has passed” @@ -378,11 +378,11 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 4 4 w1d8 figs-explicit τῆς ἀσωτίας 1 of their reckless behavior The word **recklessness** refers to dangerous behavior that shows that a person does not care about the consequences of his actions. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of careless sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 5 datm figs-metaphor οἳ ἀποδώσουσιν λόγον 1 Here Peter uses **give** to refer to speaking something. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will speak a word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 4 5 r288 figs-metonymy οἳ ἀποδώσουσιν λόγον 1 Here Peter uses **word** to refer to an explanation that they would speak using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will give an account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1PE 4 5 xw39 figs-explicit τῷ ἑτοίμως ἔχοντι κρῖναι 1 to the one who is ready to judge Here, **the one who is ready to judge** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “to God, who is ready to judge” (2) Christ. Alternate translation: “to Christ, who is ready to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 4 5 xw39 figs-explicit τῷ ἑτοίμως ἔχοντι κρῖναι 1 to the one who is ready to judge Here, **the one being ready to judge** could refer to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “to God, who is ready to judge” (2) Christ. Alternate translation: “to Christ, who is ready to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 5 dx7v figs-merism ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 the living and the dead The phrase **living and dead ones** refers to all people, whether they are still alive or have died. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 1PE 4 6 u54m figs-explicit καὶ νεκροῖς εὐηγγελίσθη 1 the gospel was preached also to the dead Here, **dead ones** refers to people who heard the gospel while they were alive but had died by the time Peter wrote this letter. Some people believe that this clause means that Jesus went to hell and preached the gospel to people who had died before Jesus himself died on the cross. However, that idea would contradict the statement in [Hebrews 9:27](../heb/09/27.md) that “men are appointed to die once, and after that, the judgment.” The Bible does not state that God gave anyone a second chance to believe in Jesus after they had already died. If this use of **dead ones** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the gospel was preached also to those who have since died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 6 ql11 figs-activepassive εὐηγγελίσθη 1 the gospel was preached If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) people preached the gospel. Alternate translation: “people preached the gospel” (2) Christ preached the gospel. Alternate translation: “Christ preached the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 4 6 hsg6 figs-activepassive κριθῶσι…κατὰ ἀνθρώπους σαρκὶ 1 they were judged in the flesh according to men If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) men judged and persecuted them during their lives according to human standards. Alternate translation: “men judged them in the flesh by human standards” (2) God judged them as humans during their lives. Alternate translation: “God judged them in the flesh as humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1PE 4 6 hsg6 figs-activepassive κριθῶσι μὲν κατὰ ἀνθρώπους σαρκὶ 1 they were judged in the flesh according to men If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) men judged and persecuted them during their lives according to human standards. Alternate translation: “men judged them in the flesh by human standards” (2) God judged them as humans during their lives. Alternate translation: “God indeed judged them in the flesh as humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 4 6 gm1m figs-gendernotations κατὰ ἀνθρώπους 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “according to people” or “as people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1PE 4 6 s72f figs-metonymy σαρκὶ 1 they were judged in the flesh according to men Here Peter uses **in the flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. See how you translated this expression in [verse 2](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 4 6 encm figs-explicit ζῶσι 1 Here, **live** refers to experiencing eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might experience eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 1fc6ee22f433afd4210c4c1f84a5d8d229fe52fd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 19:58:41 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 375/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 9aa2c4af3a..a7cc18307c 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -384,9 +384,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 4 6 ql11 figs-activepassive εὐηγγελίσθη 1 the gospel was preached If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) people preached the gospel. Alternate translation: “people preached the gospel” (2) Christ preached the gospel. Alternate translation: “Christ preached the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 4 6 hsg6 figs-activepassive κριθῶσι μὲν κατὰ ἀνθρώπους σαρκὶ 1 they were judged in the flesh according to men If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) men judged and persecuted them during their lives according to human standards. Alternate translation: “men judged them in the flesh by human standards” (2) God judged them as humans during their lives. Alternate translation: “God indeed judged them in the flesh as humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 4 6 gm1m figs-gendernotations κατὰ ἀνθρώπους 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Peter is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “according to people” or “as people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1PE 4 6 s72f figs-metonymy σαρκὶ 1 they were judged in the flesh according to men Here Peter uses **in the flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. See how you translated this expression in [verse 2](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1PE 4 6 s72f figs-metonymy σαρκὶ 1 they were judged in the flesh according to men Here Peter uses **in {the} flesh** to refer to a person’s lifetime. See how you translated this expression in [verse 2](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 4 6 encm figs-explicit ζῶσι 1 Here, **live** refers to experiencing eternal life. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might experience eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 4 6 h154 figs-explicit ζῶσι…πνεύματι 1 Here, **the spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which the people received eternal life. Alternate translation: “they might live by the Spirit” (2) their spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is contrasted with the physical realm mentioned earlier in the verse with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “they might live spiritually” or “they might live in the spiritual realm” See how you translated the same expression in [3:18](../03/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 4 6 h154 figs-explicit ζῶσι…πνεύματι 1 Here, **{the} spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit, in which case this phrase would indicate the means by which the people received eternal life. Alternate translation: “they might live by the Spirit” (2) their spiritual existence, in which case this phrase would be referring to the spiritual realm that is contrasted with the physical realm mentioned earlier in the verse with the phrase “in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “they might live spiritually” or “they might live in the spiritual realm” See how you translated the same expression in [3:18](../03/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 7 e445 figs-explicit πάντων…τὸ τέλος 1 the end of all things Here, **the end of all {things}** refers to the end of the world, when Jesus returns and judges everyone. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the end of the world, when Jesus returns,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 4 7 qs1t figs-metaphor ἤγγικεν 1 has come near Peter uses **has come near** to refer to something that will happen soon. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will soon happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 4 7 ubd4 figs-doublet σωφρονήσατε…καὶ νήψατε 1 be of sound mind, and be sober The words translated as **sound mind** and **sober** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses them to emphasize the need to think clearly since the end of the world is near. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “be completely clearheaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) From 12fd7f6904a1f0457ba6bdbb2af4b0498fff3bb3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 20:01:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 376/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 1 + 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index c4dae9b7a4..1566e4844a 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -138,6 +138,7 @@ GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 4 lyqj figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 4 uvjw figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union that believers have with Christ. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe Paul’s meaning. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus” or “through our union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 2 4 v9fp grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which the **false brothers** spied on their freedom, to **enslave them**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) The phrase ****introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what **enslave** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” GAL 2 6 afy6 figs-metonymy ἐμοὶ…οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο 1 added nothing to me Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From fbcd538b8ac3de8b9d1c38d27f80fa3572968268 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 20:01:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 377/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index a7cc18307c..5a9c12e662 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 5 1 n3em figs-abstractnouns μάρτυς τῶν τοῦ Χριστοῦ παθημάτων 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **witness** and **sufferings**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “one who has witnessed Christ suffer in many ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 5 1 a6ve figs-activepassive τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης 1 of the glory that is about to be revealed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in the glory that God is about to reveal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 5 1 wead figs-abstractnouns τῆς…δόξης 1 of the glory that is about to be revealed If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the glorious nature of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 5 1 yb3l figs-explicit τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης 1 of the glory that is about to be revealed The phrase **the glory that is about to be revealed** refers to Christ’s glorious return to earth in the future. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the glory that is about to be revealed when Christ returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1PE 5 1 yb3l figs-explicit τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης 1 of the glory that is about to be revealed The phrase **the glory being about to be revealed** refers to Christ’s glorious return to earth in the future. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in the glory that is about to be revealed when Christ returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1PE 5 2 f63v figs-metaphor ποιμάνατε τὸ…ποίμνιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Shepherd the flock of God Here Peter uses **Shepherd** to refer to leading and taking care of believers, and he uses **flock** to refer to those believers. Elders who lead assemblies of believers should take care of those believers like shepherds take care of their sheep. Since the shepherd and sheep metaphors are important metaphors in the Bible, you should keep the metaphors in your translation or use similes. Alternate translation: “Take care of God’s people as if they were a flock of sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 2 dvai figs-abstractnouns ἐπισκοποῦντες μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **oversight** and **compulsion**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “supervising—not because you must do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 5 2 zfei figs-ellipsis ἐπισκοποῦντες μὴ ἀναγκαστῶς 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “exercising oversight over them—not doing this under compulsion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 5 3 vg31 figs-metaphor τοῦ ποιμνίου 1 See how you translated **flock** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 4 oz14 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 when the Chief Shepherd has been revealed **And** here indicates that what follows is the result of obeying the commands that Peter gave in [verses 2–3](../05/02.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “As a result of doing these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1PE 5 4 pfjr figs-explicit τοῦ ἀρχιποίμενος 1 when the Chief Shepherd has been revealed **Chief Shepherd** is a title for Jesus. If this might confuse your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Chief Shepherd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1PE 5 4 td11 figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀρχιποίμενος 1 when the Chief Shepherd has been revealed Here Peter speaks of Jesus as if he were a **shepherd** who has authority over all the leaders of the assemblies of believers. Peter told those leaders to shepherd their flocks in [verse 2](../05/02.md). Since **Chief Shepherd** is an important title for Jesus that connects to some prophecies about the Messiah in the Old Testament, you should keep the metaphor in your translation or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who is like a lead shepherd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 5 4 td11 figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀρχιποίμενος 1 when the Chief Shepherd has been revealed Here Peter speaks of Jesus as if he were a **Shepherd** who has authority over all the leaders of the assemblies of believers. Peter told those leaders to shepherd their flocks in [verse 2](../05/02.md). Since **Chief Shepherd** is an important title for Jesus that connects to some prophecies about the Messiah in the Old Testament, you should keep the metaphor in your translation or use a simile. Alternate translation: “the one who is like a lead shepherd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 4 qlek figs-activepassive φανερωθέντος τοῦ ἀρχιποίμενος 1 when the Chief Shepherd has been revealed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the Chief Shepherd appears” or “when God reveals the Chief Shepherd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 5 4 ll4r figs-metaphor τὸν ἀμαράντινον τῆς δόξης στέφανον 1 the unfading crown of glory Here,**crown** refers to a symbol of victory. It does not refer to the type of **crown** that kings wear. In ancient times an athlete would receive this **crown** as a reward for winning a competition. Those crowns were often made of leaves or flowers that would fade. Unlike those victory crowns, the reward that God gives will be **unfading**, which means that it will last forever. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a glorious reward that will last forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 4 c6h3 figs-possession τῆς δόξης στέφανον 1 crown of glory This could refer to: (1) a **crown** that is characterized by **glory**. Alternate translation: “glorious crown” (2) a **crown** that is the **glory** referred to in [verse 1](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “crown, that is, glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) From 4cd985886b3cdcfaca39f57a39e24a9154796e76 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Grant_Ailie Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 20:02:21 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 378/446] Edit 'en_tn_49-GAL.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 1566e4844a..69aeec967d 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ GAL 2 4 fpkc figs-explicit ψευδαδέλφους 1 Here, the word **brothers GAL 2 4 etlo figs-abstractnouns κατασκοπῆσαι τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἡμῶν, ἣν ἔχομεν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “free,” or with a verb such as **freed** as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) GAL 2 4 lyqj figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 When Paul says **we**, he is speaking of himself, his traveling companions, and the Galatian believers, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) GAL 2 4 uvjw figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union that believers have with Christ. See the discussion of this phrase in “Part 3: Important Translation Issues” in the “Introduction to 1 Corinthians” section. If it would help your readers you could use a fuller phrase to describe Paul’s meaning. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus” or “through our union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -GAL 2 4 v9fp grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which the **false brothers** spied on their freedom, to **enslave them**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) The phrase ****introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +GAL 2 4 v9fp grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which the **false brothers** spied on their freedom, to **enslave them**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) GAL 2 4 l7n7 figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡμᾶς καταδουλώσουσιν 1 to make us slaves Paul is speaking about how these people wanted to force the Galatian believers to follow the Jewish rituals that the law commanded. He is speaking about following the law as if it were slavery. If your readers would not understand what **enslave** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to force us to obey the law”or “in order to make us slaves to the law” [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 2 5 bba7 εἴξαμεν τῇ ὑποταγῇ 1 yield in submission Alternate translation: “submit,” or “listen,” or “accept what they were saying,” or “agreed with that they wanted to do” GAL 2 6 afy6 figs-metonymy ἐμοὶ…οὐδὲν προσανέθεντο 1 added nothing to me Here, **me** represents what Paul was teaching. Alternate translation: “added nothing to what I teach” or “did not add anything to my message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From c389e49656f71676f424ac7427512a11e9055c8d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 20:03:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 379/446] Edit 'en_tn_61-1PE.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 5a9c12e662..b1f3a5cb20 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 5 7 c1uu figs-metaphor πᾶσαν τὴν μέριμναν ὑμῶν ἐπιρίψαντες ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 having cast all your anxiety on him Here Peter speaks of **anxiety** as if it were a heavy burden that a person can take off of his back and **cast** onto God. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “trusting him with everything that worries you” or “letting him take care of all the things that trouble you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 8 wbb5 figs-doublet νήψατε, γρηγορήσατε 1 Be sober The words translated as **sober** and **watchful** mean basically the same thing. Peter uses them to emphasize that believers need to be alert since the devil wants to destroy them. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Be completely alert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 5 8 k9nt figs-metaphor νήψατε 1 Be sober See how you translated **sober** in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 5 8 tl7i figs-simile ὡς λέων ὠρυόμενος περιπατεῖ, ζητῶν τινα καταπιεῖν 1 the devil, is walking around like a roaring lion, seeking someone to devour Peter speaks of **the devil** as if he were a **roaring lion** who wants to **devour** people. Just as a hungry lion devours its prey, the devil is **seeking** to destroy the faith of believers. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is trying to find ways to destroy the faith of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +1PE 5 8 tl7i figs-simile ὡς λέων ὠρυόμενος περιπατεῖ, ζητῶν τινα καταπιεῖν 1 the devil, is walking around like a roaring lion, seeking someone to devour Peter speaks of **{the} devil** as if he were a **roaring lion** who wants to **devour** people. Just as a hungry lion devours its prey, the devil is **seeking** to destroy the faith of believers. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is trying to find ways to destroy the faith of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 5 9 v4t5 figs-ellipsis στερεοὶ τῇ πίστει 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “being firm in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1PE 5 9 vwtc figs-abstractnouns τῇ πίστει 1 Here, **the faith** could refer to: (1) a person’s trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “in the faith that you have” (2) the Christian faith in general. Alternate translation: “in the Christian faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1PE 5 9 tusy figs-abstractnouns τὰ αὐτὰ τῶν παθημάτων…ἐπιτελεῖσθαι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sufferings**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that people are suffering in the same ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From b33e0b217789b419584fdd9454f41016ca647402 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Thu, 13 Oct 2022 20:36:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 380/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 77b63758c8..096eeb8388 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -2,8 +2,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo JAS front intro exs3 0 # Introduction to James

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of James

1. Greetings (1:1)
2. Gaining endurance through trials (1:2-4)
3. Trusting God for wisdom (1:5-8)
4. What poor and rich people should boast about (1:9-11)
5. Enduring temptation (1:12-15)
6. Hearing and doing what God’s Word says (1:16-27)
7. A warning against favoring rich people (2:1-13)
8. Faith and works (2:14-26)
9. The need for self-control in speech (3:1-12)
10. Worldly wisdom and heavenly wisdom contrasted (3:13-18)
11. Worldly desires and the sin and conflict they cause (4:1-12)
12. A warning against boasting about tomorrow (4:13-17)
13. Rebuke of rich people (5:1-6)
14. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7-11)
15. Oaths forbidden (5:12)
16. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13-18)
17. Restoration of a sinner (5:19-20)

### Who wrote the book of James?

There is wide agreement among biblical scholars that the author of this book was James the half-brother of Jesus, who was a leader in the early church in the city of Jerusalem. He was respected for his wisdom and authority. For example, he had the last word at the Jerusalem Council, an important meeting of the early church, that is described in [Acts 15:13-21](../act/15/13.md). In [Galatians 2:9](../gal/02/09.md), the apostle Paul calls him a “pillar” of the church, meaning one of its most important leaders. However, even though James was an influential church leader and the half-brother of Jesus, in this letter he introduces himself humbly as “a servant of God and of the Lord Jesus Christ.”

This is not the same man as the apostle James, who was the brother of the apostle John. That James was killed for his faith a few years after Jesus himself was killed and rose from the dead. This letter was written many years after that.

### What kind of writing is the book of James?

The book of James has an opening that is typical of the letters of its time, but it does not have a main body that develops sequentially and logically the way a letter would have. Instead, the book presents a collection of short sayings and reflections on various subjects. (In that way it is similar to the book of Proverbs.) As the outline at the beginning of this introduction shows, the book is made up of many short sections that move around from topic to topic.

James uses many of the devices that speakers used in his time, such as anticipating and answering a question that someone might ask. He also uses many vivid examples drawn from both nature and everyday life. For this reason, many interpreters believe that for the content of this book, James drew on sermons he had preached and on wise advice he had given. He wanted to share all of that wisdom with Christians living in different parts of the Roman Empire to help them face difficult times. It is also possible that James wrote this letter because he was nearing the end of his life and he wanted his wisdom to be preserved and shared after his death.

### To whom was the book of James written?

James wrote this letter to believers in Jesus who had a Jewish background. This is clear from many of the things that he says in the letter. For example, he addresses his readers as “the twelve tribes” in [1:1](../01/01.md). He speaks of their meeting place as a “synagogue” in [2:2](../02/02.md). He assumes in [2:19](../02/19.md) that they are familiar with the essential Jewish affirmation that “God is one,” and in [2:21](../02/21.md) he calls Abraham “our father.” He calls God by the Hebrew title the Lord of Sabaoth in [5:4](../05/04.md). He assumes that his readers will be familiar from the Hebrew Scriptures with the stories of people such as Job ([5:11](../05/11.md)) and Elijah ([5:17](../05/17.md)). These notes will call attention to the places where James engages his readers in light of their Jewish background.

### What is the book of James about?

In this letter, James writes to believers living all over the Roman Empire who are suffering. He tells them that God is working through their sufferings to help them become more mature Christians. James also writes much in this letter about how believers should live in this world and treat one another. He urges them to treat other people fairly, not to quarrel and fight, and to be compassionate and generous.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “James.” Alternatively, they may choose a different title such as “A Letter from James” or “The Letter James Wrote.” But note that “James” is actually the English form of the author’s name. In the letter itself, he calls himself “Jacob,” which is the original Hebrew form of his name. So you may want to refer to him in the title of the book by the same name that you will use in your translation for the character of Jacob in the book of Genesis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Did James disagree with Paul about how a person is justified before God?

Paul taught in Romans that Christians are justified by faith and not by works. James seems to teach that Christians are justified by works. This could be confusing. However, a better understanding of what Paul and James each taught shows that they actually agree with one another. Both of them taught that a person needs faith in order to be justified. They both also taught that true faith would lead a person to do good works. Paul and James taught about these things in different ways because they had different audiences who needed to know different things about being justified. James wrote primarily to Jewish Christians, while Paul wrote to communities in which there were many Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How should the translator signal transitions between topics in the book of James?

James moves briskly from one topic to another. Often he does not end his discussion of one topic with a summary and then begin the discussion of the next topic with an introduction. It might be helpful to your readers if you set topics apart by putting blank lines between them. However, your readers would have the same experience of the letter that its original audience did if you allowed the transitions between topics to remain abrupt. Just as happens in the book of Proverbs, James seems to have wanted each new thought to strike his audience with fresh force. So you may also choose not to put any blank lines between topics in your translation.

James often makes the link between topics through key words, for example, “rejoice” in 1:1 and “joy” in 1:2; “lacking” in 1:4 and “lacks” in 1:5; and so forth. If you could find ways to translate these key words similarly in both of their occurrences, this should help your readers appreciate the link and the transition.

### Changes from the present tense to the past tense

In several places where James offers an illustration of a point he has just made, he narrates that illustration in the past tense as if he were telling the story of something that had happened. If this would be confusing for your readers, you could translate these illustrations in the present tense. Notes will identify each of these places and make that suggestion.

### Textual issues in the book of James

See the General Notes to chapter 2 for a discussion of one important textual issue in this book. JAS 1 intro pz2q 0 # James 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Greetings (1:1)
2. Gaining endurance through trials (1:2-4)
3. Trusting God for wisdom (1:5-8)
4. What poor and rich people should boast about (1:9-11)
5. Enduring temptation (1:12-15)
6. Hearing and doing what God’s Word says (1:16-27)

James begins this letter in [1:1](../01/01.md) by giving his name, identifying the people to whom he is writing, and offering a greeting. That was the way people typically began letters at this time. However, as Part 1 of the Introduction to James explains, the letter does not then develop the way other letters did. Instead, it is a collection of short sayings and reflections.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Testing and temptation

James uses a word in this chapter that can mean both “trial,” as in [1:2](../01/02.md) and [1:12](../01/12.md), and “temptation,” as in [1:13-14](../01/13.md). In both cases the word speaks of the situation of a person who needs to choose between doing something good and doing something evil. The difference between the two senses is important. When ULT translates the word as “trial,” God is testing the person and wants him to do what is good. When ULT translates the word as “temptation,” Satan is tempting the person and wants him to do what is evil. JAS 1 1 pkt2 figs-123person Ἰάκωβος 1 James In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, and they would refer to themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the first person. If your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, you could also use that if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I, James, am writing this letter” or “From James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -JAS 1 1 j000 translate-names Ἰάκωβος 1 James This is the name of a man, the half-brother of Jesus. See the information about him in Part 1 of the Introduction to James. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -JAS 1 1 j001 figs-metonymy ταῖς δώδεκα φυλαῖς 1 to the twelve tribes James is speaking of the nation of Israel by association with the fact that it was made up of twelve tribes. Alternate translation: “to the nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 1 1 j000 translate-names Ἰάκωβος 1 James **James** is the name of a man, the half-brother of Jesus. See the information about him in Part 1 of the Introduction to James. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +JAS 1 1 j001 figs-metonymy ταῖς δώδεκα φυλαῖς 1 to the twelve tribes James is speaking of the nation of Israel by association with the fact that it was made up of **12 tribes**. Alternate translation: “to the nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 1 1 l4i7 figs-metaphor ταῖς δώδεκα φυλαῖς 1 to the twelve tribes James is speaking of Jesus’ followers as if they were the nation of Israel, since the community of the people of God had expanded from that nation to include people of every nation who followed Jesus. Alternate translation: “to followers of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 1 j002 figs-123person ταῖς δώδεκα φυλαῖς 1 to the twelve tribes In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would then say to whom they were writing, naming those people in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the second person. Alternate translation: “to you followers of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JAS 1 1 vza9 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ διασπορᾷ 1 in the dispersion At this time, the term **dispersion** referred to those Jews who were living away from their homeland of Israel and who were scattered into various parts of the Roman Empire. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **dispersion** with a verb such as “scattered.” Alternate translation: “scattered throughout the world” or, if you are using the second person, “who are scattered throughout the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 7f9a362e02f2e68f8b474e389f84ef7e53667b5c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 17:53:39 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 381/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 096eeb8388..19d1bc2a13 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ JAS 1 2 knw6 figs-abstractnouns πᾶσαν χαρὰν ἡγήσασθε 1 Cons JAS 1 2 j004 figs-hyperbole πᾶσαν χαρὰν ἡγήσασθε 1 Consider it all joy James says **all** as an overstatement for emphasis. He does not mean that believers should be happy about all the bad things that happen to them when they encounter **trials**. Rather, he means that the **trials** provide a general occasion for them to rejoice because of the valuable things God that is developing in their lives. He describes these things in the next verse. Alternate translation: “You should be very happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) JAS 1 2 j005 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου 1 my brothers James is using the term **brothers** to refer to fellow believers in Jesus. Alternate translation, as in UST: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 2 j006 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί μου 1 my brothers James is using the term **brothers** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Be sure that this is clear in your translation so that your readers do not get the impression that James is addressing only men. If you use a non-figurative word such as “believers” to translate the metaphor **brothers**, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you retain the metaphor, you could state “my brothers and sisters.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -JAS 1 2 j007 figs-metaphor περιπέσητε 1 you fall into James is speaking of **trials** as if they were a hole or pit that believers could **fall into**. Alternate translation: “you encounter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 2 j007 figs-metaphor περιπέσητε ποικίλοις 1 you fall into James is speaking of **trials** as if they were a hole or pit that believers could **fall into**. Alternate translation: “you encounter different trials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 2 j008 figs-you περιπέσητε 1 you fall into The pronoun **you** is plural here, since James is writing to believers in Jesus as a group. Generally throughout the letter, the pronouns “you” and “your” are plural for this same reason. These notes will identify the few places where they are singular instead. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JAS 1 3 j009 γινώσκοντες ὅτι 1 knowing that It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here, as UST does. Alternate translation: “I want you to know that” or “You should realize that” JAS 1 3 xud2 figs-abstractnouns τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως κατεργάζεται ὑπομονήν 1 the testing of your faith produces endurance If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **testing**, **faith**, and **endurance** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “when you rely on God to help you through a difficult situation, this teaches you not to give up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 9106d7e47b5bdccfc30496f4b0429e3246908d7e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 17:57:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 382/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 19d1bc2a13..556f1f6971 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -25,8 +25,8 @@ JAS 1 5 q2df αἰτείτω παρὰ…Θεοῦ 1 let him ask from God Alter JAS 1 5 xu31 figs-activepassive δοθήσεται αὐτῷ 1 it will be given to him If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will give it to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 1 6 j010 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει 1 in faith If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “confidently trusting God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 1 6 y2mk figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν διακρινόμενος 1 doubting nothing If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative that consists of the negative verb **doubting** and the negative object **nothing** with a positive expression. Alternate translation: “with complete certainty that God will answer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -JAS 1 6 p12l figs-simile ἔοικεν κλύδωνι θαλάσσης, ἀνεμιζομένῳ καὶ ῥιπιζομένῳ 1 has become like a wave of the sea, wind-blown and tossed The point of this comparison is that anyone who doubts will be like the waves in the ocean, which keep moving in different directions. In your translation, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. (However, you could also reproduce the simile, as suggested in the next note.) Alternate translation: “will keep changing his mind about what to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -JAS 1 6 j011 translate-unknown κλύδωνι θαλάσσης, ἀνεμιζομένῳ καὶ ῥιπιζομένῳ 1 a wave of the sea, wind-blown and tossed If you would like to use a simile in your translation but your readers would not be familiar with a **wave of the sea**, you could use another illustration that would be familiar to them. Alternate translation: “the desert sand swirling in the wind” or “stalks of tall grass swaying back and forth in the wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +JAS 1 6 p12l figs-simile ἔοικεν κλύδωνι θαλάσσης, ἀνεμιζομένῳ καὶ ῥιπιζομένῳ 1 has become like a wave of the sea, wind-blown and tossed The point of this comparison is that anyone who doubts will be like **a wave** in the ocean, which keeps moving in different directions. In your translation, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. (However, you could also reproduce the simile, as suggested in the next note.) Alternate translation: “will keep changing his mind about what to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +JAS 1 6 j011 translate-unknown κλύδωνι θαλάσσης, ἀνεμιζομένῳ καὶ ῥιπιζομένῳ 1 a wave of the sea, wind-blown and tossed If you would like to use a simile in your translation but your readers would not be familiar with a **wave of {the} sea**, you could use another illustration that would be familiar to them. Alternate translation: “the desert sand swirling in the wind” or “stalks of tall grass swaying back and forth in the wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JAS 1 6 j012 figs-activepassive κλύδωνι θαλάσσης, ἀνεμιζομένῳ καὶ ῥιπιζομένῳ 1 a wave of the sea, wind-blown and tossed If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “an ocean wave that the wind is blowing and tossing around” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 1 7 j013 figs-gendernotations μὴ γὰρ οἰέσθω ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖνος 1 For let that man not think James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “Such a person should not think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JAS 1 8 b5t6 figs-metaphor ἀνὴρ δίψυχος 1 a double-minded man James speaks of this person as if he had two minds, with one mind deciding to do one thing and the other mind deciding to do something else. Alternate translation: “a man who cannot make up his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -43,10 +43,10 @@ JAS 1 10 j018 figs-abstractnouns τῇ ταπεινώσει αὐτοῦ 1 his l JAS 1 10 j019 figs-metaphor τῇ ταπεινώσει αὐτοῦ 1 his lowliness James is using a spatial metaphor to describe rich believers as if they were in a low place in order to indicate that God has taught them humility. Alternate translation: “the humility that God has taught them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 10 ulk4 figs-explicit τῇ ταπεινώσει αὐτοῦ 1 his lowliness If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate explicitly, as UST does, that God has taught rich believers humility by showing them that their wealth does not make them better than other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 1 10 j020 figs-euphemism παρελεύσεται 1 he will pass away James is using a mild expression to refer to death. Alternate translation: “he will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -JAS 1 10 nug7 figs-simile ὡς ἄνθος χόρτου 1 like a flower of the grass The point of this comparison is that just as wild flowers bloom only for a short time, rich people will live on earth for the same relatively short time as anyone else, so their riches do not give them any advantage. You could explain the meaning of this figurative expression in your translation. (However, you could also reproduce the simile, as suggested in the next note.) Alternate translation: “after living for only a relatively short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -JAS 1 10 j021 translate-unknown ὡς ἄνθος χόρτου παρελεύσεται 1 like a flower of the grass If you would like to use a simile in your translation but your readers would not be familiar with a **flower of the grass** (that is, a wildflower), you could use a different illustration. You could use something familiar to them that lasts only for a short time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +JAS 1 10 nug7 figs-simile ὡς ἄνθος χόρτου 1 like a flower of the grass The point of this comparison is that just a wild **flower** blooms only for a short time, rich people will live on earth for the same relatively short time as anyone else, so their riches do not give them any advantage. You could explain the meaning of this figurative expression in your translation. (However, you could also reproduce the simile, as suggested in the next note.) Alternate translation: “after living for only a relatively short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +JAS 1 10 j021 translate-unknown ὡς ἄνθος χόρτου παρελεύσεται 1 like a flower of the grass If you would like to use a simile in your translation but your readers would not be familiar with a **flower of {the} grass** (that is, a wildflower), you could use a different illustration. You could use something familiar to them that lasts only for a short time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JAS 1 11 j022 ἀνέτειλεν γὰρ ὁ ἥλιος σὺν τῷ καύσωνι, καὶ ἐξήρανεν τὸν χόρτον, καὶ τὸ ἄνθος αὐτοῦ ἐξέπεσεν, καὶ ἡ εὐπρέπεια τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ ἀπώλετο 1 For the sun rose with heat and dried up the grass, and its flower fell off and the beauty of its face perished Here James is giving an illustration in the past tense as if he were telling the story of something that had happened. (See the discussion of this in Part 3 of the Introduction to James.) If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this sentence with the present tense. Alternate translation: “For the sun rises with heat and dries up the grass, and its flower falls off and the beauty of its face perishes” -JAS 1 11 j023 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James is giving the reason for the result he implicitly described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +JAS 1 11 j023 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James uses **For** to introduce the reason for the result he implicitly described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 1 11 j024 σὺν τῷ καύσωνι 1 with heat Here, **heat** could mean one of two things. (1) It could refer to intense, withering heat. Alternate translation: “and radiated withering heat” or, if you are using the present tense, “and radiates withering heat” (2) It could refer to a hot wind that occurs in full sunlight. Alternate translation: “and caused a hot wind” or, if you are using the present tense, “and causes a hot wind” JAS 1 11 j025 figs-abstractnouns ἡ εὐπρέπεια τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ ἀπώλετο 1 the beauty of its face perished If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **beauty** with an adjective such as “beautiful.” Alternate translation: “it no longer had a beautiful appearance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 1 11 j026 figs-metaphor ἡ εὐπρέπεια τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ ἀπώλετο 1 the beauty of its face perished James speaks of the wild **flower** as if it had a **face**. Alternate translation: “it no longer had a beautiful appearance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From fa1ceffa2edb91d83376abc78ceb32a64a2c61fe Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 18:01:30 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 383/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 556f1f6971..b60952721e 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ JAS 1 11 j027 figs-simile οὕτως καὶ 1 Thus also James uses the words * JAS 1 11 j028 figs-nominaladj ὁ πλούσιος 1 the rich James is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “a person who is rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 1 11 ng26 figs-metaphor μαρανθήσεται 1 will wither James speaks of the **rich** person as if he were a flower that would **wither**. James means that this person will “die,” as UST indicates. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 11 sdi2 figs-metaphor ἐν ταῖς πορείαις αὐτοῦ 1 in his journeys James speaks of a **rich** person’s activities as if they were a journey that he was taking. This metaphor implies that he is giving no thought to his coming death and that it will take him by surprise. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 1 12 m13d figs-idiom μακάριος ἀνὴρ ὃς ὑπομένει πειρασμόν 1 Blessed is the man who endures trial **Blessed is** indicates that God is giving favor to someone or that his situation is positive or good. Alternate translation: “The person who endures trial receives God’s favor” or “The person who endures trial is in a positive situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +JAS 1 12 m13d figs-idiom μακάριος ἀνὴρ ὃς ὑπομένει πειρασμόν 1 Blessed is the man who endures trial **Blessed {is}** indicates that God is giving favor to someone or that his situation is positive or good. Alternate translation: “The person who endures trial receives God’s favor” or “The person who endures trial is in a positive situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 1 12 j029 figs-gendernotations ἀνὴρ 1 the man James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JAS 1 12 vr4a ὑπομένει πειρασμόν 1 endures trial Here, **trial** could mean one of two things. See the discussion of the word in the General Notes to this chapter. James may actually want his readers to hear both senses in this case, as this verse is making a transition from a discussion of testing into a discussion of temptation. (1) The word **trial** could mean the same thing as in [1:2-3](../01/02.md), where it describes the “testing” of “faith.” The reading of UST expresses this interpretation. (2) The word could refer to being tempted, that is, being led by one’s desires to do something wrong, which James discusses in the following verses. Alternate translation: “resists temptation” JAS 1 12 vta6 δόκιμος γενόμενος 1 becoming approved How you translate this will depend on how you translate **trial** earlier in the sentence. (In your translation, you could also focus on the way that God approves of this person, as UST does.) Alternate translation: “once he has demonstrated his faithfulness” of “once he has demonstrated his obedience” From 509896450bb1e9db3b6ccf95c57f968b53770bb7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 18:17:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 384/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index b60952721e..f06b41403f 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ JAS 1 18 j049 figs-explicit λόγῳ ἀληθείας 1 by the word of truth J JAS 1 18 j346 grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ εἶναι ἡμᾶς ἀπαρχήν τινα τῶν αὐτοῦ κτισμάτων 1 for us to be something like a firstfruits of his creatures This is a purpose clause. James is stating the purpose for which God **desired to give us birth**. In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that we would be like a firstfruits of his creatures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) JAS 1 18 j050 figs-explicit ἀπαρχήν τινα τῶν αὐτοῦ κτισμάτων 1 something like a firstfruits of his creatures James is assuming that his readers will know that he is using the traditional Israelite offering known as **firstfruits** as a simile. The law of Moses required the Israelites to offer to God some of the first crops they harvested each year. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state specifically that this is the name of an offering. Alternate translation: “something like an offering of firstfruits from among his creatures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 1 18 qh2e figs-simile ἀπαρχήν τινα τῶν αὐτοῦ κτισμάτων 1 something like a firstfruits of his creatures When they offered some of their first crops to God each year, the Israelites were acknowledging that the entire crop belonged to God and was a gift from God to them. James is using this **firstfruits** offering as a simile to indicate that the believers of his time are an indication that there will be many more people who will belong to God in the future. In fact, since James speaks of **creatures**, he may even mean that believers in Jesus are the first part of God’s creation to be freed from the curse and come back fully under his rule. Alternate translation: “the first of many people who would believe in Jesus” or “the first of God’s creatures to be freed from the curse and come back fully under his rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -JAS 1 19 dt7i figs-sentencetypes ἴστε 1 Know This Greek form could be either imperative or indicative, and so it could mean: (1) if it is an imperative, James is telling his readers to pay attention to what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “This is important” (2) if it is an indicative, James is telling his readers that he is about to remind them of something that they already know. Alternate translation: “You already know this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-sentencetypes]]) +JAS 1 19 dt7i figs-sentencetypes ἴστε 1 Know This Greek form of **Know** could be either imperative or indicative, and so it could mean: (1) if it is an imperative, James is telling his readers to pay attention to what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “This is important” (2) if it is an indicative, James is telling his readers that he is about to remind them of something that they already know. Alternate translation: “You already know this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-sentencetypes]]) JAS 1 19 j051 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου ἀγαπητοί 1 my beloved brothers See how you translated this expression in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “my dear fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 19 j052 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But **But** could mean: (1) if **know** is an imperative, then James is using the term **but** as a transitional particle that does not indicate a contrast. If you decided to translate **know** as an imperative, you may have a similar word in your language that you can use for this same purpose. Otherwise, you do not need to translate the term. (2) if **know** is an indicative, then James is using the term **but** to introduce a mild contrast. He is saying that even though his readers already know what he is about to say, he wants to stress it anyway. If you decided to translate **know** as an indicative, you could use a term in your language that indicates a mild contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) JAS 1 19 p728 figs-idiom ἔστω…πᾶς ἄνθρωπος ταχὺς εἰς τὸ ἀκοῦσαι, βραδὺς εἰς τὸ λαλῆσαι, βραδὺς εἰς ὀργήν 1 let every man be quick to hear, slow to speak, slow to anger The expression **slow to speak** does not refer to speaking slowly. Rather, like the expressions before and after it, it is an idiom. Alternate translation: “each of you should listen carefully, speak only after reflecting on what to say, and not lose your tempers easily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From c53de79bd6fc97e3fea99ef3b088bfda91b070ba Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 18:20:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 385/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index f06b41403f..573c6251c7 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -102,10 +102,10 @@ JAS 1 19 j051 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου ἀγαπητοί 1 my belove JAS 1 19 j052 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But **But** could mean: (1) if **know** is an imperative, then James is using the term **but** as a transitional particle that does not indicate a contrast. If you decided to translate **know** as an imperative, you may have a similar word in your language that you can use for this same purpose. Otherwise, you do not need to translate the term. (2) if **know** is an indicative, then James is using the term **but** to introduce a mild contrast. He is saying that even though his readers already know what he is about to say, he wants to stress it anyway. If you decided to translate **know** as an indicative, you could use a term in your language that indicates a mild contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) JAS 1 19 p728 figs-idiom ἔστω…πᾶς ἄνθρωπος ταχὺς εἰς τὸ ἀκοῦσαι, βραδὺς εἰς τὸ λαλῆσαι, βραδὺς εἰς ὀργήν 1 let every man be quick to hear, slow to speak, slow to anger The expression **slow to speak** does not refer to speaking slowly. Rather, like the expressions before and after it, it is an idiom. Alternate translation: “each of you should listen carefully, speak only after reflecting on what to say, and not lose your tempers easily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 1 19 ev3v figs-gendernotations πᾶς ἄνθρωπος 1 every man James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “each of you” or “each person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -JAS 1 20 j053 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James is giving the reason why people should not get angry, as he said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “You should not get angry, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +JAS 1 20 j053 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James uses **For** to introduce the reason why people should not get angry, as he said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “You should not get angry, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 1 20 j054 figs-gendernotations ὀργὴ…ἀνδρὸς 1 the anger of man James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “human anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JAS 1 20 ej4p figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην Θεοῦ οὐκ ἐργάζεται 1 does not work the righteousness of God If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **righteousness** by translating the idea behind it with an adjective such as “righteous” or “right.” Alternate translation: “does not fulfill the righteous purposes of God” or “does not accomplish the right things that God wants to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JAS 1 21 j055 grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Therefore Here James is telling his readers what they should do as a result of what he explained to them in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Consequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +JAS 1 21 j055 grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Therefore Here James uses **Therefore** to introduce to his readers a statement of what they should do as a result of what he explained to them in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Consequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 1 21 hit5 figs-metaphor ἀποθέμενοι πᾶσαν ῥυπαρίαν καὶ περισσείαν κακίας 1 laying aside all filth and abundance of wickedness James is speaking of **filth** and **abundance of wickedness** as if they were clothing that could be taken off. By those expressions he means sin and wrong actions (see later notes to this verse). Alternate translation: “stop committing sin and doing so many wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 21 h226 figs-doublet ῥυπαρίαν καὶ περισσείαν κακίας 1 filth and abundance of wickedness The expressions **filth** and **abundance of wickedness** mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “every kind of sinful behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JAS 1 21 h8ty figs-metaphor ῥυπαρίαν 1 filth James is speaking of sin as if it were **filth**, that is, something that made people dirty. Alternate translation: “sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From b44ab26a2c5afa668762c11692673023446df154 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 18:24:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 386/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 573c6251c7..e71fcf3800 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -142,12 +142,12 @@ JAS 1 25 j073 figs-ellipsis καὶ παραμείνας 1 and having continued JAS 1 25 j074 figs-possession ἀκροατὴς ἐπιλησμονῆς 1 a hearer of forgetfulness James is using the possessive form to describe a **hearer** who is characterized by **forgetfulness**. Alternate translation: “a hearer who is forgetful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JAS 1 25 j075 figs-abstractnouns ἀκροατὴς ἐπιλησμονῆς 1 a hearer of forgetfulness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **forgetfulness** by translating the idea behind it with a verb such as “forget.” Alternate translation: “a hearer who forgets” or “someone who forgets what he hears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 1 25 j076 figs-metonymy ποιητὴς ἔργου 1 a doer of the work By association with the **work** that it takes to carry out God’s commands, James is using the term **work** to mean what God commands. Alternate translation: “someone who does what God commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JAS 1 25 jku1 figs-activepassive οὗτος μακάριος…αὐτοῦ ἔσται 1 this one will be blessed While the word **blessed** is an adjective and so the expression **will be blessed** is not a passive verbal form, it may be helpful to your readers to translate this with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “God will bless such a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +JAS 1 25 jku1 figs-activepassive οὗτος μακάριος…ἔσται 1 this one will be blessed While the word **blessed** is an adjective and so the expression **will be blessed** is not a passive verbal form, it may be helpful to your readers to translate this with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “God will bless such a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 1 25 j077 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ποιήσει αὐτοῦ 1 in his doing If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **doing** by translating the idea behind it with a verb such as “do.” Alternate translation: “in what he does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 1 26 j078 figs-hypo εἴ τις δοκεῖ θρησκὸς εἶναι, μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀπατῶν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ, τούτου μάταιος ἡ θρησκεία 1 If anyone thinks to be religious, not bridling his tongue, but deceiving his heart, the religion of that one is worthless James is using a hypothetical situation to teach. Alternate translation: “Suppose someone thinks that he is religious, but he does not bridle his tongue, thus deceiving his heart. Then his religion is worthless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) JAS 1 26 j1bg δοκεῖ θρησκὸς εἶναι 1 thinks to be religious The word translated **religious** could refer to a pattern of behavior rather than to participation in worship activities. Alternate translation: “thinks that he is honoring God by his actions” JAS 1 26 j079 figs-metaphor μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ 1 not bridling his tongue James speaks of a person **bridling his tongue** as if he were controlling a horse with a bridle. Alternate translation: “but he does not control his tongue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 1 26 j080 translate-unknown μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ 1 not bridling his tongue A **bridle** is headgear that is used to control a horse. If your readers would not be familiar with what a **bridle** is, you could use a different illustration that would be familiar to them of a device that is used in your culture to control animals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +JAS 1 26 j080 translate-unknown μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ 1 not bridling his tongue A “bridle” is headgear that is used to control a horse. If your readers would not be familiar with what a “bridle” is, you could use a different illustration that would be familiar to them of a device that is used in your culture to control animals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JAS 1 26 vxu1 figs-metonymy μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ 1 not bridling his tongue By association with the way that the **tongue** is used in speech, James is using the term **tongue** to mean what a person says. Alternate translation: “not controlling what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 1 26 sex6 figs-synecdoche ἀπατῶν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 deceiving his heart James is using one part of this hypothetical person, his **heart**, to mean the person himself. Alternate translation: “deceiving himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JAS 1 26 q83d figs-hyperbole τούτου μάταιος ἡ θρησκεία 1 the religion of that one is worthless James says **worthless** as an overstatement for emphasis. There would conceivably still be some value in the religion of a person even if he did not carefully control what he said. But James wants to emphasize how inconsistent it is to claim to love God but then to say things that hurt and disparage other people. He will develop this point further in [3:9-10](../03/09.md). Alternate translation: “his actions are not as pleasing to God as he thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) From 37c9b0c4b915203a09dbad4bf7f10b51d3a646d7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 18:26:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 387/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index e71fcf3800..240c41a374 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -151,8 +151,8 @@ JAS 1 26 j080 translate-unknown μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν α JAS 1 26 vxu1 figs-metonymy μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ 1 not bridling his tongue By association with the way that the **tongue** is used in speech, James is using the term **tongue** to mean what a person says. Alternate translation: “not controlling what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 1 26 sex6 figs-synecdoche ἀπατῶν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 deceiving his heart James is using one part of this hypothetical person, his **heart**, to mean the person himself. Alternate translation: “deceiving himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JAS 1 26 q83d figs-hyperbole τούτου μάταιος ἡ θρησκεία 1 the religion of that one is worthless James says **worthless** as an overstatement for emphasis. There would conceivably still be some value in the religion of a person even if he did not carefully control what he said. But James wants to emphasize how inconsistent it is to claim to love God but then to say things that hurt and disparage other people. He will develop this point further in [3:9-10](../03/09.md). Alternate translation: “his actions are not as pleasing to God as he thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -JAS 1 27 j081 figs-metaphor θρησκεία καθαρὰ καὶ ἀμίαντος 1 Pure and undefiled religion James is speaking of **religion** as if it could be physically **pure** and **undefiled**. Alternate translation: “Religion that is pleasing and acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 1 27 g11k figs-doublet θρησκεία καθαρὰ καὶ ἀμίαντος 1 Pure and undefiled religion The terms **pure** and **undefiled** mean similar things. They both indicate that something is free of contamination. James is using these terms together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Religion that is completely acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +JAS 1 27 j081 figs-metaphor θρησκεία καθαρὰ καὶ ἀμίαντος 1 Pure and undefiled religion James is speaking of **religion** as if it could be physically **Pure** and **undefiled**. Alternate translation: “Religion that is pleasing and acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 1 27 g11k figs-doublet θρησκεία καθαρὰ καὶ ἀμίαντος 1 Pure and undefiled religion The terms **Pure** and **undefiled** mean similar things. They both indicate that something is free of contamination. James is using these terms together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Religion that is completely acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JAS 1 27 skf4 figs-metaphor παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ 1 before God The word **before** means “in front of” or “in the presence of” another person, and in this case **before** him indicates “where God can see.” Seeing, for its part, represents attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “from God’s perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 27 j082 figs-hendiadys τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί 1 God and the Father James is not talking about two different people. He is expressing a single idea by using two nouns connected with **and**. The noun **Father** further identifies **God**. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) JAS 1 27 j083 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρί 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) From bc53727824d12e57a507b090aa012cec34ddef94 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 18:36:37 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 388/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 240c41a374..7b10773264 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -173,8 +173,8 @@ JAS 2 2 j087 translate-unknown συναγωγὴν 1 synagogue A **synagogue** i JAS 2 2 j088 figs-nominaladj πτωχὸς 1 a poor one James is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to mean a kind of person. (ULT adds **one** to indicate this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “a person who is poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 2 3 j089 figs-hypo δὲ 1 and James is continuing to describe the condition in the hypothetical situation that he introduced in the previous verse. Alternate translation, as in UST: “and suppose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) JAS 2 3 j090 figs-you ἐπιβλέψητε…εἴπητε…εἴπητε 1 you look … you say … you say In these three instances **you** is plural, since James is speaking to all of his readers about what they might do in such a situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -JAS 2 3 j091 figs-idiom ἐπιβλέψητε…ἐπὶ 1 you look at In this context, this expression means to look at someone or something with admiration. Alternate translation: “you look admiringly at” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JAS 2 3 j092 figs-yousingular σὺ κάθου ὧδε καλῶς…σὺ στῆθι ἐκεῖ…κάθου ὑπὸ τὸ ὑποπόδιόν μου 1 You sit here well … You stand there … Sit under my footstool Since these comments are addressed to the rich person and to the poor person as individuals, **you** is singular in the first two instances and the implied “you” in the command to **sit** is also singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +JAS 2 3 j091 figs-idiom ἐπιβλέψητε…ἐπὶ 1 you look at In this context, this expression means to **look at** someone or something with admiration. Alternate translation: “you look admiringly at” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +JAS 2 3 j092 figs-yousingular σὺ κάθου ὧδε καλῶς…σὺ στῆθι ἐκεῖ…κάθου ὑπὸ τὸ ὑποπόδιόν μου 1 You sit here well … You stand there … Sit under my footstool Since these comments are addressed to the rich person and to the poor person as individuals, **You** is singular in the first two instances and the implied “you” in the command to **sit** is also singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) JAS 2 3 zx9f figs-idiom σὺ κάθου ὧδε καλῶς 1 You sit here well In this context **well** means “honorably.” It does not refer to how well the rich person would be able to sit in the indicated seat. Alternate translation: “Sit here in this place of honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 2 3 j093 figs-imperative σὺ κάθου ὧδε καλῶς 1 You sit here well This is an imperative, but it should be translated as a polite request rather than as a command. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please sit here in this place of honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) JAS 2 3 j094 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 and The term **and** introduces a contrast between the way the rich person and the poor person are treated. Alternate translation: “but” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) From d2756a7bee3359ced2dbef0712e757fc2be7b13f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 18:41:42 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 389/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 7b10773264..1dbb781143 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ JAS 2 8 j109 grammar-connect-logic-contrast εἰ μέντοι 1 If, however Jam JAS 2 8 j110 τελεῖτε 1 you fulfill The verb **fulfill** comes from the same root as the adjective “perfect” that James uses several times earlier in this letter. It means to make something accomplish its purpose or reach its goal. Alternate translation: “you completely obey” JAS 2 8 q9hh figs-metonymy νόμον…βασιλικὸν 1 the royal law There are two possible reasons for why James describes the **law** that he quotes here from [Leviticus 19:18](../lev/19/18.md) as **royal**. (1) When Jesus came proclaiming the kingdom of God, he said that this law was one of two that summed up all of the other laws and guided life in the kingdom of God. (The other law was to love God with all of one’s heart, soul, mind, and strength.) Alternate translation: “the law that guides life in the kingdom of God” (2) James may say that this **law** is **royal** because God, the true king, gave it to people. Alternate translation: “God’s law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 2 8 ymf5 figs-declarative ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν 1 You will love your neighbor as yourself Here the law of Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You are to love your neighbor as you love yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) -JAS 2 8 j111 figs-youcrowd ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν 1 You will love your neighbor as yourself The words **you** and **yourself** are singular in this quotation because, even though Moses gave this law to the Israelites as a group, each individual person was expected to obey it. So in your translation, use the singular forms of “you” and “yourself” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) +JAS 2 8 j111 figs-youcrowd ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν 1 You will love your neighbor as yourself The words **You**, **your**, and **yourself** are singular in this quotation because, even though Moses gave this law to the Israelites as a group, each individual person was expected to obey it. So in your translation, use the singular forms of “You,” “your,” and “yourself” if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) JAS 2 8 gll2 figs-idiom τὸν πλησίον σου 1 your neighbor This is an idiom. It does not mean only someone who lives nearby. Alternate translation: “other people” or “anyone you encounter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 2 8 b9wu καλῶς ποιεῖτε 1 you do well Alternate translation: “you are doing what God wants you to do” JAS 2 9 xt6y figs-explicit προσωπολημπτεῖτε 1 you favor Your language may require you to specify the object of **favor**. Alternate translation: “you favor the rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ JAS 2 9 gl2e figs-personification ἐλεγχόμενοι ὑπὸ τοῦ νό JAS 2 10 j112 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James is giving the reason for the statement he made in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The reason why showing favoritism makes a person guilty of breaking God’s law is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 2 10 l29g figs-idiom ὅστις…τηρήσῃ 1 whoever might keep Here, **keep** is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “whoever might obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 2 10 jb5u figs-metaphor πταίσῃ δὲ ἐν ἑνί 1 but stumble in one thing James speaks of a person disobeying a commandment as if he would **stumble**, that is, trip and lose his balance while walking. Alternate translation: “but disobey one thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 2 10 m8ep figs-nominaladj πταίσῃ δὲ ἐν ἑνί 1 but stumble in one thing James is using the adjective **one** as a noun to refer to one commandment of the law. (ULT adds the term **thing** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “but disobey one commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +JAS 2 10 m8ep figs-nominaladj πταίσῃ δὲ ἐν ἑνί 1 but stumble in one thing James is using the adjective **one** as a noun to refer to one commandment of the law. (ULT adds the term **{thing}** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “but disobey one commandment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 2 10 j113 πάντων ἔνοχος 1 guilty of all Alternate translation: “guilty of breaking the entire law” JAS 2 10 j114 figs-explicit πάντων ἔνοχος 1 guilty of all If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why James says that this is true. Alternate translation: “guilty of breaking the entire law, because God gave the entire law to show people how he wanted them to live, and if you break one part of it, you are not living in that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 11 j115 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James is giving the reason for the statement he made in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “The reason why breaking one law makes a person guilty of breaking every law is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ JAS 2 12 yp6i figs-activepassive μέλλοντες κρίνεσθαι 1 ones wh JAS 2 12 e87r figs-possession νόμου ἐλευθερίας 1 the law of freedom As in [1:25](../01/25.md), James is using the possessive form to describe a **law** that brings **freedom**. Alternate translation: “the law that brings freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JAS 2 12 j116 figs-abstractnouns νόμου ἐλευθερίας 1 the law of freedom If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract noun **freedom** by translating the idea behind it with an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “the law that sets people free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 2 12 j117 figs-explicit νόμου ἐλευθερίας 1 the law of freedom If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what the **law** gives people the **freedom** to do. Alternate translation: “the law that sets people free to obey God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JAS 2 12 j118 figs-explicit νόμου ἐλευθερίας 1 the law of freedom In this context, it appears that when James speaks of **the law of freedom**, he is referring to the commandment that he quoted in [2:8](../02/08.md), “You will love your neighbor as yourself.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly and explain how this law sets people free. Alternate translation: “the law to love one’s neighbor, which sets people free to obey God by giving them a principle to follow in all of their actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JAS 2 12 j118 figs-explicit νόμου ἐλευθερίας 1 the law of freedom In this context, it appears that when James speaks of **{the} law of freedom**, he is referring to the commandment that he quoted in [2:8](../02/08.md), “You will love your neighbor as yourself.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly and explain how this law sets people free. Alternate translation: “the law to love one’s neighbor, which sets people free to obey God by giving them a principle to follow in all of their actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 13 j119 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James is giving the reason why people should be guided in their actions by the principle of loving others, as he said in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “You should follow the principle of loving others because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 2 13 j120 figs-metonymy ἡ γὰρ κρίσις ἀνέλεος τῷ μὴ ποιήσαντι ἔλεος 1 judgment is merciless to those who have not done mercy James is using the word **judgment** to represent God, the one who judges. Alternate translation: “when God judges people, he will not be merciful to people who have not shown mercy to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 2 13 yv6l figs-personification ἡ γὰρ κρίσις ἀνέλεος τῷ μὴ ποιήσαντι ἔλεος 1 judgment is merciless to those who have not done mercy James is speaking of **judgment** as if it were a living thing that could act in a **merciless** way. Alternate translation: “When God judges people, he will not be merciful to people who have not shown mercy to others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) From 74b81fe9a8119ff2f20e95e4500a099dff622596 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 18:44:59 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 390/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 1dbb781143..347c4aed10 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ JAS 2 14 j128 figs-abstractnouns μὴ δύναται ἡ πίστις σῶσα JAS 2 14 g8kr σῶσαι αὐτόν 1 save him Your language may require you to specify what this kind of faith cannot **save** a person from. Alternate translation: “save him from God’s judgment” JAS 2 15 j129 figs-hypo ἐὰν 1 If James is using a hypothetical situation to teach. He begins to describe the condition in this verse. He describes the rest of the condition and the result in the next verse. Alternate translation: “Suppose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) JAS 2 15 f6el figs-metaphor ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἀδελφὴ 1 a brother or sister As everywhere else in the book, the term **brother** refers to a fellow believer. In every other instance, the term can mean either a man or a woman. But in this verse James uses **brother** to mean a believer who is a man and **sister** to mean a believer who is a woman. If your language has both masculine and the feminine forms of the word you have been using to translate “brother,” you can use them both here. Otherwise, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another man or woman who believes in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 2 15 j130 γυμνοὶ 1 unclothed **Unclothed** can mean “naked,” and if a Bible translation already exists in your area, it may say that. But in this context, the word actually refers to lacking adequate clothes. Alternate translation: “badly clothed” +JAS 2 15 j130 γυμνοὶ 1 unclothed The word **unclothed** can mean “naked,” and if a Bible translation already exists in your area, it may say that. But in this context, the word actually refers to lacking adequate clothes. Alternate translation: “badly clothed” JAS 2 16 j131 figs-hypo δέ 1 and James is continuing to describe the condition of the hypothetical situation that he is using to teach. Alternate translation: “and suppose that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) JAS 2 16 j132 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς…αὐτοῖς 1 to them … them Even though in the previous verse James spoke in the singular of “a brother or sister,” he now speaks of needy people generally in the plural, saying **them**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use the singular in this verse as well. Alternate translation: “to him or her … him or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JAS 2 16 j133 figs-metonymy θερμαίνεσθε καὶ χορτάζεσθε 1 warm yourself and be satisfied The person who would say this to people in need would be speaking of clothing by association with the way its keeps people warm and of food by association with the way it satisfies people. Alternate translation: “have adequate clothing and enough food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 5074abd09c80db559af3fe65c9c665c868ecff89 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 18:49:06 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 391/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 347c4aed10..f7b3f0d930 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -265,20 +265,20 @@ JAS 2 16 yi63 figs-rquestion τί τὸ ὄφελος? 1 what would be the profi JAS 2 16 j137 figs-hypo τί τὸ ὄφελος? 1 what would be the profit? This is the result of the hypothetical situation that James has been using to teach. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Then that does no good!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) JAS 2 17 me1d figs-personification ἡ πίστις, ἐὰν μὴ ἔχῃ ἔργα, νεκρά ἐστιν καθ’ ἑαυτήν 1 faith by itself, if it does not have works, is dead James is speaking of **faith** as if it would be a living thing if it had works but not be alive if it did not have them. Alternate translation: “a person’s faith is not genuine by itself; he must express it through works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 2 17 j138 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις, ἐὰν μὴ ἔχῃ ἔργα, νεκρά ἐστιν καθ’ ἑαυτήν 1 faith by itself, if it does not have works, is dead If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **faith** and **works** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “if a person says he believes in God but he does not do what God wants him to do, then he does not really believe in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JAS 2 18 j139 figs-quotations ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις, κἀγὼ ἔργα ἔχω 1 But someone will say, “You have faith and I have works.” See the discussion of this sentence in the General Notes to this chapter. You may want to turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation to help your readers understand that the **you** who is being addressed is the same “one of you” as in [2:16](../02/16.md) and that when James says **I**, he is referring to himself. Alternate translation: “But someone may tell you that you have faith and I have works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +JAS 2 18 j139 figs-quotations ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις, κἀγὼ ἔργα ἔχω 1 But someone will say, “You have faith and I have works.” See the discussion of this sentence in the General Notes to this chapter. You may want to turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation to help your readers understand that the **You** who is being addressed is the same “one of you” as in [2:16](../02/16.md) and that when James says **I**, he is referring to himself. Alternate translation: “But someone may tell you that you have faith and I have works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) JAS 2 18 j140 figs-explicit ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις, κἀγὼ ἔργα ἔχω 1 But someone will say, “You have faith, and I have works.” See the discussion of this sentence in the General Notes to this chapter. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate more explicitly what this statement means. (UST explains the implications even further than is suggested here.) Alternate translation: “But someone may try to reassure you that you nevertheless have faith, while I, James, have works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 18 al63 figs-hypo ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις 1 But someone will say James is using a hypothetical situation to teach. This expression introduces the condition of the hypothetical situation. (As Part 1 of the General Introduction to James explains, in the style of speakers of this time, James is anticipating an objection that someone might make and saying how he would respond to it.) Alternate translation: “But suppose someone said to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -JAS 2 18 j141 figs-yousingular σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις 1 you have faith Here, **you** is singular because James is illustrating how someone might address one individual. James himself then addresses that same individual in the rest of this verse and in verses [19-22](../02/19.md). So if your language marks the distinction, use the singular form of “you” in your translation from here through verse 22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +JAS 2 18 j141 figs-yousingular σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις 1 you have faith Here, **You** is singular because James is illustrating how someone might address one individual. James himself then addresses that same individual in the rest of this verse and in verses [19-22](../02/19.md). So if your language marks the distinction, use the singular form of “you” in your translation from here through verse 22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) JAS 2 18 j142 figs-quotations δεῖξόν μοι τὴν πίστιν σου χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων, κἀγώ σοι δείξω ἐκ τῶν ἔργων μου τὴν πίστιν 1 Show me your faith without works, and I will show you my faith from works It may be helpful to make this sentence a direct quotation after an introduction to show that it is what James would say in response to the hypothetical objection. Alternate translation: “Then I would say to you, ‘Show me your faith without works, and I will show you my faith from works’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) JAS 2 18 j143 figs-hypo δεῖξόν μοι τὴν πίστιν σου χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων, κἀγώ σοι δείξω ἐκ τῶν ἔργων μου τὴν πίστιν 1 Show me your faith without works, and I will show you my faith from works This is the result of the hypothetical situation that James has been describing. Alternate translation: “Then I would say to you, ‘Show me your faith without works, and I will show you my faith from works’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -JAS 2 18 j144 figs-imperative δεῖξόν μοι τὴν πίστιν σου χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων 1 Show me your faith without works James is using the imperative **show me** to challenge the hypothetical “you” and make him realize that he really cannot do what James is telling him to do. Alternate translation: “You cannot show me your faith without works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +JAS 2 18 j144 figs-imperative δεῖξόν μοι τὴν πίστιν σου χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων 1 Show me your faith without works James is using the imperative **Show me** to challenge the hypothetical “You” and make him realize that he really cannot do what James is telling him to do. Alternate translation: “You cannot show me your faith without works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) JAS 2 18 ii8d figs-abstractnouns δεῖξόν μοι τὴν πίστιν σου χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων 1 Show me your faith without works If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **faith** and **works** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “you could not show me that you truly believe in God if you are not doing what God wants you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 2 18 j145 figs-declarative κἀγώ σοι δείξω ἐκ τῶν ἔργων μου τὴν πίστιν 1 and I will show you my faith from works James is using a future statement to indicate something he is capable of doing. Alternate translation: “but I can show you my faith from works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) JAS 2 18 j146 figs-abstractnouns κἀγώ σοι δείξω ἐκ τῶν ἔργων μου τὴν πίστιν 1 and I will show you my faith from works If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **faith** and **works** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “but by doing what God wants me to do, I can show you that I truly believe in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 2 19 j147 σὺ πιστεύεις ὅτι εἷς ἐστιν ὁ Θεός 1 You believe that God is one The verb translated **believe** comes from the same root as the word translated “faith.” It may be helpful to your readers to show in your translation that James is continuing to speak to the same person as in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “You have faith that God is one” JAS 2 19 j148 σὺ πιστεύεις ὅτι εἷς ἐστιν ὁ Θεός 1 You believe that God is one As Part 1 of the General Introduction to James explains, the people to whom James was writing were believers in Jesus who had a Jewish background. As a result, they would have known that he was referring here to the essential Jewish affirmation, “Listen, Israel, Yahweh our God is one.” Moses says this in [Deuteronomy 6:4](../deu/06/04.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “You believe the essential teaching of Moses that there is one God” -JAS 2 19 j149 figs-irony καλῶς ποιεῖς; καὶ τὰ δαιμόνια πιστεύουσιν καὶ φρίσσουσιν 1 You do well. The demons also believe, and they tremble When James says **you do well**, he is saying the opposite of what he really means. He grants that believing in one God is a good thing in itself, but he is actually saying that by itself, it is the kind of faith without works that cannot save a person. He proves this by observing that the demons, who are not saved, also believe that there is one God, and this makes them tremble. Alternate translation: “You may think that is a good thing to do. But the demons also believe in one God, and they tremble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) -JAS 2 19 fv39 figs-explicit καὶ τὰ δαιμόνια πιστεύουσιν καὶ φρίσσουσιν 1 The demons also believe, and they tremble If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why the demons **tremble** at the thought of God. Alternate translation: “The demons also believe in one God, and they tremble, knowing that God is going to punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JAS 2 19 j149 figs-irony καλῶς ποιεῖς; καὶ τὰ δαιμόνια πιστεύουσιν καὶ φρίσσουσιν 1 You do well. The demons also believe, and they tremble When James says **You do well**, he is saying the opposite of what he really means. He grants that believing in one God is a good thing in itself, but he is actually saying that by itself, it is the kind of faith without works that cannot save a person. He proves this by observing that the demons, who are not saved, also believe that there is one God, and this makes them tremble. Alternate translation: “You may think that is a good thing to do. But the demons also believe in one God, and they tremble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) +JAS 2 19 fv39 figs-explicit καὶ τὰ δαιμόνια πιστεύουσιν καὶ φρίσσουσιν 1 The demons also believe, and they tremble If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly why the **demons** **tremble** at the thought of God. Alternate translation: “The demons also believe in one God, and they tremble, knowing that God is going to punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 20 ax95 figs-rquestion θέλεις δὲ γνῶναι, ὦ ἄνθρωπε κενέ, ὅτι ἡ πίστις χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων ἀργή ἐστιν? 1 But do you wish to know, O foolish man, that faith without works is idle? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “But I can show you, O foolish man, that faith without works is idle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 2 20 j150 figs-idiom θέλεις…γνῶναι 1 do you wish to know This is an idiom. It means “I can show you” by suggesting implicitly, “If you really want to know, I can show you.” Alternate translation as a statement: “I can show you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 2 20 j151 ὦ ἄνθρωπε κενέ 1 O foolish man James is addressing this hypothetical **man** in the vocative after an exclamation. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you foolish man” From b75f77ec996fbf0be3dad70a5863d6eabef7aa7b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 18:52:50 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 392/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index f7b3f0d930..718719b3e4 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ JAS 2 21 q8iv figs-rquestion Ἀβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν οὐκ JAS 2 21 j156 figs-explicit Ἀβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη, ἀνενέγκας Ἰσαὰκ τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ θυσιαστήριον? 1 Was not Abraham our father justified by works when he offered up Isaac his son on the altar? James assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to a story recorded in the book of Genesis. In that story, God tells Abraham to offer his son Isaac as a sacrifice, but God does not really want Abraham to do that. Rather, God wants Abraham to demonstrate his faith and obedience by showing that he is willing to do it. God ultimately stops Abraham from sacrificing his son Isaac. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story and if they would think that Abraham actually did offer his son as a sacrifice. Alternate translation, as a statement: “Abraham our father was justified by works when he demonstrated that he was willing to obey God even if that meant offering his son Isaac as a sacrifice, although God did not actually want him to do that and God stopped him from doing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 21 v3ft figs-explicit Ἀβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐξ ἔργων ἐδικαιώθη 1 Was not Abraham our father justified by works See the discussion in Part 2 of the General Introduction to James about how a person is justified before God. James is not saying that Abraham did something that made God consider him righteous. Rather, as James will explain in more detail in the next two verses, God had previously declared Abraham to be righteous because Abraham believed in him. What Abraham did subsequently, when he proved that he was willing to obey God, demonstrated that his faith was genuine. You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they might misunderstand and think that Abraham did something that made God consider him righteous. Alternate translation, as a statement: “God declared Abraham our father to be righteous because what he did demonstrated that he genuinely believed in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 21 j157 figs-activepassive Ἀβραὰμ ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν οὐκ…ἐδικαιώθη 1 Was not Abraham our father justified If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation, as a statement: “God justified Abraham our father” or “God declared Abraham our father to be righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JAS 2 21 j158 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ…Ἰσαὰκ 1 Abraham … Isaac These are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +JAS 2 21 j158 translate-names Ἀβραὰμ…Ἰσαὰκ 1 Abraham … Isaac **Abraham** and **Isaac** are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JAS 2 21 ph1s figs-metaphor ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 our father James is using the term **father** to mean “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “Abraham our ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 2 21 j159 figs-exclusive ὁ πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 our father James is Jewish, descended from Abraham, and the people to whom he is writing also come from a Jewish background, so the word **our** would be inclusive, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) JAS 2 22 l1gj figs-metaphor βλέπεις 1 You see Here, to **see** represents to understand. Alternate translation: “So you should understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ JAS 2 23 l818 figs-explicit ἐπίστευσεν δὲ Ἀβραὰμ τῷ Θ JAS 2 23 j163 figs-explicit φίλος Θεοῦ ἐκλήθη 1 he was called a friend of God James assumes that his readers will know that in [Isaiah 41:8](../isa/41/08.md), God refers to the Israelites as “the offspring of Abraham my friend” and that in [2 Chronicles 20:7](../2ch/20/07.md), in a prayer to God, King Jehoshaphat refers to the Israelites as “the descendants of Abraham your friend.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give an explicit indication of this. Alternate translation: “he was called a friend of God in later scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 23 j164 figs-activepassive φίλος Θεοῦ ἐκλήθη 1 he was called a friend of God If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God, speaking through Isaiah, later called him his friend, and in prayer King Jehoshaphat also described him as God’s friend” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 2 24 j165 figs-metaphor ὁρᾶτε 1 You see Here, to **see** represents to understand. Alternate translation: “So you should understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 2 24 j166 figs-you ὁρᾶτε 1 you see James returns here to the plural usage that he follows in most of the letter. So in your translation, use the plural form of “you” if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating the shift back to plural here. Alternate translation: “So all of you should understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +JAS 2 24 j166 figs-you ὁρᾶτε 1 you see James returns here to the plural usage that he follows in most of the letter. So in your translation, use the plural form of “You” if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating the shift back to plural here. Alternate translation: “So all of you should understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JAS 2 24 j167 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος 1 a man James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that could mean any person, male or female. Alternate translation: “a person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JAS 2 24 yha5 figs-activepassive δικαιοῦται 1 is justified If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “becomes right with God” or “comes to have a right relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 2 24 j168 figs-abstractnouns ἐξ ἔργων…καὶ οὐκ ἐκ πίστεως μόνον 1 from works and not from faith alone If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **faith** and **works** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “by what he does and not just by what he believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From c867bed045c5054dab257710f9342e300a86f558 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 19:12:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 393/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 718719b3e4..1c410d06d4 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ JAS 2 25 j171 translate-names Ῥαὰβ 1 Rahab **Rahab** is the name of a woma JAS 2 25 bx6i figs-abstractnouns ἐξ ἔργων 1 from works If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **works** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “by what she did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 2 25 pn2f figs-explicit ὑποδεξαμένη τοὺς ἀγγέλους, καὶ ἑτέρᾳ ὁδῷ ἐκβαλοῦσα 1 having welcomed the messengers and having sent them away by another road James assumes that his readers will know that he is referring to the episode recorded in the book of Joshua in which Joshua sent two spies to explore the land of Canaan. Rahab provided safety and shelter for these spies in her home, and she then sent them away safely by a route that their pursuers would not have expected them to take. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could give an explicit indication of this. Alternate translation: “when she provided shelter and safety in her home for the spies whom Joshua sent to explore the land of Canaan and when she sent these spies safely away by a route that their pursuers would not have expected them to take” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 25 xm5m writing-pronouns ἐκβαλοῦσα 1 having sent them away Since there were two **messengers**, the pronoun **them** would be in the dual, if your language uses that form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JAS 2 26 j172 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James is using this word to introduce a general principle that can be deduced from the argument he has been making since [2:14](../02/14.md) that **faith** needs to be expressed in **works**. He does not say **For**, which often means “because,” to indicate that God justified Abraham and Rahab for this reason. Rather, he is using the word **For** in order to bring his argument to its conclusion. Alternate translation: “These specific cases confirm the general principle that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +JAS 2 26 j172 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James is using the word **For** to introduce a general principle that can be deduced from the argument he has been making since [2:14](../02/14.md) that **faith** needs to be expressed in **works**. He does not say **For**, which often means “because,” to indicate that God justified Abraham and Rahab for this reason. Rather, he is using the word **For** in order to bring his argument to its conclusion. Alternate translation: “These specific cases confirm the general principle that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 2 26 j173 τὸ σῶμα χωρὶς πνεύματος νεκρόν ἐστιν 1 the body without the spirit is dead The word translated **spirit** can also mean “breath.” Alternate translation: “a body that does not have the breath of life in it is dead” JAS 2 26 uum8 figs-personification ἡ πίστις χωρὶς ἔργων νεκρά ἐστιν 1 faith without works is dead James is speaking of **faith** as if it would be a living thing if it had works but not be alive if it did not have them. Alternate translation: “a person’s faith is not genuine if he does not express it through works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 2 26 j174 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις χωρὶς ἔργων νεκρά ἐστιν 1 faith without works is dead If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **faith** and **works** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “if a person says he believes in God but he does not do what God wants him to do, then he does not really believe in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From e93dfb4af5ade162976bf8a1e7e15070055af0a6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 19:36:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 394/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 1c410d06d4..3b54e34aae 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -335,12 +335,12 @@ JAS 3 2 kn4v οὗτος τέλειος ἀνήρ 1 he is a perfect man As in [ JAS 3 2 j178 figs-metaphor δυνατὸς χαλιναγωγῆσαι καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα 1 able to bridle even the whole body As in [1:26](../01/26.md), James speaks of a person being able to **bridle** himself as if that person were controlling a horse with a bridle. Alternate translation: “able to control his whole body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 2 b16h figs-synecdoche δυνατὸς χαλιναγωγῆσαι καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα 1 able to bridle even the whole body James speaks of a person’s **body** to mean all of that person, including his actions and behavior. Alternate translation: “able to control everything he does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JAS 3 3 s1nf grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now James uses **Now** to introduce background information in the form of an illustration that will help his readers understand what he wants to teach them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate the word with a phrase that shows that James is going to offer an illustration, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) -JAS 3 3 zql3 translate-unknown τῶν ἵππων τοὺς χαλινοὺς εἰς τὰ στόματα βάλλομεν 1 we put bits into the mouths of horses **Horses** are large animals that are used in many cultures to transport people and goods. **Bits** are small pieces of metal that are placed into horses’ mouths to control where they go. If your readers would not be familiar with **horses** and **bits**, in your translation you could use the name of another animal and a different device, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “we put pegs into the noses of camels” or “we use small devices on the bodies of large animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +JAS 3 3 zql3 translate-unknown τῶν ἵππων τοὺς χαλινοὺς εἰς τὰ στόματα βάλλομεν 1 we put bits into the mouths of horses These **horses** are large animals that are used in many cultures to transport people and goods, and **bits** are small pieces of metal that are placed into horses’ mouths to control where they go. If your readers would not be familiar with **horses** and **bits**, in your translation you could use the name of another animal and a different device, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “we put pegs into the noses of camels” or “we use small devices on the bodies of large animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JAS 3 3 j179 εἰς τὸ πείθεσθαι αὐτοὺς ἡμῖν 1 for them to obey us Alternate translation: “so that they will obey us” JAS 3 3 j180 figs-metonymy καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμα αὐτῶν μετάγομεν 1 we also turn their whole body James means that by using a bit, people can **turn** the body of a horse in whatever direction they want. James is using the action of turning a horse to mean guiding or controlling it in general. Alternate translation: “this enables us to guide their whole body” or “this enables us to control their whole body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 3 3 j181 ὅλον τὸ σῶμα αὐτῶν 1 their whole body Since James speaks of **horses** in the plural, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **body**. Alternate translation: “their whole bodies” -JAS 3 4 j182 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, καὶ τὰ πλοῖα 1 Behold also the ships The term **behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used to mean giving notice and attention, and that is how James is using it here. Alternate translation: “Also consider the case of ships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 3 4 yn42 translate-unknown πλοῖα…πηδαλίου 1 ships … rudder **Ships** are large vessels that are used to transport people or goods by water. A **rudder** is a flat device attached to the back of a ship that is used to steer it. If your readers would not be familiar with what **ships** are and what a **rudder** is, in your translation you could use the name of another transportation vehicle and a different device, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “trucks … steering wheel” or “large vehicles … steering device” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +JAS 3 4 j182 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, καὶ τὰ πλοῖα 1 Behold also the ships The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used to mean giving notice and attention, and that is how James is using it here. Alternate translation: “Also consider the case of ships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 4 yn42 translate-unknown πλοῖα…πηδαλίου 1 ships … rudder These **ships** are large vessels that are used to transport people or goods by water. A **rudder** is a flat device attached to the back of a ship that is used to steer it. If your readers would not be familiar with what **ships** are and what a **rudder** is, in your translation you could use the name of another transportation vehicle and a different device, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “trucks … steering wheel” or “large vehicles … steering device” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JAS 3 4 j183 τηλικαῦτα ὄντα, καὶ ὑπὸ ἀνέμων σκληρῶν ἐλαυνόμενα 1 being so large and driven by strong winds It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Even though they are so large and driven by strong winds” JAS 3 4 k7f5 figs-activepassive τηλικαῦτα ὄντα, καὶ ὑπὸ ἀνέμων σκληρῶν ἐλαυνόμενα 1 being so large and driven by strong winds If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Even though they are so large and strong winds drive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 3 4 jrk1 figs-metonymy μετάγεται ὑπὸ ἐλαχίστου πηδαλίου 1 it is turned by the smallest rudder James is using the action of turning a ship to mean guiding or controlling the ship in general. (For example, a person might turn a ship in order to keep it upright, not just to direct it to a certain place.) Alternate translation: “it is controlled by the smallest rudder” or “it is guided by the smallest rudder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 2203b2cd05f311d076cc04603da335f67574d9d7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 19:39:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 395/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 3b54e34aae..5aa415a363 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -348,8 +348,8 @@ JAS 3 4 j184 figs-activepassive μετάγεται ὑπὸ ἐλαχίστου JAS 3 4 j185 μετάγεται ὑπὸ ἐλαχίστου πηδαλίου 1 it is turned by the smallest rudder Since James speaks of **ships** in the plural, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural in this clause as well. Alternate translation: “they are turned by the smallest rudders” or “the smallest rudders turn them” JAS 3 4 j186 ἐλαχίστου πηδαλίου 1 the smallest rudder James says **smallest**, using the superlative form of the adjective “small,” to express a meaning of the adjective in its positive form. Your language may use superlative forms in the same way. If not, you could translate this using the positive form. Alternate translation: “a very small rudder” JAS 3 4 j187 figs-personification ὅπου ἡ ὁρμὴ τοῦ εὐθύνοντος βούλεται 1 where the inclination of the one steering desires James speaks of the **inclination** of the person steering a boat as if it were a living thing that desired to go in one direction or another. Alternate translation: “in whatever direction the one steering the boat wants it to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -JAS 3 5 wt6i figs-simile οὕτως καὶ 1 Thus also James uses the words **thus also** to introduce a simile or comparison between the human tongue and the small items he discussed in the previous two verses, a horse’s bit and a ship’s rudder. Alternate translation: “In the same way” or “Likewise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -JAS 3 5 j189 μικρὸν μέλος 1 a small member Alternate translation: “a part of the body” +JAS 3 5 wt6i figs-simile οὕτως καὶ 1 Thus also James uses the words **Thus also** to introduce a simile or comparison between the human tongue and the small items he discussed in the previous two verses, a horse’s bit and a ship’s rudder. Alternate translation: “In the same way” or “Likewise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +JAS 3 5 j189 μικρὸν μέλος 1 a small member Alternate translation: “a small part of the body” JAS 3 5 j190 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 2 but Here, **but** introduces a contrast between the small size of the tongue and the great things that people use their tongues in speech to boast about. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) JAS 3 5 j191 figs-personification μεγάλα αὐχεῖ 1 it boasts great things James is saying that the **tongue** is a living thing that **boasts**. Alternate translation: “with it people boast great things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 3 5 qx1k figs-nominaladj μεγάλα αὐχεῖ 1 it boasts great things James is using the adjective **great** in the plural as a noun. (ULT adds **{things}** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate the term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “with it people boast that they have done great things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ JAS 3 6 lf1j figs-metaphor φλογίζουσα τὸν τροχὸν τῆς γ JAS 3 6 a7qd figs-activepassive φλογιζομένη ὑπὸ τῆς Γεέννης 1 it is set on fire by Gehenna If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “Gehenna sets it on fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 3 6 j200 figs-metaphor φλογιζομένη ὑπὸ τῆς Γεέννης 1 it is set on fire by Gehenna James continues to speak of the destructive effects of bad speech as if they were **fire**. Alternate translation: “its destructive effects come from Gehenna” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 6 j201 translate-names τῆς Γεέννης 1 Gehenna **Gehenna** is the Greek name for a place, the Valley of Hinnom just outside Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -JAS 3 6 j202 figs-metaphor τῆς Γεέννης 1 Gehenna James is using the name of this place, where refuse was thrown and fires burned continually, to mean hell. Alternate translation: “hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 6 j202 figs-metaphor τῆς Γεέννης 1 Gehenna James is using **Gehenna,** where refuse was thrown and fires burned continually, to mean hell. Alternate translation: “hell” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 6 j203 figs-metaphor τῆς Γεέννης 1 Gehenna Since hell, as a location, would not be able to influence people’s speech and conduct, James is likely using the name **Gehenna** to mean the devil by association. Alternate translation: “the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 7 j204 grammar-connect-time-background γὰρ 1 For James uses **For** to introduce background information in the form of an illustration that will help his readers understand what he wants to teach them. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) JAS 3 7 j205 figs-hyperbole πᾶσα…φύσις θηρίων τε καὶ πετεινῶν, ἑρπετῶν τε καὶ ἐναλίων, δαμάζεται καὶ δεδάμασται 1 every kind, both of beasts and birds, both of reptiles and marine animals, is being tamed and has been tamed Here, **every** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many different kinds of beasts, birds, reptiles, and marine animals are being tamed and have been tamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) From 6a45e785ebaf9e75ab9d154d5386cfcfe17bdfa8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 19:45:07 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 396/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 5aa415a363..929e6ac078 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ JAS 3 11 j221 ἡ πηγὴ 1 A spring In this context, the term **spring** ref JAS 3 11 j222 figs-nominaladj τὸ γλυκὺ καὶ τὸ πικρόν 1 the sweet and the bitter James is using the adjectives **sweet** and **bitter** as nouns to refer to types of water. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “sweet water and bitter water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 3 12 j223 figs-doublenegatives μὴ δύναται, ἀδελφοί μου, συκῆ ἐλαίας ποιῆσαι 1 A fig tree is not able to make olives, is it The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding “is it?” Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Is a fig tree able to make olives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) JAS 3 12 z3qg figs-rquestion μὴ δύναται, ἀδελφοί μου, συκῆ ἐλαίας ποιῆσαι 1 A fig tree is not able to make olives, is it James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “A fig tree is not able to make olives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JAS 3 12 j224 translate-unknown μὴ δύναται, ἀδελφοί μου, συκῆ ἐλαίας ποιῆσαι 1 A fig tree is not able to make olives, is it A **fig tree** is a tree that produces small, sweet fruit. **Olives** also grow on trees, so they are technically fruit, but they are oily and pungent. If your readers would not be familiar with these kinds of fruit, you could use two other contrasting kinds of fruit as examples, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation (as a statement): “One kind of tree is not able to produce fruit that would grow on a different kind of tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +JAS 3 12 j224 translate-unknown μὴ δύναται, ἀδελφοί μου, συκῆ ἐλαίας ποιῆσαι 1 A fig tree is not able to make olives, is it A **fig tree** is a tree that produces small, sweet fruit. Although **olives** also grow on trees, they are technically fruit, but they are oily and pungent. If your readers would not be familiar with these kinds of fruit, you could use two other contrasting kinds of fruit as examples, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation (as a statement): “One kind of tree is not able to produce fruit that would grow on a different kind of tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JAS 3 12 jjj8 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου 1 my brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 12 bu4l figs-ellipsis ἢ ἄμπελος σῦκα 1 or a grapevine, figs James is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “or is a grapevine able to make figs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JAS 3 12 j225 figs-rquestion ἢ ἄμπελος σῦκα 1 or a grapevine, figs James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement if you also translated the question in the earlier part of the sentence as a statement. Alternate translation: “and a grapevine is not able to make figs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) From b79d966fe12550b686e38c184bbdf3f2a8cc2fb7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 19:54:34 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 397/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 6 ++---- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 929e6ac078..25c8053ace 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -438,12 +438,10 @@ JAS 3 18 md56 figs-metaphor καρπὸς…δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρ JAS 3 18 htr1 figs-abstractnouns καρπὸς…δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην 1 the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **righteousness** and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who work peacefully to help people live together peacefully are helping those people to live in the right way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 3 18 j238 figs-activepassive καρπὸς…δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην 1 the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace If you decide to retain the metaphor of sowing, you could express it with an active verbal form, if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “those who make peace sow the fruit of righteousness in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 4 intro r6vv 0 # James 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Worldly desires and the sin and conflict they cause (4:1-12)
2. A warning against boasting about tomorrow (4:13-17)

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Adultery

Writers in the Bible often speak of adultery as a metaphor for people who say they love God but do things that God hates. James uses the same metaphor in [4:4](../04/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]]) -JAS 4 1 j239 πόθεν πόλεμοι καὶ πόθεν μάχαι ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Whence are wars and whence are battles among you The word translated **whence** means “from where.” Your language may have a similar word that you can use in your translation. Otherwise, you could express the same meaning in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Where do wars and battles among you come from” JAS 4 1 j240 figs-metaphor πόθεν πόλεμοι καὶ πόθεν μάχαι ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Whence are wars and whence are battles among you James is using the terms **wars** and **battles**. Alternate translation: “Where do the conflicts and disputes that you are having come from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 1 pqx2 figs-rquestion πόθεν πόλεμοι καὶ πόθεν μάχαι ἐν ὑμῖν? 1 Whence are wars and whence are battles among you? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you where the conflicts and disputes that you are having come from.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 4 1 ub82 figs-doublet πόθεν πόλεμοι καὶ πόθεν μάχαι ἐν ὑμῖν? 1 Whence are wars and whence are battles among you? The words **wars** and **battles** mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by translating them with a single expression. Alternate translation (as a statement): “I will tell you where the continual conflicts that you are having come from.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JAS 4 1 j241 figs-rquestion οὐκ ἐντεῦθεν ἐκ τῶν ἡδονῶν ὑμῶν, τῶν στρατευομένων ἐν τοῖς μέλεσιν ὑμῶν? 1 Are they not hence, from your lusts, which fight in your members? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “This is where they come from: from your lusts, which fight in your members.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JAS 4 1 j242 οὐκ ἐντεῦθεν 1 Are they not hence The word translated **hence** means “from here.” Your language may have a similar word that you can use in your translation. Otherwise, you could express the same meaning in a way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Do they not come from here” JAS 4 1 v5kg figs-metaphor τῶν ἡδονῶν ὑμῶν, τῶν στρατευομένων ἐν τοῖς μέλεσιν ὑμῶν 1 your lusts, which fight in your members As in [3:6](../03/06.md), **members** means “parts of the body.” This could mean: (1) the phrase **in your members** indicates the location of the **lusts** that James is describing. He could be saying that the outward fights between members of the community have their origin in inward lusts that lead people to fight for what they want, as he describes in the next verse. If so, he is using the parts of the body to represent a person’s thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “the lusts inside of you that fight” (2) the word translated **in** means “among.” The sense would then be that these **lusts** fight against one part of the person after another, seeking to gain control of the whole person. Since the **lusts** would actually be gaining control over non-physical aspects of a person, such as his will and values, James would once again be using the physical parts of the body to express his meaning. Alternate translation: “your lusts, which fight to control you” (3) James is speaking of the community of believers as if it were a body and of individual believers as if they were parts of that body. Alternate translation: “your lusts, which fight against other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 1 vpe2 figs-personification τῶν ἡδονῶν ὑμῶν, τῶν στρατευομένων ἐν τοῖς μέλεσιν ὑμῶν 1 your lusts, which fight in your members In all of the cases that the previous note discusses, James would be speaking of **lusts** as if they were living things that could **fight.** Alternate translation: “the lusts inside of you that cause you to fight to get what you want” of “your lusts, which cause you to value and choose certain things in order to gratify them” or “your lusts, which cause you to fight against other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 4 2 j243 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἐπιθυμεῖτε καὶ οὐκ ἔχετε; φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε, καὶ οὐ δύνασθε ἐπιτυχεῖν 1 You covet, and you do not have. You kill and envy, and you are not able to obtain In both of these sentences, James is using the word translated **and** to introduce a contrast between the first and second clauses. Alternate translation: “You covet, but you do not have. You kill and envy, but you are not able to obtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -478,7 +476,7 @@ JAS 4 6 j260 writing-pronouns μείζονα δὲ δίδωσιν χάριν 1 B JAS 4 6 j261 μείζονα…χάριν 1 greater grace The comparative **greater** refers to quantity rather than to size. Alternate translation: “even more grace” JAS 4 6 hyh2 writing-pronouns διὸ λέγει 1 Therefore it says The pronoun **it** refers to the Scripture, the antecedent from the previous verse. Even though James is now quoting a specific passage, [Proverbs 3:34](../pro/03/34.md), rather than a general teaching, the reference is to the Bible as a whole. Alternate translation: “Therefore the Scripture says” or “Therefore the Scriptures say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JAS 4 6 j262 figs-personification λέγει 1 it says James is speaking of the Bible as if it could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “it is written in the Scriptures” or “we can read in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -JAS 4 6 qs61 figs-nominaladj ὑπερηφάνοις…ταπεινοῖς 1 the proud … the humble James is using the adjectives **proud** and **humble** as nouns to refer to types of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “proud people … humble people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +JAS 4 6 qs61 figs-nominaladj ὑπερηφάνοις…ταπεινοῖς 1 the proud … the humble James is using the adjectives **proud** and **humble** as nouns to refer to types of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “proud people … to humble people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 4 7 g7e5 figs-activepassive ὑποτάγητε οὖν 1 Be submitted, therefore If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Submit, therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 4 7 da5t grammar-connect-logic-result ὑποτάγητε οὖν 1 Be submitted, therefore James is giving the reason for the result he described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Because God gives grace to the humble, be submitted” or “Because God gives grace to the humble, submit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 4 7 j263 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀντίστητε δὲ τῷ διαβόλῳ, καὶ φεύξεται ἀφ’ ὑμῶν 1 But resist the devil, and he will flee from you James is using the word translated **and** to describe a result. Alternate translation: “But resist the devil. If you do, then he will flee from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -488,7 +486,7 @@ JAS 4 8 j264 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐγγίσατε τῷ Θεῷ, κα JAS 4 8 g62m figs-metaphor ἐγγίσατε τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ ἐγγιεῖ ὑμῖν 1 Come near to God and he will come near to you James is using a spatial metaphor to describe two people in a good relationship as if they were **near** to one another. Alternate translation: “Do your part to have a good relationship with God, and you will find that God also wants to have a good relationship with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 8 j265 figs-metaphor καθαρίσατε χεῖρας 1 Cleanse your hands James is using the image of washing hands to describe a person removing sin from his life. Alternate translation: “Stop sinning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 8 elh1 figs-metonymy καθαρίσατε χεῖρας 1 Cleanse your hands James is using the word **hands** to mean actions, by association with the way people use their hands to do things. Alternate translation: “Stop doing things that are wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JAS 4 8 j266 ἁμαρτωλοί 1 sinners James is addressing his readers in the vocative. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you sinners” +JAS 4 8 j266 ἁμαρτωλοί 1 sinners James is addressing his readers in the vocative. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You sinners” JAS 4 8 j267 figs-metaphor ἁγνίσατε καρδίας 1 purify your hearts James says **hearts** to mean people’s thoughts and desires. Alternate translation: “purify your thoughts and desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 8 mw54 figs-metaphor ἁγνίσατε καρδίας 1 purify your hearts The term **purify** refers to a ceremonial cleansing that allows a person to participate in religious activities. James is speaking as if his readers’ **hearts** could be cleansed in this way. Alternate translation: “make sure you are not thinking or desiring anything wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 8 j268 figs-nominaladj δίψυχοι 1 double-minded James is using the adjective **double-minded** as a noun to refer to a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “double-minded people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) From 09520dfc4fe1ae61c3f8d734cf3acc68c6de0793 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 19:57:16 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 398/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 25c8053ace..b06a37ee79 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -505,12 +505,12 @@ JAS 4 10 an8i figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον Κυρίου 1 before the Lord The w JAS 4 10 tn5w figs-metaphor ὑψώσει ὑμᾶς 1 he will lift you up James is speaking as if his readers would humbly kneel down or bow down in front of God to show their repentance and as if God would have them stand up to show that he accepted them. Alternate translation: “he will show that he accepts you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 11 r3hc μὴ καταλαλεῖτε ἀλλήλων 1 Do not speak against one another Alternate translation: “Do not say bad things about one another” JAS 4 11 uyi9 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί…ἀδελφοῦ…τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 brothers … a brother … his brother See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers … a fellow believer … his fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 4 11 j277 figs-explicit καταλαλεῖ νόμου καὶ κρίνει νόμον 1 speaks against the law and judges the law By **the law**, James means the same thing that he calls the “royal law” in [2:8](../02/08.md) and the “law of freedom” in [1:25](../01/25.md) and [2:12](../02/12.md). That is, he means the commandment “you will love your neighbor as yourself.” James is teaching his readers that by saying or assuming that their fellow believers were doing wrong things, they were not following this commandment and they were treating the commandment as if it were not important to follow. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the term “neighbor” in [2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “contradicts the law that says to love other people as oneself and judges that law to be unimportant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JAS 4 11 j277 figs-explicit καταλαλεῖ νόμου καὶ κρίνει νόμον 1 speaks against the law and judges the law By **{the} law**, James means the same thing that he calls the “royal law” in [2:8](../02/08.md) and the “law of freedom” in [1:25](../01/25.md) and [2:12](../02/12.md). That is, he means the commandment “you will love your neighbor as yourself.” James is teaching his readers that by saying or assuming that their fellow believers were doing wrong things, they were not following this commandment and they were treating the commandment as if it were not important to follow. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated the term “neighbor” in [2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “contradicts the law that says to love other people as oneself and judges that law to be unimportant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 4 11 j278 figs-youcrowd εἰ…νόμον κρίνεις, οὐκ εἶ ποιητὴς νόμου 1 if you judge the law, you are not a doer of the law The word **you** is singular in these two cases because even though James is addressing a group of people, he is describing an individual situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) JAS 4 11 j279 figs-ellipsis οὐκ εἶ ποιητὴς νόμου, ἀλλὰ κριτής 1 you are not a doer of the law, but a judge In the second phrase, James is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the first phrase. Alternate translation: “you are not a doer of the law, but a judge of the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JAS 4 11 jlx4 figs-explicit οὐκ εἶ ποιητὴς νόμου, ἀλλὰ κριτής 1 you are not a doer of the law, but a judge If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state more explicitly what this means. See how you translated the similar phrase at the end of the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “instead of loving other people, you are saying that it is not important to love them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 4 12 e9da εἷς ἐστιν νομοθέτης καὶ κριτής 1 The lawgiver and judge is one Alternate translation: “The lawgiver and judge are the same person” -JAS 4 12 j280 figs-distinguish ὁ δυνάμενος σῶσαι καὶ ἀπολέσαι 1 the one who is able to save and to destroy James uses this phrase, which identifies God by two of his attributes, to clarify whom he means by **the lawgiver and judge**. Alternate translation: “God, who is able to save and to destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +JAS 4 12 j280 figs-distinguish ὁ δυνάμενος σῶσαι καὶ ἀπολέσαι 1 the one who is able to save and to destroy James uses this phrase, which identifies God by two of his attributes, to clarify whom he means by **one lawgiver and judge**. Alternate translation: “God, who is able to save and to destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) JAS 4 12 m49q figs-rquestion σὺ δὲ τίς εἶ, ὁ κρίνων τὸν πλησίον? 1 But who are you, the one judging a neighbor? James is using the question form to challenge and teach his readers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “But you have no right to judge a neighbor!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 4 12 j281 writing-pronouns σὺ δὲ τίς εἶ 1 But who are you For emphasis, James includes the pronoun **you** even though it is not required with the verb. If your language does not ordinarily require pronouns with verbs but it can include them for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use that construction here in your translation. Other languages may be able to convey this emphasis in other ways, such as by repeating the pronoun. Alternate translation: “But you, who are you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JAS 4 12 j282 figs-youcrowd σὺ…τίς εἶ 1 who are you As in the previous verse, James is using the singular form of **you** because even though he is addressing a group of people, he is describing an individual situation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) From 2b37a5ecef00aec28b51ed0c364faf1a063cad31 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 19:58:44 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 399/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index b06a37ee79..636a52ce41 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ JAS 4 15 e1il καὶ ζήσομεν καὶ ποιήσομεν 1 we will both JAS 4 15 j289 figs-exclusive καὶ ζήσομεν καὶ ποιήσομεν 1 we will both live and do These people would be speaking only of themselves, so the pronoun **we** is exclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) JAS 4 15 j290 figs-idiom τοῦτο ἢ ἐκεῖνο 1 this or that This is an idiom. No specific actions are intended. Your language may have a comparable idiom that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “such-and-such” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 4 16 j291 figs-abstractnouns καυχᾶσθε ἐν ταῖς ἀλαζονίαις ὑμῶν. πᾶσα καύχησις τοιαύτη πονηρά ἐστιν 1 you are boasting in your pretensions. All such boasting is evil If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **pretensions** and **boasting** (the second occurrence of the word in ULT) by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “you are boasting about what you presume you will be able to do. It is always wrong to boast like that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JAS 4 17 q84z εἰδότι οὖν καλὸν ποιεῖν, καὶ μὴ ποιοῦντι, ἁμαρτία αὐτῷ ἐστιν 1 Therefore to the one having known to do good and not doing it, to him it is sin James is using the word **therefore** to describe a further inference rather than a conclusion. He is saying that if it is wrong to plan to do things without knowing whether God wants you to do them, then it is also wrong not to do things that you do know God wants. Alternate translation: “From this we can also recognize that if someone does know what God wants him to do but he does not do it, then he is also sinning” +JAS 4 17 q84z εἰδότι οὖν καλὸν ποιεῖν, καὶ μὴ ποιοῦντι, ἁμαρτία αὐτῷ ἐστιν 1 Therefore to the one having known to do good and not doing it, to him it is sin James is using the word **Therefore** to describe a further inference rather than a conclusion. He is saying that if it is wrong to plan to do things without knowing whether God wants you to do them, then it is also wrong not to do things that you do know God wants. Alternate translation: “From this we can also recognize that if someone does know what God wants him to do but he does not do it, then he is also sinning” JAS 5 intro ud8q 0 # James 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Rebuke of rich people (5:1-6)
2. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7-11)
3. Oaths forbidden (5:12)
4. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13-18)
5. Restoration of a sinner (5:19-20)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Living for eternity

The first section of this chapter, which is a warning to rich people, contrasts living for things of this world, which will not last, with living for things that will last for eternity. The second section of the chapter is related to that first section. In it, James stresses that it is important to live with the expectation that Jesus will return soon. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

### Oaths

In [5:12](../05/12.md), James tells his readers not to swear any oaths. However, biblical scholars are divided over whether James intends to teach literally that all oaths are wrong. Some scholars believe that some oaths are permissible and that James is emphasizing how Christians should have integrity in what they say.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Elijah

The illustration that James gives from the life of the prophet Elijah in [5:17-18](../05/17.md) may be difficult for your readers to appreciate if the books of 1 and 2 Kings have not yet been translated. See the first note to 5:17 for a suggestion about how to help your readers understand this illustration better. JAS 5 1 j292 figs-idiom ἄγε νῦν 1 Come now This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [4:13](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 5 1 j293 οἱ πλούσιοι 1 the rich James is addressing these people in the vocative. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. (If you use the word “you,” it would be plural, since James is addressing a group of people.) Alternate translation: “you who are rich” From bea6c024f20018c8fa2ca12de89eb7477d2f233c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 20:09:23 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 400/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 16 ++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 636a52ce41..006514c339 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -528,27 +528,27 @@ JAS 4 15 j289 figs-exclusive καὶ ζήσομεν καὶ ποιήσομεν 1 JAS 4 15 j290 figs-idiom τοῦτο ἢ ἐκεῖνο 1 this or that This is an idiom. No specific actions are intended. Your language may have a comparable idiom that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “such-and-such” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 4 16 j291 figs-abstractnouns καυχᾶσθε ἐν ταῖς ἀλαζονίαις ὑμῶν. πᾶσα καύχησις τοιαύτη πονηρά ἐστιν 1 you are boasting in your pretensions. All such boasting is evil If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **pretensions** and **boasting** (the second occurrence of the word in ULT) by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “you are boasting about what you presume you will be able to do. It is always wrong to boast like that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 4 17 q84z εἰδότι οὖν καλὸν ποιεῖν, καὶ μὴ ποιοῦντι, ἁμαρτία αὐτῷ ἐστιν 1 Therefore to the one having known to do good and not doing it, to him it is sin James is using the word **Therefore** to describe a further inference rather than a conclusion. He is saying that if it is wrong to plan to do things without knowing whether God wants you to do them, then it is also wrong not to do things that you do know God wants. Alternate translation: “From this we can also recognize that if someone does know what God wants him to do but he does not do it, then he is also sinning” -JAS 5 intro ud8q 0 # James 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Rebuke of rich people (5:1-6)
2. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7-11)
3. Oaths forbidden (5:12)
4. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13-18)
5. Restoration of a sinner (5:19-20)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Living for eternity

The first section of this chapter, which is a warning to rich people, contrasts living for things of this world, which will not last, with living for things that will last for eternity. The second section of the chapter is related to that first section. In it, James stresses that it is important to live with the expectation that Jesus will return soon. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

### Oaths

In [5:12](../05/12.md), James tells his readers not to swear any oaths. However, biblical scholars are divided over whether James intends to teach literally that all oaths are wrong. Some scholars believe that some oaths are permissible and that James is emphasizing how Christians should have integrity in what they say.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Elijah

The illustration that James gives from the life of the prophet Elijah in [5:17-18](../05/17.md) may be difficult for your readers to appreciate if the books of 1 and 2 Kings have not yet been translated. See the first note to 5:17 for a suggestion about how to help your readers understand this illustration better. +JAS 5 intro ud8q 0 # James 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n1. Rebuke of rich people (5:1-6)\n2. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7-11)\n3. Oaths forbidden (5:12)\n4. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13-18)\n5. Restoration of a sinner (5:19-20)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Living for eternity\n\nThe first section of this chapter, which is a warning to rich people, contrasts living for things of this world, which will not last, with living for things that will last for eternity. The second section of the chapter is related to that first section. In it, James stresses that it is important to live with the expectation that Jesus will return soon. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])\n\n### Oaths\n\nIn [5:12](../05/12.md), James tells his readers not to swear any oaths. However, biblical scholars are divided over whether James intends to teach literally that all oaths are wrong. Some scholars believe that some oaths are permissible and that James is emphasizing how Christians should have integrity in what they say.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Elijah\n\nThe illustration that James gives from the life of the prophet Elijah in [5:17-18](../05/17.md) may be difficult for your readers to appreciate if the books of 1 and 2 Kings have not yet been translated. See the first note to 5:17 for a suggestion about how to help your readers understand this illustration better. JAS 5 1 j292 figs-idiom ἄγε νῦν 1 Come now This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [4:13](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JAS 5 1 j293 οἱ πλούσιοι 1 the rich James is addressing these people in the vocative. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. (If you use the word “you,” it would be plural, since James is addressing a group of people.) Alternate translation: “you who are rich” +JAS 5 1 j293 οἱ πλούσιοι 1 the rich James is addressing these **rich** people in the vocative. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. (If you use the word “you,” it would be plural, since James is addressing a group of people.) Alternate translation: “you who are rich” JAS 5 1 j294 figs-nominaladj οἱ πλούσιοι 1 the rich James is using the adjective **rich** as a noun to refer to a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “you people who are rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -JAS 5 1 gel9 figs-explicit οἱ πλούσιοι 1 the rich James is most likely addressing believers who are rich, or at least rich people who were attending assemblies of believers, rather than unbelievers who are rich or rich people in general. (This letter was meant to be read aloud in those assemblies, and James notes in [1:10](../01/10.md) that some of the believers were rich.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers who are rich” or “you rich people who say you want to follow Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JAS 5 1 gel9 figs-explicit οἱ πλούσιοι 1 the rich James is most likely addressing believers who are **rich**, or at least rich people who were attending assemblies of believers, rather than unbelievers who are rich or rich people in general. (This letter was meant to be read aloud in those assemblies, and James notes in [1:10](../01/10.md) that some of the believers were rich.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you believers who are rich” or “you rich people who say you want to follow Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 1 j295 ἐπὶ ταῖς ταλαιπωρίαις ὑμῶν ταῖς ἐπερχομέναις 1 because of your coming miseries Your language may similarly speak of something that is going to happen in the future as if it were **coming**. If it does not, you could express this in another way. Alternate translation: “because of the miseries you will soon experience” JAS 5 1 l3wd figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ ταῖς ταλαιπωρίαις ὑμῶν ταῖς ἐπερχομέναις 1 because of your coming miseries If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **miseries** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “because many bad things are going to happen to you soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 5 2 j296 translate-versebridge 0 If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine [5:2](../05/02.md) and [5:3](../05/03.md) into a verse bridge. You could put the last sentence of [5:3](../05/03.md) first, followed by all of [5:2](../05/02.md) and then the rest of [5:3](../05/03.md). This would allow you to address several translation issues that are discussed in the notes to this verse and the next verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) JAS 5 2 gq45 figs-pastforfuture ὁ πλοῦτος ὑμῶν σέσηπεν, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτια ὑμῶν σητόβρωτα γέγονεν 1 Your wealth has rotted and your clothes have become moth-eaten James is using the past tense to refer to things that will happen in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Your wealth is going to rot and your clothes are going to be eaten by moths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JAS 5 2 v241 figs-synecdoche ὁ πλοῦτος ὑμῶν σέσηπεν, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτια ὑμῶν σητόβρωτα γέγονεν 1 Your wealth has rotted and your clothes have become moth-eaten In these two clauses and in the first clause in the next verse (“your gold and silver have been tarnished”), James is using certain things that these rich people own to mean everything that they own. If you create a verse bridge, you could combine all of these clauses into a single sentence that expresses this meaning. (You would need to begin a new sentence right afterwards.) Alternate translation: “Everything of value that you own is going to be ruined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -JAS 5 2 j297 figs-explicit ὁ πλοῦτος ὑμῶν σέσηπεν, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτια ὑμῶν σητόβρωτα γέγονεν 1 Your wealth has rotted and your clothes have become moth-eaten Depending on the meaning of the statement “you have stored up in the last days” in the next verse (see the note to that statement), James may be saying that the wealth and expensive clothing of the rich have become worthless. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JAS 5 2 j298 figs-simile ὁ πλοῦτος ὑμῶν σέσηπεν, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτια ὑμῶν σητόβρωτα γέγονεν 1 Your wealth has rotted and your clothes have become moth-eaten If you decide to indicate explicitly that James is saying that the wealth and expensive clothing of the rich have become worthless, you could do that by expressing his past-for-future statement as a simile, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +JAS 5 2 j297 figs-explicit ὁ πλοῦτος ὑμῶν σέσηπεν, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτια ὑμῶν σητόβρωτα γέγονεν 1 Your wealth has rotted and your clothes have become moth-eaten Depending on the meaning of the statement “you have stored up in the last days” in the next verse (see the note to that statement), James may be saying that the **wealth** and expensive clothing of the rich have become worthless. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JAS 5 2 j298 figs-simile ὁ πλοῦτος ὑμῶν σέσηπεν, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτια ὑμῶν σητόβρωτα γέγονεν 1 Your wealth has rotted and your clothes have become moth-eaten If you decide to indicate explicitly that James is saying that the **wealth** and expensive clothing of the rich have become worthless, you could do that by expressing his past-for-future statement as a simile, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) JAS 5 3 am1u figs-pastforfuture ὁ χρυσὸς ὑμῶν καὶ ὁ ἄργυρος κατίωται 1 Your gold and silver have been tarnished James is using the past tense to refer to something that will happen in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Your gold and silver are going to be tarnished” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JAS 5 3 wj9v figs-activepassive ὁ χρυσὸς ὑμῶν καὶ ὁ ἄργυρος κατίωται 1 Your gold and silver have been tarnished If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Your gold and silver have tarnished” or “Your gold and silver are going to tarnish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JAS 5 3 j299 figs-explicit ὁ χρυσὸς ὑμῶν καὶ ὁ ἄργυρος κατίωται 1 Your gold and silver have been tarnished Depending on the meaning of the statement “you have stored up in the last days” (see the first note to that statement below), James may be saying that the gold and silver of the rich have become worthless. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JAS 5 3 q4pm figs-simile ὁ χρυσὸς ὑμῶν καὶ ὁ ἄργυρος κατίωται 1 Your gold and silver have been tarnished If you decide to indicate explicitly that James is saying that the gold and silver of the rich have become worthless, you could do that by expressing his past-for-future statement as a simile, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +JAS 5 3 j299 figs-explicit ὁ χρυσὸς ὑμῶν καὶ ὁ ἄργυρος κατίωται 1 Your gold and silver have been tarnished Depending on the meaning of the statement “you have stored up in the last days” (see the first note to that statement below), James may be saying that the **gold and silver** of the rich have become worthless. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JAS 5 3 q4pm figs-simile ὁ χρυσὸς ὑμῶν καὶ ὁ ἄργυρος κατίωται 1 Your gold and silver have been tarnished If you decide to indicate explicitly that James is saying that the **gold and silver** of the rich have become worthless, you could do that by expressing his past-for-future statement as a simile, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) JAS 5 3 j300 καὶ ὁ ἰὸς αὐτῶν εἰς μαρτύριον ὑμῖν ἔσται 1 and their rust will be for a testimony against you If you created a verse bridge and you also combined the statement “your gold and silver have been tarnished” with the two clauses in [5:2](../05/02.md), it would be helpful to begin a new sentence here and to use a general expression that would apply to everything that these rich people own. Alternate translation: “The ruins of your possessions will be for a testimony against you” or “The ruins of your possessions will testify against you” JAS 5 3 e55t figs-metaphor ὁ ἰὸς αὐτῶν εἰς μαρτύριον ὑμῖν ἔσται 1 their rust will be for a testimony against you James is speaking of this **rust** as if it would be presented as evidence in a case against the rich people. Alternate translation: “the rust on your gold and silver will show that you did the wrong thing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 3 j301 figs-explicit ὁ ἰὸς αὐτῶν εἰς μαρτύριον ὑμῖν ἔσται 1 their rust will be for a testimony against you If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what wrong thing these rich people have done, as evidenced by this **rust**. Alternate translation: “the rust of your gold and silver will show that you have done the wrong thing by devoting yourselves to accumulating wealth rather than to helping other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 3 w3aj figs-metonymy φάγεται τὰς σάρκας ὑμῶν ὡς πῦρ 1 it will eat your flesh James is using the word **flesh** to mean the human body, by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “it will eat your bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JAS 5 3 j6fe figs-metaphor φάγεται τὰς σάρκας ὑμῶν ὡς πῦρ 1 it will eat your flesh James is saying that this rust will corrode and consume the owners of the gold and silver that it is also corroding. Alternate translation: “it will consume you” or “it will ruin you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 3 j6fe figs-metaphor φάγεται τὰς σάρκας ὑμῶν ὡς πῦρ 1 it will eat your flesh James is saying that this **rust** will corrode and consume the owners of the **gold and silver** that it is also corroding. Alternate translation: “it will consume you” or “it will ruin you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 3 i37x figs-simile ὡς πῦρ 1 like fire It may be helpful to express the meaning of this simile more fully. Alternate translation: “just as fire consumes everything that it burns” or “just as fire ruins everything that it burns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) JAS 5 3 j302 figs-explicit ἐθησαυρίσατε ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 You have stored up in the last days If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what these rich people have **stored up** and why it was wrong for them to do that. This could mean: (1) they have accumulated riches in the **last days**, that is, in the time just before Jesus returns. That would be wrong because once Jesus returns, earthly riches will no longer have any value. Instead of trying to get more and more wealth, these people should have been helping others with what they had. Alternate translation: “Instead of helping others, you have wrongly stored up wealth at a time when earthly riches are about to lose all of their value” (2) by their wrongdoing, such as he describes in [5:4-6](../05/04.md), these rich people have **stored up** punishment for themselves. Alternate translation: “God is just about to punish wrongdoers, and you have given God many reasons to punish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 3 j303 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐθησαυρίσατε ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 You have stored up in the last days If the first interpretation of this statement in the note just above is correct, then James is giving the reason for the results that he describes in the previous verse and in the earlier part of this verse. If you created a verse bridge as described in the first note to [5:2](../05/02.md), you could put this reason before the result by placing this statement first in that bridge. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) From 55ef48479d2fef6f36ade51b61d647bd63e50446 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 20:12:45 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 401/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 006514c339..9fed76f257 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -554,13 +554,13 @@ JAS 5 3 j302 figs-explicit ἐθησαυρίσατε ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡ JAS 5 3 j303 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐθησαυρίσατε ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 You have stored up in the last days If the first interpretation of this statement in the note just above is correct, then James is giving the reason for the results that he describes in the previous verse and in the earlier part of this verse. If you created a verse bridge as described in the first note to [5:2](../05/02.md), you could put this reason before the result by placing this statement first in that bridge. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 5 3 np1u figs-idiom ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 the last days This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the time just before Jesus returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 5 4 j304 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ὁ μισθὸς τῶν ἐργατῶν 1 Behold, the pay of the workers The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. It may be helpful to express its meaning as a separate sentence here. Alternate translation: “Consider this! The pay of the workers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 5 4 j305 figs-activepassive ὁ μισθὸς τῶν ἐργατῶν, τῶν ἀμησάντων τὰς χώρας ὑμῶν, ὁ ἀφυστερημένος ἀφ’ ὑμῶν, κράζει 1 the pay of the workers who have reaped your fields, which has been withheld from you, is crying out If your language does not use this passive form, you can express it with an active form. When James says **from you**, he does not mean that this payment has been withheld from the rich owners of these fields. He is saying that it was due from them, but they have not paid it to their workers. Alternate translation: “the pay that you have withheld from the workers who reaped your fields is crying out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +JAS 5 4 j305 figs-activepassive ὁ μισθὸς τῶν ἐργατῶν, τῶν ἀμησάντων τὰς χώρας ὑμῶν, ὁ ἀφυστερημένος ἀφ’ ὑμῶν, κράζει 1 the pay of the workers who have reaped your fields, which has been withheld from you, is crying out If your language does not use this passive form, you can express it with an active form. When James says **from you**, he does not mean that this payment has been withheld from the rich owners of these **fields**. He is saying that it was due from them, but they have not paid it to their **workers**. Alternate translation: “the pay that you have withheld from the workers who reaped your fields is crying out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 5 4 e9iy figs-personification κράζει 1 is crying out James is speaking of this **pay** as if it were a living thing that could cry out. Alternate translation: “is obvious evidence that you have done wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 5 4 n21a figs-metonymy αἱ βοαὶ τῶν θερισάντων, εἰς τὰ ὦτα Κυρίου Σαβαὼθ εἰσελήλυθαν 1 the cries of the harvesting ones have entered into the ears of the Lord of Sabaoth James is speaking of the **ears** of the Lord to mean his hearing. Alternate translation: “the Lord of Sabaoth has heard the cries of the harvesting ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 5 4 j306 figs-explicit Κυρίου Σαβαὼθ 1 the Lord of Sabaoth James assumes that his readers will know that he is speaking of God by a name by which he is often known in the Old Testament. The Hebrew term **Sabaoth** means “military forces.” Alternate translation: “God, the Lord of the Heavenly Armies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 4 j307 figs-metonymy Κυρίου Σαβαὼθ 1 the Lord of Sabaoth James may be speaking of God’s almighty power by association with the way that God has all the armies of heaven at his command. Alternate translation: “God, the Lord Almighty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 5 5 j308 figs-parallelism ἐτρυφήσατε ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς. καὶ ἐσπαταλήσατε 1 You have lived luxuriously on the earth and have lived self-indulgently These two phrases mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “You have indulged yourselves with earthly luxuries” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -JAS 5 5 xt8h figs-metaphor ἐθρέψατε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σφαγῆς 1 You have fattened your hearts in a day of slaughter James is speaking of these rich people as if they were cattle that had been fed luxuriously on grain so they would become fattened for slaughter as banqueting food. In this case the banquet is not a positive image, as it often is elsewhere when it describes God’s future reign. Alternate translation: “Your self-indulgence has made you subject to harsh judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 5 xt8h figs-metaphor ἐθρέψατε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σφαγῆς 1 You have fattened your hearts in a day of slaughter James is speaking of these rich people as if they were cattle that had been fed luxuriously on grain so they would become**fattened** for **slaughter** as banqueting food. In this case the banquet is not a positive image, as it often is elsewhere when it describes God’s future reign. Alternate translation: “Your self-indulgence has made you subject to harsh judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 5 pr31 figs-metaphor ἐθρέψατε τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σφαγῆς 1 You have fattened your hearts James is speaking of the heart as the center of human desire. Alternate translation: “You have indulged your desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 5 j309 figs-idiom ἐν ἡμέρᾳ 1 in a day James is using the term **day** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “at a time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 5 5 j310 figs-metaphor ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σφαγῆς 1 in a day of slaughter James is using the idea of **slaughter** to refer to God’s judgment. Alternate translation: “at a time when God is about to judge everyone for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 24e80150bc083ac2e0746471e30cab3cbcd53b71 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 20:14:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 402/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 9fed76f257..63a9fc6438 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -584,13 +584,13 @@ JAS 5 8 jw3b ἡ παρουσία τοῦ Κυρίου ἤγγικεν 1 the co JAS 5 9 k74r figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 9 z3p7 figs-activepassive μὴ κριθῆτε 1 you may be not judged If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “God may not judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JAS 5 9 ita4 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ὁ κριτὴς 1 Behold, the judge The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. Alternate translation: “Be aware that the judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 5 9 g938 figs-metaphor ὁ κριτὴς πρὸ τῶν θυρῶν ἕστηκεν 1 the judge is standing at the door James is comparing Jesus to a judge who is just about to walk into a courtroom. Alternate translation: “Jesus will soon return and judge everyone for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 9 g938 figs-metaphor ὁ κριτὴς πρὸ τῶν θυρῶν ἕστηκεν 1 the judge is standing at the door James is comparing Jesus to a **judge** who is just about to walk into a courtroom. Alternate translation: “Jesus will soon return and judge everyone for what they have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 10 j320 ὑπόδειγμα λάβετε, ἀδελφοί, τῆς κακοπαθίας 1 Take an example, brothers, of the suffering Alternate translation: “Take as your example, brothers, the suffering” JAS 5 10 j321 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 10 sic1 figs-hendiadys τῆς κακοπαθίας καὶ τῆς μακροθυμίας, τοὺς προφήτας 1 the suffering and the patience of the prophets James is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **patience** describes how the prophets endured **suffering**. Alternate translation: “of the patient suffering of the prophets” or “of how patiently the prophets suffered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) JAS 5 10 pvs3 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord James is using the **name** of the Lord to mean his person and authority. Alternate translation: “on behalf of the Lord” or “with the authority of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 5 11 xwr8 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Behold The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. Alternate translation: “Indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 5 11 s3nl figs-explicit τὴν ὑπομονὴν Ἰὼβ ἠκούσατε 1 You have heard of the endurance of Job James assumes that his readers will know the story of Job from the Scriptures. If your readers might not be familiar with his story, you could describe it in more detail. Alternate translation: “You know from the Scriptures how a man named Job who lived long ago patiently endured great suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JAS 5 11 s3nl figs-explicit τὴν ὑπομονὴν Ἰὼβ ἠκούσατε 1 You have heard of the endurance of Job James assumes that his readers will know the story of **Job** from the Scriptures. If your readers might not be familiar with his story, you could describe it in more detail. Alternate translation: “You know from the Scriptures how a man named Job who lived long ago patiently endured great suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 11 j322 figs-metaphor τὸ τέλος Κυρίου εἴδετε 1 you have seen the end of the Lord James is continuing to refer to the story of Job. Here, **end** could mean: (1) purpose. In that case, James would be using the term **seen** to mean “recognized.” Alternate translation: “you have recognized the purpose that the Lord had for Job’s sufferings” (2) final result. In that case, James would be using the term **seen** to mean “learned.” Alternate translation: “you have learned from the Scriptures how the Lord helped Job in the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 11 j323 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι πολύσπλαγχνός ἐστιν ὁ Κύριος καὶ οἰκτίρμων 1 that the Lord is greatly compassionate and merciful Here, **that** could mean: (1) “for” and introduce a reason. James may be giving the reason why God was pursuing a good purpose even in Job’s sufferings or why God helped Job in the end. Alternate translation: “for the Lord is very compassionate and merciful” (2) something further that James’ readers would have learned from the story of Job. Alternate translation: “and you have realized from this story that the Lord is greatly compassionate and merciful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 5 12 fug7 figs-metaphor πρὸ πάντων 1 before all James is using a spatial metaphor to emphasize the importance of what he is about to say. Your language may use a different spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “above all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From b88fd5e930bcff5d2fc968d8578062242a516d6d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 20:18:28 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 403/446] Edit 'en_tn_60-JAS.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 63a9fc6438..3c53ca52b1 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -632,7 +632,7 @@ JAS 5 19 j339 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψῃ τις αὐτόν 1 someone tu JAS 5 20 j340 writing-pronouns γινωσκέτω 1 let him know The pronoun **him** refers to the person who corrects another believer who has been deceived. Alternate translation: “the person who corrects the deceived believer should know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JAS 5 20 j341 figs-possession ὁ ἐπιστρέψας ἁμαρτωλὸν ἐκ πλάνης ὁδοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 the one who turns back a sinner from the wandering of his way James is using the possessive form to describe a **way** or path that is characterized by **wandering**. Alternate translation: “the one who turns back a sinner who has wandered away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JAS 5 20 xg1y figs-metaphor ὁ ἐπιστρέψας ἁμαρτωλὸν ἐκ πλάνης ὁδοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 the one who turns back a sinner from the wandering of his way The expressions **turns back** and **wandering** continue the metaphor of someone guiding a person in the right direction. Alternate translation: “anyone who corrects a sinner who has stopped doing what God wants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 5 20 j342 figs-metonymy σώσει ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἐκ θανάτου 1 will save his soul from death James is speaking as if this person’s actions would save the sinner’s soul from death. But James means by association that God will use those actions to persuade the sinner to repent and be saved. Alternate translation: “will be an instrument of God’s work to save the sinner’s soul from death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JAS 5 20 pd78 figs-metaphor σώσει ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἐκ θανάτου 1 will save his soul from death James seems to be speaking not of literal, physical death but of spiritual death, that is, of eternal separation from God. Alternate translation: “from spiritual death” (as in UST) or “from eternal separation from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 20 j342 figs-metonymy σώσει ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἐκ θανάτου 1 will save his soul from death James is speaking as if this person’s actions would save the sinner’s **soul from death**. But James means by association that God will use those actions to persuade the sinner to repent and be saved. Alternate translation: “will be an instrument of God’s work to save the sinner’s soul from death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JAS 5 20 pd78 figs-metaphor σώσει ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἐκ θανάτου 1 will save his soul from death James seems to be speaking not of literal, physical death but of spiritual **death**, that is, of eternal separation from God. Alternate translation: “from spiritual death” (as in UST) or “from eternal separation from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 20 j343 figs-synecdoche σώσει ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ ἐκ θανάτου 1 will save his soul from death However, some interpreters believe that James actually is speaking of literal, physical death. They believe he is saying that a person who stops his sinful lifestyle will not experience physical death as a consequence of his sin. In that case, James would be using one part of a person, his **soul**, to mean all of the person. Alternate translation: “will keep him from dying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -JAS 5 20 rh4d figs-metaphor καλύψει πλῆθος ἁμαρτιῶν 1 will cover a multitude of sins James is speaking of one person’s sins as if they were objects that another person could cover so that God would not see them. He means that by helping a sinner to repent, another believer can help that sinner to be forgiven. Alternate translation: “will help him to be forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 5 20 rh4d figs-metaphor καλύψει πλῆθος ἁμαρτιῶν 1 will cover a multitude of sins James is speaking of one person’s **sins** as if they were objects that another person could **cover** so that God would not see them. He means that by helping a sinner to repent, another believer can help that sinner to be forgiven. Alternate translation: “will help him to be forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From d0cabe5ed65e0b0d82042f68d8dbdcbaeb3aa81a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Fri, 14 Oct 2022 16:21:54 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 404/446] Fixed format of James --- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 3c53ca52b1..1b69c956bf 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ JAS 4 15 j289 figs-exclusive καὶ ζήσομεν καὶ ποιήσομεν 1 JAS 4 15 j290 figs-idiom τοῦτο ἢ ἐκεῖνο 1 this or that This is an idiom. No specific actions are intended. Your language may have a comparable idiom that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “such-and-such” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 4 16 j291 figs-abstractnouns καυχᾶσθε ἐν ταῖς ἀλαζονίαις ὑμῶν. πᾶσα καύχησις τοιαύτη πονηρά ἐστιν 1 you are boasting in your pretensions. All such boasting is evil If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **pretensions** and **boasting** (the second occurrence of the word in ULT) by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “you are boasting about what you presume you will be able to do. It is always wrong to boast like that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 4 17 q84z εἰδότι οὖν καλὸν ποιεῖν, καὶ μὴ ποιοῦντι, ἁμαρτία αὐτῷ ἐστιν 1 Therefore to the one having known to do good and not doing it, to him it is sin James is using the word **Therefore** to describe a further inference rather than a conclusion. He is saying that if it is wrong to plan to do things without knowing whether God wants you to do them, then it is also wrong not to do things that you do know God wants. Alternate translation: “From this we can also recognize that if someone does know what God wants him to do but he does not do it, then he is also sinning” -JAS 5 intro ud8q 0 # James 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n1. Rebuke of rich people (5:1-6)\n2. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7-11)\n3. Oaths forbidden (5:12)\n4. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13-18)\n5. Restoration of a sinner (5:19-20)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Living for eternity\n\nThe first section of this chapter, which is a warning to rich people, contrasts living for things of this world, which will not last, with living for things that will last for eternity. The second section of the chapter is related to that first section. In it, James stresses that it is important to live with the expectation that Jesus will return soon. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])\n\n### Oaths\n\nIn [5:12](../05/12.md), James tells his readers not to swear any oaths. However, biblical scholars are divided over whether James intends to teach literally that all oaths are wrong. Some scholars believe that some oaths are permissible and that James is emphasizing how Christians should have integrity in what they say.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Elijah\n\nThe illustration that James gives from the life of the prophet Elijah in [5:17-18](../05/17.md) may be difficult for your readers to appreciate if the books of 1 and 2 Kings have not yet been translated. See the first note to 5:17 for a suggestion about how to help your readers understand this illustration better. +JAS 5 intro ud8q 0 # James 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Rebuke of rich people (5:1-6)
2. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7-11)
3. Oaths forbidden (5:12)
4. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13-18)
5. Restoration of a sinner (5:19-20)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Living for eternity

The first section of this chapter, which is a warning to rich people, contrasts living for things of this world, which will not last, with living for things that will last for eternity. The second section of the chapter is related to that first section. In it, James stresses that it is important to live with the expectation that Jesus will return soon. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

### Oaths

In [5:12](../05/12.md), James tells his readers not to swear any oaths. However, biblical scholars are divided over whether James intends to teach literally that all oaths are wrong. Some scholars believe that some oaths are permissible and that James is emphasizing how Christians should have integrity in what they say.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Elijah

The illustration that James gives from the life of the prophet Elijah in [5:17-18](../05/17.md) may be difficult for your readers to appreciate if the books of 1 and 2 Kings have not yet been translated. See the first note to 5:17 for a suggestion about how to help your readers understand this illustration better. JAS 5 1 j292 figs-idiom ἄγε νῦν 1 Come now This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [4:13](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 5 1 j293 οἱ πλούσιοι 1 the rich James is addressing these **rich** people in the vocative. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. (If you use the word “you,” it would be plural, since James is addressing a group of people.) Alternate translation: “you who are rich” JAS 5 1 j294 figs-nominaladj οἱ πλούσιοι 1 the rich James is using the adjective **rich** as a noun to refer to a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “you people who are rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) From ff9e97ab4158fecdb1d1482b9e5269b67c487750 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 13:27:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 405/446] Edit 'en_tn_58-PHM.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_58-PHM.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv index c46c2978f6..e359bf36a6 100644 --- a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv @@ -3,13 +3,13 @@ PHM front intro sz2w 0 # Introduction to Philemon

## Part 1: General I PHM 1 1 ne8k figs-123person Παῦλος 1 Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Use that here. Alternate translations: “From me, Paul” or “I, Paul” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person) PHM 1 1 cgs4 δέσμιος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 a prisoner of Christ Jesus Paul was in prison because people in authority did not want him to preach about Jesus. They put him there in order to stop him and to punish him. This does not mean that Jesus had put Paul in prison. Alternate translation: “a prisoner for the sake of Christ Jesus” PHM 1 1 sv3p ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 our brother Paul is using the term **brother** to mean someone who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “our fellow Christian” or “our companion in the faith” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) -PHM 1 1 y9zu figs-exclusive ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Here, the word **our** is not in the original, but was necessary for English, which requires that a relationship word indicate who the person is related to. In this case, **our** would be inclusive, relating Timothy to Paul and the readers as a brother in Christ. If your language requires this, you could do the same. If not, you could follow the original wording, which says, “the brother.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -PHM 1 1 gvmy translate-names Φιλήμονι 1 This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -PHM 1 1 q84z figs-explicit Φιλήμονι 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could include the information that this is a letter in which Paul is speaking directly to Philemon, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +PHM 1 1 y9zu figs-exclusive ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Here, the word **{our}** is not in the original, but was necessary for English, which requires that a relationship word indicate who the person is related to. In this case, **{our}** would be inclusive, relating Timothy to Paul and the readers as a brother in Christ. If your language requires this, you could do the same. If not, you could follow the original wording, which says, “the brother.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +PHM 1 1 gvmy translate-names Φιλήμονι 1 **Philemon** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +PHM 1 1 q84z figs-explicit Φιλήμονι 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could include the information that this is a letter in which Paul is speaking directly to **Philemon**, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHM 1 1 r3l9 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our The word **our** here refers to Paul and those with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) PHM 1 1 ww3l καὶ συνεργῷ ἡμῶν 1 and our fellow worker If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly how Philemon worked with Paul. Alternate translation: “who, like us, works to spread the gospel” or “who works as we do to serve Jesus” -PHM 1 2 b37l translate-names Ἀπφίᾳ 1 This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -PHM 1 2 bb1s figs-exclusive τῇ ἀδελφῇ 1 Here, the word **our** is not in the original, but was necessary for English, which requires that a relationship word indicate who the person is related to. In this case, **our** would be inclusive, relating Apphia to Paul and the readers as a sister in Christ. If your language requires this, you could do the same. If not, you could do the same as the original, which says, “the sister.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +PHM 1 2 b37l translate-names Ἀπφίᾳ 1 **Apphia** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +PHM 1 2 bb1s figs-exclusive τῇ ἀδελφῇ 1 Here, the word **{our}** is not in the original, but was necessary for English, which requires that a relationship word indicate who the person is related to. In this case, **{our}** would be inclusive, relating Apphia to Paul and the readers as a sister in Christ. If your language requires this, you could do the same. If not, you could do the same as the original, which says, “the sister.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) PHM 1 2 hhpc figs-metaphor τῇ ἀδελφῇ 1 Paul is using the term **sister** to mean a woman who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “our fellow Christian” or “our spiritual sister” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) PHM 1 2 e8su figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our The word **our** here refers to Paul and those with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) PHM 1 2 kyzo Ἀπφίᾳ…Ἀρχίππῳ…τῇ…ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 The letter is predominantly addressed to Philemon. It could be misleading to suggest Paul is writing to **Apphia**, **Archippus**, and **the church** in Philemon’s house, on the same level as he is writing to Philemon. From 9f0a6de5a8f29b6d7b299193a1128228f076711f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 13:29:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 406/446] Edit 'en_tn_58-PHM.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_58-PHM.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv index e359bf36a6..a3a906b6e7 100644 --- a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv @@ -13,14 +13,14 @@ PHM 1 2 bb1s figs-exclusive τῇ ἀδελφῇ 1 Here, the word **{our}** is PHM 1 2 hhpc figs-metaphor τῇ ἀδελφῇ 1 Paul is using the term **sister** to mean a woman who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “our fellow Christian” or “our spiritual sister” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) PHM 1 2 e8su figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our The word **our** here refers to Paul and those with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) PHM 1 2 kyzo Ἀπφίᾳ…Ἀρχίππῳ…τῇ…ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 The letter is predominantly addressed to Philemon. It could be misleading to suggest Paul is writing to **Apphia**, **Archippus**, and **the church** in Philemon’s house, on the same level as he is writing to Philemon. -PHM 1 2 sq44 translate-names Ἀρχίππῳ 1 Archippus This is the name of a man in the church with Philemon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +PHM 1 2 sq44 translate-names Ἀρχίππῳ 1 Archippus **Archippus** is the name of a man in the church with Philemon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) PHM 1 2 mnn5 figs-metaphor τῷ συνστρατιώτῃ ἡμῶν 1 our fellow soldier Paul speaks here of Archippus as if he and Archippus were both soldiers in an army. He means that Archippus works hard, as Paul himself works hard, to spread the gospel. Alternate translation: “our fellow spiritual warrior” or “who also fights the spiritual battle with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -PHM 1 2 uof9 καὶ τῇ κατ’ οἶκόν σου ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Apphia and Archippus were probably also members of the church that met at Philemon’s house. If mentioning them separately would imply that they were not part of the church, you could include a word like “other.” Alternate translation: “to the other members of the church in your house” +PHM 1 2 uof9 καὶ τῇ κατ’ οἶκόν σου ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Apphia and Archippus were probably also members of the **church** that met at Philemon’s house. If mentioning them separately would imply that they were not part of the church, you could include a word like “other.” Alternate translation: “to the other members of the church in your house” PHM 1 3 r4nq translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Grace to you and peace from God our Father and our Lord Jesus Christ After introducing the senders and recipients of the letter, Paul gives a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) -PHM 1 3 iv7e figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ. 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **grace** and **peace**behind them with adjectives such as “gracious” and “peaceful.” Alternate translation: “May God our Father and our Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and make you peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +PHM 1 3 iv7e figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ. 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **Grace** and **peace**behind them with adjectives such as “gracious” and “peaceful.” Alternate translation: “May God our Father and our Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and make you peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHM 1 3 e5z8 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμῶν 1 our The word **our** here is inclusive, referring to Paul, those with him, and the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) PHM 1 3 qglx figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 Here, **you** is plural, referring to all of the recipients named in verses 1–2. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -PHM 1 3 lh8a guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρὸς 1 Father This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +PHM 1 3 lh8a guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρὸς 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) PHM 1 4 puh8 figs-yousingular σου 1 Here, the word **you** is singular and refers to Philemon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) PHM 1 5 l3i2 figs-abstractnouns ἀκούων σου τὴν ἀγάπην καὶ τὴν πίστιν, ἣν ἔχεις πρὸς τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν, καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους 1 figs-abstractnouns If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **love** and **faith** by stating the ideas behind them with verbs instead. Alternate translation: “hearing how much you love and believe in the Lord Jesus and all the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHM 1 5 ojcu writing-poetry ἀκούων σου τὴν ἀγάπην καὶ τὴν πίστιν, ἣν ἔχεις πρὸς τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν, καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους 1 writing-poetry Paul is using a poetic structure here in which the first and last parts relate and the second and third parts relate. Therefore, the meaning is: “hearing of the faith that you have in the Lord Jesus and of your love for all the saints.”Paul said exactly that in Colossians 1:4 without the poetic structure. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]]) From d7d44e6fba75922516b078bffa1cdbdbd4e01bf5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 09:38:47 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 407/446] Fixed typo in several abstract noun notes in 1Ti, 1Jn, and 2Jn. --- en_tn_55-1TI.tsv | 10 +++++----- en_tn_63-1JN.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_64-2JN.tsv | 2 +- 3 files changed, 7 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv index 9cc7d501c8..70cf5efd0d 100644 --- a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 1 4 ft33 γενεαλογίαις 1 genealogies Usually, the term **genealogies** refers to a record of a person’s ancestors. However, in this case it could also mean a record of the supposed ancestors of spiritual beings. Alternate translation: “lists of names” 1TI 1 4 qb9l αἵτινες ἐκζητήσεις παρέχουσι 1 which promote arguments The people were debating about these stories and lists of names, but no one could know for certain whether they were true. Alternate translation: “these make people disagree angrily” 1TI 1 4 eu9f figs-abstractnouns οἰκονομίαν Θεοῦ 1 the stewardship of God If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this phrasebehind the abstract noun **stewardship** with a concrete noun such as “plan” or “work.” Alternate translations: “helping us to understand God’s plan to save us” or “helping us to do God’s work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TI 1 4 p2sr figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐν πίστει 1 which is by faith If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the word **faith**behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translations: “which we learn by believing in God” or “which we do by trusting in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TI 1 4 p2sr figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐν πίστει 1 which is by faith If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the word **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translations: “which we learn by believing in God” or “which we do by trusting in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 1 5 myi5 δὲ 1 Now Paul here uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help Timothy understand the purpose of what he is commanding him. You can translate it with a word or phrase in your language that introduces background information. 1TI 1 5 iwnk grammar-connect-logic-goal τὸ δὲ τέλος τῆς παραγγελίας ἐστὶν 1 Now the goal of this command is Here Paul is expressing to Timothy the **goal** or the outcome that he desires from the commands that Paul gave him. Alternate translation: “I am commanding these things in order to get this result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1TI 1 5 l7un τῆς παραγγελίας 1 command Here, **this command** refers to the instructions that Paul has given Timothy in [1:3](../01/03.md) and [1:4](../01/04.md). @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 1 5 mbe6 figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a pure heart Here, **pure** indicates that the person wants only good things and does not have mixed motives that also include some bad ones. Alternate translation: “from a desire for only what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TI 1 5 ar8t συνειδήσεως ἀγαθῆς 1 a good conscience Your translation should make it clear that love is the one goal of the command and is followed by three things that lead to this love. This is the second thing, after “a pure heart.” Alternate translation: “and from a conscience that leads a person to choose right instead of wrong” 1TI 1 5 m53g πίστεως ἀνυποκρίτου 1 a sincere faith Paul presents **a sincere faith** as the third thing that leads to love, which is the one goal of the command. It is not a third goal of the command. Alternate translations: “and from faith that is genuine” or “and from faith that is without hypocrisy” -1TI 1 5 zziu figs-abstractnouns πίστεως ἀνυποκρίτου 1 a sincere faith If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the phrase **a sincere faith**behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) trust in God. (2) belief in true teaching about God. Alternate translations: “firmly trusting in God” or “sincerely believing the true message about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TI 1 5 zziu figs-abstractnouns πίστεως ἀνυποκρίτου 1 a sincere faith If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the phrase **a sincere faith** by expressing the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Here, **faith** could refer to: (1) trust in God. (2) belief in true teaching about God. Alternate translations: “firmly trusting in God” or “sincerely believing the true message about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 1 6 j4z3 figs-metaphor τινες ἀστοχήσαντες 1 some, having missed the mark Paul speaks of faith in Christ as if it were a target that people should aim at. Paul means that some people are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith, which is to love, as he has just explained. Alternate translation: “some people, who are not fulfilling the purpose of faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 1 6 se38 figs-metaphor ἐξετράπησαν εἰς 1 have turned away to Here, **turned away** means these people have stopped doing what God has commanded. Alternate translation: “are no longer doing what God commands. Instead of that, they just engage in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 1 7 v28u figs-explicit νομοδιδάσκαλοι 1 teachers of the law Here, **law** refers specifically to the law of Moses. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 4 3 t293 figs-doublet τοῖς πιστοῖς καὶ ἐπεγνωκόσι τὴν ἀλήθειαν 1 the faithful and the ones knowing the truth These two expressions mean the same thing. Paul uses them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine these terms. Alternate translation: “by the genuine believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TI 4 3 t294 figs-nominaladj τοῖς πιστοῖς 1 the faithful Paul is using the adjective **faithful** as a noun to refer to a class of people that it describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate it with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “by people who believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1TI 4 4 pppf grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 For The word **For** communicates that what follows is the reason for what Paul just said. Use a natural way in your language to give a reason. Alternate translation: “that is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TI 4 4 dv4s figs-distinguish πᾶν κτίσμα Θεοῦ καλόν 1 every creature of God is good If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the phrase**every creation**behind the expression **creation of God** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “everything that God created is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +1TI 4 4 dv4s figs-distinguish πᾶν κτίσμα Θεοῦ καλόν 1 every creature of God is good If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the phrase **every creation** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “everything that God created is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1TI 4 4 a15j figs-activepassive οὐδὲν ἀπόβλητον μετὰ εὐχαριστίας λαμβανόμενον 1 nothing being received with thanksgiving is vile If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “we are free to eat anything that we can thank God for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 4 5 gwcs grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 The word **for** communicates that what follows is the reason for the last part of what Paul has just said. In other words, it is the reason why “nothing being received with thanksgiving is vile.” Use a natural way in your language to give a reason. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TI 4 5 m5mb figs-activepassive ἁγιάζεται 1 it is sanctified If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this passive phrase with an active form. Alternate translations: “it becomes holy” or “it is suitable to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 6 5 t443 figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 between men Paul uses the term **men** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “between people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1TI 6 6 q5sq grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But Paul uses the word **But** to introduce a contrast between what the false teachers believe about godliness and what is really true about godliness. Alternate translation: “instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1TI 6 6 ya9z figs-abstractnouns ἡ εὐσέβεια μετὰ αὐταρκείας 1 godliness with contentment If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **godliness** and **contentment** by stating the ideas behind them with verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “doing what is godly along with being content with what a person has” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TI 6 6 o6j4 figs-abstractnouns ἔστιν…πορισμὸς μέγας 1 is great gain If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **gain**behind it with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “makes a person very well off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TI 6 6 o6j4 figs-abstractnouns ἔστιν…πορισμὸς μέγας 1 is great gain If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **gain** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “makes a person very well off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 6 7 t446 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Paul uses the word **For** to introduce the reason for what he said in the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “after all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TI 6 7 j6qv figs-explicit οὐδὲν…εἰσηνέγκαμεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 we brought nothing into the world The implication of this phrase is that Paul is speaking about when a person is born. Alternate translation: “brought nothing into the world when we were born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 6 7 t448 figs-ellipsis ὅτι 1 that Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would ordinarily need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and so it is also clear that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 6 16 t487 figs-gendernotations οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων 1 none of men Paul uses the term **men** here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “no human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1TI 6 17 te3z figs-nominaladj τοῖς πλουσίοις 1 the rich Paul is using the adjective **rich** as a noun to refer to a class of people that it describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this term by translating it with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1TI 6 17 z4ec ἐν τῷ νῦν αἰῶνι 1 in the present age The **present age** is the time period in which we are living, before Jesus returns and establishes God’s rule over all people. Alternate translation: “at this time” -1TI 6 17 drj6 figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ πλούτου ἀδηλότητι 1 in the uncertainty of riches If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **uncertainty**behind this with a verbal phrase. Alternate translations: “in riches, which are so uncertain” or “in wealth, which a person can lose so easily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TI 6 17 drj6 figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ πλούτου ἀδηλότητι 1 in the uncertainty of riches If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **uncertainty** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translations: “in riches, which are so uncertain” or “in wealth, which a person can lose so easily” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 6 17 iq61 figs-ellipsis πάντα πλουσίως εἰς ἀπόλαυσιν 1 all things richly unto enjoyment By **all**, Paul is referring to all of the things that anyone actually has, not to everything that it might be possible to have. If it would be helpful in your language, you may want to include words to make that clear. Alternate translation: “all of the things that we have so that we can enjoy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1TI 6 18 cii3 figs-metaphor πλουτεῖν ἐν ἔργοις καλοῖς 1 to be rich in good works Paul speaks of doing things to help others as a way of becoming wealthy, but it is measured in something other than money. Alternate translation: “to serve and help others in many ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 19 zc9d figs-metaphor ἀποθησαυρίζοντας ἑαυτοῖς θεμέλιον καλὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον 1 storing up for themselves a good foundation for what is coming Paul speaks about the blessings that God will give to those who have served him faithfully as if they were riches that a person was **storing** in a safe place. Alternate translation: “securing a good start now on their future life in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) diff --git a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv index eeab74d21e..fb1eba75fc 100644 --- a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv @@ -455,7 +455,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 4 6 arsa writing-pronouns ἐκ τούτου γινώσκομεν 1 Here, **this** refers back to what John has just written in the previous two sentences. We can know if someone is teaching a true message if it agrees with what John and the other apostles teach, and that it is a false message if it does not. John may have intended for **this** to also include what he said in [4:2–3](../04/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 4 6 j261 figs-exclusive γινώσκομεν 1 we know Since John is once again speaking of himself and the believers to whom he is writing, **we** in this last sentence in the verse would be inclusive, and so if your language marks that distinction, use the inclusive form in your translation. This inclusive usage continues through [4:13](../04/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1JN 4 6 j262 figs-metonymy τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης 1 the spirit of truth and the spirit of error See the discussion of the word **spirit** in the General Notes to this chapter. In these instances, the word may refer to: (1) spirits that inspire messages of a certain kind. In this case, **the spirit of truth** would refer to God’s Spirit, and **the spirit of error** would refer to the devil. These would also be what John refers to as “the one in you” and “the one in the world” in [4:4](../04/04.md). See the UST. (2) the character of something. In this case, John would be using **spirit** to refer to people whose teaching has a certain character. Alternate translation: “whose teaching is true and whose teaching is false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1JN 4 6 j263 figs-abstractnouns τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης 1 the spirit of truth and the spirit of error If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **truth** and **error**behind them with the adjectives “true” and “false.” Alternate translation: “the spirit whose messages are true and the spirit whose messages are false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1JN 4 6 j263 figs-abstractnouns τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πλάνης 1 the spirit of truth and the spirit of error If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **truth** and **error** with the adjectives “true” and “false.” Alternate translation: “the spirit whose messages are true and the spirit whose messages are false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 4 7 bse1 checking/headings 0 If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 7. Suggested heading: “Love Comes from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 1JN 4 7 fpl5 figs-nominaladj ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved See how you translated **Beloved** in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1JN 4 7 c6w6 figs-idiom ἡ ἀγάπη ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 love is from God The expression **from God** means something similar to what it does in [4:1–3](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “God inspires us to love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) diff --git a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv index 09c502c804..485d9d1ea3 100644 --- a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2JN 1 2 spdg figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀλήθειαν 1 the truth John uses the abstract noun **truth** to refer to the true message that Christians believe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind this termbehind this term with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the true message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2JN 1 2 et6b figs-exclusive ἡμῖν…ἡμῶν 1 us … us If your language marks this distinction, the pronoun **us** would be inclusive here and throughout the epistle, because John always uses it to refer to both himself and to the recipients of the letter. The pronoun “we” would also be inclusive for that same reason, as would the pronoun “our,” if you choose to use it in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 2JN 1 2 a7rm figs-idiom εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 to the age This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “for all time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2JN 1 3 gad9 figs-abstractnouns ἔσται μεθ’ ἡμῶν χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, παρὰ Θεοῦ Πατρός καὶ παρὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Grace, mercy, and peace will be with us from God the Father and from Jesus Christ If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **grace**, **mercy**, and **peace**behind them with verbal phrases, with **God the Father** and **Jesus Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “God the Father and Jesus Christ will be kind to us, be merciful to us, and enable us to be peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2JN 1 3 gad9 figs-abstractnouns ἔσται μεθ’ ἡμῶν χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, παρὰ Θεοῦ Πατρός καὶ παρὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Grace, mercy, and peace will be with us from God the Father and from Jesus Christ If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **grace**, **mercy**, and **peace** with verbal phrases, and use **God the Father** and **Jesus Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “God the Father and Jesus Christ will be kind to us, be merciful to us, and enable us to be peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2JN 1 3 zfgr ἔσται μεθ’ ἡμῶν χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη 1 Grace, mercy, and peace will be with us In this culture, letter writers would normally offer a good wish or blessing for the recipients before introducing the main business of the letter. But instead of a blessing here, John makes a declarative statement. This probably expresses his confidence that God will do as he promised. Be sure that your translation also expresses this confidence. 2JN 1 3 vpl9 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός…Υἱοῦ 1 the Father … Son **Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus Christ. Be sure to translate them accurately and consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 2JN 1 3 w6tr figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀληθείᾳ καὶ ἀγάπῃ 1 in truth and love If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **truth** and **love** by stating the ideas behind them with adjectives or verbs. Here, these abstract nouns could refer to: (1) the qualities of God the Father and Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “who are truthful and loving” (2) how believers should live, and thus are the conditions under which believers will receive the “grace, mercy, and peace” from God. Alternate translation: “as we continue to hold on to what is true and to love each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 6c00ca643eddfe642151a2fd9ddb174d6894277e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 13:41:36 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 408/446] Edit 'en_tn_58-PHM.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_58-PHM.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv index a3a906b6e7..064e75a4a4 100644 --- a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv @@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ PHM 1 2 sq44 translate-names Ἀρχίππῳ 1 Archippus **Archippus** is the n PHM 1 2 mnn5 figs-metaphor τῷ συνστρατιώτῃ ἡμῶν 1 our fellow soldier Paul speaks here of Archippus as if he and Archippus were both soldiers in an army. He means that Archippus works hard, as Paul himself works hard, to spread the gospel. Alternate translation: “our fellow spiritual warrior” or “who also fights the spiritual battle with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHM 1 2 uof9 καὶ τῇ κατ’ οἶκόν σου ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Apphia and Archippus were probably also members of the **church** that met at Philemon’s house. If mentioning them separately would imply that they were not part of the church, you could include a word like “other.” Alternate translation: “to the other members of the church in your house” PHM 1 3 r4nq translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Grace to you and peace from God our Father and our Lord Jesus Christ After introducing the senders and recipients of the letter, Paul gives a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) -PHM 1 3 iv7e figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ. 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **Grace** and **peace**behind them with adjectives such as “gracious” and “peaceful.” Alternate translation: “May God our Father and our Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and make you peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +PHM 1 3 iv7e figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ. 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **Grace** and **peace** with adjectives such as “gracious” and “peaceful.” Alternate translation: “May God our Father and our Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and make you peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHM 1 3 e5z8 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμῶν 1 our The word **our** here is inclusive, referring to Paul, those with him, and the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) PHM 1 3 qglx figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 Here, **you** is plural, referring to all of the recipients named in verses 1–2. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) PHM 1 3 lh8a guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρὸς 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -27,10 +27,10 @@ PHM 1 5 ojcu writing-poetry ἀκούων σου τὴν ἀγάπην καὶ PHM 1 5 pf1y figs-yousingular σου…ἔχεις 1 Here, the words **your** and **you** are singular and refer to Philemon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) PHM 1 6 mfrp figs-explicit ὅπως 1 Here, **that** introduces the content of the prayer that Paul mentions in verse 4. If it would be helpful in your language, you could repeat the idea of prayer here. Alternate translation: “I pray that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHM 1 6 t54l figs-abstractnouns ἡ κοινωνία τῆς πίστεώς σου 1 the fellowship of your faith The word translated **fellowship** means a sharing or a partnership in something. Paul probably intends both meanings, but if you must choose, it could mean: (1) that Philemon shares the same faith in Christ as Paul and others. Alternate translation: “the faith that you share with us” (2) that Philemon is a partner with Paul and others in working for Christ. Alternate translation: “your working together with us as believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -PHM 1 6 hcwp figs-abstractnouns ἡ κοινωνία τῆς πίστεώς σου, ἐνεργὴς γένηται ἐν ἐπιγνώσει παντὸς ἀγαθοῦ τοῦ ἐν ἡμῖν εἰς Χριστόν. 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind these abstract nouns **faith** and **knowledge**behind **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe,” and **knowledge** with a verb such as “know” or “learn.” Alternate translation: “as you trust in the Messiah along with us, you may become increasingly better at serving the Messiah, as you learn about all of the good things that he has given us to use for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +PHM 1 6 hcwp figs-abstractnouns ἡ κοινωνία τῆς πίστεώς σου, ἐνεργὴς γένηται ἐν ἐπιγνώσει παντὸς ἀγαθοῦ τοῦ ἐν ἡμῖν εἰς Χριστόν. 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe,” and behind **knowledge** with a verb such as “know” or “learn.” Alternate translation: “as you trust in the Messiah along with us, you may become increasingly better at serving the Messiah, as you learn about all of the good things that he has given us to use for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHM 1 6 pxw1 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει παντὸς ἀγαθοῦ 1 may be effective for the knowledge of everything good This could mean: (1) “and will result in you knowing every good thing” (2) “so that those you share your faith with will know every good thing” Alternate translation: “by knowing everything good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHM 1 6 n25e figs-explicit εἰς Χριστόν 1 in Christ If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly how “everything good” is **for Christ**. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Christ” or “for the benefit of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -PHM 1 7 vyc7 figs-abstractnouns χαρὰν γὰρ πολλὴν ἔσχον καὶ παράκλησιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **joy** and **comfort**behind them with adjectives. Alternate translation: “For you made me very joyful and comforted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +PHM 1 7 vyc7 figs-abstractnouns χαρὰν γὰρ πολλὴν ἔσχον καὶ παράκλησιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **joy** and **comfort** with adjectives. Alternate translation: “For you made me very joyful and comforted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHM 1 7 xlp6 figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ ἀγάπῃ σου 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **love** with a verb. Alternate translation: “because you love people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHM 1 7 shpv figs-activepassive τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων ἀναπέπαυται διὰ σοῦ 1 the inward parts of the saints are being refreshed by you If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you have refreshed the inward parts of the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) PHM 1 7 aq4g figs-metonymy τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων 1 the inward parts of the saints Here, **inward parts** refers to a person’s emotions or inner being. Use the figure that is normal in your language for this, such as “hearts” or “livers,” or give the plain meaning. Alternate translation: “the thoughts and feelings of the saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ PHM 1 20 cqd0 figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 See how you translated **in the PHM 1 20 xp0b figs-explicit ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα ἐν Χριστῷ 1 refresh my inward parts in Christ How Paul wanted Philemon to refresh him can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “refresh my inward parts in Christ by accepting Onesimus kindly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHM 1 20 j8lh figs-metaphor ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα 1 refresh my inward parts Here, **refresh** is a metaphor for comfort or encourage. Alternate translation: “encourage me” or “comfort me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHM 1 20 kmpp figs-metonymy ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα 1 refresh my inward parts Here, **inward parts** is a metonym for a person’s feelings, thoughts, or inner being. Alternate translation: “encourage me” or “comfort me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -PHM 1 21 azje figs-abstractnouns πεποιθὼς τῇ ὑπακοῇ σου 1 refresh my inward parts If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **confidence** and **obedience**behind them with verbs. Alternate translation: “Because I am confident that you will obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +PHM 1 21 azje figs-abstractnouns πεποιθὼς τῇ ὑπακοῇ σου 1 refresh my inward parts If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **confidence** and **obedience** with verbs. Alternate translation: “Because I am confident that you will obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHM 1 21 lxxi ἔγραψά σοι 1 refresh my inward parts Paul used the past tense here because the action of writing would be in the past when Philemon read the letter. Use the tense that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I write to you” PHM 1 22 xpn6 checking/headings 0 Connecting Statement: Here Paul closes his letter and gives final instruction to Philemon and a blessing on Philemon and on the believers that met for church in Philemon’s house. If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 22. Suggested heading: “Final Instruction and Blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) PHM 1 22 bx62 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἅμα 1 at the same time The word translated **at the same time** indicates that Paul wants Philemon to do something else for him while he does the first thing. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “while doing that” or “in addition to that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) From bf810c02164f5b2d9912ab72cc317b264260b15a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 13:44:48 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 409/446] Edit 'en_tn_58-PHM.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_58-PHM.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv index 064e75a4a4..575b3dbec0 100644 --- a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv @@ -39,14 +39,14 @@ PHM 1 7 m5ip figs-metaphor σοῦ, ἀδελφέ 1 you, brother Paul called Phi PHM 1 8 ayy1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul begins his plea and the reason for his letter. PHM 1 8 fd84 πολλὴν ἐν Χριστῷ παρρησίαν 1 all boldness in Christ This could mean: (1) “all authority because of Christ” (2) “all courage because of Christ.” PHM 1 8 x3nc grammar-connect-logic-result διό 1 The word **Therefore** signals that what Paul has just said in verses 4–7 is the reason for what he is about to say. Use a connecting word or another way that your language uses to signal this relationship. Alternate translation: “Because of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -PHM 1 9 l9fh figs-abstractnouns διὰ τὴν ἀγάπην 1 because of love Paul does not say for whom this love is. If you need to use a verb here and say who loves whom, this could refer to: (1) the mutual love between him and Philemon. See the UST. (2) Paul’s love for Philemon. Alternate translation: “because I love you” (3) Philemon’s love for his fellow believers. Alternate translation: “because I know that you love God’s people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +PHM 1 9 l9fh figs-abstractnouns διὰ τὴν ἀγάπην 1 because of love Paul does not say for whom this **love** is. If you need to use a verb here and say who loves whom, this could refer to: (1) the mutual love between him and Philemon. See the UST. (2) Paul’s love for Philemon. Alternate translation: “because I love you” (3) Philemon’s love for his fellow believers. Alternate translation: “because I know that you love God’s people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHM 1 9 sb31 δέσμιος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul was in prison because people in authority did not want him to preach about Jesus. They put him there in order to stop him and to punish him. This does not mean that Jesus had put Paul in prison. Alternate translation: “a prisoner for the sake of Christ Jesus” PHM 1 10 lsr6 translate-names Ὀνήσιμον 1 **Onesimus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) PHM 1 10 hnhz figs-explicit Ὀνήσιμον 1 The name **Onesimus** means “profitable” or “useful.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include this information in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -PHM 1 10 mui3 figs-metaphor τέκνου, ὃν ἐγέννησα 1 whom I have fathered in my chains Here, **fathered** is a metaphor that means that Onesimus became a believer as Paul taught him about Christ. Alternate translation: “who received new life and became my spiritual son when I taught him about Christ” or “who became a spiritual son to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHM 1 10 mui3 figs-metaphor ὃν ἐγέννησα 1 whom I have fathered in my chains Here, **fathered** is a metaphor that means that Onesimus became a believer as Paul taught him about Christ. Alternate translation: “who received new life and became my spiritual son when I taught him about Christ” or “who became a spiritual son to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHM 1 10 nx1p figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς 1 in my chains Prisoners were often bound in **chains**. Paul was in prison when he taught Onesimus and was still in prison when he wrote this letter. Alternate translation: “here in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHM 1 12 t1kp ὃν ἀνέπεμψά σοι 1 I sent him back to you Paul was probably sending Onesimus with another believer who carried this letter. -PHM 1 12 fdwn figs-metaphor τὰ ἐμὰ σπλάγχνα 1 my inward parts The phrase **this one is my inward parts** is a metaphor for deep feelings about someone. Paul was saying this about Onesimus. Alternate translation: “this is a person whom I love dearly” or “this person is very special to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHM 1 12 fdwn figs-metaphor τοῦτ’ ἔστιν τὰ ἐμὰ σπλάγχνα 1 my inward parts The phrase **{this} one is my inward parts** is a metaphor for deep feelings about someone. Paul was saying this about Onesimus. Alternate translation: “this is a person whom I love dearly” or “this person is very special to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHM 1 12 yn1d figs-metonymy τὰ ἐμὰ σπλάγχνα 1 Here, ** inward parts** is figurative for the place of a person’s emotions. If your language has a similar figure, then use that. If not, use plain language. Alternate translation: “my heart” or “my liver” or “my deepest feelings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHM 1 13 t4xl ἵνα ὑπὲρ σοῦ μοι διακονῇ 1 so that he might serve me on behalf of you Paul knows that Philemon wants to help him, and so he suggests that a way to do that would be to allow Onesimus to serve Paul in prison. Alternate translation: “so that, since you could not be here, he might help me” or “so that he could help me in your place” PHM 1 13 bb3t figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς 1 in the chains Prisoners were often bound in **chains**. Paul was in prison when he told Onesimus about the Messiah, and he was still in prison when he wrote this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From a320025b2096d97cdceff501238150adb1e31eac Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 13:48:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 410/446] Edit 'en_tn_58-PHM.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_58-PHM.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv index 575b3dbec0..ed66222fac 100644 --- a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv @@ -56,22 +56,22 @@ PHM 1 14 fg6l figs-abstractnouns ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἑκούσιον. 1 If i PHM 1 15 tcrd figs-activepassive τάχα γὰρ διὰ τοῦτο, ἐχωρίσθη πρὸς ὥραν, ἵνα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For perhaps the reason that God took Onesimus away from you for a time was so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) PHM 1 15 bx4q figs-idiom πρὸς ὥραν 1 Here, the phrase **for an hour** is an idiom meaning “for a short time.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “for this short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) PHM 1 16 l3e4 ὑπὲρ δοῦλον 1 better than a slave Alternate translation: “more valuable than a slave” or “more dear than a slave” -PHM 1 16 dg1w οὐκέτι ὡς δοῦλον 1 This does not mean that Onesimus will no longer be a slave to Philemon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word such as “just” or “only.” Alternate translation: “no longer only as a slave” +PHM 1 16 dg1w οὐκέτι ὡς δοῦλον 1 This does not mean that Onesimus will no longer be a **slave** to Philemon. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word such as “just” or “only.” Alternate translation: “no longer only as a slave” PHM 1 16 bynb ὑπὲρ δοῦλον 1 Alternate translation: “more valuable than a slave” -PHM 1 16 f8tz figs-metaphor ἀδελφὸν 1 a beloved brother Here, **brother** is a metaphor for a fellow believer. Alternative translation, “spiritual brother” or “brother in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHM 1 16 f8tz figs-metaphor ἀδελφὸν ἀγαπητόν 1 a beloved brother Here, **brother** is a metaphor for a fellow believer. Alternative translation, “a beloved spiritual brother” or “a brother whom we love in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHM 1 16 qxi0 ἀγαπητόν 1 Alternate translation: “dear” or “precious” PHM 1 16 scj1 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 in the Lord Alternate translation: “in the fellowship of brotherhood through Jesus” or “in the fellowship of believers in the Lord” PHM 1 17 e1j2 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ…με ἔχεις κοινωνόν 1 if you have me as a partner Paul is writing in a way that makes it seem as though it is possible that Philemon does not consider that Paul is his partner, but he knows that Philemon does consider Paul to be his partner. This is a way of getting Philemon to agree on one thing (that Paul is a partner) so that he will agree to the other thing (to receive Onesimus). If your language does not state something as uncertain if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since you have me as a partner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) PHM 1 17 e0es grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 **Therefore** means that what came before this word is the reason for what comes after it. It may be that Paul intends for everything that came before to be the reason, because this word also indicates that Paul is now coming to the main point of the letter. Use a natural method in your language to indicate this transition. Alternate translation: “Because of all of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) PHM 1 17 d56r figs-ellipsis προσλαβοῦ αὐτὸν ὡς ἐμέ. 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words here that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “receive him just as you would receive me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) PHM 1 18 nq4j grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δέ τι ἠδίκησέν σε ἢ ὀφείλει 1 Onesimus certainly did wrong to Philemon by running away, and he probably also stole some of Philemon’s property. But Paul is stating these things as uncertain in order to be polite. If your language does not use a conditional statement in this way, then use a more natural way to state this. Alternate translation: “But whatever he has taken or whatever wrong he has done to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -PHM 1 18 w4ys εἰ δέ τι ἠδίκησέν σε ἢ ὀφείλει 1 These two phrases mean similar things, although **wronged you** is more general than **owes you**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could put the more general phrase second. Alternate translation: “But if he owes you anything or has wronged you in any way” +PHM 1 18 w4ys εἰ δέ τι ἠδίκησέν σε ἢ ὀφείλει 1 These two phrases mean similar things, although **wronged you** is more general than **owes {you}**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could put the more general phrase second. Alternate translation: “But if he owes you anything or has wronged you in any way” PHM 1 18 j3ou τοῦτο ἐμοὶ ἐλλόγα. 1 Alternate translation: “I will take responsibility for repaying you” or “say that I am the one who owes you” PHM 1 19 wb53 ἐγὼ Παῦλος ἔγραψα τῇ ἐμῇ χειρί 1 I, Paul, write this with my own hand Paul wrote this part with his **own hand** so that Philemon would know that these words were really from Paul, and that Paul really would pay him. He used the past tense here because the action of writing would be in the past when Philemon read the letter. Use the tense that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, write this myself.” PHM 1 19 gn6c figs-irony ἵνα μὴ λέγω σοι 1 in order not to say to you Paul says that he will not say something to Philemon while saying it. This is a polite way of emphasizing the truth of what Paul is telling him. If your language would not use irony like this, then use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “I do not need to remind you” or “You already know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) PHM 1 19 st7e figs-explicit καὶ σεαυτόν μοι προσοφείλεις 1 you also owe me your own self Paul was implying that whatever Onesimus or Paul owed to Philemon was canceled by the larger amount that Philemon owed to Paul, which was Philemon’s own life. The reason that Philemon owed Paul his life can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “you even owe me your own life” or “you owe me much more because I saved your life” or “you owe me your own life because I told you about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHM 1 20 mw03 figs-metaphor ἀδελφέ 1 Here, **brother** is a metaphor for a fellow believer. Alternate translation: “spiritual brother” or “brother in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -PHM 1 20 cqd0 figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 See how you translated **in the Lord** in verse 16. This metaphor refers to being a believer in Jesus and means the same as **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “as you serve the Lord” or “because we are fellow believers in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +PHM 1 20 cqd0 figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 See how you translated **in {the} Lord** in verse 16. This metaphor refers to being a believer in Jesus and means the same as **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “as you serve the Lord” or “because we are fellow believers in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHM 1 20 xp0b figs-explicit ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα ἐν Χριστῷ 1 refresh my inward parts in Christ How Paul wanted Philemon to refresh him can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “refresh my inward parts in Christ by accepting Onesimus kindly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHM 1 20 j8lh figs-metaphor ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα 1 refresh my inward parts Here, **refresh** is a metaphor for comfort or encourage. Alternate translation: “encourage me” or “comfort me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHM 1 20 kmpp figs-metonymy ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα 1 refresh my inward parts Here, **inward parts** is a metonym for a person’s feelings, thoughts, or inner being. Alternate translation: “encourage me” or “comfort me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 79579802a76fa5c89a93d8224efac485eb0a8e78 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 10:08:24 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 411/446] Replaced hyphens between numbers with en-dashes in completed NT books. --- en_tn_42-MRK.tsv | 46 ++++++++++++------------- en_tn_43-LUK.tsv | 88 ++++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ en_tn_44-JHN.tsv | 4 +-- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 4 +-- en_tn_50-EPH.tsv | 4 +-- en_tn_51-PHP.tsv | 18 +++++----- en_tn_53-1TH.tsv | 68 ++++++++++++++++++------------------- en_tn_54-2TH.tsv | 14 ++++---- en_tn_55-1TI.tsv | 6 ++-- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 12 +++---- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 10 +++--- en_tn_58-PHM.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_60-JAS.tsv | 26 +++++++------- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_63-1JN.tsv | 12 +++---- en_tn_64-2JN.tsv | 4 +-- en_tn_65-3JN.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_66-JUD.tsv | 2 +- 18 files changed, 162 insertions(+), 162 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv index 9be4f792dc..35ad8c3316 100644 --- a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -MRK front intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Mark

1. Introduction (1:1-13)
1. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee
* Early ministry (1:14-3:6)
* Becoming more popular among the people (3:7-5:43)
* Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1-8:26)
1. Progress toward Jerusalem; Jesus repeatedly predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27-10:52)
1. Last days of ministry and preparation for final conflict in Jerusalem (11:1-13:37)
1. The death of Christ and the empty tomb (14:1-16:8)

### What is the book of Mark about?

The Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the Gospels wrote about who Jesus was and what he did during his lifetime. Mark wrote much about how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. He did this to encourage his readers who were being persecuted. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel According to Mark.” They may also choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the book of Mark?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark. Mark was also known as John Mark. He was a close friend of Peter. Mark may not have witnessed what Jesus said and did. Many experts think that Peter the Apostle was the source of what Mark wrote about Jesus.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in ways similar to the ways other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. Jesus often taught by telling parables, stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three of the Gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This phrase could mean a few things:
* The phrase “son of man” can simply be describing that someone’s father is also a human being. Therefore, the person being described is literally a son of a man, a human being.
* The phrase sometimes is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “Son of Man.” This description tells us that the person ascending to the throne of God looked like a human being. This description is different than the first because God gives this Son of Man authority forever. Therefore, the title “Son of Man” became a title for the Messiah.

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### Why does Mark frequently use terms indicating short periods of time?

The Gospel of Mark uses the word “immediately” 42 times. Mark does this to make the events more exciting and vivid. It moves the reader quickly from one event to the next.

### Sabbath/Sabbaths

Often in the culture of the Bible, religious festivals would be written in the plural form of the word instead of a singular form. This occurs in Mark as well. In the ULT, the word should be kept plural, “Sabbaths.” This is simply for the sake of rendering the translated text as close to the original text as possible. In the UST, Sabbaths is changed to singular, Sabbath, to make more sense of the use of the word in its context.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Mark?

Some verses found in older versions of the Bible are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to include these verses. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in the translator’s region that include one or more of these verses, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be surrounded by square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Mark’s Gospel.
* “If any man has ears to hear, let him hear.” (7:16)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:44)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:46)
* “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, ‘He was counted with the lawless ones’” (15:28)

The following passage is not found in the earliest manuscripts. Most Bibles include this passage, but modern Bibles put it in brackets ([]) or indicate in some way that this passage may not have been original to Mark’s Gospel. Translators are advised to do something similar to the modern versions of the Bible.
* “Early on the first day of the week, after he arose, he appeared first to Mary Magdalene, from whom he had cast out seven demons. She went and told those who were with him, while they were mourning and weeping. They heard that he was alive and that he had been seen by her, but they did not believe. After these things he appeared in a different form to two of them, as they were walking out into the country. They went and told the rest of the disciples, but they did not believe them. Jesus later appeared to the eleven as they were reclining at the table, and he rebuked them for their unbelief and hardness of heart, because they did not believe those who saw him after he rose from the dead. He said to them, ‘Having gone into all the world, and preach the gospel to the entire creation. The one having believed and having been baptized will be saved, and the one not having believed will be condemned. These signs will go with the ones believing: In my name they will cast out demons. They will speak in new languages. They will pick up snakes with their hands, and if they drink anything deadly, it will not hurt them. They will lay hands on the sick, and they will get well.’ After the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into heaven and sat down at the right hand of God. The disciples left and preached everywhere, while the Lord worked with them and confirmed the word by the signs that went with them.” (16:9-20)

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -MRK 1 intro c6ep 0 # Mark 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### “You can make me clean”

Leprosy is a disease of the skin. It made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically “clean” or healthy as well as spiritually “clean” or right with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

### “The kingdom of God is near”

Scholars debate whether the “kingdom of God” was present at this time or is something that is still coming or is a combination of both. English translations frequently use the phrase “at hand,” but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase “is coming” and “has come near.”

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 21, 30, 37, 38, 40, 41, and 44. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +MRK front intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Mark

1. Introduction (1:1–13)
1. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee
* Early ministry (1:14–3:6)
* Becoming more popular among the people (3:7–5:43)
* Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1–8:26)
1. Progress toward Jerusalem; Jesus repeatedly predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27–10:52)
1. Last days of ministry and preparation for final conflict in Jerusalem (11:1–13:37)
1. The death of Christ and the empty tomb (14:1–16:8)

### What is the book of Mark about?

The Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the Gospels wrote about who Jesus was and what he did during his lifetime. Mark wrote much about how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. He did this to encourage his readers who were being persecuted. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel According to Mark.” They may also choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the book of Mark?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark. Mark was also known as John Mark. He was a close friend of Peter. Mark may not have witnessed what Jesus said and did. Many experts think that Peter the Apostle was the source of what Mark wrote about Jesus.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in ways similar to the ways other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. Jesus often taught by telling parables, stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three of the Gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This phrase could mean a few things:
* The phrase “son of man” can simply be describing that someone’s father is also a human being. Therefore, the person being described is literally a son of a man, a human being.
* The phrase sometimes is a reference to Daniel 7:13–14. In this passage there is a person described as a “Son of Man.” This description tells us that the person ascending to the throne of God looked like a human being. This description is different than the first because God gives this Son of Man authority forever. Therefore, the title “Son of Man” became a title for the Messiah.

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### Why does Mark frequently use terms indicating short periods of time?

The Gospel of Mark uses the word “immediately” 42 times. Mark does this to make the events more exciting and vivid. It moves the reader quickly from one event to the next.

### Sabbath/Sabbaths

Often in the culture of the Bible, religious festivals would be written in the plural form of the word instead of a singular form. This occurs in Mark as well. In the ULT, the word should be kept plural, “Sabbaths.” This is simply for the sake of rendering the translated text as close to the original text as possible. In the UST, Sabbaths is changed to singular, Sabbath, to make more sense of the use of the word in its context.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Mark?

Some verses found in older versions of the Bible are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to include these verses. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in the translator’s region that include one or more of these verses, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be surrounded by square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Mark’s Gospel.
* “If any man has ears to hear, let him hear.” (7:16)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:44)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:46)
* “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, ‘He was counted with the lawless ones’” (15:28)

The following passage is not found in the earliest manuscripts. Most Bibles include this passage, but modern Bibles put it in brackets ([]) or indicate in some way that this passage may not have been original to Mark’s Gospel. Translators are advised to do something similar to the modern versions of the Bible.
* “Early on the first day of the week, after he arose, he appeared first to Mary Magdalene, from whom he had cast out seven demons. She went and told those who were with him, while they were mourning and weeping. They heard that he was alive and that he had been seen by her, but they did not believe. After these things he appeared in a different form to two of them, as they were walking out into the country. They went and told the rest of the disciples, but they did not believe them. Jesus later appeared to the eleven as they were reclining at the table, and he rebuked them for their unbelief and hardness of heart, because they did not believe those who saw him after he rose from the dead. He said to them, ‘Having gone into all the world, and preach the gospel to the entire creation. The one having believed and having been baptized will be saved, and the one not having believed will be condemned. These signs will go with the ones believing: In my name they will cast out demons. They will speak in new languages. They will pick up snakes with their hands, and if they drink anything deadly, it will not hurt them. They will lay hands on the sick, and they will get well.’ After the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into heaven and sat down at the right hand of God. The disciples left and preached everywhere, while the Lord worked with them and confirmed the word by the signs that went with them.” (16:9–20)

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +MRK 1 intro c6ep 0 # Mark 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2–3, words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### “You can make me clean”

Leprosy is a disease of the skin. It made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically “clean” or healthy as well as spiritually “clean” or right with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

### “The kingdom of God is near”

Scholars debate whether the “kingdom of God” was present at this time or is something that is still coming or is a combination of both. English translations frequently use the phrase “at hand,” but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase “is coming” and “has come near.”

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 12, 21, 30, 37, 38, 40, 41, and 44. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) MRK 1 1 kpq1 writing-newevent ἀρχὴ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This verse introduces the reader to the history of Jesus the Messiah as told by Mark. This functions as an introduction to the entire book of Mark. Use the natural form in your language for beginning the telling of something that actually happened. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent) MRK 1 1 i3bc guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God The words **Son of God** form an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the alternate translation: “who is God’s Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MRK 1 2 fc4t figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ Ἠσαΐᾳ τῷ προφήτῃ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Just as Isaiah the prophet wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ MRK 1 12 yv6v τὸ Πνεῦμα αὐτὸν ἐκβάλλει εἰς τὴ MRK 1 13 k2kt figs-activepassive πειραζόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and all the while Satan tempted him” or “during which time Satan kept trying to persuade him to disobey God” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive) MRK 1 13 siu3 ἦν μετὰ τῶν θηρίων 1 he was with Alternate translation: “Jesus was living among the wild animals” MRK 1 14 q12s figs-activepassive μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην 1 after John was arrested If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But after the governor, Herod, had John arrested” or “But after Herod’s soldiers arrested John” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive) -MRK 1 14 o4oh figs-extrainfo μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην 1 The governor, Herod Antipas, had John arrested and put into prison because John continually rebuked Herod Antipas for his sins. See [6:14-29](../06/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +MRK 1 14 o4oh figs-extrainfo μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην 1 The governor, Herod Antipas, had John arrested and put into prison because John continually rebuked Herod Antipas for his sins. See [6:14–29](../06/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could put this information in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) MRK 1 14 tmh9 grammar-connect-time-background μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδοθῆναι τὸν Ἰωάννην 1 This phrase provides background information that sets the time period for Jesus’ ministry. Jesus did not begin his ministry until John had been arrested. Use the natural form in your language for expressing this information. Alternate translation: “Later, John was arrested. After that,” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background) MRK 1 14 ys3b figs-go ἦλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν 1 Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Also, it might be more natural to indicate that Jesus was returning to Galilee. Alternate translation: “Jesus went back to Galilee” or “Jesus returned to Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) MRK 1 14 ns6b κηρύσσων τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 1 proclaiming the gospel Alternate translation: “telling the people there about the good news” @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ MRK 1 22 kmxf ἐξεπλήσσοντο 1 Alternate translation: “the people MRK 1 23 w7z2 figs-explicit καὶ εὐθὺς ἦν ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ αὐτῶν ἄνθρωπος ἐν πνεύματι ἀκαθάρτῳ 1 The person with the **unclean spirit** is in the **synagogue** while Jesus is preaching. If it would be helpful in your langauge, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “While Jesus was teaching, a man who was controlled by an evil spirit was also in the synagogue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 1 24 ra8g figs-rquestion τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί, Ἰησοῦ Ναζαρηνέ? 1 What to us and to you, Jesus of Nazareth? The demons ask the rhetorical question, **What to us and to you, Jesus of Nazareth** in order to tell let Jesus know that they do not want him to interfere with them and that they desire him to leave them alone. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth, leave us alone! There is no reason for you to interfere with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 1 24 m8gz figs-rquestion ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς 1 Have you come to destroy us? The demons ask the rhetorical question **Have you come to destroy us** in order to urge Jesus not to harm them. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Do not destroy us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 1 24 qsig figs-explicit ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **us** refers to many spirits. Often times in the biblical passages about evil spirits, there are multiple spirits controlling one person (Mark 5:1-20). If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Have you come to destroy all of us evil spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 1 24 qsig figs-explicit ἦλθες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **us** refers to many spirits. Often times in the biblical passages about evil spirits, there are multiple spirits controlling one person (Mark 5:1–20). If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Have you come to destroy all of us evil spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 1 28 hrbh figs-metaphor καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εὐθὺς, πανταχοῦ εἰς ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 The phrase **went out everywhere** means that the story of what just happened in the synagogue spread from person to person until many heard about it throughout the region of Galilee. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “The story about Jesus quickly spread from person to person throughout all of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 1 29 ybs7 figs-go ἦλθον 1 Connecting Statement: Your language may say “went” rather than **came** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) MRK 1 30 bvvl writing-background ἡ…πενθερὰ Σίμωνος κατέκειτο πυρέσσουσα 1 the mother-in-law of Simon was lying down, being sick with a fever This phrase gives background information about Peter’s mother-in-law. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ MRK 1 44 xhu8 figs-explicit σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ 1 s MRK 1 44 w6b2 figs-synecdoche σεαυτὸν δεῖξον 1 show yourself Here, the word **yourself** represents the skin of the leper. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “show your skin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MRK 1 45 i91a figs-metaphor ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν πολλὰ καὶ διαφημίζειν τὸν λόγον 1 began to proclaim often and to spread the word widely Here, **spread the word widely** is a metaphor for telling people in many places about what had happened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “began to tell people in many places about what Jesus had done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 1 45 z363 figs-hyperbole πάντοθεν 1 from all sides The word **all sides** is a hyperbole used to emphasize from how very many places the people came. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from all over the region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MRK 2 intro zhb5 0 # Mark 2 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus heals the paralytic (2:1-12)
1. Jesus tells Levi to follow him (2:13,14)
1. The feast at Levi’s house (2:15-17)
1. Questions about fasting (2:18-22)
1. Picking grain on the Sabbath (2:22-28)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### “Sinners”

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like theft or murder, or they committed sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fasting and feasting

People would fast (not eat food for a longer than usual period of time) when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Rhetorical questions

The Jewish leaders used rhetorical questions to show that they were angry because of what Jesus said and did and that they did not believe that he was God’s Son ([Mark 2:7](../mrk/02/07.md)). Jesus used them to show the Jewish leaders that they were arrogant ([Mark 2:25-26](./25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 12, 14, 17, 18, 25. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +MRK 2 intro zhb5 0 # Mark 2 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus heals the paralytic (2:1–12)
1. Jesus tells Levi to follow him (2:13,14)
1. The feast at Levi’s house (2:15–17)
1. Questions about fasting (2:18–22)
1. Picking grain on the Sabbath (2:22–28)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### “Sinners”

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like theft or murder, or they committed sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fasting and feasting

People would fast (not eat food for a longer than usual period of time) when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Rhetorical questions

The Jewish leaders used rhetorical questions to show that they were angry because of what Jesus said and did and that they did not believe that he was God’s Son ([Mark 2:7](../mrk/02/07.md)). Jesus used them to show the Jewish leaders that they were arrogant ([Mark 2:25–26](./25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10, 12, 14, 17, 18, 25. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) MRK 2 1 ir5j figs-activepassive ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 1 it was heard that he is at home If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “The people there heard that he was staying at his home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 2 1 j6pa grammar-connect-time-background καὶ εἰσελθὼν πάλιν εἰς Καφαρναοὺμ 1 The author tells us that Jesus **entered again** to remind us that he had already been in Capernaum in [1:21](../01/21.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus came a second time to the town called Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) MRK 2 1 afvi figs-explicit ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 1 There is some debate over whose **house** this is. It could possibly be: (1) Peter’s house. Peter’s house functioned as the place to which Jesus always returned when he was in Capernaum. Alternate translation: “He was in Peter’s house” or (2) you could leave it generic and not specify whose house it was. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ MRK 3 13 fatx figs-idiom ἀναβαίνει εἰς τὸ ὄρος 1 Here, ** MRK 3 16 ywli translate-textvariants καὶ ἐποίησεν τοὺς δώδεκα 1 Some manuscripts do not include the words **and he appointed the Twelve**. This is likely original, but some writers decided to leave it out because verse 14 has a similar phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) MRK 3 16 ozli figs-nominaladj τοὺς δώδεκα 1 Mark is using the adjective **Twelve** as a noun to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “his 12 apostles” or “the 12 men whom he had chose to be apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 3 16 rj1c translate-names τοὺς δώδεκα 1 Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case with **the Twelve**, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 3 16 i7tf translate-names καὶ ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα τῷ Σίμωνι, Πέτρον 1 To Simon, also he added the name Peter The word **Simon** is the name of the first man listed. All of the names listed in [3:17-19](../03/17.md) are also names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MRK 3 16 i7tf translate-names καὶ ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα τῷ Σίμωνι, Πέτρον 1 To Simon, also he added the name Peter The word **Simon** is the name of the first man listed. All of the names listed in [3:17–19](../03/17.md) are also names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MRK 3 16 bt0f figs-explicit ἐπέθηκεν ὄνομα τῷ Σίμωνι, Πέτρον 1 In ancient times, people changed their names to show that something about themselves was changing. Here, Jesus changes Peter’s name to show that Peter is now one of his followers and to describe something about him that is important. This also happens in the next verse. If this would be misunderstood, think of something in your language that people do to signify a major change in their lives. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 3 17 n4gy figs-metaphor ὀνόματα Βοανηργές, ὅ ἐστιν υἱοὶ βροντῆς 1 the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder Jesus called the brothers **Sons of Thunder** because they were like **thunder**. Alternate translation: “the name Boanerges, which means ‘Men Who Are Like Thunder’” or “the name Boanerges, which means ‘Thunder Men’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 3 19 r3zs writing-background ὃς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτόν 1 who also betrayed him Mark adds the phrase **who also betrayed him** to tell the reader that **Judas Iscariot** was the one who would betray the Lord. Alternate translation: “who later betrayed Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ MRK 3 33 qe8c figs-rquestion τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ MRK 3 33 iu9r translate-kinship ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου 1 Jesus uses the words **mother** and **brothers** here not to refer to biological relatives but to those whom he loves and who obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) MRK 3 35 dr45 figs-genericnoun ὃς…ἂν ποιήσῃ τὸ θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 whoever may do … this is Here, **whoever** does not refer to any specific person but to any person who does **the will of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whichever person may do the will of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MRK 3 35 yr9i figs-metaphor οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν 1 this is my brother, and sister, and mother This is a metaphor that means Jesus’ disciples belong to Jesus’ spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. Alternate translation: “that person is like a brother, sister, or mother to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 4 intro f5ua 0 # Mark 4 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Mark 4:3-10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14-23.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Parables

The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 13, 35, 36, 37 and 38. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +MRK 4 intro f5ua 0 # Mark 4 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Mark 4:3–10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14–23.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Parables

The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 13, 35, 36, 37 and 38. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) MRK 4 1 i95e grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον ἐμβάντα, καθῆσθαι ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ 1 the sea Jesus **stepped into a boat** because the crowd was so big that, if he had stayed among them, it would have been very difficult for them all to hear him. If this would not be clear in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because the crowd was so large, Jesus went out onto a boat on the water so the crowd could hear his teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) MRK 4 2 h2a9 writing-background καὶ ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοὺς ἐν παραβολαῖς πολλά, καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ 1 Mark provides this background information about Jesus’ actions to help readers understand what happens while Jesus is on the boat. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MRK 4 3 vqh3 figs-parables ἀκούετε! ἰδοὺ, ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων σπεῖραι 1 Listen! Behold, the sower By telling a story, Jesus teaches the crowd about what happens when different people hear what he teaches. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Listen to this story! Behold, a sower went out to sow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) @@ -396,7 +396,7 @@ MRK 6 55 d9k9 περιέδραμον…ἤκουον 1 they ran throughout … MRK 6 56 gi6y ἐτίθεσαν 1 they were putting Here, **they** refers to the people. It does not refer to Jesus’ disciples. MRK 6 56 y6hs figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 the sick The phrase **the sick** refers to sick people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state it explicitly. Alternate translation: “the sick people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 6 56 bqzf figs-parallelism εἰς κώμας, ἢ εἰς πόλεις, ἢ εἰς ἀγροὺς 1 These three phrases mean basically the same thing. The second and third emphasize the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “any village and city, or even in the rural area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MRK 7 intro vq1j 0 # Mark 7 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6-7, which are words quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Hand washing

The Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty, because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people please God by trusting and obeying him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### “Ephphatha”

This is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 18, 32, 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +MRK 7 intro vq1j 0 # Mark 7 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6–7, which are words quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Hand washing

The Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty, because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people please God by trusting and obeying him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### “Ephphatha”

This is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 18, 32, 34. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) MRK 7 1 b9ul writing-newevent καὶ συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καί τινες τῶν γραμματέων, ἐλθόντες ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων 1 are gathering around him This verse introduces a new event that happened some time after the events the story has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MRK 7 2 wd6i figs-extrainfo 0 General Information: The following verses explain the significance of this verse. Since it is explained in the following verses, you do not need to explain its meaning here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) MRK 7 3 mj6u writing-background γὰρ 1 of the elders This verse and the next verse are added to explain why the Jewish leaders did not approve of what Jesus’ disciples were doing. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “They were appalled because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ MRK 7 35 yj4j figs-activepassive ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσ MRK 7 35 gssm figs-idiom ἐλύθη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **the band of his tongue was released** means he became able to speak. Alternate translation: “his tongue was freed and he was able to speak” or “he was able to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 7 36 eb2y figs-ellipsis ὅσον…αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, αὐτοὶ 1 as much as he ordered them This refers to Jesus ordering them not to tell anyone about what he had done. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “the more he ordered them not to tell anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 7 37 dh17 figs-metonymy τοὺς κωφοὺς…ἀλάλους 1 the deaf … the mute The phrase **the deaf** and the phrase **the mute** both refer to groups of people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “deaf people … mute people” or “people who cannot hear … people who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 8 intro ry56 0 # Mark 8 General Notes

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Bread

When Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.

Yeast is the ingredient that causes bread to expand before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### “Adulterous generation”

When Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 2, 6, 12, 17, 19, 20, 22, 29 and 33. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])

### Rhetorical questions

Jesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples [Mark 8:17-21](./17.md) and rebuking the people [Mark 8:12](../mrk/08/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” [Mark 8:35-37](../08/35.md) +MRK 8 intro ry56 0 # Mark 8 General Notes

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Bread

When Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.

Yeast is the ingredient that causes bread to expand before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### “Adulterous generation”

When Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### The historic present

To call attention to a development in the story, Mark uses the present tense in past narration. In this chapter, the historic present occurs in verses 1, 2, 6, 12, 17, 19, 20, 22, 29 and 33. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the past tense in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])

### Rhetorical questions

Jesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples [Mark 8:17–21](./17.md) and rebuking the people [Mark 8:12](../mrk/08/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” [Mark 8:35–37](../08/35.md) MRK 8 1 rmd8 writing-newevent ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 In those days The phrase **In those days** introduces a new event that happened some time after the events in the story that Mark has just related. The story does not say how long after those events this new event happened. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MRK 8 1 sgv6 figs-extrainfo μὴ ἐχόντων τι φάγωσιν 1 Connecting Statement: Following this, Jesus explains why the crowd did not have anything to eat. Since the expression is explained in the next verse, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) MRK 8 3 u3mu grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical καὶ ἐὰν ἀπολύσω αὐτοὺς νήστεις εἰς οἶκον αὐτῶν, ἐκλυθήσονται ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ 1 they will faint Jesus is using a hypothetical situation to bring to the disciples attention the dangers of making the people return home without eating. Alternate translation: “If I should send them to their houses hungry, some of them might collapse on the way home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) @@ -516,7 +516,7 @@ MRK 9 1 xm40 figs-yousingular ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Here, the prono MRK 9 1 kg4x figs-idiom οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 The phrase **taste death** is an idiom which means “to experience death.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning using plain language. Alternate translation: “who will certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 9 1 qloy figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται θανάτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **death** by using the verb form. Alternate translation: “who may certainly not die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 9 1 ymou figs-abstractnouns ἕως ἂν ἴδωσιν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **power** by using an adverb such as “powerfully.” Alternate translation: “before they would see the kingdom of God come powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MRK 9 1 yjf6 figs-explicit τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει 1 the kingdom of God come with power The phrase **the kingdom of God come with power** represents God showing himself as king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this plainly. The phrase **the kingdom of God come with power** probably refers to God powerfully confirming that Jesus is the Messianic king through the transfiguration of Jesus which immediately follows this verse in [9:2-10](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “God powerfully showing himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MRK 9 1 yjf6 figs-explicit τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει 1 the kingdom of God come with power The phrase **the kingdom of God come with power** represents God showing himself as king. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this plainly. The phrase **the kingdom of God come with power** probably refers to God powerfully confirming that Jesus is the Messianic king through the transfiguration of Jesus which immediately follows this verse in [9:2–10](../09/02.md). Alternate translation: “God powerfully showing himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 9 2 uf5f figs-rpronouns κατ’ ἰδίαν μόνους 1 by themselves, alone Mark uses the reflexive pronoun **themselves** here to emphasize that they were alone and that only Jesus, Peter, James, and John went up the mountain. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) MRK 9 2 krt6 translate-unknown μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 he was transfigured before them The word **transfigured** means to be changed in appearance or form. If your readers would not be familiar with the meaning of this word, you could state the meaning of this word in plain language. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ appearance was changed in front of them” or “when they looked at him, his appearance was different from what it had been” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 9 2 b3bb figs-activepassive μετεμορφώθη ἔμπροσθεν αὐτῶν 1 he was transfigured If it would be more natural in your language, you could express the meaning of the phrase **he was transfigured before them** with an active form and say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God changed Jesus’ appearance before them” or “God transfigured Jesus before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -641,7 +641,7 @@ MRK 9 42 gef5 figs-hypo καλόν ἐστιν αὐτῷ μᾶλλον εἰ 1 MRK 9 42 z6k5 translate-unknown μύλος ὀνικὸς 1 a large millstone These **large millstones** were round stones used for grinding grain into flour. They were so heavy that they required a donkey or an ox to turn them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name of an object in your area that is very heavy, or you could use a general expression such as “a very heavy stone,” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 9 42 bx6c figs-explicit περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ 1 The implication is that someone would tie the stone around the person’s neck. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “if someone were to attach a millstone around his neck” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) MRK 9 43 g8dv figs-metonymy ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου 1 if your hand may cause you to stumble Here, **hand** is a metonym for doing, or desiring to do, something sinful with your hand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you want to do something sinful with one of your hands” or “if you are doing something sinful with one of your hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 9 43 ifcv figs-hyperbole ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου, ἀπόκοψον αὐτήν 1 When Jesus says, **if your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off**, he is using exaggeration in order to emphasize the seriousness of sin and the importance of avoiding it. Jesus is not being literal when he says to cut off **your hand**, because Judaism taught against harming one’s body, and Jesus taught in [Mark 7:14-23](../mrk/07/14.md), and elsewhere that the human heart is what causes people to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +MRK 9 43 ifcv figs-hyperbole ἐὰν σκανδαλίσῃ σε ἡ χείρ σου, ἀπόκοψον αὐτήν 1 When Jesus says, **if your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off**, he is using exaggeration in order to emphasize the seriousness of sin and the importance of avoiding it. Jesus is not being literal when he says to cut off **your hand**, because Judaism taught against harming one’s body, and Jesus taught in [Mark 7:14–23](../mrk/07/14.md), and elsewhere that the human heart is what causes people to sin. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MRK 9 43 wd7y figs-explicit εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 Here, the phrase **enter into life** is referring to living eternally with God after one’s life on earth has ended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to enter into eternal life” or “to die and live forever” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) MRK 9 43 h9lh figs-hyperbole κυλλὸν εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 When Jesus speaks of entering into eternal **life maimed**, he is not being literal, but rather, he is using hyperbole in order to emphasize the importance of striving against sin and things that could prevent one from receiving eternal life. The Bible teaches that when people enter into eternal life with God, he will restore their bodies of any physical defects. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify this in a footnote if you are using footnotes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MRK 9 43 l5bf figs-abstractnouns εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **life** in another way. Alternate translation: “to live with God forever” or “live forever with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -662,7 +662,7 @@ MRK 9 50 t76n αὐτὸ ἀρτύσετε 1 will you season it Alternate trans MRK 9 50 f34y figs-metaphor ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα 1 Have salt in yourselves Jesus speaks of doing good things for one another as if good things were **salt**. If it would be helpful in your language to understand what **salt** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “Do good to each other, like salt adds flavor to food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 9 50 syc9 figs-rpronouns ἔχετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἅλα 1 The plural reflexive pronoun **yourselves** is used here to emphasize that Jesus wanted his 12 disciples to apply what he was saying to themselves. Use a form that is natural in your language to indicate this. Alternate translation: “make sure that each of you has salt within yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) MRK 9 50 tind figs-yousingular εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἀλλήλοις 1 The command, **be at peace with one another**, is an instruction to all of Jesus’ 12 disciples. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -MRK 10 intro bq25 0 # Mark 10 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in [Mark10:7-8](../mrk/10/07.md).

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Jesus’ teaching about divorce

The Pharisees wanted to find a way to make Jesus say that it is good to break the law of Moses, so they asked him about divorce. As Jesus tells how God originally designed marriage, he shows that the Pharisees taught wrongly about divorce.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Metaphor

Metaphors are mental pictures of visible objects that speakers use to explain invisible truths. When Jesus spoke of “the cup which I will drink,” he was speaking of the pain he would suffer on the cross as if it were a bitter, poisonous liquid in a cup.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wishes to become great among you must be your servant” ([Mark 10:43](../mrk/10/43.md)). +MRK 10 intro bq25 0 # Mark 10 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in [Mark10:7–8](../mrk/10/07.md).

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Jesus’ teaching about divorce

The Pharisees wanted to find a way to make Jesus say that it is good to break the law of Moses, so they asked him about divorce. As Jesus tells how God originally designed marriage, he shows that the Pharisees taught wrongly about divorce.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Metaphor

Metaphors are mental pictures of visible objects that speakers use to explain invisible truths. When Jesus spoke of “the cup which I will drink,” he was speaking of the pain he would suffer on the cross as if it were a bitter, poisonous liquid in a cup.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wishes to become great among you must be your servant” ([Mark 10:43](../mrk/10/43.md)). MRK 10 1 qq93 figs-explicit ἐκεῖθεν ἀναστὰς, ἔρχεται 1 having gotten up, he goes from that place Jesus’ disciples were traveling with him, and they were leaving Capernaum. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “getting up, Jesus and his disciples left Capernaum and went from that place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 10 1 goki figs-go ἔρχεται 1 Your language may say “comes” rather than **goes** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “he comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) MRK 10 1 j5wa καὶ πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 and the other side of the Jordan River Alternate translation: “and to the land on the other side of the Jordan River” or “and to the area east of the Jordan River” @@ -774,7 +774,7 @@ MRK 10 49 n6xl figs-abstractnouns θάρσει 1 If your language does not use MRK 10 52 s5d2 figs-explicit ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has healed you This phrase is written this way to place emphasis on the man’s **faith**. Jesus heals the man because the man believes that Jesus can heal him. If it would be helpful in your language, this could be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I am healing you because you have believed in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 10 52 bjuw figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the idea behind this word by using a verb such as “trusted,” as modeled by the UST, or by expressing the meaning of **faith** some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 10 52 ub7w figs-abstractnouns ἀνέβλεψεν 1 he was following him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sight**, you can express the idea behind this word by using a verb such as “see,” as modeled by the UST, or by expressing the meaning of **sight** in some other way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MRK 11 intro xg3t 0 # Mark 11 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [Mark 11:9-10](../mrk/11/09.md) and [Mark 11:17](../mrk/11/17.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both; the donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1-7](../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1-7](../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29-36](../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14-15](../jhn/12/14.md)) +MRK 11 intro xg3t 0 # Mark 11 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [Mark 11:9–10](../mrk/11/09.md) and [Mark 11:17](../mrk/11/17.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on a donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that there were both; the donkey had a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in the ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 21:1–7](../mat/21/01.md) and [Mark 11:1–7](../mrk/11/01.md) and [Luke 19:29–36](../luk/19/29.md) and [John 12:14–15](../jhn/12/14.md)) MRK 11 1 ch4j figs-go ἐγγίζουσιν 1 And when they come to Jerusalem, to Bethphage and Bethany, to the Mount of Olives Your language may say “went” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “they went near” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) MRK 11 1 g1fy translate-names Βηθφαγὴ 1 Bethphage The word **Bethphage** is the name of a village. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MRK 11 2 bi22 figs-go ὑπάγετε εἰς τὴν κώμην 1 opposite us Your language may say “Come” rather than **Go** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “Come into the village” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -883,7 +883,7 @@ MRK 11 33 rmbd grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Here, Mark uses the word MRK 11 33 us4a figs-ellipsis οὐκ οἴδαμεν 1 We do not know The reply **We do not know** leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “We do not know where the baptism of John came from” or “We do not know where John’s authority to baptize came from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MRK 11 33 av5y grammar-connect-logic-result οὐδὲ ἐγὼ λέγω ὑμῖν 1 With the words **Neither do I say to you**, Jesus is indicating that this is the result of what the Jewish leaders told him. Alternate translation: “Then I will not tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) MRK 11 33 arpm figs-abstractnouns ἐξουσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “authorized,” as modeled by the UST, or you can express the meaning some other way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MRK 12 intro ne55 0 # Mark 12 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:10-11, 36, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Hypothetical situations

Hypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. People describe these situations so their listeners can imagine them happening and learn lessons from them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### The son of David as Lord

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. In this chapter, Jesus quotes a Psalm that records David calling his son “Lord,” that is, “master.” However, to the Jews, ancestors were greater than their descendants, so a father would not call his son “master.” In this passage, Mark 12:35-37, Jesus is trying to help his hearers understand that the Messiah will be divine, and that he himself is the Messiah. So, David is speaking to his son, that is, his descendant, as the Messiah, and it is appropriate for him to address him as his “Lord.” +MRK 12 intro ne55 0 # Mark 12 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:10–11, 36, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Hypothetical situations

Hypothetical situations are situations that have not actually happened. People describe these situations so their listeners can imagine them happening and learn lessons from them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### The son of David as Lord

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. In this chapter, Jesus quotes a Psalm that records David calling his son “Lord,” that is, “master.” However, to the Jews, ancestors were greater than their descendants, so a father would not call his son “master.” In this passage, Mark 12:35–37, Jesus is trying to help his hearers understand that the Messiah will be divine, and that he himself is the Messiah. So, David is speaking to his son, that is, his descendant, as the Messiah, and it is appropriate for him to address him as his “Lord.” MRK 12 1 w2hb figs-parables καὶ ἤρξατο αὐτοῖς ἐν παραβολαῖς λαλεῖν 1 Connecting Statement: To help the people understand what the Jewish leaders were doing by rejecting him and John the Baptist, Jesus tells a brief story that provides an illustration. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus told the people stories to help them understand better. He began” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MRK 12 1 qa93 writing-participants ἀμπελῶνα ἄνθρωπος ἐφύτευσεν 1 Then Jesus began to speak to them in parables Jesus uses the phrase **A man planted a vineyard** to introduce the main character in the story. Use a natural form in your language for introducing the main character in a story. Alternate translation: “There once was a man who planted a vineyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) MRK 12 1 l2i2 translate-unknown ἐξέδετο αὐτὸν γεωργοῖς 1 leased the vineyard to vine growers As the rest of the story shows, the man rented the vineyard not for regular cash payments, but under an arrangement that entitled him to a share of the crop in exchange for the use of the land. If an arrangement like that would not be familiar to your readers, you could translate this in a way that explains it. Alternate translation: “allowed some grape farmers to use his vineyard in exchange for a share of the crop” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1063,7 +1063,7 @@ MRK 12 44 ihuq ἐκ τοῦ περισσεύοντος αὐτοῖς ἔβα MRK 12 44 ui9a αὕτη δὲ, ἐκ τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς, πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν ἔβαλεν, ὅλον τὸν βίον αὐτῆς 1 abundance Alternate translation: “but she who had only had a very little money gave everything she had to live on” MRK 12 44 l4tp τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὐτῆς 1 her poverty Alternate translation: “her lack” or “the little she had” MRK 12 44 p3as τὸν βίον αὐτῆς 1 of her livelihood Alternate translation: “she had to survive on” -MRK 13 intro ti7d 0 # Mark 13 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:24-25, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The return of Christ

Jesus said much about what would happen before he returned ([Mark 13:6-37](./06.md)). He told his followers that bad things would happen to the world and bad things would happen to them before he returned, but they needed to be ready for him to return at any time. +MRK 13 intro ti7d 0 # Mark 13 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 13:24–25, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The return of Christ

Jesus said much about what would happen before he returned ([Mark 13:6–37](./06.md)). He told his followers that bad things would happen to the world and bad things would happen to them before he returned, but they needed to be ready for him to return at any time. MRK 13 1 rrv1 Διδάσκαλε 1 General Information: See how you translated **Teacher** in [4:38](../4/38.md). MRK 13 1 ql81 figs-explicit ποταποὶ λίθοι καὶ ποταπαὶ οἰκοδομαί 1 What wonderful stones and wonderful buildings Here, **stones** refers to the very large stones with which the temple walls were built. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “How wonderful these huge stones are and how wonderful these buildings are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 13 2 rez6 figs-rquestion βλέπεις ταύτας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδομάς 1 Do you see these great buildings? Stone upon stone may certainly not be left here Jesus is not asking for information, but is using the question form here to draw attention to the buildings and to emphasize what he is about to say. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Look at these great buildings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1151,9 +1151,9 @@ MRK 13 22 yw81 figs-activepassive ἐγερθήσονται 1 to deceive If your MRK 13 22 n81i figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς 1 false Christs See how you translated the phrase **the elect** in [13:20](../13/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MRK 13 23 jq8p figs-metaphor βλέπετε 1 But you, watch out See how you translated the word **watch** in [13:9](../13/09.md) where it is used with a similar meaning. Alternate translation: “pay attention to yourselves” or “be watchful” or “be alert” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 13 23 va6h προείρηκα ὑμῖν πάντα 1 I have told you everything beforehand Alternate translation: “I have told you all these things ahead of time” or “I have told you all these things before they happen” -MRK 13 24 is3h grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **But** shows a contrast between the events Jesus has just described and the events he will describe in [13:24-27](../013/24.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Yet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +MRK 13 24 is3h grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **But** shows a contrast between the events Jesus has just described and the events he will describe in [13:24–27](../013/24.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Yet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) MRK 13 24 vmna figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 See how you translated the word **days** in [13:17](../13/17.md) where it is used with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MRK 13 24 n2rr grammar-connect-time-sequential μετὰ 1 The word **after** indicates that the events Jesus will describe in [13:24-27](../013/24.md) will come after the events just described in [13:14-23](../013/14.md). The word **after** does not express how long it will be before the events of [13:24-27](../013/24.md) take place so you should choose a word or phrase in your language that communicates the sequential meaning of the word **after** but does not limit the time frame. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +MRK 13 24 n2rr grammar-connect-time-sequential μετὰ 1 The word **after** indicates that the events Jesus will describe in [13:24–27](../013/24.md) will come after the events just described in [13:14–23](../013/14.md). The word **after** does not express how long it will be before the events of [13:24–27](../013/24.md) take place so you should choose a word or phrase in your language that communicates the sequential meaning of the word **after** but does not limit the time frame. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) MRK 13 24 mfy8 figs-abstractnouns θλῖψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tribulation**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form such as “suffer” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MRK 13 24 zy2f figs-activepassive ὁ ἥλιος σκοτισθήσεται 1 the sun will be darkened If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Jesus implies that it is “God” who will do it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 13 24 a3qv figs-personification ἡ σελήνη οὐ δώσει τὸ φέγγος αὐτῆς 1 the moon will not give its light Here, the **moon** is spoken of as if it were alive and able to give something to someone else. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the moon will become dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -1204,7 +1204,7 @@ MRK 13 35 v6it figs-metonymy ἀλεκτοροφωνίας 1 Speaking of a **ro MRK 13 35 s8j9 translate-unknown ἀλεκτοροφωνίας 1 when the rooster crows A **rooster** is a large bird, a male chicken, which calls out with a loud sound around the time the sun comes up. If your readers would not be familiar with this bird, you could use the name of a bird in your area that calls out or sings just before dawn, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “when the birds begin to sing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 13 36 mh8t figs-metaphor καθεύδοντας 1 he might find you sleeping Jesus is using the expression **sleeping** to mean “not ready.” If your readers would not understand what it means to be **sleeping** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “unprepared for his return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MRK 13 36 wd97 figs-123person εὕρῃ 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MRK 14 intro uk36 0 # Mark 14 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 14:27, 62, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The meaning of the “body” and “blood” of Jesus

[Mark 14:22-25](./22.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. During this meal, Jesus said of the bread, “This is my body,” and of the wine, “This is my blood of the covenant, which is being poured out for many.” As Jesus instructed, Christian churches around the world re-enact this meal regularly, calling it “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion.” But they have different understandings of what Jesus meant by these sayings. Some churches believe that Jesus was speaking and that he meant that the bread and wine represented his body and blood. Other churches believe that he was speaking literally and that the actual body and blood of Jesus are really present in the bread and wine of this ceremony. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

### The new covenant

Some people think that Jesus established the new covenant during the supper. Others think he established it after he went up to heaven. Others think it will not be established until Jesus comes again. Your translation should say no more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Abba, Father

“Abba” is an Aramaic word that the Jews used to speak to their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds and then translates it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 14:20](../mrk/14/20.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MRK 14 intro uk36 0 # Mark 14 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 14:27, 62, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The meaning of the “body” and “blood” of Jesus

[Mark 14:22–25](./22.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. During this meal, Jesus said of the bread, “This is my body,” and of the wine, “This is my blood of the covenant, which is being poured out for many.” As Jesus instructed, Christian churches around the world re-enact this meal regularly, calling it “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion.” But they have different understandings of what Jesus meant by these sayings. Some churches believe that Jesus was speaking and that he meant that the bread and wine represented his body and blood. Other churches believe that he was speaking literally and that the actual body and blood of Jesus are really present in the bread and wine of this ceremony. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

### The new covenant

Some people think that Jesus established the new covenant during the supper. Others think he established it after he went up to heaven. Others think it will not be established until Jesus comes again. Your translation should say no more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Abba, Father

“Abba” is an Aramaic word that the Jews used to speak to their fathers. Mark writes it as it sounds and then translates it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 14:20](../mrk/14/20.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MRK 14 1 hwb4 writing-background δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Mark uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MRK 14 1 xa8f figs-explicit ἦν δὲ τὸ Πάσχα καὶ τὰ Ἄζυμα μετὰ δύο ἡμέρας. καὶ ἐζήτουν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 During **the Festival of Unleavened Bread** the Jews did not eat bread that was made with yeast. You could translate this phrase as either a description or as a name. Alternate translation: “Now it was two days before the beginning of the Passover and the festival during which the Jews did not eat any bread that was made with yeast. The chief priests and the scribes were seeking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 14 1 ve8f writing-pronouns αὐτὸν ἐν δόλῳ κρατήσαντες, ἀποκτείνωσιν 1 Here, both uses of the pronoun **him** refer to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “they could seize Jesus by stealth and kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1296,7 +1296,7 @@ MRK 14 25 t7ai figs-metonymy ἐκ τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέ MRK 14 25 qyf8 figs-idiom τῆς ἡμέρας 1 Here Jesus uses the term **day** to refer to a particular period of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 14 25 y1pf αὐτὸ πίνω καινὸν, ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 new The word **new** could be referring to: (1) Jesus, and therefore would mean “again” or “in a new way.” See the parallel account in [Luke 22:18](../luk/022/18.md) where Jesus seems to mean this. Alternate translation: “I drink it in a new way in the kingdom of God” or “I drink it anew in the kingdom of God” or “I drink it again when I celebrate the Passover after it is fulfilled when God’s kingdom is consummated” (2) the wine and thus would be referring to drinking a new type or quality of wine. Alternate translation: “I drink new wine” MRK 14 25 ue3j figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [1:15](../1/15.md). If it would be helpful in your language to understand the abstract noun **kingdom**, you could express the idea behind it with a verb such as “rule” as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -MRK 14 26 l996 translate-unknown ὑμνήσαντες 1 having sung a hymn A **hymn** is a song or poem that is sung to praise God. The Jews would traditionally sing a psalm from Psalms 113-118 at the end of the Passover meal, so the **hymn** that Jesus and his disciples sang was likely one of these psalms. If your readers would not be familiar with a **hymn**, you could use the name for religious songs in your culture, if you have them, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “having sung a psalm” or “having sung a song of praise to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MRK 14 26 l996 translate-unknown ὑμνήσαντες 1 having sung a hymn A **hymn** is a song or poem that is sung to praise God. The Jews would traditionally sing a psalm from Psalms 113–118 at the end of the Passover meal, so the **hymn** that Jesus and his disciples sang was likely one of these psalms. If your readers would not be familiar with a **hymn**, you could use the name for religious songs in your culture, if you have them, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “having sung a psalm” or “having sung a song of praise to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MRK 14 27 pu4s λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 Jesus says to them Alternate translation: “Jesus said to his disciples” MRK 14 27 lty4 figs-idiom πάντες σκανδαλισθήσεσθε 1 will fall away Here, **fall away** is an idiom meaning “to desert.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “You will all leave me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 14 27 gkb5 writing-quotations γέγραπται 1 Here, Mark uses **it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament passage of Scripture, ([Zechariah 13:7](../zec/13/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Mark is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it is written in God’s Word” or “it is written by Zechariah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) @@ -1512,15 +1512,15 @@ MRK 15 39 hue4 ἐξέπνευσεν 1 See how you translated the phrase **bre MRK 15 39 ariw ἀληθῶς 1 See how you translated the word **Truly** in [3:28](../03/28.md). Alternate translation: “Certainly” MRK 15 39 nqv8 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς Θεοῦ 1 the Son of God The title **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MRK 15 40 i1ee translate-names Μαρία 1 looking on from a distance The word **Mary** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MRK 15 40 gkgi translate-versebridge ἐν αἷς καὶ Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ, καὶ Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ, καὶ Σαλώμη 1 If it would be more natural in your language to first give background information about these women before listing individual names, you could create a verse bridge by moving this sentence to the end of verse 41. You would then present the combined verses as 40-41, as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge) +MRK 15 40 gkgi translate-versebridge ἐν αἷς καὶ Μαριὰμ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ, καὶ Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ, καὶ Σαλώμη 1 If it would be more natural in your language to first give background information about these women before listing individual names, you could create a verse bridge by moving this sentence to the end of verse 41. You would then present the combined verses as 40–41, as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge) MRK 15 40 zc9b writing-background ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ…ἡ Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ καὶ Ἰωσῆ μήτηρ 1 (the mother of James the younger and of Joses) Because **Mary** was a very common name at this time and because Mark refers to two different women with the name **Mary** in this verse, he provides this background information to help readers know to which **Mary** he is referring in each case. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MRK 15 40 z5ra translate-names Ἰακώβου τοῦ μικροῦ 1 The word **James** is the name a man. This man is probably referred to as **the younger** here to distinguish him from other men named **James**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MRK 15 40 wdrq translate-names Ἰωσῆ 1 The word **Joses** is the name a man. This **Joses** was not the same person as the younger brother of Jesus. See how you translated the same name in [6:3](../06/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MRK 15 40 qa0q translate-names Σαλώμη 1 The word **Salome** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MRK 15 41 j15z writing-background αἳ ὅτε ἦν ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ ἠκολούθουν αὐτῷ καὶ διηκόνουν αὐτῷ 1 When he was in Galilee they were following him and serving him, and many other women who had come up with him to Jerusalem Mark uses the statement **who, when he was in Galilee, were following him and serving him** to give his readers background information about the relationship that the three women mentioned in [15:40](../15/40.md) had with Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MRK 15 41 a3qk figs-go αἱ συναναβᾶσαι 1 who had come up with him to Jerusalem **Jerusalem** was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for people to speak of going **up** to Jerusalem and going down from it. Your language may say “gone up” rather than **come up** in contexts such as this. Use whichever is more natural. Alternate translation: “who had gone up with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -MRK 15 42 ekbl translate-versebridge ἐπεὶ ἦν παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον 1 If it would be more natural in your language to introduce Joseph of Arimathea and what he did before giving the reason for what he did, you could create a verse bridge by moving this sentence to verse 43 and taking the information about Joseph of Arimathea from verse 43 and placing it after the phrase **And when evening had already come** in this verse. You would then present the combined verses as 42-43, as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge) -MRK 15 42 lxm5 writing-background ἤδη ὀψίας γενομένης, ἐπεὶ ἦν παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον 1 Connecting Statement: Mark provides this background information about what day it was to help readers understand what happens in this episode. God commanded in Deuteronomy 21:22-23 that any person who was put to death by hanging on a wooden object should be buried on the same day that they were put to death. Because of this and the fact that **evening had already come** and because the following day was the **Sabbath**, on which Jews did not work, the people involved wanted to bury Jesus’ body quickly. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MRK 15 42 ekbl translate-versebridge ἐπεὶ ἦν παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον 1 If it would be more natural in your language to introduce Joseph of Arimathea and what he did before giving the reason for what he did, you could create a verse bridge by moving this sentence to verse 43 and taking the information about Joseph of Arimathea from verse 43 and placing it after the phrase **And when evening had already come** in this verse. You would then present the combined verses as 42–43, as modeled by the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge) +MRK 15 42 lxm5 writing-background ἤδη ὀψίας γενομένης, ἐπεὶ ἦν παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον 1 Connecting Statement: Mark provides this background information about what day it was to help readers understand what happens in this episode. God commanded in Deuteronomy 21:22–23 that any person who was put to death by hanging on a wooden object should be buried on the same day that they were put to death. Because of this and the fact that **evening had already come** and because the following day was the **Sabbath**, on which Jews did not work, the people involved wanted to bury Jesus’ body quickly. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MRK 15 42 ug97 figs-explicit παρασκευή, ὅ ἐστιν προσάββατον 1 when evening had already come The phrase **the Day of Preparation** refers to the day on which Jews would make preparations for the **Sabbath** so that they would not have to do work on the **Sabbath**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate explicitly what the Day of Preparation was. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Day of Preparation, on which Jews prepared for the Sabbath. The Day of Preparation is the day before the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 15 43 xn8t writing-participants ἐλθὼν Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας, εὐσχήμων βουλευτής, ὃς καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν προσδεχόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ; τολμήσας, εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς τὸν Πειλᾶτον 1 Joseph who was from Arimathea, a respected member of the council who also was himself waiting for the kingdom of God, having come, he boldly went in to Pilate Mark places the phrase **having come** after he gives the background information about Joseph in order to provide emphasis and to help introduce Joseph to the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. Alternate translation: “Joseph of Arimathea was a respected member of the council who also was himself waiting for the kingdom of God. He boldly came to Pilate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) MRK 15 43 wgz8 translate-names Ἰωσὴφ ὁ ἀπὸ Ἁριμαθαίας 1 Joseph who was from Arimathea The word **Joseph** is the name of a man, and the word **Arimathea** is the name of the place that he is from. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1536,7 +1536,7 @@ MRK 15 47 m782 translate-names Ἰωσῆτος 1 of Joses See how you translate MRK 15 47 jvz4 translate-names Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ 1 See how you translated **Mary Magdalene** in [15:40](../15/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MRK 15 47 yexp Μαρία ἡ Ἰωσῆτος 1 See how you translated the phrase “Mary the mother of” in [15:40](../15/40.md). MRK 15 47 v3wu figs-activepassive τέθειται 1 where he was laid If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form, as modeled by the UST, or you can state it in another way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MRK 16 intro j5yz 0 # Mark 16 General Notes

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Mark 15:46](../mrk/15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### A young man dressed in a white robe

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../jhn/20/12.md)) +MRK 16 intro j5yz 0 # Mark 16 General Notes

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Mark 15:46](../mrk/15/46.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### A young man dressed in a white robe

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels were in human form. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1–2](../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../jhn/20/12.md)) MRK 16 1 p61n figs-explicit διαγενομένου τοῦ Σαββάτου 1 And the Sabbath having passed By using the phrase **the Sabbath having passed**, Mark is explaining that the Jewish day of rest, called the **Sabbath**, had ended and that it was now permissible, according to Jewish law, for these women to buy spices. The phrase **the Sabbath having passed** does not mean that the actual day on which the **Sabbath** occurred was over. The Jewish **Sabbath** ended at sunset on Saturday evening. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “when the sun had set on Saturday evening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 16 1 cw1b translate-names ἡ Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ 1 Connecting Statement: See how you translated **Mary Magdalene** in [15:40](../15/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MRK 16 1 fm8u Μαρία ἡ Ἰακώβου 1 See how you translated the phrase **Mary the mother of** in [15:40](../15/40.md). diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv index 6470163901..85c1d3c9eb 100644 --- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -LUK front intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Luke

1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1-4)
2. Prologue
* The birth of John the Baptist (1:5-80)
* The birth and youth of Jesus (2:1-51)
* The ministry of John the Baptist (3:1-20)
* The baptism, genealogy, and temptation of Jesus (3:21-4:13)
3. The teaching and healing ministry of Jesus in Galilee (4:14-9:50)
4. Jesus teaches along his journey to Jerusalem
* Judgment by God, and people’s judgments about Jesus (9:51-13:21)
* Who will be part of the kingdom of God (13:22-17:10)
* Responding to Jesus by welcoming or rejecting him (17:11-19:27)
5. Jesus in Jerusalem
* Jesus’ entry into Jerusalem (19:28-44)
* Jesus teaches in the temple: conflict over his identity and authority (19:45-21:38)
* Jesus’ death, burial, and resurrection (22:1-24:53)

### What is the Gospel of Luke about?

The Gospel of Luke is one of four books in the New Testament that describe the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “Gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Luke wrote his Gospel for a person named Theophilus and dedicated it to him. Luke wrote an accurate description of the life and teachings of Jesus so that Theophilus would be certain that what he had been taught about Jesus was true. However, Luke expected that what he wrote would encourage all followers of Jesus.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Luke” or “The Gospel According to Luke.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Good News About Jesus that Luke Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the book of Luke?

This book does not give the name of its author. However, the same person who wrote this book also wrote the book of Acts, which is also dedicated to Theophilus. In parts of the book of Acts, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person traveling with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have recognized Luke as the author of both the Gospel of Luke and the book of Acts.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. Luke himself probably did not witness what Jesus said and did. But he tells Theophilus in his dedication that he talked to many people who did.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### The kingdom of God

“The kingdom of God” is a major concept in the Gospel of Luke. It is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

### Why does Luke write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?

Luke wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### What are the roles of women in the Gospel of Luke?

Luke described women in a very positive way in his Gospel. For example, he often showed women being more faithful to God than most men. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they tell the story of many of the same events. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

Passages are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three Gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to [Daniel 7:13-14](../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### Major issues in the text of the book of Luke

ULT follows the readings of the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. However, there may already be older versions of the Bible in the translators’ regions that follow the readings of other manuscripts. In the most significant cases, the General Notes to the chapters in which these differences occur will discuss them and recommend approaches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -LUK 1 intro f1b5 0 # Luke 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1-4)
2. The angel Gabriel announces to Zechariah that his wife Elizabeth is going to bear a son, John the Baptist (1:5-25)
3. The angel Gabriel announces to Mary that she is going to become the mother of Jesus (1:26-38)
4. Mary goes to visit Elizabeth (1:39-56)
5. John the Baptist is born (1:57-80)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in Mary’s song about becoming the mother of Jesus in 1:46-55 and Zechariah’s song about the birth of his son John the Baptist in 1:68-79.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “He will be called John”

Most people in the ancient Near East would give a child the same name as someone in their families. People were surprised that Elizabeth and Zechariah named their son John because there was no one else in their family with that name. +LUK front intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Luke

1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1–4)
2. Prologue
* The birth of John the Baptist (1:5–80)
* The birth and youth of Jesus (2:1–51)
* The ministry of John the Baptist (3:1–20)
* The baptism, genealogy, and temptation of Jesus (3:21–4:13)
3. The teaching and healing ministry of Jesus in Galilee (4:14–9:50)
4. Jesus teaches along his journey to Jerusalem
* Judgment by God, and people’s judgments about Jesus (9:51–13:21)
* Who will be part of the kingdom of God (13:22–17:10)
* Responding to Jesus by welcoming or rejecting him (17:11–19:27)
5. Jesus in Jerusalem
* Jesus’ entry into Jerusalem (19:28–44)
* Jesus teaches in the temple: conflict over his identity and authority (19:45–21:38)
* Jesus’ death, burial, and resurrection (22:1–24:53)

### What is the Gospel of Luke about?

The Gospel of Luke is one of four books in the New Testament that describe the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “Gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Luke wrote his Gospel for a person named Theophilus and dedicated it to him. Luke wrote an accurate description of the life and teachings of Jesus so that Theophilus would be certain that what he had been taught about Jesus was true. However, Luke expected that what he wrote would encourage all followers of Jesus.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Luke” or “The Gospel According to Luke.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Good News About Jesus that Luke Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the book of Luke?

This book does not give the name of its author. However, the same person who wrote this book also wrote the book of Acts, which is also dedicated to Theophilus. In parts of the book of Acts, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person traveling with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have recognized Luke as the author of both the Gospel of Luke and the book of Acts.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. Luke himself probably did not witness what Jesus said and did. But he tells Theophilus in his dedication that he talked to many people who did.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### The kingdom of God

“The kingdom of God” is a major concept in the Gospel of Luke. It is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

### Why does Luke write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?

Luke wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### What are the roles of women in the Gospel of Luke?

Luke described women in a very positive way in his Gospel. For example, he often showed women being more faithful to God than most men. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they tell the story of many of the same events. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

Passages are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three Gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to [Daniel 7:13–14](../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### Major issues in the text of the book of Luke

ULT follows the readings of the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. However, there may already be older versions of the Bible in the translators’ regions that follow the readings of other manuscripts. In the most significant cases, the General Notes to the chapters in which these differences occur will discuss them and recommend approaches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK 1 intro f1b5 0 # Luke 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1–4)
2. The angel Gabriel announces to Zechariah that his wife Elizabeth is going to bear a son, John the Baptist (1:5–25)
3. The angel Gabriel announces to Mary that she is going to become the mother of Jesus (1:26–38)
4. Mary goes to visit Elizabeth (1:39–56)
5. John the Baptist is born (1:57–80)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in Mary’s song about becoming the mother of Jesus in 1:46–55 and Zechariah’s song about the birth of his son John the Baptist in 1:68–79.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “He will be called John”

Most people in the ancient Near East would give a child the same name as someone in their families. People were surprised that Elizabeth and Zechariah named their son John because there was no one else in their family with that name. LUK 1 1 qhd9 figs-activepassive περὶ τῶν πεπληροφορημένων ἐν ἡμῖν πραγμάτων 1 concerning the things that have been fulfilled among us If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “about those things that have happened among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 1 1 hyp6 figs-exclusive ἐν ἡμῖν 1 among us Luke dedicates this book to a man named Theophilus. It is no longer known exactly who he was. But since Luke says in [1:4](../01/04.md) that he wants Theophilus to know that the things he has been taught are reliable, it appears that he was a follower of Jesus. So here the word **us** would include him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) LUK 1 2 hud2 figs-metonymy οἱ…αὐτόπται…γενόμενοι 1 who … were eyewitnesses The term **eyewitness** describes someone who saw something happen personally, “with their own eyes.” The term describes such a person by reference to something associated with sight, the eye. Alternate translation: “who … saw these things personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ LUK 1 17 p472 figs-doublet ἐν πνεύματι καὶ δυνάμει Ἠλε LUK 1 17 l022 figs-hendiadys ἐν πνεύματι καὶ δυνάμει Ἠλεία 1 in the spirit and power of Elijah Alternatively, the angel may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The term **power** may tell what kind of **spirit** Elijah had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “in the powerful spirit of Elijah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 1 17 l023 translate-names Ἠλεία 1 Elijah **Elijah** is the name of a man, a great prophet of Israel. It occurs several times in this book. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 1 17 w32h figs-personification ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα 1 to turn the hearts of fathers back to their children The angel speaks of **hearts** as if they were living things that could be turned to go in a different direction. This expression means to change someone’s attitude toward something. Alternate translation: “to make fathers care about their children once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LUK 1 17 qe48 figs-synecdoche ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα 1 to turn the hearts of fathers back to their children The angel uses the relationship between **fathers** and **children** to represent all relationships. Luke relates in [3:10-14](../03/10.md) how John encouraged reconciliation in a variety of different relationships. Alternate translation: “to restore broken relationships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +LUK 1 17 qe48 figs-synecdoche ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα 1 to turn the hearts of fathers back to their children The angel uses the relationship between **fathers** and **children** to represent all relationships. Luke relates in [3:10–14](../03/10.md) how John encouraged reconciliation in a variety of different relationships. Alternate translation: “to restore broken relationships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 1 17 l024 figs-explicit ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα 1 to turn the hearts of fathers back to their children It is assumed that readers will know that this is what the prophet Malachi had said Elijah would do before the Lord came. The implication in context is that John will fulfill this prophecy by using the same empowerment that Elijah had. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to restore broken relationships, just as the prophet Malachi said Elijah would do before the Lord came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 17 l025 figs-explicit ἀπειθεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων 1 to turn … the disobedient to the wisdom of the righteous Gabriel is using the term **wisdom** in the Old Testament sense as a moral term that refers to choosing the way in life that God has shown to be best. The people who make this choice are **righteous**, meaning that God considers them to be living in the right way. Alternate translation: “to lead people who are disobeying God to choose his ways and become people who live right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 1 17 j49j figs-nominaladj ἀπειθεῖς…δικαίων 1 the disobedient … of the righteous Gabriel is using the adjectives **disobedient** and **righteous** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are disobeying God … people who live right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ LUK 1 80 eh9j figs-explicit ἦν ἐν ταῖς ἐρήμοις 1 he was in th LUK 1 80 qu12 ἕως ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ 1 until the day of his public appearance The term **until** does not indicate a stopping point. John continued to live out in the wilderness even after he started preaching publicly. In your translation, be sure that this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “through the time when he began to preach in public” LUK 1 80 ie4l figs-idiom ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ 1 the day of his public appearance Here, Luke uses the term **day** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “the time when he began to preach in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 80 l102 figs-personification πρὸς τὸν Ἰσραήλ 1 to Israel Luke is referring to all of the Israelites as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LUK 2 intro dw6t 0 # Luke 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus is born in the city of Bethlehem (2:1-20)
2. Joseph and Mary dedicate Jesus, and Simeon and Anna speak about him (2:21-40)
3. Jesus goes to Jerusalem with his parents for Passover (2:41-52)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in the song of the angels about Jesus’ birth in 2:14 and in Simeon’s song about Jesus in 2:29-32.

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “his father and mother”

In [2:33](../02/33.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “his father and mother.” ULT follows that reading. Some other ancient manuscripts read “Joseph and his mother.” That reading indicates that Joseph was not the biological father of Jesus, since Mary conceived him as a virgin. However, Joseph was the adoptive father of Jesus, and so the reading “his father and mother” is not incorrect. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading in ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK 2 intro dw6t 0 # Luke 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus is born in the city of Bethlehem (2:1–20)
2. Joseph and Mary dedicate Jesus, and Simeon and Anna speak about him (2:21–40)
3. Jesus goes to Jerusalem with his parents for Passover (2:41–52)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in the song of the angels about Jesus’ birth in 2:14 and in Simeon’s song about Jesus in 2:29–32.

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “his father and mother”

In [2:33](../02/33.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “his father and mother.” ULT follows that reading. Some other ancient manuscripts read “Joseph and his mother.” That reading indicates that Joseph was not the biological father of Jesus, since Mary conceived him as a virgin. However, Joseph was the adoptive father of Jesus, and so the reading “his father and mother” is not incorrect. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading in ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 2 1 c887 writing-newevent ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days This time reference introduces a new event. Alternate translation: “around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 2 1 l103 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days Here, Luke uses the term **days** to refer to a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 2 1 e9m5 writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 it happened that Luke uses this phrase to show that this is the beginning of an account. If your language has a way of showing the start of an account, you may use that in your translation. If not, you may choose not to represent this phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ LUK 2 27 k53l figs-idiom ἦλθεν ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι 1 he came in t LUK 2 27 uqr6 figs-go ἦλθεν…εἰς τὸ ἱερόν 1 he came … into the temple Your language may say “went” in contexts such as this. Alternate translation: “he went … into the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) LUK 2 27 y8la figs-synecdoche εἰς τὸ ἱερόν 1 into the temple Since only priests could enter the **temple** building, this means the **temple** courtyard. Luke is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 2 27 wt3r writing-participants τοὺς γονεῖς 1 the parents This means the parents of Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use their names here. Alternate translation: “Mary and Joseph” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -LUK 2 27 h444 figs-explicit τοῦ ποιῆσαι αὐτοὺς κατὰ τὸ εἰθισμένον τοῦ νόμου περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 for them to do according to the custom of the law concerning him The phrase **to do according to the custom of the law** refers to the ceremony of dedication that Luke described in [2:22-25](../02/22.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to perform the ceremony of dedication that the law of God required” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 2 27 h444 figs-explicit τοῦ ποιῆσαι αὐτοὺς κατὰ τὸ εἰθισμένον τοῦ νόμου περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 for them to do according to the custom of the law concerning him The phrase **to do according to the custom of the law** refers to the ceremony of dedication that Luke described in [2:22–25](../02/22.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to perform the ceremony of dedication that the law of God required” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 2 28 l139 grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 and Luke uses this word to indicate that this event took place after the event he has just described. That is, Simeon took Jesus in his arms after his parents brought him into the temple for the dedication ceremony. Alternate translation: “then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) LUK 2 28 y5g6 writing-pronouns αὐτὸς ἐδέξατο αὐτὸ εἰς τὰς ἀγκάλας 1 he took him into his arms If it would be helpful in your language, you could specify by name the people to whom these pronouns refer. Alternate translation: “Simeon picked up the baby Jesus and held him in his arms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 2 29 l140 figs-declarative νῦν ἀπολύεις τὸν δοῦλόν σου…ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 You are now dismissing your servant in peace Simeon is actually using this statement to make a request. Alternate translation: “Now please let me die in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) @@ -480,7 +480,7 @@ LUK 2 51 zl2q figs-activepassive ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος αὐτοῖ LUK 2 51 ceu3 figs-metaphor διετήρει πάντα τὰ ῥήματα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῆς 1 kept all these things in her heart As in [2:19](../02/19.md), the **heart** here represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “carefully remembered all these things” or “reflected carefully on what all these things meant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 2 52 gb25 figs-abstractnouns Ἰησοῦς προέκοπτεν τῇ σοφίᾳ, καὶ ἡλικίᾳ 1 Jesus was increasing in wisdom and stature If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate the ideas behind the abstract nouns **wisdom** and **stature** with adjectives. These two terms refer to mental and physical growth. Alternate translation: “Jesus steadily became wiser and stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 2 52 y5qk figs-abstractnouns χάριτι παρὰ Θεῷ καὶ ἀνθρώποις 1 in favor with God and people If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **favor** with verbs. The phrase **in favor with God and people** refers to spiritual and social growth. Alternate translation: “God blessed him more and more, and people admired him more and more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LUK 3 intro tkg5 0 # Luke 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. John the Baptist begins preaching and baptizing (3:1-22)
2. The list of Jesus’ ancestors (3:23-38)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 3:4-6, which Luke is quoting from the Old Testament about John the Baptist.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Justice

John’s instructions to the soldiers and tax collectors in Luke 3:12-15 are things that a person who wanted to live rightly would find reasonable and willingly do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and Luke [3:12-15](./12.md))

### Genealogy

A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Such lists were very important in determining who had the right be king, because the king’s authority was usually passed down or inherited from his father. It was also common for other important people to have a recorded genealogy.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Prophecy often involves the use of metaphors to express its meaning. Spiritual discernment is needed for proper interpretation of the prophecy. The prophecy that Luke quotes in 3:4-6 from Isaiah 40:3-5 is an extended metaphor that describes the ministry of John the Baptist. See the individual notes to 3:4-6 for recommendations about how to translate this passage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Herod locked up John in prison”

This statement could cause confusion because Luke says that John was imprisoned, and then he implies that John was still able to baptize Jesus. But Luke makes this statement in anticipation of Herod’s imprisonment of John. It describes something that was still in the future at the time of the other events in the narrative. See the first note to 3:19 for a further explanation. +LUK 3 intro tkg5 0 # Luke 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. John the Baptist begins preaching and baptizing (3:1–22)
2. The list of Jesus’ ancestors (3:23–38)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 3:4–6, which Luke is quoting from the Old Testament about John the Baptist.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Justice

John’s instructions to the soldiers and tax collectors in Luke 3:12–15 are things that a person who wanted to live rightly would find reasonable and willingly do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and Luke [3:12–15](./12.md))

### Genealogy

A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Such lists were very important in determining who had the right be king, because the king’s authority was usually passed down or inherited from his father. It was also common for other important people to have a recorded genealogy.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Prophecy often involves the use of metaphors to express its meaning. Spiritual discernment is needed for proper interpretation of the prophecy. The prophecy that Luke quotes in 3:4–6 from Isaiah 40:3–5 is an extended metaphor that describes the ministry of John the Baptist. See the individual notes to 3:4–6 for recommendations about how to translate this passage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Herod locked up John in prison”

This statement could cause confusion because Luke says that John was imprisoned, and then he implies that John was still able to baptize Jesus. But Luke makes this statement in anticipation of Herod’s imprisonment of John. It describes something that was still in the future at the time of the other events in the narrative. See the first note to 3:19 for a further explanation. LUK 3 1 l167 writing-newevent ἐν ἔτει δὲ πεντεκαιδεκάτῳ τῆς ἡγεμονίας Τιβερίου Καίσαρος 1 in the fifteenth year of the reign of Tiberius Caesar This verse and the beginning of the next one are an extended time reference that introduces a new event. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Everything that the angels and inspired people had said about John and Jesus began to come true during the fifteenth year of the reign of Tiberius Caesar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 3 1 l168 translate-ordinal ἐν ἔτει δὲ πεντεκαιδεκάτῳ 1 in the fifteenth year If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “in year 15” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) LUK 3 1 l169 writing-participants Τιβερίου Καίσαρος 1 Tiberius Caesar As in [2:1](../02/01.md), **Caesar** is the title of the emperor of the Roman Empire. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this explicitly. Alternate translation: “King Tiberius, who ruled the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -588,7 +588,7 @@ LUK 3 36 xit8 translate-names τοῦ Καϊνὰμ, τοῦ Ἀρφαξὰδ, LUK 3 37 qev8 translate-names τοῦ Μαθουσαλὰ, τοῦ Ἑνὼχ, τοῦ Ἰάρετ, τοῦ Μαλελεὴλ, τοῦ Καϊνὰμ 1 of Methuselah, of Enoch, of Jared, of Mahalaleel, of Cainan This is a continuation of the list of Jesus’ ancestors that began in Luke 3:23. Use the same format as you used in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 3 38 ni8x translate-names τοῦ Ἐνὼς, τοῦ Σὴθ, τοῦ Ἀδὰμ, τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 of Enos, of Seth, of Adam, of God This is a continuation of the list of Jesus’ ancestors that began in Luke 3:23. Use the same format as you used in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 3 38 ck3f τοῦ Ἀδὰμ, τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 of Adam, of God Alternate translation: “the son of Adam, whom God created” or “the son of Adam, who was, in a sense, the son of God” -LUK 4 intro r3vy 0 # Luke 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. The devil tempts Jesus in the wilderness (4:1-13)
2. Jesus teaches in the synagogue in Nazareth (4:14-30)
3. Jesus teaches, heals, and drives out demons in Capernaum (4:31-44)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 4:10-11 and 4:18-19, which is quoted from the Old Testamentt.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Jesus was tempted by the devil”

While it is true that the devil actually believed that he could persuade Jesus to disobey God and obey him instead, it is important not to imply in your translation that Jesus would ever really have wanted to obey the devil. +LUK 4 intro r3vy 0 # Luke 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. The devil tempts Jesus in the wilderness (4:1–13)
2. Jesus teaches in the synagogue in Nazareth (4:14–30)
3. Jesus teaches, heals, and drives out demons in Capernaum (4:31–44)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 4:10–11 and 4:18–19, which is quoted from the Old Testamentt.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Jesus was tempted by the devil”

While it is true that the devil actually believed that he could persuade Jesus to disobey God and obey him instead, it is important not to imply in your translation that Jesus would ever really have wanted to obey the devil. LUK 4 1 n1xx writing-newevent Ἰησοῦς δὲ 1 Then Jesus Luke uses this expression to return to the story after providing background information about Jesus’ ancestors. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include a phrase that would provide continuity with the previous episode in the story. Alternate translation: “After John had baptized Jesus, then Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 4 1 l201 translate-names τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 the Jordan **Jordan** is the name of a river. Alternate translation: “the Jordan River” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 4 1 v18k figs-activepassive ἤγετο ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι 1 was led by the Spirit If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Spirit led him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -735,7 +735,7 @@ LUK 4 43 l244 figs-abstractnouns εὐαγγελίσασθαί…τὴν Βασ LUK 4 43 sjy1 figs-metonymy ταῖς ἑτέραις πόλεσιν 1 to other cities Jesus actually means the people who live in these cities. He is describing them by reference to something associated with them, the cities where they live. Alternate translation: “to the people in many other cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 4 43 b45z figs-activepassive ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἀπεστάλην 1 for this I was sent If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is the reason why God sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 4 44 s5mb figs-explicit τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 in Judea Since Jesus is in Galilee in this part of the Gospel of Luke, the term **Judea** here probably refers to the entire region where the Jews lived at that time. Alternate translation: “where the Jews lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 5 intro axr7 0 # Luke 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus calls Peter and his fellow fishermen to be his disciples (5:1-11)
2. Jesus travels to various towns teaching and healing (5:12-26)
3. Jesus calls Levi to be his disciple (5:27-32)
4. Jesus teaches about fasting (5:33-39)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “You will catch men”

Peter, James, and John were fishermen. When Jesus told them that they would catch men, he was using a metaphor to tell them he wanted them to help people believe the good news about him. See the last note to 5:10. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Sinners

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses. But when Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who understand that they are sinners who have disobeyed God can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fasting and feasting

People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or in order to show God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, such as during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Healthy and sick people

To correct the Pharisees, Jesus speaks of healthy people who do not need a doctor. This does not mean that there are people who do not need Jesus. Rather, Jesus was explaining why he spent time with people whom the Pharisees considered to be “sinners.” See the notes to 5:31-32. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Implicit information

In several parts of this chapter, as in other places in the book, Luke does not explain information that his original readers would already have understood. Modern readers might not know some of those things, so they might have trouble understanding all that Luke is communicating. The alternate translations in these notes and the readings in UST often illustrate how that information can be presented so that modern readers will be able to understand these passages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Past events

Parts of this chapter are sequences of events that have already happened. In a given passage, Luke sometimes writes as if the events have already happened while other events are still in progress (even though they are complete at the time he writes). This can cause difficulty in translation by creating an illogical order of events. It may be necessary to make these consistent by writing as if all the events have already happened. +LUK 5 intro axr7 0 # Luke 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus calls Peter and his fellow fishermen to be his disciples (5:1–11)
2. Jesus travels to various towns teaching and healing (5:12–26)
3. Jesus calls Levi to be his disciple (5:27–32)
4. Jesus teaches about fasting (5:33–39)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “You will catch men”

Peter, James, and John were fishermen. When Jesus told them that they would catch men, he was using a metaphor to tell them he wanted them to help people believe the good news about him. See the last note to 5:10. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Sinners

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses. But when Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who understand that they are sinners who have disobeyed God can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fasting and feasting

People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or in order to show God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, such as during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Healthy and sick people

To correct the Pharisees, Jesus speaks of healthy people who do not need a doctor. This does not mean that there are people who do not need Jesus. Rather, Jesus was explaining why he spent time with people whom the Pharisees considered to be “sinners.” See the notes to 5:31–32. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Implicit information

In several parts of this chapter, as in other places in the book, Luke does not explain information that his original readers would already have understood. Modern readers might not know some of those things, so they might have trouble understanding all that Luke is communicating. The alternate translations in these notes and the readings in UST often illustrate how that information can be presented so that modern readers will be able to understand these passages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Past events

Parts of this chapter are sequences of events that have already happened. In a given passage, Luke sometimes writes as if the events have already happened while other events are still in progress (even though they are complete at the time he writes). This can cause difficulty in translation by creating an illogical order of events. It may be necessary to make these consistent by writing as if all the events have already happened. LUK 5 1 zc8q writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 5 1 wsf8 figs-metonymy ἀκούειν τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Here, Luke uses **word** to describe the things that Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “listening to the message Jesus was bringing from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 5 1 p6im translate-names τὴν λίμνην Γεννησαρέτ 1 the lake of Gennesaret **Lake of Gennesaret** is another name for the body of water also known as the Sea of Galilee. Galilee was on the west side of this lake, and the land of Gennesaret was on the east side, so it was called by both names. Some English versions translate this as the proper name of the body of water. Alternate translation: “Lake Gennesaret” or “the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -856,7 +856,7 @@ LUK 5 37 l279 figs-activepassive οἱ ἀσκοὶ ἀπολοῦνται 1 the LUK 5 38 ijm3 ἀσκοὺς καινοὺς 1 new wineskins See how you translated the term **wineskins** in [5:37](../05/37.md). Alternate translation: “fresh leather bags” LUK 5 39 l280 figs-ellipsis οὐδεὶς πιὼν παλαιὸν θέλει νέον 1 No one, after drinking the old, wants the new Jesus is leaving out some of the words. You may want to supply these words in your translation if not having them would be confusing in your language. Alternate translation: “No one who is used to drinking old wine wants to try new wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 5 39 pvn9 figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς πιὼν παλαιὸν θέλει νέον 1 No one, after drinking the old, wants the new Jesus is contrasting the old teaching of the religious leaders with his own new teaching. The point is that people who are used to the old teaching are not receptive to the new things that he is bringing. Jesus does not explain the metaphor, so you do not need to explain it in your translation unless you think your readers will not understand it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 6 intro vv2y 0 # Luke 6 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about the Sabbath (6:1-11)
2. Jesus chooses twelve apostles (6:12-16)
3. Jesus teaches about being his disciple (6:17-49)

The long teaching in Luke 6:20-49 begins with blessings and woes that are similar to the beginning of the long teaching in Matthew 5-7. That part of Matthew has traditionally been called the “Sermon on the Mount.” The teaching here in Luke has many other similarities with the one in Matthew’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Eating the grain”

When the disciples plucked and ate the grain in a field they were walking through on the Sabbath (Luke 6:1), the Pharisees said that they were breaking the law of Moses. The Pharisees said this because they thought that the disciples were doing work by picking the grain, and so they were disobeying God’s command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees did not think the disciples were stealing. That is because the law of Moses told farmers to allow travelers to pluck and eat small amounts of grain from plants in fields that they traveled through or near. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

The man whom Luke calls Judas the son of James is probably the same man whom Matthew and Mark call Thaddaeus. However, you do not need to explain that in your translation or give both names. You can translate Luke’s list as he wrote it, and allow Bible teachers to explain the reason for the difference. +LUK 6 intro vv2y 0 # Luke 6 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about the Sabbath (6:1–11)
2. Jesus chooses twelve apostles (6:12–16)
3. Jesus teaches about being his disciple (6:17–49)

The long teaching in Luke 6:20–49 begins with blessings and woes that are similar to the beginning of the long teaching in Matthew 5–7. That part of Matthew has traditionally been called the “Sermon on the Mount.” The teaching here in Luke has many other similarities with the one in Matthew’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Eating the grain”

When the disciples plucked and ate the grain in a field they were walking through on the Sabbath (Luke 6:1), the Pharisees said that they were breaking the law of Moses. The Pharisees said this because they thought that the disciples were doing work by picking the grain, and so they were disobeying God’s command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees did not think the disciples were stealing. That is because the law of Moses told farmers to allow travelers to pluck and eat small amounts of grain from plants in fields that they traveled through or near. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

The man whom Luke calls Judas the son of James is probably the same man whom Matthew and Mark call Thaddaeus. However, you do not need to explain that in your translation or give both names. You can translate Luke’s list as he wrote it, and allow Bible teachers to explain the reason for the difference. LUK 6 1 c4sa writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 6 1 x5zk translate-unknown σπορίμων 1 the grainfields These were large sections of land where people had scattered wheat seed in order to grow more wheat. Wheat is a kind of **grain** plant, and **grain** is a type of large grass that has edible seeds. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of plant, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “the areas where people were growing plants with edible seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 6 1 rl46 translate-unknown στάχυας 1 heads of grain The **heads** are the topmost part of the **grain** plant. They hold the mature, edible seeds. Alternate translation: “parts that held the seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1042,7 +1042,7 @@ LUK 6 49 yu5r translate-unknown ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν χωρὶς θεμελ LUK 6 49 bs8c ᾗ προσέρρηξεν ὁ ποταμός 1 against which the torrent of water flowed In this context, the word **flowed** indicates violent impact. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The floodwaters crashed against it” LUK 6 49 q98t συνέπεσεν 1 collapsed Alternate translation: “it fell down” or “it came apart” LUK 6 49 jm86 ἐγένετο τὸ ῥῆγμα τῆς οἰκίας ἐκείνης μέγα 1 the ruin of that house was great Your language may require you to say what was responsible for the **ruin** of the **house**. Alternate translation: “the floodwaters completely demolished that house” -LUK 7 intro u8gj 0 # Luke 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus does miracles in Capernaum and Nain (7:1-17)
2. Jesus responds to messengers from John the Baptist and then teaches about John (7:18-35)
3. A woman anoints Jesus with perfume (7:36-50)

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. ULT does this with the quoted material in 7:27.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Centurion

A centurion was a Roman military commander. The centurion who asked Jesus to heal his slave (Luke 7:2) was doing some unusual things. A Roman soldier, especially an officer, would almost never go to a Jew for help, and most wealthy people did not love or care for their slaves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/centurion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### John’s Baptism

This chapter refers again to the baptism of John (7:29). John baptized people who wanted to show that they knew they were sinners and that they were sorry for their sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### “Sinners”

In 7:34, Jesus describes how the Pharisees said he was a friend of “sinners.” That was the name that the Pharisees used for people whom they thought were disobeying the law of Moses. In reality, it was the Pharisees who were sinful, since they rejected Jesus, the Savior whom God had sent. This situation can be understood as irony. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Washing feet

The feet of the people in the ancient Near East were very dirty because they wore sandals and the roads and trails were dusty in the dry season and muddy in the wet season. Only slaves washed other people’s feet. The woman who washed Jesus’ feet was showing him great honor. +LUK 7 intro u8gj 0 # Luke 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus does miracles in Capernaum and Nain (7:1–17)
2. Jesus responds to messengers from John the Baptist and then teaches about John (7:18–35)
3. A woman anoints Jesus with perfume (7:36–50)

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. ULT does this with the quoted material in 7:27.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Centurion

A centurion was a Roman military commander. The centurion who asked Jesus to heal his slave (Luke 7:2) was doing some unusual things. A Roman soldier, especially an officer, would almost never go to a Jew for help, and most wealthy people did not love or care for their slaves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/centurion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### John’s Baptism

This chapter refers again to the baptism of John (7:29). John baptized people who wanted to show that they knew they were sinners and that they were sorry for their sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### “Sinners”

In 7:34, Jesus describes how the Pharisees said he was a friend of “sinners.” That was the name that the Pharisees used for people whom they thought were disobeying the law of Moses. In reality, it was the Pharisees who were sinful, since they rejected Jesus, the Savior whom God had sent. This situation can be understood as irony. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Washing feet

The feet of the people in the ancient Near East were very dirty because they wore sandals and the roads and trails were dusty in the dry season and muddy in the wet season. Only slaves washed other people’s feet. The woman who washed Jesus’ feet was showing him great honor. LUK 7 1 l343 figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα αὐτοῦ 1 his words Luke is using the term **words** to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. Alternate translation: “his teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 7 1 zi6w figs-idiom εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς τοῦ λαοῦ 1 in the hearing of the people This phrase is an idiom. Alternate translation: “as the people were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 7 1 l2zp writing-newevent εἰσῆλθεν εἰς Καφαρναούμ 1 he entered into Capernaum This reference to a location, **Capernaum**, introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “he went into the city of Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -1217,7 +1217,7 @@ LUK 7 49 ie4z figs-rquestion τίς οὗτός ἐστιν ὃς καὶ ἁμ LUK 7 50 lje8 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “you have trusted in God, and God has saved you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 7 50 l398 figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you Jesus speaks of the woman’s **faith** as if it had actively **saved** her. He means that it provided the conditions for her to receive salvation from God. Alternate translation: “you have trusted in God, and God has saved you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 7 50 sp2u figs-explicit πορεύου εἰς εἰρήνην 1 Go in peace This was a way of saying goodbye while giving a blessing at the same time. It also reassured the woman, despite the disapproval of the religious leaders. Alternate translation: “May God give you peace as you go” or “You may go now, and do not worry about your sins anymore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 8 intro ba3i 0 # Luke 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches the crowds with parables (8:1-21)
2. Jesus calms a storm on the Sea of Galilee (8:22-25)
3. Jesus drives out many demons from a man (8:26-39)
4. Jesus heals a woman and restores a dead girl to life (8:40-55)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Miracles

In this chapter, Jesus makes a storm stop by speaking to it, he makes a dead girl alive by speaking to her, and he makes evil spirits leave a man by speaking to them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Parables

Parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people who wanted to believe in him could easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. But people who did not want to believe in him would not be able to understand the message (Luke 8:4-15).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Brothers and sisters

Most people use the terms “brother” and “sister” for those who have the same parents as they do. They think of them as some of the most important people in their lives. Some people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter, Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “having spent all her living on doctors”

In [8:43](../08/43.md), some ancient manuscripts of the Bible have the phrase “having spent all her living on doctors,” but other manuscripts do not. ULT includes the phrase in its text, but it mentions in a footnote that scholars are divided as to whether it was an original part of the book of Luke. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to include the phrase if it does, but leave it out if it does not include it. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK 8 intro ba3i 0 # Luke 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches the crowds with parables (8:1–21)
2. Jesus calms a storm on the Sea of Galilee (8:22–25)
3. Jesus drives out many demons from a man (8:26–39)
4. Jesus heals a woman and restores a dead girl to life (8:40–55)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Miracles

In this chapter, Jesus makes a storm stop by speaking to it, he makes a dead girl alive by speaking to her, and he makes evil spirits leave a man by speaking to them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Parables

Parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people who wanted to believe in him could easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. But people who did not want to believe in him would not be able to understand the message (Luke 8:4–15).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Brothers and sisters

Most people use the terms “brother” and “sister” for those who have the same parents as they do. They think of them as some of the most important people in their lives. Some people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter, Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “having spent all her living on doctors”

In [8:43](../08/43.md), some ancient manuscripts of the Bible have the phrase “having spent all her living on doctors,” but other manuscripts do not. ULT includes the phrase in its text, but it mentions in a footnote that scholars are divided as to whether it was an original part of the book of Luke. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to include the phrase if it does, but leave it out if it does not include it. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 8 1 i6mi writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 8 1 l399 figs-idiom κατὰ πόλιν καὶ κώμην 1 through city and village This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “around to different cities and villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 8 1 l401 figs-abstractnouns τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the kingdom of God See how you decided to translate this phrase in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “how God would rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1419,7 +1419,7 @@ LUK 8 54 e7zt writing-pronouns αὐτὸς…κρατήσας τῆς χειρ LUK 8 54 l469 figs-imperative ἔγειρε 1 arise This was not a command that the girl was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused her to be raised from the dead. Alternate translation: “your life is restored, so get up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 8 55 k6w2 figs-explicit ἐπέστρεψεν τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτῆς 1 her spirit returned The people of this time considered life to be the result of the spirit coming into a person. You could express this in the way that would be most meaningful in your culture. Alternate translation: “she started breathing again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 8 56 c6mp μηδενὶ εἰπεῖν 1 to tell no one If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the verb negative and the subject positive. Alternate translation: “not to tell anyone” -LUK 9 intro uc1r 0 # Luke 9 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus sends his 12 apostles to teach and heal (9:1-9)
2. Jesus miraculously feeds 5,000 people (9:10-17)
3. Jesus speaks with his disciples about who he is (9:18-27)
4. The glory of Jesus is revealed on a mountaintop (9:28-36)
5. Jesus drives a demon out of a boy (9:37-43)
6. Jesus speaks about being his disciple (9:44-50)
7. Jesus begins to travel to Jerusalem (9:51-62)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elijah

God had promised the Jews that the prophet Elijah would return before the Messiah came. So some people who saw Jesus do miracles thought Jesus was Elijah (9:9, 9:19). He was not. However, Elijah did come to earth to speak with Jesus (9:30). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/elijah]])

### Glory

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Luke says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Whoever would save his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life for my sake will save it” (9:24).

### “Receiving”

This word appears several times in this chapter and means different things. When Jesus says, “If someone receives a little child like this in my name, he also is receiving me, and if someone receives me, he is also receiving the one who sent me” (9:48), he is speaking of people serving the child. When Luke says, “the people there did not receive him” (9:53), he means that the people did not believe in or accept Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) +LUK 9 intro uc1r 0 # Luke 9 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus sends his 12 apostles to teach and heal (9:1–9)
2. Jesus miraculously feeds 5,000 people (9:10–17)
3. Jesus speaks with his disciples about who he is (9:18–27)
4. The glory of Jesus is revealed on a mountaintop (9:28–36)
5. Jesus drives a demon out of a boy (9:37–43)
6. Jesus speaks about being his disciple (9:44–50)
7. Jesus begins to travel to Jerusalem (9:51–62)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elijah

God had promised the Jews that the prophet Elijah would return before the Messiah came. So some people who saw Jesus do miracles thought Jesus was Elijah (9:9, 9:19). He was not. However, Elijah did come to earth to speak with Jesus (9:30). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/elijah]])

### Glory

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Luke says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Whoever would save his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life for my sake will save it” (9:24).

### “Receiving”

This word appears several times in this chapter and means different things. When Jesus says, “If someone receives a little child like this in my name, he also is receiving me, and if someone receives me, he is also receiving the one who sent me” (9:48), he is speaking of people serving the child. When Luke says, “the people there did not receive him” (9:53), he means that the people did not believe in or accept Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) LUK 9 1 l470 figs-nominaladj συνκαλεσάμενος…τοὺς δώδεκα 1 when he had called the Twelve together See how you translated this phrase in [8:1](../08/01.md). You may have decided to translate the nominal adjective **the Twelve** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “when he had called together his 12 apostles” or “when he had called together the 12 men whom he had appointed to be apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 9 1 l471 translate-names τοὺς δώδεκα 1 the Twelve You may have decided instead in [8:1](../08/01.md) to translate this as a title, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns. If so, you can do the same thing here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 9 1 zqq6 figs-doublet δύναμιν καὶ ἐξουσίαν 1 power and authority **Power** and **authority** mean similar things. Luke uses them together to show that Jesus gave his 12 disciples both the ability and the right to heal people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this phrase with a combination of words that includes both of these ideas. Alternate translation: “the right to use power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -1447,7 +1447,7 @@ LUK 9 7 z45t writing-background δὲ Ἡρῴδης 1 And Herod This phrase mar LUK 9 7 s2k4 translate-unknown Ἡρῴδης ὁ τετράρχης 1 Herod the tetrarch See how you translated the term **tetrarch** in [3:1](../03/01.md) Alternate translation: “Herod, who ruled the region of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 9 7 c4vy διηπόρει 1 he was perplexed Alternate translation: “he was confused” or “he could not understand” LUK 9 7 tcp1 figs-activepassive διὰ τὸ λέγεσθαι ὑπό τινων 1 because it was said by some If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “because some people were saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 9 7 l477 figs-explicit ὅτι Ἰωάννης ἠγέρθη ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 that John had risen from the dead Luke reports in [3:20](../03/20.md) that Herod put John in prison. When John sends messengers to Jesus in [7:18-19](../07/18.md), he does this from prison. But by this point in the story, John is dead, because Herod has executed him. Luke assumes that his readers will know that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could tell them explicitly. Alternate translation: “that John the Baptist, whom Herod had executed, had risen from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 9 7 l477 figs-explicit ὅτι Ἰωάννης ἠγέρθη ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 that John had risen from the dead Luke reports in [3:20](../03/20.md) that Herod put John in prison. When John sends messengers to Jesus in [7:18–19](../07/18.md), he does this from prison. But by this point in the story, John is dead, because Herod has executed him. Luke assumes that his readers will know that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could tell them explicitly. Alternate translation: “that John the Baptist, whom Herod had executed, had risen from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 9 7 l478 figs-explicit Ἰωάννης 1 John Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to John the Baptist. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 9 8 l479 figs-ellipsis ὑπό τινων δὲ, ὅτι Ἠλείας ἐφάνη 1 and by some that Elijah had appeared The expression **it was said** carries forward from the previous verse and applies to this phrase. Alternate translation: “and it was said by some that Elijah had appeared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 9 8 l480 figs-activepassive ἄλλων δὲ, ὅτι προφήτης τις τῶν ἀρχαίων ἀνέστη 1 and by some that Elijah had appeared If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and some people were saying that Elijah had appeared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1622,7 +1622,7 @@ LUK 9 62 l548 figs-synecdoche οὐδεὶς ἐπιβαλὼν τὴν χεῖ LUK 9 62 l553 translate-unknown οὐδεὶς ἐπιβαλὼν τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἄροτρον 1 No one, having put his hand on a plow A **plow** is a tool that farmers use to break up soil to prepare a field for planting. Plows have sharp, pointed prongs that dig into the soil. They usually have handles that the farmer uses to guide the plow. If your readers would not be familiar with this kind of tool, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “No one who needs to go straight forward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 9 62 l549 figs-explicit βλέπων εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω 1 looking to the things behind The implication is that anyone who is looking backwards while plowing cannot guide the plow where it needs to go. That person must focus on looking forward in order to plow well. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “looking backwards, and so not going in the right direction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 9 62 l550 figs-abstractnouns εὔθετός ἐστιν τῇ Βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 is fit for the kingdom of God See how you decided to translate the phrase **the kingdom of God** in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “can really let God rule his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LUK 10 intro z899 0 # Luke 10 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus sends seventy-two disciples to teach and heal (10:1-24)
2. Jesus tells the Parable of the Good Samaritan (10:25-37)
3. Jesus visits Mary and Martha (10:38-43)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Harvest

Harvest refers to the time when people gather in the food they have planted so they can eat some of it right away and store the rest for future use. Jesus uses this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about him so that those people can become part of God’s kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Neighbor

The Jews helped their Jewish neighbors who needed help, and they expected their Jewish neighbors to help them. Jesus wanted them to understand that people who were not Jews were also their neighbors, so he told them a story about this (10:29-37). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “72”

In 10:1 and 10:17, some ancient manuscripts of the Bible read “72,” but others read “70.” ULT reads “72,” but it mentions in a footnote that scholars are divided as to which number was originally in the book of Luke.

### “Jesus”

In 10:39, many of the best ancient manuscripts read “Jesus,” but some read “the Lord.” ULT reads “Jesus.”

In both of these cases, if a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK 10 intro z899 0 # Luke 10 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus sends seventy-two disciples to teach and heal (10:1–24)
2. Jesus tells the Parable of the Good Samaritan (10:25–37)
3. Jesus visits Mary and Martha (10:38–43)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Harvest

Harvest refers to the time when people gather in the food they have planted so they can eat some of it right away and store the rest for future use. Jesus uses this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about him so that those people can become part of God’s kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Neighbor

The Jews helped their Jewish neighbors who needed help, and they expected their Jewish neighbors to help them. Jesus wanted them to understand that people who were not Jews were also their neighbors, so he told them a story about this (10:29–37). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “72”

In 10:1 and 10:17, some ancient manuscripts of the Bible read “72,” but others read “70.” ULT reads “72,” but it mentions in a footnote that scholars are divided as to which number was originally in the book of Luke.

### “Jesus”

In 10:39, many of the best ancient manuscripts read “Jesus,” but some read “the Lord.” ULT reads “Jesus.”

In both of these cases, if a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 10 1 u8l6 writing-newevent μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα 1 And after these things Luke uses this phrase to mark a new event in the story. If your language has a similar expression that it uses for this same purpose, you could use that here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 10 1 l551 ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord Here Luke refers to Jesus by the title **the Lord** to show his authority. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” LUK 10 1 m75c translate-textvariants ἑβδομήκοντα δύο 1 72 See the discussion of textual issues at the end of the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to say **72** or “70” in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) @@ -1819,7 +1819,7 @@ LUK 10 42 hqt4 figs-hyperbole ἑνός δέ ἐστιν χρεία 1 but one th LUK 10 42 l632 figs-explicit ἑνός δέ ἐστιν χρεία 1 but one thing is necessary The implication is that this most important thing is what Jesus is teaching about God, and that Martha should have been concentrating on that. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “but one thing, what I am teaching about God, is more important than all the others, and you should have been concentrating on that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 10 42 l633 Μαριὰμ…τὴν ἀγαθὴν μερίδα ἐξελέξατο 1 Mary has chosen the good part While Jesus spoke just earlier about “one thing” as opposed to “many things,” here he seems to contrast only two things, **the good part** with another part, perhaps not “the bad part,” but at least the part that is not to be preferred. This likely refers to the two activities that Mary and Martha have chosen to pursue while Jesus is present in their home. Alternate translation: “Mary has chosen the better activity” LUK 10 42 nzn8 figs-activepassive ἥτις οὐκ ἀφαιρεθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτῆς 1 which will not be taken away from her If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. This could mean: (1) “I will not take that opportunity away from her.” (2) “God will not let her lose what she has gained from listening to me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 11 intro j6le 0 # Luke 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about prayer (11:1-13)
2. Jesus teaches about driving out demons and other subjects (11:14-36)
3. Jesus criticizes the Pharisees and experts in the law (11:37-54)

ULT sets the lines in 11:2-4 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are a special prayer.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Lord’s Prayer

When Jesus’ followers asked him to teach them how to pray, he taught them this prayer. He did not expect them to use the same words every time they prayed, but he did want them to know what God wanted them to pray about.

### Jonah

Jonah was an Old Testament prophet whom God sent to the Gentile city of Nineveh to tell the people there to repent. When he went and preached to them, they did repent. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, that is, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. The Bible speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, that is, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Washing

The Pharisees would wash themselves and the things they ate with. They would even wash things that were not dirty. The law of Moses did not tell them to wash those things, but they would wash them anyway. They did that because they thought that if they obeyed both the rules that God had made and some rules that their ancestors had added, God would think that they were better people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### Bread and stone, fish and snake

In 11:11, some ancient manuscripts have a longer reading, which also is found in Matthew 7:9. It says, “Which father among you, if your son asks for a loaf of bread, will give him a stone? Or a fish, will give him a snake?” ULT uses the shorter reading, which mentions just the fish and snake. This shorter reading is well attested to in many other ancient manuscripts. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to follow its reading. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK 11 intro j6le 0 # Luke 11 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about prayer (11:1–13)
2. Jesus teaches about driving out demons and other subjects (11:14–36)
3. Jesus criticizes the Pharisees and experts in the law (11:37–54)

ULT sets the lines in 11:2–4 farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text because they are a special prayer.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Lord’s Prayer

When Jesus’ followers asked him to teach them how to pray, he taught them this prayer. He did not expect them to use the same words every time they prayed, but he did want them to know what God wanted them to pray about.

### Jonah

Jonah was an Old Testament prophet whom God sent to the Gentile city of Nineveh to tell the people there to repent. When he went and preached to them, they did repent. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, that is, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. The Bible speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, that is, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Washing

The Pharisees would wash themselves and the things they ate with. They would even wash things that were not dirty. The law of Moses did not tell them to wash those things, but they would wash them anyway. They did that because they thought that if they obeyed both the rules that God had made and some rules that their ancestors had added, God would think that they were better people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### Bread and stone, fish and snake

In 11:11, some ancient manuscripts have a longer reading, which also is found in Matthew 7:9. It says, “Which father among you, if your son asks for a loaf of bread, will give him a stone? Or a fish, will give him a snake?” ULT uses the shorter reading, which mentions just the fish and snake. This shorter reading is well attested to in many other ancient manuscripts. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to follow its reading. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 11 1 fl3j writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 11 1 l635 figs-explicit Ἰωάννης 1 John This disciple is referring to John the Baptist. you could state that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 11 2 n3pz guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ 1 Father Jesus is commanding the disciples to honor the name of God the Father by addressing him as **Father** when praying to him. This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -1969,7 +1969,7 @@ LUK 11 33 ht3v translate-unknown κρύπτην 1 a hidden place This expression LUK 11 33 l699 translate-unknown τὸν μόδιον 1 the measure The term **the measure** refers to a container for dry material that had a capacity of about eight liters or about two gallons. You can represent the term in your translation with the name of a corresponding container in your culture. Alternate translation: “a basket” or “a bowl” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 11 33 hz46 figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν 1 but on the lampstand If it would be helpful to your readers, you could supply the understood subject and verb in this clause. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Instead, a person places a lighted lamp on a lampstand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 11 34 n1pg figs-metaphor ὁ λύχνος τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου 1 The lamp of the body is your eye The **eye** is a **lamp** in a figurative sense. It is not a source of light, but a channel of light. Alternate translation: “Your eye lets light into your body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 11 34 l700 figs-youcrowd σου 1 your Even though Jesus is speaking to the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation, so **your** and **you** are singular in [11:34-36](../11/34.md). But if the singular form of these pronouns would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) +LUK 11 34 l700 figs-youcrowd σου 1 your Even though Jesus is speaking to the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation, so **your** and **you** are singular in [11:34–36](../11/34.md). But if the singular form of these pronouns would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) LUK 11 34 rm2n figs-exmetaphor ὅταν ὁ ὀφθαλμός σου ἁπλοῦς ᾖ, καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμά σου φωτεινόν ἐστιν 1 When your eye is healthy, your whole body is also illuminated Jesus is drawing an extended comparison between physical vision and spiritual receptivity. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the comparison. Alternate translation: “When your eye is healthy, it lets light into your whole body. In the same way, if you are willing to obey God, you will understand and live by his message for every part of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) LUK 11 34 td49 figs-exmetaphor ἐπὰν δὲ πονηρὸς ᾖ, καὶ τὸ σῶμά σου σκοτεινόν 1 But when it is bad, your body is also dark Jesus continues to draw an extended comparison between physical vision and spiritual receptivity. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the comparison. Alternate translation: “But when your eye is unhealthy, it does not let light into any of your body. In the same way, if you are not willing to obey God, you will not understand and live by his message for any part of your life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) LUK 11 34 l701 ἐπὰν δὲ πονηρὸς ᾖ 1 But when it is bad In this context, Jesus is using the term **evil** to contrast with **healthy**, so it means “unhealthy.” Alternate translation: “But when your eye is unhealthy” @@ -2042,7 +2042,7 @@ LUK 11 52 fj7x figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰσήλθατε, καὶ LUK 11 53 mld3 writing-endofstory κἀκεῖθεν ἐξελθόντος αὐτοῦ 1 After he went out from there In this verse and the next verse, Luke comments on what happened as a result of the episode he has just related. Alternate translation: “After Jesus left the Pharisee’s house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) LUK 11 54 mr32 figs-metaphor ἐνεδρεύοντες αὐτὸν θηρεῦσαί τι ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 lying in wait for him to trap something from his mouth Luke speaks of the scribes and Pharisees trying to find grounds to accuse Jesus as if they were hunters hiding behind cover in order to catch an animal. Luke then speaks of what Jesus was saying as if it were the animal that these hunters were trying to catch. Alternate translation: “listening carefully to Jesus to see if they could use something he said to accuse him of teaching the wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 11 54 l729 figs-metonymy τι ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 something from his mouth Luke describes what Jesus was saying by association with his **mouth**, by which he spoke these things. Alternate translation: “something he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 12 intro jun3 0 # Luke 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about trusting and honoring God (12:1-12)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who trusted in money (12:13-21)
3. Jesus teaches not to trust in money (12:22-34)
4. Jesus teaches about being ready for his return (12:35-59)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Blasphemy against the Holy Spirit”

Jesus says in 12:10 that anyone who blasphemes against the Holy Spirit will not be forgiven. This is a descriptive statement, not a prescriptive one. Jesus is not saying that if people happen to speak certain words, then God will refuse to forgive them, no matter how sorry they are afterwards. Rather, it is the Holy Spirit who brings conviction of sin and of the need to repent. “Blasphemy against the Holy Spirit” means attributing the influence of the Holy Spirit to evil powers, as the Pharisees did when they said in 11:15 that Jesus drove out demons by the power of Beelzebul, the ruler of demons. By definition, then, if a person thinks that the influence of the Holy Spirit is an evil influence, they will not respond to it, and so they will not experience conviction of sin, repent, and be forgiven. That is why people who “blaspheme against the Holy Spirit” will not be forgiven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

### Servants

God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not. Jesus teaches about this in 12:34-40.

### Division

Jesus knew that those who did not choose to follow him would hate those who did choose to follow him. He also knew that most people love their families more than they love anyone else. So he wanted his followers to understand that following and pleasing him had to be more important to them than having their family love them. Jesus teaches about this in 12:49-53. +LUK 12 intro jun3 0 # Luke 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about trusting and honoring God (12:1–12)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who trusted in money (12:13–21)
3. Jesus teaches not to trust in money (12:22–34)
4. Jesus teaches about being ready for his return (12:35–59)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Blasphemy against the Holy Spirit”

Jesus says in 12:10 that anyone who blasphemes against the Holy Spirit will not be forgiven. This is a descriptive statement, not a prescriptive one. Jesus is not saying that if people happen to speak certain words, then God will refuse to forgive them, no matter how sorry they are afterwards. Rather, it is the Holy Spirit who brings conviction of sin and of the need to repent. “Blasphemy against the Holy Spirit” means attributing the influence of the Holy Spirit to evil powers, as the Pharisees did when they said in 11:15 that Jesus drove out demons by the power of Beelzebul, the ruler of demons. By definition, then, if a person thinks that the influence of the Holy Spirit is an evil influence, they will not respond to it, and so they will not experience conviction of sin, repent, and be forgiven. That is why people who “blaspheme against the Holy Spirit” will not be forgiven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

### Servants

God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not. Jesus teaches about this in 12:34–40.

### Division

Jesus knew that those who did not choose to follow him would hate those who did choose to follow him. He also knew that most people love their families more than they love anyone else. So he wanted his followers to understand that following and pleasing him had to be more important to them than having their family love them. Jesus teaches about this in 12:49–53. LUK 12 1 en8g writing-newevent ἐν οἷς 1 In those times Luke uses these words to mark the beginning of a new event. This phrase seems to refer back to [11:54](../11/54.md). Alternate translation: “While the scribes and Pharisees were still looking for a way to trap him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 12 1 c8yk grammar-connect-time-background ἐπισυναχθεισῶν τῶν μυριάδων τοῦ ὄχλου, ὥστε καταπατεῖν ἀλλήλους 1 when myriads of the crowd were gathered together Luke provides this background information to give the setting for the events he is about to describe. Alternate translation: “while tens of thousands of the common people were gathering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 12 1 l730 translate-unknown μυριάδων 1 myriads The word **myriads** is the plural of the Greek word “myriad,” which means ten thousand (10,000). You can express this number in the way that would be most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “tens of thousands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -2137,7 +2137,7 @@ LUK 12 20 xgr9 figs-euphemism τὴν ψυχήν σου ἀπαιτοῦσιν LUK 12 20 vyn1 figs-rquestion ἃ δὲ ἡτοίμασας, τίνι ἔσται? 1 what you have prepared, whose will it be? God does not expect the man to tell him who will inherit his things. Rather, God is using the question as a teaching tool, to make the man realize that he could not count on possessing those things, and so he was wrong to put his confidence in them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “the things you have stored up will belong to someone else!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 12 21 m47i ὁ θησαυρίζων 1 the one who stores up treasure Alternate translation: “a person who saves up valuable things” LUK 12 21 fst9 figs-metaphor μὴ εἰς Θεὸν πλουτῶν 1 is not rich toward God Jesus uses the term **rich** to mean using one’s time and possessions for the things that are important to God. Alternate translation: “has not invested in the things that matter to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 12 22 ihk2 figs-explicit εἶπεν…πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ 1 he said to his disciples Since Peter asks in [12:41](../12/41.md) whether Jesus has been speaking only to the disciples, or also to the crowd as well, the implication is that Jesus did not say these things to his disciples privately, as in [12:1-12](../12/01.md), but rather to them publicly so that the crowd could also hear. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he said to his disciples, as the crowd was listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 12 22 ihk2 figs-explicit εἶπεν…πρὸς τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτοῦ 1 he said to his disciples Since Peter asks in [12:41](../12/41.md) whether Jesus has been speaking only to the disciples, or also to the crowd as well, the implication is that Jesus did not say these things to his disciples privately, as in [12:1–12](../12/01.md), but rather to them publicly so that the crowd could also hear. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he said to his disciples, as the crowd was listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 12 22 vim6 figs-explicit διὰ τοῦτο 1 For this reason By **this** Jesus means the lesson of the story, that it is foolish to be overly concerned about having a lot of food and possessions. Alternate translation: “In light of what this story teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 12 22 cy4e λέγω ὑμῖν, μὴ μεριμνᾶτε 1 I say to you, do not worry Jesus says this to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples. Alternate translation: “I want you to know that you should not worry” LUK 12 22 u1cf τῷ σώματι τί ἐνδύσησθε 1 about your body, what you will wear Alternate translation: “about having clothes to put on your body” @@ -2251,7 +2251,7 @@ LUK 12 48 nn9c figs-activepassive δαρήσεται ὀλίγας 1 will be bea LUK 12 48 qg96 figs-parallelism παντὶ…ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρ’ αὐτοῦ; καὶ ᾧ παρέθεντο πολύ, περισσότερον αἰτήσουσιν αὐτόν 1 everyone to whom much has been given, much will be required from him, and to whom much has been provided, even more will be asked of him These two clauses mean the same thing. Jesus is using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them, especially if putting both of them in your translation might be confusing for your readers. Alternate translation: “if someone entrusts many resources to a person, he will expect that person to produce much from those resources” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) LUK 12 48 ehu9 figs-activepassive παντὶ…ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρ’ αὐτοῦ 1 everyone to whom much has been given, much will be required from him If it would be helpful in your language, you could use active verbal forms to express the meaning of the two passive verbal forms here. Alternate translation: “the master will require more of everyone to whom he has given much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 12 48 ir7m figs-activepassive ᾧ παρέθεντο πολύ, περισσότερον αἰτήσουσιν αὐτόν 1 to whom much has been provided, even more will be asked of him If it would be helpful in your language, you could use active verbal forms to express the meaning of the two passive verbal forms here. Alternate translation: “the master will ask even more of the one to whom he has given much property to care for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 12 49 qy62 figs-metaphor πῦρ ἦλθον βαλεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 1 I came to throw fire upon the earth Jesus is speaking of the effects of his ministry and teaching. In context, since he says contrastingly in [12:51](../12/51.md) that he did not come to bring peace to the earth, **fire** likely represents the passionate responses to him, both favorable and unfavorable, that would lead to the divisions he describes in [12:52-53](../12/52.md). Alternate translation: “My coming will lead to conflict among people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 12 49 qy62 figs-metaphor πῦρ ἦλθον βαλεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 1 I came to throw fire upon the earth Jesus is speaking of the effects of his ministry and teaching. In context, since he says contrastingly in [12:51](../12/51.md) that he did not come to bring peace to the earth, **fire** likely represents the passionate responses to him, both favorable and unfavorable, that would lead to the divisions he describes in [12:52–53](../12/52.md). Alternate translation: “My coming will lead to conflict among people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 12 49 l820 figs-metonymy τὴν γῆν 1 the earth Jesus says **the earth** to mean the people living on the earth. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 12 49 ygv3 figs-exclamations τί θέλω εἰ ἤδη ἀνήφθη 1 how I wish that it were already kindled This exclamation emphasizes how much Jesus wants this to happen. Alternate translation: “I wish very much that this fire were already lit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) LUK 12 49 ygx3 figs-metaphor τί θέλω εἰ ἤδη ἀνήφθη 1 how I wish that it were already kindled This exclamation continues the metaphor of **fire** as conflict. Alternate translation: “how I wish that people were already taking sides” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2297,7 +2297,7 @@ LUK 12 58 l840 translate-unknown τῷ πράκτορι 1 the officer In the con LUK 12 59 wi7m figs-hypo λέγω σοι 1 I say to you Jesus uses this expression to emphasize what he is about to tell his disciples and the crowd. If you translated the previous verse as a hypothetical condition, you could translate this expression as an introduction to the result of that condition. Alternate translation: “If that happens, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) LUK 12 59 l841 figs-youcrowd λέγω σοι 1 I say to you Even though Jesus is speaking directly to the crowd, he is still addressing an individual situation, so **you** is singular here and in the rest of this verse. But if the singular form would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural form of **you** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) LUK 12 59 i124 translate-bmoney καὶ τὸ ἔσχατον λεπτὸν 1 the very last lepton A **lepton** was the smallest and least valuable coin in circulation in this place and time. It was equivalent to about a tenth of an hour’s wage. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might use the name of the least valuable coin in your culture, or a general expression. Alternate translation: “the very last penny” or “every bit of money that your creditor demands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) -LUK 13 intro xaa2 0 # Luke 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches with parables (13:1-30)
2. Jesus speaks about Herod and Jerusalem (13:31-35)

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Unknown events

The people and Jesus speak about two events that they knew about, but about which no one today knows anything except what Luke has written. These events are Pilate executing some Galileans in the temple, 13:1-2, and 18 people being killed when a tower collapsed in Jerusalem, 13:4. In your translation, you should tell your readers no more than what Luke tells about what happened. Your translation should tell only what Luke tells.

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Those who are least important will be first, and those who are most important will be last” (Luke 13:30) +LUK 13 intro xaa2 0 # Luke 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches with parables (13:1–30)
2. Jesus speaks about Herod and Jerusalem (13:31–35)

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Unknown events

The people and Jesus speak about two events that they knew about, but about which no one today knows anything except what Luke has written. These events are Pilate executing some Galileans in the temple, 13:1–2, and 18 people being killed when a tower collapsed in Jerusalem, 13:4. In your translation, you should tell your readers no more than what Luke tells about what happened. Your translation should tell only what Luke tells.

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Those who are least important will be first, and those who are most important will be last” (Luke 13:30) LUK 13 1 t1fi grammar-connect-time-background δέ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what Jesus teaches next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 13 1 l842 writing-participants παρῆσαν…τινες ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ, ἀπαγγέλλοντες αὐτῷ 1 some were present at that time who were reporting to him Luke uses this phrase to introduce new characters into the story. Alternate translation: “There were some people present at that time who were telling him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 13 1 wg2k figs-explicit ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ 1 at that time This implicitly means while Jesus was still teaching the crowds, as Luke said he was doing in [11:54](../11/54.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “while he was still teaching the crowds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2310,7 +2310,7 @@ LUK 13 2 zfa8 figs-rquestion δοκεῖτε ὅτι 1 Do you think that Jesus i LUK 13 2 l847 ἁμαρτωλοὶ παρὰ πάντας τοὺς Γαλιλαίους 1 more sinful than all the Galileans Alternate translation: “more sinful than all the other Galileans” or “the most sinful of all Galileans” LUK 13 2 l848 ταῦτα πεπόνθασιν 1 they suffered this Alternate translation: “this happened to them” LUK 13 3 xl6m οὐχί, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 No, I say to you Jesus uses this expression to emphasize what he is about to tell these people and the crowd. Alternate translation: “That is certainly not the case” -LUK 13 3 a3ez figs-explicit πάντες ὁμοίως ἀπολεῖσθε 1 you will all perish in the same way This statement seems to be similar to the one that Jesus makes in [19:41-44](../19/41.md), in which he says that if the Jewish people reject him and instead follow violent false messiahs, this will bring them into conflict with the Romans and they will be destroyed. That seems to be the implicit meaning here as well, and you could express that in your translation. Alternate translation: “you too will be destroyed by the Romans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 13 3 a3ez figs-explicit πάντες ὁμοίως ἀπολεῖσθε 1 you will all perish in the same way This statement seems to be similar to the one that Jesus makes in [19:41–44](../19/41.md), in which he says that if the Jewish people reject him and instead follow violent false messiahs, this will bring them into conflict with the Romans and they will be destroyed. That seems to be the implicit meaning here as well, and you could express that in your translation. Alternate translation: “you too will be destroyed by the Romans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 13 4 hj5w ἢ ἐκεῖνοι 1 Or those Jesus is giving a second example of people who suffered. Alternate translation: “Also consider those” LUK 13 4 e2s8 figs-nominaladj ἐκεῖνοι οἱ δεκαοκτὼ 1 those 18 Jesus is using the adjective **18** (eighteen) as a noun in order to indicate a certain group of people. Alternate translation: “those 18 people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 13 4 p6r8 translate-names Σιλωὰμ 1 Siloam **Siloam** is the name of an area in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2464,7 +2464,7 @@ LUK 13 35 x4y6 οὐ μὴ με ἴδητέ ἕως ἥξει ὅτε εἴπη LUK 13 35 l925 figs-idiom ἕως ἥξει ὅτε εἴπητε 1 until it comes when you say The expression **it comes** means “the time comes.” You could express that in your translation, or, if your language does not speak of time as “coming,” you can use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “until the time comes when you say” or “until the time when you say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 13 35 l926 figs-quotesinquotes ὅτε εἴπητε, εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 when you say, ‘Blessed is the one who comes in the name of the Lord’ If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “when you say that the one who comes in the name of the Lord is blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 13 35 v6lj figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord God’s **name** represents his power and authority. Alternate translation: “as God’s representative” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -LUK 14 intro xk3w 0 # Luke 14 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus attends a banquet and tells a parable about a banquet (14:1-24)
2. Jesus teaches more about being his disciple (14:25-35)

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Parable

Jesus told the parable in Luke 14:15-24 to teach that the kingdom of God will be something that everyone can enjoy, but many people will refuse to be part of it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “For everyone who exalts himself will be humbled, and he who humbles himself will be exalted” (14:11). +LUK 14 intro xk3w 0 # Luke 14 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus attends a banquet and tells a parable about a banquet (14:1–24)
2. Jesus teaches more about being his disciple (14:25–35)

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Parable

Jesus told the parable in Luke 14:15–24 to teach that the kingdom of God will be something that everyone can enjoy, but many people will refuse to be part of it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “For everyone who exalts himself will be humbled, and he who humbles himself will be exalted” (14:11). LUK 14 1 dj2d writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 14 1 a3ya grammar-connect-time-background καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 14 1 l89x writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 he The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -2494,7 +2494,7 @@ LUK 14 8 l937 translate-unknown μὴ κατακλιθῇς 1 do not recline to LUK 14 8 l938 figs-metaphor τὴν πρωτοκλισίαν 1 the first place See how you translated this phrase in [14:7](../14/07.md). Alternate translation: “in a seat for an honored guest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 14 8 t1r5 figs-activepassive ἐντιμότερός σου ᾖ κεκλημένος ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 a more honorable than you may have been invited by him If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the host may also have invited a person who is more important than you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 14 8 l939 figs-nominaladj ἐντιμότερός 1 a more honorable Jesus is using the comparative adjective **more honorable** as a noun. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate it with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “a person who is more important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -LUK 14 8 m5b9 figs-youcrowd σου 1 you Even though Jesus is speaking to the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation, so **you** and **your** are singular in [14:8-10](../14/08.md). But if the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) +LUK 14 8 m5b9 figs-youcrowd σου 1 you Even though Jesus is speaking to the crowd, he is addressing an individual situation, so **you** and **your** are singular in [14:8–10](../14/08.md). But if the singular forms of these pronouns would not be natural in your language for someone who was speaking to a group of people, you could use the plural forms in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) LUK 14 9 l940 translate-unknown ἐλθὼν, ὁ σὲ καὶ αὐτὸν καλέσας 1 when the one who invited you and him arrives In this culture, the host would come into the banquet hall after all the guests were seated. If the practice is different in your culture, you could use a general expression in your translation here. Alternate translation: “when the person who invited both of you sees the seating arrangements” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 14 9 ecp7 figs-idiom ἄρξῃ μετὰ αἰσχύνης τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον κατέχειν 1 you will begin with shame to take the last place Jesus uses the term **begin** to suggest slowly unfolding, reluctant action. Alternate translation: “you will be ashamed and reluctantly have to take the last place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 14 9 gqa6 figs-metaphor τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον 1 the last place The term **last** represents being unimportant and not honored. If your culture has a way of placing people at meals to show honor, you could use that in your translation. Otherwise, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a seat far from the host” or “a seat for the least important person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2511,7 +2511,7 @@ LUK 14 11 zrs1 figs-activepassive ταπεινωθήσεται 1 will be humbled LUK 14 11 dk2c ὁ ταπεινῶν ἑαυτὸν 1 the one who humbles himself Alternate translation: “who chooses to look unimportant” or “who takes an unimportant position” LUK 14 11 eki7 figs-activepassive ὑψωθήσεται 1 will be exalted If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “will receive honor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 14 12 p9hc τῷ κεκληκότι αὐτόν 1 the one who had invited him Alternate translation: “the Pharisee who had invited him to his house for a meal” -LUK 14 12 v4uk figs-you ὅταν ποιῇς 1 when you make Even though this is general advice for everyone listening, the word **you** is singular here, and **you** and **your** are singular in all of [14:12-14](../14/12.md), because Jesus is speaking directly to the Pharisee who invited him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +LUK 14 12 v4uk figs-you ὅταν ποιῇς 1 when you make Even though this is general advice for everyone listening, the word **you** is singular here, and **you** and **your** are singular in all of [14:12–14](../14/12.md), because Jesus is speaking directly to the Pharisee who invited him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 14 12 gmh6 figs-hyperbole μὴ φώνει 1 do not invite Jesus is probably not telling his host never to invite such people. Rather, this is likely a generalization that means he should invite others as well. Alternate translation: “do not invite only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 14 12 l945 figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου…τοὺς συγγενεῖς σου 1 your brothers … your relatives The term **brothers** probably refers to close family members, while the term **relatives** likely indicates more distant members of an extended family. Alternate translation: “your close family members … other relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 14 12 l946 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου 1 your brothers If **brothers** is a figurative term, then Jesus is using it in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “your close family members” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -2562,7 +2562,7 @@ LUK 14 23 l964 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν ὁ κύριος πρὸς τὸ LUK 14 23 n9x7 figs-metonymy φραγμοὺς 1 hedges The word **hedges** describes boundary fences that enclose and protect fields and buildings. They may be made of bushes and shrubs growing closely together, or they may be made of wood or stone or similar building materials. This could mean: (1) actual hedges. In that case, you could use the equivalent term in your language or a general expression. Alternate translation: “boundary fences” (2) since the term is paired with **roads**, it may mean the footpaths that run along hedges at the borders of fields. Alternate translation: “paths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 14 23 w5w6 figs-activepassive ἵνα γεμισθῇ μου ὁ οἶκος 1 so that my house may be filled If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that guests may fill my house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 14 24 i5lt figs-declarative λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 For I say to you that none of those men who were invited will taste of my supper The master is using a future statement to express the result he desires from the instructions he has just given his servants. Alternate translation: “For I say to you that I do not want any of those men who were invited to taste of my supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) -LUK 14 24 v5m6 figs-you λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 For I say to you that none of those men who were invited will taste of my supper While the word **you** is singular in [14:21-23](../14/21.md) because the master and the servant are addressing one another individually, here the word **you** is plural. It is not clear why. Possibly it may be assumed that other servants have been helping and that the master is now addressing all of the servants at once. In that case, it would make sense to translate **you** using the plural form, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +LUK 14 24 v5m6 figs-you λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 For I say to you that none of those men who were invited will taste of my supper While the word **you** is singular in [14:21–23](../14/21.md) because the master and the servant are addressing one another individually, here the word **you** is plural. It is not clear why. Possibly it may be assumed that other servants have been helping and that the master is now addressing all of the servants at once. In that case, it would make sense to translate **you** using the plural form, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 14 24 ooz4 λέγω…ὑμῖν 1 I say to you The master says this to emphasize what he is telling his servants. Alternate translation: “I can assure you” LUK 14 24 l965 figs-quotesinquotes λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων τῶν κεκλημένων, γεύσεταί μου τοῦ δείπνου 1 For I say to you that none of those men who were invited will taste of my supper If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “The master told all of his servants that he did not want any of the men he had invited to taste his supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) LUK 14 24 liz5 figs-gendernotations τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων 1 those men Here, the word for **men** means “male adults,” not people in general. So it would be appropriate to use a specifically masculine term in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -2607,12 +2607,12 @@ LUK 14 35 n5a9 writing-pronouns ἔξω βάλλουσιν αὐτό 1 They thro LUK 14 35 u9h3 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one who has ears to hear, let him hear Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize that what he has just said is important and that it may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **ears to hear** represents the willingness to understand and obey by association with the part of the body by which his listeners have been taking in his teaching. Alternate translation: “If anyone is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 14 35 c5fb figs-123person ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one who has ears to hear, let him hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, then listen” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 14 35 l981 figs-you ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω 1 The one who has ears to hear, let him hear If you choose to translate this in the second person, **you** would be plural, since Jesus is speaking to the crowd. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -LUK 15 intro p1ba 0 # Luke 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus tells parables about a lost sheep, a lost coin, and a lost son (15:1-32)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The parable of the prodigal son

The story that Jesus tells in Luke 15:11-32 is known as The Parable of the Prodigal Son, although he does not give the story that title himself. Most interpreters understand the father in the story to represent God (the Father), the sinful younger son to represent those who repent and come to faith in Jesus, and the self-righteous older son to represent the Pharisees. In the story, the older son becomes angry at the father for forgiving the younger son’s sins. He will not even go in to the party that the father is giving to welcome the younger son home. Jesus knew that the Pharisees wanted God to think that only they were good and not forgive other people’s sins. Jesus was teaching them that they would never become part of God’s kingdom if they continued to think that way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])

### Sinners

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins such as stealing or sexual sins. But Jesus told three parables (15:4-7, 15:8-10, and 15:11-32) to teach that the people who acknowledge that they are sinners and who repent are the people who truly please God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +LUK 15 intro p1ba 0 # Luke 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus tells parables about a lost sheep, a lost coin, and a lost son (15:1–32)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The parable of the prodigal son

The story that Jesus tells in Luke 15:11–32 is known as The Parable of the Prodigal Son, although he does not give the story that title himself. Most interpreters understand the father in the story to represent God (the Father), the sinful younger son to represent those who repent and come to faith in Jesus, and the self-righteous older son to represent the Pharisees. In the story, the older son becomes angry at the father for forgiving the younger son’s sins. He will not even go in to the party that the father is giving to welcome the younger son home. Jesus knew that the Pharisees wanted God to think that only they were good and not forgive other people’s sins. Jesus was teaching them that they would never become part of God’s kingdom if they continued to think that way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]])

### Sinners

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins such as stealing or sexual sins. But Jesus told three parables (15:4–7, 15:8–10, and 15:11–32) to teach that the people who acknowledge that they are sinners and who repent are the people who truly please God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) LUK 15 1 yj6b grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 15 1 l982 writing-participants ἦσαν…αὐτῷ ἐγγίζοντες πάντες οἱ τελῶναι καὶ οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ 1 all the tax collectors and sinners were coming to him to listen to him Luke uses this phrase to introduce new characters into the story. These people were part of the crowd that Luke described generally in [14:25](../14/25.md). Alternate translation: “many of the people who were coming to listen to Jesus were tax collectors and sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 15 1 ss52 figs-hyperbole ἦσαν…αὐτῷ ἐγγίζοντες πάντες οἱ τελῶναι καὶ οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ 1 all the tax collectors and sinners were coming to him to listen to him The word **all** is an overstatement for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many of the people who were coming to listen to Jesus were tax collectors and sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 15 2 l986 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to indicate the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -LUK 15 2 l987 writing-participants διεγόγγυζον οἵ τε Φαρισαῖοι καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 both the Pharisees and the scribes were grumbling Luke uses this phrase to reintroduce these characters into the story. While these may not be exactly the same individuals whom Jesus encountered in places such as [5:17-30](../05/17.md), the members of this group in general function as the same character throughout the story. Alternate translation: “some Pharisees and scribes were there, and they were grumbling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +LUK 15 2 l987 writing-participants διεγόγγυζον οἵ τε Φαρισαῖοι καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς 1 both the Pharisees and the scribes were grumbling Luke uses this phrase to reintroduce these characters into the story. While these may not be exactly the same individuals whom Jesus encountered in places such as [5:17–30](../05/17.md), the members of this group in general function as the same character throughout the story. Alternate translation: “some Pharisees and scribes were there, and they were grumbling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 15 2 dd9b οὗτος ἁμαρτωλοὺς προσδέχεται 1 This one receives sinners Alternate translation: “This man lets sinners into his presence” or “This man associates with sinners” LUK 15 2 ec2r figs-explicit οὗτος 1 This one This expression implicitly means Jesus. Alternate translation: “This man” or “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 15 3 l988 grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to indicate the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -2734,7 +2734,7 @@ LUK 15 32 c35s ὁ ἀδελφός σου οὗτος 1 this brother of yours T LUK 15 32 due5 figs-metaphor ὁ ἀδελφός σου οὗτος, νεκρὸς ἦν καὶ ἔζησεν 1 this brother of yours was dead, and lived See how you translated this figurative expression in [15:24](../15/24.md). Alternate translation: “it is as if your very own brother had died and come back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 15 32 v55y figs-metaphor ἀπολωλὼς καὶ εὑρέθη 1 he had been lost, and was found See how you translated this figurative expression in [15:24](../15/24.md). Alternate translation: “it is as if he had been missing and we found him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 15 32 m046 figs-activepassive καὶ εὑρέθη 1 and was found If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “we found him again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 16 intro qz3g 0 # Luke 16 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus tells a parable about a household manager (16:1-15)
2. Jesus gives further teachings (16:16-18)
3. Jesus tells a parable about a rich man who died (16:19-31) +LUK 16 intro qz3g 0 # Luke 16 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus tells a parable about a household manager (16:1–15)
2. Jesus gives further teachings (16:16–18)
3. Jesus tells a parable about a rich man who died (16:19–31) LUK 16 1 m047 grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what Jesus teaches next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 16 1 p54g writing-participants ἔλεγεν…καὶ πρὸς τοὺς μαθητάς 1 he also said to his disciples Luke uses this phrase to reintroduce these characters into the story. Jesus directed the previous three parables to the Pharisees and scribes, although **the disciples**may have been part of the crowd that was listening. He directs this next parable to **the disciples**. Alternate translation: “Jesus then said to his disciples, who were there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 16 1 r6ck figs-parables ἔλεγεν δὲ καὶ πρὸς τοὺς μαθητάς 1 And he also said to his disciples One theme of the story of the two sons was the use of possessions. To help his disciples understand something further about that, Jesus tells them a brief story that provides an illustration. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “Jesus then told his disciples an illustrative story” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) @@ -2791,7 +2791,7 @@ LUK 16 13 ba2m ἑνὸς ἀνθέξεται 1 be devoted to one Alternate tra LUK 16 13 dd9z τοῦ ἑτέρου καταφρονήσει 1 despise the other Alternate translation: “he will hold the second master in contempt” or “he will hate the second master” LUK 16 13 pw7q figs-you οὐ δύνασθε…δουλεύειν 1 You are not able to serve Even though Jesus has been describing the situation of an individual servant, as he draws this application, he is addressing his disciples as a group, so **you** is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) LUK 16 14 taq3 grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) -LUK 16 14 m067 writing-participants οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 1 the Pharisees Here Luke reintroduces **the Pharisees** as participants in the story, but they have been present all along. Jesus told them the three parables in [15:3-32](../15/03.md), and they have since been listening to what Jesus has been teaching his disciples. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees who were present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +LUK 16 14 m067 writing-participants οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 1 the Pharisees Here Luke reintroduces **the Pharisees** as participants in the story, but they have been present all along. Jesus told them the three parables in [15:3–32](../15/03.md), and they have since been listening to what Jesus has been teaching his disciples. Alternate translation: “the Pharisees who were present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 16 14 lbq9 φιλάργυροι ὑπάρχοντες 1 who were lovers of money Alternate translation: “who loved having money” or “who were very greedy for money” LUK 16 15 zcqs ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ δικαιοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς 1 the ones justifying yourselves Alternate translation: “You are people who try to make yourselves look good” LUK 16 15 m068 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 before men Jesus is using this expression to mean “where people can see,” and it refers to perception and judgment. Alternate translation: “from the perspective of others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2885,7 +2885,7 @@ LUK 16 31 xkr7 figs-metonymy Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 LUK 16 31 m100 figs-merism Μωϋσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 Moses and the prophets Abraham is referring to all of God’s Word that had been written up to that time. He is using two of its major collections of writings to do so. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) LUK 16 31 m101 figs-activepassive οὐδ’ ἐάν τις ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, πεισθήσονται 1 neither will they be persuaded if someone should rise from the dead If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “a dead person who came back to life would not be able to convince them either” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 16 31 gf1b figs-nominaladj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Abraham is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “from among the people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -LUK 17 intro c4am 0 # Luke 17 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about forgiveness, faith, and service (17:1-10)
2. Jesus heals ten lepers (17:11-19)
3. Jesus teaches about the kingdom of God coming (17:20-37)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Old Testament Examples

Jesus uses Noah and Lot’s wife as examples to teach his followers. Noah was ready for the flood when it came, and followers of Jesus need to be ready for him to return, because he will not warn them when he is about to come. Lot’s wife loved the evil city she had been living in so much that God also punished her when he destroyed it. Followers of Jesus need to love him more than anything else. You may need to provide some background information that Jesus assumed his listeners would know so that people who read your translation today can understand what Jesus is teaching here.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Jesus asks his disciples three questions in (17:7-9) to teach them that even those who serve him well are righteous only because of his grace. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Whoever seeks to gain his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life will save it” (17:33).

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “In his day”

At the end of 17:24, some ancient manuscripts of the Bible have the phrase “in his day,” but the manuscripts considered to be the most accurate do not. ULT does not have the phrase in its text, but it does have it in a footnote.

### “There will be two in the field”

Some ancient manuscripts of the Bible include the verse 17:36, but the manuscripts considered to be the most accurate do not. ULT does not have this verse in its text, but it does have it in a footnote.

In both of these cases, if a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to include the verse if it does, but leave it out if it does not include it. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK 17 intro c4am 0 # Luke 17 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about forgiveness, faith, and service (17:1–10)
2. Jesus heals ten lepers (17:11–19)
3. Jesus teaches about the kingdom of God coming (17:20–37)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Old Testament Examples

Jesus uses Noah and Lot’s wife as examples to teach his followers. Noah was ready for the flood when it came, and followers of Jesus need to be ready for him to return, because he will not warn them when he is about to come. Lot’s wife loved the evil city she had been living in so much that God also punished her when he destroyed it. Followers of Jesus need to love him more than anything else. You may need to provide some background information that Jesus assumed his listeners would know so that people who read your translation today can understand what Jesus is teaching here.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Jesus asks his disciples three questions in (17:7–9) to teach them that even those who serve him well are righteous only because of his grace. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Whoever seeks to gain his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life will save it” (17:33).

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “In his day”

At the end of 17:24, some ancient manuscripts of the Bible have the phrase “in his day,” but the manuscripts considered to be the most accurate do not. ULT does not have the phrase in its text, but it does have it in a footnote.

### “There will be two in the field”

Some ancient manuscripts of the Bible include the verse 17:36, but the manuscripts considered to be the most accurate do not. ULT does not have this verse in its text, but it does have it in a footnote.

In both of these cases, if a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to include the verse if it does, but leave it out if it does not include it. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 17 1 ej1e figs-doublenegatives ἀνένδεκτόν ἐστιν τοῦ τὰ σκάνδαλα μὴ ἐλθεῖν 1 It is impossible for traps not to come If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this double negative as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Traps will certainly come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) LUK 17 1 m102 translate-unknown τὰ σκάνδαλα 1 traps The term **traps** refers to a device that a person or animal would unknowingly activate and that would then confine them in a net, cage, or pit. Your language may have a term for a similar device, and you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 17 1 m103 figs-metaphor τὰ σκάνδαλα 1 traps Jesus is using the word **traps**. Alternate translation: “temptations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -3064,7 +3064,7 @@ LUK 17 37 fen1 writing-proverbs ὅπου τὸ σῶμα, ἐκεῖ καὶ ο LUK 17 37 m193 figs-metaphor ὅπου τὸ σῶμα, ἐκεῖ καὶ οἱ ἀετοὶ ἐπισυναχθήσονται 1 Where the body is, there also the vultures will be gathered together In this proverb, **the body** and **the vultures** are figurative. If you would like to present the same image to your readers but your language does not use metaphors, you can express this as a simile. Alternate translation: “Just as vultures gather where there is a dead body, so the things I have described will indicate where this is about to happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 17 37 m6ca translate-unknown οἱ ἀετοὶ 1 the vultures The word **vultures** describes large birds that travel in flocks and eat the flesh of dead animals that they find. If your readers would not be familiar with **vultures**, you could use the name of similar birds in your area, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the scavenger birds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 17 37 m194 figs-activepassive ἐπισυναχθήσονται 1 will be gathered together If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “will flock together” or “will assemble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 18 intro v92v 0 # Luke 18 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus tells a parable about a widow and a judge (18:1-8)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a Pharisee and a tax collector (18:9-14)
3. Jesus blesses little children (18:15-17)
4. Jesus teaches about wealth and the kingdom of God (18:18-30)
5. Jesus warns about his impending death (18:31-34)
6. Jesus heals a blind man in Jericho (18:35-43)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Judges

People expected judges always to do what God said was right and to make sure that other people did what was right. But some judges did not care about doing right or making sure others did right. Jesus called this kind of judge “unjust.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])

### Pharisees and tax collectors

The Pharisees thought that they themselves were the best examples of good, righteous people, and they thought that tax collectors were the most unrighteous of sinners. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “that he had become sad”

At the beginning of 18:24, in the story of the ruler who asked Jesus how he could have eternal life, some ancient manuscripts of the Bible say that Jesus saw “that he had become sad.” However, the ancient manuscripts considered to be the most accurate do not have that phrase. They say simply that Jesus looked at him. ULT does not have the phrase in its text, but it does have it in a footnote.

### “we have left everything”

In 18:28, in some ancient manuscripts of the Bible, Peter says that the disciples have left “everything” to follow Jesus. In other manuscripts, the expression is “our own possessions.” ULT says “everything” in its text, but it acknowledges the variant “our own possessions” in a footnote.

In each of these cases, if a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to follow its reading. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK 18 intro v92v 0 # Luke 18 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus tells a parable about a widow and a judge (18:1–8)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a Pharisee and a tax collector (18:9–14)
3. Jesus blesses little children (18:15–17)
4. Jesus teaches about wealth and the kingdom of God (18:18–30)
5. Jesus warns about his impending death (18:31–34)
6. Jesus heals a blind man in Jericho (18:35–43)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Judges

People expected judges always to do what God said was right and to make sure that other people did what was right. But some judges did not care about doing right or making sure others did right. Jesus called this kind of judge “unjust.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])

### Pharisees and tax collectors

The Pharisees thought that they themselves were the best examples of good, righteous people, and they thought that tax collectors were the most unrighteous of sinners. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “that he had become sad”

At the beginning of 18:24, in the story of the ruler who asked Jesus how he could have eternal life, some ancient manuscripts of the Bible say that Jesus saw “that he had become sad.” However, the ancient manuscripts considered to be the most accurate do not have that phrase. They say simply that Jesus looked at him. ULT does not have the phrase in its text, but it does have it in a footnote.

### “we have left everything”

In 18:28, in some ancient manuscripts of the Bible, Peter says that the disciples have left “everything” to follow Jesus. In other manuscripts, the expression is “our own possessions.” ULT says “everything” in its text, but it acknowledges the variant “our own possessions” in a footnote.

In each of these cases, if a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to follow its reading. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 18 1 r26t figs-parables ἔλεγεν δὲ παραβολὴν αὐτοῖς, πρὸς τὸ 1 Then he spoke a parable to them to show that Alternate translation: “Then Jesus told his disciples this story to help them understand that it was necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) LUK 18 2 l2qr λέγων 1 saying If it would be helpful in your language, you could begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He said” LUK 18 2 ph5w writing-participants κριτής τις ἦν ἔν τινι πόλει 1 In a certain city there was a certain judge Jesus uses this phrase to introduce one of the main characters in this parable. Alternate translation: “There once was a judge who lived in a certain city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -3227,7 +3227,7 @@ LUK 18 42 gcv1 figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε LUK 18 42 m257 ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you Here Jesus seems to be using the word **saved** in one of its particular senses, to mean “healed.” Alternate translation: “Because you believed, you have been healed” LUK 18 43 m258 ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ 1 he followed him Here, **followed** does not necessarily have the figurative meaning of “became a disciple.” Alternate translation: “he walked down the road with the rest of the crowd that was around Jesus” LUK 18 43 d1kk δοξάζων τὸν Θεόν 1 glorifying God Alternate translation: “giving glory to God” or “praising God” -LUK 19 intro zn2b 0 # Luke 19 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus helps a man named Zacchaeus repent of his sins (19:1-10)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who entrusted money to his servants (19:11-27)
3. Jesus rides into Jerusalem on a colt (19:28-48)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Sinner”

The Pharisees refer to a group of people as “sinners.” The Jewish leaders thought these people were sinful, but in reality the leaders were also sinful. This can be taken as irony. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Servants

God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not.

### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that the disciples brought Jesus both a donkey and a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: Matthew 21:1-7 and Mark 11:1-7 and Luke 19:29-36 and John 12:14-15)

### Spreading garments and branches

When kings would enter the cities they ruled, people would cut branches from trees and take off the outer garments that they wore to stay warm in cold weather and spread them all on the road so the king would ride over them. They did this to honor the king and show that they loved him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/honor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])

### The merchants in the temple

Jesus forced the people who were selling animals in the temple to leave. He did this to show everyone that he had authority over the temple and that only those who were righteous, who did what God said was good, could be in it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]]) +LUK 19 intro zn2b 0 # Luke 19 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus helps a man named Zacchaeus repent of his sins (19:1–10)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who entrusted money to his servants (19:11–27)
3. Jesus rides into Jerusalem on a colt (19:28–48)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Sinner”

The Pharisees refer to a group of people as “sinners.” The Jewish leaders thought these people were sinful, but in reality the leaders were also sinful. This can be taken as irony. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Servants

God expects his people to remember that everything in the world belongs to God. God gives his people things so they can serve him. He wants them to please him by doing what he wants them to do with everything he has given them. One day Jesus will ask his servants what they have done with everything he gave them to use. He will give a reward to those who have done what he wanted them to do, and he will punish those who have not.

### The donkey and the colt

Jesus rode into Jerusalem on an animal. In this way he was like a king who came into a city after he had won an important battle. Also, the kings of Israel in the Old Testament rode on donkeys. Other kings rode on horses. So Jesus was showing that he was the king of Israel and that he was not like other kings.

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about this event. Matthew and Mark wrote that the disciples brought Jesus a donkey. John wrote that Jesus found a donkey. Luke wrote that they brought him a colt. Only Matthew wrote that the disciples brought Jesus both a donkey and a colt. No one knows for sure whether Jesus rode the donkey or the colt. It is best to translate each of these accounts as it appears in ULT without trying to make them all say exactly the same thing. (See: Matthew 21:1–7 and Mark 11:1–7 and Luke 19:29–36 and John 12:14–15)

### Spreading garments and branches

When kings would enter the cities they ruled, people would cut branches from trees and take off the outer garments that they wore to stay warm in cold weather and spread them all on the road so the king would ride over them. They did this to honor the king and show that they loved him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/honor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])

### The merchants in the temple

Jesus forced the people who were selling animals in the temple to leave. He did this to show everyone that he had authority over the temple and that only those who were righteous, who did what God said was good, could be in it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]]) LUK 19 1 j35m grammar-connect-time-background καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to begin relating a new event by introducing background information that will help readers understand what happens. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 19 1 m259 translate-names Ἰερειχώ 1 Jericho **Jericho** is the name of a city. See how you translated **Jericho** in [18:35](../18/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 19 2 m263 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke uses the term **behold** to calls the reader’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -3430,10 +3430,10 @@ LUK 19 48 m347 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word LUK 19 48 m348 οὐχ εὕρισκον τὸ τί ποιήσωσιν 1 they were not finding that which they might do Alternate translation: “they were not able to find a way to kill Jesus” LUK 19 48 m349 figs-hyperbole ὁ λαὸς…ἅπας 1 all the people Luke is using the term **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “so many of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 19 48 pnf9 figs-metaphor ἐξεκρέμετο αὐτοῦ ἀκούων 1 were hanging on him listening Luke speaks of the people **hanging** on Jesus to emphasize how closely they were listening to what he said. Alternate translation: “were paying close attention to him to hear what he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 20 intro h6in 0 # Luke 20 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus answers a question about his authority (20:1-8)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who rented a vineyard to farmers (20:9-19)
3. Jesus answers a question about paying taxes to Caesar (20:20-26)
4. Jesus answers a question about marriage and the resurrection (20:27-40)
5. Jesus asks a challenging question about the Messiah (20:41-44)
6. Jesus warns about the scribes (20:45-47)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in [20:17](../20/17.md) and [20:42-43](../20/42.md), which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Questions that seem to have no good answer

In [20:4](../20/04.md), Jesus asks the Pharisees a question that seems to have no good answer. His goal is to show them that they should have recognized John the Baptist as someone who came with God’s authority. So he asks them who gave John the authority to baptize. They could not answer, because any answer they gave would show that they should have respected John [20:5-6](../20/05.md).

In [20:22](../20/22.md), the Pharisees ask Jesus a question that seems to have no good answer. They thought that they would get Jesus in trouble either with the Roman government or the Jewish people when they asked him if people should pay taxes to Caesar. If he said “yes,” then the Jewish people would be angry with him for telling them to pay taxes to a foreign government. If he said “no,” then the religious leaders could tell the Romans that Jesus was teaching the people to break the Roman laws. But Jesus gave them an answer they had not anticipated, and instead everyone respected the wisdom of Jesus even more.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. In this chapter, Jesus quotes a psalm that records David calling his son “lord,” that is, “master.” However, to the Jews, ancestors were greater than their descendants, so a father would not call his son “master.” In this passage, [Luke 20:41-44](../20/41.md), Jesus is trying to lead his hearers to the true understanding that the Messiah will be divine, and that he himself is the Messiah. So David is speaking to his son, that is, his descendant, as the Messiah, and it is appropriate for him to address him as his “Lord.” +LUK 20 intro h6in 0 # Luke 20 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus answers a question about his authority (20:1–8)
2. Jesus tells a parable about a man who rented a vineyard to farmers (20:9–19)
3. Jesus answers a question about paying taxes to Caesar (20:20–26)
4. Jesus answers a question about marriage and the resurrection (20:27–40)
5. Jesus asks a challenging question about the Messiah (20:41–44)
6. Jesus warns about the scribes (20:45–47)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in [20:17](../20/17.md) and [20:42–43](../20/42.md), which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Questions that seem to have no good answer

In [20:4](../20/04.md), Jesus asks the Pharisees a question that seems to have no good answer. His goal is to show them that they should have recognized John the Baptist as someone who came with God’s authority. So he asks them who gave John the authority to baptize. They could not answer, because any answer they gave would show that they should have respected John [20:5–6](../20/05.md).

In [20:22](../20/22.md), the Pharisees ask Jesus a question that seems to have no good answer. They thought that they would get Jesus in trouble either with the Roman government or the Jewish people when they asked him if people should pay taxes to Caesar. If he said “yes,” then the Jewish people would be angry with him for telling them to pay taxes to a foreign government. If he said “no,” then the religious leaders could tell the Romans that Jesus was teaching the people to break the Roman laws. But Jesus gave them an answer they had not anticipated, and instead everyone respected the wisdom of Jesus even more.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. In this chapter, Jesus quotes a psalm that records David calling his son “lord,” that is, “master.” However, to the Jews, ancestors were greater than their descendants, so a father would not call his son “master.” In this passage, [Luke 20:41–44](../20/41.md), Jesus is trying to lead his hearers to the true understanding that the Messiah will be divine, and that he himself is the Messiah. So David is speaking to his son, that is, his descendant, as the Messiah, and it is appropriate for him to address him as his “Lord.” LUK 20 1 h8gv writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 20 1 vtg4 figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed to enter the **temple** building, so Luke means that Jesus was teaching in the temple courtyard. Luke is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -LUK 20 1 m350 writing-participants ἐπέστησαν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς σὺν τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις 1 the chief priests and the scribes approached with the elders Luke uses this statement to reintroduce these characters into the story. He mentioned their activity in opposition to Jesus as background information in [19:47-48](../19/47.md), but here he brings them back into the main action of the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +LUK 20 1 m350 writing-participants ἐπέστησαν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς σὺν τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις 1 the chief priests and the scribes approached with the elders Luke uses this statement to reintroduce these characters into the story. He mentioned their activity in opposition to Jesus as background information in [19:47–48](../19/47.md), but here he brings them back into the main action of the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) LUK 20 2 m351 figs-imperative εἰπὸν ἡμῖν ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς, ἢ τίς ἐστιν ὁ δούς σοι τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην 1 Tell us by what authority you are doing these things, or who the one is who gave you this authority The Jewish leaders are using an imperative to ask a question, so you could translate this as a question. It may be helpful to make it two sentences. Alternate translation: “Tell us, by what authority are you doing these things? Or who is the one who gave you this authority?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 20 3 qn89 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς…εἶπεν 1 answering he said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Jesus said what follows in response to the question from the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “he responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) LUK 20 3 ku6a ἐρωτήσω ὑμᾶς κἀγὼ λόγον καὶ εἴπατέ μοι 1 I also will ask you a word, and you say to me Jesus begins his response with a statement, but then he gives a command, **you say to me**. It might be helpful to make the statement one sentence and the command another sentence, leading into the next verse. Alternate translation: “I will also ask you a question. Now you tell me” @@ -3618,7 +3618,7 @@ LUK 20 47 c7yv figs-metaphor οἳ κατεσθίουσιν τὰς οἰκία LUK 20 47 g67x προφάσει μακρὰ προσεύχονται 1 for a pretext they pray at length Here, **pretext** refers to something that someone would do in order to appear a certain way. Alternate translation: “in order to seem godly, they offer long prayers” LUK 20 47 zpp5 figs-metonymy οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 These will receive greater condemnation Jesus is using the word **condemnation** to mean the punishment that a person would receive after being condemned (found guilty) for doing something wrong. Alternate translation: “These scribes will receive greater punishment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 20 47 zpx5 figs-explicit οὗτοι λήμψονται περισσότερον κρίμα 1 These will receive greater condemnation The implication seems to be that these proud and greedy scribes will receive **greater** punishment than they would have if they had not pretended to be so godly. It is also implicit that God will be the one who punishes them. Alternate translation: “God will punish these scribes more severely because they do all these wrong things while pretending to be godly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 21 intro ny7d 0 # Luke 21 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about a widow who gave her little money to God (21:1-4)
2. Jesus tells his disciples what will happen before he returns (21:5-38)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “the times of the nations”

The Jews spoke of the time between when the Babylonians forced their ancestors to go to Babylon and the time when the Messiah would come as “the times of the nations.” In this expression, the term “nations” means people groups who are not Jews, that is, the Gentiles. So this expression meant the time when the Gentiles ruled over the Jews.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. There is a paradox in this chapter. Jesus tells his disciples in [21:16](../21/16.md), “they will put to death some of you,” but then, in [21:18](../21/18.md), he tells them, “not even a hair of your head will perish.” As a note to [21:18](../21/18.md) explains, Jesus means this second statement in a spiritual sense. +LUK 21 intro ny7d 0 # Luke 21 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about a widow who gave her little money to God (21:1–4)
2. Jesus tells his disciples what will happen before he returns (21:5–38)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “the times of the nations”

The Jews spoke of the time between when the Babylonians forced their ancestors to go to Babylon and the time when the Messiah would come as “the times of the nations.” In this expression, the term “nations” means people groups who are not Jews, that is, the Gentiles. So this expression meant the time when the Gentiles ruled over the Jews.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. There is a paradox in this chapter. Jesus tells his disciples in [21:16](../21/16.md), “they will put to death some of you,” but then, in [21:18](../21/18.md), he tells them, “not even a hair of your head will perish.” As a note to [21:18](../21/18.md) explains, Jesus means this second statement in a spiritual sense. LUK 21 1 k2zb writing-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) LUK 21 1 m425 writing-newevent εἶδεν τοὺς βάλλοντας εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον τὰ δῶρα αὐτῶν πλουσίους 1 he saw the rich who were putting their gifts into the treasury This background information that Luke provides introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “he noticed that there were some rich people who were placing gifts of money in the offering boxes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 21 1 m428 figs-nominaladj τοὺς…πλουσίους 1 the rich Jesus is using the adjective **rich** as a noun in order to indicate a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “rich people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -3782,7 +3782,7 @@ LUK 21 36 m487 figs-metaphor καὶ σταθῆναι ἔμπροσθεν το LUK 21 36 h83d figs-metaphor καὶ σταθῆναι ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 and to stand before the Son of Man Here, **stand** is an idiom that means to be declared innocent when judged, as in [Psalm 130:3](../psa/130/03.md), “If you, Yahweh, would mark iniquities, Lord, who could stand?” (That is, “If you, Yahweh, kept a record of sins, no one would be declared innocent.”) Jesus is referring to the time when he will judge everyone. Alternate translation: “and so that the Son of Man will declare you innocent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 21 36 m488 figs-123person τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “me, the Son of Man” or “I, the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) LUK 21 36 m489 figs-explicit τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man See how you translated the title **Son of Man** in [5:24](../05/24.md). Alternate translation: “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 21 37 tfe8 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce information about ongoing action that continues after the part of the story in [20:1-21:36](../20/01.md) ends. Your language may have its own way of showing how such information is related to the preceding part of a story. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) +LUK 21 37 tfe8 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce information about ongoing action that continues after the part of the story in [20:1–21:36](../20/01.md) ends. Your language may have its own way of showing how such information is related to the preceding part of a story. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) LUK 21 37 zh1m figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed to enter the **temple** building, so Luke means that Jesus was teaching in the temple courtyard. Luke is using the word for the entire building to refer to one part of it. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) LUK 21 37 m490 figs-activepassive τὸ ὄρος τὸ καλούμενον Ἐλαιῶν 1 the hill that is called Olivet If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 21 37 m491 translate-names τὸ ὄρος τὸ καλούμενον Ἐλαιῶν 1 the hill that is called Olivet You could also translate this entire expression as a proper name. **Olivet** is the name of a hill or mountain. See how you translated it in [19:29](../19/29.md). Alternate translation: “the Mount of Olives” or “Olive Tree Mountain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -3790,7 +3790,7 @@ LUK 21 38 m492 figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ λαὸς 1 all the people The word ** LUK 21 38 bky8 figs-ellipsis ὤρθριζεν πρὸς αὐτὸν 1 were getting up early to him Here Luke is leaving out some words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “were getting up early to come to him” or “were coming to him starting early each morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 21 38 cbx2 figs-explicit ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ 1 to hear him The implication is that the people wanted to **hear** Jesus teach. Alternate translation: “to listen to him teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 21 38 m493 figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed to enter the **temple** building, so Luke means the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -LUK 22 intro y8nr 0 # Luke 22 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Judas Iscariot agrees to betray Jesus to his enemies (22:1-6)
2. Jesus shares the Passover meal with his disciples (22:7-38)
3. Jesus prays on the Mount of Olives and is arrested there (22:39-53)
4. Peter denies Jesus (22:54-62)
5. Soldiers mock Jesus and the Jewish leaders question him (22:63-71)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The meaning of the “body” and “blood” of Jesus

[22:14-20](../22/14.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. During this meal, Jesus said of the bread, “This is my body,” and of the wine, “This cup is the new covenant in my blood.” As Jesus instructed, Christian churches around the world re-enact this meal regularly, calling it “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion.” But they have different understandings of what Jesus meant by these sayings. Some churches believe that Jesus was speaking and that he meant that the bread and wine represented his body and blood. Other churches believe that he was speaking literally and that the actual body and blood of Jesus are really present in the bread and wine of this ceremony. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

### The new covenant

Some people think that Jesus established the new covenant during the supper. Others think he established it after he went up to heaven. Others think it will not be established until Jesus comes again. Your translation should say no more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “And an angel from heaven appeared to him … his sweat became like drops of blood falling on the ground”

Verses 43 and 44 of Luke 22 are not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible, and so they are likely not an original part of the Gospel of Luke. However, many scholars consider them to provide accurate accounts of real events in Jesus’ life that were preserved in oral or written traditions about him and copied into the book of Luke at an early stage. ULT and UST include these verses, but some other versions do not. If you decide to translate these verses, you should put them inside square brackets to indicate that they are probably not original to Luke’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK 22 intro y8nr 0 # Luke 22 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Judas Iscariot agrees to betray Jesus to his enemies (22:1–6)
2. Jesus shares the Passover meal with his disciples (22:7–38)
3. Jesus prays on the Mount of Olives and is arrested there (22:39–53)
4. Peter denies Jesus (22:54–62)
5. Soldiers mock Jesus and the Jewish leaders question him (22:63–71)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The meaning of the “body” and “blood” of Jesus

[22:14–20](../22/14.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. During this meal, Jesus said of the bread, “This is my body,” and of the wine, “This cup is the new covenant in my blood.” As Jesus instructed, Christian churches around the world re-enact this meal regularly, calling it “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion.” But they have different understandings of what Jesus meant by these sayings. Some churches believe that Jesus was speaking and that he meant that the bread and wine represented his body and blood. Other churches believe that he was speaking literally and that the actual body and blood of Jesus are really present in the bread and wine of this ceremony. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

### The new covenant

Some people think that Jesus established the new covenant during the supper. Others think he established it after he went up to heaven. Others think it will not be established until Jesus comes again. Your translation should say no more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “And an angel from heaven appeared to him … his sweat became like drops of blood falling on the ground”

Verses 43 and 44 of Luke 22 are not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible, and so they are likely not an original part of the Gospel of Luke. However, many scholars consider them to provide accurate accounts of real events in Jesus’ life that were preserved in oral or written traditions about him and copied into the book of Luke at an early stage. ULT and UST include these verses, but some other versions do not. If you decide to translate these verses, you should put them inside square brackets to indicate that they are probably not original to Luke’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 22 1 q8fa grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 And Luke uses this word to begin relating a new event by introducing background information that will help readers understand what happens. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) LUK 22 1 jjy9 figs-explicit ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the Festival of Unleavened Bread During this festival the Jews did not eat bread that was made with yeast. You could translate this as either a description or as a name. Alternate translation: “the festival during which the Jews did not eat any bread that was made with yeast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 1 m494 figs-activepassive ἡ λεγομένη Πάσχα 1 which is called the Passover If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “which people call Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -3890,7 +3890,7 @@ LUK 22 27 mw2l grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Jesus uses this word t LUK 22 27 jt7r figs-rquestion τίς…μείζων, ὁ ἀνακείμενος ἢ ὁ διακονῶν? 1 who is greater, the one who reclines to eat, or the one who serves? Jesus is using the question form to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I want you to think about who is greater, the person who is dining, or the who is serving the food.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 22 27 n3dl translate-unknown ὁ ἀνακείμενος 1 the one who reclines to eat See how you translated this phrase in [5:29](../05/29.md). It was the custom in this culture for dinner guests to eat while lying comfortably around the table on banqueting couches. Alternate translation: “the person who is dining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 22 27 lu3a figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ὁ ἀνακείμενος? 1 Is it not the one who reclines to eat? Jesus is using a further question to teach his disciples. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “You must agree that it is the person who is dining.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -LUK 22 27 qbn6 figs-explicit ἐγὼ δὲ ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν εἰμι ὡς ὁ διακονῶν 1 But I am in the midst of you as one who serves Jesus is likely referring to the example that he has set at this meal. This would include serving the bread to the disciples, which Luke describes in [22:19](../22/19.md). [John 13:4-5](../jhn/13/04.md) also records that before this meal, Jesus washed the disciples feet, which a household servant would ordinarily have done. Alternate translation: “But I have been acting like a servant here at this meal with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 22 27 qbn6 figs-explicit ἐγὼ δὲ ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν εἰμι ὡς ὁ διακονῶν 1 But I am in the midst of you as one who serves Jesus is likely referring to the example that he has set at this meal. This would include serving the bread to the disciples, which Luke describes in [22:19](../22/19.md). [John 13:4–5](../jhn/13/04.md) also records that before this meal, Jesus washed the disciples feet, which a household servant would ordinarily have done. Alternate translation: “But I have been acting like a servant here at this meal with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 22 28 i9xb οἱ διαμεμενηκότες μετ’ ἐμοῦ, ἐν τοῖς πειρασμοῖς μου 1 the ones who have continued with me in my trials Alternate translation: “the ones who have stayed with me through my struggles” LUK 22 29 w4pd κἀγὼ διατίθεμαι ὑμῖν, καθὼς διέθετό μοι ὁ Πατήρ μου βασιλείαν 1 And I grant to you, just as my Father has granted to me, a kingdom If it would be helpful in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “And so, just as my Father has given a kingdom to me, I am giving one to you” LUK 22 29 nly5 figs-abstractnouns κἀγὼ διατίθεμαι ὑμῖν, καθὼς διέθετό μοι ὁ Πατήρ μου βασιλείαν 1 And I grant to you, just as my Father has granted to me, a kingdom If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “And so I am giving you the authority to rule, just as my Father has done for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -4059,7 +4059,7 @@ LUK 22 71 m595 figs-exclusive ἔχομεν…αὐτοὶ…ἠκούσαμεν LUK 22 71 m596 grammar-connect-logic-result αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 For we ourselves have heard from his own mouth If it would be helpful in your language, you put this phrase before the previous phrase, as UST does, since this phrase gives the reason for the conclusion that the previous phrase states. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) LUK 22 71 lpm4 figs-metonymy ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 we … have heard from his own mouth The elders are using the expression **his own mouth** to refer to what Jesus has just said using his mouth. Alternate translation: “we … have heard what he just said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 22 71 m597 figs-explicit ἠκούσαμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 we … have heard from his own mouth The implications are that what Jesus has just said proves a charge of blasphemy by itself, because Jesus has claimed to be equal with God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “we have heard him say that he is equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 23 intro p6wq 0 # Luke 23 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus stands trial before Pilate and Herod (23:1-25)
2. The Roman soldiers crucify Jesus (23:26-49)
3. Joseph of Arimathea buries Jesus and women prepare spices (23:50-56)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The curtain of the temple was split in two”

The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus’ people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried (Luke 23:53) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Truly I say to you, today you will be with me in paradise”

There are two translation issues related to the statement, “Truly I say to you, today you will be with me in paradise” in [23:42](../23/42.md).

(1) When Jesus said this to the criminal who was crucified with him, it is possible that he was using the term **paradise** to mean “heaven,” describing it by association with the way that it is a place of comfort and consolation. Some groups of believers would understand it that way. However, other groups of believers would say that people who express their faith in Jesus, as this criminal did, still need to wait until the final resurrection before they go to heaven, and so **paradise** refers to a place where such people go when they die and await the final resurrection. Be sensitive to this difference in your translation. You may decide it is best simply to use the term **paradise** and leave the meaning open to either understanding. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

(2) Some groups that may be active in your area, such as the Jehovah’s Witnesses, do not honor Jesus as the Son of God, and so they do not believe that he would have been able to promise the criminal entrance into paradise with himself that day, when they both would die. And so they translate or punctuate this so that the word **today** describes when Jesus is making the statement, rather than when the criminal will be in paradise. However, if that were actually the case, the Greek wording and word order would be different. The expression that introduces the statement would be, “Truly, today, I say to you,” or, “Truly I say to you today that.” The actual expression, “Truly I say to you,” occurs ten times in the book of Luke, and it always stands by itself as an introduction to a statement that follows. So **today** belongs with the statement, not with the introduction to the statement. Your language may have a way of making this clear, for example, by saying, “Truly I say to you, you will be with me in paradise today.”

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “And he was obligated to release one to them at every feast” [23:17](../23/17.md)

This verse is not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible. Most scholars consider it to be a later addition for explanation. Many current versions of the Bible do not include it. Some versions put it into square brackets. We recommend that you do not translate this verse. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in your region that include this verse, you may include it.

### “Jesus said, ‘Father, forgive them, for they do not know what they are doing.’” [23:34](../23/34.md)

This sentence is not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible, and so it is likely not an original part of the Gospel of Luke. However, many scholars consider it an authentic saying of Jesus that was copied into the book at an early stage. ULT and UST include this sentence in this verse, but some other versions do not.

If you decide to include either [23:17](../23/17.md) or the additional sentence [23:34](../23/34.md) in your translation, you should enclose the material in square brackets to indicate that it is probably not original to Luke’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK 23 intro p6wq 0 # Luke 23 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus stands trial before Pilate and Herod (23:1–25)
2. The Roman soldiers crucify Jesus (23:26–49)
3. Joseph of Arimathea buries Jesus and women prepare spices (23:50–56)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The curtain of the temple was split in two”

The curtain in the temple was an important symbol that showed that people needed to have someone speak to God for them. They could not speak to God directly because all people are sinful and God hates sin. God split the curtain to show that Jesus’ people can now speak to God directly because Jesus has paid for their sins.

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried (Luke 23:53) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Truly I say to you, today you will be with me in paradise”

There are two translation issues related to the statement, “Truly I say to you, today you will be with me in paradise” in [23:42](../23/42.md).

(1) When Jesus said this to the criminal who was crucified with him, it is possible that he was using the term **paradise** to mean “heaven,” describing it by association with the way that it is a place of comfort and consolation. Some groups of believers would understand it that way. However, other groups of believers would say that people who express their faith in Jesus, as this criminal did, still need to wait until the final resurrection before they go to heaven, and so **paradise** refers to a place where such people go when they die and await the final resurrection. Be sensitive to this difference in your translation. You may decide it is best simply to use the term **paradise** and leave the meaning open to either understanding. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

(2) Some groups that may be active in your area, such as the Jehovah’s Witnesses, do not honor Jesus as the Son of God, and so they do not believe that he would have been able to promise the criminal entrance into paradise with himself that day, when they both would die. And so they translate or punctuate this so that the word **today** describes when Jesus is making the statement, rather than when the criminal will be in paradise. However, if that were actually the case, the Greek wording and word order would be different. The expression that introduces the statement would be, “Truly, today, I say to you,” or, “Truly I say to you today that.” The actual expression, “Truly I say to you,” occurs ten times in the book of Luke, and it always stands by itself as an introduction to a statement that follows. So **today** belongs with the statement, not with the introduction to the statement. Your language may have a way of making this clear, for example, by saying, “Truly I say to you, you will be with me in paradise today.”

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “And he was obligated to release one to them at every feast” [23:17](../23/17.md)

This verse is not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible. Most scholars consider it to be a later addition for explanation. Many current versions of the Bible do not include it. Some versions put it into square brackets. We recommend that you do not translate this verse. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in your region that include this verse, you may include it.

### “Jesus said, ‘Father, forgive them, for they do not know what they are doing.’” [23:34](../23/34.md)

This sentence is not in the earliest and most accurate manuscripts of the Bible, and so it is likely not an original part of the Gospel of Luke. However, many scholars consider it an authentic saying of Jesus that was copied into the book at an early stage. ULT and UST include this sentence in this verse, but some other versions do not.

If you decide to include either [23:17](../23/17.md) or the additional sentence [23:34](../23/34.md) in your translation, you should enclose the material in square brackets to indicate that it is probably not original to Luke’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 23 1 pi3d grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to indicate that this event came after the events he has just described. Alternate translation (as in UST): “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) LUK 23 1 sgf1 figs-hyperbole ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος αὐτῶν 1 the whole multitude of them The word **whole** is a generalization. Luke says in [23:51](../23/51.md) that at least one member of the Sanhedrin did not agree that Jesus was guilty of blasphemy and should be punished. Alternate translation: “the many members of the ruling council who wanted to condemn Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) LUK 23 1 mvn9 figs-metonymy ἀναστὰν 1 rose up This means literally that they “stood up” or “stood to their feet,” but by extension it means that they adjourned the meeting and left the meeting place. Alternate translation: “ended the meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -4167,7 +4167,7 @@ LUK 23 30 m625 figs-quotesinquotes λέγειν τοῖς ὄρεσιν, πέσ LUK 23 30 m626 figs-imperative πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς…καλύψατε ἡμᾶς 1 Fall on us … Cover us This is an imperative, but since the people cannot order the mountains and hills to do this, they would be using the imperative to express their wishes. Alternate translation: “We wish you would fall on us … We wish you would cover us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 23 30 m627 figs-explicit πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς…καλύψατε ἡμᾶς 1 Fall on us … Cover us The people do not want the mountains and hills to fall on them to harm them, but rather to protect them. Alternate translation: “We wish you would fall on us to protect us … We wish you would cover us to protect us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 30 m628 figs-exclusive πέσετε ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς…καλύψατε ἡμᾶς 1 Fall on us … Cover us When the people say **us**, they are referring to themselves only, not to the mountains and hills as well. So here, use the exclusive form of **us** if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -LUK 23 31 nkk3 figs-metaphor ὅτι εἰ ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ, ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν; ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ, τί γένηται? 1 For if they do these things in the moist tree, what will happen in the dry? This is a figure of speech based on the idea that dry wood catches fire much more easily than moist wood. The fire, in turn, represents terrible things that people will experience. Jesus is saying that under the present relatively stable conditions, it was difficult for his enemies to arrest him and sentence him to death. In the future, conditions will become so desperate and chaotic that people will be able to do much worse things much more easily. He is probably referring to what conditions will be like during the siege and destruction of Jerusalem, which he described in [21:20-24](../21/20.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the meaning of this metaphor in your translation, and you could represent the metaphor itself as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “If people are able to do this when conditions are good, what will they do when conditions become very bad?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +LUK 23 31 nkk3 figs-metaphor ὅτι εἰ ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ, ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν; ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ, τί γένηται? 1 For if they do these things in the moist tree, what will happen in the dry? This is a figure of speech based on the idea that dry wood catches fire much more easily than moist wood. The fire, in turn, represents terrible things that people will experience. Jesus is saying that under the present relatively stable conditions, it was difficult for his enemies to arrest him and sentence him to death. In the future, conditions will become so desperate and chaotic that people will be able to do much worse things much more easily. He is probably referring to what conditions will be like during the siege and destruction of Jerusalem, which he described in [21:20–24](../21/20.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the meaning of this metaphor in your translation, and you could represent the metaphor itself as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “If people are able to do this when conditions are good, what will they do when conditions become very bad?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 23 31 y238 figs-rquestion ὅτι εἰ ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ, ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν; ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ, τί γένηται? 1 For if they do these things in the moist tree, what will happen in the dry? Jesus does not expect the women to tell him what people will do in the future. Rather, he is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Since people are doing this when conditions are good, they will certainly do much worse when conditions become very bad!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) LUK 23 31 m629 writing-pronouns ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν 1 they do these things Here Jesus is using the pronoun **they** in an indefinite sense. Alternate translation: “people are doing these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 23 31 m630 figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ 1 in the moist tree This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “when the wood is fresh” or “when the wood is wet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -4255,8 +4255,8 @@ LUK 23 48 gt8y figs-explicit συνπαραγενόμενοι…ἐπὶ τὴν LUK 23 48 whs7 figs-explicit ὑπέστρεφον 1 returned The implication is that the people in the crowds **returned** to their homes. Alternate translation: “returned to their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 48 ft9q translate-symaction τύπτοντες τὰ στήθη 1 beating their breasts As in [18:13](../18/13.md), this was a physical expression of great sorrow. Alternate translation: “hitting their chests to express their great sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) LUK 23 49 m669 figs-nominaladj πάντες οἱ γνωστοὶ αὐτῷ 1 all the ones acquainted with him Luke is using the adjective **acquainted** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. ULT adds the term **ones** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “all the people who knew Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -LUK 23 49 m670 figs-explicit πάντες οἱ γνωστοὶ αὐτῷ 1 all the ones acquainted with him These means implicitly all the people in the crowd that had come to watch the crucifixion who knew Jesus. It does not mean the disciples, since they had fled and were hiding. Rather, it means other people in Jerusalem who knew Jesus personally, which could include people such as the ones who lent him the colt in [19:30-33](../19/30.md) and the one who provided the room for the Passover meal in [22:11-13](../22/11.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the people in the crowd who knew Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 23 49 xzh8 figs-explicit γυναῖκες αἱ συνακολουθοῦσαι αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 the women who followed him from Galilee Here, **followed** does not have the figurative meaning of “became a disciple.” Rather, the implication is that the women whom Luke describes in [8:2-3](../08/02.md), who accompanied Jesus and his disciples and provided for them out of their own means, had traveled with the group here to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the women who helped Jesus and his disciples, who had traveled with him from Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 23 49 m670 figs-explicit πάντες οἱ γνωστοὶ αὐτῷ 1 all the ones acquainted with him These means implicitly all the people in the crowd that had come to watch the crucifixion who knew Jesus. It does not mean the disciples, since they had fled and were hiding. Rather, it means other people in Jerusalem who knew Jesus personally, which could include people such as the ones who lent him the colt in [19:30–33](../19/30.md) and the one who provided the room for the Passover meal in [22:11–13](../22/11.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “all the people in the crowd who knew Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +LUK 23 49 xzh8 figs-explicit γυναῖκες αἱ συνακολουθοῦσαι αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας 1 the women who followed him from Galilee Here, **followed** does not have the figurative meaning of “became a disciple.” Rather, the implication is that the women whom Luke describes in [8:2–3](../08/02.md), who accompanied Jesus and his disciples and provided for them out of their own means, had traveled with the group here to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the women who helped Jesus and his disciples, who had traveled with him from Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 23 49 s74u ταῦτα 1 these things Alternate translation: “what happened” LUK 23 50 cbj7 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke uses the term **behold** to call the reader’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 23 50 ud7p writing-participants ἀνὴρ ὀνόματι Ἰωσὴφ, βουλευτὴς ὑπάρχων, ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς καὶ δίκαιος 1 a man named Joseph was a council member, a good and righteous man Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you could use it here in your translation. It may be helpful to make this more than one sentence. Alternate translation: “there was a man named Joseph who was a member of the Sanhedrin. He was a good and righteous man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -4288,11 +4288,11 @@ LUK 23 56 mj6q figs-explicit ἡτοίμασαν ἀρώματα καὶ μύρ LUK 23 56 m681 translate-unknown ἀρώματα καὶ μύρα 1 spices and ointments The **spices** were sweet-smelling substances that were dry, and the **ointments** were sweet-smelling substances that were moist. If your readers would not be familiar with **spices and ointments**, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “sweet-smelling substances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 23 56 uzk9 ἡσύχασαν 1 they rested Alternate translation: “the women did not do any work” LUK 23 56 tk6s κατὰ τὴν ἐντολήν 1 according to the commandment Alternate translation: “as Moses had commanded in the law” -LUK 24 intro r5qx 0 # Luke 24 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. The women go to Jesus’ tomb and find it empty (24:1-12)
2. Two disciples meet Jesus on a journey to Emmaus (24:13-35)
3. Jesus, risen from the dead, appears to his disciples (24:36-53)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The loyalty of the women

Many of Luke’s original readers would have thought that women were less important than men. But Luke carefully demonstrates that some women who loved Jesus very much showed him greater loyalty than the twelve disciples did. While the disciples ran away and hid, the women lovingly cared for Jesus’ body, and as a result, they were the first to learn that he had risen from the dead.

### Resurrection

Luke wants his readers to understand that Jesus came alive again in a physical body ([Luke 24:38-43](../24/38.md)).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “the third day”

This expression occurs three times in this chapter, in [24:7](../24/07.md), [24:21](../24/21.md), and [24:46](../24/46.md). See the explanation of this expression in the note to Luke [18:33](../18/33.md). In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” By that way of reckoning time, since Jesus died on a Friday, when he rose from the dead on a Sunday, that was the “third day.”

### Two men in bright shining robes

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all write about angels in white clothing speaking with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Matthew and John call them angels, while Mark and Luke call them men, but that is only because the angels appeared in human form. Luke and John write about both angels, while Matthew and Mark write about only one of them. It would be best to translate each of these passages as it appears in ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../jhn/20/12.md)) +LUK 24 intro r5qx 0 # Luke 24 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. The women go to Jesus’ tomb and find it empty (24:1–12)
2. Two disciples meet Jesus on a journey to Emmaus (24:13–35)
3. Jesus, risen from the dead, appears to his disciples (24:36–53)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The loyalty of the women

Many of Luke’s original readers would have thought that women were less important than men. But Luke carefully demonstrates that some women who loved Jesus very much showed him greater loyalty than the twelve disciples did. While the disciples ran away and hid, the women lovingly cared for Jesus’ body, and as a result, they were the first to learn that he had risen from the dead.

### Resurrection

Luke wants his readers to understand that Jesus came alive again in a physical body ([Luke 24:38–43](../24/38.md)).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “the third day”

This expression occurs three times in this chapter, in [24:7](../24/07.md), [24:21](../24/21.md), and [24:46](../24/46.md). See the explanation of this expression in the note to Luke [18:33](../18/33.md). In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” By that way of reckoning time, since Jesus died on a Friday, when he rose from the dead on a Sunday, that was the “third day.”

### Two men in bright shining robes

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all write about angels in white clothing speaking with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Matthew and John call them angels, while Mark and Luke call them men, but that is only because the angels appeared in human form. Luke and John write about both angels, while Matthew and Mark write about only one of them. It would be best to translate each of these passages as it appears in ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1–2](../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../jhn/20/12.md)) LUK 24 1 m682 figs-explicit τῇ…μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 on the first of the week This implicitly means the **first** day of the week. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 24 1 r62f translate-ordinal τῇ…μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 on the first of the week Here Luke is actually using a cardinal number, “one,” to mean **first**. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can also use a cardinal number here in your translation. Alternate translation: “on day one of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) LUK 24 1 m683 figs-idiom ὄρθρου βαθέως 1 deeply at dawn This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “at the first light of dawn” or “as dawn was just beginning to break” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -LUK 24 1 qg7a writing-pronouns ἐπὶ τὸ μνῆμα ἦλθαν 1 they came to the tomb The pronoun **they** refers to the women whom Luke describes in [23:55-56](../23/55.md). Alternate translation: “these women returned to the tomb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +LUK 24 1 qg7a writing-pronouns ἐπὶ τὸ μνῆμα ἦλθαν 1 they came to the tomb The pronoun **they** refers to the women whom Luke describes in [23:55–56](../23/55.md). Alternate translation: “these women returned to the tomb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) LUK 24 2 jq9p εὗρον…τὸν λίθον ἀποκεκυλισμένον 1 they found the stone rolled away Alternate translation: “they saw that the stone had been rolled away” LUK 24 2 l6uk figs-activepassive τὸν λίθον ἀποκεκυλισμένον 1 the stone rolled away If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that someone had rolled away the stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 24 2 t4mf figs-explicit τὸν λίθον 1 the stone Luke assumes that his readers will know that this was a large, cut, round stone that was big enough to completely block the entrance to the tomb. It had been put in place to seal off the entrance, and it would have required several people to move it. Alternate translation: “the large stone that had been put in place at the entrance to the tomb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv index ab0f56fd75..41f46bd94d 100644 --- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -JHN front intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Gospel of John

1. Introduction about who Jesus is (1:1–18)
1. John the Baptizer baptizes Jesus, and Jesus chooses 12 disciples (1:19–51)
1. Jesus preaches, teaches, and heals people (2–11)
1. The seven days before Jesus’ death (12–19)

* Mary anoints the feet of Jesus (12:1–11)
* Jesus rides a donkey into Jerusalem (12:12–19)
* Some Greek men want to see Jesus (12:20–36)
* The Jewish leaders reject Jesus (12:37–50)
* Jesus teaches his disciples (13–16)
* Jesus prays for himself and his disciples (17)
* Jesus is arrested and undergoes trial (18:1–19:15)
* Jesus is crucified and buried (19:16–42)

1. Jesus rises from the dead (20:1–29)
1. John says why he wrote his Gospel (20:30–31)
1. Jesus meets with the disciples (21)

More detailed outlines are in the General Notes for each chapter.

### What is the Gospel of John about?

The Gospel of John is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “Gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. John said that he wrote his Gospel “so that people might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the living God” ([20:31](../20/31.md)). John’s Gospel repeatedly emphasizes that Jesus is God in human form.

John’s Gospel is very different from the other three Gospels. John does not include some of the teachings and events that the other writers included in their Gospels. Also, John wrote about some teachings and events that are not in the other Gospels.

John wrote much about the miraculous signs Jesus did to prove that what Jesus said about himself was true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of John” or “The Gospel According to John.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News About Jesus That John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Gospel of John?

This book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the apostle John was the author. Further evidence that the apostle John wrote this Gospel is the fact that his name does not occur once within the book. Instead, this Gospel contains the phrases “the disciple whom Jesus loved” or “the other disciple” in places where the other Gospels indicate that John was present ([13:23–25](../13/23.md); [19:26–27](../19/26.md); [20:2–8](../20/02.md); [21:7](../21/07.md), [20–24](../21/20.md)). The apostle John most likely referred to himself in this manner because he wanted to humbly say that he had a very close relationship with Jesus. He was part of Jesus’ inner circle of disciples who became the “pillars” of the early church ([Galatians 2:9](../../gal/02/09.md)).

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?

John wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to [Daniel 7:13–14](../../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### What does the word “sign” mean in the Gospel of John?

While other New Testament writers use terms like “mighty works” or “wonders” to refer to the miracles that Jesus did, John prefers to use the term “sign.” The miracles John calls “signs” were significant displays of divine power. John called them signs to emphasize that an important purpose of Jesus’ miracles was to prove that Jesus was God and that what Jesus said about himself was true. John said that in his Gospel he only wrote about some of the signs that Jesus did. John said, “these have been written so that you would believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God, and so that believing, you would have life in his name” ([20:30–31](../20/30.md)).

### What do the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” mean in the Gospel of John?

John often used the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus’ word “remained” in the believer. John also spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ and in God. The Father is said to “remain” in the Son, and the Son is said to “remain” in the Father. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to “remain” in the believers.

Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, Jesus intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with him when he said, “He who eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in him” ([6:56](../06/56.md)). The UST uses the idea of “will be united with me, and I will be united with them,” but translators may have to find other ways of expressing the idea.

In the passage, “my words remain in you” ([15:7](../15/07.md)), the UST expresses this idea as “obey what I have taught you.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.

### What is double meaning in the Gospel of John?

John occasionally used words or phrases that could have two meanings (double entendre) in the language in which he originally wrote this Gospel. For example, the phrase translated “born again” in the ULT could also mean “born from above” ([3:3](../03/03.md), [7](../03/07.md)). In such cases, you may want to choose one meaning and put the other meaning in a footnote.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to translate these verses. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in the translators’ region that include these verses, then the translators can include them. If they are translated, they should be put inside square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that they were probably not originally in John’s Gospel.

* “waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel of the Lord went down into the pool and stirred up the water at certain times, and whoever then first stepped in after the water was stirred was healed from whatever disease he suffered from.” (5:3-4)
* “going through the midst of them, and so passed by” ([8:59](../08/59.md))

The following passage is included in most older and modern versions of the Bible. But it is not in the earliest copies of the Bible. Translators are advised to translate this passage. It should be put inside of square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that it may not have been original to John’s Gospel.

* The story of the adulterous woman ([7:53](../07/53.md)–[8:11](../08/11.md)) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +JHN front intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Gospel of John

1. Introduction about who Jesus is (1:1–18)
1. John the Baptizer baptizes Jesus, and Jesus chooses 12 disciples (1:19–51)
1. Jesus preaches, teaches, and heals people (2–11)
1. The seven days before Jesus’ death (12–19)

* Mary anoints the feet of Jesus (12:1–11)
* Jesus rides a donkey into Jerusalem (12:12–19)
* Some Greek men want to see Jesus (12:20–36)
* The Jewish leaders reject Jesus (12:37–50)
* Jesus teaches his disciples (13–16)
* Jesus prays for himself and his disciples (17)
* Jesus is arrested and undergoes trial (18:1–19:15)
* Jesus is crucified and buried (19:16–42)

1. Jesus rises from the dead (20:1–29)
1. John says why he wrote his Gospel (20:30–31)
1. Jesus meets with the disciples (21)

More detailed outlines are in the General Notes for each chapter.

### What is the Gospel of John about?

The Gospel of John is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “Gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. John said that he wrote his Gospel “so that people might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the living God” ([20:31](../20/31.md)). John’s Gospel repeatedly emphasizes that Jesus is God in human form.

John’s Gospel is very different from the other three Gospels. John does not include some of the teachings and events that the other writers included in their Gospels. Also, John wrote about some teachings and events that are not in the other Gospels.

John wrote much about the miraculous signs Jesus did to prove that what Jesus said about himself was true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of John” or “The Gospel According to John.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News About Jesus That John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Gospel of John?

This book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the apostle John was the author. Further evidence that the apostle John wrote this Gospel is the fact that his name does not occur once within the book. Instead, this Gospel contains the phrases “the disciple whom Jesus loved” or “the other disciple” in places where the other Gospels indicate that John was present ([13:23–25](../13/23.md); [19:26–27](../19/26.md); [20:2–8](../20/02.md); [21:7](../21/07.md), [20–24](../21/20.md)). The apostle John most likely referred to himself in this manner because he wanted to humbly say that he had a very close relationship with Jesus. He was part of Jesus’ inner circle of disciples who became the “pillars” of the early church ([Galatians 2:9](../../gal/02/09.md)).

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?

John wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the Gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to [Daniel 7:13–14](../../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### What does the word “sign” mean in the Gospel of John?

While other New Testament writers use terms like “mighty works” or “wonders” to refer to the miracles that Jesus did, John prefers to use the term “sign.” The miracles John calls “signs” were significant displays of divine power. John called them signs to emphasize that an important purpose of Jesus’ miracles was to prove that Jesus was God and that what Jesus said about himself was true. John said that in his Gospel he only wrote about some of the signs that Jesus did. John said, “these have been written so that you would believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God, and so that believing, you would have life in his name” ([20:30–31](../20/30.md)).

### What do the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” mean in the Gospel of John?

John often used the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus’ word “remained” in the believer. John also spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ and in God. The Father is said to “remain” in the Son, and the Son is said to “remain” in the Father. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to “remain” in the believers.

Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, Jesus intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with him when he said, “He who eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in him” ([6:56](../06/56.md)). The UST uses the idea of “will be united with me, and I will be united with them,” but translators may have to find other ways of expressing the idea.

In the passage, “my words remain in you” ([15:7](../15/07.md)), the UST expresses this idea as “obey what I have taught you.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.

### What is double meaning in the Gospel of John?

John occasionally used words or phrases that could have two meanings (double entendre) in the language in which he originally wrote this Gospel. For example, the phrase translated “born again” in the ULT could also mean “born from above” ([3:3](../03/03.md), [7](../03/07.md)). In such cases, you may want to choose one meaning and put the other meaning in a footnote.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to translate these verses. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in the translators’ region that include these verses, then the translators can include them. If they are translated, they should be put inside square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that they were probably not originally in John’s Gospel.

* “waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel of the Lord went down into the pool and stirred up the water at certain times, and whoever then first stepped in after the water was stirred was healed from whatever disease he suffered from.” (5:3–4)
* “going through the midst of them, and so passed by” ([8:59](../08/59.md))

The following passage is included in most older and modern versions of the Bible. But it is not in the earliest copies of the Bible. Translators are advised to translate this passage. It should be put inside of square brackets (\\[\\]) to indicate that it may not have been original to John’s Gospel.

* The story of the adulterous woman ([7:53](../07/53.md)–[8:11](../08/11.md)) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) JHN 1 intro k29b 0 # John 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Jesus is God (1:1–5)
2. John the Baptist was Jesus’ witness (1:6–8)
3. Summary of Jesus’ ministry on earth (1:9–13)
4. Jesus is God in the flesh (1:14–18)
5. John the Baptist prepares the way for Jesus (1:19–34)
6. Jesus meets Andrew, Peter, Philip, and Nathaniel (1:35–51)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in [1:23](../01/23.md), which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### “The Word”

John uses the phrase “the Word” to refer to Jesus ([1:1](../01/01.md), [14](../01/14.md)). John is saying that God’s most important message to all people is actually Jesus, a person with a physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]])

### Light and Darkness

In [1:4–9](../01/04.md), John uses an extended metaphor in which light represents what is true and good and darkness represents what is false and evil. John applies that light metaphor to Jesus in order to show that Jesus is God’s truth and goodness displayed in a human body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### “Children of God”

People are sometimes described as “children of God” because God created them. However, John uses this expression in a different sense in this chapter. He uses it to describe people who have entered into a father-child relationship with God by putting their faith and trust in Jesus. God indeed created all people, but people can only become children of God in this sense by believing in Jesus. “Children” in this usage does not refer to those who are young, but only to the relationship that people have to their father at any age. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Metaphors

John uses the metaphors of light and darkness and of “the Word” to tell the reader that he will be writing more about good and evil and about what God wants to tell people through Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### “In the beginning”

Some languages and cultures speak of the world as if it has always existed, as if it had no beginning. But “very long ago” is different from “in the beginning,” and you need to be sure that your translation communicates correctly.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([1:51](../01/51.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. See the discussion of this concept in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 1 1 er9g figs-explicit ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν 1 In the beginning This phrase refers to the very earliest time before God created the heavens and the earth. It does not refer to time in the distant past. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Before the beginning of the universe there was” or “Before the universe began there was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 1 z59q figs-explicit ὁ λόγος, καὶ ὁ λόγος…καὶ Θεὸς ἦν ὁ λόγος 1 the Word Here, **the Word** refers to Jesus. It does not refer to a spoken word. ULT indicates this by capitalizing **Word** to indicate that this is a title for Jesus. Use whatever convention your language uses to indicate that this is a name. If “word” is feminine in your language, it could be translated as “the one who is called the Word.” Alternate translation: “Jesus, who is the Word, and Jesus … and Jesus was God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2508,7 +2508,7 @@ JHN 19 42 nr4r figs-explicit διὰ τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰο JHN 19 42 c70e figs-infostructure ἐκεῖ…διὰ τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ὅτι ἐγγὺς ἦν τὸ μνημεῖον, ἔθηκαν τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 Because it was the day of preparation for the Jews If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “they laid Jesus there because of the day of preparation of the Jews and because the tomb was close by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) JHN 19 42 jsyu figs-explicit τὴν παρασκευὴν τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../19/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 19 42 jtfz figs-euphemism ἔθηκαν τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 Because it was the day of preparation for the Jews John is referring to putting Jesus’ dead body in a tomb as laying him down. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant, and it accurately describes the Jewish burial practice of laying a dead body on a table inside the tomb. See how you translated a similar expression in [11:34](../11/34.md). Alternate translation: “they entombed Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -JHN 20 intro nm1y 0 # John 20 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Mary Magdalene, Peter, and John go to Jesus’ tomb and find it empty (20:1–10)
2. Mary Magdalene meets Jesus (20:11–18)
3. Ten disciples meet Jesus (20:19–25)
4. Thomas meets Jesus (20:26–29)
5. John states the purpose for this Gospel (20:30–31)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([20:1](../20/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was a room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could look inside or enter.

### “Receive the Holy Spirit”

If your language uses the same word for “breath” and “spirit,” be sure that the reader understands that Jesus was performing a symbolic action by blowing air out of his mouth, and that Jesus was referring to the Holy Spirit, not his breath. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Rabboni

John used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic word. Then he explained that the word means “Teacher.” You should also use the letters of your language to express the sounds of the Aramaic word.

### Jesus’ resurrection body

We do not know what Jesus’ body looked like after he became alive again. His disciples knew he was Jesus because they could see his face and touch the places where the soldiers had put the nails through his hands and feet and pierced his side. However, he could also walk through solid walls and doors and sometimes people didn’t recognize him. It is best not to say more than what the ULT says about Jesus’ resurrection body.

### Two angels in white

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels appeared in human forms. Two of the Gospel authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT rather than trying to make the passages all state the exact same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md)) +JHN 20 intro nm1y 0 # John 20 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Mary Magdalene, Peter, and John go to Jesus’ tomb and find it empty (20:1–10)
2. Mary Magdalene meets Jesus (20:11–18)
3. Ten disciples meet Jesus (20:19–25)
4. Thomas meets Jesus (20:26–29)
5. John states the purpose for this Gospel (20:30–31)

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([20:1](../20/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was a room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could look inside or enter.

### “Receive the Holy Spirit”

If your language uses the same word for “breath” and “spirit,” be sure that the reader understands that Jesus was performing a symbolic action by blowing air out of his mouth, and that Jesus was referring to the Holy Spirit, not his breath. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Rabboni

John used Greek letters to express the sound of this Aramaic word. Then he explained that the word means “Teacher.” You should also use the letters of your language to express the sounds of the Aramaic word.

### Jesus’ resurrection body

We do not know what Jesus’ body looked like after he became alive again. His disciples knew he was Jesus because they could see his face and touch the places where the soldiers had put the nails through his hands and feet and pierced his side. However, he could also walk through solid walls and doors and sometimes people didn’t recognize him. It is best not to say more than what the ULT says about Jesus’ resurrection body.

### Two angels in white

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels appeared in human forms. Two of the Gospel authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT rather than trying to make the passages all state the exact same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1–2](../../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../../jhn/20/12.md)) JHN 20 1 a8vl figs-explicit τῇ…μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 first day of the week John uses **first** to imply the **first** day of the week. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the first day of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 20 1 sb4m translate-ordinal τῇ…μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 first day of the week Here John is actually using a cardinal number, “one,” to mean **first**. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can also use a cardinal number here in your translation. Alternate translation: “on day one of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) JHN 20 1 qj3j translate-names Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ 1 See how you translated **Mary Magdalene** in [19:25](../19/25.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 4171effc7f..32af3e936f 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1CO front intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians

1. Opening (1:1–9)
2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)
3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)
4. On abstinence (7:1–40)
5. On food (8:1–11:1)
6. On head coverings (11:2–16)
7. On the Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)
8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)
9. On the resurrection of the dead (15:1–58)
10. On the collection and visits (16:1–12)
11. Closing: final commands and greetings (16:13–24)

More detailed outlines for each of these sections appear in the chapter introductions.

### Who Wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians?

The author identifies himself as Paul the apostle. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee, and he persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus. Paul first visited the Corinthians during his third time traveling around the Roman Empire (see [Acts 18:1–18](../act/18/01.md)). After that, Paul wrote this letter while he was in Ephesus ([16:8](../16/08.md)). He lived and proclaimed the gospel there for more than two years (see [Acts 19:1–10](../act/19/01.md)), and it was sometime during those years that he wrote this letter to the Corinthians.

### What Is the Book of 1 Corinthians about?

While Paul was in Ephesus, he learned things about the Corinthians. People from “Chloe” told Paul about “factions” in the Corinthian group ([1:11](../01/11.md)), and the Corinthian believers wrote a letter to him asking questions ([7:1](../07/01.md)). Paul also mentions that he has “heard” things about what they are doing and saying (see [5:1](../05/01.md); [11:18](../11/18.md); [15:12](../15/12.md)). He may have learned these things from the people “from Chloe,” from their letter, or from other sources, such as “Stephanas and Fortunatus and Achaicus,” who visited Paul before he wrote this letter (see [16:17](../16/17.md)). Paul writes his letter in response to what he has learned about how the Corinthians are thinking and acting. He addresses multiple topics in order. You can see these topics in the outline above. Paul focuses on encouraging the Corinthian believers to remain faithful to Jesus and to behave as those who follow Jesus.

### How Should the Title of this Book Be Translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians” or “1 Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Corinth” or “A First Letter to the Christians in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Corinth like?

Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea and in an important location, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. Therefore, many different kinds of people lived in the city, and there were many wealthy people. Also, people in Corinth worshiped many different gods, and their worship could include food and sexual activity. In this culture, Christians who did not participate in worshiping at least some of the many gods were often considered to be strange, and people would not want to associate with them.

### What was the issue that Paul was addressing in this letter?

Paul addresses many specific topics and issues in his letter to the Corinthian believers. These include church unity, sexual behavior, worship practices, food sacrificed to idols, spiritual gifts, and the resurrection. It is possible that all the problems that Paul wishes to correct in these areas come from one single issue in the Corinthian church. It could be that false teachers are leading the Corinthians astray, or it could be that the Corinthians are acting like everyone else in their culture, even when this is not properly following Jesus. Most likely, the Corinthians believed that they had already received all the blessings that Christians will receive when Jesus comes back to the earth. They may have also believed the false teaching that matter and physical things were less important than “spiritual” things. Whatever exactly the primary problem is, what is clear is that the Corinthians were not properly following Jesus in how they were thinking and acting, and Paul writes the letter to guide them back to faithfully following Jesus.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What does Paul mean when he talks about “wisdom” and “foolishness”?

These words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. If someone creates plans and ideas that work out well, that person is wise. If someone creates plans and ideas that do not work out well, that person is foolish. The wise person makes good choices, and the foolish person makes bad choices. Paul uses these words to contrast what humans think is wise or foolish with what God thinks is wise or foolish. By doing this, Paul wishes to keep the Corinthians from thinking in ways that other humans consider to be “wise.” Rather, he wishes them to think in ways that God considers to be “wise,” which are ways that the other humans might consider to be “foolish.”

### What does Paul mean when he talks about “knowledge”?

Paul uses “knowledge” to refer to comprehending or understanding what is true about God and the world. Paul emphasizes that no one really has “knowledge” without the help of the Holy Spirit. He also wants those who have this “knowledge” to continue to act in ways that respect and honor those who do not have the “knowledge.” In other words, he wants to convince the Corinthians that acting in love toward fellow believers is more valuable than any “knowledge.” So, Paul argues that “knowledge” is valuable, but other things are more important.

### What does Paul mean when he talks about “power” and “weakness”?

Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Paul contrasts what humans think is powerful or weak with what God thinks is powerful or weak. By doing this, Paul wishes to keep the Corinthians from acting in ways that other humans think are “powerful.” Rather, he wishes them to act in ways that God considers “powerful,” which are ways that the other humans might consider to be “weak.”

### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul uses the spatial metaphor “in Christ” (often with another name for “Christ,” such as “Lord” or “Jesus”) very frequently in this letter. This metaphor emphasizes that believers are as closely united to Christ as if they were inside him. Paul believes that this is true for all believers, and sometimes he uses “in Christ” simply to identify that what he is speaking about is true for those who believe in Jesus. Other times, he emphasizes union with Christ as the means or the basis for some statement or exhortation. See the notes on specific verses for help in understanding the contextual meaning of “in Christ” and related phrases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### How should “brothers” be translated?

Many times in this letter, Paul directly addresses or refers to people he calls “brothers.” Often, a direct address to the “brothers” indicates that Paul is beginning a new section. The word “brothers” refers in general to fellow believers, both male and female. Paul uses this word because he considers believers to be as closely united together as siblings in a family. Consider what word or phrase would best express both the reference to fellow believers and the idea that these fellow believers are as close as family members. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])

### How should extended metaphors be translated?

Throughout this letter, Paul uses long or extended metaphors. In [3:1–17](../03/01.md), he speaks about children, farming, construction, and temples to discuss how he and others who preach the gospel should relate to the Corinthians. In [5:6–8](../05/06.md), he uses the Jewish festival of Passover to encourage the Corinthians to behave in a certain way. In [9:9–11](../09/09.md), he uses a farming metaphor to speak about receiving money for preaching the gospel, and in [9:24–27](../09/24.md), he uses metaphors related to athletic competitions to encourage the Corinthians to behave in a certain way. In [12:12–27](../12/12.md), Paul uses the human body as an analogy and metaphor for the church. Finally, in [15:36–38](../15/36.md), [42–44](../15/42.md), Paul uses a farming metaphor to speak about the resurrection of the dead. Since these extended metaphors are a significant part of Paul’s argument in these sections, you should retain the metaphors in your translation if possible or express the idea by using an analogy. See the chapter introductions and notes for more information and translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])

### How should rhetorical questions be translated?

Paul asks many questions in this letter. He does not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he asks these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. If your readers would understand these kinds of questions, you should retain them in your translation. If your readers would understand these kinds of questions, you could supply the answers or express the questions as statements. See the notes on each rhetorical question for the implied answer and ways to translate the question as a statement. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### How should euphemisms be translated?

Paul uses euphemisms in multiple places in this letter, particularly when he is discussing sexual activity or death. If possible, use similar euphemisms in your translation. See the notes on each verse that has a euphemism for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])

### How should “you” and “we” be translated?

Throughout the letter, you should assume that “you,” “your,” and “yours” are plural and refer to the Corinthian believers unless a note specifies that the form of “you” is singular. Similarly, throughout the letter, you should assume that “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ours” include Paul, those who work with Paul, and the Corinthian believers unless a notes specifies that the form of “we” excludes the Corinthian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians?

In the following verses, ancient manuscripts do not all have the same words. The ULT uses the words that are found in most of the earliest manuscripts. When you translate these verses, you should compare the ULT with any translations that your readers may be familiar with to see what your readers may expect. Unless there is a good reason to use the alternate words, you should follow the ULT. See the footnotes and notes at each of these verses for more information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])

* “the mystery of God” ([2:1](../02/01.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “the testimony of God.”
* “God judges” ([5:13](../05/13.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “God will judge.”
* “glorify God in your body” ([6:20](../06/20.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “glorify God in your body and in your spirit, which belong to God.”
* “as under the law, not being under the law myself in order to gain those under the law” ([9:20](../09/20.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “as under the law in order to gain those under the law.”
* “put the Lord to the test” ([10:9](../10/09.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “put Christ to the test.”
* “and conscience—” ([10:28](../10/28.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “and conscience, for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord—”
* “I hand over my body so that I might boast” ([13:3](../13/03.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “I hand over my body to be burned.”
* “let him be ignorant” ([14:38](../14/38.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “he is considered ignorant.”
* “let us also bear” ([15:49](../15/49.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “we will also bear.”
* “Amen” ([16:24](../16/24.md)). Some ancient manuscripts do not have “Amen.” +1CO front intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians

1. Opening (1:1–9)
2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)
3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)
4. On abstinence (7:1–40)
5. On food (8:1–11:1)
6. On head coverings (11:2–16)
7. On the Lord’s Supper (11:17–34)
8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)
9. On the resurrection of the dead (15:1–58)
10. On the collection and visits (16:1–12)
11. Closing: final commands and greetings (16:13–24)

More detailed outlines for each of these sections appear in the chapter introductions.

### Who Wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians?

The author identifies himself as Paul the apostle. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee, and he persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus. Paul first visited the Corinthians during his third time traveling around the Roman Empire (see [Acts 18:1–18](../act/18/01.md)). After that, Paul wrote this letter while he was in Ephesus ([16:8](../16/08.md)). He lived and proclaimed the gospel there for more than two years (see [Acts 19:1–10](../act/19/01.md)), and it was sometime during those years that he wrote this letter to the Corinthians.

### What Is the Book of 1 Corinthians about?

While Paul was in Ephesus, he learned things about the Corinthians. People from “Chloe” told Paul about “factions” in the Corinthian group ([1:11](../01/11.md)), and the Corinthian believers wrote a letter to him asking questions ([7:1](../07/01.md)). Paul also mentions that he has “heard” things about what they are doing and saying (see [5:1](../05/01.md); [11:18](../11/18.md); [15:12](../15/12.md)). He may have learned these things from the people “from Chloe,” from their letter, or from other sources, such as “Stephanas and Fortunatus and Achaicus,” who visited Paul before he wrote this letter (see [16:17](../16/17.md)). Paul writes his letter in response to what he has learned about how the Corinthians are thinking and acting. He addresses multiple topics in order. You can see these topics in the outline above. Paul focuses on encouraging the Corinthian believers to remain faithful to Jesus and to behave as those who follow Jesus.

### How Should the Title of this Book Be Translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians” or “1 Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Corinth” or “A First Letter to the Christians in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Corinth like?

Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea and in an important location, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. Therefore, many different kinds of people lived in the city, and there were many wealthy people. Also, people in Corinth worshiped many different gods, and their worship could include food and sexual activity. In this culture, Christians who did not participate in worshiping at least some of the many gods were often considered to be strange, and people would not want to associate with them.

### What was the issue that Paul was addressing in this letter?

Paul addresses many specific topics and issues in his letter to the Corinthian believers. These include church unity, sexual behavior, worship practices, food sacrificed to idols, spiritual gifts, and the resurrection. It is possible that all the problems that Paul wishes to correct in these areas come from one single issue in the Corinthian church. It could be that false teachers are leading the Corinthians astray, or it could be that the Corinthians are acting like everyone else in their culture, even when this is not properly following Jesus. Most likely, the Corinthians believed that they had already received all the blessings that Christians will receive when Jesus comes back to the earth. They may have also believed the false teaching that matter and physical things were less important than “spiritual” things. Whatever exactly the primary problem is, what is clear is that the Corinthians were not properly following Jesus in how they were thinking and acting, and Paul writes the letter to guide them back to faithfully following Jesus.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What does Paul mean when he talks about “wisdom” and “foolishness”?

These words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. If someone creates plans and ideas that work out well, that person is wise. If someone creates plans and ideas that do not work out well, that person is foolish. The wise person makes good choices, and the foolish person makes bad choices. Paul uses these words to contrast what humans think is wise or foolish with what God thinks is wise or foolish. By doing this, Paul wishes to keep the Corinthians from thinking in ways that other humans consider to be “wise.” Rather, he wishes them to think in ways that God considers to be “wise,” which are ways that the other humans might consider to be “foolish.”

### What does Paul mean when he talks about “knowledge”?

Paul uses “knowledge” to refer to comprehending or understanding what is true about God and the world. Paul emphasizes that no one really has “knowledge” without the help of the Holy Spirit. He also wants those who have this “knowledge” to continue to act in ways that respect and honor those who do not have the “knowledge.” In other words, he wants to convince the Corinthians that acting in love toward fellow believers is more valuable than any “knowledge.” So, Paul argues that “knowledge” is valuable, but other things are more important.

### What does Paul mean when he talks about “power” and “weakness”?

Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Paul contrasts what humans think is powerful or weak with what God thinks is powerful or weak. By doing this, Paul wishes to keep the Corinthians from acting in ways that other humans think are “powerful.” Rather, he wishes them to act in ways that God considers “powerful,” which are ways that the other humans might consider to be “weak.”

### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul uses the spatial metaphor “in Christ” (often with another name for “Christ,” such as “Lord” or “Jesus”) very frequently in this letter. This metaphor emphasizes that believers are as closely united to Christ as if they were inside him. Paul believes that this is true for all believers, and sometimes he uses “in Christ” simply to identify that what he is speaking about is true for those who believe in Jesus. Other times, he emphasizes union with Christ as the means or the basis for some statement or exhortation. See the notes on specific verses for help in understanding the contextual meaning of “in Christ” and related phrases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### How should “brothers” be translated?

Many times in this letter, Paul directly addresses or refers to people he calls “brothers.” Often, a direct address to the “brothers” indicates that Paul is beginning a new section. The word “brothers” refers in general to fellow believers, both male and female. Paul uses this word because he considers believers to be as closely united together as siblings in a family. Consider what word or phrase would best express both the reference to fellow believers and the idea that these fellow believers are as close as family members. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])

### How should extended metaphors be translated?

Throughout this letter, Paul uses long or extended metaphors. In [3:1–17](../03/01.md), he speaks about children, farming, construction, and temples to discuss how he and others who preach the gospel should relate to the Corinthians. In [5:6–8](../05/06.md), he uses the Jewish festival of Passover to encourage the Corinthians to behave in a certain way. In [9:9–11](../09/09.md), he uses a farming metaphor to speak about receiving money for preaching the gospel, and in [9:24–27](../09/24.md), he uses metaphors related to athletic competitions to encourage the Corinthians to behave in a certain way. In [12:12–27](../12/12.md), Paul uses the human body as an analogy and metaphor for the church. Finally, in [15:36–38](../15/36.md), [42–44](../15/42.md), Paul uses a farming metaphor to speak about the resurrection of the dead. Since these extended metaphors are a significant part of Paul’s argument in these sections, you should retain the metaphors in your translation if possible or express the idea by using an analogy. See the chapter introductions and notes for more information and translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])

### How should rhetorical questions be translated?

Paul asks many questions in this letter. He does not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he asks these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. If your readers would understand these kinds of questions, you should retain them in your translation. If your readers would understand these kinds of questions, you could supply the answers or express the questions as statements. See the notes on each rhetorical question for the implied answer and ways to translate the question as a statement. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### How should euphemisms be translated?

Paul uses euphemisms in multiple places in this letter, particularly when he is discussing sexual activity or death. If possible, use similar euphemisms in your translation. See the notes on each verse that has a euphemism for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])

### How should “you” and “we” be translated?

Throughout the letter, you should assume that “you,” “your,” and “yours” are plural and refer to the Corinthian believers unless a note specifies that the form of “you” is singular. Similarly, throughout the letter, you should assume that “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ours” include Paul, those who work with Paul, and the Corinthian believers unless a notes specifies that the form of “we” excludes the Corinthian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians?

In the following verses, ancient manuscripts do not all have the same words. The ULT uses the words that are found in most of the earliest manuscripts. When you translate these verses, you should compare the ULT with any translations that your readers may be familiar with to see what your readers may expect. Unless there is a good reason to use the alternate words, you should follow the ULT. See the footnotes and notes at each of these verses for more information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])

* “the mystery of God” ([2:1](../02/01.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “the testimony of God.”
* “God judges” ([5:13](../05/13.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “God will judge.”
* “glorify God in your body” ([6:20](../06/20.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “glorify God in your body and in your spirit, which belong to God.”
* “as under the law, not being under the law myself in order to gain those under the law” ([9:20](../09/20.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “as under the law in order to gain those under the law.”
* “put the Lord to the test” ([10:9](../10/09.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “put Christ to the test.”
* “and conscience—” ([10:28](../10/28.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “and conscience, for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord—”
* “I hand over my body so that I might boast” ([13:3](../13/03.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “I hand over my body to be burned.”
* “let him be ignorant” ([14:38](../14/38.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “he is considered ignorant.”
* “let us also bear” ([15:49](../15/49.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “we will also bear.”
* “Amen” ([16:24](../16/24.md)). Some ancient manuscripts do not have “Amen.” 1CO 1 intro ud5y 0 # 1 Corinthians 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Opening (1:1–9)
* Greetings and Blessing (1:1–3)
* Praise and Prayer (1:4–9)
2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)
* Divisions, Leaders, and Baptism (1:10–17)
* Wisdom, Foolishness, and Boasting (1:18–31)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Disunity

In this chapter, Paul urges the Corinthians to stop dividing up into smaller groups that identify themselves with one specific leader. He mentions some of the leaders, including himself, in [1:12](../01/12.md). The Corinthians probably chose these leaders themselves, since there is no evidence that any of the people mentioned in [1:12](../01/12.md) were trying to create their own groups. People in the Corinthian church were probably trying to sound wiser or more powerful than other people, so they would choose a group and a leader and say they were better than others. Paul argues against these kinds of divisions first, and then he argues against anyone who tries to sound wiser and more powerful than others.

### Wisdom and foolishness

Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks of both wisdom and foolishness. These words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. If someone creates plans and ideas that work out well, that person is wise. If someone creates plans and ideas that do not work out well, that person is foolish. The wise person makes good choices, and the foolish person makes bad choices. Use words in your language that indicate these ideas. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])

### Power and weakness

Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks of both power and weakness. These words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Use words in your language that indicate these ideas (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Metaphors about Christ

In this chapter, Paul says that “Christ is the power of God and the wisdom of God” ([1:24](../01/24.md)) and that Christ “was made for us wisdom from God, righteousness, and also sanctification and redemption” ([1:30](../01/30.md)). With these two verses, Paul is not saying that Christ is no longer a person and is instead these abstract ideas. Rather, Paul is speaking in this way because Christ and his work for believers include all of these abstract ideas. Christ’s work is powerful and wise, and gives those who believe in him wisdom, righteousness, sanctification, and redemption. For ways to translate these two statements, see the notes on these two verses.

### Rhetorical questions

Paul asks many questions in this chapter. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Positive and negative uses of “wisdom”

Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for God’s wisdom and negative words for human wisdom.

### Using different perspectives

Sometimes, Paul speaks of God as if God were “foolish” and “weak” ([1:25](../01/25.md)) and as if he chose “foolish” and “weak” things ([1:27](../01/27.md)). Paul does not actually think that God is foolish and weak and chooses foolish and weak things. Rather, he is speaking from the perspective of normal human thinking. What God does, from a human perspective, is “weak” and “foolish.” He makes this clear in several verses. For example, in [1:26](../01/26.md), Paul says that most of the Corinthians were not wise “according to the flesh.” This is Paul’s way of saying that they were not wise according to human thinking. If possible translate the times Paul speaks from a human perspective with the same words he uses for “weakness” and “foolishness” when he speaks from God’s perspective. If it is necessary to distinguish these uses, use a word or phrase that explains which perspective Paul is using. He does this himself sometimes, and if it is necessary, you could do it in other places as well.

### Information presented out of order

The ULT puts parentheses around [1:16](../01/16.md) because Paul is speaking about whom he baptized, an idea that fits logically with [1:14](../01/14.md) and not as well after [1:15](../01/15.md). Paul has remembered someone else that he baptized, and instead of going back and putting that information in [1:14](../01/14.md), he includes it in [1:16](../01/16.md), interrupting the flow of the argument. If possible, keep [1:16](../01/16.md) where it is, and use a form in your language that indicates that Paul is interrupting his argument. If there is no way to do this in your language, you could move [1:16](../01/16.md) so that it is between [1:14](../01/14.md) and [1:15](../01/15.md). 1CO 1 1 o7ie figs-123person Παῦλος 1 In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the first person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “From Paul. I have been” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 1 1 e8j3 translate-names Παῦλος 1 Paul Here and throughout the letter, **Paul** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1433,7 +1433,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 10 33 k86v figs-abstractnouns τὸ ἐμαυτοῦ σύμφορον, ἀλλὰ τὸ τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **benefit**, you can express the idea by using a verb such as “benefit.” Alternate translation: “what benefits me but what benefits the many” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1CO 10 33 hd2z figs-nominaladj τῶν πολλῶν 1 the many Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of many people” or “of everyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1CO 10 33 qsg4 figs-activepassive σωθῶσιν 1 the many If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **saved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God might save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. On food (8:1–11:1)
* Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)
6. On head coverings (11:2–16)
* Heads and honor (11:2–7)
* Order for men and women (11:8–12)
* Argument from nature (11:13–16)
7. On the Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)
* The problem at Corinth (11:17–22)
* The tradition from the Lord (11:23–26)
* Proper behavior at the Lord’s Supper (11:27–34)

Many translations include 11:1 as the conclusion of the last section of chapter 10. Consider whether translations your readers are familiar with do this or not.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The head

Paul refers frequently to “the head” in [11:2–10](../11/02.md). In some places, “head” refers to a person’s body part: his or her head (see the first occurrences of “head” in [11:4–5](../11/04.md); see also [11:6–7](../11/06.md); [11:10](../11/10.md)). In other places, “head” is used to refer to a specific kind of relationship between persons (see [11:3](../11/03.md)). Sometimes, it is not clear which use of “head” Paul intends, and perhaps it could be both (see especially the second occurrences of “head” in [11:4–5](../11/04.md)). See the notes on these verses for translation options in context. For the figurative meaning of “head,” see the section below on “Head as metaphor.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/head]])

### Women and men

Throughout [11:2–16](../11/02.md), Paul uses words that could identify “women” and “men” in general or that could more specifically refer to “wives” and “husbands.” Further, Paul refers to the story about how God created the first man and the first woman as it is told in [Genesis 2:15–25](../gen/02/15.md) (see [11:8–9](../11/08.md)). This means that Paul could be speaking about women and men in general, husbands and wives in general, or the first man and first woman whenever he uses the words “man” and “woman.” It is likely that Paul either meant women and men in general in every verse (the ULT models this option), or he had different nuances of the words “woman” and “man” in mind in different verses (the UST models this option). If your language has words that are general enough that they could indicate any of these possible nuances of “woman” and “man,” you could use those words in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])

### Head coverings

Paul’s instructions in [11:2–16](../11/02.md) about “head coverings” are not clear enough to indicate exactly what the Corinthians were doing or what exactly Paul wants them to do instead. There are multiple issues that are uncertain: (1) what is the “head covering” that Paul speaks about? (2) What does the “head covering” indicate in the Corinthians’ culture? (3) Why would some women uncover their heads?

First (1), the “head covering” can be understood in roughly three ways: (a) a cloth that was worn on the top and back of the head, (b) long hair itself (it is unclear how long it would need to be to count as “long”), or (c) a specific hairstyle. The UST generally follows the interpretation that argues that the head covering is a “cloth.” Other options are included in the notes.

Second (2), the “head covering” could be an indication of (a) proper gender distinctions between men (uncovered) and women (covered), (b) submission to authority (that is, a wife’s submission to her husband), or (c) the honor and respectability of the woman (and men who are related to her). Of course, the “head covering” could indicate several of these options.

Third (3), women in Corinth might have uncovered their heads for several reasons: (a) they thought that the work of Jesus had nullified the importance of gender, so head coverings that indicated gender distinctions were unnecessary; (b) they thought that, in church worship, there was no hierarchy of authority based on gender or marriage, so head coverings that indicated submission to authority were unnecessary; or (c) they considered the whole group of believers to be family, so head coverings that indicated honor and respectability in public were unnecessary. Of course, several of these reasons might be true.

The number of interpretations and options indicates again how little we know about what Paul is talking about in [11:2–16](../11/02.md). If possible, your translation should allow for all these interpretations since the original text of 1 Corinthians also does. For specific translation options and comments on specific issues, see the notes on the verses.

### “because of the angels”

In [11:10](../11/10.md), Paul makes his claim that “the woman ought to have authority on the head,” and then he gives a reason: “because of the angels.” However, Paul does not state what about “angels” he has in mind. There are at least three important options for understanding what he could mean. First (1), sometimes the angels are described as those who oversee the order of the world and especially of worship. The woman having “authority on the head” would satisfy what the angels require for worship practices. Second (2), sometimes the angels are described as sexually attracted to earthly women. The woman “ought to have authority on the head” to keep the angels from acting or being tempted to act sexually with these women. Third (3), sometimes angels are described as involved in the worship of the community. The woman “ought to have authority on the head” as a sign of respect to them. Paul’s sentence does not specify anything beyond the fact that “the angels” are a reason for the “authority on the head,” so the best translation also expresses “the angels” as the reason without choosing between options. (See [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/angel]])

### The issue with the Lord’s Supper

In [11:17–34](../11/17.md), Paul corrects how the Corinthians are practicing the Lord’s Supper. Since the Corinthians would know the problem he is addressing, Paul himself is not very specific about it. The clearest hints about what the problem is can be found in [11:21](../11/21.md) and [11:33](../11/33.md). From these two verses, the problem with how the Corinthians are practicing the Lord’s Supper can be understood in primarily three ways. First (1), the people who arrived first began to eat right away without waiting for everyone else to gather. Because of this, they would have too much to eat and drink, and those who arrived later would not get enough. Second (2), some people, especially those who were more wealthy or powerful, would bring or receive special food and more of it than other people. Third (3), some people might not be showing hospitality or offering to share food with others who did not have their own houses or lots of food. If possible, your translation should allow for readers to accept several or all three of these possible understandings. See the notes for specific translation options, especially the notes on [11:21](../11/21.md) and [11:33](../11/33.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lordssupper]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Rhetorical questions

In [11:13–15](../11/13.md) and [22](../11/22.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Head as metaphor

As noted above, “head” functions in [11:3–5](../11/03.md). The two most common understandings are these: (1) “head” is a metaphor for authority, and (2) “head” is a metaphor for source. A third (3) option is to understand “head” as a metaphor for whom one represents or to whom one brings honor. Of course, some or all of these three options could be understood as part of the “head” metaphor. What is clear is that Paul uses “head” at least partly because he wants to connect the figurative use of “head” with the nonfigurative use of “head” for the body part. Because of this connection, you should try to express the “head” metaphor with a word that refers to the body part. For specific issues and translation options, see the notes on [11:3–5](../11/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/head]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Metaphor with bread and cup

In [11:24–25](../11/24.md), Jesus identifies bread as “my body” and the wine in a cup as “the new covenant in my blood.” These metaphors can be understood in at least three primary ways: (1) the bread and wine somehow become Jesus’ body and blood; (2) Jesus’ body and blood are present, physically or spiritually, in the bread and wine; or (3) the bread and wine memorialize or symbolize Jesus’ body and blood. Christians are divided on this question, and metaphors that link body and blood to bread and wine are very significant in the Bible and in Christian teaching. For these reasons, it is best to preserve these metaphors without expressing them as similes or in another nonfigurative way. If you must express them in another way, see the notes on [11:24–25](../11/24.md) for translation possibilities. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/bread]], and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Legal language

In [11:27–32](../11/27.md), Paul uses a number of words that would normally be used in a court of law or in other legal settings. These words include “guilty,” “examine,” “discern,” “judge,” and “condemn.” If possible, use words related to legal settings or courts of law in your translation of these verses.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Translating gendered words

In [11:2–16](../11/02.md), Paul uses masculine and feminine words to identify when he is addressing men and when he is addressing women. Unlike in most of the previous chapters, then, you should intentionally preserve most of the gendered language in this chapter. The notes will identify any cases of gendered language that could refer to all people. If there is no note, assume that the gendered language is functioning to distinguish between genders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])

### Are [11:8–9](../11/08.md) a parenthesis?

Some translations mark [11:8–9](../11/08.md) as an interruption or parenthesis in Paul’s argument. They do this because [11:10](../11/10.md) seems to draw a conclusion from the point made at the end of [11:7](../11/07.md). However, it is also quite possible that [11:10](../11/10.md) draws its conclusion from all of [11:7–9](../11/07.md). Because of that, neither the UST nor the ULT marks [11:8–9](../11/08.md) as a parenthesis. Consider whether translations your readers are familiar with use parentheses here or not.

### Different accounts of the Last Supper

In [11:23–25](../11/23.md), Paul recounts the tradition of the Last Supper, which is the last meal Jesus had with his closest disciples before he was arrested and put to death. Paul uses this story to explain how the Corinthians should act at the Lord’s Supper, so he considers the Last Supper the time when Jesus began the practice of what we call the Lord’s Supper. The same story can be found in very similar form in [Luke 22:19–20](../luk/22/19.md) and in slightly different form in [Matthew 26:26–29](../mat/26/26.md) and [Mark 14:22–25](../mrk/14/22.md). You should translate the story as you find it here without making it the same as the other accounts.

### “First, …”

In [11:18](../11/18.md), Paul uses “first” to introduce his instructions about the Lord’s Supper. However, he never goes on to use “second.” Most likely, he did not think he had enough time or space to cover further commands, which would have been about the Lord’s Supper, related issues of worship, or something else. In [11:34](../11/34.md), he says “Now {about} the remaining things, I will give directions when I come.” Perhaps these “remaining things” included what he planned to introduce with “second” and “third” but never did. Consider whether your readers would be confused by a “first” without a “second.” If so, you could make it clearer that [11:34](../11/34.md) refers to “second” (and so on) instructions. +1CO 11 intro abce 0 # 1 Corinthians 11 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

5. On food (8:1–11:1)
* Both freedom and care for others (10:23–11:1)
6. On head coverings (11:2–16)
* Heads and honor (11:2–7)
* Order for men and women (11:8–12)
* Argument from nature (11:13–16)
7. On the Lord’s Supper (11:17–34)
* The problem at Corinth (11:17–22)
* The tradition from the Lord (11:23–26)
* Proper behavior at the Lord’s Supper (11:27–34)

Many translations include 11:1 as the conclusion of the last section of chapter 10. Consider whether translations your readers are familiar with do this or not.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The head

Paul refers frequently to “the head” in [11:2–10](../11/02.md). In some places, “head” refers to a person’s body part: his or her head (see the first occurrences of “head” in [11:4–5](../11/04.md); see also [11:6–7](../11/06.md); [11:10](../11/10.md)). In other places, “head” is used to refer to a specific kind of relationship between persons (see [11:3](../11/03.md)). Sometimes, it is not clear which use of “head” Paul intends, and perhaps it could be both (see especially the second occurrences of “head” in [11:4–5](../11/04.md)). See the notes on these verses for translation options in context. For the figurative meaning of “head,” see the section below on “Head as metaphor.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/head]])

### Women and men

Throughout [11:2–16](../11/02.md), Paul uses words that could identify “women” and “men” in general or that could more specifically refer to “wives” and “husbands.” Further, Paul refers to the story about how God created the first man and the first woman as it is told in [Genesis 2:15–25](../gen/02/15.md) (see [11:8–9](../11/08.md)). This means that Paul could be speaking about women and men in general, husbands and wives in general, or the first man and first woman whenever he uses the words “man” and “woman.” It is likely that Paul either meant women and men in general in every verse (the ULT models this option), or he had different nuances of the words “woman” and “man” in mind in different verses (the UST models this option). If your language has words that are general enough that they could indicate any of these possible nuances of “woman” and “man,” you could use those words in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])

### Head coverings

Paul’s instructions in [11:2–16](../11/02.md) about “head coverings” are not clear enough to indicate exactly what the Corinthians were doing or what exactly Paul wants them to do instead. There are multiple issues that are uncertain: (1) what is the “head covering” that Paul speaks about? (2) What does the “head covering” indicate in the Corinthians’ culture? (3) Why would some women uncover their heads?

First (1), the “head covering” can be understood in roughly three ways: (a) a cloth that was worn on the top and back of the head, (b) long hair itself (it is unclear how long it would need to be to count as “long”), or (c) a specific hairstyle. The UST generally follows the interpretation that argues that the head covering is a “cloth.” Other options are included in the notes.

Second (2), the “head covering” could be an indication of (a) proper gender distinctions between men (uncovered) and women (covered), (b) submission to authority (that is, a wife’s submission to her husband), or (c) the honor and respectability of the woman (and men who are related to her). Of course, the “head covering” could indicate several of these options.

Third (3), women in Corinth might have uncovered their heads for several reasons: (a) they thought that the work of Jesus had nullified the importance of gender, so head coverings that indicated gender distinctions were unnecessary; (b) they thought that, in church worship, there was no hierarchy of authority based on gender or marriage, so head coverings that indicated submission to authority were unnecessary; or (c) they considered the whole group of believers to be family, so head coverings that indicated honor and respectability in public were unnecessary. Of course, several of these reasons might be true.

The number of interpretations and options indicates again how little we know about what Paul is talking about in [11:2–16](../11/02.md). If possible, your translation should allow for all these interpretations since the original text of 1 Corinthians also does. For specific translation options and comments on specific issues, see the notes on the verses.

### “because of the angels”

In [11:10](../11/10.md), Paul makes his claim that “the woman ought to have authority on the head,” and then he gives a reason: “because of the angels.” However, Paul does not state what about “angels” he has in mind. There are at least three important options for understanding what he could mean. First (1), sometimes the angels are described as those who oversee the order of the world and especially of worship. The woman having “authority on the head” would satisfy what the angels require for worship practices. Second (2), sometimes the angels are described as sexually attracted to earthly women. The woman “ought to have authority on the head” to keep the angels from acting or being tempted to act sexually with these women. Third (3), sometimes angels are described as involved in the worship of the community. The woman “ought to have authority on the head” as a sign of respect to them. Paul’s sentence does not specify anything beyond the fact that “the angels” are a reason for the “authority on the head,” so the best translation also expresses “the angels” as the reason without choosing between options. (See [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/angel]])

### The issue with the Lord’s Supper

In [11:17–34](../11/17.md), Paul corrects how the Corinthians are practicing the Lord’s Supper. Since the Corinthians would know the problem he is addressing, Paul himself is not very specific about it. The clearest hints about what the problem is can be found in [11:21](../11/21.md) and [11:33](../11/33.md). From these two verses, the problem with how the Corinthians are practicing the Lord’s Supper can be understood in primarily three ways. First (1), the people who arrived first began to eat right away without waiting for everyone else to gather. Because of this, they would have too much to eat and drink, and those who arrived later would not get enough. Second (2), some people, especially those who were more wealthy or powerful, would bring or receive special food and more of it than other people. Third (3), some people might not be showing hospitality or offering to share food with others who did not have their own houses or lots of food. If possible, your translation should allow for readers to accept several or all three of these possible understandings. See the notes for specific translation options, especially the notes on [11:21](../11/21.md) and [11:33](../11/33.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lordssupper]])

## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter

### Rhetorical questions

In [11:13–15](../11/13.md) and [22](../11/22.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Head as metaphor

As noted above, “head” functions in [11:3–5](../11/03.md). The two most common understandings are these: (1) “head” is a metaphor for authority, and (2) “head” is a metaphor for source. A third (3) option is to understand “head” as a metaphor for whom one represents or to whom one brings honor. Of course, some or all of these three options could be understood as part of the “head” metaphor. What is clear is that Paul uses “head” at least partly because he wants to connect the figurative use of “head” with the nonfigurative use of “head” for the body part. Because of this connection, you should try to express the “head” metaphor with a word that refers to the body part. For specific issues and translation options, see the notes on [11:3–5](../11/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/head]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Metaphor with bread and cup

In [11:24–25](../11/24.md), Jesus identifies bread as “my body” and the wine in a cup as “the new covenant in my blood.” These metaphors can be understood in at least three primary ways: (1) the bread and wine somehow become Jesus’ body and blood; (2) Jesus’ body and blood are present, physically or spiritually, in the bread and wine; or (3) the bread and wine memorialize or symbolize Jesus’ body and blood. Christians are divided on this question, and metaphors that link body and blood to bread and wine are very significant in the Bible and in Christian teaching. For these reasons, it is best to preserve these metaphors without expressing them as similes or in another nonfigurative way. If you must express them in another way, see the notes on [11:24–25](../11/24.md) for translation possibilities. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/body]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/bread]], and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Legal language

In [11:27–32](../11/27.md), Paul uses a number of words that would normally be used in a court of law or in other legal settings. These words include “guilty,” “examine,” “discern,” “judge,” and “condemn.” If possible, use words related to legal settings or courts of law in your translation of these verses.

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### Translating gendered words

In [11:2–16](../11/02.md), Paul uses masculine and feminine words to identify when he is addressing men and when he is addressing women. Unlike in most of the previous chapters, then, you should intentionally preserve most of the gendered language in this chapter. The notes will identify any cases of gendered language that could refer to all people. If there is no note, assume that the gendered language is functioning to distinguish between genders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])

### Are [11:8–9](../11/08.md) a parenthesis?

Some translations mark [11:8–9](../11/08.md) as an interruption or parenthesis in Paul’s argument. They do this because [11:10](../11/10.md) seems to draw a conclusion from the point made at the end of [11:7](../11/07.md). However, it is also quite possible that [11:10](../11/10.md) draws its conclusion from all of [11:7–9](../11/07.md). Because of that, neither the UST nor the ULT marks [11:8–9](../11/08.md) as a parenthesis. Consider whether translations your readers are familiar with use parentheses here or not.

### Different accounts of the Last Supper

In [11:23–25](../11/23.md), Paul recounts the tradition of the Last Supper, which is the last meal Jesus had with his closest disciples before he was arrested and put to death. Paul uses this story to explain how the Corinthians should act at the Lord’s Supper, so he considers the Last Supper the time when Jesus began the practice of what we call the Lord’s Supper. The same story can be found in very similar form in [Luke 22:19–20](../luk/22/19.md) and in slightly different form in [Matthew 26:26–29](../mat/26/26.md) and [Mark 14:22–25](../mrk/14/22.md). You should translate the story as you find it here without making it the same as the other accounts.

### “First, …”

In [11:18](../11/18.md), Paul uses “first” to introduce his instructions about the Lord’s Supper. However, he never goes on to use “second.” Most likely, he did not think he had enough time or space to cover further commands, which would have been about the Lord’s Supper, related issues of worship, or something else. In [11:34](../11/34.md), he says “Now {about} the remaining things, I will give directions when I come.” Perhaps these “remaining things” included what he planned to introduce with “second” and “third” but never did. Consider whether your readers would be confused by a “first” without a “second.” If so, you could make it clearer that [11:34](../11/34.md) refers to “second” (and so on) instructions. 1CO 11 1 h5fg μιμηταί μου γίνεσθε, καθὼς κἀγὼ Χριστοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: Alternate translation: “Imitate me, just as I also imitate Christ” 1CO 11 2 epnu grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 you remember me in everything Here, **Now** introduces a whole new section in Paul’s argument. He **Now** begins speaking about proper behavior during worship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Now** with a word or phrase that introduces a new topic or leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1CO 11 2 ibw5 figs-metonymy μου 1 you remember me in everything Here, **me** refers specifically to what Paul teaches and how Paul behaves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **me** by clarifying exactly what about **me** Paul has in mind. Alternate translation: “my doctrine and behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) diff --git a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv index ca4cd25bb9..8c4c6593b5 100644 --- a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -EPH front intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of Ephesians

1. Greeting and prayer for the spiritual blessings in Christ (1:1-23)
1. Sin and salvation (2:1-10)
1. Unity and peace (2:11-22)
1. Mystery of Christ in the believers, made known (3:1-13)
1. Prayer for riches of his glory to make the believers strong (3:14-21)
1. Unity of the Spirit, building up the Body of Christ (4:1-16)
1. New life (4:17-32)
1. Imitators of God (5:1-21)
1. 1 Wives and husbands; children and parents; slaves and masters (5:22-6:9)
11. Armor of God (6:10-20)
1. Final greeting (6:21-24)

### Who wrote the Book of Ephesians?

Paul wrote Ephesians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

The Apostle Paul helped start the church in Ephesus on one of his trips. He also lived in Ephesus for a year and a half and helped the believers there. Paul probably wrote this letter while he was in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Ephesians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Ephesus to explain God’s love for them in Christ Jesus. He described the blessings that God was giving them because they were now united with Christ. He explained that all believers are united together, whether Jew or Gentile. Paul also wanted to encourage them to live in a way that pleases God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Ephesians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Ephesus” or “A Letter to the Christians in Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the “mystery” in the book of Ephesians?

The expression translated in the ULT as “mystery” or “hidden” occurs six times. By it, Paul always meant something that God had to reveal to human beings because they could not know it on their own. It always referred to something about how God planned to save mankind. Sometimes it was about his plan to bring about peace between himself and mankind. Sometimes it was more specifically about his plan to save both Jews and Gentiles by uniting them through Christ. This hidden truth was that Gentiles are now able to benefit from the promises of Christ as equals with the Jews.

### What did Paul say about salvation and righteous living?

Paul said much about salvation and righteous living in this letter and in many of his letters. He said that God has been very kind and saved Christians because they believe in Jesus. Therefore, after they become Christians, they should live in a righteous way to show that they have faith in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers who may read this letter. The three exceptions to this are: 5:14, 6:2, and 6:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What did Paul mean by the “new self” or the “new man”?

When Paul spoke of the “new self” or the “new man,” he meant the new nature that a believer receives from the Holy Spirit. This new nature was created in God’s image (See: 4:24). The phrase “new man” is also used for God bringing about peace between Jews and Gentiles. God brought them together as one people group that belong to him (See: 2:15).

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Ephesians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of several ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the use of “holy” to express the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another use of “holy” is to express the idea that God is perfect and faultless. A third use is to express the idea that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “saints.” (See: 1:1, 4)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “saint” or “saints.”
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 3:5)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 20; 2:6, 7, 10, 13, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22; 3:5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 21; 4:1, 17, 21, 32; 5:8, 18, 19; 6:1, 10, 18, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Ephesians?
* “in Ephesus” (1:1). Some of the earliest manuscripts do not include this phrase. It is likely that Paul intended this letter to be read in many churches, including Ephesus and many other cities. He may have originally left a blank space for the city name to be filled in by those copying the letter and carrying it to different cities. But “Ephesus” is the only name found on manuscripts that have a city name. Therefore, the ULT, UST, and many modern versions include it.
* “because we are members of his body” (5:30). Most modern versions, including the ULT and UST, read in this way. Some older versions read, “because we are members of his body and of his bones.” Translators might decide to choose the second reading if other versions in their area have it that way. If translators choose the second reading, they should put the additional words inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they are probably not original to the book of Ephesians.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +EPH front intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of Ephesians

1. Greeting and prayer for the spiritual blessings in Christ (1:1–23)
1. Sin and salvation (2:1–10)
1. Unity and peace (2:11–22)
1. Mystery of Christ in the believers, made known (3:1–13)
1. Prayer for riches of his glory to make the believers strong (3:14–21)
1. Unity of the Spirit, building up the Body of Christ (4:1–16)
1. New life (4:17–32)
1. Imitators of God (5:1–21)
1. 1 Wives and husbands; children and parents; slaves and masters (5:22–6:9)
11. Armor of God (6:10–20)
1. Final greeting (6:21–24)

### Who wrote the Book of Ephesians?

Paul wrote Ephesians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

The Apostle Paul helped start the church in Ephesus on one of his trips. He also lived in Ephesus for a year and a half and helped the believers there. Paul probably wrote this letter while he was in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Ephesians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Ephesus to explain God’s love for them in Christ Jesus. He described the blessings that God was giving them because they were now united with Christ. He explained that all believers are united together, whether Jew or Gentile. Paul also wanted to encourage them to live in a way that pleases God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Ephesians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Ephesus” or “A Letter to the Christians in Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the “mystery” in the book of Ephesians?

The expression translated in the ULT as “mystery” or “hidden” occurs six times. By it, Paul always meant something that God had to reveal to human beings because they could not know it on their own. It always referred to something about how God planned to save mankind. Sometimes it was about his plan to bring about peace between himself and mankind. Sometimes it was more specifically about his plan to save both Jews and Gentiles by uniting them through Christ. This hidden truth was that Gentiles are now able to benefit from the promises of Christ as equals with the Jews.

### What did Paul say about salvation and righteous living?

Paul said much about salvation and righteous living in this letter and in many of his letters. He said that God has been very kind and saved Christians because they believe in Jesus. Therefore, after they become Christians, they should live in a righteous way to show that they have faith in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers who may read this letter. The three exceptions to this are: 5:14, 6:2, and 6:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What did Paul mean by the “new self” or the “new man”?

When Paul spoke of the “new self” or the “new man,” he meant the new nature that a believer receives from the Holy Spirit. This new nature was created in God’s image (See: 4:24). The phrase “new man” is also used for God bringing about peace between Jews and Gentiles. God brought them together as one people group that belong to him (See: 2:15).

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Ephesians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of several ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the use of “holy” to express the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another use of “holy” is to express the idea that God is perfect and faultless. A third use is to express the idea that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “saints.” (See: 1:1, 4)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “saint” or “saints.”
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 3:5)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 20; 2:6, 7, 10, 13, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22; 3:5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 21; 4:1, 17, 21, 32; 5:8, 18, 19; 6:1, 10, 18, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Ephesians?
* “in Ephesus” (1:1). Some of the earliest manuscripts do not include this phrase. It is likely that Paul intended this letter to be read in many churches, including Ephesus and many other cities. He may have originally left a blank space for the city name to be filled in by those copying the letter and carrying it to different cities. But “Ephesus” is the only name found on manuscripts that have a city name. Therefore, the ULT, UST, and many modern versions include it.
* “because we are members of his body” (5:30). Most modern versions, including the ULT and UST, read in this way. Some older versions read, “because we are members of his body and of his bones.” Translators might decide to choose the second reading if other versions in their area have it that way. If translators choose the second reading, they should put the additional words inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they are probably not original to the book of Ephesians.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) EPH 1 intro fg42 0 # Ephesians 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### “I pray”

Paul structures part of this chapter like a prayer of praise to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is teaching the church in Ephesus. He also tells the Ephesians how he is praying for them.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Predestination

Many scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” See the use of the word “predestine” in 1:5, 11. Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]]) EPH 1 1 kx1g figs-you 0 General Information: Paul names himself as the writer of this letter to the believers in the church at Ephesus (and elsewhere). Except where noted, all instances of “you” and “your” refer to the Ephesian believers as well as to all believers, and so are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EPH 1 1 ilf2 Παῦλος, ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ…τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν 1 Paul, an apostle of Christ Jesus … to the saints who are Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and the intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, an apostle of Jesus Christ … write this letter to you, God’s holy people” @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ EPH 4 18 k8qv figs-metaphor διὰ τὴν πώρωσιν τῆς καρδία EPH 4 18 abdf grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ 1 because of The connecting word **because** introduces a reason-result relationship. The first reason is that they are ignorant of him. The result is that the Gentiles are separated from God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EPH 4 18 abdg grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ 2 because of The connecting word **because** introduces a reason-result relationship. The second reason is that their hearts are hardened. The result is that Gentiles are separated from God. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EPH 4 19 ldy8 figs-metaphor ἑαυτοὺς παρέδωκαν τῇ ἀσελγείᾳ 1 have handed themselves over to sensuality Paul speaks of these people as if they were objects that they themselves were giving to other people, and he speaks of the way that they want to satisfy their physical desires as if the desires were the person to whom they give themselves. Alternate translation: “have given in to every physical desire” or “only want to satisfy their physical desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EPH 4 20 e5vk ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐμάθετε τὸν Χριστόν 1 But you did not thus learn Christ The word **thus** refers to the way that the Gentiles live, as described in [Ephesians 4:17-19](../04/17.md). This emphasizes that what the believers learned from Christ was the opposite of that. Alternate translation: “But what you learned about the ways of Christ was not like that” +EPH 4 20 e5vk ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐχ οὕτως ἐμάθετε τὸν Χριστόν 1 But you did not thus learn Christ The word **thus** refers to the way that the Gentiles live, as described in [Ephesians 4:17–19](../04/17.md). This emphasizes that what the believers learned from Christ was the opposite of that. Alternate translation: “But what you learned about the ways of Christ was not like that” EPH 4 20 abdh grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But The connecting word **But** introduces a contrast relationship. The sinful way the Gentiles live is in contrast to the way that Paul taught the Ephesians to live according to the truth of Jesus. Use a connecting word in your language that marks a contrast here (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EPH 4 21 hy7r figs-irony εἴ γε αὐτὸν ἠκούσατε καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητε 1 if indeed you have heard about him and were taught in him Paul knows that the people to whom he is writing have **heard** and been **taught** these things. He is using irony as a form of rebuke—if they are doing things contrary to the way of Christ, they know better than that and need to stop. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) EPH 4 21 b3pn figs-activepassive ἐν αὐτῷ ἐδιδάχθητε 1 were taught in him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) they received instruction in his ways. (2) Jesus’ people have taught them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv index 73a4c58357..2de8efbef7 100644 --- a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv +++ b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -PHP front intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Philippians

1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)
2. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12-26)
3. Instructions
* To be steadfast (1:27-30)
* To be united (2:1-2)
* To be humble (2:3-11)
* To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)
* To be innocent, and shining as light (2:14-18)
4. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)
5. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)
6. Personal instruction (4:2-5)
7. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)
8. Final remarks
* Values (4:8-9)
* Contentment (4:10-20)
* Final Greetings (4:21-23)

### Who wrote the book of Philippians?

Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.

### What is the book of Philippians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice, even if they were suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus, the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill, so Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome him and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returned.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Philippi like?

Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul tells the believers that it is much more important that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The words “you” and “your” always refer to the believers in Philippi, except for one time in 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?

The “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired, and God would not punish them (3:19).

### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ.

### What does Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” or “in the Lord,” etc.?

These kinds of expressions occur in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Philippians?

Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and some modern versions include it, but many other versions do not. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +PHP front intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Philippians

1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1–11)
2. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12–26)
3. Instructions
* To be steadfast (1:27–30)
* To be united (2:1–2)
* To be humble (2:3–11)
* To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12–13)
* To be innocent, and shining as light (2:14–18)
4. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19–30)
5. Warning about false teachers (3:1–4:1)
6. Personal instruction (4:2–5)
7. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4–6)
8. Final remarks
* Values (4:8–9)
* Contentment (4:10–20)
* Final Greetings (4:21–23)

### Who wrote the book of Philippians?

Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.

### What is the book of Philippians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice, even if they were suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus, the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill, so Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome him and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returned.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Philippi like?

Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul tells the believers that it is much more important that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The words “you” and “your” always refer to the believers in Philippi, except for one time in 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?

The “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired, and God would not punish them (3:19).

### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ.

### What does Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” or “in the Lord,” etc.?

These kinds of expressions occur in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Philippians?

Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and some modern versions include it, but many other versions do not. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) PHP 1 intro kd3g 0 # Philippians 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Paul follows the normal practice of the time by beginning the letter with a statement of the names of the senders and the recipients. In that culture, the sender would then offer a good wish for the recipients. Paul does this in the form of a Christian blessing.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### The day of Christ

This refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: “to die is gain.” In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md)) PHP 1 1 xk9z translate-names Παῦλος καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Paul and Timothy **Paul** and **Timothy** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) PHP 1 1 bzfs ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul and Timothy Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus” @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ PHP 1 14 sz29 figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ πεποιθότας τοῖς δ PHP 1 14 k4tm figs-activepassive καὶ τοὺς πλείονας τῶν ἀδελφῶν ἐν Κυρίῳ πεποιθότας τοῖς δεσμοῖς μου 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who or what caused the action. Alternate translation: “The Lord has encouraged most of the brothers because of my chains” or “My chains have given most of the brothers more trust in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) PHP 1 14 ecy8 figs-metonymy δεσμοῖς μου 1 Paul is referring to his imprisonment by mentioning one part of it: the chains that bound his feet and hands. If this is unclear in your language, you could mention the imprisonment directly. See how you translated the phrase **my chains** in [1:7](../01/07.md) and [1:13](../01/13.md). Alternate translation: “because of my imprisonment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHP 1 14 v2wo figs-explicit τὸν λόγον 1 Here, **the word** refers to the message from God about Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, consider stating this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the gospel” or “the good news” or “God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -PHP 1 15 sa9n 0 Some indeed even proclaim Christ Beginning in this verse, and extending to the end of [1:17](../01/17.md), Paul uses a poetic device called chiasm that could be confusing in some languages. You may need to reorder certain things in [1:15-17](../01/15.md) if it would be more natural in your language. See the UST. +PHP 1 15 sa9n 0 Some indeed even proclaim Christ Beginning in this verse, and extending to the end of [1:17](../01/17.md), Paul uses a poetic device called chiasm that could be confusing in some languages. You may need to reorder certain things in [1:15–17](../01/15.md) if it would be more natural in your language. See the UST. PHP 1 15 vw1s τινὲς μὲν καὶ…τὸν Χριστὸν κηρύσσουσιν 1 Some indeed even proclaim Christ Alternate translation: “Some people are preaching the good news about Jesus” PHP 1 15 z9y9 figs-abstractnouns διὰ φθόνον καὶ ἔριν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **envy** and **strife** by using them in a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because they are envious and seek their own evil purposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 15 yh1c figs-abstractnouns εὐδοκίαν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **goodwill** by using it in a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “their desire that others would know Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ PHP 1 19 h9hf figs-abstractnouns οἶδα γὰρ ὅτι τοῦτό μοι PHP 1 19 zr2k figs-abstractnouns ἐπιχορηγίας τοῦ Πνεύματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 of the Spirit of Jesus Christ If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning behind the abstract noun **provision** by using a verbal phrase. You could also say who does the action, if necessary. Alternate translation: “by God providing to me the Spirit of Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 20 fh48 figs-doublet ἀποκαραδοκίαν καὶ ἐλπίδα 1 according to my eager expectation and hope Both **eager expectation** and **hope** have similar meanings and together express a single idea. Paul uses these two words together to emphasize the strength of his expectation. If you have a single word or phrase in your language which expresses the meaning of these two words, consider using that to express the strength of the hope in another way. Alternate translation: “sincere expectation” or “sure hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) PHP 1 20 tk7l figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν ἀποκαραδοκίαν καὶ ἐλπίδα μου 1 but in everything have boldness Both **expectation** and **hope** are abstract nouns. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express them together in a verb phrase. Alternate translation: “because I fully believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -PHP 1 20 jz1z figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ σώματί μου 1 Christ will be exalted in my body Here, the phrase **in my body** is used to mean the activities that Paul does with his body. Paul speaks of his **body** because it was with his earthly body that he would serve God on earth until he died, as he explains in more detail in [1:22-24](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “in everything that I do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +PHP 1 20 jz1z figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ σώματί μου 1 Christ will be exalted in my body Here, the phrase **in my body** is used to mean the activities that Paul does with his body. Paul speaks of his **body** because it was with his earthly body that he would serve God on earth until he died, as he explains in more detail in [1:22–24](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “in everything that I do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHP 1 20 ysty figs-doublenegatives ἐν οὐδενὶ αἰσχυνθήσομαι, ἀλλ’ 1 Christ will be exalted in my body If the double-negative phrase **in nothing be ashamed** would be confusing in your language, you could translate it in a positive way. Alternate translation: “I will always do the right thing and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) PHP 1 20 ch6v figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ παρρησίᾳ 1 whether through life or through death If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **boldness** with a similar adverb. Alternate translation: “always act boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 20 y78k figs-abstractnouns εἴτε διὰ ζωῆς εἴτε διὰ θανάτου 1 whether through life or through death If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **life** and **death** with their verbal forms. Alternate translation: “whether I live or I die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ PHP 1 29 qous figs-activepassive ὑμῖν ἐχαρίσθη τὸ 1 you could PHP 1 30 x4z3 figs-abstractnouns τὸν αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα ἔχοντες 1 having the same struggle which you saw in me, and now you hear in me If the abstract noun **struggle** would be confusing in your language, you could express it with a verb phrase, as the UST does, or by expressing the idea behind this word in some other way that would be clear in your language. Alternate translation: “facing the same strife” or “enduring the same trials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 30 cewf figs-metaphor τὸν αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα ἔχοντες, οἷον εἴδετε ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 Here, the word **struggle** is a figurative way of referring to the conflict that Paul and the Philippian believers had with people who opposed them because of their faith. Paul speaks of it here as if it were a military battle or an athletic competition. If this would be unclear in your language, you could state this in plain language. Alternate translation: “as you experience the same opposition from people that you saw that I experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 1 30 hnec figs-idiom εἴδετε ἐν ἐμοὶ, καὶ νῦν ἀκούετε ἐν ἐμοί 1 Here, the phrase **in me** occurs twice, both times referring to what Paul is experiencing. If this would be unclear in your language, you could express this in a way that is understandable in your language. Alternate translation: “you saw me experience and now hear that I am experiencing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -PHP 2 intro ixw8 0 # Philippians 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations, like the ULT, set apart the lines of verses 6-11. These verses describe the example of Christ. They teach important truths about the person of Jesus.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Practical instructions

In this chapter Paul gives many practical instructions to the church in Philippi.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “If there is any”

This appears as though it is a type of hypothetical statement. However, it is not a hypothetical statement, because it expresses something that is true. The translator may also translate this phrase as “Since there is.” +PHP 2 intro ixw8 0 # Philippians 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations, like the ULT, set apart the lines of verses 6–11. These verses describe the example of Christ. They teach important truths about the person of Jesus.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Practical instructions

In this chapter Paul gives many practical instructions to the church in Philippi.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “If there is any”

This appears as though it is a type of hypothetical statement. However, it is not a hypothetical statement, because it expresses something that is true. The translator may also translate this phrase as “Since there is.” PHP 2 1 v4ns grammar-connect-words-phrases οὖν 1 The word **Therefore** indicates that what follows is the natural result of or conclusion to what preceded it. Use the most natural form in your language to show this relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) PHP 2 1 b1q7 figs-explicit εἴ τις…παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ, εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης, εἴ τις κοινωνία Πνεύματος, εἴ τις σπλάγχνα καὶ οἰκτιρμοί 1 If there is any encouragement in Christ The phrase **if there is any**, which occurs one time in this verse, and the phrase **if any**, which occurs three times in this verse, appear to be hypothetical statements. However, they are not hypothetical, because they each express things which are true. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning of these phrases explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of the encouragement which comes from Christ, because there is comfort from his love, because of the fellowship of the Spirit, because you have affections and compassions” or “since Christ has encouraged you, since there is comfort from his love, since there is fellowship in the Spirit, since you have affections and compassions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHP 2 1 del5 figs-ellipsis εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης, εἴ τις κοινωνία Πνεύματος, εἴ τις σπλάγχνα καὶ οἰκτιρμοί 1 In the three occurrences of the phrase **if any** in this verse, the missing words, “there is,” are implied and can be supplied in your translation if omitting them would cause confusion. Alternate translation: “if there is any comfort from love, if there is any fellowship of the Spirit, if there are any affections and compassions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ PHP 2 8 ttys figs-rpronouns ἑαυτὸν 1 The reflexive pronoun **himself**, PHP 2 8 r5f0 figs-abstractnouns γενόμενος ὑπήκοος μέχρι θανάτου, θανάτου δὲ σταυροῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the two occurrences in this verse of the abstract noun **death** with a verb such as “dying”. Alternate translation: “ having become obedient to the point of dying, even dying on a cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 2 8 l1fk figs-idiom γενόμενος ὑπήκοος μέχρι θανάτου 1 The phrase **to the point of** is an English idiom that translates a single Greek preposition. This preposition emphasizes the intensity of Jesus’ obedience to the Father by showing that **death** that follows as the extreme result of that obedience. Alternate translation: “ remaining obedient even though it resulted in him dying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) PHP 2 8 flk2 θανάτου δὲ σταυροῦ 1 The phrase **even death on a cross** emphasizes that dying on a cross was a very humiliating way to die. By using the word **even** and repeating the word **death**, Paul is emphasizing the great extent of Jesus’ humility and obedience. Think about the best way in your language to show the emphasis provided by the phrase **even death on a cross**. Alternate translation: “even so far as dying on a cross” or “even to the extent of dying on a cross” -PHP 2 9 f3ek grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 The word **Therefore** shows the reason and result relationship between what comes before this word and what follows it. Here, **Therefore** introduces the result of Jesus humbling himself, as was described in [2:6-8](../02/06.md). Choose the form in your language that best expresses the reason and result relationship expressed by the word **Therefore**. Alternate translation: “Because of this” or “Because Jesus acted this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +PHP 2 9 f3ek grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 The word **Therefore** shows the reason and result relationship between what comes before this word and what follows it. Here, **Therefore** introduces the result of Jesus humbling himself, as was described in [2:6–8](../02/06.md). Choose the form in your language that best expresses the reason and result relationship expressed by the word **Therefore**. Alternate translation: “Because of this” or “Because Jesus acted this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) PHP 2 9 wmvd αὐτὸν ὑπερύψωσεν 1 Alternate translation: “greatly honored him” PHP 2 9 mvb7 figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τὸ ὑπὲρ πᾶν ὄνομα 1 the name that is above every name Here, **name** is a metonym that refers to the status or position associated with someone’s name. Alternate translation: “the position that is above every other position” or “the position that is higher than any other position” or “the rank that is above every other rank” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHP 2 10 b3ai grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 The phrase **so that** connects this verse with the preceding verse, [2:9](../02/09.md) and shows that this verse and the next verse are the result of [2:9](../02/09.md). Use the most natural form in your language to show this connection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ PHP 2 10 xn7a ἐπουρανίων καὶ ἐπιγείων καὶ κατα PHP 2 11 xy4f figs-metonymy πᾶσα γλῶσσα ἐξομολογήσηται 1 every tongue Here Paul uses the word **tongue** to represent the mouth and what comes out of the mouth. Paul is describing what is said by associating it with the tongue. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “every mouth will declare” or “every being will say” or “everyone will say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) PHP 2 11 mr2i grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 to the glory of God the Father Here the word **to** expresses result. Alternate translation: “with the result that God the Father will be honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) PHP 2 11 equs figs-abstractnouns εἰς δόξαν Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 to the glory of God the Father If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** by using a verbal form of this word or by some other way. Alternate translation: “and honor God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -PHP 2 12 jnp3 grammar-connect-words-phrases ὥστε 1 Connecting Statement: The phrase **So then** shows that what follows it is the desired result of what preceded it in [2:5-11](../02/05.md). Use the most natural form in your language to show this relationship. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +PHP 2 12 jnp3 grammar-connect-words-phrases ὥστε 1 Connecting Statement: The phrase **So then** shows that what follows it is the desired result of what preceded it in [2:5–11](../02/05.md). Use the most natural form in your language to show this relationship. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) PHP 2 12 e359 ἀγαπητοί μου 1 my beloved Here, the word **beloved** refers to the believers in Philippi. Paul uses this word to express how much he loves them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent phrase in your language that expresses love and affection. Alternate translation: “my dear fellow believers” PHP 2 12 c1ix ὡς ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ μου 1 in my presence Alternate translation: “when I was present with you” PHP 2 12 u5ng ἐν τῇ ἀπουσίᾳ μου 1 in my absence Alternate translation: “when I am not there with you” @@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ PHP 2 30 ffly figs-abstractnouns μέχρι θανάτου ἤγγισεν 1 he PHP 2 30 kjti figs-abstractnouns παραβολευσάμενος τῇ ψυχῇ 1 he came near even to death If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you can express the idea behind the phrase **risking his life** in some other way. Alternate translation: “running the risk of dying” or “taking the risk that he would die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 2 30 x4rl figs-abstractnouns ἵνα ἀναπληρώσῃ τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα, τῆς πρός με λειτουργίας 1 he came near even to death If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **service**, you can express the idea behind the word **service** by using a verb form such as “serve.” Alternate translation: “so that he might make up for your being unable to serve me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 2 30 g98z figs-explicit ἵνα ἀναπληρώσῃ τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα, τῆς πρός με λειτουργίας 1 he might make up your lack of service to me The **lack of service** Paul speaks of here is the inability of the Philippian believers to be present with him in prison. By sending Epaphroditus to Paul, the Philippian believers ministered to Paul’s needs through Epaphroditus, and so Epaphroditus supplied what they could not. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that he might supply what you could not give me” or “so that he might make up for what you could not give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -PHP 3 intro btx3 0 # Philippians 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 4-8, Paul lists the ways he qualifies for being considered a righteous Jew. In every way, Paul was an exemplary Jew, but he contrasts this with the greatness of knowing Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Dogs

The people of the ancient Near East used dogs as an image to refer to people in a negative way. Not all cultures use the term “dogs” in this way.

### Resurrected bodies

We know very little about what people will be like in heaven. Paul teaches here that Christians will have some kind of glorious body and will be free from sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Prize

Paul uses an extended illustration to describe the Christian life. The goal of the Christian life is to grow to be like Christ while we live on earth. We can never achieve this goal perfectly, but we must strive for it. +PHP 3 intro btx3 0 # Philippians 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 4–8, Paul lists the ways he qualifies for being considered a righteous Jew. In every way, Paul was an exemplary Jew, but he contrasts this with the greatness of knowing Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Dogs

The people of the ancient Near East used dogs as an image to refer to people in a negative way. Not all cultures use the term “dogs” in this way.

### Resurrected bodies

We know very little about what people will be like in heaven. Paul teaches here that Christians will have some kind of glorious body and will be free from sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Prize

Paul uses an extended illustration to describe the Christian life. The goal of the Christian life is to grow to be like Christ while we live on earth. We can never achieve this goal perfectly, but we must strive for it. PHP 3 1 zu9l figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** here to refer to anyone who is a fellow believer in Jesus. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this plainly. See how you translated this word in [Philippians 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) PHP 3 1 ymm2 figs-yousingular χαίρετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 rejoice in the Lord The word **rejoice** is a command or instruction to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. Alternate translation: “I exhort each of you to rejoice in the Lord” or “each of you rejoice in the Lord” or “all of you rejoice in the Lord” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular) PHP 3 1 b8y6 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 rejoice in the Lord Alternate translation: “in your relationship with the Lord” or “in who the Lord is and what he has done” @@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ PHP 3 14 lmr6 figs-extrainfo τὸ βραβεῖον τῆς ἄνω κλήσε PHP 3 14 cq3f figs-extrainfo τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 of the upward calling The word **upward** probably refers to both the origin of God’s call and to the direction of God’s call. In other words, the phrase **the upward calling of God** probably refers both to the fact that the **calling** is from God and that the calling is also a heavenly calling to move towards God. Alternate translation: “God’s heavenward call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) PHP 3 14 agwg figs-explicit κατὰ σκοπὸν διώκω εἰς τὸ βραβεῖον τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 of the upward calling The phrase **in Christ Jesus** could be: (1) modifying the phrase **the upward calling of God**. (2) modifying the phrase **I press on**. Alternate translation: “I press on in Christ Jesus toward the goal for the prize of the upward calling of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHP 3 14 d75h figs-abstractnouns κατὰ σκοπὸν διώκω εἰς τὸ βραβεῖον τῆς ἄνω κλήσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 of the upward calling If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **goal**, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun **goal** in another way. Alternate translation: “I make it my main focus to win the prize of God’s upward calling in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -PHP 3 15 de4y grammar-connect-words-phrases οὖν 1 as many as are perfect should think this way The word **Therefore** indicates that Paul is transitioning from teaching the Philippians by using his personal experience ([Philippians 3:4-14](../03/04.md)) to exhorting them ([Philippians 3:15-17](../03/15.md)). Use the form that would best express this meaning in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +PHP 3 15 de4y grammar-connect-words-phrases οὖν 1 as many as are perfect should think this way The word **Therefore** indicates that Paul is transitioning from teaching the Philippians by using his personal experience ([Philippians 3:4–14](../03/04.md)) to exhorting them ([Philippians 3:15–17](../03/15.md)). Use the form that would best express this meaning in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) PHP 3 15 ki7f figs-ellipsis ὅσοι 1 God will also reveal that to you The phrase **as many as** is missing some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “as many of you as” or “all of you who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) PHP 3 15 pb9p ὅσοι…τέλειοι 1 God will also reveal that to you Here, the word **perfect** does not mean “without sin,” but rather it means “spiritually mature.” Alternate translation: “as many as are spiritually mature” PHP 3 15 yy22 καὶ τοῦτο ὁ Θεὸς ὑμῖν ἀποκαλύψει 1 God will also reveal that to you Alternate translation: “God will also make it clear to you” or “God will make sure you know it” @@ -360,7 +360,7 @@ PHP 4 1 wx5w figs-abstractnouns χαρὰ καὶ στέφανός μου 1 my j PHP 4 1 lg9a figs-extrainfo χαρὰ καὶ στέφανός μου 1 my joy and crown The phrase **my joy and crown** could refer to: (1) Paul’s current feelings of joy regarding the Philippian Christians and his future hope of being rewarded for his labor among them. Alternate translation: “my source of joy and my future hope of being rewarded when Christ returns” (2) Paul’s joy and reward in the future when Christ returns. Alternate translation: “my hope for joy and reward when Christ returns” (3) Paul’s present joy in the Philippian believers and his present feeling that they are his reward for his work among them. Alternate translation: “my joy and reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) PHP 4 1 kvsk figs-metaphor στέφανός 1 my joy and crown Paul speaks of the Philippian Christians as if they were his **crown**. At the time Paul wrote this letter, a **crown** was made of leaves and was worn by a person on their head as a sign of their achievement after they had won an important victory. Here, the word **crown** means that the Philippian Christians brought great honor to Paul before God and were a sign of his hard work among them. If your readers would not understand the meaning of this metaphor, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture or state the meaning in plain language. Alternate translation: “my reward” or “my honor” or “the sign of my hard work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 4 1 t07j οὕτως στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ, ἀγαπητοί 1 in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved Alternate translation: “so continue living for the Lord in the way that I have taught you, dear friends” -PHP 4 1 dz44 οὕτως στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ, ἀγαπητοί 1 in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved The phrase **in this way** could refer to: (1) what comes before it, in which case this phrase would mean, “in the way that I have just explained to you” Alternate translation: “stand firm in the Lord in the way that I have just explained to you, beloved” (2) what Paul commands the Philippian Christians to do in [Philippians 4:2-9](../04/02.md). Alternate translation: “stand firm in the Lord, beloved, in this way” +PHP 4 1 dz44 οὕτως στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ, ἀγαπητοί 1 in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved The phrase **in this way** could refer to: (1) what comes before it, in which case this phrase would mean, “in the way that I have just explained to you” Alternate translation: “stand firm in the Lord in the way that I have just explained to you, beloved” (2) what Paul commands the Philippian Christians to do in [Philippians 4:2–9](../04/02.md). Alternate translation: “stand firm in the Lord, beloved, in this way” PHP 4 1 zu0i figs-yousingular στήκετε 1 in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved The phrase **stand firm** is a command or instruction to all of the Philippian Christians. Use the most natural form in your language to give direction to a group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) PHP 4 1 j6fp figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved Here the phrase **stand firm** is used to refer to the imagery of a soldier remaining in place, not moved by the enemy. Here, Paul gives this metaphor a spiritual meaning to exhort the Philippian Christians to not change their minds but continue believing what they have already believed. If it would be helpful in your language, consider using another metaphor that would make sense in your culture, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “remain unmoved in your belief in Christ” or “remain firm in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 4 1 i8ad οὕτως στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 in this way stand firm in the Lord, beloved Alternate translation: “stand firm in your union and relationship with the Lord” or “stand firm in your union and communion with the Lord” diff --git a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv index e27c167d65..aac9fca69a 100644 --- a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1TH front intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 1 Thessalonians

In this letter, the apostle Paul, along with Silvanus and Timothy, encourages and makes appeals to the Thessalonian church (See: rc://en/tw/bible/names/thessalonica.md). Paul is the spokesman for all of them, using “we” to refer to the group, but in certain places Paul speaks for himself using “I” (See [2:18](../02/18.md); [3:5](../03/05.md); [5:27](../05/27.md)). The background story for the apostles’ activity in Thessalonica can be found in Acts 17:1-10.

1. Apostolic memories of the Thessalonian church (1:1-10)
* Greeting (1:1)
* Thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2-4)
* Examples of Thessalonian suffering (1:6-10)
2. Apostolic authority (2:1-16)
* Persecution of the church (2:1-13)
* Opposition to the church (2:14-16)
3. Timothy’s visit to Thessalonica (3:1-13)
* Reason for the visit (3:1-5)
* Report about the visit (3:6-13)
4. Apostolic teachings (4:1-18)
* Holiness (4:1-8)
* Christian love (4:9-12)
* Manner of the Second Coming of Christ (4:13-18)
5. Final teachings (5:1-28)
* Timing of the Second Coming of Christ (5:1-10)
* Final appeals and teachings (5:11-28)

### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 1 Thessalonians, writing with the agreement of Silvanus and Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Saul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, Paul traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus. Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible.

Silvanus is also mentioned in 2 Corinthians 1:19; 2 Thessalonians 1:1; 1 Peter 5:12. “Silas,” the name used in the book of Acts, is a contracted form of Silvanus; Silas and Silvanus are considered to be the same person. Timothy was leader of the church at Ephesus (See 1 Timothy 1:1-4). Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth with these two men. The mention of all three men in 1:1 indicates they were in Thessalonica together at some point.

### What is the book of 1 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the church in the city of Thessalonica, after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. Ancient Thessalonica was located on the southeast coast of ancient Macedonia, and is now called Thessaloniki, located in northeast Greece. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background). In this letter Paul said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave (See Acts 17:1-10).

Paul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Trinity

In this letter, the doctrine of the Holy Trinity finds solid support. The terms: God, Father, Son, Lord, Jesus, and Holy Spirit appear numerous times. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/god]])

### The gospel

In this letter, Paul frequently refers to the apostles’ ministry of the gospel and uses different phrases to communicate the concept of God’s good news about Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/goodnews]])

### Prayer

Paul reassures the Thessalonians that his group of apostles frequently prays for them (See [1:2](../01/02.md)). He also gives instructions about prayer (See [5:2](../05/02.md)), and asks the Thessalonians to pray for them (See [5:25](../05/25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/pray]])

### Faith and Faithfulness

Through the letter the Thessalonians are commended for their faithfulness to God. They are reminded to trust God and remain faithful to gospel living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/faithful]], [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/faith]])

### Apostolic authority

Much of this letter is a defense of the apostles authority, based on their teaching and living. The term “apostles” is used in [2:6](../02/06.md)) to reinforce that Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy are sent by God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/apostle]])

### Second Coming of Christ

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.

### The fate of reposed Christians

Paul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians, for some of them worried that those Christians who died would miss the great “day of the Lord” when Jesus returns.

### Idolatry

The Greek and Roman cultural background in Thessalonica meant that many members of the church were former pagans who practiced some sort of idolatry (See [1:9](../01/09.md)(See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/other/image]]).

### Suffering

Much of this letter addresses both the sufferings of the apostles and the Thessalonian church for faithfulness to the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/other/afflict]], [[rc://en/tw/bible/other/persecute]], [[rc://en/tw/bible/other/suffer]])

### Sanctification

The concept of holiness is prevalent in this letter. Chapter four discusses how a Christian should practice a holy life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/sanctify]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in Christ Jesus” and “in the Lord Jesus Christ” and “in God the Father” and “in the Holy Spirit”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a union between God and Christians that includes all three persons of the Trinity. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about these kinds of expressions.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “his coming” and “the coming of the Lord Jesus” and “the coming of the Lord Jesus Christ”?

Paul used “coming” in a specific way in relation to Jesus Christ to refer to the time when he will come again to earth, this time displaying his glory and power and gathering his people to himself. Depending on the nuances of your language, you may need to translate this with a special concept or word.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “the word of God” or “the word of the Lord”?

Throughout this letter, Paul uses these well-known phrases or abbreviations to refer to the gospel message.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “brothers”?

Throughout this letter, “brothers” is a metaphor that refers to all believers, including females. (See [1:4](../01/04.md); 2:1, 9, 14, 17; 3:7; 4:1, 6, 10, 13; 5:1, 4, 12, 14, 26, 27)

### “We” and “you”

In this letter, the words “we”, “us,” and “our” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. In addition, “we”, “us,” and “our” are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

### Major textual issues in the text of the book of First Thessalonians

When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts in its text the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants)
* “Grace and peace to you” (See [1:1](../01/01.md)). Some other manuscripts read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”
* “but we became little children in the midst of you, as if a mother might comfort her own children” (See [2:7](../02/07.md)). Some other manuscripts read, “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.”
* “Timothy, our brother and a servant of God” (See [3:2](../03/02.md)). Some other manuscripts read: “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 1 intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 1 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 1

1. Greeting (1:1)
2. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian church (1:2-10)
* Memory of the Thessalonians (1:2-5)
* apostolic prayers (1:2)
* work of the Thessalonians (1:2-3)
* God’s election of the Thessalonians (1:4-5)
* Thessalonians’ example (1:6-10)
* reception of the apostles’ teaching (1:6)
* examples to Macedonia and Achaia (1:7-10)
* example of suffering (1:7)
* preaching of the gospel (1:8)
* turned away from idolatry to God (1:9)
* waiting for the Second Coming of Christ (1:10)

## Structure and Formatting

Verse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.
Verses 2-4 give a general thanksgiving and encouragement to the Thessalonian church.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Trinity

God the Father, God the Son, and God the Holy Spirit are mentioned numerous times in this chapter. They are described in their identity, activity, and the union that the Christian has in them.

### Hardship

Like the apostles before them, the Thessalonian church endured persecution for the sake of the gospel. The way that they responded with faith to the gospel message even in affliction and then preached that gospel to others made them examples to the churches throughout the regions of Macedonia and Achaia.

### Faithfulness

Paul mentions the faithfulness of the Thessalonian church throughout this chapter. See, for example, “work of faith” in 1:3, “example to all those who believe” in 1:7, and “faith toward God” in 1:8. +1TH front intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 1 Thessalonians

In this letter, the apostle Paul, along with Silvanus and Timothy, encourages and makes appeals to the Thessalonian church (See: rc://en/tw/bible/names/thessalonica.md). Paul is the spokesman for all of them, using “we” to refer to the group, but in certain places Paul speaks for himself using “I” (See [2:18](../02/18.md); [3:5](../03/05.md); [5:27](../05/27.md)). The background story for the apostles’ activity in Thessalonica can be found in Acts 17:1–10.

1. Apostolic memories of the Thessalonian church (1:1–10)
* Greeting (1:1)
* Thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2–4)
* Examples of Thessalonian suffering (1:6–10)
2. Apostolic authority (2:1–16)
* Persecution of the church (2:1–13)
* Opposition to the church (2:14–16)
3. Timothy’s visit to Thessalonica (3:1–13)
* Reason for the visit (3:1–5)
* Report about the visit (3:6–13)
4. Apostolic teachings (4:1–18)
* Holiness (4:1–8)
* Christian love (4:9–12)
* Manner of the Second Coming of Christ (4:13–18)
5. Final teachings (5:1–28)
* Timing of the Second Coming of Christ (5:1–10)
* Final appeals and teachings (5:11–28)

### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 1 Thessalonians, writing with the agreement of Silvanus and Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Saul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, Paul traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus. Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible.

Silvanus is also mentioned in 2 Corinthians 1:19; 2 Thessalonians 1:1; 1 Peter 5:12. “Silas,” the name used in the book of Acts, is a contracted form of Silvanus; Silas and Silvanus are considered to be the same person. Timothy was leader of the church at Ephesus (See 1 Timothy 1:1–4). Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth with these two men. The mention of all three men in 1:1 indicates they were in Thessalonica together at some point.

### What is the book of 1 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the church in the city of Thessalonica, after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. Ancient Thessalonica was located on the southeast coast of ancient Macedonia, and is now called Thessaloniki, located in northeast Greece. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background). In this letter Paul said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave (See Acts 17:1–10).

Paul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Trinity

In this letter, the doctrine of the Holy Trinity finds solid support. The terms: God, Father, Son, Lord, Jesus, and Holy Spirit appear numerous times. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/god]])

### The gospel

In this letter, Paul frequently refers to the apostles’ ministry of the gospel and uses different phrases to communicate the concept of God’s good news about Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/goodnews]])

### Prayer

Paul reassures the Thessalonians that his group of apostles frequently prays for them (See [1:2](../01/02.md)). He also gives instructions about prayer (See [5:2](../05/02.md)), and asks the Thessalonians to pray for them (See [5:25](../05/25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/pray]])

### Faith and Faithfulness

Through the letter the Thessalonians are commended for their faithfulness to God. They are reminded to trust God and remain faithful to gospel living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/faithful]], [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/faith]])

### Apostolic authority

Much of this letter is a defense of the apostles authority, based on their teaching and living. The term “apostles” is used in [2:6](../02/06.md)) to reinforce that Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy are sent by God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/apostle]])

### Second Coming of Christ

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.

### The fate of reposed Christians

Paul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians, for some of them worried that those Christians who died would miss the great “day of the Lord” when Jesus returns.

### Idolatry

The Greek and Roman cultural background in Thessalonica meant that many members of the church were former pagans who practiced some sort of idolatry (See [1:9](../01/09.md)(See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/other/image]]).

### Suffering

Much of this letter addresses both the sufferings of the apostles and the Thessalonian church for faithfulness to the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/other/afflict]], [[rc://en/tw/bible/other/persecute]], [[rc://en/tw/bible/other/suffer]])

### Sanctification

The concept of holiness is prevalent in this letter. Chapter four discusses how a Christian should practice a holy life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/sanctify]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in Christ Jesus” and “in the Lord Jesus Christ” and “in God the Father” and “in the Holy Spirit”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a union between God and Christians that includes all three persons of the Trinity. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about these kinds of expressions.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “his coming” and “the coming of the Lord Jesus” and “the coming of the Lord Jesus Christ”?

Paul used “coming” in a specific way in relation to Jesus Christ to refer to the time when he will come again to earth, this time displaying his glory and power and gathering his people to himself. Depending on the nuances of your language, you may need to translate this with a special concept or word.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “the word of God” or “the word of the Lord”?

Throughout this letter, Paul uses these well-known phrases or abbreviations to refer to the gospel message.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “brothers”?

Throughout this letter, “brothers” is a metaphor that refers to all believers, including females. (See [1:4](../01/04.md); 2:1, 9, 14, 17; 3:7; 4:1, 6, 10, 13; 5:1, 4, 12, 14, 26, 27)

### “We” and “you”

In this letter, the words “we”, “us,” and “our” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. In addition, “we”, “us,” and “our” are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

### Major textual issues in the text of the book of First Thessalonians

When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts in its text the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants)
* “Grace and peace to you” (See [1:1](../01/01.md)). Some other manuscripts read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”
* “but we became little children in the midst of you, as if a mother might comfort her own children” (See [2:7](../02/07.md)). Some other manuscripts read, “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.”
* “Timothy, our brother and a servant of God” (See [3:2](../03/02.md)). Some other manuscripts read: “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1TH 1 intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 1 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 1

1. Greeting (1:1)
2. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian church (1:2–10)
* Memory of the Thessalonians (1:2–5)
* apostolic prayers (1:2)
* work of the Thessalonians (1:2–3)
* God’s election of the Thessalonians (1:4–5)
* Thessalonians’ example (1:6–10)
* reception of the apostles’ teaching (1:6)
* examples to Macedonia and Achaia (1:7–10)
* example of suffering (1:7)
* preaching of the gospel (1:8)
* turned away from idolatry to God (1:9)
* waiting for the Second Coming of Christ (1:10)

## Structure and Formatting

Verse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.
Verses 2–4 give a general thanksgiving and encouragement to the Thessalonian church.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Trinity

God the Father, God the Son, and God the Holy Spirit are mentioned numerous times in this chapter. They are described in their identity, activity, and the union that the Christian has in them.

### Hardship

Like the apostles before them, the Thessalonian church endured persecution for the sake of the gospel. The way that they responded with faith to the gospel message even in affliction and then preached that gospel to others made them examples to the churches throughout the regions of Macedonia and Achaia.

### Faithfulness

Paul mentions the faithfulness of the Thessalonian church throughout this chapter. See, for example, “work of faith” in 1:3, “example to all those who believe” in 1:7, and “faith toward God” in 1:8. 1TH 1 1 ms5e figs-ellipsis Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Paul and Silvanus and Timothy to the church Here some words are omitted that a sentence would need in order to be complete in many languages. Alternate translation: “We are Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, writing to the church” (See rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis) 1TH 1 1 zivb figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Paul and Silvanus and Timothy to the church Paul is understood to be the author of this letter. Silvanus and Timothy are with him as he writes and are in agreement with what he writes. If that might not be understood in your language, you could include this information in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, together with Silvanus and Timothy, write” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 1 1 r7n0 translate-names Σιλουανὸς 1 Paul and Silvanus and Timothy to the church The name **Silvanus** is a longer form of the name **Silas**, the form of the name used for this same man in the book of Acts. You could choose to use the shorter form here as well, or you could choose to use the longer form here and include a footnote explaining that they are forms of the same name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 1 10 pt1s figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 the one rescuing us This is an inclusive use of **us**, including Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, and the Thessalonians–and by extension—all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “all of us Christians” or “we who trust in Christ” or “all of us believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 1 10 g3zz figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 Here, **wrath** is an abstract noun referring to the destined **coming** of God’s future and final Judgment. If it is clearer in your language, you could translate this as a verb form. Alternate translation: “from the future time when God punishes those who do not trust in him” or “when God will certainly punish those who worship idols” or “from God’s impending judgment” (See: [What is the “second coming” of Jesus?](../front/intro)) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 1 10 cx5g figs-metaphor τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 Paul speaks of **wrath** as though it were something that could travel and is **coming** to where people are. He means by this that in the future an event will happen when God will act wrathfully against people who have sinned and who have not trusted in Jesus to forgive their sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment that will happen” or “when God will punish people for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 2 intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 2 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 2

1. Apostolic Suffering (2:1-13)
* Apostolic preaching (2:1-6)
* Apostolic conduct (2:7-9)
* Apostolic witness (2:10-3)
2. Persecution of the Church (2:14-16)
* Thessalonian persecution (2:14a)
* Jewish persecution (2:14b-16)
3. Paul’s Desire to Visit (2:17-20)

## Structure and Formatting

The first part of this chapter is a defense of their apostleship and sufferings. The second part is a recounting of the Thessalonian church’s sufferings. Lastly, the apostle Paul makes known his deep desire to visit the Thessalonian church.

## “We” and “You”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Apostolic witness

Here, Paul defends how he, Silvanus, and Timothy are God’s apostles. By their preaching, conduct, and witness, they prove to be authorized messengers of Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]])

### The gospel of God

The foundation of the apostolic witness is that they were “entrusted with the gospel” (See [2:4](../02/04.md)).The apostles’ authority makes them: “bold to speak” (See [2:2](../02/02.md)), “impart” (See [2:8](../02/08.md)), “preach” (See [2:9](../02/09.md)), and thank God that the Thessalonian church “received the word of God” (See [2:13](../02/13.md)).

### The Second Coming of Christ

In this chapter is the first mention of the Second Coming of Christ in its two facets. First, Paul mentions that the persecutors of Christ’s Church will be judged by using the phrase “wrath has come upon them” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Next, Paul speaks of the “hope” and “joy” and “glory” for those who will “be saved” (See [2:16](../02/16.md)) “in the presence of our Lord Jesus Christ at his coming” (See [2:19-20](../02/19.md)). +1TH 2 intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 2 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 2

1. Apostolic Suffering (2:1–13)
* Apostolic preaching (2:1–6)
* Apostolic conduct (2:7–9)
* Apostolic witness (2:10–3)
2. Persecution of the Church (2:14–16)
* Thessalonian persecution (2:14a)
* Jewish persecution (2:14b-16)
3. Paul’s Desire to Visit (2:17–20)

## Structure and Formatting

The first part of this chapter is a defense of their apostleship and sufferings. The second part is a recounting of the Thessalonian church’s sufferings. Lastly, the apostle Paul makes known his deep desire to visit the Thessalonian church.

## “We” and “You”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Apostolic witness

Here, Paul defends how he, Silvanus, and Timothy are God’s apostles. By their preaching, conduct, and witness, they prove to be authorized messengers of Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]])

### The gospel of God

The foundation of the apostolic witness is that they were “entrusted with the gospel” (See [2:4](../02/04.md)).The apostles’ authority makes them: “bold to speak” (See [2:2](../02/02.md)), “impart” (See [2:8](../02/08.md)), “preach” (See [2:9](../02/09.md)), and thank God that the Thessalonian church “received the word of God” (See [2:13](../02/13.md)).

### The Second Coming of Christ

In this chapter is the first mention of the Second Coming of Christ in its two facets. First, Paul mentions that the persecutors of Christ’s Church will be judged by using the phrase “wrath has come upon them” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Next, Paul speaks of the “hope” and “joy” and “glory” for those who will “be saved” (See [2:16](../02/16.md)) “in the presence of our Lord Jesus Christ at his coming” (See [2:19–20](../02/19.md)). 1TH 2 1 ii5j grammar-connect-words-phrases αὐτοὶ γὰρ οἴδατε, ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **For you yourselves know, brothers** functions as a chapter transition into the next topic, the apostles’ suffering. You could emphasize this if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “Certainly, you are fully aware” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 2 1 gpr4 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ…οἴδατε 1 you yourselves know The words **you** and **yourselves** refer to the Thessalonian church. Paul uses this emphasis to express how well the Thessalonians understand the benefit of the apostles’ previous visit. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you fully realize” or “you personally understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 2 1 tdl3 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Throughout this letter, **brothers** is a metaphor meaning “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See [1:4](../01/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what **brothers** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 2 1 nwlt figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἴσοδον ἡμῶν τὴν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 This is an abstract noun phrase that refers to the apostles’ previous visit (See “reception” in [1:9](../01/09.md)). If your language does not use abstract noun phrases for this idea, you can express the idea behind the abstract noun phrase with a verb form. Alternate translation: “when we visited you” or “when you received us” or “when you welcomed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 2 1 g6qq figs-exclusive τὴν εἴσοδον ἡμῶν τὴν…ὅτι 1 our coming Here, **our** is exclusive, referring to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy–but not to the Thessalonian church (See [1:9](../01/09.md)). Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “when we apostles came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 2 1 w584 figs-litotes οὐ κενὴ γέγονεν 1 has not been in vain Here, **has not been in vain** is a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that has the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “has proved quite beneficial” or “has definitely been worthwhile” or “has been very useful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -1TH 2 2 h9s8 writing-background 0 This verse provides background information about what happened when Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy were in the city of Philippi (See Acts 16-17:1-10; [1:6](../01/06.md)). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +1TH 2 2 h9s8 writing-background 0 This verse provides background information about what happened when Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy were in the city of Philippi (See Acts 16–17:1–10; [1:6](../01/06.md)). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) 1TH 2 2 w0qu grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες, καθὼς οἴδατε, ἐν Φιλίπποις ἐπαρρησιασάμεθα ἐν τῷ Θεῷ ἡμῶν 1 **But** begins a contrasting clause emphasizing that the coming of Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy was **not in vain** [2:1](../02/01.md). The phrase **we were bold** is an emphatic contrast to the normal response one would expect from suffering. Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy are able to respond this way because their boldness comes from God. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However … God made us confident in how powerful he is” or “Instead … God encouraged us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1TH 2 2 clqq figs-infostructure ἀλλὰ προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες, καθὼς οἴδατε, ἐν Φιλίπποις 1 Here, **just as you know** is meant to emphasize how well the Thessalonian church understands the apostles’ suffering. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “But, as you are well aware that we already suffered and were badly insulted at Philippi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1TH 2 2 fac4 figs-doublet προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how badly the apostles suffered. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “despite the fact that we had earlier suffered violently” or “since we already suffered being shamefully abused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 2 4 b0yy grammar-connect-logic-contrast οὐχ ὡς ἀνθρώποις ἀρέσκοντες, ἀλλὰ Θεῷ 1 Here, the word **but** contrasts **men** and **God**. Paul is indicating that **God** and **men** are different beings. Paul is also expressing the idea that the apostles’ motive for speaking the **gospel** is to please **God**, and not to be **pleasing to men**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “not to flatter people, but to please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1TH 2 4 bq9a figs-metonymy τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν 1 The phrase **our hearts** is a metonym for the apostles’ motives, affections, or deepest thoughts. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “what we love” or “what we ponder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 2 5 xk2o grammar-connect-words-phrases οὔτε γάρ ποτε ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας ἐγενήθημεν 1 Here, the phrase **For we did not come at that time** marks a transition where the apostles defend their motives by describing their previous godly conduct. Alternate translation: “Because previously when we came, it was not to flatter you” or “Certainly we never came in order to flatter you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 2 5 u28j figs-litany οὔτε…ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας…οὔτε ἐν προφάσει πλεονεξίας 1 Here, Paul uses a series of negative examples in [2:5-6](../02/05.md) to describe behavior that is not fitting for Christ’s apostles. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” You can use a form in your language to list things that someone should not do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) +1TH 2 5 u28j figs-litany οὔτε…ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας…οὔτε ἐν προφάσει πλεονεξίας 1 Here, Paul uses a series of negative examples in [2:5–6](../02/05.md) to describe behavior that is not fitting for Christ’s apostles. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” You can use a form in your language to list things that someone should not do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) 1TH 2 5 hqih figs-infostructure οὔτε γάρ ποτε ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας ἐγενήθημεν, 1 Paul places **just as you know** in a position that gives it special emphasis (See also [2:2](../02/02.md)). If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “As you are well aware, we did not previously come to flatter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1TH 2 5 q2yh figs-metaphor ἐν προφάσει πλεονεξίας 1 Here, **pretext** expresses the idea of people with greedy motives by comparing them to people wearing a mask or a disguise to cover up their evil intent. If the concept of a masking or disguising would not communicate a covering of true motives, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “disguising greedy intent” or “trying to hide greed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 2 5 qqia figs-ellipsis (Θεὸς μάρτυς) 1 In the phrase **God {is} witness**, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “God is our witness!”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 2 9 ezqn figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Again, the phrase **the gospel of God** is used to indicate that the apostles’ message is of divine origin (See your translation at [2:2](../02/02.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1TH 2 10 re18 figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες καὶ ὁ Θεός 1 The apostles are appealing to the Thessalonian church and God to validate their gospel message and personal motives (See also [2:5](../02/05.md)). They speak as if they are summoning both the church and God as a witness to testify on their behalf before a judge. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “You are our witnesses, as well as God himself” or “As well as God, you could personally testify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 2 10 h52a figs-ellipsis ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες καὶ ὁ Θεός 1 In this phrase, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “As well as God, you could personally testify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1TH 2 10 il3e figs-litany ὡς ὁσίως, καὶ δικαίως, καὶ ἀμέμπτως, ὑμῖν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐγενήθημεν 1 holy, and righteous, and blameless Paul uses a repetitive series of proofs of the apostles’ godly behavior in [2:10-12](../02/10.md). This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the evidence for which the Thessalonian church and God are evoked as witnesses. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done right. Alternate translation: “just how faithfully and justly and innocently we conducted ourselves toward you believers in God” or “how we acted reverently, and fairly, and blamelessly while visiting the faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) +1TH 2 10 il3e figs-litany ὡς ὁσίως, καὶ δικαίως, καὶ ἀμέμπτως, ὑμῖν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐγενήθημεν 1 holy, and righteous, and blameless Paul uses a repetitive series of proofs of the apostles’ godly behavior in [2:10–12](../02/10.md). This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the evidence for which the Thessalonian church and God are evoked as witnesses. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone has done right. Alternate translation: “just how faithfully and justly and innocently we conducted ourselves toward you believers in God” or “how we acted reverently, and fairly, and blamelessly while visiting the faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) 1TH 2 10 ufdv figs-yousingular ὑμεῖς…ὑμῖν 1 holy, and righteous, and blameless The pronouns **You** and **you** are plural and refer to all the believers in God at Thessalonica. Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “You all … among all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) 1TH 2 11 oug6 καθάπερ οἴδατε ὡς ἕνα ἕκαστον ὑμῶν 1 Again, Paul places **just as you know** in a position that gives it special emphasis (See also [2:2,5](../02/02.md)). It is another way of saying “you {are} witnesses” (See [2:10](../02/10.md)). Paul is appealing to the Thessalonian church’s own experience of the apostles’ godly behavior to prove their gospel message comes from God (See [2:9](../02/09.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “just as you each and every one of you are well aware” or “just as each one of you experienced for yourself” 1TH 2 11 i58m figs-simile ὡς πατὴρ τέκνα ἑαυτοῦ 1 as a father his own children The point of Paul’s comparison is that the apostles are like fathers who model and instruct in proper behavior for their children. They see themselves as spiritual fathers to the Thessalonian church, so they nurture them in the Christian faith like a father would care for the overall well-being of his own children. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “like a father nurtures his own children” or “just as a father cares for his own children” or “like a father trains his own children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) @@ -137,13 +137,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 2 13 ruy0 ἡμεῖς 1 Here Paul uses the word **we** to emphasize how thankful the apostles are. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we personally” or “we ourselves” 1TH 2 13 ei3j figs-distinguish ὅτι παραλαβόντες λόγον ἀκοῆς παρ’ ἡμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἐδέξασθε 1 General Information: This clause explains why the apostles are thankful. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases more clear. See UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1TH 2 13 i39s figs-events ὅτι παραλαβόντες λόγον ἀκοῆς παρ’ ἡμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἐδέξασθε 1 General Information: Paul is stressing that it is **the word of God** that the apostles reported. This is why he first mentions that the Thessalonians **received the word of God** before mentioning that they **heard** it. If this is confusing in your language, you can make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “that when we told you God’s message, you heard it, and then you accepted it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) -1TH 2 13 dr6q grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, **that** marks the reasons in [2:13-14](../02/13.md) for why the apostles are thankful for the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language to express the reason why people should do things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 2 13 dr6q grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, **that** marks the reasons in [2:13–14](../02/13.md) for why the apostles are thankful for the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language to express the reason why people should do things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 2 13 zj5f grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ καθὼς ἀληθῶς ἐστὶν 1 not as the word of man Paul uses this contrasting clause to strongly negate the idea that the apostles’ message is of human origin. Use a natural way in your language for introducing an emphatic contrast. Alternate translation: “but in fact what it really is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1TH 2 13 f6ta figs-metonymy λόγον ἀνθρώπων…λόγον Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses the phrase **the word** to represent a message that is made up of words. Here, **the word of man** refers to a message of human origin. In contrast, **the word of God** refers to the same message, called “the gospel of God” in [2:8-9](../02/08.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “a human message … God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TH 2 13 f6ta figs-metonymy λόγον ἀνθρώπων…λόγον Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses the phrase **the word** to represent a message that is made up of words. Here, **the word of man** refers to a message of human origin. In contrast, **the word of God** refers to the same message, called “the gospel of God” in [2:8–9](../02/08.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “a human message … God’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 2 13 ci1e figs-personification ὃς καὶ ἐνεργεῖται ἐν ὑμῖν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν 1 which is also working in you who believe The apostles refer to God’s gospel message as if it were a person or tool doing work. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “and God is energizing you faithful ones with this message” or “and God is activating this message among you who trust in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1TH 2 13 z89g writing-pronouns ὃς 1 which is also working in you who believe Here, the word translated **which** could refer to **God** or **the word**. Alternate translation: “and God” or “and God’s word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1TH 2 13 x7oi figs-yousingular ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here, the pronoun **you** is plural and refers to all the believers in God at Thessalonica (See [2:10](../02/10.md)). Your language may require you to mark this form. Alternate translation: “among all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) -1TH 2 14 mh8n writing-background 0 became imitators of the churches Verses 14-16 provide background information about how the Thessalonian church suffered persecutions similar to the Judean church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +1TH 2 14 mh8n writing-background 0 became imitators of the churches Verses 14–16 provide background information about how the Thessalonian church suffered persecutions similar to the Judean church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) 1TH 2 14 xopt grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 **For** indicates that what follows is the proof of how God’s message is working among the Thessalonian church. Alternate translation: “Because” or “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 2 14 cj05 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1TH 2 14 ij9j μιμηταὶ ἐγενήθητε…τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν 1 Here, **imitators** is a noun that can be translated with a verb (See [1:6](../01/06.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “mimicked the churches” or “imitated the churches” or “copied the behavior of the churches” @@ -185,16 +185,16 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 2 19 mj9n figs-personification ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 our hope … Is it not even you Here, **hope** **joy** and **crown** are spoken of as if they were the people in the Thessalonian church. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because who makes us hopeful? Who causes us to rejoice? Who gives us reason to boast victoriously?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1TH 2 19 ulj7 figs-ellipsis τίς γὰρ ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως? ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 our hope … Is it not even you Some words are left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is it** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1TH 2 19 jfak figs-personification ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 our hope … Is it not even you Here, **hope**, **joy**, and **crown of boasting** are spoken of as if these concepts were the Thessalonian church. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because who makes us hopeful? Who causes us to rejoice? Who gives us reason to boast victoriously?”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -1TH 2 19 e7tl figs-metonymy στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 crown of boasting Here, **crown** refers to a laurel wreath awarded to victorious athletes. The expression **crown of boasting** means a reward for victory or for having competed well. The proof of the apostles’ success will ultimately be displayed at the Second Coming of Christ if the Thessalonian church remains faithful to God (See [4:13-5:11](../04/13/.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “reward for victory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TH 2 19 e7tl figs-metonymy στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 crown of boasting Here, **crown** refers to a laurel wreath awarded to victorious athletes. The expression **crown of boasting** means a reward for victory or for having competed well. The proof of the apostles’ success will ultimately be displayed at the Second Coming of Christ if the Thessalonian church remains faithful to God (See [4:13–5:11](../04/13/.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “reward for victory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 2 19 uvb4 figs-possession στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 crown of boasting Paul is using this possessive form to describe either: (1) the product of boasting. Alternate translation: “crown that produces boasting” (2) the means of boasting. Alternate translation: “crown through which we boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1TH 2 19 h7gh figs-metonymy ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 crown of boasting Here, **before** refers to location or sphere, used as a substitute for “in front of” or “in the presence of.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our Lord Jesus” or “in front of our Lord Jesus” or “in the sight of our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1TH 2 19 mksc figs-idiom ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ 1 crown of boasting Here, **his coming** is a well-known idiom in 1-2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [3:13](../03/13.md)) or the “Day of the Lord” (See [5:2](../05/02.md)). Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this idea. Alternate translation: “at his Second Coming” or “when he arrives again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 2 19 mksc figs-idiom ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ 1 crown of boasting Here, **his coming** is a well-known idiom in 1–2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [3:13](../03/13.md)) or the “Day of the Lord” (See [5:2](../05/02.md)). Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this idea. Alternate translation: “at his Second Coming” or “when he arrives again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 2 20 l3m0 figs-parallelism ὑμεῖς γάρ ἐστε ἡ δόξα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἡ χαρά 1 crown of boasting This verse means the same thing as “our hope or joy or crown of boasting” in [2:19](../02/19.md). Paul says the same thing twice in slightly different ways to emphasize that he is genuinely pleased with the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1TH 2 20 d8dz figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς 1 crown of boasting Paul uses the word **you** to emphasize how the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness to God brings honor and joy to the apostles. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 2 20 nlbd figs-personification ὑμεῖς γάρ ἐστε ἡ δόξα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἡ χαρά 1 crown of boasting Here, the Thessalonian church is compared to the abstract concepts of **glory and joy**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because of you, God will honor us and make us rejoice” or “Certainly, we will become glorified and rejoice because of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -1TH 3 intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 3 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 3

1. Timothy’s Visit (3:1-5)
* Apostolic concern (3:1-2)
* Apostolic encouragement (3:3-5)
2. Timothy’s Report (3:6-13)
* Good news (3:6-10)
* Apostolic prayer (3:11-13)

## Structure and Formatting

The first part of this chapter recounts Timothy’s visit to Thessalonica. The second part tells about his report to Paul and Silvanus at Athens. Lastly, the apostles offer a prayer on behalf of the Thessalonian church.

## “We” and “You”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Metaphor

In this chapter, the Apostle Paul uses the phrase “stand firm” in [3:8](../03/08.md) as a metaphor of faithfulness to the Gospel, and “be shaken” in [3:3](../03/03.md) as the opposite of being faithful. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

Use a building metaphor, the apostles pray that God will “strengthen the “hearts” of the Thessalonian church “blameless” (See [3:13](../03/13.md)).

The enemy of God’s people, “Satan” (See [2:18](../02/18.md)) is here called “the tempter” (See [3:5](../03/05.md)).

### Hyperbole

Paul uses emotional and extreme language when speaking of his memory of the Thessalonian church. “Enduring it no longer,” the apostles and especially Paul (See [3:1,5](../03/01.md)) feel compelled to find out about the spiritual condition of the church. The intensity and duration of the apostles’ prayers is described as “night and day pleading earnestly” (See [3:10](../03/10.md)).

### The Second Coming of Christ

Here the apostles pray that the Thessalonian church will be preserved holy when Christ comes again with all his holy ones or “saints” (See [3:13](../03/13.md)). +1TH 3 intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 3 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 3

1. Timothy’s Visit (3:1–5)
* Apostolic concern (3:1–2)
* Apostolic encouragement (3:3–5)
2. Timothy’s Report (3:6–13)
* Good news (3:6–10)
* Apostolic prayer (3:11–13)

## Structure and Formatting

The first part of this chapter recounts Timothy’s visit to Thessalonica. The second part tells about his report to Paul and Silvanus at Athens. Lastly, the apostles offer a prayer on behalf of the Thessalonian church.

## “We” and “You”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Metaphor

In this chapter, the Apostle Paul uses the phrase “stand firm” in [3:8](../03/08.md) as a metaphor of faithfulness to the Gospel, and “be shaken” in [3:3](../03/03.md) as the opposite of being faithful. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

Use a building metaphor, the apostles pray that God will “strengthen the “hearts” of the Thessalonian church “blameless” (See [3:13](../03/13.md)).

The enemy of God’s people, “Satan” (See [2:18](../02/18.md)) is here called “the tempter” (See [3:5](../03/05.md)).

### Hyperbole

Paul uses emotional and extreme language when speaking of his memory of the Thessalonian church. “Enduring it no longer,” the apostles and especially Paul (See [3:1,5](../03/01.md)) feel compelled to find out about the spiritual condition of the church. The intensity and duration of the apostles’ prayers is described as “night and day pleading earnestly” (See [3:10](../03/10.md)).

### The Second Coming of Christ

Here the apostles pray that the Thessalonian church will be preserved holy when Christ comes again with all his holy ones or “saints” (See [3:13](../03/13.md)). 1TH 3 1 fqe3 grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ μηκέτι στέγοντες, ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι ἐν Ἀθήναις μόνοι, 1 enduring it no longer This is a result clause. Paul is explaining why he sent Timothy to Thessalonica in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “Because we could not restrain ourselves any longer, we thought it proper to stay behind in Athens alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 3 1 zvgz grammar-connect-words-phrases διὸ 1 enduring it no longer Here, **Therefore** indicates a return to the topic of a visit from the apostles (See [2:17-18](../02/17/.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 3 1 zvgz grammar-connect-words-phrases διὸ 1 enduring it no longer Here, **Therefore** indicates a return to the topic of a visit from the apostles (See [2:17–18](../02/17/.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 3 1 amxf figs-hyperbole διὸ μηκέτι στέγοντες 1 enduring it no longer This phrase uses extreme exaggeration to express the apostles’ deep desire to visit the Thessalonian church (See [2:17](../02/17.md)). The word translated **enduring** is related to the idea of keeping water out of a ship or trying to contain or holding something back. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that communicates anxious longing. Alternate translation: “Thus, since we could not bear to wait any longer” or “Therefore, because we could not ignore these emotions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1TH 3 1 n47x figs-explicit ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι ἐν Ἀθήναις μόνοι 1 we thought it good to be left behind at Athens alone Here, **we** and **alone** refer to Paul and Silvanus (and perhaps Timothy), since in [3:2](../03/02.md) it says, “we sent Timothy.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Silas and I thought it was good idea to remain alone in Athens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 3 2 q1f7 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 our brother and a servant What follows the word **and** here is in contrast to Paul and Silvanus staying behind at Athens. Instead, they sent Timothy. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “even though this was true,” or “yet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 3 4 wuco figs-quotations προελέγομεν ὑμῖν ὅτι μέλλομεν θλίβεσθαι 1 to suffer affliction Here, **that** could either express emphasis or be a quotation marker of what the apostles said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “we kept telling you ahead of time, ‘We are destined to endure distress.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) 1TH 3 4 a5y6 καὶ ἐγένετο 1 to suffer affliction Here, **and it happened** is meant to emphasize Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy’s apostolic credentials by verifying that their prophetic words came true. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “and this is precisely what happened” 1TH 3 5 tj4e writing-participants διὰ τοῦτο κἀγὼ μηκέτι στέγων, ἔπεμψα εἰς τὸ γνῶναι τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν 1 I also no longer enduring it Here Paul summarizes the story of Timothy’s visit but leaves out mention of Timothy as redundant information. If it is clearer in your language, you could include mention of Timothy. Alternate translation: “Again, since I could not wait anymore, I sent Timothy to learn if you still trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -1TH 3 5 o9ep figs-parallelism κἀγὼ μηκέτι στέγων, ἔπεμψα 1 I also no longer enduring it Paul repeats the same phrase **no longer enduring it** found in [3:1](../03/01.md). Here, “I sent” parallels “we sent” in [3:1-2](../03/01.md). This expresses that Paul represents the apostles who sent Timothy to Thessalonica. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this parallelism. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1TH 3 5 o9ep figs-parallelism κἀγὼ μηκέτι στέγων, ἔπεμψα 1 I also no longer enduring it Paul repeats the same phrase **no longer enduring it** found in [3:1](../03/01.md). Here, “I sent” parallels “we sent” in [3:1–2](../03/01.md). This expresses that Paul represents the apostles who sent Timothy to Thessalonica. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this parallelism. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1TH 3 5 st3d figs-hyperbole κἀγὼ μηκέτι στέγων 1 I also no longer enduring it This phrase is an exaggeration that Paul uses to express deep concern. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows deep concern. See your translation at [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1TH 3 5 zn36 figs-explicit ἔπεμψα 1 sent Here it is implied that Paul **sent** Timothy. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, sent Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 3 5 judq grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ γνῶναι τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν 1 sent This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why he **sent** Timothy. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that I could learn if you remained faithful” or “in order to discern whether you still trust God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) @@ -267,8 +267,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 3 13 jev8 figs-doublet ἀμέμπτους ἐν ἁγιωσύνῃ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus Here, **blameless** and **holiness** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize total sanctification. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. This phrase could refer to: (1) a condition of holiness. Alternate translation: “blameless in a condition of holiness” (2) how to become holy. Alternate translation: “blameless through holiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TH 3 13 p12j figs-idiom ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus This phrase is an idiom for being in the personal presence of God (See [3:9](../03/09.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our Father God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 3 13 vnsi figs-explicit ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, μετὰ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων αὐτοῦ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus This is a reference to Zechariah 14:5 (See also 2 Thessalonians 1:7,10; Jude 14). Here it is implied that these **saints** are all those who are **blameless in holiness** and who have already died (See [4:14](../04/14.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time the Lord Jesus arrives along with all his holy people who have already died” or “when the Lord Jesus returns a second time with all those reposed people who belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 3 13 ytqg figs-idiom ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus Here, **at the coming of the Lord Jesus** is a well-known idiom in 1-2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [2:19; 4:15](../02/19.md)) or the “Day of the **Lord**” [5:2](../05/02.md)). Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this idea. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our Lord Jesus at his Second Coming” or “in the sight of our Lord Jesus when he arrives again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 4 intro b1z5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 4 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 4

1. Apostolic Teachings on Holiness (4:1-8)
2. Apostolic Teachings on Christian Love (4:9-12)
* Reminder (4:9-10)
* Keep Busy (4:11-12)
3. Apostolic Teachings on the Manner of the Second Coming of Christ (4:13-18)

## “We” and “You”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Christian love

The apostles address the topic of Christian love that the Thessalonian church had previously asked about. The apostles encouraged the church that they were already loving well, and they should continue to grow in this practice. The apostles also link “brotherly love” to living in harmony with each other and minding their own business, so that they would be a good example to non-Christians (See [4:11-12](../04/11.md)).

### Dying before the Second Coming of Christ

The Thessalonian church was concerned about what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They were anxious to know whether or not those who died before Christ returned would be part of the Kingdom of God. Paul addresses that concern in [4:13-5:11](../04/13.md).

### The manner of the Second Coming of Christ

In [4:13-18](../04/13.md), the apostles teach about the events related to the Second Coming of Christ (called “the day of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md)). This is so that the Thessalonians can “comfort one another with these words” (See [4:18](../04/18.md)).

## Important Translation Issues in this Chapter

### Sexual immorality

Different cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators will have to consider the most appropriate way to communicate these sensitive issues.

### The Second Coming of Christ and the Day of the Lord

All Christians believe that Jesus will return to earth to judge all people and to rule forever. As the Nicene Creed (381 A.D.) states: “I await the resurrection of the dead and the life of the age to come.” Christ came once as Incarnate God and will return once as Resurrected Judge. However, there are various ways that Christians understand the “coming of the Lord” as explained in [4:13-5:11](../04/13.md), and the “day of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md). Some believe they are one and the same event, but others believe them to be two separate events. Your translation should state clearly only what is clear in these verses without promoting any particular interpretation. +1TH 3 13 ytqg figs-idiom ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus Here, **at the coming of the Lord Jesus** is a well-known idiom in 1–2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [2:19; 4:15](../02/19.md)) or the “Day of the **Lord**” [5:2](../05/02.md)). Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this idea. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our Lord Jesus at his Second Coming” or “in the sight of our Lord Jesus when he arrives again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 4 intro b1z5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 4 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 4

1. Apostolic Teachings on Holiness (4:1–8)
2. Apostolic Teachings on Christian Love (4:9–12)
* Reminder (4:9–10)
* Keep Busy (4:11–12)
3. Apostolic Teachings on the Manner of the Second Coming of Christ (4:13–18)

## “We” and “You”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Christian love

The apostles address the topic of Christian love that the Thessalonian church had previously asked about. The apostles encouraged the church that they were already loving well, and they should continue to grow in this practice. The apostles also link “brotherly love” to living in harmony with each other and minding their own business, so that they would be a good example to non-Christians (See [4:11–12](../04/11.md)).

### Dying before the Second Coming of Christ

The Thessalonian church was concerned about what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They were anxious to know whether or not those who died before Christ returned would be part of the Kingdom of God. Paul addresses that concern in [4:13–5:11](../04/13.md).

### The manner of the Second Coming of Christ

In [4:13–18](../04/13.md), the apostles teach about the events related to the Second Coming of Christ (called “the day of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md)). This is so that the Thessalonians can “comfort one another with these words” (See [4:18](../04/18.md)).

## Important Translation Issues in this Chapter

### Sexual immorality

Different cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators will have to consider the most appropriate way to communicate these sensitive issues.

### The Second Coming of Christ and the Day of the Lord

All Christians believe that Jesus will return to earth to judge all people and to rule forever. As the Nicene Creed (381 A.D.) states: “I await the resurrection of the dead and the life of the age to come.” Christ came once as Incarnate God and will return once as Resurrected Judge. However, there are various ways that Christians understand the “coming of the Lord” as explained in [4:13–5:11](../04/13.md), and the “day of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md). Some believe they are one and the same event, but others believe them to be two separate events. Your translation should state clearly only what is clear in these verses without promoting any particular interpretation. 1TH 4 1 vtas grammar-connect-words-phrases λοιπὸν οὖν 1 brothers Here, **So finally** could refer to: (1) a summary of the apostles’ teachings. Alternate translation: “So, in summary,” (2) the remaining things to address. “So then, here is what remains for us to talk about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 4 1 u2lw figs-doublet ἐρωτῶμεν ὑμᾶς καὶ παρακαλοῦμεν 1 we beg and exhort you These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how seriously the apostles want the Thessalonian church to follow their teachings. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “we are urging and appealing to you” or “we strongly urge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TH 4 1 foeh figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ 1 we beg and exhort you Paul speaks as if the apostles are occupying space inside of **the Lord Jesus**. Here, the metaphor expresses the idea that the apostles represent Jesus himself like ambassadors who possess a king’s authority. If your readers would not understand what **in the Lord** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with our authority from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -282,9 +282,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 3 ycsw figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὁ ἁγιασμὸς ὑμῶν, 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality If your language does not use the abstract nouns **will** and **sanctification**, you can express the ideas behind them in another way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, God desires that you live like those who belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 4 3 lit4 grammar-connect-words-phrases τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality Here, **For this is** indicates that this is the beginning of a section about the content of the commands from the Lord Jesus in [4:2](../04/02.md). Use a natural way in your language to indicate the beginning of new topic. Alternate translation: “Now, this is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 4 3 vnp0 grammar-collectivenouns τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality Here, **this** is a singular pronoun that emphasizes what **is the will of God**. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Certainly, this very thing is God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -1TH 4 3 mw4j τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὁ ἁγιασμὸς ὑμῶν 1 For this is the will of God, your sanctification Here begins a list spanning through [4:3-8](../04/03.md) that explains what **sanctification** means in this context. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the beginning of a topic. +1TH 4 3 mw4j τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὁ ἁγιασμὸς ὑμῶν 1 For this is the will of God, your sanctification Here begins a list spanning through [4:3–8](../04/03.md) that explains what **sanctification** means in this context. Use a natural way in your language to indicate the beginning of a topic. 1TH 4 3 lgac figs-distinguish ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τῆς πορνείας 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality This phrase gives us further information about what is meant by **sanctification**. Paul is defining the **sanctification** God wants for his people by forbidding **sexually immorality**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -1TH 4 3 lhxi figs-imperative ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality The following list of verb forms in [4:3-6](../04/03.md) could be translated as commands (See [4:2](../04/02.md)). Here, the verb forms are likely meant to express a strong suggestion or appeal. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “you yourselves must refrain” or “you should withhold yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1TH 4 3 lhxi figs-imperative ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality The following list of verb forms in [4:3–6](../04/03.md) could be translated as commands (See [4:2](../04/02.md)). Here, the verb forms are likely meant to express a strong suggestion or appeal. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “you yourselves must refrain” or “you should withhold yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1TH 4 4 u98k figs-distinguish εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ 1 to know to possess his own vessel Here Paul gives more instructions about the **sanctification** God wants for his people, by telling the Thessalonian church that every husband needs to treat his wife’s body and his own body **in sanctification and honor**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these verses clearer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) 1TH 4 4 vhbp figs-euphemism εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ, 1 to know to possess his own vessel Here, **to know to possess** refers to sexual intimacy. This is a polite way of referring to something private. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “God desires that you treat your wives’ bodies like they belong to God and to honor them” or “each of you men must use your own body for God’s holy and honorable purposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1TH 4 4 fk6n figs-nominaladj ἕκαστον 1 to know to possess his own vessel Paul is using the adjective **each** as a noun in order to describe a group of men. Here it specifically is used to emphasize that every husband or man must obey this teaching. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “each and every man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -300,8 +300,8 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 6 wmb6 figs-hendiadys ὑπερβαίνειν καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν 1 transgress and wrong This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **exploit** describes **transgress** . If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “exploits by transgressing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 1TH 4 6 ho6h figs-metaphor ὑπερβαίνειν καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν 1 transgress and wrong Here, **transgress and exploit** speaks about adultery, by comparing it to a person who unlawfully enters someone’s property and claims it for their own. If your readers would not understand what it means to **transgress and exploit** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “must trespass and defraud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 4 6 ckez figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ πράγματι τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 the Lord is an avenger Here, **in this matter** could be speaking of adultery as if someone is intruding in another person’s business matters. If your readers would not understand what **in this matter** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “the marital matters of his fellow believer in Christ” or “the marriage relationship of another believer in Christ” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 4 6 q7bf grammar-connect-logic-result διότι ἔκδικος Κύριος περὶ πάντων τούτων 1 the Lord is an avenger This clause gives the final result for those who live “in the passion of lust” (See [4:5](../04/05.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express result. This could refer to: 1) all the matters spoken of in [4:3-6](../04/03.md). Alternate translation: “Certainly, the Lord Jesus will avenge all these things” 2) the sexually immoral people. Alternate translation: “This is because the Lord Jesus will punish all those people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 4 6 d1ip writing-background καθὼς καὶ προείπαμεν ὑμῖν καὶ διεμαρτυράμεθα 1 we also forewarned you and testified Paul provides this background information about what the apostles said in an earlier visit (See in [2:10-12](../02/10.md)). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “This will happen just as we already told you and solemnly testified to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +1TH 4 6 q7bf grammar-connect-logic-result διότι ἔκδικος Κύριος περὶ πάντων τούτων 1 the Lord is an avenger This clause gives the final result for those who live “in the passion of lust” (See [4:5](../04/05.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express result. This could refer to: 1) all the matters spoken of in [4:3–6](../04/03.md). Alternate translation: “Certainly, the Lord Jesus will avenge all these things” 2) the sexually immoral people. Alternate translation: “This is because the Lord Jesus will punish all those people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 4 6 d1ip writing-background καθὼς καὶ προείπαμεν ὑμῖν καὶ διεμαρτυράμεθα 1 we also forewarned you and testified Paul provides this background information about what the apostles said in an earlier visit (See in [2:10–12](../02/10.md)). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “This will happen just as we already told you and solemnly testified to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) 1TH 4 6 ix4p figs-doublet καθὼς καὶ προείπαμεν ὑμῖν καὶ διεμαρτυράμεθα 1 we also forewarned you and testified These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize what the apostles had already told the Thessalonian church during a previous visit. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you can combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “exactly as we also solemnly forewarned you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TH 4 7 qx6y figs-abstractnouns οὐ γὰρ ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς ἐπὶ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ 1 God did not call us If your language does not use the abstract nouns **uncleanness** and **sanctification**, you can express the ideas behind them in other ways. Alternate translation: “We must not live impurely or act unholy, because God did not call us as his people for this purpose” or “God called us, so we must purify and set ourselves apart like those who belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 4 7 v3np figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς ἐπὶ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ 1 God did not call us to uncleanness, but in holiness Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Certainly God summons us to live purely and act holy” or “Indeed, God calls us to be pure and holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 9 ctiq αὐτοὶ γὰρ ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε, εἰς τὸ ἀγαπᾶν ἀλλήλους 1 brotherly love This clause could refer to: (1) the content of God’s teaching. Alternate translation: “because it is God himself who teaches you: love each other” (2) the manner of God’s teaching. Alternate translation: “indeed, it is God who teaches you how to love each other” (3) the purpose of God’s teaching. Alternate translation: “the reason why God teaches you is so that you would love each other” Use a natural way in your language for expressing this idea. 1TH 4 9 j7z0 figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ γὰρ ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε 1 brotherly love Paul speaks of the Thessalonian church as though God himself were physically present as their teacher. Paul means that the Thessalonian church already has been taught **to love one another** through the words of Jesus (See John 13:34; 15:12, 17) by the apostles. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **taught by God** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “because you have learned well what God teaches,” or “since this is what God teaches you to do,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 4 9 zroq figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ 1 brotherly love Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize that the Thessalonian church is doing what God teaches. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1TH 4 10 e3e0 writing-background καὶ γὰρ ποιεῖτε αὐτὸ εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, τοὺς ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ 1 you do this to all the brothers who are in all Macedonia Paul provides this background information to show another aspect of how the Thessalonian church “became an example” to the churches in Macedonia and Achaia (See [1:7-8](../01/07.md)). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Certainly, you habitually show love to all your fellow believers in Christ throughout the region of Macedonia” or “In fact, you are doing just that to all the fellow Christians throughout the province of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +1TH 4 10 e3e0 writing-background καὶ γὰρ ποιεῖτε αὐτὸ εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, τοὺς ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ 1 you do this to all the brothers who are in all Macedonia Paul provides this background information to show another aspect of how the Thessalonian church “became an example” to the churches in Macedonia and Achaia (See [1:7–8](../01/07.md)). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Certainly, you habitually show love to all your fellow believers in Christ throughout the region of Macedonia” or “In fact, you are doing just that to all the fellow Christians throughout the province of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) 1TH 4 10 dec9 grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 you do this to all the brothers who are in all Macedonia Here, **For indeed** indicates that what follows in an example of how the Thessalonian church shows Christian love. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 4 10 hg7a figs-explicit ποιεῖτε αὐτὸ 1 you do this to all the brothers who are in all Macedonia What is implied here is that **this** refers back to the phrase “to love” in [4:9](../04/09.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 4 10 gxfa figs-litany παρακαλοῦμεν δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, 1 brothers Speaking of what the apostles **exhort** the Thessalonian church to do, Paul uses a repetitive series of five verb forms that continues into [4:11](../04/11.md). This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone is urged to do. Alternate translation: “Now, fellow believers in Christ, we are urging you” or “But, fellow Christians, we strongly encourage you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) @@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 12 hp6g figs-metaphor περιπατῆτε εὐσχημόνως 1 you may walk properly Here, **to walk** is a metaphor that means “to live” or “behave.” If your readers would not understand what it means **to walk** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you would live appropriately” or “you would live nobly” or “you would behave modestly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 4 12 k59r figs-metaphor πρὸς τοὺς ἔξω 1 before those outside Paul speaks of these people as if they were physically located outside of an area. He means that they are not part of the Christian community. If your readers would not understand what “before those outside” means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in the presence of non-Christians” or “in front of those who do not trust in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 4 12 nait grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ μηδενὸς χρείαν ἔχητε 1 before those outside This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for the apostles’ exhortation in [4:10](../04/10.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “and so that you would not need anything” or “and then you could be self-sufficient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 4 13 vi2y grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 General Information: Here, **Now** is a connecting word that signals the beginning of an extended section in [4:13-5:11](../04/13.md) about the Second Coming of Christ (See chapter and book introduction)(See also 2 Thessalonians 1:7-10; 2:3-12). If our language has a special section marker, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 4 13 vi2y grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 General Information: Here, **Now** is a connecting word that signals the beginning of an extended section in [4:13–5:11](../04/13.md) about the Second Coming of Christ (See chapter and book introduction)(See also 2 Thessalonians 1:7–10; 2:3–12). If our language has a special section marker, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 4 13 lan8 figs-litotes οὐ θέλομεν δὲ ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 General Information: Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “We want you to know for certain” or “Now we desire to clarify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) 1TH 4 13 qt5b figs-explicit περὶ 1 you may not grieve Here, **concerning** implies that the apostles are answering another specific question previously asked by the Thessalonian church (See [4:9](../04/09.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as it relates to your question about” or “concerning your question about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 4 13 j68e figs-euphemism τῶν κοιμωμένων 1 General Information: Here, **those who are asleep** is a euphemism for death that continues through [5:10](../05/10.md). In this specific context, it refers to those human souls who are awaiting the reunion of their bodies at the Second Coming of Christ (See [4:16–17](../04/16.md)). You could either use a similar euphemism for death in your language or say this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “those who are already dead” or “those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) @@ -351,7 +351,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 15 gbe1 grammar-connect-words-phrases Κυρίου, ὅτι ἡμεῖς 1 by the word of the Lord Here, **that** indicates that the rest of the verse is the content of **the word of the Lord**. You could indicate this by changing the punctuation or some other natural way in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord: we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 4 15 fdwk figs-exclusive λέγομεν…ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 by the word of the Lord When Paul says **we say**, he is speaking of himself, Silvanus, and Timothy, so **we** would be exclusive. However, when Paul says **we who are alive**, since he seems to be referring to all Christians, **we who are alive** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we apostles say … all of us believers in Christ who are still alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 4 15 hdlr figs-distinguish οἱ περιλειπόμενοι 1 by the word of the Lord This phrase gives us further information about **we who are alive**. It is not making a distinction between **who are left behind** and **we who are alive**. If this is not understood in your language, you could make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “and survive” or “and remain here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -1TH 4 15 b786 figs-idiom εἰς τὴν παρουσίαν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 at the coming of the Lord Here, **coming of the Lord** is a well-known idiom in 1-2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ [3:13](../03/13.md) or the “Day of the **Lord**” [5:2](../05/02.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “until the Lord Jesus returns” or “for the Second Coming of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 4 15 b786 figs-idiom εἰς τὴν παρουσίαν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 at the coming of the Lord Here, **coming of the Lord** is a well-known idiom in 1–2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ [3:13](../03/13.md) or the “Day of the **Lord**” [5:2](../05/02.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “until the Lord Jesus returns” or “for the Second Coming of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 4 15 xd2y figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ φθάσωμεν τοὺς κοιμηθέντας 1 by the word of the Lord Here, the phrase translated **certainly not** is a strong prohibition meaning “never.” If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement as in the UST. Alternate translation: “will never precede those who are dead” or “are not permitted to come before those who have already died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 1TH 4 16 ah7p grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 the Lord himself … will descend Here, **For** indicates that following events are related to the Second Coming. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this. Alternately translation: “Certainly,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 4 16 c26b grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὅτι αὐτὸς ὁ Κύριος ἐν κελεύσματι, ἐν φωνῇ ἀρχαγγέλου, καὶ ἐν σάλπιγγι Θεοῦ, καταβήσεται ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ 1 the Lord himself … will descend In this verse, Paul is describing events that happen at the same time **the Lord will descend from heaven**. He emphasizes the order of events by listing them prior to the main verb. If it is clearer in your language, you could place the main verb before the accompanying actions. You can also make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “Certainly, the Lord Jesus himself will come down from heaven with a commanding shout, and with the archangel’s voice, and with God’s trumpet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) @@ -366,17 +366,17 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 17 l5l1 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 we who are alive Though **we who are alive** could be exclusive of the apostles (See note for the same phrase at [4:15](../04/15.md)), the universal content of this section implies that all Christians are in view, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “all of us believers in Christ who remain alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 4 17 otiq writing-pronouns ἅμα σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 we who are alive Here, Paul refers to “the dead in Christ” (See [4:16](../04/16.md)) as **them**. If this is confusing in your language, you can make the reference explicit. Alternate translation: “together with the dead in Christ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1TH 4 17 aj1n grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἅμα σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 we who are alive Here, **together with them** could refer to: (1) a simultaneous event. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “with them at the same time” (2) association with the “dead in Christ.” Alternate translation: “along with the dead in Christ” (3) both event and association. Alternate translation: “at the same time together with the dead in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) -1TH 4 17 m3gb figs-explicit ἁρπαγησόμεθα ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 with them Here it is assumed that Paul is referring to the words of the angels at Jesus’ Ascension in [Acts 1:9-11] (acts/01/09.md), as a fulfillment of the prophecy in [Daniel 7:13-14](../dan/07/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could provide a footnote or reference. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 4 17 m3gb figs-explicit ἁρπαγησόμεθα ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 with them Here it is assumed that Paul is referring to the words of the angels at Jesus’ Ascension in [Acts 1:9–11] (acts/01/09.md), as a fulfillment of the prophecy in [Daniel 7:13–14](../dan/07/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could provide a footnote or reference. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 4 17 o7lj grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ἀπάντησιν 1 with them Here, **to meet** is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why living believers **will be caught up together** with “the dead in Christ.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to encounter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1TH 4 17 ukh1 writing-symlanguage ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 with them Here, **clouds** and **air** could be considered symbolic language representing God’s presence and the spiritual realm (See Exodus 19; Daniel 7:13-14; Matthew 24; Mark 13; Luke 17; 21; Ephesians 2:2). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to spiritually encounter the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) +1TH 4 17 ukh1 writing-symlanguage ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 with them Here, **clouds** and **air** could be considered symbolic language representing God’s presence and the spiritual realm (See Exodus 19; Daniel 7:13–14; Matthew 24; Mark 13; Luke 17; 21; Ephesians 2:2). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to spiritually encounter the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) 1TH 4 17 ti69 writing-endofstory καὶ οὕτως 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This clause is meant to signal the end of the events related to the Second Coming. You can use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) 1TH 4 17 ouvu grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ οὕτως 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This clause also indicates the result of the meeting with **the Lord**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “and then” or “as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 4 17 k6qc figs-parallelism σὺν Κυρίῳ 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air Here, **with the Lord** parallels **together with them** to express union with Christ as communion with his people. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1TH 4 18 gt91 grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε παρακαλεῖτε 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “So then, keep encouraging” or “Because of this, you must comfort” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 4 18 y7zi figs-imperative παρακαλεῖτε 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This is an imperative, but it communicates an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an appeal. Alternate translation: “you should encourage” or “please continue to comfort (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1TH 4 18 aya5 writing-pronouns ἀλλήλους 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air The pronoun **one another** refers to the Thessalonian church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “each fellow member of your church” or “your fellow Thessalonian believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1TH 4 18 xsus figs-synecdoche ἐν τοῖς λόγοις τούτοις 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air Here, **with these words** could refer to “we will always be with the Lord” in [4:17](../04/17.md) or to all that has been said in [4:13-17](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “by reminding each other of our message” or “with these promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -1TH 5 intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 5 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 5

1. Apostolic Teachings on the Second Coming of Christ (5:1-10)
* Timing (5:1-3)
* Preparation (5:4-8)
* God’s plan (5:9-10)
2. Final Instructions (5:11-28)
* Final Commands (5:11-22)
* Final Prayer (5:23-24)
* Final Appeals (5:25-27)
* Final blessing (5:25-27)

## Structure and Formatting

Paul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.

## “We” and “You”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Idiom

#### Day of the Lord

The “day of the Lord” is an idiom for the time of final salvation for God’s people and final judgment for God’s enemies. “Day” is metaphorical for a time period. Thus, the exact time of the coming “day of the Lord” will be a surprise to the world. The simile “like a thief in the night” refers to this surprise timing. Because of this, Christians must prepare for the coming of the Lord by living with faith, hope and love [5:8](../05/08.md) toward God and others. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]])

### Simile

#### Like a thief

The simile “like a thief in the night” refers to this surprise timing. Because of this, Christians must prepare for the coming of the Lord by living with faith, hope, and love [5:8](../05/08.md) toward God and others. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

### Metaphor

#### Day and night, light and darkness

The apostles use many metaphors throughout [5:1-11](../05/1.md). “Night,” “darkness,” “drunk,” “sleep” are all metaphors about spiritual ignorance or lack of readiness. “Day,” “light,” “sober,” “watch” are all metaphors about spiritual awareness and readiness.

#### Armor

Here, the apostles use a military metaphor to urge the Thessalonian church to be ready for Christ’s Second Coming at “the day of the Lord.” Just as soldiers must always be armed and ready to fight, so the Christian must live prepared for Christ’s return. Faithfulness and love are compared to a breastplate, and the hope of salvation is likened to a helmet [5:8](../05/08.md).

#### Prophecy

Those who “despise prophecies” in [5:20](../05/20.md) are said to “quench the Spirit.” This is a metaphor for trying to hinder the Holy Spirit’s guidance in the Church. All prophecies are to be examined and tested to determine if they adhere to apostolic teaching [5:21](../05/21.md). All prophecies that are proven to agree with apostolic teaching, are to be retained as good [5:21-22](../05/21/.md).

### Submission to Christian leadership

The apostles link the well-being and spiritual safety of the Thessalonian church to obedience to their leaders. Christian leaders are to be given recognition and loving respect by the church [5:12-13](../05/12.md).

### Holy Kiss

This refers to the ancient practice of exchanging a kiss of peace on the cheek during the liturgy. Different cultures have different standards of appropriate physical contact. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators will have to consider the most appropriate way to communicate this sensitive issue [5:26](../05/26.md). +1TH 4 18 xsus figs-synecdoche ἐν τοῖς λόγοις τούτοις 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air Here, **with these words** could refer to “we will always be with the Lord” in [4:17](../04/17.md) or to all that has been said in [4:13–17](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “by reminding each other of our message” or “with these promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1TH 5 intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 5 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 5

1. Apostolic Teachings on the Second Coming of Christ (5:1–10)
* Timing (5:1–3)
* Preparation (5:4–8)
* God’s plan (5:9–10)
2. Final Instructions (5:11–28)
* Final Commands (5:11–22)
* Final Prayer (5:23–24)
* Final Appeals (5:25–27)
* Final blessing (5:25–27)

## Structure and Formatting

Paul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.

## “We” and “You”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** are used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Idiom

#### Day of the Lord

The “day of the Lord” is an idiom for the time of final salvation for God’s people and final judgment for God’s enemies. “Day” is metaphorical for a time period. Thus, the exact time of the coming “day of the Lord” will be a surprise to the world. The simile “like a thief in the night” refers to this surprise timing. Because of this, Christians must prepare for the coming of the Lord by living with faith, hope and love [5:8](../05/08.md) toward God and others. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]])

### Simile

#### Like a thief

The simile “like a thief in the night” refers to this surprise timing. Because of this, Christians must prepare for the coming of the Lord by living with faith, hope, and love [5:8](../05/08.md) toward God and others. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

### Metaphor

#### Day and night, light and darkness

The apostles use many metaphors throughout [5:1–11](../05/1.md). “Night,” “darkness,” “drunk,” “sleep” are all metaphors about spiritual ignorance or lack of readiness. “Day,” “light,” “sober,” “watch” are all metaphors about spiritual awareness and readiness.

#### Armor

Here, the apostles use a military metaphor to urge the Thessalonian church to be ready for Christ’s Second Coming at “the day of the Lord.” Just as soldiers must always be armed and ready to fight, so the Christian must live prepared for Christ’s return. Faithfulness and love are compared to a breastplate, and the hope of salvation is likened to a helmet [5:8](../05/08.md).

#### Prophecy

Those who “despise prophecies” in [5:20](../05/20.md) are said to “quench the Spirit.” This is a metaphor for trying to hinder the Holy Spirit’s guidance in the Church. All prophecies are to be examined and tested to determine if they adhere to apostolic teaching [5:21](../05/21.md). All prophecies that are proven to agree with apostolic teaching, are to be retained as good [5:21–22](../05/21/.md).

### Submission to Christian leadership

The apostles link the well-being and spiritual safety of the Thessalonian church to obedience to their leaders. Christian leaders are to be given recognition and loving respect by the church [5:12–13](../05/12.md).

### Holy Kiss

This refers to the ancient practice of exchanging a kiss of peace on the cheek during the liturgy. Different cultures have different standards of appropriate physical contact. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators will have to consider the most appropriate way to communicate this sensitive issue [5:26](../05/26.md). 1TH 5 1 i2vm figs-explicit περὶ δὲ τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 General Information: Here, **Now concerning** signals a change in subject (See also [4:9](../04/09.md)). This phrase implies that the apostles are answering a specific question previously asked by the Thessalonian church about the timing of “the coming of the Lord” and how the church should prepare for it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now, about your question related to the exact timing of the Lord’s return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 5 1 a8f3 figs-idiom τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 General Information: Here, **the times and the seasons** is an idiom referring to a specific point in time or a time period. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. This phrase could refer to: (1) a specific point in time. Alternate translation: “the appointed time when Jesus returns” or “the fixed time when Jesus returns” (See [Acts 1:7](acts/01/07.md)) for this exact phrase referring to the same thing)). (2) a specific amount of time. Alternate translation: “how long it will take for the Lord Jesus to return” or “when the Lord Jesus will return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 5 1 caue figs-ellipsis οὐ χρείαν ἔχετε ὑμῖν γράφεσθαι 1 General Information: Here words are left out in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **for us** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -402,10 +402,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 5 5 ilv4 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church will escape God’s judgment on “the **day** of the Lord” (See [5:2](../05/02.md)). Alternate translation: “Because in fact” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 5 5 cxo9 figs-nominaladj πάντες…ὑμεῖς…ἐστε 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe the whole Thessalonian church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “you Thessalonians are all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1TH 5 5 d6fm figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 We are not of the night nor of the darkness Again, Paul speaks of these people as if they actually live in a place without light. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully (See [5:4](../05/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to be **of the night** or **of the darkness** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “We are not unprepared like those at night or those who live in the darkness, ” or “We are not characterized by being spiritually ignorant” or “We do not live like those who are characterized by sinful activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 5 kq0x figs-exclusive ἐσμὲν 1 We are not of the night nor of the darkness In [5:5-10](../05/05.md), **We** is inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “We believers in Christ are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1TH 5 5 kq0x figs-exclusive ἐσμὲν 1 We are not of the night nor of the darkness In [5:5–10](../05/05.md), **We** is inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “We believers in Christ are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 5 5 f4uw figs-possession νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 We are not of the night nor of the darkness Paul is using the possessive form to describe people who are characterized by spiritual ignorance or who live sinfully. This means that they will not be prepared at “**the day** of the Lord.” If this is not clear in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “characterized by being spiritually unprepared and living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1TH 5 6 paqf grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα οὖν 1 we might keep watch and be sober Here, **so then** emphatically introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “therefore” or “as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 6 d2aj figs-metaphor μὴ καθεύδωμεν ὡς οἱ λοιποί 1 we might keep watch and be sober Here Paul speaks about the people “of the night” and “of the darkness” are if they are sleeping. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully (See notes for “darkness” at [5:4-5](../05/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to **sleep** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “we must not be unprepared like non-Christians” or “let us not be like the rest of humanity, who are not aware that Jesus is coming back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 6 d2aj figs-metaphor μὴ καθεύδωμεν ὡς οἱ λοιποί 1 we might keep watch and be sober Here Paul speaks about the people “of the night” and “of the darkness” are if they are sleeping. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully (See notes for “darkness” at [5:4–5](../05/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to **sleep** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “we must not be unprepared like non-Christians” or “let us not be like the rest of humanity, who are not aware that Jesus is coming back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 6 on3d figs-imperative μὴ καθεύδωμεν…γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 we might keep watch and be sober Here, the verb forms **sleep**, **keep watch**, and **be sober** could also refer to: (1) commands. Alternate translation: “we must not sleep … we must keep watch and be sober” (2) appeals. Alternate translation: “let us not sleep … let us keep watch and let us be sober” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1TH 5 6 x0zh figs-nominaladj οἱ λοιποί 1 we might keep watch and be sober Paul is using the adjective **the rest** as a noun in order to describe those who are unprepared for Christ’s return. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “like others who are not ready for the Lord Jesus to return” or “like the rest of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1TH 5 6 q33e grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 we might not sleep Here, what follows the word **but** is in contrast to **the rest** who **sleep**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation (starting a new sentence): “On the contrary,” or “Instead,” or “Rather,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 5 8 wh3g grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 we, being of the day What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to “getting drunk” at “night” in [5:7](../05/07.md). Instead, Christians are characterized by the activities of **the day** and staying **sober** (See [5:5–6](../05/05.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1TH 5 8 iv63 figs-imperative ἡμεῖς…νήφωμεν 1 we, being of the day Here, **should stay sober** could refer to: (1) a command. Alternate translation: “we … must stay sober” (2) an appeal. Alternate translation: “let us … stay sober” (See your translation at [5:6](../05/06.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1TH 5 8 jqqo figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς δὲ ἡμέρας ὄντες 1 we, being of the day Paul speaks of Christians as if they are actually a part of the day time. He means that they are characterized by spiritual readiness for the Lord’s return. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **of the day** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Now, because we are ready for Christ’s coming, we” or “Since we are characterized by being ready, we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 8 ev6i figs-metaphor ἐνδυσάμενοι θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ περικεφαλαίαν, ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας 1 having put on the breastplate of faith and of love Paul speaks of Christians as if they are soldiers. He means that just as a soldier must equip himself with armor in order to be ready to fight, so Christians must prepare themselves for the Second Coming of Christ with the spiritual protection of **faith**, **love**, and **hope** (See also [Ephesians 6:10-18,23](../eph/06/10.md)). If your readers would not understand what these phrases mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 8 ev6i figs-metaphor ἐνδυσάμενοι θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ περικεφαλαίαν, ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας 1 having put on the breastplate of faith and of love Paul speaks of Christians as if they are soldiers. He means that just as a soldier must equip himself with armor in order to be ready to fight, so Christians must prepare themselves for the Second Coming of Christ with the spiritual protection of **faith**, **love**, and **hope** (See also [Ephesians 6:10–18,23](../eph/06/10.md)). If your readers would not understand what these phrases mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 9 h5y2 figs-abstractnouns ὅτι οὐκ ἔθετο ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς ὀργὴν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Here, **wrath** refers to God’s future and final Judgment (See your translation of **wrath** at [1:10](../01/10/.md), [2:16](../02/16/.md)). (See also [What is the “second coming” of Jesus?](../front/intro)). If your language does not use the abstract noun **wrath**, you can express the idea behind it in another way. “Certainly, God did not destine that he would punish us” or “Indeed, God did not determine that he would judge us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 5 9 lrx6 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church should have “the hope of salvation” (See [5:8](../05/08.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 5 8 l89q figs-possession πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης…σωτηρίας 1 having put on the breastplate of faith and of love Paul uses the possessive form to describe things that are characterized by **faith** and **hope** and **love**. You could turn these phrases into similes if it would be clearer in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -440,9 +440,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 5 12 f4jv figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 leading you in the Lord Paul speaks as if the leaders of the church at Thessalonica were occupying space inside of **the Lord**. Here, the metaphor expresses the idea that these men represent Jesus himself in their leadership role in the Thessalonian church (See also [4:1](../04/01.md). If your readers would not understand what **in the Lord** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with authority from the Lord Jesus” or “as spokespersons for the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 5 13 jq0o grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, διὰ τὸ ἔργον αὐτῶν 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “and because of their work on your behalf, we also ask you to lovingly show them the utmost consideration” or “and since they work so hard for you, we also urge you to show them the highest honor out of love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 5 13 p6m4 figs-metaphor ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Paul speaks as if the Thessalonian church is occupying space inside of **love**. He is describing how they should show honor to their leaders. If your readers would not understand what **in love** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Here, **in love** could refer to: (1) the means of love. Alternate translation: “by loving them” (2) the basis for love. Alternate translation: “on the basis of your love for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 13 rqs8 figs-imperative εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here is the first of 17 final appeals in [5:13-26](../05/13.md) that the apostles give the Thessalonian church. **Be at peace** is an imperative, but here it could be an urgent request rather than a command. Use a natural way in your language to communicate an appeal or urgent request. Alternate translation: “We urge you to continue to live peacefully with your leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1TH 5 13 rqs8 figs-imperative εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here is the first of 17 final appeals in [5:13–26](../05/13.md) that the apostles give the Thessalonian church. **Be at peace** is an imperative, but here it could be an urgent request rather than a command. Use a natural way in your language to communicate an appeal or urgent request. Alternate translation: “We urge you to continue to live peacefully with your leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1TH 5 14 lajk figs-litany 0 to regard them highly in love because of their work Paul uses a repetitive series of imperative sentences in [5:14–22](../05/14) to urge the Thessalonian church to show practical love to one another. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone should do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) -1TH 5 14 tdxa grammar-connect-words-phrases παρακαλοῦμεν δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work This phrase signals the apostles’ final appeals to the Thessalonian church. Since there are 14 commands in this section [5:14-22](../05/14.md), you could use a marker from your language to indicate this final section. Alternate translation: “Finally, we urge you, fellow believers in Christ” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 5 14 tdxa grammar-connect-words-phrases παρακαλοῦμεν δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work This phrase signals the apostles’ final appeals to the Thessalonian church. Since there are 14 commands in this section [5:14–22](../05/14.md), you could use a marker from your language to indicate this final section. Alternate translation: “Finally, we urge you, fellow believers in Christ” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 5 14 qadb figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here the idiom **brothers** could refer to: (1) the whole Thessalonian church including the leaders. Alternate translation: “our fellow believers in Christ” (2) the leaders of the Thessalonian church. Alternate translation: “fellow leaders of Christ’s church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 5 14 g34k figs-nominaladj πρὸς πάντας 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe the Thessalonian church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “toward all your fellow believers in Christ” or “with the whole Thessalonian church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1TH 5 15 vlp7 figs-idiom ὁρᾶτε 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here, **See that** is an idiom used to command attention. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Be certain that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 5 18 bt5q figs-nominaladj ἐν παντὶ 1 In everything Paul is using the adjective **everything** as a noun in order to describe a situation or time. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Here, **In everything** could refer to: (1) a situation or circumstance. Alternate translation: “In every circumstance” or “No matter what happens” (2) time. Alternate translation: “At every time” or “At every moment” (3) both a situation and time. Alternate translation: “In every circumstance and moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1TH 5 18 x2jg figs-infostructure ἐν παντὶ εὐχαριστεῖτε; 1 In everything If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Continue to give thanks in everything” or “Keep giving thanks all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) 1TH 5 18 q7gn grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν παντὶ εὐχαριστεῖτε; τοῦτο γὰρ θέλημα Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 for this is the will of God Here, **for** begins a reason clause. Paul is telling the Thessalonian church the reason why they should “rejoice,” “pray,” and **give thanks** in [5:16–18](../05/16.md)). If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Give thanks in everything, because all these things are what God desires for those who are united to Christ Jesus” or “Because this is God’s will for you who are united to Christ Jesus, you must give thanks in everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 18 l3sk grammar-collectivenouns τοῦτο γὰρ θέλημα Θεοῦ 1 for this is the will of God Here, **this** is a singular pronoun that could refer to: (1) all the commands in [5:14-18](../05/14.md) Alternate translation: “because all these things are what God desires” (2) **give thanks**. Alternate translation: “for in fact, this is God’s will” or “for certainly, this thing is God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +1TH 5 18 l3sk grammar-collectivenouns τοῦτο γὰρ θέλημα Θεοῦ 1 for this is the will of God Here, **this** is a singular pronoun that could refer to: (1) all the commands in [5:14–18](../05/14.md) Alternate translation: “because all these things are what God desires” (2) **give thanks**. Alternate translation: “for in fact, this is God’s will” or “for certainly, this thing is God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 1TH 5 18 yu36 figs-ellipsis τοῦτο 1 for this is the will of God A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 1TH 5 18 sw8b figs-abstractnouns θέλημα Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 for this is the will of God If your language does not use the abstract noun phrase **the will of God in Christ Jesus for you**, you can express the idea it in another way. Alternate translation: “how God desires people to live who are united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 5 18 mbz1 figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 for this is the will of God Here, Paul speaks of **the will of God** as though it were occupying space inside **Christ Jesus**. This metaphor means that the way God desires his people to live is inseparable from being united to **Christ Jesus** (See also [2:14](../02/14.md)). If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “for those of you who are united to Jesus Christ” or “for all of you who share life with Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 5 23 nb1x figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Paul uses the word **himself** to emphasize the urgency of the apostles’ prayer or blessing by drawing attention to **God**, who is the only one who can sanctify and keep the Christian person blameless. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 5 23 vkhs figs-activepassive ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως…τηρηθείη. 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly If it would be more natural in your language, you could say **be kept** with an active form, and you could emphasize who did the action. Alternate translation: “may God keep you completely blameless” or “may God make your whole life sinless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TH 5 23 s36k figs-merism ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Paul speaks, using these three aspects of the human person in order to represent the whole human being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or use plain language. Alternate translation: “your whole being” or “your whole life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -1TH 5 23 nyma figs-idiom ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Here, **coming of the Lord** is a well-known idiom in 1-2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [4:15](../04/15.md)) or the “Day of the **Lord**” in [5:2](../05/02.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when our Lord Jesus Christ comes back to earth again” or “at the arrival of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 5 23 nyma figs-idiom ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Here, **coming of the Lord** is a well-known idiom in 1–2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [4:15](../04/15.md)) or the “Day of the **Lord**” in [5:2](../05/02.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when our Lord Jesus Christ comes back to earth again” or “at the arrival of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 5 24 i03k grammar-connect-logic-result πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς, ὃς καὶ ποιήσει 1 who will also do it Here, **who will also do it** expresses the result of God’s faithfulness. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Because God is faithful, he will also preserve you sanctified” or “Since God is trustworthy, he will also completely sanctify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 5 24 vx20 figs-explicit πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς 1 Faithful is he who calls you Here it is implied that **he** refers to “the God of peace” in [5:23](../05/23.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Faithful is God who calls you” or “The God who continues to summon you is faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 5 24 lg3b figs-ellipsis πιστὸς ὁ 1 Faithful is he who calls you A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) diff --git a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv index 6b40cb68aa..fdaa5cddd3 100644 --- a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv @@ -1,13 +1,13 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -2TH front intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 2 Thessalonians

1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1-2)
1. Believers suffer from persecution (1:3-12)
* God uses persecution to increase faith, love, and endurance in believers (1:3-4)
* God is just: (1:5-12)
* God will make believers worthy of his kingdom
* God will give relief to believers
* God will punish those who persecute believers
1. Some believers misunderstand about the second coming of Christ (2:1-12)
* Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1-2)
* Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3-12)
1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian believers (2:13-17)
* Paul calls the Thessalonian believers to “stand firm” (2:13-15)
* Paul prays that God will comfort them (2:16-17)
1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1-5)
1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6-15)
1. Closing (3:16-17)

### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted believers. After he became a believer, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. Paul wrote this letter while he, Silvanus, and Timothy were staying in the city of Corinth.

### What is the book of 2 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return. He also warned them that they should not be idle but should work as they wait for Christ to return.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians/believers in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### How are pronouns used in this letter?

In this letter, the words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. If your language differentiates between inclusive and exclusive pronouns, use an exclusive pronoun for these. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

In this letter, the words “you” and “your” are plural and refer to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 2 Thessalonians?

For the following verses, some ancient manuscripts have a different reading than others. The ULT follows the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate and puts the other reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in your area that your people are familiar with, consider using the reading that it follows. If not, translators are advised to follow the reading in the ULT.
* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Other versions follow the reading, “and the man of sin is revealed.”
* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. The other reading is, “For God chose you from the first/beginning for salvation.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -2TH 1 intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Verses 1-2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type in which the sender identified himself, then the recipient, then gave a greeting.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible.

A paradox occurs in verses 4-5 where Paul talks about the Thessalonian believers’ faithfulness through persecution as “evidence of the righteous judgment of God.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But the fact that God gave them the ability to persevere in their faith is evidence that God claims them as his own and will judge them as worthy of his kingdom. In verses 5-10, Paul goes on to explain more of God’s righteous judgment, that God will reward those who believe in him and that he will punish those who afflict his people. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4-5](./04.md))

Another paradox occurs in verse 9 where Paul describes the penalty for rejecting God as “eternal destruction.” Normally when something is destroyed it ceases to exist. But in this case, the people who reject God will experience eternal separation from God, as the verse goes on to explain. Being separated from God destroys all that was enjoyable about their lives, and this continuous destruction is what they experience through eternity. ([2 Thessalonians 1:9](../01/09.md)) +2TH front intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 2 Thessalonians

1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1–2)
1. Believers suffer from persecution (1:3–12)
* God uses persecution to increase faith, love, and endurance in believers (1:3–4)
* God is just: (1:5–12)
* God will make believers worthy of his kingdom
* God will give relief to believers
* God will punish those who persecute believers
1. Some believers misunderstand about the second coming of Christ (2:1–12)
* Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1–2)
* Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3–12)
1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian believers (2:13–17)
* Paul calls the Thessalonian believers to “stand firm” (2:13–15)
* Paul prays that God will comfort them (2:16–17)
1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1–5)
1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6–15)
1. Closing (3:16–17)

### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted believers. After he became a believer, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. Paul wrote this letter while he, Silvanus, and Timothy were staying in the city of Corinth.

### What is the book of 2 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return. He also warned them that they should not be idle but should work as they wait for Christ to return.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians/believers in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### How are pronouns used in this letter?

In this letter, the words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. If your language differentiates between inclusive and exclusive pronouns, use an exclusive pronoun for these. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

In this letter, the words “you” and “your” are plural and refer to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 2 Thessalonians?

For the following verses, some ancient manuscripts have a different reading than others. The ULT follows the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate and puts the other reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in your area that your people are familiar with, consider using the reading that it follows. If not, translators are advised to follow the reading in the ULT.
* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Other versions follow the reading, “and the man of sin is revealed.”
* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. The other reading is, “For God chose you from the first/beginning for salvation.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2TH 1 intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

Verses 1–2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type in which the sender identified himself, then the recipient, then gave a greeting.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible.

A paradox occurs in verses 4–5 where Paul talks about the Thessalonian believers’ faithfulness through persecution as “evidence of the righteous judgment of God.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But the fact that God gave them the ability to persevere in their faith is evidence that God claims them as his own and will judge them as worthy of his kingdom. In verses 5–10, Paul goes on to explain more of God’s righteous judgment, that God will reward those who believe in him and that he will punish those who afflict his people. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4–5](./04.md))

Another paradox occurs in verse 9 where Paul describes the penalty for rejecting God as “eternal destruction.” Normally when something is destroyed it ceases to exist. But in this case, the people who reject God will experience eternal separation from God, as the verse goes on to explain. Being separated from God destroys all that was enjoyable about their lives, and this continuous destruction is what they experience through eternity. ([2 Thessalonians 1:9](../01/09.md)) 2TH 1 1 hm3e translate-names Σιλουανὸς 1 Silvanus **Silvanus** is the Latin form of “Silas.” **Silvanus** is the name of a man, the same person listed in the book of Acts as Paul’s fellow traveler. If your readers may not know that these two are the same person, you could use the name “Silas” in the text and “Silvanus” in the footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TH 1 1 ge00 figs-ellipsis Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 You may want to fill in the words necessary to make this a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy send this letter to the church” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis) 2TH 1 1 l8q8 figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Although Paul wrote this letter, he identifies Silvanus and Timothy as also sending it. This means that they were with him and were in agreement with it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that clear, as in the UST. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit) 2TH 1 1 eajo figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul speaks of the believers as though they were occupying space inside of God and Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “sharing life with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) 2TH 1 2 g6rb translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Grace to you Many languages have different ways to offer good wishes as they greet. Paul greeted his letter recipients with a blessing. Use a form that would be a good wish or blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “We pray that God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” or “I wish you grace and peace from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “May the grace and peace of God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be your portion” or “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show grace and give peace to your hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) 2TH 1 2 bv9m figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **grace** and **peace**, you can express these ideas as verbs or in another way. Alternate translation: “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and give rest to your inner being” or “...be favorable to you and make you at ease” or “...be kind to you and set your heart at rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2TH 1 3 o6v9 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 3-12, Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica and prays for them. A heading for this section might be, “Thanks and Prayers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) +2TH 1 3 o6v9 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 3–12, Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica and prays for them. A heading for this section might be, “Thanks and Prayers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 2TH 1 3 m6z5 εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν…πάντοτε 1 General Information: Paul is expressing here that he has a moral obligation to God to give thanks for the believers in Thessalonica. Use a natural expression for this in your language. Alternate translation: “We are bound always to thank” or “We can do no other than to thank” or “We must give thanks continually to” 2TH 1 3 ea59 figs-hyperbole εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε 1 We ought always to give thanks to God Paul uses **always** as a generalization meaning “often” or “regularly.” Alternate translation: “We should often give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 2TH 1 3 o01t figs-explicit εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί 1 If your readers might think that Paul is expressing an obligation only and that he does not actually pray for the Thessalonians, you could express the reality explicitly. Alternate translation: “We always thank God for you, brothers, as we ought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 1 12 z8k9 figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 according to the grace of our God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to how exceedingly kind our God and the Lord Jesus Christ are to you” or “as our God and the Lord Jesus Christ continue to abundantly bless you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TH 1 12 z1my τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase translated as **our God and the Lord Jesus Christ** could refer to: (1) two persons of the Trinity, God the Father and Jesus the Son. (2) one person, Jesus, who is both God and Lord. Alternate translation: “our God and Lord, Jesus Christ” 2TH 2 intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 2 General Notes

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Man of lawlessness

This person is also called “the son of destruction” and “the lawless one” in this chapter. He is not Satan, but he is empowered by Satan and is the leader of those who do Satan’s evil work in the world in the last days. He is certainly one of the “antichrists” mentioned by John (1 John 2:18) and may be the final one, described as a beast in Revelation 13. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])

### Sits in the temple of God

Paul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TH 2 1 r36t checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 1-12, Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back and warns them about the coming man of lawlessness. A heading for this section might be, “The Man of Lawlessness” or “The Deception before Jesus Returns.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) +2TH 2 1 r36t checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 1–12, Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back and warns them about the coming man of lawlessness. A heading for this section might be, “The Man of Lawlessness” or “The Deception before Jesus Returns.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 2TH 2 1 q1uq grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Now The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2TH 2 1 uy4z grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 The **coming of our Lord Jesus Christ** and **our gathering to him** are two actions that happen at the same time. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “regarding the time of our Lord Jesus coming when we will be gathered together unto him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) 2TH 2 1 sx2f figs-activepassive ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 If it is more natural in your language, you could use active verbs for the events of **coming** and **gathering**. Alternate translation: “about the time when our Lord Jesus will come and gather us to himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 2 17 x3rr figs-metonymy παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι 1 may he comfort and strengthen your hearts Here, the word **hearts** represents both the emotion and will of a person. If **hearts** does not mean this in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may he give comfort and strength to your livers” or “may he comfort you and strengthen you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TH 2 17 yw5f figs-synecdoche ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ 1 every good work and word If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the phrase **work and word** with verbs. Alternative translation: “in every good thing that you do and say” or “so that you could do and say everything that is good.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 2TH 3 intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 3 General Notes

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Idle and lazy persons

In Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### What should you do if your brother sins?

In this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) -2TH 3 1 k33i checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 1-5, Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions and encourages them. A heading for this section might be, “Pray for Us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) +2TH 3 1 k33i checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 1–5, Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions and encourages them. A heading for this section might be, “Pray for Us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 2TH 3 1 jy75 grammar-connect-words-phrases τὸ λοιπὸν 1 Finally Here, the word **Finally** marks a change in topic. To **pray** is not the final instruction that Paul gives but it is how Paul opens the last section of his letter where he will discuss a few remaining matters. Alternate translation: “One more thing” or “So, continuing on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2TH 3 1 m1s5 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2TH 3 1 v8k2 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **us** refers to Paul and his companions. If you have exclusive and inclusive first person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 3 5 wre3 figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 to the love of God and to the endurance of Christ Paul speaks of God’s **love** and Christ’s **endurance** as if they were destinations on a path. If your readers would not understand this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you and the endurance that Christ supplies you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TH 3 5 dzbn figs-possession εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **love of God** can mean (1) the love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you” or (2) the love that people give to God. Alternate translation: “to love God more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2TH 3 5 ia7x figs-possession εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **endurance of Christ** can mean (1) the endurance that Christ gives to his people. Alternate translation: “to experience the endurance that Christ gives you” or (2) the endurance that Christ had through his suffering. Alternate translation: “to know how much Christ has endured for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -2TH 3 6 mst3 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 6-15, Paul gives the believers some final instructions about working and not being idle. A heading for this section might be, “Believers Must Work.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) +2TH 3 6 mst3 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 6–15, Paul gives the believers some final instructions about working and not being idle. A heading for this section might be, “Believers Must Work.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 2TH 3 6 v33v grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Now The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2TH 3 6 x9l8 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί…ἀδελφοῦ 1 brothers Here, the words **brothers** and **brother** refer to fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2TH 3 6 y4a9 figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ Here, **name** stands for the person of Jesus Christ. It can also mean “with the authority of.” If using this term is not clear in your language, you could express it directly. Alternate translation: “as if our Lord Jesus Christ himself were speaking” or “with the authority that our Lord Jesus Christ has given us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 3 14 nv3v figs-idiom τοῦτον σημειοῦσθε 1 note this one Paul wants the Thessalonians to notice who this person is. Alternate translation: “point out that person” or “make sure everyone knows who he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TH 3 14 y552 figs-explicit ἵνα ἐντραπῇ 1 so that he may be put to shame Paul instructs believers to avoid lazy believers as a disciplinary action. If necessary, you could make this explicit to make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “in order that he will know that his laziness is wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 3 15 idj6 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφόν 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -2TH 3 16 nef4 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 16-18, Paul makes closing remarks to the believers at Thessalonica. A heading for this section might be, “Closing Remarks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) +2TH 3 16 nef4 checking/headings 0 General Information: In verses 16–18, Paul makes closing remarks to the believers at Thessalonica. A heading for this section might be, “Closing Remarks.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 2TH 3 16 z1zs grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 2TH 3 16 whb9 translate-blessing αὐτὸς…ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, δῴη ὑμῖν 1 may the Lord of peace himself give you Paul ends the letter with blessings that are also prayers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord of peace himself may give you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) 2TH 3 16 zl1s figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς…ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης 1 the Lord of peace himself Here, **himself** emphasizes that the Lord is the source of peace and that he will personally give peace to believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) diff --git a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv index 70cf5efd0d..4d93c1868a 100644 --- a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1TI front intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Timothy

In this letter, Paul alternates between personal commands to Timothy that empower him to act as his representative and with his authority, and instructions for how followers of Jesus should live in community.

1. Greetings (1:1-2)
2. Paul commands Timothy to tell people not to teach false doctrines (1:3-20)
3. Paul gives instructions about how to re-establish order and decency in the church (2:1-15)
4. Paul gives instructions about how to ensure that elders and deacons are properly qualified (3:1-13)
5. Paul commands Timothy regarding his own personal conduct (3:14-5:2)
6. Paul gives instructions to ensure church support for worthy widows (5:3-16) and elders (5:17-20)
7. Paul commands Timothy that he must be impartial (5:21-25)
8. Paul gives instructions to ensure order in master-servant relationships (6:1-2a)
9. Paul commands Timothy regarding how he should teach and conduct himself (6:2b-16)
10. Paul gives instructions for how people who are rich should live (6:17-19)
11. Paul commands Timothy to guard what has been entrusted to his care (6:20-21a)
12. Closing blessing to the whole church (6:21b)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Timothy?

A man named Paul wrote 1 Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul may have written other letters to Timothy, but this is the earliest one that we still have. That is why it is known as 1 Timothy or First Timothy. Timothy was Paul’s disciple and close friend. Paul probably wrote this letter near the end of his life.

### What is the Book of 1 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed included church worship, qualifications for church leaders, and warnings against false teachers. This letter shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches while Timothy himself trained other leaders.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its customary title, “1 Timothy” or “First Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is discipleship?

Discipleship is the process of making people to be disciples of Christ. The goal of discipleship is to encourage other Christians to be more like Christ. This letter gives many instructions about how a leader should train a less mature Christian. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 Timothy?

In [6:5](../06/05.md), the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TI 1 intro a4v2 0 # 1 Timothy 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Metaphor

In this chapter Paul speaks of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.” +1TI front intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Timothy

In this letter, Paul alternates between personal commands to Timothy that empower him to act as his representative and with his authority, and instructions for how followers of Jesus should live in community.

1. Greetings (1:1–2)
2. Paul commands Timothy to tell people not to teach false doctrines (1:3–20)
3. Paul gives instructions about how to re-establish order and decency in the church (2:1–15)
4. Paul gives instructions about how to ensure that elders and deacons are properly qualified (3:1–13)
5. Paul commands Timothy regarding his own personal conduct (3:14–5:2)
6. Paul gives instructions to ensure church support for worthy widows (5:3–16) and elders (5:17–20)
7. Paul commands Timothy that he must be impartial (5:21–25)
8. Paul gives instructions to ensure order in master-servant relationships (6:1–2a)
9. Paul commands Timothy regarding how he should teach and conduct himself (6:2b-16)
10. Paul gives instructions for how people who are rich should live (6:17–19)
11. Paul commands Timothy to guard what has been entrusted to his care (6:20–21a)
12. Closing blessing to the whole church (6:21b)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Timothy?

A man named Paul wrote 1 Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul may have written other letters to Timothy, but this is the earliest one that we still have. That is why it is known as 1 Timothy or First Timothy. Timothy was Paul’s disciple and close friend. Paul probably wrote this letter near the end of his life.

### What is the Book of 1 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed included church worship, qualifications for church leaders, and warnings against false teachers. This letter shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches while Timothy himself trained other leaders.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its customary title, “1 Timothy” or “First Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is discipleship?

Discipleship is the process of making people to be disciples of Christ. The goal of discipleship is to encourage other Christians to be more like Christ. This letter gives many instructions about how a leader should train a less mature Christian. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 Timothy?

In [6:5](../06/05.md), the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1TI 1 intro a4v2 0 # 1 Timothy 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1–2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Metaphor

In this chapter Paul speaks of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.” 1TI 1 1 i3zz Παῦλος 1 Paul In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Immediately after introducing the writer, you might also want to indicate to whom the letter was written. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am the one writing this letter to you, Timothy” 1TI 1 1 xl6d κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν Θεοῦ 1 by the command of God Alternate translation: “by the authority of God” 1TI 1 1 wb8j Θεοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν 1 God our Savior Alternate translation: “God, who saves us” @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 2 15 gh3c ἐὰν μείνωσιν 1 if they remain Here, **they** refers to women. Paul switches from the singular to the plural as he switches from talking about Eve as the representative of women to women in general. Alternate translation: “if women continue living” 1TI 2 15 sl57 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει, καὶ ἀγάπῃ, καὶ ἁγιασμῷ 1 in faith and love and holiness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **faith**, **love**, and **holiness** by stating the ideas behind them with verbs. Alternate translation: “trusting Jesus, loving others, and living in a holy way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 2 15 dcf3 figs-idiom μετὰ σωφροσύνης 1 with self-control Here, **with self-control** could mean: (1) with good judgment. (2) with modesty. (3) with clear thinking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TI 3 intro d9db 0 # 1 Timothy 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

[3:16](../03/16.md) was probably a song, poem, or creed the early church used to express what it understood to be the meaning of who Jesus was and what he did.

### Overseers and deacons

The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include elder, pastor, and bishop. The word “overseer” reflects the Greek term in verses 1-2, which means literally an “over-seer.” The word “bishop” is derived directly from the letters of this Greek term. Paul writes about another kind of church leader, a “deacon,” in verses 8 and 12.

### Character qualities

This chapter lists several qualities that an overseer or deacon in the church must have. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TI 3 intro d9db 0 # 1 Timothy 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

[3:16](../03/16.md) was probably a song, poem, or creed the early church used to express what it understood to be the meaning of who Jesus was and what he did.

### Overseers and deacons

The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include elder, pastor, and bishop. The word “overseer” reflects the Greek term in verses 1–2, which means literally an “over-seer.” The word “bishop” is derived directly from the letters of this Greek term. Paul writes about another kind of church leader, a “deacon,” in verses 8 and 12.

### Character qualities

This chapter lists several qualities that an overseer or deacon in the church must have. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 3 1 t227 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy As in [1:15](../01/15.md), in this context the term **word** has a meaning more like “statement” or “message.” Alternate translation: “this statement is dependable” 1TI 3 1 t228 figs-quotemarks πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by setting off the words that follow in the rest of the verse with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language may use to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1TI 3 1 t229 translate-unknown ἐπισκοπῆς 1 overseer The term **overseer** describes a leader of the early Christian church whose work was to take care of the spiritual needs of believers and make sure that they received accurate biblical teaching. Alternate translation: “spiritual leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index 340fa04030..778f65d36b 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy

1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1-2:13).
2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14-26).
3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1-4:8).
4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9-22).

### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?

Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.

### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?

As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”

In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?

For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.
* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”
* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -2TI 1 intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Persecution

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel. +2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy

1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1–2:13).
2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).
3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1–4:8).
4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9–22).

### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?

Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.

### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?

As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”

In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?

For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.
* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”
* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2TI 1 intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1–2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Persecution

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel. 2TI 1 1 p001 translate-names Παῦλος 1 Paul This is the name of a man, the author of the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 1 ha4l Παῦλος 1 Paul This letter follows the normal custom of the time by beginning with the name and identity of the author, then mentioning the recipient (in verse 2). Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am writing this letter” 2TI 1 1 vl2g διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ 1 through the will of God Paul became an apostle because God wanted him to be an apostle. Alternate translation: “because of God’s will” or “because God wanted it to be so” @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 5 reg6 figs-explicit μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 he has competed lawfully Paul is referring to the rules that governed a competition. The athletes had to obey the rules or they would be removed from the competition and not have an opportunity to win. If it would be helpful in your language, you could mention these rules. Alternate translation: “he does not compete according to the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 6 wz35 figs-metaphor τὸν κοπιῶντα γεωργὸν δεῖ πρῶτον τῶν καρπῶν μεταλαμβάνειν 1 The hardworking farmer ought to be first to receive of the crops To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a farmer who has to decide between working hard or not working hard. The farmer will receive a share of the harvest if he is working hard. By making this comparison, Paul is encouraging Timothy to work hard in his service to Christ so that God will reward him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “Consider that a farmer who works hard should receive a share of the crops before anyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 6 p035 figs-explicit πρῶτον τῶν καρπῶν μεταλαμβάνειν 1 first to receive of the crops In this illustration, it seems that the hardworking farmer is working with other farmers who will all receive a part of the crop after the harvest. But since this farmer works harder than the others, he should receive before the others. It is implied that receiving first is best, possibly because the quality of the crop is better. Alternate translation: “receive the best share of the crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 2 7 bdk9 figs-explicit νόει ὃ λέγω, δώσει γάρ σοι ὁ Κύριος σύνεσιν 1 Think about what I am saying, for the Lord will give you understanding Paul gave Timothy three metaphors in verses 3-6, but he did not completely explain their implications. He expected Timothy to figure out, with God’s help, the lesson of these metaphors for Christ’s servants. For that reason, if you want to include an explanation of the meaning of the metaphors, we recommend that you state the meaning in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. Alternate translation: “you will have to think carefully about what I have just told you to understand it completely, but you can depend on God to help you to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2TI 2 7 bdk9 figs-explicit νόει ὃ λέγω, δώσει γάρ σοι ὁ Κύριος σύνεσιν 1 Think about what I am saying, for the Lord will give you understanding Paul gave Timothy three metaphors in verses 3–6, but he did not completely explain their implications. He expected Timothy to figure out, with God’s help, the lesson of these metaphors for Christ’s servants. For that reason, if you want to include an explanation of the meaning of the metaphors, we recommend that you state the meaning in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. Alternate translation: “you will have to think carefully about what I have just told you to understand it completely, but you can depend on God to help you to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 7 p036 figs-metonymy ὃ λέγω 1 what I am saying Paul refers to what he has just written in his letter with the verb **saying** to express the idea of communicating. Alternate translation: “what I have just told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 7 a22q figs-explicit ἐν πᾶσιν 1 in everything Here, **in everything** refers to everything related to the three metaphors that Paul has written just before this. Alternate translation: “about everything that I have just said” or “about all that I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 8 mh1k figs-metaphor ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυείδ 1 from the seed of David The phrase **from the seed of** refers to Jesus being descended from King David. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 12 p049 κἀκεῖνος ἀρνήσεται ἡμᾶς 1 he also will deny us In this second usage of the word **deny**, Paul is referring to the action of Jesus Christ on the day of final judgment. On that day, Jesus will either receive a faithful believer or reject those who are not true followers. Those who deny that they are followers of Jesus while on earth are not true followers. Alternate translation: “he will reject us on the day of judgment” 2TI 2 13 ke4w εἰ ἀπιστοῦμεν 1 if we are unfaithful Paul uses the word **unfaithful** to express the condition of believers who do not continue to obey Jesus, but rather disobey him. Alternate translation: “if we disobey Jesus” or “if we do not do what Jesus wants us to do” 2TI 2 13 p050 figs-explicit ἐκεῖνος πιστὸς μένει 1 he remains faithful This could mean : (1) he remains faithful to them. (2) he remains true to himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 2 13 ihd4 ἀρνήσασθαι…ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται 1 he is not able to deny himself Paul states that Jesus is not able to **deny himself**, meaning that Jesus is not able to go against his character and will remain true to what he said he would do. Paul may have one or both of the following ideas in mind. (1) Jesus’ character includes being the Savior who can forgive our unfaithfulness when we repent of it, as Peter experienced (John 21:15-19). This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains faithful to us.” (2) Jesus’ character also includes being the holy God who judges people for their sin when they do not repent. This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains true to himself.” Alternate translation: “he must always act according to his character” +2TI 2 13 ihd4 ἀρνήσασθαι…ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται 1 he is not able to deny himself Paul states that Jesus is not able to **deny himself**, meaning that Jesus is not able to go against his character and will remain true to what he said he would do. Paul may have one or both of the following ideas in mind. (1) Jesus’ character includes being the Savior who can forgive our unfaithfulness when we repent of it, as Peter experienced (John 21:15–19). This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains faithful to us.” (2) Jesus’ character also includes being the holy God who judges people for their sin when they do not repent. This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains true to himself.” Alternate translation: “he must always act according to his character” 2TI 2 14 u661 ὑπομίμνῃσκε 1 Remind them The word **them**, which is implicit in the Greek verb, probably refers to the people that Timothy has responsibility over. Alternate translation: “Remind the people there” 2TI 2 14 p051 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God Paul uses the expression **before God**, which means “in front of God,” to mean “where God can see.” Seeing, in turn, means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “as God is watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 14 r5lq figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God The implication is that Paul is telling Timothy to tell the believers, when he gives them this command, that God will be watching what they do. Alternate translation: “with God as their witness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 26 mql8 figs-metaphor ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 1 from the trap of the devil Paul refers to the deception of the devil as a physical trap that sinners are captured in. Alternate translation: “and escape from the devil’s deception” or “and reject the devil’s deception” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 26 p074 figs-activepassive ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 having been captured by him for his will If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “after the devil has captured them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 2 26 dj4j figs-metaphor ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 having been captured by him for his will Paul speaks of the devil’s deception as if the devil had physically captured them and made them do what he wanted. Alternate translation: “after the devil has deceived them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 3 intro k2cr 0 # 2 Timothy 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

Many scholars understand the **last days** to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return, which includes Paul’s time. If so, then what Paul teaches in this chapter about being persecuted applies to all believers. But some scholars understand the **last days** to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. If that is the meaning, then Paul is prophesying in verses 1-9 and 13 about those days. If possible, translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]]) +2TI 3 intro k2cr 0 # 2 Timothy 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

Many scholars understand the **last days** to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return, which includes Paul’s time. If so, then what Paul teaches in this chapter about being persecuted applies to all believers. But some scholars understand the **last days** to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. If that is the meaning, then Paul is prophesying in verses 1–9 and 13 about those days. If possible, translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]]) 2TI 3 1 g65r figs-idiom ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 in the last days Paul is using the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the period of time before the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 3 1 n7gs figs-explicit ἐνστήσονται καιροὶ χαλεποί 1 there will be difficult times The implication from what Paul goes on to say about people becoming ungodly and violent is that it will be difficult for believers in this time period. Alternate translation: “believers will face difficult situations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 3 2 p075 figs-gendernotations οἱ ἄνθρωποι 1 men Here Paul is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 3 17 nb12 figs-gendernotations ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωπος 1 the man of God Paul is using the word **man** here in a generic sense that includes all believers in God, whether male or female. Of course, Paul also intends for Timothy to apply this to himself. Alternate translation: “the person who serves God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2TI 3 17 uu7i ἄρτιος 1 proficient Alternate translation: “fully capable” 2TI 3 17 p099 figs-activepassive ἐξηρτισμένος 1 equipped If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and have everything he needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 4 intro k2xa 0 # 2 Timothy 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Paul gives a solemn charge to Timothy (4:1-8)
2. Paul tells Timothy how he is doing (4:9-18)
3. Paul sends personal greetings (4:19-22)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “I adjure you”

With these words Paul challenges Timothy in the most serious way possible to do what he is telling him to do. It is a way of commanding Timothy, not by Paul’s own authority, but by the authority that he then refers to, that of God and Jesus Christ. In other words, Paul is saying that God and Jesus Christ are commanding Timothy through Paul.

### Crown

Scripture uses the image of a crown to represent different things. In this chapter, Paul describes Christ as awarding a crown to believers as a metaphor for the reward that Christ will give them for having lived rightly on this earth. +2TI 4 intro k2xa 0 # 2 Timothy 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Paul gives a solemn charge to Timothy (4:1–8)
2. Paul tells Timothy how he is doing (4:9–18)
3. Paul sends personal greetings (4:19–22)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “I adjure you”

With these words Paul challenges Timothy in the most serious way possible to do what he is telling him to do. It is a way of commanding Timothy, not by Paul’s own authority, but by the authority that he then refers to, that of God and Jesus Christ. In other words, Paul is saying that God and Jesus Christ are commanding Timothy through Paul.

### Crown

Scripture uses the image of a crown to represent different things. In this chapter, Paul describes Christ as awarding a crown to believers as a metaphor for the reward that Christ will give them for having lived rightly on this earth. 2TI 4 1 eh3x διαμαρτύρομαι 1 I adjure you The word translated **adjure** is used to place someone under a serious and binding obligation. Think about the words that you use to do this in your language. This could refer to: (1) placing someone under an oath to do something. Alternate translation: “I place you under an oath” or “I hereby obligate you” (2) solemnly commanding someone with great authority. Alternate translation: “I solemnly urge you” 2TI 4 1 cb15 figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 before God and Christ Jesus Here the word **before** means “in front of,” that is, “in the presence of.” The implication is that God and Christ Jesus will witness and approve this command or oath. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God and Christ Jesus” or “with God and Christ Jesus as the witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 4 1 u32g figs-merism ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 the living and the dead Paul refers to **the living** and **the dead** together to mean all people, whether they are alive at the time of judgment or have died. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index 8bccdb8453..c8e8352663 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -TIT front intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Titus

1. Paul instructs Titus to appoint godly leaders. (1:1-16)
2. Paul instructs Titus to train people to live godly lives. (2:1-3:11)
3. Paul ends by sharing some of his plans and sending greetings to various believers. (3:12-15)

### Who wrote the book of Titus?

Paul wrote the book of Titus. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

### What is the book of Titus about?

Paul wrote this letter to Titus, his fellow worker, who was leading the churches on the island of Crete. Paul instructed him about selecting church leaders. Paul also described how the believers should behave towards each other. He also encouraged them all to live in a way that pleases God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Titus.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Titus” or “A Letter to Titus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### In what roles can people serve within the church?

There are some teachings in the book of Titus about whether a woman or divorced man can serve in positions of leadership within the church. Scholars disagree about the meaning of these teachings. Further study on these issues may be necessary before translating this book.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural **you**

In this book, the word **I** refers to Paul. Also, the word **you** is almost always singular and refers to Titus. The exception to this is 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What is the meaning of **God our Savior**?

This is a common phrase in this letter. Paul meant to make the readers think about how God forgave them in Christ for sinning against him, and by forgiving them he saved them from being punished when he judges all people. A similar phrase in this letter is **our great God and Savior Jesus Christ**. -TIT 1 intro c7me 0 # Titus 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-4. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

In verses 6-9, Paul lists several qualities that a man must have if he is to be an elder in the church. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) Paul gives a similar list in 1 Timothy 3.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elders

The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include overseer, elder, pastor, and bishop.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Should, may, must

The ULT uses different words that indicate requirements or obligations. These verbs have different levels of force associated with them. The subtle differences may be difficult to translate. The UST translates these verbs in a more general way. +TIT front intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Titus

1. Paul instructs Titus to appoint godly leaders. (1:1–16)
2. Paul instructs Titus to train people to live godly lives. (2:1–3:11)
3. Paul ends by sharing some of his plans and sending greetings to various believers. (3:12–15)

### Who wrote the book of Titus?

Paul wrote the book of Titus. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

### What is the book of Titus about?

Paul wrote this letter to Titus, his fellow worker, who was leading the churches on the island of Crete. Paul instructed him about selecting church leaders. Paul also described how the believers should behave towards each other. He also encouraged them all to live in a way that pleases God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Titus.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Titus” or “A Letter to Titus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### In what roles can people serve within the church?

There are some teachings in the book of Titus about whether a woman or divorced man can serve in positions of leadership within the church. Scholars disagree about the meaning of these teachings. Further study on these issues may be necessary before translating this book.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural **you**

In this book, the word **I** refers to Paul. Also, the word **you** is almost always singular and refers to Titus. The exception to this is 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What is the meaning of **God our Savior**?

This is a common phrase in this letter. Paul meant to make the readers think about how God forgave them in Christ for sinning against him, and by forgiving them he saved them from being punished when he judges all people. A similar phrase in this letter is **our great God and Savior Jesus Christ**. +TIT 1 intro c7me 0 # Titus 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1–4. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

In verses 6–9, Paul lists several qualities that a man must have if he is to be an elder in the church. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) Paul gives a similar list in 1 Timothy 3.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elders

The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include overseer, elder, pastor, and bishop.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Should, may, must

The ULT uses different words that indicate requirements or obligations. These verbs have different levels of force associated with them. The subtle differences may be difficult to translate. The UST translates these verbs in a more general way. TIT 1 1 rtc9 figs-abstractnouns κατὰ πίστιν 1 for the faith **Faith** is an abstract noun. Here it refers to believing or trusting in Jesus. If it is more clear in your language, you could translate it with a verb such as these, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “to strengthen the faith” or “to help [God’s chosen people] to trust him more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) TIT 1 1 xyz8 figs-abstractnouns ἐπίγνωσιν 1 the knowledge If it would be helpful in your language, you can translate the abstract noun **knowledge** with a verb such as “to know,” as in the UST. Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) TIT 1 1 abc8 figs-abstractnouns ἀληθείας 1 of the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you can translate the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective phrase such as “what is true” or “the true message.” Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ TIT 3 3 xy27 figs-activepassive πλανώμενοι, δουλεύοντες ἐ TIT 3 3 tl5n ἐπιθυμίαις 1 passions Alternate translation: “lusts” or “desires” TIT 3 3 dec4 ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ διάγοντες 1 We lived in evil and envy Here, **evil** and **envy** describe sin. The word **evil** is general and **envy** is a specific kind of sin. Alternate translation: “We were always doing evil things and wanting what others have” TIT 3 3 y5lp στυγητοί 1 detestable Alternate translation: “causing others to hate us” -TIT 3 4 xy28 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But It is important to mark the contrast here between the evil way that people are (verses 1-3) and the goodness of God (verses 4-7) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +TIT 3 4 xy28 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But It is important to mark the contrast here between the evil way that people are (verses 1–3) and the goodness of God (verses 4–7) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) TIT 3 4 ba5a figs-personification ὅτε…ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ 1 when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared Paul speaks of God’s kindness and love as if they were people that came into our sight. Alternate translation: “when God our Savior showed us his kindness and love for people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) TIT 3 4 abcg figs-abstractnouns ὅτε…ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ 1 when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared You can state the abstract nouns **kindness** and **love** as adjectives. Alternate translation: “when God, who saves us, showed how kind and loving he would be to mankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) TIT 3 4 abch figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -160,8 +160,8 @@ TIT 3 6 q9ze διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡ TIT 3 6 xy23 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 3 7 di3g figs-activepassive δικαιωθέντες 1 having been justified If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “since God has declared us to be without sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) TIT 3 7 q1cm figs-metaphor κληρονόμοι γενηθῶμεν, κατ’ ἐλπίδα ζωῆς αἰωνίου 1 we might become heirs according to the certain hope of everlasting life The people to whom God has made promises are spoken of as if they were to inherit the things promised, just as a person inherits property or possessions from a family member. Alternate translation: “we might expect to receive the eternal life that God has promised us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -TIT 3 8 j8md ὁ λόγος 1 This message This message is the one just expressed in verses 4-7, that God freely gives the Holy Spirit and eternal life to believers through Jesus. -TIT 3 8 xy29 τούτων 1 these things This refers to the teachings that Paul has talked about in verses 1-7. Alternate translation: “these teachings that I have just talked about” +TIT 3 8 j8md ὁ λόγος 1 This message This message is the one just expressed in verses 4–7, that God freely gives the Holy Spirit and eternal life to believers through Jesus. +TIT 3 8 xy29 τούτων 1 these things This refers to the teachings that Paul has talked about in verses 1–7. Alternate translation: “these teachings that I have just talked about” TIT 3 8 kqm6 φροντίζωσιν καλῶν ἔργων, προΐστασθαι 1 may be careful to engage themselves in good works Alternate translation: “may seek to do good works” TIT 3 9 tzh9 0 Connecting Statement: Paul explains what Titus should avoid and how to treat those who cause contention among the believers. TIT 3 9 j1hf δὲ…περιΐστασο 1 But avoid Alternate translation: “So avoid” or “Therefore, avoid” diff --git a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv index ed66222fac..615ae1fc4a 100644 --- a/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_58-PHM.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -PHM front intro sz2w 0 # Introduction to Philemon

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Philemon

1. Paul greets Philemon (1:1-3)
2. Paul makes requests of Philemon about Onesimus (1:4-21)
3. Conclusion (1:22-25)

### Who wrote the Book of Philemon?

Paul wrote Philemon. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Saul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul was in a prison when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of Philemon about?

Paul wrote this letter to a man named Philemon. Philemon was a believer in Jesus who lived in the city of Colossae. He owned a slave named Onesimus. Onesimus had run away from Philemon and possibly stole something from him as well. Onesimus went to Rome and visited Paul in prison there, where Paul brought Onesimus to Jesus.

Paul told Philemon that he was sending Onesimus back to him. Philemon had the right to execute Onesimus according to Roman law. But Paul said that Philemon should accept Onesimus back as a Christian brother. He even suggested that Philemon should allow Onesimus to come back to Paul and help him in prison.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philemon.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Philemon” or “The Letter Paul wrote to Philemon.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Does this letter approve the practice of slavery?

Paul sent Onesimus back to his former master. But that did not mean that Paul thought that slavery was an acceptable practice. Instead, Paul was more concerned with people being reconciled to each other and that they serve God in whatever situation they were in. It is important to note that in the culture of the time, people became slaves for various reasons and it was not considered a permanent state.

### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Philemon. The two exceptions to this are 1:22 and 1:25. There “you” refers to Philemon and the believers that met at his house. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

Three times Paul identifies himself as the author of this letter (in verses 1, 9, and 19). Evidently Timothy was with him and may have written down the words as Paul said them. All instances of “I,” “me,” and “my” refer to Paul. Philemon is the main person to whom this letter is written. All instances of “you” and “your” refer to him and are singular unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +PHM front intro sz2w 0 # Introduction to Philemon

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Philemon

1. Paul greets Philemon (1:1–3)
2. Paul makes requests of Philemon about Onesimus (1:4–21)
3. Conclusion (1:22–25)

### Who wrote the Book of Philemon?

Paul wrote Philemon. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Saul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul was in a prison when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of Philemon about?

Paul wrote this letter to a man named Philemon. Philemon was a believer in Jesus who lived in the city of Colossae. He owned a slave named Onesimus. Onesimus had run away from Philemon and possibly stole something from him as well. Onesimus went to Rome and visited Paul in prison there, where Paul brought Onesimus to Jesus.

Paul told Philemon that he was sending Onesimus back to him. Philemon had the right to execute Onesimus according to Roman law. But Paul said that Philemon should accept Onesimus back as a Christian brother. He even suggested that Philemon should allow Onesimus to come back to Paul and help him in prison.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philemon.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Philemon” or “The Letter Paul wrote to Philemon.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Does this letter approve the practice of slavery?

Paul sent Onesimus back to his former master. But that did not mean that Paul thought that slavery was an acceptable practice. Instead, Paul was more concerned with people being reconciled to each other and that they serve God in whatever situation they were in. It is important to note that in the culture of the time, people became slaves for various reasons and it was not considered a permanent state.

### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Philemon. The two exceptions to this are 1:22 and 1:25. There “you” refers to Philemon and the believers that met at his house. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

Three times Paul identifies himself as the author of this letter (in verses 1, 9, and 19). Evidently Timothy was with him and may have written down the words as Paul said them. All instances of “I,” “me,” and “my” refer to Paul. Philemon is the main person to whom this letter is written. All instances of “you” and “your” refer to him and are singular unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) PHM 1 1 ne8k figs-123person Παῦλος 1 Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Use that here. Alternate translations: “From me, Paul” or “I, Paul” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person) PHM 1 1 cgs4 δέσμιος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 a prisoner of Christ Jesus Paul was in prison because people in authority did not want him to preach about Jesus. They put him there in order to stop him and to punish him. This does not mean that Jesus had put Paul in prison. Alternate translation: “a prisoner for the sake of Christ Jesus” PHM 1 1 sv3p ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 our brother Paul is using the term **brother** to mean someone who shares the same faith. Alternate translation: “our fellow Christian” or “our companion in the faith” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) diff --git a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv index 1b69c956bf..7402e72520 100644 --- a/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv +++ b/en_tn_60-JAS.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -JAS front intro exs3 0 # Introduction to James

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of James

1. Greetings (1:1)
2. Gaining endurance through trials (1:2-4)
3. Trusting God for wisdom (1:5-8)
4. What poor and rich people should boast about (1:9-11)
5. Enduring temptation (1:12-15)
6. Hearing and doing what God’s Word says (1:16-27)
7. A warning against favoring rich people (2:1-13)
8. Faith and works (2:14-26)
9. The need for self-control in speech (3:1-12)
10. Worldly wisdom and heavenly wisdom contrasted (3:13-18)
11. Worldly desires and the sin and conflict they cause (4:1-12)
12. A warning against boasting about tomorrow (4:13-17)
13. Rebuke of rich people (5:1-6)
14. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7-11)
15. Oaths forbidden (5:12)
16. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13-18)
17. Restoration of a sinner (5:19-20)

### Who wrote the book of James?

There is wide agreement among biblical scholars that the author of this book was James the half-brother of Jesus, who was a leader in the early church in the city of Jerusalem. He was respected for his wisdom and authority. For example, he had the last word at the Jerusalem Council, an important meeting of the early church, that is described in [Acts 15:13-21](../act/15/13.md). In [Galatians 2:9](../gal/02/09.md), the apostle Paul calls him a “pillar” of the church, meaning one of its most important leaders. However, even though James was an influential church leader and the half-brother of Jesus, in this letter he introduces himself humbly as “a servant of God and of the Lord Jesus Christ.”

This is not the same man as the apostle James, who was the brother of the apostle John. That James was killed for his faith a few years after Jesus himself was killed and rose from the dead. This letter was written many years after that.

### What kind of writing is the book of James?

The book of James has an opening that is typical of the letters of its time, but it does not have a main body that develops sequentially and logically the way a letter would have. Instead, the book presents a collection of short sayings and reflections on various subjects. (In that way it is similar to the book of Proverbs.) As the outline at the beginning of this introduction shows, the book is made up of many short sections that move around from topic to topic.

James uses many of the devices that speakers used in his time, such as anticipating and answering a question that someone might ask. He also uses many vivid examples drawn from both nature and everyday life. For this reason, many interpreters believe that for the content of this book, James drew on sermons he had preached and on wise advice he had given. He wanted to share all of that wisdom with Christians living in different parts of the Roman Empire to help them face difficult times. It is also possible that James wrote this letter because he was nearing the end of his life and he wanted his wisdom to be preserved and shared after his death.

### To whom was the book of James written?

James wrote this letter to believers in Jesus who had a Jewish background. This is clear from many of the things that he says in the letter. For example, he addresses his readers as “the twelve tribes” in [1:1](../01/01.md). He speaks of their meeting place as a “synagogue” in [2:2](../02/02.md). He assumes in [2:19](../02/19.md) that they are familiar with the essential Jewish affirmation that “God is one,” and in [2:21](../02/21.md) he calls Abraham “our father.” He calls God by the Hebrew title the Lord of Sabaoth in [5:4](../05/04.md). He assumes that his readers will be familiar from the Hebrew Scriptures with the stories of people such as Job ([5:11](../05/11.md)) and Elijah ([5:17](../05/17.md)). These notes will call attention to the places where James engages his readers in light of their Jewish background.

### What is the book of James about?

In this letter, James writes to believers living all over the Roman Empire who are suffering. He tells them that God is working through their sufferings to help them become more mature Christians. James also writes much in this letter about how believers should live in this world and treat one another. He urges them to treat other people fairly, not to quarrel and fight, and to be compassionate and generous.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “James.” Alternatively, they may choose a different title such as “A Letter from James” or “The Letter James Wrote.” But note that “James” is actually the English form of the author’s name. In the letter itself, he calls himself “Jacob,” which is the original Hebrew form of his name. So you may want to refer to him in the title of the book by the same name that you will use in your translation for the character of Jacob in the book of Genesis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Did James disagree with Paul about how a person is justified before God?

Paul taught in Romans that Christians are justified by faith and not by works. James seems to teach that Christians are justified by works. This could be confusing. However, a better understanding of what Paul and James each taught shows that they actually agree with one another. Both of them taught that a person needs faith in order to be justified. They both also taught that true faith would lead a person to do good works. Paul and James taught about these things in different ways because they had different audiences who needed to know different things about being justified. James wrote primarily to Jewish Christians, while Paul wrote to communities in which there were many Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How should the translator signal transitions between topics in the book of James?

James moves briskly from one topic to another. Often he does not end his discussion of one topic with a summary and then begin the discussion of the next topic with an introduction. It might be helpful to your readers if you set topics apart by putting blank lines between them. However, your readers would have the same experience of the letter that its original audience did if you allowed the transitions between topics to remain abrupt. Just as happens in the book of Proverbs, James seems to have wanted each new thought to strike his audience with fresh force. So you may also choose not to put any blank lines between topics in your translation.

James often makes the link between topics through key words, for example, “rejoice” in 1:1 and “joy” in 1:2; “lacking” in 1:4 and “lacks” in 1:5; and so forth. If you could find ways to translate these key words similarly in both of their occurrences, this should help your readers appreciate the link and the transition.

### Changes from the present tense to the past tense

In several places where James offers an illustration of a point he has just made, he narrates that illustration in the past tense as if he were telling the story of something that had happened. If this would be confusing for your readers, you could translate these illustrations in the present tense. Notes will identify each of these places and make that suggestion.

### Textual issues in the book of James

See the General Notes to chapter 2 for a discussion of one important textual issue in this book. -JAS 1 intro pz2q 0 # James 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Greetings (1:1)
2. Gaining endurance through trials (1:2-4)
3. Trusting God for wisdom (1:5-8)
4. What poor and rich people should boast about (1:9-11)
5. Enduring temptation (1:12-15)
6. Hearing and doing what God’s Word says (1:16-27)

James begins this letter in [1:1](../01/01.md) by giving his name, identifying the people to whom he is writing, and offering a greeting. That was the way people typically began letters at this time. However, as Part 1 of the Introduction to James explains, the letter does not then develop the way other letters did. Instead, it is a collection of short sayings and reflections.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Testing and temptation

James uses a word in this chapter that can mean both “trial,” as in [1:2](../01/02.md) and [1:12](../01/12.md), and “temptation,” as in [1:13-14](../01/13.md). In both cases the word speaks of the situation of a person who needs to choose between doing something good and doing something evil. The difference between the two senses is important. When ULT translates the word as “trial,” God is testing the person and wants him to do what is good. When ULT translates the word as “temptation,” Satan is tempting the person and wants him to do what is evil. +JAS front intro exs3 0 # Introduction to James

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of James

1. Greetings (1:1)
2. Gaining endurance through trials (1:2–4)
3. Trusting God for wisdom (1:5–8)
4. What poor and rich people should boast about (1:9–11)
5. Enduring temptation (1:12–15)
6. Hearing and doing what God’s Word says (1:16–27)
7. A warning against favoring rich people (2:1–13)
8. Faith and works (2:14–26)
9. The need for self-control in speech (3:1–12)
10. Worldly wisdom and heavenly wisdom contrasted (3:13–18)
11. Worldly desires and the sin and conflict they cause (4:1–12)
12. A warning against boasting about tomorrow (4:13–17)
13. Rebuke of rich people (5:1–6)
14. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7–11)
15. Oaths forbidden (5:12)
16. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13–18)
17. Restoration of a sinner (5:19–20)

### Who wrote the book of James?

There is wide agreement among biblical scholars that the author of this book was James the half-brother of Jesus, who was a leader in the early church in the city of Jerusalem. He was respected for his wisdom and authority. For example, he had the last word at the Jerusalem Council, an important meeting of the early church, that is described in [Acts 15:13–21](../act/15/13.md). In [Galatians 2:9](../gal/02/09.md), the apostle Paul calls him a “pillar” of the church, meaning one of its most important leaders. However, even though James was an influential church leader and the half-brother of Jesus, in this letter he introduces himself humbly as “a servant of God and of the Lord Jesus Christ.”

This is not the same man as the apostle James, who was the brother of the apostle John. That James was killed for his faith a few years after Jesus himself was killed and rose from the dead. This letter was written many years after that.

### What kind of writing is the book of James?

The book of James has an opening that is typical of the letters of its time, but it does not have a main body that develops sequentially and logically the way a letter would have. Instead, the book presents a collection of short sayings and reflections on various subjects. (In that way it is similar to the book of Proverbs.) As the outline at the beginning of this introduction shows, the book is made up of many short sections that move around from topic to topic.

James uses many of the devices that speakers used in his time, such as anticipating and answering a question that someone might ask. He also uses many vivid examples drawn from both nature and everyday life. For this reason, many interpreters believe that for the content of this book, James drew on sermons he had preached and on wise advice he had given. He wanted to share all of that wisdom with Christians living in different parts of the Roman Empire to help them face difficult times. It is also possible that James wrote this letter because he was nearing the end of his life and he wanted his wisdom to be preserved and shared after his death.

### To whom was the book of James written?

James wrote this letter to believers in Jesus who had a Jewish background. This is clear from many of the things that he says in the letter. For example, he addresses his readers as “the twelve tribes” in [1:1](../01/01.md). He speaks of their meeting place as a “synagogue” in [2:2](../02/02.md). He assumes in [2:19](../02/19.md) that they are familiar with the essential Jewish affirmation that “God is one,” and in [2:21](../02/21.md) he calls Abraham “our father.” He calls God by the Hebrew title the Lord of Sabaoth in [5:4](../05/04.md). He assumes that his readers will be familiar from the Hebrew Scriptures with the stories of people such as Job ([5:11](../05/11.md)) and Elijah ([5:17](../05/17.md)). These notes will call attention to the places where James engages his readers in light of their Jewish background.

### What is the book of James about?

In this letter, James writes to believers living all over the Roman Empire who are suffering. He tells them that God is working through their sufferings to help them become more mature Christians. James also writes much in this letter about how believers should live in this world and treat one another. He urges them to treat other people fairly, not to quarrel and fight, and to be compassionate and generous.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “James.” Alternatively, they may choose a different title such as “A Letter from James” or “The Letter James Wrote.” But note that “James” is actually the English form of the author’s name. In the letter itself, he calls himself “Jacob,” which is the original Hebrew form of his name. So you may want to refer to him in the title of the book by the same name that you will use in your translation for the character of Jacob in the book of Genesis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Did James disagree with Paul about how a person is justified before God?

Paul taught in Romans that Christians are justified by faith and not by works. James seems to teach that Christians are justified by works. This could be confusing. However, a better understanding of what Paul and James each taught shows that they actually agree with one another. Both of them taught that a person needs faith in order to be justified. They both also taught that true faith would lead a person to do good works. Paul and James taught about these things in different ways because they had different audiences who needed to know different things about being justified. James wrote primarily to Jewish Christians, while Paul wrote to communities in which there were many Gentile Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How should the translator signal transitions between topics in the book of James?

James moves briskly from one topic to another. Often he does not end his discussion of one topic with a summary and then begin the discussion of the next topic with an introduction. It might be helpful to your readers if you set topics apart by putting blank lines between them. However, your readers would have the same experience of the letter that its original audience did if you allowed the transitions between topics to remain abrupt. Just as happens in the book of Proverbs, James seems to have wanted each new thought to strike his audience with fresh force. So you may also choose not to put any blank lines between topics in your translation.

James often makes the link between topics through key words, for example, “rejoice” in 1:1 and “joy” in 1:2; “lacking” in 1:4 and “lacks” in 1:5; and so forth. If you could find ways to translate these key words similarly in both of their occurrences, this should help your readers appreciate the link and the transition.

### Changes from the present tense to the past tense

In several places where James offers an illustration of a point he has just made, he narrates that illustration in the past tense as if he were telling the story of something that had happened. If this would be confusing for your readers, you could translate these illustrations in the present tense. Notes will identify each of these places and make that suggestion.

### Textual issues in the book of James

See the General Notes to chapter 2 for a discussion of one important textual issue in this book. +JAS 1 intro pz2q 0 # James 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Greetings (1:1)
2. Gaining endurance through trials (1:2–4)
3. Trusting God for wisdom (1:5–8)
4. What poor and rich people should boast about (1:9–11)
5. Enduring temptation (1:12–15)
6. Hearing and doing what God’s Word says (1:16–27)

James begins this letter in [1:1](../01/01.md) by giving his name, identifying the people to whom he is writing, and offering a greeting. That was the way people typically began letters at this time. However, as Part 1 of the Introduction to James explains, the letter does not then develop the way other letters did. Instead, it is a collection of short sayings and reflections.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Testing and temptation

James uses a word in this chapter that can mean both “trial,” as in [1:2](../01/02.md) and [1:12](../01/12.md), and “temptation,” as in [1:13–14](../01/13.md). In both cases the word speaks of the situation of a person who needs to choose between doing something good and doing something evil. The difference between the two senses is important. When ULT translates the word as “trial,” God is testing the person and wants him to do what is good. When ULT translates the word as “temptation,” Satan is tempting the person and wants him to do what is evil. JAS 1 1 pkt2 figs-123person Ἰάκωβος 1 James In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, and they would refer to themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the first person. If your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, you could also use that if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I, James, am writing this letter” or “From James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JAS 1 1 j000 translate-names Ἰάκωβος 1 James **James** is the name of a man, the half-brother of Jesus. See the information about him in Part 1 of the Introduction to James. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JAS 1 1 j001 figs-metonymy ταῖς δώδεκα φυλαῖς 1 to the twelve tribes James is speaking of the nation of Israel by association with the fact that it was made up of **12 tribes**. Alternate translation: “to the nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ JAS 1 11 ng26 figs-metaphor μαρανθήσεται 1 will wither James speaks JAS 1 11 sdi2 figs-metaphor ἐν ταῖς πορείαις αὐτοῦ 1 in his journeys James speaks of a **rich** person’s activities as if they were a journey that he was taking. This metaphor implies that he is giving no thought to his coming death and that it will take him by surprise. Alternate translation: “in the midst of his activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 12 m13d figs-idiom μακάριος ἀνὴρ ὃς ὑπομένει πειρασμόν 1 Blessed is the man who endures trial **Blessed {is}** indicates that God is giving favor to someone or that his situation is positive or good. Alternate translation: “The person who endures trial receives God’s favor” or “The person who endures trial is in a positive situation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 1 12 j029 figs-gendernotations ἀνὴρ 1 the man James is using the term **man** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -JAS 1 12 vr4a ὑπομένει πειρασμόν 1 endures trial Here, **trial** could mean one of two things. See the discussion of the word in the General Notes to this chapter. James may actually want his readers to hear both senses in this case, as this verse is making a transition from a discussion of testing into a discussion of temptation. (1) The word **trial** could mean the same thing as in [1:2-3](../01/02.md), where it describes the “testing” of “faith.” The reading of UST expresses this interpretation. (2) The word could refer to being tempted, that is, being led by one’s desires to do something wrong, which James discusses in the following verses. Alternate translation: “resists temptation” +JAS 1 12 vr4a ὑπομένει πειρασμόν 1 endures trial Here, **trial** could mean one of two things. See the discussion of the word in the General Notes to this chapter. James may actually want his readers to hear both senses in this case, as this verse is making a transition from a discussion of testing into a discussion of temptation. (1) The word **trial** could mean the same thing as in [1:2–3](../01/02.md), where it describes the “testing” of “faith.” The reading of UST expresses this interpretation. (2) The word could refer to being tempted, that is, being led by one’s desires to do something wrong, which James discusses in the following verses. Alternate translation: “resists temptation” JAS 1 12 vta6 δόκιμος γενόμενος 1 becoming approved How you translate this will depend on how you translate **trial** earlier in the sentence. (In your translation, you could also focus on the way that God approves of this person, as UST does.) Alternate translation: “once he has demonstrated his faithfulness” of “once he has demonstrated his obedience” JAS 1 12 j030 figs-possession λήμψεται τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς 1 he will receive the crown of life James is using the possessive form not to refer to a **crown** that belongs to **life** but to describe **life** as if it were a **crown**. Alternate translation: “he will receive the crown that is life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JAS 1 12 k3hh figs-metaphor λήμψεται τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς 1 he will receive the crown of life James is using the image of a **crown** to indicate that God will honor this person. Alternate translation: “God will honor him by giving him life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ JAS 1 26 j079 figs-metaphor μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐ JAS 1 26 j080 translate-unknown μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ 1 not bridling his tongue A “bridle” is headgear that is used to control a horse. If your readers would not be familiar with what a “bridle” is, you could use a different illustration that would be familiar to them of a device that is used in your culture to control animals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JAS 1 26 vxu1 figs-metonymy μὴ χαλιναγωγῶν γλῶσσαν αὐτοῦ 1 not bridling his tongue By association with the way that the **tongue** is used in speech, James is using the term **tongue** to mean what a person says. Alternate translation: “not controlling what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 1 26 sex6 figs-synecdoche ἀπατῶν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 deceiving his heart James is using one part of this hypothetical person, his **heart**, to mean the person himself. Alternate translation: “deceiving himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -JAS 1 26 q83d figs-hyperbole τούτου μάταιος ἡ θρησκεία 1 the religion of that one is worthless James says **worthless** as an overstatement for emphasis. There would conceivably still be some value in the religion of a person even if he did not carefully control what he said. But James wants to emphasize how inconsistent it is to claim to love God but then to say things that hurt and disparage other people. He will develop this point further in [3:9-10](../03/09.md). Alternate translation: “his actions are not as pleasing to God as he thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +JAS 1 26 q83d figs-hyperbole τούτου μάταιος ἡ θρησκεία 1 the religion of that one is worthless James says **worthless** as an overstatement for emphasis. There would conceivably still be some value in the religion of a person even if he did not carefully control what he said. But James wants to emphasize how inconsistent it is to claim to love God but then to say things that hurt and disparage other people. He will develop this point further in [3:9–10](../03/09.md). Alternate translation: “his actions are not as pleasing to God as he thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) JAS 1 27 j081 figs-metaphor θρησκεία καθαρὰ καὶ ἀμίαντος 1 Pure and undefiled religion James is speaking of **religion** as if it could be physically **Pure** and **undefiled**. Alternate translation: “Religion that is pleasing and acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 1 27 g11k figs-doublet θρησκεία καθαρὰ καὶ ἀμίαντος 1 Pure and undefiled religion The terms **Pure** and **undefiled** mean similar things. They both indicate that something is free of contamination. James is using these terms together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them into a single phrase. Alternate translation: “Religion that is completely acceptable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JAS 1 27 skf4 figs-metaphor παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ 1 before God The word **before** means “in front of” or “in the presence of” another person, and in this case **before** him indicates “where God can see.” Seeing, for its part, represents attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “from God’s perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ JAS 1 27 r8nj figs-explicit ἐπισκέπτεσθαι ὀρφανοὺς κα JAS 1 27 j084 ἄσπιλον ἑαυτὸν τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ κόσμου 1 to keep oneself unstained by the world This is not a purpose or result clause. James is not telling his readers that they should help **orphans and widows** in order to stay **unstained by the world** or that this would be the result if they did help them. Rather, James is saying that this is a second thing that characterizes **religion** that pleases God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could add the word “and” before this clause in order to clarify this. JAS 1 27 j085 figs-metonymy ἄσπιλον ἑαυτὸν τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ κόσμου 1 to keep oneself unstained by the world James is using the term **world** to mean the system of values shared by people who do not honor God, by association with the way those people live in the world. Alternate translation: “to keep oneself unstained by the value system of ungodly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 1 27 nmf7 figs-metaphor ἄσπιλον ἑαυτὸν τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ κόσμου 1 to keep oneself unstained by the world James is speaking of the influence of ungodly people as if it could physically stain a person. By **unstained** he actually means free from sin. Alternate translation: “not to allow ungodly people and their influence to cause oneself to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JAS 2 intro f5zd 0 # James 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. A warning against favoring rich people (2:1-13)
2. Faith and works (2:14-26)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Favoritism

Some of James’s readers treated rich and powerful people well and they treated poor people badly. Treating some people better than others is called favoritism. James tells his readers that this is wrong. God wants his people to treat everyone well.

### Justification

Justification is what happens when God makes a person righteous, that is, when God puts a person in right standing with himself. James says in this chapter that God justifies people when they do good works along with having faith. But that is because the good works demonstrate the faith that a person has, as James says explicitly in [2:18](../02/18.md). James is not saying that people need to add good works to their faith in order to be justified. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### But someone may say, “You have faith, and I have works” (2:18)

When James says this, he seems to be raising an objection that someone might make to what he has been saying. Public speakers at this time commonly raised such objections in order to answer them, and James is probably using that device. However, if that is what he is doing, we would expect the objection to be, “You have works, and I have faith,” since James has been stressing the importance of works accompanying faith. So why does this hypothetical speaker say instead, “You have faith, and I have works”?

It appears that James actually has this speaker addressing these words to the same “you” whom he has been addressing himself since 2:16 as “one of you” and whom he then goes on to address in the rest of this chapter. In other words, James is raising this hypothetical objection so that he can address this same “you” in this verse as well. James is saying, “Someone might reassure you that you nevertheless have faith, while I (James) have works. He might argue that both are valid expressions of religion and that it is not necessary for a person to have both.” James then answers this argument by observing that he can show his faith through his works, while a person who claims to have faith but not works has no means of proving that.

In your translation, you may wish to express this implicit information, as UST does. Alternatively, you may wish to translate as ULT does and leave it to Bible teachers and preachers to explain the meaning. See the further discussion in the notes to [2:18](../02/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Major textual issues in this chapter

### Faith without works is “useless” or “dead” (2:20)

In James [2:20](../02/20.md), some ancient manuscripts say that faith without works is “useless.” ULT and UST follow that reading. Some other ancient manuscripts say that it is “dead,” perhaps under the influence of [2:17](../02/17.md) and [2:26](../02/26.md), where James uses the term “dead” to describe faith that is not expressed in works. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, consider using the reading found in that translation. If not, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +JAS 2 intro f5zd 0 # James 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. A warning against favoring rich people (2:1–13)
2. Faith and works (2:14–26)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Favoritism

Some of James’s readers treated rich and powerful people well and they treated poor people badly. Treating some people better than others is called favoritism. James tells his readers that this is wrong. God wants his people to treat everyone well.

### Justification

Justification is what happens when God makes a person righteous, that is, when God puts a person in right standing with himself. James says in this chapter that God justifies people when they do good works along with having faith. But that is because the good works demonstrate the faith that a person has, as James says explicitly in [2:18](../02/18.md). James is not saying that people need to add good works to their faith in order to be justified. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### But someone may say, “You have faith, and I have works” (2:18)

When James says this, he seems to be raising an objection that someone might make to what he has been saying. Public speakers at this time commonly raised such objections in order to answer them, and James is probably using that device. However, if that is what he is doing, we would expect the objection to be, “You have works, and I have faith,” since James has been stressing the importance of works accompanying faith. So why does this hypothetical speaker say instead, “You have faith, and I have works”?

It appears that James actually has this speaker addressing these words to the same “you” whom he has been addressing himself since 2:16 as “one of you” and whom he then goes on to address in the rest of this chapter. In other words, James is raising this hypothetical objection so that he can address this same “you” in this verse as well. James is saying, “Someone might reassure you that you nevertheless have faith, while I (James) have works. He might argue that both are valid expressions of religion and that it is not necessary for a person to have both.” James then answers this argument by observing that he can show his faith through his works, while a person who claims to have faith but not works has no means of proving that.

In your translation, you may wish to express this implicit information, as UST does. Alternatively, you may wish to translate as ULT does and leave it to Bible teachers and preachers to explain the meaning. See the further discussion in the notes to [2:18](../02/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Major textual issues in this chapter

### Faith without works is “useless” or “dead” (2:20)

In James [2:20](../02/20.md), some ancient manuscripts say that faith without works is “useless.” ULT and UST follow that reading. Some other ancient manuscripts say that it is “dead,” perhaps under the influence of [2:17](../02/17.md) and [2:26](../02/26.md), where James uses the term “dead” to describe faith that is not expressed in works. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, consider using the reading found in that translation. If not, we recommend that you follow the reading of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) JAS 2 1 kab4 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου 1 My brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 2 1 en1c figs-abstractnouns μὴ ἐν προσωπολημψίαις ἔχετε 1 do not with favoritism have If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **favoritism** with an equivalent phrase. (See the discussion of favoritism in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “you should not treat some people better than others, because that is not consistent with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 2 1 qs2x figs-possession τὴν πίστιν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the faith of our Lord Jesus Christ James is using the possessive form to refer to **faith** that other people have in **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “faith in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ JAS 2 5 s38z figs-metaphor πλουσίους ἐν πίστει 1 to be rich in JAS 2 5 j101 figs-explicit πλουσίους ἐν πίστει 1 to be rich in faith Your language may require you to specify the object of **faith**. Alternate translation: “to have strong faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 5 qii5 figs-metaphor κληρονόμους τῆς βασιλείας ἧς 1 heirs of the kingdom that James speaks of the people to whom God has promised the kingdom as if they were going to inherit wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “participants in the kingdom that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 2 5 j102 figs-abstractnouns κληρονόμους τῆς βασιλείας ἧς 1 to be heirs of the kingdom that If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “to enjoy advantages when God rules, as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JAS 2 6 vr53 ἠτιμάσατε τὸν πτωχόν 1 you have dishonored the poor What James means by this is clear from the example he gives in [2:2-3](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “you have treated people who are poor much worse than you have treated people who are rich” +JAS 2 6 vr53 ἠτιμάσατε τὸν πτωχόν 1 you have dishonored the poor What James means by this is clear from the example he gives in [2:2–3](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “you have treated people who are poor much worse than you have treated people who are rich” JAS 2 6 j103 figs-nominaladj τὸν πτωχόν 1 the poor James is using the adjective **poor** as a noun to refer to a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 2 6 j104 writing-pronouns οὐχ οἱ πλούσιοι καταδυναστεύουσιν ὑμῶν, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἕλκουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς κριτήρια 1 Do not the rich overpower you and themselves drag you into court The word that is translated **themselves** here is the same word that is translated **they** in the next verse. It is effectively the subject of a new independent clause, so you could translate this as two sentences. Alternate translation: “Do not the rich overpower you? Do they not drag you into court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JAS 2 6 l2lu figs-rquestion οὐχ οἱ πλούσιοι καταδυναστεύουσιν ὑμῶν, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἕλκουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς κριτήρια? 1 Do not the rich overpower you and themselves drag you into court? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is the rich who overpower you and drag you into court themselves!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ JAS 2 17 j138 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις, ἐὰν μὴ ἔχῃ ἔρ JAS 2 18 j139 figs-quotations ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις, κἀγὼ ἔργα ἔχω 1 But someone will say, “You have faith and I have works.” See the discussion of this sentence in the General Notes to this chapter. You may want to turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation to help your readers understand that the **You** who is being addressed is the same “one of you” as in [2:16](../02/16.md) and that when James says **I**, he is referring to himself. Alternate translation: “But someone may tell you that you have faith and I have works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) JAS 2 18 j140 figs-explicit ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις, σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις, κἀγὼ ἔργα ἔχω 1 But someone will say, “You have faith, and I have works.” See the discussion of this sentence in the General Notes to this chapter. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate more explicitly what this statement means. (UST explains the implications even further than is suggested here.) Alternate translation: “But someone may try to reassure you that you nevertheless have faith, while I, James, have works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 2 18 al63 figs-hypo ἀλλ’ ἐρεῖ τις 1 But someone will say James is using a hypothetical situation to teach. This expression introduces the condition of the hypothetical situation. (As Part 1 of the General Introduction to James explains, in the style of speakers of this time, James is anticipating an objection that someone might make and saying how he would respond to it.) Alternate translation: “But suppose someone said to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -JAS 2 18 j141 figs-yousingular σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις 1 you have faith Here, **You** is singular because James is illustrating how someone might address one individual. James himself then addresses that same individual in the rest of this verse and in verses [19-22](../02/19.md). So if your language marks the distinction, use the singular form of “you” in your translation from here through verse 22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +JAS 2 18 j141 figs-yousingular σὺ πίστιν ἔχεις 1 you have faith Here, **You** is singular because James is illustrating how someone might address one individual. James himself then addresses that same individual in the rest of this verse and in verses [19–22](../02/19.md). So if your language marks the distinction, use the singular form of “you” in your translation from here through verse 22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) JAS 2 18 j142 figs-quotations δεῖξόν μοι τὴν πίστιν σου χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων, κἀγώ σοι δείξω ἐκ τῶν ἔργων μου τὴν πίστιν 1 Show me your faith without works, and I will show you my faith from works It may be helpful to make this sentence a direct quotation after an introduction to show that it is what James would say in response to the hypothetical objection. Alternate translation: “Then I would say to you, ‘Show me your faith without works, and I will show you my faith from works’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) JAS 2 18 j143 figs-hypo δεῖξόν μοι τὴν πίστιν σου χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων, κἀγώ σοι δείξω ἐκ τῶν ἔργων μου τὴν πίστιν 1 Show me your faith without works, and I will show you my faith from works This is the result of the hypothetical situation that James has been describing. Alternate translation: “Then I would say to you, ‘Show me your faith without works, and I will show you my faith from works’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) JAS 2 18 j144 figs-imperative δεῖξόν μοι τὴν πίστιν σου χωρὶς τῶν ἔργων 1 Show me your faith without works James is using the imperative **Show me** to challenge the hypothetical “You” and make him realize that he really cannot do what James is telling him to do. Alternate translation: “You cannot show me your faith without works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) @@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ JAS 2 26 j172 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For James is using the word JAS 2 26 j173 τὸ σῶμα χωρὶς πνεύματος νεκρόν ἐστιν 1 the body without the spirit is dead The word translated **spirit** can also mean “breath.” Alternate translation: “a body that does not have the breath of life in it is dead” JAS 2 26 uum8 figs-personification ἡ πίστις χωρὶς ἔργων νεκρά ἐστιν 1 faith without works is dead James is speaking of **faith** as if it would be a living thing if it had works but not be alive if it did not have them. Alternate translation: “a person’s faith is not genuine if he does not express it through works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JAS 2 26 j174 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις χωρὶς ἔργων νεκρά ἐστιν 1 faith without works is dead If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **faith** and **works** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “if a person says he believes in God but he does not do what God wants him to do, then he does not really believe in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JAS 3 intro py3p 0 # James 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. The need for self-control in speech (3:1-12)
2. Worldy wisdom and heavenly wisdom contrasted (3:13-18)

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

In this chapter, James uses many illustrations from everyday life to teach his readers how to live in a way that pleases God. He speaks about horses in [3:3](../03/03.md), ships in [3:4](../03/04.md), forest fires in [3:5](../03/05.md), animal taming in [3:7](../03/07.md), springs of water in [3:11](../03/11.md), and fruit trees in [3:12](../03/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 3 intro py3p 0 # James 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. The need for self-control in speech (3:1–12)
2. Worldy wisdom and heavenly wisdom contrasted (3:13–18)

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

In this chapter, James uses many illustrations from everyday life to teach his readers how to live in a way that pleases God. He speaks about horses in [3:3](../03/03.md), ships in [3:4](../03/04.md), forest fires in [3:5](../03/05.md), animal taming in [3:7](../03/07.md), springs of water in [3:11](../03/11.md), and fruit trees in [3:12](../03/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 1 p4uu μὴ πολλοὶ διδάσκαλοι γίνεσθε 1 Do not become many teachers Alternate translation: “Not many of you should become teachers” JAS 3 1 c36b figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί μου 1 my brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 1 j175 εἰδότες ὅτι 1 knowing that Alternate translation: “since you know that” @@ -437,7 +437,7 @@ JAS 3 17 by2l ἀνυπόκριτος 1 sincere Alternate translation: “not h JAS 3 18 md56 figs-metaphor καρπὸς…δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην 1 the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace James speaks of those who **make peace** as if they were sowing seeds, and of righteousness as if it were **fruit** that grew from those seeds. Alternate translation: “those who work in peace to make peace produce righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 3 18 htr1 figs-abstractnouns καρπὸς…δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην 1 the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **righteousness** and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who work peacefully to help people live together peacefully are helping those people to live in the right way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 3 18 j238 figs-activepassive καρπὸς…δικαιοσύνης ἐν εἰρήνῃ σπείρεται, τοῖς ποιοῦσιν εἰρήνην 1 the fruit of righteousness is sown in peace by those who make peace If you decide to retain the metaphor of sowing, you could express it with an active verbal form, if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “those who make peace sow the fruit of righteousness in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JAS 4 intro r6vv 0 # James 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Worldly desires and the sin and conflict they cause (4:1-12)
2. A warning against boasting about tomorrow (4:13-17)

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Adultery

Writers in the Bible often speak of adultery as a metaphor for people who say they love God but do things that God hates. James uses the same metaphor in [4:4](../04/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]]) +JAS 4 intro r6vv 0 # James 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Worldly desires and the sin and conflict they cause (4:1–12)
2. A warning against boasting about tomorrow (4:13–17)

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Adultery

Writers in the Bible often speak of adultery as a metaphor for people who say they love God but do things that God hates. James uses the same metaphor in [4:4](../04/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]]) JAS 4 1 j240 figs-metaphor πόθεν πόλεμοι καὶ πόθεν μάχαι ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Whence are wars and whence are battles among you James is using the terms **wars** and **battles**. Alternate translation: “Where do the conflicts and disputes that you are having come from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 1 pqx2 figs-rquestion πόθεν πόλεμοι καὶ πόθεν μάχαι ἐν ὑμῖν? 1 Whence are wars and whence are battles among you? James is using the question form as a teaching tool. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question by translating his words as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you where the conflicts and disputes that you are having come from.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JAS 4 1 ub82 figs-doublet πόθεν πόλεμοι καὶ πόθεν μάχαι ἐν ὑμῖν? 1 Whence are wars and whence are battles among you? The words **wars** and **battles** mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by translating them with a single expression. Alternate translation (as a statement): “I will tell you where the continual conflicts that you are having come from.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ JAS 4 1 vpe2 figs-personification τῶν ἡδονῶν ὑμῶν, τῶν σ JAS 4 2 j243 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἐπιθυμεῖτε καὶ οὐκ ἔχετε; φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε, καὶ οὐ δύνασθε ἐπιτυχεῖν 1 You covet, and you do not have. You kill and envy, and you are not able to obtain In both of these sentences, James is using the word translated **and** to introduce a contrast between the first and second clauses. Alternate translation: “You covet, but you do not have. You kill and envy, but you are not able to obtain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) JAS 4 2 j244 ἐπιθυμεῖτε καὶ οὐκ ἔχετε; φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε, καὶ οὐ δύνασθε ἐπιτυχεῖν 1 You covet, and you do not have. You kill and envy, and you are not able to obtain Your language may require you to specify the objects of **have** and **obtain**. Alternate translation: “You covet, but you do not have what you covet. You kill and envy, but you are not able to obtain the things that you envy” JAS 4 2 j245 figs-parallelism ἐπιθυμεῖτε καὶ οὐκ ἔχετε; φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε, καὶ οὐ δύνασθε ἐπιτυχεῖν 1 You covet, and you do not have. You kill and envy, and you are not able to obtain These two sentences mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “You desperately want things that other people have, but you could not get them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -JAS 4 2 khh9 figs-metaphor φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε 1 You kill and envy James probably does not mean the word **kill** literally. Rather, this could mean: (1) James is using the word in a figurative and spiritual sense to mean “hate.” This usage would reflect the teaching of Jesus and the apostles. Jesus said that the meaning of the commandment “do not kill” also applied to being angry with others and insulting them ([Matthew 5:21-22](../mat/05/21.md)). The apostle John wrote that “everyone who hates his brother is a murderer” ([1 John 3:15](../1jn/03/15.md)). Alternate translation: “You hate and envy” (2) James is describing someone wanting something so badly that he would almost kill to get it. Alternate translation: “You envy almost to the point of murder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JAS 4 2 khh9 figs-metaphor φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε 1 You kill and envy James probably does not mean the word **kill** literally. Rather, this could mean: (1) James is using the word in a figurative and spiritual sense to mean “hate.” This usage would reflect the teaching of Jesus and the apostles. Jesus said that the meaning of the commandment “do not kill” also applied to being angry with others and insulting them ([Matthew 5:21–22](../mat/05/21.md)). The apostle John wrote that “everyone who hates his brother is a murderer” ([1 John 3:15](../1jn/03/15.md)). Alternate translation: “You hate and envy” (2) James is describing someone wanting something so badly that he would almost kill to get it. Alternate translation: “You envy almost to the point of murder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 2 j246 figs-hendiadys φονεύετε καὶ ζηλοῦτε 1 You kill and envy James is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with **and.** The word **kill** describes how his readers **envy** what others have. Alternate translation: “you envy hatefully” of “you envy murderously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) JAS 4 2 j247 figs-metaphor μάχεσθε καὶ πολεμεῖτε 1 You battle and war As in [4:1](../04/01.md), James is using the terms **battle** and **war**. Alternate translation: “You engage in disputes and conflicts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 4 2 v9m8 figs-doublet μάχεσθε καὶ πολεμεῖτε 1 You battle and war The words **battle** and **war** mean similar things. James is using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this connection by translating them with a single expression. Alternate translation: “You have continual conflicts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ JAS 4 15 j289 figs-exclusive καὶ ζήσομεν καὶ ποιήσομεν 1 JAS 4 15 j290 figs-idiom τοῦτο ἢ ἐκεῖνο 1 this or that This is an idiom. No specific actions are intended. Your language may have a comparable idiom that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “such-and-such” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 4 16 j291 figs-abstractnouns καυχᾶσθε ἐν ταῖς ἀλαζονίαις ὑμῶν. πᾶσα καύχησις τοιαύτη πονηρά ἐστιν 1 you are boasting in your pretensions. All such boasting is evil If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **pretensions** and **boasting** (the second occurrence of the word in ULT) by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “you are boasting about what you presume you will be able to do. It is always wrong to boast like that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JAS 4 17 q84z εἰδότι οὖν καλὸν ποιεῖν, καὶ μὴ ποιοῦντι, ἁμαρτία αὐτῷ ἐστιν 1 Therefore to the one having known to do good and not doing it, to him it is sin James is using the word **Therefore** to describe a further inference rather than a conclusion. He is saying that if it is wrong to plan to do things without knowing whether God wants you to do them, then it is also wrong not to do things that you do know God wants. Alternate translation: “From this we can also recognize that if someone does know what God wants him to do but he does not do it, then he is also sinning” -JAS 5 intro ud8q 0 # James 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Rebuke of rich people (5:1-6)
2. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7-11)
3. Oaths forbidden (5:12)
4. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13-18)
5. Restoration of a sinner (5:19-20)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Living for eternity

The first section of this chapter, which is a warning to rich people, contrasts living for things of this world, which will not last, with living for things that will last for eternity. The second section of the chapter is related to that first section. In it, James stresses that it is important to live with the expectation that Jesus will return soon. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

### Oaths

In [5:12](../05/12.md), James tells his readers not to swear any oaths. However, biblical scholars are divided over whether James intends to teach literally that all oaths are wrong. Some scholars believe that some oaths are permissible and that James is emphasizing how Christians should have integrity in what they say.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Elijah

The illustration that James gives from the life of the prophet Elijah in [5:17-18](../05/17.md) may be difficult for your readers to appreciate if the books of 1 and 2 Kings have not yet been translated. See the first note to 5:17 for a suggestion about how to help your readers understand this illustration better. +JAS 5 intro ud8q 0 # James 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Rebuke of rich people (5:1–6)
2. Waiting patiently for the Lord’s return (5:7–11)
3. Oaths forbidden (5:12)
4. Prayer, forgiveness, and healing (5:13–18)
5. Restoration of a sinner (5:19–20)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Living for eternity

The first section of this chapter, which is a warning to rich people, contrasts living for things of this world, which will not last, with living for things that will last for eternity. The second section of the chapter is related to that first section. In it, James stresses that it is important to live with the expectation that Jesus will return soon. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

### Oaths

In [5:12](../05/12.md), James tells his readers not to swear any oaths. However, biblical scholars are divided over whether James intends to teach literally that all oaths are wrong. Some scholars believe that some oaths are permissible and that James is emphasizing how Christians should have integrity in what they say.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Elijah

The illustration that James gives from the life of the prophet Elijah in [5:17–18](../05/17.md) may be difficult for your readers to appreciate if the books of 1 and 2 Kings have not yet been translated. See the first note to 5:17 for a suggestion about how to help your readers understand this illustration better. JAS 5 1 j292 figs-idiom ἄγε νῦν 1 Come now This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [4:13](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “Now listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 5 1 j293 οἱ πλούσιοι 1 the rich James is addressing these **rich** people in the vocative. If your language has a vocative case, it would be appropriate to use it here. If not, you could express the meaning in another way that would be natural in your language. (If you use the word “you,” it would be plural, since James is addressing a group of people.) Alternate translation: “you who are rich” JAS 5 1 j294 figs-nominaladj οἱ πλούσιοι 1 the rich James is using the adjective **rich** as a noun to refer to a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “you people who are rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -550,7 +550,7 @@ JAS 5 3 j301 figs-explicit ὁ ἰὸς αὐτῶν εἰς μαρτύριον JAS 5 3 w3aj figs-metonymy φάγεται τὰς σάρκας ὑμῶν ὡς πῦρ 1 it will eat your flesh James is using the word **flesh** to mean the human body, by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “it will eat your bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JAS 5 3 j6fe figs-metaphor φάγεται τὰς σάρκας ὑμῶν ὡς πῦρ 1 it will eat your flesh James is saying that this **rust** will corrode and consume the owners of the **gold and silver** that it is also corroding. Alternate translation: “it will consume you” or “it will ruin you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 3 i37x figs-simile ὡς πῦρ 1 like fire It may be helpful to express the meaning of this simile more fully. Alternate translation: “just as fire consumes everything that it burns” or “just as fire ruins everything that it burns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -JAS 5 3 j302 figs-explicit ἐθησαυρίσατε ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 You have stored up in the last days If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what these rich people have **stored up** and why it was wrong for them to do that. This could mean: (1) they have accumulated riches in the **last days**, that is, in the time just before Jesus returns. That would be wrong because once Jesus returns, earthly riches will no longer have any value. Instead of trying to get more and more wealth, these people should have been helping others with what they had. Alternate translation: “Instead of helping others, you have wrongly stored up wealth at a time when earthly riches are about to lose all of their value” (2) by their wrongdoing, such as he describes in [5:4-6](../05/04.md), these rich people have **stored up** punishment for themselves. Alternate translation: “God is just about to punish wrongdoers, and you have given God many reasons to punish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JAS 5 3 j302 figs-explicit ἐθησαυρίσατε ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 You have stored up in the last days If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state explicitly what these rich people have **stored up** and why it was wrong for them to do that. This could mean: (1) they have accumulated riches in the **last days**, that is, in the time just before Jesus returns. That would be wrong because once Jesus returns, earthly riches will no longer have any value. Instead of trying to get more and more wealth, these people should have been helping others with what they had. Alternate translation: “Instead of helping others, you have wrongly stored up wealth at a time when earthly riches are about to lose all of their value” (2) by their wrongdoing, such as he describes in [5:4–6](../05/04.md), these rich people have **stored up** punishment for themselves. Alternate translation: “God is just about to punish wrongdoers, and you have given God many reasons to punish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 3 j303 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐθησαυρίσατε ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 You have stored up in the last days If the first interpretation of this statement in the note just above is correct, then James is giving the reason for the results that he describes in the previous verse and in the earlier part of this verse. If you created a verse bridge as described in the first note to [5:2](../05/02.md), you could put this reason before the result by placing this statement first in that bridge. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 5 3 np1u figs-idiom ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 the last days This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the time just before Jesus returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JAS 5 4 j304 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ὁ μισθὸς τῶν ἐργατῶν 1 Behold, the pay of the workers The term **Behold** focuses the attention of a listener or reader on what a speaker or writer is about to say. It may be helpful to express its meaning as a separate sentence here. Alternate translation: “Consider this! The pay of the workers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ JAS 5 6 u5c5 figs-synecdoche κατεδικάσατε, ἐφονεύσατε τ JAS 5 6 j311 figs-nominaladj τὸν δίκαιον 1 the righteous James is using the adjective **righteous** as a noun to refer to a type of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the righteous person” or “the innocent person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) JAS 5 6 lq6p figs-genericnoun τὸν δίκαιον 1 the righteous The expression **the righteous** refers to righteous people in general, not to one specific person. Alternate translation: “righteous people” or “innocent people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) JAS 5 6 z7w1 figs-explicit οὐκ ἀντιτάσσεται ὑμῖν 1 He does not resist you This could mean: (1) the innocent people are not able to resist what the rich people are doing. Alternate translation: “He is not able to resist you” (2) the innocent people wanted a peaceful resolution and were not fighting back. Alternate translation: “You have done this even though the innocent person wanted a peaceful resolution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JAS 5 6 j312 figs-explicit οὐκ ἀντιτάσσεται ὑμῖν 1 He does not resist you In light of everything that James says in [5:1-6](../05/01.md), the implications are that even though these innocent people are not able to defend themselves, God will defend them by judging and punishing these rich people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JAS 5 6 j312 figs-explicit οὐκ ἀντιτάσσεται ὑμῖν 1 He does not resist you In light of everything that James says in [5:1–6](../05/01.md), the implications are that even though these innocent people are not able to defend themselves, God will defend them by judging and punishing these rich people. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JAS 5 7 a4sv grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore James uses **Therefore** to introduce a description of what his readers should do as a result of what he has just said about rich people. He is referring specifically to what he said about God’s judgment being imminent. Alternate translation: “Because you know that God will soon judge the people who are oppressing you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JAS 5 7 j313 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JAS 5 7 wgk4 ἕως τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου 1 until the coming of the Lord James is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Alternate translation: “until Jesus returns” or “until the Lord Jesus returns” diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 247abf8b03..2d2a316d4a 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -2PE front intro mvk9 0 # Introduction to 2 Peter

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 2 Peter

1. Introduction (1:1–2)
1. Reminder to live godly lives because God has enabled us to do so (1:3–15)
1. Reminder of the veracity of apostolic teaching (1:16–21)
1. Prediction of false teachers (2:1–3)
1. Examples of divine judgment (2:4–10a)
1. Description and denunciation of false teachers (2:10b–22)
1. Reminder that Jesus will return at the right time (3:1–13)
1. Concluding exhortation to live godly lives (3:14–17)

### Who wrote the book of 2 Peter?

The author identified himself as Simon Peter. Simon Peter was an apostle. He also wrote the book of 1 Peter. Peter probably wrote this letter while in a prison in Rome, just before he died. Peter called this letter his second letter, so we can date it after 1 Peter. He addressed the letter to the same audience as his first letter. The audience probably was Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.

### What is the book of 2 Peter about?

Peter wrote this letter to encourage believers to live good lives. He warned them about false teachers who were saying Jesus was taking too long to return. He told them that Jesus was not slow in returning. Instead, God was giving people time to repent so that they would be saved.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Peter” or “Second Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Second Letter from Peter” or “The Second Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Who were the people Peter spoke against?

It is possible that the people Peter spoke against were those who would become known as Gnostics. These teachers distorted the teachings of Scripture for their own gain. They lived in immoral ways and taught others to do the same.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

The doctrine of Scripture is a very important one. 2 Peter helps readers to understand that while each writer of Scripture had his own distinct way of writing, God is the true author of Scripture (1:20-21).

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter. Also, the word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 2 Peter?

For the following verses, there are differences between some of the ancient manuscripts. The ULT text follows the reading that most scholars consider to be original and puts the other reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the language of wider communication in the region, translators may want to consider using the reading found in that version. If not, translators are advised to follow the reading in the ULT.
* “to be kept in chains of lower darkness until the judgment” (2:4). Some ancient manuscripts have, “to be kept in pits of lower darkness until the judgment.”
* “They enjoy their deceitful actions while they are feasting with you” (2:13). Some manuscripts have, “They enjoy their actions while they are feasting with you in love feasts.”
* “Bosor” (2:15). A few other manuscripts read, “Beor.”
* “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed” (3:10). Other manuscripts have, “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be burned up.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2PE front intro mvk9 0 # Introduction to 2 Peter

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 2 Peter

1. Introduction (1:1–2)
1. Reminder to live godly lives because God has enabled us to do so (1:3–15)
1. Reminder of the veracity of apostolic teaching (1:16–21)
1. Prediction of false teachers (2:1–3)
1. Examples of divine judgment (2:4–10a)
1. Description and denunciation of false teachers (2:10b–22)
1. Reminder that Jesus will return at the right time (3:1–13)
1. Concluding exhortation to live godly lives (3:14–17)

### Who wrote the book of 2 Peter?

The author identified himself as Simon Peter. Simon Peter was an apostle. He also wrote the book of 1 Peter. Peter probably wrote this letter while in a prison in Rome, just before he died. Peter called this letter his second letter, so we can date it after 1 Peter. He addressed the letter to the same audience as his first letter. The audience probably was Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.

### What is the book of 2 Peter about?

Peter wrote this letter to encourage believers to live good lives. He warned them about false teachers who were saying Jesus was taking too long to return. He told them that Jesus was not slow in returning. Instead, God was giving people time to repent so that they would be saved.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Peter” or “Second Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Second Letter from Peter” or “The Second Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Who were the people Peter spoke against?

It is possible that the people Peter spoke against were those who would become known as Gnostics. These teachers distorted the teachings of Scripture for their own gain. They lived in immoral ways and taught others to do the same.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

The doctrine of Scripture is a very important one. 2 Peter helps readers to understand that while each writer of Scripture had his own distinct way of writing, God is the true author of Scripture (1:20–21).

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter. Also, the word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 2 Peter?

For the following verses, there are differences between some of the ancient manuscripts. The ULT text follows the reading that most scholars consider to be original and puts the other reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the language of wider communication in the region, translators may want to consider using the reading found in that version. If not, translators are advised to follow the reading in the ULT.
* “to be kept in chains of lower darkness until the judgment” (2:4). Some ancient manuscripts have, “to be kept in pits of lower darkness until the judgment.”
* “They enjoy their deceitful actions while they are feasting with you” (2:13). Some manuscripts have, “They enjoy their actions while they are feasting with you in love feasts.”
* “Bosor” (2:15). A few other manuscripts read, “Beor.”
* “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed” (3:10). Other manuscripts have, “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be burned up.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 2PE 1 intro wjw5 0 # 2 Peter 1 General Notes

## Structure and Formatting

1. Introduction (1:1–2)
2. Reminder to live good lives, because God has enabled us to do so (1:3–15)
3. Reminder of the veracity of apostolic teaching (1:16–21)

Peter begins this letter in [1:1–2](../01/01.md) by giving his name, identifying the people to whom he is writing, and offering a greeting. That was the way people typically began letters at this time.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Knowledge of God

Having experiential knowledge of God means to belong to him or to have a relationship with him. Here, “knowledge” is more than just mentally knowing about God. It is the knowledge of personal relationship in which God saves a person and gives him grace and peace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])

### Living godly lives

Peter teaches that God has given believers all that they need for living godly lives. Therefore, believers should do everything they can to obey God more and more. If believers continue to do this, then they will be effective and productive through their relationship with Jesus. However, if believers do not continue living godly lives, then it is as though they have forgotten what God did through Christ to save them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter

### The truth of Scripture

Peter teaches that the prophecies in Scripture were not made up by men. The Holy Spirit revealed God’s message to the men who spoke them or wrote them down. Also, Peter and the other apostles did not make up the stories they told people about Jesus. They witnessed what Jesus did and heard God call Jesus his son. 2PE 1 1 n1di figs-123person Σίμων Πέτρος 1 In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, and they would refer to themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing in your language, you could use the first person. If your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, you could also use that. Alternate translation: “I, Simon Peter, am writing this letter” or “From Simon Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 2PE 1 1 xf2u translate-names Σίμων Πέτρος 1 **Simon Peter** is the name of a man, a disciple of Jesus. See the information about him in Part 1 of the Introduction to 2 Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) diff --git a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv index fb1eba75fc..64307a0567 100644 --- a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1JN front intro nl27 0 # Introduction to 1 John

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 1 John

This is a letter that the apostle John wrote to challenge and correct false teachings that were leading followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and live in wrong ways. At that time, the letter form had distinct opening and closing sections. The main body of the letter came in between.
1. Opening of Letter (1:1-4)
1. Main Body of Letter (1:5–5:12)
* Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–2:17)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18–2:27)
* Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28–3:10)
* Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11–18)
* Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19–24)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1–6)
* Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7–21)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1–12)
1. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)

### Who wrote the book of 1 John?

The author of this letter does not give his name. However, since early Christian times, the church has widely considered the apostle John to be the author. He wrote the Gospel of John, and there are many similarities between the content of that book and this letter. If John did write this letter, he probably did so near the end of his life.

### To whom was the book of 1 John written?

The author wrote this letter to people whom he addresses as “beloved” and,, as “my little children.” This probably refers to believers in various churches located in the area where John was then living.

### What is the book of 1 John about?

False teachers were encouraging followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and to live in wrong ways. John wanted to challenge and correct those false teachings so that the people who received his letter would continue to believe the truth that they had been taught and live in right ways. The false teachers were saying that these people were not saved; John wanted to assure them that they were saved.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 John” or “First John.” They may also choose a different title, such as “The First Letter from John” or “The First Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Who were the people whom John spoke against?

The false teachers whom John was challenging seem to have held beliefs similar to what would later become known as Gnosticism. Those false teachers believed that the physical world was evil. They thought that God would not become human, since they considered the physical body to be evil, so they denied that Jesus was God come to earth in human form. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### “sin”

In chapter 1, John says that we should not deny that we have sinned. Rather, if we confess our sin, God will forgive us. In chapter 2, John says that he is writing this letter so that the recipients will not sin, but he adds that if they do sin, Jesus will advocate on their behalf. But in chapter 3, John says that everyone who has been begotten from God and who remains in God does not commit sin and is not able to sin. And in chapter 5, John says that we should not pray for people who are sinning in certain ways, although we should pray for people who are sinning in other ways. This may seem confusing and contradictory.

However, the explanation is that the people whose teachings John challenged and corrected in this letter were saying that it did not matter what people did in their bodies. This was because they thought that physical matter was evil, and so they thought that God did not care about it. In effect, they were saying that there was no such thing as sin. So John needed to say, in chapter 1, that sin is real and that everyone has sinned. Some of the believers may have been deceived by the false teaching and committed sins, so John also needed to reassure them that if they repented and confessed their sins, God would forgive them. John says similar things in chapter 2. Then in chapter 3 he explains that the new nature that believers have as children of God is one that does not want to sin and that does not enjoy sinning. So they should recognize that those who excuse or condone sin are not truly children of God, and that as children of God themselves, they can become more and more obedient and free from sin. Finally, in chapter 5, John warns that if a person sins wantonly and continually, this likely means that they have rejected Jesus and are not influenced by the Holy Spirit. He says that in that case, it may not be effective to pray for them. But he then encourages his readers that if a person sins occasionally but feels remorse, he is influenced by the Spirit, and so the prayers of other believers will help him repent and live in a right way again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]])

### “remain”

In this letter, John often uses the word “remain” (which could also be translated as “reside” or “abide”) as a spatial metaphor. John speaks of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if the teaching of Jesus “remained” in the believer. He speaks of a person being spiritually joined to someone else as if that person “remained” in the other person: He writes that Christians “remain” in Christ and in God, and he says that the Father “remains” in the Son, the Son “remains” in the Father, the Son “remains” in believers, and the Holy Spirit “remains” in believers.

Translators may find it difficult to represent these ideas in their own languages if they try to use exactly the same words and expressions each time. For example, in [2:6](../02/06.md), when John speaks of a believer “remaining” in God, he intends to express the idea of that believer being spiritually unified with God. Accordingly, UST speaks of how the believer “shares life with God.” To give another example, for the statement in [2:14](../02/14.md) that “the word of God remains in you,” UST says, “you continue to obey what God commands.” This shows how other expressions can be found that accurately communicate the various ideas that John is expressing through the term “remain.”

### “appear”

In several places in this letter, John uses a term that ULT usually translates as “appear.” This is actually a passive verbal form in Greek, but as is often the case with such forms in that language, it can have an active meaning. When it has an active meaning, it is important to recognize that it does not simply mean “seemed to be there,” as the word “appeared” might suggest. Rather, it means “came to be there.” This is illustrated well by the use of the term in another New Testament book, 2 Corinthians, in which Paul writes in [5:10](../2co/05/10.md) that “we must all appear before the judgment seat of Christ.” Clearly this does not mean that we must only seem to be present there. Rather, we must actually arrive there.

Throughout the epistle, it is a subtle matter of interpretation to decide whether John is using the term “appear” in an active sense or in a passive sense. For example, in [1:2](../01/02.md), John applies the term twice to the “Word of life,” that is, to Jesus. But it is not clear whether he is saying that Jesus himself “appeared,” that is, he came to earth, or that he “was made apparent” (made visible), with the emphasis on the idea that God revealed Jesus to the world and in the process revealed himself to the world through Jesus. At each place where John uses this term, notes will call attention to it and discuss what it likely means in that context.

### “the world”

John also uses the term “world” in a variety of senses in this letter. It can mean the earth, something material, the people who live in the world, the people who do not honor God, or the values of the people who do not honor God. Notes will address the meaning of the term “world” in each instance where John uses it.

### “to know”

The verb “to know” is used in two different ways in this letter. Sometimes it is used about knowing a fact, as in 3:2, 3:5, and 3:19. Sometimes it means to experience and understand someone or something, as in 3:1, 3:6, 3:16, and 3:20. Sometimes John uses it in two different senses in the same sentence, as in 2:3, “in this we know that we have known him.” Your language may have different words for these different meanings. If so, you must be careful to use the appropriate word in the right place in your translation.

### “We”

In most cases in this letter, the first-person plural pronouns (“we, our,” etc.) are inclusive, and so if your language marks that distinction, use the inclusive form in your translation. In those cases, John is speaking of what both he and the recipients know, or of things that are true of both him and the recipients. However, in a few cases, the first-person pronouns are exclusive, since John is telling the recipients what he and his fellow apostles saw and heard from Jesus. The notes will identify all such places, and in them you should use the exclusive forms, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

### “You, your”

The words “you” and “your” in this letter are plural.

### Light and darkness

In 1:5-7 and 2:8-11 John uses an extended metaphor in which light represents what is good or holy and darkness represents what is evil. If this is not easily understood in your language, you may need to say explicitly that light represents goodness or that light is like goodness, or you may choose to talk about goodness without using the symbol of light. There will be a note explaining the metaphor in each place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])

### Major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 John

When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate in its text, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1JN 1 intro ab9v 0 # 1 John 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Opening of the letter (1:1-4)
2. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–10, continues through 2:17)

## Important translation issues in this chapter

Like many Greek compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes this letter begins with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the middle of [1:3](../01/03.md). The parts of this sentence are not in the order that is customary in many languages. The direct object comes first, and it is very long, made up of many different clauses. The subject and verb do not come until near the end. And in the middle, there is a long digression. So it will be a challenge to translate.

One approach that might work well in your language would be to create a verse bridge that includes all of 1:1–3. You could break up this long sentence into several smaller sentences, repeating the subject and verb for clarity. This would allow you to present the parts of the sentence in an order that might be more customary in your language and that your readers might understand better. Here is an example of 1 John 1:1-3 rearranged into an order that might be clearer in your language:

“So that you will have fellowship with us, we are declaring to you what we have seen and heard. We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched. It has to do with the Word of life. Indeed, the life appeared, and we have seen it, and we are testifying to it. Yes, we are announcing to you the eternal life that was with the Father and that then came to us.”

If you take this approach, another way to translate the second sentence would be, “We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, what we have heard, what we have seen with our eyes, what we have looked at and our hands have touched.”

Another approach that could also work well, and which would not require a verse bridge, would be to leave the phrases in their present order, but to divide the sentence into three parts at the verse divisions. If you do that, you could also put your translation of the phrase “regarding the Word of life” at the beginning rather than the end of [1:1](../01/01.md) and present it as a topical introduction to the letter. Otherwise, your readers might not get the sense that this is a letter until they reached [1:4](../01/04.md), where John formally states his purpose for writing.

The notes to [1:1–4](../01/01.md) provide further specific suggestions for how to translate this long opening sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [1:4](../01/04.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “so that our joy may be fulfilled.” ULT follows that reading. However, some other ancient manuscripts read “your joy” instead of “our joy.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1JN front intro nl27 0 # Introduction to 1 John

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 1 John

This is a letter that the apostle John wrote to challenge and correct false teachings that were leading followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and live in wrong ways. At that time, the letter form had distinct opening and closing sections. The main body of the letter came in between.
1. Opening of Letter (1:1–4)
1. Main Body of Letter (1:5–5:12)
* Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–2:17)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18–2:27)
* Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28–3:10)
* Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11–18)
* Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19–24)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1–6)
* Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7–21)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1–12)
1. Closing of Letter (5:13–21)

### Who wrote the book of 1 John?

The author of this letter does not give his name. However, since early Christian times, the church has widely considered the apostle John to be the author. He wrote the Gospel of John, and there are many similarities between the content of that book and this letter. If John did write this letter, he probably did so near the end of his life.

### To whom was the book of 1 John written?

The author wrote this letter to people whom he addresses as “beloved” and,, as “my little children.” This probably refers to believers in various churches located in the area where John was then living.

### What is the book of 1 John about?

False teachers were encouraging followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and to live in wrong ways. John wanted to challenge and correct those false teachings so that the people who received his letter would continue to believe the truth that they had been taught and live in right ways. The false teachers were saying that these people were not saved; John wanted to assure them that they were saved.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 John” or “First John.” They may also choose a different title, such as “The First Letter from John” or “The First Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Who were the people whom John spoke against?

The false teachers whom John was challenging seem to have held beliefs similar to what would later become known as Gnosticism. Those false teachers believed that the physical world was evil. They thought that God would not become human, since they considered the physical body to be evil, so they denied that Jesus was God come to earth in human form. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### “sin”

In chapter 1, John says that we should not deny that we have sinned. Rather, if we confess our sin, God will forgive us. In chapter 2, John says that he is writing this letter so that the recipients will not sin, but he adds that if they do sin, Jesus will advocate on their behalf. But in chapter 3, John says that everyone who has been begotten from God and who remains in God does not commit sin and is not able to sin. And in chapter 5, John says that we should not pray for people who are sinning in certain ways, although we should pray for people who are sinning in other ways. This may seem confusing and contradictory.

However, the explanation is that the people whose teachings John challenged and corrected in this letter were saying that it did not matter what people did in their bodies. This was because they thought that physical matter was evil, and so they thought that God did not care about it. In effect, they were saying that there was no such thing as sin. So John needed to say, in chapter 1, that sin is real and that everyone has sinned. Some of the believers may have been deceived by the false teaching and committed sins, so John also needed to reassure them that if they repented and confessed their sins, God would forgive them. John says similar things in chapter 2. Then in chapter 3 he explains that the new nature that believers have as children of God is one that does not want to sin and that does not enjoy sinning. So they should recognize that those who excuse or condone sin are not truly children of God, and that as children of God themselves, they can become more and more obedient and free from sin. Finally, in chapter 5, John warns that if a person sins wantonly and continually, this likely means that they have rejected Jesus and are not influenced by the Holy Spirit. He says that in that case, it may not be effective to pray for them. But he then encourages his readers that if a person sins occasionally but feels remorse, he is influenced by the Spirit, and so the prayers of other believers will help him repent and live in a right way again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]])

### “remain”

In this letter, John often uses the word “remain” (which could also be translated as “reside” or “abide”) as a spatial metaphor. John speaks of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if the teaching of Jesus “remained” in the believer. He speaks of a person being spiritually joined to someone else as if that person “remained” in the other person: He writes that Christians “remain” in Christ and in God, and he says that the Father “remains” in the Son, the Son “remains” in the Father, the Son “remains” in believers, and the Holy Spirit “remains” in believers.

Translators may find it difficult to represent these ideas in their own languages if they try to use exactly the same words and expressions each time. For example, in [2:6](../02/06.md), when John speaks of a believer “remaining” in God, he intends to express the idea of that believer being spiritually unified with God. Accordingly, UST speaks of how the believer “shares life with God.” To give another example, for the statement in [2:14](../02/14.md) that “the word of God remains in you,” UST says, “you continue to obey what God commands.” This shows how other expressions can be found that accurately communicate the various ideas that John is expressing through the term “remain.”

### “appear”

In several places in this letter, John uses a term that ULT usually translates as “appear.” This is actually a passive verbal form in Greek, but as is often the case with such forms in that language, it can have an active meaning. When it has an active meaning, it is important to recognize that it does not simply mean “seemed to be there,” as the word “appeared” might suggest. Rather, it means “came to be there.” This is illustrated well by the use of the term in another New Testament book, 2 Corinthians, in which Paul writes in [5:10](../2co/05/10.md) that “we must all appear before the judgment seat of Christ.” Clearly this does not mean that we must only seem to be present there. Rather, we must actually arrive there.

Throughout the epistle, it is a subtle matter of interpretation to decide whether John is using the term “appear” in an active sense or in a passive sense. For example, in [1:2](../01/02.md), John applies the term twice to the “Word of life,” that is, to Jesus. But it is not clear whether he is saying that Jesus himself “appeared,” that is, he came to earth, or that he “was made apparent” (made visible), with the emphasis on the idea that God revealed Jesus to the world and in the process revealed himself to the world through Jesus. At each place where John uses this term, notes will call attention to it and discuss what it likely means in that context.

### “the world”

John also uses the term “world” in a variety of senses in this letter. It can mean the earth, something material, the people who live in the world, the people who do not honor God, or the values of the people who do not honor God. Notes will address the meaning of the term “world” in each instance where John uses it.

### “to know”

The verb “to know” is used in two different ways in this letter. Sometimes it is used about knowing a fact, as in 3:2, 3:5, and 3:19. Sometimes it means to experience and understand someone or something, as in 3:1, 3:6, 3:16, and 3:20. Sometimes John uses it in two different senses in the same sentence, as in 2:3, “in this we know that we have known him.” Your language may have different words for these different meanings. If so, you must be careful to use the appropriate word in the right place in your translation.

### “We”

In most cases in this letter, the first-person plural pronouns (“we, our,” etc.) are inclusive, and so if your language marks that distinction, use the inclusive form in your translation. In those cases, John is speaking of what both he and the recipients know, or of things that are true of both him and the recipients. However, in a few cases, the first-person pronouns are exclusive, since John is telling the recipients what he and his fellow apostles saw and heard from Jesus. The notes will identify all such places, and in them you should use the exclusive forms, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

### “You, your”

The words “you” and “your” in this letter are plural.

### Light and darkness

In 1:5–7 and 2:8–11 John uses an extended metaphor in which light represents what is good or holy and darkness represents what is evil. If this is not easily understood in your language, you may need to say explicitly that light represents goodness or that light is like goodness, or you may choose to talk about goodness without using the symbol of light. There will be a note explaining the metaphor in each place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])

### Major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 John

When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate in its text, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1JN 1 intro ab9v 0 # 1 John 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Opening of the letter (1:1–4)
2. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5–10, continues through 2:17)

## Important translation issues in this chapter

Like many Greek compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes this letter begins with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the middle of [1:3](../01/03.md). The parts of this sentence are not in the order that is customary in many languages. The direct object comes first, and it is very long, made up of many different clauses. The subject and verb do not come until near the end. And in the middle, there is a long digression. So it will be a challenge to translate.

One approach that might work well in your language would be to create a verse bridge that includes all of 1:1–3. You could break up this long sentence into several smaller sentences, repeating the subject and verb for clarity. This would allow you to present the parts of the sentence in an order that might be more customary in your language and that your readers might understand better. Here is an example of 1 John 1:1–3 rearranged into an order that might be clearer in your language:

“So that you will have fellowship with us, we are declaring to you what we have seen and heard. We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched. It has to do with the Word of life. Indeed, the life appeared, and we have seen it, and we are testifying to it. Yes, we are announcing to you the eternal life that was with the Father and that then came to us.”

If you take this approach, another way to translate the second sentence would be, “We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, what we have heard, what we have seen with our eyes, what we have looked at and our hands have touched.”

Another approach that could also work well, and which would not require a verse bridge, would be to leave the phrases in their present order, but to divide the sentence into three parts at the verse divisions. If you do that, you could also put your translation of the phrase “regarding the Word of life” at the beginning rather than the end of [1:1](../01/01.md) and present it as a topical introduction to the letter. Otherwise, your readers might not get the sense that this is a letter until they reached [1:4](../01/04.md), where John formally states his purpose for writing.

The notes to [1:1–4](../01/01.md) provide further specific suggestions for how to translate this long opening sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [1:4](../01/04.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “so that our joy may be fulfilled.” ULT follows that reading. However, some other ancient manuscripts read “your joy” instead of “our joy.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 1 1 honh checking/headings 0 If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 1. Suggested heading: “The Word of Life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 1JN 1 1 j363 writing-pronouns ὃ ἦν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς, ὃ ἀκηκόαμεν, ὃ ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν, ὃ ἐθεασάμεθα, καὶ αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν, περὶ τοῦ λόγου τῆς ζωῆς— 1 What was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter for how to translate the long sentence in [1:1–3](../01/01.md). If you follow the suggestion to translate the phrase **regarding the Word of life** as a topical introduction to this letter, you will already have indicated that the four clauses in this verse refer to a person, Jesus. If you have pronouns in your language that refer to people, such as “he,” “who,” and “whom,” it would be appropriate to use them here. Alternate translation: “Regarding the Word of life—he is the one who has existed from all eternity, whom we heard speak, whom we saw with our own eyes, and whom we looked at and touched with our own hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 1 1 j364 figs-idiom ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 from the beginning John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to the fact that Jesus has always existed. Alternate translation: “from all eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -153,14 +153,14 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 2 11 j080 grammar-connect-logic-result οὐκ οἶδεν ποῦ ὑπάγει, ὅτι ἡ σκοτία ἐτύφλωσεν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 he does not know where he is going, because the darkness has blinded his eyes If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because the darkness has blinded his eyes, he does not know where he is going” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1JN 2 11 y5cs figs-metaphor οὐκ οἶδεν ποῦ ὑπάγει 1 he does not know where he is going This is a continuation of the metaphor of walking as a figurative description of how a person lives and behaves. Alternate translation: “he does not know the right way to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 11 j081 figs-metaphor ὅτι ἡ σκοτία ἐτύφλωσεν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 because the darkness has blinded his eyes John is using blindness to mean a loss of moral sense. Alternate translation: “because his evil thoughts are keeping him from knowing right and wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 12 in8n figs-metaphor τεκνία 1 little children The term **little children** here could refer to: (1) all of the believers to whom John is writing. This is the way that he uses this term in [2:1](../02/01.md) and in several other places in this letter. See the explanation of it in two of the notes to [2:1](../02/01.md). If that is the sense, then John divides the believers into only two groups in verses 12-14, the older ones and the younger ones. See the UST. Or it could refer to: (2) only some of the believers. In that case, John is addressing the believers in three different groups in verses 12-14, and this group would represent new believers, that is, those who have very recently put their faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of their sins. This would also apply to the similar term in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “new believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1JN 2 12 in8n figs-metaphor τεκνία 1 little children The term **little children** here could refer to: (1) all of the believers to whom John is writing. This is the way that he uses this term in [2:1](../02/01.md) and in several other places in this letter. See the explanation of it in two of the notes to [2:1](../02/01.md). If that is the sense, then John divides the believers into only two groups in verses 12–14, the older ones and the younger ones. See the UST. Or it could refer to: (2) only some of the believers. In that case, John is addressing the believers in three different groups in verses 12–14, and this group would represent new believers, that is, those who have very recently put their faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of their sins. This would also apply to the similar term in [2:14](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “new believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 12 y00g ὅτι 1 The word translated as **because** here could also be translated as “that.” In other words, what follows this word could be either: (1) the reason that John is writing or (2) the content that John wants to communicate. This also applies to the same phrase that is used several times in verses 13 and 14. Alternate translation: “that” 1JN 2 12 ed41 figs-activepassive ἀφέωνται ὑμῖν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 1 your sins have been forgiven If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who has done the action. Alternate translation: “God has forgiven your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 2 12 j082 writing-pronouns διὰ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 because of his name The pronoun **his** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “because of the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 2 12 yjy8 figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 because of his name John is using the **name** of Jesus to represent who Jesus is and what he has done. Alternate translation: “on account of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 2 13 kue2 figs-metaphor πατέρες 1 fathers The term **fathers** here is likely a figurative description of one part of the believers. In that case, it could mean either: (1) “mature believers” or (2) “church leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 13 y1vm ἐγνώκατε 1 you know As in [2:4](../02/04.md), John is using the word **know** in a specific sense. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “you know very well” -1JN 2 13 wmt8 figs-idiom τὸν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 the one who is from the beginning John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to Jesus or possibly to God the Father. John refers to Jesus with these same words at the beginning of this letter and in a similar way in John 1:1-2. Alternate translation: “him who has always existed” or “Jesus, who has always existed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1JN 2 13 wmt8 figs-idiom τὸν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 the one who is from the beginning John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to Jesus or possibly to God the Father. John refers to Jesus with these same words at the beginning of this letter and in a similar way in John 1:1–2. Alternate translation: “him who has always existed” or “Jesus, who has always existed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 2 13 wg4v figs-metaphor νεανίσκοι 1 young men Here, **young men** is likely a figurative description of a part of the group of believers. It probably refers to people who have become strong in their faith, even if they are not yet as mature as those in the group of **fathers**, since **young men** are in the time of life when they are strong and vigorous. Alternate translation: “strong believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 13 j083 figs-gendernotations νεανίσκοι 1 young men Although the term **men** is masculine, John is likely using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “strong believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1JN 2 13 tfh1 figs-metaphor νενικήκατε τὸν πονηρόν 1 you have overcome the evil one John speaks of these strong believers refusing to do what the devil wants them to do as if they had defeated him in a struggle. Alternate translation: “you refuse to do what the devil wants you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 2 14 j091 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 1JN 2 14 j092 figs-metaphor πατέρες 1 fathers The term **fathers** likely has the same figurative meaning as in [2:13](../02/13.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: (1) “mature believers” or (2) “church leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 14 j093 ἐγνώκατε 2 you know As in [2:4](../02/04.md), [2:13](../02/13.md), and earlier in this verse, John is using the word **know** in a specific sense. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “you are very close with” -1JN 2 14 j094 figs-idiom τὸν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 the one who is from the beginning John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to Jesus or possibly to God the Father. John refers to Jesus with these same words at the beginning of this letter, in [2:13](../02/13.md), and in a similar way in John 1:1-2. Alternate translation: “him who has always existed” or “Jesus, who has always existed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1JN 2 14 j094 figs-idiom τὸν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 the one who is from the beginning John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to Jesus or possibly to God the Father. John refers to Jesus with these same words at the beginning of this letter, in [2:13](../02/13.md), and in a similar way in John 1:1–2. Alternate translation: “him who has always existed” or “Jesus, who has always existed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 2 14 j095 figs-metaphor νεανίσκοι 1 young men The term **young men** likely has the same figurative meaning here as in [2:13](../02/13.md). Alternate translation: “strong believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 14 j096 figs-gendernotations νεανίσκοι 1 young men Although the term **men** is masculine, John is likely using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “strong believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 1JN 2 14 l74j figs-metaphor ἰσχυροί ἐστε 1 you are strong John is using the word **strong** not literally to describe believers’ physical strength, but to describe their faithfulness to Jesus. Alternate translation: “you are faithful to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 4 21 j298 writing-pronouns ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 from him The pronoun **him** refers to God. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 4 21 jrd1 figs-genericnoun ὁ ἀγαπῶν τὸν Θεὸν 1 Here, **the one** refers to anyone who loves God. Alternate translation: “anyone who loves God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1JN 4 21 j299 figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his brother See how you translated **his brother** in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “each fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 5 intro bxm4 0 # 1 John 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1–12)
2. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “a sin towards death”

It is not entirely clear what John means by this phrase. The word “death” could refer either to physical death or to spiritual death, which is eternal separation from God. See the further discussion in the notes to [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])

### “the whole world lies in the power of the evil one”

The phrase “the evil one” refers to Satan. God has allowed him to rule the world, but, ultimately, God is in control over everything. God keeps his children safe from the evil one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [5:7–8](../05/07.md), all ancient manuscripts say: “For there are three who testify, the Spirit and the water and the blood, and the three are unto the one.” That is the reading that ULT follows. Some much later manuscripts say: “For there are three who testify in heaven: the Father, the Word, and the Holy Spirit, and these three are one; and there are three who testify on earth: the Spirit and the water and the blood, and these three are unto the one.” In this case, translators are advised to translate this as the ULT text does, since there is wide agreement that it follows the accurate reading. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in your region that have the longer reading, you could include it, but you should put it inside square brackets [ ] and indicate in a footnote that it was most likely not in the original version of 1 John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1JN 5 intro bxm4 0 # 1 John 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1–12)
2. Closing of Letter (5:13–21)

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “a sin towards death”

It is not entirely clear what John means by this phrase. The word “death” could refer either to physical death or to spiritual death, which is eternal separation from God. See the further discussion in the notes to [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])

### “the whole world lies in the power of the evil one”

The phrase “the evil one” refers to Satan. God has allowed him to rule the world, but, ultimately, God is in control over everything. God keeps his children safe from the evil one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [5:7–8](../05/07.md), all ancient manuscripts say: “For there are three who testify, the Spirit and the water and the blood, and the three are unto the one.” That is the reading that ULT follows. Some much later manuscripts say: “For there are three who testify in heaven: the Father, the Word, and the Holy Spirit, and these three are one; and there are three who testify on earth: the Spirit and the water and the blood, and these three are unto the one.” In this case, translators are advised to translate this as the ULT text does, since there is wide agreement that it follows the accurate reading. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in your region that have the longer reading, you could include it, but you should put it inside square brackets [ ] and indicate in a footnote that it was most likely not in the original version of 1 John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 5 1 ex42 checking/headings 0 If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 1. Suggested heading: “Jesus is the Messiah and Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/checking/headings]]) 1JN 5 1 j300 ὁ Χριστὸς 1 the Christ **Christ** is the Greek word for “Messiah.” Alternate translation: “the Messiah” 1JN 5 1 j301 figs-activepassive πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἐστιν ὁ Χριστὸς, ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ γεγέννηται 1 Everyone who believes that Jesus is the Christ has been begotten from God See how you translated the similar expression in [2:29](../02/29.md). Alternate translation: “God is the father of everyone who believes that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv index 485d9d1ea3..d43576089f 100644 --- a/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_64-2JN.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -2JN front intro vpa9 0 # Introduction to 2 John

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 John

1. Opening of letter (1:1-3)
2. Encouragement and the commandment to love one another (1:4-6)
3. Warning about false teachers (1:7-11)
4. Closing of letter (1:12-13)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 John?

The author of this letter identifies himself only as “the elder.” However, the content of 2 John is similar to the content in John’s gospel. This suggests that the apostle John wrote this letter, and he would have done so near the end of his life.

### To whom was the Book of 2 John written?

The author addresses this letter to someone he calls “the chosen lady” and to “her children” (1:1). Although this could refer to a specific woman and her children, that interpretation is unlikely. More probably, this is a figurative way to refer to a specific congregation and its members. This interpretation is supported by the way that John refers to the congregation with him as “the children of your chosen sister” in verse 13. This would be a readily understandable metaphor, since the word for “church” in Greek is a feminine noun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### What is the book of 2 John about?

It appears that John addressed this letter to a specific congregation of believers. John’s purpose in writing this letter to them was to warn his audience about false teachers. John did not want believers helping or giving money to false teachers.

He probably intended this message to be passed on to all believers in general.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 John” or “Second John.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Second Letter from John” or “The Second Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is hospitality?

Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. John wanted believers to offer hospitality to guests. However, he did not want believers to offer hospitality to false teachers.

### Who were the people John spoke against?

The people John spoke against may have been those who later became known as Gnostics. These people believed that the physical world was evil. Since the physical body was seen as evil, they did not think that God could become human. Therefore, they believed that Jesus was divine but denied that he was human. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the Book of 2 John?

In [1:12](../01/12.md), most modern versions of the Bible read “our joy.” There is another traditional reading that says “your joy.” If a version of the Bible already exists in your region, you should consider using the reading of that version in your translation. If not, you may wish to follow the reading that most Bible scholars consider to be authentic and say “our joy.” In this case, “our” would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2JN front intro vpa9 0 # Introduction to 2 John

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 John

1. Opening of letter (1:1–3)
2. Encouragement and the commandment to love one another (1:4–6)
3. Warning about false teachers (1:7–11)
4. Closing of letter (1:12–13)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 John?

The author of this letter identifies himself only as “the elder.” However, the content of 2 John is similar to the content in John’s gospel. This suggests that the apostle John wrote this letter, and he would have done so near the end of his life.

### To whom was the Book of 2 John written?

The author addresses this letter to someone he calls “the chosen lady” and to “her children” (1:1). Although this could refer to a specific woman and her children, that interpretation is unlikely. More probably, this is a figurative way to refer to a specific congregation and its members. This interpretation is supported by the way that John refers to the congregation with him as “the children of your chosen sister” in verse 13. This would be a readily understandable metaphor, since the word for “church” in Greek is a feminine noun. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### What is the book of 2 John about?

It appears that John addressed this letter to a specific congregation of believers. John’s purpose in writing this letter to them was to warn his audience about false teachers. John did not want believers helping or giving money to false teachers.

He probably intended this message to be passed on to all believers in general.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 John” or “Second John.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Second Letter from John” or “The Second Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is hospitality?

Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. John wanted believers to offer hospitality to guests. However, he did not want believers to offer hospitality to false teachers.

### Who were the people John spoke against?

The people John spoke against may have been those who later became known as Gnostics. These people believed that the physical world was evil. Since the physical body was seen as evil, they did not think that God could become human. Therefore, they believed that Jesus was divine but denied that he was human. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the Book of 2 John?

In [1:12](../01/12.md), most modern versions of the Bible read “our joy.” There is another traditional reading that says “your joy.” If a version of the Bible already exists in your region, you should consider using the reading of that version in your translation. If not, you may wish to follow the reading that most Bible scholars consider to be authentic and say “our joy.” In this case, “our” would include both John and the letter recipients. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 2JN 1 1 uspy figs-123person ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you could use the first person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “I, the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 2JN 1 1 z4tk figs-explicit ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder **The elder** likely means John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as **elder** either because of his old age, or because he is a leader in the church, or both. If you have a term for an older, respected leader, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “I, John, am writing this letter” or Alternate translation: “I, John the elder, am writing this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2JN 1 1 y7hw figs-123person ἐκλεκτῇ κυρίᾳ καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις αὐτῆς 1 to the chosen lady and her children In this culture, letter writers would name the addressees next, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you could use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “to you, chosen lady, and to your children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2JN 1 6 nw4g figs-metaphor περιπατῶμεν κατὰ…ἐν αὐτῇ περιπατῆτε 1 we should walk according to … you should walk in In these instances the expression **walk** means to “obey.” Alternate translation: “we should obey … you should obey it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2JN 1 6 cl95 figs-you ἠκούσατε…περιπατῆτε 1 you heard … you should walk The term **you** is plural in this verse, because John is addressing a congregation of believers. This is the case throughout the rest of the letter, as well, except in verse 13, because there John returns to his metaphor of referring to a church as a woman and its members as her children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 2JN 1 7 u749 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 For Here, **For** introduces the reason why John wrote about the commandment to love and obey God in the previous verses—it is because there are many who pretend to be believers but they do not love or obey God. Use a natural way to introduce this reason in your language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -2JN 1 7 w25m figs-explicit ὅτι πολλοὶ πλάνοι ἐξῆλθαν εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 For many deceivers have gone out into the world This seems to be an implicit reference to the false teachers whom John discusses in [verses 10-11](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “For many deceivers are going around from place to place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2JN 1 7 w25m figs-explicit ὅτι πολλοὶ πλάνοι ἐξῆλθαν εἰς τὸν κόσμον 1 For many deceivers have gone out into the world This seems to be an implicit reference to the false teachers whom John discusses in [verses 10–11](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “For many deceivers are going around from place to place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2JN 1 7 x8yl figs-metonymy Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν ἐρχόμενον ἐν σαρκί 1 Jesus Christ coming in flesh The expression **coming in flesh** is a metonym for being a real, physical person and not a spiritual being only. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ came as a real human” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2JN 1 7 vqnb figs-explicit οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πλάνος καὶ ὁ ἀντίχριστος 1 This is the deceiver and the antichrist Here, **this** could refer to: (1) the activity of deceiving others or to the kind of teaching that these people are doing. Alternate translation: “This is the work of the deceiver, the antichrist” or “This kind of teaching comes from the one who is the deceiver and the antichrist” (2) any member of the group of deceivers. Alternate translation: “Any such person is the deceiver and the antichrist” If it would be helpful, you could make one of these meanings explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2JN 1 7 vfdn ὁ πλάνος καὶ ὁ ἀντίχριστος 1 the deceiver and the antichrist In your translation, it may be helpful to clarify that **the deceiver** and **the antichrist** are one person, not two. diff --git a/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv b/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv index cbf438155b..65275cdbf4 100644 --- a/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -3JN front intro kwv9 0 # Introduction to 3 John\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 3 John\n\n1. Introduction (1:1)\n2. Encouragement and instructions to show hospitality (1:2-8)\n3. Diotrephes and Demetrius (1:9-12)\n4. Conclusion (1:13-14)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 3 John?\n\nThe letter does not give the name of the author. The author only identified himself as **The elder** (1:1). The letter was probably written by the apostle John near the end of his life.\n\n### What is the Book of 3 John about?\n\nJohn wrote this letter to a believer named Gaius. He instructed Gaius to be hospitable to fellow believers who were traveling through his area.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “3 John” or “Third John.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Third Letter from John” or “The Third Letter John Wrote”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is hospitality?\n\nHospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. In 2 John, John discouraged Christians from showing hospitality to false teachers. In 3 John, John encouraged Christians to show hospitality to faithful teachers.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### How does the author use family relationships in his letter?\n\nThe author used the terms **brother** and **children** in a way that can be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **brothers** to refer to Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to Christians. Also, John called some believers his **children**. These were believers he taught to obey Christ.\n\nJohn also used the term **Gentile** in a way that could be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **Gentile** to refer to people who are not Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to those who did not believe in Jesus. +3JN front intro kwv9 0 # Introduction to 3 John\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 3 John\n\n1. Introduction (1:1)\n2. Encouragement and instructions to show hospitality (1:2–8)\n3. Diotrephes and Demetrius (1:9–12)\n4. Conclusion (1:13–14)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 3 John?\n\nThe letter does not give the name of the author. The author only identified himself as **The elder** (1:1). The letter was probably written by the apostle John near the end of his life.\n\n### What is the Book of 3 John about?\n\nJohn wrote this letter to a believer named Gaius. He instructed Gaius to be hospitable to fellow believers who were traveling through his area.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “3 John” or “Third John.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Third Letter from John” or “The Third Letter John Wrote”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is hospitality?\n\nHospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. In 2 John, John discouraged Christians from showing hospitality to false teachers. In 3 John, John encouraged Christians to show hospitality to faithful teachers.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### How does the author use family relationships in his letter?\n\nThe author used the terms **brother** and **children** in a way that can be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **brothers** to refer to Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to Christians. Also, John called some believers his **children**. These were believers he taught to obey Christ.\n\nJohn also used the term **Gentile** in a way that could be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **Gentile** to refer to people who are not Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to those who did not believe in Jesus. 3JN 1 1 rni7 figs-you 0 General Information: This is a personal letter from John to Gaius. All instances of **you** and **your** refer to Gaius and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 3JN 1 1 w99t figs-explicit ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder **The elder** refers to John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as the **elder** either because of his old age or because he is a leader in the church. The name of the author can be made explicit: “I, John the elder, am writing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3JN 1 1 lls6 translate-names Γαΐῳ 1 to … Gaius **Gaius** is a fellow believer to whom John is writing this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) diff --git a/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv b/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv index 8b32f70cac..a065e891b9 100644 --- a/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv +++ b/en_tn_66-JUD.tsv @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ JUD 1 4 qevn figs-ellipsis παρεισέδυσαν γάρ τινες ἄνθρ JUD 1 4 wwz3 figs-activepassive οἱ πάλαι προγεγραμμένοι εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίμα 1 who long ago have been designated beforehand for this condemnation If your language does not use this passive form **having been designated, you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “men whom God long ago designated beforehand for this condemnation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JUD 1 4 c7a6 figs-abstractnouns εἰς τοῦτο τὸ κρίμα 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **condemnation** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “to be condemned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JUD 1 4 u2oj figs-explicit ἀσεβεῖς 1 Here, **ungodly ones** refers to the “certain men” mentioned at the beginning of the verse. They are the false teachers Jude is warning his readers about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this term explicitly. Alternate translation: “ungodly false teachers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JUD 1 4 c642 figs-metaphor τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν χάριτα μετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν 1 Here, God’s **grace** is spoken of as if it were a thing that could be changed into something sinful. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate this in a non-figurative way. The false teachers were teaching that believers could do sexually immoral acts because God’s grace allowed it. Paul addressed this kind of false teaching when he wrote in Romans 6:1-2a: “Should we continue in sin so that grace may abound? May it never be!” Alternate translation: “teaching that God’s grace permits licentiousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JUD 1 4 c642 figs-metaphor τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν χάριτα μετατιθέντες εἰς ἀσέλγειαν 1 Here, God’s **grace** is spoken of as if it were a thing that could be changed into something sinful. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate this in a non-figurative way. The false teachers were teaching that believers could do sexually immoral acts because God’s grace allowed it. Paul addressed this kind of false teaching when he wrote in Romans 6:1–2a: “Should we continue in sin so that grace may abound? May it never be!” Alternate translation: “teaching that God’s grace permits licentiousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JUD 1 4 g35s figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμῶν 1 Both occurrences of **our** in this verse refer to all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) JUD 1 4 esef figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν χάριτα 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the kind acts of our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JUD 1 4 tmju figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἀσέλγειαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **licentiousness** with an adjective phrase. Alternate translation: “into licentious behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From f61dc1faa61b3c98a48ecef556f9196b914d8f3d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 10:18:05 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 412/446] Stray hyphens between numbers --- en_tn_53-1TH.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_55-1TI.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 2 +- 3 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv index aac9fca69a..dd5343ffc3 100644 --- a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 1 10 pt1s figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 the one rescuing us This is an inclusive use of **us**, including Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, and the Thessalonians–and by extension—all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “all of us Christians” or “we who trust in Christ” or “all of us believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 1 10 g3zz figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 Here, **wrath** is an abstract noun referring to the destined **coming** of God’s future and final Judgment. If it is clearer in your language, you could translate this as a verb form. Alternate translation: “from the future time when God punishes those who do not trust in him” or “when God will certainly punish those who worship idols” or “from God’s impending judgment” (See: [What is the “second coming” of Jesus?](../front/intro)) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 1 10 cx5g figs-metaphor τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 Paul speaks of **wrath** as though it were something that could travel and is **coming** to where people are. He means by this that in the future an event will happen when God will act wrathfully against people who have sinned and who have not trusted in Jesus to forgive their sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment that will happen” or “when God will punish people for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 2 intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 2 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 2

1. Apostolic Suffering (2:1–13)
* Apostolic preaching (2:1–6)
* Apostolic conduct (2:7–9)
* Apostolic witness (2:10–3)
2. Persecution of the Church (2:14–16)
* Thessalonian persecution (2:14a)
* Jewish persecution (2:14b-16)
3. Paul’s Desire to Visit (2:17–20)

## Structure and Formatting

The first part of this chapter is a defense of their apostleship and sufferings. The second part is a recounting of the Thessalonian church’s sufferings. Lastly, the apostle Paul makes known his deep desire to visit the Thessalonian church.

## “We” and “You”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Apostolic witness

Here, Paul defends how he, Silvanus, and Timothy are God’s apostles. By their preaching, conduct, and witness, they prove to be authorized messengers of Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]])

### The gospel of God

The foundation of the apostolic witness is that they were “entrusted with the gospel” (See [2:4](../02/04.md)).The apostles’ authority makes them: “bold to speak” (See [2:2](../02/02.md)), “impart” (See [2:8](../02/08.md)), “preach” (See [2:9](../02/09.md)), and thank God that the Thessalonian church “received the word of God” (See [2:13](../02/13.md)).

### The Second Coming of Christ

In this chapter is the first mention of the Second Coming of Christ in its two facets. First, Paul mentions that the persecutors of Christ’s Church will be judged by using the phrase “wrath has come upon them” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Next, Paul speaks of the “hope” and “joy” and “glory” for those who will “be saved” (See [2:16](../02/16.md)) “in the presence of our Lord Jesus Christ at his coming” (See [2:19–20](../02/19.md)). +1TH 2 intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 2 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 2

1. Apostolic Suffering (2:1–13)
* Apostolic preaching (2:1–6)
* Apostolic conduct (2:7–9)
* Apostolic witness (2:10–3)
2. Persecution of the Church (2:14–16)
* Thessalonian persecution (2:14a)
* Jewish persecution (2:14b–16)
3. Paul’s Desire to Visit (2:17–20)

## Structure and Formatting

The first part of this chapter is a defense of their apostleship and sufferings. The second part is a recounting of the Thessalonian church’s sufferings. Lastly, the apostle Paul makes known his deep desire to visit the Thessalonian church.

## “We” and “You”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special Concepts in this Chapter

### Apostolic witness

Here, Paul defends how he, Silvanus, and Timothy are God’s apostles. By their preaching, conduct, and witness, they prove to be authorized messengers of Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]])

### The gospel of God

The foundation of the apostolic witness is that they were “entrusted with the gospel” (See [2:4](../02/04.md)).The apostles’ authority makes them: “bold to speak” (See [2:2](../02/02.md)), “impart” (See [2:8](../02/08.md)), “preach” (See [2:9](../02/09.md)), and thank God that the Thessalonian church “received the word of God” (See [2:13](../02/13.md)).

### The Second Coming of Christ

In this chapter is the first mention of the Second Coming of Christ in its two facets. First, Paul mentions that the persecutors of Christ’s Church will be judged by using the phrase “wrath has come upon them” in [2:16](../02/16.md). Next, Paul speaks of the “hope” and “joy” and “glory” for those who will “be saved” (See [2:16](../02/16.md)) “in the presence of our Lord Jesus Christ at his coming” (See [2:19–20](../02/19.md)). 1TH 2 1 ii5j grammar-connect-words-phrases αὐτοὶ γὰρ οἴδατε, ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **For you yourselves know, brothers** functions as a chapter transition into the next topic, the apostles’ suffering. You could emphasize this if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “Certainly, you are fully aware” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 2 1 gpr4 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ…οἴδατε 1 you yourselves know The words **you** and **yourselves** refer to the Thessalonian church. Paul uses this emphasis to express how well the Thessalonians understand the benefit of the apostles’ previous visit. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “you fully realize” or “you personally understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 2 1 tdl3 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Throughout this letter, **brothers** is a metaphor meaning “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See [1:4](../01/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what **brothers** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) diff --git a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv index 4d93c1868a..37d8c97b96 100644 --- a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -1TI front intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Timothy

In this letter, Paul alternates between personal commands to Timothy that empower him to act as his representative and with his authority, and instructions for how followers of Jesus should live in community.

1. Greetings (1:1–2)
2. Paul commands Timothy to tell people not to teach false doctrines (1:3–20)
3. Paul gives instructions about how to re-establish order and decency in the church (2:1–15)
4. Paul gives instructions about how to ensure that elders and deacons are properly qualified (3:1–13)
5. Paul commands Timothy regarding his own personal conduct (3:14–5:2)
6. Paul gives instructions to ensure church support for worthy widows (5:3–16) and elders (5:17–20)
7. Paul commands Timothy that he must be impartial (5:21–25)
8. Paul gives instructions to ensure order in master-servant relationships (6:1–2a)
9. Paul commands Timothy regarding how he should teach and conduct himself (6:2b-16)
10. Paul gives instructions for how people who are rich should live (6:17–19)
11. Paul commands Timothy to guard what has been entrusted to his care (6:20–21a)
12. Closing blessing to the whole church (6:21b)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Timothy?

A man named Paul wrote 1 Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul may have written other letters to Timothy, but this is the earliest one that we still have. That is why it is known as 1 Timothy or First Timothy. Timothy was Paul’s disciple and close friend. Paul probably wrote this letter near the end of his life.

### What is the Book of 1 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed included church worship, qualifications for church leaders, and warnings against false teachers. This letter shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches while Timothy himself trained other leaders.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its customary title, “1 Timothy” or “First Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is discipleship?

Discipleship is the process of making people to be disciples of Christ. The goal of discipleship is to encourage other Christians to be more like Christ. This letter gives many instructions about how a leader should train a less mature Christian. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 Timothy?

In [6:5](../06/05.md), the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1TI front intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Timothy

In this letter, Paul alternates between personal commands to Timothy that empower him to act as his representative and with his authority, and instructions for how followers of Jesus should live in community.

1. Greetings (1:1–2)
2. Paul commands Timothy to tell people not to teach false doctrines (1:3–20)
3. Paul gives instructions about how to re-establish order and decency in the church (2:1–15)
4. Paul gives instructions about how to ensure that elders and deacons are properly qualified (3:1–13)
5. Paul commands Timothy regarding his own personal conduct (3:14–5:2)
6. Paul gives instructions to ensure church support for worthy widows (5:3–16) and elders (5:17–20)
7. Paul commands Timothy that he must be impartial (5:21–25)
8. Paul gives instructions to ensure order in master-servant relationships (6:1–2a)
9. Paul commands Timothy regarding how he should teach and conduct himself (6:2b–16)
10. Paul gives instructions for how people who are rich should live (6:17–19)
11. Paul commands Timothy to guard what has been entrusted to his care (6:20–21a)
12. Closing blessing to the whole church (6:21b)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Timothy?

A man named Paul wrote 1 Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul may have written other letters to Timothy, but this is the earliest one that we still have. That is why it is known as 1 Timothy or First Timothy. Timothy was Paul’s disciple and close friend. Paul probably wrote this letter near the end of his life.

### What is the Book of 1 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed included church worship, qualifications for church leaders, and warnings against false teachers. This letter shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches while Timothy himself trained other leaders.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its customary title, “1 Timothy” or “First Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is discipleship?

Discipleship is the process of making people to be disciples of Christ. The goal of discipleship is to encourage other Christians to be more like Christ. This letter gives many instructions about how a leader should train a less mature Christian. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 Timothy?

In [6:5](../06/05.md), the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1TI 1 intro a4v2 0 # 1 Timothy 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1–2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Metaphor

In this chapter Paul speaks of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.” 1TI 1 1 i3zz Παῦλος 1 Paul In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Immediately after introducing the writer, you might also want to indicate to whom the letter was written. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am the one writing this letter to you, Timothy” 1TI 1 1 xl6d κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν Θεοῦ 1 by the command of God Alternate translation: “by the authority of God” diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index 778f65d36b..bfe0529f8a 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 1 18 f3ep figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 in that day The expression **that day** refers to the day when God will judge all people; at that time they will receive mercy from the Lord, as Paul mentions, or wrath. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 1 18 p024 translate-names Ἐφέσῳ 1 Ephesus This is the name of a city, the place where Timothy, the recipient of the letter, is located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 18 p025 figs-explicit ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well Paul is reminding Timothy that Onesiphorus helped him earlier, in Ephesus. So, Paul is asking the Lord to bless Onesiphorus because he helped Paul several times. Alternate translation: “you know well how much he also helped me earlier when I was in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 2 intro k3zn 0 # 2 Timothy 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 11b-13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### We will reign with him

Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Analogies

In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house. +2TI 2 intro k3zn 0 # 2 Timothy 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 11b–13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### We will reign with him

Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Analogies

In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house. 2TI 2 1 bll5 figs-metaphor τέκνον μου 1 my child Here, **child** is a term of great love and approval. Timothy is not Paul’s biological child. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so this is why Paul considered him like his own child. Alternate translation: “who are like my child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 1 p026 figs-activepassive ἐνδυναμοῦ 1 be strengthened you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “let God make you strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 2 1 e6ex figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ χάριτι τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the grace that is in Christ Jesus Paul wants Timothy to experience the strength that God provides through his **grace** or kindness. Believers experience God’s grace through knowing Jesus Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “as you allow Christ Jesus to kindly empower you through your relationship to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From e1961512a496de22c0f62a65076e1deee08ce0a5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 14:37:12 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 413/446] Edit 'en_tn_57-TIT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index c8e8352663..29d94301d9 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote TIT front intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Titus

1. Paul instructs Titus to appoint godly leaders. (1:1–16)
2. Paul instructs Titus to train people to live godly lives. (2:1–3:11)
3. Paul ends by sharing some of his plans and sending greetings to various believers. (3:12–15)

### Who wrote the book of Titus?

Paul wrote the book of Titus. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

### What is the book of Titus about?

Paul wrote this letter to Titus, his fellow worker, who was leading the churches on the island of Crete. Paul instructed him about selecting church leaders. Paul also described how the believers should behave towards each other. He also encouraged them all to live in a way that pleases God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Titus.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Titus” or “A Letter to Titus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### In what roles can people serve within the church?

There are some teachings in the book of Titus about whether a woman or divorced man can serve in positions of leadership within the church. Scholars disagree about the meaning of these teachings. Further study on these issues may be necessary before translating this book.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural **you**

In this book, the word **I** refers to Paul. Also, the word **you** is almost always singular and refers to Titus. The exception to this is 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What is the meaning of **God our Savior**?

This is a common phrase in this letter. Paul meant to make the readers think about how God forgave them in Christ for sinning against him, and by forgiving them he saved them from being punished when he judges all people. A similar phrase in this letter is **our great God and Savior Jesus Christ**. TIT 1 intro c7me 0 # Titus 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1–4. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

In verses 6–9, Paul lists several qualities that a man must have if he is to be an elder in the church. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) Paul gives a similar list in 1 Timothy 3.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elders

The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include overseer, elder, pastor, and bishop.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Should, may, must

The ULT uses different words that indicate requirements or obligations. These verbs have different levels of force associated with them. The subtle differences may be difficult to translate. The UST translates these verbs in a more general way. -TIT 1 1 rtc9 figs-abstractnouns κατὰ πίστιν 1 for the faith **Faith** is an abstract noun. Here it refers to believing or trusting in Jesus. If it is more clear in your language, you could translate it with a verb such as these, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “to strengthen the faith” or “to help [God’s chosen people] to trust him more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +TIT 1 1 rtc9 figs-abstractnouns κατὰ πίστιν 1 for the faith The word **faith** is an abstract noun. Here it refers to believing or trusting in Jesus. If it is more clear in your language, you could translate it with a verb such as these, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “to strengthen the faith” or “to help [God’s chosen people] to trust him more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) TIT 1 1 xyz8 figs-abstractnouns ἐπίγνωσιν 1 the knowledge If it would be helpful in your language, you can translate the abstract noun **knowledge** with a verb such as “to know,” as in the UST. Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) TIT 1 1 abc8 figs-abstractnouns ἀληθείας 1 of the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you can translate the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective phrase such as “what is true” or “the true message.” Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) TIT 1 1 fyf8 figs-abstractnouns τῆς κατ’ εὐσέβειαν 1 that agrees with godliness Here, **godliness** is an abstract noun that refers to living in a way that pleases God. Alternate translation: “that is suitable for honoring God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -12,12 +12,12 @@ TIT 1 3 swi9 figs-metaphor ἐφανέρωσεν…τὸν λόγον αὐτο TIT 1 3 abc9 ἐν κηρύγματι 1 by the proclamation Alternate translation: “through the proclamation of the message” TIT 1 3 m41u figs-activepassive ὃ ἐπιστεύθην ἐγὼ 1 that I was entrusted with If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he entrusted to me” or “he gave me the responsibility to preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) TIT 1 3 dpn4 τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ 1 of God our Savior Alternate translation: “of God, who saves us” -TIT 1 3 xy18 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +TIT 1 3 xy18 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our Here **our** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 1 4 gu55 figs-metaphor γνησίῳ τέκνῳ 1 a true son Though Titus was not Paul’s biological **son**, they share a common faith in Christ. Paul considers relationship to Christ through faith to be more important than biological relationship. Thus, because of their relative ages and shared faith in Christ, Paul considers Titus as his own son. It may also be that Paul led Titus to faith in Christ, and so Titus is like a son in this spiritual sense. Alternate translation: “you are like a son to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -TIT 1 4 wx6c κοινὴν πίστιν 1 our common faith Paul and Titus both share the same faith in Christ. Alternate translation: “our belief in Christ” +TIT 1 4 wx6c κοινὴν πίστιν 1 our common faith Paul and Titus both share the same **faith** in Christ. Alternate translation: “our belief in Christ” TIT 1 4 h93t figs-ellipsis χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη 1 Grace and peace This was a common greeting Paul used. You can state clearly the understood information. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and inner peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) TIT 1 4 s3yr Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν 1 Christ Jesus our Savior Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus who is our Savior” -TIT 1 4 xy17 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +TIT 1 4 xy17 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our Here **our** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 1 5 ew8h grammar-connect-logic-goal τούτου χάριν 1 For this purpose The connecting phrase **For this purpose** introduces the goal that Paul wanted to accomplish when he left Titus in Crete (to ordain elders in the church). Alternate translation: “This is the reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) TIT 1 5 lh9b ἀπέλιπόν σε ἐν Κρήτῃ 1 I left you in Crete Alternate translation: “I told you to stay in Crete” TIT 1 5 ga62 ἵνα τὰ λείποντα ἐπιδιορθώσῃ 1 that you might set in order things not yet complete Alternate translation: “so that you would finish arranging things that needed to be done” From a141b65594440441d0c1255367a2a5fd2f5c1880 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 14:40:18 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 414/446] Edit 'en_tn_57-TIT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index 29d94301d9..86ef2f0f25 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -26,10 +26,10 @@ TIT 1 5 p56w πρεσβυτέρους 1 elders In the early Christian churches, TIT 1 6 wja4 0 Connecting Statement: Having told Titus to ordain elders in every city on the island of Crete, Paul then gives the requirements for elders. TIT 1 6 jen8 εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἀνέγκλητος 1 if anyone is blameless This is the beginning of the description of the character of an elder. Titus is to choose men who fit the following description. To be **blameless** is to be known as a person who does not do bad things. Alternate translation: “an elder must be without blame” or “an elder must not have a bad reputation” TIT 1 6 ab70 figs-doublenegatives ἀνέγκλητος 1 blameless To be **blameless** is to be known as a person who does not do bad things. Alternate translation: “without blame” You can state this positively: “a person who has a good reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -TIT 1 6 q6uy figs-explicit μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἀνήρ 1 the husband of one wife This means that he has only one wife; that is, he does not have any other wives or concubines. This also means that he does not commit adultery and may also mean that he has not divorced a previous wife. Alternate translation: “a man who has only one woman” or “a man who is faithful to his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +TIT 1 6 q6uy figs-explicit μιᾶς γυναικὸς ἀνήρ 1 the husband of one wife This means that he has only **one wife**; that is, he does not have any other wives or concubines. This also means that he does not commit adultery and may also mean that he has not divorced a previous wife. Alternate translation: “a man who has only one woman” or “a man who is faithful to his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) TIT 1 6 wd6q τέκνα…πιστά 1 faithful children This could refer to: (1) children who believe in Jesus. (2) children who are trustworthy. TIT 1 7 lz7x τὸν ἐπίσκοπον 1 the overseer The word **overseer** is another name for the same position of spiritual leadership that Paul referred to as **elder** in 1:5. This term focuses on the function of the elder: he oversees the activities and people of the church. -TIT 1 7 g2zf figs-metaphor Θεοῦ οἰκονόμον 1 the household manager of God Paul speaks of the church as if it were God’s household, and the overseer as if he were a servant in charge of managing that household. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +TIT 1 7 g2zf figs-metaphor Θεοῦ οἰκονόμον 1 the household manager of God Paul speaks of the church as if it were God’s **household**, and the overseer as if he were a servant in charge of managing that household. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) TIT 1 7 d6l1 μὴ πάροινον 1 not addicted to wine Alternate translation: “not an alcoholic” or “not one who drinks much wine” TIT 1 7 j1qq μὴ πλήκτην 1 not a brawler Alternate translation: “not one who is violent” or “not one who likes to fight” TIT 1 8 i549 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Instead The connecting word **Instead** introduces a contrast between the things an elder is not to be (that Paul already stated), and the things an elder is to be (which Paul is about to state). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -41,14 +41,14 @@ TIT 1 9 xy10 κατὰ τὴν διδαχὴν 1 that is in accordance with the TIT 1 9 abcj grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 so that The connecting words **so that** introduce a goal or purpose relationship. The purpose for the elder to hold tightly to the trustworthy message is for him to be able to encourage others and rebuke those who oppose him. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) TIT 1 9 pzi1 τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ τῇ ὑγιαινούσῃ 1 sound teaching The Greek word rendered at **sound** normally refers to physical health. Paul speaks of this teaching as if it would cause those who believe it to be spiritually healthy, rather than spiritually sick. TIT 1 10 xsq9 0 Connecting Statement: Because of those that would oppose God’s word, Paul gives Titus reasons to preach God’s word and warns him about false teachers. -TIT 1 10 w9kk figs-metaphor ἀνυπότακτοι, ματαιολόγοι 1 rebellious, empty talkers These are rebellious people who do not obey the gospel message. Here, **empty** is a metaphor for useless, and **empty talkers** are people who say useless or foolish things. Alternate translation: “who refuse to obey and who say useless things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -TIT 1 10 ga6n φρεναπάται 1 deceivers This phrase describes people who are actively trying to convince people to believe in something other than the true gospel that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “people who persuade others to believe things that are not true” +TIT 1 10 w9kk figs-metaphor ἀνυπότακτοι, ματαιολόγοι 1 rebellious, empty talkers These are **rebellious** people who do not obey the gospel message. Here, **empty** is a metaphor for useless, and **empty talkers** are people who say useless or foolish things. Alternate translation: “who refuse to obey and who say useless things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +TIT 1 10 ga6n φρεναπάται 1 deceivers The word **deceivers** describes people who are actively trying to convince people to believe in something other than the true gospel that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “people who persuade others to believe things that are not true” TIT 1 10 abcd figs-hendiadys ματαιολόγοι, καὶ φρεναπάται 1 empty talkers and deceivers Both **empty talkers** and **deceivers** refer to the same people. They taught false, worthless things and wanted people to believe them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) TIT 1 10 pu74 figs-metonymy οἱ ἐκ τῆς περιτομῆς 1 those from the circumcision This refers to the Jewish Christians who taught that men must be circumcised in order to follow Christ. This teaching is false. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) TIT 1 11 f4iy οὓς δεῖ ἐπιστομίζειν 1 It is necessary to stop them Alternate translation: “You must prevent them from spreading their teachings” or “Someone must stop them from influencing others by their words” TIT 1 11 aqi5 ὅλους οἴκους ἀνατρέπουσιν 1 are upsetting whole households The issue was that they were leading families away from the truth and destroying their faith. Alternate translation: “are ruining entire families” TIT 1 11 tw4e διδάσκοντες ἃ μὴ δεῖ 1 teaching what they should not These are things that are not proper to teach regarding Christ and the law because they are not true. -TIT 1 11 at7c αἰσχροῦ κέρδους χάριν 1 for the sake of shameful profit This refers to profit that people make by doing things that are not honorable. +TIT 1 11 at7c αἰσχροῦ κέρδους χάριν 1 for the sake of shameful profit This refers to **profit** that people make by doing things that are not honorable. TIT 1 12 tr1j τις ἐξ αὐτῶν, ἴδιος αὐτῶν προφήτης 1 One of them, of their own prophets Alternate translation: “A Cretan that they themselves consider to be a prophet” TIT 1 12 y3zb figs-hyperbole Κρῆτες ἀεὶ ψεῦσται 1 Cretans are always liars This is an exaggeration that means that Cretans had a reputation to be liars. Alternate translation: “Cretans lie all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) TIT 1 12 h3jb figs-metaphor κακὰ θηρία 1 evil beasts This metaphor compares the Cretans to dangerous wild animals. Alternate translation: “as dangerous as wild animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 3a3fbfd707daf08ae87a3e3f24ca4fc3f217ee30 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 14:42:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 415/446] Edit 'en_tn_57-TIT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index 86ef2f0f25..458113810f 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ TIT 1 11 aqi5 ὅλους οἴκους ἀνατρέπουσιν 1 are upsetti TIT 1 11 tw4e διδάσκοντες ἃ μὴ δεῖ 1 teaching what they should not These are things that are not proper to teach regarding Christ and the law because they are not true. TIT 1 11 at7c αἰσχροῦ κέρδους χάριν 1 for the sake of shameful profit This refers to **profit** that people make by doing things that are not honorable. TIT 1 12 tr1j τις ἐξ αὐτῶν, ἴδιος αὐτῶν προφήτης 1 One of them, of their own prophets Alternate translation: “A Cretan that they themselves consider to be a prophet” -TIT 1 12 y3zb figs-hyperbole Κρῆτες ἀεὶ ψεῦσται 1 Cretans are always liars This is an exaggeration that means that Cretans had a reputation to be liars. Alternate translation: “Cretans lie all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +TIT 1 12 y3zb figs-hyperbole Κρῆτες ἀεὶ ψεῦσται 1 Cretans are always liars This is an exaggeration that means that **Cretans** had a reputation to be **liars**. Alternate translation: “Cretans lie all the time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) TIT 1 12 h3jb figs-metaphor κακὰ θηρία 1 evil beasts This metaphor compares the Cretans to dangerous wild animals. Alternate translation: “as dangerous as wild animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) TIT 1 12 xyz1 figs-synecdoche γαστέρες ἀργαί 1 lazy bellies The part of the body that stores food is used to represent the person who eats all the time. Alternate translation: “lazy gluttons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) TIT 1 13 fif8 δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν ἔλεγχε αὐτοὺς ἀποτόμως 1 For this reason, rebuke them severely Alternate translation: “For that reason, you must use strong language that the Cretans will understand when you correct them” From c2302a8b1ee3f94da840ad2179118bc45f9b2eb3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 14:49:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 416/446] Edit 'en_tn_57-TIT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index 458113810f..0c42ff99e6 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -71,17 +71,17 @@ TIT 1 16 ja47 βδελυκτοὶ ὄντες 1 They are detestable Alternate t TIT 2 intro h3il 0 # Titus 2 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Gender roles

Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

### Slavery

Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches slaves to faithfully serve their masters. He teaches all believers to be godly and live rightly in every situation. TIT 2 1 lfu1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues giving Titus reasons to preach God’s word, and explains how the older men, older women, young men, and slaves or servants should live as believers. TIT 2 1 tpi2 figs-explicit σὺ δὲ 1 But you Here, **you** is singular and refers to Titus. If it is helpful, you could include the name “Titus” here, as in the UST. ([[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -TIT 2 1 ph2j τῇ ὑγιαινούσῃ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 with sound teaching See the note on [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1). Alternate translation: “with sound doctrine” or “with correct teachings” -TIT 2 2 xyz3 figs-ellipsis πρεσβύτας…εἶναι 1 Older men are to be The Greek does not have **are**, but only “Older men to be.” We need to supply a verb here, drawing from the idea of **speak** in the previous verse, such as **teach** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “Teach older men to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +TIT 2 1 ph2j τῇ ὑγιαινούσῃ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 with sound teaching See the note about **sound teaching** on [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1). Alternate translation: “with sound doctrine” or “with correct teachings” +TIT 2 2 xyz3 figs-ellipsis πρεσβύτας…εἶναι 1 Older men are to be The Greek does not have **are**, but only “Older men to be.” We could supply a verb here, drawing from the idea of **speak** in the previous verse, such as **teach** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “Teach older men to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) TIT 2 2 xy13 figs-doublet νηφαλίους…σεμνούς, σώφρονας 1 temperate, dignified, sensible These three words are very close in meaning and may be combined into one or two terms if the target language does not have three separate terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) TIT 2 2 xc6t νηφαλίους 1 temperate Alternate translation: “sober-minded” or “self-controlled” -TIT 2 2 y3j2 εἶναι…σώφρονας 1 to be … sensible Alternate translation: “to … control their desires” +TIT 2 2 y3j2 σώφρονας 1 to be … sensible Alternate translation: “in control of their desires” TIT 2 2 abc1 ὑγιαίνοντας τῇ πίστει 1 sound in faith Here the word **sound** means to be firm and unwavering. See the note about **sound** on [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1) and the note about **sound in faith** on [Titus 1:13](../01/13/je3r). TIT 2 2 m14y figs-abstractnouns ὑγιαίνοντας τῇ πίστει 1 sound in faith You can state the abstract noun **faith** as a verb if that is more clear in your language. Alternate translation: “firmly believe the true teachings about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) TIT 2 2 z14y figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 in love You can state the abstract noun **love** as a verb if that is more clear in your language. Alternate translation: “truly love others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) TIT 2 2 a14y figs-abstractnouns τῇ ὑπομονῇ 1 and in perseverance You can state the abstract noun **perseverance** as a verb if that is more clear in your language. Alternate translation: “and continually serve God even when things are difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -TIT 2 3 gl8e figs-ellipsis πρεσβύτιδας ὡσαύτως 1 Older women likewise are to be The Greek does not have **are to be**, but only “older women likewise.” We need to continue the verbal idea from the previous two verses and apply that here, as well, such as **teach** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “In the same way, teach older women to be” or “Also teach older women to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -TIT 2 3 v9cp διαβόλους 1 slanderers This word refers to people who say bad things about other people whether they are true or not. +TIT 2 3 gl8e figs-ellipsis πρεσβύτιδας ὡσαύτως 1 Older women likewise are to be The Greek does not have **are to be**, but only “older women likewise.” We could continue the verbal idea from the previous two verses and apply that here, as well, such as **teach** or **exhort**. Alternate translation: “In the same way, teach older women to be” or “Also teach older women to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +TIT 2 3 v9cp διαβόλους 1 slanderers The word **slanderers** refers to people who say bad things about other people whether they are true or not. TIT 2 3 g9re figs-metaphor οἴνῳ πολλῷ δεδουλωμένας 1 enslaved to much wine People who cannot control themselves and drink too much wine are spoken of as if they were a slave to the wine. Alternate translation: “controlled by their desire for wine” or “addicted to wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) TIT 2 3 xyz4 figs-activepassive οἴνῳ πολλῷ δεδουλωμένας 1 enslaved to much wine If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “drinking too much wine” or “addicted to wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) TIT 2 3 abc4 καλοδιδασκάλους 1 but to be teachers of what is good The Greek word used here means “a teacher of what is good.” The phrase **but to be** has been added in the English to contrast this good quality with the two preceding bad qualities. Consider if you need to use a similar word to make a contrast between the good and bad qualities. From f70b44b70c83a4251628a97419737e199a12cda6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 14:02:29 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 417/446] Added commas after sentence-initial "Here" --- en_tn_42-MRK.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_44-JHN.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_54-2TH.tsv | 2 +- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 2 +- 4 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv index 35ad8c3316..e860565ff8 100644 --- a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv @@ -908,7 +908,7 @@ MRK 12 10 mzr2 figs-metaphor λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ ο MRK 12 10 kv7t figs-explicit λίθον ὃν ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες 1 This Psalm refers implicitly to the way people in this culture used stones to build the walls of houses and other buildings. Alternate translation: “The stone which the builders thought was not good enough to use for building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 12 10 l5ma figs-idiom κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 The phrase the **head of the corner** is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MRK 12 11 r8z8 figs-quotesinquotes παρὰ Κυρίου ἐγένετο αὕτη, καὶ ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν 1 This came from the Lord This entire verse is a continuation of Jesus’ quotation from Psalm 118. If you chose not to translate [12:10](../12/10.md) as a quotation within a quotation, then you should do the same with this verse. Alternate translation: “and which says that it was the Lord who did it and those who saw it marveled as they looked at it” or “and that it was the Lord who did it and those who saw it marveled when they saw what the Lord had done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -MRK 12 11 k5w6 figs-metonymy ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν 1 it is marvelous in our eyes Here **eyes** represent “seeing,” so the expression **in our eyes** refers to the perspective of the person seeing the event. Alternate translation: “from our perspective, it is marvelous” or “we see that it is wonderful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MRK 12 11 k5w6 figs-metonymy ἔστιν θαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν 1 it is marvelous in our eyes Here, **eyes** represent “seeing,” so the expression **in our eyes** refers to the perspective of the person seeing the event. Alternate translation: “from our perspective, it is marvelous” or “we see that it is wonderful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MRK 12 12 b1vz writing-pronouns ἐζήτουν 1 they were seeking to seize him Here, the pronoun **they** refers to the chief priests, scribes, and elders mentioned in [11:27](../11/27.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to this group as “the Jewish leaders.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) MRK 12 12 lx62 grammar-connect-time-background καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον 1 but they feared the crowd Mark is providing this background information to help readers understand what happens next. The religious leaders fear of the crowd is why they **left** Jesus and **went away**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “but because they were afraid of the crowd, they did not seize him” or “but they did not seize him, because they feared the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) MRK 12 12 v9wb figs-infostructure καὶ ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν κρατῆσαι, καὶ ἐφοβήθησαν τὸν ὄχλον; ἔγνωσαν γὰρ ὅτι πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν παραβολὴν εἶπεν. καὶ ἀφέντες αὐτὸν, ἀπῆλθον 1 against them If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases to show the logical sequence of events, as modeled by the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv index 41f46bd94d..0eaf48a3d8 100644 --- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv @@ -2314,7 +2314,7 @@ JHN 18 25 l2bj figs-rquestion μὴ καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῶν μαθητῶν JHN 18 26 oka8 figs-rquestion οὐκ ἐγώ σε εἶδον ἐν τῷ κήπῳ μετ’ αὐτοῦ? 1 One of the high priest’s **servants** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he believes **Peter** is one of Jesus’ disciples. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I surely saw you in the garden with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 18 26 jfba figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 18 26 pj7v figs-explicit τῷ κήπῳ 1 See how you translated **garden** in [verse 1](../18/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 18 27 msy6 figs-explicit πάλιν οὖν ἠρνήσατο Πέτρος 1 Peter then denied again Here **it** refers to **Peter** knowing and being with Jesus. If this use of **it** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter then denied again that he knew Jesus or had been with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 18 27 msy6 figs-explicit πάλιν οὖν ἠρνήσατο Πέτρος 1 Peter then denied again Here, **it** refers to **Peter** knowing and being with Jesus. If this use of **it** might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter then denied again that he knew Jesus or had been with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 18 27 jww8 translate-unknown ἀλέκτωρ 1 immediately the rooster crowed See how you translated **rooster** in [13:38](../13/38.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JHN 18 28 a6e7 0 General Information: Here John changes topics from describing what Peter was doing to describing what was happening to Jesus. In the next section, Jesus’ accusers bring him to Caiaphas to be questioned by him. JHN 18 28 r4fk writing-pronouns ἄγουσιν 1 Here, **they** refers to the Jewish leaders and temple guards who were accusing Jesus. If it would be more natural in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish authorities and their guards led” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) diff --git a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv index fdaa5cddd3..83b82133c4 100644 --- a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 1 4 kx1n figs-rpronouns αὐτοὺς ἡμᾶς 1 we ourselves Here, **ourselves** is added to **we** to emphasize that even the apostle Paul and his associates are boasting about the Thessalonian believers. Alternate translation: “even we” or “we are the ones who” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns) 2TH 1 4 gcth figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὑπομονῆς ὑμῶν, καὶ πίστεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **endurance** and **faith** or if it is unclear how these two terms relate, you can express these same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you patiently continue to trust in Jesus” or “how you persevere in believing in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TH 1 4 qlo9 figs-doublet ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν, καὶ ταῖς θλίψεσιν 1 The two words **persecutions** and **afflictions** are saying very similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize how difficult life has been for the Thessalonian believers. If two words are difficult to find in your language or if your language does not use repetition in this way, you can use one word with this meaning and make the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “as you have been going through all these very difficult times” or “as people make you suffer in all the ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -2TH 1 4 md0d figs-explicit πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν 1 Here **faith in all your persecutions** does not mean to believe in or trust in persecutions. If your readers might be confused by that, you could express it more clearly. Alternate translation: “faith in Jesus Christ during all the times you are persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2TH 1 4 md0d figs-explicit πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν 1 Here, **faith in all your persecutions** does not mean to believe in or trust in persecutions. If your readers might be confused by that, you could express it more clearly. Alternate translation: “faith in Jesus Christ during all the times you are persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 1 5 rs3b figs-explicit ἔνδειγμα τῆς δικαίας κρίσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς 1 The **evidence** that Paul is referring to here is the faithful endurance of the Thessalonian believers while suffering persecution, which he mentioned in verse 4. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may also be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Your endurance while suffering is a clear indication of God’s righteous judgment, that he considers you worthy” or “Your faithfulness through persecution shows that God is just and right to consider you worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 1 5 dad9 figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 for you to be considered worthy of the kingdom of God You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God will consider you worthy to be part of his kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 5 xm2g figs-explicit ὑπὲρ ἧς καὶ πάσχετε 1 Here, **also** could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers are suffering for the kingdom of God as well as being counted worthy of it. Alternate translation: “being a part of which is also the reason that you are suffering” (2) the Thessalonian believers are suffering along with other believers. Alternate translation: “which is why you are going through sufferings along with many others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index 2d2a316d4a..94a3e0c29f 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -289,7 +289,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 14 xgkb figs-activepassive καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας ἔχοντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “they trained their hearts to be covetous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 2 14 c55u figs-metonymy καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας ἔχοντες 1 hearts trained in covetousness Peter is using **hearts** to refer to whole persons, including their thoughts, desires, and emotions. The term can thus be translated here with the reflexive pronoun “themselves.” Alternate translation: “having trained themselves to covet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2PE 2 14 sbp2 figs-abstractnouns καρδίαν γεγυμνασμένην πλεονεξίας ἔχοντες 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **covetousness** with a verb. Alternate translation: “having training their hearts to covet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2PE 2 14 sv4r figs-idiom κατάρας τέκνα 1 Peter is using a Hebrew idiom in which a person is said to be a “child” of the thing that characterizes that person. Here **children of cursing** refers to people who are cursed by God. He is not speaking of people who curse others. Alternate translation: “accursed people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2PE 2 14 sv4r figs-idiom κατάρας τέκνα 1 Peter is using a Hebrew idiom in which a person is said to be a “child” of the thing that characterizes that person. Here, **children of cursing** refers to people who are cursed by God. He is not speaking of people who curse others. Alternate translation: “accursed people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2PE 2 14 c7cc figs-exclamations κατάρας τέκνα 1 These words are an exclamation that emphasizes the wickedness of the false teachers. Alternate translation: “They are such cursed children!” or “What cursed children they are!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) 2PE 2 15 et62 figs-metaphor καταλειπόντες εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν 1 abandoning the right way, led astray, having followed Peter uses the metaphor **Abandoning {the} straight way** to give an image of walkers leaving a certain pathway. He speaks of the false teachers refusing to live their lives in obedience to the Lord as if they had stopped walking on the Lord’s path. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this metaphor in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “refusing to live in obedience to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 2 15 ky5q figs-idiom εὐθεῖαν ὁδὸν 1 the right way Here, **{the} straight way** refers to the way of living life that is right and pleasing to the Lord. Peter may also be using it here to refer specifically to the Christian faith, similar to his use of “the way of truth” in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “the right way of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From cb26d007c6b7e276c12978f4182981ed579a57db Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 18:04:11 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 418/446] Edit 'en_tn_57-TIT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index 0c42ff99e6..415c829e19 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -12,12 +12,12 @@ TIT 1 3 swi9 figs-metaphor ἐφανέρωσεν…τὸν λόγον αὐτο TIT 1 3 abc9 ἐν κηρύγματι 1 by the proclamation Alternate translation: “through the proclamation of the message” TIT 1 3 m41u figs-activepassive ὃ ἐπιστεύθην ἐγὼ 1 that I was entrusted with If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he entrusted to me” or “he gave me the responsibility to preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) TIT 1 3 dpn4 τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ 1 of God our Savior Alternate translation: “of God, who saves us” -TIT 1 3 xy18 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our Here **our** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +TIT 1 3 xy18 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our Here, **our** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 1 4 gu55 figs-metaphor γνησίῳ τέκνῳ 1 a true son Though Titus was not Paul’s biological **son**, they share a common faith in Christ. Paul considers relationship to Christ through faith to be more important than biological relationship. Thus, because of their relative ages and shared faith in Christ, Paul considers Titus as his own son. It may also be that Paul led Titus to faith in Christ, and so Titus is like a son in this spiritual sense. Alternate translation: “you are like a son to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) TIT 1 4 wx6c κοινὴν πίστιν 1 our common faith Paul and Titus both share the same **faith** in Christ. Alternate translation: “our belief in Christ” TIT 1 4 h93t figs-ellipsis χάρις καὶ εἰρήνη 1 Grace and peace This was a common greeting Paul used. You can state clearly the understood information. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and inner peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) TIT 1 4 s3yr Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν 1 Christ Jesus our Savior Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus who is our Savior” -TIT 1 4 xy17 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our Here **our** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +TIT 1 4 xy17 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our Here, **our** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 1 5 ew8h grammar-connect-logic-goal τούτου χάριν 1 For this purpose The connecting phrase **For this purpose** introduces the goal that Paul wanted to accomplish when he left Titus in Crete (to ordain elders in the church). Alternate translation: “This is the reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) TIT 1 5 lh9b ἀπέλιπόν σε ἐν Κρήτῃ 1 I left you in Crete Alternate translation: “I told you to stay in Crete” TIT 1 5 ga62 ἵνα τὰ λείποντα ἐπιδιορθώσῃ 1 that you might set in order things not yet complete Alternate translation: “so that you would finish arranging things that needed to be done” @@ -95,8 +95,8 @@ TIT 2 7 x73u σεαυτὸν παρεχόμενος 1 present yourself Alternat TIT 2 7 ym6x τύπον καλῶν ἔργων 1 as an example of good works Alternate translation: “as an example of one who does right and proper things” TIT 2 8 xy14 ὑγιῆ 1 sound This word **sound** has the same basic meaning as “uncorrupted” in 2:7. In 2:7, Paul states the meaning negatively: “uncorrupted,” meaning, “without error,” and in 2:8 he states the meaning positively: **sound**, meaning “correct.” Both terms refer to Titus’ teaching. Use either positive or negative terms in the target language, or use one term with this meaning in both places if it is difficult to use two terms. TIT 2 8 xt6v figs-hypo ἵνα ὁ ἐξ ἐναντίας ἐντραπῇ 1 so that the opponent may be ashamed This presents a hypothetical situation in which someone opposes Titus and then becomes ashamed for having done so. Alternate translation: “so that if anyone opposes you, he may be ashamed” or “so that when people oppose you, they may be ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -TIT 2 8 xy15 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 us This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -TIT 2 9 xyz5 figs-ellipsis δούλους ἰδίοις δεσπόταις ὑποτάσσεσθαι 1 Slaves are to be subject to their own masters The Greek does not have **are**, but only “slaves to be subject to their masters.” We need to apply the verbal idea from verse 6 to here, which is “urge” or “exhort.” Alternate translation: “Exhort slaves to be subject to their masters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +TIT 2 8 xy15 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 us Here, **us** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +TIT 2 9 xyz5 figs-ellipsis δούλους ἰδίοις δεσπόταις ὑποτάσσεσθαι 1 Slaves are to be subject to their own masters The Greek does not have **are**, but only “slaves to be subject to their masters.” We could apply the verbal idea from verse 6 to here, which is “urge” or “exhort.” Alternate translation: “Exhort slaves to be subject to their masters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) TIT 2 9 abcc ὑποτάσσεσθαι 1 are to be subject Alternate translation: “must obey” TIT 2 9 if6v ἐν πᾶσιν 1 in everything Alternate translation: “in every situation” or “always” TIT 2 9 id15 εὐαρέστους εἶναι 1 to be pleasing Alternate translation: “to please their masters” or “to satisfy their masters” From 952b86ee8de09157ad219568b64704b07d11e766 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 18:06:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 419/446] Edit 'en_tn_57-TIT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index 415c829e19..b6511e6e7f 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -107,14 +107,14 @@ TIT 2 10 f8jy τὴν διδασκαλίαν τὴν τοῦ Σωτῆρος TIT 2 10 pn93 Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ 1 God our Savior Alternate translation: “our God who saves us” TIT 2 10 xy16 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our Here, **our** is inclusive of Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 2 11 y44u 0 Connecting Statement: Paul encourages Titus to look for Jesus’ coming and remember his authority through Jesus. -TIT 2 11 gp2z figs-personification ἐπεφάνη…ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the grace of God has appeared Paul speaks of the grace of God as if it were a person who has arrived. See the UST for other ways to express this. Alternate translation: “God is now offering his grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +TIT 2 11 gp2z figs-personification ἐπεφάνη…ἡ χάρις τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the grace of God has appeared Paul speaks of **the grace of God** as if it were a person who has arrived. See the UST for other ways to express this. Alternate translation: “God is now offering his grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) TIT 2 12 qy8k figs-personification παιδεύουσα ἡμᾶς 1 training us Paul speaks of the grace of God (2:11) as if it were a person who trains other people how to live holy lives. Alternate translation: “by which God trains us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -TIT 2 12 abce figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +TIT 2 12 abce figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us Here, **us** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 2 12 lxb3 τὴν ἀσέβειαν 1 godlessness Alternate translation: “things that dishonor God” TIT 2 12 n3k5 τὰς κοσμικὰς ἐπιθυμίας 1 worldly passions Alternate translation: “strong desires for the things of this world” or “strong desires for sinful pleasures” TIT 2 12 xy19 ἀσέβειαν…εὐσεβῶς 1 godlessness … godly way These terms are direct opposites, meaning “God-dishonoring” and “God-honoring,” respectively. TIT 2 12 fk8j ἐν τῷ νῦν αἰῶνι 1 in the present age Alternate translation: “while we live in this world” or “during this time” -TIT 2 13 rz93 προσδεχόμενοι 1 while we look forward to receiving **while we wait to welcome** +TIT 2 13 rz93 προσδεχόμενοι 1 while we look forward to receiving Alternate translation: “while we wait to welcome” TIT 2 13 xyz6 figs-metonymy τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα 1 the blessed hope Here, what is **blessed** is that for which we hope, which is the return of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the wonderful thing for which we hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) TIT 2 13 pss7 figs-metonymy καὶ ἐπιφάνειαν τῆς δόξης τοῦ μεγάλου Θεοῦ καὶ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 and appearing of the glory of our great God and Savior Jesus Christ Here, **glory** represents Jesus himself who will appear gloriously. Alternate translation: “that is, the glorious appearance of our great God and Savior Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) TIT 2 13 abcf figs-hendiadys τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα, καὶ ἐπιφάνειαν τῆς δόξης 1 the blessed hope and appearing of the glory Both **blessed hope** and **appearing of the glory** refer to the same event. This can be shown clearly. Alternate translation: “what we are longing for, the blessed and glorious appearing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) From 5ba2963d11a0da413f74bf88802e11d891df90e1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 18:08:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 420/446] Edit 'en_tn_57-TIT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index b6511e6e7f..598e01b113 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -118,15 +118,15 @@ TIT 2 13 rz93 προσδεχόμενοι 1 while we look forward to receiving A TIT 2 13 xyz6 figs-metonymy τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα 1 the blessed hope Here, what is **blessed** is that for which we hope, which is the return of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the wonderful thing for which we hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) TIT 2 13 pss7 figs-metonymy καὶ ἐπιφάνειαν τῆς δόξης τοῦ μεγάλου Θεοῦ καὶ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 and appearing of the glory of our great God and Savior Jesus Christ Here, **glory** represents Jesus himself who will appear gloriously. Alternate translation: “that is, the glorious appearance of our great God and Savior Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) TIT 2 13 abcf figs-hendiadys τὴν μακαρίαν ἐλπίδα, καὶ ἐπιφάνειαν τῆς δόξης 1 the blessed hope and appearing of the glory Both **blessed hope** and **appearing of the glory** refer to the same event. This can be shown clearly. Alternate translation: “what we are longing for, the blessed and glorious appearing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -TIT 2 13 xyz7 figs-hendiadys τοῦ μεγάλου Θεοῦ καὶ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 of our great God and Savior Jesus Christ Both **our great God** and **Savior** refer to the one person, Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ, our great God and Savior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -TIT 2 14 niu4 figs-explicit ἔδωκεν ἑαυτὸν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν 1 gave himself for us This refers to Jesus dying willingly. Alternate translation: “gave himself to die for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -TIT 2 14 xy20 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 us This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +TIT 2 13 xyz7 figs-hendiadys τοῦ μεγάλου Θεοῦ καὶ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 of our great God and Savior Jesus Christ Both **our great God** and **Savior** refer to the one person, **Jesus Christ**. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ, our great God and Savior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +TIT 2 14 niu4 figs-explicit ὃς ἔδωκεν ἑαυτὸν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν 1 gave himself for us This refers to Jesus dying willingly. Alternate translation: “gave himself to die for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +TIT 2 14 xy20 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 us Here, **us** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 2 14 gxe7 figs-metaphor λυτρώσηται ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ πάσης ἀνομίας 1 to redeem us from all lawlessness Paul speaks of Jesus as if he were setting slaves free from their evil master. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -TIT 2 14 xy21 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +TIT 2 14 xy21 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us Here, **us** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 2 14 fjy1 λαὸν περιούσιον 1 a special people Alternate translation: “a group of people that he treasures” TIT 2 14 ii18 ζηλωτὴν καλῶν ἔργων 1 zealous for good works Alternate translation: “who are eager to do good deeds” TIT 2 15 abc7 παρακάλει 1 exhort Alternate translation: “encourage them to do these things” -TIT 2 15 b94z figs-explicit ἔλεγχε, μετὰ πάσης ἐπιταγῆς 1 rebuke with all authority If it is helpful, the people whom Titus should correct can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “correct with all authority those people who do not do these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +TIT 2 15 b94z figs-explicit ἔλεγχε, μετὰ πάσης ἐπιταγῆς 1 rebuke with all authority If it is helpful, the people whom Titus should **rebuke** can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “correct with all authority those people who do not do these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) TIT 2 15 h15y μηδείς σου περιφρονείτω 1 Let no one disregard you Alternate translation: “Do not allow anyone to ignore you” TIT 2 15 xy22 figs-doublenegatives μηδείς σου περιφρονείτω 1 Let no one disregard you You can state this positively: “Make sure that everyone listens to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) TIT 2 15 jbu1 figs-explicit σου περιφρονείτω 1 Let … disregard you The way that people would disregard Titus can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “Let … refuse to listen to your words” or “Let … refuse to respect you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From d96afcbdd788a4612ae88ec831b2ce7d71862e19 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 18:20:41 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 421/446] Edit 'en_tn_57-TIT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index 598e01b113..391caaf250 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ TIT 1 7 d6l1 μὴ πάροινον 1 not addicted to wine Alternate translatio TIT 1 7 j1qq μὴ πλήκτην 1 not a brawler Alternate translation: “not one who is violent” or “not one who likes to fight” TIT 1 8 i549 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Instead The connecting word **Instead** introduces a contrast between the things an elder is not to be (that Paul already stated), and the things an elder is to be (which Paul is about to state). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) TIT 1 8 vkq1 φιλάγαθον 1 a friend of what is good Alternate translation: “a person who loves to do good” -TIT 1 8 xy11 figs-doublet σώφρονα…ἐγκρατῆ 1 sensible … and self-controlled These two terms are very similar in meaning and may be translated by one term if the target language does not have two similar terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -TIT 1 8 xy12 figs-doublet δίκαιον, ὅσιον 1 righteous, holy These two terms are very similar in meaning and may be translated by one term if the target language does not have two similar terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +TIT 1 8 xy11 figs-doublet σώφρονα…ἐγκρατῆ 1 sensible … and self-controlled The terms **sensible** and **self-controlled** are very similar in meaning and may be translated by one term if the target language does not have two similar terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +TIT 1 8 xy12 figs-doublet δίκαιον, ὅσιον 1 righteous, holy The terms **righteous** and **holy** are very similar in meaning and may be translated by one term if the target language does not have two similar terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) TIT 1 9 xwy6 figs-metaphor ἀντεχόμενον 1 He must hold tightly to Paul speaks of devotion to the Christian faith as if it were grasping the faith with one’s hands. Alternate translation: “He must be devoted to” or “He should know well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) TIT 1 9 xy10 κατὰ τὴν διδαχὴν 1 that is in accordance with the teaching Alternate translation: “that agrees with the things that we taught him” TIT 1 9 abcj grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 so that The connecting words **so that** introduce a goal or purpose relationship. The purpose for the elder to hold tightly to the trustworthy message is for him to be able to encourage others and rebuke those who oppose him. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) @@ -134,8 +134,8 @@ TIT 3 intro zh6x 0 # Titus 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting TIT 3 1 y9tr 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues giving Titus instructions on how to teach the elders and people under his care in Crete. TIT 3 1 j2sa ὑπομίμνῃσκε αὐτοὺς…ὑποτάσσεσθαι 1 Remind them to submit Alternate translation: “Tell our people again what they already know, to submit” or “Keep reminding them to submit” TIT 3 1 w3fy ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις, ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν 1 to submit to rulers and authorities, to obey them Alternate translation: “to do as the political rulers and government authorities say by obeying them” -TIT 3 1 wa9x figs-doublet ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις 1 to rulers and authorities These words have similar meanings and both refer to anyone who holds authority in the government. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -TIT 3 1 xy25 figs-doublet ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν 1 to submit … to obey them These words have similar meanings and both refer to doing what someone tells you to do. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +TIT 3 1 wa9x figs-doublet ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις 1 to rulers and authorities The words **rulers** and **authorities** have similar meanings and both refer to anyone who holds authority in the government. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +TIT 3 1 xy25 figs-doublet ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν 1 to submit … to obey them The words **submit** and **obey** have similar meanings and both refer to doing what someone tells you to do. If the target language has only one term for this, then just use that term. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) TIT 3 1 in7u πρὸς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἑτοίμους εἶναι 1 be ready for every good work Alternate translation: “to be ready to do good whenever there is opportunity” TIT 3 2 lug7 βλασφημεῖν 1 to revile Alternate translation: “to speak evil of” TIT 3 2 abcx figs-doublenegatives ἀμάχους εἶναι 1 to be uncontentious You can state this positively: “to be peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) From 8434881a153eb42becec8ae3c7a76c580f3d953c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 18:25:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 422/446] Edit 'en_tn_57-TIT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index 391caaf250..b02d4d9cce 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -141,14 +141,14 @@ TIT 3 2 lug7 βλασφημεῖν 1 to revile Alternate translation: “to spe TIT 3 2 abcx figs-doublenegatives ἀμάχους εἶναι 1 to be uncontentious You can state this positively: “to be peaceful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) TIT 3 3 m9zd ἦμεν γάρ ποτε καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 For once we also were Alternate translation: “This is because we ourselves were once” TIT 3 3 me7b ποτε 1 once Alternate translation: “formerly” or “at some time” or “previously” -TIT 3 3 bl8e figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians, referring to the time before they trusted in Christ. Alternate translation: “even we” or “we ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +TIT 3 3 bl8e figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we Here, **we** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians, referring to the time before they trusted in Christ. Alternate translation: “even we” or “we ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 3 3 rrx9 ἦμεν…ἀνόητοι 1 were foolish Alternate translation: “were thoughtless” or “were unwise” -TIT 3 3 qt8f figs-personification πλανώμενοι, δουλεύοντες ἐπιθυμίαις καὶ ἡδοναῖς ποικίλαις 1 We were led astray and enslaved by various passions and pleasures Passion and pleasure are spoken of as if they were masters over people and had made those people into slaves by lying to them. Alternate translation: “We had allowed ourselves to believe the lie that various passions and pleasures could make us happy, and then we were unable to control our feelings or stop doing things we thought would give us pleasure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +TIT 3 3 qt8f figs-personification πλανώμενοι, δουλεύοντες ἐπιθυμίαις καὶ ἡδοναῖς ποικίλαις 1 We were led astray and enslaved by various passions and pleasures Here, **passions** and **pleasures** are spoken of as if they were masters over people and had made those people into slaves by lying to them. Alternate translation: “We had allowed ourselves to believe the lie that various passions and pleasures could make us happy, and then we were unable to control our feelings or stop doing things we thought would give us pleasure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) TIT 3 3 xy27 figs-activepassive πλανώμενοι, δουλεύοντες ἐπιθυμίαις καὶ ἡδοναῖς ποικίλαις 1 We were led astray and enslaved by various passions and pleasures You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “Various passions and pleasures had lied to us and so led us astray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) TIT 3 3 tl5n ἐπιθυμίαις 1 passions Alternate translation: “lusts” or “desires” TIT 3 3 dec4 ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ διάγοντες 1 We lived in evil and envy Here, **evil** and **envy** describe sin. The word **evil** is general and **envy** is a specific kind of sin. Alternate translation: “We were always doing evil things and wanting what others have” TIT 3 3 y5lp στυγητοί 1 detestable Alternate translation: “causing others to hate us” -TIT 3 4 xy28 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But It is important to mark the contrast here between the evil way that people are (verses 1–3) and the goodness of God (verses 4–7) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +TIT 3 4 xy28 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But **But** is used here to mark the important contrast here between the evil way that people are (verses 1–3) and the goodness of God (verses 4–7) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) TIT 3 4 ba5a figs-personification ὅτε…ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ 1 when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared Paul speaks of God’s kindness and love as if they were people that came into our sight. Alternate translation: “when God our Savior showed us his kindness and love for people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) TIT 3 4 abcg figs-abstractnouns ὅτε…ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ 1 when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared You can state the abstract nouns **kindness** and **love** as adjectives. Alternate translation: “when God, who saves us, showed how kind and loving he would be to mankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) TIT 3 4 abch figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 26250d2f0cc12be84f63480055bcc3c807f0f49a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 18:26:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 423/446] Edit 'en_tn_57-TIT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index b02d4d9cce..a8b3c48809 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -149,11 +149,11 @@ TIT 3 3 tl5n ἐπιθυμίαις 1 passions Alternate translation: “lusts TIT 3 3 dec4 ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ διάγοντες 1 We lived in evil and envy Here, **evil** and **envy** describe sin. The word **evil** is general and **envy** is a specific kind of sin. Alternate translation: “We were always doing evil things and wanting what others have” TIT 3 3 y5lp στυγητοί 1 detestable Alternate translation: “causing others to hate us” TIT 3 4 xy28 grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 But **But** is used here to mark the important contrast here between the evil way that people are (verses 1–3) and the goodness of God (verses 4–7) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -TIT 3 4 ba5a figs-personification ὅτε…ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ 1 when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared Paul speaks of God’s kindness and love as if they were people that came into our sight. Alternate translation: “when God our Savior showed us his kindness and love for people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +TIT 3 4 ba5a figs-personification ὅτε…ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ 1 when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared Paul speaks of God’s **kindness** and **love** as if they were people that came into our sight. Alternate translation: “when God our Savior showed us his kindness and love for people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) TIT 3 4 abcg figs-abstractnouns ὅτε…ἡ χρηστότης καὶ ἡ φιλανθρωπία ἐπεφάνη τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, Θεοῦ 1 when the kindness of God our Savior and his love for mankind appeared You can state the abstract nouns **kindness** and **love** as adjectives. Alternate translation: “when God, who saves us, showed how kind and loving he would be to mankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -TIT 3 4 abch figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +TIT 3 4 abch figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our Here, **our** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 3 5 n4ug κατὰ τὸ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος 1 by his mercy Alternate translation: “because he had mercy on us” -TIT 3 5 k1a6 figs-metaphor λουτροῦ παλινγενεσίας 1 the washing of new birth Paul combines two metaphors here. He is speaking of God’s forgiveness for sinners as if he were physically washing them clean from their sin. He is also speaking of sinners who become responsive to God as if they had been born again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +TIT 3 5 k1a6 figs-metaphor λουτροῦ παλινγενεσίας 1 the washing of new birth Paul combines two metaphors here. He is speaking of God’s forgiveness for sinners as if he were physically **washing** them clean from their sin. He is also speaking of sinners who become responsive to God as if they had been born again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) TIT 3 6 fby9 figs-metaphor οὗ ἐξέχεεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς πλουσίως 1 whom God richly poured on us It is common for New Testament writers to speak of the Holy Spirit as a liquid that God can pour out in large amounts. Alternate translation: “whom God gave to us generously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) TIT 3 6 xy24 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 3 6 q9ze διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν 1 through our Savior Jesus Christ Alternate translation: “when Jesus Christ saved us” From 4c6cd67b6785a7ab561fcd9da12d6d86742c2f46 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 18:31:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 424/446] Edit 'en_tn_57-TIT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index a8b3c48809..cac1c4bfad 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -155,30 +155,30 @@ TIT 3 4 abch figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our Here, **our** includes Paul, Titus, TIT 3 5 n4ug κατὰ τὸ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος 1 by his mercy Alternate translation: “because he had mercy on us” TIT 3 5 k1a6 figs-metaphor λουτροῦ παλινγενεσίας 1 the washing of new birth Paul combines two metaphors here. He is speaking of God’s forgiveness for sinners as if he were physically **washing** them clean from their sin. He is also speaking of sinners who become responsive to God as if they had been born again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) TIT 3 6 fby9 figs-metaphor οὗ ἐξέχεεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς πλουσίως 1 whom God richly poured on us It is common for New Testament writers to speak of the Holy Spirit as a liquid that God can pour out in large amounts. Alternate translation: “whom God gave to us generously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -TIT 3 6 xy24 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +TIT 3 6 xy24 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us Here, **us** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 3 6 q9ze διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν 1 through our Savior Jesus Christ Alternate translation: “when Jesus Christ saved us” -TIT 3 6 xy23 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our This includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +TIT 3 6 xy23 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our Here, **our** includes Paul, Titus, and all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 3 7 di3g figs-activepassive δικαιωθέντες 1 having been justified If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “since God has declared us to be without sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) TIT 3 7 q1cm figs-metaphor κληρονόμοι γενηθῶμεν, κατ’ ἐλπίδα ζωῆς αἰωνίου 1 we might become heirs according to the certain hope of everlasting life The people to whom God has made promises are spoken of as if they were to inherit the things promised, just as a person inherits property or possessions from a family member. Alternate translation: “we might expect to receive the eternal life that God has promised us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -TIT 3 8 j8md ὁ λόγος 1 This message This message is the one just expressed in verses 4–7, that God freely gives the Holy Spirit and eternal life to believers through Jesus. -TIT 3 8 xy29 τούτων 1 these things This refers to the teachings that Paul has talked about in verses 1–7. Alternate translation: “these teachings that I have just talked about” +TIT 3 8 j8md ὁ λόγος 1 This message This **message** is the one just expressed in verses 4–7, that God freely gives the Holy Spirit and eternal life to believers through Jesus. +TIT 3 8 xy29 τούτων 1 these things Here, **{these} things** refers to the teachings that Paul has talked about in verses 1–7. Alternate translation: “these teachings that I have just talked about” TIT 3 8 kqm6 φροντίζωσιν καλῶν ἔργων, προΐστασθαι 1 may be careful to engage themselves in good works Alternate translation: “may seek to do good works” TIT 3 9 tzh9 0 Connecting Statement: Paul explains what Titus should avoid and how to treat those who cause contention among the believers. TIT 3 9 j1hf δὲ…περιΐστασο 1 But avoid Alternate translation: “So avoid” or “Therefore, avoid” TIT 3 9 xnf9 μωρὰς…ζητήσεις 1 foolish debates Alternate translation: “arguments concerning unimportant matters” -TIT 3 9 qk66 γενεαλογίας 1 genealogies This is the study of family kinship relationships. See the Introduction to Titus. -TIT 3 9 xu7f ἔρεις 1 strife arguments or fights +TIT 3 9 qk66 γενεαλογίας 1 genealogies The word **genealogies** refers to the study of family kinship relationships. See the Introduction to Titus. +TIT 3 9 xu7f ἔρεις 1 strife Alternate translation: “arguments” or “fights” TIT 3 9 ky3n νομικὰς 1 about the law Alternate translation: “about the law of Moses” TIT 3 10 x3fh αἱρετικὸν ἄνθρωπον…παραιτοῦ 1 Reject a divisive person Alternate translation: “Stay away from a person who causes division” TIT 3 10 xzx1 μετὰ μίαν καὶ δευτέραν νουθεσίαν 1 after one or two warnings Alternate translation: “after you have warned that person once or twice” TIT 3 11 r7pc ὁ τοιοῦτος 1 such a person Alternate translation: “a person like that” -TIT 3 11 inh5 figs-metaphor ἐξέστραπται 1 has turned from the right way Paul speaks of someone who chooses to do wrong things as if he were leaving the right path to walk in the wrong direction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +TIT 3 11 inh5 figs-metaphor ἐξέστραπται 1 has turned from the right way Paul speaks of someone who chooses to do wrong things as if he were leaving the **right** path to walk in the wrong direction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) TIT 3 11 p81k ὢν αὐτοκατάκριτος 1 being self-condemned Alternate translation: “bringing judgment on himself” TIT 3 12 z7i4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul closes the letter by telling Titus what to do after he appoints elders in Crete and by giving greetings from those with him. TIT 3 12 mba6 ὅταν πέμψω 1 When I send Alternate translation: “After I send” -TIT 3 12 c32w translate-names Ἀρτεμᾶν…Τυχικόν 1 Artemas … Tychicus These are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +TIT 3 12 c32w translate-names Ἀρτεμᾶν…Τυχικόν 1 Artemas … Tychicus **Artemas** and **Tychicus** are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) TIT 3 12 knt1 σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν 1 hurry to come Alternate translation: “come quickly” -TIT 3 12 xy30 σπούδασον 1 hurry The verb is singular and directed at Titus alone. Artemas or Tychicus would stay in Crete, probably to take Titus’ place. +TIT 3 12 xy30 σπούδασον 1 hurry The verb **hurry** is singular and directed at Titus alone. Artemas or Tychicus would stay in Crete, probably to take Titus’ place. TIT 3 12 gdw9 παραχειμάσαι 1 to spend the winter Alternate translation: “to stay for the winter” TIT 3 13 a46f translate-names Ζηνᾶν…Ἀπολλῶν 1 Zenas … Appollos These are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) TIT 3 13 s757 καὶ Ἀπολλῶν 1 and Apollos Alternate translation: “and also Apollos” From 9a1c105484e5c1eee80e56ee6599e646b96428ef Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 18:32:57 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 425/446] Edit 'en_tn_57-TIT.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index cac1c4bfad..8ed91990bd 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -180,12 +180,12 @@ TIT 3 12 c32w translate-names Ἀρτεμᾶν…Τυχικόν 1 Artemas … Ty TIT 3 12 knt1 σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν 1 hurry to come Alternate translation: “come quickly” TIT 3 12 xy30 σπούδασον 1 hurry The verb **hurry** is singular and directed at Titus alone. Artemas or Tychicus would stay in Crete, probably to take Titus’ place. TIT 3 12 gdw9 παραχειμάσαι 1 to spend the winter Alternate translation: “to stay for the winter” -TIT 3 13 a46f translate-names Ζηνᾶν…Ἀπολλῶν 1 Zenas … Appollos These are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +TIT 3 13 a46f translate-names Ζηνᾶν…Ἀπολλῶν 1 Zenas … Appollos **Zenos** and **Apollos** are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) TIT 3 13 s757 καὶ Ἀπολλῶν 1 and Apollos Alternate translation: “and also Apollos” TIT 3 13 j496 σπουδαίως πρόπεμψον 1 Diligently send on their way Alternate translation: “Do not delay in sending” TIT 3 13 xy31 figs-doublenegatives ἵνα μηδὲν αὐτοῖς λείπῃ 1 so that they lack nothing You can state this positively: “so that they have everything that they need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) TIT 3 14 v7wg 0 Connecting Statement: Paul explains that it is important for all believers to provide for those who have needs. -TIT 3 14 fw98 οἱ ἡμέτεροι 1 our own Paul is referring to the believers in Crete. Alternate translation: “our own people” +TIT 3 14 fw98 οἱ ἡμέτεροι 1 our own Here, **our own** refers to the believers in Crete. Alternate translation: “our own people” TIT 3 14 xy33 figs-exclusive οἱ ἡμέτεροι 1 our own Here, **our** includes Paul and Titus. The form should be either dual or inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) TIT 3 14 tn24 εἰς τὰς ἀναγκαίας χρείας 1 toward essential needs Alternate translation: “that enable them to help people who lack necessary things” TIT 3 14 mji4 figs-metaphor ἵνα μὴ ὦσιν ἄκαρποι 1 in order not to be unfruitful Paul speaks of people doing good work as if they were trees bearing good fruit. Alternate translation: “so that they will not lead useless lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 0f160093271053f66894f34c7755cdb2e230d39d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 14:35:19 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 426/446] Update one Ephesians note --- en_tn_50-EPH.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv index 8c4c6593b5..36b38d5eba 100644 --- a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ EPH 3 8 e96z figs-metaphor πλοῦτος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 riches of C EPH 3 9 f2zp figs-activepassive τοῦ μυστηρίου, τοῦ ἀποκεκρυμμένου ἀπὸ τῶν αἰώνων ἐν τῷ Θεῷ, τῷ τὰ πάντα κτίσαντι 1 of the mystery that was hidden from the ages in God who created all things If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “of God, who created all things, kept this plan hidden for long ages in the past” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EPH 3 10 abd3 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 so that The connecting phrase **so that** introduces a goal relationship. The goal or purpose of God revealing the mystery of the church to Paul is to enable the rulers in the heavenly places to see the wisdom of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EPH 3 10 q62l figs-activepassive γνωρισθῇ…ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις…ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the multifaceted wisdom of God might be made known to the rulers and to the authorities in the heavenly places If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may make his great wisdom known to the rulers and authorities in the heavenly places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EPH 3 10 elh2 figs-doublet ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις 1 to the rulers and to the authorities These words share similar meanings. Paul uses them together to emphasize that every spiritual being will know God’s wisdom. If your language does not have two words for this, you can use one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +EPH 3 10 elh2 figs-doublet ταῖς ἀρχαῖς καὶ ταῖς ἐξουσίαις 1 to the rulers and to the authorities The words **rulers** and **authorities** share similar meanings. Paul uses them together to emphasize that every spiritual being will know God’s wisdom. If your language does not have two words for this, you can use one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EPH 3 10 z7vy ἐν τοῖς ἐπουρανίοις 1 in the heavenly places The phrase **heavenly places** refers to the place where God is. See how this is translated in [Ephesians 1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “in the supernatural world” EPH 3 10 ll77 figs-metaphor ἡ πολυποίκιλος σοφία τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the multifaceted wisdom of God Paul talks of God’s **wisdom** as though it were an object with many surfaces. Alternate translation: “the complex wisdom of God” or “how extremely wise God is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 3 11 aaz8 κατὰ πρόθεσιν τῶν αἰώνων 1 according to the eternal purpose Alternate translation: “in keeping with the eternal plan” or “consistent with the eternal plan” From ec7c4e2ffcf3301bb17225e4ec8f2562561fdb50 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 15:10:19 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 427/446] Fix break format in 3 John --- en_tn_65-3JN.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv b/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv index 65275cdbf4..eac3007003 100644 --- a/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -3JN front intro kwv9 0 # Introduction to 3 John\n\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 3 John\n\n1. Introduction (1:1)\n2. Encouragement and instructions to show hospitality (1:2–8)\n3. Diotrephes and Demetrius (1:9–12)\n4. Conclusion (1:13–14)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 3 John?\n\nThe letter does not give the name of the author. The author only identified himself as **The elder** (1:1). The letter was probably written by the apostle John near the end of his life.\n\n### What is the Book of 3 John about?\n\nJohn wrote this letter to a believer named Gaius. He instructed Gaius to be hospitable to fellow believers who were traveling through his area.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “3 John” or “Third John.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Third Letter from John” or “The Third Letter John Wrote”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is hospitality?\n\nHospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. In 2 John, John discouraged Christians from showing hospitality to false teachers. In 3 John, John encouraged Christians to show hospitality to faithful teachers.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### How does the author use family relationships in his letter?\n\nThe author used the terms **brother** and **children** in a way that can be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **brothers** to refer to Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to Christians. Also, John called some believers his **children**. These were believers he taught to obey Christ.\n\nJohn also used the term **Gentile** in a way that could be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **Gentile** to refer to people who are not Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to those who did not believe in Jesus. +3JN front intro kwv9 0 # Introduction to 3 John


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 3 John

1. Introduction (1:1)
2. Encouragement and instructions to show hospitality (1:2–8)
3. Diotrephes and Demetrius (1:9–12)
4. Conclusion (1:13–14)

### Who wrote the Book of 3 John?

The letter does not give the name of the author. The author only identified himself as **The elder** (1:1). The letter was probably written by the apostle John near the end of his life.

### What is the Book of 3 John about?

John wrote this letter to a believer named Gaius. He instructed Gaius to be hospitable to fellow believers who were traveling through his area.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “3 John” or “Third John.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Third Letter from John” or “The Third Letter John Wrote”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is hospitality?

Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. In 2 John, John discouraged Christians from showing hospitality to false teachers. In 3 John, John encouraged Christians to show hospitality to faithful teachers.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How does the author use family relationships in his letter?

The author used the terms **brother** and **children** in a way that can be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **brothers** to refer to Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to Christians. Also, John called some believers his **children**. These were believers he taught to obey Christ.

John also used the term **Gentile** in a way that could be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **Gentile** to refer to people who are not Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to those who did not believe in Jesus. 3JN 1 1 rni7 figs-you 0 General Information: This is a personal letter from John to Gaius. All instances of **you** and **your** refer to Gaius and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 3JN 1 1 w99t figs-explicit ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder **The elder** refers to John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as the **elder** either because of his old age or because he is a leader in the church. The name of the author can be made explicit: “I, John the elder, am writing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3JN 1 1 lls6 translate-names Γαΐῳ 1 to … Gaius **Gaius** is a fellow believer to whom John is writing this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From b6b735e655ad6ad342f054586ccdc610e73347fa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Mon, 17 Oct 2022 19:42:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 428/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index bfe0529f8a..b8d287c478 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -1,27 +1,27 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy

1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1–2:13).
2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).
3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1–4:8).
4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9–22).

### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?

Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.

### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?

As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”

In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?

For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.
* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”
* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 2TI 1 intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1–2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Persecution

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel. -2TI 1 1 p001 translate-names Παῦλος 1 Paul This is the name of a man, the author of the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 1 1 p001 translate-names Παῦλος 1 Paul **Paul** is the name of a man, the author of the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 1 ha4l Παῦλος 1 Paul This letter follows the normal custom of the time by beginning with the name and identity of the author, then mentioning the recipient (in verse 2). Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am writing this letter” 2TI 1 1 vl2g διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ 1 through the will of God Paul became an apostle because God wanted him to be an apostle. Alternate translation: “because of God’s will” or “because God wanted it to be so” 2TI 1 1 e1lg κατ’ 1 according to This could mean: (1) God appointed Paul to tell others about the promise of life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of announcing” (2) Paul became an apostle because he himself received the promise of life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a result of receiving” 2TI 1 1 m9kv figs-metaphor ζωῆς τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 of life that is in Christ Jesus Paul speaks of **life** as if it were an object inside of Jesus. This refers to the life people receive as a result of belonging to Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “of the life that we receive as a result of belonging to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 1 2 p002 translate-names Τιμοθέῳ 1 to Timothy This is the name of a man, the person to whom this letter is written. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 1 2 p002 translate-names Τιμοθέῳ 1 to Timothy **Timothy** is the name of a man, the person to whom this letter is written. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 2 rp5u Τιμοθέῳ 1 to Timothy Your language may have a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “This letter is for you, Timothy” 2TI 1 2 ey7g figs-metaphor ἀγαπητῷ τέκνῳ 1 my beloved child Paul was not Timothy’s father, but he uses the term **child** to express his love and approval of Timothy. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so Paul considered him his child in a spiritual sense. Alternate translation: “who is like a beloved son to me” or “you are like a dear child to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 2 w43q translate-blessing χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ 1 Grace, mercy, and peace from After stating the name of the author and the person who is receiving it (Timothy), Paul adds a blessing to Timothy. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may you experience kindness, mercy, and peace within you from” or “I pray that you will have grace, mercy, and peace from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) -2TI 1 2 p003 figs-abstractnouns χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη 1 Grace, mercy, and peace Paul’s blessing to Timothy includes these three abstract nouns. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2TI 1 2 ub7c guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 God the Father This is an important title for God. Here, **Father** could refer to: (1) the Father of Christ. (2) the Father of believers. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +2TI 1 2 p003 figs-abstractnouns χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη 1 Grace, mercy, and peace Paul’s blessing to Timothy includes the three abstract nouns **Grace**, **mercy**, and **peace**. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2TI 1 2 ub7c guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 God the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Here, **Father** could refer to: (1) the Father of Christ. (2) the Father of believers. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) 2TI 1 2 dcr3 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our In this book, unless otherwise noted, the words **we**, **us**, and **our** refer to Paul (the writer of this letter), Timothy (the one to whom this letter is written), and, by extension, all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 2TI 1 3 p004 figs-abstractnouns χάριν ἔχω τῷ Θεῷ 1 I have gratitude to God If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **gratitude** with a verb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “I thank God” or “I am thankful to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 1 3 tvb7 figs-idiom ᾧ λατρεύω ἀπὸ προγόνων 1 whom I serve from my ancestors This is an idiom that means that Paul’s family has been serving God for many generations. Alternate translation: “whom my ancestors served and I serve, as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2TI 1 3 ha9d figs-metaphor ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει 1 with a clean conscience Paul speaks of his conscience as if it could be physically clean. A person with a **clean conscience** does not feel guilty because he has always tried to do what was right. Alternate translation: “knowing I have tried my hardest to do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 1 3 ha9d figs-metaphor ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει 1 with a clean conscience Paul speaks of his **conscience** as if it could be physically **clean**. A person with a **clean conscience** does not feel guilty because he has always tried to do what was right. Alternate translation: “knowing I have tried my hardest to do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 3 rz7s figs-abstractnouns ὡς ἀδιάλειπτον ἔχω τὴν περὶ σοῦ μνείαν 1 as I have constant remembrance of you Paul speaks of the action of remembering by using the abstract noun **remembrance**. Your language may have a particular way of expressing this concept, such as with a verb. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “as I think about you constantly in my prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 1 3 p005 figs-yousingular σοῦ 1 you The word **you** is singular here and throughout the book, since Paul is addressing Timothy. A note will discuss the one exception in 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) 2TI 1 3 pa6q figs-merism νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας 1 night and day Here, **night and day** are used together to refer to all the time included in the night and the day. This means that Paul prays to God often, no matter what time it is. It does not mean that he prays all night and all day without ever stopping. Alternate translation: “at all times” Alternate translation: “always” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 2TI 1 4 p006 figs-explicit μεμνημένος σου τῶν δακρύων 1 remembering your tears It is implied that Paul is referring here to the time when Paul was leaving Timothy. If this is unclear, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “remembering how you cried when I left you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 1 4 kk82 figs-metonymy σου τῶν δακρύων 1 your tears Here, **your tears** refers to the act of Timothy’s crying or being very sad. Alternate translation: “that you cried” or “your sadness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2TI 1 4 gu8c figs-metaphor χαρᾶς πληρωθῶ 1 I may be filled with joy Paul speaks of himself as if he were a container that someone could **fill**. Alternate translation: “I may be very joyful” or “I may rejoice a lot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 1 4 gu8c figs-metaphor χαρᾶς πληρωθῶ 1 I may be filled with joy Paul speaks of himself as if he were a container that could be **filled**. Alternate translation: “I may be very joyful” or “I may rejoice a lot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 4 p007 figs-activepassive χαρᾶς πληρωθῶ 1 I may be filled with joy If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “joy may fill me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 1 5 ayl4 figs-idiom ὑπόμνησιν λαβὼν 1 having received remembrance This is an idiom that simply means, “remembering.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 1 5 buc3 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως 1 of the genuine faith in you Paul refers to Timothy’s **faith** with an abstract noun. Your language may have a particular way of expressing this concept, such as with a verb. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “that you genuinely believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 8a9a2ed43f78fa0aa49d8e0d16aa8f6eedc1156a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 13:35:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 429/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index b8d287c478..d5c1469426 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -26,9 +26,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 1 5 ayl4 figs-idiom ὑπόμνησιν λαβὼν 1 having received remembrance This is an idiom that simply means, “remembering.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 1 5 buc3 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως 1 of the genuine faith in you Paul refers to Timothy’s **faith** with an abstract noun. Your language may have a particular way of expressing this concept, such as with a verb. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “that you genuinely believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 1 5 p008 figs-metaphor τῆς ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως 1 of the genuine faith in you Paul speaks of **faith** as if it were an object inside of Timothy. Paul is referring to Timothy’s faith in God here, not to anyone’s faith in Timothy. Alternate translation: “your genuine faith” or “your faith that is genuine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 1 5 vgz2 figs-personification ἐν σοὶ…πίστεως, ἥτις ἐνῴκησεν πρῶτον ἐν τῇ μάμμῃ σου, Λωΐδι, καὶ τῇ μητρί σου, Εὐνίκῃ; πέπεισμαι δὲ ὅτι καὶ ἐν σοί 1 of … faith in you, which dwelt first in your grandmother Lois and your mother Eunice, and I am convinced that it is also in you Paul is speaking of their **faith** as if it were something that was alive and lived **in** each of them. Alternate translation: “of … faith that you have. Lois, your grandmother, and then Eunice, your mother, had this genuine faith in God, and now I am confident that you have this same genuine faith as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -2TI 1 5 l8wc translate-names Λωΐδι 1 Lois This is the name of a woman, Timothy’s grandmother, who is probably his mother’s mother. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 1 5 p009 translate-names Εὐνίκῃ 1 Eunice This is the name of a woman, Timothy’s mother. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 1 5 vgz2 figs-personification ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως, ἥτις ἐνῴκησεν πρῶτον ἐν τῇ μάμμῃ σου, Λωΐδι, καὶ τῇ μητρί σου, Εὐνίκῃ; πέπεισμαι δὲ ὅτι καὶ ἐν σοί 1 of … faith in you, which dwelt first in your grandmother Lois and your mother Eunice, and I am convinced that it is also in you Paul is speaking of their **faith** as if it were something that was alive and lived **in** each of them. Alternate translation: “of the genuine faith that you have. Lois, your grandmother, and then Eunice, your mother, had this faith in God, and now I am confident that you have this same genuine faith as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +2TI 1 5 l8wc translate-names Λωΐδι 1 Lois **Lois** is the name of a woman, Timothy’s grandmother, who is probably his mother’s mother. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 1 5 p009 translate-names Εὐνίκῃ 1 Eunice **Eunice** is the name of a woman, Timothy’s mother. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 6 j58k δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν 1 for which reason Paul writes that the **reason** for asking Timothy to rekindle his gift is that he is confident of Timothy’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “for this reason” or “because of your faith in Jesus” 2TI 1 6 h6eq figs-metaphor ἀναζωπυρεῖν τὸ χάρισμα 1 to rekindle the gift Paul speaks about Timothy’s need to start using his **gift** again as if he were restarting a fire. Alternate translation: “be eager once more to use the gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 6 i977 translate-symaction τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 the gift of God that is in you through the laying on of my hands Paul placed his **hands** on Timothy and prayed that God would give him power from God’s Spirit to enable him to do the work that God had called him to do. Then Timothy received the gift from the Holy Spirit. See how you translated this in 1 Tim 4:14. Alternate translation: “the gift of God that you received when I prayed for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 1 8 hi9a τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, κατὰ δύναμιν Θεοῦ 1 for the gospel, according to the power of God Paul is reminding Timothy that God provides people with **power** when they suffer so that they can endure the suffering. Alternate translation: “for the gospel, allowing God to make you strong” 2TI 1 9 ld55 figs-metonymy καλέσαντος κλήσει ἁγίᾳ 1 called us with a holy calling Here, **with a holy calling** could refer to: (1) what results from the calling. The call produces holy people or people set apart for God. Alternate translation: “called us with a calling that sets us apart as holy to God” (2) the source of the calling, which is God, who is holy. Alternate translation: “called us by means of his own holy calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 1 9 lmas οὐ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα ἡμῶν 1 not according to our works It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. If you do start a new sentence, for clarity you may wish to repeat some words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “He did not save us and call us because of our works” -2TI 1 9 kyr5 figs-hendiadys ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἰδίαν πρόθεσιν καὶ χάριν 1 but according to his own purpose and grace Here the words **purpose and grace** work together to mean “gracious purpose.” Paul is saying that God’s purpose or plan for us includes showing us grace or kindness through Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “but because of his gracious purpose” or “but because he planned to show us kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +2TI 1 9 kyr5 figs-hendiadys ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἰδίαν πρόθεσιν καὶ χάριν 1 but according to his own purpose and grace Here the words **purpose** and **grace** work together to mean “gracious purpose.” Paul is saying that God’s purpose or plan for us includes showing us grace or kindness through Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “but because of his gracious purpose” or “but because he planned to show us kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 2TI 1 9 p012 figs-activepassive καὶ χάριν, τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 and grace, which was given to us in Christ Jesus If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and grace, which God gave to us in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 1 9 pq1z figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in Christ Jesus Paul speaks of God’s **purpose and grace** or “gracious purpose” as if it were an object inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to God’s plan to save people that Jesus fulfilled. So when people begin a relationship with Jesus, then God saves them. Alternate translation: “through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 9 zq7m figs-idiom πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων 1 before eternal times This is an idiom that indicates that God decided to save through faith in Christ before time and the creation of the world. Alternate translation: “before time began” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From 1454a1ff67211500ce8141bc5a04e394331108b6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 13:39:45 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 430/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 14 +++++++------- 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index d5c1469426..c268141f86 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -51,30 +51,30 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 1 9 zq7m figs-idiom πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων 1 before eternal times This is an idiom that indicates that God decided to save through faith in Christ before time and the creation of the world. Alternate translation: “before time began” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 1 10 h5e5 figs-metaphor φανερωθεῖσαν δὲ νῦν 1 and which now has been revealed Paul speaks of God’s gracious plan to save us as if it were an object that could be uncovered and shown to people through the arrival of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “and which now people can know” or “and which now people can experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 10 p013 figs-activepassive φανερωθεῖσαν δὲ νῦν 1 and which now has been revealed If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “which now God has revealed” or “which now God has allowed people to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 1 10 i3wl figs-metaphor φωτίσαντος δὲ ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 and brought to light life and immortality through the gospel Paul refers to **life and immortality** as if they were objects that could be brought from darkness into light so that people could see them. He is speaking of revealing something or making it known to people. Alternate translation: “and revealed life and immortality through the gospel” or “and declared life and immortality through the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 1 10 a1n7 figs-hendiadys ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν 1 life and immortality Here, **life and immortality** are probably working together to mean “immortal life.” Alternate translation: “eternal life” or “incorruptible life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +2TI 1 10 i3wl figs-metaphor φωτίσαντος δὲ ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 and brought to light life and immortality through the gospel Paul refers to **life** and **immortality** as if they were objects that could be brought from darkness into light so that people could see them. He is speaking of revealing something or making it known to people. Alternate translation: “and revealed life and immortality through the gospel” or “and declared life and immortality through the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 1 10 a1n7 figs-hendiadys ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν 1 life and immortality Here, **life** and **immortality** are probably working together to mean “immortal life.” Alternate translation: “eternal life” or “incorruptible life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) 2TI 1 11 tb9b figs-activepassive ἐτέθην ἐγὼ κῆρυξ 1 I was appointed a herald If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God chose me to be a herald” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 1 11 p014 translate-unknown κῆρυξ 1 a herald A **herald** is someone who is sent out to announce a message. If your language does not have a similar term and your readers would not know what a **herald** is, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a messenger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 2TI 1 11 p015 figs-metaphor κῆρυξ 1 a herald Paul compares himself to a **herald** because God has sent him out to announce the gospel message. Alternate translation: “a preacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 12 j37g δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν 1 for which reason Paul provides the **reason** for his suffering by referring back to his status as an apostle. Alternate translation: “because I am an apostle” 2TI 1 12 y8l4 figs-explicit καὶ ταῦτα πάσχω 1 I also suffer also these things Paul does not mention the specific **{things}** that he is **suffering**, but from the context of the letter, the implication is that he is referring to suffering as a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I also suffer as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 1 12 td39 πέπεισμαι 1 I am certain Paul expresses that he is certain that God will make everything right in the end. Alternate translation: “I am sure” +2TI 1 12 td39 πέπεισμαι 1 I am certain Paul expresses that he is **certain** that God will make everything right in the end. Alternate translation: “I am sure” 2TI 1 12 p6pi figs-metaphor τὴν παραθήκην μου φυλάξαι 1 to guard my deposit Paul is using a metaphor of a person leaving something with another person who is supposed to protect it until he gives it back to the first person. The two people involved are Jesus and Paul, but it is not clear which one is holding the **deposit**. This could mean: (1) Paul is trusting Jesus to keep something safe that Paul has entrusted to Jesus. This could be Paul’s own life, or, more specifically, that Paul would remain faithful to Jesus all of his life. Alternate translation: “to keep me faithful to him” (2) Paul is trusting Jesus to preserve the good news that Jesus has deposited with Paul for Paul to preach. Alternate translation: “to help me keep preaching his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 12 hhu5 figs-possession τὴν παραθήκην μου 1 my deposit The term **my** here conveys the idea that this **deposit** is associated with Paul in some way. The particular association depends on what we consider the deposit to be. This could mean: (1) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is Paul’s own life or Paul’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “my faithfulness to him” (2) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is the gospel message that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “the gospel message that he has entrusted to me to preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2TI 1 12 qcu3 figs-explicit ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 that day This refers to the **day** when Jesus returns for judgment. Alternate translation: “the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 1 13 h1qd figs-metonymy ὑγιαινόντων λόγων 1 of the healthy words Paul wants Timothy to teach the things that he taught and thereby to follow his example. The expression **the healthy words** means “the correct message” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that the correct message was reasonable. Alternate translation: “the correct message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 1 13 h1qd figs-metonymy ὑγιαινόντων λόγων 1 of the healthy words Paul wants Timothy to teach the things that he taught and thereby to follow his example. The expression **healthy words** means “the correct message” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that the correct message was reasonable. Alternate translation: “of the correct message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 1 13 p016 figs-metonymy λόγων 1 of … words Paul uses the term **words** to describe the expression in words of what Christians believe. Alternate translation: “of … message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 1 13 p017 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the faith and love that are in Christ Jesus Paul uses two abstract nouns, **faith** and **love**, to refer to actions that Timothy should do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 1 13 b2ld ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the faith and love that are in Christ Jesus Here, **love** could refer to: (1) the love that Timothy should show others. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (2) the love that Timothy should show to God. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving him” -2TI 1 13 ix6w figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in Christ Jesus Paul speaks of **faith and love** as if they were objects inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to the faith and love that Jesus enables us to have when we belong to him. See how you translated this phrase in 1:9. Alternate translation: “ours through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 1 13 ix6w figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in Christ Jesus Paul speaks of **faith** and **love** as if they were objects inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to the faith and love that Jesus enables us to have when we belong to him. See how you translated this phrase in 1:9. Alternate translation: “ours through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 14 i5g5 figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην 1 the good deposit Here, **the good deposit** refers to the gospel message that God has entrusted to Timothy to share with his people. Alternate translation: “the good message entrusted to you for God’s people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 1 14 cb5q figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην φύλαξον 1 Guard the good deposit Timothy needs to be alert to protect the gospel message because people will oppose him and try to distort what he says and teaches, turning it into a different message. Alternate translation: “Protect the good deposit against those who will try to distort it” or “Because people will try to distort the gospel message, guard it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 1 14 a3v2 διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 through the Holy Spirit Here, **through** means “by means of” or “by the power of.” Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit” or “with the help of the Holy Spirit” 2TI 1 15 p018 figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ 1 all who are in Asia The word **all** could mean: (1) “many, but not all” in the strict sense, since Timothy and Onesiphorus did not turn away from him. So this would be an example of hyperbole. (2) the men who came to Rome with him from Asia Minor. Alternate translation: “all who came with me from Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -2TI 1 15 p019 translate-names Ἀσίᾳ 1 Asia This is the name of a Roman province, Asia Minor, which had its capital at Ephesus, which is where Timothy was living at the time of this letter. It is now a region in modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 1 15 p019 translate-names Ἀσίᾳ 1 Asia **Asia** here refers to a Roman province, Asia Minor, which had its capital at Ephesus, which is where Timothy was living at the time of this letter. It is now a region in modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 15 p6f4 figs-metaphor ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 turned away from me This is a metaphor that means they left Paul and stopped helping him. Alternate translation: “have deserted me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 15 p020 figs-explicit ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 turned away from me Paul assumes that Timothy would know that the reason that the believers from Asia had abandoned him was because the authorities had put him in prison. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “have deserted me because I am in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 1 15 x6cc translate-names Φύγελος 1 Phygelus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 1 15 x6cc translate-names Φύγελος 1 Phygelus **Phygelus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 15 p021 translate-names Ἑρμογένης 1 Hermogenes This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 16 e6hl translate-names Ὀνησιφόρου 1 of Onesiphorus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 16 izk9 translate-blessing δῴη ἔλεος ὁ Κύριος τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ 1 May the Lord grant mercy to the household of Onesiphorus Paul is asking God to bless the family of Onesiphorus. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be kind to the family of Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord bless the family of Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) From 7a4aa6d6d672c393de462efb64d30f9fcbea64bf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 13:40:51 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 431/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 3 +-- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index c268141f86..b1a0766939 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -74,8 +74,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 1 15 p019 translate-names Ἀσίᾳ 1 Asia **Asia** here refers to a Roman province, Asia Minor, which had its capital at Ephesus, which is where Timothy was living at the time of this letter. It is now a region in modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 15 p6f4 figs-metaphor ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 turned away from me This is a metaphor that means they left Paul and stopped helping him. Alternate translation: “have deserted me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 15 p020 figs-explicit ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 turned away from me Paul assumes that Timothy would know that the reason that the believers from Asia had abandoned him was because the authorities had put him in prison. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “have deserted me because I am in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 1 15 x6cc translate-names Φύγελος 1 Phygelus **Phygelus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 1 15 p021 translate-names Ἑρμογένης 1 Hermogenes This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 1 15 x6cc translate-names Φύγελος…Ἑρμογένης 1 Phygelus **Phygelus** and **Hermogenes** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 16 e6hl translate-names Ὀνησιφόρου 1 of Onesiphorus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 16 izk9 translate-blessing δῴη ἔλεος ὁ Κύριος τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ 1 May the Lord grant mercy to the household of Onesiphorus Paul is asking God to bless the family of Onesiphorus. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be kind to the family of Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord bless the family of Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) 2TI 1 16 zz44 figs-metonymy τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ 1 to the household of Onesiphorus The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and to all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “to Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 3ca23c6537a2e204f9b954e2efdd1caf1e665aad Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 13:42:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 432/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index b1a0766939..ea57e262b4 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -75,19 +75,19 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 1 15 p6f4 figs-metaphor ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 turned away from me This is a metaphor that means they left Paul and stopped helping him. Alternate translation: “have deserted me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 15 p020 figs-explicit ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 turned away from me Paul assumes that Timothy would know that the reason that the believers from Asia had abandoned him was because the authorities had put him in prison. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “have deserted me because I am in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 1 15 x6cc translate-names Φύγελος…Ἑρμογένης 1 Phygelus **Phygelus** and **Hermogenes** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 1 16 e6hl translate-names Ὀνησιφόρου 1 of Onesiphorus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 1 16 izk9 translate-blessing δῴη ἔλεος ὁ Κύριος τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ 1 May the Lord grant mercy to the household of Onesiphorus Paul is asking God to bless the family of Onesiphorus. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be kind to the family of Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord bless the family of Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) +2TI 1 16 izk9 translate-blessing δῴη ἔλεος ὁ Κύριος τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ 1 May the Lord grant mercy to the household of Onesiphorus Paul is asking God to bless the family of **Onesiphorus**. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be kind to the family of Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord bless the family of Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) +2TI 1 16 e6hl translate-names Ὀνησιφόρου 1 of Onesiphorus **Onesiphorus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 16 zz44 figs-metonymy τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ 1 to the household of Onesiphorus The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and to all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “to Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 1 16 td1q figs-metonymy τὴν ἅλυσίν μου οὐκ ἐπησχύνθη 1 was not ashamed of my chain The word **chain** refers to being in prison. Onesiphorus was not ashamed that Paul was in prison but came to visit him frequently. Alternate translation: “was not ashamed of my imprisonment” or “was not ashamed of my being in prison” or “was not ashamed of me, even though I was in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 1 17 xfg1 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 but Here, **but** indicates a contrast between the previous verse and this verse. Instead of being ashamed that Paul was in prison, Onesiphorus searched for Paul and found him there. Use whatever form is most natural in your language to show this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -2TI 1 17 p022 translate-names Ῥώμῃ 1 Rome This is the name of a city, the capital of the Roman Empire. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 1 17 p022 translate-names Ῥώμῃ 1 Rome **Rome** is the name of a city, the capital of the Roman Empire. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 18 p3di translate-blessing δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord Paul is again asking for the Lord to **grant mercy** to Onesiphorus. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. See how you translated this in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be merciful to Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord have mercy on Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) 2TI 1 18 x0eo grammar-connect-logic-result (δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ), καὶ ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord in that day. And how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the action that the first sentence describes. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2TI 1 18 r54t writing-pronouns δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name “Onesiphorus” instead of the pronoun **him** to make it clear who is receiving mercy. Alternate translation: “May Onesiphorus receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 2TI 1 18 x2dk figs-metaphor εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 to find mercy from the Lord Paul speaks of **mercy** as if it were an object that could be found. Paul is expressing his desire that God show **mercy** to Onesiphorus on the day of judgment. Alternate translation: “to receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 1 18 f3ep figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 in that day The expression **that day** refers to the day when God will judge all people; at that time they will receive mercy from the Lord, as Paul mentions, or wrath. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 1 18 p024 translate-names Ἐφέσῳ 1 Ephesus This is the name of a city, the place where Timothy, the recipient of the letter, is located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 1 18 p025 figs-explicit ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well Paul is reminding Timothy that Onesiphorus helped him earlier, in Ephesus. So, Paul is asking the Lord to bless Onesiphorus because he helped Paul several times. Alternate translation: “you know well how much he also helped me earlier when I was in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2TI 1 18 p024 translate-names Ἐφέσῳ 1 Ephesus **Ephesus** is the name of a city, the place where Timothy, the recipient of the letter, is located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 1 18 p025 figs-explicit ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well Paul is reminding Timothy that Onesiphorus helped him earlier, **in Ephesus**. So, Paul is asking the Lord to bless Onesiphorus because he helped Paul several times. Alternate translation: “you know well how much he also helped me earlier when I was in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 intro k3zn 0 # 2 Timothy 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 11b–13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### We will reign with him

Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Analogies

In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house. 2TI 2 1 bll5 figs-metaphor τέκνον μου 1 my child Here, **child** is a term of great love and approval. Timothy is not Paul’s biological child. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so this is why Paul considered him like his own child. Alternate translation: “who are like my child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 1 p026 figs-activepassive ἐνδυναμοῦ 1 be strengthened you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “let God make you strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) From 61d30090e7beefe6a5812dde6fb21900c5f9d8ce Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 09:47:19 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 433/446] Corrected initial capitalization of two notes in Luke and Philippians --- en_tn_43-LUK.tsv | 4 ++-- en_tn_51-PHP.tsv | 2 +- 2 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv index 85c1d3c9eb..cc112d567e 100644 --- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv @@ -565,8 +565,8 @@ LUK 3 21 l199 figs-events ἐγένετο δὲ 1 and it happened that The previ LUK 3 21 phe6 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 and it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 3 21 r2x1 figs-activepassive βαπτισθῆναι ἅπαντα τὸν λαὸν 1 when all the people were being baptized If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “while John was baptizing all the people who came to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 3 21 l200 figs-hyperbole ἅπαντα τὸν λαὸν 1 all the people The phrase **all the people** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “all the people who came to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -LUK 3 21 nw1s figs-activepassive καὶ Ἰησοῦ βαπτισθέντος 1 Jesus also was baptized you could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “John also baptized Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -LUK 3 21 i5zg figs-activepassive ἀνεῳχθῆναι τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 the heavens were opened you could express this with an active form. This was more than a simple clearing of the clouds, but it is not clear exactly what the expression means, so it may be best not to try to specify what happened too exactly. Alternate translation: “the sky opened up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LUK 3 21 nw1s figs-activepassive καὶ Ἰησοῦ βαπτισθέντος 1 Jesus also was baptized You could express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “John also baptized Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +LUK 3 21 i5zg figs-activepassive ἀνεῳχθῆναι τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 the heavens were opened You could express this with an active form. This was more than a simple clearing of the clouds, but it is not clear exactly what the expression means, so it may be best not to try to specify what happened too exactly. Alternate translation: “the sky opened up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 3 22 q2yh figs-personification φωνὴν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ γενέσθαι 1 a voice came from heaven Luke speaks of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could come from heaven to earth. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven and said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 3 22 h7tn guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου 1 my … Son This is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) LUK 3 23 uvm3 writing-background καὶ 1 And Luke uses this word to introduce background information about Jesus’ age and ancestors. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) diff --git a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv index 2de8efbef7..54e4717235 100644 --- a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv +++ b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ PHP 1 28 l495 writing-pronouns ἥτις ἐστὶν αὐτοῖς ἔνδει PHP 1 28 t225 figs-abstractnouns ἀπωλείας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** by using a verb form or by expressing it in some other way that would be clear in your language. Alternate translation: “that God will destroy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 28 ypn8 figs-abstractnouns σωτηρίας 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** by using a verb form of this word or by expressing it in some other way that would be clear in your language. Alternate translation: (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 28 nb4b writing-pronouns τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 The word **this** in the phrase **this from God** could refer to: (1) what comes before it in this verse, both the courage God gives the Philippian Christians and the sign that their courage gives to those opposing them. Alternate translation: “your lack of fear and the evidence it gives is all from God” (2) the sign given to those who oppose the Philippian Christians. Alternate translation: “this sign is from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -PHP 1 29 qous figs-activepassive ὑμῖν ἐχαρίσθη τὸ 1 you could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God has graciously granted to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +PHP 1 29 qous figs-activepassive ὑμῖν ἐχαρίσθη τὸ 1 You could express this with an active form, and you could state who did the action. Alternate translation: “God has graciously granted to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) PHP 1 30 x4z3 figs-abstractnouns τὸν αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα ἔχοντες 1 having the same struggle which you saw in me, and now you hear in me If the abstract noun **struggle** would be confusing in your language, you could express it with a verb phrase, as the UST does, or by expressing the idea behind this word in some other way that would be clear in your language. Alternate translation: “facing the same strife” or “enduring the same trials” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) PHP 1 30 cewf figs-metaphor τὸν αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα ἔχοντες, οἷον εἴδετε ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 Here, the word **struggle** is a figurative way of referring to the conflict that Paul and the Philippian believers had with people who opposed them because of their faith. Paul speaks of it here as if it were a military battle or an athletic competition. If this would be unclear in your language, you could state this in plain language. Alternate translation: “as you experience the same opposition from people that you saw that I experienced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 1 30 hnec figs-idiom εἴδετε ἐν ἐμοὶ, καὶ νῦν ἀκούετε ἐν ἐμοί 1 Here, the phrase **in me** occurs twice, both times referring to what Paul is experiencing. If this would be unclear in your language, you could express this in a way that is understandable in your language. Alternate translation: “you saw me experience and now hear that I am experiencing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) From d0e956ef84e0f326688d4ba1ffad1466aeb6e842 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 13:51:35 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 434/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index ea57e262b4..d36d6a8aaa 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -90,27 +90,27 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 1 18 p025 figs-explicit ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well Paul is reminding Timothy that Onesiphorus helped him earlier, **in Ephesus**. So, Paul is asking the Lord to bless Onesiphorus because he helped Paul several times. Alternate translation: “you know well how much he also helped me earlier when I was in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 intro k3zn 0 # 2 Timothy 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 11b–13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### We will reign with him

Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Analogies

In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house. 2TI 2 1 bll5 figs-metaphor τέκνον μου 1 my child Here, **child** is a term of great love and approval. Timothy is not Paul’s biological child. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so this is why Paul considered him like his own child. Alternate translation: “who are like my child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 1 p026 figs-activepassive ἐνδυναμοῦ 1 be strengthened you could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “let God make you strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +2TI 2 1 p026 figs-activepassive ἐνδυναμοῦ 1 be strengthened You could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “let God make you strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 2 1 e6ex figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ χάριτι τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the grace that is in Christ Jesus Paul wants Timothy to experience the strength that God provides through his **grace** or kindness. Believers experience God’s grace through knowing Jesus Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “as you allow Christ Jesus to kindly empower you through your relationship to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 2 2 ig9v figs-explicit διὰ πολλῶν μαρτύρων 1 along with many witnesses Paul is referring to teaching in a public setting with others present. The implication is that those others could testify as to what he taught. Alternate translation: “in the presence of people who can testify to what I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 2 2 kv1m figs-metaphor ταῦτα παράθου πιστοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 entrust these things to faithful men Paul speaks of his instructions to Timothy as if they were objects that Timothy could give to other people and trust them to use correctly. Alternate translation: “commit them” or “teach them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 2 kv1m figs-metaphor ταῦτα παράθου 1 entrust these things to faithful men Paul speaks of his instructions to Timothy as if they were objects that Timothy could give to other people and trust them to use correctly. Alternate translation: “commit them” or “teach them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 2 p027 figs-gendernotations πιστοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 to faithful men Here the term **men** has a generic sense that may include women. Alternate translation: “to faithful people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2TI 2 3 yc1j figs-explicit συνκακοπάθησον 1 Suffer together Here, **together** could mean: (1) Timothy should suffer together with Paul. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with me” (2) Timothy should suffer together with all Christians who suffer. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with all believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 3 juu2 figs-metaphor ὡς καλὸς στρατιώτης Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 as a good soldier of Jesus Christ Paul compares suffering for Christ Jesus to the suffering that a good soldier endures. Alternate translation: “as if you were a soldier and Jesus Christ were your commander” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 4 a4x7 figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς στρατευόμενος ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 No one serving as a soldier gets entangled in the affairs of life To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a soldier who has to decide between pleasing his leader or pleasing those outside the army. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this. Alternate translation: “Consider that no dedicated soldier allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 4 a4x7 figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς στρατευόμενος ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 No one serving as a soldier gets entangled in the affairs of life To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a **soldier** who has to decide between pleasing his leader or pleasing those outside the army. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this. Alternate translation: “Consider that no dedicated soldier allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 4 p7n5 figs-metaphor ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 gets entangled in the affairs of life Paul speaks of being involved in other matters as if they were a net that trapped people and kept them from being able to move freely. Alternate translation: “allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 4 p028 figs-activepassive ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 gets entangled in the affairs of life If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 2 4 p029 figs-explicit τοῦ βίου 1 of life By **life**, Paul means, in the context of this metaphor, “civilian life.” The implication is that Timothy and all believers should not allow competing concerns to keep them from serving Christ. Alternate translation: “of everyday life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 4 d2lg τῷ στρατολογήσαντι 1 the one who enlisted him Alternate translation: “his leader” or “the one who commands him” -2TI 2 5 d483 figs-metaphor ἐὰν…ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 if anyone competes, he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of an athlete who has to decide between competing lawfully or not lawfully. The athlete will only receive the crown given to the winner if he competes lawfully. By making this comparison with an athlete competing in games, Paul is implicitly telling Timothy that Christ will not reward him unless he serves him **lawfully**, that is, unless he obeys him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “consider that the officials only crown an athlete as the winner if he competes according to the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 5 d483 figs-metaphor ἐὰν…ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 if anyone competes, he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of an athlete who has to decide between competing **lawfully** or not lawfully. The athlete will only receive the crown given to the winner if he competes lawfully. By making this comparison with an athlete competing in games, Paul is implicitly telling Timothy that Christ will not reward him unless he serves him **lawfully**, that is, unless he obeys him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “consider that the officials only crown an athlete as the winner if he competes according to the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 5 p031 figs-hypo ἐὰν…ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 if anyone competes, he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully Paul is also using a hypothetical situation to teach Timothy. Alternate translation: “suppose an athlete did not compete by the rules. Then he would not be crowned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) 2TI 2 5 p032 ἐὰν…ἀθλῇ τις 1 if anyone competes Here, **competes** refers to competing in an athletic event. Alternate translation: “if an athlete competes in an event” 2TI 2 5 xbn6 figs-doublenegatives οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this double negative by translating it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “the officials will only crown him if he competes by the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) 2TI 2 5 p033 figs-activepassive οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 he is not crowned If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “the officials will not crown him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 2 5 p034 figs-explicit οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 he is not crowned Paul assumes that Timothy will know that in this culture crowning indicated the winner of a competition. Alternate translation: “the officials will not crown him as the winner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 2 5 lea8 translate-unknown οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 he is not crowned In Paul’s time, when athletes won competitions, they were crowned with wreaths made from the leaves of plants. You can express this idea in your translation by referring to the comparable custom in your own culture, or by using a general expression. Alternate translation: “the officials will not give him an award” or “the officials will not declare him to be the winner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +2TI 2 5 lea8 translate-unknown οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 he is not crowned In Paul’s time, when athletes won competitions, they were **crowned** with wreaths made from the leaves of plants. You can express this idea in your translation by referring to the comparable custom in your own culture, or by using a general expression. Alternate translation: “the officials will not give him an award” or “the officials will not declare him to be the winner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 2TI 2 5 reg6 figs-explicit μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 he has competed lawfully Paul is referring to the rules that governed a competition. The athletes had to obey the rules or they would be removed from the competition and not have an opportunity to win. If it would be helpful in your language, you could mention these rules. Alternate translation: “he does not compete according to the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 2 6 wz35 figs-metaphor τὸν κοπιῶντα γεωργὸν δεῖ πρῶτον τῶν καρπῶν μεταλαμβάνειν 1 The hardworking farmer ought to be first to receive of the crops To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a farmer who has to decide between working hard or not working hard. The farmer will receive a share of the harvest if he is working hard. By making this comparison, Paul is encouraging Timothy to work hard in his service to Christ so that God will reward him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “Consider that a farmer who works hard should receive a share of the crops before anyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 6 wz35 figs-metaphor τὸν κοπιῶντα γεωργὸν δεῖ πρῶτον τῶν καρπῶν μεταλαμβάνειν 1 The hardworking farmer ought to be first to receive of the crops To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a **farmer** who has to decide between working hard or not working hard. The farmer will receive a share of the harvest if he is working hard. By making this comparison, Paul is encouraging Timothy to work hard in his service to Christ so that God will reward him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “Consider that a farmer who works hard should receive a share of the crops before anyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 6 p035 figs-explicit πρῶτον τῶν καρπῶν μεταλαμβάνειν 1 first to receive of the crops In this illustration, it seems that the hardworking farmer is working with other farmers who will all receive a part of the crop after the harvest. But since this farmer works harder than the others, he should receive before the others. It is implied that receiving first is best, possibly because the quality of the crop is better. Alternate translation: “receive the best share of the crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 7 bdk9 figs-explicit νόει ὃ λέγω, δώσει γάρ σοι ὁ Κύριος σύνεσιν 1 Think about what I am saying, for the Lord will give you understanding Paul gave Timothy three metaphors in verses 3–6, but he did not completely explain their implications. He expected Timothy to figure out, with God’s help, the lesson of these metaphors for Christ’s servants. For that reason, if you want to include an explanation of the meaning of the metaphors, we recommend that you state the meaning in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. Alternate translation: “you will have to think carefully about what I have just told you to understand it completely, but you can depend on God to help you to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 7 p036 figs-metonymy ὃ λέγω 1 what I am saying Paul refers to what he has just written in his letter with the verb **saying** to express the idea of communicating. Alternate translation: “what I have just told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 42c3df980c08d02eaafefd991996c9d8af97f0f7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 13:54:31 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 435/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index d36d6a8aaa..909e385f34 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -115,9 +115,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 7 bdk9 figs-explicit νόει ὃ λέγω, δώσει γάρ σοι ὁ Κύριος σύνεσιν 1 Think about what I am saying, for the Lord will give you understanding Paul gave Timothy three metaphors in verses 3–6, but he did not completely explain their implications. He expected Timothy to figure out, with God’s help, the lesson of these metaphors for Christ’s servants. For that reason, if you want to include an explanation of the meaning of the metaphors, we recommend that you state the meaning in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. Alternate translation: “you will have to think carefully about what I have just told you to understand it completely, but you can depend on God to help you to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 7 p036 figs-metonymy ὃ λέγω 1 what I am saying Paul refers to what he has just written in his letter with the verb **saying** to express the idea of communicating. Alternate translation: “what I have just told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 7 a22q figs-explicit ἐν πᾶσιν 1 in everything Here, **in everything** refers to everything related to the three metaphors that Paul has written just before this. Alternate translation: “about everything that I have just said” or “about all that I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 2 8 mh1k figs-metaphor ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυείδ 1 from the seed of David The phrase **from the seed of** refers to Jesus being descended from King David. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 8 p037 translate-names Δαυείδ 1 of David This is the name of a man, a great king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 2 8 wt31 figs-idiom ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised from the dead The expression **raised from the dead** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “whom God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2TI 2 8 mh1k figs-metaphor ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυείδ 1 from the seed of David The phrase **from {the} seed of** refers to Jesus being descended from King David. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 8 p037 translate-names Δαυείδ 1 of David **David** is the name of a man, a great king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 2 8 wt31 figs-idiom ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised from the dead The expression **raised from {the} dead** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “whom God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 2 8 p038 figs-activepassive ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised from the dead If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “whom God raised from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 2 8 s4vh figs-possession κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου 1 according to my gospel The term **my** conveys the idea that it is the gospel associated with Paul because he preaches it. Alternate translation: “according to the gospel message that I preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 2TI 2 9 t2ax figs-metonymy μέχρι δεσμῶν 1 unto chains Paul uses the expression **unto chains** to express how far his suffering has gone: from being beaten, to being arrested, to being in chains in prison. Alternate translation: “to the point of being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -127,14 +127,14 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 9 p041 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Paul uses the term **word** to describe the message from God that he and others are communicating with words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 10 p042 figs-hyperbole πάντα ὑπομένω 1 I endure all things Here the term **all** is a generalization that likely refers to the sufferings that Paul describes in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I endure all of these sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 2TI 2 10 aa1x figs-nominaladj διὰ τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς 1 for the chosen The term **chosen** is an adjective that functions as a noun here and refers to a group of people. If your language would not use an adjective in that way, you could translate this term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “for the people whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -2TI 2 10 j2bk καὶ αὐτοὶ σωτηρίας τύχωσιν τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 they also may obtain the salvation that is in Christ Jesus The phrase **obtain the salvation** could also be expressed with Christ Jesus, who grants salvation, as the subject. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus may grant them salvation” +2TI 2 10 j2bk καὶ αὐτοὶ σωτηρίας τύχωσιν τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 they also may obtain the salvation that is in Christ Jesus The phrase **obtain salvation** could also be expressed with Christ Jesus, who grants salvation, as the subject. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus may grant them salvation” 2TI 2 10 p043 figs-abstractnouns καὶ αὐτοὶ σωτηρίας τύχωσιν τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 they also may obtain the salvation that is in Christ Jesus If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus may save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 2 10 el68 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ δόξης αἰωνίου 1 with eternal glory The abstract noun **glory** refers to the wonderful condition that people will experience when they are in the presence of God. It comes from God himself and he shares it with those who are saved by Jesus Christ, and this condition is **eternal**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “and know how glorious it is to be with God forever” or “and experience God’s wonderful presence forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 2 11 nr7u πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy In this context, the term **word** refers to the statement of doctrine that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1 Timothy 1:15](../1ti/01/15.md) Alternate translation: “This statement is dependable” 2TI 2 11 p044 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy You could represent the meaning of the adjective **trustworthy** with an active verb, if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you could trust this statement” 2TI 2 11 p045 figs-quotemarks πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. The words that follow in the rest of this verse and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md) are a poem or hymn that expresses the message that Paul says is trustworthy. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these words as a direct quotation or by setting them farther to the right, as the General Notes at the beginning of this chapter suggest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 2TI 2 11 g6e4 writing-poetry εἰ γὰρ συναπεθάνομεν, καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 For if we died with him, we will also live with him This is the beginning of a poem or hymn that Paul is probably quoting. If your language has a way of indicating that this is poetry, such as by setting individual phrases on separate lines, you could use it here and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md). If not, you could translate this material as regular prose rather than as poetry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]]) -2TI 2 11 in38 figs-metaphor εἰ…συναπεθάνομεν 1 if we died with him Paul is speaking since he and Timothy and other believers who should trust this statement have not actually died. This could refer to: (1) the way that believers accept Jesus’ death for their sins when they trust him for salvation. This means that they have “died” to their old life of sin. Alternate translation: “if we have ended our old way of life by accepting Jesus’ death for us” (2) the way that people who believe in Jesus may suffer for him, possibly to the point of dying for him. Alternate translation: “if we are prepared to die for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 11 in38 figs-metaphor εἰ…συναπεθάνομεν 1 if we died with him Paul is speaking since he and Timothy and other believers who should trust this statement have not actually **died**. This could refer to: (1) the way that believers accept Jesus’ death for their sins when they trust him for salvation. This means that they have “died” to their old life of sin. Alternate translation: “if we have ended our old way of life by accepting Jesus’ death for us” (2) the way that people who believe in Jesus may suffer for him, possibly to the point of dying for him. Alternate translation: “if we are prepared to die for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 11 p046 καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 we will also live with him Although Paul is referring to dying with Christ in a figurative sense, **live** is probably not figurative, but could refer to: (1) life after physical death. This seems most likely given Paul’s mention of “eternal glory” in the previous verse and “we will reign with him” in the next. Alternate translation: “then God will raise us from the dead to live with Jesus” (2) how believers will act in this life before physical death. Alternate translation: “we will not pursue our own desires, instead we will do what Jesus wants us to do” 2TI 2 12 p048 εἰ ἀρνησόμεθα 1 if we deny him Paul uses the term **deny** to refer to the action of believers saying that they do not know Jesus Christ during this present life. It is presented as the opposite of **endure**, so it refers to someone who gives in to persecution and denies being a follower of Jesus. Alternate translation: “if we say now that we do not know him” 2TI 2 12 p049 κἀκεῖνος ἀρνήσεται ἡμᾶς 1 he also will deny us In this second usage of the word **deny**, Paul is referring to the action of Jesus Christ on the day of final judgment. On that day, Jesus will either receive a faithful believer or reject those who are not true followers. Those who deny that they are followers of Jesus while on earth are not true followers. Alternate translation: “he will reject us on the day of judgment” From 2518332cd902127e4b573d40c9289ecc451c901c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 14:05:49 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 436/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 10 +++++----- 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index 909e385f34..b0cab09b13 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 13 ke4w εἰ ἀπιστοῦμεν 1 if we are unfaithful Paul uses the word **unfaithful** to express the condition of believers who do not continue to obey Jesus, but rather disobey him. Alternate translation: “if we disobey Jesus” or “if we do not do what Jesus wants us to do” 2TI 2 13 p050 figs-explicit ἐκεῖνος πιστὸς μένει 1 he remains faithful This could mean : (1) he remains faithful to them. (2) he remains true to himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 13 ihd4 ἀρνήσασθαι…ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται 1 he is not able to deny himself Paul states that Jesus is not able to **deny himself**, meaning that Jesus is not able to go against his character and will remain true to what he said he would do. Paul may have one or both of the following ideas in mind. (1) Jesus’ character includes being the Savior who can forgive our unfaithfulness when we repent of it, as Peter experienced (John 21:15–19). This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains faithful to us.” (2) Jesus’ character also includes being the holy God who judges people for their sin when they do not repent. This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains true to himself.” Alternate translation: “he must always act according to his character” -2TI 2 14 u661 ὑπομίμνῃσκε 1 Remind them The word **them**, which is implicit in the Greek verb, probably refers to the people that Timothy has responsibility over. Alternate translation: “Remind the people there” +2TI 2 14 u661 ὑπομίμνῃσκε 1 Remind them The word **{them}**, which is implicit in the Greek verb, probably refers to the people that Timothy has responsibility over. Alternate translation: “Remind the people there” 2TI 2 14 p051 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God Paul uses the expression **before God**, which means “in front of God,” to mean “where God can see.” Seeing, in turn, means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “as God is watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 14 r5lq figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God The implication is that Paul is telling Timothy to tell the believers, when he gives them this command, that God will be watching what they do. Alternate translation: “with God as their witness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 14 g6p7 figs-metaphor μὴ λογομαχεῖν 1 not to battle about words Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. This could mean: (1) the believers are not to argue about unimportant things such as the words that someone uses to present the gospel message. That only distracts people from talking about important things, such as the gospel message itself. Alternate translation: “not to fight about small things like words” (2) the believers are not to argue about what words mean. Again, this causes disunity among the believers for no good reason. Alternate translation: “not to fight about the meanings of words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -153,12 +153,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 15 xgz9 figs-metaphor ὀρθοτομοῦντα τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 cutting the word of truth straight Paul refers to **the word of truth** as if it were a path that someone was cutting through difficult terrain. When such a path is **straight**, travelers can follow it directly to their destination. By contrast, the useless discussions that Paul describes in [2:14](../02/14.md) and [2:16](../02/16.md) would be needless detours in terms of this same metaphor. Alternate translation: “show people how to follow the Scriptures directly” or “teach the Scriptures correctly so that people can follow them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 15 p052 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the word of truth Paul uses the term **word** to refer to something that is expressed in words. This could refer to: (1) the message that Timothy is to teach. Alternate translation: “the true message” (2) the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 15 p053 figs-abstractnouns τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the word of truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the true message” or “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2TI 2 16 e27q figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πλεῖον…προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας 1 they will advance into greater ungodliness Paul speaks of these discussions as if they could physically progress in a certain direction, and he speaks of godlessness as that direction. Paul is describing the effect that these discussions have on people. Alternate translation: “they cause people to become more and more ungodly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 16 e27q figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πλεῖον…προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας 1 they will advance into greater ungodliness Paul speaks of these discussions as if they could physically progress in a certain direction, and he speaks of **ungodliness** as that direction. Paul is describing the effect that these discussions have on people. Alternate translation: “they cause people to become more and more ungodly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 17 i73t figs-simile ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν ὡς γάγγραινα νομὴν ἕξει 1 their word will have a spreading like gangrene This is a simile. It means that something will spread from person to person and harm the faith of all those who hear it. The thing that will spread could refer to: (1) the habit of having useless and godless discussions. (2) the things that the people were saying in these empty discussions, or both. Alternate translation: “these empty discussions will spread quickly and cause destruction like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 2TI 2 17 p054 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν 1 their word Paul uses the term **word** to refer to something that is expressed in words. Alternate translation: “these discussions” or “what people who take part in these discussions say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2TI 2 17 p055 translate-unknown ὡς γάγγραινα 1 like gangrene **Gangrene** is type of tissue death caused by infection or lack of blood circulation. It quickly spreads in a person’s body and can lead to death. If your readers would not know what **gangrene** is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -2TI 2 17 p056 writing-pronouns ὧν ἐστιν Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 among whom are Hymenaeus and Philetus Paul gives Timothy the names of two men who are examples of ungodliness and foolish talk. To make the relationship between these names and the preceding **their word** clear in your language, you may have to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Hymeneus and Philetus are such people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -2TI 2 17 x2k6 translate-names Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 Hymenaeus and Philetus These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 2 17 p055 translate-unknown ὡς γάγγραινα 1 like gangrene “Gangrene” is type of tissue death caused by infection or lack of blood circulation. It quickly spreads in a person’s body and can lead to death. If your readers would not know what **gangrene** is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +2TI 2 17 p056 writing-pronouns ὧν ἐστιν Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 among whom are Hymenaeus and Philetus Paul gives Timothy the names of **Hymenaeus** and **Philetus** examples of ungodliness and foolish talk. To make the relationship between these names and the preceding **their word** clear in your language, you may have to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Hymeneus and Philetus are such people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2TI 2 17 x2k6 translate-names Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 Hymenaeus and Philetus **Hymenaeus** and **Philetus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 2 18 fi9z figs-metaphor οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν 1 who have missed the mark regarding the truth Paul uses this expression to speak of faith in Christ as if it were a target at which people should aim. Those who have **missed the mark** do not believe or teach what is true. Alternate translation: “who are teaching things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 18 p057 figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν 1 who have missed the mark regarding the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “who teach things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 2 18 pu22 figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασιν ἤδη γεγονέναι 1 the resurrection has already happened If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **resurrection** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “God has already raised the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From 07c3c3d51ace1d84686f732520b9c0695bf49f0d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 14:09:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 437/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 12 ++++++------ 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index b0cab09b13..5f14b8bc83 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -163,29 +163,29 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 18 p057 figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν 1 who have missed the mark regarding the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “who teach things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 2 18 pu22 figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασιν ἤδη γεγονέναι 1 the resurrection has already happened If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **resurrection** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “God has already raised the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 2 18 ura5 figs-metaphor ἀνατρέπουσιν τήν τινων πίστιν 1 who are destroying the faith of some Paul refers to **faith** as though it were an object that could be destroyed. Alternate translation: “they are causing some people to stop believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 19 ir1z figs-metaphor ὁ…στερεὸς θεμέλιος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἕστηκεν 1 the firm foundation of God stands Paul uses the image of the foundation of a building to explain that even though a false and destructive message has been destroying the faith of some people, God has nevertheless given people who want to continue to follow him a true message, which provides for them a safe and secure “place to stand.” Alternate translation: “God has provided a secure basis for people to continue to believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 19 ir1z figs-metaphor ὁ…στερεὸς θεμέλιος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἕστηκεν 1 the firm foundation of God stands Paul uses the image of the **foundation** of a building to explain that even though a false and destructive message has been destroying the faith of some people, God has nevertheless given people who want to continue to follow him a true message, which provides for them a safe and secure “place to stand.” Alternate translation: “God has provided a secure basis for people to continue to believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 19 p058 figs-metonymy ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην 1 having this seal Paul speaks of the inscription on this foundation as if it were a **seal**, since seals on the outside of documents often bore inscriptions describing their contents. Alternate translation: “having this inscription” or “which can be described in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 19 p059 figs-quotemarks ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην 1 having this seal Paul uses this phrase to introduce two direct quotations. The statements that follow in the rest of this verse describe two aspects of the basis that God has provided for people to continue to believe in him. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these statements as quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -2TI 2 19 nd7t figs-idiom ὁ ὀνομάζων τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 who names the name of the Lord The expression **names the name of the Lord** is an idiom that refers to saying the name of the Lord in order to declare that one belongs to him. Alternate translation: “who says he believes in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2TI 2 19 nd7t figs-idiom ὁ ὀνομάζων τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 who names the name of the Lord The expression **names the name of {the} Lord** is an idiom that refers to saying the name of the Lord in order to declare that one belongs to him. Alternate translation: “who says he believes in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 2 19 y3bc figs-abstractnouns ἀποστήτω ἀπὸ ἀδικίας 1 must abstain from unrighteousness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “must stop doing evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2TI 2 20 p060 figs-metaphor ἐν μεγάλῃ δὲ οἰκίᾳ, οὐκ ἔστιν μόνον σκεύη χρυσᾶ καὶ ἀργυρᾶ, ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα 1 Now in a great house, there are not only gold and silver containers, but also wood and clay To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor that compares the containers that are in the home of a wealthy person with people in the church. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that this is a metaphor or illustration. Alternate translation: “Consider this illustration: in the home of a wealthy person, there are containers made of gold and silver, and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 20 p060 figs-metaphor ἐν μεγάλῃ δὲ οἰκίᾳ, οὐκ ἔστιν μόνον σκεύη χρυσᾶ καὶ ἀργυρᾶ, ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα 1 Now in a great house, there are not only gold and silver containers, but also wood and clay To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor that compares the **containers** that are in the home of a wealthy person with people in the church. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that this is a metaphor or illustration. Alternate translation: “Consider this illustration: in the home of a wealthy person, there are containers made of gold and silver, and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 20 p061 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα 1 but also wood and clay Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2TI 2 20 j75l σκεύη 1 containers The word **container** is a general term for items used to hold other things, such as grain, food, drink, or refuse. If your language does not have a general word, you can use a specific word such as “bowl” or “pot.” 2TI 2 20 mt5e figs-abstractnouns ἃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν, ἃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν 1 both some for honor and some for dishonor If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **honor** and **dishonor** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “he uses the former at events to honor people and he uses the latter to do things that no one wants to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 2 21 jm3p figs-metaphor ἐκκαθάρῃ ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ τούτων 1 has cleansed himself from these Here Paul continues the metaphor that compares people in the church to containers in a great house that have different uses. Paul speaks of a person washing himself clean as though he had been a pot full of something bad. By this he means that the person has given up certain associations or activities. Here, **these** could refer to: (1) the false teachers who are destroying the faith of some people. Alternate translation: “has disassociated himself from these false teachers” (2) the activities of quarreling and false teaching that Paul has warned Timothy about. Alternate translation: “has stopped doing these ungodly actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 21 g79f figs-metaphor ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 he will be a container for honor Paul speaks of a person who has given up these associations or activities as if he were a particular kind of container. Alternate translation: “he will be like a dish for special occasions” or “he will be like a dish that is used to honor people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 21 g79f figs-metaphor ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 he will be a container for honor Paul speaks of a person who has given up these associations or activities as if he were a particular kind of **container**. Alternate translation: “he will be like a dish for special occasions” or “he will be like a dish that is used to honor people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 21 p062 figs-explicit ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 he will be a container for honor The implication is that God will be able to give important assignments to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will be someone to whom God can give important assignments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 2 21 mh63 ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν, ἡγιασμένον εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ, εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 he will be a container for honor, having been sanctified, useful to the Master, having been prepared for every good work These four phrases could mean: (1) the ones beginning with **having been** give the reason for the phrase before them. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor because he has been sanctified, and he will be useful to the Master because he has been prepared for every good work” (2) all four phrases could simply be describing the person. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor, someone who is sanctified, useful to the Master, and ready for every good work” 2TI 2 21 p063 figs-activepassive ἡγιασμένον 1 having been sanctified If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for himself” or “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 2 21 nl5d figs-metaphor ἡγιασμένον 1 having been sanctified If this phrase is continuing the metaphor of objects in a house, then Paul is referring to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities as if he were a precious object whose owner keeps it in a special place. Whether this phrase is continuing the metaphor or not, it still expresses the idea of being “dedicated” for a special purpose. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 21 p064 figs-metaphor εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ 1 useful to the Master In the context of the metaphor of the house, Paul speaks of God as the head of the household. Alternate translation: “useful to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 21 p065 figs-activepassive εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 having been prepared for every good work If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “who has gotten himself ready to do any good work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 2 22 h9p6 figs-metaphor τὰς…νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε 1 flee youthful lusts Paul speaks about youthful desires as if they were a dangerous person or animal that Timothy should run away from. Alternate translation: “control your youthful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 22 h9p6 figs-metaphor τὰς…νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε 1 flee youthful lusts Paul speaks about **youthful** desires as if they were a dangerous person or animal that Timothy should run away from. Alternate translation: “control your youthful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 22 p066 figs-metonymy τὰς…νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε 1 flee youthful lusts Paul speaks of immoral activities by association with the desires that lead a person to engage in them. Alternate translation: “refuse to do the wrong things that young people want to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 22 srb7 figs-metaphor δίωκε δὲ δικαιοσύνην, πίστιν, ἀγάπην, εἰρήνην 1 and pursue righteousness, faith, love, and peace Paul is using the verb **pursue** in contrast to **flee**. He speaks of these positive things as if Timothy should run towards them because they will do him good. Alternate translation: “be eager to do what is right, to believe in God, to love God and others, and to live in peace with people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 22 p067 figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην, πίστιν, ἀγάπην, εἰρήνην 1 righteousness, faith, love, and peace If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **righteousness**, **faith**, **love**, and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “do what is right, believe in God, love other people, and live peacefully with other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 2 22 hg99 μετὰ τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 with those who call on the Lord from a clean heart This likely means that Paul wants Timothy to pursue these positive things together with others who are sincere in their faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could put this phrase at the beginning of Paul’s command to Timothy, as in the UST, before **pursue**. Alternate translation: “together with those who worship the Lord with sincere intentions” -2TI 2 22 gl3q figs-idiom τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον 1 those who call on the Lord The expression **call on the Lord** is an idiom that means to trust and worship the Lord. Alternate translation: “those who worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2TI 2 22 gl3q figs-idiom τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον 1 those who call on the Lord The expression **calling on the Lord** is an idiom that means to trust and worship the Lord. Alternate translation: “those who worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 2 22 p068 figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a clean heart Paul uses a physical part of the body, the **heart**, to represent the intentions and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 22 b2ti figs-metaphor ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a clean heart Paul uses the word **clean** to describe the intentions or thoughts of a person as though they were an object that could be made clean. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 23 tmf7 figs-metonymy τὰς…μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις παραιτοῦ 1 avoid foolish and ignorant questions Paul refers to certain kinds of discussions by association with the kind of questions that people might ask that would lead to these discussions or by association with the kind of people that would ask these questions. Alternate translation: “do not become involved in foolish and ignorant discussions” or “do not allow people to involve you in discussions that they start because they are foolish and ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From ac02e6b2240b824ab39edd83275e18783ae7067c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 14:12:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 438/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 16 ++++++++-------- 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index 5f14b8bc83..1d1cdba2c3 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -188,21 +188,21 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 22 gl3q figs-idiom τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον 1 those who call on the Lord The expression **calling on the Lord** is an idiom that means to trust and worship the Lord. Alternate translation: “those who worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 2 22 p068 figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a clean heart Paul uses a physical part of the body, the **heart**, to represent the intentions and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 22 b2ti figs-metaphor ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a clean heart Paul uses the word **clean** to describe the intentions or thoughts of a person as though they were an object that could be made clean. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 23 tmf7 figs-metonymy τὰς…μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις παραιτοῦ 1 avoid foolish and ignorant questions Paul refers to certain kinds of discussions by association with the kind of questions that people might ask that would lead to these discussions or by association with the kind of people that would ask these questions. Alternate translation: “do not become involved in foolish and ignorant discussions” or “do not allow people to involve you in discussions that they start because they are foolish and ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 2 23 tmf7 figs-metonymy τὰς…μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις παραιτοῦ 1 avoid foolish and ignorant questions Paul refers to certain kinds of discussions by association with the kind of **questions** that people might ask that would lead to these discussions or by association with the kind of people that would ask these questions. Alternate translation: “do not become involved in foolish and ignorant discussions” or “do not allow people to involve you in discussions that they start because they are foolish and ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 2 23 p069 figs-doublet μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις 1 foolish and ignorant questions Paul may be using the words **foolish** and **ignorant** together to emphasize a single idea. Alternate translation: “very stupid questions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2TI 2 23 kh6p figs-metaphor γεννῶσι μάχας 1 they give birth to battles Paul speaks of the **questions** as if they were women giving birth to children (the **battles**). Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 23 p070 figs-metaphor μάχας 1 battles Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 24 p071 figs-metaphor δοῦλον…Κυρίου 1 the slave of the Lord Paul is using the expression **slave of the Lord** to refer to leaders in the church, including Timothy, who do what God tells them to do. This includes teaching the believers and interacting with the quarrelsome teachers who challenge their authority and the truth. Alternate translation: “a leader in the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 23 p070 figs-metaphor μάχας 1 battles Paul uses the term **battles** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 24 p071 figs-metaphor δοῦλον…Κυρίου 1 the slave of the Lord Paul is using the expression **slave of {the} Lord** to refer to leaders in the church, including Timothy, who do what God tells them to do. This includes teaching the believers and interacting with the quarrelsome teachers who challenge their authority and the truth. Alternate translation: “a leader in the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 24 p072 figs-metaphor οὐ δεῖ μάχεσθαι 1 must not battle Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “must not argue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 25 un9l figs-abstractnouns ἐν πραΰτητι 1 in meekness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **meekness** in this expression with an adverb. Alternate translation: “meekly” or “gently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2TI 2 25 u6rp παιδεύοντα 1 educating Paul presents this as the godly response to quarrels. This term can mean “teach” or “correct.” Alternate translation: “teaching” or “correcting” +2TI 2 25 u6rp παιδεύοντα 1 educating Paul presents **educating** as the godly response to quarrels. This term can mean “teach” or “correct.” Alternate translation: “teaching” or “correcting” 2TI 2 25 jt1r figs-metaphor μήποτε δώῃ αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς μετάνοιαν 1 God may perhaps give them repentance Paul speaks of **repentance** as if it were an object that God could give people. Alternate translation: “God may cause them to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 25 u8dy εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν ἀληθείας 1 for the knowledge of the truth Paul speaks of the result of **repentance** as knowing the truth. Alternate translation: “so that they will know the truth” +2TI 2 25 u8dy εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν ἀληθείας 1 for the knowledge of the truth Paul speaks of the result of **repentance** as knowing the **truth**. Alternate translation: “so that they will know the truth” 2TI 2 26 p073 figs-ellipsis ἀνανήψωσιν ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 1 they may become sober again from the trap of the devil As Paul moves from one metaphor into another, he leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “they may become sober again and escape from the trap of the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2TI 2 26 ef3q figs-metaphor ἀνανήψωσιν 1 they may become sober again Paul speaks of sinners learning to think correctly about God as if they were drunk people becoming sober again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 2 26 mql8 figs-metaphor ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 1 from the trap of the devil Paul refers to the deception of the devil as a physical trap that sinners are captured in. Alternate translation: “and escape from the devil’s deception” or “and reject the devil’s deception” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 26 ef3q figs-metaphor ἀνανήψωσιν 1 they may become sober again Paul speaks of sinners learning to think correctly about God as if they were drunk people becoming **sober again**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 26 mql8 figs-metaphor ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 1 from the trap of the devil Paul refers to the deception of **the devil** as a physical trap that sinners are captured in. Alternate translation: “and escape from the devil’s deception” or “and reject the devil’s deception” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 26 p074 figs-activepassive ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 having been captured by him for his will If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “after the devil has captured them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 2 26 dj4j figs-metaphor ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 having been captured by him for his will Paul speaks of the devil’s deception as if the devil had physically captured them and made them do what he wanted. Alternate translation: “after the devil has deceived them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 2 26 dj4j figs-metaphor ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 having been captured by him for his will Paul speaks of the devil’s deception as if the devil had physically **captured** them and made them do what he wanted. Alternate translation: “after the devil has deceived them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 intro k2cr 0 # 2 Timothy 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

Many scholars understand the **last days** to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return, which includes Paul’s time. If so, then what Paul teaches in this chapter about being persecuted applies to all believers. But some scholars understand the **last days** to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. If that is the meaning, then Paul is prophesying in verses 1–9 and 13 about those days. If possible, translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]]) 2TI 3 1 g65r figs-idiom ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 in the last days Paul is using the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the period of time before the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 3 1 n7gs figs-explicit ἐνστήσονται καιροὶ χαλεποί 1 there will be difficult times The implication from what Paul goes on to say about people becoming ungodly and violent is that it will be difficult for believers in this time period. Alternate translation: “believers will face difficult situations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From b8f1ffe2369bec9024f17a7ba28f6b6ffaf1440c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 14:46:32 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 439/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index 1d1cdba2c3..994388ff3c 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 3 4 d6ng figs-metaphor τετυφωμένοι 1 puffed up The expression **puffed up** is a metaphor for being proud and considering oneself better than others. Alternate translation: “haughty” or “conceited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 4 p076 figs-activepassive τετυφωμένοι 1 puffed up If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “haughty” or “conceited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 3 5 k5dc figs-idiom ἔχοντες μόρφωσιν εὐσεβείας 1 having a form of godliness The expression **a form of** indicates that their **godliness** is not genuine or true. Alternate translation: “appearing to have godliness” or “appearing to honor God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2TI 3 5 p077 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Paul uses this word to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +2TI 3 5 p077 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Paul uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 2TI 3 5 p078 figs-nominaladj τούτους ἀποτρέπου 1 turn away from these The term **these** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to the people who show the ungodly qualities that Paul lists in the previous verses. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can add the word “people” in your translation. Alternate translation: “avoid these people” or “avoid such people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 2TI 3 5 xm1c figs-metaphor τούτους ἀποτρέπου 1 turn away from these The expression **turn away** is a metaphor for avoiding someone. Alternate translation: “avoid these people” or “avoid such people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 6 gu4b figs-metaphor αἰχμαλωτίζοντες 1 captivating Here Paul uses the term **captivating** to mean greatly influencing someone by the use of deception. Alternate translation: “manipulating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 3 6 izz9 figs-personification ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 led away by various desires Paul speaks about these **various desires** as if they could physically lead a person away. He means that the women decide to do evil things in order to satisfy their desires. Alternate translation: “they decide to sin in various ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2TI 3 7 p082 figs-metaphor μηδέποτε εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν ἀληθείας ἐλθεῖν δυνάμενα 1 never able to come to the knowledge of the truth Paul speaks of the **knowledge of the truth** as if it were a destination at which people could arrive. Alternate translation: “never able to understand the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 8 p083 ὃν τρόπον δὲ 1 And what way Alternate translation: “Just as” -2TI 3 8 b8el translate-names Ἰάννης καὶ Ἰαμβρῆς 1 Jannes and Jambres These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 3 8 b8el translate-names Ἰάννης καὶ Ἰαμβρῆς 1 Jannes and Jambres **Jannes** and **Jambres** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 3 8 p084 figs-explicit Ἰάννης καὶ Ἰαμβρῆς 1 Jannes and Jambres Paul assumes that Timothy will know that he is referring here to the magicians in Pharaoh’s court who tried to duplicate the miracles that Moses was doing. The Bible does not record their names, but according to Jewish tradition their names were Jannes and Jambres. These men wanted to show that Pharaoh did not have to listen to Moses or obey Yahweh. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify them more explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jannes and Jambres, Pharaoh’s magicians,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 3 8 p085 figs-nominaladj οὗτοι 1 these As in [3:5](../03/05.md), the term **these** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to the people who show the ungodly qualities that Paul has described. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can add the word “people” in your translation. Alternate translation: “these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 2TI 3 8 p086 figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 1 the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) From aae03c903da43fc4a75dc67bbb5d9fb8ed7e05aa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 14:48:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 440/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index 994388ff3c..e6d80dd7de 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 3 8 p087 figs-activepassive ἄνθρωποι κατεφθαρμένοι τὸν νοῦν 1 men whose mind is corrupted If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “men who cannot think rightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 3 8 pfh1 ἀδόκιμοι περὶ τὴν πίστιν 1 unapproved regarding the faith Paul uses the adjective **unapproved** to convey the idea that these men have been tested regarding how well they trust in Christ and obey him, and they have failed the test because their faith is not real. Alternate translation: “without sincere faith” or “whose faith is not genuine” 2TI 3 8 sppy figs-explicit ἀδόκιμοι περὶ τὴν πίστιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could start a new sentence here and say who does not approve of these men. Alternate translation: “God does approve of these men because they do not have a genuine faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 3 9 x9kx figs-explicit ἀλλ’ 1 But This word makes a contrast between this verse and the previous idea from [3:06](../03/06.md) that these men were able to sneak into homes and persuade people to believe wrong things. If you need to make this contrast clear, you could remind your readers of the previous idea here. Alternate translation: “But even though they have persuaded some people to believe wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2TI 3 9 x9kx figs-explicit ἀλλ’ 1 But The word **But** indicates a contrast between this verse and the previous idea from [3:06](../03/06.md) that these men were able to sneak into homes and persuade people to believe wrong things. If you need to make this contrast clear, you could remind your readers of the previous idea here. Alternate translation: “But even though they have persuaded some people to believe wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 3 9 c6xx figs-metaphor οὐ προκόψουσιν ἐπὶ πλεῖον 1 they will not advance unto more Paul uses an expression about physical movement to mean that the false teachers will not continue to have much success among the believers. Alternate translation: “they will not be able to continue teaching falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 9 mv4j figs-hyperbole ἡ…ἄνοια αὐτῶν ἔκδηλος ἔσται πᾶσιν 1 their foolishness will be obvious to all The word **all** is a generalization. Paul has just said that these men will have a little success in deceiving some people. But ultimately their foolishness will become widely apparent, as happened to Jannes and Jambres, who were publicly discredited when they were not able to equal the powerful miracles of Moses. Alternate translation: “their foolishness will become widely apparent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 2TI 3 9 z4fu figs-nominaladj ἐκείνων 1 of those The term **those** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to Jannes and Jambres. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can supply the names of the two men. Alternate translation: “of Jannes and Jambres” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 3 10 p091 figs-abstractnouns τῇ μακροθυμίᾳ 1 patience If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **patience** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I am patient with others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 3 10 p090 figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 love If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **love** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I love others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 3 10 l4pp figs-abstractnouns τῇ ὑπομονῇ 1 longsuffering If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **endurance** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I endure when I suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2TI 3 11 p092 translate-names ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ, ἐν Ἰκονίῳ, ἐν Λύστροις 1 in Antioch, in Iconium, in Lystra These are the names of three cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 3 11 p092 translate-names ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ, ἐν Ἰκονίῳ, ἐν Λύστροις 1 in Antioch, in Iconium, in Lystra **Antioch**, **Iconium**, and **Lystra** are the names of three cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 3 11 p093 οἵους διωγμοὺς ὑπήνεγκα 1 what kind of persecutions I endured Paul is reminding Timothy that he knows of the various ways in which Paul suffered and how he endured until God rescued him. Alternate translation: “how I endured various persecutions” 2TI 3 11 r9vk figs-metaphor ἐκ πάντων, με ἐρρύσατο ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord rescued me from them all Paul speaks as if God had physically removed him from a situation of danger. Alternate translation: “the Lord preserved me through them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 12 ke7f ζῆν εὐσεβῶς 1 to live piously The term **piously** means in an obedient way that honors God. Alternate translation: “to live in a godly way” From defaf8847c542af813d340479ed7eb105d84c445 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 14:50:50 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 441/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index e6d80dd7de..408997a522 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -258,9 +258,9 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 3 13 p095 figs-idiom ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον 1 unto the worse This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “worse and worse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 3 13 eyx5 figs-metaphor πλανῶντες καὶ πλανώμενοι 1 leading astray and being led astray The expression **leading astray** uses the image of physically taking a person to a place that he didn’t think he was going to. This is a figurative reference to persuading someone to believe something that is not true. Alternate translation: “teaching lies and believing lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 13 p096 figs-activepassive πλανῶντες καὶ πλανώμενοι 1 leading astray and being led astray If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “teaching lies and believing lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 3 14 ytg9 figs-metaphor μένε ἐν οἷς ἔμαθες 1 remain in the things you have learned Paul speaks of biblical instruction as if it were a place that Timothy could stay in. Alternate translation: “continue doing what you have learned” or “continue believing what you have learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 3 14 ytg9 figs-metaphor μένε ἐν οἷς ἔμαθες 1 remain in the things you have learned Paul speaks of biblical instruction as if it were a place in which Timothy could stay. Alternate translation: “continue doing what you have learned” or “continue believing what you have learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 14 p097 figs-activepassive ἐπιστώθης 1 become convinced of If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “are confident about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 3 15 w9l5 figs-personification τὰ δυνάμενά σε σοφίσαι 1 which are able to make you wise Paul speaks of the Scriptures as if they were a teacher who could instruct people and help them become wise. It may be convenient in your translation to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “By studying them you can become wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +2TI 3 15 w9l5 figs-personification τὰ δυνάμενά σε σοφίσαι 1 which are able to make you wise Paul speaks of the Scriptures as if they were a teacher who could instruct people and help them become **wise**. It may be convenient in your translation to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “By studying them you can become wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 2TI 3 15 p098 figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν διὰ πίστεως τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 for salvation through the faith that is in Christ Jesus If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “so that you will know enough to trust Christ Jesus to save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2TI 3 16 s274 figs-metaphor πᾶσα Γραφὴ θεόπνευστος καὶ 1 All Scripture is God-breathed The term **God-breathed** uses the image of breathing to indicate that the Scriptures come directly from God through his Spirit. Characteristically in the Bible, the breath of God represents the Spirit of God. Alternate translation: “God produced all Scripture as his Spirit directed people what to write, and it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 3 16 hvr1 πᾶσα Γραφὴ θεόπνευστος 1 All Scripture is God-breathed By **All Scripture**, Paul is referring to every part of Scripture, which, at that time, was what we know as the Old Testament. If it is confusing to refer to all of the books of the Old Testament with the singular word **Scripture**, you could change it to a plural word as in the UST and make the verbs plural. Alternate translation: “All of the Holy Writings are God-breathed” From 8f0af8ee849b1c5265b986c78c17db1ddc75f3fb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 15:12:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 442/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 8 ++++---- 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index 408997a522..49b100e8e5 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -274,12 +274,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 4 intro k2xa 0 # 2 Timothy 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Paul gives a solemn charge to Timothy (4:1–8)
2. Paul tells Timothy how he is doing (4:9–18)
3. Paul sends personal greetings (4:19–22)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “I adjure you”

With these words Paul challenges Timothy in the most serious way possible to do what he is telling him to do. It is a way of commanding Timothy, not by Paul’s own authority, but by the authority that he then refers to, that of God and Jesus Christ. In other words, Paul is saying that God and Jesus Christ are commanding Timothy through Paul.

### Crown

Scripture uses the image of a crown to represent different things. In this chapter, Paul describes Christ as awarding a crown to believers as a metaphor for the reward that Christ will give them for having lived rightly on this earth. 2TI 4 1 eh3x διαμαρτύρομαι 1 I adjure you The word translated **adjure** is used to place someone under a serious and binding obligation. Think about the words that you use to do this in your language. This could refer to: (1) placing someone under an oath to do something. Alternate translation: “I place you under an oath” or “I hereby obligate you” (2) solemnly commanding someone with great authority. Alternate translation: “I solemnly urge you” 2TI 4 1 cb15 figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 before God and Christ Jesus Here the word **before** means “in front of,” that is, “in the presence of.” The implication is that God and Christ Jesus will witness and approve this command or oath. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God and Christ Jesus” or “with God and Christ Jesus as the witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 4 1 u32g figs-merism ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 the living and the dead Paul refers to **the living** and **the dead** together to mean all people, whether they are alive at the time of judgment or have died. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +2TI 4 1 u32g figs-merism ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 the living and the dead Paul refers to **{the} living** and **{the} dead** together to mean all people, whether they are alive at the time of judgment or have died. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 2TI 4 1 p100 figs-nominaladj ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 the living and the dead The terms **living** and **dead** are adjectives that Paul is using as nouns to refer to groups of people. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can translate these terms with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -2TI 4 1 lwt2 figs-metonymy καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 and by his appearing and his kingdom Paul refers to Christ’s return by association to the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns, and he refers to Christ’s rule as king by association to the kingdom that he will rule. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “and on Christ’s return and on his rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2TI 4 1 lwt2 figs-metonymy καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 and by his appearing and his kingdom Paul refers to Christ’s return by association to the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns, and he refers to Christ’s rule as king by association to the **kingdom** that he will rule. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “and on Christ’s return and on his rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 4 1 anqh καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 and by his appearing and his kingdom This can be understood in two different ways, depending on if Paul is placing Timothy under an oath or giving Timothy a command. (1) If Paul is placing Timothy under an oath, then he is saying that these are the things that Timothy would be denying if he fails to fulfill the oath. Alternate translation: “with an oath as strong as your desire for Christ’s return and for his rule as king” (2) If Paul is introducing a command in this verse, then Paul is appealing to these things to strengthen his command. Alternate translation: “and as surely as Christ will return and rule as king” 2TI 4 2 j2z7 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Paul is using the term **word** to refer to the whole message about Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the Gospel message” or “the Good News” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2TI 4 2 zzh4 figs-merism εὐκαίρως, ἀκαίρως 1 opportunely, inopportunely Paul means that Timothy should be ready to preach about Jesus when it seems like a good time to do so and also when it does not seem like a good time. He is using the two types of occasions together to indicate all occasions. Alternate translation: “when it is convenient and when it is not convenient” or “at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +2TI 4 2 zzh4 figs-merism εὐκαίρως, ἀκαίρως 1 opportunely, inopportunely Paul uses the opposite words **opportunely** and**inopportunely** to say that Timothy should be ready to preach about Jesus when it seems like a good time to do so and also when it does not seem like a good time. He is using the two types of occasions together to indicate all occasions. Alternate translation: “when it is convenient and when it is not convenient” or “at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) 2TI 4 2 g7ax figs-explicit ἔλεγξον 1 reprove The command to **reprove** implies that the action is directed toward people who have done something wrong and are in need of correction. Alternate translation: “correct those who have sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 4 2 p101 ἐπιτίμησον 1 rebuke The word **rebuke** involves telling someone that they have done something wrong and warning them not to do it again. Alternate translation: “tell them not to sin” 2TI 4 2 p102 figs-hendiadys ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 with all patience and teaching Here, **patience and teaching** is a hendiadys, with **patience** modifying **teaching**. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) @@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 4 3 p104 figs-metonymy κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν 1 their ear itching Paul uses the **ear** to mean hearing. Alternate translation: “because they want to hear it so badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 4 4 rh2i figs-metaphor ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν 1 will both turn their ear away from the truth Paul speaks about people no longer paying attention as if they were physically turning their ears away so that they could not hear. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 4 p105 figs-metonymy ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν 1 will both turn their ear away from the truth Paul uses the **ear** to mean listening. Listening, in turn, means paying attention. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2TI 4 4 xrv7 figs-metaphor ἐπὶ…τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 be turned aside to myths Paul speaks about people starting to pay attention to myths as if someone were getting them to wander off in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 4 4 xrv7 figs-metaphor ἐπὶ…τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 be turned aside to myths Paul speaks about people starting to pay attention to **myths** as if someone were getting them to wander off in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 4 p106 figs-activepassive ἐπὶ…τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 be turned aside to myths If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 4 5 ehz7 figs-metaphor νῆφε 1 be sober Paul wants his readers to think correctly about everything, and so he speaks as if he wanted them to be sober rather than drunk. Alternate translation: “think clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 5 tv3k εὐαγγελιστοῦ 1 of an evangelist Alternate translation: “of a person who proclaims the good news about Jesus” From e348d7c9818eb6b5681ffeab58aa2b8f49746cbc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 15:16:09 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 443/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 20 ++++++++++---------- 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index 49b100e8e5..4a89d67d9a 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -296,31 +296,31 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 4 4 p105 figs-metonymy ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν 1 will both turn their ear away from the truth Paul uses the **ear** to mean listening. Listening, in turn, means paying attention. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 4 4 xrv7 figs-metaphor ἐπὶ…τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 be turned aside to myths Paul speaks about people starting to pay attention to **myths** as if someone were getting them to wander off in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 4 p106 figs-activepassive ἐπὶ…τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 be turned aside to myths If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 4 5 ehz7 figs-metaphor νῆφε 1 be sober Paul wants his readers to think correctly about everything, and so he speaks as if he wanted them to be sober rather than drunk. Alternate translation: “think clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 4 5 ehz7 figs-metaphor νῆφε 1 be sober Paul wants his readers to think correctly about everything, and so he speaks as if he wanted them to **be sober** rather than drunk. Alternate translation: “think clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 5 tv3k εὐαγγελιστοῦ 1 of an evangelist Alternate translation: “of a person who proclaims the good news about Jesus” 2TI 4 6 p107 ἐγὼ…ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 I am already being poured out While Paul speaks of his death as **already** happening, he means that it is an event that will happen soon. Alternate translation: “I will soon be poured out” -2TI 4 6 sh23 figs-metaphor ἐγὼ…ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 I am already being poured out Paul speaks of himself as if he were wine in a cup that was being poured out as a sacrifice to God. Alternate translation: “the sacrifice of my life to God will soon be complete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 4 6 sh23 figs-metaphor ἐγὼ…ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 I am already being poured out Paul speaks of himself as if he were wine in a cup that was **being poured out** as a sacrifice to God. Alternate translation: “the sacrifice of my life to God will soon be complete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 6 p108 figs-activepassive ἐγὼ…ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 I am already being poured out If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “My life will soon end as a sacrifice to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 4 6 fb7l figs-euphemism ὁ καιρὸς τῆς ἀναλύσεώς μου ἐφέστηκεν 1 the time of my departure is here Paul refers to his death as a **departure**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. Alternate translation: “soon I will die and leave this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 2TI 4 7 d9ts figs-metaphor τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα ἠγώνισμαι 1 I have fought the good fight Paul speaks of himself as if he has been competing in an athletic contest. Here, **good** could mean: (1) the kind of effort Paul has made. Alternate translation: “I have done my best” (2) Paul has pursued a worthwhile endeavor. Alternate translation: “I have worked hard for what really matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 4 7 kq83 figs-metaphor τὸν δρόμον τετέλεκα 1 I have finished the race Paul speaks of his life of service to God as if he had been running a race on foot. Alternate translation: “I have completed what I needed to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 4 7 kq83 figs-metaphor τὸν δρόμον τετέλεκα 1 I have finished the race Paul speaks of his life of service to God as if he had been running a **race** on foot. Alternate translation: “I have completed what I needed to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 7 vk2p figs-metaphor τὴν πίστιν τετήρηκα 1 I have kept the faith Paul speaks of **the faith**, by which he means his trust in Christ and his obedience to God, as if they were valuable objects that he has kept safe in his possession. This could mean: (1) Paul was faithful to do what God told him to do. Alternate translation: “I have remained faithful in doing my ministry” (2) Paul was faithful to teach the truth. Alternate translation: “I have preserved the teachings from any error” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 8 ujg5 figs-activepassive ἀπόκειταί μοι ὁ τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 the crown of righteousness has been reserved for me If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God has reserved the crown of righteousness for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 4 8 hg8i figs-metaphor τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 the crown of righteousness Here, the **crown** could: (1) represent the reward that God gives to people who have lived the right way. Alternate translation: “the reward for the righteous” (2) represent righteousness itself. Just as the judge of a race gives a crown to the winner, when Paul finishes his life, God will declare that Paul is righteous. Alternate translation: “the reward that is righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 8 dwn6 translate-unknown στέφανος 1 crown See how you translated **crown** in [2:5](../02/05.md). The **crown** that Paul is using as an illustration of the future award from God was a wreath made of laurel tree leaves that was given to winners of athletic contests. You can use a word in your language that would refer to a prize for winning a contest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 2TI 4 8 n3k8 figs-explicit ἐν, ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on that day As in [1:12](../01/12.md), this refers to the **day** when Jesus returns to judge people. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 4 8 uh88 τοῖς ἠγαπηκόσι τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 those who have loved his appearing Alternate translation: “those who are looking forward to his return” +2TI 4 8 uh88 πᾶσιν τοῖς ἠγαπηκόσι τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 those who have loved his appearing Alternate translation: “to all those who are looking forward to his return” 2TI 4 8 p109 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 his appearing See how you translated **his appearing** in [4:1](../04/01.md). Paul is referring to Christ’s return by association with the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns. Alternate translation: “his return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2TI 4 9 t8b7 σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν…ταχέως 1 come … quickly Alternate translation: “come … as soon as possible” -2TI 4 10 e4xx translate-names Δημᾶς…Κρήσκης…Τίτος 1 Demas … Crescens … Titus These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 4 9 t8b7 σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν…ταχέως 1 come … quickly Alternate translation: “Come … as soon as possible” +2TI 4 10 e4xx translate-names Δημᾶς…Κρήσκης…Τίτος 1 Demas … Crescens … Titus **Demas**, **Crescens**, and **Titus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 10 ji2l figs-metonymy τὸν νῦν αἰῶνα 1 the present age The expression **the present age** refers to worldly things as opposed to the things of God. Paul refers to these worldly things by association with the present time when people generally desire them, as opposed to the future time when the things of God will be established throughout the earth. Alternate translation: “the temporary comforts of this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2TI 4 10 u2qb figs-ellipsis Κρήσκης εἰς Γαλατίαν, Τίτος εἰς Δαλματίαν 1 Crescens to Galatia, Titus to Dalmatia Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. He means that like Demas, Crescens and Titus have left him. However, he is probably not saying that they did this because they also “loved this present age” like Demas. It is more likely that they are traveling to help the churches. Alternate translation: “Crescens has left me and gone to Galatia, and Titus has left me and gone to Dalmatia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +2TI 4 10 u2qb figs-ellipsis Κρήσκης εἰς Γαλατίαν, Τίτος εἰς Δαλματίαν 1 Crescens to Galatia, Titus to Dalmatia Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. He means that like Demas, **Crescens** and **Titus** have left him. However, he is probably not saying that they did this because they also “loved this present age” like Demas. It is more likely that they are traveling to help the churches. Alternate translation: “Crescens has left me and gone to Galatia, and Titus has left me and gone to Dalmatia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) 2TI 4 10 gs61 translate-names Γαλατίαν…Δαλματίαν 1 Galatia … Dalmatia This are the names of parts of the Roman empire. **Galatia** is an official Roman province and **Dalmatia** is an area in the southern part of the province of Illyricum. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 4 11 p110 translate-names Λουκᾶς…Μᾶρκον 1 Luke … Mark These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 4 11 p110 translate-names Λουκᾶς…Μᾶρκον 1 Luke … Mark **Luke** and **Mark** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 11 w21u μοι εὔχρηστος εἰς διακονίαν 1 he is useful to me for service This could mean: (1) Mark is **useful** in helping Paul to take care of his personal needs. Alternate translation: “he can help take care of my needs” (2) Mark is **useful** in helping Paul minister to others, especially by preaching and teaching. Alternate translation: “he is helpful to me in my ministry” -2TI 4 12 p111 translate-names Τυχικὸν 1 Tychicus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 4 12 p111 translate-names Τυχικὸν 1 Tychicus **Tychicus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 12 y60r ἀπέστειλα 1 I sent Timothy is at Ephesus when he receives this letter. It may be that Tychicus is the one who carried this letter to Timothy at Ephesus. If so, then Paul is writing from Timothy’s perspective, who would view Paul’s sending of Tychicus as a past event. If this is confusing in your language and you want to include this possibility, you may need to change the tense of the verb to future. Alternate translation: “soon I will be sending” -2TI 4 12 p112 translate-names Ἔφεσον 1 Ephesus This is the name of a city. This is the city where Timothy is as he receives this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 4 12 p112 translate-names Ἔφεσον 1 Ephesus **Ephesus** is the name of a city. This is the city where Timothy is as he receives this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 13 d5rw translate-unknown φελόνην 1 cloak The term **cloak** refers to a heavy garment worn over clothes. Alternate translation: “coat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 2TI 4 13 x1jb translate-names Τρῳάδι 1 This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 13 v9b6 translate-names Κάρπῳ 1 Carpus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) From 0a9b1decd8d72a9ea1768a1588503e920945e79f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 15:19:15 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 444/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 20 ++++++++++---------- 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index 4a89d67d9a..96fcce95aa 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -322,30 +322,30 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 4 12 y60r ἀπέστειλα 1 I sent Timothy is at Ephesus when he receives this letter. It may be that Tychicus is the one who carried this letter to Timothy at Ephesus. If so, then Paul is writing from Timothy’s perspective, who would view Paul’s sending of Tychicus as a past event. If this is confusing in your language and you want to include this possibility, you may need to change the tense of the verb to future. Alternate translation: “soon I will be sending” 2TI 4 12 p112 translate-names Ἔφεσον 1 Ephesus **Ephesus** is the name of a city. This is the city where Timothy is as he receives this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 13 d5rw translate-unknown φελόνην 1 cloak The term **cloak** refers to a heavy garment worn over clothes. Alternate translation: “coat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -2TI 4 13 x1jb translate-names Τρῳάδι 1 This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 4 13 v9b6 translate-names Κάρπῳ 1 Carpus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 4 13 x1jb translate-names Τρῳάδι 1 **Troas** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 4 13 v9b6 translate-names Κάρπῳ 1 Carpus **Carpus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 13 k6tj translate-unknown τὰ βιβλία 1 the books The term **books** refers to scrolls. A scroll was a type of book made of a long sheet of papyrus or leather. After writing on a scroll or reading it, people would roll it up using rods on the ends. Alternate translation: “the scrolls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 2TI 4 13 e395 translate-unknown μάλιστα τὰς μεμβράνας 1 especially the parchments The term **parchments** may refer to a specific type of scroll. Alternate translation: “especially those made from animal skins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) 2TI 4 14 un4v translate-unknown Ἀλέξανδρος ὁ χαλκεὺς 1 Alexander the coppersmith The term **coppersmith** refers to a person who worked with things made of copper and other metals. Alternate translation: “Alexander, who works with metal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -2TI 4 14 kv94 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρος 1 Alexander This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 4 14 kv94 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρος 1 Alexander **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 14 wbx4 figs-metaphor ἀποδώσει αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ 1 The Lord will repay him according to his deeds Paul speaks of punishment as if it were repayment. Alternate translation: “the Lord will give him the right punishment for what he has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 15 i4aj figs-metonymy ἀντέστη τοῖς ἡμετέροις λόγοις 1 he … opposed our words The term **words** refers to the message that Paul and Timothy and their co-workers teach. Alternate translation: “he … opposed the message that we teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 4 16 v847 ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ μου ἀπολογίᾳ 1 At my first defense Paul is referring to the opening session of his trial. By writing **first**, he is likely indicating that he will have to appear in court again. Alternate translation: “At the opening session of my trial” or “When I first appeared in court and explained my actions” 2TI 4 16 f2c3 οὐδείς μοι παρεγένετο 1 no one appeared with me Paul explains to Timothy that he had to go to court alone, without any supporters. Alternate translation: “no one testified on my behalf” 2TI 4 16 rm2t figs-activepassive μὴ αὐτοῖς λογισθείη 1 May it not be counted against them If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “May God not hold it against them” or “I pray that God does not punish those believers for deserting me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 4 17 t1fw figs-metaphor ὁ…Κύριός μοι παρέστη 1 the Lord stood with me Paul is speaking as if the Lord had physically stood with him. Alternate translation: “the Lord helped me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 4 17 t1fw figs-metaphor ὁ…Κύριός μοι παρέστη 1 the Lord stood with me Paul is speaking as if **the Lord** had physically **stood** with him. Alternate translation: “the Lord helped me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 17 y69m figs-activepassive ἵνα δι’ ἐμοῦ τὸ κήρυγμα πληροφορηθῇ 1 so that through me, the proclamation might be fully carried out If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. This could mean: (1) at his trial, Paul was able to explain the entire message God had given him to proclaim. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to proclaim all of the Lord’s message” (2) Paul was able to continue proclaiming God’s message right through to this time when he expected to lose his life. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to continue proclaiming the Lord’s message right to the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 4 17 p113 figs-hyperbole καὶ ἀκούσωσιν πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 and all the Gentiles might hear Here, **all** could be: (1) a figurative generalization. Alternate translation: “so that as many Gentiles as possible could hear it” (2) a reference to all the Gentiles in the court. Alternate translation: “so that all the Gentiles who were there might hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -2TI 4 17 gsr8 figs-metaphor ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 I was rescued out of the mouth of the lion Paul speaks as if he had been in danger of being killed by a lion at his court appearance. He could mean the physical danger of being sentenced to execution, or the spiritual danger of being tempted not to speak boldly for Jesus, or both. It would probably be best to leave both possibilities open in your translation. Alternate translation: “I was rescued from great danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2TI 4 17 gsr8 figs-metaphor ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 I was rescued out of the mouth of the lion Paul speaks as if he had been in danger of being killed by a **lion** at his court appearance. He could mean the physical danger of being sentenced to execution, or the spiritual danger of being tempted not to speak boldly for Jesus, or both. It would probably be best to leave both possibilities open in your translation. Alternate translation: “I was rescued from great danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 4 17 p114 figs-activepassive ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 I was rescued out of the mouth of the lion If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God rescued me from great danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 4 18 p115 figs-idiom εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων 1 to the ages of the ages This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “forever and ever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2TI 4 19 p116 translate-names Πρίσκαν 1 Priscilla This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 4 19 p117 translate-names Ἀκύλαν 1 Aquila This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 4 19 p116 translate-names Πρίσκαν 1 Priscilla **Priscilla** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 4 19 p117 translate-names Ἀκύλαν 1 Aquila **Aquila** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 19 n4zc figs-metonymy τὸν Ὀνησιφόρου οἶκον 1 the household of Onesiphorus See how you translated this phrase in [1:16](../01/16.md). The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TI 4 19 mef8 translate-names Ὀνησιφόρου 1 of Onesiphorus **Onesiphorus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 4 20 p118 translate-names Κορίνθῳ 1 Corinth This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 4 20 lie9 translate-names Ἔραστος…Τρόφιμον 1 Erastus … Trophimus These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 4 20 wp9h translate-names Μιλήτῳ 1 Miletus This is the name of a city to the south of Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 4 20 p118 translate-names Κορίνθῳ 1 Corinth **Corinth** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 4 20 lie9 translate-names Ἔραστος…Τρόφιμον 1 Erastus … Trophimus **Erastus** and **Trophimus** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 4 20 wp9h translate-names Μιλήτῳ 1 Miletus **Miletus** is the name of a city to the south of Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 21 cvc7 σπούδασον…ἐλθεῖν 1 Hasten to come Alternate translation: “Do your best to come” or “Try as hard as you can to come” 2TI 4 21 eh95 figs-explicit πρὸ χειμῶνος 1 before winter The implication is that Timothy should try to come to Paul before the cold weather arrives and makes travel difficult or even impossible. If winter is the warm season in your area and summer is the cold season, or if your area does not have a cold season but a rainy season, you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “before the cold weather makes travel difficult” or “before the weather changes and makes travel difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 4 21 z1j9 figs-ellipsis ἀσπάζεταί σε Εὔβουλος, καὶ Πούδης, καὶ Λίνος, καὶ Κλαυδία, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 Eubulus greets you, and Pudens, and Linus, and Claudia, and the brothers Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. To make sure that the meaning is clear, you could supply these words. The people listed after Eubulus are also greeting Timothy. Eubulus is not greeting them. Alternate translation: “Eubulus greets you, and so do Pudens, Linus, Claudia, and all the believers here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) From 9c81d6671597fe809a7e47f866575038aca2a2d2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: lrsallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 15:20:40 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 445/446] Edit 'en_tn_56-2TI.tsv' using 'tc-create-app' --- en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index 96fcce95aa..c66168de34 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -347,10 +347,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 4 20 lie9 translate-names Ἔραστος…Τρόφιμον 1 Erastus … Trophimus **Erastus** and **Trophimus** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 20 wp9h translate-names Μιλήτῳ 1 Miletus **Miletus** is the name of a city to the south of Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 21 cvc7 σπούδασον…ἐλθεῖν 1 Hasten to come Alternate translation: “Do your best to come” or “Try as hard as you can to come” -2TI 4 21 eh95 figs-explicit πρὸ χειμῶνος 1 before winter The implication is that Timothy should try to come to Paul before the cold weather arrives and makes travel difficult or even impossible. If winter is the warm season in your area and summer is the cold season, or if your area does not have a cold season but a rainy season, you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “before the cold weather makes travel difficult” or “before the weather changes and makes travel difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2TI 4 21 eh95 figs-explicit πρὸ χειμῶνος 1 before winter The implication is that Timothy should try to come to Paul before the cold weather arrives and makes travel difficult or even impossible. If **winter** is the warm season in your area and summer is the cold season, or if your area does not have a cold season but a rainy season, you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “before the cold weather makes travel difficult” or “before the weather changes and makes travel difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 4 21 z1j9 figs-ellipsis ἀσπάζεταί σε Εὔβουλος, καὶ Πούδης, καὶ Λίνος, καὶ Κλαυδία, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 Eubulus greets you, and Pudens, and Linus, and Claudia, and the brothers Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. To make sure that the meaning is clear, you could supply these words. The people listed after Eubulus are also greeting Timothy. Eubulus is not greeting them. Alternate translation: “Eubulus greets you, and so do Pudens, Linus, Claudia, and all the believers here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2TI 4 21 p7px translate-names Εὔβουλος…Πούδης…Λίνος 1 Eubulus … Pudens … Linus These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -2TI 4 21 er77 translate-names Κλαυδία 1 Claudia This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 4 21 p7px translate-names Εὔβουλος…Πούδης…Λίνος 1 Eubulus … Pudens … Linus **Eubulus**, **Pudens**, and **Linus** are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +2TI 4 21 er77 translate-names Κλαυδία 1 Claudia **Claudia** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 4 21 mk26 figs-gendernotations οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers The word **brothers** means all believers, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all the believers here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2TI 4 22 tx26 figs-you ὁ Κύριος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματός σου 1 The Lord be with your spirit Paul ends his letter with a blessing for Timothy. Here, **you** is singular and refers to Timothy. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord makes your spirit strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 2TI 4 22 p119 figs-synecdoche ὁ Κύριος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματός σου 1 The Lord be with your spirit Paul describes Timothy as a whole person by reference to his **spirit**, perhaps because he is wishing particularly for Timothy to receive spiritual strengthening. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord makes you strong” or “I pray that the Lord will strengthen you spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) From 7d927548bb913185f4907f06b4e7086c2f4fcfe2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Tue, 18 Oct 2022 11:25:38 -0400 Subject: [PATCH 446/446] Remove triple break in 3 John --- en_tn_65-3JN.tsv | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) diff --git a/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv b/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv index eac3007003..6b9a34c74a 100644 --- a/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_65-3JN.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -3JN front intro kwv9 0 # Introduction to 3 John


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 3 John

1. Introduction (1:1)
2. Encouragement and instructions to show hospitality (1:2–8)
3. Diotrephes and Demetrius (1:9–12)
4. Conclusion (1:13–14)

### Who wrote the Book of 3 John?

The letter does not give the name of the author. The author only identified himself as **The elder** (1:1). The letter was probably written by the apostle John near the end of his life.

### What is the Book of 3 John about?

John wrote this letter to a believer named Gaius. He instructed Gaius to be hospitable to fellow believers who were traveling through his area.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “3 John” or “Third John.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Third Letter from John” or “The Third Letter John Wrote”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is hospitality?

Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. In 2 John, John discouraged Christians from showing hospitality to false teachers. In 3 John, John encouraged Christians to show hospitality to faithful teachers.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How does the author use family relationships in his letter?

The author used the terms **brother** and **children** in a way that can be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **brothers** to refer to Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to Christians. Also, John called some believers his **children**. These were believers he taught to obey Christ.

John also used the term **Gentile** in a way that could be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **Gentile** to refer to people who are not Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to those who did not believe in Jesus. +3JN front intro kwv9 0 # Introduction to 3 John

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 3 John

1. Introduction (1:1)
2. Encouragement and instructions to show hospitality (1:2–8)
3. Diotrephes and Demetrius (1:9–12)
4. Conclusion (1:13–14)

### Who wrote the Book of 3 John?

The letter does not give the name of the author. The author only identified himself as **The elder** (1:1). The letter was probably written by the apostle John near the end of his life.

### What is the Book of 3 John about?

John wrote this letter to a believer named Gaius. He instructed Gaius to be hospitable to fellow believers who were traveling through his area.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “3 John” or “Third John.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Third Letter from John” or “The Third Letter John Wrote”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is hospitality?

Hospitality was an important concept in the ancient Near East. It was important to be friendly towards foreigners or outsiders and provide help to them if they needed it. In 2 John, John discouraged Christians from showing hospitality to false teachers. In 3 John, John encouraged Christians to show hospitality to faithful teachers.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How does the author use family relationships in his letter?

The author used the terms **brother** and **children** in a way that can be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **brothers** to refer to Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to Christians. Also, John called some believers his **children**. These were believers he taught to obey Christ.

John also used the term **Gentile** in a way that could be confusing. The scriptures often used the term **Gentile** to refer to people who are not Jews. But in this letter, John used the word to refer to those who did not believe in Jesus. 3JN 1 1 rni7 figs-you 0 General Information: This is a personal letter from John to Gaius. All instances of **you** and **your** refer to Gaius and are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 3JN 1 1 w99t figs-explicit ὁ πρεσβύτερος 1 The elder **The elder** refers to John, the apostle and disciple of Jesus. He refers to himself as the **elder** either because of his old age or because he is a leader in the church. The name of the author can be made explicit: “I, John the elder, am writing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 3JN 1 1 lls6 translate-names Γαΐῳ 1 to … Gaius **Gaius** is a fellow believer to whom John is writing this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])